JP2024088694A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention provides a gaming machine capable of efficiently reading data.
[Solution] The control means controls the game according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of data groups each composed of one or more pieces of data for the control means to perform control are stored in a data group storage means composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing data. First data used to specify a specific address included in the range of addresses in which the plurality of data groups are stored is stored in the first data storage means. Using at least the first data stored in the first data storage means, a data group setting means sets data constituting one of the plurality of data groups stored in the data group storage means so that the data constituting one data group is used for the predetermined control by the control means. This has the effect of enabling the data constituting the data group to be read out efficiently.
[Selected Figure] Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

It is widely known that gaming machines such as pachinko machines have data tables in which data for making various settings related to the game is pre-stored in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the address of the storage means in which the data table corresponding to the setting is stored is specified, the data table is read out, and the data table is used for the setting process.

JP 2003-230714 A

However, in such conventional gaming machines, control processes are frequently executed in various setting processes to read out various data tables, and therefore there is a demand for more efficient reading of data.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can read data more efficiently.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises: a control means for controlling a game in accordance with a predetermined control procedure; a data group storage means which is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing data and which stores a plurality of data groups each composed of one or a plurality of data for the control means to perform control; a first data storage means which stores first data used to identify a specific address included in the range of addresses in which the plurality of data groups are stored; and a data group setting means which uses at least the first data stored in the first data storage means to set data constituting one of the plurality of data groups stored in the data group storage means to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.

The gaming machine of claim 2 is the gaming machine of claim 1, further comprising a second data storage means for storing second data which is data used to identify one of the plurality of data groups, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to set the data constituting one of the data groups to be used for a predetermined control by the control means, using the first data stored in the first data storage means and second data corresponding to the data group according to the type of predetermined control.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second data storage means stores different regulating information regulated for each type of the data group, the second data,
and stores the second data in association with the predetermined control type, and includes a second data specifying means for specifying one of the second data by using the stipulation information indicating the data group corresponding to the predetermined control type.

The gaming machine according to claim 4, in the gaming machine according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the first data is:
the second data is composed of address data indicating a specific address of the data group storage means, and the second data is composed of data indicating a difference between the specific address and a first address included in a range of addresses in which the data group is stored,
The data group setting means is configured to be able to set, using the first address calculated by adding the second data to the first data, data constituting one of the data groups whose address range includes the first address, to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.

A fifth aspect of the present invention provides a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects, wherein the first data storage means sets an initial value of the data to be stored to the first data.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the gaming machine is composed of a control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, and a plurality of addresses capable of storing data, and the control means is configured to control the game.
or a data group storage means for storing a plurality of data groups each composed of a plurality of data; a first data storage means for storing first data used to identify a specific address included in a range of addresses in which the plurality of data groups are stored; and a data group setting means for using at least the first data stored in the first data storage means to set data constituting one of the plurality of data groups stored in the data group storage means to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.

This has the effect of enabling the data constituting the data group to be read out efficiently.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine of claim 1, a second data storage means is provided which stores second data which is data used to identify one of the plurality of data groups, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to set the data constituting one of the data groups to be used for a predetermined control by the control means using the first data stored in the first data storage means and the second data which corresponds to the data group according to the type of the predetermined control.

This has the effect of reducing the amount of data stored in the second data storage means, as compared with the case where data equivalent to the first data is stored together with the second data in the second data storage means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 2,
The data storage means stores the second data in correspondence with different pieces of specified information that are specified for each type of data group, and includes a second data identification means that identifies one of the second data using the specified information that indicates the data group corresponding to the type of specified control.

In this way, since the second data can be specified using the stipulation information, it is not necessary to prescribe the value of the second data itself in the program, and therefore it is possible to prevent errors in writing the program, which has the effect of preventing malfunctions of the gaming machine, etc.

According to the gaming machine of claim 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 2 or 3, the first data is composed of address data indicating a specific address of the data group storage means, the second data is composed of data indicating the difference between the specific address and a first address included in the address range in which the data group is stored, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to set, using the first address calculated by adding the second data to the first data, the data constituting one of the data groups whose address range includes the first address to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.

As a result, since only data indicating the difference for a specific address needs to be stored in the second data storage means, the amount of data stored in the second data storage means can be reduced compared to the case where the value of the first address itself is stored in the second data storage means.

According to the gaming machine of claim 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of any one of claims 1 to 4, since the first data storage means sets the initial value of the data to be stored to the first data, it is not necessary to separately perform processing to store the first data in the first data storage means, and therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. 1A is a front oblique view of the right variable prize-winning device when the opening and closing door is closed, and FIG. 1B is a front oblique view of the right variable prize-winning device when the opening and closing door is open. Top view of the right variable winning device in the first embodiment. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a waiting state presentation executed in a jackpot waiting state. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table in the first embodiment, (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the miss (normal) variation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the miss (high probability) variation pattern table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a first embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing a performance update process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning-related process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a standby state command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing an opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a number of rounds command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing a rear image change command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing an error command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a second embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 2 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot start process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning-related process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing standby state command processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a small win is obtained by drawing a second special pattern during a special probability state in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during a small win state in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 3 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the small win control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning-related command processing 3 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the standby state presentation while the left operating winning port is in a state where a ball can be scored in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the standby state presentation while the right operating winning port is in a state where a ball can be scored in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot start process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning-related process 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the period length selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an interval setting process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a fifth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. Top view of the right variable winning device in the sixth embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of the display mode when a right-hit expectation suggestion effect is set as the effect during a super reach in the sixth embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of the display mode when a right-hit expectation suggestion effect is set as the effect mode during a super reach in the sixth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the change in the presentation mode over time in the sixth embodiment when a jackpot is won in the drawing of a special pattern and a right-hit expectation suggestion presentation is set, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the change in the presentation mode over time in the sixth embodiment when a miss is made in the drawing of a special pattern and a right-hit expectation suggestion presentation is set. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the performance mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance update process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification start determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 6 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the presentation mode selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh embodiment. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the change over time in the presentation mode when a left-trigger jackpot occurs in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the opening performance of a left-triggered jackpot in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode after the opening performance of a left-triggered jackpot has ended. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the pseudo-normal state presentation processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing standby state command processing 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the special probability state in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a song selection menu screen is displayed during the special probability state in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the initial layout of a song selection menu screen displayed when switching to song selection mode in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when operation of an operation button is detected in the song selection mode in the first control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the item arrangement storage area set in the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the song selection count storage area set in the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device in a first control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of the audio output device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio output device in the first control example. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of an audio file storage area set in a ROM of the audio output device in the first control example. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a music data group in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing 8 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an operation detection process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 8 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the status command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process 8 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in an audio output device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in an audio output device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an audio setting process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in a first control example. A figure showing the correspondence between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the sound mode in the second control example. This figure shows an example of the correspondence between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of music parts when it is determined that the playback order is to be rearranged at rearrangement determination timing 1, which is set for the jackpot in the second control example. This figure shows an example of the correspondence between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of music parts when it is determined that the playback order is to be rearranged at rearrangement determination timing 2, which is set for the jackpot in the second control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the correspondence between the progression of the jackpot state and the progression of music parts when it is determined that the start timing of the ending performance should be delayed in the jackpot in the second control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the rearrangement determination table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the ending performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device in a second control example. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio output device in the second control example. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 11 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the ending performance start determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a music selection period setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing interval command processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the ending command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing music command processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process 9 executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot music-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an audio setting process 9 executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the second control example. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of a music selection menu screen in a third control example. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during the execution of a jackpot in which a pseudo short round presentation is set in the third control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the random music selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an operation detection process 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a music determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo small round lottery process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the round number command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an interval command process 10 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a third control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the pseudo small round lottery table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the priority regulation table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the chorus loop discrimination table set in the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio output device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing operation detection processing 11 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. A flowchart showing the music determination process 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the chorus part loop processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo small round lottery process 11 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. A flowchart showing the round number command processing 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a music selection period setting process 11 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a history area setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the interval command processing 11 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the selected music setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process 11 executed by an MPU in the audio output control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 11 executed by an MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a temporary music selection command process executed by an MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a process during a temporary music selection period executed by an MPU in the audio output control device in the fourth control example. A figure showing an example of the contents of a number of playbacks during performance storage area set in the RAM of a voice lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a history area setting process 12 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 12 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in an eighth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing an example in which a game ball reaches a gate guide valve from above in a closed state in the eighth embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing an example in which the gate guide valve is opened with a game ball retained on the upper surface of the gate guide valve in the eighth embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing an example in which the gate guide valve is opened in the eighth embodiment and the gate guide valve is closed immediately after the retained game ball falls. (a) is a diagram showing the state in which a game ball in the eighth embodiment is rolling on the inner wall of a three-hole cranes, and (b) is a diagram showing the state in which the game ball has entered the MAX operation winning hole and the non-electric device has been opened in conjunction with other operations. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the ending presentation when a jackpot ends with the special MAX operation winning port open in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (standby state presentation) during the jackpot waiting state when a jackpot is won during the MAX zone in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when the time-saving number of times ends during the MAX zone in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device when the MAX zone ends due to a ball entering a special MAX operation winning port in the MAX zone in the eighth embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 12 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process 12 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot start process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing 12 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning slot type command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view of a lottery device according to a ninth embodiment. 13(a) is a diagram showing the case where multiple game balls enter the inside of the lottery device in the ninth embodiment with both the ball discharge door and the ball stopping portion closed, and (b) is a diagram showing the state where the ball discharge door is open with the game balls that have entered the lottery device being retained therein in the ninth embodiment. 13A and 13B are top views of a distribution rotor in a ninth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the operation pattern of each part of the lottery device when a small win is obtained in the lottery for the second special symbol in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of a special small win effect for low expectation in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of a special small win effect for high expectation in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the 9th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the expectation level selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation start process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing the small win start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 9th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 13 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process 13 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the small win control process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 9th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a V-passing detection process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing the expectation level suggestion setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. A flowchart showing the V winning port command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a V-passing detection process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a modified example of the ninth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an enlarged front view of the periphery of the lottery device in the tenth embodiment. 10. (a) is an enlarged front view of the area around the guide flow path when both the upper and lower opening and closing doors are closed in the 10th embodiment, (b) is an enlarged front view of the area around the guide flow path when the upper and lower opening and closing doors are open and closed in the 10th embodiment, and (c) is an enlarged front view of the area around the guide flow path when both the upper and lower opening and closing doors are open in the 10th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a top view of a distribution rotor in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the operation pattern of each part in the lottery device during execution of a small win game in the tenth embodiment. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing the opening patterns set for the small win attacker when a small win is obtained in the drawing of the first special pattern in the tenth embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing the opening patterns set for the small win attacker when a small win is obtained in the lottery for the second special pattern in the tenth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the display mode of the selection effect executed when a small win is obtained in the lottery for the first special pattern in the tenth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing the change over time in the display mode when a V Challenge small jackpot is won in the 10th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing the change over time in the presentation mode when a normal small jackpot is won in the 10th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the small winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the table for special chart 1 small win set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special chart 2 small win table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an enlarged front view of the periphery of a guide flow path of a lottery device in a first modified example of the tenth embodiment. A figure showing the special opening pattern that is set when a special small win of the second special pattern is won in the first modified example of the tenth embodiment. 23A and 23B are top views showing a portion of a guide flow path of a lottery device in a second modified example of the tenth embodiment, the portion being on the right side of a ball discharge door. 17A and 17B are figures showing an example of the display form of the operation support effect in the 11th embodiment. 11. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a character image with a character aspect with low expectation is displayed during execution of an operation support performance in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a character image with a character aspect with high expectation of development is displayed during execution of an operation support performance in the 11th embodiment. A figure showing the performance period when an operation support performance is set for the fluctuation pattern of a super reach in the eleventh embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode when the first action of the mini-character preview performance in the 11th embodiment is executed. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the second action of the mini-character preview performance in the 11th embodiment is executed, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the third action of the mini-character preview performance in the 11th embodiment is executed. A figure showing the change over time in the presentation style of the mini-character preview presentation in the 11th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation time and the action timing of the mini character when a mini character preview performance is set for a long miss fluctuation pattern in the 11th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation time and the action timing of the mini character when a low expectation mini character preview performance is set for a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern in the 11th embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation time and the action timing of the mini character when a low expectation mini character preview performance is set for a win normal reach fluctuation pattern in the 11th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the mini character's action timing when a mini character preview performance with a medium expectation is set for a normal reach failure fluctuation pattern in the 11th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the mini character's action timing when a mini character preview performance with a medium expectation is set for a normal hit reach fluctuation pattern in the 11th embodiment, (c) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the mini character's action timing when a mini character preview performance with a high expectation is set for a normal reach failure fluctuation pattern in the 11th embodiment, and (d) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the mini character's action timing when a mini character preview performance with a high expectation is set for a normal hit reach fluctuation pattern in the 11th embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode when a small win is obtained by drawing a second special pattern during the time-saving state of a normal pattern in the eleventh embodiment. 11(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. 11(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a character form selection table set in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the winning table (before development is completed) of the character form selection table in the 11th embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the winning table (after development is completed) of the character form selection table in the 11th embodiment. 11(a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the table for outliers (before development is complete) in the character form selection table in the 11th embodiment, and FIG. 11(b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the table for outliers (after development is complete) in the character form selection table in the 11th embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a mini-character performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the provisions of the V Challenge small win table of the mini-character performance selection table in the 11th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the normal small win table of the mini-character performance selection table in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the non-small win table of the mini-character performance selection table in the 11th embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the small win performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the table for small wins H14 to J14 in the small win performance selection table in the 11th embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the table for small wins K14 to M14 in the small win performance selection table in the 11th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the small win start processing 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the small win control process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance update process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing the operation support performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing a development determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a character mode setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing a mini character setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. A flowchart showing a limit period setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. A flowchart showing small win type command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing operation content command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 11th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the cheering performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. A flowchart showing an action timing determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 14 executed by an MPU in a display control device according to an eleventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an action command process executed by an MPU in a display control device in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a top view of a guide flow path of a lottery device according to a twelfth embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode during execution of an operation support effect in the 12th embodiment. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode when the volume setting item is selected while the operation support effect is being executed in the 12th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the operation pattern of each part in the lottery device during execution of a small win game in the twelfth embodiment. 12A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the button type selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 12th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the winning (non-operation) table of the button type selection table in the 12th embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the winning (operation) table of the button type selection table in the 12th embodiment. 12A is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the table for misses (non-operation) in the button mode selection table in the 12th embodiment, and FIG. 12B is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the table for misses (operation) in the button mode selection table in the 12th embodiment. A flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processing 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. A flowchart showing various setting button input monitoring processing 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment when the up or down button is pressed. A flowchart showing the processing performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment when the left or right button is pressed. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during light amount setting in the twelfth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. A partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the small prize winning device in the thirteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the ball flow within the small prize winning device in the 13th embodiment. A diagram showing the ball flow into the flow path for the accessory route in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a ball flow into a straight V-shaped flow path in the thirteenth embodiment. 13A is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a rotating body positioned in an operating state in the 13th embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a cross-sectional view showing a schematic configuration of a rotating body positioned in an initial state in the 13th embodiment. 13A is a front view showing a schematic configuration of the gimmick device in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of the gimmick device in the thirteenth embodiment. 13A is a plan view showing a schematic diagram of the ball flow within the reel device in the 13th embodiment when the ball enters the V-shaped hole, and FIG. 13B is a plan view showing a schematic diagram of the ball flow within the reel device in the 13th embodiment when the ball enters the OUT-shaped hole. A partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the gate-type electric accessory in the thirteenth embodiment. This is a timing chart showing the operation of small win opening pattern A in the thirteenth embodiment. This is a timing chart showing the operation of small win opening pattern B in the thirteenth embodiment. A diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing the period from winning the small prize A to playing the small prize in the 13th embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the period from winning the small prize B to playing the small prize in the 13th embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the display screen when a small win is won in the 13th embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the display screen when a small win game starts in the 13th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the display screen when a V is won during a small win game in the 13th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the display screen of the device challenge presentation executed during a small win game in the 13th embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the display screen during the reel challenge performance in the 13th embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the success screen of the reel challenge performance in the 13th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a failure screen of the reel challenge performance in the 13th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a display screen that is displayed when the power is turned on in an error state in the 13th embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 13th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the first winning random number 14 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the first winning type selection 14 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small winning type selection 14 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th embodiment. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the small win scenario table set in the ROM of the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 14 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal variation pattern 14 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving variation pattern 14 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the 13th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of a display comment selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 13th embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 15 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the small win start processing 15 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 15 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the return processing during a small win executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the small win control process 15 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a V-passing detection process 15 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the game status setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the game status determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the small win monitoring process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance update process 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th embodiment. A flowchart showing the small prize winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment. 14(a) is a front view showing a schematic configuration of the prop device in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 14(b) is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of the prop device in the fourteenth embodiment. 1(a) is a plan view showing a schematic diagram of the ball flow within the reel device in the 14th embodiment when the ball enters the V-shaped hole, and FIG. 1(b) is a plan view showing a schematic diagram of the ball flow within the reel device in the 14th embodiment when the ball enters the OUT-shaped hole. This is a timing chart showing the operation of small win opening pattern A in the fourteenth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the display screen during the reel challenge performance in the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the screen displayed when the reel challenge performance in the 14th embodiment has elapsed a specified period of time. 14(a) is a front view showing a schematic configuration of the prop device in the first modified example of the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of the prop device in the first modified example of the 14th embodiment. (a) is a plan view showing a schematic diagram of the ball flow within the reel device in the first modified example of the 14th embodiment when the ball enters the V-shaped hole, and (b) is a plan view showing a schematic diagram of the ball flow within the reel device in the first modified example of the 14th embodiment when the ball enters the out-shaped hole. This is a timing chart showing the operation of small win opening pattern C in the first modified example of the fourteenth embodiment. 14A is an enlarged view showing a schematic configuration of a delay device in a second modified example of the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 14B is a plan view of the delay device in the second modified example of the fourteenth embodiment. A timing chart showing the operation of small win opening pattern D in the second modified example of the fourteenth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifteenth embodiment. A partially enlarged view of the lower right area of the pachinko machine in the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing what happens when a ball enters each operating port in the fifteenth embodiment. A timing chart showing the correspondence between the operation of a gate-type electric device during time saving in the fifteenth embodiment and the switching operation of a switching valve. A diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the fifteenth embodiment. 23 is a timing chart showing the operation of various devices during a small win game in the fifteenth embodiment. 15A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during time-saving A state in the 15th embodiment, and FIG. 15B is a diagram showing an example of a special 2 jackpot ending screen during time-saving A state in the 15th embodiment. 15(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a reel rush in the 15th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a reel rush end screen in the 15th embodiment. 15A is a diagram showing an example of a big win screen during a reel rush in the 15th embodiment, and FIG. 15B is a diagram showing an example of a big win screen during a reel rush in the 15th embodiment. FIG. 23 shows an example of an error screen in the fifteenth embodiment. 15(a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 15th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the first winning random number 16 table in the 15th embodiment. 15A is a schematic diagram showing a first winning type selection 16 table in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram showing a small winning type selection 16 table in the fifteenth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing a small win scenario table in the fifteenth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the fifteenth embodiment. 15(a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the 15th embodiment, and FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram showing a title selection table in the 15th embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the return process 16 during a small win executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process 16 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fifteenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the small win control process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifteenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the small win end timing processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a V-passing detection process 16 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fifteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a power-off process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fifteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 16 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the state command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process 16 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 16 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 15th embodiment. A flowchart showing the final variable performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 15th embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a jackpot screen during a normal rush in variant example 1 of the 15th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a screen during a revival chance in variant example 1 of the 15th embodiment. A figure showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in variant example 1 of the fifteenth embodiment. 15(a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in variant example 1 of the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 15(b) is a schematic diagram showing the first winning type selection table in variant example 1 of the fifteenth embodiment. 23A is an enlarged front view of a rolling device in a modified example 2 of the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is an enlarged plan view of the rolling device in a modified example 2 of the fifteenth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in variant example 3 of the fifteenth embodiment. A timing chart showing the operation of various devices during a small win game in variant example 3 of the fifteenth embodiment. A figure showing an example of a special 2 small win screen during a normal rush in variant example 3 of the 15th embodiment. 16. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a normal small win game start screen in the 16th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen for the first normal small win game opening in the 16th embodiment. 16A is a diagram showing an example of a second start screen for a small win game during normal play in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 16B is a diagram showing an example of a start screen for a small win game during normal play in the sixteenth embodiment. 16(a) is a diagram showing an example of a ball storage completion screen during a small win game in the 16th embodiment, and FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing an example of a waiting screen until the stored balls are discharged in the 16th embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance update process 17 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing 17 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. A flowchart showing the status command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a structural modification of the fifteenth embodiment. A partially enlarged view of the lower right area of a pachinko machine in a structural modification of the fifteenth embodiment. A timing chart showing the correspondence between the operation of the gate-type electric device during time saving in a structural modification of the fifteenth embodiment and the switching operation of the switching valve. 23A and 23B are diagrams showing a presentation display screen in a presentation modification of the fifteenth embodiment. 23A and 23B are diagrams showing a display screen when power is turned on in a control modification of the fifteenth embodiment. 15(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the MPU in the main control device in the control variant of the 15th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the power recovery status selection table in the RAM in the MPU in the main control device in the control variant of the 15th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the configuration of a RAM included in an MPU in a main control device in a control modification of the fifteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a power-off process A executed by an MPU in a main control device in a control modification of the fifteenth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the return processing A during a small win executed by the MPU in the main control device in a control variant of the fifteenth embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line VI-VI in Figure 365. 1A is a front view of the throwing unit, and FIG. 1B is a side view of the throwing unit. 1A is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. 4A is a front view of the sorting unit, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the sorting unit. FIG. FIG. 375(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 372(a), and FIG. 375(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 375(a). 375(a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the sorting unit in range XIIIa of FIG. 375(b). 4A is a front view of the passage unit, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the passage unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front exploded oblique view of the game board and the operating unit in the second embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the central structural unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central structural unit. An enlarged front view of the game board in range XXVI of Figure 381. Figure 390 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXVII-XXVII in Figure 389. A partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII in Figure 389. FIG. FIG. An enlarged front view of the game board in range XXXI of Figure 381. A partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XXXII-XXXII in Figure 394. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit. A partially enlarged front view of the game board in range XXXV of Figure 381. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line XLIV-XLIV in Figure 399. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operating unit in range XLV of Figure 407. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line XLIV-XLIV in Figure 399. FIG. FIG. 410 , (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member, the lifting plate member and the resistance generating device in range XLIXa of FIG. 410 , and (b) is a front perspective view of the outer member in range XLIXb of FIG. 410 . 410, (a) is an exploded front oblique view of the lifting plate member, inner member, displacement member, and rotation posture assist member in range La of Figure 410, and (b) is an exploded front oblique view of the displacement member and rotation posture assist member in range Lb of Figure 410. This is an exploded front oblique view of the light-emitting action production unit. This is an exploded rear perspective view of the light-emitting action production unit. This is an exploded front oblique view of the light-emitting action production unit. 417(a) is a front view of the intermediate connecting member on the right side, (b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVb in Figure 417(a), (c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVc in Figure 417(a), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member along line LIVd-LIVd in Figure 417(a). A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit along line LV-LV in Figure 399. A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit along line LV-LV in Figure 399. A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit along line LV-LV in Figure 399. 4A to 4C are schematic side views of a first elongated hole, a second elongated hole, and a curved elongated hole, each of which is shown in FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 5A to 5C are schematic front views of a fastening portion of a displacement member and an elongated hole and a support hole of a connected hole. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line LXIV-LXIV in Figure 399. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line LXIV-LXIV in Figure 399. A cross-sectional view of the operating unit taken along line LXIV-LXIV in Figure 399. A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit taken along line LXVII-LXVII in Figure 399. A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit taken along line LXVII-LXVII in Figure 399. A cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit taken along line LXVII-LXVII in Figure 399. 13A is a front view of a sorting unit in a third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the sorting unit. 13A is a front view of a sorting unit in a fourth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the sorting unit. FIG. 13 is a partially enlarged front view of a game board in a fifth embodiment. A partial cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in Figure 435. A partial cross-sectional view of a pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LV-LV line in Figure 399. A partial cross-sectional view of a pachinko machine taken along a line corresponding to line LV-LV in Figure 399. 13A to 13C are schematic side views illustrating a guide portion and an L-shaped slot in a seventh embodiment. 13A to 13C are schematic side views showing the second long hole, the curved long hole, the third long hole, the upper part of the first long hole, and the lower part of the first long hole in the eighth embodiment. 400(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member and the light-emitting action production unit in the ninth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa in FIG. 400. 13A and 13B are front views of a rotating member and a posture detection means according to a tenth embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. 1A to 1D are schematic diagrams showing the procedure for changing settings in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1E to 1G are schematic diagrams showing the procedure for confirming settings in the first embodiment. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings on a display screen, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the reserved read-ahead performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the reserved read-ahead performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment when the reserved upper limit is reached, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment when there is a jackpot reserved when the reserved upper limit is reached. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode during SP time displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the 30th spin during SP time displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 shows an example of the display mode of the variable performance on the 30th spin during SP time after pressing the frame button 22 displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of pre-reading performance and the pre-reading prohibited period in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the variable performance at the end of the SP time when the remaining variable time displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment is 20 seconds or more, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the high probability period of the suggested performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation during SP time in the first embodiment. 11A to 11D are timing charts showing the flow of time elapsed from when the power is turned on and the flow of the variable presentation in the first embodiment. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the special pattern changes 81 times in a high-speed change mode during a special pattern change state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in which the special pattern changes 81 times and is 6 seconds off during a special pattern change state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the high-speed fluctuation mode when the 81st special pattern fluctuation occurs every 12 seconds in a sure-win state displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the pseudo-winning fluctuation performance (6 seconds) executed after the end of the pseudo-high-speed fluctuation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment. (a-1) to (c-2) are timing charts showing the flow of the presentation executed when a high-speed fluctuation period is set in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of winning a specified number of prize balls during a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an additional bonus display screen during a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the bonus content of the promotion performance in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode at the end of a jackpot during SP time displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode at the end of a jackpot when the SP time ends displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the first embodiment. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot random number table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a normal symbol jackpot random number table in the first embodiment. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, (a) is a schematic diagram showing a normal variation pattern table which is part of the variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing a time-saving/high probability variation table which is part of the variation pattern selection table in the first embodiment. A schematic diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern selection table for high-speed fluctuation, which is part of the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a fluctuation pattern scenario table in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a performance switching table in the first embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a setting suggestion performance selection table in the first embodiment. 1A is a schematic diagram showing a pre-reading prohibited period selection table in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a presentation selection table at the time of upper limit of reserved time in the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a representation execution number selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating a mission selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating a promotion point selection table in the first embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a promotion effect selection table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the timing device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating a register table according to the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a first embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. 11A to 11D are diagrams illustrating images during boot processing. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface B. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a variation execution determination process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern 1 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern 2 variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a setting value control process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a time acquisition process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a standby process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the reserved ball number command receiving process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the pre-reading performance execution decision processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning command receiving processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a round performance setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a stop process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a boot completion process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance mode setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the time-saving/probability bonus performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a period performance setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a stop type performance setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing an elapsed time confirmation process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a specialized mode setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during a lucky performance lottery displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the second embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the pending consecutive performance when there is no overlap with the SP time period displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the pending consecutive performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the second embodiment. A figure showing an example of the display mode during a shortened hold consecutive performance when it partially overlaps with the SP time displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram illustrating a pre-reading restriction period table in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an alternative performance selection table in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a round performance setting process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing the hold consecutive performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an alternative performance setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of a pre-reading performance screen during preparation for SP time displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a modified example of the second embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when SP time is entered during the pre-reading performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a modified example of the second embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed to a specific display mode by the reserved change performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the third embodiment; (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when eight reserved memories are acquired while a reserved pattern in a specific display mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the third embodiment; (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the specific display mode is changed to a normal display mode by the reserved change performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the third embodiment; and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed from a specific display mode to a special display mode by the reserved change performance. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a hold change presentation selection table in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold mode setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning command receiving process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the hold change presentation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing variable display setting process 3 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. A flowchart showing the LCD performance execution management process 3 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern selection 4 table in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a termination mode selection table in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an elapsed time confirmation process 4 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an end screen setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing standby processing 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing a performance switching table 6 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing a pre-reading prohibited period selection table 6 in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the pre-reading performance execution decision process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning command receiving process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the first 1.5-second pseudo-miss fluctuation during high-speed fluctuation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the second 1.5-second pseudo-miss fluctuation during high-speed fluctuation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh embodiment. (a) to (f) are timing charts showing the display contents of the reserved patterns during the high-speed fluctuation mode in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning command receiving process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the high-speed display winning performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop process 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the time-saving/probability bonus performance setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the LCD performance execution management process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the pseudo-hold effect setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode after boot processing during a setting change in the high-speed fluctuation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the volume level is increased during a setting change displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the eighth embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the distribution device when the electric device in the first embodiment is buried (stored) in the game board, and (b) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the distribution device when the electric device in the first embodiment is protruding toward the front side of the game board when viewed from the front. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the operation mode of the electric device when the gaming state in the first embodiment is the normal state, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of the operation mode of the electric device when the gaming state in the first embodiment is the second special state. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the area division settings and valid line settings of the display screen of the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the RUSH acquisition challenge presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content when the RUSH acquisition challenge is successful, displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. A figure showing an example of the display content displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment when a RUSH acquisition challenge fails. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content during the Super RUSH displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content during the Super RUSH when a jackpot D that does not reach the time-saving limit is won, which is displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the Super RUSH when there is one turn left until the time-saving limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the Super RUSH when a jackpot D is won when the time-saving limit is reached, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content during revenge mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content during revenge mode when winning the jackpot C displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during revenge mode when a jackpot A, B or a small jackpot displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment is won, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during revenge mode when a jackpot A, B or a small jackpot displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment is won and the transition conditions are met. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content during the challenge mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content during the challenge mode when the jackpot C is won displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content during the challenge mode when the jackpot A, B or small jackpot displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment is won, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content during the challenge mode when the jackpot C displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment is won and the transition conditions are met. A figure showing an example of the display content during challenge mode when the jackpot A or B displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment is won and the transition conditions are met. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content during a RUSH displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content when there are 10 draws remaining until the time-saving limit and the lottery result is a miss, displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during RUSH when the jackpot D displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment is won, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the jackpot D displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment is won and the transition conditions are met. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the RUSH when there are 5 turns left until the special rate limit and 10 turns left until the time-saving limit as displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and the lottery result is a miss; and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the RUSH when there is 1 turn left until the special rate limit and 1 turn left until the time-saving limit as displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. FIG. 13 shows an example of the display contents during RUSH when a jackpot D that reaches the special jackpot limit and the time-saving limit is won, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content during the 10th change in the EXTRA mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment after entering the EXTRA mode, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content during the EXTRA mode when winning the jackpot D displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content during EXTRA mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment when a big win is not won or a small win is won, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content at the end of the EXTRA mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content during SPECIAL mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content when winning the jackpot D displayed on the third pattern display device in the first embodiment. 1 is a timing chart showing the game state and the flow of execution presentation in the first embodiment. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the ball is pulled back during the second special probability in the first embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the reel is pulled back during time-saving in the first embodiment. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the first special mode and the time-saving game mode end simultaneously in the first embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic overview of the presentation modes in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 1 random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving variable pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first guaranteed variable variable pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second certain variable variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a time-saving granting table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. FIG. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a winning action table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a normal hit operation table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in the first embodiment. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a presentation mode selection table set in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a stock notification number selection table set in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a challenge mode transition table set in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a first embodiment. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on. 1A is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rear surface A, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rear surfaces B to D. FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display data table. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list. 5 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special pattern jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the special chart 1 deviation variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the special chart 1 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing during execution of the first special pattern variation executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart 1 off-axis stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. A flowchart showing the special drawing 2 discarding process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving update process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern change pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing during execution of the second special pattern variation executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a second time-saving update process executed by an MPU in the main control device. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. 11 is a flowchart showing a first read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a probability variable limit process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a state command process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a game status update process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a limit information update process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing the performance mode setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing time-saving related processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a winning-related process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. This is a flowchart showing the special chart 1 variable performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. This is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 variable performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a liquid crystal execution management process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 1A is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a number of rounds command process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing the presentation mode command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 13A is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device. 11 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 4 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content when there are 12 spins remaining until the special variable limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the second embodiment and a special pattern 1 high-speed fluctuation zone is set, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content when there are 2 spins remaining until the special variable limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the second embodiment and a special pattern 1 high-speed fluctuation zone is set. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the average number of balls dispensed over time in the first embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the average number of balls dispensed over time in the second embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table for the second special rate of change set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the advantageous fluctuation pattern table for the second special rate of change set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the average number of balls dispensed in a first variant of the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the average number of balls dispensed in a second variant of the second embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in a third embodiment. FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view of the ball-distributing device in the third embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 1st winning random number 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving variable pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first certain variable variable pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second probability variable variable pattern 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table 3 set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a fluctuation pattern scenario 3 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the third embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. An exploded oblique view of the variable winning device in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device in the fourth embodiment at the La-La section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the Lb-Lb section, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device in the fourth embodiment. 13A to 13B are rear views of a portion of the variable winning device in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content during a V winning challenge during the first special probability mode when the time-saving limit has not been reached, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content during a V winning challenge during the second special probability mode when there are 15 wins remaining until the special probability mode limit, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the display content during a V winning challenge during the second special probability when there are two chances left until the special probability limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the big win operation setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a probability variable limit update process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a round performance setting process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fourth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the variable presentation when the remaining number of times in the special rate limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the fifth embodiment is 15 or more and a jackpot C5 is won during the second special rate, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the variable presentation when the remaining number of times in the special rate limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the fifth embodiment is 4 to 14 and a jackpot C5 is won during the second special rate. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the variable presentation when the remaining number of times in the special rate limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the fifth embodiment is 1 to 3 times and a jackpot C5 is won during the second special rate, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the variable presentation when the remaining number of times in the special rate limit and the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the fifth embodiment are the same and a jackpot C5 is won during the second special rate. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the Special Chart 2 Big Win Type Selection 5 Table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving variable pattern 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first certain variable variable pattern 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second probability variable variable pattern 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table 5 set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a background mode selection table set in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a probability variable limit update process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit update process 5 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the fifth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 6 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the Special Chart 2 Big Win Type Selection 6 Table set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table 6 set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a round performance setting process 6 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the display content when a time-saving A jackpot is won during the first special probability variable when the remaining number of times for the time-saving A limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the seventh embodiment is 4 and the remaining number of times for the time-saving B limit is 5; and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the time-saving A jackpot pattern stops during the first special probability variable when the remaining number of times for the time-saving A limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the seventh embodiment is 4 and the remaining number of times for the time-saving B limit is 5. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content during the first special probability when the remaining number of times for the time-saving A limit displayed on the third pattern display device in the seventh embodiment is 1 and the remaining number of times for the time-saving B limit is 1, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the time-saving performance when the time-saving end condition displayed on the third pattern display device in the seventh embodiment is met. (a) is a timing chart showing the game flow when the time-saving limit is reached in the shortest time in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the game flow when the time-saving limit is reached in the longest time in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 variable pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table 7 set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in the seventh embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit update process 7 executed by an MPU in a main control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing limit information update processing 7 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the remaining time-saving number update process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display content when a time-saving A jackpot pattern stops when the remaining number of times for the time-saving A limit is three during a RUSH displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content when a time-saving B jackpot pattern stops when the remaining number of times for the time-saving A limit is three during a RUSH displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in the eighth embodiment. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of a voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of an enemy character selection table set in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit update process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a state command processing 8 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the remaining time-saving count update process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. A timing chart showing the time-saving limit number and the game flow of the game state transition in the ninth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the Special Chart 1 Big Win Type Selection 9 Table set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the Special Chart 2 Big Win Type Selection 9 Table set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first variable probability variable pattern 9 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the second variable probability variable pattern 9 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table 9 set in the ROM of the main control device in the ninth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 10 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 10th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the Special Chart 2 Big Win Type Selection 10 Table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 10th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving variable pattern 10 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first probability variable variable pattern 10 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table 10 set in the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 11 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 11th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 11 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 11th embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving granting table 11 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 11th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 17th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a rear view of the pachinko machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. 17A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the seventeenth embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the seventeenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the 17th embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type of special patterns in the 17th embodiment, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C3 and the winning of normal patterns in the 17th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variable type selection table in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the winning setting table in the 17th embodiment. 17(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a selection table for special drawing 1 miss in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a selection table for special drawing 2 miss in the 17th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an offset setting table in the seventeenth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the 17th embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of a game result setting table in the seventeenth embodiment. 17A is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a status setting table in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram showing an example of the description contents of the status setting table in an actual program in the seventeenth embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the clear table at the end of a jackpot in the 17th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of various setting value storage areas in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of a register in the seventeenth embodiment; A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device in a 17th embodiment. 23A to 23C are diagrams illustrating an image displayed when the power is turned on in the seventeenth embodiment. 23A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface B in the seventeenth embodiment. 23A to 23C are explanatory diagrams illustrating a rear surface C in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display data table in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a drawing list in the seventeenth embodiment; 23 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the game result setting value acquisition process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the loss-time setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventeenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing a zero setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventeenth embodiment. A flowchart showing the start-up processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 17th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a seventeenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a seventeenth embodiment. 17(a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the 17th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 17(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the 17th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a number of rounds command process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 17A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 17B is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the 17th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 17(a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the 17th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventeenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device in the seventeenth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table for low probability in a modified version of the first embodiment in the 17th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table for high probability in a modified version of the first embodiment in the 17th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the description contents of the first winning random number table in an actual program in a modified example of the first embodiment in the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the special pattern change processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in a modified example of the 17th embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU of the main control device in a modified example of the 17th embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the offset setting table of a pachinko machine in the 18th embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot determination processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in the 18th embodiment. A flowchart showing the failure time setting process 2 executed by the MPU of the main control device in the 18th embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the 19th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the 19th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special pattern in the 19th embodiment. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation type selection table in the 19th embodiment. 19(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a selection table for use during hiding in the 19th embodiment, and (b) and (c) are schematic diagrams showing the contents of a selection table for use during a promotion period in the 19th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a selection table for the promotion period in the 19th embodiment, and (b) and (c) are schematic diagrams showing the contents of a selection table for the end of the promotion period in the 19th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of an offset setting table in the nineteenth embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the 19th embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the miss selection table in the 19th embodiment. 19(a) and 19(b) are explanatory diagrams illustrating a case where rank-up fails in the rank-up performance executed after the end of a jackpot in the 19th embodiment. 19(a) and 19(b) are explanatory diagrams illustrating the case where the rank is increased from rank D to rank C in the rank-up effect executed after the end of a jackpot in the 19th embodiment. (a) is an explanatory diagram explaining the case where the rank is increased from rank C to rank B in the rank-up performance executed after the end of a jackpot in the 19th embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram explaining the case where the rank is increased from rank B to rank A in the rank-up performance executed after the end of a jackpot in the 19th embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram that explains the rank-up effect executed after the end of a jackpot in the 19th embodiment, in which the rank is increased from A to S. (a) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case in which the rank-up performance executed after the end of a jackpot in the 19th embodiment notifies that the player has ranked up to the maximum rank within the rank-up period, and (b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a case in which the rank-up performance executed after the end of a jackpot in the 19th embodiment notifies that the player has not ranked up to the maximum rank within the rank-up period. A flowchart showing the jackpot determination processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in the 19th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process 2 executed by the MPU of the main control device in the 19th embodiment. A flowchart showing the loss time setting process 3 executed by the MPU of the main control device in the 19th embodiment. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process executed by the MPU of the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a modified example of the 19th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variable type selection table in a modified example of the 19th embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the selection table for non-high probability hits in a modified example of the 19th embodiment, and (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the selection table for high probability hits in a modified example of the 19th embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the miss selection table in a modified example of the 19th embodiment. A flowchart showing the jackpot determination processing executed by the MPU of the main control device in a modified example of the 19th embodiment. A flowchart showing the miss-time setting process 4 executed by the MPU of the main control device in a modified example of the 19th embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the 20th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the setting table at the end of the jackpot in the 20th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twentieth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a data setting process executed by an MPU in a main control device in the twentieth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the 21st embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the setting/clear table at the end of the jackpot in the 21st embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the 22nd embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the initial value setting table at the end of the jackpot in the 22nd embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a zero setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a register in a twenty-third embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of a game result setting table in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the description contents of a game result setting table in an actual program in the twenty-third embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 23rd embodiment. A flowchart showing the winning data setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 23rd embodiment. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the twenty-fourth embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the description contents of a variation pattern selection table in an actual program in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a register in a twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a location where the first addresses of various data tables are specified in an actual program in the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a command output port in the twenty-fourth embodiment. 2(a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the miss setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the external output processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th embodiment. A flowchart showing the variation pattern acquisition process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the description contents of a variation pattern selection table in an actual program in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of a register in a twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a method for generating setting value data in the twenty-fifth embodiment. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern acquisition process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 25th embodiment. A flowchart showing the variation pattern type data generation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 25th embodiment. This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the description contents of a variation pattern selection table in an actual program in the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram showing a flow of acquiring data corresponding to a pattern selection offset value from a data table in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 26 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern acquisition process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 26th embodiment. A flowchart showing the variation pattern type data generation process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 26th embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of a register in a modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a location where the first addresses of various data tables in an actual program are specified in a modified example of the twenty-fourth embodiment; A flowchart showing the variation pattern acquisition process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in a modified example of the 24th embodiment.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Fig. 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, an outer shell of which is formed by combining wooden frames into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be able to be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side on which the opening and closing is provided as an axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and ball entrances 64, 640, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by game balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches game balls to the front area of the game board 13, a launching rail (not shown) that guides the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface of the inner frame 12 and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12.
(See Figure 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side, and the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed as the axis of opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing game balls is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top that protrudes forward, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into the upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides game balls inserted into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, on the top surface of the upper tray 17, there are frame buttons 2
The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effects or background displayed on a third symbol display device 81 (described later).

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or a predetermined reach is reached, thereby enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-
In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot or reach performance is reached, the illumination units 29 to 33 light up or flash by lighting or flashing the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying the player that a jackpot is being won or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), which has a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29-33 to create a more brilliant appearance.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of the ball lending button 42, and the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated, game balls are lent out in response to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is
This button is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on a card or other recording medium, and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or other card inserted into the card unit.
In a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispenser or the like to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., a so-called cash machine, the ball dispenser operation unit 40 is not required.
A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the portion where the card unit is installed to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using the card unit and a cash machine can be made common.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center thereof, which is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top, for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the game balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, the ball launching unit 11 is provided.
The controller includes a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the control handle 51a and the stop switch 51b, which is a push button type that stops the launch of game balls while the control handle 51b is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the control handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the control handle 51 is rotated clockwise by a player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes in response to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51, thereby shooting the game ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the control handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the configuration is as described above, but it is not limited thereto. The main control device 110 or another control device may detect the game balls launched by the ball launching unit 112a, or may detect that the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a has launched a game ball. Also, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as clearing the RAM is executed.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the game balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (generally called a "dollar box") that receives the game balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is made of a wooden base plate 6 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
The ball guide hole 63, the first ball entrance hole 64, the second ball entrance hole 640, the variable entry device 65, the operational entry hole 660, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled to the inner frame 10, and the peripheral portion of the hole 63 is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12.
The variable display unit 80 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. The front center part of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through a window part 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is set up, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up at the inside position of the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where the game is played according to the behavior of the game ball. The game area is a substantially circular area (an area where a starting hole, etc., is arranged and where the launched game ball flows down) that is defined by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70 on the front side of the game board 13. The game area also includes all areas where the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down until it passes through the out hole 66 or the winning hole.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13.
The operation winning hole 660 is provided in the upper left part of FIG. 2, into which the game ball can enter. When the game ball enters the operation winning hole 660, the operation winning hole 660 transitions to a jackpot state (special game state) which is advantageous to the player. In more detail, when a jackpot is determined by the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol), the operation winning hole 660 is set to a state (jackpot waiting state) in which the entry of the ball into the operation winning hole 660 is effective. Note that, even if a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 under normal circumstances, it does not affect the game at all. In the jackpot waiting state, the player launches a game ball toward the operation winning hole 660, and the game ball enters (wins) the operation winning hole, starting a jackpot. Note that, as shown in FIG. 2, a rotating member 670a which rotates at a constant rotation speed is provided to the left of the operation winning hole 660 when viewed from the front. This rotating member 670a
The game ball shot toward the operation winning hole 660 according to the rotation position is
The rotating member 670a can be arranged to either prevent the rotation of the rotating member 670a from moving in the direction of 0 or not.
Unless the game ball is shot out at a timing where the ball is not obstructed by the arrows, the game ball cannot enter the operation winning hole 660 (to start a big win).
When the lottery for the special symbol determines that a big win has occurred, the game ball can be launched taking into consideration the arrangement of the rotating member 670a, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 2, the active winning port 660 is provided at the end of a flow path (active winning port flow path) that is wider than one game ball and narrower than two game balls. This active winning port flow path is a flow path that is provided with a predetermined range of launch strength (for example, a launch strength of 9 or less) that includes at least the maximum momentum (launch strength).
The nozzle is configured so that game balls launched at a speed of 5% to 100% will reach (flow into) the nozzle.
Therefore, if the special pattern is selected as a jackpot and the machine is placed in jackpot waiting state,
When aiming at the operating winning hole 660, the game ball can be easily made to enter the operating winning hole 660 by simply rotating the handle 51 to the maximum movable range.

A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61.
For example, a game ball launched with a launch strength in the range of 90% to 95% hits the return rubber 69, and bounces back toward the center while its momentum is attenuated. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is fixed to the base plate 60 by being driven into the base plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball enters either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and when a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery for a special symbol performed for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a judgment is made as to whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot, and if a special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is also judged. When a special symbol is a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special game state, and the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until a predetermined number of game balls have entered), and the opening is repeated a number of times (number of rounds) according to the type of jackpot. As a result, a large number of game balls enter the specific winning port 65a, and a larger number of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are six types of special symbol jackpots, "jackpot A" to "jackpot F", and after the special game state ends, a game value (game value) according to the result of the jackpot game is given to the player as an added value after the jackpot ends. The three types of "jackpot A to C" are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained by a lottery for special symbols executed in response to a game ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the three types of "jackpot D to F" are jackpot types that can be determined when a jackpot is obtained by a lottery for special symbols executed in response to a game ball entering the second ball entrance 640. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the lottery for the special pattern that is executed when the gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64 will be referred to as the lottery for the first special pattern, and the lottery for the special pattern that is executed when the gaming ball enters the second ball entrance 640 will be referred to as the lottery for the second special pattern.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 to 90 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol showing the result of the drawing is displayed stationary. When a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls entering is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each type of ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 ends, if there are still reserved balls remaining for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery for the normal symbol that is performed when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a win or loss judgment is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol. When the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), thereby opening the second ball entrance 640. Note that, during normal times, the electric device 640
Since the electric device 640a is disposed in the closed position, the second ball entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, the ball flowing down from above when viewed from the front toward the second ball entrance 640 is blocked by the electric device 640a, making it impossible (difficult) for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when a normal pattern is hit, the electric device 640a is opened, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.
The balls flowing down toward the second ball entrance 640 are more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the lottery for the second special symbol is more likely to be held.

In addition, when the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the second symbol display device 83 starts to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has passed,
A normal symbol showing the lottery result is displayed in a static manner. When a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of times the game ball passes through is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the second symbol reserved lamp 84. When the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends,
If there are any reserved balls remaining for the normal ball entrance 67, a lottery for the next normal symbol is held, and a variable display according to the lottery is started.

As mentioned above, the special jackpot types are "jackpot A" to "jackpot F".
There are six types:

When the "jackpot A" is reached, the game enters a special game state with 8 rounds (8 round jackpot). On the other hand, when the "jackpot B" or "jackpot C" is reached, the game enters a special game state with 5 rounds (5 round jackpot). When the "jackpot D" is reached, the game enters a special game state with 16 rounds (16 round jackpot). When the "jackpot E" is reached, the game enters a special game state with 16 rounds (16 round jackpot).
When "jackpot F" is obtained, the game enters a special game state with 10 rounds (10-round jackpot).
", after the big win ends, the special symbol will enter a high probability state (special symbol probability change). Also, when the special symbol high probability state is granted, the normal symbol hit probability also increases (the normal symbol time-saving state is granted). The special symbol high probability state and the normal symbol time-saving state will continue from the end of the big win until the next big win occurs. On the other hand, if the "Big Win C
" or "Big Win F", the time-saving state of the normal symbol is granted after the end of the big win, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not granted. The time-saving state of the normal symbol granted after the end of this "Big Win C" or "Big Win F" ends when the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" means a state in which the probability of winning a special symbol is increased,
This is what is known as a "high probability state of special symbols" (special symbol high probability state), in other words, a game state that is likely to transition to a special game state (jackpot). On the other hand, when it is not a "high probability state of special symbols", it is called a "low probability state of special symbols", which means that the probability of a jackpot is lower than in the special symbol high probability state, that is, the probability of a jackpot with special symbols is normal (low probability state of special symbols). Also, a "time-saving state of normal symbols" (high probability state of normal symbols) is,
This refers to a game state in which the probability of winning with a normal symbol increases and it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In contrast, when the game is not in the "normal symbol time-saving state", it is called the "normal state of the normal symbol" (
This is called the "low probability state of normal symbols," which indicates that the probability of winning with normal symbols is in the normal state, that is, the probability of winning is lower than during the time-saving mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the special symbol jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. In contrast, the number of rounds may be common to all types of jackpots (for example, all 5 rounds). In addition, in the present embodiment, the "special symbol probability state" granted after the jackpot is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but this is not limited to this. For example, the period during which the "special symbol probability state" continues may be limited to the time until the number of special symbol lotteries is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). In this case, the number of lotteries that result in the "special symbol probability state" may be different from the number of lotteries that result in the "normal symbol time-saving state". In addition, the number of lotteries may be variable depending on the type of jackpot.

In the present pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power or the like, the machine is always set to a "low probability state of special symbols" and a "normal state of normal symbols."
When the result is either "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", or "jackpot E", the game moves from the "special symbol low probability state" to the "special symbol probability state", and also moves from the "regular symbol normal state" to the "regular symbol time-saving state". In this case, the set "special symbol probability state" and "regular symbol time-saving state" continue until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the result is "jackpot C" or "jackpot F", the game moves to the "special symbol low probability state" and the "regular symbol time-saving state". Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the jackpots ("jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", and "jackpot E") that are given the "special symbol probability state" and the "regular symbol time-saving state" after the jackpot ends will be referred to as "probability jackpots".
On the other hand, a jackpot in which only 100 "normal pattern time-saving states" are awarded after the jackpot ends ("jackpot C", "jackpot F") is referred to as a "normal jackpot".

A first symbol display device 37 is provided at the lower left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), which is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a as light emitting means and a seven-segment display 37b. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery for a special symbol, which is performed in conjunction with a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), is being executed by turning on the LEDs 37a, and indicates a special symbol (first symbol) according to the lottery result for the special symbol as a stopping symbol after the variable ends by turning on the LEDs 37a, and indicates whether or not the special symbol is being selected by turning on the LEDs 37a.
The number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have been inserted into the slot 0 but have not yet been changed, is indicated by the lit state.

When a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying a changing special symbol (first symbol), the number of times the game ball enters is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 38 is displayed.
The symbol is also displayed on the symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64,
The balls entering the first ball entrance 630 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be reserved a maximum of four times each, however, the maximum number of times of reservation is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

The seven-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors makes it possible to display various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (such as a high probability state for special symbols or a time-saving state for normal symbols) with a small number of LEDs. The LEDs 37a not only show whether the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot after the variation ends, but also show the type of jackpot (jackpot A to F) if it is a jackpot.
A special pattern (first pattern) corresponding to the number is displayed.

In addition, the game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 into which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the winning opening. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is provided in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 includes a third symbol display unit 81 made of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display unit");
The variable display unit 80 is provided with a second pattern display device 83 constituted by an ED. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 surrounding the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), this triggers the first symbol display device 37 to perform a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). Furthermore, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display of a third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the game status is displayed in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81
A decorative display is performed according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of a display device.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 7 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, Fig. 6(a) is a diagram showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and Fig. 6(b) is a diagram showing an example of the actual display screen.

The third design is composed of nine main designs numbered "1" to "9."
Each main design is composed of the numbers "1" to "9". Each main design is composed of the numbers "1" to "9" on the rear design of the wooden box, and the odd numbers (1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56,
The main design, marked with large numbers (1, 5, 7, 9), takes up almost the entire front of the wooden box.
In contrast, the main designs with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have additional designs imitating characters such as planes, furoshiki, and helmets that cover almost the entire front of the wooden box, and the even numbers are added in small green to the lower right of the additional designs so that they are displayed in front of the additional designs.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the result of the lottery for special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a jackpot, a varying display is performed in which the same main symbols are lined up, and the jackpot occurs after the varying display has ended.
On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a variable display is shown in which the same main symbols do not line up.

For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a sure-win (either "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", or "jackpot E"), a variable display will be performed in which the main symbols with any of the numbers "1" to "9" are aligned.
If the winning combination is a "jackpot F", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are aligned. In other words, a variable display in which the main symbols with odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are aligned may only be performed in the case of a probability jackpot. Even in the case of a probability jackpot, by configuring the game so that a variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned may be performed, the player can play during the jackpot in the hope of a probability jackpot even if the main symbols with even numbers are aligned. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a miss, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with the same numbers are not aligned. In the case of a probability jackpot, the rate at which a variable display in which the main symbols with even numbers are aligned is set to, for example, 60%. In addition, when a guaranteed jackpot is started by a varying display in which main symbols with even numbers are lined up, a presentation is executed to inform the player that it is a guaranteed jackpot during a specified period of the jackpot (for example, during a 5-round period).

As shown in FIG. 6A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, top and bottom. The lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm that displays the third symbol in a variable manner, and the other upper 1/3 is a
This is the secondary display area Ds, which displays preview effects, characters, number of reserved balls, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, center, and right.
The three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 display three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and the display is changed by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol column Z1
In the middle pattern column Z2 and the right pattern column Z3, the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in descending order.
In the game, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbols are displayed stopped on the active line L1 in the following order: left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → center symbol row Z2. This stopped display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbols for a certain period (one second or more), it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking whether or not the combination of third symbols corresponds to a jackpot (whether or not the lottery result for the special symbols is a jackpot). In addition, when the third symbols stop, the active line L
When a combination of jackpot symbols (a combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the display 1, a jackpot is confirmed, and a standby state presentation indicating a jackpot standby state is displayed. Details of this standby state presentation will be described later with reference to FIG. 7. In addition, by causing a game ball to enter (win) the operation winning hole 660 during the jackpot standby state, a jackpot is started, and a jackpot video (opening presentation) is displayed.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbols displayed in a stopped state corresponds to a miss and there is a reserved ball, after the display is stopped for one second, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the reserved ball is started. In addition, if there are multiple reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball in time.

On the other hand, if there are no reserved balls and the third symbol, which is a combination corresponding to a missed special symbol, is displayed as a stopped symbol for one second, the third symbol will continue to be displayed as a stopped symbol thereafter. This state will continue until a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed or a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. Then, if a predetermined time (
For example, if a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed, a demo effect is displayed to indicate that a game is not being played. It is rare that no ball enters the first ball entrance 64 even though the player has continuously shot game balls for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), this is due to the player quitting the game and not playing the pachinko machine 10 at all. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was displayed in a stopped state, it is determined that the player is not playing, and a demo effect is started. This allows a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start playing to easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demo effect display. On the other hand, if a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed, a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction.
The area Ds2 and Ds3 are areas that display the number of reserved balls, which is the number of game balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been changed among the game balls that have entered the ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640.
This is the area where preview images are displayed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a video is displayed in the right small area Ds3.
This suggests to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual.
In 2, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a preview performance is performed in which a special action other than the predetermined action is performed or another character appears.

On the other hand, if a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while a variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of balls that enter is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each type of ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37.
and also in a small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds.
In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of the reserved ball number patterns displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four balls. Also, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, there are no reserved balls. Note that, in the left half of the small area Ds1, a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is displayed, and in the right half of the small area Ds2, a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is displayed. In the example of Figure 6 (b), four reserved ball number symbols are displayed in the left half of small area Ds1, while no reserved ball number symbols are displayed in the right half, indicating that there are four reserved balls of the first special pattern, but no reserved balls of the second special pattern.

In this embodiment, the balls enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as follows:
Although each ball is configured to be reserved up to four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).
Instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number may be displayed as numbers in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. Also, since the reserved ball number is shown by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the reserved ball number. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

The second pattern display device 83 performs a changing display by indicating, by its lighting state, whether or not the lottery for the normal pattern which is carried out as the gaming ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is being carried out, and by its lighting state, indicates, as the stopping pattern after the changing has ended, a normal pattern (second pattern) corresponding to the lottery result for the normal pattern.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, the game ball is inserted into either the left or right normal ball entrance 67.
When the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "○"), the second ball entrance 640 is opened.
The electric device 640a associated with the is activated (released) for a predetermined period of time, and as a result,
The second ball entrance 640 is configured to be in a state where game balls can easily enter. The number of times that game balls pass through the normal ball entrance 67 can be reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed by lighting the second symbol reservation lamp 84. Four second symbol reservation lamps 84 are provided, the maximum number of reserved balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by the second symbol display device 8 as in this embodiment.
In addition to the above, the first symbol display device 37 and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used to switch between lighting and non-lighting of multiple lamps in the first symbol display device 3. Similarly, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may be lit by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of game balls through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to a maximum number of reserved balls being four times, as in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 through which a game ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance provided on the back side of the game board 13 is
When a ball entrance switch (not shown) is turned on, the main control device 110 draws a first special symbol due to the first ball entrance switch being turned on, and the display according to the drawing result is displayed by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Also, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the LED 37a is turned on.
The first ball entrance 64 is also one of the winning holes from which the winning balls are dispensed. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a winning hole from which the game ball that flows down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (the game ball that is hit from the left)
Nails and the like are arranged so that the ball is easier to enter the yard than a gaming ball that flows down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (a gaming ball hit to the right).

A second ball entrance 640 through which a game ball can enter is provided on the lower right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front.
are arranged. When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a second special symbol is performed by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is displayed by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning holes from which five prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters. As shown in FIG. 2, the second ball entrance 640 is provided on the right side of the game board 13, so basically only game balls that flow down a flow path provided to the right of the variable display unit 80 enter the game board.

A right variable winning device 65 is disposed in the lower left direction of the second ball entry port 640 when viewed from the front, and a right specific winning port 65a in the shape of a horizontal rectangle is provided in the approximate center of the right variable winning device 65. A left variable winning device 650 is disposed in the lower left direction of the right variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front. The left variable winning device 650 is provided with a horizontal rectangular opening and closing plate that covers the left specific winning port 650a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing to the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. The opening and closing plate is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win. In the closed state of the opening and closing plate, the opening and closing plate and the game board 13 are closed so as to be on the same plane, so that the game ball can pass through the front side of the opening and closing plate. In addition, the opening and closing plate is tilted downward on the front side to temporarily form an open state in which the game ball is likely to win the left specific winning port 650a. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main control device 110 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on to show the jackpot stopping symbol, and the third symbol stopping symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, indicating that the jackpot has been confirmed (that the right to win the jackpot has been obtained). Then, in the jackpot waiting state entered when the jackpot has been confirmed, the game state transitions to a special game state in which a larger number of prize balls than normal are paid out by placing a game ball in the activated prize opening 660. In this special game state, the right specific prize opening 65a, which is normally closed,
And the left specific winning port 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until a predetermined number of game balls have won). That is, the opening and closing door 65f1 that normally closes the right specific winning port 65a is opened when the first round of the jackpot (special game state) occurs, and balls can enter the right specific winning port 65a. 10 prize balls are awarded for each game ball that enters the right specific winning port 65a. In addition, in each round from the second round of the jackpot (special game state) onwards, the left specific winning port 650a is opened and balls can enter. Similarly to the right specific winning port 65a, 10 prize balls are awarded for each game ball that enters the left specific winning port 650a.

In addition, the right specific winning hole 65a, the left specific winning hole 650a, and the above-mentioned second winning hole 640
are arranged in a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the flow path on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (a gaming ball hit to the right) can enter the jackpot (easy to enter). In other words, they are arranged in a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the flow path on the left side of the variable display unit 80 cannot enter the jackpot (difficult to enter). Therefore, in order for a player to receive a prize ball (gain a profit) during a jackpot,
2, the right variable winning device 65 is disposed in a state in which it is slightly inclined downward to the lower left when viewed from the front.
When the player hits the ball from the right side with the right variable winning device 65 closed, the ball can be made to flow down the right variable winning device 65 in a lower left direction as viewed from the front and enter the outlet 66. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the ball shot by the right side from staying at the top of the right variable winning device 65 (the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1). As shown in FIG. 2, the left variable winning device 650 is disposed at the lower left of the right variable winning device 65, so that when the left specific winning port 650a is open, the ball that flows down the right variable winning device 65 in a lower left direction as viewed from the front along the inclination enters the left specific winning port 650a.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the conditions for ending each round of a jackpot (reclosing the opened right specific winning port 65a or left specific winning port 650a) are made different depending on the round of the jackpot (the type of specific winning port that is opened). Specifically, in the first round (the round in which the right specific winning port 65a is opened), the first round ends when 30 seconds have passed since the opening/closing door 65f1 was opened, or when two or more game balls have won (entered) the right specific winning port 65a, and the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed. On the other hand, in each round from the second round of a jackpot onwards (the round in which the left specific winning port 650a is opened),
In the first round, 30 seconds have passed since the left specific winning port 650a was opened, or
When zero or more game balls enter the left specific winning opening 650a, the left specific winning opening 650a is closed and the round ends.

In the right variable winning device 65, a sensor for detecting the entry of a game ball into the right specific winning port 65a is provided inside the right variable winning device 65. Therefore, a time lag occurs between the entry of a game ball into the right specific winning port 65a (entering the right specific winning port 65a) and the detection of the entry. More specifically, it takes about 0.5 seconds from the entry of a game ball into the right specific winning port 65a until the number of balls that have entered is actually counted. In other words, it takes about 0.5 seconds from the entry of a game ball into the right specific winning port 65a to the closing of the opening and closing door 65f1, which is the number of game balls that satisfy the end condition of the round. Therefore, if additional game balls can be entered during this 0.5 seconds, more prize balls can be won than in the normal case (when only the number of balls that satisfy the end upper limit of the round is entered). In the first embodiment, one round (the right specific winning port 65
In the round in which the right specific winning port 65a is opened, the player can intentionally place more than the number of game balls that meets the end condition of the round into the right specific winning port 65a. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the entry (entry of balls) of a number of game balls into the specific winning port 65a that exceeds the upper limit of the number of winning balls (entry of balls) set in each round will be referred to as an "over entry."

Details will be described later with reference to Figures 4 and 5, but in this first embodiment, in order to make it easier to generate an over-winning, the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 is configured so that the period from when a game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 until it has completely passed through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 is longer. By configuring it in this way, while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, it becomes easier for multiple game balls to be added and reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, a game ball is entered into the operating winning port 660 to start a jackpot (opening and closing the opening and closing door 65f1).
f1), all game balls flowing down the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 can be entered into the opened right specific winning port 65a. As described above, the first round of the jackpot ends when two or more winning balls (entering balls) are detected in the specific winning port 65a. However, if the first round of the jackpot can be started in a state in which three or more game balls have reached the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 before the start of the jackpot, three or more game balls can be entered into the right specific winning port 65a, and more prize balls can be obtained than originally (prize balls for two winning balls). Therefore, a game that affects the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the first round of the jackpot can be provided according to the timing of entering the game balls into the operating winning port 660, so that the player can enjoy the game more during the jackpot waiting state. In addition, in order to make the game ball reach the opening and closing door 65f1 while waiting for a jackpot, it is sufficient to hit the ball from the right with a firing strength (a firing strength of less than 95%) that prevents the game ball from entering the operational winning port 660 (the game ball from flowing into the flow path for the operational winning port (see Figure 2)).

Next, the structure of the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, FIG. 4(a) is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 with the opening and closing door 65f1 closed, and FIG. 4(b) is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 with the opening and closing door 65f1 opened.
FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the same.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 is provided with protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c for preventing the flow of game balls downward. The game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 are prevented from flowing down by each of the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c, so they flow down the opening and closing door 65f1 along the outer periphery of each of the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c.
On the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, a zigzag flow path is formed by the respective convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c. Therefore, compared to the case where the respective convex portions 65f1a to 65f1c are not provided (i.e., the game ball can flow linearly from the right direction to the left direction on the opening and closing door 65f1 when viewed from the front), the period required for the game ball to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 can be made longer. This makes it easier to add multiple game balls and have them reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 while one game ball is flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Therefore, in the jackpot waiting state, when more game balls are flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the operating winning opening 660
By causing the game ball to enter the hole 65f1 and initiating a jackpot (opening the opening and closing door 65f1), more game balls can be allowed to over-enter.

4(b) is a diagram showing the state in which the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened. As shown in FIG. 4(b), the opening and closing door 65f1 slides from the front side to the back side when viewed from the front, and is stored inside the game board 13 through an opening provided in the game board 13. This opens the right specific winning hole 65a. When the right specific winning hole 65a is opened, a game ball flowing down from the right direction of the right variable winning device 65 can enter the right specific winning hole 65a.
In addition, since the height of the opening for storing the opening/closing door 65f1 is sufficiently low compared to the diameter of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball that was flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 at the time when the sliding movement of the opening/closing door 65f1 starts from being stored inside the game board 13 together with the opening/closing door 65f1. Therefore, when the opening/closing door 65f1 slides into the inside of the game board 13, the game ball that was on the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 can be dropped into the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, in the first embodiment, the time required for one game ball to pass through the opening and closing door 65f1 is configured to be about 4 seconds. And, the interval between launching the game balls (the interval between launching one game ball and launching the next game ball) is configured to be the shortest 0.6 seconds. This allows about six additional game balls to be launched while one game ball is flowing down the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Therefore, in the big win waiting state, about seven game balls are continuously launched toward the variable winning device 65, and then the game balls are made to enter the operating winning port 660, so that the first round can be started with about seven game balls flowing down the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. That is, the opening and closing door 65f1 can be opened to allow all the game balls flowing down the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 to enter the specific winning port 65a. This allows the player to win more prize balls than usual (for two winning balls), so that in the jackpot waiting state, the player can open the operation winning port 65f1 with more game balls reaching the opening and closing door 65f1.
This allows the player to devise ways to make the game ball enter the operation winning port 660. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game in the big win waiting state. This provides a gameplay that allows the player to intentionally cause an over win by making the game ball enter the operation winning port 660 while the game ball is flowing down the opening and closing door 65f1 in the big win waiting state.

In the first embodiment, the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 has three protrusions 65f1a to 65f1.
By providing the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c, the game ball is configured to bypass the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c, and the passing period of the game ball through the opening and closing door 65f1 is lengthened, but this is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 may be made of a material (e.g., an elastic body) with a higher friction coefficient than other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the variable winning device 65, etc.), or the material may be processed to make it difficult for the game ball to roll (e.g., by providing an uneven surface).

In the first embodiment, the round is started when 30 seconds have elapsed or when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of one round.
In the configuration, the first round is ended when two or more game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a before 0.5 seconds have elapsed. In other words, the end condition is set so that the first round is ended by almost certainly having the upper limit number (2 balls) of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a if the player hits the ball from the right, but the end condition is not limited to this. For example, the first round may be ended in a period of time in which it is difficult to enter the game ball even if the player hits the ball from the right aiming at the right specific winning hole 65a after the first round has started. Specifically, the first round may be ended when 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the first round has started, or when 10 or more game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a before 0.5 seconds have elapsed. When configured in this manner, if the game ball is not passing over the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the time the game ball enters the operating winning port 660, it is possible to provide a gameplay that increases the likelihood that the first round will end without a single game ball entering the right specific winning port 65a.
Therefore, for a player who wants to win a prize ball in the first round, before the game ball enters the operational winning hole 660 in the jackpot waiting state, the game ball can be shot toward the opening and closing door 65f1 and then aimed at the operational winning hole 660. This can improve the player's interest in the game in the jackpot waiting state.

FIG. 5 is a top view of the opening and closing door 65f1 as seen from the vertical top side. As shown in FIG. 5, in the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, passage detection sensors 228a to 228f capable of detecting the passage of a game ball are embedded in a meandering path along which the game ball can (easily) roll. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are arranged at a distance at least greater than the diameter of the game ball in the path formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. These passage detection sensors 228a to 228f are composed of known optical sensors that output H (high) when a game ball is placed above them and output L (low) when there is nothing obstructing the upper side. In this first embodiment, these passage detection sensors 228a to 228f
The combination of the outputs is monitored by the voice and lamp control device 113.
During the jackpot waiting state, the device is configured to be able to execute a performance that suggests an estimate of the number of game balls flowing down the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 according to a combination of the outputs of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. That is, the device is configured to be able to execute a performance that suggests the degree of advantage when the game balls enter the operation winning hole 660. As a result, by having the game balls enter the operation winning hole 660 at a timing that suggests that more game balls are flowing down the opening and closing door 65f1 according to the performance content, it is possible to more easily make a larger number of game balls enter the over-winning state. Therefore, the player can more easily aim for the over-winning state. Details of the waiting state performance executed during this jackpot waiting state will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

7(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the display mode during the standby state presentation executed in the jackpot standby state. As shown in FIG. 7(a), when the jackpot standby state is entered, a display area HR1 displaying the words "Jackpot confirmed!" is formed on the upper side of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front. The display content of this display area HR1 allows the player to easily recognize that a jackpot has been confirmed (the player has obtained the right to win a jackpot). In addition, below the display area HR1, the third pattern combination (final stop pattern) that was finally stopped (confirmed) in the variable display presentation executed before the jackpot standby state was entered is displayed.
By displaying the final stop symbol even during the jackpot waiting state, the player can easily check at any time whether the jackpot this time is a probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot.

On the right side of the final stop pattern as viewed from the front, a chance meter CM is displayed that is vertically long and vertically divided into six small areas. Each area constituting the chance meter CM is configured to be variable between an unlit appearance and an illuminating appearance, and the number of illuminating small areas is configured to suggest the degree of advantage when a game ball enters the operating winning hole 660. More specifically, the number of small areas is configured to be set to an illuminating appearance (illuminating state) in order (priority) from the lower small area according to the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. In other words, it is suggested that at least the number of game balls in the chance meter CM that are illuminating (illuminating state) are passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 (when the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened, they can be entered into the right specific winning hole 65a). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the small areas that appear to be illuminated in the Chance Meter CM will be referred to as "gauges," the number of small areas that appear to be illuminated will be referred to as "gauge number," and the change in the appearance of the small areas to illuminate will be referred to as "accumulating the gauge."

Below the final stop pattern, the words "Aim for "GO!" to charge the meter!" and
A display area HR2 is formed in which the words "Time it right and aim for the upper right corner!!" and an image suggesting that the player aim for the activated winning hole 660 are displayed. The display content of this display area HR2 indicates to the player the normal ball entry hole (through gate) 67 (
It can be easily understood that by aiming at the target (see FIG. 2), the gauge number of the chance meter CM displayed on the right side of the display screen as seen from the front can be increased. As described above, the gauge number of this chance meter CM is changed in conjunction with the detection contents of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f disposed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1.
By shooting game balls with a shooting strength (shooting speed) sufficient to enter the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the game balls can also reach the variable winning device 65 located downstream. Therefore, by shooting game balls continuously in the direction in which the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is located, the game balls also continuously reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65. In this state, the game balls are opened and closed in accordance with the display content of the display area HR2.
By shooting the game ball aiming at 60 (i.e., with a shooting strength of 95% to 100%), a big win is started and the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened. This allows the game ball flowing down the opening and closing door 65f1 to win (enter) the right specific winning hole 65a. As described above, a rotating member 670a that rotates at a constant rotation speed is provided on the left side of the operating winning hole 660 when viewed from the front. This rotating member 670a can prevent the game ball from entering the operating winning hole 660 depending on its rotation position, so that the game ball can be shot at a launch timing that takes into account not only the gauge number of the chance meter CM but also the rotation position of the rotating member 670a. This can further increase the player's interest in the game during the big win waiting state.

Fig. 7(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the gauge of the chance meter CM is filled to three. As shown in Fig. 7(b), when the game ball is passing above the three passing detection sensors 228c to 228e, the outputs of these three sensors become H (high). The sound lamp control device 113 detects the number of sensors that are outputting H and reflects this in the state of the chance meter CM. In the example of Fig. 7(b), the outputs of the three sensors (passing detection sensors 228c to 228e) are H, so the gauge of the chance meter CM is filled to three.
In this manner, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 is detected by the passing detection sensors 228a to 228f, and the number of game balls passing through is displayed as the gauge number of the chance meter CM according to the detection result, so that the timing when the player should aim for the activated winning hole 660 can be made easier to understand for the player. Therefore, even players who have little experience playing with the pachinko machine 10 can easily intuitively understand the timing when to aim for the activated winning hole 660. This allows even players who play for the first time to play casually, so that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state, the gauge number of the chance meter CM indicates the approximate number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, thereby indicating the degree of advantage when the game balls enter the operating winning hole 660.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of gauges in the chance meter CM may indicate the degree of advantage in winning the big win.
The number of gauges may indicate the type of jackpot, thereby indicating to the player the degree of advantage that may be obtained if the game ball enters the operation winning hole 660. Also, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot may be indefinite when the jackpot is confirmed, and the number of rounds of the operation winning hole 660 may be set to 0.
The number of rounds for the jackpot may be determined by lottery when the gauge number passes 60. The number of rounds to be determined by lottery executed when the gaming ball enters the operating winning hole 660 may be suggested to the player as to the degree of advantage that may be expected when the gaming ball enters the operating winning hole 660 by suggesting the number of rounds based on the gauge number.

Returning to Fig. 2, the explanation will be continued. An attachment space K1 for attaching a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13. The certificate stamp, etc. attached in this attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Fig. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in Fig. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 4 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

Furthermore, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to each other by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and it is difficult to peel off the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board box 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover side will be cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and paying out game balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The tank 130 is successively replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of game balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply unit 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the power supply unit 115. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. Note that in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the dispensing control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the lottery for the big win, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery for the display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 12) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 12. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, settings for the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery for the display result of the second symbol display device 83.

The settings for the big win lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are as follows:
The first winning random number counter C1 is used for drawing the big win, the first winning type counter C2 is used for selecting the big win symbol, the stop type counter C3 is used for selecting the stop type, the change type counter CS1 is used for selecting the change pattern, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. The second winning random number counter C4 is used for drawing the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.
Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches a maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 30), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64.
The RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. The RAM 203 is also provided with an execution area 203c, and stores the first winning random number counter C1,
The values of the first winning type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.
The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas in accordance with the timing at which the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first win random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 399) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 399 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 399). In particular, when the first win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first win random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and
It is updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 20.
The game ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the number 3. Meanwhile, the game ball is stored in the second ball entrance 6
If the ball lands on 40, the value is stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

As described above, the value of the random number that results in a special jackpot is stored in the ROM 20 of the main control device 110.
The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(b)) stored in the memory 201 is set, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. The first winning random number table 202a is divided into two types: one for a low probability of a special symbol (period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and one for a high probability of a special symbol jackpot that is higher than the low probability (period in which the special symbol is in a high probability state), and the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot included in each type is set differently (see FIG. 9(b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot different, the probability of a jackpot is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (
In this embodiment, the value is updated once for each timer interrupt process, and when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the lottery for special symbols is not being executed). On the other hand, when a gaming ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the lottery for special symbols is not being executed).

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is not a random number that results in a jackpot for a special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that which occurs when the special pattern is missed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 203c is a random number that results in a special jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be that of the special jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399.
In the case of a low probability of a special symbol, there are two random numbers that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random numbers "0, 1" are stored in the first jackpot random number table for low probability (see FIG. 9).
(See 202a1 in (b)). In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 400
Since the total number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is 2, the probability of winning a special jackpot is:
The random number value (counter value) that results in a jackpot is the same for the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the probability of a special symbol is high, there are 20 random numbers that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the values "0 to 19" are stored in the first jackpot random number table for high probability (Figure 9
(See 202a2 in (b)). In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers is 400
Since the total number of random numbers that can result in a jackpot is 20, the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol is 1/20.

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is 0 to
99. As shown in FIG. 10A, the first special symbol is selected as a big win, and the value of the first win type counter C2 becomes "0 to 4".
If the value is "5 to 64", the jackpot type will be "jackpot B" (5 rounds of chance jackpot), and if the value is "65 to 99", the jackpot type will be "jackpot C".
(5 rounds normal jackpot).

On the other hand, if the second special symbol is selected as a big win, the value of the first win type counter C2 becomes "0
If the value is "1 to 4", the jackpot type will be "jackpot D" (16 rounds of guaranteed jackpot). If the value is "5 to 64", the jackpot type will be "jackpot E" (10 rounds of guaranteed jackpot), and if the value is "65 to 99", the jackpot type will be "jackpot F" (10 rounds of regular jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that six types of winning types (jackpots A to F) are determined by the type of special pattern and the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 99). In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81,
After a reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops one symbol before or after the reach symbol, i.e., a "reach that is not before or after a reach symbol" (e.g., 98, 99), after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol, i.e., a "reach that is not before or after a reach symbol" (e.g., in the range of 90 to 97), and a "complete miss" (e.g., in the range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is updated to RA.
The value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (execution area 203c when the lottery for the special symbol is not being executed) of M203. Also, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (execution area 203c when the lottery for the special symbol is not being executed) of RAM203.

The random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. In this embodiment, the table is divided into a table for when the special symbol has a high probability and a table for when the special symbol has a low probability, and the range of the random number value set for each losing stop type is changed depending on the table. This is because, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of high probability of a special symbol or a state of low probability of a special symbol,
This is to change the selection ratio of the stop types.

For example, in a high probability state, a table for high probability in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "complete miss" is wide, from 0 to 89, is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur, and "complete miss" is likely to be selected. In this table, the "reach for front or rear miss" is narrowed to 98, 99, and the "reach other than front or rear miss" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach for front or rear miss" or "reach other than front or rear miss." In addition, in a low probability state, a table for low probability in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "complete miss" is narrowed to 0 to 79 in order to ensure the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 is selected, making it difficult to select "complete miss."

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear miss" is widened to 80 to 97, making it easier to select "reach other than front and rear miss". Therefore, in a low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with long presentation times, so that the time for the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is more likely to be continuously performed. Note that in the latter table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear miss" is also set to 98, 99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode, such as so-called normal reach and super reach. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. The variation type counter CS1
Based on the determined fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114
The reach type and detailed pattern change mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are determined by the above. The value of the change type counter CS1 is updated once every time the main process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the main process.
In addition, the variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11(a)) storing the random number value for determining one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the main control device 1.
10 in the ROM 202 .

Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to Figures 11(a) to 11(d). As shown in Figure 11(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see Figure 11(b)) and a loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 as tables for selecting a variation pattern based on the lottery of the first special symbol.
At least a variable pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 11(c)) and a variable pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 11(d)) for misses are defined.

First, the big win variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 11(b). FIG. 11(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the big win variation pattern table 202d1. The big win variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win. The big win variation patterns include various normal reaches (3
0 seconds), various super reaches (60 seconds), and special reaches (90 seconds). In the big win fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Specifically, the range of "0 to 50" as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of various normal reaches (30 seconds), the range of "51 to 179" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of various super reaches (60 seconds), and the range of "180 to 198" corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of various special reaches (90 seconds). When selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 11(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the loss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. The loss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss in a low probability state of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, as described above, the stop type is determined by the value of the stop type selection counter C3 whether the stop type is a complete loss (non-reach) or a reach-loss (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown). Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete loss is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", a loss reach (front and rear loss reach, reach other than front and rear loss) is set.

Here, when the fluctuation pattern type is a complete miss, either a short miss (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or a long miss (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set.
For a long miss (10 seconds), the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to "0 to 98", and for a long miss (10 seconds), the judgment value is set to "99 to 198".

In addition, for missed reaches, the range of the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149" for various missed normal reaches (30 seconds), "150 to 197" for various missed super reaches (60 seconds), and "198" for various missed special reaches (90 seconds).
are set respectively.

In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss during the normal game state, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type and sets the miss (normal) variable pattern table 2
Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from 02d2, a fluctuation pattern is selected from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

FIG. 11(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This miss (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation time) to be selected when the special symbol lottery is a miss in the special symbol probability change state. In this miss (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3, the value of the set variation type counter CS1 is set to the miss (
This is different from the fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (usually).

As described above, when the game state is a sure-win game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table not shown, a complete miss is determined, and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", a miss reach (front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss) is determined.

In this way, in the case of a probability variation game state, the probability of reaching a winning position when a player misses is set lower than in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time required for a miss to become longer during a probability variation game state, which results in a longer period until a big win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted during a probability variation game state where a big win is likely to occur, which makes the player feel bored.

Returning to Fig. 12, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed through the through gate 67, and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 10(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In addition, this second winning random number table is divided into two types: one for low probability of normal symbols (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and one for high probability of normal symbols (period in which the normal symbol is in the time-saving state) in which the probability of a winning normal symbol is higher than that at the low probability, and the number of random numbers that result in a big win included in each type is set differently (see FIG. 10(b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a winning symbol different, the probability of a winning normal symbol is changed between low probability of normal symbols and high probability of normal symbols.

As shown in Fig. 10(b), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that will result in a normal symbol win, and the values are "5" to "28." In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is 24 out of a total of 240, so the probability of a special symbol winning is "1/10."

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state for a normal symbol, when a game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a variable normal symbol for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a win, and the second
After the variable display on the symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is "○".
The symbol is lit up and the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 lights up and displays "0.
In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state for a normal symbol, if a normal symbol wins, the electric device 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1".
The opening time and number of times can be set as desired. For example, it may be set to open for 0.5 seconds x 2 times.

On the other hand, when the probability of winning a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that will result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, ranging from 5 to 204. These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of winning a special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240.
Since the total number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is 200, the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol is 1/1.2.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a variable normal symbol for three seconds.
If the value of the winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning symbol. In this case, after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 is finished, the "○" pattern is lit as the stopping pattern (second pattern), and the electric role 640a is turned on for "1 second x 2
In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the probability of a normal symbol is low, and further, the opening period of the electric device 640a becomes very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 1 second x 2 times), so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability of a normal symbol, the electric device 64a opens only for "1 second x 2 times" if the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 2 times."

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see Figure 21) and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see Figure 30).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control device 110
Depending on the values of these counters, etc., the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed, such as drawing a jackpot lottery, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83.

8 to continue the explanation. The RAM 203 includes a counter buffer shown in FIG. 12, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, an I/O buffer, and the like.
The RAM 203 has a work area in which values such as 0 and 1 are stored.
Even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power being turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see Figure 30) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is executed during the start-up processing when the power is turned on (see Figure 29). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, an NMI is generated as a power outage processing.
The interrupt process (see FIG. 28) is executed immediately.

Next, the specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG.
2A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data described above, a first win random number table 202a, a first win type selection table 202b, a second win type selection table 202c, and a third win type selection table 202d.
At least a winning random number table 202c and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored.

The first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 9B) is a table for counting the first winning random number counter C1.
This is a data table that specifies the correspondence between the value of and the lottery result. Specifically, in a low probability state of a special symbol, the range of the judgment value that is determined as a jackpot is specified as "0, 1" (see 202a1 in FIG. 9(b)), and in a high probability state (high probability state) of a special symbol,
The range of values for determining a jackpot is set to "0 to 19" (see 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)). If the value of the first win random number counter C1 obtained based on the start winning matches any of the values corresponding to the jackpot set in the first win random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(b)), it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10(a)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is specified in correspondence with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot of a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" is associated with "big win A" (FIG. 10(a)
(See 202b1 of the first winning type counter C2). This "jackpot A" is a jackpot with 8 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a "special symbol probability state" that continues until the next jackpot, and a "normal symbol time-saving state" are granted.
Of the 100 counter values, there are 5 counter values that will be the "Big Win A", so the probability that the "Big Win A" will be determined when the first special pattern is selected is 5% (5/100).
This "jackpot A" is the most advantageous type of jackpot among the jackpots of the first special symbol, since it has the most rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol, and the advantageous "special symbol probability variable state" and "normal symbol time-saving state" are given after the jackpot ends.

For the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "5 to 64".
"Big Win B" is defined in correspondence with the "Big Win B" (see 202b2 in FIG. 10(a)). This "Big Win B" is a big win with 5 rounds, and after the end of the big win, a "special symbol probability state" that continues until the next big win and a "normal symbol time-saving state" are given. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 60 counter values are "Big Win B", so the rate at which "Big Win B" is determined when the first special symbol is selected as a big win is 60% (60/100). Although this "Big Win B" has a small number of rounds, it is a relatively advantageous big win type for players because, like "Big Win A", it is given a favorable "special symbol probability state" and a "normal symbol time-saving state" after the end of the big win.

For the first special symbol, a "big win C" is associated with the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "65 to 99" (see 202b3 in FIG. 10(a)).
This "jackpot C" is a jackpot that has 5 rounds and that, after the jackpot, is given a "normal symbol time-saving state" that continues until 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 35 counter values that become "jackpot C", so the probability of "jackpot C" being determined when a jackpot is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol is 35% (35/100). This "jackpot C"
Since the number of rounds is small and the game state after the jackpot ends is less favorable than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", this is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10(a), for the second special symbol, the first winning type counter C
The value of 2 is set to the range of "0 to 4" and is associated with "Big Win D" (Figure 1
0(a) 202b4). This "jackpot D" is a jackpot with 16 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a "special symbol probability state" that continues until the next jackpot, and a "normal symbol time-saving state" are granted. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 5 counter values that become "jackpot D", so the probability of "jackpot D" being determined when a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol is 5% (50%).
This "jackpot D" has the most number of rounds and also provides an advantageous gaming state after the jackpot ends, making it the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

For the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "5 to 64".
A "jackpot E" is associated with the first special symbol and is stipulated (see 202b5 in FIG. 10(a)). This "jackpot E" is a jackpot that lasts 10 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a "special symbol guaranteed variable state" that continues until the next jackpot, and a "normal symbol time-saving state" are granted. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first jackpot type counter C2, 60 counter values are "jackpot E", so the probability that a "jackpot E" will be determined when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol is 60% (60/100). This "
Although "Jackpot E" has fewer rounds than "Jackpot D," the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to an advantageous game state similar to "Jackpot A,""JackpotB," and "Jackpot D," and is therefore a type of jackpot that is advantageous to the player.

For the second special symbol, a "big win F" is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 10(a)).
This "jackpot F" is a jackpot with 10 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, a "normal symbol time-saving state" is granted, which continues until 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 35 counter values that become "jackpot F", so if the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot,
The probability of winning the "Big Win F" is 35% (35/100). Although the number of rounds of this "Big Win F" is greater than the first special symbol big wins ("Big Win A" to "Big Win C"), the game state after the big win is unfavorable, so it is a big win type that is unfavorable to the player.

In this way, if the second special symbol is selected as the jackpot, the number of rounds is greater than that of the first special symbol, so the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol.
The lottery is structured so that the probability is the same whether it is for the special symbol or the second special symbol (65% for a special jackpot, 35% for a regular jackpot).

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 10(b)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are specified (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbols, "5 to 28" are specified as the judgment values for winning the normal symbols (see FIG. 10(b)).
) 202c1). In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is stipulated as the judgment value for the normal symbol to be a winning symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 10(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the value of the second winning random number table 2
02c to determine whether or not a normal pattern has been won.

The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is specified for each display mode. Note that the details of the fluctuation pattern table 202d are as described above in the explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 13, the RAM 2
03 is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203
b, execution area 203c, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d, first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2
The memory device has at least a memory area 203z, a probability change flag 203h, a time-saving counter 203i, a ball waiting flag 203j, a big win start flag 203k, a big win in progress flag 203m, and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas is provided with a first winning random number counter C1, a first
The values of the winning type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial entry), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the available areas of the four reserve areas (reservation area 1 to reserve area 4) in order of the area number (1 to 4) starting from the area with the smallest area number. In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the oldest prize is stored, and the reserve area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest prize. Note that if data is stored in all four reserve areas, nothing new is stored.

Thereafter, when the main control device 110 draws for a special pattern, the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area 203c (see Figure 12), and a determination such as the drawing of the special pattern is made based on the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 stored in that execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area 203c, the reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, the reserved areas in which the winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 3) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are emptied.
Data shifting is performed only for reserved area 4.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas, similar to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In this second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning into the second ball entrance 640 is stored. The method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The execution area 203c is a memory area in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 used for executing the lottery for the special symbols are stored.
The value of C3, the first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 2
02b, etc., and a lottery for a special symbol is executed.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d has one execution area and four reserved areas (reservation 1 area to reservation 4 area). Each of these areas stores the second winning random number counter C4. More specifically, when the game ball enters the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67,
When the ball passes through the counter C4, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) in the order of the area number (first to fourth) from the smallest area number. In other words, like the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the order of winning is maintained and data corresponding to the winning is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a lottery for a winning normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area is
Based on the value, a lottery is held to determine whether the regular symbol will win.

In addition, when data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes vacant, so a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number smaller by 1, as in the case of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of four (see S404 in FIG. 24).
3e is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of a special symbol is executed (S210 in FIG. 22).
reference).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variable display of the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 22 and S405 in FIG. 24). The reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is changed.
This is a command sent to 3.

The voice lamp control device 113 controls the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol by a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is changed.
In this way, even if the number of reserved balls of the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the deviation can be corrected by the next received reserved ball number command.

The voice and lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command,
Each time the number of reserved balls changes, a reserved ball number display command for notifying the number of reserved balls is sent to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it counts up to a maximum value of four.
On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S2
05). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command, like the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 up to a maximum of four. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is initially set to zero, and is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four each time the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases (see S704 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 26).

When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g
If the value of (the number of reserved times M of the variable display in the normal pattern) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203d
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g is 4, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 2
No new information is stored in the field 03d (S703 in FIG. 27: No).

The probability change flag 203h is a flag indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state of a special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state of a special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a special symbol. Also, as described above, during the probability change state of a special symbol, the time-saving state of a normal symbol is entered. Therefore, if the probability change flag 203h is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in a probability change state and also that the normal symbol is in a time-saving state.

The initial value of the probability variation flag 203h is set to OFF, and the probability variation jackpot ("Jackpot A
When the winning combination is "Big Win A,""Big Win B,""Big Win D," or "Big Win E," the probability change flag 203h is set to ON at the end of the big win (see S1215 in FIG. 32). Also, the probability change flag 203h is reset to OFF when a big win game starts (see S2
(See reference 19).

This probability change flag 203h is referred to in the special symbol variation start process to determine whether the game state is a probability change state or not (see S302 in FIG. 23). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S213) is executed, a lottery for a special symbol is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 23, S213), the probability change flag 203h is referred to, and if it is on, a lottery for a special symbol is performed based on the first winning random number table 202a for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)). On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203h is off, a lottery for a special symbol is performed based on the first winning random number table 202a for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9(b)).

In addition, the probability change flag 203h is also referred to in order to determine whether the game state is in the time-saving state in the normal symbol variation process (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 26).
3i is referred to, and if the probability variable flag 203h is on or the value of the time-saving counter 203i is 1 or more, it is determined that the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress, and a lottery for the normal pattern is performed based on the second winning random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 10(b)) (see S609 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the probability variable flag 203h is off and the value of the time-saving counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the normal pattern is in the normal state, and a lottery for the normal pattern is performed based on the second winning random number table 202c for low probability (see 202c1 in FIG. 10(b)) (see S610 in FIG. 26). In addition, in the normal pattern variation process, the probability variable flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal pattern and the opening time of the electric role 640a in the case of a winning normal pattern (see S614, S620 in FIG. 26).

The time-saving counter 203i is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols. If the value of the time-saving counter 203i is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203i is 0 and the probability bonus flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state for normal symbols. The time-saving counter 203i is initially set to zero, and whenever a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control device 110 and a normal jackpot is obtained, the value is increased to 1 at the end of the normal jackpot.
00 (see S1214 in FIG. 32). In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot, if a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol, the value is set to 0 when setting the start of the jackpot (see S219 in FIG. 22).

When a lottery for a winning normal symbol is performed, the value of the time-saving counter 203i and the state of the probability-changing flag 203h are referenced. If the value of the time-saving counter 203i is 1 or more or the probability-changing flag 203h is on, it is determined that the time-saving normal symbol is in the normal state. In this case, a lottery for a winning normal symbol is performed based on the second winning random number table for high probability (S609 in FIG. 26).
On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203i is 0 and the probability-changing flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol is in effect, and a lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the second winning random number table for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 26).

The ball entry wait flag 203j is a flag that indicates whether or not the machine is in a jackpot wait state, in which the start of a jackpot is awaited until a gaming ball enters the operational winning hole 660. When the ball entry wait flag 203j is on, it means that the machine is in a jackpot wait state, and when the ball entry wait flag 203j is off, it means that the machine is not in a jackpot wait state. The ball entry wait flag 203j is set to on when a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot has elapsed (see S220 in FIG. 22). The ball entry wait flag 203j is also set to off when a gaming ball enters the operational winning hole 660 during the jackpot wait state (see S220 in FIG. 3).
(See S1104 in 1.) While the ball entry waiting flag 203j is on, a ball entry into the active winning hole 660 is treated as valid (when a ball entry is detected, a big win is started).

The jackpot start flag 203k is a flag that indicates whether or not to start a jackpot. If the jackpot start flag 203k is on, it means that it is time to start a jackpot (the game ball has entered the operation winning hole 660 and the jackpot waiting state has ended).
If it is off, it means that it is not the time to start the big win. This big win start flag 203k is set to on when a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 during the big win waiting state (see S1103 in FIG. 31).
is set to OFF when the start of a jackpot is set (see S1203 in FIG. 32).

The jackpot flag 203m is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. When the jackpot flag 203m is on, it means that a jackpot is in progress, and when it is off, it means that a jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203m is set to on when a jackpot is generated by drawing a special symbol and a jackpot (special game state) starts (see S1203 in FIG. 32). Also, it is set to off when the jackpot (special game state) ends (see S1217 in FIG. 32). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the jackpot flag 203m is referenced to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress (see S1217 in FIG. 22).
(See S201 of the previous section).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

In this manner, various counters and flags are provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the right specific winning hole 65a, and the left specific winning hole 650.
A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing door 65f1 that closes and opens a, a solenoid for driving an electric role, etc., and a rotating body motor 670c for rotating the rotating member 670a are connected to the input/output port 205, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also provided with various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown), a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, and
) circuit 253 is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R
Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the AM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by driving a payout motor 216. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 28) is immediately executed as the power failure process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112, when an instruction to launch a game ball is given by the main control device 110, controls the ball launching unit 112a so that the strength of the game ball is set according to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and a launch stop switch 5 is pressed to stop the launch of the game ball.
With 1b off (not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and a game ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 controls the output of voice from the voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from the lamp display device (such as the illumination unit 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, such as the variable display performance (variable display), performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
5, the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, the frame button 22, etc. are connected.

The sound and lamp control device 113 is configured to monitor the output of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f, and is capable of figuring out the approximate number of game balls flowing down the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 from the number of sensors whose output is H (high). In the big win waiting state, the state (gauge amount) of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed in accordance with the number of game balls grasped according to the number of sensors. This allows the player to know the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by causing a game ball to enter the operating winning hole 660 (the amount of prize balls that can be obtained by causing a game ball to enter the opening and closing door 65f1).
The number of game balls that will enter when the door 65f1 is opened can be visually understood in an easily understandable manner. Therefore, during the jackpot waiting state, the player can be made to hit the balls to the right more aggressively with a shooting intensity (a shooting intensity of less than 95%) that does not reach the activated winning hole 660, and can be made to try to make more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Therefore, the interest in the game during the jackpot waiting state can be improved.

In addition, the voice and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach, and also instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, the display control device 114 sends a back image change command including information about the changed stage to the third symbol display device 81 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage.
Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 judges an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the type of the error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (e.g., vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail.
2 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is used to determine more detailed variation content from the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110, based on the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variation modes. Here, one of multiple types of variation mode is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 14B, the R
The AM 223 will be described. Fig. 14B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a fluctuation time counter 223f, and a standby state performance flag 223c.
At least a memory area 223g, a level counter 223h, a game status storage area 223i, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has four memory areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In this pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is detected in the main control device 110, various information (win/lose, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when a lottery for a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110 from each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in response to the start winning, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the various information notified by the winning information command (win/lose, stop type, and change pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically,
The extracted winning information is stored in the four empty areas (first area to fourth area) in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth area). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the oldest winning event is stored, and the first area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event.

The first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting count) corresponding to the drawing of the first special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110 up to a maximum of four times, and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls corresponding to the drawing of the second special pattern up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and outputs the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 20 stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110, and the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c manage the number of reserved balls for each type of special pattern.

Specifically, when the main control unit 110 adds to the number of reserved balls in the variable display due to a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, or when the main control unit 110 executes a variable display for a special pattern and subtracts the number of reserved balls, it sends a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e or the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, and stores it in the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4308 in FIG. 36).
b, and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c is updated, so that the main control device 11
0, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 20
Its value can be updated in sync with the value of 3f.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223
The value of c is used to display the reserved ball number pattern in the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c, and transmits the display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of an image so that the reserved ball number patterns corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, are displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the values of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c are changed in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 also changes in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110.
The value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203e and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f can be changed in synchronization with each other. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls whose variable display is being reserved.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4302 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4502 in FIG. 38). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the main process (FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221.
In the command output process (S4102) of the command output process (see FIG. 1), the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control of the variation performance is started so that the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4305 in FIG. 36), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4507 in FIG. 38). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The variable time counter 223f is a counter that counts the variable time of the variable display of the special pattern. When a variable pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern notified by the variable pattern command is set in the variable time counter 223f.

The standby state presentation flag 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the standby state presentation (see Figs. 7(a) and (b)) is being executed. When the standby state presentation flag 223g is on, it means that the standby state presentation is being executed, and when it is off, it means that the standby state presentation is not being executed. This standby state presentation flag 223g is set to on when a standby state command indicating that a jackpot standby state has been entered is received from the main control device 110 and the start of the standby state presentation is set (see S4403 in Fig. 37). In addition, this standby state presentation flag 223g is set to off when an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot is received from the main control device 110 (see S4406 in Fig. 37).

The level counter 223h is a counter that indicates the gauge number (level) of the chance meter CM displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the standby state presentation (see FIG. 7(a) and (b)).
8f, is updated in conjunction with the number of sensors whose output is H (high) (FIG. 35
(See S4204 in step S4204.) That is, the number of sensors whose outputs are H (high) is set as the counter value.

The game status storage area 223i is a memory area for storing data corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10. This game status storage area 223i is updated every time a status command is received from the main control device 110, which is output every time a change occurs in the game status of the pachinko machine 10 (see S4310 in FIG. 36). The game status storage area 223i is, for example, configured as a 1-byte memory area, and is configured so that the game status can be specified by the status of the lowest two bits. More specifically, for example, the lowest bit indicates whether or not the normal pattern is in a time-saving state, and the second lowest bit indicates whether or not the special pattern is in a guaranteed bonus state. Therefore,
In the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "normal state of normal symbols", the lower two bits are "00B
" and in the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "time-saving state of normal symbols", the lowest two bits are "01B", and in the "probability variable state of special symbols" and the "time-saving state of normal symbols", the lowest two bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in this game state storage area 223i.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command memory area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a timer that counts the performance time. The command memory area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing corresponding to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
The display control device 114 controls the variable display (variable performance) of the third symbol and the continuous notice performance in the reel. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown).
A voltage of 4 volts is input to the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
The inverter generates a 12-volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc., with these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
The interrupt process (see FIG. 28) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes:
MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and resident video RA
M235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, and an input port 23
8, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, and the character ROM 234.
, an image controller 237 is connected via a bus line 240. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model having a different probability of winning a jackpot with a special pattern or a different number of prize balls paid out for one jackpot with a special pattern, there are models having the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work R
AM233 will now be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command to set is set to the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
is stored in the

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a that allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows for sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This allows for a reduction in the number of parts in the display control device 114, which in turn reduces manufacturing costs and suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have the problem of slow read speeds, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time each time that data is read. As such, because the read speed of NAND flash memories is slow, the MPU 231 does not directly read data from the character ROM 2.
If the control program is read from MPU 231 and various processes are executed, it may take a long time to read the instructions that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as MPU 231, this may result in a deterioration in the processing performance of the display control device 114.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) as described later.
M) and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The character ROM 234 stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third
This is a memory that stores data of an image to be displayed on the pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and the character ROM 234 is
The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the M234, which will be described later, is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
An image controller 237 is also connected to the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 reads image data stored in the character memory area 234a2, which will be described later, from the character memory area 234a2.
A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237
Transfer to M236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND type flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR type ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 which stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 which stores data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily made large-capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND type flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, so that the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the occurrence rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 232 via the bus line 240, for example.
Based on the address transmitted from the address read/write unit 37 , the corresponding data is read from the NAND type flash memory 234 a or the like, and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a, by its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.
34a. The ROM 34 performs the well known data address translation so that data can be read from and written to 34a.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, which includes the error bit.
Even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used as the M234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images based on erroneous data.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks in the NAND flash memory 234a and prevents access to the defective data blocks.
The MPU 231 and the image controller 237 each store data in the NAND flash memory 234a.
Without considering the address positions of different defective data blocks,
4 can be easily accessed.
Even if the flash memory 234a is used, the access control to the character ROM 234 can be prevented from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND type flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the buffer RAM 234.
If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from N
The data is read from the AND type flash memory 234a (or the NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process and writes the data corresponding to the specified address onto the bus line 24.
0 to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237.

The buffer RAM 234c is configured with two banks, each of which is a NAND
The ROM controller 234b can set one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a. This allows the ROM controller 234b to output data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other bank, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page of data including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. This allows the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 to be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. The NOR ROM 234d stores a first program storage area 234a1 for storing, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231.
At least a program memory area 234d1 is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes this boot program. As a result, the display control device 114
In the first program memory area 23, various controls can be made executable.
4d1 is one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e.,
The first program storage area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set appropriately in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code and also points the instruction pointer 23
1a, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d first from the buffer RAM 234a while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d.
The instruction code at the corresponding address in the program stored in the buffer R34c is read out.
The data is read from the AM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

In this embodiment, all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 23.
4a, the boot program is stored in the MPU after the system reset is released.
The reason why the predetermined number of instructions, beginning with the instruction to be processed first by 231, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d is as follows: That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to the NAND flash memory in that, when reading data of the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until when the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time from reading the data to setting it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H".
Therefore, the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, the display control device 1
This creates a problem in that control of the third pattern display device 81 at 14 may not start immediately.

In contrast, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in the NOR type ROM 234d, the address "0000H" can be read from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released.
When the address "0000H" is specified, the character ROM 234 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "00
00H" can be received, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 that stores a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., control programs other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first transfers the data in the first program storage area 234 to the data table storage area 233b.
According to the boot program read from the second program memory area 234a1, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a, using a bank of the buffer RAM 234c different from the bank in which the boot program of the first program memory area 234d1 is set.

Here, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is
As described above, since the capacity is equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, when the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H" and the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c,
The boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is read from the program storage area 233 in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1.
When transferring the boot program to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the other bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, and then moves the instruction pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a.
In this way, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231
The MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes.
Instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having a program storage area 233a and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having a program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the following:
The remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included. Meanwhile, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) are all stored in the second program storage area 233b.
4a1, a predetermined amount is stored in the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 23
At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231
Specifically, the second predetermined address is set to the initial setting process (see S6001 in FIG. 39) that is executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 39) that is stored in the program storage area 233a.
The start address of the program corresponding to the program number (see S6002 in the above) is set.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b.
The various processes are executed using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the program.

Therefore, most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 23, which has a slow read speed.
Even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the character ROM 234 and the program storage area 23 of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released,
By transferring the control program to the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is made up of a high-speed DRAM, and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

As described above, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, starting from the instruction that is to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The remaining boot program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234d.
Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the program storage area 233a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a.
By simply adding the OM 234d, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and therefore the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 that accompanies the shortened start-up time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 20) transmitted from the MPU 231, and develops the image in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later, and outputs the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs parallel processing of the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed.
Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of the image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the next frame of the image, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive an image drawing instruction from MPU 231 at each image drawing and display processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the drawing and display processing of an image have not been completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that images are drawn using image data stored in resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, NAND flash memory facilitates large ROM capacity, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, the character ROM 234a, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, can be read at the time of drawing an image.
Since there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from 34, the time required for such reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display has been decided by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, when the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the display control device 114 controls the MPU 231 to transfer image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed.
is configured to instruct the image controller 237. As described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw an image, but when drawing an image, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, and the time required for reading can be omitted, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Moreover, by storing image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured with a 132-kbyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data to the image controller 2 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list.
The instruction to transfer image data to the character ROM 234 includes the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and information on the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236).
The address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) is included in the data.
The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included.

The image controller 237 reads the character data from the character ROM 23 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction.
One block of data is read from a predetermined address of the video RAM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is read out from the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.
Then, the process is repeated until all image data stored in the storage destination address range from the storage destination start address to the storage destination end address specified by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a period of time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is
a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time.
It is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data while the image data is being transferred to the normal video RAM 236.
When 236 is occupied, the video RAMs 235, 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, which prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

Also, the buffer RAM 234c is used to store the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM
Since the transfer of image data to 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 stores image data transferred from the character ROM 234.
The images are stored without being overwritten while the power is on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character design area 235e, and the error message image area 235f are provided. In addition, the power-on variable image area 235b,
At least a third pattern area 235d is provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on.
The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing data corresponding to a power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until all image data to be resident therein is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image to display the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when a game is started by a player while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231
34 transmits a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 39).

Here, the power-on variable image will be described with reference to Fig. 16. Fig. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 transfers image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after power-on, the display control device 114 reads image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 into the power-on main image area 235a.
When the image is transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b, the image is transferred to the resident video RAM 2
The remaining image data to be stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 35.
While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the image data shown in FIG.
When the power is turned on, the main image shown in FIG. 6(a) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

At this time, when the display variable pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variable pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variable pattern, is received, the display control device 114 displays the power-on variable image of the "○" design in the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image as shown in FIG. 16(b), and the power-on variable image of the "○" design in the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image as shown in FIG.
As shown in Fig. 16, the power-on variable image of the "X" symbol and the "O" symbol are alternately displayed in the same position during the variable period. The result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 110 is determined from the display variable pattern command and the display stop type command sent from the voice lamp control unit 113 based on the variable pattern command and the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and if it is a "special symbol big win", the image shown in Fig. 16(b) is displayed for a certain period after the variable performance stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Fig. 16(c) is displayed for a certain period after the variable performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can check the operation of the resident video RAM 235 without worrying that the operation is stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
The process can wait until the transfer of image data to 35 is completed.

In addition, during operation checks at factories during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, the character R
By using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the OM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

In addition, when a player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always present in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Fig. 16(b) and (c) on the third symbol display device 81. This allows a simple variable performance to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b. Therefore, while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the first ball entrance 6
4. If a ball is detected entering the second ball entrance 640, a corresponding variable effect can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to Fig. 15, the explanation will continue. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, referring to Fig. 17, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be explained. Fig. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. Fig. 17(a) shows the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for rear A corresponding to the "sand beach stage", and Fig. 17(b) shows the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for rear A corresponding to the "sand beach stage".
are shown relative to rear face B, which corresponds to the "deep sea stage."

As shown in FIG. 17, the rear images corresponding to the rear faces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and are stored in the character ROM 234.
The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") prepared for each of the backs A and B are configured so that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scroll image, and the display area is sequentially moved to the third pattern display device 81.
Further, when the display area reaches an image between positions c and d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image between positions a and a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described. As shown in FIG. 17(a), the rear image A corresponding to the initial stage, the sandy beach stage, has the entire range of the rear image A, that is, all image data corresponding to positions a to d, stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Usually, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the "sandy beach stage", is displayed. Therefore, by making all image data of the rear image A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sandy beach stage" resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Thus, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), for rear side B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only a portion of that rear side, i.e., image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, is stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.

In order to instantly change the rear image, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, this would require a RAM with a very large capacity to be used as the resident video RAM 235.
This may lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is first displayed when the stage is changed is set to a range from position a to position a' (or the range from FIG. 17(a) to (b)).
, and the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or Figs. 17(a) to 17(b)
) is stored in the rear image area 23 of the resident video RAM 235.
5c, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when a change of stage is decided by a lottery at the start of the variation, the initial position of the back B can be displayed immediately on the third pattern display device 81 by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can be made to scroll or change color over time. Also, since only image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored for the back B, the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

For rear surface B, the range from position a to position b is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the transfer of image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completed from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to normal video RAM 236, so that
After scrolling the range from position a to position b using image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

For the rear side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 15) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear side image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear side images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear side image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the rear B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 have a difference in position b'.
The image data corresponding to the images between position a and position b are stored in a duplicated manner.
Under the control of the image controller 237 by the third symbol display device 81, the image up to the position b is displayed using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.
Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the image at position b
By displaying the image from ' on the third pattern display device 81, the background image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth transition.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions c and d as a display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, and then the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions a and a' as a display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

Returning to FIG. 15, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for always storing the third symbol used in the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is,
The third symbol area 235d includes the third symbol, i.e., the number 9, which is the number from "1" to "9".
Image data corresponding to the main symbol of the third type (see FIG. 6(b)) is always stored.
When performing a variable performance on the symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data in the NAND type flash memory 23.
Even if 4a is used, it is possible to quickly start the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started in the third pattern display device 81 even though the variable performance has started in the first pattern display device 37 after the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, image data corresponding to main symbols not numbered "1" to "9" is also stored in the third symbol area 235d. These image data are used for the demo performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first variable performance stopped. As a result, when the demo performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol in the demo performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol not numbered from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including "young men" and "women" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and by storing data corresponding to these in the character design area 235e, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible for the image controller 237 to draw a specified image by reading image data that is already resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, rather than newly reading corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. This allows the character ROM to read the image data corresponding to the character design area 235e, and the image controller 237 to read the image data.
Since there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be instantly changed even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the type of the error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error.
Since image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 can display the following based on the received error command:
By reading out image data that is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, each error message image can be instantly drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to an error message from the character ROM 234, and therefore eliminates the need to read out image data corresponding to an error message from the character ROM 234.
Even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the memory 34, an error message corresponding to the error command can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

MPU 231 instructs image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area in which the type of image data should be stored, among the sub-areas provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236. In response to this, image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by MPU 231 from character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified predetermined sub-area of image storage area 236a via buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 develops one frame of image in the frame buffer by writing one frame of image drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and while developing the image in one frame buffer, reads out one frame of image information developed earlier from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out an image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer, and outputs the image to the third pattern display device 81.
The image of one frame that has been read out can be displayed on the LCD.

The frame buffer that develops one frame of image and the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read out to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are as follows:
Every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image.
When the frame buffer 236b is specified, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a timing counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a program storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233d, a data table storage area 233e, a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a program storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233d, a data table storage area 233e, a data table storage area 233f, a data table storage area 233b
j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs from the character ROM 234, transfers them to the work RAM 233, and stores them in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter
As described above, the work RA executes various controls using the control program stored in the work RA.
Since M233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed.
Even if the control program is stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complex presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

The data table storage area 233b is an area which stores a display data table which describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance which is displayed based on a command from the main control unit 110, and a transfer data table which specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance which is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RA in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.
M233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU
231 performs the third calculation using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b.
It controls the display of the pattern display device 81. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, the various data tables will be described in detail. First, the display data table is
One is prepared for each performance mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control unit 110, and for example, display data tables corresponding to variable performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The variable performance is a performance that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating the miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is any of the jackpots A to F, the stop pattern indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is about to enter a special game state and that the right specific winning hole 65a and the left specific winning hole 650a, which are normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, while the round effect is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds that will be started from now on.The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is displayed frozen and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening performance, the round performance, the ending performance, and the demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for each variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table corresponds to an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for which one frame of an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit,
It specifies in detail the content of one frame of image (drawing content) to be displayed at that time.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, and also specifies drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the type of sprite.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite is to be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to the magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is information for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through the image. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information for specifying the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined for each address include one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and drawing information for each sprite such as characters used for various effects such as boy images and letters.
One or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time, so only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This rear type is information specifying whether to display either rear A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a rear image different from rear A or B. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rear A or B is to be displayed, the rear type also includes information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When it is determined that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 231 determines the back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery out of the back surfaces A and B as the drawing target, and determines the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is determined that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 determines the back surface image to be displayed based on the back surface type.

In this embodiment, the case where only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the back image that was displayed at the stage when the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information includes, depending on the type of the rear surface, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed and information indicating the time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed.
The display may indicate either the information indicating the elapsed time since the display of the third pattern display device 81 was started, or the type information of the position information together with the back surface type and position information (for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or drawing of an image based on a display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81)
Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) are described with symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The reason for specifying the offset information rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol is that the display of the third symbol in the variable performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous variable performance and the stop symbol of the current variable performance, and the symbol offset information from the start of the change until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is recorded. This allows the fluctuation performance to be stopped at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third pattern is assigned a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third pattern, and by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the predetermined time for switching from the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance is set to be the time during which the third symbol is displayed variably at high speed. While the third symbol is displayed variably at high speed, the third symbol is not visible to the player, so that even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance during that time, so that the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H", describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18) describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" describing the "Start" information and the address describing the "End" information, drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by the display data table are described.

The MPU 231 controls the voice and lamp control device 11 based on commands from the main control device 110.
The display data table to be used is selected according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) sent from the third pattern display device 81, and the selected display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, while the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time a drawing process for one frame is completed, and the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to perform a drawing instruction for that image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this manner, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 controls the main control device 110
A command (e.g.,
Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in accordance with a display variable pattern command, etc., the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed by simply performing the simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d.

Here, if the system is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in conventional pachinko machines, the processing load for starting and executing the program, which becomes complicated and voluminous as the effect images become more diverse, is large, and this limits the processing capacity of the display control device 114, which may result in a limit to the diversification of the effect images that can be controlled.
By simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
It can be displayed as 1.

The reason why a display data table is prepared in this way corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is that in the pachinko machine 10, the presentation to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the results of a lottery held based on the start winning. In contrast, in gaming machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode as described above. In this way, a configuration in which a display data table is prepared in this way corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is a feature of the pachinko machine 10.
This can only be realized by the fact that the configuration of 0 determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the results of a lottery held based on the initial winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to a display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data information and the transfer timing are specified for transferring image data of the sprites not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data of sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, thereby making it possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table stores transfer data information for image data of a sprite (hereinafter referred to as "image data to be transferred") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table (address "0" in FIG. 19).
(These are "001H" and "0097H"). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, Null data is specified, which means that there is no transfer target image data at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (see FIG. 19).
The corresponding address is "0002H".

The transfer data information includes the character ROM in which the transfer target image data is stored.
the start address (the start address of the source) and the end address (the end address of the source) of H.234,
And the top address of the destination (normal video RAM 236) is included.

In addition, in the first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written, as in the display data table, and in the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 19), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is written. Then, in each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is written.

The MPU 231 controls the voice and lamp control device 11 based on commands from the main control device 110.
When the display data table to be used is selected in accordance with a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the data table storage area 233b, if a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, and at the same time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite, which should start being transferred at that time, is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of Fig. 19, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the corresponding address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237.
", Null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should begin, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the generated drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to the specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite is started in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table,
Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a can be used to draw a specified sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is reliably transferred to the character ROM 23 at the desired timing.
4 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the transfer data table, a character RO is
The transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the M234 to the normal video RAM 236. This allows the transfer of the image data to be managed for each sprite, and
Since the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be controlled on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in the load imposed by the transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

In addition, the transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 16(a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c indicates that image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image is stored in the power-on main image area 235 of the resident video RAM.
a or the power-on variable image area 235b, it is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 39). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7705 in FIG. 51(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see FIG. 41 (
b) (see S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see FIG. 41(b)) is performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
41B) and a simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 41B). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 42 to 47) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 48 to 50) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7601 in FIG. 51A). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 51B) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the image data required for the drawing process is stored in the character ROM 234.
A normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) for transferring images from the OM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110.
Based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, the U231
The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the pattern display device 81, selects the display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 20) that describes the image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. This causes the third pattern display device 8
1, a representation corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

The MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 20) which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while incrementing the pointer 233f by one. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that when all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared, so the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, is specified (
That is, if no null data is written), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 20) which is generated for each frame and which describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 and will be described later.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is for designating an address for acquiring the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once in accordance with the storage of the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 41B) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the pointer update process (see S7305 in FIG. 48) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and creates a drawing list (see Figure 20) described below. At the same time, it obtains transfer data information for image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the third symbol display device 81 can easily be displayed.
Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in drawing a sprite is always stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table.
In this way, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in Fig. 20, the drawing list includes a background image, a third design (design 1, design 2, ...), effects (effect 1, effect 2, ...), characters (character 1, character 2, ...) to be used in one frame's image.
The drawing list describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as a reserved ball count symbol 1, a reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., an error symbol. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored.
M236) and its address are described, and the image controller 237
The image data of the sprite is obtained from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes the display position coordinates,
The information includes the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information, and the image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter designation information using a method designated by the information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates.The image controller 237 then writes the drawn image to the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.
36c.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, or a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the sprite (display object) data is stored in the RAM
The type and address are generated according to the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed.
Depending on the sprite type, U231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of that sprite is stored, and easily include that information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 selects, in one frame of image,
Rearrange the sprites in order from the sprite that should be placed in the back to the sprite that should be placed in the front.
Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite is described. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the background image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at an address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (character RO in which the transfer target image data is stored) to the transfer data table buffer 233e.
The image controller 237 adds to the end of the drawing list the storage start address and storage end address in M234 and the storage start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the image data to be transferred is to be stored. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 adds to the end of the drawing list the transfer data information in the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information.
The image data is read from a predetermined area (an area indicated by the starting address and ending address of the storage source) of the normal video RAM 236 and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the presentation time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed, the time counter 23 starts counting every time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B) is executed by the MPU 231.
3h is decremented by one (see S7307 in FIG. 48). As a result, the time counter 233h
When the value becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates whether the corresponding image data is stored in the resident video RAM 23.
5, the flag indicates the storage state, which indicates whether image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 or not.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is set by the MPU 23 during main processing when the power is turned on.
The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the sprite are always set to an unstored state when the image data for the sprite is stored.
Set the storage status for other sprites to "off."

Furthermore, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i to determine whether or not the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7813 in FIG. 52). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets an instruction to transfer that image data (see S7814 in FIG. 52) and instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a.
On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped.
4 to the normal video RAM 236, the processing load on each section of the display control device 114 can be reduced, and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is used to select from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer") to which an image drawn by the image controller 237 is to be expanded.
When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, information on this designated drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7902 in FIG. 53).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which an image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded in the designated drawing target buffer.
7, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, reads out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a display process to display an image on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". In this way, the drawing target buffer is updated to the first frame buffer 236b every time a drawing list is sent.
The drawing list is transmitted every time the MPU 231 executes the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see S6306 in FIG. 41B ) based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image.
When the frame buffer 236b is specified, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to the flowcharts of FIG. 21 to FIG. 32, the MPU 20 in the main control device 110
The control processes executed by the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and an NMI interrupt process that is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.
First, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained, and then the start-up processing and the main processing will be explained.

21 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101).
That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switches is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and
When the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0.
The updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103).
First winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3
and the second winning random number counter C4 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (399, 99, 99, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment), they are decremented by 0.
Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed to set a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, which is a process for displaying the third symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S
104), and then executes a start winning process associated with a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figs. 22 to 25.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passing of the game ball through the through gate 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the launch of the game ball is on, the main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the game ball.

Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG.
This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is a process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether the current state is a big win waiting state or a special symbol big win state (S201).
It is determined whether the jackpot waiting state or the jackpot with a special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), and the process ends.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the game is not in a jackpot waiting state or a special jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S203),
02: No), and obtain the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved variable display times N2 based on the lottery of the second special pattern) (S203). Next, determine whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S204: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (S205), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f changed by the calculation (
The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is then executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (
In the external output process (S1001) of the game (see FIG. 30), the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command and sets the extracted value as RA.
The number of balls stored in the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c of M223 is stored.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on, and in S213
Then proceed to processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f (N2)
When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 (S204: No),
The value of e (the number of times N1 of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol) is obtained (S208),
It is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is greater than 0 (S209).

In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated as it is.
In the process, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 to be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S2
12), and the process proceeds to S213. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213), and this process is terminated. Details of this special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S20
2: Yes), update the change time counter for measuring the change time (S214), and determine whether or not the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed based on the value of the updated change time counter (S215). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S215: No), update the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 (S216), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (
S215: Yes), and set the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (
The setting of the stop symbols is performed in the special symbol variation start process (S2
When the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed,
Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery for a special symbol is performed. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot is determined based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if a special symbol is a jackpot, one of the jackpots A to F is determined based on the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this embodiment, in the case of a jackpot A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, in the case of a jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, in the case of a jackpot C, the green LED is turned on, in the case of a jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on, in the case of a jackpot E, the red LED and the green LED are turned on, and in the case of a jackpot F, the blue LED, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, in the case of a miss, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. In addition, the display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, it is judged whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the sure-change flag 203h is set to OFF, and the value of the time-saving counter 203i is reset to 0 (S219). Then, the ball entry waiting flag 203j is set to ON, and a waiting state command indicating the start of a jackpot waiting state is set (S220), and the process proceeds to S223. The waiting state command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and the M
External output processing (S100) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the PU 201 (described later)
1) is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 113.
When the standby state command is received, the display control device 114 sets a display standby state command for starting a standby state presentation (see Figs. 7(a) and (b)) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 as a command to be output to the display control device 114. As a result, the standby state presentation is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the result of this lottery is a miss for the special symbol (S218
If the value of the time-saving counter 203i is greater than 0 (S221: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203i is decremented by 1 (S221: No).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S221 that the value of the time-saving counter 203i is 0 (S221: No), the process of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223.
When the value of the time-saving counter 203i after subtraction becomes 0 in the process, a state command is set indicating that the game state has changed from the time-saving state of the normal pattern to the normal state of the normal pattern. The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it obtains the game state contained in the state command. This allows the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 to be matched with the state of the actual pachinko machine 10.

In the process of S223, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it sets the stop pattern of the third pattern based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG.
This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22).
Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of b, a lottery (a win/loss judgment) is performed for a "special symbol big win" or a "special symbol miss", and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 38 are also displayed.
This is a process for determining the presentation pattern (variation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c are obtained (S301).

Next, the probability change flag 203h is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state for the special symbol (S302). In this process of S302, if the probability change flag 203h is on, it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state for the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state for the special symbol (not in a probability change state). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state for the special symbol (S302: Yes), a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability (FIG. 9(b)
As described above, the random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set to 20 values from 0 to 19. The value of the first winning random number counter C1 and
When the random numbers of these winning symbols match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. After the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special symbol probability state (is in a special symbol low probability state) (S302: No), the value of the first win random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first win random number table for low probability (FIG. 9(b)
) 202a1) to obtain the lottery result of whether or not the special pattern is a jackpot (
S304). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. If the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that indicates a win (i.e., "0, 1"), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a big win of the special symbol (S305). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big win (S305: Yes), the first winning type counter C2 acquired by the process of S301 is
Based on the value of (S306), the display mode at the time of the big win is set.
The value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained in the process of 01 is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10(a)) to determine the type of the big win. As described above, when a big win is obtained by the lottery of the first special symbol, the first winning type counter C
If the value of 2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a jackpot A (8 rounds of guaranteed jackpot), if it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is determined to be a jackpot B (5 rounds of guaranteed jackpot), if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot C (5 rounds of normal jackpot) (see FIG. 10(a)). On the other hand, if the jackpot is determined by the drawing of the second special symbol,
If the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a jackpot D (16 rounds of guaranteed winning), if it is in the range of "5 to 64", it is determined to be a jackpot E (10 rounds of regular winning), if it is in the range of "65 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot F (10 rounds of regular winning).
It is determined that the round is a normal jackpot (see FIG. 10(a)).

In the process of S306, the first prize is awarded according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to F).
The display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the symbol display device 37 is set. In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A to F) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the change pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S307). When the change pattern is set in the process of S307, the change time (display time) of the change performance in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the change time of the third symbol until it stops at the big win symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the change pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11(a)), and the change pattern (change time) corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 is determined.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S305 that the special symbol is not selected (S30
5: No), and set the display mode when the winning combination is lost (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and the execution area 2
Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the 03c, the third symbol display device 8
The stop type to be displayed in 1 is set to be a reach for a front or rear miss, a reach other than a front or rear miss, or a complete miss.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with a random number value stored in a stop type selection table for high probability to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete miss is set, if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than front and rear miss is set, if it is "98, 99", a reach other than front and rear miss is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with a random number value stored in a stop type selection table for low probability to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete miss is set, if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than front and rear miss is set, if it is "98, 9 ...
If so, set the front and rear reach.

Next, the variation pattern when the winning combination is lost is determined (S309). Here, the first symbol display device 3
The display time of the symbol 7 is set, and the time for which the third symbol is changed until the symbol stops at the losing symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, the RAM 20
The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 3 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the process of S307 or S309 is completed, the process of S307 or S30
A fluctuation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S309 (S310). Next, a counter value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the current fluctuation pattern is set in a fluctuation time counter (S311). Then, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 (S312). These fluctuation pattern command and stop type command are stored in the RAM
The command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in 203, and is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 30). When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22).

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
This start winning process (S105) is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (
This process is executed in the ball entry port 64 (see Figure 21) to determine whether or not there has been a win (start win) at the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640, and if there has been a start win, to execute a reservation process for the values indicated by various counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entry into the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (
S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (the number of reserved times N1 of the variable display of the special symbol) is obtained (S402). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).
403).

Then, if the game ball does not enter the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or if the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 but the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e (N
If 1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.
If a winning ball is entered into the ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S40
5).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S405, the above-mentioned timer interrupt process S
The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in 103 are stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S4
06), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (initial entry) (S407). In this process, as in the process of S401, the entry of the gaming ball into the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the gaming ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f (
The number of times the variable display of the special pattern has been reserved (N2) is obtained (S408), and it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, if there is no winning into the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or if there is a winning into the second ball entrance 640 but the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not less than 4 (i.e., it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if there is a winning into the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S409: Yes), add 1 to the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S411, the above-mentioned timer interrupt process S
The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the process of 103 are stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 of the RAM 203.
Store it in the first of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of b (
S412) and proceed to S413. In the process of S412, similar to the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S413, a look-ahead process is executed to look-ahead the winning or losing from various counter values acquired based on the start winning (S413), and the process ends. The details of this look-ahead process will be described with reference to FIG. 25.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading process (S413).
In step 413, first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected at the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 during this initial winning process (see Figure 24) (S501), and if a new ball has not been detected (S501: No), the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that a new ball has been detected (S50
1: Yes), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected ball entry is the upper limit (i.e., 4) or not (S502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit (S502: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S502 that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit (S502: No), it is determined whether the timing to start the variable display based on the ball entry is a special pattern probability variable state (S503). In this process of S503, it is determined whether the probability variable state is present or not according to the current game state and the result of the pre-reading of the reserved balls reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the reserved balls do not include a jackpot, the current game state and the timing to start the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry match, so it is determined that the current game state is a probability variable state. Also, if the reserved balls include a jackpot, the game state may be changed according to the type of jackpot.
Specifically, if a special jackpot is reserved, the state transitions to the special jackpot state after the jackpot, and if a normal jackpot is reserved, the state transitions to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, the system determines whether the timing of the start of the variable display based on the ball entry detected this time is the special jackpot state or not.

In the process of S503, if it is determined that the start of the fluctuation based on the currently detected ball entry is a special symbol probability state (S503: Yes), the lottery result based on the currently detected ball entry is obtained (S504) based on the type of ball entry port where the ball entry was detected and the first winning random number table for high probability (see 202a2 in FIG. 9(b)), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start of the fluctuation is a special symbol low probability state (S503: No), the lottery result based on the currently detected ball entry is obtained (S505) based on the type of ball entry port where the ball entry was detected and the first winning random number table for low probability (see 202a1 in FIG. 9(b)), and the process proceeds to S506.
transition to.

In the process of S506 executed after the process of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of the ball entrance where the current ball entrance was detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505 (S506), and this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203,
External output processing (S10) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later
01), the signal is sent to the voice and lamp control device 113.
When the winning information command is received, the winning information storage area 223a stores the type of entrance notified by the winning information command and the lottery result in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 26.
This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is a process for controlling the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win or when the second ball entrance 6 is displaying a win.
This includes during the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a associated with the reel 40. If the result of the determination is that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S601: Yes), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not winning (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602).
If the display mode of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is not changing (S602: No),
Next, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (M) is determined to be greater than 0 (S604).
If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g is 0 (S604: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g is decremented by 1 (
S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S606
In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the reserved area 1 → execution area, the reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 →
The data in each area is shifted from the reserved area 2 to the reserved area 4 to the reserved area 3, etc. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is obtained (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern is in the time-saving state (S608). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, if the probability variable flag 203h is on or the value of the time-saving counter 203i is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal pattern is in the time-saving state, while if the probability variable flag 203h is off and the value of the time-saving counter 203i is 0, it is determined that the normal pattern is in the normal state.

In the process of S608, if it is determined that the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress (S608: Y
es), based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the winning random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol is acquired (
S609). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the high probability normal symbol winning random number table. As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol.
If it is within the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that it is a normal pattern miss (Figure 10
(See 202c2 in (b)).

In the process of S608, if it is determined that the normal pattern is not in the time-saving state (S608: N
o), and proceed to the process of S610. In the process of S610, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol is obtained based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the normal symbol winning random number table for low probability (S610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol, and if the value is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 23", it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol.
If the result is within the range of "0", "1", "2", or "9", it is determined to be a miss for the normal pattern (see 202c1 in FIG. 10(b)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S609 or S610 is a normal symbol winning (S611), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol (S611: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol)
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S611 that the normal symbol is not a winning symbol (the normal symbol is a losing symbol) (S611: No), the display mode for the losing symbol is set (S613).
In the process of S613, after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 has ended, the “X” pattern is set to be displayed as a stopped pattern (second pattern), and the process proceeds to S614.

In the process of S614 executed after the process of S612 or S613, it is determined whether the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress (whether the probability change flag 203h is on or the time-saving counter 203i is 1 or more) (S614). If the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress (S614: Yes), the second
The variable time of the variable display in the symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time-saving state (i.e., the probability variable flag 203h is off and the value of the time-saving counter 203i is 0) (S614: No),
The time period for changing the display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S616).
Then, this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (
S602: Yes), and determine whether the variable display time executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S617). Note that the variable display time here is determined by the second symbol display device 8
This is the time that was previously set by the processing of S615 or S616 before the variable display is started in 3.

In the process of S617, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S617: N
On the other hand, if the time for changing the variable display has elapsed in the process of S617 (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning one, and the process of S6
If the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (illuminated symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is a miss and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "X" symbol as the second symbol is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (illuminated symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. When the stopped symbol is set by the process of S618, the main process (FIG. 30) is then started.
When the second pattern display update process (see S1008) of step S612 (see S613) is executed, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stopped pattern (second pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit up) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S613.

Next, when the variable display being executed is started in the second symbol display device 83, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable process (the current lottery result) is a winning normal symbol (S619). If the current lottery result is a winning normal symbol (S61
9: Yes), then, it is determined whether the normal pattern is in the time-saving state (i.e., whether the probability variable flag 203h is on or the time-saving counter 203i is 1 or more) (S620). If it is not in the time-saving state (S620: No), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S621), and the process is returned to S623.
On the other hand, in the process of S620, if it is determined that the time for normal symbols is being shortened (S620: Yes), the opening time of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640,
The number of openings is set to "2 times per second" (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

In the process of S623, the opening time and the opening number of times determined in the process of S621 or S622 are set (S623), and this process ends. When the opening and closing control start of the electric role object 640a is set by the process of S623, the main process (see FIG. 30) is performed.
When the electric role opening/closing process (see S1006) is executed, the opening/closing control of the electric role 640a is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric role 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S621 or S622 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S619, if the current lottery result is a miss for the normal pattern (S619: No), S620 to S62
Then, the process skips each of steps 3 and ends.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107).
7) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and the normal entrance (through gate) 6
This is a process for determining whether or not the gaming ball has passed through 7, and if the gaming ball has passed through, obtaining and reserving the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passing of the gaming ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S
701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display times M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

If the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: No), or if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 but the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first of the empty reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 (S705),
This process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

28 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interruption process is also executed by the payout/launch control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interruption process. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is sent to the power outage monitoring circuit 252.
This signal is output to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the dispensing control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 29, when the power supply to the main control device 110 is turned on,
The start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the computer 100 will now be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (S9
For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-controllers (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S
902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904
: No), and further, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S9
05), if it is not stored (S905: No), the process may not have ended normally the previous time the power was shut off, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S915.

If the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No),
That is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value stored when the power was cut off,
Since the backed up data is destroyed, the process also proceeds to S915 in this case. As will be described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. 30, the RAM determination value is, for example,
This is the checksum value at the work area address of 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value,
The validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915).
When this payout initialization command is received, the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 are cleared, initial values are set, and the payout control of the game balls can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 performs initialization processing (S
916, S917).

As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed,
The RAM 203 is initialized (S916, S917). Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed based on a RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 is initialized (S916, S917).
In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial values of the RAM 203 are set (S917). After the process of S917 ends, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power outage occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.)
If the power failure information is normal (S907: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained and the power failure information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery is sent to the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to return it to the game state at the time of the drive power interruption (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting the payout control of the game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, a performance permission command is sent to the voice and lamp control device 113, and the voice and lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances.
After the process of 10 is completed, the probability change flag 203h, the time-saving counter 203i, the ball-entering waiting flag 203j, and the big win flag 203m are read (S911), and the probability change flag 203h, the time-saving counter 203i, the ball-entering waiting flag 203j, and the big win flag 203m that have been read are read (S912).
A status command for notifying the game status indicated by the game status indicator 03m is set (S912).
After the process of is completed, the start of driving the motor 670c for the rotating body is set (S913), an interrupt is permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to the main process described later. The setting of the driving of the motor 670c for the rotating body set by the process of S913 is not changed until the power is cut off. This allows the rotating member 670a to continue rotating at a constant speed while the power is on for the gaming machine. Therefore, in the big win waiting state, the game ball can be launched at a timing when the rotating position of the rotating member 670a is arranged so as not to hinder the flow (flying) of the game ball toward the operation winning hole 660, so that the player can enjoy launching the game ball at a good timing. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, while the power is turned on for the gaming machine, the rotating member 670
In the jackpot waiting state, the rotating member 670a may be configured to rotate at a constant speed, but is not limited to this. In the jackpot waiting state, the rotating position of the rotating member 670a may be changed between a position that prevents the ball from entering the operation winning hole 660 and a position that does not prevent the ball from entering the operation winning hole 660. For example, the rotating member 670a may be configured to rotate at a constant speed only during the jackpot waiting state and to stop its operation in other states.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to rotate at a constant speed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating speed and direction may be varied randomly or regularly. By configuring in this manner, the difficulty of making the game ball enter the operation winning hole 660 becomes higher, so that the player can be more pleased when the game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 as intended.

Next, referring to FIG. 30, after the above-mentioned start-up process, MPU 20 in main control device 110
The main processing executed by the game machine 1 will now be described. Fig. 30 is a flow chart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process at a cycle of 4 msec, and in the remaining time, the counter update processes of S1011 and S1012 are executed.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21),
Executes an external output process to transmit output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the control device 3 to each of the sub control devices (peripheral control devices) (S1001).
Specifically, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101, and if there is winning detection information, it transmits a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to the payout control device 111. In addition, the voice lamp control device 1
13. Also, a winning information command set in the start winning process is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, when the game state is changed, a state command for notifying the change in the game state is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command set in the big win control process (see FIG. 32) are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when a game ball is to be launched, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and the counter value is set to the maximum value (198 in this embodiment).
When the counter value CS1 reaches 0, the counter value CS1 is cleared to 0.
3 and store it in the corresponding buffer area.

After the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then in the jackpot waiting state, the ball entering the operation winning hole 660 is monitored, and when the ball entering the operation winning hole 660 is detected, a jackpot start process for starting the jackpot is executed (S1004). Details of this jackpot start process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. After the process of S1004 is completed, next, in the case of a jackpot state of a special pattern, a jackpot performance is executed, and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the right specific winning hole 65a and the left specific winning hole 650a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the right specific winning hole 65a (opening and closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning hole 650a is opened for each jackpot round,
It is determined whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or whether the specified number of game balls have entered. When either of these conditions is met, the right specific winning hole 65a (opening and closing door 65f1) or the left specific winning hole 650a is closed. Here, in this embodiment, the big win control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Details of this big win control process (S1005) will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

When the process of S1005 is completed, next, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is
In the electric role opening/closing process,
When the opening and closing control start of the electric role 640a is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26), the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is started.
The opening and closing control of 40a is performed by the process of S621 in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) or S
This continues until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of 622 are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display device 37 (S1
In the first symbol display update process, S307 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23)
When a variation pattern is set by the process of S309 or the process of S309, the first symbol display device 37 starts displaying a variation according to the variation pattern.
Among the LEDs 37a of the pattern display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time has elapsed, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

In addition, the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, and if the color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player will not be able to confirm the change in the color of the LED.
In order to allow the player to confirm the change in the color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed. When the counter reaches 100, the LED is turned on.
D changes its lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern set by processing S307 or processing S309 of the special pattern fluctuation start process (see Figure 23) has ended, the fluctuation display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit up) on the first pattern display device 37 in the display mode set by processing S306 or processing S308 of the special pattern fluctuation start process (see Figure 23).

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the second symbol display device 83 (S1
In the second symbol display update process, S615 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26)
When the normal symbol (second symbol) change time is set by the process of S615 or the process of S616, the second symbol display device 83 starts a change display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a change display in which the normal symbol (second symbol) symbol of "○" and the symbol of "×" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, the normal symbol change process (FIG. 26
When the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S618 of (see
The variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the display mode set by the processing of S612 or S613 of the normal symbol variable start processing (see FIG. 26) is set.
The stopping pattern (second pattern) is displayed in a stopped state (lit up) on the second pattern display device 83.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S10
09), if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No),
In this case, the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power supply is not cut off. In this case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1010: Yes), the process is terminated.
01, and the above-mentioned processes from S1001 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time (4 milliseconds) has not yet elapsed since the start of this main process (
S1010: No), until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011
, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (both 399 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. Then, the first initial value random number counter CIN
The updated values of I1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the process of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1001 to S1008 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time,
and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Furthermore, if power interruption information is stored in RAM 203 in the process of S1009 (S1009: Yes), the power supply has been cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 has output a power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interrupt process in FIG. 28 has been executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1013 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power off command indicating that the power supply has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1014). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S1015).
), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.
03 are the checksum values in the backed up stack area and working area.

The process of S1009 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the game state carried out in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1011 and S1012 carried out within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power outage occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S1001 after the start-up process is completed. In other words, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up process,
Therefore, in the process at the time of power off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area, and the value of the stack pointer is not saved.
By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can start from S1001. This reduces the control load on the main control device 110.
Accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, the details of the big win start process (S1004) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. As described above, the big win start process (S1004) is performed by the operation winning port 6.
This is a process for monitoring balls entering 60 and initiating a jackpot when a ball entering 60 is detected.

In this big win start process (see FIG. 31), first, it is determined whether the ball-entering waiting flag 203j is on (S1101). If it is determined that the ball-entering waiting flag 203j is off (
S1101: No), which means that the current state is not a waiting state for a big win, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the ball entry waiting flag 203j is on (S1101: Yes), this means that the machine is currently in a big win waiting state, so it is next determined whether or not a ball has entered the operating winning hole 660 (S1102).
In the process of (S11), if it is determined that the ball has not entered the operation winning hole 660 (S12),
If the answer is 02: No, this is not the start timing of the jackpot, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the process of S1102 determines that a ball has entered the activated winning hole 660 (S1102: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set and the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S1103). Then, the ball entry waiting flag 203j is set to OFF, thereby ending the jackpot waiting state (S1104), and the process is terminated.

Next, the big win control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flowchart showing this big win control process (S1005). This big win control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see Fig. 30), and is a process for executing various effects according to the big win and opening or closing the right specific winning hole 65a and the left specific winning hole 650a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a big win state with a special symbol.

In the big win control process (see FIG. 32), first, it is determined whether the big win start flag 203k is on (i.e., whether the start of the big win is set) (S1201). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the big win start flag 203k is on (S120
1: Yes), and sets an opening command for notifying the start of the opening period of the big win (S1202). The opening command set here is stored in the RAM 203
The opening command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the display control device 114, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114.
When the display opening command is received by the third symbol display device 81, an opening performance is started in the third symbol display device 81. Note that in the first embodiment, the opening period is set to 0.
The time is set to one second, and one round is started (the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened) with almost no time lag after the game ball is detected entering the operational winning hole 660. By configuring in this way, the game ball flowing down the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the time the ball enters the operational winning hole 660 can be made to enter the right specific winning hole 65a. This makes it easier for the player to determine the timing to enter the game ball into the operational winning hole 660. After the processing of S1202, the jackpot in progress flag 203m is set to ON, and the jackpot start flag 203
k is set to OFF (S1203), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203j is off (S1201: No), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203m is on (whether the jackpot with the special symbol is in progress) (S1204).
4: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203m is on (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S
If it is time to start a new round (S1205: Yes), the opening of a specific winning hole corresponding to the number of rounds is set (S1206).
At the start of the second round, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened to open the right specific winning port 6
If it is not the first round, the left specific winning port 650a is set to the open state. When the process of S1206 is completed, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1207), and this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is used for the external output process (S100
1) is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 113.
When the display control device 11 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, it outputs a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number to the display control device 11.
4. When the display number of rounds command is received by the display controller 114,
A new round performance begins in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1205, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a new round (S1205: No), the specific winning hole (the right specific winning hole 65a or the left specific winning hole 6
Specifically, if the current round is one round period, the right specific winning hole 65a is opened and then the right specific winning hole 65b is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 3
If a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the left specific winning hole 650a was opened, or if it is detected that two or more game balls have entered the right specific winning hole 65a after the right specific winning hole 65a has been opened, the closing condition is determined to be satisfied. If the current round period is a round other than the first round, the closing condition is determined to be satisfied if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the left specific winning hole 650a was opened, or if it is detected that two or more game balls have entered the right specific winning hole 65a after the right specific winning hole 650a has been opened.
If it is detected that 10 or more game balls have entered the left specific winning port 650a after the opening, it is determined that the closing condition has been met.

In the process of S1208, the specific winning port (the right specific winning port 65a or the left specific winning port 6
If it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning port (right specific winning port 65a or left specific winning port 650a) is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning port (right specific winning port 65a or left specific winning port 650a) set to open is set to be closed (S1209), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1208 that the closing condition of the specific winning port is not satisfied (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1210). Specifically, when all rounds of the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual have ended, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance.

In the process of S1210, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1210: Yes), an ending command is set (S1211), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the main process (FIG. 3) executed by the MPU 201.
During the external output process (S1001) of the game (see FIG. 10), the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the ending command for display is received by the display control device 114, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S1210: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending performance (S1212).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1212 that it is the timing for the ending performance to end (S1212: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot (any of jackpots A, B, D, or E) (
S1213).

In the process of S1213, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a guaranteed jackpot (i.e., a normal jackpot) (S1213: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203i is overwritten with 100, so that a time-saving period of 100 normal symbols is given after the jackpot ends (S1214), and the process proceeds to S1216. On the other hand, in the process of S1213, if it is determined that the jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot (S1213: Yes), the guaranteed jackpot flag 203h is turned on, so that a guaranteed jackpot state of a special symbol is given after the jackpot ends (S1215), and the process proceeds to S1216.

In the process of S1214 or the process of S1216 executed after the process of S1215, the game state after the big win (whether the game state is a special symbol probability state and a normal symbol time-saving state, or a special symbol low probability state and a normal symbol time-saving state) is determined by the voice lamp control device 1.
Then, a status command for notifying No. 13 is set (S1216), the end of the jackpot is set (S1217), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 33 to Fig. 38, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (S40
01). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup processing has been started during the power-off processing of S4117 (see FIG. 34) due to an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 34, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 34), it executes the power-off processing of S4117. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by
This can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S4117 was completed, or after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, R
It is confirmed whether the data in the AM 223 has been destroyed or not (S4003).

The confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data "55AAh" is written as a keyword in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked to see if the data is "
If the value is "55AAh", then there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the value is not "55AAh", then data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4005.
Transition to 08.

If this startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off,
Since the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost due to a power outage), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4
On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power-off process of S4117 is completed, or if the current startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4004.
Then, the process proceeds to step 008.

In the process of S4002, if the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes),
), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset during the power-off process of S4117. In this case, the power-off process is in progress, so the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in this case, control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004
), and then it is determined whether each storage area of the RAM 223 is normal or not (S4005).
The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh" or not, and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is repeated for "0FFh", "55h", "0A", "0FFh ...
This RAM 223 read/write check is performed in the order of "00h", "00Ah", and so on.
All memory areas in 23 are cleared to 0.

In the process of S4005, if the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), "55A
Ah" keyword is written to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006),
The process proceeds to S4008. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted.

On the other hand, in the process of S4005, if an abnormality is detected in the read/write check of any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4
007), and an infinite loop continues until the power is cut off.
The abnormality of the RAM 223 may be notified by the audio output device 226 by outputting audio, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008
The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (S4117 in FIG. 34).
In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on only when the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009).
), and sets initial values for the RAM 223 (S4010). Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110, etc.

After the process of S4010, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 starts up the
9) (S4011), and updates the data in the game status storage area 223i according to the analysis result (S4012).
It is possible to accurately grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 from the time the power is turned on. After the processing of S4012, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006.
In this case, the process has been started by going through the process of S4008, or by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110).
008: No), skips S4009, which is the process of clearing the working area of the RAM 223, executes the processes of S4010 to S4013, and proceeds to the main process.

The clear process in S4009 is skipped because, when the process goes from S4004 to S4006 and then to S4008, the RAM has already been cleared by the process in S4004.
All memory areas of RAM 223 are cleared, and if only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by saving the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to Fig. 34, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S4101 was executed (S4101). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S410
1: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111.
The reason for determining whether 1 ms has elapsed in the process of 4101 is that, whereas S4102 to S4111 are mainly processes related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4112 and the variable display setting process of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4113 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform settings related to variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first,
The various commands set by the processes of S4103 to S4113 are sent to the display control device 114 (S4102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set so as to match the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104).
). The power-on notification process notifies the user that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81.
If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without issuing a notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then, a reserved number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a player playing the pachinko machine 10, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.
In the reserved number display update process, a process is performed to light up a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c.

Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect process, in order to enhance the effect of the effect, an input is monitored to determine whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding effect is set. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, if the frame button 22 is pressed during a period when the fluctuation performance has not been executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period,
A process for changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command is set for the display control device 114. By including information regarding the type of back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 114 performs a process for changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of the change display, the frame button 22 may be pressed to display the expected value of a big win due to this change, or the frame button 22 may be pressed during a reach performance to change to a performance that gives a sense of expectation for a big win, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of a plurality of reach performances. In addition, if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S4107 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then a sound editing and output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

When the processing of S4109 is completed, the LCD performance execution management processing is executed (S4110).
In the liquid crystal performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process, the lamp editing process of S4108 is executed. In addition, the sound editing and output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S4110 is completed, next, a performance update process is executed (S4111), and the process proceeds to S4112. In the performance update process (S4111), a control is executed to change the performance mode (the gauge number of the chance meter CM (see FIG. 7(a) and (b)) of the standby state performance executed in the big win standby state according to the detection result of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f. The details of this performance update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In the process of S4112, a command determination process is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S4112). For details of this command determination process, see FIG.
, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S4113). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. For details of this variable display setting process, see FIG.
This will be described later with reference to.

When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). Power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S4114 that power-off occurrence information is stored (S4114: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are both set to ON (S4116), and power-off processing is executed (S4117).
7). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is put into an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of interrupt processes is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Also, the stored information on the occurrence of the power-off is erased.

On the other hand, if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: N
o), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is corrupted based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115). If the RAM 223 is not corrupted (S4115: NO),
o), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is executed repeatedly.
If the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes. If the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a staff member of the hall to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the details of the performance update process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG.
This presentation update process (S4111) is a process for updating the presentation mode in the standby state presentation, as described above.

In the performance update process (see FIG. 35), first, it is determined whether the standby state performance flag 223g is on (S4201), and if it is determined that it is off (S4201: No), the standby state performance is not currently being executed (there is no possibility of updating the performance mode), so this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the standby state performance flag 223g is on (S4201: Yes), the number of sensors whose output is H (high) among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f is counted (S4202).

When the process of S4202 is completed, it is determined whether the count value (count value) by the process of S4202 matches the counter value of the level counter 223h (S4203). As described above, this level counter 223h is a counter that indicates the gauge number of the chance meter CM displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The gauge number of the chance meter CM is,
It is varied in conjunction with the number of sensors among the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f whose output is H (high). Therefore, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the count value of the level counter 223h is different from the count value in the process of S4202 (
S4203: No), the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 has changed, etc.
This means that the display state of the chance meter CM is not consistent with the number of sensors whose output is H (high). Therefore, the count value in the process of S4202 is counted by the level counter 22.
The state of the chance meter CM is then updated to the state of the gauge number corresponding to the value of the level counter 223g updated in the process of S4204 (S4205), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, the count value (count value) in the process of S4202 and
If it is determined that the value of the level counter 223g matches (S4203: Yes),
Since the current output of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f matches the gauge number of the chance meter CM and there is no need to update the display mode of the chance meter CM (the presentation mode of the standby state presentation), the processes of S4204 and S4205 are skipped and this process is terminated as is.

By executing this effect update process (see FIG. 35), the state of the chance meter CM is changed to
The upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 can be updated in accordance with the number of game balls flowing down. Therefore, by referring to the state of the chance meter CM, the player can play a game aiming for the game ball to enter the operation winning hole 660 while the gauge number is in a state with a larger number. In other words, the timing to aim for the operation winning hole 660 can be made easier for the player to understand. Therefore, even for players who have little experience playing with the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make it easier for them to intuitively understand the timing to aim for the operation winning hole 660. This allows even first-time players to play casually, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment, during execution of the standby state presentation, each time the presentation update process (see FIG. 35) is executed, the process of S4203 is performed to determine whether there is a discrepancy between the output status of the passage detection sensors 228a to 228f and the gauge number of the chance meter CM (whether the state of the chance meter CM should be updated), but the frequency of updating the state of the chance meter CM may be reduced. Specifically, for example, during execution of the standby state presentation,
The process of S4203 may be executed only once every 0.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Next, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see Fig. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for determining the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4301
In the process of S4301, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (
S4301: Yes), and the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S
4302), and extracts the fluctuation pattern type from the received fluctuation pattern command (S
4303), and ends this process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4301: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4304).
S4304: Yes), and the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S
4305), extract the stop type from the received stop type command (S4306), and terminate this process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S4304: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4307). Then, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4307: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110 (the number of reserved variable display times N1 based on the lottery of the first special pattern) or the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved variable display times N2 based on the lottery of the second special pattern) is read.
The number of times the variable display based on the special pattern is held (N2) is extracted, and this is input to the voice lamp control device 113.
The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223
In the process of S4308, the updated values of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c are stored in the display control device 1.
A display pending ball count command is set to notify to 14. After the process of S4308 is completed, this process is terminated.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. Therefore, each time an initial winning is detected, or each time a lottery for a special symbol is performed,
By the processing of S4308, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is
The values of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203b and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 11
3, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 22
Even if the value of 3c deviates from the values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203e and the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203f of the main control device 110, the values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected at the time of detecting the initial winning or drawing the special pattern to match the values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203e and the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203f of the main control device 110. When the process of S4308 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball counter 223c. This allows the display control device 114 to
Then, a reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (
If the answer is No in S4307, it is then determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4309).
9: Yes), and update the data in the game status storage area 223i according to the received command (S4310). That is, based on the information according to the game status notified by the status command, if the special symbol's high probability state and the normal symbol's time-saving state are notified, the lowest two bits of the game status storage area 223i are set to "11B", and if the special symbol's low probability state and the normal symbol's time-saving state are notified, the lowest two bits of the game status storage area 223i are set to "0
When a low probability state of a special symbol and a normal state of a normal symbol are notified, the lowest two bits of the game status storage area 223i are set to "00B". This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to easily grasp the change when the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is changed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4309 that the status command has not been received (S4309: No), it is then determined whether or not the winning information command has been received (S43
11). If it is determined in the process of S4311 that a winning information command has been received (S
4311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (the type of the ball entry port where the new starting winning was detected and the lottery result) is stored in the winning information storage area 223a
The data is stored in the corresponding storage area (S4312), and the process ends.

In the process of S4311, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S
4311: No), and then it is determined whether or not a command related to a win (any of a standby state command, an opening command, a number of rounds command, or an ending command) has been received (S4313). If it is determined that a command related to a win has been received (S4313: Yes), a win-related process is executed to execute control corresponding to the type of the win-related command (S4314), and this process is terminated. Details of this win-related process (S4314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4313 that a command related to a big win has not been received (S4313: No), a process corresponding to another command is executed (S43
In the process of S4315, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed and the process result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, the winning-related process (S4314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG.
4314).

In the winning-related process, first, it is determined whether or not a standby state command has been received (S4401
If the standby state command is received (S4401: Yes), a display standby state command for starting the standby state presentation is set (S4402). The display standby state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is output as a command output process (S4403) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221.
4102), the display control device 114 receives the display standby state command. When the display control device 114 receives the display standby state command, it starts a standby state presentation to notify that the third symbol display device 81 is in a jackpot standby state. When the process of S4402 ends, it next sets the standby state presentation flag 223g to ON to indicate that the standby state presentation is being executed (S4403), and ends this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the standby state command has not been received (S4401: No), it is then determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S
If an opening command has been received (S4404: Yes), a display opening command for starting the opening performance is set (S4405), and the standby state performance flag 223g is turned off to set the end of the standby state performance (S4406).
), and the process ends. The display opening command set in the process of S4405 is
The command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts an opening performance in the third symbol display device 81 to notify the start of a big win.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that an opening command has not been received (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4407). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S4407: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S440
8). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the main process (see FIG. 3) executed by the MPU 221.
In the command output process (S4102) of step S4408 (see step S4408), the display control device 114 transmits the command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, it starts a new round presentation in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of step S4408, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4409). Then, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4409: Yes), a display ending command for starting an ending performance is set (S4410), and this process is terminated. The display opening command set in the process of S4410 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts an ending performance for notifying the end of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command has not been received (S4409: No), the process ends.
7), appropriate control can be executed in response to various commands related to winning.

Next, referring to Fig. 38, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Fig. 38 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed in the main process (see Fig. 34) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4501).
In other words, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S4501: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S4506. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4501 that the fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (S4501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned OFF (S4502), and then, in the process of S4303 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36), the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation performance extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S4503).
).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S4504). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4505).
In the process of S4505, the winning information storage area 223a
The data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the first area is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the first area is shifted to the execution area, the second area is shifted to the first area, and the third area is shifted to the execution area side in order.
The data in each area is shifted from the first area to the second area, the fourth area to the third area, and so on.

In the process of S4506, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on or not (S4506). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4506: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this variable display setting process (see FIG. 38)
and returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4506: Yes
s), the stop type selection flag 223e is set to OFF (S4507), and then, in the process of S4306 of the command determination process (see FIG. 36), the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S4508).
Based on the stop type acquired in the process of 8, a stop type command for display is set (S4509
), and ends this process. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to display the third symbol in the stop type indicated by this display stop type command.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 39 to Fig. 53. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing an initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following procedure.
When the power is turned on to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released,
The PU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" by its hardware configuration, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240.
The OM controller 234b receives the address "0000H" from the bus line 240.
When it detects that the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d is in the buffer RAM 234c, it outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts executing the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character R
When the OM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c.
31 consumes a lot of waiting time from when it designates the address "0000H" to when it receives the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time it takes to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast to this, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, beginning with the instruction that is to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. Since the NOR flash memory is a memory that can read data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c, and can output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.
Since the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" can be received in a short time after "0000H" is specified, the main process can be started in a short time in the MPU 231. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls can be executed for the third pattern display device 81.

Now, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG.
In the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the boot process (
6 is a flowchart showing the process of the process of the first embodiment.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. Therefore,
This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, thereby reducing manufacturing costs and suppressing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND type flash memory 234a has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a,
Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are copied to the program storage area 234a2 provided in the work RAM 233 composed of a DRAM.
33a or data table storage area 233b for storage therein.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released,
According to the boot program read from the program storage area 234d1 and set in the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101).
The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the first program memory area 234d1
It contains the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

In addition, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102.
By setting the predetermined address, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
Instead of reading out the control program from the D-type flash memory 234a and fetching instructions, the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a is read out and instructions are fetched to execute various processes.
Since M233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed.
Even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured from the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing according to those instructions.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the N
The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the AND-type flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 39) to be executed after completion of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 39) (S6105), thereby completing execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow readout speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM composed of DRAM which has a fast readout speed and perform various controls, so that high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114 and diversified and complex presentations can be easily executed using the auxiliary presentation unit.

On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored therein, starting from the instruction that is to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a.
Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1,
The control program stored in memory area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding a very small capacity NOR type flash memory 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 40, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes the first program storage area 234d1.
However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the program storage area 2 is configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the program storage area 2 by the process of S6101.
The predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a may be a part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer only a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The process of transferring a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated a plurality of times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then execute the processes of S6103 to S6105.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but the entire boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This makes it unnecessary to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so the boot program can be stored in the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a.
Since the number of times the program is transferred to the MPU 231 is reduced, the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary performance unit in the MPU 231, which is enabled after the boot process, can be started more quickly.

Returning now to the description of FIG. 39, when the boot process is completed, the work RAM 233
The MPU 231 executes an initial setting process in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a (S6002). Specifically, the MPU 231 sets the value of the stack pointer in the MPU 231, and performs various settings for registers in the MPU 231 and I/O devices, etc. Also, the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the
236 is cleared. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of power-on main image area 235a which is the transfer destination. Image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction.

When the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231 to indicate the end of the transfer.
By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction, MPU 231 may write transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer to a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. Then, MPU 231 may read information from this register or the partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detect the writing of the transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes:
The instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on varying image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on varying image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on varying image area 235b is then held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the transfer setting process (FIG. 51 (a)) described later is not performed.
)), image controller 237 transfers all image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235.
Then, a resident image transfer setting process is executed to instruct the transfer to the
.

Furthermore, based on the transfer instruction to image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process, simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in resident video RAM 235 from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 is completed. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)), simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41(b)) and simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 41(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 thirdly.
By displaying the image on the pattern display device 81, the remaining image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 80.
235, players and hall staff can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Meanwhile, players and the like can recognize that some kind of initialization process is being carried out while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and therefore can easily transfer the remaining image data to the resident video RAM 235.
Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
You can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that the device may be stopped while the data is being transferred to the computer.

In addition, during operation checks at factories during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the character ROM 2
By using the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the memory 34, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after power is turned on, the power-on variable image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image. Therefore, when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the ball will enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning).
When an instruction to start the variable performance is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variable pattern command is received, the variable image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed.
Even while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been definitely performed by the simple variable presentation.

As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the power-on main image. However, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the transfer takes time, so the time for which the power-on main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on is also long. However, in this pachinko machine 10
Since a simple change effect can be produced using the power-on change image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to Fig. 41(a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Fig. 41(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interruption process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in sequence in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6
The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 41B, the V
The interrupt process will be described. Figure 41 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and a drawing list of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 2.
37 instructs the image controller 237 to execute drawing and display processing for that image.

As described above, the V interrupt process is started by detecting a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237. The V interrupt signal is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed in the image controller 237, and is output to the MPU 231.
Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds, which is the time when drawing process for one frame of image is completed.
In this case, a drawing instruction for the next image is not received before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described, and then each process will be described in detail with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG.
First, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display a normal performance image on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the power-on image, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.
Execute.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. In addition, if a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
Set to.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is performed, and therefore it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the start of the variable performance is determined in the main control device 110, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 42 to 47.

In the display setting process (S6303), the third display data is set based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like.
The content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 81 is specifically specified. Also, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is stored in the display data table buffer 2.
The display setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, based on the content of the next frame of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, the magnification rate, and the rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the resident video RA is notified to the image controller 237.
Image data to be resident in the M235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 23
5 to the predetermined area of the normal video RAM 236. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and also when a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figs. 51 and 52.

Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the task process (S63
20 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite determined in step S6304) and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing in accordance with the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S63
07). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining the stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big win A to big win B) indicated by the display stop type command is displayed.
The stop type table corresponding to the type of winning combination (F, front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss, complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stopping pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so the power-on image is displayed as the third pattern display device 81.
In order to display the command, a simplified command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then a simplified display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

42 to 47, the details of the command determination process (S6302) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in Fig. 42, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6401: Yes) to notify the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state.
02), and then, for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the type of each command is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes),
), executes variable pattern command processing (S6405), and returns to processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to Fig. 43 (a). Fig. 43 (a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command process (S6405) executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation performance pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control device 110 always judges the start of the variation at least several seconds apart, so it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern having a long variable time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, when a variable performance having a shorter variable time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110,
While the third pattern display device 81 was displaying a variable performance according to the set variable display data table, the next display variable pattern command would be received from the main control device 110, and another variable display would suddenly start, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality,
Even if the main control device 110 has instructed a variable performance having a longer variable time than the set display data table, as described later, the display data table buffer 2
After the varying presentation in accordance with 33d has ended, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed until the next display pattern command is received from the main control device 110, so that the player can continue to watch the variation of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set it in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the change time is set in the clock counter 233h (
S6503), and initialize the pointer 233f to 0 (S6504).Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, the display setting process goes to S650.
While updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6504, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, and the third pattern display device 8
At the same time as specifying the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in S6501, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502, and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance in the character R.
The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the OM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

In addition, in the display setting process, the time of the variable performance defined in the variable display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503,
When it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table is to end, the main control device 11
The settings of the stop display are controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from 0 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning now to the description of Fig. 42, in the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), and if there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and S64
Return to process 01.

Here, the details of the stop type command process (S6407) will be described with reference to Fig. 43 (b). Fig. 43 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpot A-F, front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss, or complete miss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see Figure 41 (b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable performance to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command judgment processing.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
As the type information for identifying the symbol, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described.
) After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S6603,
The symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process is added to the identified stop symbol to identify the third symbol to be actually displayed.
The address where the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

In addition, since the main control device 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, in reality,
Even if the special symbol is a miss, the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a special symbol jackpot, which may lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 has hit a special symbol jackpot, thereby lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss as in this embodiment, if the special symbol is a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 will hit a special symbol jackpot even if the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol that is a complete miss, which makes the player happy.

Returning to Fig. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display standby state command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a display standby state command (S6408: Yes), standby state command processing is executed (S6409), and the process of S6401 is repeated.
Return to processing.

Here, the details of the standby state command process (S6409) will be described with reference to Fig. 44. Fig. 44 is a flowchart showing the standby state command process. This standby state command process executes a process corresponding to the standby state command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the standby state command process, first, a display data table for standby state presentation is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for standby state presentation is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set display data table for standby state presentation (S6703). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6705), the standby state command is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

Returning to Fig. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6408 that there is no standby state command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is an opening command for display (S6410: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6412.
Return to the process of 401.

Here, the details of the opening command process (S6411) will be described with reference to Fig. 45(a). Fig. 45(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6803). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6805), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

Returning to Fig. 42, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and if there is a display round number command (S6412: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6413),
Return to processing S6401.

The number of rounds command process (S6413) will now be described in detail with reference to Fig. 45(b), which is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command process.
This round number command process executes a process corresponding to a display round number command received from the voice and lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command process, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901).
The contents of 33e are cleared by writing null data thereto (S6902).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6901, the time data representing the performance time is read from the timing counter 2
33h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to OFF (S6905).
Then, the round number command processing is terminated and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 42, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is an ending command for display (S6414: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6415).
), and return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command process (S6415) will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. This ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7001). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7001, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7004).
Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to OFF (S7005
), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to Fig. 42, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no display ending command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a background image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a background image change command (S6416: Yes), background image change command processing is executed (S6417), and the process of S6418 is continued.
Return to process 01.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S6417) will be described with reference to Fig. 47(a). Fig. 47(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, a rear image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7603) of the rear image change associated with receiving the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the bits of the rear image discrimination flag provided for each rear image type (rear image A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to ON, and the bits corresponding to the other rear image types are set to OFF (S7102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the processing of S7101 is on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the processing of S7102.

In the task process (S6304), if it is specified that either rear surface A or B is to be displayed according to the rear surface type of the rear surface image specified in the display data table, S71
The type of the rear image to be displayed at that time is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the rear image discrimination flag setting unit 202, and the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified over time. The type of RAM (resident video RAM 202) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored is determined.
35 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

In addition, since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds,
Two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 0 milliseconds, and therefore when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area; however, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command.
In the process of S7102, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change of the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning now to the description of Fig. 42, if it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no rear image change command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), and if there is an error command (S6418: Yes),
s), executes error command processing (S6419), and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the error command process (S6419) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 47(b). Fig. 47(b) is a flow chart showing the error command process. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7202), the error command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command discrimination process.

In the display setting process (S6303), when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7202, and a processing is performed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7202 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the hall staff can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Returning now to the description of Fig. 42, if it is determined in the processing of S6418 that there is no error command (S6418: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6420), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, S6401 to S6420 are repeated until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area.
The process of S6402 is repeatedly executed, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process is terminated.

In addition, the simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 43(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 43(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to the commands.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see Figure 43 (a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, a display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in Fig. 48, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7301), and if the new command flag is not on, i.e., if it is off (S7301: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the processes of S7302 to S7304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7302), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7303 to S7304.

In the process of S7303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7303
If the error occurrence flag is on (S7303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7304).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 49. Fig. 49 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First,
The error discrimination flags are referred to, and warning image data for displaying error warning images corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to ON on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7401
).

In the task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning now to the description of FIG. 48, after the warning image setting process (S7304) or S730
In the process of S7303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7303: No), then the process proceeds to S7305.

In S7305, a pointer update process is executed (S7305). Details of the pointer update process will now be described with reference to Fig. 50. Fig. 50 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process is a process for updating a pointer 233f that designates an address for obtaining transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7501).
That is, the pointer 233f is updated so that, in principle, it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed.
Start information is written at address "0H", and the entity of each data is address "0
If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process.
In turn, actual data can be read out from each data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7501, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S75
02). As a result, if it is End information (S7502: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7503). If it is a demo display data table (S7503: Yes), the time counter 23 counts up the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.
It is set to 3h (S7504), and the process proceeds to S7507.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S75
03: No), it is determined whether the display data table is a display data table for standby state presentation (S7505), and if it is a display data table for standby state presentation (S7505: Y
es), and sets time data corresponding to the presentation time of the display data table for presentation of the standby state set in the display data table buffer 233d to the time counter 233h (S750
6) Then proceed to processing S7507.

In the process of S7507, the pointer 233f is set to 1 to be initialized (S7507), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81
The demo performance can be displayed repeatedly.

On the other hand, in the process of S7505, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for standby state performance (S7505: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S7508), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the address one before where the End information is written are always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7502: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning now to Fig. 48, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7306). In the task process (S6304), based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7306 together with the previously expanded warning image, the type of sprites (display objects) constituting the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7307), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the decrement is 0 or less (S7308). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7308: No), the process returns to the V interrupt process.
308: Yes), which means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stationary display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on or not (S7309).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7309: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7310), and then, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (
S7311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the determined display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7313). Then, after the determined display flag, which indicates that the determined display performance is in progress in the ON state, is set to ON (S7314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is stored as it is in the work RAM.
The process then copies the result to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided at 233 (S7315), and returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display performance of the stopped pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the process of S7315 is used to specify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table. In the task process (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is specified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7315 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process is added to the specified stop pattern to specify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7309, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7309: Yes),
s), and determine whether the demo display flag is on (S7316). If the demo display flag is off (S7316: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display performance, so after a certain time has passed since the end of the final display performance, a process is performed to display the demo performance on the third symbol display device 81.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7317), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7318). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7320), and the demo display flag, which indicates that the demo performance is being performed in the on state, is set to on (S7321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

This makes it possible to set the drawing content so that if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S7316, if the demo display flag is on (S7316: Yes),
After the final display effect is finished, the demo effect is performed, and since this means that the demo effect has ended, the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process.
As described above, various settings are made by the pointer update process executed during the interrupt processing so that the demo performance will start again, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the performance time of the power-on variable image has ended, a process is performed to set, in the display data table buffer 233d, a display data table that specifies that one of the images of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time.

51 and 52, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Fig. 51(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (
S7601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7601: Y
es), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the character ROM 2
Since the image data has not been transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to image controller 237 for transferring image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7601, the simple image display flag 233c is not on.
If it is off (S7601: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the V
Return to the interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from character ROM 234 is to normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to Fig. 51B, a description will be given of a resident image transfer setting process (S7602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 51B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not yet been transferred has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7701), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S7701: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7702).
In the process of S7702, after issuing an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7702 that the transfer process has not ended (S7702: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7702: Yes), the process proceeds to S7703.
Also, if the result of the processing in S7701 indicates that a transfer instruction for the untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7701: No), the process also proceeds to S7703.

In the process of S7703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7703), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (
S7703: No), and sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7704), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list.
The start and end addresses of the H.234, and the destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM
The image controller 23 includes the start address of the transfer destination (an area in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident image data to be transferred is to be stored).
Based on this transfer data information, CPU 237 executes image transfer processing, reads out image data designated in the transfer processing from character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to a designated address in resident video RAM 235 while resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, when the transfer is completed, CPU 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231.

As a result of the process of S7703, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7703
: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7705), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41B), the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 41B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 41B) are performed.
42 to 47 and display setting process (see FIG. 48) instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 42 to 47).
50) is executed, the drawing of the image in normal time is set, and the image in normal time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 52) to the normal video R.
This is performed on AM236 (see S7601: No in FIG. 51(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all of the resident video R images, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variable image, which have already been transferred in the main process.
All resident target image data that should be resident in the AM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it is held without being overwritten while the power is on. This allows the resident image transfer setting process to set the resident video RAM 235 to be
The image data transferred to the video RAM 35 is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 236.
After the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be read from the NAND flash memory 234, which has a slow read speed, during image drawing.
Since there is no need to read out corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as a, the time required for such reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of frequently displayed images such as background images, third patterns, character patterns, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display has been determined by the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 52, a normal image transfer setting process (S760) which is one process of the transfer setting process (see FIG. 51(a), S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is performed.
52 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7305) of the previously executed display setting process (see FIG. 48, S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7801). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7802), and if it is transfer data information (S7802: Y),
es), and from the transfer data information, the character RO in which the transfer target image data is stored
The start address (start address of storage source) and the end address (end address of storage source) of M234
, and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted and stored in the work RAM
233 (S7803), and then the data is stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 2
The transfer start flag provided at T33, which indicates that image data whose transfer should be started exists when the flag is ON, is set to ON (S7804), and the process proceeds to S7805.

In addition, in the process of S7802, the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null.
If the data is received (S7802: No), the processes of S7803 and S7804 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7805. In the process of S7805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7805), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7805: Yes),
Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7806).

In the process of S7806, after an instruction to transfer image data is set to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7806 that the transfer process has not ended (S7806: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7806: Yes), the process proceeds to S7807. Also, if the result of the process of S7805 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7805: No),
), and proceed to processing of S7807.

In the process of S7807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7807: Yes), image data to be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7808), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process proceeds to S7813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7807: No), it is then determined whether or not the background image change flag is on (S7809). Then, if the background image change flag is not on but off (S7809: No), image data to be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S7809: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed. After setting the rear image change flag to off (S7810), the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type is identified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7820).
Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 in which image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7812), and the process proceeds to S7813.

In the process of S7813, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813). This determination in the process of S7813 is made by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the process of S7813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: Yes), the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.
Since there is no need to transfer the image data to the AM 236, the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the display control device 114
This reduces the processing load on each unit and reduces the traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the process of S7813 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7814). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored).
The transfer data information includes the start address of the image data. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7815).
This normal image transfer setting process is then terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "OFF".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a big win stop type, the image data used in the opening performance is transferred to the character ROM 2 without delay.
In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred to the character ROM 233 without delay.
4 to the normal video RAM 236.

In this embodiment, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110,
As the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d,
The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 2.
Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred in accordance with the transfer data information written in the area pointed to by pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

Here, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specified address so that image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the transfer data table, a character RO is
The transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the M234 to the normal video RAM 236. This allows the transfer of the image data to be managed for each sprite, and
Since the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be controlled on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in the load imposed by the transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

Next, the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 53. Fig. 53 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates,
A drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated (S7901) from the transfer instructions set by the task process (S6304), including the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information, and the transfer settings process (S6305).
), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of each sprite is stored is identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for that sprite as determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are sorted in the order of the sprite that should be placed furthest behind the sprite that should be placed furthest in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information (
A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as the detailed information (detailed information). Also, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the image storage area 2 of the normal video RAM 236
Since the sub-area of 36a is fixed, the MPU 231 determines the sub-area according to the sprite type as follows:
The type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and this information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer flag 233
The drawing target buffer information specified by j is sent to the image controller (S790
2). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing that the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c is expanded.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and overwrites them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

Also, if the drawing list contains transfer data information,
The start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RA
M236), and the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and stored in the buffer RAM
After temporarily storing the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to an area of the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the transfer destination top address when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image is drawn in accordance with the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with a drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer.
In addition, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the process of S7902, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S
7903). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., if the value was "0", it is updated to "
If the drawing list is transmitted, the drawing target buffer is set to "0" if the drawing list is transmitted.
The frame buffer 236c is alternately set to the frame buffer 236d.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.
Each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 41(b)) executed by 231 is executed,
As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read out.
When the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame of image is developed, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read out are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, respectively, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the opening and closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65, in which the winning balls are paid out when the game ball enters during a jackpot, is closed, and the game balls cannot enter the right specific winning opening 65a. In this state, the game balls can flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. The upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 is
It is configured to be possible to allow a number of game balls exceeding the number of balls (i.e., 2 balls) that is the end condition of the first round to flow down at the same time. In other words, it is configured to allow a number of game balls exceeding the number of balls (i.e., 2 balls) that is the end condition of the first round to reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the time from when one game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 to when it passes through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. As a result, the more game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the timing when the first round starts (when the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened), the more game balls that have flowed down the opening and closing door 65f1 can be entered from the opened opening and closing door 65f1 into the right specific winning hole 65a, and more prize balls can be obtained. Therefore, at the start timing of one round of a big win, the player can play while paying attention to the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, so that the interest of the player at the start of the first round can be improved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for a special symbol, the jackpot starts when the game ball enters the operation winning hole 660. This allows the player to adjust the timing at which the first round of the jackpot starts by adjusting the timing at which the game ball is shot toward the operation winning hole 660, so that the player can adjust the timing at which the first round of the jackpot starts (i.e., the timing at which the opening and closing door 65 opens and closes) that is more advantageous to the player.
It is possible to realize a game of aiming at the timing when many game balls pass over the upper surface of f1 and making the game ball enter the operation winning hole 660. Therefore, the amount of prize balls (benefits) that the player can obtain during the predetermined period of the jackpot (until the end of one round) can be varied according to the player's skill (the timing of aiming at the operation winning hole 660), so that the player can take the timing of entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660 more seriously. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state between when the jackpot is confirmed and when the jackpot starts, the player is suggested the amount of benefit (number of winning balls) that the player can receive if the game ball enters the operating winning hole 660 by the presentation mode (the number of gauges of the chance meter CM).
It is therefore easier to understand the timing for aiming for 60.
Since the game play can be easily understood even by players who have little experience playing pachinko games, a gaming machine that is not likely to shy away from players can be provided. Thus, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the three protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c are provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, so that the game balls are configured to bypass the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c and the passing period of the game balls through the opening and closing door 65f1 is extended, but this is not limited to the above. For example, instead of or in addition to providing the protrusions 65f1a to 65f1c, the material of the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 may be made of a material (e.g., an elastic body) with a higher friction coefficient than other parts (the surface of the game board 13, the inner surface of the right variable winning device 65, etc.), or the material may be processed to make it difficult for the game balls to roll (e.g., by providing unevenness on the surface).
You may do so.

In the first embodiment, the round is started when 30 seconds have elapsed or when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of one round.
In other words, if the player is hitting the ball from the right, the upper limit (2
In the above embodiment, the end condition is set so that the first round ends when 10 or more game balls enter the right specific winning port 65a, but the end condition is not limited to this. For example, the first round may end in a period of time that makes it difficult to get a game ball to enter the right specific winning port 65a even if a right shot is made after the start of the first round, aiming at the right specific winning port 65a. Specifically, the first round may end when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the first round, or when 10 or more game balls enter the right specific winning port 65a before 0.5 seconds have elapsed. In such a configuration, the opening and closing door 65 closes at the timing when a game ball enters the operating winning port 660.
If the game ball is not passing over the upper surface of f1, the first round is likely to end without any game ball entering the right specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, for a player who wants to win a prize ball in the first round, the game ball is prevented from entering the opening and closing door 65 before entering the game ball into the operation winning hole 660 in the big win waiting state.
It is possible to provide the player with an enjoyable game of shooting the ball toward f1 and then aiming at the activated winning hole 660. This can improve the player's interest in the game during the big win waiting state.

In the first embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state, the gauge number of the chance meter CM indicates the approximate number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, thereby suggesting the degree of advantage when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the gauge number of the chance meter CM may be used to suggest the degree of advantage of the jackpot. Specifically, for example, the gauge number of the chance meter CM may be used to suggest the type of jackpot, thereby suggesting the degree of advantage when the game ball enters the operation winning opening 660 to the player. Also, for example, the number of rounds of the jackpot may be configured to be indefinite at the time when the jackpot is confirmed, and the number of rounds of the jackpot may be selected by lottery at the time when the jackpot passes through the operation winning opening 660. The number of gauges may indicate the number of rounds to be determined by a lottery that is conducted when a gaming ball enters the operating winning port 660, thereby suggesting to the player the degree of advantage that will be gained by having the gaming ball enter the operating winning port 660.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to continue rotating at a constant speed while the power is turned on for the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the big win waiting state, the rotating position of the rotating member 670a may be changed between a position that prevents the ball from entering the operation winning hole 660 and a position that does not prevent the ball from entering the operation winning hole 660. For example, the rotating member 670a may be configured to rotate at a constant speed only during the big win waiting state and to stop its operation in other states.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 670a is configured to rotate at a constant speed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating speed and direction may be varied randomly or regularly. By configuring in this manner, the difficulty of making the game ball enter the operation winning hole 660 becomes higher, so that the player can be more pleased when the game ball enters the operation winning hole 660 as intended.

In the first embodiment, the degree of advantage when a big win starts (
In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the first round is suggested, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the degree of advantage when a jackpot starts, a configuration may be made in which a presentation is executed that suggests the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself by the standby state presentation. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be made in which a presentation is executed that suggests the game state after the jackpot (whether it is a guaranteed jackpot or not) or the number of rounds, etc. Also, when a presentation that suggests the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself is executed, it does not have to be executed during the jackpot standby state. For example, in the case of the third
When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the type of the third symbol may suggest the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself during the execution. Also, the degree of advantage of the jackpot itself may be suggested during the opening period, the round period, the ending period, etc.

In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is described as a type in which a jackpot is awarded by drawing a special symbol and the jackpot starts when a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 of a different specification. For example, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 in which a jackpot starts when a game ball enters a specific area on the game board 13. That is, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 of a type that does not have a function for drawing a special symbol (a so-called two-type type) or a pachinko machine 10 of a type that has a function for drawing a special symbol but starts a jackpot when a game ball enters a specific area regardless of the result of the special symbol drawing (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type). By configuring in this way, the advantage of the first round of the jackpot can be varied according to the number of game balls on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the time when the game ball enters the specific area.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 54 to 62. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery of the special symbol, the machine transitions to a jackpot waiting state, and during the jackpot waiting state, the operation winning port 6
The jackpot is started when a game ball enters the operation winning hole 660. Also, the operation winning hole 660 is provided at only one location on the upper right side of the game board 13. In other words, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the jackpot is not started unless the game ball is shot toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and enters the operation winning hole 660, regardless of the type of jackpot.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the right and left operating winning holes (right operating winning hole 661 and left operating winning hole 662) that trigger the start of a jackpot are provided on the upper right and lower left sides of the game board 13, respectively, and the operating winning hole that triggers the start of a jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. In addition, the left operating winning hole 662 is configured so that a game ball enters the hole almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 seconds) when the jackpot standby state is reached. In other words, in the case of a jackpot type in which the left operating winning hole 662 triggers the start of a jackpot, the first round of the jackpot starts before the game ball reaches the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. In other words, a jackpot type in which a player cannot aim for an over-winning in the first round is provided. This allows for the provision of jackpot types that allow for over-winning and jackpot types that do not allow for over-winning, so that differences can be made in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type in addition to the number of rounds and game state after the jackpot.

The pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration.
This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 54. As shown in Fig. 54, a right operational winning hole 661 into which a game ball can enter is provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, instead of the operational winning hole 660 in the first embodiment. The right operational winning hole 661 is provided with eight types of jackpots (jackpots A2 to H2) in the second embodiment.
Among them, the right-hand operating winning hole 661 is an operating winning hole that triggers the start of six types of jackpots, A2, B2, D2, and F2 to H2. This right-hand operating winning hole 661 is configured so that a ball entering the hole is judged as valid only during the jackpot waiting state, which is entered when one of the six types of jackpots (A2, B2, D2, and F2 to H2) is selected by the lottery for the special symbols.

54, a left operating winning hole 662 through which game balls can enter is provided on the lower left side of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. This left operating winning hole 662 is an operating winning hole that triggers the start of two types of jackpots, C2 and E2, among the eight types of jackpots (jackpots A2 to H2) in this second embodiment.
In the jackpot waiting state, which is triggered by the state of either E2 or E3, the left operational winning hole 662 is an operational winning hole in which the ball is judged to be valid. As shown in FIG. 54, a reservoir device 675 is provided above the left operational winning hole 662 when viewed from the front.
is configured to be capable of storing only one game ball that flows down vertically from above.
This storage device 675 is provided with a storage valve 675a at the lower end of a flow path which is wide enough to allow one game ball to flow downward, and which can be moved between a closed position where the game ball that has entered the storage device 675 can be received and stored (preventing the game ball from flowing downward), and an open position where the game ball that has entered the storage device 675 is discharged directly below the storage device 675 without preventing the game ball from flowing downward.

The storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is changed to an open position when a jackpot standby state is set, and changed to a closed position when the jackpot ends. As shown in FIG. 54, the left-actuated winning port 662 is disposed directly below the storage device 675, so when the storage device 675 is in a state where game balls are stored and enters a jackpot standby state, the storage valve 675a is opened, causing the stored game balls to flow downward, and as a result, immediately after the jackpot standby state is entered (approximately 0.
After 5 seconds, the game ball will enter the left-actuated winning port 662. Here, under normal circumstances (low probability state for special symbols and normal state for normal symbols), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 (the electric device 640a is difficult to open), so the game method with the least loss for the player is to play by hitting from the left and aiming at the first ball entry port 64. When a game ball is shot aiming at the first ball entry port 64, it will also flow down in the direction of the storage device 675 located on the lower left side of the first ball entry port 64. As a result, under normal circumstances, it takes almost
The game balls are stored in the storage device 675. Therefore, during normal play, the jackpots C2 and E2
In either case, the jackpot will start almost immediately after the jackpot standby state is entered. Therefore, when the jackpot is C2 or E2, the period of the jackpot standby state is too short, and it is almost impossible for the game ball to reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the jackpot standby state, so it becomes impossible to aim for an over win.
As a result of the extremely high possibility of the number of winning balls being the minimum (two balls) in the first round, the player is at a disadvantage in terms of the number of winning balls compared to the first round of other jackpots.

In this way, in the first embodiment, in the jackpot type (jackpot A2, B2, D2, F2 to H2) in which the right-actuated winning port 661 is the trigger for starting the jackpot, the player can play the game with the aim of winning over in the first round to win more prize balls, as in the first embodiment, while in the jackpot type (jackpot C2
, E2), the jackpot starts almost before the player can aim for an over win. This allows the degree of advantage in the first round of the jackpot to be differentiated depending on the jackpot type, so that when a jackpot occurs, the player can be made to pay more attention to the jackpot type. This can further increase the player's interest. In the following, for the sake of simplicity, the jackpot type that starts when a ball enters the right-actuated winning hole 661 will be referred to as a "right-triggered jackpot," and the jackpot type that starts when a ball enters the left-actuated winning hole 662 will be referred to as a "left-triggered jackpot."

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 55 and 56. The ROM 202 in the second embodiment differs from the ROM 202 in the first embodiment in that it stores a first winning type selection table 202b.
The contents of the provisions have only been partially changed, and the rest of the configuration is the same as the first one mentioned above.
Therefore, as an explanation of the ROM 202 in the second embodiment, only the details of the first winning type selection table 202b will be explained.

55 is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b defined in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55, the first winning type selection table 202b in the second embodiment includes five types of jackpot types (jackpot A2 to E2) that can be determined when the first special symbol is selected as a jackpot, and three types of jackpot types (jackpot F2 to H2) that can be determined when the second special symbol is selected as a jackpot.
) is stipulated.

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, a "jackpot A2" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" (see 202b1 in FIG. 55).
Among the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, "Big Win A2
Since the counter value for "1" is 5, the probability of "jackpot A2" being determined when the first special symbol is selected as a jackpot is 5% (5/100). This "jackpot A2" is a jackpot type that has 8 rounds, similar to the "jackpot A" in the first embodiment, and is a jackpot type that is given a "special symbol probability state" and a "normal symbol time-saving state" after the jackpot ends. In addition, this "jackpot A2" is a type of right-triggered jackpot that is started when a ball enters the right-operated winning hole 661. For this reason, if more game balls can be made to reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state and the game ball can be made to enter the right-operated winning hole 660, more prize balls can be won than usual (when the game ball is hit to the right after the first round has started), so the number of prize balls that can be won in the first round is more likely to be advantageous than in a left-triggered jackpot.

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, a "jackpot B2" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 14" (see 202b2 in FIG. 55).
The counter value for "2" is 10, so if the first special symbol is selected as the jackpot,
The probability of the "Big Win B2" being determined is 10% (10/100).
" is a type of jackpot that has five rounds, just like the "jackpot B" in the first embodiment, and that gives a "special symbol probability state" and a "normal symbol time-saving state" after the jackpot ends. Also, just like the "jackpot A2," this "jackpot B2" is a type of right-triggered jackpot that starts when a ball enters the right-actuated winning hole 661. For this reason,
Compared to a left-triggered jackpot, the number of prize balls you can get in the first round is more likely to be advantageous.

As a jackpot for the first special symbol, a "jackpot C2" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 64" (see 202b3 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first jackpot type counter C2, 50 are "jackpot C2", so the probability of "jackpot C2" being determined when a jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 50% (50/100).
2” has 5 rounds, similar to the “Big Win B” in the first embodiment,
This is a type of jackpot that gives a "special symbol probability state" and a "normal symbol time-saving state" after the jackpot ends. This "jackpot C2" is a type of left-triggered jackpot that starts when a ball enters the left-actuated winning hole 662. Therefore, it is 1
The number of prize balls you can win in a round is likely to be unfavorable.

As a jackpot for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 74" is associated with "jackpot D2" (see 202b4 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that are "jackpot D2", so the probability that "jackpot D2" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special symbol is 10% (10/100).
2” has 5 rounds, similar to the “Big Win C” in the first embodiment,
This is a type of jackpot that gives a "low probability state of special symbols" and a "time-saving state of normal symbols" after the jackpot ends. This "jackpot D2" is a type of right-triggered jackpot that starts when a ball enters the right-actuated winning hole 661. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be won in the first round is more advantageous than in a left-triggered jackpot.

As a jackpot for the first special symbol, a "jackpot E2" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "75 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 55). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that become "jackpot E2", so the probability that "jackpot E2" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special symbol is 25% (25/100).
2" has 5 rounds, similar to the "Big Win C" in the first embodiment,
This is a type of jackpot that gives a "low probability state of special symbols" and a "time-saving state of normal symbols" after the jackpot ends. This "jackpot E2" is a type of left-triggered jackpot that starts when a ball enters the left-actuated winning hole 662. For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be won in the first round is more likely to be disadvantageous than in a right-triggered jackpot.

In this way, in the second embodiment, when the first special symbol is selected as a big win,
The right trigger jackpot (either jackpot A2, B2, or D2) occurs at a rate of 5% and the left trigger jackpot (either jackpot C2 or E2) occurs at a rate of 75%.
In 25% of cases where a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol, the player can play a game in which more game balls reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state and then aim for the right-operated winning hole 661 at the right timing. In most cases (75% of cases), the jackpot starts immediately (within about 0.5 seconds) after the jackpot waiting state is entered, so in the case of a right-trigger jackpot, the player can be more pleased.

As shown in FIG. 55, the jackpot of the second special symbol is composed only of the right trigger jackpot. Therefore, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, the right trigger winning hole 66 is always activated.
The jackpot starts when the game ball enters the slot 675. The reason for this is that the lottery for the second special symbol is basically executed during the "time-saving state of the normal symbol", while the player is continuously firing the game ball by hitting the right, so there is a high possibility that the game balls are not stored in the storage device 675 at the start of the jackpot waiting state. In other words, even if a left-triggered jackpot is provided among the jackpots of the second special symbol, there is a high possibility that the jackpot cannot be started immediately after the jackpot waiting state, so a left-triggered jackpot is not provided unnecessarily, and only a right-triggered jackpot is provided. This allows the number of jackpot types to be reduced, so the storage capacity of the storage area for storing data for each jackpot type can be reduced.

The second special symbol jackpots (jackpots F2 to H2) in the second embodiment are exactly the same as the second special symbol jackpots (jackpots D to F) in the first embodiment in terms of the number of rounds and game state after the jackpot. Therefore, detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, the right trigger jackpot is always generated when the second special symbol is selected as the jackpot, but this is not limited to the above. Even when the second special symbol is selected as the jackpot, the left trigger jackpot may be generated at a predetermined rate (for example, 10%). As described above, when the second special symbol is selected as the jackpot, the storage device 67
Since there is a low possibility that game balls are stored in the left actuated winning port 662, even if a left triggered jackpot occurs, the game ball will not immediately enter the left actuated winning port 662 when the jackpot standby state is entered. Therefore, when a left triggered jackpot occurs, it is possible to provide a game feature in which the timing of entering the game ball into the left actuated winning port 662 is measured. In other words, the actuated winning port to be targeted during the jackpot standby state can be changed depending on whether a right triggered jackpot occurs or a left triggered jackpot occurs. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the variation of the game during the jackpot standby state.

Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in Fig. 56, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is the same as the RA in the first embodiment.
13 in that a start trigger storage area 203n is added to the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start trigger storage area 203n is a memory area in which data indicating the type of activated winning slot that will be the start trigger of a jackpot is stored. More specifically, when the data "01H" is stored in this start trigger storage area 203n, it means that the start trigger of the jackpot is the right activated winning slot 661 (the current jackpot is a right-triggered jackpot), and when "02H" is stored, it means that the start trigger of the jackpot is the left activated winning slot 662 (the current jackpot is a left-triggered jackpot). The initial value of this start trigger storage area 203n is set to "00H", and when a jackpot is won by a special symbol lottery and the game moves to a jackpot waiting state, data corresponding to the current jackpot type is overwritten (S232 in FIG. 57).
During the jackpot waiting state, the system is configured to monitor balls entering the operation winning hole corresponding to the data stored in the start trigger storage area 203n, and set the start of the jackpot when a ball entering the operation winning hole being monitored is detected (S111 in FIG. 59).
3, see S1114). As a result, depending on the type of jackpot, the jackpot can be triggered by the ball entering a different operating winning hole. In the case of a right-trigger jackpot, the gameplay of aiming for the operating winning hole at the right time, similar to that of the first embodiment, can be realized.
In the case of a left trigger jackpot, it is possible to realize a game in which the jackpot starts without aiming at the activated winning slot. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game in the jackpot waiting state.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 57 to FIG. 60, the MP of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described.
Various control processes executed by the U201 will be described. First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S111) will be described with reference to FIG. 57.
is a process executed in place of the special pattern change process (see Figure 22) in the first embodiment, and like the special pattern change process (see Figure 22), is a process for setting the display in the first pattern display device 37 and the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol variation process 2 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 57), S201 to S2
In each process of 3, S2 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is performed.
The same processes as those in steps S01 to S223 are executed.

In the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 57) in the second embodiment, when the process of S220 is completed, the opening of the storage valve 675a is set (S231). By opening the storage valve 675a, if game balls are stored in the storage device 675, the game balls can be inserted into the left operation winning hole 662 immediately after the start of the jackpot waiting state. As a result, if a left trigger jackpot occurs, the jackpot can be started soon after the game ball reaches the top surface of the opening door 65f1.

When the process of S231 is completed, the data stored in the start trigger storage area 203n is updated to data corresponding to the current jackpot type (S232), and the process proceeds to S223. In the process of S232, it is determined that the current jackpot is a right trigger jackpot (jackpot A2, B
If the winning combination is a left trigger jackpot (any of jackpots C2, E2), the data is stored as "02H".

Next, the start-up process 2 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
This start-up process 2 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, and is started when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process 2 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 58), steps S901 to S914
In each process, steps S901 to S904 of the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are performed.
The same processes as those in S914 are executed.

In the start-up process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S911 is completed, it is next determined whether the ball entry waiting flag 203j or the big win flag 203m is on (S921). If it is determined that either flag is on (S9
If the result of S921 is "Yes", this means that the storage device 675 should be in a storage state (in a jackpot waiting state or during a jackpot), so the storage valve 675a is set to open (S922) and the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the result of S921 is "No", this means that the storage device 675 should be in a storage state (in normal play), so the storage valve 675a is set to close (S923) and the process proceeds to S912.

Next, referring to FIG. 59, the big win start process 2 (S1021) in the second embodiment will be described.
This big win start process 2 (S1021) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the big win start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is a process for monitoring ball entry into the operating winning hole (right operating winning hole 661 or left operating winning hole 662) corresponding to the big win type, and starting the big win when a ball entry into the operating winning hole is detected.

In the big win start process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, S1101, S
In each of the processes of S1103 and S1104, the same processes as those in S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the big win start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment are executed.

In the jackpot start process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the ball entry waiting flag 203j is on (i.e., the jackpot waiting state) (S1101: Yes), then the data in the start trigger storage area 203n is read (S1111) and it is determined whether the read data indicates the right activation winning hole 661 (i.e., "01H") (S1112). If it is determined in the process of S1112 that the data corresponding to the right activation winning hole 661 (i.e., "01H") is stored (S1112: Yes), then it is determined whether a ball entry into the right activation winning hole 661 has been detected (
If a ball has not been detected (S1113: No), this process is terminated in order to continue the jackpot waiting state. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1113 that a ball has been detected in the right-operated winning hole 661 (S1113: Yes), the process proceeds to S1103 in order to end the jackpot waiting state and start the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1112, if it is determined that the data stored in the start trigger storage area 203n is data indicating the left operation winning hole 662 (i.e., "02H") (S1112: No), it is determined whether a ball has entered the left operation winning hole 662 (S11
14), if a ball entering the left operation winning hole 662 is not detected (S1114: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1114 that a ball entering the left operation winning hole 662 is detected (S1114: Yes), the process proceeds to S1103 to end the jackpot waiting state and start the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot start process 2 (see FIG. 59), the type of the activated winning slot that triggers the jackpot can be switched depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is a right-triggered jackpot or a left-triggered jackpot). Therefore, in the case of a right-triggered jackpot, the profit that the player can enjoy in one round of the jackpot (
It is possible to switch between a game in which the profit (number of winning balls) is variable and a game in which the playing method during the jackpot waiting state does not affect the profit (number of winning balls).

Next, referring to FIG. 60, the big win control process 2 (S1022) in the second embodiment will be described.
This big win control process 2 (S1022) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the big win control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, and is a process for executing a big win performance and opening or closing the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65, just like the big win control process (see FIG. 32).

In the big win control process 2 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 60), S1201 to S
In each process of 1217, the big win control process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 32) is performed.
The same processes as those of S1201 to S1217 in the second embodiment are executed. In the big win control process 2 (see FIG. 60), after the process of S1214 or S1215 is completed, the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is set to close (S1221), and the process proceeds to S1216. This makes it possible to limit the period during which the storage state of the storage device 675 is released to the big win standby state and during the big win.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 61 and Fig. 62, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, referring to Fig. 61, the win-related process 2 (S4321) in the second embodiment will be described. This win-related process 2 (S4321) is a process executed in place of the win-related process (see Fig. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to the win, similar to the win-related process (see Fig. 37).

Of the winning-related processes in the second embodiment (see FIG. 61), S4401 and S4404 to S4410 are the same as the winning-related processes in the first embodiment (
In the winning-related process 2 in the second embodiment (see FIG. 61), the same processes as S4401 and S4404 to S4410 are executed.
In the process, when it is determined that the commands received from the main control device 110 include a standby state command (S4401: Yes), a standby state command process is executed to determine the content of the standby state presentation according to the received standby state command (S4421), and the process is terminated. The details of this standby state command process (S4421) will be described with reference to FIG.

62 is a flowchart showing the standby state command process (S4421). In the standby state command process (S4421), first, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a right trigger jackpot (S4601). If it is determined that the jackpot is a right trigger jackpot (S4601: Yes),
), a display standby state command for executing a standby state presentation (see FIG. 7) is set as in the first embodiment (S4602), and the standby state presentation flag 223g is set to ON (S4
603) and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a right-triggered jackpot (it is a left-triggered jackpot) (S4601: No), instead of executing the standby state presentation, a display standby state command is set to execute a standby state presentation in a mode in which the third symbol displayed in the variable display presentation is kept displayed as it is (the display is extended), and this process is terminated. In the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the standby state presentation in a mode in which the display of the third symbol is simply extended is set because the jackpot standby state in the case of a left-triggered jackpot ends in an extremely short period of time (about 0.5 seconds) and the jackpot starts. Therefore, if a configuration is used in which the standby state presentation similar to that of a right-triggered jackpot (see FIG. 7) is executed in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the jackpot starts after the standby state presentation is displayed for only a moment (about 0.5 seconds), which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the display content or confuse the player. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state that is set based on the occurrence of the left trigger jackpot, the display mode at the end of the variable display performance (the confirmed display of the third symbol) is configured to continue to be displayed as it is until the jackpot starts. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player feel as if the jackpot started as soon as the variable display ended, so it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable or becoming confused.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, two types of activation winning holes are provided on the upper right and lower left sides of the game board 13, and the activation winning hole that triggers the start of a jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. The right activation winning hole 661 provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 is located in a position where a ball can enter when the game ball is shot from the right, while the left activation winning hole 662 provided on the lower left side of the game board 13 is located in a position where a ball can enter when the game ball is shot from the left. In addition, a storage device 675 capable of storing only one game ball is disposed above the left-acting winning port 662, and when a player shoots a game ball aiming at the first ball entry port 64 in a game state of left-hitting (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), the game ball is stored in the storage device 675 until the first special symbol jackpot occurs. The storage state of the storage device 675 is released when the jackpot standby state is reached, so that in the case of a jackpot type (left-triggered jackpot) that is triggered by a ball entering the left-acting winning port 662, the game ball stored in the storage device 675 flows downward and enters the left-acting winning port 662, so that the jackpot starts immediately after the jackpot standby state is reached. As a result, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, in the first round of the jackpot,
Since the possibility of the jackpot starting when the game ball has not reached the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 is high, the number of prize balls obtained is almost the same every time, regardless of the skill of the player. In contrast, when the right trigger jackpot occurs, the jackpot does not start unless the game ball is shot aiming at the right operation winning hole 661, so that, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to realize a game in which the number of prize balls obtained by the player in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the timing of the game ball entering the right operation winning hole 661. Therefore, in this second embodiment, the game in the jackpot waiting state and the game in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on whether the left trigger jackpot occurs or the right trigger jackpot occurs, so that the player can play the game with attention paid to the type of jackpot.

In the second embodiment, the operating winning port which is the trigger for starting the jackpot is different depending on the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to configure all jackpot types so that the jackpot starts when the game ball enters either the left or right operating winning port, and then provide a jackpot type in which the storage valve 675a is opened and a jackpot type in which the storage valve 675a is not opened. That is, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the storage valve 675a may be opened from the start of the jackpot waiting state until the end of the jackpot, while in the case of a right-triggered jackpot, the storage valve 675a may be kept closed from the start of the jackpot waiting state until the end of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the storage valve 675a is released and the stored game ball enters (wins) the left operating winning port 662 immediately after the jackpot is confirmed and displayed.
Therefore, as in the second embodiment described above, a jackpot can be started soon after game balls have been accumulated on the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 (approximately 0.5 seconds after the jackpot standby state is entered). On the other hand, in the case of a right-triggered jackpot, the storage valve 675a is not opened, so even if a jackpot is displayed as confirmed, the possibility of the game balls immediately entering the left-actuated winning opening 662 is low. Therefore, since the possibility of the jackpot starting immediately after the confirmation of the jackpot is also low, as in the first and second embodiments described above, by varying the launch speed (launch strength) of the game balls, more game balls reach the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 (
By having the ball enter the right actuation winning port 661 in the state where the ball is on the right side of the ball, it is possible to provide an innovative gameplay in which a number of game balls exceeding the number of winning balls (i.e., two balls) that is the end condition of the first round can enter the right specific winning port 65a. As a result, as in the second embodiment, it is possible to switch between a gameplay in which the first round ends with a predetermined number of winning balls and a gameplay in which a number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number of winning balls can be entered depending on the skill of the player, depending on the type of jackpot, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the second embodiment, there are two operating winning ports (right operating winning port 661 and left operating winning port 662).
In this configuration, the left actuation winning port 662 is provided, and the actuation winning port that is the trigger for starting the jackpot is different depending on the jackpot type. That is, the jackpot type is provided when the game ball enters (wins) the left actuation winning port 662, which is likely to enter the jackpot immediately after the combination of the third symbols (i.e., a set of the same number) indicating the jackpot is displayed, and the right actuation winning port 661, which is unlikely to enter the jackpot unless the player aims for it, is provided after the combination of the third symbols indicating the jackpot is displayed. In contrast to this, the right actuation winning port 661 may be provided alone, and a jackpot type may be provided that starts even if the game ball does not enter (win) the right actuation winning port 661 (i.e., only when the combination of the third symbols indicating the jackpot is displayed), and a jackpot type that does not start unless the game ball enters (wins) the right actuation winning port 661. By configuring in this way, it becomes unnecessary to provide the left operation winning port 662 and the storage device 670, so that it is possible to reduce the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the second embodiment, the ease of entry of the game ball into the first ball entry port 64 is determined by the storage device 675.
The ease of a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 was constant regardless of the state of the storage device 6
The height of the storage device 675 may be varied depending on the state of the storage device 675 (whether game balls are stored or not). Specifically, for example, the storage device 675 is provided on the upper left side of the first ball entrance 64, and when game balls are stored in the storage device 675, the height of the storage device 675 is set so that the upper surface of the stored game balls partially protrudes from the upper surface of the storage device 675. Then, when a game ball launched by hitting left hits a game ball stored in the storage device 675, the position of the storage device 675 is set so that the game ball is easily bounced back in the direction in which the first ball entrance 64 is arranged. By configuring in this way, when game balls are stored in the storage device 675, the game balls are easily entered into the first ball entrance 64, so that the lottery for the first special symbol is easily executed. In other words, since it is more advantageous for the player to have game balls stored in the storage device 675, the player can be made to actively store game balls during normal play. Therefore, since the jackpot waiting state can be started more reliably with game balls stored in the storage device 675, when a left-triggered jackpot occurs, the game balls stored in the storage device 675 can be instantly made to enter the left-actuated winning port 662 to start the left-triggered jackpot.

In the second embodiment, the period from the start of the jackpot waiting state to the start of the jackpot is changed by switching the operating winning port which is the start trigger of the jackpot according to the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operating winning port itself may be deleted (i.e., the jackpot is started without going through the jackpot waiting state), and the opening period may be simply changed according to the jackpot type. By configuring in this way, in a jackpot with a long opening, more game balls can be made to reach the top surface of the opening door 65f1 by hitting the right during the opening, whereas in a jackpot with a short opening period, it is difficult for the game balls to reach the top surface of the opening door 65f1. Therefore, the advantage of the first round can be varied according to the jackpot type without using the operating winning port.

In the second embodiment, the activated winning port that triggers the start of a jackpot is switched depending on the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot may be started regardless of which activated winning port the game ball enters during jackpot waiting. The degree of advantage of the jackpot may be varied depending on the type of activated winning port that is won. More specifically, for example, it is more likely that a jackpot will start when a ball enters the right activated winning port 661 than when a jackpot will start when a ball enters the left activated winning port 662.
The configuration may be such that the number of rounds of the jackpot is increased. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot standby state is entered, the game ball is immediately entered (entered) into the right operation winning hole 661.
If this can be achieved, it will be advantageous for the player, so it is possible to predict whether or not a jackpot will occur while the variable display is being executed, and to devise a way to have the game ball enter the right actuated winning port 661 immediately after the jackpot standby state is entered (within about 0.5 seconds until the game ball enters the left actuated winning port 662) so that the game can be played. Also, in this case, instead of switching the degree of advantage according to the type of actuated winning port, a configuration may be adopted in which the game characteristics are switched. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which when a jackpot is started by the ball entering the left actuated winning port 662, a 10-round jackpot is always started, while when a jackpot is started by the ball entering the right actuated winning port 661, a 10-round jackpot is always started.
When the ball enters the hole and a jackpot is started, either a 4-round or 16-round jackpot may be selected by lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch between a gameplay in which a 10-round jackpot is awarded reliably and an unstable gameplay (high gambling nature) in which the number of rounds can be large or small, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot is started when the game ball enters the operation winning hole corresponding to the jackpot type after the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the right variable winning device 65 of this embodiment can be applied to a type of pachinko machine 10 (a so-called one-type/two-type mixed machine) that does not include an operation winning hole and has a jackpot that is started immediately when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol (so-called one-type winning) and a jackpot that is started when the game ball enters a specific area provided on the game board 13 (so-called two-type winning). In other words, when a single type win occurs, the jackpot begins immediately after the game ball is fired toward the right variable winning device 65, making it impossible to aim for an over win. On the other hand, when the specific area is in a state where the ball can enter (a state where a double type win can be aimed for), an over win can be intentionally caused by first firing the game ball at the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 and then firing the game ball aiming at the specific area.

Third Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 63 to 68. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won by a lottery of special symbols and the machine transitions to a jackpot waiting state, the more game balls that are passing through the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the time when the game ball enters the operation winning hole 660, the more advantageous it is for the player (the more prize balls that can be won in the first round).

In contrast, in the third embodiment, even when the player does not win the jackpot, the player's advantage is varied according to the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. More specifically, in some cases where the player does not win the lottery for the special symbol, the player may win the right specific winning hole 65a.
In this way, the more game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the timing when the small win is started, the more prize balls can be won in the small win.
The player can play the game by paying attention to the upper surface of f1.

The pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration.
This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 63. As shown in Fig. 63, in the third embodiment, a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and
The second ball entrance 640 is disposed in a flow path provided on the left side of the variable display unit 80. In addition, by this, the game ball is shot by hitting it from the left side, and the normal ball entrance (
The game balls can be inserted into any of the through gate 67, the first ball entrance 64, and the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the jackpot waiting state and other than the jackpot, the player can play by hitting with the left hand regardless of the game state. When the jackpot or small jackpot is hit, the game ball is shot onto the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 by hitting with the right hand, so that the player can enjoy the game of having as many game balls enter the right specific winning port 65a at the timing when the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened.

In the third embodiment, in some cases where the second special symbol is not drawn, the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened for a certain period (0.2 seconds) as a small win, but the first special symbol is not drawn as a small win. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage during the time-saving state of the normal symbol can be further increased. Therefore, the interest of the player in the time-saving state of the normal symbol can be further increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a display performance executed in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 64(a) shows a state of a probability change (
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a small win is obtained by drawing the second special symbol in a special symbol probability state and a normal symbol time-saving state. In this embodiment, when a small win is obtained, the third symbol combination (
As a so-called chance combination, a combination of third symbols with numbers "3", "4", and "1" is displayed. FIG. 64(a) shows the moment when a small win occurs and all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), in the probability variable state, an image urging the player to hit left is displayed in the small area Ds3 until the combination of symbols corresponding to the small win is confirmed. As a result, in the probability variable state, the second ball entrance 640 provided on the left side of the game board 13 is displayed.
This allows the player to aim and hit with their left hand.

64(b) is a diagram showing a display mode during the confirmation display of the small win. During the confirmation display of the small win, the message "It's from the right!
A speech bubble is formed displaying the words "Are you sure you want to win?" and a figure of an arrow pointing right. This display content allows the game ball to reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 by hitting it to the right. Therefore, when the opening period of the small win begins, the game ball that was placed on the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the right specific winning port 65a. This small win confirmation display (see FIG. 64(b)) continues to be displayed from the time the variable period of the variable display corresponding to the small win has elapsed until the small win ends. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of explanation,
The image that is displayed during a small win and encourages the player to hit to the right (see Figure 64 (b)) is called the "right hit notification image."

In the third embodiment, the small win is configured to have a 4-second opening period. That is, after 4 seconds have passed since the right-hit notification image (see FIG. 64(b)) started to be displayed on the display screen, the opening/closing door 65f1 is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds). This allows more game balls to be released through the opening/closing door 65f1 during the 4-second opening period.
When the ball reaches the top surface of 5f1, the small win period begins, and when the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls can enter the right specific winning port 65a.

As described above, the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 is configured so that the game ball can pass through in about 4 seconds. That is, the game ball that reaches the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 rolls on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 for a period almost the same as the opening period of the small win. Therefore, the right hit notification image (Figure 64 (
b) is displayed, the game ball can be prevented from passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 before the opening period has elapsed. Also, the earlier the right-hand shot of the game ball is started after the small win is confirmed and displayed, the more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, so that the player can pay more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 while playing in the probability variable state (probability variable state of special symbols and time-saving state of normal symbols) and time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols and time-saving state of normal symbols).

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 65, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment,
The RAM 203 will now be described. Note that the ROM 202 in the third embodiment is the same as the first embodiment.
The only difference between the ROM 202 in the third embodiment and the ROM 202 in the third embodiment is that the first winning random number table 202a is partially changed, and the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. Therefore, the description of the ROM 202 in the third embodiment will be limited to the details of the first winning random number table 202a.

Fig. 65(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the third embodiment. As shown in Fig. 65(a), the first winning random number table 202a in the third embodiment specifies random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a big win, as well as random number values (counter values) that are determined to be a small win.

More specifically, regardless of whether the special symbol is in a low probability state or a high probability state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 for the drawing of the second special symbol is within the range of "360 to 39
For the range of "9", small wins are specified in correspondence with each other (202a2 in FIG. 65(a)).
, 202a4). On the other hand, for the drawing of the first special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the small win is drawn.
No value of the winning random number counter C1 is associated (202a2 in FIG. 65(a)
, 202a4). Therefore, when the first special symbol is drawn, there is no possibility of a small win, but when the second special symbol is drawn, there is a probability of a small win of 1/10 (40/400). Therefore, in the probability of a small win or the time-saving state, the probability of a normal symbol winning is high, so that the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and there is a relatively high probability of a small win and a chance to win a prize ball, so that the game state is extremely advantageous for the player. In addition, when a small win occurs, the degree of advantage of the player can be greatly different depending on whether or not the player plays by aiming at the specific winning entrance 65a. That is, in this embodiment, after a small win is notified, a large number of game balls (around 6 balls) can be made to reach the upper surface of the opening door 65f1 by hitting the game ball to the right during the opening period of 4 seconds. In other words, at the time when the opening period of the small win begins, it is possible to make the state in which around 6 game balls are passing through the upper surface of the opening door 65f1. Each time a game ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, 10 prize balls are awarded.
By hitting the ball to the right according to the number of balls, you can win about 60 balls each time you win a small win.
Depending on whether or not you hit the right hand according to the right hand hit notification image, the degree of advantage between the probability variable state and the time-saving state can be greatly different. Therefore, you can play the game by paying more attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 65(b). Fig. 65(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 in the third embodiment is similar to the RAM in the first embodiment.
The difference is that a small win flag 203p is added to the configuration of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 13). The other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small win flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not a small win is occurring. If it is on, it means that a small win is occurring. On the other hand, if it is off, it means that a small win is not occurring. Here, a small win indicates the period from when the opening period of a small win starts to when the ending period of a small win ends. This small win flag 20
3p is set to ON at the start of the opening period of the small win (see S1303 in FIG. 67), and is set to OFF at the end of the small win (see S1311 in FIG. 67).

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 66 and Fig. 67. First, main process 3 in this third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 66. This main process 3 is a process executed in place of the main process (see Fig. 30) in the first embodiment, and is a process for performing main control of the game, similar to the main process (see Fig. 30).

In the main process 3 (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment, steps S1001 to S100
In the processes of S1001 to S1005 and S1006 to S1016 in the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment, the same processes as those in S1001 to S1005 and S1006 to S1016 in the main process (see FIG. 66) in the third embodiment are executed.
When the process of S1005 is completed, next, the specific winning port 65 during the execution of the small win
A small win control process for controlling the opening and closing operation of a is executed (S1021), and the process is returned to S1
The process proceeds to step S1006. Details of this small win control process (S1021) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the small win control process (S1021). In this small win control process (S1021), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small win (S1301). In addition, in the process of S1301, the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23)
A variation pattern is executed based on the fact that the lottery result of the special pattern is judged to be a small win, and when the end timing of the variation pattern corresponding to the small win is reached, it is judged to be the start timing of the small win.

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the small win (S1
301: Yes), a small win opening command indicating the start of the small win opening period is set (S1302), and the small win flag 203p is set to ON (S130
3) End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small win (S1301: No), then it is determined whether the small win flag 203p is on (i.e.,
If it is determined that the small win flag 203p is off (S1304: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small win flag 203p is on (S1304: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is time to open the right specific winning hole 65a (S1305). In other words, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the opening period (3 seconds).

In the process of S1305, if it is determined that it is the timing to open the right specific winning hole 65a (S1305: Yes), the right specific winning hole 65a is set to open (S1306), and this process is terminated. By setting the opening of the right specific winning hole 65a by the process of S1306, the opening door 65f1 is opened and the game ball passing through the upper surface of the opening door 65f1 enters (enters) the right specific winning hole 65a. As a result, the more game balls reach the upper surface of the opening door 65f1, the more prize balls the player can win. Therefore, since more game balls can be fired by the player during the opening period of the small win, the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved.

In the process of S1305, if it is determined that it is not the timing to open the right specific winning opening 65a (i.e., it is not the timing to end the opening period) (S1305: No), then it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the right specific winning opening 65a is established (S1307). Note that in this third embodiment, it is determined whether or not 0.2 seconds have passed since the right specific winning opening 65a was opened,
Alternatively, when two game balls enter the winning hole, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the process of S1307, when it is determined that the closing condition of the right specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the right specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (S1308), and a small winning ending command indicating the start of the ending period of the small winning is set (S1309).
09), and this process is terminated. In addition, during the ending period of the small win,
A period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) sufficient to eject all game balls that have entered the slot is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S1307, if it is determined that the closing condition of the right specific winning port 65a has not been established (S1307: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the small win (i.e., the end timing of the ending period) (S1310).
If it is determined that it is the timing to end the small win (S1310: Yes), the small win in progress flag 203p is turned off to set the end of the small win (S1311), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the small win in the process of S1310 (S1310: No), this process ends as it is.

By executing this small win control process (see Figure 66), it is possible to realize the same opening and closing operation of the right specific winning port 65a for every small win.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 68, the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment
FIG. 68 illustrates a control process 3 (S433) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment.
1 is a flowchart showing the winning-related process 3 (S43) in the third embodiment.
31) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment during the command determination process (see FIG. 36), and is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to a hit, similar to the hit-related process (see FIG. 37).

In the third embodiment, S4401 to S4404 of the winning-related process 3 (see FIG. 68)
In each process of 410, the S of the winning-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37)
The same processes as those in S4401 to S4410 are executed.

In the winning-related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command has not been received (S4409: N
Next, it is determined whether an opening command for a small win has been received from the main control device 110 (S4431). If it is determined that an opening command for a small win has been received (S4432),
431: Yes), a display command for displaying a right-hit notification image (see FIG. 64(b)) is set to the display control device 114 (S4432), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4431, if it is determined that the opening command for the small win has not been received (S4431: No), it is then determined whether or not the ending command for the small win has been received from the main control device 110 (S4433). If it is determined that the ending command for the small win has been received (S4433: Yes), a display command is set (S4434) to cancel the right hit notification image and return to the image notifying a normal left hit (see FIG. 64(a)), and this process is terminated. By canceling the right hit notification image at the start of the ending period of the small win, rather than at the end timing of the small win, the right specific winning port 65a
Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to shoot the game ball by hitting it to the right even though there is no possibility that the game ball will enter the right specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss. On the other hand, in the process of S4433, if it is determined that the ending command for the small win has not been received (S4433:
No), and then this process ends.

S4431 to S4432 in the winning-related process 3 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment
By the process of 434, the display of the right-hit notification image can be set from the start of the opening period of the small win to the end of the small win. Therefore, since the player can be made to hit the right before the opening period of the small win starts (during the opening period of 4 seconds), by hitting the right according to the right-hit notification image, it is possible to make the state in which multiple game balls have reached the upper surface of the opening door 65f1 at the start of the opening period of the small win. Therefore, even though the opening period of the small win is short (maximum 0.2 seconds), multiple game balls can be made to enter the specific winning port 65a, so the degree of advantage when playing according to the right-hit notification image can be increased. This allows the player to check the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 more seriously, thereby improving the player's motivation to participate in the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in some cases where the special symbol lottery result is a miss, the right specific winning hole 65a is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds (
The small win is set for a 4-second opening period, and then the right specific winning port 65a is opened for 0.2 seconds. Therefore, by continuously shooting game balls toward the top surface of the opening door 65f1 during the 4-second opening period, a state in which multiple game balls are passing through the top surface of the opening door 65f1 at the start of the opening period can be achieved, and the multiple game balls can be entered into the opened right specific winning port 65a. In addition, when a small win is achieved by drawing a special pattern, a right-hit notification image is displayed from the start of the opening period of the small win to the end of the opening period. With this configuration, multiple game balls can be easily hit for 0.2 seconds with each small win by hitting the right only while the right-hit notification image is displayed according to the display content of the third pattern display device 81.
During the opening period of 10 seconds, the ball can be entered into the right specific winning hole 65a. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 while playing. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, right hitting is advantageous only in the case of a big win or a small win, and the game is played by hitting left during normal play. By configuring in this way, during the time-saving state or the probability change state, right hitting and left hitting can be frequently switched, so that the player can enjoy switching the direction in which the game ball is fired. Also, since right hitting is a chance to win a prize ball, the player can be pleased when right hitting is notified.

In the third embodiment, when a small win occurs during normal times, a performance is executed to notify the player of a right hit, and otherwise, a performance is executed to notify the player of a left hit, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a small win occurs, immediately (for example, after the fluctuation ends, 0.
The opening period is set to 1 second. In other words, if the player does not start hitting the right hand side during the variable display, it is difficult to get the game ball into the small win opening period. The player may also be configured to execute a performance that suggests the likelihood of a small win during the variable display of the second special symbol. Specifically, for example, during the variable display of the third symbol, the small region Ds3
In contrast, the characters "10%", "30%", "60%", and "1
The character "100%" may be selected and displayed at a probability corresponding to the result of the lottery for the second special symbol. More specifically, the character "100%" is selected only in the case of a small win, but the probability of it being selected is lower than that of other characters.
The word "0%" will be replaced with "30%" or "60%" if the result of the second special pattern is a small win.
It is configured so that it is more difficult to select than "1" and most likely to be selected in the case of a miss.
The word "30%" is configured so that the probability of being selected in the case of a small win is higher than "10%" and lower than "60%." On the other hand, the probability of being selected in the case of a loss is "10%."
%" and higher than "60%." The word "60%" is configured so that it is selected more frequently in the event of a small win than "30%," but is selected less frequently in the event of a miss than "30%." By configuring it in this way, most of the words displayed in the event of a small win will be "30%" or "60%," which can also be displayed in the event of a miss, so the player can predict whether or not there will be a small win from the displayed words. Then, for players who have predicted they will get a small win, the opening and closing door 65 can be opened and closed by hitting the right side while the variable display is being executed (before the small win begins).
The game ball can be shot toward the upper surface of the f1. If the player predicts that the ball will win a small win, the door 65f1 opens and the player can win a prize ball. However, if the player's prediction is wrong, the player will have just wasted the ball and hit the right side, so the player can predict whether the ball will win a small win or not more seriously. Also, when the word "100%" is displayed,
Since the small win is guaranteed, the player can feel at ease in hitting the right hand during the variable display. This can further increase the player's interest in the game during the probability variable state and the time-saving state.

In the third embodiment, only the small win type with an opening period of 4 seconds is provided, but this is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be used in which multiple types with different opening periods are provided. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be used in which the opening period is 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 8 seconds. By configuring in this way, in the case of a small win type with a short opening period (1 second or 2 seconds), when a right hit is performed after the opening period of the small win has started, the number of game balls that reach the opening door 65f1 before the opening period of the small win starts is reduced, so the number of winning balls is likely to be reduced compared to a small win type with an opening period of 4 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small win type with an opening period longer (8 seconds) than the period required for a game ball to pass through the upper surface of the opening door 65f1, if a right hit is continued after the opening period of the small win has started, the game ball launched in the first half of the opening period will pass through the opening door 65f1 before the opening period starts. Therefore, since balls are more likely to be wasted, the number of balls held is more likely to decrease than with the small win type with an opening period of 4 seconds. This allows the player's degree of advantage to be varied depending on the small win type, so when a small win is announced (the right hit announcement image is displayed), the player can hit the right in the hope of winning an advantageous small win.

In the third embodiment, the right-hit notification image is displayed when a small win occurs, but the right-hit notification image is not limited to being displayed during a small win. For example, the right-hit notification image may also be used for display during a big win (for example, during an opening period). By configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to prepare separate effects for a big win and a small win, so the number of data in the display data table can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the small prize may be won by drawing the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this.
A configuration may be adopted in which a small win is won with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/50) when a lottery for a special symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, in the low probability state of the most unfavorable special symbol for the player and in the normal state of the normal symbol, it is possible to obtain a certain amount of balls in the case of a small win, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. Therefore, even if the most unfavorable state continues for a long time (so-called a stuck state occurs), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the game. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which a right-hit notification image is displayed when a small win is won (the occurrence rate of right-hit navigation) is changed depending on the number of consecutive misses. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which the right-hit navigation hardly occurs even if a small win occurs until a specific number of misses are reached without a big win in the lottery for the first special symbol, and the occurrence rate of right-hit navigation becomes high (for example, 50%) when the specific number of times is exceeded. As a result, since it is difficult for the balls to be reduced when the specific number of times is exceeded, the player can continue playing for a longer period of time. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In this third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a big win is initiated when a game ball enters the operating winning port 660, but it is also possible to eliminate the operating winning port 660 and configure the over winning to occur only in the case of a small win.

In the third embodiment, the jackpot is started when the special symbol is selected as the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively or in addition to this, the jackpot may be started when the game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65. That is, during the opening period of the right specific winning port 65a based on the winning of a small win, the game ball may enter the specific area and start the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the merit of allowing the ball to enter the right specific winning port 65a in the small win can be increased, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to whether the right hit navigation occurs. In this case, the game may be configured to win a small win even in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the occurrence rate of the right hit navigation when a small win occurs may be changed for each game state. That is,
The navigation occurrence rate may be low in the low probability state of the normal pattern, and high in the time-saving state of the normal pattern. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage in the time-saving state of the normal pattern can be further increased. Conversely, the navigation occurrence rate may be higher in the low probability state of the normal pattern. This gives a chance to win the jackpot by making the ball enter the specific area even in the case of a small win, in addition to the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the special pattern, so
It is possible to make it difficult for a situation to occur in which a jackpot is not won for a long time. Therefore, it is possible for the player to continue playing for a longer period of time. Furthermore, in a low probability state of normal symbols, when the number of times that a special symbol is drawn and fails reaches a certain number of times or more, the right-hit navigation occurrence rate in the case of a small win may be increased. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which it is easier to win a jackpot (it is easier to get the game ball into a specific area) than before the certain number of times is exceeded, so that it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which a special symbol fails for a long period of time in succession to occur. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 69 to 74. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, the big win is started by making the game ball enter the operation winning port 660 while the game ball is passing over the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, and the game ball passing over the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 enters the right specific winning port 65a. In other words, when the big win standby state is entered, the big win is always started (
The game is structured so that the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of game balls that are to enter the right specific winning port 65a in the first round) can be varied depending on the timing of the game (the timing at which the game balls are to enter the operating winning port 660).

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured so that the player can select between a game in which the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of winning balls that can be obtained) varies depending on the timing of starting the jackpot, and a game in which the timing of starting the jackpot and the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of winning balls that can be obtained) are unrelated. More specifically, in the fourth embodiment, depending on the player's selection in the jackpot waiting state, in the first round of the jackpot, the right specific winning port 65a of the right variable winning device 65 is opened, or the left specific winning port 65b of the left variable winning device 65 is opened.
Whether the left specific winning hole 650a of 0 is opened can be changed. This allows the player to select the gameplay that he or she prefers, so that gameplay that matches the tastes of each player can be provided.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in terms of configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, the condition for determining that the left specific winning hole 650a should be closed in each round of the jackpot has been changed to "when 30 seconds have passed or when four or more game balls have won," the configuration of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 has been changed.
The control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed.
The control process executed by U221 has been partially changed, and the main control device 110
The configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed.
Other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114
The various processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 69, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the fourth embodiment, a distribution device 680 is arranged on the upper right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, instead of the operation winning hole 660 in the first embodiment. Inside the distribution device 680, two operation winning holes (right operation winning hole 681, left operation winning hole 682) into which the game ball can enter are provided. Both of these operation winning holes are determined to be valid only during the jackpot waiting state, similar to the operation winning hole 660 in the first embodiment. In the jackpot waiting state, when a game ball enters the right operation winning hole 681, a jackpot is started in which the right specific winning hole 65a is opened in one round of the jackpot, and when a game ball enters the left operation winning hole 682, a jackpot is started in which the left specific winning hole 650a is opened in one round of the jackpot.

In addition, above the two operating winning ports (right operating winning port 681, left operating winning port 682), a distribution member 683 is provided for distributing game balls that have entered the distribution device 680 to one of the operating winning ports. This distribution member 683 is configured to be rotatable about an axis 683a as a rotation axis, and is changed alternately between an arrangement tilted to the right (see the solid line in FIG. 69) and an arrangement tilted to the left (see the dashed line in FIG. 69) according to the elapsed time (every two seconds).
When the sorting member 683 is in a position tilted to the right, the upper part of the right actuated winning opening 681 is blocked by the sorting member 683, and the upper part of the left actuated winning opening 682 is opened. Therefore, a game ball that enters the sorting device 680 while the sorting member 683 is in a position tilted to the right flows down to the lower left along the slope formed by the sorting member 683 that extends from the upper right direction as viewed from the front to the lower left direction as viewed from the front, and enters the left actuated winning opening 682.

When a game ball enters the left operation winning hole 682 in the jackpot waiting state, the jackpot starts in which the left specific winning hole 650a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot.
Unlike the right variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 65 is configured such that while the left specific winning port 650a is closed, it is impossible to hold a game ball at a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning port 650a. Therefore, in the first round of a jackpot, the number of game balls entering is unlikely to vary, and it is possible to stably pay out almost the same number of prize balls each time. Therefore, for players who are not confident in their ability to shoot game balls in time, it is possible to select a jackpot in which the left specific winning port 650a is opened.

As described above, the big win, which is started when the game ball enters the left operation winning hole 682, starts when 30 seconds have passed since the start of each round or when the game ball enters the left specific winning hole 650.
The round ends when four or more balls enter the left activation winning hole 682. Therefore, in the first round of a jackpot (left trigger jackpot) that starts when a game ball enters the left activation winning hole 682, the jackpot ends when four game balls enter the left specific winning hole 650a.

On the other hand, when the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left, the right operation winning hole 681
The upper part of the left actuation winning port 682 is opened, and the upper part of the left actuation winning port 682 is blocked by the distribution member 683. Therefore, a game ball that enters the distribution device 680 while the distribution member 683 is inclined to the left flows down to the lower right along the slope formed by the distribution member 683, which slopes from the upper left direction in a front view to the lower right direction in a front view, and enters the right actuation winning port 681. When a game ball enters the right actuation winning port 681, the right specific winning port 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the left specific winning port 650a is opened in the second round or later, starting a jackpot (right trigger jackpot). The first round of this right trigger jackpot begins when 30 seconds have passed since the right specific winning port 65a was opened, or when a game ball enters the right specific winning port 650a.
However, as mentioned above, the right specific winning hole 65
The number of winning balls in the right specific winning opening 65a varies in the range of about 2 to 6 depending on the number of game balls passing over the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the time when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened. Therefore, when a game ball enters the right operation winning opening 681 during a big win waiting state, the number of winning balls that can be obtained varies depending on the timing of the ball entry.

In this manner, in this fourth embodiment, when the jackpot waiting state is entered, the position of the distribution member 683 is changed every two seconds, so that the player can check the position of the distribution member 683 and have the game ball enter the operating winning hole corresponding to the preferred playability at the timing when the ball can enter the operating winning hole, thereby providing playability that suits the tastes of each player.

Between the right operation winning port 681 and the left operation winning port 682, an outlet is provided for discharging a game ball to the outside of the sorting device 680 when the game ball that has entered the sorting device 680 does not enter any of the operation winning ports. By providing this outlet, it is possible to prevent (suppress) malfunctions such as ball clogging inside the sorting device 680.

Next, the display presentation in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
70(a) and 70(b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode during a standby state presentation executed in a jackpot standby state in the fourth embodiment. Fig. 70(a) shows a display mode during a time when the sorting member 683 is tilted to the right in the jackpot standby state.

As shown in Fig. 70(a), in the jackpot waiting state in the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a display area HR1 in which the words "Jackpot confirmed!" are displayed at the top of the display screen when viewed from the front, and the third symbol combination (final stop symbol) that was finally stopped (confirmed) in the variable display performance that was being executed before the jackpot waiting state was entered is displayed. Also, as shown in Fig. 70(a), while the sorting member 683 is in a state of being tilted to the right, a message saying "Play now to enter safe mode!?
" and "You can win prize balls steadily!" and an image showing the direction in which the game balls that enter the distribution device 680 flow down (the direction in which the left operation winning opening 682 is located) are displayed. Also, unlike the first embodiment, the chance meter CM is not displayed.
The right side of the display screen becomes empty. These display contents allow the player to recognize that when the game ball is shot toward the sorting device 680, there is a high possibility that the ball will enter the left operation winning hole 682. In other words, the player can recognize that a big win will start in which five game balls can stably enter the left specific winning hole 650a in the first round, regardless of the timing of entering the game ball into the left operation winning hole 682.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), while the sorting member 683 is in a state of being tilted to the left, as in the first embodiment, the display area HR1 in which the words "Big Win Confirmed!" are displayed at the top of the display screen when viewed from the front, and the combination of the third symbol (final stop symbol) that was finally stopped (confirmed) in the variable display performance that was being executed before the big win standby state was entered.
In addition, a chance meter C is displayed on the right side of the display screen in the same manner as in the first embodiment.
M is displayed. Then, in the display area HR2 formed on the display screen, the characters "If you hit now, you will be in unstable mode!?", the characters "If you are lucky, you will win a lot! If you are unlucky...", and an image showing the direction in which the game ball that entered the distribution device 680 will flow down (the direction in which the right operation winning hole 681 is located) are displayed. These display contents allow the game ball to recognize that there is a high possibility that it will enter the right operation winning hole 681 when it is shot toward the distribution device 680. That is, the number of game balls that have reached the opening and closing door 65f1 can be determined from the gauge number of the chance meter CM, and the game ball can be recognized that a big win in which more prize balls can be won will start by entering the right operation winning hole 681 at the right time (at a time when the gauge number is larger).

In this way, in the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot waiting state, the type of the working winning hole into which the ball will enter when the game ball is shot aiming at the sorting device 680, and the outline (game characteristics) of the jackpot that will be started by the ball entering are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, the player can select a jackpot with game characteristics that suit his/her own taste. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the game characteristics to be switched according to the preferences of each player.

<Electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 71, the R
The configuration of the AM 203 will be described. FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 in this fourth embodiment is the same as the RA in the first embodiment.
The difference is that a specific winning slot type storage area 203q, a distribution status storage area 203r, and a distribution status timer 203s are added to the configuration of RAM 203 (see FIG. 13). The other configurations are the same as those of RAM 203 in the first embodiment, so detailed explanations are omitted.

The specific winning port type storage area 203q is a memory area in which data indicating the type of specific winning port that is opened in the first round of a jackpot is stored. Specifically, when "01H" is stored in the specific winning port type storage area 203q, it means that the right specific winning port 65a is opened in the first round of a jackpot, and the left specific winning port 650a is opened from the second round onwards. On the other hand, when "02H" is stored, it means that the left specific winning port 650a is opened in each round of a jackpot.
The specific winning hole type storage area 203q is initially set to "00H". When the game ball enters the right-actuated winning hole 681 during the jackpot waiting state, "01H" is stored, whereas when the game ball enters the left-actuated winning hole 682, "02H" is stored.
See S1131 and S1133 in FIG. 72.) When the conditions for starting the first round of the big win are met, the type of specific winning hole to be opened is determined based on the data in the specific winning hole type storage area 203q (S1232 in FIG. 73).

The distribution state storage area 203r is a storage area in which data indicating the orientation of the distribution member 683 is stored. Specifically, when "00H" is stored in the distribution state storage area 203r, it means that the distribution member 683 is in a state tilted to the left (a state in which a game ball can enter the right operation winning hole 681), and when "01H" is stored, it means that the distribution member 683 is in a state tilted to the right (a state in which a game ball can enter the left operation winning hole 682). The data in this distribution state storage area 203r is updated to data corresponding to the arrangement after switching every time the arrangement of the distribution member 683 is switched in the jackpot waiting state (see S1125, S1127 in FIG. 72). The initial arrangement of the distribution member 683 is in a state tilted to the left. Accordingly, the initial value of the distribution state storage area 203r is also "00H". In the jackpot waiting state, each time the data in the distribution state storage area 203r is updated, a command (distribution state command) is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the arrangement of the distribution members 683 corresponding to the updated data. This distribution state command determines that the arrangement of the distribution members 683 has been switched, and updates the display mode of the waiting state presentation to the display mode corresponding to the switched arrangement.

The distribution state timer 203s is a timer for counting the remaining time until the state of the distribution member 683 is switched. The timer value of this distribution state timer 203s is reset to "0" every time the state of the distribution member 683 is switched in the jackpot waiting state, and is incremented by one every time the jackpot start process 4 (see FIG. 72) described later is executed (see FIG. 7
In other words, the timer is updated at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the main process. When the timer value becomes 500 or more, the state of the sorting member 683 is switched (
See SS1124 and S1126 in Figure 72.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 72 and FIG. 73, the M of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described.
The control process executed by the PU 201 will be described. First, referring to FIG. 72, the big win start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment will be described. This big win start process 4 (S1041) is a process executed in place of the big win start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment, and is executed when the operating winning port (the right operating winning port 681 and the left operating winning port 6
82), and when a ball is detected entering an operating winning hole, initiates a jackpot corresponding to the type of operating winning hole.

In the big win start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, S1101, S
In each of the processes of S1103 and S1104, the same processes as those in S1101, S1103, and S1104 of the jackpot start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment are executed.

In addition, in the big win start process 4 (see FIG. 72) in the fourth embodiment, the ball entry waiting flag 203j is on in the process of S1101 (i.e., the big win waiting state is in progress).
If it is determined that the number of the sorting status timer 203s is 500 or more (S1101: Yes), the sorting status timer 203s is incremented by 1 (S1121), and it is determined whether the timer value after the increment is 500 or more (S1122).
In the process of S1122, if it is determined that the timer value of the sorting state timer 203s after the increment is 500 or more (S1122: Yes), this means that it is time to switch the state of the sorting member 683, and therefore each of the processes of S1123 to S1129 for switching the state of the sorting member 683 is executed.

Specifically, whether the data stored in the sorting status storage area 203r is "00H" (
It is determined whether the sorting member 683 is tilted to the left (S1123).
In the process of 1123, if it is determined that "00H" is stored (S1123:
Yes), the sorting member 683 tilted to the left is changed to a state tilted to the right (S1124), and "01H" is stored in the sorting state storage area 203r (S1125).
Processing proceeds to S1128.

On the other hand, in the process of S1123, when it is determined that the data stored in the sorting state storage area 203r is “01H” (S1123: No), the sorting member 683 tilted to the right is changed to a state tilted to the left (S1126), and the sorting state storage area 203r is changed to “01H” (S1123: No).
"00H" is stored in 03r (S1127), and the process proceeds to S1128.

In the process of S1128, which is executed after the process of S1125 or S1127, a sorting state command indicating the position of the sorting member 683 after the switch is set (S1128), the value of the sorting state timer 203s is reset to 0 (S1129), and the process proceeds to S1130.

In contrast, in the process of S1122, the updated value of the distribution status timer 203s is 5.
If it is determined that the value is less than 00 (S1122: No), this means that it is not time to switch the state of the distribution member 683, so the processes of S1123 to S1129 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1130.
If it is determined that a ball has been scored into the first ball slot (S1130),
1130: Yes), the right specific winning port 650a for the specific winning port type storage area 203q
Then, the data "01H" indicating the right specific winning port 65a is stored (S1131), and the process proceeds to S1103. This allows the start of the jackpot to be set so that the right specific winning port 65a is opened in the first round of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S1130, if it is determined that a ball has not been detected in the right actuated winning opening 681 (S1130: No), it is then determined whether a ball has been detected in the left actuated winning opening 682 (S1132). In the process of S1132, if it is determined that a ball has been detected in the left actuated winning opening 682 (S1132: Yes), "02H", which is data indicating the left specific winning opening 650a, is stored in the specific winning opening type storage area 203q (S1133), and the process proceeds to S1103.
If it is determined that a ball has not been detected entering 82 (S1132: No), this means that it is not time to end the jackpot waiting state, so this process is terminated.

In the big win start process 4 (S1041) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1104 is completed, the distribution state timer 203s is reset to 0 (S1134),
This process ends. In the process of S1134, by resetting the distribution state timer 203s at the end of the big win waiting state, in the next big win waiting state, it is possible to start updating the timer value from the reset state of the distribution state timer 203s.

Next, referring to FIG. 73, the big win control process 4 (S1042) in the fourth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 4 (S1042). This big win control process 4 (S1042) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) instead of the big win control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.
As in the big win control process (see FIG. 32), the right specific winning hole 65a and the left specific winning hole 6
This is a process for controlling the opening and closing operation of 50a.

In the big win control process 4 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 73), S1201 to S
The processes of S1205 and S1207 to S1217 are respectively the same as S1201 to S1205 and S1207 to S1217 of the big win control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment.
In the big win control process 4 (see FIG. 73) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1205 that it is the timing to start a new round (S1205: Yes), it is determined whether the round to be started this time is the 1st round (S1231).

In the process of S1231, if it is determined that it is the first round (S1231: Yes
), the specific winning port corresponding to the data stored in the specific winning port type storage area 203q is set to be opened (S1232), and the process proceeds to S1207. More specifically, if the data stored in the specific winning port type storage area 203q is "01H", the right specific winning port 65a is set to be opened, whereas if the stored data is "02H", the left specific winning port 650a is set to be opened.

On the other hand, in the process of S1231, if it is determined that the round to be started this time is not the first round (S1232: No), the left specific winning hole 650a is set to be opened (S12
33) and proceed to S1207.

By executing this jackpot control process 4 (see FIG. 73), it is possible to open a specific winning port according to the type of the activated winning port that the player passed through (selected) during the jackpot waiting state during the first round of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gameplay according to the type of the activated winning port selected by the player during the first round of the jackpot.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 74, the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment
74 is a flowchart showing the control process 4 (S4341) in the fourth embodiment.
S4341) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and like the hit-related process (see FIG. 37), is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to a hit.

In the fourth embodiment, S4401 to S4404 of the winning-related process 4 (see FIG. 74)
In each process of 410, the S of the winning-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37)
The same processes as those in S4401 to S4410 are executed. In the winning-related process 4 (see FIG. 74) in the fourth embodiment, in the process of S4409, the main control device 110
If it is determined that the command received from does not include an ending command (
S4409: No), then it is determined whether a distribution status command is included (S4441).
.

In the process of S4441, if it is determined that the command received from the main control unit 110 includes a distribution status command (S4441: Yes), a display command for updating to the standby state presentation mode corresponding to the distribution status indicated by the received distribution status command is set (S4442), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4441, if it is determined that the command received from the main control unit 110 does not include a distribution status command (S4441: No), this process ends as it is.

This winning-related process 4 (see FIG. 74) allows the display mode (see FIG. 70(a) and FIG. 70(b)) to be set according to the state after the switching every time the state of the distribution member 683 is switched. Therefore, when the big win waiting state is reached, the player can set the third symbol display device 8
By simply checking the display contents of 1, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the current state of the distribution device 680 is such that a big win with a gameplay that suits the player's taste will start when a game ball is inserted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, there are two types of specific winning holes (the right specific winning hole 65a and the left specific winning hole 65b) through which the game balls can enter when a jackpot is hit.
50a). More specifically, the right specific winning opening 65a is configured to allow a game ball to stay for a relatively long time in a position (upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1) where the right specific winning opening 65a can enter when the right specific winning opening 65a is opened, while the left specific winning opening 650a is configured to make it impossible for a game ball to remain in a position where the game ball can enter the left specific winning opening 650a, while the left specific winning opening 650a is closed. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two types of actuated winning openings (right actuated winning opening 681,
The left operating winning port 682) is provided, and the player is allowed to select the operating winning port into which the ball is to enter during the jackpot waiting state. If a game ball enters the right operating winning port 681, a right trigger jackpot is started in which the right specific winning port 65a is opened in each jackpot round, and if a game ball enters the left operating winning port 682, a left trigger jackpot is started in which the left specific winning port 650a is opened in each jackpot round. This allows the player to select between a game in which the number of game balls passing through the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the timing of entering the game ball into the right operating winning port 681 greatly affects the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round, and a game in which the situation during the jackpot waiting state does not affect the number of prize balls obtained. Therefore, a game that suits the taste of each player can be provided.

In the fourth embodiment, when a left trigger jackpot occurs, the game ball cannot be allowed to stay at a position where it can enter the left specific winning hole 650a in the jackpot waiting state, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to allow up to a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) to stay at a position where it can enter the left specific winning hole 650a within a range smaller than the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. By configuring in this way, even if the player selects the left actuation winning hole 682, it is possible to provide a game in which the degree of advantage varies depending on the timing of the game ball entering.

In the fourth embodiment, when a right-triggered jackpot is obtained, the right specific winning hole 65a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot, whereas when a left-triggered jackpot is obtained, the left specific winning hole 650a is opened in all rounds, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a specific winning hole corresponding to the activated winning hole may be opened only in the first round, and a common specific winning hole may be opened in the second round and thereafter. Even if configured in this way, the playability in the first round can be switched depending on the type of activated winning hole into which the game ball enters.

In the fourth embodiment, whether a right-triggered jackpot or a left-triggered jackpot is started is determined according to the type of activated winning port into which the ball has entered. In other words, the type of specific winning port opened in a jackpot is determined according to the type of activated winning port, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of rounds of a jackpot may be varied according to the type of activated winning port. More specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the right activated winning port 681, a jackpot with 16 rounds or 4 rounds is selected half and half, whereas when a game ball enters the left activated winning port 682, a jackpot with 10 rounds is always selected. Also,
In a gaming machine (so-called V-certain machine) in which a probability variable state is given after a jackpot when a gaming ball enters a specific area during a jackpot, the ball entry rate into the specific area may be varied according to the type of the activated winning hole. More specifically, for example, when a gaming ball enters the right activated winning hole 681, a jackpot with a ball entry rate into the specific area of 20% and a jackpot with a ball entry rate of 100% are selected in half, whereas when a gaming ball enters the left activated winning hole 682, a jackpot with a ball entry rate into the specific area of 60% is always selected.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 75 to 79. In the first embodiment described above, the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the first round) when a jackpot is started is variable according to the number of game balls shot toward the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 in the jackpot waiting state.

In contrast to this, in the fifth embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot ends, the jackpot starts without going through the jackpot waiting state. The opening period and interval period of the jackpot are made different depending on the type of jackpot, so that the number of game balls that can reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the opening period and interval period are made different, and the degree of advantage is made variable for each type of jackpot.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the surface configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, the end conditions for each round of the jackpot have been unified to "when 30 seconds have elapsed or when two or more game balls have won," the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those in the first embodiment.
This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the board configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 75. As shown in Fig. 75, the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment has a first
In the embodiment, the operation winning hole 6 provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) when viewed from the front
60 is deleted. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the big win ends, the opening period of the big win starts immediately (without going through the big win waiting state).

75, in the fifth embodiment, the left variable winning device 650a is deleted. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, in all rounds of the big win, the right specific winning hole 65a, which is closed when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the round or when two or more game balls enter the hole, is opened.

<Electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202.
As shown in FIG. 6(a), the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment in that a period length selection table 202e is added and that the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b are partially changed.
The other configuration is the same as the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The period length selection table 202e is a data table that specifies the opening period and interval period of the jackpot for each type of jackpot. When the start timing of the opening period of the jackpot and the start timing of the interval period are reached, the period length selection table 202e is referenced to set the opening period and interval period according to the type of jackpot. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 70(c), but the period length selection table 202e specifies two types of opening periods: a relatively long period (5 seconds) and a relatively short period (1 second). Similarly, two types of interval periods: a relatively long period (3 seconds) and a relatively short period (0.5 seconds). With these, it is possible to provide a jackpot with a long closing period (opening period) from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, and a long closing period (interval period) between each round from the second round onwards.

Next, the first winning type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76(b). FIG. 76(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 76(b), the first winning type selection table 202b in the fifth embodiment includes the "jackpot A5" as the jackpot type of the first special symbol.
Five types of jackpot types are defined for the second special symbol, namely, "jackpot F5" through "jackpot H5", and three types of jackpot types are defined for the second special symbol, namely, "jackpot F5" through "jackpot H5".

As shown in Fig. 76(b), for the first special symbol jackpot, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4" is associated with "jackpot A5" (see 202b1 in Fig. 76). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 5 counter values that are "jackpot A5", so the probability that "jackpot A5" will be determined when the first special symbol is selected as a jackpot is 5% (5/100).
This "Big Win A2" has 8 rounds, just like the "Big Win A" in the first embodiment.
The "jackpot A5" is a jackpot type in which a "special symbol probability state" and a "normal symbol time-saving state" are given after the jackpot ends. In addition, this "jackpot A5" is one of the jackpot types in which a relatively long period is set as the opening period and the ending period. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in all rounds of the jackpot, the round ends when 30 seconds have passed or when two or more game balls enter the right specific winning port 65a, which closes the right specific winning port 65a. Therefore, if the opening period and the interval period are long, more game balls can reach the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the closing period, so that more game balls can enter the opening/closing door 65 at the start of the next round.
f1. In other words, when a new round is started and the opening and closing door 65f1 is opened, more game balls can be dropped from the opening and closing door 65f1 to enter the right specific winning port 65a. This increases the possibility that a number of game balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of balls (2 balls) specified for each round will enter the right specific winning port 65a (over-winning), which makes it easier for the player to be advantageous in terms of the number of winning balls. On the other hand, if the opening period and the interval period are short, it becomes difficult to make the game balls reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during these closing periods, so that in each round of the jackpot, the upper limit (specified) number (i.e., 2 balls) of game balls will enter and the round will end (the possibility of over-winning will decrease). In other words, it becomes easier to be disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls. In the following explanation, a jackpot (
A jackpot with a short opening period and interval period (a jackpot that is likely to give a large number of prize balls in each round) is called a "long-interval jackpot," and a jackpot with a short opening period and interval period (a jackpot that is unlikely to give a large number of prize balls in each round) is called a "short-interval jackpot."

As a jackpot of the first special symbol, a "jackpot B5" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 14" (see 202b2 in FIG. 76).
The counter value for "2" is 10, so if the first special symbol is selected as the jackpot,
The probability of winning the "Big Win B5" is 10% (10/100).
" is a jackpot type that has 5 rounds, similar to the "jackpot B" in the first embodiment, and gives a "special symbol probability variable state" and a "normal symbol time-saving state" after the jackpot ends. Also, this "jackpot B5" is a type of long-interval jackpot, similar to the "jackpot A5". Therefore, the number of prize balls won in each round is likely to be larger than in a short-interval jackpot.

As a jackpot for the first special symbol, a "jackpot C5" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 64" (see 202b3 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first jackpot type counter C2, 50 are "jackpot C2", so the probability of "jackpot C5" being determined when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special symbol is 50% (50/100).
"5" has 5 rounds, similar to the "Big Win B" in the first embodiment,
This is a type of jackpot that gives a "special symbol probability state" and a "normal symbol time-saving state" after the jackpot ends. This "jackpot C5" is also a type of short-interval jackpot. For this reason, it is difficult to get a large number of prize balls in each round compared to a long-interval jackpot.

As a jackpot for the first special symbol, a "jackpot D5" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 74" (see 202b4 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that are "jackpot D5", so the probability that a "jackpot D5" will be determined when a jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 10% (10/100).
"5" has 5 rounds, similar to the "Big Win C" in the first embodiment,
This is a type of jackpot that gives a "low probability state of special symbols" and a "time-saving state of normal symbols" after the jackpot ends. This "jackpot D5" is a type of long-interval jackpot.
For this reason, it is easier to win more balls in each round than in a short-interval jackpot.

As a jackpot for the first special symbol, a "jackpot E5" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "75 to 99" (see 202b5 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 25 counter values that are "jackpot E5", so the probability of "jackpot E5" being determined when a jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 25% (25/100).
"5" has 5 rounds, similar to the "Big Win C" in the first embodiment,
This is a type of jackpot that gives a "low probability state of special symbols" and a "time-saving state of normal symbols" after the jackpot ends. This "jackpot E5" is a type of short-interval jackpot.
For this reason, it is difficult to win a large number of prize balls in each round compared to a long-interval jackpot.

In addition, as a jackpot of the second special pattern, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 4".
For the range of "1", "big win F5" is specified in correspondence with it (see 202b6 in FIG. 76).
Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are five counter values that are the "jackpot F5", so the probability that the "jackpot F5" will be determined when the first special symbol is selected as the jackpot is 5% (5/100).
The "jackpot F5" is a type of jackpot that has 16 rounds, similar to the "jackpot D" in the first embodiment, and is awarded a "special symbol probability state" and a "normal symbol time-saving state" after the jackpot ends. This "jackpot F5" is also a type of long-interval jackpot. For this reason, the number of prize balls won in each round is more likely to be larger than in the short-interval jackpot.

As a jackpot of the second special symbol, a "jackpot G5" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 64" (see 202b7 in FIG. 76).
The counter value for "5" is 60, so if the first special symbol is selected as the jackpot,
The probability of the "Big Win G5" being determined is 60% (60/100).
" has 10 rounds, just like the "Big Win E" in the first embodiment,
This is a type of jackpot that gives a "special symbol probability state" and a "normal symbol time-saving state" after the jackpot ends. This "jackpot G5" is also a type of long-interval jackpot. Therefore, the number of prize balls won in each round is more likely to be larger than in a short-interval jackpot.

As a jackpot for the second special symbol, a "jackpot H5" is defined in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "65 to 99" (see 202b8 in FIG. 76). Of the 100 possible counter values of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 35 counter values that are "jackpot H5", so the probability that a "jackpot H5" will be determined when a jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 35% (35/100).
"Jackpot H5" is a type of jackpot that has 10 rounds, just like the "jackpot D" in the first embodiment, and is a type of jackpot that gives a "low probability state of special symbols" and a "time-saving state of normal symbols" after the jackpot ends. This "jackpot H5" is also a type of long-interval jackpot. For this reason, the number of prize balls won in each round is more likely to be larger than in a short-interval jackpot.

In this manner, in the fifth embodiment, a long-interval jackpot and a short-interval jackpot are provided. In the long-interval jackpot, the closing period of the right specific winning port 65a between rounds becomes longer, so that more game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 by hitting the right side during the long closing period. Therefore, when the closing period ends and a new round starts, the game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 can be entered into the right specific winning port 65a, so that more prize balls can be acquired. On the other hand, in the short-interval jackpot, the period from when the right specific winning port 65a is closed to when it is opened again is short, so that it is almost impossible to make the game balls reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the closing period, so that the possibility of over-winning in the next round is also low. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be acquired in each round is likely to be smaller than that of the long-interval jackpot. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the number of rounds and
Apart from the game state after the big win, the degree of advantage for each big win can be varied by making the possibility of over-winning different for each big win type, so that the player can play the game by paying more attention to the type of big win.

Next, the details of the period length selection table 202e will be described with reference to Fig. 76(c). Fig. 76(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the period length selection table 202e.
As shown in (c), in this period length selection table 202e, the lengths of the periods to be set as the opening period and the interval period are defined for each type of big win.

Specifically, the jackpot types are "jackpot A5", "jackpot B5", and "jackpot D5".
For the jackpot types "jackpot F5" to "jackpot H5" (long interval jackpots), "5 seconds" is associated with the opening period, and "3 seconds" is associated with the interval period (see 202e1 in FIG. 76(c)). Also, for the jackpot types "jackpot C5" and "jackpot E5" (short interval jackpots), "1 second" is associated with the opening period, and "0
. 5 seconds" are specified in association with the period (see 202e2 in FIG. 76(c)). By selecting the opening period and the interval period with reference to these specified contents, in the long interval jackpot, each closing period (opening period, interval period) becomes relatively long, so that a relatively large number of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the closing period. On the other hand, in the short interval jackpot, each closing period is set to a short length such that even if a right hit is made after the closing period starts, one game ball may reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, so that over winning is unlikely to occur in each round of the jackpot. Therefore, by setting the closing period with reference to this period length selection table 202e, the possibility of over winning can be made different depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with more attention paid to the jackpot type.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 77 to FIG. 79, the MPU of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described.
The control process executed by 201 will be described. First, the special symbol variation process 5 (S121) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The special symbol variation process 5 (S121) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment.
Similar to the process shown in FIG. 11B (see reference), this process is for setting the display in the first pattern display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol variation process 5 in the fifth embodiment (see FIG. 77), S202 to S2
In the processes of S202 to S219 and S222 to S224, the same processes as those in S202 to S219 and S222 to S224 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment are executed.

In addition, when the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment is started, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is being won (S241). If a jackpot is being won (S241: Yes),
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S241 that the jackpot is not being won (S241: No), the process proceeds to S202.

In the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 77) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S219 is completed, the big win start flag 203k is set to ON (S242), and the process is terminated.
Transition to 224.

Next, the big win control process 5 (S1052) in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 78. This big win control process 5 (S1052) is a process executed in the main process (see Fig. 30) instead of the big win control process (see Fig. 32) in the first embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening and closing operation of the right specific winning hole 65a.

In this big win control process 5 (see FIG. 78), S1201, S1203 to S1209
, and S1210 to S1217 are the same as S1201, S1203 to S1209, and S1210 to S1217 of the big win control process (see FIG. 32) in the first embodiment, respectively.
The same processes as those in 1217 are executed.

In the big win control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, if it is determined that the big win start flag 203k is on in the process of S1201 (S1201:
Yes), and reads out the period length selection table 202e (see FIG. 76(c)) (S1241
), an opening period of a length corresponding to the current big win type is specified from the read period length selection table 202e, and an opening command indicating the specified period is set (S
In the process of S1242, in the case of a long-interval jackpot, an opening command indicating an opening period of 5 seconds is set, and in the case of a short-interval jackpot, an opening command indicating an opening period of 1 second is set. When the process of S1242 ends, the process proceeds to S1203.

In the big win control process 5 (see FIG. 78) in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1208 that the closing condition of the right specific winning hole 65a is established (S1208:
If the answer is "Yes", the process executes an interval setting process for setting an interval period according to the type of big win (S1243), and ends this process.
Details of 3) will be described with reference to FIG.

79 is a flowchart showing the interval setting process (S1243). In this interval setting process (S1243), first, it is determined whether the closing condition that has been met this time is closing due to the end of the final round (S1401), and if it is determined that the closing is due to the end of the final round (S1401: Yes), since there is no need to set an interval period, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1401, if it is determined that the closing condition accompanying the end of a round other than the final round is satisfied (S1401: No), the period length selection table 202e is read (S1402), and the length of the interval period corresponding to the current big win type is selected (specified) from the read period length selection table 202e (S1403).
The start of the interval period of the length specified in the process of 403 is set (S1404), and this process ends.

By executing this interval setting process (see FIG. 79), the length of the interval period can be varied depending on whether it is a long-interval jackpot or a short-interval jackpot.
As a result, in the case of a long-interval jackpot, a large number of game balls can reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 that is closed during each interval period, so that the right specific winning port 6
5a. On the other hand, when a short-interval jackpot occurs, an extremely short interval (0.5 seconds) is set as the interval period, so it is difficult for the game balls to reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the interval period. Therefore, since it is difficult for over-entry to occur in each round, the number of prize balls that can be won in each round decreases. Therefore, it is possible to play the game in the hope that a long-interval jackpot will be selected as the jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment is configured to provide a long-interval jackpot in which the opening period and interval period of the jackpot are relatively long, and a short-interval jackpot in which the opening period and interval period of the jackpot are relatively short. In the case of a long-interval jackpot, a large number of prize balls can be made to reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 by hitting the right side during the closing period (opening period) from when the jackpot is notified to when the first round starts, and during the closing period (interval period) from when the first round ends to when the next round starts. Therefore, when the closing period has passed and the right specific winning port 65a is opened, the game balls on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 can be made to enter the right specific winning port 65a at once, so that the rate of over-winning in each round of the jackpot can be increased. On the other hand, in the case of a short-interval jackpot, even if a right hit is made during the closing period, the closing period is too short and the next round starts without the game balls reaching the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Therefore, since it becomes difficult for an over-winning to occur, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls compared to a long interval jackpot. As a result, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot, the likelihood of an over-winning can also be made to differ depending on the jackpot type, so the difference in the degree of advantage for each jackpot type can be made larger. Therefore, when a jackpot occurs, players can play while paying more attention to the type of jackpot.

In the fifth embodiment, only two types of jackpots are provided: a long interval jackpot in which all closing periods are long, and a short interval jackpot in which all closing periods are short. However, this is not limited to this. More types may be provided. Specifically, for example, in addition to the long interval jackpot and the short interval jackpot, a jackpot that occurs after a certain round (for example, the third round) of the jackpot may be provided.
A long interval (e.g., 3 seconds) is set as the closing period until the round, and a short interval (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set in the subsequent rounds. Conversely, a predetermined round (e.g.,
A configuration may be provided in which a short interval (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set as the closing period until the third round, and a long interval (e.g., 3 seconds) is set in the subsequent rounds. Also, for example, a configuration may be provided in which a short interval and a long interval are alternately repeated. By configuring in this way, even if the opening period is a short interval, the player can expect a jackpot that will become a long interval after a predetermined round has passed, or a jackpot in which short intervals and long intervals are alternately repeated. Also, if the opening period is a long interval, the player can expect a jackpot in which a long interval is set for all closing periods. This allows the player to enjoy predicting the jackpot type.

In the fifth embodiment, when a long-interval jackpot occurs, both the opening period and the interval period are long, and when a short-interval jackpot occurs, both the opening period and the interval period are short, but this is not limited to this. For example, one of the periods may be a common length, and only the length of the other period may be different depending on the type of jackpot. This simplifies the control, and reduces the processing load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

In the fifth embodiment, the length of the opening period and the interval period are different depending on the type of the jackpot, but this is not limited to this. Alternatively, or in addition, at least one of the opening period and the interval period may be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of a special pattern that is disadvantageous to the player and a normal state of a normal pattern, a short opening period (e.g., 1 second) and an interval period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) are set, while in a game state (probability state, time-saving state) in which a time-saving state of a normal pattern is set, a long opening period (e.g., 5 seconds) and an interval period (e.g., 3 seconds) may be set for the jackpot type. This can further improve the degree of advantage of the probability state and the time-saving state that are advantageous to the player. Conversely, a long closing period may be set in a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a short closing period may be set in a game state that is advantageous to the player. This allows the player to win more prize balls if a jackpot occurs in an unfavorable state, and thus prevents the player from quitting the game when the state becomes unfavorable. This improves the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, the control that varies the length of the closure period depending on the game state or the type of jackpot does not necessarily have to be combined with the right variable winning device 65 in this embodiment. It may also be applied to a pachinko machine 10 that is provided with only a variable winning device (for example, the left variable winning device 650 in each of the above embodiments) that is structured so that over-winning cannot be intentionally generated. This allows the player to
Since the closed period can be changed according to the situation (the type of big win won, the game state at the time of winning, etc.), the presentation executed during the closed period can be changed. Thus, the presentation mode can be diversified.

<Modification of the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 80, a modified example of the fifth embodiment described above will be explained. In the fifth embodiment described above, a technique was explained in which a jackpot type that is easy to win over and a jackpot type that is difficult to win over are provided using one variable winning device 65. In contrast, in this modified example, a technique is explained in which the possibility of over winning is varied without changing the closing period by using two types of variable winning devices (lower variable winning device 65, upper variable winning device 650).

Fig. 80 is a diagram showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 80, in this modified example, a lower variable winning device 65 having the same structure as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments is arranged in the same position as the right variable winning device 65 in each of the above embodiments. Also, above the lower variable winning device 65, an upper variable winning device 650 having the same structure as the left variable winning device 650 in the first to fourth embodiments is arranged. In this modified example, depending on the type of big win, the upper specific winning port 650a of the upper variable winning device 650 is opened.
At least a jackpot type (alternate jackpot) in which the upper specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the lower specific winning port 65b of the variable winning device 65 are alternately opened every round, and a jackpot type (one-sided jackpot) in which the lower specific winning port 65a is opened every round of the jackpot is provided. Also, each closing period (opening period, interval period) is set to the same period as the short interval jackpot in the fifth embodiment described above. When configured in this way, in a one-sided jackpot, the operation is the same as the short interval jackpot in the fifth embodiment described above, so that over-winning hardly occurs, which is disadvantageous in terms of the number of winning balls.

On the other hand, in the case of an alternating jackpot, when a right shot is made in a round in which the upper specific winning opening 650a is open, some game balls may pass through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a (without winning through the upper specific winning opening 650a) and flow downward, and reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. In other words, at the start of the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened), there is a possibility that one or more game balls will be placed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. As a result, the more game balls that reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the higher the occurrence rate of over winning in the next round (the round in which the lower specific winning opening 65a is opened). Therefore, in the case of an alternating jackpot, the player can be made to play by devising a launch intensity that makes it easier for the balls to pass through the right side of the upper specific winning opening 650a and reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. In other words, during the maximum 30 seconds in which the upper specific winning opening 650a is open,
The player can play the game by aiming to get more game balls to reach the top of the opening and closing door 65f1 and then get more than the upper limit number (2 balls) of game balls into the upper specific winning hole 650a. In this way, when an alternating jackpot is reached, the number of prize balls that can be won varies depending on the playing method of the player, so players who are confident in their skills can play the pachinko machine 10 aggressively. This can improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 81 to Fig. 90. In the fifth embodiment described above, the length of the opening period and the ending period (length of the closing period) are made different depending on the type of big win, so that the number of game balls that can reach the opening and closing door 65f1 of the right variable winning device 65 in each closing period is made different. As a result, the number of game balls (
In other words, when the right specific winning hole 65a is opened, the number of game balls arranged at the position to be guided into the right specific winning hole 65a can be changed.
In the long interval jackpot, in which the closing period is set to a length that allows more than one game ball to reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, by simply continuing to shoot game balls toward the opening and closing door 65f1 during the closing period, all game balls passing over the opening and closing door 65f1 at the start of the next round will be
Therefore, in each round of the big win that ends when two or more game balls enter the winning hole, it is possible to make the game balls enter the winning hole in excess of the prescribed number (two balls) simply by hitting the ball from the right side continuously during the closed period.
In a short interval jackpot, in which the closing period is set long enough to allow two or less game balls to reach the top of the door 65f1, the number of game balls passing through the top of the door 65f1 at the start of each round of the jackpot is approximately two or less. As a result, in each round of the jackpot, approximately only the specified number (two) of game balls enter the jackpot, and the round ends. This allows the number of prize balls that can be obtained in each round of the jackpot to differ depending on the type of jackpot, making it possible to further increase the difference in the degree of advantage for each type of jackpot.

In contrast, in the sixth embodiment, the length of the opening period is 0 regardless of the type of big win.
. 5 seconds. In other words, even if the right hit is performed after the opening period has started, the opening period ends before the game ball reaches the opening door 65f1, and the right specific winning port 65a is opened. Then, the player is made to judge whether it is better to launch the game ball during the variable display (whether the opening door 65f1 is opened when multiple game balls have reached the upper surface of the opening door 65f1) based on the suggested content during the execution of the variable display performance. In other words, a performance is made executable that notifies the player of the possibility that it will be advantageous to perform a right hit during the execution of the variable display. This allows the player to predict whether it is better to perform a right hit based on the content of the performance, and if it is judged that it is better to perform a right hit, the right hit can be started before the end of the variation. Therefore, when the opening door 65f1 is opened as predicted, the player can have a sense of happiness for having caused an over-winning by himself.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in terms of configuration in that the passage detection sensor 22 provided in the right variable winning device 65
8, the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and the RA
The configuration of M203 has been partially changed, and the ROM2 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed.
22 and RAM 223, and the control process executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110, other processes executed by MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114 are the same as those of pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the arrangement of the passage detection sensor 228 provided in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 81. Fig. 81 is a top view of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 81, the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment has an inlet side (right side as viewed from the front) of a flow path provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1,
and on the exit side (left side when viewed from the front), a passage detection sensor 22 capable of detecting the passage of a game ball.
The passage detection sensor 228g1 detects the opening and closing of the door 65f1.
The sixth embodiment can detect game balls flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the door 65f1. The passage detection sensor 228g2 can detect game balls that have passed through the flow path provided on the upper surface of the door 65f1 and been discharged to the left side of the door 65f1. In the sixth embodiment, the difference between the number of game balls flowing into the flow path provided on the upper surface of the door 65f1 (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g1) and the number of game balls discharged from the flow path provided on the upper surface of the door 65f1 (the number of game balls detected by the passage detection sensor 228g2) is calculated, so that the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the door 65f1 can be grasped more accurately.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment, the convex portions 65f1a to 65f1b on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 are provided as a configuration for preventing the game ball from flowing down (for slowing down the game ball and lengthening the period required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1).
In addition to the above, the opening and closing door 65f1 also has a protrusion 65 that can prevent the balls from flowing down.
The protrusion 65f1d allows game balls flowing down from the right side of the right variable winning device 65 to flow from the front side of the top surface of the right variable winning device 65 as viewed from the front into the flow path on the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. In addition, the protrusion 65f1e allows the discharge position to be limited to the front side of the right variable winning device 65 as viewed from the front when the game balls are discharged from the flow path provided on the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. The flow paths through which game balls can pass on the inlet side (right side as viewed from the front) and outlet side (left side as viewed from the front) of the flow paths on the top surface of these opening and closing doors 65f1 (ranges not obstructed by the protrusions 65f1d, 65f1e) are narrow enough to allow only one game ball to pass (
The width of each ball is 1.5 times that of the ball.
1, 228g2 are arranged. By making the inlet and outlet flow paths narrower than those of the above embodiments (to a width of 1.5 game balls), the passage detection sensors 228g1, 228g2 provided on the inlet and outlet sides can more reliably detect game balls flowing into the flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 and game balls flowing out of the flow path. Therefore, the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 can be more accurately grasped.

Next, referring to FIG. 82 to FIG. 84, during the execution of the variable display performance in the sixth embodiment,
The right-hit expectation suggestion effect that may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. This right-hit expectation suggestion effect is an effect that may be executed as part of the variable display effect that develops into a super reach or special reach, and is an effect for suggesting the expectation of whether it will be advantageous for the player if the game ball is shot toward the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. In other words, it is an effect for suggesting the expectation of whether the right specific winning port 65a will be opened and an over-winning will occur if more game balls reach the flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 during the variable display.

FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing the display mode during a super reach in which a right-hit expectation suggestion effect has been set. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, a right-hit expectation suggestion effect is executed in some cases in which the effect develops into a super reach or special reach effect. In this right-hit expectation suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 82(a), an image of an adventurer character holding a sword and shield glaring at an enemy monster is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. Also, at the top of the display screen, a display area HR is displayed in which the words "Defeat the enemy!!" are displayed.
At the same time that the symbol 4 is formed, the third symbol which is changing in the reach state is displayed in a reduced size on the right side of the display area HR4. These display contents allow the player to understand that if the adventurer can defeat the enemy monster, he will win the jackpot.

As shown in Figure 82(a), there is a cross-shaped wound on the monster's body.
Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the front side of the right variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front is decorated to resemble a wound on the body of a monster. This gives the player the impression that the monster's wound and the right variable winning device 65 are related. Although details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, an effect is executed in which the adventurer attacks the monster by aiming at the wound. In addition, as a player-participation effect, an effect is executed in which a game ball is launched at the right variable winning device 65 decorated to resemble a wound on a monster.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the right-hit expectation indication performance, an image of the adventurer and the monster glaring at each other is displayed, and then the monster's upper part is zoomed in and displayed, and a stamina gauge LG showing the monster's remaining stamina is displayed on the right side of the image of the monster in a display area HR5.
These display contents allow the player to visually and easily understand the remaining vitality of the monster.

Moreover, an image of an arrow pointing to the monster's wound is displayed to the left of the monster, and the words "Aim for the wound!!" and an image of a wound are displayed in the display area HR4. Furthermore, the vicinity of the decoration that resembles a wound on the right variable winning device 65 emits light in a color according to the expectation of the current performance. These performance contents suggest to the player that there is a possibility of an over-winning by shooting a game ball at the right variable winning device 65 decorated with a wound.

In addition, the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment has built-in light-emitting diodes (LEDs) of multiple colors to emit light near the decoration that resembles a wound. That is, white LEDs, blue LEDs, green LEDs, and red LEDs are built in. Although details will be described later, in the sixth embodiment, the white light-emitting color is configured to have the lowest expectation, blue to have a higher expectation than white, green to have a higher expectation than blue, and red to have the highest expectation. This allows the player to use the light-emitting color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue to guess whether it will be advantageous to shoot the game ball to the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 (whether the right specific winning port 65a will be opened and an over-winning will occur). Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to the content of the right-hit expectation suggestion performance.

FIG. 83(a) shows a right-hit expectation suggestion effect in which a player hits the right side of the door 65f.
This is the display state when a game ball is shot aiming at the top surface of the ball 1. As shown in FIG.
In the right-hit expectation suggestion performance, the display content suggests that you attack by aiming at the monster's wounds (
82(b) is displayed, an effect is executed in which the adventurer attacks the monster's wounds and the monster's strength gauge LG decreases by one gauge each time the game ball passes the passage detection sensor 228g1. By executing an effect in which this gauge decreases, the player can be made to believe that hitting the ball to the right will make it easier to defeat the monster, which encourages the player to hit the game ball to the right more aggressively. This can increase the player's willingness to participate in the effect that suggests the likelihood of hitting the ball to the right.

In the right-hit expectation suggestion performance in the sixth embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win, the gauge number of the vitality gauge LG can decrease to 0, but if the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, it only decreases to one gauge remaining (the gauge number never becomes 0). This allows players who want to know the lottery result of the special symbol before the third symbol is stopped and displayed to more aggressively shoot the game ball toward the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. This can further increase the player's motivation to participate in the right-hit expectation suggestion performance.

FIG. 83(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the variation stops in a case where a jackpot is obtained by drawing a special symbol and a variation display with a right-hit expectation suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 83(b), when a jackpot is announced, the third symbol is displayed stopped with the same numbers aligned in the display area HR3. In addition, an effect is executed in which the monster is defeated by the adventurer's attack and the gauge value of the vitality gauge decreases to 0. Also, the word "Victory" is displayed in the display area HR4. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a jackpot has been obtained.

Moreover, these display contents continue to be displayed during the opening period. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is configured to be extremely short, at 0.5 seconds.
Therefore, by using the right-hit expectation indication effect until the opening period,
This is a configuration that prevents the performance from becoming unnatural by performing the performance for only 5 seconds. At the end of the opening period, the right specific winning port 65a is opened, so if the player hits the right side during the performance of the right hit expectation indication and the game ball reaches the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the game ball will enter the opened right specific winning port 65a.

Next, referring to Fig. 84, the change over time of the display mode before and after the variable display performance in which the right-hit expectation suggestion performance is set in this sixth embodiment will be described. Fig. 84(a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode when the right-hit expectation suggestion performance is executed in the variable display performance in the case where the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. In Fig. 84(a), the variable time is 6
An example will be described in which a 0 second super reach is selected as the variation type.
As shown in (a), when the variable display corresponding to the big win starts, first, the normal variable display starts, and then the variable display of the third symbols constituting each symbol row starts. Then, when 10 seconds have passed since the variable display of the third symbols started, a reach state occurs. That is, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed with the same numbered third symbols, and the center symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed with the same numbered third symbols.
Only the displayed value changes.

When 20 seconds have passed since the reach state occurred, it will develop into a super reach, and
The right-hit expectation suggestion effect (see FIG. 82(a)) is started. Then, when 26 seconds have passed since the right-hit expectation suggestion effect started (i.e., when there are 4 seconds left until the end of the fluctuation), an effect in which the words "Aim for a scratch!!" are displayed in the display area HR4 (see FIG. 82(b)) is executed. In this effect, as described above, the light-emitting color of the right-variable winning device 65 is configured to suggest the expectation of whether or not it will be advantageous to perform a right hit. By performing a right hit for 4.5 seconds, which is the remaining 4 seconds until the end of the fluctuation time and the 0.5 second opening period of the jackpot, about 7 game balls can be launched, so that about 7 game balls can be entered almost simultaneously at the start of one round. In the following explanation, the effect of notifying the expectation of whether or not it will be advantageous to perform a right hit by the light-emitting color of the right-variable winning device 65 (the effect in which the words "Aim for a scratch!!" are displayed on the display screen)
This is called the "expectation level notification effect."

In reality, in most cases, the player will check the color of the light and determine whether the door 65f1 will open before starting the shot, so the longer it takes to shoot, the fewer the number of over-winning balls. If the game balls are shot in the event of a miss, all of the shot game balls will be wasted (almost all of the game balls will be discharged from the outlet 66), so playing with a game method in which the player immediately hits the right side every time an effect occurs will actually result in a loss. Therefore, the effect (
Each time the right-hand specific winning hole 65a is opened, the system accurately judges whether the right-hand specific winning hole 65a will be opened, and when it is judged that the right-hand specific winning hole 65a will be opened, the game can be started by quickly hitting the right hand side. This can increase the player's willingness to participate in the right-hand hitting expectation indication performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

When 0.5 seconds of the opening period of the jackpot have elapsed, the first round of the jackpot starts, the right specific winning port 65a is opened, and an effect indicating that the jackpot has started (an effect equivalent to the opening effect) is executed for the round period of one round and the interval period after the end of the first round. Then, when the second round of the jackpot starts, a normal jackpot effect is executed. By configuring the device to execute an effect equivalent to the opening effect over the period until the second round of the jackpot starts, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot has started over a sufficiently long period of time, compared to the case where the opening effect is executed during the 0.5 seconds of the actual opening period. Therefore, the player can be made to more reliably recognize that the jackpot has started.

FIG. 84(b) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode when the fluctuation type of the super reach miss with a fluctuation time of 60.5 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern and the right-hit expectation suggestion performance is set. As shown in FIG. 84(b), the change over time of the performance mode in the case of a miss is exactly the same as that in the case of a jackpot, at least until the expectation notification performance occurs. On the other hand, as described above, the selection rate of the luminous color of the decorative part of the right variable winning device 65 is different from that in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, when the expectation notification performance occurs, the player can decide whether to start right-hitting depending on whether the luminous color is the one that is selected more frequently in a jackpot or the one that is selected more frequently in a miss.

As shown in FIG. 84(b), when 60 seconds have passed since the start of the variation, it is notified that the adventurer's attack could not defeat the monster, and the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the loss is displayed in a stopped state to notify the loss. This allows the player to easily understand that the result of the lottery for the special symbols this time was a loss. This notification of the loss (the stop display of the combination of the third symbols corresponding to the loss) continues for 0.5 seconds. The reason why the variation time is 0.5 seconds longer for the loss is that in the case of a jackpot, as described above, the right-hit expectation suggestion performance is executed using the opening period of the jackpot for 0.5 seconds. In other words, by setting the same performance time for the loss as for the jackpot, the performance mode until the 60 seconds when the final result is announced can be made common. Therefore, since the performance can be executed using common data, the amount of data for executing the right-hit expectation suggestion performance can be reduced.

In this way, in the sixth embodiment, when the right-hit expectation indication effect is set, an effect that has the same features except for the selection rate of the luminous color of the decorative part of the right variable winning device 65 will be displayed at 0.
This allows the player to use the light emitted from the right variable winning device 65 as a clue to determine whether or not it would be better to play to the right.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, after the expectation level notification effect occurs, the gauge number of the stamina gauge LG, which indicates the monster's stamina, is decreased by one each time the game ball passes through the passage detection sensor 228g1. If a jackpot is hit (the right specific winning hole 65a is opened), the stamina gauge LG decreases to 0, whereas if a miss occurs, the stamina gauge LG
The gauge number only decreases to 1. Therefore, if the player continues to hit the right hand, it may be possible to detect whether or not a jackpot will be won a little earlier. Since the initial value of the gauge number of the vitality gauge LG is 5, it is possible to detect whether or not a jackpot will be won by making five game balls reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. That is, if the gauge number decreases to 0, it can be determined that a jackpot has been won, while if the gauge number does not decrease from 1, it can be determined that a miss has been won. However, it takes at least three seconds to launch five game balls. And it takes about one second for the launched game balls to reach the passage detection sensor 228g1. Therefore, even if the game balls are launched after checking the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65, it is difficult to make the five game balls pass the passage detection sensor 228g1. For this reason, for a player who wants to detect a jackpot as soon as possible, it is possible to launch game balls before the expectation degree notification performance occurs. In other words, depending on the taste of each player, the player can select between a game in which the player can find out as soon as possible whether or not the player has won a jackpot, and a game in which the player can infer whether or not the player has won a jackpot from the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 and decide whether or not to hit the right side. This makes it possible to provide a game that matches the taste of each player, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the sixth embodiment, when a right-hit expectation suggestion effect is set in the variable display effect corresponding to a jackpot, the gauge number of the stamina gauge LG is always reduced to 0 when five or more game balls pass through the passage detection sensor 228g1, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the gauge number of the stamina gauge LG may be reduced to 0 at a predetermined rate (e.g., 50%) when a jackpot occurs, and may be reduced only to 1 in other cases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to maintain the expectation of a jackpot even if the gauge number only reduces to 1.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
85(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 85(a), the ROM 222 in the sixth embodiment is the same as the ROM 222 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment).
The difference is that a performance mode selection table 222b is added to the configuration of the OM 222 (see FIG. 14(a)). The other configuration is the same as that of the fifth embodiment described above, so the details are omitted.

The presentation mode selection table 222b is a data table to be referred to when selecting a presentation mode to be executed in the variable display presentation. In this presentation mode selection table 222b, a plurality of presentation modes including the right-hit expectation suggestion presentation described above are defined, and at the start of the variable display presentation, a mode corresponding to the value of the presentation lottery counter 223j described later is determined. The details of this presentation mode selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the contents of the performance mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 86, the performance mode selection table 222b specifies the performance modes that can be selected for each variation type in association with the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223j. Specifically, for the variation type "Winning Special Reach", the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223j is "0 to
39" is stipulated to correspond to normal presentation as a presentation type (see 222b1 in FIG. 86). This normal presentation is a general term for a presentation mode in which it is difficult to tell whether hitting to the right will be advantageous until just before the fluctuation stops. More specifically, in the case of a jackpot and a miss, it is a presentation mode in which it is difficult to tell from the presentation mode whether or not a jackpot will be won, except for whether or not the third pattern with the same number is lined up at the end of the fluctuation. When this normal presentation is executed, it is not possible to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won until the third pattern stops. Therefore, even if the player senses a jackpot and starts hitting to the right, the first round will start before more than two game balls reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Therefore,
When the normal presentation is selected, it becomes difficult to achieve an over-winning win in the first round.

Of the 100 possible values of the performance selection counter 223j, from "0 to 99," there are 40 counter values associated with the "normal performance." Therefore, when the variation type of the winning special reach is determined, the probability that the normal performance will be determined as the performance mode is 40% (40/1
00).

On the other hand, the value range of the effect selection counter 223j, "40 to 99", is associated with the right-hit expectation suggestion effect as the effect mode (222b2 to 222b5 in FIG. 86).
Among these, the range of "40 to 49" is associated with a right-hit expectation suggestion effect in which the expectation notification effect is generated in a mode in which "white" is set as the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 (see 222b2 in FIG. 86), and the range of "50 to 74" is associated with a right-hit expectation suggestion effect in which "blue" is set as the light emission color.
In the range of "75 to 90", a mode in which "green" is set as the luminous color is associated with the range of "75 to 90" (see 222b3 in FIG. 86).
2b4), and a mode in which "red" is set as the emission color is associated with the range of "90 to 99" (see 222b5 in FIG. 86).

Of the 100 possible values of the performance lottery counter 223j,
The counter values associated with "blue", "green", and "red" are 10, 25, 15, and 10, respectively, so the ratio at which each luminous color is determined is 10% (10/100).
), 25% (25/100), 15% (15/100), and 10% (10/100).

In addition, for the variation type "Winning Super Reach", the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223j, "0 to 74", is specified as the performance type in correspondence with normal performance (see 222b6 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the performance selection counter 223j, 75 counter values are associated with "normal performance", so when the variation type of Winning Super Reach is determined, the probability that normal performance will be determined as the performance mode is 75% (75/1).
00).

On the other hand, the value range of the effect selection counter 223j, "75 to 99", is associated with the right-hit expectation suggestion effect as the effect mode (222b7, 222b8 in FIG. 86).
Among these, the range of "75 to 94" is associated with "white" as the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation degree informing performance (see 222b7 in FIG. 86).
The range of "-99" is associated with a mode in which "red" is set as the light emission color (see 222b8 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the performance selection counter 223j, there are 20 and 5 counter values associated with the light emission colors "white" and "red", respectively, so the ratios at which each light emission color is determined are 20% (20/100) and 5% (
5/100).

In addition, for the variation type "miss special reach", the range of the value "0 to 89" of the effect selection counter 223j is specified to correspond to normal effect as the effect type (see 222b9 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect selection counter 223j, 90 counter values are associated with "normal effect", so when the variation type of the miss special reach is determined, the probability that normal effect will be determined as the effect mode is 90% (90/1).
00).

On the other hand, for the value range of the effect selection counter 223j, "90 to 99", the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is associated with and defined as the effect mode (222b10 to 222b11 in FIG. 86).
12). Among these, the range of "90 to 96" is associated with "white" as the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65 in the expectation degree informing performance (see 222b10 in FIG. 86).
The range of "97, 98" is associated with a mode in which "blue" is set as the luminous color (see 222b11 in FIG. 86), and "99" is associated with a mode in which "green" is set as the luminous color (see 222b12 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the performance selection counter 223j, there are 7, 2, and 1 counter value associated with the luminous colors "white", "blue", and "green", respectively, so the proportions at which each luminous color is determined are 7% (7/100), 2% (2/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively.

That is, when comparing the special winning reach with the special losing reach, the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is selected more frequently in the special winning reach (the normal effect is selected less frequently). Therefore, when the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is executed, the player can have a sense of expectation for a big win. In addition, in the special winning reach, the rate at which the "white" and "blue" luminous colors are determined is lower, while the rate at which the "green" luminous color is determined is higher, when compared with the special losing reach, when the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is determined. Also, only in the case of the special winning reach, there is a possibility that the "red" luminous color is determined. Therefore, when the luminous color becomes "green", the player can be made to think that there is a high possibility that hitting to the right will be advantageous. Also, when the luminous color becomes "red", the player can be made to sense that the right specific winning port 65a will be opened.

In addition, for the variation type "miss super reach", the value range of the performance selection counter 223j is set to "0 to 94", and the normal performance is set as the performance type (see FIG. 86).
Of the 100 possible values of the performance selection counter 223j, 95 counter values are associated with the "normal performance". Therefore, when the variation type of the miss super reach is determined, the probability that the normal performance will be determined as the performance mode is 95% (95/10).
0).

On the other hand, for the value range "95 to 99" of the effect selection counter 223j, an expectation degree notification effect corresponding to the light emission color "white" is associated as an effect mode (see 222b14 in FIG. 86). Of the 100 possible values of the effect selection counter 223j, there are five counter values associated with the expectation degree notification effect whose light emission color is "white", so the probability that the expectation degree notification effect whose light emission color is "white" is determined is 5% (5/100).

That is, comparing the winning super reach with the losing super reach, the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is selected more frequently in the winning super reach (the normal effect is selected less frequently). Therefore, when the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is executed, the player can have a sense of expectation for a big win. In addition, in the winning super reach, the rate at which the "white" light color is determined when the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is determined is lower than in the losing super reach. Also, only in the case of the winning special reach, the "red" light color may be determined. Therefore, when the light color becomes "white," the player can guess whether or not it is advantageous to hit right. Also, when the light color becomes "red," the player can sense that the right specific winning port 65a will be opened.

In addition, fluctuation types other than "Special hit reach", "Super hit reach", "Special miss reach", and "Super miss reach"("Normal hit reach",
For "miss normal reach", "long miss", and "short miss", the performance lottery counter 22
For all possible ranges of values of 3j, a "normal effect" is associated and specified (see 222b15 in FIG. 86). For this reason, when the variation type is "normal reach for winning", "normal reach for losing", "long miss", or "short miss", the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is not executed.

In this manner, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio of determining the right-hit expectation suggestion effect and the ratio of selecting each light color in the expectation notification effect in the right-hit expectation suggestion effect are configured to differ according to the variation type. This allows the player to determine whether or not it is better to hit to the right based on the light color of the right variable winning device 65 when the expectation notification effect is executed. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 85(b). As shown in Fig. 85(b), the RAM 223 in the sixth embodiment has a configuration similar to that of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see Fig. 14(b)), except that the performance lottery counter 2
23j, a passing number counter 223k, a notification performance in progress flag 223m, a stamina gauge counter 223n, a notification standby flag 223p, and a notification type storage area 223q have been added.

The effect selection counter 223j is a function of the effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 86) described above.
It is a counter used to select the mode of the variable display performance, and its value is updated within the range of "0 to 99." At the start of the variation, the performance mode corresponding to the value of this performance selection counter 223j is selected from the performance mode selection table 222b.

The passing number counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. The value of the passing number counter 223k is detected by the passing detection sensor 2
Of the two, 228g1 and 228g2, the value is incremented by one each time the passage of a game ball is detected by the passage detection sensor 228g1 provided on the upstream side (the output becomes H). That is, one is incremented each time a game ball flows into the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1.
The value of 23k is incremented by one each time the passage of a game ball is detected by the passage detection sensor 228g2 provided downstream (the output becomes H). In other words, the value of 23k is decremented by one each time a game ball flows out of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1.

The notification effect in progress flag 223m is a flag indicating whether or not the expectation degree notification effect (the effect of notifying the expectation degree of whether or not it will be advantageous if a right hit is made by the light color of the right variable winning device 65) is being executed. If this notification effect in progress flag 223m is on, it indicates that the expectation degree notification effect is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the expectation degree notification effect is not being executed. This notification effect in progress flag 223m is set to on when the start of the expectation degree notification effect is set (see S4708 in FIG. 88), and is set to off when a jackpot starts.

The stamina gauge counter 223n is a counter that indicates the gauge number of the stamina gauge LG displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the expectation degree notification performance.
At the start of the expectation degree notification presentation, the counter value of 3n is set to a value obtained by subtracting the value of the passing number counter 223k from the maximum value of the stamina gauge number, "5" (S4 of FIG. 88).
706). As a result, if the game ball is hit to the right before the expectation level notification effect is started and multiple game balls are passing over the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 when the expectation level notification effect starts, the period required for the gauge number of the vitality gauge counter LG to be reduced completely during the execution of the expectation level notification effect can be shortened. Therefore, for a player who wants to know as soon as possible whether or not a jackpot will be obtained, the game ball can be hit to the right before the expectation level notification effect starts. Note that, if the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more when the expectation level notification effect starts, the value of the vitality gauge counter 223k is not reduced regardless of the value of the passing number counter 223k.
The value of 223n is set to 1 uniformly (see S4705 in FIG. 88). That is, even in the case of a jackpot, the gauge value of the stamina gauge LG will not become 0 immediately after the start of the expectation degree notification performance. Therefore, the player can determine whether it is better to start hitting to the right using the light color of the right variable winning device 65 as a clue. This stamina gauge counter 223n is updated by subtracting 1 from the value every time the passage of the game ball is detected by the upstream passage detection sensor 228g1 until it reaches the lower limit (0 in the case of a jackpot, 1 in the case of a miss) set for each lottery result of the special pattern (see S4217 in FIG. 87).

The notification standby flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display effect in which the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is set is being executed and the start timing of the expectation level notification effect has not yet been reached. This notification standby flag 223p is set to ON when it is determined that the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is to be executed (see S4805 in FIG. 90), and is set to OFF when the expectation level notification effect is set to start (see S4708 in FIG. 88).

The notification type storage area 223q is a memory area in which data indicating the type of expectation level notification effect (the light color of the right variable winning device 65) executed in the right-hit expectation level suggestion effect is stored.
When the type of the expectation degree notification effect is determined by referring to the effect mode selection table 222b at the start of the fluctuation, data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the notification type storage area 223q (see S4804 in FIG. 90).
It is composed of a 1-byte memory area, and if "01H" is stored, it indicates an expectation level notification effect with the light color "white" set, if "02H" is stored, it indicates an expectation level notification effect with the light color "blue" set, if "03H" is stored, it indicates an expectation level notification effect with the light color "green" set, if "04H" is stored, it indicates an expectation level notification effect with the light color "red" set. On the other hand, if "00H" is stored, it indicates that the right-hit expectation level suggestion effect is not set.

<Control process of the voice lamp control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 87 to FIG. 90, the voice lamp control device 11 according to the sixth embodiment will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the third embodiment will be described. First, the presentation update process 6 (S4121) in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 87. This presentation update process 6 (S4121) is a process executed in the main process (see Fig. 34) instead of the presentation update process (see Fig. 35), and is a process for updating the presentation mode according to the game situation.

In this performance update process 6 (see FIG. 87), first, the passage detection sensor 228g arranged on the upstream side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 (the entrance side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1) is
If it is determined that the output of the passing number counter 223k is H (S4211: Yes), the passing number counter 223k is updated by adding 1 to the value of the passing number counter 223k (
Next, it is determined whether the notification effect flag 223m is on or not (S42
13), when it is determined that the notification effect in progress flag 223m is on (S4213: Yes
), the process proceeds to S4219 after executing the process for updating the state of the vitality gauge LG (S4214 to S4218). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4211 that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g1 is L (S4211: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4213 that the notification performance flag 223m is OFF (S4213: No),
o), since there is no possibility of changing the display mode of the stamina gauge LG, the processes of S4214 to S4218 for updating the mode of the stamina gauge LG are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

Here, the process for updating the state of the vitality gauge LG will be described in detail. In the process for updating the vitality gauge LG, first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot (S4214), and if it is determined that the result of the current lottery for the special symbol is a jackpot (S4214: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the vitality gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (S4215). That is, it is determined whether or not the gauge number of the vitality gauge LG has reached the lower limit (0) for a win, and if it is determined that the value of the vitality gauge counter 223n is 1 or more (the gauge number has not reached the lower limit) (S4215: Yes), the value of the vitality gauge counter 223n is updated by subtracting 1 (S4217), and the vitality gauge L
The display mode of G is updated to the mode of the gauge number corresponding to the updated value of the vitality gauge counter 223n (S4218), and the process proceeds to S4219. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4215 that the value of the vitality gauge counter 223n is 0 (the gauge number has reached the lower limit) (S4215: No), there is no need to update the display mode of the vitality gauge LG, so the processes of S4217 and S4218 are skipped and the process proceeds to S4219.

In contrast, in the process of S4214, the result of the lottery for the special symbol this time is a miss (
If it is determined that the winning combination is not a jackpot (S4214: No), then it is determined whether the value of the vitality gauge counter 223n is 2 or more (S4216). In other words, it is determined whether the value of the vitality gauge LG has reached the lower limit (1) of the gauge number in the case of a miss (S4216).
, the value of the stamina gauge counter 223n is 2 or more (the gauge number has not reached the lower limit value)
If it is determined that the value of the stamina gauge counter 223n and the display mode of the stamina gauge LG are updated (S4216: Yes), the process of S4217 and S4218 is executed to update the value of the stamina gauge counter 223n and the display mode of the stamina gauge LG.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4216 that the value of the vitality gauge counter 223n is 1 (the lower limit of the gauge number in the case of a miss) (S4216: No), there is no need to update the display mode of the vitality gauge LG.
17, and each of the processes of S4218 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4219.

In the process of S4219, it is determined whether the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 provided on the downstream side of the upper surface of the right variable winning device 65 (the outlet side of the flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1) is H (high) (S4219). If it is determined that the output is H (a game ball has passed) (S4219: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated by subtracting 1 (S42
On the other hand, in the process of S4219, if it is determined that the output of the passage detection sensor 228g2 is L (the passage of the game ball has not been detected), (
S4219: No), the process of S4220 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4221.

In the process of S4221, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the expectation degree notification effect, and when it is the start timing, a notification start determination process is performed to execute the expectation degree notification effect (
The notification start determination process (S4221) is then terminated. Details of the notification start determination process (S4221) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the notification start determination process (S4221) described above.
In this notification start determination process (S4221), first, it is determined whether the notification wait flag 223p is on (S4701). If it is determined that it is off (S4701: No), this means that the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is not being executed, or that the right-hit expectation suggestion effect is being executed but the expectation notification effect has already started. Since there is no possibility of starting the execution of the expectation notification effect, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the notification standby flag 223p is on (S4701: Yes), it is then determined whether it is timing to start the expectation degree notification effect (S4702). If it is determined that it is not timing to start the expectation degree notification effect (S4703),
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4702 that the expectation degree notification presentation start timing has arrived (S4702: Yes), the value of the passing number counter 223k is read (S4703), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 4 or more (S4704).

In the process of S4704, if it is determined that the value of the passing number counter 223k is 4 or more, the value of the vitality gauge counter 223n is set to 1 (S4705), and the process returns to S47
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4704 that the value of the passing number counter 223k is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S4707.
The value obtained by subtracting the value of k is set as the value of the vitality gauge counter 223n (S4706), and the process proceeds to S4707.
This allows a player who wants to know as soon as possible whether or not he will win a jackpot to try to get as many game balls to reach the top of the door 65f1 by hitting the ball to the right before the expectation level notification performance starts.

In the process of S4707, the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q and S4
The start of the expectation level notification effect is set in a manner according to the value of the vitality gauge counter 223n set in the process of S4705 or S4706 (S4707). Specifically, the right variable winning device 65 is caused to emit light in a light color corresponding to the data stored in the notification type storage area 223q, and the gauge number according to the counter value of the vitality gauge counter 223n is set as the display mode of the vitality gauge LG. Next, the notification standby flag 223p is set to OFF, and the notification effect in progress flag 223m is set to ON (S4708), and this process is terminated.

By executing this notification start determination process (see FIG. 88), the performance mode selection table 2
22b, the expectation degree notification performance of the type selected from can be accurately executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 89, variable display setting process 6 (S4122) in the sixth embodiment
This variable display setting process 6 (S4122) is the same as the variable display setting process (FIG. 3
8) in the sixth embodiment.
Of (S4122), in each of the processes S4501 to S4509, the same processes as those in S4501 to S4509 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) are executed.

In the variable display setting process 6 (see FIG. 89) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S4503 is completed, a performance mode selection process is executed (S4511) to determine a performance mode corresponding to the variation pattern (variation type) extracted in the process of S4503 from the performance mode selection table 222b, and the process proceeds to S4504.
Details of 1) will be described with reference to FIG.

90 is a flowchart showing the performance mode selection process (S4511). In this performance mode selection process (S4511), first, the performance mode selection table 222b and the value of the performance lottery counter 223j are read (S4801).
22b, the controller 221 identifies the presentation mode corresponding to the variation type notified from the main control device 110 by the variation pattern command and the value of the presentation lottery counter 223j (S4802).

Next, it is determined whether the identified presentation mode corresponds to the right-hit expectation suggestion presentation (S4803), and if it is determined that the right-hit expectation suggestion presentation is not executed (S4803: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a mode with a right-hit expectation suggestion presentation is identified in the process of S4803, data corresponding to the current presentation mode (the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65) is stored in the notification type storage area 223q (S4
804), the notification standby flag 223p is set to ON (S4805), and this process ends.

By executing this presentation mode selection process (see FIG. 89), the presentation mode selection table 2
Since the presentation mode of the expectation level notification presentation can be selected from 22b at a ratio according to the type of variation, when the expectation level notification presentation is executed, the player can infer from the light color of the right variable winning device 65 whether or not it will be advantageous to hit to the right, and can decide whether or not to start hitting to the right.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is configured to set the opening period of a jackpot to 0.5 seconds regardless of the type of jackpot. In other words, unless game balls are shot toward the right variable winning device 65 before the jackpot starts, it is configured so that at the start of the first round of the jackpot, it is impossible for game balls exceeding the specified number (2 balls) to be passing through the flow path on the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1.
A part of the variable display performance for notifying a big win and a part of the variable display performance for notifying a miss are configured to be able to execute an expectation degree notification performance for notifying the expectation degree of opening the right specific winning hole 65a. This allows the player to decide whether to start hitting to the right during the execution of the variable display performance (before the lottery result of the special pattern is notified) based on the contents of the expectation degree notification performance. If the player starts hitting to the right during the execution of the variable display and the right specific winning hole 65a opens as the player intended, an over win can be generated, which satisfies the player. In addition, if the player does not hit to the right during the execution of the variable display and the right specific winning hole 65a remains closed as the player intended (the special pattern lottery is a miss), the player can feel a sense of relief that he or she has avoided wasting balls by hitting to the right. On the other hand, if the result goes against the player's intention (if the right specific winning hole 65a is not opened despite hitting to the right, or if the right specific winning hole 65a is opened without hitting to the right), the next expectation degree notification performance can make the player have a sense of purpose to predict whether hitting to the right would be better. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, the opening period is common regardless of the type of jackpot, and the player is made to decide whether or not it is better to hit to the right while the variable display is being executed under the control of the sound lamp control device 113, thereby making the degree of advantage in the first round (the number of game balls that will enter the right specific winning port 65a) different for each jackpot. As a result, unlike the fifth embodiment described above, there is no need to provide the main control device 110 with a period length selection table 202e (see FIG. 76(c)) that specifies the correspondence between the jackpot type and the closing period, so the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. Furthermore, the control process for selecting the opening period is simply a process for setting a common period, so the MP of the main control device 110
The processing load of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is required to perform major control related to the game, such as the lottery for the big win and the display of the variation of the first symbol, reducing the processing load makes it possible to more reliably execute various major controls.

In the sixth embodiment, the expectation level notification performance is configured to indicate the expectation level of whether or not it is advantageous to hit to the right by the luminous color of the right variable winning device 65, but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, the expectation level may be indicated by changing the color or form of the monster displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the expectation level may be notified by the content of the adventurer's attack. Also, instead of or in addition to the luminous color of the right variable winning device 65 or the display form of the third pattern display device 81, the expectation level may be notified by changing the music or sound effects.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening period of all the jackpot types is unified to 0.5 seconds, but this is not limited to this. For example, as in the fifth embodiment described above, the opening period may be different depending on the jackpot type, and in some cases where the opening period is short (and the special pattern lottery is a miss), the expectation degree notification effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display. In this way, in the case of a jackpot type with a long opening period, the player can feel at ease in hitting the right after the jackpot is notified. In addition, when the expectation degree notification effect is executed, it is possible to provide a gameplay that allows the player to determine whether it is better to start hitting the right while the variable display is being executed based on the notification content (the light emission color of the right variable winning device 65).

In the sixth embodiment, in the expectation degree informing performance, a decoration simulating a scratch is attached to the right variable winning device 65.
Then, the third pattern display device 81 displays a message encouraging the player to aim at the scratch.
Although the configuration indirectly suggests the player to hit to the right, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the expectation degree notification performance may be configured to clearly notify the player of hitting to the right. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand that there is a possibility that hitting to the right will give him an advantage (over-winning).

In the sixth embodiment, the expectation degree notification effect is executed to notify the player of the expectation degree of whether or not a right hit will be advantageous to the player, so that the player can decide whether or not to hit the right while the variable display is being executed. However, the expectation degree notification effect does not necessarily need to be combined with the right variable winning device 65 in this embodiment (a variable winning device with a structure that can hold multiple game balls at a position where they can win when the right specific winning port 65a is opened). For example, the expectation degree notification effect may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 that is provided with only a variable winning device that can win only the game balls shot after opening, such as the left variable winning device 650. In other words, the expectation degree notification effect may be configured to be executed as an effect that simply notifies the player of the expectation degree of whether or not a jackpot will be won after the fluctuation ends.

In the sixth embodiment, the expectation degree notification effect can be executed even if the special symbol lottery is a miss, but the expectation degree notification effect may be executed only when the special symbol lottery is a big win. In this case, the timing at which the expectation degree notification effect starts may be changed. That is, in the sixth embodiment, the expectation degree notification effect is generated 4 seconds before the variable time ends, but for example, the expectation degree notification effect may be generated at any timing 4 seconds, 2 seconds, or 1 second before the lottery. Furthermore, in this case, for example, the more consecutive variable displays corresponding to misses, the higher the rate at which the expectation degree notification effect occurs 4 seconds or 2 seconds before. That is, the more consecutive misses, the longer the right hit can be executed during the execution of the variable display when a big win occurs and the right hit expectation degree suggestion effect is selected. By configuring it in this way, the more times the variable display is executed since the previous big win, the more likely it is that the number of winning balls in the first round will be increased if a big win is won, so if a player has consecutive misses, it is possible to make the player want to continue playing until a big win occurs. This can improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.
A device capable of measuring time such as a time clock (such as a time clock), etc., may be provided, and the timing at which the expectation degree notification effect is likely to occur may be varied depending on the time period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player want to play during the time period when the expectation degree notification effect is likely to occur 4 seconds or 2 seconds before the end of the fluctuation.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 91 to 99. In the above-mentioned second embodiment, the operational winning openings (right operational winning opening 661, left operational winning opening 662) which trigger the start of a jackpot are provided on the upper right side and the lower left side of the game board 13, respectively, and the operational winning opening which triggers the start of a jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. Also, the left operational winning opening 662 is configured so that a game ball enters it almost automatically in a relatively short time (about 0.5 seconds) when it is in a jackpot waiting state. In other words, when the left operational winning opening 662 is a left trigger jackpot which triggers the start of a jackpot, the opening and closing door 65 is opened.
While the first round of the jackpot begins before the game ball reaches the top surface of f1, if the right-actuating winning port 661 becomes a right-trigger jackpot that triggers the start of a jackpot, the player can aim for an over-winning by having multiple game balls reach the flow path on the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f1 during the jackpot waiting state and then having the game ball enter the right-actuating winning port 661.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, even if a left-triggered jackpot is won, the game ball will not enter the left-actuated winning hole 662 unless the player hits the ball to the left after the jackpot waiting state is entered. In addition, in the jackpot waiting state, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a performance as if the game was in a normal game state. That is, even during the jackpot waiting state, a pseudo third symbol variable display performance or the like is performed, making the player mistakenly believe that the game has not entered the jackpot waiting state (as if the game is in a normal game state) and allowing the player to continue hitting the ball to the left. In other words, when a left-triggered jackpot is won, a performance is performed that makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the game has entered the jackpot waiting state, causing the player to continue hitting the ball to the left, and before the player even realizes that the game ball is about to reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the game ball will reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1.
62. In this way, when a left-triggered jackpot occurs, it is difficult to start a jackpot after a number of game balls exceeding the prescribed number (the upper limit number of the first round, which is two) reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, whereas when a right-triggered jackpot occurs, an over-winning can be easily generated by making the game ball enter the right-operated winning hole 661 at the timing when more game balls reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Thus, as in the second embodiment described above, the degree of advantage (the number of winning balls that can be obtained) in the first round can be made different between a left-triggered jackpot and a right-triggered jackpot, so that the player can play the game with more attention paid to the type of jackpot.

The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration, and the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 91. As shown in Fig. 91, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment differs from the game board 13 in the second embodiment (see Fig. 54) in that the storage device 675 has been removed. By removing the storage device 675, even if a left-triggered jackpot is won and the game enters a jackpot waiting state, the left-actuated winning opening 66 is immediately opened as in the second embodiment.
2. In other words, even in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, unless a game ball is made to enter the actuated winning hole 662 by hitting from the left in the jackpot waiting state, the jackpot will not start. In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the third symbol display device 81 stops to display the third symbol of the miss combination, and even after the game moves to the jackpot waiting state, the variable display is executed as in the normal game state. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot waiting state has been entered, and the game ball is made to enter the left actuated winning hole 662 by continuing to hit from the left even after the game moves to the jackpot waiting state. Therefore, as in the second embodiment, it is possible to provide a game in which a right-triggered jackpot can be generated with the aim of an over-winning, while in the case of a left-triggered jackpot, the jackpot starts before the player can aim for an over-winning. In addition, the ratio of game balls that enter the left actuated winning hole 662 among the game balls shot by hitting from the left is 1.
The rate at which balls enter the left-actuated winning hole 662 is higher than the rate at which balls enter the left-actuated winning hole 64. This allows game balls to enter (win) the left-actuated winning hole 662 in a shorter period of time when the left-triggered winning hole is in a waiting state for a big win.
5 is deleted, the control process for opening and closing the storage valve 675a of the storage device 675 is also deleted.

Next, referring to FIG. 92, the change over time in the presentation mode from when the variable display starts until the jackpot starts in the case of a left trigger jackpot will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a variable display presentation corresponding to a left trigger jackpot (a winning super reach with a variable time of 60 seconds) is executed when there are two reserved balls at the start of the variable display. As shown in FIG. 92, when the variable display corresponding to a left trigger jackpot is executed, a pseudo notification is given that the result is a miss at the end of the variable display. That is, the third pattern display device 81 stops and displays the third pattern in a miss combination. At this time, the first pattern display device 37 stops and displays the stopped pattern corresponding to the jackpot. However, when the third pattern display device 81
is larger than the first symbol display device 37 and is arranged in an easily visible position. Therefore, most players do not notice that the first symbol display device 37 is displaying a winning stopped symbol, and it is possible to make players who have checked the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 think that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (the game has not moved to a jackpot waiting state).

As shown in FIG. 92, when the variable display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot ends, the jackpot waiting state starts, and the pseudo variable display starts in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the variable display corresponding to the two reserved balls that were reserved during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the left trigger jackpot is executed in a pseudo manner. The pseudo variable display is set to have a variable time of 2 seconds, and the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable. In order to execute this pseudo variable display, a display data table for the pseudo variable display is prepared in the display control device 114. In addition, when the pseudo variable display is executed in the jackpot waiting state, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also pseudo-decreased. This makes it possible to make the player think that the reserved balls are decreasing every 2 seconds, so that the player can be made to think that an additional game ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 to execute the lottery for the special pattern. When the pseudo fluctuation display ends and there are no more pseudo reserved balls, a pseudo fluctuation stop state is set. This pseudo fluctuation stop state is displayed in exactly the same manner as when the number of reserved balls becomes 0 in a normal game state. Therefore, the player can be made to believe that the lottery for the special symbol will not be executed unless the game ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64, so that the player can be made to hit the ball to the left more aggressively.

In this embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, only the first special symbol is selected by lottery.
The left trigger jackpot is selected. In other words, the situation in which the left trigger jackpot is selected is limited to a game state in which the game is played by aiming at the first ball entry port 64 (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols). This allows the direction in which the player shoots the game ball to continue the game (to draw a special symbol) to be limited to the left side of the game board 13 when a pseudo variable display performance or a pseudo variable stop state occurs. Therefore, in a pseudo normal state, a player who wants to continue the game can more reliably shoot the game ball into the left activation winning port 662.

When the player continues to hit the left side during the jackpot waiting state, the left operation winning hole 6
When the game ball enters 62, a special type of effect (blackout effect) is executed.
Although details will be described later, by executing this blackout effect, which does not occur during normal gaming, the player can immediately understand that the player was in a jackpot waiting state and that the jackpot will start. This blackout effect is executed for 0.1 seconds during the opening period, and after the effect ends, the normal jackpot effect starts.

In addition, in the pseudo fluctuation stop state, if no winning is detected in the left operation winning hole 662 even after 3 seconds have passed, the pseudo fluctuation stop state is ended and the standby state presentation (see FIG. 7) is executed. The pseudo fluctuation stop state is configured to end in 3 seconds in order to make the player realize that the jackpot standby state has actually started before the player leaves the machine when the player thinks of quitting the game at the timing of the fluctuation stop state. In other words, this is to prevent the player from leaving the machine when the jackpot has been confirmed and other players from starting the game from the jackpot standby state. This prevents the player from quitting the game without realizing that they have won the jackpot, which causes the player to become dissatisfied with the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 93, the performance mode during the left trigger jackpot in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 93(a) is a diagram showing a blackout performance executed during the opening period of the left trigger jackpot. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the left trigger jackpot is won and the jackpot standby state is entered, a pseudo variable display and a pseudo variable stop state performance are executed, making it difficult for the player to recognize that the jackpot standby state has been entered. When a game ball enters the left actuation winning hole 662 during the execution of these pseudo performances and the jackpot is started, the opening period is extremely short (0.1 seconds), so there is no time to notify the jackpot by a performance such as stopping the third pattern in a winning combination. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the blackout performance shown in FIG. 93(a) is executed as a mode in which the player can understand at a glance that a special performance has been executed and the performance time is short. That is, when a game ball enters the left activation winning hole 662 and the opening period of the left trigger jackpot begins, the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly goes dark (blacks out). This appearance is significantly different from the pseudo variable display or pseudo variable stop state presentation that had been executed up until that point, allowing the player to instantly understand that a special presentation has been executed.

After the blackout effect ends, the effect shown in FIG. 93(b) is executed, which indicates that the big win has started. That is, in the main display area Dm, the words "Big Win Confirmed!" are displayed, and three third symbols with the same number are displayed in a stopped state. Furthermore, in the small area Ds1, a display indicating the number of rounds (the words "1 round") is displayed.
, and a display indicating the number of prize balls paid out (the letters "0000GET") will be displayed.
In addition, in the small area Ds3, the words "Hit right!!" and a right-pointing arrow are displayed to shoot the game ball toward the right specific winning hole 65a.
This allows the player to immediately understand that the big win has already started.

<Electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in Fig. 94, the RAM 223 in the seventh embodiment has the following configuration compared to the RAM 223 in the second embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see Fig. 14(b)).
A pseudo reserved ball counter 223r, a pseudo normal state flag 223s, and a pseudo variable timer 2
A pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u and a pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223t are added.

The pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is a counter that indicates the number of reserved pseudo variable display after the left trigger jackpot is won and the jackpot waiting state is entered. In the jackpot waiting state, the pseudo variable display is repeatedly executed while the value of this pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is 1 or more (see S4907 in FIG. 96). When the pseudo variable display ends with the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r becoming 0, the pseudo variable stop state is set (see S4907 in FIG. 96).
(See S4906 in FIG. 96). In this pseudo reserved ball counter 223r, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c are set at the time of transition to a jackpot waiting state corresponding to a left trigger jackpot (see S4614 in FIG. 98). In other words, the pseudo reserved ball counter 223r is composed of at least a counter for counting the number of pseudo reserved balls of the first special symbol and a counter for counting the number of pseudo reserved balls of the second special symbol. In addition, the value of this pseudo reserved ball counter 223r is subtracted by one each time the start of the pseudo variable display is set (see S4908 in FIG. 96).

The pseudo-normal state flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not a presentation (pseudo-normal state presentation) that simulates a normal game state is being performed in the jackpot waiting state (whether or not the jackpot waiting state is set when a left trigger jackpot is won). If the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is on, it indicates that the pseudo-normal state presentation is being performed, and if it is off, it indicates that the pseudo-normal state presentation is not being performed. The pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to on when a left trigger jackpot is won and the jackpot waiting state is started (see S4617 in FIG. 98). On the other hand, the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to off when the pseudo-normal state presentation ends (when a game ball enters the left activation winning hole 662 and the jackpot opening period is started, or when the pseudo-variable stop state continues for 3 seconds and the waiting state presentation is started) (see S4912 in FIG. 96 and S4617 in FIG. 98).

The pseudo-fluctuation timer 223t is a timer that measures the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation display.
In this pseudo fluctuation timer 223t, a timer value corresponding to 2 seconds (i.e., 2000) is set every time the start of the pseudo fluctuation display is set (see S4907 in FIG. 96). Whether or not the pseudo fluctuation display is being executed is determined depending on whether the value of this pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is 0 or not.

The pseudo fluctuation halt state timer 223u is a timer that measures the duration of the pseudo fluctuation halt state. The pseudo fluctuation halt state timer 223u is set with a timer value corresponding to 3 seconds (i.e., 3000) at the timing when the pseudo fluctuation halt state is set (S in FIG. 96).
(See 4906). When the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u becomes 0, it means that 3 seconds have passed since the pseudo fluctuation stop state started, so the start of the standby state presentation is set. By configuring the pseudo fluctuation stop state to end in 3 seconds, even if the player wants to quit playing, the player can be made to realize that the jackpot standby state has started before the player leaves the machine. This prevents the player from quitting the game without realizing that he or she has won the left trigger jackpot, which can lead to dissatisfaction with the game.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 95 to FIG. 99, the voice lamp control device 11 according to the seventh embodiment will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the seventh embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 95, the main process 7 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. This main process 7 is the same as the main process (
This is a process executed instead of the process shown in FIG.

In the main process 7 (see FIG. 95) of the seventh embodiment, steps S4101 to S411
In each of the processes in FIG. 8, the same process as S4101 in the main process (see FIG. 34) in the second embodiment is carried out.
In the main process 7 (see FIG. 95) in the seventh embodiment, after the performance update process (S4111) is completed, a pseudo-normal state performance process is executed to set the performance mode during the pseudo-normal state (
S4131), and the process proceeds to S4112.
Details of this will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-normal state production process (S4131) described above. In this pseudo-normal state production process (S4131), first,
is on (S4901), and if it is determined that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is off (S4901: No), this means that a pseudo-normal gaming state is not set (not a jackpot waiting state based on a left-trigger jackpot), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is on (S4901: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a pseudo-variable display performance is being executed (S4902). More specifically, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo-variable timer 223t is 1 or more. In the process of S4902, if it is determined that a pseudo-variable display performance is being executed (the value of the pseudo-variable timer 223t is 1 or more) (S4902: Yes),
The value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is updated by subtracting 1 from the value (S4903), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t after subtraction has become 0 (S4904). In other words, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation display has ended.

In the process of S4904, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is not 0 (S4904: No), this process is terminated in order to continue the pseudo fluctuation display. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is 0 (S
4904: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the pseudo reserved ball count counter 223r is 0 (whether the pseudo reserved ball count corresponding to the first special symbol and the pseudo reserved ball count corresponding to the second special symbol are both 0) (S4905). If it is determined that the value of the pseudo reserved ball count counter 223r is 0 (S4905: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation display cannot be started, so in order to transition to a pseudo fluctuation stop state, the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is set to 3000 (S4906), and this process is terminated. Note that the pseudo normal state presentation process (see FIG. 96) is a process executed every millisecond in the main process 7 (see FIG. 95), so by setting the timer value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u to 3000,
When three seconds (3000 milliseconds) have elapsed, the timer value becomes 0. This makes it possible to accurately measure three seconds after the pseudo fluctuation stop state has occurred.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4905 that the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is not 0 (S4905: No), the start of the pseudo fluctuation display is newly set, and the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is set to 2000 (a timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) (S4907). Next, the value of the pseudo reserved ball number counter 223r is decremented by 1,
The display mode is updated to correspond to the pseudo number of reserved balls after subtraction (S4908), and this process is terminated.

Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of S4902 that the pseudo fluctuation display is not being executed (S4902: No), this means that the current state is a pseudo fluctuation stop state, so the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is subtracted by 1 (S4909), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u after subtraction has become 0 (S4910). If it is determined in the process of S4910 that the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u is not 0 (is a value of 1 or more) (S4910: No), this process is terminated as it is in order to continue the pseudo fluctuation stop state.

On the other hand, in the process of S4910, the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u after subtraction is 0
If it is determined that the standby state has been reached (S4910: Yes), a display standby state command is set to execute the standby state presentation (see FIG. 7) (S4911). Next, the standby state presentation flag 223g is set to ON, and the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to OFF (S4912), and this process is terminated.

By executing this pseudo-normal state presentation process (see FIG. 96), it is possible to perform a presentation that makes the player feel as if the normal game state continues in the jackpot waiting state that is entered based on winning the left trigger jackpot.
When a left-triggered jackpot occurs and a transition is made to a jackpot waiting state, the player can continue hitting with the left hand, so that the first round of the left-triggered jackpot can be started before the game ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f1.

In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-variation display is configured to be executed for the number of reserved balls reserved at the start of the jackpot waiting state (end of the variation), and when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected after the jackpot waiting state is entered, the pseudo-reserved number of balls corresponding to the ball entering is not increased. This is because, as described above, when a left-handed hit is made,
The game board 1 is arranged so that the game ball can enter the left operation winning hole 662 more easily than the first ball entry hole 64.
This is because, since the system is configured as No. 3, if successive left shots are made during the jackpot waiting state, the possibility of the game balls successively entering the first ball entry port 64 without entering the left actuation winning port 662 is extremely low. Therefore, since the process for increasing the number of pseudo reserved balls can be omitted, the processing load of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Also, if the system is configured to perform the process for increasing the number of reserved balls, the main control device 110
In the seventh embodiment, when a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 during a jackpot waiting state, even if the number of reserved balls has already reached the upper limit, the sound lamp control device 113 must be notified of the ball entering. This is because, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit and the game enters the first ball entrance 64 after the pseudo variable display performance is executed once or more, the number of reserved balls must be increased in a pseudo manner. Therefore, the number of commands to be output by the main control device 110 increases, and the processing load of the main control device 110 also increases. In contrast, the seventh embodiment is configured not to increase the number of pseudo reserved balls, so that the main control device 110 does not need to newly increase commands, and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. Furthermore, if the player is lucky enough to enter the first ball entrance 64 first and recognizes that the number of reserved balls pattern does not increase, the player can be made to understand that the game was actually in a jackpot waiting state. Therefore, for a player who is lucky enough to detect the jackpot waiting state, the player can play the game by devising a way to make the game ball reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 and enter the left operation winning hole 662. In this way, in order to determine whether the game is in a normal game state or a jackpot waiting state,
This allows the player to hit left-handed more aggressively.

Next, the hit-related process 7 (S4341) in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 97. This hit-related process 7 (S4341) is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 2 (see Fig. 61) in the second embodiment, and is a process for performing control according to the command when a hit-related command is received, similar to the hit-related process 2 (see Fig. 61).

In the winning-related process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 97), S4401, S4
The processes of S4404 and S4407 to S4410 are respectively the same as S4401, S4404, and S4407 to S441 of the winning-related process 2 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment.
The same processes as those in the winning related process 7 in the seventh embodiment are executed.
In FIG. 97, when it is determined in the process of S4401 that a standby state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4401: Yes), the standby state command process (FIG. 62) is performed.
4. Instead of executing the standby state command process 7 (see step S4441), the process ends.
Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98.
) is a process for setting a presentation mode according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot waiting state.

In the winning-related process 7 (see FIG. 97) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined that an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 in the process of S4404 (
S4404: Yes), an opening command process is executed to execute an opening presentation in a manner appropriate to the situation in which the jackpot started (S4442), and this process is terminated.
The opening command process (S4442) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned standby state command process 7 (S4441) will be described with reference to Fig. 98. Fig. 98 is a flow chart showing the standby state command process 7 (S4441). Of this standby state command process 7 (S4441), steps S4601 to S460
In each process of S4603, the same processes as those in S4601 to S4603 of the standby state command process (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment are executed.

In the standby state command process 7 (see FIG. 98) in the seventh embodiment, S460
In the process of 1, the current jackpot is not a right-triggered jackpot (it is a left-triggered jackpot).
If it is determined that this is the case (S4601: No), the values of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c are read out (S4611), and it is determined whether the read counter values are both 0 (S4612).

In the process of S4612, if it is determined that the values of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c are both 0 (S4612: Yes
s), the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is 0, and if the pseudo-variable display is started, the player will feel uncomfortable, so a pseudo-variable stop state is set. That is, the value of the pseudo-variable stop state timer 223u is set to 3000 (a timer value corresponding to 3 seconds) (S4613), and the process proceeds to S4617.

On the other hand, in the process of S4612, if it is determined that at least one of the values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball counter 223c is not 0 (S4612: No), the read values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 223b and the second special pattern reserved ball counter 223c are stored as the value of the pseudo reserved ball counter 223r (S4614), the start of the pseudo fluctuation display is set, and the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t is set to 2000 (a timer value corresponding to 2 seconds) (S4615). Then, the value of the pseudo reserved ball counter 223r is updated by subtracting 1, and the reserved ball number pattern is pseudo-decreased by 1 and displayed (S4616), and the process proceeds to S4617. S46
In process 17, the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is set to ON (S4617), and this process ends.

By executing this standby state command process 7 (see FIG. 98), in the jackpot standby state of the left trigger jackpot, it is possible to execute a pseudo performance as if the normal game state continues, while in the case of a right trigger jackpot, it is possible to execute a standby state performance. In this way, in the case of a left trigger jackpot, the player can continue to hit from the left without realizing that the jackpot standby state has started, so that the game ball can be entered into the left operation winning hole 662 shortly before it reaches the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 to start the jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of a right trigger jackpot, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the jackpot standby state has started, so that it is possible to provide a game in which the degree of advantage of the first round (the number of game balls that can be entered into the right specific winning hole 65a) can be varied depending on the timing of entering the game ball into the right operation hole 661. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the enjoyment of firing the game ball at the right time.

Next, the above-mentioned opening command process (S4442) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 99. In this opening command process (S4442), first, it is determined whether the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is ON (S5001). If it is determined that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is ON in the process of S5001 (S5001: Yes),
This means that the ball has entered the left operating winning slot 662 while a pseudo-variable display effect or a pseudo-variable stop state is being displayed, and the opening period of the jackpot has begun, so a display opening command corresponding to a blackout effect (see Figure 93 (a)) is set (S5002).

Next, the value of the pseudo pending ball count counter 223r, the value of the pseudo fluctuation timer 223t, and the value of the pseudo fluctuation stop state timer 223u are all reset to 0 (S5003), the pseudo normal state flag 223s is set to off (S5004), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the pseudo-normal state flag 223s is off (S5001: No), a display opening command corresponding to a normal opening effect is set (S5005), and the standby state effect flag 223g is set to off (S5006).
006), and this process ends.

By executing this opening command process (see FIG. 99), when a game ball enters the left actuation winning hole 662 in the jackpot waiting state entered after winning the left trigger jackpot and the opening period starts, a blackout effect can be executed in which the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 suddenly goes dark (blacks out). That is, it is possible to set a mode that is significantly different from the pseudo variable display or pseudo variable stop state effect that has been executed up until that point. This allows the player to instantly understand that a special effect has been executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment, the left-actuated winning hole 662, which is the starting trigger of the left-triggered jackpot, is arranged at a position where some of the game balls shot at the first ball entry hole 64 can enter. When the left-triggered jackpot occurs, the third symbol display device 81 performs a performance in which the third symbols of the losing combination are stopped and displayed during the variable display of the special symbols. Furthermore, in the jackpot waiting state to which the player transitions after the end of the variable display, a performance is performed as if the normal game state continues. That is, even during the jackpot waiting state, a pseudo-normal state performance such as a pseudo variable display performance is performed, making it possible to mislead the player into thinking that the player is in the normal game state and to continue hitting from the left. As a result, when a left-triggered jackpot is won and the jackpot standby state is entered, the player can continue to hit from the left (the player can be prevented from hitting from the right), so that the game ball can be entered into the left-actuated winning hole 662 before the player even thinks about trying to make the game ball reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Therefore, when a left-triggered jackpot occurs, it is difficult to start a jackpot after a number of game balls exceeding the specified number (the upper limit number of 2 balls in the first round) reach the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, while when a right-triggered jackpot occurs, it is easy to generate an over-winning by making the game ball enter the right-actuated winning hole 661 at a timing when more game balls have reached the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. Therefore, the degree of advantage (the number of prize balls that can be obtained) in the first round can be made different between a left-triggered jackpot and a right-triggered jackpot, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the type of jackpot.

In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-normal state presentation is always executed when the left trigger jackpot is in the jackpot waiting state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the left trigger jackpot is in the left trigger jackpot, it may be determined by lottery whether to execute the pseudo-normal state presentation or the waiting state presentation.

In the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-variable display is displayed at the start of the jackpot waiting state (at the end of the variation).
In the above, the number of reserved balls is increased by one, and when a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64 after the jackpot waiting state is reached, the number of pseudo reserved balls corresponding to the ball is not increased, but this is not limiting. For example, the number of pseudo reserved balls may be increased each time a start winning is detected. This makes it more difficult for the player to recognize whether the pseudo normal state presentation is being performed.

In the seventh embodiment, the execution start timing of the expectation degree notification effect is fixed for each fluctuation type. That is, in the case of a hit or miss special reach, the execution start timing of the expectation degree notification effect is 86 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and in the case of a hit or miss super reach, the execution start timing of the expectation degree notification effect is 56 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, but this is not limited to this. For example, even for the same fluctuation type, the execution start timing of the expectation degree notification effect may be different by lottery or the like.

In the seventh embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a special presentation for 2 seconds different from the normal one is executed as a pseudo-variable display, but this is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable display presentation with the same variation time and display mode as the normal variable display is executed in a pseudo-variable display. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display executed just before the jackpot waiting state is repeated. By configuring in this way, the data of the variable display used just before can be directly reused, so that the processing load when executing the pseudo-variable display can be reduced.

In the seventh embodiment, when the left-triggered jackpot is obtained and the state transitions to the jackpot waiting state, the pseudo variable display is executed a number of times according to the number of reserved balls at that time, and then the state transitions to the pseudo stop display state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when the state transitions to the jackpot waiting state, the state transitions to the stop display state immediately regardless of the number of reserved balls. In this case, the reserved ball number pattern may be pseudo-set to 0 when the state transitions to the jackpot waiting state or during the variable display. By configuring in this way, the player can have the impression that the reserved balls have become 0 when the state transitions to the jackpot waiting state, so that the player can hit the left side from the start of the jackpot waiting state to execute the lottery for the special pattern.

In the seventh embodiment, when the pseudo-variable display is executed, the image of the same large 3 symbol as the normal variable display is used to execute the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a symbol different in appearance from the normal 3 symbol may be prepared as a symbol dedicated to the pseudo-variable display.

<First control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 100 to Fig. 117, a first control example that can be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described. In this first control example, as part of an entertainment effect, the player can select the music (audio effect) to be output (played) during a predetermined period during normal play (for example, the period during which the probability variable state is set). More specifically, when an operation on the operation button 230 provided on the front frame 14 is detected during the predetermined period (the period during which the probability variable state is set), the third symbol display device 81:
A list of songs that can be selected (selectable) (song selection menu screen) is displayed. Then, when the player selects any song (audio performance) while the song selection menu screen is displayed and performs a confirm operation (pressing the center button CB of the operation buttons 230), the output (playback) of the selected song (audio performance) begins.
In the control example, when the predetermined period starts (when the probability change state is entered), one song (presentation mode) is randomly selected and played. The randomly selected song continues to be played until the song selected by the player starts to be played or the probability change state (predetermined period) ends. This allows the song to be played from the time of entering the probability change state until the song is selected by the player (when no song is selected), so that the player's satisfaction at entering the probability change state that is advantageous to the player can be increased.

In addition, in this first control example, the initial placement of the music selection menu screen is configured so that the more frequently (more frequently) a song has been selected by the player in the game up to that point, the easier it is to select the song, regardless of the type of song (presentation mode) randomly selected at the start of the probability variable state. Here, "menu position that is easy to select" means a menu position that requires fewer operations on the operation button 230 before selecting a song (selectable with three or fewer operations).

First, the external appearance of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 100. Fig. 100 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example. As shown in Fig. 100, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, the operation button 230 is disposed on the left side of the ball lending operation unit 40 as viewed from the front. This operation button 230 is composed of five buttons: an up button UB located on the upper side as viewed from the front, a down button DB located on the lower side as viewed from the front, a right button RB located on the right side as viewed from the front, a left button LB located on the left side as viewed from the front, and a center button CB located in the center of the operation button 230. For details, see Fig. 101.
As will be described later with reference to FIG. 102, as mentioned above, this operation button 230 is provided to allow the player to select any one of a plurality of songs (26 songs from Song A to Song Z) that are pre-set in the pachinko machine 10 and displayed on the song selection menu screen during the period when the special probability state is set.

Next, the display mode during the probability bonus state in this first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 101 and Fig. 102. Fig. 101(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the probability bonus state. As shown in Fig. 101(a), during the probability bonus state, a music area MR for displaying information on the music being played is formed on the left side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front (to the left of the third symbol being displayed in a variable manner). More specifically, Fig. 101(a)
As shown in FIG. 101(a), the currently playing (outputting) song (song A in the example) is displayed as "
The text "Song A" and the text "You can select a song by operating the buttons!" are displayed in the music area MR. These display contents allow the player to easily understand what song is currently being played. In addition, the player can easily understand that any song can be selected by operating the operation button 230.

Figure 101(b) is a diagram showing the display content which changes when the player operates the operation button 230 (presses any of the buttons UB, DB, RB, LB, CB) while the image shown in Figure 101(a) is displayed. Figure 101(b) illustrates an example in which the display content (display mode) changes based on (in conjunction with) the player pressing the down button DB. As shown in Figure 101(b), when the operation button 230 is operated (pressed), multiple display areas of approximately horizontally elongated rectangular shape, with the title of the song (song name) attached, are displayed inside the music area MR. Also, below the multiple display areas, a message saying "Select with up and down buttons" is displayed.
and the words "Press center button to confirm." These display contents (music selection menu screen) allow the player to easily understand that by operating the operation button 230, any song can be selected and played.
For ease of explanation, the state in which this music selection menu screen is displayed (the state in which any music can be selected in response to the operation of the operation button 230) is referred to as a "music selection mode."
The display contents during this music selection mode will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 102(a) is a diagram showing the layout of items (images showing the types of songs (song names)) on the song selection menu screen that is first displayed when the mode is switched to the song selection mode.
As shown in FIG. 2(a), the music selection menu screen displays at least five display areas (fewer than the total number of songs, 26) in which different items (images indicating types of songs) are arranged. When the center button CB is pressed while the music selection menu screen is displayed, playback of the item (song) arranged in the display area displayed in the center of the five display areas is determined.

Of the five display areas displayed on the music selection menu screen, the top two display areas are arranged with items PA1 and PA2 (images showing music Y and music Z) corresponding to the types of music that players have selected many times in the past high probability state (music that players select frequently). Note that item PA1 (image showing music Z), which is located relatively close to the central display area, is selected more frequently by players than item P2 (image showing music Y), which is relatively far from the central display area.

In the item RA1 (image showing song A) displayed in the center of the song selection menu screen, an item showing a randomly selected song (the first song played after the transition to the probability change state) is arranged. Then, below the center, two items are displayed in a predetermined order (in alphabetical order in this first control example) based on the first selected song. That is, based on the item RA1 (song A) displayed in the center, items RA2 and RA3 of "song B" and "song C" in alphabetical order are displayed below the item RA1. In the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity, the display area in which the two items PA1 and PA2 (items that have been selected by the player frequently) displayed above the central item RA1 in the initial arrangement on the song selection menu screen are arranged is referred to as the "history area". In addition, the display area in which the three items displayed below the history area are displayed (the display area in which randomly selected items are arranged) is referred to as the "random selection area".
Moreover, the display area in which the items to be played when the player presses the center button CB are arranged is referred to as the "music selection area."

As shown in FIG. 102(a), the item PA1 located in the music selection area (the center of the music selection menu screen) is displayed in a lit state, and the other items PA1, PA2, RA2, and R
A3 is displayed in an unlit state. This allows the player to more easily understand that when the center button CB is pressed, the item displayed in a different manner (lighted appearance) from other items (images showing the type of music) is determined as the music to be played this time. In addition, an upper image UG with a substantially upward triangular shape is displayed on the upper side of the music selection area and to the right of the item PA1, and a lower image DG with a substantially downward triangular shape is displayed on the lower side of the music selection area and to the right of the item RA2. These display contents allow the player to intuitively understand that when the upper button UB is pressed, the display content (music) displayed in the music selection area can be shifted to a display content one level above the current state (in the example of FIG. 102(a) , an image showing music Z) in conjunction with the pressing, and that when the down button DB is pressed, the display content (music) displayed in the music selection area can be shifted to a display content one level below the current state (in the example of FIG. 102(a) , an image showing music B) in conjunction with the pressing.

FIG. 102(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a player presses (operates) the up button UB of the operation button 230 in a state where the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. 101(a) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 102(b), when the player presses the up button UB, all display contents are changed to a display mode in which they are moved downward by one display area in conjunction with the pressing. As a result, the item PA1 (music Z) arranged one above the music selection area in FIG. 102(a) is changed to a display mode in which they are moved to the music selection area in conjunction with the pressing of the up button UB. The item PA1 moved to the music selection area is set to a lit appearance, and the other items are set to a turned-off appearance. Also, an item PA3 indicating "music X" is displayed one item above the item PA2. This item PA3 is displayed as the item that has been selected by the player the second most times after the item PA2 (music Y) (in the example of FIG. 102(b), "music X"). In addition, as each item is shifted downward by one display area, the upper image corresponding to the upper button UB appears to be lit up. As a result, the arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen is changed in conjunction with the pressing of the upper button UB (item PA1, which was located one area above the music selection area, is changed).
This allows the player to easily understand that the player has been able to move the selected song to the music selection area.

Furthermore, if the up button UB is pressed multiple times, the items are shifted downwards according to the number of times it is pressed. For example, in the arrangement of the music selection menu screen shown in FIG. 102(a), if the player presses the up button DB three times, each item is shifted downwards by three display areas, and item PA3 (an image showing music X) is placed in the music selection area. The menu items are arranged in a loop, and by continuing to press the up button, all the music pieces can be shifted in order into the music selection area. Furthermore, if the up button UB is pressed again when the item corresponding to the last music piece is placed in the music selection area,
The item indicating the first song (song A in the example of FIG. 102(a)) returns to the song selection area.

Although not shown in the figure, when the player operates (presses) the down button DB,
The opposite operation to that when the up button UB is pressed is performed. That is, by shifting each item display area one space upward, the display mode is changed to one in which the items arranged in the display area one space below the music selection area at the time of the operation are moved to the music selection area. For example, in FIG.
When the down button DB is pressed in the arrangement shown in FIG. 02(a), the display mode is changed to one in which the item RA2 appears to have been moved to the music selection area in conjunction with the pressing. Also, the down image DG corresponding to the down button DB is set to an illuminated appearance. This allows the player to easily understand that an item has been shifted in conjunction with the pressing of the down button DB.

In the first control example, the initial layout of the music selection menu screen is configured to arrange three items (items PA1 to PA3) in the upper side of the music selection area in descending order of the number of times the player has selected them. In other words, the items (
The more frequently selected items are arranged in the order of frequency.
This is because it is considered highly likely that the player will make a selection even in the current probability bonus state. If, for the purpose of determining the initial layout of the music selection menu screen, an item corresponding to a randomly selected item (music) is placed in the music selection area, and the other items are simply placed in alphabetical order (predetermined order) based on the items placed in the music selection area, it may become difficult for the player to select a favorite song. In other words, if the item (music) that the player wants to select and the randomly selected item (music) are not in the correct order, the player will have to operate the operation button 230 many times to shift the item he or she wants to select to the music selection area, which may be irritating to the player. Also,
As a method for making the player feel less bothered, it is possible to set the item that is first placed in the music selection area when the probability change state is reached to an item that is frequently selected by the player, but with this method, the player is likely to be satisfied with the music that is first played (output) in the probability change state and not want to change the music (do not display the music selection menu screen). The fewer the opportunities for the player to display the music selection menu screen, the fewer the opportunities for the player to know the types of other music set in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player is less likely to think about selecting other music. Therefore, even if a large number of music is set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them may not be selected and may be wasted.

Furthermore, as a method for making it easier for the player to select a favorite song, a method is conceivable in which all items are displayed together on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (the items are arranged in a matrix), so that the player can understand at a glance which song (item) is located where. However, with this method, the display area for displaying the items (area of the music selection menu screen) becomes wide, and there is a possibility that the display area for displaying other display contents (the third symbol, the reserved ball count symbol, etc.) becomes too narrow.

In contrast to these, in this first control example, the initial arrangement of items displayed on the music selection menu screen is set so that the player can easily select an item that is likely to be selected by the player (an item that has been selected frequently in past games). More specifically, the image showing the three items (music) that the player has selected frequently (the number of times selected) in past games is arranged in a position (the upper three display areas of the music selection area) that can be selected with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). By configuring in this way, regardless of which item (image showing the name of the music) is initially arranged in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen, the item that the player has selected frequently can be arranged in a position that can be selected with a small number of operations (three operations or less). Therefore, in each probability change state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected in the past (i.e., the item that the player is likely to select in the current probability change state) can be selected with little effort, so that the player is less likely to feel bothered when selecting a song (item). In addition, the number of items (played songs) selected at least once is less than three (i.e., the number of items selected frequently by the player is less than three).
In this case, only items that have been selected one or more times (less than three items) are placed in the history area, and the other items are placed in a predetermined order (alphabetical order of songs) based on the items placed in the music selection area. Therefore, in a state in which the player has not selected a song even once, such as immediately after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all items are simply placed in a predetermined order (alphabetical order of songs) based on the items that have been determined by random lottery to be placed in the music selection area.

In addition, in this first control example, after the transition to the probability variable state, in the music selection menu screen that is displayed first, an image showing the name of one randomly selected song is arranged in the music selection area, and a history area is arranged above the music selection area. By configuring in this way, at least immediately after the transition to the probability variable state, the randomly selected song can be played, so that the player can be given an opportunity to listen to songs other than the songs that are frequently selected. Therefore, multiple songs set in the pachinko machine 10 can be played without waste. Also, while listening to the randomly selected songs, there is a possibility that the player will like the song and want to play it in the probability variable state from the next time onwards. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of songs that the player likes, and therefore it is possible to improve the interest of playing in the probability variable state.
In addition, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous due to repeatedly selecting the same piece of music.

Furthermore, in this first control example, the number of items (images showing song names) displayed on the song selection menu screen is limited to five (less than the total number of songs, 26), and the types of items displayed on the song selection menu screen are changed depending on the operation of the operation button 230, so that all items set in the pachinko machine 10 can be selected. By configuring in this way, the display area of the song selection menu screen can be made smaller than when all items are displayed at once. Therefore, the display contents other than the song selection menu screen, such as the third symbol and the reserved ball number symbol, can be displayed in a larger display area.

In the first control example, the display areas corresponding to the songs (items) that the player has selected most frequently (number of times) in the past games are arranged in the top three display areas of the music selection area, and the remaining display areas are arranged in a predetermined order (alphabetical order) based on one randomly selected display area, but this is not limited to this. The number of items that the player has selected most frequently (number of times) in the past games is:
The number may be less than three or more than three.

In the first control example, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, the items that are arranged in the history area are those that have been frequently selected by the player in previous games, but this is not limited to this. For example, the items that the player selected in the probability variable state that was set before the current probability variable state may be arranged in the history area in order of the timing of selection that is most recent (close). By configuring in this way, images (items) that indicate songs that are likely to be selected by a player who tends to select his favorite songs consecutively can be arranged in the history area, thereby improving the convenience of the player.

In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after the probability change state is entered, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the music selection menu screen may be displayed at all times during the probability change state. By configuring in this way, the effort of the player who wants to select a song can be reduced, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, the item displayed first in the music selection area is selected by random drawing, but this is not limited to this. For example, the item displayed first in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen may be the item last selected by the player in the probability change state set before the current probability change state.

In the first control example, a maximum of three items selected by the player in the previous game are arranged in a position in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen where the player can select the items (shift them to the music selection area) with a relatively small number of operations, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the player can easily understand where the music that the player is likely to select (the music that has been selected many times) is arranged on the music selection menu screen, the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen may be arranged somewhere in the music area MR. By configuring in this way, for example, even if the number of items displayed in the music area MR is increased to more than five, the items that the player is likely to select can be displayed from the beginning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, the display mode is different between the items displayed in the music selection area and the items displayed in the other display areas, but in addition to this, the display mode may be changed depending on whether or not the music is likely to be selected by the player (the item arranged in the history area in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen). By configuring in this way, the player can more easily find the items that the player is likely to select, thereby improving the convenience for the player.

<Electrical configuration in first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 103 to Fig. 108. Fig. 103 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above embodiments (see Fig. 8) in that the operation button 230 is electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations are the same as those in each of the above embodiments, so details thereof will be omitted. In the following description of the first control example, the first embodiment will be used as a comparison subject, and the differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

When any of the buttons (UB, DB, RB, LB, CB) constituting the operation button 230 is pressed (operated), an ON signal (signal with output H) is output to the signal line corresponding to the operated button. The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the output from the operation button 230, and when the output of the signal corresponding to any of the buttons is H, it executes control according to the type of the button. Specifically, for example, when it detects that the output of the signal corresponding to any of the buttons has become H in a state where the music selection menu screen is not displayed in a probability change state, it performs control to display the music selection menu screen. Also, when it detects that the output of the signal corresponding to the up button UB has become H in a state where the music selection menu screen is displayed, it performs control to shift each item in the music selection menu screen downward by one.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 104(a).
104A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 104A, the ROM 222 in the first control example has the same configuration as the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 14A).
The difference is that an item order storage area 222aa is added to the first embodiment. The other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, so the details are omitted.

The item order storage area 222aa is a data table in which the order of items in the music selection menu screen is specified, and is referred to when setting the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen. More specifically, when the game transitions to a probability change state, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is determined. When determining this initial arrangement, first, three items (music) to be arranged in the history area are determined, and then, from among the other items not arranged in the history area, one item to be arranged in the music selection area is randomly determined (for example, by lottery using random numbers). Then, based on the items arranged in the music selection area, the arrangement of other items (items not arranged in either the music selection area or the history area) is set in the order specified in the item order storage area 222aa. As described above, in this first control example, the item order storage area 222aa is set so that the order of items is the alphabetical order of the music.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 104(b). Fig. 104(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in Fig. 104(b), the RAM 223 in this first control example has an item arrangement storage area 223aa, a menu position pointer 223ab, and a song selection count storage area 223b, as compared to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see Fig. 14(b)).
ac, a music selection permission flag 223ad, and a menu display flag 223ae are added. The other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, and therefore the details thereof will be omitted.

The item arrangement storage area 223aa is a storage area for storing the arrangement of each item (image showing the type of each song) on the music selection menu screen. When the game is transferred to the probability change state, the initial arrangement of each item is set in the item arrangement storage area 223aa (S
When the music selection menu screen is displayed (see S5204, S5208, S5212), the music selection menu screen is displayed in the arrangement set in the item arrangement storage area 223aa.
The item layout storage area 223aa will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Fig. 105(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the item layout storage area 223aa. Fig. 105(a) shows an example of the contents of the item layout storage area 223aa when "song N", "song O", and "song P" are arranged in the history area, and "song A" is arranged in the music selection area. As shown in Fig. 105(a), this item layout storage area 223aa stores each value that the menu position pointer 223ab can take ("
In the example of Fig. 105(a), data corresponding to the menu item "Music A" is stored in the memory area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab, and data corresponding to the menu item "Music A" is stored in the memory area corresponding to the value "01H" of the menu position pointer 223ab.
Data corresponding to the menu item "Song B" is stored. Thereafter, data is stored in alphabetical order of songs up to the value "0BH" of the menu position pointer 223ab. Furthermore, data corresponding to "Song Q" is stored in the memory area corresponding to "0CH" next to "0BH". In other words, data corresponding to "Song N", "Song O", and "Song P" that are already stored in the history area are prevented from being stored in the random selection area in duplicate.

From the storage area corresponding to the value "0CH" of the menu position pointer 223ab, "16H"
In the same manner as in the range of "00H" to "0BH", data is stored in alphabetical order of songs up to the storage area corresponding to "00H" to "0BH". Also, when the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is "17H",
The range from "19H" to "19H" corresponds to the history area. In the example of FIG. 105(a), "Song N
", "Song O", and "Song P" are stored in the memory area corresponding to the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab. Data corresponding to the most frequently selected song is stored in the memory area corresponding to "18H", data corresponding to the second most frequently selected song is stored in the memory area corresponding to "17H", data corresponding to the third most frequently selected song is stored in the memory area corresponding to "19H".

In the first control example, when the music selection menu screen is displayed, the item arrangement storage area 2
The data stored in the memory area 23aa (the value of the menu position pointer 223ab and the corresponding relationship between the menu items) is compared with the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the menu items stored in the memory area corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab are arranged in the music selection area.
The menu items stored in the memory areas corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab are arranged above and below the music selection area. For example, in the example of FIG. 105(a), if the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is "19H", an item indicating "music P" is displayed in the music selection area.
The value stored in the memory area corresponding to the value one higher than "19H" (i.e. "18H")
Similarly, two spaces above the music selection area, a menu position pointer 22
The "music N" corresponding to the value "17H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged. Conversely, an item corresponding to a value one level lower than the value "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab is arranged one level below the music selection area. Here, in this control example, the maximum value of the menu position pointer 223ab,
The next value after "19H" is set to "00H" (similarly, the next value after the minimum value "00H" (one value below) is determined to be "19H").
"Song A" and "Song B" stored in the memory areas corresponding to "00H" and "01H" are arranged one row below and two rows below, respectively.

Returning to FIG. 104(b), the explanation will be continued. The menu position pointer 223ab is a pointer used to determine the range of items to be displayed on the music selection menu screen among the above-mentioned item arrangement storage area 223aa. As described above, when the music selection menu screen is displayed, data stored in five storage areas are read out with the storage area corresponding to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab at the center, and five items corresponding to each data are arranged on the music selection menu screen. The initial value of this menu position pointer 223ab is set to "00H", and the value is decreased by one each time a press of the up button UB is detected while the music selection menu screen is displayed. Note that, when the press of the up button UB is detected while the value is "00H", the value is updated to the maximum value of "19H". Also, the value is increased by one each time a press of the down button DB is detected while the music selection menu screen is displayed. If the down button UB is pressed when the value is at the maximum value of "19H", the value is updated to the minimum value of "00H" (see S5110 in FIG. 111). The value of the menu position pointer 223ab is also reset to the initial value of "00H" each time a jackpot is hit (see S4452 in FIG. 114). The special probability state always transitions after the end of a jackpot, so by resetting the value to the initial value when a jackpot is hit, the value of the menu position pointer 223ab can always be set to "00H" at the start of the special probability state.

The song selection count storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing the number of times each song (item) has been selected. When the menu item layout is set in the item layout storage area 223aa, the song selection count storage area 223ac is referenced, and data is stored in the storage area (i.e., history area) corresponding to the values "19H", "18H", and "17H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in descending order of the number of times the song has been selected. Details of the song selection count storage area 223ac will be described with reference to FIG. 105(b).

FIG. 105(b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the song selection count storage area 223ac. As shown in FIG. 105(b), the song selection count storage area 223ac is configured to be able to store the type of song and the number of times it has been selected (selected) so far in association with each other. For example, in the example of FIG. 105(b), 0 times is associated and stored as the number of selections for "song A", 1 time is associated and stored as the number of selections for song B, and 0 time is associated and stored as the number of selections for song C. Similarly, the number of selections is associated and stored for other song types. This song selection count storage area 223ac is updated by adding 1 to the number of selections corresponding to the selected song each time the player presses the center button CB while the song selection menu screen is displayed to determine the playback of one song (S5 in FIG. 111).
(See 108.) Since the RAM 223 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is not backed up, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, all data indicating the number of times each piece of music has been selected is cleared.

Returning to FIG. 104(b), the explanation will be continued. The music selection permission flag 223ad is a flag indicating whether or not the player can select a song. If the music selection permission flag 223ad is on, it indicates that any song can be selected, and if it is off, it indicates that a song cannot be selected. The music selection permission flag 223ad is initially set to off, and is set to on when a transition to a probability change state is notified by a state command output from the main control device 110 (see S5213 in FIG. 113). Also, it is reset to off every time an opening command indicating the start of a big win is received (see S4451 in FIG. 114). While the music selection permission flag 223ad is on, it is determined that the period is one in which music can be selected, and pressing the operation button 230 is treated as valid.

The menu display flag 223ae is a flag that indicates whether or not the music selection menu screen (see FIG. 102(a)) is displayed. When this menu display flag 223ae is on, it indicates that the music selection menu screen is displayed, and when it is off, it indicates that the music selection menu screen is not displayed. This menu display flag 223ae is initially set to off, and is set to on when the music selection menu screen is set to be displayed (see S5105 in FIG. 111). Furthermore, when pressing the center button CB is detected while the music selection menu screen is displayed, the music selection menu screen is closed and the menu display flag 223ae is cleared.
3ae is set to OFF (see S5109 in FIG. 111). It is also reset to OFF when an opening command indicating the start of a big win is received (see S4451 in FIG. 114).
While the menu display flag 223ae is on, the up button UB or the down button D
Each time a press of the center button CB is detected, each item on the music selection menu screen is shifted in the corresponding direction. Also, when a press of the center button CB is detected, playback of the items arranged in the music selection area is set and the music selection menu screen is closed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to Fig. 106 to Fig. 108. Fig. 106 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226.
As shown in 06 , the audio output device 226 is connected so as to be able to receive data output from the audio lamp control device 113 .

106, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 301.
The internal memory 302 also includes a RAM 303 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the internal memory 302 is executed.

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input port 305 and the audio synthesis unit 306.
When a command specifying audio data is received, the command is input to the input port 305,
and input to the MPU 301 via the bus line 304. Also, the voice data designated by the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and input to the voice synthesis unit 303.
06, which are channels corresponding to the audio types. For example, audio data corresponding to music is output to CN1, audio data corresponding to sound effects is output to CN2, and audio data corresponding to warning sounds is output to CN3.

The voice synthesis unit 306 is configured with a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. This allows various voices specified by the voice lamp control device 113 to be output from the speaker unit 308.

Next, with reference to Fig. 107(a), a description will be given of the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. As shown in Fig. 107(a), the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

The sound file storage area 302a is a storage area in which sound files (sound data) used to output music, sound effects, etc. are stored. In the probability variable state, sound files for playing music (songs A to Z) that the player can select are also stored in this sound file storage area 302a. The output of various sound data is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113.
When this command is issued, the audio file corresponding to the performance is read from the audio file storage area 302 a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306 .

The voice file storage area 302a will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the voice file storage area 302a.
8, the audio file storage area 302a stores all audio files (audio data) that can be played by the audio output device 226, such as music data groups (music A data group 302a1 to music Z data group 302a26) made up of multiple data used to play back each song, and data used to output each sound effect (e.g., sound effect A data 302a27).

As described above, the sound files (music A data group 302a1 to music Z data group 302a26) corresponding to each song (music A to music Z) that can be played during the probability bonus state are each composed of multiple data. The composition of these music data groups 302a1 to 302a26 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of a music data group. As shown in FIG.
The music data group is composed of a plurality of pieces of data for each part (partition) of the music. More specifically, as shown in Fig. 109, for example, the data is composed of intro data corresponding to the intro (so-called intro) part of the music, A-melody 1 data corresponding to the first melody (so-called A-melody part) of the music, B-melody 1 data corresponding to the second melody (next to A-melody) of the music (so-called B-melody part), chorus 1 data corresponding to the most exciting part (so-called chorus part) of the music, interlude data corresponding to the interlude part of the music, A-melody 2 data corresponding to the second A-melody part of the music, B-melody 2 data corresponding to the second B-melody part of the music, chorus 2 data corresponding to the second chorus part of the music, and outro data corresponding to the outro part of the music. By playing (outputting) these parts of the audio data in the order determined for each music, one music is played. By configuring in this manner, the audio data can be reused when a portion of a song is used in another performance (for example, when playing the chorus of a specific song during a variable display performance). In other words, since there is no need to store audio data for one song and audio data for a portion of a song separately, the storage capacity of the audio file storage area 302a can be reduced. Also, each piece of data constituting the song data group is associated with data corresponding to the pointer value of a music pointer 303b (described later) set in RAM 303, and the playback time when each piece of data is played. In this first control example, the music pointer 3
In other words, when the playback time of the music data being played has elapsed, the value of the music pointer 303b is incremented by 1, and the music data corresponding to the updated pointer value is played. This allows the music data to be played in the same order every time.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to Fig. 107(b). Fig. 107(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in Fig. 107(b), the RAM 303 is provided with at least a music data group storage area 303a, a music pointer 303b, a maximum value storage area 303c, and a music timer 303d.

The music data group storage area 303a is a storage area for storing audio files (music data group) corresponding to the music to be played during the high probability state. During the high probability state, the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a is stored in the music pointer 303.
In this music data group storage area 303a, a command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to instruct the playback of a music piece selected by lottery at the start of the probability variable state (a lottery music piece command for voice), or a command output from the voice lamp control device 113 to instruct the playback of a music piece selected by the player (
When a voice select song command is received, a group of music data corresponding to the song designated by the command is read out from the voice file storage area 302a and stored (see FIG. 11).
(See S9205 and S9210 in Section 6.

In the first control example, when starting to play a song based on the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a, the playback position is made different depending on the circumstances of the song's decision. Specifically, when starting to play a song determined by lottery at the start of the probability change state, playback is started from the chorus part (playback of chorus 1 data is set), while when starting to play a song determined by the player's selection, playback is started from the beginning of the song (intro part) (playback of intro data is set). This is because, for a song selected by a player, it is highly likely that the player wants to listen carefully from the beginning of the song, whereas for a randomly selected song, if the player does not like it even a little, the player may immediately change the song. Therefore, for a randomly selected song, playback is started from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, so that the player can hear at least the most characteristic part of the song before deciding whether to change the song. This allows the player to understand (understand) the merits (characteristics) of the randomly selected songs to the maximum extent possible, making it easier for the player to increase the number of songs that he or she likes (making it easier for the player to find new songs that they like from among the randomly selected songs). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game in the probability variation state.

The music pointer 303b is a pointer for indicating which data is being played back from among the music data group stored in the music data group storage area 303a. When playback of the music selected by the player is instructed (the music is notified by the audio selection command), the value of this music pointer 303b is set to "00H" (S92 in FIG. 116).
06). In addition, the playback of the intro data corresponding to the pointer value "00H" is set accordingly. On the other hand, when the playback of a randomly selected song is instructed at the start of the probability change state (the song is notified by the voice lottery song command), a value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion is set (see S9211 in FIG. 116). The value of this song pointer 303b is updated by one each time the playback of one song data set in the song data group storage area 303a ends. In addition, when the value of the song pointer 303b is the maximum value set for each type of song (in this first control example, the pointer value corresponding to the part immediately before the outro portion) and the pointer value is further updated, the value is updated to "01H".

Here, when the playback is completed up to the part just before the outro part, the value of the music pointer 303b is set to "0" corresponding to the A-melody 1 part without playing the outro part and the intro part.
The reason for updating the time to "1H" is to make it difficult for the player to recognize the break in the song when the song is played repeatedly.
If the music is repeatedly played by playing it from the intro part, the player can easily recognize the break in the music. In this case, the break in the music may be distracting and it may be difficult to concentrate on playing during the probability variable state. In contrast, in this control example, when the music is repeatedly played, the outro part and the intro part of the music are skipped and the A melody 1 part is returned to, so the music can be looped with a more natural connection. Therefore, since the player is less likely to notice the break in the music, the player can concentrate more on playing during the probability variable state.

The maximum value storage area 303c is a storage area for temporarily storing the maximum value of the music pointer 303b. As described above, in the first control example, the A melody 1 portion to the portion immediately before the outro portion is repeatedly played back, but the pointer value corresponding to the portion immediately before the outro portion may differ depending on the music. Depending on the music, a C melody may be set after a B melody, multiple types of choruses may be set, or no interlude may be set, which may result in a data configuration different from that shown in FIG. 109. Therefore, when a music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a and music playback is set, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music to be played back is set in advance in the maximum value storage area 303c (see S9207 and S9212 in FIG. 116). Then, the music data group storage area 303
Each time the playback of one piece of music data set in a is completed, the value of the music pointer 303b and
By comparing with the maximum value stored in the maximum value storage area 303c, it is possible to determine whether playback up to the part just before the outro has ended (whether it is time to return the music pointer 303b to "01H"). This makes it possible to reliably skip the intro and outro parts and loop playback even if the data structure differs for each song.

The music timer 303d is a timer that measures the playback time of the music data being played back.
Each time playback of new music data is set, a timer value corresponding to the playback time of that music data is set in this music timer 303d. The playback time of each music data is specified in the music data group storage area 303a in association with the type of music data. During playback of a music piece, it is determined whether the playback time has elapsed based on the value of this music timer 303d. Although not shown in the figure, this music timer 303d:
It is updated periodically (eg, every millisecond).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 110 to FIG. 114, the voice lamp control device 1 in the first control example will be described.
110 is a flowchart showing the main process 8 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example.

In the main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in this first control example, steps S4101 to S411
In each of the processes of S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118 in the main process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, the same processes as those in S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118 in the main process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment are executed. Also, in main process 8 in the first control example (see FIG. 110),
After the effect update process of S4111 is completed, the operation (pressing) of the operation button 230 is monitored, and when an operation is detected, an operation detection process for executing a corresponding control is executed (S4141), and the process proceeds to S4142. Details of this operation detection process (S4141) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, when the process of S4141 is completed, or when it is determined in the process of S4101 that one millisecond has not elapsed since the previous process (S4101: No), instead of the command determination process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36), a command determination process 8 is executed (S4
The command determination process 8 (S4142) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Next, the above-mentioned operation detection process (S4141) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 111. Fig. 111 is a flowchart showing this operation detection process (S4141). In the operation detection process (S4141), first, it is determined whether an operation (press) on the operation button 230 has been detected (S5101). In this process of S5101, the output of the signal line connected to each button of the operation button 230 is detected, and if any output is H, the operation button 2
It is determined that an operation on 30 has been detected.

In the process of S5101, no operation on the operation button 230 is detected (i.e.,
If it is determined that the output of the signals corresponding to all the buttons is L (S5101: No),
On the other hand, if it is determined that an operation on the operation button 230 has been detected (i.e., the output of a signal corresponding to any button is H) (S5101: Yes), the process ends.
), then it is determined whether the music selection permission flag 223ad is on (S5102), and if the music selection permission flag 223ad is off (S5102: No), this means that a period in which music cannot be selected is entered, and operation of the operation button 230 is invalidated, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5102 that the music selection permission flag 223ad is on (S5102: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the menu display flag 223ae is on (S5103).
If it is determined that e is off (S5103: No), the display of the music selection menu screen is set (S5104), the menu display flag 223ae is set to on (S5105), and this process is terminated. By these processes, when the music selection menu screen is not displayed during the probability change state, the music selection menu screen can be displayed regardless of the type of button pressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the menu display flag 223ae is on (S5103: Yes), different controls are executed according to the type of button operated (pressed) by the player. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the operation detected in the process of S5101 is an operation on the center button CB (S5106), and if it is determined that the operation detected this time is an operation on the center button CB (S5106: Yes),
The audio output device 226 controls the playback of the music corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab.
A selected music command for audio is set to be notified to the user (S5107).

When the processing of S5107 is completed, the number of times the song has been selected for playback in each memory area set in the song selection count storage area 223ac is updated by adding 1 (S5108), the song selection menu screen is closed, and the menu display flag 223ae is set to off (S5109), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5106, if it is determined that the operation of the center button CB has not been detected (S5106: No), the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is updated according to the type of the button whose operation has been detected (S5110). In the process of S5110, if the pressing of the up button UB has been detected, 1 is subtracted from the value of the menu position pointer 223ab, whereas if the pressing of the down button DB has been detected, 1 is subtracted from the value of the menu position pointer 223ab.
The value of the menu position pointer 223ab is incremented by 1. If pressing of the up button UB is detected while the menu position pointer 223ab is at "00H", the pointer value is updated to the maximum value "19H". If pressing of the down button DB is detected while the menu position pointer 223ab is at the maximum value "19H", the pointer value is updated to "00H".

After the process of S5110 is completed, the display mode of the music selection menu screen is updated according to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab updated by the process of S5110 (S511
1), this process ends. In the process of S5111, the menu position pointer 223ab
An item (an image indicating the type of music) corresponding to the value of is placed in the music selection area, and items (images indicating the type of music) corresponding to the two values before and after the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab are placed above and below the music selection area, respectively.

By executing this operation detection process (see FIG. 111), the song selection menu screen can be updated, a song can be selected, and so on, according to the operation content of the operation button 230 (the type of button that was detected as being pressed), as the player wishes.

Next, the command determination process 8 (S4142) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG.
As described above, this is a process that is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment.

In this command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112), steps S4301 to S4309 and S431
In each of the processes of S4301 to S4309, S4311 to S4313, and S4315, the same processes as those of S4301 to S4309, S4311 to S4313, and S4315 in the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment are executed. In the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, if it is determined in the process of S4309 that a status command has been received (S4309: Yes), then a status command process is executed (S4351) to execute control according to the game status notified by the received status command,
This process ends. Details of this state command process (S4351) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example, if it is determined in the process of S4313 that a win-related command has been received (S4313: Yes),
2. Instead of the win-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37), a win-related process 8 is executed (S4352), and the process ends. Details of this win-related process 8 (S4352) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the above-mentioned status command process (S4351) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 113. Fig. 113 is a flow chart showing this status command process (S4351). As described above, this status command process (S4351) is a process for performing control according to the game status notified by the status command.

In this state command process (see FIG. 113), first, the data in the game state storage area 223i is updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S5201). That is, based on the information according to the game state notified by the state command, if the special symbol's high probability state and the normal symbol's time-saving state are notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "11B", if the special symbol's low probability state and the normal symbol's time-saving state are notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "01B", and if the special symbol's low probability state and the normal symbol's normal state are notified, the lower two bits of the game state storage area 223i are set to "00B". In this way, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the change is notified to the voice lamp control device 11.
3 can be easily grasped.

When the process of S5201 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the state command indicates a transition to a probability variable state (probability variable state of special symbols and time-saving state of normal symbols) (S5202). If it is determined that the state command is not a transition to a probability variable state (S5202: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that a state command indicating a transition to a probability variable state has been received in the process of S5202 (S5202: Yes), then up to three pieces of data are read out in descending order of the number of times of playback from the music selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105(b)) (S5203). Note that if the number of songs selected by the player after power-on is less than three, only the selected songs (i.e., data less than three) are read out. Also, if no songs have been selected after power-on (i.e., the number of times of selection corresponding to all music types in the music selection count storage area 223ac is 0), no data is read out in the process of S5203.

When the process of S5203 is completed, the maximum three pieces of data read out in the process of S5203 are then stored in the history area (menu position pointer 22
The data is stored in the memory area corresponding to the values of 17H to 19H of 3ab (S5204), and the items (music pieces) to be placed in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen are determined by lottery (S52
05). In the process of S5204, if the number of data read out by the process of S5203 is less than three, data cannot be stored in all (three) storage areas of the history area, so one or more storage areas of the history area become free areas.
When the process of S5205 is completed, it is then determined whether the item determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is an item (song) that has already been stored in the history area (S5206). If the item is already stored in the history area (S5206: Yes), the process returns to the process of S5205 and the lottery is repeated to prevent the same item (song) from being placed in both the music selection area and the history area.

On the other hand, in the process of S5206, if it is determined that the item (music) determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is not an item that has been stored in the history area (S5206: No),
A lottery song command for voice is set to notify the reproduction of a song corresponding to the item determined by the lottery by the process of 205 (S5207). The lottery song command for voice set here is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output process (S4102) of the main process 8 (see FIG. 110). When the audio output device 226 receives the lottery song command for voice, it sets the song specified by the command to be reproduced from the chorus 1 part. Here, the reason why the song selected by random lottery is reproduced from the chorus 1 part is because there is a possibility that the player will immediately change the song if he does not like it even a little. Therefore, by starting the reproduction of the randomly selected song from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, the player can hear at least the most characteristic part of the song and then decide whether to change the song. This makes it possible to convey the goodness of the randomly selected song to the player to the maximum extent, making it easier to increase the number of songs that the player likes (making it easier to find a new favorite song from among the randomly selected songs). Therefore, the interest in playing the game in the probability bonus state can be increased.

When the process of S5207 is completed, the item determined by the lottery in the process of S5205 is set to the value of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item layout storage area 223aa, i.e., “00
The item (music) identified in the process of S5209 is stored in a storage area corresponding to "H" (S5208), and the order of the item to be arranged after the previously stored item is specified by referring to the arrangement order (i.e., alphabetical order of music) defined in the item order storage area 222aa (S5209). Then, the item (music) identified in the process of S5209 is pointed to the menu position pointer 2 in the item arrangement storage area 223aa.
The menu position pointer 223a in the item layout storage area 223aa is used to determine whether the item is data (item) stored in a storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223a in the item layout storage area 223aa (S5210).
If it is determined that an item other than the item stored in the memory area corresponding to the value of b "00H" has been identified (S5210: No), it is determined whether an item already stored in the history area has been identified (S5211).

In the process of S5211, if it is determined that data that is not stored in the history area is identified in the process of S5209 (S5211: No), the item identified in the process of S5209 is
In contrast, in the case where it is determined in the process of S5211 that the item specified in the process of S5209 is already stored in the history area (S5211: Yes), the specified item is stored in the item arrangement storage area 223a.
a (the process of S5212 is skipped), and the process returns to S5209. The transition is to identify the items in the order defined in the item order storage area 222aa in S5210 until the item stored in the storage area corresponding to "00H" is identified.
The process of step S5212 and the process of storing the identified item in the item arrangement storage area 223aa are repeated.

In addition, in the process of S5210, if it is determined that the item specified in the process of S5209 is an item stored in a storage area corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item layout storage area 223aa (S5210: Yes), the menu position pointer 223ab is stored in a storage area corresponding to the value "00H" to "19H" of the menu position pointer 223ab in the item layout storage area 223aa.
This means that the items have been stored in the storage areas corresponding to all of "00H" and that the loop of the processes from S5209 to S5212 has been completed, and the process proceeds to S5213. In the process of S5213, the music selection permission flag 223ad is set to ON (S52
13), this process is terminated. By repeating the processes of S5209 to S5212, S5
Regardless of the number of data items stored in the history area in the process of S204, S5204 and S
The data can be reliably stored without duplication in all storage areas other than the area in which the data is stored by the process in 5205 .

By executing this state command process (see FIG. 113), the initial arrangement of the composition of the music selection menu screen can be set. Also, up to three items (music) selected by the player the most in descending order can be arranged in the history area of the music selection menu screen. That is, the items selected by the player the most in previous games (items that the player is likely to select) can be arranged in the arrangement of the top three of the music selection area. Therefore, in each probability change state, the player can select the items that he has repeatedly selected in the past (i.e., the items that the player is likely to select in the current probability change state) with little effort, so that the player can be made to feel less bothered when selecting a song (item).

Furthermore, each time the probability bonus state is entered, the song that is played first can be determined by random drawing. This allows a randomly selected song to be played at least immediately after the transition to the probability bonus state, giving the player an opportunity to listen to songs other than the songs that are selected more frequently. This allows multiple songs set in the pachinko machine 10 to be played without waste. Furthermore, while listening to a randomly selected song, the player may come to like that song and want it to be played in the probability bonus state from the next time onwards. Therefore,
Since the number of songs that the player likes can be increased, the interest of the game in the probability variable state can be improved. Also, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the game from becoming monotonous due to the player continuing to select the same song.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned winning-related process 8 (S4352) will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this winning-related process 8 (S4352). Of the winning-related process 8 (S4352) in this first control example, S4401 to S
In each process of 4410, the same process as the win-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37) is executed.

In the winning-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example, when the process of S4406 ends, the music selection permission flag 223ad and the menu display flag 223ae are both reset to OFF (S4451), and the value of the menu position pointer 223ab is set to "00H
" (S4452), and this process ends. By executing the processes of S4451 and S4452, the flags and pointers related to the music selection menu screen can be reset every time an opening command is received (i.e., every time a jackpot is won).

In the first control example, the flag and pointer related to the music selection menu screen are reset every time a big win is won, but this is not limited to this. For example, the reset process may be executed only when a big win is won in the high probability state. Also, the reset process may be executed at the start of the high probability state.

<Regarding control process of audio output device in first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to Figs. 115 to 117.
The main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to Fig. 115. Fig. 115(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main processing.

When the main process of the audio output device 226 is executed, first, the audio and lamp control device 11
3, executes a command determination process to perform processing according to the command received from the
Details of this command determination process (S9001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 116. After the process of S9001, an audio setting process for setting the playback of audio data and data switching is executed (S9002). Details of this audio setting process (S9002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

When the process of S9002 ends, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power cut is stored in the work RAM 303 (S9003). If information on the occurrence of a power cut is stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: Yes), both the power cut flag and the power cut processing in progress flag are turned on (S9005), and the power cut processing is executed (S9006). After the power cut processing is executed, the power cut processing in progress flag is turned off (S9007), and the process then loops infinitely.

On the other hand, if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the process of S9003 (S9003: N
o), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is corrupted based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S9004). If the RAM 303 is not corrupted (S9004: NO),
o), the process returns to S9001, and the main process is executed repeatedly.
If the file is destroyed (S9004: Yes), the process is put into an infinite loop to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Next, with reference to Fig. 115(b), a description will be given of command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. Fig. 115(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing.

This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 115 (b)) is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 in sequence (S9101
The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by a command determination process (to be described later), and a process according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to Fig. 116, the command determination process (S9001) which is one process in the main process (see Fig. 115(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. In this command determination process (S9001), control is executed according to the type of various commands received from the audio lamp control device 113. Fig. 116 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (S9001).

In the command determination process (see FIG. 116), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S9201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S9
On the other hand, if there is a new command that has not been processed (S9201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that a new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S9202), and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S9203).
03).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a voice selection command for notifying the player of the song selected by operating the operation button 230 among the unprocessed commands (S
If it is determined that there is a voice selection command (S9204: Yes),
The audio file (music data group) corresponding to the music notified by the command is stored in the ROM.
The music data group is read from the audio file storage area 302a of the music file storage area 302, and the read music data group is stored in the music data group storage area 303a (S9205).
The value of the operation button 230 is set to "00H" in the timer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the intro data is set in the music timer 303d (S9206).
The music piece selected by operating the can be played from the beginning, allowing the player to listen to the music piece selected by the player at his/her leisure (the music piece in its entirety from the beginning).

When the process of S9206 is completed, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group currently stored in the music data group storage area 303a is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9207), and playback of the intro data is set (S9208).
This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9204, if it is determined that the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include a voice selection song command (S9204: No),
Next, it is determined whether or not the commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 include a voice selection song command for notifying a song randomly selected based on the fact that the probability variable state has been reached (S9209). In the process of S9209, if it is determined that there is a voice selection song command (S9209: Yes), a voice file (song data group) corresponding to the song indicated by the received voice selection song command is read from the voice file storage area 302a, and the read song data group is stored in the song data group storage area 303a (S9210).

When the process of S9210 is completed, next, a pointer value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion is set for the value of music pointer 303b, and a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the chorus 1 data is set in music timer 303d (S9211). Then, the maximum value of music pointer 303b corresponding to the music data group currently stored in music data group storage area 303a is stored in maximum value storage area 303c (S9212), playback of the chorus 1 data is set (S9213), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9209 that the audio selection music command has not been received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9209: No), a process corresponding to the other command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed (S9214), and the process returns to S9201. In the process of S9214, if the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is, for example, a command to instruct the playback of a sound effect, the playback of the type of sound effect specified by the command is set. Also, if the command is a command to instruct the playback of a warning sound, the playback of the type of warning sound specified by the command is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 117, the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 executes the main process (
The audio setting process (S9002) executed in the voice setting process (see FIG. 115(a)) will be described in detail below. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this audio setting process (S9002).

In this sound setting process (see FIG. 117), first, it is determined whether or not a song in the high probability state is being played (S9301). If it is determined that a song in the high probability state is not being played (S9302),
301: No), this means that a single sound effect, warning sound, etc. is being played back or no sound is being output. Since there is no possibility of switching to other sound data during sound playback, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S9301, if it is determined that a song in a probability variable state is being played (S9301: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the song data being played (S9302). That is, it is determined whether the value of the song timer 303d has reached 0, and if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the playback of the song data (i.e., the value of the song timer 303d has not reached 0) (S9302: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9302 that the timing for ending the music data being played has come (i.e., the value of the music timer 303d has reached 0) (S9302
: Yes), and executes processing for setting the playback of the next music data of the music data group storage area 303a after the currently played music data has been completed. Specifically, first, the data stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (the maximum value corresponding to the currently played music data group) is compared with the current value of the music pointer 303b (S9303), and the value of the music pointer 303b is compared with the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (maximum value storage area 303c
It is then determined whether or not the data matches the data stored in the file ".c" (S9304).

If it is determined in the processing of S9304 that the value of the music pointer 303b does not match the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: No), the value of the music pointer 303b is updated by adding 1 (S9305), and the processing proceeds to S9307.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9304 that the value of music pointer 303b matches the maximum value corresponding to the current music data group (S9304: Yes), the value of music pointer 303b is updated to "01H" (S9306), and the process proceeds to S9307. By updating the value of music pointer 303b to "01H" by the process of S9306, it is possible to return to the verse 1 part of the set music and perform loop playback. In other words, it is possible to perform loop playback by skipping the intro and outro parts.

Here, if a song is played in a loop, for example by playing the song up to the outro and then starting again from the intro, the player can easily notice the break in the song.
There is a possibility that the player will find it difficult to concentrate on playing during the probability bonus state. In contrast, in this first control example, when the song is played repeatedly, the outro and intro parts of the song are skipped and the song returns to the A-melody 1 part, so the song can be looped with a more natural connection. Therefore, the player will find it difficult to notice the break in the song,
This allows the player to concentrate more on playing during the probability bonus state.

In the process of S9307, which is executed after the process of S9305 or S9306 is completed, one piece of music data corresponding to the updated value of the music pointer 303b is read from the music data group storage area 303a (S9307), playback of the read music data is set (S9308), and this process is terminated.

By executing this audio setting process (see FIG. 117), during the special probability state, the intro and outro parts of the set song can be skipped and looped.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, during a predetermined period during normal play (for example, during a period during which a probability bonus state is set), the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a music selection menu screen whose display mode (items displayed in a lit-up appearance in the music selection area) is variable in conjunction with the player's operation of the operation button 230.
When the player presses the center button 230 while the music selection menu screen is displayed, music (audio effects) corresponding to the display mode of the music selection menu screen (items displayed in the music selection area) are played (executed). After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the composition of the music selection menu screen that is displayed first is changed based on the types of music (audio effects) selected by the player up to now (at least the last time).

More specifically, when the game transitions to the probability bonus state, first, one song (one type of audio performance) is selected at random from among a number of songs (songs A to Z) and determined as the item to be placed in the song selection area, and playback of the selected song is started. Also, during the probability bonus state, the player is allowed to select a song (any performance) of his/her choice by operating the operation button 230. By randomly selecting and playing one song when transitioning to the probability bonus state, the game can be played back without waiting for a song to be selected by the player (
Since the music can be played even during the period when the game is in a high probability state (when the music is not selected), the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction for entering the high probability state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, as the initial arrangement of the screen (music selection menu screen) for selecting music by operating the operation button 230, music that is considered to be likely to be selected by the player (music that has been selected by the player many times in previous games) is arranged in a position that can be selected with a small number of operations (three or less operations) on the operation button 230, regardless of the type of music randomly selected at the start of the high probability state. Here, if the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is determined by arranging the randomly selected items (music) in the music selection area and arranging the other items simply in alphabetical order (predetermined order) based on the items arranged in the music selection area, it may be difficult for the player to select a favorite music. That is, when the item (music) that the player wants to select and the item (music) that is randomly selected are separated in order, the number of operations on the operation button 230 to shift the item to be selected (the image showing the type of music to be selected) to the music selection area increases, and the player may feel annoyed. In addition, as a method to make it difficult to feel annoyed, a method of setting the item that is first placed in the music selection area when the probability variable state is reached as an item that is frequently selected by the player is also considered. However, with this method, the player is likely to be satisfied with the music that is first played (output) in the probability variable state in the first place, and not to think of changing the music (not to display the music selection menu screen). The fewer the opportunities for the player to display the music selection menu, the fewer the opportunities for the player to know the type of music set in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player is less likely to think of selecting another music. Therefore, even if a large number of music is set to be selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them may not be selected and may be wasted. Therefore, the player is less likely to consider selecting other songs, so even if a large number of songs are set as selectable for the pachinko machine 10, most of them may go unselected and be wasted.

In contrast, in this first control example, the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen is set so that the player can easily select an item that is likely to be selected (an item that has been selected frequently in past games). More specifically, the three items (music) that the player has selected frequently (the number of times selected) in past games are arranged in a position (the upper three display areas of the music selection area) that can be selected with a small number of operations (the number of times the operation button 230 is pressed). By configuring in this way, even if the item (image showing the type of music) that is initially arranged in the music selection area of the music selection menu screen becomes an item corresponding to any music, the item that the player has selected frequently can be arranged in a position that can be selected with a small number of operations (the number of times the up button UB is pressed three times or less). Therefore, in each probability change state, the item that the player has repeatedly selected so far (i.e., the item that the player is likely to select in the current probability change state) can be selected with little effort, so that the player is less likely to feel bothered when selecting a music (item).

In the first control example, the music (audio performance) is played back in accordance with the circumstances under which the music (audio performance) was set.
The playback position (execution start position) of the audio performance can be changed. More specifically,
For the music selected by the player by operating the operation button 230, playback is started from the beginning of the music (i.e., the intro part) (from the second start position), whereas for the music determined (selected) by random lottery at the start of the probability change state, playback is started from the chorus 1 part of the music (from the second start position). This allows the player to listen to the music selected by his own will in its complete form from the beginning of the music. On the other hand, the reason why the music selected by random lottery is played from the chorus 1 part is because there is a possibility that the player will immediately change the music if he does not like it even a little. Therefore, for the randomly selected music, playback is started from the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, so that the player can hear at least the most characteristic part of the music and then decide whether to change the music. This allows the goodness of the randomly selected music to be conveyed to the player to the maximum extent, making it easier to increase the number of music that the player likes (making it easier to find new music that the player likes from among the randomly selected music). Therefore, the interest in playing the game in the probability bonus state can be increased.

In addition, in this first control example, the number of items displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (a number less than the total number of items), and the items displayed on the music selection menu screen can be changed by operating the operation button 230, so that all items can be selected in conjunction with the player's operation. Here, as a method for making it easier for the player to select a favorite song on the music selection menu screen, a method is also considered in which all items are displayed collectively on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (the items are arranged in a matrix), so that it is possible to understand at a glance which song (item) is arranged in which position. However, with this method, the display area (area of the music selection menu screen) for displaying each item becomes wide, and there is a possibility that the display area for displaying other display contents (third pattern, reserved ball number pattern, etc.) becomes too narrow. In contrast, in this first control example, the number of items displayed on the music selection menu screen is limited to five (a number less than the total number of items). By configuring in this way, the display area of the music selection menu screen can be made smaller than when all items are displayed collectively. Therefore, the display contents other than the music selection menu screen, such as the third pattern and the reserved ball count pattern, can be displayed in a larger display area.

In the first control example, the music determined by random lottery at the start of the probability change state is set to be played from the chorus 1 part, while the music selected by operating the operation button 230 during the probability change state is set to be played from the intro part, but this is not limited to this. Conversely, the music determined by random lottery is set to be played from the intro part, while the music selected voluntarily by the player operating the operation button 230 may be played from the chorus 1 part. Since most players who voluntarily select a song want to hear the chorus part of the selected song the most, the player's request can be immediately fulfilled by playing the voluntarily selected song from the chorus part. In addition, by playing the music determined to be played by random lottery at the start (transition) of the probability change state from the intro part, the player can be allowed to select a song calmly. In detail, the intro part of a song is generally a relatively calm melody, while the chorus part of a song is generally a relatively intense melody. Therefore, by setting the playback from the intro section, it is possible to set it so that a relatively calm melody plays first. Therefore, while the relatively calm melody is playing, the player can select a song in a calm mood. Also, it is not necessarily necessary to change the playback position depending on the circumstances under which playback was set. For example,
Regardless of the circumstances, playback may start from the chorus 1 (i.e., from the most exciting part of the song), or from the intro. By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the control of changing the playback position by determining the circumstances, thereby reducing the processing load.

In the first control example, the history area is arranged above the music selection area on the music selection menu screen, but this is not limited to this and may be arranged in any manner. For example, the history area may be arranged below the music selection area. That is, three items (music pieces) that have been frequently selected by the player in past games may be arranged below the music selection area.

In the first control example, the history area is configured to have an area in which items selected by the player many times (high frequency) are arranged, but the configuration of the history area is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the configuration of the first control example, the second history area may be configured to have an area in which items that the player is unlikely to select based on the player's past tendencies are arranged, in a range where the player finds it difficult to select (the number of operations on the operation button 230 for selecting a song is relatively large). More specifically, for example, when a randomly selected song is being played and the song is changed to another song before a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, within 5 seconds), the song may be arranged in a range where the player finds it relatively difficult to select (for example, a range where the player cannot select the song unless at least 10 operations are performed) as an item that the player is unlikely to select next time onwards. The fact that the music has been changed within a predetermined period means that the player has changed the music in a hurry because a music that the player does not want to hear was played, and therefore the possibility that the player does not want to listen to the music from the next time onwards (the possibility that the music will be changed immediately when it is played) increases. In other words, the music may cause the player to feel uncomfortable when it is played. Therefore, by placing the music that was changed at a relatively early stage (within a predetermined period) during playback in the second history area, it is possible to eliminate the possibility of it being selected at the time of random lottery in the next and subsequent probability variation states, and it is possible to place other items (items that are more likely to be selected by the player compared to the items placed in the second history area) in positions that are relatively easy to select (items that can be selected with a relatively small number of operations). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the music played at the start of the probability variation state will cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In this first control example, the number of times each song is selected after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is counted for each song, and the three items (songs) most frequently selected are arranged in the history area, but the method of estimating the songs that a player is likely to select is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to configure an external server owned by the manufacturer that developed the pachinko machine 10 so that the song selection tendencies of each player can be accumulated. More specifically, a UR for connecting to the external server may be set in the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10.
The information of L is configured to be displayable in a format (e.g., two-dimensional barcode format) that can be read by a mobile terminal. The URL information is read by a mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal accesses the external server, and the player's personal data (such as the number of times the jackpot has been won on the pachinko machine 10 and the number of times a special symbol has been drawn) can be confirmed by inputting an ID and password that have been registered in advance or will be newly registered this time. The history and number of times the selected song has been played are also set among these items. When a user starts playing on the pachinko machine 10 after logging in to the server, the selection history stored in the server may be reflected in the pachinko machine 10, and the items to be stored in the selection area may be determined based on the selection history. As a method for reflecting the server data in the pachinko machine 10, for example, the data set in the server may be password protected (encoded) and displayed on the player's mobile terminal,
One method is to have the operator of the mobile terminal input the password to the pachinko machine 10. That is, the pachinko machine 10 predefines the correspondence between the password and the history,
When a password is entered, the history corresponding to the password (the number of selections for each song)
may be set in the song selection count storage area 223ac. By configuring in this way, a song selection menu screen that matches the tendencies of each player can be displayed, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be provided in which the player can more easily select his/her favorite song.

In the first control example, the initial arrangement of the items on the music selection menu screen is variable according to the type and number of times of music selected by the player (player's selection history), but this is not limited to this. When executing a player-participation type performance, such as a performance that encourages operation of a specific operation button, the initial mode of the performance may be variable according to the player's participation status. For example, for a player who tends to participate actively, a performance mode that encourages a greater number of operations may be easily selected, while for a player who does not participate in the performance frequently, a performance mode that encourages a relatively small number of operations may be easily selected. Also, for a player who does not participate in the performance frequently, for example, a performance in a mode with a high expectation that a result advantageous to the player will be notified by pressing may be easily executed. By configuring in this way, a player who does not participate frequently is more likely to want to participate in the pressing performance, so that an appropriate mode can be set according to the player's tendency. In this case, instead of determining the performance mode according to the player's participation status (history), the performance mode such as the number of operations may be randomly determined by lottery. Such a configuration makes it possible to simplify control since it is not necessary to store the participation status of players.

In the first control example, when a player selects one song from the song selection menu screen, the song is played from the beginning regardless of the situation, but this is not limited to this. For example, if the remaining time until the probability change state ends is short (for example, if the jackpot starts when the variable display in progress ends), the song may be played from the chorus.

In the first control example, the music randomly selected at the start of the probability change state is played from the chorus, whereas the music selected by the player from the music selection menu screen is played from the beginning, but the control of varying the music playback position (the type of music data used first) according to the circumstances under which the music playback was decided is not limited to this. For example, when the music to be played during a jackpot is set to play based on the start of the first round of the jackpot, the music may be played from the beginning (intro part) of the music, whereas when the music is set to play based on the start of the ending period of the jackpot, the music may be played from the outro part.

In the first control example, the playback position of the music (start position of the audio performance) is changed depending on the circumstances in which the type of music (audio performance) was determined (whether it was selected by random drawing or voluntarily selected by the player), but this control is not limited to audio performance. For example, this control may be applied to the display performance executed in the third pattern display device 81. The circumstances in which the type of performance was determined are also not limited to those exemplified in the first control example (whether it was selected by random drawing or voluntarily selected by the player). For example, when a specific performance is determined to be executed in a situation in which a variable display corresponding to a miss is being executed, the specific performance may be executed from the beginning, while when a specific performance is determined to be executed in a situation in which a variable display corresponding to a big win is being executed, the specific performance may be executed from the middle of the execution. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play the game while paying more attention to the content of the performance.

In the first control example, the initial position of the music selection menu screen is changed according to the history of the player's selection of music (the number of times each music is selected), and the more likely the item is to be selected by the player, the more likely it is to be placed in a position where it can be selected with fewer operations, but this control is not limited to the case of selecting music. For example, a game menu screen consisting of items corresponding to the volume of the sound output from the sound output device 226, items corresponding to the brightness of the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81, items corresponding to the game history, etc., is configured to be displayable by operating the operation button 230. Then, according to the history of the items selected by the player in the past, the more likely the item is to be selected by the player, the more likely it is to be placed in a position where it can be selected with fewer operations.

In the first control example, the music selection menu screen is not displayed unless the operation button 230 is operated after the probability change state is entered, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the music selection menu screen may be displayed at all times during the probability change state. By configuring in this way, the effort of the player who wants to select a song can be reduced, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, the item displayed first in the music selection area is selected by random drawing, but this is not limited to this. For example, the item displayed first in the music selection area on the music selection menu screen may be the item last selected by the player in the probability change state set before the current probability change state.

In the first control example, a maximum of three items selected by the player in the previous game are arranged in a position in the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen where the player can select the items (shift them to the music selection area) with a relatively small number of operations, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the player can easily understand where the music that the player is likely to select (the music that has been selected many times) is arranged on the music selection menu screen, the initial arrangement on the music selection menu screen may be arranged somewhere in the music area MR. By configuring in this way, for example, even if the number of items displayed in the music area MR is increased to more than five, the items that the player is likely to select can be displayed from the beginning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to select an item, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

In the first control example, the display mode is different between the items displayed in the music selection area and the items displayed in the other display areas, but in addition to this, the display mode may be changed depending on whether or not the music is likely to be selected by the player (the item arranged in the history area in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen). By configuring in this way, the player can more easily find the items that the player is likely to select, thereby improving the convenience for the player.

In the first control example, when a song determined by random lottery is played at the start of the probability change state, the playback is started from the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the song, but this is not limited to this, and any playback position that is likely to attract the player's attention (the player is likely to want to listen to the randomly selected song) may be used. For example, for a song that is partially used in another performance (for example, a variable display performance, etc.) (for example, a song that starts playing from the A-melody part as background music for the performance at the start of the Super Reach Reach performance), the playback of the song may be started from the same playback start position as the playback start position set in the performance. By configuring in this way, playback can be started from the playback position that was also played during normal play (i.e., a playback position that is relatively familiar to the player). Therefore, by playing from a melody that can be played during normal play (a melody that is likely to have been heard by the player already), the player's attention can be attracted, and the player can listen to the song more carefully.

In this first control example, the song selection menu screen was configured to be displayed in the probability variable state,
However, this is not limited to this. For example, the music selection menu screen may be configured to be displayed during a big win, or may be displayed during a time-saving state. In addition, for example, a specific presentation mode (for example, a super reach presentation) may be displayed as a presentation mode during the execution of the variable display.
When the selected mode is selected, a music selection menu screen may be displayed during the execution of the specific presentation mode, allowing the player to freely select the music to be played during the execution of the variable display.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 118 to Fig. 139. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is configured to start playing a randomly selected piece of music (audio performance) at the start of the probability variable state, and to start playing a randomly selected piece of music (audio performance) by pressing the operation button 23.
By operating the switch 0, the music can be changed to any music (audio effect). In addition, for randomly selected music, playback starts from the chorus part (the most exciting part of the music), whereas for music selected voluntarily by the player, playback starts from the beginning (the intro part) of the music.

In contrast, in the second control example, the player can select the music (type of sound effects) during the jackpot. The order of music data to be played is dynamically rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot so that the chorus part is played as much as possible until the end of the final round. That is, at a predetermined timing during the execution of the jackpot (for example, at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round or at the start of the final round), the type of music data currently set to be played (A melody 1, B melody 1, chorus 1, etc.) is determined, and if a part far from the chorus part is being played, the order of the music data constituting the music data group is rearranged so that the part to be played next is a part close to the chorus part. This makes it possible to more reliably make the player hear the chorus part, which is the most exciting (most characteristic) part of the music, by the end of the jackpot.

In addition, in the second control example, if the chorus part (a specific range) is being played at the end of the final round of the jackpot, the start timing of the ending performance is delayed to continue playing the chorus part for a longer period of time. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the most exciting (most distinctive) chorus part of the song from being forcibly ended by the end of the jackpot. This makes the chorus part more enjoyable for the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game during the jackpot.

The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in that the configuration of the sound output device 226 has been partially changed, that the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, that the configuration of the RAM 303 in the sound output device 226 has been partially changed, that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 301 in the sound output device 226 has been partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113,
Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 and other processes executed by the audio output device 226 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the configuration of the big win of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 118. As shown in Fig. 118, when the opening period of the big win starts,
A song dedicated to the opening period (opening song) is played. When the opening period ends and the first round starts, a period during which a song can be selected (song selection period) is set. During this song selection period, the third symbol display device 81
A music region MR (see FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b)) is formed to the left of the music region MR. The display contents for this music region MR are the same as those in the first control example described above, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the second control example, the player may select a song from the song selection menu screen (FIG. 101(b)
) and selects a song, playback does not start immediately (playback is delayed), and playback of the song is set at the timing when the first round ends. Also, during the first round in which the song selection period is set, a song dedicated to the song selection period (song for selection) is played. By configuring in this way, the timing of starting playback of the song can be made the same whether the player selects a song immediately or just before the end of the first round during the round period of one round, so that the player can take his time to select a favorite song during the song selection period. The initial arrangement of the items on the song selection menu screen is set by the same control as the first control example described above. That is, songs (items) selected by random lottery are arranged in the song selection area, and songs (items) that have been selected by players many times in previous games are arranged in the upper three display areas of the song selection area.

As shown in FIG. 118, when one round ends and the interval period begins, playback of the song selected by the player begins (if the player does not select a song on the song selection menu screen, the song placed in the song selection area by lottery at the start of the jackpot). Playback of this song continues at least until the end of the final round of the jackpot. Then, when the final round ends and the ending period begins, the ending performance basically begins and a song for the ending performance is played. As mentioned above, if the chorus part is being played at the end of the final round, the start timing of the ending performance is delayed to continue playing the chorus part of the song for a longer period. This allows the player to listen to the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, for a longer period,
This can increase interest in the game during a big win.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 118, in the jackpot in this second control example, there are two rearrangement determination timings (at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round of the jackpot, and at the start of the final round of the jackpot) set for determining whether to rearrange the playback order of the music data group. At these rearrangement determination timings, a determination is made as to whether the music data to be played next should be rearranged (changed from the normal playback order) based on the playback position of the music (the type of music data currently being played). In this determination, if it is determined that the music should be rearranged, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the number of parts (the number of music data to be played) until the next chorus is played is reduced (so that the chorus part is set to be played after the music data group currently set to be played). This allows
Since the time until the next chorus is played can be shortened, the chorus part can be played more reliably before the end of the big win. In addition, whether or not the type of music data is determined to be a type that requires rearrangement of the playback order of music is determined by the rearrangement determination table 222 described later.
bb (see FIG. 123) in advance.

Next, a specific example of rearrangement of the playback order of songs will be described with reference to Fig. 119 and Fig. 120. Fig. 119 shows an example of the correspondence relationship between the transition of the jackpot state and the transition of the song parts when rearrangement determination timing 1 (the start of the interval period immediately before the final round) occurs during the playback of song A and it is determined that the playback order should be rearranged.

As shown in Fig. 119, during one round of the jackpot, a selection song dedicated to the selection period is played as the song. If the player selects song A during this time, playback will begin from the beginning of song A (i.e., from the intro of song A) as soon as one round of the jackpot is over. From this point on, the part from the A-melody 1 to the part just before the outro will be looped in the order of the group of song data corresponding to song A (the order of the values of the song pointer 303b associated with each data).

When rearrangement determination timing 1 occurs while loop playback is continuing, it is determined whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music data. FIG. 119 illustrates a case where A-melody 1 is being played back at rearrangement determination timing 1.
As shown in the figure, if A-melody 1 is being played at rearrangement determination timing 1, there is a high possibility that the final round will end while B-melody 1 is being played by the time the final round of the jackpot ends. In other words, there is a high possibility that playback of song A will end before reaching chorus 1, which is the part that the player is most likely to want to hear. Therefore, in this case, when rearrangement determination timing 1 arrives, the playback order of the song data group is rearranged to set the playback order so that chorus 1 is more likely to be played by the time the final round ends.

More specifically, as shown in the lower part of Fig. 119 (progression of music after rearrangement), when playback of the A-melody 1 part that was being played at the time the rearrangement was decided is completed, control is performed so that the B-melody 1 part, which is in the original order (progression before rearrangement shown in the middle part of Fig. 119), is skipped and the chorus 1 part is played. More specifically, the pointer value of the music pointer 303b is set to
The value is updated to a value corresponding to the chorus 1 portion of the musical piece A (data for chorus 1), and playback of the data for chorus 1 is set. This allows the player to hear the chorus 1 portion, which is the most exciting portion of the musical piece, in the final round, thereby lifting the player's spirits and giving him or her a greater sense of satisfaction regarding the big win.

After rearranging the playback order and setting the playback of chorus 1, playback continues in the order of the value of the music pointer 303b. That is, as shown in the lower part of Fig. 119, if the end timing of the jackpot does not come during the playback of chorus 1, the interlude part (interlude data) is played as usual.

Next, a specific example of a case where it is determined that the playback order of songs is to be rearranged at rearrangement determination timing 2 (i.e., the start timing of the final round of the big win) will be described with reference to Fig. 120. The example of Fig. 120 illustrates a case where the B-melody 1 part is being played when rearrangement determination timing 1 occurs, and the playback of the B-melody 1 part ends and the playback of the chorus 1 part starts before rearrangement determination timing 2 is reached.

In the example of Figure 120, at rearrangement determination timing 1, B-melody 1 is being played and chorus 1 is to be played next, so there is a high possibility that chorus 1 will be played during the final round even if the playback order is not rearranged. Therefore, rearrangement of the playback order is avoided at rearrangement determination timing 1. Also, in the example of Figure 120, chorus 1 is being played at rearrangement determination timing 2. In this case, as shown in the middle of Figure 120, if playback continues without rearranging the playback order, chorus 1 will be played in the middle of the final round.
When the playback of the chorus 1 part is completed, the interlude part, which is the next part of the chorus 1 part, is played for a relatively long period of time. Since the interlude part has a relatively gentle melody, the long playback of the interlude part in the final round may spoil the player's interest in the big win game. Therefore, if the chorus 1 part is already being played at the rearrangement determination timing 2, the playback order of the music is rearranged so that the chorus 2 part (the chorus following the chorus 1 part) is played after the chorus 1 part is played, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 120. By configuring in this way, the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the music, can be played for a longer period of time in the final round of the big win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game in the final round of the big win can be improved.

In this way, in the second control example, at a predetermined timing in the jackpot (at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round and at the start of the final round), a determination is made as to whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music depending on the progress of the music (the current playback position in the music). In addition, in the final round of the jackpot, if there is a possibility that the chorus part is not played at all or the playback time is shortened, the playback order of the music data is rearranged (at least the music data to be played next is changed from the predetermined order (the order of the value of the music pointer 303b)) so that the chorus part is played longer during the final round. In other words, based on the progress of the jackpot and the playback position of the music, the playback order of the music data is dynamically changed so that the chorus part is played longer during the predetermined period of the jackpot (the final round). By configuring in this way, the player can listen to the most exciting chorus part of the music for a longer period in the final round of the jackpot. This allows the player to feel a greater sense of elation just before the end of the big win, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play the game.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds (for example, jackpot B with five rounds), there is a possibility that all rounds will end without reaching the chorus part. In particular, if the jackpot ends without the player being able to hear the chorus part (chorus 1 part, chorus 2 part, etc.) even during the playback of a song that the player voluntarily selected by displaying the song selection menu screen, the player may be greatly disappointed. This is because when the player voluntarily selects a song, there is a high possibility that the player is looking forward to hearing the chorus part of the selected song. In contrast, in the second control example, the chorus part can be more reliably played at least once before the final round of the jackpot ends. Therefore, the player who selected the song can be satisfied.

Here, as a method for playing the chorus part in the final round of the jackpot,
It is also possible to set the playback of music data corresponding to the chorus at the start of the final round, regardless of the progress of the music. However, this method may cause the connection of the music to become unnatural around the start of the final round (i.e., around the time when playback switches to the chorus). In other words, there is a high possibility that playback of the chorus will suddenly begin in the middle of another part. Therefore, this method may cause the player to feel uneasy about the music being played, leading to suspicion of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, it may cause doubt as to whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, leading to anxiety about playing the game. In contrast, in this second control example, the music data is played on a part-by-part basis (melody (
Since the playback order of the music data is rearranged (varied) at intervals of a musical tune, when the playback order is rearranged, the music can be played in a sound style that is less awkward. This allows the player to play the jackpot with peace of mind.

In the second control example, the determination as to whether or not to rearrange the playback order of music data is performed at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round in the big win and at the start of the final round, but this is not limited to this. The number of times and timing of the determination as to whether or not to rearrange the playback order can be determined arbitrarily.

In addition, in this second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus part is played for a longer period during the final round, but this is not limited to this, and the round in which the chorus part is played can be set as desired.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a description will be given of the correspondence between the transition of the big win state and the transition of the parts of the music when the start timing of the ending performance is delayed.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example in which the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the playback of the chorus 2 part is in the middle of being completed at the end of the final round.

The top row of FIG. 121 shows the transition of the state at the time of the big win, the second row from the top shows the transition of the music if it is assumed that the start of the ending performance is not delayed, and the second row from the bottom shows the transition of the music if the start of the ending performance is not delayed.
The first row shows the progression of the music when the start timing of the ending performance is delayed in order to play the chorus part for a longer period, and the bottom row shows the progression of the performance mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during a jackpot.

As shown in the second diagram from the top in FIG. 121, if the delay control of the ending performance is not performed, the playback of the music will be stopped during playback of the chorus 2 portion, and the ending music will be played. In this case, the player may feel as if a different melody suddenly starts after listening to the most exciting part, which may dissatisfy the player. Therefore, in this second control example, if the chorus portion (chorus 1 portion, chorus 2 portion, etc.) is being played at the end of the final round of the jackpot, the timing of playing the ending music is delayed as shown in the second diagram from the bottom in FIG. 121, so that the chorus portion continues to be played for a longer period of time. Accordingly, the performance mode is also changed to
The presentation mode displayed during the big win continues as it is. That is, even though the ending period has actually started, the presentation mode (display mode, etc.) as if the big win continues is displayed until a predetermined period (for example, a maximum of 4 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the final round.
The setting is made to the audio mode.

This configuration reduces the possibility that the song will end in the middle of the chorus, and allows the player to listen to the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the song, for a longer period of time before the big win ending performance begins. This gives the player who selected the song a greater sense of satisfaction.

<Electrical configuration in second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 122 to Fig. 126. First, with reference to Fig. 122(a), the voice lamp control device 1 in the second control example will be described.
The configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the second embodiment will be described.
FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM 222 in the embodiment.

As shown in Figure 122 (a), the configuration of ROM 222 in this second control example differs from the configuration of ROM 222 in the first control example described above (see Figure 104 (a)) in that a music data group type storage area 222ba, a rearrangement discrimination table 222bb, and an ending performance selection table 222bc are added.

The music data group type storage area 222ba is a data table that stores the configuration of the music data group corresponding to each music piece.
At least information indicating the order of playback of each piece of music data constituting the music data group and the playback time is specified for each type of music.
In the example 13, when the type of music to be played and the process of determining the music (whether the music was selected by random drawing or the music was selected by the player) are notified to the audio output device 226, the music data are then loop-played in a predetermined order in the audio output device 226. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 does not need to know the progress of the music being played. In contrast, in the second control example, it is necessary to rearrange the order of music data to be played and execute delay control of the start timing of the ending performance according to the progress of the big win and the playback position of the music (type of music data being played). For this reason, the audio lamp control device 113 also needs to know the playback position of the music (type of music data currently being played), etc. Therefore, in the second control example, the music data group storage area 222ba is configured to be specified, and the configuration of the music data group set in the audio output device 226, the type of music data being used (played), the type of music data to be played next, etc. can be understood.

The rearrangement determination table 222bb is a rearrangement determination timing 1, 2 in the case of a big win.
This rearrangement determination table 222bb specifies the result of the determination as to whether or not to rearrange the playback order of music data in accordance with the type of music data currently set for playback, and the type of music data to be set for playback next when it is determined that rearrangement should be performed. Details of this rearrangement determination table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. 123.

FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb.
2, in the rearrangement determination table 222bb, for each type of song, the type of song data being played at the time when the rearrangement determination timing is reached is associated with the determination result (whether or not it is determined that the playback order should be rearranged).

More specifically, for example, for the A-melody 1 portion of song A, the discrimination result is as follows:
"OK" is specified in correspondence with the next song data type to be played.
"Chorus 1" is associated with the B melody 1 portion. Therefore, if the rearrangement determination timing occurs during playback of the A melody 1 portion, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus 1 portion is played (the playback of the B melody 1 portion is skipped) after playback of the A melody 1 portion has finished. Also, "not possible" is associated with the B melody 1 portion as the determination result. Therefore, even if the rearrangement determination timing occurs during playback of the B melody portion, the playback order of the music data is not rearranged. Therefore, after playback of the B melody 1 portion has finished, the chorus 1 portion is played as usual.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 123, the chorus 1 part, the interlude part, and A
For the melody 2 part, "OK" is set as the discrimination result, and "chorus 2" is set as the type of music data to be played next. Therefore, if the timing for rearrangement discrimination is reached during playback of the chorus 1 part, interlude part, or A melody 2 part, the chorus 2 part will be played after the playback of the chorus 1 part, interlude part, or A melody 2 part has ended.
The playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the B-melody 2 part of music A is played. The judgment result is set to "not allowed" for the B-melody 2 part of music A. Therefore, after the playback of the B-melody 2 part is completed, the chorus 2 part is played as usual. Furthermore,
For the chorus 2 part of the song A, "OK" is specified as the discrimination result, and "chorus 1" is specified as the type of the music data to be played next. Therefore, when the timing for rearrangement discrimination arrives during the playback of the chorus 2 part, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus 2 part will be played after the playback of the chorus 2 part has ended.

Similarly, for songs B and onwards, for the chorus parts that are set multiple times in the song,
The data in the rearrangement determination table 222bb is regulated so that when a relatively distant playback position (a playback position that is one or more parts away) is being played and the timing for rearrangement determination arrives, the nearest chorus part is played after the currently played part ends. By configuring in this way, the chorus part can be played more reliably in the final round, so that the jackpot can be ended after the most exciting part of the song is played. This can increase the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 122(a), the explanation will be continued. The ending effect selection table 222bc is as follows:
This is a data table that specifies the mode of the ending performance for each timing at which the ending performance is started. As described above, in this second control example, when the timing of the end of the final round comes during the playback of the chorus part (chorus 1 part, chorus 2 part, etc.), the playback of the chorus part is continued and the start of the ending performance is delayed. Here, even if the start timing of the ending performance is delayed, the ending period of the big win is constant, so the execution period of the ending performance is shortened by the amount of delay. In this second control example, a plurality of ending performances that can be selected according to the execution period of the ending performance are specified for this ending performance selection table 222bc. Details of this ending performance selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. 124.

FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the contents of the ending effect selection table 222bc.
As shown in Fig. 124, the ending effect selection table 222bc specifies the type of ending effect to be selected in correspondence with the range of the remaining time (the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb) until the playback of the chorus part ends at the end of the final round of the big win. Note that the remaining playback time timer 223bb is configured to set a timer value corresponding to the playback time of the music data at the timing when the playback of the data is set, and to periodically (every millisecond) subtract one from the value.

As shown in FIG. 124, when the value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is in the range of 1000 or less (i.e., the remaining playback time of the chorus part at the end of the final round is 1 second or less), a normal ending presentation (normal ending) is associated with it. This normal ending presentation has a presentation time of 4 seconds. In other words, the period from the start of the ending period to the end of the ending presentation (the sum of the remaining playback time of the chorus part and the presentation period of the normal ending) is set to be longer than 4 seconds and less than 5 seconds. In contrast, the ending period for a jackpot is set to 5 seconds.
That is, a maximum of about one second is provided between the end of the normal ending performance and the end of the ending period. In this control example, an image (result image) that notifies the player of the number of winning balls acquired during the big win is displayed during the ending performance, and the result image is displayed as a still image for the difference period from the end of the ending performance to the end of the ending period. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the player from having the impression that the performance has been interrupted during the period from the end of the ending performance to the actual end of the ending period.

The value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 1000 and is equal to or less than 2000 (
That is, for the range of the remaining playback time of the chorus part at the end of the final round being longer than 1 second and less than 2 seconds, the type of ending performance is specified to correspond to the shortened ending 1 with a performance time of 3 seconds. That is, the sum of the remaining playback time of the chorus part and the performance time of the ending performance is set to be longer than 4 seconds and less than 5 seconds. Therefore, in this case, too, the period from the end of the ending performance to the actual end of the ending period can be set to 1 second or less. Therefore, since the period during which the result image continues to be displayed as a still image can be limited to a short period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display content of the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 2000 and is equal to or less than 3000.
For the following range (i.e., the remaining playback time of the chorus part at the end of the final round is longer than 2 seconds and shorter than 3 seconds), the shortened ending 2 with a playback time of 2 seconds is associated and stipulated as the type of ending performance. That is, just like when the normal ending or shortened ending 1 is set, the sum of the remaining playback time of the chorus part and the playback time of the ending performance is set to be longer than 4 seconds and shorter than 5 seconds. Also,
For a range where the value (T) of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 3000, shortened ending 3, which has a playback time of 1 second, is associated and specified as the type of ending performance. Here, in this second control example, in order to ensure the playback time of the ending performance, the configuration is such that the start timing of the ending performance is not delayed by more than 4 seconds. In other words, if the chorus part is still being played even after 4 seconds have passed since the start of the ending period, the playback of the music (jackpot performance) is stopped and the ending performance is executed. For this reason, when shortened ending 3 is set, the playback time of the chorus part can be limited to between 3 and 4 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to limit the playback time of the normal ending and shortened ending 1 to a time between 3 and 4 seconds.
, 2, the sum of the playback time of the chorus part and the presentation time of the ending presentation is set to be longer than 4 seconds and equal to or less than 5 seconds.

In this way, in this second control example, if the chorus part is still being played when the final round ends, the start timing of the ending performance is delayed.The ending performance is different depending on the length of time from when the ending period starts to when the playback of the chorus part ends (or is stopped), and it is possible to end the ending performance before the ending period ends, regardless of the remaining time of the chorus part.By configuring it in this way, the player can listen to the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, for longer, while
It is possible to execute an ending performance that does not feel out of place.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 122(b). Fig. 122(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in Fig. 122(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in this second control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example (see Fig. 104(b)) in that it includes a playback data type storage area 223ba, a remaining playback time timer 223bb, an ending delay flag 223bc, a music type storage area 223bd, and an ending type storage area 223c.
23be and a delay period timer 223bf are added. The other configuration is the same as the RAM 223 in the first control example described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The playback data type storage area 223ba is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of music data being played by the audio output device 226. During the music playback period in the big win, the playback position of the music can be specified based on the data stored in the playback data type storage area 223ba, and when the rearrangement determination timing is reached, it can be determined whether to rearrange the playback order of the music data. Each time a music command is received from the audio output device 226, the playback data type storage area 223ba is updated to a value corresponding to the type of music data indicated by the command (see S5701 in FIG. 135). Here, the music command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the type of music data to be set when the playback time of one music data ends in the audio output device 226 and the playback of the next music data is set. This music command allows the audio lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the type of music data being played by the audio output device 113.

The remaining playback time timer 223bb is a timer for counting the remaining playback time of the music data. This remaining playback time timer 223bb is updated periodically (for example, every 1 millisecond). If the chorus part is being played at the end of the final round of the big win, the timer value of this remaining playback time timer 223bb is referenced to specify the remaining playback time of the chorus part. This remaining playback time and the above-mentioned ending performance selection table 222b are used to determine the remaining playback time of the chorus part.
The type of ending effect is determined according to the content of the provision of .c (S56 in FIG. 134).
See 03).

The ending delay flag 223bc is a flag indicating whether or not the period is a period during which the start of execution of the ending performance is delayed. If the ending delay flag 223bc is on, it indicates that the period is from when the delay in the start of the ending performance is decided to when the ending performance is started (ending delay period). On the other hand, if the ending delay flag 223bc is off, it indicates that the period is not an ending delay period. If the chorus part is being played at the time when the ending command is received, the ending delay flag 223bc is set to on (S5605 in FIG. 134). Also, if the ending delay period has elapsed and the start of the ending performance is set, the flag is set to off (see S5306 in FIG. 129).

The music type storage area 223bd is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the type of music selected by the player during the music selection period set in the first round of the jackpot. This music type storage area 223bd stores data corresponding to one music (item) determined by random drawing at the start of the music selection period (i.e., the first round of the jackpot) (see S5221 in FIG. 132). In addition, when a music is selected by the player during the music selection period, the data corresponding to the selected music is overwritten (see S5121 in FIG. 128). At the end of the music selection period (the first round of the jackpot), a selection music command for audio is set to notify the playback of a music corresponding to the data stored in this music type storage area 223bd (see S5507 in FIG. 133).

The ending type storage area 223be stores an ending effect selection table 222bc and a remaining playback time timer 223b when the start timing of the ending effect is delayed.
The ending type storage area 223b is a storage area for storing the type of the ending effect determined based on the timer value of the ending effect and the timer value of the ending effect during the ending delay period.
In e, when the chorus part is being played back at the time when the ending command is received, a delay in the start of the ending performance is determined, and when the type of the ending performance is determined, data corresponding to the determined type of performance is stored (see S5604 in FIG. 134).
When the ending delay period has elapsed, the start of the ending performance corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be is set (S530 in FIG. 129).
See 5).

The delay period timer 223bf is a timer for measuring the elapsed time (length of the ending delay period) after the delay in the start of the ending performance is determined. This delay period timer 223bf is updated periodically (e.g., every 1 millisecond) during the ending delay period. If it is determined based on the value of this delay period timer 223bf that the length of the ending delay period has reached 4 seconds before the playback of the chorus part ends, the ending delay period is terminated and the ending performance is started (see S5303 in FIG. 129).

Next, referring to FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, the audio output device 22 in the second control example will be described.
First, FIG. 125 shows the configuration of the audio output device 22 in the second control example.
125 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 125, the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the first control example is the same as the configuration of the audio output device 226 in the first control example (FIG. 10
6), an input/output port 311 is provided instead of the input port 305;
Also, the difference is that a bus line 312 is provided instead of the bus line 304, and the configuration of the RAM 303 is partially changed.

The input/output port 311 and the bus line 312 are changed in order to configure the voice output device 226 so that a command can be output from the MPU 301 to the voice lamp control device 113. In other words, the input/output port 311 and the bus line 312 are configured to enable bidirectional communication from the voice lamp control device 113 to the MPU 301 and from the MPU 301 to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, referring to FIG. 126, the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 in the second control example
126 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303.
As shown in FIG. 126, the RAM 303 in the second control example is the same as the RA in the first control example.
The difference is that a rearrangement waiting flag 303e and a rearrangement type storage area 303f are added to the configuration of M303 (see FIG. 107(b)). The other configurations are the same as those of the first control example described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The rearrangement waiting flag 303e is a flag indicating a period from when the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the rearrangement of the playback order of music data to when the rearrangement of the order is actually set. The rearrangement type storage area 303f is a flag indicating a period from when the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the rearrangement of the playback order of music data to when the rearrangement of the order is actually set.
This is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the type of music data that should be set for playback first, notified by the audio lamp control device 113. When an audio rearrangement command for notifying rearrangement of the playback order of music data is received from the audio lamp control device 113, data corresponding to the type of music data notified by the command is stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f, and the rearrangement standby flag 303e is set to ON (see S9402 and S9403 in FIG. 138).
When the playback time of the music data being played has elapsed while the rearrangement type storage area 303f is on, the music data to be played next is set to be the music data corresponding to the data stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f (see S9313 in FIG. 139).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 127 to FIG. 135, the voice lamp control device 1 in the second control example will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described below with reference to Fig. 127. The main process 9 is executed in place of the main process 8 (see Fig. 110) in the first control example.

In the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in this second control example, steps S4101 to S411
In the processes of S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118, the same processes as those in S4101 to S4111 and S4113 to S4118 of main process 8 (see FIG. 110) in the first control example are executed.

In the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example, when the performance update process of S4111 is completed, instead of the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example, the operation detection process 9 (S4151) is executed. This operation detection process 9 (S4151) is a process for monitoring an operation (pressing) of the operation button 230 and executing a corresponding control when an operation is detected, similar to the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example. This operation detection process 9 (S4151) will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

When operation detection process 9 (S4151) is completed, next, an ending performance start determination process is executed (S4152) to determine whether or not to start the ending performance during the period during which a delay in the start of the ending performance is set (ending delay period).
Details of this ending performance start determination process (S4152) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the ending performance start determination process (S4152) is completed, command determination process 9 is executed (S4153) instead of command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example.
In this command determination process 9 (S4153), the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 11) is executed in the same manner as in the command determination process 8 (see FIG. 112) in the first control example.
4) in place of hit-related process 9 (S4361), the process is the same as in the previous embodiment, and is therefore not shown in the figures.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned operation detection process 9 (S4151) will be described with reference to Fig. 128. Fig. 128 is a flowchart showing the operation detection process 9 (S4151) in this second control example. As described above, this operation detection process 9 (S4151) is a process executed in place of the operation detection process (see Fig. 111) in the first control example, and is a process for monitoring an operation (pressing) of the operation button 230 and executing a corresponding control when an operation is detected, similar to the operation detection process (see Fig. 111).

In the operation detection process 9 in the second control example (see FIG. 128), steps S5101 to S51
In the operations of S5106 and S5109 to S5111, the same processes as those of S5101 to S5106 and S5109 to S5111 in the operation detection process (see FIG. 111) in the first control example are executed.
In the process of 106, when it is determined that an operation on the center button CB is detected (S5
106: Yes), the song corresponding to the current value of the menu position pointer 223ab (currently,
The data indicating the selected song (item arranged in the song selection area of the song selection menu screen) is stored in the song type storage area 223b3b (S5121), and the process proceeds to S5109.

This operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) allows the arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen to be changed according to the operation of the operation button 230 by the player,
When a player performs a decision operation (pressing the center button CB while the song selection menu screen is displayed) during the song selection period, the song (song) placed in the song selection area can be set to be played in a loop during the song playback period.

Next, the above-mentioned ending performance start determination process (S4152) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
2) is a process for determining whether or not to start the ending presentation during the ending delay period, as described above.

In the ending performance start determination process (see FIG. 129), first, it is determined whether the ending delay flag 223bc is on (S5301).
If it is determined that the ending delay flag 223bc is off (S5301: No), it means that it is not an ending delay period, and there is no possibility of setting the start of the ending performance, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending delay flag 223bc is on in the process of S5301 (S5301: Yes), it means that it is an ending delay period, so a process is executed to determine whether or not to end the ending delay period and start the ending performance.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is 0 (S53
02). In the process of S5302, if it is determined that the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (S5302: No), this means that the playback of the chorus part of the song has not ended, so it is next determined whether the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303). In other words, after delaying the start of the ending performance,
In the process of S5303, it is determined whether or not four seconds or more have elapsed.
If it is determined that the value of 3bf is not 4000 or more (is less than 4000) (S530
3: No), continue the ending delay period (continue playing the chorus part of the song)
Therefore, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the value of the delay period timer 223bf is 4000 or more (S5303: Yes), the processes of S5304 to S5306 are executed to set the start of the ending performance. Also, if it is determined in the process of S5302 that the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is 0 (i.e., the playback time of the chorus part has ended) (S5302: Yes), the process proceeds to S5304 and the start of the ending performance is set.

In the process of S5304, the type of the ending effect corresponding to the data stored in the ending type storage area 223be (normal ending, shortened ending 1 to 3) is selected.
The process specifies the type of ending to be performed (S5304), and sets an ending command for display and an ending command for audio to execute the ending performance of the specified type of performance (S5305).Then, the process sets the end of the ending delay period by setting the ending delay flag 223bc to OFF (S5306), and ends this process.

This ending performance start determination process (see FIG. 129) makes it possible to determine the playback status of the song (whether playback of the chorus part has finished or not) and the length of the ending delay period while the ending delay period is set, and to set the start of the ending performance at an appropriate timing.

Next, the details of the win-related process 9 (S4361) will be described with reference to FIG. 130. This win-related process 9 (S4361) is the same as the win-related process 8 in the first control example ( FIG. 1
14) and, like win-related process 8 (see FIG. 114), this is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to a win received from the main control unit 110.

Of the winning related process 9 (S4361), S4401 to S4407 and S44
In each process of 09, the S of the hit-related process 8 (see FIG. 114) in the first control example is
The same processes as those in S4401 to S4407 and S4409 are executed. In the winning-related process 9 (S4361) in the second control example, in the process of S4407,
If it is determined that the commands received from the main control device 110 include a round number command (S4407: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S4461) for performing control according to the round number indicated by the round number command, and this process is terminated. Details of this round number command process (S4461) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the winning-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the commands received from the main control device 110 do not include a round number command (S4407: No), it is next determined whether or not an interval command indicating the start of an interval period has been received from the main control device 110 (S44
62). When it is determined in the process of S4462 that an interval command has been received (S4462: Yes), the type of interval (which round the interval is)
The process then ends with an interval command process (S4463) for performing control in accordance with the interval command.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4462 that the commands received from the main control device 110 do not include an interval command (S4462:
If no, the process proceeds to S4409.

In the winning-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in this second control example, if it is determined in the process of S4409 that the commands received from the main control device 110 include an ending command (S4409: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S4464) to determine whether or not to delay the start of the ending performance depending on the playback status of the music, and this process is terminated. Details of this ending command process (S4464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command is not included in the commands received from the main control device 110 (S4409: No), it is then determined whether a music command output from the audio control device 226 has been received (S4465).
If it is determined that a music command has been received (S4465: Yes), music command processing is executed to update the playback data type storage area 223ba and the playback time timer 223bb in accordance with the type of music data indicated by the music command (S4466), and the processing ends. Details of this music command processing (S4466) will be described later with reference to Fig. 135. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4465 that a music command has not been received (S4465: No), the processing ends.

Next, the details of the round number command process (S4461) described above will be described with reference to Fig. 131. In the round number command process (S4461), first, a display round number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the round number indicated by the round number command is set (S5401), and then it is determined whether the round number indicated by the round number command corresponds to the final round in the current big win (S5402).
.

If it is determined in the process of S5402 that the currently started round is the final round (S5402: Yes), this means that rearrangement determination timing 2 (the timing to determine whether or not to rearrange the playback order of songs) has arrived, and so the processes of S5403 to S5405 are executed to determine whether or not to rearrange the playback order. Specifically, the specified contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb are compared with the data stored in the playback data type storage area 223ba (S5403), and it is determined whether the type of music data currently being played (the part being played) is a type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5404).

In the process of S5404, if it is determined that the type of music data being played is a type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5404: Yes), the result of rearranging the playback order (
The audio rearrangement command set here is used to notify the user of the type of music data to be set for playback after the currently played music data (S5405), and the process ends.
102), the audio rearrangement command is output to the audio output device 226. When the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 receives the audio rearrangement command, it stores data indicating the rearrangement result notified by the command (the type of audio data to be played next) in the rearrangement type storage area 303f. Then, when the playback period of the currently played music data has elapsed, playback of the rearranged music data is started. This makes it possible to more reliably play the most exciting hook part of the music until the end of the final round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5404 that the playback order of the data is not to be rearranged (S5404: No), since there is a high possibility that the chorus part will be played before the final round ends even if the playback order is not rearranged, the processing of S5405 is skipped and the processing ends as it is.

In addition, in the process of S5402, if it is determined that the number of rounds notified by the round number command is not the final round (S5402: No), then it is determined whether or not the notified number of rounds is the first round (S5406).
s), executes a music selection period setting process for setting the start of the music selection period (S5407), and ends this process. Details of this music selection period setting process (S5407) will be described later with reference to Fig. 132. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5406 that the notification is not for the first round (S5406: No), the process of S5407 is skipped and this process ends as it is.

Next, the above-mentioned music selection period setting process (S5407) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 132. This music selection period setting process is a process for determining the initial layout of the music selection menu screen in order to set a music selection period during which the player can select a song (the music selection menu screen can be displayed). That is, the state command process (
This process corresponds to the process in FIG. 113. Since the music selection period setting process (S5407) and the state command process in the first control example (see FIG. 113) have many points in common in the process contents, the following description will focus on the differences from the state command process in the first control example (see FIG. 113).

In this music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132), S5203 to S5206 and S5
In each process from S5208 to S5213, the state command process in the first control example (FIG. 1
In this case, the same processes as those in S5203 to S5206 and S5208 to S5213 in the procedure of FIG.

In the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the second control example, when the process of S5208 is completed, data corresponding to the item (music) determined by the random drawing in the process of S5205 is stored in the music type storage area 223bd (S5221), and the process proceeds to S5209. As described above, in the second control example, the music selection period (i.e.,
At the start of the first round of the jackpot, the music determined by random lottery is not played, but a dedicated music piece for the music selection period is played, so that the process of immediately playing the music determined by lottery (processing of S5207) is not performed as in the state command processing in the first control example.

Furthermore, in the music selection period setting process in this second control example (see FIG. 132), if it is determined in the process of S5210 that an item that has already been stored in the memory area of the item layout storage area 223aa corresponding to the value "00H" of the menu position pointer 223ab has been identified again (S5210: Yes), an audio command is set (S5222) to instruct (notify) the audio output device 226 to play music for the music selection period, and the process proceeds to S5213.

Next, the above-mentioned interval command process (S4463) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 133. Fig. 133 is a flow chart showing this interval command process (S4463). In the interval command process (S4463), first, a display interval command for setting an interval presentation in a mode corresponding to the completed round is set (S5501), and then it is determined whether or not the interval command received from the main control device 110 is a command indicating the interval immediately before the final round (S5502).
2).

In the process of S5502, if it is determined that the command is an interval immediately before the final round (S5502: Yes), this means that rearrangement determination timing 1 (the timing for determining whether or not to rearrange the playback order of music pieces) has arrived, so each of the processes of S5503 to S5505 is executed to determine whether or not to rearrange the playback order of music data. Specifically, the specified contents of the rearrangement determination table 222bb are compared with the data stored in the playback data type storage area 223ba (S5503), and it is determined whether the type of music data currently being played (the part being played) is a type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5504).
5504).

In the process of S5504, if it is determined that the type of music data being played is a type for which the playback order should be rearranged (S5504: Yes), the result of rearranging the playback order (
The audio rearrangement command set here is used to notify the user of the type of music data to be set for playback after the currently played music data (S5505), and the process ends.
102), the audio reorganization command is output to the audio output device 226. When the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 receives the audio reorganization command, it stores data indicating the reorganization result notified by the command (the type of audio data to be played next) in the reorganization type storage area 303f. Then, when the playback period of the currently played music data has elapsed, playback of the rearranged music data is started. This makes it possible to more reliably play the most exciting hook part of the music until the end of the final round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5504 that the playback order of the data is not to be rearranged (S5504: No), since there is a high possibility that the chorus part will be played before the final round ends even if the playback order is not rearranged, the processing of S5505 is skipped and the processing ends as it is.

Furthermore, in the process of S5502, if it is determined that the current interval command is not a command indicating an interval immediately before the final round (S5502: No), then it is determined whether it is a command indicating an interval to be set after the end of one round (
In the process of S5506, if it is determined that the command is a command indicating an interval after the end of one round (S5506: Yes),
A selected song command for voice is set to instruct (notify) the playback of the song corresponding to the data stored in the selection count storage area 223ac (S5507), and 1 is added to the data corresponding to the number of times the song was selected for playback this time among the data in the selection count storage area 223ac (S5508).
Then, the music selection menu screen is set to non-display, and the menu display flag 223ae is set to 0.
In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S5506 that the current interval command is not a command indicating the interval after the end of the first round (S5506:
If the answer is No), the processes of S5507 to S5509 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned ending command process (S4464) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 134. This ending command process (S4464) is a process for determining whether or not to delay the start of the ending performance depending on the playback status of the music, as described above.

In the ending command process (see FIG. 134), first, the playback data type storage area 2
23ba (i.e., data corresponding to the type of music data currently being played) is read (S5601), and it is determined whether the read data corresponds to the chorus part (i.e., whether the chorus part is being played) (S5602). If it is determined in the process of S5602 that data corresponding to the chorus part has been read (S5602: Yes),
s), and executes each process of S5603 to S5605 to delay the start of the ending performance and extend the playback time of the chorus part. Specifically, the type of ending performance corresponding to the range to which the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb belongs is selected from the ending performance selection table 222bc (see FIG. 124) (S5603).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124, when the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is in the range of 1000 or less (i.e., the remaining playback time of the chorus part at the end of the final round is 1 second or less), a normal ending with a playback time of 4 seconds is selected as the type of ending performance, and when the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is in the range of more than 1000 and less than 2000 (i.e., the remaining playback time of the chorus part at the end of the final round is longer than 1 second and less than 2 seconds), a shortened ending 1 with a playback time of 3 seconds is selected as the type of ending performance. However, if the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 2000 and less than 3000 (i.e., the remaining playback time of the chorus part at the end of the final round is greater than 2 seconds and less than 3 seconds), then shortened ending 2 with a playback time of 2 seconds is selected as the type of ending performance, and if the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb is greater than 3000 (i.e., the remaining playback time of the chorus part at the end of the final round is greater than 3 seconds), then shortened ending 3 with a playback time of 1 second is selected as the type of ending performance (see Figure 124).

When the process of S5603 is completed, the data corresponding to the ending presentation selected in the process of S5603 is stored in the ending type storage area 223be (S5604).
The ending delay flag 223bc is set to ON (S5605), and this process ends.

By executing each process of S5603 to S5605, the start timing of the ending performance can be delayed, and the type of ending performance to be executed after the ending delay period can be set in the ending type storage area 223be in advance. This allows the playback of the chorus part to end after the ending period starts (
In addition, the player can listen to the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, for a longer period of time.

In the process of S5602, if it is determined that the data read from the playback data type storage area 223ba corresponds to a part other than the chorus part (S5602: No
Since there is no need to delay the start timing of the ending performance, a display ending command corresponding to the normal ending performance is set (S5606), and an audio ending command indicating the music corresponding to the normal ending performance is set (S5607).
), and ends this process. As a result, if a part other than the chorus is being played at the start of the ending period (the end of the final round), a normal ending performance can be executed at the same time as the start of the ending period.

Next, the above-mentioned music command process (S4466) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 135. In this music command process (S4466), first, data indicating the type of music data (music data set for playback in the audio output device 226) indicated by the music command output from the audio output device 226 is stored in the playback data type storage area 223ba (S5701). Then, the timer value corresponding to the notified type of music data is set in the remaining playback time timer 223bb (S5702), and this process ends.

By executing this music command processing (S4466), the type of music data (part currently being played) being played by the audio output device 226 and the playback time can be easily grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding control process of audio output device in second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 136 to Fig. 139. First, main process 9 executed in this second control example instead of the main process (see Fig. 115(a)) in the first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 136. Fig. 136 is a flow chart showing this main process 9.

In the main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in this second control example, steps 9003 to 9007
In each process, steps S9003 to S9004 of the main process in the first control example (see FIG. 115(a)) are performed.
The same processes as those in the main process 9007 in the second control example are executed.
(See FIG. 136) When processing is started, first, a command output process is executed to send various commands for the voice lamp control device 113, which were set by each of the processes S9012 and S9013, to the voice lamp control device 113 (S9011).

Next, instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example, a command determination process 9 is executed (S9012). This command determination process 9 (S9012) is a process for executing control according to the type of various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example. Details of this command determination process 9 (S9012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

When the process of S9012 is completed, instead of the sound setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 117), sound setting process 9 is executed (S9013), and the process proceeds to S9003. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 139, but this sound setting process 9 (S9013) is the first
Similar to the audio setting process (see FIG. 117) in the control example, this is a process for setting the playback of audio data such as music data and switching of music data.

Next, the above-mentioned command determination process 9 (S9012) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 137. As described above, this command determination process 9 (S9012) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see Fig. 116) in the first control example.

In the command determination process 9 in the second control example (see FIG. 137), steps S9201 to S9203
In each process of S9214, the same process as each process of S9201 to S9214 in the command determination process (see FIG. 116) in the first control example is executed. In addition, in the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the second control example, if it is determined in the process of S9209 that the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include a voice selection song command (S9209: No), it is then determined whether or not the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 includes a command related to the song during the jackpot (S9221).

In the process of S9221, if it is determined that a command related to the music during the jackpot is included (S9221: Yes), a jackpot music-related process for executing control according to the type of command is executed (S9222), and this process is terminated. Details of this jackpot music-related process (S9222) will be described later with reference to FIG. 138.
In processing 1, if it is determined that the commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 do not include a command related to the song during the jackpot (S9221: No), the processing proceeds to S9214.

Next, the details of the jackpot music related process (S9222) will be described with reference to FIG. 138. In this jackpot music related process (S9222), first, it is determined whether the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 includes a voice rearrangement command (S9401). If it is determined that the command includes a voice rearrangement command (S9402),
1: Yes), and updates the data in the rearrangement type storage area 303f according to the rearrangement content notified by the command (type of music data to be set for playback next) (S940
2). Next, the rearrangement wait flag 303e is set to ON to indicate that the music data to be played back next to the currently played back music data will be rearranged (changed from the playback order based on the value order of the music pointer 303b) (S9403), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9401, if it is determined that the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include a voice rearrangement command (S9401: No),
Next, it is determined whether the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 includes an ending command for voice (S9404).

In the process of S9404, if it is determined that the ending command for audio is included (S9404: Yes), the playback of the music currently being played is stopped (S9405), and the playback of the ending music of the type notified by the ending command for audio is set (
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9404 that the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 does not include an ending command for voice (S9404: No), the process is terminated.

Next, the above-mentioned audio setting process 9 (S9013) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the audio setting process 9 (S9013). As described above, this audio setting process 9 (S9013) is the same as the audio setting process in the first control example (
This is processing executed instead of the processing in FIG. 117.

In the audio setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in this second control example, steps S9302 to S93
In each process of 08, the same process as S93 of the sound setting process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example is performed.
The same processes as those in S9302 to S9308 are executed. Also, when the sound setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in this second control example is started, first, the music during the big win (music A to music Z) is
If the music during the big win is being played (S9311: Yes), the process proceeds to S9302.
In the process of (S9311: N), if it is determined that the song during the jackpot is not being played,
o), and then this process ends.

In the sound setting process 9 (see FIG. 139) in the second control example, when it is determined in the process of S9302 that it is the timing to end the playback of the music data being played (S93
02: Yes), and then it is determined whether the rearrangement waiting flag 303e is on (
S9312). In the process of S9312, if it is determined that the rearrangement standby flag 303e is on (S9312: Yes), it is necessary to set the playback of the music data in a playback order (order specified by the audio lamp control device 113) different from the playback order predetermined for each music, so the value corresponding to the data stored in the rearrangement type storage area 303f is overwritten on the value of the music pointer 303b to update it (S9313), and the process proceeds to S9307. This makes it possible to set the playback of the music data after rearrangement.

On the other hand, in the process of S9312, if it is determined that the rearrangement waiting flag 303e is off (S9312: No), the process proceeds to S9303, and the music pointer 303b
Set the playback order of values.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is configured to allow the player to select the music during the jackpot. The order of music data playback is dynamically rearranged according to the progress of the jackpot so that the chorus part is played as much as possible before the end of the final round. That is, at a predetermined timing during the jackpot (for example,
At the start of the interval period immediately before the final round or at the start of the final round), the type of music data currently set for playback (A melody 1, B melody 1, chorus 1, etc.) is determined,
When a part far from the chorus is being played, the order of playing each piece of music data constituting the music data group is rearranged so that the next part to be played is closer to the chorus, thereby ensuring that the player can hear the chorus, which is the most exciting part of the music, before the big win ends.

Here, as a method for playing the chorus part in the final round of the jackpot,
It is also possible to set the playback of music data corresponding to the chorus at the start of the final round, regardless of the progress of the music. However, with this method, there is a risk that the connection of the music may become unnatural around the start of the final round (i.e., around the time when playback switches to the chorus). In other words, there is a high possibility that playback of the chorus will suddenly begin in the middle of another part. Therefore, with this method, the player may feel uneasy about the music being played, which may lead to suspicion of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, this may lead to doubts as to whether the pachinko machine 10 is operating normally, which may lead to anxiety about playing the game. In contrast, in this second control example, the music data is played on a part-by-part basis (melody (
Since the playback order of the music data is rearranged (varied) at intervals of a musical tune, when the playback order is rearranged, the music can be played in a sound style that is less awkward. This allows the player to play the jackpot with peace of mind.

In addition, in this second control example, if the chorus part (chorus 1, chorus 2, etc.) is being played at the end of the final round of the jackpot, the start timing of the ending performance is delayed to continue playing the chorus part for a longer period of time. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, from being forcibly ended by the end of the jackpot. This makes the chorus part more enjoyable for the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game during the jackpot.

In the second control example, when the chorus ends during the final round of the big win, the music is played in the order of the music data without rearranging the playback order.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the playback of the chorus part is completed in the final round, the playback order of the music data may be rearranged again so that the chorus part is repeatedly played. In this case, the music data that has been played may be played again, or a chorus part different from the chorus part that has been played may be played (for example, when the playback of the chorus part 1 is completed, the playback of the chorus part 2 is set to continue, and when the playback of the chorus part 2 is completed, the playback of the chorus part 1 is set). By configuring in this way, the most exciting chorus part of the music can be played longer in the final round, so that the interest of the player in the final round can be further improved. In addition, instead of simply playing the chorus part repeatedly, the chorus part may be repeated only when the timing of the end of the chorus part when the chorus part is played repeatedly is predicted in advance from the progress of the final round, and the chorus part is repeated only when the prediction result indicates that the timing is likely to fall within the round period of the final round. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ending period from starting immediately after the chorus part is set to be repeated, and to prevent the playback of the chorus part from being terminated without the chorus part being fully heard.

In the second control example, the determination as to whether or not to rearrange the playback order of music data is performed at the start of the interval period immediately before the final round in the big win and at the start of the final round, but this is not limited to this. The number of times and timing of the determination as to whether or not to rearrange the playback order can be determined arbitrarily.

In this second control example, the playback order of the music data is rearranged so that the chorus part is played for a longer period during the final round, but this is not limited to this, and the round in which the chorus part is played can be set arbitrarily.

In the second control example, the rearrangement of the playback order of music data is performed in units of parts, but the present invention is not limited to this and the rearrangement may be performed in any units. By rearranging the data in units smaller than the part units, the rearrangement can be set more precisely. Furthermore, by rearranging the data in units coarser than the part units, the structure of the music data group can be simplified.

In the second control example, when it is decided to rearrange the music data, the parts are played back in a different order from the original playback order after the playback time of the part (music data) being played has elapsed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when it is decided to rearrange, the rearranged music data may be played back immediately. By configuring in this way, the audio output device 226 can be configured to hold the type of rearranged music data (i.e., the rearrangement type storage area 303f) until the timing for rearrangement arrives.
) is no longer necessary, so that the storage capacity can be reduced.
At the start of the final round of the big win, the playback of the chorus part may be started regardless of the playback position of the song. By configuring in this way, the processing can be further simplified, and the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 and the audio output device 226 can be reduced.

In the second control example, the MPU of the audio/lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the music data can be rearranged.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the M of the audio output device 226 may be used.
In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 may execute the following:
It is only necessary to notify the audio output device 226 of the arrival of the rearrangement determination timing. Then, the rearrangement determination table 222bb provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 is moved to the audio output device 226, and based on the notification from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226 of the arrival of the rearrangement determination timing, the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 executes the determination of whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music data.

In this second control example, the playback order of the music data can be rearranged depending on the progress of the big win game and the playback position of the music, but the method for increasing the possibility of the chorus part being played during the final round is not limited to this. For example, the playback speed of the music can be varied depending on the progress of the game and the playback position of the music. That is, for example, at rearrangement determination timing 1, if the current playback position is far from the chorus part (more than two parts apart), the music is played at a faster playback speed than normal (for example, 1.5 times faster) until the chorus part is played, and if it is close (one part or less),
A song may be played at a slower speed than normal (for example, 0.5 times the normal speed) until the chorus portion is played.

In the second control example, both the progress of the jackpot and the progress of the music are judged to determine whether or not to change (rearrange) the playback order of the music data.
It only determines the progress of the jackpot (whether it is time to start the final round or not),
It may be configured to determine whether or not to start playing music data corresponding to a specific part (chorus part). This control is not limited to the final round. For example,
In the pachinko machine 10 configured to play a single song in a loop during a jackpot and play the outro part of the song as the sound for the ending performance during the ending period, the machine may be configured to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the first round of the jackpot, and if it is the start timing of the first round, play data corresponding to the intro part regardless of the situation of the song (play from the beginning of the song). Also, the machine may be configured to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period, and if it is the start timing of the ending period, change the data to be played to music data corresponding to the outro part regardless of the situation of the song. By configuring in this way, the music during the ending performance can be set to the outro part music corresponding to the music that was playing during the jackpot, so that the music played during the jackpot and during the ending performance can be made to have a sense of unity. This control may also be applied when a dedicated song for the ending is provided. That is, the machine may be configured to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the ending period during a jackpot, and if it is the start timing of the ending period, start playing music data corresponding to the dedicated song for the ending performance regardless of the situation of the song.

In this second control example, the progress of the music (playback position) is determined at the start of the ending period, and if a specific playback range (chorus section) is being played, the start of the ending performance is delayed to allow the specific playback range to be played for a longer period, but this control is not limited to being applicable at the start of the ending period. It can be applied if the conditions for playing another music are met while a music is being played. For example, the music may be looped during the above-mentioned high probability state, and if the high probability state is about to end and the chorus section is being played, the start of the performance indicating the high probability state has ended may be delayed to allow the chorus section to be played for a longer period. Also, RTC (Real Time Clock)
In a gaming machine having a configuration including a known timing device such as a time clock (time clock), and capable of executing a specific performance (so-called island-linked performance) different from the normal performance when the time clocked by the timing device reaches a predetermined time, the control in the second control example may be applied at the start of the island-linked performance. Specifically, if the chorus part (specific playback range) of a song is being played at the start timing of the specific performance, the start timing of the specific performance may be delayed to play the chorus part (specific playback range) for a longer period. In addition, the target to which this control can be applied is not limited to a performance with sound (a performance that plays a song). It can also be applied to a display performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, for example, when the time clocked by the timing device reaches a predetermined time during the execution of a variable display, it may be configured to determine whether or not to delay the start of the island-linked performance depending on the progress status (performance mode) of the variable performance being executed. Specifically, for example, during the execution of a super reach effect in which the expectation of a jackpot is relatively high, the execution of the island linking effect may be suppressed (delayed) until the super reach effect ends. By configuring in this way, the result of the variable display effect can be appropriately notified to the player. In addition, for example, the presenter may execute an effect that prompts the player to operate a predetermined operation button as a variable display effect or an effect during a jackpot, and may be applied to a gaming machine that can execute a press effect that switches to a different effect mode when an operation is detected or when an effective operation period has elapsed. In other words, even if an operation on an operation button is detected during the effective operation period, the effect mode may be delayed from being switched (the effect mode may be suppressed from being changed until the effective operation period has elapsed) until the effect during the effective operation period has ended.

In the second control example, if the chorus part is being played at the start of the ending period, the start timing of the ending performance is delayed to play the chorus part for a longer period, but this is not limited to the above. For example, if the chorus part is being played at the start of the ending period, the display mode for the ending performance may be started as the display mode, while the playback of the chorus part may be continued. By configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to prepare multiple display modes according to the remaining ending period as the ending performance, so that the number of display data tables for executing the ending performance can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

In this second control example, if the chorus portion is being played at the start of the ending period, the start of the ending performance is delayed by up to four seconds, and after the delay period has elapsed, an ending performance of a length that ends within the remaining ending period is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the ending performance that starts after the delay period has elapsed may have the same content (normal ending performance) as an ending performance that starts without delay. In other words, the length until the ending period ends may be extended according to the delay period. By configuring in this way, the performance mode of the ending performance may be as follows:
Since there is no need to provide multiple types with different performance periods, the number of display data tables for executing the ending performance can be reduced. This allows the storage capacity of the display control device 114 to be reduced. Also, instead of extending the ending period, only the ending performance may be configured to continue even after the ending period has ended. In this case, the variable display based on the reserved balls that were reserved at the end of the jackpot is displayed in a manner that is less noticeable than the ending performance (for example, by shrinking it to the bottom right of the third pattern display device 81).
Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of display data tables for executing the ending performance, and therefore the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to Figures 140 to 150. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example described above, the replay (execution) during the big win
The game is configured so that the player can select any music piece (audio mode) as the music piece (type of audio performance) to be played. Then, in order to increase the possibility of the chorus part being played in the final round of the big win, a determination is made as to whether or not to switch the music playback position (rearrange the playback order of the music data) at a predetermined timing in the big win.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, a menu item called "random song selection" is added to the song selection menu screen, in which a song (aspect of audio performance) is randomly selected, and when "random song selection" is selected by the player, the song to be played after the end of the first round (song selection period) is determined by a predetermined lottery. In addition, in "random song selection", a song (audio performance) that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen can be determined. More specifically, when "random song selection" is determined in a sure-win jackpot, the song to be played during the jackpot is determined by lottery from among "song A" to "song Z" displayed on the song selection menu screen, plus "song A". This allows the player to select "random song selection" in the hope that "song A", which is not normally audible, will be determined.

Furthermore, in this third control example, as one type of presentation executed during a jackpot, the number of rounds in the jackpot is announced as less than the original number of rounds for a predetermined period of time from the start of the jackpot (for example, until the end of the 5th or 10th round), and when the predetermined period has elapsed, a presentation that announces the original number of rounds can be selected. By configuring this presentation that announces a pseudo number of rounds less than the original number of rounds (pseudo fewer rounds presentation) to be executable, when a relatively small number of rounds is announced at the start of a jackpot (i.e., 5 rounds are announced for a jackpot with the first special symbol, or 10 rounds are announced for a jackpot with the second special symbol), it is possible to select a presentation that announces the original number of rounds when the predetermined period has elapsed.
When a round is announced, the player can play until the predetermined period has elapsed in the hope that a larger number of rounds (8 rounds or 16 rounds) will be announced after the predetermined period has elapsed (see Fig. 10(a)). Accordingly, in the present third control example, even in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo few rounds presentation, the playback order of the music is rearranged so that the chorus part is played, just like in the original final round.
This makes it difficult to distinguish whether it is a pseudo final round or a real final round from the part of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting a larger number of rounds to be announced until the pseudo few rounds performance ends (until a predetermined period has elapsed).

The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example in that the ROM 222 in the voice and lamp control device 113 and the RA
The configuration of M223 has been partially changed, and the MPU2 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed.
The control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and various processing executed by the voice output device 226 are as follows:
This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the second control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the music selection menu screen in this third control example will be described with reference to Figures 140(a) and (b). Figure 140(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the music area MR when the music selection menu screen is displayed for the first time after the start of the big win music selection period. As shown in Figure 140(a), the music selection menu screen in this third control example includes:
A plurality of display areas (items RA1 to RA3, PA1,
In addition to the display area in which PA2 is arranged, a display area in which an item OA called "random song selection" is displayed is displayed on the right side of the images in which song names are displayed as viewed from the front. This item OA called "random song selection" is an item in which one song is randomly selected by lottery from the songs (songs A to Z and song A) set in the pachinko machine 10.

When the "Random Song Selection" item OA is first displayed on the song selection menu screen,
The items are set to have an unlit appearance (similar to the items arranged in the display area other than the music selection area). In addition, a right image RG, which is roughly triangular and faces right, is displayed between the items OA and the multiple images showing the song names. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that by pressing (operating) the right button RB of the operation buttons 230, "random music selection" can be selected.

FIG. 140(b) shows a case where the player presses the right button RB while the song selection menu screen is displayed.
FIG. 140(b) is a diagram showing a display state of the music area MR when the button is operated (pressed).
As shown in FIG. 1, when the player presses the right button RB (when it is detected that the output of the signal corresponding to the right button RB has become H), the item RA1 ("Song A") arranged in the music selection area is selected.
The image on the right displaying the "Random Song Selection" screen (an image displaying the words "Random Song Selection") is switched to an unlit appearance, and item OA is switched to an lit appearance. That is, the appearance of item PA1 arranged in the music selection area is switched with the appearance of item OA. Also, the right image RG is switched to an illuminated appearance. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that when the center button CB is pressed, the player is in a state where "random music selection" is determined.

Furthermore, when "random music selection" is determined, the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab, which is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), is set to on (1). As described above, in the first and second control examples, when determining the initial layout of the menu, the value range of the menu position pointer 223ab is "00H" (00000000B) to "19H" (000
11001B), "song A" through "song Z" are associated one by one, and the correspondence is stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa. In other words, the items arranged in the music selection area can be specified by the lowest 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab, and the highest 3 bits are left as empty bits. In this third control example, one of the empty bits (for example, the most significant bit) is defined as the bit corresponding to "random music selection". By configuring in this way, even if "random music selection" is selected, the item (music) that was arranged in the music selection area immediately before "random music selection" was selected can be specified as the item (music) that was arranged in the music selection area immediately before "random music selection" was selected.
This can be easily determined from the lower 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab. That is, if the player presses the right button RB to select "random selection", and then presses the left button L again,
Even if the player presses the center button CB, the state immediately before the selection of "random song selection" (the display state of the song selection menu screen) can be easily restored. Also, when the player presses the center button CB while the song selection menu screen is displayed (the menu display flag 223ae is ON), it is possible to easily identify whether or not "random song selection" has been selected simply by checking the state of the most significant bit.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this third control example, when the player selects "random song selection" (when the operation of the center button CB is detected while the item OA is in a lit appearance), if a specific condition is met (for example, if the jackpot being executed is a probability jackpot), a selection menu screen is displayed with a number of songs (songs A to Z, including a special song (i.e., song a) that is not displayed as an item (cannot be selected by the player).
and song a) is selected by lottery.
A player who wishes to listen to a special piece of music can be proactively prompted to select "random music selection."

Next, referring to Figures 141(a) and 141(b), an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in a jackpot in which the pseudo small round effect (the effect that makes it look like the number of rounds is less than the actual number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type) is set will be described.
In 1(a) and (b), an example is explained in which a jackpot A with 8 rounds is won and a fewer number of rounds (5 rounds) than the actual number is announced due to the pseudo-reduced round presentation being set.

FIG. 141(a) is a diagram showing the display mode of the pseudo final round (5th round) during the execution of the pseudo short round performance. As shown in FIG. 141(a), in this third control example, during a big win, for the small area Ds1 in the third symbol display device 81,
The character that indicates the progress of the jackpot (current round number vs. maximum round number) ("5"
141(a) shows an example of the display mode at the time when it is detected that a specified number (i.e., 10 balls) of game balls have entered the left specific winning port 650 in the pseudo final round (5th round) (i.e., when the number of paid-out prize balls reaches 500 balls), and the display of the number of prize balls in the small area Ds1 changes from "490/500 GET" to "500
This shows the moment when the number was updated to "/500 GET".

Also, as shown in FIG. 141(a), an image resembling a treasure chest is displayed in the main display area Dm. This suggests that the player is in a state where he or she can obtain a large amount of prize balls (profit). Also, an image showing the name of the song selected by the player during the song selection period and currently being played is displayed in the music area MR. FIG. 141(a) illustrates an example in which the player selects "song Z" during the song selection period, and an item (image) with the letters "song Z" is displayed in the music area MR.

FIG. 141(b) is a diagram showing the display mode immediately after the pseudo final round has ended in a jackpot in which a pseudo short round presentation has been set (i.e., immediately after the display mode of FIG. 141(a) has been achieved). When the pseudo final round in the pseudo short round presentation ends, a presentation is executed to announce the original number of rounds. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141(b), the characters displayed in small area Ds1 are updated to characters indicating the original maximum number of rounds and the original maximum number of winning balls. That is, the "5" message displayed at the top of small area Ds1 is replaced with "5" and the "5" message is replaced with "5" and the "5" message is replaced.
The text "500/500 GET" displayed at the bottom of the small area Ds1 is updated to "5/8 rounds".
The text is updated to read, "00/800 GET." Also, an effect is executed in which the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 utters the lines, "Not yet!!"
These presentation modes allow the player to easily recognize that the big win does not end at 5 rounds, but continues up to 8 rounds (the pseudo-small round presentation has been executed). Therefore, the player can be made to recognize that more prize balls can be obtained, which enhances the player's interest. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the presentation that notifies the player that the big win will not end and will continue (see FIG. 141(b)), which is executed based on the end of the pseudo final round in the pseudo-small round, will be referred to as the "continuation presentation."

In addition, as described in detail later, in the third control example, as in the second control example, a determination is made as to whether or not to rearrange the playback order of music data at a predetermined timing during the big win (at the start of the interval immediately before the final round and at the start of the final round) so that the chorus part of the music is more likely to be played in the final round of the big win. In addition, in the third control example, the playback order of music is rearranged so that the chorus part is more likely to be played in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo small round performance, as in the original final round. This makes it difficult to distinguish whether the pseudo final round is a pseudo final round or an original final round from the part of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, the expectation of a larger number of rounds being announced can be continued until the pseudo small round performance ends (until a predetermined period has elapsed).

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 142(a). Fig. 142(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in Fig. 142(a), the ROM 222 in the third embodiment
The difference is that a random music selection table 222ca and a pseudo small round lottery table 222cb are added to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the second control example (see FIG. 122(a)). The other configurations are the same as those in the second control example described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The random music selection table 222ca is a data table that is referenced to determine one music piece when the player selects "random music selection." Details of the random music selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the contents of the random music selection table 222ca.
As shown in FIG. 1, the random music selection table 222ca has a correspondence relationship between the type of music and the value of the music selection counter 223ca according to the situation when the lottery is executed (the type of the big win,
The music selection counter 223ca is provided to select one music piece from the random music selection table 222ca, and is a random number counter whose value is updated within the range of "0 to 259."

As shown in FIG. 143, in the variable pattern presentation, the third pattern with an odd number is aligned (i.e., the presentation mode selected with a 40% probability only in the case of a special jackpot).
In the case of a probability variable jackpot notified by (probability variable jackpot with odd number symbol notification), the value of the music selection counter 223ca is set to the range of "0 to 8" (the range of 9 values of the music selection counter 223ca) in correspondence with "music A" (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143).
In addition, a "music B" is defined in association with the value range of the music selection counter 223ca of "9 to 17" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and a "music C" is defined in association with the value range of the music selection counter 223ca of "18 to 26" (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143).
Although not shown in the figures, the song types "song D" to "song Z" are defined in correspondence with the range of nine values of the song selection counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the song selection counter 223ca can take, "song A" to "song Z" are defined in correspondence with the range of nine values of the song selection counter 223ca.
Since the values of the nine song selection counters 223ca are set to correspond to each song type, when an odd number symbol is notified and a sure jackpot occurs and "random song selection" is selected during the song selection period, the probability that "Song A" to "Song Z" will be selected is approximately 3.5% (9/260).

143, in the situation where a jackpot of a certain probability variable symbol is announced, the range of the value of the music selection counter 223ca from "234 to 259" is associated with a special music "music a" that is not displayed on the music selection menu screen. Of the 260 possible values of the music selection counter 223ca, the value associated with "music a" is 26 from "234 to 259". Therefore, when the player selects "random music selection" during the music selection period of a jackpot of a certain probability variable symbol announcement, the rate (probability) that "music a" is selected is 10% (26/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143).

In contrast, in the case of a probability variable jackpot (even-numbered symbol-indicated probability variable jackpot) notified by a performance mode in which the third symbols with even numbers are aligned in the variable pattern performance (i.e., a performance mode in which the third symbols are selected at a rate of 60% in the case of a probability variable jackpot, and at a rate of 100% in the case of a normal jackpot), as shown in FIG. 143, "music A" is defined in correspondence with the value of the music selection counter 223ca in the range of "0 to 6" (a range of seven values of the music selection counter 223ca) (see 222ca1 in FIG. 143). Also, "music B" is defined in correspondence with the value of the music selection counter 223ca in the range of "7 to 13" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and "music C" is defined in correspondence with the value of the music selection counter 223ca in the range of "14 to 20" (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although not shown in the figures, the song types "song D" to "song Z" are defined in association with the range of seven values of the song selection counter 223ca. Of the 260 possible values of the song selection counter 223ca, seven values of the song selection counter 223ca are defined in association with each of the song types "song A" to "song Z".
When an even number symbol is announced and "random selection" is selected during the selection period, the probability of "song A" to "song Z" being selected is approximately 2.7% (7/260).
).

Also, as shown in FIG. 143, in a situation where a jackpot with even symbol notification occurs, a special song "song a" that is not displayed on the song selection menu screen is associated with the range of the song selection counter 223ca value "182-259". Of the 260 possible values of the song selection counter 223ca, 78 values from "182-259" are associated with "song a". Therefore, when "random song selection" is selected by the player during the song selection period of a jackpot with odd symbol notification, the rate (probability) that "song a" will be selected is 30% (78/260) (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). That is,
The probability of "song a" being selected when "random selection" is selected is higher for the even symbol notification probability jackpot than for the odd symbol notification probability jackpot.
For a player who wants to listen to (play back) "Random Selection," when a variable display in which the third symbols with even numbers are lined up is executed and a jackpot is announced, the player can be made to more proactively select "Random Selection."

As shown in FIG. 143, for a normal big win, the value of the song selection counter 223ca is in the range of “0 to 9” (the range of 10 values of the song selection counter 223ca).
" is defined in correspondence with the range of the song selection counter 223ca value "10-19" (see 222ca2 in FIG. 143), and "song C" is defined in correspondence with the range of the song selection counter 223ca value "20-29" (see 222ca3 in FIG. 143). Although not shown in the figures, each song type of "song D" to "song Z" is defined in correspondence with the range of 10 values of the song selection counter 223ca. Of the 260 values that the song selection counter 223ca can take, 10 values of the song selection counter 223ca are defined in correspondence with each of the song types of "song A" to "song Z". Therefore, when a normal jackpot occurs and "random selection" is selected during the song selection period, "
The rate at which "music A" to "music Z" are determined is approximately 3.8% (10/260), respectively. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, the value of the music selection counter 223ca is not associated with the special music "music a" (see 222ca27 in FIG. 143). That is, in the case of a normal jackpot, even if "random music selection" is selected, there is no possibility that "music a" will be determined (played). In other words, if "random music selection" is selected and "music a" is played, a high probability jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, in particular, when a jackpot is won by a variable display (variable performance) in which the third pattern with an even number is aligned (when it is unclear whether it is a high probability jackpot or a normal jackpot), a player who wants to know whether the game will transition to a high probability jackpot state as soon as possible (i.e., before checking the result of the performance informing whether the game will transition to a high probability jackpot state) can be made to actively select "random music selection". In addition, when "music a" is played as expected by the player, the player can be pleased. Furthermore, even if the "music a" is not reproduced, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the probability variable state until the performance of notifying whether or not the probability variable state will be entered during the jackpot is executed.

Returning to Fig. 142(a), the explanation will be continued. The pseudo-small round selection table 222cb is a data table that is referred to in order to determine (select) whether or not to execute the pseudo-small round performance. The selection of whether or not to execute the pseudo-small round performance using the pseudo-small round selection table 222cb is executed when an opening command corresponding to the big win A or the big win D is received (see S5833 in Fig. 147). Although not shown in the figure, the pseudo-small round selection table 222cb is set so that the execution of the pseudo-small round performance is determined with a probability of 50% when the big win A or the big win D occurs.

Next, referring to Fig. 142(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described. Fig. 142(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in Fig. 142(b), the RAM 223 in this third control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned second control example (see Fig. 122(b)) in that a music selection counter 223ca, a big win status storage area 223cb, and a pseudo final R storage area 223cc are added.

The music selection counter 223ca is a counter used to select (determine) one music piece from the random music selection table 222ca described above, and its value is updated within the range of "0 to 259." When a "random music selection" is determined by a player during a music selection period, a music piece corresponding to the value of the music selection counter 223ca is selected from the random music selection table 222ca.

The jackpot status storage area 223cb is a storage area that stores data corresponding to the type of jackpot and the symbols that are aligned in the variable presentation that is executed when the jackpot is won. This jackpot status storage area 223cb is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and if the data "01H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain odd symbol notification. If "02H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "03H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "04H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "05H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "06H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "07H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "08H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "09H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "01H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "01H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain odd symbol notification, and if "02H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "01H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "02H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "01H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain odd symbol notification, and if "02H" is stored, it indicates that it is a jackpot with a certain even symbol notification, and if "01H" is stored, it indicates that it is a
If "03H" is stored, it indicates a normal jackpot with an even number symbol notification.
If "00H" is stored, it indicates that the jackpot has not been won. When the execution of a variable presentation to notify a jackpot is set, this jackpot status storage area 223cb stores data corresponding to the type of jackpot that has been won and the type of symbol that notifies the jackpot (whether the third symbol with odd numbers is lined up or the third symbol with even numbers is lined up) (see S4522 in FIG. 150). During the song selection period, when the player selects (determines) "random song selection," the specified content corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot status storage area 223cb in the random song selection table 222ca and the song selection counter 22
3ca is compared to determine one piece of music to be played during the big win.

The pseudo final round storage area 223cc is, when the pseudo short round performance is determined,
This is a memory area in which data indicating a pseudo final round is stored. In the pseudo final R storage area 223cc, when an 8-round jackpot (jackpot A) is obtained and a pseudo short-round performance is determined, data corresponding to 5 rounds (i.e., the number of rounds of the jackpots B and C, which have a relatively small number of rounds among the jackpots of the first special symbol) is set (see FIG. 14).
7, see S5836), when a 16-round jackpot (jackpot D) is reached and a pseudo-small round presentation is determined, data corresponding to 10 rounds (i.e., the number of rounds of the jackpots E and F, which have a relatively small number of rounds among the jackpots of the second special symbols) is set (see FIG. 14
(See S5837 in 7.) In the case of a big win, at the start of a new interval period or a new round, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round or the start timing of the pseudo final round, according to the data stored in the pseudo final round storage area 223cc. In other words, it is determined whether it is the timing to rearrange the music.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 144 to FIG. 150, the voice lamp control device 1 in the third control example will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of 13 will be described. Although not shown in the drawings, in this third control example, a main process 10 is executed instead of the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example. This main process 10 differs from the main process 9 (see FIG. 127) in the second control example in that an operation detection process 10 (S4161) is executed instead of an operation detection process 9 (S4151, see FIG. 128), and a command determination process 9 (S4153) is executed instead of the operation detection process 9 (S4154).
The point is that the command judgment process 10 (S4165) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (FIG. 3
The only difference is that variable display setting process 10 (S4162) is executed instead of variable display setting process 10 (see 8).

First, the operation detection process 10 (S4161) in the third control example will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 144. This operation detection process 10 (S4161) is a process executed in place of the operation detection process 9 (see Fig. 128) in the second control example, and is the same as the operation detection process 9 described above.
As with (see FIG. 128), this is processing for monitoring an operation (press) on the operation button 230, and executing control according to the content of the operation when an operation is detected.

In the operation detection process 10 in this third control example (see FIG. 144), S5101 to S5
In the processes of S5106, S5109, and S5110, the operations of S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110 of the operation detection process 9 (see FIG. 128) in the second control example are respectively performed.
In the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation (pressing) of the center button CB is detected (S5106: Yes), a music determination process is executed (S5121) to determine the music to be played after the music selection period ends according to the type of the selected item, and the process ends. Details of this music determination process (S5121) will be described with reference to FIG. 145.

145 is a flow chart showing the details of the above-mentioned music selection process (S5121). In this music selection process (S5121), first, it is determined whether a random music selection has been selected by the player (whether the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is on (1)) (S5801). In the process of S5801, if it is determined that an item other than a random music selection has been selected (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is off (0) at the time when pressing of the center button CB is detected) (S5801: No), data indicating a music corresponding to the value of the lowest 5 bits of the menu position pointer 223ab is stored in the item arrangement storage area 2.
23aa and stores it in the music type storage area 223bd (S5802), and the process proceeds to S5806.

On the other hand, in the process of S5801, if it is determined that a random song selection has been determined (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is on (1)) (S5801: Yes),
Then, the random music selection table 222ca (see FIG. 143) is read (S5803), and the contents of the table that correspond to the data stored in the big win status storage area 223cb are compared with the value of the music selection counter 223ca to determine one music piece that corresponds to the value of the music selection counter 223ca (S5804).
The data corresponding to the music piece determined in the process of No. 4 is stored in the music piece type storage area 223bd (S5805), and the process proceeds to S5806.

In the process of S5806 executed after the process of S5802 or S5805, the music selection menu screen is closed and the menu display flag 223ae is set to OFF (S5806
), and this process ends. By executing this song determination process (see FIG. 145), if random song selection is determined, one song can be randomly selected from multiple songs.

As described above, when random selection is determined, there is a possibility that a song (i.e., "song a") that is not displayed as an item on the song selection menu screen will be selected.
is only likely to be determined in the case of a special jackpot, and is determined more frequently in the case of a special jackpot with an even symbol notification (where it is unclear whether it is a special jackpot or a normal jackpot) than in the case of a special jackpot with an odd symbol notification (where it is confirmed that it is a special jackpot). By configuring it in this way, in the case of a special jackpot with an even symbol notification, a player who wants to know as soon as possible whether or not the game will move to a special jackpot state (i.e., before checking the results of the presentation that notifies the player whether or not the game will move to a special jackpot state) can actively select "random song selection". Also, when "song a" is played as the player expected, the player can be pleased. Furthermore, "song a"
Even if the is not reproduced, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the probability variable state until the performance of notifying whether or not the probability variable state will be shifted to during the big win is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 146, the winning-related process 10 (S4371) in this third control example
The details of the winning-related process 10 (S4371) will be described. This winning-related process 10 (S4371) is a process executed in place of the winning-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example. Of the winning-related process 10 (S4371) in the third control example, S4401 to S4404 and S4406
In each process of S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466,
S4401 to S440 of the hit-related process 9 (see FIG. 130) in the second control example
4, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466
The same processing as that in each of the above is executed.

In the winning-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the commands received from the main control device 110 include an opening command (S4404: Yes), then a pseudo-few-round lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo-few-round effect, which is an effect that makes it appear as if there are fewer rounds than the actual number of rounds (S4471), and the process returns to S44
The process proceeds to step S4471.
This will be described later with reference to 47.

In addition, in the winning-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the round number command is included in the commands received from the main control device 110 (S4407: Yes), then, instead of the round number command process (see FIG. 131) in the second control example, the round number command process 10 is executed (S
The number of rounds command process 10 (S4472) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

In the winning-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, if it is determined in the process of S4462 that the commands received from the main control device 110 include an interval command (S4462: Yes), then, instead of the interval command process in the second control example (see FIG. 133), the interval command process 10 is executed (S4473), and the process is terminated.
Details of 3) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to Fig. 147, the details of the pseudo-small round lottery process (S4471) described above, which is one process in the winning-related process 10 (see Fig. 146) in this third control example, will be described. As described above, this pseudo-small round lottery process (S4471) is a process for drawing lots to determine whether or not to set the execution of the pseudo-small round performance.

In the pseudo small round lottery process (see FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether the type of the jackpot notified of the start of the opening period by the current opening command is either jackpot A (a jackpot with 8 rounds, which is a jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, among jackpots with the first special symbol) or jackpot D (a jackpot with 16 rounds, which is a jackpot with a relatively large number of rounds, among jackpots with the second special symbol) (S5831). If it is determined that the current jackpot is neither jackpot A nor jackpot D (S5831: No) in the process of S5831,
), the current jackpot is either jackpot B or C (a 5-round jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds among jackpots with the first special symbol), or E or F (a 10-round jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds among jackpots with the second special symbol).
In this case, since the original number of rounds is small and there is no possibility of executing a pseudo-small number of rounds, each of the processes of S5832 to S5837 for drawing lots (determining) whether or not a pseudo-small number of rounds can be executed is skipped, and processing proceeds to S5838.

On the other hand, in the process of S5831, if it is determined that the current jackpot is either jackpot A or jackpot D (S5831: Yes), each process of S5832 to S5837 is executed to draw (determine) whether or not the pseudo-small round effect can be executed. Specifically, the pseudo-small round drawing table 222cb is read (S5832), and the pseudo-small round effect is drawn (determined) whether or not the pseudo-small round effect can be executed (S5833). As described above, the pseudo-small round drawing table 222cb is set so that the drawing result corresponds to the execution of the pseudo-small round effect at a rate of 50%.

When the process of S5833 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the result of the selection (determination) by the process of S5833 corresponds to the execution of the pseudo short round effect (S5834).
If it is determined that the lottery result does not correspond to the execution of the pseudo small round effect (S5834:
If the answer is No, the process skips steps S5835 to S5837 for setting up the execution of the pseudo short round presentation, and proceeds to step S5838.

On the other hand, in the process of S5834, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the pseudo short round effect (S5834: Yes), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is jackpot A or not (S5835). In the process of S5835, if it is determined that the current jackpot is jackpot A (8 round jackpot of the first special symbol) (S5835: Yes),
es), in order to make this jackpot look like a jackpot with a relatively small number of rounds (5-round jackpot) among the jackpots of the first special pattern, the pseudo final R storage area 223
The value (data) corresponding to 5 rounds is stored in cc (S5836), and the process is returned to S5
Transition to 838.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5835 that the current jackpot is not jackpot A (i.e., jackpot D) (S5835: No), the current jackpot is treated as the second jackpot.
In order to make it appear as if the special pattern jackpot has a relatively small number of rounds (a 10-round jackpot), a value (data) corresponding to 10 rounds is stored in the pseudo final R storage area 223cc (S5837), and processing transitions to S5838.

In the process of S5838, the display opening command corresponding to the opening effect to be executed is set, and this process is terminated. By executing this pseudo small number of rounds lottery process, even if a relatively small number of rounds is announced at the start of the jackpot (i.e., when 5 rounds are announced for the jackpot of the first special symbol, or when 10 rounds are announced for the jackpot of the second special symbol), it is possible to play during the jackpot in the hope that a larger number of rounds will be announced (the pseudo small number of rounds effect is being executed).
This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to Figure 148, details of the round number command processing 10 (S4472), which is one process within the hit-related processing 10 (see Figure 146) in this third control example and is executed in place of the round number command processing (see Figure 131) in the second control example, will be described.
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing this number of rounds command process 10 (S4472).

In the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in this third control example, S54
In each process from S5401 to S5407, the round number command process (
131) is executed. In the number of rounds command process 10 in the third control example, when the process of S5401 is completed,
Next, it is determined whether the round notified by the current round number command matches the pseudo final round set in the pseudo final round storage area 223cc (S5411
), if it is determined that the current round is the pseudo final round (S5411: Yes
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5411 that the current round is not the pseudo final round (S5411: No), the process proceeds to S5402.

By executing this round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148), at the start of the pseudo final round when a pseudo short round performance is being performed (the start of round 5 of jackpot A and the start of round 10 of jackpot D), the playback order of the music data can be rearranged in the same way as in the original final round, so that the chorus part of the music is more likely to be played during the pseudo final round. In other words, the audio aspect in the pseudo final round can be made equivalent to the audio pairing in the original final round, so it is possible to determine from the audio aspect of the music whether it is a pseudo final round or not.
It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from realizing that it is the actual final round before the continuation effect (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed. Therefore, when the pseudo short round effect is set, it is difficult to distinguish whether the continuation effect will be executed or the jackpot will end as it is until the start timing of the continuation effect (see FIG. 141(b)) (i.e., the end timing of the pseudo final round), so that it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation during the pseudo final round.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, this is one process in the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example, and is the interval command process (see FIG. 133) in the second control example.
The following describes in detail the interval number command process 10 (S4473) executed instead of the above. Fig. 149 is a flowchart showing this interval number command process 10 (S4473).

In the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in this third control example, S5
In each process of S5501 to S5509, the same process as each process of S5501 to S5509 in the interval command process (see FIG. 133) in the second control example is executed. Also, in the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example, S5501
When the process of is completed, it is then determined whether the interval period notified by the current interval command is the interval period set immediately before the pseudo final round (the round set in the pseudo final round storage area 223cc) (S5511), and if it is determined that the current interval period is the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round (S5511: Yes), the process proceeds to S5503 to determine whether or not to rearrange the playback order of the music data types. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5511 that the current round is not the pseudo final round (S5511: No), the process proceeds to S5503.
Transition to 02.

By executing the process of S5511, at the start of the interval period immediately before the pseudo final round when the pseudo short round performance is being performed, the rearrangement of the playback order of the music data can be determined in the same manner as at the start of the interval period immediately before the original final round, so that the possibility of the chorus part of the music being played during the pseudo final round can be increased. In other words, since the audio aspect in the pseudo final round and the audio pairing in the original final round can be made equivalent, it is possible to determine whether it is a pseudo final round or an original final round from the audio aspect of the music by the continuation performance (FIG. 141(b)).
Therefore, when the pseudo short round presentation is set, it is difficult to distinguish whether the continuation presentation (see FIG. 141(b)) will be performed or whether the big win will end as it is until the start timing of the continuation presentation (see FIG. 141(b)) (i.e., the end timing of the pseudo final round), so that the expectation of the player during the pseudo final round can be increased.

In addition, in the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example,
In the process of 5506, if it is determined that the interval period notified by the current interval command is not the interval period after the end of the first round of the big win (
S5506: No), and then it is determined whether the current interval is the interval period after the pseudo final round (the round set in the pseudo final round storage area 223cc) has ended (S5512). If it is determined in the process of S5512 that the current interval is the interval period after the pseudo final round has ended (S5512: Yes),
, the execution of the continuation performance (see FIG. 141 (b)) is set (S5513), the data stored in the pseudo-final R storage area 223cc is reset (S5514), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 150, the variable display setting process 10 (S4162) in the third control example will be described.
) will be described in detail. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process 10 (S4162).
) is a process for generating and setting a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81, similar to the variable display setting process (see Figure 38) in the second control example (and the first embodiment).

In the variable display setting process 10 in this third control example (see FIG. 150), S4501 to
In each process of S4509, the same process as each process of S4501 to S4509 in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the second control example (first embodiment) is executed.
In the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in this third control example, when the process of S4504 is completed, it is next determined whether the current variable pattern is a variable pattern for notifying a jackpot (S4521), and if it is determined that it is a variable pattern for notifying a jackpot (S4521: Yes), data corresponding to the type of jackpot and the type of the third pattern that is aligned in the currently set variable pattern (whether it is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern) is stored in the jackpot status storage area 223cb (S4522), and the process moves to S4505. In the process of S4522, if it is a sure-variant jackpot with an odd number pattern notification, "01H" is stored in the jackpot status storage area 223cb, if it is a sure-variant jackpot with an even number pattern notification, "02H" is stored, and if it is a normal jackpot with an even number pattern notification, "03H" is stored.

The data stored in the big win status storage area 223cb by the process of S4522 is
During the song selection period, when the player selects (decides) "random song selection," the random song selection table 222ca is referenced, and the specified contents corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot status storage area 223cb are compared with the song selection counter 223ca to determine one song to be played during the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S4521, if it is determined that the currently set fluctuation pattern is not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a big win (i.e., a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a miss),
S4521: No), the process of S4522 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4505.

As described above, in the third control example, the "random song selection" option is selected on the song selection menu screen.
When the player has decided on the first round (music selection period), the music to be played after the end of the first round (music selection period) is decided by random lottery. In addition, if a specific condition is met when the "random music selection" is decided (i.e., if the current jackpot is a probability jackpot), a special music (i.e., "music a") that is not displayed as an item on the music selection menu screen can be selected. This allows the player to select "random music selection" in the hope that "music a", which is not normally listenable, will be decided. In particular, when a jackpot is decided by a variable display (variable performance) in which the third symbols with even numbers are aligned (when it is unclear whether it is a probability jackpot or a normal jackpot), the player who wants to know whether the jackpot will be changed to the probability jackpot state as soon as possible (i.e., before checking the result of the performance informing whether the jackpot will be changed to the probability jackpot state) can actively select "random music selection". Furthermore, the ratio of "music a" to be decided by lottery is higher for a probability jackpot with an even symbol announcement than for a probability jackpot with an odd symbol announcement. This allows the player to more proactively select "random music selection" when the even number symbol notification jackpot is won. By increasing the possibility that the player will select "random music selection," the multiple music pieces (music A to Z) set in the pachinko machine 10 can be played evenly. This allows the player to listen to multiple music pieces without waste.

In addition, in the third control example, as a type of performance executed during a jackpot, a pseudo-small number of rounds performance is selected in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is notified less than the original number of rounds for a predetermined period from the start of the jackpot (for example, until the end of the 5th round or the 10th round), and the original number of rounds is notified after the predetermined period has elapsed. By configuring this pseudo-small number of rounds performance to be executable, when a relatively small number of rounds is notified at the start of the jackpot, it is possible to play until the predetermined period has elapsed in the hope that a larger number of rounds (8 rounds or 16 rounds) will be notified after the predetermined period has elapsed. In addition, in the third control example, in the pseudo final round during the execution of the pseudo-small number of rounds performance, the playback order of the music is rearranged to play the chorus part, just like the original final round. This makes it difficult to distinguish whether the pseudo final round is a pseudo final round or an original final round from the part of the music played during the pseudo final round. Therefore, it is possible to continue to create a sense of expectation that a greater number of rounds will be announced until the pseudo few rounds presentation ends (until a predetermined period of time has elapsed).

In the third control example, the configuration is such that only in the case of a probability jackpot, if the player selects "random music selection", "music a" may be played, and the probability of "music a" being selected is higher in the case of a probability jackpot with an even symbol notification than in the case of a probability jackpot with an odd symbol notification. However, the probability of each song being selected when "random music selection" is selected can be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, even in the case of a normal jackpot, the configuration may be such that "music a" is selected with a low probability (for example, a rate of 0.1%). That is, the configuration may be such that the probability of "music a" being selected is higher when "random music selection" is selected during the execution of a probability jackpot than when "random music selection" is selected during the execution of a normal jackpot. By configuring in this way, even if "music a" is played, it does not mean that a probability jackpot is confirmed, so that the player can play with a sense of tension until the probability jackpot state is not notified. In addition, the probability of determining "music a" may be set to be higher for a jackpot with a probability of a special jackpot informing an odd number symbol than for a jackpot with a probability of a special jackpot informing an even number symbol.

In the third control example, among the entertainment effects executed during a big win (predetermined period), the performance mode (type of music to be played) of the audio entertainment effect is determined according to the operation contents of the operation button 230 by the player (selection result on the music selection menu screen), but this is not limited to this. For example, the performance mode of the display effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during a predetermined period may be changed according to the selection result of the player (operation contents of the operation button 230). More specifically, when a specific performance execution condition is established, a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of performance modes (corresponding to the items corresponding to "music A" to "music Z" in the third control example) and an item whose performance mode is randomly selected (corresponding to the item corresponding to "random music selection" in the third control example) are configured to be displayable on the third pattern display device 81. Then, the performance mode of the performance to be executed is determined according to the item selected by the player by operating the operation button 230. That is, when an item corresponding to the presentation mode is selected, the presentation mode corresponding to the selected item is executed, while when an item selected randomly is selected, one presentation mode is determined from among a plurality of presentation modes that can be selected at a predetermined timing. By configuring in this way, the player can select between a gameplay in which the player selects a presentation mode that the player likes, and a gameplay in which the presentation mode is selected randomly and the player pays attention to which presentation mode is selected. In this case, as in the third control example, a special presentation (a display presentation corresponding to the special music piece "music a" in the third control example) that can be determined only when the player selects an item in which the presentation mode is selected randomly may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to visually determine whether or not a special presentation has been executed, so that it is easier to understand whether or not it is a special presentation (i.e., whether or not the game moves to a probability state after a big win).

In this third control example, the special song "Song A" can be selected only when the player selects "Random Song Selection" on the song selection menu screen, but this is not limited to this. For example, when a guaranteed jackpot has been confirmed (i.e., a guaranteed jackpot with odd symbol notification has occurred and the player is already certain that it is a guaranteed jackpot), the song selection menu screen may be configured to display an item "Song A". By configuring in this way, in a situation where a guaranteed jackpot state has been confirmed, a player who wants to listen to "Song A" can be made to select the item "Song A" rather than selecting "Random Song Selection", which is more likely to select another song. This can improve the convenience for the player. Also, in this case, when a guaranteed jackpot with even symbol notification (
The item "music a" may be displayed at a predetermined rate on the music selection menu screen displayed in a situation where the player cannot know whether the game is in a high probability state or not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a variation in the method of early detection of whether the game is in a high probability state or not (whether "music a" is included in the items, and whether "music a" is played when "random selection" is selected), so that the interest of the player can be further increased during the music selection period of the big win of the even number symbol announcement.

In the third control example, the special song "song a" can be selected only when the player selects "random song selection" on the song selection menu screen. However, the player does not necessarily have to be able to select the song. For example, the operation button 230
The music played during the big win is selected from the random music selection table 222c every time.
In other words, if the probability of winning is high after the big win, the song "a" may be played, but if the probability of winning is low after the big win, the song "b" may be played.
It may be configured so that there is no possibility of "music a" being played. Even in this configuration, when a jackpot is generated by an even number pattern notification, the player can play the game during the jackpot while paying attention to whether "music a" is played. In addition, it is not limited to the case where "music a" is used to indicate whether or not the game is in a probability variable state. In a predetermined period during the game, it is determined whether the state after the predetermined period has elapsed is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot, a time-saving state, a small win RUSH, a BIG BONUS of a slot, ART, AT, etc.) or is less advantageous than the advantageous state, and if the state is advantageous, a special music piece may be played, while if the state is less advantageous, a special music piece may not be played.

In this third control example, the songs that can be selected when "random selection" is selected are varied depending on whether or not a special jackpot has been reached, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, the configuration may be such that the music that can be selected when "random music selection" is selected varies depending on whether or not the pseudo short-round performance is being performed. Specifically, when "random music selection" is determined while the pseudo short-round performance is being performed, one music is selected from among a plurality of music including "music a", and when the pseudo short-round performance is not being performed, one music is selected from among the plurality of music excluding "music a".

In the third control example, the control for setting the music during the big win has been described as an example, but this control is not limited to the big win. If the player is in a relatively advantageous state after the end of a predetermined music playback period, a special music (
On the other hand, when a relatively unfavorable state occurs after the end of the playback period, a special song (i.e., "song a") is at least excluded from the selection (i.e.,
Any situation may be acceptable as long as it is possible to select one song from among "songs A" to "songs Z". For example, as in the first control example, it may be configured to be used for control to select a song during a probability change state. In this case, if "random song selection" is selected when a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, a special song may be selected, while if a jackpot is not included in the reserved balls, one song may be selected from among the songs excluding the special song. Also, it may be configured to be possible to display a song selection menu screen during the execution of a variable display performance, and if "random song selection" is selected (determined) during the execution of a variable display corresponding to a jackpot, a special song may be selected, while if "random song selection" is selected (determined) during the execution of a variable display corresponding to a miss, one song may be selected from among the songs excluding the special song.

In this third control example, when "random song selection" is selected, if "song a" is selected, the special probability state is confirmed, but it is also possible to provide a case where the special probability state is confirmed at a predetermined rate even when the player selects an item other than "random song selection" on the song selection menu screen. Specifically, for example, when a player selects one song during a special probability jackpot, the song may be played from a different playback position from the normal playback position with a predetermined probability (for example, playing from the chorus part, or playing from the second verse of the song, etc.). Alternatively or in addition to this, a song different from the selected song (for example,
The configuration may be such that a song selected by the player is played in a different voice style from the normal one, or the melody or version may be different from the normal one. By configuring in this way, it is possible to meet the desires of the player who wants to select a song that he or she likes and wants to know early on whether or not the game will enter a high probability state. In this case, the configuration may be such that the song selected by the player is played in a different voice style from the normal one only if the same song is selected over a predetermined number of big wins.

In the third control example, the music selected during the music selection period is played from the beginning (intro part) at the end of the first round of the jackpot, regardless of the number of rounds in the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of rounds in the jackpot (e.g., 8 rounds) may be increased by 100%.
For a round jackpot or a 16-round jackpot, playback may be started from the beginning of the music, while for a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 5 rounds) and a jackpot with a pseudo-small number of rounds effect, playback may be started from the chorus part of the music. By configuring in this way, even for a jackpot type with a small number of rounds, the chorus part of the music can be more reliably heard by the player in one jackpot. In addition, in this case, if the pseudo-small number of rounds effect is set, it may be determined by lottery whether playback should be started from the chorus part of the music or from the intro part of the music. Specifically, for example, when the pseudo-small number of rounds effect is set, playback may be started from the chorus part of the music 90% of the time, and playback may be started from the beginning of the music 10% of the time. By configuring in this way, if playback is started from the beginning of the music even though a small number of rounds (e.g., 5 rounds) has been notified, the player can understand that the pseudo-small number of rounds effect is being executed at that point, so that the player can feel a sense of satisfaction for the jackpot with a large number of rounds before checking the continuation effect.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 151 to 169. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third control examples described above, when determining the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen, a maximum of three items that are frequently selected by the player are arranged in a range (history area) that can be selected with up to three operations of the up button UB. Also, if there are less than three items that have been selected once or more, the items that have been selected less than three times are arranged in the history area, and items determined by random drawing are arranged in the remaining area (
(One item determined by lottery is placed in the music selection area, and the other items are placed in alphabetical order based on that one item.) By configuring in this way, even if the number of times a song has been selected is small, such as immediately after powering on, all songs can be placed on the music selection menu screen without duplication.

In contrast, in the fourth control example, when there are few items (less than three) to be set in the history area, the history area is vacant (an area in which an item with a high selection frequency is not placed).
The priority order of the items to be arranged in the history area is specified. The priority order is set so that the more players are likely to know the music (for example, the theme music of the work that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10, or the music played during normal play such as reach effects, etc.) the higher the priority order. By configuring in this way, even if the number of times a music is selected is small, music that is likely to be selected by the player can be arranged in the history area, thereby improving the convenience for the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the second and third control examples described above, the order of playback of music data can be rearranged at a predetermined timing during a jackpot so that the chorus part is more likely to be played in the final round of the jackpot. This makes it possible for the player to hear the chorus part, which is the most exciting part (characteristic part) of the music, more reliably in the final round.

In addition, in the fourth control example, when the playback of the chorus part is completed during the final round, it is determined whether or not to repeatedly play the chorus part depending on the progress of the final round. More specifically, from the time when the playback of the chorus part is completed until the final round ends (or until the time when the period during which the ending performance can be delayed ends)
If there is a high possibility that the chorus can be finished in the final round, the chorus is played repeatedly, and if there is a high possibility that the chorus will end halfway (the ending performance will start halfway through the playback of the chorus), the chorus is not repeated and is played according to the playback order of the music data. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the possibility that the chorus will not be cut off halfway in the final round and will be played in its complete form.

In the third control example described above, the first round of the big win is set as the music selection period, and the player is made to select a song. During this music selection period, the dedicated music continues to be played during the music selection period, regardless of whether the music to be played has been decided (the center button CB has been pressed) or not. When the music selection period has elapsed (the first round has ended), the beginning of the music (
The structure was such that playback would start from the intro section.

In contrast to this, in the fourth control example, during the song selection period, each time the player operates the operation button 230 to place a different item in the song selection area, the chorus part of the song corresponding to the item placed is played. This allows the player to select a song not only based on the song name displayed on the song selection menu screen, but also taking into account the melody of the most distinctive chorus part of the song. Also, in the fourth control example, when a song is decided during the song selection period,
The playback start position and playback start timing of the music are changed according to the number of rounds of the big win. Specifically, in the case of a big win with many rounds (16 rounds), the music starts to be played from the beginning (intro part) when the song selection period ends, and the music starts to be played from the beginning.
In the case of a jackpot with 0 rounds or 8 rounds, the song starts to play from the A-melody part (i.e., skipping the intro part) when the song selection period ends. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (5 rounds), the song continues to play from the continuation of the chorus part that is already being played when the player selects the song (the song starts to play before the song selection period ends). By configuring it in this way, the player can listen to the chorus part for a longer period of time even in the case of a small number of rounds.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example in that the ROM 222 in the voice and lamp control device 113 and the RA
The configuration of the M223 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 303 in the audio output device 226 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 301 in the audio output device 226 has been partially changed. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, various processes executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and other processes executed by the audio output device 226 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the third control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to Fig. 151(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. Fig. 151(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in Fig. 151(a), the ROM 222 in this fourth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the third control example (see Fig. 142(a)) in that the content of the pseudo small round lottery table 222cb is partially changed, and that a priority definition table 222da and a chorus loop discrimination table 222db are added.

The priority specification table 222da is a table that defines the priority of items to be arranged in the history area. When determining the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen, if the number of songs selected at least once is less than three, the items are arranged in the free area of the history area in descending order of priority as defined in the priority specification table 222da (see S5275 in FIG. 163). Details of the priority specification table 222da will be described later with reference to FIG. 152(b).

The chorus loop determination table 222db is a data table that is referenced in order to determine whether or not to repeatedly play (loop) the chorus part when the playback end timing of the music piece data corresponding to the chorus part has come in the final round (S in FIG. 158).
5905). The chorus loop determination table 222db will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to Fig. 152 (a), the pseudo-small round selection table 222cb in this fourth control example will be described in detail. This pseudo-small round selection table 222cb is a data table that is referenced to determine (select) whether or not to execute the pseudo-small round performance, as in the third control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 152(a), the pseudo small round lottery table 22 in the fourth control example
In the fourth control example, the pseudo-small number of rounds lottery table 222cb is defined in correspondence with the range of the value of the effect lottery counter for drawing the effect mode, and whether or not the pseudo-small number of rounds effect can be executed (whether to execute the normal effect or the pseudo-small number of rounds effect). In addition, the pseudo-small number of rounds lottery table 222cb in the fourth control example also defines in correspondence with the value of the effect lottery counter whether the sound mode (playback mode) when playing the music should be matched to the number of rounds pseudo-notified by the pseudo-small number of rounds effect or to the original number of rounds. That is, in the fourth control example, the pseudo-small number of rounds lottery table 222cb is configured to draw whether or not the display mode of the pseudo-small number of rounds effect and the playback mode of the music should be matched. When the player recognizes that the playback mode of the music does not match the number of rounds notified by the pseudo-small number of rounds effect, the player can understand that the pseudo-small number of rounds effect is being executed. Therefore, a player who understands that the pseudo short round presentation has been executed before the continuation presentation (see FIG. 141(b)) is executed can feel a sense of satisfaction.

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the case of the big win A, the value of the performance lottery counter is "0 to 4
For the range of "0 to 9", "normal performance" is associated with the display mode, and "8R/10R" is associated with the music playback mode. Therefore, when the jackpot A is won and the performance selection counter value is in the range of "0 to 49", the pseudo small round performance is not executed, and it is announced that the jackpot is 8 rounds from the beginning of the jackpot (normal performance is executed). In addition, as the music playback mode, a playback mode (8R/10R playback mode) in which the music is played from the A-melody 1 portion at the end of the music selection period is set. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize from the start of the jackpot that it is an 8-round jackpot, which has a relatively large number of rounds among jackpots of the first special pattern. Therefore, the player can play the jackpot with peace of mind from the start of the jackpot to the time of the jackpot. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) of "0 to 99" that the performance lottery counter can take, the counter values (random numbers) associated with the display mode "normal performance" and the playback mode "for 8R and 10R" are 50, which are "0 to 49".
The probability that "for R" is determined is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the case of the big win A, the value of the performance lottery counter is "50 to
For the range of "94", the display mode is set to "pseudo short round effect" and the music playback mode is set to "for 5R".
When the player wins and the value of the performance lottery counter is in the range of "50 to 94", a pseudo-small round performance is executed, and a display performance (pseudo-small round performance) is executed as if it were a 5-round jackpot for a predetermined period (until the 5th round is completed) even though it is an 8-round jackpot. In addition, a playback mode (playback mode for 5R) is set in which the music is continued to be played from the playback position at the time the player decides on the music as it is. As a result, until the continuation performance is executed, the display mode and the audio playback mode are the same as those of the 5-round jackpot (jackpot B and jackpot C), so that it is difficult to distinguish whether the pseudo-small round performance is executed or the 5-round jackpot is executed until the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, when the continuation performance is executed, it is possible to give the player a greater joy. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) from "0 to 99" that the performance lottery counter can take, the counter values (random number values) associated with the display mode "pseudo short round performance" and the playback mode "for 5R" are 45, from "50 to 94", therefore the probability that the display mode "pseudo short round performance" and the playback mode "for 5R" will be determined is 45% (45/100).

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the case of the big win A, the value of the performance lottery counter is "95 to
For the range of "95 to 99", the display mode is specified as "pseudo short round effect" and the music playback mode is specified as "for 8R and 10R". Therefore, if the jackpot A is won and the effect lottery counter value is in the range of "95 to 99", the pseudo short round effect is executed and the jackpot is played for a predetermined period (5
In addition, as a music playback mode, when the music selection period ends, the music is played in the A mode.
A playback mode (playback mode for 8R and 10R) is set so that it is played from the melody 1 portion. As a result, at least during the song selection period until the player decides on a song, the display mode and audio playback mode are the same as for a 5-round jackpot (jackpot B and jackpot C), but the audio playback mode after the song is decided is set to a mode different from that of a 5-round jackpot. This makes it possible for the player to feel a sense of discomfort due to the mismatch between the audio playback mode and the display mode, and therefore makes it easy for the player to understand that a pseudo-few-round performance is being executed. This makes it possible for a player who is able to see that a pseudo-few-round performance has been executed before a continuation performance is executed to have a sense of superiority. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) from "0 to 99" that the performance lottery counter value can take, the display mode "pseudo-few-round performance" and the playback mode "8R and 1
Since the counter values (random number values) associated with "for 0R" are five, from 95 to 99, the probability that the display mode "pseudo short round presentation" and the playback mode "for 8R and 10R" will be determined is 5% (5/100).

Also, as shown in FIG. 152(a), in the big win D, the value of the performance lottery counter is "
For the range of "0 to 49", "normal presentation" is associated with the display mode, and "for 16R" is associated with the music playback mode. Therefore, when a jackpot D is won and the value of the presentation lottery counter is in the range of "0 to 49", the pseudo small round presentation is not executed, and it is announced that the jackpot is 16 rounds from the beginning (normal presentation is executed). Also, as the music playback mode, a playback mode (for 16R) in which the music is played from the intro portion at the end of the music selection period is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize from the start of the jackpot that it is a 16-round jackpot, which has a relatively large number of rounds among jackpots with the second special symbol. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) of "0 to 99" that the presentation lottery counter value can take, the counter value (random number value) associated with the display mode "normal presentation" and the playback mode "for 16R" is "0.
Since there are 50 numbers, ie, "49 to 49", the probability that the display mode "normal effect" and the playback mode "for 16R" are determined is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the case of the big win D, the value of the performance lottery counter is "50 to
For the range of "50 to 94", the display mode is set to "pseudo short round effect" and the music playback mode is set to "8R/10". Therefore, when the big win D is won and the effect lottery counter value is in the range of "50 to 94", the pseudo short round effect is executed and the big win is a 16-round big win for a specified period (5
During the period until the end of the 10th round), a display effect (pseudo short round effect) is executed as if it were a 10-round jackpot. In addition, as the playback mode of the music, a playback mode (playback mode for 8R and 10R) is set in which the music is played from the A-melody 1 portion at the end of the music selection period. As a result, until the continuation effect is executed, both the display mode and the audio playback mode are the same as those of a 10-round jackpot (jackpot E and jackpot F), making it difficult to distinguish whether a pseudo short round effect or a 10-round jackpot is being executed until the specified period has elapsed. Therefore, when the continuation effect is executed, it is possible to give the player even greater joy. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) from "0 to 99" that the effect lottery counter value can take, the counter value (
Since the random number value is 45, ranging from "50" to "94", the probability that the display mode "pseudo short round presentation" and the playback mode "for 8R and 10R" will be determined is 45% (45/100).

As shown in FIG. 152(a), in the big win D, the value of the performance lottery counter is "95-
For the range of "95 to 99", a "pseudo short round presentation" is associated and specified as the display mode, and "for 16R" is associated and specified as the music playback mode. Therefore, when a jackpot D is won and the presentation lottery counter value is in the range of "95 to 99", a pseudo short round presentation is executed, and even though it is a 16-round jackpot, a display presentation (pseudo short round presentation) is executed as if it were a 10-round jackpot for a specified period (until the 5th round ends). In addition, as the music playback mode, a playback mode (for 16R) is set in which the music is played from the intro portion at the end of the music selection period. As a result, at least until the end of the music selection period, both the display mode and the audio playback mode are set to
The 10-round jackpot (jackpot E and jackpot F) is the same as the 10-round jackpot, but the audio playback mode after the music selection period ends is set to a different mode from the 10-round jackpot. This makes it possible to make the player feel uncomfortable that the audio playback mode and the display mode do not match, and therefore makes the player easily understand that the pseudo-small round performance is being performed. This makes it possible to make the player feel a sense of superiority when he or she is able to see that the pseudo-small round performance is being performed before the continuation performance is performed. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) of "0 to 99" that the performance lottery counter value can take, the counter values (random number values) associated with the display mode "pseudo-small round performance" and the playback mode "for 16R" are five, "95 to 99", so the rate at which the display mode "pseudo-small round performance" and the playback mode "for 16R" are determined is 5% (5/100).

In this manner, in the fourth control example, the playback mode of the music (the timing at which the music starts to be played and the playback position of the music) is changed according to the number of rounds of the big win.
In a part (a predetermined percentage) of the cases where the pseudo few rounds performance is executed, only the sound mode is set to a playback mode corresponding to the actual number of rounds of the big win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player realize from the sound mode that the pseudo few rounds performance is executed before the continuation performance is executed. Therefore, a player who is able to realize early on that the pseudo few rounds performance is being executed can have a sense of superiority.

Next, the contents of the priority definition table 222da will be described with reference to Fig. 152(b). As described above, the priority definition table 222da is a data table that defines the priority (priority order) of items to be arranged in the history area. When determining the initial arrangement of items on the music selection menu screen, if the number of songs selected at least once is less than three, the items are arranged in the empty area of the history area in descending order of priority as defined in the priority definition table 222da.

As shown in FIG. 152(b), the priority definition table 222da defines the correspondence between the priority to be placed in the history area and the menu item. More specifically, in the priority definition table 222da, "Song A" is defined as a menu item corresponding to a "high" priority, "Song J" is defined as a menu item corresponding to a "medium" priority, and "Song E" is defined as a menu item corresponding to a "low" priority. These items are set so that the higher the priority, the more likely a song is to be known by more players. Specifically, for example, the opening song (
The theme song of the work that served as the motif is specified, the ending song of the work that served as the motif is specified as "song J" corresponding to a "medium" priority, and an insert song of the work that served as the motif is specified as "song E" corresponding to a "low" priority.

By referring to the priority specification table 222da, for example, when the number of songs selected at least once is two and the game transitions to the probability variable state, the two songs (items) selected at least once by the player are first placed in the history area as the initial placement of the music selection menu screen. Then, in an empty area for one item, "music A", which is an item corresponding to the priority "high", is placed. Also, when the number of songs selected at least once is one and the game transitions to the probability variable state, one item selected at least once by the player is placed in the history area, and "music A" corresponding to the priority "high" and "music J" corresponding to the priority "medium" are stored in an empty area for two items. Furthermore, when no songs have been selected at all, all three items specified in the priority specification table 222da are stored in the history area.

In this manner, in the fourth control example, when the number of times that a song has been selected is small (less than three songs selected at least once), the priority of the items to be placed in the empty area of the history area is predefined by the priority definition table 222da. This priority definition table 222da is configured so that the priority is higher for songs that are likely to be known by more players. By configuring in this manner, even when the number of times that a song has been selected is small, songs that are likely to be selected by a player can be placed in the history area. This improves the convenience of the player when selecting a song.

Next, the above-mentioned chorus loop determination table 222db will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 153. Fig. 153 is a diagram showing the contents of the chorus loop determination table 222db. As described above, the chorus loop determination table 222db is a data table that is referenced in order to determine whether or not to loop-play the chorus part that has finished playing again when the playback of the music piece data corresponding to the chorus part has finished during the final round.

As shown in FIG. 153, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db specifies the range of playback time of the chorus part of the currently played music piece and the number of winning balls (the number of game balls that entered the left specific winning hole 650a in the final round) that are determined to be loop playable in correspondence with each other. Here, as described above, the Pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the firing interval of game balls (the interval from firing one game ball to firing the next game ball) is 0.6 seconds at the shortest. During a jackpot, it is considered that in many cases, a player usually fires game balls at the shortest firing interval, so that in the final round, game balls enter (win) the left specific winning hole 650a at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. This allows the number of winning balls in the final round to roughly predict the time until the ending performance begins. The chorus loop discrimination table 222db specifies a correspondence such that if the remaining time until the start of the ending performance, predicted from the number of winning balls in the final round, is equal to or longer than the playback time of the chorus part, loop playback of the chorus part is permitted, and if the remaining time is less than the playback time of the chorus part, loop playback of the chorus part is restricted. Note that the length of the chorus part of the song with the shortest chorus part among songs A to Z and song a is 7 seconds. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db specifies only the range of playback times (L) of the chorus part equal to or longer than 7 seconds.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 153, for a range of chorus playback time (L) of 7 seconds or more and less than 7.6 seconds, the number of winning points for allowing loop playback of the chorus is as follows:
In the case where the number of winning balls is three or less, even if the fourth winning ball is detected immediately after the playback of the chorus part is finished, about 3.6 seconds (0.6 second intervals x 6 balls) can be secured, which is the time required to detect the 6 winning balls from the 5th to the 10th, before the final round is finished. In addition, as described above, the start timing of the ending performance can be delayed by a maximum of 4 seconds after the end of the final round of the big win. Therefore, since it is highly likely that 7.6 seconds or more will pass before the ending performance starts, if the playback time of the chorus part is less than 7.6 seconds, it is highly likely that the playback of the chorus part will finish before the ending performance starts, even if it is looped. Therefore, when the playback time (L) of the chorus part is in the range of less than 7.6 seconds, for the range where the number of winning balls is three or less,
The chorus loop determination table 222db is defined so as to permit loop playback of the chorus part.

Also, as shown in FIG. 153, the playback time (L) of the chorus part is 7.6 seconds or more and 8.
For the range of less than 2 seconds, the number of winning points that allow loop playback of the chorus part is set to "0 to 2
" is specified in correspondence with the above. If the number of winning balls is two or less, even if the third winning ball is detected immediately after the chorus part is finished, it will take about 4.2 seconds (0.6 second intervals x 7 balls) to detect the seven winning balls from the fourth to the tenth balls by the end of the final round.
The 8.2 seconds obtained by adding the 4 seconds for which the start of the ending performance can be delayed can be secured as the time for looping the chorus part. Therefore, if the chorus part has a playback time of less than 8.2 seconds, there is a high possibility that the playback of the chorus part will finish before the ending performance starts even if it is looped, so the chorus loop discrimination table 222db is stipulated to permit looping of the chorus part for the number of winning pieces in the range of 2 or less when the playback time (L) of the chorus part is in the range of 7.6 seconds or more and less than 8.2 seconds.

Also, as shown in FIG. 153, the playback time (L) of the chorus part is 8.2 seconds or more and 8.
For the range of less than 8 seconds, the number of winning points that allow loop playback of the chorus part is set to "0, 1
" is specified in correspondence with the above. If the number of winning balls is one or less, even if the second winning ball is detected immediately after the chorus part ends, it will take about 4.8 seconds (0.6 second intervals x 8 balls) to detect the 3rd to 10th winning balls by the end of the final round.
The 8.8 seconds obtained by adding the 4 seconds for which the start of the ending performance can be delayed can be secured as the time for looping the chorus part. Therefore, if the chorus part has a playback time of less than 8.8 seconds, there is a high possibility that the playback of the chorus part will finish before the ending performance starts even if it is looped, so the chorus loop discrimination table 222db is stipulated to permit looping of the chorus part for the number of winning pieces in the range of 1 or less when the playback time (L) of the chorus part is 8.2 seconds or more and less than 8.8 seconds.

Also, as shown in FIG. 153, the playback time (L) of the chorus part is 8.8 seconds or more and 9.
For a range of less than 4 seconds, only "0" is associated with the number of winning balls that allows loop playback of the chorus part. If the number of winning balls is 0, even if the first winning ball is detected immediately after the playback of the chorus part ends, the second winning ball,
The 9.4 seconds required to loop the chorus section can be secured by adding the 5.4 seconds (0.6 second intervals x 9) required to detect the 10th winning ball, plus the 4 seconds that can delay the start of the ending performance. Therefore, if the chorus section has a playback time of less than 9.4 seconds, there is a high possibility that the playback of the chorus section will end before the ending performance starts, even if it is looped. Therefore, if the playback time (L) of the chorus section is 8.8 seconds or more,
Furthermore, in the range of less than 9.4 seconds, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db is defined so as to permit loop playback of the chorus part for a range in which the number of winning balls is 0 or less.

In contrast, as shown in Fig. 153, if the playback time (L) of the chorus part is in the range of 9.4 seconds or more, loop playback is not permitted. This is because, regardless of the number of winning balls, there is a high possibility that the ending performance will start during playback of the chorus part.

In this way, in the fourth control example, when the playback of the chorus part is completed in the final round, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db is used to determine whether or not to loop-play the chorus part. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the chorus part can be loop-played before the ending performance starts (whether or not the possibility of the ending performance starting in the middle of the playback of the chorus part is low). Therefore, since it is possible to reduce the possibility of the ending performance starting in the middle of the playback of the chorus part, the chorus part can be played in its complete form during the final round of the big win (and the ending delay period).

Next, referring to Fig. 151 (b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. Fig. 151 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in Fig. 151 (b), the RAM 223 in this fourth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third control example (see Fig. 142 (b)) in that a loop discrimination flag 223da, a playback mode storage area 223db, and a winning number counter 223dc are added.

The loop discrimination flag 223da is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a period in which it is determined whether or not the chorus part can be looped. If this loop discrimination flag 223da is on, it indicates that it is a period in which it is determined whether or not the loop playback can be performed (i.e., the final round of the big win), and if it is off, it indicates that it is not a period in which it is determined whether or not the loop playback can be performed.
a is set to ON at the start of the final round of the jackpot (see S5421 in FIG. 161).
, is set to off at the start of the jackpot ending period (see S4484 in FIG. 159).

The playback mode storage area 223db stores the playback mode of the music (for 5R, 8R, 10R, 16R,
The replay mode storage area 223db stores data indicating the number of rounds in the big win and the replay mode corresponding to the lottery result of whether or not the pseudo small round performance can be performed (S5841, S5844 in FIG. 160).
2.) Based on the data stored in the playback mode storage area 223db, the playback mode when the music piece is determined is set.

The winning number counter 223dc counts the number of winnings of the right specific winning hole 65a,
The winning number counter 223dc is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a. The winning number counter 223dc is initially set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time the winning command outputted when the main control device 110 detects a winning at the right specific winning opening 65a or the left specific winning opening 650a is received (S in FIG. 159).
4486). Also, the value is reset to 0 when each round ends (see FIG. 159).
164. When the playback of the chorus part is finished in the final round of the big win (while the loop discrimination flag 223da is on), the value of the winning number counter 223dc and the chorus loop discrimination table 222db described above are referenced.
A determination is then made as to whether or not the chorus portion is to be loop-played (see S5905 in FIG. 158).

Next, referring to FIG. 154, the RAM 30 of the audio output device 226 in the fourth control example
FIG. 154 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 154, the RAM 303 in the fourth control example has the following configuration.
The third control example (and the second control example) differs from the RAM 303 in FIG. 126 in that a temporary selection flag 303g is added. Other configurations are as follows:
Since this is the same as the third control example described above, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The provisional song selection flag 303g is a flag indicating whether or not the chorus part of a song placed (provisionally selected) in the song selection area by the player's operation of the operation button 230 during the song selection period should be looped. When this provisional song selection flag 303g is on, it indicates that the chorus part should be looped, and when it is off, it indicates that the chorus part should not be looped. This provisional song selection flag 303g is set on every time the player operates the operation button 230 while the song selection menu screen is displayed and a new item is placed in the song selection area (see S9507 in FIG. 168). Also, when the player selects a song during the song selection period in a 5-round jackpot (center button CB),
When the player presses the button of the player, or when the song selection period ends in a big win other than the 5th round, the temporary song selection flag 303g is set to OFF (see S9233 and S9239 in FIG. 167). While the temporary song selection flag 303g is ON, the hook part is controlled to be played in a loop (see S
(See 9603).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 155 to FIG. 165, the voice lamp control device 1 in the fourth control example will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of FIG. 13 will be described. First, main process 11 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing main process 11.

In the main process 11 (see FIG. 155), steps S4101 to S4111 and steps S4114 to
In each process of S4118 and S4152, the main process 1 in the third control example is executed.
S4101 to S4111, S4113 to S4118, and S4152 of
The same processes as those in the main process 11 (FIG. 1) in the fourth control example are executed.
In the third control example (see FIG. 55), when the process of S4111 is completed, the operation detection process 10 in the third control example is performed.
(see FIG. 144), operation detection process 11 is executed (S4171). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 156, but this operation detection process 11 (S4171) monitors an operation (pressing) of the operation button 230, similarly to the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144),
This is a process for executing control according to the content of an operation when the operation is detected.

After the operation detection process 11 (S4171) is completed, next, in the final round of the big win, when the playback of the chorus part is completed, a chorus part loop process is executed to determine whether or not to loop the playback of the chorus part (S4172).
The details of the chorus part loop process (S41) will be described later with reference to FIG.
When step 72) is completed, command determination process 11 is executed to perform control according to the type of command received from the main control device 110 (S4173), and the process proceeds to S4162.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 156, the above-mentioned operation detection process 11 (S4171
) will be described in detail. As described above, this operation detection process 11 (S4171) is a process executed in place of the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example. In the operation detection process 11 (S4171), the same processes as those in S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110 in the operation detection process 10 (see FIG. 144) in the third control example are executed in each of the processes in S5101 to S5106, S5109, and S5110.

In the operation detection process 11 (see FIG. 156) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that an operation on the center button CB is detected (S5106: Y),
es), instead of the music determination process in the third control example (see FIG. 145),
(S5131), and then this process is terminated. This music selection process 11 (S5131) is a process for determining a music piece to be played after the music selection period ends or immediately after the selection, depending on the type of the selected item and the number of rounds of the big win. This music selection process 11 (S
Details of the block 5131 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the operation detection process 11 (see FIG. 156) in the fourth control example, when the process of S5110 is completed, the menu position pointer 223a,b updated in the process of S5109 is
The provisional song selection command for voice is set to loop-play the chorus part of the song corresponding to the value of (S5132), and the process ends. The provisional song selection command for voice set here is output to the audio output device 2 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155).
When the audio output device 226 receives the audio provisional song selection command,
The playback is set to start from the chorus part of the song indicated by the received command. This allows the player to operate the operation button 230 to play the chorus part corresponding to a new item placed in the song selection area each time the item is placed. This allows the player to select a song taking into account not only the song title but also the melody of the chorus part, allowing the player to more accurately select a favorite song. This further increases the convenience for the player.

Next, the above-mentioned music determination process 11 (S5131) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 157. As described above, this music determination process 11 (S5131) is a process executed in place of the music determination process in the third control example (see Fig. 145).

In the fourth control example, in the music determination process 11 (see FIG. 157), steps S5801 to S5
In each process of 806, S5 of the music selection process (see FIG. 145) in the third control example is performed.
The same processes as those in S5801 to S5806 are executed. Also, in the song selection process 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, the random selection of the song is not determined by the player in the process of S5801 (the most significant bit of the menu position pointer 223ab is ON (1
If it is determined that the playback mode is not the playback mode (S5801: No), then
The data stored in the database db is read out (S5811), and it is determined whether the read out data corresponds to the playback mode for 5R (S5812).

In the process of S5812, if it is determined that the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 5R is not stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (i.e., the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 8R, 10R, or 16R is stored) (S5812: No), the process is returned to S58
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5812 that the data corresponding to the reproduction mode for 5R is stored in the reproduction mode storage area 223db (S5812: Y
es), sets an audio loop cancel command for notifying the cancellation of loop playback of the chorus part (S5813), and ends this process. The audio loop cancel command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). When the audio output device 226 receives the audio loop cancel command, it cancels the loop playback of the chorus part (i.e., sets the provisional song selection flag 303g to OFF). As a result, when the playback time of the currently played chorus part ends, the chorus part is not played in a loop, and playback of the part (music data) specified in the next playback order of the chorus part is set. After that, each piece of music data is played in order according to the playback order of the music data. As a result, in a 5-round jackpot, which has a small number of rounds and a short period until the jackpot ends (i.e., a period during which the music can be played), the time from the time the music is determined (
That is, the music can be played without waiting for the end of the music selection period. Therefore, in a five-round jackpot, which has a small number of rounds, the music can be played by effectively utilizing the relatively short period until the end of the jackpot.

In the song determination process 11 (see FIG. 157) in the fourth control example, when the process of S5805 is completed, the playback of the song for the song selection period is set (S5814), and the process returns to S5806.
When the random song selection is determined (S5801: Yes), the chorus part of the song determined by the lottery using the random song selection table 222ca is not played, and the song for the song selection period is set to be played. This is to prevent an irregular selection method in which it is determined repeatedly whether the chorus part of "song a" will be played by determining the random song selection many times during the song selection period, and to configure so that it is possible to check only once whether "song a" will be played per one big win.

Next, the chorus part loop process (S4172) described above will be described with reference to Fig. 158. Fig. 158 is a flow chart showing this chorus part loop process (S4172). As described above, this chorus part loop process (S4172) is a process for determining whether or not to loop the chorus part when the chorus part has finished playing in the final round of a big win.

In the chorus part loop process (see FIG. 158), first, it is determined whether or not the loop discrimination flag 223da is on (S5901). If it is determined that the loop discrimination flag 223da is off (S5901: No), there is no possibility of looping the chorus part, so this process is terminated.
If it is determined that the part currently being played is on (S5901: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the part currently being played is the chorus (S5902). If it is determined that the chorus is not being played (S5902: No), there is no possibility of looping the chorus, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5902 that the part being played is the chorus part (S5902: Yes), the remaining playback time of the chorus part (remaining playback time timer 223b
If it is determined that the remaining playback time of the chorus part (the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb) is not 0 (S5903: No), this process ends in order to continue playback of the chorus part. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5903 that the remaining playback time of the chorus part (the value of the remaining playback time timer 223bb) has reached 0 (S5903: Yes), the process of S5904 to S5907 is executed to determine whether or not loop playback of the chorus part can be executed.

More specifically, first, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db (see FIG. 153) is read (S5904), and based on the contents of the chorus loop discrimination table 222db read, the playback time (L) of the chorus part of the currently played song, and the value of the winning number counter 223dc, a judgment is made as to whether or not loop playback of the chorus part can be performed (S5905). As described above, the chorus loop discrimination table 222db (see FIG. 153) is set to permit loop playback of the chorus part when there is a high possibility that the chorus part will end before the ending performance starts.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the determination made in the process of S5905 corresponds to the execution of loop playback (S5906). If it is determined that the result of the determination made in the process of S5905 does not correspond to the execution of loop playback (S5906: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination made in the process of S5906 corresponds to the execution of loop playback (S5906
: Yes), and set an audio loop playback command that indicates loop playback of the chorus part (S59
07), terminating this process. The audio loop playback command set here is output to the audio output device 226 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process 11 (see FIG. 155). When the audio output device 226 receives the audio loop playback command, it plays the chorus part that has just finished playing from the beginning again. This allows the player to hear the chorus part, which is the most exciting part of the song, a greater number of times before the ending performance begins. This provides the player with a greater sense of satisfaction.

Next, referring to FIG. 159, the hit-related process 11 (S4381) in this fourth control example
This winning-related process 11 (S4381) is a process executed in place of the winning-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example. Of the winning-related process 11 (S4381) in the fourth control example, S4401 to S4404, S4406, S
In each process of S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466, the processes of S4401 to S4404 of the hit-related process 10 (see FIG. 146) in the third control example are respectively performed.
, S4406, S4407, S4409, S4462, and S4464 to S4466 are executed.

In addition, in the winning-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the opening command is included in the commands received from the main control device 110 (S4404: Yes), the pseudo small number round lottery process 11 is executed (S448) instead of the pseudo small number round lottery process in the third control example (see FIG. 147).
1), and the process proceeds to S4406. Details will be described later with reference to Fig. 160, but this pseudo-small round selection process 11 (S4481) is a process for determining whether or not a pseudo-small round performance can be executed, similar to the pseudo-small round selection process in the third control example (see Fig. 147).

In addition, in the winning-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the command received from the main control device 110 includes a round number command (S4407: Yes), the round number command process 11 is executed (S44) instead of the round number command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example.
The details will be described later with reference to Fig. 161, but this number of rounds command process 11 (S4482) is a process for performing control according to the number of rounds indicated by the number of rounds command.

In addition, in the winning-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S4462 that the commands received from the main control device 110 include an interval command (S4462: Yes), the interval command process 11 is executed (S4
The details will be described later with reference to Fig. 164, but this interval command process 11 (S4483) is a process for performing control according to the type of interval (which round the interval is).

In addition, in the winning-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in this fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S4409 that the commands received from the main control device 110 include an ending command (S4409: Yes), the loop determination flag 223da is set to OFF, and the winning number counter 223dc is reset to 0 (S4484),
The process proceeds to S4464. By the process of S4484, the period for determining whether or not to loop the chorus part can be ended.

In the winning-related process 11 (see FIG. 159) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S4465 that the commands received from the main control device 110 do not include a music command (S4465: No), it is then determined whether or not the commands received from the main control device 110 include a winning command (S4485). If it is determined that a winning command is included (S4485: Yes), the winning number counter 223dc
The process is terminated by adding 1 to the value of the winning number counter 223dc (S4486). By updating the value of the winning number counter 223dc in response to the winning command, the progress of each round of the jackpot (roughly the remaining time until the end of the round) can be grasped. Therefore, in the final round, whether there is enough time left to play the chorus part to the end can be accurately determined by taking into account the counter value of the winning number counter 223dc. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4485 that the winning command is not included in the command received from the main control device 110 (S4485: No), the process is terminated.

Next, the pseudo-small round lottery process 11 (S4481) described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-small round lottery process 11 (S4481). As described above, this pseudo-small round lottery process 11 (S4481) is a process executed in place of the pseudo-small round lottery process (see FIG. 147) in the third control example. Of the pseudo-small round lottery process 11 (S4481) in the fourth control example,
In each of the processes of S5831 to S5838, the same processes as those of S5831 to S5838 in the pseudo small round lottery process in the third control example (see FIG. 147) are executed.

In addition, in the pseudo small round lottery process 11 in the fourth control example (see FIG. 160), S5
In the process of S5834, when it is determined that the pseudo short round effect is to be executed (S5834:
Yes), and simultaneously with the lottery for whether or not the pseudo-small number of rounds performance can be performed, data indicating the playback mode of the music determined by the lottery using the pseudo-small number of rounds lottery table 222cb (see FIG. 152(a)) is stored in the playback mode storage area 223db (S5841), and the process proceeds to S5835. When a music is determined during the music selection period based on the data stored by the process of S5841, the playback mode of the determined music can be appropriately set. This allows only the sound mode to be set to the playback mode corresponding to the number of rounds of the actual big win in a part (a predetermined ratio) of the cases in which the pseudo-small number of rounds performance (a performance that makes it seem as if the (disadvantageous) big win has a number of rounds less than the actual number of rounds) is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player realize from the sound mode that the pseudo-small number of rounds performance has been performed before the continuation performance is performed. Therefore, a player who is able to realize that the pseudo-small number of rounds performance is being performed early can have a sense of superiority.

In addition, in the pseudo small round lottery process 11 in the fourth control example (see FIG. 160), S5
In the process of 831, if it is determined that the currently won jackpot is neither jackpot A nor jackpot D (i.e., it is any of jackpot B, C, E, or F) (S5831: No),
In addition, in the process of S5834, if it is determined that the pseudo short round effect is not to be executed (S5834: No), data indicating the playback mode of the music corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot is stored in the playback mode storage area 223db (S5842), and this process is terminated. Specifically, if the current jackpot is either jackpot B or C (5-round jackpot),
While storing data corresponding to the playback mode of "for 5R", either jackpot E or F (1
If the current jackpot is a jackpot A (8 round jackpot) and the pseudo short round performance is not executed, data corresponding to the playback mode for "8R/10R" is stored in the playback mode storage area 223db, while data corresponding to the playback mode for "8R/10R" is stored in the playback mode storage area 223db.
Furthermore, when the pseudo short round performance is not executed, data corresponding to the playback mode for "16R" is stored.

By executing this pseudo-small round lottery process 11 (see FIG. 160), the music playback mode (the timing at which music playback starts and the music playback position) can be changed according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Then, in some (a predetermined percentage) of the cases in which the pseudo-small round performance is executed, it is possible to set the playback mode in which only the sound mode corresponds to the actual number of rounds of the jackpot. This makes it possible for the player to sense from the sound mode that the pseudo-small round performance has been executed before the continuation performance is executed. Therefore, a sense of superiority can be given to players who are able to sense early that the pseudo-small round performance is being executed.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 161, the above-mentioned round number command process 11 (
The details of this round number command process 11 (S4482) will be described below.
As described above, this is a process that is executed instead of the number of rounds command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example.

In the round number command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in this fourth control example, S54
In each of the processes of S5401 to S5406 and S5411, the same processes as those of S5401 to S5406 and S5411 in the number of rounds command process 10 (see FIG. 148) in the third control example are executed. Also, in the number of rounds command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in the fourth control example, if it is determined in the process of S5402 that the number of rounds notified by the current number of rounds command is the final round (S5402: Yes),
Then, the loop discrimination flag 223da is set to ON (S5421), and the process proceeds to S5403. By setting the loop discrimination flag 223da to ON in the process of S5421, it is possible to determine whether or not to loop-play the chorus part when the playback time of the chorus part has elapsed during the final round. This increases the chances that the chorus part will be played during one big win.

In addition, in the round number command process 11 (see FIG. 161) in this fourth control example, S5
In the process of 406, if it is determined that the number of rounds notified by the current round number command is the first round (S5406: Yes), instead of the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the third control example (and the second control example), the music selection period setting process 11 is executed (S5422), and this process is terminated. Details of this music selection period setting process 11 (S5422) will be described with reference to FIG. 162.

FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the music selection period setting process 11 (S5422).
The processes of S5213, S5221, and S5222 are the same as those of S5205, S5206, and S5207 of the music selection period setting process (see FIG. 132) in the third control example (and the second control example).
The same processes as those in S5208 to S5213, S5221, and S5222 are executed.

In the music selection period setting process 11 (see FIG. 162) in the fourth control example, first, a history area setting process for setting items to be arranged in the history area is executed (S5231), and the process proceeds to S5205. For details of this history area setting process (S5231),
Explanation will be given with reference to Figure 163.

FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing the history area setting process (S5231). As described above, this history area setting process (S5231) is a process for setting items to be placed in the history area. In this history area setting process (S5231), first, the data stored in the song selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105(b)) is read (S52
71), and it is determined whether there are three or more songs that have been played once or more (S5272).
In the process of 272, if it is determined that the number of songs with the number of times of playback of 1 or more is less than three (S
5272: No), among the data defined in the song selection count storage area 223ac, all data with a playback count of 1 or more is read out (S5273), and the read out data is stored in the history area (menu position pointer 223
The data is stored in the history area (storage area corresponding to the range of values of ab, "17H" to "19H") in descending order of the number of times of reproduction (S5274). Next, the priority definition table 22 is used to determine the remaining area (vacant area) in the history area in which no data was stored in the process of S5274.
The data is stored in order of priority from highest to lowest as defined in .2da (see FIG. 152(b)) (S5275), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5272, if it is determined that the number of songs with a playback count of 1 or more is three or more (S5272: Yes), three pieces of data are read from the song selection count storage area 223ac in descending order of playback count (S5276), and the three pieces of data thus read are stored in the history area of the item layout storage area 223aa in descending order of playback count (S5277).
This process ends.

By executing this history area setting process (see FIG. 163), even if the number of times that a song has been selected is small (the number of songs selected at least once is less than three), it is possible to arrange items that are likely to be selected by a player (items with high priority as defined in the priority definition table 222da) in the empty areas of the history area. More specifically,
The opening songs (theme songs), ending songs, insert songs, etc. of the works that served as the motif for
Music that a player who has seen the motif work in the past has almost certainly heard is defined as a high priority item. By configuring in this way, even if the number of times a song has been selected is small, items that are likely to be known by more players can be placed in the history area. In other words, regardless of the number of times a song has been selected, songs that are likely to be selected by a player can be placed in the history area, thereby improving the convenience for the player when selecting a song.

Next, the above-mentioned interval command process 11 (S4483) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 164.
83), in each process of S5501 to S5506 and S5511 to S5514,
S550 of the interval command process 10 (see FIG. 149) in the third control example
The same processes as those in steps S5501 to S5506 and S5511 to S5514 are executed.

In addition, in the interval command process 11 (see FIG. 164) in the fourth control example,
When the process of 5501 is completed, the winning number counter 223dc is reset to 0 (S5521), and the process proceeds to S5511. By configuring the winning number counter 223dc to be reset every time an interval command is received, the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning hole (the right specific winning hole 65a or the left specific winning hole 650a) in each round of the jackpot can be accurately grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In the interval command process 11 (see FIG. 164) in the fourth control example,
In the process of 5506, if it is determined that the interval period notified by the current interval command is the interval period after the end of the first round (S5
506: Yes), a selected music setting process is executed (S5522) to set the playback of the music selected (decided) by the player during the music selection period (i.e., the first round), and this process ends. The details of this selected music setting process (S5522) will be described with reference to FIG.

165 is a flow chart showing the selected music setting process (S5522). In this selected music setting process (S5522), first, a music piece corresponding to the data stored in the music type storage area 223bd is identified (S5551). Next,
The playback mode corresponding to the data stored in the database is identified (S5552).
It is determined whether the regeneration mode specified in the process of 5552 is a regeneration mode for 5R (
If it is determined that the playback mode is for 5R (S5553: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the music during the music selection period is being played (S5554). If it is determined in the process of S5554 that the music during the music selection period is being played (S5554: Yes),
During the song selection period, this means that the song selection menu screen has never been displayed or the player has decided on random song selection, and playback of the song corresponding to the data stored in the song type storage area 223bd has not been set. Therefore, a selected song command for voice is set to play the song specified by the process of S5551 from the chorus part (S555
5) and proceed to S5559.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5554 that the music for the music selection period is not being played (S5554: No), this means that the player displayed the music selection menu screen during the music selection period and selected something other than "random music selection" (i.e., any of music A to Z). As described above, when a music is selected with the playback mode for 5R set, the loop playback of the chorus part of the music is released at that point, and the music is set to start playing from the playback position that was being played at the time of selection according to the playback order of the music data. In other words, since there is no need to newly set the playback of a music at the end of the music selection period, the process of S5555 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5559.

In addition, in the process of S5553, if it is determined that the regeneration mode specified in the process of S5552 is not the regeneration mode for 5R (S5553: No), it is then determined whether or not the regeneration mode specified in the process of S5552 is the regeneration mode for 16R (S5556).
In the process of S5556, if it is determined that the playback mode for 16R has not been specified (the playback mode for 8R and 10R has been specified) (S5556: No), a voice selection song command for playing the song specified in the process of S5551 from the A-melody 1 portion is set (S5557).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5556 that the identified playback mode is a 16R playback mode (S5556: Yes), a selected song command for audio is set for playing the song identified in the process of S5551 from its intro portion (S5558), and the process proceeds to S5559.

In the process of S5559, the data corresponding to the number of times the currently played song was selected in the song selection count storage area 223ac is incremented by 1 (S5559), the song selection menu screen is closed, and the menu display flag 223ae and the song selection permission flag 223ad are set to OFF (S5559).
5560) and then terminate this process.

By executing this selected music piece setting process (see FIG. 165), at the end of the music selection period,
The playback of the music piece selected by the player can be set in a playback mode corresponding to the data stored in the playback mode storage area 223db.

<Regarding control process of audio output device in fourth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 166 to Fig. 169. First, main process 11 executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 166. This main process 11 is a process executed in place of main process 9 (see Fig. 136) in the third control example (and the second control example).

In this main process 11 (see FIG. 166), steps S9003 to S9007, S9011,
In each process of S9013, the same processes as those of S9003 to S9007, S9011, and S9013 in main process 9 (see FIG. 136) in the third control example (and the second control example) are executed. In main process 11 (see FIG. 166) in the fourth control example, when the process of S9011 ends, command determination process 11 is executed (S902) instead of command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example (and the second control example).
1), and the process proceeds to S9013. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 167, this command determination process 11 (S9021) is a process for executing control according to the type of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, similar to the command determination process 9 (see FIG. 137) in the third control example.

In the main process 11 (see FIG. 166) in the fourth control example, when the process of S9013 is completed, the next step is to select the tune that the player placed in the tune selection area (provisionally selected tune) during the tune selection period.
Execute a provisional selection period process for looping the chorus part of the item (music) (S90
The provisional music selection period process (S9022) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Next, the above-mentioned command determination process 11 (S9021) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 167. Fig. 167 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 11 (S9021). As described above, this command determination process 11 (S9021) is a process that is executed in place of the command determination process 9 (see Fig. 137) in the third control example. Of this command determination process 11 (see Fig. 167), S9201 to S9205, S9207, S92
The processes of S9214, S9221, and S9222 are the same as those of S9201 to S9205, S9207, S9214, and S9226 of the command determination process 9 in the third control example (see FIG. 137).
The same processes as those in steps S9221 and S9222 are executed.

In addition, in the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 167) in the fourth control example, S9205
When the process of is completed, the pointer value corresponding to the part indicated by the voice selection song command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the music pointer 303b, and
A timer value corresponding to the playback time of the part to be played is set in the music timer 303d (S9231), and the process proceeds to S9207. In addition, when the process of S9207 is completed,
Playback is set from the music data corresponding to the part indicated by the audio selection music command received from the audio lamp control device 113 (S9232), the temporary music selection flag 303g is set to off (S9233), and this processing is terminated.

In addition, in the command determination process 11 (see FIG. 167) in the fourth control example, S9204
In the process of S9234, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands do not include a selected song command for voice (S9204: No), it is then determined whether the unprocessed commands include a loop playback command for voice (i.e., a command for instructing loop playback of the chorus part in the final round) (S9234).
s), reset the timer value in the music timer 303d corresponding to the playback time of the chorus portion that will end playback, and reset the playback of the chorus portion that will end playback (S9235), and end this process. By executing the process of S9235, the chorus portion can be loop-played in the final round of the big win. Therefore, the chorus portion can be played more times during one big win, which can increase the player's interest.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9234 that the unprocessed commands do not include a voice loop playback command, it is then determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a voice provisional song selection command (a command for instructing loop playback of the chorus part of the song newly placed in the song selection area) (S9236). If it is determined in the process of S9236 that the unprocessed commands include a voice provisional song selection command (S9236: Yes),
The process then executes a temporary song selection command process for looping the chorus part of the item (song) newly placed (temporarily selected) in the song selection area (S9237), and ends the process. The details of this temporary song selection command process (S9237) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in the process of S9236, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands do not include a voice temporary song selection command (S9236: No), it is then determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a voice loop release command (S9238).
In the process, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include an audio loop cancel command (a command to cancel the loop playback of the chorus part of the provisionally selected song in the 5-round jackpot) (S9238: Yes), the provisionally selected song flag 303g is turned off to cancel the loop playback of the chorus part of the provisionally selected song (S9239),
This process ends. By canceling the loop playback of the chorus part in the process of S9239, after the playback time of the chorus part has elapsed, the music data can be played in order according to the playback order of the music data. This allows the music to be played from the time the music is decided (i.e., without waiting for the end of the music selection period) in a 5-round jackpot, where the number of rounds is small and the period until the end of the jackpot (i.e., the period during which the music can be played) is likely to be short. Therefore, in a 5-round jackpot, where the number of rounds is small, the music can be played by effectively utilizing the relatively short period until the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9238 that the unprocessed commands do not include an audio loop playback command, the processing proceeds to S9221.

Next, the above-mentioned temporary song selection command process (S9237) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 168. As described above, this temporary song selection command process (S9237) is a process for looping the chorus part of the item (music) newly placed (temporarily selected) in the song selection area.

In the temporary music selection command process (see FIG. 168), first, it is determined whether or not the temporary music selection command indicates random music selection (S9501). If it is determined that the temporary music selection command indicates random music selection (S9501: Yes), playback of music for the music selection period is set (S9502).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9501 that the received tentative song selection command is not a tentative song selection command indicating random song selection (S9501: No), the audio file (a group of music data) corresponding to the song indicated by the command is written to the audio file storage area 30.
2a and stores the read audio file in the music data group storage area 303a (S9503).

When the process of S9503 is completed, the pointer value corresponding to the chorus 1 part of the song notified by the command is set to the music pointer 303b, and the timer value corresponding to the playback time of the chorus 1 part is set to the music timer 303d (S9504). Next, the maximum value of the music pointer 303b is stored in the maximum value storage area 303c (S9505).
Then, the playback of the music data corresponding to the chorus 1 portion is set (S9506).Then, the temporary music selection flag 303g is set to ON (S9507), and this process ends.

By executing this provisional song selection command process (see FIG. 168), loop playback of the first chorus of the provisionally selected song can be started. This allows the player to select a song of their choice by taking into consideration not only the song name displayed on the song selection menu screen, but also the melody of the chorus of the song. This improves the convenience of the player when selecting a song.

Next, the details of the provisional song selection period process (S9022) executed in the above-mentioned main process 11 (see FIG. 166) will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 169. As described above, this provisional song selection period process (S9022) is a process for looping the chorus part of a song when the song has been provisionally selected (placed in the song selection area).

In this temporary music selection period process (see FIG. 169), first, it is determined whether or not the temporary music selection flag 303g is on (S9601), and if it is determined that the temporary music selection flag 303g is off (S9601: No), this means that a music piece has not been temporarily selected, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the temporary music selection flag 303g is on (S9601: Yes) in the process of S9601, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the playback of the music data being played (S9602), and if it is determined that it is not time to end the playback (S9603),
9602: No), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9602, when it is determined that it is the timing to end the playback of the music data being played (the value of the music timer 303d is 0) (S9602: Yes),
The playback start of the chorus 1 part is reset (S9603), and the timer 303d is set to start playback of the chorus 1 part.
The playback time corresponding to the part is then reset (S9604), and this process ends.

By executing this provisional selection period process (see FIG. 169), the first chorus of the provisionally selected song (arranged in the song selection area) can be repeatedly played back, making it easier for the player to select a favorite song, thereby improving convenience for the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, when there are few items (less than three) to be set in the history area, the priority order (priority) of the items to be placed in the empty area of the history area (area where items with high selection frequency are not placed) is specified. This priority order is set so that the higher the music that is likely to be known by more players (for example, the theme music (opening music), ending music, insert music, etc. of the work that is the motif of the pachinko machine 10) the higher the priority order. By configuring in this way, even if the number of times of selection of music is small, music that is likely to be selected by the player can be placed in the history area, thereby improving the convenience of the player.

In addition, in the fourth control example, when the playback of the chorus part is completed during the final round, it is determined whether or not to repeat the playback of the chorus part according to the progress of the final round. More specifically, if there is a high possibility that the chorus part can be completed between the end of the playback of the chorus part and the end of the final round (or the end of the period during which the ending performance can be delayed), the chorus part is repeatedly played, and if there is a high possibility that the chorus part will end halfway (the ending performance will start halfway through the playback of the chorus part), the chorus part is not repeated and is set to be played according to the playback order of the music data. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the possibility that the chorus part can be played in its complete form in the final round without being cut off halfway.

Furthermore, in the fourth control example, during the song selection period, the player operates the operation button 230 to place a different item in the song selection area (provisionally select a song), and the chorus part of the song corresponding to the placed item is played. This allows the player to select a song not only based on the song name displayed on the song selection menu screen, but also based on the most characteristic melody of the chorus part of the song. In addition, in the fourth control example, when a song is determined during the song selection period, the playback start position and playback start timing of the song are changed according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (16 rounds), playback is started from the beginning of the song (intro part) when the song selection period ends, and in the case of a jackpot with 10 rounds and 8 rounds, playback is started from the A-melody part of the song (i.e., skipping the intro part) when the song selection period ends. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (5 rounds), the song will continue to play from the continuation of the chorus part that is already being played when the player selects the song (the song will start playing before the selection period ends). By configuring it in this way, the player can listen to the chorus part for a longer period of time even in the case of a small number of rounds.

In the fourth control example, when there are few items to be arranged in the history area (when the number of songs selected by the player at least once is less than three), data indicating songs with higher priorities as defined in the priority definition table 222da are stored in the empty areas of the history area in order, but this is not limited to this. For example, data indicating songs with higher priorities may be stored in the item arrangement storage area 223aa in order, following the items arranged in the history area, regardless of the number of empty areas in the history area. By configuring in this way, even if the player has selected many songs, it is possible to set an arrangement that allows songs that are relatively likely to be selected by the player (high priority) to be moved to the song selection area with a relatively small number of operations.

In the fourth control example, when determining the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, among the items with one or more selections, a maximum of three items are stored in the order of the most selected items in the range (history area in the item arrangement storage area 223aa) that can be selected with a small number of operations in each storage area of the item arrangement storage area 223aa. If the number of items arranged in the history area is less than three, an item with zero selections is added to be arranged in an empty area of the history area, but this control is not limited to the control when determining the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen. It can be diverted as long as it is a control that sets a predetermined number of data in a specific range of storage areas in a storage means such as a RAM. In other words, it can be diverted as long as it is a case where a predetermined number of data is set in the first storage area and the second storage area of the storage means, and data that satisfies a specific condition is stored in the first storage area, and other data is arranged in the second storage area. Specifically, for example, in a predetermined menu screen (for example, a game menu screen or a menu screen for selecting a performance mode in a reach performance) in which one item is selected from a plurality of items, multiple items including items selectable by the player and items that cannot be selected by the player may be simultaneously displayed (for example, a menu in which the number of selectable items increases each time the player achieves a predetermined mission (task) that is set in advance) may be diverted to a control when setting data for preferentially arranging items selectable by the player in a specific display range and arranging the remaining items in other display ranges. In this case, first, data corresponding to the items to be displayed in the specific display range is set. Then, when a sufficient number of items to be displayed in the specific display range can be set, the remaining data is set as items to be displayed in other display ranges. On the other hand, when the number of items that is less than the number of items that can be displayed in the specific display range is selectable by the player, data may be set so that items to be displayed in the specific display range are displayed in the order of priority from among the items that cannot be selected by the player. In this case, the method of setting the priority may be, for example, to set a higher priority for an item that is easier to switch to a selectable state (an item that switches to a selectable state by completing a mission with a relatively easy difficulty level).

In the fourth control example, when the number of items (items selected once or more) to be arranged in the history area is less than three, the priority (priority order) of the items to be added and arranged in the history area is as follows:
The most frequently used songs in the works that inspired the pachinko machine 10 (opening songs (
In the above embodiment, the priority is set to a higher level for songs (theme songs, ending songs, insert songs, etc.), but this is not limited to the above. The priority level may be set arbitrarily, and for example, the priority level may be set to a higher level for songs that are used more frequently in games on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, songs played during reach effects, etc.). Also, for example, the priority level may be set so that the player can set the priority level during normal play.

In the fourth control example, when there are few songs with one or more selections (less than three), songs with high priority as defined in the priority definition table 222da are preferentially arranged in the history area, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to counting the number of times selected by the player during the jackpot selection period in the song selection count storage area 223ac, the number of times songs played during normal play (for example, songs played by developing into a super reach performance) may be counted. Then, while the number of selections by the player is small, songs played many times during normal play may be stored in an empty area of the history area (the remaining memory area after storing songs with one or more selections by the player). By configuring in this way, songs that the player has listened to during play can be arranged in the history area. In most cases when a player spontaneously selects a song, the player selects a song that he or she has listened to, so it is possible to select a song that the player has definitely listened to (
By arranging songs (menu items) that are likely to be selected by the player in the history area (music already played during normal play), it is possible to arrange songs (menu items) that the player will likely select in a range that can be selected with a small number of operations (three or less) on the operation button 230. This makes it possible to further increase convenience for the player. This modification will be described in more detail with reference to Figs. 170 to 172.

<Modification of the fourth control example>
170 is a diagram showing the number of times a song is played during a performance storage area 223dd, which is added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in a modified example of the fourth control example. This number of times a song is played during a performance storage area 223dd is a storage area for storing the number of times a song is played (used) in a variable display performance executed during normal play, for each type of song. As shown in FIG. 170, the number of times a song is played during a performance storage area 223dd stores, for each type of song (song A to song Z),
The area is configured so that data indicating the number of times the song has been played (used) during normal play is stored in association with the song. That is, the area is configured similarly to the selection count storage area 223ac (see FIG. 105(b)). The example of FIG. 170 illustrates a case in which the song C and the song Z are each played once during normal play, and no other songs are played.

The number of times each song is played in the playback count storage area 223dd during the performance is incremented by 1 when a song is played in the determined variable pattern performance after the detailed mode of the variable pattern performance is determined and a display variable pattern command is set in the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in this modified example (see S4532 in FIG. 172). The number of times each song is played (used) during the performance is referenced when setting items to be placed in the history area in the initial placement of the music selection menu screen (S5281 in FIG. 171).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the modified example of the fourth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the voice lamp control device 1 in this modified example will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of FIG.
The history area setting process 12 (S5241) in this modified example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the history area setting process 12 (S5241). This history area setting process 12 (S5241) is executed in place of the history area setting process (see FIG. 163) in the fourth control example, and is a process for determining items (music) to be arranged in the history area on the music selection menu screen, similar to the history area setting process (see FIG. 163).

In the history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171) in the modified example of the fourth control example,
In each process of S5271 to S5277, the history area setting process (
In the history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171) of this modification, when the process of S5274 is completed, data from the playback count storage area 223dd during performance (data corresponding to the number of times each song was played during normal play) is read (S5281), and it is determined whether or not the number of songs played one or more times during normal play is equal to or greater than the number of empty areas in which no data was stored in the history area in the process of S5274 (S5282).

In the processing of S5282, if it is determined that the number of songs played at least once during normal play is equal to or greater than the number of empty areas in the history area (S5282: Yes), data corresponding to songs equal to the number of empty areas in the history area is read out in order of the number of times played stored in the number of times played during performance storage area 223dd (S5283), and the read data is stored in the empty areas in the history area in order of the number of times played (S5284), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5282 that the number of songs that have been played one or more times during normal play is less than the number of empty areas in the history area (S5282: No), the songs that have been played one or more times during normal play are read (S5285), all of the read songs are stored in the empty areas of the history area (S5286), and processing transitions to S5275.

By executing this history area setting process 12 (see FIG. 171), when the number of times that a song has been selected by a player is small, songs that the player has listened to during normal play can be arranged in the history area. Therefore, songs (items) that are likely to be selected by the player can be preferentially arranged in the history area, thereby improving convenience for the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 172, the variable display setting process 12 (S4
FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 12 (S4182). This variable display setting process 12 (S4182) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the fourth control example (and the third control example), and in the same way as the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150), the third symbol display device 81
This is a process for generating and setting a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control unit 110 in order to execute a variable performance (variable display performance).

In the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in the modified example of the fourth control example, S4
In each process of S4501 to S4509, S4521, and S4522, the steps of S4501 to S4509 in the variable display setting process 10 (see FIG. 150) in the fourth control example (and the third control example) are respectively
The same processes as those of S4509, S4521, and S4522 are executed. In the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 172) in the modified example of the fourth control example, when the process of S4504 is completed, it is then determined whether the variable display performance executed by the display variable pattern command set in the process of S4504 is a performance content that accompanies the reproduction of music (
S4531). Note that in this modified example, when a super reach effect or a special reach effect is executed, a part of a piece of music corresponding to the reach type is played back.

In the process of S4531, if it is determined that the current variable display performance involves the reproduction of music (S4531: Yes), then, the number of times of reproduction during performance storage area 223d
d, the number of times of playback corresponding to the music played during the current variable display performance is incremented by 1 (S4532), and the process proceeds to S4521.
If it is determined that the current variable display effect is an effect content that does not involve the reproduction of music (for example, a variable display effect corresponding to a completely wrong variable pattern) (S4531: No), S4532
The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S4521.

As described above, in the modified example of the fourth control example, when the number of songs selected by the player is small (less than three), images corresponding to songs (audio effects) played (executed) during execution of the variable display effect during normal play are preferentially placed in the history area (menu position selectable with fewer operations). By configuring in this way, even when the number of songs selected by the player is small (less than three), songs that the player has listened to can be placed in the history area. Therefore, regardless of the number of times the song has been selected, songs (menu items) that the player is likely to select can be placed in a range that can be selected with fewer operations (within three operations) on the operation button 230, thereby further improving the convenience for the player.

In this modified example, when the number of times that a song is selected is small (the number of songs selected at least once is less than three), images (items) corresponding to songs that have been played during normal play are preferentially arranged in the empty areas of the history area, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as items to be arranged in the history area, a song that has been played many times during normal play may be preferentially arranged, and when an empty area is generated in the history area, images corresponding to songs that have been selected (decided) many times by the player during the song selection period may be arranged in the empty area. Also, for example, after a song that has been selected many times by the player is arranged in the history area, images corresponding to up to three (a predetermined upper limit number) songs in descending order of the number of times that they have been played during normal play may be arranged following the image corresponding to the song that has been selected many times, regardless of whether an empty area is generated in the history area.

In the fourth control example and its modified example, when the player provisionally selects a random song selection, and when the player decides on a random song selection, a song for the song selection period is played.
Although the configuration is such that the music determined by random lottery cannot be identified until the selection period has elapsed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the playback of the chorus part of the music determined by random lottery is started at the time when the player selects the random music selection. Also, for example, the music to be played at the time when the player provisionally selects the random music selection may be determined by lottery, and the loop playback of the chorus part may be started in the same manner as other items. By configuring in this manner, the music determined by lottery can be identified by the player during the music selection period, so that if the player does not like the music determined by lottery, an opportunity to reselect other items can be given. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be further improved. In these cases, the configuration may be such that the music determined by random lottery is re-determined every time the player provisionally selects or determines the random music selection during one music selection period, or the music to be played when the random music selection is determined may be fixed to the music first determined by lottery during one music selection period. By configuring the game so that the song to be selected by random lottery is redone each time a random song is provisionally selected or determined, the player can be given the option of repeating the provisional selection or determination of a random song until a favorite song is played during the song selection period. Therefore, the player can enjoy playing during the jackpot as one of the pleasures of the song selection period, whether or not a favorite song can be played by random song selection, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In contrast, if the song to be played when a random song is determined is fixed to the song that was first determined by lottery in one song selection period, the chance of whether or not "song a," which will confirm a special jackpot when it is played, is determined by lottery is increased once in one jackpot.
Therefore, when the random selection is provisionally selected or determined, the number of times can be limited.
Even if " is not played back, the player can be made to believe that he or she just happened to lose the lottery, thereby maintaining the player's sense of expectation for a special jackpot.

In the fourth control example and its modified example, the chorus part of the provisionally selected music during the music selection period is looped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the playback position of the provisionally selected music can be determined arbitrarily. Also, the music played based on the provisional selection and the music played after the music selection period may have different volumes. For example, by lowering the volume of the provisionally selected music and increasing the volume of the music played after the music selection period, the player can listen to the music selected by the player at a higher volume. Thus, the player who listens to the music can feel a greater sense of satisfaction. Furthermore, by increasing the volume of the provisionally selected music, the player can more clearly recognize the melody of the chorus part of the provisionally selected music during the music selection period. Therefore, it is easier to determine whether the music is a favorite or not, and convenience for the player when selecting music can be improved.

In the above fourth control example and its modified example, in some cases when a pseudo-shortened round performance is decided, music is played in a playback mode different from the playback mode of the music corresponding to the number of rounds announced by the pseudo-shortened round performance, so that it is possible to detect in advance whether or not a pseudo-shortened round performance is being executed, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, instead of the playback mode, a part of the display mode is set to a mode corresponding to a round number different from the round number notified by the pseudo-small round performance, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the pseudo-small round performance is being performed before the pseudo-small round performance ends (before the continuation performance is performed).
Specifically, for example, the character displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 may be different depending on the number of rounds, and when the pseudo-small number of rounds presentation is determined, the character corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo-small number of rounds presentation is basically displayed, but at a predetermined rate (for example, 10
% of the number of rounds), the characters displayed in the small area Ds2 may be configured to display characters corresponding to the actual number of rounds.
1 allows you to focus on the game during the jackpot.

In the fourth control example and its modified example, when the pseudo short round performance is executed, the playback mode of the music corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo short round performance is set,
Although the configuration was such that whether to set the music playback mode corresponding to the actual number of rounds is determined by lottery, this control is not limited to cases where a pseudo reduced round presentation is executed.
This can be applied if, in the case where a transition to an advantageous state (or a future transition is determined), a performance is executed that is difficult to distinguish from the performance executed in the case where a transition to an unfavorable state (or a future transition is determined), is temporarily made. Specifically, for example, the opening performance and opening music for a jackpot are set to have basically the same display and sound modes for a sure-change jackpot with an even-numbered symbol announcement and a normal jackpot with an even-numbered symbol announcement. On the other hand, in the case of a sure-change jackpot with an odd-numbered symbol announcement, the opening performance and opening music for the jackpot are set to have a different display and sound modes from those for a normal jackpot with an even-numbered symbol announcement. In this case, in some cases (for example, a proportion of 10%) of the sure-change jackpot with an even-numbered symbol announcement,
The opening music may be the same as that played when a jackpot with an odd symbol notification is reached. This configuration allows the player to sense that a jackpot notification was made with an even symbol, but that it was in fact a jackpot with a certain probability of winning. This allows the player to concentrate on the sound during the opening period, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In addition, instead of or in addition to varying the opening music, the display mode of the opening performance may be set to the same display mode as that played when a jackpot with an odd symbol notification is reached in some cases (for example, 10%) when a jackpot with an even symbol notification is reached. This configuration allows the player to play the game while paying more attention to the display mode during the opening period.
These modified examples are not limited to the display mode and sound mode during the opening period. This control may be applied to the display mode or sound mode during a predetermined round during a big win, or to the display mode or sound mode during a predetermined interval period, or to the display mode or sound mode during an ending period.

In the fourth control example and its modified example, the pseudo short round selection table 222cb is used to simultaneously select whether or not the pseudo short round performance is performed and the selection mode of the music playback mode, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the pseudo short round performance is determined, a dedicated data table may be separately provided to select whether to set the playback mode of the music corresponding to the number of rounds notified by the pseudo short round performance or to set the playback mode corresponding to the original number of rounds.

In the fourth control example and its modified example, when the pseudo-small round performance is executed, the playback mode corresponding to the number of rounds notified in the pseudo-small round performance or the playback mode corresponding to the original number of rounds is selected by lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the pseudo-small round performance is executed, the playback mode corresponding to the original number of rounds may be always set. By configuring in this way, the playback mode of the music can be checked more carefully.

In the third and fourth control examples and the modified example of the fourth control example, even when a song selected by a random lottery executed by a player's random selection is played, the number of times of playback stored in the song selection count storage area 223ac is incremented by 1. However, this is not limited to this. For example, a song played by random selection may be excluded from the count of the number of times of playback.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to count only the number of times that a song that a player voluntarily selects is selected, so that items that are more likely to be selected by a player can be placed in the history area.

In the second and third control examples, during the music selection period (first round), a music piece dedicated to the music selection period is played, and from the end of the first round, the music piece selected by the player is played, but this is not limited to this. For example, the chorus part of an item newly arranged in the music selection area may be played every time the player operates (presses) the up button UB or the down button DB on the music selection menu screen (every time the item with the lit-up appearance is switched). By configuring in this way, the music piece to be played during the jackpot can be determined not only by the title (song name) of the music piece, but also by taking into account the voice state of the most characteristic chorus part of the music piece, making it easier to select a music piece. In addition, in this case, if the current jackpot is a jackpot with a small number of rounds (for example, a 5-round jackpot), the music piece may be continued to be played from the continuation of the playback position selected by the player by pressing the center button CB. By configuring in this way, the music piece can be played more effectively using the remaining period of the jackpot with a small number of rounds.

In the above control examples, the player can select the presentation mode (type of music to be played) of the audio presentation among the entertainment presentations executed during a predetermined period (during a probability change state or a big win), but this is not limited to this. For example, the third symbol display device 8
The display mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 1 may be selectable.

In each of the above control examples, a music data group is provided for each type of music to be played, and one music piece is played by playing each data constituting the music data group in a predetermined order, but the present invention is not limited to this. A single piece of data capable of playing one music piece from start to finish may be provided for each music piece. In this case, the data may be configured in a format that allows the playback position to be identified, and the playback position may be made variable at least in parts. By configuring in this way, as in the first control example described above, the playback of the music piece can be started from a different playback position depending on the circumstances in which the music piece was selected. Also, as in the second control example described above, the playback position can be changed so that the chorus part is more likely to be played during the round period of the final round of the big win.

In each of the above control examples, only the items to be placed in the music selection area are determined by random drawing, and the other items (items to be placed in menu positions other than the history area) are arranged in a predetermined order (alphabetical order) based on the items to be placed in the music selection area, but this is not limited to this. For example, the other items may also be determined by random drawing.

In each of the above control examples, in the initial arrangement of the music selection menu screen, items that are frequently selected by the player are arranged in a range that can be selected with a small number of operations, one item selected by random lottery is arranged in the music selection area, and the other items are arranged in a predetermined order based on the items arranged in the music selection area, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the arrangement of items in the music selection menu screen may be freely customized by the player by operating the operation button 230, etc. By configuring in this way, the music that the player wants to select can be arranged in advance in a position that can be selected in a range that requires a small number of operations, thereby improving the convenience of the player.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above form in any way, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, one or more operating winning holes are provided, which trigger the start of a jackpot when a game ball enters the hole, but the trigger for starting a jackpot is not limited to this. For example, a switch or other operating means may be provided within reach of the player, and the jackpot may start when a specific operation is performed on the operating means after a jackpot is won by drawing a special pattern. This configuration makes it easy to start a jackpot, and prevents players from being disappointed when a game ball is shot at an operating winning hole but does not enter the hole.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 173 to Fig. 185. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing a special symbol, the machine transitions to a jackpot waiting state, and when a game ball is inserted into the operation winning hole 660 during the jackpot waiting state, the jackpot starts. Also, the operation winning hole 660 is provided at only one location on the upper right side of the game board 13. In other words, when the machine enters the jackpot waiting state, the machine is configured such that the jackpot does not start unless a game ball is launched toward the upper right side of the game board 13 and inserted into the operation winning hole 660, regardless of the type of jackpot.

In contrast to this, the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment is configured to have multiple operating winning holes, and the type of jackpot (degree of advantage) that is started is different depending on the type of operating winning hole that is won in the jackpot waiting state. More specifically, four operating winning holes are provided: the MAX operating winning hole 6710a, the normal operating winning holes 6710b, 6710c, and the special MAX operating winning hole 6720. When a game ball enters either the MAX operating winning hole 6710a or the special MAX operating winning hole 6720 in the jackpot waiting state, a jackpot with 16 rounds is started, while when a game ball enters either the normal operating winning hole 6710b, 6710c, a jackpot with 4 rounds is started. The pachinko machine 1 in the eighth embodiment is configured to have four operating winning holes, and the pachinko machine 1 in the eighth embodiment is configured to have four operating winning holes.
In 0, if a jackpot can be started by having a game ball enter the MAX operation winning hole 6710a, a state in which a game ball can easily enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 can be created, so that it is easier for a game ball to enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 in the next jackpot waiting state. Therefore, two consecutive jackpots will result in a 16-round jackpot with a large number of rounds (i.e., advantageous to the player),
This can increase the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in terms of configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed.
The configuration of the RAM 223 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the M
The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed.
The various processes executed by the CPU 231 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 173, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, in the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment, a distribution device 6700 for distributing game balls to either the MAX operation winning hole 6710a or the normal operation winning holes 6710b, 6710c is provided below the variable display unit 80. The distribution device 6700 is provided with an opening through which the game balls can enter the inside on the right side as viewed from the front, and an operation gate 6700a for opening and closing the opening. The operation gate 6700a is normally in a closed state (closed position) in which the game balls cannot enter the distribution device 6700, and is in an open state (open position) in which the game balls can enter the distribution device 6700 only during a jackpot waiting state.

As shown in FIG. 173, inside the distribution device 6700, there is a guide flow path 6700b through which the game balls entering from the opening can flow down, and a three-hole cranes 6710 for randomly distributing the game balls that flow down the guide flow path 6700b to one of three operation winning holes (MAX operation winning hole 6710a, normal operation winning holes 6710b, 6710c). When a ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a during the jackpot waiting state, the number of rounds is increased by 1.
While the 6-round jackpot is started, the normal operation winning slot 6 is in the jackpot waiting state.
When the ball lands on either 710b or 6710c, a jackpot of four rounds begins.

The three-hole Kluen 6710 is constructed by a known Kluen means, and three operation winning holes are provided on the bottom part of the inner wall of the mortar shape. The game ball that flows down the induction flow path 6700b and flows into the three-hole Kluen 6710 rolls on the inner wall of the mortar shape for a predetermined period of time, and then enters one of the operation winning holes. The rate at which the game balls that flow into the three-hole Kluen 6710 enter each operation winning hole is equal. That is, the probability (proportion) that the game ball that enters the distribution device 6700 enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a, the normal operation winning hole 6710b, and the normal operation winning hole 6710c is 1/3 each. In other words, when a special symbol is selected as a jackpot, the probability of a 16-round jackpot (the probability of being allocated to the MAX operation winning slot 6710a) is 1/3, and the probability of a 4-round jackpot (the probability of being allocated to the normal operation winning slot 6710b, 6
The probability of being assigned to either 710c or 710d is 2/3.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment, a special MAX operation winning hole 6720 is provided in the lower left direction as viewed from the front of the sorting device 6700. When a game ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 in the big win waiting state, the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 wins one ball.
It is a type of operating winning port where the start of the 6-round jackpot is set. That is, the special MAX operating winning port 6720 is an operating winning port having the same function as the MAX operating winning port 6710a. As shown in FIG. 173, the special MAX operating winning port 6720 is provided with a non-electric device 6720a that can open and close the special MAX operating winning port 6720.

The non-electric device 6720a is connected to an opening mechanism (not shown) provided inside the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, and is configured so that the non-electric device 6720a is opened mechanically (without electrical control) when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a (the game ball passes through the opening mechanism) while the non-electric device 6720a is closed. Note that the opening mechanism only has the function of opening the non-electric device 6720a,
In the state where the non-electric device 6720a is open, the MAX operation winning hole 6710
Even if the game ball enters the a (the game ball passes through the opening mechanism), the non-electric device 6720
The state of a does not change (non-electric feature 6720a is closed).

In addition, when the non-electric device 6720a is in the open state, the game ball passes through a closing mechanism (not shown) provided inside the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, and the non-electric device 672
0a is mechanically (without electrical control) closed. The special MAX operation winning port 6720 is provided at a position where the game ball that flows down the flow path on the left side of the front view of the variable display unit 80 can enter, unlike the other operation winning ports. That is, to allow a game ball to enter the other operation winning ports (MAX operation winning port 6710a, normal operation winning ports 6710b, 6710c), a right shot is performed while the operation gate 6700a is open, whereas to allow a game ball to enter the special MAX operation winning port 6720, a left shot is performed while the non-electric device 6720a is open.

As described above, the non-electric device 6720a is normally closed and is opened only when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a.
When a jackpot occurs with MAX operation winning hole 6710a closed and a game ball enters MAX operation winning hole 6710a in the jackpot waiting state, a 16-round jackpot game with the greatest number of rounds (a type of jackpot advantageous to the player) is executed, and special MAX operation winning hole 6720 can be opened. Therefore, if a game ball does not enter special MAX operation winning hole 6720 (if the game ball does not pass through the closing mechanism) before the next jackpot occurs, a game ball can be easily entered into special MAX operation winning hole 6720 by simply hitting left in the next jackpot waiting state, and a 16-round jackpot (a type of jackpot advantageous to the player) can be started. Note that in this eighth embodiment,
After the big win, the game state is set to either a probability state that continues until the next big win, or a time-saving state with 100 times of time-saving, depending on the type of big win (probability jackpot or normal jackpot).
Since the time-saving state of the normal symbols continues until at least 100 special symbol drawings are completed, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is likely to open. Therefore, until at least 100 special symbol drawings are completed, the player will play by hitting the ball from the right, aiming at the second ball entrance 640 (the player will not hit the ball from the left), so that after the big win, the game ball will immediately enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, and the non-electric device 6720 will open.
This can suppress (prevent) the MAX operation winning hole 6710a from being closed. This can create a state in which, when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a and a jackpot is started, the player can easily win the most advantageous 16 rounds of jackpots in succession, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

As shown in Fig. 173, a straightening device 6800 is provided above the operating gate 6700a to lengthen the intervals at which game balls reach the sorting device 6700. Details will be described later, but this straightening device 6800 periodically switches between a retention state in which arriving game balls are retained within the device, and a flow-down state in which the retained game balls are allowed to flow down toward the sorting device 6700. The cycle of this switching is set so that one game ball can be allowed to flow down every five seconds, so that the operating gate 6700a of the sorting device 6700
When the opening is opened, one game ball enters the distribution device 6700 through the opening, and then
A 5-second interval can be allowed before the next gaming ball reaches the sorting device 6700. Meanwhile, the sorting device 6700 is controlled so that the operating gate 6700a is closed when a gaming ball enters any of the operating winning ports. In addition, the internal structure of the sorting device 6700 is configured so that it takes about 4 seconds for a gaming ball that has entered the inside of the sorting device 6700 to enter any of the operating winning ports. In other words, when one gaming ball enters the sorting device 6700,
Since the period from when a game ball enters the distribution device 6700 until the operating gate 6700a is closed is configured to be less than 5 seconds, the straightening device 6800 sets the shortest arrival interval of a game ball to 5 seconds at the distribution device 6700, thereby preventing two or more game balls from entering the distribution device 6700 during one jackpot waiting state.

Here, if the straightening device 6800 is not provided and multiple game balls can enter the distribution device 6700, there is a possibility that game balls will enter multiple different operating winning holes during one jackpot waiting state. In other words, after one game ball enters either the normal operating winning hole 6710b or 6710c, another game ball may enter the MAX operating winning hole 6710a. In this case, even though a four-round jackpot corresponding to the normal operating winning hole is executed, the non-electric device 6720a is opened (the special MAX operating winning hole 6720b is opened).
This may increase the number of cases where the ball is able to enter the special MAX operation winning port 6720, which may give the player an excessive advantage.

In contrast, in the eighth embodiment, a straightening device 6700 is provided upstream of the opening of the sorting device 6700.
800, the number of game balls that can enter the distribution device 6700 in one jackpot waiting state is limited to one (preventing the next game ball from reaching the distribution device 6700 during the period from when one game ball enters the distribution device 6700 until when the operation gate 6700a is closed after the game ball enters one of the operation winning holes).
When the jackpot is won with the a closed (when the game ball is put into the distribution device 6700 to start the jackpot), there is a 1/3 probability (proportion) of the non-electric device 6720a
Therefore, the frequency of opening the non-electric device 6720a increases, and it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage, and it is possible to prevent the hall from suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, the operation of the rectifier 6800 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
4(a) shows a state in which the actuation gate 6700a of the sorting device 6700 is open.
FIG. 174 (a) is a diagram showing a case where a game ball reaches the rectifier 6800 in a stationary state.
), the rectifier 6800 is composed of a vertical flow path capable of causing game balls to flow down to the sorter 6700, and a gate guide valve 6800a that is provided midway along the flow path and is capable of closing and opening the flow path. When the rectifier 6800 is in a stopped state, the gate guide valve 6800a is in a closed state, so that the game balls are guided through the rectifier 6800.
It becomes impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 174(a), the game ball that has reached the rectifier 6800 is prevented from flowing down by the gate guide valve 6800a, and is retained above the gate guide valve 6800a. Note that since the upper portion of the gate guide valve 6800a is configured with a width that allows only one game ball to be retained, even if another game ball reaches the rectifier 6800 while one game ball is retained, the game ball will not be retained above the gate guide valve 6800a, but will flow down to the bottom of the game board 13 via the flow path to the right of the rectifier 6800. This makes it possible to suppress two or more game balls from flowing down toward the sorter 6700 at the same time when the gate guide valve 6800a is opened, and therefore it is possible to more reliably prevent a plurality of game balls from entering the inside of the sorter 6700 in one jackpot waiting state.

FIG. 174(b) is a diagram showing a case where the gate guide valve 6800a is opened with a game ball stopped above the gate guide valve 6800a. As shown in FIG. 174(b), when the gate guide valve 6800a is opened, the game ball stopped above the gate guide valve 6800a falls downward. As a result, when the operating gate 6700a is opened, the game ball enters the sorting device 6700. Note that, as shown in FIG. 174(c), the gate guide valve 6800a is set to have an opening and closing cycle so that the gate guide valve 6800a closes immediately after the game ball passes through the gate guide valve 6800a. More specifically, the gate guide valve 6800a is configured to periodically repeat a closed state for 4.9 seconds and an open state for 0.1 seconds. As a result, only a maximum of one game ball is sorted into the sorting device 6700 per five seconds.
Since the game balls can be made to flow downward toward sorting device 6700, it is possible to more reliably prevent other game balls from entering sorting device 6700 during the approximately four seconds between when one game ball enters sorting device 6700 and when operating gate 6700a of sorting device 6700 is closed.

Next, the details of each operation winning hole will be described with reference to Fig. 175. Fig. 175(a) is a diagram showing a state in which a game ball is rolling on the inner wall of the three-hole cranes 6710.
As shown in FIG. 1, the three-hole crane 6710 installed inside the sorting device 6700 has the following features:
In the approximate center, there is a MAX operation winning hole 6710a, a normal operation winning hole 6710b, and
There are three operation winning holes, MAX operation winning hole 6710a, MAX operation winning hole 6710b, MAX operation winning hole 6710c, MAX operation winning hole 6710c, MAX operation winning hole 6710d, MAX operation winning hole 6710e, MAX operation winning hole 6710f ...

As shown in FIG. 175(a), the MAX operation winning hole 6710a and the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 are mechanically connected. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 175(b), the game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a and the special MAX operation winning hole 6720.
When the game ball passes through an opening mechanism (not shown) provided inside 710a, the non-electric device 6720a associated with the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 opens in conjunction with the passage of the game ball. As a result, until the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6720,
Therefore, if a jackpot is won before the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 and the state transitions to a jackpot waiting state, a 16-round jackpot with a large number of rounds (i.e., advantageous for the player) can be easily started by simply aiming at the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 by hitting from the left.
This makes it possible to create an extremely advantageous state in which there is a high probability of consecutively winning advantageous jackpot types, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, only the number of rounds of the jackpot is determined according to the type of the operation winning hole into which the game ball entered during the jackpot waiting state, and the game state after the jackpot ends is predetermined according to the type of jackpot (whether it will be a guaranteed jackpot or a normal jackpot is determined at the time of executing the lottery for the special symbol). Therefore, the game state after the end of a 16-round jackpot that is executed by entering the MAX operation winning hole 6710a (i.e., with the non-electric role 6720a open) can be either a guaranteed jackpot state or a time-saving state. In other words, even if a relatively unfavorable normal jackpot is won, if the game ball can be allowed to enter the MAX operation winning hole 6710a, the favorable state in which the number of rounds is set to 16 if a jackpot is won will continue until the time-saving state has elapsed, so it will become a time-saving jackpot and the normal operation winning holes 6710b, 6710c will be opened.
When the ball lands in either 710a or 710b (when the non-electric device 6720a is not opened)
In comparison, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the lottery result in the time-saving state will be a jackpot. In other words, even in the same time-saving state, the expectation of winning a jackpot can be made different depending on the state of the non-electric device 6720a, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, a mechanism is adopted in which the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 is opened when one game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of times required for the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 to be opened may be any number.
The number of winnings in the AX operation winning hole 6710a can be determined arbitrarily. Similarly, the number of special M required for the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 in the open state to be closed can be determined arbitrarily.
The number of winning prizes for the AX operation winning slot 6720 can also be determined arbitrarily.

Next, referring to Fig. 176 and Fig. 177, a description will be given of a characteristic display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eighth embodiment. Fig. 176(a) shows a special MAX
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the ending performance of the big win when the big win ends with the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 open.
The case where the jackpot ends with the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 open is basically when the 16 round jackpot that was executed by the game ball entering the MAX operation winning hole 6710a in the jackpot waiting state ends. Note that even if the jackpot occurs with the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 open, due to the player making a mistake in the shooting direction, etc.
When the ball is hit from the right side during the jackpot waiting state and enters the distribution device 6700, and enters one of the operation winning holes provided in the three-hole cranes 6710, the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 will be opened at the end of the jackpot. In this case, the same ending performance will be executed.

In the ending performance with the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 open, the text "Entering the MAX Zone!!" and the text "If you hit it while hitting right, MAX is confirmed!?" are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if he wins a jackpot while hitting right, he can make the game ball enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 and start a 16-round jackpot (MAX jackpot). Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the state in which the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 is open will be referred to as the "MAX zone."

Next, with reference to FIG. 176(b), a display mode (standby state presentation) during the jackpot waiting state when the jackpot is won during the MAX zone will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, when a jackpot is won in the MAX zone, the display area HR5 displays the words "Hit left to aim for the MAX!!" at the top of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.
is formed, and below the display area HR5, a display area HR6 is formed in which an image of an arrow is pointed at an image imitating the special MAX operation winning hole 6720. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that in the current big win waiting state, instead of aiming at the sorting device 6700 by hitting from the right, the player should aim at the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 by hitting from the left.

Next, referring to FIG. 177(a), the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving count is over (the time-saving period has elapsed) during the MAX zone will be described.
As shown in a), when the time-saving number of times has elapsed in the MAX zone, the third symbol display device 81
A display area HR7 is formed at the bottom of the display screen, displaying the words "MAX Zone Falling Crisis!!" and "MAX Confirmed if Hit Before Falling!?". This display content allows the player to easily understand that the MAX Zone may end. In other words, even if the time-saving period has passed and the game state (normal game state) has shifted to a relatively unfavorable game state (normal game state) in which the game needs to be played by hitting from the left, if the game ball can be entered into the first ball entry port 64 before the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning port 6720 and a jackpot is won, the player can still enjoy the benefit of the MAX Zone, which is the advantageous 16-round jackpot, by simply entering the special MAX operation winning port 6720. This makes it possible to prevent the player from quitting the game immediately when the time-saving state ends. In other words, if the game ball enters at least the special MAX operation winning port 6720 and the jackpot is won, the player can still enjoy the benefit of the MAX Zone, which is the advantageous 16-round jackpot, by simply entering the special MAX operation winning port 6720.
Since the player is made to want to continue playing until the X-zone ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In the eighth embodiment, when the non-electric role 6720a is opened and a left hit is performed, the game ball can be made to enter the non-electric role 6720a at a rate of about 1 in 5 game balls. In contrast, since only about 1 in 10 game balls enter the first ball entrance 64, when the non-electric role 6720a is opened and a left hit is performed, the number of times the lottery for the first special symbol is executed is about 1 or less. Therefore, since the possibility of a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 first with the non-electric role 6720a open and winning a lottery based on the ball entrance is very low, when this situation occurs, the player can have a greater sense of accomplishment and satisfaction. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 177(b) shows the case where the MAX zone ends when a ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 in the MAX zone (when the non-electric device 6720a is closed). As shown in FIG. 177(b), a short time period has passed in the MAX zone,
When the ball enters the special MAX activation winning hole 6720 by hitting the ball from the left to execute the lottery for the special symbol, the display content of the display area HR7 is changed to the word "Fall!!" and the non-electric device 6720a is closed. This display content allows the player to easily understand that the MAX zone has ended.

In the eighth embodiment, when the non-electric role 6720a is opened and a left hit is performed, the rate at which the game balls shot enter the slot is about 1 in 5, but the rate at which the game balls enter the slot may be set arbitrarily. By increasing the rate at which the game balls enter the slot (for example, 1/3 rate), when a jackpot occurs with the non-electric role 6720a open, the balls can be shot less and entered into the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, so that the game can be played efficiently. On the other hand, by decreasing the rate at which the game balls enter the slot (for example, 1/20 rate), when the time-saving number of times has elapsed with the non-electric role 6720 open, the balls can enter the first ball entry hole 64 before entering the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, so that the chance of a lottery for a special pattern can be increased, so that the chance of a jackpot occurs with the non-electric role 6720a open. Furthermore, the proportion of balls that enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 when a left-handed hit is made may be variable by the hall staff, etc. In other words, the hall staff may be able to select whether to set it so that the game can be played efficiently, or to increase the possibility of winning the jackpot with the special MAX operation winning hole 6720a open. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize specifications that match the management policy, etc. of each hall.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice and lamp control device 113 are partially changed from those in the first embodiment.
The first winning type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Note that, other than the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table 202b, the table is the same as the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 178, the first winning type selection table 202b in the eighth embodiment
In the eighth embodiment, two types of jackpot types, "jackpot A12" and "jackpot B12", are specified as jackpot types. In addition, in the eighth embodiment, a common jackpot type is selected regardless of whether the first special symbol is drawn or the second special symbol is drawn. More specifically, when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is within the range of "0 to 64", the jackpot type "jackpot A12" is determined (see 202b1 in FIG. 178). This "jackpot A12" is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a probability variable state. In addition, as described above, the number of rounds varies depending on the type of the operating winning hole that was won in the jackpot waiting state. More specifically, when the ball enters the normal operating winning hole 6710b, 6710c, a 4-round jackpot is won, while when the ball enters the MAX operating winning hole 6710a or the special MA
If the ball enters the X-operated winning hole 6720, a 16-round jackpot will be awarded.

Of the 100 possible counter values (random numbers) of the first winning type counter C2, 65 counter values from 0 to 64 are associated with the "jackpot A12". Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in a special pattern lottery, the probability that the "jackpot A12" will be determined is 65% (
65/100).

On the other hand, if the first or second special symbol is selected as a jackpot,
If the value of the first winning type counter C2 is within the range of "65 to 99", the "jackpot B12" is determined as the jackpot type (see 202b2 in FIG. 178).
"Big Win B2" is a big win type in which the game state after the big win is set to a time-saving state of 100 times. Therefore, it is a game state that is less favorable than the probability change state.
"Big Win A12" is more disadvantageous to the player than "Big Win A12". The number of rounds varies depending on the type of the activated winning slot, just like "Big Win A12".

Of the 100 possible counter values (random numbers) of the first winning type counter C2, 35 counter values from "65 to 99" are associated with the "big win B12".
When a special pattern is drawn and a jackpot is awarded, the probability of the "jackpot B12" being determined is 35%.
(35/100).

In this way, in the eighth embodiment, only the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds is determined according to the type of the operating winning hole into which the game ball (first) entered in the jackpot waiting state. In other words, the degree of advantage of the jackpot game is variable according to the type of the operating winning hole into which the game ball entered in the jackpot waiting state. This allows the player to play while paying attention to the type of the operating winning hole into which the game ball enters when the jackpot waiting state is reached, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 179. Fig. 179 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in Fig. 179, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see Fig. 14(b)) in that the RAM 223 is configured as follows:
The difference is that an in-X zone flag 223da has been added and that the level counter 223h has been deleted.

The MAX zone flag 223da indicates whether the player is in the MAX zone (i.e., the player is not in the non-electric role 67).
If the MAX zone flag 223da is on, it indicates that the machine is in the MAX zone (the non-electric device 6720a is open), and if it is off, it indicates that the machine is not in the MAX zone (the non-electric device 6720a is closed). The MAX zone flag 223da is set to on when a winning entry into the MAX operation winning hole 6710a is detected during the big win waiting state (see FIG. 1).
185, S40003), and when a win is detected in the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, it is set to OFF (see S40005, 40009 in FIG. 185). When the ending period of the big win has started and an ending command has been received from the main control device 110, this M
By referring to the state of the AX zone flag 223da, it is determined whether to execute a normal ending performance or an ending performance indicating the MAX zone (S449 in FIG. 184).
3-S4495).

<Regarding control process of main control device in eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 180 to Fig. 183. First, the special symbol variation process 12 (S131) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 180. This special symbol variation process 12 (S131) is the same as the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see Fig. 22).
This is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22).
Similarly, the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are set.
This is a process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol, etc.

In the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 180) in the eighth embodiment, S201 to
In each process of S223, the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22)
The same processes as those of S201 to S223 in the eighth embodiment are executed. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 12 (see FIG. 180), when the process of S220 is completed,
The operation gate 6700a is set to be open (S251), and the process proceeds to S223. By setting the operation gate 6700a to be open, it becomes possible to easily cause a game ball to enter the inside of the distribution device 6700 by performing a right hit in the jackpot waiting state.

Next, the start-up process 12 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 181. This start-up process 12 is a process executed in place of the start-up process (see Fig. 29) in the first embodiment, and similarly to the start-up process (see Fig. 29) in the first embodiment,
This is a process that is started when the power is turned on. In the start-up process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment, the same processes as those in S901 to S912 and S914 to S917 in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment are executed in steps S901 to S912 and S914 to S917, respectively. In the start-up process 12 (see FIG. 181) in the eighth embodiment, when the process in S912 is completed, the gate guide valve 6
The start of operation of the gate guide valve 6800a is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S914. When the operation of the gate guide valve 6800a is started, the gate guide valve 6800a periodically repeats a closed state for 4.9 seconds and an open state for 0.1 seconds until the power is cut off. This makes it possible to set the interval at which the game balls that have reached the rectifier 6800 reach the sorting device 6700 to be 5 seconds or more, so that in one jackpot waiting state, one game ball is guided to the sorting device 6700.
After the game ball enters the gate, the game ball enters one of the operation gates (operation gate 6700
It is possible to prevent other game balls from entering the distribution device 6700 during the approximately four seconds until the non-electric device 6720a is closed. Therefore, when a jackpot occurs with the non-electric device 6720a closed, the rate of transition to the MAX zone (opening of the non-electric device 6720a) based on the ball entering the MAX operation winning hole 6710a can be maintained at 1/3. This makes it possible to prevent excessive transition to the MAX zone and unexpected disadvantages to the hall.

Next, the main process 12 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 182. This main process 12 is a process executed in place of the main process (see Fig. 30) in the first embodiment, and is a process for executing main control of the game, similar to the main process (see Fig. 30) in the first embodiment.

In the main process 12 (see FIG. 182) in the eighth embodiment, steps S1001 to S1
In the processes of S1003 and S1005 to S1016, the same processes as those of S1001 to S1003 and S1005 to S1016 in the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed.
2), when the process of S1003 is completed, instead of the big win start process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31, S1004), the big win start process 12 is executed (S1061).
The process proceeds to S1005. Details of the big win start process 12 (S1061) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the big win start process 12 (S1061). This big win start process 12 (S1061) is the same as the big win start process in the first embodiment ( FIG. 3
1) and is a process for starting a jackpot based on a ball entering an operating winning hole.
Among these, the processes of S1101, S1102, and S1104 are the same as those of S1101, S1102, and S1104 of the big win start process (see FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.
The same processes as those in step 4 are executed.

In addition, in the big win start process 12 (see FIG. 183) in the eighth embodiment, S1102
When the process is completed (S1102: Yes), the activation gate 6700a is set to be closed (S1121), and a prize gate type command is set to notify the voice and lamp control device 113 of the type of the activated prize gate in which the winning was detected (S1122). The prize gate type command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is then stored in the M
External output processing (S100) of the main processing 12 (see FIG. 182) executed by the PU 201
1) is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 113.
When the special MAX operating winning port 6720 receives the winning port type command, it updates the MAX zone flag 223da according to the type of the operating winning port notified by the command. This allows the mode of the ending performance executed at the end of the big win to be set according to the state of the special MAX operating winning port 6720 (whether it is in the MAX zone or not).

Also, when the process of S1122 is completed, the start of a jackpot is set with the number of rounds according to the type of the activated winning port where the winning was detected (S1123). More specifically, when a winning is detected in either the normal activated winning port 6710b or 6710c, the start of a 4-round jackpot is executed, while when a winning is detected in either the MAX activated winning port 6710a or the special MAX activated winning port 6720, the start of a 16-round jackpot is set. When the process of S1123 is completed, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (
S1124) and proceeds to S1104.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 184 and 185.
The hit-related process 12 (S4391) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 4. This hit-related process 12 (S4391) is a process executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 36) instead of the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to a hit, similar to the hit-related process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment.

In the winning-related process 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment, S4401 to
In each process of S4409, the winning-related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 37)
The same processing as each of S4401 to S4409 in the eighth embodiment is executed. In addition, in the winning-related processing 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S4407 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include a round number command (S4407: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning port type command is included in the unprocessed command (S4491), and if it is determined that a winning port type command is included (S4491: Yes), a winning port type command processing is executed to execute control according to the type of the operating winning port notified by the command (S4492), and this processing is terminated. Details of this winning port type command processing (S4492) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

On the other hand, in the process of S4491, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 do not include a winning port type command (S4491: No), the process proceeds to S4409. In the process of S4409, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 include an ending command (S44
If the result of the determination in S409 is "Yes", the CPU 210 determines whether the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S4493). If the result of the determination in S409 is "Yes", the CPU 210 determines whether the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S4494).
176(a)) indicating that the non-electric device 6720a is open, and that it is possible to enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 and start an advantageous 16-round jackpot by winning again during the probability variable state or time-saving state that is set after the jackpot ends, and thus set the execution of an ending performance (see FIG. 176(a)) indicating entry into the MAX zone (S4494), and end this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4493 that the MAX zone flag 223da is off (S4493: No), set the normal ending performance (S4495), and end this process.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned winning slot type command process (S4492) will be described with reference to Fig. 185. This winning slot type command process (S4492) is a process for executing control according to the type of operating winning slot notified by the winning slot type command received from the main control device 110, as described above.

In this winning port type command process (see FIG. 185), first, the standby state performance flag 223
If it is determined that the standby state effect flag 223g is on (S40001: Yes), it is then determined whether the winning hole type command received this time is a command indicating the MAX operation winning hole 6710a (S40002).
002). In the process of S40002, if it is determined that the command indicates the MAX operation winning hole 6710a (S40002: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the MAX operation winning hole 6710a in the big win waiting state, and that the game ball has passed through the opening mechanism for opening the non-electric role 6720a (the non-electric role 6720a has been opened), so the MAX zone flag 223da is set to ON (S40003), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S40002, if it is determined that the winning port type command received this time is not a command indicating the MAX operation winning port 6710a (S40002: No),
Next, it is determined whether the command indicates the special MAX operation winning port 6720 (S4
0004), if it is determined that the command is a winning port type command indicating the special MAX operation winning port 6720 (S40004: Yes), it means that the game ball enters the special MAX operation winning port 6720 and passes through the closing mechanism (the non-electric device 6720a is closed), so
The AX zone flag 223da is set to OFF (S40005), and this process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40004 that the command is not a winning port type command indicating the special MAX operation winning port 6720 (S40004: No), the non-electric device 6720
Since the state of a does not change, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S40001, if it is determined that the standby state effect flag 223g is off (S40001: No), next, it is determined whether or not a winning port type command indicating the special MAX operation winning port 6720 has been received (S40006), and
If it is determined that the command is a prize slot type command indicating 720 (S40006: Yes),
It is determined whether the AX zone flag 223da is ON (S40007).
In the process of 007, if it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is on (S40007: Yes), this means that the ball has entered the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 that is open and the non-electric device 6720a has been closed in a state other than the jackpot waiting state, so the execution of the falling effect (see FIG. 177(b)) is set (S40008). Next, the MAX zone flag 223da is set to off (S40009), and this process is terminated. This allows the player to easily understand that the MAX zone has ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S40006, the command is not a command for the type of winning port indicating the special MAX operation winning port 6720 (the MAX operation winning port 6710a, the normal operation winning port 6710b, 67
10c) (S40006:
No), it is not in the big win waiting state (the operation gate 6700a is closed and the distribution device 670
This means that a game ball has entered the distribution device 6700 despite the fact that the game ball cannot enter the inside of the distribution device 6700. Since there is a possibility that the operation gate 6700a is broken or some kind of fraudulent act has occurred, an error is notified by setting a display error command (S4
If it is determined in the process of S40007 that the MAX zone flag 223da is off (S40007: No), the non-electric role 67
This means that the game ball entered the special MAX operation winning port 6720 even though 20a should have been closed, and since there is a possibility that a malfunction such as a breakdown of the non-electric device 6720a has occurred, the process proceeds to S40010, an error notification is set, and this process is terminated.

By executing this winning slot type command processing (see Figure 185), the MAX zone flag 223da can be updated appropriately according to the type of operating winning slot in which a win was detected.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment, the advantage degree (jackpot type) of the jackpot game to be executed (determined) is variable depending on the type of the activated winning slot into which the ball enters during the jackpot waiting state.
When a game ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6710a or the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, a relatively advantageous 16-round jackpot is executed, while when a game ball enters the normal operation winning hole 6710b,
, 6710c, a relatively disadvantageous four-round jackpot is executed.
The three operating winning holes c are provided inside the sorting device 6700.
In other words, when a game ball enters the distribution device 6700 during a jackpot waiting state, the probability (ratio) of the game ball entering the distribution device 6700 is 1/3.
There is a 3/16 chance of a 16-round jackpot (i.e., the ball goes into the MAX operation winning hole 6710a), and a 2/3 chance of a 4-round jackpot (i.e., the ball goes into the normal operation winning hole 6710b, 6
710c). This allows the player to have the expectation that the ball will be allocated to the MAX operation winning hole 6710a, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game during the big win waiting state.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a, the special MAX operation winning hole 672, which is normally closed, is opened.
0 is opened. The open state of the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 is maintained until the next game ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6720.
Since the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 is arranged in the left flow path of the game board 13, during the probability variable state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set and during the time-saving state (i.e., during the game state in which the game progresses by hitting to the right), the game ball does not enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 and the non-electric device 6720a is not closed. Therefore, the probability variable jackpot (jackpot A1
If the player wins the 2) and the ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a while waiting for the big win, a 16-round big win is executed, and the next big win can be made to enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, so that it is possible to provide a game in which it is certain that a type of big win advantageous to the player will be executed in two consecutive big wins.
If the ball enters 10a, it will be a jackpot while the time-saving state continues,
Since the next big win will also be a 16-round big win, it is possible to realize a game in which the player plays the game hoping for another big win during the time-saving state. In this way, the game after the big win can be made different depending on whether the ball entered the MAX operation winning hole 6710a in the big win waiting state of the probability big win or the big win waiting state of the normal big win, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the distribution device 6700 is provided with a three-hole crane 6710 to randomly distribute game balls to three operating winning holes, but the configuration for randomly distributing game balls is not limited to this. Any configuration can be adopted as long as it can randomly distribute game balls to multiple operating winning holes.

In the eighth embodiment, in one big win waiting state, only one game ball is distributed to the distribution device 670.
In the above, the number of game balls that can enter the distribution device 6700 may be varied depending on conditions (e.g., the type of big win, the game state at the time of transition to the big win waiting state, the number of times a special symbol is drawn when a big win is won, etc.). When more game balls are allowed to enter, there is a higher possibility that the balls will enter the MAX operation winning hole 6710a and the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 will be opened, so it is possible to provide the player with a
Since the player can have a stronger expectation of moving to the AX zone, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the game balls entering the distribution device 6700 are randomly distributed to one of the three operation winning holes, but the distribution is not necessarily required. For example, the operation winning hole to which the game balls are distributed may be switched in a predetermined order each time the jackpot waiting state is reached. By configuring in this way, if the operation winning hole to which the game balls are distributed next is the MAX operation winning hole 6710a, the player can be made to want to continue playing until the jackpot is reached. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the MAX operation winning port 6710a plays both the role of an operation winning port that triggers the jackpot and the role of opening the special MAX operation winning port 6720, but this is not limited to the above. For example, an opening mechanism for opening the special MAX operation winning port 6720 may be provided for the normal operation winning port 6710b. With this configuration, when a relatively unfavorable jackpot (a jackpot with four rounds) is executed, the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is opened to an advantageous state, so that the player's motivation for playing can be maintained even if the jackpot is unfavorable. Furthermore, when the jackpot is a normal jackpot, the special MAX operation winning port 6720 may be opened to an advantageous state.
The player can play the game hoping that the jackpot will be won again and the 16-round jackpot will be won during the 100 time-saving times that the slot is kept open. This can improve the player's motivation to play the game.
A dedicated ball entrance for opening the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 may be provided. In this case, the dedicated ball entrance for opening the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 does not necessarily have to be provided inside the sorting device 6700. For example,
It may be provided inside a.

In the eighth embodiment, when a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a in the jackpot waiting state, a 16-round jackpot is always obtained.
710c, a four-round jackpot is always obtained, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the allocation between the operation winning port in which the number of rounds is set to 16 rounds and the operation winning port in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds may be different depending on the jackpot type. That is, a jackpot type in which a 16-round jackpot is set not only when the ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a but also when the ball enters the normal operation winning port 6710b, a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is set to 16 rounds regardless of which operation winning port in the distribution device 6700 is distributed, and a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is set to 4 rounds regardless of which operation winning port in the distribution device 6700 is distributed.

In the eighth embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot is predetermined according to the type of jackpot, and only the number of rounds of the jackpot is set according to the type of the activated winning hole into which the game ball entered. However, it is not limited to the number of rounds of the jackpot that is varied according to the type of activated winning hole, and other elements related to the degree of advantage of the jackpot may be set according to the type of activated winning hole instead of or in addition to the number of rounds. Specifically, for example, when the ball enters the MAX activated winning hole 6710a or the special MAX activated winning hole 6720, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot being set to 16 rounds, the game state after the end of the jackpot may be set to a high probability state. Also,
When the ball enters the normal operation winning hole 6710b, instead of or in addition to setting the number of rounds of the jackpot to four, the game state after the jackpot ends may be set to a high probability state. Also, when the ball enters the normal operation winning hole 6710b, instead of or in addition to setting the number of rounds of the jackpot to four, the game state after the jackpot ends may be set to a time-saving state. By configuring in this way,
Since the difference in the degree of advantage set according to the type of the winning slot into which the game ball enters can be made larger, the player can play the game by paying more attention to the type of the winning slot into which the game ball enters. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, when the non-electric device 6720a is in an open state, the non-electric device 6720a is closed when one game ball enters the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, but the condition (the number of game balls entering) for the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 in the open state to switch to the closed state is not limited to this. For example, the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 may be kept in the open state until two game balls enter the hole.
In this configuration, if the game ball can be made to enter the MAX operation winning opening 6710a, the advantageous state (MAX zone) where a 16-round jackpot is confirmed when a jackpot is won during right-hand play can be continued for up to two jackpots. Therefore, the benefit when the game ball enters the MAX operation winning opening 6710a can be increased, so that the player can play the game by paying attention to the type of operation winning opening to which the game ball that entered the distribution device 6700 is distributed.

In the eighth embodiment, even if a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a while the non-electric device 6720a is open, the state of the non-electric device 6720a is not affected (the non-electric device 6720a in the closed state is simply opened). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the state of the non-electric device 6720a may be configured to be more advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a while the non-electric device 6720a is open. Specifically, for example, the number of balls entering the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 until the non-electric device 6720a is closed may be increased by one each time a game ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a while the non-electric device 6720a is open. By configuring in this way, even if a jackpot occurs when the non-electric device 6720a is open, the player can be given the option of shooting game balls at the distribution device 6700 in the jackpot waiting state. That is, the player can be made to think that the number of balls that will enter the MAX operation winning hole 6710a will be increased until the non-electric device 6720a is closed. Therefore, since it is possible to realize a game feature that allows the player to select the shooting direction when the non-electric device 6720a is open, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the eighth embodiment, when a special jackpot occurs, the special jackpot state and the time-saving state continue until the next jackpot occurs, and when a normal jackpot occurs, the time-saving state continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times, but this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times may be diversified. Specifically, for example, at least a special jackpot (jackpot a) in which the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot occurs, a special jackpot (jackpot b) in which the time-saving number is set to 10 times, a normal jackpot (jackpot c) in which the time-saving number is set to 100 times, and a normal jackpot (jackpot d) in which the time-saving number is set to 10 times may be provided. By configuring in this way, when a jackpot occurs with the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 open, it is possible to realize a game feature that allows the player to select whether to make the game ball enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 or the distribution device 6700 in the jackpot waiting state, taking into consideration the jackpot type. In other words, when a jackpot a or jackpot c (a jackpot type with a relatively high possibility of winning a jackpot again during the time-saving state) occurs, the player can be given the option of shooting the game ball aiming at the distribution device 6700 in order to carry over the state in which the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 is open until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when a jackpot b or jackpot d (a jackpot type with only 10 time-saving states and a relatively low possibility of winning a jackpot within the time-saving states) occurs, the player can select whether to make the game ball enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 or the distribution device 6700 in the jackpot waiting state.
If the game ball is not inserted into the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, the time-saving state will expire and the game will return to left-handed play, and the game ball is more likely to enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720 (
(The special MAX operation winning hole 6720 is likely to be closed and the right to the 16-round jackpot will be lost.) Therefore, by putting the game ball into the special MAX operation winning hole 6720,
The player can be given the option of executing a 6-round jackpot. In this case, it is more effective to combine a specification in which the number of balls that is the closing condition of the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is added by 1 every time a game ball enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a. That is, when a game ball is entered into the distribution device 6700 with the special MAX operation winning port 6720 open and enters the MAX operation winning port 6710a, not only is a 16-round jackpot obtained, but the closing condition of the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is added by 1, so that the player can benefit by the game ball entering the MAX operation winning port 6710a regardless of whether the special MAX operation winning port 6720 is closed or open. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Ninth embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 186 to Fig. 208. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment described above, when a ball enters the MAX operation winning hole 6710a in the jackpot waiting state, an advantageous 16-round jackpot is started, and a MAX zone is provided in which the ball can enter the special MAX operation winning hole 6720, making it easier to consecutively execute advantageous types of jackpots, and improving the player's interest in the game.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment is designed to win a jackpot not only when a special symbol is drawn as a jackpot, but also when a small jackpot, which is a type of miss, is drawn as a special symbol and the game ball enters a V entry port (specific area) provided in the game area during the small jackpot game. Also, in the ninth embodiment, a small jackpot can be won with a high probability (for example, 9/10) only in the drawing of the second special symbol (drawing of a special symbol based on a ball entering the second ball entry port 640) (drawing of the second special symbol is more likely to result in a small jackpot than drawing of the first special symbol), and the second ball entry port 640 can be selected depending on the game state.
In other words, in the ninth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery for the special symbols is fixed regardless of the game state, and the probability of opening the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (probability of winning a normal symbol), the variation time of the normal symbol, the opening time, etc. are varied according to the game state, thereby varying the possibility of winning a small jackpot according to the game state, and as a result, the possibility of winning a jackpot is varied (so-called specifications of a one-type two-type mixed machine).

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, there are two types of V winning holes that will win a jackpot if a ball enters them after winning a small jackpot: a MAX V winning hole that triggers a 16-round jackpot, and a normal V winning hole that triggers a jackpot with a number of rounds corresponding to the small jackpot type. As in the eighth embodiment, a non-electric device 6752a is provided in association with one MAX V winning hole (special MAX V winning hole 6752) that will award a 16-round jackpot, and when a game ball enters one V winning hole (MAX V winning hole 6750f1) that will award a 16-round jackpot,
The non-electric device 6752a is configured to open. As a result, if a small win occurs while the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues, a 16-round big win can be easily confirmed by simply hitting the game ball into the special MAX V winning hole 6752 by left-handed hitting before the small win ends.

The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment in that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 have a partially changed configuration, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration.
This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment will be given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 186. Fig. 186 is a front view of the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 186, the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment has a board configuration (see Fig. 173) of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment in that a lottery device 6750 is provided instead of the sorting device 6700, and a special MAX V winning hole 6752 is provided instead of the special MAX operation winning hole 6720.
The difference is that it is provided with

When a small win is won in the lottery for the special symbol, the lottery device 6750 is in a state in which game balls can enter for a predetermined period of time (i.e., the small win attacker 6750a is opened), and a big win is won when a game ball enters one of the three V winning holes (MAX V winning hole 6750f1, normal V winning holes 6750f3, 6750f5) provided inside the lottery device 6750. Note that the lottery device 6750 is provided with the same number of outlets (outlets 6750f2, 6750f4, 6750f6) as the number of V winning holes (3). Since a gaming ball that enters the lottery device 6750 will always enter one of the V winning ports or one of the out ports, the rate (probability) that a gaming ball that enters the lottery device 6750 will enter one of the V winning ports (a V winning occurs) is 1/2 (3/6).

During the small win game (during the small win validity period), the normal V winning port 6750f3, 6750
When a game ball enters any of the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 and MAX V winning hole 6750f5, a jackpot with a number of rounds corresponding to the type of small win executed is executed, while when a game ball enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1, a 16-round jackpot is executed regardless of the type of small win. In addition, an opening mechanism for opening the non-electric device 6752a attached to the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is provided inside the MAX V winning hole 6750f1. Therefore, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 during the small win valid period, a 16-round jackpot with the largest number of rounds (advantageous to the player) is executed, and it becomes possible to easily enter the game ball into the special MAX V winning hole 6752 by simply hitting it from the left. In the case where a game ball enters the special MAX V winning hole 6752 during the validity period of the small win, as in the case where the game ball enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1, regardless of the type of small win, the game ball will win the 16-round big win, which has the most rounds, so the chance of winning advantageous big wins consecutively is given. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the ninth embodiment, when the first special symbol is drawn, the possibility of winning a small prize is 0, but when the second special symbol is drawn, the probability of winning a small prize is high (for example, 9/1).
0) to win a small prize. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern where the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, by continuing to hit from the right, a small prize is obtained with a high probability, and the small prize attacker 6750a is opened, so that it becomes a state where the ball is likely to enter the V prize entrance. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal pattern, it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 even if you hit from the right, so it is necessary to progress the game by hitting from the left. A game ball hit from the left can enter the first ball entrance 64, but cannot enter the second ball entrance 640, so in the normal state of the normal pattern, it will not win a small prize. Therefore, MAX
When the game state after the end of the big win executed based on the game ball entering the special MAX V winning hole 6750f1 (the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is opened) becomes the normal state of the normal pattern, the game ball hit to the left before the small win is entered into the special MAX V winning hole 67
When the ball enters the slot 52, the non-electric device 6752a is closed.
If the game state after the end of the jackpot executed based on the game ball entering the X V winning hole 6750f1 (the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is opened) is the normal pattern time-saving state, there is a high probability of winning the small jackpot, so by hitting left at the time of winning the small jackpot, the game ball can be easily made to enter the special MAX V winning hole 6752 during the small jackpot valid period. Therefore, it is possible to execute advantageous jackpot types with two consecutive jackpots.

Next, the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 187. Fig. 187 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the lottery device 6750. As shown in Fig. 187, the lottery device 6750 has three V winning holes (MAX V winning hole 6750f1,
, normal V winning gate 6750f3, 6750f5) and three out gates (out gate 6750f
The balls that reach the distribution rotor 6750f are fed into the three V
The ball enters one of the winning hole and the three out holes. The distribution rotor 6750f always rotates at a constant speed from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 until the power is turned off, so that the ball is allocated to one of the ball entry holes (the three V winning holes and the three out holes) provided on the distribution rotor 6750f depending on the timing of winning the small prize and the rolling speed of the game ball in the lottery device 6750. That is, every time a small prize is won and the game ball enters the inside of the lottery device 6750, the game ball can be randomly allocated to one of the ball entry holes.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 187, on the right side of the lottery device 6750 as viewed from the front,
A small prize attacker 6750a is provided to open and close the entrance of the small prize attacker 6750. When a small prize is won, the small prize attacker 6750a is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). During this opening period, the small prize attacker 6750a is opened from above.
The game balls that have reached the lottery device 6750a flow into the lottery device 6750. As shown in FIG. 187, the lottery device 6750 is provided with a guide flow path 6750b for directing the game balls downward toward the distribution rotor 6750f.
A ball discharge door 6750c is provided to open and close the floor surface. When the ball discharge door 6750c is closed, a single flow path is formed by the floor surface of the guide flow path 6750b and the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c, so that the game balls can flow downstream of the ball discharge door 6750c.
On the other hand, when the ball discharge door 6750c is open, the game balls fall into a discharge area 6750d formed below the ball discharge door 6750c and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. That is, the game balls are discharged to the outside without reaching the distribution rotor 6750f.
As shown in FIG. 187, a ball discharge door 6750c is provided downstream of the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c, and the ball discharge door 6750c is provided downstream of the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c. The ball discharge door 6750b is temporarily stopped in the guide flow path 6750b (guide flow path 6750
A ball stopper portion 6750e is provided which can close a specific position (b).

The ball discharge door 6750c, the discharge area 6750d, and the ball stopper 6750e are provided to limit the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6750f in one small win to a maximum of one. A control method for limiting the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6750f to one will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188(a) is a diagram showing a case where multiple game balls enter the lottery device 6750 with both the ball discharge door 6750c and the ball stopper 6750e closed. As shown in FIG. 188(a), the ball discharge door 6750
When the ball stopper 6750e and the ball stopper 6750c are closed, the game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6750 passes through the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c, is prevented from flowing down by the ball stopper 6750e, and is stopped to the right of the ball stopper 6750e. If a game ball flows down the guide flow path 6750b while one game ball is being stopped, the game ball is prevented from flowing down by the game ball already stopped, and is stopped to the right of the stopped game ball. As described above, the ball stopper 6750e is disposed at a distance of about one game ball from the lower end of the ball discharge door 6750c, so that the second and subsequent game balls that enter the lottery device 6750 are stopped on the upper surface of the ball discharge door 6750c.

FIG. 188(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the ball discharge door 6750c is opened while the game ball is stopped. As shown in FIG. 188(b), when the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, game balls other than the game ball stopped to the right of the ball stopper 6750e are discharged into the discharge area 6750.
d, the ball falls outside the pachinko machine 10.
It is possible to form a state in which only one game ball is retained inside the ball retaining portion 67.
50e, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the ball discharge door 6750c was opened, tilts to the left as viewed from the front, and becomes capable of passing through the guide passage 6750b. This allows one game ball remaining in the lottery device 6750 to flow down toward the distribution rotor 6750f. By controlling in this way, the distribution rotor 6750f can be controlled to flow down in the event of one small win.
Since the number of game balls that can reach the V winning slot can be limited to a maximum of one, the probability of winning a jackpot using the lottery device 6750 (the proportion of balls distributed to the V winning slot by the distribution rotor 6750f) can be made constant.

Next, the details of the distribution rotator 6750f will be described with reference to FIG.
189(a) is a top view of the distribution rotator 6750f. As shown in FIG. 189(a), the distribution rotator 6750f is configured to be approximately circular when viewed from above, and six ball entrances are arranged on its outer edge. The distribution rotator 6750f is provided with a downward inclination from its center toward the outer edge, so that a game ball that arrives near the center of the distribution rotator 6750f from above is distributed to one of the ball entrances provided on the outer edge along the inclination toward the outer edge.

As shown in FIG. 189(a), the distribution rotor 6750f has three V-shaped winning holes, each of which is generally trapezoidal when viewed from above, and three V-shaped winning holes, each of which is generally trapezoidal when viewed from above, arranged alternately.
An X-use V winning hole 6750f1, an out hole 6750f2, and a normal V winning hole 6750f3,
The outlet 6750f4, the normal V winning port 6750f5, and the outlet 6750f6 are arranged in order. As shown in FIG. 189(a), the distribution rotor 6750f is configured to rotate at a constant speed (for example, one rotation per 5 seconds) in a clockwise direction as viewed from above, with the axis 6750fz as the rotation axis, while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 189(b), when the game ball that has reached the distribution rotor 6750f enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1, the game ball passes through an opening mechanism provided inside the MAX V winning hole 6750f1. In response to the passage of the opening mechanism, the non-electric device 675
2a is opened. This creates an open state in which the game ball can enter the special MAX V winning hole 6752. This open state continues until the game ball enters the special MAX V winning hole 6752 and passes through the closing mechanism provided inside.
As long as the ball is hit to the right, it will not enter the winning hole 6752, so it is a special MAX.
The jackpot (MAX V winning hole 6752) that triggers the opening of the jackpot (MAX V winning hole 675
If the jackpot won based on the ball entering 0f1 is a time-saving jackpot, the game can be continued by hitting the right side during the time-saving state after the jackpot ends to draw the second special symbol, and the small jackpot can be won without hitting the left side. Therefore, when the small jackpot is won, the special MAX V winning hole 675 can be easily opened by hitting the left side during the small jackpot valid period.
2 to execute a favorable type of jackpot (16-round jackpot). On the other hand, if the jackpot won by entering the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 is a normal jackpot, the normal state of the normal symbol will be restored after the jackpot ends, and it will be difficult to execute the lottery for the second special symbol even if you hit it to the right, so it is necessary to progress the game by entering the game ball into the first ball entry hole 64 by hitting it to the left. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the special MAX V winning hole 6752, the non-electric device 6752a will be closed at a relatively early stage. For this reason, in most cases, the special MAX V
There is no benefit to be gained from the opening of the prize slot 6752.

In this way, in the ninth embodiment, depending on whether the jackpot allocated to the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 in the small win is a time-saving jackpot or a normal jackpot, whether the player can receive the benefit of the special MAX V winning hole 6752 being opened (the player can easily win the 16-round jackpot when the next small win occurs) is variable. Therefore, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 and a jackpot is executed, the player can play with the expectation that the game state after the jackpot ends will be a time-saving state of a normal pattern. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to Figure 190, the operation pattern (opening pattern) of each part (small winning attacker 6750a, ball stopper 6750e, and ball discharge door 6750c) of the lottery device 6750 in the case of a small winning in the lottery of the second special symbol in this ninth embodiment will be described. Figure 190 is a diagram showing the change over time in the state of each part when a small winning is won.

As shown in FIG. 190, when the small prize is won in the lottery of the second special pattern, the attacker 6750a for small prize is opened together with the start of the small prize (start of the small prize valid period). As shown in FIG. 190, the open state of the attacker 6750a for small prize continues for 0.5 seconds, and closes when 0.5 seconds have elapsed. After that, the attacker 6750a for small prize is maintained in a closed state until the end of the small prize. If the game ball can be made to enter the attacker 6750a for small prize during the 0.5 second open period, the game ball can be made to reach the distribution rotor 6750f during the small prize valid period, and the game ball can be made to enter one of the ball entrances.

As shown in FIG. 190, the ball stopper 6750e is maintained in a closed state (see FIG. 188(a)) from the start of the small win until 2 seconds have elapsed, and is switched to an open state (a state in which balls can flow down the induction flow path 6750b) from the time 2 seconds have elapsed (1.5 seconds have elapsed after the small win attacker 6750a is closed) until the end of the small win, and is switched to an open state again at the end of the small win.
The ball discharge door 6750c is switched to the closed state.
The ball stopper 6750 is kept in the closed state (see FIG. 188(a)) until 1.5 seconds have elapsed, and is switched to the open state (see FIG. 188(b)) from the time 1.5 seconds have elapsed (one second has elapsed after the small win attacker 6750a is closed) until the end of the small win, and is switched back to the closed state at the end of the small win. That is, for 1.5 seconds after the start of the small win, the ball stopper 6750
Since both the lottery door 6750e and the ball discharge door 6750c are closed, all game balls that have entered the lottery device 6750 are stopped within the guide flow path 6750b by the ball stopping portion 6750e.

In addition, when 1.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the ball discharge door 6750c is opened with the ball stopper 6750e closed, so that all game balls except for one game ball that is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stopper 6750e fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6750c to the discharge area 6750d and are discharged to the outside. That is, only one game ball remains inside the lottery device 6750. Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6750c is opened, the ball stopper 6750e is opened, so that the one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6750 flows down toward the distribution rotor 6750f. In this way, by opening the ball discharge door 6750c first and then the ball stopper 6750e, even if two or more game balls enter the lottery device 6750 during the opening period of the small win attacker 6750a, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged from the discharge area 6750d to the outside before the ball stopper 6750e is opened. Therefore, the game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6750f in one small win can be limited to one each time, so that the probability of winning a big win in a small win (the probability of a game ball entering the V winning hole) can be always constant (50%).

Next, referring to FIG. 191, a characteristic display effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in the ninth embodiment will be described. In the ninth embodiment, three V winning holes (MAX,
In addition to the V winning hole 6750f1 for special MAX, the normal V winning hole 6750f3, and the normal V winning hole 6750f5, a V winning hole 6752 for special MAX is provided at a position where a game ball shot by a left hit can enter. In the ninth embodiment, when a small win occurs while the V winning hole 6752 for special MAX is open, the special MA, not the lottery device 6750, is used during the small win valid period.
An effect (special small win effect) is executed to encourage the player to aim at the X-use V winning hole 6752. The display mode of this special small win effect has three types of display modes that can suggest the expectation of a time-saving big win when the game ball enters the special MAX-use V winning hole 6752.

FIG. 191(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when a special small win effect (special small win effect for low expectation) that suggests a low expectation of a time-saving big win is executed. As shown in FIG. 191(a), when a special small win effect for low expectation is executed, a display area HR8 is formed in the upper left of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 for displaying the remaining time until the end of the small win valid period (the period during which, when a game ball enters the special MAX V winning hole 6752, the ball is treated as valid and a 16-round big win is won). Inside this display area HR8, as shown in FIG. 191(a), the words "MAX valid timer" are displayed, and the "MAX valid timer"
The number of seconds remaining until the valid period of the small win expires is displayed below the characters. By checking the display content of this display area HR8,
The player can easily understand the remaining time until the ball landing at 752 becomes invalid.

As shown in FIG. 191(a), a display area HR9 is formed in the approximate center of the display screen, displaying the text "If you enter MAX before the timer reaches 0, you will definitely win the MAX jackpot!!" and the text "Maybe you will enter the time-saving mode...?".
Below the display area HR9, an image of the special MAX V winning hole 6752 and its special M
A display area HR10 is formed in which an image of an arrow with the words "Hit Left" is displayed in the direction of an image of the AX V winning hole 6752.
The display contents of HR9 and HR10 allow the player to easily understand that by shooting the game ball aiming at the special MAX V winning hole 6752 by hitting from the left, at least the 16-round jackpot will be won. In addition, by displaying a relatively pessimistic wording such as "Maybe it will enter the time-saving mode...?" in the display area HR9, the player can be made to recognize that even if the game ball enters the mode, the possibility of switching to the time-saving mode (the time-saving state of the normal pattern) is low. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game in which the player can choose to hit from the left during the small win period to win the 16-round jackpot, or to stop shooting the game ball and wait until the next small win (avoiding the V winning in this small win), and therefore it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In addition, the special small win performance for low expectation is configured to be difficult to select during the small win valid period corresponding to the time-saving jackpot, and easy to select during the small win valid period corresponding to the normal jackpot.

FIG. 191(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a special small win performance (special small win performance for high expectation) that suggests a high expectation of a time-saving big win is executed. As shown in FIG. 191(b), the display mode of the special small win performance for high expectation is configured differently from the display mode of the special small win performance for low expectation only in the display mode of the display area HR9. Specifically, the characters displayed in the lower part inside the display area HR9 are the characters "High expectation of time-saving mode!!". This display mode allows the player to easily understand that there is an extremely high possibility of winning a time-saving big win by having the game ball enter the special MAX V winning hole 6752 during the current small win valid period. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 195(b), but this special small win performance for high expectation is configured to be easily selected during the small win valid period corresponding to the time-saving big win and difficult to select during the small win valid period corresponding to the normal big win.

Although not shown in the figure, the special small win performance in the ninth embodiment is provided with a medium expectation level in addition to a low expectation level and a high expectation level. When a small win is won while the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open, a special small win performance for one expectation level is determined according to the small win type among these three expectation levels. This allows the player to select whether to aim for a win in the special MAX V winning hole 6752 by hitting left or to avoid a V win, taking into account the expectation level suggested by the special small win performance, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 192(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 192(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the ninth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 9(a)) in that the small win type selection table 202 is added.
ea has been added, and the contents of the first winning random number table 202a and the first winning type selection table 202b have been partially changed.

The small win type selection table 202ea is, when a small win is obtained by the lottery of the special pattern,
This is a data table to be referenced in order to determine the small win type. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 193(b), but when a small win is obtained by drawing a special pattern, this small win type selection table 202ea is referenced and the small win type corresponding to the value of the small win type counter C5 is determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 192(b), the first winning random number table 2 in the ninth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 192(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192(b), the first winning random number table 202a in the ninth embodiment specifies two random number values (counter values) of "0, 1" as the determination value for determining a big win (202 in FIG. 192(b)).
a1). The value that determines whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol drawing and the second special symbol drawing. Of the 400 possible random numbers (counter values) of the first jackpot random number counter C1, there are two jackpot determination values (counter values), so the probability of determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot in the special symbol drawing is 1/200 (2/400).

In addition, the range of the judgment value for determining a miss in the lottery for the first special symbol is regulated as "2 to 399" (see 202a2 in FIG. 192(b)), and the judgment value for determining a small win for the first special symbol is not regulated (see 202a3 in FIG. 192(b)). In addition, the range of the judgment value for determining a miss for the second special symbol is regulated as "2 to 39" (see 202a2 in FIG. 192(b)).
), and the range of the judgment value for determining the small win of the second special symbol is regulated as "40 to 399" (see 202a3 in FIG. 192(b)). Of the 400 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, the number of judgment values (counter values) that are determined to be small wins is 360, so the probability of determining a big win in the lottery of the special symbol is 9/10 (3
60/400).

In this way, in the ninth embodiment, the small prize can be won only by drawing the second special symbol. As a result, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, where the drawing of the second special symbol is easy to be executed, the game ball is more likely to enter the V winning hole, so it becomes easier to win the big prize again in a short period of time. This makes it possible to further increase the degree of advantage in the time-saving state,
When the time-saving state is reached, it can give great joy to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 193(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 193(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 193(a), the first winning type selection table 202b in the ninth embodiment has two types of winning types, A13 and B13, as the winning types of the first special symbols, and has two types of winning types, C13 and D13, as the winning types of the second special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 193(a), for the first special symbol, the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 0 to 49 is associated with "jackpot A13" (see 202b1 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (4-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state of the normal symbol. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 50 counter values that become "jackpot A13", so the probability that "jackpot A13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special symbol is 50% (50/100).
It is.

As shown in FIG. 193(a), for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 99" and is associated with "big win B13" (
Refer to 202b2 in FIG. 193(a). This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state of the normal pattern. Of the 100 counter values that the first jackpot type counter C2 can have, there are 50 counter values that become "jackpot B13", so the probability that "jackpot B13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special pattern is 50% (50/100).
).

As shown in FIG. 193(a), for the second special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set in the range of "0 to 79" and a "jackpot C13" is defined in association with it (see 202b3 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (16-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 16 and the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state of the normal symbol.
Of the 100 counter values, the counter value for "Big Win C13" is 80, so if the second special symbol is selected as a big win, the probability of "Big Win C13" being determined is 80% (8
0/100).

As shown in FIG. 193(a), a "jackpot D13" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "80 to 99" for the second special symbol (see 202b4 in FIG. 193(a)). This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (4-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 4 and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state with normal symbols. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become the "jackpot D13", so the probability that the "jackpot D13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol is 20% (20
/100).

In this way, in the ninth embodiment, when the first special symbol is selected as a jackpot,
While a 4-round jackpot with fewer rounds is always executed, if a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, a 16-round jackpot with the most rounds is executed 80% of the time, and a 4-round jackpot with fewer rounds is executed 20% of the time. Also, if a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol, the probability that a favorable time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends is 50%, whereas if a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, the probability that a time-saving state is set is 80%. Thus, it is configured so that a jackpot won by drawing the second special symbol is more likely to be advantageous for the player than a jackpot won by drawing the first special symbol.

Next, referring to Fig. 193(b), the details of the small win type selection table 202ea will be described. Fig. 193(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 202ea. This small win type selection table 202ea is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a small win type is specified when a small win is obtained by drawing a special pattern, and the judgment value of the small win type counter C5 is specified in correspondence with each small win type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193(b), the value of the small win type counter C5 is "0 to 4
For the range of ", "small prize A13" is specified as a small prize type (see 202ea1 in FIG. 193(b)). This "small prize A13" is a small prize type that wins "big prize E13" (16 round time-saving big prize) when a game ball enters any V winning hole during the small prize valid period. That is, the normal V winning hole 6750f3
, 6750f5, as in the case where the game ball enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning hole 6752, a 16-round jackpot with the greatest number of rounds (advantageous to the player) is executed, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state, which is the most advantageous jackpot type.
Of the 100 possible counter values that can be 5, there are 5 counter values that result in the "small win A13", so when a small win occurs in the special pattern lottery, the probability that the "small win A13" will be determined is 5% (5/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 193(b), the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 54", and "small win B13" is associated with it as the small win type.
Refer to 202ea2 in FIG. 193(b). This "small prize B13" is a small prize type that wins a "big prize F13" (special time-saving big prize) when a game ball enters any of the V winning holes during the small prize valid period. This "big prize F13" is a small prize type that wins a "big prize F13" (special time-saving big prize) when a game ball enters either of the normal V winning holes 6750f3 and 6750f5 during the small prize valid period. The number of rounds of the big prize is set to 4 rounds, while the number of rounds of the MAX V winning hole 6750f
When the game ball enters the V winning port 6752 for special MAX, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 16 rounds. In other words, since the number of rounds of the jackpot (degree of advantage) for the "small jackpot B13" varies depending on the type of V winning port into which the jackpot is won, it is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball enters a normal V winning port. In addition, since the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state, this is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small jackpot type counter C5 can take,
Since the counter value for "small win B13" is 50, when a small win occurs in the lottery for the special symbol, the probability that "small win B13" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

Also, as shown in FIG. 193(b), the value of the small win type counter C5 is "55 to 99".
For the range, "small win C13" is associated with the small win type (see 202ea3 in FIG. 193(b)). This "small win C13" is a small win type that wins a "big win G13" (special normal big win) when a game ball enters either of the V winning holes during the small win valid period. This "big win G13" is a small win type that wins a "big win G13" (special normal big win) when a game ball enters either of the normal V winning holes 6750f3, 6750f5 during the small win valid period, and the number of rounds of the big win is set to 4 rounds, while the number of rounds of the MAX V winning hole 6750f4 is set to 1 round.
When the game ball enters the V winning hole 6752 for the special MAX, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 16 rounds. In other words, the number of rounds of the jackpot (degree of advantage) of the "small win C13" varies depending on the type of the winning V winning hole, so when the game ball enters the normal V winning hole, it is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, since the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state of the normal pattern, it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends. Of the 100 counter values that the value of the small win type counter C5 can take, there are 45 counter values that become the "small win C13", so the percentage of the "small win C13" being determined when a small win is obtained by drawing a special pattern is 45% (45/100).

In this way, when the second special symbol is drawn as a small win, the probability that the small win type (small win A13, B13) corresponding to the time-saving big win is determined is set to 55% (5% + 50%), while the probability that the small win type (small win C13) corresponding to the normal big win is determined is set to 45%.
Since the probability of winning a small jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol is 9/10, the only way to win a jackpot in the time-saving state of a normal symbol is if you win a small jackpot and a V is drawn.
Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the probability of the advantageous normal symbol time-saving state returning after the jackpot is 45%. In addition, if a small jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and a V prize occurs, the number of rounds of the jackpot that will be won is Special MAX.
In other words, if the special MAX V winning port 6752 is closed, it is necessary to make a game ball enter the lottery device 6750 in order to generate a V winning during the small winning valid period.
In the case of a V win, 2/3 is a V win for the MAX V win hole 6750f1, whereas 2/3 of the time a V win occurs, it is a V win for either the normal V win hole 6750f3 or 6750f5. And, as mentioned above, the small win B13, which is determined in 50% of cases when a small win occurs, and the small win C13, which is determined in 45% of cases, are normal V win holes 6750f1 and 6750f2.
When a game ball enters either the MAX V winning hole 6750f3 or 6750f5, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 4. In other words, when a V winning occurs in the MAX V winning hole 6750f1, a 16-round jackpot is set with a 100% probability, while when a V winning occurs in the normal V winning hole 6750f2, the number of rounds of the jackpot is set to 4.
When a V win occurs for either 3 or 6750f5, a 16-round jackpot is set with a 5% probability (small jackpot A13), while a 95% probability (small jackpot B13,
C13) will set a 4-round jackpot. Therefore, when the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is closed, the probability of a V winning occurring is about 36.7% (
While the probability of a 16-round jackpot is 1/3 + 2/3 x 5%), the probability is about 63.3% (2
/3 x 95%) will result in a 4-round jackpot. On the other hand, as mentioned above, if you win the jackpot with the second special symbol, there is an 80% chance that you will win a 16-round jackpot.
When the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is closed, the probability of winning the advantageous 16-round jackpot is about 36.7% if the second special symbol is drawn as a small jackpot, and the V win occurs during the small jackpot game (during the small jackpot valid period) and the jackpot is won.
The odds of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol (80%) are higher than the odds of winning the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol (80%).

On the other hand, in the time-saving state and in the state where the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open, regardless of the type of small win, you can hit the left side to win the special M
By simply placing the game ball in the AX V winning hole 6752, you will be guaranteed to win the 16th round, which is the most number of rounds.
Since a round jackpot is set, it is more advantageous in terms of the number of rounds than when the jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol. In other words, in this ninth embodiment, even in the same game state (time-saving state of normal symbols), depending on whether the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open or not, the degree of advantage changes between when a small jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol and a jackpot occurs by winning a V prize during the execution of the small jackpot game, and when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, the special MAX V
Depending on the state of the winning slot 6752, the player can wish for different opportunities for winning the big win (V winning and the drawing of the second special symbol). This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 194.
As shown in FIG. 194, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment).
203 (see FIG. 13 ), a small win mid-flag 203ea, a big win type storage area 203eb, and a V-pass flag 203ec are added.
3h and the ball entry waiting flag 203j are deleted. The other configuration is the same as that of the RAM 203 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The small win flag 203ea is a flag indicating whether or not a small win is occurring. If the small win flag 203ea is on, it means that a small win is occurring, and if it is off, it means that a small win is not occurring. The small win flag 203ea is set to on when a small win occurs by drawing a special pattern and a small win starts. Also, it is set to off when the small win ends (see S1311 in FIG. 203). In the special pattern variation process 13 (see FIG. 197), the small win flag 203ea is referenced to determine whether or not a small win is occurring (see S261 in FIG. 197).

The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the type of the jackpot that has been won when the jackpot has been won. In the jackpot type storage area 203eb, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored when the jackpot has been won by drawing a special symbol (see S321 in FIG. 198). In addition, when the jackpot has been won by drawing a small symbol and the game ball has entered the V winning hole in the small win, data indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the small win type is stored (see S1502 in FIG. 199). The data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is held until the end of the jackpot that has been won, and is used to set the game state after the jackpot has ended according to the jackpot type.

The V-passing flag 203ec is a flag for indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the V winning hole during the execution of a small win game (whether or not a big win is confirmed after the end of the small win). If the V-passing flag 203ec is on at the end of the small win, the start of the big win is set at the end of the small win, whereas if the V-passing flag 203ec is off, the small win ends without starting the big win. This V-passing flag 203ec is,
The initial value is set to OFF, and is set to ON when the game ball enters the V winning hole during the execution of the small winning game (see S1608 in FIG. 204). Also, it is set to OFF after the start of the big winning based on the game ball entering the V winning hole is set (see S132 in FIG. 203).
See 5).

Next, referring to FIG. 195(a), the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described.
The configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the ninth embodiment will be described. Fig. 195(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 195(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see Fig. 14(a)) in that the expectation level selection table 2
The only difference is that the expectation level selection table 222ea is added. This expectation level selection table 222ea is a data table that is referenced to determine the presentation mode (expectation level suggested by the presentation) of the special small win presentation that is executed when the special MAX V winning port 6752 is opened and a small win is won. Here, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, a big win is won by entering any V winning port during the small win valid period. In addition, the type of big win (big win symbol) that is won when the ball enters the V winning port is predetermined for each small win type (see FIG. 193 (b)). In other words, when a game ball is entered into the V winning port and a big win is won, whether or not a time-saving state is given after the end of the big win is determined at the time when the small win type is determined (the time when the special symbol starts to change). In the ninth embodiment, when a small win is won while the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open, a special small win effect that suggests the expectation of a time-saving state being granted by a V winning during the small win valid period is selected from the expectation selection table 222ea and executed. By configuring in this way, when a small win occurs while the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open, whether or not to enter the game ball into the special MAX V winning hole 6752 during the small win valid period to start a big win can be determined according to the expectation suggested by the special small win effect. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. For details of this expectation selection table 222ea, see FIG.
This will be explained with reference to FIG. 5(b).

FIG. 195(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the expectation level selection table 222ea.
195(b), this expectation selection table 222ea is stipulated in correspondence with the type of expectation (expectation suggested by special small win effect) and the value range of the effect selection counter 223ea for each small win type. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195(b), for small win A13 and small win B13 (small win type that wins a time-saving big win when a V win occurs), the value of the effect selection counter 223ea is stipulated in correspondence with the range of "0 to 19" for the high expectation performance mode (see FIG. 191(b)), in correspondence with the range of "20 to 89" for the medium expectation performance mode (not shown), and in correspondence with the range of "90 to 99" for the low expectation performance mode (see FIG. 191(a)).

Since the performance selection counter 223ea can take 100 values from "0 to 99", the ratio of the performance modes for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation to be determined when the small win A13 or B13 is reached is 20% (20/100), 70% (70/100), respectively.
, and 10% (10/100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 195(b), for the small win C13 (a small win type that wins a regular big win when a V win occurs), the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea is "0 to 4".
The range of "5 to 4" is associated with a presentation mode for high expectation (see FIG. 191(b)).
A presentation mode (not shown) for a medium expectation level is associated with the range of "50 to 99" and is defined as "50 to 99".
A presentation mode for low expectation (see FIG. 191(a)) is specified in correspondence with the range.

Since the performance selection counter 223eka can take 100 values from "0 to 99", the probability that the performance modes for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation will be determined when the small win C13 is obtained is 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (
From these regulations, the performance mode for high expectation is small win A1
It can be said that it is easy to select when winning the small prize A13 and the small prize B13, but it is difficult to select when winning the small prize C13.
3, and when the small prize B13 is won, and when the small prize C13 is won, it is selected at a relatively high rate, and the performance mode for low expectation is the small prize A13 and the small prize B1
It is difficult to select when winning the small prize C3, and it is easy to select when winning the small prize C13.
Therefore, when the high expectation performance mode is executed, the small win being executed is the small win A1
On the other hand, when a low expectation performance mode is executed, the small win being executed is likely to be a small win C13.
It is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the small win A13, the small win B13, and the small win C13 are likely to occur when the medium expectation performance mode is executed. This makes it possible to provide a game that allows the player to select whether or not to enter the game ball into the special MAX V winning hole 6752 according to the expectation level suggested by the performance mode, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In the ninth embodiment, the special small win presentation is executed when the special MAX V winning port 6752 is opened and a small win is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special small win presentation may be executed even when the special MAX V winning port 6752 is closed and a small win occurs. In this case, for example, each time a small win is won, whether the special small win presentation is executed or the normal small win presentation (a presentation in a form that does not suggest the expectation of a time-saving jackpot when a V win is made) may be executed may be determined by lottery. The lottery probability may be varied according to the situation. More specifically, the more consecutive normal jackpots are won, the higher the probability of the special small win presentation being executed when the time-saving jackpot is won and the game transitions to the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, relief can be provided when a relatively unfavorable situation occurs for the player, such as consecutive wins of normal jackpots, so that the player's motivation for playing can be maintained even if an unfavorable situation occurs. Thus, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 196. Fig. 196 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in Fig. 196, the RAM 223 in the ninth embodiment
179 in that an effect selection counter 223ea is added and the standby state effect flag 223g is deleted from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 179).

The effect selection counter 223ea is a counter used to select one effect mode (expectation level type) from the expectation level selection table 222ea described above.
The value of the effect selection counter 223ea is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting the special small win effect (expectation level type), the random number value (counter value) defined in the expectation level selection table 222ea is compared with the value of the effect selection counter 223ea, and the corresponding one of the effect modes (expectation level types) is selected. The effect selection counter 223ea is, for example, a program executed by the main processing 13 (
The time stamp is updated every 1 ms in the time stamp (see FIG. 201).

<Regarding control process of main control device in ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 197 to Fig. 204. First, the special symbol variation process 13 (S141) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 197. This special symbol variation process 13 (S141) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation process 12 (see Fig. 180) in the eighth embodiment, and is the same as the special symbol variation process 12 in the eighth embodiment.
Similar to 2 (see FIG. 180), this is a process for setting the display mode in the first pattern display device 37 and the variation pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81, etc.

In the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, S202 to
In each process of S212, S214 to S218, and S221 to S223,
S202 to S212, S21 of the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 197) in the embodiment
The same processing as each of the processing of S204 to S218 and S221 to S223 is executed. Also, when the special symbol variation processing 13 (see FIG. 197) in this ninth embodiment is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big win game or a small win game is being executed (S261), and if it is determined that a big win game or a small win game is being executed (S261: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S261 that neither a big win game nor a small win game is being executed (S261: No), the processing is terminated to S20.
2. In the process of S261, if the big win flag 203m is on, it is determined that a big win game is being played, if the small win flag 203ea is on, it is determined that a small win game is being played, and if it is determined that both the big win flag 203m and the small win flag 203ea are off, it is determined that neither a big win nor a small win is being played.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, S207
Or, when the process of S212 is completed, instead of the special symbol variation process (S213, see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the special symbol variation process 13 is executed (
S262), and then this process is terminated. Details of this special symbol variation process 13 (S262) will be described later with reference to FIG. 198.
(See FIG. 197) In the process of S218, if it is determined that the result of the current special pattern lottery is a jackpot (S218: Yes), the time-saving counter 203i is reset to 0 (S263), the start of the jackpot is set, and the jackpot start flag 203k is set to ON (S264), and the process proceeds to S223.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 197) in the ninth embodiment, S222
When the process of is completed, it is then determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the special symbol this time is a small win (S265), and if it is determined that the result of the lottery is a small win (S265: Yes), a small win start process for setting the start of a small win is executed (S266), and this process is terminated. Details of this small win start process (S266) will be described later with reference to FIG. 199. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S265 that the result of the lottery for the special symbol this time is not a small win (i.e., a miss) (S265: No), the small win start process (S266) is executed.
is skipped and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 198, the special symbol variation start process 13 (S
The details of the special symbol variation start process 13 (S262) will be described.
This is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and similarly to the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b,
This is a process for conducting a lottery (determining whether it is a win or loss) for a "jackpot with special pattern," a "miss with special pattern," or a "small win with special pattern," and for determining the presentation pattern (variation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process 13 (see FIG. 198) in the ninth embodiment, S30
In each process of S301 to S312, the same process as each process of S301 to S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed. Also, in the special symbol variation start process 13 (see FIG. 198) in the ninth embodiment,
In the process of 305, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the special pattern this time is a jackpot (
S305: Yes), data indicating the type of jackpot won in this lottery is stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb (S321), and the process proceeds to S306.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, if it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is not a big win (S305: No), then it is determined whether the current special symbol lottery is a small win or not (S322), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S322: Yes),
Based on the value of the small win type counter C5 obtained in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the small win is set (S323). More specifically, the value of the small win type counter C5 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the small win type selection table 202ea (see FIG. 193(b)) to determine what the small win type is. As described above, if the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a small win A13, and if it is in the range of "5 to 54", it is determined to be a small win A13.
If it is within the range of "55 to 99", it is determined to be a small win B13, and if it is within the range of "55 to 99", it is determined to be a small win C13 (see Figure 193 (b)).

When the process of S323 is completed, the variation pattern at the time of the small win is determined (S324).
When the variation pattern is set in the process of 324, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops with the combination of symbols indicating a small win in the third symbol display device 81 is determined.
The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of M203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11(a)), and the fluctuation type counter CS1
When the process of S324 is completed, this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned small win start process (S266) will be described with reference to FIG. 199. As described above, this small win start process (S266) is a process for setting the start of a small win when a small win is obtained by drawing a special pattern. When this small win start process is executed, first, the operation scenario of the lottery device 6750 corresponding to the small win type is read (S1501). In this operation scenario, data for setting the operation shown in FIG. 190 for the small win attacker 6750a, the ball stopper 6750e, and the ball discharge door 6750c is specified.

When the process of S1501 is completed, the following is executed for the big win type storage area 203eb:
Store data indicating the big win type corresponding to the current small win type (S1502). In the process of S1502, if the current small win type is small win A13, the big win E1
If the current small win type is small win B13, data indicating a big win F13 (special time-shortened big win) is stored in the big win type storage area 203eb, and if the current small win type is small win C13, data indicating a big win G13 (special normal big win) is stored in the big win type storage area 203eb. When the process of S1502 is completed, the start of the small win is set (S1503), and this process is completed.

Next, the start-up process 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 200. The start-up process 13 is the same as the start-up process 12 in the eighth embodiment (see Fig. 181).
This is a process executed in place of the start-up process 12 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 181), and is a process that is started when the power is turned on.
In each of the processes in 17, the same process as S90 in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment is performed.
The same processes as those in steps S911 to S910 and S914 to S917 are executed.

Also, in the start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) in this ninth embodiment, when the processing of S910 is completed, the time-saving counter 203i, the big win flag 203m, and the small win flag 203ea are read out (S941), and the processing proceeds to S912.

In the start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) in the ninth embodiment, the lottery device 67
The start of the rotation operation of the distribution rotor 6750f provided inside the rotor 6750 is set (S94
2), and the process proceeds to S914. By executing the process of S942, the distribution rotor 6750f continues to rotate at a constant rotation speed (for example, one rotation per 5 seconds) until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, depending on the timing of winning a small prize, the ball entrance into which the game ball that entered the lottery device 6750 is distributed can be changed randomly.

Next, details of the main process 13 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 201. The main process 13 is the same as the main process 12 in the eighth embodiment (see Fig. 182).
This is a process executed in place of the main process 12 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 182).
Similarly, this is a process for executing the main control of the game.

In the main process 13 (see FIG. 201) in the ninth embodiment, steps S1001 to S1
In the processes of S1003 and S1006 to S1016, the same processes as those of S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1016 in the main process (see FIG. 30) in the first embodiment are executed.
In the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 1), when the processing of S1003 is completed, instead of the big win control processing (S1005, see FIG. 30) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the big win control processing 13 is executed (S1071), and then the small win control processing 13 for executing various controls during the small win game is executed (S1072), and the processing proceeds to S1006. Details of the big win control processing 13 (S1071) and the small win control processing 13 (S1072) will be described later with reference to FIG. 202 and FIG. 203, respectively.

First, the details of the big win control process 13 (S1071) will be described with reference to FIG. 202. As described above, the big win control process 13 is the same as that of the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment).
This is a process that is executed in place of the big win control process (see Figure 32) in the embodiment, and is a process for controlling the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a.

In the ninth embodiment, the big win control process 13 (S1071) includes steps S1201 to
In each process of S1212, S1214, S1216, and S1217, the processes of S1201 to S1204 of the big win control process (see FIG. 32) in the eighth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are performed.
The same processes as those in S1212, S1214, S1216, and S1217 are executed.

In addition, in the big win control process 13 (see FIG. 202) in the ninth embodiment, S121
In the process of 2, when it is determined that the ending performance has ended (S1
212: Yes), and determine whether the current jackpot is a time-saving jackpot or not (S1251
), if it is determined that the time-saving big win has occurred, the process proceeds to S1214. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving big win has not occurred in the process of S1251 (S1251: N
o), and proceed to S1216.

Next, referring to FIG. 203, the details of the above-mentioned small win control process 13 (S1072) will be described. As described above, this small win control process 13 (S1072) is a process for executing various controls during a small win game. In other words, it is a process for performing the same control as the small win control process (see FIG. 67) in the above-mentioned third embodiment.

Of the small win control process 13 (see FIG. 203), S1301 to S1304 and S13
In each process of S1301 to S1304, S1310, and S1311, the same processes as those of S1301 to S1304, S1310, and S1311 of the small win control process (see FIG. 67) in the third embodiment are executed.
In the above process (see FIG. 13), when the process of S1303 is completed, the start of an operation scenario for a small win is then set (S1321), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the small win control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, S131
When the process of step 1 is completed, it is then determined whether the V passing flag 203ec is on (S
When it is determined that the V passing flag 203ec is on (S1322: Yes),
s), reset the value of the time-saving counter 203i to 0 (S1323), and set the start of the jackpot of the type corresponding to the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb (S
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1322 that the V passing flag 203ec is off (S1322: No), the processes of S1323 to S1325 are skipped and the process ends.

In addition, in the small win control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the ninth embodiment, S131
In the process of 0, if it is determined that the timing of the small win is not the end timing (S1310:
If the answer is No, the ball entering the V winning hole is monitored, and if a ball is detected, a V passage detection process is executed to perform control corresponding to the type of V winning hole (S1326), and this process is terminated. The details of this V passage detection process (S1326) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 204 is a flow chart showing the V-passing detection process (S1625). As described above, this V-passing detection process (S1625) is a process for monitoring balls entering the V-winning hole, and when a ball is detected, performing control corresponding to the type of V-winning hole. When this V-passing detection process (S1625) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V-passing flag 203ec is on (S1601), and if it is determined that the V-passing flag 203ec is on (S1602), the process proceeds to step S1603.
01: Yes), this means that a ball has already been detected entering (passing through) one of the V winning ports and no new settings are required, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203ec is off (S1601:
No), and it is determined whether or not a ball has entered (passed through) any of the V winning holes (S16
02), if it is determined that the ball has not entered (passed through) the V winning hole (S1602
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1602 that a ball has been detected in the V winning hole (S1602: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the V winning is valid (S1603). If it is outside the valid period (S1603: No), the process ends.
), since there is a possibility that the game ball has entered (passed through) the V winning hole due to fraudulent activity, etc., an error command is set (S1604) and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1603 that the V validity period is not expired (S1
603: Yes), then, the type of the V winning hole where the ball was detected in the processing of S1602 is a normal V
It is determined whether the winning hole is one of the winning holes 6750f3 and 6750f5 (S1605), and it is determined whether the ball entered (passed) this time is neither the normal V winning hole 6750f3 nor 6750f5 (MAX
If it is determined that the selected jackpot type is either the V winning port 6750f1 for special MAX or the V winning port 6752 for special MAX (S1605: No), the data stored in the jackpot type storage area 203eb is rewritten to data corresponding to a 16-round jackpot (S1606), and the process proceeds to S1607.

In contrast, in the processing of S1605, the normal V winning slots 6750f3 and 6750f5
If it is determined that a ball has been scored on either of the balls (S1605: Yes), the process returns to S160
The process skips step S1606 and proceeds to step S1607. In step S1607, a V-pass command is set (S1607), and then the V-pass flag 203ec is set to ON (S1608). Next, a V-winning port command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the type of the V-winning port that has been detected (S1609), and the process ends.

By this V passage detection process, during the small winning valid period, the MAX V winning port 6750f1,
When a ball is detected entering the special MAX V winning hole 6752, a 16-round big win can be executed regardless of the small win type. This allows the player to play while paying attention to the type of V winning hole into which the ball enters during the small win valid period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding control process of the voice lamp control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 205 to 207.
The hit-related process 13 (S43001) in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to the above. The hit-related process 13 (S43001) is a process executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 36) instead of the hit-related process 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment, and is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to the hit, similar to the hit-related process 12 (see FIG. 184) in the eighth embodiment.

In the winning-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, S4404,
In each process of S4405, S4407, and S4408, the same process as each process of S4404, S4405, S4407, and S4408 of the winning-related process 12 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 184) is executed. Also, in the winning-related process 13 in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 205), if it is determined in the process of S4407 that the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 does not include a round number command (S4407: No), it is next determined whether or not the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 includes a small winning opening command (S44001), and if it is determined that the small winning opening command is included (S44001: Yes),
Execute the expectation suggestion setting process to set the performance mode during the small win (S44002)
The process ends. For details of the expectation suggestion setting process (S44002), see FIG.
This will be described later with reference to 06.

In addition, in the winning-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the ninth embodiment, S4400
In the process of 1, if it is determined that the opening command for the small win has not been received (S44001: No), then it is determined whether or not a V winning port command is included in the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 (S44003). If it is determined that a V winning port command is included (S44003: Yes), a V winning port command process is executed to execute control according to the type and state of the V winning port where the ball was detected (S44003: Yes).
4004), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S44003 that the V winning port command is not included (S44003: No), the process proceeds to S4409. Details of the V winning port command process (S44004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned expectation suggestion setting process (S44002) will be described with reference to FIG. 206. As described above, this expectation suggestion setting process (S44002) is a process for setting the presentation mode during a small win. In this expectation suggestion setting process (S44002), first, it is determined whether the MAX zone flag 223da is ON (S40101).
If it is determined that the MAX zone flag 223da is on (S40101: Yes),
s), which means that a small win has been executed in a state where the special MAX V winning port 6752 is open, S40103 to S40104 are performed to determine the presentation mode of the special small win presentation.
More specifically, the expectation selection table 222ea is read (S40103), and the expectation type corresponding to the current small win type and the counter value of the performance selection counter 223ea is specified from the read expectation selection table 222ea (S40104).
0104), and set the execution of the special small win effect of the specified expectation degree type (S40105).
Then, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40101 that the MAX zone flag 223da is off (S40101: No), this means that the special MAX V winning port 6752 is closed, so the execution of the normal small win performance is set (S40102).
This process ends. By this expectation suggestion setting process (see FIG. 206),
When the winning hole 6752 is open, the player can be informed of the expectation of a time-saving big win if a V win is made by the special small win presentation mode.
Taking into account the suggestion of the special small win effect, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the player can select whether or not to let the game ball enter the special MAX V winning hole 6752. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 207, the details of the V winning hole command process (S44004) will be described. As described above, this V winning hole command process (S44004) is a process for executing control according to the type and state of the V winning hole where the ball was detected.
In the winning port command process (S44004), first, the V winning port command received this time is M
It is determined whether the command indicates a ball entering the V winning hole 6750f1 for AX (S4020
1), if it is determined that the command is for the MAX V winning port 6750f1 (S402
01: Yes), the MAX zone flag 223da is set to ON (S40202), and a V winning presentation is set to indicate that a winning has been made in the V winning port during the valid period of the small winning (S4020
3) End this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S40201, if it is determined that the command is not a command indicating a ball entering the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 (S40201: No), it is next determined whether or not the command is a V winning hole command indicating a ball entering the special MAX V winning hole 6752 (S40204).
In the process of S40204, if it is determined that the current V winning port command is a command indicating the special MAX V winning port 6752 (S40204: Yes), then the MAX zone flag 223da is set to OFF (S40205), and then it is determined whether or not a small win game is currently being played (S40206). In the process of S40206, if it is determined that a small win game is currently being played (S40206: Yes), this means that a game ball has entered the open special MAX V winning port 6752 during the small win valid period, so the execution of the V winning performance is set (S40207), and this process is terminated.
In the process of S40206, if it is determined that the small win game is not being executed (normal game is being executed) (S40206: No), the left hit is executed outside the small win valid period,
This means that the game ball has entered the open special MAX V winning hole 6752 and the special MAX V winning hole 6752 has been closed. Therefore, the execution of the falling effect is set (S40208
), and then this process ends.

In contrast, in the process of S40204, the V winning command received this time is the special M
If it is determined that the command is not a command indicating a winning entry to the AX V winning port 6752 (S4020
4: No), which means that the command indicates either the normal V winning port 6750f3 or 6750f5, the execution of the V winning performance is set (S40209), and this process is terminated. By executing this V winning port command process (see FIG. 207),
Appropriate control can be executed depending on the type of winning port, the state of the special MAX V winning port 6752, etc.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, there are two types of V winning holes that will win a jackpot if the ball enters the hole when a small jackpot is won: a MAX V winning hole that will trigger a 16-round jackpot, and a normal V winning hole that will trigger a jackpot with a number of rounds corresponding to the small jackpot type. In addition, there are two MAX V winning holes that will award a 16-round jackpot: a MAX V winning hole 6750f1 and a special MAX V winning hole 6752.
A non-electric device 6752a is provided in association with the MAX V winning hole 6750f1. This non-electric device 6752a is configured to open in conjunction with the entry of a game ball into the MAX V winning hole 6750f1. This open state continues until the next game ball enters the special MAX V winning hole 6752, so if a game ball can be entered into the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 during a small win, when a small win occurs, it is possible to easily win one small win by simply entering the game ball into the special MAX V winning hole 6752 by hitting it from the left before the small win ends.
It is possible to create a very advantageous state in which six rounds of big wins can be confirmed. In other words, it is possible to create an extremely advantageous state in which there is a high possibility of winning the most advantageous type of big win consecutively, which can give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol in the time-saving state, the 16-round jackpot is obtained with a probability of 80% regardless of the state of the special MAX V winning hole 6752. In contrast, when a V winning occurs while the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is closed, the probability is about 36.7% (MAX V
On the other hand, when the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open, you can always win the 16-round jackpot by simply shooting a game ball at the special MAX V winning hole 6752 during the small win valid period. In other words, when the time-saving state of the normal pattern is activated, the special MAX V winning hole 675
If 2 is closed, the second prize is more likely to be awarded than if a V prize were awarded during the small prize validity period.
The odds of winning the jackpot in the special symbol drawing are higher, which is more favorable for a 16-round jackpot, while if the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open, the odds of winning the V prize during the validity period of the small prize are 1.0 times higher than if the jackpot was won in the second special symbol drawing.
The probability of winning 6 rounds becomes higher. Therefore, even in the same game state, depending on whether the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open or not, the degree of advantage can be switched between the case where a small win occurs in the drawing of the second special symbol and a big win occurs when a V winning occurs during the execution of the small win game, and the case where a big win occurs in the drawing of the second special symbol. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, depending on the state of the special MAX V winning hole 6752, the player can be made to hope for different opportunities as a winning opportunity for a big win (V winning and drawing of the second special symbol), so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Modification of the ninth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the ninth embodiment described above will be described with reference to Fig. 208. In the ninth embodiment described above, a game ball is inserted (passed) through any V winning hole during the execution of a small winning game (during the small winning valid period), and a jackpot of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of V winning hole is started. That is, depending on the type of small winning, only whether a time-saving jackpot or a normal jackpot is determined in advance when a V winning hole occurs, and the number of rounds of the jackpot is indefinite until a V winning hole occurs.

In contrast, in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, in addition to the number of rounds of the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is also variable according to the type of V winning hole into which the ball entered during the small winning validity period. More specifically, even if the small winning C13 corresponding to the jackpot G13 (special normal jackpot) is won, if the ball enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning hole 6752 during the small winning validity period, a 16-round time-saving jackpot is awarded (the jackpot G13 is rewritten to a 16-round time-saving jackpot). By configuring in this way, the benefit when the game ball enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 and the special MAX V winning hole 6752 can be made larger, so that when the game ball enters the lottery device 6750, the player can play the game with more attention paid to the type of V winning hole into which the ball enters. In addition, when the special MAX V winning port 6752 is opened and the time-saving state is entered, an extremely advantageous state can be created in which the 16-round time-saving big prize can be easily won by simply hitting the left side during the valid period of the small prize, which is won with a 9/10 chance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in this modified example of the ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described ninth embodiment in terms of configuration in that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed.
Other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the voice lamp control device 113
The various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the ninth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Next, the V-passing detection process (S1625) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG.
625) is the same as the V-passing detection process (see FIG. 204) in the ninth embodiment described above.
This is a process that monitors balls entering the V winning port, and when a ball entry is detected, performs control corresponding to the type of V winning port.

In the V-passing detection process (see FIG. 208) in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, S160
The processes of S1601 to S1605 and S1607 to S1609 are the same as those of S1601 to S1605 and S1607 to S1609 in the V-passing detection process (see FIG. 204) in the ninth embodiment.
The same processes as those in S1609 are executed.

In addition, in the V passage detection process (see FIG. 208) in this modified example, if it is determined in the process of S1605 that the V winning hole that has been detected this time is neither the normal V winning hole 6750f3 nor 6750f5 (i.e., the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning hole 6752) (S1605: No), the jackpot type storage area 203
Rewrite the data stored in eb to data indicating a 16 round time-saving jackpot (
S1611), and the process proceeds to S1607.

In this way, in the V passage detection process (see FIG. 208) in this modified example, when a ball is detected entering the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning hole 6752 during the small winning valid period, a 16-round time-saving big win is set regardless of the small winning type (i.e., regardless of the big win type corresponding to the small winning type). By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage of the player when a game ball enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 or the special MAX V winning hole 6752 can be further increased, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the ninth embodiment, when a game ball enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1 during the small winning valid period, the special MAX V
The winning hole 6752 is opened and the player is configured to win the 16-round time-saving big win. By configuring it in this way, when the ball enters the MAX V winning hole 6750f1, the game state is always changed to a game state in which the player plays by hitting to the right. Therefore, after the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is opened, if the player does not win the small win even once and the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is opened, the player may not win the small win even once.
In addition, even if a game ball enters the special MAX V winning hole 6752 during the valid period of the small prize, the 16-round time-saving big prize is won, so that by making a game ball enter the MAX V winning hole 6750f1, it is possible to create an extremely advantageous state in which it is almost certain that the 16-round time-saving big prize will be won at least twice at short intervals. Therefore, when a game ball enters the inside of the lottery device 6750 during the valid period of the small prize, the MAX V winning hole 6750f1
This makes it possible to make the player more excited about the game ball landing in the hole, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In this modified example, the V winning hole for MAX 6750f1 and the V winning hole for special MAX 6
When a game ball enters the slot 752, the game state after the big win is set to the time-saving state, so the ease of transition to the time-saving state can be varied depending on the game state and the state of the special MAX V winning hole 6752. More specifically, in the normal state of the normal pattern, if the big win is won by the lottery of the first special pattern, the time-saving big win occurs at a rate of 50%, whereas in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, if the big win is won by the lottery of the second special pattern, the time-saving big win occurs at a rate of 80% (see FIG. 193(a)). On the other hand, the rate of transition to the time-saving state when the big win is won by the V winning during the small win in the time-saving state varies depending on whether the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open or not. In other words, if a V entry occurs while the special MAX V entry port 6752 is closed, the time-saving jackpot will be won if a V entry occurs during the small win validity period of either small win A13 or B13 (small win corresponding to the time-saving jackpot) (55%), or if the ball enters the MAX V entry port 6750f1 during the small win validity period of small win C13 (45% x 1/3). In other words, the time-saving jackpot will be won with a probability of 70%. In contrast,
In the state where the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open, the ball can be entered into the special MAX V winning hole 6752 to execute a time-saving jackpot by simply hitting the ball to the left during the small winning period. Therefore, when the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is closed in the time-saving state, it is easier to transition to the time-saving state if the jackpot is won by drawing the second special pattern than if the V winning occurs during the small winning period, whereas when the special MAX V winning hole 6752 is open, it is easier to transition to the time-saving state if the V winning occurs during the small winning period than if the jackpot is won by drawing the second special pattern. Therefore, in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the player can be made to wish for different opportunities as the winning opportunity for the jackpot (V winning and drawing the second special pattern) depending on the state of the special MAX V winning hole 6752, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the ninth embodiment and its modified example, the type of jackpot that is won when a V entry occurs during the small prize valid period is defined in association with each small prize type, and when a game ball enters the MAX V entry port 6750f1 or the special MAX V entry port 6752, the jackpot type is rewritten to a 16-round jackpot or a 16-round time-saving jackpot. However, it is not necessary to predefine the jackpot type for each small prize type. The jackpot type may be determined by lottery at the time when a V entry occurs. More specifically, for example, if a normal V entry port 6750f3, 6750f4, 6750f5, 6750f6, 6750f7, 6750f8, 6750f9, 6750f10, 6750f11, 6750f12, 6750f13, 6750f14, 6750f15, 6750f16, 6750f16, 6750f17, 6750f18, 6750f19, 6750f20, 6750f21, 6750f22, 6750f23, 6750f24, 6750f25, 6750f26, 6750f27, 6750f30, 6750f31, 6750f32, 6750f33, 6750f34, 6750f35, 6750f36, 6750f37, 6750f38, 6750f39, 6750f40, 6750f41, 6750f42, 6750f
If the ball lands on 0f5, there is a 5% chance of a 16-round short-time jackpot, and a 50% chance of a 16-round short-time jackpot.
The lottery may be configured so that the 4-round time-saving jackpot is determined at a rate of 45% and the 4-round normal jackpot is determined at a rate of 45%.
When a ball is detected entering the V winning hole 6752, a lottery may be performed to determine the 16-round time-saving big win. By configuring in this way, it becomes unnecessary to specify the small win type and the big win type in correspondence with each other, so the small win type selection table 202ea can be omitted.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 209 to Fig. 220. In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment described above, the small prize is won with a high probability in the drawing of the second special symbol, which is likely to be executed during the time-saving state, while the small prize is not won in the drawing of the first special symbol. And, the big prize is won by the game ball entering the V winning hole during the small prize valid period.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is configured to win a small prize with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100) even when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and is configured to set an opening pattern that can result in a V prize in some of the small prizes of the first special symbol. In other words, even in the normal state in which the game should be played by shooting the game ball by hitting it from the left side toward the first ball entrance 64, a big prize can be won by a V prize.
In addition, as the small win of the first special symbol that may cause a V win, a plurality of small win types with different V win rates (50%, 75%, and 100% V win rates) are provided. This allows players to expect that when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, it will be a small win of an opening pattern that allows a V win, and allows players to play in the hope of getting a small win with a higher V win rate, thereby improving the players' interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment.
The differences in configuration are that the game board 13 has a partially changed board configuration, and that the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration.
Various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 11
Various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the ninth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 209. Fig. 209 is a front view of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 11, in the tenth embodiment, a lottery device 6755 is provided below the variable display unit 80 instead of the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment.
The difference is that the special MAX V winning port 6752 in the embodiment is omitted. Details of this lottery device 6755 will be described with reference to Figs. 210 to 212.

210 is an enlarged front view of the lottery device 6755 and its periphery in the game board 13 of the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 210, inside the lottery device 6755 of the tenth embodiment, a distribution rotor 6755f is provided instead of the distribution rotor 6750f of the ninth embodiment. The distribution rotor 6755f has three V-shaped winning holes (central V-shaped winning hole 6755f
v1 to 6755fv3) and three outlets (central outlets 6755fo1 to 6755f
o3) are provided, and are configured to rotate at a constant speed at all times, similar to the distribution rotor 6750f in the ninth embodiment. Since the game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6755f are randomly distributed to one of the six ball entry ports depending on the timing of winning a small prize, the probability (proportion) that the game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6755f are distributed to the V entry port is 1/2 (3/6).

As shown in FIG. 210, the lottery device 6755 includes a small winning attacker 6755a capable of opening and closing the lottery device 6755, and a discharge area 6755 for discharging game balls to the outside.
5d, a ball discharge door 6755c for opening and closing the discharge area 6755, and a ball discharge door 6755c
A ball stopper 6 for temporarily stopping the game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the guide passage 6755b in the guide passage 6755b.
The small winning attacker 6755a and the discharge area 67
The ball discharge door 6755c and the ball stopper 6755e are respectively the small win attacker 6750a and the discharge area 6750b provided in the lottery device 6750 in the ninth embodiment.
50d, ball discharge door 6750c, and ball stopping portion 6750e have the same functions, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 210, a ball distribution rotor 6755 is provided at a predetermined position between the small winning attacker 6755a and the discharge area 6755d in the lottery device 6755.
f, and two ball entrances (
The right V winning opening 6755bV and the right out opening 6755bO, an upper opening door 6755bU capable of opening and closing the upper end of the guide flow path 6755b2, and a lower opening door 6755bD capable of opening and closing the upper part of the right V winning opening 6755bV are provided.
The surrounding structure of 55b2 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 211(a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the guide flow path 6755b2 when both the upper opening door 6755bU and the lower opening door 6755bD are closed, FIG. 211(b) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the guide flow path 6755b2 when the upper opening door 6755bU is open and the lower opening door 6755bD is closed, and FIG. 211(c) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the guide flow path 6755b2 when the upper opening door 6755bU and
6 is an enlarged front view of the periphery of the guide channel 6755b2 when both the lower opening/closing door 6755bD and the guide channel 6755b2 are open.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), when both the upper opening door 6755bU and the lower opening door 6755bD are closed, the game balls can pass by rolling on the upper surface of the upper opening door 6755bU. As a result, the game balls that enter the inside of the lottery device 6755 pass over the upper opening door 6755bU and flow down toward the distribution rotor 6755f.
As shown in FIG. 210(b), when the upper opening door 6755bU is opened and the lower opening door 6755bD is closed, the game ball can flow into the guide flow path 6755b2, and the game ball that has flowed in cannot (is difficult to) enter the right V winning hole 6755bV.
), the lower opening and closing door 6755bD is in the closed state,
As a result, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is opened,
When the lower opening/closing door 6755bD is closed, the game balls that flow into the lottery device 6755 flow into the guide flow passage 6755b2 whose upper end is open, and are then guided to the closed lower opening/closing door 6755bD.
The inclination of the upper surface of 55bD guides the ball toward the right out hole 6755bO, and the ball goes into the right out hole 6755bO.

Also, as shown in FIG. 210(c), the right V winning port 6755bV is a guide flow path 6755b
The right outlet 6755bO is disposed directly below the guide passage 6755b2, while the right outlet 6755bO is disposed at a position branching off to the left with respect to the flow direction of the guide passage 6755b2.
When both the lower opening/closing door 6755bD and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are open, the game ball that enters the lottery device 6755 flows down along the flow direction of the guide flow path 6755b2 and enters the right V winning port 6755B.
The ball goes to 55bV.

In this way, in the lottery device 6755 of the tenth embodiment, depending on the combination of opening and closing of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the lottery device 6755 are allowed to flow down to the distribution rotor 6755f side (see FIG. 211(a)), to the right out port 6755bO (see FIG. 211(b)), and to the right V winning port 6755bV.
In other words, the flow direction (the direction in which the distribution rotor 6755f is provided) in which a V win occurs at a rate of 1/2, and the flow direction (the direction in which the distribution rotor 6755f is provided) in which a V win is impossible (difficult)
The flow direction can be switched between a direction that is convenient (the direction of the right out hole 6755bO) and a direction that makes it easy to win a V prize (the direction of the right V prize hole 6755bV). Therefore, the player can play the game by paying more attention to the flow direction of the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the tenth embodiment, when a small win is obtained by the drawing of the second special symbol, the possibility of a time-saving big win is higher when a V win occurs by the ball entering one of the central V winning holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 than when a V win occurs by the ball entering the right V winning hole 6755bV. More specifically, when a small win is obtained by the drawing of the second special symbol, the central V winning hole 6755fv1 to
When the game ball enters the 6755fv3, there is a 100% chance of winning the 16-round time-saving big win, whereas when the ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV, there is only a slightly less than 40% chance of winning the time-saving big win.
Therefore, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the ball will land in any one of the slots fv1 to 6755fv3.
When the game ball flows down toward 55f (i.e., the central V winning hole 6755fv1 to 6755fv2)
When it is determined that the game ball will be distributed to any of the central out holes 6755fo1 to 6755fo3, the player can strongly hope for a V win. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the configuration of the distribution rotator 6755f in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 212. Fig. 212 is a top view of the distribution rotator 6755f in the tenth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 212, the distribution rotator 6755f in the tenth embodiment has the following features:
As with the distribution rotor 6750 in the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 189(a)), six ball entrances are arranged along the outer periphery. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 212, the central V entry holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 and the central exit holes 6755fo1 to 6755fo3 are arranged so that the V entry holes and the exit holes are alternately adjacent to each other.
Since the ball distribution rotor 6755f rotates at a constant speed in a constant direction around the axis 6755fz, the balls that reach the distribution rotor 6755f are distributed to each entry port in equal proportions. In other words, the proportion (probability) of the balls entering the V entry port is 1/2 (3/6).

Next, referring to FIG. 213, in the case where a small win is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stopper 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755
Here, in the tenth embodiment, when a small win is won, only the mode (opening pattern) of the opening and closing operation of the attacker 6755a for small win is changed according to the type of small win, and other operation modes (upper opening and closing door 6755bU, lower opening and closing door 67
55bD, ball stopper 6755e, and ball discharge door 6755c) are configured to be common regardless of the small win type. In Fig. 213, the operation mode of the parts other than the small win attacker 6755a, which is common regardless of the small win type, is explained. The opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a for each small win type will be described later with reference to Figs. 214 and 215.

FIG. 213 shows the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755
213 shows the time-dependent change (operation pattern) of the open/closed state of the upper opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stopper 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c. As shown in FIG. 213, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is initially set to the open state, and switches to the closed state when 0.2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small win. In other words, it switches to a state in which it is possible to allow the game balls to flow down in the direction of the distribution rotor 6755f. This closed state continues for 0.2 seconds (i.e., it continues until 0.4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small win), and switches to the open state 0.2 seconds after switching to the closed state. Thereafter, the upper opening/closing door 67
55bU is maintained in the open state, and switches to the closed state again between 2 seconds and 3 seconds. Then, when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, it switches to the open state again, and thereafter the open state is maintained until the end of the small win. That is, 0.2 seconds after the start of the small win
The game balls that enter the lottery device 6755 during the period from the time when 0.4 seconds have elapsed to the time when 2 seconds have elapsed to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed are passed through the closed upper opening and closing door 6755bU.
The game balls roll on the upper surface of the lottery machine 6755 and flow down to the distribution rotor 6755f side (see FIG. 211(a)). During other periods, the game balls that enter the lottery machine 6755 flow into the guide flow path 6755b2 and are guided to the right V winning port 6755bV or the right out port 6755bO (see FIG. 211(b)).
See 1(b) and (c)).

213, the lower opening and closing door 6755bD is set to the closed state as the initial state, and is kept closed for 0.6 seconds from the start of the small win. Then, when 0.6 seconds have passed from the start of the small win, it switches to the open state.
As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the guide passage 6755b2 can enter the right V winning hole 6755bV. The open state of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD continues for 0.2 seconds.
It switches to the closed state 0.8 seconds after the start of the small win. After that, the lower opening and closing door 6755bD is kept in the closed state until 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, at which point it switches to the open state again. This open state continues for 1 second. That is, the open state continues until 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and it switches to the closed state 4 seconds after the start of the small win. Then, the closed state is maintained until the end of the small win.

By combining the operation patterns of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, the game ball is guided to the right out port 6755bO for 0.2 seconds from the start of the big win (see FIG. 211(b)). In other words, for 0.2 seconds from the start of the small win, even if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the V winning port (V impossible period). Then, when 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win and the upper opening door 6755bU is switched to the closed state, the game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f (see FIG. 211(a)). As described above, the game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6755f are distributed to one of the V winning ports at a ratio of 1/2, so when 0.2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, 1/2 of the game balls that entered the lottery device 6755 are distributed to one of the V winning ports.
This period of 50% V winning rate continues from the start of the small win until 0.4 seconds have elapsed, at which point it switches to a V non-winning period.

The V-unavailable period continues until 0.6 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small win, and
After seconds have elapsed, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is kept open, and the lower opening/closing door 6
As a result, the lottery device 6755 is brought into a state in which the game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 is guided to the right V winning hole 6755bV (see FIG. 211(c)).
This is a period in which the game ball that entered 55 will win the V prize at a rate of almost 100% (a 100% V prize winning period). This 100% V prize winning period lasts for 0.2 seconds and is 0.8 seconds from the start of the small win.
When 2 seconds have passed, the lower opening and closing door 6755bD is closed, and the V-unavailable period is switched to again. This V-unavailable period continues until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the upper opening and closing door 6755bU is closed, and the period switches to a 50% V winning rate period for 1 second until 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win. Then, when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the upper opening and closing door 6755bU is opened and the lower opening and closing door 6755bD is opened, and the period switches to a 100% V winning rate period. This 100% V winning rate period continues until 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win (i.e., 1 second), and when 1 second has passed, the lower opening and closing door 6755bD is closed, and the period switches to a V-unavailable period. Then, from then on, the V-unavailable period is maintained until the end of the small win.

In this way, during the execution of the small win game, the V non-win period, the V winning rate 50% period, and the V winning rate 100% period are switched, so that the V winning rate can be varied according to the timing of the game ball entering the lottery device 6755. Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the timing of the game ball entering the lottery device 6755, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 213, the ball stopper 6755e is kept in a closed state from the start of the small win until 5 seconds have elapsed, and is switched to an open state (a state in which balls can flow down the guide flow path 6755b) from the time 5 seconds have elapsed (2 seconds have elapsed after the second V winning rate period of 50%) until the end of the small win, and is switched back to a closed state at the end of the small win. In contrast, the ball discharge door 6755c is kept in a closed state from the start of the small win until 4.5 seconds have elapsed, and is switched to an open state (a state in which balls can flow down the guide flow path 6755b) from the time 5 seconds have elapsed (2 seconds have elapsed after the second V winning rate period of 50%) until the end of the small win, and is switched back to a closed state at the end of the small win.
From the time when the small win starts (when 1.5 seconds have elapsed) until the end of the small win, the ball stopper 6755e and the ball discharge door 6755c are switched to the open state, and when the small win ends, the ball stopper 6755e and the ball discharge door 6755c are switched to the closed state again.
The ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the % period, and the upper opening and closing door 6755b is closed.
All game balls that pass through the upper surface of the U are retained within the guide flow path 6755b by the ball stopping portion 6755e.

In addition, when 4.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the ball discharge door 6755c is opened with the ball stopper 6755e closed, so that all game balls other than the one game ball that is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stopper 6755e fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6755c to the discharge area 6755d and are discharged to the outside. That is, even if multiple game balls flow into the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period, after the ball discharge door 6755e is opened, the game ball that is stopped inside the lottery device 6755 can be a maximum of only one. Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6755c is opened, the ball stopper 6755e is opened, so that the one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6755 flows down toward the distribution rotor 6755f. By opening the ball discharge door 6755c first and then the ball stopper 6755e, even if two or more game balls enter the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged from the discharge area 6755d to the outside before the ball stopper 6755e is opened. Therefore, the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6755f in one small win can be limited to a maximum of one, so that no game balls reach the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period.
The probability of winning a V when the ball lands in the number 5 can be kept constant (50%) every time.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, when a small prize is won, the upper opening and closing door 675
The operation of the lower opening and closing door 6755bU, the ball stopper 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c is common regardless of the type of small win. This allows only the operation of the small win attacker 6755a to be different depending on the type of small win, thereby reducing the processing load when a small win is won.

Next, referring to Fig. 214, the opening pattern set for the attacker 6755a for small win when the lottery of the first special symbol becomes a small win in this tenth embodiment will be described. In this tenth embodiment, four different opening patterns are provided as the opening pattern of the attacker 6755a for small win in the small win of the first special symbol.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 214, there is a V winning pattern (see FIG. 214(a)) and a V
A pattern with a winning rate of 50% (see FIG. 214(b)) and a pattern with a winning rate of 75% (see FIG. 214(
There are four types of patterns: a regular small win pattern (see FIG. 214(c)) and a regular small win pattern (see FIG. 214(d)).

As shown in FIG. 214(a), when the V winning confirmation pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a, from the start of the small win until one second has elapsed,
The small win attacker 6755a is kept in a closed state. During this time, the game ball shot by the right hit is blocked by the closed small win attacker 6755a and the lottery device 67
It becomes impossible for the ball to enter the lottery device 6755. Then, when one second has elapsed since the start of the small win, the small win attacker 6755a is opened for 0.1 seconds. When 0.1 seconds have elapsed, the small win attacker 6755a is closed. Since this 0.1 second period corresponds to a V-unavailable period, even if the game ball can be made to enter the lottery device 6755, it is only possible to obtain a prize ball for the ball entering (for example, 10 prize balls), and it is not possible to make the ball enter the V winning hole.

The closed state after the 0.1 second open period continues until 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win. Then, when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the attacker 6755a for the small win is set to the open state for 1 second (i.e., until 4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win).
As mentioned above with reference to 3, the V winning rate is 100% for 3 to 4 seconds after the start of the small win.
In other words, since both the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD are in an open state (see FIG. 211(c)), by making a game ball enter the lottery device 6755 during the opening period, the game ball will almost certainly enter the right V winning hole 6755bV and win a big win. If you continue hitting to the right during a small win, you can easily make the game ball enter the lottery device 6755 during the one-second opening period, so if the V winning confirmation pattern is set as the opening pattern, a V winning is almost certain.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214(b), when the V winning rate 50% pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small winning attacker 6755a, the opening and closing operation until 2 seconds have elapsed is the same as the V winning confirmation pattern. That is, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened only for 0.1 seconds from 1 second after the start of the small winning. And, in the V winning rate 50% pattern, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened when 2 seconds have elapsed after the start of the small winning, and this open state continues for 1 second. That is, the open state is maintained from 2 seconds to 3 seconds after the start of the small winning, and the small winning attacker 6755a is closed at the time when 3 seconds have elapsed. This 1 second is set as a period in which one or more game balls can be easily entered into the lottery device 6755 by continuing to hit the game ball to the right at the shortest firing interval (i.e., 0.6 second interval). After the small win attacker 6755a is closed, the small win attacker 6755a is kept closed until the small win ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the V winning rate is 50% for 2 to 3 seconds after the start of the small win. That is, in the state where both the upper opening door 6755bU and the lower opening door 6755bD are closed (FIG. 21
1(a)), so that by having a game ball enter the lottery device 6755 during the opening period, one game ball can be caused to flow down to the distribution rotor 6755f. As described above, when a game ball reaches the distribution rotor 6755f, it is distributed to the V winning port at a rate of 1/2, so that when a V winning rate of 50% pattern is set as the opening pattern, the rate at which a V winning occurs is 50%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 214(c), when the V winning rate 75% pattern is set as the opening pattern of the small winning attacker 6755a, the opening and closing operation until 2 seconds has elapsed is the same as the V winning confirmation pattern and the V winning rate 50% pattern. That is, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened only for 0.1 seconds from 1 second after the start of the small winning. And, in the V winning rate 75% pattern, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened when 2.5 seconds have elapsed after the start of the small winning, and this open state continues for 1 second. That is, the open state is maintained from 2.5 seconds to 3.5 seconds after the start of the small winning, and the small winning attacker 6755a is closed at 3.5 seconds. After that, the small winning attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state until the end of the small winning. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the V winning rate is 50% for 2 to 3 seconds after the start of the small win, and 100% for 3 to 4 seconds. That is, when a V winning rate 75% pattern is set, the first 0.5 seconds of the opening period is a V winning rate 50% period, and the last 0.5 seconds of the opening period is a V winning rate 100% period. Therefore, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 in the first half of a 1-second opening period, the V winning rate is 50%, while when the ball enters the lottery device 6755 in the second half, the V winning rate is 100%. Therefore, when a V winning rate 75% pattern is set, the V winning rate is an average of 75% (50% x 1/2 + 100% x 1/2).

In contrast to these, as shown in FIG. 214(c), when a normal small win pattern is set, the opening and closing operation until 2 seconds have elapsed is the same as the V winning confirmed pattern, the V winning rate 50% pattern, and the V winning rate 75% pattern, but after the 0.1 second opening period ends, the small win attacker 6755a will not be opened until the small win ends. Therefore, when a normal small win pattern is set, the small win attacker 6755a is only opened for an extremely short period of 0.1 seconds during the small win valid period, and even if the game ball is fortunately able to enter the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the opening period, it will enter the right out hole 6755bO. In other words, a V win will not occur. Therefore,
A normal small win pattern is an opening pattern that is the most disadvantageous (least beneficial) to a player.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, when the first special symbol is selected as a small win,
One of the four opening patterns with different V winning rates is the small win attacker 6755
In addition, at least until 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small win, a common opening and closing operation (opening for only 0.1 seconds when 1 second has elapsed) is performed regardless of the opening pattern set for the small win attacker 6755a.
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to configure it so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which opening pattern has been set until at least two seconds have passed since the start of the small win, so that the player can expect a V win in all small win types. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the tenth embodiment, the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter in one small win is set to one, and the end of the small win is set based on the detection of the entry of one game ball. That is, the closing of the attacker 6755a for the small win is set, and the lottery device 6755 is set to close before the attacker 6755a for the small win is completely closed.
The small win ends when all game balls that have entered the lottery device 6755 enter and are discharged into any of the ball entry ports in any of the lottery devices 6755, regardless of the time that has elapsed since the start of the small win. Therefore, for example, if a game ball hit from the right enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, the small win attacker 6755a is closed and the small win ends when the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 enters the right out port 6755bO. In other words, even if an opening pattern that allows V winning (see Figures 214(a) to (c)) has been set, if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 within 1 second after the start of the small win, the small win will end.
If the game ball is inserted during the 0.1 second opening period set at the time when seconds have passed, an extremely unfavorable situation may occur in which the small win ends before the V winning period (the period with a 50% V winning rate and the period with a 100% V winning rate) is reached. On the other hand, when the normal small win pattern (see FIG. 214(d)) is set, if the game ball is not inserted during the 0.1 second opening period, the small win attacker 6755a will not be opened after that, and there will be no opportunity to obtain a prize ball, so if the right hit is not performed in accordance with the 0.1 second opening period, it may result in a loss for the player. For this reason, when an opening pattern that allows for a V win is set, it is highly likely that it will be more advantageous for the player not to allow the game ball to enter during the 0.1 second opening period, whereas when a normal small win pattern that does not allow for a V win is set, it is more advantageous for the player to allow the game ball to enter during the 0.1 second opening period, so it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to predict the type of small win (the opening pattern that is set) and choose whether or not to allow the ball to enter the lottery device 6755 during the 0.1 second opening period.
That is, a player who predicted that the opening pattern was a V winning pattern was allowed to choose to wait or hit the ball from the left so that the game ball would not enter the lottery device 6755 during the 0.1 second opening period, while a player who predicted that the pattern was a normal small winning pattern was allowed to choose to wait or hit the ball from the left so that the game ball would not enter the lottery device 6755 during the 0.1 second opening period.
The player can hit the ball to the right during the one second open period, which increases the player's interest in the game.

In the tenth embodiment, the operation for 2 seconds from the start of the small win is common to all small win types, but this is not limited to this. In some small wins that can be won with a V prize, the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a that does not include the same operation mode as the normal small win pattern may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a case where a small win that can be won with a V prize can be detected early,
The player can play the game by paying attention to the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a.

Next, referring to FIG. 215, the opening pattern set for the attacker 6755a for small win when the second special symbol is selected as a small win in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the tenth embodiment, three different opening patterns (opening patterns A to
C) is provided.

In the tenth embodiment, if one or more game balls enter during a small win, the small win ends when the entered game balls are discharged, whereas if no game balls enter, the small win does not end until 8 seconds have passed, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, if no game ball entry is detected when the opening period of the small win attacker 6755a in one small win has ended, the small win may be terminated at that point. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the small win does not end until 8 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, even though no game ball has entered the lottery device 6755 (i.e., there is no possibility of a V winning), so that
The efficiency of gaming can be improved.

Conversely, the end of the small win may be set based on the elapsed time from the point when the opening period of the small win attacker 6755a is completed. More specifically, for example,
A predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) after the opening period of the small win attacker 6755a ends
When the time has elapsed, a small win is forcibly awarded (even if there are game balls remaining in the lottery device 6755).
In this case, the period until the small win ends may be V
During the winning probability 50% period, the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 is distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f.
The period should be set to at least a period longer than the period during which the game balls are sorted (entry of the ball is detected) into one of the ball entry ports by the ball sorter 6755f and long enough to make it difficult to forcibly guide the game balls into the flow path (central route) on the sorting rotor 6755f side by magnets or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of forcibly guiding game balls into the sorting rotor 6755f by using magnets or the like. Here, since game balls are normally made of a magnetic material (metal), by bringing a magnet or the like close to the game balls flowing down the play area,
It is possible to change the direction in which the ball flows. By utilizing this property, for example,
The game balls that enter the lottery device 6755 are attracted by a magnet, and regardless of whether the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is closed or open, the game balls are guided by the magnetic force of the magnet, passing through the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c, and are then guided to the distribution rotor 6755f.
There is a possibility that fraudulent acts may be carried out to induce players to
The game ball that reaches the distribution rotor 6755f enters the V winning hole, resulting in the most advantageous 1
It is a 6 round time-saving big win. In other words, the distribution rotor 6 is rotated by a magnet or the like every time a small win occurs.
If a fraudulent act of guiding a game ball to 755f is committed, the time-saving state with a high probability of winning a small prize (9/10) and the most advantageous 16-round time-saving big prize will be repeated endlessly, creating an extremely advantageous situation for the fraudster. In other words, there is a possibility that the hall will suffer an unexpected disadvantage. In contrast, in this modified example, even if a game ball is forcibly guided to the distribution rotor 6755f by a magnet or the like, the small prize will end before the game ball enters one of the ball entrances. In other words, when the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is open, a magnet is used to attract a game ball from the front side of the game board 13, causing the game ball to float against the guide flow path 6755b and forcibly pass above the open upper opening/closing door 6755bU and ball discharge door 6755c. In this case, the game ball will flow more smoothly in the distribution rotor 6755f than in the normal case (when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the period when the V winning rate is 50%).
Since the time it takes for the ball to flow down to the ball distribution rotor 6755f is longer, the small win can be ended before the game ball that has reached the distribution rotor 6755f due to fraudulent conduct is distributed to one of the ball entrances. Therefore, fraudulent conduct can be suppressed.

In addition, instead of ending the small win after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the closing timing of the small win attacker 6755a, the final V winning rate in the small win is set to 50%.
After the period has elapsed and the small win has ended after a predetermined period has elapsed (that is, regardless of the type of small win, the period from the start of the small win to the end of the small win is made common), the order of the V winning rate 50% period and the V winning rate 100% period is changed,
It may be configured to prevent fraudulent acts such as guiding the ball to the side of the distribution rotor 6755f by a magnet or the like. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the end condition of the small win, thereby reducing the processing load.

As shown in FIG. 215(a), when opening pattern A is set, the small win attacker 6755a is opened at the same time as the start of the small win. This open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the small win attacker 6755a is closed 0.6 seconds after the start of the small win. After that, the small win attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state until the end of the small win. Since the opening time is relatively short at 0.6 seconds, the shortest firing interval (i.e., 0.
Even if the right-handed hit is executed at intervals of 6 seconds, the probability of the ball entering the cage is about 70%.
Also, it becomes extremely difficult to get two or more game balls into the hole during the open period.

As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the period from the start of the small win until 0.2 seconds have elapsed and from 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds are set as V-unavailable periods, while the period from 0.2 seconds to 0.4 seconds is set as a V winning probability 50% period. Therefore, when the opening pattern A is set and the ball enters the lottery device 6755, the 1/3 (0.
In other words, the game balls that enter the lottery device 6755 are distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f at a rate of 1/3, and the V win occurs at a rate of 1/2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 215(b), when the opening pattern B is set, the small win attacker 6755a is kept in a closed state for 0.4 seconds after the start of the small win, then switches to an open state for 0.6 seconds from 0.4 seconds to 1 second, and is kept in a closed state from 1 second until the end of the small win. As described above, the V-unavailable period is set from 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds and from 0.8 seconds to 1 second after the start of the small win, while the V-winning rate is 10% from 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds.
0% period. Therefore, when the opening pattern B is set and the ball enters the lottery device 6755, 1/3 (0.2 s/0.6 s) will be during the V winning rate 100% period. In other words, at a rate of 1/3, the game ball that enters the lottery device 6755 will enter the right V winning hole 675
By entering the right V entry hole 6755bV, a V entry occurs. As mentioned above, if the ball enters the right V entry hole 6755bV in the case of a small win of the second special pattern, the possibility of entering the time-saving state is relatively low (just under 40%).
When the ball lands in one of the winning holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the player is guaranteed a 16-round time-saving big win, which is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, the opening pattern B, which can only land in the right V winning hole 6755bV, can be said to be a less advantageous opening pattern than the opening pattern A.

Also, as shown in FIG. 215(c), when the opening pattern C is set, the attacker 6755a for small win is kept in a closed state for 0.2 seconds after the start of the small win, and is switched to an open state for 0.6 seconds from 0.2 seconds to 0.8 seconds, and is kept in a closed state from 0.8 seconds until the end of the small win.
The period from 0.4 seconds to 0.4 seconds is set as a 50% chance of winning a V, the period from 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds is set as a V-unavailable period, and the period from 0.6 seconds to 0.8 seconds is set as a 50% chance of winning a V.
For this reason, when the opening pattern C is set and the ball enters the lottery device 6755, the ball enters during the V winning rate 50% period (0.2 s/0.6 s), and the ball enters during the V winning rate 100% period (0.2 s/0.6 s).
The ball enters during the 0% period. In other words, the opening pattern C is an opening pattern in which the V winning occurs in 2/3 of the cases where the ball enters the lottery device 6755, and is therefore an advantageous opening pattern with a higher V winning rate than other opening patterns.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, when the second special symbol is selected as a small win,
One of three types of opening patterns is set, and the V winning rate and the type of V winning hole into which the ball can enter are different depending on the opening pattern. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game by paying attention to the opening pattern set in the small winning attacker 6755a at the time of the small winning (the operation of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the lower opening/closing door 6755bD during the opening period), so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 216, a characteristic effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 216 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a selection effect executed when a small win is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol in the tenth embodiment. As described above, in the tenth embodiment, as a small win of the first special symbol,
There are small wins in which an opening pattern that allows for a winning prize (see Figures 214(a) to (c)) is set, and small wins in which an opening pattern that allows for no (difficult) V winning is set (see Figure 214(d)). However, since the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a (operation mode of the small win attacker 6755a) is the same until at least two seconds have elapsed, it is difficult to distinguish from appearance whether or not an opening pattern allowing for a V winning has been set.
Therefore, it is unclear whether a player will gain or lose if a game ball is inserted during the 0.1 second opening period set during operation with a common opening pattern. In other words, when a V-winning opening pattern is set, if a game ball is inserted during the 0.1 second opening period set during a V-unwinning period, a prize ball is awarded, but the small win ends, resulting in a loss. However, when a normal small win pattern is set, if a game ball is inserted during the 0.1 second opening period, a prize ball is awarded, resulting in a gain for the player. The selection effect is an effect that allows the player to select whether or not to launch a game ball aiming for the 0.1 second opening period set during execution of a common opening pattern (operation mode).

As shown in FIG. 216, when the selection performance is executed, a display area HR8 in which the word "Choose!!" is displayed is formed in the upper center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the left center of the display screen, the word "Low chance of winning balls" and
A display area HR9 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape and displaying the words "V Challenge Expectation Medium"
In addition, the word "left hit" is displayed below the display area HR9.
An arrow image YG1 that resembles a left-pointing arrow is displayed. On the other hand, on the right side of the center of the display screen, a display area HR10 that is substantially rectangular in shape and displays the words "Medium chance of winning a prize ball" and "Low chance of winning a V challenge" is formed.
Below R10, an arrow image YG2 is displayed that resembles a right-pointing arrow and displays the words "right-hand hit." These display contents indicate the advantages of left-hand hits,
The player can understand the disadvantages of hitting the ball from the left and the advantages and disadvantages of hitting the ball from the right. In other words, if the player hits the ball from the left, the player cannot get a prize ball by hitting the ball from the attacker 6755a for small win during the 0.1 second open period.
It is possible to make the player understand that there is a possibility that the V challenge will be opened (the V challenge will be executed). In addition, when the player hits the right side, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter during the opening period of 0.1 seconds, and the player can win a prize ball, but if an opening pattern that allows a V win is set, it is possible that the V challenge (opening of the small win attacker 6755a during the period when a V win is possible) will not be executed and the small win will end.

In addition, the mode of the selection performance is provided with a plurality of types with different expectation levels for the opening pattern that can win a V prize. That is, a plurality of types are provided with different rates of selection when the opening pattern that can win a V prize is set and different rates of selection when the opening pattern for a normal small win is set (not shown). This allows the player to decide whether to hit right or left, taking into account the expectation level of the opening pattern that can win a V prize suggested by the selection performance. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 217, the third special symbol in the case where the first special symbol is selected as a small win is
The change over time of the display mode of the symbol display device 81 will be explained. Fig. 217 (a) is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode when a small win (V challenge small win) in which a V winning possible opening pattern is set is won. In Fig. 217 (a), an example is explained in which a small win in which a V winning rate of 50% pattern is set is won as a V challenge small win.

As shown in FIG. 217(a), when a small win with a V winning rate of 50% pattern is won, a variable display corresponding to the small win is started first. After this variable display continues for 60 seconds, the winning of the small win is announced and the selection performance (see FIG. 216) starts. That is, the selection performance starts when the period in which the pattern corresponding to the small win is displayed is reached. This selection performance continues for a maximum of 3 seconds. That is, it continues until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win (until the common operation mode ends).

If the game ball does not enter the lottery device 6755 during the 0.1 second opening period that is set 1 second after the start of the small win (i.e., if the end condition of the small win is not met), the small win attacker 6755a is opened during the period in which a V win is possible, and a V challenge performance is executed to indicate that a V challenge performance has been executed. Although not shown in the figure, this V challenge performance is a performance that notifies the player that by hitting the game ball to the right and causing it to enter the lottery device 6755, the game ball can reach either the distribution rotor 6755f or the right V winning hole 6755bV. In other words, at least 50%
In this V challenge presentation, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 and a V win occurs, a big win is executed.

In addition, if a player hits the right hand during the selection effect and the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the 0.1 second opening period, an effect is executed to congratulate the player for winning the prize ball.
The selection performance ends. In other words, even if the execution of the V Challenge is canceled because the game ball enters during the 0.1 second opening period in the V Challenge small win, it is impossible (difficult) to distinguish it from the case where the game ball enters the normal small win pattern. Therefore, even if the execution of the V Challenge is canceled,
The player can be made to believe that he or she predicted that a normal small win pattern was set, hit the ball to the right, and made the ball enter the jackpot as intended. Therefore, even if the V Challenge is canceled, the player's motivation to play the game can be prevented from decreasing.

Fig. 217(b) is a diagram showing the change over time of the performance mode when a normal small win is won in which a normal small win pattern is set. As shown in Fig. 217(b), when a normal small win is won, the change over time of the performance mode from the start of the variable display corresponding to the normal small win until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win is the same as when a V challenge small win is won. That is, after the variable display performance is executed for 60 seconds, the selection performance is executed.
The selection performance is when no ball is detected during the 0.1 second open period (i.e.,
The selection effect continues for 4 seconds on the condition that the end condition of the small win was not met). That is, the selection effect continues to be executed until the same timing (4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small win) as the start timing of the V Challenge of the small win in which the V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214(a)) in which the period until the attacker for the small win 6755a is opened is set, among the V Challenge small wins, is set. Then, when 4 seconds have elapsed after the start of the small win, an effect is executed to notify that the V Challenge will not be executed (the V Challenge was not won). This allows a player who predicted that it would be a V Challenge small win and selected to hit left during the selection effect to continue to have a sense of expectation for the V Challenge for a longer period. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the tenth embodiment, the selection effect is started when the small win variation ends, and the opening period of 0.1 seconds is set 2 seconds after the start of the selection effect, but this is not limited to this. The timing of the selection effect and the opening period may be set at an earlier timing. Specifically, the selection effect may be executed during the variation (before the first pattern is stopped and displayed on the first pattern display device 37), and the opening period may be set immediately after the start of the small win. By configuring in this way, the first pattern display device 3
By identifying the first symbol displayed on the reel 7, the type of small win can be specified, and even if it is decided whether to launch the game ball so that it will enter the reel during the opening period, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being shot in time for the opening period, so that the player can more seriously select in advance whether to hit to the right or to the left. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 218 to FIG. 220, the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described.
The ROM 202 of the tenth embodiment will be described. Here, the tenth embodiment differs from the ninth embodiment in that the first win random number table 202a and the small win type selection table 202ea are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 192(a)). The other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 of the ninth embodiment.
Since the configuration is the same as that of 202, a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 218, the first winning random number table 202 in the tenth embodiment
FIG. 218(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218(a), the first winning random number table 202a in the tenth embodiment has two random number values (counter values) of "0, 1" defined as the determination value for determining a big win (202 in FIG. 218(a)).
In addition, the judgment value for the big win is the same for the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol, as in the ninth embodiment.
Of the 0 random numbers, the random numbers (counter values) that are judged as a jackpot are 2, so the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is 1/200 (2/400). In addition, the range of judgment values that are judged as a miss in the first special symbol lottery is stipulated as "2 to 395" (Figure 218).
(See 202a2 in (a)), as the range of judgment values that are judged to be a small win of the first special pattern,
"396 to 399" are specified (see 202a3 in FIG. 218(a)).

Of the 400 possible random numbers of the first winning random number counter C1, the random number (counter value) that is determined to be a small win is 4, so the probability of winning a small win in the drawing of the first special symbol is 1/100 (4/400). In addition, although details will be described later, 60% of the small wins of the first special symbol are opened in the normal small win pattern (i.e., the lottery device 675
An opening pattern in which a V winning cannot occur even if a game ball enters the number 5 is set.
The V Challenge small win is 40% of the small wins of the first special symbol. In other words, the small win attacker 6755a is opened for 0.1 seconds at a rate of 1/100, which allows the player to expect a V Challenge small win, and the V Challenge is executed 40% of the time (i.e., the small win attacker 6755a is opened at the timing when a V win is possible). Therefore, the probability of winning a V Challenge small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is 1/250 (
1/100 x 4/10).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 218(a), the range of the judgment value for determining the second special symbol as a miss is set to "2 to 39" (see 202a2 in FIG. 218(a)), and the range of the judgment value for determining the second special symbol as a small win is set to "40 to 399" (see FIG. 218(a)).
) (see 202a3). Therefore, the probability of winning a small prize in the lottery of the second special symbol is 9/10 (360/400), as in the ninth embodiment described above. In addition, for the small prize of the second special symbol, the small prize is configured so that the period during which the small prize attacker 6755a can be opened includes a period during which the V can be won in all small prize types.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, similar to the ninth embodiment, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the small prize is won with a high probability (9/10).
Even when a special symbol lottery is executed, the small prize is won with a low probability (1/100). In other words, even when the first special symbol lottery is executed mainly in an unfavorable normal state, the player can expect to win a big prize based on a V win. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the small prize of the first special symbol is a period during which a V win is possible (period during which the V win rate is 50%, V
The system is structured to provide a V Challenge small win in which the small win attacker 6755a is opened during one or both of the periods with a 100% winning rate, and a normal small win in which the small win attacker 6755a is opened only during periods when a V win is impossible (difficult) (V impossible period). This allows players who win a small win to have hopes of winning a V Challenge small win, which increases the player's interest in the game.
As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the normal small win and the V challenge small win have the same operation mode of the opening and closing operation of the small win attacker 6755a for 2 seconds after the start of the small win. That is, the operation mode in which the small win attacker 6755a is opened for only 0.1 seconds is executed at the point where 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small win. Therefore, even after the winning of the small win is notified, it is possible to configure it so that the player has difficulty in recognizing whether it is a normal small win or a V challenge small win for at least 2 seconds. Therefore, even if the normal small win is won, the expectation for the V challenge small win can be sustained for a predetermined period (2 seconds) from the start of the small win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved every time a small win is won.

Next, referring to FIG. 218(b), the details of the small win type selection table 202ea in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 218(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the small win type selection table 202ea in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 218(b), the small win type selection table 202ea in the tenth embodiment includes a special chart 1 small win table 202ea1 that is referred to in order to determine the small win type when the first special pattern is selected as a small win, and a special chart 2 small win table 202ea2 that is referred to in order to determine the small win type when the second special pattern is selected as a small win. First, referring to FIG. 219, the details of the special chart 1 small win table 202ea1 will be described.

FIG. 219 is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 small win table 202ea1 described above. As shown in FIG. 219, the special chart 1 small win table 202ea1 specifies the small win type determined in correspondence with the range of the value of the small win type counter C5. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 219, the small win type "small win A14" is specified in correspondence with the range of the value of the small win type counter C5 "0, 1" (see 202ea1a in FIG. 219). This "small win A14" is determined by the attacker 67 for small win.
This is a small prize type in which a V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214(a)) is set as the opening pattern of the attacker 6755a for small prize. Also, if a V winning occurs in this "small prize A14", a "big prize E14" is won. The "big prize E14" is a big prize type in which the number of rounds is 5, and the game state after the big prize ends is set to a time-saving state. Therefore, the "small prize A14" is won by hitting the right side during the opening period of the attacker 6755a for small prize to the lottery device 67
By simply getting the ball into the 55 slot, you can almost certainly win the V prize.
This is a type of small win in which a favorable time-saving state is granted after a big win when a V win occurs.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, there are two random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small win A14", so the probability of the "small win A14" being determined when the first special pattern is selected as a small win is 2% (2/100).
).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 219, when the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of “2, 3”, the small win type is associated with “small win B14” (FIG. 219
202ea1b). This "small win B14" is the same as the "small win A14", and the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a is the V winning confirmation pattern (see FIG. 214 (
a) is the small winning type that is set. Also, in this "small winning B14", V
When a winning occurs, the player wins the "Big Win F14". The "Big Win F14" is a big win type in which the number of rounds is 5, and the game state after the big win is set to the normal state with unfavorable normal symbols. Therefore, the "Small Win B14" is a small win attacker 6755
While it is possible to almost certainly win a V prize by hitting the right side during the opening period of a to make the game ball enter the lottery device 6755, if a V prize occurs, it is a small prize type in which a disadvantageous normal state is given after the big win. Therefore, the "small prize B14" is a small prize type that is less favorable than the "small prize A14".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, there are two random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small win B14". Therefore, when a small win occurs in the drawing of the first special pattern, the probability that the "small win B14" will be determined is 2% (2/100).
).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 219, when the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of “4 to 9”, the small win type is defined as “small win C14” (FIG. 219
(See 202ea1c of the above.) This "Small Win C14" is a small win attacker 6755a
This is a small win type in which a V winning rate of 75% (see FIG. 214(c)) is set as the opening pattern. Also, if a V win occurs in this "small win C14", the "big win E14" (5 round time-saving big win) will be won. Therefore, "small win C14" is,
Although the opening pattern is set to make it more difficult for a V win to occur than "small win A14" or "small win B14" in which a V win confirmation pattern is set, if a V win occurs, it is a small win type in which a favorable time-saving state is given after the big win. Therefore, "small win C14" is less favorable than "small win A14" or "small win B14" as an opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a (it becomes more difficult to win a V win). Also, in terms of the game state set after the big win when a V win occurs, it is more favorable than "small win B14".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, there are 6 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small win C14", so the probability of the "small win C14" being determined when the first special pattern is selected as a small win is 6% (6/100).
).

Also, as shown in FIG. 219, when the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "10 to 15", the small win type is set to "small win D14" (FIG. 2
This "small win D14" is a small win attacker 675
As the opening pattern of 5a, a V winning rate of 75% pattern (see FIG. 214(c)) is set as the small winning type. Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small winning D14",
You will win the "Big Win F14" (5 rounds regular big win). Therefore, you will win the "Small Win D14"
In the "Small Winning D14", an opening pattern that is less likely to result in a V winning is set than in the "Small Winning A14" and "Small Winning B14" in which a V winning confirmation pattern is set, and in the case that a V winning occurs, a disadvantageous normal state is given after the big win. Therefore, the "Small Winning D14" is
The opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a is less favorable than "small win A14" or "small win B14" (it is more difficult to win a V). In addition, the game state set after the big win when a V win occurs is also the most unfavorable.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, there are 6 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small win D14". Therefore, when a small win occurs in the drawing of the first special pattern, the probability that the "small win D14" will be determined is 6% (6/100).
).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of “16 to 27”, and the “small win E14” is associated with the small win type (FIG. 2
19 202ea1e). This "small win E14" is a small win attacker 675
As the opening pattern of 5a, a V winning rate of 50% pattern (see FIG. 214(b)) is set as the small winning type. Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small winning E14",
You will win the "Big Win E14" (5 round time-saving big win). Therefore, "Small Win E14"
"Small Win A14" is a type of small win that is set to an opening pattern that is less likely to result in a V win than "Small Win A14" or "Small Win B14" in which a V win confirmation pattern is set, or "Small Win C14" or "Small Win D14" in which a V win rate of 75% is set, but if a V win occurs, a favorable time-saving state is given after the big win. Therefore, "Small Win E14"
is less favorable than "small win A14" to "small win D14" as an opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a (it becomes more difficult to win a V). On the other hand, it is the most favorable in terms of the game state set after a big win when a V win occurs.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, there are 12 random numbers (counter values) associated with the "small win E14", so the probability of the "small win E14" being determined when the first special pattern is selected as a small win is 12% (12/
100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of “28 to 39”, and the “small win F14” is associated with the small win type (FIG. 2
This "small win F14" is a small win attacker 675
As the opening pattern of 5a, a V winning rate of 50% pattern (see FIG. 214(b)) is set as the small winning type. Also, when a V winning occurs in this "small winning F14",
Win the "Big Win F14" (5 rounds regular big win). Therefore, "Small Win F14"
is a small win type in which an opening pattern that is less likely to cause a V win than "small win A14" or "small win B14" in which a V winning confirmation pattern is set, and "small win C14" or "small win D14" in which a V winning rate 75% pattern is set, and in which a disadvantageous time-saving state is given after a big win when a V win occurs. Therefore, "small win F14" is less favorable than "small win A14" to "small win D14" as an opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a (V winning becomes more difficult). In addition, it is the most disadvantageous in terms of the game state set after a big win when a V win occurs. In other words, "small win F14" is the most disadvantageous small win type among V challenge small wins in terms of the opening pattern set in the small win attacker 6755a and the game state after the big win when a V win occurs.

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, 12 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "small win F14". Therefore, when the first special pattern is selected as a small win, the probability of the "small win F14" being determined is 12% (12/
100).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 219, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "40 to 99", and the "small win G14" is associated with the small win type (FIG. 2
19 202ea1g). This "Small Win G14" is a small win attacker 675
As the opening pattern of 5a, the normal small win pattern (see FIG. 214(d)) is set as the small win type. Therefore, it is almost impossible to win a V during the small win valid period. Although it is extremely difficult to win a V, if a V win occurs during the small win valid period of "small win G14", it will be a "big win E14" (5 round time shortened big win).

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, 60 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the "small win G14", so the probability of the "small win G14" being determined when the first special pattern is selected as a small win is 60% (60/
100).

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, as the V challenge small win of the first special pattern,
There are multiple types of small prizes with different winning rates.
"Small Win A14", "Small Win B14" with a V winning rate of 75%, "Small Win C14", "Small Win D14" with a V winning rate of 50%, "Small Win E14",
In this way, the player can expect to win a small prize with a higher V winning rate, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, in addition to the V challenge small prize, a "small prize G14" (normal small prize) is provided in which the small prize attacker 6755a is opened only during a period (V impossible period) in which a V prize is impossible (difficult). This allows the player to expect that the V challenge small prize has been won when the small prize is won, and the player's interest in the game can be improved. In the tenth embodiment, the normal small prize and the V challenge small prize have the same operation mode of the opening and closing operation of the small prize attacker 6755a for 2 seconds after the start of the small prize. That is, at the point where 1 second has elapsed after the start of the small prize, the small prize attacker 6755a is opened only for 0.1 seconds.
755a is opened. Therefore, even after the small win is announced, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a normal small win or a V Challenge small win for at least two seconds. Therefore, even if the normal small win is won, the expectation for the V Challenge small win can be sustained for a predetermined period (two seconds) from the start of the small win. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased every time a small win is won.

Next, referring to FIG. 220, the details of the special chart 2 small winning table 202ea2 will be described. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 small winning table 202ea2. As shown in FIG. 220, the special chart 2 small winning table 202ea2 specifies six types of small winning types, "small winning H14" to "small winning M14".

As shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 12", and "small win H14" is associated with it (see 202ea2a in FIG. 220).
This "small win H14" is the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a,
This is the small prize type for which opening pattern A (see FIG. 215(a)) is set. That is, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small prize attacker 6755a, an opening pattern is set in which there is a possibility that the ball will enter the right out port 6755bO or reach the distribution rotor 6755f. If a V prize occurs in the "small prize H14", a different jackpot type is won depending on the type of V prize port into which the ball entered. More specifically, if a V prize occurs by the ball entering the right V prize port 6755bV, a "jackpot G14" is won. This "jackpot G14" has 10 rounds,
This is a type of jackpot in which the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.
On the other hand, the game ball enters one of the central V winning holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 (
That is, if a V win occurs by a ball entering the V winning hole provided on the distribution rotor 6755f, the player wins "Big Win I14". This "Big Win I14" is a big win type with 16 rounds, and the game state after the big win is set to a favorable time-saving state. In other words, it is the most favorable big win type because it has the most rounds and the game state after the big win is also favorable. As shown in FIG. 220, it becomes a small win of the second special pattern, and during the valid period of the small win, the central V winning holes 6755fv1 to 67
55fv3, regardless of the type of small win. Therefore, when a game ball flows down to the distribution rotor 6755f, there is a 50% chance of winning the most favorable big win, which can heighten the player's expectations. This can increase the player's interest in the game. In addition, in the opening pattern A, the small win attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the game ball can enter the right V winning hole 6755bV, so basically, when a V win occurs in the "small win H14", the central V winning holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 are opened.
In other words, if a V win occurs during the valid period of the small win of the "small win H14", the player will basically win the most advantageous "big win I14".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small win H14" is 13. Therefore, when a small win occurs in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of winning the "small win H14" is 13% (13/1
00).

Also, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "13 to 25", and "small win I14" is associated with it (202ea2 in FIG. 220).
b). This "small win I14" is a small win type in which the opening pattern B (see FIG. 215(b)) is set as the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a. That is, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small win attacker 6755a, an opening pattern is set in which the ball may enter the right out hole 6755bO or the right V winning hole 6755bV. In the "small win I14", if a V winning occurs in the right V winning hole 6755bV, the player wins the "big win G14" (10 round time shortened big win) in the same way as in the "small win H14". In addition, in the opening pattern B, the small win attacker 6755a is opened at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotor 6755f.
55a is never opened, so basically, when a V entry occurs in the "small win I14", it is a V entry to the right V entry port 6755bV. In other words, if a V entry occurs during the small win valid period of the "small win I14", it will basically win the "big win G14" (10 round time-saving big win).

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small win I14" is 13, so the probability of winning the "small win I14" when the second special pattern is selected is 13% (13/1
00).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of “26 to 38”, and “small win J14” is associated with it (202ea2 in FIG. 220).
This "small win J14" is a small win type in which the opening pattern C (see FIG. 215(c)) is set as the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a. That is, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small win attacker 6755a, an opening pattern is set in which the ball may enter the right out hole 6755bO, enter the right V winning hole 6755bV, or reach the distribution rotor 6755f. When a V winning occurs in the right V winning hole 6755bV in the "small win J14",
As with the "small win H14" and "small win I14", the "big win G14" (10 round time shortened big win) is won. In the opening pattern C, the small win attacker 6755a is opened even when the game ball can reach the distribution rotor 6755f and when the game ball can enter the right V winning hole 6755bV. That is, the "small win J1
If a V win occurs during the validity period of the small win of "4", it may result in either a "big win G14" or a "big win I14".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small win J14" is 13. Therefore, when a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of winning the "small win J14" is 13% (13/1
00).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "39 to 58", and "small win K14" is associated with it (202ea2 in FIG. 220).
d). This "small win K14" is a small win type in which the opening pattern A (see FIG. 215(a)) is set as the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a. That is, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small win attacker 6755a, an opening pattern is set in which the ball may enter the right out hole 6755bO or reach the distribution rotor 6755f. When a V entry into the right V entry hole 6755bV occurs in the "small win K14", the "big win H14" is won. This "
The "Big Win H14" is a big win type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the normal state of the unfavorable normal pattern is set after the big win ends. In addition, in the opening pattern A, the small win attacker 6755a is not opened at the timing when the ball can enter the right V winning hole 6755bV, so basically, when a V winning occurs in the "small win K14", the center V
This is a V-winning for any of the winning slots 6755fv1 to 6755fv3. In other words, if a V-winning occurs during the valid period of the small winning of "small winning K14", it is basically "big winning I1
4" (16-round time-saving jackpot).

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small win K14" is 20. Therefore, when a small win occurs in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of winning the "small win K14" is 20% (20/1
00).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "59 to 79", and "small win L14" is associated with it (202ea2 in FIG. 220).
e). This "small win L14" is a small win type in which the opening pattern B (see FIG. 215(b)) is set as the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a. That is, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small win attacker 6755a, an opening pattern is set in which the ball may enter the right out hole 6755bO or the right V winning hole 6755bV. In the "small win L14", if a V winning occurs in the right V winning hole 6755bV, the player wins the "big win H14" (10-round normal big win) in the same way as the "small win K14". In addition, in the opening pattern B, the small win attacker 6755a is opened at the timing when the game ball can reach the distribution rotor 6755f.
55a is never opened, so basically, when a V win occurs in the "small win L14", it is a V win for the right V win hole 6755bV. In other words, if a V win occurs during the small win validity period of the "small win L14", it will basically win a "big win H14" (10 round normal big win). Therefore, the "small win L14" is a small win type that is disadvantageous to the player when a V win occurs (the time-saving state ends).

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small win L14" is 21. Therefore, when a small win occurs in the lottery for the second special pattern, the probability of winning the "small win L14" is 21% (21/1
00).

Also, as shown in FIG. 220, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "80 to 99", and "small win M14" is associated with it (202ea2 in FIG. 220).
f). This "small win M14" is a small win type in which the opening pattern C (see FIG. 215(c)) is set as the opening pattern of the small win attacker 6755a. That is, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the opening period of the small win attacker 6755a, an opening pattern is set in which the ball may enter the right out hole 6755bO, enter the right V winning hole 6755bV, or reach the distribution rotor 6755f. When a V winning occurs in the right V winning hole 6755bV in the "small win M14",
Similarly to the "small win K14" and "small win L14", the "big win H14" (10 round normal big win) is won. In the opening pattern C, the small win attacker 6755a is opened even when the game ball can reach the distribution rotor 6755f and when the game ball can enter the right V winning hole 6755bV. That is, the "small win M1
If a V win occurs during the validity period of the small win "4", it may result in either a "big win H14" or a "big win I14".

Of the 100 possible random numbers (counter values) of the small win type counter C5, the number of counter values associated with the "small win M14" is 20. Therefore, when a small win occurs in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of winning the "small win M14" is 20% (20/1
00).

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, when the second special symbol is selected as a small win,
The system is structured so that different types of jackpots are won depending on the type of V winning hole into which the game ball enters. That is, if the game ball enters any of the central V winning holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the most advantageous "jackpot I14" is confirmed, whereas if the game ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV, it will be either the relatively advantageous "jackpot G14" or the disadvantageous "jackpot H14". Also, the probability of winning the "jackpot G14" (i.e., "small jackpot H14" to
The system is structured so that the probability of winning the "big win H14" (i.e., the probability of winning one of the "small win K14" to "small win M14") is higher than the probability of winning one of the "small win J14" to "small win J14"). This allows the player to win only 50% of the time if the ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV when the second special symbol is selected as a small win.
It is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which the player is made to hope that the game ball will reach the distribution rotor 6755f where no winning occurs. Therefore, every time the game ball enters the lottery device 6755, the player can play the game while paying attention to the flow direction of the game ball, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, when the first special symbol is drawn, the player wins a small prize with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100). This allows the player to play in the hope of winning a small prize in the special symbol drawing even in the normal state of the normal symbol where the game needs to be played by hitting from the left. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, a plurality of types of small prizes with different V winning rates are provided for the first special symbol. That is, there are provided V challenge small prizes with V winning rates of 100%, 75%, and 50%, and normal small prizes in which V winning is impossible (difficult). This allows the player to play in the hope of determining a small prize type corresponding to a higher V winning rate when the small prize is won, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when the first special symbol is drawn as a small prize, the attacker 6 for small prize is activated during the two seconds from the start of the small prize, regardless of the small prize type.
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which type of small win is being executed until at least two seconds have passed since the start of the small win, so that even when a normal small win is being executed, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the V Challenge small win for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, a selection performance is executed in which whether or not it is a V Challenge small win is predicted, and the launch direction of the game ball is changed by the player according to the prediction result. That is, if the small win this time is a normal small win, it is possible to make the game ball enter the lottery device 6755 and win a prize ball by hitting right while the common operation mode is being executed for 2 seconds after the start of the small win, while hitting left does not allow the player to win a prize ball. On the other hand, if the small win this time is a V Challenge small win, if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 by hitting right while the common operation mode is being executed, the end condition of the small win (one or more game balls entering) is established at that point, and the small win is ended without executing the V Challenge. On the other hand, if a left hit is performed while the common operation mode is being executed in the V Challenge small win (i.e., during the execution of the selection performance), the small win is not ended until the V Challenge is started. Therefore, in the normal small win,
While the advantage of the V Challenge small win is that it is possible to win prize balls by hitting the right during the selection performance, the advantage of the V Challenge small win is that it is possible to execute the V Challenge reliably by hitting the left during the selection performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which the player predicts the type of small win and the game ball is launched in the direction according to the prediction.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, during the two seconds after the start of the small win, during which the opening operation of the small win attacker 6755a is common for both the normal small win and the V Challenge small win, the opening operation of the small win attacker 6755a is set to 0.
Although the small win attacker 6755a is configured to be opened for only one second, the present invention is not limited to this. The small win attacker 6755a may be opened during a period in which it is impossible (difficult) to win a V prize.
Any operation mode may be set as the common operation mode as long as the small win is opened. For example, the common operation mode may be configured to set an opening operation for 0.5 seconds from 0.8 seconds after the start of the small win. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to make the game ball enter the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the common operation mode, so that a player who predicts a small win can easily win a prize ball by hitting to the right.

In the tenth embodiment, in the lottery device 6755, a small winning attacker 6755a
The operation patterns of each part other than the above are common regardless of the small win type, but this is not limited to this, and the operation patterns of each part may be different depending on the small win type. This allows the operation for each small win type to be diversified, thereby improving the freedom of operation when a small win is won.

In the tenth embodiment, if one or more game balls enter during a small win, the small win ends when the entered game balls are discharged, whereas if no game balls enter, the small win does not end until 8 seconds have passed, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, if no game ball entry is detected when the opening period of the small win attacker 6755a in one small win has ended, the small win may be terminated at that point. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the small win does not end until 8 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, even though no game ball has entered the lottery device 6755 (i.e., there is no possibility of a V winning), so that
The efficiency of gaming can be improved.

<First Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a first modified example of the above-described tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 221 to 223.
In the case of a small win in the lottery of the special symbol, the game ball enters one of the V winning holes provided inside the lottery device 6755, and the player wins the big win. In addition, in the case of a small win of the second special symbol, depending on the type of V winning hole into which the game ball enters,
The expectation of the time-saving state after the big win was different. That is, when the game ball enters one of the center V winning holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 in the small win of the second special pattern and wins the big win, the time-saving state is always set after the big win regardless of the small win type, whereas when the game ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV and wins the big win, the time-saving state is set only at a rate of 39% (i.e., when the small win is H14 to J14). That is, in the small win of the second special pattern, it is more pleasing for the player if the game ball reaches the distribution rotor 6755f than if the ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV. Also, the opening period of the small win of the second special pattern is 0.
Since the time is only six seconds, the game is structured so that the maximum number of balls that can be scored is one.

In contrast, in this modified example, in some of the small wins of the second special symbol, the right V winning hole 67
During the period when the game balls are distributed to the right V winning hole 6755bV, the small winning attacker 6755a is opened, and then during the period when the game balls are guided to the distribution rotor 6755f, a special opening pattern is set in which the small winning attacker 6755a is opened again. Also, a delay device 6755b3 is provided on the way to the right V winning hole 6755bV to delay the flow speed of the game balls, and in the special opening pattern,
When a game ball is guided to the right V winning port 6755bV during both the period when the game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f and the period when the game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f, the game ball is distributed to one of the winning ports by the distribution rotor 6755f and then flows down to the right V winning port 6755bV.
A delay period is set by the delay device 6755b3. This allows the player to recognize that if the ball is not distributed to one of the central V winning holes 6755fv1 to 6755fv3 by the distribution rotor 6755f (i.e., if it is distributed to one of the central out holes 6755fo1 to 6755fo3), the game ball will enter the right V winning hole 6755bV, which has a low expectation of a time-saving state, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the type of ball entry hole distributed by the distribution rotor 6755f. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

First, the configuration of the lottery device 6755 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 221. Fig. 221 is an enlarged front view of the periphery of the guide flow path 6755b2 of the lottery device 6755 in the first modified example. As shown in Fig. 221, the guide flow path 6755b2 in this first modified example is arranged between the lower opening/closing door 6755bD and the right V winning port 6755bV, and guides the game balls that have passed through the lower opening/closing door 6755bD (i.e., 100% V winning).
A delay device 6755b3 is provided for lengthening (delaying) the period until a game ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 during the period reaches the right V winning port 6755bV.
This delay device 6755b3 is composed of a known cloning means. In other words, the game ball that passes through the lower opening and closing door 6755bD and enters from the left side of the delay device 6755b3 continues to circle the inner wall portion for about 8 seconds, and then enters the right V winning hole 675 through a passage hole provided in the center.
5bV. As shown in FIG. 221, the upper right side of the guide passage 6755b2 forms a slope that slopes downward toward the left side of the delay device 6755b3. This allows the game ball that enters the lottery device 6755 during the 100% V winning rate period and passes through the lower opening and closing door 6755bD to fall reliably to the left of the delay device 6755b3. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game ball that passes through the lower opening and closing door 6755bD from passing directly through the opening of the delay device 6755b3 (the flow of the game ball cannot be delayed). As a result, a small win is executed in which a special opening pattern (an opening pattern in which the small win attacker 6755a is opened during the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period) is set, and when the player causes the game ball to enter the lottery device 6755 in both the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period, the right V winning port 675 is surely opened after the distribution of the game ball by the distribution rotor 6755f is completed.
Therefore, when a special opening pattern is set, it is possible to provide a game that strongly expects the game ball to be distributed to one of the V winning holes by the distribution rotor 6755f. That is, before the ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV, which has a low expectation of winning the time-saving jackpot, the game ball enters the center V winning hole 6755fv1-6755fv2, which determines the winning of the 16-round time-saving jackpot (jackpot I14) at the time of the ball entering the center V winning hole 6755fv3-6755fv4, which determines the winning of the 16-round time-saving jackpot (jackpot I14) at the time of the ball entering the center V winning hole 6755fv5-6755fv6, which determines the winning of the 16-round time-saving jackpot (jackpot I14) at the time of the ball entering the center V winning hole 6755fv6-6755fv7, which determines the winning of the 16-round time-saving jackpot (jackpot I14) at the time of the ball entering the center V winning hole 6755fv8-6755fv9, which determines the winning of the 16-round time-saving jackpot (jackpot I14) at the time of the ball entering the center V winning hole 6755fv1-6755fv2, which determines the winning of the 16-round time-saving jackpot (jackpot I14) at the time of the ball entering the center V winning hole 6755fv3-6755fv4, which determines the winning of the 16-round time-saving jackpot (jackpot I14) at the time of the ball entering the center V winning hole 6755fv5-6755fv6, which determines the winning of the 16-round time-saving jackpot (jackpot I14) at the time of the ball entering
It is possible to realize a game that makes the player strongly desire to get the game ball into any of the holes 6755fv3. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the game when a special opening pattern is set.

In addition, the board configuration other than the guide flow path 6755b2 is the same as the board configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the details of the special opening pattern in the first modified example of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 222. This special opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the attacker 6755a for small win when the special small win selected at a predetermined rate (for example, 1% of the small win of the second special pattern) is a special small win of the second special pattern.
As shown in FIG. 2, when the special opening pattern is set, the small win attacker 6755a is maintained in a closed state for 0.4 seconds from the start of the small win, and is opened when 0.4 seconds have passed from the start of the small win. This open state continues for 0.6 seconds, and the small win attacker 6755a is closed when 1 second has passed from the start of the small win. This closed state continues until 2 seconds have passed from the start of the small win. In other words, the special opening pattern operates in exactly the same way as the above-mentioned opening pattern B (see FIG. 215(b)) for 2 seconds from the start of the small win. In other words, of the game balls that enter the lottery device 6755 between 0.4 seconds and 1 second from the start of the small win, 1/3 of them enter the right V winning hole 67
It flows down to 55bV.

Also, as shown in FIG. 222, in the special opening pattern, when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the attacker 6755a for the small win is opened for 0.5 seconds.
When .5 seconds have elapsed, the small win attacker 6755a is closed again. Then,
After that, the attacker 6755a for small win is kept in the closed state until the small win ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 213, the V winning rate is 5.0 to 5.5 seconds after the start of the small win.
Since the period is set to 0%, the game ball that enters the lottery device 6755 during the 0.5 second open period passes through the upper surface of the upper opening and closing door 6755bU in the closed state and is distributed to the distribution rotor 6755
That is, with a probability of 50%, the player will be allocated to one of the central V winning slots and win the most advantageous 16-round time-saving big win. As mentioned above, the V winning rate is 100%.
If a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the 100% V winning rate period, the delay device 6755b3 will delay the ball's arrival at the right V winning port 6755bV. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during both the 100% V winning rate period and the 50% V winning rate period, the ball will not be distributed to the right V winning port 6755bV until the distribution of the game ball by the distribution rotor 6755f is completed.
The game ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the center V winning hole by the distribution rotor 6755f, the most advantageous 16-round time-saving jackpot is won, whereas when the game ball is distributed to the center out hole by the distribution rotor 6755f, the jackpot is won based on the ball entering the right V winning hole 6755bV, which has a low expectation of being granted a time-saving state. Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the type of ball entry hole distributed by the distribution rotor 6755f, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this way, in the first modified example, in a part of the small win of the second special pattern, a special opening pattern is set in which the attacker 6755a for the small win is opened during the period of 100% V winning rate and the period of 50% V winning rate, and during the period of 100% V winning rate, the lottery device 6
Before the game ball that entered 755 reaches the right V winning hole 6755bV, the game ball that entered during the V winning rate 50% period is distributed to one of the winning holes. In other words, when a game ball enters during both the V winning rate 100% period and the V winning rate 50% period, the game ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV after the distribution of the game ball by the distribution rotor 6755f is completed. In other words, the game ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV after the result of whether or not the most advantageous 16-round time-saving big win is won (distributed to the center V winning hole by the distribution rotor 6755f) is announced.
Since the probability of a jackpot based on a ball entering the right V winning hole 6755bV being given a time-saving state is low (for example, 39%), a novel gameplay can be provided in which the player plays the game in the strong hope that the ball will be allocated to the center V winning hole by the allocation rotor 6755f. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first modified example, when a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during a period in which the V winning rate is 100% and during a period in which the V winning rate is 50% in a small win, the ball that enters the lottery device 6755 first enters the distribution rotor 6755.
In the above, the flow speed of the game balls heading toward the right V winning port 6755bV is delayed so that the game balls reach the right V winning port 6755bV after the distribution of the game balls by the delay device 6755b3 is completed, but it does not necessarily have to be one small win. By configuring the game balls to end the small win and start the next fluctuation and small win while the game balls are delayed by the delay device 6755b3, an operation in which the distribution by the distribution rotor 6755f ends before the game balls reach the right V winning port 6755bV across multiple small wins may be realized. By configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to provide a small win in which a special opening pattern is set (the same operation can be realized by winning a small win in which the opening pattern A is set after a small win in which the opening pattern B is set), so the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In this first modified example, the type of big win is determined based on the type of V winning slot into which the game ball first enters during the valid period for the small win, but this is not limited to this.
For example, the type of big win may be determined based on the type of V winning hole into which the game ball last entered during one small win valid period. By configuring in this way, if the game ball first enters the right V winning hole 6755bV during one small win valid period and then enters the right V winning hole 6755bV, the big win type may be determined based on the type of V winning hole into which the game ball last entered during one small win valid period.
f, the ball is distributed to the central V winning hole by the distribution rotor 6755f, so that the ball wins the most advantageous 16-round time-saving big win. In other words, the same gameplay as the first modified example can be achieved without providing the delay device 6755b3. This simplifies the board configuration of the game board 13, thereby reducing the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10.

<Second Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second modified example of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 223. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment described above, the V winning rate is 50%.
If a game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 during the period was sorted by the sorting rotor 6755f to the central outlet, there was no chance of winning a jackpot.

In contrast to this, the second modified example is configured so that a jackpot can be won even if the game ball is distributed to the central outlet by the distribution rotor 6755f.

The second modified example of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
223(a) is a top view showing a portion of the guide flow passage 6755b of the lottery device 6755 to the right of the ball discharge door 6755c. As shown in FIG. 223(a), the guide flow passage 6755b in this second modified example is branched into the front side and the back side as viewed from the front in the portion between the ball discharge door 6755c and the upper opening and closing door 6755bU. Also, at the branching point, the game ball is directed to the flow passage on the front side as viewed from the front,
A distribution member 6755g for distributing the game ball to either the flow path on the front side or the flow path on the rear side is provided. This distribution member 6755g is normally in a state where the game ball is guided to the front side as viewed from the front (FIG. 223
(b)) and during the period of 50% probability of winning V, for a predetermined period (for example, 0
The device is configured so that it can be changed to an arrangement (see FIG. 223(a)) that can distribute the game ball to the flow path at the back only for a period of time (for 1 second).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 223(a), a V-shaped passage hole 6755h through which the game ball can pass is provided in the passage on the back side of the guide passage 6755b when viewed from the front.
are configured to have the same functions as the various V winning ports provided in the lottery device 6755. That is, when a game ball passes through the V passing port 6755h during the small prize valid period, the big prize is won.

In this way, by configuring the flow path on the side where the V passage port 6755h is provided so that the game ball can pass through during a predetermined period during the V winning rate 50% period, the V passage port 6755h
Even if the ball reaches the distribution rotor 6755f after passing through the V passage 6755h and is distributed to the central outlet, the ball can start the big win that was already won by passing through the V passage 6755h after the small win ends.
Since the player is initially made to think that he has not won the jackpot, and then the jackpot is actually started, the player can be given a great surprise and joy, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the design is such that it is difficult to visually determine which of the branched flow paths the game ball has passed through, due to decorations or the like.
By passing through the center outlet, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not he has already won the jackpot, so that the player can be more surely surprised when the jackpot is announced even though the ball has been distributed to the center outlet. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Although not shown in the figures, when the game ball is distributed to the central out-hole after passing through the V-passage 6755h, an effect is executed to inform the player that the jackpot was not won because the ball was distributed to the out-hole. Then, the jackpot is announced by a so-called revival effect, and the jackpot starts. This allows the player to expect the revival effect to occur every time the game ball is distributed to the central out-hole and the player is informed that the jackpot was not won. This allows the player to continue to have a sense of expectation for a jackpot for a longer period of time, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In the tenth embodiment and its various modified examples, a plurality of V winning holes are provided separately, and a jackpot is won when a game ball enters each V winning hole.
However, this is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be made in which only one specific area is provided in which a game ball enters to win a jackpot, and game balls that enter each V winning hole are finally allowed to flow down to one specific area. By configuring in this way, it becomes unnecessary to provide a detection means such as a sensor that detects balls entering each V winning hole, so the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the tenth embodiment and its various modifications, the likelihood of a V win occurring is varied depending on the type of small win by varying the ease of a ball entering during the period in which the V win rate is 100% depending on the type of small win, but this is not limited to the above.
In addition, the number of game balls that can reach the distribution rotor 6755f may be varied depending on the type of small win, thereby varying the expectation of a V winning.
A configuration may be provided in which a small prize type in which a maximum of one game ball can reach the distribution rotor 6755f and a small prize type in which a maximum of two game balls can reach the distribution rotor 6755f are provided. If two game balls can reach the distribution rotor 6755f, the probability of a V winning occurring is 75% (the probability that neither of the two game balls can win a V winning is 50% x 50% = 2
5%), the more game balls reach the distribution rotor 6755, the higher the player's expectations for a V win can be. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 224 to Fig. 256. In the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment described above, in addition to the case where the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the big win game is executed even when the special symbol lottery results in a small win and the game ball enters any of the V winning holes during the valid period of the small win. In addition, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to change the probability of a small win, and while the lottery of the second special symbol results in a small win with a high probability (9/10), the lottery of the first special symbol results in only a relatively low probability (1/100) of winning a small win. As a result, in the time-saving state of the normal patterns, where the drawing of the second special pattern is likely to be executed (the probability of winning the normal pattern is high), it is relatively easy to win a small prize (the V prize is more likely to occur), which is advantageous to the player, whereas in the normal state of the normal patterns, where the game must progress by drawing the first special pattern, it is relatively difficult to win a small prize (the V prize is more likely to occur), which is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, various types of entertainment effects are added that can further increase the interest of the player by executing them in the pachinko machine 10 with the specifications (specs) of the tenth embodiment. More specifically, entertainment effects that are executed to suggest the likelihood of a big win or a small win during the variable display of special symbols, and entertainment effects that are executed to suggest the timing at which the game ball is likely to be distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f during the execution of a small win game in the time-saving state, etc. are added.

The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 1 in the tenth embodiment.
The difference in configuration from Example 0 is that, in the same manner as in the first control example described above, the front frame 14 is
The operation button 230 (see FIG. 100) is provided, and the R
The configuration of the OM 222 and RAM 223 has been partially changed, and the M
The control process executed by the PU 201 has been partially changed, and the voice lamp control device 1
The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has been partially changed.
Other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and other processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the tenth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the configuration of the operation button 230 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Note that the shape of the operation button 230 in the eleventh embodiment is the same as the shape of the operation button 230 in the first control example described above, so the same shape as that of the operation button 230 in the first control example shown in FIG.
100 again for explanation. As shown in FIG. 100, the operation button 230 is disposed on the left side of the ball loan operation unit 40 as viewed from the front. The operation button 230 is composed of five buttons: an up button UB disposed on the upper side as viewed from the front, a down button DB disposed on the lower side as viewed from the front, a right button RB disposed on the right side as viewed from the front, a left button LB disposed on the left side as viewed from the front, and a center button CB disposed in the center of the operation button 230. In the eleventh embodiment, the up button UB and the down button DB are used as buttons for adjusting the brightness of various light-emitting members in the pachinko machine 10 (such as the brightness of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the brightness of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81), and the right button RB and the left button LB are used as buttons for adjusting the volume of various sounds in the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the brightness and the volume can be set to any one of five levels by operating the operation button 230. That is, it is possible to set the brightness of various light-emitting members to increase by one step each time the up button UB is operated (pressed), while the brightness of various light-emitting members is increased by one step each time the down button DB is operated (
It is possible to set the brightness of various light-emitting members to decrease by one step each time the right button RB is operated (pressed). It is also possible to set the volume to increase by one step each time the right button RB is operated (pressed), while it is possible to set the volume to decrease by one step each time the left button LB is pressed. In addition, the operation of the center button CB is encouraged in a predetermined presentation (for example, a button operation presentation such as an operation support presentation to be described later) that can be set during the execution of a variable display presentation. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 224, etc., but in the operation support presentation, a display mode indicating the expectation of a jackpot or the like is displayed each time the center button CB is pressed during the execution of the presentation. This makes it possible to encourage the player to actively press the center button CB, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the brightness setting and the volume setting can be changed at any time. In other words, even during the execution of the variable display performance or during the execution of the big win game, the player can change the settings to his/her preference by pressing the operation button 230. This can further improve the convenience for the player. In the eleventh embodiment, the upper button UB and the lower button DB for changing the brightness setting are arranged around the center button CB.
and a right button RB and a left button LB for changing the volume setting. That is, the button layout is such that there is a relatively high possibility that a player who is trying to press the center button CB while an effect that encourages an operation on the center button CB (for example, a button operation effect such as an operation support effect described later) is being executed will press a different button by mistake. In other words, even if a player who is trying to participate in a button operation effect tries to press the center button CB, the brightness setting or the volume setting may be changed.

Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, during the execution period of the variable display performance in which the button operation performance is set, at least during the operation effective period in which the operation on the center button CB is treated as valid, the change of the brightness or volume setting is restricted. More specifically, the number of operations of the various buttons (non-performance buttons) required to change the various settings (brightness setting and volume setting) is increased from normal over the period from one second before the operation effective period of the center button CB starts until one second has elapsed since the end of the operation effective period. More specifically, during normal times, the setting is changed by one step each time the various buttons (non-performance buttons) are operated (for example, the volume is set to one step higher each time the right button RB is pressed), while the setting is not changed unless the various buttons are operated twice during the period from one second before the start of the operation effective period until one second has elapsed since the end of the operation effective period. By configuring in this way, when a player who is trying to operate the center button CB during the execution of the button operation performance accidentally presses a non-performance button, it is possible to suppress various settings from being changed against the player's will, and since the performance mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed, the player can be made to recognize the operation error (the wrong type of button to be pressed). Therefore, the button operation performance can be more suitably executed. Here, the reason why the configuration is configured so that the setting change based on the operation of the non-performance button is restricted not only during the operation valid period but also for one second before and after the operation valid period is that it is possible to cope with the case where a player who senses that the button operation performance will start and starts operating the button before the operation valid period starts, or a player who continues the operation without noticing that the operation valid period has ended makes an erroneous operation. This makes it possible to further reduce the possibility that the setting change will be made against the player's will. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, the period from one second before the start of the operation valid period to one second after the end of the operation valid period is referred to as the non-performance button restriction period.

In the eleventh embodiment, the non-effect button is pressed twice during the non-effect button limit period to change various settings by one step. However, the specified number of operations (number of presses) for changing the settings is not limited to two, and any number of operations can be set. In addition, for example, the setting may be configured not to be changed unless the same non-effect button is operated continuously for a specified number of operations. That is, the specified number of operations may be reset every time a different button is operated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the setting from being changed except when the non-effect button is operated with the intention of changing the setting during the non-effect button limit period (for example, when the center button CB is roughly operated, another button is operated about once every few times), so that it is possible to more reliably suppress the setting from being changed against the player's will.

In the eleventh embodiment, the operation valid period of the center button CB and the 1 minute period before and after the operation valid period are
Although the non-effect button limit period is set to 20 seconds, the non-effect button limit period can be set arbitrarily. For example, the non-effect button limit period may be set to the non-effect button limit period at all times during the variable display period in which the button operation effect is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed against the player's will when the player performs an erroneous operation. In addition, for example, the non-effect button limit period may be set only during the operation valid period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow a player who attempts to change the setting immediately before or immediately after the operation valid period to change the setting without imposing any restrictions, thereby improving the convenience of the player. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the non-effect button limit period is set only in the operation support effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-effect button limit period may be set in other button operation effects as well. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting from being changed against the player's will even in other button operation effects. Also, by setting a non-effect button limit period in other button operation effects, it is possible to realize a game property in which, for example, by operating a non-effect button, a button operation effect that greatly increases the probability of winning when it appears is executed or not. More specifically, for example, in some cases of winning, a non-effect button limit period is set for an effect in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed once, a button operation effect occurs, and the symbol is changed to a winning symbol based on the operation of the center button CB during the effect period of the button operation effect (or a predetermined effect period has passed). Then, for example, a non-effect button limit period is set to start one second before the effective period (for example, the time when the losing symbol stops). With this configuration, it is possible to make a player aware of the execution of the button operation effect before the button operation effect is executed by operating a non-effect button when a losing symbol stops. Therefore, it is possible to make a player understand that a winning symbol will occur before the button operation effect starts, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In addition, a non-effect button may be arranged adjacent to other operating means other than the center button CB, and a non-effect button limit period may be set even in a variable display effect in which an effect is executed that encourages the operation of the operating means. In particular, by arranging the non-effect button near the operating means that encourages the operation only in an effect with high expectations, the execution of an effect that encourages the operation of an operating means with high expectations can be detected early by operating the non-effect button during the non-effect button limit period, so that a gameplay in which the non-effect button is actively pressed can be realized when there is a possibility that the non-effect button limit period has begun. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to Fig. 224 to Fig. 226, an operation support effect, which is one type of button operation effect in the eleventh embodiment, will be described. This operation support effect is an effect for suggesting to the player the expectation of a big win being notified in the variable display being executed, and the expectation of the variable display being executed progressing to a more expectant variable display mode (expectation of progressing to a reach, expectation of progressing from a normal reach to a super reach, etc.) every time the player operates the center button CB during the performance period. In the following description, an example will be given in which an operation support effect is executed while a performance in which a character 811 modeled after an adventurer and a character 812 modeled after a monster face off is being executed as a super reach performance.

As shown in Fig. 224(a), when the operation support effect is executed, a display area HR11 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape is formed in the upper left portion of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in a place other than the display area HR11, an effect is executed in which an adventurer-like character 811 and a monster-like character 812 face off against each other as a super reach effect. As shown in Fig. 224(a), a bird-like character 813 and a bird-like character 814 face each other in the display area HR11.
is displayed, and the words "PUSH the button to cheer!!" are displayed below the character 813. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that by operating the operation button 230, an effect in which the character 813 cheers is executed.

As shown in FIG. 224(b), when the center button CB of the operation buttons 230 is operated (pressed) during the operation support performance, a character image 814 imitating the character "Ganbare" is displayed in the display area HR11. Note that, as shown in FIG. 225(a), the display area HR11 is configured to be capable of displaying a plurality of character images. That is, a character image is displayed each time the player presses the center button CB while the display area HR11 is displayed (during the operation valid period of the center button CB). FIG. 225(a) is a diagram illustrating a case where two character images 814a and 814b are displayed in the normal (default) display mode (white character display mode).

FIG. 225(b) shows two character images displayed in the display region HR11.
225(b), in the eleventh embodiment, the character image 81 with a striped pattern is set as the character image with a high expectation of development to a reach effect with a high expectation.
By displaying the striped character pattern, the player can expect the game to develop into a highly anticipated reach performance, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, six types of character modes are provided for the character image 814. Specifically, in addition to the above-mentioned striped character mode, for example, a display mode (character mode) of red characters that is more likely to be displayed during the execution of the jackpot variable display than during the execution of the miss variable display (i.e., the expectation of the jackpot is higher) is provided. During the execution of the operation support performance, each time the center button CB is pressed, one character mode is determined by lottery from among the six types of character modes, and a character image of the determined character mode is displayed. Therefore, in the hope that a character mode with a higher expectation of the jackpot or a character mode with a higher expectation of development will be displayed, the center button CB can be actively operated during the execution of the operation support performance, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the operation support performance. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, the selection rate of each character pattern is varied according to the operation status (operation tendency) of the player. That is, it is possible to determine whether the player is a player who tends to actively operate the center button CB during the operation support performance, and to vary the selection rate of each character pattern according to the determination result. More specifically, when it is determined that a player who tends to actively press the center button CB during the operation support performance is playing a game, the rate at which character patterns with high expectations (red character patterns with high expectations of a big win and striped character patterns with high expectations of development) are determined is relatively low, while when it is determined that a player who tends to press the center button CB less frequently during the operation support performance is playing a game, the rate at which character patterns with high expectations are determined is relatively high.

Here, if the operation support performance is configured to set the determination ratio of each character mode based only on the success or failure of the variable display performance being executed and the development status, regardless of the player's pressing tendency, a player who actively presses (i.e., a player who presses many times in one operation support performance) is more likely to have character modes selected by lottery more times, and the display ratio of character modes with relatively high expectations will be higher. In other words, there is a problem in that the expectation shown by the operation support performance changes depending on the player's tendency.

In contrast, in the eleventh embodiment, the determination ratio of each character pattern is varied according to the pressing tendency of each player during the execution of the operation support effect, so that the difference in the reliability of the expected degree suggested during the execution of the operation support effect is reduced between a player who actively presses buttons and a player who presses buttons relatively few times. This makes it possible to provide the expected degree of expectation of the character pattern more appropriately, regardless of the pressing tendency of the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 226, the execution period of the operation support effect when the variable display effect in which the operation support effect is set is executed will be described. In FIG. 226, the variation pattern of the super reach (i.e., the variation pattern of the variable time for 60 seconds, FIG. 11 (b) to (d))
As shown in FIG. 226, when it is determined that the operation support effect is to be performed for the Super Reach variation pattern, 1
Three operation support effects are set during the fluctuation period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 226, the operation support effect is executed for four seconds (first performance period) from 5 seconds to 9 seconds after the start of fluctuation, for four seconds (second performance period) from 25 seconds to 29 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and for four seconds (third performance period) from 55 seconds to 59 seconds after the start of fluctuation. That is, the operation support effect is executed for four seconds (first performance period) from 5 seconds to 1 second before the timing (when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation) at which the effect develops into a reach effect (when a reach occurs), for four seconds (second performance period) from 5 seconds to 1 second before the timing (when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation) at which the effect develops into a super reach, and for four seconds (third performance period) from 5 seconds to 1 second before the timing (when 60 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation) at which the effect stops. In other words, the operation support effect is executed every 5 seconds before the development into a reach effect with a higher expectation and every 5 seconds before the fluctuation stops.

Also, as shown in FIG. 226, the six seconds from one second before the start of each performance period to one second after the end of the period are set as a non-performance button restriction period in which setting changes based on the operation of the non-performance buttons (the up button UB and down button DB for changing the brightness setting, and the right button RB and left button LB for changing the volume setting) are restricted. That is, the number of times that the various buttons (non-performance buttons) required to change various settings (brightness setting and volume setting) are operated (pressed) is increased from the usual number (from once to twice). By configuring in this way, when a player who is trying to operate the center button CB during the execution of a button operation performance accidentally presses a non-performance button, it is possible to prevent various settings from being changed against the player's will, and the performance mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize the operation error (the wrong type of button pressed). Therefore, the button operation performance can be executed more suitably. In addition, by making the one second before and after the valid operation period the non-effect button restriction period, it is possible to prevent settings from being changed against the player's will even if a player senses that a button operation effect is about to begin and begins button operation before the valid operation period begins, or a player who continues operation without realizing that the valid operation period has ended makes an erroneous operation.

In this embodiment, the selection ratio of each character pattern is variable before or after all developments are completed (in the case of the Super Reach variation pattern, before or after the development to the Super Reach performance). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 226, before the development to the Super Reach (the operation support performance executed in the first performance period and the second performance period), the selection ratio of character patterns with a high expectation of development (e.g., striped character patterns) is relatively high, while the selection ratio of character patterns suggesting whether or not a jackpot has been won (blue characters, green characters, red characters, etc.) is relatively low. In contrast, after the development to the Super Reach (the operation support performance executed in the third performance period), the selection ratio of character patterns indicating the expectation of development is low, while
The selection rate of the character form suggesting whether or not a jackpot has been won is relatively high. This allows the type of character form that the player expects to be displayed to be different for each stage of development in the variable display. That is, basically, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, in a stage of few developments (stages with low expectation), such as before the development of the reach performance or during the execution of the normal reach performance, the player can expect that a character form with a high expectation of development will be displayed. On the other hand, after the performance has developed to a stage where the expectation of a jackpot is high (for example, a super reach), the player can expect that a character form with a high expectation of a jackpot will be displayed. Therefore, even though the same display mode of the operation support performance is being executed, it is possible to realize a novel performance in which the type of character form that is expected to be displayed can be different depending on the stage of development of the reach performance.

In FIG. 226, the case where the operation support effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is illustrated, but the timing of the operation support effect in other fluctuation patterns will be briefly described. In a completely miss fluctuation pattern, the operation support effect is executed only 5 seconds before the fluctuation stops. That is, the operation support effect is executed only during the period when the player pays attention to whether or not the game will develop into a reach effect. In addition, when the operation support effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, the operation support effect is executed 5 seconds before the game develops into a reach effect and 5 seconds before the fluctuation stops. That is, the operation support effect is executed during the period when the player pays attention to whether or not the game will develop into a reach effect and the period when the player pays attention to whether or not the game will develop into a super reach effect. Furthermore, when the operation support effect is set for the fluctuation pattern of the special reach, the operation support effect is executed 5 seconds before the game develops into a reach effect, 5 seconds before the game develops into a super reach effect, 5 seconds before the game develops into a special reach effect, and 5 seconds before the game stops.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, when the operation support effect is set, the operation support effect is executed for four seconds every five seconds before the timing at which the third symbol is likely to be stopped and displayed (the timing at which there is a possibility of developing into a reach effect with a higher expectation).
In this operation support effect, each time the player presses the center button CB during the four-second performance period, the degree of expectation that a jackpot will be announced at the end of the variable display, or that the game will develop into a reach performance with a higher expectation after the end of the operation support effect, is displayed in a character image 814.
The display is structured so that the player is prompted by the character pattern of "A" or "B". Therefore, a player who wants to predict more accurately whether or not a big win will occur and whether or not the game will develop by checking as many suggestions as possible can be made to actively operate the center button CB during the four-second performance period. This can increase the player's motivation to participate in the operation support performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the selection rate of each character form is varied according to the operation status (operation tendency) of the player. That is, it is possible to determine whether the player is a player who tends to actively operate the center button CB during the operation support effect, and to vary the selection rate of each character form according to the determination result. This reduces the difference in the expected degree suggested during the operation support effect between a player who actively presses the button and a player who presses the button relatively few times, so that the expected degree of the character form can be more appropriately provided regardless of the player's pressing tendency.

In the eleventh embodiment, the operation support effect is executed for four seconds starting five seconds before the timing when the third symbol may be stopped (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 90 seconds after the start of the change), but the execution timing of the operation support effect is not limited to this. For example, during the display period of one change display effect,
In a type of pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a pseudo-multiple times of variable display (so-called pseudo consecutive display), the operation support display may be configured to be executed a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) before the timing when the next pseudo-variation can be executed. By configuring in this way, the player can expect a different type of character pattern to be displayed for each pseudo consecutive number of times. That is, while the number of pseudo consecutive times is small (1 or 2 times), the player can expect a character pattern that increases the expectation of the next pseudo consecutive number to be displayed, while after the number of pseudo consecutive times increases and the game progresses to a stage where a notification of whether or not a jackpot has been won can be made, the player can expect a character pattern that increases the expectation of the jackpot to be displayed. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the character pattern of the character image 814 displayed during the execution of the operation support display while playing the game, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the operation support effect is set, the timing at which the third symbol may be stopped and displayed (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 9 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) is set.
In the above, the operation support effect is executed every 5 seconds before the time when the operation support effect is reached (when 0 seconds have elapsed), but it is not necessary to execute the operation support effect at each timing. For example, the operation support effect may be executed or not executed by lottery every time the timing for execution is reached. In this case, the lottery probability may be varied depending on whether or not a jackpot is reached, whether or not development occurs, etc. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not the operation support effect is executed, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to Fig. 227 to Fig. 232, a mini character preview performance that can be executed during the variable display performance in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This mini character preview performance is a performance in which a character (mini character) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 performs a predetermined action, and in the normal state of the normal symbol, a V challenge small win (Fig. 21
4 (a) to (c). That is, during the variable period, a performance in which the mini character performs up to three stages of action is performed, and when the action reaches the third stage, a performance is performed in which the V Challenge small win is confirmed.

First, the first action in the mini character preview performance will be described with reference to Figs. 227(a) and (b). When the first action in the mini character preview performance starts during the execution of the variable display, first, as shown in Fig. 227(a), a robot-like character (mini character) MC appears in the lower center of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The mini character M appears in the lower part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 227(b), C moves to the right when viewed from the front, and then fades out of the display screen.

In addition, in the second action (second action) that is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first action ended and the mini character MC faded out off the screen, the mini character MC fades in from the right side of the display screen onto the display screen, and then jumps up from the right side of the screen to the upper left, as shown in Fig. 228(a). In this second action, the mini character that jumped up to the upper left continues to fade out toward the top of the display screen.

Furthermore, in the third stage action (third action) which is executed a predetermined period of time after the end of the second stage action, as shown in FIG. 228(b), the mini-character MC, which had been fading out towards the top of the display screen, fades in from above into the display screen together with an image resembling a signboard with the words "V Challenge" displayed (the V Challenge symbol). When this third stage action is executed and the V Challenge symbol is displayed, the player can easily understand that he or she has won the V Challenge small prize. It should be noted that, as this third stage action (third action) is executed, the third symbol may be a combination of symbols indicating a V Challenge small prize (FIG. 228(b)).
In the example of "3", "V", and "3", the combination is displayed as a stop.

Next, referring to Fig. 229, the change over time of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the mini character preview performance is executed will be described. Fig. 229 is a diagram showing the change over time of the display mode of the mini character MC from the start of the mini character preview performance when the mini character MC executes up to the third action in the mini character preview performance.
As shown in FIG. 227(a) and FIG. 227(b), when the mini character preview performance starts, the first action is that the mini character MC appears at the bottom center of the display screen and moves to the right (see FIG. 227(a) and FIG. 227(b)).
This first action continues for 5 seconds, and when the 5 seconds have passed, the mini character MC fades out off the screen. The period during which the mini character MC fades out off the screen (mini character absence period) lasts for 5 to 10 seconds. The length of the absence period is determined by lottery depending on the type of variation (the result of the lottery for the special pattern, the length of the variation period, etc.).

Also, as shown in FIG. 229, when the set mini character absence period has elapsed, a second action is executed in which the mini character MC jumps up from the right direction of the display screen to the upper left direction. This second action continues for three seconds, and when the three seconds have elapsed, the mini character MC fades out of the screen. The mini character absence period after the mini character fades out continues for four to nine seconds, and when the set mini character absence period has elapsed, a third action is executed in which the mini character MC falls into the display screen together with the V Challenge symbol. Since the third action is executed, the winning of the V Challenge small prize is confirmed, and each time the mini character advance performance starts, the player can be made to expect that the advance performance will continue until the third action. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the execution timing of various actions (first to third actions) performed by the mini character MC is varied by varying the length of the mini character absence period. In addition, in the variable display in which the mini character advance performance is set, when the variable display ends without progressing to the third action, the timing of the change stop is always set to the mini character absence period. This makes it possible to prevent (suppress) the variable display from ending while the mini character MC is performing an action on the display screen. Therefore, a more suitable display performance can be provided. In addition, by configuring to suppress the variable display from ending while the mini character MC is performing an action, it is possible to provide a gameplay in which the player can know in advance that the development will progress to a reach performance with a higher expectation depending on the timing of the start of the action of the mini character MC before the performance related to the development is executed. In other words, if the mini character MC starts an action just before 10 seconds have elapsed (for example, 2 seconds before) from the start of the change that may develop into the reach performance, the player can be made to recognize that the action of the mini character MC is likely to be executed across 10 seconds after the start of the change. Since the 10-second mark means that the symbols will not stop and the variable display will not end when the 10-second mark has elapsed, the player can indirectly understand that the action of the mini character MC will develop into a reach effect. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention not only to the action of the mini character MC itself, but also to the state of the variable display of the third symbol when the mini character MC starts its action, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 230 to FIG. 231, the state of the variable display of the third pattern and the mini character M
The correspondence between the action status of C will be explained. In this eleventh embodiment, three types of execution periods are set for each action in the mini character preview performance: low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation. In other words, the action of the mini character MC itself is kept common, and only the period during which the mini character MC performs the action is made different to suggest the expectation of a small V Challenge win. By configuring in this way, the image data required for the mini character preview performance can be minimized, so the storage capacity of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

First, referring to Fig. 230(a), the correspondence between the period of the action of the mini character MC and the change time (change period) of the third pattern when the mini character advance performance is set for the long miss change pattern will be described. As shown in Fig. 230(a), when the mini character advance performance is set for the long miss change pattern, the first action always starts 5 seconds after the start of the change, and ends when the miss pattern stops.
By configuring the first action to be executed in a long miss variation pattern, the player can have hope for a V Challenge small win even in a long miss variation pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 230(b) to FIG. 231, the correspondence between the fluctuation time and the period of the action of the mini character MC when the mini character advance performance is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach will be described. FIG. 230(b) is a diagram showing the case where the mini character advance performance with low expectation action timing is set for the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach miss (including normal small win). As shown in FIG. 230(b), when the mini character advance performance with low expectation is set, the first action is executed when 5 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation. That is, the same execution period as the fluctuation pattern of the long miss is set as the execution period of the first action. Therefore, at the stage where the first action is executed, the expectation of the player is not increased much. Also, as shown in FIG. 230(b), when 20 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the second action is executed. This second action continues for 3 seconds as described above. When the second action ends, the period until the miss pattern stops (the fluctuation period ends) is set to the mini character absence period. This low expectation action timing is set by V
When the lottery result is different from the challenge small win, the action timing is selected at a higher rate than the action timings of other expectations (medium expectation and high expectation). Therefore, the player who has confirmed the action timing can be made to recognize that the expectation of the V Challenge is not so high, and can be made to appropriately recognize the expectation.

Also, Figure 230 (c) is a diagram showing a case where a mini character preview performance with low expectation action timing is set for the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach small win (V challenge small win). As shown in Figure 230 (c), when a mini character preview performance with low expectation action timing is set for the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach corresponding to the lottery result of a V challenge small win, the first action and the second action are executed in the same period as when the normal reach is missed (see Figure 230 (b)). In other words, the first action is executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the second action is executed 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small win, as shown in Figure 230 (c).
When 7 seconds have passed, the third action is executed to notify the player of the V Challenge small win. That is, the timing of the action of the mini character MC is configured to be exactly the same at least until 27 seconds have passed after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the contents of the action of the mini character MC whether the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern with a mini character advance performance for low expectation set, or a normal reach small win fluctuation pattern, so that when the V Challenge small win is notified by the third action, the player can be given even greater joy and surprise.

FIG. 231(a) is a diagram showing a case where a mini character preview performance with a medium expectation action timing is set for a normal reach miss (including normal small win). As shown in FIG. 231(a), when a mini character preview performance with a medium expectation is set, the first action is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. That is, the first action is executed immediately after the development into the reach performance. This first action continues until 15 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, and after 15 seconds, it becomes a mini character absence period. Then, as shown in FIG. 231(a), the second action is executed when 20 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation. The second action is executed until 23 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation, and then it is set to a mini character absence period until the end of the fluctuation.

FIG. 231(b) is a diagram showing a case where a medium expectation action timing is set for a normal reach small win (limited to V challenge small win). As shown in FIG. 231(b), when a medium expectation action timing is set for a normal reach small win fluctuation pattern, the first action and the second action are executed in the same period as in the case of a normal reach miss (see FIG. 231(a)). That is,
The first action is executed 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the second action is executed 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Then, as shown in FIG. 231(b), when 27 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach small win, the third action is executed and the winning of the V challenge small win is announced. That is, like the action timing of the low expectation level, the third action is executed 27 seconds after the start of the fluctuation.
The timing of the action of the mini character MC is configured to be exactly the same until the 7 seconds have passed. Therefore, from the content of the action of the mini character MC, it is possible to determine whether the variation pattern is a normal reach deviation pattern with a mini character preview performance for a medium expectation level,
Since it becomes difficult (impossible) to distinguish whether this is a normal reach small win fluctuation pattern or not, when a V Challenge small win is announced by the third action, the player can be given even greater joy and surprise.

In addition, when a medium expectation level action timing is set, the first action is executed at a clearly different timing (after the development into a reach effect) from when a mini character preview effect is set in a long miss variation pattern (see FIG. 230(a)), so the player can be made to expect a more expectant variable display effect. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 231(c) is a diagram showing a case where action timing for high expectation is set for a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach failure (including a normal small win).
As shown in Fig. 1, when the action timing for high expectation is set, the first action starts 8 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. In other words, the first action starts before the development into the reach performance and at a timing later than the timing of the first action for low expectation.
This allows the player to realize that the action timing is different from the first action for low expectation, which is relatively likely to occur during normal times. Therefore, the expectation for the V Challenge small win can be increased. As described above, the first action continues for 5 seconds, so the first action is executed across the timing of development into the reach performance. Therefore, the player who compared and confirmed the progress of the first action with the state of the variable display of the third pattern can be made to feel that the end timing of the first action is likely to be later than the timing at which the reach performance occurs or not. Here, as described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the variable display does not end in the middle of the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, the player who understands this specification and plays the game can sense that the reach performance will occur before the timing of the occurrence of the reach performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying playing the game while comparing the progress of the variable display with the progress of the action of the mini character MC.

231(c), the seven seconds between 13 seconds after the start of the change when the first action ends and 20 seconds after the start of the change are set as a period when no mini characters are present. Then, at the point 20 seconds after the start of the change, a three-second second action is executed, and thereafter, the period is set as a period when no mini characters are present until the end of the change.

Also, as shown in FIG. 231(d), when a mini character preview performance with high expectation action timing is set for the normal reach small win (V challenge small win) fluctuation pattern, the first action and the second action are executed in the same period as in the case of a normal reach miss. That is, the action timing of at least the mini character MC is configured to be completely the same until 27 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to distinguish from the contents of the action of the mini character MC whether it is a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern with a low expectation mini character preview performance set or a normal reach small win fluctuation pattern, so that when a V challenge small win is notified by the third action, the player can be given greater joy and surprise.

The high expectation action timing is set at a relatively high rate when the special symbol lottery results in a V Challenge small win, and at an extremely low rate when the special symbol lottery results in a miss, so that a player who judges the action of the mini character MC to be a high expectation action from the timing of the action can have a high expectation of getting a V Challenge small win. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention not only to the content of the action of the mini character MC but also to the timing at which the action starts, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Although not shown in the figures, the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds and the fluctuation pattern of the Special Reach with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds are also shown for low expectation.
The action timing for medium and high expectation is specified. For super reach and special reach, it is basically the same as for normal reach.
In the low expectation action timing, the first action is configured to end just before the final development timing in the reach performance. That is, in the case of a super reach fluctuation pattern, the first action is executed so as to end just before the development into a super reach (i.e., 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), and in the case of a special reach fluctuation pattern, the first action is executed so as to end just before the development into a special reach (i.e., 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). In addition, in the medium expectation action timing, the first action is configured to start just after the final development timing in the reach performance, and in the high expectation action timing,
The first action is configured to be executed across the final development timing in the reach performance.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, a mini character preview effect is configured to be executable as a type of effect that suggests the execution of a V Challenge. In this mini character preview effect, the mini character MC completes all of the first to third actions to notify the player that a V Challenge will be executed.
There are multiple types (low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation) with different expectation levels for the execution of the challenge, and although the contents of the action of the mini character MC itself are the same, the timing of the action execution is configured to be different for each expectation level. As a result, the image data itself used to display the action of the mini character MC can be made common, so the storage capacity of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 can be reduced. Furthermore, when the action timing for high expectation is set in the variable display in which the mini character advance performance is set, the first action is executed across the timing of development to the reach performance with higher expectation. Therefore, a player who has compared and confirmed the progress of the first action with the state of the variable display of the third pattern can be made to feel that the end timing of the first action is likely to be later than the timing at which it is determined whether or not it will develop into the reach performance with higher expectation. Here, as described above, in this eleventh embodiment, the variable display does not end in the middle of the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, a player who understands this specification and is playing the game can sense that the performance will develop before it actually develops. Therefore, a novel way of enjoying the game can be provided to the player, in which the player can play while comparing the progress of the changing display with the progress of the mini-character MC's actions.

Next, referring to FIG. 232, a description will be given of the central route suggestion effect executed in the time-saving state of the normal pattern in the eleventh embodiment. This central route suggestion effect is basically,
This is a presentation that suggests a period (see FIG. 215) during which it is highly likely that a gaming ball will be distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f (the gaming ball will flow down the central route) when the gaming ball enters the lottery device 6755 (the period during which it is more likely to be distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f).
The game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6755f are fed through six ball entrances (
Central V entry gate 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, central out gate 6755fo1 to 6755
Of these six entry points, the center V
If the game ball enters any of the winning slots 6755fv1 to 6755fv3, the most advantageous "jackpot I14" will be won. In other words, the number of rounds is large, and the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set again after the jackpot ends, so the central V winning slots 6755fv1 to 6755fv
When the game ball enters the hole 3, the player can feel a great sense of satisfaction.
On the other hand, as described above, if the ball enters one of the central outlets 6755fo1 to 6755fo3, the player will not receive any special benefits.
The period from when the game ball is distributed to f until it is distributed to one of the ball entry ports is one of the periods when the player feels the most anticipation. Therefore, by using the central route suggestion performance to suggest the timing when the game ball is likely to be distributed to the distribution rotor 6755 (it is likely to flow down the central route), it is possible to realize a game that makes the player want to have the game ball enter the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion performance is being executed.
This can increase the player's interest in the game.

232(a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a small win is executed in the time-saving state.
FIG. 232(b) shows an example of a display mode when the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is open (V non-available period or V winning rate 100%), and FIG. 232(c) shows an example of a display mode when the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is closed (V
232(a), an example of the display mode during the winning 50% period is shown.
During the execution of the small win game in the time-saving state, the boy character 71
0 is displayed, and in the small area Ds3, the words "Hit right!" and an image of an arrow pointing to the right are displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that by hitting right during the small win game, the game ball can enter the small win attacker 6755a and aim for a V win. In addition, the stop pattern indicating a small win continues to be displayed in the main display area Dm. This allows the player to easily understand that the small win game is being played. The display contents of the small area Ds1 are the same as those during normal times. That is, since only the reserved pattern is displayed, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

FIG. 232(b) shows the time when the upper opening door 6755bU is closed (the time when the V winning rate is 50%).
As shown in FIG. 232(b), the surroundings of the boy character 710 displayed in the small area Ds2 are changed to a luminous appearance (aura-clad). By changing the display mode of the small area Ds2, the game ball is distributed to the center route (the most advantageous big win I with a 1/2 ratio) when it enters the lottery device 6755.
Therefore, when a small win occurs during the time-saving state, the player can play the game while paying more attention to whether the game ball will enter the lottery device 6755 while the boy character 710 is in the display state of being wrapped in an aura (emitting light), and therefore the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, even in a period in which the player is not assigned to the central route, the central route suggestion effect may be executed.
4 (i.e., a small win type that becomes a 10-round time-saving big win when a V win occurs) during the 100% V winning rate period, a certain percentage (for example, 4
0%). As a result, even if the game ball is thrown into the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is occurring,
The game ball is guided to the right V winning hole 6755bV, and the game continues in a time-saving state after the big win, which is a behavior different from the usual behavior (the behavior of being distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f). This can give the player a big surprise and joy, and can increase the player's interest in the game.

Here, as described above, the central route suggestion performance is a performance executed in synchronization with the V winning rate 50% period or the V winning rate 100% period set within 1 second after the start of the small win, so the performance time is 0.2 seconds (see FIG. 215). Therefore, even if a game ball is launched after visually confirming that the central route suggestion performance has occurred, it is impossible (difficult) to make the game ball reach the lottery device 6755 before the performance ends. This makes it possible to prevent an irregular playing method that aims to make the game ball enter the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion performance is occurring in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, so that it is possible to suppress unexpected disadvantages to the hall. In addition, by making it impossible to make the game ball enter the lottery device 6755 during the performance execution period even if the game ball is launched after visually confirming the central route suggestion performance, it is possible to realize a playability that allows a player to expect the central route suggestion performance to occur at the timing when the game ball already launched enters the lottery device 6755. That is, the player can play the game while paying attention not only to the flow path of the gaming ball that entered the lottery device 6755, but also to the presentation situation at the time of the ball entering the lottery device 6755. In other words, by comparing the occurrence situation of the central route suggestion presentation with the timing of the gaming ball entering the lottery device 6755, a novel gameplay can be realized in which the player can grasp the flow path of the gaming ball in advance, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, when a small jackpot is won in the time-saving state of a normal pattern, a central route suggestion effect is executed to suggest to the player that the period is a 50% V winning rate period (a period during which the game ball is likely to be guided to the distribution rotor 6755f). By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention not only to the flow path of the game ball from when it enters the inside of the lottery device 6755 until it enters one of the ball entrances, but also to the presentation situation when the game ball enters the lottery device 6755. In other words, the lottery device 6755
It is possible to realize a novel game feature in which the player is made to predict the expectation of the game ball flowing down the central route (distributing the game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f) by comparing the timing of the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 with the state of the central route suggestion effect executed in the small area Ds2. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. From this behavior, it can be said that the central route suggestion effect is an effect in which, when a V-winning occurs by a game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 during the effect, the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot is determined (the time-saving state is more easily set than when a V-winning occurs by a game ball that entered the lottery device when the effect is not occurring).

In the eleventh embodiment, the central route suggestion effect notifies the player of the timing of the ball entering the ball that is likely to be allocated to the central route, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the central route suggestion effect may be displayed in a number of different types, and the expectation of the ball being allocated to the central route may be varied depending on the display mode. By configuring the central route suggestion effect in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention not only to the period during which the central route suggestion effect is being executed, but also to the display mode of the central route suggestion effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the central route suggestion performance is configured to be executed in synchronization with the V winning rate 50% period or the V winning rate 100% period, but is not limited to this. For example, the execution timing of the central route suggestion performance may be set by taking into account the time lag between the ball entering the lottery device 6755 and the game ball reaching the upper opening and closing door 6755bU (the lower opening and closing door 6755bD) (for example, the execution period is set to be from 0.1 seconds before the period starts to 0.1 seconds before the period ends). By configuring in this way, even if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion performance is being executed, a situation occurs in which the game ball does not flow down to the distribution rotor 6755f (or the right V winning port 6755bV), which causes the player to feel dissatisfied, and makes it difficult for the player to understand the meaning of the central route suggestion performance, which can be prevented (suppressed).

<Electrical configuration of eleventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 233(a), the voice lamp control device 11 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described.
The configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the first embodiment will be described below.
233(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 11th embodiment. As shown in Fig. 233(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 11th embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 10th embodiment (and the 8th embodiment) (see Fig. 195(a)) in that a character mode selection table 222fa, a mini character performance selection table 222fb, and a small win performance selection table 222fc are added.

The character mode selection table 222fa is a data table in which data is prescribed for determining the character mode of the character image 814 to be displayed when the player presses (operates) the center button CB during the operation support performance (see FIG. 224(b)). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 234 and 235.
When the center button CB is operated during the operation support effect, a is referenced to select a character pattern according to the lottery result of the special pattern and the operation status of the player with the center button CB, etc. (see S40609 in Figure 245).

The mini character performance selection table 222fb includes the mini character preview performance (FIG. 227 and FIG. 2
236 and 237, this mini character performance selection table 222fb is referenced when setting the execution of a variable display based on a variable pattern command received from the main control device 110, and determines whether or not a mini character preview performance is performed, and the expectation level suggested by the preview performance (mini character M
This is referenced to determine the timing of action by C (see S41307 in FIG. 254).

The small win effect selection table 222fc is a data table that specifies data for determining whether or not to execute the center route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232(b)) and the execution timing when a small win occurs in the time-saving state of a normal pattern. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 238, but this small win effect selection table 222fc is referenced at the start of a small win (when a small win type command indicating the small win type is received from the main control device 110), and the execution timing of the center route suggestion effect is determined according to the small win type (see S41004, S41005 in FIG. 250).

Next, the character mode selection table 222fa will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 234 and Fig. 235. As described above, the character mode selection table 222fa is a data table that is referenced to determine the character mode of the character image 814 that is displayed when the player presses (operates) the center button CB during the operation support effect (see Fig. 224(b)).

Fig. 234(a) is a block diagram showing the contents of the character mode selection table 222fa. As shown in Fig. 234(a), the character mode selection table 222fa includes a winning (before development is completed) table 222fa1, which is referred to in order to select a character mode in the operation support performance executed before the last development timing in the reach performance during the execution of the variable display (variation performance) corresponding to the big win, and a winning (after development is completed) table 222fa2, which is referred to in order to select a character mode in the operation support performance executed after the last development timing in the reach performance during the execution of the variable display (variation performance) corresponding to the big win, and a winning (after development is completed) table 222fa3, which is referred to in order to select a character mode in the operation support performance executed after the last development timing in the reach performance during the execution of the variable display (variation performance) corresponding to the miss, and
It is composed of a miss table 222fa3 (before completion of development) which is referenced to select the character mode in an operation support performance executed before the final development timing in the reach performance, and a miss table 222fa4 (after completion of development) which is referenced to select the character mode in an operation support performance executed during the execution of a variable display (variable performance) corresponding to a miss and after the final development timing in the reach performance.

First, the details of the winning (before development is completed) table 222fa1 will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 234(b), the effect lottery counter 223e
For each range of the value of a, the winning (before completion of development) table 222fa1 is defined in correspondence with six types of character patterns that can be set in the character image 814 in the operation support effect. Also, different ranges are defined for the value of the effect selection counter 223ea depending on the operation status of the player (participation status in the operation support effect). When a player with a low frequency of operation is playing (when the average number of operations for each operation support effect in the previous variable display in which an operation support effect was set was 5 or less), the regulation contents corresponding to "low frequency of operation" in Figure 234(b) are referenced, when a player with a medium frequency of operation is playing (when the average number of operations for each operation support effect in the previous variable display in which an operation support effect was set was 6 or more and 9 or less), the regulation contents corresponding to "medium frequency of operation" in Figure 234(b) are referenced, and when a player with a high frequency of operation is playing (when the average number of operations for each operation support effect in the previous variable display in which an operation support effect was set was 10 or more), the regulation contents corresponding to "high frequency of operation" in Figure 234(b) are referenced.

As shown in FIG. 234(b), as a regulation content corresponding to a player who operates infrequently, the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea is in the range of "0 to 199," and the character style is "white."
is specified in correspondence with the above (222fa1a in FIG. 234(b)).
Since 23ea can take 1000 values from "0 to 999," if the player operates the center button CB in an operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to a jackpot, a white character image 814 is displayed 20% (200/1000).

Also, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “200 to 4
For the range of "49", "blue" is associated with the character style (see FIG. 234 (
222fa1b in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, if the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, the character image 814 in blue characters is displayed at a rate of 25% (250/1000). Also, the character mode is specified to be "green" in correspondence with the value of the effect selection counter 223ea in the range of "450 to 479" (222fa1c in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, if the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the jackpot, the character image 814 in green characters is displayed at a rate of 3% (30/1000). Also, if the value of the effect selection counter 223ea is "4
The range of "80 to 499" is specified to correspond to the character mode "red" (222fa1d in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the character image 814 in red is displayed at a rate of 2% (20/1000).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “500 to 9
For the range of "49" and "50", "stripes (black)" is associated with the character style (222fa1e in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the character image 814 with a black stripe pattern is displayed at a rate of 45% (450/1000). Also, for the range of the value of the effect selection counter 223ea from "950 to 999", "stripes (red)" is associated with the character style (222fa1e in FIG. 234(b)).
4(b) 222fa1f). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support performance executed before the end of the final development in the variable performance corresponding to the big win, the red striped character image 814 is displayed at a rate of 5% (50/1000).

In this way, when a player who operates the center button CB infrequently (the average number of operations in one operation support performance is 5 times or less) operates the center button CB in an operation support performance executed before the end of the final development in the variable performance corresponding to a big win, there is a 1/2 chance that a character style with a black or red striped pattern that increases the likelihood of development will be set. Also, as will be described in more detail later, the character style (green or red characters) that increases the likelihood of a win will be set as follows:
It is set at a higher rate than in the case of a miss. Therefore, when a character pattern with a high expectation of development (black stripe pattern or red stripe pattern) is selected, the player can expect the development to a reach performance with a higher expectation. Also, when a character pattern of a type with a high expectation of a win (green characters or red characters) is selected, the expectation of a big win can be increased. Note that the red stripe pattern is configured not to be displayed in the operation support performance executed after the final development in the reach performance is completed. In other words, when the character image 814 with the red stripe pattern is displayed, it is determined that the development will be to a performance with a higher expectation than the current reach performance stage.

On the other hand, as a regulation content corresponding to a player with a medium operation frequency (an average number of operations in one operation support effect is 6 times or more and 9 times or less), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is set to "0 to 5
For the range of "79", "white" is associated with the character style (see FIG. 234 (
Therefore, in the operation support performance executed before the end of the final development in the variable performance corresponding to the big win, if the player operates the center button CB, the white character image 814 is displayed at a rate of 58% (580/1000).
The value of the effect selection counter 223ea is in the range of "580 to 779" and the character type is set to "blue" (222fa1b in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the character image 814 in blue is displayed at a rate of 20% (200/1000). Also, when the value of the effect selection counter 223ea is "
The range of "780 to 791" is associated with "green" as the character style (
222fa1c in FIG. 234(b). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the character image 814 in green characters is displayed at a rate of 1.2% (12/1000). Also, the character mode is specified to be associated with "red" for the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea in the range of "792 to 799" (222fa1d in FIG. 234(b)).
Therefore, if the player operates the center button CB in the operation support performance executed before the final development in the variable performance corresponding to the big win is completed, 0.8% (8/10
00), a character image 814 in red is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “800 to 9
For the range of "79" and "80", "stripes (black)" is associated with the character style (222fa1e in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the character image 814 with a black stripe pattern is displayed at a rate of 18% (180/1000). Also, for the range of the value of the effect selection counter 223ea from "980 to 999", "stripes (red)" is associated with the character style (222fa1e in FIG. 234(b)).
4(b) 222fa1f). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support performance executed before the end of the final development in the variable performance corresponding to the big win, the red striped character image 814 is displayed at a rate of 2% (20/1000).

In this way, when the operation frequency is medium (average number of operations is 6 or more and 9 or less), the selection rate of character patterns with high expectation of big win (green characters, red characters) and character patterns with high expectation of development (black stripe pattern, red stripe pattern) is lower than when the operation frequency is low (average number of operations is 5 or less). By configuring in this way, even when players with different operation tendency play, the difference in the number of times that character patterns with high expectation of big win and development are displayed in one operation support performance can be reduced compared to when the selection rate of each character pattern is the same regardless of the operation tendency. Therefore, the performance can be set appropriately regardless of the operation tendency.

On the other hand, as a regulation content corresponding to a player who performs operations frequently (the average number of operations in one operation support effect is 10 or more), the value of the effect lottery counter 223ea is set in the range of "0 to 799" and the character mode is set to "white" (see 222 in FIG. 234(b)).
Therefore, in the operation support performance executed before the end of the final development in the variable performance corresponding to the big win, if the player operates the center button CB, 80% (
A white character image 814 is displayed at a ratio of 800/1000. Also, the character style is set to "blue" in correspondence with the value of the effect selection counter 223ea in the range of "800 to 889" (222fa1b in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win,
When the player operates the center button CB, the character image 814 in blue is displayed at a rate of 9% (90/1000). In addition, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is "890 to 895".
The character style "green" is associated with the range (222fa1c in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win,
The character image 814 in green is displayed at a rate of 0.6% (6/1000). In addition, when the value of the effect selection counter 223ea is in the range of "896 to 899", the character mode is "red".
is associated with the character image 814 (222fa1d in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the character image 814 in red is displayed at a rate of 0.4% (4/1000).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 234(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “900 to 9
89" is specified as the character pattern "stripes (black)" (222fa1e in FIG. 234(b)). Therefore, when the player operates the center button CB in the operation support effect executed before the end of the final development in the variable effect corresponding to the big win, the character image 81 with black stripes is displayed at a rate of 9% (90/1000).
4 is displayed. In addition, the value of the effect selection counter 223ea is set in the range of "990 to 999" to correspond to the character pattern "stripe (red)" (see FIG. 234 (
Therefore, in the operation support performance executed before the end of the final development in the variable performance corresponding to the big win, when the player operates the center button CB, the red striped character image 814 is displayed at a rate of 1% (10/1000).

In this way, when the operation frequency is high (average number of operations is 10 or more), the operation frequency is low (average number of operations is 5 or less) or medium (average number of operations is 6 or more, 9 or less).
In comparison with the above, the selection rate of character patterns with high expectation of big wins (green characters, red characters) and character patterns with high expectation of development (black stripe pattern, red stripe pattern) is even lower. By configuring in this way, the difference in the number of times character patterns with high expectation of big wins and development are displayed in one operation support performance can be reduced, even when players with different tendencies in the number of operations play, compared with the case where the selection rate of each character pattern is the same regardless of the operation tendency. Therefore, the performance can be set appropriately regardless of the operation tendency.

Next, referring to FIG. 234(c), the above-mentioned winning (after development completion) table 222f
The details of the winning (after development completion) table 222fa2 are described below. As described above, the winning (after development completion) table 222fa2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a character mode in an operation support performance that is executed after the last development timing in the reach performance, during the execution of the variable display (variable performance) corresponding to the big win.

As shown in FIG. 234(c), as the regulation contents corresponding to the player who operates infrequently, the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea is specified to correspond to the range of "0 to 99" as the character mode of "white" (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234(c)), and the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea is specified to correspond to the range of "100 to 199" as the character mode of "blue" (see 222fa2b in FIG. 234(c)).
234(c) 222fa2c, and the range of "700 to 949" is specified to be associated with "red" as a character mode (see 222fa2d in FIG. 234(c) ).
The character pattern "stripes (black)" is associated with the range of "950 to 999" (see 222fa2e in FIG. 234(c)). Also, the value of the effect selection counter 223ea is not associated with "stripes (red)" (see 222fa2e in FIG. 234(c)).
2fa2f). Therefore, pressing the center button CB will not set the red stripe pattern.

In this way, in the operation support performance executed after the final development in the reach performance is completed, the selection ratio of the character form indicating a high expectation of a jackpot increases compared to the operation support performance executed before the final development is completed (the selection ratio of green characters increases from 3% to 50%).
, the selection rate of red characters increases from 2% to 25%). Thus, by displaying a character pattern indicating a high expectation of a big win, it is possible to have a stronger expectation that a big win will be announced at the current development stage. On the other hand, after the final development in the reach performance is completed, the selection rate of character patterns indicating a high expectation of development drops significantly (the selection rate of black stripe patterns drops from 45% to 5%, and the selection rate of red stripe patterns drops from 5% to 0%).
Therefore, the less the character pattern indicating a high expectation of development is displayed, the more likely it is that the lottery result will be notified at the current development stage.
This can increase the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 234(c), as a regulation content corresponding to a player with a medium operation frequency, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set to the range of "0 to 399" and the character pattern is set to "white" (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234(c)).
The character style "blue" is associated with the range of "9" (see FIG. 234(c)).
222fa2b), the range of "680 to 879" is associated with "green" as a character mode (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234(c)), and the range of "880 to 979" is associated with "red" as a character mode (see 222fa2d in FIG. 234(c)).
For the range of "980 to 999", "stripes (black)" is associated with the character pattern.
No value of ea is associated (pressing the center button CB will not set the red stripe pattern).

In other words, even when a player with a medium frequency of operation is playing, the selection ratio of character patterns indicating a high expectation of a jackpot increases in the operation support effect executed after the final development in the reach effect is completed, compared to the operation support effect executed before the final development is completed (the selection ratio of green characters increases from 1.2% to 20%, and the selection ratio of red characters increases from 0.
8%→10%), and the selection rate of the character pattern indicating a high expectation of development drops significantly (the selection rate of the black stripe pattern drops from 18%→2%, and the selection rate of the red stripe pattern drops from 2%→0%). By making it more difficult for the character pattern indicating a high expectation of development to appear, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special pattern will be notified at the current development stage. Also, by making it more easy for the character pattern indicating a high expectation of a jackpot to appear, it is possible to increase the expectation for a jackpot at the current development stage.

As shown in FIG. 234(c), as a regulation content corresponding to a player who operates frequently, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set to the range of "0 to 699" and the character pattern is set to "white" (see 222fa2a in FIG. 234(c)).
The character style "blue" is associated with the range of "
a2b), the range of "840 to 939" is associated with "green" as the character mode (see 222fa2c in FIG. 234(c)), the range of "940 to 989" is associated with "red" as the character mode (see 222fa2d in FIG. 234(c)), and the range of "990 to 999" is associated with "stripes (black)".
(Even if the center button CB is pressed, the red stripe pattern is not set.)

That is, even when a player who frequently performs operations is playing, the selection ratio of the character pattern indicating a high expectation of a jackpot increases in the operation support performance executed after the final development in the reach performance is completed, compared to the operation support performance executed before the final development is completed (the selection ratio of green characters increases from 0.6% to 20%, and the selection ratio of red characters increases from 0.4% to 10%).
→5%), and the selection rate of the character pattern that indicates high expectation of development drops significantly (selection rate of black stripe pattern increases from 9% to 1%, and selection rate of red stripe pattern drops from 1% to 2%).
% → 0%). By making it more difficult for the character pattern indicating a high expectation of development to appear, the player can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility that the lottery result of the special symbol will be notified at the current development stage. Also, by making it more easy for the character pattern indicating a high expectation of a jackpot to appear,
It can increase the expectation of hitting the jackpot at the current development stage.

Next, referring to FIG. 235(a), the above-mentioned table 222fa for loss (before development is completed) is
The details of the table 222fa3 for failure (before the completion of development) are described below. As described above, the table 222fa3 for failure (before the completion of development) is a data table that is referenced when selecting a character mode in an operation support performance that is performed during the execution of a variable display (variable performance) corresponding to a failure and before the final development timing in the reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 235(a), as the regulation contents corresponding to the player who operates infrequently, the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea is regulated to correspond to the range of "0 to 99" as the character mode of "white" (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235(a)), and the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea is regulated to correspond to the range of "100 to 479" as the character mode of "blue" (see 222fa3b in FIG. 235(a)).
235(a) 222fa3c, the range of "480 to 494" is associated with "green" as the character mode (see 222fa3c in FIG. 235(a) ), the range of "495 to 499" is associated with "red" as the character mode (see 222fa3d in FIG. 235(a) ), and
The character style "Stripe (black)" is defined to correspond to the range of "～949" (
235(a) 222fa3e), and the range of "950 to 999" is associated with "stripe (red)" as a character mode (see 222fa3e in FIG. 235(a)).
See f.

In this way, in the case where the operation support effect is executed before the final development is completed in the variable effect corresponding to the miss, the winning (before development is completed) table 222fa1 (FIG. 234(b)
The selection ratio of the character form indicating a high expectation of a big win is lower than when the table 222fa1 for winning (before the development is completed) is referenced (the selection ratio of green characters is reduced from 3% to 1.5%, and the selection ratio of red characters is reduced from 2% to 0.5%). In contrast, the selection ratio of the character form indicating a high expectation of development is the same as when the winning (before the development is completed) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 234(b)) is referenced. By making the selection ratio of the character form indicating a high expectation of development common in both the case of a big win and a miss before the final development is completed, the selection ratio of each character form can be made almost common. Therefore, in both the case of a miss and a win, the character form indicating a high expectation of a win is difficult to select until the final development is completed, and as a result, the expectation of a big win can be sustained until the final development is completed.

As shown in FIG. 235(a), as a regulation content corresponding to a player with a medium operation frequency, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set to the range of "0 to 599" and the character pattern is set to "white" (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235(a)).
The character style "blue" is defined as corresponding to the range of "1" (see FIG. 235(a)).
222fa3b), the range of "792 to 797" is associated with "green" as a character mode (see 222fa3c in FIG. 235(a)), and the range of "798, 799" is associated with "red" as a character mode (see 222fa3d in FIG. 235(a)).
In FIG. 235(a) 222f a3 e, the range of “800 to 979” is associated with the character mode “stripes (black)” (see FIG. 235(a) 222f a3 e), and the range of “980 to 999” is associated with the character mode “stripes (red)” (see FIG. 235(a) 222f a3 e).
See 22fa3f).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 235(a), as a regulation content corresponding to a player who operates frequently, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set to the range of "0 to 799" and the character pattern is set to "white" (see 222fa3a in FIG. 235(a)).
The character style "blue" is associated with the range of "1" in FIG. 235(a) (222f).
a3b), and the range of "896 to 898" is associated with "green" as the character mode (see 222fa3c in FIG. 235(a)).
"Red" is specified in correspondence with "900 to 989" (see 222fa3d in FIG. 235(a)).
The character style "Stripe (black)" is defined as corresponding to the range of "
(a) 222fa3e), and "stripe (red)" is associated with the range of "990 to 999" as a character style (see 222fa3f in FIG. 235(a)).
.

In this way, even in the losing (before development is complete) table 222fa3, the more frequently a player operates, the lower the selection rate of character patterns indicating a high expectation of a jackpot or a high expectation of development. This makes it possible to prevent the number of times each character pattern appears in one operation support performance from differing greatly, and to prevent the expectation from varying depending on the playing method. Therefore, a more suitable performance mode can be realized.

Next, referring to FIG. 235(b), the above-mentioned table 222fa for loss (after development completion) is
The details of the table 222fa4 for failure (after completion of development) are described below. As described above, the table 222fa4 for failure (after completion of development) is a data table that is referenced when selecting a character mode in an operation support performance that is executed after the final development timing in the reach performance, during the execution of a variable display (variable performance) corresponding to a failure.

As shown in FIG. 235(b), as the regulation contents corresponding to the player who operates infrequently, the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea is regulated to correspond to the range of “0 to 254” as the character mode of “white” (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235(b)), and the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea is regulated to correspond to the range of “255 to 754” as the character mode of “blue” (see 222fa4 in FIG. 235(b)).
235(b) 222fa4c), the range of "755 to 944" is associated with "green" as a character mode (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235(b) 222fa4d), the range of "945 to 949" is associated with "red" as a character mode (see 222fa4d in FIG. 235(b) 222fa4e), and the range of "95
The character pattern "stripes (black)" is associated with the range of "0 to 999" (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235(b)). On the other hand, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is not associated with the character pattern "stripes (red)" (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235(b)).
) see 222f4f.

In this way, in the case where the operation support effect is executed after the final development is completed in the variable effect corresponding to the miss, the winning (after development completion) table 222fa2 (FIG. 234(c)
The selection rate of the character pattern indicating a high expectation of a big win is lower than when the "selection rate of green characters" is referenced (50% → 19%, and the selection rate of red characters is 25% → 0.5%).
(The ratio of selection of character patterns indicating a high expectation of development is the same as that when the winning (after development completion) table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234(c)) is referenced, with black striped character patterns being selected at a rate of 5% and red striped character patterns not being selected. In other words, character patterns with a high expectation of development are rarely selected.
After the final development is completed, the selection ratio of the character pattern indicating the high expectation of development in both the case of a big win and a loss is set to a common low probability (5%), so that the player can recognize that the presentation will not develop any further (i.e., the lottery result of the special symbol will be announced at the current development stage). Therefore, the player can pay more attention to the combination of the third symbol displayed in the stopped state while playing the game.

As shown in FIG. 235(b), as a regulation content corresponding to a player with a medium operation frequency, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set to the range of "0 to 699" and the character pattern is set to "white" (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235(b)).
The character style "blue" is associated with the range of "9" (see FIG. 235(b)).
222fa4b), the range of "900 to 977" is associated with "green" as a character mode (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235(b)), and the range of "978, 979" is associated with "red" as a character mode (see 222fa4d in FIG. 235(b)).
For the range of "980 to 999", "stripes (black)" is associated with the character style (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235(b)). On the other hand, "stripes (red)"
The value of the effect selection counter 223ea is not associated with the character form of
(See 222fa4f in paragraph 35(b) of this Act).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 235(b), as a regulation content corresponding to a player who operates frequently, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set to the range of "0 to 849" and the character pattern is set to "white" (see 222fa4a in FIG. 235(b)).
The character style "blue" is associated with the range of "
a4b), and the range of "950 to 988" is associated with "green" as the character mode (see 222fa4c in FIG. 235(b)).
"Red" is specified in correspondence with "990 to 999" (see 222fa4d in FIG. 235(b)).
The character pattern "STRIPES (BLACK)" is associated with the range of "STRIPES (RED)" and is stipulated as a character pattern (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235(b)). On the other hand, the value of the effect selection counter 223ea is not associated with the character pattern "STRIPES (RED)" (see 222fa4e in FIG. 235(b)).
See fa4f).

Therefore, even in the losing (after development) table 222fa4, the more frequently a player operates, the lower the selection rate of the character pattern indicating a high expectation of a big win or a high expectation of development. This makes it possible to prevent the number of times each character pattern appears in one operation support performance from differing greatly, and to prevent the expectation from varying depending on the playing method. Therefore, a more suitable performance mode can be realized.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, the operation support performance is configured to be executed multiple times for the same variation performance (variation display), and the selection ratio of the character form displayed when the player presses the center button CB is variable depending on the timing of the operation support performance (before or after all developments are completed). More specifically, in the operation support performance executed before all developments are completed, the ratio of the character form (black stripe pattern or red stripe pattern) that has a high expectation of development is high regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern, while the ratio of the character form that has a high expectation of a jackpot is extremely low. As a result, in the operation support performance executed before the final development is completed, there is almost no difference in the character form displayed in the case of a jackpot or a miss, so that the player can play the game without losing his expectation of a jackpot at least until the final development is completed. In addition, although the selection ratio of the character form that has a high expectation of a jackpot is low, the expectation of a jackpot increases when it is selected, so that the center button CB can be pressed in the expectation that the character form that has a high expectation of a jackpot will be displayed in each operation support performance. This can increase the player's motivation to participate in the operation support effects. Also, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the player presses the center button CB in the operation support effects is counted, and the average number of operations in one operation support effect is calculated. Then, the selection ratio of each character pattern per press of the center button CB is varied according to the average number of operations. That is, when a player who presses the button infrequently is playing, the selection ratio of character patterns indicating a high expectation of a jackpot or a high expectation of development is increased, whereas when a player who presses the button frequently is playing, the selection ratio of character patterns indicating a high expectation of a jackpot or a high expectation of development is increased.
The selection ratio of the character pattern indicating high expectation of development is made low. By configuring in this way, the number of times the character pattern indicating high expectation is displayed in the operation support presentation can be made equal regardless of the player's operation tendency, thereby realizing a more suitable presentation.

Next, referring to FIG. 236 and FIG. 237, the above-mentioned mini character performance selection table 22
The details of 2fb will be described. FIG. 236(a) shows the mini character performance selection table 222
236(a), the mini character performance selection table 222fb is composed of at least three data tables: a V challenge small win table 222fb1, which is referred to in order to determine whether or not a mini character preview performance can be performed in a variable display corresponding to a V challenge small win, and to determine the action timing; a normal small win table 222fb2, which is referred to in order to determine whether or not a mini character preview performance can be performed in a variable display corresponding to a normal small win, and to determine the action timing; and a non-small win table 222fb3, which is referred to in order to determine whether or not a mini character preview performance can be performed in a variable display corresponding to a lottery result other than a small win, and to determine the action timing.

First, referring to Fig. 236 (b), the details of the V challenge small win table 222fb1 will be described. As described above, the V challenge small win table 222fb1 is a table for determining whether or not a mini character preview performance is to be performed in the variable display corresponding to the V challenge small win.
As shown in FIG. 236(b), the V Challenge small win table 222fb1 is a data table in which data for determining the action timing is specified.
For each variation type, a corresponding range of the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea and a performance mode of the mini-character preview performance are specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 236(b), for the variation type (variation pattern) of the normal reach, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set to the range of “0 to 99” in association with no mini character preview performance (see 222fb1a in FIG. 236(b)).
A low expectation mini character preview performance (see FIG. 230(c)) is associated with the range of "0 to 399" (see 222fb1b in FIG. 236(b)), and a medium expectation mini character preview performance (see FIG. 231(b)) is associated with the range of "400 to 699" (
236(b) 222fb1c), and for the range of "700 to 999", a mini character preview performance with high expectation (see FIG. 231(d)) is associated and stipulated (see FIG. 236(b)
)See 222fb1d.

As shown in FIG. 236(b), for the variation types (variation patterns) of the super reach and the special reach, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set in the range of "0 to 99" in association with no mini character preview performance (222fb in FIG. 236(b)).
1e), and for the range of "100 to 149" there is a low expectation mini character preview (see FIG. 23
0(c)) is specified in correspondence with the "15
A mini-character preview performance with a medium expectation level (see FIG. 231(b)) is defined in association with the range of "0 to 649" (see 222fb1g in FIG. 236(b)), and a mini-character preview performance with a high expectation level (see FIG. 231(d)) is defined in association with the range of "650 to 999" (see 222fb1h in FIG. 236(b)).

That is, the variable type that develops into a reach with a higher expectation is configured so that the mini character preview performance with a higher expectation is more likely to be selected. In particular, by configuring the selection ratio of the mini character preview performance with a higher expectation to be increased in the reach performance with a higher expectation, the possibility of setting the high expectation action timing in the development stage with a higher expectation can be increased. As described above, when the first action with a high expectation is set, the mini character MC performs the first action across the timing of development into the reach performance with a higher expectation. And, each action of the mini character MC is configured so that it is not terminated midway (i.e., the action is set so that the change time does not pass in the middle of the action of the mini character MC). Therefore, it is possible to make a player who understands the specification and plays the game sense that it will develop before it develops into the reach performance with a high expectation. However, even if the first action with a high expectation is executed at a relatively low expectation development stage and the development can be sensed, the possibility of the lottery result of the special pattern being notified at the development stage with a low expectation increases, so the expectation for the V Challenge small win cannot be increased much. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the rate at which high expectation actions are executed is increased for variable types with higher expectations. This allows the player to sense in advance that the reach effect will develop into an even higher expectation effect when the reach effect has developed to a high expectation development stage. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned normal small win table 222fb2 will be described with reference to Fig. 237(a). Fig. 237(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal small win table 222fb2. As described above, the normal small win table 222fb2 is
This is a data table that specifies data for determining whether or not a mini-character preview performance can be executed in a variable display corresponding to a normal small win, and for determining the timing of the action.

As shown in FIG. 237(a), for the normal reach fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern), the value of the effect selection counter 223ea is set to the range of "0 to 499" in association with no mini character preview effect (see 222fb2a in FIG. 237(a)).
A mini character preview performance with a low expectation level (see FIG. 230(b)) is associated with the range of "900 to 989" (see 222fb2b in FIG. 237(a)), and a mini character preview performance with a medium expectation level (see FIG. 231(a)) is associated with the range of "900 to 989" (see FIG. 237(a)).
(a) 222fb2c), and for the range of "990 to 999", a mini character preview performance with high expectation (see FIG. 231(c)) is associated and stipulated (see FIG. 237(a) 222fb2c).
See fb2d).

As shown in FIG. 237(a), for the variation types (variation patterns) of the super reach and the special reach, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set in the range of "0 to 99" in association with no mini character preview performance (222fb in FIG. 237(a)).
2e), and for the range of "100 to 799", a mini character preview with low expectation (see FIG. 23
0(b)) is specified in correspondence with the "80
A mini-character preview performance with a medium expectation level (see FIG. 231(a)) is defined in correspondence with the range of "0 to 949" (see 222fb2g in FIG. 237(a)), and a mini-character preview performance with a high expectation level (see FIG. 231(c)) is defined in correspondence with the range of "950 to 999" (see 222fb2h in FIG. 237(a)).

Therefore, when a normal small win occurs and the normal reach variation type is selected, the execution rate of the mini character preview performance becomes lower (90% → 50%) compared to the V Challenge small win.
%), and even if it is executed, it will almost certainly result in a mini-character preview performance with a low expectation level.
Therefore, when a mini character preview performance with a medium or high expectation is executed in a normal reach variation pattern, the player's expectation for a V Challenge small win can be improved. Also, when a normal small win occurs and a super reach or special reach variation type is selected, the execution rate of the mini character preview performance itself is the same, but the selection rate of a mini character preview performance with a medium or high expectation is lower. Therefore, when a mini character preview performance with a medium or high expectation is executed, the player's expectation for a V Challenge small win can be improved.

Next, referring to Fig. 237(b), the details of the non-small win table 222fb3 will be described. Fig. 237(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the non-small win table 222fb3. As described above, the non-small win table 222fb3 is a data table in which the data for determining whether or not to execute the mini character preview performance in the variable display corresponding to the lottery result other than the small win and the action timing are specified.

As shown in Figure 237 (b), for a long miss fluctuation type (fluctuation pattern), a value of the performance selection counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 949" is associated with no mini-character preview performance (see 222fb3a in Figure 237 (b)), and a value in the range of "950 to 999" is associated with a low expectation mini-character preview performance (see Figure 230 (b)) (see 222fb3b in Figure 237 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 237(b), for the normal reach variation type (variation pattern), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set to the range of “0 to 599” in association with no mini character preview performance (see 222fb3c in FIG. 237(b)).
A mini character preview performance with a low expectation level (see FIG. 230(b)) is associated with the range of “949” (see 222fb3d in FIG. 237(b)), and a mini character preview performance with a medium expectation level (see FIG. 231(a)) is associated with the range of “950 to 998” (see FIG. 231(a)).
37(b) 222fb3e), and a mini character preview performance with high expectation (see FIG. 231(c)) is associated with "999" (see 222fb3f in FIG. 237(b)).
reference).

As shown in FIG. 237(b), for the variation types (variation patterns) of the super reach and the special reach, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is set in the range of "0 to 399" in association with no mini character preview performance (222f in FIG. 237(b)).
b3g), and for the range of "400 to 899", a mini character preview with low expectation (Figure 2
30(b)) is specified in correspondence with the 9
A mini-character preview performance with a medium expectation level (see FIG. 231(a)) is defined in association with the range of "00 to 979" (see 222fb3i in FIG. 237(b)), and a mini-character preview performance with a high expectation level (see FIG. 231(c)) is defined in association with the range of "980 to 999" (see 222fb3j in FIG. 237(b)).

Therefore, when the result of the lottery is other than a small win, the execution rate of the mini character preview performance is lower than in the case of a normal small win, and the selection rate of the mini character preview performance for medium expectation or high expectation is also lower. As a result, the possibility that the result of the lottery is at least a small win (V Challenge small win or normal small win) is high at the time when the mini character preview performance is executed, so that the player's expectation for the small win game can be improved by executing the mini character preview performance.

In the eleventh embodiment, the third action (see FIG. 228(b)) is executed in the mini character preview performance only in the case of a V Challenge small win, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third action may be executed even in the case of a normal small win, and the display content of the third symbol display device 81 may be set to a display mode in which only a small win is confirmed (for example, an action in which the mini character MC falls together with a symbol with the word "small win" displayed). By configuring in this way, when the mini character MC executes the third action, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which it is possible to predict whether it is a V Challenge small win or a normal small win from the content of the action. That is, similar to the selection performance (see FIG. 216) in the tenth embodiment described above, a novel gameplay in which the type of small win is predicted and the launch direction is switched according to the prediction result can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the details of the small win effect selection table 222fc described above will be described with reference to FIG. 238. FIG. 238(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the small win effect selection table 222fc. As shown in FIG. 238, the small win effect selection table 222fc
In the case where the small win H14 to J14 occurs during the time-saving state of the normal pattern, a table 222fc1 for the small win H14 to J14 is provided for selecting whether or not the central route suggestion performance (see FIG. 232(b)) can be performed and the timing of the performance is selected. In the case where the small win K14 to M14 occurs during the time-saving state of the normal pattern, a table 222fc2 for the small win H14 to J14 is provided for selecting whether or not the central route suggestion performance (see FIG. 232(b)) can be performed and the timing of the performance is selected.
) and a table 222fc2 for small wins K14 to M14 for selecting whether or not to execute the small win K14 to M14 and the execution timing.

First, referring to FIG. 238(b), the details of the table 222fc1 for small wins H14 to J14 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 238(b), small wins H14 to J1
In the table 222fc1 for 4, a range of values of the effect lottery counter 223ea is specified in association with each execution timing of the central route suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 238(b), for the value of the effect selection counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 599", the "V winning rate 50% period" is associated with the timing of executing the central route suggestion effect (see 222fc1a in FIG. 238(b)). Since the effect selection counter 223ea can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", the small winnings H14 to J1
When any of the above occurs, the ratio (probability) of the central route suggestion effect being executed only during the period when the V winning rate is 50% (i.e., the period when the game ball that enters the lottery device 6755 is more likely to be distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f) is 60% (600/1000).

Also, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “600 to 7
For the range of "49", the timing of the central route suggestion performance is "V winning rate 100%
% period" is specified in correspondence with the small win H14 to J14 (see 222fc1b in FIG. 238(b)). Therefore, when any of the small wins H14 to J14 occurs, the ratio (probability) of the central route suggestion effect being executed only during the period of 100% V winning rate (i.e., the period during which the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 is likely to be distributed to the right V winning hole 6755bV) is 15% (150/100).
In other words, if you win the small win H14 to J14, the distribution rotor 6
The central route suggestion effect, which suggests the timing when the game ball is likely to flow down to 755f (the central route is likely to flow down), can be executed even when the game ball is not likely to flow down the central route.
This is because whether the ball enters the lottery device 6755 or the right V winning hole 6755bV, the time-saving jackpot will be reached. In other words, even if the ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the central route suggestion performance, if the game ball enters the right V winning hole 6755bV, which has a low expectation of entering the time-saving state (only 39% of the time-saving state occurs) because the basic performance rule that the game ball is distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f is violated, a novel behavior can be realized in which the time-saving state is confirmed after the jackpot ends. Therefore, if the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the central route suggestion performance enters the right V winning hole 6755bV (i.e., if behavior that violates the basic performance rule of the central route suggestion performance occurs),
In addition, the player can be assured that the time-saving state will be granted, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is "750 to 7
For the "50% V winning rate period" range, "both periods" (both periods of the V winning rate period of 50% and the V winning rate period of 100%) are associated and stipulated as the timing for executing the central route suggestion effect (see 222fc1c in FIG. 238(b)). Therefore, when any of the small wins H14 to J14 occurs, the ratio (probability) that the central route suggestion effect will be executed in both the V winning rate period of 50% and the V winning rate period of 100% is 5% (50/1000). By executing the central route suggestion effect in both periods, it is possible to make the player feel as if there is an increased chance of entering the time-saving state compared to normal. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 238(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “800 to 9
For the range of ".99", "non-execution" is associated with it.
When the result is any of J14 to J14, the rate (probability) of the central route suggestion effect not being executed is 20% (200/1000). By providing a configuration in which the central route suggestion effect is not executed even if a small jackpot is won, it is possible to configure a configuration in which an event occurs in which the game ball flows down to the distribution rotor 6755f or enters the right V winning hole 6755bV and a time-saving state is granted, even if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is not being executed. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion effect is not being executed, the player can expect a time-saving state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 238(c), the above-mentioned small win K14 to M14 table 222
Details of the small win K14 to M14 table 222fc2 will be described. Figure 238 (c) is a diagram showing the contents of the small win K14 to M14 table 222fc2. As shown in Figure 238 (c),
In the table 222fc2 for 4 to M14, the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is "0 to
For the range of "949", the timing of the central route suggestion is "V winning rate 5.949".
The performance lottery counter 223ea can take 1000 values from "0 to 999", so when any of the small wins K14 to M14 occurs, during the V winning rate 50% period (i.e., the lottery device 6
The ratio (probability) at which the central route suggestion effect is executed only during the period when a game ball that has entered 755 is more likely to be distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f is 95% (950/1000).

As shown in FIG. 238(c), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is "950 to 999".
For the range, "non-execution" is associated with it.
If either M14 or M15 occurs, the probability that the central route suggestion will not be executed is 5.
% (50/1000). By providing a configuration in which the central route suggestion performance is not executed even if a small prize is won, it is possible to configure a configuration in which, even if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion performance is not being executed, the game ball flows down to the distribution rotor 6755f, or enters the right V winning hole 6755bV and a time-saving state is granted. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 while the central route suggestion performance is not being executed, the player can expect a time-saving state, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, the V winning rate is synchronized with the period in which the V winning rate is 50% or the period in which the V winning rate is 100% in the type of small winning that becomes a time-saving big winning by the occurrence of the V winning,
By configuring in this way, if a game ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the central route suggestion performance, it is distributed to the distribution rotor 6755f and becomes a 16-round time-saving jackpot with a 1/2 ratio, or the right V winning port 6755bV
Since the ball enters the lottery device 6755 and a time-saving jackpot occurs, the player can play the game in the strong hope of getting the game ball to enter the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the central route suggestion performance. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the timing of the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 and the execution status of the central route suggestion performance (the display mode of the third symbol display device 81) are compared to predict whether or not the time-saving state will occur, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 233(b), the voice lamp control device 11 in the eleventh embodiment will be described.
The details of the RAM 223 provided in the first embodiment will now be described.
233(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment is the same as that of the RAM 223 in the tenth embodiment.
For the configuration of the AM 223 (see FIG. 196), a performance timing storage area 223fa and
The operation valid period flag 223fb, the support performance flag 223fc, and the development completion flag 22
3fd, a press count counter 223fe, an operation frequency flag 223ff, a mini character flag 223fg, an action timing storage area 223fh, an action counter 223fi, a restricted period flag 223fj, and a restricted period counter 223fk have been added.

The effect timing storage area 223fa is a storage area for temporarily storing data indicating the execution timing of the central route suggestion effect determined at the start of the small win in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, at least until the central route suggestion effect is actually started. For example, a 1-byte storage area is allocated to this effect timing storage area 223fa, and when "00H" is stored as data, it indicates that the central route suggestion effect is not executed, when "01H" is stored, it indicates that the central route suggestion effect is executed only in the period of 50% V winning rate, when "02H" is stored, it indicates that the central route suggestion effect is executed only in the period of 100% V winning rate, when "03H" is stored, it indicates that the central route suggestion effect is executed in both the period of 50% V winning rate and the period of 100% V winning rate. The initial value of this effect timing storage area 223fa is set to "00H". At the start of the small win (when the small win type command is received), the effect timing according to the small win type is determined from the small win time effect selection table 222fc, and data corresponding to the determined effect timing is stored (S4100 in FIG. 250).
See 6.) Also, it is reset to "00H" when the small win ends.

The operation valid period flag 223fb is a flag indicating whether or not the operation of the center button CB is valid. If the operation valid period flag 223fb is on, it means that the operation is valid. That is, when the player presses the center button CB, a character mode is selected by lottery using the character mode selection table 222fa, and a character image 814 of the character mode determined by lottery is displayed. The operation valid period flag 223fb is initially set to off, and is set to on at the start of the execution period of each operation support effect in the variable effect (variable display) in which the operation support effect is set (see S40405 in FIG. 243). Also, it is set to off at the end timing of the operation support effect (see S40408 in FIG. 243).

The support performance flag 223fc is a flag indicating whether or not a change performance (change display) in which an operation support performance is set is being executed, and if it is on, it indicates that a change performance in which an operation support performance is set is being executed. This support performance flag 223fc is set to on when a change display performance accompanied by an operation support performance is determined (see S41201 in FIG. 253). Also, it is set to off when the change is stopped.

The development completion flag 223fd is a flag indicating whether the development has been completed to the final stage in the change display. That is, in the case of a normal reach change pattern, it indicates whether the development has been completed to the normal reach, in the case of a super reach change pattern, it indicates whether the development has been completed to the super reach, and in the case of a special reach change pattern, it indicates whether the development has been completed to the special reach. When this development completion flag 223fd is on, it means that the development to the final stage in the change display has been completed, and when it is off, it means that the development to the final stage in the change display is not completed. The development completion flag 223fd is initially set to off, and is set to on at the timing when the development to the final stage in each change performance is performed (see S40504, S40508 in FIG. 244). It is also set to off when the change stops. When the center button CB is pressed during the execution of the operation support performance, the development completion flag 223fd is referenced to determine whether the development is completed or not, and depending on the determination result, one of the four data tables defined in the character mode selection table 222fa is determined as the table for selecting the character mode (S40604, S40605, S40607, S40608 in FIG. 245).
reference).

The press count counter 223fe is a counter that counts the number of times the center button CB is pressed in one variable display effect in which an operation support effect is set.
fe is initially set to 0, and the center button C
Each time B is pressed (a press is detected), the value is updated by incrementing it by 1 (S
The value of the pressing count counter 223fe is held until the next execution of the variable display effect in which the operation support effect is set is set, and based on the held counter value,
After determining the previous player's operation tendency (average number of operations in the operation support performance 1), the value is reset to 0 (see S41209 in FIG. 253).
The tendency of the player's operation determined based on the operation frequency flag 223f described later is
When determining the character mode based on the operation of the center button CB by the player in the operation support performance, a data table corresponding to the operation frequency of the player indicated by the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is selected from the character mode selection table 222fa, and the character mode is determined using the selected table (see S40609 in FIG. 245).

The operation frequency flag 223ff is a flag in which data indicating the operation tendency (operation frequency) of the player is set. This operation frequency flag 223ff is composed of 1 byte and is set to "00H".
If it is "01H", it indicates that a player who operates frequently is playing. If it is "01H",
This indicates that a player with a medium operation frequency is playing, and if it is "02H", it indicates that a player with a low operation frequency is playing. This operation frequency flag 223ff is initially set to "00H", and at the start of the variable display with the operation support performance set, the pressing tendency of the player (average number of operations) determined based on the pressing number counter 223fe is
The state is set according to the request (see S41205, S41207, and S41208 in FIG. 253).

The mini character flag 223fg is a flag indicating whether or not a variable display performance in which a mini character preview performance is set is being performed. If it is on, it indicates that a variable display in which a mini character preview performance is set is being performed, whereas if it is off, it indicates that a mini character preview performance is not set. This mini character flag 223fg is set to on when the execution of a mini character preview performance is determined by lottery using the mini character performance selection table 222fb (see FIG. 236(a)) at the start of the variable display performance (S41309 in FIG. 254). Also, it is set to off at the end of the variable display in which a mini character preview performance is set.

The action timing storage area 223fh is a memory area in which data indicating the execution timing of each action in the mini character preview performance is stored. The action timing storage area 223fh includes a mini character performance selection table 222fb (FIG. 236 (a
When it is determined that a mini character preview performance is to be performed based on the determined type (expectation level) of the mini character preview performance, data indicating the execution timing corresponding to the determined type (expectation level) of the mini character preview performance is stored (see FIG. 2
(See S41310 in 54.) During the execution of the variable display performance in which the mini character preview performance is set,
Based on the data stored in this action timing storage area 223fh, the execution timing of each action is determined, and the execution of each action is set (see S40705 in FIG. 246).

The action counter 223fi is a counter in which a value indicating the stage of the action of the mini character preview performance is set. The value of this action counter 223fi is incremented by 1 each time the action stage advances by one in the mini character preview performance (S40 in FIG. 246).
(See S40704 in FIG. 246.) When it is time to start a new action in the mini character preview performance, an action is set according to the counter value of this action counter 223fi (See S40705 in FIG. 246).

The limited period flag 223fj is a flag indicating whether or not it is a non-effect button limited period (a period from 1 second before the start of the operation valid period to 1 second after the end of the period), and if it is on, it indicates that it is a non-effect button limited period, while if it is off, it indicates that it is not a non-effect button limited period. This limited period flag 223fj is set to on at the timing 1 second before each operation support performance (operation valid period) starts in a variable display in which an operation support performance is set (see S40905 in FIG. 248), and is set to off at the timing 1 second after the operation support performance ends (see S40903 in FIG. 248). While this limited period flag 223fj is on, even if a non-effect button is operated, the change of the setting corresponding to the operated button is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent various settings from being changed against the player's will when a player who is trying to operate the center button CB during the operation support performance accidentally presses a non-performance button, and also makes the player realize that he or she made an operation error (pressed the wrong type of button) because the performance mode corresponding to the operation was not displayed. This makes it possible to more suitably execute the operation support performance. Here, the reason why the setting change based on the operation of the non-performance button is restricted not only during the operation valid period but also for one second before and after the operation valid period is to cope with the case where a player who senses that the operation valid period is about to start and starts operating a button before the operation valid period starts, or a player who continues to operate without noticing that the operation valid period has ended, makes an erroneous operation. This makes it possible to further reduce the possibility that the setting change is made against the player's will.

The limited period counter 223fk is a counter for counting the number of times the non-effect button is pressed (operated) during one non-effect button limited period. In the present eleventh embodiment, unless the non-effect button is operated two or more times during the non-effect button limited period, the setting change corresponding to the type of the pressed button is not performed. In other words, when the value of the limited period counter 223fk is 1 or less, the setting change of the light amount or sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 is avoided (limited). By configuring in this way, when a player who tries to participate in the operation support performance by pressing the center button CB during the operation valid period and the period of one second before and after the period accidentally presses a non-effect button arranged in the vicinity of the center button CB (within a range of a predetermined distance), the setting of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from being changed against the player's will. Therefore, the player can be more concentrated on the operation support performance, and a preferable performance mode can be realized.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 239 and FIG. 240, the main control device 1 in the eleventh embodiment will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the 10th embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 239, the small win start process 14 (S271) in the 11th embodiment will be described. This small win start process 14 (S271) is a process executed in place of the small win start process (see FIG. 199) in the 10th embodiment, and is a process for setting the start of a small win when a small win is obtained by drawing a special pattern, similar to the small win start process (see FIG. 199) in the 10th embodiment.

In the small win start process 14 (see FIG. 239) in the eleventh embodiment, S150
In each process of S1501 to S1503, the small win start process in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 1
The same processes as those in S1501 to S1503 of the 11th embodiment (see FIG. 99) are executed.
In the small win start process 14 (see FIG. 239) in the embodiment, when the process of S1503 is completed, a small win type command indicating the type of small win to be started this time is set (S15
11), and ends this process. The small win type command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process 13 (see FIG. 201) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a small win type command in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, it determines whether or not to execute the central route suggestion performance and the execution timing according to the small win type notified by the command.

Next, referring to FIG. 240, the small win control process 14 (S10) in the eleventh embodiment will be described.
This small win control process 14 (S1081) is a process executed in place of the small win control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the tenth embodiment.
Similar to the small win control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the embodiment, this is a process for executing various controls during small win play.

In the small win control process 14 (see FIG. 240) in the eleventh embodiment, S130
In each process of S1301 to S1304, S1310, S1311, and S1321 to S1326, the small win control process 13 (see FIG. 203) in the tenth embodiment is performed.
The same processes as those in S1304, S1310, S1311, and S1321 to S1326 are executed.

In addition, in the small win control process 14 (see FIG. 240) in the eleventh embodiment, S13
In the process of 04, when it is determined that the small win flag 203ea is on (S1
304: Yes), and then each operating member of the lottery device 6755 (small winning attacker 67
If it is determined that it is time to operate any of the operating members (S1331: Yes), an operation content command indicating the type of operating member to be operated and its movable position (operation content) is set (S1332), and this process ends. The operation content command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the MP
External output processing (S1001) of main processing 13 (see FIG. 201) executed by U201
) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the operation content command in a state where the execution of the central route suggestion performance has been decided, the voice lamp control device 113 compares the operation content with the execution timing of the decided central route suggestion performance, and judges whether or not to start the central route suggestion performance.

By executing this small win control process 14 (see FIG. 240), the operation timing of each operating member can be accurately grasped, so the closing timing of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU (the start timing of the period with a 50% chance of winning the V prize) and the opening timing of the lower opening/closing door 6755bD (
The central route suggestion performance can be executed in precise synchronization with the start timing of the period with 100% V winning rate.

<Regarding control process of the voice lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figs. 241 to 254, the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described.
The main processing 14 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 34. The main processing 14 is executed in place of the main processing (see Fig. 34) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment).

In the main process 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, steps S4101 to S4103
In each of the processes of S4110 and S4114 to S4118, the same processes as those of S4101 to S4110 and S4114 to S4118 in the main process (see FIG. 34) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed. In the main process 14 (see FIG. 241) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S4110 is completed, the effect update process 14 is executed (S4191) instead of the effect update process (see FIG. 35) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 242, but this effect update process 14 is a process for updating the effect modes of various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the main process 14 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 241),
When step 4 (S4191) is completed, the controller 100 then monitors the operation (pressing) of non-performance buttons (buttons for changing the settings of the volume and the light intensity), and when the operation is detected, executes various setting button input monitoring processing to change the settings according to the type of the button that was operated (
For details of this various setting button input monitoring process (S4192), see FIG.
This will be described later with reference to 43.

Also, when the various setting button input monitoring process (S4192) is completed, next, instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 36) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), a command determination process 14 is executed (S4193), and then, instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), a variable display setting process 14 is executed (S4194), and the process proceeds to S4114. Details of the variable display setting process 14 will be described later with reference to FIG. 252.

Next, the above-mentioned effect update process 14 (S4191) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 242. Fig. 242 is a flowchart showing the effect update process 14 (S4191).
As described above, this effect update process 14 is a process for updating the effect modes of various effects. As shown in Fig. 242, when the effect update process 14 (S4191) is executed, an operation support effect process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the operation support effect is set is executed (S40301), and then a mini character setting process for updating the effect mode in the variable display in which the mini character preview effect is set is executed (S40302), and this process is terminated.
These operation support performance processing (S40301) and mini character setting processing (S40302)
The details of these will be described later with reference to Figures 243 to 245 and Figure 246, respectively.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned operation support performance process (S40301) will be described with reference to Fig. 243. Fig. 243 is a flowchart showing the operation support performance process. As described above, this operation support performance process (S40301) is a process for updating the performance mode in the variable display in which the operation support performance is set.

When the operation support effect process (see FIG. 243) is executed, first, the support effect flag 223fc
It is determined whether or not the switch is on (S40401). If it is determined that the switch is off (S404
If the answer is YES in S40401, the process is terminated because the display with the operation support effect is not being executed. On the other hand, if the support effect flag 223fc is determined to be ON in the process of S40401 (S40401: Yes), the process is then executed to determine the progress of the currently executed display (S40402).
When the process of S40402 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the operation valid period flag 223fb is on (S40402).
403), if it is determined that the operation valid period flag 223fb is not on (is off) (S40403: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the operation valid period (S4
0404). In the process of S40404, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the operation valid period (i.e., the start timing of the operation support effect) (S40404: Yes), the operation valid period flag 223fb is set to ON (S40405), the start of the operation support effect (see FIG. 224) is set (S40406), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S40404, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the operation valid period (the start timing of the operation support effect) (S40404: No), each process of S40405 and S40406 is skipped and this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S40403, if it is determined that the operation valid period flag 223fb is on (i.e., the operation support effect is being executed), (S40403: Yes
In the process of S40407, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the operation valid period (S40407: Yes), the operation valid period flag 22 is set to 0.
3fb is set to OFF (S40408), and the operation support performance is set to end (S40409).
), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S40407, if it is determined that the operation valid period has not ended (S40407: No), it is determined whether or not a press (operation) of the center button CB has been detected (S40410), and if it is determined that a press of the center button CB has been detected (S40410: Yes), a character mode setting process is executed to determine the character mode of the character image 814 to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on whether the special pattern was hit and the operation status of the player (S40411), and this process is terminated. This character mode setting process (S40411)
Details of step S40410 will be described later with reference to FIG. 245. On the other hand, if it is determined that the center button CB has not been pressed in step S40410 (S40410:
No), and then this process ends.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned development determination process (S40402) will be described with reference to FIG. 244. As described above, this development determination process (S40402) is a process for determining the development status of the variable performance being executed. When this development determination process (S40402) is executed,
First, it is determined whether the development completion flag 223fd is on or not (S40501). If it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is on (S40501: Yes), the currently executed variable presentation will not develop to any further stage of the reach presentation, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S40501, if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is off (S40501: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing for a reach to occur (development into a normal reach performance) (i.e., the timing 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) (S40502), and if it is determined that it is the timing for a reach to occur (S40502: Y
es), and then, it is determined whether the variation type being executed is the normal reach variation type (variation pattern) or not (S40503). In the process of S40503, if it is determined that the variation type (variation pattern) is the normal reach (S40503: Yes), this means that the development to the normal reach is the last development in the variation display, so the development completion flag 2 is set.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40503 that the variation type is not a normal reach (S40503: N
o), this means that the development to normal reach is not the final development (development to super reach or special reach remains), so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40502 that it is not the timing for a reach to occur (development into a normal reach presentation) (S40502: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the timing for development into a super reach presentation (i.e., the timing 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change) (S40505), and if it is determined that it is the timing for development into a super reach presentation (S40505: Yes), it is determined whether or not the currently executing change type is a super reach change type (S40506). If it is determined in the process of S40506 that it is a super reach change type (S40506: Yes), this means that the development into a super reach is the last development in the change display, so the development completion flag 22
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40506 that the variation type is not a Super Reach variation type (S40506: No),
), this means that the development to Super Reach is not the final development (development to Special Reach remains), so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S40505, if it is determined that it is not the timing to develop into the Super Reach performance (S40505: No), next, it is determined whether it is the timing to develop into the Special Reach performance (i.e., the timing when 60 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation) (S405
07), if it is determined that it is time to develop into a special reach performance (S405
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40507 that it is not the timing to develop into a special reach (S40507: No), the process is terminated.

By executing this development determination process, the development completion flag 223fd can be suitably updated according to the development status of the reach effect. Therefore, in the operation support effect, the character mode can be suitably set using the development status indicated by the development completion flag 223fd.

Next, the details of the character mode setting process (S40411) described above will be explained with reference to Fig. 245. As described above, this character mode setting process (S40411) is a process for determining the character mode of the character image 814 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to whether or not the special symbol is hit and the operation status of the player when the center button CB is pressed in the operation support performance.

When the character mode setting process (S40411) is executed, first, the pressing count counter 223f
The value of e is updated by adding 1 (S40601), and then it is determined whether the development completion flag 223fd is on or not (S40602). In the process of S40602, if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is off (S40602: No), it is next determined whether a variable display corresponding to a big win is being executed (S40603). If it is determined that a variable display corresponding to a big win is being executed (S40603: Yes), the winning (before development completion) table 222fa1 (see FIG. 234(b)) of the character mode selection table 222fa is updated to
The data is read as a data table for determining (by lottery) the character mode (S40604).
The process proceeds to S40609. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40603 that the variable display corresponding to the big win is not being executed (i.e., the variable display corresponding to the loss is being executed) (S40603: No), the table 222fa3 for loss (before the development is completed) of the character mode selection table 222fa (see FIG. 235(a)) is read as a data table for determining (drawing) the character mode (S40605), and the process proceeds to S40609.

On the other hand, in the process of S40602, if it is determined that the development completion flag 223fd is on (S40602: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a variable display corresponding to a big win is being executed (S40606). If it is determined that a variable display corresponding to a big win is being executed (S40606: Yes), the winning (after development completion) table 222fa2 (see FIG. 234(c)) of the character mode selection table 222fa is read out as a data table for determining (lottery) the character mode (S40607, and the process proceeds to S40609. On the other hand, in the process of S40606, if it is determined that a variable display corresponding to a big win is not being executed (i.e., a variable display corresponding to a loss is being executed) (S40606: No),
o), the table 222fa4 for the out-of-character (after development) of the character mode selection table 222fa (
See FIG. 235(b) as a data table for determining (selecting) the character mode (S40608), and the process proceeds to S40609.

In the process of S40609, which is executed after each of the processes of S40604, S40605, S40607, and S40608 is completed, the character pattern is identified from the data table read in the immediately previous process according to the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea and the operation frequency corresponding to the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff (S40609), the display of the lines (character image 814) of the identified character pattern is set (S40610), and this process is terminated.

By executing this character pattern setting process (see FIG. 245) each time the center button CB is pressed while the operation support effect is being executed, an appropriate character pattern can be set according to the results of the special pattern lottery, the development status of the variable display, and the frequency of operation by the player.

Next, the above-mentioned mini character setting process (S40302) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 246. As described above, this mini character setting process (S40302) is a process for updating the performance mode in the variable display in which the mini character preview performance is set. When this mini character setting process (S40302) is executed, first, it is determined whether the mini character flag 223fg is on or not (S40701). If it is determined that the mini character flag 223fg is not on (off) (S40701: No), this means that the variable display in which the mini character preview performance is set is not being executed, and there is no possibility of updating the performance mode related to the mini character preview performance, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40701 that the mini character flag 223fg is on (S40701: Yes), the data in the action timing storage area 223fh is read (S40702), and it is determined whether or not the action timing specified based on the read data has arrived (S40703). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation (the value of the fluctuation time counter 223f) matches the action timing corresponding to the data read in the process of S40702.

In the process of S40703, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the action of the mini character MC (S40703: No), this process ends as it is.
In processing 03, if it is determined that it is the timing to start a new action for the mini character MC (S40703: Yes), the value of the action counter 223fi is updated by adding 1 (S40704), a display action command indicating the action corresponding to the value of the action counter 223fi after the increment is set (S40705), and this processing is terminated.

The display action command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is then sent to the main process 14 (FIG. 2) executed by the MPU 221.
In the command output process (S4102) of the program (see FIG. 41), the display action command is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display action command, it executes display control so that the mini character MC executes the action corresponding to the command.

By executing this mini character setting process (see FIG. 246), each action can be started accurately at the timing of each action in the mini character preview performance determined at the start of the variable display. Therefore, the expectation of a V Challenge small win can be accurately indicated in each mini character preview performance.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned various setting button input monitoring process (S4192) will be described with reference to Fig. 247. As described above, this various setting button input monitoring process (S4192) is one process in the main process 14 (see Fig. 241), and is a process for monitoring the operation (pressing) of a non-performance button (a button for changing the setting of the volume or the amount of light) and, when an operation is detected, changing the setting according to the type of the button that was operated.

In the various setting button input monitoring process (see FIG. 247), first, it is determined whether or not a press (operation) of any of the non-performance buttons (up button UB, down button DB, right button RB, or left button LB) has been detected (S40801), and if it is determined that a press (operation) of a non-performance button has not been detected (S40801: No), it is next determined whether or not the cheering performance flag 223fc is on (S40802). If it is determined that the cheering performance flag 223fc is on in the process of S40802 (S40802: Yes),
, which means that a variable display with an operation support effect set is being executed, a limit period setting process is executed to set a non-effect button limit period according to the elapsed time after the start of the variable display (S40803), and this process is terminated. Details of this limit period setting process (S40803) will be described later with reference to FIG. 248. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40802 that the support effect flag 223fc is not on (is off) (S40802:
If the answer is No, this means that the variable display for which the operation support effect is set is not currently being executed, and since there is no possibility of setting and ending the non-effect button restriction period, this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S40801, if it is determined that a press of any of the non-performance buttons has been detected (S40801: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the limited period flag 223fj is on (S40804), and if it is determined that the limited period flag 223fj is off (S40804: No), the process proceeds to S40808.
In the process of 0804, if it is determined that the flag 223fj during the limited period is on (
S40804: Yes), and update the value of the limited period counter 223fk by adding 1 (
S40805). Next, it is determined whether the value of the counter 223fk during the limit period after the update has become 2 (i.e., whether the player has pressed the non-effect button two or more times during the non-effect button limit period) (S40806), and if the counter value after the update has not become 2 (i.e., it is 1),
If it is determined that this is the case (S40806: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S40806, the updated value of the limited period counter 223fk is 2
If it is determined that the non-effect button has been pressed two or more times during the non-effect button limit period (S40806: Yes), the value of the limit period counter 223fk is reset to 0 (S40807), and the process proceeds to S40808. In the process of S40808, the setting of the pachinko machine 10 is updated according to the type of the non-effect button whose operation was detected (S40808).
Specifically, when the up button UB is pressed, the light amount (brightness) setting is increased by one step, and when the down button DB is pressed, the light amount setting is increased by one step.
In addition, when the right button RB is pressed, the volume setting is increased by one step, whereas when the left button LB is pressed, the volume setting is decreased by one step.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, various settings (volume and light intensity settings) of the pachinko machine 10 are configured not to be changed unless the non-effect button is pressed two or more times during the non-effect button limit period. This makes it possible to prevent various settings from being changed against the player's will, even if a player who is trying to operate the center button CB during the operation support operation performance accidentally presses a non-effect button, and the performance mode corresponding to the operation is not displayed, so that the player can recognize the operation error (the wrong type of button to be pressed). Therefore, the operation support performance can be more suitably executed. In addition, by configuring the settings to be changeable by pressing the non-effect button twice during the non-effect button limit period, it is possible to meet the desires of players who wish to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during the operation support performance. Therefore, it is possible to meet the needs of various players, and therefore it is possible to further improve the convenience of players.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned limit period setting process (S40803) will be described with reference to FIG. 248. As described above, this limit period setting process (S40803) is a process for setting the non-performance button limit period according to the elapsed time after the start of fluctuation. In this limit period setting process (S40803), first, it is determined whether the limit period flag 223fj is on (S40901), and if it is determined that the limit period flag 223fj is on (S40902),
40901: Yes), and then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the non-effect button restriction period (i.e., the timing when one second has elapsed since the end of the operation support effect) (S40902
).

In the process of S40902, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the non-effect button limit period (S40902: Yes), the value of the limit period counter 223fk is reset to 0 (S40903), and the limit period flag 223fj is set to OFF (S40904).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40902 that the timing for the end of the non-effect button limit period (the timing when one second has elapsed since the end of the operation support effect) has not yet ended (S40902: No), the processes of S40903 and S40904 are skipped,
This process then ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S40901, if it is determined that the during-restriction-period flag 223fj is not on (i.e., off) (S40901: No), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the non-effect button restriction period (i.e., the timing one second before the operation support effect starts) (S40905), and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the non-effect button restriction period (i.e., the timing one second before the operation support effect starts) (S40905: Y
es), the restriction period flag 223fj is set to ON (S40906), and this process ends.
In other words, if it is determined that the timing is not one second before the operation support performance starts (S4
0905), the process of S40906 is skipped, and this process ends.

By executing this limit period setting process (see FIG. 248), the period from one second before the operation support effect starts to one second after the end of the operation support effect can be accurately set as the non-effect button limit period. Therefore, even if a player who is trying to operate the center button CB during the operation support effect accidentally presses a non-effect button, it is possible to prevent various settings from being changed against the player's will.

Next, referring to FIG. 249, the winning-related process 14 (S430) in the eleventh embodiment will be described.
The details of this winning related process 14 (S43011) are described below.
In the command determination process 14 (S4193) in the embodiment, this is a process executed in place of the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the 10th embodiment, and is a process for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to a hit, similar to the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the 10th embodiment. Note that the command determination process 14 in the 11th embodiment is unchanged except that the hit-related process 14 (S43011) is executed in place of the hit-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the 10th embodiment, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the winning-related process 14 (see FIG. 249) in the eleventh embodiment, S4404
, S4405, S4407 to S4410, and S44001 to S44004 are the same as S4404 of the winning-related process 13 (see FIG. 205) in the tenth embodiment.
, S4405, S4407 to S4410, and S44001 to S44004 are executed.

In the winning-related process 14 (see FIG. 249) in the eleventh embodiment, S440
In the process of S44011, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 do not include an opening command for a small win (S44001: No), it is then determined whether or not the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 include a small win type command (S44011). In the process of S44011, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include a small win type command (S44011: Y
es), executes a small win type command process for executing control according to the small win type notified by the command (S44012), and ends this process. Details of this small win type command process (S44012) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S44011, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands do not include a small win type command (S44011: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands received from the main control device 110 include an operation content command (S
44013), if it is determined that an operation content command is included (S44013: Yes
The operation command process (S44014) is then executed to execute control according to the operation content indicated by the received command, and the process is terminated.
Details of S44014) will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the process, if it is determined that an operation content command is not included in the unprocessed commands (S44013: No), the process proceeds to S44003.

Next, referring to FIG. 250, the details of the above-mentioned small win type command process (S44012) will be described. FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing this small win type command process (S44012). This small win type command process (S44012) is one process in the win related process 14 (see FIG. 249), and as described above, it is a process for executing control according to the small win type notified by the command.

In the small win type command process (see FIG. 250), first, the game status storage area 223i
The data stored in the memory is read (S41001), and it is determined whether the read data indicates a time-saving state of a normal symbol (S41002). In the process of S41002, if it is determined that data indicating a game state other than the time-saving state (i.e., the normal state of a normal symbol) has been read (S41002: No), a central route suggestion effect (Fig. 232(b)
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41002 that data indicating the time-saving state has been read out (S41002:
Yes), then, the small win type notified by the small win type command is small win H
It is determined whether the winning number is one of H14 to J14 (S41003), and the winning number is one of H14 to J1
If it is determined that the winning number is one of the small winning numbers H14 to J14 (S41003: Yes),
By referring to table 222fc1 for 4, it is determined whether or not to execute the central route suggestion effect (see FIG. 232 (b)) and the timing of execution (S41004), and processing proceeds to S41006.

On the other hand, in the processing of S41003, if it is determined that the small win type notified by the command is not a small win H14 to J14 (it is any of the small wins K14 to M14) (S41003: No), the table 222fc2 for small wins K14 to M14 is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the central route suggestion performance (see Figure 232 (b)) and the execution timing (S41005), and the processing proceeds to S41006.

In the process of S41006, which is executed after the process of either S41004 or S41005, data indicating the performance timing determined by the process of S41004 or S41005 is stored in the performance timing storage area 223fa (S41006), and this process is terminated.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned operation command process (S44014) will be described with reference to FIG. 251. This operation command process (S44014) is a process related to the winning process 14 (
This is one of the processes in the operation command process (see FIG. 249), and as described above, this is a process for executing control according to the operation contents indicated by the received command. In this operation contents command process (S44014), first, data in the performance timing storage area 223fa is read (S41101).
It is determined whether the start timing of the suggestive performance corresponding to the read data coincides with the operation timing of the operating member notified by the current operation content command (S41102).
In the process of S41102, when a V winning rate of 50% period is set as the performance timing and an operation content command indicating the closing of the upper opening/closing door 6755bU is received, and when a V winning rate of 100% period is set as the performance timing,
When an operation content command indicating the opening of 5bD is received, it is determined that the timing coincides with the performance timing.

In the process of S41102, if it is determined that the operation timing of the operation content notified by the command matches the start timing of the suggestion performance (S41102: Yes),
The execution of the suggestion effect is set (S41103), and the process ends.
In the process of 02, if it is determined that the operation timing of the operation content notified by the command does not match the start timing of the suggestive performance (S41102: No), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 252, the variable display setting process 14 (S41
This variable display setting process 14 (S4194) is one process in the main process 14 (see FIG. 241), and as described above, is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment).
In the variable display setting process 14 (S4194) in the eleventh embodiment, S4501 to
In each process of S4509, the same processes as those in S4501 to S4509 of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 38) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) are executed.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 14 (see FIG. 252) in the eleventh embodiment, S45
When the process of S4504 is completed, it is next determined whether the change pattern (change display performance) set in the process of S4504 is a change pattern accompanied by an operation support performance (S4541).
When it is determined that the change pattern includes an operation support effect (S4541: Yes), a support effect setting process is executed to set the operation support effect (S4542), and the process is returned to S45
The process proceeds to S4543. Details of the support performance setting process (S4542) will be described later with reference to Fig. 253. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4541 that the change pattern does not include the operation support performance (S4541: No), the process of S4542 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4543.

In the process of S4543, an action timing determination process is performed to determine whether or not a mini character preview performance can be performed and the timing of the performance (S4543), and the process returns to S4505.
The action timing determination process (S4543) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Next, the above-mentioned cheering performance setting process (S4542) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 253. As described above, this cheering performance setting process (S4542) is a process for setting the operation cheering performance. In this cheering performance setting process (S4542), first, the cheering performance flag 223fc is set to ON (S41201), and then the value of the press count counter 223fe is read (S41202). Then, from the read value of the press count counter 223fe, the average number of presses (A) for one operation cheering performance in the variable display in which the previous operation cheering performance was set is calculated (S41203). Here, the operation cheering performance is set to one according to the variable type.
It is executed two to four times during the fluctuation period of the normal reach. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach, it is executed twice, before developing into the normal reach and after developing into the normal reach, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, it is executed three times, before developing into the normal reach, after developing into the normal reach, and after developing into the super reach, and in the fluctuation pattern of the special reach, it is executed four times, before developing into the normal reach, after developing into the normal reach, after developing into the super reach, and after developing into the special reach. S41203
In the process, if the type of the variable display accompanied by the operation support performance executed last time is a normal reach, the value of the press count counter 223fe is divided by 2 to calculate the average number of operations (A), and if it is a super reach, the value is divided by 3 to calculate the average number of operations (A).
If it is a special reach, the value of the press count counter 223fe is divided by 4 to calculate the average number of operations (A).

When the process of S41203 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the average number of operations (A) calculated in the process of S41203 is a value of 5 or less (i.e., whether or not the average number of operations by the player in the previous operation support performance is 5 or less) (S41204). If it is determined that the average number of operations is 5 or less (S41204: Yes), the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "02H" indicating "low operation frequency".
" is set (S41205), and the process proceeds to S41209.
In the process of (A), if it is determined that the average number of operations (A) is greater than 5, (S
41204: No), then it is determined whether the average number of operations (A) is a value of 9 or less (S41206).

In the process of S41206, when it is determined that the average number of operations (A) is a value of 9 or less (S41206: Yes), the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "0" indicating "medium operation frequency".
1H" is set (S41207), and the process proceeds to S41209.
In the process of 06, if it is determined that the average number of operations (A) is 10 or more (S
41206: No), the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "00H" indicating "high operation frequency" (S41208), and the process proceeds to S41209.
The value of the press count counter 223fe is reset to 0 (S41209), and this process ends.

By executing this cheering effect setting process (see FIG. 253), the operation frequency flag 223ff can be updated based on the player's tendency to press buttons in the previous variable display accompanied by the cheering effect. Therefore, when the cheering effect is actually started and the center button CB is pressed, the character mode can be set appropriately according to the tendency to press buttons.

In the eleventh embodiment, the value of the pressing count counter 223fe is held until the start timing of the next variable display in which the operation support performance is executed, and the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set at the start of the variable display in which the operation support performance is set according to the value of the pressing count counter 223fe that has been held. However, this is not limited to this. For example, at the end of the variable display in which the operation support performance is set,
The state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set based on the value of e.
Only the 3ff state may be retained until the next time the variable display with the operation support performance is executed. By configuring in this way, the processing load at the start of the variation can be reduced. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the center button CB is pressed during the operation effective period is simply counted to determine the tendency of the number of operations of the player, but the method of determining the tendency of the player to press is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to this, for example, it may be configured to determine whether the tendency of pressing the center button CB is high in the first half of the operation effective period, the tendency of pressing the center button CB is high in the second half, or the tendency of pressing the center button CB evenly, and to switch the determination ratio of the character form with a high expectation of development or a big win between the period in which it is determined that the player has a high tendency to press and the period in which it is not. By increasing the determination ratio of the character form with a high expectation during the period in which the tendency of pressing is high, it is possible to set an appropriate display mode according to the tendency of each player. Conversely, by increasing the rate at which character patterns with high expectations are determined during periods when the player is less likely to press buttons, the player can be encouraged to try pressing buttons in a different way than usual, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, the above-mentioned action timing determination process (S4543) will be described with reference to FIG. 254. As described above, this action timing determination process is a process for drawing a lottery for whether or not to execute the mini character preview performance and the execution timing. In this action timing determination process (S4543), first, it is determined whether the current fluctuation pattern is a small win fluctuation pattern (S41301), and if it is determined that it is not a small win fluctuation pattern (S41301: No), it is then determined whether it is a short miss fluctuation pattern (S41302). In the process of S41302, if it is determined that it is a short miss fluctuation pattern (S41302: Yes), it is a fluctuation pattern that has no possibility of executing the mini character preview performance, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S41302, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not a short miss (S41302: No), the non-small win table 222fb3 (FIG. 237(b)) is used as a data table for determining the performance mode (action timing) of the mini character advance notice performance.
) is read out (S41303), and the process proceeds to S41307.

On the other hand, in the process of S41301, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern to be executed this time is a fluctuation pattern of a small win (S41301: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a V challenge small win (S41304). If it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a V challenge small win (S41304: Yes), the data table for determining the performance mode (action timing) of the mini character preview performance is set to V
The challenge small winning table 222fb1 (see FIG. 236(b)) is read (S4
1305) and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S41304, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is not a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the V Challenge small win (S41304: No), the normal small win table 222fb2 (see FIG. 237(a)) is read out as a data table for determining the performance mode (action timing) of the mini character preview performance (S41306).
, and processing proceeds to S41307.

In the process of S41307, the presentation mode (whether or not a mini character preview presentation is to be performed, and the action timing if it is to be performed) corresponding to the value of the presentation selection counter 223ea is identified from the table read out in any of the processes of S41303, S41305, or S41306 (S41307), and then it is determined whether the execution of a mini character preview presentation has been identified in the process of S41307 (S41308). If it is determined in the process of S41308 that the execution of a mini character preview presentation has been identified (S41308: Yes), the mini character flag 223fg is set to ON (S41309), data indicating the action timing corresponding to the presentation mode identified in the process of S41307 is stored in the action timing storage area 223fh (S41310), and this process is terminated.
In the process of 8, if it is determined that the execution of the mini character preview performance is not specified (the mini character preview performance is not executed) (S41308: No), S41309 and S41310
By executing this action timing determination process (see FIG. 254), it is possible to set an appropriate presentation mode according to the result of the lottery for the special symbol.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 255 and 256.
14 of the display control device 114 in the eleventh embodiment.
This command determination process 14 (S6311) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is different from the command determination process (see FIG. 42) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment).
2), this is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the command determination process 14 (S6311) in the eleventh embodiment, S6401
In each process of S6401 to S6420, the same process as each process of S6401 to S6420 in the command judgment process (see FIG. 42) in the tenth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is executed.
In the process of S6418, when it is determined that the unprocessed commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 do not include an error command (S6418: No), it is then determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a display action command (S6
431). In the process of S6431, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands include a display action command (S6431: Yes), action command process is executed to display the action of the mini character MC indicated by the display action command (S6432), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S6431, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands do not include a display action command (S6431:
If the answer is No, the process proceeds to S6420. Details of this action command process (S6432) will be described with reference to FIG.

256 is a flow chart showing the action command process (S6432). In this action command process (S6432), first, the action data corresponding to the action notified by the display action command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is read from the action data table (S8001), and the read action data is added to the data already stored in the display data table buffer 233d, starting from the value of the current pointer 233f (S8002).

When the processing of S8002 is completed, a transfer action data table corresponding to the set action data (display data table) is determined, and the contents defined in the determined transfer action data table are added to the transfer data table buffer 233e using the current pointer 233f value as the starting point (S8003), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this action command process (see FIG. 256), the display data for displaying the action notified by the display action command can be accurately added to the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the mini character preview performance can be suitably executed without affecting the display mode of the variable display performance that has already been set.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is configured to be able to execute a variety of exciting effects, such as operation support effects, mini-character preview effects, and central route suggestion effects.
The operation support performance is a performance in which a character image suggesting various degrees of expectation is displayed in a display mode each time a specific condition is satisfied during the performance period (the player presses the center button CB). By executing this operation support performance, a player who wants to know various degrees of expectation in the variable performance being performed can play a game in such a way that the specific condition is easily satisfied (actively presses (operates) the center button CB), so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved. In addition, the operation support performance is configured to be executed multiple times for the same variable performance (variable display), and the selection ratio of the character mode displayed when the player presses the center button CB is variable depending on the timing of the operation support performance being executed (before or after all developments are completed). More specifically, in the operation support performance executed before all developments are completed, regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern, the proportion of the character mode set to a character mode with a high expectation of development (black stripe pattern or red stripe pattern) is high, while the proportion of the character mode set to a character mode with a high expectation of a jackpot is extremely low. As a result, in the operation support performance executed before the final development is completed, there is almost no difference in the character form displayed whether in the case of a big win or a miss, so the player can play without losing his or her sense of expectation for a big win at least until the final development is completed. Also, although the selection rate of a character form that increases the expectation of a big win is low, if it is selected, the expectation of a big win increases, so the player can press the center button CB in the operation support performance every time, hoping that a character form that increases the expectation of a big win will be displayed. Therefore, the player's motivation to participate in the operation support performance can be improved. Also, in the eleventh embodiment, the number of times the player presses the center button CB in the operation support performance is counted, and the average number of operations in one operation support performance is calculated. Then, the selection ratio of each character form per press of the center button CB is changed according to the average number of operations. That is, when a player who presses the center button less frequently is playing a game, character forms indicating a high expectation of a big win and
The selection ratio of the character form indicating a high expectation of development is increased, while the selection ratio of the character form indicating a high expectation of a big win or the character form indicating a high expectation of development is decreased when a player who presses the button frequently is playing. By configuring in this way, the number of times the character form indicating a high expectation is displayed in the operation support performance can be made equal regardless of the player's operation tendency, so that a more suitable performance can be realized. Furthermore, a unique game can be realized by performing a game method in which the player intentionally changes the operation tendency for each variable display. That is, by selecting a game method in which the player does not participate in the operation support performance when it is determined that the expectation of a big win is low from the state of the variable display performance until the operation support performance is executed, while selecting a game method in which the player participates in the operation support performance only when it is determined that the expectation of a big win is high, when the player participates in the operation support performance, the player is determined to be a player who operates less frequently, and the character form is more likely to be selected by lottery. In other words, when a player participates in the operation support performance, a state can be created in which a character pattern with a high expectation is likely to be selected in the case of a big win with a high probability, so that the probability of displaying a character pattern with a high expectation can be increased compared to when the player participates evenly in the operation support performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gameplay that allows a player to more accurately predict whether or not a big win will occur.

The mini character preview performance is a type of performance that suggests the execution of a V Challenge. This mini character preview performance is a performance mode that notifies the player that a V Challenge will be executed when the mini character MC completes all of the first to third actions. The mini character preview performance is also provided with multiple types (low expectation, medium expectation, and high expectation) that differ in the expectation level for the execution of the V Challenge, and while the content of the action of the mini character MC itself is the same, the timing at which the action is executed is configured to differ depending on the expectation level. This allows the image data itself used to display the action of the mini character MC to be standardized, so that the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 can be used to display the action of the mini character MC.
The storage capacity can be reduced. Furthermore, when the action timing for high expectation is set in the variable display in which the mini character advance performance is set, the first action is executed across the timing of development to the reach performance with higher expectation. Therefore, the player who has compared and confirmed the progress of the first action with the state of the variable display of the third pattern can feel that the end timing of the first action is likely to be later than the timing at which it is determined whether or not it will develop into the reach performance with higher expectation. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the action timing is set so that the variable display does not end in the middle of the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, the player who understands this specification and plays the game can sense that the performance will develop before it actually develops. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel way of enjoying playing the game while comparing the progress of the variable display with the progress of the action of the mini character MC. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the central route suggestion effect is an effect that is executed in synchronization with a period in which the V winning rate is 50% or a period in which the V winning rate is 100% in a type of small win that becomes a time-saving big win when a V winning occurs.
During the period when it is easy to flow down to 755f, or to the right V winning hole 6755bV,
Moreover, it is an effect suggesting a period during which the time-saving state is likely to be granted. By executing this central route suggestion effect, the player can play the game with a strong hope of getting the game ball to enter the lottery device 6755 during the execution of the central route suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the timing of the game ball entering the lottery device 6755 is compared with the execution status of the central route suggestion effect (the display mode of the third pattern display device 81) to predict whether or not the time-saving state will be entered, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the operation frequency of the center button CB is determined in units of variable display to update the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the operation frequency may be determined in units of operation support performance to update the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff. This allows the player's pressing tendency to be determined more accurately, and the selection ratio of each character form can be set more appropriately.

In the eleventh embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol (whether it is a big win or not) and the state of the development completion flag 223fd are the same, the same data table is read out from the character mode selection table 222fa every time, but this is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of tables may be defined for each combination of the lottery result of the special symbol and the state of the development completion flag 223fd, and one table may be selected by lottery. That is, a table in which green or red characters are difficult to select as the character mode may be selected despite a win, or a table in which green or red characters are relatively easy to select despite a loss may be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the performance mode. In addition, instead of changing the table only according to the combination of the lottery result of the special symbol and the state of the development completion flag 223fd, for example, a different table may be referenced to determine the character mode depending on the variation pattern or the selected variable display performance mode. Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, as the state of the development completion flag 223fd,
Although the configuration is such that only two states can be taken, namely, whether or not all development has been completed, a configuration in which the table to be referred to is switched at each development stage may also be used.

In the eleventh embodiment, the table selected from the character pattern selection table 222fa is different depending on whether it is a win or a miss, but it may be possible to select different tables for each of the three patterns of win, V Challenge small win, and miss (including normal small win). In this case, it may be possible to provide a character pattern (e.g., yellow characters) that is more likely to be set in the case of a V Challenge small win than in the case of a win or miss. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game that allows the player to predict whether the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win, a small win, or a miss, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. In addition, in the case of a V Challenge small win,
The selection ratio of the character patterns may be varied according to the winning rate.

In the eleventh embodiment, in the case of a V Challenge small win, the action timing of the mini character preview performance is determined by referring to a common table regardless of the small win type, but this is not limited to this. For example, the action timing may be selected by taking into account not only whether or not the V Challenge small win is won, but also the small win type (V winning rate) of the V Challenge small win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game in which the action timing of the mini character MC and the type of the V Challenge small win are predictable, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In the eleventh embodiment, the execution period of the operation support effect (the remaining time until the operation support effect ends) was not suggested (informed) to the player, but the execution period of the operation support effect may be suggested (informed) to the player by a timer display, an indicator display, or the like. By configuring in this manner, the player can easily grasp the execution period of the operation support effect, thereby improving convenience for the player. In this case, the execution period of the operation support effect may be displayed by a text image 814. Specifically, for example, the remaining performance period of the operation support effect at the time when pressing of the center button CB is detected may be determined, and a text image 814 imitating text corresponding to the remaining performance period may be displayed. In other words, when the center button CB is pressed with 1.2 seconds remaining, "
A character image imitating the letters "1.2" may be displayed in a character form determined by lottery at the time of pressing. Also, for example, the bird-like character 813 may be configured to take on a more transparent appearance as the remaining time decreases, until the character 813 becomes completely transparent and invisible when the execution period of the operation support effect has elapsed. By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand the remaining time of the operation support effect. This makes it possible to further improve convenience for the player.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 257 to Fig. 267. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 11th embodiment described above, the character form of the character image 814 suggesting the expectation of a big win or the expectation of development is displayed every time the player presses the center button CB in the operation support performance. Then, during the period from one second before the start of the operation support performance execution period to one second after the end, the operation of the non-performance buttons arranged around the center button CB is restricted (the setting corresponding to the button that is detected as being pressed is not changed unless the button is pressed two or more times).

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, during the execution period of the operation support performance, the player can select whether to participate in the operation support performance or to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 by operating the operation button 230. This prevents a player who is trying to participate in the operation support performance from making an incorrect operation and being forced to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 against his or her will.
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the settings from being changed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned ninth to eleventh embodiments, in the small win, when one or more game balls enter the lottery device 6755 and then all the game balls that entered are discharged, or when eight seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the small win is deemed to have ended when the end condition for the small win game is met. However, in this configuration,
For example, there is a risk that a gaming ball that has entered the lottery device 6755 may be forcibly guided to a favorable flow path (center route) using a magnet or the like.
By attracting the game ball that entered ball 755 from the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the glass unit 16) using the attractive force of a magnet, it was possible to commit fraud by floating the game ball against the guide flow path 6755b and passing it above the upper opening/closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c regardless of their opening/closing status, thereby guiding the game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, a magnet or the like is used to move the game board 13
In order to prevent fraudulent acts such as pulling game balls from the front side, an upper opening door 6755
The ball discharge door 6755b and the ball discharge door 6755c are arranged so as to be less susceptible to the magnetic attraction generated from the front side of the glass unit 16. In addition, the game balls that enter the lottery device 6755 are forcibly guided to the flow path on the distribution rotor 6755f side by a magnet or the like, and are then guided to the flow path on the distribution rotor 6755f side by a magnet or the like.
The small prize valid period is set so that the small prize ends before the balls enter any of the ball entrances by the lottery device 6755. In other words, even if all the game balls that entered the lottery device 6755 have not reached any of the ball entrances (if they remain in the lottery device 6755), the small prize ends when a specific period (for example, 6.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the small prize. In other words, the small prize ends without the intervention of external forces such as magnetic forces (gravity or induction flow path 67
55b) can easily enter any of the entrances of the lottery device 6755, while a valid period is set during which a game ball that is guided in a direction different from the intended direction by forcibly changing the flow direction using a magnet or the like will have difficulty reaching any of the entrances.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 12th embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 1 in the 11th embodiment.
The differences in configuration from the eleventh embodiment are that the internal structure of the lottery device 6755 has been partially changed, that the configurations of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the voice lamp control device 114 has been partially changed. The other configurations, various processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 257, a lottery device 675 of a pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment
5 will be described. FIG. 257 is a top view of the guide flow path 6755b of the lottery device 6755. As shown in FIG. 257, the opening and closing door 6755bU, the ball discharge door 6755c (and the discharge area 6755d provided below it), and the ball stopper 6755e of the guide flow path 6755b in the 12th embodiment are provided on the back side in a front view compared to other parts of the guide flow path 6755b. Therefore, when a game ball is guided to the distribution rotor 6755f by a magnet or the like from the front side of the glass unit 16 on the game board 13, the distance to the glass unit 16 can be lengthened before and after the game ball reaches the upper opening and closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c. That is, the upper opening and closing door 6755bU is guided by a magnet or the like to the distribution rotor 6755f.
When attempting to guide a game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f when the upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c are open (a state in which the game ball cannot reach the distribution rotor 6755f in a normal playing method), the distance between the magnet and the game ball can be configured to be the greatest when the game ball reaches the open upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c. In other words, the magnetic force acting on the game ball can be weakened to the greatest extent when the game ball reaches the open upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c, so that the magnetic force acting on the game ball can be weakened to the greatest extent when the game ball reaches the open upper opening/closing door 6755bU or the ball discharge door 6755c.
The guide channel 6755b is configured so that the game balls can easily fall through the guide channel 6755bO into the right outlet 6755bO or the discharge area 6755d via the guide channel 6755c. This makes it difficult to successfully carry out fraudulent acts of using magnets or the like to make game balls reach the distribution rotor 6755f, thereby preventing fraudulent acts. This makes it possible to prevent the hall from suffering unexpected disadvantages as a result of fraudulent acts. In addition, because the guide channel 6755b is not straight but has a serpentine shape, when an attempt is made to guide the game balls using magnets or the like, the guide channel 6755b is configured so that the balls can easily fall through the distribution rotor 6755f.
55f. Therefore, the small win game can be ended before the game ball guided to the distribution rotor 6755f by the fraudulent act is guided to any of the ball entrances. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent acts can be further improved.

Next, the display mode of the operation cheering effect in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 258 and Fig. 259. First, Fig. 258(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the operation cheering effect in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 258(a), when the operation cheering effect in the twelfth embodiment is executed, a cheering button image 81 with the word "cheer" displayed below a bird-like character 813 is displayed.
15a, a volume setting button image 815b that is displayed below the cheer button image 815a and displays the characters "Volume Setting", an up button image 815c that is displayed between the cheer button image 815a and the volume setting button image 815b and has a generally upward equilateral triangular shape, and a down button image 815d that is displayed below the up button image 815c and has a generally downward equilateral triangular shape.
is displayed. Also, the cheer button image 815a is set to have a glowing appearance. These display contents allow the player to intuitively understand that pressing the up button UB allows the selection of the item "cheering" (i.e., the selection of participating in the operation cheering performance can be made) and pressing the down button DB allows the selection of the item "volume setting" (i.e., the volume setting can be changed). Also, by setting the cheer button image 815a to have a glowing appearance, the player can intuitively understand that the item "cheering" has been selected.

In the twelfth embodiment, the expectation of a big win can be suggested not only by the character form of the character image 814 displayed in the display area HR11 but also by the display form (light emission color) of the cheer button image 815a. Although details will be described later, the suggestion of the expectation of a big win by the display form of the cheer button image 815a is more likely to occur when a player who does not perform any operation is playing the game (the proportion of the light emission color set to a high expectation in the case of a big win is high). This makes it possible to suggest the expectation of a big win even to players who do not participate in the operation support performance, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 258(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the up button UB further in a state where the item "cheering" is selected (a state where the cheering button image 815a is set to a glowing appearance). As shown in FIG. 258(b), when the player presses the up button UB in a state where the item "cheering" is selected, a character mode is determined by a lottery using the character mode selection table 222fa, and a character image 814 of the determined character mode is displayed. That is, each time the player presses the up button UB in a state where the item "cheering" is selected, a character image suggesting the expectation for a big win or development can be displayed, as in the case where the center button CB is pressed in the above-mentioned eleventh embodiment. By setting the item "cheering" to be selected at the start of the operation cheering performance, it is possible to realize the same operability as the above-mentioned eleventh embodiment (operability that makes it possible to display a character image each time a specific button (up button UB) is pressed in the state where the operation cheering performance starts). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 259(a), when the player presses the down button DB while the item "cheering" is selected, the cheering button image 815a changes from a lit-up appearance to an unlit appearance, and the volume setting button image 815b changes from an unlit appearance to a lit-up appearance. That is, the item "volume setting" is changed to a selected state. Furthermore, a display area 816 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape is formed on the right side of the display area HR11 when viewed from the front. In this display area 816, an image showing the current volume setting is displayed, as shown in FIG. 259(a). That is, an image resembling a speaker is displayed, and below the image resembling a speaker, a volume bar SB is displayed that displays the current volume setting in five stages according to the length of the bar. The volume bar SB has more bars with diagonal lines as the volume setting becomes higher, and the number of bars with diagonal lines decreases as the volume setting becomes lower. In Fig. 259(a), the three bars from the left of the five bars constituting the volume bar SB are set to a display mode with diagonal lines, indicating that the volume setting is set to three levels out of five levels. By displaying the volume setting (the number of diagonal lines) indicated by the volume bar SB justified to the left, the player can easily understand that the number of diagonal lines can be decreased by pressing the left button LB, and that the number of diagonal lines can be increased by pressing the right button RB. This allows the player to easily understand how to change the volume setting.

FIG. 259(b) shows a case where the player presses the right button R when the "volume setting" item is selected.
259(b) is a diagram showing the display mode when button RB is pressed. As shown in FIG. 259(b), when the player presses the right button RB with the "volume setting" item selected, the number of bars displayed with diagonal lines increases by one. That is, an additional bar with diagonal lines is displayed to the right of the three bars with diagonal lines that were displayed immediately before the button was pressed. This change in the display mode allows the player to easily understand that the change in the volume setting has been normally executed.

In this way, in the operation support performance in the eleventh embodiment, the player can select between the item "support" and the item "volume setting" in response to the operation (pressing) of the up button UB and the down button DB. When the item "support" is selected, a text image 814 is displayed every time the up button UB corresponding to "support" is pressed.
On the other hand, when the item "Volume Setting" is selected, the volume setting can be changed by pressing the right button RB or the left button LB, but the text image 8 is not displayed even if the up button UB is pressed.
14 is not displayed. By configuring in this way, even if a player who is trying to participate in the operation support performance accidentally presses the right button RB or the left button LB, it is possible to prevent a setting change against the player's will from being executed. Also, even if a player who is trying to set the volume accidentally presses the up button UB or the down button DB, it is possible to prevent the character image 814 from being displayed against the player's will. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the convenience for the player.

In the twelfth embodiment, even if the down button DB is pressed when the "volume setting" item is selected, no change is made to the display mode or settings. However, this is not limited to this. For example, under certain conditions,
The character mode of the character image 814 may be drawn and displayed even when the down button DB is pressed a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) or more with the "volume setting" item selected. More specifically, for example, when the down button DB is pressed a predetermined number of times or more with the "volume setting" item selected, it may be determined that the player has misunderstood how to participate in the operation support performance (mistakenly believes that pressing the down button DB will display the character image 814), and the character mode of the character image 814 may be drawn and displayed. By configuring in this way, even a player who has pressed the down button DB repeatedly due to a mistake or the like can be allowed to participate in the operation support performance, thereby further improving the convenience of the player. Note that in this case, after detecting that the down button DB has been pressed a predetermined number of times or more, the volume setting button image 8
The display mode of the cheer button image 815b may be changed to the same appearance as the cheer button image 815a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the unnatural appearance in which the text image 814 is displayed even though the "volume setting" is selected, so that the display mode can be set more preferably.

Next, referring to FIG. 260, in the case where a small win is obtained by drawing a special symbol in the 12th embodiment, the upper opening/closing door 6755bU, the lower opening/closing door 6755bD, and the ball stopper 6755e
Here, in the 12th embodiment, as in the 11th embodiment described above, when a small win is won, only the mode (opening pattern) of the opening and closing operation of the small win attacker 6755a is changed according to the type of small win, and the other operation modes (upper opening and closing door 6755bU, lower opening and closing door 6755bD, ball stopper 675
5e, and the operation pattern of the ball discharge door 6755c) are configured to be common regardless of the small win type. In Figure 260, the operation mode of the parts other than the attacker 6755a for small win, which is common regardless of the small win type, will be described.

FIG. 260 shows the upper opening and closing door 6755bU during the execution of the small win game of the twelfth embodiment.
260 is a diagram showing the change over time (operation pattern) of the open/close state of the upper opening/closing door 6755bD, the ball stopper 6755e, and the ball discharge door 6755c.
bU is set to the open state as the initial state, and switches to the closed state at the same time as the start of the small win. This closed state (50% V winning rate period) continues for 1 second (i.e., continues until 1 second has passed since the start of the small win), and switches to the open state 1 second after switching to the closed state. After that, the upper opening and closing door 6755 is closed until 1.2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win.
bU is maintained in an open state, and is switched to a closed state (50% V winning rate period) again from 1.2 seconds to 1.4 seconds. Then, when 1.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, it is switched to an open state again, and the open state is maintained thereafter until the end of the small win. That is, from immediately after the start of the small win until 1 second has passed, and from 1.2 seconds to 1.4 seconds, it is switched to a closed state again (50% V winning rate period).
The game balls that entered the lottery device 6755 within 4 seconds roll on the upper surface of the closed upper opening and closing door 6755bU and flow down to the distribution rotor 6755f side (Figure 211 (
See Fig. 211(a)), and game balls that enter the lottery device 6755 during other periods flow into the guide flow path 6755b2 and are guided to the right V winning port 6755bV or the right out port 6755bO (see Fig. 211(b) and (c)). That is, in this 12th embodiment, the V winning rate 50% period is configured to end earlier than in the 11th embodiment. Note that in this 12th embodiment, when 6.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the lottery device 6755
Even if there are game balls remaining in the slot 5, the small win is forcibly ended.
As a result, the ball's path is forcibly changed by a magnet or the like, and the distribution rotor 6755f
In the case of a relatively time-consuming fraudulent act of guiding a gaming ball to a ball entrance, the small win can be forcibly ended before the distribution rotor 6755f distributes the gaming ball to one of the ball entrances. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

Also, as shown in FIG. 260, the lower opening and closing door 6755bD is set to the closed state as the initial state, and the closed state is maintained until 1.6 seconds have passed since the start of the small win. Then, at the point where 1.6 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the open state (V winning rate 10
0% period). As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the guide flow path 6755b2 is
The winning hole 6755bV is in a state where the ball can enter. The open state of the lower opening and closing door 6755bD continues for 0.2 seconds, and switches to a closed state when 1.8 seconds have passed since the start of the small win. After that, the lower opening and closing door 6755bD is kept in a closed state until 2 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and switches to an open state (100% V winning rate period) again at the time when 2 seconds have passed. This open state continues for 1 second. That is, the open state continues until 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, and switches to a closed state at the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small win. Then, the closed state is maintained until the end of the small win.

As shown in FIG. 260, the ball stopper 6755e is maintained in a closed state from the start of the small win until 2.9 seconds have elapsed, and is in an open state (guiding flow path 6
On the other hand, the ball discharge door 6755c is kept in a closed state from the start of the small win until 2.4 seconds have elapsed, and is switched to an open state from the point at which 2.4 seconds have elapsed (the point at which 1 second has elapsed after the period when the second V winning rate is 50%) until the end of the small win, and is switched to a closed state again at the end of the small win.
During the V winning probability 50% period, the ball stops 6755e and the ball discharge door 6755c are both closed, so that the ball enters the lottery device 6755 during the V winning probability 50% period and the upper opening and closing door 6
All the game balls that have passed through the upper surface of the guide channel 6755bU are guided by the ball stopper 6755e.
It is parked within 55b.

In addition, when 2.4 seconds have passed since the start of the small win, the ball discharge door 6755c is opened with the ball stopper 6755e closed, so that all game balls other than the one game ball that is stopped by directly contacting the right side of the ball stopper 6755e fall from the opening of the ball discharge door 6755c to the discharge area 6755d and are discharged to the outside. That is, even if multiple game balls flow into the inside of the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period, after the ball discharge door 6755e is opened, the game ball that is stopped inside the lottery device 6755 can be a maximum of only one. Then, 0.5 seconds after the ball discharge door 6755c is opened, the ball stopper 6755e is opened, so that the one game ball remaining inside the lottery device 6755 flows down toward the distribution rotor 6755f. By opening the ball discharge door 6755c first and then the ball stopper 6755e, even if two or more game balls enter the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period, the second and subsequent game balls can be discharged from the discharge area 6755d to the outside before the ball stopper 6755e is opened. Therefore, the number of game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6755f in one small win can be limited to a maximum of one, so that no game balls reach the lottery device 6755 during the V winning rate 50% period.
The probability of winning a V when the ball lands in the number 5 can be set constant (50%) every time.

In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, the setting timing of the V winning rate 50% period is made earlier than in the tenth and eleventh embodiments. As a result, the timing of the operation of the ball discharge door 6755c and the ball stopper 6755e can be made earlier than in the tenth and eleventh embodiments, so that the end timing of the small win can be made earlier. Therefore, even if a game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 during the V non-winning period set after the V winning rate 50% period and the V winning rate 100% period is illegally guided to the distribution rotor 6755f by a magnet or the like, the small win can be ended before the guided game ball is distributed to one of the ball entry ports by the distribution rotor 6755f. In other words, even if a game ball is illegally made to enter the V winning port, it is configured so that a big win is difficult to be executed. Therefore, the deterrent effect against fraudulent acts can be enhanced. Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the small win game is forcibly ended at the timing when 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small win (a period of sufficient length that the game balls that entered the lottery device 6755 and flowed down to the distribution rotor 6755f during the V winning rate 50% period can be distributed to one of the ball entry ports). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using magnets, etc., without affecting players who play in a normal manner. That is, if a game ball is attracted by a magnet, etc., and the flow path is forcibly changed to reach the distribution rotor 6755f, the period until the game ball reaches the distribution rotor 6755f is longer than when the game ball reaches the distribution rotor 6755f by a normal operation (a movement in which the game ball flows down only by the action of tilt or gravity). The period of 6.5 seconds after the start of the small win is a period during which game balls that reach the distribution rotor 6755f through normal operation can be distributed to one of the ball entrances without any problems, and during which it is difficult (impossible) for game balls that have been guided to the distribution rotor 6755f by fraudulent acts using magnets or the like to be distributed to one of the ball entrances. As a result, even if a fraudulent act is performed by using a magnet or the like to forcibly guide a game ball that has flowed into the lottery device 6755 to the distribution rotor 6755f,
Since the small win can be ended before the game balls are distributed to any of the ball entry holes, the fraudulent act can be prevented from being established. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hall from being disadvantaged by the fraudulent act.

<Electrical configuration in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 261(a), the voice lamp control device 11 in the twelfth embodiment will be described.
The configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the first embodiment will be described below.
261(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 12th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 261(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the 12th embodiment is the same as that of the 11th embodiment.
The difference is that a button mode selection table 222ga is added to the configuration of the OM 222 (see FIG. 233). The other configurations are the same as the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 233), so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The button mode selection table 222ga is a data table that is referred to when selecting the display mode (light emission color) of the cheering button image 815a (see FIG. 258(a)) displayed in the operation cheering performance.
The display mode of one is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the operation status of the player, etc., by referring to the button mode selection table 222ga.
This will be explained with reference to 3.

Fig. 262(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button mode selection table 222ga. As shown in Fig. 262(a), the button mode selection table 222ga in the twelfth embodiment
2ga is a winning (non-operation) table 2 for selecting the luminous color (button color) of the support button image 815a in the operation support performance set for the variable display corresponding to the big win in a situation where a player who tends not to perform any operation at all in the operation support performance is playing a game.
22ga1, and a winning (operation) table 222g for selecting the light emission color (button color) of the support button image 815a in the operation support performance to be set for the variable display corresponding to the big win in a situation where a player who tends to perform an operation in the operation support performance is playing a game.
a2, and a table 222ga for failure (non-operation) for selecting the light emission color (button color) of the support button image 815a in the operation support performance to be set for the variable display corresponding to the failure in a situation where a player who tends not to perform any operation in the operation support performance is playing a game.
3. In a situation where a player who tends to perform an operation during the operation support performance is playing a game,
A support button image 815a in the operation support performance set for the variable display corresponding to a miss
and a miss (operation) table 222ga4 for selecting the light emission color (button color).

First, the details of the winning (non-operation) table 222ga1 will be described with reference to FIG. 262(b). FIG. 262(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the winning (non-operation) table 222ga1. As shown in FIG. 262(b),
In ga1, a button color is associated with each range of the value of the performance selection counter 223ea. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the button color (display mode of the cheer button image 815a) is associated with "white" for the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223ea from "0 to 199" (see 222ga1a in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 random number values (counter values) that the performance selection counter 223ea can take, 200 random number values (counter values) are associated with the button color "white", so that in a state where a player who tends not to perform any operation in the operation support performance is playing, the ratio (probability) that "white" is set as the button color when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery and the operation support performance is executed is 20% (200/1000).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “200 to 5
For the range of "100", "110", "120", "130", "140", "150", "160", "170", "180", "190", "200", "210", "300", "400", "500", "600", "700", "800", "99", "190", "190", "190", "200", "300", "400
are associated with each other (see 222ga1b in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random number values (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 400 random number values (counter values) are associated with the button color "blue". Therefore, in a state where a player who tends not to perform any operation in the operation support effect is playing, the ratio (probability) that "blue" will be set as the button color when the operation support effect is executed after a jackpot is won in the special symbol selection is 40% (400/1000).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “600 to 8
For the range of "100", "110", "120", "130", "140", "150", "160", "170", "180", "190", "200", "210", "300", "400", "500", "600", "700", "800", "99", "190", "190", "190", "200", "300", "400
are associated with each other (see 222ga1c in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random number values (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 300 are associated with the button color "green". Therefore, in a state where a player who tends not to perform any operation in the operation support effect is playing, the ratio (probability) of the button color being set to "green" when the operation support effect is executed after a jackpot is won in the special symbol selection is 30% (300/1000).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 262(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “900 to 9
For the range of "100", "110", "120", "130", "140", "150", "160", "170", "180", "190", "200", "210", "300", "400", "500", "600", "700", "800", "99", "190", "190", "190", "200", "300", "400
are associated with each other (see 222ga1d in FIG. 262(b)). Of the 1000 possible random number values (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 100 random number values (counter values) are associated with the button color "red". Therefore, in a state where a player who tends not to perform any operation in the operation support effect is playing, the ratio (probability) of "red" being set as the button color when a jackpot is won in the special symbol selection and the operation support effect is executed is 10% (100/1000).

In this way, when a player who tends not to perform any operation is playing a game, if the operation support performance is executed during a jackpot fluctuation, the button color is set to a color other than "white" which has a low jackpot expectation rate of 80%, and the button color is set to "green" or "red" which has a high jackpot expectation rate of 40%. In other words, when a player who tends not to perform any operation is playing a game, the percentage of players who select a button color with a high jackpot expectation rate in the event of a jackpot is relatively high. By configuring in this way, the expectation rate of a jackpot can be appropriately suggested even to players who do not participate in the operation support performance, so that even players who tend not to perform operations (not to participate in the operation support performance) can enjoy the operation support performance. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to Fig. 262(c), the details of the winning (operation) table 222ga2, which is one of the data tables constituting the button mode selection table 222ga, will be described. Fig. 262(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the winning (operation) table 222ga2. As shown in Fig. 262(c), the button color (display mode of the cheer button image 815a) is set to "white" in correspondence with the value of the performance selection counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 499" (see 222ga2a in Fig. 262(c)).
Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of EA, 500 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "white." Therefore, when a player who is inclined to perform an operation during the operation support performance is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of the button color being set to "white" when the special symbol lottery is won and the operation support performance is executed is 50% (50
0/1000).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is "500 to 8
For the range of "100", "110", "120", "130", "140", "150", "160", "170", "180", "190", "200", "210", "300", "400", "500", "600", "700", "800", "99", "190", "190", "190", "200", "300", "400
Among the 1000 possible random number values (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 400 random number values (counter values) are associated with the button color "blue." Therefore, when a player who has a tendency to perform operations in the operation support effects is playing a game, a jackpot will be won in the special symbol selection, and
The probability that the button color will be set to "blue" when the operation support effect is performed is 40.
% (400/1000).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is "900 to 9
For the range of "79", the button color (display mode of the cheer button image 815a) is "green".
Among the 1000 possible random number values (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 80 random number values (counter values) are associated with the button color "green". Therefore, in a state where a player who has a tendency to perform an operation in the operation support effect is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of the button color being set to "green" when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and the operation support effect is executed is 8% (
80/1000).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “980 to 9
For the range of "100", "110", "120", "130", "140", "150", "160", "170", "180", "190", "200", "210", "300", "400", "500", "600", "700", "800", "99", "190", "190", "190", "200", "300", "400
Among the 1000 possible random number values (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 20 random number values (counter values) are associated with the button color "red". Therefore, in a state where a player who has a tendency to perform an operation in the operation support effect is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of the button color being set to "red" when the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot and the operation support effect is executed is 2% (
20/1000).

In this way, when a player who tends to perform operations during the operation support performance is playing, the percentage of players who select "white," which has the lowest expectation, during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation is higher than when a player who does not perform any operations is playing, and the percentage of button colors with high expectation is significantly lower at 10%. Therefore, since it is difficult to predict the expectation of a jackpot from the button color, by actively pressing the buttons during the operation support performance, it is possible to make the player think about predicting the expectation of a jackpot from the character form of the displayed character image 814. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to participate in the operation support performance.

Next, the details of the loss (non-operation) table 222ga3 will be described with reference to FIG. 263(a). FIG. 263(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the loss (non-operation) table 222ga3. As shown in FIG. 263(a), when the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is "0
For the range of "-799", the button color (display mode of the cheer button image 815a) is set to "
The button color "white" is specified in correspondence with the random number value of 1000 that the effect selection counter 223ea can have (see 222ga3a in FIG. 263(a)).
Since the random number value (counter value) associated with this is 800, when a player who tends not to perform any operations during the operation support effect is playing, the ratio (probability) of losing the special pattern lottery and the button color being set to "white" when the operation support effect is executed is 80% (800/1000).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 263(a), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “800 to 9
For the range of "49", the button color (display mode of the cheer button image 815a) is set to "blue".
are associated with each other (see 222ga3b in FIG. 263(a)). Of the 1000 possible random number values (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 150 random number values (counter values) are associated with the button color "blue". Therefore, in a state where a player who tends not to perform any operation in the operation support effect is playing, the ratio (probability) of losing the special symbol selection and setting "blue" as the button color when the operation support effect is executed is 15% (150/1000).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 263(a), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is "950 to 9
For the range of "98", the button color (display mode of the cheer button image 815a) is "green".
Among the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 49 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "green." Therefore, in a state where a player who tends not to perform any operation during the operation support effect is playing, the probability that the special symbol lottery will be lost and "green" will be set as the button color when the operation support effect is executed is 4.
.9% (49/1000).

263(a), the value of the effect selection counter 223ea is set to "999" and the button color (display mode of the cheer button image 815a) is set to "red" (see 222ga3d in FIG. 263(a)). Of the 1000 possible random number values (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, there is only one random number value (counter value) that is set to the button color "red". Therefore, in a state where a player who tends not to perform any operation in the operation support effect is playing, the ratio (probability) of losing the special symbol lottery and setting "red" as the button color when the operation support effect is executed is 0.1% (1/10
00).

In this way, when a player who does not participate in the operation support performance (does not operate the button) loses the special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the button color "white" becomes high, while the selection rate of the high expectation colors "green" and "red" becomes significantly low. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game feature that predicts the expectation of a big win from the button color.

Next, the details of the loss (operation) table 222ga4 will be described with reference to FIG. 263(b). FIG. 263(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the loss (operation) table 222ga4. As shown in FIG. 263(b), when the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is "0 to 5
For the range of "100", "110", "120", "130", "140", "150", "160", "170", "180", "190", "200", "210", "300", "400", "500", "600", "700", "800", "99", "190", "190", "190", "200", "300", "400
Among the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 600 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "white". Therefore, when a player who is inclined to perform an operation in the operation support effect is playing a game, the ratio (probability) of losing the special symbol selection and setting the button color to "white" when the operation support effect is executed is 60% (
600/1000).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “600 to 9
For the range of "49", the button color (display mode of the cheer button image 815a) is set to "blue".
Among the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 350 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "blue". Therefore, in a state where a player who has a tendency to perform an operation in the operation support effect is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of the button color being set to "blue" when the operation support effect is executed due to a loss in the special symbol selection is 35% (
350/1000).

Also, as shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is “950 to 9
For the range of "97", the button color (display mode of the cheer button image 815a) is "green".
Among the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, 48 random numbers (counter values) are associated with the button color "green". Therefore, in a state where a player who has a tendency to perform an operation in the operation support effect is playing the game, the ratio (probability) of the button color being set to "green" when the operation support effect is executed due to a loss in the special symbol selection is 4.8% (
48/1000).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 263(b), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea becomes “998,9
For the range of "100", "110", "120", "130", "140", "150", "160", "170", "180", "190", "200", "210", "300", "400", "500", "600", "700", "800", "99", "190", "190", "190", "200", "300", "400
Among the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of the effect selection counter 223ea, there are two random numbers (counter values) associated with the button color "red". Therefore, when a player who is inclined to perform an operation in the operation support effect is playing the game, the ratio (probability) that the button color "red" will be set to "red" when the operation support effect is executed after the big win in the special symbol selection is won is 0.2%.
(2/1000).

In this way, even when a player who participates in the operation support performance (operates the button) is playing, if the special symbol lottery results in a loss, the button color "white" is selected more frequently, while the button color with higher expectations is selected less frequently, such as "green" or "red." Therefore, although the difference between the case where a player who does not perform any operation plays and the case where a jackpot is won is smaller, it is possible to provide a game that predicts the likelihood of a jackpot from the button color.

Next, referring to FIG. 261(b), the voice lamp control device 11 in the twelfth embodiment will be described.
The configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the first embodiment will be described.
261(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the 12th embodiment is the same as that in the 11th embodiment.
For the configuration of the AM 223 (see FIG. 233(b)), the cursor position storage area 223ga
The other configuration is the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The cursor position storage area 223ga is a memory area for storing information indicating the item (cursor position) selected by the player during the execution of the operation support effect. When "00H" is stored in this cursor position storage area 223ga, it indicates that the item "support" is selected, and when "01H" is stored, it indicates that the item "volume setting" is selected. Each time the player selects a different item during the execution of the operation support effect, this cursor position storage area 223ga is updated with data corresponding to the item.

<Regarding control process of the voice lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to Fig. 264 to Fig. 267, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described.
4, the operation support performance process 15 (S40301) in the present twelfth embodiment will be described. This operation support performance process 15 (S40301) is a process executed in place of the operation support performance process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process for updating the performance mode in the variable display in which the operation support performance is set, similar to the operation support performance process (see FIG. 243) in the eleventh embodiment.

In the operation support performance process 15 (see FIG. 264) in the 12th embodiment, S404
In each process of S40401 to S40409, the operation support performance process (
In the operation support performance process 15 (see FIG. 264) in the twelfth embodiment, the same processes as those in S40401 to S40409 in the operation support performance process 15 (see FIG. 264) are executed.
When the process of is completed, the table corresponding to the current special symbol lottery result and the player's operation status (state of the operation frequency flag 223ff) is read out from the button mode selection table 222ga (S40421), and the button color corresponding to the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea is specified from the read out table (S40422). When the process of S40422 is completed, the process proceeds to S40406. Note that in this twelfth embodiment, the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to a state ("03H") indicating that no operation has been performed.
In the process of S40421, the state of the operation frequency flag 223ff is set to "03
Depending on whether the winning number is "H" or not, the non-operation table (the winning (non-operation) table 222g
It is variable to select whether or not to select the table 222ga3) for loss (non-operation).

Next, referring to FIG. 265, various setting button input monitoring process 1 in the twelfth embodiment will be described.
Details of step 5 (S4195) will be described. The various setting button input monitoring process 15 (S4195) in the 12th embodiment is a process executed in place of the various setting button input monitoring process (see FIG. 247) in the 11th embodiment, and like the various setting button input monitoring process (see FIG. 247) in the 11th embodiment, it is a process for monitoring the operation (pressing) of a non-performance button (a button for changing the setting of the volume or the amount of light) and, when an operation is detected, changing the setting according to the type of the button that was operated.

In the various setting button input monitoring process 15 (see FIG. 265) in the 12th embodiment, the same processes as those in S40801 and S40808 in the various setting button input monitoring process (see FIG. 247) in the 11th embodiment are executed in the respective processes of S40801 and S40808. Also, in the various setting button input monitoring process 15 (see FIG. 265) in the 12th embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S40801 that a press of any of the non-performance buttons has been detected (S40801: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the operation valid period flag 223fb is on (S40811). S4081
When it is determined in the process of 1 that the operation valid period flag 223fb is off (S4
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S40811 that the valid period flag 223fb is on, the process proceeds to S40801.
It is then determined whether or not the press of the up button UB or the down button DB was detected in the process (S40812).

In the process of S40812, if it is determined that pressing of the up button UB or the down button DB has been detected (S40812: Yes), up/down button pressing process is executed to execute control according to the cursor position (selected item) at the time of button pressing and the type of button that was detected to be pressed (S40813), and this process ends. Details of this up/down button pressing process (S40813) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266.
In the process of 12, if it is determined that the button that was detected to be pressed this time was neither the up button UB nor the down button DB (S40812: No), then it is determined whether a press of the right button RB or the left button LB was detected (S40814).

In the process of S40814, if it is determined that pressing of the right button RB or the left button LB has been detected (S40814: Yes), a process for when the left or right button is pressed is executed (S40815) to execute control according to the cursor position (selected item) at the time of pressing the button and the type of button that was detected to be pressed, and then this process ends. Details of this process for when the left or right button is pressed (S40815) will be described later with reference to FIG. 267.
In the process of 40814, if it is determined that the button that has been detected to be pressed this time is neither the right button RB nor the left button LB (S40814: No), this process ends as is.

Next, the above-mentioned up/down button pressing process (S40813) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 266. Fig. 266 is a flow chart showing this up/down button pressing process (S40813). As described above, this up/down button pressing process (S40813) is a process for executing control according to the cursor position (selected item) at the time of button pressing and the type of button that was detected to be pressed when either the up button UB or the down button DB is pressed in the operation support performance.

In the process when the up or down button is pressed (see FIG. 266), first, the cursor position storage area 223g
The data of a is read out (S41401), and the read out data is the upper cursor position ("
In the process of S41402, it is determined whether the cursor position storage area 223 is data (i.e., "00H") indicating a state in which the "Support" item is selected (S41402).
If it is determined that the data stored in is data indicating the upper cursor position (S
41402: Yes), and then it is determined whether or not pressing of the up button UB has been detected (S41403).

In the process of S41403, when it is determined that the press of the up button UB is detected (S41403: Yes), the character mode setting process (see FIG. 245) is executed to select a character mode corresponding to the press and to display the character image 8 of the character mode selected by the selection.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41403 that the up button UB has not been pressed (i.e., the down button DB has been pressed) (S41403: No), the volume setting button image 815b is set to an illumination state (S41405), the data in the cursor position storage area 223ga is updated to "01H" (S41406), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41402 that the data stored in the cursor position storage area 223ga is not data indicating the upper cursor position (data indicating the lower cursor position) (S41402: No), then it is determined whether or not pressing of the up button UB has been detected (S41407). If it is determined in the process of S41407 that pressing of the up button UB has been detected (S41407: Yes), then
The cheer button image 815a is set to a light emitting state (S41408), the data in the cursor position storage area 223ga is updated to "00H" (S41409), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S41407, if it is determined that the press of the up button UB has not been detected (i.e., the press of the down button DB has been detected) (S41407: No), this process ends.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned left/right button pressing process (S40815) will be described with reference to Fig. 267. As described above, the left/right button pressing process (S40815) is a process for executing control according to the cursor position (selected item) at the time of button pressing and the type of button that was detected to be pressed when either the left button LB or the right button RB is pressed during the operation support performance.

In this process when the left or right button is pressed (see FIG. 267), first, the cursor position storage area 22
The data stored in the 3ga is read out (S41501), and the read out data is data indicating the lower cursor position (the state in which the "volume setting" item is selected) (i.e., "01H"
In the process of S41502, if it is determined that the data indicating the lower cursor position ("01H") has been read out (S41502:
Yes), and then it is determined whether or not pressing of the right button RB is detected (S4150
3).

In the process of S41503, when it is determined that the right button RB is pressed (S41503: Yes), the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 is increased by one step and the third
The number of volume bars (the number of bars with diagonal lines) displayed on the symbol display device 81 is increased by one (S41504), and this process is terminated. If the volume setting is at the maximum value (five stages) at the time of pressing the right button RB, the volume setting cannot be increased any further, and the process of S41504 is skipped. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S41503 that pressing the left button LB has been detected (S41503: No), the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 is decreased by one stage, and the number of volume bars displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is decreased by one (S41505), and this process is terminated. If the volume setting is at the minimum value (one stage) at the time of pressing the left button LB, the volume setting cannot be decreased any further, and the process of S41505 is skipped.

In response to this, in the process of S41502, the data indicating the upper cursor position ("00
If it is determined that "H") has been read out (S41502: No), this means that the right button RB or the left button LB has been pressed even though the "Support" item has been selected (an operation corresponding to a change in the volume setting has been performed in a state in which the volume setting cannot be changed).
The processes of S41503 to S41505 are skipped and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, during the execution period of the operation support performance, the player can select whether to participate in the operation support performance or change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 by operating the operation button 230. Specifically, during the execution of the operation support performance, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to select an item called "support" (
A cheer button image 815a) and an item called “volume setting” (volume setting button image 815b)
and the player can select any item by operating the up button UB and the down button DB. More specifically, when the up button UB is pressed with the item "support" selected, a text image 814 indicating the expectation of a big win or development is displayed, while when the item "volume setting" is selected, the volume setting of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by pressing the right button RB or the left button LB. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, even if an operation corresponding to another item is performed when one item is selected,
It is configured so that control corresponding to other items is avoided. That is, even if the right button RB or the left button LB is pressed while the "Cheer" item is selected, control to change the volume setting is avoided (restricted). Also, even if the up button UB is pressed while the "Volume Setting" item is selected, the "Cheer" item is simply selected. That is, the text image 81
In this way, it is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) a situation in which a player who is trying to participate in the operation support performance makes an operation mistake and the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed against his or her will.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, in addition to the character form of the character image 814 displayed in the display area HR11 during the operation support performance, the cheer button image 81
The display mode (light emission color) of the cheer button image 815a can also suggest the likelihood of a big win. Also, the display mode of the cheer button image 815a is configured to suggest the likelihood of a big win more easily when a player who does not perform any operation is playing (the likelihood of a big win being set to a light emission color with a high expectation is high). This makes it possible to suggest the likelihood of a big win even to players who do not participate in the operation support performance, preventing the game from becoming monotonous. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th embodiment, in order to suppress fraudulent acts of attracting game balls from the front side of the game board 13 using magnets or the like, the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are arranged so as to be less susceptible to the magnetic attraction force generated from the front side of the glass unit 16 (arranged further back in the front view than other parts of the guide flow path 6755b). As a result, even if a fraudulent act of guiding game balls to the distribution rotor 6755f using magnets or the like is performed, the influence of the magnetic force can be weakened directly above the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c, so that the game balls are more likely to flow down to the guide flow path 6755b2 directly below the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the discharge area 6755d directly below the ball discharge door 6755c. In other words, since it becomes difficult to guide the game balls to the distribution rotor 6755f side, fraudulent acts using magnets or the like can be suppressed. In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the small prize valid period is set so that the small prize ends before the game ball that entered the lottery device 6755 is forcibly guided to the flow path on the distribution rotor 6755f side by a magnet or the like and enters one of the ball entrances by the distribution rotor 6755f.
None of the game balls that entered 755 reached any of the entry holes (lottery device 6
755), the small prize ends when a specific period (for example, 6.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the small prize. In other words, a valid period is set so that a gaming ball that has flowed down inside the lottery device 6755 without the aid of an external force such as magnetic force (only by gravity or the inclination of the guide flow passage 6755b) can easily enter any of the ball entrances, while a gaming ball that has been guided in a direction different from the intended direction by a magnet or the like forcibly (unreasonably) changing the flow direction is difficult to reach any of the ball entrances. With this configuration, it is possible for a fraudulent person to use a magnet or the like to redirect gaming balls that have flowed into the lottery device 6755 to the distribution rotor 6
Even if the ball is guided to the ball entrance 755f, the effective period of the small win can be ended before the ball is distributed to one of the ball entrances by the distribution rotor 6755f (
Even if the ball lands in the V winning hole, the big win will not start), so there is no merit to cheating, and the deterrent effect against cheating can be further enhanced.

In the twelfth embodiment, the cheer button image 81 is displayed during the operation cheering performance.
Although the light-emitting color of the cheer button image 815a is configured to suggest the likelihood of a big win, the target suggested by the light-emitting color is not limited to the likelihood of a big win. Instead of or in addition to the likelihood of a big win, the light-emitting color may suggest the likelihood of development or the likelihood of a small win in the V Challenge. By configuring in this way, the light-emitting color (display mode) of the cheer button image 815a can be more noticeable, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the twelfth embodiment, the luminous color of the cheer button image 815a is set to the character style selection table 2
In the above, the cheer button image 815a is configured to be set regardless of the data table selected from the data table 222fa, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the cheer button image 815a may be configured to indicate which table among the character mode selection tables 222fa is to be used to select the character mode. In other words, when a table is set in which a character mode with high expectation is selected at a high rate, a high expectation luminous color may be set for the cheer button image 815a. By configuring in this way, when a high expectation luminous color is set, the player can participate more actively in the operation cheering performance.

In the twelfth embodiment, the small win is forcibly ended when 6.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small win game, making it impossible (difficult) to perform fraudulent acts using magnets or the like, but the method of preventing fraudulent acts using magnets or the like is not limited to this. For example, a known sensor means capable of detecting whether or not the game ball is in contact with the ceiling part in a predetermined range of the guide flow path 6755b (for example, the range where the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c are provided) may be provided, and an error may be notified if the period of contact with the sensor means is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second). When a magnet or the like is used to guide the game ball to the distribution rotor 6755f, the game ball is guided to the guide flow path 6755f at least when passing through the upper opening and closing door 6755bU and the ball discharge door 6755c.
55b. In other words, the gaming ball is likely to come into contact with the ceiling portion in the range where these are arranged. Therefore, when it is detected that the gaming ball is in contact with the ceiling portion for a predetermined period of time (for example, one second) or more, it almost means that fraudulent acts using magnets or the like are being performed, and therefore, by configuring the gaming ball to notify an error in this case, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using magnets or the like.

<Modification of the twelfth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the twelfth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 268. In the twelfth embodiment described above, during the execution of the operation support performance, a cheer button image 815a indicating the "cheering" item and a volume setting button image 815b indicating the "volume setting" item are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the item (whether to participate in the operation support performance or to change the volume setting) can be selected by the player's operation. However, in the twelfth embodiment, the light intensity setting cannot be changed during the execution of the operation support performance.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to also display the "light intensity setting" item (light intensity setting button 815g). That is, the player is able to select the items "cheering", "volume setting" and "light intensity setting" depending on the operation of the operation button 230. This allows not only the desires of players who wish to change the volume setting during the operation cheering performance to be fulfilled, but also the desires of players who wish to change the light intensity setting. This further improves the convenience for players.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during execution of the operation support effect in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 268, in this modified example, a support button image 815a
In addition to the volume setting button image 815b, the up button image 815c, and the down button image 815d, a left button image 815e in the shape of a substantially equilateral triangle facing left displayed on the right side of the volume setting button image 815b, a right button image 815f in the shape of a substantially equilateral triangle facing right displayed on the right side of the left button image 815e, and a light intensity setting button image 815g in the shape of a horizontally elongated rectangle displayed on the right side of the right button image 815f are displayed. The light intensity setting button 815g can select the item "light intensity setting" by pressing the right button RB when the item "volume setting" is selected (when the volume setting image 815b is in a light-emitting display mode). That is, the volume setting image 815b appears to be turned off and the light intensity setting image 815g appears to be lighted (see FIG. 268). When the left button LB is pressed with the item "light intensity setting" selected, the item "volume setting" is selected. On the other hand, if the left button LB or the right button RB is pressed while the "Cheering" item is selected, the "Cheering" item will remain selected (the "Light Intensity Settings" item will not be selected).

In this way, by configuring the light intensity setting as well as the volume setting to be changeable during the operation support performance, it is possible to meet the needs of players who wish to change settings during the operation support performance, thereby further improving the convenience of the players.

In this modified example, the "Light setting" item can be selected by pressing the right button RB when the "Volume setting" item is selected, but the correspondence between the operation content of each button and the selected item can be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, when the "Support" item is selected and the right button RB is pressed, the "Light setting" item is selected, whereas when the "Light setting" item is selected and the left button LB is pressed,
The "support" item may be selected. By configuring in this way, whether the "volume setting" item or the "light intensity setting" item is selected, the selection can be made by simply pressing button 1 when the "support" item is selected (i.e., the initial state in the operational support performance), thereby further improving convenience for the player.

In the twelfth embodiment and its modified example, during the execution of the operation support performance, when one of the items is selected, an operation corresponding to the selected item is performed, and the control corresponding to the selected item is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when one of the items is selected, a predetermined decision operation (for example, pressing the center button CB) is performed to confirm the selection of the corresponding item. In this case, it may be configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to select other items after the decision operation. By configuring in this way, the player can focus on the selected item.

In the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the character state is determined by lottery every time the display condition of the character image 814 is satisfied during the operation support performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the character state steps up (promoting from white to blue to green to red) according to the number of operations performed by the player. In this case, for example, the character state may step up to red in the case of a big win, but it may be impossible (difficult) to step up to red in the case of a miss. The specified number of operations at which each color steps up may be different depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern and the tendency of the player's operation (participation status in the operation support performance).
By adopting this configuration, unless a certain number of operations (for example, two times) or more are performed, the character form with the lowest expectation is always displayed, so that a player who wants to predict the expectation from the character form can be made to perform operations more actively. The condition for stepping up is not limited to the number of operations, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which whether or not to step up is performed is selected by lottery based on the result of a lottery for a special pattern and a probability according to the player's operating tendency. Even in this case, the player can be made to actively participate in the operation support performance. Furthermore, in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the likelihood of stepping up occurring is suggested in advance. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the suggestion is made by the color of the character 813 imitating a bird. By configuring in this way, even a player who tends not to perform operations can be made to try participating in the operation support performance when a character 813 with a high expectation of stepping up occurring is displayed, so that the player's motivation to participate in the operation support performance can be further improved.

In the above embodiments, the right variable winning device 65 is provided as a configuration for awarding prize balls by making the game balls enter the right variable winning device 65 when a big win or a small win occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the right variable winning device 65 may be used in a gaming machine (so-called two-type and one-type two-type) in which a big win is started when a game ball enters a specific area inside the right variable winning device 65. By configuring in this way, the more game balls passing through the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the more game balls will enter the right specific winning port 65a, making it seem easier for game balls to enter the specific area. Therefore, the player can judge the expectation of a big win from the number of game balls on the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1.

In the above first to fourth embodiments and seventh embodiment, two types of specific winning openings (right specific winning opening 65a, left specific winning opening 650a) with different closing conditions are provided, and the type of specific winning opening to be opened is switched depending on the number of rounds, etc. However, this is not limited to this.
By configuring in this way, the left variable winning device 650 can be eliminated, and the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

In the first to fourth embodiments and the seventh embodiment, the game ball is launched at the maximum launch strength (launch speed) to reach the operation winning hole (the operation winning hole 660 in the first to third embodiments,
In the fourth embodiment, the right operating winning hole 661 and the left operating winning hole 662 are configured to allow game balls to enter at all times, and balls entering the operating winning holes are determined to be valid only during the jackpot waiting state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the game may be configured so that balls are physically unable to enter the operating winning holes in states other than the jackpot waiting state. Specifically,
For example, the flow path for the active winning port may be provided with an electric device that can close the flow path, and the electric device may be opened only from the time the game is in the jackpot waiting state until the game ball enters the active winning port. Even in this configuration, the jackpot can be started based on the detection of the ball entering the active winning port during the jackpot waiting state.

In the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 controls the start timing of the presentation mode such as the standby state presentation and the right-hit expectation indication presentation, and the update process of the mode, but this is not limited to this. For example, the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 may control the presentation mode. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113
In this case, the passage detection sensor 228 may be electrically connected to the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. This allows accurate updating of the status of the chance meter CM and the status of the stamina gauge LG, etc., even if the control related to the performance status is transferred to another control device.

In the above-mentioned first to fourth embodiments and seventh embodiment, the opening and closing door 6 is opened during the execution of the standby state performance.
In the above embodiment, a passing detection sensor 228 is provided to detect the number of game balls passing through the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f1, and the state of the chance meter CM is changed according to the detection result of the sensor, thereby allowing the player to know the number of game balls on the top surface of the opening/closing door 65f1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known photographing means (e.g.,
A video camera or the like may be provided, and an image or video taken by the photographing means may be displayed on at least a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot waiting state. This allows the player to more accurately grasp the situation on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1.

In the above-mentioned embodiments, a zigzag flow path is formed on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, in which the direction of travel of the game ball is changed multiple times, so that when the game ball is hit to the right in succession, a number of game balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of winning balls in the first round of the jackpot can flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the same time, but this is not limited to this. For example, instead of forming a zigzag flow path on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1, the width of the opening and closing door 65f1 (and the right specific winning port 65a) may be simply widened to lengthen the distance when the game ball passes over the opening and closing door 65f1, so that a number of game balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of winning balls in the first round can flow down at the same time. In this case, it is not necessary to configure the number of game balls flowing down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 at the same time when the game ball is hit to the right in succession to exceed the upper limit of the number of winning balls in the first round. For example, the width (path length) of the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 may be configured to be longer than the length obtained by multiplying the diameter of the game ball by the maximum number of winning balls in the first round. By configuring in this way, for example, when the game balls on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 cannot flow down to the bottom of the game board 13 due to ball clogging, it is possible to make the game balls reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 by hitting from the right in advance, and when the next jackpot is hit, the game balls can be inserted at the same time in the first round if the next jackpot is hit. Note that a shielding member or the like may be provided to prevent the game balls that reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 from flowing down to the bottom of the game board 13 during normal times. That is, the game balls that reach the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1 cannot be inserted through the opening and closing door 65f1 until the jackpot is hit.
In this case, if the ball is hit to the right before the big win, the ball can be easily over-won the next big win.

Thirteenth Embodiment
In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment described above, in addition to winning a jackpot in the lottery for the special symbol, a specification was adopted in which a jackpot can also be won by winning a small jackpot, which is a type of miss, in the lottery for the special symbol and the game ball entering the V winning hole (specific area) provided in the game area during the small jackpot game. Also, in the ninth embodiment described above, a small jackpot can be won with a high probability (for example, 9/10) only in the lottery for the second special symbol (a lottery for a special symbol based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640) (a lottery for the second special symbol is more likely to result in a small jackpot than a lottery for the first special symbol), and the small jackpot can be won by the lottery for the second ball entrance 640 depending on the game state.
In other words, in the above-mentioned ninth embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot by drawing the special symbol is set constant regardless of the game state, and the second ball entry hole 640 is set to be variable.
By varying the probability of opening the electric device 640a (probability of winning a normal symbol), the normal symbol variation time, the opening time, etc. according to the game state, the possibility of winning a small prize is varied according to the game state, and as a result, the possibility of winning a big prize is varied (so-called specifications of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine).

In contrast to this, in the present thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to win a small prize even in the drawing of the first special symbol (it is easier to win a small prize in the drawing of the second special symbol than in the drawing of the first special symbol, but the probability of winning a small prize in the drawing of the first special symbol is higher than the probability of winning a big prize).
It is composed of:

That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, even when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, a small prize is won in a lottery (lottery for the first special symbol) in which the execution condition is established based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, which is possible to enter (the ease of ball entry does not change depending on the game state set), and a specification is adopted in which a big prize is won (the execution condition of the big prize game is established) by a game ball entering a V entry port (specific area) provided in the game area (within the variable entry device in which the game ball can enter during the small prize game) during the small prize game. That is, the thirteenth embodiment differs from the above-mentioned ninth embodiment in that it is possible to execute a big prize game with multiple triggers even in a situation in which the normal state, which is the game state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is mainly executed, is set. This allows the player to play in a state where he or she is constantly expecting a big win of the special symbol or a small win, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, a plurality of V entry ports (specific regions) are provided in the internal region of the variable entry device that is variably operated during the small win game, and a flow path that makes it easy for the ball to reach the V entry port (specific region) and a flow path that makes it difficult for the ball to reach the V entry port (specific region) are provided as the game content for passing the ball through the V entry port (specific region) during the small win game period. Then, the ease of the ball reaching the V entry port (specific region) during the small win game is configured to be different depending on the set game state and the type of small win won.

In addition, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of balls that can reach the V winning hole (specific area) during one small win game is always one. This makes it possible to suppress the frequency with which a ball passes through the V winning hole (specific area) during a small win game and a big win game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player executes an excessive big win game. In addition, since it is configured so that multiple balls are not guided to a route that can reach the V winning hole (specific area) during one small win game, it is possible to increase the winning rate of the V winning hole (specific area) per ball that flows down the route that can reach the V winning hole (specific area).

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the amount of the bonus given to the player based on the jackpot game is different between the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the small prize in the lottery of the first special symbol. Specifically, in this embodiment, the bonus (the number of prize balls given during the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game ends) given to the player based on the jackpot game executed is greater (to the player's advantage) when the small prize is won than when the jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery.

This allows the player to be more interested in whether the ball will pass through the V winning hole (specific area) during the small win game. In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality (two) of V winning holes (specific areas) are arranged in the variable winning device in which the ball can win during the small win game, and a distribution means is provided that can distribute the ball that has won in the variable winning device to a plurality of flow paths. Then, the ball is guided to a different V winning hole (specific area) according to the flow path distributed by the distribution means.

Furthermore, each flow path is formed to guide the ball that has won the variable winning device to each V winning port (specific area) so that the time (flow time) it takes for the ball to reach each V winning port (specific area) is different. This makes it possible for the ball that has won the variable winning device during the small win game to reach the V winning port (specific area) at various times. Therefore, the player can continue to have expectations of winning the V prize until the small win game ends.

In the thirteenth embodiment, a delay flow path is provided as one of a plurality of flow paths through which the winning ball flows down after winning in the variable winning device, in order to make the flow time of the ball indefinite (to delay).
The delay flow path is configured so that the player can see the ball flowing down the delay flow path. Also, the delay flow path is provided with a plurality of outlets, and a V-winning port (special area) is provided in a portion of the plurality of outlets.

This allows the player to pay attention to whether the ball flowing down the delay flow path will pass through the V winning port (specific area). Also, by providing a delay flow path, it is possible to ensure a period of time until the ball flows out from one of the multiple outlets.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the time-saving state is set as the game state, the lottery for the second special symbol that will win a small prize with a high probability (approximately 1/2 probability) is more likely to be executed (more likely to be executed than in the normal state), and when a small prize is won in the lottery for the second special symbol during the time-saving state, the ball that entered the variable prize-winning device passes through the V prize-winning hole (specific area) with a high probability (almost 100%). Then, after the big prize game executed during the time-saving state ends, the normal state is set. Furthermore, the right to draw the second special symbol is stored (reserved memory).
It is possible to configure it.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, when a jackpot game in which a time-saving state is set is executed, it is configured so that it becomes easier to execute another jackpot game after that. By configuring in this way, even if a jackpot game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game) is executed,
This can prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state without a jackpot game being executed. Also, if the jackpot conditions are met during the time-saving state (winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, or the ball passing through the V winning hole (specific area) during a small jackpot game), the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. This prevents game states (time-saving states) advantageous to the player from being set consecutively across jackpot games, resulting in an overly advantageous game for the player. In addition, because game states (time-saving states) advantageous to the player are not set consecutively,
The amount of the privilege (the number of prize balls that can be awarded during a jackpot game) given to the player in one jackpot game can be increased.

In addition, in this thirteenth embodiment, the lottery right for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, so that when the jackpot condition is met during the time-saving state and the jackpot game is executed, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed as many times as the reserved and stored number in the normal state. Therefore, even after the normal state is set, the player can play in the hope of winning a jackpot or small jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol and executing the jackpot game again. Furthermore, if a small jackpot is won with the second special symbol, a small jackpot game that makes it easier to pass the ball through the V winning hole (specific area) is executed, and after the jackpot game that is executed based on the ball passing through the V winning hole (specific area), the time-saving state is set (it becomes easier to set).
It is structured as follows.

This makes it possible to configure gameplay that can provide a player with a jackpot during the normal state and a jackpot during the time-saving state as one set, making it easier to provide the player with multiple jackpot games when a predetermined condition (a jackpot condition under which the time-saving state is set) is met.

<Regarding the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 269 to 277. The board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment is as follows:
The major difference with respect to the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment described above is that the devices provided in the right area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 within the game area on the game board 13 have been changed. The other configurations (such as the devices provided in the left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) are the same, and the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the game area on the game board 13 is divided into a right area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (area where a ball shot so as to exceed the game area above the variable display unit 80 can flow down), a left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (area where a ball shot so as not to exceed the game area above the variable display unit 80 can flow down), and a lower area (area near the top of the outlet 66) where both balls that have flowed down the right area and balls that have flowed down the left area can flow down. In addition, a game aimed at the right area will be referred to as a right-hand hit game, and a game aimed at the left area will be referred to as a left-hand hit game.

First, the overall configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 269. Fig. 269 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 269, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment has the same board surface configuration as the game board 13 in the ninth embodiment described above (Fig. 18).
6), a small prize winning device (variable prize winning device) 10 is used instead of the lottery device 6750.
650 is provided, and instead of the configuration of the second ball entrance 640 with the electric role 640a, a second ball entrance 10640 with a gate-type electric role 10640a is provided.
The difference is that the special MAX V winning slot 6752 has been removed.

The small win winning device 10650 is configured as a variable winning device that, like the lottery device 6750 of the ninth embodiment described above, is in a state in which a game ball can enter (i.e., the opening and closing door 10650b is opened) when a small win is obtained in the lottery of a special symbol. A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this embodiment, it is configured so that one round game is executed in one small win game, and the opening and closing door 10650b is configured to open and close multiple times in one round game. Note that, unlike the configuration of this embodiment, the opening and closing door 10650 is configured so that one round game is executed in one round game.
0b may be configured to be opened only once.

Furthermore, the small prize winning device 10650 has multiple V winning holes (specific areas) inside so that the winning ball during the small prize game can pass through. In other words, the small prize winning device 10650 is a device that has a function for achieving the big prize condition in addition to the function of a variable winning device. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to Figure 270 onwards, but the ball that wins in this small prize winning device 10650 passes through two V winning holes (straight V winning hole 1065
7, the special route V winning hole 10677), or three out holes (out holes 10654, 1
The ball is configured to enter either one of the slots (0680a, 10680b) and be ejected outside the game board 13.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when a ball enters the small prize winning device 10650 during a small prize game, the winning balls (three balls) of the same value are awarded regardless of which V prize opening (specific area) or out opening the winning ball enters. Therefore, when a small prize game is played, the number of prize balls awarded to the player during the small prize game can be made constant regardless of the result of the small prize game, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to whether the winning ball passes through the V prize opening (specific area) without worrying about the number of prize balls acquired during the small prize game.

Different from the configuration of the thirteenth embodiment described above, for example, the small prize winning device 1065
The number of prize balls given to the player may be different depending on the type of ball entry port (V entry port, out port) into which the ball that entered the 0 ball enters. For example, if the ball enters the V entry port, more prize balls may be given to the player than if the ball enters the out port. By configuring in this way, when the ball enters the V entry port (specific area) during the small win game, the player can be in a favorable state not only in terms of whether or not the big win game is executed, but also in terms of the number of prize balls given during the small win game, compared to when the ball cannot enter the V entry port (specific area). In this way, by configuring so that the difference between the benefits given to the player (the big win game and the prize balls during the small win game) becomes large depending on the result of the small win game, the player can be motivated to play in order to get more benefits.

Also, unlike the above-mentioned configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which more prize balls are awarded to a player when the ball enters the out hole than when the ball enters the V hole. By configuring in this way, even if the ball does not enter the V hole (specific area) during a small win game,
Since it is possible to award a predetermined number of prize balls (more prize balls than would be awarded if the ball entered the V winning hole) to the player, even if there are consecutive small winning games in which the ball fails to enter the V winning hole (specific area), it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly.

In the thirteenth embodiment, a rotating body 1065 is provided inside the small prize winning device 10650.
2 is provided, and is configured to receive the balls that have won the small prize winning device 10650 and flowed down the first flow path 10651a. This rotating body 10652 has a function of limiting means for limiting the number of balls that have won the small prize winning device 10650 and flow down the flow path (second flow path 10652) that can enter the V winning hole (specific area), and is configured to rotate according to a predetermined rule when the small prize game starts. A detailed explanation of the rotating body 10652 will be described later with reference to FIG. 270 and subsequent figures.

Then, the balls flowing down the second flow path 10651b are distributed to either a flow path that can enter the straight V winning port 10657 or a flow path that can enter the special device route V winning port 10677, depending on the open/close status of the movable piece 10653. Here, the flow path that can enter the straight V winning port 10657 does not have any ball entry port through which balls can enter other than the straight V winning port 10657. In other words,
When the ball is distributed to a flow path that can enter the straight V winning hole 10657, it is determined that the ball will enter the V winning hole (specific area). In the thirteenth embodiment, the ball that reaches the second flow path 10651b by the operation of the above-mentioned rotating body 10652 is determined to enter the straight V winning hole 10657.
It is designed so that it takes about one second for the ball to land at 657.

On the other hand, the balls distributed to the flow path that can enter the prize winning hole 10677 of the accessory route V flow down the accessory route 10670 and are guided to the accessory device 106 provided below the variable display unit 80.
The specific configuration of this accessory device 10675 will be described later with reference to FIG. 275, but the accessory device 10675 is provided with a rolling device for making the behavior of the rolling ball irregular, one V winning hole (accessory route V winning hole 10677) into which the ball discharged from the rolling device can enter, and two outlets (10680a, 10680b).

The rolling device is composed of a rolling body formed in a mortar shape, and a constant rotating body 10675a having a blade member formed so as to be capable of colliding with a ball rolling on a rolling surface provided on the rolling body. The ball rolling on the rolling surface collides with the constant rotating body 10675a, and an irregular force is applied to the ball, so that the ball rolling on the rolling surface moves in a constant manner while changing the behavior of the ball.
Two V winning holes (route V winning hole 10677), or two out holes (10680
In the thirteenth embodiment, one-fourth of the balls that reach the accessory device 10675 go into the V-winning hole, and the remaining three-fourths go into the out hole (
The ball entry rate is set so that the ball will enter the first flow path 10651b (10680a, 10680b). In the thirteenth embodiment, the above-mentioned rotating body 10652 is operated to allow the ball that has reached the second flow path 10651b to reach the role device 10675 in about 2 seconds. The period from when the ball rolls on the rolling surface on the rolling body in the role device 10675 until it enters the role route V winning hole 10677 is indefinite (about 1 second to about 100 seconds).

In other words, in the thirteenth embodiment, two V-shaped winning ports (
A flow path that can win a prize is configured for each of the straight V prize opening 10657 and the special feature route V prize opening 10677, and a ball that flows down the flow path that can win a prize at the straight V prize opening 10657 will definitely enter the V prize opening (specific area), and a ball that flows down the flow path that can win a prize at the special feature route V prize opening 10677 will definitely enter the V prize opening (specific area).
The ball is configured to enter the V winning hole (specific area) at a rate of 1.
The time taken for the ball to enter the reel route V winning hole 10677 is configured to be longer than the time taken for the ball to enter 0657.

By configuring in this way, if the ball certainly enters the V winning hole (specific area), the result can be notified to the player in a short time, and if the ball enters the V winning hole (specific area) with a probability of about 1/4, the player can take time to enjoy whether the ball will enter the V winning hole (specific area). Furthermore, in the role device 10675, the ball's behavior is configured to be irregular by the rolling device, and the period until the ball is discharged from the rolling device is configured to be indefinite. And, whether the ball enters the role route V winning hole 10677 is determined by the behavior of the ball rolling on the rolling surface of the rolling device.

Therefore, the player can play the game while paying close attention to how the ball behaves and for how long it rolls, and this prevents the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Although the detailed configuration will be described later, in this thirteenth embodiment, it is configured to variably set whether the ball is distributed to a flow path capable of winning the Straight V winning port 10657 during a small win game or to a flow path capable of winning the role route V winning port 10677 depending on the type of special symbol that has won the small win (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the game state at the time of winning the small win (normal state, time-saving state). Specifically, when a small win is won in a lottery for the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state, a ball that has won the small win winning device 10650 during that small win game is more likely to be distributed to a flow path capable of winning the Straight V winning port 10657 (
The prize is structured so that it is easier to allocate than when a small prize is won under other conditions.

That is, as described above, this embodiment is configured so that the drawing of the second special symbol is easily executed during the time-saving state, and the probability of winning a small prize in the drawing of the second special symbol is higher than that of the drawing of the first special symbol (the probability of winning a small prize is about 1/2). The time-saving state is configured to continue until the drawing (variation) of the special symbol is executed 100 times. Therefore, in most cases where the time-saving state is set, the next big prize game is executed before the time-saving state ends. In this way, in the time-saving state in which the next big prize game is promised, in order to execute the big prize game efficiently, the ball is configured to be difficult to be distributed to a flow path that can enter the role route V winning port 10677 during the small prize game, so that the game can be played smoothly.

A ball launched into the right area of the game board 13 flows down the right flow path 10600 and then flows down the S-shaped serpentine flow path 10600a. An opening/closing door 10650b of the small prize winning device 10650 is disposed at the most upstream portion of this serpentine flow path 10600a, and when the opening/closing door 10650b is open due to a small prize game, a ball launched into the right area by a right-hand hit game wins in the small prize winning device 10650. On the other hand, when the opening/closing door 10650b is closed, the upper surface of the opening/closing door 10650b becomes part of the serpentine flow path 10600a, and the ball enters the opening/closing door 10650b.
50b and flows down the serpentine flow path 10600a.

About half of the balls flowing out from the outlet 10600b of the meandering flow path 10600a enter the normal winning hole 10067 by means of nails set in the game board 13, and the remaining half of the balls flow down to the area where the gate-type electric device 10640a is arranged. The normal winning hole 10067 is a winning hole that triggers the lottery for the normal pattern, and when a ball enters it,
When the lottery conditions for the normal symbol are met, one prize ball is paid out to the player. In this way, by making the structure that triggers the lottery for the normal symbol a gate shape that the ball can enter, rather than a gate shape that the ball can pass through, it is possible to prevent other benefits from being awarded by the ball that triggers the lottery for the normal symbol.

The gate-type electric device 10640a is an electric device that operates when a winning symbol is drawn in a normal symbol drawing, and is usually located in a standby state embedded in the game board 13. When a winning symbol is drawn in a normal symbol drawing (a winning symbol is drawn in a normal symbol drawing), the gate-type electric device 10640a operates to a guided state protruding from the game board 13. The gate-type electric device 10640a that has been activated to the guided state is capable of receiving balls flowing down the game area, and the balls received on the upper surface of the gate-type electric device 10640a are fed through the second ball entrance 1.
In order to guide the water down toward the second inlet 10640, the upper surface is configured to slope downward toward the one end side of the second inlet 10640.

The detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG. 277, but when a normal winning is won in the normal state, the gate-type electric device 10640a is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds) as a normal winning game, and when a normal winning is won in the time-saving state, the gate-type electric device 10640a is operated for a long time (2 seconds) as a time-saving winning game, and the gate-type electric device 10640a is configured so that it takes about 0.8 seconds for the ball to pass through its upper surface. Therefore, even if a normal winning is won during the normal state, the ball will not enter the second winning hole 10640.

The ball that has passed through the gate-type electric device 10640a in the standby state, or that has flowed down the upper surface of the gate-type electric device 10640a in the guided state and fallen downward before reaching the second winning hole 10640 when the gate-type electric device 10640a becomes in the standby state, is configured to flow down toward the variable winning device 10065 for big win.
Balls that do not win flow into an outlet 66 and are discharged from the pachinko machine 10 through an outlet (not shown).

Next, the detailed configuration of the right area of the game board 13 in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 270 to 277. First, the configuration near the small win winning device 10650 will be described with reference to Figs. 270 to 274. Fig. 270 is an enlarged view of the right area of the game board 13 near the small win winning device 10650, Fig. 271 is a view showing the behavior of the ball when the ball is stored in the storage section of the rotating body 10652 during a small win game, Fig. 272 is a view showing the behavior of the ball when the rotating body 10652 is operated and the ball is distributed to a flow path that can win the role route V winning port 10677, and Fig. 273 is a view showing the behavior of the ball when the rotating body 10652 is operated and the ball is distributed to a flow path that can win the straight V winning port 10657. And Fig. 274 is a view showing the behavior of the ball when the rotating body 10652 is operated and the ball is distributed to a flow path that can win the straight V winning port 10657.
FIG. 2 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the structure in detail.

As shown in FIG. 270, below the opening and closing door 10650b, a first flow path 10651a is formed between the opening and closing door 10650b and the rolling wall 10650f. The rolling wall 10650f is
The wall 10650f is configured to incline downwards toward the rotor 10652 (to the lower left as viewed in FIG. 270) so that the balls flowing in from the open door 10650b flow down toward the rotor 10652. The downstream end of the rolling wall 10650f is configured to be located above the rotor 10652, and the balls discharged from the downstream end of the rolling wall 11650f flow down toward the rotor 10652 with a drop of 15 mm, which is higher than the radius of the ball (5.5 mm).
The time it takes for the liquid to flow down 651a and reach the rotor 10652 is 0.5 seconds.

The first flow path 10651a is formed approximately parallel to the opening and closing door 10650b with a space large enough for one ball to flow down (approximately 15 mm in the depth direction and approximately 15 mm in the height direction as viewed in FIG. 270). The balls that flow in from the opening and closing door 10650b are aligned in a row and are then passed through the first flow path 10651a.
651a is configured to flow downward.

The downstream end position of the rolling wall 10650f is located closer to the rotor 1 than the downstream end position of the opening/closing door 10650b.
0652 direction, and above the downstream end of the rolling wall 10650f (vertically above)
The rib 10650c is provided on the opening and closing door 10650b. This configuration prevents the ball that enters the opening and closing door 10650b in the open state during the small win game from reaching the rotating body 10652 directly without rolling on the rolling wall 10650f. This prevents the ball from colliding with the rotating body 10652 with force, causing the rotating body 10652 to be damaged. In addition, although a detailed description will be given later, in this embodiment, the opening and closing door 10650b is configured to repeatedly perform an opening operation for a short period (e.g., 0.2 seconds) during the small win game, so that it is difficult for multiple balls (three or more balls) to enter the small win winning device 10650 during one opening operation. This prevents a large number of balls from entering at once, causing ball clogging in the first flow path 10651a.

Although not shown, a flow-down delay member is provided on the upper surface of the opening and closing door 10650b, and the time required for the ball to pass through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 10650b is longer than the closing period (e.g., 0.3 seconds) of the opening and closing door 10650b, which is opened and closed multiple times during a small win game. This allows the ball shot by right-hitting play during a small win game to win the small win winning device 10650 with a high probability. Therefore, even if a small win game is set in which the opening and closing door 10650b is opened and closed at short intervals, a state unfavorable to the player (a state in which the ball does not win during the small win game) is unlikely to occur, and the winning ball can be processed smoothly.

The rotating body 10652 is disposed at a position where the ball flowing down the first flow path 10651a can reach, and is configured to be rotatable between an initial position and an operating position according to a predetermined rule by the driving force of an electric driving source (motor, etc.) not shown. In Fig. 270, the rotating body 10652 is shown positioned at the initial position, and is configured to rotate 90 degrees to the left to the operating position as shown in Fig. 271 when a predetermined operating condition is met.
In this embodiment, the rotating body 10652 moves from one position (for example, an initial position) to another position (
For example, the actuation time when the lever is changed to the actuated position is 0.1 seconds, and the lever is configured to rotate at the same speed in either direction.

In addition, the variable content (rotation content) of the rotating body 10652 may be configured other than that used in this embodiment. For example, the variable period (operation period) when the rotating body 10652 is variable from the initial position to the operating position may be different from the variable period when the rotating body 10652 is variable from the operating position to the initial position. In this case, the variable period (
The operating time may be increased.

When no balls are stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652 (when the possibility of the balls being stored is low), the variable period (operation time) is shortened, and the storage section 10652 of the rotating body 10652
When balls are stored in storage section 10652a (or when there is a high possibility that balls are stored therein), the variable period (operating time) may be configured to be longer so that the balls stored in storage section 10652a do not fly out.

The rotating body 10652 is formed with a storage section 10652a capable of storing one ball, and is configured to store one ball flowing out from the first flow path 10651a when the rotating body 10652 is in the operating position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270, when the rotating body 10652 is in the initial position, the ball flowing out from the first flow path 10651a is stored in the storage section 10652a.
2a, the first inlet 10651 formed above the rotor 10652
b, flows down through the outlet flow path 10651ba (flow time 0.5 seconds), and
The ball goes in at 54.

When a ball enters this outlet 10654, the same prize balls (3 balls) as those in the other winning ports provided in the small prize winning device 10650 are paid out, and the entered ball is inserted into the pachinko machine 1.
The balls are discharged to the outside of the small prize winning device 10650. In addition, an out sensor SZa for detecting the balls that have passed through the out flow path 10651ba is provided in the out flow path 10651ba, and a winning sensor SZ
This is referred to when determining whether the number of balls corresponding to the number of winning balls measured by 0 has been discharged from the small prize winning device 10650. The out sensor SZa is configured with the same specifications as the proximity sensor used in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, and is configured to be able to monitor ball clogging in the ball out flow path 10651ba by determining whether the ball has been detected continuously for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) or more that is sufficient for the ball to pass through the detection range of the proximity sensor.

As shown in FIG. 270, when the rotating body 10652 is located at the initial position, all the balls that have won the small prize winning device 10650 flow into the first inlet and out the first outlet 10654.
Therefore, even if a player fraudulently opens the door 10650b to allow a ball to enter the winning hole, the winning ball will not flow down the flow path that can lead to the V winning hole (specific area). Therefore, fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented.

A second flow path 10651c (flow period 1 second) is formed in the lower right direction of the rotor 10652, and a movable piece 10653 is disposed at the downstream end of the second flow path 10651c.
The movable piece 10653 is configured to be movable between a closed position and an open position according to a predetermined rule when a small winning game is started by the driving force of an electric driving source (solenoid, etc.) not shown. The movable piece 10653 is configured to be located at a closed position protruding from the game board 13 when not receiving the driving force of the electric driving source (solenoid, etc.) (initial state), and is configured to be movable to a release position buried in the game board 13 when receiving the driving force of the electric driving source (solenoid, etc.).

And, as shown in FIG. 270, when the movable piece 10653 is located at the closed position,
The ball that flows down the second flow path 10651c collides with the movable piece 10653 located in the closed position and flows into the second inlet 10651d. The ball that flows into the second inlet 10651d flows down the role route flow path 10651da and is guided toward the role device 10675 (see FIG. 269).
A role-route sensor SZ2 is provided to detect the ball that has passed through 0651da.
Like the above-mentioned out sensor SZa, it is used to determine the number of balls that have passed and the ball clogging status in the flow path. This role route sensor SZ2 is disposed at a position where a ball that has entered the second inlet 10651d passes through when it flows down the role route flow path 10651da for 0.7 seconds.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the ball that flows down the second flow path 10651c flows through different flow paths (straight V flow path 10651e, role route flow path 10651da) depending on the movable state of the movable piece 10653.
The ball passes through the movable piece 10653 in the open state,
The time required for the ball to enter the direct V winning hole 10657 is 0.5 seconds. The movable piece 1 in the closed state
The time required for the ball to collide with the symbol 0653 and pass through the role route sensor SZ2 is 0.7 seconds. When the ball enters the straight V winning hole 10657 or when the ball passes through the role route sensor SZ2, a special screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 283).

In other words, when a ball that has won a prize in the small prize winning device 10650 flows down the second flow path 10651c by the operation of the rotor 10675a, the timing at which the display screen (see FIG. 283(a)) for notifying the player that the ball has won a prize in the straight V winning port 10657 is displayed is earlier than the timing at which the display screen (see FIG. 283(a)) is displayed.
A display screen (FIG. 283) for notifying that the role route sensor SZ2 has detected the passage of the ball
By configuring in this way, the timing when the ball that won the small prize winning device 10650 flows down the flow path, specifically, the timing when the ball that won the small prize winning device 10650 flows down the flow path ...
By the time the display screen for notifying that the ball has entered the winning slot 657 is displayed, it is determined that the ball has passed through the role route sensor SZ2, that is, that the ball has entered the straight V winning slot 106.
It is possible to prevent the display screen for notifying that the ball did not win the straight V winning hole 10657 from being displayed. Therefore, the player can be made to have a sense of expectation and be interested in the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 until the timing arrives when the ball can win the straight V winning hole 10657.

As described above, the small prize winning device 10650 of the thirteenth embodiment is provided with a plurality of variable means (rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) that are variable according to a predetermined rule triggered by the start of a small prize game (the start of an opening period of a small prize game), and the winning ball is guided to different flow paths (out flow path 10651ba, accessory route flow path 10651da, straight V flow path) depending on the timing of the ball's entry into the small prize winning device 10650.
It is structured so that the funds are distributed among the following:

During the period when a small win game is not being played, multiple variable means within the small win winning device 10650 are configured to be located at positions where the ball is diverted to a flow path that is disadvantageous to the player, thereby preventing fraudulent behavior of causing a ball to win the small win winning device 10650 even when a small win game is not being played.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned multiple variable means are each configured to be variable between two positions, but without being limited to this, a configuration that can be variable to three or more positions may be used. For example, the movable piece 10653 is configured to be variable to a first position that distributes balls to the role route flow path 10651da, a second position that distributes balls to the straight V flow path 10651e, and a third position that distributes balls to an outlet for discharging balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and when an electric drive source (solenoid, etc.) does not apply a driving force to the movable piece 10653,
It is preferable to configure the ball flowing down the second flow path 10651c to be located at the third position where it is distributed to the outlet. In this case, it is preferable to configure the ball so that no prize ball is awarded when the ball enters the outlet. This prevents the ball from entering the small prize winning device 10 during a game other than the small prize game.
In this way, it is possible to further suppress fraudulent acts of making a ball win in the small prize winning device 10650. In addition, when a flow path is provided in which a ball can flow down only when the ball wins in the small prize winning device 10650 other than during a small prize game, it is preferable to provide a detection means (proximity sensor) for detecting the ball in the flow path and an abnormality notification means for notifying an abnormality when the detection means detects a ball.

Next, the ball flow in the small prize winning device 10650 during a small prize game will be described with reference to Figs. 271 to 273. First, when a small prize game starts, after a predetermined opening period (0.5 seconds or 5 seconds) has elapsed, the opening and closing door 10650b is opened (
In FIG. 271, a round game period is set in which the opening and closing door 10650b is variably controlled to an open state or a closed state according to a predetermined rule during the round game period, and a ball shot to the right area during a right-hand hit game during the round game period enters the small winning device 10650 through the opening and closing door 10650b in the open state.

As shown in FIG. 271, the ball ta1 that flows down the first flow path 10651a in the small prize winning device 10650 (flow time 0.5 seconds) is received by the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652 located at the operating position, and is stored there until the rotating body 10652 is rotated to the initial position (see FIG. 272). In this state, the next winning ball ta2 is received by the storage section 10652.
After colliding with the ball ta1 stored in the first inlet 10651b, the ball flows down the outlet flow path 10651ba (flow time 0.5 seconds) and enters the outlet 10654.

Here, the relationship between the rotating body 10652 and the first inlet 10651b will be described with reference to Fig. 274. Fig. 274(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 10652 in the operating position, and Fig. 274(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating body 10652 in the initial position. As shown in Fig. 274(a), the rotating body 10652 is provided protruding from the surface of the game board 13, and is divided into a rear surface 10652c on the game board 13 side (the back side as viewed from Fig. 271) and a front surface 10651b on the glass unit 16 side (the front side as viewed from Fig. 271).
A storage portion 10652a is formed by cutting out the space between the storage portion 10652a and the storage portion 10652d.

The storage section 10652a has a space large enough to store one ball.
The bottom surface 10652b is closer to the glass unit 16 side (the near side as viewed in FIG. 271 ) than the inlet side of the 652a (the region between the upper end of the front surface portion 10652d and the upper end of the rear surface portion 10652c).
It is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to be located at the left side as viewed from the viewpoint of FIG.

With this configuration, the balls flowing in from the first flow path 10651a can be smoothly stored in the storage section 10652a.
The sphere ta1 is maintained at a position in which it abuts against the rear surface 10652c of the storage portion 10652a along the slope of the sphere ta1, and a gap SK1 is formed between the sphere ta1 and the inner surface of the front surface 10652d.

In contrast to the ball ta1 maintained in this state, the ball ta4 flowed out from the first flow path 10651a
When the ball ta2 collides with the ball ta1, the center position of the ball ta2 is shifted toward the game board 13 side from the center position of the ball ta1, which is maintained at a position spaced apart from the game board 13 by the thickness of the rear surface portion 10652c (distance SK2
The ball ta1 and the ball ta2 collide with each other in a state where the gap SK1 is generated. The ball ta1 moves toward the front portion 10652d (in the direction of the arrow Y1) due to the force received from the ball ta2, which has collided with the game board 13 side (the right side as viewed in FIG. 274) from the center position. In this way, by configuring the storage portion 10652a to a size such that the gap SK1 is formed, the ball ta
When the ball ta2 collides with the ball ta1, the ball ta1 can be moved toward the front surface portion 10652d, so that the force generated when the balls ta1 and ta2 collide can be dispersed.
It is possible to weaken the force applied to the ball ta2 after the collision. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball ta2 from bouncing back too much and causing a ball blockage near the first flow path 10651a.

In addition, the ball ta1 moves toward the front surface portion 10652d (in the direction of the arrow Y1), so that the ball t
Since the distance between the center position of a1 and the center position of the sphere ta2 is wider than the interval SK2, the sphere t
a2 can more easily flow into the first inlet 10651b.
In the third embodiment, the front portion 10652d constituting the storage portion 10652a of the rotor 10652
The upper end position of the rear surface portion 10652c is configured to be higher than the upper end position of the rear surface portion 10652c. This prevents the ball ta1 from overflowing from the storage portion 10652a even if the ball ta1 collides with the ball ta2 and moves in the direction of the arrow Y1. In addition, the upper end position of the rear surface portion 10652c is configured to be lower than the upper end position of the ball ta1 stored in the storage portion 10652a, so that the ball ta2 that collides with the ball ta1 flows down in the direction of the arrow Y2.
652c.
This allows the ball to flow smoothly into the

Next, referring to Fig. 274(b), the configuration when the rotating body 10652 is in the initial position will be described. As shown in Fig. 274(b), the rotating body 10652 is arranged such that the game board 13 side (rear surface portion 10652c) is closer to the glass unit 16 side (front surface portion 1065
2d), and is configured so that when a ball flowing out of the first flow path 10651a collides with the rotating body 10652 located at the initial position, the ball flows down toward the first inlet 10651b along the inclination formed on the outer wall surface of the rotating body 10652. As described above, the rotating body 10652 in this thirteenth embodiment can smoothly guide the next arriving ball to the first inlet 10651b whether it is located at the operating position and storing balls in the storage section 10652a or at the initial position, so that the ball flow in the small prize winning device 10650 can be made smooth. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging during a small prize game, which causes discomfort to the player.

Returning to FIG. 271, the explanation will be continued. The rotating body 10652 is located at the initial position (see FIG. 270) except during the small win game, and is changed to the operating position (see FIG. 271) 0.5 seconds after the start of the small win game (the opening period of the small win game starts), and is configured to maintain the operating position for 3 seconds (first operation). After the first operation ends, it waits at the initial position for 2 seconds, then maintains the operating position for 5 seconds (second operation), and moves to the initial position after the second operation. After the period in which the operating position is maintained has elapsed, it transitions from the state shown in FIG. 271 (operating position) to the state shown in FIG. 272 (initial position).

As shown in FIG. 272, when the rotating body 10652 is changed from the operating position to the initial position,
A single ball ta1 stored in the storage section 10652a flows down the second flow path 10651c (flow time 1 second) and reaches the movable piece 10653 disposed on the downstream end side of the second flow path 10651c. In FIG. 272, when the ball ta1 reaches the movable piece 10653, the movable piece 10653
Since the rotating body 10652 is in the closed position (closed state), the balls flow into the second inlet 10651d provided above the movable piece 10653, and flow down the role route flow path 10651da toward the role device 10675. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the movable piece 10653 is also configured to easily distribute the balls to the second inlet 10651d, similar to the above-mentioned rotating body 10652, and is configured so that the balls do not get clogged above the movable piece 10653.

On the other hand, when the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 10651c reaches the movable piece 10653, if the movable piece 10653 is located at the release position, as shown in FIG. 273, the ball passes through the movable piece 10653 that is located at the release position and flows down the straight V flow path 10651e (flow time 0.5
sec) and the prize will be entered into the direct V prize slot 10657.

Next, referring to Fig. 275 and Fig. 276, the detailed configuration of the accessory device 10675 to which the ball that won the small prize winning device 10650 is guided when it flows down the accessory route flow path 10651da will be described. Fig. 275(a) is an enlarged view of the accessory device 10675 seen from the front, and Fig. 275(b) is an enlarged view of the accessory device 10675 seen from above. Fig. 276(a) and Fig. 276(b) are schematic diagrams showing the behavior of the ball when it rolls on the rolling surface in the accessory device 10675.

As shown in FIG. 275(a), the flow path 10 for the accessory route of the small prize winning device 10650
The ball that has flowed down 651da flows down the accessory route 10670 and is discharged onto the rolling surface 10675d of the rolling device 10675c. This rolling device 10675c is formed in a mortar shape, and a constant rotating body 10675a is provided in the center (the most recessed part) thereof.

The downstream side of the role route 10670 is bent in order to discharge the balls from the outlet 10670a along the rolling surface 10675d. As shown in FIG. 275(b), the outlet 10670 is bent in the depth direction of the rolling device 10675c (the upward direction when viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 275(b)).
As a result, the ball discharged with force from the accessory route 10670 rolls in a counterclockwise arc on the rolling surface 10675d, and gradually rolls in a spiral shape toward the center of the rolling surface 10675d.

Then, the ball that reaches the vicinity of the center is rotated by the blade member 10675 of the constant rotating body 10675a.
b and is bounced off toward the outer circumferential wall of the rolling device 10675c.
The rotating body 10675a is configured to rotate clockwise, and the ball discharged from the accessory route 10670 rolls counterclockwise. As a result, when the ball collides with the blade member 10675b of the rotating body 10675a, a large force is applied, and the ball after the collision is vigorously rolled by the rolling device 1.
This allows the ball to bounce in the direction of the outer peripheral wall of the rotating body 10675c.
The blade member a is made of a highly durable resin (for example, ABS) and has the strength to withstand the impact of a collision with a ball.

In addition, a plurality of arc-shaped grooves are formed on the rolling surface 10675d, and the rolling surface 10675
The ball is configured so that it is difficult for the ball present on the rolling surface 10675d to flow down in a straight line from the outer circumferential wall side to the center side. This makes the behavior of the ball more irregular, and makes it easier to maintain the momentum of the ball rolling in an arc on the rolling surface 10675d. Furthermore, on the near side of the rolling surface 10675d (the lower side from the viewpoint of FIG. 275(b)), there is an out hole 10675d as an entry hole through which the ball can enter.
80a, 10680b, and a role route V winning hole 10677 are provided, and the rolling surface 1
A first restricting wall 10670b, a second restricting wall 10670c, a third restricting wall 10675e, and a fourth restricting wall 10675f are provided to make it difficult for a ball rolling on the hole 10675d to enter each ball entrance.

The first and second regulating walls 10670b and 10670c regulate the behavior of the ball rolling on the upstream side (the outer peripheral wall side) of the rolling surface 10675d.
The ball rolling along the rolling surface 10675d is restricted in its rolling direction toward the center of the rolling surface 10675d,
The rolling device 10675 rolls toward the first regulating wall 10670b.
The rolling device 10675c itself is substantially circular in plan view (see FIG. 275(b)) and is configured in a cone shape (see FIG. 275(a)) with a constant rotating body 10675a at its center, but the range in which the ball can roll is restricted by the first restricting wall 10670b and the second restricting wall 10670c, and configured to be an eccentric ellipse with respect to the center position of the rolling device 10675c. By configuring it in this way, the ball can be rotated more smoothly by the constant rotating body 10675c than when a rolling surface 10675d is provided so that the ball can roll in a regular arc with respect to the center position of the rolling device 10675c.
Since it is possible to vary the timing of contact between the blade member 10675b of the ball 675a and the momentum of the ball at the time of contact, it is possible to easily vary the behavior of the ball rolling on the rolling surface 10675d. Therefore, it is possible to provide the ball with a behavior that is difficult to predict for a player who is paying close attention to the behavior of the ball on the rolling surface 10675d, making it difficult to know which entrance the ball will enter.

The third restriction wall 10675e and the fourth restriction wall 10675f are restriction walls for making it difficult for the ball bounced by the blade member 10675b of the constantly rotating body 10675a to enter any of the ball entry ports, and are provided between each outlet and the role route V winning port 10677. In this embodiment, the balls rolling on the rolling surface 10675d are configured so that about 1/4 enter the role route V winning port 10677, and the remaining 3/4 enter the left and right out ports (out ports 10680a and 10680b).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the constantly rotating body 10675a is provided at the lowest position (the most recessed position) of the rolling surface 10675d, and each ball entrance is provided at the highest position (on the outer circumferential wall side) of the rolling surface 10675d. Therefore, the ball that finally enters one of the ball entrances will roll up the rolling surface 10675d.
Compared to a configuration in which the ball entrance is located at the same height as the position where 675a is located, it is possible to reduce the rolling speed of the ball when it enters the ball entrance. This prevents the ball from entering the ball entrance at a speed that the player cannot recognize, which would make the game difficult for the player to understand, and also prevents damage to each ball entrance.

In addition, the rolling surface 10675d is always at the lowest position (the most recessed position) of the rotating body 1
0675a, and each ball entrance is located at the highest position (on the outer wall side) of the rolling surface 10675d.If a malfunction occurs and the rotating body 10675a stops rotating, the ball will remain in the center of the rolling device 10675c and will not be able to enter each ball entrance.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the constant rotating body 10675a, which rotates constantly while the power is on to the pachinko machine 10, is in an abnormal state such as when it breaks down and stops, it is possible to prevent the ball discharged from the role route 10670 from being discharged from the rolling device 10675c (entering one of the ball entrances). Also, if a power outage occurs while the ball is rolling in the rolling device 10675c, the constant rotating body 1067
If the drive of 5a stops, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the winning hole during the power outage.

Next, the behavior of the ball rolling on the rolling surface 10675d of the rolling device 10675c will be described with reference to Fig. 276. Fig. 276(a) is a schematic diagram showing the behavior of the ball when the ball rolling on the rolling surface 10675d enters the prize winning hole 10677 of the accessory route V, and Fig. 276(b) is a schematic diagram showing the behavior of the ball when the ball rolling on the rolling surface 10675d enters the out hole 10680a.

As shown in Fig. 276(a), the ball discharged from the outlet 10670a of the accessory route 10670 toward the rolling surface 10675d rolls in an arc (horizontal roll) on the rolling surface 10675d, collides with the second regulating wall 10670c, and rolls (downward roll) toward the center of the rolling surface 10675d. Then, it collides with the blade member 10675b of the rotating constant rotating body 10675a, and rolls (upward roll) toward the fourth regulating wall 10675f due to the impact, and after colliding with the fourth regulating wall 10675f, it rolls (downward roll) toward the center of the rolling surface 10675d again. Then, at a point different from the point where it first collided with the blade member 10675b, it collides again with the blade member 10675b of the constant rotating body 10675a, and the impact causes the third restriction wall 106
75e and the fourth regulating wall 10675f, the ball rolls (rolls upward) toward the opening of the V winning hole 10677 formed between the ball and the fourth regulating wall 10675f, and enters the V winning hole 10657.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a ball is discharged onto the rolling surface 10675d of the rolling device 10675c, the discharge port 10675c is arranged so that the discharged ball rolls horizontally at a height position on the rolling surface 10675d formed in a mortar shape so as not to always come into contact with the rotating body 10675a.
670a is formed. This allows the period until the ball discharged to the rolling surface 10675d first collides with the constantly rotating body 10675a to be extended. In addition, in this embodiment, a groove is provided in the horizontal direction on the rolling surface 10700a, and the ball is configured to roll on the groove so that the ball can easily roll horizontally. In addition, this groove is also configured to apply irregular frictional force to the rolling ball when the ball that collides with the blade member 10675b of the constantly rotating body 10675a rolls upward. In other words, it has a function that makes it easier for the horizontally rolling ball to maintain the current rolling, and makes it difficult for the upward rolling ball to maintain the current rolling (slowing down the rolling speed, changing the rolling direction).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a plurality of regulating walls 10675b to 10675f are formed so as to protrude toward the center from the inner wall of the rolling surface 10700a formed in a circular shape.
Depending on the rolling direction (upward rolling direction) of the ball that collides with the blade member 10675b of 0675a,
The distance to the next wall that the blade member 10675 will collide with (the inner wall of the rolling device 10675c, the regulating walls 10675b to 10675f) is different.
It is possible to easily vary the behavior of the ball depending on the rolling direction after colliding with b (the position at which it collides with blade member 10675b).

In addition, in this embodiment, the side of the rolling surface 10700a where the ball inlets are provided (
A regulating wall 10675 against which a ball rolling upward on a slope (the lower half side as viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 276) may collide.
The ball collision surface shapes of the ball collision devices 106700a to 10675b to 10675f are formed so that the balls that collide with the balls roll toward the side where the ball entrances are not provided (the upper half side as viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 276). This makes it difficult for the balls rolling on the rolling surface 10700a to enter the ball entrances.
The ball rolling time in the ball bearing 5c can be increased.
The shape of the restricting wall provided in the rolling device 10675c may be a shape having a guide function to allow the ball to roll toward each winning hole after the collision. By configuring in this way, the blade member 10 of the constantly rotating body 10675a is configured to guide the rolling process of the ball that can enter each winning hole.
In addition to the upward rolling motion after colliding with 675b, it is possible to add a guided rolling motion after colliding with the regulating wall, so that the rolling process can be increased to improve interest in the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 276(b), the ball discharged from the outlet 10670a of the role route 10670 toward the rolling surface 10675d rolls in an arc (horizontal roll) on the rolling surface 10675d, collides with the second regulating wall 10670c, and rolls (downward roll) toward the center of the rolling surface 10675d. Then, the blade member 1067 of the rotating constant rotating body 10675a
276(a) 的面圆10675a、475c的角（大约30°)相对于上显著的圆上显著转动器10675c、276(a)的圆上显著转动器10675c。 276 (a) of the above-mentioned angle (about 30°) is slightly shallower than the fourth regulating wall 10675f, 475c of the ball 10675c ....
The ball collides with the inner wall of 75c and rolls downward in an arc into outlet 10680a.

As described above, in the rolling device 10675c of this embodiment, the rolling surface 10700a
The direction of the ball's movement after impact varies depending on the angle and speed at which the ball collides with each of the regulation walls 10675, making it possible to provide ball behavior that is difficult for players to predict.
Without being limited to this, the height position at which the openings of each ball inlet are formed may be different. For example, the height position of the opening of only the outlet 10680a may be lowered so that the ball can enter by rolling under its own weight. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the openings of each ball inlet are formed on the end surface of one side of the rolling surface 10700a (the downward side from the viewpoint of FIG. 276(a)), but without being limited to this, openings may be arranged in all directions on the end surface of the rolling surface 10700a.
In addition, in this embodiment, the rolling surface 10700a on which the balls can roll is a single-layer structure. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the rolling surface 10700a may be formed in a multi-layer structure.
The ball may be configured so that the ball passes through a through hole provided in part of 700a, enters the lower rolling surface 10700a, and then rolls again toward each ball entrance.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the device so that a ball can enter the prize route V winning port 10677 from both the upper layer rolling surface 10700a and the lower layer rolling surface, and further configure the device so that a rolling ball can more easily enter the prize route V winning port 10677 from the lower layer rolling surface than from the upper layer rolling surface.
For example, the upper layer rolling surface may be configured so that 1/4 of the ball enters the prize route V winning hole 10677, 1/4 of the ball passes through a passing hole (a hole that connects to the lower layer rolling surface), and 1/2 of the ball enters the out hole, while the lower layer rolling surface may be configured so that 1/2 of the ball enters the prize route V winning hole 10677, and 1/2 of the ball enters the out hole. By configuring the ball in this way, the expectation that the ball will enter the prize route V winning hole 10677 can be gradually increased.

Next, referring to FIG. 277, the second ball entrance 106 provided in the lower right area of the game board 13
40 and the configuration of the electric role 10640a and its vicinity will be described.
3 is an enlarged view showing a part of the right region of FIG. 3. This embodiment is configured so that the small prize is won with a high probability (about 1/2) in the lottery for the second special symbol, and the lottery using the reserved memory of the second special symbol acquired during the time-saving state is executed during the normal state, so that the time-saving state can be easily set again.

In this pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if right-handed play is performed while the normal state is set and a ball enters the second ball entrance 10640, which triggers the drawing of the second special pattern, a jackpot game will be executed more easily than in a proper game in the normal state (left-handed play is performed and a game in which the first special pattern is drawn, aiming for a jackpot game), so a configuration is used in which a ball does not (is difficult to) enter the second ball entrance 10640 during the normal state.

Specifically, the ball flows down the right side area and down the flow path formed under the partition wall 10700a, and is discharged to a position facing the gate-type electric device 10640a. Here, when the gate-type electric device 10640a is in the induction state (protruding state), the gate-type electric device 10640a
The upper surface of the ball flows down toward the second ball entrance 10640. On the other hand, the gate type electric device 1064
When 0a is in an open state (buried state), the ball passes through the gate-type electric device 10640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 10065 for a big win.

Next, a detailed explanation will be given of the case where a ball flows down the gate-type electric device 10640a. As described above, the gate-type electric device 10640a is configured to receive the ball discharged from the flow path formed below the bulkhead 10700a at one end (upstream side) and allow it to flow down toward the other end (downstream side). A nail K1 is planted above the gate-type electric device 10640a, and the ball discharged from the flow path formed below the bulkhead 10700a is guided to the gate-type electric device 10640a.
The position of the nail K1 is adjustable so that it falls on the upstream side of 640a.

The gate-type electric device 10640a is a variable means that executes a variable action that changes from an open state (buried state) to a guiding state (protruding state) for a predetermined period of time when a winning normal symbol is drawn, and is configured to vary the operation time of the variable action depending on the game state at the start of the variable action. Specifically, when the game state at the start of the variable action is the normal state, a variable action is executed to maintain the guiding state (protruding state) for 0.2 seconds, and when the game state is the time-saving state, a variable action is executed to maintain the guiding state (protruding state) for 2 seconds.

The gate-type electric device 10640a is configured so that the ball flow-down period tz1 is 0.8 seconds. Therefore, even if a right-handed play is performed during a normal state, and a lottery for a normal symbol is executed by putting a ball into the normal symbol winning hole 10067, and the lottery for the normal symbol is won, the variable operation of the gate-type electric device 10640a executed based on the winning result will not cause the ball to flow down to a position where it can enter the second ball entry hole 10640, and the flow-down period tz1 will be 0.8 seconds.
After flowing down to any position in tz2 indicating the range of .3, it will fall into the area to the left of the nail group K3.

On the other hand, when the variable operation timing of the gate-type electric device 10640a is in the time-saving state, the variable operation is executed for 2 seconds, so that the gate-type electric device 10
Since the balls flowing down the gate-type electric device 10640a reach the downstream end of the gate-type electric device 10640a, the balls can enter the second ball entrance 10640.
Since the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to launch a single ball, the interval between balls is 0.6 seconds. As described above with reference to FIG. 269, approximately 1 of the balls launched by right-hand play is
Therefore, the ball reaches the gate-type electric device 10640a at least once every 1.2 seconds.

In this embodiment, the variable operation period of the gate-type electric device 10640a during the time-saving state (the period during which the gate-type electric device 10640a is maintained in the guiding state (protruding state)) is set to 2 seconds, so that by continuously playing right-handed, even if the ball falls on the gate-type electric device 10640a at any timing when the gate-type electric device 10640a is variably operated, the ball that falls on the gate-type electric device 10640a can be surely made to enter the second ball entrance 10640. In addition, a nail group K2 is planted above the second ball entrance 10640, so that if the ball that flows down the gate-type electric device 10640a falls from the gate-type electric device 10640a in a state exceeding the range of tz2, it is prevented from entering the second ball entrance 10640 by the inertial force of the ball.

As explained above, in this embodiment, a variable means is provided that can change between a flow-down state where the ball can flow down and a non-flow-down state where it is difficult to flow down, and when the ball flows down to a predetermined area by the variable means in the flow-down state, the lottery conditions for the second special symbol are established.
According to the game state, when the variable means is in the flow-down state, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to make the ball flow down to the predetermined area, and a state in which it is difficult to make the ball flow down. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to make the lottery condition for the second special symbol be established, and a state in which it is difficult to make the lottery condition be established.
The player can play the game in the hope that a game state in which the lottery condition for the second special symbol is likely to be established will be set.

<Game Flow in the Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, a characteristic game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 278 to 280. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment,
A small prize winning device 10650 is provided in the right area of the game area formed in 3, and is configured to be able to distribute the winning ball during the small prize game to a plurality of flow paths. The ease of passing the ball to the V winning port (specific area) is also made variable according to the flow path to which the ball is distributed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy or difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning hole (specific area) during the small win game depending on the game state when the small win is won and the type of special symbol that is won in the small win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to keep the execution probability of the big win game executed via the small win game within a predetermined specified range, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing an excessively advantageous game or an excessively disadvantageous game.

As described above, in the case where it is possible to set a state in which it is easy or difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning hole (specific area) during a small win game depending on the game state at the time of winning the small win and the type of special symbol that has won the small win, for example, a plurality of devices (opening and closing doors 1,
It is conceivable to configure the small prize winning device 10650 so that, for each of the small prize winning device 10650 (rotating body 10650b, rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653), a favorable operation pattern (operation scenario) is set in which a ball that has won in the small prize winning device 10650 is distributed to a favorable flow path (straight V flow path 10651e) with a high probability (about 100%) of winning in the V prize opening (specific area), and an unfavorable operation pattern (operation scenario) is set in which the ball is distributed to an unfavorable flow path (plaything route flow path 10651da) with a lower probability (about 25%) of winning in the V prize opening (specific area) than if it flowed down the favorable flow path. However, when the above-mentioned configuration is used, operation control based on different operation patterns (operation scenarios) must be executed for the multiple devices, which causes the problem of an increase in the amount of operation control programs for each device.

Furthermore, since any operational abnormality occurring in the above-mentioned multiple devices would have a significant impact on the game results, it is necessary to execute monitoring processing with high precision to monitor whether the devices are operating normally. Therefore, if the device is configured to be capable of executing operation control based on different operation patterns (operation scenarios), it is necessary to execute highly accurate monitoring processing for each operation pattern (operation scenario), which results in an increased processing load for the monitoring processing.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a plurality of devices (opening/closing door 106) that operate during the small win state are
50b, rotor 10652, movable piece 10653), it is possible to set a state where it is easy or difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning hole (specific area) during a small win game, depending on the game state at the time of winning the small win and the type of special symbol that won the small win, by simply executing a process to change the operation start timing of each device. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the amount of operation control programs for each device from increasing and the processing load of the monitoring process for each device from increasing.

Here, the flow of operation of various devices during a small win game will be explained with reference to Figures 278 and 279. Figure 278 is a timing chart showing the operation patterns of various devices in a small win game in which the ball is likely to be distributed to a favorable flow path (straight V flow path 10651e), and Figure 279 is a timing chart showing the operation patterns of various devices in a small win game in which the ball is likely to be distributed to a disadvantageous flow path (a role-route flow path 10651da).

As shown in FIG. 278 and FIG. 279, in this embodiment, a small win game is started (
When the opening period is set, the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 106
53 operates according to a certain predetermined rule, and the opening/closing door 10650b operates according to a certain predetermined rule when a round of the small prize game is started. The length of the opening period of the small prize game is made variable. This makes it possible to vary the relationship between the operating status of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653, which operate when the opening period is started, and the operating status of the opening/closing door 10650b, which operates when a round of the game is started, depending on the length of the opening period.

In this embodiment, the length of the opening period is changed, and the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 106
By changing the relationship between the operation status of the opening/closing door 10650b and the operation status of the opening/closing door 10650b, the distribution destination of the winning ball during the round game can be changed. In this embodiment, the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are configured to operate according to a predetermined rule based on the same operation trigger (the start of the opening period), so the relationship between the operation status of the rotating body 10652 and the operation status of the movable piece 10653 can always be constant. Therefore, the device (rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) for distributing the winning ball to the small winning device 10650 to multiple flow paths is always operated in a state with a certain relationship, so the monitoring process for monitoring the control abnormality of each device can be simplified.

Next, referring to FIG. 278, the operation contents (small win opening pattern A) of each component in the small win game in which the ball is likely to be distributed to the advantageous flow path (straight V flow path 10651e) will be specifically explained. The small win game in this embodiment is a winning game in which three periods, an opening period, a round period, and an ending period, are set, and one round game is executed during the round game.

When the opening period is started (set), a certain operation scenario is set for each of the rotating body 10652, which starts to operate when the opening period starts, and the movable piece 10653. First, the rotating body 10652 starts to move 0.5 seconds after the opening period starts.
After maintaining the initial position (a position where it is difficult for the storage section 10652a to accept a ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650) for 3 seconds, a first operation is executed in which the operating position (a position where the storage section 10652a can accept a ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650) is maintained for 3 seconds.

Then, when the first operation (3 seconds) has elapsed, the second operation is executed, which waits at the initial position for 2 seconds, and then maintains the operating position for 5 seconds. When the second operation (5 seconds) has elapsed, the initial position is set, and the operation scenario of the rotating body executed based on the start of one small win game is completed. That is, in this embodiment, during one small win game (from the opening period to the ending period), the rotating body 10652 is configured to be operated twice to an operating position where balls can be stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652, and an operation (operation for moving from the operating position to the initial position) that can discharge the balls stored in the storage section 10652a to the second flow path 10651c that can reach the V winning port (specific area) is configured to be executed twice.

Next, the operation of the movable piece 10653 will be described. As with the above-mentioned rotating body 10652, a certain operation scenario is set for the movable piece 10653 when the opening period of the small win game is started (set). The movable piece 10653 is configured to be always in a closed state (see FIG. 272) except during the period when the small win game is being played.
In the event that a ball enters the small prize winning device 10650 at a time other than during a small prize game (abnormal winning), the winning ball is configured not to flow down the advantageous flow path that is advantageous to the player.

When an operation scenario is set in the movable piece 10653, the closed state (see FIG. 272) is maintained for one second after the opening period starts, and then the open state (see FIG. 273) is set for four seconds. Then, when the open state for four seconds has elapsed, the operation scenario of the movable piece 10653 executed based on the start of one small win game is completed, and the initial state, the closed state, is set.

In a small prize game advantageous to the player (a small prize game in which the ball is easily distributed to the advantageous flow path (straight V flow path 10651e)), the length of the opening period is set to 0.5 seconds, and the round period is set (the round game starts) 0.5 seconds after the start of the big prize game. Then, the setting of the round period (the start of the round game) is used as a trigger to set the operation scenario of the opening and closing door 10650b. When the operation scenario of the opening and closing door 10650b is set, the opening state (a state in which the ball can enter) is set for 0.2 seconds as the first operation, and then the closed state (a state in which the ball cannot enter) is set for 0.3 seconds, and this operation is repeated five times, and then the opening state is set for 0.5 seconds as the second operation, and then the closed state is set for 1.9 seconds, and then the opening state is set again for 0.1 seconds. The opening and closing door 10650b operates in this manner.

Although detailed description will be given later, the above-mentioned various devices (opening/closing door 10650b, rotating body 10
The operation scenarios set in the movable pieces 10652 and 10653 are stored in the ROM 2 of the main control unit 110.
This is pre-defined in the small win scenario table 202mf (see Figure 288) that 02 has.

As described above, when the small prize opening pattern A (the opening pattern corresponding to the small prize game advantageous to the player) is set as the small prize game, the ball that entered the small prize winning device 10650 during the round game is stored in the storage section 106 of the rotating body 10652 during the first operation period.
52a. Then, as shown in FIG. 273, the rotating body 10652 rotates to the initial position after the first operating period has elapsed, and the balls stored in the storage section 10652a flow down to the second flow path 10651c, pass through the movable piece 10653 in the open state, and pass through the straight V flow path 10651e, so that a small win game that makes it easy to make the ball enter the V winning hole (specific area) is executed. Here, the rotating body 10652 is changed from the operating position to the initial position, and the period from the time when the ball flows down the second flow path 10651c to the time when it reaches the movable piece 10653 is designed to be 1 second, and the movable piece 10653 is configured to continue the open state until 0.5 seconds later than the ball flow down time. Therefore, even if the flow down speed of the ball in the second flow path 10651c decreases, the state in which the ball can enter the straight V winning hole 10657 can be maintained sufficiently. In addition,
The period during which the movable piece 10653 maintains the open state is set to be a period before the second operation of the rotating body 10652 ends.
A ball that flows down the flow path 10651c can be prohibited from entering the straight V winning hole 10657.

Furthermore, in the small win opening pattern A, the ending period of the small win game is configured to be 0.6 seconds. This 0.6 seconds is the time to ensure the minimum period until the ball that has won the small win winning device 10650 during the round period of the small win game wins the V. In other words, in this embodiment, it is configured to be able to shoot 100 balls per minute, and the round end condition of the small win game is stipulated as 5 seconds elapsed or 10 balls winning.
The system is configured so that the time required for a ball that has won in the small prize winning device 10650 to win a V prize is a minimum of five seconds.

Therefore, by setting the ending period to 0.6 seconds, it is possible to make the ball enter the V during the ending period if the ball enters the V at the shortest time. On the other hand, if the ending period is set to a period shorter than this, the timing of the V entry will always be a timing that exceeds the ending period. In this embodiment, as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, it is determined whether the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 remains in the small win winning device 10650 at the end timing of the small win game period (end timing of the ending period) that is preset as a small win game, and if it is determined that the ball remains, the end timing of the small win game is postponed until there are no remaining balls.

If the ending period is set to a period shorter than that shown in FIG. 278, even when the game is being played normally, it will always be necessary to execute a process to postpone the end timing of the small win game, resulting in a problem of increasing the processing load.

In contrast, in the small win opening pattern A of this embodiment, the game period of the small win game is shortened and an ending period is set to reduce the processing load during the small win game, so that the above-mentioned problem can be solved. Note that the length of the ending period is not limited to this, and a shorter ending period may be set to shorten the execution period of the small win game, or a longer ending period may be set to reduce the processing load during the small win game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small win game is configured not to end until the end timing of the predetermined small win game period (end timing of the ending period) has passed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the forced end condition may be set as the ball entering the V winning hole (specific area) during the small win game, and when the forced end condition is established,
It may be configured so that a forced termination process is executed to end the small win game even if a predetermined end timing of the small win game period (end timing of the ending period) has not elapsed.

On the other hand, when the small win opening pattern B (a small win game in which the ball is likely to be distributed to the disadvantageous flow path (the flow path for the role route 10651da)) is set as the small win game, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1, a small win game is executed that is different from the above-mentioned small win opening pattern A only in that the length of the opening period of the small win game is changed to 5 seconds and the length of the ending period is changed to 5 seconds. By lengthening the length of the opening period in this way, the first operating period of the rotating body 10652 that can distribute the ball to the straight V flow path 10651e can be made to pass during the opening period (the period before the round game is started). Then, since the round period is set (the round game is executed) during the second operating period of the rotating body 10652, even if the ball is made to win the small win winning device 10650 during the round game and the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652, the stored ball will be distributed to the role route flow path 10651da.

In this embodiment, the opening period is set to 5 seconds, so that the opening and closing door 10
The timing at which the movable piece 10653 is opened is set to the timing at which the movable piece 10653 is opened, so that the ball that has entered the small prize winning device 10650 is prevented from entering the straight V winning hole 10657. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the movable piece 10653 is configured to be opened after the movable piece 10653 is opened.
The opening period may be set to 3.5 seconds so that the opening/closing door 10650b is opened after the first operation of the 52 is completed, that is, 3.5 seconds have passed since the start of the small win game. In this configuration, the ball is made to enter the small win winning device 10650 at the timing when the movable piece 10653 is in the open state, but since the rotating body 10652 is located in the initial position, the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 does not flow down to the second flow path and enters the out port 10654, so that the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 can be prevented from entering the straight V winning port 10657. In addition, in this embodiment, the system is configured to be able to execute a small prize game in which a ball that has entered the small prize winning device 10650 is guided to the straight V winning port 10657 (a small prize game in which an opening operation is executed with small prize opening pattern A), and a small prize game in which a ball that has entered the small prize winning device 10650 is guided to the special device route V winning port 10677 (a small prize game in which an opening operation is executed with small prize opening pattern B). However, without being limited to this, the system may be configured to be able to execute a small prize game in which the opening and closing door 10650b is opened at a timing that allows a ball that has entered the small prize winning device 10650 to be guided to either the straight V winning port 10657 or the special device route V winning port 10677.

In addition, by setting the ending period to 5 seconds, for example, unless the ball flows down the flow path 10651da for the reel route during the small win game, the small win game can be ended without extending the small win game period, thereby reducing the processing load during the small win game.

In this embodiment, as described above with reference to Fig. 278, the period until the operation scenario set in the various devices during the small win game is completed is set as the small win game period, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, if a predetermined end condition is met during the small win game period and it is determined that there is no ball in the small win winning device 10650, the operation scenario set in the various devices may be forcibly terminated. By configuring in this way, for example, in a small win game in which the small win opening pattern shown in Fig. 278 is set, the operation scenario of the rotating body 10652 is completed (the second operation period has elapsed).
By configuring in this way, the period of the small win game can be shortened, thereby improving game efficiency.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, the opening period of the small win game is shortened, so that a small win game (small win opening pattern A) advantageous to the player can be executed. In other words, as the operation pattern of various devices during the small win game,
The operation pattern which can win a prize in the prize winning hole 10675 is executed before the operation pattern which can win a prize in the prize winning hole 10677 of the reel route V.

By configuring in this way, for example, even if a ball that has entered the small prize winning device 10650 during the execution of a small prize game (small prize opening pattern B) that is disadvantageous to the player is illegally retained in the small prize winning device 10650 by using a magnet or the like, the ball can be prevented from being lost by the direct V winning port 106 afterwards.
Since the winning state (the state in which the movable piece 10653 is open) of the ball 57 is not set, it is difficult for a player to illegally put a ball into the direct V winning hole 10657. Also, since the operation patterns of various devices for the small win game (small win opening pattern A) in which the probability of a big win game being executed is high is executed first, the playing time of the small win game during the time-saving state in which the next big win game is likely to be executed can be shortened.

In this embodiment, as an operation scenario of the small win game, the small win winning device 10
The small win opening pattern A, in which a ball that has won 650 can win a direct V winning port 10657, and the small win opening pattern B, in which a ball that has won 650 can win a special route V winning port 10677, can be set by variably setting the opening period of the small win game, but this is not limited to this, and for example, a small win opening pattern in which a ball cannot win any V winning port, or a small win opening pattern in which a ball can win both V winning ports, may be set by variably setting the opening period of the small win game. This allows the size of the privilege (possibility of playing a big win game) that can be given to a player to vary depending on the type of small win game to be executed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game content during the small win game (ease of opening the V winning port, types of V winnings that can be won) is changed by varying only the length of the opening period of the small win game, but without being limited to this, the game content during the small win game (ease of opening the V winning port, types of V winnings that can be won) may be changed by changing the operation pattern of other devices (rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) or varying the operation start timing.

Also, in this embodiment, the various devices are configured to operate in an operation pattern corresponding to the type of small win that has been won, but in an abnormal state (for example, a state in which a power outage occurs during small win play and the power is cut off, or a state in which it is determined that fraudulent activity is occurring), the various devices may be configured to operate in a predetermined operation pattern for abnormal situations, regardless of the type of small win that has been won. In this case, it is advisable to set an operation pattern that is more disadvantageous to the player than the operation patterns set corresponding to each type of small win as the operation pattern for abnormal situations. This allows
This makes it possible to suppress acts that illegally cause abnormal conditions.

Next, the transition of the game state in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 280. FIG. 280 is a game flow diagrammatically illustrating the transition of the game state in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 280, in this embodiment, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols).

As explained with reference to FIG. 277, during the normal state, since it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 10640, a game (special 1 game) is played by hitting the ball from the left to enter the first ball entrance 64. In the lottery for the first special symbol executed in this special 1 game, a special symbol lottery is executed with a probability of 1/300 for winning a jackpot and a probability of 1/70 for winning a small jackpot. If a jackpot is won in the special 1 game, there is a 95% chance of winning the jackpot B.
is executed. This jackpot B is a jackpot game in which two rounds of round play are executed as a jackpot game, and a normal state (unfavorable state) is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 287(a)). The remaining 5% of the time, jackpot A is executed. This jackpot A is a jackpot game in which ten rounds of round play are executed as a jackpot game, and a time-saving state (advantageous state) is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 287(a)).

In addition, if you win a small jackpot in the special 1 game, there is a 1/4 chance that the V winning hole (specific area)
A small win game is executed in which the ball can enter the V winning hole (specific area). If the ball enters the V winning hole (specific area) during this small win game, a big win game is executed according to the type of small win that was won, and if the type of small win that was won is small win A or B (50% of small wins), a time-saving state is set after the big win game ends, and if it is small win C (50% of small wins), a normal state is set after the big win game ends. Also, if the ball does not enter the V winning hole (specific area) during the small win game (non-V win), the end of the small win game is
It will remain in normal state.

Next, the flow of the game during the time-saving state will be explained. This time-saving state is a game state in which the special symbol is set to a low probability state and the normal symbol is set to a high probability state, and is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 10640 by the normal symbol winning game executed when the normal symbol lottery is won compared to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol). In this embodiment, in order to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 10640 by the normal symbol winning game when the time-saving state is set than when the normal state is set, the time of the normal symbol fluctuation is configured to be shorter when the time-saving state is set than when the normal state is set, thereby increasing the number of times the normal symbol lottery is executed per unit time, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is configured to be higher in the time-saving state than in the normal state, and further, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 10640 by the normal symbol winning game when the time-saving state is set. The opening pattern of the normal winning game (the operation pattern of the gate-type electric device 10640a) is configured so that the normal winning game executed during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is easier to guide the game ball to the second ball entrance 10640 than the normal winning game executed during the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). However, the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance 10640 by the normal winning game in the time-saving state than in the normal state, and the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance 10640 by the left-handed game aimed at the first ball entrance 64 during the time-saving state.
As long as the configuration is such that the right-hand hit game aiming at the symbol makes it easier to execute the lottery for the special symbol, a configuration other than that used in this embodiment may be used. For example, in order to make it easier to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 10640 in the time-saving state than in the normal state, only one of the configurations described above used in this embodiment may be used, or each configuration may be appropriately selected and used. When the time-saving state is set, the gate-type electric device 10640a is changed to long (2 seconds), so that the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 10640. The first ball entrance 64
The ratio of balls entering the slot does not change between the normal state and the time-saving state, but in the normal state, the first ball entry port 64, which triggers the drawing of the first special symbol, is configured to allow balls to enter the slot easier than the second ball entry port 10640, which triggers the drawing of the second special symbol, whereas in the time-saving state, the second ball entry port 10640, which triggers the drawing of the second special symbol, is configured to allow balls to enter the slot easier than the first ball entry port 64, which triggers the drawing of the first special symbol. Therefore, while the time-saving state is set, a special 2 game (right-hand hit game) is played to allow balls to enter the second ball entry port 10640.

In this embodiment, a maximum of four lottery rights for the first special symbol can be stored (reserved storage), and a maximum of one lottery right for the second special symbol can be stored (reserved storage). Therefore, when a jackpot is won (a jackpot game is executed) in a state where a predetermined number (e.g., three) of lottery rights for the first special symbol are reserved and stored, and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, a lottery for the reserved and stored first special symbol can be executed.
In this embodiment, when there is both a reserved memory for the first special pattern and a reserved memory for the second special pattern, the lottery based on the reserved memory for the second special pattern (a lottery that is advantageous to the player) is executed first. However, for example, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern in the normal state and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, there is no reserved memory for the second special pattern at that time, so the lottery for the first special pattern will be executed during the time-saving state.

When the first special symbol is drawn during the time-saving state, the big win lottery (1/300) and small win lottery (1/70) are drawn with the same probability as in the normal state. If a big win is won, or if the ball enters the V winning hole during the small win game after the small win is won, a big win game is played.
In either case, the normal state is set after the big win game ends.

On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol executed in the special 2 game during the time-saving state, the odds are 1/30
A special symbol lottery is executed, which has a probability of 0 for winning the jackpot and a probability of 1/2 for winning the small jackpot. If a jackpot is won in the special 2 game, a jackpot C is executed with a probability of 100%. This jackpot C is a jackpot game in which 15 rounds of round play are executed as a jackpot game, and a normal state (unfavorable state) is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 2).
See 87(a).

In addition, if a small win is won in the special 2 game, a small win game is executed in which the ball can enter the V winning hole (specific area) with almost 100% probability. If the ball enters the V winning hole (specific area) during this small win game, a big win game according to the type of small win that was won is executed, and the normal state is set after the big win game ends. In addition, if the ball does not enter the V winning hole (specific area) during the small win game, the end of the small win game will be in the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a transition condition (time-saving end condition) is set to transition the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state without a jackpot game. Specifically, a first time-saving end condition is set to be established when the number of times the special symbol lottery (variable) is executed during the time-saving state reaches 99 times, and a second time-saving end condition is set to be established when the number of times the small jackpot game executed during the time-saving state reaches 2 times. In this way, by configuring the game state advantageous to the player to be able to end without a jackpot game, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player. Also, in this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is configured to have a high probability (1/2) of winning a small jackpot. Therefore, for example, the type of small jackpot won during the time-saving state is determined,
It becomes possible to execute a game in which the ball is not allowed to enter a V winning hole (specific area) during a small prize game until the player wins a small prize advantageous to the player.

In order to prevent such games from being played, the present embodiment sets the above-mentioned second time-saving end condition (a condition for ending the time-saving state based on the number of times a small win game has been played). This makes it possible to provide a proper game by preventing a game in which a small win game is repeatedly played until a small win of the desired small win type is won during the time-saving state. Note that when the above-mentioned second time-saving end condition is set, for example, the main control device 11
In the control process of 0, a counting means for counting the number of times the small win game is executed during the time-saving state is provided, and it is preferable to configure it so that it is possible to determine whether the condition for terminating the time-saving state is established based on the counting result of the counting means. In this case, the timing for determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or not may be set appropriately, and may be determined at any of the following times: the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small win, the timing when the special symbol variation for the small win is started, the timing when the special symbol indicating the small win is displayed as stopped or confirmed, during the execution of the small win game, and during the execution of the big win game. In addition, the timing for terminating the time-saving state based on the establishment of the time-saving end condition may also be set appropriately based on the above-mentioned timing. This allows the time-saving state to be terminated at various times, making it possible to make the player interested in the game during the time-saving state.

Next, the special 2 game in the normal state will be explained. As described above, in this embodiment, one lottery right for the second special symbol can be reserved and stored, and when the time-saving state is switched to the normal state, the second special symbol lottery is executed a number of times corresponding to the reserved number. Then, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, the probability of winning a big win is 1/300, as in the time-saving state, and the probability of winning a small win is 1/2. Here, when a big win is won, the time-saving state is set after the big win game ends with a probability of 100%, and even if a small win is won, the ball is not thrown during the small win game.
The time-saving state is set 100% by having the ball enter the winning hole (specific area). In other words, the game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set more easily after the big win game ends when the player wins a big win or a small win with the second special symbol than when the player wins a big win or a small win with the first special symbol lottery in the normal state.

As explained above, in this embodiment, during the special 1 game in which the normal state is set, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the possibility of the time-saving state being set after the jackpot game ends is low (5% of jackpot wins), and a jackpot game with a small number of rounds is likely to be played, so essentially, a game is played that mainly aims to win a jackpot game via a small jackpot game. And, the small jackpot game that is played when a small jackpot is won (1/70) in the lottery for the first special symbol is played by the rolling device 10675c (Fig. 275
In this small prize game aiming at the special route V winning hole 10677, the ball will land on the special route V with a probability of about 1/4.
Since it is designed to enter the winning hole 10677, in the normal state of the special 1 game, after the small jackpot is won (1/70), the ball is made to enter the special route V winning hole 10677 (about 1
/4) to play a game aiming for a big win (about 1/280). Hereinafter, the small win game aiming for the role route V winning hole 10677 among the small win games will be referred to as the role challenge and will be explained.

In this way, by making it possible to play a game aiming for a big win that can be executed based on the result of the lottery for a special pattern (winning a small win) and the result of the ball rolling (entering the reel route V winning port 10677) when the normal state is set, it is possible to allow the player to play an innovative game and to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed with the time-saving state set, the normal state is always set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult (not to make) a game state advantageous to the player to be set continuously across jackpot games, so that it is possible to suppress the player from playing a game that is excessively advantageous. Furthermore, by making it difficult (not to make) a game state advantageous to the player to be set continuously, it is possible to easily increase the privilege (number of prize balls) given to the player by one jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed with the time-saving state set, the normal state is always set after the jackpot game ends; however, without being limited to this, for example, the system may be configured so that the rate (probability) of transitioning from the time-saving state (game state before the jackpot game) to the time-saving state (game state after the jackpot game) upon the end of the jackpot game is lower than the rate (probability) of transitioning from the normal state (game state before the jackpot game) to the time-saving state (game state after the jackpot game) upon the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one lottery right for the second special symbol is reserved and memorized, but this is not limited thereto, and two or more lottery rights may be reserved and memorized.
In this embodiment, the game state can be set to a normal state and a time-saving state.
Without being limited to this, for example, it may be possible to configure it so that a sure probability state (a high probability state of special patterns, a high probability state of normal patterns) or a potential probability state (a high probability state of special patterns, a low probability state of normal patterns) can be set.

<About the content of the performance in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the characteristic effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 281 to 285. In this embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, a left-hand hit game (a game for causing the ball to flow down to the left side area) is performed.
When the time-saving state is set, a right-hit game (a game for causing the ball to flow down to the right-side area) is performed during a small win game and a big win game.

In addition, when the game method is changed for the player, for example, when a small prize is won while the normal state is set and a small prize game is executed, a preparatory effect for encouraging right-hand play is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) before the round period of the small prize game is set (before the round game is executed). By encouraging the player to play right-hand play in this way before the round game is actually executed, it becomes easier to make the player play right-hand play at the time the round game starts, and it is possible to prevent a game that is disadvantageous to the player (continuing to play left-hand play even during a small prize game, resulting in the small prize winning device 10
This can prevent a game in which the ball cannot land on 650 from being played.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the length of the opening period set during the small win game is configured to be variable according to the opening pattern of the small win game.

In the pachinko machine 10 thus configured, when opening pattern B with a long opening period (opening period length is 5 seconds) is set, the preparatory performance can be executed using the opening period, but when opening pattern A with a short opening period (opening period length is 0.5 seconds) is set, the 5-second preparatory performance cannot be executed using only the opening period, and it is necessary to execute the preparatory performance from a timing before the special pattern variation that has resulted in a small jackpot is stopped and displayed.

By configuring in this way, when small winning games with different opening periods are executed, it is possible to secure a certain preparation performance period, but the change status of the special pattern at the time the preparation performance is executed (special pattern changing or special pattern change stopped)
By determining this, the player can distinguish whether the preparation performance this time was executed during the period of variation of the special symbol (period of variation of the special symbol that won the small win) or during the opening period of the small win game, and there was a problem that the type of the small win that was won this time was determined before the small win game started.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 281, the length of the determination period for determining and displaying the special symbol variation is made different depending on the type of the small win that has been won, and the combined period of the determination period of the special symbol and the opening period of the small win game are configured to be the same. Specifically, the opening pattern for the small win game is opening pattern A.
For the special symbol variation indicating that a small prize has been won, as shown in FIG. 281(a), a 5.5 second period (the sum of the fixed period and the opening period) can be set between the time when the special symbol variation is stopped and the time when the round period of the small prize game is set, and the fixed period (
It is therefore possible to secure a period of time (5 seconds) for executing the preparatory performance.

On the other hand, for the special symbol variation indicating that a small win has been won, in which the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern for the small win game, 0.5 seconds is set as the fixing period for the special symbol, as shown in Fig. 281 (b). This makes it possible to set a period of 5.5 seconds (the combined period of the fixing period and the opening period) from when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed until the round period for the small win game is set, and it becomes possible to secure a period for executing the preparation performance for a certain period (5 seconds).

As described above, in this embodiment, a fixed period of different lengths is set according to the length of the opening period set as a small win game, and no matter which small win game is executed, it is possible to execute a preparatory performance for a certain period after the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the type of the small win game to be executed later based on the execution timing of the preparatory performance. Note that in this embodiment, no matter which small win game is executed (even when a small win game with a different opening period is executed), the preparation period (the combined period of the fixed display period of the special symbol and the opening period of the small win game) from the stop display of the special symbol that has won the small win to the start of the round game in the small win game is configured to be the same, and by executing a preparatory performance for a certain period (5 seconds) during that preparation period, it is difficult to know the content (small win type) of the small win game to be executed this time from the execution timing of the preparatory performance, but the content (
Other configurations may be used as long as they can suppress the player from discriminating the small win type. For example, a first preparation period (e.g., 5.5 seconds) and the second preparation period (e.g., 10 seconds) may be configured to be set as the preparation period, and different preparation periods may be set according to the type of small win game to be executed. In this case, by providing at least two small win types for which the first preparation period is set and two small win types for which the second preparation period is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the content (small win type) of the small win game to be executed later, even if either the first preparation period or the second preparation period is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the preparation performance is configured to be executed within the preparation period (the period from the fixed display period of the special symbol to the period until the round period is set in the winning game (the opening period)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the preparation performance may be executed before the preparation period is set, that is, using the variable period of the special symbol. In this case, regardless of the content of the small prize game (small prize type) that is set, it is preferable to configure so that the preparation performance is always executed before the specified period for which the preparation period is set (a specified number of seconds before the timing for the fluctuation to stop). By configuring in this way, regardless of which small prize game is won, the preparation performance can be executed from a specified time before the fluctuation of the special pattern is stopped, so that the performance period of the preparation performance can be extended simply by executing a process to make the length of the preparation period the same regardless of the type of small prize that is won.

Next, the performance mode of the preparation performance executed during the preparation performance period will be described with reference to Fig. 282. Fig. 282(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when a special symbol that has won a small prize is stopped and displayed, and Fig. 282(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed three seconds after the preparation performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 282(a), when the special symbol variation that has won the small win is displayed in a stopped state, the third symbol for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed in the display area HR21 in the display mode "341" indicating the small win, and "Right Hit" is displayed in the display area HR22 as a guide display mode to guide the player to play right hit. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 1800 displays "V Game" as a notification mode to notify that a small win game will be executed.
A card 1800a with the characters "!" is displayed. Note that the display screen of FIG.
When a small win for which opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern for the small win game is won, it is displayed for the first 2 seconds of the fixed period (5 seconds), and when a small win for which opening pattern B is set is won, it is displayed for 2 seconds from when the fixed period (0.5 seconds) is set until 1.5 seconds of the opening period of the small win game have elapsed.

In this way, even if the player wins a small win for which any opening pattern is set, the special symbol variation has already stopped, so the same display mode is displayed in the display area HR21. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the type of the small win based on the display content of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, when three seconds have passed since the preparation performance was executed, as shown in FIG.
The display area HR22 is enlarged, and the display screen at the start of the preparation performance (see FIG. 282(a))
A screen is displayed in which the player is encouraged to play right-handed, with emphasis on the position of the ball. In addition, an image showing the position that the player will actually aim at by playing right-handed is displayed in the display area HR23.
A comment such as "Aim for the attacker on the right!!" is displayed, indicating the spot to aim for when playing from the right.

In this embodiment, the time required for a ball fired by right-hand play to reach the small prize winning device 10650 is configured to be approximately 1.5 seconds, and by starting right-hand play after the display screen shown in Figure 282 (b) is displayed, the ball can be made to win in the small prize winning device 10650 during a round of small prize play.

Next, referring to FIG. 283 to FIG. 285(a), during a small win game, the third symbol display device 8
An example of the display contents displayed on the display screen of No. 1 will be described. First, a case where a ball enters the direct V winning hole 10657 during a small win game will be described. Figure 283 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when a ball enters the direct V winning hole 10657 during a small win game.

As shown in FIG. 283(a), when the ball enters the straight V winning hole 10657, an image resembling a "V" is displayed in the main display area Dm as a notification mode 1801 to notify that the ball has passed through (entered) the V winning hole (specific area) during the small win game, and the sub-display area Ds displays "V
Congratulations on getting it! !" is displayed. In this embodiment, the special chart 2 during the time-saving state
Only when a small prize is won by the fluctuation, an opening pattern (opening pattern A) that makes it easier for the ball to enter the straight V winning hole 10657 during the small prize game is set.

The time-saving state is set so that there is a high (almost 100%) probability that the next big win game will be played if the game is played normally.

Therefore, when the ball enters the direct V winning hole 10657 during the small win game, the performance of whether or not the ball passes through the V winning hole (specific area) during the small win game is not executed, and the game is played as shown in FIG.
The display screen shown in 83(a) is displayed.

On the other hand, when an opening pattern (opening pattern B) in which the ball is likely to be distributed to the accessory route flow path 10651da during a small win game is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 283(b) is displayed.
This is a schematic diagram showing an example of a role challenge presentation that is displayed when passing through.
When the ball that won the small prize winning device 10650 is distributed to the accessory route flow path 10651da and the accessory route sensor SZ2 detects the passage of the ball, the display screen shown in Fig. 283 (b) is displayed. In this display screen, the main display area Dm displays the characters "Accessory Challenge Entry" indicating that a small prize game (a game using the ball that won the small prize winning device 10650) using the rolling device 10675c is executed, and the accessory image 1802 that imitates the rolling device 10675c is displayed, and the sub-display area Ds displays the characters "Pray for V passage."

Furthermore, in the HR24 of the main display area Dm, "0:00" is displayed as an elapsed period display mode for showing the elapsed period of the current feature challenge performance, indicating that the feature challenge performance has started (0 seconds have elapsed since the feature challenge performance started). The elapsed period of this feature challenge is calculated using the value of an elapsed period counter 203mg that measures the elapsed time from the start of the small win game, and specifically, the value of an elapsed period counter 223ma (the feature challenge performance start time) at the time when the ball passes through the feature route sensor SZ2 is stored, and the elapsed period counter 223m is updated as time passes.
The number of seconds corresponding to the difference between the value of a and the stored value of the elapsed time counter 223ma at the time when the role object route sensor SZ2 passed is calculated, and the calculation result is displayed as the elapsed time.
Since it is possible to calculate the elapsed period of the reel challenge performance using the value of 23ma, it is possible to use a common counter for measuring the elapsed period.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in this embodiment, the display mode of the display area HR24 is variably displayed when a predetermined unit of time has elapsed since the start of the role challenge performance, and specifically, it is configured to be displayable in 1/100 second units. Then, when the role challenge performance starts, the display screen shown in FIG. 284 is displayed.
FIG. 284(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time when 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the role challenge performance. As shown in FIG. 284(a), during the role challenge performance, an image resembling a bomb is displayed in the main display area Dm. This bomb is a ball rolling device 10675c
Discharged from (out port 10680a, 1060b, or the role route V winning port 10677
Based on whether the ball has entered the target area, a bomb is fired and a display mode showing the game result is displayed.

At the time shown in FIG. 284(a), the ball is flowing down the rolling surface 10675d of the rolling device 10675c (see the dotted line enclosed diagram in FIG. 284(a)), so an effect is executed in which the fuse of the bomb gradually shortens. The display mode of this bomb may be changed, for example, according to the elapsed period of the role challenge effect, the number of balls rolling in the rolling device 10675c, or the rolling position, or according to the type of big win corresponding to the small win game being executed. In addition, in this embodiment, only the display effect displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 as the role challenge effect is described, but the role challenge effect may be executed using a configuration other than the third pattern display device 81. For example, a plurality of light-emitting means (full-color LEDs, etc.) may be provided near the role device 10675, and the light-emitting means may be controlled to emit light according to the rolling state of the ball.

The small win game has progressed from the state shown in FIG. 284(a), and the ball has entered the prize winning hole 10 of the role route V.
An example of the display content displayed when the ball enters the V winning hole 10677 will be described with reference to Fig. 284(b). Fig. 284(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when 41 seconds have passed since the reel challenge performance was executed and the ball enters the V winning hole 10677. As shown in Fig. 284(b), when the ball enters the V winning hole 10677, the following is displayed in the main display area Dm:
An image resembling a "V" is displayed as a notification mode 1801 to notify that a ball has passed through (entered) a V winning hole (specific area) during a small win game. The words "Congratulations on getting a V!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The word "Super Hot" is displayed in the display area HR25 as a suggestive comment to suggest to the player the type of big win game to be executed, and the elapsed time of the current role challenge performance (the number of times the ball has been played by the rolling device 10675) is displayed in the display area HR24.
The time that the ball was rolling within the space c) is displayed as "41:00".

In this case, the display region HR25 contains a display comment selection table 222ma (see FIG. 2) to be described later.
91(b)), the time period that has elapsed until the end of the reel challenge performance (when the ball is discharged from the rolling device 10675c), the type of the current jackpot, and a comment corresponding to the type of ball entry port through which the ball entered (out ports 10680a, 10680b, reel route V winning port 10677) are displayed.

On the other hand, when the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c enters the out hole 10680a, the display screen shown in FIG. 285(a) is displayed. FIG. 285(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time when 51 seconds have elapsed since the start of the role challenge performance. As shown in FIG. 285(a), when the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c enters the out hole 10680a,
When the ball enters the out hole 10680a, the word "unfortunate" is displayed in the main display area Dm as the performance result mode 1802 indicating that the ball did not enter the V winning hole in this small win game, and the comment "unfortunately, even if it hit, it was normal" is displayed in the display area HR25. Also, "51:00" is displayed in the display area HR24, indicating that the elapsed time of this challenge performance was 51 seconds. And the word "Do your best next time" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to Fig. 291(b), but in this embodiment, when the ball enters the outlet 10680a after the elapse of a predetermined period (40 seconds) of the challenge performance, even if the jackpot type that can actually be set is advantageous to the player (time-saving jackpot), a display comment is displayed suggesting that the jackpot type is disadvantageous to the player (normal jackpot). This makes it possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing further when a jackpot game is not executed as a result of a long period of small jackpot play.

Next, referring to FIG. 285(b), characteristic display contents among the display screens displayed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this embodiment, when the power is cut off in a certain state during a small win game (a state in which a ball may remain in the rolling device 10675c), a power recovery process different from the normal one is executed after the power is turned on again. Specifically, it is configured to execute a process not to drive the constant rotating body 10675a, which is normally started to be driven in the power recovery process (start-up process) executed when the power is turned on (execute a process to skip the process for driving the constant rotating body 10675a). FIG. 285(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the execution of the power recovery process (start-up process) that skips the drive process of the constant rotating body 10675a. As shown in Figure 285 (b), the common comment "Please wait while powering on" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and below that, the comment "Power was cut off during a small win game and will return in an error state. Please call an attendant" is displayed, indicating that the current power-on process is an abnormal process.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the power was not turned on normally. In addition, when the power is restored in this state, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the game state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the backup RAM of the main control device 110. In other words, it returns to a state in which a small win game is being played and a ball is present in the small win winning device 10650. In this embodiment, even if a predetermined small win game period has elapsed, the small win game period (the period during which a V win can be effectively determined) is extended while a ball remains in the small win winning device 10650. Therefore, when the power is restored in an error state, the small win game period (the period during which a V win can be effectively determined) will continue until the ball in the rolling device 10675c is discharged.

This prevents the small win game from ending while the player is calling for a staff member after seeing the display screen. Also, since the rotating body 10675a is always in a stopped state, the ball is not discharged from the rolling device 10675c while the player is calling for a staff member.

<Electrical Configuration in Thirteenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 286 to FIG. 289, the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described.
The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 286(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment. In the thirteenth embodiment, the ROM 202 of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 192(a)) is different from the ninth embodiment in that the first win random number table 202a is replaced with the first win random number table 202ma, the first win type selection table 202mb is replaced with the first win type selection table 202b, the variation pattern selection table 202md is replaced with the variation pattern selection table 202d, the small win type selection table 202me is replaced with the small win type selection table 202ea, and a small win scenario table 202mf is newly added. The other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment. Therefore, in the description of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment, only the above-mentioned changes will be described, and a description of the same elements as in the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

The first winning random number 14 table 202ma differs from the first winning random number table 202a (see Figure 192 (b)) of the ninth embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a small prize can also be won by drawing the first special pattern, and that the probability of winning the small prize by drawing the second special pattern has been changed, but is otherwise identical.

Here, the contents of the first winning random number 14 table 202ma will be explained with reference to FIG. 286(b). FIG. 286(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the first winning random number 14 table 202ma. As shown in FIG. 286(b), in the first winning random number 14 table 202ma, the judgment value (the first
The range of the value of the winning random number counter C1) is set to "2 to 590", the range of the judgment value for determining a small win in the lottery for the first special symbol is set to "591 to 599", and the range of the judgment value for determining a loss in the lottery for the second special symbol (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) is set to "2 to 590".
The range of values that will be judged as a small win in the lottery for the second special symbol is "301 to 300".
599" are respectively prescribed.

In other words, in the thirteenth embodiment, the odds of winning the first special symbol are 1/300 (2/60
The probability of winning is 589/600, the probability of losing is 3/200 (9/6
In addition, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of a big win is 1/300 (2/600), the probability of a miss is 299/600, and the probability of a small win is 299/600 (about 1/2).

This makes it possible to execute a small win game even in a normal state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and to execute a big win game via the small win game.

The first winning type selection 14 table 202mb is different from the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 193(a)) of the ninth embodiment described above in that the type of big winning game and
The difference is that the prescribed range of the judgment value (first jackpot type counter C2) for determining the jackpot type has been changed.

The contents of the first winning type selection 14 table 202mb will be described with reference to FIG. 287(a). FIG. 287(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection 14 table 202mb. As shown in FIG. 287(a), the first winning type selection 14 table 202mb lists, as types of jackpot games, "jackpot A14" and "jackpot B14" which are selected when a jackpot is won in a drawing of a first special symbol, "jackpot C14" which is selected when a jackpot is won in a drawing of a second special symbol, and "jackpot D14" which is selected based on the ball passing through a V winning hole (specific area) during a small jackpot game.
"14" and "15" are respectively stipulated.

In the case of "Big Win A14", 10 rounds (R) of round play are executed as a big win game, and if the game state at the time of winning is a normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) will be played 100 times (10 times the lottery for special symbols is played) after the big win game ends.
This is a jackpot type in which a time-saving state (which continues until the jackpot is executed 0 times) is set, and if the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, a normal state (a low probability state for special patterns, a high probability state for normal patterns) is set after the jackpot game ends.

"Jackpot B14" is a jackpot type in which two rounds (R) of play are executed as the jackpot game, and the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning.

In the "Big Win C14" jackpot game, 15 rounds (R) of round play are executed. If the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) will be played 100 times (10 times the lottery for special symbols is played) after the big win game ends.
This is a jackpot type in which a time-saving state (which continues until the jackpot is executed 0 times) is set, and if the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state, a normal state (a low probability state for special patterns, a high probability state for normal patterns) is set after the jackpot game ends.

The "jackpot D14" is a jackpot type in which 10 rounds (R) of round play are executed as a jackpot game, and the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning. This "jackpot D14" is a jackpot type that can be selected when a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and the ball passes through the V winning hole (specific area) during the small jackpot game.

The variation pattern selection 14 table 202md differs from the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 11 ((a))) of the ninth embodiment described above in that it specifies the stop time (fixed time) of the special symbol in addition to the variation time of the special symbol. In other words, the present thirteenth embodiment differs from the ninth embodiment described above in that the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md is configured to be able to select the variation time and fixed time of the special symbol. In addition, the variation type counter C obtained by referring to different data tables according to the set game state is
The configuration for selecting a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) based on the value of S1 is described in the above-mentioned 9th
Since it is the same as the embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md will be explained with reference to FIG. 289. FIG. 289(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md, and FIG. 289(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md.
FIG. 289(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal variation pattern 14 table 202md1 defined in the table 202md.
1 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern 14 table 202md2 specified in d.

As shown in FIG. 289(a), the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md includes a normal variation pattern 14 table 202md that is referenced when the normal state is set as the game state.
02md1, and when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving variable pattern 14 table 202
md2 is specified.

As shown in Fig. 289(b), the normal variation pattern 14 table 202md1 specifies various variation patterns (30 to 90 seconds) according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. Note that the explanation is omitted in Fig. 289(b). Also, it is configured so that different determination times (times for stopping and displaying the special symbol) are set according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

Specifically, regardless of the value of the acquired variable type counter CS1, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a win, the fixed time is set to 1 second, if it is a small win A, the fixed time is set to 5 seconds, if it is a small win B or C, the fixed time is set to 0.5 seconds, and if it is a miss, 0.5 seconds is set.

In the time-saving variation pattern 14 table 202md2, various variation patterns (5 seconds to 10 seconds) are defined according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, as shown in Fig. 289(c). Note that the explanation is omitted in Fig. 289(c). And, it is defined that 0.5 seconds is set as the fixed time, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery.

This allows the time for the special pattern to be determined to differ depending on the game status and the lottery results for the special pattern, and therefore, as described above with reference to Figure 281, when a configuration is used in which the behavior of the winning ball during a small win game is changed by varying the length of the opening period of the small win game, it is possible to ensure a certain period (the combined period of the special pattern determination period and the opening period of the small win game) between the time when the fluctuation of the special pattern that has won the small win stops and the start of the round period of the small win game.

Therefore, based on the execution timing of the preparation performance described with reference to Figure 282, it is possible to prevent the type of small win game to be currently executed for the player (a small win game advantageous to the player, a small win game disadvantageous to the player) from being determined in advance (before the small win game is executed).

The small win type selection 14 table 202me is a data table that is referenced when setting a small win type for a winning small win. The control process contents from the execution of the lottery of the special pattern to the setting of the small win type are the same as those of the ninth embodiment described above, and in this embodiment, the contents of the selected small win type are changed from those of the ninth embodiment described above. Therefore, only the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 14 table 202me will be explained, and the rest will be omitted.

Here, referring to FIG. 287(b), the contents of the small win type selection 14 table 202me will be explained. FIG. 287(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 14 table 202me. As shown in FIG. 287(b), the small win type selection 14 table 202me stipulates the small win type selected when the first special symbol wins the small win, and the small win type selected when the second special symbol wins the small win.

Specifically, when the special symbol that won the small prize is the first special symbol, the value of the acquired small prize type counter C5 is set to "0" for "small prize A14", "1 to 49" for "small prize B14", and "50 to 99" for "small prize C14". When the special symbol that won the small prize is the second special symbol, the value of the acquired small prize type counter C5 is set to "0".
"Small Win A15" is defined in the range of "-49", and "Small Win B15" is defined in the range of "50-99".

Depending on the selected small win type, a different operation scenario is selected as the operation scenario during the small win game, and a different big win type is set as the big win game to be executed when the ball passes through a V winning hole (specific area) during the small win game.

Specifically, when "small win A14, small win A15" is selected as the small win type, the type of big win game executed when the V passes (when the ball enters the V winning hole) is "big win A14 (10R time-limited big win)" in "small win A14", and "small win A15".
In this case, "Big Win C14 (15R Time-Shortened Big Win)" is set, and as the operation scenario for the small win game, an operation scenario is set in which a ball that has entered the small win winning device 10650 is likely to enter the direct V winning port 10657 (the probability of entering the V winning port during the small win game is high (almost 100%)).

When "Small Win B14, Small Win B15" is selected, "Big Win A" is selected as the type of big win game to be executed when the V passes (when the ball enters the V winning hole).
In the "small win B15", "big win C14 (15R time-saving big win)" is set, and as the operation scenario of the small win game, when the game state is in the normal state, the operation scenario is set in which the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 is likely to enter the role route V winning hole 10677 (the probability of entering the V winning hole during the small win game is low (about 25%)). In the time-saving state, the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 is likely to enter the direct V winning hole 10677.
0657 is an easy-to-win scenario (the probability of winning a V during a small win is high (almost 1
00%) is set. In other words, different operation scenarios are set according to the game state. This allows the game content of the small prize game (ease of winning a V prize) to be different depending on the game state in which the small prize is won, even if the same small prize type is won, so that the player can be interested not only in the lottery result of the special symbol lottery, but also in the game state at the time of winning the small prize.

When "small win C14" is selected, "big win D14 (10R time-limited big win)" is set as the type of big win game to be executed when V passes (when the ball enters the V winning hole), and as the operation scenario of the small win game, the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 is likely to enter the role route V winning hole 10677 (the probability of entering the V winning hole during the small win game is low (
(approximately 25%) operational scenarios are set.

The small win scenario table 202mf is a data table that specifies the operation contents for various devices (opening/closing door 10650b, rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) executed during a small win game in correspondence with the set small win type, and is read out when a small win game is executed. Then, the scenario read out in accordance with the start of the small win game is set, the scenario information is updated based on the elapsed time and elapsed conditions, and the operation control corresponding to the updated scenario information is executed for each device.

Here, the contents defined in the small win scenario table 202mf will be explained with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win scenario table 202mf. In FIG. 288, the flow of the operation is shown over time in order to easily explain the contents defined in the small win scenario table 202mf (the operation contents of various devices), but in reality, the operation contents of various devices are defined in accordance with the counter value updated by the counter update process periodically executed by the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 290, the RAM 20 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment
FIG. 290 shows the RA of the main control device 110 in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 290, in this embodiment, the RAM 203 (see FIG. 194) of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment is configured to store the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b instead of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.
The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203mb is provided instead of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f. The ball entry flag 203mc, the storage flag 203md, the V route passing flag 203me, the role route passing flag 203mf, and the elapsed counter 203mg
203mi, and the rest are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The thirteenth embodiment differs from the above-described ninth embodiment in that the number of reserved second special patterns that can be stored (reserved memory number) is reduced from four to one, and in order to accommodate this difference, the configurations of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203ma and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203mb are made different from the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203f of the above-described ninth embodiment.

That is, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) is replaced with a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ma consisting of only one reserved area (reserved area 1). In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f, which can count the number of reserved balls (standby times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of a ball into the second ball entrance 10640 (initial winning), is replaced with a second special symbol reserved ball counter 203mb, which can count up to one time. Since the other contents are the same, detailed explanations and the contents of the control process in which this element is used are omitted.

The winning flag 203mc is the small winning device 10650 described above with reference to FIG.
This flag is set to ON when the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 passes through the ball entry sensor SZ0. This is referenced when determining the game status during the small win game. This is set to OFF when the small win game ends.

The storage flag 203md is a ball that has entered the winning device 10650 and is rotated by the rotating body 1065.
The storage flag 203md is a flag for indicating that the balls have been stored in the storage section 10652a of the ball storage unit 10652a (see FIG. 271), and is set to ON when the balls are stored in the storage section 10652a.
When it is determined that the storage sensor SZ1 provided at 0652a detects a ball and that the timing is within the storage period, it is set to ON (see S3208), and is referred to when determining the current game status during a small win game in the game status setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299) (see S3202 in FIG. 299). It is also referred to when determining an abnormal state during a small win game in the small win monitoring process (see S1395 in FIG. 301) (see S3303 in FIG. 301). Then, when the game status setting process (S1
394), is set to OFF when the current game situation in the small win game progresses.

The V route passing flag 203me indicates that the ball that entered the small winning device 10650 is a straight V
A flag indicating that the ball has passed through the straight V-channel 10651e.
It is set to ON when passing through e.

This V route passing flag 203me is set when the direct V route sensor SZ3 detects the ball in the game status determination process (see S3201 in FIG. 300).
When it is determined that the ball can pass through the period, the switch is set to ON (S321 in FIG. 300).
2). Then, in the game status setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299), the setting status of the V route passing flag 203me is referenced to set the game status during the small win game (S3210 in FIG. 299).

The V route passing flag 203me indicates that the ball that entered the small winning device 10650 is a straight V
A flag indicating that the ball has passed through the straight V-channel 10651e.
This V route passing flag 203me is set to ON when the state in which the direct V route sensor SZ3 detects the ball is a period during which the ball can pass through the direct V flow path 10651e in the game status determination process (see S3201 in FIG. 300), and is set to ON (see S3212 in FIG. 300).
In order to set the game status during the small win game,
The setting status of the route passage flag 203me is referred to (S3210 in FIG. 299). Then, when the small win game is over, the flag is set to OFF.

The reel route passing flag 203mf is a flag for indicating that the ball that won the small prize winning device 10650 has passed through the reel route flow path 10651da, and is set to ON when the ball has passed through the reel route flow path 10651da. This reel route passing flag 203mf is set to ON in the game status determination process (see S3201 in FIG. 300).
When it is determined that the state in which the role route sensor SZ2 detects the ball is a period during which the ball can pass through the role route flow passage 10651da, it is set to ON (S3216 in FIG. 300).
In the game status setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299), the setting status of the accessory route passing flag 203mf is referred to in order to set the game status during the small win game (S3207 in FIG. 299). Then, when the small win game is over, it is set to OFF.

The elapsed counter 203mg is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the small win game, and in the small win control process 15 (see S1092 in FIG. 297), when the small win game starts, the counter value is set to 1 (see S1391 in FIG. 297), and while the small win flag 203ea is set to ON, the value is updated (see S1392 in FIG. 297). Then, when it is determined that it is the timing for the small win to end (S1310 in FIG. 297: Yes), the counter value is reset (S13
(See reference 96).

The value of this elapsed counter 203mg is referenced when determining whether the ball's entry into multiple V winning holes (specific areas) which have different flow periods set is normal or not (see Figure 298).
Also, in the small win monitoring process (see S1395 in FIG. 301), it is referenced when determining whether an abnormality has occurred during small win play (S3305 in FIG. 301). In other words, if multiple V winning ports (specific areas) with different flow periods are provided in a variable ball entry device (small win winning device 10650) that allows balls to enter during small win play, the timing at which the ball enters one V winning port will be different from the other V winning port. Therefore, the period during which it can be determined that the timing of the ball entering the V winning port is normal (valid V winning period) is set to:
If a common period were set for all V winning ports, the V winning validity period would be set to a period longer than the actual V winning validity period for each V winning port, causing a problem in that it would become difficult to monitor abnormal (illegal) balls entering the V winning ports.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a valid V winning period is set for each V winning port, and whether or not the current winning is valid is determined based on the value of the elapsed counter 203mg and the type of V winning port into which the ball has won. This makes it easier to monitor for illegal V winning.

The game status storage area 203mi is a storage area for temporarily storing the game status during a small win game, and is a storage area for storing various game statuses set in the game status setting process (see S1394 in FIG. 299).
The 03mi has a current memory area for storing the currently set game status, and a past memory area capable of storing up to four game statuses that have been set in the past.

In this control example, the game status during a small win game can be set according to the progress of the small win game, such as a storage waiting status (a status in which no balls have been stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652), a waiting status (a status in which balls are stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652), a role passing status (a status in which the ball has passed through the role route flow path 10651da), and a direct V passing status (a status in which the ball has passed through the direct V flow path 10651e). Depending on the currently set game status, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormality during a small win game, and to carry out a small win recovery process (
The contents of the restoration process executed in step S992 of FIG. 296 are different.

Next, referring to FIG. 291, the R of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment
The contents of the ROM 222 will be described. Fig. 291(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment. In this embodiment, a display comment selection table 222 is added to the ROM 222 of the ninth embodiment.
Although detailed explanation is omitted, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 222a are stored in the variation pattern selection 1 table 222b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.
It is changed in accordance with the contents of table 202md 4 and the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

The display comment selection table 222ma is a table in which a ball that has won a small prize winning device 10650 during a small prize game flows down a flow path for a role route 10651da and is moved by a rolling device 1067.
After rolling 5c, the out hole 10680a, 10680b or the role route V winning hole 1
This is a data table which is referred to when selecting the type of comment (see Figures 284 (b) and 285 (a)) to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when the ball enters the ball slot at 0677.

Here, the contents of the display comment selection table 222ma will be described with reference to Fig. 291(b). Fig. 291(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the display comment selection table 222ma. As shown in Fig. 291(b),
ma includes an elapsed time counter 223ma that measures the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot.
A different display comment is selected depending on the value of the jackpot, the type of jackpot set in the current small jackpot game (the type of jackpot executed when a V is won), and the type of ball entry hole (out hole, V entry hole) into which the ball entered.

Specifically, the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma is a value indicating "0 to 2 seconds" as the elapsed time since the ball entered the rolling device 10675c, and if the jackpot type (lottery result) set in the current small prize game is "time-saving win" and the ball entrance (winning result) where the ball entered is "V winning", "super hot" is selected as the display comment, and if the ball entrance (winning result) where the ball entered is "miss (out)", "too bad, it was hot" is selected as the display comment. Also, if the jackpot type (lottery result) set in the current small prize game is "normal win" and the ball entrance (winning result) where the ball entered is "V winning", "congratulations" is selected as the display comment, and if the ball entrance (winning result) where the ball entered is "miss (out)", "too bad" is selected as the display comment.

In other words, if the time that has passed since the ball flowed into the rolling device 10675c is short (within the first period), regardless of the winning result, the display comment is configured to be easily displayed so that the player can easily distinguish the jackpot type (lottery result) set for the small win that was won this time. By configuring in this way, if a V is won in a small win game, the type of the jackpot game (jackpot type) can be predicted before the jackpot game is actually played, and even if a V is not won in a small win game, it is possible to predict the type of jackpot game that will be awarded if a V is won in the current small win game.

If the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma is "2 to 20 seconds" as the elapsed time since the ball entered the rolling device 10675c, the ball entrance (
If the winning result is "V winning", "Congratulations" is selected as the display comment, and if the ball's entry port (winning result) is "miss (out port)", "Unfortunately" is selected as the display comment. In this way, when the time elapsed since the ball flowed into the rolling device 10675c is within a specific range (when the second period), the player cannot predict the current lottery result from the comment displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when a V win is made in the small win game, the player can pay attention to the actual big win game, and when a V win is not made in the small win game, the player cannot predict the current lottery result, so the player can play for the next small win without worrying about the game result of the small win game.

Next, if the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma is a value indicating "20 to 40 seconds" as the time elapsed since the ball entered the rolling device 10675c, and the type of jackpot (lottery result) set for this small jackpot game is a "time-saving win" and the ball entry port (winning result) into which the ball entered is a "V win", then "Congratulations" is selected as the display comment, and if the ball entry port (winning result) into which the ball entered is a "miss (out port)", then "Too bad, it was so hot" is selected as the display comment. Also, if the type of jackpot (lottery result) set for this small jackpot game is a "normal win" and the ball entry port (winning result) into which the ball entered is a "V win", then "Congratulations" is selected as the display comment.
If the result is a "V win", "Congratulations" is selected as the display comment, and if the ball's entry hole (win result) is a "miss (out hole)", the display comment is
"Unfortunately" is selected.

In other words, the time that has elapsed since the ball flowed into the rolling device 10675c is a specific period (third period).
If the winning result is within the range, only when the winning result is "V winning", the display comment with the content that makes it easy for the player to distinguish the big win type (lottery result) set for the small win that was won this time is configured to be easily displayed. In this way, by making the current lottery result easy for the player to distinguish only when the winning result is one of the two, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish all lottery results. In this embodiment, when the winning result is "V winning", a comment with the content that makes it easy for the player to distinguish the current lottery result is displayed, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the winning result is "miss (out)", a comment with the content that makes it easy for the player to distinguish the current lottery result may be displayed, or a predetermined lottery may be executed, and when the lottery result is a predetermined lottery result, a comment with the content that makes it easy for the player to distinguish the current lottery result may be displayed.

Finally, if the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma is a value indicating "40 seconds or more" as the elapsed time since the ball flowed into the rolling device 10675c, and the jackpot type (lottery result) set in this small win game is "time-saving win" and the ball entrance (winning result) where the ball entered is "V winning", "Super hot" is selected as the display comment, and if the ball entrance (winning result) where the ball entered is "miss (out entrance)", "Unfortunately, even if it hit, it was normal" is selected as the display comment. Also, if the jackpot type (lottery result) set in this small win game is "normal win" and the ball entrance (winning result) where the ball entered is "V winning", "Congratulations" is selected as the display comment, and if the ball entrance (winning result) where the ball entered is "miss (out entrance)", "Unfortunately, even if it hit, it was normal" is selected as the display comment.

In other words, if a long time has passed since the ball flowed into the rolling device 10675c, and if the winning result is a "V winning", the type of big win (lottery result) set for the small win that was won this time is displayed in a display comment that is easy for the player to distinguish.
If the winning result is a "miss (out)", a display comment is displayed indicating that the winning result was unfavorable to the player (normal win) regardless of the lottery result. By configuring in this way, when a V is won in a small win game, the type of the big win game can be predicted before the big win game is actually executed, and when a V is not won in a small win game, a display comment showing content different from the actual lottery result is displayed, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

In this embodiment, the display comment is selected based on the above-mentioned content, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the relationship between the elapsed time and the display content may be changed. In addition, in this embodiment, two types of display content are selectable, namely, the display content that allows the lottery result to be determined and the display content that is difficult to determine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one display content may be selectable from three or more types of display content that differ in the ease of determining the lottery result.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display comment that allows the player to predict the lottery result is displayed at the timing when the ball is actually discharged from the rolling device 10675c (the timing when the ball enters either the out port or the V winning port). However, the display comment that allows the player to predict the lottery result may be displayed at another timing. For example,
When the period during which the ball rolls on the rolling surface 10675d of the ball 75c reaches a predetermined period, a display comment that allows the player to predict the result of the current lottery may be displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can pay more attention to the result of the current small prize game based on the content of the display comment, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the content of the display comment selected according to the number of balls that have won the small prize winning device 10650 may be varied. For example, the more balls that have won the small prize winning device 10650, the more advantageous display content is selected for the player. By configuring in this way, the more balls that have won the small prize winning device 10650 during a small prize game, the more advantageous display content is selected for the player.
This allows the player to play with enthusiasm, aiming to win 50.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a display comment that makes it possible to predict the current lottery result, but it is sufficient if the player is informed of the current lottery result in a predictable manner. For example, the lottery result may be made predictable by varying the color of light emitted by the light-emitting means provided in the pachinko machine 10, or the lottery result may be made predictable based on the type of sound output from the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 292, the R of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment
The contents of the AM 223 will be described. Fig. 292 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 292, this embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the ninth embodiment described above in that an elapsed time counter 223ma has been added, and is otherwise the same. The same elements are as follows:
The same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

The elapsed time counter 223ma is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the small win game, and when a small win opening command is received in the win-related process 15 (see S43071 in FIG. 303), the counter value is set to 1 (S44051 in FIG. 303). Then, in the performance update process 15 (see S4191 in FIG. 302), the value is updated by 1. This performance update process 15 is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the voice lamp control device 113 executed every millisecond, and when the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma is incremented by 1, 1 millisecond has elapsed. Therefore, for example, when determining "elapse of 1 second", it is determined whether the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma is "1000" corresponding to 1 second. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the number of seconds is used instead of the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma when explaining the determination of the elapsed time, but the actual control process is determined based on the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma.

<Regarding control process of main control device in thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the control process contents of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 293 to Fig. 301. In this embodiment, the special symbol variation process 13 (see S141 in Fig. 197) is replaced with the special symbol variation process 15 (see Fig. 293), the small win start process (see S266 in Fig. 199) is replaced with the small win start process 15 (see Fig. 294),
The start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200) is replaced with the start-up process 15 (see FIG. 295), and the small win control process 13 (see S1072 in FIG. 203) is replaced with the small win control process 15 (see FIG. 29).
7) is replaced with V-passing detection processing (see S1625 in FIG. 204)
(See FIG. 298) is provided, and other than that, they are the same. Detailed description of the same control contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation process 15 (S141) will be described with reference to FIG. 293. FIG. 293 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 15 (S141). As shown in FIG. 293, the special symbol variation process 15 (S141) is different from the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 13 (see S141 in FIG. 197) in that even if it is determined in the processing of S221 that the value of the time-saving counter 203i is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S221: No),
The process proceeds to S265. If the result of the current lottery is determined to be a small win (S265: Yes), the process to be executed is the small win start process 15.
(S266) is changed, and otherwise the same.

Next, the contents of the small win start process 15 (S266) will be explained with reference to FIG. 294. FIG. 294 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small win start process 15 (S266). As shown in FIG. 294, when the small win start process 15 (S266) is executed, first, the small win scenario corresponding to the small win type that has been won this time is stored in the small win scenario table 2.
02mf (S1591), and then the processes of S1502 and S1503, which are the same as the small win start process described above (see S266 in FIG. 199), are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the start-up process 15 will be described with reference to FIG.
is a flow chart showing the contents of the start-up process 15. In this embodiment, the ball is rolled using the rolling device 10675c as part of the small prize game, and the game result of the small prize game is made different depending on the type of ball entry port (out port, V entry port) into which the ball discharged from the rolling device 10675c entered. The rolling device 10675c is provided with a constant rotating body 10675a, and the constant rotating body 10675a and the rolling device 1067
The collision of the rolling ball with the rolling surface 10675d of the roller bearing 5c makes the ball's behavior irregular.
The ball is rolled in a manner that is difficult for the player to predict, thereby making it possible to provide a small win game that the player will not quickly tire of.

Furthermore, as described above with reference to FIG. 275, the rolling device 10675c is formed in a mortar shape, and the rolling device 10675c is rotated by using the force that the ball receives by constantly colliding with the rotating body 10675a.
675c. By configuring in this way, the rolling device 1
The ball rolling on the rolling device 10675c is prevented from being ejected outside the rolling device 10675c without colliding with the rotating body 10675a (without causing the ball to behave irregularly).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment which uses such a device, if a power outage or other power interruption occurs while the ball is rolling around the rolling device 10675c during a small win game, the ball will remain inside the rolling device 10675c.

In this case, when the power is restored and the driving of the constant rotating body 10675a is started, the ball is stopped in the rolling device 10675c (the rolling device 10675c in the mortar shape).
In the state where the ball is stopped on the bottom surface of the reel, the ball would constantly collide with the rotating body 10675a, and there was a risk that the ball would roll in a regular manner.
If the pattern is such that the ball tends to roll toward 677, the ball is in a small win game and the rolling device 1
There was a risk of fraudulent activity being committed in which the power to the pachinko machine 10 was intentionally cut off while a ball was present within 0675c.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a power outage or other power interruption occurs and power is restored with balls remaining in the rolling device 10675c, the startup process 15 is executed so that the power is restored in an error state without constantly driving the rotor 10675a. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts of intentionally cutting off the power to the pachinko machine 10 while balls are still in the rolling device 10675c. In addition, because the power can be restored in an error state while maintaining the state it was in when the power was interrupted,
It becomes possible to leave it to store staff to handle the situation after the power is restored.

When the start-up process 15 is executed, first, the above-mentioned start-up process 13 (see FIG. 200)
The same process of S901 to S910 as in the above is executed, and then the setting status of the time-saving counter 203i, the big win flag 203m, the small win flag 203ea, and the role route passing flag 203me stored in the RAM 203 is read (S991). In this embodiment, as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the information stored in the RAM 203 is configured to be retained even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The specific configuration is the same as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, so the description thereof will be omitted.

After the process of S991 is completed, the process of S912 is executed, and then the process of returning during the small win is executed (S992), the process of S914 is executed, and the process proceeds to the main process 15. The main process 15 is a process of controlling the small win, which is different from the main process 13 (see FIG. 201).
3 (see S1072 in FIG. 203) instead of the small win control process 15 (see S1092 in FIG. 297)
3. The main process 15 is different from the main process 12 in that it executes the main process 15 in the first embodiment.

Next, referring to FIG. 296, the contents of the small win return process (S992) executed in the start-up process 15 (see FIG. 295) will be described. FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small win return process (S992). This small win return process (S992
) is intended to execute different power recovery processing depending on the game status of a small win game when the power is turned on during the small win game.

When the small win return process (S992) is executed, first, the small win flag 203ea
It is determined whether or not the is set to ON (S3001), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, that the game is not currently in a small win game (S3001: No), the start of rotation of the accelerating rotor (constant rotor) 10675a is set (S3009), and this process is terminated.
In the process of 3001, if it is determined that the small win flag 203ea is set to ON (S3001: Yes), it is next determined whether the V flag (V passing flag) 203ec is set to ON (S3002). If it is determined that the V flag (V passing flag) 203ec is set to ON (S3002: Yes), since the game result of the small win game has already been determined, the progress content of the small win scenario being executed is read out from the memory area (backup area) that was temporarily saved and stored in the power failure process (
S3007), and information corresponding to the read progress content is set in the RAM 203 (S300
8) The process proceeds to S3009, and then this process ends.

In the process of S3002, if it is determined that the V flag (V passing flag) 203ec is not set to ON (S3002: No), that is, if a small win game is currently being played and no ball has entered the V winning hole, the current game status stored in the game status storage area 203mi is read (S3003), and it is determined whether the current game status is a storage waiting status or a waiting status (S3004).
If it is determined that the ball is waiting to be stored or is in a standby state (S3004: Yes), this means that the ball has not yet reached downstream of the rotating body 10652 within the small prize winning device 10650, and there is no problem if the power is restored normally, so processing proceeds to S3007.

On the other hand, in the process of S3004, if it is determined that the current game status is not the storage waiting status or the waiting status, that is, the current game status is the role passing status or the direct V passing status (S3004: No), an error command indicating an error during the small win game is set (S3005). The error command set in the process of S3005 is as follows:
When the current game status is a direct V passing status, the V flag (V passing flag) 203ec is not set to ON even though the ball has passed through the direct V flow path 10651e.
In other words, if a power outage occurs between the time the direct V route sensor SZ3 provided in the direct V flow path 10651e detects the ball and the time the ball enters the direct V winning port 10657, an error command is set indicating that the ball entered the direct V winning port 10657 during the power outage state, and if the current game situation is a reel passing situation, an error command is set indicating that there is a high possibility that the ball is present in the rolling device 10675c.

The error command set in the processing of S3005 is output to an external device such as the voice lamp control device 113 in the main processing of the main control device 110, like other commands. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the above-mentioned error command, it determines the content of the received error command, sets a display command for displaying an error display based on the determination result on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and outputs it to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 displays the error display on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 285 (b)).

After the process of S3005 is completed, it is next determined whether the current game situation is a special feature passing situation (S3006). If it is determined that the special feature is not passing (the straight V passing situation) (S3007),
006: No), since there is no ball in the rolling device 10675c, S300
In the process of S3006, if it is determined that the reel is passing (S3006: Yes), the process of S3009 for setting the start of rotation of the accelerating rotor (constant rotor) 10675a is skipped and this process is terminated.

By configuring in this way, when a ball is present in the rolling device 10675c (when there is a high possibility that the ball is present), an error command indicating this is set, and the startup process 15 can be terminated without rotating the acceleration rotor (constant rotor) 10675a. Therefore, when a ball is present in the rolling device 10675c, the pachinko machine 10
In addition, since the power can be restored as an error state while maintaining the state when the power was cut off, it is possible to leave the response after the power is restored to the store staff.

In this process, if the power is restored in an error state without starting the rotation of the accelerating rotor (constant rotor) 10675a, the store clerk is configured to operate an error release button (not shown) to release the error state and then start the rotation of the accelerating rotor (constant rotor) 10675a. However, without being limited to this, the power may also be turned on again with a button (RAM erase switch) for erasing all or part of the information stored in RAM 203 operated.

Next, referring to FIG. 297, the contents of the small win control process 15 (S1092) will be described. FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small win control process 15 (S1092). As shown in FIG. 297, the small win control process 15 (S1092) is different from the above-mentioned small win control process 13 (see S1072 in FIG. 203) in that a process for updating the value of the elapsed counter 203mg for measuring the elapsed time during a small win game and a process to be executed during a small win game are added, and the rest are the same. The same control contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

When the small win control process 15 is executed, first, the above-mentioned small win control process 13 (FIG. 20
The process executes the same steps S1301 to S1321 as in step S1072 of step S133, and then sets the value of the elapsed time counter 203mg to 1 (step S1391), and ends this process.
01, S1304, and the small win flag 203ea in the process of S1304.
If it is determined that the setting is ON (S1304: Yes), the content of the small win operation scenario and the value of the elapsed counter 203mg are updated (S1392).
In the process of S1310, if it is determined that the small win end timing has not arrived, that is, if it is determined that the small win game is currently being played (S1310: No),
executes the V-passing detection process 15 (S1393), and executes the game status setting process (S139
4) A monitoring process during a small win is executed (S1395), and then this process is terminated.

The V-pass detection process 15 (S1393) executed in the process of S1393 is executed in place of the V-pass detection process 13 (S1625 in FIG. 204) of the above-mentioned ninth embodiment, and its detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 298. In addition, the detailed contents of the game status setting process (S1394) executed in the process of S1394 will be described with reference to FIG. 299, and the detailed contents of the small win monitoring process (S1395) executed in the process of S1395 will be described with reference to FIG. 301.

Returning to FIG. 297, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1310, if it is determined that it is the timing for the small win to end (S1310: Yes), the process of S1311 is executed, the value of the elapsed counter 203mg is reset (S1396), and then the small win control process 13 (FIG. 2
03) (see S1072) and then terminates this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 298, the contents of the V-passing detection process 15 (S1393) executed in the small win control process 15 (see S1092 in FIG. 297) will be described.
20 is a flow chart showing the contents of V-passing detection process 15 (S1393). This V-passing detection process 15 (S1393) is the same as the V-passing detection process (S1625 in FIG. 204).
) in that the processing contents at the time of V passage are changed according to the type of V winning hole through which the ball passed.
Although different reference numerals are used from the V-passing detection process 13 (S1625 in FIG. 204) in the ninth embodiment described above, the process contents are substantially the same. In such cases, only the correspondence will be described and a detailed description of the contents will be omitted.

When the V-passing detection process 15 (S1393) is executed, first, the V-passing detection process 13 (FIG. 2)
04 (S1625) executes the same processing of S3101 and S3102 as S1601 and S1602. Then, if it is determined in the processing of S3102 that there is a V passage (the ball has entered the V winning hole) (S3102: Yes), it is next determined whether the V winning hole into which the ball has entered this time is the direct V winning hole 10657 (S3103), and if it is determined that it is the direct V winning hole 10657 (S3103: Yes), the value of the elapsed counter 203mg is read (S3104),
It is determined whether the read value is within the valid period of the direct V prize (S3105).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 288, the operation contents of various devices (rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653, opening and closing door 10650b) that are controlled during the small win game are specified in the small win scenario table 202mf, so that the various devices are always configured to operate regularly. As a result, in the current small win game, the ball enters each V winning hole (straight V
The period during which the ball can enter the winning hole 10657, the role route V winning hole 10677 (the V winning valid period) is preset in the memory area of the RAM 202. Therefore, the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game is judged by the value of the elapsed counter 203mg, and the judgment of S3105 is executed based on the judgment result and the preset V winning valid period.

In the process of S3105, if it is determined that the current time is not within the valid period for the direct V winning (S
3105: No), an error command is set (S3109) and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the current time is within the valid period for direct V winning (S3105: Yes), the processes of S3106, S3107 and S3108, which are the same as S1607, S1608 and S1609 of the above-mentioned V passing detection process 13 (S1625 in FIG. 204), are executed and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, the V winning hole into which the ball entered this time is the straight V winning hole 10657.
If it is determined that the winning slot is not the V winning slot 10677 (S3103: No
), the value of the elapsed counter 203mg is read (S3110), and it is determined whether the read value is within the V winning valid period of the V winning hole 10677 of the accessory route (S3111).
Since the ball rolling action is performed by the ball rolling device 10675c, the effective period for the V winning of the reel route V winning port 10677 is set to the shortest period, that is, the shortest time (10 seconds) during which the ball can flow into the rolling device 10675c after the start of the small win game.

If it is determined in the process of S3111 that the V winning period is not valid (S3111: N
On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning period is valid (S3111: Yes), the process proceeds to S3106. Note that if an error command is set in the processes of S3109 and S3112, the above-mentioned V
The same process as that of S1604 in the passage detection process 13 (S1625 in FIG. 204) is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, a V winning validity period is set for each of the multiple V winning ports (straight V winning port 10657, role route V winning port 10677), and whether or not the V winning is normal is determined based on the period that has elapsed since the start of the small win game and the type of V winning port into which the ball entered. This makes it possible to determine with high accuracy whether or not the current V winning is normal in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured so that the time required for the ball to reach the V winning port (the period from the start of the small win game) is different from the time required for the ball to reach the V winning port via a different route.

In this embodiment, multiple V entry ports are provided and the period of time it takes for the ball to reach each V entry port is different, but this is not limited to this. For example, if there are multiple paths (flow paths) that can allow the ball to reach one V entry port, the valid V entry period can be set in advance for each flow path through which the ball flows, and a determination can be made as to whether the current V entry is normal or not based on a determination means for the path (flow path) that the ball passed through and the period of time it took for the ball to reach the V entry port.

Also, in this embodiment, in order to reduce the data capacity of the main control unit 110, the determination of the valid period of the V prize is configured to be performed based on a value that is also used for other purposes (the value of the elapsed counter 203mg), but without being limited to this, a dedicated counter (measurement means) for determining the valid period of the V prize may be provided, for example, a counter (measurement means) that measures the elapsed period from the time when the rotating body 10652 operates to the initial position may be provided, and the valid period of the V prize may be determined based on the measurement results of the measurement means. When configured in this way,
The measurement range of the measuring means can be made shorter than that when measuring the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game, and the error range to be considered can be narrowed, so that it is possible to perform a more accurate determination. In addition, since the rotating body 10652 is a device through which balls that can enter the straight V winning port 10657 and balls that can enter the role route V winning port 10677 pass, even when the above-mentioned measuring means are used, it is possible to commonize the measuring means used when determining the V winning effective period for each V winning port. In addition, for example, a measuring means that starts measuring when a ball passes through the role route flow path 10651da or when a ball flows into the rolling device 10675c may be provided, and the V winning effective period may be determined based on the measurement result of the measuring means.

Next, the contents of the game status setting process (S1394) will be described with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 299 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game status setting process (S1394). This game status setting process (S1394) sets the game status during a small win game,
Processing is executed to store the result in the game play status storage area 203mi.

When the game status setting process (S1394) is executed, first, a game status determination process is executed (S3201). In this game status determination process (S3201), a process is executed to set the contents of various flags used for setting the game status based on the detection results (ball detection results) of a plurality of detection means (sensors) provided in the small win winning device 10650.

Here, the contents of the game status determination process (S3201) will be explained with reference to FIG. 300. FIG. 300 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game status determination process (S3201). When the game status determination process (S3201) is executed, it is first determined whether the ball entry flag 203mc is on (S3202). If it is determined that the ball entry flag 203mc is not on (S3202: No), it is determined whether the ball entry sensor SZ0 is on (S3203).
If it is determined that the ball entrance sensor SZ0 is on (S3203: Yes), the ball entrance flag 203mc is set to on (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205.
When it is determined in the process of 02 that the goal flag 203mc is on (S3202: Y
es), or if it is determined in the processing of S3203 that the ball entrance sensor SZ0 is not on (i.e., is off), the processing of S3204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3205.

Next, it is determined whether the storage flag 203md is on (S3205).
If it is determined that the 3md is not on (S3205: No), it is determined whether the storage sensor SZ1 has detected a game ball (S3206). If it is determined that the storage sensor SZ1 has detected a game ball (S3206: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball can be stored (S32
If it is determined that the game balls can be stored (S3207: Yes), the storage flag 203md is set to ON (S3208), and the process proceeds to S3209.
In the process of S3207, if it is determined that the game ball storage period is not in progress (S3207
: No), an error command is set (S3217), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3205 that the storage flag 203md is on (
S3205: Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of S3206 that the storage sensor SZ1 has not detected a game ball (S3206: No), the processing of S3207 to S3208 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3209.

In the process of S3209, it is determined whether the V route passing flag 203me is on (S3209
If it is determined that the V route passing flag 203me is not on (S3209: N
If it is determined that the direct/voltage route sensor SZ3 is on (S3210: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is a period during which the vehicle can pass (S3211). If it is determined that the direct/voltage route sensor SZ3 is on (S3211: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a period during which the vehicle can pass (S3211: Yes).
If the process of S3211 determines that the period is not a passing period (S3211: No), an error command is set (S3217), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3209 that the V route passing flag 203me is on (S3209: Yes), or when it is determined in the process of S3210 that the direct V route sensor SZ3 is not on (S3210: No), S3211 to S321
The process of S3212 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3213.

In the process of S3213, it is determined whether the reel route passing flag 203mf is on (S
3213). If it is determined that the reel route passing flag 203mf is not on (S3
If it is determined that the reel route sensor SZ2 is on (S3214: Yes), it is determined whether it is a passing period (S3215). If it is determined that the reel route sensor SZ2 is on (S3214: Yes), it is determined whether it is a passing period (S3216). If it is determined that it is not a passing period (S3217), it is determined whether it is a passing period (S3218).
215: No), an error command is set (S3217), and the process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the period is a passing period (S3215: Yes), the reel route passing flag 203mf is set to ON (S3216), and the process ends.
In the process of (S32), if it is determined that the reel route passing flag 203mf is on,
13: Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of S3214 that the role route sensor SZ2 is not on (S3214: No), the processing of S3215 to S3216 is skipped and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 299, the explanation of the game status setting process (S1394) will be continued. After the game status determination process (S3201) explained with reference to FIG. 300 is completed, it is next determined whether the storage flag 203md is set to ON (S3202). If it is determined that the storage flag 203md is not set to ON (S3202: No), the ball is stored in the storage section 10 of the rotating body 10652.
Since the ball is not stored in 652a, the current game status is set to a waiting-to-store status (S3203), and processing proceeds to S3213.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3202 that the storage flag 203md is set on (S3202: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball entry flag 203mc is set on (S3204). If it is determined that the ball entry flag 203mc is not set on (S3204: No), that is, if it is determined that the storage flag 203md is set on even though the ball entry sensor SZ0 has not detected a ball, an error command is set (S3205) and this processing is terminated, since the ball has been stored in the storage section 10652a using a route other than the normal route or there is a possible sensor failure.

In the process of S3204, when it is determined that the ball entry flag 203mc is set to ON (S3204: Yes), a standby state is set as the current game status, which indicates that the ball is normally stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652 (S32
Next, it is determined whether the reel route passing flag 203mf is set to ON (S
3207), if it is set to on (S3207: Yes), the storage flag 203m
d is set to OFF (S3208), and the current game status is set to the role passing status (S3209
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3207 that the reel route passing flag 203mf is not set to ON (S3207: No), the process proceeds to S3210.
The process skips steps S3208 and S3209 and proceeds to step S3210.

In the process of S3210, it is determined whether the V route passing flag 203me is set to ON (S3210). If it is determined that the V route passing flag 203me is set to ON (S3210: Yes),
The storage flag 203md is set to OFF (S3211), the current game status is set to a direct V passing status (S3212), and the process proceeds to S3213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3210 that the V route passing flag 203me is not set to ON (S321
0: No), the processes of S3211 and S3212 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3213.

After the process of S3203 is executed, after the process of S3212 is executed, or after S3210
In the process of S3213, which is executed after it is determined that the V route passing flag 203me is not set to ON in the process of S3213, the game status currently stored in the game status storage area 203mi is read (S3213). Then, the read game status is compared with the game status set in the current process (S3214), and it is determined whether the progress of the game status is normal or not (S3215). Here, the type of game status stored in the game status storage area 203mi is set according to the progress of the small win game, and after the storage waiting status is set, the waiting status is set, and then the role passing status or the direct V passing status is set according to the flow path through which the ball that won the small win winning device 10650 flows down.

In the process of S3215, a determination is made as to whether or not the game status is set in the order corresponding to the progress status of the small win game described above. This prevents the illegal act of causing a ball to enter the small win winning device 10650 during the small win game, for example, the illegal act of causing the ball to enter the storage unit 10652 of the rotating body 10652.
Without storing the balls in the second flow path 106, a hole is opened in the glass unit 16.
In the process of S3215, if it is determined that the transition of the game status is normal (S3215: Yes), the game status set in this process is stored in the game status storage area 20
The game status is stored in the game status storage area 203mi (S3216), and the process is terminated. In this embodiment, the game status storage area 203mi is provided with a storage area (current storage area) for storing the current game status and a storage area (past storage area) for storing past game statuses, and when a new game status is set, information indicating the previously set game status is shifted to the past storage area. The oldest game status is then erased from the past storage area.

In the process of S3215, if it is determined that the transition (progression) of the game status is not normal (S3215: No), an error command is set (S3205) and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the small win monitoring process (S1395) will be described with reference to FIG. 301. FIG. 301 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small win monitoring process (S1395). This small win monitoring process (S1395) is a process for monitoring abnormal conditions that may occur during a small win game.

When the small win monitoring process (S1395) is executed, first, the overflow sensor (out sensor)
It is determined whether the overflow sensor (out sensor) SZa (see FIG. 270) is on.
Za is the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 and flows from the first inlet to the outflow path 106
This is a sensor for detecting a ball that has flowed into 51ba.

Next, it is determined whether the rotating body 10675a is positioned at the operating position (S3302).
Next, it is determined whether the storage sensor SZ1 is detecting a ball (whether the storage sensor SZ1 is ON) (S3303). If it is determined in the process of S3303 that the storage sensor SZ1 is ON (S3303: Yes), the process proceeds to S3304.
If it is determined in the process of S3303 that the storage sensor SZ1 is not set to ON (S3
303: No), an error command is set (S3309), and this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, the control contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 302 to 304. In the thirteenth embodiment, the control processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 executed in the ninth embodiment are added with a performance update processing 15 (
302) and the winning-related process 15 (see FIG. 303).
Since the rest of the control is the same, detailed description of the same control contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the performance update process 15 (S4191) will be described with reference to FIG. 302. FIG. 302 is a flow chart showing the contents of the performance update process 15 (S4191). When the performance update process 15 (S4191) is executed, first, the elapsed time counter 223ma
It is determined whether the value of is 1 or more (S45001), and if it is determined that it is 1 or more (S4
5001; Yes), and add 1 to the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma (S45002).
Then, S determines whether the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma corresponds to 40 seconds.
45003.

In the process of S45003, when it is determined that the current timing corresponds to the passage of 40 seconds based on the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma (S45003: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the jackpot type stored in the jackpot type storage area, that is, the suggestive effect for suggesting the jackpot type set at the time of the current small jackpot win (S45004).
), and other processing is performed to update the content of the performance currently being executed (S45005), and then this processing ends.

By configuring in this way, when the elapsed time from the start of the small win game reaches a predetermined time, the big win type corresponding to the big win game to be executed when a V is won in the current small win game can be suggested during the small win game. Note that, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed at the timing when 40 seconds have passed since the start of the small win game, but the timing of the suggestion effect is not limited to this, and the rolling device 10
The value may be set appropriately as long as the elapsed period is long enough to pass only when the ball rolls along 675c.

For example, in the win-related process 15 (see S43071 in FIG. 303) described later, when a game status command for a small win indicating the status of the reel passing is received, a flag (reel passing flag) may be provided which is set to on, and when the reel passing flag is set to on and the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined period (for example, 40 seconds), a suggestive performance may be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, regardless of the type of big win that has been set,
The suggestive performance is executed when 100 seconds (the time elapsed) has elapsed, but for example, the execution condition (elapsed period) for executing the suggestive performance may be made different depending on the set jackpot type, and in this case, it is preferable to configure the execution condition set corresponding to the set jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot type in which a large number of rounds are played as a jackpot game) to be more likely to be established than the execution condition set corresponding to the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot type in which a small number of rounds are played as a jackpot game). This makes it easier to execute a suggestive performance that suggests a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player than a suggestive performance that suggests a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, and therefore makes the player interested in the suggestive performance that is executed.

On the other hand, the execution conditions set in accordance with the set jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot type in which a large number of rounds are played as a jackpot game) may be configured to be more difficult to establish than the execution conditions set in accordance with the jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot type in which a small number of rounds are played as a jackpot game). This makes it difficult to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the jackpot type is advantageous to the player, so that the player can be given a special sense of satisfaction when a suggestive effect that suggests that the jackpot type is advantageous to the player is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the jackpot type stored in the jackpot type storage area is read out to set the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation, but any information capable of suggesting the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game that may be executed after the end of the small jackpot game will suffice. For example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 in which small jackpot types and jackpot types are set in correspondence with each other, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation may be set according to the small jackpot type of the small jackpot that has been won this time.

Next, the contents of the winning-related process 15 (S43071) will be described with reference to FIG. 303. FIG. 303 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning-related process 15 (S43071). This winning-related process 15 (S43071) differs from the winning-related process 13 (see S43001 in FIG. 205) executed in the ninth embodiment described above in that the processing contents when a command related to a small winning set on the main control device 110 side is received are different, and the rest are the same. The same contents are given the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When the winning-related process 15 (S43071) is executed, first, steps S4404 to S4408 and S4400, which are the same as those of the winning-related process 13 (see S43001 in FIG. 205), are executed.
Then, in the process of S44001, if it is determined that the opening command for the small win has been received (S44001: Yes), the elapsed time counter 223
The value of ma is set to 1 (S44051), then an opening command for display to indicate the start of a small win game is set (S44052), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening command for the small win has not been received (S440
01: No), and then it is determined whether a game status command for a small win has been received (S4405).
3). This game status command for small win is executed in the game status setting process (S1 in FIG. 299).
This is a command that is set when a new game status is stored in the game status storage area 203mi by the game status setting command (see 394), and is a command having information for indicating the newly stored game status.

In the process of S44053, if it is determined that a game status command for a small win has been received (S44053: Yes), a display command corresponding to the received command is set (S4
4054), and ends this process. The process of S44054 is a process for setting a display command for displaying a display mode for showing the progress of the small win game on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and for example, a display command showing a display mode according to each game situation described above with reference to FIG. 284 is set.

If it is determined that the small win game status command has not been received (S44053: No
Next, it is determined whether a small win command has been received (S44055). If it is determined that a small win command has been received (S44055: Yes), a small win command process is executed (S440
56), and ends this process. The contents of this small win command process (S44056) will be described later with reference to Fig. 304. If it is determined in the process of S44055 that the small win command has not been received (S44055: No), it is then determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S4409).

In the process of S4409, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4
409: Yes), sets an ending command for display (S4410), and then determines whether the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma is 1 or more (S44057), and if it is determined that it is 1 or more (S44057: Yes), resets the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma (S44058), and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not 1 or more in the process of S44057, that is, if it is determined that the current ending command is a command indicating the end of a big win game (S44057: No), skips the process of S44058 and ends this process.

If it is determined in the process of S4409 that the ending command has not been received (S4
409: No), it is determined whether an error command has been received (S44059), and if it is determined that an error command has been received, a display command corresponding to the information contained in the received error command is set (S44060) and this processing is terminated, but if it is determined that an error command has not been received (S44059: No), this processing is terminated as is.

Next, the contents of the small win command processing (S44055) executed in the win-related processing 15 (see S43071 in FIG. 303) will be explained with reference to FIG.
304 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small win command process (S44055). In this small win command process (S44055), a process is executed to select a display comment in a different display mode according to the type of ball entry into which the game ball entered during a small win game.

First, when the small win command process (S44055) is executed, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating a win in the bonus route V winning port 10677 (S4
4101), if it is determined that the command indicates a win at the reel route V winning port 10677 (S44101: Yes), a display command indicating a win at the reel route V winning port 10677 is set (S44102), and processing proceeds to S44107.

In the process of S44101, if it is determined that the currently received command is not a command indicating a win at the reel route V winning port 10677 (S44101: No), then it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a win at the direct V route V winning port (direct V winning port) 10657 (S44103), and if it is determined that the currently received command is a command indicating a win at the direct V route V winning port (direct V winning port) 10657 (S44103: Yes), a display command indicating a win at the direct V route V winning port (direct V winning port) 10657 is set (S44104).
, proceed to processing S44107.

In the processing of S44103, the command received this time is the direct V route V entry port (direct V entry port).
If it is determined that the command is not a command indicating a win for 10657 (S44103: No),
Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating winning at the outlets 10680a and 10680b for the reel route (S44105).
If it is determined that the command is a command indicating winning in 680a, 10680b (S44105
: Yes), a display command indicating a winning combination is set at the outlets 10680a, 10680b for the reel route (S44106), and processing proceeds to S44107.

In the process of S44105, the command received this time is the outgoing port 10680 for the role route.
If it is determined that the command is not a command indicating a win to 10680b (S44105:N
In the process of S44107, the jackpot type stored in the jackpot type storage area is read (S44107), a display comment is determined based on the read jackpot type and the winning result by referring to the display comment selection table 222ma (S44108), a display command indicating the determined display comment is set (S44109), and this process is terminated.

In addition, the display comment set in the processing of S44108 of the above-mentioned small win command processing (S44055) is also set in the above-mentioned performance update processing 15 (S41 in FIG. 302).
The suggestion effect may be set based on the same technical idea as the technical idea for setting the suggestion effect executed in the previous embodiment (see 91).

<Fourteenth embodiment>
Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 305 to Fig. 308. In the above-mentioned 13th embodiment, a small win game in which a ball that has entered the small win winning device 10650 may enter the direct V winning port 10657 and a small win game in which a ball that has entered the special device route V winning port 10677 may enter are configured to be executable according to the type of small win game and the game state, and when a game state (time-saving state) in which the next big win game is highly likely to be executed (the next big win is almost confirmed) is set, the direct V winning port 10657 is opened in order to end the small win game in a short time.
In order to make it easier to play a small win game that can be won in 657, and to enjoy the small win game for a long time in the normal state, which is a game state that is less favorable than the time-saving state, the role route V winning port 1
It is configured to make it easier to play a small prize game that can be won at 0677.

In the small prize game in which the prize can be won in the prize route V winning hole 10677, the rolling device 10
By making the ball roll within 675c, the behavior of the ball becomes irregular, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the ball will enter the special route V winning hole 10677 and at what timing.
By making it difficult for the player to predict whether the ball will land on 677, the player can be kept interested in the game content of the small win game for a long time.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above, by making the ball's behavior irregular, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether or not the ball will enter the reel route V winning port 10677 and at what timing the ball will enter the reel route V winning port 10677. However, since the rate at which the ball enters the reel route V winning port 10677 is always constant (1/4) regardless of the period during which the ball rolls within the rolling device 10675c, there is a problem that players who play for long periods of time gradually become bored with the game.

In addition, since the behavior of the ball rolling inside the rolling device 10675c becomes irregular, the ball may be discharged from the rolling device 10675c (entering either the out hole 10680a or 10680b or the winning hole 10677 of the role route V) in a short time.
Effects executed based on the ball flowing into 75c (see Figures 283(b) to 284)
This resulted in a shorter execution period, which reduced the presentation effect and made the game difficult for players to understand.

In contrast, in the present fourteenth embodiment, the balls rolling in the rolling device 10675c are
It is possible to set a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the outlets 10680a and 10680b (a state where the ball can enter at the same rate as in the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment) and a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter (a state where it is more difficult for the ball to enter than in the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment). Furthermore, it is configured so that the state can be changed according to the elapsed time of the small winning game.

By configuring in this way, the rolling device 10675 is
The balls rolling in the hole c are in a state where they can easily enter the holes 10680a and 10680b (a state where they can enter at the same rate as in the thirteenth embodiment described above) and in a state where they cannot easily enter the hole (a state where they can enter at the same rate as in the first embodiment described above).
In other words, the winning hole 106 of the role route V is set to be more difficult to enter than in the third embodiment.
It is possible to set a state where the ball can enter into 77 and a state where it is easier to enter into the other entry holes (a state where it is more difficult to enter into the other entry holes). Therefore, it is possible to keep the player interested in the game content of the small win game for a long time.

Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment, a state is set in which it is difficult for balls rolling inside the rolling device 10675c to enter the outlets 10680a and 10680b for a predetermined period (2 seconds) after the period during which balls can flow into the rolling device 10675c is set. This allows balls that have flowed into the rolling device 10675c to enter the outlets 10680a and 10680b in a short time.
This can prevent the ball from landing in 0b.

In addition, in the present fourteenth embodiment, even if a certain period (40 seconds) has elapsed since the period during which balls can flow into the rolling device 10675c has been set, the out ports 10680a and 10680b are closed.
The rolling device 10675c is configured to set a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the hole b.
By making the ball roll for a long time (40 seconds or more) within the slot, it is possible to increase the rate at which the ball enters the prize hole 10677 of the accessory route V. Therefore, since the player can play the game while expecting that the execution period of the small win game will be long, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game during the small win game.

In addition, in the fourteenth embodiment, the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c is configured to be able to inform the player of the period (remaining time) until a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the outlets 10680a and 10680b is set.
It is possible to determine in advance whether an advantageous state will be established if the ball rolls within c.

First, the configuration of the role device 10675 in the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 305. The role device 10675 in this embodiment is the same as the role device 10675 in the 13th embodiment described above, except that it has additional restriction pieces 10678a and 10678b for restricting balls from entering the outlets 10680a and 10680b. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described.

FIG. 305(a) is a front view showing the role device 10675 with the restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b protruding, and FIG. 305(b) is a front view showing the role device 10675 with the restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b protruding.
This is a plan view showing a schematic diagram of the role-play device 10675 with 10678b protruding.
As shown in Fig. 305(a), in this embodiment, restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b are provided to restrict balls from entering the outlets 10680a and 10680b. Specifically, a left restricting piece 10678a for restricting balls from entering the left outlet 10680a and a right restricting piece 10678b for restricting balls from entering the right outlet 10680b are provided, and each restricting piece 10678 is configured to be movable between a restricting position (see Fig. 306(a)) in which the opening of the outlet 10680 is blocked according to a predetermined rule and an open position (see Fig. 306(b)) in which the opening of the outlet 10680 is not blocked as much as the restricting position.

Next, the behavior of the ball in the rolling device 10675c in this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 306. Fig. 306(a) is a schematic diagram showing the behavior of the ball when the restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b are located in the restricting position, and Fig. 306(b) is a schematic diagram showing the behavior of the ball when the restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b are located in the releasing position.

When the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b are regulating the entry of the ball into the outlets 10680a and 10680b, as shown in FIG. 306(a), the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c collides with the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b, and the ball enters the outlet 10680a.
, 10680b, the rate at which balls enter the reel route V winning hole 10677 can be increased as a result.

On the other hand, when the restriction pieces 10678a and 10678b are located at the open position, as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 13(b), the balls can be distributed to each entrance at the same ratio as in the thirteenth embodiment. In this way, by adjusting the restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b, the ease with which the balls can enter the exits 10680a and 10680b can be adjusted.
As a result, it becomes possible to vary the ease with which the ball enters the reel route V winning hole 10677.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b are in the restricting position (FIG. 30
6), when the ball collides with the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b, the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b are arranged so that the ball bounces off toward the center of the rolling device 10675c.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be embodied in various forms, for example, as restriction pieces 10678a and 10678b.
When the ball is in the state where the restricting pieces 10678a, 678b are located at the restricting position (see FIG. 306),
When the ball collides with 10678b, part or all of the ball will enter the winning hole 1 of the special route V.
The restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b may be configured to have a shape that bounces back toward the outlet 10677.
680a, 10680b as a restriction means for restricting the entry of balls into the ball path V
It serves as a guiding means for guiding the ball to the winning hole 10677, and makes it possible to more actively set conditions that make it easier for the ball to enter the reel route V winning hole 10677.

In the fourteenth embodiment, the restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b are configured to be movable in conjunction with each other, but it may be configured to be capable of executing an operation in which only one of them (for example, the restricting piece 10678a) is positioned at the restricting position. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually set a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the outlets 10680a and 10680b, making the game during the small win game more interesting.

Next, referring to FIG. 307, the flow of the small win game in this embodiment and the regulation piece 106
FIG. 307 is a timing chart showing the flow of the small win game in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307, this embodiment differs from the thirteenth embodiment in that the regulation pieces 10678a, 10678b are not included.
The difference is that the operation of 0678b has been added, and other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 307, the regulation pieces 10678a and 10678b are used to start the small win game (
The operation of the restriction pieces 10678a and 10678b is controlled according to a predetermined rule, triggered by the start of the opening period.
Scenario) is other devices (rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653, opening and closing door 10650b)
Similarly, it is specified in the small win scenario table 202mf (see Figure 288).

Specifically, from the start of the small win game, until 9 seconds (first period) have elapsed, the initial position (restricted position) is maintained, and then, from the initial position (restricted position) to the operating position (release position)
It operates for 3 seconds (second period) to the operating position (open position). Then, it operates for 38 seconds (third period).
After maintaining the initial position (fourth period), it takes two seconds (fourth period) to move from the actuated position (release position) to the initial position (restricted position), completing the operation scenario.

According to FIG. 307, the ball that entered the small prize winning device 10650 is
The timing at which the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b flow into the rolling device 10675c is the shortest.
Since b is in the second period, if the ball flows into the rolling device 10675c at the shortest time, it will be difficult for the ball to enter the outlets 10680a and 10680b at that point. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the rolling device 10675c and immediately entering the outlets 10680a and 10680b.

In this embodiment, the period during which the ball is rolling in the rolling device 10675c is measured based on the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma at the time when the role route sensor SZ2 detects the passage of the ball, and is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition to displaying the elapsed time, the remaining period until the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b reach the fourth period can be notified to the player.

According to the example shown in FIG. 307, the rotating body 10652 is operated to the initial position, and when the role route sensor SZ2 detects the passage of the ball, the progress display shows "00
:00" is displayed, and then, depending on the addition status of the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma, when the third period is reached, "02:00" is displayed indicating that 2 seconds have passed, when the fourth period is reached, "40:00" is displayed indicating that 40 seconds have passed, and when the fifth period is reached, "42:00" is displayed indicating that 42 seconds have passed.

Here, the characteristic display contents displayed in this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 308. Fig. 308(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents at the time when 35 seconds have passed since the ball arrived at the reel route (since the reel route sensor SZ2 detected the ball's passage), and Fig. 308(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents at the time when 40 seconds have passed since the ball arrived at the reel route (since the reel route sensor SZ2 detected the ball's passage).

As described above with reference to Fig. 307, when the operation scenario for the regulating pieces 10678a, 10678b reaches the fourth period, the regulating pieces 10678a, 10678b are changed from the operating position (open position) to the initial position (regulating position), so that the ball rolling in the rolling device 10675c gradually becomes more difficult to enter the outlets 10680a, 10680b. Then, when the remaining period until the operation scenario for the regulating pieces 10678a, 10678b reaches the fourth period becomes 5 seconds (when 33 seconds have passed since the third period was set),
As shown in FIG. 308(a), in the display area HR25 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the comment "5 seconds remaining" is displayed as a display mode indicating the remaining time until the fourth period is reached. In addition, a door 1804 is displayed, and a performance is executed that allows the player to predict that something will come out of the door 1804, thereby executing a suggestive performance that suggests that the performance mode of the role challenge performance being executed on the display screen will be changed. Furthermore, the words "Hang in there a little longer!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Note that the display mode indicating the remaining time until the fourth period is reached, which is displayed in the display area HR25, is configured to be subtracted in units of one second as the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma is updated, and is configured to be counted down to "5 seconds", "4 seconds", etc.

Then, when five seconds have passed since the display screen shown in FIG. 308(a) was displayed,
As shown in FIG. 18B, the display area HR24 displays "40:00" indicating that 40 seconds have elapsed, and angel-like characters 1805a and 1805b appear from a door 1804.
5b appears, and the display mode of the bomb 1803 used in the role challenge performance is changed to the display mode of a star pattern. This creates a game state that is advantageous to the player, i.e.
A game state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the out holes 10680a and 10680b (regulating pieces 10678a and
It is notified that 10678b has blocked the outlets 10680a and 10680b (see FIG. 306(a)). Then, a comment such as "You did a great job!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to congratulate the player.

As explained above, in this embodiment, by varying the presentation mode of the device challenge presentation based on the operation content of the regulating pieces 10678a, 10678b, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand, and by informing the player in the display area HR25 of the remaining time until a game state favorable to the player is set, it is possible to allow the player to pay closer attention to the behavior of the ball rolling within the rolling device 10675c.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, rather than displaying the elapsed period on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the time elapsed since the small win game started, the elapsed period (the elapsed period displayed in display area HR24) is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the timing when the reel route sensor SZ2 detects the ball, and the remaining period until the regulating pieces 10678a, 10678b reach the fourth period (the remaining period displayed in display area HR25) is displayed based on the time elapsed since the small win game started. Therefore, even if the timing when the reel route sensor SZ2 detects the passage of the ball varies slightly depending on the behavior of the ball flowing down the small win winning device 10650, the elapsed period displayed in the display area HR24 can be displayed in accordance with the actual behavior of the ball, making it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable.

Furthermore, the timing at which the role route sensor SZ2 detects the passage of the ball varies depending on the behavior of the ball flowing down the small prize winning device 10650, so that the relationship between the display mode of the elapsed period displayed in the display area HR24 and the display mode of the remaining period displayed in the display area HR25 can be made different.
When "00:00" is displayed on the display 4, indicating that 0 seconds have elapsed, the restriction piece 106
Since the remaining period until the fourth period of 78a and 10678b is set is 40 seconds,
307, when the display area HR24 displays "35:00" indicating that the elapsed time is 35 seconds, the display area HR25 displays a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 5 seconds. However, if the period from when the rotating body 10652 is activated until the role route sensor SZ2 detects the ball is delayed by 2 seconds compared to the example shown in FIG. 307, the regulating pieces 10678a, 10678b, 10678c, 10678d, 10678e, 10678f, 10678g, 10678h, 10678h, 10678h, 10678i, 10678j ...
Since the remaining period until the fourth period of 0678b is set is 38 seconds, the display area HR24
When "33:00", indicating that 33 seconds have elapsed, is displayed in the display area HR25, a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 5 seconds is displayed.

In this way, by differentiating the trigger for calculating the elapsed period (ball detection by the reel route sensor SZ2) from the trigger for calculating the remaining period (the start of the small win game), the correspondence between the elapsed period and the remaining period can be made random, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the remaining period until the fourth period is reached based on the elapsed period displayed from the point before the remaining period is displayed.

In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 307, the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b are configured to have a longer operation scenario than other devices, but if the end condition of the small win game (a state in which the predetermined small win game period ends and no balls remain in the small win winning device 10650) is met before the operation scenario set for the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b is completed, the operation scenario may be forcibly ended midway and moved to the initial position. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game period of the small win game from becoming unnecessarily long.

In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the variable means (
In the present embodiment, the regulation piece is driven by a similar technical concept. For example, when using the three-hole Kloon 6710 as shown in FIG. 175, the player can win the prize by opening the winning hole (
For example, a variable means may be configured to provide a winning port that is advantageous to the player (e.g., an OUT winning port) and restrict the ball from entering the winning port that is disadvantageous to the player based on the passage of time, or the variable means may be configured to operate in a variable manner to guide the ball rolling around the three-hole crane 6710 to more easily enter a winning port that is advantageous to the player than a winning port that is disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, when a distribution rotor 6750f as shown in FIG. 189 is provided in place of the rolling device 10675c, the variable means can be configured to be variably controlled so that the ball that flows down the distribution rotor 6750f is more likely to enter the winning hole that is advantageous to the player among the ball entry holes that the ball can enter.

<First Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment>
Next, a first modified example of the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 309 to 311. In the fourteenth embodiment described above, the game period of the small win game, that is, the rolling device 1067
The longer the ball rolling period in the ball rolling device 10675, the easier it becomes for the ball to enter the V winning hole.
The difference is that the longer the rolling period of the ball in rolling device 10675c, the easier it becomes for multiple balls to be present in rolling device 10675c, and a state in which there are multiple balls in rolling device 10675c makes it easier for the ball to enter the V winning hole than a state in which there is only one ball in rolling device 10675c.

In other words, this first modified example embodies in a different concrete example the same technical idea as the above-mentioned fourteenth embodiment, namely, that the longer the rolling period of the ball in the rolling device 10675c, the easier it becomes for the ball to enter the V winning hole.

First, the configuration of the role device 10675 of this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 309 and Fig. 310. Note that the same components as those in the above-mentioned 14th embodiment are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 309(a) is a front view showing the configuration of the role device 10675 in this modified example, and Fig. 309(b) is a plan view showing the configuration of the role device 10675 in this modified example. This modified example is the same as the role device 10675 in the 14th embodiment described above (see Fig. 305) except that the restricting pieces 10678a and 10678b are deleted and the constant rotating body 10675a is changed.

As shown in Figures 309(a) and (b), in this modified example, a second role route V winning hole 10677a is disposed in the center of a constant rotating body 10675a. This second role route V winning hole 10677a has an opening provided above the constant rotating body 10675a so that a ball cannot enter the second role route V winning hole 10677a as long as one ball is rolling in the rolling device 10675c.

Next, referring to FIG. 310, a plurality of (two) rolling elements are provided in the rolling device 10675c in this modified example.
The behavior of the balls when the balls roll will be described. Fig. 310(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which multiple balls roll inside a rolling device 10675c, and Fig. 310(b) is a schematic diagram showing the behavior of the balls when multiple balls collide with each other.

As shown in FIG. 310(a), when multiple balls are rolling in the rolling device 10675c, each ball collides with the constant rotating body 10675a at different times, so each ball behaves as an independent ball. Also, since the balls periodically collide with the constant rotating body 10675a, even if multiple balls flow into the rolling device 10675c at different times, the momentum (rolling speed) of each ball is almost constant. In this state, the balls and the constant rotating body 10675a
When collisions with the ball are repeated multiple times, an opportunity arises for the balls to collide with each other.

When balls rolling inside the rolling device 10675c collide with each other, the behavior of the balls after the collision is irregular depending on the angle and location of the collision. For example, when balls collide with each other near the upstream side of the rolling surface 10675d of the rolling device 10675c, one of the balls (ball Ta2) will float up and enter the second role route V winning port 10677a, as shown in Figure 310 (b).

In this way, by creating a V-shaped winning hole that is impossible (difficult) to win with only one ball,
When multiple balls flow into the rolling device 10675c, the balls can be made to easily enter the V winning hole. In this embodiment, the V winning hole is arranged at a position where the balls collide with each other and the balls that float up can enter the winning hole, but it is possible to add a V winning hole at a position where the balls can easily enter the V winning hole when multiple balls flow into the rolling device 10675c. For example, the first restricting wall 1
A V-shaped entry hole may be added to an area where balls that collide with the rotating body 10675a and bounce back cannot enter due to the second restricting wall 10670b or the second restricting wall 10670c, allowing the ball to enter when it collides with another ball.

Next, referring to Fig. 311, the operation contents for making a plurality of balls flow into the rolling device 10675c in this modified example will be described. Fig. 311 is a timing chart showing the operation contents of various devices (opening/closing door 10650b, rotating body 10652, movable piece 10653) during a small win game in this modified example. As shown in Fig. 311, this modified example differs from the above-mentioned 14th embodiment (see Fig. 307) in that the operation contents related to the regulating pieces 10678a and 10678b are deleted and the operation contents of the rotating body 10652 are changed.

Specifically, during one small win game, the rotating body 10652 is operated three times, and the ball is stored in the storage section 1065 of the rotating body 10652 in both the second operation (2 seconds) and the third operation (3 seconds).
By configuring in this way, the rotor 106 can store the liquid.
During the second operation of the ball storage unit 10652, the balls stored in the storage unit 10652a first flow into the rolling device 10675c, and then during the third operation, the balls stored in the storage unit 10652a flow into the rolling device 10675c.
c.

In other words, when a ball flows into the rolling device 10675c based on the third operation while the ball that has flowed into the rolling device 10675c based on the second operation of the rotating body 10652 continues to roll, multiple balls can be present within the rolling device 10675c.
With this configuration, a player can play a small win game in the hope that the ball that first enters the rolling device 10675c will roll for a long period of time.

In addition, during a round, the rotating body 10652 is set to be in the operating position and in the initial position, so that the two balls cannot flow into the rolling device 10675c unless the ball is timed to enter the small prize winning device 10650. This provides the player with the fun of timing the ball to enter the small prize winning device 10650, and motivates the player to play.

As described above, in this modified example, depending on the timing of the ball entering the small prize winning device 10650, the player may or may not be in an advantageous position, which creates the problem that beginners who have not played much pachinko machine 10 may be easily put at a disadvantage in playing the game.

In order to solve this problem, the ball that won the small prize winning device 10650 is rotated by the rotating body 1.
It is advisable to provide a delay means for varying (irregularly delaying) the period until the ball reaches the rotor 10652. By providing a delay means in this way, even if the timing of the ball entering the small prize winning device 10650 is measured, the delay means can randomize the timing of the ball reaching the rotor 10652, thereby solving the above-mentioned problem. Here, referring to FIG. 312, an example of the configuration of the delay means will be described. FIG. 312(a)
FIG. 312(b) is a front view showing the structure of a delay device 11700, which is a delay means provided between the opening/closing door 10650b of the small prize winning device 10650 and the rotating body 10652, and FIG. 312(c) is a front view showing the structure of a delay device 11700, which is a delay means provided between the opening/closing door 10650b of the small prize winning device 10650 and the rotating body 10652.
11 is a plan view showing a schematic configuration of a delay device 11700 which is a delay means provided between the first and second inputs 11710 and 11720.

As shown in FIG. 312(a), the small prize winning device 1 is opened from the open/close door 10650b.
The delay device 11 is arranged to receive the ball that has flown down the rolling wall 11650f at 0650.
The delay device 11700 is in the shape of a mortar.
At the bottom of the ball rolling surface 10700a, there is a discharge port 10700 for guiding the ball to the rotating body 10652.
As shown in FIG. 312B, the ball that has flowed down the rolling wall 11650f rolls on the ball rolling surface 10700a of the delay device 11700 in an arc shape along the rolling wall 11650f.
A delay device 11700 and a ball rolling surface 10700a are provided, and the ball flows down toward the discharge port 10700b as the momentum of the ball rolling on the ball rolling surface 10700a weakens.
Here, as shown in FIG. 312(b), a prevention wall is formed on the upstream side of the rolling wall 11650f (the right side as viewed from the perspective of FIG. 312(b)) to prevent balls from falling from the rolling wall 11650f, whereas no prevention wall is formed on the downstream side (the left side as viewed from the perspective of FIG. 312(b)), and the balls are configured to randomly fall from the downstream side of the rolling wall 11650f into the delay device 11700. By configuring in this way, the momentum and falling position of the balls falling into the delay device 11700 can be made indefinite, so that the balls do not fall into the discharge outlet 107 of the delay device 11700.
The period from 00b to the ejection can be made more random. Therefore, regardless of the skill of the player, it is possible to generate a state in which multiple balls can enter the rolling device 10675c, and a state in which the balls cannot enter the rolling device 10675c.

Note that the delay device 11700 shown in FIG. 312(a) is an example of a delay means, and the configuration of the delay means used in each of the above-mentioned embodiments may of course be applied.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured based on the following technical idea by using the configuration of the delay device 11700 shown in Fig. 312(a). For example, for the operation contents of various devices during the small win game shown in Fig. 311, after the third operation (3 seconds) of the rotor 10652 is completed,
After 3 seconds, the fourth operation (2 seconds) is executed, and after 2 seconds from the end of the fourth operation, the fifth operation (
2 seconds), and further, the operation patterns (operation scenarios) of the various devices may be set so that the movable piece 10653 is in the open state for 4 seconds starting 17 seconds after the start of the small win game. By configuring in this way, the ball delayed by the delay device 11700 is delivered to the storage section 10652 of the rotating body 10652 in the fourth operation.
When the ball is stored in the movable piece 10 in the open state, the ball flows down as the fourth operation is completed.
653 and enters the straight V winning port 10657. In this way, by making it possible to distribute the ball to each of the flow paths that can enter the role route V winning port 10677 and the flow paths that can enter the straight V winning port 10657 during one small win game, it is possible to provide multiple opportunities to have the ball enter the V winning port during one small win game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, a plurality of outlets for guiding the ball from the delay device 11700 to the rotor 10652 may be provided, and one of them may be configured as a V winning port (V gate) through which the ball can pass, as in the second modified example of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 223) described above. In this way, the delay device 11700, which is a delay means, has the function of a distribution means for distributing whether or not the ball is allowed to enter (pass) the V winning port. Therefore, it is possible to provide a plurality of V winning opportunities for one ball that has entered the small winning winning device 10650. In this case, as in the second modified example of the tenth embodiment described above, when the ball passes through the V winning port (V gate), the player is not notified of this, and when the end condition of the small winning game (a state in which a predetermined small winning game period has ended and no balls remain in the small winning winning device 10650) is met, the V winning opportunity is provided.
It is preferable to configure the device to inform the player of the presence or absence of a win. By configuring the device in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to each of the multiple V winning opportunities executed during one small win game, since it is difficult for the player to notice whether or not a V winning has been won until the small win game ends.

In addition, as in the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 312, a delay device 117 is provided to delay (make indefinite) the time until the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 reaches the rotor 10652.
00, as shown in FIG. 313, the operation pattern of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 executed after the round period of the small prize game has elapsed can be set to an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player, and the configuration can be such that it is advantageous to the player (so that the ball can more easily enter the V winning port) when the flow of the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 is delayed by the delay device 11700 so that it reaches the rotating body 10652 at a predetermined timing.

Here, with reference to FIG. 313, modified examples of operation patterns (operation scenarios) for various devices during a small win game will be described. FIG. 313 shows the small win scenario table 202m.
2 is a timing chart showing the flow of the small win game when using a modified example (small win opening pattern D) of the small win scenario (small win opening pattern) defined in .f. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the small win opening pattern D used in this modified example also has a corresponding small win scenario defined in the small win scenario table 202mf, and is configured to be selected in accordance with a specific small win type.

As shown in FIG. 313, the small win opening pattern D is the same as the small win opening pattern B described above.
In contrast, the operation scenario of the rotating body 10652 and the operation scenario of the movable piece 10653 are changed, and further, the delay device 11700 shown in FIG.
The difference is that the timing when the ball enters the winning position 0650 and the timing when the ball reaches the rotating body 10652 are not fixed but are variable, but otherwise they are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

In this modified example, the operation scenario is set so that the rotating body 10652 is set to a state in which it can receive a ball (a state in which it is changed to the operating position) four times in one small winning game, and the third operation (1 second) is executed when four seconds have passed since the end of the second operation, and the fourth operation (1 second) is executed one second after the end of the third operation. Also, the operation scenario is set so that the movable piece 10653 is set to an open state (a state in which a ball can enter the straight V winning hole 10657) two times, and the second open state is set for 2.5 seconds nine seconds after the end of the first open state.

Here, the period during which the third operation and the fourth operation of the rotating body 10652 are performed, and the movable piece 10
The period in which the second open state of 653 is set is set after 5 seconds, which is a predetermined round period of the small prize game. In other words, it is set to a period in which only the ball delayed by the delay device 11700 can reach the small prize winning device 10650 during the round period for a predetermined period or more.

Then, as shown in FIG. 313, during the third operation period of the rotor 10652, the ball
When the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652, the movable piece 10653 is in a closed state when the ball reaches the movable piece 10653, so the ball is distributed to the role device 10675. When the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652 during the fourth operation period, the movable piece 10653 is in an open state (second open state) when the ball reaches the movable piece 10653, so the flow path (second flow path 10651c) through which the ball can enter the straight V winning hole 10657 is opened.
In addition, even if the ball enters the straight V winning hole 10657 while the rotor is in the operating position, the flow of the ball is delayed by the delay device 11700, so the ball is distributed to the storage section 1065 of the rotor 10652 according to the length of the delay period.
It is configured so that balls cannot be stored in 2a.

By configuring it in this way, the delay device 11700 can provide a state in which it is more advantageous for the player to delay the ball, and a state in which it is more advantageous for the player not to delay the ball, so that the player can be interested in the behavior of the ball during the small win game.
It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since it is configured to set a state advantageous to the player after the period (round period) during which the ball can win the small prize winning device 10650 has elapsed, it is possible to completely prevent the act of trying to win the ball in the small prize winning device 10650 in the advantageous state, and it is possible to easily provide a proper game.

As described above, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a plurality of paths are provided for allowing a ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 to enter the V prize opening, thereby diversifying the game contents during the small prize game (the game contents using the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650). Specifically, a plurality of V prize openings are provided (straight V prize opening 10657, accessory route V prize opening 10677), paths are provided for allowing balls to enter each V prize opening, and a game is performed in which the player enjoys guessing which path the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 will be assigned to. As in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, for example, a plurality of paths (flow paths) that can allow a ball to enter one V prize opening (specific area) are provided, and the ball is directed to the V prize opening (specific area) by the flow path that flows down.
The rate at which the balls enter the goal or the time taken to enter the goal may be varied.

For example, referring to FIG. 270, a new distribution means is provided in the second flow path 10651c, and the distribution means is configured to be variable between the first state and the second state in a predetermined pattern when a small win game starts. When the distribution means is in the first state, the ball is distributed to the movable piece 1.
In the second state, the ball is distributed to the special route V 0653 without passing through the special device 10675.
It is configured to communicate with the prize opening 10677.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a plurality of paths through which a ball can enter one V winning hole (the role route V winning hole 10677), and furthermore, it is possible to make the probability of a ball flowing down each path into the V winning hole different. In the above example, the ball that flows down the special route is configured to certainly enter the role route V winning hole 10677, but this is not limited thereto, and it is sufficient that the V winning probability is set higher than the V winning probability (1/4) of a ball flowing down toward the role route V winning hole 10677 through the role device 10675, and it may be configured so that the V winning probability is 1/2. In addition, it is possible to set the same V winning probability, or to configure so that the V winning probability is lower than the V winning probability (1/4) of a ball flowing down toward the role route V winning hole 10677 through the role device 10675.

In addition, the ball that flows down the special route enters the straight V winning hole 1065 without passing through the movable piece 10653.
7, or the branch to the special route may be provided in the first flow path 10651a or the special route flow path 10651da, instead of the second flow path 10651c. Furthermore, when the delay device 11700 shown in FIG. 312 is provided, a plurality of through holes may be provided in the delay device 11700, and some of them may be used as a distribution means to the special route.

In the above-mentioned thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, as shown in Fig. 270, a configuration is used in which all balls that have won in the small prize winning device 10650 can be guided to the rotating body 10652 that can be guided to the second flow path 10651c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which only a part of the balls that have won in the small prize winning device 10650 flow down toward the rotating body 10652. This allows the player to be interested in whether or not the balls are stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 314 to Fig. 341. In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth to fourteenth embodiments described above, in addition to the case where a big win is won by the drawing of a special symbol, a small win, which is a kind of miss, is won by the drawing of a special symbol, and a game ball enters a V winning hole (specific area) provided in the game area during the small win game, so that a big win is won (a big win game is executed). In addition, in the ninth embodiment described above, a small win can be won with a high probability (for example, 9/10) only by the drawing of a second special symbol (a drawing of a special symbol based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640) (the drawing of the second special symbol is more likely to result in a small win than the drawing of the first special symbol), and the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is variable depending on the game state. That is, in the above-mentioned ninth embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery for the special symbol is kept constant regardless of the game state, and the probability of opening the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 (probability of winning a normal symbol), the variation time of the normal symbol, the opening time, etc. are varied according to the game state, thereby varying the possibility of winning a small jackpot according to the game state, and as a result, the possibility of winning a jackpot is varied (so-called specifications of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine).

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the small prize can also be won in the drawing of the first special symbol (although the drawing of the second special symbol is easier to win the small prize than the drawing of the first special symbol,
The game machine is configured so that a small prize can be won with a higher probability than a big prize can be won by the drawing of the first special symbol, and even in a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) in which the drawing of the first special symbol is executed, a big prize game based on the winning of a small prize can be executed.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment, the game content executed during the small prize game is configured to be different depending on the type of special symbol that is won in the small prize. When the small prize is won in the drawing of the first special symbol (winning probability 1/70), the small prize game (gimmick challenge, V winning probability: about 1/4) in which the ball is expected to enter the gamble route V winning port 10677 (see FIG. 269) in the rolling device 10675 provided in the center of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to be executed as the small prize game. When the small prize is won in the drawing of the second special symbol, the small prize game (straight V challenge, V winning probability: about 1/1) in which the ball is expected to enter the straight V winning port 10657 (see FIG. 269) provided in the right area of the pachinko machine 10 is likely to be executed as the small prize game.

In this way, by configuring the small prize game with different playability according to the type of special symbol that wins the small prize, the pachinko machine 10 can be realized so that the player does not get bored early.
This has the effect of providing the following:

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set, the type of special pattern for which the lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is fixed (because the configuration is such that when the time-saving state is set, only the lottery for the second special pattern is more likely to be executed), so it is not possible to set a game state in which a small win game (gimmick challenge) in which the ball is expected to enter the gimmick route V winning port 10677 (see Figure 269) is more likely to be executed, resulting in a problem in which the player's motivation to play is reduced.

In contrast to this, in the fifteenth embodiment, as a game state in which the lottery for the special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, a game state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (time-saving B state) and a game state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal state (time-saving A state) are provided.
By configuring in this way, during an advantageous game state in which the lottery for the special symbol is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, a game state (time-saving B) that makes it easier to execute a role challenge can be set.
It is possible to provide the player with two game states (time-saving A state) that facilitates the execution of a direct V challenge, and to make the player interested in playing during the advantageous game state.

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the upper limit of the reserved memory number of the second special symbol is set to one, and when a big win game is executed in response to the drawing of the second special symbol during the time-saving state, the normal state is always set after the big win game ends. Then, the drawing of the second special symbol based on the reserved memory (one symbol) of the second special symbol acquired during the time-saving state is executed during the normal state, and when a small win is won in the drawing of the second special symbol (small win probability 1/2) and a big win game is executed, the time-saving state is set again.

In other words, in the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment, once the time-shortened state is set, the next jackpot game is almost guaranteed, but instead the time-shortened state is not set continuously. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a favorable game state (time-shortened state) advantageous to the player is set, but the favorable game state ends without the player winning a jackpot (without the jackpot game being executed), which would result in a decrease in the player's motivation to play, while also preventing excessive bonuses (prize balls) from being awarded to the player.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment described above, advantageous game states (time-saving states) that are advantageous to the player are not set consecutively, and each time a jackpot game is played, it is necessary to keep a close eye on whether or not a small jackpot will be won in the first special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery reserved and stored during the time-saving state) that is played after the end of the jackpot game, which means that the player cannot play with peace of mind.

In contrast, in the fifteenth embodiment, in addition to the time-saving A state (a game state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed during the time-saving state) in which the same game as the time-saving state of the thirteenth embodiment is executed, a favorable game state (time-saving B state) in which the lottery for the first special symbol is easily executed can be set, and when a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the time-saving B state, the time-saving B state is set again after the end of the big jackpot game executed based on the small jackpot game that was won. In other words, in the fifteenth embodiment, it is configured to be possible to provide the player with a favorable game state (time-saving A state) in which the big jackpot game is easily executed during the time-saving state and the time-saving state is difficult to be set continuously, and a favorable game state (time-saving B state) in which the big jackpot game is difficult to execute during the time-saving state and the time-saving state is easy to be set continuously.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment, the first condition for setting the time-saving A state and the time-saving B state are
The second condition under which the state is set is different from the first condition under which the state is set.
The first condition is more likely to be satisfied, and the second condition is more likely to be satisfied when the time-saving A state is set than when the normal state is set. In addition, the second condition is more likely to be satisfied when the time-saving B state is set than when the time-saving A state is set.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the game state is set in a stepwise manner in the order of the normal state, the time-saving A state, and the time-saving B state, and once the time-saving B state is set, the time-saving B state is set repeatedly with a high probability. And, when the time-saving B state is set, no matter what triggers the big win game, the normal state is not set after the big win game ends.

In other words, among the advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player, while the time-saving A state is set, the normal state that is disadvantageous to the player is likely to be set after the big win game is executed, and while the time-saving B state is set, the normal state that is disadvantageous to the player is unlikely to be set after the big win game is executed. As a result, while the time-saving B state is set as the advantageous game state, the big win game can be executed with peace of mind, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 314. Fig. 314 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the present fifteenth embodiment. This embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is changed, but is otherwise the same. Note that the same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 314, the pachinko machine 10 of this 15th embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the 13th embodiment described above in that it is provided with a first operating ball inlet 20064b and a second operating ball inlet 20064a through which balls flowing down the serpentine flow path 10600a can enter, and in that it is provided with a distribution winning device 20070 (see Figure 315) at the downstream end side (the lower right side as viewed from the perspective of Figure 314) of the gate-type electric device 20640a for operating the above-mentioned first operating ball inlet 20064b and second operating ball inlet 20064a to a state where balls can enter.

The ball launched into the game area by right-handed play flows down the right side area of the game board 13, flows down over the closed opening and closing door 10650b, and then flows into the serpentine flow path 10600a. The ball discharged from the outlet 10600b of the serpentine flow path 10600a collides with nails planted in the game board 13 and is diverted in various directions, and about 1/3 of the balls discharged from the outlet 10600b enter the normal prize hole 10067 (one prize ball), and the remaining balls (2/3
3) rolls on the rolling surface 20700b (see FIG. 315), and the gate-type electric device 20640a
The balls are ejected toward the big win device 10065 through an opening formed to face the jackpot.

Here, the configuration of the distribution winning device 20070 will be described with reference to Fig. 315 and Fig. 316. Fig. 315 is a partial enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 15th embodiment, and Fig. 316 is a partial enlarged view showing the flow of operation of the distribution winning device 20070 of the 15th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 315, there is a gate-type electric device 206 on the upstream side of the distribution winning device 20070.
40a is provided. This gate-type electric device 20640a is configured in the same manner as the gate-type electric device 10640a of the thirteenth embodiment described above, and is an electric device that operates when a winning symbol is drawn in a normal symbol lottery. Normally, it is located in a standby state embedded in the game board 13, and is configured to operate according to a predetermined operating pattern to a guided state protruding from the game board 13 when a winning symbol is drawn in a normal symbol lottery (a normal symbol winning). The gate-type electric device 20640a that has been activated to the guided state is guided to the game board 13 by a partition wall 20700a.
It is capable of catching balls flowing down the flow path 20700b formed above, and the upper surface of the gate-type electric device 20640a is configured to slope downward toward one end of the distribution winning device 20070 so that the balls caught on the upper surface of the gate-type electric device 20640a can flow down in a manner that guides them toward the distribution winning device 20070.

In the fifteenth embodiment, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, when the normal state is set, even if a winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery and a normal symbol winning game is executed, the opening pattern of the gate-type electric device 20640a and the flow-down length of the gate-type electric device 20640a (the gate-type electric device 20640a) are set so that balls cannot flow into the distribution winning device 20070.
The length from the upstream end to the downstream end of the 40a is set, but the specific configuration is the first
Since this is the same as the third embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Inside the prize distribution device 20070, there are a first flow path 20075a and a second flow path 2007
The ball that flows down the first flow path 20075a is guided to the first operating port 2007.
The ball is configured so that the ball enters the second operating port 20073a and flows down the second flow path 20075b into the second actuation port 20073b. Furthermore, a switching valve (variable flow path) 20072 is provided at the position where the first flow path 20075a and the second flow path 20075b branch off.

This switching valve (variable flow path) 20072 has a first switching state (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 315) in which the balls that have flowed into the distribution winning device 20070 are caused to flow down to the first flow path 20075a, and a second switching state (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 315) in which the balls that have flowed into the distribution winning device 20070 are caused to flow down to the first flow path 20075b.
The second switching state (shown by the dotted line in FIG. 315) is configured to be switchable (slidable) to a second switching state (shown by the dotted line in FIG. 315) in which the ball flows down to the flow path 20075b. When a winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery,
The switch valve 20072 is configured to be operated in a predetermined operation pattern based on the execution of a winning game. When the switch valve 20072 is in the first switching state, the second flow path 20075b
The upstream side of the first flow path 20075a is blocked, and only the first flow path 20075a is opened. Then, the balls that flow into the prize-winning device 20070 flow down the inclined surface of the switching valve 20072 and enter the first flow path 20075b.
Proceed to 075a.

On the other hand, when the switching valve 20072 is in the second switching state, the upstream side of the first flow path 20075a is blocked, and only the second flow path 20075b is opened.
The ball that flows into the interior of the valve 20070 flows down the area formed between the partition wall 20070a and the vertical surface of the switching valve 20072, and proceeds to the second flow path 20075b.

Here, the switching valve 20072 is normally (when a winning game is not being executed),
In this embodiment, as described above, the gate-type electric device 20640a is operated so that the balls cannot flow into the distribution winning device 20070 by the normal winning game in the normal state. However, when the ball is discharged from the flow path 20700b during the normal winning game in the normal state, it collides with the gate-type electric device 20640a which is in the guided state for a moment, and the ball bounces back and enters the distribution winning device 2007.
There is also a risk of it drifting towards 0.

However, in this embodiment, in the normal state, a normal winning game (gate type electric device 20
During the period (0.5 seconds) during which the opening and closing operation of the first valve 640a is performed, the switching valve 20072 is in the first position.
Since the switching state is maintained, even if a right-hand hit game is performed during the normal state and a ball flows into the distribution winning device 20070, the ball will enter the first operating port 20073a. When the ball enters the first operating port 20073a, the first operating device 20064
b1 is activated, making it possible for a ball to enter the first operational ball entrance 20064b.

Furthermore, by continuing to play right-hand, the ball is made to enter the first operating ball entrance 20064b, and processing is performed to draw the first special pattern in the same manner as when the ball is made to enter the first ball entrance 64. In this way, even if a right-hand hit game is played during the normal state and the ball bounces and flows into the distribution winning device 20070, the same process is executed as when a left-hand hit game is played during the normal state and the ball enters the first ball entry port 64. Furthermore, the rate at which a ball that flows down the left side area of the game board 13 by playing a left-hand hit game enters the first ball entry port 64 is much lower than the rate at which a ball that flows down the right side area of the game board 13 by playing a right-hand hit game collides with the gate-type electric device 20640a that is opened for a short time and flows into the distribution winning device 20070 (approximately 1 in 15 balls). Therefore, since there is no advantage to playing a right-hand hit game during the normal state, players will play a left-hand hit game during the normal state.

In this embodiment, the switching valve 20072 is configured to be switchable between two states (a first switching state and a second switching state), and the allocation winning device 2
The balls are configured to flow into either the first operating port 20073a or the second operating port 20073b without being restricted from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the switching valve 20072 may be configured to be switchable between three or more states, so that the balls flowing into the distribution winning device 20070 are allowed to flow down toward the first operating port 20073a, and the balls flow down toward the second operating port 20073b.
It may be configured to be switchable between a state in which the liquid flows downward toward the actuation port 20073b and a state in which the liquid flows downward toward the outlet.

In addition to the switching valve 20072, a blocking member is provided to prevent balls from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070, and the blocking member is configured to operate in conjunction with the switching valve 20072 based on the execution of a normal winning game, and the operating pattern is such that when a normal winning game is executed during the time-saving state, the blocking member operates from a blocking state in which it is difficult for balls to flow into the distribution winning device 20070 to a permissive state in which it is easier for balls to flow in than in the blocking state, and when a normal winning game is executed during the normal state, the blocking member maintains the blocking state during the normal winning game.

By configuring it in this way, when a normal winning game is executed during the normal state,
It is possible to reliably prevent balls from flowing into the prize-winning device 20070.

Next, referring to FIG. 316, each actuation port (first actuation port 20073a, second actuation port 2007
3b), the operation contents when the ball enters the first operating port 20073 will be explained.
A first operating mechanism 20074a is provided inside the first operating hole 20073a. When a ball enters the first operating hole 20073a, the first operating mechanism 20074a is activated, and the first operating device 20064b1
It is composed of known non-electric parts so that the door is in an open state.

That is, one end side of the first operating mechanism 20074a is configured to come into contact with the ball that has entered the first operating port 20073a, and the other end side of the first operating mechanism 20074a is configured to come into contact with the first operating device 200
The first operating mechanism 20074a is operated by the weight of the ball that enters the first operating port 20073a, and the first operating device 20064b1 is connected to the first operating mechanism 20074a.
The first actuating device 20064b1 is configured to switch to an open state. In addition, when a predetermined number of balls (2 balls) enter the first actuating ball entrance 20064b while the first actuating device 20064b1 is in an open state, the first actuating device 20064b1 is configured to switch to a closed state. The first actuating ball entrance 20064b is a starting hole that triggers the drawing of the first special symbol, and when a ball enters the first actuating ball entrance 20064b, the same control processing as when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is executed.

Similarly, a second operating mechanism 20074b is provided inside the second operating port 20073b, and is configured as a known non-electric device so that when a ball enters the second operating port 20073b, the second operating mechanism 20074b is activated and the second operating device 20064a1 is opened.

That is, one end side of the second operating mechanism 20074b is configured to come into contact with the ball that has entered the second operating port 20073b, and the other end side of the second operating mechanism 20074b is configured to come into contact with the ball that has entered the second operating port 20073b.
The second operating mechanism 20074b is operated by the weight of the ball that enters the second operating port 20073b, and the second operating device 20064a1 is connected to the second operating mechanism 20074b.
The second actuation device 20064a1 is configured to switch to an open state. In addition, when a predetermined number of balls (2 balls) enter the second actuation ball entrance 20064a while the second actuation device 20064a1 is in an open state, the second actuation device 20064a1 is configured to switch to a closed state. The second actuation ball entrance 20064a is a starting hole that triggers the drawing of the second special symbol, and when a ball enters the second actuation ball entrance 20064a, the same control processing as when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is executed.

In this manner, in this embodiment, in a game state (time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols)) in which the balls flowing down the gate-type electric device 20640a can flow into the distribution winning device 20070, depending on the state of the switching valve 20072, the operation port through which the balls enter (first operation port 20073a,
The second actuation port 20073b) is configured to be different.

Then, the actuated role (first actuated role 20064b1, second actuated role 20064a1) corresponding to the actuated port (first actuated port 20073a, second actuated port 20073b) into which the ball entered is opened, and the actuated role (first actuated role 20064b1, second actuated role 20064a1) that is opened is opened.
It is possible to provide a state in which a ball can enter the operation entrance (first operation entrance 20064b, second operation entrance 20064a) to which the operation entrance 20064a1 is attached (first operation entrance 20064b, second operation entrance 20064a1). Therefore, in the time-saving state in which the lottery for the special symbol is more likely to be executed (the normal winning game which is advantageous to the player is more likely to be executed) than when the normal state is set, the type of the special symbol for which the lottery is executed can be appropriately changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on a lottery of a special symbol, different types of time-saving states (time-saving state A, time-saving state B) can be set according to the type of the jackpot, and the allocation winning device 20070 is configured to set different types of time-saving states (time-saving state A, time-saving state B) according to the type of the set time-saving state.
It is possible to set a time-saving state (time-saving state B) in which a ball flowing into the reel is more likely to enter the first operating port 20073a, and a time-saving state (time-saving state A) in which a ball flowing into the reel is more likely to enter the second operating port 20073b.
Specifically, the opening operation pattern of the gate-type electric device 20640a in a normal winning game, which is executed upon winning a normal pattern, is made different depending on the set type of time-saving mode, so that the state of the switching valve 20072 when the ball flows into the distribution winning device 20070 is made different.

Here, referring to FIG. 317, the gate type electric device 206 executed during a normal winning game is
317 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the gate-type electric device 20640a when the time-saving state is set and the switching operation of the switching valve 20072. As shown in FIG. 317, the gate-type electric device 20640a is configured to be operable in two types of opening patterns (opening pattern A and opening pattern B) corresponding to the time-saving type that has been set, and is predefined so that opening pattern B is set when the time-saving state A is set as the time-saving type, and opening pattern A is set when the time-saving state B is set. Note that this opening pattern is stored in the ROM 20 of the main control device 110.
The normal power operation scenario is stipulated in the normal power operation scenario 16 table 202ng of 2, and is configured so that when a normal symbol lottery is won, a normal power operation scenario (opening pattern) corresponding to the currently set game state and time-saving type is read out.

The switching valve 20072 in the allocation winning device 20070 is configured to switch (slide) between a first switching state (a state in which balls can flow down the first flow path 20075a) and a second switching state (a state in which balls can flow down the second flow path 20075b) in a predetermined operating pattern triggered by the start timing of a normal winning game, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 317, after the first switching state is maintained for 1.5 seconds after the start of a normal winning game, it slides to the second switching state and maintains the second switching state for 3 seconds. Then, an operating pattern is specified in which the second switching state is maintained for 3 seconds, and then it slides to the initial state, the first switching state.

In this embodiment, the switching valve 20072 is configured to operate in a predetermined fixed pattern regardless of the game state when the normal winning game is executed, and the opening pattern of the normal winning game described above is changed to change the operating port into which the ball can enter. By configuring in this way, the operating port into which the ball can enter can be changed by using a control that is also used for changing the opening pattern of the normal winning game according to the game state (for example, a control that changes the opening pattern of the normal winning game between the normal state and the time-saving state), so that the control process for changing the operating port into which the ball that flows into the allocation winning device 20070 enters can be simplified compared to the case of using a dedicated control process.

When the opening pattern A is set, the gate-type electric device 20640a is in the induction state (the ball distribution winning device 20
070), followed by a 1.4 second open state (a buried state where it is difficult to allow the balls to flow down towards the prize-winning device 20070), and then a 0.
A normal winning game in which a guiding state is set for 1 second is executed. In this embodiment, the downstream length tz1 (see FIG. 315) of the gate-type electric device 20640a is set so that the operation period (the period during which the guiding state is set continuously) of the gate-type electric device 20640a required to cause the ball to flow into the distribution winning device 20070 is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, in the latter half of the normal winning game in which a guiding state of 0.1 seconds is set, the ball
The system is configured so that no water can flow into the system.

In other words, in a normal winning game in which the opening pattern A is set, the ball is distributed to the prize-winning device 20070 by the induction state (the induction state for one second) set immediately after the start of the normal winning game.
In this embodiment, the gate-type electric device 20640a is designed so that it takes about 0.3 seconds for the ball discharged from the downstream end of the gate-type electric device 20640a to reach the first flow path 20075a or the second flow path 20075b.

As described above, the switching valve 20072 is configured to be in the first switching state capable of allowing the ball to flow down to the first flow path 20075a for 1.5 seconds after the start of a normal winning game, so that a ball that flows into the distribution winning device 20070 during a normal winning game in which opening pattern A is set will flow down the first flow path 20075a and win at the first operating port 20073a.

On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is set, immediately after the start of a winning game of a normal symbol, the gate-type electric device 20640a is in an induction state (a protruding state in which the ball can flow down toward the distribution winning device 20070) for an extremely short time (0.1 seconds), and then in an open state for 1.4 seconds (a buried state in which it is difficult to flow the ball down toward the distribution winning device 20070),
A normal winning game in which a guiding state is set for 1 second is executed. In this embodiment, the downstream length tz1 (see FIG. 315) of the gate-type electric device 20640a is set so that the operation period (the period during which the guiding state is set continuously) of the gate-type electric device 20640a required to cause the ball to flow into the distribution winning device 20070 is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, in the latter half of the normal winning game in which a guiding state of 0.1 seconds is set, the ball
The system is configured so that no water can flow into the system.

In other words, in a normal winning game in which the opening pattern B is set, the ball is distributed to the prize-winning device 200 by the induction state (induction state for 0.1 seconds) set immediately after the start of the normal winning game.
It will not flow into 70, and the induction state (1
The balls are configured to flow into the prize-winning device 20070 by a guidance state of 10 seconds.

As described above, the switching valve 20072 is configured to set the second switching state capable of causing the balls to flow down the second flow path 20075b for three seconds 1.5 seconds after the start of the normal winning game. Therefore, in the normal winning game in which the opening pattern B is set, the balls that flow into the distribution winning device 20070 flow down the second flow path 20075b and are released from the second operating port 20075b.
The winner will be 0073b.

By configuring it in this manner, the type of special pattern for which the lottery is executed can be varied by operating the gate-type electric device 20640a in different opening patterns depending on the type of time-saving mode that is set. This makes it possible to diversify the lottery games for special patterns executed during time-saving play, thereby increasing the interest in the game executed during the time-saving state.

Also, for example, if a second special pattern lottery is configured to be executed in a way that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, the player can be made interested in which special pattern lottery will be executed during the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, as described above, the game is configured to be played in different opening patterns depending on the time-saving type, and when the time-saving type A state is set, the game is played in the opening pattern B to draw the second special pattern, and when the time-saving type B state is set, the game is played in the opening pattern A to draw the first special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, when any time-saving type is set, the game can be played in the opening pattern A and the game can be played in the opening pattern B, and the selection ratio of each opening pattern can be made different depending on the time-saving type set. By configuring in this way, even if the player knows the set time-saving type, it is difficult for the player to know which opening pattern the next game will be played in.

In addition, scenario data may be provided that specifies the opening pattern of the normal winning game in accordance with the number of times the special symbol changes (number of draws) or the number of times the normal symbol changes (number of draws) during the time-saving state, and the normal winning game may be executed in the opening pattern specified in the scenario data. This makes it possible to change the opening pattern of the normal winning game according to the progress of the games (special symbol draws, normal symbol draws) executed during the time-saving state.

In this case, for the time-saving state (100 special chart fluctuations) set after the end of the big win game, the scenario data should be set so that the normal chart win game is executed with the opening pattern B during the first predetermined period (for example, 10 special chart fluctuations), and the normal chart win game is executed with the opening pattern A during the remaining period (for example, 90 special chart fluctuations).
It is preferable to configure the normal winning game of pattern A to be more advantageous to the player than the normal winning game of pattern B. By configuring in this way, among the advantageous game states (time-saving states) set after the end of the big win game, it is possible to provide the player with an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time-saving state. In addition, the scenario data may specify contents other than the above-mentioned specified contents, and may specify that the normal winning game of pattern A and the normal winning game of pattern B are executed alternately, or may be configured to provide the player with an unfavorable time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player first.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the switching valve 20072 is configured to always operate in a fixed operation pattern regardless of the game state, and the opening pattern of the gate-type electric device 20640a is made different depending on the game state (time-saving type), so that the type of operation port through which the ball can enter can be made different during a normal winning game during the time-saving state. However, without being limited to this, for example, the gate-type electric device 20640a may be configured to always operate in a fixed opening pattern regardless of the game state, and the operation pattern of the switching valve 20072 may be made different depending on the game state (time-saving type). Even in such a configuration, it is possible to make the type of operation port through which the ball can enter different during a normal winning game during the time-saving state. Also, the switching valve 2007
2 and the opening pattern of the gate-type electric device 20640a are both in the game state (
By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the types of the operating openings through which the ball can enter by combining the operation contents of a plurality of devices (the switching valve 20072, the gate type electric device 20640a), so that it is possible to set the types of the operating openings through which the ball can enter in a more complicated manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one each of the first actuation port 20073a and the second actuation port 20073b is provided, but the number of each actuation port is not limited to this, and two or more may be provided. Also, the number of each actuation port may be different. By providing a plurality of actuation ports in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which actuation port the ball flowing into the distribution winning device 20070 will enter, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with a game that is difficult to predict.

Next, a flow of transition of game states in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 318. FIG. 318 shows the flow of transition of game states in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment.
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram showing a game flow of the first embodiment.
The game flow of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment (see FIG. 280) is different in that the time-saving state is divided into two time-saving states (time-saving state A and time-saving state B), the transition contents of the game state during the time-saving state are changed, and a part of the transition ratio at each transition opportunity is changed, but the rest is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents are omitted.

In the fifteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 314, while the normal state is set,
Since it is difficult for a ball to enter the starting hole (second operating ball entrance 20064a1), which triggers the drawing of the special symbol, a game (special 1 game) is played in which the ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 by left-handed play, aiming to draw the first special symbol. In the drawing of the first special symbol that is executed during this special 1 game, a special symbol lottery is executed which has a probability of 1/300 for winning a jackpot and a probability of 1/20 for winning a small jackpot. If a jackpot is won in the special 1 game, jackpot B is executed with a probability of 95%. This jackpot B is a jackpot game that is played once.
This is a jackpot game in which 0 rounds of round play are executed, and a normal state (unfavorable state) is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 325(a)). Meanwhile, in the remaining 5% of cases, a jackpot A is executed. This jackpot A is a jackpot game in which 10 rounds of round play are executed as a jackpot game, and a time-saving state (time-saving A state) is set after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 325(a)).

In addition, if a small prize (winning probability 1/20) is won in the special 1 game, the small prize winning device 10650 is opened with a 70% probability.
A small prize C is selected in which a small prize game is executed in which the ball that entered at 0650 is unlikely to enter the V prize opening (straight V prize opening 10657, accessory route V prize opening 10677) provided in the small prize winning device 10650 (see FIG. 325(b)). A detailed explanation will be given later, but when a small prize game corresponding to this small prize C is executed, the rotating body 10652 moves to the initial position (sideways).
Since the small prize game is executed so that the ball enters the small prize winning device 10650 only during the period when the ball is located at the out port 1065, all the balls that entered the small prize winning device 10650 are
The ball will land in No. 4. Therefore, the small win game corresponding to the small win C executed during the normal state is the small win game most disadvantageous to the player.

In the remaining 30% of small prize games (small prizes A and B), a small prize game (apparatus challenge) is executed in which the ball that entered the small prize winning device 10650 is guided to a flow path that can enter the accessory route V winning port 10677. This accessory challenge is a small prize game in which the ball is caused to flow down into the rolling device 10675, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, and is a small prize game in which the ball can enter the accessory route V winning port 10677 (specific area) with a probability of 1/4. Note that the details of this accessory challenge are the same as those in the thirteenth embodiment described above, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, during the normal state, if a small jackpot is won by the drawing of the first special symbol, and the ball enters the role route V winning hole 10677 (specific area) during the small jackpot game, a big jackpot game is executed,
After the big win game ends, the time-saving state (time-saving A state) is set. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 15th embodiment, the probability of winning a small win is 1/20, and among them, a small win game that does not result in a V win is executed at a rate of 70%, and a small win game with a V win rate of 25% is executed at a rate of 30%, so that the probability of a big win game being executed in response to a small win in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state is about 1/280. Therefore, in the drawing of the first special pattern, the probability of winning a jackpot (1/300) and having a time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game (5% of winning a jackpot (1/300)) is higher than the probability of winning a small jackpot (1/20) and having a time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game (approximately 8% of winning a small jackpot (1/20)). Therefore, in the normal state in which the drawing of the first special pattern is mainly carried out, play is carried out with the aim of having the time-saving state set upon winning a small jackpot.

Next, the flow of the game during the time-saving state will be explained. In this embodiment, the type of the time-saving state can be set to a time-saving A state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed, and a time-saving B state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is easily executed, and the time-saving A state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal state. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a time-saving type (time-saving A state) that is easily set and a time-saving type (time-saving B state) that is difficult to set in the game during the normal state. By providing a time-saving type that is easily set and a time-saving type that is difficult to set in this way, the player can play the game while having fun wondering which time-saving type will be set.

First, the flow of the game during the time-saving A state, which is the type of time-saving that is easy to transition (set) from the normal state, will be explained. The flow of the game during the time-saving A state in this embodiment is different from the flow of the game during the time-saving state in the thirteenth embodiment described above in that the destination of the game state when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol is different, and the content of the time-saving end condition for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state is different, but otherwise it is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

When the time-saving A state is set, the gate-type electric device 20640a is changed to long (1 second), so that the balls can easily flow into the distribution winning device 20070, and further, in a normal winning game, the opening operation of the opening pattern B is executed (is easily executed), so that the balls can easily enter the second operating port 20073b. When the ball enters the second operating port 20073b, the second operating device 20064a1 provided in the serpentine flow path 10600a is opened (opened),
The ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 20064a1. Therefore, during the period in which the time-saving A state is set, the player can easily select the second special symbol by simply continuing to play right-hand.

In addition, when the time-saving A state is set, the ball is more likely to enter the second operating ball entrance 20064a1 by right-handed play than by left-handed play, so the player plays a right-handed game while the time-saving A state is set. In this embodiment, the ball is not allowed to enter the first operating ball entrance 20073a during normal winning play while the time-saving A state is set, so the ball is not allowed to enter the first operating ball entrance 20064b by right-handed play during the time-saving A state.

In addition, as in this embodiment, when a specific time-saving type (time-saving A state) is set, the configuration is not limited to one in which only one special pattern lottery is performed, but it may be configured so that one special pattern lottery is more likely to be performed (is performed with priority) than the other special pattern lottery.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving A state, a winning lottery is executed with a probability of 1 in 300 to win the big prize and a probability of 1 in 2 to win the small prize. Note that the winning lottery probability of each second special symbol executed during the time-saving state and the flow of the game when the small prize is won are the same as those in the thirteenth embodiment described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving A state, the time-saving B state is set after the jackpot ends. In other words, during the time-saving A state, the jackpot is won (1/3) before the jackpot is played based on the small jackpot game, which has a 1/2 probability of winning.
00), the time-saving B state is set. In this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to reserve and store one lottery right for the second special symbol. Therefore, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol and the time-saving B state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol that was reserved and stored in the state in which the time-saving B state is set may be executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above with reference to Figure 314, the second operating device 20064a1 and the second operating ball entrance 20064a are provided in the serpentine flow path 10600a through which the ball shot by right-hand play flows down in order to enter the jackpot winning device 10065, which is opened during jackpot play. Therefore, it is configured so that it is difficult to play a jackpot game without entering the ball into the second operating ball entrance 20064a in the open state so that the lottery for the second special pattern is not executed after the time-saving B state is set.

By configuring in this way, the probability of executing a time-saving game (Gem Rush) in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the time-saving B state can be made lower than the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving A state (1/300). Specifically, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving A state (1/300), and the jackpot game is not executed based on the lottery for the second special symbol (the reserved second special symbol) executed in the time-saving B state set after the end of the jackpot game (the jackpot game is not executed (the jackpot game is not won (2
In the case where the winning combination is 0.99/300 or the small winning combination is not 0.1 (1/2), a time-saving game (a special feature rush) in which a lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the time-saving B state can be executed, so that the special feature rush can be made more difficult to execute. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play a game that is difficult to execute.

In addition, the present embodiment is not limited to the configuration, and for example, a configuration that excludes the function for reserving and storing the lottery right for the second special symbol may be used. In this case, since it is possible to make it difficult to execute the lottery for the second special symbol after the time-saving B state is set, it is possible to increase the added value when a jackpot is won in the time-saving A state.

In addition, as described above, even if a big win game is executed while the second operation ball entrance 20064a is in an open state in which it is easy for a ball to enter, the ball may enter the second operation ball entrance 20064a during the big win game.
When the ball enters the second operating ball entrance 20064a, the second operating device 20064a1 closes, so that the second operating ball entrance 20064a is prevented from being opened after the big win game ends, that is, when the time-saving B state is set. Therefore, the lottery for the second special symbol is prevented from being drawn while the time-saving B state is set.

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, when the time-saving state is set, a small win (1/2) is won.
If a big win game is played based on the small win, the big win (1/3
In other words, when the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is the same for the easy-to-achieve trigger (a V winning during a small win game) and the difficult-to-achieve trigger (a jackpot win in a special symbol lottery), there was a problem that when the difficult-to-achieve trigger was achieved and the jackpot game was executed, the player's motivation to play was reduced.

In contrast to this, in the present fifteenth embodiment, when the execution conditions for a jackpot game that are easily achieved when the time-saving A state is set (winning a small jackpot) are achieved, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, and when the execution conditions for a jackpot game that are difficult to achieve when the time-saving A state is set (winning a jackpot) are achieved, the time-saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to vary the game state set after the end of a jackpot game based on a plurality of jackpot conditions that can be established during the time-saving A state, thereby making it possible to make the player interested in the game executed during the time-saving state (time-saving A state).

Next, the flow of the game in the time-saving B state, which is set based on winning the jackpot of the second special symbol in the time-saving A state, will be explained. This time-saving B state is configured to continue until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 99 times without executing the jackpot game, just like the time-saving A state described above. When the time-saving B state is set, the gate-type electric device 10640a
Since the time is long variable (1 second), balls tend to flow into the distribution winning device 20070, and furthermore, since the opening operation of the opening pattern A is executed (is easily executed) in the normal winning game, balls tend to enter the first operating port 20073a.
When a ball enters the first operating ball entrance 20064b1, the first operating device 20064b1 provided in the serpentine flow path 10600a opens, making it easier for the ball to enter the first operating ball entrance 20064b. Therefore, while the time-saving B state is set, the first special symbol can be easily drawn by simply continuing to play with the right hand. Also, when the time-saving B state is set, there is a higher probability of the ball entering the first operating ball entrance 20064b by playing with the right hand than by playing with the left hand.
Since the ball is inserted into the second operating port 20064b, the player plays a right-hand shot game while the time-saving B state is set. In this embodiment, since the ball is not inserted into the second operating port 20073b during a normal winning game while the time-saving B state is set, the ball does not enter the second operating port 20064a by a right-hand shot game performed during the time-saving B state.

In addition, as in this embodiment, when a specific time-saving type (time-saving A state) is set, the configuration is not limited to one in which only one special pattern lottery is performed, but it may be configured so that one special pattern lottery is more likely to be performed (is performed with priority) than the other special pattern lottery.

When the first special symbol is drawn during the time-saving B state, the big win (1/300) and small win (1/20) are determined with the same winning probability as the first special symbol in the normal state. If the small win is won, the rolling device 10675c is operated at a rate of 100%.
In this way, a small winning game (a role challenge) is executed in which the ball flows down the hole.
In an embodiment, the probability of a feature challenge being executed when a small jackpot is won by drawing the first special pattern is varied depending on the game state, and the feature challenge is executed with a 30% probability of a small jackpot being won during the normal state, whereas the feature challenge is executed with a 100% probability of a small jackpot being won during the time-saving B state.

By configuring in this way, not only the ease of execution of the first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the time-saving state (the ease of the ball entering the starting hole which is the lottery trigger for the first special symbol) is improved, but also the ease of the first special symbol lottery is improved.
The ease of executing a big win game based on a special symbol lottery can also be varied, making the time-saving state (time-saving state B) a more advantageous game state. Also, by making it a game state in which it is easy to execute a role challenge that allows players to enjoy the behavior of the ball, it is possible to set a game state in which players do not quickly become bored.

In this embodiment, the time-saving B state is a game state in which the first special pattern is more likely to be drawn and the device challenge is more likely to be executed, compared to the normal state; however, it is sufficient if the time-saving B state is configured to be a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. For example, the time-saving B state may be configured to be a game state in which the first special pattern is more likely to be drawn and the probability of executing the device challenge does not change, or the time-saving B state may be configured to be a game state in which the device challenge is more likely to be executed without changing the ease of drawing the first special pattern.

Then, when the ball enters the special route V winning hole 10677 in the special challenge and a big win game is played, the time-saving B state is set again after the big win game ends. In other words, if a small win is won (with a probability of 1/20) by the time the time-saving end condition is met (by the time the special symbol lottery is performed 99 times), and the V winning hole (special route V winning hole 10677) is played in the small win game,
By having the ball enter the winning number 0677 (probability 1/4), the time-saving B state can be looped (loop rate approximately 70%).

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to set a time-saving A state in which the time-saving states (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) are unlikely to be set consecutively, and a time-saving B state in which they are likely to be set consecutively, thereby providing a wide variety of play during the time-saving state.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won (1/300) in the lottery for the first special pattern executed during the time-saving B state, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot set; if the jackpot type is jackpot A (5% probability), the time-saving B state is set again after the jackpot game ends, and if the jackpot type is jackpot B (95% probability), the time-saving A state is set after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, once the time-saving B state is set, if a jackpot game is played during the time-saving B state, the normal state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so that the jackpot game can be played safely during the time-saving state.

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, the time-saving state can be set to either the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, and the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed is different depending on the type of time-saving state that is set. This allows various playability during the time-saving state, and can increase the interest in the game. In addition, the probability of executing a jackpot game during the time-saving state and the time-saving state continuation rate at which the time-saving state is set to continue are configured to differ depending on the type of time-saving state that is set.

This allows the game to have, during the time-saving state, a gameplay in which a jackpot game is expected to be played and a gameplay in which a time-saving state is expected to be set again after the jackpot game ends, depending on the type of time-saving state that has been set, so that the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early on.

Furthermore, the probability of the special feature challenge being executed in the time-saving B state is different from the probability of the special feature challenge being executed in the normal state.
Even if the same first special symbol lottery is executed in the time-saving B state and the time-saving B state, the time-saving B state can be made a more advantageous game state than the normal state. In this embodiment, the execution probability of the feature challenge is configured to be different between the normal state and the time-saving B state, but it is sufficient to configure the time-saving B state to be more advantageous to the player than the normal state. For example, it is also possible to configure the winning rate of the ball to the V winning hole (feature route V winning hole 10677) when the feature challenge is executed to be different without changing the execution probability of the feature challenge.

In this embodiment, the same time-saving end condition (special chart variation 9) is set for the time-saving A state and the time-saving B state.
9 times), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving end condition for the time-saving A state and the time-saving end condition for the time-saving B state may be set differently. In addition, when a common time-saving end condition is set for the time-saving A state and the time-saving B state, it is preferable to set a time-saving end condition that can be established by drawing a first special symbol and a time-saving end condition that can be established by drawing a second special symbol as the time-saving end condition to be set. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to variably set the time-saving end condition according to the type of the time-saving state to be set, and therefore the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, the operation of each device during a small win game in this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 319. Fig. 319 is a timing chart showing the operation of each device during a small win game. As shown in Fig. 319, in this 15th embodiment, a small win winning device 1 executed as a small win game is added to the pachinko machine 10 of the 13th embodiment.
The difference is that the contents of the opening operation of the opening/closing door 10650b of 0650 are different, but the rest is the same. Detailed description of the same operations will be omitted.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the type of small win game to be executed is the role route V winning port 1.
A small prize game (a role challenge) where you aim to get the ball to enter 0677, and a direct V prize slot 1
The game is configured to be able to set a small prize game (straight V challenge) in which the aim is to get the ball to enter 0657, and a small prize game (false small prize) in which the ball cannot enter (is difficult to enter) any of the V prize slots (gimmick route V prize slot 10677, straight V prize slot 10657). When a small prize is won in the drawing of the first special pattern during the normal state and small prize C is set as the small prize type (70% of small prize wins), the small prize game that is executed is configured to be the above-mentioned false small prize.

In addition, the game content of the small win game that is executed when the small win type is set to small win C is configured to be variable depending on the game state at the time of winning the small win, and when the normal state is set, the above-mentioned false small win is executed, and when the time-saving state (time-saving B state) is set, the role challenge is executed. In this way,
By varying the contents of the small win game executed in response to the same small win type according to the game state, it becomes possible to easily variably set the ease of a ball entering a V winning hole (specific area) during the small win game according to the game state.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the fifteenth embodiment, the operation pattern of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653, which are executed when the small win game starts, is different from that of the thirteenth embodiment.
The period until the operation is changed from 0.5 seconds (see Figure 278) in the 13th embodiment to 5.5 seconds, and the period from the start of the small win game to the movable piece 10653 being changed to the open state is changed from 1 second (see Figure 278) in the 13th embodiment to 6 seconds.

That is, in the fifteenth embodiment, the period from when the small win game is executed until the rotor 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are activated (non-operation period) is configured to be 5 seconds longer than in the thirteenth embodiment. Then, the small win game corresponding to the false small win described above is executed using this non-operation period.

Specifically, when a small prize is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state and a small prize game of the small prize C (special 1 small prize C) is executed, the small prize game is executed with an operation scenario of an opening period (1 second), a round period (1.5 seconds), and an ending period (2.5 seconds). By executing the small prize game in this way, a ball that entered the small prize winning device 10650 during a false small prize will enter the V winning hole (the role route V winning hole 10677, the direct V winning hole 106
In the fifteenth embodiment, the round period of the small win game is set to 1.5 seconds, and the small win winning device 1
When 10 balls hit the jackpot at 0650, the small prize game (round period) ends.

As in the above-mentioned embodiments, in the fifteenth embodiment, the number of balls shot per minute is set to 100, so that 10 balls rarely enter the small prize winning device 10650 during the round period (1.5 seconds) of the small prize game, and the round period ends when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. The small prize game ends after an ending period (2.5 seconds) that is longer than the period (0.5 seconds) required for the ball that entered the small prize winning device 10650 just before the end of the round period to flow into the first inlet 10651b and reach the outlet 10654.

By configuring in this way, the end timing of the special 1 small win C can be fixed 5 seconds after the start of the small win game. Since the timing 5 seconds after the start of the small win game is the timing when the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are not operating, as shown in FIG. 319, when a false small win is executed in which the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 does not enter the V winning hole (the role route V winning hole 10677, the direct V winning hole 10657), the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 can be suppressed from operating.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 from being unnecessarily operated, which would cause deterioration of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653.

In addition, 5 seconds after the start of the small win game is the timing when all the balls that have won the small win winning device 10650 are discharged to the outside of the small win winning device 10650 under normal circumstances. Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, the winning device 10650 is discharged at this timing.
The small win winning device 106 is configured to determine whether a ball remains in the small win winning device 106 (first determination) and to determine whether an abnormal state has occurred during the small win game.
The number of balls that have entered the small prize winning device 10650 is calculated based on the detection result of the ball entrance sensor SZ0 (see FIG. 270), and the number of balls that have been discharged from the small prize winning device 10650 is calculated based on the detection result of the overflow sensor (out sensor) SZa (see FIG. 270). Based on the difference between these values,
It is configured to determine whether or not a ball remains in the small prize winning device 10650, and if it is determined that a ball remains, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the game.

If it is determined that the game is abnormal, an error command is set to indicate that an abnormality (error) has occurred during the small win game, and the set error command is output to the outside. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, a fraudulent act of leaving a ball that has entered the small win winning device 10650 during a false small win in the small win winning device 10650 using a magnet or the like, and letting the remaining ball flow down in time with the operation of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653.

Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment, if an abnormality (error) occurs during a small win game, the small win game is not terminated, so that it is possible to prevent the game from continuing with an abnormality (error) occurring during the small win game.
As in the fifth embodiment, if an abnormality (error) occurs during a small win game, in order to prevent the small win game from ending, it is preferable to set an abnormal extension state indicating that the small win game is extended in an abnormal state, and set an abnormal operation pattern in which the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are not operated in a normal operation pattern (operated in an operation position that is most disadvantageous to the player) in the abnormal extension state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more reliably prevent the execution of fraudulent acts in which the remaining balls are left in the small win winning device 10650 using a magnet or the like and the remaining balls are allowed to flow down in accordance with the timing at which the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are operated.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when a small prize is won in the lottery for the first special symbol and a small prize game in which small prize A is set as the small prize type (special 1 small prize A) or a small prize game in which small prize B is set as the small prize type (special 1 small prize B) is executed, or in the time-saving state (time-saving B state) when the above-mentioned special 1 small prize A to special 1 small prize C are executed, the opening and closing door 10650b is controlled to operate so that a role challenge is executed in which the ball that has entered the small prize winning device 10650 flows down toward the role route V winning port 10677, just as in the case of winning a small prize with the first special symbol in the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment.

In this embodiment, as described above, the rotation body 1065
2, and the period until the movable piece 10653 starts to operate is delayed by 5 seconds compared to the thirteenth embodiment described above, so that the opening and closing door 106 is set to execute the role challenge.
The operation pattern of 50b is also different from that of the thirteenth embodiment described above in that it is delayed by five seconds, but otherwise is the same.
A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the small win game in which the role challenge is executed, the period from the start of the small win game to the opening and closing door 10650b (opening) is 1
The winning ball during this round period is stored in the storage section of the rotating body 10652 located in the upward position (operating position), and then the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 106
In response to the operation of the reel sensor SZ2, the reel passes through the reel route sensor SZ2 and flows down toward the rolling device 10675.

The ending period of 3.5 seconds is set as a sufficient time for the operation of the rotating body 10652 to be completed and for the ball to pass through the role route sensor SZ2. In other words, the timing at which this ending period has elapsed is a timing at which the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are not in operation, so even if the small win game is ended based on the elapse of the ending period, it is not necessary to forcibly end the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 that are in operation. Therefore, as a process for ending the small win game, the rotating body 10652 is stopped.
This eliminates the need to provide different operation patterns for the movable pieces 652 and 10653, and simplifies the control process.

In addition, since the timing of the ending period is set to a time sufficient for the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 to pass through the accessory route sensor SZ2, it is configured to be able to reliably determine whether or not a accessory challenge has been executed in this small prize game at the timing of the ending period. If it is determined that the ball has not passed through the accessory route sensor SZ2 at the timing of the ending period, a process for determining a game abnormality in which the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 remains is executed as a process for ending the small prize game, and if it is determined that the ball has passed through the accessory route sensor SZ2, an extension process for extending the period of the small prize game is executed.

By configuring in this way, when a small win game in which a role challenge can be executed is executed, if the ball cannot be made to win the small win winning device 10650 (
It is possible to make the end timing of the small win game different between when the ball does not pass through the accessory route sensor SZ2 when the ending period of the small win game has elapsed) and when the ball can be made to enter the small win winning device 10650 (when the ball passes through the accessory route sensor SZ2 when the ending period of the small win game has elapsed). Therefore, in a small win game in which a accessory challenge is not executed, there is an effect that the small win game can be consumed efficiently compared to a configuration in which the small win game is ended after waiting for a period until the accessory challenge can be ended.

In addition, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, when a special feature challenge is executed as a small win game and an extension process is executed, the special feature challenge may be fully completed within a certain period (for example, 1
20 seconds) has elapsed, a process for ending the small prize game is executed. As a result, in a small prize game in which the same small prize type is set (for example, special small prize A), the timing for ending the small prize game and the timing for determining the game abnormal state in which the winning ball remains in the small prize winning device 10650 can be made different depending on the game content in the small prize game.

In addition, in the case of a small win game in which a special feature challenge is executed, that is, even when a normal game is being played, the end timing of the small win game is indefinite depending on the behavior of the ball, a plurality of different timings may be set as the end timing of the small win game, and a corresponding end process may be executed when each timing has elapsed. Specifically, for example, the timing when 120 seconds have elapsed since the special feature challenge was executed may be set as the first timing, and the timing when 180 seconds have elapsed may be set as the second timing, and when the first timing has elapsed, the ball may enter the rolling device 10675.
It is determined whether the symbol remains within the game, and if it is determined that the symbol remains, a long-term execution command is set to indicate that the role challenge is being executed for a long time, and a performance display corresponding to the set command (for example, displaying the words "long challenge in progress" on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) is executed, and the long-term execution command is also output to the outside, to notify the arcade staff that the role challenge is being executed for a long time. Then, when a second timing (180 seconds) set as a period longer than the first timing has elapsed, it is preferable to configure the game to determine whether an abnormal game state has occurred.

By configuring in this way, at the time when the first timing has elapsed, it is possible to notify the store clerk of the unclear state as to whether the reel challenge is being executed for a long time due to the behavior of the ball during the reel challenge or the game abnormality has occurred during the small win game, and to perform a notification (advance notification) to have the store clerk directly check the pachinko machine 10, so that it is possible to prevent a game abnormality state from being set for a player in whom the reel challenge has been continuously executed for a long time due to the behavior of the ball during the reel challenge, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Also, even if a game abnormality state actually occurs, the state can be made visible to the store clerk at the game parlor based on the passage of the first timing, so that it is possible to prevent a player from being made to wait for an unnecessarily long time (the time until the second timing has elapsed) with the game abnormality state occurring.

Returning to Fig. 319, the explanation will be continued. When the small prize of the second special symbol is won, the opening and closing door 10650b is controlled to perform a straight V challenge in which the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 flows down toward the straight V winning port 10657, in the same manner as when the small prize is won with the second special symbol in the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment.

In this embodiment, as described above, the rotation body 1065
2, and the period until the movable piece 10653 starts to operate is delayed by 5 seconds compared to the thirteenth embodiment described above, so that the opening and closing door 106 is set to execute a direct V challenge.
The operation pattern of 50b is also different from that of the thirteenth embodiment described above in that it is delayed by five seconds, but otherwise is the same.
A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the small win game in which the direct V challenge is executed, the period (opening) from the start of the small win game to the opening and closing door 10650b is 5 seconds.
. 5 seconds is set, followed by a round period (1.5 seconds) and an ending period (3.5 seconds).
The winning ball during this round is stored in the storage section of the rotating body 10652 located in the upward position (operating position), and then the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10
In response to the operation of 653, the ball passes through the direct V route sensor SZ3 and flows down toward the direct V winning port 10657.

The ending period of 3.5 seconds is set as a sufficient time for the operation of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 to be completed and for the ball to enter the straight V winning hole 10657. In other words, the timing when this ending period has elapsed is the timing when the rotating body 10652
Since the timing is such that the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653 are not in operation, even if the small win game is ended based on the passage of the ending period, it is not necessary to forcibly end the operating rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653. Therefore, as a process for ending the small win game, it is not necessary to provide an operation pattern that differs the operation of the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 10653, and the control process can be simplified.

Also, when a game is being played normally, this is the timing when all the balls that have won in the small prize winning device 10650 have been discharged to the outside of the small prize winning device 10650, and therefore this is the timing when no balls remain in the small prize winning device 10650.
In the fifteenth embodiment, at this timing, a determination is made as to whether or not a ball remains in the winning device 10650 (second determination), and a determination is made as to whether or not an abnormal state has occurred during the small win game (determination as to whether or not the game is in an abnormal state). If it is determined that the game is in an abnormal state, a process corresponding to the game abnormal state is executed, and if it is determined that the game is not in an abnormal state, a process for ending the small win game is executed.

<About the content of the performance in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 320 to Fig. 323, characteristic contents of various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present fifteenth embodiment will be described.
In the above-mentioned thirteenth embodiment, when a time-saving state (time-saving A state) in which the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed is set, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (if a jackpot game is executed based on the establishment of a specific condition), after the jackpot game ends,
The main difference is that it provides a game feature in which a time-saving state (time-saving state B) is set in which the selection of special symbols is more likely to be performed.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment, various effects corresponding to the above-mentioned gameplay are configured to be executed as characteristic effects. Therefore, the contents of the effects corresponding to the characteristic gameplay of the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 320 to 322. Note that, among the effects shown below, the effects showing the same contents as those in the thirteenth embodiment described above will be given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 320, the contents of the performance during the time-saving A state will be explained.
FIG. 320(a) is a schematic diagram showing the content of the performance executed during the time-saving A state.
FIG. 320(b) is a schematic diagram showing the content of the presentation at the end of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won with the second special symbol during the time-saving A state.
When the special symbol lottery is executed, in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81,
An effect is executed in which the character 1800 runs and captures one of the icons 1810a to 1810d.

The icons 1810a to 1810d are display modes for suggesting the result of the lottery for the second special symbol currently being executed, and when the character 1800 acquires the icon 1810a resembling a "?", an effect is executed in which the result of the lottery for the second special symbol this time is not known until the second special symbol variation stops (until a predetermined period has elapsed after the effect is executed). Although detailed contents of the effect are not shown in the figures, the icon 1810a indicates that the character 1800 has acquired the icon 1810
The display mode is changed after the icon 1810a is acquired, and the display mode showing "?" is changed to other display modes of "V, 7, x". In this way, when an acquisition effect in which the character 1800 acquires the icon 1810a is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to the executed effect in order to know the lottery result of the second special symbol in advance, even after the acquisition effect is executed. In this way, by varying the timing of the suggestive notification of the lottery result of the second special symbol according to the content of the acquisition effect, the player can be continuously interested in the effect executed during the variable period of the second special symbol.

Next, the icon 1810b imitating a "V" indicates that the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a "small win."
When the character 1800 executes the winning effect of winning the icon 1810b, the result of the current drawing of the second special symbol is a small win. The icon 1810c resembling an "x" is a suggestive mode suggesting that the result of the drawing of the second special symbol is a "miss."
When the winning effect of winning 810c is executed, the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a miss. Finally, the icon 1810d imitating the number "7" is a suggestion mode that suggests that the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a "jackpot".
When a winning effect is executed in which 0 wins icon 1810d, a suggestion is given that the result of this lottery for the second special symbol is a jackpot.

In the fifteenth embodiment, unlike the thirteenth embodiment, the game state set after the end of the big win game is different depending on the execution trigger of the big win game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol. Therefore, the player will pay close attention to the executed performance in order to understand the lottery result of the second special symbol (the execution trigger of the big win game that can be established) when the time-saving A state is set. Therefore, the performance effect can be improved.

Then, when a jackpot game is executed based on winning a jackpot in the lottery for the second special pattern executed during the time-saving A state, as shown in FIG. 320(b), at the end of the jackpot game, the text "Entering reel rush" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the time-saving B state will be set, and a display effect in which the character 1800 holds up a guide board 1800b to suggest the game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed, and the comment "It will be easier for the ball to enter the reel route" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds to explain the game content during the "reel rush".

In addition, on the lower left side of the main display area Dm, the display area HR30 displays acquisition information "600P" for indicating the number of balls acquired during the jackpot game, and the display area HR31 displays "V x 2" indicating that two jackpot games have been executed as the number of times information for indicating the number of jackpot games executed within a predetermined period. Here, in this embodiment, the first
As in the third embodiment, the upper limit of the reserved memory number of the second special pattern is one, and the time-saving state (time-saving A
The normal state is set after the end of a jackpot game (a jackpot game that is executed based on the ball entering a specific area (straight V winning port 10657) during a small jackpot game) that is executed based on the winning of a small jackpot in the second special pattern lottery during the normal state.

Then, the game state transitions from the time-saving A state to the normal state, and then, when a small jackpot is won in the reserved second special symbol lottery (one lottery), a big jackpot game is executed,
After the big win game ends, the time-saving state (time-saving A state) is set again. In the fifteenth embodiment, after the time-saving state is set once, the first time in the normal state is set.
The period until the special symbol lottery is executed is set as a predetermined period, and information regarding the number of big win games executed during the predetermined period and the number of balls acquired during the predetermined period is displayed on the third symbol display device 8.
320(b) is displayed on the display surface of the jackpot. This allows the player to easily understand the past game contents. In this embodiment, since one lottery right for the second special symbol can be reserved, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol during the time-saving A state and the state transitions to the time-saving B state, a maximum of one lottery for the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the winning information corresponding to the reserved and stored second special symbol is read in advance during the jackpot game, and the display screen shown in FIG. 320(b) is displayed only when a small jackpot is not won. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the jackpot variable winning device 1 that is opened during the jackpot game is configured to be opened during the jackpot game.
The second operating ball entrance 20064 in the open state due to a right-hand hit game that causes a ball to enter the ball entrance 20065
Since the ball is configured to enter the a, it is configured so that the reservation of the second special symbol is easily stored after the end of the big win game. This makes it possible to effectively set the probability of playing the role rush game, which is executed when the time-saving B state is set, to about 1/600.

In addition, without using such a configuration, for example, the second special symbol may not have a reserved memory function. This allows the reliably execution of the role rush game when the big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time-saving A state. Also, as described above, the ball is configured to enter the second operation ball entrance 20064a in the open state by the right-hit game that causes the ball to enter the big win variable winning device 10065 that is opened during the big win game, so that the second operation ball entrance 20064a is unlikely to be in the open state after the big win game ends. Furthermore, when the configuration of this embodiment is used, a notification means may be provided that prevents the right-hit game from being executed during the change time of the second special symbol change executed during the time-saving B state and during the small win game period executed when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. This allows the execution of the big win game based on the small win game executed when a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol executed during the time-saving B state.

When the second special symbol wins the jackpot in the time-saving A state, and the time-saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends, the performance shown in Fig. 321(a) is executed. Next, referring to Fig. 321, the performance content executed while the time-saving B state (gear rush) is set will be explained. Fig. 321(a) is a schematic diagram showing the performance content immediately after the gear rush starts, and Fig. 321(b) is a schematic diagram showing the gear rush end screen.

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, when the time-saving B state is set, a time-saving state is set in which the lottery for the first special symbol is more likely to be executed (the ball is more likely to enter the first operating ball entrance 20064b). If a small prize is won in the lottery for the first special symbol executed during the time-saving B state, a small prize game in which a role challenge can be executed is executed regardless of the type of small prize that is set. When the time-saving B state is set, FIG. 321(a)
As shown in FIG. 321(a), the display area HR31 displays the number of times the special pattern will change until the time-saving B state ends (in the example of FIG. 321(a) , "90 times remaining"). The display area HR32 displays the number of feature challenges executed while the time-saving B state is set and the number of times the ball has entered the feature route V winning hole 10677 as a result of the feature challenges. The display area HR33 displays the number of times the special pattern will change until the time-saving B state ends (in the example of FIG. 321(a) , "90 times remaining").
The cumulative number of seconds of the elapsed time during the role challenge executed while the time-saving B state is set is displayed.

In the fifteenth embodiment, when a big win game is executed while the time-saving B state is set, the time-saving B state is set again with a high probability after the big win game ends. Specifically, when a big win game is executed triggered by a small win of the first special symbol (win probability 1/20), the time-saving B state is set with a probability of 100%, and when a big win game is executed triggered by a big win of the first special symbol (win probability 1/300), the time-saving B state is set with a probability of 5%.

The number of times and the number of seconds displayed in the display area HR32 and the display area HR33 are
A cumulative value is displayed for the period from when the state is set to when a game state other than the time-saving state B is set. Therefore, as the number of times the time-saving state B is repeatedly set increases, the number of times and the number of seconds displayed in the display area HR32 and the display area HR33 tend to increase.

In this embodiment, as described above, the display area HR32 and the display area H
The display contents of R33 are determined, but without being limited to this, the display contents of the display area HR32 and the display area HR33 may be determined for a unit period from when the time-saving B state is set until a jackpot game is executed, or until the time-saving B state ends without a jackpot game being executed.

Next, the display contents displayed in the display area HR32 will be explained. In the present fifteenth embodiment, when the time-saving B state is set, if a small win is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, a small win game in which a role challenge can be executed is executed. Then, when the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 during the small win game passes through the role route sensor SZ2, that is, when it is determined that a role challenge will be executed during the small win game, the role challenge count is configured to be incremented by one. In other words, the role challenge count displayed in the display area HR32 (the number of times on the denominator side of the display in the display area HR32) is not the number of small win games during the time-saving B state (the number of times a small win game in which a role challenge can be executed is executed), but is configured to display the number of times the role challenge is actually executed.

By configuring in this way, when the ball cannot enter the small prize winning device 10650 even though a small prize game has been executed, the number of times of the feature challenge is not added up and displayed, so the ratio of the number of times the ball entered the feature route V winning port 10677 (the number of times on the numerator side of the display in the display area HR32) to the number of feature challenges (design value is 1/4
Therefore, based on the display contents displayed in the display area HR32, the player can enjoy the game while predicting whether or not the ball will enter the specific area (the role route V winning hole 10677) in the currently executed role challenge.

The display contents displayed in the display area HR32 may be determined by a method other than the above-mentioned method, and may be configured to determine that a small win game based on a small win of the first special symbol is being played, and to display the number of times that a small win game based on a small win of the first special symbol is played as the number of times of the role challenge. Also, display contents may be displayed that allow the player to understand the number of times that the role challenge was not played (the number of times that the ball could not be made to win the small win winning device 10650) even though a small win game that can be played was played, or display contents may be displayed that allow the player to understand the number of times that the ball won a prize hole other than the role route V prize hole 10677 in the role challenge.

In addition, in order to determine the number of times the role challenge has actually been performed, in the fifteenth embodiment, the role route sensor SZ2 detects that the ball has flowed into the role route 10670 for allowing the ball to flow into the rolling device 10675, and the number of times the role challenge has been performed is determined based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example,
A detection means may be provided for detecting the flow of a ball into the reel, and the number of times the reel challenge is performed may be counted based on the detection result of the detection means.

In addition, in this embodiment, when multiple balls flow into the rolling device 10675 during one small win game, the number of feature challenges is updated according to the number of balls that flow into the rolling device 10675, but this is not limited to this, and the number of feature challenges executed during one small win game may be set to an upper limit of one and the number of feature challenges may be updated. By configuring in this way, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which a small win game is executed in which multiple balls can be caused to flow into the rolling device 10675 during one small win game, executing a feature challenge using multiple balls during one small win game is more effective.
It is possible to display in the display area HR32 display content that increases the winning rate at the reel route V winning port 10677 relative to the number of reel challenges, thereby increasing the satisfaction of the player.
Therefore, in order to cause many balls to flow into the rolling device 10675 during one small win game, the player can be motivated to play during the small win game.

Next, when the time-saving B state ends, that is, when the time-saving end condition (the number of special chart changes is 99) is met without a jackpot game being played during the time-saving B state, or when a jackpot game in which a game state other than the time-saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 21(b), an end display is displayed to indicate that the time-saving B state is ending. In this end display, the number of times the role challenge was performed during the time-saving B state (5 times) and the number of times the role route V winning port 10677 was won (0 times) are displayed in the display area HR32, and the cumulative value (120 seconds) of the role challenge duration in the currently performed role challenge (5 times) is displayed in the display area HR33.

Furthermore, in the center of the main display area Dm, a title according to the content of the small win game executed in the current time-saving B state is displayed. The content of this title will be described in detail later.
A corresponding title is selected from the titles set in stages based on the number of small win games (number of feature challenges) executed during the time-saving B state and the duration of the feature challenges executed during the time-saving B state, and is displayed on the display screen. By notifying the player of the title based on the content of the current time-saving B state at the timing when the time-saving B state ends in this way, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner whether the content of the game executed this time (game during the time-saving B state) was excellent or not.

Next, referring to FIG. 322, the contents of the presentation during the jackpot game when the lottery of the first special symbol is won when the time-saving B state is set will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, when the lottery of the first special symbol is won as a jackpot while the time-saving B state is set, a game other than the time-saving B state (for example, the time-saving A state) is executed after the jackpot game ends with a higher probability than when the jackpot game based on the small jackpot is executed. Therefore, when the time-saving B state is set, winning a small jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol can be a more advantageous game result for the player than winning a jackpot.

FIG. 322(a) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen indicating that a jackpot has been won by drawing the first special symbol during a special feature rush (time-saving B state setting), and FIG. 322(b) is a schematic diagram showing a display screen indicating that a jackpot has been won by drawing the first special symbol during a special feature rush (time-saving B state setting).
FIG. 322 is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed during a big win game.
), when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol during the role rush, a "V" icon 1811 indicating that a jackpot of the special symbol has been won is displayed in a display mode accompanied by a treasure chest 2801. This makes it possible to notify the player in advance that a performance for opening the treasure chest 2801 will be executed during the jackpot game.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during the jackpot game, as shown in Fig. 322(b), a treasure box 2801 opens, and from within it, a suggestion mode 2801a appears to suggest the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. According to the example shown in Fig. 322(b), the word "unfortunate" is displayed, indicating that the normal state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the display screen for notifying an error state during a small win game will be described with reference to Fig. 323. Fig. 323 is a schematic diagram showing error information that occurs during a small win game. This error information is displayed based on the occurrence of an abnormal game state (ball jam) in the pachinko machine 10 during a small win game, in a game abnormality state discrimination process that is executed at different times depending on the type (game content) of the small win game being executed.

<Electrical Configuration in the Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 324 to FIG. 327, the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described.
The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 324(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment. In the fifteenth embodiment, the ROM 202 of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 192(a)) is provided with a first win random number 16 table 202na instead of the first win random number table 202a, a first win type selection 16 table 202nb instead of the first win type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection 14 table 202md instead of the variation pattern selection table 202d, and a small win type selection 16 table 202ne instead of the small win type selection table 202ea, and a small win scenario 16 table 202nf and a normal power operation scenario 16 table 202nf are newly provided.
The difference is that table 202ng has been added. The other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment. Therefore, in the description of the ROM 202 in the fifteenth embodiment, only the above-mentioned changes will be described, and the description of the same elements as those of the ninth embodiment will be omitted. In addition, the contents of the variation pattern selection 14 table 202md are the same as those of the first embodiment.
Since this embodiment is the same as the fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first winning random number 16 table 202na differs from the first winning random number table 202a (see Figure 192 (b)) of the ninth embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a small prize can also be won in the drawing of the first special pattern, and that the probability of winning the small prize in the drawing of the second special pattern has been changed, but is otherwise identical.

Here, the contents of the first winning random number 16 table 202na will be described with reference to Fig. 324(b). Fig. 324(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 16 table 202na. This first winning random number 16 tablena includes the following:
This is a table used to perform a jackpot determination for a special pattern in the 15th embodiment, and is configured to be able to determine whether it is a jackpot, miss, or small win by comparing the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the game ball entering either the first ball entrance 64, the first operating ball entrance 20064b, or the second operating ball entrance 20064a with the determination value specified in the first win random number 16 table 202na.

As shown in FIG. 324(b), in the first winning random number 16 table 202na, the judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for determining a jackpot (win) in the drawing of the first special symbol is “0, 1”, and the judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) for determining a miss in the drawing of the first special symbol is “1, 2”.
The range of judgment values (values of the first winning random number counter C1) that are determined to be a small win in the drawing of the first special pattern is specified as "2 to 569", the range of judgment values (values of the first winning random number counter C1) that are determined to be a large win (win) in the drawing of the second special pattern is specified as "0, 1", the range of judgment values (values of the first winning random number counter C1) that are determined to be a miss in the drawing of the second special pattern is specified as "2 to 300", and the range of judgment values that are determined to be a small win in the drawing of the first special pattern is specified as "301 to 599".

In other words, in the fifteenth embodiment, the odds of winning the first special symbol are 1/300 (2/60
0) probability of winning, 568/600 probability of losing, 1/20 (
In addition, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of a big win is 1/300 (2/600), the probability of a miss is 299/600, and the probability of a small win is 299/600 (about 1/2).

This makes it possible to execute a small win game even in a normal state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and to execute a big win game by winning a V via the small win game.

The first winning type selection 16 table 202nb is different from the first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 193(a)) of the ninth embodiment described above in that the type of big winning game and
The difference is that the prescribed range of the judgment value (first jackpot type counter C2) for determining the jackpot type has been changed.

The contents of the first winning type selection 16 table 202nb will be described with reference to FIG. 325(a). FIG. 325(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the first winning type selection 16 table 202nb. As shown in FIG. 325(a), the first winning type selection 16 table 202nb has, as types of jackpot games, "jackpot A16" and "jackpot B16" which are selected when a jackpot is won in a drawing of the first special symbol, "jackpot C16" which is selected when a jackpot is won in a drawing of the second special symbol, and "jackpot D16" which is selected based on the ball passing through a V winning hole (specific area) during a small jackpot game.
"Big Win E16", and "Big Win E16", respectively.

The "big win A16" is when the acquired first winning type counter value C2 is "0 to 4
" is executed (determined) when the acquired first winning type counter value C2 is "5 to 99", and "Big Win B16" is executed (determined) when the acquired first winning type counter value C2 is "5 to 99", and "Big Win C16
" is executed (determined) when the acquired first winning type counter value C2 is "0 to 99", and "big win D16" is executed (determined) when the acquired first winning type counter value C2 is "0 to 99".
The first winning type selection 16 table 202nb has respective judgment values set so that the "big win E16" is executed (determined) when the value of the acquired first winning type counter value C2 is "0 to 49," and the "jackpot E16" is executed (determined) when the value of the acquired first winning type counter value C2 is "50 to 99."

In the case of "Big Win A16", 10 rounds (R) of round play are executed as a big win game, and if the game state at the time of winning is a normal state, after the big win game ends, the time-saving state A (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) will be played 100 times (1 lottery for special symbols).
00 times) is set, and if the game state at the time of winning is time-saving state A or B, the time-saving state B (low probability state of special symbols,
A high probability state of a normal symbol is set 100 times (a time-saving state that continues until the lottery for a special symbol is executed 100 times).

In the case of "Jackpot B16", 10 rounds (R) of play are executed as the jackpot game, and if the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the normal game state is set even after the jackpot game is executed, and if the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B, the time-saving state A (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set 100 times (the time-saving state continues until the lottery for special symbols is executed 100 times) after the end of the jackpot game.

In the case of "Big Win C16", 15 rounds (R) of round play are executed as a big win game, and if the game state at the time of winning is a normal state, after the big win game ends, the time-saving state B (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) will be played 100 times (1 lottery for special symbols).
00 times) is set, and if the game state at the time of winning is time-saving state A or B, the time-saving state B (low probability state of special symbols,
A high probability state of a normal symbol is set 100 times (a time-saving state that continues until the lottery for a special symbol is executed 100 times).

In the case of "Big Win D16", 10 rounds (R) of round play are executed as a big win game, and if the game state at the time of winning is a normal state, after the big win game ends, the time-saving state A (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) will be played 100 times (1 lottery for special symbols).
If the game state at the time of winning is time-saving state A, the normal game state is set even after the jackpot game is played, and if the game state at the time of winning is time-saving state B, the time-saving state B (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set 100 times (a time-saving state that continues until the lottery for special symbols is played 100 times) after the jackpot game ends.

In the case of "Big Win E16", 10 rounds (R) of round play are executed as a big win game. If the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, the normal game state is set even after the big win game is executed. If the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state A, the normal game state is set after the big win game is executed. If the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving state B, the time-saving state B (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set to 100 after the big win game ends.
The number of times (the time-saving state continues until the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times) is set.

In this way, in the first winning type selection table 16 nb in the 15th embodiment, even when the time-saving game state is set, the game state set in the case of a small winning is set differently depending on the type of the time-saving game state set (time-saving state A or time-saving state B). By configuring in this way, when the player plays the game,
Even if the time-shortened state is A or B, the game state does not change in appearance, such as the variation time of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol, the operation time (opening time) and number of times of opening of the normal electric role device, etc., so it is configured so that it is not possible to determine whether the currently set game state is the time-shortened state A or the time-shortened state B. Even with this game configuration, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot game is the time-shortened state A, the normal game state is set after the jackpot game, and if it is the time-shortened state B, the time-shortened state B is set, so that if it is the time-shortened state B, the time-shortened state B, which continues to be advantageous to the player, is set even after the jackpot game is executed, and the setting of the time-shortened state B is configured so that a game state that is more advantageous to the player is set than if the time-shortened state A is set.

In this embodiment, in the time-saving state A, the normal game state is set after the big win game, but the number of time-saving times may be set to a small number (e.g., 10 times) in the time-saving state A. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state is continuously set even after the big win game, and the player can be interested in how many times the time-saving times have been set and play the game.

Next, the small win type selection 16 table 202ne will be described with reference to FIG. 325(b). FIG. 325(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 16 table 202ne. The small win type selection 16 table 202ne stores the small win type counter value C
5.

In the small win type selection 16 table 202ne, "small win A16" and "small win B16" are selected as the small win types to be determined when a small win is determined by the drawing of the first special pattern.
" and "Small Winning C16" are set, and "Small Winning A17" and "Small Winning B17" are set as the small winning types to be determined when a small winning is determined by the drawing of the second special pattern.

"Small win A16" is when the small win is won, the small win type selection counter value C5
The small win type is determined when "0" is acquired as the value of the small win A1
If a V is won during the small win game at 6, a "big win C16" is executed.

"Small Win B16" is when a small win is won, the small win type selection counter value C5
This is the type of small win that is determined when the value of "1 to 29" is obtained, and when a V is won during the small win game in small win B16, "big win A16" is executed.

"Small win C16" is when a small win is won, the small win type selection counter value C5
This is the type of small win that is determined when the value of "30 to 99" is obtained, and when a V is won during the small win game in the small win C16, the "big win E16" is executed.

"Small win A17" is when the small win is won, the small win type selection counter value C5
This is the type of small win that is determined when the value of "0 to 49" is obtained, and when a V is won during the small win game in small win A17, "big win D16" is executed.

"Small Win B17" is when a small win is won, the small win type selection counter value C5
This is the type of small win that is determined when the value of "50 to 99" is obtained, and when a V is won during the small win game in the small win B17, the "big win E16" is executed.

In this way, in the small win type selection table 202ne, the small win type to be executed differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and in the small win game, the big win game of the big win type corresponding to the small win type is executed when V is won, so the degree of the advantageous state given to the player can be made different between the case where a small win is obtained with the first special symbol and the case where a small win is obtained with the second special symbol. Also, in this 15th embodiment,
In the time-saving state, the game ball is configured to switch between entering the first operating port 20073a (wherein a lottery for a first special pattern can be executed when the game ball enters) and the second operating port 20073b (wherein a lottery for a second special pattern can be executed when the game ball enters) between time-saving state A and time-saving state B. Therefore, the type of operating port into which the ball enters can be controlled depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, and the player can play in the hope of setting a time-saving state (in this embodiment, time-saving state B) in which the player is allocated to an operating port that is more advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, even if the time-saving state A, which is disadvantageous to the player, is set in the time-saving state, and the game ball is switched to enter the second operating port 20073b and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, if the reserved memory of the first special symbol is acquired during the normal state, the lottery for the first special symbol will be executed based on the reserved memory of the acquired first special symbol. If a small jackpot is won as a result of the change and a V win is achieved by executing the small jackpot A16 or small jackpot B16, the time-saving state B will be set after the jackpot game executed by the V win (because the jackpot A16 or jackpot C16 is executed), and the player can be ranked up and transitioned to a time-saving state advantageous to the player.
The probability is set to 3/10 when the first special symbol wins a small win, as shown in the small win type selection table 202ne. Therefore, since the player can play the game while expecting to transition to the time-saving A state with more reserved memories of the first special symbol in the normal state, the operation of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to Figure 326, the small win scenario table 202nf will be explained.
326 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win scenario table 202nf. The small win scenario table 202nf is a table in which scenario data is set for setting the operation contents (including operation timing) of the small win winning device 10650 when a small win game is executed.

In the small win scenario table 202nf, an operation scenario is set corresponding to each small win type. For the small win A16 and the small win B16, a dedicated operation scenario is set when the game state set when the small win game is executed is the normal game state and when the time-saving game state (time-saving state A or time-saving state B).
In the small win C16, small win A17, and small win B17, the corresponding operation scenario is set (selected) regardless of the set game state.

When the small win A16 or small win B16 is executed, if it is in the normal game state,
The opening period is set to 1 s (seconds), the round period (opening period) of the opening and closing door 10650b to 1.5 s, and the ending period to 3 s. Here, the opening period is the period from the end (elapse) of the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the special pattern determined as the small win A16 or the small win B16 to the opening and closing door 10650b being in the open state, and is a part of the period during which the small win game is being executed. After that, the operation data of the opening period is set, and the opening and closing door 10650b is moved to the open state (the opening and closing door 10650b is moved (moved) toward the back side of the gaming machine 10) for 1.5 s. When the opening period of 1.5 seconds has elapsed or when a predetermined number of game balls (10 balls in this embodiment) enter the small prize winning device 10650, the opening/closing door 10650b is moved to a closed state, and after the ending period of 3 seconds has elapsed, a new special pattern begins to change or a V is won, and the big prize game begins.

In this embodiment, the game ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 in the small prize game is guided to the out port 10654 (see FIG. 270) that is discharged to the outside of the small prize winning device 10650 without being stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652, the straight V winning port 10657, or the rolling device 10675 in which the role route V winning port 10677 is arranged. When guided to the straight V winning port 10657, the game ball enters the straight V winning port 10657, and the big prize game corresponding to the small prize type being executed is executed after the ending period has elapsed. When the ball is guided to the rolling device 10675, it is constantly distributed by the rotational action of the rotating body 10675a, and when the ball enters the reel route V winning port 10677, a big win game is executed after a small win game is executed (after the ending period has elapsed).

In addition, when the small win A16 or the small win B16 is executed in the time-saving game state (time-saving state A or B), the opening period is 12 s (seconds), and the opening and closing door 1065
The round period (opening period) of 0b is set to 1.5 s, and the ending period is set to 3.5 s. In this case, as described above with reference to FIG. 319, a small prize game (a role challenge) is executed in which the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 flows down toward the role route V winning port 10677.

Similarly, when the small win C16 is executed, the opening period is 12 s (seconds).
The round period (opening period) of the opening and closing door 10650b is set to 1.5 s, and the ending period is set to 3.5 s. In this case, as described above with reference to FIG. 319, a small prize game (a role challenge) is executed in which a ball that has won in the small prize winning device 10650 flows down toward the role route V winning port 10677.

When the small win A17 or the small win B17 is executed, the opening period is set to 5.5 s (seconds), the round period (opening period) of the opening and closing door 10650b is set to 1.5 s, and the ending period is set to 3.5 s. In this case, as described above with reference to FIG. 319, the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 enters the straight V winning hole 116.
A small winning game (Choku V Challenge) is executed, flowing down towards 57.

As described above, in the fifteenth embodiment, the small win A16 and the small win B16
When this is set, that is, when a small prize to be selected at a rate of 70% in the case of winning a small prize in the first special symbol lottery is set, in the normal state, the opening period is set to 1 second and a false small prize game is executed, whereas in the time-saving state, the opening period is set to 12 seconds and a role challenge small prize game is executed.

In this way, even if the same small prize type is set, by making it possible to execute a small prize game with different ball entry expectation rates depending on the game state, it is possible to vary the big prize expectation rate when a small prize is won depending on the game state. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with complex gameplay and prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 327, the RAM 20 of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment
FIG. 327 shows the RAM of the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment.
203 in the fifteenth embodiment.
The RAM 203 of 0 is different from the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment in that
Time-saving type storage area 203na, emergency stop flag 203nb, small win type storage area 2
The difference is that the ninth embodiment has been added with a win abnormality flag 203nd, and an extension flag 203ne. The rest of the configuration is the same as that described in the ninth embodiment, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving type storage area 203na is a storage area in which data corresponding to the type of time-saving state set in the time-saving game state is stored. In this embodiment, two types of time-saving types, time-saving state A and time-saving state B, are set as the time-saving game state, and data corresponding to the time-saving state type corresponding to the jackpot type executed after the jackpot game is set. In addition, when the game state is other than the time-saving game state, data indicating the normal game state is set. As a result, the data is overwritten with data indicating the normal game state and set based on the fact that the number of time-saving times (for example, 100 times) has passed and the normal game state is set. Note that the data in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is configured to be retained by the backup power source even if a power outage occurs and the gaming machine is not supplied with power from the outside. Also, when the power is turned on again in the backup state, the contents of the RAM 203 are initialized and the gaming machine starts up by turning on the power switch with the RAM clear switch turned on. Note that the time-saving type storage area 20
When the 3na is initialized (RAM cleared, etc.) and the power is turned on, it starts up with data indicating that it is in a normal gaming state saved.

The emergency stop flag 203nb is set when a power outage occurs during a small win game (when the power supplied to the gaming machine 10 (power supplied to the power board (20A))) is equal to or lower than a predetermined value (for example, 12
This is a flag indicating that the constant rotating body 10675a has been stopped when the power supply voltage drops to 0.4V or less. If a power outage occurs during a small win game, the constant rotating body 10675a is stopped, preventing the constant rotating body 10675a from being stopped even at a timing when it is not designed to win a V.
In order to prevent malfunctions such as a V winning due to the rotation speed of the rotating body 10675a decreasing or stopping midway, which is different from normal operation, or conversely, a V winning not being achieved at the timing when a V winning should be achieved, a process of constantly stopping the rotating body 10675a is executed. The emergency stop flag 203nb is set to on by the process of S1804 in the power off process (S1002) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the flag is set to off by the process of S3052 executed after the flag in the small win return process 16 (S995) in FIG. 331 is determined to be on. After the process of S3052 is executed, an error command is set, so that an error notification is executed to the player, and even if the rotating body 10675a stops during a small win game, the player can identify that it has stopped due to an abnormality, and can play with peace of mind.

The small win type storage area 203nc is an area in which data indicating the type of small win game to be executed when a small win is won is stored.
In the small win scenario table 202, when the main control device 110 judges a big win and judges that it is a small win, the small win type is determined based on the acquired value of the small win type selection counter C5, and data corresponding to the determined small win type is stored.
A small win operation scenario corresponding to the data stored in the small win type storage area 203nc is set by nf, and a small win game is executed.

The winning abnormality flag 203nd is a flag for indicating that a small win game is executed and the remaining balls are still in the small win winning device 10650 even after a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed. The elapsed time is set according to the type of small win being executed, and is set to 5 seconds in the case of the small win A16 or small win B16 executed in the normal game state.
By setting this winning abnormality flag 203nd to ON, the main control device 110 can easily determine whether or not balls have jammed during a small win game.

The extension flag 203ne is a small win A16 or a small win B1 in the time-saving game state.
When 6 is executed or when small win C16 is executed regardless of the game state, this flag indicates that there are still balls remaining even though 17 seconds have passed since the start of the small win game. By setting this extension flag 203ne to on, the end of the small win is set even during the bonus route V winning valid period (the period during which, when a game ball enters the bonus route V winning port 10677, the ball entry is processed as valid and the corresponding big win game is executed).

This extension flag 203ne is set to ON by the processing of S1721 in the small win end timing determination processing (S1381) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. On the other hand, in the processing of S3131 in the V-pass detection processing 16 (S1382) shown in FIG.
It is determined whether the extension flag 203ne is on. If it is on, the end of the small win is set, and the extension flag 203ne is set to off by the processing of S3133.

Next, referring to FIG. 328, R of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment
The ROM 222 will be described. FIG. 328(a) shows the ROM 222 in the fifteenth embodiment.
15 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 2. The fifteenth embodiment differs from the ninth embodiment in that a title selection table 222na is added. The other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Next, the title selection table 222na will be described with reference to Fig. 328(b). Fig. 328(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the title selection table 222na. The title selection table 222na is a table for selecting the performance content (performance mode) of the title executed in the title performance executed at the end of the time-saving state B.

In the title selection table 222na, title effect contents to be selected for the values of a time accumulation counter 223nb and a challenge number counter 223na, which will be described later, are set. The time accumulation counter 223nb and the challenge number counter 223na will be described below.

329 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 15th embodiment. The RAM 223 in the 15th embodiment differs from the RAM 223 in the 9th embodiment in that it has a challenge number counter 223na and a time accumulation counter 22
3nb are added to the ninth embodiment.
Since this is the same as the embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The challenge number counter 223na is a small prize game (a small prize challenge) that can be won in the small prize winning device 10650 when in the time-saving state B (time-saving B state).
This counter counts the number of times the challenge has been executed.
In the initial state when the power is turned on, 23na is set to an initial value of 0. Also, when the time-saving state B is set, the counter is set to an initial value of 0 in the processing of S41603 in the state command processing 16 (S4350: FIG. 338) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, in the processing of S44072 in the winning-related processing 16 shown in FIG. 339, the value of the challenge number counter 223na is updated by adding 1 based on the determination that the role challenge is a small winning.

The time accumulation counter 223nb is a counter for accumulating the execution period of the small bonus challenge executed during the time-saving state. The elapsed period of the small bonus challenge is calculated using the value of the elapsed counter 203mg, which measures the elapsed time from the start of the small bonus game. Specifically, the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma (the bonus challenge performance start time) at the time when the ball passes through the bonus route sensor SZ2 (see FIG. 270) is stored, and the value of the elapsed period counter 223ma is updated as time passes,
The elapsed time counter 223 at the time when the stored role object route sensor SZ2 was passed
The time accumulation counter 223nb is configured to calculate the number of seconds corresponding to the difference between the value of ma and the value of the time accumulation counter 223nb, and to display the calculation result as the elapsed time. In the initial state when the power is turned on, the initial value of 0 is set to this time accumulation counter 223nb, and further, in the state command process 16 (S4350: FIG. 338),
In the process of S41603 in FIG. 339, when a command indicating a transition to the time-saving B state is received, the initial value is set to 0.
In the process of 3, the small win game executed this time is a small win challenge (small win A16, B16 won during the normal state, or small win A16, B16 won during the time-saving state)
Based on the determination that the small win challenge period is the present small win challenge period (the period during which the ball rolls using the rolling device 10675) that was executed in the current small win challenge, the time accumulation counter 223nb is updated by adding thereto.

Returning to Fig. 328(b), the title selection table 222na will be described. This title selection table 222na is used to determine the contents of the corresponding title performance by referring to the values of the challenge count counter 223na and the time accumulation counter 223nb in the process of S4552 in the final variation performance setting process (S4552: Fig. 341) executed by the MPU 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The final variation performance setting process (S4552) is
Since this is a process executed at the final one variation (final one variation of the special symbol) when the time-saving state B ends, the title content is determined based on the number of times the special challenge small win has been executed in the time-saving state B and the accumulated time, and is notified to the player. This allows the player to evaluate the game when the time-saving state B is set, and allows the player to play a game that is compared with a game when the same time-saving state B is set, thereby preventing the player from getting bored with executing the time-saving state B.

Specifically, when the value of the challenge count counter 223na is "0-2" and the value of the time accumulation counter 223nb is a value indicating the range of "0-140 seconds", "ordinary" which is rank 1 is selected, and when the value indicates a range exceeding "140 seconds", "reverse god" which is rank 3 is selected. Also, when the value of the challenge count counter 223na is "3-7" and the value of the time accumulation counter 223nb is a value indicating the range of "0-140 seconds", "normal" which is rank 2 is selected, and when the value indicates a range exceeding "140 seconds", "advanced" which is rank 4 is selected. Finally, when the challenge count counter 223na is "3-7" and the value of the time accumulation counter 223nb is a value indicating the range of "0-140 seconds", "advanced" which is rank 4 is selected.
If the value of the time accumulation counter 223nb is "8~" and the value of the time accumulation counter 223nb indicates a range of "0 to 40 seconds", then "Gyakushin" which is rank 3 is selected; if the value indicates a range of "40 to 140 seconds", then "Advanced" which is rank 4 is selected; and if the value indicates a range exceeding "140 seconds", then "Master" which is rank 5 is selected.

The title selected by referring to the title selection table 222na is displayed during the final change of the time-saving B state. The period during which this title is displayed may be configured to be displayed until a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed after the time-saving B state ends and transitions to the normal state. This allows the player to be informed of the game results of the previous time-saving B state in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 330 to FIG. 336, the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the embodiment will be described. First, the normal symbol variation process 16 (S136) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
This normal pattern change processing 16 (S136) is a process executed in place of the normal pattern change processing (S106) in the 13th embodiment (and the first embodiment), and like the normal pattern change processing (S106) in the 13th embodiment (and the first embodiment), it executes a process for setting the lottery for the normal pattern and a process for controlling the opening and closing of the electric role device depending on the lottery result.

In the normal symbol variation process 16 (S136) in the 15th embodiment, S601 to S
In each process of S621, S623, the same process as each process of S601 to S621, S623 of the normal symbol variation process (S106) in the 13th embodiment (and the 1st embodiment) is executed, but in the normal symbol variation process 16 (S136) in this 15th embodiment, the opening control of the electric role when the game state is in the time reduction and the start of the operation control of the variable flow path are set. The other processes are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In the normal symbol variation process 16 (S136), if the result of the current normal symbol lottery is a winning symbol (
S619: Yes), if it is determined that the game state at the time of winning is during time-saving (S620:
Yes), and set an opening pattern corresponding to the set time-saving type (S631). Specifically, referring to FIG. 317, as described above, the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B is set according to the time-saving type set when the lottery for the normal symbol is won. Then,
The opening and closing control of the electric role is set according to the opening pattern set in the process of S631 (S
623), then the start of the operational control of the variable flow path is set (S632), and this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric device during the time-saving is set to two types, but it is not limited to this and may be more than two types. By configuring it in this way, the player can wait with more anticipation to see which opening pattern will be set this time, which increases the fun of the game.
In addition, the contents of the operation control of the switching valve 20072 may be set to switch according to the type of time-saving. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set multiple game states even in the same time-saving state, which can further increase the interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 331, the small win return process 16 (S9) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described.
The small win return process 16 (S995) in the 15th embodiment will be described.
) is the small win return process in the thirteenth embodiment described above (see S992 in FIG. 296).
In contrast, the difference is that a process for setting an error command is added when the power is turned off during a small win game while a game ball remains in the rolling device 10675. Since the other points are the same, detailed explanations are omitted.

In the small win return process 16 (S995), first, it is determined whether the small win flag 203ea is on (S3001). If it is determined that the small win flag 203ea is on (S3001: Yes), a power outage has occurred during a small win game, so
It is determined whether the emergency stop flag 203nb, which indicates that the game ball did not pass through the role route V winning port 10677 and the power was cut off (S3051). If the emergency stop flag 203nb is on (S3051: Yes), that is, if the role route V winning port 1067
If it is determined that a power outage has occurred without passing through 7, the emergency stop flag 203nb is set to OFF (S3052), and an error command indicating an error during a small win game is set (S30
05) and terminate this process.

Here, if an error command is set, an error screen such as that shown in FIG. 285(b) above is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. With this configuration, the player can be informed in an easily understandable manner that a power outage has occurred before the small win game ends, and the game can be resumed promptly. Also, by setting the rotation of the accelerating rotor 10675a when the power is restored, it is possible to eliminate the risk of an unclear game being provided, such as the game ball suddenly being bounced off and the small win game ending without winning the role route V winning port 10677. On the other hand,
In the processing of S3051, if it is determined that the emergency stop flag 203nb is not on, i.e., is off (S3051: No), the same processing as S3007 to S3009 of the return processing during a small win in the above-mentioned 14th embodiment (see S992 in Figure 296) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the power is cut off during a small win game and the power is restored with the game ball remaining in the rolling device 10675, an error command is set without setting the start of rotation of the accelerating rotor 10675a. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a performance (such as a countdown) may be executed to notify the user that the accelerating rotor 10675a will start moving after the power supply is restored.
This prevents the player from being provided with an unclear game, such as the accelerating rotating body 10675a starting to move, and by informing the player in advance that the accelerating rotating body 10675a is about to start moving, the player can
It is easy to see that accelerating rotor 10675a starts to move, and one can carefully check how accelerating rotor 10675a starts to move, providing a transparent game.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during a small win game and a game ball remains in the rolling device 10675, when the power is restored, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a display that allows the player to select whether to move the accelerating rotor 10675a or to call an attendant as an error, and the player may select the option using an operation means that the player can operate. By configuring in this way, even if a power outage occurs during a small win game, the player can select the subsequent response, so that a satisfactory game can be provided to the player. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that either of the options is set randomly.

In addition, if configured in this way, there is a risk that a malicious player will intentionally shut off the power to the pachinko machine 10 during a small win game, and even commit fraud by turning the power back on at a position where it is easy to win the prize in the role route V prize hole 10677. In order to prevent such fraud, the number of power outages may be counted, and if suspicious power outages occur multiple times per hour, an error command may be forcibly set and an attendant notified. By configuring in this way,
It is possible to prevent fraud.

In addition, the acceleration rotor 10675a may be configured to rotate after all the start-up processes are completed. In this case, the above-mentioned countdown effect may be executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the acceleration rotor 10675a rotates, and it is possible to prevent the rotation of the acceleration rotor 10675a while the player is not looking, which causes the game ball to win, and a transparent game can be provided.

Next, main processing 16 (see FIG. 332) in the present fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 332. Main processing 16 (see FIG. 332) in the present fifteenth embodiment is processing executed in place of main processing 13 (see FIG. 201) in the thirteenth embodiment.
Instead of the small win control process 13 (see S1072 in FIG. 203), the small win control process 16 (S
10001) and in that a power-off process (S10002) is added. The other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the main process 16 (see FIG. 332), first, the main process of the 13th embodiment (see FIG. 201)
The process of S1001 to S1003 and S1071, which are the same as the process of S1001 to S1003 and S1071 in the small win control process 16 (S10001), is then executed.
In step S10001, a process for setting the start and end timing of the small win is executed. A detailed explanation of this small win control process 16 (S10001) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, after executing the small win control process 16 (S10001), the above-mentioned S10
Processes S1006 to S1009 are executed, and if it is determined in process S1009 that there is information about a power outage (S1009: Yes), the process of S1013 described above is executed, power outage processing (S10002) is executed, and processing proceeds to S1014.

Here, referring to FIG. 333, the small win control process 16 (S10001), which is one process of the main process 16 (see FIG. 332) in the present fifteenth embodiment, will be described.
is a flow chart showing the contents of the small win control process 16 (S10001). The small win control process 16 (S10001) in this 15th embodiment is a process executed in place of the small win control process 15 (S1092 in FIG. 297) in the 13th embodiment, and differs in that it executes the V-passing detection process 16 (S1382) instead of the V-passing detection process 15 (S1393) and adds the small win end timing discrimination process (S1381). The other processes are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In the small win control process 16 (S10001), first, it is determined whether it is the timing for the small win to start (S1301), and if it is determined that it is the timing for the small win to start (S1301: Y
es), the small win control process 15 in the thirteenth embodiment (S1092 in FIG. 297)
) executes the same processes as those of S1302 to S1303, S1321, and S1391, and ends this process.
1301: No), and determine whether the small win flag 203ea is on (S1304).
If the small win flag 203ea is not on, that is, if it is off (S1304
On the other hand, if it is determined that the small win flag 203ea is on, that is, that a small win is occurring (S1304: Yes), the value of the small win operation scenario progress counter is updated (S1392), the small win end timing determination process is executed (S1381), and the process proceeds to S1310.

Here, referring to FIG. 334, the small win control process 16 (S1
FIG. 334 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small win end timing discrimination process (S1381). In this small win end timing discrimination process (S1381), the timing of the end of the small win is determined according to the type of small win that was won and the value of the counter measured from the start time of the small win, and the timing of the end of the small win game is also determined according to the rolling device 106.
If there are any game balls remaining in 75, a process for setting an error command is executed.

In the small win end timing determination process (S1381), first, the elapsed counter 203 mg
Next, it is determined whether the value indicated by the elapsed time counter 203mg read in the process of S1701 is 5 seconds (S1702).
This is the end timing of the small win A and the small win B when the game state is in the normal state (see decision 1 in FIG. 319). When it is determined that the elapsed time is 5 seconds (S1702: Yes),
), and then reads the information in the small win type storage area 203nc (S1703).

Then, the small win type read in the process of S1703 is the small win A in the normal state.
If it is determined that the small win is not A16 or B16 (S1704: No), the timing is not the end of the small win, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read small win type is normal state small win A or small win B (S1704: Y
es), and it is determined whether or not there are any game balls remaining in the rolling device 10675 (S1705). The determination as to whether or not there are any game balls remaining is performed by a sensor or the like provided in the rolling device 10675.

If it is determined in the process of S1705 that no game balls remain in the rolling device 10675 (S1705: Yes), the small win end timing is set (S1706) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1705 that game balls remain in the rolling device 10675 (S1705), a remaining error command is set (S1707).
), the winning abnormality flag 203nd is set to ON (S1708), and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1702 that the elapsed time is not 5 seconds (S1
If it is determined that the elapsed time is 10.5 seconds (S1702: No), it is determined whether the elapsed time is 10.5 seconds. If it is determined that the elapsed time is 10.5 seconds (S1709: Yes), it executes reading of information from the small win type storage area 203nc (S1710). If it is determined that the small win type read in the process of S1710 is not small win A17 or small win B17 (S1711:
No), since it is not the timing for the small win to end, this process is terminated.
In the process of S1711, if it is determined that the small win type is small win A17 or small win B17 (S1711: Yes), it is determined whether there are any remaining balls in the rolling device 10675 (S1712). If it is determined that there are no remaining balls (S1712: No), the small win end timing is set (S1713) and this process is terminated.
If it is determined that there are balls remaining within (S1712: Yes), a remaining error command is set (S1714), the winning abnormality flag 203nd is set to ON (S1715), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1709 that the elapsed time is not 10.5 seconds (S1709: No), it is determined whether the elapsed time is 17 seconds (S1716). If it is determined that the elapsed time is not 17 seconds (S1716: No), this process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the elapsed time is 17 seconds (S1716: Yes), the information of the small win type storage area 203nc is read (S1717), and it is determined whether the read small win type is the small win A16, the small win B16, or the small win C16 in the time-saving state (S1718).
If it is determined that the small win is not B16 or C16 (S1718: N
On the other hand, if it is determined that the read small win type is the small win A16, small win B16, or small win C16 in the time-saving state (S1718: Yes), it is determined whether there are any remaining balls in the rolling device 10675 (S1719).

In the process of S1719, if it is determined that there are no remaining balls in the rolling device 10675 (S1719: No), the timing of the end of the small win is set (S1720), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there are remaining balls in the rolling device 10675 (S1719: Yes),
The extension flag 203ne is set to ON (S1721), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 333, the explanation will be continued. After the small win end timing determination process (S1381) is executed, it is determined whether it is time to end the small win (S1310). If it is determined that it is not time to end the small win in the process of S1310 (S1310: No),
), execute the V passage detection process 16 (S1382), execute the processes of S1394 to S1395 of the small win control process 15 of the 13th embodiment described above, and then terminate this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 335, the small win control process 16 (FIG. 33) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 335 is a flow chart showing the contents of the V passing detection process 16 (S1382). The V passing detection process 16 (S1382) in the fifteenth embodiment is the same as the first embodiment described above.
In comparison with the V-pass detection process 15 (S1393) in the third embodiment, when the type of small win won is the small win A16, small win B16, or small win C16 in the time-saving state, a prize is detected in the V-prize winning port of the role route, and when the extension flag 203ne indicating that the small win period is extended is on, a process for setting the end timing of the small win is added. As the other points are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the V-passing detection process 16 (S1382), first, the same processes as S3101 to S3103 in the V-passing detection process 15 (S1393) in the thirteenth embodiment described above are executed, and then S31
In the process of 03, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the direct V winning hole (S31
03: No) Next, the value of the elapsed counter 203mg is read (S3110), and it is determined whether the value of the elapsed counter 203mg that has been read is within the effective period of the prize-winning on the reel route V (S3111). If it is determined that the value is within the effective period of the prize-winning on the reel route V (S3111:
Yes), and then it is determined whether the extension flag 203ne is on (S3131).

If it is determined in the process of S3131 that the extension flag 203ne is on (S
3131: Yes), set the small win end timing (S3132), and set the extension flag 20
3ne is set to OFF (S3133), and the process proceeds to S3106 described above.
If it is determined in the process of 3131 that the extension flag 203ne is not on (S3
131: No), the processes of S3132 to S3133 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S3106.

Next, referring to Fig. 336, the power-off process (S10002), which is one process in the main process (see Fig. 332) in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. Fig. 336 is a flow chart showing the contents of the power-off process (S10002).
02) is a process for stopping the accelerating rotor 10675a when there is a power outage during a small win game and no ball enters the reel route V winning port 10677.

In the power off process (S10002), first, it is determined whether the small win flag 203ea is on (S1801). If it is determined that the small win flag 203ea is not on, that is, if it is determined that the small win is not occurring (S1801: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small win flag 203ea is on (S1
801: Yes), and then it is determined whether the V passing flag 203ec is on (S1802
That is, it is determined that a ball entered the V winning hole 10677 of the reel route before the power outage occurred. If it is determined that the V passing flag 203ec is on (S1802: Y
es), since the power was turned off after the V win, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V pass flag 203ea is not on, that is, is off (S1802:
No), the rotation of the acceleration rotor 10675a is stopped (S1803), and the emergency stop flag 203
nb is set to ON (S1804), and this process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the power is cut off during a small win game, the driving of the acceleration rotor 10675a is stopped and then the power cut process is executed. In this way, the rotation of the acceleration rotor 10675a is stopped first only when the V-passing flag 203ec is not set to ON during a small win game, thereby reducing the processing load when the power is cut off. Also, by first stopping the rotation of the acceleration rotor 10675a, the rolling device 1067
When the power is cut off while there is a game ball remaining in No. 5, the game ball bounces off the accelerating rotor 10675a after the valid period for the V winning has elapsed and enters the role route V winning hole 10677.
This can prevent the player from feeling like he or she has lost out.

In addition, without being limited to this, a sensor that detects the winning of the role route V winning port 10677 by a backup power source or the like even when the power is cut off may be provided, and when the sensor detects a game ball, the start-up process may be executed, and then the big win game may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a problem that a ball enters the role route V winning port 10677 during a sudden power cut and the big win is not awarded. In addition, in this embodiment, when a power cut occurs during a small win game, the rotating role 10675a is first stopped, but without being limited to this, when a power cut occurs, the rotating role 10675a may be first stopped regardless of the game state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to control the stop of the rotating role 10675a in the power cut process, and the processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, the device may be configured to detect balls entering the V-route winning hole 10677 during a power outage by supplying power from a backup power source used in the event of a power outage, and a storage means may be provided to temporarily store the detection results, so that when the power outage is restored, the small win game may be continued based on the detection results stored in the storage means. Even in this configuration, even if a ball enters the V-route winning hole 10677,
This can prevent the occurrence of a situation where a big win game is not executed.

In addition, a holding means may be provided that holds the ball that enters the role route V winning hole 10677 when the power is cut off just before the detection means that detects the ball entering the role route V winning hole 10677. This can reliably prevent the ball from entering the role route V winning hole 10677 during a power cut. In this case, the release of the holding means may be performed after the power is turned on and the control process of the pachinko machine 10 is completely restored. For example, the release process may be performed after a notification performance is performed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to the effect that the holding member is to be released.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figs. 337 to 341, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described.
The command determination process 16 (S41012) in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7. This command determination process 16 (S41012) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (S4112) in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment).
In contrast to the command determination process (S4112) in the 13th embodiment, the state command process (
The difference is that state command process 16 (S4350) is executed instead of hit-related process 15 (S43071), and hit-related process 16 (S4354) is executed instead of hit-related process 15 (S43072). The other processes are the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

In the command determination process 16 (S41012), first, steps S4301 to S4308 described above are performed.
Then, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4
If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4309: Yes), status command process 16 (S4350) is executed, and this process ends.
(S4350) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338. On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4309: No), the above-mentioned processes of S4311 to S4312 are executed, and then it is determined whether or not a win-related command has been received (S4313). If it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S4313: Yes), the win-related process 16 is executed.
(S4354) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of this win-related process 16 (S4354) will be given later with reference to Fig. 339. On the other hand, if it is determined that a win-related command has not been received (S4313: No), the process of S4315 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to Fig. 338, the state command process 16 (S4350), which is one process in the command judgment process (see S41012 in Fig. 337) in the present fifteenth embodiment, will be described. Fig. 338 is a flow chart showing the contents of the state command process 16 (S4350). In the state command process 16 (S4350) in the present fifteenth embodiment, when the game state transitions to the time-saving B state, a process of resetting the challenge number counter 223na and the time accumulation counter 223nb is executed.

In the state command process 16 (S4350), first, the data in the game state storage area is updated according to the command received this time (S41601). Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is a command indicating a transition to the time-saving B state (S41602). If it is determined that the received state command is not a command indicating a transition to the time-saving B state (S41602: No),
On the other hand, if it is determined that the command indicates a transition to the time-saving state B, the values of the challenge number counter 223na and the time-saving cumulative counter 223nb are set to their initial values (S41603), and the process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the process of setting the values of the challenge count counter 203na and the time accumulation counter 223nb to their initial values is configured to be executed when the game state transitions to the time-saving B state. However, this is not limited to this, and when the game state transitions from the time-saving B state to another game state,
A process of setting the value of b to the initial value may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to hold the value of the counter until the time-saving B state is set again, and the processing load can be reduced.

Next, with reference to Fig. 339, the winning-related process 16 (S4354), which is one process in the command determination process (see S41012 in Fig. 337) in the present fifteenth embodiment, will be described. Fig. 339 is a flow chart showing the detailed contents of the winning-related process 16 (S4354). The winning-related process 16 (S4354) in the present fifteenth embodiment differs from the winning-related process 15 (see S43071 in Fig. 303) in that, when the game state is the time-shortening state B and a small bonus challenge win is won, the challenge number counter 22
The difference is that a process for updating the value of the time-saving accumulation counter 223nb and the value of the 3na is added. The other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the winning-related process 16 (S4354), first, S4404 to S4408, S4440
1. Execute the processes of S44051 to S44056, and determine whether an ending command has been received (S4409). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S440
9: Yes), a display ending command is set (S4410), and then it is determined whether the current winning-related command is a small win of the role challenge (S44071). If it is determined that the role challenge is a small win (S44071: Yes), the value of the challenge number counter 223na is incremented by 1 (S44072), and then the time accumulation counter 223nb is incremented by 1 (S44073).
The value of is updated (S44073), the above-mentioned processing of S44058 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 340, the variable display setting process 16 (S44
FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 16 (S44194).
194) is the variable display setting process (S41) in the 13th embodiment (and the first embodiment).
13) in that a process for setting the final variable presentation of the time-saving B state is added. The other points are the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

In the variable display setting process 16 (S44194), first, steps S4501 to S4504 described above are performed.
Then, it is determined whether the current change is the final change in the time-saving B state (S45
51). If it is determined that the current change is the final change in the time-saving B state (S4551: Y
es), execute the final variable effect setting process (S4552), and execute other effect setting processes (
S4553). Then, the above-mentioned processes of S4505 to S4509 are executed, and this process is terminated. Details of this final change presentation setting process (S4552) will be described later with reference to FIG. 341. On the other hand, in the process of S4551, if it is determined that the current change is not the final change in the time-saving B state (S4551: No), the final change presentation setting process (S4552) is skipped and the process proceeds to S4553.

Next, referring to FIG. 341, the variable display setting process 16 (S44
The final variable performance setting process (S4552), which is one process in the process (step S4552) of FIG.
41 is a flow chart showing the contents of this final variation effect setting process (S4552). In the final variation effect setting process (S4552), in the final variation when the game state is the time-saving B state, a process of setting an effect for giving a title to a player is executed based on the values of the challenge number counter 223na and the time accumulation counter 223nb.

In the final variation effect setting process (S4552), a title to be given to the player is selected by referring to the title selection table 222na based on the values of the challenge count counter 223na and the time accumulation counter 223nb (S4571). Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the current variation (S4572). If it is determined that a jackpot has not been won in the current variation (S4573),
4572: No), the selected title is set as it is (S4573), and the process proceeds to S4575. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4572 that the jackpot has been won (S4572: Yes), a title two ranks higher than the title selected in the process of S4571 is set (S4574), and the process proceeds to S4575. In the process of S4575, a display command for indicating the set title is set (S4575), and this process ends. The display command set here is sent to the display control device 113, and a screen for assigning a title as shown in FIG. 321 (b) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on this display command.

By configuring it in this way, if the rank of the displayed title is high compared to the actual game results (the number of times the device challenges were executed during the time-saving B state and the cumulative game period of the device challenges), the player can be made to believe that he or she has won a jackpot in the final change of the time-saving B state.

In this embodiment, when the final change of the time-saving B is set, a performance of giving a title to the player is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each time the number of changes in the time-saving game reaches a predetermined number of times, the title at that time may be notified to the player. By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the change of the player's own title, and the interest of the game is increased. Also, it may be configured so that the player can check the current title by an operation means that the player can operate. By configuring so that the player can check the title at the time he or she wants to check it, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

<Modification 1 of the 15th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 342 to FIG. 344, the above-mentioned modified example 1 of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) are configured to be configurable as game states, and further, the time-saving A state in which the lottery of the second special symbols is likely to be executed and the time-saving B state in which the lottery of the second special symbols is likely to be executed are configured to be configurable as time-saving states. Then, when the time-saving A state is set, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, the time-saving B state is configured to be set, so that a plurality of time-saving states are set in stages. Furthermore, the time-saving B state is configured to be a game state more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state, so that the player can be motivated to play so that a more advantageous game state is set.

In addition, in the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, when the time-saving A state is set, if a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special pattern and a jackpot game is played based on the small jackpot, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the subsequent game content is made significantly different depending on the trigger for playing the jackpot game played during the time-saving A state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In contrast to this, in the modified example 1 of the fifteenth embodiment, when the time-saving A state is set, if a jackpot game is played, the time-saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when a jackpot game is played during the time-saving B state, the time-saving A state is set after the jackpot game ends. The conditions for ending the time-saving B state are as follows:
This embodiment differs from the above-described fifteenth embodiment in that it is easier to achieve than the above-described fifteenth embodiment, making the time-saving A state a more advantageous gaming state than the time-saving B state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving B state, as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, the lottery for the first special symbol is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, so that the time-saving B state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is configured to be able to set the time-saving A state and the time-saving B state using the same configuration as the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, and is configured to be able to set the time-saving B state as a pull-back zone for a predetermined period when a jackpot game is executed during the time-saving A state.

By configuring in this way, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where the time-saving A state is set, the most disadvantageous game state (normal state) for the player is not set after the jackpot game ends, but it is possible to set the time-saving B state, which is more disadvantageous than the time-saving A state but more advantageous than the normal state. Therefore, a jackpot game is executed while the time-saving B state is set, and the player can continue playing while expecting the time-saving A state to be set again. Note that this modified example differs from the above-mentioned 15th embodiment in that the stipulated contents for the game state set after the jackpot game ends, the end conditions of the time-saving B state are changed, and the performance according to the changed points is executed, and the rest is the same. For the same contents, the contents of the above-mentioned 15th embodiment are referred to, and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

<Regarding the content of the performance in Modification 1 of the 15th embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 342, characteristic effects among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. Fig. 342(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen at the end of a big win game executed during time-saving A state (normal rush), and Fig. 342(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen during time-saving B state (revival chance).

As shown in Fig. 342(a), when a jackpot game is executed during a normal rush, a comment is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm to inform the player that the time-saving B state (revival chance) will be set after the jackpot game ends. Then, when the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) of the time-saving B state (revival chance) starts, as shown in Fig. 342(b), "19 times remaining" is displayed in the display area HR31 as the number of times the special symbol will vary until the time-saving B state (revival chance) ends, the words "High probability of winning the special feature challenge" are displayed in the display area HR35, and the comment "Get the special feature challenge while there are still remaining times" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

When the time-saving B state is set, the time-saving B state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment described above is set.
Since the same game as in the normal state is executed, if a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal state, the probability of executing the feature challenge is 30%, whereas if a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the time-saving B state, the probability of executing the feature challenge is 100%.
Compared to the normal state, the probability of executing the gambling challenge is high.
As shown in FIG. 1, when the time-saving B state is set, a presentation is executed to inform the player that the probability of executing the role challenge is increasing.

In this modified example, similar to the fifteenth embodiment described above, when the time-saving B state is set,
Compared to the normal state, the configuration is such that the drawing of the first special pattern is more likely to be executed and the role challenge is more likely to be executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the ease of executing the drawing of the first special pattern is not changed from the normal state (configured to be about the same), and only the probability of executing the role challenge is increased.

Next, referring to FIG. 343, the transition of the game state in this modified example will be described. FIG. 343 is a game flow diagrammatically showing the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example. The pachinko machine 10 in this modified example differs from the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment in that, in the case where a jackpot game is executed in the normal state, the time-saving A state is always set after the jackpot game ends, in the case where a jackpot game is executed in the time-saving A state, the time-saving B state is always set after the jackpot game ends, and in the case where a jackpot game is executed in the time-saving B state, the time-saving A state is always set after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, the condition for terminating the time-saving B state (time-saving termination condition) is set when the special pattern variation (lottery) varies (executes) 99 times, whereas in this modified example, the time-saving termination condition is set when the special pattern variation (lottery) varies (executes) 20 times, making it easier to establish the termination condition for the time-saving B state, which is different. The rest of the content is the same as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, and detailed explanations of the same content will be omitted.

By configuring in this way, in this modified example, it is possible to transition the game state with regularity every time a jackpot game is executed, and it is possible to provide the player with easy-to-understand gameplay. Also, since the time-saving B state, in which the lottery for the first special symbol is more likely to be executed, is used as a pull-back zone (revival chance) in which the time-saving A state is more likely to be set than in the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the game immediately after the time-saving A state ends, compared to a gameplay in which the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends in the time-saving A state.

<Regarding the Electrical Configuration of Modification 1 of the Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of this modification will be described with reference to Fig. 344. In this modification, the main control device 1 is added to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment described above.
The difference is that the first winning type selection 17 table 202pb is provided instead of the first winning type selection 16 table 202nb in the ROM 202 of 10, and the rest is the same. The same elements are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. In addition, when the performance based on the above-mentioned differences is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, a new electrical configuration is used, but the electrical configuration for executing the presence or absence judgment of information used when setting the performance in the voice lamp control device 113 and setting the performance content based on the judgment result of the presence or absence judgment is the same as the technical idea described in any of the above-mentioned embodiments, so even if the specific display content is different, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 344(a) shows the ROM 20 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example.
344(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the IEC 61111-2.
In this modified example, a first win type selection 17 table 202pb is provided instead of the first win type selection 16 table 202nb, so that the type of game state set after the end of the big win game is made different from that in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment.

Here, the contents of the first winning type selection 17 table 202pb will be described with reference to FIG. 344(b). FIG. 344(b) shows the first winning type selection 17 table 202pb.
344(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning type selection 16 table 202nb of the above-mentioned 15th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 344(a), the difference is that the type of the game state set after the big win game ends and the end condition are different, and the rest are the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents are omitted.

Specifically, when the first special symbol is selected as the jackpot type, if the jackpot type is jackpot A16 (10R (round) jackpot), the "time-saving A state" is set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of the selection, and the jackpot B16 is set.
In the case of a (10R (round) jackpot), if the game state at the time of the winning is normal,
After the big win game ends, the "normal state" is set, and if the game is in the time-saving A state or the time-saving B state, the "time-saving A state" is set.

In addition, the jackpot type is set when the second special symbol is won. If the jackpot type is jackpot C16 (15R (round) jackpot), if the game state at the time of winning is normal state or time-saving B state, the "time-saving A state" is set, and if it is time-saving A state, the "time-saving B state" is set.

Furthermore, when a small win is won, if the jackpot type is jackpot D16 (10R (round) jackpot), if the game state at the time of the win is normal or time-saving B state, "time-saving A state" is set, and if it is time-saving A state, "time-saving B state" is set. Also, when the jackpot type is jackpot E16 (10R (round) jackpot), if the game state at the time of the win is normal, "time-saving B state" is set, and if it is time-saving A state, "time-saving A state" is set.

In this modified example, when the time-saving state A is set, the time-saving end condition is set to be met when the special pattern change is performed 100 times without a jackpot game being played (100 special pattern changes), and when the time-saving state B is set, the time-saving end condition is set to be met when the special pattern change is performed 20 times without a jackpot game being played (20 special pattern changes).

When the time-saving A state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol, which has a 1/2 probability of winning a small prize, becomes more likely to be executed, and if the second special symbol wins a small prize, the high probability (
Since there is a 100% chance that a ball that has entered the small prize winning device 10650 will enter the direct V prize opening 10657 in a small prize game (direct V challenge) is executed, during normal play, a big prize game is executed without the time-saving end condition being met. On the other hand, in the time-saving B state, it is a game state in which a lottery for the first special symbol, which wins a small prize with a probability of 1/20, is more likely to be executed. During the time-saving B state, a small prize game is executed in which a special feature challenge can always be executed if the first special symbol is won as a small prize, but in the special feature challenge, if the ball enters the special feature route V prize opening 10657 in a special feature route V prize opening 10657, the small prize game (direct V challenge) is executed.
Since the probability of winning 0677 is 1/4, the time-saving state B is a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is more likely to be met than the time-saving state A. However, the time-saving state B is a state in which a jackpot game is more likely to be executed than the normal state, so it is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

<Modification 2 of the 15th embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 345, the second modified example in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the fifteenth embodiment described above, the jackpot type was set based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot type is selected by referring to the first winning type selection 16 table 202nb in the case of winning the jackpot or the small winning in the lottery of the special symbol, the jackpot type is selected, and when the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot game corresponding to the selected jackpot type is executed, and after the jackpot game is finished, the game state corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set.

However, when the lottery result for the special pattern is displayed on the first pattern display device 37, the selected jackpot type is also displayed in an identifiable manner in addition to the lottery result for the special pattern. Therefore, for example, when the time-saving state is set, by identifying the content displayed on the first pattern display device 37 when a small jackpot is won, it becomes possible to know in advance whether the jackpot game executed by landing the ball in the V winning hole (specific area) during the small jackpot game is an advantageous or disadvantageous jackpot game for the player.

In order to solve this problem, for example, it is conceivable to configure the structure of the game board 13 so that if the ball is released after the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state on the first pattern display device 37, the ball cannot enter the V entry hole (specific area) during a small win game. However, using such a configuration would give rise to the problem that the freedom to provide a configuration to improve playability within the limited space of the game board 13 would be limited.

Therefore, in this variant example 2, multiple specific areas (V winning holes) into which the ball can enter during small win play are provided, and the game state set after the end of the big win play is configured to differ depending on the specific area (V winning hole) into which the ball enters.

Furthermore, a plurality of specific areas (V winning holes) for setting the above-mentioned game state are arranged in areas where the game balls that have flowed into the rolling device 10675 can enter. By configuring in this way, when using a configuration for setting a game state corresponding to a specific area into which a ball enters during a small win game, it is possible to prevent a player from intentionally playing a game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

Here, the configuration of the rolling device 10675 used in this modified example 2 will be described with reference to Fig. 345. Fig. 345(a) is an enlarged view of the rolling device 10675 in this modified example 2 as viewed from the front, and Fig. 345(b) is an enlarged view of the rolling device 10675 in this modified example 2 as viewed from the top. As shown in Fig. 345, in this modified example 2, the positions of the outlets 10680a and 10680b and the position of the role route V winning port 10677 are changed from those of the rolling device 10675 in the fifteenth embodiment described above, and the role route V winning port 10677 is located in a specific area.
The difference is that the number 677 has been increased, but otherwise they are the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 345(a) and FIG. 345(b), in this modified example 2, the rolling device 106
The first role route V winning hole 10677a is a specific area where the ball discharged from 75 can enter.
The first and second role route V winning holes 10677a and 10677b are provided, and the big win game is executed when a ball enters one of the winning holes during the valid period of the small win game. In other words, compared to the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, the number of specific areas into which the ball that has flowed into the rolling device 10675 can enter is increased.
The game content of the jackpot game executed when the ball enters the winning hole 10677b of the first role route is the same as that when the ball enters the winning hole 10677c of the second role route V, but the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first role route V winning hole 10677a, the time-saving A state is set after the big win game ends, and when the ball enters the second role route V winning hole 10677b, the time-saving B state is set after the big win game ends. In other words, when a small win is won in the lottery of the special pattern, only the content of the big win game is selected as the big win type, and the game state set after the big win game ends is set according to the type of the specific area (V winning hole) into which the ball entered during the small win game.

By configuring it in this way, when a small prize is won in the lottery of the special pattern,
The result of the special symbol lottery (small prize win) is determined based on the content displayed on the symbol display device 37.
Even if the type of jackpot (contents of the jackpot game) is identified, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends cannot be identified in advance, so that it is possible to reliably prevent a player from intentionally playing a specific jackpot game (a jackpot game in which a game state advantageous to the player is set).

In addition, in this modified example 2, an example has been described in which the type of time-saving state is changed depending on the specific area (V winning hole) into which the ball enters. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific area (V winning hole) into which the ball enters may be changed.
Depending on the situation, a specific area may be provided in which a normal state is set after the big win game ends.
In the present modified example 2, in order to make it possible to visually confirm which specific area the ball will enter, the rolling device 1
In the above embodiment, multiple specific regions are provided within the area indicated by the arrows 0675. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple specific regions may be provided in areas that are difficult for the player to see. For example, the configuration of the above-mentioned 15th embodiment (FIG. 27
5), a rolling device 10675 may be provided with one role route V winning port 10677 (pseudo V winning port), a distribution means for distributing balls that enter the pseudo V winning port to a first flow path and a second flow path, and the balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means may enter a specific area where the time-saving A state is set, and the balls distributed to the second flow path may enter a specific area where the time-saving B state is set. In this way, when a ball enters the pseudo V winning port, it is determined that a jackpot game will be played, and the game state at the end of the jackpot game is set according to the specific area where the ball finally enters. In this case, a detection means is provided for detecting that a ball has entered the pseudo V winning port, and when the detection means detects a ball, the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 15th embodiment is configured to execute a presentation indicating that a ball has entered the reel route V winning port 10677, as a presentation indicating that the conditions for executing a jackpot game have been met.

By configuring in this way, the player can be made to believe that a jackpot game has been executed based on the ball entering the pseudo V winning hole, making it difficult for the player to understand at what point in time the game state after the jackpot game has been determined. This makes it possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting which game state will be set after the jackpot game has ended. In addition, if a configuration is used in which the player cannot easily identify the game state that will be set after the jackpot game has ended until the jackpot game ends, then between the time the game state that will be set after the jackpot game has ended is set and the time the jackpot game ends (for example, during the jackpot game),
It is preferable to configure the device to execute a suggestive effect that suggests the game state to be set.
Since a player who wants to quickly grasp the game state that will be set after the big win game ends will eagerly look at the executed suggestive presentation, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this modified example 2, as shown in FIG. 345, each specific area is set so that the ratio of different game states to be set is equal. However, without being limited to this, the ratio of a specific game state to be set may be set higher (or lower) than the ratio of other game states to be set.
The number of specific regions and their locations may be set, which makes it easy to set a game state that is likely to be set after the end of a big win game and a game state that is unlikely to be set.

Furthermore, as in the above-mentioned 14th control example, a configuration may be used in which the winning hole (out hole) into which the ball is likely to enter is variable depending on the time that has elapsed since the device challenge has been executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a period in which a specific game state is likely to be set and a period in which it is difficult to set as the game state that is set after the end of the big win game depending on the time that has elapsed since the device challenge has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the behavior of the ball during the device challenge.

<Regarding Modification 3 of the Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, the above-mentioned modified example 3 of the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 346 and FIG. 347. In the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) are configured to be set as game states, and further, the time-saving A state in which the lottery of the second special symbols is likely to be executed and the time-saving B state in which the lottery of the second special symbols is likely to be executed are configured to be set as time-saving states. Then, when the time-saving A state is set, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbols, the time-saving B state is configured to be set, so that a plurality of time-saving states are set in stages. Furthermore, the time-saving B state is configured to be a game state more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state, so that the player can be motivated to play so that a more advantageous game state is set.

In addition, in the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, when the time-saving A state is set, if a small jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special pattern and a jackpot game is played based on the small jackpot, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the subsequent game content is made significantly different depending on the trigger for playing the jackpot game played during the time-saving A state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

However, in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, in a game state in which the time-saving A state is set, if a small prize is won in the lottery for the second special pattern, regardless of the type of small prize, the ball that enters the small prize winning device 10650 enters the straight V winning port 10657. Therefore, even if the game state that is set after the end of a big prize game is configured to differ depending on the type of small prize that is set, it is not possible to arbitrarily select the game state that is set after the end of a big prize game.

In contrast, in this modified example 3, only when a specific small win type is set depending on the playing method during the small win game, the ball is thrown into a specific area (V winning hole) during the small win game.
This embodiment differs from the fifteenth embodiment in that it is configured to allow the ball to enter the ball hole in the jackpot. With this configuration, the player can freely select the game state after the big win game ends, so that the player can play the game he or she desires, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Here, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example 3 will be described with reference to Fig. 346. Fig. 346 is a front view showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example 3. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example 3 is different from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment in that a second small winning device 11650 is provided in the left area of the game board 13, but is otherwise the same. Note that the same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The second small prize winning device 11650 is a winning device that transitions in a predetermined variable pattern between an open state where the ball can enter when a small prize game is played, and a closed state where it is more difficult for the ball to enter than in the open state, and is configured so that the second opening/closing door 11650b enters the open state by being buried in the game board 13 side, and enters the closed state by protruding from the game board 13 side.

The second small prize winning device 11650 is configured to be in a closed state when a small prize game is not being played, so that the ball cannot win a prize. The second opening and closing door 11650b is
It is a member that is variably controlled at the same timing by the same drive source as the opening and closing door 10650b provided in the small prize winning device 10650, and is a connecting member that is connected to the opening and closing door 10650b by an operating member (not shown) that operates according to the driving force from the drive source. In other words, when a small prize game is played, the opening and closing door 10650b and the second opening and closing door 11650b are opened and closed at the same timing based on the operation scenario of the small prize game, so that the small prize winning device 10650 and the second small prize winning device 11650 become winning devices that are variable between an open state and a closed state at the same timing.

Inside the second small prize winning device 11650, there is a second straight V winning hole 11657 which becomes an opportunity to execute a big prize game when a ball enters the second small prize winning device 11650.
and a second outlet 11654 for discharging the ball to the outside of the second small prize winning device 11650. Further, a second movable piece 11653 is provided which is variable between an open state in which the ball that has won the second small prize winning device 11650 can enter the second straight V winning port 11657 and a closed state in which the ball can enter the second outlet 11654 without entering the second straight V winning port 11657.
653 is configured to operate in a predetermined operating pattern when a small win game starts.

A detailed operation pattern will be described later with reference to FIG. 347, but in this modified example 3, in a small prize game executed when the small prize type is small prize A, the ball that has won the second small prize winning device 11650 does not enter the second straight V winning port 11657, and in a small prize game executed when the small prize type is small prize B, the opening and closing door 106 is opened so that the ball that has won the second small prize winning device 11650 can enter the second straight V winning port 11657.
50b, the operation pattern of the second opening/closing door 11650b, and the operation pattern of the second movable piece 11653 are specified. Also, as in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, the ball that has won the small win winning device 10650 is configured to be able to enter the direct V winning port 10657 regardless of the type of small win.

With this configuration, if a player who wishes for the time-saving B state to be set after the end of a big win game wins a small win while the time-saving A state is set (if a small win is won in the lottery for the second special pattern), he or she can simply switch the play method from right-hand play to left-hand play and play a small win game to make the ball enter the second small win winning device 11650, and it becomes possible to make the ball enter the second straight V winning port 11657, which is a specific area, only in the small win game corresponding to the small win B for which the time-saving B state is set after the end of a big win game.

This allows the big win game to be played only when the small win game in which the game state desired by the player is set is being played, so the player can freely select and set the game state desired by the player. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the player by encouraging active participation in the game.

In addition, since the opening and closing door 10650b of the small prize winning device 10650 and the second opening and closing door 10650b of the second small prize winning device 11650 are configured to be variable at the same timing using the same drive source, even if a new winning device is installed, there is no need to install a new drive source in the pachinko machine 10, which can reduce costs. In addition, since the small prize winning device 10650 and the second small prize winning device 11650 have the same open period, the number of balls that can be won during a small prize game can be the same regardless of which winning device is targeted during a small prize game, so there is no advantage or disadvantage to the player in terms of the number of prize balls paid out.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this modified example 3, since both the small win winning device 10650 and the second small win winning device 11650 are configured to be in an open state when one small win game is executed, it is possible to make a ball win in either winning device, and the accumulated value of the number of balls winning in each winning device is used to determine whether or not the end condition of the small win game is established. Therefore, for example, if the end condition of the small win game is set to be established when the number of winning balls during the small win game reaches 10, immediately after the start of the small win game, a ball is made to win the small win winning device 10650 by right-handed play, and when the number of winning balls reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 8), the game method is switched to left-handed play to play a game in which a ball is made to win the second small win winning device 11650, and a situation in which an excessive number of balls win the winning device during one small win game can be suppressed.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the inside of the second small winning device 11650 also has the following:
As with the small prize winning device 10650, a plurality of detection sensors are provided as detection means for detecting the passage of a ball, for example, a second ball entry sensor for detecting that a ball has entered the second small prize winning device 11650, a second passage sensor for detecting that the ball has passed through the second movable piece 11653 in the closed state, and a second discharge sensor for detecting that the ball has flowed down toward the outlet 11654 by the second movable piece 11653 in the closed state. In this way, the behavior of the ball in the second small prize winning device 11650 can be determined in the same manner as the small prize winning device 10650 of the 15th embodiment described above, so that an abnormal game state occurring in the second small prize winning device 11650 can be reliably determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 347, the rotating body 10652 and the movable piece 1065 during the small prize game (special 2 small prize game) executed based on the small prize winning of the second special symbol in this modification 3.
3. The operation of the second movable piece 11653 and the opening and closing doors 10650b, 11650b will be explained. Figure 347 is a timing chart that shows the operation of various devices during the special 2 small win game. As shown in Figure 347, the special 2 small win game is a small win A (special 2
The timing at which the opening and closing doors 10651a, 10651b open is different when small prize A (special 2 small prize B) is set and when small prize B (special 2 small prize B) is set. In a small prize game in which special 2 small prize A is set, an opening period (5.5 seconds), a round period (1 second), and an ending period (4.5 seconds) are specified as the small prize scenario, and in a small prize game in which special 2 small prize B is set, an opening period (6.5 seconds), a round period (1 second), and an ending period (3.5 seconds) are specified as the small prize scenario.

And, regardless of the type of small win, the rotating body 10652 operates from the initial state (sideways) 5.5 seconds after the start of the small win game, and changes the operating state (upwards) three times.
The movable piece 10653 is controlled to maintain the initial state (sideways) for 2.5 seconds (first operation), and then to maintain the operating state (upward facing state) for 5 seconds (second operation).
It operates from a closed state to an open state, maintains the open state for 4.5 seconds, and then is controlled to return to the closed state, and the second movable piece 11653 operates from a closed state to an open state for 1 second 6.7 seconds after the start of the small win game, and then is controlled to return to the closed state.

In this modified example 3 in which the operation patterns of various devices during a small prize game are set in this manner, for example, when a right-hand shot game is performed aiming at the small prize winning device 10650 during a special 2 small prize game, the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 is stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652 in the upward state (during the first operation), and is discharged into the second flow path 10651b (see FIG. 346) at the timing when the first operation ends, and the movable piece 10
The ball passes through 653 and enters straight V winning hole 11657. Note that the specific time passage is the same as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In other words, in this modified example 3, when a right-hand shot is performed aiming at the small prize winning device 10650 during a special 2 small prize game, the ball that wins the small prize winning device 10650 enters the direct V winning port 10657 regardless of the type of small prize that has been set, so that if a small prize is won, it is possible to reliably play a big prize game. Therefore,
Regardless of the game state set after the end of the big win game, a player who wants to execute the big win game as soon as possible will perform a right-hit game during the special 2 small win game.

On the other hand, when a left-handed play is performed aiming at the second small win winning device 11650 during a special 2 small win game, a small win game of the special 2 small win A, that is, a small win game that triggers the execution of a big win game in which the time-saving A state is set after the big win game ends by making the ball enter a specific area, is executed, and the ball that entered the second small win winning device 11650 is guided to the second outlet 11654 by the second movable piece 11653 in the closed state.
In the small prize game of small prize A, the ball can be made to enter the second small prize winning device 11650 by a left-handed hit game aimed at the second small prize winning device 11650, but the game is configured so that the ball cannot enter the second straight V winning port 11657, which is a specific area, during the small prize game.

In contrast, when a small win game of the special 2 small win B, that is, a small win game that triggers the execution of a big win game in which the time-saving B state is set after the big win game ends by making the ball enter a specific area, is executed, the ball that enters the second small win winning device 11650 passes through the second movable piece 11653 in the open state and enters the second straight V winning hole 11657. In other words, the small win game of the special 2 small win B is executed by the second small win winning device 1165
By playing with a left hand aiming for 0, the ball can be made to enter the second small prize winning device 11650, and further, during the small prize game, the ball can be made to enter the second straight V winning port 11657, which is a specific area.

By configuring in this way, a player who desires to set the time-saving state B can set the time-saving state A.
If you win a small jackpot during this state, you can be sure to play the small jackpot with a left-handed play to reduce time.
In this modified example 3, in both the special 2 small win A in which a big win game in which the time-saving A state is set can be executed and the special 2 small win B in which a big win game in which the time-saving B state is set can be executed, a small win winning device 10650 capable of making a ball enter a specific area during a small win game, and only in the special 2 small win B in which a big win game in which the time-saving B state is set can a small win winning device 11650 capable of making a ball enter a specific area during a small win game are provided, and the game state to be set after the end of the big win game can be selected by the player. However, if the game state can be selected by the player,
Other configurations may be used, for example, a third small win winning device may be provided that can cause the ball to enter a specific area during a small win game, for example, only for the special 2 small win A where a big win game in which the time-saving A state is set can be executed.

Furthermore, in this modified example 3, the game mode is changed from right-hand hitting to left-hand hitting, allowing the player to select the game state to be set after the big win game ends, but the change in the game mode is not limited to this, and for example, two game areas, a strong right-hand hitting area and a weak right-hand hitting area, may be formed on the right side of the game board 13, and a ball that has flowed down one area may not flow down the other area, and each area may be provided with a different winning device. By configuring in this way, it is possible to arrange each winning device nearby, so that the opening and closing doors of each winning device driven by the same driving source can be easily connected.

In addition, in this modified example 3, a configuration is used in which the winning device that allows the ball to win during the small win game is changed so that any game state is set after the big win game ends, but this is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which the player can arbitrarily select the game state to be set after the big win game ends with only one winning device. In this case, for example, one small win game is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the opening and closing door is controlled so that the ball can win the winning device in each period. Then, by setting the opening timing of the opening and closing door corresponding to each small win type in accordance with the operation timing of the movable piece provided in the winning device, it is possible to configure so that when a special 2 small win A is executed in which a big win game in which a time-saving A state is set is executed, the ball that won the winning device in the first half period of the small win game can enter a specific area, and when a special 2 small win B is executed in which a big win game in which a time-saving B state is set is executed, the ball that won in the second half period of the small win game can enter a specific area.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the game state desired by the player after the end of the big win game, simply by changing the timing of the ball's entry into one winning device. Therefore, since the player can select the desired game state by simply changing the timing of the ball's release without having to select a game method, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of the player having to change the game method.

Next, the content of the performance of the third modified example will be described with reference to FIG.
This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 when a small win is won during the time-saving A state and a small win game is executed in this variant example 3.

As shown in FIG. 348, when a small win is won during the time-saving A state, a selection screen is displayed to allow the player to select a play method for the small win game. Specifically, the main display area Dm is divided into left and right at the center, and an arrow image YG2 indicating right-hand play is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm, and an arrow image YG1 indicating left-hand play is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm.

Then, in the display area HR9, as the game content when a left-hand play is performed, a comment is displayed indicating that the expectation of a big win is lower than that of a right-hand play, and that the expectation of the continuation of the time-saving state is high when a big win game is executed.

By displaying the selection screen in this manner, the player can know in advance what game result will be provided depending on the game method executed during the small win game, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, on the right side of the main display area Dm, a time gauge 2811 corresponding to the opening period during which the ball can enter the V-shaped prize by right-hand hitting, that is, the combined period of the opening period of the small prize A and the opening period of the small prize B, is displayed in the display area HR40, and the remaining period display mode 2811 is displayed according to the passage of time.
a is displayed to decrease.

On the other hand, on the left side of the main display area Dm, a time gauge 2811Z corresponding to the opening period during which the ball can enter the V-shaped hole by playing with the left hand, i.e., the opening period of the small win B, is displayed in the display area HR40Z, and the remaining period display mode 2811za is displayed so as to decrease as time passes.

In this way, by notifying the player of the open period during which a V prize can be won, the player can play in a way that is easier to understand.

<16th embodiment>
Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 349 to Fig. 354. In the above-mentioned 13th to 15th embodiments, when a small prize is won in a normal state and a small prize game is executed, the small prize winning device 1065 provided in the right area of the game board 13
By displaying a right-hand hit game guide (see Figure 282 (b)) to allow the player to play a game in which the ball enters the number 0, the game is made easy to understand for the player.

However, the above-mentioned right-hit game guide display can make the player understand that a small win game is being played, but there is a problem in that the player cannot understand at what timing the small win winning device 10650 will be in an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter. Also, since the player cannot understand the remaining period in which the ball can enter the small win winning device 10650, there is a problem in that the player plays a right-hit game unnecessarily in order to ensure that the ball enters the small win winning device 10650.

In contrast to this, in the 16th embodiment, when a small win game is executed, the small win winning device 10650 is configured to notify the player of the period during which the small win winning device 10650 is in the open state. By configuring in this way, the ball can be efficiently delivered to the small win winning device 10650.
can be awarded.

Furthermore, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, when a small prize game is played in which the small prize winning device 10650 is once opened (continuously opened), then closed for a predetermined period, and then opened again (continuously opened), that is, when a small prize game in which a first half of an open period and a second half of an open period are set during one small prize game, is executed, there is a period during the small prize game in which the small prize winning device 10650 is in a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to win, and therefore the right-hit game guide display shown in FIG. 282(b) poses the problem that the player fires balls more unnecessarily.

In contrast, in the 16th embodiment, the remaining period of the open state in the first half period and the remaining period of the open state in the second half period are separately notified to the player based on the type of the small win game to be executed. With this configuration, when the small win game is executed, the period of the open state (remaining period) set in the first half period is notified first, and if the ball does not win the small win winning device 10650 during the first half period, the period of the open state (remaining period) set in the second half period is notified based on the start of the second half period. As a result, even if an operation pattern in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period during a small win game is set as the operation pattern of the small win winning device 10650, the period (remaining period) in which the small win winning device 10650 is in the open state can be reliably notified to the player.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, the small win winning device 106
The winning balls are stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652.
After a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 3.5 seconds) since the start of the small win game, the storage unit 106
In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration in which the balls that have won in the small prize winning device 10650 are stored for a predetermined period of time, it is sufficient to store the balls in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652, and no matter when the balls are stored in the storage section 10652a, it has no effect on the player, so the player's motivation to store the balls in the storage section 10652a as soon as possible is reduced.

In contrast to this, in the present 16th embodiment, the presentation mode is configured to be different based on the remaining period of time that the small prize winning device 10650 is in the open state at the timing when it is determined that the balls have been stored in the storage section 10652a, and the presentation mode that is advantageous to the player is easily set by storing the balls in the storage section 10652a as soon as possible.
This makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm in an attempt to collect the balls in the storage section 10652a as quickly as possible.

In addition, in the 16th embodiment, after the balls are stored in the storage section 10652a, a second remaining period notification is executed after a predetermined period (1 second) to notify the player of the remaining period until the stored balls are discharged downstream.
This allows the player to be notified in an easily understandable manner of the process in which the balls stored in the reel are discharged downstream.
Furthermore, the notification mode of the second remaining period notification is configured to be variably set according to the timing at which the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a, and the ball is notified as soon as possible by the storage section 10652a.
When the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a, a notification mode is set to show information that is advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play the game in an attempt to store the ball in the storage section 10652a as quickly as possible.

In the 16th embodiment, the small win winning device 10650 is selected according to the small win type.
The door is configured to be capable of executing small prize games with different operation patterns (operation scenarios of the opening and closing door 10650b), and for example, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above, there is a small prize type in which, after the open state period of the first half period ends, a closed state period of a predetermined period (e.g., 1.9 seconds) is passed and an open state period of the second half period is set, and a small prize type in which a closed state period of a period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., 1.9 seconds) is set during a small prize game.

In this manner, when a small win game is executed with a plurality of operation patterns, for a small win game in which a closed state period of a predetermined period (e.g., 1.9 seconds) or more is set during the small win game, the open state period is divided into an open state period (first open period) before the closed state period is set and an open state period (second open period) after the closed state period is set, and a guide display is executed to inform the player of the open state period, and for a small win game in which a closed state period of less than a predetermined period (e.g., 1.9 seconds) is set during the small win game, a guide display is executed to inform the player of the open state period (total open period) set before and after the closed state period.

By configuring in this way, when a small win game in which multiple open states are set at short intervals is executed, the guide display shows the end of the period every time the open state ends, and it is possible to suppress the display being difficult for the player to understand. In addition, when executing the guide display for notifying the above-mentioned entire open period, a time gauge showing the entire period of the small win game period is displayed, and the period in which the small win winning device 10650 is in the open state is made visible to the player according to the update status of the time gauge. As a result, even when a small win game in which multiple open states are set at short intervals is executed, it is possible to easily inform the player of how long the open period will be set during this small win game period.

<About the content of the performance in the 16th embodiment>
Next, the characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 349 to 351. Fig. 349(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when a small win game is being executed in the normal state.
FIG. 350(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the first opening period in the small win game ends, and FIG. 350(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when the second opening period in the small win game starts.
This is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when a second small win game is being played in which the open state is set at short intervals.

As shown in FIG. 349(a), when a small win game is executed, an arrow icon 2810 guiding to right-hit game is displayed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and in the display area HR40 below, a time gauge 2811 indicating the first opening period (the period during which a state in which a ball is likely to win is set in the first half of the small win game) and a remaining period display mode 2811a indicating the remaining period of the first opening period are displayed.

The remaining period display mode 2811a is configured to decrease from the right end to the left end on the time gauge 2811. Immediately after the first open period is set, the entire time gauge 2811 is displayed in the remaining period display mode 2811a (filled in in FIG. 349(a)). When the first open period ends, the remaining period display mode 2811a moves to the left end of the time gauge 2811.
That is, the period indicated by the remaining period display mode 2811a on the time gauge 2811 is a display mode for indicating the remaining period of the first opening period, and the period not indicated by the remaining period display mode 2811a on the time gauge 2811 is a display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the first opening period.

By configuring in this manner, the player can be clearly notified of the period during which the small win winning device 10650 is in an open state allowing the ball to win during small win play.

Next, if the ball does not enter the small win winning device 10650 during the first opening period, as shown in Fig. 349(b), a display mode indicating that the first opening period has ended is displayed in the display area HR40, and the arrow icon 2810 is erased. Then, a warning display is displayed in the display area HR41 to inform the player that the playing method during the small win game is not normal.

In addition, the period during which the display of FIG. 349(b) is executed is a closed state period during a small win game, and the second open period is set later. Therefore, the right-hit guide display indicating that a small win game is being played continues to be executed in the display area HR22, and the sub-display area D
In the display area HR22, a comment "Hit to the right and aim at the attacker" is continuously displayed to guide the player to a small win game. Also, the display mode of the guide display displayed in the display area HR22 is highlighted and executed.

Next, when the second opening period is set during the small win game, as shown in FIG.
A display is executed to indicate that the open state in which the ball can enter the small win winning device 10650 in the small win game has been set again (the second open period has been set). Since this second open period is the last open state set during the small win game, the comment "Last Chance" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the arrow icon 2810 is displayed in a more emphasized display mode (filled in in FIG. 350(a)) than in the first open period. Then, in the display area HR40, a time gauge 2811 indicating the second open period and its remaining period display mode 2811a are displayed.

In this way, when a small prize game is played in which the opening operation of the small prize winning device 10650 is set so that multiple open states are set at intervals of a predetermined period (e.g., 1.9 seconds) as the opening operation of the small prize winning device 10650 executed during the small prize game, by configuring the opening period and the remaining period of the opening period to be displayed in correspondence with each open state (open period), the player can be easily notified of the timing at which the ball fired by right-hitting play will win the small prize winning device 10650.

Furthermore, by informing the player that the currently set opening period is the last opening period in the current small win game, the ball can be prevented from being thrown into the small win winning device 10 during the small win game.
In addition, the notification mode (see FIG. 350(a)) notifying the second (last) opening period is notified in a more emphasized manner than the notification mode (see FIG. 349(a)) notifying the first opening period, so that the player can be made to feel a sense of danger and play right-hand.

Next, as an opening operation of the small win winning device 10650 executed during the small win game,
A small win game (second small win game) in which the opening operation of the small win winning device 10650 is set so that the interval between multiple opening states is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1.9 seconds)
When the above is executed, the notification mode shown in FIG. 350(b) is displayed.
As shown in the figure, when the second small win game is executed, an opening period display mode for notifying the opening period is displayed in the display area HR40, which covers all opening periods set during the second small win game.

Specifically, a time gauge 2811 corresponding to the length of the entire period of the small win game is displayed, and a remaining period display mode 2811a is displayed decreasing from the right end to the left end as the small win game progresses. And, below the time gauge 2811, a first opening period display 2812a and a second opening period display 2812b are displayed together with the character "Chance" as a display mode indicating the opening period in which the opening state is set.

In this way, when a small win game (second small win game) in which the first opening period and the second opening period are set at short intervals is executed, if the period display shown in the above-mentioned Figure 349 (a) to Figure 350 (a) is executed, that is, the period display corresponding to each opening period is executed, the period end display (see Figure 349 (b)) and the period start display (see Figure 350 (a)) are frequently switched and displayed, and the display is executed in a way that is difficult for the player to understand, which may cause a problem that the motivation to play is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 350 (b), a period display showing the entire period of the small win game is executed, and the period display is used to notify the player of the period in which the opening period is set. This makes it possible to notify the player of the period in which the opening period is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, referring to FIG. 351, the ball that has won the small prize winning device 10650 is rotated by the rotor 10.
The display contents to be displayed when a ball is stored in the storage section 10652a of the ball storage unit 10652 will be described. FIG. 351(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents to indicate that a ball has been stored in the storage section 10652a during a small win game, and FIG. 351(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents to indicate that a ball has been stored in the storage section 10652a during a small win game.
After the balls are stored in the storage section 10652a, the balls stored in the storage section 10652a are passed through the second flow path 10651.
FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a second remaining period display for indicating the remaining period until discharge to b.

As shown in FIG. 351(a), during the opening period of the small win game, the ball is inserted into the small win winning device 1.
When the winning ball is won at 0650 and stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 displays the word "standby OK" indicating that the ball has been stored, and the sub-display area Ds displays the comment "storage completed." Then, in the display area HR40, the update of the remaining period display mode 2811a of the time gauge 2811 stops, and below it, the word "chance" is displayed as the advance notice display mode 2815 using an area corresponding to the size (length) of the area of the remaining period display mode 2811a.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the display mode (
By configuring in this way, the display mode of the advance notice display mode 2815 can be changed depending on the timing of the ball entering the small prize winning device 10650 during the small prize game, so that the player can enjoy changing the timing of the ball entering the small prize winning device 10650 during the small prize game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the sooner the balls are stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652 after the start of the small win game, the longer the remaining period of the open period at the time the balls are stored in the storage section 10652a, and the larger the display area of the advance notice display mode 2815 becomes. The larger the display area of the advance notice display mode 2815 becomes, the more likely it is that information that is advantageous to the player will be displayed as the display content of the advance notice display mode. This allows the player to receive the balls as early as possible during the small win game.
This allows players to play with enthusiasm, aiming to win 650.

When a predetermined period (1 second) has elapsed since the display of FIG. 351(a) was executed, the remaining period display of the opening period of the small winning game is switched to the second remaining period display showing the remaining period until the balls stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652 are discharged to the second flow path 10651b. Specifically, in the display area HR41 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81,
A time gauge 2821 is displayed, which indicates the remaining time until the balls stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652 are discharged to the second flow path 10651b, and the remaining time display mode 2821a is updated and displayed as time passes. In addition, the sub display area Ds displays the current status of the small win game, with a comment "Waiting for discharge" indicating that the balls stored in the storage section 10652a are waiting to be discharged.

Then, the second notice display mode 28 corresponding to the size of the display area of the time gauge 2821 is
In the second notice display mode 2825, a notice indicating the contents of the big win game to be executed in the current small win game is set, and the time gauge 2
The preview content is set according to the size (length) of the display area 821. According to the example shown in FIG. 351(b), the second preview display mode 2825 is set to "Big Chance".
As described above, the size (length) of the display area of the time gauge 2821 is
is configured such that the earlier the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotor 10652 during the small win game, the longer the period (waiting period) from when the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a until it is discharged, and the longer the size (length) of the display area of the time gauge 2821.
This allows players to play with enthusiasm, aiming to win 650.

<Regarding control process of the voice lamp control device in the sixteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figs. 352 to 354, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixteenth embodiment will be described.
2, the effect update process 17 (S20091) in the 16th embodiment will be described. FIG. 352 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect update process 17 (S20091). The effect update process 17 (S20091) is a process executed in place of the effect update process 15 (see S4191 in FIG. 302) in the 13th embodiment described above, and differs from the effect update process 15 (see S4191 in FIG. 302) in that a process for setting an update command for the guidance period display is added. The other processes are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In the performance update process 17 (S20091), first, the same processes as S45001 to S45004 of the performance update process 15 (see S4191 in FIG. 302) in the above-mentioned 13th embodiment are executed, and then an update command for the guidance display period is set (S45101). Then, in the performance update process 15 (see S4191 in FIG. 302) S450 in the above-mentioned 13th embodiment,
Then, the process in step 05 is executed, and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 353, the winning-related process 17 (S431) in the 16th embodiment will be described.
353 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning-related process 17 (S43171). The winning-related process 17 (S43171) is a process executed in place of the winning-related process 15 (see S43071 in FIG. 303) in the thirteenth embodiment described above, and differs from the winning-related process 15 (see S43071 in FIG. 303) in that a process for setting a guidance period display command and a situation command process (S44152) are added. The other processes are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In the winning-related process 17 (S43171), first, the S
The same processes as S4404 to S4408 are executed, and then it is determined whether or not an opening command for a small win has been received (S44001). If it is determined that an opening command for a small win has been received (S44001: Yes), the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma is set to 1, and an opening command for display to indicate the start of a small win game is set (S4405).
2). Next, a notification period display command corresponding to the type of small win that has been won is set (S441
51) and then terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S44001, if it is determined that the opening command for small win has not been received (S44001: No), it is determined whether the game status command for small win has been received (S44053). If it is determined that the game status command for small win has been received (S44053: Yes), the status command process is executed (S44152), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 354, the winning-related process 17 (FIG. 353) in the 16th embodiment will be described.
Next, the status command process (S44152), which is one of the processes in the status command process (see S43171), will be described. Fig. 354 is a flow chart showing the contents of the status command process (S44152).

In the status command process (44152), first, it is determined whether a command indicating storage has been received (S20101). If it is determined that a command indicating storage has been received (S20101),
: Yes), a display command indicating the completion of storage is set (S20102), and the remaining period of the guidance period display is calculated (S20103). Next, a notice display mode is set based on the remaining period calculated in the process of S20103 and the type of small win (S20104).
A display command indicating the preview display mode set in the process of 104 is set (S2010
5) The value of the elapsed time counter 223ma is read (S20106).

Next, the remaining time until the ball discharge period is calculated based on the value of the elapsed time counter 223ma read in the process of S20106 (S20107). Then, the second notification period display mode corresponding to the calculated remaining time is set (S20108), and a display command showing the second notification period display mode set in the process of S20108 after 1 second is set (S20109).
, and sets a display command according to the received command (S20110), and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S20101 that a command indicating storage has not been received (S20101: No), the processes of S20102 to S20109 are skipped, the process of S20110 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the 16th embodiment, the variable ball entry means (
In a special game (small prize game) in which the small prize winning device 10650 is variably controlled in a predetermined variable pattern between a closed state (when the opening and closing door 10650b is closed) in which it is difficult for the ball to win, and an open state (when the opening and closing door 10650b is open) in which it is easy to win, the device is configured to notify the player of the period (open period) in which the variable ball winning means is in the open state, in addition to a guide display (right hit notification) for guiding the game method (right hit game) for making the ball enter the variable ball winning means. This allows the player to know the timing of the right hit game during the small prize game, so that the player can play an efficient right hit game during the small prize game.

The open period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state may be set to correspond to the period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state, or when the open state of the variable ball entry means is set multiple times with a short period (e.g., 0.2 seconds) of closed state in between, one open period may be set to correspond to the multiple open states set consecutively. In other words, during a small win game, it is sufficient to distinguish between a state in which it is difficult for the ball shot by the player by right-hitting play to enter the small win winning device 10650 and a state in which it is easy to enter, and to set the period corresponding to the state in which it is easy to enter as the open period.

Also, the opening period may be set by taking into consideration the time it takes for a ball shot by right-hand play to reach the small prize winning device 10650 with respect to the period during which the variable ball winning means is actually in the open state. For example, if the period required for a ball shot by right-hand play to reach the small prize winning device 10650 is one second, it is preferable to set the opening period to a timing one second earlier than the period during which the variable ball winning means is in the open state. In this way, when a right-hand play is performed based on the opening period display displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the ball shot by right-hand play is guided to the small prize winning device 10650 in the open state.
This can make it easier to reach 50.

In this embodiment, the open period is set for all periods during which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, and the set open period and the remaining period of the open period are notified to the player. However, without being limited to this, for example, the open period may be set to a period during which the ball is entered into the small winning device 1065.
The opening period in which it is difficult to win the small prize (for example, 0.3 seconds) is set may be configured not to be notified to the player.
It is possible to suppress right-hitting play during the open period in which it is difficult to win at 0650 (short-time open state setting). Therefore, when a right-hitting game is performed based on the open period display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the ball shot by the right-hitting game is
This makes it easier to win the small prize winning device 10650.

In addition, in this embodiment, the open period display is executed when the variable ball entry means is in the open state, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute the open period display corresponding to the open state executed later before the variable ball entry means is in the open state. In this way, the open period display can be executed before the actual variable ball entry means is in the open state, so that the player can play right-handed with plenty of time.

Furthermore, in the 16th embodiment, when the period (open period) in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state is notified to the player, the remaining period in which the open period is set is also notified to the player. This allows the player to play while determining whether or not to execute a right-hand hit game according to the remaining period of the notified open period. Therefore, the player can play according to his/her skill, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the 16th embodiment, the small win game is at least executable in which the period during which the variable ball entry means is likely to be in the open state occurs twice during one small win game. The first period during which the variable ball entry means is likely to be in the open state after the small win game is executed (the first period)
an opening period), a period in which the next variable ball entry means is likely to be in an open state (a second opening period),
The system is configured to execute the open period display in response to each of the above.

By configuring in this way, when a period during which it is easy to get the ball to enter the variable ball entry means and a period during which it is difficult to enter the ball are repeatedly set during one small win game, it is possible to reliably notify only the period during which it is easy to get the ball to enter the variable ball entry means, and it is possible to efficiently execute a right-hand hit game to enter the small win winning device 10650.
An operation pattern for a small win game is used in which the period during which the variable ball entry means is likely to be in the open state occurs twice during one small win game, but an operation pattern for a small win game in which the period during which the variable ball entry means is likely to be in the open state occurs three or more times may also be set.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the opening period display is configured to be different depending on the length of the closed state period during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the variable ball entry means, which is set during multiple opening periods, and when the closed state period is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 1.9 seconds), the period including the opening period set before the closed state and the opening period set after the closed state is set as the opening period, and the opening period display is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the end and start of the opening period display from becoming complicated and difficult for the player to understand.

In the 16th embodiment, during a small win game, a variable ball entry means (a small win winning device 1065
The ball winning device 10650 has a storage means (rotating body 10652) capable of storing the winning balls in the small prize winning device 10650) for a predetermined period of time (maximum 3 seconds), and is configured to store the balls that have won in the small prize winning device 10650 when the storage means is in a storage-enabled state (rotating body 10652 is operating and facing upward). When the balls are stored in the storage means, the storage period has elapsed, and the player can be notified of the remaining time until the storage state is released.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the progress of the game during the small win game. Therefore, when a storage period for the small win game is set, the player can play the small win game with peace of mind even if the game does not progress.

<Structural modification of the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, a structural modification of the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 355 to 357. As described above with reference to Figs. 314 to 317, in the fifteenth embodiment,
In order to set a state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is likely to be executed (time-saving B state) and a state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is likely to be executed (time-saving A state) in the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, a distribution winning device 20070 (first operating port 20073a, second operating port 20074a,
0073b), and the actuating parts (first actuating part 20064b1, second actuating part 20064
a1) was provided.

As described above with reference to Figure 316, in the configuration of the distribution winning device 20070 used in the pachinko machine 10 of the 15th embodiment, regardless of which state (first switching state, second switching state) the switching valve 20072 is in, a ball can enter either of the operating ports (first operating port 20073a, second operating port 20073b). Therefore, when the normal state is set, there was a risk that a right-hand hit game would be played, causing balls to flow into the distribution winning device 20070.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 15th embodiment described above, even if right-handed play is performed during the normal state, that is, while the low probability state of a normal pattern is set, the gate-type electric device 20640a (see Figure 316) is configured to make it difficult for balls to flow into the distribution winning device 20070, and further, even if a ball does flow into the distribution winning device 20070 during the normal state, the player is not granted a privilege that is more advantageous to the player than when left-handed play is performed during normal times (for example, the execution of a second special pattern lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery executed by left-handed play during the normal state). Therefore, even if the above-mentioned switching valve 20072 is used, left-handed play can be performed during the normal state.

However, in the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, even if a right-hand hit game is performed during a normal state, the balls are prevented from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070, or the distribution winning device 200
In order to prevent a player from receiving a beneficial benefit when a ball enters number 70, a special structure must be used, which creates the problem of reducing the freedom to arrange other structures for enhancing the presentation effect or for improving playability within the limited space of the game board 13.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 316, in the configuration of the switching valve 20072 used in the fifteenth embodiment described above, when the switching valve 20072 slides, specifically, the first flow path 20075a
The switching valve 2007 is switched from the second switching state in which the second flow path 20075b is blocked to the first switching state in which the second flow path 20075b is blocked.
When the switching valve 20072 slides, the space (ball passage) formed between the partition wall 20070a and the opposing surface of the switching valve 20072 facing the partition wall 20070a is in contact with the partition wall 20070.
Since the space becomes narrower while maintaining a parallel state between a and the opposing surface of the switching valve 20072, depending on the flow conditions of the balls flowing down inside the sorting and winning device 20070 and the sliding displacement conditions of the switching valve 20072, there was a risk that the balls would become clogged in the above-mentioned space.

In contrast, in this modified structure, instead of the above-mentioned switching valve 20072, a member (shielding member 20173 (see FIG. 356)) for preventing (suppressing) the flow of balls into the distribution winning device 20070 during the above-mentioned normal state and a switching valve 20172 (see FIG. 356) formed with a structure different from that of the switching valve 20072 are provided, and the shielding member and the switching valve 20172 are configured to solve problems that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 15th embodiment in a winning game (normal winning game) executed based on a winning of a normal symbol. Note that the other configurations are the same as those of the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, so the same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, the specific contents of this modified structure will be described with reference to FIG.
6 is a prize distribution device 2007 of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this structural modification.
FIG. 13 is an enlarged schematic diagram of the vicinity of 0.

As shown in FIG. 356, this structural modification is different from the above-mentioned 15th embodiment in that a shielding member 20173 is added and a switching valve 20172 is provided instead of the switching valve 20072, and otherwise is the same. The shielding member 20173 is in a state of protruding (restricted state) into the inflow path formed toward the distribution winning device 20070 during normal times, that is, when the operation control by the normal winning game is not being executed, so that the balls cannot flow into the distribution winning device 20070. Also, the shielding member 20173 is provided at a position where the balls whose flow is hindered by the shielding member 20173 can flow down the area between the nail K3 and the partition wall 20070a.

Then, when a normal winning game is started, the shielding member 20173 is configured to be variably configured to be in a state where it is retracted (retracted state) from the inflow path formed toward the distribution winning device 20070 based on a predetermined operation pattern, and is in a state where the ball can flow into the distribution winning device 20070. Also, although a detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 357, this shielding member 20173 is operationally controlled to be in a restricted state during a period (0.1 seconds from the start of a normal winning game) when the gate-type electric device 20640a is in an induction state (a state where the ball can roll on the upper surface of the gate-type electric device 20640a) during a normal winning game executed in a normal state.

By configuring in this way, in normal times, that is, when the operation control by the normal winning game is not being executed, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070. Furthermore, even if the normal winning game is executed during the normal state, the ball will collide with the gate-type electric device 20640a located in the induction state and bounce back to the distribution winning device 20070.
It is possible to reliably prevent balls moving toward the prize-winning device 20070 from flowing into the prize-winning device 20070.

Next, the switching valve 20172 is a variable member configured to be rotatable around the apex of the partition separating the first flow path 20075a and the second flow path 20075b as a central axis, and is operation controlled so as to switch between a first state (state shown by a solid line in Figure 356) in which the ball can flow down the first flow path 20075a, and a second state (state shown by a dashed line in Figure 356) in which the ball can flow down the second flow path 20075b, based on the start of a normal winning game.

This switching valve 20172 is configured to rotate around the apex of the partition wall separating the first flow path 20075a and the second flow path 20075b as a central axis, so that when switching between the first state and the second state, the space (flow area) between the partition wall 20072a and the switching valve 20172 narrows without maintaining a parallel state. Therefore, in response to the sliding displacement operation of the switching valve 20072 used in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment, the distribution winning device 2007
This makes it less likely for ball jams to occur within 0.

Next, referring to Fig. 357, the operation contents of various devices executed in a normal winning game in the time-saving state in this structural modification will be described. Fig. 357 is a timing chart showing the operation contents of various devices executed in a normal winning game in the time-saving state. This structural modification is different from the above-mentioned 15th embodiment in that the switching valve 200172 is operated instead of the switching valve 20072, and that the operation control for the shielding plate 20173 is added, but otherwise it is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

The switching valve 20172 is controlled in the same manner as the switching valve 20072 of the fifteenth embodiment, and maintains a first state in which the ball can flow down the first flow path 20075a for 1.5 seconds after a winning game is started, and then maintains a second state in which the ball can flow down the second flow path 20075b.
The motion control is executed in which the state is switched to the first state, the second state is continued for three seconds, and then the first state is switched to the second state.

The shielding plate 20173 maintains a closed state (restricted state) for 0.1 seconds after a normal winning game starts, and then changes to an open state (retracted state).
After maintaining this state for 5 seconds, an operational control is executed to change the state to the closed state (restricted state).

Although not shown in the figures, in this modified structure, when a normal winning game is executed during the normal state, the gate-type electric device 20640a is configured to be controlled to operate in an opening pattern that sets an open state for 0.1 seconds from the start of the normal winning game. Therefore, when a normal winning game is executed during the normal state and the gate-type electric device 20640a is in the induction state, 0.
Even if a situation occurs in which a ball may flow into the distribution winning device 20070 within one second, the shielding plate 20173 maintains the closed state (restricted state), so that the ball is prevented from entering the distribution winning device 20
It is possible to reliably prevent the flow of the electric current into 070.

In this modified structure, the operation pattern of the shielding plate 20173 is such that the restricted state is maintained for 0.1 seconds after the start of the normal winning game, that is, while the gate-type electric device 20640a is in the induced state during the normal winning game in the normal state, but the restricted state may be maintained until a period during which the ball that collides with the gate-type electric device 20640a, which is in the induced state due to the normal winning game executed in the normal state, can flow into the allocation winning device 20070 has elapsed (for example, until 0.3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the normal winning game). This makes it possible to more reliably prevent the ball from flowing into the allocation winning device 20070 during the normal state.

In this case, the shielding plate 20173 is in an open state (retracted state) after the normal winning game starts.
If the period until the time is set longer than necessary, the flow of balls into the distribution winning device 20070 in the normal winning game executed during the time-saving state will be hindered.
It is preferable to set the period during which the gate-type electric device 20640a maintains the restricted state to be shorter than the period (corresponding to tz1 in FIG. 315) required for the balls that have rolled on the upper surface of the gate-type electric device 20640a to flow into the distribution winning device 20070. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing into the distribution winning device 20070 during the normal state, while allowing the balls to flow into the distribution winning device 20070 during the time-saving state.
0070 can be efficiently flowed into.

In the above-mentioned 15th embodiment and this structural modification, the switching valves 20072 and 200172 for switching the operating ports (first operating port 20073a, second operating port 20073b) through which the balls flowing into the distribution winning device 20070 can enter are always operated in a fixed operating pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the switching valves 20072 and 200172 may be configured to operate in different operating patterns depending on the set game state (time-saving type). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily switch the operating ports (first operating port 20073a, second operating port 20073b) through which the balls can enter depending on the time-saving type without changing the operating pattern of the normal winning game (opening pattern of the gate-type electric device 20640a) depending on the time-saving type. In addition, the gate-type electric device 20
The opening pattern of 640a can prevent the player from knowing the currently set time-saving type.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned 15th embodiment and this structural variation, even when different types of time-saving are set, each opening pattern is set so that the total period during which the gate-type electric device 20640a is in the guiding state during normal play is 1.5 seconds, but the length of the total period during which the gate-type electric device 20640a is in the guiding state may be made different depending on the type of time-saving, or the number of times it is changed to the guiding state may be made different.

<Regarding the modified example of the sixteenth embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the performance of the above-mentioned 16th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 358. In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, as a guide notification executed when a small win game is executed, in addition to a right hit notification for guiding the player to the game area where the player should shoot the ball during the small win game, a variable ball entry means (small win winning device 10650) that is variably controlled from a closed state where it is difficult for the ball to enter to an open state where it is easy for the ball to enter by executing the small win game is also included.
The device is configured to execute an open period notification to inform the player of the period (remaining period) during which the reel will be open.

Furthermore, when a small win game is executed in an opening pattern in which the small win winning device 10650 is in an open state multiple times during one small win game, the target of the opening period notification is configured to be different based on the interval (interval period) at which the multiple opening states are set. Specifically, when the length of the above-mentioned interval period is longer than 1.9 seconds,
The system is configured to execute separate open period notifications for the first open state period (first open period) set before the interval period and the second open state period (second open period) set after the interval period has elapsed, and when the length of the interval period is 1.9 seconds or less, the above-mentioned first open state period and second open state period are treated as a single open period and an open period notification is executed.

In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment, the second opening period is set as a rescue measure in case the player does not perform right-hand play during small winning play, so when the opening period notification corresponding to the first opening period is executed (see Figure 349 (a)), the player is not notified in advance that the second opening period will be set next.

In contrast to this, for example, as described above with reference to Figures 311 and 313, an opening pattern is set in which the small win winning device 10650 is opened multiple times during one small win game, and the ball is allowed to win the small win winning device 10650 during the first opening period.
In a pachinko machine 10 in which it is possible to make the game content of the small win game different depending on whether the ball wins the small win winning device 10650 during the second opening period or not, even if the opening period notification used in the 16th embodiment described above is used, it is not possible to notify the player in advance how many times the small win winning device 10650 will be in an open state during this small win game, and the player is not able to fully enjoy the small win game.

In contrast, in this modified example, during the execution of the opening period notification corresponding to the first opening period,
The system is configured to execute a pre-notification effect that can notify the player in advance of the existence of the second opening period that is set after the first opening period. By configuring in this way, the game content of the small winning game being executed at this time can be recognized quickly.

In addition, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 that is configured so that different small prize games (e.g., a direct V challenge and a gadget challenge) are executed when a ball enters the small prize winning device 10650 during the first opening period and when a ball enters the small prize winning device 10650 during the second opening period, the player can know that the second opening period will be set in this small prize game before the end of the first opening period, making it easier for the player to select the content of the small prize game.

Here, in this modified example, the small win winning device 1065 executed during the small win game
The following describes the content of the presentation in the case where a small win game (specific small win game) is performed in which the first small win game (straight V challenge) is performed when a ball is placed in the first opening period of 0, and the second small win game (gimmick challenge) is performed when a ball is placed in the second opening period. Note that in this presentation modification, only the presentation content performed in the specific small win game is described, and the other contents (the configuration of the game board 13, the control contents of each main control device) are appropriately selected and used from the contents used in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, so the detailed description of the contents is omitted.

First, referring to Fig. 358, the characteristic display contents among the display effects executed in this modified display effect will be described. Fig. 358(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the first opening period during a small winning game in which the first opening period and the second opening period are set. In addition, among the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81,
The same elements as those in the fifteenth embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 358(a), in this modified example, during the first opening period of the small win game,
An arrow icon 2810 is displayed to guide the right-hand hit game. In this modified example, if the ball wins during the first opening period, a direct V challenge is executed as the first small win game, so the arrow icon 2810 displays "direct", which indicates the type of small win game to be executed when the ball wins.
This makes it possible to easily inform the player that a direct V challenge will be executed if the ball wins during the first opening period.

Furthermore, when the remaining period display mode 2811a indicates a predetermined remaining period, the display area HR45 is displayed gradually expanding from the lower side of the main display area Dm. This display area HR45 displays information about the second opening period to be executed next, and in the state shown in FIG. 358(a), only a part of the arrow icon is displayed as information indicating that the second opening period will be set in the current small win game. In addition, the word "Waiting" is displayed in the display area HR45 to inform the player that the second opening period will be set later.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 358(a), when a ball enters the small prize winning device 10650, the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a (see FIG. 270) of the rotor 10652,
The display screen shown in Fig. 351 (a) is displayed. In this case, since it is determined that the first small winning game (direct V challenge) will be executed by the winning of the ball in the first opening period, the display content of the display area HR45 displayed for the second opening period is erased.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has passed without the ball winning from the state shown in FIG. 358(a), the display content shown in FIG. 358(b) is displayed. FIG. 358(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed just before the end of the first opening period. As shown in FIG. 358(b), when the remaining period of the first opening period indicated by the remaining period display mode 2811a decreases, the arrow icon 2810 and the time gauge 2811 displayed corresponding to the first opening period are gradually reduced, and the display area HR45 in which information corresponding to the second opening period to be set next is displayed is gradually enlarged.

In the state shown in Fig. 358(b), the entire arrow icon 2815 is displayed, and a "role" mark is displayed to indicate that the second small win game (role challenge) will be executed if the ball wins during the second opening period. Furthermore, a time gauge 2815a corresponding to the second opening period is also displayed.

In this way, by displaying information about the next set second opening period before the end of the first opening period, it is possible to allow the player to easily select whether to have the ball win during the first opening period or during the second opening period, thereby allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, by increasing the amount of information for the second opening period that is set next as the remaining period of the first opening period decreases, the player can be made to think about when to place the ball in the winning position during the first opening period, thereby improving the interest of the game.
A first small win operation pattern in which a first opening period (e.g., 3 seconds) is set after a small win game has started and then a second opening period is set after the first period (e.g., 2 seconds) has passed.
It is preferable to configure the system to be capable of executing a second small win operation pattern in which a first opening period (e.g., 3 seconds) is set after the elapse of a first opening period (e.g., 2 seconds), and then a second small win operation pattern in which a second opening period is not set.It is preferable to configure the system to execute the presentation display shown in Figure 358 (a) as the presentation display during the first opening period, whether a small win game based on the above-mentioned first small win operation pattern is executed or a small win game based on the second small win operation pattern is executed.

In other words, as a display effect during the first opening period, the content displayed in the display area HR45 should not notify the player that the second opening period will be set next, but should also include the case where the second opening period will not be set. In this case, when the remaining period of the first opening period is less than a predetermined period (e.g., less than 2 seconds), the content should be configured to notify the player that the second opening period will not be set.

In addition, in this modified performance, if the ball wins during the second opening period, the second small winning game (
The above shows the case where the first small win game (Straight V Challenge) is executed, that is, the case where the small win game content that can be executed for each opening period is fixed, but without being limited to this, when a ball wins during the second opening period, a small win in which a first small win game (Straight V Challenge) is executed, a small win in which a second small win game (Straight V Challenge) is executed, and a small win in which neither game is executed may be provided.

In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment and the modified presentation, the case where two opening periods, the first opening period and the second opening period, are set as the opening period set during the small win game has been described, but the number of opening periods set during the small win game may be set to three or more. Also, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment and the modified presentation,
We have explained the display effects that inform the player of the open period during which the small prize winning device 10650 is in an open state, but without being limited to this, the above-mentioned contents may also be used as display effects that inform the player of the closed period during which the small prize winning device 10650 is in a closed state.

In the above-mentioned 16th embodiment and the modified performance, the small winning device 10650
The period corresponding to the open state is set as the open period, and the open period notification corresponding to the set open period is executed, but it is sufficient that the player can predict the open period based on the notification mode of the executed open period notification, and for example, the open period may be set longer or shorter than the period during which the actual open state occurs. In addition, the timing of the execution of the open period notification may be the timing when the small win winning device 10650 becomes open, or the timing when the small win game starts. Also, it may be configured to be executed after a predetermined period has passed since the start of the small win game.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned 16th embodiment and the presentation variation example, a presentation based on an opening period set during a small win game has been described, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the above-mentioned guidance notification may be executed for an opening period set during a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special pattern drawing, or the above-mentioned guidance notification may be executed for an opening period set during a normal win game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a normal pattern drawing.

<Control Modification of the Fifteenth Embodiment>
Next, a control modification of the 15th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 359 to Fig. 363. In this control modification, the control contents of the 15th embodiment described above are different in that the contents of the control process executed at the time of power interruption and at the time of start-up are changed, but the rest are the same. The same contents are given the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned fifteenth embodiment, when a power outage occurs during a small win game and the control processing of the main control unit 110 cannot continue normally, the control contents of the power outage processing (see Figure 336) and the small win return processing 16 (see Figure 331) are varied depending on the status of the ball that has won the small win winning device 10650 (the game status of the small win game), thereby preventing game malfunctions, i.e., a situation in which a ball that has won the small win winning device 10650 during a small win game enters a specific area (V winning port) during a power outage.

In contrast, the present control variant differs in that it is configured to execute more detailed control as the above-mentioned control content. Specifically, it is configured to compare the state of the ball that entered the small winning winning device 10650 at the time of power outage (power cut) with the state of the ball at the time of power recovery (start-up), determine whether the result of the comparison is a normal state or an error state, and execute processing based on the determination result. This allows for more detailed processing to be executed.

In addition, in order to execute the control process described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this control modification example
When it is determined that the power supply from an external device has been cut off (power cut state) due to a power outage or the like, the power supply device 115 (see FIG. 8) is provided with an internal power supply (backup power supply) for temporarily enabling only some of the various control processes of the pachinko machine 10 to continue to be executed during the power cut state, and when it is determined that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the power cut process, the power cut control using the internal power supply can be executed. As the power cut control, the detection operation of various detection means that are provided in the small win winning device 10650 and can detect the passage of a ball, and the storage process that stores the detection results of the detection means can be executed as the power cut control.

In this way, by configuring the ball flow (passage) to be detectable even during power outage, it becomes possible to easily compare the situation at the time of power outage with the situation at the time of power restoration. In this control modification, the above-mentioned configuration is used to detect the movement (flow) of the ball during power outage, making it possible to distinguish the situation at the time of power restoration. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to be able to detect the situation of the ball in the small prize winning device 10650 after power restoration, and to distinguish the situation at the time of power restoration based on the detection result. In this case, even if the ball does not move between the time of power outage and the time of power restoration (the ball located at a predetermined position in the small prize winning device 10650 does not move between the time of power outage and the time of power restoration), it is necessary to distinguish the situation of the ball at the time of power restoration, so in addition to the detection means (e.g., a proximity sensor) for detecting the passage of the ball, a detection means (e.g., a weight detection means) for detecting the presence of the ball may be provided to make it possible to detect the weight of the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 359, the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in this control modification will be described. FIG. 359(a) is a display screen for showing an error state when the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during a small win game.
(b) is a display screen for showing the normal state when the power is turned on after the power is cut off during a small win game. Note that the detailed display control content for displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 359 is the same as the control for displaying the display screen shown in FIG. 16 described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Fig. 359(a), when it is determined that an error has occurred when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), a message "An error has occurred. Please call an attendant" is displayed in the main display area Dm of the power-on screen to indicate this, and a message "An error has occurred on recovery" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate the current situation. This makes it possible to inform the player that an error has occurred in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, as shown in Fig. 359(b), when it is determined that the power is turned on (when the power is restored) and the power is turned on, a message "The small win game will be resumed. Please be careful" is displayed in the main display area Dm of the power-on screen, and a message "Returning to normal" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, indicating the current situation. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the small win game that was interrupted midway will return to normal.

In the display example shown in Fig. 359, the display mode indicating the error recovery and the normal recovery is displayed on the power-on screen, but it is not limited to this and may be configured to be displayed after the display period of the power-on screen has elapsed. In addition, in order to set the display period to be long, even if the normal state is restored, a delay process for delaying the resumption timing of the small win game may be executed, and the small win game may be resumed after the player is made aware that the small win game will be restored.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the control modification of the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of this control modification will be described with reference to Figs. 360 and 361. In this control modification, the M of the main control device 110 is different from that of the fifteenth embodiment.
The difference is that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the PU 201 are different, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 360(a) shows the R
360(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of OM202. As shown in Fig. 360(a), this control modification is different from the fifteenth embodiment in that a power recovery situation selection table 202nn is provided, and the rest is the same. Detailed description of the same contents is omitted.

Here, the contents of the power recovery status selection table 202nn will be explained with reference to FIG. 360(b). FIG. 360(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the power recovery status selection table 202nn. This power recovery status selection table 202nn is a data table for comparing the ball status at the time of power failure with the ball status at the time of power recovery to select (discriminate) whether the current status (status at the time of power recovery) is in a normal state or an error state, and is referred to when the small win return process A (see S19051 in FIG. 363) described later is executed.

In this power recovery status selection table 202nn, a power interruption status storage area 203n, which will be described later,
The power failure status stored in the power failure status information storage unit n and the power failure control executed using the internal power supply are used to determine the RA
The power recovery status determined based on the information stored in the storage means (power outage storage area) of the other memory area of M203 is referenced.

By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to select whether the situation at the time of power restoration is normal or abnormal by combining various situations when a power outage occurs during a small win game and various situations at the time of power restoration, thereby enabling more accurate abnormality determination.

The contents of the power recovery status selection table 202nn will be specifically explained. First, when a power outage occurs, the above-mentioned game status setting process (FIG. 299) is performed as follows:
The set game status (ball status) is read from the game status storage area 203mi, and based on the read information, the game status is determined as follows: a state in which the ball has entered the small prize winning device 10650; a state in which the ball has not entered the rolling device 10675 (see FIG. 314);
The power failure status storage area 203nn stores the result of the determination into three states: an intrusion state that exists (or may exist) in 675 (see FIG. 314), and any other state.

During the power outage state, the power outage control is executed using the internal power source, and during the power outage, each detection means (detection sensor) provided in the small win winning device 10650 detects the passage of the ball, and the detection result is stored in the power outage memory area. Then, when the power is restored, the current situation (not entered, entered, V passed, out passed) is determined (discriminated) based on the information stored in the power outage memory area (detection result of each detection means) and the information stored in the power outage situation storage area 203nn.

If the power failure status is "not entered" and the power recovery status is "not entered" or "entered", "normal" is selected, and if the power recovery status is "V pass" or "out pass", "error (
If the power failure status is "entering", "normal" is selected regardless of the power recovery status. If the power failure status is "other" and the power recovery status is "not entering" or "entering", "error" is selected, and "V pass" or "
If the ball is "passed out," no status determination is performed.

Next, the electrical configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of this control modification will be described with reference to Fig. 361. Fig. 361 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of this control modification.
As shown in FIG. 61, this control modification is different from the fifteenth embodiment described above in that a power interruption status storage area 203nn is added, but otherwise is the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

The power failure status storage area 203nn is a memory area for storing the status (flow status) of the ball that has won the small win winning device 10650 in the event of a power failure during small win play, and stores the status at the time of power failure that is set in the power failure processing A (S19002) described below.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the control modification of the fifteenth embodiment>
Next, the control process contents of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 362 and Fig. 363. In this control modification, the difference from the above-mentioned 15th embodiment is that the contents of the process executed when the power is turned off (power off process) and the contents of the small win return process 16 (see Fig. 331) are changed, and the rest are the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the power-off process A (S19002) will be described with reference to Fig. 362. This power-off process A (S19002) is different from the power-off process (see S10002 in Fig. 336) executed in the 15th embodiment described above in that it executes a process for storing the state of the ball in the small win winning device 10650 when the power is off.

When the power-off process A (S19002) is executed, first, the above-described power-off process ( FIG. 3
The CPU 201 executes the same processing of S1801 to S1803 as in the first embodiment (see S10002 in No. 36), and then reads out the current small win game status from the game status storage area 203mi (S19011).
Then, it is determined whether the read small win game status is a "standby status" or a "storage waiting status" (S19012). If it is determined to be a "standby status" or a "storage waiting status" (S19012: Yes), the rotating body 10652 is stopped facing upward (a state in which balls cannot be stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652) (S19013), the power failure status is set to "not entered" and stored in the power failure status storage area 203nn (S19014).
.

In other words, the timing at which the power-off process A (S19002) is executed is during a small win game, when the ball has not won the small win winning device 10650, when the ball has won the small win winning device 10650 but has not yet reached the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652, or when the ball is stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652.
The operation of 2 is stopped, that is, the balls stored in the storage section 10652a of the rotating body 10652 are stopped from being discharged downstream of the small prize winning device 10650, and the situation at the time of power outage is set to a ``not entering'' state in which the balls cannot flow into the rolling device 10675.

Next, when the processing of S19014 is completed, or when it is determined in the processing of 19012 that the small win game status read out is not a "waiting status" or a "waiting for storage status" (S19012: No), the processing then proceeds to S19015.

In the process of S19015, it is determined whether the read small win game status is a "part passing status", that is, whether the ball has flowed into the rolling device 10675 (S19015), and if it is determined to be a "part passing status" (S19015: Yes), the power failure status is set to "entering" and stored in the power failure status storage area 203nn (S19016). Even if the power failure occurs, the ball passing is detected by each detection sensor in the small win winning device 10650,
The process includes a step of storing the passage detection result in the power-off storage area, and a step of setting the start of the internal power supply in order to execute the process (S19017), after which the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S19015, if it is determined that the "game object passing state" is not occurring, for example, if the ball is flowing down toward the straight V winning hole 11657, then (
S19015: No), the power interruption status is set to “Other”, and the power interruption status storage area 203
nn (S19018), and the process proceeds to S19017. Note that, in the process of S19018, if the power interruption status has already been stored in the power interruption status storage area 203nn in the process of S19014, the process is configured to end without setting a new power interruption status.

Also, in the process of S1801, the small win flag 203ea is not on (S1801:
No), that is, the current game is not a small win game. Or, if the V passage flag 203ec is on in the process of S1802 (S1802: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the ball has entered a specific area (V winning hole) during a small win game, there is no need to monitor the ball's passage during the power outage, so the process of S19017 is skipped and this process is terminated.

As explained above, in the power failure process A (S19002), the small win game situation, which was previously divided into four or more stages, is stored in three stages according to the situation that may occur during the power failure. This reduces the processing load and the power failure situation storage area 203.
This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information stored in the nn and still perform abnormality determination with high accuracy.

Next, the contents of the small win return process A (S19051) will be described with reference to FIG. 363. FIG. 363 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small win return process A (S19051). In this small win return process A (S19051), when a power failure occurs during a small win game, a process is executed to determine whether the situation at the time of power-on (return) is normal or not based on the ball situation at the time of power failure stored in the power failure situation storage area 203nn and the ball situation at the time of power-on (return).

When the small win return process A (S19051) is executed, first, the small win flag 20
It is determined whether 3ea is on, i.e., whether a small win is currently being played (S3001).
If it is determined that the small win flag 203ea is not set to ON (S3
001: No), the acceleration rotor 10675a is set to start rotating in order to perform a normal recovery operation (S3009), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3001, if it is determined that the small win flag 203ea is set to ON (S3001: Yes), the small win game status stored in the game status storage area 203mi is read (S19071). Here, in this control modification, even during a power outage, the power outage control is configured to be executable using the internal power source, and the power outage control is configured to detect and store the movement of the ball in the small win winning device 10650 during a power outage. In the process of S19071, the current small win game status reflecting the content updated by the power outage control is read.

Next, based on the information (current situation) read in the process of S19071 and the information (situation at the time of power failure) stored in the power failure situation storage area 203nn, the power recovery situation selection table 20
2nn to select (determine) whether there is an error state (whether there is a normal state) (S19072
), and sets a display command based on the selection result (S19073).

In the process of S19073, if a display command indicating an error state is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 359(a) is displayed, and if a display command indicating a normal state is set, the display screen shown in FIG. 359(b) is displayed. Then, it is determined whether the current recovery process is normal (S19074), and if it is normal (S19074: Yes),
s), the same S3 as the small win return process 16 (see FIG. 331) of the 15th embodiment described above
If it is determined in the process of S19074 that the device is not normal (S19074: No), the device performs the normal recovery operation (S3007 to S3009) and ends this process.
This process ends without executing the process of S3009.

In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of types of V winning games are executed in which a ball that has entered the small winning winning device 10650 during a small winning game is used to determine whether or not the ball will enter a V winning hole (specific area). However, the timing for notifying the player of the type of V winning game can be set appropriately. For example, the V winning game that can be executed this time can be set based on the start of the small winning game.
The type of winning game may be notified to the player in advance, or may not be notified to the player even if a V winning game is executed. Furthermore, when a V winning game is configured to be executable multiple times at different timings within one small winning game, a performance that only suggests to the player that there are multiple V winning games that can be executed may be executed at a predetermined timing (at the start of the small winning game, during the variation of the special symbol that won the small winning game, etc.).

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, various mechanisms (distribution means) are used to distribute the balls into multiple flow paths and to vary the proportion of balls entering specific areas, but it is of course possible to use a distribution means that is an appropriate combination of the various distribution means used in each embodiment for each embodiment, and the placement positions and number of distribution means used in one embodiment may be determined appropriately as long as it does not deviate from the technical ideas of the various inventions described in each of the above-mentioned embodiments.

Furthermore, the sorting means for sorting the balls in each of the above-mentioned embodiments sorts the balls that reach the sorting means into a plurality of paths, but any configuration capable of guiding the balls into different paths according to conditions may be used, and a guide means capable of guiding the balls into a predetermined path may be provided instead of the sorting means. In this case, for example, a configuration in which a ball is retained in a predetermined path and subsequent balls are guided into different flow paths due to the influence of the retained ball is also included.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the contents of the invention are explained using the term "flowing down" which indicates that the ball moves by its own weight, but the above-mentioned explanation using the term "flowing down" is only one example for carrying out the invention, and of course includes technical ideas such as moving the ball by attracting it to a movable magnet, or providing a movable means that can be moved with the ball placed on it, and moving the movable means to move the ball. In this case, it is sufficient to use words such as "moving the ball,""guiding the ball," and "passing the ball" as words that include all concepts.

In the above-mentioned embodiments, the small win game is configured to have an opening period, a round period, and an ending period, but it may be configured to set only the opening period and the round period without setting an ending period. Also, as the end condition of the small win game, when a predetermined number of balls (10 balls) enter the game or when the elapsed time from the start of the small win game reaches a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the round period end condition is established, and then, when it is determined that all the balls that entered the winning device (the winning device for small win 10650) that is variably controlled in the small win game are discharged, the small win game end condition is established. However, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to establish the round period end condition based on, for example, the ball entering the V winning hole. In this case, when a ball that has entered the V winning port is discharged from a winning device (small win winning device 10650) that is variably controlled during small win play, the condition for ending the small win play may be established regardless of the remaining status of other balls.

In other words, when the execution condition of the jackpot game is established during the small win game, the jackpot game may be configured to start based on the ball that established the execution condition of the jackpot game being processed normally. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the timing of the jackpot game being delayed depending on the flow-down state of the ball that was not involved in the establishment of the execution condition of the jackpot game, and to prevent the correlation between the small win game and the jackpot game from becoming weak.

In this case, for example, by configuring the ball that can enter the V winning port during the small win game to be discharged from the small win winning device 10650 at the end, it is possible to transition from the small win game to the big win game without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Also, by making the winning device variably controlled during the small win game and the winning device variably controlled during the big win game different, it is possible to make it difficult to interfere with the game content of the big win game even if the post-big win game is executed while the ball that entered the small win winning device 10650 during the small win game remains.

As explained above, in each of the above embodiments, in a special pattern lottery in which one lottery result is selected from a plurality of lottery results including at least a big win, a small win, and a miss, if a small win is won, a small win game is executed, and a variable ball entry means is provided which variably controls a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter (open state) and a state in which it is easy to enter (closed state) in a predetermined variable pattern during the small win game, and the big win game is executed based on a ball that has entered the variable ball entry means passing through (entering) a specific area (V entry port) provided within the variable ball entry means.

In this way, the relationship between each element in the configuration in which a small prize is won in a special pattern lottery and a big prize game is executed based on the small prize is defined below.

<Pattern 1>
When a small prize is won in the lottery of the special symbol, one small prize type is determined by the small prize type determination means from a plurality of small prize types stored in advance.
Information (jackpot type information) for indicating the type of jackpot game that can be executed later is associated with the determined type of small win. Then, in the pattern 1, a small win game is executed as a part of the jackpot game (first round), and when a ball enters a specific area (V winning hole) during the small win game, a jackpot game (second round or later) is executed based on the jackpot type information associated with the determined type of small win.

According to the configuration of the above-mentioned pattern 1, when a small win is won, the jackpot type information is determined, so that it is possible to set in advance the jackpot game type (the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game ends) that can be executed after the small win game according to the game state at the time of winning the small win. In this way, by making it possible to determine the jackpot type information for indicating the jackpot game that can be executed later at the time of winning the small win, it is possible to execute a performance that suggests to the player the jackpot game type corresponding to the jackpot game that can be executed using the long period from the timing when the special symbol that won the small win starts to change to the execution of the jackpot game, and the performance effect can be improved.

In addition, by making it possible to determine jackpot type information indicating a jackpot game that can be executed later at the time a small jackpot is won, if the ball does not pass through (enter) a specific area during a small jackpot game, it is possible to execute a presentation that announces the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game that would be executed when the ball passed through the specific area.

On the other hand, in the configuration of this pattern 1, since it is defined that the small win game is executed as a part of the big win game, even if the ball enters a specific area during the small win game, the big win game (the second round of the big win game) is executed after the play period (opening period, round period, ending period of the small win game) of the small win game (the first round of the big win game) ends.
In other words, if the ball lands in the specific area during a small win game, the player is given the right to play a big win game (the second round or later).

Therefore, if the game period of the small win game remains at the time when the ball enters the specific area during the small win game, the big win game (second round) cannot be executed immediately after the ball enters the specific area. Also, since the apparent big win game actually starts from the second round, the maximum number of rounds of the big win game is reduced by one.

According to the configuration of Pattern 1, if a player wins a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the player will have acquired jackpot rights through the special pattern lottery, which include all of the following: the right to win the jackpot (first right), the right to decide the contents of the jackpot (second right), and the right to play all jackpot games based on the jackpot contents (third right). If a player wins a small jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the player will have acquired a small jackpot right through the special pattern lottery, which includes the above-mentioned first and second rights, as well as the right to play only a portion (one round) of the jackpot game based on the jackpot contents (fourth right).

Next, when a small win is won in the lottery of the special symbol, one small win type is determined from a plurality of small win types stored in advance by a small win type determination means. Then, a small win game is executed, and when a ball enters a specific area (V winning hole) during the small win game, a big win game type corresponding to the V winning hole into which the ball entered is determined, and the execution condition for the big win game is established.

According to the configuration of Pattern 2, if a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the player will have acquired all of the jackpot rights, including the right to win the jackpot through the special pattern lottery (first right), the right to determine the contents of the jackpot (second right), and the right to play all jackpot games based on the contents of the jackpot (third right), and if a small jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, none of the jackpot rights are established, but if the ball enters a specific area (V winning hole) during the small jackpot game, all of the above-mentioned first to third rights are established.

According to the configuration of the above-mentioned pattern 2, when a small win is won, information about the big win is not determined, and when the ball enters a specific area (V winning hole) during the small win game, the big win type information is determined, so that the big win game type (the number of rounds during the big win game, the game state set after the big win game) that can be executed after the small win game according to the game state at the time of the small win can be set at the time of the V winning. By configuring in this way, for example, by providing multiple V winning holes and prescribing different big win game types for each V winning hole, it is possible to execute different big win games according to the V winning hole into which the ball enters. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in which V winning hole the ball will enter.

Next, when a small win is won in the lottery of the special symbol, one small win type is determined by the small win type determination means from a plurality of small win types stored in advance. Each small win type is associated with a part of information (large win type information) for indicating the type of a large win game that can be executed later (information indicating the game state at the time of winning the small win). Then, when a small win game is executed and a ball enters a specific area (V winning hole) during the small win game, the large win game type corresponding to the V winning hole into which the ball entered is determined, and the execution condition of the large win game is established based on a part of the large win type information corresponding to the small win type that was won and the large win game type corresponding to the V winning hole into which the ball entered. Pattern 3.

According to the configuration of pattern 3, if a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the player will have acquired all of the jackpot rights, including the right to win a jackpot through the special pattern lottery (first right), the right to decide the jackpot content (second right), and the right to play all jackpot games based on the jackpot content (third right), and if a small jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, information (jackpot type selection condition information) is set to specify the selection range of the jackpot type to be selected when a V wins, using the game state at the time of the small jackpot win, and if the ball enters a specific area (V winning hole) during a small jackpot game, jackpot game information corresponding to the jackpot type selection condition information set based on the small jackpot win is set, from the jackpot game information specified corresponding to the V winning hole where the ball entered.

In other words, according to the configuration of Pattern 3 above, the type of jackpot to be executed is determined based on both the first information set based on the special pattern lottery and the second information obtained when V is won, making it possible to set the type of jackpot game provided to the player in a more complex manner, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, among the above-mentioned patterns, in Pattern 2 and Pattern 3, the small win game is not executed as a part of the big win game. For example, when the execution condition of the big win game is established (when the ball enters the V winning hole), the small win game being executed is forcibly ended.
It becomes possible to execute a big win game.

The relationship between the small win game and the big win game used in each of the above embodiments may be configured so that any of the definitions of the above-mentioned patterns 1 to 3 is established.

The above-mentioned embodiments and control examples may be configured in whole or in part in combination. For example, the configuration of the passage detection sensor 228 of the right variable winning device 65 in the sixth embodiment may be applied to other embodiments. For example, by applying it to the first embodiment, the gauge number of the chance meter CM during execution of the standby state presentation can be linked more accurately to the number of game balls flowing down the top surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. More specifically, the passing number counter 223k in the sixth embodiment can be linked to the RA in the first embodiment.
M223, and the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment (see S4211, S4212, S4219, and S4220 in FIG. 87). Then, during execution of the standby state presentation, each time the value of the passing number counter 223k is updated, the state of the chance meter CM is updated so that the gauge number corresponds to the updated counter value.
This allows the state of the chance meter CM to be adapted to the actual state of the upper surface of the opening and closing door 65f1. For other embodiments, the configuration of the sixth embodiment can be diverted in a similar manner.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to Fig. 364 to Fig. 537, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. Fig. 364 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and Fig. 365 is a diagram showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.
FIG. 365 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 366 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (back) side, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Fig. 364. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Fig. 364, the top side will be referred to as the upper (top) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (bottom) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore,
The arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 365) indicate the up-down, left-right, and front-rear directions of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Fig. 364, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed in substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 364) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 365) having a number of nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc., is detachably attached from the back side to the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 367) that launches balls to the front area of the game board 13, a launching rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided.
(See Figure 364) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side.
The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close toward the front, with the side on which the lock is provided as the axis of opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are each unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top that protrudes to the front side, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward incline to the right when viewed from the front (see Fig. 364), and this incline guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Fig. 367). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, a button that is connected to the third symbol display device 8.
It is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the presentation displayed in 1 (see Figure 365) or changing the content of the Super Reach presentation.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-3 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs.
In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or reach performance is reached, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 lights up or flashes by lighting or flashing the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying the player that a big win is occurring or that the player is in a reach just before the big win.
64) An indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left portion, which incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination part 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the attachment space K1 (FIG. 36) on the front of the game board 13 is
5) can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10.
In the pachinko machine 10, in order to create a more brilliant appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area surrounding the illumination parts 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of ball lending unit 40, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., a so-called cash machine, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top on the left side thereof for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
On the right side of the ball 0, there is provided an operating handle 51 which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball while the touch sensor 51a is being pressed.
The handle 51 is fitted with a touch sensor 51a and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") that receives the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 365, the game board 13 is a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a number of nails for guiding balls (illustrated below the center frame 86, not shown in the upper half of the play area) and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, a general winning hole 63,
It is constructed by assembling the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 364).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the base plate 6
The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140 and the variable winning device 65 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 may be made of a wooden plate member. In this case, it is possible to conceal various structures disposed on the outside of the center frame 86 from the front side to the rear side of the base plate 60 so that they cannot be seen by the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 364) of the front frame 14.
The configuration will be described.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is installed in the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 364), so that a game area where games are played depending on the behavior of the ball is formed in front of the game board 13. The game area is an area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is formed in front of the game board 13 and partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 367) to the upper part of the game board 13.
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the outer rail 6 (FIG. 365), which prevents the ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again.
At the tip of the ball 2 (upper right part of FIG. 365), a rubber band 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball.
When a ball is shot with a force equal to or greater than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is attenuated.

In the lower left corner of the play area when viewed from the front (lower left corner of FIG. 365), there are a plurality of LEDs that are light emitting means.
The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are provided with a seven-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used to display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 367), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10.
In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated,
On the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning port 140, the first pattern display device 37B is configured to be activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors.
The ED is configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining these light emission colors, it is possible to indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot has been determined, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be judged here include a 15R variable jackpot, a 4R variable jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as the stopped symbol after the fluctuation ends, but also show a symbol according to the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won.

Here, a "15R variable probability jackpot" refers to a variable probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R variable probability jackpot" refers to a variable probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. Also, a "4R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4, and is in a time-saving state for a predetermined number of variations (for example, 100 variations).

Moreover, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot increases as an added value after the end of a jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability fluctuation), in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability fluctuation) includes a gaming state in which the probability of a jackpot increases for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), the probability of a hit of the second symbol described below increases, and it is easy for the ball to enter the second winning slot 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when there is no probability fluctuation, and the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is,
This refers to a state in which the probability of winning is lower than during the probability change.
During time reduction) is when the jackpot probability is in the normal state and the jackpot probability remains the same as the second
This refers to a game state in which only the probability of winning the symbol is increased, making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal game state in which the game is not in a special mode or a time-saving mode (a state in which neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of the second symbol is increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a high probability state for 100 fluctuation times. Note that if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a high probability state for 100 fluctuation times.
The time-saving state will be activated during the number of fluctuations.

During the probability of winning or the time limit, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the second winning slot 14
The time for which the electric role 140a (electric role) associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and is set to a longer time than during normal times. When the electric role 140a is in an open state (open state), the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 than when the electric role 140a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the probability change or time reduction, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability variation or time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning port 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times that the electric role 140a opens per win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability variation or time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the second winning port 140
At least one of the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning hole 140 is opened and the number of times when the electric role 140a is opened per one win may be changed. Also, during the probability variation or the time reduction, the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning hole 140 is opened and the number of times when the electric role 140a is opened per one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second pattern may be changed to be higher than during the normal period.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, into which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by winning the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 (initial winning), and displays the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B.
The display device 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 that is made up of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "display device") that performs a variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the through gate 67, and a second pattern display device (not shown) that is made up of an LED that performs a variable display of the second pattern using the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. Also, a center frame 86 is disposed so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened to a rear case that is fixed to the rear of the game board 13, and the center frame 86 is arranged to frame the window portion (central opening 60b) of the base plate 60. That is, when viewed from the front, the center frame 86 appears to be arranged to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 is
1 and the center frame 86 are disposed separately in the front-rear direction.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 367), so that, for example, three symbol rows, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. Each symbol row has a plurality of symbols (third
The third symbol is composed of three third symbols, and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is configured such that, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 367) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the first symbol display device 37
The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbols A and B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the variable display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of "○"), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric device 140a attached to the second winning hole 140.
is configured to be in an activated state (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability variable or time-saving mode than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability variable or time-saving mode, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal game state.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, and the player is given more chances to open the electric device 140a of the second winning port 140. Therefore, during the probability variation and the time reduction, the ball can be easily entered into the second winning port 140.

In addition, if the state is made such that the ball is likely to enter the second winning slot 140 during the probability variation or time reduction by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 140a for one win during the probability variation or time reduction, the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed is set shorter during the probability variation or time reduction than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 140a for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gates 67, a lottery for a second symbol is held. After the lottery for a second symbol is held, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a miss, a "×" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the through gate 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is also displayed by turning on the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). Four second symbol reserved lamps are provided, the maximum number of reserved balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, or by the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used.
The lighting of the symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).
The number of the first pattern display device 37A is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. The position where the through gate 67 is attached is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example.
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 37B, the second symbol reserved lamp does not need to be lit.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can win is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball wins into this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 367), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning hole 64 as viewed from the front. When a ball wins into this second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 367), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole.
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140; however, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

An electric device 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. This electric device 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state) so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device displays a "○" symbol as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 140a is in an open state (expanded state) so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140.
This makes it easier to get into the 40.

As mentioned above, during the special and time-limited modes, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal modes.
In addition, the time it takes for the second pattern to change is short, so the second pattern will change to "○".
The pattern becomes easier to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric role 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability variation and time reduction, the time that the electric role 140a is open becomes longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability variation and time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 than during normal times.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always in a state where it can win a jackpot.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot").
) It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by winning through the first winning slot 64, thereby gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, during the probability variation or time reduction, the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the second winning port 14
Since the electric device 140a associated with number 0 is likely to be in an open state and it is easy to win at the second winning port 140, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aim for the ball to win at the second winning port 140, resulting in a 15R guaranteed jackpot.

In addition, since the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "hitting from the right" and for the second winning hole 140 by "hitting from the left". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment does not require the player to change the way of shooting the ball between "hitting from the left" and "hitting from the right" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way of shooting the ball.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 365) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in its approximate center. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery held due to a winning entry into the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit up to show the jackpot stopping pattern, and the stopping pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, thereby indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which it is easier for the ball to win. As this special game state,
The specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning hole 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

An attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc. is provided in the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13, and the stamps, etc. affixed to the attachment space K1 can be viewed through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 364).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 is guided through the outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown).

A large number of nails are set into the game board 13 to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the ball falls, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on the game board 13 (not shown in Figure 365).

As shown in FIG. 366, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (
The control board unit 91 is equipped with a display control device 114.
A payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted on the device to form a unit.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 4 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

Furthermore, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and it is difficult to peel off the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board box 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover side will be cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and performing ball payout by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 367). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply 115. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 367). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the big win lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
It executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, and the like, as well as the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (
In addition, even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage, the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power supply is turned on (including the time of the power supply being turned on due to the power outage being resolved, the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power supply was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed in the start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, an NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus.
The payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern hold lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close to the front side around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate 65b (see Figure 365) as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric device are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and the R
Various processes are executed based on the AM cancellation signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives a payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is the same as the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process to be performed in the event of a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the control handle 51 is not being operated (i.e., the control handle 51 is not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the control handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the display control device 114, which controls the display of variable effects (variable display) and advance notice effects.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the other devices 2.
28 includes drive motors 648, 820, a solenoid 651, etc.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 can display a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
The display control device 11 controls the display of the third symbol variation effect in the game.
4 transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display command, thereby
1 can be coordinated with the audio output from the audio output device 226.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, and supplies a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, and
The power supply circuit 100 generates a 12-volt voltage, a 5-volt voltage, and a backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies the necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 366) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111.

368 and 369, a description will be given of a winning hole unit 930 and a ball sending unit 970 disposed on the base plate of the game board 13 in the first embodiment.
In addition, in the explanation of Figure 369, reference will be made to Figure 365 as appropriate.

FIG. 368 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 368, the base plate 60
In this embodiment, units other than the prize winning unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged therein (such as the center frame 86 (see Figure 365)) are omitted from the illustration.

As shown in Figure 368, a through hole 60a that penetrates the thickness direction of the base plate 60 is formed by router processing on the lower side (lower side in Figure 368) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see Figure 365) is attached in the direction of gravity.

The through hole 60a is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940, described later, when viewed from the front, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning port unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

On the base plate 60, a winning port unit 930 is disposed from the play area (front side), and a ball throwing unit 970 is disposed from the opposite side (rear side) of the play area, and each is fastened and fixed by tapping screws, etc. The detailed configurations of the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 will be described later.

Figure 369 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line VI-VI in Figure 365. Figure 369 shows the arrangement of the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 in an assembled state.

As shown in Figure 369, the connection of each passage of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 is in a state of abutment in the front-to-back direction (left-to-right direction in Figure 369), and the convex portion formed on the throwing unit 970 is inserted into the protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

More specifically, the first ball sending portion 942g and the inlet 982d are connected to each other by a second protrusion 982d formed in the inlet 982d on the inner side of a first recess 942g1 formed in the first ball sending portion 942g.
1 is disposed. The second ball throwing section 942c and the side wall section 981b are
A protrusion 981b formed on the side wall portion 981b is formed on the inside of the second recessed portion 942c1 formed on the side wall portion 981b.
This allows easy alignment of front unit 940 and throwing unit 970 when assembling them to base plate 60.

Next, referring to Figures 370 and 371, the overall configuration of the throwing unit 970 will be described.
Fig. 370(a) is a front view of the throwing unit 970, and Fig. 370(b) is a side view of the throwing unit 970. Fig. 371(a) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit 970, and Fig. 371(b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIG. 370 and FIG. 371, the ball throwing unit 970 is on the player side (the playing area side).
The ball bearing portion is formed by including a distribution unit 980 disposed on the side opposite the play area of the distribution unit 980 and having a space therein through which game balls can be inserted, and a passage unit 990 disposed on the side opposite the play area of the distribution unit 980.

The distribution unit 980 has an opening (inlet 982d and side wall 981b) connected to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 of the above-mentioned winning opening unit 930, and can receive game balls sent from the opening (inlet 982d and side wall 981b) to the opposite side of the game area via the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140. The distribution unit 980 will be described in detail later.

The passage unit 990 is disposed on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980. The passage unit 990 has a plurality of openings (first through hole 991a to second through hole 991d) on a surface facing the distribution unit 980, and can receive game balls sent inside the distribution unit 980 from the openings. A detailed explanation of the passage unit 990 will be given later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 372 to Fig. 375. Fig. 372(a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and Fig. 372(b) is a front view of the distribution unit 980.
37) is a side view of the sorting unit 980. FIG. 373 is an exploded perspective front view of the sorting unit 980, and FIG. 374 is an exploded perspective rear view of the sorting unit 980.
375(a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 taken along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 372(a), and FIG. 375(b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 taken along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 375(a).

As shown in FIGS. 372 to 375 , the distribution unit 980 includes a rear base 985 and
A front base 981 is disposed on the player side of the rear base 985, and the front base 98
A distribution unit 983 rotatably disposed between the rear base 98 and the rear base 98
5, and is mainly provided with a distribution section 983 and a cover member 987 disposed at a position corresponding to the distribution section 983.

The rear base 985 is formed from a colored translucent resin material (in this embodiment, blue).
A base portion 985a formed on a plate-like body, a plurality of openings (openings 985b to 985g) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction, a recess 985h recessed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings in the gravity direction, and a storage portion 986b protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h.
and a protruding portion 986e.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, and is formed with a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d that penetrate the outer edge in a circular shape, and an inclined surface 986a that inclines toward one side in the direction of gravity on the side opposite to the front base 981 side. The fastening holes 986c are holes into which screws that are inserted through the front base 981 described later are screwed. This allows the front base 981 and the rear base 985 to be fastened and fixed. The fastening holes 986d are holes into which screws that are inserted through the passage unit 990 described later are screwed. This allows the rear base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the passage unit 990 to be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping with a part of the other side of the openings 985b to 985f in the direction of gravity, which will be described later. The inclined surface 986a is also formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. This makes it possible to guide the flow direction of the game balls flowing down in the direction of gravity toward the openings 985b to 985f. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game balls to flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite the front base 981 (the front side of the paper in FIG. 372(b)), and is formed at approximately the center in the short direction of the base portion 985a (the left-right direction in FIG. 372(b)). The recess 985h is formed with a size capable of accommodating a part of the distribution portion 983 (described later) on the inside, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j that protrudes in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of a shaft member 988a that axially supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the short side direction, and the dimension of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
The openings 985b and 985c are formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward as it approaches the side opposite the front base 981. This allows the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side to roll to the side opposite the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at approximately the center of the base portion 985a in the short-side direction (left-right direction in FIG. 372(b)), and is set at approximately the same position as the openings 985b and 985c in the gravity direction (up-down direction in FIG. 372(b)).
Like 85c, the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is formed to be inclined downward toward the side opposite the front base 981. This allows the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side to roll toward the side opposite the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the opening 985b and the opening 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the opening 985c and the opening 985d.
The space is mainly formed with discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 opening to the opposite side, and intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 extending in the gravity direction and connecting the inlet passages 985e1, 985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3, 985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1, 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed to a size that allows game balls to pass through. This allows game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage to flow into the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 are formed by extending in the direction of gravity, and the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) is connected to the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1 and is formed to a size that allows the game balls to pass through. This allows the game balls passing through the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1 to flow into the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2.

Further, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed with recessed portions 985f4 recessed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the throwing direction of the game ball (the direction of gravity). The recessed portions 985f4 are cutouts for disposing a detection device SE3 described later on the inside thereof, and the detection device SE3 is formed in the rear view.
3. This allows the detection device SE3 to be inserted from the rear side of the base portion 985a (the side opposite to the front base 981).

The detection device SE3 is a device for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the game ball is formed through the detection device SE3 in the thickness direction. The detection hole SE1a is formed biased to one side or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE3 arranged in a horizontally elongated rectangular state when viewed from the back, and a detection board SE1b for controlling the detection device SE3 is arranged on the other side or one side of the longitudinal direction where the detection hole SE1a is not formed.

In this embodiment, when the detection device SE3 detects the passage of the game ball, five prize balls are paid out and a lottery for the first symbol is executed. In response to this lottery, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variable display of the third symbol.

In addition, the detection device SE3 has an axial direction of the detection hole SE1a, which is parallel to the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2.
and the inner space of the detection hole SE1a and the intermediate passage 985e2
, 985f2 are disposed at a position substantially coinciding with the space between the intermediate passage 9
When the ball flows down from the other side of the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of 85e2, 985f2 to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction), it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. This makes it possible to detect the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

In addition, since the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 is formed parallel to the direction of gravity, the weight of the game ball can be easily utilized when sending the game ball to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, the game ball can be prevented from getting caught in the connection between the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portions 985e4, 985f4 are connected to the inlet passages 985e1, 985f1 and the outlet passage 98
That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f are formed in communication with the spaces of the intermediate passages 985e3 and 985f3.
2 is formed by utilizing the detection device SE3.
As a result, the length dimension of the rear base 985 in the direction of gravity can be prevented from increasing.
It is possible to suppress the size from increasing in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are connected to one side of the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) and are formed to a size that allows the game balls to pass through.
The discharge passages 985e3, 985f3 are formed by connecting a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991b of the passage unit 990 (to be described later) when the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined.
This allows the game balls passing through the intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 to flow into the discharge passages 985e3, 985f3, and can also be sent to the passage unit 990 by passing through the space.

The opening 985g is formed on one side in the gravity direction of the opening 985d (the lower side in the gravity direction).
The opening 985g, like the opening 985d, is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined downward toward the side opposite the front base 981. This allows the game balls flowing in from the front base 981 side to roll toward the side opposite the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1, 985f1 are connected to a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 formed between a front base 981 and a rear base 985, which will be described later, and are formed to a size that allows game balls to pass through. This allows game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to flow into the inflow passages 985e1, 985f1.

The accommodation portion 986b is formed of a pair of semicircular rings. The accommodation portion 986b is a portion that accommodates a magnetic body 988b (described later) inside, and the inner diameter of the accommodation portion 986b is set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed into a cylindrical body.
The axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b is set to be larger than that of the magnetic body 988a. This allows the magnetic body 988b to be accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b. In addition, since the accommodation portion 986b is formed of a pair of semicircular rings,
Even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be slightly larger due to manufacturing errors, the magnetic body 988b can be disposed by elastically deforming the pair of semicircular rings.

The protruding portion 986e is cylindrically protruding from a position on the opposite side of the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a. The protruding portion 986e also has a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on its axis. The fastening hole is a hole into which the tip of a screw that passes through a cover member 987 (described later) is screwed, and the cover member 987 can be fastened and fixed to the rear base 985 by screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact with the rear base 985.

The magnetic body 988b is made of a magnet, and by being disposed in the housing portion 986b, it is possible to generate a magnetic field on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. This makes it possible to repel the magnetic body 988c disposed in the distribution portion 983 described later, making it easier to displace the distribution portion 983.

The front base 981 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. The front base 981 is formed in a generally rectangular shape larger than the rear base 985 when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with a base plate 981a and a bulging portion 982 that bulges out from the base plate 981a toward the player side (the side opposite the rear base 986).

The base plate 981a is formed as a plate member having a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981g penetrating in the plate thickness direction on the outer periphery thereof, a first guide wall 981f and a second guide wall 981d protruding toward the rear base 985 side, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 98
1d, and a through hole 981c that penetrates in the plate thickness direction on one side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 (the lower side in the gravity direction).

Insertion hole 981g is a hole through which a screw (not shown) that fastens assembled ball throwing unit 970 to base plate 60 (see Figure 368) is inserted, and is set to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip of the screw.

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape and has a bulging portion 982 (described later).
The first guide wall 981f is formed in a pair in the short side direction with the first guide wall 981f sandwiched therebetween. The first guide wall 981f is formed such that the semicircular open portion faces approximately the center of the base plate 981a in the short side direction.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the short side direction of the base plate 981a. The second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of a bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two locations.

The first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d have an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as the outer shape of the periphery of the fastening hole 986c of the rear base 985. As a result, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d are
The wall portion around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted into the inside of the guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981
f and the second guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed between the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981
The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the front base 981 and the rear base 985.
When the front base 986 is assembled, the fastening hole 986c is formed coaxially with the front base 986.
The front base 981 and the rear base 985 can be fastened together by inserting a screw from the side 81 and screwing it into the fastening hole 986d.

The through hole 981c is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of the game ball.
The through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected along its edge on the opposite side to the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 372(a)). The through hole 981c is a portion that communicates with the second winning hole 140 of the winning hole unit 930 described above, and when the winning hole unit 930 and the ball sending unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the second winning hole 140 communicates with the winning hole unit 930.
It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that flows into 40.

The side wall portion 981b is formed with a dimension such that the erected tip surface abuts against the second ball throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60. Moreover, the side wall portion 981b is formed such that the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is positioned closer to the one side in the direction of gravity than the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and is inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side (see FIG. 369).

Furthermore, the side wall portion 981b has a protrusion 981b1 protruding from the upright end surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position radially spaced apart from the rolling surface 981c1 in the gravity direction. As a result, the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a is in contact with the rolling surface 981c of the through hole 981c.
When a game ball is sent to the ball receiving portion 943, the game ball is less likely to be caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c.
A detailed explanation of the case where a game ball is sent to 81c1 will be given later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape bulging from the base plate 981a, and is set to a size that allows a game ball to pass inside, and is formed with a ball sending passage TR0 through which the game ball flowing in from the inlet 982d passes, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 branching off from the ball sending passage TR0. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with an inlet 982d formed by cutting out an upper end in the direction of gravity, an erected wall 982a that is bent toward the rear base 985 side and erected at a substantially middle position when viewed from the front, and recesses 982e to 982j that are recessed at multiple locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inlet 982d is formed by cutting out a generally U-shape when viewed from the front.
When the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are attached to the base plate 60, the inner edge portion is formed in a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that flows into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930.

The inlet 982d also has a second protrusion 982d1 at the edge on the other side in the direction of gravity (upper side in the direction of gravity) that protrudes toward the opposite side to the rear base 985. The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the inner edge shape of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are disposed on the base plate 60, the first recessed portion 942g
The second projection 982d1 abuts against the inner edge of the first projection 982d1.

The distance dimension L14 (see FIG. 372(a)) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inlet 982d on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) is set to be 1/2 mm from the inner edge of the first recess 942g1 to the first recess 942g2.
The distance L35 (see FIG. 450(b)) to the inner edge of the ball throwing section 942g on one side in the direction of gravity is set to be larger than the distance L35.
When a game ball sent to the first ball sending portion 942g flows into the inlet 982d, it is less likely to get caught between the inlet 982d (bulge 982) and the first ball sending portion 942g.

The erected wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view at a predetermined interval from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982. The erected wall 982a is formed on the lower side of the inlet 982d in the direction of gravity, and is provided with an abutment portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the erected direction on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

The vertical wall 982a is spaced from the inner edge of the outer periphery of the bulging portion 982 by a horizontal distance L16.
(See Figure 375 (b)) is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a first passage TR1 and a second passage TR2 are formed between them as spaces through which the game ball can pass.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed downstream of a distribution section 983 described later, and game balls passing through the distribution section 983 are sent to one of them. The distribution section 983 is set so that game balls flowing into the inlet 982d can be sent alternately to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. This makes it possible to prevent the sending of game balls flowing into the first winning port 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost.

A bearing portion 982c is formed on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) of the standing wall 982a, protruding in an annular shape from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 toward the rear base 985. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of a shaft member 988a that axially supports a distribution portion 983 (described later), and has an inner diameter set to be approximately the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.
By inserting it into the shaft member 988a, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

As described above, one end of the shaft member 988a is connected to the bearing portion 985 of the rear base 985.
j, so that when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into bearing portion 985j and the other end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into bearing portion 982c, thereby allowing the shaft member 988a to be supported between the front base 981 and the rear base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on a rotation trajectory of the allocating portion 983 described later, and the amount of rotational displacement of the allocating portion 983 is restricted by the contact of the action portion 983a of the allocating portion 983. The contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the allocating portion 983 will be described in detail later.

The recesses 982e and 982f are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.
Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 is formed as a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.

The first branch passage BK1 is connected to an opening 985b of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1, and is also able to allow the received game balls to flow into the opening 985b of the rear base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 is connected to an opening 985c of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the second passage TR2, and is also able to allow the received game balls to flow into the opening 985c of the rear base 985.

The recesses 982h and 982j are recessed from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) in the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.
The second passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recesses 982h and 982j.

The first passage TR1 is connected to an opening 985e of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first passage TR1 receives the game balls that have flowed into the inlet 982d and transports the game balls to the rear base 981.
The liquid can flow into the opening 985e of No. 5.

The second passage TR2 is connected to the opening 985f of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second passage TR2 receives the game balls that have flowed into the inlet 982d and transports the game balls to the rear base 981.
The liquid can flow into the opening 985f.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recess direction is set parallel to the extension direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.
A third branch passage BK3 is formed inside the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.
is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, so that the distribution unit 980
It is possible to reduce the size of the device.

The third branch passage BK3 is connected to an opening 985d of the rear base 985 when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage BK3 is formed to be able to receive game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is also able to allow the received game balls to flow into the opening 985d of the rear base 985.

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 (the lower side in the gravity direction) and extends inclined toward the rear base 985 side toward the one side in the gravity direction.
2b, when the front base 981 and the rear base 985 are combined, the opening 98
5b at a position facing the opening 985f.
The game balls flowing down the passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 are caused to abut against the inclined portion 982b, so that the game balls flowing down the passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 are guided to the openings 985b to 985c.
f side to facilitate flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1, 982j1 are connected to the recesses 982h and 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected end faces are inclined downward toward the rear base 985 side (the front side of the paper in FIG. 372(b)). This allows the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to come into contact with the erected end faces of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 and be guided toward the openings 985e and 985f, making it easier for the game balls to flow into the openings 985e and 985f.

In addition, the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b. This allows the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 to come into contact with the inclined portion 982b and be guided toward the rear base 985 side while colliding with the guide portions 982h1, 982j1, making it easier for the game balls to flow into the openings 985e and 985f.
Since the erection distance of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination of b, the rigidity of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 can be increased, thereby improving the durability.

As described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball sending unit 970) is visible to the player through the front unit 940 (winning hole unit 930) disposed on the player side.
The game balls flowing down the opening 985e and the opening 98
When the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are erected on the front side of the guide portion 982h1 and
There was a problem in that the thickness of 982j1 made it difficult for the player to see the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed to be connected to the inclined portion 982b, so that the erected dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced.
The game balls (game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) sent to the openings 985e and 985f can be easily seen even through the front unit 940. That is, in this embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be positioned closer to the rear base 985 as it moves in the direction in which the game ball flows down, thereby making it possible to ensure rigidity and guide the game ball while reducing the thickness of the guide portions 982h1, 982j1 in the front-rear direction, and therefore ensuring visibility of the game ball.

The distribution portion 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the opposing front base 981 and the rear base 985, and is formed in a generally T-shape when viewed from the front. The distribution portion 983 includes an action portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, an intermediate plate 983b protruding from a generally central position in the extension direction of the action portion 983a, a through hole 983c penetrating the connection portion between the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and a contact portion 983d bulging out in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c.
The wall portion 98 is formed by connecting the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the rear base 985 side.
3e.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985 is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.
In this way, when assembling the front base 981 and the rear base 985, the shaft member 988
By inserting a into the through hole 983c of the distribution section 983, the distribution section 983 is disposed between the opposing front base 981 and rear base 985 in a rotatable state.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed by extending radially outward from the through hole 983c, and when the displacement of the distribution part 983 is restricted by rotating in one direction or the other, the distance L17 (see FIG. 375(b)) from the tip of the intermediate plate 983b to the inside of the intermediate plate 983b is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the game ball.
The intermediate plate 983b is regulated to either one of R2.
3 is rotated about the through hole 983c, thereby switching from a state in which the throw of the game ball is restricted to one side of the first passage TR1 to a state in which the throw of the game ball is restricted to the other side of the second passage TR2.

The action portion 983a is formed to extend in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in a front view.
3b is set on one side in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity) than the connecting position with the abutment portion 983d of the abutment portion 983c of the abutment portion 983d ...b.
As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 through the inlet 982d is
As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and has a through hole 98
The wall portion 983e is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape when viewed in the axial direction of the through hole 983c.
The wall 983e is formed to protrude outward from the action portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the distribution unit 980, and the thickness dimension is set to be smaller than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the rear base 985 described above. Therefore, when the distribution portion 983 is disposed between the opposing rear base 985 and the front base 981, the wall 983e can be disposed inside the recess 985h. This allows the game balls sent from the inlet 982d to the inside of the distribution unit 980 to flow through the recess 985h.
By getting caught inside 85h, the flow of the game ball can be prevented from being obstructed.

The wall portion 983e includes a housing portion 983e1 on the rear side of the intermediate plate 983b, recessed toward the intermediate plate 983b at the radially outer end from the through hole 983c. The housing portion 983e1 is a portion that houses the magnetic body 988c formed in a cylindrical body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape with an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. The housing portion 983e1 is recessed from the rear base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is housed inside from the rear base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet and is disposed on the rear base 985.
As a result, the magnetic body 988c of the distribution unit 983 is subjected to a magnetic force from the magnetic body 988b arranged on the back base 985, and the distribution unit 983 can rotate about the through hole 983c as an axis, so that the extending direction of the action unit 983a can be tilted to one side or the other.

In addition, the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a state where they are repelled by each other, and the housing portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side.
In other words, since there is no need for a portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the housing portion 983e1, the structure of the sorting portion 983 can be simplified and the magnetic body 988c can be easily disposed in the sorting portion 983.

The magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball.
88b and the magnetic body 988c, the magnetic material 988c is magnetically attracted to the magnetic material 888b, and thus, the magnetic material 988c is prevented from stagnation inside the sorting unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is disposed in the recess 9
85h on the side opposite to the front base 981. The cover member 987 is formed with two recesses, a first recess 987a and a second recess 987b, which are recessed side by side in the direction of gravity and have a circular shape when viewed from the front.

The first recess 987a is a portion that accommodates the above-mentioned accommodation portion 986b of the rear base 985 inside, and is set to have an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the accommodation portion 986b. Therefore, when the magnetic body 988b is accommodated inside the accommodation portion 986b as described above, the accommodation portion 986b is inserted into the first recess 987a.
By storing the tip of 86b, the magnetic body 988b stored inside the storage portion 986b can be prevented from slipping out of the storage portion 986b.

The second recess 987b has a through hole 987b for fastening to the rear base 985 at its bottom surface.
The second recess 987b is formed so that the inner diameter of the recessed portion is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985.
The second recess 987b of the rear base 985 can be received in the protruding portion 986e of the rear base 985 to position and dispose the screw, and in the positioned state, the screw can be fastened to the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e via the through hole 987b1.

Next, referring to FIG. 376, the operation of the distribution section 983 when game balls flow into the distribution unit 980 from the inlet 982d will be described.
375(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the distribution unit 980 in the range XIIIa in Fig. 375(b). In the following, only the case where the action part 983a of the distribution part 983 is displaced from a state where the game ball is restricted from being thrown to one side of the first passage TR1 to a state where the game ball is restricted from being thrown to the other side of the second passage TR2 will be described, and the case where the game ball is restricted from being thrown to the other side of the second passage TR2 to being thrown to one side of the first passage TR1 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 376(a) and FIG. 376(b), before the game ball is sent to the distribution section 983 (before the game ball abuts against the action section 983a), as described above, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution section 983 repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 373), so that the through hole 9
The intermediate plate 983b radially outward from the front base 981 is inclined toward the second passage TR2. The action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side abuts against the abutment portion 982a1 of the front base 981, thereby restricting the amount of rotation (see FIG. 376(a)).

In this state, when the game ball is sent to the distribution portion 983, the game ball is sent between the intermediate plate 983b and the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above,
Since the connection position with the abutment portion 983d is set to one side in the direction of gravity (lower in the direction of gravity) than the connection position with the abutment portion 983d of the intermediate plate 983b, the load of the game ball can be applied to the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 376(b), the distribution portion 983 is rotated about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side of the through hole 983c is inclined toward the first passage TR1. Note that the amount of rotation is restricted by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side abutting against the abutment portion 982a1 of the front base 981. In this case, the magnetic body 9
The repulsion direction of the 88c passes through the through hole 983c through the intermediate plate 983b on the radially outer side in the second passage TR2.
The pressure is switched from a state acting toward the first passage TR1 side to a state acting toward the first passage TR2 side.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 uses the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c to
The through hole 983c can be rotated around the axis. In addition, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the rotating state of the distribution unit 983 can be maintained. Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can change the tilt direction of the intermediate plate 983b every time a game ball is sent, and send the game balls one by one to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to Figures 377 to 379.
Fig. 377(a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and Fig. 377(b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. Fig. 378 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and Fig. 379 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIG. 377 to FIG. 379, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings that open on the distribution unit 980 side, a second passage member 992 that is disposed in the first passage member 991 and sends game balls that pass through the first passage member 991, and a third passage member 993 that is disposed in the second passage member 992 and sends game balls that have passed through the second passage member 992.
and a detection device SE4 disposed between the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined width on the second passage member 992 side. The first passage member 991 also has a first insertion hole 991a formed therethrough on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) on the sorting unit 980 side, and the first insertion hole 991b is formed in the first passage member 991.
A second insertion hole 991b is formed penetrating one side (lower side) of the casing 991a in the gravity direction, a third insertion hole 991c and a fourth insertion hole 991d are formed penetrating adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b in the horizontal direction, and a plurality of through holes 991a are formed in a circular shape around the outer periphery in a front view.
91f.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of a game ball when viewed from the front. The first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the internal space is connected to the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d to be received by the first insertion hole 991a.

The first insertion hole 991a has an inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) that is in contact with the second passage member 9
92. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be made to roll toward the second passage member 992.

Furthermore, the first insertion hole 991a is formed with an annular projection 991g connected to an outer periphery, the projection 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw that passes through the second passage member 992 is screwed. This allows the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 to be fastened and fixed together.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
When the passage unit 990 is assembled, the opening 9
85g and the internal space. This allows the game ball that flows down inside the sorting unit 980 and passes through the opening 985g to be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

The second insertion hole 991b has an inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) that is in contact with the second passage member 9
92. This allows the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b to roll toward the second passage member 992.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
When the passage unit 990 is assembled, the opening 9
85e are formed at a position where the internal spaces of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are connected to each other. This allows the game balls that flow down the inside of the sorting unit 980 (the first passage TR1) and pass through the opening 985e to be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

The third insertion hole 991c also has recessed portions 991c1 recessed on both horizontal sides on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portions 991c1 are portions that accommodate the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and are formed to have approximately the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. This allows the detection substrate SE1b side of the detection device SE3 to be protected by the recessed portions 991c1, and also allows the detection device SE3 to be inserted into the sorting unit 980.
When the passage unit 80 and the passage unit 990 are combined, unauthorized manipulation from outside can be prevented.

Furthermore, when combining the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 can be positioned. This prevents a part of the detection device SE3 from protruding outward, and the ball throwing unit 970 can be made smaller overall.

The third through hole 991c has a protruding portion 991c2 protruding from the second through hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) is formed with a downward inclination in the direction away from the horizontally adjacent second through hole 991b. This allows the game ball that has flowed into the third through hole 991c to collide with the protruding portion 991c2 and to roll in the direction away from the second through hole 991b (the left direction in FIG. 377(a)).

The fourth through hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
When the passage unit 990 is assembled, the opening 9
85f are formed at a position where the internal spaces of the fourth insertion holes 991d and 991e are connected to each other. This allows the game balls that flow down the inside of the sorting unit 980 (the second passage TR2) and pass through the opening 985f to be received in the fourth insertion holes 991d.

The fourth insertion hole 991d also has recessed portions 991d1 recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portions 991d1 are portions that accommodate the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the sorting unit 980, and are formed to have approximately the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. This allows the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 to be protected by the recessed portions 991d1, and also allows the detection device SE3 to be inserted into the sorting unit 980.
When the passage unit 80 and the passage unit 990 are combined, unauthorized manipulation from outside can be prevented.

Furthermore, the fourth through hole 991d has a protruding portion 991d2 protruding from the second through hole 991b side on the inner edge on the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) is formed to be inclined downward in a direction away from the horizontally adjacent second through hole 991b. This allows the game ball that has flowed into the fourth through hole 991d to collide with the protruding portion 991d2 and to roll in a direction away from the second through hole 991b (to the right in FIG. 377(a)).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a generally T-shaped plate shape that is upside down when viewed from the front, and has a fifth insertion hole 992b penetrating to the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction).
A sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating one side (lower side) of the second plate 992b in the gravity direction and a fifth insertion hole 99
2b and a standing wall 992a standing on the inner peripheral edge of the first wall 992a.

The fifth through hole 992b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of a game ball. The fifth through hole 992b is formed at a position where the internal space of the first through hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is connected to the first through hole 991a of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined.
A game ball passing through the insertion hole 991a can be received in the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The erected wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b toward the third passage member 993. The erected wall 992a is formed such that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993. This allows the game ball sent to the fifth insertion hole 992b to roll toward the third passage member 993 (the right side in FIG. 377(b)).

The vertical wall 992a has an outer peripheral surface provided with an engagement portion 992d that projects in the horizontal direction and a first passage member 9
The engaging portion 99 is formed with a protruding wall 992e that protrudes horizontally from the end portion on the side of the engaging portion 99.
The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L-shape so as to protrude in the horizontal direction and have a tip bent toward the third passage member 993. The engaging portion 992d is provided with a detection device SE4 (to be described later) between the opposing side of the erected wall 992a.
The wiring of the detection device SE3 disposed in the distribution unit 980 is inserted. This allows the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 to be locked, so that the detection device SE
3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from slipping out of the sorting unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The protruding walls 992e are formed to protrude in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front on both sides of the standing wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and have a through hole 992e1 that penetrates the axis of the semicircle.
The through hole 992e1 is formed at a position facing the circular protrusion 991g of the fastening hole 9
91g1. As a result, the through hole 992e is positioned coaxially with the second passage member 992.
By inserting a screw through the fastening hole 991g1 and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed together.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of a game ball when viewed from the front. The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where its internal space communicates with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 when the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. This allows the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 to communicate with the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991.
A game ball passing through b can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, a guide wall 992c1 is formed around the sixth insertion hole 992c, and is erected toward the third passage member 993. The guide wall 992c1 is formed of a first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) of the sixth insertion hole 992c, and a second wall portion 992c3 connected to an end portion in the extension direction of the first wall portion 992c2 and extending in the gravity direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are wall surfaces that serve to position the detection device SE4, and the dimension between the opposing upright wall 993e formed in the third passage member 993 and the engagement portion 993d is set to be approximately the same as the dimension between the opposing detection device SE4.

In addition, the detection device SE4 is disposed at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a and is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

The second passage member 992 also has a circular projection 992f that protrudes toward the third passage member 993 at a position spaced apart horizontally (left-right direction in FIG. 377(a)) from the sixth insertion hole 992c.
The ring protrusion 992f has a circular fastening hole 992f1 on its axis.
Reference numeral 1 denotes a hole into which a screw inserted through the third passage member 993 is screwed, thereby enabling the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 to be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square shape with one side greater than the diameter of a game ball when viewed from the front. The first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the internal space is connected to the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. This allows the game ball that flows down inside the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d to be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

The first insertion hole 991a has an inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) that is in contact with the second passage member 9
92. Thereby, the game ball sent to the first insertion hole 991a can be made to roll toward the second passage member 992.

Furthermore, the first insertion hole 991a is formed with an annular projection 991g connected to an outer periphery, the projection 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 into which a screw that passes through the second passage member 992 is screwed. This allows the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 to be fastened and fixed together.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the width dimension in the short direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.
When the passage unit 990 is assembled, the opening 9
85g and the internal space. This allows the game ball that flows down inside the sorting unit 980 and passes through the opening 985g to be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

The second insertion hole 991b has an inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (the lower side in the gravity direction) that is in contact with the second passage member 9
92. This allows the game ball sent to the second insertion hole 991b to roll toward the second passage member 992.

The third passage member 993 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front.
A seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b is erected from an edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, a standing wall 993e is erected from an edge on the other side in the gravity direction toward the second passage member 992, an engagement portion 993d is protruding in the longitudinal direction, and
The recess 993c is formed on the second side surface of the housing 993.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape with one side longer than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position communicating with the internal space of the detection device SE4 disposed in the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. This allows the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 to be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide walls 993b are erected from the edges of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (the upper side in the gravity direction) toward the opposite side to the second passage member 992.
The inner surface on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in the direction of gravity) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 (
The seventh passage member 992 is formed with a downward inclination toward the opposite side to the second passage member 992.
The game ball sent to the insertion hole 993a can be made to roll in the direction opposite to the second passage member 992 (the right side in Figure 377 (b)).

As shown in Fig. 377(b), the third passage member 993 is disposed on one side in the direction of gravity (the lower side in Fig. 377(b)) of the erected wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, the third passage member 993 is open on the other side in the direction of gravity (the upper side in Fig. 377(b)).
The third passage member 993 can be disposed close to the erected wall 992a. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the distribution unit 980 can be disposed close to each other, and the outer dimensions of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the gravity direction can be reduced in size.

In a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the erected wall 993e and the first wall portion 992c2 of the second passage member 992 is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. This makes it possible to position the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction.

In addition, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is formed on the upstream side (the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is sent.
This makes it easier for a game ball passing through 92c to be inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, the detection hole SE1a is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball in order to prevent cheating by the player, so that the game ball cannot be inserted into the detection hole SE1a due to a slight positional deviation in the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In this embodiment, however, a first wall portion 992c for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the gravity direction is provided on the upstream side (the second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is sent.
Since the sixth insertion hole 992c and the detection hole SE1a are formed, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the height of the rolling surface from the sixth insertion hole 992c and the detection hole SE1a.
This makes it easier to insert the

The engagement portion 993d is formed to protrude in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 at its protruding tip that is bent toward the second passage member 992.
1, in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined,
The distance dimension between the passage member 992 and the second wall portion 992c3 is set to be approximately the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. This allows the detection device SE4 to be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 when the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are assembled, and is formed with an inner edge shape larger than the outer diameter of the annular protrusion 992f.
Thus, the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and a screw is inserted through the through hole 993c1 from the third passage member 993 side to fasten the fastening hole 993c1.
By screwing into 92f1, the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the ball throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the ball throwing unit 970 is formed from a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64
Since the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) is disposed on the rear side (opposite the playing area) of the front unit 940 which is equipped with the second winning port 140, by replacing the ball throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and disposing another unit, a different playing form can be achieved without affecting the flow of the game balls down the playing area.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 380 to 432. In the first embodiment, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the sorting unit 980 are formed as passages that guide the balls backward without allowing them to return forward, but the sorting unit 300 of the second embodiment is configured to allow the balls to return forward. Note that the same parts as those of the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, the details of the structure of the game board 13 will be described with reference to Figs. 380 to 398, and then,
The details of the configuration of the operation unit 500 will be described with reference to Figs. 399 to 432.

380 is a front exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 380, the center frame 86 disposed inside the game board 13
An internal opening is formed in the center frame 86, and a player can view the operating unit 500 through this internal opening.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the visual confirmation is not limited to the mode through the internal opening of the center frame 86,
The operating unit 500 can be seen through the base plate 60 positioned outside the center frame 86 .

Fig. 381 is a front view of the game board 13, Fig. 382 is a rear view of the game board 13, Fig. 383 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Fig. 384 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Fig. 381 also illustrates the windmill FS1 and the nail KG1, which are omitted from Fig. 365.

In this embodiment, as described later, an upper connecting member 270 is provided to substitute for the function of the nail, which is to distribute the flow path of the ball.
1 is not placed.

This makes it possible to avoid the non-transparent nature of the nail KG1 acting as a drawback.
In other words, by removing the nail KG1 from the upper position of the center frame 86 where the upper connecting member 270 is disposed (a position above the center frame 86 and below the outer rail 62), it is possible to prevent the light passing through the upper position of the center frame 86 from being reflected in various directions or blocked by the nail KG1, thereby improving the visibility of the light presentation at the upper position of the center frame 86. The mode of the light presentation at the upper position of the center frame 86 will be described later.

Figure 382 shows that the shape of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is formed into a shape that is recessed upward at the center position between the left and right, and also shows a sensor cover 254 that is used to hold the electrical wiring DH1 connected to the illumination board 251 placed in the recessed portion.

As shown in Figure 382, at a position below the center frame 86, a collecting gutter 480 which forms a path for balls that enter the general winning opening 63 to flow down, and a wide decorative member 490 which is arranged above the collecting gutter 480 and is shaped to straddle the rear side of the first winning opening 64 are fastened and fixed to the back side of the base plate 60.

The collecting gutter 480 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material. This prevents the collecting gutter 480 from blocking the light coming from the back side.
This improves the visibility of the ball that enters into the collecting gutter 480 and flows down the collecting gutter 480.

The wide decorative member 490 is formed from a colored and transparent (blue in this embodiment) resin material.
This allows the wide decorative member 490 to stand out to players viewing the game area from the front.

The wide decorative member 490 has insertion holes 491 for fastening screws at the left and right ends.
A fastening screw that is screwed into the collecting gutter 480 is inserted into the wide decorative member 490, and the fastening screw fastens and fixes the wide decorative member 490 to the collecting gutter 480. This makes it possible to connect attention to the wide decorative member 490 to attention to the ball flowing down the collecting gutter 480.

The wide decorative member 490 comprises a pair of left and right inclined forming portions 492 formed at the same inclination angle as the plate-shaped portion (ceiling plate portion 455) that rolls the balls above the general winning opening 63, behind the plate-shaped portion, and a central forming portion 493 extending in the left and right direction on the left and right inner sides of the inclined forming portions 492.

The inclined forming portion 492 is disposed so that the upper surface of the member, when viewed from the front, is aligned with the plate-like portion (ceiling plate portion 455) that rolls the balls above the general winning opening 63. Therefore, even if the plate-like portion that rolls the balls is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material, it is possible to make the balls appear as if they are rolling on the inclined forming portion 492 when viewed from the front, making it easier to grasp the flow path of the balls.

The central formation portion 493 is a flow path for the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 (the inclined extension portion 3 described later).
This makes it possible to prevent the balls from falling off the flow path, and even if the flow path of the ball that entered the first winning port 64 is made of a colorless transparent resin material, the flow path of the ball can be easily grasped from the front view due to the central forming portion 493 made of a colored transparent resin material.

In FIG. 383, the upper connecting member 270 and the winning hole component 4 are formed of a light-transmitting resin material and have a portion that protrudes into the play area above and below the center frame 86.
383 shows a resin member such as nail K.00. These resin members can provide the effect of stably maintaining the flow of the ball, but the details will be described later.
G1 and the wind turbine FS1 are omitted from the illustration.

To give an overview first, a common advantage of resin members such as the upper connecting member 270 and the winning hole component 400 is that they are easy to repair when cracked or chipped. This advantage is not achieved when using normally used metal nails.

In the case of nails that are set into the base plate 60, there is a possibility that the nails may bend or break if they are hit by a ball, if an operator accidentally overloads the nail, etc. If the nail is bent, it may be possible to return it to its original state by bending it in the opposite direction by the same amount, but if it is broken, it is difficult to return it to its original state.

First of all, nails are driven into the base plate 60 by an automatic machine, and generally, nails are driven into the entire game board all at once, rather than being driven in one by one.
Even if only one nail is broken, it is difficult to replace the broken nail when other nails are already installed, and it may become necessary to replace the entire base plate 60.

In this case, since the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc. are attached to the base plate 60, it is necessary to either reassemble these assembled members onto the replacement base plate 60 or to replace these members altogether, which can easily result in high repair costs.

In contrast, if a part of a resin member such as the upper connecting member 270 or the winning port component 400 is cracked or chipped, the repair can be completed by replacing it with a new member, and there is no need to replace the base plate 60. In addition, since the resin member is independent of the rails 61, 62 and the outer edge member 73, etc., no costs related to the rails 61, 62 and the outer edge member 73, etc., are incurred when replacing the resin member, so repair costs can be reduced.

In FIG. 384, the illumination board 251 and the board holding plate 252 arranged on the upper part of the center frame 86 are arranged so that the board holding plate 252 is inserted within the plate thickness dimension of the base plate 60. As for the illumination board 251 arranged in front of the board holding plate 252,
The figure shows that the ink jet head 10 is disposed so as to be fitted inside the thickness dimension of 0, but details will be described later.

384, the base plate 60 has a plurality of fitting portions 60c formed in a cylindrical shape with an outer portion tapered from the plate back surface toward the back surface side. The fitting portions 60c have female threads formed on the inner diameter side and function as portions into which fastening screws are screwed when fastening the operating unit 500 to the base plate 60.

Fig. 385 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and Fig. 386 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in Fig. 385 and Fig. 386, the game board 13 comprises a base plate 60, a central component unit 240 that is disposed inside the base plate 60 and has a center frame 86, an upper connecting member 270 that connects the upper portion of the central component unit 240 to the base plate 60 and limits the flow direction of balls flowing down the play area, and a connecting member 270 that connects the upper portion of the central component unit 240 to the base plate 60 and limits the flow direction of balls flowing down the play area.
and a thin plate member 290 disposed between the central structural unit 240.

The central component unit 240 will be described in detail later, but as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 385, the central component unit 240 is formed with a fixing portion 244 that is used to position and fix the thin plate member 290.

Fig. 387 is an exploded front perspective view of the central component unit 240, and Fig. 388 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central component unit 240. The central component unit 240 is a unit assembled into a ring shape when disposed in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, and has a center frame 86 to guide the balls flowing down.

The central structural unit 240 is an upper structural member 2 that constitutes the upper portion of the center frame 86.
41, and a lower component 261 constituting the lower part of the center frame 86. The upper component 241 and the lower component 261 each constitute the upper and lower halves of a ring shape from a light-transmitting resin material, thereby forming the center frame 86 that surrounds the third pattern display device in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 381).

In this way, by forming the center frame 86 into an annular shape by combining a plurality of components rather than forming the center frame 86 into an annular shape using a single component, it is possible to reduce the size of the resin mold required for molding the resin member, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the resin mold.

For example, in the case where the design of the base plate 60 is changed so that the shape of the upper edge of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is formed in a substantially arc shape rather than being formed in an upward recess corresponding to the shape of the thin plate portion 242 in the left-right central portion as in the present embodiment, the upper half (the upper component member 241
Since the center frame 86 can be assembled to the base plate 60 by making corresponding design changes only to the lower half (lower component 261), the components designed to correspond to this embodiment can be reused for the lower half (lower component 261).

This eliminates the need to manufacture a new large mold that encompasses the entire center frame 86 for minor changes such as design changes to the base plate 60 or changing the shape of the center frame 86 to change the appearance, thereby reducing mold costs.

The upper component 241 is comprised of a thin plate portion 242 that is disposed flush with the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 381 ), a band-like frame portion 245 that is extended in a band shape on the front side of the thin plate portion 242 and is formed with dimensions that prevent balls from passing between the thin plate portion 242 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 364 ) during play and is formed to be able to guide the balls flowing down, and the band-like frame portion 245
and decorative portions 247 arranged below and on the left and right inner sides and forming a substantially arc-shaped portion.

The thin plate portion 242 has an extension portion 243 that extends toward the rear side for reinforcement at the left, right and upper edges, and a fixing portion 244 that is used to position and fix the upper connecting member 270 (see Figures 385 and 386).

The extension portion 243 is designed so that its front-to-rear width is approximately the same as the plate thickness of the base plate 60. In other words, the front-to-rear thickness of the thin plate portion 242, which has a shorter front-to-rear width than the extension portion 243, is designed to be thinner than the plate thickness of the base plate 60. This makes it easier to ensure space on the back side of the thin plate portion 242.

The fixing portion 244 has, at symmetrical positions on the left and right sides, a recessed portion 244a which is recessed for positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see Figures 385 and 386), a protruding portion 244b which is positioned close to the recessed portion 244a and protrudes toward the front side, and a fastening portion 244c into which a fastening screw is screwed which is inserted into the upper connecting member 271 from the front side.

The thin plate portion 242 is disposed flush with the base plate 60, and the protruding portion 244b can be formed at any position on the front side. This improves the design freedom for positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see Figures 385 and 386). The assembly of the upper connecting member 270 using the fixing portion 244 will be described later.

The decorative portion 247 is formed with a plurality of three-dimensional patterns and figures, and is formed to have lower light transmittance than the thin plate portion 242. This allows the decorative portion 247 to be used as a portion that divides the field of view while retaining some light transmittance.

So far, the configuration of the front side of the upper component 241 has been mainly described. Next, the configuration disposed on the rear side of the upper component 241 will be described. The upper component 241 is made of a thin plate portion 24
An illumination board 251 is fastened to a fastening portion formed on the rear side of the illumination board 251.
The substrate holding plate 252 is fastened together with the thin plate portion 251 by a fastening screw.
42 and formed into a dish shape that widens toward the front side, and a sensor cover 254 fastened and fixed to a position on the rear side of the decorative portion 247 on one of the left and right sides (the right side in this embodiment) of the upper component 241.

The board holding plate 252 is not symmetrical, and the lower right portion is omitted compared to the left side portion. This makes it easier to connect the electric wiring DH1 (see FIG. 382) that is passed through from the sensor cover 254 side. That is, the connection terminal 251a of the illumination board 251 is disposed on the back surface of the board at the lower right side of the board, and the shape of the board holding plate 252 is designed to make it easier to connect the electric wiring DH1 to this position.

Furthermore, the substrate holding plate 252 has a recessed portion 252a formed in a curved upward convex shape at the center position on the left and right side. The recessed portion 252a is a portion formed for the purpose of improving the degree of freedom in arranging the operating unit 500, and will be described in detail later.

The sensor cover 254 has a capacitance sensor therein (e.g., a sensor for detecting when a player touches the glass unit 16
In this embodiment, the fixing member is used not only to fix the capacitance sensor but also as a relay part for the electric wiring DH1 connected to the illumination board 251.

That is, by fixing the electrical wiring DH1 to the hook-shaped portion formed on the illumination board 251 with a cable tie or the like, the electrical wiring DH1 can be held at the rear position of the decorative portion 247. This makes it possible to hide the electrical wiring DH1 so that it is less likely to be seen by the player. In this way, by using the sensor cover 254 to hold the position of the electrical wiring DH1, the number of assembly steps can be reduced compared to the case where a dedicated part is prepared to hold the position of the electrical wiring DH1,
The material costs can be reduced.

The lower component 261 comprises a thin plate portion 262 fastened to the front plate of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see Figure 381), a band-shaped extension portion 263 extending in a band-like shape from the thin plate portion 262 to the rear surface side, a rear surface covering portion 264 fastened to a fastening portion formed at the extended end of the band-shaped extension portion 263 and covering the rear surface side of the band-shaped extension portion 263 so as to block it, a pair of left and right front flow path components 265 fastened to the front side of the left and right lower end portions of the thin plate portion 262 and constituting a flow path for flowing the balls to the rear surface side between the thin plate portion 262 and the thin plate portion 262, and a pair of left and right rear flow path components 266 fastened to the rear side of the left and right lower end portions of the thin plate portion 262 and combining with half components protruding inwardly to the left and right from the thin plate portion 262 of the front flow path components 265 to constitute a flow path for guiding the balls to the upper surface of the band-shaped extension portion 263.

The strip-shaped extension 263 has an upper surface that slopes downward toward the left-right center, and functions to return the rolling ball to the front side of the base plate 60.
The ball is provided with a central rear inclined portion 263a that inclines downward toward the rear side so as to make it easier for the ball whose left-right speed has stabilized to flow toward the rear side, a pair of left and right front inclined portions 263b that are located slightly lower than the central rear inclined portion 263a on both the left and right sides of the central rear inclined portion 263a and incline downward toward the front side so as to make it easier for the ball whose left-right speed has stabilized to flow toward the front side, and a ball discharge hole 263c that is formed through the central rear inclined portion 263a so that the ball that has been guided toward the front side by the rear covering portion 264 after flowing down can be discharged to the front side of the base plate 60.

In relation to the band-shaped extension portion 263, the back covering portion 264 is basically the same as the band-shaped extension portion 263.
However, only behind the central rear inclined portion 263a, a gap is formed between the central rear inclined portion 263 and the band-shaped extension portion 263 to allow the balls to flow downward.
The ball passes through this gap and is guided to the front side and discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c.

The ball discharge hole 263c is located in the center of the left and right, and the first winning hole 64 is located below it (see FIG. 381). Therefore, the ball discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c has a high probability of hitting the nail KG
The ball enters the first winning hole 64 with a higher probability than a ball approaching the first winning hole 64 while being bounced off the hole 1.
Therefore, when a ball is guided to the band-shaped extension portion 263, attention to the ball can be improved.

The flow path front component 265 forms a guide path that guides the balls flowing down the front side of the thin plate portion 262 to the rear side, and the flow path rear component 266 forms the rear end face of the guide path, thereby guiding the balls to the upper surface of the band-shaped extension portion 263. In other words, the flow path front component 265 and the flow path rear component 266
This forms a tunnel-shaped portion that discharges the balls that have flowed in from the front side of the base plate 60 to the upper surface of the band-shaped extension portion 263.

Returning to Figures 385 and 386, the upper connecting member 270 is a member formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a thin plate-like portion 271, protruding portions 272 to 277 which protrude from the plate-like portion 271 as if being pushed out from the rear side to the front side, a thin portion 278 formed partially thin on the rear side of the plate-like portion 271, and a protruding portion 279 formed on the thin portion 278 so as to protrude toward the rear side.

The plate-shaped portion 271 is formed in a symmetrical arch shape that is long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the shape of the lower edge portion is shaped to match the shape of the upper edge portion of the center frame 86. The plate-shaped portion 271 also has a curved upper edge portion, and more specifically, a tangent at a specific point on the upper edge portion of the plate-shaped portion 271 is
The shape is such that it is parallel to the tangent of the corresponding point on the outer rail 62 located adjacent to that particular point.

The outer rail 62 and the plate-shaped portion 271 are spaced apart by a distance approximately equal to the diameter of a ball (game ball).
(See FIG. 381.) This makes it easier to prevent the ball rolling along the outer rail 62 from colliding with the plate-shaped portion 271 and losing momentum.

That is, the ball introduced into the play area is configured to leave the outer rail 62 before colliding with the plate-shaped portion 271. In other words, as long as the ball is in contact with the outer rail 62,
Since the ball will not collide with the plate-shaped portion 271, it is possible to prevent a ball launched with maximum launch strength (for example, a ball that rolls in contact with the outer rail 62 until it collides with the return rubber 69) from colliding with the plate-shaped portion 271 and losing momentum.

This makes it possible to avoid unnecessary attenuation of the ball, and also makes it possible to prevent the plate-shaped portion 271 from cracking or chipping due to a ball with maximum launch strength colliding with the plate-shaped portion 271.

The distance between the outer rail 62 and the plate-like portion 271 is not limited to the diameter of the ball, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the distance between the ball and the plate-like portion 271 may be set to be approximately the same as the diameter of the ball.
In order to avoid collision with the outer rail 62, the distance between the plate-like portion 271 and the outer rail 62 may be varied in the front-rear direction (the distance becomes wider as the plate-like portion 271 is farther from the base plate 60). In this case, the distance between the plate-like portion 271 and the outer rail 62 on the side closer to the base plate 60 can be narrowed, so that when decoration is applied to the plate-like portion 271, the area for forming the decoration can be increased.

The protrusions 272 to 277 are parts that protrude from the rear side of the plate-shaped portion 271 to the front side from positions that are symmetrical with respect to the left-right center of the plate-shaped portion 271, and have a left-right symmetrical shape with respect to the left-right center of the plate-shaped portion 271 as the reference, and each of them substitutes the function of a nail.

From the left-right center side, they will be referred to as a first overhang portion 272, a second overhang portion 273, a third overhang portion 274, a fourth overhang portion 275, a fifth overhang portion 276, and a sixth overhang portion 277.

The first protruding portion 272 and the second protruding portion 273 are disposed in front of the central component unit 240 via the thin plate member 290. The third protruding portion 274 is disposed between the central component unit 240 and the base plate 6
The fourth protruding portion 275, the fifth protruding portion 276, and the sixth protruding portion 27
7 is disposed on the front side of the base plate 60.

In this way, since each of the projections 272 to 277 is disposed on a different front side of the component, there may be differences in function and design concept, but details will be described later.

The thin portion 278 is a portion formed to be thin by shifting the rear surface of the plate toward the front side by the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290 or a dimension slightly exceeding the thickness dimension in order to position the thin plate member 290. In this embodiment, a mode is adopted in which the thin plate member 290 is held by the fixing portion 244 (see FIG. 385 ), rather than a mode in which the thin plate member 290 is held by applying a pressing force from the thin portion 278 to the thin plate member 290.

Note that the deviation dimension of the plate back surface toward the front side in the thin portion 278 is not limited to the case where it is formed to be equal to or greater than the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the deviation of the plate back surface toward the front side may be designed to be less than the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290. In this case, by forming the thin plate member 290 to be expandable (compressible) in the thickness direction, it is possible to easily fix the arrangement of the thin plate member 290 while avoiding application of excessive pressure to the thin plate member 290.

Also, for example, the deviation of the plate back surface of the thin portion 278 toward the front side may be reduced only in the portion corresponding to the edge of the thin plate member 290. In this case, the range in which pressure is applied to the thin plate member 290 can be limited to the edge of the thin plate member 290.

The protruding portion 279 is a portion that is inserted into a positioning hole 291 that is formed in the thin plate member 290, and is a protruding portion for positioning the thin plate member 290.
A recess (depression) corresponding to the shape of the protruding portion 272 or the second protruding portion 273 is formed on the rear side of the arrangement position of the protruding portion 272 or the second protruding portion 273, so the protruding portion 279 cannot be protruded from this position.
It protrudes from a position avoiding the location of the protruding portion 273 .

The thin plate member 290 is a member formed in a thin plate (sheet) shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and has a plurality of positioning holes 291 drilled therein for positioning during assembly, and a hole 292 for the upper connecting member 2.
and a plurality of insertion holes 292 drilled as holes for inserting fastening screws for fastening and fixing the mounting member 70 to the central structural unit 240.

The positioning holes 291 include holes 291a drilled on the left and right outer sides and through which the protruding portions 244b of the central component unit 240 are inserted, and holes 291b drilled on the left and right inner sides and through which the protruding portions 279 of the upper connecting member 270 are inserted. In other words, the thin plate member 290 is used for positioning both the central component unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270.

In this embodiment, the left and right outer sides refer to the left and right edge sides of the game board 13 or the operating unit 500 when viewed from the front, and the left and right inner sides refer to the left and right central sides of the game board 13 or the operating unit 500 when viewed from the front.

As shown in Figures 385 and 386, the protruding portion 244b is formed at a position opposite to the recessed portion on the rear side of the second overhanging portion 273. Therefore, in a front view, the protruding portion 244b
is hidden by the second protruding portion 273. This allows the protruding portion 244b to function as a positioning (positional stabilizing) element for the thin plate member 290 while reducing the visibility of the protruding portion 244b.

385 and 386, by forming the portion of the upper connecting member 270 as the protrusion 279 instead of a hole, it is possible to form a positioning portion without any problems even in a narrow range such as the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272 and 273. In other words, when forming a through hole or a recess in a narrow range, there is a possibility that the thickness of the member becomes excessively thin and the strength becomes insufficient, but this situation can be avoided.

In other words, it is possible to easily avoid restricting the arrangement of the overhanging portions 272, 273 and reducing the strength thereof due to the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290.
It becomes necessary for the width length of the boundary position of 273 to be greater than or equal to the width length of the hole (or greater than the diameter if the hole is circular), and there is a possibility that the strength of the protrusions 272, 273 will be reduced because material is removed by the hole, but according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily solve these problems.

On the other hand, as described above, since the rear surfaces of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 are recessed, it is not possible to form the protruding portion 279. However, this position can be accommodated by providing the protruding portion 244b protruding from the central structural unit 240 as shown in FIG.
The positioning portion of the thin plate member 290 (the protruding portion 244b
, 279) can be arranged.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, the protrusions 244b, 244c for positioning the thin plate member 290 are
By forming 79 in both the central structural unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270, it is possible to avoid restricting the arrangement of the positioning portions of the thin plate member 290 while maintaining a high degree of design freedom and strength of the upper connecting member 270, and therefore it is possible to stabilize the position of the thin plate member 290.

Furthermore, the protrusion 279 inserted into the thin plate member 290 is inserted into the recessed portion 24 of the central component unit 240.
4a, it is possible to position the thin plate member 290 relative to the central structural unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270, and at the same time, it is possible to position the upper connecting member 270 relative to the central structural unit 240.

The thin plate member 290 is a member that can be seen by the player through the upper connecting member 270 .
Although not shown in the figures, in this embodiment, a pattern, figure, letter or character is colorfully drawn on the front surface of the thin plate member 290, and the illumination board 251 of the central component unit 240
In accordance with differences in the emission patterns (differences in color and brightness) of the light emitted from the LEDs arranged in the thin plate member 290, the colors and brightness that are visually recognized through the thin plate member 290 change in various ways.

Unlike the case where patterns, figures, letters or characters are drawn directly on the base plate 60, according to this embodiment, the patterns, figures, letters or characters drawn on the thin plate member 290 can be removed from the game board 13 by removing the thin plate member 290, so that the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when changing the gameplay while keeping the same shape of the game board 13 (so-called
In some cases, the game board 13 may have different patterns, figures, letters or characters, or colors, etc., to make it easier for the player to understand the gameplay.

When patterns, figures, letters or characters are directly drawn on the base plate 60, it becomes necessary to replace the entire base plate 60, which essentially means that the entire game board 13 is likely to be replaced, and the cost of changing the gameplay is likely to increase.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 290 with another thin plate member 290 having a different pattern, figure, letter or character, color, etc., drawn thereon.
There is no need to replace the entire game machine 3. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing the game characteristics.

FIG. 389 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXVI of FIG.
FIG. 390 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. 389, and FIG. 391 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 389, while the protrusions 272 to 277 are each formed in an individual shape, they all have a common purpose of slowing down the momentum of a ball introduced into the play area upon collision and causing the ball to flow down to the left or right side of the center frame 86.

Conventionally, the protruding parts 272 to 277 have been used as substitutes for nails that have been planted in a similar arrangement.
That is, each of the protruding portions 2 is formed so as to surround the nails to be planted in the front view.
72 to 277 have been designed.

As seen in common with the first overhanging portion 272, the second overhanging portion 273, and the third overhanging portion 274, the upper side surface is formed wider than the other sides. This allows the ball to flow in the same direction along the slope of the upper side surface regardless of where the ball lands on the upper side surface. This makes it easier to make the ball flow down a similar flow path even if the adjustment of the launching force is slightly off, so that the stress of a player who wants the ball to flow down a similar path during play can be alleviated.

Because the third overhang 274 and the fourth overhang 275 are disposed next to each other, even a slight deviation in the ball launch force adjustment will change which side the ball will land on, but the inclination of the upper surfaces is significantly different. That is, the upper surface of the third overhang 274 is a gently sloping downward surface that slopes inwardly to the left and right, whereas the upper surface of the fourth overhang 275 is a steeply sloping downward surface that slopes inwardly to the left and right.

Therefore, the balls that reach the upper surface of the fourth overhanging portion 275 and flow down are caught by the center frame 86
When the ball collides with the ball, it bounces upwards and loses momentum. Therefore, the ball is likely to flow down toward the outlet 71 or toward the general winning port 63 without reaching the first winning port 64 on the downstream side of the game area.

On the other hand, a ball that reaches the upper side of the third protrusion 274 and flows down collides with the center frame 86 in the left-right direction, and the load in the rebound direction can also be used as downward momentum, making it easier for the ball to reach the first winning opening 64 downstream of the play area.

In other words, the shapes of the overhanging parts 272 to 276 are designed so that the manner in which the ball flows downstream of the play area changes depending on which of the overhanging parts 272 to 276 the ball reaches. This makes it possible for the player to actively adjust the force with which the ball is launched.

As shown in FIG. 390 and FIG. 391, a gap C of approximately the thickness of the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 is provided between the base plate 60 and the extension portion 243 of the central component unit 240.
They are designed to be spaced apart from L1 and CL2.

In other words, the design concept is not to position the central component unit 240 in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, but to leave a gap between the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 and the central component unit 240, and to simultaneously align the central component unit 240 with respect to the base plate 60 when fastening (connecting) the upper connecting member 270.

As shown in FIG. 390 and FIG. 391, the thin plate member 29 is attached to the back surface of the first protruding portion 272.
0 and central structural unit 240 are disposed on the rear surface of third protruding portion 274, while base plate 60 is disposed on the rear surface of third protruding portion 274. In this manner, the members disposed on the rear surfaces of protruding portions 272 to 277 are not all the same, and may be different.

390, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 is formed with a thin wall, for example, when a load is applied to the first overhang portion 272 causing bending deformation of the first overhang portion 272, the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240 can also bend and deform, and can absorb the load applied to the first overhang portion 272. This can reduce the possibility that the first overhang portion 272 will crack or chip.

Therefore, for example, even if the momentum of the ball is very large when the ball collides with the first protruding portion 272, the first protruding portion 272 does not bend or deform, and the thin plate portion 2
The flexural deformation of the first protruding portion 242 can sufficiently reduce the momentum of the ball.
This helps to calm the ball's downward flow after hitting 72.

The bending deformation of the thin plate portion 242 is easily caused by adopting a configuration in which the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60 are not fitted to each other, but rather the gaps CL1 and CL2 are provided between them.
By providing CL1 and CL2, the load applied to the first protruding portion 272 can be released by flexibly deforming the central structural unit 240.

A similar effect can be expected for the second protruding portion 273. Note that the load applied to the first protruding portion 272 may be a load due to the collision of game balls, a load applied by a staff member of the gaming machine store when clearing a ball jam in the gaming area, a load applied by a worker performing maintenance work, or the like.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 391, the base plate 60 is formed thick enough not to bend. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the third overhanging portion 274, it is not possible to expect the base plate 60 to bend and deform to release the load. However, the height position of the third overhanging portion 274 is
Since the third protruding portion 274 is located lower than the protruding portions 272 and 273, the force of the colliding ball is relatively small.
This can reduce the possibility of the material cracking or chipping.

Furthermore, taking into consideration that if the momentum of a ball that collides with the third protrusion 274 is excessively reduced at a point where the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small, the ball's downward flow may be stopped, this embodiment adopts a configuration in which the third protrusion 274 is positioned in front of the base plate 60.

Furthermore, since the deflection of the third protrusion 274 is suppressed and the state is stable, the guidance of the ball can be stabilized in a position close to the left and right side areas and lower area of the center frame 86, which are the play areas in which the nails are planted, and therefore it is possible to stabilize the correspondence between the ball's launch strength and the way the ball flows down.

In order to reliably prevent the third overhanging portion 274 from cracking or chipping, it is preferable to design the impact angle with the ball and the shape of the third overhanging portion 274 so that the load applied to the third overhanging portion 274 is small (so that the load can be easily released).
It is preferable to adopt a similar design concept for the sixth protrusion portion 277 as well.

The advantages of using the overhanging parts 272 to 277 as substitutes for the nails KG1 that are planted in the base plate 60 will now be described. In particular, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. That is, in the case of the overhanging parts 272 to 277 that are made of a light-transmitting resin material, there are fewer parts that are hidden from the player's view compared to the nails KG1 that are made of metal.

For example, even in a configuration in which the illuminated board 251 and the thin plate member 290 are arranged on the back side of the protrusions 272, 273 as in this embodiment (see Figure 390), the protrusions 272, 273 transmit light, making it possible for the player to easily see the light emitted from light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illuminated board 251 and the patterns, figures, letters or characters drawn on the thin plate member 290.

The illumination board 251 is provided with a central light emitting means 251b consisting of four LEDs arranged in the center of the lower part, a surrounding light emitting means 251c consisting of seven LEDs arranged to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the central light emitting means 251b, and a distant light emitting means 251d consisting of two LEDs arranged near each of the left and right ends. The arrangement in this embodiment is shown by hidden lines in Figure 389.
The direction of light irradiation is not necessarily uniform, and the objects to be illuminated are different for each device.

The central light emitting means 251b emits light in a forward direction (with the optical axis in the front-rear direction) and illuminates a symbol mark (shown in white in FIG. 389) in the center of the left and right of the decorative part 247 of the central component unit 240. In order to softly emit light from the entire symbol mark, the central light emitting means 251b is designed to have a large width angle of the irradiation direction based on the optical axis of the light emitted from the central light emitting means 251b.

The surrounding light emitting means 251c is arranged so that the light irradiation direction is forward (the optical axis is in the front-rear direction) and introduces light into parts having width in the front-rear direction, such as the belt-shaped frame part 245 and the edges of the overhanging parts 272 and 273. In order to prevent the light visually recognized by the player from becoming weak after passing through the part with a long width in the front-rear direction, the width angle of the irradiation direction based on the optical axis of the light irradiated from the surrounding light emitting means 251c is designed to be small in order to concentrate the energy of the light on the optical axis.

This allows the light path (band-shaped frame portion 245) to be changed by changing the brightness and color of the light.
For example, by making the light intensity difference between the left and right, it is possible to perform a lighting effect that implicitly suggests the direction in which the ball is launched.

For example, the surrounding light emitting means 25 disposed behind the lower edge 272a of the first protruding portion 272
The LEDs 1c are arranged to guide light from the lower edge 272a of the first overhang 272 to the left and right outer edges 272b. This makes it easier for a player to shoot a ball using the light of the first overhang 272 as a marker to make the ball reach the left and right outer edges 272b of the first overhang 272. The optical axis of the light passes through a position where the front-to-back width of the first overhang 272 is long,
This makes it easier for light to be totally reflected inside the glass.

In addition, since the internal shape of the first overhanging portion 272 is curved so that the rear portion protrudes inward, the light that travels to the inside of the first overhanging portion 272 is repeatedly reflected inside the first overhanging portion 272, making it easy to collect the light inside the first overhanging portion 272. This allows the first overhanging portion 272 to emit light brighter than the surrounding area when viewed from the front.

As shown in Fig. 390, the illumination board 251 is disposed on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 of the central component unit 240. In this embodiment, the illumination board 251 is disposed within the thickness dimension (within the front-rear dimension) of the thick portion of the base plate 60 (the thickness portion required to drive the nail KG1) on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 in the range where the ball is guided on the front side. That is, the front-rear position of the illumination board 251 is set closer to the front side than the front-rear position of the back side of the thick portion of the base plate 60.

This is an impossible board arrangement in the range where the nail KG1, which is a part for guiding the ball, is driven into the base plate 60. In other words, since the base plate 60 must be formed sufficiently thick in the range where the nail KG1 is driven in, it is not possible to ensure a space for arranging the illumination board 251 within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (on the front side from the front and rear positions of the back side surface of the thick part of the base plate 60).

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, a thin upper connecting member 270 is used instead of the nail KG1 as the part for guiding the ball, and the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is placed on the back side of the member 270, and the thin plate portion 242 of the central structural unit 240 is placed in place of the base plate 60, thereby ensuring space for placing the illumination board 251 on the back side of the area where the ball is guided.

This allows for greater freedom in designing the placement of the illumination board 251 compared to when the illumination board 251 must be placed on the back side of the base plate 60.
The arrangement of 1 can be moved forward.

By moving the illumination board 251 to the front, it is possible to easily move the rotation performance device 800 (see FIG. 380) of the operation unit 500 arranged on the back side of the game board 13 to the front.
c) and the light source disposed in the rotation performance device 800 is disposed on the front side, so that the light visible to the player can be brighter.

The far-field light emitting means 251d is arranged such that the light irradiation direction (optical axis direction) intersects with the front-rear direction (FIG. 3
89) and the projections 274 to 27
6, the belt-shaped frame portion 245, the outer rail 62, etc.

As a result, even in the configuration of this embodiment in which the base plate 60 is formed with a plate thickness to ensure strength and the protruding portions 274 to 276 are disposed on the front surface of the plate thickness, the far-field light emitting means 2
The light emitted from 51d can be used to sufficiently illuminate the projections 274 to 276.

In particular, in this embodiment, the illuminated substrate 251 is positioned closer to the front end than the rear end of the thickness of the base plate 60 (arranged within the thickness dimension), making it easier for the light emitted from the remote light-emitting means 251d in a direction intersecting the front-to-back direction to reach the fifth protrusion 276 located away to the left and right outside.

The shapes of the projections 274-276 that receive the light from the far-field light-emitting means 251d are designed to ensure a sufficient amount of light. That is, for example, in the third projection 274, the side surface 274a (the inner left and right and upper side surfaces) on the far-field light-emitting means 251d side is formed wide so as to receive the light from the far-field light-emitting means 251d over its surface.

In addition, on the opposite side (the left and right outer sides and the lower side) of the far-field light emitting means 251d, a corner 274b is formed at the joining position between the surfaces, and the cut formed in the protruding portion 274 is
This allows the light emission intensity to be ensured even at the corner 274b that is far from the far-field light emitting means 251d.

In addition, light is irradiated onto the sixth protrusion 277 not by light from the illumination board 251, but by light that passes through the thin plate portions 242 (the thin plate portions 242 on the outer left and right, not the center left and right) located on the inner left and right sides of the sixth protrusion 277 when viewed from the front, to the front side.

The light emission effect of the sixth protruding portion 277 is achieved by rotating a rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 described later.
This can also be achieved by light emitted from the rotating member 810, but the configuration for directing the light emitted from the rotating member 810 toward the front side and the settings of the intensity will be described later.

Returning to Fig. 383, the winning openings 63, 64, etc. disposed below the center frame 86 are formed of a winning opening component 40 made of a light-transmitting resin material.
It is formed as a part of 0.

Fig. 392 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and Fig. 393 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. Figs. 392 and 393 show the winning hole component 400 in an exploded state.

The winning port component 400 comprises a central component 410 fastened to the base plate 60 in the left-right center of the game board 13, a covering member 430 configured in a shape that covers the lower part of the central component 410 from the front side, a left component 450 disposed to the left of the central component 410 and fastened to the base plate 60, and a right component 470 disposed to the right of the central component 410 and fastened to the base plate 60. The right component 470 is formed in a shape that is roughly symmetrical to the left component 450.

The central component 410 includes a flat main body plate portion 411 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 while being in surface contact with the base plate 60, a horizontally long opening 412 that is formed as an opening that constitutes the specific winning port 65a, a pair of left and right distribution portions 413 that are formed by protruding upward on the left and right sides of the horizontally long opening 412 so as to be able to distribute the flow path of the balls, and a pair of left and right curved protruding portions 413 that are formed in a curved plate-like upper surface above the distribution portion 413 and are protruded toward the front side so as to be able to distribute the flow path of the balls.
4, and a pair of left and right outlets 415 drilled at positions spaced apart from the left and right ends of the horizontally elongated opening 412 to the outside and sized to allow the balls to be discharged.

The main body plate portion 411 has sheet installation recesses 411a recessed on both the left and right sides from the back side to thin the plate thickness. The sheet installation recesses 411a are recessed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the sheet member (thin plate member 380) for performance, and are formed with a recess depth approximately equal to the thickness of the sheet member.

The gap between the distribution portion 413 and the curved protrusion portion 414 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the balls. This allows the balls to flow down through the gap between the distribution portion 413 and the curved protrusion portion 414, thereby increasing the randomness of the flow of the balls and improving attention to the balls.

The distribution section 413 has a number of ridges 413a protruding from the left and right inner side (the second winning opening 140 side). The ridges 413a are shaped to slow down the flowing speed of the balls by contacting the balls, and the deceleration effect of the ridges 413a can reduce the impact force applied from the balls to the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. This can prevent damage to the opening/closing plate 65b.

A tangent line HL1 (see FIG. 394 ) of the curved surface passing through the lower end of the curved surface of the curved protrusion 414 is
It is designed to pass through the left and right inner sides of the distribution section 413 (the sides on the side of the first winning opening 64).
Therefore, it is likely that a ball that rolls along the curved surface of the curved protrusion 414 to the lower end will reach the left and right inner side surfaces of the distribution portion 413.

The covering member 430 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed in a thin plate shape.
31, a pair of left and right belt-shaped portions 432 extending from the left and right side ends of the main plate portion 431 toward the left and right inner portions toward the rear side in a belt-like shape, a pair of left and right vertical plate portions 433 connected to the left and right inner ends of the belt-shaped portions 432 and extending toward the rear side in a vertically long plate shape, a pair of left and right inclined plate portions 434 extending from the upper ends of the vertical plate portions 433 toward the rear side in a long plate shape that slopes upward as it approaches the left and right inner sides, and an upright portion 435 formed upright from the main plate portion 431 toward the rear side below the electric role object 140a so as to regulate the rotation angle of the electric role object 140a.

The belt-like portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the standing portion 435 are a covering member 430.
When the central component 410 is fastened to the central component 410, the tip of the central component 410
The belt-shaped portion 432 and the vertical plate portion 433 are formed to a length that allows them to abut against the main body plate portion 411.
The inclined plate portion 434 and the upright portion 435 change the flow path of the balls and distribute the flow path of the balls.

The belt-shaped portion 432 is arranged along the left and right outer sides and the bottom side of the outlet 415, and the balls that roll and flow down the belt-shaped portion 432 are guided to the outlet 415 and discharged from the playing area.

The inclined plate portion 434 is positioned closer to the specific winning port 65a than the outlet 415, but since the inclination direction of the upper surface slopes downward toward the outlet 415, the balls that roll down the inclined plate portion 434 are also guided to the outlet 415 and discharged from the play area.

The erected portion 435 is in an assembled state of the central component member 410 and the covering member 430 (see FIG. 380 ).
In the embodiment, the balls are arranged on the left and right inner sides of the distribution portion 413 of the central component member 410 with a gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the balls. This allows the balls to flow down between the distribution portion 413 and the standing portion 435.

The left component 450 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and is a plate-like part including a flat main body plate 451 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 while being in surface contact with the base plate 60, a protruding part 453 that is formed over a wide area on the left side of the main body plate 451 and protrudes toward the front side, and a left end part that is disposed between the protruding part 453 and the left end part with a gap large enough for a ball to pass through. The left component 450 is a plate-like part that is formed of a ceiling plate 455 that is formed in a shape that slopes downward toward the right side, and a general winning port 6 below the ceiling plate 455.
and a plurality of ball guiding portions 457, 459 formed in a shape capable of guiding a ball to ball guide 3.

The ceiling plate portion 455 is formed into a plate shape that is not divided in the middle so that only balls that pass through the gap between the overhang portion 453 and the ceiling plate portion 455 can flow down the ball guide portions 457, 459.

The rear side of the left component 450 and the rear side of the right component 470 are formed with sheet installation recesses 451b, 471b that are recessed to thin the plate thickness from the rear side. The sheet installation recesses 451b, 471b are recessed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the sheet member (not shown) for performance, and are formed with a recess depth approximately equal to the thickness of the sheet member. Note that an example of the decoration of this sheet member is substituted for the explanation of the thin plate member 380.

Figure 394 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in range XXXI of Figure 381. A ball that does not pass through the gap between the overhanging portion 453 and the ceiling plate portion 455 and rolls down on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 is not guided to the guide portions 457 and 459, but flows down so as to be guided toward the central component member 410. The flow path of the ball from the upstream side of the left component member 450 and the central component member 410 will be described.

As shown in Figure 394, multiple nails KG1 are implanted into a base plate 60 and are arranged along a straight line that slopes downward as it moves inward in the left-right direction, with gaps less than the diameter of a ball between them, thereby forming a path (main path FL1) for the ball to flow downward toward the center on the left and right. However, by leaving gaps in places that exceed the diameter of the ball, drop paths FL2, FL3 are formed for the ball to pass through the gaps and deviate from the main path.

The ceiling plate portion 455 is formed so that the ball can roll on the upper surface, but the rolling speed of the ball rolling on the ceiling plate portion 455 differs depending on the timing at which the ball falls downward from the main path FL1. In detail, when the path of the ball changes from the main path FL1 to the falling path FL2, the flow speed of the ball is switched from a state in which it faces mainly in the left-right direction to a state in which it faces mainly in the up-down direction.

Then, after reaching the ceiling panel portion 455, the speed is switched back to facing left and right, so the earlier the ball reaches the ceiling panel portion 455 (the further upstream in the flow path), the greater the ball's rolling speed (momentum) as it flows down the ceiling panel portion 455, making it easier for the ball to reach the inner left and right sides of the play area (the side of the specific winning opening 65a).

In addition, the left and right inner ends (lower ends) of the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 are adjacent to the curved protrusions 41
Since the ball is disposed above the upper end of the curved protrusion 414, it is easy to prevent the ball rolling over the ceiling plate 455 and passing too far to the left or right from being blocked by the left or right outer side surfaces of the curved protrusion 414.

The rolling speed of the ball when it flows down the ceiling plate portion 455 is increased, and the ball is rolled at the specific winning port 6 at the same speed.
When the ball reaches the opening/closing plate 65a, a large impact force is transmitted from the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b,
5b may be damaged, but in this embodiment, a protrusion portion 413a is provided in the path of the ball's flow up to the opening and closing plate 65b, slowing down the flow speed of the ball.

In addition, the protruding portions 413a are provided with vertical portions 435 on the left and right inner sides thereof, which prevents multiple balls from flowing down side by side. This prevents balls from getting stuck between the protruding portions 413a and the vertical portions 435 (a flow straightening effect), and prevents the balls from falling on the opening and closing plate 6.
Since it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the two plates land on the opening and closing plate 65b at the same time, it is possible to easily prevent damage to the opening and closing plate 65b (improved durability).

In this way, the flow speed of the ball is reduced and the flow path of the ball is restricted, which reduces the impact force generated when the ball collides with the opening/closing plate 65b, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a problem in which the opening/closing plate 65b is damaged.

In this embodiment, the protrusion portions 413a are arranged symmetrically with respect to the upright portions 435, so if balls flow down simultaneously in a pair of flow paths formed by a pair of left and right protrusion portions 413a and upright portions 435, it is possible that multiple balls will land on the opening and closing plate 65b at the same time.

Therefore, in the special game state, by hitting the ball to the left or right, the specific winning hole 65
This makes it easier to get multiple balls into the hole a at the same time. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the progress of the special game state becomes too slow.

The upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 is formed as a wide inclined surface on both sides.
5 can receive a plurality of balls at the same time, and can forcefully send the balls in an aligned state to the inside on the left and right sides (towards the specific winning port 65a).

The balls that are diverted to the left and right inner sides pass through the left and right inner sides (the sides on which the protrusions 413a are formed) of the distribution section 413 in order, and reach the open opening/closing plate 65b in order. In this way, according to this embodiment, the paths of the balls that reach the opening/closing plate 65b are consolidated into paths that pass through the left and right inner sides of the distribution section 413, so that it is possible to prevent the balls from colliding with each other upstream of the opening/closing plate 65b and straying from the specific winning opening 65a.

Furthermore, by designing the left and right ends of the specific winning opening 65a and the opening/closing plate 65b to be positioned on the left and right outside of the position where the balls flow down while abutting against the protrusions 413a of the distribution section 413 and reach the opening/closing plate 65b, even if the balls collide with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b and bounce left and right, the balls can still maintain a state of being on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the balls spill from the opening/closing plate 65b.

Furthermore, even if multiple balls are densely packed together at the left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b, in this embodiment, a space is formed below the inclined plate section 434, allowing the balls to flow to the outside left and right of the opening and closing plate 65b, thereby preventing the path of the balls passing through the inside left and right of the distribution section 413 from becoming clogged.

In this embodiment, a gap larger than the diameter of the ball is provided between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protruding portion 414, so that the ball is allowed to flow down through this gap. For example, when a ball rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 collides with a ball flowing down through the inner drop path FL3, the ball is dropped from the ceiling plate portion 455.
The ball rolling on the curved protrusion 414 is easily caught in the gap between the ceiling plate 455 and the curved protrusion 414 because its speed in the left-right direction is reduced.

The frequency with which a ball flowing down the main path FL1 flows down the outer drop path FL2, and the frequency with which a ball flowing down the inner drop path F
The frequency of flowing down at L3 may vary depending on the condition of the nail KG1 (adherence of dirt, production lot).
Therefore, without any measures, the gaming efficiency and gaming profits will depend on the state of the nail KG1, and it will not be possible to provide a game under equal conditions.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if balls roll along the ceiling plate portion 455 via the outer drop-out path FL2 more frequently than balls flowing down the inner drop-out path FL3, fewer balls will reach the first winning port 64, which is disadvantageous in a game state (normal state, time-saving state, high probability state, etc.) in which a jackpot is sought by lottery. However, in a jackpot game state in which the specific winning port 65a opens and closes, the possibility of balls getting into the gap between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protrusion portion 414 can be reduced, and most balls that reach the ceiling plate portion 455 can be guided to the specific winning port 65a, thereby improving game efficiency (for example, the time required for a jackpot game can be shortened).

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the inner drop path FL3 passes through the outer drop path FL2 and reaches the ceiling panel part 4.
If this occurs more frequently than the balls rolling around No. 55, more balls will reach the first winning slot 64, so the game state (normal state, time-saving state, high probability state, etc.) in which a lottery is entered and a jackpot is aimed for is entered.
However, in the big win game state where the specific winning hole 65a is opened and closed, the ceiling plate portion 45
Balls that flow downward from the inner drop path FL3 collide with the path of the balls rolling down the ball slot 5, and frequently fall into the gap between the ceiling plate 455 and the curved protruding portion 414, or pass through the gap between the distribution portion 413 and the curved protruding portion 414 and flow toward the outlet 415. This causes an increase in the number of balls that deviate from the specific winning hole 65a, resulting in a decrease in the efficiency of the big win game.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the magnitude relationship between the occurrence frequency of balls rolling along the outer drop path FL2 and the occurrence frequency of balls flowing down the inner drop path FL3 is switched,
The game state is designed to alternate between advantageous and disadvantageous states, and not to give the player an exclusive advantage or disadvantage.

In other words, while allowing the state of the nail KG1 to vary, it is possible to provide a game under equal conditions by maintaining a relationship in which, whatever the state of the nail KG1, it is advantageous to the player in some states and disadvantageous to the player in other states.

This section describes the path that the ball takes as it flows down the outer drop path FL2 between the extension plate portion 455a, which extends upward at the left end of the ceiling plate portion 455, and the side wall portion 453a, which is curved downward and outward on the left and right inner sides of the protrusion portion 453, which is arranged opposite the extension plate portion 455a.

The rate at which the balls are guided to this flow path varies depending on the state of the adjacent nails KG2 (the distance between the nails at the positions where the balls flow down). The state of the nails KG2 may change due to collision with a ball, touch by a staff member of the gaming machine store, etc.

Moreover, the percentage of the ball reaching just before the nail KG2 varies depending on whether the ball rolls on the upper surface of the side wall portion 453. Whether the ball reaches the upper surface of the side wall portion 453 varies depending on the state of the windmill FS1 arranged above the side wall portion 453. Since the rotation axis of the windmill FS1 is also driven into the base plate 60 like the nail KG2, the state may change due to a ball hitting it, touching it by a staff member of the game machine store, etc.

Since the first ball guide section 457 is disposed directly below the flow path between the extension plate section 455a and the side wall section 453a, the ball that flows down is usually discharged from the game area through the first ball guide section 457. The first ball guide section 457 constitutes the general winning opening 63, and when the ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457, the prize ball is paid out to the player.

In this embodiment, when a ball flows straight down between the extension plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a, the ball has an 80% probability of entering the first ball guiding portion 457, a 10% probability of deviating to the left, and a 10% probability of deviating to the right. Note that these ratios can be designed to be different depending on the shapes (slope, spacing, etc.) of the extension plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a and the arrangement of the first ball guiding portion 457.

In contrast, for example, if a next ball arrives at first ball guide section 457 while a ball that has arrived there is still remaining in first ball guide section 457, the next ball will tend to deviate to the left or right of first ball guide section 457 and flow down. Also, for example, if multiple balls flow toward first ball guide section 457 in a gathered state, some of the multiple balls will tend to deviate to the left or right of first ball guide section 457 and flow down.

If the ball deviates from the first ball guide portion 457 to the outside to the left or right, there is no winning port downstream, and the ball is discharged from the outlet 415. On the other hand, if the ball deviates from the first ball guide portion 457 to the inside to the left or right, the ball can reach the second ball guide portion 459 by rolling along the inclined guide portion 458 that protrudes to the inside to the left or right from the first ball guide portion 457. The second ball guide portion 459 constitutes the general winning port 63, and when the ball is guided to the second ball guide portion 459, a prize ball is paid out to the player.

The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is guided to the first ball guiding section 457 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is guided to the second ball guiding section 459 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, they are set so that a greater number of prize balls are paid out when the ball is guided downstream.

In other words, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is guided to the second ball guiding section 459 is set to be greater than the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is guided to the first ball guiding section 457.

This creates the kind of gameplay that the player desires, in that if a ball flows down to the left of the left end of the ceiling slope portion 455, the ball will not enter the first ball guide portion 457 but will instead deviate to the right (towards the second ball guide portion 459), thereby increasing attention to the left component member 450.

For example, in the case where one prize ball is paid out when a ball is guided to the first ball guide section 457, if the ball heading toward the first guide section 457 deviates to the outside to the left or right (to the left in FIG. 394), the number of balls held by the player decreases, and when the ball is guided to the first guide section 457, the number of balls remains the same (
One prize ball for each shot), if it deviates to the left or right inner side (the right side of Figure 394), the second ball guide part 459
The ball is guided to the hole and prize balls (more than one, typically 2 to 15) are paid out, creating a gameplay that has the potential to increase the number of balls in hand.

This makes it possible to easily associate the flow of the balls near the first guide section 457 with the amount of profit the player can obtain, thereby improving attention to the flow of the balls near the first guide section 457.

The inclined guide portion 458 extending to the right of the first guide portion 457 is made of a resin material, and therefore easily breaks when bent. Therefore, unlike the nail KG1, it is easy to grasp the change in state. If the broken state can be grasped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped until the part is replaced, thereby preventing the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

In this embodiment, various shape modifications are made to increase the probability that the ball that rolls in the inclined guide portion 458 will be guided to the second ball guide portion 459. First, a bulge portion 456 that bulges out toward the lower surface side of the ceiling plate portion 455 is formed at the upper left position of the second ball guide portion 459.

When the ball starts to roll on the top surface of the inclined guide portion 458 and has not yet fully stopped bouncing up and down, it comes into contact with the bulge portion 456 in the left-right direction, and the ball's direction of speed is redirected downward. This makes it possible to prevent the ball, which has rolled on the top surface of the inclined guide portion 458, from deviating to the right side of the second ball guide portion 459 due to its momentum.

Secondly, the inclined guide portion 458 extends toward the second ball guide portion 459 to a position where the left-right distance between it and the second ball guide portion 459 is shorter than the radius of the ball and the up-down distance between it and the second ball guide portion 459 is shorter than the diameter of the ball (it is formed with a dimensional relationship that does not allow the ball to pass between the inclined guide portion 458 and the second ball guide portion 459), so that the inclined guide portion 458 makes it easier to prevent the ball from deviating to the left side of the second ball guide portion 459.

The winning port component 400 is a resin molded component, and is attached to the base plate 60 by fastening screws, so that replacement in the event of a defect is easier than replacing (re-driving) the nail KG1.

For example, if the nail KG1 breaks, there is a high possibility that the operation of the gaming machine will be suspended for a long period of time. Since the nails KG1 are usually not driven in one by one, but a large number of nails KG1 are driven in by an automatic machine, it is not easy to re-drive the nails KG1 just because some of the nails KG1 have broken.

Therefore, in order to repair the machine, it is often necessary to replace the entire game board, but if it is determined that the cost of replacement cannot be covered, the machine may be put away in storage without being put back into operation, even though there is no other broken part other than the nail KG1. In other words, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintainability and extending the operating period of the game machine.

In this embodiment, in order to minimize the occurrence of defects in the nail KG1, the ball falling in the vertical direction is received by the overhanging portion 453 of the left component member 450, and the received ball is made to roll left and right on the upper surface of the overhanging portion 453 to reduce the momentum in the vertical direction, and then the ball is made to abut against the nail KG1 downstream. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied from the ball to the nail KG1, and to suppress the occurrence of defects in the nail KG1.

In addition, when attention is paid to the nails KG1 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the outer drop path FL2, the left and right outer sides are covered by the overhanging parts 453, so the balls do not collide with these nails KG1 from the left and right outer sides. Therefore, compared to the case where the nails KG1 are subjected to loads from random directions,
This allows for a longer period of time until G1 breaks.

The balls that flow down the front side of the left component 450 pass through the outlet 415 and are discharged to the rear side of the base plate 60. At this time, the balls are pushed toward the left and right inner sides (the sides close to the opening and closing plate 65b) by the vertical plate portion 433.
Since the passage of the ball to the outlet 415 is restricted, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing toward the opening and closing plate 65b without passing through the outlet 415.

Therefore, since the pivot axis of the opening/closing plate 65b can prevent balls from flowing in from the left component member 450 side, there is no need to always leave a gap between the opening/closing plate 65b and the inner rail 61 so that balls can pass through as a countermeasure against ball clogging, and the vertical distance between the inner rail 61 and the pivot axis (lower edge) of the opening/closing plate 65b can be set to less than the diameter of the ball.

Even with this configuration, if a ball on the opening/closing plate 65b falls to the left or right, it can be temporarily placed between the vertical plate portion 433 and the opening/closing plate 65b, and when the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the opening/closing plate 65b that was blocking the ball's flow path moves away from the ball's flow path, so that the temporarily placed ball flows down toward the outlet 71. This reduces the possibility of ball clogging.

Fig. 395 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along the line XXXII-XXXII in Fig. 394. The main body plate 451 of the left component 450 has a thin plate-like extension 451a (thinner than the thickness of the main body plate 451) extending from the left and right inner edge portions along the front surface of the base plate 60, and the main body plate 411 of the central component 410 has a covering extension 411b extending from the left and right outer edge portions along the front side surface.

In this embodiment, the extension portion 451a is sandwiched between the covering extension portion 411b and the base plate 60. This allows the fastening screws for fixing to be removed from the left and right inner ends of the left component member 450, which is the side to be sandwiched, and therefore makes it easier to avoid the problem of the fastening screws being conspicuous when decorating the left component member 450, thereby reducing the presentation effect. In addition, the number of fastening screws for fastening and fixing the members can be reduced, which reduces the assembly man-hours and material costs.

The covering extension portion 411b in a state where the extension portion 451a is sandwiched between the base plate 60
The front and rear positions of the front end of the covering extension portion 411b are located rearward of the front end of the main body plate portion 451. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a ball flowing down the front side of the main body plate portion 451 collides with the front end of the covering extension portion 411b and bounces off to the outside to the left or right when the ball flows toward the front side of the main body plate portion 411.

Fig. 396 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting unit 300, and Fig. 397 is an exploded rear perspective view of the sorting unit 300. As shown in Fig. 396 and Fig. 397, the sorting section 983 described above is rotatably disposed inside the sorting unit 300, and is configured so that balls guided into the sorting unit 300 through the first winning opening 64 are alternately sorted to the left and right.

The sorting unit 300 includes a first component 310, which is a member arranged such that the sorting section 983 can rotate from the rear side, and which constitutes a flow path along which the balls that have passed through the first winning opening 64 are sorted to the left and right and allowed to flow down; a ceiling component 330 which constitutes the ceiling of the path along which the balls that have passed through the first winning opening 64 flow backward; a first auxiliary member 340 which, together with the first component member 310, supports the shaft member 988a of the sorting section 983 at both ends and abuts against the sorting section 983 to prevent the flowing balls from falling off to the rear side; a second component member 350 which constitutes a discharge path for the balls discharged backward from the downstream side of the first component member 310; a pair of left and right second auxiliary members 370 to which the second component member 350 is fastened and fixed, which are arranged to cover the rear and upper sides of the discharge path formed by the second component member 350 and are fastened and fixed to the first component member 310;
and a pair of thin plate members 380 disposed on the front side of the central component member 410 and arranged on the left and right between the first component member 310 and the main body plate portion 411 of the central component member 410.

The first component 310 is formed from a colorless, translucent resin material and comprises a plate-shaped central plate portion 311 formed along a plane perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction, an extension plate portion 313 extending from the upper end of the central plate portion 311 to the front side, a pair of inclined extension portions 315 extending from the back side of the central plate portion 311 and extending in a band-like manner in a direction sloping downward toward the left and right outside, a pair of direction switching portions 317 connected to the left and right outer ends of the inclined extension portions 315 and switching the direction in which the balls flow downward (in this embodiment, switching by 90 degrees from the left-to-right direction to the front-to-rear direction), and a pair of left and right opening forming portions 320 in which multiple openings large enough for balls to pass through are lined up on the left and right sides of the front side of the central plate portion 311.

The central plate portion 311 includes a substantially cylindrical bearing portion 312 into which one end of a shaft member 988a that axially supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, directly below the rear end portion of the extension plate portion 313. The bearing portion 312 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The extension plate portion 313 includes a protrusion portion 313a formed as a protrusion whose upper end surface slopes downward toward the rear along the left and right central portion to form a rolling path for the ball, and a pair of left and right wall-like portions 314 erected from the left and right edges to guide the ball rearward.

The balls flowing down the inclined extension portion 315 flow outward to the left and right while being prevented from falling off to the rear side by the front plate portion 371 of the second auxiliary member 370.
It is also used as a member to prevent 3 from falling out.

The direction switching portion 317 is provided on the left and right outer sides of the left and right ends of the inclined extension portion 315.
The ball is provided with an inclined surface portion 318 which is formed as a plate surface on which the ball can roll at a position one step lower than that of the inclined surface portion 318 and slopes downward toward the front side, and an upright curved portion 319 which is erected from the rear edge portion and the left and right outer edge portions of the inclined surface portion 318 and is curved toward the front side in a shape which can guide the ball to the front side.

The opening forming portion 320 has a sensor arrangement opening 321 through which the detection device SE3 is inserted from the rear side.
The detection sensor SE3 extends along the left and right side surfaces of the sensor placement opening 321 toward the front side.
a pair of left and right support extensions 322 supporting the left and right ends of the ball, a prize winning opening 323 formed between the support extensions 322 so that a ball can pass through, a pair of discharge openings 325 formed on the left and right opposite sides of the prize winning opening 323 based on the support extensions 322 so that a ball can pass through, a bottom surface component 327 having a bottom portion curved toward the rear in a shape capable of receiving the balls that have passed through the prize winning opening 323 and the discharge opening 325 and guiding them to the rear side, and a bottom surface component 327 extending from the lower edge of the support extensions 322 to the bottom surface component 327 so as to separate the upper surface side of the bottom surface component 327.
and a pair of partition wall portions 328 extending toward the

When the detection device SE3 is inserted into the sensor placement opening 321, the detection hole SE1a is designed to be positioned inside the winning opening 323. The positioning protrusion 322a protruding from the front edge of the support extension 322 comes into contact with the front end of the detection device SE3, thereby forming a detection hole SE1a.
The front and rear positions of E3 can be easily determined.

The ball that has passed through the direction switching section 317 and reached the opening forming section 320 passes through either the winning opening 323 or the ejection opening 325, and rolls on the upper surface of the bottom surface forming section 327 to be guided to the rear side.
This reduces the possibility that the balls will cross or collide with each other on the top surface of 27. This allows the flow of the balls to be rectified, preventing ball clogging and ball stagnation.

Among the balls rolling on the top surface of the bottom surface component 327, those that pass through the winning opening 323 are detected by the detection device SE3. On the other hand, those that pass through the ejection opening 325 are detected by the detection device SE3.
In either case, the ball that rolls on the top surface of the bottom surface forming portion 327 is detected by a detection device (not shown) that detects the discharge of the ball, and then guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

To reach the ball discharge passage (not shown), the ball rolls toward the inside to the left and right on the rolling surface 351 of the second component member 350 while being prevented from falling off to the rear side by the second auxiliary member 370, and is guided through the common drop flow paths 352 arranged on both the left and right sides.

The second auxiliary member 370 includes a front plate portion 371 that covers the space open on the rear side of the inclined extension portion 315 to prevent the balls from falling out, and a rolling surface 351 of the second component member 350 and a common drop flow path 35
The first component 310 has a fastening screw 329 formed in the front plate 371, a rear plate 372 which blocks the upper and rear sides of the flow path of the balls flowing down along the fastening portion 329, thereby preventing the balls from falling out, a through hole 373 which is drilled in the front plate 371 so as to allow the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 329 of the first component 310 to be inserted therethrough, and a through hole 374 which is drilled in the rear plate 372 so as to allow the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 353 of the second component 350 to be inserted therethrough.

The materials for forming the second component 350 and the second auxiliary member 370 can be set arbitrarily. In this embodiment, the second component 350 is made of a colored opaque resin material, and the second auxiliary member 370 is made of a colored opaque resin material.
The auxiliary member 370 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material.

This reduces the visibility of the balls flowing through the common drop flow path 352 and lessens the attention drawn to the discharged balls, and since light can be taken in from the back side of the second auxiliary member 370, the taken-in light can brightly illuminate the first component member 310 arranged in front, improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the first component member 310.

The thin plate member 380 is positioned by being accommodated in the sheet arrangement recess 411a (see FIG. 393) of the main body plate portion 411. In this positioned state, the game board 13 is assembled, and the thin plate member 380 is sandwiched between the main body plate portion 411 and the first component member 310 in the front-rear direction.

The following describes the forward/backward/left/right displacement (change in position) of the ball as it flows down after entering the first winning opening 64. First, the ball that entered the first winning opening 64 is displaced backward along the extension plate portion 313. After that, the ball is distributed left and right by the rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 described in the first embodiment, and displaced outward left and right along the inclined extension portion 315.

Then, the direction of the ball is switched to the front side by the direction switching part 317, and the ball is displaced forward. If a guide part with a curved surface for switching the direction of the ball is placed on the front side of the ball, the guide part may easily block the line of sight to the ball, and visibility may decrease. However, in this embodiment, the upright curved part 319 as a guide part is placed on the back side of the ball,
The upright curved portion 319 is unlikely to block the line of sight to the ball, which makes it easier to ensure the visibility of the ball.

Thereafter, the ball flowing straight down through the winning opening 323 is detected by the detection device SE3, and then displaces backward along the bottom surface component 327. Also, the ball displaces to the left or right above the winning opening 323 and reaches directly above the discharge opening 325.
3 and displaces rearward along the bottom surface constituent portion 327.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the position of the ball that enters the first winning port 64 is initially moved toward the rear, then moves to the left and right, and then moves toward the front just before passing through the detection device SE3.
As a result, compared to the configuration of the first embodiment, the distributing portion 983 can be positioned further rearward and more space can be provided below the extension plate portion 313 .

This free space can be used as a space for arranging a drive mechanism for operating the electric device 140a of the second winning opening 140. As a result, in this embodiment, the second winning opening 140 can be arranged closer to the first winning opening 64 than in the first embodiment.

In addition, by configuring the path through which the sorted balls flow down so that the path can be switched between forward and backward directions, the vertical width of the path as viewed from the front can be reduced compared to when the paths are consistently arranged vertically (for example, in the above-mentioned configuration of the sorting unit 980). This improves the design freedom of the vertical arrangement of the detection device SE3 relative to the first winning port 64.

Fig. 398 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXXV of Fig. 381. In Fig. 398, the central component member 410 and the thin plate member 380 are illustrated semi-transparently, and the distribution unit 300 is visible. In Fig. 398, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the electric role device 140 is illustrated.
The external shapes of Fig. 398 in both the closed and open states are shown in Fig. 398. In the explanation of Fig. 398, Fig. 396 and Fig. 397 will be referred to as appropriate.

The thin plate member 380 is a member formed in a thin plate (sheet) shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is a member that can be seen by the player through the central component member 410. Although not shown in the figures, in this embodiment, colorful patterns, figures, letters, or characters are drawn on the front surface of the thin plate member 380, and the colors and brightness seen through the thin plate member 380 change in various ways depending on the difference in the form of the irradiated light (differences in the form of color and brightness).

Unlike the case where patterns, figures, letters or characters are drawn directly on the base plate 60, according to this embodiment, the patterns, figures, letters or characters drawn on the thin plate member 380 can be removed from the game board 13 by removing the thin plate member 380, so that the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when changing the gameplay while keeping the same shape of the game board 13 (so-called
In some cases, the game board 13 may have different patterns, figures, letters or characters, or colors, etc., to make it easier for the player to understand the gameplay.

When patterns, figures, letters or characters are directly drawn on the base plate 60, it becomes necessary to replace the entire base plate 60, which essentially means that the entire game board 13 is likely to be replaced, and the cost of changing the gameplay is likely to increase.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 380 with another thin plate member 380 having a different pattern, figure, letter, character, color, etc., drawn thereon.
There is no need to replace the entire game machine 3. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing the game characteristics.

The form of decoration applied to the thin plate member 380 is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, a colorless and transparent area may be formed above the detection device SE3 to improve the visibility of the ball rolling on the inclined surface portion 318, and other parts may be densely decorated with figures and patterns.
Alternatively, marks such as numbers may be drawn at the locations corresponding to the discharge openings 325, making it easier for the player to understand the profit he or she can obtain depending on which mark the ball falls close to.

The thin plate member 380 is designed to be large so as to protrude outward to the left and right beyond the through-hole 60 a , and is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the base plate 60 and the main plate portion 411 of the central component member 410 .

In this embodiment, the rear end surface of the thin plate member 380 and the front end surface of the first component member 310 (for example,
The detection device SE3 is disposed so that the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 comes into contact with the front end of the support extension 322. That is, since the detection device SE3 is disposed close to the thin plate member 380, the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 can be moved closer to the player side. This improves the visibility of the ball passing through the detection device SE3, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a ball passing through the detection device SE3 is overlooked.

In addition, the detection device SE3 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the electric role 140a in a front view, and is not hidden by the electric role 140a. This improves the visibility of the ball passing through the detection device SE3 regardless of the state (open state, closed state) of the electric role 140a, compared to when the ball's flow path is hidden by the electric role 140a (see FIG. 368).

In addition, since the detection device SE3 is disposed behind the main body plate portion 411 of the central component 410, it does not affect the manner in which the balls flow down on the front side of the main body plate portion 411. In other words, the design freedom of the play area can be improved compared to when the detection device SE3 is disposed protruding forward of the main body plate portion 411 (forward of the front end surface of the base plate 60).

For strength reasons, nails are not provided on the main body plate 411, but in this embodiment, as a substitute for nails, the ball paths are distributed by the distribution parts 413 and the curved protrusions 414. This makes it possible to prevent the flow path of the balls on the front side of the main body plate 411 from becoming monotonous.

Both the balls that pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 and are detected by the detection device SE3 (balls that pass through the winning opening 323) and the balls that pass through the ejection opening 325 follow a path that displaces them toward the front by rolling on the inclined surface portion 318. Therefore, there may be a difference between the number of balls that reach the inclined surface portion 318 and the number of balls detected by the detection device SE3.

Although the inclined surface portion 318 displaces the ball towards the player, thereby improving the visibility of the ball, the configuration makes it difficult to distinguish whether the ball has passed through the winning opening 323 or the ejection opening 325, which could lead to dissatisfaction among the player as it is impossible to determine whether the ball has actually not passed through the detection device SE3 or whether it has passed through the detection device SE3 but there is a detection failure.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, a ball passing from the inclined surface portion 318 through the winning opening 323 is seen to flow downward when viewed from the front along the winning flow path FL31, whereas a ball passing from the inclined surface portion 318 through the ejection opening 325 flows along the non-winning flow path FL32, with the flow direction when viewed from the front being switched 90 degrees from downward to left or right.

In other words, whether the ball passes through the detection device SE3 can be determined based on whether there is a left-right component in the direction of the ball's flow, which reduces the possibility of misjudging the ball's passage point. This makes it easier to determine whether the ball has passed through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3.

Both the game balls that flow down along the winning flow path FL31 and the non-winning flow path FL32 flow near the distribution section 413 and the curved protrusion section 414 when viewed from the front, and therefore their flow paths appear to overlap with the flow paths of the game balls flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, the game balls flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 can be made to look as if they are flowing down toward the specific winning hole 65a.
The number of game balls that have passed when the ball gate 314 is in the closed state (game balls that have passed when the ball gate 314 is in the closed state) is often grasped by visually checking the game balls rolling on the inner rail 61 toward the outlet 71. However, the game balls that flow down through the inclined surface portion 318 flow down the winning flow path FL31 or the non-winning flow path FL32, and then flow backward along the bottom surface component portion 327 (see FIG. 397), so the game balls do not appear in front of the outlet 71.

This allows the game balls that have entered the first winning port 64 during the execution of a big win game to be added to the number of game balls that appear to be flowing down toward the specific winning port 65a, so that regardless of the number of game balls that have entered the first winning port 64, it is possible to give the illusion that most of the launched game balls have entered the specific winning port 65a.

Furthermore, the game balls flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 and the game balls actually flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a do not collide with each other because their arrangement is divided into front and rear by the thin plate member 380. This makes it possible to create the above-mentioned illusion without impeding the flow of the game balls flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a.

In this embodiment, the non-winning flow path FL32 is formed as a flow path that flows in the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The main plate portion 411 and the thin plate member 380 may be configured so that openings are drilled in the front-to-back direction in the path along which the balls flow after flowing down the inclined surface portion 318 toward the prize winning point 3, and by passing through these openings, the non-winning flow path FL32 may be formed as a flow path along which the balls flow to the front side.

That is, when the ball does not win, the ball that flows along the flow path FL32 returns to the front side of the main body plate portion 411 again.
The ball may flow down toward the outlet 71. In this case, if the opening and closing plate 65b is in an open state, the ball that flows down the non-winning flow path FL32 may be picked up by the opening and closing plate 65b and enter the specific winning port 65a.

In other words, a game can be created in which a ball that has entered the first winning port 64 can then enter a specific winning port 65a after returning to the front side of the main plate portion 411, thereby improving attention to the ball that has entered the first winning port 64 (especially during a jackpot game when the opening and closing plate 65b opens and closes).

Next, there will be described the structure of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 380) fastened and fixed to the rear side of the game board 13. The operation unit 500 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 365) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

399, 400, 401 and 402 are front views of the operating unit 500.
Figure 399 illustrates the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 of the operation unit 500, Figure 400 illustrates the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, Figure 401 illustrates the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, and Figure 402 illustrates one operation error limit state of the internal operation unit 600.

In this embodiment, the retreat state is the light emitting operation production unit 7 of the internal operation unit 600.
00 is a state in which it is positioned at the upper end position of the up and down movement range, the intermediate state is a state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is positioned at the lower end position of the range in which it can operate while maintaining its forward and backward tilting posture from the retracted state, and the extended state is a state in which the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is positioned at the lower end position of the up and down movement range and the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation performance device 800 faces in the forward and backward direction.

When the state is changed from the intermediate state to the extended state, the light emitting operation production unit 700 changes its posture in the front-rear direction (tilts). This posture change occurs when the light emitting operation production unit 700 is rotated along a predetermined rotation axis (a central axis J1 described later).
is performed as a rotation around the center.

In this embodiment, one operation error limit state is one of the states in which the tilt in the left-right direction that is allowed by design of the light-emitting operation unit 700 is at its limit. For convenience, in Fig. 402, the right side of the light-emitting operation unit 700 is shown in the same position as in the retracted state, and the left side is shown shifted downward. In this embodiment, the operation unit 500 is configured so that the light-emitting operation unit 700 can be operated in the up-down direction while maintaining the tilt angle in one operation error limit state, as will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 399, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retreated state, the rotation effect device 800
The rotating member 810 is oriented such that the decorative plate 811 on which a decorative figure or pattern is formed faces the front side.

The figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 as shown in FIG.
0 (the linear shapes extending radially and the wavy patterns formed on the left and right outer sides are visually recognized when they are formed on the rotating member 810, including the linear shapes).
.

That is, the figure or pattern formed on the decorative plate 811 can be designed as a part of the figure that is visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, so that the size of the rotating member 810 can be
This avoids limiting the shapes and patterns that can be formed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 401, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the light emitting operation production unit 700 tilts in the forward rolling direction, and the main body member 71 of the light emitting operation production unit 700
The figures and patterns formed on the screen are visible when viewed from the front.

These figures and patterns are also formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and are viewed as a single unit when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state (of the radially extending straight line shapes and the wave patterns formed on the left and right outer sides, the straight line shapes are formed only on the bottom wall portion 511, and the wave patterns are viewed as being formed on the main body member 710).

That is, the figure or pattern formed on the main body member 710 can be designed as a part of the figure that is visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, so that the size of the main body member 710 can be
It is possible to avoid limiting the shapes and patterns to be formed.

As the light-emitting action performance unit 700 displaces vertically from the retracted state to the extended state, in relation to the fixed bottom wall portion 511, the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the rotating member 810 begin to shift from a state in which the figures and patterns are viewed as a single unit in the retracted state.

This deviation becomes more noticeable as the amount of vertical displacement increases. In contrast, in this embodiment, the light-emitting action production unit 700 tilts and displaces in the extended state, switching the surface that the player can see, and the player can newly see the figures and patterns that are seen integrally with the bottom wall portion 511. Therefore, the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the light-emitting action production unit 700 (main body member 710, rotating member 810) that displaces in the vertical direction can be configured to be seen integrally in the retracted state and the extended state.

During the vertical displacement of the light-emitting motion production unit 700 described here, the external shape of the light-emitting motion production unit 700 when viewed from the front changes. This allows a single production unit to be given the illusion of being multiple different production units, improving the design freedom of the motion production.

Fig. 403 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 500, and Fig. 404 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation unit 500. In Fig. 403 and Fig. 404, the liquid crystal display device (third pattern display device 81) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the back side is shown visible through the opening 511a.

The operating unit 500 includes a bottom wall portion 511 and a rear case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed to a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The rear case 510 is arranged so that the front end of the outer wall portion 512 is aligned with the rear surface of the game board 13 (for example,
In the assembled state (see FIG. 365), the game board 1
3. The support plate portion 513 supports the support member 3 on a surface thereof.

The support plate portion 513 has a plurality of positioning protrusions 513a that protrude in a circular ring shape toward the front side and have a shape that can fit into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a plurality of insertion holes 513b that are drilled in the center of the positioning protrusions 513a so that fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted therethrough.

The rear case 510 is positioned relative to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusions 513a into the fitting portions 60c (see FIG. 384) of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted into the insertion holes 513.
b and screwed into the female screw of the fitting portion 60c, the game board 13 and the operating unit 5
00 can be fixed integrally, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be an annular protrusion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the fitting portion 60c of the base plate 60 (circular in this embodiment), or it may be a protrusion having a shape (large-diameter ring shape) that increases the fitting gap in consideration of workability during assembly. In addition, when the outer shape of the fitting portion 60c is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a will also be rectangular in response to that.

The operation unit 500 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13, and has a light emitting means and an operation unit disposed therein. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a decorative fixing member 520 that is inserted into the rear case 510 from the front side and fastened and fixed thereto, an internal operation unit 600 disposed on the upper inside of the rear case 510, and a light emitting performance unit 518 disposed on the lower inside of the rear case 510.

The light-emitting performance unit 518 is a unit that emits light forward from behind the distribution unit 300 and the winning port component 400 (see Figure 392), and functions to brightly illuminate the ball passage path formed by the distribution unit 300 and the winning port component 400.

The decorative fixing member 520 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is composed of a plurality of thin plate-like members that are arranged symmetrically on both the left and right sides and can be separated into upper and lower parts. The first fixing member 530 is arranged on the upper left side, the second fixing member 540 is arranged on the lower left side, the third fixing member 550 is arranged on the upper right side, and the fourth fixing member 560 is arranged on the lower right side.
A left side illumination board 570 disposed on the rear side of the fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, and a right side illumination board 580 disposed on the rear side of the third fixing member 550 and the fourth fixing member 560,
The configuration and role of each part will be described with reference to Figs. 405 and 406.

Fig. 405 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and Fig. 406 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. In Figs. 405 and 406, the decorative fixing member 520 is disassembled from the rear case 510 and placed forward, and the internal operating unit 6 is removed from the rear case 510.
5 shows the state in which the display panel 500 is disassembled and disposed between the rear case 510 and the decorative fastening member 520.

The first fixing member 530 comprises a thin-plate-shaped insertion plate portion 531 extending in the fore-and-aft direction, a front plate portion 534 extending to the right from the front portion of the insertion plate portion 531, and an outer plate portion 537 extending to the left from the front portion of the insertion plate portion 531.

The insertion plate portion 531 has a plurality of insertion protrusions 532 protruding from the extended tip portion to the rear side with a shape and arrangement that allows it to be inserted into the receiving hole 623 of the internal operation unit 600, and serves to prevent outward tilt displacement of the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600. The relative functions of the insertion plate portion 531 and the outer member 610 will be described later.

The front plate 534 is a plate-like portion that is disposed in front of the left side illumination board 570 and is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the left side illumination board 570 (formed to cover the left side illumination board 570), and a light diffusion treatment is formed on the back side in order to diffuse light from a light-emitting means such as an LED disposed on the front side of the left side illumination board 570.
The mounting hole 535 is provided with a hole through which a fastening screw that is fastened to the mounting hole 535 can be inserted.

The outer plate portion 537 is a portion that can abut against the front portion of the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, and has an insertion hole 538 drilled therein to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 512a formed in the outer wall portion 512.

That is, the first fixing member 530 connects and fixes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510 and the outer member 610 of the internal operating unit 600 when the operating unit 500 is in an assembled state (see FIG. 399 ).

The second fixing member 540 is a plate-shaped portion disposed at the same front-rear position as the front plate portion 534 of the first fixing member 530, and is disposed at a slight distance from the lower end of the front plate portion 534, a fastening extension portion 544 extending rightward from the lower right side portion of the front plate portion 541, and
and an outer plate portion 547 extending leftward from the left end portion of the outer plate portion 547.

The front panel 541 is a plate-like portion that is positioned in front of the left side illuminated board 570 and is formed in a shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the left side illuminated board 570 (formed to cover the left side illuminated board 570), and has a light diffusion treatment formed on the back side to diffuse light from a light-emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side of the left side illuminated board 570.

Furthermore, the internal operation unit 600 is provided with an insertion hole 542 through which a fastening screw can be inserted to be fastened to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600, and an insertion hole 543 through which a fastening screw can be inserted to be fastened to the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600. That is, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 can be connected and fixed by fastening via the front plate portion 541.

The connecting extension 544 has an insertion hole 545 through which a fastening screw can be inserted into the fastening portion 518a of the light-emitting performance unit 518. The outer plate portion 547 is a portion that can abut against the front portion of the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, and is fixed to the fastening portion 518a of the outer wall portion 512.
2b, and has an insertion hole 548 drilled therein so that a fastening screw can be inserted therethrough.

That is, when the operating unit 500 is in an assembled state (see Figure 399), the second fixing member 540 connects and fixes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the internal operating unit 600, and the light-emitting performance unit 518.

The third fixing member 550, the fourth fixing member 560 and the right side lighting board 580 have slightly different shapes from the first fixing member 530, the second fixing member 540 and the left side lighting board 570 due to the difference in the shape of the inner member 670 of the internal operating unit 600 that is located on the rear side and is the subject of coverage; however, they are basically formed symmetrically to the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, and the configurations and roles of each component are similar, so descriptions of overlapping parts will be omitted and the symbols mentioned above in the description of the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540 will be illustrated for convenience.

The following describes the order in which the internal operation unit 600 and the decorative fastening member 520 are assembled to the rear case 510. When assembling the internal operation unit 600 to the rear case 510, the internal operation unit 600 is first assembled to the rear case 510 (see FIG. 403), and then the decorative fastening member 520 is assembled to the rear case 510.

In summary, the process of assembling the internal operation unit 600 to the rear case 510 involves first fastening and fixing the left and right outer members 610 and the inner member 670 to the rear case 510, and then inserting the light-emitting operation production unit 700 into the inside of the rear case 510 from the front side, and fastening the left and right outer members 6
The work is performed in the following order: the light-emitting action production unit 700 is placed between the displacement member 680 and the inner member 670, the light-emitting action production unit 700 is placed in the assembly position with the displacement member 680, and the parts (screws, collars, etc.) for preventing falling off are assembled to the fastening part 682 from the front side.

In this embodiment, since there is no need to assemble the decorative fixing member 520 to the rear case 510 during the assembly work of the light emitting operation production unit 700, the front side of the rear case 510 can be left wide open, and it is possible to prevent the movement of the worker's hands from being blocked by the decorative fixing member 520. This improves the work efficiency.

Furthermore, the insertion holes 535, 538, 542, 543, 545, 54 of the decorative fixing member 520
The work of inserting the fastening screws into the fixing member 520 and fastening it can be done from the front side of the rear case 510, so after the work of assembling the light emitting operation production unit 700 to the displacement member 680 is completed, the work of fastening the decorative fixing member 520 can be carried out without changing the position of the rear case 510. This can further improve the work efficiency. Next,
The assembly work will now be described in detail.

407 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit 500 taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 399, FIG. 408 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the operating unit 500 in range XLV in FIG. 407, and FIG. 409 is a cross-sectional view of the operating unit 500 taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG.

407 and 408, the light emitting operation production unit 700 is disassembled from the rear case 510, and the decorative fixing member 520 is not shown in the figure, showing the state before the decorative fixing member 520 is attached.
20 is shown assembled to the rear case 510 (see FIG. 399).

In this embodiment, the fastening positions are designed so that the internal operating unit 600 and the rear case 510 are not simply fixed together to provide sufficient rigidity (for example, the fastening positions are located only at one of the upper and lower ends), and the internal operating unit 600 is configured to be able to flex and deform (change its posture) outwardly to the left and right relative to the rear case 510 (see the imaginary lines in Figure 408).

By utilizing this bending deformation, it is possible to quickly assemble the light emitting operation production unit 700. In other words, the light emitting operation production unit 700 is assembled by inserting the fastening portion 682 into the connecting hole 764 of the light emitting operation production unit 700 and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 682. However, as the internal operation unit 600 bends outward to the left and right,
Since the dimension of the path through which the light-emitting action production unit 700 advances toward the fastening portion 682 can be expanded left and right from the fixed width dimension W1 to the deflected width dimension W2, the workability of the assembly work can be improved.

At this time, the internal operating unit 600 is flexibly deformed outwardly to the left and right, so that the fastening portion 682
The direction in which the fastening screws enter the housing is inclined so that the direction is inward to the left and right as it approaches the rear side (the direction in which the front side is inclined so that it spreads outward to the left and right).

In this case, compared to when the fastening screw is inserted in the front-to-back direction, the fastening screw can be inserted into the rear case 510 with the screwdriver used to insert the fastening screw kept away from (avoid of) the decorative member 750 of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 (in a direction inclined relative to the front-to-back direction).

Therefore, the fastening work can be facilitated, and the design freedom of the decorative member 750 of the light-emitting action production unit 700, the shape of which is designed for one of the purposes of avoiding contact with the driver, can be improved. In other words, the work efficiency of the assembly work of the light-emitting action production unit 700 can be improved, and the design freedom of the decorative member 750 can be improved.

In order to achieve this effect, in this embodiment, the connecting hole 7 through which the fastening screw is inserted is
The left-right dimension of the long hole 764 a of 64 is designed to be a dimension (sufficient left-right length) that can accommodate misalignment of the fastening portion 682 due to flexural deformation of the internal operating unit 600 .

In addition, bending deformation of the internal operating unit 600 inwardly to the left and right is less likely to occur than bending deformation outwardly to the left and right, because resistance is generated when the tubular member 695 abuts against the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510.

In this embodiment, the decorative fixing member 520 is attached to suppress outward bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right. This is because the fastening positions of the internal operation unit 600, the decorative fixing member 520, and the rear case 510 (fastening positions on the outer wall 512 of the rear case 510 and the front side of the internal operation unit 600, fastening positions near the front side) are closer to the fastening positions of the internal operation unit 600, the decorative fixing member 520, and the rear case 510 (fastening positions on the outer wall 512 of the rear case 510 and the front side of the internal operation unit 600, fastening positions near the front side) than the fastening positions of the internal operation unit 600 and the rear case 510 (fastening positions on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, fastening positions near the rear side).
This effect is achieved by the fact that the number of pieces of decorative fixing member 520 is larger and by the ingenuity of the shape of decorative fixing member 520.

First, the decorative fixing member 520 includes an outer plate portion 547 that is fastened to the outer wall portion 512 or the support plate portion 513. The support plate portion 513 that is integrally formed with the outer wall portion 512 is fixed to the base plate 6.
0 (see FIG. 405). That is, the decorative fixing member 520 is restricted from displacement by the base plate 60 via the support plate portion 513. This makes it possible to utilize the rigidity of the base plate 60 to improve the rigidity of the decorative fixing member 520 and the internal operation unit 600, thereby suppressing bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 outward to the left and right.

Secondly, the insert plate portions 531 of the decorative fixing members 520 are disposed in contact with the outer left and right sides of the internal operation unit 600. That is, the insert plate portions 531 can suppress bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 outward to the left and right.

These first and second configurations make it possible to prevent the internal operating unit 600 from bending and deforming outwardly to the left or right when the decorative fixing member 520 is attached.

In addition, the decorative fixing member 520 is configured to be assembled to the rear case 510 from the front side, and the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is configured to be assembled to the rear case 510 from the front side, so that the assembly work can be performed in a series of steps, such as assembling the decorative fixing member 520 following the assembly of the light-emitting operation production unit 700, without changing the posture of the rear case 510. Therefore, the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

On the other hand, if the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 is configured so that the removal of the unit from the fastening portion 682 for maintenance or the like can be performed without removing the decorative fixing member 520, this reduces the labor required for maintenance work and is more efficient.

Here, the decorative fixing member 520 has an electric lighting board 570, 580 disposed on the back side thereof (
See FIG. 405. Configuring the illumination boards 570, 580 so that they extend inward to the left and right can expand the range of the light emission effects and improve the presentation effect.

In contrast, when the illumination boards 570 and 580 are arranged to protrude inward to the left and right as in this embodiment, when a maintenance worker moves the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 to the front side, the connecting plate parts 765 formed on the left and right ends of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 may contact the illumination board 5
There is a possibility that the illumination boards 570 and 580 may collide with each other and be damaged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a protective extension portion 677b is extended from the front edge portion of the extended wall portion 677 of the inner member 670 described later toward the left and right inward in a shape sufficient to cover the back surfaces of the illuminated boards 570, 580 (see Figure 405).

The protective extension portion 677b has left and right inner end portions formed in a shape similar to the shape line S51 (see Figure 405) which corresponds to the shape of the left and right inner edge portions of the upper part of the illuminated board 570, 580, and is extended to a position corresponding to the shape line S51.

This allows the area supporting the illuminated boards 570, 580 from the back side to be increased, and the back side of the upper part of the illuminated boards 570, 580 can be protected by the protective extension portion 677b, thereby preventing contact between the illuminated boards 570, 580 and the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 during maintenance work.

On the other hand, below the lower end of the shape line S51, regardless of the shape of the illumination boards 570 and 580,
The formation of the extension parts on the left and right inner sides is omitted. Therefore, when the light emitting operation production unit 700 is removed at this position, the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the illumination board 57
There remains a possibility of contact with 0.580.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the light emitting operation production unit 700 is configured to change its posture as it is displaced downward (see FIG. 400 and FIG. 401 ).
Since the orientation of the light emitting action production unit 700 changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction, it becomes impossible to insert a screwdriver into the fastening screw. Therefore, the work of removing the light emitting action production unit 700 is performed by removing the light emitting action production unit 7
00 position is changed. Therefore, the protective extension 677b is
It is sufficient to form it at a position where the light-emitting action production unit 700 is placed before its posture changes, and this embodiment is designed in this way (see Figure 400).

In this way, rather than forming the protective extension portion 677b over the entire vertical range, it is possible to narrow the formation range of the protective extension portion 677b by limiting its formation to the minimum necessary range to avoid contact between the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and the illumination boards 570, 580.

In other words, in this embodiment, the positioning of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700, at which the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 can be removed, is limited to a positioning between the retracted state and the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, thereby reducing the formation range of the protective extension portion 677b.

In this embodiment, it is of course possible to remove the light-emitting operation production unit 700 after removing the decorative fixing member 520 from the rear case 510. In this case, as in the assembly work, the internal operation unit 600 is flexibly deformed outwardly to the left and right, so that the left and right width of the path for removing the light-emitting operation production unit 700 can be widened, and therefore the light-emitting operation production unit 700 can be prevented from coming into contact with the protective extension portion 677b.

Fig. 410 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and Fig. 411 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Figs. 410 and 411 mainly show the internal operating unit 60.
5 shows the decorative fixing member 520 in an exploded state, and the decorative fixing member 520 is not shown.

As shown in Figures 410 and 411, the internal operating unit 600 comprises an outer member 610 fastened to the bottom plate portion 511 of the rear case 510, a lifting plate member 630 supported on the outer member 610 so as to be displaceable in the vertical direction and positioned on the inside in the left-right direction, a drive motor 648 fastened to the outer member 610 as a device for generating a driving force for raising and lowering the lifting plate member 630, a transmission gear 649 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 648 and transmitting the driving force to the lifting plate member 630, and a coil spring SP1 that applies an upward biasing force (load in the pulling direction) to the lifting plate member 630.

The internal operation unit 600 also includes a resistance generating device 650 configured to generate resistance to the movement of the lifting plate member 630, an inner member 670 arranged on the inside in the left-right direction so as to position the lifting plate member 630 between the outer member 610 and the outer member 610, and fastened to the outer member 610 by a fastening screw inserted into the outer member 610 in the left-right direction, a displacement member 680 supported displaceably on the inner member 670 and arranged on the inside in the left-right direction, a rotation posture assisting member 690 fastened and fixed from the inside left-right on the rear side of the upper end of the inner member 670, and a light-emitting operation performance unit 700 whose both ends are connected to the displacement member 680.

The internal operation unit 600 is a unit that is configured approximately symmetrically, with the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 being disposed in the center on the left and right, and the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 being fixed to the rear case 510 side on both the left and right sides of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700.
is operably supported.

Details of each component of the internal operation unit 600 will be described below with reference to Fig. 412 and Fig. 413 which are enlarged views of each area of Fig. 410. In the description of Fig. 412 and Fig. 413, Fig. 410 and Fig. 411 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 412(a) shows the outer member 610 and the lift plate member 610 in the range XLIXa of FIG.
FIG. 412(b) is a front perspective view of the outer member 610 in the range XLIXb of FIG. 410 , and FIG. 413(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member 610 in the range XLIXb of FIG. 410 .
FIG. 413 (a) is an exploded front oblique view of the lifting plate member 630, the inner member 670, the displacement member 680 and the rotation posture assisting member 690 in the range La of FIG. 410, and FIG. 413 (b) is an exploded front oblique view of the displacement member 680 and the rotation posture assisting member 690 in the range Lb of FIG. 410.

As shown in Figures 412(a) and 412(b), the outer member 610 comprises a plate-like portion 611 formed in a long plate shape in the vertical direction, and an extended wall portion 621 extending in a wall-like manner on the left and right outer sides of the plate-like portion 611 (the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 512 that is adjacent to the outer wall portion 512 in the assembled state) and formed so as to partition the left and right outer areas of the plate-like portion 611.

The plate-shaped portion 611 is provided with a pair of upper and lower long holes 612 each formed as a long oval in the vertical direction, a wiring hole 613 formed as a long and wide oval (wider than the long hole 612) in the vertical direction behind the upper long hole 612, and a pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614 each formed as a cylindrical protrusion on the left and right sides behind the lower long hole 612.

The elongated holes 612 are elongated holes for restricting the displacement direction of the lift plate member 630, and a pair of elongated holes 612 are arranged on the upper and lower sides. The front-rear width of the elongated holes 612 is formed slightly wider than the diameter of the upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the lift plate member 630 to be inserted therethrough.
The pair of long holes 612 are formed with a staggered front-to-rear arrangement. That is, the lower long hole 612 is disposed further forward than the upper long hole 612.

As a result, the support position of the upper part of the lifting plate member 630 is rearward compared to the support position of the lower part of the lifting plate member 630, so that the lower part of the lifting plate member 630, which is suspended from the upper part of the lifting plate member 630, is forced rearward by gravity.

This allows the rack gear portion 634 of the lifting plate member 630 to be moved closer to the transmission gear 649, thereby preventing the rack gear portion 634 from falling off the transmission gear 649 and achieving an optimal meshing relationship.

The wiring hole 613 is an opening for passing electrical wiring that is connected inside the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 through the irregular opening 685a of the anti-fall-off collar member 685 and located on the left and right outside of the inner member 670, and discharging it to the left and right outside of the outer member 610.

The guide protrusion 614 functions as a portion that guides the displacement of the front-rear displacement member 653 of the resistance generating device 650. That is, it functions to guide the front-rear displacement member 653 so that it can be displaced in the front-rear direction, and to prevent the front-rear displacement member 653 from tilting forward or backward and changing its posture.
Details will be provided below.

The extension wall 621 includes a plurality of fastening parts 622 arranged at the front end and configured to receive fastening screws inserted into the decorative fixing member 520, and a pair of upper and lower receiving holes 623 arranged on the rear side and formed to receive the insertion protrusions 532 (see FIG. 406) of the insertion plate part 531 of the decorative fixing member 520. The fastening parts other than the fastening part 622 arranged at the front end are mainly used to fasten and fix the illumination boards 570 and 580 (see FIG. 403).

The lifting plate member 630 comprises a long main body portion 631 whose long direction is oriented in the up and down direction, a pair of upper fastening portions 632 which protrude outwardly to the left and right from the long main body portion 631, are inserted into the upper long hole 612 of the outer member 610 and are formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in, a pair of lower fastening portions 633 which protrude outwardly to the left and right from the long main body portion 631, are inserted into the lower long hole 612 of the outer member 610 and are formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in, and a rack gear portion 634 which is formed in a gear tooth shape on the back side of the long main body portion 631 and meshes with a transmission gear 649.

The lift plate member 630 further comprises a detection portion 635 extending from the lower end of the elongated main body portion 631 toward the rear side and configured to be arranged in a detection groove of a position detection device (not shown) so as to be capable of detecting the position of the elongated main body portion 631, a front-rear long hole 636 drilled in the elongated main body portion 631 as a long hole elongated in the front-rear direction at the midpoint between a pair of upper fastening portions 632, and a fall prevention plate 637 which is arranged on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 and fastened to the upper fastening portion 632 by fastening screws inserted therethrough.
It comprises an abutment plate 638 which is fastened to the lower fastening portion 633 by fastening screws inserted into the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611, and a ring member C1 which is assembled to the upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 to reduce frictional resistance during operation.

The upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 are disposed in accordance with the front-rear arrangement of the long holes 612 of the outer member 610. Therefore, the lower fastening portion 633 is disposed forward of the upper fastening portion 632.

The longitudinal long hole 636 is a long hole that guides the longitudinal movement of the metal rod member 686 that is inserted into the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674 of the inner member 670.
is formed with a front-to-back length equal to or greater than the front-to-back width of the area in which it is formed.

The upper fastening portion 632 of the lift plate member 630 is inserted into the upper long hole 612, and the upper fastening portion 6
The fall prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the tip end of the lower fastening portion 633, and the lower long hole 6
The contact plate 638 is fastened and fixed to the tip side of the lower fastening portion 633 in a state where the lower fastening portion 633 is inserted into the outer member 610.
This makes it easier to prevent the device from falling off.

The abutted plate 638 has locking portions on the left and right outer sides for locking the lower end of the coil spring SP1. The upper end of the coil spring SP1 is locked to locking portions 638a formed on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610. In other words, the coil spring SP1 generates a biasing force (pulling force) that biases the abutted plate 638 upward.

While the anti-fall-off plate 637 is formed in an oval shape, the abutment plate 638 is formed in a rectangular shape, which allows the abutment area with the resistance generating device 650 to be increased and the magnitude of the load per unit area generated during a collision to be reduced, as will be described in detail later.

The resistance generating device 650 includes a solenoid 651 having a plunger extending in the forward/backward direction, a fixed cover 652 for housing the solenoid 651 and fixing it to the left and right outside of the outer member 610, and a forward/backward displacement member 653 that is engaged with the plunger of the solenoid 651 and is guided by a guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610 so as to be displaceable in the forward/backward direction.
Equipped with.

The fixed cover 652 has a plurality of insertion holes 652a formed at both upper and lower positions of the solenoid 651 as insertion holes through which fastening screws screwed into the outer member 610 can be inserted, and a pair of upper and lower fitting portions 652b recessed with a layout dimension that allows the tip end of the guide protrusion portion 614 of the outer member 610 to be fitted.
And, it is equipped with.

The front-rear displacement member 653 has a pair of guided elongated holes 653a that are drilled long in the front-rear direction as elongated holes through which the guide protrusions 614 are inserted on both the upper and lower sides.
By fitting in 52 b , it is possible to prevent the front-rear displacement member 653 from falling off from the guide protrusion 614 .

The inner member 670 is connected to the outer member 610 as shown in FIG. 413(a) and FIG. 413(b).
The plate-shaped portion 671 is disposed opposite the plate-shaped portion 611 in the left-right direction, an extended wall portion 677 is provided extending like a wall on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 671, and a rectangular protrusion portion 678 is formed at the rear portion of the upper end of the plate-shaped portion 671 and protrudes in a rectangular shape on the left and right inner sides.

The plate-shaped portion 671 has a first long hole 672 formed as a long hole that is long in the up-down direction on the rear side of the lift plate member 630 from the front-rear position, and a first long hole 673 formed as a long hole that is long in the up-down direction on the front side of the first long hole 672.
The second long hole 673 is drilled as a long hole extending parallel to the first long hole 672 from an upper end portion that is shifted upwardly relative to the upper end portion of the first long hole 672, and a curved long hole 674 is drilled as a curved long hole that is connected to the lower end portion of the second long hole 673.

As a connecting portion of the plate-shaped portion 671 with the rear case 510, in FIG.
403 )。 In other words, the plate-shaped portion 671 generates a fixing force with respect to the rear case 510 by indirectly fastening the plate-shaped portion 671 to the rear case 510.

The plate-shaped portion 671 has multiple fastening portions 671a into which fastening screws are inserted in the left-right direction from the left and right outside into the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610, and the inner member 670 is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 by screwing in the fastening screws.

The first long hole 672 is formed to be wider than the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674. As a result, in this embodiment, the first long hole 672 can be used as a through hole for electrical wiring, and the electrical wiring connected to the light emitting operation production unit 700 is connected to the pair of left and right inner members 670.
This can prevent the inner left and right regions from being exposed, as will be described in detail later.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed to have the same width. The curved shape of the curved elongated hole 674 is determined by the fact that the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680 guided by the first elongated hole 672 is curved in such a manner that the cylindrical portion 684 of the displacement member 680 is aligned with the first elongated hole 672.
When the cylindrical portion 684 is positioned at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 684, the cylindrical portion 684 is formed in an arc shape with the center of the cylindrical portion 684 as the axis.

The extended wall portion 677 includes a partition wall portion 677a formed to surround the first long hole 672 from the plate-shaped portion 671 outward to the left and right, and a protective extended portion 677b extending from the front side edge portion inward to the left and right in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface of the illuminated board 570, 580.

The displacement member 680 is a box-shaped main body 68 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape with left and right inner sides open.
1 and a pair of fastening parts 6 formed to protrude outward from the short side wall parts of the box-shaped main body part 681.
82, an extension portion 683 extending along the left and right outer side surfaces of the box-shaped main body portion 681, a cylindrical portion 684 extending in a cylindrical shape in the left and right outer directions from the corners of the box-shaped main body portion 681,
a metal rod-shaped member 686 that is fitted and fixed to a fitting recess 683 a formed as a circular recess on the base end side of the extension portion 683;
A plurality of ring members 687 through which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is inserted, which are disposed in the gap between the members that are displaced relative to each other, a large-diameter ring member 688 through which the cylindrical portion 684 is inserted, and a light-emitting action production unit 7
00 from the front and rear (see FIG. 409 ), and has front and rear ring members 689 that are inserted into the fastening portion 682 .

The fastening portion 682 has a female screw portion into which a fastening screw is screwed into the connecting hole 764 of the light emitting operation production unit 700.
is connected to the displacement member 680 .

The extension portion 683 functions as a protective part to prevent the light-emitting action performance unit 700 from coming into contact with the inner member 670 when the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680 (see Figures 408 and 409 for the relative positioning of the extension portion 683 and the light-emitting action performance unit 700).

The tubular portion 684 has an irregularly shaped opening 684b formed on the inner side so as to penetrate the box-shaped single body portion 681 in the left-right direction, and fastening portions 684a formed at both positions on either side of the central axis passing through the irregularly shaped opening 684a so that fastening screws inserted into the anti-fall-off collar member 685 can be screwed in.

The cylindrical portion 684 is inserted into the first long hole 672 of the inner member 670, and a fall-off prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 684.
An irregular shaped opening 685a is formed as an opening having a size approximately equal to that of the irregular shaped opening 684b.

That is, when the fall-prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 684, an opening penetrating in the left-right direction is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 684 and the fall-prevention collar member 685. This opening functions as a through hole for electrical wiring connected to the light-emitting operation production unit 700. This will be described here.

The other end of the electrical wiring, one end of which is connected to the light-emitting operation performance unit 700, is led out from the wiring hole 762 (see FIG. 411) of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 to the outside, and is connected to the displacement member 68
The irregular opening 684b of the cylindrical portion 684 of the 0th embodiment and the irregular opening 684b of the fall-off prevention collar member 685 of the 0th embodiment
85 a and is brought outward beyond the first long hole 672 of the inner member 670 on the left and right sides, and further through the wiring through hole 613 of the outer member 610 and is brought outward beyond the plate-shaped portion 611 on the left and right sides.

The irregularly shaped opening 685a is not a simple circular opening, but has a protrusion (a portion through which a fastening screw is inserted) that protrudes inward from a diameter position of the circle, and when the irregularly shaped opening 685a rotates in the circumferential direction, the protrusion catches the electrical wiring, displacing the electrical wiring in the circumferential direction.
This can suppress friction between the irregular shaped opening 685a and the electrical wiring, making it easier to prevent breakage of the electrical wiring.

The other ends of the electrical wiring are routed from the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 to the rear side of the rear case 510 and connected to individual relay boards. The left and right outer areas of the plate-shaped portion 611 are at least hidden by the decorative fixing members 520 (see FIG. 403).

It is considered possible that the electrical wiring may be exposed at one end of the electrical wiring between the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the displacement member 680. In this embodiment, however, the electrical wiring may be exposed at the box-shaped main body 68
1 extends to the left and right inner sides so as to cover and conceal the electrical wiring, and the extension plate portion 763 of the light emitting operation production unit 700 extends to cover the electrical wiring in front of the wiring through hole 762 in a front view (see FIG. 411). This makes it easier to prevent the electrical wiring from being exposed at a position between the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the displacement member 680.

By passing the electrical wiring in this way, it is possible to avoid the electrical wiring being exposed in the left and right inner regions of the pair of left and right inner members 670. Therefore, problems that tend to arise when the electrical wiring is visible to the player, such as the electrical wiring being arranged in front of the third pattern display device 81 and hiding the display, thereby reducing visibility, and the electrical wiring being arranged in a disorganized manner, which makes it look dirty and reduces the presentation effect, can be eliminated. In other words, it is possible to improve the visibility of the third pattern display device 81 and hide the electrical wiring from the player.

At this time, the partition wall portion 677a can limit the placement of electrical wiring in the gap between the outer member 610 and the inner member 670, thereby preventing the electrical wiring from coming into contact with the lifting plate member 630, which is positioned closer to the front than the partition wall portion 677a.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 is formed into a rod shape with a flange by fitting E-rings to the left and right outer ends, which prevents the member from falling off from the left and right outer ends. The metal rod-shaped member 686 is inserted in the following order: the left and right inner ends pass through the ring member 687, the front and rear long hole 636 of the lift plate member 630, the ring member 687, the second long hole 673 (the curved long hole 674) of the inner member 670, and the rear long hole 636 of the lift plate member 630.
), the ring member 687, and the fitting recess 683a of the displacement member 680 are inserted in that order, and the extension portion 6
83 is fitted and fixed in the fitting recess 683a.

In this way, the metal rod member 686 is a member that is inserted through the lift plate member 630 and the inner member 670, and its vertical position depends on the change in position caused by the lift plate member 630's lifting and lowering operation.
The front-rear direction arrangement depends on the arrangement of the second long hole 673 and the curved long hole 674. The arrangement and posture of the displacement member 680 and the light emitting action production unit 700 to which the metal rod member 686 is fitted and fixed are changed by changing the arrangement of the metal rod member 686.
The changes in the position and posture of the light-emitting action production unit 700 will be described later.

The front and rear ring members 689 include a plate-shaped ring member 689a arranged on the box-shaped main body 681 side, and a flanged ring member 689b having a flange that extends outward from the end of the cylinder.

The plate-shaped ring member 689a and the flanged ring member 689b are configured to sandwich the light-emitting action production unit 700 between their respective plate-shaped portions arranged in front and behind each other.
The cylindrical portion 689b1 is disposed on the inner periphery of a connected hole 764 of an intermediate connecting member 760 described later.

The rotation posture assisting member 690 is positioned on the left and right inner side of the rectangular protrusion 678 of the inner member 670, and is fastened to the rectangular protrusion 678 by inserting a fastening screw from the left and right inner side and screwing it into the fastening portion of the rectangular protrusion 678.

The rotation posture assisting member 690 comprises a box-shaped main body 691 formed in a box shape with the left and right inner sides open and fastened to the rectangular protrusion 678, and a tubular member 695 arranged on the left and right inner sides of the box-shaped main body 691 and rotatably supported on the box-shaped main body 691.

The box-shaped main body 691 is provided with extension parts 692 extending downward from the left and right inner ends on the rear side, and a cylindrical member 695 is supported by a rotation shaft extending in the left and right direction on the left and right inner sides of the extension parts 692. In other words, the cylindrical member 695 is disposed at the rear side end and lower position of the box-shaped main body 691, and is disposed away from the player, so that the cylindrical member 695 does not stand out too much.

The light emitting operation production unit 700 is provided with the fastening parts 682 of the displacement members 680 arranged on both the left and right sides.
The position and posture of the displacement members 680 on both the left and right sides are changed, thereby changing the position and posture of the displacement members 680.

FIG. 414 is an exploded front perspective view of the light-emitting action performance unit 700, FIG. 415 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light-emitting action performance unit 700, and FIG.
FIG. 416 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting action production unit 700. FIG. 416 shows an exploded view of the light emitting action production unit 700 as seen from above.
In addition to 00, a displacement member 680 is shown in a corresponding arrangement.

The light emitting operation performance unit 700 includes a main body member 710 on which the rotation performance device 800 is disposed,
A lower plate member 730 is disposed below the main body member 710 and fastened to the main body member 710, and an intermediate plate member 74 is disposed between the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730 and closes the front side of the space.
0, a plurality of decorative members 750 fixed to the front side of the intermediate plate member 740, and a main body member 7
and a pair of left and right intermediate connecting members 760 arranged on both the left and right sides of the main body member 710 and fastened to the main body member 710 by fastening screws inserted from the left and right outside.

The main body member 710 is formed in a box shape with the bottom and front sides open, and the lower plate member 730
A plurality of fastening portions 711 are formed so that fastening screws can be inserted from below into the fastening portions 711, a front edge portion 712 is provided extending downward from the front side edge of the top plate, and an intermediate plate member 74 is provided between the front edge portion 712.
A plurality of clamping parts 713 are arranged opposite to the front edge part 712 with a dimension capable of clamping 0, and a pair of left and right fixed plate parts 720 are formed so as to connect the top plate and the rear side wall part on both the left and right sides,
Equipped with.

The fixed plate portion 720 is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane intersecting the left-right axis so as to be able to support the intermediate connecting member 760 on a surface thereof, and has a plurality of fastening portions 721 formed so that fastening screws can be screwed into the intermediate connecting member 760 from the left and right outer sides and used to fasten the intermediate member 760.
and a recessed portion 722 recessed in a substantially semicircular shape at the lower end on the rear side.

The recessed portion 722 has a semicircular central axis aligned with the wiring hole 7 formed in the intermediate connecting member 760.
62. As a result, the opening formed by the recessed portion 722 and the lower plate member 730 and the wiring hole 762 can be aligned in a straight line from side to side, making it easier to pass the electrical wiring through the wiring hole 762.

The lower plate member 730 has a plurality of insertion holes 731 for inserting fastening screws that are screwed into the fastening portions 711 of the main body member 710, and a plurality of protrusions 731 arranged in front and rear facing each other near the front edge portion.
32.

The lower plate member 730 is formed so that the left and right outer parts of the lower surface are light-diffusing, and the visibility when looking through the member toward the back side is reduced.
Even when the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 is viewed from the lower plate member 730 side (see FIG. 6), the electrical wiring, driving device, etc. arranged inside the unit can be made difficult to see.

In addition, the left and right inner parts of the lower surface of the lower plate member 730 (the substantially circular white parts in FIG. 416) are
It is also possible to draw a pattern, a figure, etc. As a result, even in a situation where the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 is arranged on the front upper side of the third pattern display device 81 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 (see FIG. 399) and the player can see the bottom surface, the pattern or figure of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 can be made visible to the player, so that the performance effect can be maintained.

The protrusions 732 are formed to perform the same function as the front edge 712 and the clamping portion 713 of the main body member 710. That is, the protrusions 732 are arranged side by side in the front and rear direction with a dimension capable of clamping the intermediate plate member 740.

The intermediate plate member 740 is formed in a thin plate shape that curves so that the left and right central portions protrude toward the front side in accordance with the shape of the front edge portion of the lower plate member 730, and a plurality of illumination boards 741 are fastened and fixed to the rear side.

The intermediate plate member 740 is held by being sandwiched between the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730. That is, the upper edge of the intermediate plate member 740 is sandwiched between the front edge 712 of the main body member 710 and the sandwiching portion 713.
The lower edge of the intermediate plate member 740 is held by being clamped between the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730. Therefore, compared to the case where the intermediate plate member 740 is fastened to the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730, the number of fastening screws required for assembly can be reduced.

The illumination board 741 is arranged at the left and right center and at both left and right sides, and is configured to be able to irradiate light to the front side from light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side. This allows for a light-emitting effect that makes the decorative member 750 emit light.

The light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 741 only irradiates light to the front side, and no light emitting means for irradiating light downward (on the lower plate member 730 side) is arranged.
When the player visually recognizes the light emitting action presentation unit 700, the position is diagonally above the front of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 399), so the light irradiated from the third pattern display device 81 is irradiated onto the lower plate member 730. That is, the brightness of the lower plate member 730 can be secured by the light irradiated from the third pattern display device 81, so that the possibility of the presentation effect of the lower plate member 730 being reduced can be reduced.

The decorative member 750 comprises a central decorative member 751 which is arranged at the left-right center of the intermediate plate member 740 and has a three-dimensional shape made of a thin-walled resin material, and a pair of left and right fastened members 755 which are arranged on both the left and right sides of the central decorative member 751 and are fastened to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing fastening screws which are inserted into the intermediate plate member 740 from the back side.

The fastened member 755 has a plurality of fastening portions 756 into which fastening screws are screwed, and the central decorative member 751 has a plurality of position-retaining holes 752 which have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portions 756 and are drilled at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 756.

The central decorative member 751 is fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 not by a fixing means dedicated to the central decorative member 751, but by inserting a fastening portion 756 for fastening the fastened member 755 to the intermediate plate member 740. Therefore, the number of steps required to assemble the central decorative member 751 to the intermediate plate member 740 can be reduced, and the number of fastening screws can also be reduced.

In this embodiment, the multiple fastening portions 756 are connected to each other by plate-shaped portions 757 having a curved cross-sectional shape. The plate-shaped portions 757 are shaped to correspond to the base-end contact surface portions 753 that are the edge portions of the central decorative member 751 and that contact the front surface of the intermediate plate member 740.

As a result, when the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 756 so that the fastened member 755 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740, the base end abutment surface portion 753 can be supported by being sandwiched between the plate-shaped portion 757 and the intermediate plate member 740, thereby stabilizing the positioning of the central decorative member 751.

The intermediate connecting member 760 will be described with reference to Figures 417(a) to 417(d). In the description of Figures 417(a) to 417(d), Figures 414 to 416 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 417(a) is a front view of the right intermediate connecting member 760, FIG. 417(b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIVb in FIG. 417(a), and FIG.
417(c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIVc in FIG. 417(a), and FIG. 417(d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member 760 taken along line LIVd-LIVd in FIG. 417(a).

The intermediate connecting member 760 is a portion disposed opposite the fixed plate portion 720 of the main body member 710, and includes a plate-shaped portion 761 having a plurality of insertion holes 761a through which fastening screws are inserted to be screwed into the fastening portion 721, and wiring holes 761a formed in the lower portion on the rear side of the plate-shaped portion 761 in the left-right direction.
62, an extended plate portion 763 extending in a planar plate shape in the left-right direction from the plate-shaped portion 761, a connected hole 764 formed in an outer side portion in the width direction of the extended plate portion 763, a pair of connecting plate portions 765 extending in a width direction central portion of the extended plate portion 763 so as to connect to the plate-shaped portion 761, and
and a shielding extension plate 766 extending to the side of the shielding plate 766 .

Two insertion holes 761 are arranged in the front and rear of the intermediate connecting member 760 at approximately the center in the vertical direction.
The angle between the line connecting a and the horizontal line HL71 that faces horizontally is designed as an inclination angle θ71. Although the inclination angle θ71 is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, the inclination angle θ71 is set to about 5 degrees.

The plane on which the extension plate portion 763 is formed is disposed on the vertical line VL71 (angle is set to 0) that faces the direction of gravity (that faces a direction perpendicular to the horizontal line HL71).
3 is arranged on the vertical line VL71, the above-mentioned light emitting action production unit 7
This makes it easier to assemble the displacement member 680 from the front side.

The inclination angle θ71 of the insertion hole 761a corresponds to the inclination angle of the rotation member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 in a state in which the light emitting operation performance unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680. Therefore, it is possible to realize a design (see FIG. 418 ) in which the initial attitude of the rotation performance device 800 of the light emitting operation performance unit 700 is inclined while maintaining the workability of assembling the intermediate connecting member 760 to the displacement member 680.

In this case, even when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted or intermediate state, the optical axis of the light irradiated from the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 can be directed diagonally forward.
This allows the light emitted from the rotating member 810 to illuminate areas near the edges of the game board 13 (for example, areas where light from the third pattern display device 81 has difficulty reaching), making the entire game board 13 brighter and easier to see.

The connected holes 764 are formed in two locations on each of the extended plate portions 763, but are formed so that the left and right holes have different shapes. That is, in the left intermediate connecting member 760, long holes 764a are formed on the left and right sides of both widthwise sides of the extended plate portion 763. On the other hand, in the right intermediate connecting member 760, long holes 764a are formed on one widthwise side of the extended plate portion 763 (upper side in FIG. 399), and a support hole 764b having a substantially circular shape is formed on the opposite widthwise side (lower side in FIG. 399) (see FIG. 399).

The connecting plate portion 765 is a portion for reinforcing the plate portion 761 so as to be able to maintain the angular relationship (positional relationship) between the plate portion 761 and the extension plate portion 763. In the posture shown in FIG. 416, the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 supporting the plate portion 761 is along the vertical direction (gravity direction), so that the extension plate portion 763 is unlikely to break relative to the plate portion 761 due to the weight of the light-emitting action production unit 700 itself.

On the other hand, as described later, the intermediate connecting member 760 is configured to be tiltable, and
When the extension plate portion 763 is tilted forward by 0 degrees, the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 is the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the gravity direction).
7, the weight of the light-emitting performance unit 700 causes the extension plate portion 76 to move relative to the plate-shaped portion 761.
Number 3 is easy to break.

In contrast, in this embodiment, since the connecting plate portion 765 is used for reinforcement, it is possible to easily prevent the extension plate portion 763 from breaking relative to the plate-shaped portion 761. In other words, it is possible to easily avoid problems (such as breakage) caused by changes in the posture of the intermediate connecting member 760.

The shielding extension plate 766 has the function of blocking the view to the connecting hole 764 when viewed from an upward direction (see Figure 416), and the function of expanding the decorative presentation area by forming a decorative pattern on the outer surface (underside of Figure 416).

416 , just as a decorative pattern is formed on the lower surface of the shielding extension plate 766 of the intermediate connecting member 760, a striped pattern is also formed on the lower surface of the box-shaped main body 681 of the displacement member 680. This makes it easier to visually recognize the lower surface of the shielding extension plate 766 and the lower surface of the box-shaped main body 681 as one unit, and therefore makes it possible to increase the area in which the decorative pattern (decorative pattern, striped pattern) is formed and make it visible.

This improves the presentation effect of the intermediate connecting member 760 and the displacement member 680 when viewed looking up at the light-emitting operation presentation unit 700 in the assembled state of the operating unit 500 (see Figure 399).

Therefore, when viewed from the upward direction, not only when the left and right central parts of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 are viewed, but also when the left and right ends are viewed, the light-emitting operation production unit 70
This can improve the presentation effect by using 0.

The rotation performance device 800 comprises a rotating member 810, a drive motor 820 that generates a driving force for rotationally displacing the rotating member 810, and an attitude detection means 830 that rotates synchronously with the rotating member 810 and detects the attitude of the rotating member 810.

The rotating member 810 is rotatably supported by the main body member 710 of the light emitting operation production unit 700, and a low-friction bearing is used for the support.
Even when the rotating member 810 is rotated, the degree to which the load caused by the rotation of the rotating member 810 is transmitted to the light emitting action production unit 700 can be reduced.

The rotating member 810 includes a decorative plate 811 on which a decoration is formed, a heat sink 812 formed to have an outer shape corresponding to the decorative plate 811 and disposed opposite the decorative plate 811, and a heat sink 812 that is disposed between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812.
The rotary base member 813 is fastened to the main body member 710 and has a circular cross section, and is supported by the main body member 710 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction at the center position of the circular cross section.
and a heat sink 812.

The decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 are similarly shaped components formed from a colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and the decorative plate 811 is mainly decorated with figures and patterns, while the heat sink 812 is provided with air intake openings 812a arranged in a row from the rotating base member 813 side, which serves as the base end of the rotation, to the tip end side of the rotation (the longitudinal end side of the rotating member 810).

The arch-shaped transparent member 814 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material and is attached to the decorative plate 811.
The decorative plate 811 has an arch shape that follows the curved surface of the heat sink 812, and is fixed between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812. Light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on an illumination board (not shown) disposed between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 passes through the arch-shaped transparent member 814 and travels in a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating member 810.

The light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board are connected to the rotating member 8 in the same manner as the intake opening 812a.
The LEDs are arranged in a row along the curved shape of the rotating member 810, and the intervals between the rows are set narrower than the intake openings 812a. By turning on and off the LEDs in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member 810 (rotating light emission effect), it is possible to perform an afterimage display (afterimage display by afterimage effect) in which a specific display is visually recognized by the afterimage of light.

The light emitted from each LED is configured to travel through each passage that is partitioned so that the light is adjacent to each other in the radial direction of rotation inside the rotating member 810 and extends in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation, and is formed so as not to enter other passages. This makes it possible to clarify the travel path of the light emitted from each LED (the diameter of the displacement trajectory of the LED light in the rotational light emission performance), and therefore makes it possible to visually recognize the afterimage display as a clear display.

A roughened surface (diffusion processing) is formed on the concave side surface of the arch-shaped transmitting member 814. This allows the LED light to be diffused by irregular reflection, so that glare is reduced compared to when the LED light is viewed directly.

The following describes the intake opening 812a of the heat sink 812. The intake opening 812a is drilled in the tangential direction of the rotational circumferential direction of the rotating member 810, and acts to take in air between the decorative plate 811 and the heat sink 812 when the rotating member 810 is rotated and displaced.

In the configuration of the position between the decorative plate 811 and the heat dissipation plate 812, the opposite side (lower side in FIG. 414) of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 is open, making it possible to exhaust air. In addition, between the decorative plate 811 and the heat dissipation plate 812, a recess that extends continuously along the arch shape extending in the radial direction of rotation is formed as an air passage.

That is, when the rotating member 810 rotates, the air taken in from the intake opening 812a passes through the recess along the arch shape of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 and flows outward in the radial direction of rotation, and is discharged to the back side, so that the air can be discharged into the atmosphere. This air flow can dissipate (radiate) the heat inside the rotating member 810 to the outside, making it easier to avoid problems caused by the illumination board becoming too hot.

The arch shape of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 allows air to be smoothly sent to the rear side, preventing the generation of vortexes. This allows air to be smoothly taken in from the rear side of the rotating base member 813, allowing cooling to be performed near the rotating shaft.

In other words, when air is made to flow radially outward, the air pressure on the radially inner side drops, so air can be taken in from the rear side, and the air flow can be circulated during rotation, thereby producing a sustained heat dissipation effect.

The cooling effect of the air flow is not only expected when performing the rotating light effects,
Various embodiments are exemplified. For example, even when the rotating member 810 is swung back and forth in a retracted state or intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, air circulation through the intake opening 812a occurs, and the illumination board can be cooled.

In this embodiment, in consideration of the decorativeness, the decorative plate 811 is not formed with the intake opening 812a (see FIG. 400).
Since it acts to take in air in the direction of travel of 2a, if the rotation direction is fixed in one direction, the side that takes in air will be biased to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, which may halve the cooling effect of the illuminated board.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotating member 810 is not fixed in one direction, but is controlled so that it rotates in one direction in a first performance mode and in another direction in a different second performance mode. This makes it possible to prevent the air intake side from being biased to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, and a sufficient cooling effect for the illumination board can be expected.

The posture detection means 830 comprises a detection gear 831 which meshes with a gear portion supported on the rotation shaft of the rotating member 810 and rotates synchronously with the rotating member 810, and a detection sensor 832 which has a detection groove arranged at a position where an extension portion extending parallel to the axial direction from the radial outer portion of the detection gear 831 can enter, and which is capable of detecting the phase of the detection gear 831 by detecting that the extension portion has entered the detection groove.

The posture detection means 830 can be designed in any way to detect the posture of the rotating member 810. In this embodiment, the rotating member 810 is
The position at which the extension portion of the detection gear 831 is formed is designed so that it can at least detect that when the decorative plate 811 is placed on the side, the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is aligned in the left-right direction and the decorative plate 811 is placed on the front side (proper posture, see Figure 414).

Figures 418 to 420 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line LV-LV in Figure 399. The game board 13 is not shown in Figure 399, but cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in an assembled state are shown in Figures 418 to 420. Figures 418 to 420 show the time series of the internal operation unit 600 changing from the retracted state to the extended state.

That is, in FIG. 418, the internal operation unit 600 is shown in a retracted state, and in FIG.
The internal operating unit 600 is illustrated in an intermediate state, and in FIG.
is shown in an extended state.

As shown in Fig. 418 to Fig. 420, the internal operation unit 600 is configured so that the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 are displaced in the process of changing the state from the retracted state to the extended state. The displacement of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 is configured so that displacement in the up-down direction and displacement in the forward rolling direction occur stepwise, as will be described in detail later.

In the configuration of this embodiment, the arrangement of the rotation performance device 800, which is particularly eye-catching, will be described. Since the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 change their posture in the forward rolling direction, the forward and backward arrangement of the rotation performance device 800 in the extended state is located closer to the front than the forward and backward arrangement of the rotation performance device 800 in the retracted state and intermediate state.

In this way, by positioning the rotation performance device 800 on the rear side in the retreated state, space can be secured on the front side of the rotation performance device 800, so that the decorative portion 247 and the illumination board 25 can be easily installed.
On the other hand, when executing the rotation light emitting effect in which the rotation effect device 800 rotates in the extended state, the position of the rotation effect device 800 can be brought closer to the player, so that the impact of the rotation light emitting effect can be increased. Therefore, the effect of the effect of both the retreated state and the extended state can be improved.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation direction LD81 from the rotation performance device 800 is set to the front side in the extended state. On the other hand, in consideration of the use for light performance in the intermediate state and the retracted state, the light irradiation direction LD81 is set to a direction facing diagonally forward rather than directly upward. This makes it possible to avoid an extreme decrease in the utility value of the rotation performance device 800 as a light performance means in the intermediate state and the retracted state. The details of the light performance will be described later.

The light irradiation direction LD8 of the rotation performance device 800 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retreated state
1 is set diagonally forward, the angle of change in posture in the forward rotation direction required for the light emitting operation production unit 700 to change its posture from the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 to the extended state is smaller than 90 degrees. This makes it possible to reduce the time and space required for the posture change compared to when the posture change angle is configured at 90 degrees.

When the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the light emitting operation performance unit 700 supporting the rotation performance device 800 is inclined in the forward rotation direction, so that the front-to-rear width becomes slightly larger.
Therefore, normally, the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is positioned closer to the rear side, or designed so that the displacement of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 is contained inside the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 when viewed from the front, in order to avoid collision between the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the base plate 60.

However, when the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is placed closer to the back side, the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is farther away from the player, and the impact of the presentation may be halved. Also, when the displacement of the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is restricted inside the central opening 60b, the action tends to be smaller, and the impact of the presentation may be halved.

In contrast, in this embodiment, space is secured on the rear side by utilizing a central structural unit 240 that is thinner than the base plate 60. Furthermore, the front-to-rear arrangement of the illumination board 251 for improving the presentation effect is contained within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and a recess 252a is formed in the board holding plate 252 to form a gap between it and the light-emitting operation presentation unit 700. This improves the freedom of positioning and placement of the light-emitting operation presentation unit 700,
The light emitting action presentation unit 700 is prevented from colliding with the configuration of the game board 13.

The change in posture of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 in the forward rolling direction does not start in the retreated state, but rather they descend in the same posture up to the intermediate state, and then the posture change starts from the intermediate state. The start position of this posture change is the first long hole 672, as described later.
This is determined by the shapes of the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674, and is configured not to be changed by the control mode of the drive device (drive motor 648, solenoid 651).

In the intermediate state, the vertical position H1 of the lower edge of the decorative portion 247 in the cross section at the center of the left and right (FIG. 41)
As can be seen from the fact that the rotation performance device 800 is positioned lower than the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 (see reference 9), a central opening 60b is located in front of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800, and the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is not disposed thereon, so there is no possibility of collision.

When the position of the light emitting action production unit 700 starts to change in the forward rolling direction from this state where there is no possibility of collision, the light emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 move in the forward rolling direction.
This can reduce the possibility of collision with 3.

This makes it possible to avoid the space for arranging the illumination board 251 and the decorative part 247 being restricted by overlapping with the displacement trajectory of the forward rotation direction displacement of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800. Therefore, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the arrangement position of the illumination board 251 and the decorative part 247.

Next, a description will be given of a configuration for stepwise dividing the displacement mode of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800. In this embodiment, the displacement of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 is configured to be guided by two long holes having different shapes.

421(a) to 421(c) are schematic side views of the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674, which are schematic views of the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674. FIG.

Figure 421(a) illustrates the arrangement of the components when the internal operating unit 600 is in a retracted state, Figure 421(b) illustrates the arrangement of the components when the internal operating unit 600 is in an intermediate state, and Figure 421(c) illustrates the arrangement of the components when the internal operating unit 600 is in an extended state.

In order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 421(a) to FIG. 421(c), the lift plate member 630
The front and rear long holes 636 and the outer shapes of the box-shaped main body portion 681 and extension portion 683 of the displacement member 680 are shown with imaginary lines, and the outer lines of the tubular portion 684 and metal rod-shaped member 686 of the displacement member 680 (the outer lines of the portions surrounded by the first long hole 672, the second long hole 673, and the curved long hole 674) are shown with solid lines.

As shown in Fig. 421(a) to Fig. 421(c), in this embodiment, the first long hole 672, the second long hole 673, and the curved long hole 674 are formed in different shapes, and the way in which the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod-like member 686, which correspond to the vertical position and posture of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700, are guided changes depending on the arrangement, so that the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 is configured to be displaced in stages. This will be described in detail below.

The driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 680 that holds the light-emitting performance unit 700 by the lift plate member 6
421(a) to 421(c), the front-rear long hole 636 is located on the most upstream side of the transmission path of the driving force generated by the drive motor 648 (see FIG. 410).

In other words, as the lift plate member 630 moves up and down in the vertical direction, the metal rod member 686 arranged inside the front-to-rear long hole 636 moves in the allowable direction, and other parts move in response to the displacement of the metal rod member 686.

First, the first long hole 672 and the second long hole 673 are arranged so that their longitudinal directions coincide with the vertical direction and are parallel to each other. Therefore, while the metal rod member 686 is guided to the second long hole 673 and the cylindrical portion 684 is guided to the first long hole 672 (between the retracted state and the intermediate state), the displacement of the light-emitting performance unit 700 connected to the displacement member 680 in the forward rolling direction is suppressed and the light-emitting performance unit 700 is displaced in parallel to the vertical direction.

Next, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided into the curved long hole 674, which is formed along an arc with the center of the tubular portion 684 in the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600 (the state in which the tubular portion 684 is abutting the lower end of the first long hole 672) as the central axis J1, and is connected to the lower end of the second long hole 673.

Therefore, while the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided into the curved long hole 674 (between the intermediate state and the extended state), the upper and lower positions of the tubular portion 684 are maintained, and as the metal rod-shaped member 686 rotates and displaces around the central axis J1, the light-emitting performance unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction around the central axis J1.

When the lifting plate member 630 is moved upward from the state shown in Figure 421 (c), a driving force is transmitted to the metal rod member 686 via the front and rear long holes 636, but no driving force is transmitted directly from the lifting plate member 630 to the cylindrical portion 684.

Therefore, the cylindrical portion 684 is maintained in contact with the lower end of the first long hole 672 until the internal operating unit 600 reaches the intermediate state (see FIG. 421(b)).
When the internal operating unit 600 moves from the intermediate state to the retracted state (see FIG. 421 (a)), the tubular portion 684 moves upward in such a manner that the tubular portion 684 is lifted by the lifting plate member 630 via the box-shaped main body portion 681 to which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is fixed.

That is, the displacement of the displacement member 680 accompanying the descent of the lift plate member 630 is as shown in FIG.
421(c) through the state of FIG. 421(b). The displacement of the displacement member 680 caused by the lift plate member 630 rising is as shown in FIG.
) through the state of FIG. 421(b) to the state of FIG. 421(a).

The driving force of these displacements is transmitted by the front-rear long hole 636, whose displacement direction is specified as the up-down direction (linear direction), and whose front-rear length is set to a length sufficient to allow the metal rod member 686 to pass through the curved long hole 674. In other words, since there is no need to switch the displacement direction of the front-rear long hole 636 in accordance with changes in the displacement mode of the light-emitting performance unit 700, the design of the lifting plate member 630 can be simplified.

In addition, while the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotating performance device 800 in the retracted state is set diagonally forward, while the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotating performance device 800 in the extended state is set forward, the displacement angle of the light-emitting performance unit 700 in the forward rotation direction is designed to be slightly smaller than 90 degrees.

As shown in Figures 421(a) to 421(c), the first long hole 672 is formed wide, one purpose of which is to form a gap large enough to pass electrical wiring through, since the irregular opening 684b (see Figure 413(a)) of the tubular portion 684 functions as a wiring through hole for passing electrical wiring.

As another purpose, the larger the diameter of the shaft supported when the light-emitting performance unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction, the larger the support area (area of the peripheral surface). This reduces the load (frictional force) generated per unit area of the support part (first long hole 672) when the light-emitting performance unit 700 is displaced with a change in posture, thereby preventing local wear and tear.
This can improve the durability of the first long hole 672 and the second long hole 674. This can improve the degree of freedom in designing the materials of the components, and can provide sufficient durability even if the cylindrical portion 684 is made of a resin material, for example.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are elongated holes for guiding the displacement of the metal bar member 686, and are narrower than the first elongated hole 672. The driving force generated by the driving motor 648 is
The force is transmitted to the metal rod member 686 via the lift plate member 630. Although the metal rod member 686 has a small diameter, it is made of metal, and since it is not necessary to pass electrical wiring through it and the inside is filled, it can exhibit sufficient strength.

The width of the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are narrowed, so that the metal rod member 6
Since the clearance between the light emitting operation production unit 700 and the light emitting operation production unit 86 can be reduced,
The displacement can be stabilized.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the misalignment of the metal rod-like member 686 in the intermediate state (a state in which the displacement in the up-down direction and the displacement in the forward rolling direction are switched) of the internal operation unit 600. This allows the gradual switching of the displacement of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 to be performed smoothly.

The direction in which the weight of the light-emitting action production unit 700 acts during the displacement process will be described.
The center of gravity G1 is shown in the figure.

Although it is the lift plate member 630 that regulates the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680, the cylindrical portion 684 is not directly supported by the lift plate member 630.
It is suspended from the lift plate member 630 via the box-shaped main body portion 681, the extension portion 683 and the metal rod-shaped member 686, and its position is maintained by the first long hole 672 restricting its displacement.

Therefore, when the internal operation unit 600 is moved from the retracted state to the intermediate state, the weight of the light emitting operation production unit 700 rotates the cylindrical portion 684 along the direction about the metal rod member 686 as the rotation axis.
Since a load that displaces the cylindrical portion 684 downward (a load in the backward direction centered on the metal rod-shaped member 686 ) is generated, the weight of the light-emitting action production unit 700 itself urges the cylindrical portion 684 diagonally downward toward the front.

As a result, the cylindrical portion 684 is brought into contact with the front side surface of the first long hole 672, and the large diameter ring member 68
Since the large diameter ring member 688 and the first long hole 672 can be configured to roll in one direction (see FIG. 413(a)), wear on the tubular portion 684, the large diameter ring member 688 and the first long hole 672 can be suppressed compared to the case where the rotational direction is not fixed and the ring member 688 slides.

On the other hand, from the intermediate state to the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the cylindrical portion 684 is supported from below by the first long hole 672 (the downward displacement is restricted). Therefore, the weight of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 maintains the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 684 at the lower end of the first long hole 672, and generates a load that displaces the metal rod member 686 downward along the direction with the cylindrical portion 684 as the rotation axis (load in the forward rotation direction centered on the cylindrical portion 684), so that the weight of the light-emitting operation production unit 700 urges the metal rod member 686 in a direction along an arc centered on the central axis J1.

Therefore, since the load when the internal operating unit 600 starts to change from the intermediate state to the extended state is generated by its own weight, the displacement can be smoothly generated. In this embodiment, since the center of gravity G1 is disposed between the metal rod member 686 and the cylindrical portion 684 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the distance from the metal rod member 686 and the cylindrical portion 684, which serve as the axis, to the center of gravity G1 from becoming excessively long.

This makes it possible to prevent the load in the rotational direction around the metal rod member 686 and the load in the rotational direction around the cylindrical portion 684 from becoming excessive, and to generate the appropriate magnitude.

During the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680, the metal rod member 686 is configured to pass the tubular portion 684. With this configuration, the tubular portion 684 is stopped and the metal rod member 686
The only part that can be displaced vertically is the casing.

In comparison with the case where the cylindrical portion 684 is also displaced upward when the metal rod member 686 starts to be displaced upward from the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, the driving force required to start the upward displacement of the displacement member 680 can be reduced. This allows the drive motor 648 to be made smaller.

Furthermore, by shortening the vertical displacement range of the cylindrical portion 684, it is possible to shorten the vertical displacement range of the electrical wiring inserted through the cylindrical portion 684. This makes it easier to prevent breakage of the electrical wiring.

The following describes how the light-emitting action production unit 700 and the rotation production device 800 look when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, the light-emitting action production unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction to perform different types of light-emitting performances.

422 to 424 are front views of the operating unit 500. In addition, in Fig. 422 to 424, for convenience of explanation, the outer rail 62, the decorative part 247 of the central component unit 240, and the outer shape of the decorative board 251 are illustrated typically, and the inside of the decorative part 247 and the decorative board 251 are illustrated in a state where they are painted white.

422 to 424, the inside of the decorative part 247 and the illumination board 251 are painted white to express low light transmittance. In reality, the illumination board 251 is made of an opaque material and blocks the player's view, but the decorative part 247 is made of a light-transmitting material, so the player can see through it even though it has low light transmittance (it is possible to see the configuration on the back side through the decorative part 247).

422 shows the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, FIG. 423 shows the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 424 shows the extended state of the internal operating unit 600.

As shown in FIG. 422, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retreated state, the rotation effect device 800
is disposed behind the decorative portion 247 and the illumination board 251, and most of it is hidden when viewed from the front.
Therefore, the visibility of the rotation effect device 800 itself is reduced.
When the lift plate member 630 is detected by the detection device (not shown) by entering the detection groove of the detection device, the voice lamp control device 113 detects that the lift plate member 630 is located at the upper end of the vertical displacement.
(See FIG. 4)

Furthermore, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 are viewed in a state separated by the decorative part 247. Therefore, when the light-emitting operation unit 700 performs a front-facing light performance by shining light irradiated from the illumination board 741 (see FIG. 414) on the decorative member 750, and the rotation performance device 800 performs an upward-facing light performance by irradiating light toward the outer rail 62, each light performance can be viewed separately, so that each light performance can be highlighted.

In this embodiment, the bow-shaped surface that serves as the part through which light is emitted from the rotating performance device 800 (the surface that is positioned opposite the outer rail 62 in the vertical direction when viewed from the front) and the outer rail 62 are designed to have a similar shape as an upwardly convex curved shape.

Therefore, when the rotation performance device 800 is in a position different from the position for performing the rotation light emission performance described later, the rotation performance device 800 can be visually recognized as if it were a member for illuminating the outer rail 62. This can increase the utility value of the rotation performance device 800 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, and the internal operation unit 600
This improves the appearance of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 in the retracted state.

One effective effect that can be achieved by using light irradiated from the rotation effect device 800 onto the outer rail 62 is a right-hit suggestion effect in which the light is visually perceived as moving along the path of the ball.
For example, the order in which light is emitted from the rotation performance device 800 can be changed starting from when the leftmost LED emits light onto range E1 of the outer rail 62 located above, and then the adjacent LED on the right emits light onto range E2 of the outer rail 62, and then ranges E3, E4, and so on.In addition, the LED that emitted light can be set to a first light emission control mode in which it is turned off a certain amount of time (for example, one second) after the illumination timing, making it appear as if the light is moving to the right along the outer rail 62, thereby notifying the player that it is time to hit to the right.

In this case, in order to create a right-hit suggestion effect, it is possible to save the effort of dotting the game board 13 (see Figure 381) with illuminated boards or designing figures or pictures to suggest a right hit to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the right hit suggestion effect is not limited to the case where it is performed only by the light emission effect by the rotation effect device 800, and various modes are exemplified. For example, in addition to the light emission effect by the rotation effect device 800, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board scattered on the game board 13 may be made to emit light, and in addition to the light emission effect by the rotation effect device 800, a figure or picture for suggesting a right hit may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the position of the rotation performance device 800 is set on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 made of transparent resin, so no nails are placed in front of the rotation performance device 800. This prevents the device from being affected by reflections from nails.
This makes it easier for players to see the light emitted from the rotation performance device 800.

In addition, as described later, the rotation performance device 800 can perform a rotation light emitting performance when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, but can also be used as a device that can perform a right hit suggestion performance by shining light on the outer rail 62 when the internal operation unit 600 is in a retracted state that is different in posture from the extended state. In other words, the rotation performance device 800 can be used for performances with different purposes.

In addition, the light effect executed by the rotation effect device 800 is not limited to the right hit suggestion effect. For example, a light effect may be executed in which an upward arrow is visually recognized by the player as a notice effect in which the central light emitting means 251b of the illumination board 251 as the effect device executes a light effect.

As shown in FIG. 423, in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation effect device 800
are disposed below the decorative portion 247. This increases the visibility of the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 and the rotation presentation device 800 by the amount that is not blocked by the decorative portion 247, as compared to the retracted state.

Furthermore, compared to the retracted state, it becomes easier to grasp that the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the rotation performance device 800 are integrally configured, and the vertical distance between the outer rail 62 and the rotation performance device 800 is wider.

Therefore, the role of the rotation performance device 800 can be easily recognized not as a component for illuminating the outer rail 62, but as a component that performs light performance integrally with the decorative member 750 of the light-emitting action performance unit 700.

This gives the player the illusion that what was a small presentation element in which the central decorative member 751 was just barely visible when the internal operating unit 600 was in the retracted state has transformed into a large presentation element in the intermediate state that includes not only the central decorative member 751 but also the rotating presentation device 800.

As shown in Fig. 424, the rotation effect device 800 is in a position in which the light irradiation direction LD81 faces the front side when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state. In this state, when light is irradiated from the rotation effect device 800 in the above-mentioned first light emission control mode, the light can be visually recognized as moving to the right along the left-right direction. This method can also be used to make the player understand that this is a right hit suggestion effect.

In addition, the arrangement of the specific winning openings 65a in the game area in this embodiment (see FIG. 394)
In contrast, when the specific winning hole 65a is located on the lower right side of the game area, the attitude of the rotation performance device 800 may be changed so that the longitudinal direction of the rotation performance device 800 is inclined downward to the right, and light may be emitted in this attitude in the above-mentioned first light emission control mode. In this case, since the specific winning hole 65a is located at the destination of the light, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the ball should be shot toward the specific winning hole 65a.

The rotation performance device 800 is arranged so as to be capable of performing one or more rotations in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600. There is no particular limitation on the speed of the rotational operation, but for example, when rotating at high speed, the blinking of the light irradiated from the rotation performance device 800 for each arrangement may be finely controlled so that figures or patterns can be seen during rotation (it may be configured as a so-called versa-light device).

In FIG. 424, the lift plate member 630 is disposed at the lower end of the vertical displacement.
When 35 enters the detection groove of a detection device (not shown) and is detected by the detection device, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 367) can determine that the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is facing in the forward/backward direction.

This detection may be used as a flag to control the rotation of the rotating member 810 so that the rotation light emission effect can be performed.
It can also be used as a detection device to detect the timing when the rotational light emission performance can be started.

Fig. 425 is a front view of the operating unit 500. In Fig. 425, for the sake of convenience, the outer rail 62, the decorative part 247 of the central component unit 240, and the outer shape of the decorative board 251 are illustrated in a schematic manner, and the inside of the decorative part 247 and the decorative board 251 are illustrated in a state where they are painted white.
In Figure 425, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the outline of the afterimage when the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 is rotating at high speed is shown by imaginary lines.

The high-speed rotation speed of the rotating member 810 is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the rear side becomes difficult to see due to an afterimage, or such that the configuration on the rear side can be seen through a position where the rotating member 810 is not disposed, although an afterimage occurs.

Figure 425 shows a light effect (rotating light-emitting effect) of the rotating performance device 800, in which the rotating member 810 rotates at a rotational speed that makes it difficult to see the structure on the rear side due to an afterimage, and an example of a figure (a large arrow pointing to the right) that is controlled to be visible during rotation is shown.

In FIG. 425, for ease of understanding, the possible arrangements of the rotating member 810 are shown as 45.
The rotating member 810 is shown shifted at an angle of 10 degrees, but in reality, only an afterimage is visible, and the rotating member 810 rotates at a rotation speed at which it is difficult to clearly see the outline of the rotating member 810. By making the figure visible as shown in FIG. 425, it is possible to notify the player (
This helps the player understand that it is the right time to hit.)

A specific method for implementing the rotational light emission effect will be described. Inside the rotating member 810, a plurality of LEDs are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, and are arranged so that light travels toward the front side through an arch-shaped transparent member 814. Therefore, the diameter of the locus (circular path) along which the LEDs move when the rotating member 810 is rotated around the rotation axis RJ1 is 1/100th of the diameter of the rotation axis RJ1.
Depends on the distance from J1.

In FIG. 425, when the arrangement of each moving LED accompanying the high speed rotation of the rotating member 810 is switched on or off depending on whether it is inside or outside the figure to be displayed (right-pointing arrow in FIG. 425), the afterimage of light viewed through the arch-shaped transparent member 814 is viewed as a single unit, and a specific figure (right-pointing arrow in FIG. 425) is displayed.
can be visually recognized by the player.

The displayed figures can be varied in a variety of ways by switching the timing of the on/off control of each LED in response to the rotation of the rotating member 810, thereby improving the freedom of presentation of light-emitting effects using the rotating member 810.

In this way, according to this embodiment, a notification effect (right hit suggestion effect) for the same purpose can be executed in various ways by using the rotation effect device 800. That is, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, it can be executed in a manner in which light is irradiated onto the outer rail 62, and when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, it can be executed both in a manner in which the rotation effect device 800 does not rotate and in a manner in which it rotates.

Therefore, compared to a case where there are few variations in the notification performance (for example, only one),
This makes it difficult for players to predict the outcome of the game, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the notification effect of suggesting right-handed hit is described as an example, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and various effects are exemplified. For example, the notification effect may be such that the direction of light or the direction of the arrow alternates between left and right to suggest that the ball will be shot alternately between left and right, or the notification effect may be such that the direction of the light or the direction of the arrow is changed to the left to suggest that the ball will be returned to left-handed hit.

In addition, for example, by performing a light emission performance so as to display an arc shape concentric with the outer rail 62 during high-speed rotation in the rotation light emission performance in the extended state, the rotation performance device 8 in the retreated state can be
As with the 00, the light emission effect that matches the shape of the outer rail 62 can be continued even in the extended state. This allows the light emission effect to have consistency.

As shown in FIG. 425, the rotational performance device 800 is capable of rotating at high speed when the internal operating unit 600 is in an extended state, but since the rotational light-emitting performance is designed on the assumption that the rotational axis of the rotational performance device 800 is maintained, this embodiment employs a configuration that supports the rotational performance device 800 so that it does not become displaced by the load generated perpendicular to the rotational axis due to high-speed rotation.

First, the restriction of the left-right displacement of the rotation performance device 800 will be described. The light emitting action performance unit 700 is held by connecting the connecting hole 764 of the intermediate connecting member 760 to the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680. Of the pair of connecting holes 764 on the left and right, only the lower right one is formed as a support hole 764b with a substantially circular shape rather than an elongated hole, and the others are formed as elongated holes 76
It is formed as 4a.

Here, by making the connected hole 764 to which the fastening portion 682 is connected an elongated hole 764a, it is possible to allow the displacement members 680 on both the left and right sides to shift vertically when the light emitting action production unit 700 is displaced vertically (see FIG. 402). On the other hand, if the unit is configured with only the elongated hole 764a, the rotation production device 800 may shift horizontally when the rotation production device 800 rotates at high speed.

In contrast, by using at least one hole as the support hole 764b as in the present embodiment, the support hole 764b can restrict the movement of the fastening portion 682 in the left-right direction. Therefore, even if the rotation performance device 800 rotates at high speed during the rotation light emission performance, the rotation performance device 800 can rotate at high speed.
Therefore, the positional deviation of 0 in the left and right directions can be suppressed.

426(a) to 426(c) show the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680 and the connected hole 7
426(a) to 426(c), the longitudinal direction (left-right width direction) of the light emitting action production unit 700 is a schematic front view of the long hole 764a and the support hole 764b of the light emitting action production unit 700.
00L.

That is, in FIG. 426(a), the schematic straight line 700L is arranged along the left-right direction, so that the light emitting operation production unit 700 is maintained in a horizontal position.
426(a), the state in which the light-emitting action production unit 700 is inclined due to the schematic straight line 700L inclining upward to the left is illustrated at the maximum allowable inclination angle, and in FIG. 426(c), the state in which the light-emitting action production unit 700 is inclined due to the schematic straight line 700L inclining upward to the right is illustrated at the maximum allowable inclination angle.
This corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 399 and 400, and the state shown in FIG. 426(c) corresponds to the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 426(a) to FIG. 426(c), the slope of the schematic straight line 700L is
This occurs due to a rotational displacement with the support hole 764b as the fulcrum. In Fig. 426(b), the position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front and rear ring member 689 abuts against the left end of the long hole 764a located in the upper left of the drawing is illustrated, and up to this state, the rotation (clockwise rotation as viewed from the front) of the schematic straight line 700L (corresponding to the light-emitting operation production unit 700) is permitted.

In FIG. 426(c), the front and rear ring members 6 are inserted into the right end of the long hole 764a located in the upper right corner of the drawing.
89 comes into contact with the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the straight line 70.
Rotation of 0L (corresponding to the light-emitting action performance unit 700) (counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the front) is permitted.

In this manner, unlike the case where the support holes 764b are used at multiple positions, this embodiment can tolerate positional deviation in the direction of the straight line UD71 along the vertical direction of the fastening parts 682 arranged on the left and right. Therefore, in a configuration in which the lifting and lowering operation of the light emitting operation production unit 700 is performed by simultaneously driving the drive motors 648 arranged on the left and right, it is possible to tolerate deviation in the operation timing between the drive motors 648 and variations in the rotation speed.

The rotation of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is permitted as a displacement in the movement direction of the lifting plate member 630 (the direction along the straight line UD71, the up and down direction) when the opening direction of the support hole 764b is in the front-to-back direction as shown in FIG. 426 (when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted or intermediate state).

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation production unit 700 is tilted and displaced so that the opening direction of the support hole 764b is approximately in the vertical direction (in this embodiment, when the angle with respect to the vertical direction is 5 degrees, i.e., when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, see FIG. 425), the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is a direction along a plane that is approximately perpendicular to the straight line UD71 (in this embodiment, a direction along a plane that is at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the front-back direction), and the straight line UD7
It intersects with 1 at a right angle.

The lift plate member 630 is guided by the long hole 612 (see FIG. 412) to displace in the direction of the straight line UD71, while the forward/backward displacement is restricted, thereby suppressing the forward/backward displacement of the light emitting action producing unit 700. Therefore, when the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is along a plane approximately perpendicular to the straight line UD71, the allowable range of rotation of the schematic straight line 700L is suppressed.

In other words, even under conditions where the long hole 764a is formed, it is possible to suppress misalignment of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 relative to the lift plate member 630 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state.

In this case, as described above, the rotation light emission effect in which the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed is controlled to be executed in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600, so that the rotation axis R of the rotating member 810
This can prevent the position of J1 from shifting during the rotation light emission performance, making it possible to omit the provision of a separate member for fixing the position of the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotating member 810.

In addition, in this embodiment, the support hole 764b is disposed on the opposite side of the rotating member 810 (the rear side in the state of FIG. 425), so that the misalignment caused by the rotation of the rotating member 810 (the light-emitting operation production unit 70) is smaller than when the support hole 764b is disposed on the side closer to the rotating member 810.
This can make it easier to limit misalignment that occurs on the front side of the substrate 10.

When the light emitting motion production unit 700 is tilted and displaced, a load in the rotational direction is generated in the intermediate connecting member 760 in a direction away from the displacement member 680 (in a direction in which the fastening portion 682 (see FIG. 413) protrudes) (see FIG. 416).
This may cause overload and damage the device.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the light emitting action production unit 700 is in a slightly tilted position (FIG. 4
18) is set to the initial position, the intermediate connecting member 760 is in contact with the displacement member 68 before the tilting displacement.
In other words, since the intermediate connecting member 760 is disposed close to the displacement member 680 on the side close to the cylindrical portion 684 (see FIG. 413( a)) which serves as the rotation axis of the displacement member 680, it is possible to easily generate a load acting on the intermediate connecting member 760 in a direction away from the displacement member 680 as a load in the rotation direction of the displacement member 680, and the fastening portion 682
The load applied to the

Next, a description will be given of the regulation of the vertical displacement of the rotation performance device 800. In this embodiment, the vertical displacement of the abutment plate 638 of the lift plate member 630 can be regulated by the resistance generating device 650, and the regulation can be performed when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state.

427 to 429 show the operation unit 50 taken along the line LXIV--LXIV in FIG.
4. The line LXIV-LXIV is a cross-sectional view of the lift plate member 630.
399, the game board 13 is not shown, but Figs. 427 to 429 show cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled position.

427 shows the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, FIG. 428 shows the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 429 shows the extended state of the internal operating unit 600.

427 to 429 show the solenoid 651 in a non-energized state, with no current being applied to the solenoid 651. In addition, in FIG. 428, for reference, the solenoid 65
1 is shown partially cut away in a state in which current is passed through the solenoid 651 and the solenoid 651 is excited.

As shown in FIGS. 427 and 429, when the solenoid 651 is in a non-excited state, the front-rear displacement member 653 of the resistance generating device 650 is located on the front side, and the abutment plate 638 of the lifting plate member 630 is
Enter into the migration path of

The upper and lower side surfaces of the contact plate 638 and the upper and lower side surfaces of the front-rear displacement member 653 are formed in a plane perpendicular to the up-down direction. This allows the movement direction (up-down direction) of the contact plate 638 to coincide with the direction of the load that the contact plate 638 receives from the upper and lower side surfaces of the front-rear displacement member 653 in that movement direction.

Therefore, the load applied from the abutment plate 638 to the front-rear displacement member 653 does not have a rearward component, so that the front-rear displacement member 653 can be prevented from being pushed out to the rear side. Therefore, the state in which the front-rear displacement member 653 is positioned on the front side is maintained.

427, the front-rear displacement member 653 abuts against the abutment plate 638 in the up-down direction, and functions to prevent downward displacement of the abutment plate 638. In other words, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the front-rear displacement member 653 can prevent the lifting plate member 630 from being displaced downward by its own weight, so that the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the retracted state.

In this embodiment, an upward biasing force is generated by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 410) on the lifting plate member 630. By designing the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 to be large enough to maintain the internal operating unit 600 in the retracted state, it is possible to maintain the internal operating unit 600 in the retracted state without causing the front-to-rear displacement member 653 to function.

On the other hand, in this case, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 becomes large, and the lift plate member 63
Since the driving force generated by the driving motor 648 to move the position sensor 644 downward becomes large,
It may become necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 648. In contrast, by adopting a configuration in which the internal operation unit 600 is maintained in the retracted state by the front-rear displacement member 653 as in this embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 can be reduced as a purely auxiliary force, and the drive motor 648 can be made smaller.

429, the front-rear displacement member 653 abuts against the abutment plate 638 in the up-down direction, and functions to prevent the upward displacement of the abutment plate 638. In other words, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the front-rear displacement member 653 can prevent the lifting plate member 630 from being upwardly displaced, so that the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the extended state.

The load that causes the lift plate member 630 to move upward is assumed to be a load caused by inertia during rotational light emission of the rotation performance device 800 (see FIG. 425). That is, when the rotation performance device 800 rotates at high speed, the rotation performance device 800 may be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, but the displacement in the up-down direction can be prevented by the front-rear displacement member 653.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the internal operation unit 600 is moved by the front-rear displacement member 653.
This can prevent not only the downward displacement of the lift plate member 630 in the retracted state, but also the upward displacement of the lift plate member 630 in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600.

The state shown in Figure 428 corresponds to a non-excited state in which the lifting plate member 630 is displaced downward when the solenoid 651 is energized and excited (see the cut-out area in Figure 428), and then the power supply to the solenoid 651 is released.

That is, in this embodiment, when the solenoid 651 is excited, the front-rear displacement member 6
Since solenoid 653 is removed from the displacement trajectory of the abutment plate 638, the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 630 is permitted. Even if solenoid 651 becomes de-energized during the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 630, the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 630 is not immediately restricted, and the vertical displacement can continue with the abutment plate 638 sliding against the front side of the front-to-rear displacement member 653.

In other words, the load that the lift-up plate member 630 receives during its up-down displacement can be configured in two ways: a state in which the lift-up plate member 630 receives no load from the front-rear displacement member 653 because the front-rear displacement member 653 does not come into contact with the abutment plate 638; and a state in which the lift-up plate member 630 receives a frictional force by coming into contact with the front-rear displacement member 653.
These can be switched by energizing the solenoid 651 or not.

The shape of the front side surface of the front-to-rear displacement member 653 that abuts against the abutment plate 638 is not limited in any way, but in this embodiment, it has a planar shape perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction across a pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614, and has a curved surface shape that curves away from the abutment plate 638 on the upper and lower outer sides of the guide protrusions 614.

As a result, the vertical width of the contact surface with the abutted plate 638, whose rear side surface is a flat surface perpendicular to the front-rear direction, can be increased, and the contact area can be secured. This increases the frictional force that the lift-up plate member 630 receives from the front-rear displacement member 653, and the lift-up plate member 630
The degree to which the brake is applied can be increased in both the upward and downward directions.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the lifting plate member 630 during up-down displacement can be braked (or stopped) by the front-rear displacement member 653. That is, the front-rear displacement member 653 can be used both as a member for maintaining the arrangement of the lifting plate member 630 at the upper and lower ends (the retracted state and the extended state of the internal operation unit 600) and as a member for braking the lifting plate member 630 during displacement.

The driving force is transmitted to the rack gear portion 634 of the lifting plate member 630 via the meshed transmission gear 649, and as described above, the rack gear portion 634 of the lifting plate member 630 is forced rearward by its own weight, thereby optimizing the meshing state between the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 and improving the efficiency of transmission of the driving force.

In contrast, when braking the lift plate member 630, the abutted plate 6
The load applied to 38 is a frontal load, which acts to move rack gear 634 away from transfer gear 649.

Therefore, when the front-rear displacement member 653 abuts against the abutted plate 638, not only is there a deceleration effect due to braking caused by the frictional force generated at the abutment position, but there is also a deceleration effect due to worsening the meshing state between the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 (reducing the degree of meshing to reduce the transmission efficiency of the driving force). This allows the lifting plate member 630 to be braked (decelerated) efficiently.

An example of the switching control of the current supply to the solenoid 651 will be described.
The following description will be given with reference to the retracted state of 00. First, before the drive motor 648 starts to be driven, the solenoid 651 is energized to retract the front-rear displacement member 653 from the displacement locus of the contact plate 638.

As a result, the lift plate member 630 becomes displaceable in the up and down direction, so the drive motor 648 starts to drive, and the internal operation unit 600 is displaced downward toward the extended state. By de-energizing the solenoid 651 in a state before the extended state (for example, when the internal operation unit 600 is in an intermediate state), the front-rear displacement member 653 is pressed against the abutment plate 638 (
428), the lift plate member 630 can be braked by frictional force.

In this state, when the internal operating unit 600 reaches the extended state, the abutment plate 638 is positioned below the displacement trajectory of the front-to-rear displacement member 653, so that the front-to-rear displacement member 653 is displaced to a front position by the return spring of the solenoid 651 (see Figure 429).

Therefore, the action exerted on the abutted plate 638 by the forward/rearward displacement member 653 is
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly change from braking to position restriction without switching on and off the current supply to the first brake.

On the other hand, when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced upward from the extended state, the lift plate member 630
By maintaining the supply of electricity to the solenoid 651 during the vertical displacement of the front-rear displacement member 653
This makes it possible to maintain a state in which the front-rear displacement member 653 does not come into contact with the abutted plate 638. This makes it possible to prevent frictional resistance from occurring between the front-rear displacement member 653 and the abutted plate 638.
The driving force required for the upward displacement of the lift plate member 630 can be reduced, and the driving motor 648 can be made smaller.

It will be described that the manner of the rotation operation of the rotation performance device 800 changes in response to the state change of the internal operation unit 600. In this embodiment, the attitude of the rotation performance device 800 also changes when the attitude of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 changes to a forward rotation direction or a backward rotation direction, and the rotation operation (rotation angle) allowed for each attitude changes.

430 to 432 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along the line LXVII-LXVII in FIG. 399. The line LXVII-LXVII corresponds to a line passing through the center of the width of the cylindrical member 695 (see FIG. 400) of the rotation posture assist member 690.
The game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 430, but in FIGS. 430 to 432 cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in its assembled position are shown.

In Fig. 430, the internal operation unit 600 is shown in an extended state, in Fig. 431(a) and Fig. 431(b) the internal operation unit 600 is shown in an intermediate state, and in Fig. 432(a) and Fig. 432(b) the internal operation unit 600 is shown in a retracted state.
432, the internal operating unit 600 is shown in chronological order as it changes from the extended state through the intermediate state to the retracted state.

In addition, in Fig. 431(a) and Fig. 432(a), the rotating member 810 is shown in a proper posture in which the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is aligned with the left-right direction, and in Fig. 431(b) and Fig. 432(b),
8 shows a state in which the end of the rotating member 810 on the front side of the drawing has reached the end of its permitted movement towards the rear side.

In other words, in FIG. 431(b), the end of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510.
(In FIG. 431(b) , the state is shown in which the two are in contact with each other (although in FIG. 431(b) the two are in contact with each other to the right of the cross section shown in the drawing (the front side of the paper in FIG. 431(b) )).
432(b) shows a state in which the end of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the cylindrical member 695 of the rotational attitude assisting member 690 (although shown as not in contact in FIG. 432(b) , the end is in contact to the right of the cross section shown (the front side of the paper in FIG. 432(b) )).

In the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 shown in Fig. 430, the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 is configured to be able to rotate one revolution or more (360 degrees or more) in the rotation direction RD1 centered on the rotation axis RJ1, for example, to perform a rotation light emission performance. That is, the decorative part 247 and the like arranged on the center frame 86 are arranged in a position that does not enter into the movement trajectory of the rotating member 810 of the rotation performance device 800.

In Figure 431, the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 is arranged on the rear side of the rotating member 810 of the rotating performance device 800, so that the rotation angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotating performance device 800 is limited to the angle at which the rotating member 810 is displaced in the rotational direction RD1 and abuts against the rear case 510 (see Figure 431 (b)).

Basically, before the internal operation unit 600 changes from the extended state to the intermediate state, the rotation member 810 of the rotation performance device 800 is rotated so that the longitudinal direction of the rotation member 810 is aligned with the left-right direction.
Since the attitude of the rotating member 810 is controlled (controlled to a proper attitude) and then controlled to change its state toward the intermediate state, the possibility of the rotating member 810 and the bottom wall portion 511 colliding with each other is low.

In this embodiment, even if erroneous control causes the rotating member 810 of the rotating performance device 800 to collide with the bottom wall portion 511, the rotating member 810 is positioned so that it collides with the bottom wall portion 511 above the upper edge of the opening 511a of the bottom wall portion 511, so that the rotating member 810 can be prevented from colliding with the third pattern display device 81.

In FIG. 432, a rotation posture assisting member 69 is provided on the rear side of a rotation member 810 of a rotation performance device 800.
Since cylindrical member 695 of 0 is disposed, the rotatable angle of rotating member 810 of rotation performance device 800 is limited to the angle at which rotating member 810 is displaced in rotation direction RD1 and comes into contact with cylindrical member 695. That is, the rotatable angle of rotating member 810 of rotation performance device 800 in the retracted state is smaller (see FIG. 432(b)) than in the intermediate state (see FIG. 431(b)).

In this embodiment, when the rotating member 810 is rotated and displaced until it abuts against the bottom wall portion 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, even if the state change continues until the internal operation unit 600 is in the retreated state, the state change (light-emitting operation production unit 70
During the upward displacement of the rotating member 810 (upward displacement of the rotating member 810 from the vertical axis), the rotating member 810 comes into contact with the cylindrical member 695 and is pushed forward, thereby correcting the posture of the rotating member 810 so that the difference in posture from the appropriate posture of the rotating member 810 is reduced.

The rotating member 810 has a left-right symmetrical shape in the correct posture (see FIG. 424), and the cylindrical member 695 is disposed in a left-right symmetrical position. Therefore, even if a posture difference of the rotating member 810 occurs on either the left or right side (in any rotation direction around the rotation axis RJ1),
The posture of the rotating member 810 is corrected so that the posture difference between the correct posture of the rotating member 810 and the correct posture is reduced.

Since the rotating member 810 rotates around the rotation axis RJ1, the rotating member 810 comes close to the base plate 60 on the opposite side (the other left or right side) to the side (one left or right side, see FIG. 432) where the rotating member 810 displaces rearward and abuts against the cylindrical member 695. If the position is significantly deviated from the correct position, the rotating member 810 may wear out due to friction between the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60, or may be damaged due to a collision.

In response to this, the cylindrical member 695 functions as described above, so that the internal operating unit 600
In the process of changing the state toward the retracted state, the posture of the rotating member 810 changes to the side returning to the proper posture, so that the rotating member 810 on the other left or right side can be displaced in a direction away from the base plate 60. This makes it possible to avoid contact between the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60.

As described above, the cylindrical member 695 is a member that functions to push the rotating member 810 forward by contacting the rotating member 810, and is formed in a rollable, true circular cylindrical shape to prevent wear of the rotating member 810.
is configured so that the rotation of the rotating member 810 does not leave scratches on the rotating member 810.

In order to maintain this function, it is preferable to eliminate decorative shapes as much as possible.
If 5 is visually recognized by a player, the shape may be too simple when viewed together with other decorative parts, which may cause a sense of incongruity.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the tubular member 695 is positioned closer to the retracted position (upper and rearward) than the position of the rotating member 810 when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state, so that attention to the tubular member 695 can be reduced.

Furthermore, when the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state, the tubular member 695 is designed to be positioned on the rear side of the rotating member 810 (see Figure 399), so that the visibility of the tubular member 695 can be reduced by the rotating member 810.

Therefore, the shape of the tubular member 695 is designed to be optimal for avoiding wear on the rotating member 810, while at the same time reducing the visibility of the tubular member 695, thereby reducing the likelihood that the tubular member 695 will be seen by the player, allowing the player to continue playing without feeling uncomfortable.

The following describes the light effects that are possible due to the positional changes permitted for the rotating member 810 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state. As described above, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, light is irradiated from the rotation effect device 800 onto the outer rail 62, making it possible to produce an effect in which the outer rail 62 is illuminated.

In addition, by changing the posture of the rotating member 810 around the rotation axis RJ1, one of the rotating tips of the rotating member 810 can be displaced forward.
In this case, the tip of the rotation on the far side (left side) of the page can be brought closer to the front side, so that the left side of the outer rail 62 can be made to emit light more brightly and the right side can be made to emit light slightly darker. Also, by reversing the direction of the change in the attitude of the rotating member 810, the difference in brightness between the left and right sides can be reversed.

This allows for an effect in which the light emission intensity of the outer rail 62 is changed for each part. For example, the light emission intensity of the light emitted from the rotating member 810 is not changed, and
By repeatedly changing the position of the light guide 61 so as to move back and forth in the direction of rotation about the rotation axis RJ1, the apparent brightness caused by the light irradiated to the left and right of the outer rail 62 can be switched alternately between left and right.

The following describes the light effects that are possible due to the change in position allowed for the rotating member 810 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. As described above, in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotating member 810 can change its position at an angle larger than the angle of change in position in the retracted state. Therefore, the light irradiated from the rotation effect device 800 is reflected by the outer rail 62.
The light is shone onto the outer rail 62, and the position at which the light reaches in the effect of illuminating the outer rail 62 can be positioned closer to the front.

As a result, even if the rotating member 810 equipped with a light-emitting means such as an LED moves away from the outer rail 62, the position at which the light is reflected on the outer rail 62 can be changed to the front side (player side), so that the change in the intensity of the light irradiated to and reflected from the outer rail 62 is not noticeable to the player.

Furthermore, the range in which the light reaches is not limited to the outer rail 62, but the light can also reach parts that are located away from the outer rail 62, such as the sixth protrusion 277 of the upper connecting member 270 (see Figure 389).

The rotating member 810 can swivel around the rotation axis RJ1 located in the center of the left and right, allowing the longitudinal ends located on the outer left and right sides to be positioned forward one on each side, thereby assisting in lighting effects in areas (outer left and right positions) that are difficult to cover with the illumination board 251, which is designed to be located in the center of the left and right due to the strength of the base plate 60.

As a result, even if the placement of the illumination board 251 is limited, the performance of the light presentation in areas where the illumination board 251 is not placed can be improved by the light emission performance of the rotation presentation device 800 arranged in the operating unit 500.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 433. In the first embodiment, the recesses 982e, 982f, and 982g are provided for discharging the game balls from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.
In the above description, the ball discharge path is formed in front of the bulging portion 3982 that forms the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 433( a ) is a front view of the sorting unit 3980 in the third embodiment.
FIG. 433(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 3980.
), the sorting unit 3980 is configured to be able to discharge balls to the front side upstream of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the front base 3981 of the distribution unit 3980 is provided with a pair of openings 3982k formed through the bulge portion 982, and a discharge gutter 3982l that causes balls that pass through the openings 3982k and are discharged to the front side of the bulge portion 982 to flow down to the left and be discharged to the rear side.

The opening 3982k is disposed on the front side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 in a rectangular shape having a size that allows the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass through.

The discharge gutter 3982l has a long left-right portion that slopes downward toward the left, and a long front-rear portion formed at the left end of the discharge gutter 3982l that slopes downward toward the rear.
The air flows leftward along 82l, and at the left end position the flow direction changes to the rearward direction, and the air flows rearward.

In this embodiment, the discharge gutter 3982l is configured to receive balls on both sides of the pair of openings 3982k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the cost of parts.
A discharge gutter 3982l may be provided for each opening 3982k. In this case, the discharge gutter 3982l provided in front of the left opening 3982k is configured to be inclined downward toward the left, and the discharge gutter 3982l provided in front of the right opening 3982k is configured to be inclined downward toward the right, thereby making it possible to shorten the length of each discharge gutter 3982l.

The appearance of the sphere that has passed through the inlet 982d will now be described. The front base 3981 is formed from a colored semi-transparent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and the sphere that has passed through the inlet 982d and flows down the back side of the bulge portion 982 can be seen through the bulge portion 982.

On the other hand, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through which the balls flow are formed to extend to the rear of the electric role 140a, so that the balls flow down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through which the balls flow down are formed to extend to the rear of the electric role 140a.
A acts as an obstruction, making the ball less visible.

If the difference between whether or not the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 is due to the direction in which the ball flows downstream in the area behind the electric prop 140a, it is necessary to pay attention to the ball in the area with poor visibility.
This may cause the player to feel fatigued.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sphere that deviates from the path toward the detection device SE3 passes through the opening 398
Not only do the balls appear to approach from the player's line of sight as they flow toward the front through 2k, but because the flow toward the front occurs above the area hidden by the electric device 140a, the visibility of balls that have passed through the inlet 982d and are flowing in a direction that deviates from the detection device SE3 can be ensured.

This makes it easy to know that if a ball passes through the inlet 982d but no special symbol is drawn, this is because the ball has missed the detection device SE3.

Another design of the shape of the distribution unit 3980 will be described. In this embodiment, instead of forming the opening 3982k to secure the discharge path of the balls, the rear base 3985 has a first
The openings 985b, 985c (see FIG. 371) are omitted from the rear base 985 in the embodiment, and the left-right width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is correspondingly shortened.

This allows the width of the sorting unit 3980 to be reduced, so that the base plate 6
By making the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 368) of No. 0 small, it is possible to secure the area of the thick portion (portion in which the nail can be planted) of the base plate 60. This improves the degree of freedom in arranging the nails.

In addition, since it becomes possible to arrange nails in the vicinity of the electric role 140a, the degree of freedom in arranging the nails for guiding the ball to the electric role 140a can be improved.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 434. In the first embodiment, the recesses 982e, 982f, and 982g are provided for discharging the game balls from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2.
In the above description, the ball discharge path is formed on the rear side of the rear base 4985 that forms the rear side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 434( a ) is a front view of the sorting unit 4980 in the fourth embodiment.
FIG. 434(b) is a rear view of the sorting unit 4980.
As shown in FIG. 49, the sorting unit 4980 is configured to be able to discharge balls to the rear side upstream of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the rear base 4985 of the distribution unit 4980 is provided with a pair of openings 4985k formed on the left and right sides, and a discharge gutter 4985l which causes balls that pass through the openings 4985k and are discharged to the rear side of the rear base 4985 to flow down to the left and be discharged to the rear side.

The opening 4985k is disposed on the rear side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed through the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 in a rectangular shape large enough to allow the balls flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass through.

The discharge gutter 4985l has a long left-right portion that slopes downward toward the left, and a long front-rear portion formed at the left end of the discharge gutter 4985l that slopes downward toward the rear.
The air flows leftward along 85l, and at the left end position the flow direction is switched to the rearward direction, and the air flows rearward.

The discharge gutter 4985l is located on the rear side of the rear base 4985, away from the player, but the front base 981 and rear base 4985, which are located in front of it, are formed from a translucent resin material, so that the player can see the discharge gutter 4985l and the ball rolling in the discharge gutter 4985l through the front base 981 and rear base 4985.

In this embodiment, the discharge gutter 4985l is configured to receive balls on both sides of the pair of openings 4985k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the cost of parts.
Each opening 4985k may be provided with a discharge gutter 4985l. In this case, the balls can be discharged by flowing them at least rearward from each opening 4985l, so it is not necessary to form the discharge gutter 4985l long on the left and right. This simplifies the shape of the discharge gutter 4985l.

According to the configuration of this embodiment in which the discharge gutter 4985l is formed on the back side, it is possible to prevent the discharge gutter 4985l from being conspicuous, and therefore it is possible to prevent the discharge gutter 4985l from affecting the design of the base plate 60 near the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 368). Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the decorative pattern of the base plate 60.

Another design of the shape of the distribution unit 4980 will be described. In this embodiment, instead of forming an opening 4985k to secure a discharge path for the balls, the rear base 4985 has a first
The openings 985b, 985c (see FIG. 371) are omitted from the rear base 985 in the embodiment, and the left-right width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is correspondingly shortened.

This allows the width of the sorting unit 4980 to be reduced, so that the base plate 6
By making the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 368) of No. 0 small, it is possible to secure the area of the thick portion (portion in which the nail can be planted) of the base plate 60. This improves the degree of freedom in arranging the nails.

In addition, since it becomes possible to arrange nails in the vicinity of the electric role 140a, the degree of freedom in arranging the nails for guiding the ball to the electric role 140a can be improved.

According to the configuration in which the opening 4985k is formed on the rear side, the opening 4985k is formed on the front side (FIG. 4
33), the vertical arrangement of the opening 4985k can be arbitrarily designed regardless of the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a. Therefore, the probability that the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is detected by the detection device SE3 (passes through the detection hole SE1a) without deviation can be adjusted from the shape.

For example, if the vertical width of opening 4985k is designed to be equal to the diameter of the sphere, most of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will not pass through opening 4985k, but will pass through the detection hole SE1a of detection device SE3.

On the other hand, if the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, about 20% of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will pass through the opening 4985k, and the remaining 80% will pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3.
By arbitrarily designing the length of the vertical width of 85k, the probability of being detected by the detection device SE3 can be adjusted.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 435 and 436. In the second embodiment, the ball that reaches the upper connecting member 270 is smoothly guided left and right, but in the upper connecting member 5270 of the fifth embodiment, various measures are taken to suppress smooth guiding of the ball left and right. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 435 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG.
A partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line LXXIII-LXXIII in Figure 435.

As shown in FIG. 435, the upper component 5241 constituting the center frame 86 has left and right protruding portions 5246 protruding from the belt-shaped frame portion 245 toward the second protruding portion 5273.
The second protruding portion 5273 includes deceleration protrusions 5273 a protruding from a lower end portion thereof toward the left and right positions of the deceleration protrusions 5246.

According to this embodiment, when a ball that flows down between the pair of left and right first protrusions 272 or between the first protrusion 272 and the second protrusion 5273 reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 and rolls left and right, it flows down as if being ejected outward to the left and right from the left and right protrusions 5246, and is decelerated by colliding with the deceleration protrusions 5273a.

In other words, the velocity of a ball that has been launched with such force that it reaches between the pair of left and right first protrusions 272, or between the first protrusion 272 and the second protrusion 5273, and has such large kinetic energy, can be slowed down by colliding with the deceleration protrusion 5273a.

The overlap width (vertical dimension) of the ball contacting the deceleration protrusion 5273a is set to be equal to or smaller than the width of the left and right protrusions 524.
The deceleration time varies depending on the speed of the ball when it passes through the left and right protrusions 5246. That is, a ball passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 at high speed comes into contact with the deceleration protrusions 5273a over a wide area at a higher position, whereas a ball passing through the left and right protrusions 5246 at a slower speed is displaced to a lower position before coming into contact with the deceleration protrusions 5273a, and is kept in contact with the deceleration protrusions 5273a to the extent that it rubs against them.

Therefore, when the speed at which the ball passes through the left and right protrusions 5246 is high, a large deceleration effect can be expected, whereas when the speed at which the ball passes through the left and right protrusions 5246 is low, the deceleration effect can be suppressed, thereby preventing the ball from stopping.

According to this embodiment, the projectile is launched along the launch path HL51 with a strong launch force and the left and right protruding parts 5
A ball that reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 upstream of 246 (inner left and right) is decelerated by coming into contact with the deceleration protrusion 5273a during the rolling process, while a ball that is launched along the launch path HL52 with a weaker launch force and reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 downstream of the left and right protrusions 5246 (outer left and right) is not decelerated by the deceleration protrusion 5273a.

That is, the ball shot with a strong shooting force reaching the left and right center of the playing area is hit by the deceleration protrusion 52.
The deceleration action of the deceleration protrusion 5273a occurs, whereas the deceleration action of the deceleration protrusion 5273a does not occur for the ball launched with a weak launch force that reaches the left and right outer sides (left side) of the play area. This makes it possible to reduce the speed difference of the ball flowing down (flowing down when passing the lower end side of the belt-shaped frame portion 245) depending on the magnitude of the launch force (the magnitude of the kinetic energy).

436, an opening 5274a large enough for a ball to pass through is formed through the upper surface of the third protruding portion 5274. The opening 5274a is formed with a left-right width approximately equal to the diameter of the ball, and forms a passage for the ball together with a recessed portion 5271a formed by cutting out the plate-like portion 271. The recessed portion 5271a makes it easier to guide the ball toward the opening 5274a.

A through passage 5060d is formed in the front-rear direction through the base plate 60 as a passage for the ball that has entered the opening 5274a. A flow path component 5295 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the base plate 60, and the flow path component 5295 includes a guide flow path 5295a that receives the ball that has passed through the through passage 5060d and guides the ball outwardly to the left and right and downward.

The guide flow path 5295a is connected to the flow path rear component 266 (see FIG. 388) as a member that sends the balls to the upper surface of the band-shaped extension 263 so as to communicate with the internal path. This makes it possible to configure a ball path so that the balls that have flowed to the back side of the base plate 60 can be made to reappear on the upper surface of the band-shaped extension 263.

When the ball rolling on the band-shaped extension 263 (see FIG. 387) passes through the central rear inclined portion 263a and is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c, it falls toward the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 381). Due to this arrangement, the possibility that the ball rolling on the band-shaped extension 263 will enter the first winning hole 64 is significantly increased.

This can improve the attention to the ball that has passed through the opening 5274a and flowed to the back side of the base plate 60. In addition, it can increase the player's motivation to adjust the launching force so that the ball passes through the opening 5274a.

The subsequent flow path of the balls that flow to the back side is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, through holes may be formed in the base plate 60 at the left and right outer positions of the flow path front component 265 (see FIG. 381) so that the balls return to the front side of the base plate 60, or the flow path may be extended downward so that the balls flow down behind the left component 450 and the right component 470.

In the case where the flow-down path is extended downward so as to flow down behind the left component 450 and the right component 470, the flow-down path is arranged so as to at least partially overlap with the outer drop path FL2 (see FIG. 394) in a front view, so that the balls flowing down the back side of the base plate 60,
It is possible to make the ball appear as if it is flowing down toward the first ball guide portion 457.
This can improve the attention to the ball flowing down the back side of the base plate 60.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 437 and 438. In the second embodiment, the light emitting action presentation unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, but in the sixth embodiment, the light emitting action presentation unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13.
In addition, the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figures 437 and 438 are partial cross-sectional views of a pachinko machine 6010 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the LV-LV line in Figure 399. Figure 437 illustrates a state in which the light emitting action presentation unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, and Figure 438 illustrates a state in which the light emitting action presentation unit 6700 is arranged at the lower end position.

As shown in Figures 437 and 438, the pachinko machine 6010 has a front frame 6014 on the front side of the game board 13, and is configured so that when the front frame 6014 is locked to the outer frame 11, the first glass unit 6016a blocks the front side of the game area.

The front frame 6014 comprises the above-mentioned first glass unit 6016a and the second glass unit 6016b which is positioned closer to the front and has an inclined posture that inclines upward as it approaches the front side.

The first glass unit 6016a has a plate-shaped glass portion formed on the gaming area side with respect to the center frame 86, and an opening 6016c formed through the plate-shaped glass portion on the opposite side.
Since the glass unit 6016a has an open front side relative to the center frame 86, the glass unit 6016a does not obstruct the view when viewed from the front, thereby improving the visibility of the center frame 86 and the display of the third pattern display device 81 arranged inside it.

The second glass unit 6016b is a support portion 6014a that constitutes the periphery of the front frame 6014.
Since the second glass unit 6016b separates the player from the operating unit 500, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the operating unit 500 even if an opening 6016c is formed in the first glass unit 6016a.

The support portion 6014a is formed from an impermeable resin material and a metal material, and functions to hide the configuration disposed on the rear side thereof.

The light emitting action performance unit 6700 is the same as the light emitting action performance unit 700 described in the second embodiment, except for the different arrangement. That is, the light emitting action performance unit 6700 has a rotation performance device 800 rotatably disposed therein.

The front frame 6014 has a first long hole 672 and a second long hole 673 on the inside thereof, as described in the second embodiment.
The first long hole 6672, the second long hole 6673 and the curved long hole 6674 have the same shape as each other.
74 is formed in a state inclined by about 25 degrees in the forward rolling direction with respect to the posture in the second embodiment.

We will explain how the appearance of the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 changes as the positioning changes.
437, when the light emitting operation performance unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, the central decorative member 751 is barely visible, and the entirety of the rotating member 810 is concealed by the support portion 6014a of the front frame 6014. That is, when the light emitting operation performance unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, the visibility of the light emitting operation performance unit 6700 decreases.

On the other hand, when the light emitting action presentation unit 6700 is displaced downward diagonally backward, the part hidden by the support portion 6014a is positioned behind the second glass unit 6016b, and the entirety of the rotating member 810 becomes visible. Even when the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed around the rotation axis RJ1 to perform a rotation light emitting presentation, the player can see up to the tip of the rotation of the rotating member 810. That is, when the light emitting action presentation unit 6700 is positioned at the lower end position, the visibility of the light emitting action presentation unit 6700 is improved.

As shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 438, the rotation path of the rotating member 810 enters within the thickness dimension of the first glass unit 6014a, but the position where it enters is not covered by the opening 6016c.
8. The opening 6016c is formed in the first glass unit 6014a to prevent contact between the first glass unit 6014a and the rotating member 810.
10. It functions to improve the degree of freedom in placement of the optical fiber 10.

In this embodiment, a light emitting action presentation unit 6700 is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, while a light emitting action presentation unit 700 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13. The operation mode of the light emitting action presentation unit 700 is as described above in the second embodiment.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, as a performance action in which the movable unit extends to the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the light-emitting action performance unit 6700 may be moved toward the lower end position, or the light-emitting action performance unit 700 may be placed in an extending state of the internal operation unit 600.

In addition, the rotation light-emitting performance of the rotation performance device 800 may be performed by the rotating member 810 of the light-emitting action performance unit 700, or may be performed by the rotating member 810 of the light-emitting action performance unit 6700. This improves the degree of freedom in setting the execution position of the rotation light-emitting performance, and also increases the variation in execution (light-emitting action performance unit 700 or light-emitting action performance unit 6700).
This improves the design freedom by allowing for variations such as performing a rotating light-emitting effect on one of the lights 00, performing a rotating light-emitting effect alternately, or performing a rotating light-emitting effect simultaneously.

In addition, although the case where the light-emitting action production unit 700 is also arranged inside the rear case 510 has been described, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light-emitting action production unit 700 may be configured not to be arranged inside the rear case 510.

In this case, since the view is not obstructed by the light-emitting operation presentation unit 700 when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the upper edge of the third pattern display device 81 can be pulled upward to increase the area of the display region of the third pattern display device 81. Also, since the front-to-rear width of the rear case 510 required to accommodate the light-emitting operation presentation unit 700 can be shortened, the front-to-rear distance between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 can be shortened, and the visibility of the display by the third pattern display device 81 can be improved.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 439. In the second embodiment, the metal rod member 686 is guided by the second long hole 673 having a straight line shape and the curved long hole 674 having a curved shape, and the light-emitting action production unit 700 is switched between a state in which the light-emitting action production unit 700 moves in parallel and a state in which the light-emitting action production unit 700 rotates around the central axis J1 of the cylindrical part 684. However, the guide part 7673 in the seventh embodiment is formed in a protrusion shape that extends linearly along the vertical direction. The same reference numerals are used for the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 439(a) to FIG. 439(c) show the guide portion 7673 and L
7 is a schematic side view of a guide portion 7673 and an L-shaped slot 7674. FIG.
Figure 439(a) illustrates the arrangement of the components at the height when the internal operating unit 600 is in a retracted state, Figure 439(b) illustrates the arrangement of the components at the height when the internal operating unit 600 is in an intermediate state, and Figure 439(c) illustrates the arrangement of the components at the height when the internal operating unit 600 is in an extended state.

Furthermore, the position of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 in the extended state is shifted further rearward than the position of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 in the extended state of the internal operation unit 600 described in the second embodiment, as can be seen from the position of the cylindrical portion 684 being shifted rearward.

The guide portions 7673 are formed along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 673 described in the second embodiment, and are formed on the left and right inner surfaces of the outer member 610 as plate-like portions extending further downward, and are disposed so as to restrict the front-rear displacement of the metal rod-like member 686. The L-shaped elongated hole 7674 has a recessed portion 7674a formed rearward from the lower end of the curved elongated hole 674 described in the second embodiment, the recessed portion 7674a having a width capable of receiving the cylindrical portion 684.

The downward displacement of the displacement member 680 will be described. The displacement from FIG. 439(a) to FIG. 439(b) is a translation performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680.
439(c), the metal rod member 686 undergoes rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion 684, causing the displacement member 680 to tilt in the forward rotation direction.

At this time, the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction by entering and retracting from the recessed portion 7674a, since the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 is maintained. That is, while the posture of the displacement member 680 is changing, the position of the cylindrical portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 can be displaced by tilting while the displacement of the cylindrical portion 684 in the front-rear direction remains.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 440. In the second embodiment, the second long hole 673 for guiding the metal rod member 686 is provided extending in the vertical direction, but the second long hole 8673 in the eighth embodiment is provided extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

440(a) to 440(c) are diagrams showing the second long hole 8673, the curved long hole 8674, the third long hole 8675, the first long hole upper part 8672a, and the first long hole lower part 8672b in the eighth embodiment.
8 is a schematic side view showing a second long hole 8673, a curved long hole 8674, a third long hole 8675, a first long hole upper portion 8672a, and a first long hole lower portion 8672b.

FIG. 440( a ) illustrates a state in which the metal rod member 686 and the tubular portion 684 are disposed at the upper end position of the displacement range, and FIG. 440( b ) illustrates a state in which the metal rod member 686 is inserted into the second long hole 8673 .
FIG. 440 ( c ) shows a state in which the metal rod member 686 is positioned at a connecting position between the curved elongated hole 8674 and the third elongated hole 8675.

The first long hole upper portion 8672a and the second long hole 8673 are spaced apart from each other by approximately 7 mm in the front-to-rear direction.
The second elongated hole 8673 extends in a downwardly inclined direction at an inclination angle of 0 degrees. A curved elongated hole 8674 is connected to the lower end of the second elongated hole 8673.

The curved long hole 8674 is formed by connecting the cylindrical portion 684 to the first long hole upper portion 8672a and the first long hole lower portion 8672b.
When the cylindrical portion 684 is disposed at the connecting position with b, the cylindrical portion 684 extends in a curved shape along a circular arc centered on the central axis J81 of the cylindrical portion 684.

The upper end of the third long hole 8675 is connected to the lower end of the curved long hole 8674.
A first long hole lower portion 8672b and a third long hole 8675 connected to the lower end of 672a are extended forward in a direction inclined downward at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction.

The metal rod member 686 is inserted into the front and rear long holes 636 of the lift plate member 630, and its vertical position changes as the lift plate member 630 moves in the vertical direction.
The displacement of the displacement member 680 accompanying the change in arrangement will be described.

The displacement from Fig. 440(a) to Fig. 440(b) is a parallel movement performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. At this time, the displacement direction of the displacement member 680 is not vertical, but a direction having a component in the front-back direction. From the player's perspective, the displacement member 680 appears to be descending and retreating toward the rear, so that it can be made to appear as if the size of the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 is getting smaller (moving away) as the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 descends and appears.

In the displacement from Fig. 440(b) to Fig. 440(c), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is rotationally displaced around the cylindrical portion 684, so that the displacement member 680 tilts in the forward direction. Accordingly, the visible side of the light-emitting action presentation unit 700 can be switched. In this embodiment, the tilt angle is larger than that of the second embodiment, so that the back side of the rotating member 810 (see Fig. 414) can be visually recognized by the player.

At this time, the cylindrical portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction by entering and retracting from the recessed portion 7674a, since the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 is maintained. That is, while the posture of the displacement member 680 is changing, the position of the cylindrical portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 can be displaced by tilting while the displacement of the cylindrical portion 684 in the front-rear direction remains.

440(c), when the metal bar member 686 is further displaced downward, the displacement member 680 is displaced forward along the third long hole 8675. Therefore, it can be made to look to the player that the displacement member 680 is protruding forward while descending.
At this time, the temporary rearward displacement along the second elongated hole 8673 can accentuate the forward protrusion.

In this embodiment, the displacement resistance of the cylindrical portion 684 is increased when the cylindrical portion 684 is disposed at the connecting position between the first long hole upper portion 8672a and the first long hole lower portion 8672b.
The inner surface of first elongated hole lower portion 8672b is formed from a material having a larger friction coefficient than the friction coefficient of the other portions of first elongated hole lower portion 8672b and the inner surface of first elongated hole upper portion 8672a.

As a result, the first metal rod member 686 is inserted until it reaches the end position of the curved long hole 8674.
This makes it easier to maintain the cylindrical portion 684 at the connecting position between the elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b.

The method of maintaining the tubular portion 684 at the connecting position between the first long hole upper portion 8672a and the first long hole lower portion 8672b is not limited to using a material with a large friction coefficient, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the shape of the inner surface of the first long hole upper portion 8672a or the first long hole lower portion 8672b may be formed from a shape with a large friction coefficient (e.g., an embossed shape).

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 441. In the second embodiment, the long hole 764a through which the fastening portion 682 is inserted is long in the left-right direction and short in the up-down direction.
The large diameter hole 9764a of the ninth embodiment is a cylindrical portion 689b1 of the flanged ring member 9689b.
The inner diameter of the circular hole is sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the hole. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 441(a) and FIG. 441(b) are LXXVIIIa-LXXVIII of FIG. 400.
A partial cross-sectional view of the displacement member 9680 and the light-emitting action performance unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line a.

441(a) shows a state in which the fastening portion 682 faces approximately in the front-rear direction (a direction inclined upward by 3 degrees toward the front) and the upper edge of the large diameter hole 9764a abuts against and is supported by the cylindrical portion 689b1.
The posture of 80 is switched, and the state in which the brim-equipped ring member 9689b and the light-emitting action production unit 9700 are supported by the head of the fastening screw B91 fastened to the fastening portion 682 is shown.

In this embodiment, the manner in which the plate-shaped ring member 689a that sandwiches the large diameter hole 9764a from both sides and the brim-equipped ring member 9689b abut with the light-emitting action performance unit 9700 is different.
That is, the plate-shaped ring member 689a abuts against the light-emitting action production unit 9700 at the plate plane portion. On the other hand, the flanged ring member 9689b extends in a 3 mm direction from the tip of the flange toward the cylindrical portion 689b1.
The inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed over 60 degrees abuts on a chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 formed over 360 degrees at the end of the large diameter hole 9764a.

In the state shown in FIG. 441(a) (corresponding to the retreated state or intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the fastening portion 682 is inclined in the backward tilt direction, so that the light emitting operation production unit 97
00 moves rearward and comes into contact with the plate-shaped ring member 989a.

Since this contact is on a flat surface, the sliding frictional force against the rotational displacement of the light emitting operation production unit 9700 around the fastening portion 682 is small, and at least the large diameter hole 976
The light emitting operation production unit 9700 can be displaced by the gap between the cylindrical portion 689b1 and the light emitting operation production unit 9700. Therefore, the light emitting operation production unit 9700 can be allowed to rotate.

On the other hand, in the state shown in Figure 441 (b) (a state corresponding to the extended state of the internal operation unit 600), the tip of the fastening portion 682 faces downward, causing the light-emitting operation performance unit 9700 to sink downward and come into contact with the brimmed ring member 9689b.

This contact is between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed over 360 degrees and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 formed over 360 degrees, so the light emitting operation production unit 9700 is arranged so that the center of the large diameter hole 9764a coincides with the center of the fastening portion 682, and the large diameter hole 9764a is aligned with the center of the fastening portion 682.
The chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 of the flanged ring member 9689b and the inclined surface portion 9689
By filling the gap between b2 in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the fastening portion 682, the displacement of the light emitting action performance unit 9700 can be limited (regulated).

The weight of the light emitting action production unit 9700 is determined by the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 and the inclined surface portion 968.
Since the light emitting action production unit 9b2 is pressed against the light emitting action production unit 9b2, the light emitting action production unit 9b2 is pressed against the light emitting action production unit 9b2 by using gravity.
The degree of restriction on the displacement of 700 can be increased.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the degree of tolerance (limitation) of the displacement of the light emitting action production unit 9700 can be switched in accordance with the change in the posture of the displacement member 9680.
Even in the case where a large diameter hole 9764a, which is a through hole having a simple circular cross section, is used, when the displacement member 9680 is in a tilted and displaced state (see FIG. 441(b)), the light emitting operation production unit 9
This can prevent the position of the sensor 700 from shifting in the front-rear and left-right directions.

As a result, when the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 425) rotates at high speed, the light emitting action production unit 9
Since it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the rotating member 700 from shifting, it is possible to advantageously perform the afterimage display using the rotating member 810.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 442. In the second embodiment, the detection sensor 832 detects that the rotating member 810 has reached the correct posture, which facilitates tilting displacement in the front-rear direction of the rotation performance device 800. However, in the tenth embodiment, the rotating member 810 is biased to the correct posture by a posture detection means 10830. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Fig. 442(a) and Fig. 442(b) are front views of the rotating member 810 and the attitude detection means 10830 in the tenth embodiment. In Fig. 442(a) and Fig. 442(b), the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated in a protruding state, the outer diameter of the rotating member 810 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the fixed gear 10815 fixed to the rotating member 810 is illustrated by a solid line.
FIG. 442(b) illustrates the proper posture of the rotating member 810, and FIG. 442(a) illustrates a state in which the rotating member 810 is angularly deviated from the proper posture (displaced about 15 degrees in the rotational direction around the rotation axis RJ1).
, 10821, 10831 are shown by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 442(a) and FIG. 442(b), the rotating member 810 is driven by the drive motor 82.
The driving force of the driving gear 10821 fixed to the driving shaft of the fixed gear 108 is transmitted to the fixed gear 108 through gear meshing.
The fixed gear 10815 is configured to be rotatable by being transmitted to the position detecting means 10830, and the fixed gear 10815 is meshed with a detection gear 10831 of the position detecting means 10830.

The detection gear 10831 includes a weight portion 10831a formed by pressing over an angular range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis. In this embodiment, the weight portion 10831a is a metal member fitted to the detection gear 10831, but may be integrally formed from a resin material.

According to this configuration, the center of gravity of the detection gear 10831 is positioned toward the center of the weight portion 10831a (on the line connecting the rotation axis and the center of the arc). Therefore, even if the rotation of the rotating member 810 stops in a position other than the correct position (see Figure 442 (a)), the detection gear 10831 is biased by gravity, so that the rotating member 810 can rotate and return to the correct position.

Therefore, even if the rotating member 810 cannot be stopped accurately in the correct posture as the stopping posture of the drive motor 820 after the internal operation unit 600 has performed the rotation light emission performance in the extended state (see FIG. 424), the rotating member 810 can be returned to the correct posture afterwards, so that the accuracy of posture detection of the rotating member 810 can be relaxed. This allows the production cost to be reduced.

In this embodiment, the rotation axis R of the internal operation unit 600 in the intermediate state and the extended state is
J1 does not face vertically but faces forward (see Figures 431 and 432).
Therefore, the biasing force due to gravity using the weight portion 10831a can be generated regardless of the attitude of the rotating member 810 in the forward tilt direction.

This makes it possible to realize not only a movement mode in which the rotating member 810 is set to the correct posture when the internal operating unit 600 is in the extended state, and then the posture of the rotating performance device 800 is changed in the rising direction, but also a movement mode in which the rotating member 810 is moved while being returned to the correct posture during the rising operation of the rotating performance device 800 or during vertical displacement.

Furthermore, when the rotation performance device 800 performs a rising motion from the posture of Fig. 442(a) (see the time series of Fig. 430 to Fig. 432), the rotation member 810 receives air resistance on the back side and can be returned to the proper posture. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation member 810 is shaped so as to be easily subjected to air resistance from the short side surface, so that the rotation member 810 can be easily returned to the proper posture when performing a rising motion.

In addition, the short side surface of the rotating member 810 may be formed from a narrow shape that is less susceptible to air resistance. In this case, the operating resistance of the rotating member 810 during the rotation and light emission performance can be reduced.
The action of returning the rotating member 810 to the correct position can be produced by the weight portion 10831a.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above form in any way, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope that does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or substituted for a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above second embodiment, a case was described in which the upper connecting member 270 connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is formed with protrusions 272 to 277 that distribute the balls' flow path, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the portion that distributes the flow path of the balls may be formed as a recess rather than a protrusion. Also, a flow path that guides the balls through the recess may be formed so that the balls can be guided to other parts of the play area.

For example, the member connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be arranged on the underside of the center frame 86, and may be configured to have a receiving portion that guides balls to any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140. Also, for example, the member connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be configured to have a through gate 67 arranged thereon.

In addition, the upper connecting member 270 is extended along the front side of the base plate 60, and a play area is formed between the upper connecting member 270 and the glass unit 16, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper connecting member 270 may be extended along the back side of the glass unit 16 when the front frame 14 is closed, and a play area may be formed between the upper connecting member 270 and the base plate 60. In this case, a protruding portion that protrudes toward the base plate 60 may be formed to distribute the flow path of the balls.

In this case, the fastening position with the base plate 60 becomes important, but for example, by locating the fastening position near the inner rail 61 in a location that is unlikely to affect the flow of the balls downward (such as the lower left of the return ball prevention member 68), a sufficient playing area can be secured.

In the above second embodiment, the upper connecting member 270 is formed from a symmetrical shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the shape of the center frame 86 is designed so that the left side is separated from the inner rail 61 to secure a flow path for the ball, and a large space is formed between the left side and the inner rail 61, while the right side is designed to leave a space between the right side and the outer rail 62 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the ball (in the case of a typical right-handed machine), it is fully expected that the upper connecting member 270 will be formed only on the left side of the play area. In addition, it is also possible to design it so that the left and right sides are reversed.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to one in which at least one of the base plate 60 or the center frame 86 is arranged on the back surface of the upper connecting member 270, and it is fully conceivable that, as long as the upper connecting member 270 is provided with sufficient rigidity, the upper connecting member 270 will have a portion on the back surface side in which neither the base plate 60 nor the center frame 86 is arranged.

In addition, the position where the center frame 86 protrudes to form the thin plate portion 242 does not have to be the center of the left and right. For example, it may be formed on both the left and right sides, or the thin plate portion 242 may be formed at a plurality of positions.
Alternatively, the grooves 42 may be configured to protrude and engage with the base plate 60 (alternately entering each other with a gap therebetween).

Also, the thin plate portion 242 may be formed to have a size that occupies most of the left-right width of the upper connecting member 270. In this case, the left-right width in which the illumination board 251 can be disposed can be expanded.

In addition, regarding the configuration in which the illumination board 251 is disposed on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 and fits within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, the arrangement of the illumination board 251 is not limited to the upper side of the center frame 86. For example, if a thin plate member that is connected to the front surface of the base plate 60 and forms one side of the play area is formed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86, such as the upper connecting member 270, it becomes possible to arrange the illumination board 251 on the left and right sides of the center frame 86, and the illumination board 251 can be arranged on the left and right sides of the base plate 60.
The illumination board 251 may be incorporated into the distribution unit 300 or the winning port component 400 arranged below the ball bearing 200 so as to fit within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60.

In the above second embodiment, the case where the illumination board 251 is arranged on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 in a manner fixed to the base plate 60 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration similar to the light-emitting performance unit 518 arranged in the back case 510 (a configuration in which a logo corresponding to the model is formed and an illumination performance is performed by the LED of the illumination board arranged inside) may be arranged at the rear position of the upper connecting member 270 to illuminate the upper connecting member 270 side, or the arrangement of the illumination board 251 may be omitted to make it easier for light from the rotation performance device 800 to pass through the upper connecting member 270 to the player side.

In the second embodiment, the light from the LED of the surrounding light emitting means 251c is incident on the first protruding portion 272.
In the above description, the LED is irradiated to the lower edge 272a of the first protrusion 272, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the LED may be disposed inside the first protrusion 272 in a front view. In this case, the light irradiated to the inside of the first protrusion 272 can be diffused by providing a light diffusion treatment on the recessed side of the first protrusion 272 or by forming the recess in a shape that tapers as it deepens in the recessed direction, thereby reducing the visibility of the LED's outer shape and improving the visibility of the light irradiated from the LED.

In the above-described second embodiment, the thin plate member 290 has a colorful pattern, figure, letter, or character drawn on the front surface thereof, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least a part of the thin plate member 290 may be light-diffusing or embossed, or the surface of the thin plate member 290 may be formed in a shape (for example, a convex lens shape or a three-dimensional shape) that fits into the recesses of the first protruding portion 272 and the second protruding portion 273.

In the above second embodiment, a case has been described in which holes 291a, 291b formed in the thin plate member 290 receive the protrusion portion 244b protruding from the center frame 86 side and the protrusion portion 279 protruding from the upper connecting member 270, thereby suppressing misalignment of the thin plate member 290; however, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the protrusions inserted into the holes 291 a, 291 b of the thin plate member 290 may be configured to protrude from either the center frame 86 or the upper connecting member 270.
Further, instead of inserting the protruding portion 244b and the protruding portion 279 into different holes 291a, 291b, they may be inserted into a common hole formed in the thin plate member 290. This not only determines the position of the thin plate member 290, but can also be used to connect the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 270.

In the second embodiment, the protruding portion 244b protruding from the center frame 86 side is formed inside the recess on the rear side of the second overhanging portion 273, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding portion 244b may be disposed on the rear side of the plate-shaped portion 271 (so as to face the plate-shaped portion 271 in the front-rear direction). When the protruding portion 244b is formed inside the recess on the rear side of the second overhanging portion 273, the second overhanging portion 273 functions as a screen for the protruding portion 244b.

In the second embodiment, the ball that flows down between the side wall portion 453a and the extension plate portion 455a is the first
Although the case where the balls flow into the ball guide portion 457 is described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by providing a gap between the side wall portion 453a and the extension plate portion 455a and the ball guide portion 457 and distributing the balls between them, one of the two balls can be reliably guided into the ball guide portion 457.
In other words, the proportion of balls entering ball guiding section 457 may be changed depending on which of the two positions of sorting section 983 the ball is guided in.

In the above second embodiment, the case where the inclined guide portion 458 is inclined in one direction (to the lower right) and guides the ball directly to the second ball guide portion 459 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined guide portion 458 may be provided extending in opposite directions from both the left and right sides of the ball guide portion 457, or the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to guide the ball by making it snake left and right, and may be configured to deviate the ball from the second ball guide portion 459 with a certain probability at the position where the ball turns left or right.

Also, for example, the inclined guide section 458 may be configured to change the probability of a ball reaching the second ball guide section 459 depending on whether the inclined guide section 458 guides a single ball or multiple balls at the same time. For example, by displacing the position of the second ball guide section 459 in the left-right direction closer to the inclined guide section 458 than it is now, it is possible to realize a configuration in which, if a following ball reaches the second ball guide section 459 before the ball that has first reached the second ball guide section 459 has completely flowed down, the following ball is blocked by the preceding ball and is more likely to deviate from the second ball guide section 459.

Conversely, for example, by displacing the position of the second ball guide portion 459 slightly away from the inclined guide portion 458 in the left-right direction from its current position, a configuration can be realized in which if a ball that is likely to reach the second ball guide portion 459 first and is about to fall between the inclined guide portion 458 and the second ball guide portion 459 reaches the second ball guide portion 459 before the ball has completely fallen, the following ball will roll over the previous ball and be more likely to reach the second ball guide portion 459.

If the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guide portion 459 is lower when a single ball is guided,
This can prevent a situation in which multiple balls enter the ball guide section 459 and an excessive number of prize balls are paid out at one time. On the other hand, if the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guide section 459 is higher when multiple balls are guided, it is possible to improve the attention to the area around the inclined guide section 458 when multiple balls reach the inclined guide section 458.

In the above second embodiment, the case where the inclined guide portion 458 is fixed has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to be able to protrude and retract forward and backward. In this case, in the protruding state, the ball can flow into the second ball guide portion 459 as in the second embodiment, while in the retracted state, the rate at which the ball that flows to the right upstream of the first ball guide portion 457 reaches the second ball guide portion 459 is reduced. In addition, the inclined guide portion 458 is not limited to being displaced in and out, and may be configured to be tiltable at regular intervals around a rotation axis extending in the forward and backward directions so that the inclination angle changes.

In the above second embodiment, the number of prize balls that enter the second ball guide section 459 is greater than the number of prize balls that enter the first ball guide section 457, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls may be the same, or the quality of the profit that the player can obtain depending on the ball entering the second ball guide section 459 may be different.

For example, the profit may be a profit from a lottery of symbols instead of a payout of prize balls, a profit that allows the number of rounds of a jackpot game to be selected (varied) by landing a ball before the start of the jackpot game, or a profit that changes (increases) the probability of winning a symbol after the jackpot game by landing a ball during the jackpot game. These profits can be set arbitrarily in the first ball guide unit 457 and the second ball guide unit 459.

In the second embodiment, the inclination of the ceiling plate portion 455 is substantially constant, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the ceiling plate portion 455 may be set to a large angle with respect to the horizontal on the upstream side from the midway position, and may be set to a small angle with respect to the horizontal on the downstream side from the same midway position. In this case, when the ball is in contact with the ceiling plate portion 455 on the upstream side of the midway position,
Since the rolling speed of the ball is likely to change depending on whether the ball lands on the ceiling plate 455 downstream of the intermediate position or on the ceiling plate 455 downstream of the intermediate position, it is easy to predict the path the ball will follow after that. In other words, it is possible to improve attention to the intermediate position of the ceiling plate 455.

Also, a plurality of ridges for slowing down the rolling speed of the ball may be formed on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455. In this case, the ridges do not need to be formed over the entire left-right width of the ceiling plate portion 455, and may be formed over a partial range, similar to the change in inclination.

Furthermore, the multiple deceleration protrusions are not limited to those on the upper surface of ceiling plate portion 455. For example, they may be provided protruding from a resin wall constituting a guide flow path that guides the ball downward toward first ball guide portion 457 toward the guide flow path side, or may be provided protruding from the lower surface side of bulging portion 456 or the upper surface side of inclined guide portion 458 toward the ball's flow path side.

In addition, the direction in which the protrusions are formed is not limited to a direction intersecting the front-rear direction. For example,
A protrusion may be provided on the front side of the main body plate portion 451, or a front plate member formed in a flat plate shape along a plane parallel to the main body plate portion 451 may be provided on the front side of the main body plate portion 451.
When forming a path for the balls to flow down between the front plate member and 51, a protrusion may be provided on the rear side from the front plate member.

In the above second embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has fallen into the first ball guiding portion 457 is smoothly guided to the general winning opening 63, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the internal shape of the first ball guiding portion 457 is formed in a mortar shape and the opening at the lower end is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, the time until the ball passes through the first ball guiding portion 457 can be extended.

In this case, if a following ball arrives at first ball guiding section 457 while a ball is still remaining at first ball guiding section 457, the ball can be easily guided toward inclined guiding section 458, increasing the probability of the ball entering second guiding section 459. Therefore, it is possible to configure the ball to be guided toward second guiding section 459 without waiting for the rare situation in which multiple balls reach first ball guiding section 457 in a row.

As a method other than modifying the shape of the first ball guide section 457, a movable member that is displaced by the weight of the ball may be provided. The movable member is configured to block the entry of the ball into the first ball guide section 457 for a predetermined period of time after the ball enters the first ball guide section 457, and is configured to guide the ball that reaches the movable member toward the inclined guide section 458. This prevents the ball from entering the first ball guide section 457.
This can improve the probability that the ball will reach the second ball guide portion 459 within a predetermined period of time after passing through 57.

In the second embodiment, the left component 450 is formed from a fixed resin member, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path of the ball may be changed by an electrically operated movable part. In this case, the inclined guide portion 458 may be configured to be able to move forward and backward. In other words, when it is protruding forward, the ball is guided by the second ball guide portion 45.
However, when the ball is sunk backwards, the ball is not guided to the second ball guide portion 459 side and falls.

Also, for example, a plate-like member arranged to block first ball guide portion 457 may be disposed so as to be able to protrude and retract forward and backward. That is, when the plate-like member protrudes forward, a ball that reaches the plate-like member is guided toward inclined guide portion 458, making it easier for the ball to enter second ball guide portion 459, but when the plate-like member is retracted backward, the ball is more likely to fall into first ball guide portion 457.

Also, for example, the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to operate so that the inclination direction is reversed left and right in synchronization with the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b. When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state, the inclination direction of the inclined plate portion 434 is configured to be a downward inclination toward the left and right inner side, so that balls that have deviated from the second ball guide portion 459 toward the left and right inner side or balls that have fallen between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protruding portion 414 can be configured to flow toward the opening and closing plate 65b side. This allows the balls to be guided toward the opening and closing plate 65b side from a wide range.

The inclination of the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to incline downwards to the left and right inward direction, regardless of whether the inclined plate portion 434 is electrically powered or not. Even in this case, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the inclined plate portion 434
The ball that rolls on the upper surface of the ball still ends up at the outlet 71, so that the playability can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, the balls are discharged from the play area through the outlet 415, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical plate portion 433 may be omitted, and the outlet 415 may be omitted, so that the balls that pass through the left component 450 flow down to the opening/closing plate 65b. This increases the variety of paths through which the balls can flow down to the opening/closing plate 65b.

In the second embodiment, the opening/closing plate 65b is formed of a plate member having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, which is rotated around a rotation axis extending left and right along the lower edge, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening/closing plate 65b may be formed to have a pentagonal shape (a shape similar to home base) when viewed from the front, with the upper edge being formed to be inclined upward toward the center of the left and right. This makes it easier for the ball to flow outward to the left and right along the shape of the upper edge when it hits the upper edge.

In addition, an adjustment means for adjusting the flow of the balls flowing outward to the left and right at the upper edge of the opening/closing plate 65b may be provided. For example, an extension plate extending downward from the left and right inner ends of the inclined plate portion 434 in parallel with the vertical plate portion 433, and a ball passage hole formed in the extension plate in the left and right direction with a size that allows the balls to pass through may be provided.

For example, the arrangement of the ball passage holes is such that the upper edge 6 of the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state.
5b may be positioned at a position offset from the arrangement of the balls that have been swept outward to the left and right (shifted upward), and may be designed to be a position that allows the passage of the balls that have been swept outward to the left and right through the upper edge 65b of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is in a state between the open and closed states.

In this case, the extension plate and the ball passage hole can be configured to keep the balls on the upper side of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, preventing leakage to the left and right, while the opening/closing plate 65b can allow the balls to flow (spill) to the left and right when in the process of closing.

In addition, in order to maintain the posture of the opening and closing plate 65b in the open state, a protruding portion protruding from the rear side to the rear side of the main body plate portion 431 of the covering member 430 is provided at a position where the opening and closing plate 65b can be supported from below.
30. Furthermore, the protruding portions may be configured to abut the opening/closing plate 65b in the tilting direction at both left and right widthwise ends of the opening/closing plate 65b. In this case, it becomes easier to maintain the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state.

In the second embodiment, the sorting unit 300 guides the ball forward by the direction switching unit 317, and the flow direction of the ball is switched to the left or right direction above the detection device SE3, and then the ball is discharged from the discharge opening 32.
In the above description, the ball passes through the hole 5, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the winning opening 323 may be used as a discharge opening to discharge the ball. In this case,
A through hole large enough for the ball to fall into may be formed on the underside of the direction switching section 317, and the ball that falls into the through hole may be detected by the detection device SE3. Alternatively, the arrangement of the discharge opening and the detection device SE3 may be reversed in a similar configuration.

In addition, the flow path switching direction by the direction switching unit 317 is the rear side instead of the front side,
A similar configuration may be adopted, or a configuration may be adopted in which the ball passes forward from above the winning opening 323 and is discharged to the front side of the base plate 60.

In this case, it is not necessary to provide the discharge opening 325 on the left or right side of the detection device SE3.
The left-right distance between the pair of left and right detection devices SE3 can be narrowed, and the left and right spaces of the detection device SE3 can be effectively used as nail installation spaces, etc.

In addition, these configurations do not need to be the same around the left and right detection devices SE3, and different configurations may be adopted for the left and right. For example, a configuration in which a ball passing from above the winning opening 323 to the front can be picked up by the opening and closing plate 65b during a big win game may be adopted on either the left or right side. In this case, the probability that a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 will return to the front side of the base plate 60 and be picked up by the opening and closing plate 65b changes depending on whether the ball is guided to the side of the configuration in which the ball passes from above the winning opening 323 to the front or the opposite case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64.

In the second embodiment, the light-emitting action production unit 7 is disposed above the center frame 86.
00 is evacuated, and in the extended state, the light emitting operation performance unit 70 is in front of the third pattern display device 81.
For example, the light emitting action production unit 700 may be configured vertically and retracted to the left and right sides of the center frame 86.

In addition, in accordance with the configuration in which the front frame 14 is configured to protrude forward from the upper edge portion of the front frame 1
The light emitting operation performance unit 700 may be configured to extend forward from the left and right edges of the third symbol display device 81 and to retreat to the extended portion. In this case, the light emitting operation performance unit 700 may be configured to retreat to the front side of the left and right edges, and to be positioned in front of the third symbol display device 81 while retreating in the extended state.

In the second embodiment, the cylindrical member 695 has been described as a member that comes into contact with the rotating member 810, but the material of the cylindrical member 695 is not limited in any way. For example, the cylindrical member 695 may be made of a hard resin material that does not deform under the load applied by the rotating member 810. In this case, excessive displacement of the rotating member 810 can be suppressed.

In addition, even if the load applied from the rotating member 810 is about the same, deformation (deformation in the radial direction) occurs.
In this case, the cylindrical member 695 functions as a buffer material, making it easier to prevent the rotating member 810 from being damaged.

In the second embodiment, the figure or pattern formed on the decorative plate 811 is
The light-emitting action production unit 70 is designed to be visually recognized integrally with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 in the intermediate state of 00, but is not necessarily limited to this.
The figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 may be designed so that when the light-emitting action production unit 700 is in a specific up-down position and tilted to the left or right, they are viewed as one unit with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall 511. In this case, the effects of the bottom wall 511 and the decorative plate 811 can be improved by designing the content viewed as one unit to be different depending on whether the light-emitting action production unit 700 is tilted to the left or to the right.

In the above second embodiment, a case was described in which the light-emitting action performance unit 700 tilts while rising and falling, thereby simultaneously causing a change in the external shape of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 when viewed from the front and a change in the up and down position of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 to occur, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the light emitting operation performance unit 700 may be configured to change its external shape in a front view while maintaining the vertical arrangement of the light emitting operation performance unit 700. In the second embodiment, for example, when the light emitting operation performance unit 700 is in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotating member 810 is rotated and displaced by a predetermined angle about the rotation axis RJ1, so that the rotating member 81
Since the projection direction of 0 is changed, the outer shape of the rotating member 810 when viewed from the front can be changed.

In the second embodiment, the forward/backward displacement member 653 that generates resistance against the upward/downward displacement of the lift plate member 630 is configured as a member that is displaced in the forward/backward direction by the solenoid 651, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotating arm that is displaced by the driving force of a drive motor can be displaced in a direction approaching or moving away from the abutted plate 638,
A displacement resistance of the lift plate member 630 may be generated by generating a frictional force between the lift plate member 630 and the lift plate member 630 or by blocking the moving direction.

In the above second embodiment, a case has been described in which the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to be perpendicular to the displacement direction of the lift-up plate member 630 (direction on a plane perpendicular to the movement direction of the lift-up plate member 630), but this is not necessarily limited to this. That is, the angle formed by the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 and the displacement direction (up-down direction) of the lift-up plate member 630 does not have to be a right angle.

For example, if the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to incline upward as it moves forward, if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced downward when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward, the time until the lifting plate member 630 stops can be shortened by applying an upward load in addition to sliding friction if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced upward.
In addition to the sliding friction, an upward load is applied to avoid sudden deceleration of the lift plate member 630.
The kinetic energy of the lift plate member 630 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the case where the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to incline downward as it moves forward, if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced upward when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward, the time until the lifting plate member 630 stops can be shortened by applying a downward load in addition to the sliding friction if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced downward. On the other hand, if the lifting plate member 630 is displaced downward, the kinetic energy of the lifting plate member 630 can be reduced while avoiding a sudden deceleration of the lifting plate member 630 by applying a downward load in addition to the sliding friction.

In the above second embodiment, the overlap width between the abutment plate 638 and the front-to-rear displacement member 653 when viewed in the vertical direction is configured to be approximately the same whether the internal operating unit 600 is in the retracted state or in the extended state, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed as an inclined surface that inclines more rearward as it approaches the top. In this case, when the front-rear displacement member 653 displaces forward as the contact plate 638 is displaced downward, a load in a direction such that the contact plate 638 is picked up from the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 can be generated, so that the braking action of the lifting plate member 630 can be strengthened.

In addition, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed as an inclined surface that is inclined backward as it approaches the lower side. In this case, when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward when the contact plate 638 is displaced upward, the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward relative to the contact plate 638.
Since a load can be generated in a direction pressing downward from the front end face of the lift plate member 630, the braking action of the lift plate member 630 can be strengthened.

Also, for example, the shape of the front end face of the front-to-rear displacement member 653 may be formed so that an inclined surface that slopes rearward as it moves upward from the lower end position and an inclined surface that slopes rearward as it moves downward from the upper end position join together at a predetermined intermediate position, and corresponding to this, a protruding portion that protrudes rearward may be formed at an intermediate position on the rear end face of the abutment plate 638.

In this case, when the abutment plate 638 is positioned on the front side of the front-to-rear displacement member 653 and the front-to-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward, the vertical position of the lifting plate member 630 can be stabilized in a manner such that the protruding portion of the abutment plate 638 is accommodated at a predetermined intermediate position on the front end face of the front-to-rear displacement member 653.

In this case, the number of portions where the inclined surface inclined backward toward the lower side and the inclined surface inclined backward toward the upper side are joined is not limited on the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653. For example, a shape that configures a plurality of joined portions (e.g., a saw-blade shape or a jagged shape) may be used. In this case, the vertical position of the lift plate member 630 can be stabilized at a plurality of positions.

In the second embodiment, the left and right pair of lifting plate members 630 are configured to be vertically displaceable. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right lifting plate members 630 are fastened and fixed to the light-emitting operation production unit 700, and the left and right pair of lifting plate members 630
In this case, it is sufficient to provide the resistance generating device 650 for generating the displacement resistance of the lift plate member 630 only on one side, the left or right side.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the vertical positional deviation of the pair of left and right lifting plate members 630 is permitted, it is preferable to dispose the resistance generators 650 on both the left and right sides. By utilizing this configuration, the excitation timing of the left and right solenoids 651 may be controlled to be shifted.

For example, when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced downward from the retracted state to the intermediate state, by performing drive control similar to that of the drive motor 648 which is executed with a pair of left and right solenoids 651 excited and the front-to-rear displacement member 653 positioned at the rear, while the left solenoid 651 is excited and the right solenoid 651 is de-excited, a performance operation can be performed in which the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 is in an inclined position with the left side positioned lower than the right side.

This performance can be performed without applying a load to the internal operation unit 600 up to the operational error limit state of the internal operation unit 600. Furthermore, instead of increasing the number of drive patterns of the drive motor 648 for this performance, the performance is performed by reusing the drive pattern of the drive motor 648 used when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced downward, and exciting the solenoid 651 with a different excitation pattern. Therefore, the number of drive patterns required for the drive motor 648 can be reduced.

The timing for de-energizing the right solenoid 651 is determined by the internal operation unit 600.
For example, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, the solenoids 651 on both the left and right sides are excited, and the right solenoid 651 may be de-excited while the internal operation unit 600 is moving from the retracted state to the intermediate state. In this case, the frictional force can delay the downward displacement of the right lift plate member 630, and the light-emitting operation production unit 7
It is possible to execute a performance action in which 00 assumes an inclined posture with the left side positioned lower than the right side.

In addition, as an example of the performance operation, the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state, but it is naturally assumed that the up-down direction is reversed.
The excitation pattern may be executed in accordance with the displacement of the internal operating unit 600 from the extended state.

In the second embodiment, when the internal operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the lift plate member 63
We have described a case in which the rotational light-emitting performance of the rotational performance device 800 is executed in a state in which the upward displacement of the abutment plate 638 of 0 is restricted by the front-to-rear displacement member 653, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the types of rotational light emission effects that are executed when the internal operation unit 600 is extended include:
As a performance for notifying a jackpot, which is different from the performance executed with the rotation axis RJ1 fixed, a rotational light-emitting performance of the rotation performance device 800 may be executed with the solenoid 651 on both the left and right sides or on either the left or right side excited.

In this case, on the side where the solenoid 651 is excited, the front-rear displacement member 653 moves in the direction of the abutment plate 638.
Since the rotating member 810 is retracted from the movement path, even if the light-emitting action performance unit 700 or the lift plate member 630 is displaced upward due to the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating member 810, the front-to-back displacement member 653 does not act to suppress the upward displacement.

Therefore, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is easily displaced. This allows the rotation light emission performance of the rotating member 810 to be performed in a state where the rotation axis RJ1 is not fixed, so that the figure that is visually recognized by the afterimage display of the rotating member 810 can be made different while the rotation speed of the rotating member 810 in the rotation light emission performance and the light emission pattern irradiated from the rotating member 810 are the same.

In order to create a state in which the rotating shaft RJ1 is not fixed, the solenoids 6 on both the left and right sides
51 may be in an excited state, or either the left or right solenoid 651 may be in an excited state; however, by exciting the solenoid 651 on one side of the left or right and leaving the solenoid 651 on the other side de-excited, the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 630 on the de-excited side can be regulated, thereby preventing excessive upward displacement of the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the lifting plate member 630 and avoiding damage to the light-emitting action performance unit 700 and the lifting plate member 630.

In the second embodiment, the case where the transmission efficiency changes as the rack gear portion 634 approaches or moves away from the transmission gear 649 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive motor 648 and the drive shaft may be configured to be displaceable back and forth, and the transmission gear 649 may be displaceable back and forth relative to the rack gear portion 634.

The transmission gear 649 may be formed so that the diameter length of the transmission gear 649 changes in the axial direction. In this case, the transmission efficiency can be changed by displacing the transmission gear 649 or the lift plate member 630 in the drive shaft direction.

Although the displacement of the rack gear portion 634 in a state in which the meshing between the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 is maintained has been described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The rack gear portion 634 may be configured to be separated from the transmission gear 649 to such an extent that the meshing therewith is released. In this case, even if the drive motor 648 runs out of control, the rack gear portion 6
By configuring the rack gear portion 634 to separate from the transmission gear 649 before an overload occurs to the rack gear portion 634, damage to the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, the rack gear portion 634 is rotated by the weight of the lift plate member 630.
9 side, the gear meshing state is optimized, while the driving force of the solenoid 651 pushes the rack gear portion 634 away from the transmission gear 649.
However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rack gear portion 634 may be configured to be displaced in both directions by the driving force of the solenoid 651 regardless of the direction of displacement. Also, the direction in which the driving force of the solenoid 651 is generated may be reversed. Also, the transmission gear 649 or the drive motor 648 may be configured to be displaceable in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the drive shaft.

In the second embodiment, the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 guided through the long holes 672 to 674 are described as being thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686 because electrical wiring is inserted through the cylindrical portion 684. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the inside of the cylindrical portion 684 is not hollow but closed, the cylindrical portion 684 may be thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686.
The metal rod member 686 may be formed to be thicker than the cylindrical portion 684 , or the metal rod member 686 may be formed to be thicker than the cylindrical portion 684 .

By making the metal rod member 686 (the member on the front side) thick, the light emitting action production unit 70
When the metal rod 686 is tilted to the center axis J1, the load generated at a position far from the center axis J1 can be endured over a large area. This improves the durability of the metal rod 686, and therefore improves the durability of the metal rod 686 when it is made of a resin material, for example.

Furthermore, the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod member 686 may be formed to have the same thickness. In this case, the clearances set in the long holes 672 to 674 can be designed to have the same numerical values.
The degree of wear of the long holes 672 to 674 can be made uniform.

In the second embodiment, the pair of upper and lower long holes 612 are connected to the fastening portion 632 of the lift plate member 630,
In the above description, the clearance between the upper elongated hole 612 and the upper fastening portion 632 of the lift plate member 630 is designed to be equal to that between the upper elongated hole 612 and the upper fastening portion 632 of the lift plate member 630. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.
The clearance between the lower elongated hole 612 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the lifting plate member 630 may be made larger than the clearance between the lower elongated hole 612 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the lifting plate member 630. In this case, the allowable range for the displacement of the lower portion of the lifting plate member 630 in the front-rear direction can be increased, so that the meshing state between the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 can be easily changed by the front-rear displacement of the lifting plate member 630.

In the second embodiment, the second elongated hole 673 is formed as a long hole extending vertically, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second elongated hole 673 connected to the curved elongated hole 674 may be configured to extend with a downward incline toward the front side so that the side closer to the curved elongated hole 674 is disposed further forward. In this case, when the metal rod member 686 is guided by the second elongated hole 673, the metal rod member 686 can be displaced in the front-rear direction.

That is, in a state before the internal operation unit 600 reaches the intermediate state from the retreated state,
It is possible to realize an action in which the posture of the light-emitting action production unit 700 is gradually changed in the tilt direction.

The inclination of the second long hole 673 does not need to be formed from the upper end, but may be formed as a long hole in the vertical direction from the upper end to the middle, and may be extended in a downward inclination direction from the middle. In this case, when the lift plate member 630 starts moving from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the posture of the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be maintained, so that the collision between the base plate 60 and the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be avoided.

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the center of gravity G1 of the light-emitting action producing unit 700 is disposed between the cylindrical portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity G1 may be disposed on the opposite side of the cylindrical portion 684 with the metal rod-shaped member 686 as a reference, or may be disposed on the opposite side of the metal rod-shaped member 686 with the cylindrical portion 684 as a reference.

In the second embodiment, the case where the shape portion supporting the cylindrical portion 684 is formed as a long hole has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cylindrical portion 684 may be configured to be rotatable about a fixed axis.

In the second embodiment, the displacement members 680 supporting the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 are disposed on both the left and right sides of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and displace in the up and down direction.
For example, the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 may be configured to be displaced in the front-back direction or in a direction in which the front-back direction and the up-down direction are combined, the displacement member 680 may be disposed on one of the left and right sides of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700, or the displacement member 680 may be disposed above and below the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and displaced in the left-right direction or the front-back direction.

In the second embodiment, the rotating performance device 800 that rotates is used as the movable member disposed in the light-emitting performance unit 700, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable member that reciprocates in a linear direction may be used, or a movable member that vibrates may be used.

In the second embodiment, the support hole 764b is disposed on the lower side of the two upper and lower connected holes 764, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support hole 764b may be disposed on the upper side, or both the upper and lower support holes 764b may be disposed on the upper side.

In the case where the upper and lower portions of the right-side connected hole 764 are support holes 764b and the upper and lower portions of the left-side connected hole 764 are elongated holes 764a, the light-emitting operation production unit 70 with respect to the displacement member 680 is
Only left-right misalignment of the light-emitting action production unit 700 is permitted, and changes in posture in the rotational direction around the fastening part 682 of the light-emitting action production unit 700 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the through hole is not limited to the long hole 764a, and any through hole having a larger clearance than the support hole 764b can be designed. For example, the through hole may be formed as a perfect circle having an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 684.
The support hole 764b may be a long hole having a length shorter than that of the long hole 764a. In this case, the light emitting operation production unit 700 can move horizontally in the left and right directions.

In addition, when the diagonally opposite connected holes 764 are both set to the support holes 764b among the shapes of the left and right connected holes 764, the light emitting operation production unit 700 can be displaced left and right without being displaced by the fastening portion 68.
The change in the posture in the direction of rotation about the axis 2 is also suppressed.
This is fine if it is formed with sufficient strength and the operation is precisely controlled, but if this is not the case, even a slight malfunction can lead to damage to the light-emitting operation performance unit 700, so care must be taken.

In the third embodiment, the opening 3982k is formed in front of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, and in the fourth embodiment, the opening 4985k is formed in the rear of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both the openings 3982k and 4985k may be formed. In this case, the resistance to ball clogging can be improved.

Also, for example, an opening may be formed in front of the first passage TR1, and an opening may be formed in the rear of the second passage TR2. Furthermore, a confluence flow path may be formed to merge the balls discharged from these openings downstream. In this case, the appearance of the balls flowing down to the left and right can be changed, thereby improving the presentation effect of the presentation using the balls.

Also, for example, an opening may be formed on at least one of the front and rear sides of the first passage TR1, and an opening may be formed on at least one of the left and right sides of the second passage TR2, so that balls are discharged from the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through each of the openings.

In the third and fourth embodiments, the case where the opening 985d is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the opening 985d may be omitted, and the interval between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 directly above the detection device SE3 may be narrowed, thereby narrowing the left-right interval of the detection device SE3 and narrowing the left-right interval of the openings 985e and 985f. In this case, the left-right width at the lower end of the bulging portion 982 can be further shortened.

In the third and fourth embodiments, a space is formed between the standing walls 982a disposed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seven-segment display device may be disposed and used as the seven-segment performance range, or a small liquid crystal display device may be disposed.

In the above fifth embodiment, a passage for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game area is formed in the base plate 60 and the upper connecting member 5270, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the passage for guiding the game ball may be formed in the upper connecting member 270 and the center frame 86.
Alternatively, the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be formed so as to pass through the base plate 60, the center frame 86, and the upper connecting member 5270, or the base plate 60, the center frame 86, and the upper connecting member 5270 may be formed so as to pass through the base plate 60, the center frame 86, and the upper connecting member 5270.
270.

In the above fifth embodiment, the opening 5274a is formed in the third protruding portion 5274, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
The opening may be any of the openings 275 to 277. Also, the destination of the balls after flowing down may be different for each opening.

For example, a ball that passes through the first opening may reach the upper surface of the band-shaped extension 263, a ball that passes through the second opening may return to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the nail KG2, and a ball that passes through the third opening may return to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the curved protrusion 414. In this case, it is easy to get the ball to enter the first winning hole 64 by aiming at the first opening, but it is difficult to aim at the second opening or the third opening.
If the ball is aimed at the opening of the ball guides 457 and 459, it will not be able to go to the first winning hole 64.
This makes it easier to guide the ball to the specific winning hole 65a.

In the sixth embodiment, the light-emitting operation presentation unit 6700 reciprocates in front of the game board 13, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light-emitting operation presentation unit 6700 may be configured to be movable to a position (a position on the rear side of the game board 13) in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 described in the second embodiment.

In this case, the state where it is difficult for the player to see can be configured in two positions: a position in a retracted state where it is located on the back side of the game board 13, and the upper end position of the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700. Therefore, by disposing a shutter or light guide plate or the like for blocking the player's view on the second glass unit 6016b, and moving the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700 while blocking the player's view to make it difficult to see, it is possible to make it impossible to know which of the two positions the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700 is located in. This makes it difficult to predict the action presentation by the light-emitting action presentation unit 6700.

In the seventh embodiment, the L-shaped slot 7674 is formed as a slot that extends partway in the vertical direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slot 7674 may be configured to be inclined or curved in a direction toward the rear as it approaches the recessed portion 7674a, rather than in the vertical direction. In this case, the cylindrical portion 684 is also displaced rearward while it is being displaced downward, so that the displacement member 680 can be configured to change its posture in the forward rotation direction at the same time as it is displaced downward.

In the seventh embodiment, the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed in an L-shape with the lower end portion extending rearward, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
The recessed portion 7674a may be formed to extend further downward from the upper and lower positions of the recessed portion 7674a.
By inserting the cylindrical portion 684 into the groove, it is possible to restrict the vertical displacement of the cylindrical portion 684 at a midpoint within the vertical displacement range of the cylindrical portion 684. Even if a load is generated due to the restriction, since the cylindrical portion 684 is formed thick, it is possible to easily avoid damage.

In the eighth embodiment, when the metal rod member 686 is disposed at a midpoint of the curved long hole 8674, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is aligned with the front-rear direction. In this state, the rotating member 810 may be rotated at high speed to perform a rotational light-emitting performance. Even if the metal rod member 686 is disposed at a midpoint of the curved long hole 8674, the resistance generating device 650 is used to regulate the vertical displacement of the lift plate member 630, thereby maintaining the posture of the light-emitting operation performance unit 700 and suppressing misalignment of the rotation axis RJ1.

In the eighth embodiment, the displacement member 680 is inclined in the forward rotation direction before tilting, so that after tilting, the back side of the rotating member 810 (the heat sink 812 side) faces the player. Even in this case, the back side of the rotating member 810 faces the heat sink 812 side.
The box is covered with a cover 2, and the illumination board is also stored inside and will not be exposed.

In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 680 is displaced in the front-rear direction while being displaced downward has been described, but in this case, the front-rear position of the rotation performance device 800 may be designed to be the same before and after the tilt displacement of the displacement member 680. This makes it possible to reduce the difficulty of designing when, for example, multiple sets of the displacement member 680, the light-emitting action performance unit 700, and the rotation performance device 800 are stacked in the front-rear direction.

The shapes of the long holes 8672a, 8672b, 8673, 8674, and 8675 are not limited in any way. For example, they may be wavy, or a combination of straight holes and wavy holes (curved holes) may be used.
It may be combined with the hole of the other.

In the above ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the ease of positional deviation of the light-emitting action production unit 9700 changes as the load between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 changes depending on the posture of the displacement member 9680, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of the design of the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1, a high-friction resin material may be placed at the place where they are pressed against each other, a high-viscosity sheet material may be placed at the place where they are pressed against each other, or a single or multiple recesses and protrusions that fit together may be formed at the place where they are pressed against each other.

The shape of the recess and protrusion may be formed with a point as a center, or may be a protrusion or groove formed with a straight line or curve as a center. In the case of a protrusion or groove, it is easy to tolerate the positional deviation of the light-emitting operation performance unit 9700 in the direction along the extension direction, while it is easy to limit the positional deviation of the light-emitting operation performance unit 9700 in the direction intersecting the extension direction.

In the tenth embodiment, the action of putting the rotating member 810 in the correct position is performed by the detection gear 108.
In the above description, the force generated by the weight of the rotating member 810 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the attitude of the rotating member 810 may be strictly controlled.

In addition, the rotating member 810 may be prevented from rising in the backward direction until the rotating member 810 is in the appropriate posture. For example, when the rotating member 810 is in the appropriate posture, it retreats to the inside of the left and right, and when the rotating member 810 is out of the appropriate posture, an engagement portion that protrudes to the outside of the left and right is provided on the rotation performance device 800, and when protruding, the engagement portion can be fitted (inserted) into the inner member 670.
In this case, the rotation member 810 can be mechanically prevented from rising up without being in the proper position, and thus it is possible to avoid the rotation member 810 from being damaged unexpectedly.

In the above embodiments, the detection device SE3 disposed downstream of the first winning opening 64 is disposed on the left and right so that the front and rear positions of the detection device SE3 are the same, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection device SE3 may be shifted forward and backward.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.
This is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Figure 444 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, Figure 445 is a front view of the distribution device 700 provided on the game board 13, and Figure 446 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Fig. 443, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12 formed in substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 443) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 444) having a number of nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc., is detachably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 462) that launches balls to the front area of the game board 13, a launching rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface of the inner frame 12 and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12.
(See Figure 443) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side.
The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close toward the front, with the side on which the lock is provided as the axis of opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top that protrudes forward, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward incline to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 443), and this incline guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, a frame button 22 is provided above the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, connected to a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 44) described later.
It is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage (background image) of the performance displayed on the display unit 10 (see FIG. 4) or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

A stage is a presentation mode that provides uniformity to the various presentations displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has two stages, a "sandy stage" and a "deep sea stage". Various presentations, such as the variable presentation and reach presentation that are performed in conjunction with the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 (initial winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Stages are changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during periods when no variable presentation is being performed or during high-speed fluctuations, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage changes from "sandy stage" → "deep sea stage" → "sandy stage" → ...
The stage will be changed repeatedly in the order of ・. Also, immediately after turning on the power, the "Sandy Stage" will be set as the initial stage.

In addition, although a detailed description will be given later, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to be able to display various stages (background images) in addition to the above-mentioned stages (background images) according to the game situation. For example, when the timed time reaches a predetermined time, a dedicated performance (SP performance) can be executed for a predetermined period (3 minutes), and a stage (background image) dedicated to the SP performance is displayed during the execution of the SP performance. In addition, a pre-performance (pre-reading performance) for notifying the player in advance that the result of the special pattern lottery executed based on the start winning will be a jackpot is executed, and a stage (background image) dedicated to the pre-reading performance is displayed during the execution of the pre-reading performance.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has a function to change the stage (background image) of the performance based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, and a function to change it regardless of the player's operation of the frame button 22 depending on the situation of the game being executed. Therefore, by allowing the player to intentionally change the stage and vary the content of the performance executed, it is possible to prevent the game (the performance executed) from becoming monotonous and to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early. In addition, since the stage is changed even at a time not intended by the player, it is possible to execute a performance that is unexpected for the player.

In addition, as change conditions for changing the stage (background image) of the performance, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has change conditions that can be established based on the player's operation, change conditions that can be established based on the measured time, and change conditions that can be established based on the results of the special pattern lottery. However, without being limited to this, for example, change conditions that can be established when the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed reaches a predetermined number, change conditions that can be established when the number of times a jackpot has been won through the special pattern lottery reaches a predetermined number, or a change lottery to determine whether or not to change the stage can be configured to be executable, and change conditions that are established based on the results of the change lottery may be set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of stage that can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22 is different from the type of stage that is changed according to the game situation, so that the player can easily understand what change conditions have been established when the stage is changed, but without being limited to this, the type of stage that can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22 and the type of stage that is changed according to the game situation may be configured to be a common type in all or part. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the stage change when the stage is changed, so that the game content after the stage is changed (the variable performance content to show the result of the special pattern lottery) can be made interesting.

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured so that when a normal reach presentation is started, and the normal reach is to be developed into a super reach, a selection screen for the presentation mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach, and when the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the presentation content during the super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by turning on or off depending on the change in the game state such as when a big win occurs or when a certain reach occurs, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-3 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs.
In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or reach performance is reached, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 lights up or flashes by lighting or flashing the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying the player that a big win is occurring or that the player is in a reach just before the big win.
At the upper left is provided an indicator lamp 34 which incorporates a light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination part 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the attachment space K1 (FIG. 44) on the front of the game board 13 is
The stamps and the like affixed to the winning jackpot (see reference 4) are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.
In the pachinko machine 10, in order to create a more brilliant appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area surrounding the illumination parts 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of the machine and the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated, balls are lent in accordance with the operation.
Specifically, the point display section 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball loan button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium).
As long as there is a balance on the card, the loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17.
is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In pachinko machines in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize pachinko machines using a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 in the center thereof, which is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
On the right side of the ball launcher 110, there is provided an operating handle 51 operated by the player to launch the ball into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, there are built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a push-button type shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball while the switch is pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance.
When the player rotates the control handle 51 clockwise, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and the ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance of the variable resistor, which changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the control handle 51. This causes the ball to be shot into the front of the game board 13 with a distance corresponding to the operation of the player. Also, when the control handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 5
1b is off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower part of the lower tray 50 when viewed from the front, for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is usually performed with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 13 in the first embodiment is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general ball entrance 63, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, a sorting device 700, etc., to a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 443). The base plate 60 is made of wood made of thin boards glued together,
The base plate 60 is formed so that the various structures disposed on the rear side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen by the player from the front side. The general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the distribution device 700 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like. In addition, the distribution device 700 includes the first ball entrance 64 through which balls can enter, which will be described in detail later.
A right second ball inlet 640r is provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.
A ball that enters the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 is sorted by the sorting device 700 into either the first ball inlet 64 or the right second ball inlet 640r (see Figure 445).

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 443) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is installed in the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 made of a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is installed inside the outer rail 77. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 443) surround the front and rear, forming a game area in which games are played according to the behavior of the balls on the front side of the game board 13. The game area is an area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front side of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 76, 77 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 462) to the upper part of the game board 13.
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the outer rail 7 (FIG. 44), which prevents the ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again.
At the tip of the ball 7 (upper right part of FIG. 444), a rubber band 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball.
When a ball is shot with a force equal to or greater than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is attenuated.

The first symbol display devices 37a, 37b equipped with a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light-emitting means are arranged in the lower left corner of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left corner of Fig. 444). The first symbol display devices 37a, 37b display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 462), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10.
In the first embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used according to whether the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated, while when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance 640r, the first symbol display device 37a is activated.
When 40r is won, the first pattern display device 37b is configured to be activated.

The first symbol display devices 37a, 37b also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbols correspond to a special mode jackpot (jackpot A1-D1), a normal jackpot (jackpot E1), or a miss, and the number of reserved balls. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The LEDs are lit in different colors (e.g.,
The LEDs are configured to emit different colors (red, green, blue), and by combining these colors, it is possible to indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the right second ball entrance 64
A lottery is held when a prize is won in any of the 0r. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot has been determined, judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots judged here include 10R variable jackpot (jackpot A1), 10R variable jackpot (jackpot B1), 5R variable jackpot (jackpot C1), 2R variable jackpot (jackpot D1), and 10R time-saving 100 times jackpot (jackpot E1). The first symbol display device 37a, 37b not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the change, but also shows a symbol according to the type of jackpot if the result is a jackpot.

A "10R sure-variable jackpot" (jackpot A1) is a jackpot in which a sure-variable state is set after a maximum of 10 rounds of jackpot play has been played after the jackpot has been announced by the third symbol stopping to display a repeat of the same symbol. Here, the sure-variable state is a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot through a special symbol lottery is higher than in the normal state (low probability state) (high probability state for special symbols), and further, the special symbol lottery is more likely to be performed than in the normal state (high probability state for normal symbols). In other words, the sure-variable state is a game state in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be performed, and the jackpot is more likely to be won through the special symbol lottery, making it the most advantageous game state for the player. A "10R sure-variable jackpot" (jackpot B1) is the same jackpot as the above-mentioned (jackpot A1), and is different from a "5R sure-variable jackpot" (jackpot C1).
) is a jackpot that differs from the above-mentioned (jackpot A1) only in that the maximum number of rounds of the jackpot game is set to 5 rounds, and the "2R sure-change jackpot" (jackpot D1) is a jackpot that differs from the above-mentioned (jackpot A1) only in that the maximum number of rounds of the jackpot game is set to 2 rounds.
"(jackpot E1)" refers to a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set after a jackpot game with a maximum of 10 rounds. Here, the time-saving state refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot by drawing a special symbol is the normal state (low probability state), but the special symbol drawing is more likely to be performed than in the normal state (high probability state for normal symbols). In other words, the time-saving state is a game state in which the special symbol drawing is more likely to be performed than in the normal state, and is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and less advantageous than the special state.

In the first embodiment, when the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the probability variable state is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and when the time-saving state is set, the probability variable state is configured to continue until the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state reaches 100 times (predetermined number of times). The duration of each game state is not limited to this, and for example, when the probability variable state is set, the probability variable state may be configured to continue until the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the probability variable state reaches 100 times (predetermined number of times), or the time-saving state may be configured to continue until the next jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In addition, when the probability variable state is set, the condition for the high probability state of the special symbol to end and the condition for the high probability state of the normal symbol to end may be different, and for example, the condition for the high probability state of the special symbol to end may be specified as the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times, and the condition for the high probability state of the normal symbol to end may be specified as the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times.

By configuring in this way, a game in the probability variable state is executed from when the probability variable state is set until 50 special symbol lotteries are executed, and then a game in the time-saving state is executed until 50 special symbol lotteries are executed, and then a game in the normal state is executed. This allows a player to play in a plurality of game states so that the degree of advantage for the player decreases step by step, so that when the probability variable state is set, the player can play while expecting to win a jackpot as soon as possible.

In addition, the game state may be changed in stages so that the more the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the big win game increases, the more advantageous the player becomes. This makes it possible to prevent a long period without a big win from continuing, which reduces the player's motivation to play.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 8 is turned on during a big win.
As the performance (during jackpot performance) executed using the display surface 1, different performances are executed according to the above-mentioned jackpot types (jackpot A1 to jackpot E1). Specifically, when the jackpot type is any of jackpot B1, C1, and D1, the performance during jackpot is notified in advance that a probability variable state will be set after the jackpot game ends, and
A performance during the jackpot (rank-up performance) is executed to let the player enjoy how many rounds the jackpot game will continue. In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A1 or E1, a performance during the jackpot (probability-change promotion performance) is executed to notify the player that the jackpot game will continue for 10 rounds in advance, and to notify the player of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends during the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, the player can have various expectations regarding the jackpot performance executed during the jackpot game depending on the set jackpot type, thereby improving the presentation effect of the jackpot performance.

Here, the types of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and
It is possible to set a special probability state (a state with a high probability of special symbols and a state with a high probability of normal symbols).

The "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, it is a state in which it is easy to transition to a jackpot game state (special game state) that is advantageous to the player. In addition, the "high probability state of normal symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot game is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot game.
This refers to a state in which the probability of winning the pattern lottery is set high and the time for changing the second pattern is also set short. If the second pattern lottery is won, a normal pattern winning game is played in a state in which the ball is easily inserted into the second ball entrance 640 (the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened). In other words, the "high probability state of the normal pattern" refers to a state in which the ball is easily inserted into the second ball entrance 640, making it easier to play the special pattern lottery.

On the other hand, the "low probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is normal, i.e., a state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than the "high probability state of special symbols." Also, the "low probability state of normal symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of winning the second symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) is normal, i.e., a state in which the probability of winning is lower than the "high probability state of normal symbols."

In the "high probability state of normal symbols", not only does the winning probability of the second symbol lottery increase, but the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to the "low probability state of normal symbols".
When the electric device 640a is in the open state, the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than when the electric device 640a is in the closed state. Therefore, during the probability bonus state or the time-saving state in which the "high probability state of normal symbols" is set, the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, the control contents for the electric device 640a in the normal winning game in the "normal pattern high probability state" may be controlled so that the ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance 640 than in the normal winning game in the "normal pattern low probability state". For example,
Instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, the number of times the electric role 640a is opened in one winning game of a normal symbol may be increased compared to the "low probability state of a normal symbol", or the timing at which the electric role 640a is opened during a winning game of a normal symbol may be changed so that the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 than in a winning game of a normal symbol in the "low probability state of a normal symbol". Also, at least one of the time at which the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a is opened in one winning game may be changed without changing the winning probability of the second symbol lottery. In addition, the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened or the number of times the electric device 640a is opened in one win may be changed to increase the winning probability of the second pattern lottery compared to the "low probability state of normal patterns", or the fluctuation time of the second pattern lottery may be changed to shorten it compared to the "low probability state of normal patterns".

In the game area, a plurality of general ball entrances 63 are arranged, through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the game area. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 has a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 65, a third ball entrance 66, a fourth ball entrance 67, a fifth ball entrance 68, a sixth ball entrance 69, a seventh ball entrance 61, a fifth ball entrance 62, a seventh ball entrance 63, a seventh ball entrance 64, a seventh ball entrance 65, a seventh ball entrance 66, a seventh ball entrance 67, a seventh ball entrance 68, a seventh ball entrance 69, a seventh ball entrance 69, a seventh ball entrance 61, a seventh ball entrance 62, a seventh ball entrance 63, a seventh ball entrance 64, a seventh ball entrance 65, a
There is provided a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a changing third pattern in synchronization with the changing display in the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b, in response to a winning (initial winning) at either the ball entry port 640 or the right second ball entry port 640r, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a changing second pattern in response to a ball passing through the through gate 67.

In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 can be seen through an opening in the center of the center frame 86. In addition, the center frame 86 protrudes to the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the periphery of the third pattern display device 81, preventing the game ball from contacting the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 462), so that, for example, three pattern rows, top, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are scrolled vertically for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In the third pattern display device 81 of this embodiment, the game status is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 462), while the game status is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 462), the third pattern display device 81 of this embodiment is configured such that the first pattern display devices 37a,
37b. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67.
The pachinko machine 10 performs a winning lottery when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the second symbol display device displays a static "o" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Also, as a result of the winning lottery,
If the winning combination is a miss, the second symbol display device displays a static "X" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a varying manner.

When the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of "○"), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric device 64 attached to the second ball entrance 640.
0a is configured to be in an activated state (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the second symbol to be displayed is set to be shorter in the probability variable state or time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbol) than in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbol). As a result, in the probability variable state or time-saving state, the second symbol is displayed in a short time, so that the normal symbol winning lottery can be held more than in the normal state. Therefore, the chances of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery increase, so the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric role 640a of the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the probability variable state and time-saving state are advantageous game states for the player in terms of executing the special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the probability variable state or time-saving state, if the state is made such that the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the probability variable state or time-saving state by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting a normal figure, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 640a for a normal hit, etc., the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed is set shorter than the normal state in the probability variable state or time-saving state, the probability of hitting a normal figure may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 640a for one hit may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80. The through gates 67 are configured to allow some of the balls that flow down the game board 13 out of the balls that are shot to the game board to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery is held to determine whether a second symbol will win. After the lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery results in a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery results in a miss, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the second symbol reserved lamp 84 is lit.
The second symbol reservation lamp 84 is provided with four lamps, the maximum number of reserved symbols.
They are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, or by the first symbol display device 37a,
37b and a part of the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol reservation lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.
The maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). The number of through gates is not limited to two, but may be three or more. The installation position of the through gate is not limited to both the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. The first symbol display device 37
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by a and 37b, the second pattern reserved lamp does not have to be lit.

A distribution device 700 in which balls can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the distribution device 700 through the opening 710a, the entered ball is alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. 462) draws a jackpot lottery due to the first ball entrance switch being turned on, and a display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37a. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640r, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on in the same manner as in the case of the second ball entrance 640, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. 462) draws a jackpot lottery result.
62), a lottery for a big win is performed, and a display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 3
7b.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is disposed below the sorting device 700 as viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 462). A display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first screen.
This second ball entrance 640 is normally configured so that the game ball cannot (or cannot easily) enter the second ball entrance 640 by restricting the game ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 when the left and right electric role objects 640a, which are wing-shaped, are in an upright position. When the normal pattern, which will be described later, is hit,
The electric device 640a rotates approximately 45 degrees outward in a fixed operating pattern as an opening operation, forming an inverted figure eight, thereby guiding the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize entrances from which two balls are paid out as prize balls. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r are different numbers.
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters hole 40 may be the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters hole 640r on the right side.

In addition, in this embodiment, the prize balls are paid out when the balls that flow into the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 enter the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, but this is not limited thereto. For example, if the same number of prize balls are paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r, a detection switch for detecting the flow of a ball into the opening 710a may be provided near the opening 710a, and the prize balls may be paid out when the detection switch detects the ball. By configuring in this way, the time lag from when the ball flows into the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 to when the prize balls are actually paid out can be reduced. Furthermore, the time lag from when the above-mentioned detection switch detects the ball to when the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r is set to 10 ...
The condition of the ball flow path within the sorting device 700 may be determined by measuring the flow period until the ball enters r.

Furthermore, it may be configured to execute a performance using the flow period. In this case, as in the present embodiment, the balls flowing into the distribution device 700 are directed to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640.
r and r alternately, a configuration is adopted in which it is difficult for a player to know which ball entry port a ball flowing into the distribution device 700 will enter, or the opening 71 of the distribution device 700 is
It is preferable to configure the distribution device 700 so that the period (first ball flow period) required for a ball flowing into the opening 710a of the distribution device 700 to enter the first ball entrance 64 is different from the period (second ball flow period) required for a ball flowing into the right second ball entrance 640r. This allows the player to enjoy predicting the type of ball entrance into which the ball will enter next by using the flow period of the balls flowing into the distribution device 700. In this case, it is preferable to configure the distribution device 700 so that the longer the flow period, the easier it is for the ball to enter the ball entrance that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the balls flowing into the distribution device 700 are always inserted into either the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, that is, the balls flowing into the distribution device 700 are paid out and a special symbol lottery is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special symbol lottery other than the prize ball is paid out (for example, a special symbol lottery is executed) may be granted or not granted depending on the result of the flow of the balls in the distribution device 700. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage of the special symbol granted to the player when the balls flow into the distribution device 700 can be greatly different, so that the player can be more interested in the flow of the balls flowing into the distribution device 700.

The second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric device 640a. This electric device 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state) so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device displays a "○" symbol as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 640a is in an open state (expanded state) so that the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640.
This makes it easier to get into the 40.

As mentioned above, in the probability of winning the second symbol or the time-saving state, the probability of winning is higher than in the normal state, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so when the second symbol changes,
" pattern is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, in the probability variable state and time-saving state, the time for which the electric device 640a is open is longer than in the normal state. Therefore, the probability variable state and time-saving state can create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 compared to the normal state.

Therefore, under normal circumstances, the electric device associated with the second ball entrance 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win through the second ball entrance 640, so basically the ball enters the opening 710a, and the entering ball is then distributed to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, thereby executing the jackpot lottery (special pattern lottery).

On the other hand, in the probability variation state or time-saving state, the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the ball that entered the opening 710a is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64.
In addition to the fact that the ball is distributed to the right second ball entrance 640r, the big win lottery associated with the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is also more likely to be executed. Therefore, since there are more opportunities to execute the big win lottery (special symbol lottery) than in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player than in the normal state.

In this way, among the game areas provided on the game board 13, the sorting device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65 are disposed below the variable display unit 80, and a game (
The distribution device 700 is used whether a left-handed game is performed or a right-handed game is performed in which the ball is shot toward the right-hand game area (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80).
The ratio of balls reaching the first ball entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 is configured to be the same. Therefore, the same degree of advantage can be given to the player regardless of the playing method, so that the player can play with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 444, the sorting device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65 are disposed below the variable display unit 80 in the game area provided on the game board 13. Even when a game (left-handed game) in which a ball is shot toward the game area on the left side (the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) is played, the same game (right-handed game) in which a ball is shot toward the game area on the right side (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) is played. The configuration is such that the ratio of balls reaching the distribution device 700, the second ball entrance 640, and the variable winning device 65 is the same even when left-handed play is performed, but this is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that balls are more likely to flow into the distribution device 700 when left-handed play is performed than when right-handed play is performed, and that balls are more likely to reach the second ball entrance 640 and the variable winning device 65 when right-handed play is performed than when left-handed play is performed. In other words,
Depending on the set game state, the game method (left-handed play, right-handed play) that is advantageous to the player may be switched. By configuring in this way, the player can have more fun playing the game because it can change the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device.
When a jackpot is won in a jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery) held due to a winning entry at any of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to become a stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 8.
The occurrence of a jackpot is indicated by displaying 1. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which it is easier for balls to win. In this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls win).

This specific winning hole 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the opening and closing hole forward with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis.
The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or does not easily win a prize. When a big win occurs, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between the open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower side when viewed from the front of the sorting device 700, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

A space K1 for attaching a certificate stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13. The certificate stamp or the like attached to the space K1 can be inserted through a small window 35 (see FIG. 44) in the front door 5.
It can be seen through the

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls flowing down the game area that do not enter any of the ball entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 640r are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. The outlet 66 is disposed below the sorting device 700.

A large number of nails are set on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 445. Fig. 445 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. As shown in Fig. 444, the sorting device 700 is
The sorting device 700 is disposed below the variable display unit 80 of No. 3. A flow path section through which the game balls that enter the opening 710a flow down and a flow path section through which the game balls that enter the second ball inlet 640 flow down are housed in a through hole formed in the game board 13, and the sorting device 700 is configured to be fixed to the game board 13 from the front side with a screw by a base member of the sorting device 700.

The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and includes the above-mentioned opening 710a located at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric device 640a located below the opening 710a, and through holes (not shown) located on both left-right sides of the electric device 640a and formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction.
and a lower insertion hole (not shown) that is positioned below the through hole and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

The allocating member 760 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape with the front side open. The allocating member 760 is bent at approximately the center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to incline downward as it moves from the approximately center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. The both ends in the left-right direction of the allocating member 760 are set at positions facing the through holes of the above-mentioned winning member 730.

The distribution member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that are inclined downward from a center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front toward both the left and right sides, and a distribution member 762 disposed in the center of the inclined surfaces 761.
and a ball throwing port formed above the distribution member 762.

The distribution member 762 is formed in a circular ring shape, and has three projections 762a projecting outward from its outer edge at intervals of 90 degrees around the axis, and a shaft portion 762b inserted into the inside of the circular ring shape.
62b.

The shaft portion 762b is a support portion for rotating the sorting member 762 around its axis, and is formed in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the inner side of the ring of the sorting member 762.
b is sandwiched between the intermediate member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is
2b is arranged so as to be rotatable about the axis.

The protrusions 762a guide the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 7 when the ball passes through the opening 710a and is thrown.
The protrusions 762a at the center are used to alternately distribute the balls to the openings 710a one by one, and the balls are sent in the direction opposite to the direction in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a is located. In other words, the central protrusion 762a can send the ball sent from the opening 710a in the left and right directions.
62a is a member that regulates the displacement of the distribution member 762 and displaces the direction in which the tip of the central protrusion 762a is positioned (rotates the distribution member 762) due to the weight applied when the ball passes through, and the rotation of the distribution member 762 is regulated by the contact of the tip surface of the protrusion 762a with the inclined surface.
When the ball is guided to the protrusion 762a, it collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the protrusion 762a displaced downward is
The tip of 62a comes into contact with the inclined surface to restrict its displacement.

The inclined surface is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as "third ball sending path KR3") along which the ball sorted to the left and right by the sorting member 762 described above rolls and is sent, and is formed with a downward incline toward the outside from the center position in the left-right direction of the sorting member 760. As a result, the ball sorted to the left and right by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760 rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is sent (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the downward side.

At the end of the downwardly extending side of the inclined surface 761, the side surface on the rear side is formed to be inclined in a direction approaching the intermediate member so that the thickness of the side surface on the rear side increases toward the front as it approaches the end.
A ball that has rolled along the inclined surface 761 and been sent to the end of the inclined surface 761 can be sent to the first ball inlet 64 of the intermediate member disposed in front of the sorting member 760, or to the right second ball inlet 640r. More specifically, a ball that has been sorted to the left side as viewed from the front by the sorting member 762 and rolled along the inclined surface 761 is sent to (enters) the first ball inlet 64. On the other hand, a ball that has been sorted to the right side as viewed from the front by the sorting member 762 and rolled along the inclined surface 761 is sent to (enters) the right second ball inlet 640r.

The first ball inlet 64 and the right second ball inlet 640r are formed on the front side of both the left and right ends of the sorting member 760, respectively, and are formed on the back side of the through hole of the winning member 730. Thus, the spaces at both the left and right ends of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball inlet 64 and the right second ball inlet 640r. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the sorting member 760 described above can be sent through the first ball inlet 64 to the through hole of the winning member 730, or through the right second ball inlet 640r to the winning member 730.
A path for sending a ball to the through hole 30 can be formed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the balls that flow into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 are sorted to the left and right by the sorting member 462a, roll along the third ball sending path KR3 on either the left or right side, and enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. The balls are configured so that the player can visually check the rolling status of the balls. Specifically, a part of the sorting device 700 is made of a highly transparent material (e.g., polycarbonate), and the inside of the sorting device 700 is configured to be visible. This makes it easier for the player to understand the status of the balls rolling inside the sorting device 700. In addition, if fraudulent conduct is committed by destroying the internal structure of the sorting device 700 so that balls that flow into the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 roll only toward areas that are advantageous to the player, for example, by destroying the sorting member 762a so that the balls roll only toward one of the third ball sending paths KR3, game center staff can easily confirm the destruction state, making it easier to minimize damage that may result from fraudulent conduct.

The sorting device 700 configured as above sends balls as follows. A ball entering from the opening 710a is sent to the sorting member 760 and sent to the third ball sending path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the sorting member 762 of the sorting member 760. When a ball is sent to the third ball sending path KR3 in the left direction, it is sent to the first ball entrance 64 when it reaches the end of the third ball sending path KR3. Here, the game ball that has entered the first ball entrance 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, when the ball is thrown on the third ball throwing path KR3 to the left, it is thrown to the right second ball entrance 640r when it reaches the end of the third ball throwing path KR3. Here, the game ball that has entered the second ball entrance 640r is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second ball entrance 640r.

In this way, the game balls that enter the opening 710a are alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640 by the distribution member 762, so that the game balls can be evenly distributed to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, and the reserved balls can be generated uniformly. This makes it possible to evenly generate reserved balls of the first special pattern and reserved balls of the second special pattern, and the number of reserved balls of one of the patterns is set to the upper limit, suppressing overflow of balls that are not stored as reserved balls.

In this embodiment, the specific flow path (from the opening 710a of the sorting device 700 to the sorting member 7
The balls that flow down the flow path (62a) are sorted into two flow paths (
In the present embodiment, the balls are alternately distributed toward the third ball sending path KR3 on the left side and the third ball sending path KR3 on the right side, but the distribution of the balls that flow down a specific flow path is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration capable of distributing the balls to three or more flow paths may be used. Furthermore, a configuration that does not distribute the balls equally to each flow path may be used, and for example, a configuration in which the distribution member 762a is driven by an electric drive source may be used so that the distribution destination is switched depending on the timing when the ball reaches the distribution means.

As shown in FIG. 446, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (
The control board unit 91 is equipped with a display control device 114.
A payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted on the device to form a unit.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 1
The boards 100 to 16 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 104 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

In addition, the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected to each other by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (connected by a crimping structure).
A seal (not shown) is attached to the joint between the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or seal,
It is possible to know whether the board boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 462). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply unit 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply unit 115. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 462). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main control device 110 is provided with a setting value display device 110a capable of displaying setting values, a setting key 110b capable of switching between a state in which a setting change operation (and a setting confirmation operation) is accepted and a state in which a setting change operation is not accepted (normal game state),
In a state where a setting change operation is accepted (setting change state), an operator (e.g., a pachinko machine 1
A setting change mechanism is provided that is composed of at least a setting switch 110c that can change the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in response to the operation of the setting change mechanism (a staff member of the parlor where the pachinko machine 10 is installed). A method of changing the settings using this setting change mechanism and a method of checking the settings will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

First, the procedure for changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described with reference to Fig. 447(a) to (d). As shown in Fig. 447(a) to (d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, with the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 cut off, the setting key 110b is rotated clockwise to the ON position (Fig. 447(a)
447(b) ). In other words, in order to change the settings, it is necessary to first cut off the power supply to the pachinko machine 10. Next, with the setting key 110b rotated to the ON side, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see FIG. 447(b) ). This sets the state of the pachinko machine 10 after power-on to a setting change state, which indicates that the setting is being changed. When the setting change state is entered, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a, which is composed of a four-digit seven-segment display. This display content allows the operator (e.g., a hall staff member) to easily understand that the setting change state has been successfully entered.

When the setting state is changed, the setting value is changed by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 447(c)). In the first embodiment, three types of setting values, 1 to 3, are provided, and the larger the value, the higher the probability of winning. That is, the setting 1 has the lowest probability of winning (for example, 1/262 in the low probability state, 1/65 in the high probability (high probability state) state), and the setting 3 has the highest probability of winning (for example, 1/218 in the low probability state, 1/55 in the high probability state). In the setting change state, the setting is changed from 1 to 2 to 3 to 1, etc., each time the setting switch 110c is pressed. Also, when the setting switch 110c is pressed when the setting value is 3, the setting value is configured to return to 1 in a rotary manner. Also, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a.
Fig. 447(c) is a diagram showing a display state in a state where the set value is set to "3." As shown in Fig. 447(c), when the set value is changed to 3 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the last digit on the set value display device 110a is displayed as "Setting 3."
The number "3" will be displayed.

After the operator has completed the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting key 110b is rotated counterclockwise to place the setting key 110b in the OFF position, thereby ending the setting change state (see FIG. 447(d)). The setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key part and a keyhole-shaped key part that matches the key part, and the key part can be removed. This allows the operator (e.g., a hall clerk) to insert the key part into the keyhole only when performing the setting change operation, and to remove and store the key part when the setting change operation is completed. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent players, etc. from fraudulently changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, thereby preventing the hall from suffering unexpected disadvantages.

Then, when the setting change operation is completed, the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is resumed. In the initial setting process after the restart, a process is executed to send a setting change completion command indicating that the setting change operation is completed and a setting value command indicating the setting value determined by the setting change operation to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a process is executed to send a command (initialization command) for resuming the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113, which is on hold until the setting change operation is completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to turn on the power with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on. In other words, when changing the setting values, the various control devices (main control device 110, audio lamp control device 113, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 execute initialization processing. And, since the setting change operation is performed by the operator manually pressing the setting switch 110c, the time required for the setting change operation varies greatly depending on the operator's operating proficiency and the setting value to be changed.

In such a situation, if the various control devices execute the initial setting process when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, an event may occur in which the order in which the initial setting process ends in the various control devices differs depending on whether or not a setting change operation is performed and the length of time required for the setting change operation. For example, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without performing a setting change operation,
If the initial setting processing of the main control unit 110 is completed before the initial setting processing of the voice lamp control unit 113, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to perform a setting change operation, an event may occur in which the initial setting processing of the voice lamp control unit 113 is completed before the initial setting processing of the main control unit 110.

Recent pachinko machines 10 are configured to execute various monitoring processes to prevent acts of trying to obtain prize balls from the pachinko machine 10 in an improper manner (fraudulent acts), and are configured to execute strict monitoring processes in particular for acts of turning the power off and on. In other words, when attaching a special control means (fraudulent board) to the pachinko machine 10 as a fraudulent act, it is necessary to turn off the power to the pachinko machine 10 once, and since it is necessary to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10 in order to play using the fraudulent board, strict monitoring processes are executed for the power off and on of the pachinko machine 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the contents (flow of processing) of the initialization processing executed when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is properly turned off and on are fixed, so that the contents (flow of processing) of the initialization processing executed when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is properly turned off and on can be fixed.
However, as described above, if the order of ending the initial setting process in the various control devices differs depending on whether or not a setting change operation is performed and the length of time required for the setting change operation, multiple patterns will occur in the content (processing flow) of the initialization process executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is properly turned off and on, making it difficult to determine whether the content (processing flow) of the initialization process executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on is proper.

In addition, as has been the case in the past, in pachinko machines 10, the main control processes that affect the game results (such as processes for deciding whether or not to award prize balls to the player and for deciding whether or not to set a game state that makes it easier to award prize balls) are executed by the main control device 110, which is the main control means, and various commands for indicating the results of the various control processes executed by the main control means are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, which is the slave control means, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute presentations based on the various commands received, thereby clearly informing the player of the results of the various control processes executed by the main control means.

The contents of various control processes executed by the main control means (main control device 110), i.e.
In order to prevent the contents of the master control process from being tampered with, the direction of command transmission is configured to be one-way, from the master control means to the slave control means. Therefore, the master control means cannot grasp the progress of the initial setting process on the slave control means side. In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, if an event occurs in which the order in which the initial setting processes of the various control devices end differs depending on whether or not a setting change operation has been performed and the length of time required for the setting change operation, when the initial setting process of the main control means (master control device 110) has been completed, the voice lamp control device 1
Even if a command to indicate the result of the main control processing is sent to the slave control means (voice lamp control device 113), if the initial setting processing of the slave control means (voice lamp control device 113) is not completed, the appropriate processing cannot be executed for the sent command, and an effect different from the processing content of the main control processing is executed, confusing the player.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the relationship between the timing at which the main control unit 110 completes the initial setting process and the timing at which the voice lamp control unit 113 completes the initial setting process is configured to be constant whether or not a setting change operation is performed. Specifically, the initial setting process of the main control unit 110 is a process that is executed regardless of whether a setting change operation is performed, and when a setting change operation is performed, a specific command indicating that the specific process has been performed is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113 at the stage of executing a specific process that is executed after the setting change operation is completed, and the voice lamp control unit 113 executes part of the initial setting process based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10, and then the main control unit 11
Execution of the remaining initial setting process is put on hold until a specific command transmitted from .0 is received.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to fix the processing contents (processing completion order) of the initial setting processing of the various control devices that is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is properly turned on. Also, even if a one-way communication form is used from the master control means (master control device 110) to the slave control means (audio lamp control device 113), it is possible to make the various control devices execute proper processing.

In this embodiment, the display control device 114 (see FIG. 462) is configured to execute display control of the third symbol display device 81 formed by a liquid crystal display, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a boot process for starting up the liquid crystal display is executed based on the power-on. The display control device 114 receives a display command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display an image based on the received display command.
An example of an image displayed on the pattern display device 81 is one in which the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the frame button 22 (see FIG. 462) has been operated by the player, and based on the result of that determination, sends a display command to the display control device 114 to change the display mode of the stage (background image), and the display control device 114 changes and displays the stage (background image) based on the received display command.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has a function (setting function) that can change the setting value (jackpot probability), and is configured so that the length of the processing period of the initial setting process of the main control device 110 differs depending on whether or not a setting change operation is performed and the length of the period required for the setting change operation. In addition, since the relationship between the timing at which the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is completed and the timing at which the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed is configured to be the same, depending on the length of the processing period of the initial setting process of the main control device 110, the length of the period from when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 to when the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed will also differ depending on whether or not a setting change operation is performed and the length of the period required for the setting change operation.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, it is not possible to maintain a fixed relationship between the timing at which the initial setup processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed and the timing at which the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81 is completed. For example, there may be cases where the initial setup processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed earlier than the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81, or where the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81 is completed earlier than the initial setup processing of the sound lamp control device 113.

Therefore, even if the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display command to the display control device 114 to change the display mode of the stage (background image), if the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 is not completed, the display on the stage (background image) according to the transmitted display command cannot be executed, and the stage information for indicating the stage being displayed that is grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 and the actual third pattern display device 81 cannot be displayed.
There was a problem where the stage displayed on the screen was different from the one displayed on the screen.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the prohibition period for prohibiting the sending of display commands from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 can be configured to be executed for a specific period longer than the period until the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 is completed, thereby making it possible to prevent the sound lamp control device 113 from sending display commands to the display control device 114 when the third pattern display device 81 is not started (when the boot process is not completed).However, when configured in this manner, for example, when it takes a long time for the initial setting process of the sound lamp control device 113 to be completed, that is, when a setting change operation is executed, the prohibition period for prohibiting the sending of display commands from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 continues even though the third pattern display device 81 is started up, so there is a problem that the presentation effect cannot be enhanced by using the third pattern display device 81.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs the display control device 11 based on the timing of completion of the initial setting process of the sound lamp control device 113 and the timing of completion of the boot process for starting the third symbol display device 81.
The control unit 10 is configured to be able to determine whether or not a prohibited section is set, which prohibits the transmission of display commands to the display device 4, and the length of the prohibited section.

By configuring in this manner, the accuracy of the presentation executed by the third pattern display device 81 can be improved, and the third pattern display device 81 can execute a presentation that corresponds to the contents of the main control processing executed by the main control means (main control means).

Next, referring to (e) to (g) of FIG. 447, the procedure for checking the settings (settings checking operation) will be described.
In order to check the settings, first, in the same manner as in the setting change operation, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the setting key 110b is rotated to the ON position (see FIG. 4).
447(e)). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (i.e., leaving it in the OFF state), the setting confirmation state is set (see FIG. 447(f)). When the state transitions to the setting confirmation state, the setting value currently set is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. In the example of FIG. 447(f), the setting value is "3".
When the operator has finished checking the settings, press setting key 1
By turning 10b to the ON side, the setting confirmation state is terminated and the state transitions to a state where normal play is possible (see Figure 445 (g)).

In the first embodiment, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting switch 110c may be eliminated, and the setting may be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, the setting changes from 1 to 2 to 3 every time the setting key 110b is rotated 60 degrees.
→ 1 ... It may be configured so that the setting key 110b can be pulled out of the keyhole to return to a state where normal play is possible. By configuring it in this way, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 446, the setting change mechanism is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, that is, in a position that cannot be seen by the player during play. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the setting change mechanism from being operated during play. In addition, when actually performing a setting change operation, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, but in the open state, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are supported only by the opening and closing shaft, resulting in a relatively unstable state. In such a situation, if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the return operation of the decorative accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10 is performed, excessive load is applied to the opening and closing shaft, etc., which may cause damage.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the return operation of the reel is executed after the standby process in which the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 is awaited is completed.
The system is configured so that the return operation of the reel is not executed during the setting change operation. By configuring in this way, the return operation of the reel is executed during the setting change operation, and the pachinko machine 1
In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 is less likely to vibrate during the setting change operation compared to when the return operation of the reel is executed while the operator is operating the setting switch 110c, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation of the setting switch 110c.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 122 is always set to ON when the setting change operation is performed, so that, for example, the setting change operation cannot be performed while maintaining the state in which the probability of winning advantageous to the player is set. In other words, the game state set after the setting change operation is performed becomes the initial state (normal state). Therefore, for the game performed after the setting change operation is performed, the game conditions other than the difference in the jackpot probability based on the setting value can be unified, making it easier to provide a fair game to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 448 to FIG. 461, the third pattern display device 81 in the first embodiment will be described.
As shown in Fig. 448(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, upper and lower, with the upper 2/3 being the main display area Dm that mainly displays the third symbol in a variable manner, and the remaining lower 1/3 being the sub-display area Ds that displays the preview performance, characters, number of reserved balls, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, center, and right.
The three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 display three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, respectively. The above-mentioned third pattern is displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display is changed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the pay line L1, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the pay line L1 in the order of the left pattern row Z1 → right pattern row Z3 → center pattern row Z2 during each game. When the third pattern stops, if a combination of jackpot patterns (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main patterns) is aligned on the pay line L1, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

In this embodiment, as described above, by using a configuration in which each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from top to bottom and displayed in a variable manner, and then stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination of patterns (display manner), it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting in which display manner the third pattern will be stopped and displayed during the period from when the special pattern lottery is executed to when the result of the special pattern lottery is displayed (variable display period). However, it is sufficient that the third pattern (identification information) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is dynamically displayed until it is stopped and displayed. For example, a dynamic display mode in which multiple identification information is switched and displayed on the pay line L1 may be used, or a dynamic display mode in which multiple (four or more) identification information moves as if floating within the display area may be used.

In addition, according to the example shown in FIG. 448, a mode in which a pattern imitating a number is displayed variably (dynamically) as the third pattern is used, but other modes may be used as long as the result of the special pattern lottery can be shown to the player, for example, a configuration in which a plurality of images imitating characters are dynamically displayed instead of numbers may be used, or a configuration in which a moving image with a story is displayed in the main display area Dm and the result of the special pattern lottery is notified to the player according to the result of the story may be used. In other words, any mode may be used as long as it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the result of the special pattern lottery by using the period from when the special pattern lottery is executed to when the lottery result is displayed.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into two small areas Ds1 and Ds2 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is:
When the reserved balls reserved in the main display area Dm are displayed dynamically (dynamically), the reserved symbols that are to be changed are displayed in the execution display area. The reserved symbols that are moved to the execution display area are displayed so that it can be identified that the corresponding special symbols are being changed.
The symbol is displayed larger than the reserved symbol. When the variation is executed, the color of the symbol or the pattern of the symbol is changed to indicate the result of the lottery for the special symbol that is being changed.

The small area Ds2 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, and a preview performance image. Furthermore, a character display area C is set in the small area Ds2, in which a character image is displayed to guide the player about the game content. In this character display area, the character's comments are displayed and the character's facial expressions and gestures are variably displayed as a guide display mode to guide the player about the content of the game to be performed and the content of the performance to be performed in an easy-to-understand manner. In this way, by using a specific area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 as a guide area for the game (performance), it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game even when multiple pieces of information are displayed at overlapping periods.
Detailed guidance display modes using the character display area C will be described later with reference to Figures 449 to 461.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 448(b), a total of three main symbols of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. When the main symbols are displayed in a variable manner, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after it are also displayed visibly, so that a maximum of nine main symbols may be displayed in total. In the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 displays a base m0 for the active symbol, which indicates that this is an area where the reserved ball corresponding to the active special symbol is moved and displayed, and when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is changed as shown in FIG. 449(a), a circle symbol is displayed. In addition, the small area Ds2
Among the reserved patterns (circular patterns) displayed in the small area Ds1, the leftmost circular pattern, which indicates that the pattern was reserved first, is hidden, and then a circular pattern with a larger diameter than the reserved pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1. In this case, the reserved patterns displayed in the small area Ds2 are displayed by moving the reserved patterns displayed in succession to the position where the leftmost reserved pattern that was hidden was displayed. When the reserved patterns are moved to the small area Ds1 and displayed as the pattern in progress, a predetermined performance lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special pattern that starts to change and the selected change pattern, and the color and pattern of the pattern in progress are determined and displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special pattern that starts to change and the selected change pattern by the running pattern displayed in the small area Ds1, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that the running pattern displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the performance of changing the color, pattern, etc. at the start of the change, but also the performance of changing during the period when the special pattern is changing. For example, it is executed at the timing when the third symbol switches from a high-speed fluctuation to a low-speed fluctuation, at the timing when a reach display mode (a display mode in which the left and right symbols are displayed as the same symbol and temporarily stopped while the middle symbol is displayed as a scrolling symbol) is entered, or at the timing when a specific effect (for example, when a specified movie effect is executed) is executed, etc.

As shown in FIG. 448(b), the small area Ds2 has a first reserved pattern base m1 on the left side, which indicates that the area is an area where a reserved pattern indicating that the reserved pattern is the first in the variable order is displayed. On the right side of the first reserved pattern base m1, a second reserved pattern base m2 indicating that the reserved order is second, a third reserved pattern base m3 indicating that the reserved order is third, a fourth reserved pattern base m4 indicating that the reserved order is fourth, a fifth reserved pattern base m5 indicating that the reserved order is fifth, a sixth reserved pattern base m6 indicating that the reserved order is sixth, a seventh reserved pattern base m7 indicating that the reserved order is seventh, and an eighth reserved pattern base m8 indicating that the reserved order is eighth are displayed even when the reserved patterns are not displayed.

When the reserved symbols are not displayed in the predetermined number or more, the reserved number indication symbol P is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol base m5 to the eighth reserved symbol base m8. The reserved number indication symbol P is configured in the shape of a variable cover with the number "5" displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved symbol base m5 indicating that the reserved symbol is the fifth. Similarly, the number "6" is displayed on the upper part of the sixth reserved symbol base m6 indicating that the reserved symbol is the sixth, and the number "7" is displayed on the upper part of the sixth reserved symbol base m7 indicating that the reserved symbol is the seventh.
The upper part of the base m7 for the reserved pattern has the letter "7" displayed to indicate that it is the seventh in the reserved order, and the upper part of the base m8 for the eighth reserved pattern has the letter "8" displayed to indicate that it is the eighth in the reserved order, both of which are variable lid-shaped patterns.

As shown in FIG. 448(b), when the number of reserved pieces is 0, the fifth reserved pattern base m
The reserved number indication symbol P is displayed across the area from the 5th to the 8th reserved symbol base m8, and is configured so that the player can recognize that the maximum reserved number is 8, including the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved symbols is set to 4 for the first special symbol and 4 for the second special symbol.
Although a maximum number is set for each of the special symbols and the second special symbols, it is not limited to this, and the maximum number may be set to the combined reserved number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, thereby suppressing the occurrence of overflow.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 448(b), the reserved pattern pedestals m1 to m8 are displayed to inform the player that the maximum number of reserved patterns that can be displayed is eight, but this is not limited to this and the reserved pattern pedestals m1 to m8 may be configured not to be displayed.

On the right side of the 8th reserved symbol base m8, a character display base C1 is displayed, which indicates that this is the area where the preview character is displayed. By configuring in this way, even if the preview character is not displayed, the player can check the area where the character is displayed in advance, and can play the game easily.

Next, referring to FIG. 449, one of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.
The reserved reading performance is described below. The reserved reading performance is a performance in which a new special symbol variation cannot be started, for example, when a special symbol variation is being executed or a big win game is being executed, and the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, the second ball entrance 640r, the third ball entrance 640r, the fourth ball entrance 640r, the fifth ball entrance 640r, the sixth ...
The contents of the reserved balls (winning information) acquired based on the game ball entering the ball entrance 640,
This is a production method in which a determination is made (prediction is made) before the special pattern lottery is actually carried out, and the determination result (prediction result) is used to give the player a hint in advance of the result of the special pattern lottery to be carried out in the future.

By executing this reserved look-ahead performance, the result of the special symbol lottery can be suggested to the player from a point before the special symbol lottery is actually executed, so that, for example, if the look-ahead result is a big win, it is possible to suggest to the player for a longer period that there is a high possibility of winning the big win. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation of winning the big win for a longer period of time, and since the look-ahead performance can be executed using a look-ahead performance period that is longer than the period (variable period) from when the special symbol lottery is actually executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to easily increase the variety of the performances to be executed.

When it is determined that the reserved symbol pre-reading performance is to be executed based on the pre-reading result, the display mode of a specific reserved symbol among the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is changed in order to inform the player of the reserved symbol that is the target of the reserved symbol pre-reading performance. In the display screen shown in Fig. 449(a), the display mode of the reserved symbol (reserved symbol with the number 4) displayed on the fourth reserved symbol base m4 is variably displayed.

The display mode of the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved pre-reading performance is changed at various times, and when the reserved pattern (reserved pattern with the number 4) that is the target of the reserved pre-reading performance moves to the active pattern base m0, as shown in Fig. 449 (b), a variable performance corresponding to the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved pre-reading performance is executed. That is, in the example using Fig. 449, the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved pre-reading performance is displayed on the fourth reserved pattern base m4 and the special pattern lottery is actually executed, so the reserved pre-reading performance can be executed using a period longer than the period from the execution of the target special pattern lottery to the stop display.

Although detailed description is omitted, the presentation mode for changing the display mode of the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved pre-reading performance is configured to be determined based on the result of the pre-reading process (preliminary hit/miss determination result) and the number of reserved balls, and for example, the display mode to be changed is determined based on the timing when the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved pre-reading performance is displayed, the timing when the display position of the reserved pattern shifts, the timing when a specific performance is performed in the variable performance for showing the result of the lottery for other special patterns performed during the reserved pre-reading performance, and the timing when the player operates the frame button 22. In this way, in the reserved pre-reading performance that is performed over a long period of time, by determining the presentation mode that specifies the timing during the performance period to change to which display mode, it is possible to easily execute a series of performances that do not give the player a sense of incongruity.

Next, referring to Fig. 450, the contents of the performance executed when the number of reserved balls acquired reaches the upper limit (8 balls) will be explained. Fig. 450(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit (8 balls), and Fig. 450(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the reserved balls upper limit performance is executed.

In this embodiment, when the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, it is determined whether the acquired reserved balls contain winning information indicating a jackpot win, and based on the result of the determination, a reserved upper limit performance is executed.The system is configured to be able to execute the reserved upper limit performance in a performance mode (fish festival) that notifies the player that winning information indicating a jackpot win is included (notifies the player that a jackpot win will be won) and a performance mode (chance notification) that notifies the player that the expectation of winning a jackpot is high.

More specifically, when a reserved ball count command indicating that reserved balls have been acquired is output from the main control unit 110, and the reserved ball count command is received by the voice lamp control unit 113, the reserved ball count command reception process (see S2208 in FIG. 508) executes a determination as to whether the reserved ball count has reached the upper limit based on the currently received reserved ball count command (S2304), and if the upper limit has been reached, the presentation mode (presentation pattern) to be executed is determined by referring to the reserved ball count upper limit presentation selection table 222e (see FIG. 473(b)).Then, it is determined whether the reserved ball count upper limit presentation is possible in the determined presentation mode, and if it is possible, the reserved ball count upper limit presentation is executed.

Here, in this embodiment, in addition to various effects that are executed based on the special symbol lottery, the time that has elapsed since the power was turned on is determined based on the time information, and different types of effects (period effects) can be executed based on the elapsed time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute period effects at the same timing for multiple pachinko machines 10, so by executing an integrated effect using multiple pachinko machines 10, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect compared to when an effect is executed by only one pachinko machine 10.

However, if the period during which this period effect is executed overlaps with the period during which the above-mentioned reserved upper limit effect is executed, the display modes of each effect are mixed, resulting in an effect that is difficult for players to understand. Also, as described above, since the period effect is executed at the same timing for multiple pachinko machines 10, if the execution of the period effect is determined or the execution timing of the period effect is delayed depending on the game status of each pachinko machine 10, the effect of the period effect is significantly reduced.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the conditions for executing the look-ahead performance (reserved look-ahead performance, reserved upper limit performance) are met, the performance mode of the look-ahead performance that can be executed is determined, and then, based on the time information, it is determined whether or not the situation is such that the look-ahead performance can be executed, and if the situation is such that the look-ahead performance cannot be executed, the execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited. By configuring in this way,
This prevents the execution of an effect that is difficult for a player to understand from overlapping the execution period of the period effect and the execution period of the look-ahead effect.

Furthermore, the system is configured to calculate an upper limit of the performance period of the pre-reading performance that can be executed based on the number of reserved balls that are the target of the pre-reading performance and the result of the special pattern lottery executed before the pre-reading performance ends, and to determine whether the calculated upper limit period overlaps with the period during which the period performance is executed. This makes it easier to execute the pre-reading performance compared to when the prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the pre-reading performance is univocally defined based on the execution timing of the period performance.

In other words, the look-ahead effect is an effect in which a look-ahead process is executed on the acquired reserved balls, and an effect based on the look-ahead result is notified (suggested) to the player in advance before the special pattern lottery is actually executed, and the execution period varies greatly depending on the number of reserved balls that are the subject of the look-ahead effect. Therefore, when specifying a prohibition period that prohibits the execution of the look-ahead effect without specifying the content (performance period) of the look-ahead effect that is actually executed, the look-ahead effect with the longest performance period, that is, the look-ahead effect that is executed across the period in which the special pattern lottery is executed for the upper limit number of reserved balls (8 in this embodiment), and the longest period (for example, 60
Even if the prohibition period was set to a certain period (seconds), it was necessary to specify the prohibition period so that the period in which the look-ahead performance is executed and the period in which the period performance is executed do not overlap.

By defining the prohibited period in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the pre-reading effect and the period effect from being executed at the same time, but the prohibited period may become unnecessarily long,
There was a problem in that the frequency with which the look-ahead performance was executed was significantly reduced.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a performance period of a pre-reading performance that can actually be executed is specified,
It is configured to determine whether the specified performance period overlaps with the period performance, and prohibits the execution of the look-ahead performance only when it is determined that the performance period overlaps. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute the look-ahead performance in which a short performance period is set, compared to the case where a specific prohibition period is specified.

Here, with reference to FIG. 452(b), the relationship between the type of look-ahead performance and the look-ahead prohibition period will be described. FIG. 452(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of look-ahead performance and the look-ahead prohibition period. As shown in FIG. 452(b), a prohibition period that prohibits the execution of the look-ahead performance can be set for the period in which the period performance (SP time performance) is executed, and if the timing determined to execute the look-ahead performance falls within the above-mentioned prohibition period, the execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited. And, as the types of look-ahead performance, there are normal look-ahead (look-ahead with a relatively short look-ahead performance period) that does not go through the jackpot game period, and look-ahead at the time of the jackpot (look-ahead with a relatively long look-ahead performance period) that goes through the jackpot game period, and the length of the look-ahead prohibition period is made different depending on the type of look-ahead performance that can be set as the look-ahead performance to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute the look-ahead performance in which a short performance period is set, compared to the case in which a specific prohibition period is specified.

In addition, three or more types of look-ahead performance may be provided, and in this case, in addition to the presence or absence of a jackpot game, the number of times special pattern changes are executed during the look-ahead performance and the duration of the special pattern changes may also be used as elements for roughly specifying the performance period of the look-ahead performance.

Returning to Fig. 450(b), the explanation will be continued. When "School of Fish Festival" is determined as the performance when the reserved number is at the upper limit, the School of Fish Festival performance is executed as a series of performances using the period during which eight reserved symbols (eight reserved symbols numbered 1 to 8 displayed in the small area Ds2 of Fig. 450(a)) are consumed. As shown in Fig. 450(b), when the School of Fish Festival performance is executed, a display area HR1 is formed at the top of the main display area Dm, and the words "Entering School of Fish Festival" are displayed as a telop. Then, a display mode in which a school of fish is waiting is displayed on the right side of the main display area Dm.
In addition, in the center of the main display area Dm, a pseudo-pattern change is executed, which continues to change and is displayed until the fish festival performance ends (until the special pattern that has won the jackpot is displayed stationary).

Furthermore, during the period when the Fish Festival performance is being performed, the reserved symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds2, and the pseudo reserved symbol tm0 that continues to be displayed until the Fish Festival performance ends is displayed on the active symbol base m0 of the small area Ds1. In other words, during the Fish Festival performance, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the special symbol lottery has been performed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to know how long the Fish Festival performance will continue. Also, it is possible to make it difficult to know which reserved symbol won the jackpot.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 450(b), the display area HR2 and the display area HR3 are formed in the main display area Dm, and the third pattern, which is displayed in synchronization with the actual special pattern change, is displayed in the display area HR3, and information indicating the actual number of reserved patterns is displayed in the display area HR2. This makes it possible to notify the actual game situation even during the fish festival performance in which the pseudo-changing display and the pseudo-running pattern display are executed. In addition, when the display area HR2 and the display area HR3 are formed, it is preferable to display the information displayed in each display area (the actual number of reserved patterns and the changing status of the third pattern) in a manner that is difficult for the player to see. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the reduction in the performance effect of the fish festival performance in which the pseudo-changing display and the pseudo-running pattern display are executed.

In addition, when the actual number of reserved symbols and the change status of the third symbol are to be notified during the Fish Festival performance, the actual number of reserved symbols and the change status of the third symbol may be notified by the lighting state of an LED provided in an area different from the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, on the game board 13. This can reliably prevent a player who is watching the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the Fish Festival performance from grasping the change in the actual number of reserved symbols and the change status of the third symbol. Furthermore, the actual number of reserved symbols and the change status of the third symbol may not be notified during the period when the Fish Festival performance is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 450(b), during the Fish School Festival performance, the pseudo reserved pattern tm0 displayed on the execution pattern base m0 of the small area Ds1 is displayed in a display mode with multiple stars. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the display mode of this pseudo reserved pattern tm0 is determined based on the information (the number of jackpots included in the reservation) referred to when determining the performance mode of the performance at the upper limit of the reservation, and is configured so that the more stars there are, the higher the possibility that many jackpots are included in the reservation. In addition, the display mode of the pseudo reserved pattern tm0 may be configured to be variably displayed during the performance period of the Fish School Festival performance, and in this case, it is preferable to variably display the number of stars so that they increase during the performance period of the Fish School Festival performance. This makes it possible to keep the player interested in the Fish School Festival performance that is being performed after the Fish School Festival performance is performed, that is, even after it is notified that a jackpot will be won soon. Also, a variable display pattern in which the number of stars decreases may be provided as the display mode of the pseudo reserved pattern tm0 during the performance period of the school of fish festival performance. In this case, a new gameplay can be provided in which the player is expected to end the school of fish festival performance when there are a large number of stars. Furthermore, as in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in a configuration in which the timing of the end of the school of fish festival performance is difficult to understand, if a variable pattern in which the number of stars increases and decreases is provided as the display mode of the pseudo reserved pattern tm0, it becomes difficult to predict the timing of the end of the school of fish festival performance and to predict the transition of the number of stars, so that the player can be interested in the transition of the number of stars until the school of fish festival performance ends.

The display mode of the pseudo reserved pattern tm0 displayed during the fish festival performance may be determined based on information other than the number of jackpots in the reserve, for example, based on the number of reserved patterns consumed from the execution of the fish festival performance until the first jackpot is won, or based on the setting value ("1" to "3") set in the pachinko machine 10. Also, it may be determined by combining each of the above-mentioned requirements. Here, when determining the display mode of the pseudo reserved pattern tm0 by combining multiple requirements, it is preferable to configure it so that the same display mode is easily determined in the case where one requirement is advantageous to the player and the other requirements are disadvantageous to the player, and in the case where one requirement is disadvantageous to the player and the other requirements are advantageous to the player.

Specifically, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the pseudo reserved pattern tm0 to be set to "3" stars when the number of reserved jackpots is 1 and the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is 3, i.e., when the requirement indicating the number of reserved jackpots is unfavorable to the player and the requirement indicating the setting value is favorable to the player, and when the number of reserved jackpots is 3 and the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is 1, i.e., when the requirement indicating the number of reserved jackpots is favorable to the player and the requirement indicating the setting value is unfavorable to the player, the display mode of the pseudo reserved pattern tm0 to be set to "3" stars is set to "3", and the player will keep watching the fish festival performance until he actually wins a jackpot, while imagining whether the setting value is low and many jackpots are in the reserved state, or the setting value is high and the number of reserved jackpots is small.

Therefore, the longer the time from the execution of the Fish Festival performance to the winning of the big jackpot, the fewer the number of big jackpots in reserve will be predicted, and the higher the set value will be expected. This allows the player to pay attention to the progress of the performance while predicting the degree of advantage of multiple requirements in a composite manner, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, the display mode of the pseudo reserved pattern tm0 displayed during the Fish School Festival performance may be determined by other conditions, for example, a specific display mode (for example, seven stars) that is displayed only when multiple requirements are favorable may be specified. By configuring in this way, a player who is displayed with the specific display mode can enjoy the Fish School Festival performance with peace of mind.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, after the display screen shown in Figure 450 (b) is displayed, the fish school festival presentation progresses, and when a special pattern change is executed in response to a jackpot win, a fish school presentation is executed in which the school of fish that have been waiting on the right side of the main display area Dm move to the left so as to cover the entire main display area Dm, and then the patterns are displayed in a stopped state in a display mode indicating that a jackpot win has been won, thereby notifying the player that a jackpot win has been won.

In this embodiment, the pseudo pattern variation display is executed until the pattern is stopped in a display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won during the fish festival performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the target displayed in the main display area Dm may be switched from the pseudo pattern to the third pattern in accordance with the timing when the special pattern jackpot variation is executed. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide performance data corresponding to the mode of stopping the pattern as performance data for varying and displaying the pseudo pattern, and the amount of performance data can be reduced.

In other words, when the fish festival performance is executed, as the performance data corresponding to the variable display of the pseudo symbol executed in the main display area Dm, only the performance data corresponding to the mode of displaying the variable displayed symbols at a speed (high speed) that is difficult for the player to distinguish is prepared, and the pseudo symbol is changed at high speed until the special symbol is changed to the big win. Then, when the special symbol is changed to the big win, the pseudo symbol is changed at high speed instead of the pseudo symbol being changed at high speed. In this case, the third symbol is changed at high speed even in the normal state, so that the third symbol is changed at high speed according to the start of the special symbol change, and the performance data used for the third symbol change performance (big win change performance) in the normal state is applied. This allows the symbol indicating the big win to be stopped and displayed in the fish festival performance without using dedicated performance data. Furthermore, since the timing for switching from the pseudo pattern to the third pattern is when the pattern is rapidly changing, even if the type of pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is different at the moment of switching, it is difficult for the player to notice the situation, and therefore it is possible to prevent the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In the above example, the pseudo-pattern change display and the third pattern change display are switched so as not to give the player a sense of incongruity, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-pattern change display and the third pattern change display may be switched so as to intentionally give the player a sense of incongruity. For example, the pseudo-pattern change display may be switched to the third pattern change display in a situation where the change display speed is lower than the high speed described above and the patterns are displayed at a low speed at which the player can identify each pattern being displayed, or in a situation where at least one pattern is displayed stationary. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player understand that the third pattern change display has been executed (the special pattern jackpot change has started), so that a player who wants to know the timing of the special pattern jackpot winning as soon as possible can be made to pay attention to the content of the pattern change display executed during the fish festival performance in order to find the timing of the pattern change.

In this embodiment, the fish festival performance is executed only when at least one reserved symbol that wins the jackpot is included in the reserved symbol, but it may be executed only when there are two or more reserved symbols that win the jackpot in the reserved symbol. By configuring in this way, the added value of the fish festival performance can be further increased. Also, the fish festival performance may be executed in some cases (for example, 1%) when there is no reserved jackpot in the reserved symbol. This allows the player to play with a sense of tension until the jackpot is won, since it is possible to leave a small possibility that the jackpot will not be won when the fish festival performance is executed.

Next, referring to Figures 451 and 452, the content of the period effect that is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 10 will be explained.
The pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has an RTC (real-time clock) for measuring the current time, and is configured to execute a periodic performance (SP time) of about 3 minutes when a predetermined time (about 2 hours) has elapsed since the power was turned on based on the time information measured by the RTC. Normally, in a pachinko hall, the power is turned on simultaneously for multiple pachinko machines 10, so in a pachinko hall where multiple pachinko machines 10 of the same type are installed, the periodic performance (SP time) is executed simultaneously at a specific timing. By configuring multiple pachinko machines 10 to execute the same periodic performance at the same timing in this way, the performance effect in the pachinko hall can be significantly improved.

In this embodiment, the period performance is executed based on the elapsed time since the power was turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the period performance may be executed when the time measured by the RTC reaches a predetermined time. By configuring in this way, even if the timing of turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 differs or if a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 10 and it is necessary to temporarily cut off the power, multiple pachinko machines 10 are configured to execute the same period performance at the same timing, thereby significantly improving the performance effect in the pachinko hall.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 471. In this embodiment, the performance period in the pachinko machine 10 is divided into a normal performance period, a SP time period, and a bonus period based on the time information measured by the RTC.
It is configured to be switchable between the SP time preparation period, which indicates that the SP time period is about to arrive, and the normal presentation period. When the normal presentation period is set as the presentation period, the normal presentation is executed regardless of the time information clocked by the RTC. Also, when the SP time preparation period is set, the same presentation as the normal presentation period is executed, and a telop is displayed in the display area HR1 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 indicating that the SP time period is about to arrive, stating the comment "SP time will start soon."
When the remaining time until the SP time period comes to an end is 30 seconds, a countdown display is executed to show the number of seconds until the SP time period comes to an end.

When a SP time period is set, a special stage (background image) is displayed and a special piece of music is output from the audio output device 226. In this embodiment, the normal performance period, the SP time preparation period, and the switching timing of the SP time period are predefined, and after a normal performance period of 90 to 120 minutes, an SP time preparation period of about 2 minutes is set, and then an SP time period of about 3 minutes is set.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide added value to various effects executed during the SP time period, so that the pachinko machine 1
This makes it possible to induce a player who is playing 0 to continue playing until the next SP time period is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable performance executed during the SP time period is configured to be able to give a player a more advantageous benefit regardless of the result of the corresponding special pattern lottery than the variable performance executed during the normal performance period (performance executed based on the special pattern lottery). Specifically, when the variable performance is executed during the SP time period, it is configured to be easier to execute a setting suggestion performance for suggesting the current setting value than when the variable performance is executed during the normal performance period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the player's motivation to play during the SP time period.

As described above, in this embodiment, the variable effects executed during the SP time period are configured to make it easier to execute the setting suggestion effects. Therefore, when the SP time period is set, a player who has not shot a ball (a player who has not executed the special symbol lottery) is configured not to be able to execute the setting suggestion effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the player's motivation to play during the SP time period.

In a gaming machine configured in this way, many special symbol lotteries can be performed during the SP time period, which allows many setting suggestion effects to be performed, and this makes it possible to motivate the player to play, but for example, if a jackpot is won immediately after the SP time period is set, many special symbol lotteries cannot be performed during the SP time period, which causes a problem that it becomes difficult to provide the player with information to guess the current setting value. In other words, the occurrence of a situation favorable to the player, that is, winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, creates a situation unfavorable to the player (a situation in which it is difficult to gather information to guess the setting value), which causes a problem that the player's motivation to play decreases depending on the timing of the jackpot win.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the performance period (normal performance period, SP time preparation period,
The system is configured to determine the presentation mode of the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game and the display mode displayed on the end screen of the jackpot game based on the presentation period (normal presentation period, SP time preparation period, SP time period) set in the pachinko machine 10 at the end timing of the jackpot game and the normal presentation period, SP time preparation period, SP time period).

Specifically, when a jackpot game is executed and it is difficult to execute a setting suggestion effect using a variable effect, the setting suggestion effect is easily executed as a jackpot game effect. By configuring in this way, even if a jackpot game is executed during a period that includes at least the SP time period, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Here, the content of the effects (period effects) executed during the SP time period (during SP time) will be explained with reference to Fig. 451(a). Fig. 451(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time when about 50 seconds have passed since the SP time was set.
As shown in (a), when the SP time is set, a background image (stage) that is more brilliant than that of the normal performance period is displayed as the background image (stage) of the main display area Dm as a period performance, and a comment "SP time in progress" is displayed as a telop in the display area HR1 as a notification mode for notifying the player that the SP time period is currently in progress. Furthermore, the display area HR4 formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm displays a remaining time display mode for showing the remaining time of the SP time period, and in Fig. 451 (a), a display mode indicating that the remaining time is 2 minutes and 10 seconds is displayed.

In addition, display areas HR5 and HR6 are formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and display the command contents (mission contents) to be executed during the SP time period and the current achievement level for the mission contents. Here, in this embodiment, as added value that can be imparted to the player during the SP time period, a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the current setting value is executable. And, when the mission contents displayed in the display areas HR5 and HR6 are cleared, the setting suggestion effect is executable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the mission contents set during the SP time period, one mission content can be selected from a plurality of mission contents including an easy-to-achieve mission content (first mission content) and a mission content (second mission content) that is more difficult to achieve than the first mission content. The selection ratio of each mission content is set to be different according to the setting value of the pachinko machine 10.

In other words, the mission content set during the SP time period itself includes elements for guessing the setting value, and by completing the set mission, new information for guessing the setting value can be obtained. By configuring in this way, even players who are unable to complete the mission can be given added value (setting guessing elements) during the SP time period, so that they can be motivated to play during the SP time period. In addition, by completing the mission, further added value (setting guessing elements) can be given, so that players can be more motivated to play.

The display screen shown in FIG. 451(a) shows that the mission content is set to be accomplished when the number of special symbol variations executed during the SP time period reaches 30, or when the number of reach effects executed during the SP time period reaches 5. The display area HR5 displays the characters "Number of variations" indicating that the number of special symbol variations is the target, "30" is displayed in the achieved number Pb indicating the number of times to accomplish the mission, and "30" is displayed in the current number Pa indicating the number of times currently being executed (number of special symbol variations).
In the display region HR6, the word "Reach Number" is displayed, indicating that the number of reach effects is the target, "5" is displayed in the achievement count Pd indicating the number of times to achieve the mission, and "0" is displayed in the current count Pc indicating the number of times that has currently been executed (the number of reach effects).

In other words, the display screen shown in Figure 451 (a) is a display screen indicating that the fifth special pattern change has been executed since the SP time period was set, and that no reach performance has been executed even once during the SP time period.

An example of the state after 1 minute and 5 seconds have elapsed since the display screen shown in Fig. 451(a) was displayed will be described with reference to Fig. 451(b). Fig. 451(b) shows an example of the display screen that is displayed when 2 minutes and 55 seconds have elapsed since the SP time period was set.
In the state shown in FIG. 1(b), as shown in the display area HR5, the number of special symbol variations executed during the SP time period is 30, and the mission is accomplished. In addition, in the center of the main display area Dm, a treasure box 801 and a button icon 80 for instructing the player to press the frame button 22 are displayed as added value effects that are given when the mission is accomplished.
When the player presses the frame button 22 in this state, an effect is executed in which the treasure box 801 is opened.

Next, referring to Fig. 452, the effects that are displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed while the display screen shown in Fig. 451(b) is displayed will be described. Fig. 452(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a bonus (setting guess element) is awarded based on the achievement of a mission during the SP time period. Fig. 452(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a bonus (setting guess element) is awarded based on the achievement of a mission during the SP time period.
) is displayed, frame button 22 is pressed, and two seconds have passed, with the display area HR4 displaying a remaining time display mode indicating that there are two seconds remaining.

Then, the treasure box 801 is opened, and "A" is displayed as the setting guessing element 801a.
In addition, the word "Clear" is displayed to indicate that the mission targeting the number of special symbol variations shown in the display area HR5 has been accomplished.

When a mission is accomplished during the SP time period and a setting guessing element 801a is granted (displayed), a display area HR7 is formed and the setting guessing elements 801a already acquired are displayed as history. With this configuration, when multiple setting guessing elements 801a are acquired during one SP time period, it is easy to predict the setting value that is actually set by looking at the history display displayed in the display area HR7.

Here, we will explain the contents of the setting guessing element that is given to the player when the setting suggestion effect is executed. In this embodiment, as the setting guessing element that can be given to the player, there is a setting guessing effect "A" that is selected at approximately the same rate regardless of the setting value,
The display is configured to be able to determine three different settings: "B" indicating that the currently set setting value is not the most unfavorable setting value (setting 1) for the player; "C" indicating that there is a slight possibility that the currently set setting value is a high setting (setting 3); "D" indicating that there is a high possibility that the currently set setting value is a high setting (setting 3); and "E" indicating that the currently set setting value is a high setting (setting 3).

In addition, display modes corresponding to the setting guessing elements "A" to "E" are defined for each of the various performance modes executed as the setting suggestion performance. Therefore, when the setting suggestion performance is executed, the setting guessing element to be given by the current setting suggestion performance is first determined, and then the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance corresponding to the determined setting guessing element is determined. Note that, when a setting suggestion performance is configured to be able to give a plurality of setting guessing elements, it is preferable to predefine the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance corresponding to the combination of the plurality of setting guessing elements. By configuring in this way, for example, when two modes "D" are determined as the plurality of setting guessing elements, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion performance in a composite performance mode indicating that a high setting is more likely to be set than when one mode "D" and one mode "C" are determined. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance in which a player can easily grasp the set value set when multiple setting guessing elements are given to one setting suggestion performance than when a single setting guessing element is given to the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, the type of the setting guess element is not limited to the above-mentioned types "A" to "E", and may be, for example, a type indicating that the setting value is an odd number, a type indicating that the setting value is an even number, a type indicating that a setting change operation has been performed, a type indicating that the current setting value is higher than the previously set setting value by providing a storage means capable of storing the previously set setting value, or a type indicating that the current setting value is lower than the previously set setting value. In addition, in this embodiment, three types of setting values are provided as the setting value of the pachinko machine 10, but this is not limited thereto, and four or more types of setting values may be set. In this way, by configuring four or more types of setting values to be set and increasing the type of the setting guess element, it is possible to provide a variety in the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation, and it is possible to provide the fun of guessing the current setting value from various perspectives based on the type of the setting guess element obtained.

In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 452(a), the setting guessing elements acquired within a predetermined period (within the SP time period) are configured to be displayed as a history, but in addition to this function, when multiple setting guessing elements are acquired, each setting guessing element may be offset based on a predetermined rule, and only the remaining setting guessing elements may be displayed, or setting value prediction information analyzed based on the multiple acquired setting guessing elements may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming confused due to acquiring too many setting guessing elements, and the more setting guessing elements are acquired, the easier it is to execute setting guesses with high accuracy, so that the player is motivated to play in order to acquire setting guessing elements.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 having a function capable of displaying the history of previously acquired setting guessing elements, it is preferable to provide an erasing means capable of erasing the history information of previously acquired setting guessing elements when the player finishes playing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent other players from finding out about the acquired setting guessing elements.

Next, referring to FIG. 453, the content of the effect that is executed when the SP time period, which is the period effect, ends will be explained. As described above, the SP time period is set based on the time information measured by the RTC. Therefore, depending on the fluctuation status of the special pattern fluctuation,
The SP time period ends when the remaining variation time of the special pattern variation being executed is short, the SP time period ends when the remaining variation time of the special pattern variation being executed is long, and the SP time period ends when the special pattern variation is not being executed.

As described above, during the SP time period, a different presentation (period presentation) is executed than during other periods, and the start and end timings of the period presentation are specified to be specific times (specific hours), thereby enhancing the effect of the presentation by executing the same presentation in synchronization on multiple pachinko machines 10.

Therefore, for example, if the period performance is configured to continue until the special symbol variation being executed ends at the end timing of the SP time period, the end timing of the period performance in each pachinko machine 10 differs, and there is a problem that the performance effect is reduced.
A technology is conceivable in which, at the end of the SP time period, regardless of the remaining time of the special pattern variation being executed at the end of the time period, a period presentation is executed in an ending mode indicating that the SP time period has ended, and the ending mode is continued until the special pattern variation being executed ends.

By using the above-mentioned technology, it is possible to synchronize the timing at which the end mode period presentation is executed on each pachinko machine 10, making it possible to execute a presentation with a sense of unity on multiple pachinko machines 10. However, for example, if the remaining time of the special pattern variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is long, the time that the end mode period presentation continues will simply be longer, which causes the presentation to become less monotonous for the player, causing him or her to quickly become bored with the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the remaining time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is longer than a predetermined time (20 seconds), a dedicated effect (special remaining variation effect) can be executed. In this way, when a predetermined condition is satisfied at the end timing of the period effect, the dedicated effect can be executed, and the effect of the period effect can be improved while also improving the effect of the game after the period effect has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special remaining variation effect is executed according to the length of the remaining variation time of the special symbol variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period. In other words, if a player who senses that the SP time period is about to end stops playing just before the end of the SP time period, it becomes difficult to execute the special symbol variation so as to straddle the end timing of the SP time period, so that the special variation effect is configured to be difficult to execute.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing until the end of the SP time period during which the period presentation is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as a special remaining variation effect, a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the currently set setting value, that is, an effect including information that is advantageous to the player, can be executed. Therefore, when the SP time period ends, it is possible to make a motivated player who is trying to obtain advantageous information interested in the variation time of the special pattern variation that is executed across the end timing of the SP time period, and it is possible to increase the interest of the player in the game.

Here, referring to Fig. 453(a), the display screen when the special remaining variation performance is executed will be explained. Fig. 453(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the period performance (SP time) ends, and is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the special remaining variation performance is executed after the period performance ends.

As shown in Fig. 453(a), the display area HR1 displays the text "SP time ended" as a telop to inform the player that the SP time period has ended, and the display area HR4 displays a remaining time display indicating that the remaining time is 0 seconds (end). Then, the comment "Chance to get a lot of suggestive effects" is displayed as if the character J0 displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is talking to the player as an announcement to inform the player that the period until the currently executed special symbol variation ends (until the remaining variation time reaches 0 seconds) is a suggestive effect high probability period in which the setting suggestive effect is executed with a high probability (higher probability than other periods).

In addition, on the right side of the main display area Dm, the effect result (effect mode) executed as the setting suggestion effect is displayed.
A display area HR7 is formed as a history display area for displaying the history of the
) is a display screen that is displayed immediately after the high probability period of suggested performance is reached, so the history of the performance results is not displayed in the display area HR7, but it is possible to display the history of multiple setting suggested performances that were executed during the high probability period of suggested performance.

By configuring it in this way, when multiple setting suggestion effects are executed in a short period of time, especially
When at least a part of the execution period of one setting suggestion effect and another setting suggestion effect different from that one setting suggestion effect overlap with each other, even if the player is unable to grasp all of the multiple setting suggestion effects being executed, the player can easily grasp the contents of the setting suggestion effects that have already been executed by grasping the contents (performance results) displayed in the history display area.

The display mode displayed in the history display area may be a display mode for showing the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance actually performed, or a display mode for showing the setting suggestion content included in the setting suggestion performance actually performed. Here, as the performance mode of the setting suggestion performance actually performed, for example, one character from among multiple characters can be displayed as the setting suggestion performance, and when the setting suggestion content (for example, the suggestion content that suggests that the set setting value is an even number, suggests that it is an odd number, or suggests that it is not a specific setting value) differs depending on the type of the displayed character, it is preferable to configure the history display area to display a display mode (for example, an icon mode imitating a character image) that allows the player to identify the type of character displayed as the setting suggestion performance.

When executing such a setting suggestion display, since there are multiple display modes for showing the same setting suggestion content, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the setting value based on the multiple display modes displayed in the history display area.

In this embodiment, the display mode displayed in the display area HR7 (history display area) is configured to be displayed until a predetermined period has elapsed (until the high probability period of the suggestive performance ends), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode displayed in the display area HR7 (history display mode) may be configured to be deleted (hidden) at will by the player operating the operating means (operation button 22). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the history display corresponding to the setting suggestive performance that the player has already understood from being continuously displayed in the display area HR7, so that, for example, when a setting suggestive performance is executed in the most advantageous performance mode for the player (performance mode that notifies the player that it is the highest setting) as the performance mode of the setting suggestive performance, the display mode indicating that performance mode is continuously displayed in the history display area, thereby preventing a player who is not playing from easily understanding the setting value.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display area HR7 is formed at a specific location in the main display area Dm, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player may be able to select any location. By configuring in this way, the player himself can easily understand the display mode, and
The history display area can be formed in a location that is difficult for other players to grasp.

In this embodiment, the history display area is configured to display a display mode based on the performance mode of the executed setting suggestion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a plurality of display modes displayed in the history display area satisfy a predetermined condition, a new display mode based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition may be displayed. For example, when a predetermined number (e.g., three) of display modes (weak suggestion modes) in which the actual setting value is difficult to grasp are displayed as the display modes displayed in the history display area, a display mode (strong suggestion mode) in which the actual setting value is easier to grasp than the weak suggestion modes may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is easier to grasp the setting value if many setting suggestion performances are executed during the high probability period of the suggestion performance, so that the player can play the game while expecting that many setting suggestion performances will be executed during the high probability period of the suggestion performance.

In addition, the number of display modes that can be displayed in the history display area is limited (for example, 5).
A configuration may be provided in which the display modes are displayed up to an upper limit in accordance with the execution order of the setting suggestion effects during the high probability suggestion effect period, and when a strong suggestion effect is displayed based on the display of multiple weak suggestion effects, the multiple weak suggestion effects are erased and a new display mode can be displayed in the history display area.

In this case, it is also possible to configure it so that a clearing condition different from the display condition of the strong suggestive mode can be set, and the weak suggestive mode can be cleared when the clearing condition is met, for example, by configuring it so that the clearing condition is met when a specific performance is executed during a period of high probability of suggestive performance, or when the player executes a specific operation on the frame button 22. This makes it possible to display more display modes in the history display area based on the clearing condition being met, making it easier for the player to predict the setting value.

The display modes to be erased from the history display area based on the establishment of the erasure condition may be configured to be erased in the order of the display period that has been displayed in the history display area, i.e., from the display mode that was displayed first. This allows the display modes that have been displayed in the history display area for a long time, i.e., the display modes that are likely to be understood by the player, to be erased in order, and a new display mode can be displayed, thereby preventing the display mode from being erased immediately after being displayed in the history display area, making it difficult for the player to understand the setting suggestion content of the setting suggestion performance.

Also, the type of display mode displayed in the history display area may be determined, and the type of display mode in which the actual setting value is difficult to grasp (for example, weak suggestion mode) may be erased in order. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to display a display mode that makes it easier to predict the setting value as the high probability period of suggestive performance progresses. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play while expecting that the high probability period of suggestive performance will continue for a long time and that many setting suggestive performances will be executed during that period.

Next, referring to FIG. 453(b), the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestion performance high probability period
The following describes the content of the effects displayed on the display screen. Figure 453 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the high probability period of the suggested effects.

As shown in FIG. 453(b), during the high probability of suggestion performance, various performances are used to execute the setting suggestion performance. Specifically, setting suggestion performances 801a and 801b corresponding to the variable performance executed in the main display area Dm, setting suggestion performances 801c corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed on the execution pattern base m0 displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and character J
0, a setting suggestion effect 801d corresponding to the setting suggestion effect 801d is executed.

And the setting suggestion contents included in the various setting suggestion effects executed during the suggestion effect high probability period (
A to D) are displayed in the history display area of the display area HR7. In addition, the characters "5 seconds left until the end of the special zone" are displayed in the upper center of the main display area Dm as a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the high probability period of the suggestive performance. In other words, FIG. 453(b) is a display screen in a state where the remaining variation time of the special pattern variation being executed is 5 seconds.

Here, the setting suggestion contents included in each performance mode of the setting suggestion performance in this embodiment will be explained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, the setting value that differs in the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery can be set in three stages (settings 1 to 3), and the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to transition to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed by turning on the power in a state in which a specific operation condition is established while the power is not turned on. Then, by performing a decision operation to decide an arbitrary setting value in the setting change state, the setting value is decided, and the game is executed with the game specifications (jackpot probability of special symbols) corresponding to the decided setting value.

As described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is made different depending on the setting value, so the operation of changing the setting value executed in the setting change state is a game degree variable operation for varying the degree of advantage to the player. In this embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is made different depending on the setting value, but an element other than the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be used as an element (setting difference element) for varying the degree of advantage to the player. For example, the setting difference element may be the rate at which an advantageous game state (e.g., a probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set as the game state set after the jackpot game is finished, or the setting difference element may be the probability (small win probability) of the result of the special symbol lottery being other than a jackpot and a small win in which a winning game different from the jackpot game is executed, or the winning probability of the end lottery (fall lottery) for ending an advantageous game state (e.g., a probability variable state) advantageous to the player (probability of ending the probability variable state and transitioning to another game state) may be the setting difference element. In addition, the ease of executing the special pattern lottery may be a setting difference element. For example, a setting difference may be set for the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery, or the opening operation pattern of the electric device 640a during a normal winning game may be made different for each setting, thereby making it possible to vary the ease with which a ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 to which the electric device 640a is attached.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting value is configured to be changeable based on the technical idea of varying the degree of advantage of the player depending on the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. A setting difference element may be provided so that the degree of advantage of the player is the same but the type of benefit that is likely to be given to the player can be varied. For example, when a first setting value is set, the jackpot probability of the special pattern lottery is a first value, and the rate at which the special state is set after the jackpot game ends (probability change transition rate) is a first rate, and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the jackpot probability of the special pattern lottery is a second value lower than the first value (harder to win), and the rate at which the special state is set after the jackpot game ends (probability change transition rate) is a second rate higher than the first rate (probability change transition rate).

By configuring in this way, the following game specifications can be provided to give the same degree of advantage to the player:
Since it is possible to provide different gameplay characteristics, it is possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Returning to FIG. 454, the explanation will be continued. In this embodiment, a setting suggestion effect including a suggestion mode for suggesting a setting value using a part or all of various effects is configured to be executable.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 453 (b), setting suggestion effects 801a, 801b corresponding to the variable effects executed in the main display area Dm, a setting suggestion effect 801c corresponding to the pending pattern displayed on the pedestal m0 for the currently executing pattern displayed in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and a setting suggestion effect 801d corresponding to the character J0 are executed.

The presentation form of each setting suggestion effect is predefined according to the form of the effect on which it is based. For example, setting suggestion effects 801a and 801b, which correspond to a variable effect, are effects in which a suggestion icon to suggest a setting value pops out from the variable third pattern or the stopped third pattern, and different types of suggestion icons (shown by alphabet type in the figure) are displayed depending on the setting suggestion content.

The setting suggestion effect 801c corresponding to the pedestal m0 for the active symbol is an effect in which a suggestion icon is displayed in the process of changing the display mode of the active symbol (shown as a round symbol in the figure) displayed on the pedestal m0 for the active symbol, and different types of suggestion icons (shown as alphabetical types in the figure) are displayed according to the setting suggestion content. Also, the setting suggestion effect 801d corresponding to the character J0 is an effect in which the character J0 makes a comment, and different comments (shown as alphabetical types in the figure) are displayed according to the setting suggestion content.

In other words, the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation to be executed is predefined according to the setting suggestion content and the type of the corresponding presentation. By configuring in this way, it is easier to associate each presentation (presentation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery) with the corresponding setting suggestion presentation, and the presentation effect can be improved, compared to a case where the same setting suggestion presentation is executed regardless of the type of the corresponding presentation.

In addition, when the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery and the corresponding setting suggestion effect are related to each other in this way, it is preferable to configure the game so that when an effect corresponding to the currently running effect is executed, it is difficult for the player to tell whether the effect is a setting suggestion effect or a part of the effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery. By configuring the game in this way, when an additional effect is executed for the currently running effect, the player can enjoy both the fun of predicting the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 based on the performance mode of the additional effect and the fun of predicting the result of the currently running special symbol lottery, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the additional performance to be a special performance mode that is likely to be selected (executed) when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery or when the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a high setting (for example, setting 3). By configuring in this way, when an additional performance is executed in the special performance mode, there is a high possibility that a jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery being executed, or that the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is a setting value (high setting) that is advantageous to the player.

Therefore, when an additional performance of a special performance mode is executed in a state where it is difficult to execute the next jackpot game (high possibility of losing and winning the special pattern lottery) (for example, a state with a low probability of the special pattern), the player is made to expect a jackpot win, and the jackpot game ends until the next jackpot game is executed (until the conditions for executing the jackpot game are met) in a state where it is easy to execute the next jackpot game (high possibility of winning the special pattern lottery) (for example, a probability variable state).

Next, the contents of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to Fig. 454. Fig. 454 is a diagram showing the types of suggestion modes included in the setting suggestion effect. As shown in Fig. 454, in this embodiment, five types (A to D) of presentation patterns (suggestion modes) can be set as the presentation patterns (suggestion modes) of the setting suggestion effect, and the presentation pattern (suggestion mode) is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c described later based on the set setting value.

The setting suggestion effect selection table 222c is stipulated so that the selection rate of each effect pattern (suggestion mode) varies depending on the setting value. This makes it possible to create effect patterns such as an effect pattern (suggestion mode) in which only a specific setting value has a high selection rate, an effect pattern (suggestion mode) in which multiple setting values that satisfy a predetermined condition have a higher selection rate than other setting values, and an effect pattern (suggestion mode) in which the selection rate is high regardless of the setting value.

As shown in FIG. 454, the presentation pattern A (suggested mode A) has a high selection rate regardless of the setting value, in other words, it is a presentation pattern (suggested mode) that makes it difficult to predict the setting value. When a setting suggestion presentation including the mode of this presentation pattern A is executed, it is difficult for the player to predict the setting value, so this suggestion mode becomes a suggestion mode (weak suggestion mode) that is disadvantageous to the player. Note that this weak suggestion mode is not only a suggestion mode in which the selection rate is specified to be the same for each setting value, but also a suggestion mode in which the error is specified to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the difference, because when the suggestion mode is displayed, it is more difficult for the player to predict the setting value than when other suggestion modes are displayed, so it falls under the weak suggestion mode.

The presentation pattern B (suggested mode B) is a presentation pattern (suggested mode) in which the selection ratio is regulated so that only a specific setting value (setting 1) is not selected. This presentation pattern B
When a setting suggestion effect including the above aspect is executed, the player can understand that the setting value is not Setting 1, that is, the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player. In this way, even when a specific setting value is not indicated to the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the setting value that has been set by eliminating one candidate from among multiple candidates (setting values).

In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect of suggestion mode B is executed, and the setting value (setting 1) that is the most disadvantageous to the player is denied, so that the player can understand that the game situation is not the most disadvantageous. Therefore, when suggestion mode B is displayed first as a setting suggestion effect, the player can predict the setting value while continuing to play. In addition, when suggestion mode B is displayed after the setting suggestion effect of another suggestion mode (for example, a suggestion mode that notifies that the setting value is an odd number) is executed, the accuracy of predicting the setting value can be improved by combining the contents of the displayed suggestion modes.

In this embodiment, the performance pattern (suggested mode) B is configured to negate the setting value (setting 1) that is most disadvantageous to the player, but it may be configured to negate a specific setting value (such as an intermediate setting or the most advantageous setting) or a specific range (for example, settings 1 to 2), or multiple types of suggested modes B (for example, suggested mode B1 that negates setting 1 and suggested mode B2 that negates setting 2, etc.) may be provided. For example, when a setting suggestion performance is executed in a suggested mode that negates the setting (setting 3) that is most advantageous to the player, the player who understands this will likely move to another pachinko machine 10 as soon as possible. This makes it possible to prevent the player from playing for an unnecessarily long period of time.

The presentation pattern C (suggested mode C) and the presentation pattern D (suggested mode D) are presentation patterns (suggested modes) whose selection ratios are regulated so that the higher the set value, the more frequently they are selected.
The setting difference in the selection ratio is specified to be larger for the suggestion mode D than for the suggestion mode C. In other words, it is specified that the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode C and the setting suggestion effect of the suggestion mode D are more likely to be executed at a higher setting value (setting 3) than at a lower setting value (setting 1).

Furthermore, since the setting difference in the selection ratio is specified to be greater for suggestion mode D than for suggestion mode C, the greater the number of times the setting suggestion performance of suggestion mode D is executed relative to the number of times the setting suggestion performance of suggestion mode C is executed, the greater the possibility that a higher setting value has been set.

In this way, by varying the selection rate for each setting as multiple suggestion modes that can be selected regardless of which setting value is set, the player can predict the setting value by comprehensively determining the number of times the setting suggestion performance of each suggestion mode is executed.

In addition, in the case where a plurality of suggestion modes are provided in which the higher the set value is set, such as the above-mentioned suggestion mode C and suggestion mode D, the selection rate becomes higher as the set value is set.
It is preferable to specify each selection rate so that the higher the set value, the larger the difference between the selection rate of A and the selection rate of the suggestion mode D. In this way, the higher the set value is set, the more likely it is that the difference in the number of times the suggestion mode C and the suggestion mode D are executed will be, making it easier for the player to predict the set value.

On the other hand, each selection ratio may be specified so that the difference between the selection ratio of the suggestion mode C and the selection ratio of the suggestion mode D at each setting value is equal. By configuring in this way, the total number of executions of the setting suggestion performance of the suggestion mode C and the setting suggestion performance of the suggestion mode D is greater when the setting value is high than when it is low. Therefore, the player can select whether to predict the setting value by referring to only the execution number of the setting suggestion performance of the suggestion mode D, to predict the setting value by referring to the total execution number of the setting suggestion performance of the suggestion mode C and the setting suggestion performance of the suggestion mode D, or to predict the setting value by judging both numbers in a composite manner, so that the variation for predicting the setting value can be increased, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early.

The presentation pattern E (suggested mode E) is a presentation pattern (suggested mode) that can be selected only when the setting 3, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player, is set in this pachinko machine 10 (a concept that includes the case where it is very rarely selected in cases other than setting 3). In other words, the suggested mode E
When the setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting value that is most advantageous to the player (setting 3)
It is possible to easily inform the user that the setting has been made.

Although detailed explanation will be given later, the selection rate of this suggestion mode E is set to be extremely low compared to other suggestion modes, and the selection rate is set so that the probability that the setting suggestion effect of suggestion mode E will be executed is about 50% even if a pachinko machine 10 with setting 3 is played all day. By setting the selection rate low in this way, a player for whom the setting suggestion effect of suggestion mode E has been executed is notified (suggested) that the most advantageous setting value (setting 3) has been set, and a sense of superiority can be provided for having executed an effect with a low execution probability.

In addition, by lowering the rate at which the setting suggestion performance of the suggestion mode E is executed, the suggestion mode E
Since the possibility remains that setting 3 is set even in a pachinko machine 10 in which the setting suggestion performance is not executed, the player can be motivated to play the game.

Next, referring to Fig. 455, the flow of the time lapse from power-on and the period performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. Fig. 455 is a diagram showing the time lapse from power-on and the flow of the variable performance, Fig. 455(a) is a transition diagram showing the time lapse from power-on, Fig. 455(b) is a diagram showing the performance period at each time, Fig. 455(c) is a diagram showing the variable pattern A as an example showing the relationship between the period in which the special symbol variation is executed and the performance period, and Fig. 455(d) is a diagram showing the variable pattern B as an example showing the relationship between the period in which the special symbol variation is executed and the performance period.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, different presentation periods are set based on the time elapsed since the power was turned on, and a presentation period (SP time period) in which a period presentation (SP time presentation) is executed for a predetermined period (3 minutes) can be set as the presentation period. This period presentation (SP time presentation) is an effect that is executed based on the time elapsed since the power was turned on regardless of the presence or absence of special pattern variation, so that multiple pachinko machines 10 execute the period presentation simultaneously. In this way, multiple pachinko machines 10 execute presentations with a sense of unity, so that it is possible to execute presentations that have an impact on the player, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, the performance mode executed as the period performance is a performance mode that is completed by a single pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when a period performance is executed simultaneously by a plurality of pachinko machines 10, the same performance mode is executed by each pachinko machine 10. However, this is not limited to this. For example,
As the performance mode of the period performance, a plurality of (three types) performance mode types can be set, and one period performance can be executed using three adjacent pachinko machines 10. In this case, as the performance mode type of the period performance, the first one corresponding to the left pachinko machine 10 of the three machines can be set.
It is preferable to prepare in advance a first presentation mode type, a second presentation mode type corresponding to the central pachinko machine 10 among the three machines, and a third presentation mode type corresponding to the right-hand pachinko machine 10 among the three machines, and configure the system so that the presentation mode type can be determined individually according to the installation status of the pachinko machine 10 to be installed.

This makes it possible to set the type of presentation mode for the installed pachinko machines 10, and when one period presentation is executed using three pachinko machines 10, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the presentation mode types are not set in order and the presentation effect of the period presentation is reduced.

In this case, it is preferable to select a type of performance mode for the period performance from a type of performance mode corresponding to a period performance completed by one machine, a type of performance mode corresponding to a period performance completed by a small number of machines (e.g., 3 machines), and a type of performance mode corresponding to a period performance completed by a large number of machines (e.g., 20 machines). By configuring in this way, the performance mode of the period performance can be set according to the installation status of the multiple pachinko machines 10, and the performance effect can be improved according to the installation status.

In addition, in this embodiment, the SP time preparation period is set as a presentation period for notifying the player in advance that the above-mentioned SP time period will come. Specifically, the SP time preparation period is set from the time that the elapsed time from power-on is two minutes before the start timing of the SP time period until the SP time period is set. This SP time preparation period is intended to notify the player in advance in an easy-to-understand manner that the SP time period will soon be set.

During this SP time preparation period, the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 executes the same effect as the normal effect executed during the normal effect period, and the remaining period (remaining time) until the SP time period is set is displayed on the execution screen of the normal effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the remaining time until the period effect is executed, and for example, it is possible to take a break within the remaining time until the period effect is executed, so that a game that is friendly to the player can be provided.

As shown in FIG. 455(a), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the timing device (RT
C) The elapsed time is measured based on 292. Then, when the elapsed time reaches 88 minutes,
The SP time preparation period is set within the range of 88 minutes to 90 minutes to inform the player that the performance period (SP time period) is coming, which is set between 90 and 93 minutes. When the first performance period (SP time period) ends, a performance period in which a normal performance is executed is set again. Thereafter, the SP preparation period, SP
The time period and the normal period are set in that order.

Each main performance period set based on the elapsed time is determined based on the performance switching table 22 described later.
2b (see FIG. 471). In other words, in the effect switching table 222b, a plurality of effect modes are defined in association with the information clocked by the timing device 292, and an effect based on the selected effect mode is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 455(b), various performance periods that are set based on the elapsed time since the power was turned on and the contents of the performances that are executed during those performance periods will be described.
As described above with reference to FIG. 449, in this embodiment, the presentation period is repeatedly set in the order of a normal period, a SP time preparation period, and a SP time period based on the elapsed time from power-on, and when the normal period is set as the presentation period, a normal presentation (see FIG. 449 and FIG. 450) is executed to show the results of a special pattern lottery executed in each pachinko machine 10.

During the SP time preparation period, the same normal effects as during the normal period are executed, but a part of the display screen is used to display the comment "SP time coming soon" as a notification to inform the player that the SP time period is about to begin. When the remaining time of the SP time preparation period is 30 seconds, in addition to the above notification,
Rather than this guidance mode, a countdown display is executed, which is a remaining time notification mode that specifically shows the remaining time until the SP time period arrives.

This countdown display is intended to show the remaining time in seconds until the SP time period is actually set, and based on the time information measured by the timing device 292, a 30-second countdown display is executed so that the countdown display reaches 0 seconds at the timing when the SP time period is set.

By displaying the countdown in this way, the special time period (
This makes it possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which a player misses the timing at which the special performance (SP time performance) starts, and is unable to properly experience the unified performance using a plurality of pachinko machines 10.

In addition, during the SP time preparation period, a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example,
A telop of "SP time preparation in progress" is displayed on the upper part of the screen (top) indicating that the current time is the SP time preparation period. This telop display is configured to be displayed on the special pattern changing screen where the special pattern change is being performed, and on the demo waiting screen where the special pattern change is not being performed. This allows players to be informed that the SP time period will soon be set (period performance will be performed) even on pachinko machines 10 where they are not playing, so that players who want to play during the period performance can easily find pachinko machines 10 where the period performance is being performed.

Then, when the SP time period is set, a period effect (SP time effect) is executed. In this embodiment, as the SP time effect, a special background (see FIG. 451) is displayed, and a setting suggestion effect for suggesting a setting value is executed more easily than in other effect periods. During this SP time period, a telop of the words "SP time in progress" is displayed on a part (e.g., the upper part) of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, indicating that the current time is the SP time period (see display area HR1 in FIG. 451(a)).

Next, the relationship between the end timing of the SP time period, the end timing of the variable performance for showing the result of the special pattern lottery, and the content of the performance to be executed is shown in FIG. 455 (c) and (d).
As described above, the SP time period is set based on the time elapsed since the power was turned on, and the period is not variable depending on whether or not a special symbol variation is being performed, or the remaining time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the SP time period will end while the special symbol variation is being performed. In this case, if the normal presentation starts at the timing when the SP time period ends (the timing when the normal period is set), there is a problem that the player will be confused because the variation presentation corresponding to the special symbol variation being performed has suddenly changed. Also,
It is also possible to continue (extend) the period effect (SP time effect) until the special pattern change currently being executed at the time the P time period ends, but in this case, there is a problem that the end timing of the period effect executed as a unified effect on multiple pachinko machines 10 will differ depending on the status of the special pattern change on each pachinko machine 10, reducing the effect of the effect.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the special symbol variation is being executed at the end of the SP time period, the remaining time (remaining variation time) of the special symbol variation is determined, and different presentation modes are determined according to the length of the remaining variation time.
The remaining fluctuation time at the end timing of the P time period is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds).
In this case, the display mode indicating the end of the SP time period continues to be displayed, and if the remaining change time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds or more), the period until the remaining change time has elapsed becomes a specialized zone (see FIG. 453(b)), making it easier to execute the setting suggestion effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the change effect corresponding to the special pattern change being executed suddenly switches. Also, the period effect (
This prevents the effect of the period effect, which is executed as a unified effect on a plurality of pachinko machines 10, from being reduced due to the continuation (extension) of the period effect (SP time effect) for a long period of time.

Furthermore, if the remaining time of the special pattern variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period is a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) or more, the remaining time can be used to set a specialized mode in which the setting suggestion performance is more likely to be executed than in other periods, so that the period performance (S
The timing at which the SP time period during which the special P time effect is executed ends, that is, the timing at which the specific period during which a special benefit that is advantageous to the player ends, is a timing at which the player's motivation to play would conventionally decrease, but since a specialized mode in which a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is granted is set depending on the remaining time of the special pattern fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the end information for indicating the timing when the SP time period ends and the remaining change time information for indicating the remaining change time of the special symbol change being executed can be notified to the player. By configuring in this way, the remaining change time of the special symbol change at the end of the SP time period can be easily predicted during the SP time period, so that the player can easily predict the content of the performance to be executed later, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided. In addition, if the player understands that the special symbol change being executed will be stopped and displayed just before the end timing of the SP time period, the player can recognize in advance that the SP time period is likely to end during the period of the special symbol change being executed next, so that the player can enjoy the expectation that a long change time will be set as the change time of the special symbol change being executed next.

Furthermore, in order to make it easier to set the special mode, the game is interrupted during the SP time period, and the S
It is possible to allow the player to play a game adjusted so that the special symbol variation starts just before the end of the P time period. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select between a game in which many setting suggestion effects are executed by executing many special symbol lotteries during the SP time period, and a game in which many setting suggestion effects are executed during the specialized mode period by reducing the number of special symbol variations executed during the SP time period so that the specialized mode can be easily set (making it difficult to execute setting suggestion effects during the SP time period), thereby improving the interest of the game.

Next, referring to Figures 456 to 458, the contents of the performance during the high-speed variation mode in which a short variation time (for example, 1.5 seconds) is likely to be selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation in the high probability state of the normal symbol (time-saving state, probability variation state) than in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state).

More specifically, in a game state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, the electric device 640 opens more than in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. In other words, in a game state in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set,
The system is configured so that it is easier to obtain the right to play the special symbol lottery than in a low probability state of the normal symbol. The right to play the special symbol lottery is configured so that a predetermined number of times can be stored (reserved and stored) as an upper limit.

Therefore, while the high probability state of normal patterns is set, in order to prevent a situation in which a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit, in other words, a situation in which a new execution right cannot be stored even though an opportunity to acquire the right to execute a special pattern lottery has been established, causing discomfort to the player, the system is configured to increase the number of special pattern lotteries that can be executed per unit time by making short-term special pattern variations more likely to be selected.

In addition, if a short variation time is easily selected as the variation time of the special pattern variation even in a state where a low probability state of the normal pattern is set, that is, in a state where it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640, a situation where the special pattern variation ends without acquiring the right to execute the special pattern lottery (not reserved memory) is easily generated, and the player's willingness to play is reduced, so in this embodiment, a state where a high probability state of the normal pattern is set makes it easier to execute a special pattern variation with a shorter variation time than a state where a low probability state of the normal pattern is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily increase the number of special pattern lotteries that can be executed per unit time, and it is possible to suppress a period where the special pattern variation is not executed from being unnecessarily long, which reduces the player's willingness to play.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set, if a predetermined period (period during which special symbol variations are performed 80 times) has passed since the end of a jackpot game, a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than if the predetermined period has not passed. By configuring in this way, when a high probability state of normal symbols (time-saving state, probability-changing state) is set after the end of a jackpot game, a short period of special symbol variation is executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game, which prevents multiple jackpot games from being executed in a short period of time, resulting in excessive awards (prize balls) being given to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game state (high probability state) advantageous to the player is set, the pachinko machine 10 is configured with a game specification in which the high probability state continues until the next big win game is executed, so when the high probability state is set, it is confirmed that the high probability state of the special symbol will continue until the big win is won. In this state, if a long period of time passes without winning the big win in the special symbol lottery, the player will be forced to play a game that wastes time.
This posed a problem in that it reduced the players' motivation to play.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if the special symbol lottery is executed 80 times after the probability variable state is set, that is, if no jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the probability variable state,
When the predetermined period has elapsed, a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation, compared with the period before the predetermined period has elapsed (the period from when the probability variation state is set to when the special symbol lottery is executed 80 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, from continuing for an unnecessarily long period of time.

FIG. 456(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the high-speed fluctuation period that is set when a predetermined period (period during which 80 special symbol lotteries are performed) has elapsed since the high-speed fluctuation state was set. As shown in FIG. 456(a), the display area HR1 displays the text "Fast fluctuation in progress" as a guide to indicate that the high-speed fluctuation period is in a period in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation. Then, the small area D of the sub-display area Ds
In s2, "speed up" is displayed as a mode to indicate that the special pattern variation will be a short variation.
In this manner, by informing the player that the high-speed variation period has been set, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the variation time of the special pattern variation suddenly becomes shorter and the player becomes confused.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 456(a), a display screen for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation period is set in a state in which the high-speed fluctuation period is set (a state in which the 81st special pattern fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation state is set) is shown, but the timing of notifying the player of the information regarding the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period is not limited to this. For example, when the 75th special pattern fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation state is set, that is, when the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period (
The player may be notified in advance that the high-speed fluctuation period will soon begin at a timing a predetermined period before the high-speed fluctuation period is set. By configuring in this way, the player can know in advance that the high-speed fluctuation period will begin, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player is confused by the sudden shortening of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation.

In addition, when using a pre-notification configuration that can notify the player in advance of the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period, for example, it is preferable to configure it so that the special chart reservation is read in advance and the pre-notification is executed when it is determined that the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period will occur based on the result of the pre-reading. Specifically,
The establishment of the condition for transition to the high-speed fluctuation period (execution of 80 special pattern lotteries) may be determined based on the results of a special pattern reserve read-out, and when it is determined in advance that the condition for transition to the high-speed fluctuation period is established (when it is determined in advance that all the results of the special pattern lotteries executed until the transition condition is established are losses), the transition to the high-speed fluctuation period may be notified.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the high-speed fluctuation period is not set (a situation in which a jackpot is won) even though the player has been notified (advance notification) that a transition to the high-speed fluctuation period may occur.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time during the high-speed fluctuation period is shorter than the other periods (for example, 1.5
The time period can be set to any value between 100 and 120 seconds, and different time periods can be selected depending on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery and the type of acquired variation pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variation performance (variation performance corresponding to the variation time) with different winning expectation rates even for special symbol variations executed during the high-speed variation period.

Here, for example, when a short-time (for example, 1.5-second) variation pattern is likely to be selected as the special pattern variation, and then a high-speed variation period is set, and a variation pattern other than a short-time (for example, 6-second variation) is selected as the first special pattern variation to be executed, FIG.
When the display screen shown in (a) is displayed, i.e., when the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation period has begun, a situation occurs in which high-speed fluctuation (1.5-second fluctuation) is not executed.

In other words, in this embodiment, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, in order to execute a fluctuation performance that makes the player expect a big win according to the selected fluctuation pattern, different lengths of fluctuation time (for example, 6 seconds or 12 seconds) can be selected, so the above-mentioned situation (a situation in which the high-speed fluctuation (1.5-second fluctuation) is not executed when the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation period has been entered) may occur. In this case, even though it is notified that the high-speed fluctuation of the special pattern will be executed, the high-speed fluctuation of the special pattern is not executed, which causes the player to feel distrustful and wonder if the pachinko machine 10 is broken, which reduces the player's motivation to play.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation is executed after the high-speed variation period is set, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be distinguishable, and the timing of notifying that the high-speed variation period has been set (there has been a transition to the high-speed variation period) is made different based on the result of the determination. Specifically, if the first special symbol variation after the high-speed variation period is set is not a high-speed variation (1.5-second variation), the setting of the high-speed variation period is not notified.

By configuring in this way, even if the fact that a high-speed fluctuation period has been set is notified,
This makes it possible to suppress malfunctions that occur when high-speed fluctuations of special symbols are not executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed fluctuation period is set, that is, when the first special symbol fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, the fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) of the jackpot fluctuation is used to execute multiple pseudo special symbol fluctuations (fluctuation performances). Specifically, it is configured to execute four pseudo high-speed fluctuations (1.5 seconds) for the 12-second special symbol fluctuation, and then execute a 6-second jackpot fluctuation.

By configuring in this way, even if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed fluctuation period is set, the pseudo high-speed fluctuation (6 seconds) is executed after the pseudo high-speed fluctuation is executed multiple times (4 times) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set, and to make the player think that the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol has been executed during the high-speed fluctuation period.

Here, referring to Fig. 456(b), the display contents displayed when the first special symbol fluctuation after the high-speed fluctuation period is set is other than high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) will be explained. Fig. 456(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a fluctuation time (6 seconds) other than high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is selected in the 81st special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation with a high-speed fluctuation period set) during the probability fluctuation state.

As shown in Figure 456 (b), if the special pattern change executed first after the high-speed change period is set is not a high-speed change (1.5 second change), instead of the display mode (see Figure 456 (a)) that notifies the player that the high-speed change period has been set, a caption reading "Preparing for high-speed change" is displayed in the display area HR1 as a guidance mode to inform the player that the high-speed change period will be set soon.

In this way, even if the game is actually moving to the high-speed fluctuation period, by displaying "preparing for high-speed fluctuation" until the first high-speed fluctuation is executed, it is possible to suppress problems that occur when the high-speed fluctuation of the special symbol is not executed despite the notification that the high-speed fluctuation period has been set. Note that the guidance mode shown in FIG. 456(b) may be configured to be displayed from a point before the high-speed fluctuation period is actually set.

Furthermore, since the situation shown in Fig. 456(b) occurs only when a variation pattern other than the high-speed variation is set in the first special pattern variation after the high-speed variation period is set, when this situation occurs (when the caption "preparing for high-speed variation" is being displayed), the setting suggestion performance may be configured to be executed more easily than during other high-speed variation periods. In this way, by providing a privilege that is more likely to be granted to a player when a variation pattern other than the specific variation pattern is selected in a specific period in which a specific variation pattern is likely to be selected, it is possible to suppress discomfort to the player no matter which variation pattern is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 457, the content of the performance executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery after the high-speed fluctuation period is set will be explained. FIG. 457(a) shows a pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance (1.5 seconds) executed when the jackpot fluctuation (12 seconds) is selected in the 81st special symbol fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation with the high-speed fluctuation period set) during the probability fluctuation state.
FIG. 457(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the pseudo-winning fluctuation performance (6 seconds) executed after the pseudo-high-speed fluctuation ends. FIG. 457(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the pseudo-winning fluctuation performance (6 seconds) executed after the pseudo-high-speed fluctuation ends.

As shown in FIG. 457(a), when the first special symbol change after the high-speed change period is set is a jackpot change with a change time of 12 seconds, a pseudo high-speed change performance of 1.5 seconds is executed four times, and then a pseudo winning change performance of 6 seconds is executed.
The pseudo-variation presentation is so executed that a player thinks that four pseudo-variations of 1.5 seconds and one pseudo-variation of 6 seconds have been executed during a period in which one special pattern variation of one second is executed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 457(a), the display area HR1 of the main display area Dm has the same area as that shown in FIG.
As in 6(a), the words "Fast fluctuation in progress" are displayed as a caption. Then, after 1.5 seconds, the third symbol fluctuation is pseudo-stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with wavy lines on both sides).
In other words, the same variation presentation is executed except that the stop display mode of the third symbol is slightly different (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to easily distinguish) from the case where a high-speed variation of 1.5 seconds is actually executed.

In this embodiment, the third special symbol variation is not stopped during the period in which the actual special symbol variation is not stopped.
Since there is a risk of the player becoming confused if the symbols are completely stopped, the display is configured to display a pseudo-stopped state. However, without being limited to this, the display may be configured to display a stop display mode in which the third symbol is completely stopped at the timing of the stop of the pseudo high-speed variable performance.
In this case, instead of the third pattern (a pattern that changes and is displayed in response to the changing status of the special pattern) as the pattern that changes near the center of the main display area Dm, a performance pattern for performance purposes may be used, and the actual third pattern may be displayed and changed in a different area (for example, an area other than the display surface of the third pattern display device 81).

Then, when the pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance (four times) ends, a six-second pseudo winning fluctuation performance is then executed as shown in FIG. 457(b). Therefore, since it is possible to execute five pseudo fluctuation performances during a period in which only one special symbol fluctuation is actually executed, it is possible to execute a high-speed fluctuation performance (pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance) reliably when a high-speed fluctuation period is set for a player. Also, since four pseudo high-speed fluctuations are executed over a six-second period,
This allows the player time to recognize the words "rapid fluctuation" displayed in the display area HR1.

As shown in FIG. 457, in this embodiment, the pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance is configured to be executed four times, but the number of times the pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance is executed is not limited to this, and for example, the pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance may be configured to be executed three times or less, or more than four times. In addition, as a fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation, multiple fluctuation times (for example, 15 seconds, 20 seconds,
When the time length (seconds) can be selected, it is preferable to determine the number of times the pseudo high-speed fluctuation performance is performed and the content of the performance according to the length of the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern.

Next, referring to Figure 458, the flow of the performance executed when the high-speed fluctuation period in this embodiment is set will be described. Figure 458 (a-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of special symbol lottery draws) and the selected fluctuation time when the high-speed fluctuation period is set after the end of the big win game.
FIG. 458(a-2) is a diagram showing the transition of the presentation mode set in the situation shown in FIG. 458(a-1). FIG. 458(b-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol variations (number of special symbol lottery draws) and the selected variation time when the probability variation state is set after the end of the big win game, and shows the case where a non-high-speed variation (6 seconds) is executed in the first high-speed variation period. FIG. 458(b-2) is a diagram showing the transition of the presentation mode set in the situation shown in FIG.
FIG. 458(c-b-1) shows the transition of the presentation mode set in the situation shown in FIG.
1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of special symbol variations (number of special symbol lottery draws) and the selected variation time when a probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game, and shows the case where a jackpot variation (12 seconds) is executed for the first time in the high-speed variation period.
2) is a diagram showing the transition of the presentation mode set in the situation shown in Figure 458 (c-1).

As shown in FIG. 458 (a-1), in this embodiment, the period from when the probability variable state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 80 times (probability variable first period) and the period from when the special symbol variation is executed 81 times onwards (probability variable second period) are configured to have different variation pattern tables to be referenced when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. In the probability variable first period,
The variation pattern table is configured to be referenced in which the variation time is shorter than when the normal state is set, but is relatively longer than during the second period of the probability variation described later, and in the second period of the probability variation, the variation pattern table is referenced in which the variation time is shorter than during the first period of the probability variation. Details of the variation pattern table referenced in each period will be described later with reference to FIG.

In other words, the first period of the probability change from when the probability change state is set until the predetermined period has elapsed is configured to execute the special symbol change with a relatively longer change time than the second period of the probability change after the predetermined period has elapsed. By configuring in this way, the time between jackpot games can be made longer than when the same change time as the second period of the probability change is selected immediately after the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, by executing multiple jackpot games in a short period of time, it is possible to prevent excessive bonuses (prize balls) from being given to the player in a short period of time. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game situation (probability change state) advantageous to the player from ending in a short period of time.

As shown in Figure 458 (a-2), the second period of the special probability change (the period of special pattern change after the 81st time)
When a high-speed fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is executed in the 81st special symbol fluctuation, a guidance mode (FIG. 456 (
(see a)) is displayed. This high-speed fluctuation period is set until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 1000 times, so the special symbol fluctuation will actually be high-speed until the next big win. Therefore, even though the high probability state of the special symbol is set,
For a player who has had 80 or more special symbol lotteries executed without winning a big win in the special symbol lotteries, the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time can be increased, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Also, Figure 458 (b-1) shows the first special pattern change in the second special period (the first special pattern change in the high-speed change period), that is, the change pattern of the special pattern change on the 81st spin is a miss change with a change time of 6 seconds, and a high-speed change (1.5 seconds) is executed on the 82nd spin.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 458(b-2), a guidance mode (FIG. 456(a)) for informing the player that a high-speed fluctuation period will be set at the timing when the special pattern fluctuation starts on the 81st spin is displayed.
If the notification mode (see FIG. 456(b)) is displayed, there is a risk that the player will feel uncomfortable when the high-speed fluctuation is executed even though the high-speed fluctuation period has started, so from the time when the high-speed fluctuation period is set until the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed (the period until the 82nd special pattern fluctuation is executed), a pre-notification mode (see FIG. 456(b)) is displayed as a preparatory notification to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation period will soon be set (transition to the high-speed fluctuation period). Then, a notification mode (see FIG. 456(a)) is displayed to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation period will be set at the start timing of the 82nd special pattern fluctuation, that is, at the timing when the high-speed fluctuation is executed for the first time after the high-speed fluctuation period is set.

As a result, the notification of entering the high-speed fluctuation period is executed in accordance with the timing when the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed, so that the notification can be easily understood by the player. In this embodiment, the preparation notification is performed using the period from when the high-speed fluctuation period is set to when the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed, and the occurrence of a situation in which the high-speed fluctuation is suddenly executed for the player and it becomes difficult to understand the result of the special symbol lottery is suppressed. However, without being limited to this,
During the period from when the high-speed fluctuation period is set to when the high-speed fluctuation is actually executed, the same fluctuation performance as that of the first period of the probability fluctuation may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand from what timing the announcement of the entry into the high-speed fluctuation period will be executed.

Next, Figure 458 (C-1) shows the first special pattern change in the second special period (the first special pattern change in the high-speed change period), that is, the change pattern of the special pattern change on the 81st spin is a jackpot change with a change time of 12 seconds.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 458(c-2), a guidance mode for informing the player that a high-speed fluctuation period will be set at the timing when the special pattern fluctuation starts on the 81st spin (FIG. 456(a)
457(a)) is displayed, and the pseudo-variation performance is executed using the special symbol variation period (12 seconds) of the 81st rotation. Specifically, the first 6 seconds are used to execute the pseudo high-speed variation performance (see FIG. 457(a)) four times, and the last 6 seconds are used to execute the pseudo big win variation performance (see FIG. 457(b)). In other words, during the variation period of one special symbol variation of 12 seconds, a pseudo-variation performance is executed as if four high-speed variations (1.5 seconds) and one big win variation (6 seconds) were executed, and when the 12-second special symbol variation (big win variation) is stopped and displayed, a big win game is executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the first special pattern change in the second period of the probability change is a big win change, the player can experience the change presentation (high-speed change presentation) in the second period of the probability change, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the timing of the notification of the high-speed fluctuation period is made different based on the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation of the second period of the probability fluctuation period, as described above.
Other configurations may be used. For example, in addition to the first special symbol change (the 81st special symbol change) of the second period of the probability change, if the 82nd special symbol change is also determined to be a miss change with a change time of 6 seconds as a result of the pre-determination, the pseudo high-speed change performance is executed 8 times using the combined time of the 81st special symbol change and the 82nd special symbol change, which is 12 seconds.
It may also be configured to provide an information notification (see FIG. 456(a)) to inform the player that a high-speed fluctuation period has begun at the start of the 81st special pattern fluctuation.

Also, the guide announcement may be configured to be executed at a specific timing during the first special symbol change (the 81st special symbol change) of the second probability change period. For example, if the change time of the 81st special symbol change is long (for example, 30 seconds), the same change performance as that of the first probability change period may be executed for the first 24 seconds, and the pseudo high-speed change performance may be executed four times in the remaining 6 seconds, and the guide announcement may be executed 24 seconds after the start of the 81st special symbol change. By configuring the guide announcement to be executable at a specific timing during the special symbol change in this way, the number of pseudo high-speed change performances can be set arbitrarily, and it is possible to prevent the pseudo high-speed change performance from being executed too many times unnecessarily.

In this embodiment, when the second period of the special probability is set, a notification is issued to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has begun. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a short fluctuation time is selected at the end of the first period of the special probability (the 79th or 80th special pattern fluctuation), a notification may be issued to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation period has begun at the start of the special pattern fluctuation.

In this way, by notifying the player that a period has begun in which the second variable time is likely to be selected based on the selection of the second variable time or a variable time closer to the second variable time than the first variable time in a state in which the condition is likely to be met in which the first variable time is likely to be selected as the variable time for special pattern variation, or in a state in which the condition is met in which the second variable time is likely to be selected, the content of the notification matches the actual special pattern variable time, and a presentation that does not feel strange to the player can be executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the timing of executing a notification to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been entered when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set is delayed, a preparatory notification is executed to indicate that the high-speed fluctuation mode will soon be set. However, without being limited to this, when a notification to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been entered when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, the preparatory notification may be executed before the high-speed fluctuation mode is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 459 to FIG. 461, the contents of the performance during the jackpot game executed in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, as the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game, a basic performance is executed to show the progress of the jackpot game to the player. The contents of this basic performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 459(a). Furthermore, when the amount of the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period in which the advantageous state (time-saving state, probability change state, jackpot game) continues for the player reaches a predetermined number (in units of 200 balls), a predetermined number acquisition performance is executed as a performance to congratulate the player. The contents of this predetermined number acquisition performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 459(b). Furthermore, when this predetermined number acquisition performance is executed, an additional bonus performance is executed to grant an additional bonus under a predetermined condition (when the relationship between the number of rounds and the number of prize balls satisfies a specific condition). The contents of this additional bonus performance will be described later with reference to FIG.
In addition, in the ending screen of the big win game, an ending screen effect is executed which suggests the game state and the set value which will be set after the big win game ends. This ending screen effect is configured so that the effect mode is different depending on the timing of the big win game (whether it overlaps with the period effect or not). For details, see FIG.
This will be described later with reference to 1.

First, the contents of the basic presentation during a jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. 459(a). FIG. 459(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 459(a), during a jackpot game, display areas HR11 and HR12 are formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm. Display area HR11 is a display area for showing the current round number, and the current round number (showing "2" in the figure) is displayed as the round number notification mode. In other words, the display screen shown in FIG. 459(a) is a display screen in a state in which the second round of a jackpot game is being played. In this embodiment,
The round number notification mode is configured to display only the current round number.

This makes it difficult for the player to know how many rounds the current jackpot game will continue, but without being limited to this, the display area HR11 may be configured to display the maximum number of rounds, i.e., the number of rounds (number of rounds) to be played in the current jackpot game. This makes it easy for the player to know how long the jackpot game will continue, so the player can play the jackpot game with peace of mind.
In this case, a part (e.g., 5 rounds) of the maximum number of rounds executed in the current jackpot game (e.g., 10 rounds) may be displayed as the maximum number of rounds, and when an update condition (e.g., an update condition that is met when the 4th round ends) is met during the jackpot game, the maximum number of rounds may be updated to 10. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a surprising presentation for the player.

The display area HR12 is a display area for showing the number of prize balls acquired during the current jackpot game, and the number of prize balls acquired during the current jackpot game (showing "255 GET" in the figure) is displayed as the prize ball number notification mode during the jackpot game. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 459(a) is a display screen in the middle of the second round, in which 255 prize balls have been paid out during the current jackpot game. This display area HR12 may also be configured to display the expected total number of prize balls expected in the current jackpot game, that is, the total number of prize balls calculated based on the maximum number of rounds executed in the current jackpot game and the number of prize balls that can be acquired in one round game, on the display screen in advance. By configuring in this way, the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the current jackpot game can be known in advance, and the player can analyze whether the number of prize balls actually acquired is more or less than the expected number of prize balls. Therefore, when the number of prize balls actually acquired is greater than the number of prize balls expected, the player can consider the pachinko machine 10 to be more advantageous, and can be motivated to play the game.
In addition, if the expected number of winning balls is greater than the number of winning balls actually won, the player can be made to consider future play while also considering moving to another pachinko machine 10.

A display area HR13 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and displays the combination of the third symbols that is stopped and displayed when a jackpot is won. In other words, the history of the jackpot symbols (in the figure, "666" is displayed) is displayed in the display area HR13. Below the display area HR13, a display area HR14 and a display area HR15 are formed, and "960" is displayed in the display area HR14 as a total prize ball acquisition notification mode that indicates the total amount of prize balls acquired during the advantageous period. This total number of prize balls indicates the total number of prize balls acquired from the payout control device 111 during an advantageous period in which a state advantageous to the player (time-saving state, special probability state, jackpot play in progress) continues. For example, when a special probability state is set after the end of a jackpot play (first play),
If you win the jackpot during that special state and play the jackpot again (for the second time),
As a total winning prize ball notification mode displayed during the second big win game, information showing the total number of prize balls paid out during the first big win game, the number of prize balls paid out during the probability bonus state, and the number of prize balls paid out during the second big win game is displayed.

By configuring in this way, if a jackpot game is executed multiple times during the advantageous period,
Since the number of prize balls paid out in multiple jackpot games is added up and displayed, it is possible to display a number of prize balls that could not be obtained in a single jackpot game. Therefore, a player who has maintained an advantageous period for a long time can be given a sense of superiority by being shown a large number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, the total number of prize balls won is displayed by adding up all the prize balls paid out during the advantageous period, that is, the number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering the general ball entry port 63, the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, etc. during the special probability state or the time-saving state. Therefore, the total number of prize balls won can be increased when the special probability state has elapsed for a long period of time without a jackpot being won, thereby preventing a decrease in the motivation of a player to play who has gone a long period of time without winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery held during the special probability state.

In addition, the number of prize balls added to the total number of prize balls won may be configured to be only the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game executed during the advantageous period. This allows the player to easily grasp the total number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls actually paid out by the payout control device 111 can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls may be added based on the number of prize balls confirmed to be paid out by the payout control device 111, that is, the output of a payout command (payout command) from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 to pay out prize balls. In this case, compared to the case where the number of prize balls is added and displayed after the prize balls are actually paid out, the time lag from when the payout condition for the prize balls is established (detection of the ball entering the ball entrance) to when the number of prize balls is added and displayed can be reduced, so that the total number of prize balls obtained can be added and displayed without giving a sense of incongruity to a player who is closely watching the flow of the balls on the game board 13 (the balls entering (winning) into each ball entrance (winning) port).

In addition, in this embodiment, the display based on the number of winning balls is executed, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display the number obtained by subtracting the number of shot balls from the number of winning balls, that is, the number of balls corresponding to the increase in the player's balls. By configuring in this way, the actual increase in the number of balls can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the display area HR15, "2nd time" is displayed as a consecutive win count display mode for indicating the number of times a jackpot game has been executed (consecutive win count) during the advantageous period.
Figure 459(a) shows the display screen during the second (second consecutive) jackpot game during the advantageous period.

In this embodiment, all the jackpot games played during the advantageous period are added up and displayed as the number of consecutive wins, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of playing multiple types of jackpot games, only the number of jackpot games played (5 or more rounds of jackpot games) in which the amount of benefits that can be given to the player is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount may be added up and displayed. Also, information indicating the content of the jackpot games that have already been played may be added to the consecutive win count display mode and displayed.

As described above, referring to FIG. 459(a), the basic effects (
The contents of the basic display have been explained above, but the display mode relating to the information indicating each element of the above-mentioned basic presentation may be configured to display the display mode relating to the information indicating the total number of winning balls among each element of the above-mentioned basic presentation during periods other than during jackpot play, for example, during an advantageous period when jackpot play is not being executed (period during which special pattern variation can be executed).

Next, the contents of the performance of the predetermined number acquisition performance executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to Fig. 459 (b). In this embodiment, as the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game, at least the opening performance executed corresponding to the opening period of the jackpot game, the round performance executed corresponding to the round game period of the jackpot game, and the ending performance executed corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game are configured to be executable.

The round play period during which the round performance is executed is a period during which it is possible to cause a ball to enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 during a big win game. In this embodiment, a part of the round performance executed during the round play period is configured to be able to execute a predetermined number winning performance for celebrating that the total number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous period has reached a predetermined number. Specifically, at the timing when the round game starts,
The total number of prize balls already acquired is read, and it is determined whether the total number of prize balls acquired will reach a predetermined number during the currently executed round of play. If it is determined that the predetermined number will be reached, the presentation mode of the round presentation corresponding to the presentation for acquiring the predetermined number is determined. In this way, by determining the timing at which the total number of prize balls acquired will reach the predetermined number before the total number of prize balls actually reaches the predetermined number, it is possible to specify whether or not it is necessary to execute the presentation for acquiring the predetermined number during the next round of play to be executed.

Therefore, when determining the presentation mode of the round presentation, it is possible to easily determine the presentation mode corresponding to the presence or absence of a presentation for obtaining a predetermined number.

As shown in FIG. 459(b), when the predetermined number acquisition effect is executed, an effect mode is displayed in which a rabbit-like character 810 appears holding a placard 811 in the approximate center of the main display area Dm. Then, when the total number of winning balls reaches a predetermined number (1000 in the figure),
Placard 811 is held up and the display surface showing "1000" is displayed.

In other words, in the round performance corresponding to the round game in which the predetermined number acquisition performance can be executed, the performance in which the character 810 appears is executed in advance, so that the predetermined number acquisition performance (the performance in which the placard 811 with the word "1000" is held up) can be played without giving the player a sense of incongruity.
In addition, since it is possible to specify a round game in which the predetermined number acquisition effect cannot be executed, for example, a presentation mode in which the character 810 does not appear can be determined as a presentation mode of the round presentation corresponding to the round game in which the predetermined number acquisition effect cannot be executed, and therefore, the presentation effect can be enhanced by increasing the variation of the round presentation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute an additional bonus effect in which an additional bonus is awarded depending on the combination of the total number of prize balls won, displayed in the specified number acquisition effect, and the number of rounds in which the specified number acquisition effect is executed. According to the example shown in Figure 459 (b), the combination of the number of rounds "3" and the total number of prize balls won "1000" satisfies the conditions for executing the additional bonus effect, so a treasure bag 811a is displayed in connection with the placard 811 to indicate that the additional bonus effect will be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 460(a), an additional bonus performance is executed in which a ball 812 with the character "sure" appears as an additional bonus mode to indicate an additional bonus as the contents of the treasure bag 811a. The additional bonus mode indicated by the ball 812 with the character "sure" indicates that a high probability state, which is an advantageous game state advantageous to the player, will be set after the current big win game ends. In this embodiment, various types of bonuses can be granted to the player as additional bonus modes, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 460(b).

In this way, by determining whether or not to grant an additional bonus to a player depending on the combination of the number of rounds in the jackpot game and the total number of winning balls, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the additional bonus game will be executed, and therefore the player can expect that the additional bonus performance will be executed for each round performance during the jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the additional bonus effect can be executed at least during the round effect in which the predetermined number acquisition effect is executed, the player can be motivated to play in order to win many balls during the jackpot game. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters each entrance in a state in which a probability change state or a time-saving state is set is also added as the total number of prize balls acquired, so that it is possible to adjust the total number of prize balls acquired until the jackpot game is executed (until the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery).

Therefore, even during periods when players would normally tend to temporarily stop playing (firing balls), such as while a variable presentation is being executed that has a high probability of resulting in a jackpot as a result of a special pattern lottery, or while the number of reserved special patterns is at its maximum, it is possible to make it easier for players to continue playing for the purpose of adjusting the total number of winning balls, thereby improving game operation.

Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the system to be capable of executing a guidance effect that can inform the player of a situation in which an additional bonus effect is likely to be executed during a jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed, for example, by displaying the total number of prize balls acquired during the special pattern changing period in the probability bonus state or time-saving state, and by notifying the player that the additional bonus effect will be executed more easily if the total number of prize balls acquired at the timing when the jackpot game starts is within a specific range. More specifically, in a case where the additional bonus effect is specified to be executed when the total number of prize balls acquired reaches 1000 in the first round of the jackpot game, during the special pattern changing period before the jackpot game is executed, if the total number of prize balls acquired is "9
It is preferable to configure the device to inform the player that the additional bonus effect will be more likely to be executed by executing a jackpot game in the range of "10 to 990 balls." By configuring the device in this way, the player can play a game to increase the total number of winning balls during the period until the start of the jackpot game.

In addition, a guide announcement for making it easier to execute the above-mentioned additional bonus performance may be executed during a big win game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which a ball is not allowed to enter the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 during a round game (no more winning balls are paid out) so that a combination of the number of rounds in which the additional bonus performance is executed and the total number of winning balls is created. In addition, it is possible to improve the operation of the game by having a game to increase the number of winning balls during the interval period set between round games.

Here, the types of benefits given to the player during the additional benefit performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 460(b). In the display screen shown in FIG. 460(a) described above, a ball 812 with the character "Kaku" is displayed as an additional benefit mode, and a mode (probability mode upgrade mode) indicating that the probability mode will be set after the end of the jackpot game is displayed. In addition, when a ball 812 with the character "10" is displayed, a mode (round upgrade mode) indicating that the number of rounds played during the current jackpot game is "10 rounds", which is the most advantageous number of rounds for the player, when a ball 812 with the character "H" is displayed, a mode (high setting notification mode) indicating that the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is a setting value (high setting) advantageous to the player, when a ball 812 with the character "Ren" is displayed, a mode (reserved consecutive mode) indicating that information indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot is included in the reserved memory (special pattern reserved) of the acquired special pattern is configured to be set.

By configuring multiple types of additional bonus modes to be set in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which there is no bonus to be given to the player even if the execution condition for the additional bonus performance is met. In this embodiment, the additional bonus given to the player when the additional bonus performance is executed is only a bonus for showing a game situation favorable to the player, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be able to give a bonus image that can be provided to the player only when the additional bonus performance is executed, or to give a right to switch the performance mode of the pachinko machine 10. Also, it may be configured to be able to give information showing a game situation unfavorable to the player as an additional bonus.

Next, the contents of the end screen presentation displayed on the end screen (ending screen) of a big win game will be described with reference to Fig. 461. Fig. 461(a) is a diagram showing an example of the end screen presentation when the end screen of a big win game is displayed during SP time (SP time period), and Fig. 461(b) is a diagram showing an example of the end screen presentation when the SP time (SP time period) ends during a big win game.

In this embodiment, as described above, the more the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) is executed during the SP time period, the easier it becomes to execute the setting suggestion effect. In other words, when a jackpot game is executed during the SP time period, it becomes more difficult to execute the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation) than when a jackpot game is not executed during the SP time period.
It becomes difficult to execute the setting suggestion performance during the SP time period.

In this case, even if a jackpot game, which is a game situation advantageous to the player, is executed,
When the execution period of the jackpot game overlaps with the SP time period, a situation unfavorable to the player (a situation in which it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion performance) occurs, and there is a problem that the player's motivation to play decreases. In particular, when a jackpot game with a large number of rounds that is usually advantageous to the player is executed, the jackpot game period becomes longer, and the possibility that the SP time period and the jackpot game period overlap increases, making the above-mentioned problem more likely to occur. Therefore, there is a concern that a new problem that did not exist in the past will occur in which the player's motivation to play decreases when a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player (a jackpot game with a large number of rounds) is executed compared to when other jackpot games (a jackpot game with a relatively small number of rounds) are executed.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, a setting suggestion effect can be executed as an ending screen effect executed at the end of a jackpot game, and further, the presentation manner of the setting suggestion effect executed as the ending screen effect can be varied depending on the overlap between the jackpot game period and the SP time period.

Specifically, when a jackpot game has been played and it is difficult to execute a setting suggestion effect during the SP time period (when the number of times special symbol variations are executed has decreased), the presentation mode of the setting suggestion effect executed as the end screen effect (end screen setting suggestion effect) is more likely to be a presentation mode that is advantageous to the player than in other situations. More specifically, the presentation mode of the end screen setting suggestion effect is configured to make it easier to execute multiple setting suggestion effects by overlapping them.

By configuring it in this manner, even if a jackpot game is executed at a timing when it becomes difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect during the SP time period, the setting suggestion effect can be complemented by the ending screen effect of that jackpot game, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem in which the player's motivation to play decreases because a jackpot game has been executed.

When the end screen performance of the big win game is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a game state notification mode for notifying the player of the game state that will be set after the big win game ends, and a setting suggestion mode for suggesting a setting value.
In the figure shown in FIG. 1, the comment "One more time" is displayed as a game state notification mode to notify the player that a high probability state will be set after the big win game ends. In other words, a game state notification mode is displayed to notify the player that a high probability state of a special symbol will be set until another big win game is executed.

In addition, when the game state notification mode indicates that the time-saving state (time-saving 100 times) will be set after the end of the big win game, the comment "100 chances" is displayed.
A mode is displayed to inform the player that the game state (time-saving state) is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and that the period during which the game state will continue is 100 times (100 times of special pattern fluctuation). In this way, by informing the player of the degree of advantage of the game state set after the end of the big win game compared to the most disadvantageous game state (normal state),
To allow a player to easily predict the game state to be set after the big win game ends.

Here, the game status notification mode displayed in the ending screen production is "100 chances",
That is, even if a notification mode corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed, it is preferable to configure the system so that a game state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state to be notified is set. By configuring in this way, a player who is displayed with "100 chances" as the game state notification mode can play the game while expecting that the probability variable state is set until the end (until the end condition of the time-saving state (the end condition that is established when the special pattern variation reaches 100 times) is established). In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player is notified that the game state that is actually set is not the time-saving state but the probability variable state at the stage where the end condition of the time-saving state can be established. This makes it possible to play the game while expecting that the probability variable state is set until the time-saving state ends. Note that, in the case where the probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game, if a notification mode corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed as the game state notification mode, it is preferable to configure the system so that a suggestive performance for suggesting that the actual game state is the probability variable state can be executed within the period until the end condition of the time-saving state can be established. This allows a player who is playing the game in the hope that a probability variable state has been set to focus on the presentation being executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, the frequency at which the notification mode corresponding to the game state different from the game state that is actually set is displayed may be configured to vary depending on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10. For example, it is preferable to configure the frequency at which the notification mode corresponding to the game state different from the game state that is actually set is displayed to be lower when a setting value that is advantageous to the player (e.g., setting 3) is set than when a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (e.g., setting 1) is set. By configuring in this way, when a notification mode corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed as the game state notification mode, the possibility that the time-saving state will actually be set is higher when a setting value that is advantageous to the player (e.g., setting 3) is set.

Therefore, the more the game state is notified after a notification mode corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed, the more likely it is that the time-saving end condition is met and the game state transitions to the normal state. This increases the possibility that a setting value advantageous to the player (e.g., setting 3) is set.
When the time-saving state ends, information advantageous to the player (for example, a high setting notification (suggestion)
) is easily provided, it is possible to prevent the player from repeatedly experiencing unfavorable situations, which would result in a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In addition, without being limited to this, it is preferable to configure the display of the notification mode corresponding to the game state different from the game state actually set to be less frequent when a setting value unfavorable to the player (e.g., setting 1) is set than when a setting value favorable to the player (e.g., setting 3) is set. By configuring in this way, conditions favorable to the player (e.g., conditions for notifying that a high-variable state is set, conditions for executing a high-setting notification (suggestion)) can be executed in duplicate, so that, for example, a more favorable benefit can be given to a player with a high setting value set. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play while expecting that many favorable benefits will be given to the player.

Returning to FIG. 461(b), the explanation will be continued. If it is determined that the end period of the big win game has passed the SP time period, that is, if the SP time period is set during or before the big win game and the timing to end the SP period is during the big win game, it is not possible (difficult) to execute the special pattern variation during the SP time period after the big win game ends, so multiple setting suggestion effects are set during the end screen effect (FIG. 461(b)).
reference).

<Electrical Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the big win lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
7a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on the second pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, and the like, as well as the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (
In addition, even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the time of turning on the power after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 501) when the power supply is turned off, and the values of the stack pointer and each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203.
The restoration of each value written in is executed during the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 498). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power failure is turned off.
The MI interrupt process (see FIG. 497) is executed immediately.

Here, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 463. These counters and the like are used for the lottery of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol, the first lottery ...
In order to set the display on the pattern display device 37, the display on the second pattern display device 83, and the display on the third pattern display device 81, the M
Used in PU201.

The lottery for the special symbols and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed using a special winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the special symbols, a special winning type counter C2 used to select the big winning type of the special symbols, a stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of the special symbols (reach winning type, non-reach miss (long miss A, short miss A), reach miss type), and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern.
An initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the special win random number counter C1;
In addition, the normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 501), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) for storing reserved balls of the first special symbol, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) for storing reserved balls of the second special symbol, and a special symbol reserved ball execution area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Similarly, the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 20
Similar values are stored in each area of 3b in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r.

The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas in accordance with the timing at which the ball passes through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side.

Each counter will now be described in detail. The special win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 65535 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 65535). In particular,
When the special random number counter C1 goes around once, the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time
The value is read as the initial value of the special win random number counter C1.

In addition, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special win random number counter C1. That is, for example,
If it is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 65535, the initial value random number counter C
INI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 65535. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 501).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 465) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.
When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 coincides with the value of the random number that is set as a jackpot by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot of the special symbol is determined.
are divided into two types: for a low probability of a special symbol (period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and for a high probability of a special symbol jackpot (period in which the special symbol is in a high probability state) in which the probability of a special symbol jackpot is higher than that of the low probability, and the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is set differently for each type. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot different, the probability of a jackpot is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 465(a)) for a high probability of a special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 465(a)) for a low probability of a special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

The special win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big win, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special win type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (
In this embodiment, the timer is updated once for each timer interrupt process. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203 in the RAM 203 is updated.
a or special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

Here, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 20
If the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in 3b is not a random number that results in a jackpot for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that which occurs when the special pattern is missed.

On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 20
If the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first symbol display device 37 is a random number that results in a special symbol winning jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be that of the special symbol winning jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode of the jackpot will be that indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. In this embodiment, the jackpot types are "jackpot A1", "jackpot B1", "jackpot C1", "jackpot D1",
There are five types of "big win" and "big win E1", and the special win type counter C2
One of "jackpot A1", "jackpot B1", "jackpot C1", "jackpot D1" and "jackpot E1" is determined. Then, the display mode showing the jackpot type is displayed as a jackpot pattern on the first symbol display device 37. Details of the jackpot winning probability in the special symbol lottery of this embodiment will be described later with reference to the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 465(a)).

In addition, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is set to 0 to
99. And, as shown in FIG. 466, the big win type selection table 202d for determining the big win type specifies the same (common) contents for the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed and when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol lottery with the same degree of advantage to the player is executed. By configuring in this way, there is no difference in the privilege (provision of the big win game) given to the player regardless of which special symbol lottery is executed, so that the player can play with confidence.

In addition, without being limited to this, the special jackpot type selection table 202d1 referred to in response to the drawing of the first special symbol and the special jackpot type selection table 202d2 referred to in response to the drawing of the second special symbol may be defined as the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the jackpot types that can be selected in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery may be made different, or the selection ratio may be made different, so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery have different degrees of advantage. In this case, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) which is the initial state is set as the game state, it is preferable to configure the second special symbol lottery, which is relatively difficult to establish an execution trigger, to have a higher degree of advantage than the first special symbol lottery. As a result, a different game state (a game state in which the execution trigger of the second special symbol lottery is more likely to occur than in the normal state) is created for a player who is playing in the initial state.
This allows the player to play the game with enthusiasm, aiming to achieve the desired result.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 described above determine the rough display mode, such as short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. The display mode is determined specifically as follows:
The time for the symbol change is determined. Stop type selection counter C3, change type counter CS1
Based on the determined fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114
The reach type and detailed pattern change mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are determined by the above. The value of the change type counter CS1 is set by the main processing (see FIG. 501) described later.
The time period is updated once every time the main process is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202b (FIG. 46) stores random numbers that determine the variation time of the pattern variation from the values (random numbers) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1.
7) is provided in ROM 202 of main control device 110.

The normal win random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239).
When the normal random number counter C4 goes around once, the normal initial value random number counter CIN
The value of I2 is read as the initial value of the normal win random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process.
The value is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side, and is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203 c of the RAM 203 .

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 465(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning that is set by the normal winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Also, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 465(b)) is divided into two types: one for low probability of a normal symbol (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and one for high probability of a normal symbol winning that is higher than the low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that result in a big win included in each is set differently. Furthermore, the types of winning normal symbols are as follows:
A normal win and a long-time win are set, and the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is set for each.

Here, a normal win of a normal pattern is a win in which the operation of the electric role 640a is operated to the open state in a 0.2 second opening time in the normal game state (low probability game state) and the jackpot game state is executed once. Also, during the time-saving and probability period, the operation of the electric role 640a is operated to the open state in a 2 second opening time is repeated twice. On the other hand, a long-term win is a win in which the operation of the electric role 640a is operated to the open state in a 2 second opening time is repeated twice regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the electric device 6 that is executed during the time reduction in the normal win and the probability period
Although the opening operation of 40a and the opening operation in the long-time win are set to be the same, the long-time win may be a different opening operation. Specifically, for example, the operation of opening for 3 seconds may be performed once. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the ball enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r more easily during the long-time win, and it is possible to make it easier to execute the variable display of the second special symbol during normal play, and the player can enjoy the change in the game presentation by the variable display of the second special symbol that displays a fresh advance notice display, etc.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 465(b), at the time of low probability of normal patterns,
If the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 6, it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning symbol. On the other hand, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204 during the high probability of the normal pattern, it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning symbol. In this embodiment, when a winning symbol is selected in the normal pattern lottery, a different normal winning game is executed according to the set game state. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a normal winning symbol is selected in a state where a low probability state of the normal pattern is set, a normal winning game (short winning) in which it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 and a normal winning game (long winning) in which it is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 than the short winning game may be executed.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for 30 seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as a stop pattern (second pattern). If the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is "5, 6", it is determined to be a win, and the electric device 640a is opened (opened) for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if a win occurs with a normal pattern, the electric device 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time", but the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that will result in a jackpot for the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204." These random numbers are stored in the high probability normal jackpot random number table 202c (see FIG. 465(b)). Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is 200 out of a total of 240 random numbers, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/1.2."

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal pattern, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for three seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as a stop pattern (second pattern), and the electric role 640a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the variable display time is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and further, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 is very long from "0.2 seconds x 1 time to 2 seconds x 2 times", so that the ball is easily allowed to enter the right second ball entrance 640. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the probability of winning a normal symbol is high, the second ball entrance 640 is opened for "2 seconds x 2 times" when a normal symbol wins, but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times."

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see Figure 487) and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see Figure 501).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control device 110
Depending on the values of these counters, etc., the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed, such as drawing a jackpot lottery, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 462, the explanation will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the dispensing control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first
Symbol display devices 37a, 37b, second symbol display device, second symbol reservation lamp, specific winning port 65
Solenoids 209, including a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate a as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric parts, are connected to the plate, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 to be described later is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208, the RA
Various processes are executed based on the M erase signal SG2.

Furthermore, the setting switch 110c and the setting key 110b are connected to the input/output port 205, and the MPU 201 executes a process of changing the set value and a process of displaying the set value based on a signal output in response to the operation of the setting key 110b or the setting switch 110c. Note that the contents of the various operations using the setting key 110b or the setting switch 110c have been described above with reference to Fig. 447, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The payout control device 111 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by driving a payout motor 216. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process to be performed in the event of a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the control handle 51 is not being operated (i.e., the control handle 51 is not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the control handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the display control device 114, which controls the display of variable effects (variable display) and advance notice effects.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus.
25 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the touch sensor 290, the firing sensor 293, the frame button 22, etc.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 can display a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, and the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
The display control device 1 controls the display of the third symbol variation effect in the reel 1.
14 transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display command, thereby making it possible to match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the voice output device 226.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 4).
The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, and supplies various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and a 12-volt voltage for driving motors, a 5-volt voltage for logic, and a 10-volt voltage for logic circuits.
The power supply circuit 100 generates a 12-volt voltage, a 5-volt voltage, and a backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies the necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC stable, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred, and outputs the power outage signal SG1 to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 2
51 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interruption process, even after the DC stable 24 volt voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interruption process (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 446) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

<Electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 464(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this first embodiment will be described. Fig. 464(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this first embodiment. As shown in Fig. 464(a), the ROM 202 in this first embodiment is at least composed of a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a variation pattern selection table 202b, a normal symbol jackpot random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection table 202d, and a variation pattern scenario table 202e.

First, the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 465(a). This special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is a data table that is referenced when a lottery for a special symbol is executed, and the range of the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot is specified for each state of the special symbol and each set value.
13 is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a.

As shown in FIG. 465(a), as a random number value (counter value) for determining a special symbol jackpot in a low probability state of a special symbol, 250 values of "0 to 249" are set for a set value of "1", 275 values of "0 to 274" are set for a set value of "2", and 300 values of "0 to 300" are set for a set value of "3".
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 465(a), the random number value (
The counter value is set to 1,000 values from 0 to 999 for the set value "1".
For the set value "2", 1100 values from "0 to 1099" are set, and for the set value "3", 1200 values from "0 to 1199" are set.

In this embodiment, the possible value of the first winning random number counter is 655 out of the range of "0 to 65535".
Since there are 36 combinations, when the setting "1" is set, the probability of winning the jackpot (jackpot probability) is about 1/262 in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the jackpot probability is about 1/65 in the high probability state of the special symbol. When the setting "2" is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/238 in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the jackpot probability is about 1/60 in the high probability state of the special symbol. When the setting "3" is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/218 in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the jackpot probability is about 1/55 in the high probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, the setting "1" is the setting value that is the least likely to win the jackpot (the most unfavorable setting value), and the setting "3"
" is the setting value (advantageous setting value) that is most likely to win a jackpot. As described above, in this embodiment, regardless of which setting value is set, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is four times that in the low probability state of the special symbol. In other words, regardless of which setting value is set, when the low probability state of the special symbol is changed to the high probability state of the special symbol, the same bonus (bonus for making it easier to win a jackpot) is provided to the player. By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set multiple setting values, the bonus granted when the probability state of the special symbol is switched can be made uniform regardless of the setting value, so that excessive differences in game content depending on the setting value can be suppressed.

In addition, the contents of the bonus granted when moving from a low probability state of the special symbol to a high probability state of the special symbol may be different depending on the setting value. For example, the degree of change in the probability of a big win when moving from a low probability state of the special symbol to a high probability state of the special symbol may be greater in setting "3" than in setting "1." In the case of setting "1," the probability of a big win in the high probability state of the special symbol is four times that in the low probability state of the special symbol, and in the case of setting "3," the probability of a big win in the high probability state of the special symbol is six times that in the low probability state of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, setting "3," which is an advantageous setting, may be configured to be greater than setting "1," which is an unfavorable setting.
Since the degree of advantage can be increased, the player can be motivated to play on the pachinko machine 10 on which the advantageous setting value is set.

In this embodiment, the set value provided in the pachinko machine 10 is three levels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value may be two levels, or four or more levels (for example, six levels). Furthermore, in this embodiment, a set difference is provided for the jackpot probability of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set difference may be provided for various elements that can change the advantageous degree of the game, such as the jackpot probability, the small win probability, the set probability of the probability variable state, the duration of the probability variable state, and the game content of the jackpot game. Even in such a case, since it is possible to provide the player with different advantageous degrees depending on the set value, it is possible to make the player eager to play with the pachinko machine 10 with the advantageous set value.

Next, the details of the normal symbol winning random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 465(b). FIG. 465(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal symbol winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 465(b), in the case of a low probability state of a normal symbol, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is set to "5, 6" as a random number value (counter value) corresponding to a winning normal symbol. On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state of a normal symbol, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is set to the range of "5 to 204" as a random number value (counter value) corresponding to a winning normal symbol.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set to a low probability (1/120). On the other hand, when a high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the probability of winning in the lottery of the normal symbol is set to a high probability (1
This makes it easier to execute a normal winning game based on a winning of a normal symbol during the time-saving state.

Next, the big win type selection table 202d will be described in detail with reference to Figure 466. Figure 466 is a diagram showing the contents of the big win type selection table 202d.
As shown in FIG. 466, the value of the special winning type counter C2 is set to correspond to the range of "0 to 39" for the jackpot A1 (10R certainty jackpot), to the range of "40, 41" for the jackpot B1 (10R certainty jackpot), to the range of "42 to 47" for the jackpot C1 (5R certainty jackpot), and to the range of "48 to 59".
" range, the jackpot D1 (2R jackpot) is correspondingly defined, and "60 to
A jackpot E1 (10R normal jackpot, 100 times time reduction) is associated with the range of "10R jackpot, 100 times time reduction" and is stipulated. Therefore, a probability of a jackpot occurring is 60% and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability of a jackpot that is most advantageous to the player, and a probability of a normal jackpot occurring is 40% and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time reduction game state that is less advantageous than the probability of a jackpot.

Here, as shown in FIG. 466 and described above, jackpot A1 and jackpot B1 are defined as jackpot types that execute the same jackpot game (10R variable jackpot). In other words, whether jackpot A1 or jackpot B1 is selected as the jackpot type, the same jackpot game is executed. By defining different jackpot types for the same jackpot game in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (award command, win-related command, etc.) to indicate the jackpot type, it is possible to execute different jackpot game presentations according to the jackpot type.

Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, when jackpot A1 or E1 is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game presentation is executed in which it is possible to execute a presentation (provisional bonus promotion presentation) to suggest the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends, after announcing that there is a 10-round jackpot game.

On the other hand, when jackpot B1, jackpot C1, or jackpot D1 is selected as the jackpot type, a jackpot game presentation is executed in which a presentation (round promotion presentation) for suggesting how many rounds the current jackpot game will continue is executed after a notification that a special state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, when configured to execute multiple types of jackpot game presentations (probability change promotion presentation, round promotion presentation) with different meanings as jackpot game presentations, if a jackpot game in which any jackpot game presentation can be executed (10R certain probability change jackpot) is defined as one jackpot type, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (winning command, win-related command, etc.) indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the 10R certain probability change jackpot, it will be decided randomly which jackpot game presentation to execute, which creates the problem that it is difficult to fix the proportion of 10R certain probability change jackpots in each jackpot game presentation.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots (jackpot A1, jackpot B1) that indicate a 10R special jackpot, and the processing rules on the voice lamp control device 113 are stipulated so that when jackpot A1 is selected, a jackpot game presentation in which a special jackpot promotion presentation is executed, and when jackpot B1 is selected, a round promotion presentation is executed.

By configuring in this way, the ratio of each jackpot game in each jackpot game presentation can be matched to the selection ratio of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d.
When the jackpot E1 is selected, the probability of ...

Next, referring to FIG. 467(a), the details of the variation pattern selection table 202b in this first embodiment will be described. FIG. 467(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern table 202b in this first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 467(a),
The fluctuation pattern selection table 202b in this first embodiment is at least composed of a normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 which is referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a normal state, a time-saving/probable variable fluctuation pattern table 202b2 which is referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a probable variable state and a time-saving state, and a high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b3 which is referred to in order to select a fluctuation pattern according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a probable variable state and which is specified so that a fluctuation time shorter than that of the time-saving/probable variable fluctuation pattern table 202b2 is more likely to be selected.

First, the details of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG.
Normal variation pattern selection table 2
In 02b1, various change patterns are set in correspondence with the lottery results of the special symbols, and a value range of the change type counter CS1 is associated with each of the change patterns.

More specifically, as shown in Fig. 467(b), when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, a hit fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 49", a hit fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is specified in correspondence with the range of "50 to 99", and a hit fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is specified in correspondence with the range of "100 to 198". Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state, the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds at a rate of about 25% (50/199), the fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds at a rate of about 25% (50/199), and the fluctuation time is set to 90 seconds at a rate of about 50% (99/199).

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to "0 to 14
For the range of "150 to 9", a deviation fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is specified in correspondence with the range of "150 to
For the range of "1 194", a deviation fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is associated and specified.
For the range of "95 to 198", a miss variation C with a variation time of 60 seconds is specified. Therefore, when the special symbol is not drawn in the normal game state, the miss variation C is about 75
The fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds at a rate of about 23% (45/1
99) the drift time is set to 20 seconds, and approximately 2% of the time (4/199) the drift time is set to 60 seconds.

In this way, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when the result is a miss, so the longer the first and third symbols are displayed, the higher the expectation of a big win can be. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 467(c), the time-saving/probability-variable variable pattern table 202
Details of b2 will be explained. Figure 467 (c) is a data table that shows the contents of this time-saving/probability-changing variable pattern table 202b2. As shown in Figure 467 (c), when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to "0 to 49
" range, a hit fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified in correspondence with "50 to
For the range of "198", the winning variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds is specified to correspond to the winning variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the normal game state, the probability is about 25% (50
At approximately 75% of the time (149/199) the fluctuating time is set to 60 seconds.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to "0 to 17
For the range of "180 to 9", a deviation fluctuation D with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is specified in correspondence with the range of "180 to
For the range of "1 197", a deviation B with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is associated and specified.
For "98", a miss variation C with a variation time of 60 seconds is specified to correspond to the "98". Therefore, when the special symbol is a miss in the normal game state, the probability is about 90% (15
At a rate of about 0.0% (1/199), the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds, at a rate of about 9% (18/199), the fluctuation time is set to 20 seconds, and at a rate of about 0.5% (1/199), the fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds.

In this way, when the time-saving/probability-changing variable pattern table 202b2 is referred to, a shorter variable time is more likely to be selected than when the normal variable pattern table 202b1 is referred to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in the high probability game state and the time-saving game state that are set to the time-saving state of the normal pattern. Therefore, it is possible to add some variety to the game.

Next, the details of the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b3 will be described with reference to FIG. 468. FIG. 468 is a diagram showing the contents of the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b3 in this first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 468, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, a short hit fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 99", and a short hit fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is specified in correspondence with the range of "100 to 198". Therefore, when the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b3 is referred to in the high-speed fluctuation state and a hit (jackpot) is obtained by the lottery of the special pattern, the probability of a hit (jackpot) is about 50% (100/199).
) the variation time is set to 6 seconds, and approximately 50% of the time (99/199) the variation time is set to 12 seconds.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment is incorrect, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to "0 to 18
For the range of "1.9", a short deviation fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is associated and specified.
For the range of "90 to 198", a short miss variation B with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is associated and stipulated. Therefore, when the special symbol is not drawn in the lottery in the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b3 in the high-speed fluctuation state, the probability of the short miss variation B is about 50% (100/
At a rate of approximately 50% (99/199), the fluctuating time is set to 12 seconds.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable state is set, the variation pattern table to be referenced when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation according to the jackpot type that is the trigger for setting the probability variable state and the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed is configured to switch between the time-saving/probability variable variation pattern table 202b2 and the high-speed variation pattern table 202b3.
The fluctuation pattern table is configured to be switched in accordance with the contents of the regulations of the National Diet Library (see 69).

This makes it possible to set the period during which the probability variable state is set to a probability variable first period during which a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected, and a probability variable second period during which a variation pattern with a relatively shorter variation time than the probability variable first period is likely to be selected. Therefore, the variation pattern table can be switched so as to suppress a situation in which the number of times a jackpot game is executed per unit time is excessively increased by consecutively selecting a variation pattern with a short variation time after the jackpot game ends, or the variation pattern can be switched so as to increase the number of times a special symbol is drawn per unit time when the probability variable state continues for a long time without winning a jackpot.

In this embodiment, when the probability variable state is set, the above-mentioned two types of variation pattern tables are configured to be able to be referred to, but without being limited to this, three or more types of variation pattern tables may be configured to be able to be referred to. Also, the game state in which multiple types of variation pattern tables can be referred to is not limited to the probability variable state, and multiple types of variation pattern tables may be configured to be able to be referred to in other game states.

Next, the details of the variation pattern scenario table 202f will be described with reference to Fig. 469. This variation pattern scenario table 202f prescribes a variation pattern table to be referred to according to the number of times a special symbol lottery is executed after a jackpot game ends, and prescribes different scenarios according to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game executed last time and the game state set at the time of the last jackpot win.

Specifically, when the probability of a special symbol lottery is set based on the jackpot A1, the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot game ends is set to "1 to 80 times" regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning.
The range of "81 times" is determined by referring to the time-saving/probability-changing variable pattern table 202b2.
The range of "1000" is determined by referring to the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b3.
For the range of "times ~", a fluctuation pattern scenario is specified in which the time-saving/probability-variable fluctuation pattern table 202b2 is referenced.

In addition, when the probability variable state is set based on the jackpot B1, C1, or D1, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the jackpot game ends is in the range of "1 time to 80 times", and the time-saving/probability variable variable pattern table 202b2
is referred to, and in the range of "81 times to 999 times", the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b
3 is referenced, and in the range of "1000 times" the time-saving/probability-changing variable pattern table 202b
When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving state or the high-speed fluctuation state, a fluctuation pattern scenario is specified in which the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b3 is referenced within the range of "1 time to 999 times" of the number of times of special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game, and a fluctuation pattern scenario is specified in which the time-saving/high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b2 is referenced within the range of "1000 times or more."

Furthermore, when the time-saving state is set based on the jackpot E1, regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, the number of special symbol lotteries to be executed after the jackpot game ends will be "1 to 100 times".
A fluctuation pattern scenario is stipulated in which the time-saving/probable-change fluctuation pattern table 202b2 is referenced in the range of "101 times or more," and the normal fluctuation pattern table 202b1 is referenced in the range of "101 times or more."

Although not shown in the figure, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 1
When 22 is being operated, that is, when the initialization process of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, a dedicated fluctuation pattern scenario (fluctuation pattern table for use at reset) is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern scenario is specified in which the normal fluctuation pattern table 202b1 is referenced when the number of special symbol selections executed after the initialization process is in the range of "1 time to 100 times," the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b3 is referenced when the number of special symbol selections is in the range of "101 times to 110 times," and the normal fluctuation pattern table 202b1 is referenced when the number of special symbol selections is in the range of "111 times or more."
In other words, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated, such as when a setting change operation is performed, the normal state, which is the initial state, is set as the game state, and when the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the normal state exceeds 100 times, the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202
b3 is referred to, and a transition to a specific period is made in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected.

By configuring it in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 after the setting has been changed, if the number of times that the special symbol lottery has been executed without winning the jackpot exceeds 100, high-speed fluctuation will be executed. Therefore, when a fluctuation pattern in which high-speed fluctuation is executed is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation in the pachinko machine 10 in which the normal state is set, the player can predict that the setting value has been changed.

In addition, a plurality of fluctuation pattern scenarios (initial fluctuation pattern scenarios) that can be selected after the initialization process may be provided, and a different initial fluctuation pattern scenario may be selected (made easier to select) when the setting value "1" is set and when the setting value "3" is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict that a setting change has been made by knowing that an initial fluctuation pattern scenario has been set, and to predict the setting value based on the type of the set initial fluctuation pattern scenario.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on (
In the present embodiment, the initial fluctuation pattern scenario is set when the initialization process is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial fluctuation pattern scenario may be set when a setting change operation is performed. This allows the R
When the AM clear switch 122 is operated, a variation pattern scenario different from that when a setting change operation is performed is set, so by understanding the variation pattern of the special pattern variation executed for the player, it becomes easier to predict whether or not the setting will be changed.

Next, referring to Fig. 464(b), the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the first embodiment will be described in detail. Fig. 464(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in Fig. 464(b), the R
AM203 is a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 2
03b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d
, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a setting value storage area 203g, a winning state storage area 203h, and a fluctuation count counter 203
i, a time-saving counter 203j, a variable execution flag 203k, and a probability variable flag 203m,
The big win flag 203n, the variable order storage area 203p, and the other memory area 203
z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol,
It has four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of a special win random number counter C1, a special win type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial entry), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserve areas (reservation No. 1,
Among the empty areas (reserved area 1 through reserved area 4), data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1 through 4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the oldest winning event is stored in the area, and reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event. If all four reserved areas are already filled with data, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the special symbol 1
The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as a lottery for a special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

In addition, when data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved areas with area numbers one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203
In the case of a, the data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.
The only difference between the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is that the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203b is a memory area corresponding to the second special pattern.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a normal winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in one of the four reserve areas (reservation area 1 to
Among the empty areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b (reserved ball storage area 4), the winning data are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th). In other words, like the reserved ball storage area 203a for special symbol 1, the winning order is maintained and data corresponding to the winning is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a lottery for a winning normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area is
Based on the value, a lottery is held to determine whether the regular symbol will win.

In addition, when data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes vacant, so a shift process is performed to pack the winning data stored in other reserved areas into a reserved area with an area number smaller by 1, as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of four. On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special pattern is executed.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (the reserved number N of the variable display of the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command. The reserved ball number command is sent to the main control device 11 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.
0 to the voice lamp control device 113.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winning the right second ball entry port 640r, and as the other configurations are the same as the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d, detailed explanations will be omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and whenever the number of reserved balls changes, it sends a reserved ball number display command to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The regular symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the regular symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls through the through gate 67 up to a maximum of four times.
The initial value is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of a normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display M) is less than 4, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 4, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 20
Nothing new is stored in 3c.

The setting value storage area 203g is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the setting values of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the setting value storage area 203g stores data such as "
If "00H" is stored, it indicates that the setting value "1" is set, if "01H" is stored as data, it indicates that the setting value "2" is set, and if "02H" is stored as data, it indicates that the setting value "3" is set. When the lottery for the special symbol is executed, the data of this setting value storage area 203g is read out, and the lottery for the special symbol (jackpot lottery) is executed with the lottery probability corresponding to the setting value indicated by the read data. That is, the lottery for the special symbol is executed by comparing the range of random numbers corresponding to the setting value indicated by the data of the setting value storage area 203g in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 465(a)) with the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area. The value of the setting value storage area 203g is initially set to "00H", and every time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, "01H
" → "02H" and "01H", and when the setting switch 110c is pressed again while the data is "02H", the data is updated to "01H". When the power is turned on by pressing the RAM clear switch 122, all data in the RAM 203 is reset (cleared) to the initial value. Therefore, if only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value in the setting value storage area 203g is also reset to the initial value of "00H". In other words, even if the setting change operation is not performed and only the RAM clear operation is performed, the setting can be changed to 1. This can improve the convenience of the hall.

The winning state storage area 203h is a storage area for storing information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal (if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0 and the probability variable flag 203m is off), "00H" is stored in this winning state storage area 203h as information indicating the normal state. On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is time-saving (if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203m is off), "01H" is stored in this winning state storage area 203h as information indicating the time-saving state. Also, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is probability variable (if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203m is on), "02H" is stored in this winning state storage area 203h as information indicating the probability variable state. The information stored in this winning status storage area 203h is retained until the end of the big win, and is referred to when setting the game status after the big win ends.

The variation number counter 203i is a counter for measuring the number of times the special pattern variation occurs, and the counter value is updated based on the execution of the special pattern variation.

The time-saving counter 203j is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state for normal symbols. The time-saving counter 203j is initially set to zero, and whenever a lottery for a special symbol is performed in the main control device 110 and a jackpot for a special symbol is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. In other words, when a jackpot for a special symbol is reached, a new value corresponding to the jackpot type is set regardless of the value of the time-saving counter 203j.

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether the variation of the first special symbol is to be executed or the variation of the second special symbol is to be executed. In this embodiment, the variation is started according to the order (order of reserved storage) of the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. Here, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the variation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, the variation execution determination process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines whether the next stored variation is reserved data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the reserved storage order data stored in the variation order storage area 203p described later, and the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result.

The probability variation flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current game state is a probability variation state. This probability variation flag 203m is set to ON when the probability variation state is set.
This special probability flag 203m is set to ON when, in the processing of S1113 in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 502) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than the jackpot E (S1113: No).
In addition, in the processing of S220 in the special pattern change processing (see FIG. 488) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, it is set to OFF when the changing display of the special pattern that results in a jackpot is to be stopped.

The jackpot in progress flag 203n is a flag indicating that the game state is a jackpot game. This jackpot in progress flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the process of S221 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 488) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 502) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the timing for the jackpot to end (S11
10: Yes), the switch is set to OFF in the process of S1117.

The change order storage area 203p is an area in which the order of reserved storage is stored when game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 and are stored as reserved balls (reserved storage). In this embodiment, the variation of the special symbols is configured to be executed in the order of reserved storage, and one of the special symbols is not executed preferentially. In addition, in this embodiment, the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute the balls between the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, so that by starting the variation in the order of reserved storage, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately executed in the variation of the special symbols, and only one of the reserved balls is consumed, thereby suppressing the problem of the reserved balls of the special symbol overflowing.

In the other memory area 203z, flags, counters, stored data, etc. required for other control processes executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 are set, but details are omitted.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus.
A payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first pattern display device 37, a second pattern display device 83, a second pattern pending lamp 84, a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning opening 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric device are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and a group of sensors not shown in the figure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described below that is provided in the power supply unit 115 are connected to the input/output port 205, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by driving a payout motor 216. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is the same as the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 497) is immediately executed as the power failure process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the operating handle 51 is not being operated, the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and controls a display control device 1 such as a variable performance (variable display) and a continuous notice performance.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
5, the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected.

The voice and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the background mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach, and also gives instructions to the display control device 114.

The voice lamp control device 113 judges an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the type of the error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (e.g., vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 464(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variable pattern selection table 222a, a performance switching table 222b, a setting suggestion performance selection table 222c, and a setting suggestion selection table 222d.
22c, a pre-reading prohibition period selection table 222d, a reserved upper limit time performance selection table 222e,
At least a performance execution number selection table 222f, a mission selection table 222g, a promotion point selection table 222h, and a promotion performance selection table 222i are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining a variation pattern based on a variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. A plurality of variation patterns are set in accordance with the variation time and variation pattern type corresponding to the variation pattern command, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a selection counter value (not shown).

The variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 includes, for example, information for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery and information for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation time, stop symbol, presence or absence of reach performance, winning game type executed based on the lottery result). Then, in order to execute the variation performance of the third symbol in the variation pattern corresponding to the corresponding special symbol variation, when the variation pattern command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the variation pattern selection table 222a to determine the variation pattern (variation pattern for performance).

The performance switching table 222b is a data table that is referred to when switching the performance period based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the timer 292. In this embodiment, it is configured to be able to execute different performances according to the set performance period. The performance switching table 222b is used to select the performance period for executing the performance (performance mode) performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227.

The determination of this performance mode is performed in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the performance period is specified according to the judgment value of the performance switching table 222b shown in FIG. 471 and the elapsed time T (see S3602 in FIG. 521) determined based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the timer 292 (
See S3603 in Figure 521.

Fig. 471 is a diagram showing an example of the effect switching table 222b stored in the ROM 222. As shown in Fig. 471, in the effect switching table 222b, the type of the effect period is defined in association with the value of the elapsed time T after the power supply to the gaming machine is turned on.

In this embodiment, the normal performance period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period can be set as the performance period. The SP time period is a performance period in which a dedicated performance mode based on the clocked time is determined, and is a period in which a performance (period performance) with a sense of unity is executed in a plurality of pachinko machines 10. The normal performance period is a period in which an independent performance is executed in each pachinko machine 10 according to the result of the special pattern lottery. The SP time preparation period is a period in which a performance similar to the normal performance period is executed, and is a preparation period for notifying the player that the SP time period will be set soon. Therefore, during the SP time preparation period, a guide mode for notifying the player that the SP time period is approaching is displayed in a part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in which a performance similar to the normal performance period is executed.

When the value of the elapsed time T in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111) of FIG. 521 indicates the normal performance period, a period performance flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 described later is turned off, and
The information indicating that the SP time period is in progress, which is stored in a memory area provided in the RAM 223 of the sound and lamp control device 113, is cleared. Then, based on the results of these processes, the performances performed by the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in the normal performance mode (the performance mode of the performance executed during the normal performance period). On the other hand, if the value of the elapsed time T indicates the SP time period, the period performance in progress flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of the sound and lamp control device 113 is set to ON, and further, the work R of the display control device 114 is cleared.
Information indicating that the SP time period is in progress is stored in a memory area provided in the AM 233. Based on the results of these processes, the third symbol display device 81 and the audio output device 226
The performance performed by the lamp display device 227 is performed in a special performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 471, in this embodiment, the normal effect period is set for most of the time measured by the timer 292, and the period in which the SP time period is set is configured to be short. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to experience the period effect (SP time effect) executed during the SP time period, so that the player can be motivated to play during the SP time period. In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, a different effect is executed during the SP time period depending on the number of times the SP time period has been set since the timer 292 started timing, and in the first SP time period after the timer 292 started timing, music A is played, and the period effect (SP time effect) is executed in a performance mode according to music A. Then, in the second SP time period after the timer 292 started timing, music B different from music A is played, and
A period performance (SP time performance) is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the musical piece B.

This makes it possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute the SP time presentation at various times.

The content of the effect switching table 222b will be described in detail. The effect switching table 222b includes an elapsed time T (
The duration of the performance is determined according to the elapsed time T after the power is turned on.
A normal performance period is defined within 8 minutes, a SP time preparation period is defined within 88 minutes to 90 minutes, and a SP time period (for music A) is defined within 90 minutes to 93 minutes. A normal performance period is defined again within the range of 93 minutes to 213 minutes, and a SP time period (for music A) is defined within the range of 213 minutes to 93 minutes.
The SP time preparation period is set in the range of 215 minutes, and the SP time preparation period is set in the range of 215 minutes to 219 minutes.
A time period (for song B) is defined.

Thereafter, a normal performance period, a SP time preparation period, and a SP time period are respectively defined with respect to the elapsed time.

As described above, in this embodiment, the length of the SP time period is defined to be different depending on the type of performance to be executed. That is, when the SP time period for music A is set, the SP time period is defined to be three minutes, and when the SP time period for music B is set, the SP time period is defined to be four minutes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily set the SP time period corresponding to the length of the music to be played.

On the other hand, the length of the SP time preparation period is set to the same length (2 minutes) regardless of which SP time period is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to standardize the performance data for setting a performance mode dedicated to the SP time preparation period (for example, a caption display of "SP period will start soon").

During the SP time preparation period, in addition to the notification mode for notifying the player that the period in which the SP time period is set is approaching, a prediction mode for notifying the player of the performance mode of the SP time performance to be executed during the next SP time period to be set may also be set. In this case, the notification mode may be, for example, a mode that allows the player to grasp a part of the performance (the music to be played) to be executed during the next SP time period, such as "next time, music B starts."

In this embodiment, the SP time preparation period can be set to a period (2 minutes) before the SP time period is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to display a notification mode for notifying the player of the remaining time until the SP time period is set during the normal performance period without setting the SP time preparation period. In this case, it is possible to make the player understand that the remaining time until the next SP time period is set is long, so that a long preparation period for playing during the SP time period can be secured for the player who wishes to play during the SP time period. Therefore, it is easy to suppress the player's motivation to play decreasing due to not being able to play during the SP time period.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by configuring the remaining time until the SP time period is set not to be displayed during the normal performance period, but to display the remaining time until the SP time period is set during the SP time preparation period, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the SP time period will be set. Therefore, it is possible for the player playing during the normal performance period to continue playing while expecting the SP time period to be set.

In addition, in this embodiment, a performance (period performance) with a sense of unity is performed among a plurality of pachinko machines 10.
The system is configured to be able to set the period during which the above is executed and the period during which an independent presentation (normal presentation) is executed in each pachinko machine 10, and further, it is configured to be able to set multiple types of presentation modes as the presentation mode for the period presentation, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to be able to set multiple types of presentation modes for the normal presentation as well.

In this case, a predetermined effect lottery may be executed when the normal effect period is set, and the effect content may be determined based on the effect result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute different effects based on the information measured by the timer 292 even for normal effects, which can increase the player's motivation to play.

Also, in this embodiment, in order to execute a unified period presentation across multiple pachinko machines 10, the contents of the presentation switching table 222b are specified so that the same presentation period is set for each pachinko machine 10 according to the elapsed time T from when the power was turned on. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to configure it so that the timing at which the SP time preparation period is set or the timing at which the SP time period is set is varied according to a set value.

More specifically, the contents of the performance switching table 222b may be configured to differ depending on the setting value so that the timing at which the guidance mode (caption display) is displayed and the timing at which the notification sound is output during the SP time preparation period are more likely to be delayed when the setting value is set high than when the setting value is set low.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to give some discomfort to the player by intentionally executing a performance (delay performance) that does not have a sense of unity, on the premise that a period performance with a sense of unity is executed on multiple pachinko machines 10. In the above example, since it is configured so that the delay performance is executed more easily in the case of a high setting than in the case of a low setting, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance executed from the timing when the SP time preparation period is set.

In addition, while it is difficult to know that the period performance has been executed late with only one pachinko machine 10, it is easier to know that the execution timing of the period performance has been delayed by comparing it with the period performance executed by multiple adjacent pachinko machines 10. Therefore, it is possible to generate interest in the period performance executed by multiple pachinko machines 10.

In addition, when executing the delayed effects described above, rather than delaying all of the effects to be executed, the execution timing of the effects can be set to the normal performance timing, and the execution timing of only some of the effects (e.g., audio) can be shifted (delayed), or the execution timing of some of the effects can be accelerated.

In FIG. 471, the correspondence between the elapsed time T and the performance period after 339 minutes is omitted, but in reality, even after 339 minutes, the special performance period of 2 minutes and the normal performance period of 50 minutes are set to be repeated alternately. The range of the elapsed time T in this performance switching table 222b only needs to be set for the opening hours of the hall for one day at the very least, and the correspondence between the elapsed time T and the performance period may be set for a range of elapsed time T less than 1440 minutes (24 hours), for example, or the correspondence may be set for several days. In addition, the types of performance periods are not necessarily limited to three types, the normal performance period, the SP time preparation period, and the SP time period, and four or more types of performance periods in which the modes of the performances to be executed are different from each other may be set.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a table is defined that defines the type of presentation period for each value of elapsed time T, but it is not necessary to prepare a table corresponding to all values of T. For example, a single range of values of elapsed time T that constitute a normal presentation period and a single range of values of elapsed time T that constitute a SP time period may be defined, and when the value of elapsed time T falls outside the defined range of values, a predetermined value may be added to the defined range of values of elapsed time T. As a specific example, the range of values of elapsed time T that constitute a normal presentation period may be defined as 0 minutes, 00 seconds to
50 minutes 00 seconds, the range of the elapsed time T that is the SP time period is 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes 00 seconds
It is also possible to specify the elapsed time T as seconds, and when the value of the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, 60 minutes 00 seconds may be added to both the range of elapsed time T values that constitute the normal presentation period and the range of elapsed time T values that constitute the SP time period, and to reset the type of presentation period within the range of elapsed time T values from 60 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds.

More specifically, the effect switching table 222b specifies only information that the range of values of the elapsed time T for the normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of values of the elapsed time T for the SP time period is 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes 00 seconds. Then, when the power is turned on, the information specified in the effect switching table 222b is copied to a specified area of the RAM 223, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the copied information. Then,
However, when the value of the elapsed time T specified in the copied information reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, which is the maximum value of the value of the elapsed time T, the copied information is updated to new information by adding 60 minutes 00 seconds. That is, the range of values of the elapsed time T that constitute the normal performance period is 60 minutes 00 seconds to 110 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of values of the elapsed time T that constitute the special performance period is 110 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds. Thereafter, every time 60 minutes 00 seconds elapses, the copied information is controlled to be updated to new information by adding 60 minutes 00 seconds, and the type of the performance period is determined based on the updated information and the elapsed time T.

In this case, the amount of data in the effect switching table 222b is reduced, so that the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

The setting suggestion effect selection table 222c is a table for selecting the effect mode (
A data table to be referenced for selecting a performance pattern, which varies depending on the set value and the acquired value of the performance counter 223g.
is prescribed.

In this setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, only the effect pattern is defined, and the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect that is actually executed is determined based on the type of setting suggestion effect and the selected effect pattern. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is configured to be executed by various effects (see FIG. 453(b)), and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a mode corresponding to each effect. Therefore, if specific effect modes were defined in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, the amount of effects to be defined would increase, which would increase the amount of data in the RAM 222. In addition, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c
Once the specific presentation format, i.e., which presentation to use and how to execute the setting suggestion presentation, is decided, it becomes difficult to switch the setting suggestion presentation to a different presentation and execute it, which causes the problem that it is difficult to increase the variety of presentations.

In contrast, in this embodiment, it is configured to select only the presentation pattern (setting suggestion content) of the setting suggestion presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a presentation mode according to the presentation pattern of the determined setting suggestion presentation for the presentation in which the setting suggestion presentation is executed, so that, for example, it is possible to configure it so that only the execution right of the setting suggestion presentation can be acquired in advance, and the acquired execution right can be used by the player for any presentation. Therefore, when increasing the variety of presentations, the processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the setting suggestion performance is executed using the performance pattern selected in the setting suggestion performance selection table 222c, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to provide a storage means capable of storing a plurality of performance patterns selected in the setting suggestion performance selection table 222c, and a generation means capable of generating a new performance pattern by combining the plurality of performance patterns stored in the storage means, and to configure so that a setting suggestion performance based on the performance pattern generated by the generation means can be executed.

In this case, the effect pattern generated by the generating means is the setting suggestion effect selection table 22
It is preferable to configure the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c so that the effect pattern can suggest the setting value more specifically than the effect pattern defined in 222c. For example, in the case where the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be settable in six stages, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c is configured to specify effect patterns that can narrow down the setting value to at most two types (e.g., effect patterns showing settings 1 or 6, effect patterns showing settings 2 or 6, etc.), and the effect patterns generated are preferably configured to generate effect patterns that can specifically notify the setting value (e.g., setting 6, etc.). By configuring in this way, the generation means generates a new effect pattern, making it easier for the player to grasp the setting value, and the player can eagerly play (play to acquire the right to execute the setting suggestion effect) in the hope that the generation means will generate a new effect pattern.

In this case, the player may be allowed to select whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the effect pattern selected in the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c by using the execution right stored in the storage means. By configuring in this way, the player can select whether to determine the current setting value in a complex manner by executing many setting suggestion effects that cannot specifically notify the setting value (hard-to-understand setting suggestion effects), or to aim for execution of setting suggestion effects that can specifically notify the setting value (easy-to-understand setting suggestion effects) by reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effects are executed.

Furthermore, it is preferable to set an upper limit on the period during which the right to execute the setting suggestion effect can be stored in the storage means,
For example, a deleting means may be provided that can erase the information (execution right) stored in the storage means, and the execution right may be erased by the deleting means when the deletion lottery is won, or a determining means may be provided that can determine the elapsed time since storage, and the execution right may be erased by the deleting means when the determining means determines that a predetermined elapsed time (for example, one hour has passed, or the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed reaches 100) has passed.
It is possible to provide a game element to the selection of whether or not to generate a new presentation pattern by the generating means. In other words, by providing the possibility that the execution right may be erased by the erasing means, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a setting suggestion presentation that can specifically notify a setting value (an easy-to-understand setting suggestion presentation), so that the result of the player's selection of which setting suggestion presentation to execute can have great significance.

472, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c prescribes five types of effect patterns, effect pattern A to effect pattern E, and prescribes that when setting 1 is set, "effect pattern A" is selected when the acquired effect counter 223g value is in the range of "35 to 79,""selected pattern C" is selected when the acquired effect counter 223g value is in the range of "80 to 94," and "effect pattern D" is selected when the acquired effect counter 223g value is in the range of "95 to 99." Note that it is prescribes that the setting suggestion effect is not executed when the acquired effect counter 223g value is in the range of "0 to 34."

In addition, when the setting 2 is set, the acquired value of the performance counter 223g is "5 to
"Performance pattern A" is in the range of "49", "Performance pattern B" is in the range of "50 to 74",
It is specified that "effect pattern C" is selected in the range of "75 to 89", and "effect pattern D" is selected in the range of "90 to 99".
It is stipulated that if the number is "0 to 4", the setting suggestion effect will not be executed.

Furthermore, when the setting 3 is set, the acquired value of the effect counter 223g is set to "0
It is specified that "presentation pattern A" is selected in the range of "45 to 64", "presentation pattern B" is selected in the range of "45 to 64", "presentation pattern C" is selected in the range of "65 to 84", "presentation pattern D" is selected in the range of "85 to 96", and "presentation pattern E" is selected in the range of "99 to 99".

In other words, presentation pattern A is a presentation pattern (default presentation pattern) that is selected at the same selection rate (45%) regardless of the setting value that is set. When a presentation based on this default presentation pattern is executed, the setting cannot be suggested from the presentation mode, but it is possible to know that a setting suggestion presentation has been executed.
By determining the number of times a setting suggestion effect has been executed, information is provided that can be used as a reference when, for example, predicting a setting value based on the number of times a setting suggestion effect has been executed within a specified period of time, or predicting a setting value by analyzing the number of times a setting suggestion effect has been executed with a specific effect pattern relative to the total number of times a setting suggestion effect has been executed.

Moreover, presentation pattern B is a presentation pattern that cannot be selected in setting 1, that is, a presentation pattern that negates setting 1 when executed. This presentation pattern B is a presentation pattern for notifying the player of a setting value that has not been set. In other words, presentation pattern B does not directly notify the player of a setting value, but is a presentation pattern that can facilitate setting guessing by being combined in a composite manner with information from other setting suggestion presentations that have been executed.

The presentation pattern C is a presentation pattern in which the high setting is more likely to be selected than the low setting, but the difference in the selection rate is small, making it difficult to predict the setting value.
Like the above-mentioned presentation pattern C, this is a presentation pattern in which a high setting is more likely to be selected than a low setting, and is stipulated to produce a larger difference in the selection rate than the above-mentioned presentation pattern C. In other words, the more the setting pattern C and presentation pattern D are executed, the more one can expect a high setting.

Finally, presentation pattern E is a presentation pattern that can only be selected when the high setting (setting 3) is set. When a presentation based on this presentation pattern is executed, the highest setting (setting "3") is confirmed, so the appearance rate is configured to be lower than other presentation patterns. This solves the problem of players being able to immediately figure out the setting value.

The look-ahead prohibition period selection table 222d is a data table referenced when selecting a period during which execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited, and is referenced when it is determined that the execution condition for the look-ahead performance is established based on the winning information command output from the main control device 110. Then, when it is determined that the selected look-ahead prohibition period overlaps with the SP time period, the execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited.

In the pre-reading prohibition period selection table 222d, different prohibition periods are defined based on the reserved position of the reserved symbol (reserved for performance) that is the target of the pre-reading performance, the presence or absence of a jackpot win during the pre-reading performance period, and the number of jackpot wins.
The pre-reading prohibition period can be made different between the first pre-reading performance including a big win in which the pre-reading performance period is likely to be long, and the second pre-reading performance in which the pre-reading performance period is likely to be shorter than the first pre-reading performance since the first pre-reading performance does not include a big win.

Here, there has been a pachinko machine 10 that increases the variety of effects to be executed and enhances the effect of the effects by executing various effects based on different execution triggers. In such a pachinko machine 10, since multiple effects are executed based on the establishment of different triggers, there was a problem that multiple effects are executed overlappingly depending on the execution timing of each effect, resulting in the execution of effects that are difficult for players to understand. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, when an execution trigger for executing a specific effect is established, the execution status of other effects is judged, and based on the judgment result, it is determined whether or not to execute a specific effect, thereby suppressing the execution of effects that are difficult for players to understand.

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10 described above, in order to prevent the execution of effects that are difficult for players to understand, the execution of specific effects is prohibited more than necessary, which causes a problem in that the effect of the effects cannot be favorably improved. In contrast, in this embodiment, when a trigger for the execution of a specific effect is established, the execution period of the specific effect is calculated, and the overlap period with other effects is predicted based on the calculation result, and whether or not to execute the specific effect is determined based on the prediction result. Furthermore, when calculating the execution period of the specific effect,
The elements that make a big difference in the presentation period of a specific presentation (preview presentation) are the presence or absence of a jackpot win and the reservation of presentation targets.

Therefore, the accuracy in calculating the execution period of a specific effect (pre-reading effect) can be improved, and it becomes possible to execute a specific effect (pre-reading effect) even at times when the execution of the specific effect would conventionally be prohibited, thereby optimally enhancing the effect of the performance of the pachinko machine 10.

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the look-ahead prohibited period selection table 222d with reference to FIG. 473(a), if the reserved performance target is "1", there is a jackpot during the look-ahead performance period and the number of jackpots is "1", a prohibited period of "460 seconds" is stipulated, and if the reserved performance target is "1" and there is no jackpot during the look-ahead performance period, a prohibited period of "110 seconds" is stipulated. Also, if the reserved performance target is "2", there is a jackpot during the look-ahead performance period and the number of jackpots is "1", a prohibited period of "480 seconds" is stipulated, and if the number of jackpots is "2", a prohibited period of "830 seconds" is stipulated, and if the reserved performance target is "2" and there is no jackpot during the look-ahead performance period, a prohibited period of "110 seconds" is stipulated.
"130 seconds" is specified.

Furthermore, when the reserved performance target is "3", there is a jackpot during the look-ahead performance period and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibition period is "500 seconds", when the number of jackpots is "2 or more", the execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited unconditionally, when the reserved performance target is "3" and there is no jackpot during the look-ahead performance period, the prohibition period is "150 seconds". When the reserved performance target is "4", there is a jackpot during the look-ahead performance period and the number of jackpots is "1", the prohibition period is "520 seconds", when the number of jackpots is "2 or more", the execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited unconditionally, when the reserved performance target is "4" and there is no jackpot during the look-ahead performance period, the prohibition period is "170 seconds".

In other words, when a chance to execute a look-ahead performance is established based on information contained in the received winning command, the larger the reserved position of the special symbol reserved at which the chance to execute is established, that is, the more times the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the look-ahead performance period in which the look-ahead performance is executed, the longer the look-ahead performance period will be, so the longer the prohibition period is stipulated. More specifically, the prohibition period is stipulated so that there is no problem even if the maximum variation time (20 seconds) of the special symbol variation that can be executed during the look-ahead performance period is set.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game may be executed during the look-ahead performance period, that is, when the look-ahead performance is executed with a jackpot game in between, the prohibition period is specified taking into consideration the special pattern variation period as well as the jackpot game period, and the prohibition period is longer when the jackpot game is executed than when the jackpot game is not executed. In this way, the length of the prohibition period of the look-ahead performance can be greatly different depending on whether or not a jackpot game is executed. Also, when multiple jackpot wins are included in the look-ahead performance period, the execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited without determining the degree of overlap between the look-ahead performance prohibition period and the SP time period. As a result, when a situation occurs in which the look-ahead prohibition period may be long, it is possible to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead performance without determining the degree of overlap with the SP time period, so that the processing load of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the execution trigger for the pre-reading performance is established, the maximum time for the pre-reading performance that can be executed is calculated, and the SP
In the case where a time period is set, the SP time period is set during the look-ahead performance by prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead performance, and a performance that is difficult for the player to understand is suppressed from being executed. However, without being limited to this, a correction process for correcting the calculated maximum time of the look-ahead performance may be executed. In other words, the maximum time of the look-ahead performance may be gradually corrected based on information indicating the performance period of the look-ahead performance actually executed (a part of the look-ahead performance) with respect to the execution period of the look-ahead performance calculated based on the maximum time. This increases the calculation accuracy of the maximum time of the look-ahead performance that can actually be executed, making it easier to specify the period in which the look-ahead performance can be executed without overlapping with other performances.

The reserved upper limit value performance selection table 222e is a data table which is referenced when determining the performance mode of the reserved upper limit performance which is executed when the number of stored reserved symbols reaches the upper limit (8 symbols), and different performance patterns (performance modes) are defined based on whether or not there is a reserved symbol (winning reserved symbol) which will win a jackpot among the reserved symbols stored in the reserve, the number of winning reserved symbols, and the obtained value of the performance counter 223g.

Specifically, if there is a winning reservation and the number of winning reservations is one, the "upper limit notification" presentation pattern is defined when the acquired presentation counter 223g value is in the range of "0 to 44", the "chance announcement" presentation pattern is defined when the acquired presentation counter 223g value is in the range of "45 to 69", and the "fish school festival" presentation pattern is defined when the acquired presentation counter 223g value is in the range of "70 to 99". Also, if there is a winning reservation and the number of winning reservations is two, the "chance announcement" presentation pattern is defined when the acquired presentation counter 223g value is in the range of "0 to 39", and the "fish school festival" presentation pattern is defined when the acquired presentation counter 223g value is in the range of "40 to 99". Furthermore, if there is a winning reservation and the number of winning reservations is three or more, the acquired presentation counter 223g
The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 99, and different patterns of the "Fish Festival" are defined accordingly.

On the other hand, if there is no pending winning, a "upper limit notification" presentation pattern is defined when the acquired presentation counter 223g value is in the range of "0 to 64", and a "chance notification" presentation pattern is defined when the value is in the range of "65 to 99".

The effect execution number selection table 222f is a data table which is referenced when deciding the number of setting suggestion effects (effect execution number) to be executed during the specialized mode period when the specialized mode is entered, and various numbers are specified based on the length of the remaining specialized mode period (remaining special chart fluctuation time) when the specialized mode is entered, the setting value, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223g.

Here, the contents defined in the performance execution number selection table 222f will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 474. FIG. 474 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the performance execution number selection table 222f. As shown in FIG. 474,
In 2f, different numbers are specified as the number of performance executions based on the set value, the remaining period of the specialized mode, and the acquired value of the performance counter 223g.

The mission selection table 222g is a data table that is referenced when determining the content of the mission to be executed during the SP time period, and is a table that is based on the set value and the acquired performance counter 223.
In other words, it is possible for the player to predict the set value based on the content of the mission executed during the SP time period. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the content of the selected mission is accomplished,
It is configured to execute a setting suggestion effect to suggest a setting value.

Therefore, in a series of presentations (mission presentations), it is possible to execute setting suggestion presentations at multiple points in time, i.e., at the time when the mission content is displayed and at the time when the mission is accomplished.

Here, the contents of the mission selection table 222g will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 475. Fig. 475 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the mission selection table 222g. As shown in Fig. 475, the mission selection table 222g defines four types of presentation patterns (mission contents) according to the set value and the acquired value of the presentation counter 223g. The four types of mission contents have different selection rates according to the set value, and different levels of difficulty for accomplishing the missions are defined.

The promotion point selection table 222h is a data table to be referred to when selecting the presentation mode of the round presentation during the presentation during the jackpot game, and as shown in Fig. 476, different points (number of awarded points) are defined corresponding to the type of jackpot, the number of displayed balls acquired, and the number of rounds. Based on the number of awarded points, the presentation mode of the round presentation during the round presentation is determined by referring to the promotion presentation selection table 222i described later (see Fig. 477).

The promotion effect selection table 222i is a data table which is referenced when determining the content of the promotion effect to be executed based on the number of awarded points acquired by referring to the promotion point selection table 222h and the value of the effect counter 223g, and is configured so that the promotion effect to be executed with content which awards a greater amount of bonus to the player is greater the total value of the awarded points (total points) (see Figure 477).

Further, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores, as shown in FIG.
Special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, fluctuation start flag 223d, stop type selection flag 223e, winning information storage area 223f, performance counter 223g, performance state memory area 223h, setting value storage area 223i, setting change flag 223j, executed setting suggestion performance memory area 223k, acquired ball number storage area 223n,
Period performance flag 223p, mission information storage area 223q, time information storage area 2
23r, operation invalidation timer 223s, continuous notice execution flag 223t, continuous notice counter 22
At least a memory area 223u, a background mode memory area 223v, a specialized mode flag 223w, a round number counter 223x, a character display flag 223y, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a display of the first special symbol variation performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the first special symbol variation performance reserved in the main control device 110 up to 4 for each type of special symbol.
The counter counts up to 100 times and updates the count according to the timing of an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, such as when a winning information command is received or when a variation pattern command is received.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b, like the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a, is a display of the changing of the second special pattern performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of wait times) of the changing performance of the second special pattern reserved in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times for each type of special pattern, and is updated in accordance with the timing of an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, such as when a winning information command is received or a changing pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and reads the reserved ball number counter 203 for the special symbol 1 stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the reserved ball number is managed for each type of special symbol by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added, or when the variable display of the special pattern is executed in the main control device 110 and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after the addition or subtraction,
Alternatively, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is sent to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, and stores it in the counter corresponding to the command, either the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110.
, and the values of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b are updated, so that the values can be updated while being synchronized with the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control unit 110.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.
3b, and sends a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, it displays the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, as the third reserved ball number pattern.
The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the sub display area Ds of the symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110.
The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203b is changed in synchronization with the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved balls patterns displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110.
The pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls whose variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol or a fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received,
It is turned off when the variable display is set in the third pattern display device 81. When the variable start flag 223d is turned on, the display variable pattern command is set based on the variable pattern extracted from the received variable pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process of the main process executed by the MPU 221. In the display control device 114,
By receiving this display variation pattern command, display control of the variation performance is started so that the third pattern variation display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The winning information storage area 223f has one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects a start winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, various information (whether it will be a win or not, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern) that will be obtained when a lottery for a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (
The predicted information is then sent from the main control device 110 to the voice and lamp control device 11
3 is notified by a winning information command.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it outputs various information notified by the winning information command (whether the player wins or loses, the type of big win in the case of a big win, and a fluctuation pattern).
is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the type of ball entry port (first ball entry port 64 or second ball entry port 640) where the ball was detected, in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the oldest winning event is stored, and the first area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event.

In this first embodiment, the main control unit 110 is configured to set a winning information command based on various information (win or lose, type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and variation pattern) obtained when a lottery is held for a special pattern corresponding to the initial winning, and notify the voice lamp control unit 113, but other configurations may be used.

For example, when a winning start occurs, various information predicted in response to the winning start is
Already, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b
and a determination means for determining, when a winning information command is received, whether the various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f matches the various information (winning information) included in the received winning information command. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f has been stored appropriately.

In addition, in the first embodiment, a configuration is used in which a winning information command is set and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 when a new start winning occurs, but the timing of notifying the winning information command to the voice lamp control device 113 is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (the timing when the winning information command is set). For example, a configuration may be used in which a storage means is provided to temporarily store the winning information command, and the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 periodically (for example, every 5 seconds), when the game condition changes (for example, when the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the big win game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special pattern starts to change (or stops). By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately execute a performance (so-called a pre-reading performance) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this embodiment, the setting of the performance mode, such as changing the display color of the reserved pattern, is executed as a look-ahead performance based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f. In this way, by executing various performances (look-ahead performances) based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that each reserved ball will be a jackpot before the variable display starts. It is also possible to execute a long-term performance using multiple variable display periods.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, etc., and is repeatedly updated in the range from 0 to 98.
The counter is incremented by one each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of No. 3 is executed.

In this embodiment, the counters used for selecting the variation pattern and selecting various effects are collectively referred to as the effect counter 223g. The effect counter 223g is composed of multiple counters, and each counter is configured to update its value periodically by the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. However, the update contents of each counter are configured not to be synchronized so that the updated values do not overlap. In other words, the value is updated under the same conditions, but the updated values are configured to be unrelated. Then, when selecting various effects, the values of different counters are referred to. By configuring in this way, when multiple effects are determined within the same processing, the effect modes of multiple effects are determined based on the same counter value, which can prevent the variation of the effects from being reduced.

In this embodiment, the performance counter 223g is configured to have multiple counters.
Without being limited thereto, for example, a predetermined calculation process may be executed on the acquired value of the performance counter 223g, and various performance modes may be selected based on the calculation result. In this case, a predetermined calculation process may be executed when the value of the performance counter 223g is read. By configuring in this way, even when multiple performance modes are selected based on the value of the same counter held by the performance counter 223g, it is possible to prevent the variety of performances from decreasing.

The performance state storage area 223h is a storage area for temporarily storing the performance state (performance content) determined by various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and stores the content (information) determined by the various control processes. Then, by reading out the information stored in the performance state storage area 223h, a performance mode corresponding to the determined performance state is set.

By storing the presentation state (presentation contents) in this presentation state storage area 223h, even if the timing for deciding the presentation state (presentation contents) differs from the timing for setting the presentation mode, the presentation mode corresponding to the decided presentation state (presentation contents) can be surely set.

The set value storage area 223i is a memory area for storing set values based on information on set values output from the main control unit 110 when that information is received. Specifically, a status command including information on the set values is set (see S913 in FIG. 498) in the start-up process of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 498), and when that status command is received, a set value is specified based on the information included in the received status command, and information indicating the specified set value is stored in the set value storage area 223i.

The information stored in the setting value storage area 223i is then referenced when determining the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, when a setting change operation for changing the setting value is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to always require the power-on operation, and a status command including information regarding the setting value is set after the setting change operation is completed. Furthermore, each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 (each time the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 498) is executed), a status command including information regarding the setting value is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. By configuring in this way, information regarding the setting value is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only at the limited timing of when the power is turned on.
, the current setting value can be reliably grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Also, by minimizing the opportunities for outputting information on the setting value, it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of information on the setting value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the signal indicating the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is not directly output to the outside, but information on the setting value is output, even if the information is illegally acquired, it is difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the information, so that it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of information on the setting value. In addition, in this embodiment, since the information on the setting value is set using a part of the state command for indicating the game state (for example, the upper bit that is likely to be an empty bit among the 8 bits for generating the state command), it is difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the output information compared to the case where the information on the setting value is output alone, it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of information on the setting value.

Furthermore, information indicating a setting value, not a value indicating a setting value, is stored in the setting value storage area 22.
Since the setting value storage area 223i is configured to store the setting value in the setting value storage area 223i, even if the information stored in the setting value storage area 223i is illegally obtained, it is difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the output information, and therefore it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of information related to the setting value.

In this embodiment, a dedicated memory area called the setting value storage area 223i is provided as a memory area for storing information relating to the setting values (information for indicating the setting values). However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the area to store information for indicating the setting values using a part (free area) of another memory area, and to store an address indicating the memory area in which the information relating to the setting values (information for indicating the setting values) is stored in a specific area. In this case, it is preferable to change the area in which the information relating to the setting values (information for indicating the setting values) is stored periodically or irregularly.

In addition, it is preferable to process the information about the setting value according to a predetermined rule in accordance with the specifications of the storage area that stores the information about the setting value (information for indicating the setting value). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the setting value to be illegally obtained based on the information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The setting change flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the setting is currently being changed, and is set to ON when a change command indicating that the setting is being changed is output from the main control device 110 (see S2073 in FIG. 505). Then, the standby process (S2073 in FIG. 505) is performed.
505) (see S2071 in FIG. 505), and is set to OFF when it is determined that a change completion command indicating that the setting change has been completed has been received (see S2072 in FIG. 505).
(See No. 2077).

By providing this setting change in progress flag 223j, the operation status of the setting change operation executed by the main control unit 110 can be grasped on the voice lamp control unit 113 side, so that the processing of the standby processing (see S2012 in FIG. 505) executed until the setting change operation is completed can be switched according to the operation status of the setting change operation. Therefore, the processing load of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be reduced.

The executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing the contents of the setting suggestion effect executed during a big win game, and when the setting suggestion effect is set as part of the round effect, information indicating the effect mode (effect content) is stored.
The stored information is referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the end screen presentation executed during the ending period of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, in order to equalize the information given to the player by the setting suggestion presentation executed during the jackpot game, the content of the setting suggestion presentation executed in the end screen presentation is determined based on the content of the setting suggestion presentation executed during the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust the presentation amount (information amount for predicting the setting value) of the setting suggestion presentation provided to the player in one jackpot game, and it is possible to suppress a situation where the setting suggestion presentation is not executed at all in one jackpot game, which reduces the player's motivation to play, or where excessive setting suggestion presentation is executed in one jackpot game.

Then, after the presentation mode of the ending screen presentation is determined, the performed setting suggestion presentation memory area 22
The information stored in 3k is cleared.

The acquired ball count storage area 223n is a storage area for accumulating the number of prize balls that have been paid out, and when a winning information command including information indicating the number of prize balls is received from the main control device 110, the number of prize balls is accumulatively stored based on the information included in the command. This acquired ball count storage area 223n accumulatively stores the number of prize balls paid out during advantageous periods that are advantageous to the player, such as during time-saving states, probability-varying states, and jackpot play. When an advantageous period ends,
That is, when the gaming state transitions to the normal state, the stored information is cleared.

The information stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n is referred to when updating the manner of the acquired ball number display for notifying the player of the number of balls paid out during the advantageous period. In this embodiment, the information stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n is cleared when the advantageous period ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the information may be cleared based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a condition that is established when the special pattern lottery is executed 10 times) after the advantageous period ends. By configuring in this way, when an advantageous period is set again immediately after one advantageous period ends, it is possible to display the acquired ball number (pullback display) with the content that inherits the number of prize balls acquired during the previous advantageous period. Therefore, for a player who wants to display a large number of balls as the acquired number display, it is possible to make him/her play with enthusiasm aiming for the next big win game even after the advantageous period ends.

The period performance flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the SP time performance is being executed, and is set to ON when the elapsed time T calculated based on the time information measured by the timer 292 becomes the SP time period. When the elapsed time exceeds the SP time period and the end condition of the SP time performance is established, the flag is set to OFF.

If this period performance in progress flag 223p is set to on, when setting the performance mode of the variable performance, a performance mode dedicated to the period performance (SP time performance) is set, and the background image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 becomes a dedicated background image.

The mission information storage area 223q is a recording area for storing the performance mode (mission content) of the mission performance executed as the SP time performance and the degree of achievement of the mission, and stores the performance content determined by referring to the mission selection table 222g when the SP time performance is executed. Then, information indicating the degree of achievement of the mission, which is updated every time a special symbol lottery is executed during the SP time period (every time a variable performance is executed), is updated and stored.

The time information storage area 223r stores the time information of the timing device 2 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.
This is an area in which the time information (timekeeping information) of the timer 292 is stored. In the time acquisition process (see S2011 in FIG. 504) of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221, the current time information (timekeeping information) acquired from the timer 292 is stored.
In the elapsed time confirmation process of the main process (see S2111 in FIG. 521),
Calculate the elapsed time T from when the power was turned on and determine whether it is a normal performance period or a SP period (SP time period).
This is used to determine whether the RAM 22
Since the contents stored in 3 are not backed up, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the timing information stored in the time information storage area 223f is cleared.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the time is acquired from the timing device 292 during the start-up process.
Since the type of the effect period is determined based on the time information stored in the time information storage area 223r, if the timing of the start-up process is synchronized among the multiple pachinko machines 10 in the hall, the timing of the time information being stored in the time information storage area 223r of each pachinko machine 10 can also be synchronized. If the timing of the time information being stored in the time information storage area 223r is synchronized, the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111) is performed in each pachinko machine 10.
Since the elapsed time T calculated in the calculation of the time elapsed can also be adjusted, the timing for switching from the normal performance period to the SP time period based on the elapsed time T and the timing for switching from the special performance period to the SP time period based on the elapsed time T can be adjusted.
This allows the hall staff to align the performance periods of the pachinko machines 10 simply by turning on the power to the multiple pachinko machines 10 at the same time. Therefore, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal performance period and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the SP time period.
This can prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable about the presentation being executed in a different presentation mode from that of the other pachinko machines 10. As a method for simultaneously powering on a plurality of pachinko machines 10, for example, an island made up of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 may be provided, and an external power source capable of powering on each island may be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time is not determined from the time information of the timing device 292 and the type of the presentation period is not switched depending on the time zone, but the elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired during the start-up process and the time information acquired in the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), and the type of the presentation period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the timing devices 292 of each pachinko machine 10 is misaligned due to aging or the like, the misaligned timing information is not used directly to determine the type of the presentation period, but is converted into a relative value, the elapsed time T, which can be used to determine the type of the presentation period, thereby reducing the effect of the misalignment. Therefore, in multiple pachinko machines 10, the timing to switch from the normal presentation period to the SP time period based on the elapsed time T and the timing to switch from the normal presentation period to the SP time period based on the elapsed time T are determined.
The timing of switching from the P time period to the normal presentation period can be synchronized. Therefore, the presentation periods of the pachinko machines 10 can be aligned, so that some pachinko machines 10 are in the normal presentation period and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the SP time period, thereby preventing players from feeling uncomfortable about the presentation being executed in a different presentation mode from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

The operation invalidation timer 223s is a counter for setting a period during which an operation on the frame button 22 is not judged as valid, and during the period during which a value is set in the operation invalidation timer 223s, an operation on the frame button 22 is not judged as valid (is invalid).
A value indicating a predetermined period (5 seconds) is set when the end timing of the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is earlier than the end timing of the boot process of the third pattern display device 81.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to effectively determine an operation on the frame button 22 when the boot process is not completed, i.e., when the necessary information cannot be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, thereby preventing a discrepancy between the result of the operation on the frame button 22 identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side and the result of the operation on the frame button 22 identified on the display control device 114 side (the third pattern display device 81 side).

The successive notice execution flag 223t is a flag for indicating that the look-ahead performance is being executed, and is set to ON when the look-ahead performance is executed, and is set to OFF when a special symbol variation that is the target of the look-ahead performance is executed.

The other memory area 223z is an area in which various data, flags, counters, etc. in the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are set or stored.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer and is in a FIFO (First In, First Out) order.
When the command determination process (see FIG. 507) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command storage area is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
This display control device 11 controls the variable display (variable presentation) of the third symbol in the reel.
Details of 4 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 4).
The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, and supplies various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and a 12-volt voltage for driving motors, a 5-volt voltage for logic, and a 10-volt voltage for logic circuits.
The power supply circuit 100 generates a 12-volt voltage, a 5-volt voltage, and a backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies the necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
Interrupt processing (see FIG. 497) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 446) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

The time counter 292 is connected to the main control device 110 and is configured to have a real-time clock (RTC) capable of timing the current time. Here, the configuration of the time counter 292 will be described with reference to Figs. 478 and 479. Fig. 478 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the time counter 292. The time counter 292 has an input/output port 350, a device control unit 351, and a register 352. A power supply 293 for the time counter is connected to the time counter 292. This power supply 293 for the time counter is a power supply dedicated to the time counter 292, different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the time counter 292 even in a power-off state in which the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. A button-type battery is used for the power supply 293 for the time counter.

An input/output port 350 and a register 352 are connected to a device control unit 351 of the clock device 292. The input/output port 350 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 so as to be capable of communicating with each other. The device control unit 351 uses (controls) the register 352 to perform various controls such as keeping the current time and activating an alarm at a set time. The register 352 is a register shown in FIG.
479, the clock device 292 has a register table made up of a plurality of registers. The register table includes a clock register 352a and an input time storage area 352b.
At least an input time storage area 352a and an input time storage area 352b are provided.

The clock register 352a is a register for clocking the current time, and the register value is updated every second. The input time storage area 352b is a storage area in which various information such as clock information can be written and in which stored information can be overwritten. The input time storage area 352b is an area in which the clock information stored in the time information storage area 223ba of the RAM 203 is written when information indicating a power outage occurs during the main processing executed by the MPU 221.

Here, the register table of the register 352 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 479. Fig. 479 is a diagram showing a schematic representation of a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in Fig. 479, the register 352 has 15 registers from 0H to EH in the register table.
A maximum of 8 bits of data can be stored in each of these addresses. Of these addresses, addresses 0H to 6H correspond to the clock register 352a, and each address represents the second, minute, hour, day of the week, date, month, and year, respectively.

The details of the clock register 352b will be described by taking address 0H, which represents seconds, as an example.
Bit 7 of address 0H is a fixed L bit that cannot be rewritten, and bits 0 to
The current number of seconds is expressed using t6. The symbol "o" attached to bit 7 in FIG. 479 indicates that this is a non-rewriteable bit, and it has the same meaning in other addresses. Bits 0 to 6 represent 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and
These correspond to 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, and whether each bit is H or L indicates the number of seconds in the current time.

For example, if the current time is 5 seconds, bit 0 represents 1 second and bit 1 represents 4 seconds.
t2 and t3 are both H, and bits 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are all L.
The sum of the seconds represented by bit it can be expressed as 5 seconds, which is the number of seconds at the current time. In addition, if the number of seconds at the current time is 29 seconds, bit 0 represents 1 second, and bit 1 represents 8 seconds.
t3 and bit 5, which represents 20 seconds, are H, and bits 1, 2, 4, and 6 are all L. This allows the sum of the seconds represented by the H bits, or 29 seconds, to be expressed as the number of seconds of the current time.

As with address 0H representing seconds, the current time is expressed by the sum of the values corresponding to the bits set to H for address 1H representing minutes, address 2H representing hours, address 4H representing days, address 5H representing months, and address 6H representing years. Note that address 6H representing the year represents the last two digits of the year, and the first two digits of the year are fixed at 20. In other words, address 6H representing the year can only represent years between 2000 and 2099.

For address 3H, which represents the day of the week, bits 0 to 6 represent Sunday,
Available on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday.
A specific day of the week can be expressed by setting t to H and the other bits to L. For example, if the current day is Wednesday, bit 3 is H and bits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 are L.

Addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the input time storage area 352b, and can store up to 3 bytes of data. In the input time storage area 352b, a register for storing seconds (corresponding to address 7H), a register for storing minutes (corresponding to address 8H), and a register for storing hours (corresponding to address 9H) are each assigned 1 byte.
The correspondence between t and seconds, minutes, and hours is the same as that between addresses 0H to 2H.

That is, bit 0 to bit 6 of the register that stores seconds are 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 8 seconds, respectively.
Corresponding to seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, bit 0 to bit 4 of the register that stores minutes
6 correspond to 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes, 8 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, and 40 minutes, respectively, and bit 0 to bit 5 of the register that stores the time correspond to 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 3 hours, 10 hours, and 20 hours, respectively. In FIG. 479, all bits are marked with "●
This symbol indicates that the bit can be rewritten and read, and has the same meaning in other addresses.

The correspondence between each bit of the clock register 352a and the input time storage area 352b and the seconds, minutes, etc. is not limited to the form of this embodiment. For example, the numerical value of each bit may be associated with a power of 2. In addition, in this embodiment, the input time storage area 352b is configured with 3 bytes, but the number of bytes may be reduced by storing only the values of hours and minutes as the time information to be stored. The number of bytes may be increased by adding a register that can store milliseconds in addition to seconds, minutes, and hours. Furthermore, instead of storing the clock information in the input time storage area 352b, a storage means such as a RAM may be provided outside the clock device 292. In this case, the power supply to the storage means may be configured to be performed by the clock device power supply 293, or a power supply dedicated to the storage means may be provided separately.

Addresses AH to CH are registers used to output an alarm signal at a set time, and addresses DH and EH are registers that can output an interrupt signal at set intervals. If you do not use the alarm or interrupt function, addresses 7H to 9H can be used.
Alternatively, addresses AH to EH can be used as the input time storage area 352b instead of H. In this case, the three bytes of addresses 7H to 9H can be eliminated, and therefore fewer registers are required, which allows the cost of the clock device 262 to be reduced.

Although FIG. 479 shows only the registers assigned to addresses 0H to EH, in addition to these, there are provided registers assigned to addresses other than 0H to EH, such as registers for changing settings of alarm functions, interrupt functions, etc.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG.
80 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114.
has an MPU 231 , a work RAM 233 , a character ROM 234 , a resident video RAM 235 , a normal video RAM 236 , an image controller 237 , an input port 238 , an output port 262 , and bus lines 240 and 241 .

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, and the character ROM 234.
, an image controller 237 is connected via a bus line 240. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 262 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 262.

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model having a different probability of winning a jackpot with a special pattern or a different number of prize balls paid out for one jackpot with a special pattern, there are models having the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work R
AM233 will now be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command to set is set to the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
The information is stored in the memory.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a that allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows for sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This allows for a reduction in the number of parts in the display control device 114, which in turn reduces manufacturing costs and suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND type flash memory has a problem that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of NAND type flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands constituting the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) as described later.
M) and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The character ROM 234 stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third
This is a memory that stores data of an image to be displayed on the pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and the character ROM 234 is
The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the M234, which will be described later, is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
An image controller 237 is also connected to the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 reads image data stored in the character memory area 234a2, which will be described later, from the character memory area 234a2.
A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237
Transfer to M236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND type flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR type ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 which stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 which stores data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily made large-capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND type flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, so that the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the occurrence rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 232 via the bus line 240, for example.
Based on the address transmitted from the address read/write unit 37 , the corresponding data is read from the NAND type flash memory 234 a or the like, and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a, by its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.
34a. The EEPROM 300 performs the well known data address translation so that data can be read from and written to 34a.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, which includes the error bit.
Even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used as the M234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images based on erroneous data.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks in the NAND flash memory 234a and prevents access to the defective data blocks.
The MPU 231 and the image controller 237 each store data in the NAND flash memory 234a.
Without considering the address positions of different defective data blocks,
4 can be easily accessed.
Even if the flash memory 234a is used, the access control to the character ROM 234 can be prevented from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND type flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the buffer RAM 234.
If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from N
The data is read from the AND type flash memory 234a (or the NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process and writes the data corresponding to the specified address onto the bus line 24.
0 to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237.

The buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, each of which is a NAND
The ROM controller 234b can set one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a. This allows the ROM controller 234b to output data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other bank, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page of data including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. This allows the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 to be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. The NOR ROM 234d stores a first program storage area 234a1 for storing, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231.
At least a program memory area 234d1 is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes this boot program. As a result, the display control device 114
In the first program memory area 23, various controls can be executed.
4d1 is one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e.,
The first program storage area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set appropriately in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code and also points the instruction pointer 23
1a, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d first from the buffer RAM 234a while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d.
The instruction code at the corresponding address in the program stored in the buffer R34c is read out.
The data is read from the AM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

In this embodiment, all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 23.
4a, the boot program is stored in the MPU after the system reset is released.
The reason why the predetermined number of instructions, beginning with the instruction to be processed first by 231, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d is as follows: That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to the NAND flash memory in that, when reading data of the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time from reading the data to setting it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H".
Therefore, the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, the display control device 1
This creates a problem in that control of the third pattern display device 81 at 14 may not start immediately.

In contrast, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in the NOR type ROM 234d, the address "0000H" can be read from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released.
When the address "0000H" is specified, the character ROM 234 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "00
00H" can be received, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 that stores a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., control programs other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first transfers the data in the first program storage area 234 to the data table storage area 233b.
According to the boot program read from the second program memory area 234a1, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a, using a bank of the buffer RAM 234c different from the bank in which the boot program of the first program memory area 234d1 is set.

Here, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is
As described above, since the capacity is equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, when the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H" and the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c,
The boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is read from the program storage area 233 in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1.
When transferring the boot program to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the other bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, and then moves the instruction pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a.
In this way, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231
The MPU 231 can read out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes.
Instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having a program storage area 233a and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having a program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the following:
The remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included. Meanwhile, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) are all stored in the second program storage area 233b.
4a1, a predetermined amount is stored in the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 23
At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231
Specifically, the initialization process (see S6001 in FIG. 524) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 524) stored in the program storage area 233a is completed is set as the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.
3) (see S6002 in Step S6003) is set.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b.
The various processes are executed using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the program.

Therefore, most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 23, which has a slow read speed.
Even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the character ROM 234 and the program storage area 23 of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released,
By transferring the control program to the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is made up of a high-speed DRAM, and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

As described above, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, starting from the instruction that is to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The remaining boot program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234d.
Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the program storage area 233a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a.
By simply adding the OM 234d, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 that accompanies this shortening of the startup time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 486) transmitted from the MPU 231, and develops the image in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later, and outputs the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs parallel processing of the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed.
Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 525(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image.
In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the next frame of image and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive an image drawing instruction from MPU 231 at each image drawing and display processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the drawing and display processing of an image have not been completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Incidentally, the drawing of images is performed using image data stored in resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND type flash memory facilitates large capacity ROM, the read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, the character ROM 234a, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, can be read at the time of drawing an image.
Since there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from 34, the time required for such reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display has been decided by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 controls the MPU 231 to transfer image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed.
is configured to instruct the image controller 237. As described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw an image, but when drawing an image, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, and the time required for reading can be omitted, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Moreover, by storing image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured with a 132-kbyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data to the image controller 2 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list.
The instruction to transfer image data to the character ROM 234 includes the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and information on the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236).
The address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) is included in the data.
The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included.

The image controller 237 reads the character data from the character ROM 23 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction.
One block of data is read from a predetermined address of the video RAM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is read out from the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.
Then, the process is repeated until all image data stored in the storage destination address range from the storage destination start address to the storage destination end address specified by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a period of time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is
a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time.
It is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data while the image data is being transferred to the normal video RAM 236.
When 236 is occupied, the video RAMs 235, 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, which prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

Also, the buffer RAM 234c is used to store the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM
Since the transfer of image data to 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 stores image data transferred from the character ROM 234.
The images are stored without being overwritten while the power is on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character design area 235e, and the error message image area 235f are provided. In addition, the power-on variable image area 235b,
At least a third pattern area 235d is provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on.
The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be stored in the main control device 11 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be stored in the main control device 11 is stored.
This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image which displays the lottery results performed in 0 through a variable presentation.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231
34 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image to the power-on main image area 235a (see FIG. 523).

Here, the power-on variable image will be described. Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 reads image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 and stores them in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b.
b, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is then transferred to
The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 481) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variation, the display control device 114 alternately displays, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image with a "○" design in the lower right position facing the screen, and a power-on variation image with a "X" design in the same position as the "○" design, during the variation period. Then, the main control device 110
The result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 110 is determined from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command sent from the voice lamp control unit 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and if it is a "jackpot for special symbols", an image showing this is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation presentation has stopped, and if it is a "miss for special symbols", an image showing this is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation presentation has stopped.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can check the operation of the resident video RAM 235 without worrying that the operation is stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
It is possible to wait until the transfer of image data to 35 is completed.

In addition, during operation checks at factories during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, the character R
By using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the OM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

In addition, when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64, the power-on variable image area 235b
The power-on variable image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the third symbol display device 81, and images showing "○" and "×" are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b. Therefore, while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the first ball entrance 6
When a ball is detected in number 4, a corresponding variable effect can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 480, the explanation will be continued. The rear image area 235c is the third pattern display device 81
Here, with reference to Fig. 483, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 will be described. Fig. 483 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. Fig. 483(a) shows the rear image A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and Fig. 483(b) shows the rear image B corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and Fig. 483(c) shows the rear image A corresponding to the "sand beach stage".
83(b) are shown respectively for rear view B which corresponds to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 483, the rear images corresponding to the rear faces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and are stored in the character ROM 23.
The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") prepared for each of the backs A and B are configured so that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When the change of the back type is decided and the stage is changed to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 first sets the area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scroll image, and the display area is sequentially moved to the third pattern display device 81.
Further, when the display area reaches an image between positions c and d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image between positions a and a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described.
, all image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, positions a to d, is stored in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Usually, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the "sand beach stage," is displayed, so by making all image data of the rear surface A corresponding to the frequently displayed "sand beach stage" resident in the rear surface image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 483(b), for rear side B corresponding to the "deep sea stage", only a portion of that rear side, i.e., image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, is stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.

In order to instantly change the rear image, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, this would require a RAM with a very large capacity to be used as the resident video RAM 235.
This may lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a' (or the range of FIG. 483(a) to (b)), and the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the range of FIG. 483(a) to
Since the image data corresponding to the image between the first and second characters (images between the first and second characters and the second character) is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when a change of stage is decided by a lottery at the start of the variation, the initial position of the back B can be displayed immediately on the third pattern display device 81 by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can be made to scroll or change color over time. Also, since only image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored for the back B, the increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

For rear surface B, the range from position a to position b is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the transfer of image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completed from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236. As a result, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to normal video RAM 236, so that
After scrolling the range from position a to position b using image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236, and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

For the rear side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear side images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 480) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear side image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear side images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear side image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the rear B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 have a difference in position b'.
The image data corresponding to the images between position a and position b are stored in a duplicated manner.
Under the control of the image controller 237 by the third symbol display device 81, the image up to the position b is displayed using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.
Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the image at position b
By displaying the image from ' on the third pattern display device 81, the background image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth transition.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions c and d as a display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, and then the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions a and a' as a display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection, as if they flow to the left.

Returning to FIG. 480, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is a third symbol display device 81
In other words, the third pattern area 235d is an area for storing image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 main patterns (see FIG. 448) numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns. In this way, when performing a variable performance with the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data stored in the NAND type flash memory 2
Even if the third symbol display device 81 is used, the variable performance can be started quickly in the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, even if the variable performance is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640,
It is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the variable performance does not start immediately in the third pattern display device 81.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including "boy" and "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and by storing data corresponding to these in the character design area 235e, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible for the image controller 237 to draw a specified image by reading image data that is already resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, rather than newly reading corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. This allows the character RO to be displayed in a desired manner.
Since there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the M234, the character design can be instantly changed even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the type of the error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error.
Since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 can display the following based on the received error command:
By reading out image data that is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, each error message image can be instantly drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to an error message from the character ROM 234, and therefore eliminates the need to read out image data corresponding to an error message from the character ROM 234.
Even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the memory 34, an error message corresponding to the error command can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

MPU 231 instructs image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area in which the type of image data should be stored, among the sub-areas provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236. In response to this, image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by MPU 231 from character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified sub-area of image storage area 236a via buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 develops one frame of image in the frame buffer by writing one frame of image drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and while developing the image in one frame buffer, reads out one frame of image information developed earlier from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out an image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer, and outputs the image to the third pattern display device 81.
The image of one frame that has been read out can be displayed on the LCD.

The frame buffer that develops one frame of image and the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read out to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are as follows:
Every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image.
When the frame buffer 236b is specified, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a timing counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a program storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233d, a data table storage area 233e, a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a program storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233d, a data table storage area 233e, a data table storage area 233f, a data table storage area 233b
j, background mode memory area 233k, execution performance memory area 233l, setting value memory area 2
33m, display update flag 233n, rear image change flag 233w, rear image discrimination flag 2
It has at least 33x.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs from the character ROM 234, transfers them to the work RAM 233, and stores them in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter
As described above, the work RA executes various controls using the control program stored in the work RA.
Since M233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed.
Even if the control program is stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complex presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

The data table storage area 233b is an area which stores a display data table which describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance which is displayed based on a command from the main control unit 110, and a transfer data table which specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance which is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RA in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.
M233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU
231 performs the third calculation using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b.
It controls the display of the pattern display device 81. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, the various data tables will be described in detail. First, the display data table is
One is prepared for each performance mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control unit 110, and display data tables corresponding to, for example, variable performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The variable performance is a performance that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating the miss is finally stopped and displayed, while if the stop type of the variable performance is either a jackpot A or a jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it, so that when a normal pattern jackpot is reached and the electric device is opened, the number of prize balls increases when the balls are more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the balls held are unlikely to decrease or are not decreased even when playing, so that the player can have a sense of expectation that the special pattern jackpot will be obtained when the balls held are unlikely to decrease or are not decreased. This increases the player's motivation to play, so that the player can continue to have the motivation to play.

As mentioned above, even if a certain time has passed since the one variable performance stopped,
When the next variable performance associated with the start winning does not start, the third symbol display device 81 displays the third symbol, which is the main symbol numbered "0" to "9," and only the back image changes. If the demo performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the hall staff can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not being played.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round performance, the ending performance, and the demo performance. In addition, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, has 32 variable performance patterns that can be set.
If there are patterns, one table will be prepared for each variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at a time corresponding to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed in the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, and also specifies drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the type of sprite.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite is to be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to the magnification ratio is specified. If the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is information for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through the image. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information for specifying the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined for each address include one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and drawing information for each sprite such as characters used for various effects such as boy images and letters.
Incidentally, one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter specification information are kept constant over time, so the variable display data table only specifies the rear type, which is information for identifying the type of rear image.

When it is determined that one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, preparation period background, time-only background) is to be displayed according to the background type, the MPU 231:
A rear image of the background corresponding to a stage designated by the player is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time.

In this embodiment, the case where only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the back image that was displayed at the stage when the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information includes, depending on the type of the rear surface, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed and information indicating the time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed.
The display may indicate either the information indicating the elapsed time since the display of the third pattern display device 81 was started, or the type information of the position information together with the back surface type and position information (for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or drawing of an image based on a display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81)
Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) are described with symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The reason for specifying the offset information rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol is that the display of the third symbol in the variable performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous variable performance and the stop symbol of the current variable performance, and the symbol offset information from the start of the change until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is recorded. This allows the fluctuation performance to be stopped at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third pattern is assigned a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third pattern, and by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the predetermined time for switching the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance is set to be the time during which the third symbol is displayed variably at high speed. While the third symbol is displayed variably at high speed, the third symbol is not visible to the player, so that even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance during that time, so that the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H", describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 484) describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table.
For each address between the address containing the information, there is written a drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table.

The MPU 231 controls the voice and lamp control device 11 based on commands from the main control device 110.
The display data table to be used is selected according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) sent from the third pattern display device 81, and the selected display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, while the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time a drawing process for one frame is completed, and the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 486) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to perform a drawing instruction for that image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this manner, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 controls the main control device 110
A command (e.g.,
Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in accordance with a display variable pattern command, etc., the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed by simply performing the simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d.

Here, if the system is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in conventional pachinko machines, the processing load for starting and executing the program, which becomes complicated and voluminous as the effect images become more diverse, is large, and this limits the processing capacity of the display control device 114, which may result in a limit to the diversification of the effect images that can be controlled.
By simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
It can be displayed as 1.

The reason why a display data table is prepared in this way corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is that in the pachinko machine 10, the presentation to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the results of a lottery held based on the start winning. In contrast, in gaming machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode as described above. In this way, a configuration in which a display data table is prepared in this way corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is a feature of the pachinko machine 10.
This can only be realized by the fact that the configuration of 0 determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the results of a lottery held based on the initial winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table.
The display data is prepared in accordance with the display data table prepared for each performance. As described above, image data of the sprites used in the performances specified in the display data table that are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the character ROM 236.
The transfer data information for transferring data from the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing are specified.

If all image data of the sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared.
It is possible to suppress an increase in the capacitance of 33b.

The transfer data table stores transfer data information for image data of a sprite (hereinafter referred to as "image data to be transferred") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table (address "
(These are "0001H" and "0097H"). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, Null data is specified, which means that there is no transfer target image data at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (see FIG. 48).
5, address "0002H" is the relevant address).

The transfer data information includes the character ROM in which the transfer target image data is stored.
the start address (the start address of the source) and the end address (the end address of the source) of H.234,
And the top address of the destination (normal video RAM 236) is included.

In addition, in the first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described, similar to the display data table, and in the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 485), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, in each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is described.

The MPU 231 controls the voice and lamp control device 11 based on commands from the main control device 110.
3, the display data table to be used is selected in accordance with a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the data table storage area 233b. If a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 486), which will be described later, and the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite, the transfer of which should be started at that time, is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 486, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the corresponding address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237.
If the address is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should begin there. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the generated drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to the specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite is started in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table,
Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a can be used to draw a specified sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is reliably transferred to the character ROM 23 at the desired timing.
4 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the transfer data table, a character RO is
The transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the M234 to the normal video RAM 236. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed for each sprite, and
Since the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be controlled on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in the load imposed by the transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

In addition, the transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 481. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 523) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in FIG. 523). Then, by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, all the resident target image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235b.
When stored in M235, it is set to off so that the third pattern display device 81 displays an image other than the image displayed when the power is turned on (see S7605 in Figure 535 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see FIG. 525).
If the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see FIG. 525 (
On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the main control device 110
In response to a command sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from
A command determination process (see FIGS. 526 to 531) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 532 to 534) are executed so that various images can be displayed.

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6305 in FIG. 535(a)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 535(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 53(a)) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.
6) is carried out.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110.
Based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, the U231
The performance mode to be displayed on the pattern display device 81 is determined, a display data table corresponding to the performance mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 486) which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 for each frame, based on the drawing contents specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 486) for each frame, which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237, based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while incrementing the pointer 233f by one. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared, so the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, is specified (
That is, if no null data is written), a drawing list (see FIG. 486) which describes image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame is written.
The transfer data information is added to the

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is for specifying an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 532) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (
See S7205 in FIG. 534) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 486) described later, and also specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
At that time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should start is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

As a result, the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the third symbol display device 81 can easily be displayed.
Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in drawing a sprite is always stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table.
In this way, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 486. Fig. 486 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw one frame of image. As shown in Fig. 486,
The background image used in the frame image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects (effect 1, effect 2, ...), characters (character 1, character 2,
For each sprite, such as a reserved ball number pattern 1, a reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., an error pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Also, the drawing list includes information on the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data to the character ROM 23.
Transfer data information for transferring data from the video RAM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored.
M236) and its address are described, and the image controller 237
The image data of the sprite is obtained from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes the display position coordinates,
The information includes the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information, and the image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter designation information using a method designated by the information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates.The image controller 237 then writes the drawn image to the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.
36c.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, or a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the sprite (display object) data is stored in the RAM
The type and address are generated according to the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed.
Depending on the sprite type, U231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of that sprite is stored, and easily include that information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 selects, in one frame of image,
Rearrange the sprites in order from the sprite that should be placed in the back to the sprite that should be placed in the front.
Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite is described. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the background image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at an address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (character RO in which the transfer target image data is stored) to the transfer data table buffer 233e.
The image controller 237 adds to the end of the drawing list the storage start address and storage end address in M234 and the storage start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the image data to be transferred is to be stored. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 adds to the end of the drawing list the transfer data information in the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information.
The image data is read from a predetermined area (an area indicated by the starting address and ending address of the storage source) of the normal video RAM 236 and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the presentation time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed, the time counter 2 is started every time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 525(b)) is executed by the MPU 231.
33h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 532).
When the value of 3h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 resets the display data table buffer 233d
It is determined that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in has ended, and various processes that should be performed in accordance with the end of the effect are executed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates whether the corresponding image data is stored in the resident video RAM 23.
5, the flag indicates the storage state, which indicates whether image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 or not.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is set by the MPU 23 during main processing when the power is turned on.
The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 536) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Moreover, image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF".

Furthermore, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S7713 in FIG. 536). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 536) and the image controller 237 is made to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer process for that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data from being stored in the character ROM.
This makes it possible to suppress transfer of the image data from the display control device 114 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each section of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is used to select from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer") to which an image drawn by the image controller 237 is to be expanded.
When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, information on this designated drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 537).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which an image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded in the designated drawing target buffer.
7, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, reads out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a display process to display an image on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". In this way, the drawing target buffer is updated to the first frame buffer 236b every time a drawing list is sent.
The drawing list is sent each time the MPU 231 executes the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 525(b)) based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed (S78 in FIG. 537).
See 02).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image.
When the frame buffer 236b is specified, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 531(a)). In addition, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 536), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 536). This allows the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the performance mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the rear image type that is set. This flag is, for example, composed of one byte, and each bit corresponds to each rear image type. If any bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear image type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current rear image type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that rear image A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on (see S7002 in FIG. 531(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The rear image discrimination flag 233x makes it easy to identify the currently set rear image type.

Next, referring to Fig. 482, the display contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a setting change operation is being performed to change the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this embodiment, as described above, one setting value can be set from among multiple setting values that have different odds of winning a jackpot by special symbol lottery, and the setting change operation for changing the setting value during the start-up process of the main control device 110 can be executed by turning on the power while performing a specific operation (rotating the setting key 110b) on the pachinko machine 10.

When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, the power supply device 115 (see FIG. 462)
Power is supplied to the various control devices, and each control device executes a startup process. In a conventional pachinko machine 10, that is, a pachinko machine 10 in which a setting change operation is not executed when the power is turned on, a process based on the operator's operation (a process for executing a setting change operation) is not executed during the startup process of each control device, so when the startup process of each control device is executed normally, the required time is approximately constant. Therefore, since the startup order of each control device (the order in which the startup process ends) can be specified, it was only necessary to execute the process according to the specified order, but in this embodiment, since the setting change operation can be executed during the startup process of the main control device 110, depending on the period required for the setting change operation, the startup process of the main control device 110 may end before or after the startup process of the display control device 114 (the boot process of the third symbol display device 81).

Therefore, in this embodiment, a different display screen can be displayed depending on the processing status of the other control devices at the time when the boot process by the display control device 114 is completed. By configuring in this way, the current processing status can be easily notified by visually checking the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Figure 482(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boot process of the display control device 114 is being executed, Figure 482(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed and a setting change operation is being executed, Figure 482(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed and the setting change operation has ended but the start-up process of the main control device 110 is being executed, and Figure 482(d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed and the start-up process of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 has been completed.

As shown in FIG. 482(a), when the boot process is executed by the display control device 114,
A display image in which a color bar is displayed is displayed on the entire display area of the third pattern display device 81. This color bar is displayed to properly adjust the color tone displayed on the liquid crystal display. For example, the order of white, yellow, cyan, magenta, red, blue, and black is as follows:
Arranged in order of luminance, an SMPTE color bar consisting of the three primary colors RGB and their complementary colors is displayed.

The display contents displayed on the display screen are used to check the linearity of the transmission system and the amplitude and phase characteristics of the color signal frequency band. This allows the boot process of the display control device 114 to be performed properly. In the example shown in FIG. 482(a), the test color bar is displayed as a still image, but this is not limited to this and it may be configured to display a moving image in which the display position of the color bar is periodically changed. By configuring in this way, the worker can easily understand whether the image information that is periodically changed is displayed normally (whether it is frozen) by visually checking the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Then, when the display control device 114 finishes the boot process, it outputs a command (boot completion command) to indicate that the boot process has been completed to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the current setting change status by receiving a command to indicate that the setting is being changed and a command to indicate that the setting change has been completed, which are output from the main control device 110, and determines information to indicate the display image to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reception of the boot completion command output from the display control device 114.

In addition, when the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 is not completed, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot output information (display commands) for showing a display image to the display control device 114. Therefore, if no display commands are received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed,
The image shown in FIG. 482(b) is displayed. In other words, the display control device 114 stores initial display image data with the characters "setting change in progress" as an initial display image to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 after the boot process is completed, and after determining that the boot process is completed, determines whether a display command has been received from the voice lamp control device 113. If it is determined that a display command has not been received, this means that the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 has not been completed, so as shown in FIG. 482(b), the initial display image data with the characters "setting change in progress" is displayed.

Here, for example, if no setting change operation is performed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113 will have each MPU perform initialization processing of each RAM and start-up processing to perform initial control processing based on the information stored in each ROM, but the time spent performing this initial control processing is much shorter than the time spent performing the boot processing of the display control unit 114, that is, the processing to start up the third pattern display device 81 which is composed of an LCD display.

Therefore, when the boot process is completed in the display control device 114, the voice and lamp control device 11
When no display command (a display command indicating that initial settings (start-up processing) are in progress or a display command indicating that initial settings (start-up processing) are complete) is output from 3, this means that a setting change operation is being executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display image shown in FIG. 482(b) is configured to be the initial display image.

By configuring in this manner, if a display command has not been output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the time the boot process is completed by the display control device 114, an alert mode can be displayed to indicate the current situation.

When the boot process is completed by the display control device 114, the voice and lamp control device 113
When a display command indicating that the setting change has been completed is output from the
) is displayed, and when the boot process is completed by the display control device 114, a display command indicating that the initial settings have been completed is output from the voice lamp control device 113, and the normal standby screen (demo screen) shown in Figure 482 (d) is displayed.

<Regarding control processing of main control device 110>
Next, referring to the flowcharts of FIG. 487 to FIG. 502, the MP in the main control unit 110
The control processes executed by the MPU 201 will be described below. The processes executed by the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into a start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, a main process which is executed after the start-up process, a timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and a timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment).
and NMI interrupt processing which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the MI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the start-up processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101
That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switches is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and
When the counter value reaches its maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4 are updated (S103).
The normal win random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (299, 99, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed to set a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 as well as a process for displaying the third symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S
104), and then executes a start winning process associated with the winning of the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figs. 488 to 493.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to Figs. 494 and 496. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the launch of the ball is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the launch of the ball is on, the main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG.
This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and is a process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S201). Here, it is determined whether the jackpot in progress flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that a jackpot is in progress. The jackpot in progress for special symbols includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and the period during which a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special symbol jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S201: Y),
es), and then this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved times of the changing display of the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (N2) are counted.
After obtaining the values of the counters, the change execution determination process is executed (S203).
S204). Details of the change execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 489, but in this change execution determination process (S204), a process is executed to determine the special symbol that will be changed next.

Next, it is determined whether the next change order determined in the change execution determination process (S204) is special pattern 1 (first special pattern) (S205). If the change is to be performed with special pattern 1 (first special pattern), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S206), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S207).
207). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 501) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d for special symbol 1 from the reserved ball number command and stores the extracted value in the RAM 203.
The number of reserved balls of special pattern 1 (223) is stored in the reserved ball counter (223a).

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, a special symbol 1 change start process is executed to start the changing display on the first pattern display device (S209).
). The special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 490. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), a process such as selection of a variation pattern (variation period) required to start the variation of the first special symbol is executed.

In the process of S205, if it is determined that the next change order determined in the change execution determination process (S204) is not a change execution in special pattern 1 (S205: No), it is determined whether or not the change is to be executed in special pattern 2 (second special pattern) (S210).
S210: No), that is, since the reserved balls are not stored for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation is performed in the special symbol 2 (S210: Yes
s), the reserved balls of special pattern 2 are processed in the same manner as the reserved balls of special pattern 1 described above.

Specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (N2) is decremented by 1 (S2
11), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation (S212).
The command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 501) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it calculates the reserved ball number command from the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203.
The value of e is extracted, and the extracted value is stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S212, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213). In the process of S213, the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 -> execution area, reserved area 2 -> reserved area 1, reserved area 3 -> reserved area 2, reserved area 4 -> reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the special pattern 2 change start process is executed to start the changing display on the first pattern display device (S214).
). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S20
2: Yes), and determine whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (S215). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S215: No), update the display of the first pattern display device (S216), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (
S215: Yes), and set the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 (
The setting of the stop symbol is performed by the special symbol 1 variation start process (
S209) or in advance by the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) described later with reference to FIG. 491. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery for a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in an execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and in the case of a jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, whether it is a jackpot A1, a jackpot B1, a jackpot C1, a jackpot D1, or a jackpot E1 is determined according to the value of the special winning type counter C2.

In this embodiment, the LEDs to be turned on in the first symbol display device 37 are determined based on the lottery result.
The color of each LED is different. For example, in the case of a jackpot A, a blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and in the case of a jackpot B, a red LED is turned on. In the case of a jackpot C, a red LED and a blue LED are turned on. In addition, in the case of a miss, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. The LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S219).
, the probability change flag 203m is turned off, and the time-saving counter 203j and the fluctuation number counter 20
The value of 3i is set to 0 (S220). After that, the jackpot flag 203n is set to ON (S221), a stop command is set (S225), and this process is terminated. That is, during the jackpot game, a low probability game state is set, and the electric support game state (time-saving game state) is also released and a non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the result of this lottery is a miss for the special symbol (S218
: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more (S222), and if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 1 or more (S222: Yes),
The value of the change count counter 203i is decremented by 1 (S223), and the value of the change count counter 203i is incremented by 1 (S224).
Next, the above-mentioned process of S225 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped and the process of S22 is terminated.
5 is executed, and then this process ends.

Next, the change execution determination process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 489.
This is a flowchart showing the process of determining whether to execute the change (S204) in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 488) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and is a process for determining whether to execute the change performance pattern (change performance pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In the change execution determination process (S204), first, the change execution flag 203k is set to OFF (value "0") to perform initialization (S241), and data in the change order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is obtained (S242).
The data of 3p is shifted (S243). Next, it is determined whether the data of the execution area is special drawing 1 (S244). If the data of the execution area is special drawing 1 (S244: Yes),
The change execution flag 203k is set to change execution in special drawing 1 (S245), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S244, if it is determined that the data of the execution area is not a change execution in special chart 1 (S244: No), it is determined whether the data of the execution area is a change execution in special chart 2 (S246), and if it is determined that the change execution is a change execution in special chart 2 (S246: Y
es), the variable execution flag 203k is set to variable execution in the special drawing 2 (S247), and this process is terminated. Note that, in the process of S246, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not variable execution in the special drawing 2 (S246: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 490. FIG. 490 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209).
) is a process executed within the special pattern change process (see FIG. 488) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and is a process for drawing lots (determining whether or not a lottery result is won) for a "special pattern jackpot" or a "special pattern miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and for determining the presentation pattern (changing presentation pattern) of the changing presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), first, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203
The values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area a are obtained (S251). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in a high probability period (high probability game state) (S252). The determination of whether or not it is in a high probability period is performed by determining whether the high probability flag 203m is on. This high probability flag 203m is set to on when the high probability game based on the high probability A1, high probability B1, high probability C1, and high probability D1 has ended (S1113: FIG. 502
On the other hand, the setting is turned off based on the start of a big win game (S220: FIG. 488).
reference).

In the process of S252, if it is determined that the current game state is in a probability change state (S2
52: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability state, so the process proceeds to S253. In the process of S253, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 465(a)) (S253). Specifically, the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 is compared with the 655 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a.
The random numbers are compared one by one with the 36 random numbers. As described above, when the current setting value is set to "1", 1000 numbers from "0 to 999" are set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot in the probability variation game state (special game state), and when the current setting value is set to "2", 1100 numbers from "0 to 1099" are set. When the current setting value is set to "3", 1200 numbers from "0 to 1199" are set as the random number value for the special symbol jackpot. When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and these winning random number values match, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S255.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal game state (low probability game state) of a special symbol (S252: No), the process of S254 is executed.
In the process of S254, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S251 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S254). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 65,535 random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. The random number values that result in a special symbol jackpot in the normal game state (low probability game state) are as follows:
When the current setting value is set to "1", 250 numbers from "0 to 249" are set, and when the current setting value is set to "2", 275 numbers from "0 to 274" are set. When the current setting value is set to "3", 275 numbers from "0 to 29" are set.
The random number value for the special jackpot is set to 300 "9". When the value of the special jackpot random number counter C1 matches these winning random number values, it is determined that the special jackpot has been won. After obtaining the lottery result for the special symbols, the process proceeds to S255.

In the process of S255, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired in the process of S253 or S254 is a big win of the special symbol (i.e., whether the acquired special win random number counter C1
(1) whether the value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a matches the judgment value set in the table)
If it is determined that the special symbol is a big win (S255: Y
es), and sets the display mode at the time of the jackpot based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S251 (S256). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S251 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the type of jackpot is determined among the five types of jackpots with special symbols (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1). As described above, if the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined to be a jackpot A (10R variable jackpot), and if it is "40, 41", it is determined to be a jackpot B (10R variable jackpot).
1 (10R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "42-47", jackpot C
1 (5R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "48-59", jackpot D1
(2R special jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 99", the jackpot E1 (
It is determined that the winning combination is 10R normal jackpot, 100 times time reduction (see Figure 466).

In the process of S256, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1). In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is set as follows:
In order to display the jackpot type on the third pattern display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1) is set as the stop type.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S255 that the special symbol is not selected (S25
5: No), and sets the display mode when the winning combination is lost (S257). In the process of S257, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and the variable time (variable pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

After executing the process of S256 or S257, the value of the fluctuation counter 203i is obtained (S258), and the fluctuation pattern table to be referenced is determined based on the obtained value of the fluctuation counter 203i and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202e (S25
9). In this embodiment, as described above, the change pattern table to be referred to in the change pattern selection table 202b is determined based on the value of the change count counter 203i and the change pattern scenario table 202e. When the change pattern is set in the process of S259, the change time (display time) of the change performance in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the change time until the third pattern stops in the display mode for showing the lottery result obtained in the process of S253 or S254 in the third pattern display device 81 is determined.

For example, the previous jackpot type was jackpot B1 (10R jackpot), jackpot C1
If the winning status is either jackpot D1 (5R probability variable jackpot) or jackpot D2 (2R probability variable jackpot), and the game state at the time of the winning status is the normal game state, and the value of the fluctuation count counter 203i acquired in the process of S258 is in the range of 1 to 80 times, the time-saving/probability variable table 202b2 is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Then, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the winning/losing judgment result acquired in the process of S253 and the fluctuation type counter CS1.
For example, in the process of S259, when the time-saving/probability-variable variation pattern table 202b2 is determined as the variation pattern table to be referenced, if the hit/miss judgment result obtained in the process of S253 is a hit and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 49", "win variation A" is set as the variation pattern and "20 seconds" is set as the variation time (see FIG. 467(c)).

In the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol that notifies the result of the hit/miss judgment, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the hit/miss judgment. Even if the main control device 110 is in a display mode of a reach for a miss, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to a reach display mode or a non-miss display mode as long as the variation time is the same. This allows a variety of display modes to be displayed, diversifying the presentation.

Next, a variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern table determined in the process of S259 (S260). Next, the variation pattern determined in the process of S260 is displayed on the display control device 11.
A variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S261 (S262). When the process of S262 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 491. FIG. 491 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214).
) is a process executed within the special pattern change process (see FIG. 488) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and is a process for drawing lots (determining whether or not a lottery result is obtained) for a "special pattern jackpot" or a "special pattern miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and for determining the presentation pattern (changing presentation pattern) of the changing presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process (S214), the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209)
Similarly, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b obtained by the processing of S271
The special win random number counter C1 and the special win type counter C
2 are obtained (S271).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in a probability period (high probability game state) (S272).
If it is determined that the game is in a special chance period (S272: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a special chance state, so the process proceeds to S273. In the process of S273, the value of the special win random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S271 and the value of the special win random number table 20 are compared.
2a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S273). Specifically, the value of the special jackpot random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 65,536 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. As described above, when the game state is in the high probability period (high probability game state), the random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set to 1,000 numbers from "0 to 999" when the current setting value is "1", and 1,100 numbers from "0 to 1,099" when the current setting value is "2". And, when the current setting value is "3", the random number value for the special symbol is set to 1,000 numbers from "0 to 1,099".
The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is set to 1,200, i.e., "1199". If the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 matches these winning random number values, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot has been won. Once the lottery result for the special symbol has been obtained, the process proceeds to S275.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S272 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (S272: No), the process of S274 is executed. In the process of S274, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S271 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (S274
Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is calculated based on the special symbol winning random number table 2
The random numbers are compared one by one with the 65,536 random numbers stored in the 02a. When the game state is in the normal period (low probability game state), the random numbers that result in a jackpot for a special symbol are set to 250 numbers from "0 to 249" if the current setting is "1," and 275 numbers from "0 to 274" if the current setting is "2."
If the current setting value is "3", 300 random numbers from "0 to 299" are set as the special symbol jackpot. If the value of the special symbol random number counter C1 matches these winning random number values, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S275.

In the process of S275, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol obtained in the process of S273 or S274 is a special symbol jackpot (S275), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot (S275: Yes), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S271 (S276). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S271 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and among the five types of jackpots for special symbols (jackpot A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1, jackpot E1),
Determine what kind of jackpot it is. As described above, if the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined to be a jackpot A1 (10R variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "40, 41", it is determined to be a jackpot B1 (10R variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "42 to 47", it is determined to be a jackpot C1 (5R variable jackpot),
If it is within the range of "48 to 59", it is determined to be a jackpot D1 (2R jackpot), and
If it is within the range of "60 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot E1 (10R normal jackpot, 100 times time reduction) (see Figure 466).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S275 that the special symbol is not selected (S27
5: No), and sets the display mode when it is lost (S277). In the process of S277, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and the variable time (variable pattern) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

After executing the process of S276 or S277, the value of the fluctuation counter 203i is acquired (S278), and the fluctuation pattern table to be referenced is determined based on the value of the fluctuation counter 203i acquired in the process of S278 and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202e (S279).
Based on the value of 3i and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202e, a fluctuation pattern table to be referenced in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b is determined.
When the change pattern is set, the change time (display time) of the change performance in the first pattern display device 37 is set, and S273 or S274 is performed in the third pattern display device 81.
In the process, the variation time until the third symbol stops is determined in the display mode for showing the lottery result obtained in the process.

For example, the previous jackpot type was jackpot B1 (10R jackpot), jackpot C1
(5R probability variable jackpot), jackpot D1 (2R probability variable jackpot), the game state at the time of the jackpot is the normal game state, and the fluctuation number counter 2 acquired in the process of S258
If the value of 03i is within the range of 1 to 80 times, the time-saving/probability-changing table 202b2 is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Then, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the hit/miss judgment result and the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained in the processing of S253. For example, in the case where the time-saving/probability-changing fluctuation pattern table 202b2 is referenced in the processing of S259, if the hit/miss judgment result obtained in the processing of S253 is a hit and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 49", "win fluctuation A" is set as the fluctuation pattern and "20 seconds" is set as the fluctuation time.

In the variation pattern, the main control device 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol that notifies the result of the hit/miss judgment, and notifies the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the hit/miss judgment. Even if the main control device 110 is in a display mode of a reach for a miss, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch to a reach display mode or a non-miss display mode as long as the variation time is the same. This allows a variety of display modes to be displayed, diversifying the presentation.

Next, in the process of S279, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the determined fluctuation pattern table (S280), and the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S280 is displayed on the display control device 114.
A variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S281 (S282). When the process of S282 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 492. Fig. 492 is a flow chart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is a timer interrupt process (see Fig. 487).
This process is executed to determine whether or not there has been a win at the first ball entry port 64 (start win), and if there has been a start win, to reserve the values indicated by the various random number counters and to read ahead to determine the lottery results for the special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters that have been reserved.

When the start winning process (S105: see FIG. 492) is executed, first, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64.
First, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (initial winning) in the first ball entrance 64 (S301). Here, the ball entrance into the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won in the first ball entrance 64 (S301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved balls N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S302). Then, the special symbol 1
It is determined whether the value (N1) of the reserved ball counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S303). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S301 that the ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S301: No), S302 to S308 and S320 are executed.
The process of step S309 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S309.

Then, in the process of S303, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (N1)
If it is not less than 4 (S303: No), an over winning information command is set (S304
), and proceed to processing of S309. On the other hand, in the processing of S303, if the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S303: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S305). Then, a reserved ball number command for the first special pattern is set, which indicates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S306).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 501) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S306, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487) are stored in the vacant reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.
In the process of S307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, reserved area 2 is set, and if the value is 2, reserved area 3 is set.
If the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area. Next, the special chart 1 is set at the bottom of the variable order storage area 203p (S308), and the look-ahead process (S320) is executed. The look-ahead process (S320) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, S309 to S316 are the same as S301 to S308 and S32 described above.
For each process of 0, the process for winning the first ball entrance 64 is the process for the right second ball entrance 640.
The same processing is executed, except that the processing is changed to that for winning the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, so a detailed explanation is omitted.
When a game ball enters the ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, the values of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 are obtained and stored in an empty reserved area of the corresponding special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

In this way, by obtaining the values of the special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variable type selection counter CS1 for the second special pattern, which is based on a ball entering the right second ball entry port 640r or the second ball entry port 640, which are the same as those for the first special pattern, a lottery can be performed using a common random number for the first and second special patterns, so that the probability of winning can be kept constant for both the first and second special patterns.

After the process of S308 or the process of S316 is executed, a read-ahead process (S320) is executed.
The details of the look-ahead process (S320) will be described with reference to FIG. 493 as described above, but a process is executed to determine in advance the results of each lottery to be executed at the start of fluctuation, based on the values of various counters acquired for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640.

In this embodiment, the counter values are selected based on the ball entering the game, but they may be selected when the game starts to change. This configuration eliminates the need for a storage area to store the values of the counters until the game starts to change, and the use of storage area in the RAM 203 can be reduced. Also, some of the counters (for example, only the change type counter CS1) may be acquired when the game starts to change. This configuration allows the counters related to the hit/miss judgment to be acquired when the ball enters the game, and the counters not related to the hit/miss judgment to be acquired later, thereby reducing the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 493, a description will be given of the look-ahead process (S320), which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.
3 is a flow chart showing this pre-reading process (S320).

In the pre-reading process (S320), first, a win/loss judgment is made at the start of the fluctuation based on the acquired value of the special winning random number counter C1 (S351). In this win/loss judgment, the same processing as the processing of S255 in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S209: see FIG. 490) and the processing of S275 in the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (S214: see FIG. 491) is executed. Note that this win/loss judgment is performed in the same manner as the win/loss judgment (discrimination) at the start of the fluctuation (special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (
S209: See FIG. 490) in the process of S255, the special symbol 2 change start process (S214
This corresponds to a preliminary win/loss judgment (preliminary determination) that is executed prior to the processing of S275 in (see FIG. 491). Next, it is determined whether the determination result executed in the processing of S351 is a win (also called a specific determination result) (S352). If it is determined that the determination result is a win (S352: Yes), the variation pattern type is obtained (determined) from the variation pattern selection table 202b based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 (S353). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, the winning command table 20
On the other hand, if the result of the win/loss determination is a loss (S352:
No), and based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, acquire the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b (S355). Next, based on the acquired fluctuation pattern type, set a loss winning information command from the winning command table 202e (S356), and end this process.

In this way, the result of the win/loss judgment made in advance before the start of the variation is output as a winning command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time a reserved ball is established, so the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the win/loss judgment result and the type of win in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a preview performance (for example, a performance in which the color of the reserved pattern is changed to a color that notifies the win/loss judgment result of the reserved ball, or a notification sound is output to notify the win/loss judgment result of the reserved ball) based on the winning command. In addition, since one winning command is output for the reserved ball every time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball.

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG.
This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S401). The normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win or when the second ball entrance 6 is displaying a win.
This includes during the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a associated with the reel 40. If the result of the determination is that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S401: Yes), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not winning (S401: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402).
If the display mode of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not changing (S402: No),
Next, the value of the reserved ball counter 203f for the normal symbol (M) is obtained (S404). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the reserved ball counter 203f for the normal symbol is greater than 0 (S405).
If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 0 (S405: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is decremented by 1 (
S406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S407
In the process of S407, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the reserved area 1 → execution area, the reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 →
The data in each area is shifted from the reserved area 2 to the reserved area 4 to the reserved area 3, etc. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S408).

Next, the normal symbol variation start process is executed (S409), and this process is terminated. The normal symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 495. The normal symbol (second symbol) win/loss determination is executed, and the normal symbol variation period (variation time or dynamic display time) is determined based on the win/loss determination result. If the win/loss determination result is a win, a process is executed to set the opening operation of the electric role 640a (operation pattern of the normal symbol winning game) corresponding to the winning type.

In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S40
2: Yes), and determine whether the variable display time executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S410). Note that the variable display time here is the time that is preset by the process of S432 or S433 in FIG. 495 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S410, if the change time has not elapsed (S410: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S410, if the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (S410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S411
In the process of S411, if the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning combination and the display mode is set by the process of S426 in FIG. 495, the second symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (illuminated) on the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is a losing combination and the display mode is set by the process of S434 in FIG. 495, the second symbol "X" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (illuminated) on the second symbol display device 83. When the stopped symbol is set by the process of S411, the main process (FIG. 50) is started.
1) is executed, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stopped pattern (second pattern) is displayed (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83 in a display mode set in the processing of S426 or S434 of FIG. 495. Note that in this embodiment, one type is set as the winning type of the normal pattern, but it is also possible to configure to set one or more winning types such as a long-term win or a short-term win. When configured in this way, the "○" symbol indicating a win that is lit on the second pattern display device 83 is displayed as a winning symbol according to the winning type of the normal pattern (for example, "◎" for a long-term win, "○" for a normal win, and "△" for a short-term win).
By configuring it in this way, the player can distinguish the winning type of the normal symbol from the display mode, and an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

Next, when the variable display being executed is started in the second symbol display device 83, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable process (the current lottery result) is a winning normal symbol (S412).
2: Yes), and set the opening and closing control start of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (
When the opening/closing control start of the electric role 640a is set by the process of S412, the electric role opening/closing process (S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 501) is started.
When the above process is performed, the opening and closing control of the electric role object 640a is started, and S42 in FIG.
The opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S430 or the process of S430 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S412, if the result of the current lottery is a miss for the normal pattern (S412: No), the process of S413 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process (S408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 495. FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation start process (S408).
408) is a normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 487) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487).
This is a process for executing the setting at the start of the fluctuation of the normal pattern, which is executed in the process of the normal symbol fluctuation start time setting (see 95).

It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S421). The special symbol jackpot includes the time when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game) and the time during a predetermined period after the special symbol jackpot game ends. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is in progress (S421: Yes), the process proceeds to S424. In the process of S421, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S421: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a special probability mode or a time-saving mode (S422). If the special symbol is not in a special probability mode or a time-saving mode (S422: No), the process proceeds to S423.
Proceed to process 24.

If the game is in a special bonus or time-saving mode (S422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special bonus mode and is in a normal bonus mode.
The value of the normal winning random number counter C4 obtained by the process of
Based on the value of the second winning type counter C4, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol is obtained (S423). Specifically, the value of the normal winning type counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal winning type random number table 202c (see FIG. 465(b)). As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a losing symbol (see FIG. 465(b)).

In the process of S424, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot with a special symbol or is in a normal state with a normal symbol, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol is obtained based on the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S408 in FIG. 494 and the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 465(b)). Specifically, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol is obtained based on the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 465(b)).
The random number stored in the random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the random number counter C4 (see FIG. 465(b)). As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined to be a normal winning of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", it is determined to be a loss of the normal symbol (see FIG. 465(b)).

In this embodiment, during a jackpot of a special symbol, the lottery is designed to make it difficult for a normal symbol to win. This is because during a jackpot of a special symbol (i.e., during a special game state), the player hits the ball to make it win the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entry hole 640 is opened to prevent the ball that is intended to win the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entry hole 640 as much as possible. Note that the specific winning hole 65a is the second
Since it is provided just below the ball entrance 640, the second ball entrance 640 can be used during a special symbol jackpot.
Even if the ball is prevented from entering the second ball entrance 640, many balls enter the second ball entrance 640.
In most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640 will be at its maximum (four times).

Next, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal symbol obtained by the processing of S423 or S424 is a winning normal symbol (S425), and if it is determined that the winning normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (S425: Yes), the display mode at the time of the winning is set (S426). In the processing of S425, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, it is set so that a "circle" symbol is lit and displayed as the stopping symbol (second symbol). Next, it is determined whether the current game state is in a high probability or time-limited state (S427). If it is determined that the current game state is in a high probability or time-limited state (S427: Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol is in a jackpot state (S428). If the determination result shows that the special symbol is in a jackpot state (S428: Yes), the second symbol is set to be displayed as a jackpot state.
The opening time of the electric device 640a associated with the ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times it is opened is set to 1 (S429), and the process proceeds to S431.
During a big win of a special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible, even if a normal symbol wins, the number of times and the opening time of the electric device 640a are set in the same way as when a normal symbol misses. Also, even if it is determined in the process of S427 that the current game state is not in a probability change or time reduction (S427: No), the opening time of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times is set to 1 (S429), and the process proceeds to S431.

On the other hand, in the process of S428, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S428: No),
, the opening period of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds,
The number of openings is set to two (S430), and the process proceeds to S431.

On the other hand, in the process of S425, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not selected (S42
5: No), and set the display mode when the ball is not in the winning position (S434).
After the variable display on the symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is "X".
When the setting of the display mode when the winning combination is lost is completed, the process proceeds to step S43.
Proceed to process 1.

In the process of S431, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special probability mode (S431). If the game is in a special probability mode (S431
: Yes), and set the variable display time of the second symbol display device 83 to 3 seconds (S
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S431 that the special bonus is not in progress (S431: No), the variable display time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S433), and the process is terminated. In this way, except during a jackpot of a special symbol, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, the variable display time is extremely shortened from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of a normal symbol is low, and further, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 is shortened from "0.2 seconds x 1 time to 2 seconds x 1 time"
Since the time period is very long (2 times per second), it becomes easier for the ball to enter second ball entrance 640.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG.
This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487), and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67, and if the ball has passed through, acquiring and reserving the value indicated by the normal win random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S501). Here, the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S501),
: Yes), and obtain the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved times M of the variable display in the normal symbol) (S502). Then,
) is less than an upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

If the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S501: No), or if the ball has passed through the through gate 67 but the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not less than 4 (S503: No), this process is terminated.
501: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is incremented by 1 (
S504). Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process is stored in the free reserved area (
The number of reserved balls is stored in the first reserved area among reserved areas 1 to 4 (S505), and the process ends. In the process of S505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area.

FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111.
By the I interrupt process, information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 213. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process.

Next, referring to FIG. 498, when the power is turned on to the main control device 110,
The start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the computer 10 will now be described. FIG. 498 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (
S901). The initial setting process (S901) will be described later with reference to FIG. 499. For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-controllers (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S902).
Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is at the ON position (S904).
In the process of S904, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the ON position (S904: Yes), this means that the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, so a setting value control process is executed to perform control corresponding to these states (S904:
The details of this setting value control process (S905) will be described later with reference to FIG.
If it is determined that 0b is not the ON position (S904: No), the process proceeds to S906.

In the process of S906, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 446) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S906). If it is turned on (S906: Yes),
On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S906: No), the process proceeds to S915. If the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S906: No), the process further determines whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S907). If the power interruption occurrence information is not stored (S907: No),
Since the process during the previous power cut may not have ended normally, the process also proceeds to S915 in this case.

If the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S907: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S908). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S909: No),
That is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value stored when the power was cut off,
Since the backed up data is destroyed, the process also proceeds to S915 in this case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 501, the RAM determination value is, for example, RA
It is a checksum value at the working area address of M203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S915, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S915).
When this payout initialization command is received, the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 are cleared, initial values are set, and the payout control of the game balls can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 performs initialization processing (S
916, S917).

As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed,
The RAM 203 is initialized (S916, S917). Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed based on a RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 is initialized (S916, S917).
In the RAM initialization process (S916, S917), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S916), and then the initial values of the RAM 203 are set (S917). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S912.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S906: No), power outage occurrence information is stored (S907: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.)
If the power failure information is normal (S909: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 203 is retained and the power failure information is cleared (S910). Next, a payout return command at power recovery is sent to the sub-control device (peripheral control device) to return it to the game state at the time of the drive power interruption (S911), and the process proceeds to S912. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting the payout control of the game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S912, an initialization command indicating permission for effects is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and execution of various effects is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, a status command indicating the current game status is set (S913), interrupt permission is set (S914), and the process proceeds to the main process.

Next, with reference to Fig. 499, an explanation will be given of the initial setting process (S901), which is one process in the start-up process (see Fig. 498) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Fig. 499 is a flow chart showing the contents of this initial setting process (S901).

In the initial setting process (S901), first, a start-up command indicating that the power has been turned on is sent to the voice and lamp control device 113 (S951).
The startup process will not be executed until it is determined that the startup command set here has been received. Next, other initial setting processes are executed (S952), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to Fig. 500, the contents of the set value control process (S905), which is one process in the start-up process (see Fig. 498) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. Fig. 500 is a flow chart showing the detailed contents of the set value control process (S905).

As shown in FIG. 500, in the setting value control process (S905), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 446) is turned on (S971). If it is turned on (S971: Yes), the dispensing control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device),
When the payout control device 111 receives the payout initialization command, it transmits a payout initialization command to initialize the payout control device 111 (S972).
After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 clears the RAM 203 initialization process (
In the RAM initialization process (S973, S974),
The used area of the AM 203 is cleared (S973), and then the initial values of the RAM 203 are set (S974). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, a changing command indicating that the settings are being changed is transmitted (S975), and the process proceeds to S976.

In the process of S976, it is determined whether the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (S976). If it is determined in the process of S976 that the setting switch 110c is turned on (depressed) (S976: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area 203g is updated by adding 1 (S977), and the process proceeds to S978.
In the process of S976, if it is determined that the setting switch is off (S976: No),
Step S977 is skipped and control proceeds to step S978.

In the process of S978, it is determined whether the setting key 110b is in the OFF position (
If it is determined that the setting key 110b is located at the OFF position (S978),
4: Yes), a change completion command indicating the completion of the setting change is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 (S979), and this process ends. That is, the setting change state is ended, and the start-up process (FIG. 4
98), thereby making it possible to transition to a playable state in which normal play is possible.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S978 that the setting key 110b is not in the OFF position (S978: No), the process returns to S976. In other words, steps S976 to S978 are repeated until it is determined in the process of S978 that the setting key 110b is in the OFF position.
The above steps are repeated.

In addition, in the process of S971, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S971: No), first, a payout return command is sent to the payout control device 111 (S980), and then the data in the setting value storage area 203g is read (S981).
When the process of 981 is completed, the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting value display device 110a (S982), and a status command indicating the setting confirmation status is set (S983).
3), it is determined whether the setting key 110b is in the OFF position (S984).
In the process of S984, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is located in the OFF position (S984: Yes), this process is terminated. In other words, the state is transitioned to a playable state. On the other hand, in the process of S984, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is not located in the OFF position (S984: No), the process of S984 is repeatedly executed. In other words, the setting confirmation state is continued until the setting key 110b is located in the OFF position.

By executing this setting value control process (S905: see FIG. 500), the setting value can be changed in response to the operation of the setting switch 110c in the setting change state.
In addition, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be continuously displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is placed in the OFF position.

Next, referring to FIG. 501, after the above-mentioned start-up process, MPU2 in the main control device 110
The main processing executed by the game machine 501 will be described below. FIG. 501 is a flow chart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process of S1001 to S1007 and S1021 is executed as a periodic process with a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of S1010 and S1011 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, while the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487) is being executed,
Executes an external output process to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the control device 1003 to each control device on the sub side (peripheral control device) (S1001
Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 487) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111
A prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls won is sent to the
8) or the start winning process (see FIG. 492) to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning command set in the start winning process or the look-ahead process (see FIG. 493) is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process, the voice lamp control device 113 is sent a change pattern command, a stop type command, etc., required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the change of the third pattern.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and the counter value is set to the maximum value (198 in this embodiment).
When the counter value CS1 reaches 0, the counter value CS1 is cleared to 0.
3 and store it in the corresponding buffer area.

When the updating of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and a winning ball command indicating the read prize ball count is set (S1021). Next, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, a jackpot performance is executed, and a jackpot control process is executed to open or close the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1004). Note that the jackpot control process (S1004)
Details of ) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S1005). In the electric role opening/closing process (S1005), when the opening/closing control start of the electric role 640a is set by the process of S413 of the normal pattern variation process (S106: see FIG. 494), the opening/closing control of the electric role 640a is started.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display device 37 (S1
In the first symbol display update process, the process of S260 of the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209: see FIG. 490) or the process of S214 of the special symbol 2 variation start process (S214: see FIG. 491)
When the variation pattern is set by the process of 280, the first pattern display device 37 starts displaying the variation according to the variation pattern.
During the period from when the fluctuation starts until the fluctuation time has elapsed, for example, if the currently lit LED among the LEDs 37a of No. 7 is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

In addition, the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, and if the color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player will not be able to confirm the change in the color of the LED.
In order to allow the player to confirm the change in the color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed. When the counter reaches 100, the LED is turned on.
D changes its lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process (S1006), the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209
490) or the special symbol 2 variable start process (S214:
When the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern set by the process of S280 of (see 1) has ended, the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and the special symbol 1
Processing of S256 or S257 of the fluctuation start processing (S209: see FIG. 490), or processing of S276 or S277 of the special pattern 2 fluctuation start processing (S214: see FIG. 491)
The stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed (illuminated) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the process.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the second symbol display device 83 (S1
In the second symbol display update process (S1007), the normal symbol variation start process (S408
When the second symbol variation time is set by the process of S432 or S433 of ...
When the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S411 of the normal symbol change start processing (S406: see FIG. 494), the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed as a stop display (
(lights up).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S10
08), if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No),
In this case, the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output a power failure signal SG1, and the power supply is not cut off. In this case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (
S1009), if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process returns to S100
1, and the above-described processes from S1001 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009:
No.), until a predetermined time has elapsed, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, the initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI
2 and updating of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (29 in this embodiment).
When the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CINI3 reach a count value of 0 (S1002, S1003, S1004, S1005, S1006, S1007, S1008, S1009, S1010, S1011), the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CINI3 are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1001 to S1007 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter C
By repeatedly updating INI2, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Furthermore, if, in the process of S1008, information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power has been cut off due to a power outage or being turned off, and as a result of the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputting a power outage signal SG1, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 497 has been executed, so the process at the time of power outage from S1012 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S101
4), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.
The checksum values in the stack area and working area backed up in 203.

The process of S1008 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the game state carried out in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 carried out within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power outage occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S1001 after the start-up process is completed. In other words, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up process,
Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during the power-off process, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) during the initial setting process (S901), and the process can be started from S1001. This reduces the control burden on the main control unit 110 and improves the efficiency of the main control unit 110.
Therefore, accurate control can be performed without causing malfunction or runaway of the motor 10.

Next, the big win control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 502. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing this big win control process (S1004).
) is executed during the main processing (Fig. 501), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing a specific winning port (large opening port) 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special pattern.

In the big win control process (S1104: see FIG. 502), first, it is determined whether a big win of a special symbol is to start (S1101). The process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 488) is executed, and the start of a big win of a special symbol is set. If a big win of a special symbol is to start (S1101: Yes), an opening command is set (S1116), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 501) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an opening performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot does not start (S1
101: No), and determine whether or not a special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1102). The special symbol jackpot includes the time when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game) and the time during a predetermined period after the special symbol jackpot game ends. In the process of S1102, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1102: No), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (S1102: Yes
If it is time to start a new round (S1103: Yes), the specific winning hole (large opening hole) 65a
(S1104), and sets a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started (S1105). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 501) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, it transmits a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, if it is not time to start a new round (S
1103: No), and determine whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is met (
S1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls) have won the prize after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened, it is determined that the closing condition has been met.

In the process of S1106, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is met (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1107).
Then, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning port (large open port) 65a is not satisfied (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1108). Specifically, when a special game state (10 rounds, 5 rounds, or all of 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual is ended, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance.

In the process of S1108, if it is the timing to start the ending performance (S1
108: Yes), an ending command is set (S1109), and this process ends.
The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 501).
During the external output process (S1001), the signal is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.
When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it selects the display mode of the ending performance based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Then, it transmits a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending performance to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1108, if it is not the ending start timing (S11
If the answer is 08: No), it is determined whether or not it is time for the big win to end (S1110). The big win end timing is the timing when a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. If it is determined that the big win has not ended (S1110: No),
Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1110 that it is the timing for the jackpot to end (S1110: Yes), in the process of S1111, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot E1 (S1111). If the current jackpot type is jackpot E1 (10R time-saving 100 times jackpot) (S1111: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 100 (S1112). Next, the jackpot flag 203n is set to OFF (S1113).
1115) and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the current jackpot type is not the jackpot E1 (S1111: No),
The probability change flag 203m is set to ON (S1113), and the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to 65.
Next, the big win flag 203n is set to OFF (S
1115) and then this process ends.

<Control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113>
Next, referring to FIG. 503 to FIG. 522, the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113
The control processes executed by the MPU 221 are roughly classified as follows:
There is a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, a description will be given of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 with reference to Fig. 503. Fig. 503 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, it is determined whether a start-up command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2001). If it is determined that a start-up command has not been received (
S2001: No), the process of S2001 is repeated. That is, the start-up process is not executed until a start-up command is received from the main control unit 110. On the other hand, if it is determined that a start-up command has been received (S2001: Yes), the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2002). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current start-up process was interrupted by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, a so-called "instantaneous power outage"), and the power-off process of S2118 (FIG. 50) is executed.
Then, it is determined whether the program was started during the execution of the program (see FIG. 6) (S2003).
As will be described later with reference to 6, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2115 in FIG. 506), it executes the power-off process of S2118. Before the execution of such power-off process, the power-off process in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S2118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2003: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S2118 was completed, or after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, R
It is confirmed whether the data in the AM 223 is destroyed or not (S2004).

The confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data "55AAh" is written as a keyword in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2005. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked to see if the data is "
If the value is "55AAh", the data corruption of the RAM 223 has not occurred, and conversely, if the value is not "55AAh", the data corruption of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2004: Yes), the process proceeds to S2005, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2004: No), the process proceeds to S2006.
Then proceed to process 09.

If this startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off,
Since the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost due to a power outage), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2
On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power-off process of S2118 is completed, or if the current startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2004: No), and the process proceeds to S2005.
The process proceeds to step 209.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2003: Yes), the current startup process is
This is started after a momentary power outage occurs, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset during the execution of the power-off process of S2118. In this case, since the power-off process is in the middle of being executed, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore,
In this case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S2004.
Start M223 initialization.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004
The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh" or not, and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is repeated for "0FFh", "55h", "
This RAM 223 read/write check is performed in the order RA
All memory areas in M223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (
S2006: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2007). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality is detected in the read/write check in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2006: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S200
8), and an infinite loop continues until the power is cut off. Any abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S2009
The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2118 is executed (S211 in FIG. 506).
7). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2118 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on only when the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S2118 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2009: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2010).
), and proceed to processing of S2011.

In the process of S2011, the time acquisition process (S2011) is executed. A detailed explanation of this time acquisition process (S2011) will be given later with reference to FIG. 504, but this is a process for storing the time when the power was turned on, and period effects such as SP time periods are set based on the stored time information and the period elapsed since the stored time information. Next, a standby process is executed (S2012). A detailed explanation of the standby process (S2012) will be given later with reference to FIG. 505, but after the main control device 110 executes the setting change completion process S2012, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and interrupt permission is set (S2011).
The main control unit 110 then starts the main processing.
This refers to an area other than the area for storing commands, etc. received from

On the other hand, the process of S2009 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process proceeds from S2005 to S2007.
In this case, the process goes to S2009 via the process of S2001, or the process starts when only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power off command from the main control device 110).
009: No), skips S2010 which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, executes the processes of S2011 and S2012 described above, sets the initial value of RAM 223 (S2013), sets interrupt permission (S2014), and transitions to the main process.

The clear process in S2010 is skipped because, when the process goes from S2005 to S2009 via S2007, the RAM has already been cleared by the process in S2005.
All memory areas of RAM 223 are cleared, and if only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by saving the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to FIG. 504, in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, MPU2
The time acquisition process (S2011) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 will be described below. This time acquisition process (S2011) is a process for storing the time when the power was turned on. The time information acquired by this process is used to determine the elapsed time from the power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521) performed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

Fig. 504 is a flow chart showing this time acquisition process (S1011). When the time acquisition process (S1011) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see Fig. 446) is turned on (S2051). If it is not turned on (S2051),
: No), and obtains the current time information from the clock register 352a of the clock device 262 (S2
054) and proceed to S2055.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is on (S2051: Yes), the time information stored in the insertion time storage area 352b in the register 352 of the clock device 262 is read (S2052), and it is determined whether time information is stored in the insertion time storage area 352b (S2053). If it is determined that no time information is stored (S2053: No), current time information is obtained from the clock register 352a of the clock device 262 (S2054), and the process proceeds to S2055. On the other hand, if it is determined that time information is stored in the insertion time storage area 352b of the clock device 262 (S2053:
If the answer is Yes, the process of S2054 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2055.

In the process of S2055, the time information read in the process of S2052 or S2054 is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 (S2055), and this process ends.

In this manner, the time information for determining the type of the performance period is stored in the RAM 22 by this process.
Since the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r of No. 3, if the timing of the start-up process is synchronized in the multiple pachinko machines 10 in the hall, the timing of storing the time information in the time information storage area 223r of each pachinko machine 10 can also be synchronized. If the timing of storing the time information in the time information storage area 223r is synchronized, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be synchronized, so that the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T can be synchronized. This allows the hall staff to align the effect periods of each pachinko machine 10 simply by simultaneously powering on the multiple pachinko machines 10 in the hall. Therefore, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal performance period and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the special performance period, thereby preventing players from feeling uncomfortable about the performance being executed in a different manner from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time is determined from the time information of the timer 262, and the type of the effect period is not switched according to the time zone, but the elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired during the start-up process and the time information acquired during the elapsed time confirmation process, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the timer 262 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to aging or the like, the deviated time information is not directly used to determine the type of the effect period, but is converted into a relative value called the elapsed time T and used to determine the type of the effect period, so that the influence of the deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in multiple pachinko machines 10, the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T can be synchronized. Therefore, since the presentation periods of the pachinko machines 10 can be aligned, some pachinko machines 10 are in the normal presentation period and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the special presentation period, thereby preventing players from feeling uncomfortable about the presentation being executed in a different presentation mode from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 not turned on (i.e., in the off state), the time information at the time of power-on is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM. The time information stored in the time information storage area 223r is used in the main processing (FIG. 506) described later.
When the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the insertion time storage area 352 of the timing device 262
b. The timing device 262 operates based on the power supply from the timing device power supply 263 even when the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, so the time information stored in the insertion time storage area 352b is held even when the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state. If the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 on, the time information stored in the insertion time storage area 352b of the timing device 262 instead of the current time information and held during the power-off state is read out and stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223.

As a result, even if it becomes necessary to cut off the power to one pachinko machine 10 during business hours because, for example, a circuit board needs to be replaced due to a breakdown in the pachinko machine 10 or an on-site inspection is to be performed, by simply turning the power on again with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, the time information that was stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 by the time acquisition process when the power was turned on last time with the RAM clear switch 122 turned off and that was stored in the time input storage area 352b of the timing device 262 when the power is turned off can be read back into the RAM 223.
Therefore, if the power is turned on simultaneously for a plurality of pachinko machines 10 in a hall with the RAM clear switch 122 turned off, even if one pachinko machine 10 is subsequently cut off, the time information at the time of turning the power on simultaneously can be stored in the time information storage area 223r simply by turning on the RAM clear switch 122 when turning the power on again for that pachinko machine 10, so that the elapsed time T can be determined based on the same time information before and after the power is turned on.
Therefore, since the timing of switching from the normal presentation period to the special presentation period and the timing of switching from the special presentation period to the normal presentation period can be coordinated based on the same elapsed time T as the other gaming machines, it is possible to prevent the timing of switching the presentation mode of only the pachinko machine 10 in the power-off state from being shifted, and it is possible to prevent players playing the game from feeling uncomfortable about the presentation being executed in a presentation mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the time acquisition process (S101 in FIG. 504),
1), when it is detected that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the timer 26
The time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of No. 2 is read out (see S2052).
, the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 (S20
For example, a switch means other than the RAM erase switch 122 that is used exclusively for the time acquisition process (see S1
011), if the switch means is on, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262 may be read out.

This allows the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timing device 262 to be stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 223 while retaining the information stored in the RAM 203 before the power cut state. Therefore, even if the power cut state is entered with reserved balls remaining or when the power cut state is entered during a high probability state of a special symbol, it is possible to prevent the remaining reserved balls from disappearing or the special symbol from transitioning from a high probability state to a low probability state upon re-insertion of the power, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages to the player.

Also, instead of using a switch such as the RAM erase switch 122, the timer 26
The time information stored in the insertion time storage area 352b of the timing device 262 may be read out when the time measured by the timing device 2 falls within a predetermined time period. In this case, the predetermined time period may be set to the opening hours of the hall, for example, 10:00 to 22:45.

This prevents a hall employee from accidentally turning on the power to a pachinko machine 10 that has been cut off during business hours without turning on the RAM erase switch 122, causing the time at which the power was turned back on to be stored in the time information storage area 223r of the RAM 233, resulting in a discrepancy in the elapsed time T between the pachinko machine 10 that has not been cut off and the other pachinko machines 10 that have not been cut off. This ensures that the timing at which the performance period is switched between a pachinko machine 10 that has been cut off during business hours and a pachinko machine 10 that has not been cut off can be reliably synchronized. Also, according to the time information (timekeeping information) measured by the timer 262,
Since the time information to be stored in the time information storage area 233f is selected, the hall staff does not need to perform any special operations when turning on the power, which reduces the burden on the hall staff.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the time information read in the process of S2052 or S2054 is stored in the time information storage area 223r, but instead of this, it may be configured to store it in unused bits of the register table (see FIG. 479) provided in the register 352. The unused bits referred to here refer to, for example, bit 6 of address BH and bits 4 to 7 of address EH, and are shown in FIG.
Among the bits marked with a "●" in 79, the bits are other than the input time storage area 352b. As mentioned above, these bits are bits in which information can be rewritten and read.
It is a bit that, even if the data is rewritten, has no effect whatsoever on the operation of the timer device 262. This allows the register table provided in the register 352 to be used efficiently, so that the number of addresses assigned to the input time storage area 352b can be reduced.

Specifically, for example, information representing seconds is stored in bits 0 to 6 of address 7H,
Information representing minutes may be stored in bit 7 of address 7H and bits 0 to 5 of address 8H, and information representing hours may be stored in bits 6 and 7 of address 8H and bits 4 to 7 of address EH.
This reduces the capacity of the register 352, so that the timekeeping device 2
This makes it possible to reduce the price of 62.

In the register table provided in the register 352 of this embodiment, the bits marked with a "○" in FIG. 479 are fixed to L and cannot be rewritten.
The bits marked with the symbol "○" are made rewritable, and the process of S2052 or S
The time information read in the process of 2054 may also be stored in the bits marked with a "○" symbol. This allows the register table to be used more efficiently than storing the time information only in the bits marked with a "●" symbol.
52 can be further reduced, and the cost of the timing device 262 can be further reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 505, in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, MPU2
The standby process (S2012) executed by the CPU 21 will be described below. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the details of the standby process (S2012).
) is a process for waiting for completion of the startup process when a change in progress command indicating that the settings are being changed is received from the main control unit 110, until a change completion command indicating that the setting change has been completed is received.

In the standby process (S2012), first, it is determined whether the setting change flag 223j is on (S2071). If it is determined that the setting change flag 223j is not on (S2
071: No), and it is determined whether a changing command has been received (S2072). This changing command is a command sent by the main control device 110 after the initial setting of the RAM is executed when the setting key 110b is in the ON position, and is a command to indicate that the settings are being changed (S975: see FIG. 500). If it is determined in the processing of S2072 that a changing command has been received (S2072: Yes), the setting changing flag 223j is set to ON (S2073), and the processing proceeds to S2074.

By setting this setting change flag 223j to ON, the standby process (S2012) can be continued until it is determined in the process of S2076 described later that a change completion command has been received. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2071 that the setting change flag 223j is not ON (S2071: No), or if it is determined in the process of S2072 that a change completion command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S2072:
If the answer is No, proceed to step S2074.

In the process of S2074, it is determined whether an initialization command has been received from the main control device 110 (
S2074). This initialization command is sent during the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 498) and is a command for indicating permission to perform a performance. If it is determined in the process of S2074 that the initialization command has not been received (S2074: No), the start-up process of the main control device 110 has not been completed, and the process returns to the process of S2071 described above. On the other hand,
In the process of S2074, if it is determined that an initialization command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2074: Yes), the process proceeds to S2075.

In the process of S2075, it is determined whether the setting change flag 223j is on (S207
5) When it is determined that the setting change flag 223j is on (S2075: Yes),
), and judges whether a change completion command has been received (S2076). This change completion command is a command that is sent when it is determined in the setting value control process of the main control device 110 (S508: see FIG. 500) that the setting key 110b is in the OFF position, and is a command for indicating the setting change (S979: see FIG. 500).

In the process of S2076, if it is determined that a change completion command has been received (S20
76: Yes), the setting change flag 223j is set to OFF (S2077), and
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2076 that the change completion command has not been received (S2076: No), the process of S2076 is repeatedly executed until it is determined that the change completion command has been received. By controlling in this manner, the main process is not executed until the setting control process is completed and the setting key 110b is detected in the OFF position. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2075 that the setting change in progress flag 223j is OFF (S2075: No), the processes of S2076 and S2077 are skipped,
The process proceeds to S2078. In the process of S2078, the operation invalidation timer 223s is set to a value corresponding to 5 seconds (S2078), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 506, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.
When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S2102),
101: No), the process proceeds to step S2113 without executing steps S2102 to S2112.
is mainly a process related to display (performance) and does not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2113, the variable display setting process of S2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2112 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform settings related to variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed since the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first,
The various commands set by the processes in S2103 to S2114 are sent to the display control device 114 (S2102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set so as to match the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process in S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104).
The power-on notification process notifies the user that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the power-on notification process does not notify the user and the process proceeds to S2105.

In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a reserved number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a player playing the pachinko machine 10, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.
In the reserved ball count display update process, a process is performed to turn on the reserved ball lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b.

Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect process, in order to enhance the effect of the effect, an input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding effect is set to be performed. Details of the frame button input monitoring/effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then a sound editing and output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, the liquid crystal performance execution management processing is executed (S2110), and the processing proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal performance execution management processing, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring processing, S2108
The lamp editing process is executed. The sound editing and output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the process of S2110 is completed, an elapsed time confirmation process is executed (S2111). The elapsed time confirmation process (S2111) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.
After the process of S2111 is completed, a command determination process is executed (S2113). The command determination process (S2113) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 507. After the command determination process (S2113) is executed, a variable display setting process is executed (S2
114). In the variable display setting process, in order to execute the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 515.

When the process of S2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off processing is executed (S2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2119), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The stored power-off occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2115 (S2115: N
o), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is corrupted based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116). If the RAM 223 is not corrupted (S2116: NO),
o), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is executed repeatedly.
If the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes. If the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a staff member of the hall to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 507. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2113).
) is a main process ( FIG. 50 ) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.
6) to determine commands received from main control unit 110, as described above.

In the command determination process (S2113: Fig. 507), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2201). If a variation pattern command has been received (S2201:
The CPU 21 determines whether the command is received (Yes), sets the fluctuation start flag 223d to ON (S2202), extracts a fluctuation pattern from the received command (S2203), and terminates this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S2201, if the variation pattern command is not received (
S2201: No), and then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received (S2204). If a stop type command has been received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2206), and this process ends.

In the process of S2204, if the stop type command is not received (S2204
If the reserved ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the reserved ball number command process is executed (S2208: No).
The reserved ball count command process (S2208) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2207, if the reserved ball number command is not received (S2
207: No), and then it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received (S2209).
When a special symbol winning command is received (S2209: Yes), the winning command receiving process is started (S2210), and the process is terminated.
Details of the above will be described later with reference to FIG. 510, but based on the winning command output from the main control device 110, a pre-determination is performed to determine the winning/losing determination result and the variation type of the reserved special symbol, and a setting process is performed to execute each reserved performance that is determined to be executed based on the pre-determination result. On the other hand, in the process of S2208, if the winning command of the special symbol is not received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command is received (S2211). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command is received (S2211: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S2212), and this process is terminated. A detailed explanation of the jackpot-related process (S2212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 511.

On the other hand, in the process of S2211, when it is determined that the big win-related command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received (S2213
If it is determined that a stop command has been received (S2213: Yes), the stop process is executed (S2214), and the process ends. The stop process (S2214) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2213 that the stop command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether or not a boot completion command has been received (S2215).
If it is determined that the boot completion command has been received (S2215: Yes), the boot completion process (S2216) is executed, and this process ends. A detailed description of the boot completion process (S2216) will be given later with reference to Fig. 514. On the other hand, if it is determined that the boot completion command has not been received (S2215: No), a process according to another command is executed (S2261), and this process ends.

Here, referring to FIG. 508, the reserved ball number command process (S2113: FIG. 507) is one process in the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.
508 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number command process (S2208). In this reserved ball number command process (S2208), the reserved ball number is extracted based on the received reserved ball number command and stored in the special pattern reserved ball number counter, and the performance of the continuous notice to be executed when the reserved ball number limit is reached is set.

In the reserved ball number command process (S2208), first, the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (S2301). Next, it is determined whether the consecutive notice execution flag 223t is on, that is, whether the consecutive notice performance is currently being executed (S2302). If it is determined that the consecutive notice execution flag 223t is on (
S2302: Yes), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the consecutive notice execution flag 223j is not on (S2302:
No), it is determined whether the period effect flag 223p is on, that is, whether the current game situation is a period in which the period effect is being executed (S2303).
If it is determined that the flag 223p is on (S2303: Yes), the period during which the consecutive announcements can be executed is not reached, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the flag 223p is not on (S2303: No) in the process of S2302, the process is terminated.
It is determined whether the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter stored in process 01 is the upper limit (S2304).

In the process of S2304, if it is determined that the value of the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter is not the upper limit (S2304: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter is the upper limit value (S2304: Yes), the reserved upper limit performance selection table 222e (see FIG. 473 (b)) is referred to and the reserved upper limit performance selection table 222e specifies the performance content to be selected based on the number of jackpots in the reserved ball number and the performance counter 223g, as described above. Next, a pre-reading performance execution determination process (S2306) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2307.

Here, with reference to FIG. 509, the details of the pre-reading performance execution decision process (S2306), which is one process in the reserved ball number command process (S2208: FIG. 508) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 509 shows the pre-reading performance execution decision process (S23
This is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-reading performance execution decision process (S2306).
) is a process for determining the period during which the SP time performance is executed and the period during which the continuous performance is executed, and forbidding the execution of the continuous preview performance if they overlap.

In the pre-reading effect execution determination process (S2306), first, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read (S2401). Next, based on the information read in the process of S2401, the contents of the winning information that will be consumed before the winning information that is the target of the pre-reading effect are extracted (S2402), and the extracted contents and the pre-reading prohibition period selection table 2 are compared.
22d (see FIG. 473(a)), the pre-reading inhibition period is determined (S2403).

Next, the SP time period during which the SP time performance is to be executed is specified based on the timing information stored in the time information storage area 223r (S2404). Next, it is determined whether the pre-reading prohibition period determined in the process of S2403 overlaps with the SP time period determined in the process of S2404 (S2405). If it is determined that the pre-reading prohibition period and the SP time period do not overlap (S2405: No), it is determined to execute the pre-reading performance (S2406).
06), and the content of the effect when the reserved upper limit is executed is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S24
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2405 that the pre-reading prohibition period and the SP time period overlap (S2405), the pre-reading performance cannot be executed, so the processes of S2406 and S2407 are skipped and the process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 508, the explanation will be continued. After the pre-reading performance execution determination process (S2306) is executed,
Next, it is determined whether to execute the reserved upper limit performance (S2307). The reserved upper limit performance is determined to be executed when it is determined in the above-mentioned pre-reading performance execution decision process (S2306) that the pre-reading prohibition period and the SP time period do not overlap. In the process of S2307, if it is determined that the reserved upper limit performance is to be executed (S2307: Yes), the content of the reserved upper limit performance to be executed is stored in the performance status storage area 223h (S2308).

After the process of S2308 is executed, the continuous notice execution flag 223t is set to ON (
S2309), the number of times until the special chart change corresponding to the target winning information is counted by the continuous notice counter 223
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2307 that the effect when the reserved limit is not to be executed (S2307: No), the process proceeds to S2308.
The process of steps S2310 is skipped and this process ends.

In this embodiment, when the start period of the SP time performance overlaps with the performance period of the continuous notice, the performance of the continuous notice is prohibited.
It may be configured to calculate the time until the start period of the time effect overlaps with the effect period of the consecutive announcement, and execute the effect of the consecutive announcement that does not overlap. By configuring in this way, it is possible to effectively utilize the period until the start period of the SP time effect, and also to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

Furthermore, even if the pre-reading performance period and the SP time period overlap, each performance may be executed in a display manner that is easy for the player to understand, such as by dividing the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 510, a winning command receiving process (S2213: FIG. 507) is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.
510 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning command receiving process (S2210).

In the winning command reception process (S2210), first, it is determined whether the current game state is a jackpot, a probability change, or a time-saving game state (S2501). If it is determined that the current game state is a jackpot, a probability change, or a time-saving game state (S2501: Yes), it is next determined whether a winning ball command has been received (S2502). If it is determined that a winning ball command has been received (S2502: Yes),
s), and stores the prize ball information indicated by the received command in the acquired ball number storage area 223n (S2
503) and proceed to processing of S2504.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if it is determined that the current game state is not a jackpot, a probability change, or a time-saving game state (i.e., a normal state) (S
2501: No), or in the process of S2502, if it is determined that a winning ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S2502: No), the above-mentioned S250
The process of S2503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2504.

In this embodiment, as described above, when the game state is a jackpot, a probability change, or a time-saving game, the prize ball information is stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The prize ball information may be stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n based on the winning ball command received only during a jackpot.
n. By configuring in this way, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the number of prize balls is stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of shot balls may be counted, the difference between the number of prize balls paid out and the number of balls calculated, and the difference may be stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n. By configuring in this way, the value of the acquired ball number storage area 223n to be referenced when performing the promotion performance can be changed depending on the playing method of the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the process of S2504, the winning information indicated by the received command is stored in the winning information storage area 223
f (S2504). Next, it is determined whether the period effect flag 223p is on (S2505). If it is determined that the period effect flag 223p is on (S250
5: Yes), since the SP time period performance is being executed, this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the process of S2505, if it is determined that the period performance flag 223p is not on (S2505: No), it is determined whether the consecutive notice performance execution flag 223t is on (S2506).
506: Yes), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2506 that the consecutive announcement execution flag 223t is not on (S2506: No), the winning information storage area 22
The winning information set in the step S2507 is extracted (S2507). Next, it is determined whether the winning information extracted in the process of S2507 contains information indicating a pre-reading effect (S2508). If it is determined that the extracted winning information does not contain information indicating a pre-reading effect (S2508: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2508, if it is determined that the extracted winning information includes information indicating a pre-reading effect (S2508: Yes), the above-mentioned pre-reading effect execution determination process (S230
509) (S2509 (S2306)), and proceeds to processing of S2510. In the processing of S2510, it is determined whether to execute the pre-reading effect (S2510). If it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not to be executed (S2510: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2510, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed (S25
10: Yes), and determine whether to execute a look-ahead effect in the variable effect to be executed this time (S25
11). If it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed in the variable effect to be executed this time (S25
11: Yes), the continuous notice execution flag 223t is set to ON (S2512), and S251
On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not to be executed in the variable effect to be executed this time (S2511: No), a display command for changing the display mode of the reserved pattern of the target is set (S2513), and the process proceeds to S2514.

After executing the processing of S2512 or S2513, the contents of the determined pre-reading performance are then stored in the performance status memory area 223h (S2514), the number of times until the special chart changes corresponding to the target winning information is set to the value of the continuous preview counter 223u (S2515), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 511, a big win-related process (S2212) which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 507) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.
511 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big win related process (S2212). This big win related process (S2212) is a process executed when a win related command is received from the main control device 110.

In the big win-related process (S2212), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2601). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S2601: Yes), a display opening command is set (S2602).
Next, the current period performance status is stored in the performance status storage area 223h (S2603), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the opening command has not been received (S2601: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds command has been received (S2604).
If it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2604: Yes), the round number counter 223x is incremented by 1 (S2605), and then the round effect setting process is executed (
For a detailed explanation of the round effect setting process (S2606), refer to FIG.
After the round effect setting process (S2606) is executed, a display round number command is set based on the round number counter 223x (S2607).
), and then this process ends.

Here, the details of the round effect setting process (S2606), which is one process in the big win related process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device, will be described with reference to Fig. 512. Fig. 512 is a flow chart showing the contents of the round effect setting process (S2606).

In the round performance setting process (S2606), first, the acquired information stored in the acquired ball number storage area 223n is read (S2701). Next, an expected value is calculated by adding the number of balls that can be acquired during the currently executed round to the acquired information (S270).
2). Then, based on the calculated expected value, the promotion point selection table 222h (FIG. 47
6) to determine the number of points to be awarded for the current round (S2703
Next, the mode of the performance during the round is determined based on the number of points to be awarded determined in the process of S2703 and the promotion performance selection table 222i (see FIG. 477) (S2704).
).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed in the effect mode determined in the process of S2704 (S2705). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect will be executed (S2705: Yes),
s), and the effect content to be executed is stored in the executed setting suggestion effect storage area 223k (S270
6), and then, information indicating the determined effect content is stored in the effect state storage area 223h (S2
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2705 that the setting suggestion effect is not to be executed (S2705: No), the process of S2706 is skipped, the process of S2707 described above is executed, and the process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 511, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2604: No), it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S2608). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2608: Yes), the information on the performance executed during the big win stored in the performance status storage area 223h is read (S2609), and then the information stored in the executed setting suggestion performance storage area 223k is read (S2610). Then, the period performance status at the start of the big win is read from the performance status storage area 223h (S2611), and then the display ending command corresponding to the current period performance status and the information read in the processes of S2609 to S2611 is set (S2612), the information in the executed setting suggestion performance storage area 223k is cleared (S2614), the value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2608 that the ending command has not been received (S2608: No), this process ends as it is.

In this embodiment, as described above, the content of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the jackpot is determined based on the start timing of the jackpot game and the progress of the period effect at the start of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, when the player knows that a jackpot game will be executed due to the pre-reading effect, etc., he or she can not only wait for the time until the jackpot is won, but also be interested in the timing of the period effect at which the jackpot game will start, so that the player can concentrate on playing the game until the jackpot is won.

In this embodiment, the content of the setting suggestion presentation is determined based on the start of the jackpot game and the progress of the period presentation at the start of the jackpot, but without being limited to this, the content of the setting suggestion presentation may be determined in a complex manner including the start timing of the special chart variation that wins the jackpot.

Also, instead of the start of the big win game, the content of the setting suggestion effect may be determined based on the start of a specific round and the progress of the period effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to keep the player interested in the setting suggestion effect for a longer period of time.

Next, referring to Fig. 513, the details of the stop process (S2214), which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: Fig. 507) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. Fig. 513 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop process (S2214). This stop process (S2214) is a process executed when a stop command is received from the main control device 110.

In the stop process (S2214), first, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2801). If it is determined that the value of the consecutive notice counter 223u is greater than 0 (S2801: Yes), the value of the consecutive notice counter 223u is decremented by 1 (S2802). Next, it is determined whether the decremented value of the consecutive notice counter 223u is 0 (S2803). If it is determined that the value of the consecutive notice counter 223u is 0 (S2804),
803: Yes), the consecutive notice execution flag 223t is set to OFF (S2804), and
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the value of the consecutive announcement counter 223u is not greater than 0 (S2801: No), or if it is determined in the process of S2803 that the value of the consecutive announcement counter 223u is not 0 (S2803: No),
Proceed to processing S2805.

In the process of S2805, it is determined whether the specialized mode flag 223w is on (S28
05). When it is determined that the specialized mode flag 223w is ON (S2805: Y
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2805 that the specialized mode flag 223w is not on (S2805: No), the process of S2806 is skipped and the process of S2807 is started.
Proceed to process 07.

In the process of S2807, it is determined whether the currently received stop command is a stop command indicating the end of the final change in the time-saving state (S2807). If it is determined that the currently received stop command is a stop command indicating the final change in the time-saving state (S2807: Yes), a display end command is set to indicate the end of the time-saving state (S2808). Next, the information in the acquired ball count storage area 223n is cleared (S2809), and the process proceeds to S2810.
In the process of S2807, if it is determined that the change in the special symbol this time is not the final change in the time reduction (S2807: No), the processes of S2808 and S2809 are skipped and the process of S281 is performed.
Proceed to processing of 0.

In this embodiment, when a stop command for the final time-saving fluctuation is received, the value in the acquired ball count storage area 223n is cleared. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a specific condition is met, the value in the acquired ball count storage area 223n may not be cleared, and the acquired information stored this time may be referred to at the time of the next big win game.
By increasing the number of values that can be referenced, it is possible to provide more flexibility in setting the promotion effects, thereby preventing players from becoming bored with the game.

In the process of S2810, it is determined whether the character display flag 223y is on (S281
0). If it is determined that the character display flag 223y is set to ON (S281
0: Yes), and refers to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 472) defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device to determine the effect mode (S2811). Next, a display command for showing the character corresponding to the effect mode determined in the process of S2811 is set (S2812), and the character display flag 223y is set to OFF (S2813).
Then, the stop display of the third symbol corresponding to the stop command received this time is set (S28
14), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2810, the character display flag 223
If it is determined that y is not on (S2810: No), the processes of S2811 to S2813 are skipped, the process of S2814 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 514, a boot completion process (S2216) which is one process in the command determination process (S2113: FIG. 507) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.
514 is a flowchart showing the contents of the boot completion process (S2216). This boot completion process (S2216) is a process for canceling the button operation invalid period when a boot completion command is received from the display control device 114.

In the boot completion process (S2216), first, it is determined whether the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is greater than 0 (S2901). If it is determined that the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is greater than 0 (S2901: Yes), the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is reset to 0 (S2902), a display command is set to indicate that the button operation has been enabled (S2903), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is not greater than 0 (S2901: No),
The processes of S2902 and S2903 are skipped, and the process ends.

In addition, the timing at which the button operation invalid period is cleared is not limited to this, and when a process in which a different operation period is set depending on the situation, such as a role operation process when the power is turned on, is executed, the button operation invalid period may be cleared when the role operation process and the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 are completed. In addition, the button operation invalid period is not limited to being set by a timer, but may be set using a flag or the like, and may be cleared when the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 is completed and a boot completion command is received.

Next, referring to FIG. 515, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 515 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2114). This variable display setting process (S2114)
) is a main process ( FIG. 50 ) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.
6) and in order to execute a variable performance in the third symbol display device 81,
A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S2114: FIG. 515), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3001). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S3001: No
), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, S3
On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S3002), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation performance extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is stored in the RAM 2
23 (S3003).

Next, it is determined whether the consecutive notice execution flag 223t is on or not (S3004). If it is determined that the consecutive notice execution flag 223t is not on (S3004: No), a performance mode setting process is executed (S3005), and the process proceeds to S3007.
When it is determined that the consecutive notice execution flag 223t is on (S3004: Yes), the presentation mode is determined based on the variation pattern and the consecutive notice presentation acquired in the process of S3003 (S3005).
06).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S3007). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

Next, although not shown in the figure, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After the data is shifted, S
The process proceeds to step 3008.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3008). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (i.e., is off) (S3008: No), this process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is ON (S3008: Y
es), turn off the stop type selection flag 223e (S3009), and obtain the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command from the RAM 223 (S3010). Next, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 (S3011), execute the stop type performance setting process (S3012), and proceed to the process of S3013. Details of the stop type performance setting process (S3012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 519.

In the process of S3013, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S3013). By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the stop display of the variable performance so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. After the process of S3013 is executed, this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 516, a performance mode setting process (S2114: refer to FIG. 515) is executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.
FIG. 516 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance mode setting process. This performance mode setting process (S3005) is a process for setting high-speed variable performance during time reduction or probability change, or a process for setting the performance of the SP time period.

In the presentation mode setting process (S3005), first, it is determined whether the current game state is a normal state (S3101). If it is determined that the current game state is not a normal state (S310
1: No), execute the time-saving/high-stakes effect setting process (S3102), and terminate this process.

Here, referring to FIG. 517, the time-saving/probability-changing performance setting process (S3102), which is one process in the performance mode setting process (S3005: see FIG. 516) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 517 shows the time-saving/probability-changing performance setting process (S
3102) in detail.

In the time-saving/probability-changing performance setting process (S3102), first, it is determined whether the current special chart change is the 81st spin after the game state has shifted to the time-saving state or the probability-changing state (S320
1). If it is determined that the current special chart change is not the 81st spin (S3201: No),
The corresponding presentation mode is determined (S3202), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving state or that it is the 81st spin since the transition to the probability change state (S3201: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the special chart fluctuation to be started this time is 1.5 seconds (S3203). If it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special chart fluctuation to be started this time is 1.5 seconds (S3203: Yes), the corresponding presentation mode is determined (S3204), and a display command indicating the entry into the high-speed fluctuation mode is set (S320
5), this process ends. When a display command indicating the start of this high-speed fluctuation mode is set to the display control device 113, the display screen shown in Figure 456 (a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, if it is determined that the variation time of the special chart variation to be started this time is not 1.5 seconds (S3203: No), it is determined whether the variation time is 12 seconds (S3
206). If it is determined that the number of seconds of the change is not 12 seconds (S3206: No), the above-mentioned process of S3202 is executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of seconds of the change in the special chart this time is 12 seconds (S3206: Yes), the process is terminated.
A presentation pattern consisting of four 5-second variations and one 6-second variation (totaling 12 seconds) is determined (S3207), the process of S3205 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In this embodiment, as described above, the game state transitions to a probability state or a time-saving state,
When the number of rotations in the transitioned game state reaches 81, the game enters the high-speed variation mode. However, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable if a long variation such as a big win variation is executed immediately after the performance of entering the high-speed variation mode is executed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a 12-second fluctuation is executed on the 81st spin, a high-speed fluctuation mode entry effect is executed by executing a 12-second fluctuation of 1.5 seconds x 4 times and a 6-second big win fluctuation effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that does not feel strange to the player.

In addition, when the 81st spin is a long fluctuation, it is not limited to performing the fluctuation performance by dividing it into short fluctuations as described above, but may be a special mode other than the high-speed fluctuation mode (for example, a setting suggestion mode).
Such a configuration may be used to give different benefits to the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the presentation, and the player can also be happy to receive an unexpected benefit, which can increase the player's motivation to continue playing.

In addition, when the 81st point is a long fluctuation, the high-speed fluctuation mode entry effect may not be executed. By configuring in this way, a game without a sense of incongruity can be provided to the player.

Returning to FIG. 516, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3101 that the current game state is the normal state, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice execution flag 223t provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is on (S3103). If it is determined that the continuous notice execution flag 223t is on (S3103: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3103 that the continuous notice execution flag 223t is not on (S3103: No), it is determined whether or not the period performance flag 223p is on (S3104). If it is determined that the period performance flag 223p is on (S3104: Yes), a period performance setting process is executed (S3105), the corresponding performance mode is determined (S3106), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the period performance flag 22
If it is determined that 3p is not on (S3104: No), the above-mentioned process of S3106 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 518, a period performance setting process (S310) which is one process in the performance mode setting process (S3005: refer to FIG. 516) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.
5) will be described. FIG. 518 is a flowchart showing the contents of the period performance setting process (S3105). In this period performance setting process (S3105), a process for setting the execution of the setting suggestion performance is executed based on the number of reaches executed during the SP time period and the number of changes of the special pattern.

In the period performance setting process (S3105), first, it is determined whether the variation to be executed this time is a big win variation (S3301). If it is determined that the special pattern variation to be executed this time is a big win variation (S3301: Yes), a performance mode for indicating a big win is determined (S3302: Yes).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the fluctuation to be executed this time is not a big win fluctuation (S3301: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern this time is a reach or not based on the acquired fluctuation pattern (S3302). Next, S33
It is determined whether the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of 02 is a reach fluctuation (S3303).
If it is determined that the reach has changed (S3303: Yes), the value indicating the number of reaches in the mission information storage area 223q is updated (S3304).

Next, it is determined whether the updated number of reach counts is the same as the number of times set in the mission information storage area 223q (S3305). If it is determined that the updated number of reach counts is the same as the set number of times (S3305: Yes), the presentation mode is determined by referring to the setting suggestion presentation selection table 222c (S3306). Next, a display command is set to indicate the determined presentation mode (S3307), and the process proceeds to S3308. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3305 that the number of reach counts and the set number of times are not the same value (S3305),
: No), the processes of S3306 and S3307 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3308.

Next, the value indicating the number of changes in the mission information storage area 223q is updated (S3308
Then, it is determined whether the updated number of times of change is the same as the set number of times (S3309). If it is determined that the updated number of times of change is the same as the set number of times (S3309: Yes),
The presentation mode is determined by referring to the setting suggestion presentation selection table 222c (S3310), a display command for indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S3311), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3309 that the change count and the set count are not the same value (S3309: No), this process ends as it is.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the number of times the special symbols change during the SP time period and the number of times the special symbols reach the target. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while hoping that more changes will be executed during the SP time period, which can increase the player's motivation to play.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect executed during the SP time effect period may be executed based on the sum of the variable times executed during the SP time effect period. By configuring in this way, even if a special drawing with a long variable time is executed and the result of the drawing is a miss, it is possible to have hope for future games.

Also, the results of the executed effects may be stored as points, and the player may decide whether or not to use the stored points, and a highly reliable setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the points. In this way, the freedom of play can be improved by allowing the player to decide when to view the setting suggestion effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 519, a stop type presentation setting process (S2114: refer to FIG. 515) which is one process in the variable display setting process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.
FIG. 519 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type effect setting process (S3012). This stop type effect setting process (S3012) is a process for executing a specific setting suggestion effect when the stop type of the special chart change during the period effect is out of reach.

When the stop type performance setting process (S3012) is executed, first, the voice lamp control device 11
It is determined whether the period performance flag 223p provided in the RAM 223 of No. 3 is set to ON, that is, whether the period performance is currently in progress (S3401).
If it is determined that the switch is not on (S3401: No), the process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3401 that the period performance in progress flag 223p is on (S3401: Yes), the processing proceeds to S3402.

In the process of S3402, it is determined whether the stop type of the special chart change being executed this time is a reach miss or not (S3402). If it is determined that the stop type of the special chart change is not a reach miss (S3402: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type of the special chart change is a reach miss (S3402: Yes), the character display flag 22
3y is set to ON (S3403), and this process ends.

Next, referring to Fig. 520, the details of the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (S2107), which is one process in the main processing (see Fig. 506) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. Fig. 520 is a flow chart showing the detailed contents of the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring and performance processing (S2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is judged, and based on the pressing, the execution of a preview performance or the like is set.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), first, it is determined whether the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is greater than 0, that is, whether an invalid period for button operation is set (
If it is determined that the value of the operation invalidation timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3501),
01: Yes), since the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid, this process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the operation invalidation timer is not greater than 0, i.e., it is not the operation invalidation period of the frame button 22 (S3501: No), it is determined whether pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3502).
3502: No), and then ends this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3502 that the frame button 22 is pressed (S
If it is determined that a preview performance is being performed (S3503: Yes), a preview display command for display indicating the preview performance determined by lottery is set in the display control device 114 (S3504), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the preview performance is not being performed (S
3503: No), add 1 to the background mode and set it in the background mode storage area 223v (
S3505), and a display switching command to switch to the variable pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the processing of S3505 is set to the display control device 114 (S3506), and this processing ends.

In addition, a counter or the like may be provided to store the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the total number of times. Also, when the long press effect of the frame button 22 is executed, the time that the player long presses the frame button 22 may be measured,
The setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the total time. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to participate in the effect of pressing the frame button 22.
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Next, referring to Fig. 521, the details of the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), which is one process in the main process (see Fig. 506) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. Fig. 521 is a flow chart showing the details of the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111). In this elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), a process for setting the current performance period is executed based on the current time information and the elapsed time since the power was turned on.

In the elapsed time confirmation process (S2111), first, the current time information measured by the timer 292 (see FIG. 462) is read (S3601), and then the elapsed time T from power-on is calculated (S3602). Then, based on the elapsed time T calculated in the process of S3602, the current effect period is identified from the effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 471) (
S3603).

Next, in the process of S3603, it is determined whether the effect period specified from the effect switching table 222b is a SP time period (S3604). If it is determined that the specified effect period is a SP time period (S3604: Yes), it is determined whether the period effect flag 223p is on, that is, whether the SP time period has already been set (S3605). If it is determined that the period effect flag 223p is on (S3605: Yes), there is no need to set the SP time period, so this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S3605, when it is determined that the period effect flag 223p is not on (S3605: No), the period effect flag 223p is set to on (S360
6), a back image change command for indicating that the SP time period has been entered is set in the display control device 114 (S3607), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3604 that the specified performance period is not the SP time period (S3604: No),
), and it is determined whether the specialized mode flag 223w is ON (S3608).

In the process of S3608, if it is determined that the specialized mode flag 223w is on (S3608: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the specialized mode flag 223w is not on (S3608: No), this process is terminated.
), it is determined whether the period effect flag 223p is on, i.e., whether the end of the SP time period is currently set (S3609).
That is, if it is determined that the end of the SP time period has not been set (S3609: Yes),
If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3610: Yes), a special mode setting process (S3611) is executed.
This process ends. The specialized mode setting process (S3611) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S3610, if it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S
3610: No), the period effect flag 223p is set to OFF (S3612), and then it is determined whether the current game state is in a high probability mode (S3613). If it is determined that the current game state is in a high probability mode (S3613: Yes), a performance mode suggesting a setting value (see FIG. 454) is determined by lottery (S3616), and the process proceeds to S3615. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3613 that the current game state is not in a high probability mode (S3614), the setting suggestion performance selection table 222 provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is selected by lottery (S3615).
The process then goes to S3615.
In processing of 15, a display command corresponding to the presentation mode determined in processing of S3614 or S3616 is set (S3615), a command for displaying the rear image is set (S3617), and processing proceeds to S3618.

In this embodiment, when the special chart is not changing and the game state is in a special probability state at the end of the SP time period, a setting suggestion effect is executed that is more reliable than when the game state is not in a special probability state at the end of the SP time period.
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a new gameplay in which the SP time period ends in a probability variation state and the player plays the game while hoping to see a highly reliable setting suggestion performance.
This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is displayed at the end of the SP time period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the SP time period. By configuring in this way, a player who is thinking of stopping playing before the start of the SP time period can continue playing until the start of the SP time period,
This makes it possible to give the player a desire to continue playing until he sees the setting suggestion performance.

As described above, the configuration is such that a highly reliable setting suggestion display is executed based on the game state at the end of the SP time period, but without being limited to this, the configuration may also be such that a highly reliable setting suggestion display is executed at the end of the SP time period based on the game results during the currently executed SP time period.

When configured in this way, it is advisable to determine whether the game state has transitioned multiple times during the current SP time period, and based on the result, a highly reliable setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, if the game state has transitioned twice during the current SP time period (e.g., from normal state to time-saving state and then to special state), a highly reliable suggestion effect is executed compared to when the game state has transitioned once or when there has been no transition in the game state. By configuring in this way, the player can win as many jackpots as possible during the SP time period,
Since the player plays the game while hoping for more transitions in the game state, he or she can enthusiastically participate in the game during the SP time period.

On the other hand, in the process of S3609, if it is determined that the period performance flag 223p is not on (S3609: No), or after the process of S3617 described above is executed, next,
The remaining time until the SP time period is calculated (S3618). Then, information indicating the remaining time until the SP time period calculated in the process of S3618 is stored in the time information storage area 223r (
S3619) and terminate this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 522, a special mode setting process (S3111: see FIG. 521) is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.
FIG. 522 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special mode setting process (S3610). This special mode setting process (S3610) is a process executed when the special symbol is fluctuating at the end timing of the SP time period, and is a process for setting a mode in which the setting suggestion performance is likely to be executed during the special symbol fluctuating period after the end of the SP time period.

In the special mode setting process (S3610), the remaining variable time of the special symbol being executed is set to 5.
If it is determined that the remaining time of the special symbol being executed is shorter than 5 seconds (S3701: No), the special mode effect cannot be set in the remaining time of the special symbol being executed, so this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time of the special symbol being executed is longer than 5 seconds (S37
01: Yes), and sets a display command to indicate that the specialized mode has been entered (S3702).
The specialized mode flag 223w is set to ON (S3703), and the process proceeds to S3704.

In the process of S3704, the number of suggested effects to be executed during the special mode is determined by referring to the effect execution number selection table 222f (see FIG. 474) provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3704). Next, a display command for adding the execution of a suggested effect to the currently executed special chart change effect is set (S3705), and the type of the suggested effect to be executed during the current special mode is stored in the executed setting effect storage area 223k (S350).
6) End this process.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the special symbol variable performance is being executed so as to straddle the end timing of the SP time period, the performance to be executed can be switched based on the length of the remaining variable period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a performance that does not feel strange, such as the end performance of the SP time period being suddenly switched.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether the special symbol is changing at the end of the SP time period, and whether or not to execute the special mode presentation is determined according to the remaining period, but it is not limited to this, and it may be determined whether or not to execute across the end of the SP time period when the special symbol starts to change, and the special mode may be set at the start of the change based on the result of the determination. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set more time as the special mode, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with a more diverse presentation style.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 523 to Fig. 537. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 523. Fig. 523 is a flow chart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing an initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following procedure.
When the power is turned on to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released,
The PU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" by its hardware configuration, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240.
The OM controller 234b receives the address "0000H" from the bus line 240.
When it is detected that the program is
The boot program stored in the character RO1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.
It fetches the instruction code received from M234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character R
When the OM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c.
31 consumes a lot of waiting time from when it designates the address "0000H" to when it receives the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time it takes to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234.
Since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the NOR type ROM.
The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the MPU 234d can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H".
The main processing can be started in a short time in U231. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls can be executed for the third pattern display device 81.

Now, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG.
6 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed during main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. Therefore,
This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, thereby reducing manufacturing costs and suppressing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are directly read and processed by the DRA.
The program transfer section 233 executes a process of transferring the program data to a program storage area 233a and a data table storage area 233b provided in a work RAM 233 constituted by M and storing the program data therein.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

In addition, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102.
By setting the predetermined address, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
Instead of reading out the control program from the D-type flash memory 234a and fetching instructions, the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a is read out and instructions are fetched to execute various processes.
Since M233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed.
Even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured from the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing according to those instructions.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the N
The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the AND-type flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing (see S6002 in FIG. 523) to be executed after completion of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 523) (S6105), and a completion command to indicate completion of the boot processing is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 (S6106), completing execution of the boot program and terminating this boot processing.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow readout speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM composed of DRAM which has a fast readout speed and perform various controls, so that high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114 and diversified and complex presentations can be easily executed using the auxiliary presentation unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions starting from the instruction to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, it becomes possible to start up MPU 231 in a short time, and therefore it is possible to suppress the increase in cost of character ROM 234 that accompanies the shortening of the time.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 524, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes the first program storage area 234d.
1, but contains all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in
However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 may be a part of the boot program that executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer only a predetermined amount of control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6106 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated a plurality of times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then execute the processes of S6103 to S6106.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system is released from a reset is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but the entire boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6106 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This makes it unnecessary to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so the boot program can be stored in the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a.
Since the number of times the program is transferred to the MPU 231 is reduced, the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary performance unit in the MPU 231, which is enabled after the boot process, can be started more quickly.

Returning now to the explanation of FIG. 523, when the boot process is completed, the work RAM 23
The MPU 231 executes an initial setting process in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the MPU 231 (S6002).
It also performs various settings for registers in the MPU 231 and for I/O devices. It also performs settings for the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, and the like.
The memory of M236 is cleared. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of power-on main image area 235a which is the transfer destination. Image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction.

When the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231 to indicate the end of the transfer.
By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction, MPU 231 may write transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer to a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. Then, MPU 231 may read information from this register or the partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detect the writing of the transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes:
The instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on varying image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on varying image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on varying image area 235b is then held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the transfer setting process (FIG. 535 (
In step a), the image controller 23 transfers all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
7, a resident image transfer setting process is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 535A).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 525(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 525(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) (not shown) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 525(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 thirdly.
By displaying the image on the pattern display device 81, the remaining image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 80.
235, players and hall staff can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Meanwhile, players and the like can recognize that some kind of initialization process is being carried out while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and therefore can easily transfer the remaining image data to the resident video RAM 235.
Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
You can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that the device may be stopped while the data is being transferred to the computer.

In addition, during operation checks at factories during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the character ROM 2
By using the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the memory 34, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after power is turned on, the power-on variable image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a ball enters the special ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image is displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the player can confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance.

As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the power-on main image. However, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the transfer takes time, so the time for which the power-on main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on is also long. However, in this pachinko machine 10
Since a simple change effect can be produced using the power-on change image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to Fig. 525(a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Fig. 525(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interruption process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in sequence in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6
The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to Fig. 525 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Fig. 525 (b) is a flow chart showing the V interruption process. In this V interruption process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is specified, and the drawing list of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt process is started by detecting a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237. The V interrupt signal is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed in the image controller 237, and is output to the MPU 231.
Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds, which is the time when drawing process for one frame of image is completed.
In this case, a drawing instruction for the next image is not received before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interruption process will be described, and then each process will be described in detail with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 525(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third symbol display device 81 instead of a power-on image, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.
) to run the command.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. In addition, if a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
Set to.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is performed, and therefore it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the start of the variable performance is determined in the main control device 110, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 526 to 531.

In the display setting process (S6303), the third display data is set based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like.
The content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 81 is specifically specified. Also, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is stored in the display data table buffer 2.
33d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figs. 532 to 534.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, based on the content of the next frame of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the resident video RA is notified to the image controller 237.
Image data to be resident in the M235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 23
5 to a predetermined area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and also when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figs. 535 and 536.

Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the task process (S63
The CPU 231 generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 486 from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in step S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237.
Then, in accordance with the drawing list, image drawing processing is executed (S6306). Note that details of the drawing processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S63
07). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big win A,
A stop type table corresponding to a jackpot B, a jackpot C, a jackpot D, a jackpot E, a reach for a miss before or after, a reach other than a miss before or after, or a complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so the power-on image is displayed as the third pattern display device 81.
In order to display the command, a simplified command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then a simplified display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to Fig. 526 to Fig. 531, a description will be given of details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Fig. 526 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in Fig. 526, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6303) to notify the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state.
402), and then analyzes the types of all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes),
), executes variable pattern command processing (S6405), and returns to processing of S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described with reference to Fig. 527 (a). Fig. 527 (a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command process (S6405) executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation performance pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control device 110 always judges the start of the variation at least several seconds apart, so it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern having a long variable time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, when a variable performance having a shorter variable time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110,
While the third pattern display device 81 was displaying a variable performance according to the set variable display data table, the next display variable pattern command would be received from the main control device 110, and another variable display would suddenly start, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality,
Even if the main control device 110 has instructed a variable performance having a longer variable time than the set display data table, as described later, the display data table buffer 2
After the varying presentation in accordance with 33d has ended, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed until the next display pattern command is received from the main control device 110, so that the player can continue to watch the variation of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set it in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the change time is set in the clock counter 233h (
S6503), and initialize the pointer 233f to 0 (S6504).Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, the display setting process goes to S650.
While updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and the third pattern display device 8
At the same time as specifying the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in S6501, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502, and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance in the character R.
The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the OM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

In addition, in the display setting process, the time of the variable performance defined in the variable display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503,
When it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table is to end, the main control device 11
The settings of the stop display are controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from 0 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning now to the description of FIG. 526, if it is determined in the process of S6404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and S6
Return to the process of 401.

The details of the stop type command process (S6407) will now be described with reference to Fig. 527(b), which is a flowchart showing the stop type command process.
This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of big win A to E, reach miss, and complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S6601), and the stop type table and the V interrupt process (FIG. 5
25 (b)) is executed, the value of the stop type counter is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and the stop symbol after the variable performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S6602
).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command judgment processing.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
As the type information for identifying the symbol, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described.
) After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S6603,
The symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process is added to the identified stop symbol to identify the third symbol to be actually displayed.
The address where the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

In addition, since the main control device 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, in reality,
Even if the special symbol is a miss, the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a special symbol jackpot, which may lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 has hit a special symbol jackpot, thereby lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss as in this embodiment, if the special symbol is a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 will hit a special symbol jackpot even if the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol that is a complete miss, which makes the player happy.

Returning to FIG. 526, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a display opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409).
), and return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to Fig. 528(a). Fig. 528(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

Returning to FIG. 526, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and if there is a display round number command (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411).
Then, return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to Fig. 528(b). Fig. 528(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command process, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801).
The contents are cleared by writing null data to 33e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the performance time is read from the timing counter 2
33h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), the number of rounds command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 526, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for display (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S641
3) Return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to Fig. 529. Fig. 529 is a flow chart showing the ending command process. This ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904).
Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 526, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fluctuation stop command among the unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a display fluctuation stop command (S6414: Yes), fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and S6
Return to the process of 401.

Here, the fluctuation stop command process (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 530(a). Fig. 530(a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command process.
This fluctuation stop command processing executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This display fluctuation stop command is a display stop command (normal stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2114 in FIG. 515), that is, at the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern of each special pattern in the main control device 110 (the timing when the main control device 110 sets the stop command).
14) are set.

In the fluctuation stop command process, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S69
31). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6932).

Next, based on the variable stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, the time data representing the performance time is calculated by the time counter 233h.
(S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934).
The demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S
6935), terminates the fluctuation stop command processing, and returns to the command judgment processing.

Returning to FIG. 526, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a display notification command (S6416),
: Yes), executes notification command processing (S6417), and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the notification command process (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 530(b). Fig. 530(b) is a flowchart showing the notification command process. This notification command process executes a process corresponding to a notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command is one of various notification commands that are set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal conditions set by the main control device 110.
This is a process that is executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command that has been output to the display control device 114 .

In the notification command process, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, the time data representing the performance time is read from the timing counter 23
3h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this embodiment, the display control device 114 is configured to distinguish only the display commands indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to first receive related commands other than display commands, such as light emission commands, voice output commands, and character drive commands, and output the related commands to the corresponding control device with the addition of information indicating the data content (display mode) set by the processing of the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 526, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a rear image change command (S6419),
418: Yes), executes a rear image change command process (S6419), and returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to Fig. 531. Fig. 531 is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image accompanying the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001).
Of the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each image, the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to on, and the bits corresponding to the other rear image types are set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, the background image change flag 2 set in the process of S7001 is
When it is detected that the flag 33w is turned on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the processing of S7002.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, and further, the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

In addition, since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds,
Two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 0 milliseconds, and therefore when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area; however, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command.
In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change of the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning now to the description of Fig. 526, if it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command (S6420: Y
es), executes error command processing (S6421), and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the error command process (S6421) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 531 (b). Fig. 531 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7102), the error command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command discrimination process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by processing S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by processing S7102, and a processing is performed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the hall staff can correctly understand the occurrence of the error.

Returning now to the description of Fig. 526, if it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, S6401 to S6422 are repeated until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area.
The process of S6402 is repeatedly executed, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process is terminated.

In addition, the simple command judgment process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 525(b)) is also processed similarly to the command judgment process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 527(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 527(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to the commands.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 527 (a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, a display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to Fig. 532 to Fig. 534, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 532 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in Fig. 532, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, i.e., if it is off (S7201: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped and the process moves to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag off (S7202), the processes of S7203 to S7204 are carried out.
Execute the processing corresponding to the new command.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203
If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 533. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to ON on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S73
01).

In the task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning now to the explanation of FIG. 532, after the warning image setting process (S7204) or
If it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, the pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to Fig. 534. Fig. 534 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process is executed by the display data table buffer 233.
This is processing for updating a pointer 233f that designates an address for obtaining transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401).
That is, the pointer 233f is updated so that, in principle, it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed.
Start information is written at address "0H", and the entity of each data is address "0
If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process.
In turn, actual data can be read out from each data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S74
02). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403). If it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the time counter 23 counts up the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.
3h (S7404), and initialize the pointer 233f by setting it to 1 (S7405).
This process is terminated and the display setting process is returned to. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 8
1, a demo presentation can be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S74
03: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.
If a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in 33d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (
S7402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning now to Fig. 532, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image, the type of sprites (display objects) constituting the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the decrement is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: No), the process returns to the V interrupt process.
208: Yes), which means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stationary display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on or not (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (
S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the final display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag, which indicates that the final display performance is in progress in the ON state, is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is stored in the work RAM as it is.
The process then copies the result to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided at 233 (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display performance of the stopped pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table. In the task process (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is specified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process is added to the specified stop pattern to specify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes),
s), and determine whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display performance, so after a certain time has passed since the end of the final display performance, a process is performed to display the demo performance on the third symbol display device 81.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag indicating that the demo performance is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

This makes it possible to set the drawing content so that if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes),
After the final display effect is finished, the demo effect is performed, and since this means that the demo effect has ended, the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process.
As described above, various settings are made by the pointer update process executed during the interrupt processing so that the demo performance will start again, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 525(b)), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the performance time of the power-on variable image has ended, a process is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time.

Next, with reference to Fig. 535 and Fig. 536, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Fig. 535(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (
S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Y
es), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the character ROM 2
Since the image data has not been transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to image controller 237 for transferring image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 535(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7501, the simple image display flag 233c is not on.
If it is off (S7501: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the V
Return to the interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from character ROM 234 is to normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to Fig. 535(b), a description will be given of the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 535(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not yet been transferred has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602).
In the process of S7602, after issuing an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603.
Also, if the result of the processing in S7601 indicates that a transfer instruction for the untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process also proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (
S7603: No), and sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list.
The start and end addresses of H.234, and the destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM
The image controller 23 includes the start address of the transfer destination (an area in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident image data to be transferred is to be stored).
Based on this transfer data information, CPU 237 executes image transfer processing, reads out image data designated in the transfer processing from character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to a designated address in resident video RAM 235 while resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, when the transfer is completed, CPU 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231.

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603
525B), the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 525B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 525B) are completed.
Since the command determination process (see Figs. 526 to 531) and the display setting process (see Figs. 532 to 534) are executed instead of the normal image transfer process (see Fig. 309), the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see Fig. 536) (see S7501: No in Fig. 535(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all of the resident video R images, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variable image, which have already been transferred in the main process.
All resident target image data that should be resident in the AM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it is held without being overwritten while the power is on.
The image data transferred to the video RAM 35 is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 236.
After the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be read from the NAND flash memory 234, which has a slow read speed, during image drawing.
Since there is no need to read out corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as a, the time required for such reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third patterns, character patterns, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display has been determined by the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, with reference to Fig. 536, a description will be given of a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 536 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null.
If the data is received (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7705), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7705: Yes),
Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after an instruction to transfer image data has been set for the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, if the result of the process of S7705 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7705: No),
), and proceed to processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the background image change flag 233w is on or not (S7709). Then, if the background image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), image data to be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed. After the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710),
Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). This determination in the process of S7713 is made by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the process of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.
Since there is no need to transfer the image data to the AM 236, the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the display control device 114
This reduces the processing load on each unit and reduces the traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the process of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred should be stored).
The transfer data information includes the start address of the image data. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715).
This normal transfer setting process is then terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "OFF".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a big win stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance is transferred to the character RO without delay.
In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred to the character ROM 236 without delay.
234 to a normal video RAM 236.

In this embodiment, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110,
As the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d,
The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 2.
Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred in accordance with the transfer data information written in the area pointed to by pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

Here, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specified address so that image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the transfer data table, a character RO is
The transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the M234 to the normal video RAM 236. This allows the transfer of the image data to be managed for each sprite, and
Since the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be controlled on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in the load imposed by the transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

Next, with reference to Fig. 537, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 537 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates,
The drawing list (FIG. 486) is generated from the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (S6305), including the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information.
In other words, in the process of S7801, the task process (S6304)
From the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in (a) above, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite, and the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the image for one frame in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest behind the sprite that should be placed furthest in the foreground, and detailed drawing information (
A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as the transfer data information (detailed information). Also, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the image storage area 2 of the normal video RAM 236
Since the sub-area of 36a is fixed, the MPU 231 determines the sub-area according to the sprite type as follows:
The type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and this information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer flag 233
The drawing target buffer information specified by j is sent to the image controller (S780
2). In this case, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is expanded, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing that the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c is expanded.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and overwrites them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

Also, if the drawing list contains transfer data information,
The start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RA
M236), and the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and written to the buffer RAM
After temporarily storing the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to an area of the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the transfer destination top address when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image is drawn in accordance with the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with a drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer.
In addition, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the process of S7802, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S
7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., if the value was "0", it is updated to "
If the drawing list is transmitted, the drawing target buffer is set to "0" if the drawing list is transmitted.
The frame buffer 236c is alternately set to the frame buffer 236d.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.
This is performed every time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 525(b)) executed by 231 is executed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer that develops one frame of image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer that develops one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read out are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, respectively, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

<Regarding the Second Embodiment>
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 538 to Fig. 547. The pachinko machine 10 in this second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that when a look-ahead performance is executed as a performance during a jackpot game, the content of the performance executed is changed based on the degree of overlap between the look-ahead performance period and the SP time period, but is otherwise the same. Note that the same content as the first embodiment described above is as follows:
A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when setting the prohibition period of the pre-reading effect executed as part of the special chart variation effect, the execution period of the pre-reading effect that can be executed is calculated, and if the calculation result overlaps with the SP time period, the execution of the pre-reading effect is prohibited. In contrast, in the second embodiment, a prohibition period is also set for the pre-reading effect executed during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to prevent the pre-reading effect executed during the jackpot game from overlapping with the SP time period and executing an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, when the look-ahead performance period and the SP time period overlap, the presentation mode of the look-ahead performance is changed to prevent a performance that is difficult for the player to understand from being executed.

<About the content of the performance in the second embodiment>
First, with reference to Fig. 538 to Fig. 540, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in this second embodiment will be described. Fig. 538(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen at the time when a lucky effect, which is one of the bonus effects executed during a big win game, is started. As shown in Fig. 538(a), in this embodiment,
When the first round of the jackpot game (first round) starts, the words "Lucky performance lottery starts" are displayed. This lucky performance is a bonus performance that is executed during the jackpot game, and is a performance to inform the player whether or not a performance (reserved consecutive performance) for notifying the player that there is a special reserved symbol (winning reserved symbol) that will win the jackpot among the reserved special symbols that have already been acquired will be executed.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, even if the lucky effect lottery is won, depending on the game situation after the big win game ends (the setting situation of the SP time period), the reserved consecutive effect may not be executed. In such a case, the lucky effect is configured to be set to an effect mode indicating that an effect other than the reserved consecutive effect (alternative effect) will be executed.

FIG. 538(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a presentation mode for notifying a player that a reserved consecutive presentation will be executed is set as a presentation mode of the lucky presentation. As shown in FIG. 538(b), when the reserved consecutive presentation is executed, the character 81
The effect of holding up a placard 1811 with the word "retained" written on it is executed. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easily understandable manner that he or she will win another jackpot after the jackpot game ends.

In the diagram shown in Fig. 538(b), the lucky effect is started during the first round play period, and the result of the lucky effect is displayed during that round play period, but this is not limited to this, and the lucky effect may be started at any timing during the big win game, or the result of the lucky effect may be displayed in a round different from the round in which the lucky effect was started. Furthermore, in this case, the round in which the lucky effect is likely to be started may be configured to differ depending on a setting value, or may be configured to differ based on the result of the lucky effect.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play while making him/her anticipate when the lucky effect will be executed. Also, it may be configured to be possible to execute an effect during a big win game in which the lucky effect is not executed.

Next, the content of the reserved consecutive performance will be described with reference to Fig. 539 (a). In this embodiment, the reserved consecutive performance starts from the ending period of the big win game, and the reserved consecutive performance is executed for the period until the big win is won by the special pattern lottery after the end of the big win game. And, as the performance mode of the reserved consecutive performance, a performance mode in which many fish (fish schools) move from right to left on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is set.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 539 (a), the words "Entering the Fish Festival" are displayed on the ending screen of a jackpot game, indicating that a consecutive hold effect will be executed, and an image of a school of fish waiting is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

And, in the special pattern change screen during the Fish Festival, as shown in FIG. 539(b),
After an effect in which a school of fish moves from right to left is executed, the third symbol is displayed in a stopped display mode (777) indicating a big win.

In this way, by executing the reserved consecutive performance during the big win game,
Since it is possible to inform the player that a big win game will be executed (a series of reserved games) during the previous big win game period, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the look-ahead performance period during which the consecutive pending performance is executed overlaps with the SP time period, and the overlapping period is less than a predetermined period (2 seconds), the performance mode of the consecutive pending performance is switched from the normal performance mode (see Figure 539 (b)) to the shortened performance mode and executed.

FIG. 540 is a display screen for showing the shortened performance mode of the reserved consecutive performance. As shown in FIG. 540, when the shortened performance mode is set, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a performance in which a school of fish moves from right to left on the display screen is executed, and then a performance in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped in a stopped display mode indicating a big win is executed. In other words, when the timing at which the SP time period is set and the reserved consecutive performance period overlap slightly, the timing at which the performance result of the reserved consecutive performance is shown is configured to be before (2 seconds before) the timing at which the SP time period is set. This makes it easier to execute the reserved consecutive performance without overlapping with the SP time period.

<Electrical Configuration in the Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 541 to 543. First, the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to Fig. 541(a). Fig. 541(a) shows the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the contents of M222.

As shown in FIG. 541(a), in the second embodiment, compared to the first embodiment described above,
The difference is that a pre-reading restriction period table 222aa and an alternative performance selection table 222ab have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The look-ahead restriction period table 222aa is a data table to be referenced when calculating the presentation period of the consecutive reserved performance executed during a jackpot game, and is referenced when calculating the presentation period when it is determined that an opportunity to execute the consecutive reserved performance has been established in the lottery for the lucky performance.

In this embodiment, the maximum time used for one jackpot game is calculated based on the number of rounds played during the jackpot game and the maximum time (30 seconds) that can be spent on one round game as the game period of the jackpot game, and the reserved consecutive performance period is calculated taking into account the maximum time. Then, it is determined whether or not the SP time period is set within the maximum time, and if it is determined that it is not set, the reserved consecutive performance is executed. By configuring in this way, no matter how the game is played during the jackpot game, the SP time period and the reserved consecutive performance period do not overlap, so that it is possible to prevent the execution of a performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which the maximum time of a jackpot game is compared with the SP time period, but this is not limiting, and a correction process may be executed to correct the maximum time of a jackpot game according to the progress of the jackpot game. In this case, when a new round of play is executed in a jackpot game, the presentation period of the reserved consecutive presentation can be corrected based on the remaining number of rounds of play and the maximum time (30 seconds) that can be spent on each round of play. By configuring in this way, when one round of play ends in less than 30 seconds, i.e.,
Since the maximum time of the big win game can be variably calculated in response to the establishment of the end condition of the round game by making nine balls enter the specific winning port 65a before the lapse of 30 seconds, it is possible to easily execute the consecutive reserved performance.

Furthermore, in this case, at the start timing of the jackpot game, the SP time period and the reserved consecutive performance period are in an overlapping state, and there is a possibility that the SP time period and the reserved consecutive performance period will transition so as not to overlap depending on the progress of the jackpot game. When such a situation occurs, it is preferable to configure the reserved consecutive performance with a benefit that is more advantageous to the player than when it is determined that the reserved consecutive performance can be executed at the start timing of the jackpot game, and for example, it is preferable to configure it so that in addition to the reserved consecutive performance, a setting suggestion performance for suggesting a setting value is added as a benefit. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide a condition notification means for notifying a player during the jackpot game of a game condition for transitioning from a state in which the SP time period and the reserved consecutive performance period overlap to a state in which they do not overlap. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play in order to obtain various benefits and to achieve the game condition notified by the condition notification means.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured based on the technical idea of eliminating the overlapping relationship with the SP time period by speeding up the reserved consecutive performance period. However, different from this, for example, the configuration may be based on the technical idea of delaying the start period of the reserved consecutive performance so that the reserved consecutive performance is executed after the SP time period ends. For example, a specific timing of the big win game (
In the case where the holding consecutive performance is executed from the ending period, when the first game that advances the jackpot game being executed quickly is executed, the execution timing of the holding consecutive performance is S
When a second game is executed which overlaps with the P time period and progresses the jackpot game slower than the first game, if it is determined that the timing of execution of the reserved consecutive performance does not overlap with the SP time period, a guidance mode may be displayed to encourage the player to play the second game (for example, a game in which balls are not fired).

Here, the contents of the pre-reading restriction period table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 542. FIG. 542 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the pre-reading restriction period table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 542, the pre-reading restriction period table 222aa includes the pre-reading performance (
The position of the special reserved target (reserved consecutive performance), the number of jackpots during the pre-reading performance period,
The regulated period (seconds) is specified based on the above.

Specifically, when the reserved number of effects is "1", that is, when a pre-reading effect (reserved consecutive effects) is executed, which indicates that a jackpot will be won in the first special symbol lottery executed after the end of a jackpot game, the maximum period for one jackpot game and the maximum period for one special symbol variation are added together to set the regulated period to "440 seconds". If the SP time period is not set within this regulated period, even if a pre-reading effect is executed, the SP time period is not set during the pre-reading effect period, so that an easy-to-understand effect can be provided to the player.

In the following, if the reserved number for performance is "2" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the restricted period is "880 seconds", if the reserved number for performance is "3" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the restricted period is "900 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the restricted period is "1250 seconds", if the reserved number for performance is "4" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the restricted period is "920 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "2",
If the regulated period is set to "1270 seconds" and the number of jackpots within that period is "3",
The regulated period is set to "1620 seconds."

In addition, if the performance target reserve is "5" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the restriction period is "940 seconds", and if the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the restriction period is "12
If the number of big wins during the period is "3", the regulated period is "16
If the number of jackpots in a period is "4", the regulated period is "19
If the number of reserved prizes is "6" and the number of big wins within the period is "1",
If the restricted period is "960 seconds" and the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the restricted period is specified as "1310 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "3", the restricted period is specified as "1660 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the restricted period is specified as "2010 seconds", and if the number of jackpots within the period is "5", the restricted period is specified as "2360 seconds".

If the reserved number for the performance is "7" and the number of jackpots during the period is "1", the restricted period is "
If the number of jackpots within the period is "3", the restricted period is stipulated as "1680 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the restricted period is stipulated as "2030 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "5", the restricted period is stipulated as "2380 seconds", and if the number of jackpots within the period is "6", the restricted period is stipulated as "2730 seconds". If the reserved effect is "8" and the number of jackpots within the period is "1", the restricted period is set to "1000 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "2", the restricted period is set to "1350 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "3", the restricted period is set to "1700 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "4", the restricted period is set to "2050 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "5", the restricted period is set to "2400 seconds", if the number of jackpots within the period is "6", the restricted period is set to "2750 seconds", and if the number of jackpots within the period is "7", the restricted period is set to "3000 seconds".

By configuring in this manner, when the consecutive hold performance is configured to be executable for a plurality of jackpot games as a look-ahead performance (consecutive hold performance) executed during a jackpot game, the consecutive hold performance can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by determining in advance whether or not the SP time period is set until the end of the consecutive hold performance.

The alternative performance selection table 222ab is a data table which is referenced when selecting the performance mode of the lucky performance when it is determined that the trigger for executing the consecutive hold performance has been met in the lucky performance and the execution of the consecutive hold performance is prohibited, and when selecting the performance mode of the alternative performance to be executed instead of the consecutive hold performance.

Here, with reference to FIG. 543, the alternative performance selection table 222ab will be described in detail.
FIG. 543 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the alternative performance selection table 222ab.
As shown in Fig. 543, the alternative performance selection table 222ab specifies different performance modes corresponding to the number of jackpot wins (number of jackpots within the period) that can occur within the target period of the look-ahead performance (lucky performance), the length of the overlapping period between the look-ahead performance period and the SP time period, and the acquired value of the performance counter 223g. Note that the various performance modes specified in the alternative performance selection table 222ab are executable performance modes, and are configured to execute the determined performance mode as an alternative performance mode when the execution conditions for the determined performance mode are met.

More specifically, when the number of jackpots (number of jackpots within a period) is "1 to 3" and the overlap period is "2 to 10 seconds", the range of the acquired effect counter 223g is "0 to 69" for "overlap mode", "70 to 89" for "setting suggestion", and "90 to 99" for "setting suggestion".
If "no effect" is specified and the overlap period is "10 to 30 seconds", the obtained effect counter 2
In the case where the range of the effect counter 223g is set to "0 to 69", "no effect" is set to "70 to 89", and "overlap mode" is set to "90 to 99", and the overlap period is "30 seconds or more", the range of the acquired effect counter 223g is set to "0 to 89", "no effect" is set to "
"Forced hold consecutive" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

In addition, the number of jackpots (number of jackpots within a period) is "4~", and the overlapping period is "2~10
In the case of "seconds", the range of the acquired performance counter 223g is "0 to 69" for "overlap mode", "70 to 89" for "setting suggestion", and "90 to 99" for "forced hold consecutive".
is specified, and if the overlap period is "10~", the range of the acquired effect counter 223g is "
A "forced hold sequence" is defined in the range of "0 to 89", while a "no effect" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

As mentioned above, if the overlap period is within 2 seconds, the shortened hold consecutive performance described with reference to Figure 540 will be executed, so this is not specified in the alternative performance selection table 222ab.

Here, if "setting suggestion" is selected as the presentation mode of the alternative presentation, the pending consecutive presentation is not executed, and instead, a setting suggestion mode is determined to suggest the setting value to the player using the period until the SP time period is set, and if "overlapping mode" is selected, a presentation mode is determined in which the display areas for the lucky presentation (pre-reading presentation) and the SP time presentation (period presentation) are separated and both presentations are executed overlappingly, as shown in the display content shown in Figure 548 (b) described below.

In addition, if "Forced Hold" is selected, even if the SP time period is set, the S
The presentation mode is determined to forcibly execute the reserved consecutive presentation as a lucky presentation without executing the P time presentation. In other words, when "forced reserved consecutive" is selected, in a state where the SP time presentation is being executed in the surrounding pachinko machines 10, the reserved consecutive presentation is executed continuously without executing the SP time presentation, so that it is possible to execute a presentation that gives a great sense of incongruity to the player. Note that, when "no presentation" is selected, the alternative presentation is not executed.

As explained above, the alternative effect selection table 222ab is configured to be able to select a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the number of jackpot wins (number of jackpot wins within the period) that may occur within the target period of the look-ahead effect (lucky effect), the length of the overlapping period between the look-ahead effect period and the SP time period, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223g, and is configured so that the more jackpot wins within the period, i.e., the more likely it is that the "forced reserved consecutive" effect mode will be selected. Therefore, if the "forced reserved consecutive" is selected and the SP time effect is being executed in the surrounding pachinko machines 10, and the reserved consecutive effect is executed continuously without executing the SP time effect, the player can be notified that many jackpot wins are possible.

In addition, the selection ratio of other presentation modes is made different depending on the length of the overlap period between the look-ahead presentation period and the SP time period. Therefore, the presentation mode selected (easier to be selected) as an alternative presentation can be made different depending on the timing at which the look-ahead presentation is executed, so that the presentation effect can be improved. In addition, since the shorter the overlap period between the look-ahead presentation period and the SP time period, it is easier to select the "overlap mode" as an alternative presentation, so that while the presentation effect can be improved by executing each presentation in the overlap mode, it is possible to make it difficult for each presentation to be executed in the overlap mode for a long period of time, so that a presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 544 to 547. In this embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment described above, the jackpot-related process (see S2212 in Fig. 511)
Instead of the big win related process 2 (see S2252 in FIG. 544), the round performance setting process (
512) in place of the round effect setting process 2 (see S2651 in FIG. 545), but otherwise is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of the big win related process 2 (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 544. FIG. 544 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the big win related process 2 (S2252). This big win related process 2 (S2252) differs from the big win related process of the first embodiment described above (see S2212 of FIG. 511) in that the processing contents executed when the round number command is received and the processing contents executed when the ending command is received are partially changed, but otherwise they are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

When the big win related process 2 (S2252) is executed, the big win related process (FIG. 5
After S2605 is completed, the round performance setting process 2 (S2651) is executed, and then the process of S2607, which is the same as the jackpot-related process described above (see S2212 in FIG. 511), is executed, and then this process is terminated. The details of the round performance setting process 2 executed in S2651 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2604 that the round number command has not been received (S2604: No), then it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S260
8), if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S2608: Yes), it is determined whether the pending continuous performance execution flag 223aa is set to ON, that is, whether the pending continuous performance is executed as the ending screen performance executed during the ending period (S2652). If it is determined that the pending continuous performance execution flag 223aa is set to ON (S2652: Yes),
s), the background mode for the reserved continuous performance (background mode for the fish festival) is stored in the background mode memory area 223v (S2653), and the ending command for display is set (S2654).
The value of the round number counter 223x is set to 0 (S2655), and this processing ends.

Next, the processing contents of the round performance setting process 2 (S2651) will be described with reference to FIG. 545. FIG. 545 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the round performance setting process 2 (S2651). This round performance setting process 2 (S2651) is different from the above-mentioned round performance setting process (see S2606 in FIG. 512) in that a process for determining whether the execution condition of the reserved consecutive performance is established when the first round of round play is started is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are assigned the same symbols, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the round effect setting process 2 (S2651) is executed, first, the round number counter 2
Based on the value of 23x, it is determined whether the round to be executed this time is the first round (S2
751), if it is determined that it is not the first round (S2751: No), the same steps S2701 to S2706 as those in the round performance setting process of the first embodiment described above (see S2606 in FIG. 512) are carried out.
The process of S2707 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2751, if it is determined that the current round is the first round (S2751: Yes), the hold consecutive performance setting process is executed (S2752), and then, S2
It is determined whether the execution of the reserved consecutive performance has been decided by the process of S752 (S2753).
In the process of S2753, if it is determined that the execution of the reserved consecutive performance is decided (S2753
: Yes), the pending continuous performance execution flag 223aa is set to on (S2754), and the process proceeds to S2701 described above.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of S2753 that the execution of the hold consecutive performance has not been decided (S2753: No), the processing of S2754 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2701.

In this embodiment, the process for determining whether to execute the reserved consecutive performance (reserved consecutive performance setting process) is configured to be executable in the first round, but it is not limited to this and may be configured to be executed in any number of rounds. For example, the process may be executed in a specific jackpot type (jackpot A1
, B1) may be configured to execute the reserved consecutive effect setting process at the execution timing of the number of rounds (8th round) in which only the jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the reserved consecutive effect setting process depending on the jackpot type, so that when a jackpot game with a short number of rounds is executed, even if the reserved consecutive effect is not executed, it is possible to play after the jackpot game ends while keeping the player in hope for the reserved consecutive effect.

In addition, during one big win game, the reserved consecutive performance setting process may be configured to be executable multiple times (for example, the first round and the eighth round), and the performance mode may be finally determined based on the content determined in the last reserved consecutive performance setting process executed. In this case, even if information indicating a big win is included in the special reserved chart newly acquired during a big win game, the reserved consecutive performance can be executed, and the performance effect can be improved.

Next, the processing contents of the reserved consecutive performance setting process (S2752) will be described with reference to Fig. 546. Fig. 546 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the reserved consecutive performance setting process (S2752). In this reserved consecutive performance setting process (S2752), a process for determining whether the execution condition of the reserved consecutive performance is established or not, and a process for calculating the performance period of the reserved consecutive performance and determining the performance mode of the performance to be actually executed based on the degree of overlap with the SP time period are executed when the execution condition of the reserved consecutive performance is established.

When the reserved consecutive performance setting process (S2752) is executed, first, the winning information storage area 223
The information stored in the winning information storage area 223f is read (S3801), and the jackpot winning information (information indicating that the jackpot will be won) included in the read information is identified by corresponding it to the storage position stored in the winning information storage area 223f (S3802). In other words, in the process of S3802, whether or not the acquired special reserved symbol is a winning reserved symbol is identified by corresponding it to the reserved memory order (the execution order of the special symbol lottery).

After the process of S3802 is completed, the execution period of the reserved consecutive performance is calculated by referring to the pre-reading restriction period selection table 222aa (S3803), and then, the SP time performance is executed based on the timing information stored in the timing information storage area (time information storage area) 223r.
The P period (SP time period) is identified (S3804).

Next, it is determined whether the effect period of the reserved consecutive effect calculated in the process of S3803 overlaps with the SP period specified in the process of S3804 (S3805). If it is determined that they do not overlap (S
3805: No), it is decided to execute the reserved consecutive performance (S3806), and this process is terminated. In other words, even if the reserved consecutive performance is executed using the full performance period of the calculated reserved consecutive performance, if it is determined that the SP time performance is not executed during the performance period of the reserved consecutive performance, the reserved consecutive performance is executed as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3805 that there is a duplication (S3805: Yes),
, execute the alternative performance setting process to set an alternative performance to be executed instead of the reserved consecutive performance (
S3807) and terminate this process.

Here, the contents of the alternative effect setting process (S3807) will be described with reference to FIG. 547. FIG. 547 is a flowchart showing the contents of the alternative effect setting process (S3807). In this alternative effect setting process (S3807), a look-ahead effect (lucky effect)
The number of jackpots that can occur during the target period (number of jackpots during the period), the pre-reading performance period,
A process is executed to determine an alternative presentation having a different presentation mode in accordance with the length of the overlap period with the SP time period and the acquired value of the presentation counter 223g.

When the alternative performance setting process (S3807) is executed, first, the performance period of the reserved consecutive performance and the SP
The overlapping status (overlapping period) with the period (SP time period) is determined (S3901),
Based on the result of the determination in step S39, it is determined whether the overlap period is within 2 seconds (S3902).
In the process of 02, if it is determined that the time is within 2 seconds (S3902: Yes), it is determined whether there is an overlapping relationship in which the reserved consecutive performance is executed before the SP time performance (S3903).
If it is determined that the consecutive hold performance will be executed first (S3903: Yes), it is decided to execute the shortened consecutive hold performance (S3904), and this process is terminated.

Here, when the shortened reserved consecutive performance is executed, the shortened performance mode in which the performance result of the reserved consecutive performance is displayed is determined before the SP time period is set, as shown in Fig. 540. In this way, when the overlapping period is short, by configuring to execute a process to shorten one of the performance periods, it is possible to prevent a plurality of performances from being executed in an overlapping manner, resulting in a performance that is difficult for the player to understand.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3902 that the overlapping period is 2 seconds or more (S
3902: No), the alternative effect selection table 222ab is referenced to determine the alternative effect mode (S3905), and execution of various effects according to the determined effect mode is determined (S3907).
, S3908), and then this process ends.

<Modification of the Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example using the technical concept of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 548. In the above-mentioned second embodiment, when the look-ahead performance period and the SP time period overlap, the technical concept that each performance can be executed in a performance mode (overlapping performance mode) that does not confuse the player even if each performance is executed in an overlapping manner was described.

This technical concept may be used for the look-ahead performance in the first embodiment described above, that is, the look-ahead performance executed in response to a special pattern change.

Specifically, when the SP time preparation period starts during the execution period of the "Fish Festival", which is a look-ahead performance, the display screen shown in FIG. 548(a) is displayed. Then, after that, when the SP time period is set, the performance mode of the Fish Festival (fish school image) moves to the display area HR1 as shown in FIG. 548(b), and an overlapping performance mode in which the look-ahead performance is executed in the display area HR1 is set. In other words, in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, a period performance (SP time performance) executed synchronously in the multiple pachinko machines 10 is executed, and a performance that gives a sense of unity to the multiple pachinko machines 10 is executed, while the look-ahead performance is continuously executed using a part of the main display area Dm (display area HR1).

In this way, by dividing the area in which each effect is executed, even if multiple effects are executed overlappingly for the player, it is possible to prevent the content of the effects from becoming confused and resulting in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand being executed.

In this modified example, the display area of the SP time performance is larger than the display area of the look-ahead performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display area of the look-ahead performance may be larger than the SP time performance. Depending on the result of the look-ahead performance (whether or not a jackpot is won),
The size of the performance area (display area HR1) of the look-ahead performance may be made different, for example, the performance area may be configured to be larger when the performance result of the look-ahead performance is advantageous to the player (winning an advantageous jackpot) than when the performance result is unfavorable to the player (winning an unfavorable jackpot).By configuring in this way, the player can predict the performance result of the look-ahead performance based on the size of the performance area only when the SP time period and the look-ahead performance period overlap, so that the player can be interested in the execution timing of each performance.

In addition, in this modified example, both the SP time performance and the look-ahead performance are configured to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but this is not limited thereto, and when the performance execution periods overlap, either of the performances may be configured to be displayed on the display screen of a display device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), or either of the performances may be executed using a decorative accessory provided in the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the performance can be executed in a dedicated performance mode that is set only when the SP time performance period and the look-ahead performance period overlap, so that players who want to experience various performances can be interested in the execution timing of each performance.

<Regarding the Third Embodiment>
Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 549 to Fig. 557. In the first and second embodiments described above, by configuring the setting suggestion effect to be executable using various effects, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know when the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, to make the player interested in the various effects that are executed, and to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In contrast, the third embodiment differs from the first and second embodiments in that it is configured to notify the player of the execution conditions under which the setting suggestion effect can be executed in advance, and a configuration is added that makes it easier to execute the setting suggestion effect by the player playing the game so that the execution conditions are met. Note that the rest of the content is the same, and detailed explanations of the same content will be omitted.

<About the content of the performance in the third embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 549, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the normal state is set, the reserved memory of the first special symbol (reserved special symbol 1)
The reserved memory of the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) can be stored in the order in which they are acquired, and a maximum of eight reserved patterns can be displayed to indicate the number of reserved memories.

Then, a hold change effect is executed, which is an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved pattern, and when the display mode of one reserved pattern becomes a specific display mode, a predetermined number (e.g., six or more) of reserved memories are acquired during the period in which the specific display mode is displayed, so that a setting suggestion effect can be executed using the display mode of the reserved pattern.

By configuring in this manner, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to execute many setting suggestion effects and acquire many reserved memories.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, a variable scenario of the reserved change effect can be set so that the reserved pattern displayed in the above-mentioned specific display mode can be changed to a different display mode, and the period until the special pattern change corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed in the specific display mode is executed, or the period until the specific display mode is switched to a different display mode, can be set as the period during which the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed. This makes it difficult for the player to understand how long the period during which the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed will continue, so that the player can be motivated to play immediately after the reserved pattern in the specific display mode is displayed.

In addition, as a variable scenario for the reserved change performance, a variable scenario is configured to be able to be set in which the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in a specific display mode is changed to a special display mode that is more advantageous to the player than the specific display mode, and when the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed to the special display mode, the range of reserved patterns for which the setting suggestion performance is executed is expanded compared to when the reserved pattern of the specific display mode is displayed. By configuring in this way, when a variable performance that changes the display mode is executed for the reserved pattern of the specific display mode, it is possible to draw attention to whether the display mode is changed to the special display mode, creating a more advantageous state for the player (a state in which the setting suggestion performance is easily executed), or the specific display mode is changed to the normal display mode, creating a state that is disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the setting suggestion performance is difficult to execute).

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the reserved change effect is used to suggest that the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved is a result favorable to the player (a big win). In other words, when the reserved change effect is executed, either a display mode suggesting the result of the reserved special pattern lottery or a display mode for varying the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect can be displayed. Therefore, various benefits can be given to the player depending on the result of the reserved change effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

Here, the contents of the reserve change presentation will be described with reference to FIG.
549(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed to a specific display mode by a reserve change performance, FIG. 549(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when eight reserved memories are acquired while a reserved pattern in a specific display mode is displayed, FIG. 549(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the specific display mode is changed to a normal display mode by a reserve change performance, and FIG. 549(d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed from a specific display mode to a special display mode by a reserve change performance.

As shown in FIG. 549(a), in a specific display mode (indicated by a "?" mark in the figure),
When the reserved symbol is displayed on the reserved symbol base m4, the reserved symbol bases m6 to m8 are displayed in the area, i.e.,
The area corresponding to 6 to 8 reserved special symbols is displayed as a "special symbol display zone" as a guide to inform the player that the setting suggestion performance will be executed. The character J0 displays "?" as a guide to encourage the player to play a game that will allow the player to acquire reserved special symbols.
The comment "Get your pending items while you can" is displayed.

During the period when this special pattern display zone is displayed, if the number of reserved special patterns becomes 6 or more,
A setting suggestion effect is executed using the display mode of the reserved symbols displayed in the area of the reserved pedestals m6 to m8. Specifically, the reserved symbols are displayed in a display mode for suggesting the currently set setting value by varying the color and shape of the reserved symbols. Note that in this case, as in the first embodiment described above, a performance pattern (setting suggestion content) is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect selection table 222c, and the reserved symbols are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the performance pattern.

As a result, when a specific display mode (a display mode marked with a ?) is displayed as the display mode of the reserved pattern, the player can acquire more reserved memories and be motivated to play in order to execute the setting suggestion performance using the display mode of the reserved pattern.

Here, if a predetermined number (6) or more of special reserved symbols are acquired during the period when the specific display mode is displayed, a setting suggestion performance is executed using the display mode of each reserved symbol, as shown in FIG. 549(b). In the figure shown in FIG. 549(b), the display mode of performance pattern A (displayed in the display mode with "A" in the figure) for the reserved symbol of the 6th reserved pedestal m6 is displayed in the 7th reserved pedestal m7,
Furthermore, the display mode of presentation pattern B (shown in the figure as a display mode marked with "B") is displayed for the reserved pattern of the eighth reserved base.

Then, a history display is executed in which the character J0 issues the comment "Ax1, Bx2 GET!" as a comment to indicate the history information of each display mode (the performance result of the setting suggestion performance) displayed in the special symbol display zone. As a result, the display position of the reserved symbol in the specific display mode is moved (shifted) based on the execution of the special symbol variation, so that even when a new reserved symbol is displayed in the special symbol display zone, the player can be informed of the entire display mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the special symbol display zone in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, when a reserved pattern, for which the display mode of the setting suggestion effect is set in the area of the special pattern display zone, is moved (shifted) outside the special pattern display zone, the display mode of the setting suggestion effect is cleared. Therefore, the display mode of the reserved patterns displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect can be displayed up to three on the display screen. In this way, by configuring the display mode of the reserved pattern that has moved out of the special pattern display zone to no longer be the display mode corresponding to the setting suggestion effect, it becomes necessary to memorize the display mode of the setting suggestion effect displayed within the special pattern display zone. Therefore, it is easier for a player who has been playing for a long time to grasp the performance modes of many setting suggestion effects.

In addition, when the reserved change effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 549(b), and the reserved symbol displayed in the specific display mode changes to the normal display mode (shown as a black circle in the figure), the execution condition for the setting suggestion effect using the reserved symbol is not met (the specific display mode is not displayed), so as shown in FIG. 549(c), the display of the special symbol display zone is erased, and the comment "End" is displayed to indicate that the period during which the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed has ended.
The character J0 is displayed making the comment.

On the other hand, when the reserved change performance is executed in the state shown in FIG. 549(b), and the reserved pattern displayed in the specific display mode changes to the special display mode (displayed by a star in the figure), FIG. 549(d)
), the range of reserved symbols in which the setting suggestion effect is executed (special symbol display zone) is displayed in an enlarged manner compared to when reserved symbols in a specific display manner are displayed. By configuring in this manner, when a variable effect that changes the display manner is executed for reserved symbols in a specific display manner, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the special display manner will be changed to create a more advantageous state for the player (a state in which the setting suggestion effect is easily executed) or whether the specific display manner will be changed to a normal display manner, creating a disadvantageous state for the player (a state in which the setting suggestion effect is difficult to execute).

<Electrical Configuration of the Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to Fig. 550 and Fig. 551, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described.
The contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents defined in OM222.

As shown in FIG. 550(a), in the third embodiment, compared to the first embodiment described above,
The difference is that a reserve change effect selection table 222ba has been added, but otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The hold change performance selection table 222ba is a data table which is referenced when selecting a performance scenario for a hold change performance which is executed as one of the look-ahead performances, and is referenced in the hold change performance setting process (see S2560 in FIG. 555) which is executed when it is determined that a hold change performance which changes the display mode of the hold pattern is to be executed as a look-ahead performance (see S2508 in FIG. 554).

The change pattern of the reserved change performance selected by referring to this reserved change performance selection table 222ba is stored in the reserved change pattern storage area 112bb, and when it is determined that it is time to change the reserved pattern based on the stored reserved change pattern, the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed to the display mode specified in the reserved change pattern.

Here, the contents of the reserved change presentation selection table 222ba will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 551. FIG. 551 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the reserved change presentation selection table 222ba. As shown in FIG. 551, the reserved change presentation selection table 222ba
In a, four types of hold change patterns are defined in correspondence with the win/loss determination result indicated by the special chart hold that is the target of the hold change performance and the acquired value of the performance counter 223g.

Specifically, the result of the hit/miss judgment of the target reservation is a hit, and the obtained performance counter 223
When the value of g is in the range of "0 to 59", "Pattern 1" is defined as the reserved change pattern, when the acquired value of the performance counter 223g is in the range of "60 to 89", "Pattern 2" is defined as the reserved change pattern, and when the acquired value of the performance counter 223g is in the range of "90 to 98", "Pattern 3" is defined as the reserved change pattern.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the target reservation is incorrect and the acquired value of the performance counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 69", the reservation change pattern is "Pattern 4", and if the acquired value of the performance counter 223g is in the range of "70 to 89", the reservation change pattern is "Pattern 1".
However, when the acquired value of the effect counter 223g is in the range of "90 to 98", "Pattern 2" is defined as the hold change pattern.

Here, the contents of each reserved change pattern will be explained. In "Pattern 1," the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) two seconds after the reserved pattern indicating that the target reserved has been acquired is displayed, and continues to be the first mode until the special pattern change corresponding to the target reserved is executed.
The manner in which this is done is the pending change pattern.

"Pattern 2" is a reserve change pattern in which, after a reserved pattern indicating that a target reserve has been acquired is displayed, the display mode changes to a first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special pattern change begins, and the first mode continues to be displayed until the special pattern change corresponding to the target reserve is executed.

In "Pattern 3," after the reserved pattern indicating that the target reserved has been acquired is displayed, the display mode changes to the first mode (specific display mode) at the timing when the next special pattern variation starts, and
When the second special symbol change (the next special symbol change) starts, the display mode changes to the second
This is a hold change pattern in which the hold changes to a second mode (special display mode) and continues to display the second mode until a special pattern change corresponding to the target hold is executed.

In "Pattern 4", the display mode changes to the first mode (
This is a pending change pattern in which the display mode changes from the first mode (specific display mode) to the third mode (normal display mode) at the timing when the second special pattern change (the next special pattern change after that) begins.

In this way, by configuring the period during which the special symbol display zone is displayed to differ depending on the reserved change pattern selected, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the period during which the special symbol display zone is displayed will continue. Therefore, it is possible to make the player eagerly play the game to acquire the reserved special symbol immediately after the special symbol display zone is displayed.

<Regarding control processing in the third embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 552 to 557. In this embodiment, the reserved ball number command receiving process (S220 in Fig. 508) is different from the first embodiment.
8) instead of the reserved ball number command process (see S2258 in FIG. 552), and winning command reception process 3 (see S2210 in FIG. 510) instead of the winning command reception process 3 (see S2210 in FIG. 554).
2260) is replaced with the variable display setting process (see S2114 of FIG. 515) and the variable display setting process 3 (see S2164 of FIG. 556) is replaced with the liquid crystal performance execution management process (see S211 of FIG. 506).
557) instead of S2160), but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 552, the contents of the control process of reserved ball number command process 3 (S2258) will be explained. FIG. 552 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of reserved ball number command process 3 (S2258). As shown in FIG. 552, reserved ball number command process 3 (S22
58), the difference is that the reserved ball number command receiving process (see S2208 in FIG. 508) is added with the reserved state setting process (S2351), but otherwise it is the same. The same process contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, the contents of the reserved mode setting process (S2351) will be described with reference to FIG. 553. FIG. 553 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the reserved mode setting process (S2351). In this reserved mode setting process (S2351), when a new reserved symbol is displayed,
A process is executed to determine whether the reserved symbol to be displayed this time is within a special symbol display zone (special display zone), and to decide the display mode (presentation mode) based on the result of the determination.

When the reserved mode setting process (S2351) is executed, first, the special reserved performance execution flag 2
It is determined whether 23ba is set to ON (S4001). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S4001: Yes), it is then determined whether the stored value, i.e., the value stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter in the process of S2301 executed in the reserved ball number command process 3 (see S2258 in FIG. 552) (information for indicating which special symbol is reserved) corresponds to the currently set special display zone (special symbol display zone) (S400
2).

In the process of S4002, if it is determined that the object is within the special display zone (S4002:
If the result is Yes, in order to determine the display mode of the reserved pattern as a setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect selection table 222b is referenced to determine the effect pattern (effect mode) to be used for the current reserved pattern display (S4003), a display command is set to show the display mode of the reserved pattern corresponding to the determined effect mode (S4004), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the winning command reception process 3 (S2260) will be explained with reference to FIG. 554. FIG. 554 is a flow chart for illustrating the processing contents of the winning command reception process 3 (S2260). In this winning command reception process 3 (S2260), if it is determined that a pre-reading effect other than a variable effect is to be executed in the above-mentioned winning command reception process (see S2210 in FIG. 510) (S2508: No), the pending change effect setting process (see FIG. 555) is executed.
The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the reserved change performance setting process (S2560) will be described with reference to Fig. 555. Fig. 555 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the reserved change performance setting process (S2560). In this reserved change performance setting process (S2560), when a reserved change performance is executed, a process for determining the reserved change pattern (change scenario) is executed.

When the hold change effect setting process (S2560) is executed, first, a hold change pattern is determined by referring to the hold change effect selection table 222ba (S4101), the determined hold change pattern is stored in the hold change pattern storage area 223bb (S4102), and it is determined whether the stored hold change pattern includes a special hold effect (an effect in which a special pattern display zone is displayed) (S4103).

Then, when it is determined that the special reserved effect is included (S4103: Yes), the special reserved effect execution flag 223ba is set to ON (S4104), and this process is terminated.
In the process of S4103, if it is determined that the special hold effect is not included (S4103:
If the answer is No, the process of S4104 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2164) will be explained with reference to FIG. 556. FIG. 556 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S2164). This variable display setting process 3 (S2164) is different from the above-mentioned variable display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 515) in that a process related to the special hold performance (see FIG. 549) is added, and otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

When the variable display setting process 3 (S2164) is executed, first, the same processes of S3001 to S3003 as those of the variable display setting process described above (see S2114 in FIG. 515) are executed. Then, when the process of S3003 is completed, it is determined whether the special reserved performance execution flag 223ba is set to ON (S4201), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4202),
4201: Yes), determine whether the current change is a change related to the target hold of the special hold performance (S4202), and if it is determined that it is a change related to the target hold (S4202: Yes)
The special hold effect execution flag 223ba is set to off (S4203), and thereafter, the processes of S3004 to S3013 are executed, which are the same as the variable display setting process described above (see S2114 in FIG. 515), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the special reserved performance execution flag 223ba is not set to ON, that is, the special reserved performance is not being executed (S4201: N
o), or in the processing of S4202, if it is determined that a change not related to the target reservation of the special reservation performance, that is, a special pattern change other than the special pattern change corresponding to the reserved pattern that is the target of the special reservation performance, is executed (S4202: No), the processing of S4203 is skipped and the same S3004 to S3013 as the above-mentioned change display setting processing (see S2114 of FIG. 515) is executed.
Then, the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 557, the processing contents of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 3 (S2160) will be described. FIG. 557 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 3 (S2160). This liquid crystal performance execution management process 3 (S2160) is a process executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 506) of the voice lamp control device 113, and a process for periodically updating the contents of the performance being executed is executed. For example, when a performance scenario for varying the progress of the performance based on the elapsed time is determined and the performance mode is varied based on the performance scenario, the elapsed time is specified in the liquid crystal performance execution management process 3 (S2160), and when it is determined that the specified elapsed time matches the variable timing of the performance mode specified in the performance scenario, a display command for varying the performance mode is set.

<Regarding the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, the variation pattern selection table 222 is configured to select a different variation pattern according to the set game state.
a is defined, and the rate at which the reach-miss effect is executed is varied according to the game state. When the reach-miss effect is executed during the SP time period,
The setting suggestion effect is executed as a bonus. And, since it is more difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect as a variable effect in a game state where it is difficult to execute the reach miss effect, the setting suggestion effect is executed using another effect. In other words, regardless of which game state is set, the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed during the SP time period is configured to be equal.

In contrast to this, in the fourth embodiment, even when the same game state (for example, normal state) is set, the ratio at which the reach-miss effect is selected can be varied. Specifically, the background mode can be changed by the player operating the frame button 22, and the execution frequency of the reach effect (reach-miss effect) is varied according to the selected background mode, even when the same variation pattern is selected.

In this way, by configuring the frequency of reach-miss effects to differ depending on the background mode selected by the player, it is possible to differ the expectation of winning a jackpot when a reach effect is executed. Thus, a player who wants to see a reach effect regardless of whether or not a jackpot is won can select a background mode in which the reach effect (reach-miss effect) is executed frequently, and a player who wants to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot with a reach effect can select a background mode in which the reach effect (reach-miss effect) is executed less frequently, thereby allowing the player to play with the desired effect.

Also, as in the first embodiment described above, if a reach-miss effect is executed during the SP time period, a setting suggestion effect is executed, so the player can select the frequency with which the setting suggestion effect is executed. Thus, a player who knows the setting value that has already been set can select a background mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed less frequently so that other players (players playing next to them) have a harder time figuring out the setting value, and a player who wants to know the setting value as soon as possible can select a background mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed more frequently.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the frequency of execution of a reach effect is low (when a reach miss effect is difficult to execute), the setting suggestion effect is configured to be more likely to select an effect mode (strong suggestion mode) in which the currently set setting value is easy for the player to predict, and when the frequency of execution of a reach effect is high (when a reach miss effect is easy to execute), the setting suggestion effect is configured to be more likely to select an effect mode (weak suggestion mode) in which the currently set setting value is difficult for the player to predict.By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to allow the player to select between a game in which a setting suggestion effect is easy to execute but a weak suggestion mode is easy to select, and a game in which a setting suggestion effect is difficult to execute but a strong suggestion mode is easy to select.

In other words, this embodiment is an invention based on the technical idea of not standardizing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed, but standardizing the amount of information used to predict the setting value that the player will obtain through the executed setting suggestion effect.

Furthermore, as an invention based on this technical concept, it is preferable that the stronger suggestive mode is more likely to be selected the less frequently a game situation occurs. For example, it may be configured so that the stronger suggestive mode is more likely to be selected when multiple jackpot games are played during one SP time period. By configuring in this way, a rarer game situation can be created for the player,
Since it is possible to provide information that makes it easy to predict the set values, the player can play the game while devising ways to create various game situations.

<Electrical Configuration in the Fourth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 558 and Fig. 559. The pachinko machine 10 of this fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed.
That is, the configurations of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the electrical components of the display control device 113 are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 558(a) shows the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment.
558(a) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the ROM 222 included in the
The ROM 222 of this embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above in that a variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca is provided instead of the variation pattern selection table 222a, and a new end time mode selection table 222cb is added, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca is the variation pattern selection table 222
Like a, it is a data table that is referenced when selecting a presentation pattern of a variable presentation to be executed based on a variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Although detailed explanations are omitted in the above-mentioned first embodiment, various presentation patterns of variable presentations are defined in correspondence with information indicating the received variation pattern, the current game state, and the acquired value of the presentation counter 223g.

Here, the detailed contents of the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 559. FIG. 559 is a diagram showing a typical characteristic content among the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of reach performance, and the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca defines the types of various reach performances in correspondence with the received variation pattern command.

As shown in FIG. 559, the variation pattern selection 4 table 222ca includes the current game state (the probability state of the special symbol and the normal symbol, as well as the game state according to the selected background mode), the variation pattern type received from the main control device 110, and the acquired performance counter 22
Various variable presentation patterns are defined in accordance with the values of 3g.

Specifically, when the game state is "normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is the "sand beach stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "various wins", that is, when the fluctuation pattern selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b of the main control device 110 is a win fluctuation A to a win fluctuation C, regardless of the acquired value of the performance counter 223g (with respect to the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be acquired), "various wins" is displayed as the fluctuation performance.
is prescribed.

Although detailed illustration is omitted in Fig. 559, in reality, one of a plurality of types of variation effects (reach effects) is specified in accordance with the length of the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern and the value of the acquired performance counter 223g. Note that, when a variation pattern corresponding to a winning of a special symbol is received, the result of the variation effect indicates a winning of a big prize, so that a reach-miss effect is not executed.

Next, the game state is "normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is the "sand beach stage", and the received variation pattern is "miss variation A", that is, the main control device 11
When the variation pattern selected by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202b1 of 0 is deviation variation A (variation time 5 seconds), regardless of the acquired value of the performance counter 223g (
For the entire range of the effect counter 223g that can be obtained), a "short miss" is specified as a variable effect. When this "short miss" is selected, the reach effect is not executed,
A variable presentation is executed in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.

The game state is "normal 1", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is the "sand beach stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "miss fluctuation B", that is, the fluctuation pattern selected by referring to the normal fluctuation pattern table 202b1 of the main control device 110 is the miss fluctuation B (
In the case where the value of the acquired performance counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 49", a "middle out" is defined as a variable performance, and in the range of "50 to 98",
"Reach Miss" is specified as a variable performance. When "Middle Miss" is selected, a performance is performed to inspire whether or not a reach performance will be performed as a variable performance, and then the reach performance is not performed, and the third display mode is displayed to indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss.
A variable effect in which the symbols are displayed stationary is executed.

Here, specific examples of the variable presentation corresponding to a "middle miss" include a variable presentation in which the third symbol temporarily stops in a display mode indicating a miss (other than a display mode indicating a jackpot win) and then a pseudo variable presentation in which the third symbol is changed again is executed, giving the player hope that a reach presentation will be executed, and a variable presentation in which the speed of change of the third symbol during the variable display is temporarily slowed down, thereby increasing the expectation that a reach presentation will be executed (part of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination that will result in the execution of a reach presentation) compared to the variable presentation corresponding to the short miss described above.

The presentation mode corresponding to such a "miss" variable presentation is configured so that the same presentation mode is set up to the middle in the reach miss presentation and reach hit presentation. By configuring in this way, when a miss variable presentation is being executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the variable presentation being executed is based on a "miss", "miss", or "hit".

In addition, as a specific example of a variation effect corresponding to a "reach miss", after the third symbol is temporarily stopped in a display mode indicating a miss (other than a display mode indicating a big win), a pseudo variation effect is executed in which the third symbol is varied again, making the player expect that a reach effect will be executed, and then a variation effect in which a reach effect is executed, or by temporarily slowing down the variation speed of the third symbol during the variation display, a reach effect is executed rather than the variation effect corresponding to the short miss described above (
There is a variable performance in which a reach effect is executed after increasing the expectation (a part of the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination that will result in the reach effect being executed).

And, the game state is "Normal 1", that is, the game state is normal and the background mode is "
The stage is the "Sandy Beach Stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "Deviating Fluctuation C", i.e., the main control device 1
When the variation pattern selected by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202b1 of 10 is the miss variation C (variation time 60 seconds), regardless of the acquired performance counter 223g value, the "reach miss" is specified as the variation performance. In other words, when the miss variation C is selected, the reach miss variation performance is always executed.

On the other hand, when the game state is "Normal 2", that is, when the game state is normal, the background mode is "Deep Sea Stage", and the received variation pattern is "Various Wins", that is, when the variation pattern selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 202b of the main control device 110 is any of the win variations A to C, "Various Wins" is specified as the variation performance regardless of the acquired value of the performance counter 223g (for the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be acquired). Note that the content of the variation performance executed when "Various Wins" is selected as the variation performance is the same as that of the above-mentioned normal 1, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game state is "normal 2", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is the "deep sea stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "missing fluctuation A", that is, the fluctuation pattern selected by referring to the normal fluctuation pattern table 202b1 of the main control device 110 is missing fluctuation A (
In the case where the value of the acquired effect counter 223g is in the range of "0 to 49" (variation time 5 seconds), a "short miss" is specified as the variable effect, and for the range of "50 to 98", a "reach miss" is specified as the variable effect.

The reach-miss performance executed for the miss variation A is executed immediately after the third pattern variation is executed (2 seconds later), and a variation performance in which the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a reach-miss is executed 2 seconds later. In other words, the variation performance is executed not for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect by inciting the player to win the jackpot or not, but for the purpose of increasing the frequency of the reach-miss performance. In addition, when the reach performance (reach-miss performance) is executed in such a short time, for example, when the variation performance is executed, one of the three third patterns is stopped and displayed, and the other third pattern is stopped and displayed immediately in the same display mode as the third pattern, so that the reach state is reached in a short time. In this way, by configuring to create a reach state without changing all the third patterns, the reach state can be created in a short time with a performance mode that is easy for the player to understand. In this case, for example, an icon with the word "LOCK" may be added to the third symbol that is not displayed in a variable manner to inform the player that the third symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (it remains stationary). This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the third symbol that is not displayed in a variable manner exists.

The game state is "normal 2", that is, the game state is the normal state, the background mode is the "deep sea stage", and the received fluctuation pattern is "missing fluctuation B", that is, the fluctuation pattern selected by referring to the normal fluctuation pattern table 202b1 of the main control device 110 is the missing fluctuation B (
When the received variation pattern is "miss variation C," that is, when the variation time is 60 seconds, a "reach miss" variation effect is specified, regardless of the value of the obtained presentation counter 223g. In other words, when miss variation C is selected, a reach miss variation effect is always executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the normal state is set, the frequency with which the reach-miss effect is executed is varied according to the selected background mode. Specifically, it is configured so that the reach-miss effect is more likely to be executed when the "deep sea stage" is selected as the background mode (normal 2) than when the "sand beach stage" is selected (normal 1). Therefore, even when the same game state (normal state) is set, the frequency with which the reach-miss effect, and therefore the reach effect, is executed can be varied, so that a game that the player will not tire of can be provided.

In this embodiment, the background mode is configured to be changeable by the player operating the frame button 22, and the frequency of execution of the reach effect (reach miss effect) is varied according to the set background mode. However, the configuration for varying the frequency of execution of the reach effect (reach miss effect) is not limited to this. For example, the background mode may be configured to be switched when the number of special symbol selections executed without a change in the game state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), or when the time counted by the timing device 292 reaches a predetermined time (e.g.,
The background mode may be configured to switch when the clock strikes 1:00 p.m., or if there are multiple jackpot types in which a specific game state (e.g., a special state) is set after a jackpot game ends, different background modes may be set when a specific game state is set when the first jackpot type is set and when the second jackpot type is set among the multiple jackpot types in which a specific game state is set after a jackpot game ends.

In this way, even if the player cannot arbitrarily select the background mode, the player can be allowed to play games with different frequencies of reach effects, providing the player with a game that he or she will never tire of.

Next, if the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state, regardless of the background mode,
The variation performance is specified so that the same variation performance is executed, and the game state is "time-saving/probability change", that is, when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability change state and the received variation pattern is "various winnings", that is, the time-saving/probability change variation pattern table 2 of the main control device 110
When the variation pattern selected by referring to 02b2 is the winning variation A or the winning variation B, regardless of the acquired value of the performance counter 223g (for the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be acquired), "various winnings" are specified as the variation performance. Note that the content of the variation performance executed when "various winnings" is selected as the variation performance is the same as that of the normal 1 described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when the received variation pattern is "miss variation D", that is, when the variation pattern selected by referring to the time-saving/probability variation pattern table 202b2 of the main control device 110 is miss variation D (variation time 3 seconds), regardless of the acquired value of the performance counter 223g (for the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be acquired), "short miss" is specified as the variation performance. In other words, in a variation pattern with a short variation time of 3 seconds, the reach performance is not executed, and a variation performance in which the third symbol indicating a miss is stopped and displayed is executed.

If the received fluctuation pattern is "miss fluctuation B, C," that is, if the fluctuation pattern selected by referring to the time-saving/probable fluctuation pattern table 202b2 of the main control unit 110 is miss fluctuation B (fluctuation time 20 seconds) or miss fluctuation C (fluctuation time 60 seconds), "miss reach" is specified as the fluctuation performance, regardless of the value of the acquired performance counter 223g (for the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be acquired).

Furthermore, when the game state is in a high-speed variable mode, the same variable performance is executed regardless of the background mode, and the game state is "
During the "high-speed probability fluctuation period," that is, when the game state is in the high-speed fluctuation mode and the received fluctuation pattern is "various wins," that is, when the fluctuation pattern selected by referring to the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b3 of the main control device 110 is short win fluctuation A or short win fluctuation B, "various wins" is specified as the fluctuation performance regardless of the acquired value of the performance counter 223g (for the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be acquired). Note that the content of the fluctuation performance executed when "various wins" is selected as the fluctuation performance is the same as in the case of normal 1 described above, and therefore a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Also, when the received fluctuation pattern is "miss various", that is, when the fluctuation pattern selected by referring to the high-speed fluctuation pattern table 202b3 of the main control device 110 is short miss fluctuation A (fluctuation time 1.5 seconds) or short miss fluctuation B (fluctuation time 6 seconds), "short miss" is specified as the fluctuation performance regardless of the acquired value of the performance counter 223g (for the entire range of the performance counter 223g that can be acquired). In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation mode, the reach miss performance is not executed, and the fact that the jackpot has been won is notified at the time the reach performance is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when executing a variable presentation corresponding to a variable pattern selected in the control process of the main control device 110, a different variable presentation can be determined based on the game state (the currently set game state and background mode).
The frequency of execution of the reach effect (reach miss effect) is configured to vary depending on the game state.

As for the game state, the normal state is configured to have the highest execution frequency of the reach effect (reach miss effect), that is, the frequency with which the reach effect is executed as the performance mode of the variable effect for showing the lottery result when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times, followed by the time-saving state and the probability variable state, in which the execution frequency of the reach effect decreases. Furthermore, when the probability variable state is set, the reach miss effect is configured not to be executed during the high-speed variable mode. By configuring in this way, the execution frequency of the reach miss effect in each game state can be clearly specified.

Returning to Fig. 558(a), the explanation will be continued. The end time mode selection table 222cb is a data table that is referred to when determining the effect content (suggested mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the period effect (SP time effect), and different suggested modes are defined corresponding to the game state at the start timing of the period effect and the game state at the end timing of the period effect.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when a period performance is being executed, a setting suggestion performance is more likely to be executed based on a variable performance than when a period performance is not being executed. More specifically, a setting suggestion performance is executed based on the number of times that a special symbol lottery is executed or the number of times that a reach performance is executed during a period performance, or a setting suggestion performance is executed when a reach miss performance is executed.

In other words, the SP time period during which the period effect (SP time effect) is executed is a period during which a player is provided with a lot of information for predicting the setting value, and therefore is a period during which the player is more likely to be given a special benefit (setting suggestion information) that is advantageous to the player. However, this SP time period is a period that is set based on the results of timing by the timing device 292 and is set regardless of the actual game content, so for example, the SP time period may be set during a big win game, or during a game state (high-speed fluctuation mode) in which it is difficult to execute a reach miss effect.

In this way, even if a SP time period is set, the frequency with which the setting suggestion effects are executed varies depending on the game situation during that SP time period, which can cause a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in the present fourth embodiment, a presentation (end of period presentation presentation) can be executed in a presentation mode that suggests a set value at the end timing of the SP time period, and the presentation mode of the end of period presentation presentation is determined based on the game state at the time the SP time period is set (the game state determined by the probability state of special patterns, the probability state of normal patterns, the background mode, and whether or not a jackpot game is being played) and the game state at the time the SP time period ends.

Specifically, when the game state during the SP time period is such that it is difficult to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variable effect, the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in a mode (strong suggestion mode) that makes it easier to predict the setting value during the end of the period effect than when the game state is such that it is easy to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the variable effect. In other words, when the setting suggestion effect is difficult to execute,
When a game is played during the P time period, the setting suggestion effect of the strong suggestion mode is likely to be executed at the end of the SP time period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to equally provide information (setting guessing element) for predicting the setting value to players who have played during the SP time period, regardless of the game state. Therefore, it is possible to uniformly provide information (setting guessing element) for predicting the setting value to players who have played during the SP time period, regardless of the game state.
Even if a time period is set, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Here, the contents of the end mode selection table 222cb will be explained with reference to Fig. 560. Fig. 560 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the end mode selection table 222cb. This end mode selection table 222cb is a data table referenced when selecting the suggested mode of the setting suggestion effect executed on the end screen of the SP time period (SP time effect), and has five suggested modes (lowest suggested mode,
The state of each of the three modes (low suggestion mode, medium suggestion mode, high suggestion mode, and highest suggestion mode) is specified to be selected in accordance with a combination of a game state at the start of the SP period and a game state at the end of the SP time period.

Specifically, the game state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 1", and the game state at the end is "
When the setting is "normal 1", the setting suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "low suggestion mode", and the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1".
" and the game state at the end is "Normal 2", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "Low suggestion mode", and if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "Normal 1" and the game state at the end is "Time-saving/Certain change",
The setting suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period is "
It is stipulated that if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1" and the game state at the end is "high speed fluctuation," a "high suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period, and if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 1" and the game state at the end is "jackpot in progress," a "high suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period.

When the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2" and the game state at the end is "normal 1", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "low suggestion mode". When the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2" and the game state at the end is "normal 2", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "lowest suggestion mode". When the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2" and the game state at the end is "time-saving/certain change", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "medium suggestion mode". When the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2" and the game state at the end is "high-speed change", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "high suggestion mode". When the game state at the start of the SP time period is "normal 2" and the game state at the end is "high-speed change", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "high suggestion mode".
If the game state at the end is "jackpot", the "high suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period.

In addition, if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "time-saving/probability change" and the game state at the end is "normal 1, normal 2", the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period will be "medium suggestion mode" as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode), and the game state at the start of the SP time period will be "
When the game state at the end of the SP time period is "time-saving/probability change", the "high suggestion mode" is set as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period,
The game state at the start of the SP time period is "Time-saving/Certain change", and the game state at the end is "High-speed change".
In this case, the suggested mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period is "best suggestion mode", and the game state at the start of the SP time period is "time reduction/probability change".
In addition, if the game state at the end is "jackpot", the "highest suggestion mode" is selected as the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion performance executed at the end of the SP time period.

The game state at the start of the SP time period is "high speed fluctuation", and the game state at the end is "high speed fluctuation".
If the game state at the start of the SP time period is "high speed fluctuation" and the game state at the end of the SP time period is "jackpot", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "highest suggestion mode", if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "high speed fluctuation" and the game state at the end of the SP time period is "jackpot", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "high suggestion mode", if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "high speed fluctuation" and the game state at the end of the SP time period is "other than high speed fluctuation and jackpot", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "high suggestion mode", if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "jackpot".
If the game state at the end of the SP time period is "jackpot", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "confirmation notification", and if the game state at the start of the SP time period is "jackpot" and the game state at the end of the SP time period is "other than jackpot", the suggestion mode (setting suggestion mode) of the setting suggestion effect executed at the end of the SP time period is "confirmation notification".
It is stipulated that the "high suggestion mode" is selected for each of the above.

<Regarding control processing in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 561 and Fig. 562. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that elapsed time confirmation process 4 (see S2171 in Fig. 561) is executed instead of elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in Fig. 521), but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) will be described with reference to FIG. 561. FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171). This elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) is the same as the above-mentioned elapsed time confirmation process (
521 (see S2111 in FIG. 521), the difference is that the contents of the process for setting the display mode of the ending screen that is displayed at the end of the period presentation (SP time presentation) are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 561, when the elapsed time confirmation process 4 (S2171) is executed, the same processes as the above-mentioned elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521) are executed from S3601 to S3607. When the process of S3607 is completed, the current game state is stored in the game state storage area 223ca (S3671), and this process is terminated. In the process of S3671, the game state information including the game state set at the start timing of the SP period (SP time period) in which the period performance is executed, the probability state of the special symbol, the probability state of the normal symbol, information indicating the type of background mode being selected (sand stage, deep sea stage), information indicating whether or not the high-speed variable mode is in progress, and information indicating that a jackpot is being played, is stored in the game state storage area 223ca. Here,
The game status information stored in 3ca is referred to when determining the display mode of the ending screen to be displayed at the end of the period presentation.

Furthermore, in the processing of S3604, if it is determined that the current presentation period is not the SP period (SP time period) (S3604: No), then it is determined whether the specialized mode flag 223w is set on (S3608), and if it is determined that the specialized mode flag 223w is not set on (S3608: No), it is determined whether the period presentation flag 223p is set on (S3609).

In the process of S3609, if it is determined that the period performance flag 223p is set to ON, that is, the current timing is the end of the SP period (SP time period) and the period performance flag 223p indicating that the SP time performance is being executed is still ON (timing to set the end of the period performance) (S3609: Yes), then it is determined whether the special pattern variation is being executed (S3610), and if it is determined that the special pattern variation is being executed (S3610: Yes), the same process of S3611 as the above-mentioned elapsed time confirmation process (see S2111 in FIG. 521) is executed, and this process is terminated. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the process of S3611, a process is executed to determine the performance mode to be executed during the remaining variation time according to the remaining variation time of the special pattern variation being executed at the end timing of the SP time period (the period from the end of the SP time period to the stop display of the special pattern variation being executed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3610 that the special chart is not changing (S3610:
No), then execute the end screen setting process (S3672), set the period performance flag 223p to OFF (S3612), and change the background image type of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to SP
A background image change command is set to switch from the background image showing the time period to the background image showing the normal performance period (S3613), and then the above-mentioned elapsed time confirmation process (FIG. 521) is performed.
The process then proceeds to S3614 and S3615, which are the same as in S2111 of the previous embodiment, and ends.

Next, the contents of the end screen setting process (S3672) will be described with reference to FIG. 562. FIG. 562 is a flow chart showing the contents of the end screen setting process (S3672). This end screen setting process (S3672) is the same as the above-mentioned elapsed time confirmation process 4 (FIG. 5).
This is executed when the condition for ending the period presentation (SP time presentation) (the SP time period ends and the special chart variation presentation is stopped and displayed) is met in the process of executing the process of determining a different display mode depending on the game state (game situation) during the SP time period as the display mode to be displayed on the ending screen of the SP time presentation (see S2171 in 61).

When the end screen setting process (S3672) is executed, first, the game status storage area 223c
a, the game state at the start of the period effect, that is, the game state stored in the processing of S3671 executed in the elapsed time confirmation processing 4 (see S2171 in FIG. 561) and the current game state are read (S4401), and the setting suggestion mode to be displayed on the period effect end screen is determined by referring to the end mode selection table 222cb based on each game state read in the processing of S4401 (the game state at the start of the period effect and the game state at the end of the period effect) (S440
2).

Then, a display command is set to show the display mode corresponding to the determined setting suggestion mode and the current game status (S4403), and this process is terminated.

In the above-described embodiments, the frequency of execution of the reach miss effect is changed.
Although the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect is configured to be different, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect when the reach-miss effect is selected may be made variable without changing the frequency of execution of the reach-miss effect.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the system to execute a suggestion notice to prompt the player as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed during the reach-miss effect, and to notify the player as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect will be executed based on the performance result of the suggestion notice effect.
Since the player can anticipate the setting suggestion effects being performed until the very end, the player can become interested in the effects that will be performed.

Furthermore, when executing the hint notice performance, it is preferable to configure it so that a revival mode in which the reach miss performance is switched to the reach hit performance can also be executed as a result of the performance. For example,
As a result of the missed reach effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination different from that of a winning jackpot, and then a suggestion notice effect is executed; if the first effect is executed as the suggestion notice effect, a setting suggestion effect is executed, if the second effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is not executed and the variable effect ends as it is, and if the third effect is executed, the stopped missed third symbol is re-varied and the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a winning jackpot.

By configuring in this manner, when the suggestion advance notice performance is executed, it is possible to create anticipation not only for the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance but also for a big win, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 563 to Fig. 565. The fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the various processes (various start-up processes) executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 are different, but otherwise the fifth embodiment is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 110
Various control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are started up, and a start-up command set in the start-up process (see FIG. 498) executed by the main control device 110 is output to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the start-up command, the start-up process is started in the voice lamp control device 113.

In other words, the execution timing of the start-up process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 is
The start-up time is set not when the power is turned on, but when a start-up command is received from the main control device 110. This allows a certain correlation to be established between the period during which the start-up process of the main control device 110 is executed and the period during which the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, and for example, when a situation occurs in which the start-up process is not executed due to a failure of the main control device 110, it is possible to prevent only the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 from being executed.

Furthermore, since the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 cannot proceed unless a startup command output from the main control device 110 is received, for example, if a malicious player installs an unauthorized main control device instead of the legitimate main control device 110 to play illegally, it is possible to make it more difficult for such players to play illegally by increasing the number of pieces of information (commands) required to operate the pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the power supply device 11
5 to simultaneously supply a predetermined amount of power to the various control devices.
The start-up process is executed when the various control devices receive a predetermined amount of power supplied from the power supply device 115. In other words, the start-up process executed by the various control devices can be correlated to a certain extent based on the timing of power supply from the power supply device 115 to the various control devices.

By configuring in this manner, the process of outputting a start-up command from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 can be omitted, and the control process in the main control unit 110 can be simplified.

In addition, a start-up period is required from when the power is turned on until the power supply device 115 supplies a predetermined power, during which the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage (e.g., 5V in series) and stabilizes. When the predetermined power is supplied, a reset signal is also output (the processing contents are reset when the predetermined power is first supplied after start-up). This ensures that even if a malfunction occurs in which a small amount of power is output to various control devices during the start-up period until the predetermined power is supplied and a control process such as a start-up process is executed, the malfunction can be reliably eliminated.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a process to determine whether a boot completion command has been received from the display control device 114 to indicate that the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 has been completed, and if a boot completion command is received during the start-up process, i.e., if the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 has been completed before the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed, the process for setting an operation invalid period that invalidates operation on the frame button 22 (the process for setting the operation invalid timer 223s) is skipped.

By configuring in this manner, the load on the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, for example, when the time from when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to when the start-up processing of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed becomes long due to time being spent on setting change operations (when the time becomes long compared to the period until the boot processing of the third pattern display device 81 is completed).

<Regarding control processing of main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment>
Referring now to FIG. 563, the MPU 21 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment
The content of the process executed in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, a process in which the start-up process is partially changed from that of the first embodiment is executed, but the rest is the same. The same process contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 563 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the start-up processing of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 563, when the start-up processing is executed, an initial setting processing (S951) is executed, and the rest of the processing (S951) is the same as that in the first embodiment described above.
902 to S917) are executed.

Here, the process of S951 differs from the above-mentioned initial setting process (S901) in that a process for setting a start-up command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 is not executed. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, information indicating that the start-up process of the main control device 110 has been executed is not output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the processing load of the control process executed by the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 564 and 565. The fifth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the start-up process (see Fig. 503) is replaced by the start-up process (see Fig. 564), and the standby process 5 (see S2051 in Fig. 565) is executed instead of the standby process (see S2012 in Fig. 505) executed in the start-up process (see Fig. 564). The rest of the processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 564, when the start-up process is executed, first, the standby process 5 is executed (S2
051), and then steps S2002 to S2003 are performed in the same manner as in the above-mentioned startup process (see FIG. 503).
Then, the process of step 14 is executed and the process ends.

Next, the processing contents of the standby process 5 (S2051) will be described with reference to FIG. 565. FIG. 565 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the standby process 5 (S2051). This standby process 5 (S2051) is the same as the standby process of the first embodiment described above (S in FIG. 505).
2012) in that a process related to reception of a boot completion command has been added, and otherwise the process is the same. The same process contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the standby process 5 (S2051) is executed, first, the standby process (
The same processes of S2071 to S2077 as those of S2012 in FIG. 505 are executed, and then
It is determined whether a boot completion command output from the display control device 114 has been received (S20
91). If it is determined in the process of S2091 that the boot completion command has been received (
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2091 that the boot completion command has not been received (S2091: No), the process of S2078 is executed, which is the same as the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 505) in the first embodiment described above, and the process proceeds to the main process.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the MPU 22 of the voice lamp control device 113
In the start-up process (see FIG. 564) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a process capable of determining that a boot completion command has been received is executed.
If the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed before the start-up process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, the process of setting the operation invalid timer 223s can be eliminated. Therefore, the process for starting up the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified. In addition, if the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed before the boot process of the third symbol display device 81, the operation invalid timer 223s is set as in the first embodiment described above, so that it is possible to prohibit the operation of the operating means (frame button 22) from being determined as valid before the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 is completed.

In this embodiment, a value indicating a predetermined period (5 seconds) is set in the operation invalidation timer 223s, thereby setting a period during which the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) is prohibited from being effectively determined. The value set in the operation invalidation timer 223s is set to a period longer than the period required for the boot process of the third symbol display device 81 to be completed.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to control so that operation of the operating means (frame button 22) is unconditionally disabled until the value set in the operation disable timer 223s is updated to 0, thereby simplifying the process for starting up the pachinko machine 10.

However, without being limited to this configuration, for example, if it is determined that the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 has not been completed at the time the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is completed, a wait flag to indicate that state may be set to on, and if it is determined that the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 has been completed, the wait flag may be set to off, and operation of the frame button 22 may be disabled while the wait flag is set to on.
By configuring in this manner, it becomes necessary to add a process to periodically determine the setting status of the standby flag, but it is possible to reliably disable operation of the frame button 22 until the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 and the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 have both been completed, and it is possible to reliably effectively determine operation of the frame button 22 at the timing when both the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 and the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 have been completed.

In this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine (specify) whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation means (frame button 22) and the content of the operation, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the display control device 114 may be configured to be able to determine whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation means (frame button 22) and the content of the operation. In this case, when the boot process of the third pattern display device 81 is completed, the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 may or may not be completed, i.e., after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the operation on the frame button 22 can be effectively determined, but the start-up process of all the control devices has not been completed, in the first case.
The processing contents in response to operations on the frame buttons 22 may be varied between a first state in which the start-up processing of all control devices in the pachinko machine 10 has been completed and normal play is possible, and a second state in which the start-up processing of all control devices in the pachinko machine 10 has been completed and normal play is possible.

Specifically, in the first state (during a setting change operation), when the frame button 22 is operated, a process for adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 is executed, and in the second state (during a game play state), when the frame button 22 is operated, in addition to the process for adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, a process for selecting a background mode and a process related to variable presentation are executed.
By switching the process content to be executed when the frame button 22 is operated depending on the startup status of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to execute only the operation appropriate for the startup status.

<Regarding the Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 566 to Fig. 570. In the first and second embodiments described above, when determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance, the performance period of the look-ahead performance that may be executed this time is calculated, the overlapping relationship between the calculated performance period and the SP time period is determined, and the execution of the look-ahead performance and the performance mode are determined based on the determination result. In this configuration, when the execution trigger for the look-ahead performance is established, the performance period of the look-ahead performance is calculated in detail and the overlapping relationship with the SP time period is determined, so that the look-ahead performance can be executed as much as possible. However, regardless of the timing at which the execution trigger for the look-ahead performance is established, it is necessary to execute a process to determine the overlapping relationship with the SP time period, and the voice lamp control device 1
This causes a problem that the processing load of the control processing executed by 13 increases.

In contrast to this, in the present sixth embodiment, the timing period from when the power is turned on can be specified based on the time information clocked by the timing device 292, and a prohibition period is defined for prohibiting the execution of the pre-reading performance within that timing period so that the SP time period and the performance period of the pre-reading performance do not overlap (are unlikely to overlap).

In other words, when the time count period enters a period in which the look-ahead performance is prohibited, the execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited without judging whether the execution trigger of the look-ahead performance has been established. In this way, by prescribing a period in which the execution of the look-ahead performance is prohibited (look-ahead prohibited period) for the time count period, it is possible to simplify the process of prohibiting (suppressing) the execution of a performance that is difficult for the player to understand when the look-ahead performance and the SP time performance are executed at the same time.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, different pre-reading prohibition periods are stipulated based on the number of reserved special figures and the presence or absence of a jackpot win in the reserved figures. In other words, the length of the pre-reading prohibition period is configured to be different between the case where a jackpot game is played until the pre-reading performance is executed or during the pre-reading performance, and the case where a jackpot game is not played until the pre-reading performance is executed or during the pre-reading performance.

In this way, by dividing the look-ahead performance into performance patterns in which the period until the look-ahead performance is executed (may be executed) is long, or the look-ahead performance period itself is long, and performance patterns in which the period until the look-ahead performance is executed is short, or the look-ahead performance period itself is short, and by specifying the look-ahead prohibition period corresponding to each pattern, it is possible to prevent the look-ahead prohibition period from becoming unnecessarily long. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the look-ahead performance and improve the performance effect.

In addition, in this sixth embodiment, depending on whether or not a jackpot has been won, the look-ahead performance period is divided into a first pattern (a performance pattern in which the period until the look-ahead performance is executed is long, or the look-ahead performance period itself is long) and a second pattern (a performance pattern in which the period until the look-ahead performance is executed is short, or the look-ahead performance period itself is short).

As a result, in a situation where the read-ahead performance period is lengthened (the period until the read-ahead performance is executed is lengthened) due to the association of the jackpot game period, a long read-ahead prohibition period is referenced, and in a situation where the jackpot game period is not associated, a short read-ahead prohibition period is referenced. In this way, by using the long period of the jackpot game period as a judgment material for identifying the read-ahead performance period, it is possible to prevent the read-ahead prohibition period from becoming unnecessarily long. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of execution of the read-ahead performance and improve the performance effect.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, which is different from the first and second embodiments described above, before executing the judgment of whether or not the pre-reading performance is executed, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance based on the position of the special reserved drawing that was won this time (the number of reserved special drawings) and the presence or absence of a jackpot win in the reserved special drawings that have already been acquired. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of the process of determining whether or not the pre-reading performance is executed during the pre-reading prohibition period, so that the processing load of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, the presence or absence of a jackpot win (the presence or absence of a jackpot game period) is used as an element for specifying the pre-reading prohibition period. However, without being limited thereto, for example, the type of jackpot game to be executed (number of rounds) may be used as an element, or a predetermined number (e.g.,
The determination result of whether or not one or more pieces of the special pattern are stored may be used as an element. In other words, when a pre-reading performance is executed based on the special pattern reservation acquired this time, it is sufficient to configure the corresponding pre-reading prohibition period to be specified using information that can roughly specify the timing at which the pre-reading performance period is set.

<Electrical Configuration in the Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 566 to Fig. 568. The sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed, but otherwise is the same. Detailed description of the same configuration will be omitted. First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 566. Fig. 566 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

As shown in Fig. 566, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment in that the effect switching table 222b is replaced with the effect switching 6 table 222fa, and the pre-reading prohibition period selection table 222d is replaced with the pre-reading prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The performance switching 6 table 222fa is the performance switching table 222b of the first embodiment described above.
(see FIG. 471), this is a data table that is referenced when switching between performance periods based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the timer 292. In this embodiment, different performances can be executed depending on the set performance period.
22fa is used to select a performance period for executing a performance (performance mode) performed by the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. Furthermore, in addition to the performance period, it is a data table in which a pre-reading prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of a process for determining whether or not to execute a pre-reading performance (pre-reading performance execution decision process (see S2509 in FIG. 570)).

This effect switching 6 table 222fa is referenced when a command is received to indicate that new winning information (special drawing reservation) has been acquired, and if it is determined that the pre-reading prohibition period applies, the pre-reading effect execution decision process (see S2509 in FIG. 570) is skipped. This makes it possible to suppress the pre-reading effect execution decision process (see S2509 in FIG. 570) from being executed during the pre-reading prohibition period, so that the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113
This simplifies the control process executed in 221 .

Here, the detailed contents of the performance switching 6 table 222fa will be described with reference to FIG. 567. FIG. 567 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the performance switching 6 table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 567, the performance switching 6 table 222fa differs from the performance switching table 222b (see FIG. 471) in that in addition to the performance period, the pre-reading prohibition period is defined by multiple types (prohibition levels). This prohibition level is determined by referring to the pre-reading prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb described later, and is configured so that different types are determined in response to the special chart reservation status when a command is received to indicate that new winning information (special chart reservation) has been acquired.

More specifically, the prohibition level is determined based on the number of reserved balls (1 to 8 balls) already acquired as the special reserved status, and the result of determining whether or not a jackpot game can be played during the period until the special pattern change corresponding to the reserved special symbol is executed (whether or not information indicating a jackpot win is included in the reserved special symbols other than the currently acquired reserved special symbol).Then, the prohibition level thus determined and the current elapsed time T (the elapsed time since the power was turned on) are used to determine the prohibition level.
Based on this, it is determined whether the pre-reading prohibition period applies, and if it is determined that the pre-reading prohibition period applies, the pre-reading performance execution decision process (see S2509 in FIG. 570) is skipped.

Here, referring to Figure 567, the contents stipulated in the performance switching 6 table 222fa will be explained in detail. The performance period is stipulated according to the elapsed time T (the time elapsed since the power was turned on) calculated based on the timing contents of the timing device 292, and the normal performance period is stipulated when the elapsed time T is within a range of 88 minutes.

Furthermore, within the elapsed time T during which the normal presentation period is specified, in the range where the elapsed time T is within 83 minutes, i.e., in the range where the grace period until the SP time period is set is 7 minutes or more, even if it is decided to execute a look-ahead presentation that includes the jackpot game period, or a look-ahead presentation that is executed after the end of the jackpot game (even if a long look-ahead presentation period is set), the SP time period and the look-ahead presentation period cannot overlap, so "no prohibitions" are specified.

In addition, among the elapsed times T for which the normal performance period is specified, when the elapsed time T is in the range of 83 minutes to 85 minutes and 10 seconds, "prohibition level 5" is set, when the elapsed time T is in the range of 85 minutes and 10 seconds to 85 minutes and 30 seconds, "prohibition level 4" is set, and when the elapsed time T is in the range of 85 minutes and 30 seconds to 85 minutes and 50 seconds, "
"Prohibition level 3" is defined for an elapsed time T in the range of 85 minutes 50 seconds to 86 minutes 10 seconds, "Prohibition level 2" is defined for an elapsed time T in the range of 86 minutes 10 seconds to 88 minutes, and "Prohibition level 1" is defined for an elapsed time T in the range of 86 minutes 10 seconds to 88 minutes.

In addition, the SP time preparation period is defined for the elapsed time T in the range of 88 minutes to 90 minutes.
During the time preparation period, "pre-reading prohibited" is specified, and the SP time period (for music A) is specified for the range of elapsed time T from 90 minutes to 93 minutes. After that, as with the effect switching table 222b of the first embodiment (see FIG. 471), the normal effect period, S
A P-time preparation period and an SP-time period are respectively defined, and different types of prohibition levels are defined according to the length of the grace period until the SP-time period is set.

The pre-reading prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb is a data table that is referenced when determining the type (prohibition level) of the corresponding pre-reading prohibition period, and different prohibition levels are stipulated based on the number of reserved special symbols to be judged (storage location of the target reserved symbol) and information indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot during the period (whether or not there is a jackpot in the reserved special symbols other than the target reserved symbol). In other words, in this pre-reading prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb, the period (period in which the pre-reading performance can be executed) until the special pattern change corresponding to the reserved target symbol is executed (until the pre-reading performance ends) is roughly specified based on the number of reserved special symbols and the presence or absence of a jackpot game, and it is configured to determine whether or not the pre-reading performance can be executed during the specified period.

Therefore, the larger the value of the target reservation, the more special pattern reservations are executed before the special pattern variation corresponding to the target reservation is executed, and the longer the period in which the pre-reading performance can be executed, the easier it is to determine a type with a long pre-reading prohibition period (high-level prohibition type) as the prohibition level. Similarly, if a jackpot game is executed before the special pattern variation corresponding to the target reservation is executed, the longer the period until the special pattern variation corresponding to the target reservation is executed (after the jackpot game ends), and the longer the period in which the pre-reading performance can be executed, the easier it is to determine a type with a long pre-reading prohibition period (high-level prohibition type) as the prohibition level.

On the other hand, the smaller the value of the target reservation, or if there is no information indicating a jackpot win in the special pattern reservation, the shorter the period until the special pattern change corresponding to the target reservation is executed.
As the prohibition level, a type with a short pre-read prohibition period (low-level prohibition type) is more likely to be determined.

Specifically, if the target reserve is "1" and there is a jackpot win during the period,
The prohibition level is set to "Level 5", and if there is no big win during the period, the prohibition level is set to "Level 1". In addition, if the target reservation is "2" and there is a big win during the period, the prohibition level is set to "Level 5", and if there is no big win during the period, the prohibition level is set to "Level 2". In addition, if the target reservation is "3" and there is a big win during the period, the prohibition level is set to "Level 5", and if there is no big win during the period, the prohibition level is set to "Level 3". In addition, if the target reservation is "4" and there is a big win during the period, the prohibition level is set to "Level 5", and if there is no big win during the period, the prohibition level is set to "Level 4".

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 569 and FIG. 570, the voice lamp control device 1 in the sixth embodiment will be described.
In the sixth embodiment, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of FIG. 13 will be described. In contrast to the first embodiment, the sixth embodiment includes a pre-reading effect execution determination process (S2306 in FIG. 509).
569) and in place of the winning command receiving process (see S2210 in FIG. 510), winning command receiving process 6 (see S2280 in FIG. 570) is executed, but otherwise they are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the pre-reading performance execution decision process 6 (S2376) will be described with reference to FIG. 569. FIG. 569 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the pre-reading performance execution decision process 6 (S2376). In this pre-reading performance execution decision process 6 (S2376), the information stored (reserved and stored) in the winning information storage area 223f is read, the number of stored pieces of information (number of reserved balls for special charts) and the presence or absence of information indicating a big win are read, and based on the processing result, a process is executed to determine whether the current time is a pre-reading prohibition period.

That is, unlike the first and second embodiments described above, the presenter determines the presentation mode (presentation period) of the look-ahead presentation that may actually be executed, and determines whether the presentation period of the determined look-ahead presentation overlaps with the SP time period, but rather roughly specifies the period in which the look-ahead presentation may be executed based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, determines the prohibition level corresponding to the specified period, and judges whether the determined prohibition level is a specified timing based on the elapsed time T. If the determined prohibition level is a specified timing, the process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead presentation and the process of determining the presentation mode of the look-ahead presentation are skipped, and if the determined prohibition level is not a specified timing, the process of determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead presentation and the process of determining the presentation mode of the look-ahead presentation are executable.

By configuring in this manner, there is no need to execute in advance the process of determining the presentation mode of a pre-reading presentation that may not be executed, thereby reducing the processing load of the control process (processing for determining various presentation contents) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

When this pre-reading performance execution decision process 6 (S2376) is executed, first, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223f (information indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, information indicating the variation pattern, information corresponding to the counter value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b (information indicating the number of reserved balls)) is read out (S2401), and then, based on the processing of S2401, information corresponding to the winning information command received before the currently received winning information command, i.e., information corresponding to the winning information command in which the special pattern variation is executed before the currently received winning information command, is extracted to see if it contains information indicating a jackpot win (S2402).

That is, in the processing of S2402, information (pre-read jackpot information) is extracted which is referenced when determining whether or not a jackpot game is likely to be executed before the special pattern change corresponding to the winning information command that is the target of this pre-read performance execution decision processing 6 (S2376) is executed.

Then, when the process of S2402 is completed, the current prohibition level (no prohibition, prohibition levels 1 to 5, pre-reading prohibited) is determined based on the contents (various information) extracted in the processes of S2401 and S2402 and the pre-reading prohibition period selection 6 table 222fb (S2471).
, referring to the performance switching 6 table 223fa, the current prohibition level is identified (S2
472), and it is determined whether the prohibition level determined in the process of S2471 is defined as the prohibition level at the current time (S2473). If it is determined that the prohibition level is defined (S2474),
2473), because it is impossible (difficult) to execute the pre-reading performance for the special reserved drawing corresponding to the winning information command received this time, a process for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance (S2475), and a process for determining the performance mode of the pre-reading performance (S2476 to S2479)
479) is skipped and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2473, if it is determined that the prohibition level determined in the process of S2471 is not defined as the prohibition level at the current time (S2473: No),
, determine whether to execute the pre-reading performance for the special reserved drawing corresponding to the winning information command received this time (S2474), and if it is determined that the pre-reading performance is not to be executed (S2474: N
o), and then terminate this process. Also, if it is determined that the pre-reading performance is to be executed, that is,
If it is determined that the received winning information command includes information for executing a look-ahead performance (S2474: Yes), it is determined whether the look-ahead performance to be executed this time is a look-ahead performance (a look-ahead performance using multiple look-ahead performances) using a variable performance (a variable performance executed in response to a special pattern change) (S2475), and if it is determined that it is a look-ahead performance using a variable performance (S2475: Yes), the continuous notice 223t is set to ON (S2476), the content of the determined look-ahead performance is stored in the performance status memory area 223h (S2478), and the number of times (number of changes) until the special pattern change (special pattern change) corresponding to the winning information that is the target of the look-ahead performance is reached is determined.
is set in the consecutive announcement counter 223u (S2479), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2475, if it is determined that the look-ahead performance will not be executed in the variable performance (the reserved look-ahead performance will be executed) (S2475; No), a display command is set to change the display mode of the target reserved pattern, and this processing is terminated.

Here, the performance mode of the above-mentioned look-ahead performance will be explained. Specifically, as a look-ahead performance using the performance period of the variable performance corresponding to three consecutive special pattern variations, a look-ahead display mode (for example, a display mode that displays a number that counts down every time a new variable performance (special pattern variation) is performed, a display mode that displays a variable display mode in which the color is changed every time a new variable performance (special pattern variation) is performed, or a display mode that displays the third pattern in a stop state with a display mode (so-called chance eye) to show the player that the look-ahead performance is in progress) is displayed to clearly inform the player that the look-ahead performance has been performed. Then, in the next variable performance (second variable performance), the look-ahead display mode to indicate that the look-ahead performance has been performed is displayed variably or continuously, to clearly inform the player that the look-ahead performance will continue. Finally, in the final change performance (the third change performance), a look-ahead performance is executed which displays the look-ahead result display mode to indicate that the current change performance is a change performance that is the target of the look-ahead performance (a special pattern change that is an element that determines the performance content of the look-ahead performance).

In this way, by executing a look-ahead performance using a variable performance, it is difficult for the player to know how long the look-ahead performance will continue, and since the performance results are displayed for each variable performance executed during the look-ahead performance, when the performance result of the variable performance is displayed, the player can expect that the current variable performance is a variable performance that shows the look-ahead result and that the lottery result for the corresponding special pattern will be a jackpot, as well as that the look-ahead performance will continue, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

The timing for displaying the display mode for informing the player that the variable performance is in the pre-reading performance in an easy-to-understand manner may be the start timing or end timing of the target variable performance. In other words, any timing that can make the player understand that the variable performance is in the pre-reading performance between the start of the variable performance and the start of the next variable performance is acceptable.

In addition, the period during which the display mode for informing the player that the variable performance during the pre-reading performance is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner may be set to the entire period during which the pre-reading performance is executed,
It may be configured to be displayed only at a specific timing (for example, the timing when the third symbol starts to change or the timing when the third symbol stops changing). Furthermore, it may be configured to be displayed across a plurality of change effects.

In this way, by changing the timing and display period of the display mode for easily informing the player that the variable performance is in the pre-reading performance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the variable performance in which the pre-reading performance has started or the variable performance in which the pre-reading performance has ended, and it is possible to provide a surprising performance, for example, a pre-reading performance that actually continues while making the player think that the pre-reading performance has ended. Therefore, the performance effect can be improved. In addition, although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the pre-reading performance using the variable performance, the more the number of variable performances (the number of special pattern variations) that are the target of the pre-reading performance, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the player will pay attention to the number of variable performances (the number of special pattern variations) executed during the pre-reading performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game by making it difficult for the player to grasp the variable performance in which the pre-reading performance has started or the variable performance in which the pre-reading performance has ended.

On the other hand, as a look-ahead performance executed without using a variable performance, a reserved look-ahead performance (see FIG. 449) using reserved symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. As shown in FIG. 449, this reserved look-ahead performance executes a performance that increases the expectation that the performance result of the look-ahead performance is a big win by changing the display mode of the reserved symbols in a state where the reserved symbols (special symbol variation) that are the target of the look-ahead performance (the performance result of the look-ahead performance is displayed) are clearly notified to the player. In other words, the look-ahead performance using the variable performance described above makes it difficult for the player to understand which reserved symbol (special symbol variation) is the target of the look-ahead performance, thereby making the player expect that the look-ahead performance will continue every time the variable performance ends, thereby enhancing the performance effect, whereas the reserved look-ahead performance enhances the performance effect by making the player expect that the display mode of the reserved symbols will be displayed in a display mode with a high expectation of winning a big win until the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved symbols that are the target of the look-ahead performance is executed.

In this way, by configuring the effect of the look-ahead performance to be enhanced by different factors depending on the mode of the look-ahead performance to be executed, it is possible to prevent the executed performance from becoming monotonous and the player from quickly becoming bored with the game. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to execute different modes of look-ahead performance as described above, a storage means may be provided that can temporarily store information about the modes of look-ahead performance executed in the past (number of times executed, execution content, performance result (win/lose judgment result)), and the mode of the look-ahead performance to be newly executed may be determined based on the information stored in the storage means. This makes it possible to prevent the mode of the look-ahead performance from becoming biased and the content of the executed performance from becoming monotonous.

Next, the processing contents of the winning command reception process 6 (S2280) will be described with reference to Fig. 570. Fig. 570 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the winning command reception process 6 (S2280). As shown in Fig. 570, the winning command reception process 6 (S2280) in this embodiment is the same as the winning command reception process of the first embodiment described above (Fig. 510).
(see S2210 in FIG. 569)
The difference is that the above is configured to be executable.

When the winning command receiving process 6 (S2280) is executed, first, steps S2501 to S2506, which are the same as those in the winning command receiving process of the first embodiment described above (see S2210 in FIG. 510), are performed.
Then, the process of pre-reading performance execution decision process 6 (S2509 (S2376)) is executed, and this process is terminated.

In addition, the processing related to S2510 to S2515 executed in the winning command receiving processing (see S2210 in FIG. 510) of the first embodiment described above is omitted in this figure because it is configured to be executed in the pre-reading performance execution decision processing 6 (see S2376 in FIG. 569) in this sixth embodiment. In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the pre-reading performance execution decision processing (S2306 in FIG. 509) is configured to be executable based on the discrimination results at two timings, and the sixth embodiment is also configured to be executable based on the discrimination results at the same two timings, but the detailed description of the processing contents (processing contents described in FIG. 508) on the side where the timing of execution (the opportunity required for execution) is the same is omitted.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 571 to Fig. 579. In the seventh embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment described above is that the performance content of the pseudo-variation performance (see Fig. 378(a)) executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode is different, and the rest is the same.
Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, that is, when the type of fluctuation pattern table referenced when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern fluctuation is switched to a state where a high-speed fluctuation pattern table in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be selected is referenced, if the player is notified that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, there is a possibility that the special pattern fluctuation will be executed in a fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation despite the notification that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, and a performance that feels strange to the player will be executed.In order to solve this problem, in addition to the high-speed fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation mode being set, the player is configured to be notified that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, provided that the fluctuation pattern actually determined is high-speed fluctuation.

In other words, when the special pattern actually changes at high speed, the player is notified that the high speed change mode has been set, and the information notified to the player matches the actual game content, providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Furthermore, in a state where the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the high-speed fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation (fluctuation time 1.5 seconds) is set to a fluctuation time of 6
When the second off fluctuation pattern is determined, the characters "Preparing for high-speed fluctuation" are displayed to inform the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode will soon arrive, without notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set (see FIG. 457(b)). In other words, internally, even though the game state has been shifted to one in which the high-speed fluctuation pattern table is referenced, the timing of notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set is delayed. And, until the fluctuation pattern of high-speed fluctuation (fluctuation time 1.5 seconds) is determined, the timing of notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set is delayed.

In addition, when a winning fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is determined as a fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation (fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds), if the process of delaying the notification timing for notifying that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set as described above is executed, the jackpot game will start without the player being aware that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, even though the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set. Therefore, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set a notification mode (a setting suggestion mode, a value-added performance video that cannot be seen anywhere else, etc.) that can give the player a bonus as a notification mode for notifying the player that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, there is a problem that even though the bonus could have been obtained, the player loses the opportunity to obtain the bonus by winning the jackpot, which reduces the player's motivation to play.

Therefore, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery executed immediately after the high-speed fluctuation mode is set is a big win and a fluctuation pattern other than the high-speed fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds) is determined, a notification mode is set to indicate that the high-speed fluctuation mode is set at the timing when the big win fluctuation (12-second fluctuation) starts, and a pseudo fluctuation performance (see FIG. 457) is executed during the fluctuation period of 12 seconds. In other words, it is configured to be possible to execute a fluctuation performance as if a plurality of special symbol fluctuations were executed during one special symbol fluctuation period.

Here, in the pseudo-variable performance (12 seconds) executed in the first embodiment described above, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 78(a), the pseudo-changing performance is configured to execute four pseudo-losing variations of 1.5 seconds and one pseudo-winning variation of 6 seconds. The player feels as if a special pattern variation (losing variation) of 1.5 seconds has been executed four times, followed by a special pattern variation of 6 seconds (
It was possible to make it seem as if a winning variation had been executed once, but in reality,
Since the variation performance is only executed multiple times (a total of 5 times) during one special pattern variation period,
As shown in Figure 378 (a), there was a problem in that the number of reserved patterns displayed to indicate the number of reserved special patterns did not change, making the player aware that a pseudo-variable performance was being executed.

In contrast, in the seventh embodiment, when a pseudo-variable performance is executed as a variable performance, the display area of the reserved pattern for indicating the reserved number of special figures is switched, and the pseudo-reserved pattern for the performance is displayed in the display area where the reserved pattern before the switching was displayed. The pseudo-reserved pattern is configured so that the number of displayed patterns varies (decreases) every time the pseudo-variable performance is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a performance in which the pseudo-reserved pattern decreases by one every time the pseudo-variable performance is executed, making it difficult for the player to know whether the variable performance being executed is a pseudo-variable performance or not.

In addition, since the actual number of reserved special charts is displayed in a separate display area, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the actual number of reserved special charts suddenly stops being displayed, confusing the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the number of pseudo-reserved symbols displayed is reduced by executing the pseudo-variable effect, and a vacant display area for displaying the pseudo-reserved symbols is free, the setting suggestion effect can be executed using the free display area. A detailed explanation will be given later, but when a winning information command including winning information of a new special symbol is received while a vacant display area is generated, a new pseudo-reserved symbol is displayed in the free display area, and the setting suggestion effect is executed using the display mode of the new pseudo-reserved symbol.

In other words, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 during the period in which the number of pseudo reserved symbols displayed is changed according to the number of times the pseudo variable performance is executed, a performance is executed in which the number of pseudo reserved symbols displayed increases. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily approximate the variable state of the pseudo performance executed using the pseudo variable performance and the pseudo reserved symbols to the variable state of the performance executed using the actual variable performance and the reserved symbols, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the variable performance being executed is a pseudo variable performance or not.

In addition, when a pseudo-variation performance is executed when the number of reserved special symbols has reached the upper limit, and an empty display area occurs during the pseudo-variation performance and a winning information command including winning information for a new special symbol is received, in other words, when the winning information command received this time is winning information that cannot be stored as a new reserved special symbol (overflow winning information), the display mode corresponding to a mode that makes it easier for the player to predict the setting value (strong suggestion mode) is more likely to be displayed than when the winning information is winning information that can be stored as a new reserved special symbol (normal winning information).

By configuring it in this way, even if the actual number of reserved special drawings has reached the upper limit,
The player can be motivated to play a game in which the ball is thrown into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, thereby improving the operation of the game.

<About the content of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 571 and 572, the content of the pseudo-variation performance executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode will be described as a characteristic content among various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment. Note that the notification mode for notifying that the high-speed fluctuation mode has been set, the conditions for executing the pseudo-variation performance during the high-speed fluctuation mode, and the basic performance content in the pseudo-variation performance are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 571(a), the display contents during the first pseudo-fluctuation performance (1.5-second off pseudo-fluctuation) among the pseudo-fluctuation performances executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode will be described. FIG. 571(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first pseudo-fluctuation performance among the pseudo-fluctuation performances executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode. As shown in FIG. 571(a), the display screen displayed during this performance differs from the display screen displayed during the pseudo-fluctuation performance in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 457(a)) in that the display contents of the sub-display area Ds have been changed and the display contents of a part of the main display area Dm have been changed, and the rest are the same. The same display contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 571(a), when the pseudo-variable performance is executed, instead of the reserved pattern display for indicating the number of reserved special figures displayed in the sub-display area Ds, the pseudo reserved pattern gm0 to
gm4 is displayed. Then, the message "" is displayed as a notification to indicate that the high-speed variable mode has been set.
The character J0 is displayed as if he is uttering the comment "Speed up."

In addition, a display area HR2 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and the value of "4" is displayed as a reserved number display mode to indicate the actual reserved number of special drawings. In other words, the figure shown in FIG. 571 (a) shows a state in which the reserved number of special drawings is 4.

Then, from the state shown in FIG. 571(a) (the state where the first pseudo-variable performance is completed),
When the second pseudo-fluctuation performance (1.5 second deviation) is executed, the display screen shown in Fig. 571 (b) is displayed. Fig. 571 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the second pseudo-fluctuation performance among the pseudo-fluctuation performances executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode.

As shown in FIG. 571(b), when a new (second) pseudo-variation performance is executed, the pseudo-reserved pattern displayed in the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a sliding manner. As a result, the first pseudo-reserved pattern gm0 was displayed on the pedestal m0 for the active pattern during the execution of the first pseudo-variation performance, but the second pseudo-reserved pattern gm1 is displayed on the pedestal m0 for the active pattern in response to the new (second) pseudo-variation performance. Then, the third pseudo-reserved pattern gm2 to the fifth pseudo-reserved pattern gm4 are also displayed in order in a sliding manner, and an empty display area is generated on the pedestal m4 for the fourth reserved pattern.

Then, a flag icon with the words "special symbol display zone" is displayed as a notification mode to indicate that the vacant display area generated in the fourth reserved symbol base m4 will be the execution area of the setting suggestion effect, and a display mode in which the character J0 is making the comment "Zone appears" is displayed. Note that the detailed effect content regarding the special symbol display zone is the same as that of the third embodiment (see FIG. 549) described above, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that FIG.
In the state shown in FIG. 71(b), the special pattern change being executed in the state shown in FIG. 571(a) continues to change, so the number of reserved special patterns displayed in the display area HR2 formed in the main display area Dm remains at "4."

In the state shown in FIG. 571(b), when the player puts the ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a new pseudo reserved pattern is displayed in the special pattern display zone in a display manner that includes a setting suggestion manner.

Next, referring to FIG. 572, the reserved symbol display contents during the high-speed variable mode will be described. FIG. 572(a) is a diagram showing the transition status of the game mode (game status) of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 572(b) is a diagram showing the transition status of the special symbol variable number of times, and FIG. 572(c) is a diagram showing the transition status of the special symbol variable number of times.
572(a) is a diagram showing an overview of the performance executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 572(b) is a diagram showing the transition status of the reserved ball number of the special symbol (the reserved number of special symbols).
Figure 72 (e) is a diagram showing the transition status of the display mode of the small display area (pending display area) Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and Figure 572 (f) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display area (switching display area) HR2 of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the process of transitioning from the high-speed variable mode to the high-speed variable mode is the same as that in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 458), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Until the high-speed fluctuation mode is set, as shown in FIG. 572(e), the reserved display area Ds
In the reserved display area Ds1, the reserved patterns corresponding to the reserved number of special drawings are displayed in the number corresponding to the reserved number of special drawings. Even when the high-speed change mode is set, if the determined special drawing change time is 1.5 seconds (high-speed change), the reserved patterns corresponding to the reserved number of special drawings are continuously displayed in the reserved display area Ds1 (the reserved display period of the special drawing is set).

On the other hand, when the high-speed fluctuation mode is set and a non-high-speed fluctuation (a jackpot fluctuation of 12 seconds in the figure) is set, a pseudo-fluctuation effect is executed, a pseudo-reserved pattern is displayed in the reserve display area Ds1, and the number of reserved special patterns is displayed in the switching display area HR2.

As shown in Fig. 572(e), when the pseudo-reserved pattern is displayed, the display number is subtracted each time the pseudo-variation performance is executed. Note that, since five pseudo-variation performances are executed during the variation period of the 82nd special pattern variation (12-second jackpot variation), as shown in Fig. 572(d), the special pattern reservation number is not subtracted during the pseudo-variation performance.

In this state, when a new winning (a start winning of a special pattern) occurs, the number of reserved special patterns is added and the pseudo reserved pattern is also added. When the pseudo reserved pattern is added and displayed, a new pseudo reserved pattern is displayed in the special pattern display zone shown in FIG. 571 (b), so that a setting suggestion performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 572, in this embodiment, the reserved display area Ds1 is configured to always display the special reserved or pseudo reserved pattern. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable when the pseudo reserved pattern is displayed. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand that the pseudo-variable performance is being performed, the reserved display area Ds1 is hidden when the pseudo-variable performance is performed (the special reserved pattern is not displayed to make it difficult to determine whether or not the special reserved number is being subtracted), so the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 572 (e), the initial display mode when the pseudo reserved pattern is displayed is set to a display mode corresponding to the reserved number of special patterns displayed in the reserved display area Ds1 just before. This makes it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when the pattern to be displayed is switched.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the MPU 2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the electrical configuration of the third embodiment.
21 is the same except that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the RAM 221 is changed.
Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

FIG. 573 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 573, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment is the same as the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment.
550(b) in that a pseudo pending display flag 223ga and a pseudo free space storage area 223gb are newly provided, but otherwise they are the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is a pseudo-hold pattern gm according to the execution of the pseudo-variable performance.
is displayed, and is set to ON when the pseudo-reserved pattern gm is displayed. It is referred to when determining whether a pseudo performance using the pseudo-reserved pattern gm is being performed, and is set to OFF when a stop command indicating that the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed is received while the pseudo-reserved display flag 223ga is set to ON.

The pseudo empty area storage area 223gb is a memory area in which information indicating that, when a pseudo performance using the pseudo-reserved pattern gm is being executed, the pseudo-reserved pattern gm slides (shifts) and an empty display area is generated is stored, and the number of empty display areas, i.e., the number of new pseudo-reserved patterns gm that can be additionally displayed, is stored.

The information stored in this pseudo empty area storage area 223gb is updated to correspond to the number of newly generated empty display areas when a new empty display area occurs, i.e., when the pseudo-reserved pattern gm slides (shifts) in response to the execution of a pseudo-variable performance, and is updated when a new pseudo-reserved pattern is displayed.

<Regarding the control process in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the control process contents in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 574 to 579. In the seventh embodiment, some of the control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are different from those in the third embodiment described above, but the rest of the control process contents are the same.
The contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the third embodiment are the same as those of the third embodiment except that the winning command receiving process 7 (see S2260 in FIG. 554) is replaced with the winning command receiving process 3 (see S2260 in FIG. 554).
574 (see S22690 in FIG. 574) is replaced with the stop processing (see S2214 in FIG. 513) and the stop processing 7 (see S2294 in FIG. 575) is replaced with the time-saving/probability-change performance setting processing (see S31 in FIG. 517).
577) and the LCD performance execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 557) is replaced with the LCD performance execution management process 7 (see S2190 in FIG. 578), but otherwise they are the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

First, the processing contents of the winning command reception process 7 (S2290) will be described with reference to FIG. 574. FIG. 574 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the winning command reception process 7 (S2290). This winning command reception process 7 (S2290) is different from the winning command reception process 3 of the third embodiment described above (see S2260 in FIG. 554) in that the processing contents executed when it is determined that the period performance flag 223p is set to on (S2502: Yes) are different, and the rest are the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

When the winning command reception process 7 (S2290) is executed, first, the winning information indicated by the received command is stored (set) in the winning information storage area 223f (S2501), and it is determined whether the period effect flag 223p is ON, that is, whether the SP time effect is currently being performed (S2502).
Then, when it is determined that the period effect flag 223p is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S2502: No), the same steps S2503 to S2512 and S2513 as those in the winning command receiving process 3 of the third embodiment (see S2260 in FIG. 554) are carried out.
Then, the process in step 60 is executed and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2502, when it is determined that the period effect flag 223p is on (S2502: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current state is a high-speed fluctuation state (S2591).
), if it is determined that the number is fluctuating at high speed (S2591: Yes), a process for setting the winning performance during high speed display is executed (S2592) to set the performance mode when a winning command is received during high speed fluctuation, and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S2591 that the number is not fluctuating at high speed (S2591: No), the process of S2592 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the high-speed display winning performance setting process (S2592) will be described with reference to FIG. 575. FIG. 575 is a flow chart for showing the processing contents of the high-speed display winning performance setting process (S2592). This high-speed display winning performance setting process (S2592) is a process executed when it is determined that a winning command is received during high-speed fluctuation (during special pattern fluctuation in a state where the high-speed fluctuation mode is set) in the winning command receiving process 7 (see S2290 in FIG. 574).

In this high-speed display winning effect setting process (S2592), a process is executed to set an effect in which a pseudo-reserved pattern is displayed in a pseudo-empty area. Here, when displaying a normal reserved pattern, in the reserved ball count command process (see S2208 in FIG. 508) executed when a reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110 is received, the number of reserved balls included in the received reserved ball count command is extracted, and the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a or special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223b) is updated to the extracted reserved ball count (S2301 in FIG. 508), and a process is executed to display the reserved pattern in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds to correspond to the updated value. However, since the pseudo reserved patterns are configured so that the number of displayed patterns can increase not only when the number of special reserved balls increases, but also when the number of special reserved balls does not increase despite balls entering the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 (in the case of an overflow winning), the pseudo reserved patterns are executed when a winning information command output from the main control unit 110 is received.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, it may be configured so that the number of pseudo reserved patterns displayed increases only when a reserved ball number command is received, as in the case of normal reserved pattern display, or the number of pseudo reserved patterns displayed increases when a player performs a specific operation on the frame button 22. In other words, since the pseudo reserved patterns are not a display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of a special pattern, but a display mode that is subtracted according to the number of times the pseudo-variable performance is performed, it is sufficient that the number of displayed patterns is changed (subtracted) each time a new pseudo-variable performance is performed, and the number of displayed patterns may be changed (added) according to other requirements.

When the high-speed display winning performance setting process (S2592) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is set to ON (S4501). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S4501: Yes), it is next determined whether the winning information command received this time is a special winning, that is, a winning information command set based on the ball entering the ball entrance (first ball entrance 64, second ball entrance 640, right second ball entrance 640r) that may be a trigger for executing the special pattern lottery (S4502). If it is determined that it is a special winning (S4502: Yes),
), it is determined whether there is any pseudo free space based on the information stored in the pseudo free space storage area 223gb (S4503).

In the process of S4503, if it is determined that there is a pseudo free area (S4503: Yes),
s), it is determined whether the special winning symbol received this time is an overflow winning symbol (S4504), and if it is determined that it is an overflow winning symbol (S4504: Yes), a display mode corresponding to a suggestion mode (high suggestion mode) that makes it easy for the player to predict the setting value as the setting suggestion effect to be executed in the pseudo empty area is determined (S4505), and then the information of the pseudo empty area stored in the pseudo empty area storage area 223gb is updated to correspond to the pseudo empty area in which the setting suggestion effect will be executed in the processing of S4505 (S4507), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4504 that the winning combination is not an overflow winning combination (S
4504: No), and a display mode corresponding to a suggestion mode in which it is difficult for the player to predict the setting value (low suggestion mode) is determined as the setting suggestion effect to be executed for the pseudo empty space (S4506). After that, the information on the pseudo empty space stored in the pseudo empty space storage area 223gb is updated to correspond to the pseudo empty space in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the processing of S4505 (S4507).
Then, this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of stop process 7 (S2294) will be explained with reference to FIG. 576. FIG. 576 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of stop process 7 (S2294). This stop process 7 (S2294) differs from the above-mentioned stop process (see S2214 in FIG. 513) in that it adds processing for the case where the pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is set to on, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted. Note that, for the sake of convenience, in FIG. 576, the stop process (S2 in FIG. 513) is shown as
The processes of S2801 to S2804 executed in the process (see S214) are described in S2894.
However, the processing content that is actually executed is the same, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

When the stop process 7 (S2294) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is set to ON (S2891). If it is determined that the pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is set to ON (S2891: Yes), the pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is set to OFF (S289
2), clear (erase) the information stored in the pseudo free space storage area 223gb (
S2893). After that, the same processing as the above-mentioned stop processing (see S2214 in FIG. 513) is executed for the SP time period 2805 to S2813, other processing is executed (S2894), the corresponding stop display of the third symbol is set (S2814), and this processing is terminated.
In the process of S2891, if it is determined that the pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is not set to ON (S2891: No), the processes of S2892 and S2893 are skipped and the process of S2893 is
Then, proceed to processing 2805.

Next, referring to FIG. 577, the processing contents of the time-saving/probability-changing performance setting process 7 (S3192) will be described. FIG. 577 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the time-saving/probability-changing performance setting process 7 (S3192). This time-saving/probability-changing performance setting process 7 (S3192) is different from the time-saving/probability-changing performance setting process of the first embodiment described above (see S3102 of FIG. 517) in that a process for determining the performance mode for displaying the pseudo-reserved pattern is added when the performance mode corresponding to the pseudo-variable performance is determined, and the rest is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When the time-saving/probability-changing performance setting process 7 (S3192) is executed, the same steps S3201 to S320 as the time-saving/probability-changing performance setting process (see S3102 in FIG. 517) of the first embodiment described above are performed.
Then, when the process of S3206 is completed, that is, when the process for determining the presentation mode that is the pseudo-variation presentation for the fluctuation pattern (non-high-speed fluctuation pattern) with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds in the high-speed fluctuation mode (S3206) is completed, the presentation mode for displaying the pseudo-reserved pattern is determined (S3291), the pseudo-reserved display flag 223ga is set to ON (S3292), and the process proceeds to S3205.

In the process of S3291, the display area of the reserved pattern for indicating the reserved ball count of the special pattern is switched to a display area dedicated to the pseudo-variation performance (see display area HR2 in FIG. 571(a)), and the display mode for switching the display mode of the reserved pattern to a display mode dedicated to the pseudo-variation performance (display mode indicated by the numbers displayed in display area HR2 in FIG. 571(a)), and the display mode for displaying the pseudo-reserved pattern in the display area in which the reserved pattern before the switching was displayed (sub-display area Ds in FIG. 571(a)) are determined. In this way, by configuring the process to determine the display mode of the pseudo-variation performance so that the execution timing of the pseudo-variation performance and the execution timing of the pseudo-reserved pattern display are also determined, it is possible to synchronize the execution timing of the pseudo-variation performance and the execution timing of the pseudo-reserved pattern display, and therefore it is possible to execute a performance that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, when the pseudo-variable performance and the performance using the pseudo-reserved pattern are executed, the background image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is switched to a dedicated background image, and the display mode of the pseudo-reserved pattern is made different from the display mode of the normal reserved pattern, and is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the dedicated background image.

Next, referring to FIG. 578, the processing contents of the LCD performance execution management process 7 (S2190) will be described. FIG. 578 is a flowchart for showing the processing contents of the LCD performance execution management process 7 (S2190). This LCD performance execution management process 7 (S2190) is different from the LCD performance execution management process 3 of the above-mentioned third embodiment (see S2160 in FIG. 557) in that a process executed when the pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is set to ON is added, and otherwise it is the same. The same contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

When the LCD performance execution management process 7 (S2190) is executed, first, the same steps S4301 to S431 as those of the LCD performance execution management process 3 (see S2160 in FIG. 557) of the third embodiment described above are performed.
2, and then it is determined whether the pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is set to ON (S4391). If it is determined that the pseudo-hold display flag 223ga is set to ON (S4391; Yes),
), a pseudo-reserved effect setting process is executed to determine the effect content when the pseudo-reserved symbol is displayed (S4392), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4391, if it is determined that the pseudo-reserved display flag 223ga is not set to ON (S43
91: No), the process of S4392 is skipped, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 579, the contents of the pseudo-hold effect setting process (S4392) executed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process 7 (S2190 in FIG. 578) will be described.
is a flowchart showing the process of the pseudo-reserved effect setting process (S4392). In this pseudo-reserved effect setting process (S4392), a process for switching the effect mode of various effects being executed in response to elapsed time is executed.

When the pseudo-reserved effect setting process (S4392) is executed, it is determined whether it is the timing to start a pseudo-fluctuation (pseudo-fluctuation effect) (S4601). If it is determined that it is the start timing (S4602), it is the timing to execute a new pseudo-fluctuation effect, so a slide display mode for sliding (shifting) the display position of the pseudo-reserved pattern in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-fluctuation (pseudo-fluctuation effect) is determined (S4602). It is determined whether there is a pseudo-empty display area in the pseudo-reserved pattern display area (S4603). If it is determined that there is a pseudo-empty display area (S4604),
4603: Yes), the information stored in the pseudo free space storage area 223gb is updated to correspond to the contents of the pseudo free space after the sliding movement (S4604), and this process is terminated.
In addition, if the processing of S4601 determines that it is not the timing to start the pseudo-fluctuation (pseudo-fluctuation presentation) (S4601: No), or if the processing of S4603 determines that there is no pseudo-free space (S4603: No), this processing is terminated.

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, the pseudo-reserved pattern, the display number of which is subtracted in response to the execution of the pseudo-variation effect, is displayed in a switched manner with the reserved pattern for indicating the reserved ball count of the special pattern. Therefore, when a pseudo-variation effect in which a pseudo-variation effect is executed multiple times during one special pattern variation period is executed, it is possible to easily make the player believe that one pseudo-variation effect is being executed for one special pattern variation.

In the seventh embodiment, the display area where the reserved symbol for indicating the reserved ball number of the special symbol was displayed is used to display the pseudo reserved symbol, and during the period when the pseudo variable performance is being performed, the reserved symbol for indicating the reserved ball number of the special symbol is displayed in another display area. This allows the pseudo reserved symbol to be displayed without any sense of incongruity to the player.

Furthermore, during the pseudo-variable performance, the pseudo reserved symbols are displayed in a display manner that is easier for the player to grasp than the reserved symbols for indicating the reserved ball count of the special symbols. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the increase or decrease in the number of pseudo reserved symbols displayed than to the reserved symbols for indicating the reserved ball count of the special symbols.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when the number of pseudo reserved symbols displayed is reduced (sliding) with the execution of the pseudo variation performance, a pseudo empty display area is generated, and when a specific condition is met (when a ball enters the ball entrance that triggers the execution of the special symbol lottery), a new pseudo reserved symbol is displayed. Therefore, it is easy to make the player think that the pseudo reserved symbol is a reserved symbol for indicating the reserved number of special symbols.

Furthermore, when the pseudo-variable performance is executed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, that is, when the pseudo-empty area is displayed when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has reached the upper limit, a new pseudo reserved symbol can be displayed based on the ball entering the ball entrance (overflow winning), which is the trigger for the execution of the special symbol lottery. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player believe that the pseudo reserved symbol is a reserved symbol for indicating the number of reserved special symbols.

In addition, the display mode of the pseudo reserved symbols displayed in the pseudo empty area is used to implement a setting suggestion effect, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play the game.

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, the number of reserved patterns (pseudo reserved patterns) displayed is reduced each time the pseudo-variation performance is executed, making it easier for the player to believe that the pseudo-variation performance is a special pattern variation performance. However, other configurations may be used to prevent the player from easily understanding that the pseudo-variation performance is being executed. For example, a configuration may be used in which the number of reserved patterns indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern appears to have decreased when the pseudo-variation performance is executed by changing the display mode of the reserved patterns indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern. In this case, for example, when the pseudo-variation performance is executed in a state in which four reserved patterns indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern are displayed, the display mode of the fourth reserved pattern may be changed to a display mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than usual, so as to execute a performance that makes the player believe that the number of reserved balls of the special pattern has become three.

Here, as a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp, for example, the display magnification rate of the fourth reserved pattern is made smaller than that of the other reserved patterns, the transparency of the fourth reserved pattern is made higher than that of the other reserved patterns, the display color of the fourth reserved pattern is made closer to the color of the background image than the display color of the other reserved patterns, and the display color of the fourth reserved pattern is made closer to the color of the background image than the display color of the other reserved patterns. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the pseudo-variable performance is a special pattern-variable performance without using a pseudo-reserved pattern, so that the processing load and performance data capacity for executing the pseudo-variable performance without the player feeling strange can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the reserved pattern (pseudo reserved pattern) is used as the display target whose display number varies according to the execution of the pseudo-variation performance, but it is not limited to this, and other display modes may be used. Also, in this seventh embodiment, the pseudo-reserved pattern is configured to be continuously displayed while the pseudo-variation performance is being executed, but it is not limited to this, and at least, it is sufficient that the display number of the target display mode (pseudo reserved pattern) is reduced according to the timing when the pseudo-variation performance is executed, and it may be configured to temporarily hide the target display mode after the display number is reduced.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of pseudo-reserved patterns displayed when the pseudo-variation performance is executed is configured to be displayed as a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special pattern, so that the reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern can be switched to the pseudo-reserved pattern without giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, without being limited to this, for example, the initial number of pseudo-reserved patterns to be displayed may be determined based on the number of times the pseudo-variation performance is executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a pseudo-empty display area is formed, only the area within the pseudo-empty display area becomes a special pattern display zone in which setting suggestion effects can be executed, but without being limited to this, a predetermined area or the entire area of the display area behind the display area in which the pseudo-empty area is formed may be used as the special pattern display zone.

In addition, in this seventh embodiment, the presentation content of the pseudo-reserved pattern (variable content of the number of displays) when multiple pseudo-variation presentations are executed using the entire period of one special pattern variation has been explained, but the technical ideas used in this seventh embodiment may be used for other technologies, and for example, the various technical ideas explained in this seventh embodiment may be applied when three or more pseudo-variation presentations are executed using the variation period of two or more consecutive special pattern variations.

Furthermore, in the case where a pseudo-variation performance is executed once for multiple special symbol variations, the number of reserved symbols indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is reduced during the pseudo-variation performance, and as a technical idea to prevent the player from easily grasping that the variation performance being executed is a pseudo-variation performance, the technical idea of the above-mentioned seventh embodiment, that is, a technique of displaying a pseudo-reserved symbol instead of a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and varying (reducing) the number of displayed pseudo-reserved symbols based on the number of executions of the pseudo-variation performance, may be used. This makes it possible to prevent the player from easily grasping that the variation performance being executed is a pseudo-variation performance.

<Regarding the Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the restrictions imposed during the setting change and the displayed contents are also different, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, while the process of changing the setting value of the gaming machine is being executed, that is, when the start-up process of the main control device 110 is not completed, the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 is not completed regardless of the progress of the boot process of the display control device 114, so the operation of the operation means such as the frame button 22 is set to be invalid. In contrast, in the eighth embodiment, the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b are provided as operation means, and even during the setting change operation, one of the operation means (the second frame button 22b) is set to be invalid.
The difference is that the operation on the

Specifically, in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 503), a first operation valid setting process for validating the operation of the second frame button 22b is executed before the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 505) for waiting for a command (initialization command) to indicate that the setting change operation is completed from the main control device 110. In this first operation valid setting process, a setting process for validating the operation of only some of the operation means among the multiple operation means possessed by the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

Then, in the process executed after the standby process (see S2012 in FIG. 505), a second operation validity setting process for validating operations on all operating tools is configured to be executable.

Here, the operation means whose operation is determined to be valid in the first operation validity setting process is an operation means capable of performing operations other than the operation of writing information to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, that is, an operation means (frame button 22b) for performing an operation (change operation) to change some information (for example, change the volume or brightness), rather than an operation means for determining some change information (for example, information indicating the result of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment).

In other words, even during a setting change operation, an operation to change the volume or brightness is determined as valid, but the operation means (frame button 22a) for performing an operation (decision operation) to confirm (write the changed volume or brightness into the memory area of RAM 223) is configured to be valid after the setting change operation is completed.
Since it becomes possible to execute a change operation for changing information, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of tasks in an overlapping manner, thereby improving the work efficiency.

Here, when the setting change operation is being performed, the boot process of the display control device 114 may or may not have been completed. When the boot process is not completed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 does not display information related to the change operation, so when the change operation is performed, it is difficult for the operator to grasp the extent to which the change operation has been performed. Even if the boot process is completed, the operator is facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting change operation is being performed, and the third
Since the display surface of the pattern display device 81 is difficult to see, it becomes difficult to grasp the contents of the change operation by visually checking the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the volume output from the audio output device 226 during the setting change is varied according to the change operation, making it easier for the operator to understand the degree of the change operation. With this configuration, the operator facing the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can understand the change operation contents by audio, making it possible to perform multiple tasks at the same time, thereby improving work efficiency.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, an environmental status notification (audio output) can be executed by switching between the default environmental status (initial volume level) set in the initialization state and the environmental status changed by the change operation (changed volume level). This allows the operator to relatively grasp the changed environmental status compared to the case where only the environmental status changed by the change operation (changed volume level) is notified, so that the operator can easily grasp the content of the change operation in a situation where it is difficult to visually grasp the content of the change operation.

Here, the display contents displayed during a setting change operation in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 580. Fig. 580(a) is a diagram showing a typical display screen during a setting change, and Fig. 580(b) is a diagram showing a typical display screen when the volume level is changed during the setting change.

As shown in FIG. 580(a), when the setting change operation is being performed after the boot process of the display control device 114 is completed, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 displays "setting change in progress."
The character "YES" is displayed, and information indicating which operating means the worker can operate and which operating means the worker cannot operate in the current situation is displayed in the display area HR31. In the diagram shown in Fig. 580(a), information is displayed indicating that the frame button 22b (shown by a triangle mark in the diagram) is valid and that the frame button 22a (shown by a circle mark in the diagram) is invalid. This makes it possible to clearly notify which operating means the worker can operate at the current time.

In the display area HR30, a display mode showing the volume level is displayed as the default environmental information set in the initial state, and in the figure, a display mode showing that the second volume level out of the three volume levels is set as the default environmental information is displayed. This volume level shows that the volume output from the audio output device 226 can be varied by changing the volume level, and the volume output from the audio output device 226 increases when the volume level is increased. In Fig. 580(a), the numbers filled in black indicate the volume level, and a state in which all three are filled in black indicates volume level 3, at which the maximum volume is output.

In addition, during the setting change, the message "setting change in progress" is output at a default volume level as a notification mode for notifying the user by voice that the setting is currently being changed from the audio output device 226. This allows the current situation to be easily notified to an operator who is in a position where the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 cannot be seen (for example, an operator who is positioned on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change operation). In addition, even if an unauthorized setting change operation is performed, the situation can be quickly detected.

In this embodiment, since operation of the frame button 22b is effectively determined during this setting change, and the volume level can be changed even while the setting is being changed, a display mode is displayed on the display screen to notify the user that the volume level can be changed by operating the frame button 22b.

The display contents shown in FIG. 580(a) are all commands (
For example, image data is stored as a default image (initial image) to be displayed when a command indicating that the start-up process is complete or a command indicating that the setting change process is complete has not been received. Note that the explanation of this initial image is the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 580(a), when the frame button 22b is operated, the state shown in FIG.
As shown in the figure, the volume adjustment text is displayed and the volume level (
A display mode showing the volume level (volume level 3) is displayed in the display area HR30. The sound output device 226 alternates between the default volume level (volume level 2) and the changed volume level (volume level 3) to output the message "settings being changed." This allows the current situation to be clearly notified to an operator who is in a position where the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 cannot be seen (for example, an operator who is positioned on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 to perform a setting change operation). Furthermore, even if an unauthorized setting change operation is performed, the situation can be quickly detected.

As explained above, in the eighth embodiment, even when settings are being changed, i.e., when the initialization process (start-up process) of the pachinko machine 10 has not yet been fully completed, some of the operation means can be configured to be effectively distinguishable, making it possible to execute multiple tasks in an overlapping manner, thereby improving work efficiency.

In the eighth embodiment, the operation invalid period is set to be different for a plurality of types of operation means while the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are being changed. However, the timing for setting the operation invalid period is not limited to when the settings of the pachinko machine 10 are being changed, and may be during the initialization process, or may be a period in which the initialization process of the pachinko machine 10 has been completed and the setting state is switched to a different setting state from the normal playable state by the operator performing a specific operation, or
It may be a period during which an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10 and play is temporarily disabled. Also, in a normal playable state, a configuration may be made in which an operation invalid period is set for a period during which an effect that makes it look like the effect being executed has stopped midway (freeze effect) is being executed, or it may be a period during which the time counted by the timer 292 exceeds a specific time (for example, the closing time of the game arcade).

<Another example of setting suggestion>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is varied according to the set period, and the setting suggestion effect is executed within each period. In other words, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to the set period, and the determined setting suggestion effect is executed within the period.

In contrast to this, in this other example, the period for deciding to execute the setting suggestion effect and the period for actually executing the setting suggestion effect can be configured to be different.

Specifically, when a specific condition (for example, a condition that is met when a jackpot is won or a condition that is met when the number of reaches reaches a specified number (three times)) is met during a specific period (for example, during a SP time period or during a special probability state), a display mode that can be an element indicating a setting suggestion effect (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle with a missing piece) is displayed as the right to execute the setting suggestion effect.

Next, in a state where the execution right of the setting suggestion performance is established, additional information (e.g., puzzle pieces) can be acquired. More specifically, a determination means for determining whether or not to acquire additional information based on an operation on an operation means, and an acquisition means for acquiring additional information when the number of prize balls acquired during the period from the establishment of the execution right reaches a predetermined number unit (e.g., 1000 units) are provided.

Then, in a state in which the right to execute the setting suggestion effect has been established, each time additional information is acquired, an effect is executed in which a display mode (element) corresponding to the additional information is added to a display mode that can be an element indicating the setting suggestion effect (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle with missing pieces). Then, when a sufficient amount of additional information has been added, a display mode for suggesting a setting value is formed (the setting suggestion effect is executed).

By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has acquired the right to execute a setting suggestion effect within a specific period of time to continue playing until the setting suggestion effect is executed, thereby improving game operation.

In addition, when using the configuration of the above-mentioned alternative example, it is advisable to set an upper limit on the period during which the right to execute the setting suggestion effect is held. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play in order to execute the setting suggestion effect within the period during which the right to execute the setting suggestion effect is held.

In addition, when an upper limit is set for the period during which the right to execute a setting suggestion effect is held, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that an extension condition for extending the upper limit period (for example, a condition that is established when a specific type of reach effect is executed, a condition that is established when a specific operation is performed on the operating means, or a condition that is established when a jackpot of a specific jackpot type is won) can be set, and a process for extending the upper limit period is executed when it is determined that the extension condition is established. By configuring in this way, the player is motivated to play in order to execute a setting suggestion effect during the period during which the right to execute a setting suggestion effect is held, and it is also possible to have the player play in order to make it easier to execute a setting suggestion effect by extending the upper limit period, thereby motivating the player to participate in the game.

In addition, the upper limit period may be abolished if a special condition different from the extension condition (for example, consecutive pending) is met.

Furthermore, in the case where the upper limit period is settable, it is preferable to be able to notify the player of the remaining time until the upper limit period, thereby providing a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, as a display mode that can be an element indicating a fixed hint effect (for example, a display mode showing a puzzle with missing pieces), it is preferable to set a display mode that allows the setting to be gradually guessed each time additional information is added. This allows the player to predict the setting value even if it is not possible to obtain all the additional information.

<Definition of setting suggestion>
Next, another example of the presentation form of the setting suggestion presentation used in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be explained. Here, the setting suggestion presentation is not only a presentation for the purpose of providing the player with information to indicate the setting value, but also all presentation forms selected based on information regarding the setting value.

In addition, the execution of a presentation not only means displaying a display mode that is visible to the player, as explained in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, but also includes, within the concept of executing a presentation, a display mode that is not visible to the player.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, an example is shown in which a specific display mode is displayed as a setting suggestion effect, but without being limited to this, the concept of setting suggestion effect also includes a mode in which multiple types of display modes that are individually set are displayed in an overlapping manner to allow the player to guess the setting value.

<First Modification>
Next, a first modified example of the process related to the operation of the operation means during the start-up process described in the first and eighth embodiments will be described. In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the operation invalid period is set for the operation means (frame button 22, etc.) provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 444), but the target operation means may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 446). In this case, the operation means (management operation means) provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided in a position that is impossible (difficult) for the player to operate, and is used as a management operation means that can set the environment of the pachinko machine 10 by an operator operating it.

Specifically, it is preferable to configure the adjustment range of the volume level and brightness that can be set by the player operating an operating means such as the frame button 22 to be limited by an operation on the management operating means, or to limit the types of presentation modes that can be selected in a custom selection that changes the presentation mode executed on the pachinko machine 10 by the player operating the operating means by an operation on the management operating means.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned operation means and the management operation means can be configured to have different operation invalid periods during the start-up process of the pachinko machine 10, and it is preferable to configure the management operation means so that the invalid period is shorter than that of the operation means (no invalid period is set).

<Second Modification>
Next, regarding the content of the performance during the round game executed during the big win game,
A modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 459(b) will be described.

In the first embodiment described above, the presentation mode of the round presentation executed during a round of play is configured to specify the number of rounds at which the number of balls won can reach a specified number unit (in units of 200), and to determine the presentation mode of the round presentation based on the correspondence between the number of rounds executed and the number of balls won displayed.

In contrast to this, in the second modified example, a determination means is provided for determining at which round of the jackpot game the promotion effect is to be executed, and a storage means is provided for storing the determined number of rounds. Then, an execution means is provided for executing the promotion effect at a round number subsequent to the number stored in the storage means, among the round numbers specified by a determination means for specifying the number of rounds at which the number of acquired balls can reach a predetermined number unit (200 balls unit).

By configuring in this manner, the promotion effect can be executed in synchronization with the round number in which the predetermined number acquisition effect, which celebrates the fact that the number of acquired balls has reached a predetermined number unit, is executed.

Here, in the second modified example, as a predetermined number acquisition effect, different performance modes (
For example, the system is configured to be able to determine different modes, such as modes with different types of characters or modes with different types of comments (such as dialects) uttered by characters, and when it is specified that a round of play will be played for the number of rounds in which a predetermined number acquisition effect will be executed, the system determines the presentation mode, generates moving image data or still image data corresponding to the determined presentation mode, and executes this as an effect during the round of play, and when the number of balls actually acquired reaches the predetermined number, an additional image is displayed to indicate the predetermined number.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if the setting of the presentation mode for the predetermined number acquisition presentation and the determination of the promotion presentation were executed independently, there was a risk that the promotion presentation would be executed during the execution of the predetermined number acquisition presentation, resulting in a presentation that would be difficult for the player to understand.

More specifically, the presentation mode used in the predetermined number acquisition effect is executed based on moving image data or still image data corresponding to the presentation mode determined by the determination means, and audio data (lines, etc.) corresponding to the presentation mode to be executed is also set. Therefore, if a promotion effect is executed during a round of play in which the predetermined number acquisition effect is executed, there is a problem that the presentation effect of the predetermined number acquisition effect is significantly reduced.

In contrast to this, in the present second variant, the process for setting the presentation mode of the predetermined number acquisition presentation and the process for determining the promotion presentation can be executed in combination, thereby making it possible to execute a presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a high-speed fluctuation mode in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected can be set based on the number of times a special pattern lottery is executed, but a condition other than the number of times a special pattern lottery is executed may be set as a condition for transitioning to this high-speed fluctuation mode. For example, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result other than winning a jackpot, the high-speed fluctuation mode may be set based on winning a small prize in which a small prize game that temporarily opens the variable winning device 65a is executed without winning a jackpot, the high-speed fluctuation mode may be set across a jackpot game with a short jackpot game period, or a specific mode transition lottery may be executed separately from the lottery for special patterns and normal patterns, and the high-speed fluctuation mode may be set when the mode transition lottery is won.

Also, the termination condition for terminating the high-speed fluctuation mode may be set using elements similar to the various conditions used when setting the high-speed fluctuation mode, and in this case, it is preferable to set the termination condition by varying the numerical values (parameters) of the various conditions used when setting the high-speed fluctuation mode. This allows the setting condition for the high-speed fluctuation mode and the termination condition to be set simply by varying the values, thereby reducing the data capacity for storing information related to the setting of the high-speed fluctuation mode.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the presence or absence of the high-speed variation mode is determined based on the contents of the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of the high-speed variation mode may be determined based on the contents of the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol variation). In this case, for example, during the normal symbol variation in which the electric role 640a is opened for a long period as the normal symbol variation and during the long normal symbol winning game, it is determined whether or not the situation is such that the player is made to pay attention to the result of the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol variation), and during the period in which the performance for making the player pay attention to the result of the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol variation) is being performed or the period in which it is determined that the performance is being performed, even if the high-speed variation of the special symbol in the high-speed variation mode is performed, the performance mode for notifying the player of the fact may not be set.

In this way, even if a high-speed fluctuation of a special pattern is executed during the high-speed fluctuation mode in a period when a presentation that the player should pay more attention to than the special pattern lottery (special pattern variation) is being executed, or during a period when it has been determined that a presentation that the player should pay more attention to than the special pattern lottery (special pattern variation) will be executed, the presentation mode for notifying the player of this is not set, so that the player can be clearly notified of the presentation that they should pay most attention to.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 236 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval of one frame of an image that ends the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment). However, the image controller 236 may transmit a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval of one frame of an image that ends the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment).
This V interrupt signal may be sent to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display one frame of image. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so that the time intervals can be accurately maintained without timing by sending a V interrupt signal each time one frame of image is displayed.

In the above embodiment, the demo performance may be a performance in which a third pattern consisting of a main pattern without a number from "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state. Also, a third pattern consisting of a main pattern with a number or a main pattern without a number may be displayed in a stopped state in a translucent state. Also, it may be a performance in which only the back image is changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, it may be a performance in which a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display is displayed.

In the above embodiment, the continuous preview performance may be performed by the third pattern display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, or a fourth pattern display device separate from the third pattern display device 81 may be provided, and the continuous preview performance may be performed by displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device in conjunction with the variable performance performed by the third pattern display device 81. In this case, the fourth pattern display device may be controlled by the display control device 114, or may be controlled by the sound lamp control device 113.
A consecutive notice performance may be executed by providing a role that operates in response to various performances in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the role in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the variable performance. Also, the consecutive notice performance may be executed by outputting a sound for the consecutive notice performance from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the sound lamp control device 113, or the consecutive notice performance may be executed by outputting a sound for the consecutive notice performance from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the sound lamp control device 113.
A continuous preview performance may be executed by lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33 in conjunction with the variable performance.

As a result, every time a variable performance is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), a symbol is displayed in succession on the fourth symbol display device, a role object is operated in a predetermined manner, a sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are turned on.
By lighting or blinking, the player can have a sense of expectation of a big win. In addition, the player usually continues playing the game while gazing at the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, but the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the role, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 may give the player a sense of expectation of a big win.
The continuous notice performance is performed by blinking, so that the player can easily recognize that a performance different from the usual one has been performed. In addition, the continuous notice performance can be displayed by the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the role, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination unit 29 to 3.
A continuous preview performance can be easily performed by simple control such as lighting and blinking of 3.

In addition, if the continuous notice performance is performed by sound output from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice performance is performed by the sound lamp control device 113, so that the winning/losing judgment at the time of the initial winning and the lottery processing at the time of the start of the fluctuation can be performed by the main control device 11.
0, the sound lamp control device 113 performs the continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 performs the variable performance, so that when the continuous notice performance is performed by the pachinko machine 10, each control device can be assigned to each process. This prevents the load from concentrating on one control device, and therefore the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

Furthermore, the continuous preview performance may be executed by combining at least two or more of the display of patterns for the continuous preview performance on the third pattern display device 81, the display of patterns for the continuous preview performance on the fourth pattern display device, the operation of the reels in a predetermined manner, the audio output from the audio output device 226, and the lighting or blinking of the illumination sections 29 to 33, and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other.
This allows a wider variety of consecutive preview performances to be performed. Also, by changing the method of performing the consecutive preview performance (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the role-playing device, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, or a combination thereof), a plurality of consecutive preview performance modes may be prepared, which are selected according to the game state after the consecutive preview performance ends (15R certainty jackpot, 2R certainty jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, miss).

In addition, when a continuous preview performance is performed, an image for the continuous preview performance, which is different from the variable performance, is displayed as the third image.
The symbol display device 81 may display the symbol, or the continuous notice performance may be performed by displaying a combination of predetermined symbols, so-called "chance eyes", as a stop symbol to be displayed when the variable performance ends. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 395(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines that the continuous notice command has been received, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the chance eyes may be turned on, and other stop symbol discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command determination process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process after the stop identification command process, so that the chance eyes are set as the stop symbol instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Therefore, the chance eyes can be displayed as a fixed symbol when the variable performance stops. And, if the chance eyes are displayed consecutively as the stop symbols for each variable performance in the third symbol display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation that he will eventually win a big win.

In the above embodiment, when there is a winning (start winning) in the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b, the main control device 110 increases the number of reserved balls by "1" to the sound lamp control device 1.
In the above description, the reserved ball count command to be notified to 13 includes each counter C1 to C3, CS1 obtained from the counter buffer upon the start winning, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. However, the type of counter to be included in the reserved ball count command may be some of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, or may include the values of other counters.
In addition, when the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the values of each counter obtained in conjunction with the initial winning, rather than including information indicating the values of each counter in the reserved ball count command, the information indicating the values of each counter can be included in a command separate from the reserved ball count command and these values can be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113.
The separate command may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning, or may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of other information, such as a change pattern command or a stop pattern command, to which the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning have been added. When notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in association with the start winning as a separate command, the command may include information indicating which of the pending number of times the notified counter values relate to the change performance. This allows the voice lamp control device 113
Based on the information regarding the number of pending times included in the command, the value of each counter included in the command can be stored in any one of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information corresponding to the number of pending times.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command, it may store the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 indicated in the reserved ball number command in RAM 223, or when it receives a reserved ball number command (or a command indicating the values of each counter), it may determine whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot, the type of miss if there is a miss, etc. based on the values of each counter indicated in the command, and store these determination results in RAM 223 instead of the values of each counter indicated in the command, or together with some or all of the values of the counters.

In the above embodiments, the case where the number of reserved balls is counted by the main control device 110 using one reserved ball counter 203a regardless of whether the ball enters the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b has been described.
A reserved ball counter for the start port and a reserved ball counter for the second start port corresponding to the second start port 64b may be prepared in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, and the number of reserved balls associated with a start winning at the first start port 64a and the number of reserved balls associated with a start winning at the second start port 64b may be counted separately.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved is set to "4" regardless of whether the ball enters the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b. However, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved due to the start entry into the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b may be set to "4".
The maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with a start winning entry into the first starting hole 64a may be separately determined and managed. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with a start winning entry into the first starting hole 64a may be set to "4", and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with a start winning entry into the second starting hole 64b may be set to "5".
The maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved upon a start winning into the start hole 64b is "4", and at a certain point in time, the number of reserved balls that are reserved upon a start winning into the first start hole 64a is "4",
In a situation where the number of reserved balls due to a start winning at the second start hole 64b is "2", even if there is a further start winning at the first start hole 64a, the start winning will not be reserved, but if there is a start winning at the second start hole 64b, it may be reserved. This allows the player to recognize that the first start hole 64a and the second start hole 64b are separate, which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, for example, the variable performance based on the start winning to the second start port 64b is the first start port 64a
Alternatively, the variable presentation based on the start winning at the first start port 64a may be given priority over the variable presentation based on the start winning at the second start port 64b. This allows the player to pay more attention to the start port where the variable presentation is given priority.

In the above embodiment, the case where two start holes, the first start hole 64a and the second start hole 64b, are arranged on the game board 13 as start holes where the lottery for the big win starts when a ball enters the hole, has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of start holes may be one or more than two. If there are two or more start holes, a corresponding reserved ball number counter may be prepared in the RAM 203 for each start hole, and the number of reserved balls reserved in association with a winning entry into the corresponding start hole may be counted for each start hole. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved in association with a winning entry into the corresponding start hole may be set for each start hole.

In addition, if there are two or more starting ports, the reserved ball number command that the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 to notify that the reservation has been made following a win at a starting port may also include information indicating which starting port the reservation has been made due to a win at.
Also, the fluctuation pattern command that the main control device 110 sends to the voice lamp control device 113 when starting fluctuation may contain information indicating which start port the fluctuation performance is reserved for. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 prepares a reserved ball number counter for each start port, and when a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number is set in the reserved ball number counter for the start port indicated in the reserved ball number command, and when a fluctuation pattern command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the start port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, so that the reserved ball number can be counted for each start port.

In addition, when multiple starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in association with the winning of each starting hole (start winning) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired in association with the starting winning may include information indicating which starting hole the value was acquired in association with the starting winning. In addition, the fluctuation pattern command sent by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when starting the fluctuation may also include information indicating which starting hole the fluctuation performance is associated with the starting winning. Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area may be prepared for each starting hole, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in association with the starting winning of the corresponding starting hole may be stored in the corresponding look-ahead information storage area. As a result, each time a fluctuation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the starting hole in which the start winning that triggered the execution of the fluctuation performance indicated by the fluctuation pattern command was detected. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the variable performance on hold for each start port can also be held in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, in cases where the probability of a jackpot, the allocation probability of the jackpot type, the allocation probability of the miss type, etc. differ depending on the start port that has been entered, in the look-ahead process, it is possible to correctly determine whether or not each variable performance will be a jackpot, the jackpot type if a jackpot, and the miss type if a miss, for each variable performance, based on which start port the start port is entered. Also, in cases where a variable performance based on a start port entry is performed in priority to a variable performance based on a start port entry in another start port, the look-ahead process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the variable performance based on a start port entry in one, and the number of pending variable performances that will be a jackpot in the near future can be correctly determined.

In addition, in the case where a plurality of start ports are provided, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the value of each counter acquired based on the start winning into the start port from the main control device 110 by a command, the voice lamp control device 113 may execute the continuous notice performance for all the variable performances (reserved balls) reserved at that time, regardless of the start port where the start winning was made. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a plurality of start ports are provided and the variable performance for the winning into one start port is executed preferentially over the variable performance for the winning into the other start port, the start of the continuous notice performance may be determined only from the result of the pre-reading of the counter value acquired for the winning into the start port where the variable performance is executed preferentially. As a result, the presence or absence of the setting for the execution of the continuous notice performance is not determined for the variable performance corresponding to the winning into the start port with a low priority, and the continuous notice performance is not started for this variable performance. If the continuous notice performance is started for the variable performance corresponding to the winning into the start port with a low priority, and the variable performance is constantly reserved for the start port with a high priority, there is a risk that the continuous notice performance will not end easily. In contrast to this, in this modified example, the presence or absence of a setting for the execution of a continuous preview performance is not determined for a variable performance corresponding to a winning entry into a starting port with a low priority, and a continuous preview performance is not started for this variable performance, thereby preventing such a situation from occurring.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to Fig. 581 to Fig. 691, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. Fig. 581 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and Fig. 582 is a diagram showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.
583 and 584 are figures for explaining the contents of the various mechanisms provided in the right-hand area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 585 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Fig. 581, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 581) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

The inner frame 12 has ball entry holes 63, 64b1, 64b2, 640, through which a number of nails and balls can enter.
A game board 13 (see FIG. 582) having the holes 65a, 650a, etc. is detachably attached from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game.
In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 586) that launches balls into the front area (play area) of the game board 13 and a ball launching unit 112b that launches the balls into the game board 13.
A launch rail (not shown) is attached to guide the ball to the front area of the game board 1.
The details of the numerous entrances provided at 3 will be described later with reference to Figure 582.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided.
(See Figure 581) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side.
The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close toward the front, with the side on which the lock is provided as the axis of opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are each unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top that protrudes to the front side, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward incline to the right when viewed from the front (see Fig. 581), and this incline guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Fig. 589). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, a button that is connected to the third symbol display device 8.
It is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed in 1 (see Figure 582) or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change their light-emitting state by turning on or off depending on changes in the game state such as when a big win occurs or when a certain reach occurs, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-3 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs.
In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or reach performance is reached, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 lights up or flashes by lighting or flashing the built-in LEDs to notify the player that a big win is occurring or that the player is in a reach just before the big win.
81) An indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left corner, which incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination part 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the attachment space K1 (FIG. 58) on the front of the game board 13 is
2) are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.
In the pachinko machine 10, in order to create a more brilliant appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area surrounding the illumination parts 29 to 33.

A ball loan operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball loan operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball loan button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of ball lending unit 40, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispenser to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., a so-called cash machine, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 in the center thereof, which is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
On the right side of 0, there is provided an operating handle 51 which is operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball while the touch sensor 51a is being pressed.
The handle 51 is fitted with a touch sensor 51a and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") that receives the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 582, the game board 13 is made of a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) for guiding the ball and a windmill, rails 61 and 62, a general entrance 63,
First ball entrance 64b1, right first ball entrance 64b2, second ball entrance 640, first variable winning device 65
, second variable winning device 650, normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, variable display unit 80, distribution device 175, etc., are assembled, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of inner frame 12 (see FIG. 581). Base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see various structures arranged on the rear side of base plate 60 from the front side. General ball entry port 63, first ball entry port 64, right first ball entry port 64b2, second ball entry port 640
, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 6
7. The variable display unit 80 and the distribution device 175 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 581) of the front frame 14.
The configuration will be described.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is installed in the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 581), so that a game area where games are played depending on the behavior of the ball is formed in front of the game board 13. The game area is an area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is formed in front of the game board 13 and partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 586) to the upper part of the game board 13.
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the outer rail 6 (FIG. 582), which prevents the ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage.
At the tip of the ball 2 (upper right part of FIG. 582), a rubber band 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball.
When a ball is shot with a force equal to or greater than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is attenuated.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is arranged so as to be covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the play area) of the game board 13 formed of a transparent resin (e.g., ABS), and is configured so that the shot ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a seven-segment display as light-emitting means.
37B is a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 586), and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b
The first pattern display device 37A is configured to be used depending on whether the ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2, while the first pattern display device 37B is configured to be operated when the ball enters (wins) the second ball entrance 640. In other words, the first pattern display device 37A is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special drawing 1 lottery) that is executed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2, and the first pattern display device 37B is a display means for showing the lottery result of the lottery (special drawing 2 lottery) that is executed when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate, by their lighting states, which of the game states of the pachinko machine 10 is in (first probability variable state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns), second probability variable state (high probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns)) and to indicate, by their lighting states, whether the first pattern is changing (dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of patterns to show the lottery result).
The lighting state indicates whether the stopped symbols correspond to a jackpot advantageous to the player, a jackpot disadvantageous to the player, or a losing symbol, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, while the seven-segment display device indicates the number of rounds during the jackpot and errors. The LEDs are configured to have different light emission colors (e.g., red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated by a small number of LEDs by combining the light emission colors. In this embodiment, the various game states are notified by a combination of light emission colors of the light-emitting means (seven-segment display device), but any configuration that allows the player to identify various game states may be used. For example, the various game states may be notified by varying the length of the period during which the light-emitting means is turned on and off (blinking pattern).

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for a special symbol) is held when a ball enters (wins) the first ball entry port 64b1, the right first ball entry port 64b2, and the second ball entry port 640.
Then, in the lottery for the special symbol, a judgment is made as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot (jackpot lottery). If it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed, which is a special game state advantageous to the player.

When a jackpot game is played, the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened to allow the ball to easily win, and a game is played in which many prize balls can be won in a short period of time by winning the balls in each winning port. During this jackpot game, which is executed after the lottery result for the special pattern is displayed as a stopped display (confirmed display), a jackpot game period is set consisting of an opening period of a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) (a period in which a closed state is set to make it difficult for a ball to enter the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650), a round game period in which the open state is set, an interval period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) until the next round game starts after one round game period has ended, and an ending period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) after the last round game period has ended.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating a big win is displayed (determined display), it is possible to prepare for the ball to be shot in any direction in accordance with the timing when each winning hole is opened during the big win game, so that the big win game can be played smoothly. In addition, this opening period can be set as follows:
This can be used as a period to inform the player of the game content of the current jackpot game,
It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Furthermore, by setting an ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new lottery for a special symbol from being executed immediately after the last round of game is completed, so that preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be executed after the jackpot game is completed, thereby enabling a smooth switch between games.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot lottery, the type of the jackpot is also determined. A detailed explanation will be given later, but the types of jackpots that can be determined include a 10R 1st probability jackpot, which has 10 rounds of jackpot play and a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol after the jackpot play ends, a 2R 2nd probability jackpot, which has 2 rounds of jackpot play and a high probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol after the jackpot play ends, and a 2R 1st probability jackpot, which has 2 rounds of jackpot play and a high probability state of a special symbol and a high probability state of a normal symbol after the jackpot play ends.

Furthermore, each of the above-mentioned jackpot types is designed to be able to change the game state set after the jackpot game ends depending on the game state at the time when the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. For example, if the game state at the time when the jackpot is won is a specific game state (e.g., the second probability variable state), the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, and if it is not the specific game state, the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. In this way, by configuring the game state set after the jackpot game to be determined not only by the jackpot type but also by the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the jackpot type but also in the game state set when the jackpot is won.

In the first embodiment, the game state to be set after the jackpot game is completed can be determined based on the jackpot type that is set (specified) when the jackpot is won and the game state at the time of the jackpot win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state to be set after the jackpot game can be determined based on the content of the game played during the jackpot game and the past game results (game history). In addition, in this embodiment, the game state to be set after the jackpot game is completed is determined when a special symbol indicating a jackpot win is stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state to be set after the jackpot game is completed can be determined at the timing of the end of the jackpot game, or at the timing when the special symbol indicating a jackpot win starts to change.

In addition, in this first embodiment, the type of game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is determined depending on the type of jackpot and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, but it is sufficient if it is possible to determine a different benefit (game state) to be granted to the player, and for example, it may be configured so that the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds, etc.) is different.

In addition, in some cases where the result of the big win lottery is determined to be a miss rather than the big win described above, the player is configured to win a small prize that is less than the big win described above (for example, a prize in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened for only one round and prize balls corresponding to the number of balls won during that opening are awarded to the player.
7A and 37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a big win or not (or a small win or not) as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation ends, but also show a pattern according to the type of big win if it is a big win.

In this embodiment, the game states are "normal state", "time-saving state", "first probability state",
The normal state is a game state in which the probability of winning a special symbol is set to a low probability (3/1000) and the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to a low probability (236/240) (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol: low probability state and the normal symbol: low probability state), and the time-saving state is a game state in which the probability of winning a special symbol is set to a low probability (about 3/1000) and the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240) (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol: low probability state). The first probability change state is a game state in which the probability of winning a special symbol is set to a high probability (30/1000) and the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240) (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state). The second probability change state is a game state in which the probability of winning a special symbol is set to a high probability (30/1000) and the probability of winning a normal symbol is set to a low probability (236/
240) (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol: high probability state, and the normal symbol: low probability state).

In addition, since the above-mentioned "first special probability state" and "second special probability state" are both states in which the probability state of the special pattern is shifting from normal probability (low probability) to high probability, they are sometimes referred to as "special pattern high probability state."

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, even if a special symbol jackpot is won and the same jackpot type is set, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is configured to be different depending on the game state set when the jackpot is won. This allows the player to play while being aware of the game state that has been set in addition to the lottery result of the special symbol.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game, an upper limit is set on the number of consecutive times that an advantageous game state (for example, the first probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is consecutively set, and when the number of consecutive times reaches the upper limit, even if the setting conditions for setting an advantageous game state after the end of a big win game are met, another game state (for example, a time-saving state) is forcibly set. More specifically, the "probability state of special symbols" which is an element that constitutes a game state,
For the "normal pattern probability state," it is possible to set either a favorable probability state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability state) or an unfavorable probability state that is less advantageous to the player than the favorable probability state (e.g., a low probability state). By combining the probability state of the special pattern (two types) with the probability state of the normal pattern (two types), a total of four types of game states can be set.

When the number of consecutive settings reaches the upper limit, if a game state including any "high probability state" has been determined as the next game state to be set, the game state in which the "high probability state" has been changed to a "low probability state" is forcibly set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent advantageous probability states from being set consecutively for the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times that the "high probability state of special symbols" is set consecutively (the number of times of consecutive special symbol settings) and the number of times that the "high probability state of normal symbols" is set consecutively (
The upper limit for the number of consecutive settings of the normal map can be updated separately. For example,
In the state where the first probability change state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set, if the number of consecutive special patterns is set to the upper limit, the "time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns,
When the number of consecutive regular symbol settings reaches an upper limit, a "second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbol, low probability state for regular symbol)" is set in which the "high probability state for regular symbol" is changed to a "low probability state for regular symbol", and when the number of consecutive special symbol settings and the number of consecutive regular symbol settings reach their upper limits at the same time, a "normal state (low probability state for special symbol, low probability state for regular symbol)" is set in which the "high probability state for special symbol" and "high probability state for regular symbol" are changed to a "low probability state for special symbol" and "low probability state for regular symbol".

In this way, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent an excessive number of advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player from being set in succession and an excessive number of benefits being given to the player,
The number of times that the advantageous game state is set in succession is configured to be upper limit, and further, as an element for determining that the advantageous game state is set in succession, a "probability state of a special symbol" and a "probability state of a normal symbol" are configured to be manageable separately. And, the probability state of a symbol type for which it is determined that the number of times that the advantageous game state is set in succession has reached the upper limit is forcibly switched to an unfavorable probability state.

By configuring in this manner, when the game state is forcibly changed, various types of game states can be set as the changed game state, so that a game that the player will not tire of can be provided.

In addition, in the first embodiment, since the degree of advantage of each game state is different, when the advantageous game state is forcibly changed, the degree of advantage of the player after the changed game state is set can be different depending on the symbol type that is forcibly changed to a low probability state. By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in not only knowing whether the advantageous game state will be forcibly ended or not, but also in knowing the cause of the forcible end of the advantageous game state.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the upper limit number of times that the high probability state of the special pattern can be set consecutively,
The high probability state of normal symbols is configured to be different from the upper limit number that can be set consecutively.
By configuring in this way, the cause of the forcible termination of the advantageous game state can be varied depending on the results of multiple big wins, so that the player can be kept interested for a long period of time.

Here, the jackpot types possessed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained in detail. The "10R first certain jackpot" is a jackpot type in which a first certain jackpot state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after a jackpot game with a maximum number of 10 rounds (a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is opened for 10 rounds).

The "2R 1st sure-change jackpot" refers to a jackpot game in which the maximum number of rounds is 2 (a jackpot game in which the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 2 rounds) followed by the 1st sure-change jackpot.
This is a type of jackpot in which a special probability state (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) is set.

The "2R 2nd probability jackpot" refers to a jackpot game with a maximum number of rounds of 2 (the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for 2 rounds, and after the jackpot game ends, depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot winning, the 2nd probability jackpot state (high probability state of special symbols,
This is a jackpot type in which a first probability state (low probability state for normal symbols) or a second probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, when a jackpot game corresponding to the "10R first probability jackpot" is executed, the first variable winning device (first attacker) 65 is activated for a predetermined period (8
A game (round game) in which the ball is opened after 15 seconds have passed or until 8 balls have won is executed a predetermined number of times (10 times). Therefore, by performing a right-hand shot game (a game in which a ball is shot aiming at the first variable winning device 65) during this big win game, the ball can be easily made to win in the first variable winning device 65. This first variable winning device 65 has a winning point of 15
It is configured so that prize balls can be paid out, and is configured so as to be able to award more prize balls to the player than the second variable winning device 650 described later.

On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot game corresponding to the "2R 1st probability variable jackpot" or the "2R 2nd probability variable jackpot", the opening operation of the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is the above-mentioned "1
An opening operation that is more restricted than that in a jackpot game corresponding to the "0R first certain jackpot" is executed.
Specifically, during one jackpot game, the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 is opened for a short period (0.5 seconds) (round game) and two jackpot games are played. This second variable winning device 650 is configured to pay out one prize ball for each winning ball, and fewer prize balls are awarded to the player than with the second variable winning device 650 described above. In other words, in this embodiment, the jackpot game corresponding to the "10R first certain jackpot" (the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened) is more likely to be "
This type of jackpot game is more advantageous to the player since the open period of the attacker during the jackpot game is longer and it is easier to obtain more prize balls than jackpot games corresponding to "2R first certain variable jackpot" or "2R second certain variable jackpot" (jackpot games in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened).

By configuring in this way, the bonus (prize balls) that can be awarded during a jackpot game can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game being executed, so that the player can be interested not only in whether or not he will win a jackpot, but also in the type of jackpot game that is set. Also, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot game is specified according to the type of jackpot, so that the player can be interested in the type of jackpot that is set when the jackpot is won.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (the jackpot game corresponding to the "10R 1st variable jackpot") is configured to have more round games and more prize balls per winning ball than other jackpot games, but it is sufficient that the amount of prize balls awarded during the jackpot game is different. For example, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game may be the same and only the number of prize balls per ball may be different, or the number of prize balls per ball may be the same and only the number of round games executed during the jackpot game may be different. Also, the game state set after the jackpot game may be different depending on the type of variable winning hole that is opened during the jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 582, the explanation will be continued. A general ball entrance 63 is provided on the lower left side of the play area formed on the surface of the game board 13, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63. A variable display unit 80 is provided in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 has a first ball entrance 64b1, a right first ball entrance 64b2 and a second first ball entrance 64b3.
The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern in synchronization with the variable display in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a ball entering the ball entrance 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) that is composed of an LED that performs a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern starting entrance (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 586), so that, for example, three pattern rows, top, middle and bottom, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are scrolled horizontally for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In the third pattern display device 81 of this embodiment, the game status is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 586), while the game status is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 586), the third pattern display device 81 of this embodiment is configured such that the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display the game status.
37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery (normal symbol lottery) is performed.
If the result of the winning lottery (regular symbol lottery) is a winning one, the second symbol display device
After the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a symbol "○" is displayed in a stationary manner. If the result of the winning lottery is a loss, a symbol "X" is displayed in a stationary manner after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the second symbol display device.

The pachinko machine 10 in this first embodiment is configured so that when the varying display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "○" pattern), a winning game (normal winning game) is executed in which the electric device 64a attached to the right first ball entrance 64b2 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

In other words, the normal symbol lottery is performed by the ball entry port (the right first ball entry port 64b) which is the trigger for the special symbol lottery.
2) is to determine whether or not to execute a normal winning game that creates a situation where it is easy to get the ball into the reel. And the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery is determined according to the set game state.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the winning probability in the normal pattern lottery is higher than when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, and further, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, a short variation time is more likely to be set as the variation pattern of the normal pattern variation for indicating the result of the normal pattern lottery than in the low probability state of the normal pattern. This makes it possible to increase the number of times the normal pattern lottery is executed per unit time compared to the low probability state of the normal pattern, making it easier to increase the number of winnings in the normal pattern lottery per unit time.

In addition, in the high probability state of the normal pattern (normal pattern high probability), if the state is made such that the ball is likely to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2 during the normal pattern high probability state by increasing the winning probability, the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric role 64a for one win, etc., the time taken for the variable display of the second pattern may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the variable display of the second pattern is set shorter than the normal state during the normal pattern high probability state, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric role 64a for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

In addition, the special symbol variation pattern for showing the result of the special symbol lottery may be configured to have a shorter variation time than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Specifically, in the first probability variable state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is preferable to configure the first special symbol variation pattern to have a shorter variation time than in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the number of times the first special symbol lottery is executed per unit time in the first probability variable state compared to the normal state. Therefore, when the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b2 where the ball is likely to enter in the high probability state of the normal symbol, it is possible to execute the first special symbol lottery efficiently, and as a result, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery per unit time.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is assembled in the left area (left area) of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion (approximately 50%) of the balls that flow down the left area out of the balls that are shot to the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning, "○" is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display.
If the winning lottery result is a miss, the stopping symbol for the variable display will be "X".
Display the design.

The number of times that the ball passes through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). Four second symbol reserved lamps are provided, the maximum number of reserved balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, or by the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used.
The lighting of the symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Also, the number of normal symbol start ports (through gates) 67 that are assembled is not limited to one,
There may be more than one (for example, two). Also, the installation position of the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the right side of the variable display unit 80. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the second symbol reserved lamp may not be turned on.

A first ball entrance 64b1 through which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, a first ball entrance provided on the back side of the game board 13 is opened.
A ball entrance switch (not shown) is turned on, and as a result of this first ball entrance switch being turned on, a jackpot draw is conducted by the main control device 110 (see Figure 586), and a display corresponding to the result of the draw is shown on the first pattern display device 37A.

Next, the configuration of the right area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80 among the areas formed on the game board 13 will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 582, the game area (area where balls can flow down) formed on the game board 13 is divided by the variable display unit 80 into a left area (game area formed to the left of the variable display unit 80), a right area (game area formed to the right of the variable display unit 80), and
The left side area is for players to play left-handed, i.e., to use the operation handle 51 ( FIG. 5 ).
The right-side area is the playing area which a launched ball can reach when a player plays a game in which a ball is launched by the launch solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a with the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 581) being reduced, and the right-side area is the playing area which a launched ball can reach when a player plays a game in which a ball is launched by the launch solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a with the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 581) being increased.

As shown in FIG. 582, the right side region has a plurality of nails implanted therein, similar to the left side region.
The balls are configured to flow in various ways while reducing the momentum of the balls flowing down the right area. In the right area, a distribution device 175, a right first ball entrance 64b2 to which an electric device 64a is attached, a first variable winning device 65, a second ball entrance 640, and a second variable winning device 650 are provided so that the balls flowing down the right area can enter (win).

As shown in FIG. 582, a sorting device 175 is provided at the upper position of the right side area.
The balls flowing down the right side area flow in through the opening 175a. When the player operates the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 581) to play a right-hand shot, that is, a strong right-hand shot in which the ball is shot with a shooting strength sufficient to cause the ball to collide with the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 582), most of the balls that collide with the return rubber 69 flow into the opening 175a and are then deflected by the return rubber 69.
When a weak right-hand shot is performed, the ball is shot with a shooting strength that is not enough for the ball to collide with the
A nail is installed in the upper right area so that approximately half of the balls fired flow into opening 175a.

In other words, depending on the operation of the player on the operation handle 51 during right-hand play,
Since the ratio of balls flowing into the distribution device 175 can be varied, it is possible for a right-handed player to vary the game result by fine-tuning the operation of the operating handle 51 according to the game situation, and therefore the player can be motivated to operate the operating handle 51 in order to obtain a more favorable game result.

Specifically, the balls that flow into the distribution device 175 pass through the through gate 67 and flow down a path that allows entry to the right first ball entry port 64b2, and then flow down a path that allows entry (winning) to the first variable winning device 65, the second ball entry port 640, and the second variable winning device 650 toward the outlet 66. On the other hand, among the balls shot by right-handed play, balls that do not flow into the opening 175a of the distribution device 175, i.e., balls that flow down the passing area formed on the right side of the distribution device 175, are configured to flow down a path that allows entry (winning) to the first variable winning device 65, the second ball entry port 640, and the second variable winning device 650 toward the outlet 66 without flowing down a path that allows entry to the through gate 67 and the right first ball entry port 64b2.

By configuring in this way, among the game states in which right-hand play is advantageous to the player, the right first
In a game state (second special probability state) in which the aim is for the ball to enter the ball entrance 64b2, a weak right hit game is executed, and in a game state (during a big win game or a small win game) in which the aim is for the ball to enter the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650, a strong right hit game is executed, thereby providing the player with a more advantageous game result.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the balls that flow into the opening 175a of the sorting device 175 are configured to take a different amount of time (flow time) to reach the first variable winning device 65 than the balls that do not flow into the opening 175a of the sorting device 175. The balls that flow into the opening 175a of the sorting device 175 reach the first variable winning device 65 about 2.5 to 3 seconds after passing through the opening 175a.
The balls are configured to reach the first variable winning device 65, and the balls that do not flow into the opening 175a of the distribution device 175 are configured to reach the first variable winning device 65 after approximately 1.5 to 2 seconds.

Therefore, for example, in a state where a jackpot game (10R jackpot) in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened is being played, by performing a right-hit game while switching between a weak right-hit game and a strong right-hit game at a good timing, it becomes possible to make a plurality of balls reach the first variable winning device 65 at the same timing during a round game. Also, by performing a weak right-hit game to suppress balls from reaching the first variable winning device 65 during an interval period (a period during which it is difficult to make a ball win the first variable winning device 65) during a jackpot game, and performing a right-hit game so that a ball shot by a weak right-hit game reaches the first variable winning device 65 during a round game, it becomes possible to make a ball shot by a right-hit game win the first variable winning device 65 efficiently.

The balls flowing down inside the distribution device 175 are distributed by the distribution member 175b to the left guide flow path 175c or the right guide flow path 175d, and flow down toward the electric device 64a.
The normal electric device 1640a is normally stored inside the game board 13, and is configured in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that can protrude toward the front side when viewed from the front for a predetermined period of time when a normal symbol is hit, and is configured so that a game ball can roll on its upper surface when protruding toward the front side when viewed from the front of the game board 13. The ball rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric device 1640a is guided to the ball entry surface of the right first ball entry port 64b2. On the other hand, when the normal electric device 1640a is stored inside the game board 13 (buried), the ball is not guided to the right first ball entry port 64b2, creating a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64b2.

Here, the details of the distribution device 175 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 583. Fig. 583(a) shows a state where the electric role object 64a is buried (stored) in the game board 13.
FIG. 583(b) is an enlarged front view of the distribution device 175 in a state where the electric device 64a protrudes forward from the front view of the game board 13 (a state where the game ball is guided to the right first ball entrance 64b2).
FIG. 13 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the sorting device 175 in the case where

The sorting device 175 has an opening 175a on its upper surface that is configured with a width that allows game balls to pass through, a sorting member 175b that sorts the game balls that have entered the inside of the sorting device 175 through the opening 175a to either the right or left side as viewed from the front, a left guide flow path 175c through which the game balls sorted to the left side as viewed from the front by the sorting member 175b can flow down, and a right guide flow path 175b through which the game balls sorted to the right side as viewed from the front by the sorting member 175b can flow down. The right guide flow path 175d allows the game ball to flow down, a right first ball entrance 64b2 is provided in a position where the game ball that has flowed down the right guide flow path 175d can enter, and an electric device 64a is provided adjacent to the right first ball entrance 64b2 and is variable (displaceable) between a protruding state that guides the game ball into the right first ball entrance 64b2 and a buried state (storage state) that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2.

As shown in FIG. 583(a), the distribution member 175b is provided on the right side as viewed from the front and has a right receiving portion 175br capable of receiving a game ball, a left receiving portion 175bl provided on the left side as viewed from the front and capable of receiving a game ball, and a rotation axis 175b which is a rotation axis for the rotational movement of the distribution member 175b.
5bc. The distribution member 175b is configured to be variable (displaceable) between a state (arrangement) tilted to the right side as viewed from the front and a state (arrangement) tilted to the left side as viewed from the front, with the rotation axis 175bc as the rotation axis. FIG. 583(a) illustrates a state in which the distribution member 175b is displaced to a state (arrangement) tilted to the right side as viewed from the front. When the distribution member 175b is tilted to the right side as viewed from the front, the left receiving portion 175bl is disposed directly below the opening 175a (the game ball that passed through the opening 175a is received by the left receiving portion 175bl), while when the distribution member 175b is tilted to the left side as viewed from the front, the right receiving portion 175br is disposed directly below the opening 175a (the game ball that passed through the opening 175a is received by the right receiving portion 175br).

When the left receiving portion 175bl receives a game ball in a state in which the distribution member 175b is tilted to the right as viewed from the front, the distribution member 175b rotates around the rotation axis 175b due to the weight of the game ball.
When the distribution member 175b is tilted to the left as viewed from the front, the game ball received by the left receiving portion 175bl falls into the left guide channel 175c. On the other hand, when the distribution member 175b is tilted to the left as viewed from the front, the game ball is received by the right receiving portion 175br, and the distribution member 175b rotates clockwise around the rotation axis 175bc due to the weight of the game ball, and the distribution member 175b is rotated to the left guide channel 175c.
75b is changed (displaced) to a state inclined to the right when viewed from the front, and the right receiving portion 175br
The gaming ball that was received by the right guide flow path 175d falls into the right guide flow path 175d.
The distribution member 175b alternately receives the game balls at the right receiving portion 175br and the left receiving portion 175bl, and alternately guides the game balls to the right guide flow path 175d and the left guide flow path 175c.
In other words, every time a game ball enters the distribution device 175, the left guide path 175c and the right guide path 175b are
75d and 75d are alternately allocated.

In addition, in the normal state, the game ball that flows down the right guide flow path 175d reaches the electric role 64a in the buried state, passes through the electric role 64, and flows downward to the right side area (FIG. 5
83(a)). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 584(a), when a winning ball is drawn for a normal symbol based on the ball flowing into the opening 175a of the distribution device 175 passing through the through gate 67, the electric device 64a is turned on 0.4 seconds after the ball passes through the through gate 67.
On the other hand, the ball that passes through the through gate 67 is
It takes about 0.2 seconds for the game ball to reach the electric device 64a. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 passes through the electric device 64a before the electric device 64a is moved to the protruding position, and flows out of the distribution device 175 (see FIG. 583(a) and FIG. 584(a)).

In the normal state, a winning game of a normal symbol (a winning game of a normal symbol) ends in a relatively short time (about 0.9 seconds from passing through the through gate 67). Therefore, even if game balls enter the distribution device 175 in succession at short intervals, the ball next to the ball that passed through the through gate 67 will not enter the left guide channel 1.
75c, the normal winning game ends. Therefore, even if game balls enter the distribution device 175 continuously at short intervals, the subsequent game balls will not reach the electric role 64a during the protruding period of the electric role 64a. Therefore, even if balls flow into the distribution device 175 in the normal state, it is possible to make it difficult for the balls to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2.

In addition, in the second probability variable state, the game ball that flows down the right guide flow path 175d reaches the electric device 64a in the protruding state, and is guided by the slope formed by the electric device 64a in the protruding state to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2 (see FIG. 583(b)). More specifically, in the second probability variable state, if a winning normal pattern is drawn based on the ball passing through the through gate 67c, as shown in FIG. 584(b), the number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67c increases by 0.1.
After 2 seconds, the electric accessory 64a is changed (displaced) from the buried state to the protruding state.
On the other hand, as described above, the number of game balls that pass through the through gate 67c is maintained for 0.
Since it takes about 2 seconds for the ball to reach the electric role 64a, it collides with the upper surface of the protruding electric role 64a and is guided to the ball entrance surface of the right first ball entrance 64b2 along the slope of the protruding electric role 64a, which slopes downward from the upper right to the lower left when viewed from the front. Therefore, in the second probability state, every time a game ball enters the distribution device 175, a ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b2.

As shown in FIG. 583(b), the balls flowing down the left guide flow path 175c of the distribution device 175 are also configured to be able to reach the upper surface of the electric device 64a while the electric device 64a is set to the protruding state in the second probability variable state. However, in a game state in which the normal state of the normal pattern, such as the second probability variable state or the normal state, is set, the period during which the electric device 64a is set to the protruding state when the normal pattern is hit (the period during which the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b2) is relatively short (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and the electric device 64a returns to the buried state before the period (e.g., 1 second) required for the game ball that has fallen to the left side (upstream side) of the electric device 64a to reach the right first ball entrance 64b2. Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed in the second probability variable state, all the balls launched by the right-handed game will not enter the right first ball entrance 64b2.
This can prevent the balls from entering the left guide channel 175c and the right guide channel 175d and being unable to flow down below the distribution device 175. In this embodiment, the distribution member 175b is configured to distribute the balls to the left guide channel 175c and the right guide channel 175d at a minimum interval of 0.5 seconds (the distribution interval when the balls pass through the opening 175a of the distribution device 175 in a chain is 0.5 seconds), and the period until the balls distributed to the left guide channel 175c by the distribution member 175b reach the electric role object 64a (the flow down period of the left guide channel 175c) is 0.7 seconds, and the flow down period of the right guide channel 175d is 0.2 seconds.

That is, when the balls that continuously flow into the distribution device 175 (the balls that are first distributed to the left guide flow path 175c and the balls that are later distributed to the right guide flow path 175d) pass through the buried electric role object 64a, they are discharged from the distribution device 175 at approximately the same timing (discharged from the distribution device 17
5). By configuring in this way, the sorting device 1
It is possible to make it easier for multiple balls to reach the winning device having a winning hole formed with an opening width corresponding to the number of balls, such as the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, which are provided below the winning device 75.
During a round game in which the balls are opened, the surplus balls enter the first specific winning port immediately before or after the end condition of the round game is established, making it easier to create opportunities to win the surplus prize balls.

Returning to FIG. 582, the explanation will be continued. Below the distribution device 175, a first variable winning device 65 is disposed, which is opened when a 10-round jackpot game is executed. This first variable winning device 65 is configured to be switchable between an open state in which a ball can enter the first specific winning port 65a and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter the first specific winning port 65a than in the open state, and is configured to be switched to the open state during round play during the jackpot game period. When a ball enters the first specific winning port 65a, 10 prize balls are paid out.

Each round game has two end conditions: a time lapse end condition that is met when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the round game (since the first variable winning device 65 is switched to the open state), and a number of winnings end condition that is met when a predetermined number of balls enter the first specific winning port 65a during the round game. Specifically, the time lapse end condition is met when eight hours have elapsed since the start of the round game, and the number of winnings during the round game reaches eight.
Each end condition is defined so that when the number of winning entries is reached, the end condition is met.

When the first variable winning device 65 is in a closed state, the opening/closing door 65f is located in a closed position so as to block the opening of the first specific winning port 65a. When the opening/closing door 65f is located in the closed position,
A flow path through which the balls can flow is formed on the upper surface of the door 65f.
is configured to have a downward slope toward the left side, so that when a ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing door 65f which is in the closed position, it flows down the flow path toward the left side and is discharged from the first variable winning device 65.

A second ball entrance 640 and a second variable winning device 650 are disposed to the lower left of the first variable winning device 65. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see FIG. 586) executes a lottery for a big win (a lottery for a special symbol), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 582, a sorting device 175 is provided on the upstream side (upper side) of the right side area, and balls flowing downward from the sorting device 175 or balls flowing down the passing area formed on the right side of the sorting device 175 are entered into the first variable winning device 65.
When the opening and closing door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is open (big win game state), two out of three balls flowing out of the sorting device 175 enter the first specific winning port 65a formed in the first variable winning device 65, and most of the balls flowing down the passing area formed on the right side of the sorting device 175 enter the first specific winning port 65a.
Among the balls flowing out from the distribution device 175, the balls that cannot reach the first variable winning device 65 (one in three balls) are transferred between the distribution device 175 and the first variable winning device 65.
The ball is configured to flow down toward the second ball inlet 640 by a buffer member such as a nail implanted between the ball and the second ball inlet 640, that is, a member that directly buffers the ball as it flows down to make the direction of the ball irregular.

On the other hand, when the opening and closing door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is closed (non-jackpot game state), all of the balls that flow down the ball flow path formed on the opening and closing door 65f flow down toward the second ball entrance 640, and approximately one in two balls that flow down toward the second ball entrance 640 is the second ball entrance.
The ball enters through entrance 640 .

The second variable winning device 650 is a variable ball winning means that opens when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win and the big win type is set to a big win type in which a two-round big win is executed, or when a small win is won, and is configured to pay out one prize ball when a ball wins. As shown in FIG. 582, this second variable winning device 6
No. 50 is disposed at the most downstream side of the right-side area, below the variable display unit 80, and to the left of the second variable winning device 650, a nail member is installed to prevent a ball shot by left-handed play from reaching the second variable winning device 650.

By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to prevent the ball shot in a left-handed play from flowing into the right-side area, making it easier to play different games in a left-handed play and a right-handed play.

In addition, by configuring the ball shot by the left-hand hit game so that it is not possible (is difficult) for it to reach the second variable winning device 650, even if a small prize is won in the first special symbol lottery that is executed in the normal state in which the left-hand hit game is executed, the ball shot by the left-hand hit game will not reach the second specific winning port 65 of the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small prize game.
Since it is not possible to win at 0a, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which excessive prize balls are awarded under normal conditions.

When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2, four balls are dispensed as prize balls, and when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one prize ball is dispensed. Also, when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, six balls are dispensed as prize balls. By configuring in this way, even if a right-hand play is performed during the normal state, the ball only enters the second ball entrance 640, which is set to one prize ball, so the number of balls does not increase. Therefore, it is possible to suppress right-hand play during the normal state.

In addition, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed. In this embodiment, a long time (for example, 1
0 minutes) is set.
Even if the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is drawn in the normal state, the special pattern 2 is drawn efficiently.
It is possible to suppress the execution of the lottery.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if a right-hand play (a game for making the ball enter the second ball entrance 640 in order to make the ball flow down the right area of the game board 13 and execute the lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) is performed in the normal state, it takes a long time until the result of one lottery is determined, and only a smaller number of prize balls can be obtained than the number of prize balls that can be obtained by a left-hand play. In other words, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is advantageous for the player to play a left-hand play (a game for making the ball enter the first ball entrance 64b1 in order to make the ball flow down the left area of the game board 13 and execute the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1).

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1 or the right first ball entry port 64b2 is configured to be different from the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1 or the right first ball entry port 64b2 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 may be the same number, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64b1 or the right first ball entry port 64b2 may also be one.

As shown in FIG. 585, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (
The control board unit 91 is equipped with a display control device 114.
A payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted on the device to form a unit.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 4 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

Furthermore, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and it is difficult to peel off the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board box 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover side will be cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 586). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply 115. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 586). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the big win lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
It executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, and the like, as well as the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (
In addition, even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage, the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power supply is turned on (including the time of the power supply being turned on due to the power outage being resolved, the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power supply was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed in the start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, an NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus.
The payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern hold lamp, a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close to the front side using the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric gimmick are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and the R
Various processes are executed based on the AM cancellation signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives a payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is the same as the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process to be performed in the event of a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the control handle 51 is not being operated (i.e., the control handle 51 is not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the control handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the display control device 114, which controls the display of variable effects (variable display) and advance notice effects.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the other devices 2.
28 includes various drive motors for operating the driving devices for the effects provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to other device 228 to drive a device for performance (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a voice corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
The display control device 11 controls the display of the third symbol variation effect in the game.
4 transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display command, thereby
1 can be coordinated with the audio output from the audio output device 226.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 5
86) is provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc., through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, and supplies various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving motors, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, and a voltage of 10 volts for logic circuits.
The power supply circuit 100 generates a 12-volt voltage, a 5-volt voltage, and a backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies the necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 586) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
587(a) and 587(b) show the third embodiment of the present invention.
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81.
The display control device 1 is configured with a 15-inch liquid crystal display.
By controlling the display contents by the 14, for example, three rows of symbols (upper, middle, and lower) (L
The third pattern (decorative pattern that changes in response to the change display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is a 1 to 9 pattern with identification information imitating the numbers "0" to "9".
Each is composed of 0 main patterns.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (such as animals) for each identification information imitating a number. In this way, by using characters corresponding to each identification information, the lottery result of the special symbol can be visually notified to the player, so that the player can play in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are lined up (for example, "777") is performed, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

The main display area Dm displays three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, one each at the top, middle, and bottom. The above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and the display is changed by scrolling left and right periodically for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3.

Specifically, the upper and middle pattern rows L1 and L2 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and are configured to scroll from right to left to display in a variable manner, while the lower pattern row L3 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are configured to scroll from right to left to display in a variable manner. Furthermore, in each pattern row, sub-patterns (blank patterns) that do not indicate the results of the special pattern lottery are formed between the main patterns.

As shown in FIG. 587(a), the main display area Dm has three active lines V1 to V3 formed in the vertical direction and two active lines V4 and V5 formed in the diagonal direction, and when each of the pattern rows L1 to L3 is displayed stopped, if the third patterns are stopped on the active line in a combination of jackpot patterns (in this first embodiment, a combination of the same main patterns), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 587(a), in the first embodiment, each effective line (V1 to V5) is
Since it is formed to include the pattern display positions of each of the pattern rows L1 to L3, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern until all of the pattern rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable display of the third pattern executed in the main display area Dm until the last pattern row (in this embodiment, the middle pattern row L2) is stopped and displayed.

The manner of displaying the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of the display of the symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row can be changed as appropriate. The symbols displayed in the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a symbol combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third symbol. Furthermore, the area in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that the player may not easily know whether the third symbol is changing or not. Also, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special symbol is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second
The display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the change in the special pattern is configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that it is difficult for a player to distinguish), but the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be made different so as to correspond to the type of special pattern that is changing.

Next, the content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 587(b). As shown in FIG. 587(b), in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm as viewed from the front,
Small display areas Dm2 and Dm3 are formed. These small display areas Dm2 and Dm3 are areas in which identification information (fourth pattern) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special pattern (whether or not the lottery is being drawn (changing) and the lottery result), and the fourth pattern (fourth pattern of special pattern 1) to indicate the lottery status of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm2, and the second special pattern (special pattern 2)
The fourth pattern (Special Pattern 2, Fourth Pattern) for indicating the lottery status is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm3.

By providing the small display areas Dm2 and Dm3 in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbols 1 and 2 can be changed at the same time, the lottery status of the special symbols can be notified to the player. In addition, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display form using numbers, and by displaying the fourth symbol in a variable manner in the small display areas Dm2 and Dm3 (see FIG. 590(a)), the situation in which the special symbols are changing is indicated, and the small display areas Dm2 and
The result of the lottery for the special pattern is indicated by stopping the display of the fourth pattern in Dm3 (see FIG. 590(b)). However, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode imitating a figure or a display mode showing a plurality of colors may be used as the fourth pattern to indicate that the special pattern is fluctuating by a display mode that transforms the figure or a display mode that changes the color, and the result of the lottery for the special pattern may be indicated by stopping the display mode that shows a specific figure or color.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to display the lottery status of the special symbol (lottery in progress (changing)
587(b) shows an example in which the fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm2, Dm3) in which the fourth symbol for showing the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, but the position and size of the fourth symbol display area may be changed depending on the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in the center part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth pattern display area from restricting the area in which the variable performance is performed, thereby preventing the performance effect from being reduced. In this case, it is preferable to delete the fourth pattern display area from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and configure the variable display of the fourth pattern to be performed using a light-emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

A small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. In this small display area Dm1, a guide display mode is displayed to guide the player in the direction in which to shoot the ball (play direction) (see FIG. 588(a)).

In this embodiment, the small display area Dm1 is used as the guide display area. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand which area of the game board the ball should be shot towards just by visually checking the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area, so that a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm1), a display mode of "right hit" for instructing the player to play right-handed games, and a display mode of "left hit" for instructing the player to play left-handed games are displayed. The display mode of "right hit" is displayed in a game state in which right-handed games are advantageous to the player, that is, during a first probability variable state, a second probability variable state, a time-saving state, and during a specific jackpot game (the second variable winning device 65
The "left hit" display mode is configured to be displayed during a jackpot game in which the left hit is released (during a jackpot game in which the right hit is released), and the "left hit" display mode is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the right hit game ends. Also, when it is detected that a right hit game is being executed during a game state in which a left hit game is advantageous for the player, that is, during a normal state, the "left hit" display mode is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds).

Returning to FIG. 587(b), the explanation will be continued. Below the main display area Dm, a sub-display area Ds is formed. As shown in FIG. 588(a), this sub-display area Ds is configured to display comments on the game content being played. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand. Note that the sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose, and for example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls for each special pattern may be configured to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the sub-display area Ds to display a reserved display mode (for example, a reserved pattern display mode consisting of a circle) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls for each special pattern.
It is preferable to configure the system so that the player can know the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol by the number of reserved display modes displayed. Furthermore, it is preferable to determine the winning information corresponding to each reserved special symbol in advance, and to change the corresponding reserved display mode based on the determination result.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that he/she will win the jackpot by drawing a lottery for a special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed among the multiple reserved symbols that may exist. Furthermore, unlike this embodiment, since it is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to the individual reserved memory numbers, it is possible to set a result display that easily displays the reserved symbol display whose display mode has been changed to show the game result that may be advantageous to the player among the multiple reserved symbols.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the sub-display area Ds is configured to display a game result suggestion mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result for each pattern) to the player, a performance explanation mode for explaining the contents of the performance display being executed in the main display area Dm, a frame button related display mode for indicating the timing and result of operating the frame button 22, and a win related information display mode in which information regarding a jackpot game is displayed, and the display area ratio between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the contents to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbols displayed in a stopped state corresponds to a miss and there is a reserved ball, after the display is stopped for one second, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the reserved ball is started. In addition, if there are multiple reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball in time.

On the other hand, if there are no reserved balls and the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the missed special symbol is displayed for one second, the third symbol will continue to be displayed until a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed or a new ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640.
And if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed,
A demo effect is displayed to indicate that no game is being played. It is rare that no balls enter any of the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 even though the player has been continuously shooting balls for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). In most cases where the state in which the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds), this is due to the player quitting the game and no game being played on the pachinko machine 10 at all.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined time (
When a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that the player is not playing, and a demo performance is started. This allows a player who is about to select a pachinko machine 10 to start playing to easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demo performance display. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 before a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed,
A variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the new ball is executed.

<About the content of the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figures 588 to 603, the presentation executed in the first embodiment will be described.

First, an overview of the gameplay of the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won (hereinafter referred to as "first win") in a low probability non-time-saving state (normal), a high probability state (high probability state) of a special symbol is always set after the end of the jackpot game, and the number of times of the probability change limit (4
0 times) is set. Then, when the probability limit is reached, a low probability state (low probability state) of the special pattern is set.

Here, the probability limit refers to a threshold value that causes a process to be executed to set a low probability state after the end of a jackpot game, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a high probability state can be set after the end of the jackpot game is won.

The probability limit number of times is a value that is set when a jackpot is won in a low probability state and a high probability state is set after the jackpot game based on the jackpot is completed.
The value is updated at the end of the big win game played based on the big win, and the updated value is used to determine whether or not the probability change limit has been reached.

In the first embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern may be set after the end of the jackpot game. When the time-saving state is set, a time-saving limit number (10 times) is set. Then, when the time-saving limit is reached, a low probability state (non-time-saving state) of a normal pattern is set.

Here, the time-saving limit refers to a threshold value that causes a process to be executed to set a non-time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a time-saving state can be set after the end of a jackpot game is won.

The time-saving limit count is a value that is set when a jackpot is won in a non-time-saving state and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game based on the jackpot is completed. In the time-saving state, when a jackpot that sets the time-saving state is won after the jackpot game is completed, the value is updated at the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot, and the updated value is used to determine whether the time-saving limit has been reached.

In this way, in the first embodiment, by making the number of times for the time-saving limit and the number of times for the special probability limit different, even in the same game state (for example, a high-probability non-time-saving state (second special probability state)), it is possible to create an advantageous state in which the player can win a large number of prize balls, and an unfavorable state in which the player can win fewer prize balls than in the advantageous state, depending on the timing of winning the jackpot C (Figure 613 (b)), which sets the high-probability time-saving state (first special probability state), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 613(c), when a jackpot is won with the second special pattern, a 100% highly probable time-saving state (first probability variable state) is set after the jackpot game ends, but as shown in FIG. 613(b), when a jackpot is won with the first special pattern, there is a high probability that the time-saving state will not be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to be displayed variably at the same time, and when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed variably at the same time, the first special symbol is a symbol indicating that a big win or a small win has been won, and the second special symbol is a symbol indicating that a big win or a small win has been won.
When the second special symbol stops before the special symbol, the second special symbol is forced to stop with a symbol indicating a miss. Also, when the second special symbol stops before the first special symbol with a symbol indicating a big win, the first special symbol is forced to stop with a symbol indicating a miss.

In the first embodiment, the time for the first special symbol to change and the time for the second special symbol to change are different between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, and in the time-saving state, the time for the second special symbol to change is set shorter than the time for the first special symbol compared to the non-time-saving state, so that the second special symbol is more likely to stop first. Therefore, the time-saving state can be said to be a state in which it is easier to win the jackpot of the second special symbol.

As described above, after the jackpot game of the second special symbol ends, the first probability change state is set at 100%, so the first probability change state continues until the probability change limit or the time-saving limit is reached.
Since the jackpot of the second special symbol always gives a 10R jackpot, when the first probability variable state is set, a maximum of 10 10R jackpots can be won until the probability variable limit or time-saving limit is reached. Here, the "10R jackpot" refers to a jackpot game in which the door of the first variable winning device 65 shown in FIG. 2 is opened, and a maximum of 10 jackpot rounds are played in which a game ball can enter the first specific winning hole 65a. When a game ball enters the first specific winning hole 65a, the player can win a prize ball.

In addition, for any type of jackpot for the first special symbol, a 2R jackpot game is awarded, and a high probability state for the special symbol is set. However, as described above, for a jackpot for the first special symbol, a time-saving state is not set with a high probability. Here, the "2R jackpot game" refers to a jackpot game in which a maximum of two jackpot rounds are played in which the opening and closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650 shown in FIG. 2 is in an open state. As shown in FIG. 619, the opening and closing plate 6
Since the opening of 50b is for an extremely short time, the game ball cannot enter the second specific winning port 650a, and the player cannot win any prize balls.

For example, if you win the first special pattern jackpot (jackpot A shown in FIG. 613(b)) in which the high probability non-time shortening state (second probability state) is set during normal play, the jackpot will be 40
A limit on the number of times the special probability occurs is set, but a second special probability state is set in which the variable display of the first special pattern is mainly executed, and if the jackpot A or B occurs 40 times in succession during the second special probability state, the special probability limit is reached and the game returns to normal.

In addition, for example, a jackpot of the first special symbol that sets the first probability variable state during the second probability variable state (
Even if a player wins a jackpot C), if the remaining number of times for the special mode limit (remaining number of times for the special mode limit) is less than the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit (remaining number of times for the time-saving limit) (for example, if the remaining number of times for the special mode limit is 5 times and the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit is 10 times), the special mode limit will be reached before the time-saving limit is reached, so a low probability state for the special pattern will be set when the special mode limit is reached, and the time-saving state will be entered (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns). When the combined number of times that the first special pattern and the second special pattern have changed reaches 100 times, the time-saving state will transition to the normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns), so
Depending on the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit when the jackpot that sets the first probability variable state is won, it is possible that the state will transition to the normal state without winning the 10R jackpot.

In other words, in the first embodiment, the more high probability states of normal symbols are set before the probability limit is reached, the more likely it is that the player will obtain more prize balls.

Here, the remaining number of times of the probability change limit is the remaining number of times after the value of the probability change limit number is updated, and indicates the number of jackpots required to reach the probability change limit.
The remaining number of times of the time-saving limit refers to the remaining number of times after the value of the time-saving limit number of times is updated, and indicates the number of jackpots that will set the time-saving state required until the time-saving limit is reached.

Based on the above, an overview of the effects executed in the first embodiment will be described. As described above, the first jackpot win in the normal state is a jackpot win with the first special symbol, except in the "SPECIAL mode" (see FIG. 603) described later. Therefore, since a game state with different degrees of advantage is set after the end of the jackpot game depending on the jackpot type, in the "RUSH Acquisition Challenge" (see FIG. 588, FIG. 589) executed during the jackpot game,
To notify which game state is set.

When the player wins a jackpot (jackpot B, jackpot C) that sets the first probability variable state at the first hit, the game moves to the "Super RUSH mode" (see Fig. 590, Fig. 591), which is one of the presentation modes that is set when the first probability variable state is reached after the jackpot game ends. Details will be described later, but in the "Super RUSH mode" (see Fig. 590, Fig. 591), the set time-saving limit number of times (10 times) is reached before the set probability variable limit number of times (40 times) is reached, so that the player is notified that 10 times of 10R jackpot games can be won at the time of moving to the "Super RUSH mode".

In this way, by notifying the player that it is possible to win 10 10R jackpot games, the player can be made aware that a large amount of balls can be won by switching to the "Super RUSH mode".

On the other hand, if the first jackpot is a jackpot (jackpot A) in which the first jackpot is not set, one of the presentation modes set when the second jackpot is set after the jackpot game ends is selected.
The game then transitions to the "revenge mode" (see Fig. 592 and Fig. 593), which is one of the modes. Details will be described later, but the "revenge mode" is designed to inform the player of the jackpot win only when the first jackpot win is set, and to make it difficult for the player to notice that the jackpot win is made when the second jackpot win is set.
The system is configured so that it is difficult for a player to understand that the probability variable limit number of times has been updated due to winning a jackpot in which the second probability variable state is set.

More specifically, during the "revenge mode", if the first special pattern lottery results in a jackpot that sets the second probability variable state (if the remaining number of probability variable limit times is updated),
The same presentation is executed when a small jackpot is won (when the remaining number of the probability variable limit is not updated), and in this first embodiment, the game content of the jackpot game (2R jackpot game) executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is similar to that of the small jackpot game (similar in that the second variable winning device 650 is opened). This makes it difficult for the player to know that the probability variable limit has been updated.

In addition, during the "revenge mode" (see Fig. 592 and Fig. 593), the system is configured so that the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit is not less than the set number of times for the time-saving limit when a jackpot that sets the first probability variable state is won. In other words, the "revenge mode" is set only when the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit is greater than the upper limit number (10) that can be set as the time-saving limit.

Therefore, if a jackpot in which the first probability variable state is set is won during the "revenge mode", a notification is always given that the mode will transition to the "super RUSH mode" (see Figs. 590 and 591). By configuring in this way, a player who was unable to transition to the "super RUSH mode" at the first win can be made to continue playing during the "revenge mode" with the aim of transitioning to the "super RUSH mode".

Next, the "revenge mode" in which the second probability state is set (see Figure 592 and Figure 593)
In this case, when the transition condition described below is satisfied, the game is configured to transition to a different presentation mode, the "challenge mode" (see Figures 594 to 596), with the same second probability change state set.

In this "challenge mode," as in the "revenge mode," the player is notified only when he or she wins a jackpot that sets the first probability variable state. Therefore, when the player wins a jackpot that does not set the first probability variable state (a jackpot that sets the second probability variable state),
The system is designed so that it is difficult for the player to know when the probability limit number has been updated.

In "Challenge Mode" (see Fig. 594 to Fig. 596), you can also play in "Revenge Mode" (see Fig. 59
2, see FIG. 593), when you win a jackpot that sets the first probability variation state, the probability variation limit remaining number may be less than the time-saving limit remaining number, and the probability variation limit may be reached before the time-saving limit is reached. Furthermore, during the "challenge mode",
When the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit is one, if a jackpot that sets the first probability variable state is won, the probability variable limit will be reached after the jackpot game ends, and the state will transition to a time-saving state (a low probability state for special symbols, a high probability state for normal symbols).

Therefore, if a jackpot that sets the first special probability state is won during the "Challenge Mode", the game will transition to the "RUSH Mode" (see Figures 597 to 600), which is the first special probability state, or the "EXTRA Mode" (see Figures 601 and 602), which is a time-saving state.

In "RUSH mode" (see Fig. 597 to Fig. 600), "Super RUSH mode" (see Fig. 59
0, FIG. 591), when the mode is switched to "RUSH mode", the number of times that a 10R jackpot game can be won is not announced, but the number of times that the first probability variable state can be set until the probability variable limit is reached is announced in small doses during the mode (Stock announcement effect (see FIG. 597)
) is configured to run

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for a player who has set the "RUSH mode" to understand the number of times that the first probability variable state can be set before the probability variable limit is reached,
The stock notification effect gradually notifies the player of the number of times the first probability variable state can be set until the probability variable limit is reached, so that the player can be interested in the contents of the effect (stock notification effect) executed during the "RUSH mode".

In addition, if a player wins a jackpot that reaches both the special probability limit and the time-saving limit at the same time during the first special probability state, the game will enter a "SPECIAL mode" (Figure 6) in which the second special symbol mainly fluctuates even if the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends.
The "SPECIAL mode" continues until the end condition (for example, 1000 times of special symbol variation) is met, and as described above, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot D (Fig. 613(c)) is always set to the first probability variable state, so it can be said to be a mode advantageous to the player.

In addition, if the probability limit is reached before the time limit is reached, the game will transition to the time-saving "EXTRA mode" (Fig. 601, Fig. 602). In the "EXTRA mode",
Until the combined number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100, the second special symbol mainly changes, so if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during "EXTRA mode," a 10R jackpot game is executed, and if the time-saving limit has not been reached, the game transitions to the first probability change state.

In this way, even if a player wins a jackpot that sets the first special probability state in the "challenge mode" (see Figs. 594 to 596), it is not certain that the player will win 10 10R jackpot games, and depending on the number of times remaining in the special probability limit, it may be disadvantageous for the player in that he or she may not be able to win 10 10R jackpot games. However, since there is a possibility of transitioning to "SPECIAL mode" (see Fig. 603) via "RUSH mode" (see Figs. 597 to 600), the player can continue playing by anticipating the transition to "SPECIAL mode".

As described above, in the first embodiment, by notifying only a specific jackpot win (a jackpot win for which the first probability variable state is set) during the second probability variable state, it is difficult for the player to know the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit, while in the second probability variable state, the "revenge mode" (see Figs. 592 and 593) and the "challenge mode" (see Figs. 594 to 599) are selected according to the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit.
6) and "Revenge Mode" and "Super RUSH Mode"
(See Figure 590 and Figure 591) and in "Challenge Mode"
By making the player look forward to a transition to the "IAL mode" (see FIG. 603), it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game during the second probability variable state.

Next, the details of the presentation in the first embodiment will be described.
Refer to the "RUSH Acquisition Challenge" that is executed during the big win game after the first win.
This article explains:

FIG. 588(a) is a presentation screen for the "RUSH Acquisition Challenge".
The display area Dm1 indicates "Hit Right," urging the player to shoot the ball to the right side of the game board. The display area Dm2 indicates "555," indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot. The display area Dm3 indicates that the second special symbol has not changed.

A hero 801 and a treasure box 802 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "
"If a RUSH ball comes out of the treasure chest, enter RUSH!" is displayed, suggesting that whether or not to move to RUSH will be notified depending on what comes out of the treasure chest 802.

FIG. 588(b) shows a "RUSH" mode that is executed when a jackpot (shown in FIG. 613(b) as jackpot B or C) is won in which a high probability time-saving state (first probability variable state) is set in the normal state.
8 is an example of an effect screen for the "Get Challenge" effect. An effect is displayed in which a first ball 803a with "Super RUSH" written on it appears from a treasure box 802, and the first display area HR1 displays "Congratulations!"
"Super RUSH mode" (see FIG. 590 and FIG. 591) will be displayed in the first game information display area Dm4, and "Yay! You got Super RUSH!" will be displayed in the sub display area Ds, and it will be announced that the game will move to the "Super RUSH mode" (see FIG. 590 and FIG. 591) after the big win game ends.
In the "USH mode", the player wins a jackpot, and the number of prize balls that can be won and the number of prize balls that have already been won are displayed. In FIG. 588(b), the player wins a 2R jackpot on the first hit, and as described above, no prize balls can be obtained, so "0" is displayed.

By configuring in this manner, the total amount of bonuses to be awarded when the "Super RUSH Mode" is set (information indicating the number of 10R jackpot plays and the expected number of winning balls) can be notified to the player in advance, allowing the player to play with peace of mind and a sense of superiority.

FIG. 589 shows a jackpot in which a high probability non-time shortening state (second probability state) is set (FIG. 613(b)
8 is an example of a presentation screen of "RUSH Acquisition Challenge" executed when a jackpot A) is won, as shown in FIG. 8. A presentation is displayed in which a second ball 803b with "Revenge" written on it appears from a treasure box 802, "Too bad" is displayed in the first display area HR1, and "Entering Revenge Mode Next Time!" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds, informing the player that the game will switch to "Revenge Mode" after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, by notifying the player of the game state that will be set after the end of the big win game during the big win game, the player can play the game in an easily understandable manner.

In the first embodiment, the game state set after the big win game is ended is notified by the contents of the treasure box 802, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be notified by other characters, or the game state may be notified by sound or by the light emission of an LED provided on the board instead of the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the effects in the "Super RUSH mode" will be described with reference to Figs. 590 and 591. Fig. 590(a) is an example of an effect screen displayed when a special symbol is displayed variably in the "Super RUSH mode". In the first embodiment, as described above,
Since the special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to be displayed variably at the same time, the special symbol 1 variable display area Dm2 and the special symbol 2 variable display area Dm3 are displayed to indicate that both special symbols are being displayed variably. The first game information display area Dm4 displays "10R Bonus 0/10" and indicates the number of 10R jackpot games that can be obtained until the "Super RUSH mode" ends (
The number of times you can get the jackpot D (Figure 613 (c)) before the time limit is reached and the number of jackpot Ds you have already got are displayed. When it becomes "10/10", "Super RUSH" is activated.
This indicates that the "Celebration Mode" is ending. In the main display area Dm, an effect is displayed in which the hero 801 chases a first balloon 804a with the word "Celebration" written on it.

FIG. 590(b) shows a jackpot D(
This is the screen when the player wins the jackpot D (Figure 613 (c)). The special chart 2 variable display area Dm3 displays "777" indicating that the player has won the jackpot D, and the special chart 1 variable display area Dm2 displays "777".
The number "123" is displayed, indicating that the first special symbol has been forcibly stopped as a miss.
In addition, the first display area HR1 displays "10R jackpot", and the hero 801 hits the first balloon 8
By getting 04a, it is notified that the jackpot D has been won, and the first game information display area Dm4 displays "10R Bonus 1/10", and the number of times the jackpot D has been won up to now is updated and displayed.

FIG. 591(a) is an example of a presentation screen in the "Super RUSH mode" when the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit is 1. Since the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit is 1, even if the next jackpot is a jackpot that sets the first probability variable state, the second probability variable state will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, if the next jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) is won, the "Super R
To indicate that the "USH mode" is ending, the hero 801 enters the second page with "END" written on it.
In this way, in the "Super RUSH mode",
By configuring the display so that different balloons are displayed according to the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit, the player can easily understand whether the first probability variation will continue or not after the end of the big win game.

In the case of Fig. 590(a), if the second special symbol is not displayed and the first special symbol is displayed to indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot, the second balloon 804b appears from the right side of the main display area Dm, and when the first special symbol stops, the hero 801 takes the second balloon 804b. In that case, if the jackpot type is jackpot C (Fig. 613(b)), the text written on the second balloon 804b changes to "Continue", notifying that the "Super RUSH mode" will continue.

By configuring the second balloon 804b to appear in this manner, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility of winning a jackpot with the first special pattern, and to encourage the player to start the varying display of the second special pattern before the varying display of the first special pattern ends.

FIG. 591(b) is an example of a presentation screen when a big win D (FIG. 613(c)) that reaches the time-saving limit during the "Super RUSH mode" is won.
It is shown that No. 1 has taken the second balloon 804b and won the big win D. In addition, the second display area HR2 displays "30 times left until the special rate limit", notifying that the number of times left until the special rate limit is 30.

In this way, by notifying the player of the remaining number of times of the probability change limit at the end of the "Super RUSH mode", if the remaining number of times of the probability change limit is large, it becomes easier for the player to continue playing in order to win a jackpot that will transition to the "Super RUSH mode" again. Even if the remaining number of times of the probability change limit is small, for example, if the remaining number of times of the probability change limit is 12 times,
It is possible to continue playing the game with the aim of winning a jackpot that can transition to the "game mode" (see FIG. 603).

Referring to Figures 592 and 593, the presentation in "revenge mode" will be explained.
The "revenge mode" is a mode to which the mode is switched when the high probability non-time-saving state (second probability state) is set when the remaining number of times in the probability limit is between 40 and 14. In other words, if the first hit is a big win A (Fig. 613(b)) or if the time-saving limit is reached in the first probability state, the mode will switch to the "revenge mode" if the remaining number of times in the probability limit is between 40 and 14.

FIG. 592(a) is an example of an effect screen when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner during the "revenge mode". During the "revenge mode", an effect is displayed in the main display area Dm in which a hero 801 chases a rabbit 805. Additionally, the sub-display area Ds displays "Revenge mode in progress! Chance to win Super RUSH!", and notifies the player that if a specific jackpot is won during the "revenge mode", the mode will transition to the "Super RUSH mode".

FIG. 592(b) shows a jackpot C (FIG. 613) in which a high probability time-saving state (first probability variable state) is set.
This is an example of an effect screen when the player wins the big win C (b). In the main display area Dm, an effect is displayed in which the hero 801 retrieves the treasure box 802 from the rabbit 805, and the first ball 803a comes out of the treasure box 802. This allows the player to recognize that the player has won the big win C and that the game will move to the "Super RUSH mode" after the big win game ends.

In addition, the first game information display area Dm4 displays "10R bonus total 10 times" and indicates the number of jackpots D (10R jackpots) that have been won from the first win to the present. When a jackpot D is won, the displayed value is added. This value is the number of jackpots A, B,
Since the count is not updated when C (Fig. 613(b)) is won, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of jackpots that have been won from the first win to the present, making it difficult for the player to predict the remaining number of times in the special mode limit.

FIG. 593(a) is an example of a presentation screen when a high probability non-time shortening state (second probability state) is set and a jackpot A, B (see FIG. 613(b)) or a small jackpot is won. In the special pattern 1 variable display area Dm2, "111" is displayed, indicating that the first special pattern has won the jackpot A (or B).
is displayed, and "123" is displayed in the special pattern 2 variable display area Dm3, indicating that the second special pattern has been forcibly stopped as a miss. However, in the main display area Dm, the hero 801 chases the rabbit 805, just as when the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

In this way, when a jackpot A, B or a small jackpot is won, the presentation in the main display area Dm is the same as that during the variable display of the special pattern, making it difficult for the player to notice that he or she has won a jackpot A or B, and making it difficult for the player to count the number of jackpot wins and thereby determine the remaining number of times in the special jackpot limit.

In the first embodiment, the special chart 1 variable display area Dm2 and the special chart 2 variable display area Dm3 are configured to be visible to the player, but this is not limited to this. For example, the special chart 1 variable display area Dm2 and the special chart 2 variable display area Dm3 may be displayed even smaller so that they are difficult for the player to see, and the display content may be notified of the lottery result with some kind of symbol (such as "○" or "×") instead of a number. By configuring in this way, the high probability non-time-saving state (second probability state)
It becomes more difficult for the player to notice that he has won the big win A or B and it becomes difficult to predict the remaining number of times of the probability change limit, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In the first embodiment, the remaining number of times of the probability variable limit is not notified, and it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to predict the remaining number of times of the probability variable limit, but it may be configured to notify the remaining number of times of the probability variable limit. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for a player who has other plans to predict how long the special pattern high probability state (high probability state of special pattern) can continue, and based on that, he or she can decide whether or not to continue playing.

FIG. 593(b) is an example of a presentation screen when the transition condition to the "challenge mode" is met during the "revenge mode". When the transition condition is met, a big win C (FIG. 613
As in the case of winning the big win C (Fig. 613(b)), an effect is executed in the main display area Dm in which the hero 801 retrieves the treasure box 802 from the rabbit 805. However, unlike the big win C (Fig. 613(b)), an effect is displayed in which a third ball 803c with the word "Challenge" written on it appears from the treasure box 802, and the sub-display area Ds displays the message "Revenge mode ended...entering next challenge mode!"
is displayed, notifying the user that the mode will switch to "challenge mode."

By configuring in this manner, when an effect in which the rabbit 805 drops the treasure chest 802 is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in whether "Super RUSH" or "Challenge" will come out of the treasure chest 802, thereby making the game more entertaining.

Next, with reference to Fig. 594 to Fig. 596, the effects executed in the "challenge mode" will be described. The "challenge mode" is a mode to which the mode is entered when the high probability non-time-saving state (second probability state) is set when the number of times remaining in the probability limit is between 13 and 2, or based on the number of small wins won during the "revenge mode". Therefore, when a big win C (Fig. 613(b)) is won during the "challenge mode", the number of times the time-saving limit is set (10
Since there are cases where the remaining number of times in the special mode limit is fewer (for example, the remaining number of times in the special mode limit is 5) than the number of times in the special mode limit, if the special mode limit is reached before the time-saving limit is reached, a low-probability time-saving state (time-saving) is set.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is not won in the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) before the time-saving end condition is met, a low-probability non-time-saving state (normal state) will be set, and it may not be possible to play 10 rounds of jackpot play. This means that the player may be at a disadvantage compared to winning jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)) in "revenge mode" in that there is a possibility that the player will be able to win fewer prize balls.

However, if the probability limit and the time limit are reached at the same time (for example, when the probability limit is 11 times, after winning the jackpot C (Figure 613 (b)), the jackpot D is 10 times higher than the limit).
In the case where the second special symbol is won once during the "revenge mode", not only can the player get ten 10R jackpot plays, but after the jackpot play in which both limits are reached at the same time ends, the player will enter a "SPECIAL mode" (see Fig. 603) which is a variable, low-probability, non-time-saving state (normal) in which the second special symbol is the main symbol, and which is advantageous to the player compared to winning the jackpot C during the "revenge mode".

In this way, when a jackpot C (Fig. 613(b)) is won in the "challenge mode", there is a possibility that the "revenge mode" will be more advantageous than the jackpot C, and therefore it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play due to a transition to the "challenge mode" where there is a possibility that ten 10R jackpots cannot be obtained.

Furthermore, by configuring the game to transition to "challenge mode" even when the number of small jackpot wins exceeds a predetermined number, it is possible to make it even more difficult for a player to predict the remaining number of times until the special mode limit is reached based on the fact that the game has transitioned to "challenge mode."

FIG. 594(a) is an example of an effect screen during the variable display of special symbols in the "challenge mode." In the main display area Dm, an effect is displayed in which the hero 801 is about to open the door 806. In addition, in the first display area HR1,
"Enter!" is displayed, informing the player that some kind of effect will be executed when the door 806 opens.

FIG. 594(b) is an example of an effect screen when the big win C (FIG. 613(b)) is won during the "challenge mode". In the main display area Dm, a door 806 opens, and an effect is displayed in which the fourth ball 803d with "RUSH" written on it is found, and in the first display area HR1, "RUSH" is displayed.
SH acquired!' is displayed, and 'Next RUSH enters!' is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and
The user is notified that the system will be switched to the "USH mode."

FIG. 595(a) is an example of a presentation screen when a big win A, B (FIG. 613(b)) or a small win is won during the "challenge mode". The special pattern 1 variable display area Dm2 displays "111" indicating that the first special pattern has won the big win A (or B), and the special pattern 2 variable display area Dm3 displays "123" indicating that the second special pattern has been forcibly stopped as a miss. However, in the main display area Dm, the presentation of the hero 801 trying to open the door 806 is displayed, just as when the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

As in the "revenge mode," when a jackpot A, B, or a small jackpot is won, the presentation in the main display area Dm is the same as that during the variable display of the special pattern, making it difficult for the player to notice that he or she has won a jackpot A or B, and making it difficult for the player to determine the remaining number of times in the special jackpot limit by counting the number of times the jackpot has been won.

FIG. 595(b) is an example of a presentation screen that is displayed when the transition condition is met by winning a jackpot C (FIG. 613(b)) during the "challenge mode". Specifically, this is the case when a jackpot C is won when the number of times remaining in the special chance limit is 1. In this case, since the special chance limit is reached by winning the current jackpot C, the first special chance state is not set after the jackpot game ends, and the time-saving state is set. In other words, the mode does not transition to "RUSH mode", but to "E
Therefore, in the main display area Dm, a door 806 opens, an effect is displayed in which the fifth ball 803e marked "EXTRA" has been found, "EXTRA acquired" is displayed in the first display area HR1, and "Enter EXTRA mode next time" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, notifying the user of the transition to "EXTRA mode."

In this way, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is determined in advance according to the degree to which each limit has been reached after the jackpot game ends, and based on the determination result, even when a jackpot of the same jackpot type is won, the presentation mode at the time of the jackpot winning is configured to be different, thereby making it possible to inform the player of the subsequent game content in an easy-to-understand manner.

Also, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 having a jackpot type in which a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the current jackpot win was won for a jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set, or whether the current jackpot win was won for a jackpot type in which a first probability variable state is set, but the probability variable limit has been reached, resulting in the win of a jackpot type in which a time-saving state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that a disadvantageous game state has been set (has been set) due to the probability variable limit being reached.

Figure 596 is an example of a presentation screen when the transition condition is met by winning jackpot A or B (Figure 613 (b)) during "challenge mode". Specifically, this is the case when jackpot A (or B) is won and the probability limit is reached when there is only one remaining turn in the probability limit. In this case, a low probability non-time-saving state (normal state) is set, so in the main display area Dm, a door 806 opens and a sixth ball 803f with "END" written on it is discovered, and the secondary display area Ds displays "Challenge mode ended... returning to normal...", notifying the player that they will be transitioning to normal.

In this way, in the "challenge mode," the mode to which the player will move (the game state to which the game is set) differs depending on the remaining number of times in the special mode limit and the type of jackpot won, so the player is made easy to understand by being informed of the mode to which the player will move depending on the type of ball found when the door 806 is opened.

In addition, the door 806 is configured not to open when the jackpot A or B (FIG. 613(b)) is won, except when the transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the effect of opening the door 806 is executed,
The player can be made to look forward to winning the jackpot C (Fig. 613(b)), and can be made interested in what kind of ball is behind the door 806, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

However, the presentation during the second probability variable state is not limited to this. In the embodiment, the two modes, "revenge mode" and "challenge mode", are switched depending on the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit, but the second probability variable state from the first win to the transition to the normal state may be executed in one mode. In this case, it becomes even more difficult for the player to predict the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit depending on the mode to which the player has transitioned, which further increases the interest of the game. Of course, two or more modes may be switched depending on the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit.

In the first embodiment, in the second probability state, the jackpot A, B (FIG. 613(b))
In the case where a player wins, the player is not notified, but this is not limited to the above.
For example, when the jackpot A or B is won, a door 806 may be opened, but there may be nothing inside. By doing this, the second probability variable state is set, and when the jackpot C (FIG. 613(b)) is not won, the performance does not progress for a long time in the main display area Dm, which can eliminate the problem that the player gets bored.

In addition, the effects are not limited to those using the treasure box 802 and the door 806, and may be other characters. In addition to the effects on the third symbol display device 81, sounds and LEDs on the game board may be used.
The notification may be given by light emission or the like.

Next, referring to Fig. 597 to Fig. 600, the effects executed during the "RUSH mode" will be described. In the "RUSH mode", as described above, the number of times that the jackpot D (Fig. 613(c)) can be won changes depending on the combination of the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit and the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit. Specifically, when the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit is 12 times and the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit is 10 times (when the jackpot C (Fig. 613(b)) is won in the second probability variable and the time-saving limit number is newly set), it is possible to reach the time-saving limit before reaching the probability variable limit, so it is possible to win 10 times of 10R jackpot play.

However, if the remaining number of times for the special mode limit is 5 and the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit is 10, the special mode limit will be reached before the time-saving limit is reached, so at most 5 10R jackpot games can be won, and after the special mode limit is reached, a low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) is set, and if a jackpot is not won before the time-saving end condition is met, a low-probability non-time-saving state (normal state) is set.

Therefore, in the "RUSH mode", the "RUSH stock effect" is configured to inform the player of how long the first probability variable state will continue. The number of stocks in the RUSH stock changes according to the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit and the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit. For example, if the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit is 12 and the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit is 10, the maximum number of stocks that can be notified is "10". On the other hand, if the remaining number of times in the probability variable limit is 5 and the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit is 10, the maximum number of stocks that can be notified is "5".

FIG. 597(a) is an example of an effect screen displayed during the variable display of special symbols in the "RUSH mode." In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 chases three balloons. In the sub-display area Ds, "RUSH in progress! RUSH will continue as long as there is stock!" is displayed, and in the second game information display area Dm5, "RUSH stock x 0" is displayed, and
It has been reported that the USH stock is at 0.

When the hero 801 picks up the fourth balloon 804d labeled "Stock+?" displayed in the main display area Dm, the number of RUSH stocks is displayed and the value in the second game information display area Dm5 is updated.

FIG. 597(b) is an example of a presentation screen when the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit is 10 and the stock is successful. In the main display area Dm, a presentation is executed in which the hero 801 takes the fourth balloon 804d, and the fourth balloon 804d changes to a fifth balloon 804d with the words "Stock +5" written on it.
As a result, the value of the second game information display area Dm5 is updated to "5", and it is announced that the first probability variable state will continue even if the big win D is won.

For example, when the remaining number of times of the probability limit is 12 times and the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit is 10 times, the number of stocks may be notified as "+10" or may be notified in small amounts in several times as "+1". By doing so, even if the initial number of stocks is small, it is possible to make the player expect that stocks will be added, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In FIG. 597(b), a presentation in which the stock is successful when the special symbol is not drawn is displayed, but this is not limited to the above, and if neither limit has been reached when the big win is won, a presentation in which the number of stocks is added may be executed. In this way, when the second balloon 804b is picked up without a stock, a presentation in which the second balloon 804b changes to the fifth balloon 804e is executed, so that even if the second balloon 804b is selected, the player can be informed of the fifth balloon 804.
This makes it possible for the player to look forward to the change to e, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

FIG. 598(a) is an example of a presentation screen when a jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) is won in the "RUSH mode" with RUSH stock. In the main display area Dm,
The hero 801 takes the third balloon 804c with "10R" written on it, and the sub-display area Ds displays "RUSH CONTINUES!" and the value of the second game information display area Dm5 becomes "5".
This allows the player to recognize that the first probability change will continue after the big win game ends.

FIG. 598(b) is an example of a presentation screen when the jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) is won in the "RUSH mode" without a RUSH stock. In the main display area Dm,
The hero 801 takes the second balloon 804b with "END" written on it, and the sub-display area Ds displays "RUSH END...Next Challenge Mode", and the value of the second game information display area Dm5 is "0" and is not updated.
It is possible to recognize that the "mode" has ended.

In FIG. 598(b), the secondary display area Ds displays "RUSH completed...next challenge mode", however, this is not limited thereto, and for example, when transitioning to "EXTRA mode", "next EXTRA mode" is displayed.

FIG. 599(a) is an example of a presentation screen that is displayed when the remaining number of times for the probability change limit is less than the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit. In this case, the probability change limit is reached before the time-saving limit is reached, so a low probability time-saving state (time-saving) is set when the probability change limit is reached. Therefore, when the hero 801 picks up the fourth balloon 804d, the fourth balloon 804d becomes "Stock +
The balloon changes to a sixth balloon 804f having "5+EXTRA" written on it, and a notification is given in advance that the mode will transition to "EXTRA mode" after the "RUSH mode" ends.

In this embodiment, when the fourth balloon 804d is removed, the fourth balloon 804d becomes the fifth balloon 8
The display changes to 04f to notify the player in advance of the transition to "EXTRA mode." However, for example, when the number of stocks is "0" and the hero 801 picks up the second balloon 804b, a display may be executed in which the second balloon 804b changes to a balloon with "EXTRA" written on it.

FIG. 599(b) is an example of a presentation screen that is executed when the remaining number of times of the probability limit is 1 and the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit is 1. In this case, the next big win D (FIG. 613(c)
When the player wins the next big win D, the probability limit and time limit are reached at the same time, so the "SPECIAL mode" (see FIG. 603) is set after the big win game ends. Therefore, while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the main display area Dm displays an effect in which a seventh balloon 804g with "SPECIAL" written on it flies in. As a result, when the player wins the next big win D, the "SP
It is possible to recognize that the aircraft will transition to "ECIAL mode."

FIG. 599 is an example of an effect screen that is executed when the player hits the big win D (FIG. 613(c)) and reaches both the probability limit and the time limit at the same time. In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 takes the seventh balloon 804g, and the sub-display area Ds displays "Enter SPECIAL mode next time!", and when the player finishes playing the big win, the "SPECIAL
It is possible to recognize that the mode is shifting to the "AL mode."

As described above, in the first embodiment, by setting both the probability variation limit number and the time-saving limit number, it is possible to obtain the same type of jackpot (for example, jackpot D (
Even if the player wins in FIG. 613(c), multiple game states with different degrees of advantage can be set after the end of the jackpot game depending on whether both limits are reached, whether only the probability variable limit is reached, whether only the time-saving limit is reached, or whether both limits are reached at the same time. As a result, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game becomes complicated and difficult for the player to understand, but the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is notified to the player by varying the presentation mode at the time of winning the jackpot and the presentation mode during the jackpot game according to the remaining number of times of the probability variable limit and the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit, so that the player can smoothly play a game suitable for the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the seventh balloon 804g appears when the number of times remaining in the special rate limit is 1 and the number of times remaining in the time-saving limit is 1. However, this is not limited to this, and the seventh balloon 804g may appear even when the number of times remaining in the special rate limit or the number of times remaining in the time-saving limit is 2 or more.
Since there is a possibility that balloon 804g will not be caught, the player can be interested in whether or not balloon 804g will be caught, thereby making the game more entertaining.

In the embodiment, when the jackpot reaches both the special limit and the time limit at the same time, the S
However, when it is predicted that the condition for transitioning to the SPECIAL mode will be met (when the remaining number of times for the special mode limit and the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit are the same when the first special mode jackpot is won), a special performance mode (for example, "SPECIAL
The player may be notified by a display such as "L Big Win!". By configuring in this way, the player can know in advance that the SPECIAL mode will be set when both limits are reached, which can increase the player's motivation to play.

In addition, when the special pattern during the second probability change state is fluctuating, if the condition for transitioning to the SPECIAL mode can be met (when the remaining number of probability change limit times is the same as the time-saving limit number set by the first probability change big win), a special performance mode (for example, "SPECIAL
It is also possible to notify the player by displaying a message such as "Chance to switch to L mode!?". By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while having hope that the game will switch to the SPECIAL mode.

Next, referring to Fig. 601 and Fig. 602, the effects executed in the "EXTRA mode" will be described. The "EXTRA mode" is a mode to which the player enters when a low probability time-saving state (time-saving state) is set. As described above, if the probability variable limit is reached before the time-saving limit, the player enters the "EXTRA mode" after the jackpot game that reaches the probability variable limit ends.

FIG. 601(a) is an example of a presentation screen when the game has transitioned to "EXTRA mode" and the 10th combined variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being executed. The third game information display area Dm6 displays the remaining number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol until the end condition of the "EXTRA mode" is reached. The value displayed in the third game information display area Dm6 is updated (subtracted) and displayed when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends (when the symbol stops).

In addition, in "EXTRA mode", the second special pattern mainly changes, and the big win D (Figure 613 (
Since the player is likely to win c), by displaying "EXTRA mode in progress! Chance to win 10R jackpot!" in the sub-display area Ds, the player can be made to play the game in the hope of winning the jackpot D.

In the main display area Dm, a performance is executed in which the hero 801 fights the dinosaur 807, and in the first display area H
R1 displays "If you defeat the enemy, you will win the jackpot." If you win the jackpot, Hero 801 will turn into Dinosaur 8.
It notifies that a performance of defeating 07 will be carried out.

FIG. 601(b) is an example of a presentation screen when a jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) is won during "EXTRA mode". The special symbol 2 variable display area Dm3 displays "777" indicating that a jackpot D has been won, the first display area HR1 displays "Victory", and the main display area Dm displays a presentation in which the hero 801 defeats the dinosaur 807, informing the player that he has won the jackpot D. In addition, in response to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the seventh game information display area Dm6 is updated from "91" to "89".

In addition, even if you win the jackpot D (FIG. 613(c)) in the "EXTRA mode", depending on the remaining number of time-saving limit, the first probability change state may not be set after the jackpot game ends ("EXT
In the "RA mode", if the time limit is reached due to a big win D, the sub-display area Ds will display "Next RUSH Challenge!".
If the time limit has not been reached, the fourth ball 803d (FIG. 588(a)) is drawn from the treasure box 802 (FIG. 588(a)).
94(b)) appears, notifying the player that the mode will switch to "RUSH mode", and when the time-saving limit is reached, a second ball 803b (Fig. 589) appears from the treasure chest 802, notifying the player that the mode will switch to "Revenge mode".

FIG. 602(a) is an example of an effect screen when the lottery result is a miss or when a small win is won during the "EXTRA mode". In the main display area Dm, an effect of a hero 801 fighting a dinosaur 807 is displayed, just as when the special symbol is being displayed. The value of the third game information display area Dm6 is updated from "91" to "90" in response to the display of the second special symbol.

FIG. 602(b) is an example of a presentation screen when the termination condition of the "EXTRA mode" is met. This corresponds to the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaching 100 times.
The value in the game information display area Dm6 is updated to "0", and the sub-display area Ds displays "EXTRA mode ended...returning to normal...", indicating that normal mode will be set.
Moreover, in the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 is defeated by the dinosaur 807.

By doing so, it is possible to inform the player in an easily understandable manner that the conditions for ending the "EXTRA mode" have been met and the normal state will be set.

However, the effects during the "EXTRA mode" are not limited to this. In the first embodiment, the remaining number of variations until the end condition of the "EXTRA mode" is reached is notified, but it may be configured not to notify. By configuring in this way, the player can play with a sense of tension because he does not know when the "EXTRA mode" will end.

In the embodiment, if the special limit is reached before the time limit is reached, "EX
TRA mode, but even if both limits are not reached,
In this case, since the game state is the first probability variable state, for example, when the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 times, a presentation may be executed to transition to the "RUSH mode", or a presentation may be executed to notify the player that the first probability variable state is in progress and continue the "EXTRA mode". By configuring in this way, even if the game state transitions to the "EXTRA mode", the player can be made to expect that the first probability variable state is set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, a battle between the hero 801 and the dinosaur 807 is performed in the main display area Dm, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be performed using other characters.

Next, referring to FIG. 603, the effects executed in the "SPECIAL mode" will be described. As described above, the "SPECIAL mode" is a mode to which the player enters when the low probability non-time-saving state (normal state) is set based on the fact that the probability limit and time-saving limit are reached simultaneously. In the "SPECIAL mode", the second special symbol mainly changes, so the big win D (
613(c)) is expected to be won, and since neither the probability limit nor the time limit is set, if the jackpot D is won, it is confirmed that the mode will transition to the "Super RUSH mode". Therefore, it can be said that this mode is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in which the first special symbol mainly fluctuates.

FIG. 603(a) is a display screen during the variable display of the special symbol in the "SPECIAL mode". In the main display area Dm, the hero 801 is displayed in the 8th round with "10R + Super RUSH" written on it.
The effect of chasing the balloon 804h is executed, and the sub-display area Ds displays "SPECIAL MODE IN PROGRESS! Chance to win 10R jackpot + SUPER RUSH!", and the player is informed of "SPECIAL MODE IN PROGRESS!".
The third game information display area Dm6 indicates that the game is in the "AL mode".
It is suggested that the "SPECIAL mode" will continue until the next big win is won. This allows a player who is about to end the game because the high probability state in which it is easy to win a big win has ended to recognize that the game is moving to the "SPECIAL mode" which is more advantageous than usual, and makes the player want to continue playing until the big win D (Fig. 613(c)) is won.

FIG. 603(b) is an example of an effect screen when the jackpot D (FIG. 603(c)) is won in the "SPECIAL MODE". An effect is executed in which the hero 801 takes the eighth balloon 804h, and it is announced that the jackpot D has been won and that the mode will move to the "SUPER RUSH MODE".

In the embodiment, the presentation during the "SPECIAL mode" executed in the main display area Dm is a presentation in which the hero 801 chases the eighth balloon 804h, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the player may be notified by changing the background of the normal mode.

Next, referring to Fig. 604 to Fig. 607, the correspondence between the transition contents of the game state and the performance contents to be executed will be explained. Fig. 604 is a diagram showing the flow when the jackpot C (the jackpot type in which the first probability variable state is set) is won in the normal state, among the correspondence between the transition contents of the game state and the performance contents to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 604, in the normal state, the first special symbol variation (special 1 variation) is mainly executed, and when the jackpot C (first probability variable jackpot) is won, the RUSH acquisition challenge (see FIG. 588, FIG. 589) is executed during the jackpot game (during the 2R jackpot game). In this case, since the jackpot game corresponds to the jackpot type (jackpot C) in which the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, the RUSH acquisition challenge performance results in "Super R
A display mode indicating that "USH" has been confirmed is displayed (see FIG. 588(b)). Then, at the end of the big win game, the first probability variable state is set, and the probability variable limit number of times "40" and the time-saving limit number of times "10" are set.

During "Super RUSH", the first probability change state is set 10 times in a row (10R jackpot is set once).
Since the possibility of winning 0 consecutive wins is extremely high (certain), as shown in Figure 590,
A display mode for indicating the number of times (upper limit) a 10R jackpot game can be executed during "Super RUSH" and the number of 10R jackpot games that have been executed at the present time are displayed in the first game information display area Dm4.
will be displayed.

When the first special probability state has been set 10 times in a row, the effect shown in FIG. 591(a) is displayed, that is, a display mode indicating that the first special probability state will end with one more jackpot win, and if a jackpot win is won in this state, the display screen shown in FIG. 591(b) is displayed.

If a jackpot is won when the first probability variable state has been set 10 times in a row, the probability variable limit number at the end of the jackpot game will be "30" and the time-saving limit number will be "0", so time-saving limit processing is executed and the game state transitions to the second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). In this state, the probability variable limit number is "30", and if a jackpot type (jackpot C) for which the first probability variable state is set in the first special symbol lottery executed during this second probability variable state is won, the first probability variable state can be set 10 times in a row, so the "revenge mode" is set as the presentation mode during the second probability variable state (see FIG. 592).

During this second probability change state, a game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed is executed by hitting the right hand side, so that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol lottery is also executed. In this first embodiment, if a small jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery being executed is executed.
A process for forcibly displaying a special pattern change in a display mode indicating a miss (special pattern 2 discard process)
Since the above is configured to be executed, the result of the second special symbol lottery is not stopped and displayed during the second probability variable state as long as the right-hand hit game is executed properly.

Then, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed during the "revenge mode", and the jackpot types (jackpot A, B) for which the second special probability state is set after the jackpot game ends are consecutively won, and the special probability state count limit reaches "13 or less", the presentation mode indicating the second special probability state can be shifted from "revenge mode" to "challenge mode", and the mode will transition to "challenge mode" based on the jackpot win or small jackpot win during the second special probability state.

When the mode transitions to "challenge mode", as shown in Figures 594 and 595, a presentation is executed to indicate to the player that the special probability limit has been reached (the special symbol high probability period during which the high probability state of the special symbol can be set consecutively ends), and when the 40th jackpot is won after the special symbol high probability period is set, the special probability limit is reached, and a special probability limit process is executed which forcibly sets the special symbol to a low probability state at the end of the jackpot game, and the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 605, an example of the game state and the flow of the execution presentation when the first special symbol lottery wins the jackpot C in the state where the second probability variable state is set among the flows of FIG. 604 described above will be explained. FIG. 605 is a diagram that shows an example of the game state and the flow of the execution presentation when the jackpot that sets the first probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game is won among the correspondence between the transition contents of the game state and the contents of the presentation to be executed during the second probability variable state.

As shown in FIG. 605, the second probability variable state is set, and the 35th jackpot is won, and the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends (jackpot C
), a presentation indicating a transition to "RUSH mode" (first special state) in the "challenge mode" presentation is executed as a jackpot variation presentation (see Figure 594 (b)).

And when the big win game ends, the set limit number of times of the probability change is updated,
A new time-saving limit of "10" has been set, and the first probability change state is indicated by the "
A presentation in which "RUSH mode" is set is executed (see FIG. 597). At this point, the remaining number of times for the special probability limit is "5" and the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit is "10", so the maximum number of times that the first special probability state can be continued is "5". Therefore, during the fifth big win fluctuation, "0" is displayed as the number of RUSH stocks in the second game information display area Dm5, and a presentation is executed suggesting whether the next big win will result in the RUSH mode continuing (the first special probability state continuing), transitioning to the normal state (SPECIAL mode), or transitioning to the time-saving state (EXTRA mode) (see FIG. 599(a)). As a result of the presentation, the time-saving state (E
A big win game is executed after an effect is executed informing the user that the game mode will be changed to the XTRA mode.

At the end of the jackpot game, the special chance limit is reached, and special chance limit processing is executed to forcibly set a low probability state for special symbols, and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, and the performance in "EXTRA mode" indicating the time-saving state is executed (see FIG. 601).

Next, referring to Fig. 606, an example of the game state and the flow of the execution performance when the second special symbol lottery wins a jackpot in the state where the time-saving state is set among the flows of Fig. 605 described above will be explained. Fig. 606 is a diagram that shows an example of the game state and the flow of the execution performance when the jackpot that sets the first probability variable state after the jackpot game ends is won during the time-saving state, among the correspondence between the transition contents of the game state and the contents of the performance to be executed.

During the "EXTRA mode" which indicates the time-saving state, if you win the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery,
During the jackpot fluctuation, the presentation screen shown in FIG. 601(b) is displayed. Then, during the jackpot game, the RUSH acquisition challenge presentation (see FIG. 588(a)) is executed. In this case, the jackpot type that sets the first probability change state after the jackpot game ends has been won,
Since the time-saving limit number has already been set, "Super RUSH" is not set, and the presentation result of the RUSH acquisition challenge presentation is "RUSH mode" if the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit after the end of the jackpot game is "1 or more", and "Revenge mode" if the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit after the end of the jackpot game is "0".

In the flow shown in FIG. 606, the remaining number of the time-saving limit after the end of the big win game is "5", so a performance result indicating a transition to the "RUSH mode" is displayed, and after the end of the big win game, the first probability change state (probability change limit number "40", the remaining number of the time-saving limit number is "5") is displayed.
After that, after the first probability change state is set five times in a row, the time-saving limit is reached and the second probability change state (the remaining number of probability change limit times is "35
").

Next, referring to Fig. 607, among the correspondence between the transition contents of the game state and the performance contents to be executed, when a jackpot that sets the first probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game during the first probability variable state is won, and the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit are reached at the end of the jackpot game, the flow of the game state and the performance execution will be explained. Fig. 607 is a diagram that shows an example of the flow of the game state and the performance execution when a jackpot that sets the first probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game during the first probability variable state is won, and the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit are reached at the end of the jackpot game, among the correspondence between the transition contents of the game state and the performance contents to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 607, the second probability state is set continuously, and the remaining number of probability limit times is "
In this state, if a jackpot is won that sets the first probability variable state after the jackpot game ends in a state where the number of remaining probability variable times is "11" (jackpot C), and the number of remaining time-saving limit times is "10" after the jackpot game ends, the number of remaining probability variable times will be "10" and the number of time-saving limit times will be "10." In this state, if a jackpot is won with the first probability variable state set 10 times in a row, the presentation screen shown in FIG. 600 is displayed during the jackpot fluctuation, and it is announced that the "SPECIAL mode" will be set after the jackpot game ends.

After the big win game ends, the probability limit process and the time-saving limit process are executed, the game state transitions to the normal state, and a special mode is set in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced. During this special mode, the "SPECIAL mode" is set as the presentation mode, and the presentation screen shown in FIG. 603 is displayed.

In this case, after the first probability change state occurs ten times in a row (ten times of 10 rounds of jackpot play), the special mode is entered. A detailed explanation will be given later, but the special mode is a play state in which a low probability state of the special pattern is set, and is a period during which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed. As shown in FIG. 582, when a right-hand play is executed, about one in three balls shot enters the second ball entrance 640, so that the special pattern lottery is easier to execute than in the normal state, and the privilege given to the player when the jackpot is won is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state.

During this special mode, the probability of the special symbol is low, and the probability of the normal symbol is low, so if the player wins the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the probability limit number of times is set to "40" and the time-saving limit number of times is set to "10", and the first probability limit state can always be set 10 times in a row. This makes it the most advantageous game period for the player.

Next, using FIG. 608, a table listing the transition conditions, presentation overviews, and corresponding game states for each "presentation mode" set in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is attached. FIG. 608 is a diagram listing the transition conditions, presentation overviews, and corresponding game states for the "presentation modes." As shown in FIG. 608, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even when the same game state is set, the remaining number of times of the probability change limit, the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit,
Also, different presentation modes can be set according to the timing of reaching the probability variation limit and the time-saving limit.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suggest to the player through the presentation the contents of the benefits that can be granted to the player when the same game state is set, so that the player can easily understand the game contents.

<Regarding transition of game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 609. Fig. 609 is a transition diagram showing the flow of the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 609, in the first embodiment, four game states can be set as game states: normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), first probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and a game state that is predetermined is set according to the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (see FIG. 613). The multiple game states set here are configured to have different degrees of advantage for the player, and in this embodiment, the first probability state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

Here, the basic flow of the game executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (
After briefly explaining the transition of game states, the details of each transition will be explained. First, when the normal game state is set, a game is played in which a ball is thrown into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting the ball from the left, and a first special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game basically transitions to the second probability variable state.

During this second probability change state, it becomes easier to get the ball to enter the right first ball entry port 64b2 located in the right area of the game board 13 (this allows the ball to enter the ball more efficiently than entering the first ball entry port 64 by playing with the left), so a game in which the first special pattern lottery is executed by playing with the right hand is played.

In addition, during the above-mentioned normal state and the second probability variable state, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be the main variation. In other words, in this embodiment, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are configured to be able to be executed in an overlapping manner, and the normal state and the second probability variable state are configured so that the variation time of the first special symbol variation is more likely to be set shorter than the variation time of the second special symbol variation. Therefore, since the first special symbol variation can be executed multiple times during one second special symbol variation period, the main variation becomes the first special symbol variation.

Here, in this embodiment, an upper limit (limit) is set on the number of times the high probability state of the special pattern is set consecutively (number of consecutive special pattern settings), so if a jackpot is won in the normal state, which is a low probability state of the special pattern, and a high probability state of the special pattern (first special probability state, second special probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on that jackpot win, a value for measuring the number of consecutive special pattern settings (number of special probability limit settings) is set.

This probability limit number is subtracted when the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively, and when the value after subtraction becomes 0, it is determined that the number of consecutive special symbol settings has reached the upper limit (limit), and a process (probability limit process) is executed to forcibly set the low probability state of the special symbol. In addition, the probability limit number is reset to 0 when the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game, or when the end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol is established based on a special symbol lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the special symbol moves to a low probability state. In addition, the probability limit number is configured to be maintained when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state of the special symbol, and the special symbol moves from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol based on the execution of a jackpot game.

In other words, the probability of a special symbol appearing is high, which is a favorable game state for the player.
Alternatively, it is intended to indicate the upper limit of the number of times that a high probability state of a special pattern is set during one period during which the jackpot game state continues (special pattern high probability period).

In the first embodiment, the probability limit number is set to "40". In other words, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed in a low probability state of a special symbol, and a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability limit number is set to "40", and the high probability state of a special symbol can be set thereafter until the high probability state of a special symbol is set 40 times in succession. Then, when the high probability state of a special symbol is set 40 times in succession, the probability limit is reached, and even if a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set is set, a process (probability limit process) is executed to forcibly set a low probability state of a special symbol.

In addition, in this first embodiment, an upper limit (limit) is set on the number of times the high probability state of normal symbols is set consecutively (number of consecutive normal symbol settings), so when a jackpot is won in the normal state which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and a high probability state of normal symbols (time-saving state, first special state) is set after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot win ends, a value (time-saving limit number of times) for measuring the number of consecutive normal symbol settings is set.

This time-saving limit number is subtracted when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set continuously, and when the value after subtraction becomes 0, it is determined that the number of consecutive normal pattern settings has reached the upper limit (limit), and a process (time-saving limit process) is executed to forcibly set the low probability state of the normal pattern. In addition, the time-saving limit number is reset to 0 when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game, or when an end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is established based on a special pattern lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, and a transition is made to a low probability state of the normal pattern. In addition, the time-saving limit number is configured to be maintained when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery executed during a high probability state of the normal pattern, and a transition is made from a high probability state of the normal pattern to a low probability state of the normal pattern based on the execution of a jackpot game.

In other words, the time-saving limit is set to a state where the player has a high probability of winning a normal symbol,
Alternatively, it is intended to indicate the upper limit of the number of times that a high probability state of a normal pattern is set during one period during which the jackpot game state continues (normal pattern high probability period).

In the first embodiment, the time-saving limit number is set to "10". In other words, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery executed in a low probability state of a normal pattern, and a high probability state of a normal pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving limit number is set to "40", and the high probability state of a normal pattern can be set thereafter until the high probability state of a normal pattern is set 10 times in a row. Then, when the high probability state of a normal pattern is set 10 times in a row, the time-saving limit is reached, and even if a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set is set, a process (time-saving limit process) is executed to forcibly set a low probability state of a normal pattern.

When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the first probability variable state and the second probability variable state, and both game states are high probability states of the special symbol. The rate at which the second probability variable state is set is set is set to be higher than the rate at which the first probability variable state is set. Furthermore, even if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot game that can award a large number of prize balls to the player is difficult to play.

On the other hand, when the player wins the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, the player is more likely to play a jackpot game (10 round game) that is more advantageous to the player than when the player wins the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. The second special symbol lottery is configured to be the main variable when the first probability variable state or the time-saving state is set as the game state.

In other words, in a game state in which the first special pattern lottery is the main variable, a game is played with the aim of setting a game state in which the second special pattern lottery is the main variable (first special variable state, time-saving state).

The first probability variable state is a game state in which an extremely short variation time (1 second) is likely to be set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation for showing the result of the second special symbol lottery, and an extremely long variation time (10 minutes) is likely to be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, during the first probability variable state, the second special symbol variation is the main variation, and a game in which a ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640 by right-hand play is executed.

As described above, when the player wins the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, a jackpot game (10 rounds) that is more advantageous to the player than when the player wins the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is executed. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the first probability change state is set.

Therefore, once the first probability change state is entered, the jackpot game (10 rounds of play) will be played based on the results of the second special pattern lottery until the probability change limit or time-saving limit is reached.
is executed repeatedly.

If the time-saving limit is reached before the probability limit, a second probability state (a high probability state for special symbols, a low probability state for normal symbols) is set after the big win game ends.
In the probability variation state, as described above, the first special symbol variation is the main variation. Here, in the first embodiment, when the second probability variation state is set, the ball shot by right-hand hitting is configured to enter the right first ball entrance 64b2 more easily than when the normal state is set.

Therefore, during the second probability variable state, a right-hand hit game is executed to make the ball enter the right first ball entrance 64b2. Furthermore, during the second probability variable state, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation than during the normal state, so that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state not only in terms of the ease of acquiring the special symbol 1 reservation, which is the trigger for executing the first special symbol lottery, but also in terms of the number of lottery executions per unit time.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol lottery is almost always executed to win a small prize, and the second embodiment is configured such that the first special symbol lottery is executed by right-hand play.
In the probability state, most of the balls that flow down to the downstream side of the right area are the second variable winning device 650.
The prize will be awarded to the second specific prize slot 650a.

Therefore, while the second probability state is set, the second probability state will continue until the probability limit is reached.
The probability of a loop is easily generated. In addition, in the first embodiment, when a small jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a special symbol indicating the small jackpot is stopped and displayed, the process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol variation being executed in a display mode indicating a miss is executable. Therefore, even if a right-hand play is executed during the second probability of a loop, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is less likely to be stopped and displayed.

Here, the detailed transition of the game state will be described with reference to FIG.
The following describes a case where the normal state is set as the gaming state. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the initial state (the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 654)),
The normal state is set as the gaming state in the state in which the processing is executed when it is determined that the erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) has been operated.

In this normal state, if the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected as the jackpot, and the jackpot type is set to jackpot A (66.5% of the jackpot), the second probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot type is set to jackpot B (33.3% of the jackpot).
When the jackpot type is set to 1 or 2, the first probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is set to 2 or 3, the jackpot type is set to 1 or 2.
is set (100% of the big win), and the first probability variable state is set after the big win game ends.

In addition, since the normal state is a low probability state for both the special pattern and the normal pattern, when the second probability state is set after the end of the big win game, the probability limit number is set to "4
When the first probability variation state is set after the end of the big win game, the probability variation limit number is set to "40" and the time-saving limit number is set to "10".

In other words, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 1 in the normal state, there is a 66.5% chance of entering the second probability state (revenge mode) and a 33.8% chance of entering the first probability state (super R
In addition, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 2, you will enter the USH mode.
There is a probability of entering the first special state (Super RUSH mode).

Since the normal state is a state in which the probability of a special symbol drawing is low and also a state in which the probability of a normal symbol drawing is low, a left-handed play is performed in which a ball is thrown into the first ball entrance 64b1 to draw the first special symbol, in order to aim for a jackpot win in the special symbol drawing.

In this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation (lottery) is executed during the normal state, a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes) is set. Therefore, in reality, a game (right-hand play) for executing the second special symbol lottery is not performed during the normal state. Furthermore, in this first embodiment, there is no function of reserving and storing the right to execute the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery is configured to win a small prize with a high probability, and when the second special symbol variation is being executed at the time when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a small prize win, the second special symbol variation being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (the result of the second special symbol lottery is discarded).

Therefore, even if the operation of the operating handle 51 is mistaken in the normal state and a situation occurs in which the second special symbol lottery is executed, as long as the left-hand hit game in the normal state is executed properly,
The result of the second special symbol lottery is not displayed in a stopped state.

In this embodiment, the change time of the second special pattern change (special pattern 2 change) during the normal state is set to a long change regardless of the result of the special pattern 2 lottery, but without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured so that a short change time is easily set as the change time of the special pattern 2 change only a predetermined number of times after the normal state is set, or a short change time (for example, 5 seconds) may be set only for the change when a jackpot has been won (jackpot change).

In this way, by providing a period during which the result of the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be stopped and displayed (less likely to be discarded due to a small win) during a part of the period during which the normal state is set,
Since it becomes possible for a player who has been playing in the normal state for a long time to suddenly play a game aiming at winning a big jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In this case, it is preferable to use the display area of the third symbol display device 81 to perform a notification effect to notify the player that the result of the second special symbol lottery has shifted to a state where the symbol is likely to be stopped and to display a guide notification mode for playing right-hand play as a playing method. This makes it easier for the player to play advantageously.

Next, the second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) to which the player is transferred when the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state wins the jackpot and the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set will be explained. When the player transfers from the normal state to the second probability state, the player transfers from the low probability state of special symbols to the high probability state of special symbols, so the probability limit number of times is set to "40".

If the first special symbol lottery, which is executed during the second probability change state, wins the jackpot and the jackpot type is set to "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" (99.8% chance of winning the jackpot),
After two rounds of big win games are played, the second probability variation state is set again.
If a jackpot is won when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set again after the jackpot game ends, the value of the already set probability limit number of times is reduced by 1. On the other hand, if "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type (
In the event of a big win (0.2%), two rounds of big win games are played, and then the game moves to the first probability change state.

In this case, the game state will shift from the second probability variable state in which a high probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols are set to the first probability variable state in which a high probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols are set, so the value of the already set probability variable limit number of times is reduced by 1 and the time-saving limit number of times is set to "10."

As described above, during the second probability change state, a game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed is performed by hitting the right hand, so that in a small win game executed based on a small win that is won with a high probability (969/1000), it is possible to make the ball enter the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, during the second probability change state, even in a state in which a big win is not won, the increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed is the smallest (almost the same as before).

Next, the first probability change state is when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state and the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B" or "jackpot C" (the jackpot winning time is 33.
5%), or when the first special symbol lottery is won in the second probability change state and the jackpot type is set to "jackpot C" (0.2% of jackpot wins), the game state is shifted from another game state.
The system is configured such that a transition to the first probability variable state can be made from either a normal state in which the probability of winning a jackpot (30/1000) is low but the allocation rate (33.5%) in the event of winning a jackpot is high, or a second probability variable state in which the probability of winning a jackpot (30/1000) is high but the allocation rate (0.2%) in the event of winning a jackpot is low.

When the normal state transitions to the first probability variable state, the probability variable limit number "40" and the time-saving limit number "10" are set at that time, so that the first probability variable state can be reliably provided with 10 times, which is the upper limit of the time-saving limit. On the other hand, when the second probability variable state transitions to the first probability variable state, the time-saving limit number "10" is newly set, but the probability variable limit number has already been set, that is, it has been set at least when the second probability variable state is set, so that the period during which the first probability variable state can be set continuously differs depending on the remaining number of probability variable limit numbers (remaining probability variable limit number) at the time of transition to the first probability variable state.

Specifically, if the remaining number of times in the special probability limit set at the time of transition to the first special probability state is less than the number of times in the time-saving limit "10" set when transitioning to the first special probability state, the special probability limit will be reached before the time-saving limit is reached, so the player will not be able to be provided with 10 times of the first special probability state, which is the upper limit of the time-saving limit, and after reaching the special probability limit, the player will transition to a time-saving state (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns).

During the time-saving state, the first special symbol variation is a long-term variation, so a game in which the second special symbol variation is the main variation is executed, and "100 special symbol variations" is set as the end condition of the time-saving state. In other words, a game aiming for a big win in the second special symbol lottery is executed from the time the time-saving state is set until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times.

In this time-saving state, if the player wins the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, 10 rounds of jackpot play will be played, and after the jackpot play ends, the game will always transition to the first probability variable state. In other words, the time-saving state is a low probability state for special symbols for players who have been set to the first probability variable state but have reached the probability variable limit before reaching the time-saving limit and have not been able to play the first probability variable state for the maximum period (the period until the player wins the jackpot 10 times).
A second special symbol lottery in which a lottery more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery is executed is executed for a predetermined period (
By providing an opportunity to execute the special symbol lottery (100 times), a guarantee period is provided to prevent the privilege given to the player from being excessively reduced due to reaching the special bonus limit.

In addition, when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning the big prize during the time-saving state and the time-saving end condition is established, a low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the game transitions to the normal state.

In addition, when the first special probability state is set, if the special probability limit and the time-saving limit are reached simultaneously, the game state transitions to the normal state. In that case, a special mode is set in which a variation pattern table (special variation pattern table 202d5) different from that in the normal state is referenced for a predetermined period (1000 special pattern variations).

Although detailed explanation will be given later, when this special mode is set, the second special symbol variation becomes the main variation even though the normal mode is set. Therefore, the player is made to play a game aiming to win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery.

In this way, by configuring the game machine to be able to set a special mode when the game state transitions from the first probability change state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, to the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous game state for the player,
In some cases (when conditions are met simultaneously) that transition from a state advantageous to the player (high probability state) to a state disadvantageous to the player (low probability state), such as when the special probability limit or the time-saving limit is reached, the player can be provided with gameplay that allows for a transition to a state advantageous to the player (special mode), thereby making the player interested in the timing of when the special probability limit or the time-saving limit is reached.

Here, a detailed explanation will be given of the length of the game period from when the high probability state of the special symbol is set to when the probability change limit is reached in this first embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the second probability variable state is set, a right-hand hit game is executed in which a ball is inserted into the right first ball entrance 64b2 to execute a first special symbol lottery. Then, the first special symbol variation is executed in a variation time (0.1 seconds) that is shorter than that during the normal state. Here, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot is about 1/33, so the probability variable limit number of times is set to "40
During the period from when " is set to when the probability limit is reached, that is, in order to win 40 jackpots in a high probability state of the special symbol, it is necessary to execute the special symbol fluctuation approximately 1,900 times (the number of trials that will result in a probability of winning 40 jackpots exceeding 90% according to probability calculation using binomial distribution is approximately 1,900 times).

In other words, if the second probability state is always set during the period from when the probability limit number "40" is set until the probability limit is reached, if the second probability state is set,
Since the time for the first special symbol change is 0.1 seconds, the cumulative time for the special symbol change from when the special symbol limit number of times "40" is set to when the special symbol limit is reached is 190.
The total time is 1900 x 0.1 seconds. Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a two-round jackpot game is always played, and the game period of the two-round jackpot game is set to 2 seconds. Therefore, the cumulative time of the jackpot game during the period from when the probability limit number "40" is set to when the probability limit is reached is 80 seconds (40 x 2 seconds). In addition, since the probability of winning a small jackpot in the first special symbol lottery in a high probability state of a special symbol is set to 969/1000, when 1900 special symbol lotteries are executed, approximately 1800 small jackpot games are executed. Since the game period of this small jackpot game is set to 1.5 seconds, the cumulative time of the small jackpot game during the period from when the probability limit number "40" is set to when the probability limit is reached is 27.
00 seconds (1800 x 1.5 seconds).

In other words, if the second special state continues from the time when the special limit number of times "40" is set until the special limit is reached, the game period will be 2,970 seconds (49 minutes and 30 seconds).

On the other hand, if the first special probability state is set during any period from when the special probability limit number "40" is set until the special probability limit is reached, and the first special probability state is set 10 times in a row, which is the upper limit of the time-saving limit, then during the period from when the special probability limit number "40" is set until the special probability limit is reached, the period of 10 jackpot wins will be the play period during the first special probability state, and the period of 30 jackpot wins will be the play period during the second special probability state.

Here, in a state where a high probability state of the special symbol is set (jackpot probability 1/33), in order to win 10 jackpots, it is necessary to execute the special symbol lottery about 500 times (about 500 trials are required to have a probability of winning 10 jackpots of more than 90% according to probability calculation using binomial distribution).

When the first probability change state is set, the fluctuation time of the second special pattern lottery is 1 second,
The cumulative time of the special symbol variation executed during the first probability change state is 500 seconds (500 x 1 second). Furthermore, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a 10-round jackpot game is always executed, and the game period of the 10-round jackpot game is configured to be 96.5 seconds. Therefore, the cumulative time of the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot being won in the second special symbol lottery is 965 seconds (10 x 96.5 seconds). In addition, since a small jackpot cannot be won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the probability change state, the game period of the small jackpot game is 0 seconds.

In other words, if the first probability variable state is set for 10 times, which is the upper limit of the time-saving limit, after the first probability variable state is set, the game period in the first probability variable state is 1465 seconds (24
It will take about 25 minutes to complete the process.

In this case, the remaining 30 game states until the probability limit is reached will be in the second probability state, so the cumulative time of the special symbol fluctuation during the period in which the second probability state is set will be 1
The total time for the jackpot game is 40 seconds (1400 x 0.1 seconds), and the total time for the jackpot game is 60 seconds (30 x 2 seconds).
Since the cumulative time for small win games (approximately 1,300 times) is approximately 1,950 seconds (1,300 x 1.5 seconds), the game period in the second probability variable state (the period during which the second probability variable state lasts for 30 big wins) will require 2,150 seconds (35 minutes 50 seconds).

Therefore, if the period from when the probability limit number of times "40" is set to when the probability limit is reached (special pattern high probability period) includes a period in which the first probability state is set 10 times in a row, the special pattern high probability period will require approximately 61 minutes 15 seconds (24 minutes 25 seconds + 35 minutes 50 seconds). In reality, the round play in the jackpot game (10 times) executed based on the winning of the second special pattern lottery is likely to end not by the passage of time (8 seconds) but by the upper limit winning (winning 8 balls), so the length of the special pattern high probability period will be slightly shorter.

In other words, in this first embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, and the game period from when the high probability state of the special symbol is set to when the high probability state of the special symbol ends (the high probability period of the special symbol) is the second probability state, it takes about 50 minutes (49 minutes 30 seconds) to end the high probability period of the special symbol, and the first probability state is the upper limit of the time-saving limit of 10 minutes.
If the remaining period is in the second probability state, it will take about 6
It is configured to require a time of 0 minutes (61 minutes 15 seconds).

Furthermore, during the special probability period, the period during which the first probability state continues for 10 times, which is the upper limit of the time-saving limit, is a period (advantageous period) during which the player can increase the number of balls issued by being awarded many prize balls, and the period during which the second probability state is set is a period (unfavorable period) during which the increase or decrease in the number of balls issued is suppressed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the appropriate number of balls (e.g., 12,000 balls) that can be awarded to a player during a specific period (e.g., 60 minutes) to be awarded to the player during a 30-minute period (advantageous period), and to set the remaining 30 minutes as an unfavorable period. Therefore, while being able to award a large number of prize balls to a player in a short period of time, it is possible to make it easier to keep the number of balls awarded to a player during a specific period within an appropriate range.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the rate of transition to the first probability state is about 33.5%, and the rate of transition to the second probability state is about 66.5%. In other words, in about 1/3 of cases when a jackpot is won (first win) in the normal state, the advantageous period can be set at the same time as the start of the special chart high probability period. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 10 in the initial state where the normal state is set, the player can be made to play actively.

Furthermore, even during the second probability state, which is considered to be an unfavorable period during the special chart high probability period, it is possible to transition to the first probability state based on a winning jackpot, although there is a small probability. And since it is a state in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls dispensed, it is a more advantageous state than the normal state for players who want to play for a long time with fewer balls dispensed.

By configuring in this way, a player who wants to play a game can be provided with the fun of choosing whether to play on the pachinko machine 10 in the normal state or on the pachinko machine 10 in the second probability variable state, thereby increasing the fun of the game.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, when the game state transitions from the first probability variable state to the normal state, that is, when the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit are reached simultaneously and the normal state is set, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation can be executed in a special variation pattern different from the normal one. In other words, in the normal normal state, the first special symbol is the main variation, and the second special symbol variation is executed in the normal normal state.
By configuring the special symbol fluctuation pattern to be set to a long-term (e.g., 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern, a game aiming to win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is executed, but in the normal state in which the special fluctuation pattern is set, a long-term (e.g., 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern is set as the first special symbol fluctuation pattern so that the second special symbol fluctuation becomes the main fluctuation, and the second special symbol lottery is executed by playing on the right side.

By configuring in this way, when the probability limit process, which forcibly changes the high probability state of the special pattern to a low probability state and sets it, and the time-saving limit process, which forcibly changes the high probability state of the normal pattern to a low probability state and sets it, are executed at the end of one big win game,
It is possible to provide advantageous benefits to players.

In the first embodiment, the value set as the probability limit number of times is different from the value set as the time-saving limit number of times, so in order to match the timing of reaching the probability limit and the timing of reaching the time-saving limit, in a game state (e.g., second probability state) in which only one symbol (e.g., special symbol) is in a high probability state, it is necessary to win a jackpot so that the game state is shifted in the order in which the other symbol (e.g., normal symbol) is in a high probability state. Therefore, the player can be interested not only in which type of jackpot he won, but also in which situation (remaining number situation of each limit number) in which type of jackpot he won, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the probability limit number is set to a value larger than the time-saving limit number. Therefore, in order to transition to the normal state in which the above-mentioned special variation pattern is set, it is necessary to win the first probability jackpot during the second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) when the remaining number of probability limit numbers is "11". In other words, it is configured so that a situation in which it is possible to transition to the normal state in which the special variation pattern is set occurs only during the second probability state, which is an unfavorable period, during the special pattern high probability period. By configuring in this way, even if an unfavorable period is set during the special pattern high probability period, it is possible to make the player eager to play in order to aim for the privilege that will be granted after the special pattern high probability period ends.

<Electrical Configuration of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
0 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. Note that in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the dispensing control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted only in one direction from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing a lottery for a special symbol, drawing a lottery for a normal symbol, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81.
The M203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.
With reference to Fig. 610, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. Fig. 610 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the main control device 110 to perform the drawing of special symbols, the drawing of normal symbols, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display in the second symbol display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third symbol display device 81, etc.
It is used in MPU 201 of 0.

For the selection of special patterns and for setting the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, a first win random number counter C1 used for the selection of special patterns, a first win type counter C2 used for selecting the type of big win for the special pattern, a stop type selection counter (not shown) used for selecting the type of miss stop for the special pattern, a small win type counter C5 used for selecting the type of small win for the special pattern, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first win random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern are used.

In addition, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is used.
Each time the counter is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and the counter is a loop counter that returns to 0 after it has reached the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 655), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores the first ball entrance 64b1, which consists of four reserve areas (reservation areas 1 to 4) and one execution area, and the first ball entrance 64b2, which corresponds to the entry of a ball into the right first ball entrance 64b3.
There is provided a special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of one execution area, and the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a small winning type counter C5 and a variable type counter CS1 obtained in accordance with the timing of balls entering the first ball entrance 64b1 and the right first ball entrance 64b2.

Then, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special pattern is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special pattern execution area, and the special pattern variation based on the various stored values begins.

On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a described above in that it does not have a reserved area. That is, since the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a described above has four reserved areas, even if a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is not established, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the small winning type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained based on the ball can be reserved and stored up to four (configured to be able to acquire up to four special symbol 1 reserved), whereas the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b does not have a reserved area, so the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is not established, so the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is configured to be able to reserve and store up to four values (configured to be able to acquire up to four special symbol 1 reserved), whereas the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b does not have a reserved area, so the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is not established, so the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas, so that the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is not established ... established, so that the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is established, so that the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is established, so that the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is established, so that the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is established, so that the Even if a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special pattern is not met, for example, when the second special pattern variation is being executed or when a big win game or a small win game is being executed, the values of the various counters are not reserved and stored based on the ball entering, and only when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 when the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special pattern is met, for example, during a period when a big win game or a small win game is not being executed and when the second special pattern variation is not being executed, are the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b based on the ball entering.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured to reserve and store up to four pieces of winning information (winning information) of the first special symbol, and is configured not to reserve and store winning information (winning information) of the first special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the reservation and storage of multiple execution rights of the second special symbol lottery, which is a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, and therefore it is possible to prevent a game that is excessively advantageous to the player from being executed.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this first embodiment, for example, the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be configured to have multiple reserved areas, similar to the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of this first embodiment.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol.
Since the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is configured to have an execution area. This allows the next special symbol variation to be executed promptly when the start condition of each special symbol is established.

In this embodiment, since only the first special symbol has a small win as a lottery result, the small win type counter C
Although the value of 5 is not stored, for example, it may be configured to have a small win as the lottery result for the second special pattern, and the value of the small win type counter C5 may be stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a.

Also, as in the present embodiment, the reserved ball storage area (second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) corresponding to the special pattern type (second special pattern) that does not have a small win as a lottery result may also be configured to store the value of the small win type counter C5. In this way, regardless of the specification of the lottery for the special pattern (whether or not there is a small win), the start hole (
The counter values obtained by balls entering the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, and the second ball entrance 640 are all stored, and when the start condition (variation condition) for the special pattern is met, only the necessary values from among the obtained counter values are used to execute the lottery for the special pattern.This allows the same configuration to be used for multiple gaming machines with different specifications for the lottery for special patterns (presence or absence of small wins), thereby enabling the standardization of parts and technology and cost reduction.

In addition, the RAM 203 of this embodiment is provided with a normal reserved ball storage area 203c that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation 1 to 4 areas) similar to the above-mentioned special patterns, and the normal reserved ball storage area 203c
In the second winning random number counter C4, the second winning random number counter C5 is started in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.
and the values of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 are stored respectively.

Then, when the start condition (variable condition) of the normal pattern is established, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c are shifted to the normal pattern execution area,
A normal pattern variation based on various stored values is initiated.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that each counter value obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is reserved and stored, and each counter value obtained based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is reserved and stored, but without being limited to this, the configuration may be such that there is no need to provide a function (reserved memory function) for storing each counter value obtained for each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern).

By configuring in this manner, in a gaming machine in which a lottery for one special pattern type that is advantageous to the player is switched to a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player depending on the gaming state that is set, a situation in which a different gaming state is set in a state in which a large number of reserved memories for one special pattern have been acquired in order to execute an advantageous lottery, and an unfavorable lottery is executed for one special pattern can be prevented.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 610. The first win random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first win random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 655).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203 of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first winning entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640.
a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number that results in a jackpot for the special symbol is set by a first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that a jackpot for the special symbol has occurred.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to Fig. 612(a). Fig. 612(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is judged as a big win in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is specified, and has a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 that is referred to when judging the result of the first special symbol lottery, and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 that is referred to when judging the result of the second special symbol lottery.

Next, the contents of the various tables contained in the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG.
The following description will be given with reference to (b) and (c). FIG. 612(b) shows the special symbol 1 random number table 20
FIG. 612(c) is a diagram showing the contents prescribed in special pattern 2 random number table 202a2, and FIG. 612(d) is a diagram showing the contents prescribed in special pattern 2 random number table 202a1.

As shown in Fig. 612(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the value (judgment value) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is judged as a big win is specified in correspondence with the probability state (low probability state, high probability state) of the special symbol. Also, a fixed value is specified as the value (judgment value) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is judged as a small win regardless of the probability state of the special symbol.

Specifically, for the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is set to "0 to 2" as the jackpot determination value, and for the high probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is set to "0 to 29" as the jackpot determination value. Furthermore, when a jackpot is not determined, the range of the first win random number counter C1 value is set to "3 to 998" as the small win determination value.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a low probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability is 3/100.
The probability of winning the big prize is 0 (approximately 1/333), the probability of winning the small prize is 996/1000, and the probability of missing is 1/1000. If the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability of winning the big prize is 30/1000 (approximately 1/33), and the probability of losing is 96/1000.
It is stipulated that the probability of winning a small prize is 9/1000, and the probability of losing is 1/1000. Therefore, a high probability state of the special symbol is a game state in which it is easier to win a big prize than a low probability state of the special symbol, and therefore it is a game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in any probability state, the probability that the result of the first special symbol lottery will be a miss (other than a big win or a small win) is the same. In other words, the low probability state of the special symbol is configured to make it easier to win a small win than the high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the ease of winning a small win, the low probability state of the special symbol is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the high probability state.

In the first embodiment, the first lottery has a "big win" and a "small win" as the lottery results.
The lottery result of the special pattern lottery is configured to be determined by referring to the special pattern 1 random number table 202a1, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to separate the data table to be referred to when determining whether a big win has been won and the data table to be referred to when determining whether a small win has been won, and to configure the system to execute a process to execute a small win determination if a big win has not been determined in the process of executing the big win determination.

In this case, the data table (big win determination table) referred to when performing the big win determination process specifies "0 to 2" for the low probability state of the special pattern and "0 to 29" for the high probability state of the special pattern as the big win determination value (value of the first win random number counter C1), and the data table (small win determination table) referred to when performing the small win determination process.
It is preferable to configure the small win determination value (the value of the first win random number counter C1) to be set to "0 to 998" regardless of the probability state of the special pattern.

In this way, the big win determination is performed according to the probability state of the special pattern, and if the big win is not won (if the big win is not won), the small win determination is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the big win determination and the small win determination from overlapping.
In this first embodiment, the value of the same type of random number counter (first winning random number counter C1) is used to perform the big win determination and small win determination for the first special pattern lottery, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to provide a random number counter for determining a big win and a random number counter for determining a small win.

Also, as shown in FIG. 612(c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is different from the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 described above in that the small win determination value has been deleted, but otherwise it is the same. Specifically, for the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is set to "0 to 2" as the big win determination value, and for the high probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is set to "0 to 29" as the big win determination value. Furthermore, when a big win is not determined, the range of the value of the first win random number counter C1 is set to "3 to 998" as the small win determination value.

In other words, in this embodiment, when a low probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability is 3/100.
The probability of winning the big prize is 0 (approximately 1/333), the probability of winning the small prize is 996/1000, and the probability of missing is 1/1000. If the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the probability of winning the big prize is 30/1000 (approximately 1/33), and the probability of losing is 96/1000.
It is stipulated that the probability of winning a small prize is 9/1000, and the probability of losing is 1/1000. Therefore, a high probability state of the special symbol is a game state in which it is easier to win a big prize than a low probability state of the special symbol, and therefore it is a game state advantageous to the player.

That is, in the first embodiment, the player can be given a big win or a small win as a result of the first special symbol lottery, and the player can be given a big win as a result of the second special symbol lottery. In this way, by configuring the type of the benefit that can be given to the player to be different depending on the type of special symbol for which the lottery is executed, the player can be interested in which special symbol lottery will be executed. In addition, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol lottery (variable) and the second special symbol lottery (variable) are configured to be executed in overlapping fashion, and the game progresses based on the lottery result that is stopped and displayed first, so that the player can be interested not only in which special symbol lottery will be executed, but also in which special symbol lottery result will be stopped and displayed first.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the invention is not limited to this and the jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of special symbol. For example, the jackpot probability may be lower for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. In this embodiment, the jackpot probability for the special symbols is set to two types, a high probability state and a low probability state.
It may be one type, or three or more types. In this case, for example, the state of the special pattern,
The probability of winning a special symbol may be varied for each of up to four types of game states that are set by combining the normal symbol state with the normal symbol state, or the state of the special symbol may be simply set to three or more types such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different probability of winning a special symbol may be set for each state.

In addition, the setting value may be configured to be set in multiple stages, and the probability of winning the special symbol lottery may be varied depending on the set setting value.

As described above, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small prize is set differently for the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol. By configuring in this way, the benefits given to the player can be made different for the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol. Also, it is possible to motivate the player to play in an attempt to draw more special symbols that are more advantageous. As described above, in this embodiment, a specific game state (
Since the lottery for the second special symbol advantageous to the player is not frequently executed unless the second probability variable state is set, the player can be motivated to play so that a specific game state is set.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the determination of whether a jackpot or small jackpot has been won is performed according to a judgment value that is predefined depending on the acquired value of the first win random number counter C1, the type of special pattern, and the probability state of the special pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, the first win random number counter C1 value defined as a jackpot or small jackpot may be varied depending on the number of jackpot wins and the number of small jackpot wins within a specific period until a specified condition is met, or a data table in which a judgment value corresponding to a jackpot or a small jackpot is not defined may be provided as a data table for abnormal situations that is referenced in the jackpot lottery and small jackpot lottery that are executed when a specified abnormal condition is met.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) draw (change) the first special symbol and simultaneously (parallelly) draw (change) the second special symbol, and is restricted so that both special symbols do not win the jackpot (the jackpot game is not executed) at the same time (parallel). In the pachinko machine 10 having such restrictions, for example, during the period when a jackpot is won in the drawing of one special symbol and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is executed, the drawing of the special symbol may be executed by referring to a dedicated data table that does not prescribe a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, but prescribes only a judgment value corresponding to the small jackpot, so that the jackpot is not won in the drawing of the other special symbol.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and is incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 199) until it reaches a maximum value (e.g., 199 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 199).
The value of the first winning type counter C2 is reset to 0 after reaching the value of
The time is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process) and the ball is guided through the first ball entrance 64b1.
At the moment when the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b2 or the second ball entrance 640, the ball is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is 0 to 199.
In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is used to refer to the first winning type selection table 202b to determine the type of the big win when the big win is won.

Here, the first winning type selection table 202b will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 613. As described above, the first winning type selection table 202b defines a random number value for determining the type of big win when a big win is won, using the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2.

As shown in FIG. 613, the first winning type selection table 202b at least defines a special pattern 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 which determines the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, and a special pattern 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 which determines the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

In addition, the first win type selection table 202b also specifies a small win type selection table for determining the small win type to be set when a small win is won in the first special pattern lottery. However, in this first embodiment, since there is only one small win type to be set when a small win is won, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 613(b), the contents stipulated in the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 will be explained. FIG. 613(b) is a schematic diagram showing the stipulated contents of the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 613(b),
The special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 includes the acquired first winning type counter C2
A number of jackpot types are defined in association with values (0 to 199).

Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 132", a "jackpot A" is defined, when it is in the range of "133 to 198", a "jackpot B" is defined, and for a value of "199", a "jackpot C" is defined.

In this first embodiment, the content of the jackpot game and the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends are determined according to the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot C) set by referring to the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1.

In the first embodiment, the opening operation content (the jackpot game content) executed during the jackpot game, that is, the movable member (the opening/closing door 65 of the first variable winning device 65) during the jackpot game,
f and the opening and closing door 650f of the second variable winning device 650) (timing, number of times)
are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as opening operation scenarios that specify the above in a time series.

Then, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, an opening operation scenario corresponding to the set jackpot type is read out and stored in an active scenario storage area (not shown) in RAM 203 of the main control device 110. When the opening operation scenario is stored in the active scenario storage area (not shown), the scenario contents are updated each time the main process (see FIG. 655) of the main control device 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds), and the jackpot control process (see FIG. 656) that executes control during jackpot play determines the current scenario contents and executes processing based on the determination result.

In this way, the movable member (the opening and closing door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 65
By using an opening operation scenario that chronologically specifies the operation content of the movable parts during a jackpot game that moves the opening/closing door 650f (0), it becomes possible to centrally manage the operation control of multiple movable parts. Therefore, if a malfunction occurs with one opening operation and the opening operation scenario is not updated properly, it is possible to prevent the next opening operation from being executed in that state.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot game is configured to open only one variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650) during one jackpot game, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be possible to execute a jackpot game in which a plurality of variable winning devices are opened during one jackpot game. In this case, by predefining in the above-mentioned opening operation scenario which variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650) is opened for each round game, for example, compared to the case where operation control (opening operation) is performed separately for each movable member (variable winning device), the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately, and when a malfunction occurs in one movable member, the operation processing for the other movable members can be smoothly executed.

As shown in FIG. 612(b), the same jackpot game content (opening operation scenario) is specified for the jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot C) specified in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and the opening operation scenario is specified to execute two rounds of round games that open the second variable winning device 650. In other words, in this first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the same jackpot game (2R jackpot) is always executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the jackpot type that has been set this time based on the content of the jackpot game that has been executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 612(b), the type of game state set after the end of the jackpot game is stipulated to be different based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (or the time when the special pattern indicating the winning jackpot is displayed (confirmed display)) and the set jackpot type.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the "second probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won). Also, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", if the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won) is the "second probability variable state", the "second probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and if the time of winning is "other than the second probability variable state (normal state, first probability variable state, time-saving state)", the "first probability variable state" is set. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won).

"Big Win A" is the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) as a big win game.
This is a jackpot type in which a round game is executed by opening the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 for two rounds. One round game continues until eight balls win or the opening period has elapsed for 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, when "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won), a "second probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, a high probability state for the special symbol is set (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON), and a low probability state for the normal symbol is set. If the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a low probability state for the special symbol (normal state or time-saving state), the second probability variable state is set, and the probability variable limit count counter 203 is set to count the number of times the high probability state for the special symbol is set consecutively (number of consecutive special symbol settings).
The value of h is set to 40. On the other hand, if the game state before the big win game is executed is a high probability state of special symbols (first probability state or second probability state) (if a value has already been set in the probability state limit number counter 203h), the number of consecutive special symbols is updated (the value of the probability state limit number counter 203h is subtracted by 1). Also, if the game state before the big win game is executed is a high probability state of normal symbols (probability state or time-saving state) (
In the case where a predetermined value is set to the value of the time-saving limit number counter 202i, the value of the time-saving limit number counter 202i is reset to 0.

"Big Win B" is the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) as a big win game.
This is a jackpot type in which a round game is executed by opening the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 for two rounds. One round game continues until eight balls win or the opening period has elapsed for 0.5 seconds.

In addition, when "jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, if the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won) is the "second probability variable state", the "second probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and if the game state at the time of winning is "other than the second probability variable state (normal state, first probability variable state, time-saving state)", the "first probability variable state" is set. In other words, the high probability state of the special symbol is set (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON), and the probability state of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state or the low probability state according to the game state at the time of winning.

If the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a low probability state of the special symbol (normal state or time-saving state), the second probability state is set, and the value of the probability state limit counter 203h is set to 40 to measure the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively (number of times the special symbol is set consecutively). On the other hand, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a high probability state of the special symbol (first probability state or second probability state) (if a value has already been set in the probability state limit counter 203h), the number of times the special symbol is set consecutively is updated (the value of the probability state limit counter 203h is subtracted by 1). Also, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, second probability state), the value of the probability state limit counter 203h is set to 40 to measure the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively (number of times the special symbol is set consecutively).
If this is the case and a high probability state of normal symbols (first probability variable state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the time-saving limit number counter 202i is set to 10 in order to measure the number of times that the high probability state of normal symbols is set consecutively (number of consecutive normal symbol settings).
On the other hand, the game state before the big win game is executed is a high probability state of normal symbols (first probability state,
Or, if the game state before the big win game is executed is a high probability state of normal symbols (first probability variable state or time-saving state) (if a predetermined value is set to the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i), the normal symbol continuous setting number is updated (the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i is subtracted by 1). Also, if the game state before the big win game is executed is a high probability state of normal symbols (first probability variable state or time-saving state) (if a predetermined value is set to the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i), and if a low probability state of normal symbols (second probability variable state) is set after the big win game ends, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i is reset to 0.

As described above, when the jackpot type is set to "jackpot B", the game state set after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot winning. Specifically, the probability state of the normal symbol set after the jackpot game is completed is configured to be different depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot winning. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the jackpot type set at the time of the jackpot, but also in the game state set when the jackpot is won.

In the first embodiment, one element (probability state of normal symbols) among the multiple elements (probability state of special symbols, probability state of normal symbols) constituting the game state is changed according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, so that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is made different according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. By changing only a specific element among the multiple elements (probability state of special symbols, probability state of normal symbols) constituting the game state in this way, the amount of processing to make the game state different according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the probability state of the normal symbol set after the end of the jackpot game is changed according to the game state at the time of the jackpot win. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
The probability state of the special symbol set after the big win game may be made variable, or the probability state of each symbol type may be made variable.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is specified as the change condition for changing the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, but other contents may be specified as the change condition. For example, a change condition may be set so that the game state set after the end of the current jackpot game is changed based on the type of game state set after the end of the previous jackpot game or the content of the jackpot game executed during the jackpot game. Also, a change condition may be set so that the game state set after the end of the current jackpot game is changed based on the accumulated result of history information indicating past game results. By setting various change conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state set after the end of the jackpot game.

"Big Win C" is the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) as a big win game.
This is a jackpot type in which a round game is executed by opening the second variable winning device (second attacker) 650 for two rounds. One round game continues until eight balls win or the opening period has elapsed for 0.5 seconds.

Furthermore, when "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won), the "first probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, a high probability state for the special symbol is set (the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON), and a high probability state for the normal symbol is set. Note that, if the game state before the jackpot game is executed is a low probability state for the special symbol (normal state or time-saving state), the first probability variable state is set, and the probability variable limit count counter 203 is set to count the number of times the high probability state for the special symbol is set consecutively (number of consecutive special symbol settings).
The value of h is set to 40. In addition, if the game state before the big win game is executed is a low probability state of normal symbols (normal state or second probability state), the first probability state is set and the number of times that the high probability state of normal symbols is set consecutively (number of consecutive normal symbol settings) is set.
In order to measure this, the value of the time-saving limit counter 202i is set to 10.

On the other hand, if the game state before the big win game is executed is a high probability state of the special symbol (first probability state or second probability state) (if a value has already been set in the probability limit number counter 203h), the special symbol continuous setting number is updated (the probability limit number counter 20
In addition, if the game state before the big win game is executed is a high probability state of normal symbols (first probability state or time-saving state) (if a predetermined value is set to the value of the time-saving limit number counter 202i), the normal symbol consecutive setting number is updated (the value of the time-saving limit number counter 202i is subtracted by 1).

As explained above, in this first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the same jackpot game (2R jackpot game) is executed regardless of which jackpot type is set, and after the jackpot game ends, the game state corresponding to the set jackpot type and the game state at the time of the jackpot win is set. This makes it difficult for the player to know in advance the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends, based on the content of the jackpot game to be executed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the content of the big win game to be executed when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery and the content of the small win game to be executed when the small win is won in the first special symbol lottery are configured to be the same. This makes it difficult for a player playing in the second probability variable state to know whether the opening operation executed is based on the big win game or the small win game every time the second variable winning device 650 is opened. Therefore, it is difficult for a player who is continuously set in the second probability variable state to know the current number of consecutive special symbol settings (remaining number of times in the probability variable limit), so that the player can play with enthusiasm aiming for the first probability variable state to be set until just before the probability variable limit is reached.

In addition, the content of the jackpot game executed in response to the jackpot type is not limited to this,
For example, among the game states that can be set after the end of a big win game, the game state that is advantageous to the player (
It is also possible to provide a jackpot type that specifies the content of the jackpot game (e.g., 7-round jackpot) that is executed only when a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (second probability variable state) is set among the game states that can be set after the end of the jackpot game, and a jackpot type that specifies the content of the jackpot game (e.g., 4-round jackpot) that is executed only when a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (second probability variable state) is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting the game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game based on the content of the jackpot game that is executed before a new game state is actually set.

Next, referring to Fig. 613(c), the contents stipulated in the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2 will be explained. Fig. 613(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2. This special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2 is a data table that is referred to when determining the big win type that is set to the big win in the second special pattern lottery.

As shown in FIG. 613(c), in this first embodiment, there is only one jackpot type (jackpot D) that can be set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first probability variable state is always set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, the same game state is set for the game state (first probability variable state, time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is executed as the main variation.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game is set according to the type of special pattern that resulted in the jackpot and the game state at the time of the jackpot being won, so that not only can the player be made to play with the expectation of winning a jackpot, but the player can also be made interested in the type of special pattern that resulted in the jackpot and the game state at the time of the win.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are four, but they may be three or less, or five or more. Also, even if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, different jackpot types may be selected. By configuring in this way, for example, when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, by setting a jackpot type that is executed with a larger number of rounds, the player can be more likely to expect a win with the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more favorable to win in a high probability game state, and to improve the entertainment value of the game during the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to strongly make the player want to move to the high probability state, and to make the player play for a longer period of time.

In addition, the types of jackpot types selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (allocation rate) of each jackpot type may be the same, and only the range of the first jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be different. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts of obtaining the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 by targeting a specific counter value from being performed by both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small win type counter C5 determines the type of small win when a small win is won in the special pattern lottery, and determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37. It is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small win type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process) and is updated when the ball is the first
When the ball enters the ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2, the ball is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

The value of the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In addition, in order to determine the type of small win to be executed when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, the type of small win (small win game content) is determined using the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 and the small win type selection table of the first win random number table 202a set in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be the only place where a small win can be won, and one type of small win is specified as the type of small win that is set when a small win is won. In other words, the same small win game is always executed regardless of the range of the acquired small win type counter C5. The content of the small win game is configured to be approximately the same as the content of the big win game (2R big win) that is executed when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the big win game and the small win game.

In addition, in the first embodiment, one small win type is set when a small win is won, but two or more small win types may be set. By configuring in this way, for example, a small win type in which the variation of the first special symbol does not stop can be set, making it possible to give the player a more thrilling feeling and providing a variety of gameplay.

In addition, when the game is configured so that the small prize is won by both the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol, and different small prize types (small prize game contents) are set according to the type of special symbol that wins the small prize, different small prize types (
A small win type selection table may be set to specify the small win game content.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the general display mode, such as short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 1
The reach type and detailed pattern change mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are determined by the display control device 114 and the display control device 113. The value of the change type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 655) described later is executed, and is also repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the main process. From the value (random number) of the change type counter CS1, a change pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 61) is selected, which stores random number values that determine one change time of the pattern change.
4) is provided in ROM 202 of main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 614. FIG. 614 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 614, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes the following:
A dedicated variation pattern table is defined for each set game state. Specifically, there are a normal variation pattern table 202d1 referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, a time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 referred to when the time-saving state is set, a first probability variation pattern table 202d3 referred to when the first probability variation state is set, a second probability variation table 202d4 referred to when the second probability variation state is set, and a special variation pattern table 202d5 referred to when the normal state is set based on the satisfaction of a specific end condition.

And, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the data table used to select the fluctuation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected can be different depending on the game state.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 596 and FIG. 597. FIG. 596 shows the normal table 202
This is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202e.
No. 1 is a data table which is referred to when the normal state is set as the game state, and which specifies that the variable time set for the drawing of the second special symbol is longer than the variable time set for the drawing of the first special symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 614(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is "big hit", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29" and various types of hit normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are associated with each other, and the range is "30 to 189".
A super reach with a variable time of 80 seconds is defined in the range of "190 to 198," and a special reach with a variable time of 140 seconds is defined in the range of "190 to 198."

In addition, if the lottery result is "miss (small win)", the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 13
The range of "140 to 149" is defined as corresponding to a miss with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds, the range of "140 to 149" is defined as corresponding to a long miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds, the range of "150 to 179" is defined as corresponding to a normal reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and the range of "180 to 1" is defined as corresponding to a miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds.
A super reach A with a time difference of 2 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of "171 to 198", and a super reach B with a time difference of 30 seconds is defined in correspondence with the range of "171 to 198".

On the other hand, when the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), a 10-minute (600-second) fluctuation pattern (long win fluctuation, long small win fluctuation, long miss fluctuation) is set regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern or the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a right-hand hit game is performed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640. However, as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol during the normal state is set for a long time (1
0 minutes) is set, a game in which the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state is executed. Also, as described above, in the normal state, it is configured so that the first special symbol lottery can be executed more easily by hitting a ball into the first ball entrance 64b1 by a left hit game than by hitting a ball into the right first ball entrance 64b2 by a right hit game.

In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the type of jackpot won, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot type may be a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot A) or a jackpot type that is not advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot A).
A different variation pattern table may be used for the case of the jackpot type indicating the advantageous jackpot (jackpot B) and the case of the jackpot type indicating the advantageous jackpot (jackpot A). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the variation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the other jackpot is won so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is won. This makes it possible to make the player interested in the variation time of the special symbol, since the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to be for the player.

Also, the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a normal jackpot is won may be configured so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a first certain jackpot is won. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected game result when a jackpot is won with a short variation time, and keeps the player excited until the end even when a short variation time is selected.

Next, the contents of the time-saving variable pattern table 202d2 among the various variable pattern tables provided in the variable pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to Fig. 615(a). Fig. 615(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving variable pattern table 202d2. As shown in Fig. 615(a), the time-saving variable pattern table 202d2 specifies a variable pattern in association with the symbol type, the lottery result (win/lose judgment result), and the range of the value of the variable type counter CS1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 615(a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result (win/lose determination result) and the acquired value of the variable type counter CS1 (0
Regardless of the range of the number of symbols (1 to 198), a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 minute (60,000 milliseconds) is prescribed. On the other hand, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of the special symbol is "lose", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second (1,000 milliseconds) (miss short fluctuation) is prescribed, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1.
If the result of the lottery for the special pattern (win/lose determination result) is a "jackpot," a fluctuation pattern (win short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 1 second (1,000 milliseconds) is specified, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1.

As described above, during the time-saving state, the second special symbol variation pattern is configured to be set to a shorter variation time than the first special symbol variation pattern.
During the time-saving state, the game state is one in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. Therefore, once the game state is shifted to the time-saving state, the second special symbol lottery can be executed multiple times in a short period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 615(b), the first variable in the variation pattern selection table 202d is
The contents of the probability variable pattern table 202d3 will be explained. Figure 615 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first probability variable pattern table 202d3. As shown in Figure 615 (b), the first probability variable pattern table 202d3 defines various variation patterns in association with the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 615(b), when the pattern type is the first special pattern (special pattern 1), regardless of the lottery result of the special pattern (win/lose judgment result) or the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern (ultra-long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes (600,000 milliseconds) is displayed.
is specified, and when the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2) and the lottery result of the special pattern (win/lose determination result) is "lose," a fluctuation pattern (miss short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is specified regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained, and when the lottery result of the special pattern (win/lose determination result) is "jackpot," a fluctuation pattern (win short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is specified regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained.

As described above, during the first probability change state, as in the time-saving state, the second special symbol variation pattern is configured to be set to a shorter variation time than the first special symbol variation pattern. As a result, during the first probability change state, the game state is one in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed. Therefore, once the first probability change state is entered, the second special symbol lottery can be executed multiple times in a short period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 616(a), the contents of the second variable probability variation pattern table 202d4 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained. FIG. 616(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the second variable probability variation pattern table 202d4. As shown in FIG. 616(a), the second variable probability variation pattern table 202d4 includes:
Various variation patterns are defined in correspondence with the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of values of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 616(a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (win/lose judgment result) or the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern (ultra-short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds (100 milliseconds) is stipulated. When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (win/lose judgment result) or the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern (ultra-short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes (6000
00 milliseconds) fluctuation pattern (ultra-long fluctuation) is specified.

As described above, during the second probability change state, the first special symbol variation pattern is configured to be set to a shorter variation time than the second special symbol variation pattern. As a result, during the second probability change state, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed. Therefore, once the second probability change state is entered, the first special symbol lottery can be executed multiple times in a short period of time.

Next, the contents of the special variation pattern table 202d5 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 616(b). FIG. 616(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special variation pattern table 202d5.
As shown in FIG. 6(b), the special variation pattern table 202d5 defines various variation patterns in association with the symbol type, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

This special variation pattern table 202d5 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when the state transitions to the normal state while the special condition is satisfied. More specifically, when the first probability variation state is set and a jackpot is won, the number of consecutive special charts and the number of consecutive normal charts both reach the upper limit after the jackpot game ends, resulting in a transition to the normal state.

Here, an example of a case where the above-mentioned special condition is satisfied will be described. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times that the special chart is continuously set is set to 40 times, and the upper limit of the number of times that the normal chart is continuously set is set to 10 times. Then, the number of times that the special chart is continuously set and the number of times that the normal chart is continuously set are updated (decremented) or reset to 0 based on the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the first probability variable jackpot is won while the normal state is set, the first probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the value of "40" indicating the upper limit of the number of times that the special chart is continuously set is set to the value of the probability variable limit number counter 203h, and the value of "10" indicating the upper limit of the number of times that the normal chart is continuously set is set to the value of the time-saving limit number counter 202i.

After that, if the player continues to win the first special jackpot, the number of consecutive normal symbol settings will reach the upper limit (the value of the time-saving limit counter 202i will be 0) after the 10th jackpot game ends, and the low probability state of the normal symbol will be forcibly set. At this point, the number of consecutive special symbol settings has not reached the upper limit (40) (the value of the special symbol limit counter 203h is 30), so the second special symbol state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) will be set after the 10th jackpot game ends.

Then, when the second probability variable state is set, if the player wins the second probability variable jackpot consecutively and the value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h is decremented to 11, and then the first probability variable jackpot is won, the first probability variable state (probability variable state in which the value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h is 10 and the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i is 10) is set after the end of the jackpot game. In this way, when the first probability variable state is set so that the value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h and the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i are the same, the first probability variable state is set.
A special condition is established by consecutively winning the special jackpot (the value of the special jackpot limit count counter 203h and the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i become 0 at the end of one jackpot game).

In other words, the special condition is established not only depending on whether the first probability variable state is set or not, or the number of consecutive wins of the first probability variable jackpot, but also depending on the value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h and the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i at the time the first probability variable state is set. By configuring in this way, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the player can be interested in various game situations, and the fun of the game can be improved.

As shown in Figure 616 (b), the special variation pattern table 202d5 is a variation pattern table which is referenced when the normal state is set, but it differs significantly from the contents specified in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 shown in Figure 614 (b) in that each variation pattern is specified so that the second special pattern variation is more easily executed than the first special pattern variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 616(b), when the pattern type is the first special pattern (special pattern 1), regardless of the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of the special pattern, the acquired variable type counter C
A fluctuation pattern (ultra-long fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes (600,000 milliseconds) is defined for the S1 value range of "0 to 39", and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds (1,000
A variation pattern (middle variation) with a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "110 to 198", and a variation pattern (short variation) with a variation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "110 to 198". On the other hand, the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), and the lottery result of the special pattern (win/lose judgment result) is "
If the result is "miss," the fluctuation time is 1 regardless of the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.
When the variation pattern (miss short variation) of 1000 seconds (1000 milliseconds) is specified and the lottery result of the special pattern (win/lose judgment result) is "jackpot", the acquired variation type counter CS1
Regardless of the value, a fluctuation pattern (hit short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is specified.

During the period when the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to, the second special symbol lottery can be smoothly performed even in the normal state, so right-hand play is more advantageous to the player than left-hand play. Therefore, in the guide display area Dm1 formed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "right hand play" is displayed to encourage the player to play right-hand play (see FIG. 603(a)).

In this way, when the same game state (normal state) is set, by making the variation pattern table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern of each special symbol type different, it is possible to set a first period in which one special symbol variation is the main variation and a second period in which the other special symbol variation is the main variation. This makes it possible to provide the player with a more complex game than when the player is made to play in different game methods according to the set game state, and therefore allows the player to play a game that does not tire of the player.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this first embodiment, when a special condition is established, the change pattern of each special pattern type is set by referring to the above-mentioned special change pattern table 202d5 from the special pattern change of the first spin after the end of the jackpot game.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a jackpot is won even if a special condition is met, without a variation pattern being set by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d5.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, an upper limit (1000 special symbol variations) is set for the period during which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced. In other words, when the special symbol lottery is executed more than the upper limit number of times while the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced,
The normal variation pattern table 202d1 is configured to be referenced. By configuring in this way, when the normal state is set, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is basically referenced, and only when a special condition is established, the special variation pattern table 202d5 is temporarily referenced to select the variation pattern of each special symbol. Therefore, since it is not necessary to completely separate the process for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation when the normal state is set, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the period during which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced based on the establishment of a special condition is not limited to the period used in this first embodiment, but may be configured so that a variation pattern that is more advantageous to the player can be set more easily than the contents specified in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 that is basically used when the normal state is set.

For example, in the normal state after the special condition is established, if the special symbol lottery does not win a jackpot a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the special symbol variation pattern may be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d5. By configuring in this way, the period during which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced is set based on the special symbol lottery result in the normal state in addition to the establishment of the special condition. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to set the period during which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced, it is possible to make the period during which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced a period that is advantageous to the player. In addition, immediately after the normal state is set, the special symbol variation pattern is selected by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202d1 whether the special condition is established or not, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the special condition is established or not. Thus, even after the game state has shifted from an advantageous game state (first probability variable state, second probability variable state, time-shortened state) to an unfavorable game state (normal state) to the player, the player can be made to eagerly play the game in the hope that a special condition has been established.

Furthermore, after the normal state is set, if a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery before the period in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referred to arrives, the player cannot know whether the special condition is met or not, but the player will not be dissatisfied because he or she is given the privilege of having won the jackpot in the special pattern lottery in the first place.

As explained above, in the first embodiment, the upper limit of the number of consecutive special charts is different from the upper limit of the number of consecutive regular charts, so that even if the same jackpot type (for example, a special jackpot) is consecutively won, it is possible to set different game states at the time when only one upper limit is reached, the time when only the other upper limit is reached, and the time when both upper limits are reached. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which the player can predict the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends according to the history of multiple jackpot wins.

In addition, in order to establish the special conditions, the disadvantageous jackpot type (second probability jackpot, time-saving jackpot) that is disadvantageous to the player is selected over the advantageous jackpot type (probability jackpot) that is advantageous to the player.
In addition, when the above-mentioned unfavorable jackpot type is set in a state where the probability variable state is set, the setting of the unfavorable jackpot type leaves the possibility that the special condition will be easily established, so that it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play even if the unfavorable jackpot type is set.

In this embodiment, when the probability limit and the time-saving limit are reached at the same time, a special condition is established, and a period during which the second special symbol lottery is relatively likely to be executed in the normal state can be set. However, a different condition may be set as the special condition, or a game state other than the normal state may be set as the game state in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced. For example,
When the second probability variable state is set a predetermined number of times in succession (31 times in succession) after the probability variable limit number "40" is set, the special condition is established, and the period of the second probability variable state in which the variation pattern is set by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d5 may be set for a predetermined period (for example, a period of 50 special pattern variations). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the probability variable limit is reached without the first probability variable state being set for the player who wins the first prize.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the remaining number of the probability variable limit times required to establish the special condition to be as small as possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been continuously set in the second probability variable state to continue playing until the special condition is established, which makes it easier to improve the operation of the game.

Returning to FIG. 610, the explanation will continue. The second win random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 239). Also, when the second win random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second win random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second win random number counter C4 is read as the initial value of the second win random number counter C4 by a timer interrupt process (
631), for example, periodically, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start gate (through gate) 67.
3c.

The value of the random number that becomes a winning symbol of the normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the second winning random number counter C4
When the value of the random number for winning matches the value of the random number for winning set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is a winning. In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for a low probability state of the normal pattern and one for a high probability state in which the probability of winning the normal pattern is higher than that of the low probability state, and the number of random numbers for winning included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers for winning different, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability state of the normal pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern.

The contents of the second winning random number table 202c are shown in FIG.
The description will be given with reference to FIG. 612(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 612(d), when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is defined as a normal winning in the range of "0 to 235", and when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is defined as a normal winning in the range of "0 to 238".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 631) and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 655).

The normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 198). The value of this normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is updated each time the main processing (see FIG. 632) described below is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. The normal symbol fluctuation time is then determined by the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2. Specifically, when determining the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (see S106 in FIG. 651) described below (see FIG. 6
51 (see S2114), regardless of the value of the acquired general map fluctuation type counter CS2, 0.
A drift time of 1 second is determined.

In this first embodiment, the normal pattern change is always performed at a constant change time (0.1 seconds) regardless of the probability state of the normal pattern or the result of the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery), so the description of the change pattern table (normal pattern change pattern table) referenced when determining the change time of the normal pattern change is omitted. However, in reality, the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 has a normal pattern change pattern table referenced when setting the change pattern of the normal pattern change, and this normal pattern change pattern table specifies a change pattern corresponding to the probability state of the normal pattern and the range of values of the acquired normal pattern change type counter CS2.

Then, in the general map change processing (S106 in FIG. 651), when determining the change time of the general map change, a process is executed to determine the general map change pattern (change time) by referring to the general map change pattern table (see S2114 in FIG. 651).

As explained above, in the first embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation time is always 0.1 seconds, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the same probability state, different fluctuation time fluctuation patterns may be determined according to the range of the acquired normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily make the period from when the normal symbol fluctuation is executed to when the normal symbol fluctuation stops irregular, for example,
It is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which the ball launch (right-hand play) is suspended for a certain period of time after the normal map fluctuation is executed (after the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the ball launch is resumed (right-hand play is resumed) at the timing when the normal map fluctuation stops.

In addition, it may be configured so that different patterns of change time are determined according to the result of the normal drawing, not just the range of values of the acquired normal drawing type counter CS2. In such a case, the contents of the normal drawing change pattern table (not shown) may be specified so that different change patterns (change times) are selected in accordance with the probability state of the normal drawing, the result of the normal drawing lottery (win/lose judgment result), and the range of values of the acquired normal drawing type counter CS2.

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110
Depending on the values of these counters, etc., the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed, such as drawing a jackpot lottery, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated within the same range as the second win random number counter C4.

Next, referring to FIG. 611, the main control device 11 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described.
The contents of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described below. Fig. 611 is a diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. As shown in Fig. 611, the ROM 202 in the main control device 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first win random number table 202a, a first win type selection table 202b, and a first win type selection table 202c.
At least a second winning random number table 202c, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, a time-saving granting table 202e, a fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f, a winning action table 202g, and a normal winning action table 202f are stored.

Among the fixed value data stored in the ROM 202, the first winning random number table 20
2. The first winning type selection table 202b, the second winning random number table 202c, and the fluctuation pattern table 202d have already been explained in detail, so their explanation will be omitted.

The time-saving granting table 202e is a data table referenced when setting the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state (ending the high probability state of normal symbols), and different time-saving end conditions are predefined according to the type of jackpot, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v. This time-saving granting table 202e is referenced in the jackpot end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658) that is executed when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends), and different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set according to the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, although detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 621, among various information stipulated in the time-saving granting table 202e, the probability-change limit reaching flag 202u is a flag for indicating that the number of times that the high probability state of the special pattern has been set in succession (the number of times of consecutive special pattern setting) has reached an upper limit value, and is set to ON when the number of times of consecutive special pattern setting has reached an upper limit value and the high probability state of the special pattern is forcibly changed to a low probability state. In addition, the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is a flag for indicating that the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern has been set in succession (the number of times of consecutive normal pattern setting) has reached an upper limit value, and is set to ON when the number of times of consecutive normal pattern setting has reached an upper limit value and the high probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to a low probability state.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving granting table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 617. FIG. 617 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving granting table 202e. In this embodiment, there are jackpot types (jackpot C, D) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set after the jackpot game ends, a jackpot type (jackpot B) in which a high probability state of normal symbols may be set after the jackpot game ends (the high probability state of normal symbols may or may not be set depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot), and a jackpot type (jackpot A) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is not set after the jackpot game ends.
As shown in FIG. 7, the conditions for ending the time-saving feature are specified for each type of jackpot.

Specifically, as described above, the jackpot type "Jackpot A" is not a jackpot type in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, so the number of times the time-saving function is awarded is set to "0" regardless of the game state (presence or absence of time-saving function) at the time of winning the jackpot or the setting status of the special bonus limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v.

The jackpot type "jackpot B" is a jackpot winning game state without time reduction (low probability state of normal pattern), and the probability limit reaching flag 203u and the time reduction limit reaching flag 203v
If both are set to off, the number of time-saving times will be "65535 (effectively until the next time)
" is specified, and when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "100". Also, when the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set, so that the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "0" regardless of the setting state of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u.

On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot type "Jackpot B" and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is with time-saving (high probability state of normal pattern), the number of times to be saved is set to "100" only when the probability-change limit reaching flag 203u is set to on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, and the number of times to be saved is set to "0" in all other cases.

For the jackpot type "jackpot C", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, if both the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "65535 (effectively until the next time)", and if the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "100". Also, if the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set, so the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "0" regardless of the setting state of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u.

The fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is a data table having a plurality of fluctuation pattern scenarios in which the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern fluctuation executed after the end of a jackpot game is determined by referring to one of the plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables (see FIG. 614(a)) held by the fluctuation pattern table 202d, depending on the number of times the special pattern fluctuation has been executed after the end of a jackpot game, and is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern scenario to be used after the end of a jackpot game.

This fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f is referred to when determining a fluctuation pattern scenario in the big win end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658) executed at the end timing of the big win game (see S2808 in FIG. 658). The fluctuation pattern scenario determined here is stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203w, and is stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203w when the process of determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation is executed.
The variation pattern scenario stored in w is read out, and a variation pattern table is determined based on the read variation pattern scenario and information indicating the number of rotations since the end of the jackpot game in which the current special pattern variation has occurred, and the variation pattern of the special pattern is determined by referring to the determined variation pattern table (S610 in FIG. 636, S1509 in FIG. 645).

Here, the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f will be explained with reference to Fig. 618. Fig. 618 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f. As shown in Fig. 618, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f defines different fluctuation pattern scenarios according to the jackpot type, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 202u, and the setting status of the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v.

Specifically, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game executed this time is "jackpot A", that is, if the jackpot type is one that can set the second probability state (high probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot,
A variation pattern scenario to be selected is stipulated according to the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v.
When the time-saving limit arrival flag 203u and the time-saving limit arrival flag 203v are both set to OFF, the second probability variation pattern table 20
In the state where the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is referenced from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won, and the variation pattern scenario in which the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is referenced is stipulated. Note that since the "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the second probability variable state, that is, a low probability state of a normal pattern, is set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to this "jackpot A", the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is not set to ON after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to this "jackpot A". Therefore, the variation pattern scenario table 202
In f, no data is specified in the area corresponding to the situation where the "jackpot A" is selected and the time-saving limit reached flag 203v is set to on (shown as "-" in the figure).

By configuring it in this manner, if a malfunction occurs in the control processing of the pachinko machine 10, and a situation occurs that cannot be set under normal conditions, for example, a situation occurs in which the time-saving limit reached flag 203v is set to on after the end of the second special jackpot game, the fluctuation pattern scenario is not determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f, so it is possible to prevent a special pattern fluctuation from being executed after the end of the jackpot game while the malfunction remains.

If the jackpot type of the jackpot game executed this time is "jackpot B", that is, if the jackpot type is a jackpot type that can set the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) or the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot game ends, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the second probability variable state (normal state, first probability variable state, time-saving state), the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 20
The selected fluctuation pattern scenario is specified according to the setting status of 3v, and when both the high probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to off, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the first high probability variable fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is referenced from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won is specified. When the high probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referenced until the special pattern fluctuation reaches 100 times (until the time-saving end condition is established), and after the 100th special pattern fluctuation, that is, after the time-saving end condition is established, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is referenced is specified.

In addition, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game executed this time is "jackpot B" and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the second probability variable state, the variation pattern scenario to be selected is stipulated according to the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v.
When both the probability variable limit arrival flag 203u and the time-saving limit arrival flag 203v are set to OFF, the probability variable limit arrival flag 203v and the time-saving limit arrival flag 203v are set to OFF, and the second probability variable limit arrival flag 203d4 is referenced from the end of the big win game until the next big win is won.
When 03v is set to ON, a fluctuation pattern scenario is defined in which the second probability variable fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is referenced from the end of the big win game until the next big win is won.

Furthermore, in a state where the special rate limit reaching flag 203u is set on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set off, and in a state where the special rate limit reaching flag 203u is set on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set on, a fluctuation pattern scenario is defined in which the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is referenced from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won.

The type of jackpot in the jackpot game that was played this time was "jackpot C" or "jackpot D".
In other words, if the jackpot type is one that can set the first probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot,
The variation pattern scenario to be selected is specified according to the setting status of the probability variation limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v.

Specifically, the probability change limit arrival flag 203u is off and the time-saving limit arrival flag 20
When the 3v is set to OFF, the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 is referenced from the end of the big win game until the next big win is won, and the probability variation limit arrival flag 203u is set to OFF and the time-saving limit arrival flag 203v is set to OFF.
When this is set to ON, a fluctuation pattern scenario is defined in which the second probability variable fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is referenced from the end of the big win game until the next big win is won.

Furthermore, in a state where the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is set to ON until the special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times (until the time-saving end condition is established), and after the 100th special symbol fluctuation, that is, after the time-saving end condition is established, the normal fluctuation pattern table 2
A variation pattern scenario is defined in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced. And, when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to ON, that is, when the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit are simultaneously established (the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit are reached based on one big win), a variation pattern scenario is defined in which the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced during the period from the end of the big win game until the special symbol variation is executed 1000 times, and then the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is referenced until the next big win is won.

The winning operation table 202g is a data table in which opening scenarios are stored that are scenarios of opening operation patterns (patterns that operate various solenoids provided in each winning device) of the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in a winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) that is executed when a jackpot or small winning is won by a lottery of special patterns, and the jackpot type set for the winning jackpot, or
The contents of the opening scenario (winning action) are specified according to the type of small win set for the small win that has been won.

Here, the contents of the winning action table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 619. FIG. 605 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the winning action table 202g. The winning action table 202g shown in FIG. 619 shows only characteristic contents among the contents of the winning actions (opening scenarios) defined for each winning type, but in reality, a measurement counter is provided to measure the elapsed time from the time when each winning action (opening scenario) is set, and the currently set winning action (opening scenario) is configured to be executed according to the measurement value of the measurement counter. Furthermore, the operations not shown in FIG. 619, for example, the winning actions that are commonly executed regardless of which winning action is executed (for example, when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (the number that satisfies the end condition of the round game) during the round game, the operation of updating the opening scenario to the time when the end condition based on the time elapse of the round game is established, etc.) are also configured to be executed based on the measurement value of the measurement counter, but detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

This winning operation table 202g specifies operation data (opening scenario) for varying the opening operation of the winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) through which the ball can enter in the bonus game (jackpot game, small prize game) that is executed when the lottery result for the special pattern is a jackpot or a small prize, depending on the type of prize that has been won (jackpot type, small prize type).

In this way, the winning result (big win or small win) and the winning type (big win type,
By varying the winning devices (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650) that are opened according to the type of big win or small win and the contents of the opening operation (opening scenario), the degree of advantage of the bonus game can be set in multiple stages, so that even after winning a big win or small win, the player can enjoy finding out which type of win he or she has won.

The winning operation table 202g specifies, in accordance with the type of winning (big win type, small win type), the opening period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device), the opening operation mode of each winning device (the type of winning device to be opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), and the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), the inter-round interval period (the period during which the winning device is closed between round games), and the ending period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special pattern variation is allowed)).

Specifically, for the winning types "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C", an opening period of "0.5 seconds" is specified, the opening operation mode of the winning device is "2 rounds" for the "second variable winning device 650", and one round of play is "continuously 0.5 seconds", the interval period between rounds is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "0.5 seconds".
If the player wins the "Jackpot B" or "Jackpot C" jackpot, the second variable winning device 650 is opened for two rounds in a jackpot game (2R jackpot game). This 2R jackpot game is a jackpot game that is executed in accordance with the jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot B) that is set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the period during which the second variable winning device 650 is opened during the jackpot game period is a total of one second (0.5 seconds x 2 rounds), and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second variable winning device 650 is 1.
Since the number of balls is limited, this is a jackpot game in which the player is not awarded many prize balls.

In other words, in this first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a jackpot game is not executed to win a large number of prize balls, but a jackpot game is executed as an opportunity to transition to a game state (for example, a first special probability state) that is advantageous to the player based on the jackpot win.

In the first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a two-round jackpot game is always executed in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened for two rounds. However, it is sufficient that the jackpot game executed in the case of a jackpot win in the first special symbol lottery has a function of a jackpot game for transitioning to a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a first probability variable state) based on the jackpot win, and it may be configured to be able to execute a jackpot game capable of paying out many prize balls to the player (for example, a jackpot game that opens the first variable winning device 65 for ten rounds) as a part of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in this case, when a jackpot game in which many prize balls can be won is executed in the case of a jackpot win in the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot game in which it is difficult for the player to win many prize balls (
For example, it may be configured so that a game state advantageous to the player is more easily set after the end of the jackpot game than in the case of a two-round game. This makes it easier for the player to understand in advance that in some cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a game state advantageous to the player will be set after the end of the jackpot game based on the content of the jackpot game. Furthermore, in this case, a single jackpot win allows the player to win many prize balls and sets an advantageous game state, so that the player can be granted multiple types of benefits (prize balls, first probability change state), and the player can be motivated to play while aiming to play a jackpot game in which multiple types of benefits can be won at once.

Next, the winning type corresponds to "Big Win D", and the opening period is "3.5 seconds"
However, the opening operation mode of the winning device is specified as opening the "first variable winning device 65" for "10 rounds," with one round of play being "continuously open for 8 seconds," with an interval period of "1.5 seconds" and an ending period of "4 seconds."

This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type that is always set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery. In other words, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the above-mentioned 10-round jackpot game is executed.

Here, in this first embodiment, in the normal state, left-handed play is performed, and a game is executed in which the aim is to win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. Then, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set at a rate of about 66.8% after the jackpot game ends, and the first probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set at a rate of about 33.2%. In addition, the upper limit of the number of times the high probability state of special symbols is set consecutively (number of consecutive special symbol settings) is set to "
The upper limit of the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set consecutively (normal symbol consecutive setting number of times) is set to "40", and "10" is set as the upper limit of the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol is set consecutively (normal symbol consecutive setting number of times).

And, the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (first probability state, time-saving state)
In this case, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed more easily than the lottery for the first special symbol.

In other words, the game state is quickly transitioned to one in which the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed, and until the game state in which the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed ends, a game is played in which the aim is to win a jackpot in the second special pattern lottery and to win many prize balls in the 10-round jackpot game.

In the first embodiment, as described above, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a 10-round jackpot game is always executed, and a jackpot game that can set the first probability variable state is always executed after the jackpot game ends. Then, the second special symbol lottery can be executed in a state where the probability of winning is increased until the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends is forcibly changed from the first probability variable state to another game state based on whether the special symbol consecutive setting number or the normal symbol consecutive setting number has reached the upper limit.

By configuring in this manner, the player is not simply made to play a game aiming at transition to the most advantageous probability state for the player, but is made to play a game aiming at transition to the probability state while leaving a sufficient period until the number of consecutive special patterns and the number of consecutive normal patterns reach their upper limits.

In the first embodiment, a portion of the lottery results that did not win the big prize in the first special symbol lottery can win a small prize, which triggers the execution of a small prize game that opens one round of the second variable winning device 650. This small prize game is different from the above-mentioned big prize game in that a round game is executed for one round only, and the probability state of the special symbol and the probability state of the normal symbol that were set before the start of the small prize game are configured to continue even during the small prize game.

When this small win game is executed, the small win game is executed with the same winning operation contents (opening scenario) as the above-mentioned winning types "Big Win A", "Big Win B", and "Big Win C". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 619, the opening period is "0.5 seconds", and the opening operation mode of the winning device is "1 second variable winning device 650".
Round" and one round is "0.5 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed → 0.5 seconds open"
The opening operation mode in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened with the above operation content has an ending period of "0.5 seconds".

In other words, the winning operation (opening scenario) is specified so that the winning game that opens the second variable winning device 650 is executed with the opening operation content executed in the entire two-round jackpot game described above during one round of round play. By configuring in this way, when the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 is executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery,
Based on the contents of the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the winning game being played is a big win game or a small win game.

Therefore, in the game state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed and in the second probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period (remaining number of times) until the special symbol consecutive setting number reaches the upper limit, so that the remaining period (remaining number of times) until the special symbol consecutive setting number reaches the upper limit is short, for example, the upper limit value (10) of the normal symbol consecutive setting number set based on the first probability state being set after the end of the jackpot game.
This makes it harder for players to notice that the remaining time (remaining number of times) until the special chart consecutive setting number reaches the upper limit is short.

In the first embodiment, when a big win game is executed, a transition process is executed to transition both the probability state of the special symbol and the probability state of the normal symbol to a low probability state before the big win game is executed, whereas when a small win game is executed, the transition process is not executed. Therefore, when a winning game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened during the second probability change state is executed, the player can grasp whether the winning game being executed is a big win game or a normal symbol winning game by grasping the state of the normal symbol fluctuation during the winning game and the state of the normal symbol winning game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for an experienced player who has been playing the pachinko machine 10 for a long time to grasp the current number of special symbol consecutive setting times and the normal symbol consecutive setting times.

The normal winning action table 202h is a data table which is referred to when determining the winning action content of the normal winning game to be executed when a normal winning is won, and different winning action contents are defined corresponding to the game state at the execution timing of the normal winning game.

Here, the contents prescribed in the normal winning operation table 202h will be explained with reference to FIG. 620. FIG. 620 is a diagram showing the contents prescribed in the normal winning operation table 202h. In addition, the normal winning operation table 202h shown in FIG. 620 lists only the characteristic contents of the operation contents (opening patterns) of the normal winning game, but in reality, a measurement counter is provided to measure the elapsed time from the time when each operation content (opening pattern) is set, and the operation of the contents prescribed corresponding to the measurement value of the measurement counter is executed among the currently set operation contents (opening patterns).

Specifically, when the "normal state" is set in the execution timing of the normal winning game, the opening period is "0.3 seconds", the opening period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "
If the operation content (opening pattern) of "0.02 seconds" is set to "second probability change state", the opening period is "0.02 seconds", the opening period is "0.5 seconds", and the ending period is "0.
When the operation content (opening pattern) of the opening period of "0.02 seconds" is set to the "first special state" or the "time-saving state," the operation content (opening pattern) of the opening period of "0.3 seconds," the opening period of "0.6 seconds," and the ending period of "0.02 seconds" are specified.

In this way, by configuring the normal winning game to be able to be executed with different opening patterns depending on the game status when the normal winning game is executed, it is possible to vary the ratio of balls that enter the distribution device 175 (see Figure 582) and enter the right first ball entry port 64b2 depending on the game status.

Returning to Fig. 6, the explanation will be continued. The RAM 203 has, in addition to the various counters shown in Fig. 610, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

In addition, the RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the time of turning on the power after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 655) when the power supply is turned off, and the values stored in the RAM 203
The restoration of each value written in is executed during the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 654). Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power failure is turned off.
The MI interrupt process (see FIG. 653) is executed immediately.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 621, the RAM 203 stores the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203.
a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the first
Special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, time reduction flag 2
03f, probability change flag 203g, probability change limit number counter 203h, time-saving limit number counter 203i, time-saving end waiting flag 203j, game state storage area 203k, time-saving counter 203m, special chart 1 big win flag 203na, special chart 2 big win flag 203nb,
Special chart 2 fluctuation stop flag 203o, small win flag 203p, special chart 1 fluctuation time counter 20
3r, a special chart 2 fluctuation time counter 203s, a winning state storage area 203t, a special fluctuation limit reaching flag 203u, a time-saving limit reaching flag 203v, a fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203w, a special state flag 203x, and other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a can store up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment).
The data area includes a memory area for storing up to four counter values (winning information) acquired based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 (initial winning), and an execution area in which the winning information to be used in the first special symbol lottery, that is, the oldest winning information, is shifted and stored among the winning information stored in the memory area when the first special symbol lottery is executed.
03b is a data area having an execution area in which various counter values (winning information) acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning) are stored. In other words, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the above-mentioned first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in that it does not have a memory area.

Here, the execution area (first special pattern reserved ball execution area) of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is a data area in which various counter values (winning information) for starting the variable display of the first special pattern are stored, and when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, if various counter values (winning information) are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The execution area (second special pattern reserved ball execution area) of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is a data area in which various counter values (winning information) for starting the variable display of the second special pattern are stored, and details are described in the first
It is the same as the special pattern reserved ball execution area.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are,
When the start winning is detected, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small winning type counter C5 are acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 610) and stored in the memory. The MPU 201 executes the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631).
When it is detected that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 (initial winning), the counters C1 to C2, C5,
The value of CS1 (winning information) is obtained and stored in the memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a (maximum of four).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start execution of the first special symbol variation (lottery), in order to execute processing such as the big win lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the data corresponding to one of the start winnings among the data corresponding to each start winning (counter values C1 to C2, C5, CS1) stored in the above-mentioned first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area. Note that, in this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, unlike the above-mentioned first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, does not have a storage area capable of temporarily storing winning information. Therefore, even if it is detected that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning) at a time other than the timing when the second special symbol variation (lottery) can be executed, the counters C1 to C2 will not receive the winning information from the counter buffer.
When it is detected that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning) at a timing when the second special symbol variation (lottery) can be executed, the data corresponding to the initial winning (counters C1 to C2, C5,
Shift each value of CS1 into the execution area.

In this embodiment, the system is configured to be able to store (reserve) up to four pieces of winning information corresponding to the first special pattern, and is configured to be unable to reserve and store winning information corresponding to the second special pattern; however, the presence or absence of a reserve memory function for each special pattern type and the maximum number of pieces that can be reserved and stored may be changed as appropriate, and the system may be configured to be able to reserve and store up to four pieces of winning information corresponding to the first special pattern and winning information corresponding to the second special pattern, or it may be configured so that neither winning information corresponding to the first special pattern nor winning information corresponding to the second special pattern can be reserved and stored.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol and the winning information corresponding to the second special symbol are configured to be stored in separate reserved ball storage areas, but the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol and the winning information corresponding to the second special symbol may be configured to be stored together in one reserved ball storage area. In this case, the maximum number of items that can be reserved and stored for each special symbol type may be specified in advance, or an upper limit (for example,
It is also possible to provide a maximum of eight pieces of winning information corresponding to one special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reserve and store a maximum of eight pieces of winning information corresponding to one special symbol, but it is also possible to configure in such a way that when eight pieces of winning information corresponding to one special symbol are reserved and stored, no winning information corresponding to the other special symbol can be reserved and stored. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of selecting how many reserved memories of which special symbol type are to be stored in the reserved memory storage area.

The regular symbol reserved ball storage area 203c stores the second winning random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 610) upon detection of the ball passing through the through gate 67 (initial winning).
This is a storage area in which the values of the normal fluctuation type counter CS2 are stored.
When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (initial winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631), it obtains the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 from the counter buffer, and stores them in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203.
The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c stores data corresponding to one start winning (
The area has four reserved areas so that the counters C4, CS2 (values) can be stored (reserved) up to four times. In the reserved ball storage area 203c, the reserved ball data is stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (initial winning) in the reserved areas with empty data, starting from the reserved areas with the earliest order of consumption.

In addition, when the normal pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is time to start executing the normal pattern variable display performance based on the initial winning, each counter value is stored, and this is a memory for storing data (counter C4, CS2 values) to be referenced in processing such as the normal pattern winning lottery and setting the display (variable pattern) of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the normal symbol variable display performance, in order to execute processes such as the winning lottery and the display setting of the second symbol display device 83, the data corresponding to one of the start winnings (the value of the second winning random number counter C4, the value of the normal symbol variable type counter CS2) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to this normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown). In addition, in this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performance (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the entry (winning) of balls into the first ball entrance 64b1 and the right first ball entrance 64b2 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds.
The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the AM 203 (see S4001 in FIG. 662). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by one each time the variable display performance is executed.

In addition, when a counter value is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a based on balls entering the first ball entrance 64b1 and the right first ball entrance 64b2 (initial winning), the value of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a first special pattern reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special pattern reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a initial winning is detected and the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one.

When each of the values of counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 refers to the data stored in the first special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the first special pattern variation start process (see S203 in Figure 633), conducts a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determines the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result.
In the first pattern display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the change pattern and the stop type determined here are controlled by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 11 by the change pattern command and the stop type command of the first special symbol.
4. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display performance based on the variable pattern and the stop type notified by the variable pattern command and the stop type command.

In addition, in this first embodiment, since it does not have the function of retaining and storing winning information for the second special pattern, it does not have a means (second special pattern reserved ball number counter) for measuring the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern (reserved memory number). However, if, for example, it has a function that allows it to retain and store winning information for the second special pattern in the same way as the first special pattern, it is sufficient to provide a means (second special pattern reserved ball number counter) for measuring the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern (reserved memory number), and configure the above-mentioned first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d to execute a process that switches the measurement target from the first special pattern to the second special pattern.

Specifically, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is input to the second ball entrance 6.
Based on the ball entering 40 (start winning), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203
The counter is configured to be incremented when each counter value (winning information) is stored in the memory area of b, and decremented when the second special pattern variation begins, and a second special pattern reserved ball count command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter after the update (increment or decrement) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

The normal symbol reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 up to a maximum of four times based on the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "initial winning") detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds.
is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the fact that a ball has passed through the through gate 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S4001 in FIG. 662). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, one is added up to a maximum value of four (see S2206 in FIG. 652).
On the other hand, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is decremented by one each time a variable display of a normal pattern is executed (see S2105 in FIG. 651).

The time-saving flag 203f is a flag for indicating whether the current game state is a high probability state of normal symbols (time-saving state, first probability state), and is set to ON when the high probability state of normal symbols is set. This time-saving flag 203f is set to ON when the type of jackpot being executed is determined to be a normal high probability jackpot (a jackpot type in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set) (S3002: Yes in FIG. 660) in the time-saving limit update process (see S2802 in FIG. 660) executed at the end of the jackpot game, and then the time-saving limit count counter 20
When the value of 2i is 0, that is, when it is determined that the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in progress is a low probability state of a normal pattern (S3003: No in FIG. 660), the flag 203f is set to ON (S3005 in FIG. 660). The time-saving flag 203f set to ON is referred to in the process for determining the variation pattern scenario of the special pattern variation (see S2808 in FIG. 658) and the process for executing the normal pattern lottery (see S106 in FIG. 651). Then, when the special pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win, the flag 203f is set to OFF (see S911 in FIG. 639). In addition, in the initialized state, the flag 203f is set to OFF, and when a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether the current game state is a high probability state of the special symbol (first probability change state or second probability change state). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is a high probability state of the special symbol (first probability change state or second probability change state), and when it is set to off, it indicates that the game state is a low probability state of the special symbol (normal state or time-saving state). This probability variable flag 203g is set to ON (S2905 in FIG. 659) when the probability variable limit update process (see S2801 in FIG. 659) executed at the end of a jackpot game determines that the jackpot type in progress is a special symbol high probability jackpot (a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set) (S2902 in FIG. 659) and the value of the probability variable limit count counter is 0, that is, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot in progress is determined to be a low probability state of a special symbol (S2903 in FIG. 659: No). Also, when the value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h after subtraction is not 0, that is, when the number of consecutive special symbol settings is updated (a state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set consecutively), it is determined that the probability variable limit has not been reached (S2905 in FIG. 659).
7: No) is also set to ON.

Then, the process for determining the variation pattern scenario of the special pattern variation (S2 of FIG. 658)
808) or in the process for executing the normal symbol lottery (see S106 in FIG. 651), the setting status of the probability variable flag 203g is referred to, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win, it is set to OFF (see S911 in FIG. 639). Note that, in the initialized state, it is set to OFF, and in the event of a normal power outage, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The probability limit counter 203h is a counter for measuring the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is set in succession. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured to be able to measure the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol is set in succession (the number of times of consecutive special symbol settings) without setting the low probability state of the special symbol except during a jackpot game, and when the number of times of consecutive special symbol settings reaches a predetermined number (40 times) (when the probability limit is reached),
In addition, even if the conditions for setting a high probability state of the special symbol are met, a process (probability change limit process) for forcibly setting a low probability state of the special symbol is executable, thereby preventing a game state (first probability change state) advantageous to the player from being set excessively in succession.

In the case where a jackpot is won in a state where a low probability state of a special symbol is set, and a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, the initial value of this probability limit counter 203h is set to "40" (see S2904 in FIG. 659).
The counter value is subtracted each time the special symbol continuous setting number is updated (see S2907 in FIG. 659), and the counter value after subtraction is referenced in the process of determining whether the special symbol limit has been reached (S2907 in FIG. 659). Then, when the special symbol limit has been reached or when the type of jackpot being executed is one that sets a low probability state of the special symbol, the special symbol limit count counter 203h
The value is cleared to 0.

The information indicating the value of the probability limit counter 203h is stored in the jackpot end process (FIG. 65).
8 (see S2611), the status command is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2807 in FIG. 658).

In the first embodiment, a special limit counter 2 is used to measure the number of consecutive special settings.
The number of consecutive special symbol settings until the probability limit is reached is set to the value of 03h, and the counter value is subtracted each time the number of consecutive special symbol settings is subtracted. In other words, the probability limit count counter 203h during the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously is set.
The value of becomes information for indicating the number of consecutive settings of the remaining special figures until the probability limit is reached. As a result, by receiving the state command set by the processing of S2807 in FIG. 658, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the number of consecutive settings of the special figures until the probability limit is reached, and it becomes possible to execute a performance (for example, a RUSH stock performance (see FIG. 597(b))) for suggesting to the player the period until the probability limit is reached.

In the first embodiment, as described above, the value of the probability variable limit counter 203h for measuring the number of consecutive special symbol settings is set to the number of consecutive special symbol settings until the probability variable limit is reached, and the counter value is subtracted each time the number of consecutive special symbol settings is subtracted. However, without being limited to this, when a high probability state of a special symbol is set, the value of the probability variable limit counter 203h is set to "1", and thereafter, each time the number of consecutive special symbol settings is updated,
The value of the special chance limit count counter 203h may be configured to be incremented by 1, and it may be determined whether the value of the special chance limit count counter 203h after increment is a value indicating that the special chance limit has been reached (e.g., 40), and if the result of this determination indicates that the special chance limit has been reached, then special chance limit processing may be executed.

In this case, for example, when a special condition (for example, a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established during a period in which a high probability state of a special pattern is continuously set, even if the conditions for the establishment (reaching conditions) of the probability limit are changed,
It is possible to determine whether or not the probability variable limit has been reached simply by comparing the changed establishment condition (reaching condition) with the value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h.

In addition, when the special condition in the above example is established, the conditions for the probability variable limit may be changed to be more difficult to establish than before the change, or may be changed to be easier to establish than before the change. In addition, when the conditions for the probability variable limit (reaching conditions) are changed, it may be configured to immediately determine whether or not the current value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h satisfies the conditions for the probability variable limit (reaching conditions), or even if the conditions for the probability variable limit (reaching conditions) are changed, the probability variable limit count counter 203h may be configured to immediately determine whether or not the current value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h satisfies the conditions for the probability variable limit (reaching conditions).
The determination of whether the value of h satisfies the conditions (reaching conditions) for the probability limit may be configured to be executed at the end of the big win game. In particular, in the latter case, when the conditions (reaching conditions) for the probability limit are changed, the high probability state of the special symbol is prevented from immediately ending, and the special symbol lottery big win is guaranteed at least once during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, so that the player's motivation to play can be prevented from decreasing.

The time-saving limit counter 202i is a counter for measuring the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in succession. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured to be able to measure the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in succession (normal consecutive setting number) without setting the low probability state of the normal pattern except during a jackpot game, and when the normal consecutive setting number reaches a predetermined number (10 times) (when the time-saving limit is reached),
In addition, even if the conditions for setting a high probability state of normal symbols are met, a process (time-saving limit process) for forcibly setting a low probability state of normal symbols is executable, thereby preventing a game state (first probability variable state) advantageous to the player from being set excessively in succession.

In the time-saving limit counter 202i, when a jackpot is won in a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, and when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, the initial value is set to "10" (see S3004 in FIG. 660).
The counter value is subtracted each time the normal continuous setting number is updated (see S3007 in FIG. 660), and the counter value after subtraction is referenced in the process of determining whether the time-saving limit has been reached (S3008 in FIG. 660). Then, when the time-saving limit has been reached or when the type of jackpot being executed is a type that sets a low probability state of a normal pattern, the time-saving limit number counter 202i
The value is cleared to 0.

The information indicating the value of the time-saving limit counter 202i is stored in the jackpot end process (FIG. 65).
8 (see S2611), the status command is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2807 in FIG. 658).

In the first embodiment, a time-saving limit counter 2 is used to measure the number of normal consecutive settings.
The value of the time-saving limit counter 202i is set to the normal consecutive number of times until the time-saving limit is reached, and the counter value is subtracted every time the normal consecutive number of times is subtracted. In other words, the time-saving limit number counter 202i during the high probability state of the normal pattern is set continuously is set.
The value of becomes information for indicating the remaining number of consecutive normal settings until the time-saving limit is reached. As a result, by the voice lamp control device 113 receiving the state command set by the processing of S2807 in Fig. 658, it becomes possible to grasp the number of consecutive normal settings until the time-saving limit is reached, and it becomes possible to execute an effect (for example, a RUSH stock effect (see Fig. 597(b))) for suggesting to the player the period until the time-saving limit is reached.

In the first embodiment, as described above, the value of the time-saving limit counter 202i for measuring the number of normal consecutive settings is set to the number of normal consecutive settings until the time-saving limit is reached, and the counter value is subtracted each time the number of normal consecutive settings is subtracted. However, without being limited to this, when a high probability state of a normal pattern is set, the value of the time-saving limit counter 202i is set to "1", and thereafter, each time the number of normal consecutive settings is updated,
The time-saving limit count counter 202i may be configured to add 1 to its value, and it may be determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i after the increment is a value indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached (e.g., 10), and if the result of the determination indicates that the time-saving limit has been reached, then the time-saving limit process may be executed.

When configured in this manner, even if the condition for establishing (reaching) the time-saving limit is changed when, for example, a second special condition (e.g., winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period during which a high probability state of a special pattern is continuously set, it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving limit has been reached simply by comparing the changed condition for establishing (reaching) with the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i.

In addition, when the special condition in the above example is satisfied, the condition for the time-saving limit to be satisfied may be changed to be more difficult to satisfy than before the change, or may be changed to be more easily satisfied than before the change. In addition, when the condition for the time-saving limit to be satisfied (reaching condition) is changed, it may be configured to immediately determine whether or not the value of the time-saving limit count counter 202i at the current time satisfies the condition for the time-saving limit to be satisfied (reaching condition), or even if the condition for the time-saving limit to be satisfied (reaching condition) is changed, the time-saving limit count counter 202
The determination of whether the value of i satisfies the establishment condition (reaching condition) of the time-saving limit may be configured to be executed at the end of the big win game. In particular, in the latter case, when the establishment condition (reaching condition) of the time-saving limit is changed, the high probability state of the normal pattern is prevented from immediately ending, and the special pattern lottery big win is guaranteed at least once during the period when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player's motivation to play can be prevented from decreasing.

The time-saving end waiting flag 203j is a flag indicating that a special pattern change that satisfies the end condition of the time-saving state has started. Specifically, in this embodiment, when a high probability state of a normal pattern is set after the end of a big win game, at least a time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the total number of times of the first special pattern change and the second special pattern change reaches 100 is set as a time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern. The time-saving end waiting flag 203j is set to ON when a special pattern change that can satisfy this time-saving end condition starts.

Then, when the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is set to ON and a special symbol variation that may satisfy the time-saving end condition is stopped and displayed, the flag is set to OFF. Also, when a new special symbol variation is started, it is determined whether the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is set to ON. If it is determined that the flag is set to ON, that is, when a special symbol variation that may satisfy the time-saving end condition (for example, the 100th special symbol variation) is being executed and the 101st special symbol variation is executed, the flag is set to OFF before the 101st special symbol variation is executed (
Before the special symbol lottery is executed), a process for satisfying the condition for terminating the time-saving state is executed. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is set to ON (i.e., the time-saving end waiting state), if any of the time-saving end timings arrive, the time-saving end process can be reliably executed according to each timing.

In the first embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executable during the first special symbol variation period for showing the result of the first special symbol lottery, so there is a risk that the 101st and subsequent special symbol variations will be executed before the special symbol variation (e.g., the 100th special symbol variation after the end of the big win game) that may satisfy the time-saving end condition is stopped and displayed. Therefore,
In the case of a conventional pachinko machine 10, in which the establishment of the time-saving end condition is determined only based on the timing of the stop display of the special symbol variation, the special symbol variation from the 101st time onwards may be executed based on the high probability state of the normal symbol. In other words, there was a problem that a game (time-saving game) during the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) in which the execution period is limited by setting the time-saving end condition to prevent the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player may be executed even outside the range of the execution period specified by the time-saving end condition (the 101st special symbol variation).

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, for example, it is possible to configure the time-saving end condition to be met when either the 99th special pattern change executed after the end of a jackpot game or the 100th special pattern change is stopped and displayed. In this case, however, depending on the change status of the first special pattern and the change status of the second special pattern, there will be cases where the time-saving state ends at the timing when the 100th special pattern change is stopped and cases where the time-saving state ends at the timing when the 99th special pattern change is stopped and displayed. This causes a problem in that the execution period of the time-saving game, which is advantageous to the player, will be shortened, reducing the player's motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in the first embodiment, as described above, when the number of special pattern variations since the end of a jackpot game reaches 100, that is, when a special pattern variation which, when stopped, will end the time-saving state, is stored (the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is set to ON), and when the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is set to ON and the 100th special pattern variation is stopped and displayed, or when the conditions for executing the 101st special pattern variation are met, the time-saving state can be ended at the timing whichever is met first, thereby preventing the player from playing an excessively advantageous game.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state is ended based on the satisfaction of the conditions for executing the 101st special pattern variation, the time-saving state is ended before the 101st special pattern lottery is executed, thereby preventing the player from playing an excessively advantageous game.

The game state storage area 203k is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and stores the game state (probability change flag 203g,
Specifically, when the probability variable flag 203g is off and the time-saving flag 203f is set to off, a normal state is stored, when the probability variable flag 203g is off and the time-saving flag 203f is set to on, a time-saving state is stored, when the probability variable flag 203g is on and the time-saving flag 203f is set to on, a first probability variable state is stored, when the probability variable flag 203g is on and the time-saving flag 203f is set to on, a second probability variable state is stored, when the probability variable flag 203g is on and the time-saving flag 203f is set to on, a
When f is set to off, the second probability variable state is stored.

Furthermore, when a big win game or a small win game is being played, a winning game state (big win state, small win state) indicating that each winning game is being played is displayed.
The game device is also configured to store type information indicating a jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being played.

Then, based on the information stored (memorized) in the game state storage area 203k, a state command is set, and the state command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output state command and sets the state command in the secondary game state storage setting area 203k.
The result is temporarily stored in memory 23j.

The information stored in the game status storage area 203k is configured to be able to be retained even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. In the start-up process (see FIG. 654) executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on,
The state command is configured to be set corresponding to the information stored in the

This makes it possible for the voice and lamp control device 113 to determine the current game status even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like.

In addition, the game status storage area 203k has a recording area capable of holding a predetermined number of game status histories (past histories) stored in the past, and when the game status is switched, a process is executed in which information indicating the game status already stored (information for indicating the game status set before the switch) is shifted to a storage area for holding the latest information among the storage areas for holding the past histories. Through this process, the pieces of information already stored in the storage area for holding the past histories are shifted one by one to the area for holding the older information, and the oldest information is erased.

In this way, by retaining the history of the game state stored in the past for a predetermined period of time, for example, the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game can be set during the jackpot game (at the end of the jackpot game).
In the case of setting, it is possible to read out the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, not the game state at that time (the game state during the jackpot game). In addition, when determining the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends and the variation pattern scenario to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, it is possible to determine the transition history of the game state indicating which game state has transitioned to which game state, using information indicating the game state set in the past as well as the currently set game state, and to execute a determination process based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine a more diverse type of variation pattern scenario, making it difficult to play a monotonous game.

The time-saving counter 203m is a counter for measuring the number of times the special symbol changes until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is satisfied, and is a counter for measuring the number of times the special symbol changes until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is satisfied.
In the jackpot end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658), if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending period (end timing of the jackpot) (see S2610 in FIG. 656: Yes), a value specified in the time-saving granting table 202e is set (see S2805 in FIG. 658).

Then, the time-saving update process (see S916 in FIG. 642) executed in the first special symbol variation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 639) and the second special symbol variation stop process (see S211 in FIG. 647) are executed.
The counter value is referenced in the second time-saving update process (see S1714 in FIG. 648) executed in the second time-saving update process (see S1714 in FIG. 648), and if it is determined that the counter value is greater than 0, the counter value is decremented by 1.

In addition, in the first special symbol variation start process (see S203 in FIG. 633), the value of the time-saving counter 203m is referenced, and it is determined whether the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the final variation in the time-saving state (see S309 in FIG. 633). Similarly, in the second special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 643), the value of the time-saving counter 203m is referenced, and it is determined whether the special symbol variation to be executed this time is the final variation in the time-saving state (see S13 in FIG. 643).
(See 07).

The special symbol 1 big win flag 203na is a flag that is set to ON when the value of the first win random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64b1 and the right first ball entrance 64b2 is determined to be a big win at the start of the fluctuation (when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery). Also, it is set to OFF when the big win game ends.

Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in this first embodiment, the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and if both special patterns result in a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side where the special pattern variation has stopped first (determined special pattern display), and at the point where the special pattern variation has stopped first (determined special pattern display), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly displayed as stopped in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously (concurrently) draw multiple types of special symbols, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player wins a jackpot in the draw for each special symbol and is simultaneously given excessive benefits (jackpot games).

Furthermore, even if a player wins a jackpot disadvantageous to the player in one special symbol lottery, it is possible for the player to win a jackpot advantageous to the player in the other special symbol lottery by the time the winning result is stopped (determined) display. In this case, it is preferable to execute a variable performance that suggests to the player that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, using the variable time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped (determined). This makes the player think that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, and therefore makes the player eager to execute the other special symbol lottery during that variable time.

In addition, the player may be configured to set a shorter variation time when the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player than when the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player. This allows the player to win an advantageous win in the lottery for the other special symbol while one of the special symbols that has won an unfavorable win is varying, and the winning result can be displayed (confirmed) before the winning result of the unfavorable win.

The setting status of this special chart 1 big win flag 203na is referred to in the first special pattern change stop process (see S206 in FIG. 639) that is executed when the first special pattern change is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that the special chart 1 big win flag 203na is set to ON, that is, when the first special pattern change that has won the big win is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 63
9, a process is executed to forcibly stop and display the ongoing second special pattern variation in a display mode indicating a miss (see S903 to S909 in FIG. 639).

In addition, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (see S211 in FIG. 647), when the second special symbol variation that has won the jackpot is to be stopped and displayed (see S1701 in FIG. 647), the setting status of the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203na is judged (S1706 in FIG. 647). If it is judged that it is set to on (S1706 in FIG. 647: Yes), a process is executed to delete the information indicating the jackpot win of the first special symbol (S1707, S1708 in FIG. 647).
1708).

The special symbol 2 big win flag 203nb is a flag that is set to ON when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is determined to be a big win at the start of the fluctuation (when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery). Also, it is set to OFF when the big win game ends.

The setting status of this special chart 2 big win flag 203nb is referred to in the second special pattern change stop process (see S211 in FIG. 647) that is executed when the second special pattern change is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that the special chart 2 big win flag 203nb is set to ON, that is, when the second special pattern change that has won the big win is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 64
7, a process is executed to forcibly stop the first special pattern change that is in progress in a display mode indicating a miss (see S1703 to S1709 in FIG. 647).

In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 639), when the first special symbol variation that has won the jackpot is stopped and displayed (see S901 in FIG. 639), the special symbol 2
The setting status of the jackpot flag 203nb is judged (S907 in FIG. 639). If it is judged that the jackpot flag 203nb is set to ON (S907 in FIG. 639: Yes), a process is executed to delete the information indicating the jackpot win of the second special symbol (S908, S909 in FIG. 639).
.

In this way, the first special symbol lottery (variable) and the second special symbol lottery (variable) are performed simultaneously (
In parallel, even if one of the special symbol lotteries wins the jackpot,
Until the special symbol variation for indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the jackpot can be won in the other special symbol lottery, a flag (special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203na, special symbol 203b) for storing that the jackpot has been won in each special symbol lottery is displayed.
By providing a jackpot flag 203nb) and executing a process for determining the setting status of each jackpot flag when a special pattern variation indicating a jackpot win is stopped and displayed, if one special pattern variation indicating a jackpot win is stopped and displayed first, jackpot win information regarding the other special pattern variation indicating a jackpot win can be reliably discarded.

In this embodiment, information indicating a jackpot win in the first special pattern lottery and information indicating a jackpot win in the second special pattern lottery are stored using separate jackpot flags 203n, but this is not limited to the above. A common jackpot flag may be provided for the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and if a jackpot win is achieved in either the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, the jackpot flag 203n may be set to on, and a jackpot win may not be achieved in the other special pattern lottery that is executed while the jackpot flag 203n is set to on.

The special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is a flag indicating that a big win or a small win has been won in the first special symbol lottery while the second special symbol is being displayed, and is set to ON when the first special symbol variation for indicating a big win or a small win is stopped and displayed while the second special symbol is being displayed. This special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON when the first special symbol variation stop process (S20 in FIG. 639) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is stopped.
In the process of S903 of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 643), the setting is turned on. In the process of S1301 of the second special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 643, S208), the setting is turned off.

As a result, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 6) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110
In the case where the first special symbol is selected in the lottery for the big win (or small win) and the big win symbol (or small win symbol) is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol (the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the process of S206 in FIG. 632) that was forcibly stopped and displayed as a losing symbol is selected again before the current special symbol variation process is completed (see S2
This can prevent a new second special pattern variation from being executed in processing 08.

In addition, the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to execute processing for the first special pattern and then processing for the second special pattern within one special pattern change processing (see S104 in FIG. 632), thereby executing change processing for each special pattern without delay.

Then, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632), when any special symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a display mode indicating a big win, the main process of the main control device 110 (see S104 in FIG. 632) is started.
In addition, the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632) is configured to execute the big win control process (see S2504 in FIG. 656) when the current state is a big win state or a small win state (S201 in FIG. 632: Yes).
It is configured to skip steps S202 to S211 in FIG.

In other words, in this embodiment, while a big win game or a small win game is being executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a new special symbol variation (lottery) is not executed. However, the first special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632) executed first is executed.
When the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot by the special symbol change process (S104 in FIG. 632),
The configuration is such that a new variable process for the second special symbol is performed within the reel (see reference).

In this embodiment, which is configured in this manner, by using the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203o, when the first special pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode to indicate that the lottery result is a jackpot, it is possible to prevent a new change process for the second special pattern from being executed within the special pattern change process (see S104 in FIG. 632).

The small win flag 203p is the result of the first special symbol winning or losing judgment (the result of the first special symbol lottery).
This flag 203p indicates a small win, and is set to ON when a small win is won. This small win flag 203p is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol win/loss judgment (the result of the first special symbol lottery) is a small win (see S502 in FIG. 635).
When the special pattern change that results in a small win is displayed, the setting information is referenced (
If it is determined that the setting is ON (see S1001 in FIG. 640),
1001: Yes), a special pattern 2 discard process (see S1003 in FIG. 641) is executed to forcibly stop (discard) the ongoing second special pattern change in a display mode indicating a miss, and then it is set to off (see S1005 in FIG. 640).

The special pattern 1 variation time counter 203r is a counter for measuring the variation time of the first special pattern, and a value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the first special pattern variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 636) is set (see S614 in FIG. 636). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special pattern variation execution process (see S204 in FIG. 638) is executed, and it is determined whether the value is 0 in the special pattern variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632) (see S202 in FIG. 632). Here, the special pattern 1 variation time counter 203r
When it is determined that the value is 0 (S202: Yes in FIG. 632), a first special pattern change stop process (see S206 in FIG. 639) is executed to stop the first special pattern that is changing.

Furthermore, the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is referenced when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win (see S1702 in FIG. 647). When it is determined that the counter value is greater than 0, that is, when it is determined that the first special symbol is varying (S1702 in FIG. 647: Yes), the value is cleared to 0 (S170 in FIG. 647).
5). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r remains, and it is possible to suppress the resumption of the variation of the first special symbol based on the value remaining in the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r after the forcible stop display.

The special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s is a counter for measuring the variation time of the second special symbol, and a value indicating the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S1304 in FIG. 645) is set (see S1513 in FIG. 645).
Then, the value is updated (decremented) each time the second special symbol variation process (see S209 in FIG. 646) is executed, and the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632) determines whether the value is 0 (see S207 in FIG. 632).
When it is determined that the value of 3s is 0 (S207: Yes in FIG. 632), a second special pattern change stop process (see S211 in FIG. 647) is executed to stop the second special pattern that is changing.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win, the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s is cleared to 0 (see S906 in FIG. 639). This makes it possible to prevent the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s from remaining and the variation of the second special symbol from being resumed again based on the value left in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s after the forcible stop display when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win.

The winning status storage area 203t is a storage area for storing the game status set at the time of winning the jackpot. In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634), when it is determined that the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot (S411: Yes in FIG. 634), the game status that is set is stored in this winning status storage area 203t (see S415 in FIG. 634). Also, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634), the game status that is set is stored in the winning status storage area 203t (see S415 in FIG. 634).
644: S1303), if it is determined that the current special pattern lottery is a jackpot (S1411: Yes in FIG. 644), the set game status is stored (see S1415 in FIG. 644).

Then, in the jackpot end processing (see S2611 in FIG. 658), the information stored in the win status storage area 203t (information indicating the game status at the time when the ongoing jackpot was won) is referenced in the processing for determining the number of time-saving times (see S2804 in FIG. 658) and the processing for determining the variation pattern scenario (see S2808 in FIG. 658).

In this first embodiment, no matter what game state is set when a jackpot is won, if the conditions for starting a jackpot game are met, a low probability state for a special symbol and a low probability state for a normal symbol are set. In other words, by configuring so that an advantageous game state is not set during a jackpot game in which a bonus can be given to a player, it is made difficult for an excessive bonus to be given to a player. In this first embodiment, which is configured in this way, when executing the process of determining the number of time-saving times or the variation pattern scenario at the end of a jackpot game, if the game state set at that time is referenced,
The normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) will be referenced.

In contrast, in the first embodiment, in addition to the currently set game state, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is stored, and the number of time-saving plays is determined at the end of the jackpot game,
When executing a process for determining a variation pattern scenario, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot is read out and the number of time-saving times and the variation pattern scenario are determined using the read-out game state, so that it is possible to easily increase the number of time-saving times and the variation pattern scenarios set after the jackpot game ends, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The high probability limit reaching flag 203u is a flag for indicating that the number of consecutive special pattern settings, i.e., the number of times that the high probability state of the special pattern is consecutively set, has reached the upper limit (40 times) (reaching the high probability limit), and is set to on when the high probability limit is reached.

The time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is a flag for indicating that the number of consecutive normal pattern settings, i.e., the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is consecutively set, has reached the upper limit (10 times) (reaching the time-saving limit), and is set to on when the time-saving limit is reached.

The fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203w is a storage area for storing information indicating the determined fluctuation pattern scenario, and is used for the jackpot end process (S261 in FIG. 658).
1) is stored (S2809 in FIG. 658).
The variation pattern scenario stored in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203w is read out in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 636) (see FIG. 6
36 605), and the variation pattern is selected by referring to the read variation pattern scenario (see S610 in FIG. 636). Also, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S610 in FIG. 636)
645) (see S1304 in FIG. 645), and a fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to the read fluctuation pattern scenario (S1509 in FIG. 645).
.

In this first embodiment, when selecting the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern change, by referring to a change pattern table that differs depending on the game state, it is possible to set a game state (normal state, second special probability state) in which the first special pattern change is more likely to be executed than the second special pattern change, and a game state (time-saving state, first special probability state) in which the second special pattern change is more likely to be executed than the first special pattern change.

In addition, in the first embodiment, even when the same game state (normal state) is set, a variation pattern can be selected by referring to different variation pattern tables according to the number of special symbol lotteries (variations) executed after the end of a big win game. By configuring in this way, even if the game state does not change, the first special symbol variation, in which the first special symbol variation is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol variation, can be selected by referring to different variation pattern tables according to the number of special symbol lotteries (variations) executed after the end of a big win game.
a game period; a second game period in which the second special symbol variation is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol variation;
This allows the player to experience an unexpected game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot probability of the second special symbol lottery are the same, but the content of the jackpot game to be executed when the jackpot is won is configured to be more advantageous to the player (more prize balls can be obtained during the jackpot game) when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery than when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. In addition, the game state (first probability change state) that is more advantageous to the player is set as the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery than when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery.

By configuring in this manner, the switching condition of the variation pattern selection table is established, and the player can play in the hope that a second game period is set in which the second special pattern variation is more likely to be executed than the first special pattern variation.

In addition, in the first embodiment, at the end of the big win game, the timing when the switching condition of the variable pattern selection table is established (the timing when the number of special pattern variations executed after the end of the big win game reaches a predetermined number), and the variable pattern table to be referenced before the switching condition is established,
The fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the switching condition is established is predefined as one scenario (fluctuation pattern scenario), and one fluctuation pattern scenario is determined from among the plurality of fluctuation pattern scenarios at the end of a big win game.

The variation pattern scenario determined at the end of the big win game is stored (stored) in the variation pattern scenario storage area 203w, and when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, the variation pattern is selected based on the contents stipulated in the stored variation pattern scenario. In this way, the switching contents of the variation pattern table are managed by the scenario, and the variation pattern is selected by referring to the variation pattern table corresponding to the updated contents of the scenario, so that the processing load can be reduced compared to the case where the process of determining the variation pattern table to be referred to is executed every time the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed.

In this first embodiment, the number of times the special pattern changes after the end of the big win game is specified as the switching condition for switching the variation pattern table to be referenced during the period when the same game state is set, but other elements may be set as the switching condition. For example, the switching condition may be set as the winning of a small win by the first special pattern lottery, or the number of times that the small win has been won has reached a predetermined number, or the switching condition may be set as the setting of a specific variation pattern.

The special state flag 203x is a flag for indicating that the probability change limit and the time-saving limit are established at the same time, and is a flag for indicating that the jackpot end process (
In the step S2611 of FIG. 658, when the special chance limit reaching flag 203u is set to on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to on, that is, when the special chance limit is reached and the time-saving limit is reached, the flag is set to on.

In the first embodiment, after the end of the big win game, the first probability state (high probability state of special symbols,
Even if a jackpot type that can be set to a normal symbol high probability state is set, in the jackpot end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658) executed at the end of the jackpot game,
By setting the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u on (reaching the probability variable limit), the probability state of the special symbol set after the end of the jackpot game is forcibly changed from a high probability state to a low probability state. Furthermore, by setting the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v on (reaching the time-saving limit), the probability state of the normal symbol set after the end of the jackpot game is forcibly changed from a high probability state to a low probability state.

The other memory area 203z stores other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, etc.

Returning to FIG. 584, the explanation will be continued. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the dispensing control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first
The symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, the specific winning hole 65a
a large opening solenoid for driving the opening/closing plate 65b of the second variable winning device 650 to open/close the opening/closing plate 65b in the forward direction with the lower edge of the opening/closing plate 65b as an axis; a V opening solenoid for driving the opening/closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 to open/close the opening/closing door 650f1;
Solenoids 209 consisting of a flow path solenoid 650k for driving a switching member 650h provided in the second variable winning device 650 and a solenoid for driving an electric role-playing device (other solenoid 209z) are connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and a group of sensors not shown in the figure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described below that is provided in the power supply unit 115 are connected to the input/output port 205, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives a payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 630) is immediately executed as the power failure process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the operating handle 51 is not being operated, the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the display control device 114, which controls the display of variable effects (variable display) and advance notice effects.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
5, the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected.

The audio and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the content of the performance during a super reach, and also instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the rear image refers to the third pattern display device 81, which is the main image to be displayed.
This refers to the image displayed on the back side of the design.

The voice lamp control device 113 judges an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the type of the error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (e.g., vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a presentation mode selection table 222b, a stock notification number selection table 222c, and a challenge mode transition table 22d, as shown in FIG. 622 (a).

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (such as a complete miss, a reach miss, and various reaches) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

The presentation mode selection table 222b is a data table which is referred to when determining a presentation mode corresponding to each game state, and a corresponding presentation mode is defined based on the current game state, the value of a remaining chance bonus counter 223m which indicates the period until the chance bonus limit is reached, and the value of a remaining time-saving counter 222n which indicates the period until the time-saving limit is reached.

In the first embodiment, even if the same game state is set, different presentation modes are set based on the length of the period until the probability limit is reached or the period until the time-saving limit is reached. Specifically, when the second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, if the first probability jackpot is won in the current state, the presentation mode is switched depending on whether the probability limit is not reached until the time-saving limit number "10" set after the jackpot game ends (the time-saving limit is reached), that is, whether the first probability jackpot is won and the first probability state is set, and the first probability state is set, the presentation mode is switched depending on whether the first probability state can be continued for 10 times, which is the upper limit of the time-saving limit.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to allow the player to easily understand the game content that may occur in the future in the pachinko machine 10, which has multiple types of limits (high probability limit, time-saving limit) and therefore changes the game state in a complex manner.

Here, the contents of the presentation mode selection table 222b will be described with reference to Fig. 623. Fig. 623 is a diagram showing the contents of the presentation mode selection table 222b.
As shown in the figure, the presentation mode selection table 222b specifies a corresponding presentation mode based on the current game state, the value of the remaining chance bonus counter 223m which indicates the period until the chance bonus limit is reached, and the value of the remaining time-saving counter 222n which indicates the period until the time-saving limit is reached.

When the game state is set to "normal (normal state)", that is, when the low probability state of the special pattern or the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, neither the probability limit number nor the time-saving limit number is set, so the "normal mode" is specified as the presentation mode regardless of the value of the remaining probability limit number counter 223m and the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 222n. Note that, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this first embodiment, when a special condition (simultaneous establishment of the probability limit and the time-saving limit) is established, a special mode in which the second special pattern variation is the main variation during the normal state can be set. This special mode is set as a dedicated presentation mode, but is set only when a limited special condition is established, so that it is configured to be set without referring to the presentation mode selection table 222b.

Therefore, when determining the presentation mode by referring to presentation mode selection table 222b, if the normal state is set, the information is specified so that the "normal mode" is always determined.

When the game state is set to "time-saving (time-saving state)", that is, when a low probability state for special symbols or a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the number of chance bonuses is not set, so the value of the remaining chance bonus counter 223m is not referenced, and when the value of the remaining time-saving bonus counter 222n is "1 or more", "EXTRA mode" is specified as the presentation mode.

When the "first probability change (first probability change state)" is set as the game state, that is, when the high probability state of the special pattern or the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the probability change limit number of times is also set.
Since the time-saving limit number is also set, different presentation modes are defined based on the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m and the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 222n.
When the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is "10 to 40" and the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is "10", that is, when the first probability change state can be executed 10 times in a row, the "Super RUSH mode" is selected as the performance mode, and the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is "10 to 40".
When the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is "9 or less," or when the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is "1 to 9" and the value of the remaining time reduction counter 222n is "1 or more," a "RUSH mode" is defined as the presentation mode.

When the "second probability change (second probability change state)" is set as the game state, that is, when a high probability state for special symbols and a low probability state for normal symbols are set, only the probability change limit number is set, so different presentation modes are defined based on the value of the remaining probability change number counter 223m. When the value of the remaining probability change number counter 223m is "13 to 40," that is, when the first probability change jackpot is currently won, the first probability change state can be set 10 times in a row, the presentation mode is "revenge mode," and when the value of the remaining probability change number counter 223m is "1 to 12," that is, when the value of the remaining probability change number counter 223m is "1 to 12," that is, when the value of the remaining probability change number counter 223m is "13 to 40," the presentation mode is "revenge mode," and when the value of the remaining probability change number counter 223m is "13 to 40," the presentation mode is "revenge mode."

The stock notification number selection table 222c is a table showing the remaining number of times the first probability variable state can be continuously set when the "RUSH mode" is set as the performance mode (during the first probability variable state).
This is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation format of the stock notification presentation for notifying the player of the guaranteed number of winnings.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 597(b), when the "RUSH mode" is set as the presentation mode of the first variable probability state, the remaining number of times that the first variable probability state can be set, that is, the remaining number of times of the jackpot until either the variable probability limit or the time-saving limit is reached, is not notified to the player. In other words, in the first embodiment, the variable probability limit number is set first (the second variable probability state is set), and then the second variable probability state is repeatedly set, so that when the first variable probability jackpot is won in a state in which the remaining number of times of the variable probability limit (remaining number of times of the variable probability limit) is less than 10, the variable probability limit is reached before the time-saving limit number "10" set after the jackpot ends (before the time-saving limit is reached), so that the number of times that the first variable probability state is set consecutively may be reduced.

In such a case, if the number of times the first probability variable state can be set in succession is notified to the player in advance, the player can easily grasp the future game content. For example, for a player who wins the first probability variable jackpot when the remaining number of probability variable limit times is "2", i.e.,
Even if a player won a sure-variable jackpot, the player was informed that a 10-round jackpot game based on the jackpot win of the second special symbol lottery would be played only once, which could significantly reduce the player's desire to play.

In contrast to this, in the first embodiment, a "RUSH mode" is set as a presentation mode in some of the situations where the first special probability state can be set 10 times in a row and in situations where the first special probability state cannot be set 10 times in a row, and during the "RUSH mode", the player is gradually notified of the remaining number of times that the first special probability state can be set (the remaining number of jackpots until either the special probability limit or the time-saving limit is reached).

By configuring in this way, the player can be made to eagerly play the game while expecting that the first probability variable state will continue for a longer period until the first probability variable state ends.

Here, the contents defined in the stock notification number selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 624(a), the stock notification number selection table 222c specifies values to be used for the stock notification performance in correspondence with the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m, the value of the notified stock number counter 223r, and the value of the acquired performance counter 223h.

In other words, when the "RUSH mode" is set, that is, when the first probability variable state is set, and the player has not been notified of how many times the first probability variable state will continue, the number of times the first probability variable state can continue (the number of times a 10-round jackpot game can be executed)
When executing a stock notification effect capable of notifying a player of the above, a difference value is calculated from the value of a remaining probability change count counter 223m for indicating the remaining number of probability change limit times (the number of jackpots until the probability change limit is reached) and the value of an already notified stock number counter 223r for indicating a value already notified by the stock notification effect, and the remaining number of probability change limit times to be notified by the current stock notification effect is determined based on the calculated difference value.

Specifically, when the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is "11 to 9" and the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is "7 or more", the acquired value of the performance counter 223h is "0
"+1" for the range "～59", "upper limit" for the range "60～89", "90～
The value of "upper limit number - 2" is specified for the range of "0 to 98", and when the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is "0 to 6", the acquired value of the performance counter 223h is "0 to 59".
The value of "0" is specified for the range of "0", the value of "+1" is specified for the range of "60 to 89", and the value of "upper limit number" is specified for the range of "90 to 98".

In addition, when the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is "8 to 3", regardless of the value of the notified stock number counter 223r, the acquired performance counter 223h is set to "0" for the range of "0 to 59", "+1" for the range of "60 to 89", and "+2" for the range of "90 to 98". When the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is "2 to 1", regardless of the value of the notified stock number counter 223r, the acquired performance counter 223h is set to "0" for the range of "0 to 59", "+1" for the range of "60 to 89", and "+2" for the range of "90 to 98".
A value of "+1" is defined for the range of h values "0 to 98."

Here, when "0", "+1", or "+2" is selected (determined) as the stock notification number, the second game information display area Dm5 already formed in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is
A display command is set to add the determined value to the value (RUSH stock number) displayed in the . This allows the number of times the first probability variable state is set to be continuously notified to be increased. Note that when "0" is set, a performance for adding the stock notification number, specifically, a performance in which the hero 801 acquires the fourth balloon 804d in the performance shown in FIG. 597(a), is executed, and then a performance in which the stock number is not added is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player only of the state in which there is a stock number that can be added, and to execute an effect without showing the specific number to be notified.
During the SH mode, the player can continue playing the game while expecting that the stock notification performance will be executed next.

The presentation mode of the presentation executed when the stock notification number is "0" may be configured to be executed when there is no stock number that can be added, that is, when all the stock notification numbers corresponding to the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m are already displayed in the second game information display area Dm5. This makes it possible to make the player feel hopeful as if there is a stock number that can be added even when there is no stock number that can be added, and allows the player to continue playing while expecting that the next stock notification presentation will be executed in the RUSH mode.

In addition, when the "upper limit number" or "upper limit number - 2" is selected (determined) as the stock notification number, regardless of the value displayed in the second game information display area Dm5, the remaining probability change counter 22
The difference value between the value of 3m and the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is set as the upper limit number, and a display command is set to add up and display the RUSH stock number displayed in the second information display area Dm5 so that the stock notification number corresponds to the value obtained by performing a calculation on that upper limit number.

In this case, the magnitude of the value added and displayed can be varied depending on the value (RUSH stock number) already displayed in the second game information display area Dm5 formed in the display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 and the difference between the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m and the value of the notified stock number counter 223r, making it easier for the player to execute a variety of presentations.

In addition, the second game information display area D
If the difference between the value displayed in m5 (the number of RUSH stocks) and the upper limit number, which is the difference between the value of the remaining chance of winning counter 223m and the value of the notified stock number counter 223r, is smaller than the value calculated for the upper limit number ("-2" in the case of "upper limit number-2"), the number of RUSH stocks is displayed incremented up to the value corresponding to the upper limit number, regardless of the value calculated for the upper limit number.

This configuration prevents the RUSH stock number from being displayed as a variable (subtractive) number that is smaller than the currently displayed RUSH stock number, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation when a stock notification effect is executed to increase the RUSH stock number.

In this embodiment, the stock notification effect is configured so that the stock notification number (RUSH stock number) is not subtracted, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that a part of the stock notification effect is configured to determine a presentation mode that decreases the currently displayed stock notification number. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the presentation result each time the stock notification effect is executed. Furthermore, compared to a case where the stock notification effect is executed only when the stock notification number is added or maintained, the frequency of execution of the stock notification effect can be increased, thereby improving the presentation effect.

The challenge mode transition table 222d is a data table that is referenced when determining whether or not to transition the presentation mode to the "challenge mode" in a state where the "revenge mode" is set, which is a presentation mode that is set in a situation where the second probability variable state is set, and is referenced to transition the presentation mode in a state where a jackpot has not been won by a special symbol lottery, that is, without an opportunity for a new game state to be set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to transition the presentation mode without a jackpot win, making it difficult for the player to predict when the presentation mode will transition.

In addition, in the first embodiment, a lottery (determination) for transition to the "challenge mode" is executed based on the number of small win games executed in the state where the "revenge mode", which is the presentation mode set in the situation where the second probability variable state is set, is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether a small win game has been executed or two rounds of big win games have been executed, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period until the probability variable limit is reached (the remaining period of the special chart high probability period).

Here, the contents of the challenge mode transition table 222d will be described with reference to Fig. 624(b). Fig. 624(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the challenge mode transition table 222d. As shown in Fig. 624(b), the challenge mode transition table 222d defines the judgment result of whether or not to transition the presentation mode in accordance with the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m and the value of the small win counter 223t.

Specifically, when the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is "up to 13 (13 or more)", the value of the small win counter 223t is "none (no transition)" in the range of "up to 900", and "90
The "transition (with transition)" is specified in the range of "1 to (901 or more)", and when the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is "12 to 9", the value of the small win counter 223t is "up to 2
"00" range is set to "none (no transition)", and "transition (transition)" is set to "201 to (201 or more)". The value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is set to "8 to (13 or less)".
In this case, the value of the small win counter 223t is in the range of "-50" (no transition).
However, "transition (with transition)" is defined as being in the range of "51 to (51 or more)."

Next, referring to FIG. 622(b), the RAM of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113
As shown in FIG. 622(b), the R
The AM 223 includes a command memory area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c, a special pattern 1 fluctuation start flag 223e, a special pattern 2 fluctuation start flag 223f, and a special pattern 3 fluctuation start flag 323g.
23f, special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223g, performance counter 223h, special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223i, subordinate state setting area 223j, performance mode storage area 223k, remaining probability change number counter 223m, remaining time reduction number counter 223n, probability change limit flag 223o, time reduction limit flag 223p, specific fluctuation time counter 223q, notified stock number counter 223r, notification upper limit flag 223s, small win number counter 223t, time reduction counter 22
3u and other memory area 223z.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the processing corresponding to the command is executed. In detail, the command storage area 223a is configured as a ring buffer and is a FIFO (First In First Out) area.
When the command determination process (see FIG. 664) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area 223a is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in the winning information storage area 223b allows the lottery results of the reserved balls, etc. to be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 before the fluctuation begins.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (standby times) of a variable performance (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) and reserved in the main control device 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on a reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and outputs the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 20 stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c manages the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, the main control device 110 selects the first ball inlet 64b1 or the right first ball inlet 64
When the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering b2, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d after the addition or subtraction is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command and stores it in the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110.
The value can be updated in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of 10.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.
3c, and sends a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c.

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number equal to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 587 (
The image drawing is controlled so that the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in a part of the area of the main control device 110 (see a) (not shown). As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The special symbol 1 variation start flag 223e is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned ON, and is set to ON when a special symbol 1 variation pattern command that notifies the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned OFF when the variation display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81.

The special symbol 2 variation start flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned ON, and is set to ON when a special symbol 2 variation pattern command that notifies the variation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned OFF when the variation display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81.

The special symbol 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when the first stop type command notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned OFF when the variable display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81.

The special symbol 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when a second stop type command notifying the variable stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned OFF when the variable display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81.

The effect counter 223h is a loop counter whose value is periodically updated from "0 to 99," and is configured so that its value is updated by 1 in processing executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main processing (see FIG. 663) of the voice lamp control device 113. When selecting the effect mode of various effects, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to obtain the value of this effect counter 223h and determine different effect modes corresponding to the obtained value.

In the slave status setting area 223j, data corresponding to a status command output from the master control device 110 is set. The current game status can also be determined by the voice and lamp control device 113 based on the data set in the slave status setting area 223j. Note that the status setting command is also output from the master control device 110 when the power is turned on, and the backup game status can be determined by the voice and lamp control device 113.

The presentation mode storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating a presentation mode determined based on the currently set game state, and stores information indicating a presentation mode set in the presentation mode setting process (see S4305 in FIG. 668). Based on the stored information, the stored information is referenced in the process for executing a presentation specific to each presentation mode.

The remaining chance of winning counter 223m is a counter in which a value corresponding to the value of the chance of winning limit counter 203h set in the main control unit 110 is set, and is intended to indicate the period until the chance of winning limit is reached (the remaining number of times that the special chart high probability state can be set consecutively).

This remaining probability change counter 223m is a command determination process (see S4305 in FIG. 664).
In the state command process (see S4212 in FIG. 665) executed by the status command processing unit 111,
The limit information update process (S in FIG. 667) is executed when a limit-related command is received.
When a command to set the number of chance bonuses is received in the game (see 4304), a corresponding value is set, and when a command to limit the number of chance bonuses is received, the already set value is decremented by 1.

The value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is referenced when determining the number of notifications in the stock notification presentation, or when making a decision to switch presentation modes during the second probability change state. In the state command process (see S4212 in FIG. 665), if it is determined that a command indicating that a low probability state (normal state, time-saving state) of a special symbol has been set has been received in the game state update process (see S43032 in FIG. 666), which is executed when a game state command is received, the value is cleared (set) to 0.

The remaining time-saving count counter 223n is a counter in which a value corresponding to the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203i set in the main control unit 110 is set, and is intended to indicate the period until the time-saving limit is reached (the remaining number of times that the normal high probability state can be set consecutively).

This remaining time reduction counter 223n is a command determination process (see S4305 in FIG. 664).
In the state command process (see S4212 in FIG. 665) executed by the status command processing unit 111,
The limit information update process (S in FIG. 667) is executed when a limit-related command is received.
When a command to set the number of time-saving times is received in the input section 4303 (see 4304), a corresponding value is set, and when a time-saving limit number command is received, the already set value is decremented by 1.

The value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is referred to when a process for determining a presentation mode in each game state is executed. In the state command process (see S4212 in FIG. 665), a game state update process (see S4212 in FIG. 66) is executed when a game state command is received.
When it is determined that a command indicating that a low probability state (normal state, second probability state) of a normal pattern has been set has been received in the 6th (see S43032), the value is cleared (set) to 0.
will be done.

The special chance limit flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the special chance limit has been reached, and is set to on when a special chance limit reached command is received in the limit information update process (see S4304 in FIG. 667) which is executed when a limit-related command is received in the status command process (see S4212 in FIG. 665) executed in the command determination process (see S4305 4111 in FIG. 664).

The time-saving limit flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached, and is set to on when a time-saving limit reached command for indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached is received in the limit information update process (see S4304 in FIG. 667) which is executed when a limit-related command is received in the status command process (see S4212 in FIG. 665) which is executed in the command determination process (see S4305 4111 in FIG. 664).

The specific variation time counter 223q is a counter for measuring the variation time of a jackpot variation when a jackpot variation is executed as a special pattern variation (sub-special pattern variation) other than the special pattern variation that is primarily executed, and is referenced when determining the remaining variation time of the sub-special pattern variation.

In the specific variation time counter 223q, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol variation is executed in a game state where the second special symbol variation is mainly executed (first probability variation state, time-saving state, normal state of special mode), a variation time corresponding to the jackpot variation of the first special symbol variation is set (see S5204 in FIG. 674). Then, in the performance execution management process (see S4110 in FIG. 676), the counter value is updated (see S5402 in FIG. 676), and the performance mode according to the remaining variation time indicated by the updated counter value is set (see S5404 in FIG. 676).
, see S5406).

The notified stock number counter 223r is a counter for measuring the number of stocks already notified in the stock notification performance (see FIG. 597(a)). In the "RUSH mode" in which the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is not notified to the player when the first probability change state is set, the counter is referred to when determining the performance mode of the stock notification performance to be set when a variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol variation is executed (see FIG. 67(a)).
5 S5308).

The notification upper limit flag 223s is a flag for determining a state in which the number of stock notifications corresponding to the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m has been notified in the stock notification performance. In a "RUSH mode" in which the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is not notified to the player in a state in which the first probability change state is set, the notification upper limit flag 223s is set when the number of stock notifications corresponding to the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m has been notified by the stock notification performance (S5 of FIG. 675).
312). When the notification upper limit flag 223s is set to ON, the stock notification number cannot be further increased and displayed by the stock notification effect, so the process for executing the stock notification effect is skipped (S5305:
Yes).

The small win counter 223t is a counter for measuring the number of small win games executed in a state in which the “revenge mode” is set as the presentation mode, and when it is determined that an ending command for a small win game has been received (S5003 in FIG. 672:
If the answer is "Yes" and it is determined that the presentation mode is "revenge mode" (FIG. 672
The result of the determination is S5005: Yes in FIG. 672, and the counter value is incremented by 1 (S5006 in FIG. 672).

Then, the value of the counter is referenced when determining whether or not to shift the presentation mode from the "revenge mode" to the "challenge mode" (see S5008 in FIG. 672).
The value of the small win counter 223t is cleared to 0 when a big win is won or when the presentation mode is changed from the "revenge mode" to another presentation mode.

The time-saving counter 223u is a counter for measuring the number of time-saving times (the number of times the special symbol changes until the time-saving end condition is met) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is updated to a value based on the received information (remaining time-saving information) when it is determined that the presentation mode is "EXTRA (EXTRA mode)" in the time-saving related process (see S4214 in FIG. 669) executed in the command determination process (see S4305 in FIG. 664, see 4111).Then, it is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the EXTRA mode (see S47 in FIG. 669).
See 04).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 625 to Fig. 630. Fig. 625 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, a bus line 240,
241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, and the character ROM 234.
, an image controller 237 is connected via a bus line 240. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model having a different probability of winning a jackpot with a special pattern or a different number of prize balls paid out for one jackpot with a special pattern, there are models having the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first.
AM233 will now be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command to set is set to the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
is stored in the

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a that allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows for sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This allows for a reduction in the number of parts in the display control device 114, which in turn reduces manufacturing costs and suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have the problem that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged consecutively on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. In this way, because the read speed of NAND flash memories is slow, the MPU 231 does not directly read data from the character ROM 2.
If the control program is read from MPU 231 and various processes are executed, it may take a long time to read the instructions that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as MPU 231, this may result in a deterioration in the processing performance of the display control device 114.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) as described later.
M) and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The character ROM 234 stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third
This is a memory that stores data of an image to be displayed on the pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and the character ROM 234 is
The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the M234, which will be described later, is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
An image controller 237 is also connected to the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 reads image data stored in the character memory area 234a2, which will be described later, from the character memory area 234a2.
A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237
Transfer to M236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND type flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR type ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 which stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 which stores data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily made large-capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND type flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, so that the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the occurrence rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 232 via the bus line 240, for example.
Based on the address transmitted from the address read/write unit 37 , the corresponding data is read from the NAND type flash memory 234 a or the like, and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a, by its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.
34a. The ROM 34 performs the well known data address translation so that data can be read from and written to 34a.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, which includes the error bit.
Even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used as the M234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images based on erroneous data.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks in the NAND flash memory 234a and prevents access to the defective data blocks.
The MPU 231 and the image controller 237 each store data in the NAND flash memory 234a.
Without considering the address positions of different defective data blocks,
4 can be easily accessed.
Even if the flash memory 234a is used, the access control to the character ROM 234 can be prevented from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND type flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the buffer RAM 234.
If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from N
The data is read from the AND type flash memory 234a (or the NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process and writes the data corresponding to the specified address onto the bus line 24.
0 to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237.

The buffer RAM 234c is configured with two banks, each of which is a NAND
The ROM controller 234b can set one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a. This allows the ROM controller 234b to output data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other bank, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page of data including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. This allows the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 to be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. The NOR ROM 234d stores a first program storage area 234a1 for storing, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231.
At least a program memory area 234d1 is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes this boot program. As a result, the display control device 114
In the first program memory area 23, various controls can be executed.
4d1 is one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e.,
The first program storage area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set appropriately in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code and also points the instruction pointer 23
1a, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d first, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, and then the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d first, and then the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d.
The instruction code at the corresponding address in the program stored in the buffer R34c is read out.
The data is read from the AM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

In this embodiment, all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 23.
4a, the boot program is stored in the MPU after the system reset is released.
The reason why the predetermined number of instructions, beginning with the instruction to be processed first by 231, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d is as follows: That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to the NAND flash memory in that, when reading data of the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until when the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time from reading the data to setting it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H".
Therefore, the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, the display control device 1
This creates a problem in that control of the third pattern display device 81 at 14 may not start immediately.

In contrast, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in the NOR type ROM 234d, the address "0000H" can be read from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released.
When the address "0000H" is specified, the character ROM 234 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "00
00H" can be received, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 that stores a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., control programs other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first transfers the data in the first program storage area 234 to the data table storage area 233b.
According to the boot program read from the second program memory area 234a1, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a, using a bank of the buffer RAM 234c different from the bank in which the boot program of the first program memory area 234d1 is set.

Here, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is
As described above, since the capacity is equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, when the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H" and the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c,
The boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is read from the program storage area 233 in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1.
a, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is left set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and the transfer process can be executed using the other bank. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, and then moves the instruction pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a.
In this way, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231
The MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes.
Instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having a program storage area 233a and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having a program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the following:
The remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included. Meanwhile, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) are all stored in the second program storage area 233b.
4a1, a predetermined amount is stored in the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 23
At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231
Specifically, the second predetermined address is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.
77 (see S6002) is set to the start address of the program.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b.
The various processes are executed using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the program.

Therefore, most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 23, which has a slow read speed.
Even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the character ROM 234 and the program storage area 23 of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released,
By transferring the control program to the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is made up of a high-speed DRAM, and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

As described above, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, starting from the instruction that is to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The remaining boot program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234d.
Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the program storage area 233a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a.
By simply adding the OM 234d, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and therefore the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 that accompanies the shortened start-up time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 630) transmitted from the MPU 231, and develops the image in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later, and outputs the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs parallel processing of the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed.
Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 679 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image.
In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the next frame of image and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive an image drawing instruction from MPU 231 at each image drawing and display processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where image drawing and display processing have not been completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of images is performed using image data stored in resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, NAND flash memory facilitates large ROM capacity, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, the character ROM 234a, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, can be read at the time of drawing an image.
Since there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from 34, the time required for such reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display has been decided by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, when the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the display control device 114 controls the MPU 231 to transfer image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed.
is configured to instruct the image controller 237. As described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw an image, but when drawing an image, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, and the time required for reading can be omitted, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Moreover, by storing image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured with a 132-kbyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data to the image controller 2 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list.
The instruction to transfer image data to the character ROM 234 includes the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and information on the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236).
The address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) is included in the data.
The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included.

The image controller 237 reads the character data from the character ROM 23 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction.
One block of data is read from a predetermined address of the video RAM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is read out from the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.
Then, the process is repeated until all image data stored in the storage destination address range from the storage destination start address to the storage destination end address specified by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a period of time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is
a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time.
It is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data while the image data is being transferred to the normal video RAM 236.
When 236 is occupied, the video RAMs 235, 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, which prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

Also, the buffer RAM 234c is used to store the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM
Since the transfer of image data to 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 stores image data transferred from the character ROM 234.
The images are stored without being overwritten while the power is on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character design area 235e, and the error message image area 235f are provided. In addition, the power-on variable image area 235b,
At least a third pattern area 235d is provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on.
The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data that should be stored in the power-on variable image area 235b is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data that should be stored in the power-on variable image area 235b is stored when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 6, or the second ball entrance 64
This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image which displays the lottery results performed by the main control unit 110 through a variable presentation when a ball is detected entering the number 0.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231
34 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 677).

Here, the power-on variable image will be described with reference to Fig. 626. Fig. 626 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 transfers image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after power-on, the display control device 114 reads image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 into the power-on main image area 235a.
When the image is transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b, the image is transferred to the resident video RAM 2
The remaining image data to be stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 35.
While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the image data shown in FIG.
When the power is turned on, the main image shown in 26(a) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

At this time, when the display variable pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variable pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variable pattern, is received, the display control device 114 displays the power-on variable image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image, as shown in FIG. 626(b), and the power-on variable image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image, as shown in FIG.
As shown in Fig. 626(c), the power-on variable image of the "X" symbol is displayed alternately in the same position as the "○" symbol during the variable period.Then, the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is determined from the display variable pattern command and the display stop type command sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variable pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "special symbol big win", the image shown in Fig. 626(b) is displayed for a certain period after the variable performance stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Fig. 626(c) is displayed for a certain period after the variable performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can check the operation of the resident video RAM 235 without worrying that the operation is stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
It is possible to wait until the transfer of image data to 35 is completed.

In addition, during operation checks at factories during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, the character R
By using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the OM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

In addition, when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640, the power-on variable image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always stored in the power-on variable image area 235b, and the power-on variable image is displayed as shown in FIG. 626(b) and (c).
The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the images shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 on the third symbol display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b. Therefore, while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the first ball entrance 6
When a ball is detected entering through 4b1, the right first ball entry port 64b2, or the second ball entry port 640, a corresponding variable effect can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 625, the explanation will be continued. The rear image area 235c is the third pattern display device 81
Here, with reference to Fig. 627, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 will be described. Fig. 627 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. Fig. 627(a) shows the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for rear A corresponding to the "town stage".
27(b) shows the rear faces B to D corresponding to the "forest stage,""riverstage," and "sky stage," respectively. Note that, although detailed explanation is omitted, this embodiment also has a rear image (rear face E) corresponding to the "island stage" in addition to the various stages described above.

As shown in FIG. 627, the rear images corresponding to the rear faces A to D are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81.
The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") prepared for each of the backs A to D are configured so that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images covering the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When a change in the type of the back surface is determined based on a back surface type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to the "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 first sets the area between position a and position a' of the corresponding back surface image as the initial position of the display area, and displays the image at the initial position on the third pattern display device 81.
The image controller 237 is controlled. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches an image between positions c and d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

On the other hand, the rear image (island stage) on the rear surface E is arranged in a predetermined order (
For example, in the order of the first display mode, the second display mode, the third display mode, the fourth display mode, etc.
The third symbol display device 81 displays the image of a mountain towering over an island on the back surface E.
An image of a sandy beach at the foot of a mountain and an image of the sea surrounding an island are displayed at fixed positions on a third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky above the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", an image of an orange sky indicating a morning glow (first display mode) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface E. Then, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to a vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, an image of a vivid blue sky indicating daytime (second display mode) is displayed. Next, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from the vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has passed, an image of a black sky indicating night (
Then, an image of the sky in which the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white over time (fourth display mode) is displayed. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the image of the sky in the first display mode (image of the sky in orange color tone) is displayed again on the third pattern display device 81 in a predetermined order.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described.
, the image data for the entire range of the rear face A, that is, corresponding to positions a to d, is all stored in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Usually, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the "town stage," is displayed, so by making all the image data for the rear face A corresponding to the frequently displayed "town stage" resident in the rear face image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, back B corresponds to the "forest stage", back C corresponds to the "river stage", and
The back surface D corresponding to the "empty stage" is a part of the back surface, as shown in FIG. 627(b).
That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the resident video RAM 23.
In addition, for the back image E corresponding to the island stage, image data corresponding to a back image (a back image whose color tone changes gradually) between predetermined background images (first display mode, second display mode) is stored in the resident video RAM 235c during the start-up process after the power is turned on.
The image data is stored and resides in the rear image area 235c of the image forming apparatus 235.

In order to instantly change the rear image, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. However, this would require a RAM with a very large capacity to be used as the resident video RAM 235.
This may lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is first displayed when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a' (or the range between the first display mode and the second display mode for the back surface E), and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including that initial position (or the image in the range between the first display mode and the second display mode for the back surface E) is stored in the back surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, when a change of the stage is determined by a lottery at the start of the change, the image data resident in the back surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be used to instantly display the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D on the third pattern display device 81, and the display can be made to scroll or change color over time. Also, for the rear faces B to D, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in costs can be suppressed.

In addition, for the rear faces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using image data resident in rear image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the images from position b' to position d is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236.
The range from position a to position b is set. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that after scrolling the range from position a to position b using image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 to display it on the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, for rear face E, the range of the first to second display modes is set so that, after an image in the initial position is displayed, while images in the first to second display modes are being displayed using image data resident in rear face image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, transfer of image data of images corresponding to the second to third display modes and the third to fourth display modes from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, while images in the first to second display modes are being displayed, transfer of image data corresponding to the images in the second to third display modes and the third to fourth display modes can be completed in normal video RAM 236.
36, after the images in the first display mode to the second display mode are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the images in the second display mode to the third display mode and the third display mode to the fourth display mode are sequentially displayed over time using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay.
It can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

For rear faces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 625) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear images can be displayed reliably.

In addition, in the rear faces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other in the image data corresponding to the image between the position b' and the position b.
Under the control of the image controller 237 by 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth transition.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions c and d as a display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, and then the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions a and a' as a display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

Returning to FIG. 625, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is a third symbol display device 81
In other words, the third pattern area 235d is an area for storing image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns.
When performing a variable performance in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly in the third pattern display device 81.
It is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which a variable presentation is not immediately started in the third pattern display device 81 even though a variable presentation has already started in the first pattern display device 37 after a ball has entered the ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to main symbols that are not numbered "0" to "9", such as a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, and a main symbol consisting of a rear symbol and an additional symbol imitating a character such as a plane, a furoshiki, or a helmet, are also stored. These image data are used for a demo performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo performance. Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters including a "boy", an "old man", and a "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is stored in the character symbol area 235e.
When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 stores the character design in the character ROM 234.
Instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image controller 237 can draw a specific image by reading out image data that is resident in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235.
Even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the memory 34, the character design can be changed instantly.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the type of the error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error.
Since image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 can display the following based on the received error command:
By reading out image data that is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, each error message image can be instantly drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to an error message from the character ROM 234, and therefore eliminates the need to read out image data corresponding to an error message from the character ROM 234.
Even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the memory 34, an error message corresponding to the error command can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

MPU 231 instructs image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area in which the type of image data should be stored, among the sub-areas provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236. In response to this, image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by MPU 231 from character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified sub-area of image storage area 236a via buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 develops one frame of image in the frame buffer by writing one frame of image drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and while developing the image in one frame buffer, reads out one frame of image information developed earlier from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out an image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer, and outputs the image to the third pattern display device 81.
The image of one frame that has been read out can be displayed on the LCD.

The frame buffer that develops one frame of image and the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read out to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are as follows:
Every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image.
When the frame buffer 236b is specified, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, ...b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233d, a data table storage area 233e, a program storage area 233f, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a program storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233d, a data table storage area 233e, a data table storage area 233f, a data table storage area 233b, a data table storage area 233c, a data table storage area 233d, a data table storage area 233e
j, rear image change flag 233w, rear image discrimination flag 233x, demo display flag 233
y, and has at least a confirmation display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs from the character ROM 234, transfers them to the work RAM 233, and stores them in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter
As described above, the work RA executes various controls using the control program stored in the work RA.
Since M233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed.
Even if the control program is stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complex presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

The data table storage area 233b is an area which stores a display data table which describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance which is displayed based on a command from the main control unit 110, and a transfer data table which specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance which is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RA in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.
M233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU
231 performs the third calculation using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b.
It controls the display of the pattern display device 81. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, the various data tables will be described in detail. First, the display data table is
One is prepared for each performance mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control unit 110, and for example, display data tables corresponding to variable performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The variable performance is a performance that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating the miss is finally stopped and displayed, while if the stop type of the variable performance is a jackpot A to a jackpot D, the stop pattern indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now enter a special game state and that the large opening, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, the round effect is an effect to inform the player of the number of rounds that will now begin, and the ending effect is an effect to inform the player of the end of the special game state.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is displayed frozen and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening performance, the round performance, the ending performance, and the demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for each variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time in correspondence with an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed in the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, and also specifies drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the type of sprite.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite is to be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to the magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is information for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through the image. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information for specifying the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined for each address include one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and drawing information for each sprite such as characters used for various effects such as boy images and letters.
One or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type is displayed as one of the rears A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", or "island stage");
Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from the rear images A to E is described.
When specifying that a rear image different from rear images A to E is to be displayed, the rear image type also includes information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the rear faces A to E is to be displayed based on the rear face type, it determines the rear face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the rear faces A to E as the drawing target, and determines the range of the rear face image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a rear face image different from the rear faces A to E is to be displayed, it determines the rear face image to be displayed based on the rear face type.

In this embodiment, the case where only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the back image that was displayed at the stage when the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information includes, depending on the type of the rear surface, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed and information indicating the time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed.
The display may indicate either the information indicating the elapsed time since the display of the third pattern display device 81 was started, or the type information of the position information together with the back surface type and position information (for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or drawing of an image based on a display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81)
Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) are described with symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The reason for specifying the offset information rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol is that the display of the third symbol in the variable performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous variable performance and the stop symbol of the current variable performance, and the symbol offset information from the start of the change until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is recorded. This allows the fluctuation performance to be stopped at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third pattern is assigned a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third pattern, and by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the predetermined time for switching the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance is set to be the time during which the third symbol is displayed variably at high speed. While the third symbol is displayed variably at high speed, the third symbol is not visible to the player, so that even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance during that time, so that the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H", describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 628) describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table.
For each address between the address containing the information, there is written a drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table.

The MPU 231 controls the voice and lamp control device 11 based on commands from the main control device 110.
The display data table to be used is selected according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) sent from the third pattern display device 81, and the selected display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, while the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time a drawing process for one frame is completed, and the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 630) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this manner, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 controls the main control device 110
A command (e.g.,
Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in accordance with a display variable pattern command, etc., the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed by simply performing the simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d.

Here, if the system is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in conventional pachinko machines, the processing load for starting and executing the program, which becomes complicated and voluminous as the effect images become more diverse, is large, and this limits the processing capacity of the display control device 114, which may result in a limit to the diversification of the effect images that can be controlled.
By simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
It can be displayed as 1.

The reason why a display data table is prepared in this way corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is that in the pachinko machine 10, the presentation to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the results of a lottery held based on the start winning. In contrast, in gaming machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode as described above. In this way, a configuration in which a display data table is prepared in this way corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is a feature of the pachinko machine 10.
This can only be realized by the configuration in which the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery held based on the initial winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table.
It is prepared in accordance with the display data table prepared for each performance, as described above.
Image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table that are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the character ROM 23.
4 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof.

If all image data of sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, which makes it possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table stores transfer data information for image data of a sprite (hereinafter referred to as "image data to be transferred") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table (address "
(These are "0001H" and "0097H"). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, Null data is specified, which means that there is no transfer target image data at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (see FIG. 62).
9, address "0002H" is the relevant address).

The transfer data information includes the character ROM in which the transfer target image data is stored.
the start address (the start address of the source) and the end address (the end address of the source) of H.234,
And the top address of the destination (normal video RAM 236) is included.

In addition, in the first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described, as in the display data table, and in the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 629), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, in each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is described.

The MPU 231 controls the voice and lamp control device 11 based on commands from the main control device 110.
630, which will be described later, is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite, which should be transferred at that time, is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 629, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the corresponding address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237.
If the address is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should begin there. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the generated drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to the specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite is started in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table,
Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a can be used to draw a specified sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is reliably transferred to the character ROM 23 at the desired timing.
4 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the transfer data table, a character RO is
The transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the M234 to the normal video RAM 236. This allows the transfer of the image data to be managed for each sprite, and
Since the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be controlled on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in the load imposed by the transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

In addition, the transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and specifies transfer data information for image data to be transferred, which should begin to be transferred at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table, in correspondence with that address. Therefore, the timing for starting transfer can be instructed so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Fig. 626 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Fig. 626 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c indicates that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image is stored in the power-on main image area 23 of the resident video RAM.
5a or the power-on variable image area 235b, it is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 677) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 677). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7605 in FIG. 689(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see FIG. 679).
(b) S6301), if the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (FIG. 679 (
On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the main control device 110
In response to a command sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from
A command determination process (see FIGS. 680 to 685) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 686 to 688) are executed so that various images can be displayed.

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 689(a)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 689(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 69(a)) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.
0).

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110.
Based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, the U231
The performance mode to be displayed on the pattern display device 81 is determined, a display data table corresponding to the performance mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 630) which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 for each frame, based on the drawing contents specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 630) which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while incrementing the pointer 233f by one. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that when all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared, so the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, is specified (
That is, if no null data is written), a drawing list (see FIG. 630) which describes image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame is written.
The transfer data information is added to the

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is for designating an address for acquiring the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once in accordance with the storage of the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 679(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 688) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 630) described later, and also specifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
At that time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should start is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

As a result, the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed.
Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in drawing a sprite is always stored in the image storage area 236a until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table.
In this way, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to Fig. 630. Fig. 630 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of image. As shown in Fig. 630,
The background image used in the frame image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects (effect 1, effect 2, ...), characters (character 1, character 2,
For each sprite, such as a reserved ball number pattern 1, a reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., an error pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes predetermined image data stored in the character ROM 234 for the image controller 237.
Transfer data information for transferring data from the video RAM 236 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored.
M236) and its address are described, and the image controller 237
The image data of the sprite is obtained from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes the display position coordinates,
The information includes the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information, and the image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter designation information using a method designated by the information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates.The image controller 237 then writes the drawn image to the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.
36c.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, or a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the sprite (display object) data is stored in the RAM
The type and address are generated according to the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed.
Depending on the sprite type, U231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 selects, in one frame of image,
Rearrange the sprites in order from the sprite that should be placed in the back to the sprite that should be placed in the front.
Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite is described. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the background image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at an address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (character RO in which the transfer target image data is stored) to the transfer data table buffer 233e.
The image controller 237 adds to the end of the drawing list the storage start address and storage end address in M234 and the storage start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the image data to be transferred is to be stored. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 adds to the end of the drawing list the transfer data information in the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information.
The image data is read from a predetermined area (an area indicated by the starting address and ending address of the storage source) of the normal video RAM 236 and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the presentation time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed, the time counter 2 is started every time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 679(b)) is executed by the MPU 231.
33h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 686).
When the value of 3h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 resets the display data table buffer 233d
It is determined that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in has ended, and various processes that should be performed in accordance with the end of the effect are executed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates whether the corresponding image data is stored in the resident video RAM 23.
5, the flag indicates the storage state, which indicates whether image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 or not.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is set by the MPU 23 during main processing when the power is turned on.
The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred corresponding to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 690) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Moreover, image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF".

Furthermore, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i to determine whether or not the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 690). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 690) and the image controller 237 is made to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer process for that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data from being stored in the character ROM.
This makes it possible to suppress transfer of the image data from the display control device 114 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each section of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is used to select from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer") into which an image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded.
When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, information on this designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 691).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which an image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded in the designated drawing target buffer.
7, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, reads out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a display process to display an image on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". In this way, the drawing target buffer is updated to the first frame buffer 236b every time a drawing list is sent.
The drawing list is transmitted every time the MPU 231 executes the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see S6306 in FIG. 679(b)) based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image.
When the frame buffer 236b is specified, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, while at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. If the rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 685(a)). In addition, the rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 690), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 690). This allows the rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the performance mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be displayed.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the rear image type that is set. This flag is, for example, composed of one byte, and each bit corresponds to each rear image type. If any bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear image type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current rear image type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that rear image A is set. When the rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to on (see S7002 in FIG. 685(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The rear image discrimination flag 233x can easily identify the currently set rear image type.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demo effect is being performed. When the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that a demo effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that a demo effect is not being performed. In the display setting process (see FIG. 686), the demo display flag 233y is set on when a demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S7221 in FIG. 686), and is set off when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 681(a), S6705 in FIG. 682(a), S6805 in FIG. 682(b), and S6905 in FIG. 683). The demo display flag 233y
This makes it easy to determine whether or not a demo is currently being performed.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag that indicates whether or not a confirmation display effect is being executed.
Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stopped symbols are displayed stationary (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the variable pattern. If this fixed display flag 233z is on, it means that the fixed display effect is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the fixed display effect is not in progress. The fixed display flag 233z is set on when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 686) (S7214 in FIG. 686), and is set off when a display data table other than the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7215 in FIG. 681(a)).
6505, S6705 in FIG. 682(a), S6805 in FIG. 682(b), and S6 in FIG.
(See 905.) This confirmation display flag 233z makes it easy to determine whether or not the confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to the flowcharts of FIG. 631 to FIG. 661, the MP in the main control unit 110
The control processes executed by the MPU 201 will be described below. The processes executed by the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into a start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, a main process which is executed after the start-up process, a timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and a timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment).
and NMI interrupt processing which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the MI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the start-up processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 631 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101
That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switches is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and
When the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0.
The updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are updated (
S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2,
Stop type selection counter C3, second win random number counter C4, and small win type counter C5
and the counter values are increased by one and set to their maximum values (in this embodiment,
When the counters C1 to C5 reach their respective counter values (999, 199, 239, 239, 99), they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is performed.
A special symbol variation process is executed to set a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). After that, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 (start winning),
Entry of a ball into the ball entry port 64b2 (starting entry) or entry of a ball into the second ball entry port 640 (starting entry)
The start winning process is executed in accordance with the above (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107).
The through-gate passing process will be described in detail later with reference to Figs. 651 and 652. After the through-gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is executed by detecting that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 5.
This is a process for determining whether or not to launch the ball, on the condition that the launch switch 51a detects the launch status and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the launch of the ball is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, with reference to Fig. 632, the special symbol variation process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. Fig. 632 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104).
In step S104 of step S2, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined based on the acquired counter values, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in the determined variable display mode by a predetermined control. The third special symbol display device 81 is controlled to display the variable display mode.
Various commands are set to execute the variable display performance of the symbol and the fourth symbol, and control is executed to stop and display the display mode showing the judgment result (win/lose judgment result). The special symbol variable process (S104 in FIG. 632) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), first, during a jackpot game (during a jackpot)
In this step, it is determined whether the current game state is a big win game (big win game) or a small win game (small win game) based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203k.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the player is in the big win or small win state (S20
1: Yes), and this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S201, if it is determined that the player is not in a big win or small win state (S201: No), it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203r is greater than 0, that is, whether the first special pattern is being displayed changeably (S202). If it is determined that the first special pattern is being displayed changeably (the value of the special pattern 1 change time counter 203r is greater than 0) (S202: Yes), the first special pattern change execution process is executed (S204).

In this first special symbol variation execution process (S204), a process is executed to change (update) the variation display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 during the period when the first special symbol is varying. Details of this first special symbol variation execution process (S204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 638. Then, when the process of S204 is completed, next, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r updated in the first special symbol variation execution process (S204) is 0 (S205), and if it is determined that the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is 0 (S205: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S206), and the process proceeds to S207 described later.

In the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), when the variation time specified for the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed, a process is executed to stop the variation display with the symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol. In addition, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, a process is executed to stop and display the second special symbol during the execution in a display mode showing a miss. Furthermore, when the second special symbol during the execution wins a jackpot, a process is executed to erase information about the jackpot. Details of this first special symbol variation stop process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 639. In addition, when it is determined in the process of S205 that the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is not 0 (S205: No), the process of S206 is skipped and the process proceeds to S207.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S202 that the special pattern 1 change time counter 203r is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S202: No), that is, if it is determined that the first special pattern is not currently changing, then the first special pattern change start processing is executed (S203).
In this first special symbol variation start process (S203), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a determination is made as to whether a new lottery (variation) can be executed, and if a new lottery (variation) can be executed,
The process of starting the first special symbol variation (S203) is shown in FIG.
This will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 33 to 637.

After the first special symbol variation start process (S203) is executed, or in the process of S205, when it is determined that the first special symbol is varying (S205: No), or after the first special symbol variation stop process (S206) is executed, the variation process (S
207 to S211).

First, it is determined whether the value of the special chart 2 variable time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S207
In other words, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is currently being changed. In the process of S207, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203s is not greater than 0, that is, the change of the second special symbol is not being executed (S207: No),
The special pattern variation start process is executed (S208), and this process is terminated.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S212), the second special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203
If reserved data (various counter values) are stored in the memory 10, the jackpot determination and the selection process of the variation pattern are executed based on the reserved data. In addition, the second special symbol variation start process (S
In step 212), if the lottery result is a jackpot, the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to ON.

On the other hand, in the process of S207, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 variation time counter 203s is greater than 0, that is, the second special pattern is currently varying (S207: Yes),
Next, the second special symbol variation process is executed (S207). The contents of this second special symbol variation process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG.
This is a process similar to the special symbol change in progress process (S204), but the process target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol.

Then, when the second special symbol variation execution process (S209) is completed, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s is 0 (S209), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s is 0, that is, if it is determined that it is not the timing to stop the variation of the second special symbol (S214: Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S211).
Then, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S210, the special chart 2 variable time counter 2
If it is determined that the value of 03s is not 0 (S210: No), the process of S211 is skipped and this process ends.

The second special symbol variation stop process (S211) will be described later with reference to FIG.
As in the first special symbol variation stop process (S209), when the variation time specified for the second special symbol during the variation display has elapsed, a process is executed to stop the variation display with the symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. Also, in the second special symbol variation stop process (S211), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, a process is executed to forcibly stop and display the first special symbol variation during the execution in a display mode showing a miss. Furthermore, when the first special symbol during the execution wins a jackpot, a process is executed to erase information about the jackpot.

As described above with reference to FIG. 632, in this embodiment, the selection (variation) of the first special symbol and the selection (variation) of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously (in parallel),
A variation process (S202 to S206) regarding a first special symbol in one special symbol variation process;
The game is configured to execute a variation process (S207 to S211) for the second special symbol. Therefore, when a new lottery (variation) can be performed for each special symbol, the variation process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process for the first special symbol is executed before (given priority to) the variation process for the second special symbol. In this way, by clearly setting the processing priority of each special symbol, even if the variation stop timing of the first special symbol and the variation stop timing of the second special symbol are the same, the variation stop processing of the first special symbol is executed with priority.

In this embodiment, the variable processing related to the first special pattern is configured to be executed with priority over the variable processing related to the second special pattern, but without being limited to this, the variable processing related to the second special pattern may be configured to be executed with priority over the variable processing related to the first special pattern.

In addition, the variable processing for the special symbol type for which a lottery advantageous to the player is executed in the set game state may be configured to be executed with priority, and if the pachinko machine 10 switches the special symbol type for which a lottery advantageous to the player is executed according to the set game state, it is preferable to provide a means for switching the order of the special symbol types for which the variable processing is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery advantageous to the player from being erased (discarded) by the lottery result disadvantageous to the player.

Next, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), will be described with reference to FIG. 633. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol variation start process (S203 in FIG. 633), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is acquired (S301), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not greater than 0 (S302: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S302,
When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303).

Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls after subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in order (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved area 1 to execution area, reserved area 2 to reserved area 1, reserved area 3 to reserved area 2, and reserved area 4 to reserved area 3.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 634) will be described in detail later, but using the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), a jackpot determination is executed based on the set game state.

Next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value based on the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), which will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of S307, it is next determined whether or not the value of the time-saving counter 203m is greater than 0 (S308). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is not greater than 0 (S308: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S308, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is greater than 0 (S308: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203m is 1 (S309). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is 1 (S309: Yes), the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is set to ON (S310), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S309, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is not 1 (S309: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the first special symbol big win determination process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S203 in FIG. 633), will be described with reference to FIG. 634. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol big win determination process (S306).

In the first special symbol big win determination process (S306 in FIG. 634), first, each counter value stored in the execution area (not shown) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is set to ON (S402).

In this embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are configured to be executed simultaneously. Then, after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, when the special symbol variation is executed a specified number of times, the game state is shifted to the low probability state of the normal symbol. In the process of S402, if it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is on, the final variation of the high probability state of the normal symbol has started in the variation of the second special symbol, so a process is executed to shift the game state to the low probability state of the normal symbol.

In the process of S402, if it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is on (S402: Yes), data indicating the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203k (S403), and the time-saving end waiting flag 203j and the time-saving flag 203f are set to off (S404). Next, the value of the time-saving counter 203m is set to 0 (S405), and the value of the time-saving limit counter 203i is set to 0 (S406). Then, a command indicating that the game state has transitioned to the normal state is set (S407), and the process proceeds to S408.

On the other hand, in the process of S402, the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is not on, that is,
When it is determined that the final variation of the high probability state of the normal symbol has not started in the variation of the second special symbol (S402: No), the process of S403 to S407 is skipped and the process of S408 is performed.
Then proceed to processing.

In the process of S408, in order to determine whether the current game state is a high probability state of a special symbol (first probability state, second probability state), it is determined whether the probability flag 203g is set to ON (S408). If it is determined that the probability flag 203g is ON (i.e., a high probability state of a special symbol) (S408: Yes), the first winning random number table 202a
Based on this (see Figure 612 (a)), it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S401 matches the jackpot determination value for the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S409).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special probability flag 203g is off (i.e., the special pattern is in a low probability state) (S408: No), based on the first win random number table 202a (see Figure 612 (a)), it is determined whether the value of the first win random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S410).

After the process of S409 or S410 is completed, next, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S409 or S410, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S411). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S411: Yes),
The special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203na, which indicates a jackpot win of the first special symbol, is set to ON (
S406).

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big win (S413), and the big win symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the win type counter C2 (S414), and the value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area 20.
3t (S415), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S411 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S411: No), the special chart 1 miss variation process is executed (S416), and this process is terminated. Details of the special chart 1 miss variation process (S416) will be described later with reference to FIG. 635.

Next, referring to Fig. 635, the special symbol 1 miss variation process (S416), which is one process of the first special symbol big win determination process (S306 in Fig. 634), will be described. Fig. 635 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol 1 miss variation process (S416).

In the special symbol 1 miss variation processing (S416), first, it is determined whether the current lottery result (the lottery result obtained in the processing of S409 or S410 of the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see S306 in FIG. 634)) is a small win (S501).

If it is determined in the processing of S501 that a small win has been won (S501: Yes), the small win flag 203p is set to on (S502), the lottery result of the first special pattern is set to a small win (S503), and then the small win pattern of the first special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S504), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the result of this lottery is not a small win, i.e., a miss (S501: No), the losing pattern of the first special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set (S505), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the special symbol 1 miss variation process (S416 in FIG. 635) executed as one process of the first special symbol big win determination process (S306 in FIG. 634), the variation of the special symbol (
When it is determined that a small prize has been won in the process executed at the timing when the small prize draw is started, the small prize flag 203p is set to ON, so that the process corresponding to the small prize win can be easily executed based on the setting status of the small prize flag 203p at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol stops.

Next, referring to Fig. 636, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S203 in Fig. 633), will be described. Fig. 636 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 636), first, the lottery result obtained in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 634) is determined to be a jackpot for the first special symbol, that is, whether the jackpot for the first special symbol is set (S601). Here, the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203na is on. This special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203na
is set to ON when the variation currently being executed is a jackpot in the processing of S412 in the first special pattern jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 634) described above.

When it is determined that the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a jackpot (S601: Yes),
The first winning type counter CS2 acquired from the first winning type selection table 202b
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S601 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big win (S601: No),
Then, a special chart 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S603) is executed, and processing proceeds to S604.
A detailed explanation of this special chart 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S603) will be provided later with reference to Figure 637.

After executing the process of S602 or S603, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained (S60
4), the game state (normal state, time-saving state,
Based on the information on the first probability variable state, the second probability variable state, and the setting status of the probability variable limit arrival flag 203u and the time-saving limit arrival flag 203v, the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203
The fluctuation pattern scenario stored in w is read out (S605).

Next, the fluctuation pattern table 202d to be referenced this time is read based on the fluctuation pattern scenario read in the process of S605 (S606).
The fluctuation pattern table read in the process of 6 is the normal fluctuation pattern table 20
2d1 (S607). If it is determined that the read fluctuation pattern table is the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (S607: Yes), it is determined whether the special state flag 203x is on (S608). If it is determined that the special state flag 203x is on (S608: Yes), the special state flag 203x is set to off (S609), and the process proceeds to S610, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S607, the read fluctuation pattern table is not the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (S
If the result of the process in S607 is No, or if the process in S608 determines that the special state flag 203x is not on (S608: No), the process proceeds to S610, which will be described later.

In the first embodiment, when the special state flag 203x is set to ON, that is, when the special mode is set in the normal state, the game is executed by right-hand play. Therefore, even if right-hand play is performed in the normal state, the notification command indicating the firing abnormality is not set (FIG. 652
(See S107 below).

Then, when it is determined that the selection process of the variation pattern is to be executed by referring to the normal variation pattern table 202d1, that is, when it is determined that the special mode has ended, the process of setting the special state flag 203x to OFF is executed (S609). By configuring in this way, when the special mode ends and transitions to the normal state (normal mode) and a special symbol variation is executed, it is possible to set a notification command indicating a firing abnormality based on right-hand hitting play. As a result, when the game state is changed from the special mode to the normal mode without being changed, and the player continues to play right-hand hitting without noticing the mode change, a notification command indicating a firing abnormality (for example, "Please return to left hitting") is not issued.
(display of the display) can be performed.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right area in a state where right-hand play is not required, a command indicating a launch abnormality is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a determination means capable of determining that the special state flag 203x has been set to OFF may be provided, and when the determination means determines that the special state flag 203x has been set to OFF, a display mode of "Please return to left-hand play" may be displayed as a guide notification mode for guiding the player to the play method. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the play method has been switched before the abnormality notification is executed, making it easier for the player to play appropriately.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 636, a process is configured to execute to set the special state flag 203x to off based on the start of the first special pattern variation after the special mode ends, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the special state flag 203x may be configured to be set to off when the final variation in the special mode is displayed as stopped.

In this case, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 636), the special symbol variation for which the variation pattern is set this time is the final variation of the special mode (the final variation for which the variation pattern is set by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d5 (special symbol variation count 1000
A discrimination means is provided for discriminating whether the special pattern variation for which a variation pattern is currently set is the final variation of the special mode, and if the discrimination means determines that the special pattern variation for which a variation pattern is currently set is the final variation of the special mode, a processing instruction for setting the special state flag 203x to OFF can be set when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the control processing executed when the special pattern change is displayed as stopped, rather than the first special pattern change pattern selection processing (S307 in FIG. 636), if it is determined that the special pattern change displayed as stopped this time is the final change in the special mode, a processing to set the special state flag 203x to off may be executed.

In this way, the special state flag 20 is set at the timing when the final variation of the special mode is stopped and displayed.
By executing the process of setting 3x to off, for example, when there is a vacant period between the end of the final variation in a special mode and the execution of the next special pattern variation, it is possible to set an alarm command indicating a firing abnormality even for right-hand play during that vacant period.

In the process of S610, the fluctuation pattern table 202 read out in the process of S606 is
Based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the processing of S604, a variation pattern of the first special pattern to be executed this time is selected (S610), and a special pattern 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S611).

Next, a special symbol 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S612),
The first symbol display device 37 sets the start of the first special symbol variation (S613), and sets the value indicating the variation time of the selected variation pattern to the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203r (S614).
), and then this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 637, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 636)
) The special chart 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S603), which is one of the processes, will be explained. Figure 637 is a flowchart showing the special chart 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (S603).
In this special pattern 1 miss variation pattern selection process (S603), when the result of the lottery for the variation of the first special pattern to be executed is a small win, a process for selecting a small win type is executed.

In the special pattern 1 miss variation pattern selection process (S603), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the variation of the first special pattern executed this time is a small win or not (S701). If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win (S701: No), the lottery result is a miss, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the first special symbol executed this time is a small win (S701: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a
The value of the small win type counter C5 stored in the execution area is obtained (S702).
Then, the type of small win to be executed this time is selected based on the value of the small win type counter C5 acquired in the process of S702 (S703), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 632, the first special symbol variation execution process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), will be described. FIG. 632 is a flow chart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (S204). In this first special symbol variation execution process (S204), a process for updating the variation time of the variation of the special symbol being executed is executed.

In the first special symbol variation execution process (S204), the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is subtracted and updated (S801), and the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (
S802) and terminate this process.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation execution process (
The process is configured to execute the process (see S204 in FIG. 638) and to update (subtract) the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r in the process during the first special symbol variation (see S204 in FIG. 638). Therefore, for example, when a variation time of 30 seconds is set as the variation time of the first special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is set to "15000", and the value is subtracted by 1 every 2 milliseconds.

Next, referring to FIG. 639, the first special symbol change stop process (S206), which is one process in the special symbol change process (S104 in FIG. 632), will be described. FIG. 639 is a flowchart showing the contents of this first special symbol change stop process (S206). This first special symbol change stop process (S206) updates the process to stop the change of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and executes a process to update the time-saving state. Also, when the lottery result of the change of the first special symbol being executed is a hit, a process is executed to forcefully stop the change of the second special symbol being executed as a miss.

When the first special symbol variation stop process (S206 in FIG. 639) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 big win flag 203na is set to on (S901). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 big win flag 203na is set to on (S901: Yes),
Execute a process for forcibly stopping the variation of the second special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S902). If it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s is greater than 0 (S902: Y
es), set the special chart 2 variation stop flag 203o to on (S903), and set a special chart 2 variation stop command indicating that the special chart 2 variation stop flag 203o has been turned on (S904)
.

Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol (S905), and the value of the special symbol 2 variable time counter 203s is set to 0 (S906). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win, the variable display of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) being executed can be stopped and displayed (determined display) in a display mode indicating a loss (losing symbol).

After completing the processing of S906, it is next determined whether the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to ON (S907). If it is determined that the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to ON (S907: Yes), the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to OFF (S908) in order to adapt the lottery result of the first special pattern to the second special pattern that was forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss in the processing of S905 described above, the stored information for the special chart 2 jackpot is deleted (S909), and the processing proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, in the process of S907, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 big win flag 203nb is off, that is, the big win has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol (S907: No
), the processes of S908 and S909 are skipped and the process proceeds to S910.
In the process of S902, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 variation time counter 203s is not greater than 0 (S902: No), the variation of the second special pattern has not been executed and there is no need to forcibly stop the variation result of the second special pattern due to a miss, so the processes of S903 to S909 are skipped and the process proceeds to S910.

In the process of S910, first, a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type won by the variation of the first special symbol (S910), and then the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203n is set.
a, the time-saving end waiting flag 203j, the time-saving flag 203f, the special chance flag 203g, the special chance limit reached flag 203u, the time-saving limit reached flag 203v, and the special state flag 203x are set to OFF, and the value of the time-saving counter 203m is reset (S911).

Then, the game status storage area 203k stores information indicating that the current game status is a jackpot (a jackpot game in progress) (S912). The game status storage area 203k is configured to store game statuses related to lottery games (normal state, time-saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state) and game statuses related to winning games (a jackpot, a small win) separately, and by executing the process of S912, the game statuses related to lottery games at the time of winning a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state) and the game status indicating a jackpot are stored. By configuring in this way, the game status set at the time of winning the jackpot can be determined at the end of the jackpot game.

After completing the processing of S912, next, a special pattern 1 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to stop the confirmation of the first special pattern (S913), and a process is executed to stop the changing display of the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 37 at the jackpot pattern (S914), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S901, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 big win flag 203na is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the result of the change in the first special symbol being executed this time is not a big win (S901: No), the special symbol 1 miss stop process (S915) is executed. For a detailed explanation of the special symbol 1 miss stop process (S915), please refer to FIG.
As will be described later, a process for stopping the variation of the first special symbol when the variation result of the first special symbol is a small win or a miss is performed. Next, a time-saving update process (S916) is performed and this process is terminated. A detailed explanation of the time-saving update process (S916) will be described later with reference to FIG. 642.

In this way, in the first special symbol variation stop process (S206), the first special symbol is selected (the first
A process (S910 to S914) is executed to stop the changing display with a symbol showing the result of the lottery game. Also, if the result of the current lottery is a jackpot (S901: Yes), the changing second special symbol is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result is a miss (S905). In this way, by configuring the process to stop one special symbol with a symbol showing a jackpot (determined display) and to forcibly stop the other special symbol that is changing, it is possible to execute appropriate processing for multiple special symbol changes that are executed simultaneously.

In other words, in a configuration in which a variable processing for a first special pattern and a variable processing for a second special pattern are executed in sequence, like the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable processing for the second special pattern (forced stop processing) which is executed based on the lottery result for the first special pattern is executed within the variable processing for the first special pattern, so that the second special pattern can be forced to stop at a timing when the variable processing for the second special pattern is not being executed, thereby preventing the processing for the second special pattern from overlapping and enabling the processing to be executed smoothly.

In this embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped as a symbol indicating a miss. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that one special symbol has won a jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 634) (S411 in FIG. 634: Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped as a miss. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly stopped as a miss to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot during the period until the jackpot variation of the one special symbol ends.
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice that when a jackpot is won with one special symbol, the variation of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from figuring out whether or not a jackpot has been won by determining that the variation of the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped.

In addition, when controlling the variation of one special symbol in progress based on the lottery result of the other special symbol, the content of the variation control may be configured to be different depending on the lottery result of the other special symbol in progress. For example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and the second special symbol is in the midst of a variation (loss variation) to indicate that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, the lottery result is discarded and a forced stop process is executed to forcibly stop the loss variation.
When the lottery result of the special pattern is changing (winning change) to indicate a winning (big win, small win), the device may be configured to execute an interruption process so that the variation of the second special pattern can be resumed after the big win game of the first special pattern has ended.

In this case, after the big win game of the first special symbol is over, the player can be made to play while being interested in whether a new second special symbol variation will be executed or the interrupted second special symbol variation will be resumed. Furthermore, when using such a configuration, it is preferable to configure it so that a suggestion performance is executed to suggest to the player the status of the second special symbol (interrupted or not) during the big win game of the first special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 640, the special pattern 1 miss stop process (S915), which is one process in the first special pattern variation stop process (S206), will be described. FIG. 640 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special pattern 1 miss stop process (S915). This special pattern 1 miss stop process (S915
) executes a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol when the result of the lottery for the variation of the first special symbol executed is a small win or a miss.

In the special symbol 1 miss stop process (S915), first, it is determined whether the small win flag 203p is on or not (S1001). If the small win flag 203p is on, that is, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a small win (S1001: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the special symbol 2 change time counter 203s is greater than 0, that is, whether the change of the second special symbol is being executed (S1002).

In the process of S1002, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 variation time counter 203s is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the variation of the second special pattern is being executed (S
1002: Yes), execute special pattern 2 discard processing (S1003), and proceed to processing of S1004. A detailed explanation of this special pattern 2 discard processing (S1003) will be described later with reference to FIG. 641, but similar to the case where a jackpot is won by the variation of the first special pattern, a process for forcibly stopping the variation of the second special pattern due to a miss is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1002, if it is determined that the value of the second special pattern variation time counter 203s is not greater than 0 (S1002: No), the variation of the second special pattern has not been executed, so the processing of S1003 is skipped and the processing proceeds to processing of S1004.

Here, with reference to FIG. 641, the special drawing 2 discarding process (S1003), which is one process in the special drawing 1 miss stop process (S915), will be described. FIG. 641 shows the special drawing 2 discarding process (S10
This is a flowchart showing the contents of the special drawing 2 discarding process (S1003).
When a small win is won in the lottery of the special symbols, a process is executed for forcibly stopping the variation of the second special symbol as a miss when the variation of the small win is stopped.

In the special symbol 2 discarding process (S1003), first, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S1101), and then a special symbol 2 variation stop command indicating that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is ON is set (S1102). Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a miss symbol (S1103), and the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203s is set to 0 (S1104). As a result, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win, the variation display of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) being executed can be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating a miss (miss symbol).

After completing the processing of S1104, it is next determined whether the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to on (S1105). If it is determined that the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to on (S1105: Yes), the special chart 2 jackpot flag 203nb is set to off (S1106) in order to adapt the lottery result of the second special pattern to the second special pattern that was forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss in the processing of S1103 described above, and the stored information for the special chart 2 jackpot is deleted (S1107), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, the special chart 2 big win flag 203nb is off,
That is, if it is determined that the second special symbol has not won the big win (S1105:
If the answer is No, the processes of S1106 and S1107 are skipped, and this process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a big win or a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol being executed can be forcibly stopped by a miss.
When the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a small win, the variation of the second special symbol may be temporarily stopped.

Returning to FIG. 640, the description will be continued. After the process of S1002 or S1003 is executed,
Next, a small win scenario corresponding to the small win type to be executed this time is set (S1004).
Then, the small win flag 203p is set to OFF (S1005). Next, information indicating that a small win is occurring (small win game in progress) is set in the game status storage area 203k (S1006).
The first special symbol display device 37 stops changing the display of the first special symbol at the small winning symbol (S1
007). Then, a special symbol 1 determination command indicating that the variation of the first special symbol has stopped is set (S1008), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if it is determined that the small win flag 203p is not on (S1001: No), the result of the variation of the first special symbol being executed this time is a miss, so the variation display of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped at the miss symbol (S10
09), the above-mentioned processing of S1008 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 642, the time-saving update process (S916), which is one process of the first special symbol variation stop process (see S206 in FIG. 639), will be described. FIG. 642 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving update process (S916). In this time-saving update process (S916),
When the game state is the time-saving state or the first probability variable state, the value of the time-saving counter 203m is updated when the variation of the special symbol stops, and when the end condition is satisfied, the game state is switched to the normal state or the second probability variable state. In the following explanation, the process when the variation of the first special symbol stops will be explained, but the same process is also executed when the target is the second special symbol.

When the time-saving update process (S916) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203m is greater than 0, that is, whether the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed this time is one that started to fluctuate during time-saving play or the first probability variable state (S1201). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is greater than 0, that is, the fluctuation started during time-saving play or the first probability variable state (S1201: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203m is subtracted (S1202). Then, it proceeds to the process of S1203. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, first, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is not greater than 0 (S1201: No), the fluctuation stop that triggers the update of the time-saving state or the first probability variable state is not occurred, so this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1203, it is determined whether the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is on (S12
03). When it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is on (S1203: Yes),
), that is, if the current change of the special symbol is the final change of the time reduction, and the next change has not started since the final change of the time reduction in the second special symbol (the other special symbol), it is time to transition the game state to the normal state, so the time reduction end waiting flag 203
j and the time-saving flag 203f are set to OFF (S1204), and the game status storage area 203k
The normal state is set (S1205), and the process proceeds to S1206.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is not on (S1203: No), the final change of the time-saving game is not being executed, that is, the time-saving state is continuing, so a command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203m and the game state is set (S1206), and this process is terminated. In this way, in a simultaneous change type gaming machine, when the change that is the final change of the time-saving game is stopped, it is determined whether the other special pattern has been changed more than the specified number of times in the time-saving game state (the next change from the final change), and if not, the game state is shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that feels natural.

Next, the second special symbol variation start process (S212), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), will be described with reference to FIG. 643. FIG. 643 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S212).

When the second special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S1301). That is, it is determined whether or not a jackpot was won in the lottery for the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634)) executed immediately before this process (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632)).

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to ON (S1301: Yes), various processes for starting the variation of the second special symbol are skipped, the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is set to OFF (S1309), and this process is terminated. In other words, in this embodiment, by using the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and after the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss symbol, a new second special symbol variation is prohibited. As a result, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation process related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without any malfunction.

In this embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203o is set to on (S1301: Yes), the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203o is set to off. Therefore, by setting the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203o, the second special pattern change start processing (S208 in FIG. 643) can be skipped only once.

This is because, only when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634)) executed immediately before the second special symbol change start process (S208) is executed (within the same special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 632)), the second special symbol change start process (S212 in FIG. 643) executed immediately after the lottery is skipped. After that, a jackpot game is started based on the jackpot information (jackpot scenario) set in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 634), and the second special symbol change start process (see S104 in FIG. 632) is continued until the jackpot game ends by the process of S201 of the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 632).
This is because the special pattern change start process (S208 in FIG. 643) is configured not to be executed.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the variation processing of one special pattern based on the lottery result of the other special pattern, thereby reducing the processing load of the control processing executed by the main control unit 110.

In this embodiment, the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a predetermined lottery result (a big win).
In this case, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (stopped at a losing symbol) and a special symbol 2 change stop flag 203o is set to prevent a new change (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed until a jackpot game based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols is executed, and the change processing of the other special symbol is skipped once, but other configurations may be used.

In other words, if the result of the lottery for one special symbol is a predetermined result (a big win),
It is sufficient to configure so that the other special symbol lottery (variation) does not win a jackpot until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning is completed. For example, a jackpot control process (see FIG. 656) for executing a jackpot game is executed in the main process (see FIG. 655) of the main control device 110 described later.
When step S2404 is executed, the special chart 2 variation stop flag 203o may be configured to be set to off.

By configuring in this way, even if the timing to turn on the special chart 2 variable stop flag 203o is set before the timing when the first special pattern is stopped and displayed as a jackpot pattern,
A new variation (lottery) of the second special symbol can be prohibited from being executed until a big win game is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special pattern variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 643) is executed with the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203o set to on, the variation process of the second special pattern is skipped, that is, a new variation is not started (the second special pattern is kept stopped). However, without being limited to this, the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 20
It may be configured to execute a variable display of a dedicated second special pattern when 3o is set to on.

In this case, a special lottery that does not win a jackpot may be used to draw the second special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed for a period corresponding to a variable pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. Alternatively, the lottery for the second special symbol may be omitted, and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed for a period until a jackpot game based on a jackpot win of the first special symbol is executed, a period until a specific timing during the jackpot game is reached, or a period until the jackpot game ends.
The display may be configured to variably display the special symbols, thereby making it difficult for the player to understand that the variation of the special symbols has been forcibly stopped.

In addition, the contents of the change processing for each of the above-mentioned special patterns are configured to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate by setting a command indicating the contents, and the change display of the third and fourth patterns displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be synchronized with the display mode of each special pattern displayed on the above-mentioned first pattern display device 37.However, when a command indicating that the second special pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 has been forcibly stopped while the second special pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is being forcibly stopped is received on the voice lamp control device 113, the change performance during the forced stop may be executed using the third pattern or the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, even if the configuration is such that a variable performance is executed while the actual second special pattern is forcibly stopped using each pattern (third pattern, fourth pattern) that is displayed in a variably synchronized manner with the variable display of the special pattern on the third pattern display device 81, which is easy for the player to see, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special pattern variation has been forcibly stopped.

In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203o is not set to ON, that is, the first special symbol is not displayed as a jackpot symbol (S90
1: No), data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S1302). Next, it is determined whether there is data in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S1303). If it is determined that there is no data in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S1303: No), there is no ball in the second ball entrance 640, and there is no opportunity for the second special symbol to change, so this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S
1303: Yes), and then, a second special symbol big win determination process is executed (S1304).
The first special pattern jackpot determination process (S1303 in FIG. 644) will be described in detail later, but using the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the second special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown), a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred is made based on the set game state.

Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S1305). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1305) is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value based on the result of the hit/miss judgment based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), which will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of S1305, it is next determined whether or not the value of the time-saving counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1306). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is not greater than 0 (S1306: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1306, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1306: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203m is then set to 1.
If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is 1 (S307: Yes), this is the final change in the time-saving state, so the time-saving end waiting flag 20
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1307 that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is not 1 (S1307: No),
Then, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 644, the second special symbol big win determination process (S1303), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 643), will be described.
This is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1303). This second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1303) is a process in which the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and other processing is changed in comparison with the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 634).

In the second special symbol big win determination process (S1303), first, each counter value stored in the execution area (not shown) of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S4
01). Next, it is determined whether the time-saving end standby flag 203j is set to ON (
S402).

In this embodiment, as described above, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are configured to be executed simultaneously. Then, after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, when the special symbol variation is executed a specified number of times, the game state is shifted to the low probability state of the normal symbol. In the process of S1402, if it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is on, the final variation of the high probability state of the normal symbol has started in the variation of the first special symbol, so a process is executed to shift the game state to the low probability state of the normal symbol.

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is ON (S1402: Yes), data indicating the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203k (S1403), and the time-saving end waiting flag 203j and the time-saving flag 203f are set to OFF (S1404). Next, the value of the time-saving counter 203m is set to 0 (S1405).
), the value of the time-saving limit counter 203i is set to 0 (S1406).
A command indicating that the game state has transitioned to the normal state is set (S1407), and S1408
Then proceed to processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is not on, that is, in the variation of the first special symbol, the final variation of the high probability state of the normal symbol has not started (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 to S1407 are skipped,
Proceed to processing of S1408.

In the process of S1408, the current game state is a high probability state of a special symbol (first probability state, second probability state,
In order to determine whether or not the probability of a special symbol is high, it is determined whether the probability of a special symbol is high (S1408). If it is determined that the probability of a special symbol is high (S1408: Yes), the first winning random number table 2
Based on 02a (see FIG. 612(a)), it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S1401 matches the jackpot determination value for the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S1409).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability of a special symbol occurring is low (S1408: No), the first winning random number table 202a (FIG. 612(a)) is not selected.
Based on the result of the lottery (see reference 14), it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S1410).

After the process of S1409 or S1410 is completed, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S1409 or S1410 (S1411). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S1411),
: Yes), and the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203nb, which indicates a jackpot win of the second special symbol, is set to on (S1406).

Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (S1413), the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the winning type counter C2 (S1414), a value indicating the current game state is set in the winning state storage area 203t (S1415), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1411 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S1411: No), the losing symbol of the second special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S1416), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 645, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1304), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 643), will be described.
is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1304).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S1304 in FIG. 645), first, the lottery result obtained in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1303 in FIG. 564) is determined to be a jackpot for the second special symbol, that is, whether or not the jackpot for the second special symbol is set (S1501). Here, the determination of whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203nb is on. This special symbol 2 jackpot flag 20
3nb is S1412 in the second special symbol big win determination process (see FIG. 644) described above.
This is set to on by the process.

If it is determined that the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a big win (S1501: Yes),
, the first winning type counter CS acquired from the first winning type selection table 202b
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1501 that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big win (S1501), the type of the big win is determined based on the result of the lottery.
: No), the process of S1502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1503.

After executing the process of S1501 or S1502, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S
1503), and based on the information on the game state (normal state, time-saving state, first special probability state, second special probability state) stored in the winning state storage area 203t and the setting status of the special probability limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v, the fluctuation pattern scenario stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203w is read out (S1504).
Next, the fluctuation pattern table 202d to be referenced this time is read based on the fluctuation pattern scenario read in the processing of S1504 (S1505).

Then, it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern table read in the process of S1505 is the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (S1506). If it is determined that the read fluctuation pattern table is the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (S150
6: Yes), and then it is determined whether the special state flag 203x is on (S1507). If it is determined that the special state flag 203x is on (S1507: Yes), the special state flag 203x is set to off (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the variation pattern table read out in the process of S1506 is not the normal variation pattern table 202d1 (S1506: No), or if it is determined in the process of S1507 that the special state flag 203x is not on (S1507: No),
The process proceeds to step S1509, which will be described later.

In the process of S1509, the fluctuation pattern table 2 read out in the process of S1505 is
Based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S1503, a variation pattern of the variation of the second special symbol to be executed this time is selected (S1509).
Based on the variation pattern selected in processing of 09, a special chart 2 variation pattern command is set (S1510).

Next, a special symbol 2 stop type command indicating the stop symbol of the second special symbol is set (S1511).
The first symbol display device 37 sets the start of the first special symbol variation (S1512), and sets a value indicating the variation time of the selected variation pattern to the value of the special symbol variation time counter 203s (S1
513) and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 646, the contents of the second special symbol variation execution process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), will be described.
13 is a flowchart showing a process for updating the variation of the second special symbol (S209).

In the second special symbol variation execution process (S213), first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203
The value of s is subtracted and updated (S1601), the variable display of the second special pattern on the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S1602), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 647, the second special symbol variation stop process (S211), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 632), will be described. FIG. 647 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation stop process (S211).
S215) executes a process for stopping the variation of the second special symbol being executed, and a process for forcibly stopping the variation of the first special symbol being executed as a miss when the result of the variation of the second special symbol being executed is a jackpot.

When the second special symbol variation stop process (S211) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 big win flag 203nb is set to ON (S1701). If it is determined that the special symbol 2 big win flag 203nb is set to ON (S1701: Yes), a process for forcibly stopping the variation of the first special symbol is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is greater than 0 (S1702). If it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203r is greater than 0 (S1702: Yes),
s) Set a special pattern 1 change stop command indicating the stop of the change of the first special pattern (S1703)
.

Next, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol (S1704).
The value of the special variable time counter 203r is set to 0 (S1705).
When the special pattern is displayed stopped in a display mode indicating a jackpot, the varying display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) in progress can be displayed stopped (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating a miss (miss pattern).

After completing the processing of S1705, it is next determined whether the special chart 1 jackpot flag 203na is set to on (S1706). If it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot flag 203na is set to on (S1706: Yes), the special chart 1 jackpot flag 203na is set to off (S1707) in order to adapt the lottery result of the first special pattern to the first special pattern that was forcibly stopped and displayed as a miss in the processing of S1706 described above, the stored information for the special chart 1 jackpot is deleted (S1708), and the processing proceeds to S1709.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1706, the special chart 1 big win flag 203na is off,
That is, if it is determined that the result of the first special symbol being executed is not a big win (S17
06: No), the processes of S1707 and S1708 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1709. Also, in the process of S1702, the value of the special chart 1 fluctuation time counter 203r is 0
If it is determined that the value is not greater than the first special symbol (S1702: No), the variation of the first special symbol has not been executed, and there is no need to forcibly stop the variation result of the first special symbol due to a miss.
The processes from S1703 to S1708 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1709.

In the process of S1709, first, a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type won by the variation of the second special symbol this time (S1709), and then the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 20 is set.
3nb, time-saving end waiting flag 203j, time-saving flag 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change limit arrival flag 203u, time-saving limit arrival flag 203v, special state flag 203
x is set to OFF, and the value of the time-saving counter 203m is reset (S1710).

Then, the game status storage area 203k stores information indicating that the current game status is a jackpot (a jackpot game in progress) (S1711). The game status storage area 203k is configured to store game statuses related to lottery games (normal state, time-saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state) and game statuses related to winning games (a jackpot game in progress, a small win game in progress) separately, and by executing the process of S1711, the game statuses related to lottery games at the time of winning a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state) and the game status indicating a jackpot game in progress are stored. By configuring in this way, the game status set at the time of winning a jackpot can be determined at the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the process of S1701, if it is determined that the special chart 2 big win flag 203nb is not on, that is, the fluctuation being executed this time is not a big win fluctuation (S1701
: No), executes the second time-saving update process (S1714), and moves to the process of S1712. A detailed explanation of the second time-saving update process (S1714) will be described later with reference to FIG. 648, but similar to the above-mentioned time-saving update process (see S916 in FIG. 642), when the gaming state is in a high probability state of a normal pattern (time-saving state or first probability variable state), a process for updating the gaming state is executed.

After executing the processing of S1711 or S1714, next, a special pattern 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to stop confirming the second special pattern (S1712), the changing display of the second special pattern being displayed on the first special pattern display device 37 is stopped at the pattern corresponding to the lottery result (S1713), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in the second special symbol variation stop process (S211), the second special symbol is selected (
In addition, if the current lottery result is a big win (S1701: Yes), the first special symbol being changed is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is a loss (S1704).
In this way, by configuring the device to execute a process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol during the process of stopping one special symbol (determined display) as a symbol indicating a big win, it is possible to execute appropriate processing for multiple special symbol changes that are executed simultaneously.

In other words, in a configuration in which a variable processing for a first special pattern and a variable processing for a second special pattern are executed in sequence, like the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable processing for the first special pattern (forced stop processing) which is executed based on the lottery result for the second special pattern is executed within the variable processing for the second special pattern, so that the first special pattern can be forced to stop at a timing when the variable processing for the first special pattern is not being executed, thereby preventing the processing for the first special pattern from overlapping and enabling the processing to be executed smoothly.

In this embodiment, the process is configured to forcibly stop the other special symbol with a symbol indicating a miss when one special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that one special symbol has won a jackpot, that is, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S1303 in FIG. 644) (S1411 in FIG. 644: Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped with a miss symbol. In this case, it is preferable to configure the other special symbol that has been forcibly stopped as a miss and to execute a special variation that does not win a jackpot for the period until the jackpot variation of the one special symbol ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice that the variation of the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped when a jackpot is won with one special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the variation of the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped and to suppress the player from grasping whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In addition, when controlling the variation of one special pattern currently being executed based on the result of the drawing for the other special pattern, the content of the variation control may be configured to differ depending on the result of the drawing for the other special pattern currently being executed. For example, when the second special pattern is displayed as a stopped jackpot pattern and the drawing for the first special pattern (first lottery game) is in the midst of a variation (miss variation) to indicate that it is a miss, the drawing result may be discarded and a forced stop process may be executed to forcibly stop the miss variation, and when the drawing result for the first special pattern is in the midst of a variation (win variation) to indicate that it is a win (jackpot, small win), an interrupt process may be executed so that the variation of the second special pattern can resume after the jackpot game for the first special pattern has ended.

In this case, the player can be made to play while being interested in whether a new first special symbol variation will be executed or the interrupted first special symbol variation will be resumed after the big win game of the second special symbol is over. Furthermore, when using such a configuration, it is preferable to configure it so that a suggestion performance is executed to suggest to the player the status of the first special symbol (whether it is interrupted or not) during the big win game of the second special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 648, the second time-saving update process (S1714), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process (see S211 in FIG. 647), will be described. FIG. 648 is a flowchart showing the contents of this second time-saving update process (S1714).
In S1714), when the game state is the time-saving state or the first probability change state, the value of the time-saving counter 203m is updated when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, and when the end condition is satisfied,
A process is executed to transition the game state to a normal state or a second probability variable state.

When the second time-saving update process (S1714) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203m is greater than 0, that is, whether the variation of the special symbol being executed this time is during the time-saving game,
Alternatively, it is determined whether the fluctuation has started during the first probability fluctuation state (S1801).
If the value of the time-saving counter 203m is greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the fluctuation has started during time-saving play or during the first high probability variable state (S1801: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203m is subtracted (S1802). Then, the process proceeds to S1803. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1801 that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is not greater than 0 (S1801: No), the fluctuation has not stopped, which would trigger an update of the time-saving state or the first high probability variable state, so this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S1803, it is determined whether the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is on (S18
03). When it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is on (S1803: Yes),
), that is, if the current change of the special symbol is the final change of the time reduction, and the next change has not started since the final change of the time reduction in the first special symbol (the other special symbol), it is time to transition the game state to the normal state, so the time reduction end waiting flag 203
The CPU 201 sets the time-saving flag 203f to OFF (S1804), and sets the game status storage area 203k to the normal status (S1805). Then, the CPU 201 proceeds to the process of S1806.

On the other hand, in the process of S1803, if it is determined that the time-saving end waiting flag 203j is not on (S1803: No), the final change of the time-saving game is not being executed, that is, the time-saving state is continuing, so the time-saving counter 203m and a command indicating the game state are set (S1806), and this process is terminated. In this way, in a simultaneous change type gaming machine, when the change that is the final change of the time-saving game is stopped, it is determined whether the other special symbol has been changed more than the specified number of times in the time-saving game state (the next change from the final change), and if not, the game state is shifted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game that feels natural.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be independently executed in parallel.
The special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. This allows a lottery game with more special symbols to be played within a given time, increasing the probability that the player will win a jackpot within the given time. This allows the player to play efficiently.

Furthermore, even in a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time to execute a lottery game, when a jackpot game occurs with either the first or second special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol is stopped, so that the player can concentrate on the jackpot game while playing the game.

In this embodiment, when either the first or second special symbol is displayed as a symbol indicating a big win (big win symbol) or a small win symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed as a miss symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or displayed with the measurement of the time of change interrupted according to the type of big win or small win that has been won. By configuring in this way, the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or notification mode that lets the player know that it is temporarily stopped,
The player can understand that the lottery game which was being changed and displayed has not disappeared, and can play the big win game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 649, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 631) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described.
FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the start winning process (S105).
S105 of No. 9) determines whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning). If the ball has entered the initial winning, the maximum number of reserved balls (
This process stores each of the acquired counter values in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively (up to a maximum of four at the first ball entrance 64b1 and the right first ball entrance 64b2, and up to one at the second ball entrance 640).

In addition, each counter value acquired based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 2
When the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored in the area 203a, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the winning/losing judgment result and the selected variation pattern in advance based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 649) will be described below.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 649), first, the ball enters the first ball entry hole 6, which is the first start hole.
4b1 or the right first ball entry hole 64b2 (initial winning) (S1
901). In this step, the ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64b1 or the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the right first ball entrance 64b2.
Alternatively, if it is determined that the ball has entered the right first ball entry port 64b2 (there has been a starting winning), (S
1901: Yes), and obtain the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (S
1902), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1903).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 is less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls has not reached the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (S
1903: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is incremented by 1 (
1704), and sets a reserved ball number command to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved number of balls at the first starting hole (the reserved number of lottery rights for the first special pattern) (S1905).

Then, various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2
The values of the first special pattern reserved ball execution area 203a, the variable type counter CS1, and the small win type counter C5 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer and each is reserved (stored) in the memory area for the corresponding number of reserved balls in the first special pattern reserved ball execution area 203a of RAM 203 (S1906).

Next, the first pre-read process is executed (S1907).
As will be described later with reference to FIG. 650, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 20
A process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc., from each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In this embodiment, the process is configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc., based on each newly stored counter value, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a new start winning occurs, the process may be executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc., for all reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, that is, when the right to draw for the first special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the right to draw for the first special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to determine in advance the content of the right to draw for the second special pattern (winning information) when the right to draw for the first special pattern is newly acquired.

After the process of S1907 is executed, the process of S1908 is executed.
In the process of 1901, the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b
If it is determined that the ball has not entered the number 2 (S1901: No), or if it is determined in the process of S1903 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is currently the upper limit value (S1903: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d
The process of adding is skipped and the process proceeds to S1908.

As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d (N1)
When the number of winnings is added, the first pre-reading process (S1907) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example,
In the process of 03, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) (S1903: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the first pre-reading process (S1907) may be executed. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. Also, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2, the first pre-reading process (S1907) may be executed.
Since added value can be imparted when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2 when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern has reached the upper limit, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1 or the right first ball entrance 64b2.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, which is the second starting entrance (starting winning) (S1908). Here, the ball's entry into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the second ball entrance 640 is detected. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning has occurred) (S1908: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is a period in which the variation of the special symbol is executable (S1909).

In this embodiment, when the current game state is a big win or a small win, the variation of the special symbol is not executed.
Based on the information stored in k, it is determined whether the current game is a big win game (big win) or a small win game (small win).

In the process of S1909, if it is determined that the special symbol variation is possible (S
1909: Yes), a special winning command indicating that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 is set (S1910), and then various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning random number counter C2,
The values of the winning type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 are read (obtained) from the counter buffer and stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S1911), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1908, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 (S1908: No), this process is terminated as it is. In this embodiment, since it is configured so that the first special symbol can be selected to win a small prize, in the process of S1911, the value of the small prize type counter C5 is not stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

Next, referring to FIG. 650, the first step which is one of the processes of the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 649)
The first read-ahead process (S1907) will now be described. FIG. 650 shows the first read-ahead process (S19
07) is a flowchart showing the process of the present invention.

In the first pre-read process (S1907 in FIG. 650), first, various counter values, that is, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the small winning type counter C5 are read out from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a (S
2001). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-read reserved storage area, in the area with the smallest winning order (S2002).

If the result of the determination in the process of S2003 is a jackpot (a jackpot only in the low probability state, a jackpot only in the high probability state, or a jackpot in both the low probability state and the high probability state) (S2003: Yes), the conditions for winning the jackpot (the game state set at the time of the lottery) are
and a first winning command indicating the type of big win if a big win occurs (S2004), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S2003 is not a big win (the special symbol is a miss whether in a high probability state or a low probability state) (S2003: No), then, S2
It is determined whether the determination result in the process of S2003 is a small win or not (S2005).
If the result of the determination in the process of 003 is a small win (S2005: Y
es), and set a first winning command indicating the type of small win if a win occurs (S2006),
This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2005 that the result is not a small win (S2005: No), a first winning command indicating a loss is set (S2
005), and then this process ends.

Here, the first winning command set in the processes of S2004, S2006, and S2007 is set to include, in addition to the information for indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has different meanings depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information for indicating the values of various counter values read out by the process of S2001 as common information.The winning command set in this process is then output to the external output process (S25) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 655).
01) is output to the voice lamp control device 113.

On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a winning command is received, it can change the display mode of the reserved ball (for example, by changing the color of the reserved ball to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or it can execute an effect (pre-reading effect) in which a preview pattern or the like is displayed before the change begins to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this embodiment, when executing the pre-reading process, the winning/losing judgment result in the case of a high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/losing judgment result in the case of a low probability state of the special pattern are distinguished, and a winning command is set based on the results of each judgment. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to specify a judgment value (the value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state, and to set a winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern only when that judgment value is read out.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has been reached, so that a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot can be created for special pattern changes for which no pre-reading performance is performed.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved storage area 203a may be accurately determined, and a win/loss judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not varied depending on the number of reserved balls, but a fixed variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation, making it possible to determine the game state at the start of the variation by determining the order of variation until the reserved balls start to vary based on the reserved and stored information when performing a look-ahead.

In addition, in this embodiment, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved storage area 203a, a pre-reading process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the pre-reading process. However, without being limited to this, in the pre-reading process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved storage area 203a may be set as a winning command, and the win/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information contained in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and when it is determined that the look-ahead performance is to be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing judgment result). As a result, when the look-ahead performance is not executed, a specific look-ahead process (prediction of the winning/losing judgment result) is not executed, so that it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary control in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, it is possible to suppress the malfunction in which the result of the look-ahead process executed without a title is illegally obtained by the player.

Next, referring to Fig. 651, the normal symbol variable process (S106), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see Fig. 631) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. Fig. 651 is a flowchart showing the contents of this normal symbol variable process (S106). The normal symbol variable process (S106) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric role object 64a.

In this normal symbol change process (S106 in FIG. 651), first, the current normal symbol (second
It is determined whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S2101). The normal symbol (second symbol) winning period includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays a winning symbol (when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed) to when the electric role 64a is being controlled to open and close (when the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S2101: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S2101: No
), it is determined whether the normal pattern on the second pattern display device 83 is being displayed in a changing manner (S2102).
If it is determined that the normal symbol is not being changed, that is, that a new normal symbol change (lottery) can be executed (S2102: No), next, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 2
The value (M) of 03e is obtained (S2103), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S2
104).

If it is determined in the process of S2104 that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S2104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S2104: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S2105).
If it is determined in the process of 104 that the condition for executing a new normal pattern variation (winning information to be used for the normal pattern variation is reserved and stored) is met, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is decremented by 1 in order to execute the normal pattern variation using the reserved winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S210
6) In the process of S2106, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved 1 to normal symbol reserved 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted in order to the execution area side.
More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: normal symbol reserved 1 → execution area, normal symbol reserved 2 → normal symbol reserved 1, normal symbol reserved 3 → normal symbol reserved 2, normal symbol reserved 4 → normal symbol reserved 4. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S2107).

Next, it is determined whether the time-saving flag 203f is on, that is, whether the current state is a high probability state of a normal pattern (S2108). If it is determined that the time-saving flag 203f is on (
S2108: Yes), the second winning random number table 202c for high probability (FIG. 612(c)
On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving flag 203f is not on (S2108: N), the process proceeds to S2111.
o), a win/loss determination result is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202c (see Figure 612 (c)) for low probability (S2110), and processing proceeds to S2111.

In the process of S2111, it is determined whether the normal pattern variation (lottery) is a winning one (S2
111), if it is determined that the normal pattern variation (lottery) is a winning combination (S2111: Yes
), the display mode of "○" which is the display mode when a win occurs is set (S2112), the normal symbol variation time is set to 0.1 seconds (S2114), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2111 that the normal symbol variation (lottery) this time is not a win (is a miss),
2111: No), and sets the display mode of "x" which is the display mode when the winning combination is lost (S2113).
The process proceeds to S2114 described above.

In this embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern is configured to have the same fluctuation time regardless of the game status of the normal symbol and the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to set a different fluctuation time based on the acquired value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2102 that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not being displayed in a changing manner (S2102: No), it is determined whether the change time of the normal pattern being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S2115), and if it is determined that the change time has not elapsed (S2115: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2115 that the variable time has elapsed (S211
5: Yes), and then set the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 (S2116).
In the process of 116, if the current lottery of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the second symbol display device 8
On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery result is a miss, the second symbol display device 83 displays a stopped (lit) symbol. That is, the setting is made to stop the display mode set in the above-mentioned S2112 or S2113 process.

When the stop display is set by processing S2116, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern (lit up) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S2112 or S2113.

Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result of the normal symbol is a win (S2117). If it is determined that the current lottery result of the normal symbol is a win (S2117: Yes), a process is executed to set the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role object 64a. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the normal symbol is not a win (miss) (S2117),
: No), and then this process ends.

Next, the opening and closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role object 64a in this embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the timing for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol (S
A win/loss judgment of the normal symbol is performed based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing when the processing of S2108 to S2111 is performed), and the game state (normal state, time-saving state, first
The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 64a is set based on the state of the special probability variable, the first special probability variable, and the like.

That is, in this embodiment, the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbols and the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbols are configured to be executed independently, and further, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbols is configured to be variable based on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbols. Therefore, the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbols that is executed in parallel during the period in which the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbols is executed is configured to be variable based on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbols.
Depending on the results, a high probability state for the normal pattern may be set at the time when the win/loss determination for the normal pattern is made, and a low probability state for the normal pattern may be set at the time when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric gimmick 64a is set.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric reel 64a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern that is set at the time when the win/loss judgment of the normal pattern is made, there is a problem that the electric reel 64a will be long-opened (an opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 64a is set based on the game state at the timing to be set by referring to the normal winning operation table 202h in which the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 64a is specified. This allows the electric role 64a to be opened in the opening pattern according to the set game state.

In the process of S2117, if it is determined that the result of the current lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S2117: Yes), the opening pattern of the electric role 64a based on the current game state is specified by referring to the normal symbol winning operation table 202h (S2018).
Based on the opening pattern of the electric role 64a identified in the process of S2018,
4a (S2019), and then this process ends.
In the process of 017, if it is determined that the result of the current lottery for the normal symbol is not a win (i.e., a miss) (S2017: No), the processes of S2018 to S2019 are skipped and this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the winning/losing judgment of the normal symbol is performed based on the game state at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal symbol, and the electric role 64a that is operated in the winning game of the normal symbol is
The opening pattern of the electric gimmick 64a is set based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) is set, but without being limited to this, for example, the electric gimmick 64a may be configured to open long only when a high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing when the hit/miss determination of the normal pattern is made and also when a high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric gimmick 64a that is moved in a hit game of the normal pattern is set, or the opening pattern of the electric gimmick 64a may be set based on the game state that is set at the timing when the hit/miss determination of the normal pattern is made.

Next, referring to FIG. 652, the through gate passing process (S
FIG. 652 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (S107). This process is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631), and judges whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. If the ball has passed through,
This is a process for obtaining the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

In the through gate passing process (S107 in FIG. 652), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2201). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S2201
: Yes), and then it is determined whether the currently set game state is a normal state (S220
2) If it is determined that the state is normal (S2202: Yes), the special state flag 203
It is determined whether or not x is on (S2203). If it is determined that the special state flag 20x is not set to on (S2203: No), this is a case where the normal game state is set and right-hand play is being performed, so a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205.

When the alarm command set by the processing of S2204 is output (notified) to the voice lamp control device 113, an abnormality alarm processing is executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and a first abnormality alarm mode (not shown) indicating an abnormal firing is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2202, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal state (S2
If it is determined that the special state flag 203x is set to ON (S2203: Yes), the process proceeds to S2205.

This special state flag 203x is a flag that is set to ON when the special variation pattern table 202d5 is referenced as the referenced variation pattern table 202d, and when the special state flag 203x is set to ON, it is a game state that is advantageous for the player to play so that the lottery for the special pattern is executed with the second special pattern, so even if the normal state is set as the game state, it is the correct game method to execute the right-hand hit game. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and it is determined that the game state is the normal state, the process of setting the notification command indicating the launch abnormality is skipped.

In this way, by configuring it so that it is determined that a right-hand shot is being played when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated detection means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the shot ball has reached a play area beyond the variable display unit 80) for determining whether or not a right-hand shot is being played, and therefore manufacturing costs can be reduced. Also, by setting different notification commands for indicating a shot abnormality according to the play state set at the time when a right-hand shot is being played, different abnormality notification modes can be easily displayed.

In this embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined that a right-hand hit game is being played; however, any other configuration may be used as long as it is capable of detecting that a right-hand hit game is being played. For example, a detection means may be provided that detects that the operating handle 51 has been operated with a strength (amount of operation) sufficient to launch the ball into the right-hand hit area.

Returning to FIG. 652, the description will be continued. After the processes of S2202 to S2204 are completed, next, S2
In S2205, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203e (
M) is obtained (S2205), and then the obtained normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e
Is the value (M) greater than 4 (has the number of reserved balls for normal symbols reached the upper limit)?
(S2206).

In the process of S2206, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 4 (it is the upper limit value of 4) (S2206: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not greater than 4 (it is 3 or less) (S2206: Yes),
The value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is added by 1 (S2207), a normal pattern reserved ball count command (a command for indicating the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203e) is set (S2208), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c (S2209), and this process is terminated.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to Fig. 653. Fig. 653 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. NMI interrupt processing is processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 203. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110.
The MPU 201 then suspends the ongoing control, starts the NMI interrupt process, and writes the power failure occurrence information to the RAM 2 as the power failure occurrence information setting.
03 (S2301), and the NMI interrupt process is terminated.

The above-mentioned NMI interruption process is also executed by the payout/launch control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interruption process. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is sent to the power outage monitoring circuit 252.
This signal is output to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the dispensing control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 654, when the power is turned on to the main control device 110,
Next, a description will be given of the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the image forming apparatus 10. FIG. 654 is a flow chart showing this start-up process.

This startup process is started by resetting the power supply.
In the R, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (S2401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-controllers (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S2402).
Access from the AM 203 is permitted (S2403).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 584) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2404). If it is turned on (S2404: Yes),
The process proceeds to S2412. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S2404: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S2405), and if not (S2405: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power failure did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S2412.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2405: Yes),
A judgment value is calculated (S2406), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S2407:
No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, so in this case, the process is also terminated.
The process proceeds to 2. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in a working area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2412, the dispensing control device 111 which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device)
In order to initialize the dispensing control device 111, a dispensing initialization command is sent (S2412).
When the main control device 110 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes in a state in which it can start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S2413, S2414).

As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed,
The RAM 203 is initialized (S2413, S2414).

Similarly, when the power interruption occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed based on a RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S
In the RAM initialization process (S2413, S2414), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2413), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2414). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S2410.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S2404: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S2405: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S2407: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S2408) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command at power recovery is sent (S2409) to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power interruption, and the process proceeds to S2410. The payout control device 111
When this payout return command is received, the data stored in the RAM 213 is retained,
The game ball payout control can now be started.

Next, a performance permission command that permits the execution of various performances is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2410). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S2411). Then, the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 655, after the above-mentioned start-up process, MPU2 in main control device 110
655 is a flow chart showing the main processing executed by the program controller 101. The main processing is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (see FIG. 655), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (
S2501). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 631) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111
A prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls won is sent to the
The main control unit 110 transmits to the voice lamp control unit 113 the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 649) or the external output process (S2501 in FIG. 655) to the voice lamp control unit 113, and uses the various commands set in the various processes of the main control unit 110 as information for setting the various effects (variable effects, decorative effects, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display unit 81. The main control unit 110 also transmits to the voice lamp control unit 113 the opening command, number of rounds command, and ending command set in the big win control process (see S2404 in FIG. 656). In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is sent to the firing control unit 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2502). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and the counter value is set to the maximum value (198 in this embodiment).
When the counter value CS1 reaches 0, the counter value CS1 is cleared to 0.
The data is stored in the corresponding buffer area of 3.

Once the updating of the variable type counter CS1 is complete, the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2503), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a command is set in the voice lamp control device 113 to execute a jackpot performance, and jackpot control processing is executed to open or close the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 (S2504).

The details of the jackpot control process (S2504) will be described later with reference to Figures 656 to 660. In this jackpot control process (S2504), the first specific winning port (large opening port) 65a and the second specific winning port 650a (hereinafter referred to as winning ports) are opened for each round in the jackpot state.
and judges whether the maximum opening time of the winning openings, etc. (first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, second specific winning opening 650a) has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the winning openings, etc. (first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, second specific winning opening 650a). Then, when either of these conditions is met, the winning openings, etc. (first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, second specific winning opening 650a) are closed.
) is repeatedly opened and closed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the big win control process (S2504) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a small win control process for a small win game that is executed when a small win is won in the lottery of the special symbol is executed (S2505). In this small win control process (S2505), the V winning port 650a is opened for the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small win game.
The process for setting the period for opening and closing the small win based on a predetermined scenario (small win scenario) is executed. The details of the small win control process (S2505) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 64a associated with the right first ball entrance 64b2 (S2506). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the opening and closing control start of the electric role is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 651), the opening and closing control of the electric role is started. Note that the opening and closing control of this electric role is the same as the opening and closing control of S2021 of the normal symbol fluctuation process.
This continues until the period set by the process of 118 ends.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S2507). In the first symbol display update process, a first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 633
When a variation pattern is set by the second special symbol variation start process (S203 of FIG. 643) or the second special symbol variation start process (S208 of FIG. 643), the first symbol display device 37 displays a variation according to the variation pattern.
In this embodiment, the LE of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is started.
For example, the currently lit LED will be turned on until the time for the change has elapsed after the change has started.
If the ED is red, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED.
If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.
If the blue LED is on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

In addition, the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, and if the color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player will not be able to confirm the change in the color of the LED.
In order to allow the player to confirm the change in the color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed. When the counter reaches 100, the LED is turned on.
D changes its lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 633) or the second special symbol change start process (see FIG. 643) ends, the change display being executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is ended, and the first special symbol change stop process (see S206 in FIG. 639) is performed to stop the first special symbol change.
In the display mode set in S607 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 636), the stopping symbol (first symbol) is displayed as a stopped symbol (lighting display) on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. In the second special symbol, the stopping symbol (first symbol) is displayed as a stopped symbol (lighting display) on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B by the same process.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the special symbols is a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol).
When the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (miss symbol), the stop display for this purpose is also executed.

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the second symbol display device (S250
8). In the second symbol display update process, when the second symbol change time is set by the process of S2114 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 651), the second symbol display device starts to display the change. As a result, the second symbol display device displays the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol as the second symbol.
A variable display is performed in which the symbols " and " are alternately lit. In addition, a second symbol display update process (S2
In 508), when the stop display of the second pattern display device is set by the processing of S2116 of the normal pattern change processing (see FIG. 651), the variable display being executed in the second pattern display device is terminated, and the processing of S2112 or S2113 of the normal pattern change processing (see FIG. 651) is executed.
The stopping pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device in the display mode set by the processing of (a).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S25
09), if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2509: No),
In this case, the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output a power failure signal SG1, and the power supply is not cut off. In this case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (
S2510), if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S2510: Yes), the process returns to S250
1, and the above-mentioned processes from S2501 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S2510:
No), until a predetermined time has elapsed, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CIN
I2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2511, S2512).
.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2511). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), the counter is cleared to 0. Then, the first initial value random number counter C
The updated values of INI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is performed in the same manner as the process of S2511 (S2512). In addition, in the process of S2512, the value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process from S2501 to S2508 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time,
and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a person to grasp the process contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent play targeting the timing at which the judgment value corresponding to the winning is obtained.

Furthermore, if power interruption information is stored in RAM 203 in the process of S2509 (S2509: Yes), the power supply has been cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 has output a power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interrupt process in FIG. 653 has been executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S2513 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2513), and a power off command indicating that the power supply has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S2514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S251
5), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2516), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.
The checksum values in the stack area and working area backed up in 203.

The process of S2509 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the game state carried out in S2501 to S2508, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S2511 and S2512 carried out within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power outage occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S2501 after the start-up process is completed. In other words, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up process,
Processing can start from S2501. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during processing at the time of power cut, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) during the initial setting process (S2401), and processing can start from S2501. Therefore, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, the big win control process (S2504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 656. FIG. 656 is a flowchart showing this big win control process (S2504). This big win control process (S2504
) is executed during the main processing (see FIG. 655), and is a process for setting information (commands) for executing various presentations according to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special pattern, and for opening or closing the winning ports, etc. (first specific winning port (large opening port) 65a, second specific winning port 650, V winning port 650a).

In the big win control process (S2504), first, it is determined whether it is the timing for the start of the big win of the special symbol (S2601).
39) or S1709 of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 647) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start. In the process of S2601, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is the start timing (S2601: Yes), an opening command is set (S2602), and this process is terminated.

The opening command may be delayed (variable) and sent depending on the game state and the type of big win. Specifically, an opening counter is provided that is updated periodically (every 4 ms). When a big win or small win with a special symbol starts, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and then when the opening counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for big win A, 5000 for big win B), the opening command is sent. In this way, for example, when a big win occurs during left-hand play, the time until the start of the big win can be extended, and when a big win occurs during right-hand play, the time until the start of the big win can be shortened. In this embodiment, when a big win occurs during left-hand play, it is necessary to switch to right-hand play as the big win game. According to the above configuration, when a big win occurs during left-hand play,
This allows the player to have ample time to switch to right-hit play (jackpot play), thereby reducing the operational burden on the player.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that it is not the timing for the special symbol jackpot start (S2601: No), it is next determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S2603). In the process of S2603, the game information related to the winning game stored in the game status storage area 203k is read out and the determination is made.

The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game) and the period during a predetermined time after the special symbol jackpot game ends. If it is determined in the process of S2603 that the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S2603: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S26
03: Yes), and then it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S2604
).

When it is determined in the process of S2604 that it is the timing to start a new round (S2604: Yes), a big win operation setting process is executed (S2605). The details of this big win operation setting process (S2605) will be described with reference to FIG. 657.
5f, operation processing of the opening and closing plate 650b of the second variable winning device 650) is executed.

Here, the big win operation setting process (S2605), which is one process in the big win control process (S2504 in FIG. 656), will be described with reference to FIG. 657. FIG. 657 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big win operation setting process (S2605).

When the jackpot operation setting process (S2605) is executed, first, from among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, an opening operation scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set is read (S2701).
The opening and closing operation of the door 65f of the specific winning opening 65 or the opening and closing plate 650b of the second specific winning opening 650a is set based on the data read in the process of S2701 (S2702). Then, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S2703).
This process ends.

In this way, at the start of each round, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650
Since each of the above operations is set, even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a big win game, it is possible to prevent a malfunction such as the big win game ending midway.
A round command is set to indicate that a new round of play is to be played. The round command set here is output to the sound and lamp control device 113, and the sound and lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to determine the progress of the jackpot game being played. Therefore, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 can display which round of play is currently being played.

In this embodiment, the main control device 110 is configured to set a round command including information indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed, but it is not limited to this, and may be configured to set a round command including only information indicating that a round game has been newly started. In this case, the sound lamp control device 113 may be provided with a means for measuring the number of round commands received during one big win game, and the sound lamp control device 113 may calculate which round the round game to be executed this time is, and set the display mode of the round number display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the calculation result. By configuring in this way, the amount of information included in the round command set by the main control device 110 can be reduced, thereby reducing the burden on the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 656, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a new round (S2604: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the winning hole is satisfied (S2605). If it is determined that the closing condition for the winning hole is satisfied (
S2605: Yes), the closing operation of the prize opening is set (S2607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2606 that the closing condition of the prize winning port is not satisfied (S2606: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period (S2
The ending period starts at the final round (
When the second round (in the case of the big win A) ends, the opening and closing door 65f is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in this embodiment) that is the ball discharge time has elapsed, it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance. If it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S2608: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2609), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2609 that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2609: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the big win (S2610). The end timing of the big win is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. If it is determined in the process of S2610 that it is the end timing of the big win (the end timing of the ending effect) (S2610: Yes),
On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing for the ending period has not yet ended (S2610: No), the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 658, the details of the jackpot end process (S2611), which is one process in the jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 656), will be described. FIG. 658 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S2611). In this jackpot end process (S2611), a process for setting the number of chance variable limit times and the number of time-saving limit times, updating (subtracting) the values of the already set chance variable limit times and the time-saving limit times, and a process for setting the game state after the jackpot game ends according to the type of jackpot being executed and the status of each limit number are executed.

When the jackpot end process (S2611) is executed, first, the probability variable limit update process is executed (S2801). In the probability variable limit update process (S2801), a process for setting a high probability state of a special symbol based on the type of jackpot that was won, a process for setting an upper limit value that allows the high probability state of a special symbol to be continuously set in the probability variable limit number counter 203h, and a process for updating (subtracting) the set probability variable limit number are executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 659, the details of the probability variable limit update process (S2801), which is one process in the big win end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658), will be described.
This is a flowchart showing the contents of the special probability limit update process (S2801). In this special probability limit update process (S2801), first, the type of the jackpot currently being executed is read (S2901). Then, it is determined whether the value of the special probability limit count counter 203h is greater than 0 (S2903). If it is determined that the value of the special probability limit count counter 203h is not greater than 0 (S2903: No), the special probability limit, which is the upper limit for setting a high probability state of consecutive special symbols, has not been set, so
The value of the probability limit counter 203h is set to 40 (S2904), and the probability flag 20
3g is set to ON (S2905), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the value of the probability limit counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, that the jackpot has been won in the high probability state of the special symbol (S2903: Yes), the value of the probability limit counter 203h is decremented by 1 (updated) (S2906), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability limit counter 203h after decrement is 0 (S2907). If it is determined that the value of the probability limit counter 203h is not 0 (S2907: No), since the high probability state of the special symbol can be set continuously, the process of S2905 described above is executed and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in S2907,
In the process, if it is determined that the value of the probability limit counter 203h is 0 (S2907: Yes), the probability limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON (S2908) because the upper limit value at which the high probability state of the special symbol can be set consecutively has been reached. Then, this process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 659, in the first embodiment, for all jackpot types that are set when a jackpot with a special symbol is won, the content that a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends is specified, so that the process for setting a low probability state of the special symbol based on the jackpot type is not executed. However, for example, as a modified example of the first embodiment, if there is a jackpot type in which a low probability state of the special symbol (normal state, time-saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, the process for setting a low probability state of the special symbol based on the jackpot type being executed (S2902, S2910, S2911, S2912, S2913, S2914, S2915, S2916, S2917, S2918, S2919, S2920, S2921, S2922, S2923, S2924, S2925, S2926, S2927, S2928, S2929, S2930, S2931, S2932, S2933, S2934, S2935, S2936, S2937, S2938, S2939, S2940, S2941, S2942, S2943, S2944, S2945, S2946, S2947, S2948, S2949, S2950, S2951, S2952, S2953, S2954, S2955, S2956, S2957, S2960, S2961, S2962, S2963, S2964, S2965, S2966, S2967, S2968, S2970,
911) is executed.

In the process of S2902, it is determined whether the type of jackpot currently being executed that was read in the process of S2901 is a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a special pattern (first probability state or second probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot game (S2902).

In the processing of S2902, if it is determined that the type of jackpot currently being executed is a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a special pattern (first probability state or second probability state) is set after the end of the jackpot game (S2902: Yes), the processing proceeds to S2903 described above.

On the other hand, in the process of S2902, if it is determined that the currently executed jackpot type is not a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (it is a jackpot type in which a low probability state of a special symbol is set) (S2902: No), it is determined whether the value of the probability limit counter 203h is greater than 0 (S2910).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2910 that the value of the probability limit number counter 203h is greater than 0 (S29
10: Yes), since the jackpot is won in the high probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the value of the probability change limit number counter 203h for measuring the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively is cleared to 0 (S2911),
The above-mentioned process of S2911 is executed, and this process ends.

In this embodiment, the number of times until the probability limit is reached (the value initially set in the probability limit counter 203h) is set to 40 times, but it is not limited to this, and multiple types such as 20 times and 30 times may be set. When configured in this way, the number of times until the probability limit is reached (the probability limit counter 20
3h) is set as the initial value.
Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the probability variable limit will be reached, the interest in the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 658, the explanation will be continued. After the probability change limit update process (S2801) is executed, the time-saving limit update process (S2802) is executed.
A detailed explanation of 2) will be given later with reference to FIG. 660, but processing is executed to set an upper limit value at which a high probability state of consecutive normal symbols can be set in the time-saving limit count counter 203i, and to update (subtract) the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203i that has already been set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 660, the details of the time-saving limit update process (S2801), which is one process in the big win end process (see S2611 in FIG. 658), will be described.
This is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving limit update process (S2801). In this time-saving limit update process (S2801), a process for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern based on the type of big win that has been won, a process for setting an upper limit value for which the high probability state of a normal pattern can be set consecutively, and a process for updating the remaining number of times for the set upper limit value are executed.

In the time-saving limit update process (S2802), first, the jackpot type of the currently active special symbol is read (S3001). Next, it is determined whether the currently active jackpot type read in the process of S3001 is a jackpot type in which a high probability state (first probability variable state, time-saving state) of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends (S3002). If it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends (S300
2: Yes), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203i is greater than 0 (S3003).
That is, when it is determined that the probability state of the normal pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (S3003: No), the value of the time-saving limit number counter 203i is not set to a value that can consecutively set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so
The value of is set to 10 (S3004), and the time-saving flag 203f is set to ON (S3005
Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3003, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit number counter 203i is greater than 0 (S3003: Yes),
The value of the time-saving limit counter 203 is decremented by 1 (S3007).
It is determined whether the value of i is 0 (S3008). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203i after subtraction is 0 (S3008: Yes), the upper limit value that can be set for the high probability state of consecutive normal symbols has been reached, so the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to ON (S3009), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3008 that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203i after subtraction is not 0 (S3008
: No), execute the above-mentioned processing of S3005, and terminate this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the type of jackpot being executed this time is not a jackpot in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game (
S3002: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit counter 203i is 0 (S3011). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit counter 203i is 0 (S3011: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit counter 203i is cleared to 0 (S
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3011 that the value of the time-saving limit counter 203i is not 0 (S3011: No), the process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the time-saving limit is set to 10 times.
The number of times is not limited to this, and may be determined from a number of preset numbers, such as 20 or 30 times.

Returning to FIG. 658, the explanation will be continued. After the time-saving limit update process (S2802) is executed, next, information indicating the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot based on the currently executed jackpot type is stored in the game state storage area 203k (S2803). Then, from the time-saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 617), the currently executed jackpot type, the data in the winning state storage area 203t, the probability variable limit arrival flag 203u and the time-saving limit arrival flag 203u are read.
Based on the state of .03v, the corresponding number of time-saving times is read (S2804).

Next, the number of time-saving times read from the time-saving granting table 202e (see FIG. 617) in the process of S2804 is set as the counter value of the time-saving counter 203m (S2805), and a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content is set (S2806). Then, a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the big win game, the value of the probability change limit number counter 203h, and the value of the time-saving limit number counter 203i is set (S2807).

Then, a fluctuation pattern scenario corresponding to the type of the jackpot being executed, the data in the winning state storage area 203t, and the states of the probability change limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f (S2
808), and data indicating the scenario determined in the processing of S2808 is stored in the fluctuation pattern scenario storage area 203w (S2809).

Next, in the process of S2809, the stored data is stored in the special variation pattern table 202.
If it is determined that the stored data is data of a scenario including the special variation pattern table 202d5 (S2810),
810: Yes), and sets the special state flag 203x to ON (S2811), and
Then proceed to processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S2810, the stored data is stored in the special variation pattern table 202.
If it is determined that the data is not a scenario including d5 (S2810: No),
The process skips step S2811 and proceeds to step S2812. In step S2812, the end of the big win is set (S2812), and the process ends.

Next, the small win control process (S2505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 661. FIG. 661 is a flowchart showing this small win control process (S2505).
) is executed during the main processing (see FIG. 655), and is a process for setting information (commands) for executing various presentations according to the small win when the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win state with a special pattern, and for opening or closing the second variable winning device 650.

In the small win control process (S2505), first, it is determined whether it is time for the small win to start (S3101). If it is time for the small win to start (S3101: Y
es), sets a small win opening command (S3102), and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the small win to start (S3101: No), it is determined whether or not a small win is in progress (S3103). If it is determined that a small win is not in progress (S3103: Yes), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a small win is occurring (S3103: Yes), it is determined whether it is time for the second variable winning device 650 to open (S3104). If it is determined that it is time for the opening operation (S3104: Yes), the opening solenoid is set to ON (S3105), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not time for the second variable winning device 650 to open (S3104: No), it is determined whether it is time for the small win to end (S3106). If it is determined that it is time for the small win to end (S3106: Yes), the small win flag 203p is set to OFF (S3107).
On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the small win to end (S
3106: No), and terminates this process.

<Regarding control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 662 to FIG. 676, the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113
The control processes executed by the MPU 221 are roughly classified as follows:
There is a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, a description will be given of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 with reference to Fig. 662. Fig. 662 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (S40
01). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on or not, the power-off processing of S4116 (see FIG. 663) is performed to determine whether the current startup processing is due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage").
As will be described later with reference to FIG. 663, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of a power cut from the main control device 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 663), it executes a power cut process of S4116. Before the execution of such a power cut process, a power cut process in progress flag is turned on, and after the power cut process is completed,
The power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 was completed, or after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, R
It is confirmed whether the data in the AM 223 has been destroyed or not (S4003).

The confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data "55AAh" is written as a keyword in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked to see if the data is "
If the value is "55AAh", then there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the value is not "55AAh", then data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4005.
Transition to 08.

If the startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off,
Since the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost due to a power outage), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4
On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power-off process of S4116 is completed, or if the current startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4004.
Transition to 008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup process is
This is started after a momentary power outage occurs, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset during the power-off process of S4117. In this case, since the power-off process is in progress, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore,
In such a case, since the control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004.
Start M223 initialization.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004
The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh" or not, and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is repeated for "0FFh", then "55h",
This RAM 223 read/write check is performed in the order RA
All memory areas in M223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (
S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM corruption check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data corruption has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality is detected in the read/write check in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S400
7), and an infinite loop continues until the power is cut off. Any abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008
The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (S411 in FIG. 663).
6). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on only when the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009).
), the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S4010), then interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006.
In this case, the process goes to S4008 via the process of S4001, or the process starts when only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power off command from the main control device 110).
008: No), skipping S4009, which is the process of clearing the working area of the RAM 223, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial values of the RAM 223 are set (S4010).

The clear process in S4009 is skipped because, when the process goes from S4004 to S4006 and then to S4008, the RAM has already been cleared by the process in S4004.
All memory areas of RAM 223 are cleared, and if only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the control of the voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by saving the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to FIG. 663, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.
When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was executed last time (S4101). If one millisecond or more has not elapsed (S4102),
In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, in the process of S4102 to S4110.
This is because S4110 is a process related to display (performance) and does not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform settings related to the variable display performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first,
A command output process is executed to transmit various commands for the display control device 114, which are set by the processes of S4103 to S4113, to the display control device 114 (S4102).
Next, the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set so as to match the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process notifies the user that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Also, the third symbol display device 8
Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the display device 110. If the power is not being turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without any notification being made by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting performance is executed, and then, a reserved number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting performance, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a player playing the pachinko machine 10, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/effect process, in order to enhance the effect of the effect, an input is monitored to determine whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding effect is set. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

After the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S410
8), and then executes sound editing and output processing (S4109). In the lamp editing processing, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound output device 22
Sound is output from 6.

After the process of S4109, the liquid crystal performance execution management process is executed (S4110).
The LCD performance execution management process (S4110) is shown in FIG.
As will be described later with reference to, the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing and output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the process of S4110, a command determination process (S4111) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of this command determination process (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4112, in order to display the variable display performance in the third symbol display device 81, a variable display setting process is executed, which is a process of generating a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 and setting the command to be sent to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S4117), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The storage of the power-off occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: N
o), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is corrupted based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114). If the RAM 223 is not corrupted (S4114: NO),
o), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is executed repeatedly.
If the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes. If the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a staff member of the hall to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 664. FIG. 664 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4111).
) is a main process ( FIG. 66 ) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.
3) and, as described above, judges the command received from main control device 110. Details of the command judgment process (S4111) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4111), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command memory area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4201). If it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag (special chart 1 variation start flag 223e, special chart 2 variation start flag 223f) corresponding to the special chart type read from the received variation pattern command is set to on (S4202), a variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S4203), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is next determined whether or not the special chart 1 stop type command or the special chart 2 stop type command has been received (S4203). If it is determined that either the special chart 1 stop type command or the special chart 2 stop type command has been received (S4203: Yes),
The stop type selection flag (special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223i) corresponding to the special chart type read from the received stop type command is set to on (S4205), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S4206), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4204, if it is determined that the special 1 stop type command or the special 2 stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4207). If it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command,
The number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c (S4208), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4207, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (S
In the process of S4209, if it is determined that a winning command has been received (S4209),
4209: Yes), the information of the currently received winning command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 2
23b (S4210), and this process ends.

In the process of S4209, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S42
09: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (
If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4211: Yes), a status command reception process is executed (S4212), and the process is terminated. Details of this status command reception process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG.
Based on the state command output from 0, the process of setting the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal state, time-saving state, first special probability state, second special probability state) and the winning game state (big win, small win) in the slave state setting area 223k is terminated, and when a limit-related command is received, the process of setting an update of the limit number is terminated.

Next, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (
If it is determined that a time-saving related command has been received (S4213: Yes), the time-saving related process (S42
14) is executed, and this process ends. The time-saving related process (S4214) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that the time-saving related command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether a winning related command has been received (S4215), and if it is determined that a winning related command has been received (S4215: Yes), the winning related process is executed (S4216), and this process is terminated. Details of the winning related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 670, but it is a process for making the third pattern display device 81 execute a performance display corresponding to a big win game or a small win game that is executed when a big win or a small win is won as a result of the lottery of the special pattern.

In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4215: No), the process is terminated after executing a process according to the other command (S4217).
If it is a command used in the above, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223
If the command is to be used by the display control device 114, the command is stored in the
The command is set so that the command is sent to 14.

The above is the command determination process executed by the voice and lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment (FIG. 6
In the command determination process (S4111),
The order in which various commands are determined to have been received may be an order other than that shown in this embodiment. For example, the determination order may be specified so that the process of determining whether a status command has been received is executed before the process of determining whether either a special chart 1 variation pattern command or a special chart 2 variation pattern command has been received.

By configuring in this way, when the change pattern command and the state command are output from the main control device 110 at the same time, that is, in the first special symbol change start process (see S203 in FIG. 633) of the main control device 110, the first special symbol change pattern selection process (S30 in FIG. 636) is performed.
Even if the above-mentioned process (see 7) is executed to set a special chart 1 variation pattern command, and then a status command indicating that the game status has changed is set, the game status currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined prior to the special chart 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, for example, when the first probability variable state is set and the special jackpot of the special chart 1 is won, and the second probability variable state is set during the jackpot fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113
On the other hand, it is possible to easily set a variation presentation corresponding to a variation pattern command which results in a big win variation in a state where it is determined that the second probability variation state has been set.

In addition, by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to specify the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110, it is possible to reduce the need to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 665, the status command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 665 is a flow chart showing the status command process (S4212). This status command process (S4212)
This is executed in the command determination process (see S4111 in FIG. 664) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and updates the game state and the limit-related game state based on the received game state command and limit-related command.
Based on the updated game status, processing is executed to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the state command process (S4212), first, it is determined whether a game state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4301). If it is determined in the process of S4301 that a game state command has been received (S4301: Yes), a game state update process is executed (S4
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the game status command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4301
: No), proceed to the processing of S4303 described later.

Here, referring to FIG. 666, a game status update process (S4302) which is one process in the status command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.
FIG. 666 is a flow chart showing the contents of the game status update process (S4302).

In the game status update process (S4302), first, information indicating the current game status is extracted from the received game status command, and the information indicating the current game status is stored in the secondary game status storage area 223j (S4401). Next, it is determined whether the received game status command is a command indicating that the game status is to be changed to the normal status (S4402).

In the process of S4402, when it is determined that the received game state command is a command indicating a transition to the normal state (S4402: Yes), the remaining probability change counter 223m
The value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is set to 0 (S4403), and this process is terminated.
On the other hand, in the processing of S4402, if it is determined that the received game state command is not a command indicating that the game state will transition to the normal state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the command indicates that the game state will transition to the second special state (S4404).

In the process of S4404, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating that the game state is to transition to the second probability variable state (S4404: Yes), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is set to 0 (S4405), and this process is terminated.
In the process of 4, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating that the game state is to transition to the second probability variable state (S4404: No), it is next determined whether the received command is a command indicating that the game state is to transition to the time-saving state (S4406).
.

In the process of S4406, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating that the game state is to transition to a time-saving state (S4406: Yes), the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is set to 0 (S4407), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4406, if it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating that the game state is to transition to a time-saving state (S4406: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 665, the description will be continued. After the process of S4301 or S4303 is executed, it is determined whether or not a limit-related command has been received (S4303). If it is determined in the process of S4303 that a limit-related command has been received (S4303: Yes),
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4303 that a limit-related command has not been received (S4303: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4305, which will be described later.

Here, referring to FIG. 667, the limit information update process (S4312) which is one process in the status command process (S4312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.
FIG. 667 is a flow chart showing the contents of the limit information update process (S4304). In the limit information update process (S4304), the main control device 1
Based on the command received from 10, the information regarding the probability change limit and time reduction limit is updated, and a process of setting a command is executed for the display control device 114.

In the limit information update process (S4304), first, it is determined whether or not a special number setting command has been received (S4501). If it is determined that a special number remaining setting command has been received (S4
501: Yes), and calculates the remaining number of chance wins based on the received command (S45
Then, in the process of S4502, the calculated value of the remaining number of chance wins is set to the value of the remaining chance win counter 223m (S4503), and the process proceeds to S4504.
In the process of 4501, if it is determined that the probability change number setting command has not been received (
S4501: No), the processes of S4502 and S4503 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4504.

In the process of S4504, it is determined whether a time-saving count setting command has been received (S4504).
When it is determined that the time-saving count setting command has been received (S4504: Yes), the remaining number of time-saving times is calculated based on the received command (S4505). Next, the value of the remaining number of time-saving times calculated in the process of S4505 is set to the value of the remaining time-saving count counter 223n (S45
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4504 that the time-saving count setting command has not been received (S4504: No), the process proceeds to S4505 to S4506.
The process of step S4506 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S4507.

In the process of S4507, it is determined whether a special bonus count limit command has been received (S4507
In the process of S4507, if it is determined that the special chance limit number command has been received (S4507: Yes), since it is time to update the special chance limit number, the value of the remaining special chance number counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S4508), and the process proceeds to S4509.
In the process of S4507, if it is determined that the special chance limit number command has not been received (S4507: No), the process of S4508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4509.

In the process of S4509, it is determined whether a time-saving limit number command has been received (S4509
If it is determined that the time-saving limit number command has been received (S4509: Yes),
The value of the remaining time-saving count counter 203n is decremented by 1 (S4510), and the process proceeds to S4511. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4509 that the time-saving limit count command has not been received (S4509: No), the process of S4510 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4511.

In the process of S4511, it is determined whether a special limit reaching command has been received (S4511
In the process of S4511, if it is determined that the special chance limit reaching command has been received (S4511: Yes), the special chance limit count has been reached, so the special chance limit flag 223o is set to ON (S4512), the value of the remaining special chance count counter 223m is reset to 0 (S4513), and the process proceeds to S4514. On the other hand, in the process of S4511, if it is determined that the special chance limit reaching command has not been received (S4511: No), the process proceeds to S4514.
o), the processes of S4512 and S4513 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S4514.

In the process of S4514, it is determined whether a time-saving limit reaching command has been received (S4514
If it is determined that the time-saving limit reaching command has been received (S4514: Yes),
Since the time-saving limit number has been reached, the time-saving limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4515), and the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223n is reset to 0 (S4516).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4514 that the time-saving limit reaching command has not been received (S4514: No), the process proceeds to S4515 to S451.
The process of S4506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4517.
Set the display command corresponding to each update information executed in the processes of 1 to S4516 (
S4517) and terminate this process.

Returning to FIG. 665, the description will be continued. In the process of S4303, if it is determined that a limit-related command has not been received (S4303: No), or if the limit information update process (S
After executing step S4304, the processing of the presentation mode setting process (S4305) is then executed.
The detailed description of the rendering mode setting process (S4305) will be described later with reference to FIG. 668. Next, the process corresponding to the information of the other received status command is executed (S43
06) and terminate this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 668, a presentation mode setting process (S4305) which is one process in the state command process (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.
) will be explained. FIG. 668 is a flow chart showing the detailed contents of the presentation mode setting process (S4305). In the presentation mode setting process (S4305), each remaining number counter (remaining probability change number counter 223m, remaining time reduction number counter 223n) and each limit flag (
Based on the setting status of the probability change limit flag 223o and time-saving limit flag 223p and the current game state, a process is executed to set different presentation modes displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the presentation mode setting process (S4305), first, it is determined whether the probability variable limit flag 223o and the time-saving limit flag 223p are both on (S4601). If it is determined that the probability variable limit flag 223o and the time-saving limit flag 223p are both on (
S4601: Yes), since the probability variation limit number and the time-saving limit number are reached at the same time, data indicating the SPECIAL mode is stored in the performance mode storage area 223k (
S4602) and then proceed to processing of S4605.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that none of the probability change limit flags 223o are on (S4601: No), each remaining number counter (remaining probability change number counter 22
3m, remaining time reduction counter 223n) and each limit flag (variable limit flag 223o
, time-saving limit flag 223p) and the current game state, the presentation mode selection table 222b (see FIG. 622) is referenced to determine the presentation mode to be executed (
Next, the presentation mode determined in the process of S4603 is stored in the presentation mode storage area 223k (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4605, which will be described later.

After S4602 or S4604 is executed, next, S4602 or S460
In process 4, a display command corresponding to the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode storage area 223k is set (S4605), and this process is terminated.

The display command set here is output to the command output process (
In S4102), this command is sent to the display control device 114, and when the display control device 114 receives this command, various performance modes are displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 669, the time-saving related process (S4214) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 669 shows the time-saving related process (S4
This time-saving related process (S4214) is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S4 in FIG. 664) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.
111), and is a process for updating the presentation of the time-saving game state (EXTRA mode) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the progress of the time-saving game state when a time-saving related command is received from the main control device 110.

When the time-saving related process (S4214) is executed, first, the information on the performance mode stored in the performance mode storage area 223k is read (S4701).
In the process of 1, it is determined whether the read-out presentation mode is the EXTRA mode (S4
702). If it is determined that the read-out presentation mode is the EXTRA mode (S4
702: Yes), and updates the value of the time-saving counter 223u based on the received information (S
4703).

Next, whether the value of the time-saving counter 223u updated in the process of S4703 is 10 or not
That is, it is determined whether the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state is 10 (S4704).
If the updated value of the time-saving counter 223u is not 10 (S4704: No), a display command corresponding to the value of the time-saving counter 223u is set (S4705), and the process ends. The display command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 663), and is output to the display control device 114.
When 14 receives this command, it updates and displays the remaining number of changes in the time-saving play state (the remaining number of changes in the EXTRA challenge) displayed in the display area Dm6 of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 shown in Figure 600 (a).

On the other hand, in the process of S4704, the time-saving counter 2 updated in the process of S4703
If it is determined that the value of 23u is 10 (S4704: Yes), the presentation mode prompting the user to end the EXTRA mode is set (S4706), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S4702 that the presentation mode read in the process of S4701 is not the EXTRA mode (i.e., it is a presentation mode other than the EXTRA mode) (S4702: No),
), steps S4703 to S4706 are skipped, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 670, a hit-related process (S4216) which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 664) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.
FIG. 670 is a flow chart showing the contents of the winning-related process (S4216). In this winning-related process (S4216), a process is performed to make the third symbol display device 81 execute a performance display corresponding to a big win game or a small win game that is executed when a big win or a small win is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, and processes corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed when a big win or a small win is won.

In addition, when a prize ball number command is received to indicate the number of prize balls won during a winning game (jackpot game, small win game), a process is executed to accumulate the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command and set a prize ball number command for display based on the accumulated result.

In the win-related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received from the main control device 110 is a big win-related command (S4801). If it is determined that the received command is a big win-related command (S4801: Yes), the big win-related process is executed (S4802), and then this process is terminated.

Here, referring to FIG. 671, a big win-related process (S4216 in FIG. 670) which is one process in the win-related process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.
FIG. 671 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big win related process (S4802). In the big win related process, a process is performed to make the third symbol display device 81 execute a performance display corresponding to the big win game executed when the big win is won, and when the big win is won, a process corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the big win related process (S4802), first, the winning related process (S4801 in FIG. 670)
) to determine whether the received win-related command is a jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4902).
The display big win start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the main process (FIG. 663).
In the command output process (S4102) of the command output process (see FIG. 11), the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command and displays an effect suggesting the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

After the process of S4902 is executed, the current presentation mode is read from the presentation mode storage area 223k (S4903). Then, in the process of S4903, it is determined whether the read presentation mode is the normal mode or the time-saving mode (S4904).
If it is determined that the read-out presentation mode is the normal mode or the time-saving mode (S4904: Yes), the presentation mode of the RUSH acquisition challenge corresponding to the type of big win that has been won this time is determined (S4905). Then, a display command for showing the presentation mode determined in the process of S4905 is set (S4906), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the presentation mode read out in the process of S4903 is neither the normal mode nor the time-saving mode (S49
04: No), and a presentation mode corresponding to the type of the big win that has been won this time is determined (S4907).
This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4901 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received (S4
If it is determined that the round count command has been received (S4908: Yes),
A display round number command is set based on the round number (S4909), and then this process is terminated. In this embodiment, since information indicating the round number is transmitted as a round number command from the main control device 110, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command, but for example, in a configuration in which information indicating that a new round has started is transmitted from the main control device 110 as a round update command in order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the main control device 110, a round number accumulation counter that accumulates the number of received round update commands when a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 may be provided, and the voice lamp control device 113 may calculate the current round number based on the value of the round number accumulation counter and set the display round number command.

On the other hand, in the process of S4908, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4908: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S4908).
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4910 that an ending command has been received (S4910: Yes), the process proceeds to S4911.

In the process of S4911, the game state to be set after the big win game ends is predicted based on the information stored in the secondary game state storage area 223j and the type of the big win being executed (S
4911), and a presentation mode corresponding to the game state predicted in the processing of S4911 is determined (
S4912), and set the display ending command including the determined performance mode (S491
3) End this process.

Returning to FIG. 670, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4801, if it is determined that the received command is not a big win related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a small win related command (S4803). If it is determined that the received command is a small win related command (S4803: Yes), a small win related process (S4804) is executed, and then this process is terminated.

Here, referring to FIG. 672, a small win-related process (S4216 in FIG. 670) which is one process in the win-related process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.
FIG. 672 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small win related process (S4804). In the small win related process, a process is performed to make the third symbol display device 81 execute a performance display corresponding to the small win game executed when the small win is won, and when the small win is won, a process corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the small win related process (S4804), first, the win related process (S4216 in FIG. 670) is performed.
In the process of S5001, if it is determined that a small win start command has been received (S5001: Yes), a display small win start command is set (S5001).
2), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the received command is not a small win start command (S5001: No), it is next determined whether an ending command has been received (S5003). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S5003: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S5003: Yes), the current presentation mode is read from the presentation mode storage area 223k (S5004).

Next, it is determined whether the presentation mode read in the process of S5004 is the revenge mode (S5005). If it is determined that the current presentation mode is the revenge mode (S5006),
5005: Yes), the value of the small win counter 223t is incremented by 1 (S5006), and then the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is read (S5007).
Based on the value of the small win counter 223t incremented in the processing of S5006 and the value of the remaining special chance counter 223m read in the processing of S5007, the challenge mode transition table 222d (see Figure 624 (c)) is referred to to determine whether or not to transition to the challenge mode (S5008).

Next, it is determined whether or not a transition to the challenge mode has been determined (S5009). If it is determined that a transition to the challenge mode has been determined (S5009: Yes), the challenge mode is stored in the presentation mode storage area 223k (S5010), a display command including a presentation mode corresponding to the transition to the challenge mode is set (S5011), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5005 that the read presentation mode is not revenge mode (S5005: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S5008 that it has been decided not to transition to challenge mode (S5009: No), a display command including the corresponding presentation mode is set (S5012), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 670, the explanation will continue. In the process of S4803, if it is determined that the received command is not a small win related command (S4803: No), it is then determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), this process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of a prize ball counter (not shown) (S4806),
A display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition is set (S4807
), and then this process ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the state command receiving process (see S4212 in FIG. 665), the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the normal state or the period until the first probability variable state is set (advantageous continuation period) is accumulated in the prize ball number counter. Then, during a winning game (big win game, small win game) or during the second probability variable state, the number of prize balls according to the accumulated value of the prize ball number counter is displayed.

By configuring it in this manner, the cumulative number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous continuation period) from when the second special probability state is set to when the normal state (first special probability state) is set again can be clearly notified to the player.

In this embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but any configuration that can notify the player of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period may be used. For example, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period may be displayed separately for the number of prize balls acquired during the big win game and the number of prize balls acquired during the small win game. In this case, it is preferable to provide a means for determining the winning game state (big win, small win) at the time when the prize ball command is received based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223k, and accumulating the number of prize balls for each determination result. This makes it easy to separate the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired during one game period (the period including the jackpot game period and the second probability variable state period until the next jackpot game is executed) during the advantageous continuation period may be accumulated and displayed. In this case, a storage means may be provided for storing the accumulated number of prize balls acquired during one game period as history information, and the information stored in the storage means may be displayed as history.

Furthermore, as described above, when using a configuration that cumulatively displays the number of winning balls won within the advantageous continuation period, it may be configured to display the number of times that the lottery result for the special pattern has been a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (jackpot, small win), or to display the lottery probability that the lottery result for the special pattern has been a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (jackpot, small win).

By configuring it in this manner, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the results of the lottery for the special symbols executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of winning balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, which makes the player more motivated to play.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second probability variable state is configured to continue unless a special symbol jackpot is won while the second probability variable state is set, and the second probability variable state is configured to make it easier to play small prize games (easy to execute special symbol 2 lottery). Therefore, during the advantageous continuation period, the player plays with anticipation not only of winning a jackpot for which an advantageous continuation period is set again, but also of not winning a jackpot for a long period of time.

In such a case, it is preferable to configure the display to display a display mode that allows the player to understand how the actual game content (the result of the special drawing 2) is compared to the probability of winning the big prize and the probability of winning the small prize that are preset in the pachinko machine 10. By using such a configuration, for example, in a case where the actual probability of winning the big prize is lower than the preset probability of winning the big prize, the number of small prize games executed during the second probability change state increases and many prize balls can be obtained,
Since the actual probability of winning a small prize is higher than the preset probability of winning a small prize, the number of small prize games executed during the second probability variable state increases, and the player can distinguish between the case where many prize balls are won and the case where the number of prize balls is increased during the second probability variable state. Therefore, by having the player analyze the number of prize balls won during the advantageous continuation period, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content and make it easier for him to continue playing.

Furthermore, when the game contents (the lottery result of the special symbol) during the advantageous continuation period meet a predetermined condition, a notification means may be provided to execute a condition achievement notification to indicate that fact. For example, a condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of special symbol lotteries (so-called stuck number of times) executed until the big win is won exceeds a predetermined number (100 times), or a condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of lotteries of special symbol 2) executed between small wins exceeds a predetermined number (10 times). Also, a condition achievement notification may be executed to indicate that the number of prize balls acquired in one game pattern exceeds a predetermined number (5000).

Next, referring to Fig. 673, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Fig. 673 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112 in Fig. 673) is one process of the main process (see Fig. 663) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4112 in Fig. 673) is a process of the main process (see Fig. 663) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.
4112) executes a process of setting a display variable pattern command for the first special pattern or the second special pattern based on the first or special pattern 2 variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display a variable display performance on the third pattern display device 81, and transmitting the command to the display control device 114. Also, executes a process of setting a display special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type based on the extracted stop type (jackpot A to jackpot D).

In the variable display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special chart 1 variable start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variable start flag 223e is OFF (S5101: No), the special chart 1 variable pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so S5106
On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5101: Yes), the special chart 1 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S510
2).

Then, in the processing of S4302 of the special pattern 1 fluctuation start processing (see S4202 of FIG. 640) executed in the command judgment processing (see S4111 of FIG. 664), a fluctuation pattern command for displaying the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is set based on the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation performance extracted from the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 (S5103), and the first
The value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S5104), the special symbol 1 variable effect setting process is executed (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106 for setting the variable display for the second special symbol (special symbol 2). A detailed explanation of the special symbol 1 variable effect setting process (S5105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 674. On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 variable start flag 223e is not on (S5101: No), it is not the timing to start the variable display of the first special symbol, so the processes of S5102 to S5105 are skipped,
This process ends.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5103 is
The command output process (S410 in FIG. 663) executed in the main process of Jpn.
2) to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 creates display data to be displayed in the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and various display commands for indicating the game state.

After executing the process of S5101 or the process of S5105, when the process of S5106 is executed, first, it is determined whether the special chart 2 variation start flag 223f is on (S5106).
If it is determined that the special chart 2 variation start flag 223f is set to on (S5106
: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation start flag 223f is set to OFF (S5107), and a variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern command (S5108). Then, the special symbol 2 variation performance setting process is executed (S5109), and S5110
The process proceeds to step S5106. A detailed description of the special chart 2 variation performance setting process (S5109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 675. On the other hand, in the process of S5106, the special chart 2 variation start flag 2
If it is determined that 23f is not on, that is, it is not the timing to start the variation of the second special symbol (S5106: No), the process of S5107 to S5109 is skipped and the process of S5110 is performed.
Then proceed to processing.

When the process of S5106 or S5109 is executed, it is next determined whether the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on (S5110). If it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223i is not set to on (S5110: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to on (S5110: Yes),
), the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S5111), the extracted stop type is set as is (S5112), the special chart 1 or special chart 2 stop type command for display is set (S5113), and this processing is terminated.

As explained above, this embodiment is configured so that the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and is configured so that the drawing of the second special pattern makes it easier to win a drawing result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player) than the drawing of the first special pattern.

The type of special symbol that is likely to be drawn is made variable depending on the game state that is set, and when a specific first game state (for example, a first special probability state) is set, the drawing of the second special symbol is made likely to be performed, and when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol during the first game state, the first game state is set again.

Furthermore, in order to make it easier to draw the first special symbol during the second special probability state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed even when the normal state, which is also a low probability state for normal symbols, is set, so that a long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set in order to prevent the drawing of the second special symbol from being executed frequently during the normal state.

However, in a gaming machine configured in this manner, in the normal state, it is possible to execute a lottery for the second special symbol, although this is inefficient, and if the player wins a jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol, there is a problem in that the lottery result given to the player is advantageous.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, when the normal state is set and a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, the drawing of the second special symbol is forced to stop as a miss, so that when the normal state is set, it is set so that the second special symbol is less likely to win a jackpot.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, during a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot, a ball may pass through a specific area provided in the winning device, so that a high probability state for a special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 674, a special chart 1 variable performance setting process (S511) which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.
FIG. 674 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 1 variable performance setting process (S5105).

When the special chart 1 variable performance setting process (S5105) is executed, first, the information of the performance mode storage area 223k is read (S5201). Next, the read performance mode is
It is determined whether the presentation mode is the super rush mode, the rush mode, the EXTRA mode, or the SPECIAL mode (S5202). If it is determined that the read presentation mode is the super rush mode, the rush mode, the EXTRA mode, or the SPECIAL mode (S5202: Yes), it is determined whether the variation of the first special symbol to be executed this time is a big win variation (S5203).

In the process of S5203, if it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol executed this time is a big win variation (S5203: Yes), a value corresponding to the current variation time is set in the specific variation time counter 223q (S5204), the presentation mode of the variation pattern presentation according to the game state and the lottery result of the special symbol is set (S5205), and this process is terminated.
In the process of 203, if it is determined that the fluctuation to be executed this time is not a big win fluctuation (i.e., a small win fluctuation or a miss fluctuation) (S5203: No), the process of S5204 is skipped, the process of S5205 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5202 that the read presentation mode is not one of the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, or SPECIAL mode (S5202: No), the processing of S5205 described above is executed and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 675, a special chart 2 variable performance setting process (S5111) which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.
FIG. 675 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 2 variable performance setting process (S5109).

In the special chart 2 variable performance setting process (S5109), first, information on the currently set performance mode is read from the performance mode storage area 223k (S5301). Next, the read performance mode is the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, S
It is determined whether the current presentation mode is one of the SPECIAL modes (S5302: Yes).
The performance modes read out are Super Rush Mode, Rush Mode, EXTRA Mode, and SP.
If it is determined that the mode is not one of the E-motion modes (S5302: No
), the presentation mode of the variable pattern presentation according to the current game state and the result of the special symbol lottery is set (S5314), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5302, if it is determined that the read-out presentation mode is one of the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode (S5302: Yes), it is determined whether the variation of the second special symbol executed this time is a big win variation (S5303). If it is determined that the variation of the special symbol executed this time is a big win variation (S5303: Yes), the above-mentioned process of S5314 is executed and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation of the special symbol executed this time is not a big win variation (i.e., a miss variation) (S5303: No), it is determined whether the current presentation mode read-out in the process of S5302 is a rush mode (S5304).

In the process of S5304, if it is determined that the currently set presentation mode is not the rush mode (i.e., it is one of the presentation modes of the super rush mode, the EXTRA mode, or the SPECIAL mode) (S5304: No), the above-mentioned process of S5314 is executed and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently set presentation mode is the rush mode (S5304: Yes), it is determined whether the notification upper limit flag 223s is on (S5305). If it is determined that the notification upper limit flag 223s is on (S5306), the process is terminated.
5305: Yes), execute the above-mentioned processing of S5314, and terminate this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S5305, if it is determined that the notification upper limit flag 223s is not on (S5305: No), the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is read (
S5306), and then the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is read (S
Then, based on the values of the remaining probability change counter 223m and the notified stock number counter 223r read in the processes of S5306 and S5307, the stock notification number selection table 222c (see FIG. 624(a)) is referenced to determine the stock notification number (S5308).

Next, it is determined whether there is a stock notification determined in the process of S5308 (S5309
If it is determined that there is no stock notification (S5309: No), the above-mentioned S5314
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a stock notification (S
5309: Yes), and sets the presentation mode corresponding to the determined stock notification number (S5310
), and proceed to processing S5311.

In the process of S5311, it is determined whether the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is the upper limit value (S5311). If it is determined that the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is the upper limit value (S5311: Yes), the notified upper limit flag 223s is set to ON (S5312).
), the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is cleared to 0 (S5313), and the above-mentioned S
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5311 that the value of the notified stock number counter 223r is not the upper limit value (S5311: NO), the process ends.
o), execute the processing of S5314 described above, and then terminate this processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 676, a liquid crystal performance execution management process (S4110) is performed, which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 663) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.
FIG. 676 is a flow chart showing the contents of the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110).

In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S4110), first, it is determined whether the value of the specific variation time counter 223q is greater than 0 (S5401). That is, it is determined whether the big win variation is being executed in any of the performance modes of the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode. If it is determined that the value of the specific variation time counter 223q is greater than 0 (S5402: Yes),
The value is updated (S5402), and the process proceeds to S5403.

In the process of S5403, the specific variable time counter 22 updated in the process of S5402 is
It is determined whether the remaining variation time indicated by the updated value of 3q is 60 seconds (S5403). If it is determined that the remaining variation time indicated by the updated value of the specific variation time counter 223q is 60 seconds (S5403: Yes), a display command for prompting the execution of the variation of the second special symbol is set (S5404), other processing related to the performance is executed (S5407), a display command for indicating the performance mode based on the update result is set (S5408), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the remaining fluctuation time indicated by the updated value of the specific fluctuation time counter 223q is not 60 seconds (S5403: No), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time indicated by the updated value of the specific fluctuation time counter 223q is 10 seconds (S5405).
If it is determined that the remaining variation time indicated by the updated value of the specific variation time counter 223q is 10 seconds (S5405: Yes), a display command is set to display a display mode indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big win (S5406), and the above-mentioned S5
The process of steps S407 to S5408 is executed, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the value of the specific variable time counter 223q is not greater than 0 (S5401: No), the above-mentioned S5407 to S540
8 is executed, and the process ends.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figs. 677 to 691. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 677. Fig. 677 is a flow chart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing an initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following procedure.
When the power is turned on to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released,
The PU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" by its hardware configuration, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240.
The OM controller 234b receives the address "0000H" from the bus line 240.
When it is detected that the program is
The boot program stored in the character RO1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.
It fetches the instruction code received from M234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character R
When the OM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c.
31 consumes a lot of waiting time from when it designates the address "0000H" to when it receives the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time it takes to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234.
Since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the NOR type ROM.
The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the MPU 234d can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H".
The main processing can be started in a short time in U231. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls can be executed for the third pattern display device 81.

Now, with reference to FIG. 678, the boot process (S6001) will be described.
6 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed during main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. Therefore,
This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, thereby reducing manufacturing costs and suppressing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are directly read and processed by the DRA.
The program transfer section 233 executes a process of transferring the program data to a program storage area 233a and a data table storage area 233b provided in a work RAM 233 constituted by M and storing the program data therein.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101.

In addition, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6102.
By setting the predetermined address, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
Instead of reading out the control program from the D-type flash memory 234a and fetching instructions, the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a is read out and instructions are fetched to execute various processes.
Since M233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed.
Even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured from the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing according to those instructions.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the N
The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the AND-type flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 677) to be executed after completion of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 677) (S6105), thereby completing execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow readout speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM composed of DRAM which has a fast readout speed and perform various controls, so that high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114 and diversified and complex presentations can be easily executed using the auxiliary presentation unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions starting from the instruction to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, it becomes possible to start up MPU 231 in a short time, and therefore it is possible to suppress the increase in cost of character ROM 234 that accompanies the shortening of the time.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 678, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes the first program storage area 234d.
It is configured to include all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in 1,
However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 may be a part of the boot program that executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer only a predetermined amount of control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The process of transferring a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated a plurality of times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then execute the processes of S6103 to S6105.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but the entire boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This makes it unnecessary to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so the boot program can be stored in the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a.
Since the number of times the program is transferred to the MPU 231 is reduced, the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary performance unit in the MPU 231, which is enabled after the boot process, can be started more quickly.

Returning now to the explanation of FIG. 677, when the boot process is completed, the work RAM 23
The MPU 231 executes an initial setting process in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the MPU 231 (S6002).
It also performs various settings for registers in the MPU 231 and for I/O devices. It also performs settings for the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, and the like.
The memory of M236 is cleared. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of power-on main image area 235a which is the transfer destination. Image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction.

When the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231 to indicate the end of the transfer.
By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction, MPU 231 may write transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer to a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. Then, MPU 231 may read information from this register or the partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detect the writing of the transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the process of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes:
The instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on varying image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on varying image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on varying image area 235b is then held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the transfer setting process (FIG. 689 (
In step a), the image controller 23 transfers all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
7, a resident image transfer setting process is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 689A).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 679(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 679(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) (not shown) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 679(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 thirdly.
By displaying the image on the pattern display device 81, the remaining image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 80.
235, players and hall staff can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Meanwhile, players and the like can recognize that some kind of initialization process is being carried out while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and therefore can easily transfer the remaining image data to the resident video RAM 235.
Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
You can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that the device may be stopped while the data is being transferred to the computer.

In addition, during operation checks at factories during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the character ROM 2
By using the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the memory 34, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after power-on, the power-on variable image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, the right first ball entrance 64b2, or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image is displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been drawn reliably by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the power-on main image. However, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the transfer takes time, so the time for which the power-on main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on is also long. However, in this pachinko machine 10
Since a simple change effect can be produced using the power-on change image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after the power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the process of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to Fig. 679(a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Fig. 679(a) is a flow chart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interruption process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in sequence in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6
The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to Fig. 679(b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Fig. 679(b) is a flow chart showing the V interruption process. In this V interruption process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is specified, and then a drawing list of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt process is started by detecting a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237. The V interrupt signal is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed in the image controller 237, and is output to the MPU 231.
Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds, which is the time when drawing process for one frame of image is completed.
In this case, a drawing instruction for the next image is not received before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 679(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third symbol display device 81 instead of a power-on image, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.
) to run the command.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. In addition, if a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
Set to.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is performed, and therefore it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the start of the variable performance is determined in the main control device 110, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 680 to 685.

In the display setting process (S6303), the third display data is set based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like.
The content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 81 is specifically specified. Also, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is stored in the display data table buffer 2.
33d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, based on the content of the next frame of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the resident video RA is notified to the image controller 237.
Image data to be resident in the M235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 23
5 to a predetermined area of the normal video RAM 236. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and also when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figs. 689 and 690.

Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the task process (S63
The CPU 231 generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 630 from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in step S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237.
Then, in accordance with the drawing list, image drawing processing is executed (S6306). Note that details of the drawing processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S63
07). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big win A,
A stop type table corresponding to a big win B, front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, and complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so the power-on image is displayed as the third pattern display device 81.
In order to display the command, a simplified command determination process (S6308) is executed, and then a simplified display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to Fig. 680 to Fig. 685, a description will be given of details of the command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Fig. 680 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in Fig. 680, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6303) to notify the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state.
402), and then analyzes the type of each of the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes),
), executes variable pattern command processing (S6405), and returns to processing of S6401.

Here, referring to Fig. 681 (a), the details of the variation pattern command process (S6405) will be described. Fig. 681 (a) is a flow chart showing the variation pattern command process (S6405). This variation pattern command process (S6405) executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation performance pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control device 110 always judges the start of the variation at least several seconds apart, so it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern having a long variable time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, when a variable performance having a shorter variable time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110,
While the third pattern display device 81 was displaying a variable performance according to the set variable display data table, the next display variable pattern command would be received from the main control device 110, and another variable display would suddenly start, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality,
Even if the main control device 110 has instructed a variable performance having a longer variable time than the set display data table, as described later, the display data table buffer 2
After the varying presentation in accordance with 33d has ended, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed until the next display pattern command is received from the main control device 110, so that the player can continue to watch the variation of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set it in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the change time of the change pattern corresponding to the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the change time is set in the clock counter 233h (
S6503), and initialize the pointer 233f to 0 (S6504).Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, the display setting process goes to S650.
While updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and the third pattern display device 8
At the same time as specifying the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in S6501, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502, and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance in the character R.
The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the OM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

In addition, in the display setting process, the time of the variable performance defined in the variable display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503,
When it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table is to end, the main control device 11
The settings of the stop display are controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from 0 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning now to the explanation of FIG. 680, in the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and S6
Return to the process of 401.

The stop type command process (S6407) will now be described in detail with reference to Fig. 681(b), which is a flowchart showing the stop type command process.
This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of big win A to D, small win A, reach miss, or complete miss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 679 (b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable performance to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command judgment processing.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
As the type information for identifying the symbol, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described.
) After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S6603,
The symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process is added to the identified stop symbol to identify the third symbol to be actually displayed.
The address where the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

In addition, since the main control device 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, in reality,
Even if the special symbol is a miss, the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a special symbol jackpot, which may lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 has hit a special symbol jackpot, thereby lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss as in this embodiment, if the special symbol is a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 will hit a special symbol jackpot even if the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol that is a complete miss, which makes the player happy.

Returning to FIG. 680, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is a display opening command (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409).
), and return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to Fig. 682 (a). Fig. 682 (a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. This opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment process.

Returning to FIG. 680, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and if there is a display round number command (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411).
Then, return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to Fig. 682(b). Fig. 682(b) is a flow chart showing the round number command process. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command process, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801).
The contents are cleared by writing null data to 33e (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, the time data representing the performance time is read from the timing counter 2
33h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), the number of rounds command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 680, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for display (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S641
3) Return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to Fig. 683. Fig. 683 is a flow chart showing the ending command process. This ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904).
Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 680, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display presentation mode command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and if there is a display presentation mode command (S6414: Yes), the presentation mode command process is executed (S6415).
Then, return to processing S6401.

Here, the details of the presentation mode command process (S6415) will be described with reference to Fig. 684 (a). Fig. 684 (a) is a flowchart showing the presentation mode command process. This presentation mode command process executes a process corresponding to the presentation mode command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the presentation mode command process, first, the presentation mode display data table indicated by the presentation mode command for display is determined, and the determined presentation mode display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6932).

Next, based on the presentation mode display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, the time data representing the presentation time is read from the timing counter 2
33h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6935), the presentation mode command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 680, the description will be continued. In the process of S6414, if it is determined that there is no display performance mode command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a display notification command (S6417),
6416: Yes), executes display notification command processing (S6417), and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the notification command process (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 684(b). Fig. 684(b) is a flowchart showing the notification command process. This notification command process executes a process corresponding to a notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command is one of various notification commands that are set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command for indicating various abnormal conditions set by the main control device 110.
This is a process that is executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command that has been output to the display control device 114 .

In the notification command process, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, the time data representing the performance time is read from the timing counter 23
3h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the notification command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In this embodiment, the display control device 114 is configured to distinguish only the display commands indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to first receive related commands other than display commands, such as light emission commands, voice output commands, and character drive commands, and output the related commands to the corresponding control device with the addition of information indicating the data content (display mode) set by the processing of the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 680, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a rear image change command (S6419),
418: Yes), executes a rear image change command process (S6419), and returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to Fig. 685 (a). Fig. 685 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the rear image accompanying the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001).
Of the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each image, the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to on, and the bits corresponding to the other rear image types are set to off (S7002), the rear image change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, the background image change flag 2 set in the process of S7001 is
When it is detected that the flag 33w is turned on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the processing of S7002.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, and further, the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

In addition, since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds,
Two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 0 milliseconds, and therefore when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area; however, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command.
In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change of the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning now to the description of FIG. 680, if it is determined in the process of S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command (S6420: Y
es), executes error command processing (S6421), and returns to the processing of S6401.

Here, the error command process (S6421) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 685(b). Fig. 685(b) is a flow chart showing the error command process. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7102), the error command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command discrimination process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by processing S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by processing S7102, and a processing is performed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the hall staff can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Returning now to the explanation of Fig. 680, if it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, S6401 to S6422 are repeated until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area.
The process of S6402 is repeatedly executed, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process is terminated.

In addition, the simple command judgment process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 679(b)) is also processed similarly to the command judgment process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 681(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 681(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to the commands.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 681 (a)) executed in this case, in the processing of S6501, a display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to Fig. 686 to Fig. 688, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 686 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in Fig. 686, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, i.e., if it is off (S7201: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped and the process moves to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), the processes of S7203 to S7204 are executed,
Execute the processing corresponding to the new command.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203
If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 687. FIG. 687 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to ON on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S73
01).

In the task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning now to the description of FIG. 686, after the warning image setting process (S7204) or
If it is determined in the process of S7203 that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, a pointer update process is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 688. FIG. 688 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process is executed by the display data table buffer 233.
This is processing for updating a pointer 233f that designates an address for obtaining transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401).
That is, the pointer 233f is updated so that, in principle, it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed.
Start information is written at address "0H", and the entity of each data is address "0
If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process.
In turn, actual data can be read out from each data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S74
02). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403). If it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), the time counter 23 counts up the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.
3h (S7404), and initialize the pointer 233f by setting it to 1 (S7405).
This process is terminated and the display setting process is returned to. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 8
1, a demo presentation can be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S74
03: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.
If a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in 33d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (
S7402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning now to Fig. 686, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the previously expanded warning image, the type of sprites (display objects) constituting the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the decrement is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: No), the process returns to the V interrupt process.
208: Yes), which means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stationary display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on or not (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (
S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the final display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag, which indicates that the final display performance is in progress in the ON state, is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is stored in the work RAM as it is.
The process then copies the result to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided at 233 (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display performance of the stopped pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table. In the task process (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is specified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process is added to the specified stop pattern to specify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes),
s), and determine whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display performance, so after a certain time has passed since the end of the final display performance, a process is performed to display the demo performance on the third symbol display device 81.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag indicating that the demo performance is being performed in the on state is set to on (S7221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

This makes it possible to set the drawing content so that if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes),
After the final display effect is finished, the demo effect is performed, and since this means that the demo effect has ended, the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process.
As described above, various settings are made by the pointer update process executed during the interrupt processing so that the demo performance will start again, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, in the simple display setting process (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 679(b)), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the performance time of the power-on variable image has ended, a process is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time.

Next, with reference to Fig. 689 and Fig. 690, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Fig. 689(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (
S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Y
es), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the character ROM 2
Since the image data has not been transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to image controller 237 for transferring image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 689(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7501, the simple image display flag 233c is not on.
If it is off (S7501: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the V
Return to the interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from character ROM 234 is to normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to Fig. 689(b), a description will be given of the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 689(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not yet been transferred has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602).
In the process of S7602, after issuing an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to S7603.
Also, if the result of the processing in S7601 indicates that a transfer instruction for the untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process also proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (
S7603: No), and sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list.
The start and end addresses of H.234, and the destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM
The image controller 23 includes the start address of the transfer destination (an area in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident image data to be transferred is to be stored).
Based on this transfer data information, CPU 237 executes image transfer processing, reads out image data designated in the transfer processing from character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to a designated address in resident video RAM 235 while resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, when the transfer is completed, CPU 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231.

As a result of the process of S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603
: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 679(b)), the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 679(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 679(b)) are
Since the command determination process (see Figs. 680 to 685) and the display setting process (see Figs. 686 to 688) are executed instead of the normal image transfer process (see Fig. 309), the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see Fig. 690) (see S7501: No in Fig. 689(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all of the resident video R images, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variable image, which have already been transferred in the main process.
All resident target image data that should be resident in the AM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it is held without being overwritten while the power is on.
The image data transferred to the video RAM 35 is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 236.
After the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be read from the NAND flash memory 234, which has a slow read speed, during image drawing.
Since there is no need to read out corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as a, the time required for such reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third patterns, character patterns, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display has been determined by the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, with reference to Fig. 690, a description will be given of a normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 690 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the process of S7702, the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null.
If the data is received (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7705), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7705: Yes),
Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after an instruction to transfer image data has been set for the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, if the result of the process of S7705 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S7705: No),
), and proceed to processing of S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S7707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data to be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the background image change flag 233w is on or not (S7709). Then, if the background image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), image data to be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed. After the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710),
Among the rear image discrimination flags 233x provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). This determination in the process of S7713 is made by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the process of S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.
Since there is no need to transfer the image data to the AM 236, the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the display control device 114
This reduces the processing load on each unit and reduces the traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred should be stored).
The transfer data information includes the start address of the image data. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715).
This normal transfer setting process is then terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "OFF".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a big win stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance is transferred to the character RO without delay.
In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred to the character ROM 236 without delay.
234 to a normal video RAM 236.

In this embodiment, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110,
As the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d,
The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 2.
Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred to image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information written in the area pointed to by pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in transfer data table buffer 233e, so that image data of sprites used in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

Here, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specified address so that image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the transfer data table, a character RO is
The transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the M234 to the normal video RAM 236. This allows the transfer of the image data to be managed for each sprite, and
Since the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be controlled on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in the load imposed by the transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

Next, with reference to Fig. 691, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 691 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates,
The drawing list (FIG. 630) is generated from the transfer instructions set by the transfer setting process (S6305), including the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information.
In other words, in the process of S7801, the task process (S6304) is generated.
From the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in (a) above, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite, and the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the image for one frame in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest behind the sprite that should be placed furthest in the foreground, and detailed drawing information (
A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as the detailed information (detailed information). Also, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the image storage area 2 of the normal video RAM 236
Since the sub-area of 36a is fixed, the MPU 231 determines the sub-area according to the sprite type as follows:
The type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and this information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer flag 233
The drawing target buffer information specified by j is sent to the image controller (S780
2). In this case, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is to be expanded, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing that the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c is to be expanded.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and overwrites them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

Also, if the drawing list contains transfer data information,
The start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RA
M236), and the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and written to the buffer RAM
After temporarily storing the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to an area of the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the transfer destination top address when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image is drawn in accordance with the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with a drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer.
In addition, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the process of S7802, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S
7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., if the value was "0", it is updated to "
If the drawing list is transmitted, the drawing target buffer is set to "0" if the drawing list is transmitted.
The frame buffer 236c is alternately set to the frame buffer 236d.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.
This is performed every time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 679(b)) executed by 231 is executed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer that develops one frame of image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer that develops one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out are alternately specified every 20 milliseconds, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, so that one frame's worth of image can be continuously displayed in 20 millisecond units while one frame's worth of image is being drawn. In the first embodiment, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out.
Although the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel, this is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state where one variable display is executed, other variable displays may be configured to be impossible to execute. And, when there is a reserved ball, the variable display may be executed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest initial winning time. By configuring in this way, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the upper limit for the number of times that the "high probability state of special symbols" is set in succession (number of times of consecutive special symbol settings) and the upper limit for the number of times that the "high probability state of normal symbols" is set in succession (number of times of consecutive regular symbol settings) are configured to be separately updated and managed, and in a state in which it is determined that the "first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)" which is a game state advantageous to the player is set, when the number of consecutive special symbol settings reaches the upper limit (when the probability variable limit is reached), a "time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)" in which the "high probability state of special symbols" is changed to a "low probability state of special symbols" can be set, and when the number of consecutive regular symbol settings reaches the upper limit (when the time-saving limit is reached), a "second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols)" in which the "high probability state of normal symbols" is changed to a "low probability state of normal symbols" can be set.

Furthermore, the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set consecutively (the number of times of consecutive special symbol setting) is configured to be greater than the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set consecutively (the number of times of consecutive normal symbol setting). In addition, during the high probability period of the special symbol in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively, more prize balls can be awarded to the player than in the first period in which the first probability state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol) is set than in the second period in which the second probability state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set.

By configuring in this way, when a jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and the first probability state is set, first
The period is set until the time-saving limit is reached, and then the second period is set.

Therefore, after the first game capable of awarding many prize balls to the player is executed for a first period,
Since it becomes possible to execute the second game in which it is difficult to award prize balls during the second period, it is possible to prevent the first game from being executed excessively in succession and the player from being awarded excessive prize balls.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, the length of the first period during which the first game can be played is the period from when the first probability variable state is set to when the time-saving limit is reached (until the second probability variable state is set) (10 jackpot wins), and the length of the second period during which the second game can be played is the period from when the second probability variable state is set to when the probability variable limit is reached (30 jackpot wins). In this way, by configuring the lengths of the first period and the second period set within the special chart high probability period to be configurable based on the number of jackpot wins, the length of the period during which the special chart high probability period is set can be managed.

More specifically, in the first period in which the first probability variable state is set, the variation time of the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (1 second) regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery, and the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is always constant (10 rounds). In other words, the length of the first period is configured not to differ depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed or the content of the jackpot game executed.

By configuring in this way, in a high probability state of the special symbol (jackpot probability 30/1000), the first jackpot is generated for a length corresponding to the period until 10 jackpot wins (number of times the special symbol changes).
The period can be set.

In addition, in the second period in which the second probability variable state is set, the variation time of the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (0.1 seconds) regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery, and the content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is always constant (2 rounds). In other words, the length of the second period is configured not to differ depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed or the content of the jackpot game executed.

By configuring in this way, in a high probability state of the special pattern (jackpot probability 30/1000), the second jackpot is generated for a length corresponding to the period until 30 jackpot wins (number of times the special pattern changes).
The period can be set.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the number of balls issued is increased by allowing a player to be awarded many prize balls during a first period, which is a part of the special high probability period, and during a second period, which is the other period of the special high probability period, the number of prize balls awarded to the player is reduced, thereby suppressing an increase or decrease in the number of balls issued.

By configuring in this manner, even if the appropriate increase in balls that can be awarded during the specific period in which the special chart high probability period is set is configured to be biased toward the first period, in other words, even if an excessively large number of balls can be awarded to the player when looking at only the first period, it is possible to make the increase in balls awarded an appropriate amount when looking at the increase in balls over the entire special chart high probability period, so that it is possible to configure the system so that the player can play an unexpected ball-acquisition increase game, while preventing excessive balls from being awarded to the player as a result.

In the first embodiment described above, the first probability variable state is more likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game if the jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) than if the jackpot is won in the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). In other words, it is possible to set a game state in which it is difficult to win a jackpot but it is easy to transition to the first game state that is most advantageous to the player if a jackpot is won, and a game state in which it is easy to win a jackpot but it is difficult to transition to the first game state that is most advantageous to the player if a jackpot is won.

By configuring in this manner, the game objective that the player is to aim for can be varied depending on the game state that is set, which makes it easier to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In the first embodiment described above, when the first special probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on whether the special probability limit is reached first, whether the time-saving limit is reached first, or whether the special probability limit and the time-saving limit are reached simultaneously.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same type of jackpot (for example, a first special jackpot in which a first special state is set) is won, different game states can be set depending on the status of each limit being reached, making it easier to provide players with a variety of games.

Furthermore, by using the above-described configuration, even if the rate at which the same game state (e.g., the first special probability state) is set after the end of a jackpot game is increased (it is always set) when none of the limits have been reached, it is possible to prevent a game state with a high set rate (e.g., the first special probability state) from being set continuously for a long period of time, making the game monotonous and reducing the desire to play.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the probability limit and the time-saving limit are reached at the same time, a special state (special mode) advantageous to the player can be set. In other words, in the first probability state in which the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, when the normal state is set based on the probability limit and the time-saving limit being reached at the same time,
The system is configured to set a normal state (special normal state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. By configuring in this way, even if a trigger (each limit) that forcibly shifts the probability state of each symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state is established, if a special condition is established, it is possible to transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Therefore, the player can be made to execute a game in which the player expects not to reach the probability limit or the time-saving limit, and a game in which the player expects to reach the probability limit or the time-saving limit at the same time,
This can increase the player's interest in the game.

As described above, when there are elements (each limit) for determining the game state (game situation) to be set after the jackpot game ends other than the jackpot type that was won, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp in advance which of the various game states will be set after the jackpot game ends after the jackpot game of the same jackpot type has been executed.

In contrast to this, in the first embodiment, the presentation mode is configured to differ based on the set game state, the remaining number of times (remaining number of jackpots) until the special mode limit is reached, and the remaining number of times (remaining number of jackpots) until the time-saving limit is reached.

By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to predict the future game content based on the content of the executed presentation, making it easier to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the first embodiment, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery that is mainly executed when the second probability variable state (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) is set, the first probability variable state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) can be set after the jackpot game ends. However, without being limited to this, if a jackpot is won when the second probability variable state is set, the second probability variable state may be set without fail after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state is set during the special pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the special pattern is continuously set, that is, when a jackpot type in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery is set, or when the time-saving limit is reached due to the first probability variable state being set continuously and the second probability variable state is forcibly set after the jackpot game ends (when the second probability variable state is set by the probability variable limit processing), the period until the probability variable limit is reached can be reliably set to the second probability variable state. Therefore, after a favorable game state (first probability variable state) favorable to the player is set, it is possible to reliably set an unfavorable game state (second probability variable state) for a predetermined period.

Furthermore, in this case, the type of jackpot set when the jackpot is won during the second probability variable state may be different depending on the trigger for setting the second probability variable state. For example,
The configuration may be such that when the second probability variable state is set by the probability variable limit processing, it is easier to set a jackpot type for which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends than when the second probability variable state is set based on the jackpot type.

By configuring in this manner, when a jackpot is won while the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, and a high probability state for special symbols is set after the jackpot play ends, the first probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is an advantageous play state favorable to the player, is not set until the probability limit is reached, and it is possible to prevent an excessively disadvantageous play from being played for the player.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a high probability state of the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and a low probability state of the special symbol may be set in some cases when a jackpot is won. Also, in this first embodiment, a plurality of game states are set, and games with different degrees of advantage can be executed according to the set game state. Specifically, the game states are configured so that the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is the game state most advantageous to the player, followed by the normal state in which a special state (special mode) is set (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and the normal state. However, the game states are not limited to this, and the game contents executed in each game state may be different to vary the degree of advantage given to the player in each game state.

Second Embodiment
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 692 to Fig. 696. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above is configured to be able to execute a process (probability limit process) in which a low probability state of a special symbol is forcibly set when the number of times of consecutive special symbol settings in which a high probability state of a special symbol is consecutively set reaches the upper limit number (40 times) (probability limit is reached) and the condition in which a high probability state of a special symbol can be set is established (for example, when a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a first probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game is won).

In addition, the number of consecutive normal symbol settings in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in succession is limited to an upper limit (10
When the number of times the time-saving limit is reached (reach of the time-saving limit), even if the conditions for setting a high probability state of a normal symbol are met (for example, when a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game is won), a process for forcibly setting a low probability state of a normal symbol (time-saving limit process) can be executed.

When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, a high probability state of the special pattern is always set after the jackpot game ends, and when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a low probability state of the normal pattern is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends than a high probability state of the normal pattern, and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a high probability state of the normal pattern is always set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the normal state and the second probability variable state, the first special pattern drawing is more likely to be executed than the second special pattern drawing, and in the time-saving state and the first probability variable state, the second special pattern drawing is more likely to be executed than the first special pattern drawing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment thus configured, once the first probability variable state is set, the first probability variable state is continuously set until either the probability variable limit or the time-saving limit is reached.
A probability variable state is set, and a jackpot game that is executed based on the winning of a second special symbol lottery executed during the probability variable state can be executed multiple times (maximum 10 times) in a short period of time, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, during a specific game period from when a jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) until the state transitions back to the normal state, there are a first game period (period in which the first probability state is continuously set) in which it is possible to increase the number of balls held by winning many prize balls, and a second game period (period in which the second probability state is continuously set) in which a maintenance game is played in which the number of balls held hardly increases or decreases.
By configuring the setting so that it is possible to prevent an excessive number of prize balls from being awarded to a player within one game period, while making it possible to award many prize balls to a player during a first game period that is shorter than the first game period, it is possible to increase the temporary ball output increase speed and thereby increase the player's motivation to play.

However, for example, if a player wins a special jackpot (a jackpot in which the first special jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends) in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state, and the player wins a special jackpot during the first game period (a period in which the special jackpot state with a high ball output rate is likely to be set consecutively) at the initial stage of the specific game period,
When the specific game period is set, after the first game period ends, the second game period (a period during which the second probability variable state in which the ball output is maintained is likely to be set continuously) tends to continue until the specific game period ends, which causes a problem that players playing during the second game period get bored with the game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the maintenance game for maintaining the balls held by the player during the second game period (the period during which the second special state is set) was configured to maintain the balls held by the player at all times for the entire second game period, which resulted in a lack of variety in the game and made the player more likely to become bored with the game.

In contrast, the second embodiment is configured so that there is almost no increase or decrease in the number of balls held between the start and end of the second game period, but differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is possible to set an increase period during which the number of balls held is likely to temporarily increase and a decrease period during which the number of balls held is likely to decrease within the second game period.

By configuring in this manner, during the second game period in which the number of balls held is unlikely to increase or decrease, it is possible to cause a temporary increase or decrease in the number of balls held, compared to when a game is played in which the number of balls held is unlikely to increase or decrease constantly, as in the first embodiment described above, thereby making it less likely that the player will become bored with the game.

The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is possible to set a variation pattern in which a variation time of different lengths is specified corresponding to the number of times the first special pattern lottery is executed after the second special probability state is set, and it is configured to vary the number of small win games that can be executed per unit time.

More specifically, in the second embodiment, the more the number of first special symbol lotteries executed during the second probability variable state increases, the easier it becomes to set a short variation time as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation. In other words, the longer the game is executed during the second probability variable state, the more the number of small win games that can be executed per unit time increases.

By configuring it in this way, when "long play in the same play state", which is a factor that makes players bored with the game, is achieved, the number of small win games per unit time can be increased compared to when it is not achieved, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play in order to win prize balls through small win games.

Furthermore, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 582), which is opened during a small winning game, is set to 10 ...
0, and by increasing the proportion of balls that do not enter any of the winning ports (ball entry ports) among the balls fired by right-hitting play during the second special probability state, it is configured so that the number of balls dispensed during the second special probability state is unlikely to increase or decrease when right-hitting play is continued during the second special probability state; in other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above uses a configuration based on a design concept of paying out one prize ball for each ball fired by right-hitting play in order to always make it difficult for the number of balls dispensed to increase or decrease during the second special probability state, whereas the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is configured so that the number of balls held (balls dispensed) by the player is unlikely to increase or decrease between the time the second special probability state is set and the time it ends. Specifically, during the average duration during which the second special state can continue, when a player continuously executes right-hand play, the number of balls fired during the average duration (number of out balls) and the number of winning balls paid out during the average duration (number of balls paid out) are configured to be approximately the same.

More specifically, in the second embodiment, when the duration of the second special probability state is shorter than the average duration, the number of prize balls paid out during the average duration is configured to be slightly less than the number of balls fired during the average duration, and when the duration of the second special probability state is longer than the average duration, the number of prize balls paid out during the average duration is configured to be slightly more than the number of balls fired during the average duration.

By configuring in this manner, a more advantageous second variable state can be provided to the player when the second variable state continues for a period longer than the average duration than when the second variable state ends in a period shorter than the average duration, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the second variable state continuing for a long period of time.

<About the content of the performance in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 692, the presentation executed in the second embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment described above, all jackpots with the first special pattern are 2R jackpots in which a high probability state (high probability state) for the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, but there are jackpot types in which a high probability state (time-saving state) for the normal pattern is set and jackpot types in which a time-saving state is not set, and if a jackpot with a time-saving state is won and then jackpot D (Fig. 613 (c)) with the second special pattern is won in the time-saving state, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls and increase the number of balls he or she has.

Here, if the jackpot won in the low probability non-time-saving state (normal) (hereinafter referred to as the "first jackpot") is jackpot A, the high probability non-time-saving state (second probability variable state) is set, but in the second probability variable state, the first probability variable state is not set after the jackpot game ends unless jackpot C is won. However, when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol, the probability that the jackpot type will be jackpot C is 1/200 (0.5%), so the probability of winning jackpot C in the second probability variable state is extremely low.

In other words, in the first embodiment, there are cases where the player is forced to play in the second probability variation state, in which the increase or decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed, for a long period of time, which creates the problem that the player becomes bored with the game.

In contrast, the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the more the number of times the first special pattern lottery is executed after the second probability change is set, the more likely it is that a variation pattern in which a shorter variation time is specified as the variation pattern of the first special pattern variation can be set, and the number of small win games that can be executed per unit time is varied.

Specifically, in the second embodiment, the more the number of times the first special symbol lottery is executed during the second probability change, the easier it is to set a short variation time as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation. In other words, the longer the game is executed during the second probability change, the more the number of small win games that can be executed per unit time increases. As a result, when "long-term play in the same game state", which is a factor that makes players bored with the game, is established, the number of small win games per unit time can be increased compared to when it is not established, so that the player's motivation to play to get prize balls through small win games can be increased.

Here, the small winning game is the opening and closing plate 650 of the second variable winning device 650 shown in FIG.
b is opened, and a small prize round is executed once, allowing a gaming ball to enter the second specific prize opening 650a.

Details will be described later, but in the second embodiment, after the big win game ends, the high probability non-time shortening state (
When the high probability non-time shortening state (second probability variable state) is set, the number of times the first special symbol lottery is executed after the high probability non-time shortening state (second probability variable state) is set is measured, and when the measured value reaches a predetermined value, the special symbol 1 high speed fluctuation zone is set. In the special symbol 1 high speed fluctuation zone, a short fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation, and it becomes possible to obtain prize balls by a small winning game.

Next, the details of the performance in the second embodiment will be described. The performance executed in the second embodiment differs from the performance in the first embodiment in that the performance mode changes when the special chart 1 high-speed variable zone is set.

FIG. 692(a) is an example of a presentation screen when the number of times remaining in the probability limit is 12 times and the special chart 1 high-speed fluctuation zone is set. It differs from FIG. 594(a) in that the sub-display area Ds displays "high-speed fluctuation zone" and the second display area HR2 displays "Open the door and find RUSH!" If the number of times remaining in the probability limit is 11 times or more, even if the jackpot C (FIG. 613(b)) is won and the time-saving state is set, the time-saving limit can be reached before the probability limit is reached, so 10 times of 10R jackpot play can be won and a large amount of prize balls can be awarded to the player. Therefore, the second display area HR2 displays a display suggesting that winning the jackpot C is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when the remaining number of times of the probability change limit is 10 times or less (for example, 2 times), even if the jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)) is won and the time-saving state is set, the probability change limit is reached before the time-saving limit is reached, so the player cannot win 10 times of 10R jackpot games, and the number of prize balls that the player can win may be reduced. Therefore, as shown in Fig. 692 (b),
In this case, an effect is executed in which an oasis springs up, and the message "Take a break at the oasis! Keep hitting to the right!" is displayed in the display area HR2, and an effect is executed in which the hero 801 urges the player to stay in front of the door 806 while urging the player to shoot game balls, suggesting to the player that it is more advantageous to aim to increase the number of prize balls by playing for small jackpots rather than winning the big jackpot C.

As described above, in the second embodiment, by changing the presentation mode according to the remaining number of times in the special probability limit, the player can recognize when it is more advantageous to win the jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)) and when it is more advantageous to increase the number of prize balls in the small prize game. Even in the same game state (second special probability state), the player can enjoy a game aiming to win the jackpot C and a game of increasing the number of prize balls in the small prize game without winning the jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, there is a problem that a player who is tired of playing in the second probability variation state in which the increase and decrease of the balls held is suppressed stops playing before the condition for setting the high-speed variation zone is met. In order to solve this problem, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of remaining variations until the high-speed variation zone in which the player can expect to win prize balls by playing a small win is set is notified. By configuring in this way, the second probability variation state in which the player cannot expect to win prize balls is set, and the player who has lost his motivation to play can continue playing with the aim of setting the high-speed variation zone.

In the embodiment, the presentation mode is changed when the number of remaining times of the probability limit is 10 or less, but this is not limited to this. Even if the number of remaining times of the probability limit is 10 or more, if a high-speed fluctuation zone is set, a suggestion presentation that recommends an increase in the number of prize balls by playing a small win may be executed.

In addition, in a configuration in which, when the second probability variable state is set based on winning a jackpot, the measurement of the number of times the first special symbol lottery is executed is started, the measurement is ended based on winning the next jackpot, and a new measurement is started after the jackpot game ends, in a case in which a high-speed fluctuation zone is set based on the measured number of times of execution reaching a predetermined number, the measured number of times is reset by winning the second probability variable jackpot, and the high-speed fluctuation zone is released, so that a performance suggesting that winning the second probability variable jackpot is unfavorable (for example,
During the fluctuation of the special symbol that wins the special jackpot, a "high-speed fluctuation zone is about to end" effect or the like may be executed, and if the high-speed fluctuation zone is not set, an effect suggesting that winning the second special jackpot is unfavorable may not be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that winning the second special jackpot is unfavorable. Also, by executing a similar effect not only when the second special jackpot is won, but also when the special symbol is not, and stirring up a sense of crisis in the player that the high-speed fluctuation zone may end,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game during the second probability variation. In addition, when the remaining number of times of the probability variation limit is a predetermined number or less (for example, 10 times or less), a similar effect may be executed when the first probability variation jackpot is won.

In the embodiment, when the second variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times the first special symbol lottery is performed after the second variable probability state is set is measured, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is determined based on the measurement result, but without being limited to this, when a jackpot is won while the second variable probability state is set and the second variable probability state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times the first special symbol lottery is performed after the second variable probability state is set may be measured continuously from the number of times the first special symbol lottery was performed during the second variable probability state previously set. In other words, the number of times the first special symbol lottery is performed after the second variable probability state is set may be measured across the jackpot game, and the high-speed variation zone of the first special symbol may be set based on the measurement result. In this case, for example, when the high-speed fluctuation zone is set, a large number of doors 806 appear, and when a small prize is won, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 opens the door 806 and finds a ball indicating that the small prize has been won, and an effect may be executed in which the doors 806 that appear are opened one after another until the big prize D is won.

By configuring it in this way, in cases where the first hit hits the big win A (Fig. 613(b)) and the second probability variable state is set, and the probability variable limit is reached without the first probability variable state being set, that is, in cases where the high probability state of the special pattern ends without the player winning many prize balls, it is possible to make it easier to award the minimum number of prize balls through small prize games.
For a long time, no effects are displayed in the main display area Dm (the jackpot is won D (Figure 613 (c
This can reduce boredom on the part of the player since the door 806 will not open until the prize is won.

In the embodiment, the configuration is such that an effect of an oasis springing up is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in response to winning a prize ball in a small winning game, the number of winning balls may be notified by an effect of winning coins or the like.

<Changes in ball output in each game state in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 693, the transition image of the number of balls dispensed for each game state in the second embodiment will be described. Fig. 693(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the average number of balls dispensed in the first embodiment described above, and Fig. 693(b) is a diagram showing the transition of the average number of balls dispensed in the second embodiment.

As shown in Fig. 693(a), in the first embodiment described above, a left-hand hit game is executed to execute the first special symbol lottery in a state where a low probability state of the special symbol is set during the normal state. In this normal state, even if a big win is won, a big win game with almost no prize balls (two-round big win game) is executed, and even if a small win is won, it is difficult to win prize balls during the small win game because a left-hand hit game is executed, so this is the game state in which the number of balls is most likely to decrease.

On the other hand, during the first probability change state, a right-hand hit game is executed with the aim of executing the second special symbol lottery in a state where a high probability state of the special symbol is set. In this first probability change state, a big win game (10 round big win game) in which many prize balls can be acquired if a big win is won is executed, so it is the game state in which the number of balls is most likely to increase. Note that during the first probability change state, the first special symbol lottery is rarely executed, so the small win game is rarely executed.

During the second probability variation state, a right-hand hitting game is executed with the aim of executing the first special symbol lottery in a state where a high probability state of the special symbol is set.
This is a game state in which it is easiest to make the ball enter b2, and since a right-hand hit game is executed in which it is easiest to make the ball enter the second variable winning device 650 which is opened during a small winning game, even if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and a jackpot game with almost no winning balls (two-round jackpot game) is executed, the game state is one in which it is possible to maintain the number of balls that have been dispensed.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 693(a), during a period in which a high probability state of special patterns is set consecutively, the number of balls dispensed is suddenly increased during the first special probability state, and then the number of balls dispensed is maintained during the second special probability state, thereby preventing an excessive increase in the number of balls dispensed during the period in which a high probability state of special patterns is set consecutively.

In contrast, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 693(b), the difference is that the transition of the balls in the second probability variable state is different from that in the first embodiment described above. Specifically, immediately after the second probability variable state is set (initial stage), the first special symbol variation is easily executed in a variation pattern in which a relatively long variation time is set so that the number of balls won by the small winning game is taken into account when the right-hand hit game is continuously performed, and after a predetermined period has elapsed since the second probability variable state was set, the first special symbol variation is easily executed in a variation pattern in which a shorter variation time than the initial stage of the second probability variable state is set so that the number of balls won by the small winning game is taken into account when the right-hand hit game is continuously performed, so that the number of balls won by the small winning game is taken into account.

Then, when right-hand play is performed continuously during the average period during which the second special probability state can continue, that is, the average number of jackpot winnings required from the transition from the first special probability state to the second special probability state until the special probability limit is reached, multiplied by the average number of special pattern changes required until a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery in a state in which a high probability state of a special pattern is set, the fluctuation pattern for each period is specified so that the number of balls dispensed at the time of transition to the second special probability state and the number of balls dispensed at the time the average period during which the second special probability state can continue have elapsed are approximately the same.

In other words, in this second embodiment, if the playing period during the second special probability state is shorter than the average, i.e., if a jackpot is won early during the second special probability state and the second special probability state ends, the number of balls dispensed during the second special probability state will decrease, and if a stuck game (a game in which a special pattern lottery that does not win a jackpot is executed more than twice the number of times the value indicating the denominator of the jackpot probability) is executed during the second special probability state, it is possible to increase the number of balls dispensed during the second special probability state.

By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to make the player aware of the increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed during the second special state, which in the first embodiment described above was simply used as a period to suppress the increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with playing during the second special state early on.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in comparison with the first embodiment described above, a second variable winning device 650
The difference is that the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second variable winning device 650 is increased from "1" to "4." In addition, when a small winning game is played in a normal state, even if a right-hitting game is played after the small winning game is played, the small winning game ends before the ball shot by the right-hitting game reaches the second variable winning device 650.

Therefore, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second variable winning device 650 is set to "1
Even if the number of balls is increased from "0" to "4," it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of balls dispensed due to small win games under normal conditions.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, when the normal state is set and when the second probability variable state is set, the opening time of the electric device 64a in the normal winning game (the first right
The time when the second variable winning device 650 operates to a position that allows balls to flow into the ball entrance 64b2 may be made different, making it difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery by right-handed play during the normal state, or the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 in a small win game may be made different between when the normal state is set and when the second special state is set, so that a ball cannot win into the second variable winning device 650 during a small win game in the normal state.

<Electrical Configuration of the Second Embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 694 and Fig. 695, the electrical configuration in this second embodiment will be described. In this second embodiment, the difference from the above-mentioned first embodiment is that the contents of the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to during the second probability variable state are changed, and the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario are changed.

Specifically, in the first embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern table that can be referred to during the second probability variable state defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the second probability variable disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad4 and the second probability variable advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5 are used instead of the second probability variable fluctuation pattern table 202d4.
and in that a fluctuation pattern scenario 2 table 202af is used instead of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f, and otherwise they are the same. Detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

This second embodiment is configured to be able to switch between a fluctuation pattern table in which a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special pattern fluctuation during the second special variable state, and a fluctuation pattern table in which a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be set as the fluctuation pattern of the first special pattern fluctuation.

By configuring in this manner, the number of small winning plays per unit time when right-hitting play is continued during the second special probability state, and ultimately the cumulative opening time during the unit time during which the second variable winning device 650 is in the opening operation, can be made to differ depending on the length of the variation time of the first special pattern variation executed during the second special probability state.

FIG. 694(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the second variable-rate disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad4. As shown in FIG. 694(a), the second variable-rate disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad4 is a pattern type "special pattern 1 (first special pattern)" for the second variable-rate fluctuation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 616(a)) of the first embodiment described above.
The difference is that the types of variation patterns prescribed for the second special symbol variation are different, and a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time can be selected even in the second special symbol variation state. Other contents (variation pattern provisions for the second special symbol variation during the second special symbol variation state)
Since these are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Specifically, the pattern type is "Special pattern 1", and the acquired value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to
In the "50 to 16" range, there are short fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds), and
In the "170 to 19" range, there is a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds),
In the range of "98", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (60,000 milliseconds) is specified.

Next, the contents stipulated in the second probability change advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5 will be explained with reference to FIG. 694(b). FIG. 694(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the second probability change advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5.
As shown in b), the second probability change advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5 is the above-mentioned second
It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is more likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation than the disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad4 for the certain variable period.

Specifically, the pattern type is "Special pattern 1", and the acquired value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to
In the "100" range, there are ultra-short fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds).
In the range of "-198", short fluctuations with a fluctuation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) are specified.

As described above, in the second embodiment, during the second probability change state, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables in which fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times are defined can be switched and referred to. Therefore, when a fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to a fluctuation pattern table (second probability change advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5) in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is defined, the number of times the first special symbol lottery is performed per unit time can be increased. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to a fluctuation pattern table (second probability change disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad4) in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is defined, the number of times the first special symbol lottery is performed per unit time can be reduced. Therefore, when right-hand play is continuously performed in a state in which the second probability change state is set, a period in which the number of balls increases and a period in which the number of balls decreases can be easily created.

As described in FIG. 694(a) and FIG. 694(b), in the second embodiment,
The second variable probability disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad4 and the second variable probability advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5 are configured to be able to select a fluctuation pattern of the same length (1 second). By configuring in this way, when a fluctuation pattern of the same length (1 second) is selected, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which fluctuation pattern table is currently being referred to, so that the player can play while expecting that the currently referred fluctuation pattern table is an advantageous fluctuation pattern table. In addition, by using a configuration that makes it difficult to understand the currently referred fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to easily suppress the execution of a strategy game that specifies the referenced fluctuation pattern table.

Next, the detailed contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario 2 table 202af will be described with reference to FIG. 695. FIG. 695 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario 2 table 202af.
The difference between the above-mentioned variation pattern scenario table 202f and the variation pattern scenario table 202f is that the scenario contents are changed so that the type of the variation pattern table referred to during the second probability variable state is different, and the rest is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents are omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5 for the second probability variable, which is advantageous to the player, and the unfavorable fluctuation pattern table 202ad4 for the second probability variable, which is unfavorable to the player, are used as fluctuation patterns to be referenced when selecting a fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation during the second probability variable state. Depending on the trigger for setting the second probability variable state, a period in which a fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the unfavorable fluctuation pattern table 202ad4 for the second probability variable, and a period in which a fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5 for the second probability variable,
The system is configured to set up scenarios in which the following are different:

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 695, the second probability variable state is set as the jackpot type (jackpot A) regardless of the game state at the time of winning.
When the special state is set, the number of special pattern changes executed after the big win is 100.
It is specified that a scenario is set in which the second highly likely variable disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad4 is referenced during the period until the 101st time is reached, and from that time onwards (101st time onwards), the second highly likely variable advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5 is referenced.

For the jackpot type (jackpot B) in which the second probability variable state or the first probability variable state is set according to the game state at the time of winning as the jackpot type, even if the game state at the time of winning is other than the first probability variable state and the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the second probability variable state, the game state at the time of winning is other than the first probability variable state and the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the first probability variable state, but because the time-saving limit has been reached (time-saving limit reached flag 20
3u is set on), even if the second probability variable state is forcibly set, the disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad4 for second probability variable is referenced during the period until the number of special pattern fluctuations executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 60, and thereafter (61 times and thereafter), a scenario is set in which the advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5 for second probability variable is referenced.

For the jackpot type (jackpot C, D) in which the first probability variable state is set regardless of the game state at the time of winning as the jackpot type, the time-saving limit reaching flag 203 is set at the end of the jackpot game.
When the second probability variable state is forcibly set based on u being set to on, a scenario is set in which the advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202a5 for the second probability variable state is referenced from the first spin after the end of the big win game.

In other words, in the second embodiment, there are multiple setting triggers for setting the second probability variable state,
Depending on which of the multiple setting triggers is established, the length of the period during which a fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to the disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202a4 for the second probability variation, which is disadvantageous to the player, is made different.

Furthermore, among the multiple setting triggers for which the second probability variable state is set, the setting trigger with a high establishment frequency is more likely to be set in the second probability variable disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202a than the setting trigger with a low establishment frequency.
In this way, a bonus can be given to a player when a setting opportunity that is achieved with a low frequency is achieved.

In addition, when a jackpot type in which the second probability variable state is set is set, that is, when the second probability variable state is set based on the result of a special pattern lottery, and when the second probability variable state is set based on reaching the time-saving limit, the length of the period during which a fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to the disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202a4 for the second probability variable, which is disadvantageous to the player, is configured to differ.

Specifically, when the second probability variable state is set based on reaching the time-saving limit, the period during which the second probability variable disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202a4, which is disadvantageous to the player, is referenced is shorter than when the second probability variable state is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery. In other words, the second probability variable advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202a4, which is advantageous to the player, is referenced.
The scenario is configured so that the period during which 5 is referenced is long.

In other words, even if a jackpot type that would normally set the first special probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second special probability state, is won, if the second special probability state is set due to the time-saving limit, i.e., if the benefit given to the player is reduced due to the second special probability state being set based on reaching the time-saving limit, the game content executed during the second special probability state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than if the second special probability state had been set due to some other trigger.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player when the time-saving limit is reached. In the second embodiment, since the first probability variable state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the second probability variable state, when a jackpot type that sets the first probability variable state is set, the time-saving limit is reached (when the second probability variable state is set) and it is more disadvantageous to the player than when the time-saving limit is not reached (when the first probability variable state is set), but the above-mentioned technical idea may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 that is configured so that, for example, the second probability variable state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first probability variable state.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, within a special pattern high probability period in which a high probability state of a special pattern is set consecutively, it is possible to set at least a first period in which a first high probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set, and a second period in which a second high probability state, which is a gaming state more disadvantageous to the player than the first high probability state, is set.

In addition, the special chart high probability period cannot be ended unless the player plays the second period for a predetermined period. Therefore, it is necessary for the player to continue playing during the second period. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in order to prevent the game during the second period from continuing for a long period and the player from getting bored with the game, the longer the game period during the second period (the more the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the second period) is, the more advantageous the game during the second period (the game during the second special variable state) is to the player. In this way, a variable pattern with a shorter variable time is more likely to be set (a variable pattern is more likely to be set by referring to the disadvantageous variable pattern table for second special variable 202a4) at a time when a predetermined period has elapsed since the second special variable state was set (for example, at the time when the special symbol lottery has been executed 70 times) than immediately after the second special variable state is set. In addition, by increasing the number of small win games executed per unit time, a privilege advantageous to the player (an increase in the number of winning balls per unit time) is given to the player, and the player is prevented from getting bored with the game.

In addition, since the game state can be switched to one that is advantageous to the player by making the game during the second period, which is disadvantageous to the player, extremely long, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay property in which a player who has played during the second period for a predetermined period can be made to play a game that makes him or her hope that the second period will continue for a long time (a game in which the player hopes that the jackpot will not be won).

In addition, without being limited to this, the time immediately after the second probability variable state is set may be the time when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second probability variable state was set (for example, the time when the special pattern lottery has been executed 70 times).
It may also be configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the first probability variable disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202a4 can be easily set (so that a fluctuation pattern can be easily set by referring to the second probability variable disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202a4).

By configuring in this way, when the first probability variable state is shifted to the second probability variable state, the game during the first probability variable state advantageous to the player can be continued and the game during the second probability variable state advantageous to the player can be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to aggregate the period advantageous to the player during the special chart high probability period, it is possible to easily increase the bonus (ball payout) given to the player during a specific period (the first period + the initial period of the second period) during the special chart high probability period.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 696, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment
Each control process executed by the PU 221 will be described.
The embodiment differs from the embodiment in that the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 2 (see S5155 in FIG. 696) is executed instead of the special chart 1 variable performance setting process (see S5105 in FIG. 674), and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Referring to FIG. 696, the MPU 2 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment
The special chart 1 variable performance setting process 2 (S5155) executed by the controller 21 will be described.
96 is a flowchart showing the detailed contents of the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 2 (S5155). The special chart 1 variable performance setting process 2 (S5155) differs from the special chart 1 variable performance setting process in the first embodiment described above (see S5105 in FIG. 674) in that when the revenge mode or challenge mode is executed as the performance mode, a process is added to change the display mode of the advantageous suggestion performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the remaining number of times of the probability change limit. Since the other points are the same, detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 2 (S5155), first, the process of S5201 to S5202 of the special chart 1 variable performance setting process in the first embodiment described above (see S5105 in FIG. 674) is executed. Then, in the process of S5202, if it is determined that the read performance mode is not one of the super rush mode, rush mode, EXTRA mode, and SPECIAL mode (S5202: No), it is determined whether the type of the read current performance mode is revenge mode or challenge mode (S5251). If it is determined that the type of the current performance mode is revenge mode or challenge mode (S5251: Yes), the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is read (S5252).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining chance win counter 223m read in the process of S5252 is greater than 20 (S5253). If it is determined that the value of the remaining chance win counter 223m is greater than 20 (S5253: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the jackpot is favorable (S5254), the process of S5205 described above is executed, and this process ends. The display command set here is used in the main process (FIG. 663
In the command output process (S4102) of the previous step (see reference), this command is sent to the display control device 114, and when the display control device 114 receives this command, it displays on the third pattern display device 81 a presentation suggesting that it would be advantageous for the player to win the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 692 (a).

On the other hand, in the process of S5253, the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m that was read out is 20.
If it is determined that the value is not greater than 2 (S5253: No), it is next determined whether the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m that has been read is less than 2 (S5255).
255: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that not winning the jackpot is advantageous (S5256), the process of S5205 is executed, and this process is terminated. The display command set here is sent to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 663), and when the display control device 114 receives this command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect that suggests that not winning the jackpot is advantageous for the player, as shown in FIG. 692(b).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5255 that the value of the remaining chance of winning counter 223m is greater than 2 (S5255: No), the processing of S5256 is skipped, the processing of S5205 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the second embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern tables to be referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol fluctuation in the second high probability state, there are provided the advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5 for the second high probability state in which a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected, and the unfavorable fluctuation pattern table 202ad4 for the second high probability state in which a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected than the advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202ad5 for the second high probability state.

In the second embodiment described above, when the second probability variable state is set after the end of the big win game, the number of times the first special symbol lottery is performed after the second probability variable state is set is measured, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is determined based on the measurement result, but without being limited to this, the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation may be determined based on the total number of times the first special symbol lottery is performed after the second probability variable state is set and the number of times the second special symbol lottery is performed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation, which is the secondary variation, to be able to set a short variation pattern corresponding to a short variation time (e.g., 1 second) or a medium variation pattern corresponding to a long variation time (e.g., 60 seconds).

By configuring in this way, the number of times the second special symbol lottery can be executed during one execution of the first special symbol lottery can be made different according to the set variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. Therefore, the timing at which the variation pattern corresponding to a short variation time is likely to be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation can be made different for the number of times the first special symbol lottery is executed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the period during which the number of executions of the small win game per unit time is increased (the advantageous period during the second probability variation state) is set, so that a game that the player does not get bored of can be provided.

Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the first special symbol variation pattern to be determined from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to different lengths of variation time. This makes it possible to greatly vary the total number of special symbol drawings that can be measured during one execution of the first special symbol drawing depending on the combination of the first special symbol variation pattern and the second special symbol variation pattern, making it difficult for the player to predict the content of the game executed during the second probability variation state.

In addition, in the case where a jackpot is won while the second high probability state is set and the second high probability state is set again after the jackpot play ends, the number of times the first special pattern lottery has been executed since the second high probability state was set may be counted, continuing from the number of times the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery) has been executed during the second high probability state that was previously set.

In other words, the number of times the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) is performed after the second probability variable state is set may be measured across big win (small win) games, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation may be determined based on the measurement result. By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state is set in a state where there are many remaining times until the probability variable limit, and the second probability variable state is set continuously until the probability variable limit is reached, for example, even if a big win is won in the normal state, the probability variable limit is reached without transitioning to the first probability variable state, and the second probability variable state is still in the second probability variable state, that is, when the high probability state of the special symbol ends without the player winning many prize balls, it is possible to easily award the minimum number of prize balls by the small win game.

Furthermore, the number of times the second high probability state is continuously set (the number of times the value of the high probability state limit count counter is continuously updated based on the setting of the second high probability state) may be measured, and a variation pattern corresponding to a special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery) executed during the second high probability state may be determined based on the measurement result.

In the second embodiment described above, as a variation pattern corresponding to the special pattern lottery executed during the second special variable state, a first period (unfavorable period) in which a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is likely to be set, and a second period (favorable period) in which a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be set are provided, so that the number of balls fired relative to the number of balls (number of outs) during the second special variable state is more likely to change compared to the first embodiment described above. However, other configurations may also be used, and for example, as the game content of the small win game executed during the second special variable state, a first period (unfavorable period) in which a small win game advantageous to the player is difficult to execute, and a second period (favorable period) in which a small win game advantageous to the player is easily executed may be provided.

In the second embodiment described above, the second period that is advantageous to the player in terms of the amount of balls dispensed during the second probability change state and the first period that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second period can be set, and the first period is configured to arrive before the second period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow a player who is playing during the second probability change state to play a game that aims to transition to the first probability change state as soon as possible before the probability change limit number is significantly subtracted, as well as a game that aims to keep the second probability change state from being disadvantageous to the player by continuing it for a long time.

<Modification of the Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 697. In the above-mentioned second embodiment, as shown in Fig. 693(b), when many special symbol lotteries are executed without winning the big prize in the state where the second probability variable state is set, the variation time of the first special symbol variation is easily shortened, thereby increasing the number of small prize games executed per unit time in the second probability variable state.

In other words, for a player who continues to play right-hand during the second probability variable state, the longer the period until the big win is won, the more the number of winning balls that can be obtained relative to the number of balls shot can be increased.

In contrast to this, the payout transition when the right-hand hit game is continuously performed during the second probability change state may be configured as shown in Figure 697 (a). Figure 697 (a) is a diagram showing a typical payout transition in the first modified example of the second embodiment described above.

In the first modified example, in comparison with the second embodiment described above, a fluctuation pattern scenario 2 table 2
The difference is that the contents of the variable pattern table prescribed in accordance with the second probability variable state are changed among the contents prescribed in 02af, and the rest are the same. The explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

In this first modified example, during the second probability variation state, the second probability variation disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 2
The contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario 2 table 202af are specified so that a period in which a fluctuation pattern is set by referring to the second certain variable advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202d4 and a period in which a fluctuation pattern is set by referring to the second certain variable advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202d5 are specified alternately.

Specifically, when the number of times the special symbol variation is executed after the second probability variation state is set at the end of the big win game is in the range of "1 to 10", "21 to 30", "41 to 50", ..., the second probability variation disadvantageous variation pattern table 202d4 is set to "11 to 20", "31 to 40", "51
The second probability variation advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202d5 in the range of "~60" ...
In other words, every 10 times the special symbol variation is performed, the second variable disadvantageous variation pattern 202d4,
The special symbol fluctuation pattern is set by switching between the second special symbol fluctuation advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202d5 and the second special symbol fluctuation advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202d6.

By configuring it in this manner, during the second special probability state, periods during which the number of balls output is less likely to increase and periods during which the number of balls output is more likely to increase are set alternately, making it easier to vary the amount of balls output during the second special probability state. As a result, depending on the timing of the jackpot win, it is possible to create a state during the second special probability state in which the number of balls output increases, the number of balls output is maintained, or the number of balls output decreases.

Furthermore, since each fluctuation pattern table is switched according to a scenario previously set in the fluctuation pattern scenario 2 table 202af, for a player who plays the pachinko machine 10 for a long time and is familiar with the timing of switching the fluctuation pattern table during the second probability variation state, for example, the player can continue to play right-hand during the period when the second probability variation advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is referenced, and the player can play right-hand during the period when the second probability variation disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is referenced.
During the period in which the reference is made, the right-hand hit game is temporarily interrupted during the long special pattern variation period, and the wasted balls (balls that do not enter the right first ball entrance 64b2 or the second variable winning device 650) are eliminated.
This makes it easier to play games that reduce the consumption of money.

In addition, when using a pachinko machine 10 configured as in the first modified example, in order to make a ball enter the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during a small win game, it is preferable to configure it so that the ball needs to be shot by right-hand play before the special pattern that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win is stopped and displayed, that is, while the special pattern variation that has won the small win is being executed.
The time required for the small prize game to reach the variable prize-winning device 650 is longer than the time required for the small prize game to end (the time required for the small prize game to end) (the time required for the special symbol indicating the small prize game to be stopped and displayed).
It is preferable to configure the variable winning device 650 so as to shorten the period until it becomes difficult to win the ball into the variable winning device 650.

By configuring in this manner, regardless of the length of the special pattern change that is executed, in a game method in which right-hitting play is executed after the start of a small win game, it becomes difficult to win balls through the small win game, so for players who do not understand the type of change pattern table being referenced, right-hitting play will continue to be executed during the second special win state, making it easier to progress the balls in the manner shown in FIG. 697(a).

Next, the second modified example of the second embodiment described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 697(b). FIG. 697(a) is a diagram showing the flow of ball output transition in the second modified example of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 697(b), in this second modified example, immediately after the second probability variable state is set, a period in which a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be set (the period in which the second probability variable advantageous fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is referenced) is set, followed by a period in which a relatively long fluctuation time is likely to be set (the period in which the second probability variable disadvantageous fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is referenced).
The present embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in that the content defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario 2 table 202af is changed so that, is set, but the rest is the same. Explanation of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in Fig. 697(b), in this second modified example, in the second probability variable state that is set after the first probability variable state ends, a period in which the number of balls that are put out is likely to increase is set, so that the number of balls that are put out is configured to continue to increase from the number of balls that are put out during the first probability variable state. Then, when the average period in which the second probability variable state ends is reached, the number of balls that are put out is configured to be the same as the number of balls that were put out at the time the second probability variable state was set.

In other words, the second modified example is configured to be advantageous to the player when the period during which the second probability variable state is set becomes shorter than the average period. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play so that the second probability variable state ends sooner.

As explained above, the second embodiment and each modified example of the second embodiment are the same as the first embodiment in that the average increase in the amount of balls in the second probability variable state is almost zero, but they are different from the first embodiment in that the difference in the increase or decrease in balls increases as the period during which the second probability variable state continues deviates from the average period. By configuring in this way, during the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern is set continuously, during the period during which the second probability variable state, in which the degree of increase in balls is low, is set, the player can play while expecting a slight increase in balls, and therefore the player's motivation to play can be increased.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, the longer the second probability change state continues, the more advantageous the state (the state in which the number of balls released is likely to increase) can be provided to the player, making it easier for the player to play without losing their motivation to play until the special chart high probability period ends.

In the above-mentioned second embodiment and each modified example of the second embodiment, in order to vary the degree of increase in the number of balls in the second probability variable state, a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected based on the number of times the special symbol changes between big wins, but without being limited to this, for example, a variation pattern with a different variation time may be selected based on the number of times the second probability variable state is set in succession, for example, when the number of times the second probability variable state is set in succession exceeds 10 times, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time may be more likely to be selected than when the number of times the second probability variable state is set in succession does not exceed 10 times. By configuring in this way, a period in which the number of balls is likely to increase during the second probability variable state can be given to a player who has had a period in which the first probability variable state is not set for a predetermined period despite the special symbol high probability period being set, so that a situation in which the number of balls does not increase at all during the special symbol high probability period can be suppressed.

Furthermore, regardless of whether it is the first probability variable state or the second probability variable state, when the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set in succession exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 20 times) after the high probability period of the special symbol is set, a variation pattern with a short variation time may be more likely to be selected than when the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is set in succession does not exceed the predetermined number (e.g., 20 times). By configuring in this way, when the high probability period of the special symbol is set and the first probability variable state is set in the initial stage,
A player in whom the probability variable state is set can be made to easily continue playing even after the first probability variable state ends and the second probability variable state is set.

Also, as in the second embodiment described above, instead of a configuration in which the timing of switching the referenced variation pattern table is predefined by referring to the variation pattern scenario 2 table 202af, the referenced variation pattern table may be switched based on the establishment of a switching condition for switching the referenced variation pattern table during the second probability variable state. In this case, as a switching trigger for switching the referenced variation pattern table, when a switching lottery executed separately every time a special pattern lottery is executed is won, the referenced variation pattern table may be switched from the currently referenced variation pattern table to another variation pattern table. Alternatively, a lottery for switching the variation pattern table may be executed every time the number of special pattern lotteries reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). Furthermore, the referenced variation pattern table may be switched based on the number of times a small prize is won during the second probability variable state or the winning of a switching lottery executed when a small prize is won.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table that switches when the above-mentioned switching trigger occurs is as follows:
The new fluctuation pattern table may be more advantageous to the player (a fluctuation pattern table in which a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected) than the fluctuation pattern table referenced before the switch, or it may be more disadvantageous to the player (a fluctuation pattern table in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be selected).

In addition, in the second embodiment and each modified example of the second embodiment described above, during the period in which the second probability variable state is set, a favorable period in which the number of balls output is likely to increase and an unfavorable period (period in which the number of balls output is decreased) in which the number of balls output is unlikely to increase are created by varying the length of the special pattern change time that is set. However, other configurations may be used, and the content of the small win game executed when the small win is won (for example, the second opening operation in the small win game after the small win is won) may be changed.
It may be possible to configure the system so that the above-mentioned advantageous and disadvantageous periods can be created by changing the length of the period until the variable winning device 650 is able to win a ball, the length of the period (open period) during which the second variable winning device 650 is able to win a ball, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins into the second variable winning device 650, etc.

Third Embodiment
Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 698 to Fig. 706. In the third embodiment, the game board 13 is different from the first embodiment in that the path configuration for allowing the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64b1 is different from that of the first ball entrance 64b2. Furthermore, the lottery result of the first special symbol,
The difference is that the game content is based on the lottery results of the second special pattern.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, when the number of consecutive special symbol settings in which the high probability state of the special symbol is consecutively set reaches the upper limit (40 times) (reaches the probability limit), and when the conditions under which the high probability state of the special symbol can be set are met (for example,
Even in the case of winning a jackpot of a jackpot type in which the first probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, a process (probability variable limit process) for forcibly setting a low probability state of a special pattern can be executed.

In addition, the number of consecutive normal symbol settings in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in succession is limited to an upper limit (10
When the number of times the time-saving limit is reached (reach of the time-saving limit), even if the conditions for setting a high probability state of a normal symbol are met (for example, when a jackpot of a jackpot type in which a first probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game is won), a process for forcibly setting a low probability state of a normal symbol (time-saving limit process) can be executed.

When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, a high probability state of the special pattern is always set after the jackpot game ends, and when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a low probability state of the normal pattern is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends than a high probability state of the normal pattern, and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a high probability state of the normal pattern is always set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the normal state and the second probability variable state, the first special pattern drawing is more likely to be executed than the second special pattern drawing, and in the time-saving state and the first probability variable state, the second special pattern drawing is more likely to be executed than the first special pattern drawing.

In other words, the player plays the game aiming to win a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, hoping that the game state will shift to the first probability variable state before the probability variable limit is reached.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment configured in this manner, once the first special probability state is set, the first special probability state is continuously set until either the special probability limit or the time-saving limit is reached, and the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot winning of the second special pattern lottery executed during the first special probability state can be executed multiple times (up to 10 times) in a short period of time, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won (first win) while the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, a second probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends, and thereafter, the second probability state loops until the probability limit is reached, and there is a risk that the play period (advantageous play period) in which the high probability state for special symbols is set will end without the player being able to win many prize balls.

In contrast, the third embodiment differs significantly from the first embodiment described above in that the period from winning a jackpot (first win) under normal conditions to reaching the time-saving limit can be set as a period (consecutive win period) during which a large number of prize balls can be awarded to the player.

In this way, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, a consecutive win period is set, so that the player who wins the first win can be surely given a bonus (a lot of winning balls). Therefore, the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In addition, as described above, in the third embodiment, a consecutive win period is set when the first win is won. Therefore, in order to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player, the first ball entrance 64 is configured to make it difficult to execute the special symbol lottery in the normal state.
The difference is that the configuration of the ball's entry path into b1 and the configuration of the ball's entry path into the right first ball entry port 64b2 are different from the configurations of the first embodiment described above.

In this way, even if the consecutive win period is set based on the winning of a jackpot in the normal state by making it difficult to win the jackpot in the normal state,
This can prevent a situation in which a player is given an excessive amount of bonuses.

In addition, since a consecutive win period is set simply by obtaining the first win, even if the configuration is made such that it is difficult to execute a special symbol lottery under normal conditions, the player can be motivated to play.

<Regarding the game board configuration in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 698 and Fig. 699. Fig. 698 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. As shown in Fig. 698, in the third embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment, the lower region (
The ball distribution device 970 is provided in the right area of the game area (the area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80), and the distribution device 175 is provided in the right area of the game area (the area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80).
The difference is that the electric role 64a and the right first ball inlet 64b2 to which the electric role 64a is attached have been changed, but the rest is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 698, in this third embodiment, a ball shot by left-handed play enters the upper opening 960a of the guide flow path 960, the ball discharged from the guide flow path 960 flows into the ball distribution device 970, and when the flowing ball is sorted into a specific path within the ball distribution device 970, it can enter the first ball entrance 64b1.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 699, but in this third embodiment, a guide flow path 960 is provided at the location where the first ball entrance 64b1 is provided in the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above.
In other words, the balls enter the upper opening 960a at the same rate as the rate at which balls enter the first ball entrance 64b1 in the first embodiment described above (the rate at which about 20 balls enter when 250 balls are shot in a left-handed game).

Then, about 1/9 of the balls that enter the upper opening 960a flow down a specific path of the ball distribution device 970 and enter the first ball entrance 64b1.
When 250 balls are shot in a left-handed game, two to three balls enter the first ball entrance 64b1.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is set low at 1/120, so that even if a right-hand hit game is performed during a game state (normal state, second probability change state) in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, almost no balls enter the right first ball entrance 64b1.
As in the embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball can be easily inserted into the second ball entrance 640 provided in the right side area by playing from the right, but when the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is set, a long fluctuation time (e.g., 10 minutes) fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the second special pattern.

Therefore, when the normal state is set, left-handed play, which aims to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64b1 and execute the first special pattern lottery, is an advantageous playing method for the player.

Next, the ball-striking device 970 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
It is an enlarged front view of the ball distribution device 970. As shown in FIG. 699, this ball distribution device 970 mainly includes a first crane 971 to which the ball discharged from the induction flow path 960 and flowing down to the ball distribution device 970 first reaches, and a part (about 1/3) of the ball that reaches the first crane 971.
The first and second crowns 971 and 972 are configured to allow some of the game balls that have reached the second crown 972 to enter the first ball entrance 64b1, and an outlet 973 for discharging balls that have not entered the first ball entrance 64b1 to the outside of the ball distribution device 970 (i.e., the outside of the pachinko machine 10).
Each of the bowls is formed in a circular mortar shape, and the inner wall of the bowl is configured so that the game ball can roll in a direction parallel to the outer circumference of the bowl.
Each of the cranes has three ball entrances through which game balls that have rolled on the inner wall can enter. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 699, the first crane 971 has three ball entrances near its bottom: a safe ball entrance 971a, and out ball entrances 971b and 971c.
Near the bottom of the second club 972, there are a safe ball entry hole 972a, an out ball entry hole 972b, and
72c. That is, the first and second clubs 971 and 972 are each configured as a known three-hole club.

As shown in FIG. 699, the first runner 971 includes a second runner guide flow path 971n that guides the game ball that has entered the safe ball entrance 971a down to the second runner 972, and a left runner that guides the game ball that has entered the out ball entrance 971b down to the left runner 973, which is a part of the out port 973.
The out guide flow path 971o1 allows the game ball that has entered the out ball entrance 971c to flow down to the right out port 973b, which is a part of the out port 973.
1o2 are connected to the second cranes 972. In addition, the second cranes 972 are connected to a guide flow path 972v that allows the game ball that entered the safe ball entrance 972a to flow down toward the first ball entrance 64b1, an out guide flow path 972o1 that allows the game ball that entered the out ball entrance 972b to flow down to the left out port 973a, and an out guide flow path 972o2 that allows the game ball that entered the out ball entrance 972c to flow down to the right out port 973b.
The out guide flow paths 6971o2, 972o2 merge downstream into the flow path 1 that guides the game balls downward toward the left outlet 973a. Similarly, the out guide flow paths 6971o2, 972o2 merge downstream into the flow path 1 that guides the game balls downward toward the right outlet 973a.

In summary, all game balls that flow down to the ball distribution device 970 first reach the first crane 971, and some of the game balls that reach the first crane 971 (game balls that enter the safe ball entry port 971a, which enters at a rate of approximately 1 in 3 balls) are guided to the second crane guide path 971.
A part of the game balls that are guided to the second 972 by the guide passage 972v and reach the second 972 (the game balls that enter the safe ball entrance 972a, which enters at a rate of about 1 in 3 balls) is guided to the first ball entrance 64b1 by the guide passage 972v. In other words, the rate at which the balls that reach the ball distribution device 970 enter (are distributed) into the first ball entrance 64b1 is about 1/9 (1/3 x 1/3). In other words, even if the game balls reach the ball distribution device 970, about 8/9 of the game balls are distributed to the out port 973 and discharged to the outside without entering the first ball entrance 64b1.

With these configurations, the ball distribution device 970 is inserted into the first ball entrance 64, which is relatively advantageous for the player.
It can also be said that the first crane 971 alone in the ball distribution device 970 is a distribution means capable of distributing game balls to either the second crane guide flow path 971n which is likely to flow down to the advantageous first ball entrance 64b1 (with a probability of about 1/3), or the out guide flow paths 971o1, 971o2 which are impossible (difficult) to flow down to the first ball entrance 64b1 (i.e., flow down to the disadvantageous out exit 973).
The guide flow path 972v that allows the ball to flow down to the advantageous first ball inlet 64b1 as a single unit of the Kluen 971
It is impossible (difficult) for the ball to flow down to the first ball inlet 64b1 (i.e., the disadvantageous outlet 9
73) or the out guide flow paths 972o1, 972o2 (flowing downward to the out guide flow paths 972o3, 972o4).

In this third embodiment, both the first krunk 971 and the second krunk 972 have a three-hole structure, and one of the holes is configured to be part of a specific path that can allow a ball to enter the first ball entry port 64b1. However, the configuration of the first krunk 971 and the second krunk 972 is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the configuration is such that part of the path along which a ball flowing (rolling) down the first krunk 971 and the second krunk 972 can flow is a specific path that can allow the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64b1. For example, the number of holes formed in each krunk may be different, or the arrangement of the holes that form the specific path may be different.

In this case, the position of a specific hole (a hole capable of causing a ball to flow down to the second crane 972) that is a part of the specific path among the multiple holes provided in the first crane 971, and the position of a specific hole (a hole capable of causing a ball to flow down to the second crane 972) that is a part of the specific path among the multiple holes provided in the second crane 972 (the first ball entrance 64
It is advisable to make the position of the hole (a hole that can cause the ball to flow down to b1) different from that of the hole (b2). For example,
When the specific hole of the first 971 is located at the innermost part (the far side (the game board 13 side) from the viewpoint of FIG. 699), it is preferable to locate the specific hole of the second 972 at the innermost part (the near side (the player side) from the viewpoint of FIG. 699). By configuring it in this way, even if the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a slightly tilted state in the front-to-back direction, it will only be easier to score a ball in one specific hole and harder to score a ball in the other specific hole, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult to score a ball in any of the specific holes, causing discomfort to the player, or it is easy to score a ball in any of the specific holes, resulting in excessive benefits being given to the player.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the first and second crane 971 and 97
The ball that flows down both of the first and second holes 971 and 972 can enter the first ball entrance 64b1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball may be inserted into some of the holes formed in the first and second holes 971 and 972.
2 flows down, and the SP flow path is connected to the first ball inlet 64b1, through which the ball can enter directly.
A P hole may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to make the ball that has flowed down various paths enter the first ball entrance 64b1, and it is possible to provide a game that does not tire the player who is playing a game (a game in a normal state) aiming to make the ball enter the first ball entrance 64b1.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the first 971 so that it is easier for multiple balls to enter a specific hole when they flow down the first 971 at once than when one ball flows down the first 971. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player aim to make multiple balls flow down the first 971, so that even if balls have flowed into the ball distribution device 970, the player can continue to play left-handed, thereby increasing the operation of the game.

In the third embodiment, a ball distribution device 97 having a first runner 971 and a second runner 972 is used as a suppression means for suppressing (reducing) the entry of balls into the first ball entry port 64b1.
0 is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a variable means may be provided on the path for allowing the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64b1 (directly above the opening of the first ball entrance 64b1) that can be changed between an open state in which the ball can enter the first ball entrance 64b1 and a closed state in which it is more difficult to allow the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64b1 than in the open state, and the variable means may be constantly driven in a predetermined variable pattern and used as the suppression means. Even when such a configuration is used, when a ball shot by left-handed play reaches the vicinity of the first ball entrance 64b1, if the variable means is in the open state, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1, and if the variable means is in the closed state, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b1.
Since it can be configured so that the ball does not (or is difficult to) enter the ball entrance 64b1, it is possible to prevent balls shot by left-handed play from entering the first ball entrance 64b1.

<Regarding transition of game state in the third embodiment>
Next, the transition of the game state (flow of game characteristics) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 700. FIG. 700 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the transition of the game state in the third embodiment.

In this third embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment described above is that the special symbol type for which the lottery is mainly executed during the first probability variable state is the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, that the special symbol type for which the lottery is mainly executed during the second probability variable state is the second special symbol instead of the first special symbol, and that the special symbol type for which the lottery is mainly executed during the time-saving state is the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol, but the rest of the contents are the same. The same contents are as follows:
A detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 700, in the normal state, a game is played in which the player aims to execute the first special symbol lottery by hitting a ball into the first ball entrance 64b1 by left-handed play, as in the first embodiment described above. Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 698 and FIG. 699, the third embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the game board 13 is configured to make it difficult to execute the first special symbol lottery in the normal state.

When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the jackpot type is always set to "jackpot A3.""JackpotA3" is a jackpot type in which a 10-round jackpot game (the same as the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in the first embodiment described above) is executed as a jackpot game, and the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends.

That is, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state (when the first jackpot is won), a 10-round jackpot game that can give many prize balls to the player is executed, and the first probability change state that is the most advantageous to the player can be set. Therefore, a special benefit can be reliably given to a player playing in the normal state when the jackpot is won, so that the player can be motivated to play.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, if a jackpot is won in a state where a low probability state of a special symbol is set, and a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the probability limit number of times is set to "40", and a jackpot is won in a state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set,
When a high probability state of a normal symbol is set after the end of a big win game executed based on the big win, the time-saving limit number is set to "10".

In other words, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set and a jackpot is won (first win) in the first special symbol lottery, 10 rounds of jackpot play based on the first win and 1 round of jackpot play executed until the time limit is reached are played.
In addition to the 0 jackpot games, a total of 11 10-round jackpot games will be executed (made easier to execute).

When the first probability state is set, the game state becomes a high probability state of normal symbols, so that it becomes a game state in which it is easy to make the ball enter the right first ball entrance 64b2 by playing from the right. In the third embodiment, when the high probability state of normal symbols is set, a win is won with a high probability (239/240), and a normal winning game in which the electric role 64a is opened for a long time (2 seconds) is executed.
Therefore, while the high probability state of normal symbols is set, approximately 30% of the balls shot by right-hand play can enter the right first ball entrance 64b2, making it possible to easily obtain the right to execute the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 reserved).

Furthermore, although detailed explanation will be given later, in this third embodiment, when the first probability variable state is set, the first special symbol variation is configured to be set to a shorter variation time than the second special symbol variation. Specifically, the first special symbol variation during the first probability variable state is configured to have a variation time of "1 second", and the second special symbol variation is configured to have a variation time of "10 minutes". Therefore, in this third embodiment, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the first probability variable state.

As described above, in this third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the jackpot type is always set to "Jackpot A3". Therefore, once the first special probability state is set, 10 rounds of play will be played continuously until the first special probability state ends (until the special probability limit or the time-saving limit is reached).

When the time-saving limit is reached during the first probability variable state, a time-saving limit process is executed to forcibly change the high probability state of normal symbols to a low probability state of normal symbols as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and a second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set.

In the third embodiment, the system is configured so that the small prize is won in most cases where the big prize is not won in the second special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol variation pattern during the second probability variable state is easily set to a short variation time (for example, 1 second). Therefore, when the second probability variable state is set, a game is played in which the ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640 by right-hand play to execute the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the state where the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the rate at which the ball shot by right-hand play enters the second ball entrance 640 is about 50%, which is higher than the rate at which the ball shot by left-hand play enters the first ball entrance 64b1. Therefore, right-hand play is an advantageous play method for the player to execute during the second probability state.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed during the second probability change state, the small prize is won in most cases, and the small prize game is executed. When the small prize game is executed, the second variable winning device 650 is opened for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds x 2 times) as in the first embodiment described above. Then, one prize ball is paid out by making a ball enter the second specific winning hole 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, by executing a right-hitting game during the second probability change state, it is possible to continue the game without greatly increasing or decreasing the number of balls held.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the second probability variable state, a jackpot game (same as the two-round jackpot game in the first embodiment described above) is executed in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the same manner as the small jackpot game. In this third embodiment, the allocation of the game state set after the jackpot game ends when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is configured to be the same as the allocation when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the first embodiment described above, and 99.8% of the jackpots won in the second special symbol lottery during the second probability variable state are jackpots that set the second probability variable state again, and 0.2% of the jackpots are jackpots that set the second probability variable state again.
However, this results in a jackpot that sets the first special state.

Therefore, when the second special probability state is set, right-hand play is performed to execute the second special pattern lottery, aiming for the first special probability jackpot, which has a 0.2% distribution, without decreasing (or increasing) the number of balls held, until the special probability limit is reached.

On the other hand, when the first special probability state is set and the special probability limit is reached before the time-saving limit is reached, i.e., a second special probability state in which only the special probability limit is updated (decremented) is continuously set, and when the first special probability state is won in a state in which the remaining number of times until the special probability limit is reached is less than the time-saving limit number (initial setting number of times), and the first special probability state is continuously set, a game state (time-saving state) is set in which the high probability state of the special pattern is forcibly changed to a low probability state of the special pattern.

Since this time-saving state is set to a high probability state for normal symbols, a game is executed in which the ball is thrown into the right first ball entrance 64b2 by hitting the ball from the right, similar to the first special probability state described above.
This time-saving state is a game state that continues until the number of special symbol lotteries (variations) executed after the end of the big win game reaches a specific number (for example, 100 times).
When a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a 10-round jackpot game is executed, and the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends. Also, when the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times in a state where the time-saving state is set, the time-saving end condition is established, and the state transitions to the normal state.

<Electrical Configuration in the Third Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 701 to Fig. 706. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is changed. The rest is the same.
The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment in that a first win random number 3 table 202ba is stored in place of the first win random number table 202a, and a second win random number table 202c is stored in place of the first win random number table 202b.
2c, the second winning random number 3 table 202bc is replaced with the first winning type selection table 2
Instead of the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) specified in .02b, the special chart 1 big win type selection 3 table 202bb1, instead of the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2, the special chart 2 big win type selection 3 table 202bb2, instead of the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the time-saving fluctuation pattern 3 table 202bd2
The first probability variation pattern 3 table 202bd3 is used instead of the first probability variation pattern table 202d3, the second probability variation pattern table 202bd4 is used instead of the second probability variation pattern table 202d4, and the time-saving granting table 202e (FIG. 6
17) in place of the time-saving provision 3 table 202be, and otherwise the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents defined in the first winning random number 3 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. 701. FIG. 701(a) shows the first winning random number 3 table 202ba1.
700. As described above with reference to FIG. 700, the third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively during the special symbol high probability period, which is advantageous for the player (the period in which the first probability state is set).

More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above is configured so that the special symbol lottery executed mainly during the normal state and the second probability variable state is the first special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery executed mainly during the time-saving state and the first probability variable state is the second special symbol lottery. In order to execute a small prize game to suppress the increase or decrease of the balls in the second probability variable state, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the small prize can be won with a high probability in the first special symbol lottery, and is configured so that when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot game with a reduced number of balls that can be won (2-round jackpot) is easily executed. Furthermore, in order to increase the balls in the first probability variable state, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a jackpot game with a larger number of balls that can be won (10-round jackpot game) is easily executed. Furthermore, in order to improve the gaming efficiency during the first probability change state (to increase the number of big wins per unit time), the second special pattern lottery is configured so that a small win is not (or is difficult to) won, and the number of times the second special pattern lottery is executed per unit time is easily increased.

In contrast, in the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 700, the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the period when the game state is set to the normal state and during the special symbol high probability period when the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively, during which the first special symbol lottery is executed in an advantageous period for the player (period when the first probability variable state is set) and during which the time-saving state is set. The second special symbol lottery is mainly executed only during the special symbol high probability period when the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively, during which the second special symbol lottery is executed in an unfavorable period for the player (period when the second probability variable state is set). In order to execute a small jackpot game that suppresses the increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed during the second probability variable state, the second special symbol lottery is configured to have a high probability of winning a small jackpot, and when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a jackpot game (two-round jackpot) with a reduced number of balls that can be obtained is easily executed.

In this way, by configuring the second special symbol lottery to be mainly executed only during the period (period during which the second probability variable state is set) that is disadvantageous to the player during the special symbol high probability period in which the high probability state of another symbol is set consecutively, it is possible to configure so that the small prize cannot be won with a high probability when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the small prize game being executed with a high probability in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and the game of timing the ball to enter the second variable winning device 650 being played.

Here, the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 will be described with reference to FIG. 701(b). FIG. 701(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1. As shown in FIG. 701(b), the special symbol 1 random number 3 table 202ba1 is the same as the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment described above.
(See FIG. 612(b)). The difference is that the small win determination value has been deleted, but the rest is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted. As a result, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the small win will not be won.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2 will be described with reference to FIG. 701(c). FIG. 701(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 3 table 202ba2. As shown in FIG. 701(c), the special symbol 2 random number 3
The table 202ba2 is the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (
612(c)), except that a small win determination value has been added. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted. In addition, the small win determination value added in the special pattern 2 random number 3 table 202ba2 is the same as the small win determination value specified in the special pattern 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 612(b)) in the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanations will be omitted. This allows the configuration to be such that a small win can be won when the second special pattern lottery is executed.

Next, the contents of the second winning random number 3 table 202bc will be described with reference to FIG. 701(d). FIG. 701(d) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 3 table 202bc in a schematic manner. As shown in FIG. 701, the second winning random number 3 table 202bc is different from the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 612(d)) in the first embodiment described above in that the winning probability during the low probability state of the normal pattern is configured to be low (2/240), and is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As described above with reference to Figure 698, in this third embodiment, in the time-saving state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and in the first special symbol state, the first special symbol lottery is primarily executable, and the electric device 64a, which is opened when the normal symbol lottery is won, is attached to the right first ball entrance 64b2 arranged in the right area of the game board 13.

In other words, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the ball is made more likely to enter the right first ball entry port 64b2 by a normal winning game being executed, and when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the ball is made less likely to enter the right first ball entry port 64b2 even if a normal winning game is executed.

By configuring in this way, like the configuration of the game board 13 shown in the first embodiment described above, in each game state (normal state, second probability state) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set,
There is no need to use a special configuration to vary the ease with which a ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b2, simplifying the game design.

As shown in FIG. 701(d), in the low probability state of the normal pattern, the second winning random number counter C
The value of 4 is defined as being in the range of "0 to 1" and corresponds to a winning combination. The rest is the same as the second winning random number table 202c of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 612(d)).
Since it is the same as the above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 702(a), the contents stipulated in the special chart 1 big win type selection 3 table 202bb1 will be explained. FIG. 702(a) shows the special chart 1 big win type selection 3
702 (a), the special chart 1 big win type selection 3 table 202bb1 is different from the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) in the first embodiment described above in that the big win type set when the big win is won in the first special pattern lottery is changed.

Specifically, a "jackpot A3 (10R jackpot)" is defined for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 199". When the jackpot type is "jackpot A3", a "second probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won).

Next, referring to FIG. 702(b), the contents stipulated in the special chart 2 big win type selection 3 table 202bb2 will be explained. FIG. 702(b) shows the special chart 2 big win type selection 2
A schematic diagram showing the contents of table 202bb2. As shown in FIG. 702(b), the special chart 2 big win type selection 3 table 202bb2 is different from the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613(c)) in the first embodiment described above in that the big win type set when the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery is changed.

Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 198", a "big win B3" is defined, and for the value "199", a "big win C3" is defined.

And, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B3", when the jackpot is won (when the jackpot is won)
Regardless of the game state at the time of winning (the game state at the time of winning), the "second probability variable state" is set after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C3", regardless of the game state at the time of winning (the time of winning the jackpot), the "first probability variable state" is set after the end of the jackpot game.

In other words, in this third embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery in the first embodiment described above is configured to be set when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

By configuring in this manner, even if the second special pattern lottery is configured to be mainly executed during the second special probability state, the increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed during the second special probability state can be suppressed.

Next, the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern 3 table 202bd2 will be described with reference to FIG. 703(a). FIG. 703(a) shows the time-saving variation pattern 3 table 2
703(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in .02bd2. As shown in FIG. 703(a), the time-saving fluctuation pattern 3 table 202bd2 is different from the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 615(a)) of the first embodiment described above in that the fluctuation pattern set for the first special symbol fluctuation is configured to be more likely to select a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern set for the second special symbol fluctuation so that the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the time-saving state.

Specifically, when the pattern type is "Special pattern 1", regardless of whether the winning or losing judgment result is a winning or losing, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 1 second (100
When the symbol type is "Special symbol 2", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 1" regardless of whether the result of the hit or miss judgment is a hit or a miss.
A long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (60,000 milliseconds) is defined within the range of "98".

Next, the contents defined in the first probability variable variable pattern 3 table 202id3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 703(b). FIG. 703(b) shows the first probability variable variable pattern 3
FIG. 703(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in table 202bd3.
As shown in the figure, the first probability variable fluctuation pattern 3 table 202bd3 differs from the first probability variable fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 615(b)) in the first embodiment described above in that the fluctuation pattern set for the first special symbol fluctuation is configured to have a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern set for the second special symbol fluctuation so that the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed during the first probability variable state.

Specifically, when the pattern type is "Special pattern 1", regardless of whether the winning or losing judgment result is a winning or losing, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 1 second (100
When the symbol type is "Special symbol 2", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 1" regardless of whether the result of the hit or miss judgment is a hit or a miss.
A long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (60,000 milliseconds) is defined within the range of "98".

Next, the contents defined in the second variable probability variable pattern 3 table 202id4 will be explained with reference to FIG. 704. FIG. 704 shows the second variable probability variable pattern 3 table 20
As shown in FIG. 704, the second
The third probability variable fluctuation pattern table 202bd4 differs from the second probability variable fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 616(a)) in the first embodiment described above in that the fluctuation pattern set for the second special pattern fluctuation is configured to have a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern set for the first special pattern fluctuation, so that the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed during the second probability variable state.

Specifically, when the symbol type is "Special symbol 1", regardless of whether the winning or losing judgment result is a win or a miss, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 600 seconds (60
Ultra-long fluctuations of up to 100 ms (0,000 ms) are specified.

In addition, when the pattern type is "Special pattern 2" and the hit/miss judgment result is a small hit or a miss, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198" and the fluctuation time is set to 1 second (
A short variation of 1000 milliseconds is specified.

Next, the contents stipulated in the time-saving grant 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIG. 705. FIG. 705 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving grant 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 705, the time-saving grant 3 table 202be is different from the time-saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 617) of the first embodiment described above in that the stipulated contents of the time-saving grant number of times are changed in response to the different jackpot types set.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A3" and "jackpot C3", when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are both set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "65535 (effectively until the next time)", and when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "100". Also, when the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set, so the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "0" regardless of the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u.

On the other hand, as described above, the jackpot type "Jackpot B3" is not a jackpot type in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, so the number of times the time-saving feature is awarded is set to "0" regardless of the setting status of the special rate limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario 3 table 202bf will be described with reference to FIG. 706. FIG. 706 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern scenario 3 table 202bf. As shown in FIG. 706, the fluctuation pattern scenario 3 table 202bf differs from the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f (see FIG. 618) in that the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenarios defined corresponding to each jackpot type are different based on the jackpot type being set different. Since the other contents are the same, detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A3" or "jackpot C3", that is, when the jackpot type is a jackpot type that can set the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot game ends, a fluctuation pattern scenario to be selected is specified according to the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v. When the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are both set to off, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the first probability variable fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is referenced from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won is specified, and when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to off and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to on, a fluctuation pattern scenario in which the second probability variable fluctuation pattern table 202d5 is referenced from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won is specified.

In addition, the probability limit arrival flag 203u is set to ON, and the time-saving limit arrival flag 2
When 03v is set to off, the special pattern changes 100 times (
During the special chart fluctuation times 1 to 100 times), the time-saving fluctuation pattern table (time-saving fluctuation pattern 3
A variation pattern scenario is defined in which the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is referenced from table 202bd2 onwards (from special chart variation count 101 onwards), and a variation pattern scenario is defined in which the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is referenced from table 202bd2 onwards (from special chart variation count 101 onwards).

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "jackpot B3", that is, if the jackpot game ends in the second probability state (
In the case of a jackpot type that can be set to a high probability state of a special pattern, a low probability state of a normal pattern, when both the probability limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to OFF, the second jackpot will be played from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won.
In the state where the probability variable limit arrival flag 203u is set to OFF and the time-saving limit arrival flag 203v is set to OFF, the normal variable pattern table 202d1 is referenced from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is won. Note that since the "jackpot B3" is a jackpot type in which the second probability variable state, that is, a low probability state of normal symbols, is set after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to this "jackpot B3", the time-saving limit arrival flag 203 is set to OFF.
v is never set to on. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern scenario 3 table 202bf
In this example, no data is specified in the area corresponding to the situation where the "big win B3" and the time-saving limit reached flag 203v are set to on (shown as "-" in the figure).

As described above, in the third embodiment, the period from winning the jackpot (winning the first jackpot) in the normal state until the time-saving limit is reached can be set as a period (a consecutive win period) during which many prize balls can be awarded to the player. Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, the consecutive win period is set, so that the player who won the first jackpot can be reliably awarded a bonus (many prize balls). Therefore, the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In addition, as described above, in the third embodiment, a consecutive win period is set when the first win is won. Therefore, in order to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player, the first ball entrance 64 is configured to make it difficult to execute the special symbol lottery in the normal state.
It has a ball entry path configuration for the ball to enter the right first ball entry opening 64b1 and a ball entry path configuration for the ball to enter the right first ball entry opening 64b2.

In this way, it is difficult to win the jackpot in the normal state (it is difficult to execute the special symbol lottery).
This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which an excessive amount of bonuses are given to a player, even if the consecutive win period is configured to be set based on a jackpot win under normal conditions.

In addition, since a consecutive win period is set simply by obtaining the first win, even if the configuration is made such that it is difficult to execute a special symbol lottery under normal conditions, the player can be motivated to play.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed and the small win game is executed only during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, which is disadvantageous to the player (the period in which the second probability state is set). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the small win game from being executed with high probability in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, and the game of entering the ball into the second variable winning device 650 by timing it.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 707 to Fig. 721. The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the conditions for acquiring the right (special pattern high probability right) for setting the high probability state of the special pattern after the big win game is completed are different.

Specifically, in the first embodiment described above, if the jackpot type set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery specifies information for setting a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, the high probability special symbol right is acquired when a jackpot type in which a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends is set. In contrast, in the fourth embodiment, the high probability special symbol right is acquired when a jackpot type in which a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends is set and the ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game.

In other words, even if a jackpot type that sets a high probability state of a special pattern after the end of a jackpot game is set, if the ball cannot pass through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game corresponding to that jackpot type, a low probability state of a special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with a game that combines a game aiming to win many prize balls during a jackpot game with a game aiming to pass the ball into a specific area, aiming to set a high probability state of a special pattern that generally has a high degree of advantage for the player, and this makes it possible for the player to play with more enthusiasm during the jackpot game.

<Regarding the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment>
Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 707 to Fig. 710. Fig. 707 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 707, the fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a V winning device 106 is used instead of the first variable winning device 65.
5 is provided, and otherwise they are the same. Detailed description of the same configurations will be omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, a big win game is executed in which the V winning device 1065 is opened when the big win is won.
065 is a sure-change switch 1065e3 through which a ball entering a specific winning hole 1065a can pass.
(specific area) is provided. Details will be described later with reference to Figs. 708 to 710, but the V winning device 1065 has two paths through which the entered ball can pass, and the ball that flows down one of the paths passes through the probability change switch 1065e3 (specific area). And, by the ball passing through the probability change switch 1065e3 during the jackpot game, the player is configured to acquire the right (special pattern high probability right) to set a high probability state of the special pattern, which is a game state in which the lottery result of the special pattern is likely to be a jackpot as a game state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends.

<Regarding the V winning device 1065 in the fourth embodiment>
Here, the configuration of the above-mentioned V winning device 1065 will be described with reference to Figs. 708 to 710. Fig. 708 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 1065.
5 is combined with an opening forming member 1065b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 1065b, as shown in FIG. 708, to form a V winning device 10
A base member 1065c for fastening the base member 106 to the game board 13 with screws,
The LED board 1065d is arranged on the rear side of the base member 1065c and has a plurality of LEDs arranged thereon for lighting the LEDs from the rear side of the base member 1065c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a rear cover body 1065e that holds the LED board 1065d between the base member 1065c, and an opening/closing door 1065b for opening and closing a specific winning hole 1065a formed in the opening forming member 1065b.
1065f, a flow path cover body 1065g which is combined with the rear side of the rear cover body 1065e to form a flow path, and a switching member 1065 which projects into the flow path formed by the rear cover body 1065e and the flow path cover body 1065g to switch the flow path of the game ball.
h, a link member 1065i engaged with the switching member 1065h, and a flow passage cover body 10
a back cover body 1065j disposed on the back side of the rear cover body 1065g; and a flow path solenoid 1065k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 1065j and actuating a link member 1065i.
and a fixing cover body 1065m for covering the flow path solenoid 1065k from the rear side and fixing it to a rear cover body 1065j with screws.

FIG. 709 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 1065. FIG. 709(c) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 106
5, and Figure 709 (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the V winning device 1065.
As shown in Fig. 709(b), the V winning device 1065 is formed with a specific winning opening 1065a, which is an opening through which the game ball can enter. The specific winning opening 1065a is formed with a substantially rectangular opening on the upper side of the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball that passes through the opening is
The bottom surface is inclined downward to the left so that the ball is guided to the left of the ball. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 1065 is formed with a magnetic sensor 1065c1 for detecting the entry of a game ball.
The game ball passing through this detection port 1065a1 is guided to a distribution flow path formed on the back side of the rear cover body 1065e shown in FIG.

As shown in Fig. 709(b), the opening of the specific winning hole 1065a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter (is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 1065f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the side of the game board 13. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 1065f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door.
In addition, in the open state, the opening and closing door 1065f1 is located inside the base member 1065c (the game board 13
The prize winning hole 1065a is configured to be evacuated to the inside of the prize winning hole 1065a by being evacuated to the inside of the prize winning hole 1065a.

By configuring it in this way, when the opening of the V winning device 1065 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the V winning device 1065 and is guided to the second ball entrance 640 side. Therefore, even during time-saving play (including during the first probability change play), it is possible to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 while still hitting it to the right, which reduces the effort of immediately changing the play method to hitting it to the left after a big win. Therefore, it is possible to play more easily.

In the open state, the plane perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down is the V winning device 1065.
Since the opening can be configured as 1, more game balls can efficiently enter the V winning device 1065. Therefore, the time required for the big win game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Fig. 709(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Fig. 709(b). As shown in Fig. 709(a), a magnetic sensor 1065c1 having a detection port 1065a1 is mounted on a rear cover body 106.
The detection port 1065a1 is fixed to the base member 1065c so as to be inclined toward the distribution flow path side of 5e.

Referring to Figure 710, a configuration will be described in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 1065e are distributed to a normal discharge flow path 1065e1 and a special discharge flow path 1065e2 described later.

FIG. 710(a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 1065e showing a state in which the switching member 1065h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 1065e2.
As shown in a), the switching member 1065h has a locking hole 1065h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 1065i is inserted and a guide piece 1065h2 that guides the game ball, and is pivotally supported on the flow path cover body 1065g from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 1065g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 1065h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 1065h2 can be rotatably disposed in the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover body 1065g.

As shown in FIG. 710(a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 1065a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 1065h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and flows into the special discharge flow path 1.
The game ball that has passed through the special discharge flow path 1065e2 is guided to the special discharge flow path 1065e2.
The passing of the game ball is detected by a sure-change switch 1065e3, which is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passing of the game ball provided at 065e2, and the ball is discharged from the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1065e3 (specific area) during a jackpot game, the player acquires the right to set the game state after the jackpot game to a high probability state of a special symbol (special symbol high probability right). In other words, the probability change switch 1065e3 is formed as a specific area for acquiring the special symbol high probability right. Also, the switching member 1065h, depending on its switching mode,
V. For determining whether or not to pass a ball that has flowed into the winning device 1065 to a specific area (
It serves as a means of allocation.

In this way, in the fourth embodiment, the game state set after the big win game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the specific winning port 1065a during the big win game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the big win game. The time required for the ball to pass from the opening of the V winning device 1065 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 1065e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 1065h2 of the switching member 1065h) is at least 1 second. The operation of the switching member 1065h is configured so that the switching member 1065h is operated for 10 seconds (or until the second round is completed) in accordance with the opening timing of the V winning device 1065 at the start of the second round, regardless of the type of big win game that is executed. Therefore, in this fourth embodiment, regardless of which type of jackpot game is executed, the special chart high probability right can be reliably acquired by executing a game in which the ball enters the V winning device 1065 during the second round of round play.

In this way, by limiting the timing at which the switching member 1065h is activated to the period during which a specific round of play is played in a jackpot game in which multiple rounds of play are played, it is possible to execute an effect to indicate that the ball is in a situation in which it is possible to pass through the specific area only during that round of play, and to execute an effect to celebrate the jackpot win for other rounds of play.

In the fourth embodiment, the round in which the switching member 1065h is operated is the round (second round) that is executed regardless of the type of jackpot game based on which jackpot game. By configuring in this way, the processing for operating the switching member 1065h can be unified regardless of the type of jackpot game (jackpot game with a different number of rounds to be executed) that is executed, and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the degree of difficulty in passing the ball through a specific area during a jackpot game is the same regardless of which jackpot game is executed, but without being limited to this, the degree of difficulty in passing the ball through a specific area may be varied depending on the type of jackpot that has been set.

In this case, for example, when a jackpot type that makes it easier for the ball to pass through a specific area (advantageous jackpot type) is set, an operation scenario can be set in which the switching member 1065h is activated for a long period of time (5 seconds) during a round of play in which the switching member 1065h is activated, and when a jackpot type that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through a specific area (unfavorable jackpot type) is set, an operation scenario can be set in which the switching member 1065h is activated during a round of play in which the switching member 1065h is activated for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) before or immediately after the opening operation of the V winning device 1065 is executed. By configuring it in this manner, when a favorable jackpot type is set, it is possible to easily acquire the special chart high probability right by simply continuing the game (right-hand hit game) to make the ball enter the V winning device 1065 during round play when the switching member 1065h is activated, but when an unfavorable jackpot type is set, even if a game (right-hand hit game) to make the ball enter the V winning device 1065 is executed during round play when the switching member 1065h is activated, by the time the ball that has entered the V winning device 1065 reaches the switching member 1065h, the operation of the switching member 1065h has already been completed, making it impossible (difficult) to make the ball pass through the specific area, so that it is impossible (difficult) to acquire the special chart high probability right.

With reference to Fig. 710(b), a case where the ball is guided to the normal discharge flow passage 1065e1 will be described. Fig. 710(b) is a diagram showing a state where the flow passage solenoid 1065k is not activated and the guide piece 1065h2 of the switching member 1065h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special discharge flow passage 1065e2.

The game balls guided to the distribution flow path from the detection port 1065a1 are guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 1065h2 of the switching member 1065h and guided to the normal discharge flow path 1065e1. At the end of this normal discharge flow path 1065e1, a discharge confirmation switch 1065e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided. This allows the discharge confirmation switch 1065e4 and the special switch 1065e to check whether all the balls that entered the V winning device 1065 have been discharged.
It can be determined by the sum of this and 3.

Therefore, the second round of play is executed in a state where the ball that won before the start of the second round of play (the ball that won during the first round of play) has not been discharged (remains), and the malfunction of the retained ball winning the special chance switch 1065e3 can be prevented.

In this way, the game ball that entered the specific winning hole 1065a in the V winning device 1065 is detected by the magnetic sensor 1065c1, and based on that, prize balls (15 prize balls for one winning ball in this embodiment) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a probability variable game state by configuring it to be able to pass through the probability variable switch 1065e3. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning hole for granting a probability variable game state separately from the variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be used effectively.

<About the content of the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to Figures 711 and 712, the presentation executed in the fourth embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment described above, a high probability state (high probability state) for the special symbol is set regardless of whether the jackpot type is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, so if a jackpot with a special symbol is won in a low probability non-time-saving state (normal state), the high probability state continues until the probability variable limit is reached. Also, during the high probability non-time-saving state (second probability variable state), the number of balls held by the player is configured not to increase or decrease significantly, so that the player can play in a state where it is easy to win a jackpot while maintaining the number of balls held until the probability variable limit is reached.

However, during the second special probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot with a jackpot type (jackpot C (see Figure 613 (b))) that sets a high probability time-saving state (first special probability state) is extremely low (0.2% of jackpot wins), and although it is a state in which it is easier to win a jackpot compared to when the normal state is set as the game state, it is a state in which it is difficult to set the first special probability state, so there was a problem that when the second special probability state was set, the player's motivation to play decreased.

In contrast, in the fourth embodiment, a game in which a ball passes through a specific area (V gate) during a big win game (hereinafter referred to as a "V winning game") is executed, and the ball enters the V gate (hereinafter referred to as
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is configured to set a high probability state (a state with a high probability of winning a special symbol) after the end of a jackpot game based on the winning of a special symbol (called a "V winning").

Specifically, during a jackpot game in which the second probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, if the player does not execute a V winning game and ends the jackpot game without winning a V, then after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (high probability state for special symbols) is not set, and instead the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set.

This normal state is a game state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot with a special symbol than in the second probability variable state, but when a jackpot is won, a jackpot (jackpot B, C) which sets the first probability variable state is set with a higher probability (33.5%) than in the second probability variable state.

In this way, by providing the player with the option of abandoning a game in which the second probability variable state may continue and restarting the game from the normal state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play a game according to his/her will. For example, for a player who has little time to play the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to select a game (a game without V winning (non-V winning game)) that aims to set the first probability variable state by immediately shifting to the normal state without continuing the second probability variable state until the probability variable limit is reached, and for a player who wants to play the pachinko machine 10 for a long time with a small number of balls, it is possible to make the player play a game that aims to continue the V winning game.

In the fourth embodiment, a V winning game is executed as an effect executed during a jackpot game in which a high probability state (high probability state of a special pattern) may be set after the jackpot game ends, and a V winning challenge effect is executed as an effect to suggest to the player the game content after the jackpot game ends in the case where a V winning game is made and the game content after the jackpot game ends in the case where a V winning game is not executed.

By executing this V winning challenge performance, it becomes possible for the player to predict the game contents after the big win game ends and then to select whether or not to play the V winning game during the big win game, so that the player can easily play the game contents he or she desires.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, when a situation occurs in which playing either a V winning game or a non-V winning game during a jackpot game is clearly more advantageous to the player than playing the other game, a V winning challenge presentation is executed in which a presentation mode is set to allow the player to play using one of the game methods, rather than a presentation mode that allows the player to select from multiple game methods (V winning game, non-V winning game).

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistaken selection of a game method during a big win game and being awarded an excessively disadvantageous game result.

Next, among the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the contents of the V winning challenge effect will be described with reference to the drawings. Figure 711 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the effect screen of the V winning challenge effect executed during a jackpot game in which a jackpot type (jackpot D) that can set the first jackpot state after the jackpot game ends is set in the first jackpot state.

When the first probability change state is set after the end of a jackpot game, a game situation in which a jackpot D (see Figure 613 (c)) in which a jackpot game (10-round jackpot game) in which many prize balls can be obtained is executed is likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game based on the results of the second special pattern lottery, so as shown in Figure 711 (a), a V prize challenge presentation is executed in a presentation mode for allowing the player to execute a V prize game.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a display mode in which the hero 801 issues the comment "Hit right and aim for V!" is displayed as a guide display mode for encouraging the player to play the V winning game, and the words "Continue RUSH with V winning!" are displayed in the first display area HR1 as a guide display mode for informing the player of the game content after the V winning, that is, the game state (game content) that is set after the big win game ends in the case of the V winning.
As a display mode that visually shows the position (the location of the V winning device 1065) to the player when executing a winning game, a presentation mode is implemented in which an image display mode that shows a schematic enlarged view of the peripheral area of the area on the game board 13 in which the V winning device 1065 is located is displayed in the fourth game information display area Dm7.

The presentation screen shown in Fig. 711(a) is not a presentation mode for making the player select the V winning game or the non-V winning game, but a presentation mode for encouraging the player to play the V winning game is displayed. In other words, the player can be easily informed that the current big win game is a big win game in which the player is clearly more advantageous if the player plays the V winning game than if the player does not play the V winning game (plays the non-V winning game). In addition, by displaying the position of the V winning device 1065, the player can be easily made to play the V winning game.

In addition, in FIG. 711(a), there is a game method (V winning game) that is clearly advantageous to the player,
A special bonus will be awarded if the advantageous game method (V-winning game) is executed, and a special display screen is displayed to inform the player of the bonus.
The presentation mode for encouraging the player to play one of the game methods (V winning game, non-V winning game) is not limited to this, and for example, a display mode showing a game method that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed,
The system may be configured to notify the player of the game contents (game contents disadvantageous to the player) that will be given to the player when a game method disadvantageous to the player is executed during the big win game. Even in such a case, the player can easily understand that he/she should not play using the notified game method, and it is easy to play using an appropriate game method during the big win game.

Next, referring to FIG. 711(b), a jackpot won during the second probability state, and
We will now explain the content of the V prize challenge presentation that is executed when the remaining number of times in the special rate limit (remaining number of times in the special rate limit) is a predetermined number or more (for example, 15 times).

Figure 711 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a V winning challenge presentation screen that is executed during a jackpot game in which a jackpot type (jackpot A, B) that can set the second special state is set after the jackpot game ends when the jackpot is won during the second special state and the remaining number of times in the special state limit (remaining number of times in special state limit) is a predetermined number or more (e.g., 15 times).

During the second high probability state, as in the first embodiment described above, the game state is one in which the first special pattern lottery is primarily executed, and in 99.8% of cases in which a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a jackpot game (jackpot A, B) in which the second high probability state can be set is executed after the jackpot game ends, and in the remaining 0.2% of cases, a jackpot game (jackpot C) in which the first high probability state can be set is executed after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, when the second probability variable state is set, a game in which the second probability variable state is set continuously until the probability variable limit is reached is played, and a game in which a jackpot game (jackpot C) that is played with a probability of about 0.2% when a jackpot is won is played is played.
During the high probability state, a game is played in which the first special pattern lottery is executed by hitting the ball from the right side, as in the first game state described above, and the game state is configured with little increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed.

Therefore, when a jackpot (jackpot A, B) that sets the second high probability state after the jackpot game ends during the second high probability state is won, the player can choose between playing a V winning game to play a game that mainly focuses on the second high probability state until the high probability state limit is reached, or playing a non-V winning game to quickly set the normal state and then playing a jackpot in the normal state to set the first high probability state.

In the first display area HR1, if a V is won, the probability of winning a jackpot C (Fig. 613 (b)) is extremely low, but the mode is a "quick low chance mode" in which the player aims to win a jackpot C without significantly reducing the number of balls held, while if a V is not won, the mode is a "one-shot high chance mode" in which it is difficult to win a jackpot, but if a jackpot is won, the mode is a "one-shot high chance mode" in which the first probability change is likely to be set, and in the main display area Dm, the hero 801 guides the player by saying, "If you hit to the right, you'll get a V! If the shot stops, you won't get a V!", allowing the player to select the mode he or she prefers.

FIG. 712 is an example of a V prize challenge presentation screen in the second special state when the number of times remaining in the special state limit is 2. The difference from when the number of times remaining in the special state limit is 15 is that even if a jackpot C (FIG. 613(b)) is won in the second special state, the special state limit will be reached before the time-saving limit is reached, so there is a possibility that the number of prize balls that the player can win will be less than when the number of times remaining in the special state limit is 15. Therefore, in the first display area HR1,
If you win a V, you can aim for a big win without significantly reducing the number of balls you have, but the "low risk, low return with a V" suggests that there is a high possibility that the number of prize balls you can get is small.
On the other hand, if the V does not win, the special pattern low probability state (special pattern low probability state) is set, and the probability limit is released, and if the next jackpot that sets the first probability state is won, a new probability limit number is set, and the player can win a large number of prize balls. Therefore, in the first display area HR1, it is displayed "High risk high return without V winning," which suggests that it is difficult to win a jackpot, but if a jackpot is won, it is more likely that a large number of prize balls can be won compared to when the V wins.

In this way, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation mode of the V winning challenge executed during a jackpot game can be changed depending on the game state set after the jackpot game ends and the remaining number of times in the special mode limit, making it possible for the player to select the game state of their choice, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The configuration of the eighth embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having a specification (special pattern reserve memory specification) that, when a ball enters the starting winning port while the third pattern change to show the result of a special pattern lottery has already been executed (when the conditions for executing a new special pattern change have not been met), stores (reserves) the right to execute the special pattern lottery acquired when the new ball enters the starting winning port a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), and, when the third pattern change to show the result of the special pattern lottery being executed has ended, starts a special pattern change to show the result of a special pattern lottery based on the stored execution right.

In this case, the presentation mode of the V winning challenge presentation executed based on winning a jackpot in which the second probability variable state is set during the second probability variable state in a situation where the remaining number of times of the probability variable limit is small (for example, 3 times) may be determined based on the result of the pre-reading for the reserved and stored execution right. For example, when the execution right to win a jackpot in which the first probability variable state is set exists among the stored execution rights as a pre-reading result of the result of the special pattern lottery held by the reserved and stored execution right, in the V winning challenge presentation,
By configuring the game so that a performance is executed to inform the player that it is more advantageous not to win,
This increases the reliability of the information provided in the winning challenge performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

In other words, even if the ball enters the V-shaped slot during a big win and the second probability change state is set, the remaining probability change limit is two times, and the first probability change state continues only two times.
Once you have cleared the limited number of chance wins by transitioning to the normal state, you can enter a V-winning challenge based on the first chance win of the stored execution right.
By setting a new probability variation limit number of times, it is possible to continue the first probability variation state for 10 times. In such a case, the presentation mode of the V winning challenge presentation may be determined so that a game advantageous to the player is executed.

In the first embodiment described above, the winning of the big win is notified only when the first big win state is set in the second big win state, but in the fourth embodiment, the winning of the big win is notified even when the second big win state is set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 711(a), the V winning challenge performance is executed when the second round of the big win game is being executed, regardless of the big win type.

By configuring in this way to notify of a jackpot that sets the second highly variable state, it is possible to prevent a player who wants to continue the second highly variable state from losing his or her motivation to play because he or she does not realize that he or she has won jackpot A or B, is unable to win V in the V-winning challenge presentation, and is unwillingly set to normal.

In addition, for players who have given up on the second probability change state, winning the jackpot A or B gives them the opportunity to set the normal state, so not only winning the jackpot C, but also winning the jackpot A
Or, it is possible to make the player feel happy about winning B as well.

In the fourth embodiment, in the V winning challenge performance when the second probability variable jackpot is won during the second probability variable state, the player can select whether or not to make the V winning, but in this case, there is a risk that the player will be confused about which is more advantageous, so the display mode in the V winning challenge performance may be configured based on the game state set after the jackpot game ends, for example, to notify "right hit" in the V winning challenge performance when the first probability variable state is set, and to notify "left hit" or "stop shooting" when the second probability variable state is set. By configuring in this way, the player can play without hesitation.

In addition, the magnification ratio of the display mode commonly displayed in the V winning challenge performance (for example, the display mode of "right hit" displayed in the guide display area Dm1) may be changed according to the degree of advantage of the V winning compared to the case where the V winning is not made. For example, as shown in FIG.
As in the presentation screen shown in FIG. 1(a), if a V winning is clearly more advantageous to the player than not winning a V, the magnification may be set to 120% to emphasize right-hit play, and as shown in FIG. 712, if not winning a V is more likely to be advantageous to the player than winning a V, the magnification may be set to 50% to weakly promote right-hit play.

By configuring it in this way, the display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dm1 can be used as a certain indicator showing the game method for the game situation that changes in a complex manner based on each limit remaining number after the end of the jackpot game and the set jackpot type.
It is possible to provide the player with an easily understandable presentation.

In the above example, the magnification ratio of the display mode of "right hit" displayed in the guidance display area Dm1 is changed, but this is not limited to this, and the display mode type of "right hit" may also be changed.

An example of the presentation screen displayed in the V winning challenge presentation in the fourth embodiment has been described above with reference to Figs. 711(a) to 712, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode of the V winning challenge presentation screen displayed when the first special probability jackpot is won in the first special probability state may be changed according to the number of times remaining in the special probability limit. For example, the background of the V winning challenge presentation screen may be changed depending on whether the number of times remaining in the special probability limit is 10 or more or 10 or less. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the number of times remaining in the special probability limit even in the V winning challenge presentation.

Also, in the first special probability state, if a first special probability jackpot that reaches the time-saving limit is won, the first special probability state will not continue even if a V is won (reaching the time-saving limit sets a low probability state of normal symbols (non-time-saving state)), so the configuration may be such that the presentation screen shown in FIG. 711 (b) is displayed to allow the player to choose whether to set a high probability non-time-saving state (second special probability state) or a low probability non-time-saving state (normal state).

Also, even if the first probability variable jackpot is won during the second probability variable state, when the presentation screen shown in FIG. 711(b) is displayed, the player may not realize that the first probability variable state will be set after the jackpot game ends and may select the one-hit high chance mode (low probability non-time-saving state set by non-V winning), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first probability variable state. If the player selects the non-V winning game, the low probability time-saving state (time-saving state) is set, instead of the low probability non-time-saving state (normal state) that the player desired. In other words, the setting of a game state different from the game state that the player expected may reduce the player's motivation to play, as he or she may think that his or her choice was wrong.

Therefore, when the first jackpot is won in the second jackpot state, FIG.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily let the player know that the first probability variable state is set after the big win game ends,
It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned situations that reduce the player's motivation to play.

In addition, if a jackpot that reaches the special probability limit is won during the first or second special probability state, a high probability state for the special pattern is not set even if a V is won (a low probability state is set when the special probability limit is reached), but there is a risk that the player will be misled into thinking that a high probability state for the special pattern is set by winning a V when a V is won, due to the execution of the V winning challenge performance.

Therefore, when a jackpot that reaches the probability limit is won, the V winning challenge presentation may not be executed, and the set game state (normal state or time-saving state) may be notified. By configuring in this way, correct information can be conveyed to the player.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in a low probability non-time-saving state (normal state), the presentation screen displayed in the V winning challenge presentation may be changed according to the game state that may be set after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, when the first probability variable state may be set after the jackpot game ends, a presentation is executed to notify the player that the first probability variable state will be set by winning the V as shown in FIG. 711(a), and to encourage the player to win the V. On the other hand, when the second probability variable state may be set, the presentation screen of FIG. 711(b) is displayed, allowing the player to select whether to set the second probability variable state or the normal state. By configuring in this way, in a state in which the first probability variable state cannot be set, it is possible to allow the player to select the game state he or she desires, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when a jackpot is won in a low probability time-saving state (time-saving state), the presentation screen displayed in the V winning challenge presentation may be changed according to the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit. For example, when a jackpot that does not reach the time-saving limit is won, a notification that the first probability variable state is set by the V winning as shown in FIG. 711(a) is displayed, and when a jackpot that reaches the time-saving limit is won, the presentation screen shown in FIG. 711(b) may be displayed, and the player may select whether to set the second probability variable state or the normal state. By configuring in this way, in a state in which the first probability variable state cannot be set, it is possible to allow the player to select the game state he or she desires, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Electrical Configuration in the Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 713. In the fourth embodiment, in comparison with the first embodiment, the probability change setting flag 203ca, the probability change passing counter 203cb, the winning number counter 203cc, the operation counter 203cd, the notification counter 203ce, the remaining ball timer flag 203cf, the remaining ball timer 203
CG, probability variable effective flag 203ch, probability variable effective timer 203ci, discharge number counter 203
The difference is that cj has been added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same reference numerals are used to designate the same contents, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The probability of winning setting flag 203ca is a flag indicating whether or not it is possible to transition to a high probability state of a special symbol as a gaming state after the end of a big win game.
As a condition for setting a high probability state of a special symbol as a game state after the end of a jackpot game, a condition is stipulated that is established when the ball passes through the probability switch 1065e3 (specific area) in the V winning device 1065 during a jackpot game. Therefore, when the ball passes through the probability switch 1065e3 (specific area) during the valid period (within a specific round game period), the probability setting flag 203c
a is set to ON (see S3262 in FIG. 718). Then, the probability variable limit update process 4 (S2851 in FIG. 716) is executed at the end of the big win game (when the ending period has elapsed).
In the step S2951 of FIG. 716, the setting status is referred to (S2951 of FIG. 716). If it is determined that the setting is ON (S2951 of FIG. 716: Yes), the setting is set to OFF (S29
52). This probability setting flag 203ca is backed up when the power is turned off.
When the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the setting is set to the state it was in just before the power was turned off. Also, when the power is initialized, the setting is set to off.

In addition, when the probability change setting flag 203ca is set to ON when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the probability change switch 1065e3 was passed before the power was turned off, and if it is determined that the probability change switch 1065e3 was passed, the probability change setting flag 203ca may be set to ON and restored. In this case, the determination of whether the probability change switch 1065e3 was passed before the power was turned off can be determined by whether the probability change passing counter 203cb described later is greater than 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the probability change setting flag 203ca to ON and turning the power back on while the power is turned off, thereby reducing damage to the gaming establishment.

The probability change passing counter 203cb is a round during a jackpot game (in this embodiment,
This counter is for counting the number of balls that have passed through the probability change switch 1065e3 (see FIG. 710) in the second round. By adding up this probability change passing counter 203cb and the discharge number counter 203cj described later, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that entered the specific winning hole 1065a have been discharged. This probability change passing counter 203cb is
When the number passes 065e3, one is added and the number is updated (see S3261 in FIG. 718).
In addition, after executing the process of whether the number of balls that won the V winning device 1065 matches the number of balls discharged, it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S3281 in FIG. 719). In addition, this probability change passing counter 203cb is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203cc is a number for counting the number of winning devices 1 in one round of a big win game.
This is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning hole 1065a of 065.
Specifically, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the detection switch 1065c1 provided on the V winning device 1065, the counter is updated by adding 1 (see S3253 in FIG. 718). On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether the number of winning balls in the V winning device 1065 (the value of the winning ball counter 203cc) and the number of balls discharged (the total value of the discharge ball counter 203cj and the probability change passing counter 203cb) match, and then the initial value "
The value of the winning number counter 203cc is reset to "0". The value of the winning number counter 203cc is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, the winning number counter 203cc is set to 0.

The operation counter 203cd is a counter for measuring (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (variable probability solenoid) 1065k is set to ON (excited).
In this example, in every big win, the flow path solenoid 1065k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the second round. The operation counter 203cd is set to a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds. Meanwhile, the operation counter 203cd is updated by subtracting 1 at a time in the winning process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, based on the value of this operation counter 203cd being determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 1065k is set to OFF.
is backed up when the power is turned off, and in the initialized state, the initial value is set to 0. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203cd and controlling the flow path solenoid 1065k, it is possible to control the passage of the ball to the probability change switch 1065e3 in response to the round game.

Unlike the fourth embodiment, the ball is in a specific area (the probability change switch 10) during the big win game.
When it is configured to be possible to execute advantageous jackpot games that are easy to pass through (65e3) and disadvantageous jackpot games that are difficult to pass through, for example, the operation counter 203cd may be set to a value that is the same as that of the fourth embodiment for advantageous jackpot games, and a value of 0.5 seconds may be set to the operation counter 203cd for disadvantageous jackpot games.

By configuring in this way, when an unfavorable jackpot game is executed, the flow solenoid 1064k is set to ON for only 0.5 seconds after the start of the round game of the target round number (the second round game). Therefore, when the ball that entered the V winning device 1065 in the second round game reaches the switching member 1065h, the flow solenoid 1064k is set to OFF, and the probability change switch 1065e3 (specific area)
This makes it more difficult for the ball to pass through.

The notification counter 203ce is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect to attract the attention of the player. In this embodiment, the notification counter 203ce corresponds to one second from the end timing of the first round (when eight balls enter the V winning device 1065 or eight seconds have passed).
The notification counter 203ce is set during the notification process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7).
The notification counter 203 is updated by subtracting one from the notification counter 203 by the process of S3202 in the notification counter 203 (see FIG. 17).
Based on the fact that ce becomes 0, a notification command is set to be output to the voice and lamp control device 113. When the voice and lamp control device 113 receives this command, it outputs a voice (for example, "
The process to output the message "Pay attention to the LCD screen!!" is executed.

By configuring in this way, before the start of the second round when the flow path solenoid 1065k is operated, for example, a voice saying "Look at the liquid crystal" is output (announcement effect is executed), so the player looks at the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the liquid crystal. Here, as shown in Figs. 711 and 712, in the second round of the big win game, an effect is executed to guide the player on how to play the second round using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. During the second round, the flow path solenoid 1065k is activated, so it is necessary to execute a game different from other round games (a game in which it is decided whether or not to pass the ball into a specific area and a game based on the decision content).

Here, if the system is configured so that the game method to be executed during the second round of play is announced after the second round of play has started, there is a problem that, for example, for a player who selects a play that does not allow the ball to pass through a specific area (high probability switch 1065e3) based on the content of the game guidance executed during the second round of play, the ball fired immediately after the start of the second round (before the content of the game guidance is understood) will pass through the specific area.

In contrast to this, in the present fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned notification effect can be executed when the first round ends (before the second round starts), thereby solving the above-mentioned problem.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to let the player know in advance that the second round (round game in which the ball can pass into the specific area) will be played, but the presenter may be configured to execute a V winning challenge (see FIG. 711) in accordance with the timing of the execution of the notification effect described above. In other words, the presenter may be configured to let the player select the game method (whether or not to launch the ball) to be executed during the round game in which the ball can pass into the specific area before the round game in which the ball can pass into the specific area actually starts.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a ball shot by a player who has selected a game method that does not allow the ball to pass through a specific area passes through the specific area during a round game in which the ball can pass through the specific area when the round game in which the ball can pass through the specific area is started. Furthermore, a player who has selected a game method that allows the ball to pass through a specific area can continue to play right-hand shot games. Therefore, a jackpot game can be played with improved time efficiency compared to a case in which a notification effect is executed to temporarily stop the shooting of balls for all players before the round game in which the ball can pass through the specific area is started.

The remaining ball timer flag 203cf is a flag indicating whether or not the V winning device 1065 is opened or closed in one round.
This flag indicates that the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is set to on, and the remaining ball timer 203cg, which will be described later, is set to 1.
The remaining ball timer 203cg is a counter for determining the time since the opening and closing door 1065f1 is closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the V winning device 1065 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203cg is a timer for counting the number of balls remaining when a preset round ends and the V winning device 10
When the opening and closing door 1065f1 of 65 is closed, it is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls that have won in the V winning device 1065 to be discharged has elapsed. In this embodiment, the time required for the balls that have won in the V winning device 1065 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in this control example, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203cg. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203cg (3 seconds in this control example), a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the V winning device 1065 and the number of balls discharged match (see S3277 in FIG. 719). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notice is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that balls are stuck in the V winning device 1065. Therefore, if balls are left in the V winning device 1065 illegally,
It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as giving an impact or the like at the start timing of the second round to make the game ball reach the switching member 1065h earlier than the actual time. Since the remaining ball timer 203cg is set to a time shorter than the interval time until the start of the next round,
The next round of play is executed before the remaining ball timer 203cg reaches its upper limit value, so that no new winning occurs.

In addition, if the number of winning balls and the number of balls discharged do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability change setting flag 203ca may not be set to ON even if the ball passes through the probability change switch 1065e3 (specific area). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the probability change game state from being given illegally.

The probability variation effective flag 203ch is a flag for determining whether or not the passage of a game ball through the probability variation switch 1065e3 is valid when the flow path solenoid 1065k is set to off. When the probability variation effective flag 203ch is set to on, the specific winning port 1065 is selected based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 1065k is on.
It shows that the time required for the game ball that entered a to pass through the probability change switch 1065e3 has not yet elapsed. In other words, it shows that it is a period in which the game ball may pass through the probability change switch 1065e3.

The probability change effective timer 203ci is a counter for counting the time after the probability change effective flag 203ch is set to ON. This probability change effective timer 203ci can determine the period required for a ball to pass through the probability change switch 1065e3 normally after the flow path solenoid 1065k is turned off. In this embodiment, the time required for a game ball that entered the specific winning hole 1065a to pass through the probability change switch 1065e3 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability change effective timer 203ci is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the ball passes through the probability change switch 1065e3 after that, it is determined to be fraudulent and is not determined to have passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud, such as fraudulently changing the switching member 1065h to pass the ball through the special probability switch 1065e3, or using a piano wire or the like to push the game ball up from below the special probability switch 1065e3 to pass the game ball through the special probability switch 1065e3, or using radio waves or the like to cause the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the ball has passed through.

The discharge number counter 203cj detects the discharge confirmation switch 1065e4 (FIG. 7) in one round.
10) is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the V winning device 1065. The discharged ball number counter 203cj is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of balls that have won the V winning device 1065 and the number of discharged balls are determined (S3281 in FIG. 719).

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figs. 714 to 719, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described.
In the embodiment, the big win control process (see S2404 in FIG. 656) is replaced with the big win control process 4 (see S2454 in FIG. 714), and the big win operation setting process (see S2605 in FIG. 657) is replaced with the big win operation setting process 4 (see S2454 in FIG. 714).
715) instead of the jackpot operation setting process 4 (see S2651 in FIG. 715), and the probability variable limit update process 4 (see S2801 in FIG. 659) instead of the probability variable limit update process 4 (see S
2851), and as new processes, notification process (see S2657 in FIG. 717), winning process (see S2658 in FIG. 718), and abnormality process (see S2659 in FIG. 719)
The difference is that the above-mentioned and the above-mentioned are added, but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 714, the MPU 20 in the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment
The big win control process 4 (S2454) executed by the game machine 1 will be described.
This is a flowchart showing the detailed contents of the jackpot control process 4 (S2454).

In the big win control process 4 (S2454), first, the processes of S2601 to S2604 described above are executed. Then, in the process of S2604, if it is determined that it is the timing to start a new round (S2604: Yes), the big win operation setting process 4 is executed (S
2651), and then this process ends.

Referring now to FIG. 715, MPU2 in main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment
The following describes the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S2651), which is one process in the jackpot control process 4 (S2454) executed by the game machine 101.
2 is a flowchart showing the contents of the program.

In the jackpot operation setting process 4 (S2651), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S2701). Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 1065k is set based on the data read in S2701 (S2751). The opening operation of the opening door 1065f1 of the variable winning device 1065 is set by the data read in the process of S2701. In addition, in the process of S2751, the operation of the flow path solenoid 1065k and the operation of the opening door 1065f1 for each round are set. The opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (S2751). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 1065k is set based on the data read in S2751 (S2752). Variable winning device 1
The opening operation of the opening door 1065f1 of the number 065 is set by the data read in the process of S2752. After that, in the process of S2752, the flow path solenoid 1065
The operation of the door 1065f1 and the operation of the door 1065f2 are set.

Next, the opening operation of the large opening (specific winning opening) is set (S2752), the value of the winning number counter 203cc is reset to 0 (S2753), a round number command is set (S2754), and this process ends. Note that in this embodiment, a command indicating that a new round has started is set as the round number command. Then,
Each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a round number command, the round number command is incremented, allowing the current round number to be known. This has the effect of reducing the amount of data in the command output from the main control device 110. Note that the content set as the round number command is not limited to this, and for example, a command including round number information for a newly started round may be set. In this way, even if a problem occurs in the data related to the round number on the voice lamp control device 113 side (the stored data is erased due to a power outage, etc.), the latest round information can be received each time a new round is started, so the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In this way, each operation of the variable winning device 1065 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending midway.

Returning to FIG. 714, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2604, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a new round (S2604: No), then the variable probability solenoid 10
If it is determined that the timing is for the operation of the variable probability solenoid 1065k (S2652: Yes), the variable probability solenoid 10
65k is set to ON (S2653), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2652, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation of the variable probability solenoid 1065k (S2652: No), it is determined whether it is the timing for the start of the ending performance (S2608). The start timing of the ending performance is determined as the start timing of the ending performance when the final round ends, the opening and closing door 1065f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in this embodiment) which is the ball discharge time has elapsed. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending performance (S2608: Yes), the variable probability solenoid 1065k is set to OFF (S2654), and this process is terminated. Although not shown in the figure, in this embodiment, when one game ball passes through the variable probability switch 1065e3, the variable probability solenoid 1065k is set to OFF. However, in consideration of the case where the big win game ends without the game ball passing through the probability change switch 1065e3, the probability change solenoid 1065k is set to OFF in the process of S2654 just to be safe. In this embodiment, the start timing of the ending performance is set to the end of the game of the final round (opening and closing door 106
However, the ending performance may be executed immediately after the end of the final round of play. In this case, abnormality processing for the ball that has entered the variable winning device 1065 may be executed during the ending period.

On the other hand, in the process of S2608, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending period (S2608: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending period (S2610: Yes
), jackpot end process 4 (S2655) is executed, and this process is terminated.

Referring now to FIG. 716, MPU2 in main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment
The following describes the probability variable limit update process 4 (S2851), which is one process in the big win end process 4 (S2655) executed by the number 01.
2851) of the present embodiment.
(S2851) is the same as the probability limit update process (S in FIG. 659) in the first embodiment described above.
2801), the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1065e3 during the big win game,
When the probability setting flag 203ca is set to ON, a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, so the process of setting the high probability state of the special symbol based on the jackpot type is changed to a process of determining whether the probability setting flag 203ca is set to ON and setting the high probability state of the special symbol. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

In the probability change limit update process 4 (S2851), first, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203ca is set to ON (S2951). If it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203ca is ON (S2951: Yes), the processes of S2903 to S2908 described above are executed. Then, after executing the process of S2905 or S2908, the probability change setting flag 203ca is set to OFF (S2952), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in S2951
In the process of (S29), if it is determined that the probability change setting flag 203ca is not on,
51: No), the process proceeds to S2910 described above.

Returning to FIG. 714, the description will be continued. In the process of S2610, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending period (S2610: No), a notification process is executed (S
The notification process (S2656) will now be described in detail with reference to Fig. 717. Fig. 717 is a flow chart showing the contents of this notification process (S2656).

In the notification process (S2656), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S3201). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203ce is 0 (S3201: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the first round (the end timing of the round one before the V round) (S3205). The end timing of the first round is determined when it is detected that 8 balls have won in the first round or when it is determined that 8 seconds have passed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the first round (S3205: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203ce. Then, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the first round in the S3205 process (S3205: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the counter to 2 seconds in S3205, the notification counter 203ce becomes 0 during the 3-second interval time, which is the ball clearing time after the end of the first round,
A voice will be output saying to look at the LCD. Therefore, in the second round, the flow path solenoid 1065k
However, since the player's attention is drawn to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of one round, the movement of the switching member 1065h of the variable winning device 1065 is identified, and it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of big win. Therefore, the player can play until the end of the big win game in the hope of being awarded a high probability state of the special pattern.

In this embodiment, by providing an alarm counter 203ce, a presentation to draw attention to the liquid crystal display is performed from one second before the end of the interval time across to the second round, but this is not limited to the above, and the presentation may be performed continuously from the first round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that the value of the notification counter 203ce is greater than 0 (S3201: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203ce is updated by decrementing it by 1 (S3202). Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the notification counter 203ce is 0 (S3203), and if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203ce is 0 (S3203: Yes), a notification command is set (S3204). Then, this process ends. This notification command causes the voice lamp control device 113 to ask the user to "look at the LCD screen."
The audio output settings are executed.

In the process of S3203, if it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203ce is not 0 (S3203: No), the process of S3204 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 714, the explanation will be continued. After the notification process (see S2656 in FIG. 717) is executed, the prize winning process (S2657) is executed next. Here, referring to FIG. 718, the prize winning process (S2657) will be explained in detail. FIG. 718 shows the prize winning process (S2657).
1 is a flowchart showing the contents of

In the prize winning process (S2657), first, it is determined whether the round is valid or not (S3251
The round valid period is the period during which a round game is set, that is, the period during which the opening and closing door 1065
This is the period from the opening state of f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is not in the valid period (S3251: No), this process ends.
When it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S3251: Yes),
If it is determined that the ball has passed the detection switch 1065c1 of the specific winning port 1065a (S3252: Yes), the winning number counter 203cc is incremented by 1 to update it, and a winning number command indicating the updated value of the winning number counter 203cc is set. Then, the process of S3254 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed the detection switch 1065c1 (S3252: No), the process of S3254 is executed.
Execute processing at 3254.

In the process of S3254, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203cc is 10 or more (S3254). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203cc is 10 or more (S3254: Yes), the opening and closing door 1065f1 of the specific winning opening 1065a is set to be closed (S3256). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is set to ON (S3257).
Then, the process of S3258 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203cf to ON, it can be determined that the ball discharge time has begun since the opening and closing door 1065f1 was closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3254 that the value of the winning number counter 203cc is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (
If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S3255: Yes),
On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (
S3255: No), and execute the processing of S3258.

In the process of S3258, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203cd is greater than 0 (S3258). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203cd is greater than 0 (S3258: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203cd is updated by subtracting 1 (S3258:
259). It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 1065e3 (S3260). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the probability change switch 1065e3 (S3260: Yes),
The value of the probability change passing counter 203cb is updated by adding 1 (S3261). The probability change setting flag 203ca is set to ON (S3262). Then, the process of S3263 is executed.
On the other hand, in the process of S3260, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the probability switch 1065e3 (S3260: No), the process of S3263 is executed. In the process of S3263, it is determined whether the operation counter 203cd is 0 (S3263). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203cd is 0, the flow path solenoid 1065k is set to OFF (S3264). The probability active flag 203ch is set to ON (S3265). Then, this process is terminated. Here, by setting the probability active flag 203ch to ON, even after the switching member 1065h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 1065e2 passes through the probability switch 1065e3, the high probability state of the special pattern can be controlled to be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3258, when it is determined that the operation counter 203cd is 0 (S3258: No), it is determined whether the probability variable effective flag 203ch is on (S32
If the probability variable effective flag 203ch is off (S3266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variable effective flag 203ch is on (S3
266: Yes), and update the probability variable effective timer 203ci by adding 1 (S3267). It is determined whether the value of the probability variable effective timer is the upper limit (1.2 seconds in this embodiment) (S3268).
If it is determined that the probability variable effective timer 203ci is at the upper limit (S3268: Yes),
), and the probability variable effective flag 203ch is set to OFF (S3269).
i is reset to the initial value 0 (S1420), and the process ends.
In the process of 8, if it is determined that the probability variable effective timer 203ci is not at the upper limit value (S3
268: No), and executes the processing of S3260.

As a result, if the probability variable effective timer 203ci is not at the upper limit value, the probability variable switch 1065e3
Since it is judged whether the game ball has passed through the switch 106, the high probability state of the special symbol can be set by taking into consideration the time for the ball to be cleared.
It is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through 5e3, thereby preventing a high probability state of a special symbol from being awarded.

Returning to FIG. 714, the explanation will be continued. When the winning process (S2657) is executed, the abnormality process (S2658) is executed. Then, this process is terminated.
The details of this abnormality processing (S58) will be explained with reference to FIG.
13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the abnormality process (S2658). In the abnormality process (S2658), a process is executed to monitor whether the probability change switch 1065e3 has been passed illegally.

In the abnormality process (S2658), first, it is determined whether the round is valid or not (S3271
If it is outside the round valid period (S3271: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S3271: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the discharge confirmation switch 1065e4 (S3272).
If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge confirmation switch 1065e4 (S3272: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203cj is updated by adding 1 (S3273). Then, the process of S3274 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge confirmation switch 1065e4 (S3272: No), the process of S3274 is executed.

In the process of S3274, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is on (S32
If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is OFF (S3274: N
On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is on (S3274: Yes), the ball drain time is in progress, so the remaining ball timer 203cf is started.
g is updated by adding 1 (S3275). The remaining ball timer 203cg determines whether the upper limit (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S3276). If it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached (S
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is the upper limit (S3
276: Yes), the number of discharged balls (the probability change passing counter 203cb and the number of discharged balls counter 203c
j) coincides with the number of winning prizes (the value of the winning prize counter 203cc) (S3277).

If it is determined that there is a match (S3277: Yes), the process of S3279 is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the numbers do not match (S3277: No), an error command is set (S3278). Then, the process of S3279 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying the text "Winning number mismatch error") is performed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This prevents the fraudulent behavior of leaving a gaming ball in the variable winning device 1065 and passing the gaming ball through the probability change switch 1065e3 even in the case of a jackpot J6.

In the process of S3279, the remaining ball timer flag 203cf is set to OFF (S3279).
The remaining ball timer 203cg is reset to an initial value of 0 (S3280). After that, the winning ball counter 203cc, the discharged ball counter 203cj, and the special chance passing counter 203cb are each reset to their initial values (S3281), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to Figs. 720 to 721, the voice lamp control device 1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described.
Each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the game machine 13 will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment described above is that the big win related process 4 (see S4852 in FIG. 720) is executed instead of the big win related process (see S4802 in FIG. 671), and the round performance setting process (see S4951 in FIG. 721) is added, but otherwise it is the same. The same process contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 720, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment
The big win-related process 4 (S4852) executed by the PU 221 will now be described.
20 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big win related process 4 (S4852). The big win related process 4 (S4852) differs from the big win related process in the first embodiment described above (see S4802 in FIG. 671) in that it executes a round performance setting process (S4951) and adds a process for executing a performance that suggests that the game ball passes through the probability change switch 1065e3 and that a high probability state of a special pattern is given. Since the other processes are the same, the same symbols are attached and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the big win related process 4 (S4852), first, the processes of S4901 to S4908 described above are executed. In the process of S4908, if it is determined that a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4908: Yes), the round performance setting process (S4951
The round effect setting process (S4951) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4908 that the round number command has not been received (S4908: No), the process of S4910 is executed. In the process of S4910, it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4910), and if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4910: Yes), the above-mentioned processes of S4911 to S4913 are executed and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4910 that an ending command has not been received (S4910: No), it is next determined whether a V-pass command has been received (S4952). If it is determined in the process of S4952 that a V-pass command has been received (S4952: Yes), a display V-performance command is set (S4953) in order to execute a performance that suggests that the game ball has passed through the probability switch 1065e3 and a high probability state of a special pattern is given, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 721, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment
The round effect setting process (S4951), which is one process in the big win related process 4 (S4852) executed by the PU 221, will be described.
4 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process of step S4951.

In the round effect setting process (S4951), first, it is determined whether the currently received round number command is a command indicating the second round (S5501). If it is determined that the currently received round number command is not a command indicating the second round (S5501: NO),
o), and sets a display round number command based on the received round number (S5502
), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently received round number command is a command indicating the second round (S5501: Yes), the current presentation mode is read from the presentation mode storage area 223k (S5503). Next, it is determined whether the current presentation mode read in the process of S5503 is the super RUSH mode or the RUSH mode (S5504).
When it is determined that the current presentation mode is the Super RUSH mode or the RUSH mode (S5504: Yes), the presentation mode for informing the player of the V winning is determined (S5504:
5505), executes the above-mentioned processing of S5502, and ends this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S5504, the current presentation mode is the Super RUSH mode, or
If it is determined that the current presentation mode is not the RUSH mode (S5504: No), it is determined whether the current presentation mode is the revenge mode or the challenge mode (S5506).
S5506: No), execute the above-mentioned processing of S5502, and terminate this processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S5506, if it is determined that the current presentation mode is the revenge mode or the challenge mode (S5506: Yes), the remaining probability change counter 2
Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining chance number counter 223m read in the process of S5507 is greater than 15 (S55
08). When it is determined that the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is greater than 15 (S5508: Yes), the presentation mode for informing about the V winning is determined (S5505).
The above-mentioned processing of S5502 is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5508, if it is determined that the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is not greater than 15 (S5508: No), it is determined whether the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is less than 2 (S5510). If the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is less than 2 (S5510: Yes), the performance mode for selecting the presence or absence of a V prize is determined (S5511), the process of S5502 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5510, if it is determined that the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is not less than 2 (S5510: No), the process of S5502 is executed, and this process is terminated.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot type is set in which a high probability state of a special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the ball passes through a specific area during the jackpot game, the right to a high probability of a special pattern is acquired.

In other words, even if a jackpot type that sets a high probability state of a special pattern after the end of a jackpot game is set, if the ball cannot pass through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game corresponding to that jackpot type, a low probability state of a special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with a game that combines a game aiming to win many prize balls during a jackpot game with a game aiming to pass the ball into a specific area, aiming to set a high probability state of a special pattern that generally has a high degree of advantage for the player, and this makes it possible for the player to play with more enthusiasm during the jackpot game.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, after the big win game ends, a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols)
As an effect executed during a big win game in which a V winning game can be set, a V winning game is executed, and a V winning challenge effect is executed as an effect for suggesting to a player the game contents after the big win game ends when a V winning game is made and the game contents after the big win game ends when the V winning game is not executed.

By executing this V winning challenge performance, it becomes possible for the player to predict the game contents after the big win game ends and then to select whether or not to play the V winning game during the big win game, so that the player can easily play the game contents he or she desires.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, when a situation occurs in which playing either a V winning game or a non-V winning game during a jackpot game is clearly more advantageous to the player than playing the other game, a V winning challenge presentation is executed in which a presentation mode is set to allow the player to play using one of the game methods, rather than a presentation mode that allows the player to select from multiple game methods (V winning game, non-V winning game).

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistaken selection of a game method during a big win game and being awarded an excessively disadvantageous game result.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 722 to Fig. 734. The fifth embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment described above in that different values can be set as the probability limit number and the time-saving limit number set at the end of the big win.

In the first embodiment described above, the number of times the high probability state of the special pattern is set in succession (number of consecutive special pattern settings) until the high probability state limit is reached (number of high probability pattern limits), and the number of times the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in succession (number of consecutive normal pattern settings) until the time-saving limit is reached (number of time-saving pattern limits) are set to specific numbers (40 times for the high probability pattern limit, 10 times for the time-saving pattern limit). In other words, if a jackpot is won in a game state (normal state, time-saving state) which is a low probability state for a special pattern, and after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot is completed, a game state (first special probability state, second special probability state) which is a high probability state for a special pattern is set, the special probability limit number of times is set to 40, and if a jackpot is won in a game state (normal state, second special probability state) which is a low probability state for a normal pattern, and after the jackpot game executed based on the jackpot is completed, a game state (time-saving state, first special probability state) which is a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, the time-saving limit number of times is set to 10.

Then, when a new jackpot game is executed while the special jackpot limit number or time-saving limit number is set, and a high probability state of a special symbol or normal symbol is set after the jackpot game ends, the set special jackpot limit number or time-saving limit number is updated (decremented), and when the remaining special jackpot limit number or time-saving limit number after decrement becomes 0 (when the special jackpot limit or time-saving limit is reached), a low probability state of a special symbol or normal symbol is forcibly set regardless of the type of jackpot.

In the configuration used in the first embodiment described above, when the number of times for the special mode limit or the number of times for the time-saving limit are set, a fixed number is always set. This makes it easy for the player to grasp the current number of times for the special mode limit and the number of times for the time-saving limit, which creates a problem in that the player's motivation to play decreases in a gaming situation that is unfavorable to the player, such as a situation where the number of times for the special mode limit is low.

In addition, as in the first embodiment described above, a specific game state (second game state) for suppressing an increase in the number of balls dispensed is set.
In a pachinko machine 10 in which a special game state (second special game state) can be set, only specific numbers are set for the special game state limit number and the time-saving limit number, so that the length of time that the special game state (second special game state) can continue is easily predicted based on the remaining special game state limit number and the remaining time-saving limit number, and there has been a problem that in a game situation in which the period that the special game state (second special game state) can continue is likely to be long, the player's motivation to play is significantly reduced.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, different numbers can be set as the probability variation limit number or time-saving limit number in accordance with the type of jackpot that is set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In other words, there are multiple jackpot types for which the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the limit setting contents after the jackpot game ends are different for each of the multiple jackpot types, which is different from the first embodiment described above.

By configuring in this manner, when a specific game state (for example, the first special probability state) is set after the end of a jackpot game, the number of times set as the special probability state limit and the number of times set as the time-saving limit can be made different depending on the type of jackpot, making it difficult for a player playing in the special probability state to predict the number of times the first special probability state will continue to be set, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured to have jackpot types in which the jackpot game content (the type of variable winning slot that is opened, the number of rounds that are executed, etc.) and the type of game state that is set after the jackpot game is finished are the same, and only the limit setting content (the number of times to be set in the probability variable limit number, the number of times to be set in the time-saving limit number) is different. This makes it difficult for players to understand the limit setting content based on the jackpot game content and the game state that is set after the jackpot game is finished.

Therefore, for example, before the first high probability variable state is set, the limit setting contents to be set for the next first high probability variable state to be set can be understood by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player playing during the first high probability variable state from becoming bored with the game.

In addition, in this fifth embodiment, different limit settings are configured to be set for jackpot types in which a game state (such as a second special state) in which only one of the special state limit number and the time-saving limit number is set is set.

By configuring in this way, when the second probability variation state is set after the end of the big win game, a different number of times can be set as the probability variation limit number.
When a jackpot is won in the special probability state and the first special probability state is set after the jackpot play ends, the combination patterns of the remaining special probability limit number (the number after the update of the special probability limit number set when the second special probability state is set) and the time-saving limit number (the number set when the current first special probability state is set) can be made diverse, making it difficult for a player playing in the first special probability state to predict the number of times the first special probability state will continue to be set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to be different based on the game situation after the end of the big win game (the remaining number of each limit that can be set after the end of the next big win game). Specifically, the remaining number of the probability variable limit and the remaining number of the time-saving limit after the end of the big win game are predicted, and based on the prediction result, the advantageous game period that can be set (the period during which the most advantageous probability variable state for the player can be set continuously) is calculated, and the presentation mode of the variable presentation is determined based on the calculation result.

In other words, when determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation to indicate that the same jackpot type has been won, the presence or absence of the setting of the probability limit number of times and the time-saving limit number of times,
It is configured to determine different presentation modes based on the values of the remaining number of times in the probability variation limit and the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit.

By configuring in this way, a player can play a game aiming to win an advantageous jackpot within a specific period of time, rather than simply aiming to win an advantageous jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<About the content of the performance in the fifth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 722 and FIG. 723, the presentation in the fifth embodiment will be described. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the number of times (probability limit number of times) that the high probability state (high probability state) of the special pattern is set in succession and the number of times (time-saving limit number of times) that the high probability state (time-saving state) of the normal pattern is set in succession were set to a specific number (probability limit number of times 40 times, time-saving limit number of times 10 times). In other words, when a jackpot is won in a low probability state (low probability state) of the special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first win") and a special pattern high probability state (high probability state of the special pattern) is set after the jackpot game ends, the probability limit number of times is set to 40 times, and when a jackpot is won in a low probability state (non-time-saving state) of the normal pattern and a high probability state (normal pattern high probability state) is set after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving limit number of times is set to 10 times. In this manner, in the first embodiment, when the probability variation limit number or the time-saving limit number is set, a fixed number is always set.

However, in the first embodiment, since the number of times the special rate limit and the number of times the time-saving limit are set are fixed, it is easy for the player to grasp the current remaining number of times the special rate limit and the time-saving limit are set, which creates a problem in that the player's motivation to play decreases in a gaming situation that is unfavorable to the player, such as a situation where the number of times the special rate limit is low.

In addition, as in the first embodiment described above, a specific game state (second game state) for suppressing an increase in the number of balls dispensed is set.
In the pachinko machine 10 in which the second probability variable state can be set, only specific numbers are set for the probability variable limit number and the time-saving limit number, so that the length of time during which the second probability variable state can continue is easily predicted based on the remaining probability variable limit number and the remaining time-saving limit number, and
There was a problem that in a gaming situation where the period during which the probability of a winning jackpot could continue was likely to be long, the player's motivation to play was significantly reduced.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, different numbers can be set as the probability variation limit number or time-saving limit number in accordance with the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In other words, there are multiple jackpot types for which the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the limit setting contents after the jackpot game ends are different for each of the multiple jackpot types, which is different from the first embodiment.

As a result, when a specific game state (for example, a high probability time-saving state (first probability state)) is set after the end of a jackpot game, the number of times set as the probability time-saving limit number and the number of times set as the time-saving limit number can be made different depending on the type of jackpot.
It is possible to make it difficult for a player playing in the first probability variable state to predict the number of times the first probability variable state will be continuously set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the fifth embodiment, the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to be different based on the game situation after the end of the big win game. Details will be described later, but the remaining number of times of the probability change limit and the time-saving limit after the end of the big win game are predicted, and based on the prediction result, the advantageous game period that can be set (the period during which the first probability change state that is most advantageous to the player is set continuously) is calculated, and the presentation mode of the variable presentation is determined based on the calculation result.

In other words, when determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation to indicate that a jackpot of the same jackpot type has been won, different presentation modes are determined based on whether the remaining number of times for the special jackpot limit and the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit are set, and on the values of the remaining number of times for the special jackpot limit and the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit.

Based on the above, the details of the effects executed in the fifth embodiment will be described.
22(a) is an example of a variable performance screen when the jackpot C5 (FIG. 724) is won in the second variable state when the remaining number of times of the variable limit is 15 or more.
In the special pattern 2 variable display area Dm2 and the special pattern 2 variable display area Dm3, a display indicating that the first special pattern and the second special pattern are variable is displayed, and in the main display area Dm, a performance in which the character 801 chases the character 805 is executed. The difference from the first embodiment is that the background of the main display area Dm is a "lucky background" in which a sun 808 is displayed. In the fifth embodiment, the period (hereinafter referred to as the "overlap period") for the overlapping number of the remaining number of the probability limit and the remaining number of the time-saving limit after the end of the big win game is calculated, and the background to be displayed during the variable performance is determined based on the overlap period.

As shown in FIG. 724, when the jackpot C5 is won, the time-saving limit number of times is set to 15 times after the jackpot game ends. Then, when the overlap period of the probability variable limit remaining number and the time-saving limit remaining number is 15 or more, the "lucky background" is more likely to be determined from the background mode selection table 222da shown in FIG. 731. In addition, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the "lucky background" is determined only when the overlap period is 15 or more and when the probability variable limit remaining number and the time-saving limit remaining number are the same, so that the player can predict that there is a high possibility that it will be advantageous if the "lucky background" is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the background in the high probability time-saving state (second probability variable state), and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, FIG. 722(b) is an example of a variable presentation screen when the player wins the jackpot C5 (FIG. 724) in the second variable probability state when the remaining number of times in the variable probability limit is 4 to 14 times. When the overlap period is 15 or more, the background of the main display area Dm is the "lucky background", whereas when the overlap period is 4 to 14, the background is the "normal background" in which the moon 809 is displayed. The "normal background" is configured to be set easily when the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, so the "normal background" is the background that is basically displayed in the second variable probability state. In other words, even when the player wins a jackpot in the second variable probability state, when the overlap period is 4 to 14, the background of the main display area Dm is likely to remain the "normal background" and not change, and even when the overlap period is 15 or more, the "normal background" may be determined. In this way, since the background may not change even when the player wins a jackpot, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed that there is no possibility of winning the jackpot because the background did not change when the special pattern started to change.

FIG. 723(a) shows the second probability variation state, when the probability variation limit remaining number is 1 to 3 times,
This is an example of a variable presentation screen when the big win C5 (FIG. 724) is won. In this case, after the big win game of the big win C5 (FIG. 724) ends, the overlap period of the remaining number of times of the probability change limit and the remaining number of times of the time reduction limit becomes 3 or less, and from the background mode selection table 222da shown in FIG.
It becomes easier to determine the "hell background" where thunder and heavy rain are displayed from the rain clouds 810. If the overlap period is 3 or less, the high probability time-saving state (first probability variable state), which is the most advantageous play period for the player, is set a maximum of three times, and there are also cases where the first probability variable state is not set and the low probability time-saving state (time-saving) is set. Also, the "hell background" is set when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot,
It is configured to be determined only when the overlap period is 4 to 14 or 3 or less. In other words, when the "hell background" is displayed, it suggests that the player is in a disadvantageous situation.

FIG. 723(b) is an example of a variable presentation screen when winning the jackpot C5 (FIG. 724) in which the remaining number of times of the variable probability limit and the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit are the same after the end of the jackpot game in the second variable probability state. When the remaining number of times of the variable probability limit and the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit are the same after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot C5 (FIG. 724), the background mode selection table 222da shown in FIG. 731 is likely to determine the "heaven background" in which light shines from the white cloud 811. When the remaining number of times of the variable probability limit and the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit are the same, a low probability non-time-saving state (normal) in which the second special pattern mainly changes is set after the end of the jackpot game in which both limits are reached. When a jackpot is won with the second special pattern, the probability of a 10R jackpot is high, and the probability of the first variable probability state being set after the end of the jackpot game is also high, so it can be said to be more advantageous for the player than winning a jackpot with the first special pattern. Furthermore, since the first probability variable state is likely to be set consecutively, when the "heaven background" is displayed, it is suggested to the player that there is a higher possibility of an advantage being gained than when the "lucky background" is displayed.

In this way, in the fifth embodiment, the background displayed in the main display area Dm suggests whether the player will be in a favorable or unfavorable situation after the big win game ends, thereby making the player interested in the background changes while the special patterns are fluctuating, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the embodiment, the background displayed in the main display area Dm is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of times of the probability change limit and the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit after the end of the big win game are predicted, and based on the prediction result, a favorable game period that can be set (a period during which the first probability change that is most favorable to the player is set consecutively) is calculated, and the sound may be changed based on the calculation result, or the LED installed on the game board may be illuminated to indicate the result.

<Regarding the Electrical Configuration in the Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 724 to Fig. 730. In the fifth embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are different from those of the first embodiment. The other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Figs. 724 to 728. In the fifth embodiment, in place of the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 (see Fig. 613(b)), the special chart 1 big win type selection table 502b1 is used.
The table 202db1 is replaced with the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2 by the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202db2, and the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d2 of the fluctuation pattern table 202d is replaced with the time-saving fluctuation pattern 5 table 20
The difference between the first and second probability variation patterns is that the first probability variation pattern 5 table 202dd3 is provided instead of the first probability variation pattern table 202d3, the second probability variation pattern table 202dd4 is provided instead of the second probability variation pattern table 202d4, and the time-saving granting table 202de is provided instead of the time-saving granting table 202e. The other configurations are the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and their detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the contents of the special chart 1 big win type selection 5 table 202db1 will be described with reference to FIG. 724. FIG. 724 is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 big win type selection 5 table 202db1. This special chart 1 big win type selection 5 table 202db1 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a big win type that is set when a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery, similar to the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) of the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 724, the special chart 1 big win type selection 5 table 202db1 has six kinds of big win types (big win A5 to
F5) is prescribed. For each jackpot type, the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, and the limit number of times (the probability limit number of times, the time-saving limit number of times) set at the first jackpot (at the jackpot when the low probability state is set) are prescribed in advance.

Specifically, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4", it is "jackpot A5", when it is in the range of "5 to 54", it is "jackpot B5", when it is in the range of "55 to 94", it is "jackpot C5", when it is in the range of "95 to 134", it is "jackpot D5", when it is in the range of "135 to 17", it is "jackpot B5", when it is in the range of "135 to 17", it is "jackpot C5", when it is in the range of "200 to 250", it is "jackpot B5", when it is in the range of "300 to 350", it is "jackpot B ...
A "jackpot E5" is defined in the range of "4", and a "jackpot F5" is defined in the range of "175 to 199".

Here, as the jackpot game contents, a 10-round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for 10 rounds) is set for the "jackpot A5", and a 5-round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds) is set for the "jackpot B5" to "jackpot F5". That is, in this third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a 10-round jackpot game is executed in 2.5% of cases, and a 5-round jackpot game is executed in about 97.5% of cases. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the jackpot game contents (the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game), the "jackpot A" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

In addition, as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, "jackpot A5" has information for setting the "first probability variable state" after the end of the jackpot game regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won), and "jackpot B5" to "jackpot D5" have information for setting the "first probability variable state" after the end of the jackpot game regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won).
If the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won) is the "second probability variable state", the "second probability variable state" will be entered after the jackpot game ends, and if the game state at the time of winning is other than the "second probability variable state (normal state, first probability variable state, time-saving state)", the "first probability variable state" will be entered after the jackpot game ends.
For "jackpot E5" and "jackpot F5", information for setting a "second probability variable state" after the jackpot game is ended is prescribed, regardless of the game state at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot).

In other words, in this fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery during the second high probability state, the probability that the second high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends is approximately 97.5% (jackpot B5 to F5), and the probability that the first high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends is approximately 2.5% (jackpot A5).

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during a game state other than the second special state (normal state, first special state, time-saving state), the probability that the first special state will be set after the jackpot game ends is approximately 67.5% (jackpot A5 to jackpot D5), and the probability that the second special state will be set after the jackpot game ends is approximately 32.5% (jackpot E5, jackpot F5).

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, it is specified that different limit numbers (probability variable limit number, time-saving limit number) are set according to the type of jackpot. For the "jackpot A5", the probability variable limit number is "10" and the time-saving limit number is "10". For the "jackpot B5", the probability variable limit number is "40" and the time-saving limit number is "10". For the "jackpot C5", the probability variable limit number is "20" and the time-saving limit number is "15". For the "jackpot D5",
For the "10" chance limit and the "20" time limit,
For ", the probability limit number "15" and the time limit number "0" are "Big Win F5
For ", a special bonus limit of "10" and a time-saving limit of "0" are specified.

In addition, if "Jackpot B5" to "Jackpot D5" are won while the second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the second probability variable state is set again after the jackpot game ends; in other words, after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot won in the low probability state for normal symbols is ended, the low probability state for normal symbols is set, and therefore the time-saving limit number of times is not set ("0" is set).

Here, in this third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the first probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set as the game state most advantageous to the player, so that the game situation after the end of the jackpot game can be made to differ greatly depending on the limit number of times set when a jackpot (first jackpot) is won in the first special pattern lottery in the normal state.

For example, if the first winning is "Big Win A5", after the big win game ends, both the probability change limit number and the time-saving limit number are set to "10" (probability change limit number counter 20
3h is set to 10, and the time-saving limit counter 202i is set to 10), so when the first probability variable state is set 10 times in a row, the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit are reached at the same time. Therefore, the game state transitions from the first probability variable state to the normal state, but by reaching the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit at the same time, the special variation pattern table 202d5 (Fig. 616(b)) is changed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above.
) is referred to, the player can continue to play advantageous games even after the special symbol transitions from a high probability state to a low probability state.
As the first winning jackpot type, "jackpot A5" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, if the first winning is "Big Win B5", after the big win game ends, the probability limit number of "40" and the time-saving limit number of "10" are set (probability limit number counter 2
03h is set to 40, and the time-saving limit counter 202i is set to 10), so after the first probability variable state is set 10 times in a row, the time-saving limit is reached and the state transitions to the second probability variable state. Even if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed during the second probability variable state, the second probability variable state is set again with a probability of 97.5%, so in most cases, the second probability variable state is set 30 times in a row until the probability variable limit is reached.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, a game in which the number of balls dispensed is unlikely to increase or decrease during the second special state is executed, so that the game is not disadvantageous to a player who wants to play for a long time without reducing the number of balls dispensed, but a game that is disadvantageous to a player who wants to win a large number of balls is executed.

If the first winning is "Big Win C5", after the big win game ends, the probability limit number of times "20" and the time-saving limit number of times "15" are set (probability limit number counter 203h
The value of the time-saving limit counter 202i is set to 20, and the value of the time-saving limit counter 202i is set to 15. Therefore, after the first probability variable state is set 15 times in a row, the time-saving limit is reached and the state transitions to the second probability variable state. In most cases, the second probability variable state is set 5 times in a row until the probability variable limit is reached.
In the case where the first winning is "Big Win D5", after the big win game ends, the number of times of the special probability limit "10" and the number of times of the time-saving limit "20" are set (the value of the special probability limit number counter 203h is set to 10, and the time-saving limit number counter 203h is set to 20).
The value of 02i is set to 20. After the first probability variable state is set 10 times in a row,
When the probability limit is reached, the game transitions to the time-saving state. When the game transitions to the time-saving state, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed as in the first embodiment described above. Then, the number of times the special symbol lottery (variable) is executed is set to "100" as the time-saving end condition, so that when 100 special symbol lotteries have been executed since the time-saving state was set, the time-saving end condition is met and the game transitions to the normal state.

In addition, if a jackpot is won before the time-saving end condition is satisfied, a value corresponding to the probability limit number of times stipulated for the jackpot type in which the jackpot was won is set to the value of the probability limit number of times counter 203h. In this case, the time-saving limit number counter 202i
Since the value is set to "5", the time-saving limit number of times specified for the type of jackpot won during the time-saving state will not be reflected.

In other words, if the first hit is "Big Hit D5", after the first probability change state ends, the time-saving state is set, and if you win the big hit during that time-saving state (if you pull it back), you will be able to start the first time again.
A special state is set. Furthermore, if no jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the state transitions to the normal state. Therefore, after the first special state ends, the second special state is set for a predetermined period of time.
Compared to the jackpot types in which a probability variable state is set (jackpot B5, jackpot C5), this type allows the player to play in a time-efficient manner, making it an advantageous jackpot type for the player.

Also, if the first winning is a "jackpot E5", after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable limit number is set to "15" and the time-saving limit number is set to "0" (the value of the probability variable limit number counter 203h is set to 15, and the value of the time-saving limit number counter 202i is set to 0). Then, the game moves to the second probability variable state. If the first winning is a "jackpot F5", after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable limit number is set to "10" and the time-saving limit number is set to "0" (the value of the probability variable limit number counter 203h is set to 10, and the value of the time-saving limit number counter 202i is set to 0). Then, the game moves to the second probability variable state.

In other words, when the first hit is "Big Hit E5" or "Big Hit F5", the second probability variable state is set after the end of the big hit game, but the value set as the probability variable limit number is different. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who has been set in the second probability variable state after the first hit to predict the current value of the probability variable limit number.

In addition, in this fifth embodiment, since the jackpot game is executed with the same jackpot game content (5R jackpot) for "jackpot E5" and "jackpot F5", it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the current special chance limit number.

Next, the contents of the special chart 2 big win type selection 5 table 202db2 will be described with reference to FIG. 725. FIG. 725 is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 big win type selection 5 table 202db2. This special chart 2 big win type selection 5 table 202db2 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a big win type that is set when a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, similar to the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613 (c)) of the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 725, the special chart 2 big win type selection 5 table 202db2 has six kinds of big win types (big win G5 to
L5) are prescribed. For each jackpot type, the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, and the limit number of times (the probability limit number of times, the time-saving limit number of times) set at the first jackpot (at the jackpot when the low probability state is set) are prescribed in advance.

Specifically, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is a "jackpot G5", when it is in the range of "50 to 119", it is a "jackpot H5", and when it is in the range of "120 to 139", it is a "jackpot G5".
In the range of "140 to 159", "Jackpot J5" is selected,
A "jackpot K5" is defined for the range of "160 to 179", and a "jackpot L5" is defined for the range of "180 to 199".

Here, as the jackpot game contents, a 10-round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for 10 rounds) is set for the "jackpot G5", and a 5-round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds) is set for the "jackpot H5" to "jackpot L5". That is, in this third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, a 10-round jackpot game is executed in 25% of cases, and a 5-round jackpot game is executed in about 75% of cases. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the jackpot game contents (the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game), the "jackpot G5" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player.

In addition, as the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends, for "Jackpot G5" to "Jackpot J5", information is stipulated for setting a "first high probability variable state" after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won), and for "Jackpot K5" and "Jackpot L5", information is stipulated for setting a "second high probability variable state" after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won).

In other words, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second probability variation state, the probability that the first probability variation state will be set after the jackpot game ends is about 80% (jackpot G
5 to J5), and the probability that the first probability variable state will be set after the end of the jackpot game is about 20% (jackpot K5.L5).

Furthermore, for each type of jackpot, a limit number of times (probability variable limit number, time-saving limit number) to be set after the first jackpot is specified: for a "jackpot G5", a probability variable limit number of "10" and a time-saving limit number of "12"; for a "jackpot H5", a probability variable limit number of "20" and a time-saving limit number of "15"; for a "jackpot I5", a probability variable limit number of "10" and a time-saving limit number of "1"; for a "jackpot J5", a probability variable limit number of "7" and a time-saving limit number of "0"; for a "jackpot K5", a probability variable limit number of "10" and a time-saving limit number of "0"; and for a "jackpot L5", a probability variable limit number of "0" and a time-saving limit number of "0" are specified.

Here, the limit number of times stipulated for the jackpot type "jackpot J5" will be explained. This jackpot type "jackpot J5" is the first jackpot type as a game state after the jackpot game ends.
Although this is a jackpot type in which a probability variable state is set, if the "jackpot J5" is set at the first hit, the time-saving limit number is set to "0". In this fifth embodiment, if the time-saving limit number is set to "0" at the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of the normal pattern is never set, and the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set.

Therefore, when the time-saving limit number of times is set based on winning the jackpot of "Jackpot J5", that is, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, "Jackpot J5"
If the player wins the jackpot, the second probability variable state will be set instead of the first probability variable state after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the player wins the jackpot of "J5" when the time-saving limit number of times is set (high probability state of normal patterns), the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit already set is simply subtracted based on the current jackpot win, so the first probability variable state can be set continuously.

Similarly, the jackpot type "jackpot L5" is the second game state after the jackpot game ends.
This is a jackpot type in which a probability variable state is set, but if "jackpot L5" is set at the first hit, the probability variable limit number is set to "0". In this fifth embodiment, if the probability variable limit number is set to "0" at the end of the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol is never set, and the low probability state of the special symbol is forcibly set.

Therefore, when the probability limit number of times is set based on winning the "Big Win L5" jackpot, that is, when the low probability state of the special pattern is set, "Big Win L5"
If you win the jackpot, the normal state will be set instead of the second probability state after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if you win the "L5 jackpot" jackpot when the probability limit number of times is set (high probability state of special symbols), the remaining number of times of the probability limit already set will simply be subtracted based on the current jackpot win.
It is configured to continuously set the second probability variable state.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, for some of the jackpot types that can set a high probability state of a special pattern or a high probability state of a normal pattern after the end of a jackpot game, the limit number of times corresponding to the pattern type for which the high probability state is set is set to "0". And, when the limit number of times is set to "0", the high probability state of the corresponding pattern is not set, and a low probability state is set.

By configuring it in this manner, for example, when a jackpot is won when a low probability state for a special pattern is set, it is possible to make different the probability (percentage) that a high probability state for a special pattern will be set after the jackpot play ends when a jackpot is won when a high probability state for a special pattern is set, and the probability (percentage) that a high probability state for a special pattern will be set after the jackpot play ends when a jackpot is won when a high probability state for a special pattern is set.

Therefore, for example, while making it difficult to transition from a low probability state for a special pattern (e.g., a normal state) to a high probability state for a special pattern (e.g., a first special probability state), it is possible to increase the probability that the high probability state for a special pattern will be set consecutively (to make it highly continuous), so that the degree of advantage given to the player for one type of jackpot can be made to differ greatly depending on the game state at the time of winning.

Next, referring to Fig. 726 and Fig. 727, the contents of various variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation in this fifth embodiment will be described. This fifth embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is configured to be able to determine different lengths of variation time for the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation that is mainly executed during the time-saving state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation that is mainly executed during the first probability variable state, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation that is mainly executed during the second probability variable state, but is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 726(a), the contents of the time-saving variation pattern 5 table 202dd2 will be described. FIG. 726(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern 5 table 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 726(a), the time-saving variation pattern 5 table 202dd2 is different from the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 615(a)) of the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the variation pattern defined in response to the second special pattern (special pattern 2) are different, and the rest are the same.

Specifically, the winning/losing judgment result (lottery result) is a losing result, and the acquired fluctuation type counter C
The value of S1 is specified as a range of "0 to 129" and a "short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds (5,000 milliseconds), and a "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds) in the range of "130 to 198", respectively, as a fluctuation pattern. When the win/loss determination result (lottery result) is a win, the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified as a range of "0 to 109" and a "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds), and a "long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (60,000 milliseconds) in the range of "110 to 198", respectively.

By configuring in this manner, the time for which the special pattern changes in each game state can be extended, so that during the period in which the special pattern changes are being executed, it becomes possible to suggest to the player the subsequent game content (the game state (game content) that may be set after the end of the jackpot game in the event that a jackpot is won) as part of the change presentation.

Therefore, a player playing each game state can decide whether or not to continue playing in order to win the next big win based on the presentation mode of the variable presentation being executed.

Next, the contents of the first variable probability variable pattern 5 table 202dd3 will be described with reference to FIG. 726(b). FIG. 726(b) shows the first variable probability variable pattern 5 table 202dd3.
As shown in FIG. 726(b),
The first probability variation pattern 5 table 202dd3 differs from the first probability variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 615(b)) of the first embodiment described above in that the content of the variation pattern defined in response to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is different, but otherwise is the same.

Specifically, the winning/losing judgment result (lottery result) is a losing result, and the acquired fluctuation type counter C
The value of S1 is specified as a range of "0 to 194" and a "short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (2,000 milliseconds), and a "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds) in the range of "195 to 198", respectively, as a fluctuation pattern. When the win/loss determination result (lottery result) is a win, the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified as a range of "0 to 149" and a "middle fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds), and a "long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (60,000 milliseconds) in the range of "150 to 198", respectively.

By configuring in this manner, the time for which the special pattern changes in each game state can be extended, so that during the period in which the special pattern changes are being executed, it becomes possible to suggest to the player the subsequent game content (the game state (game content) that may be set after the end of the jackpot game in the event that a jackpot is won) as part of the change presentation.

Therefore, a player playing each game state can decide whether or not to continue playing in order to win the next big win based on the presentation mode of the variable presentation being executed.

In addition, the time-saving state in which the second special symbol variation is the main variation is referred to in the variation pattern table (time-saving variation pattern 5 table 202dd2), and the variation time set in the selectable variation pattern is set to be shorter so that the number of special symbol variations per unit time can be increased. By configuring in this way, the game efficiency in the first probability variation state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state, can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 727, the contents of the second variable probability pattern 5 table 202dd4 will be explained. FIG. 727 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the second variable probability pattern 5 table 202dd4. As shown in FIG. 727, the second variable probability pattern 5 table 202dd4 is different from the second variable probability pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 616(a)) of the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the variable pattern defined corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1) are different, and the rest are the same.

Specifically, regardless of the winning/losing judgment result (lottery result), the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1
"Short fluctuation" with a value in the range of "0 to 148" and a fluctuation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds)
However, a "medium fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds) is defined as the range of "149 to 194," and a "long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (60,000 milliseconds) is defined as the range of "195 to 198."

By configuring in this manner, the time for which the special pattern changes in each game state can be extended, so that during the period in which the special pattern changes are being executed, it becomes possible to suggest to the player the subsequent game content (the game state (game content) that may be set after the end of the jackpot game in the event that a jackpot is won) as part of the change presentation.

Therefore, a player playing each game state can decide whether or not to continue playing in order to win the next big win based on the presentation mode of the variable presentation being executed.

Next, the contents of the time-saving provision 5 table 202de will be described with reference to FIG.
Fig. 728 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving granting 5 table 202de. As shown in Fig. 728, the time-saving granting 5 table 202de is different from the time-saving granting table 202e (see Fig. 617) of the first embodiment described above in that the contents of the time-saving granting count are changed in response to the different set jackpot types.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A5" and "jackpot G5 to J5", when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are both set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "65535 (effectively until the next time)", and when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "100". Also, when the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set, so the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "0" regardless of the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u.

On the other hand, the jackpot types "jackpot E5, F5, K5, L5" are not jackpot types in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, as described above, so the probability limit reaching flag 203u
Regardless of the setting status of the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v, the number of times the time-saving action can be awarded is stipulated to be "0".

For the jackpot type "jackpot B5 to D5", the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the second probability state (
In the low probability state of normal symbols, in some cases, regardless of the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is set to "0". Also, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the second probability variable state, if the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are both set to off,
The number of time-saving times granted is "65535 (effectively until the next time)", and the probability limit has been reached flag 203u
When the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the number of times the time-saving number of times is granted is set to "100", and otherwise the number of times the time-saving number of times is granted is set to "0".

Next, referring to FIG. 729, the RO of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described.
The configuration of ROM222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 729, the ROM of the fifth embodiment
222 stores the background mode selection table 22 in the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above.
The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The background mode selection table 222da is a data table to be referred to when determining the background mode during the variation performance to show the result of the special symbol lottery, and is referred to when determining the performance mode of the variation performance executed in response to the special symbol variation to show that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win. In the fifth embodiment, as described above with reference to Figs. 722 and 723, during the big win variation of the special symbol, the third symbol display device 8
The presentation mode (background mode) executed in the main display area Dm of 1 is shown in the background mode selection table 2
22da.

Specifically, the remaining number of the probability variable limit number of times and the remaining number of the time-saving limit number of times after the end of the jackpot game executed after the jackpot fluctuation in progress is stopped and displayed are calculated, the length of the period (overlap period) during which the high probability state of the special pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set overlappingly is specified, and different background modes can be selected according to the specified overlap period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the remaining period (consecutive win period) during which the first probability variable state can be set consecutively by determining the type of performance mode executed during the jackpot fluctuation.

Here, the contents of the background mode selection table 222da will be described with reference to Fig. 730. Fig. 730 is a diagram showing the contents of the background mode selection table 222da in a schematic manner. As shown in Fig. 730, the background mode selection table 222da specifies different presentation modes (background modes) in accordance with the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose determination result) that is the target of the variable presentation, the value of the presentation counter 223h obtained, and the length of the overlap period.

Here, the overlapping period refers to the period corresponding to the overlapping number of times between the remaining number of times in the special rate limit (remaining special rate limit number) set after the end of a jackpot game and the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit (remaining time-saving limit number), i.e., the period during which neither the special rate limit nor the time-saving limit can be reached (the period during which the first special rate state does not end).

In other words, in this fifth embodiment, by referring to the background mode selection table 222da, the presentation mode can be set based on the length of time that the first special probability state can continue after the end of the jackpot game (the remaining number of consecutive special probability states).

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery (win/lose judgment result) that is the target of the variable performance is "jackpot" and the overlap period is "15~", the performance mode is "lucky" when the acquired performance counter 223h value is in the range of "0~59" and "normal" when it is in the range of "60~89".
In addition, when the overlap period is "4 to 14", the effect mode is set to "normal" in the range of "0 to 89" of the acquired effect counter 223h value, and "hell" in the range of "90 to 98".
If the value is "0 to 3", the acquired value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 59".
"Hell" is defined in the range "0" and "Normal" is defined in the range "60-98".

In addition, when the result of the special pattern lottery that is the subject of the variable presentation (win/lose judgment result) is "jackpot" and the overlap period is "SP", that is, when the remaining number of times for the special mode limit set after the jackpot game ends and the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit are the same, the presentation mode is specified as "heaven" if the value of the acquired presentation counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 89" and "lucky" if the value is in the range of "90 to 98".

On the other hand, if the result of the special pattern lottery that is the subject of the variable presentation (win/lose determination result) is a "lose," the presentation mode is specified as "normal" if the value of the acquired presentation counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 89" and "lucky" if it is in the range of "90 to 98," regardless of the length of the overlap period.

Here, if "Lucky" is selected as the presentation mode, the variable presentation is executed in the daytime background mode (presentation mode), as shown in FIG. 722(a); if "Normal" is selected, the variable presentation is executed in the night background mode (presentation mode), as shown in FIG. 722(b); if "Hell" is selected, the variable presentation is executed in the thunderstorm background mode (presentation mode), as shown in FIG. 723(a); and if "Heaven" is selected, the variable presentation is executed in the crepuscular light background mode (presentation mode), as shown in FIG. 723(b).

As described above, the background mode selection table 222da specifies each presentation mode so that different presentation modes (background modes) are selected depending on the length of the overlap period and the situation, and the presentation mode "Lucky" is most likely to be selected when the overlap period is long (long consecutive chance period of the special chance), and the presentation mode "Hell" is most likely to be selected when the overlap period is short (short consecutive chance period of the special chance). In addition, the presentation mode "Heaven" is most likely to be selected when the remaining number of times in the special chance limit and the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit are the same, that is, when the special game that mainly involves the selection of the second special symbol can be executed in the normal state after the transition from the special chance state to the normal state, regardless of the length of the overlap period (successive chance period of the special chance).

In this way, by changing the type of presentation mode that is likely to be selected depending on the length of the overlap period (probability change consecutive win period), it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the game situation (the remaining period of the probability change consecutive win period after the end of the big win game).
Even in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, the background mode selection table 222
The presentation mode (background mode) can be selected by referring to the display mode (da).

If the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, the presentation mode (background mode) is selected according to the range of the acquired value of the presentation counter 223h regardless of the length of the overlap period (probable consecutive win period), so various presentation modes (background modes) are selected regardless of the length of the overlap period. Therefore, when a presentation in which the background mode is switched is executed as a variable presentation, if a background mode that is likely to be selected when the overlap period is long is displayed, the game in which the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable presentation is expected to win the jackpot is
When a background mode that is likely to be selected when the overlapping period is short is displayed, the player can play a game hoping that the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable presentation does not win the jackpot, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, since the contents of the background mode selection table 222da are stipulated so that a presentation mode (background mode) that does not correspond to the length of the overlap period (probability change consecutive win period) can be selected with a lower probability than a presentation mode (background mode) that corresponds to the length of the overlap period (probability change consecutive win period), when a presentation in which the background mode is switched is executed as a variable presentation, it is possible to make the length of the overlap period suggested by the displayed background mode different from the actual length of the overlap period. This makes it possible to provide the player with a game result (probability change consecutive win period) that is unexpected.

In the fifth embodiment, any of the background modes is configured to be selectable in various overlapping periods, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special background mode may be provided that is selected only when the overlapping period satisfies a specific condition, for example, when the length of the overlapping period is "10 or more" and "SP". By configuring in this way, when a variable presentation corresponding to the special background mode is executed, the player can be reliably notified of the current state regarding the overlapping period, and therefore a presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to Figs. 731 and 732, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described.
In the embodiment, instead of the probability limit update process (see S2801 in FIG. 659), the probability limit update process 5 (see S2871 in FIG. 731) is replaced with the time-saving limit update process (see S2801 in FIG. 660).
731 in place of the time-saving limit update process 5 (see S2871 in FIG. 731 ), but otherwise the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 731, the MPU 20 in the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment
The probability limit update process 5 (S2871) executed by the method shown in FIG.
is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable probability limit update process 5 (S2871). The variable probability limit update process 5 (S2871) in this embodiment differs from the variable probability limit update process in the first embodiment described above (see S2801 in FIG. 659) in that a process for determining the number of variable probability limit times to be set based on the type of big win won is added. Since the other processes are the same, the same symbols are used and detailed descriptions are omitted.

When the probability limit update process 5 (S2871) is executed, first, S2901 to S290
2, and in the process of S2902, if it is determined that the jackpot won this time is a jackpot in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends (S29
02: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the probability change limit counter 203h is 0 or not (S2971).

In the process of S2971, if it is determined that the value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h is 0 (S2971: Yes), the probability variable limit count corresponding to the currently won jackpot type is read from the first jackpot type selection 5 table 202db and set to the value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h (S2972). Next, the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON (S2973), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2971, if it is determined that the value of the probability variable limit count counter 203h is not 0 (S2971: No),
Then proceed to processing 2906.

In this manner, in the fifth embodiment, the number of times the special probability limit is set is determined based on the type of jackpot that has been won, so that the player can play the game while anticipating which type of jackpot he or she will win and how many times the special probability limit will be set, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In this embodiment, the number of times of the probability variable limit to be set is determined based on the type of the big win that was won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times of the probability variable limit may be determined randomly at the end of the big win game. Also, the determination of the number of times of the probability variable limit is not limited to being set after the end of the big win game, and may be configured to be set at the start of the big win game.

Next, referring to FIG. 732, the MPU 20 in the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment
The time-saving limit update process 5 (S2872) executed by the program 1 will be described.
is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving limit update process 5 (S2872). The time-saving limit update process 5 (S2872) in this embodiment is different from the time-saving limit update process in the first embodiment described above (see S2802 in FIG. 660) in that a process for determining the number of time-saving limits to be set based on the type of big win won is added. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the time-saving limit update process 5 (S2872), first, the processes of S3001 to S3002 are executed. In the process of S3002, if it is determined that the jackpot currently being executed is a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set after the jackpot game ends (S30
02: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit counter 203i is 0 (
S3071).

In the process of S3071, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit number counter 203i is 0 (S3071: Yes), the time-saving limit number corresponding to the big win type is read from the first big win type selection 5 table 202db, and the time-saving limit number counter 203
i (S3072). Next, the time-saving flag 203f is set to ON (S3073
), and then the process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3071, the time-saving limit counter 2
If it is determined that the value of 03i is not 0 (S3071: No), the process proceeds to S3007.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 733 to FIG. 734, the voice lamp control device 1 in the fifth embodiment will be described.
Each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the 13 will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment described above is that the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 5 (see S5155 in FIG. 733) is executed instead of the special chart 1 variable performance setting process (see S5105 in FIG. 674), and the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process (see S5251 in FIG. 734) is added, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 733, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment
The special chart 1 variable performance setting process 5 (S5155) executed by the PU 221 will be described. FIG. 733 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 5 (S5155). The special chart 1 variable performance setting process 5 (S5155) differs from the special chart 1 variable performance setting process in the first embodiment described above (see S5105 in FIG. 674) in that after executing the above-mentioned S5205 process, the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process (S5251) is executed.
Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 734, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment
The following describes the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process (S5251), which is one process in the special chart 1 variable performance setting process 5 (see S5155 in FIG. 733) executed by the PU 221.
34 is a flowchart showing the contents of the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process (S5251).

In the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process (S5251), first, it is determined whether the change of the special symbol to be executed this time is a jackpot change (S5601). If it is determined that the change of the special symbol to be executed this time is a jackpot change (S5601: Yes), the jackpot type to be executed this time is extracted (S5602). Then, based on the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n, the current jackpot type extracted in the process of S5602, and the current game state, the remaining probability change number and the remaining time reduction number after the jackpot game is finished are calculated (S5603).

Next, in the process of S5603, the overlap period of the calculated remaining number of chance wins and the remaining number of time-saving times is specified (S5604). Then, by referring to the background mode selection table 222da, the type of background mode is determined based on the result of the judgment of the change of the special symbol to be executed, the overlap period of the remaining number of chance wins and the remaining number of time-saving times specified in the process of S5604, and the value of the performance counter 223h (S5605). Next, a display command for indicating the background mode determined in the process of S5605 is set (S5606), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5601, if it is determined that the change of the special symbol to be executed this time is not a big win change (S5601: No), the background mode selection table 222da is referenced, and it is determined whether there is a change in the display mode of the background mode based on the value of the performance counter (S5607).
If the answer is Yes, the above-mentioned steps S5605 to S5606 are executed, and the process ends.
In the process of S5607, if it is determined that there is no change in the display mode of the background mode (S
5607: No), and then this process ends.

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, the number of times for the special bonus mode limit or the number of times for the time-saving mode limit can be set to different numbers in accordance with the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery.

By configuring in this manner, when a specific game state (for example, the first special probability state) is set after the end of a jackpot game, the number of times set as the special probability state limit and the number of times set as the time-saving limit can be made different depending on the type of jackpot, making it difficult for a player playing in the special probability state to predict the number of times the first special probability state will continue to be set, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured to have jackpot types in which the jackpot game content (the type of variable winning slot that is opened, the number of rounds that are executed, etc.) and the type of game state that is set after the jackpot game is finished are the same, and only the limit setting content (the number of times to be set in the probability variable limit number, the number of times to be set in the time-saving limit number) is different. This makes it difficult for players to understand the limit setting content based on the jackpot game content and the game state that is set after the jackpot game is finished.

Therefore, for example, before the first high probability variable state is set, the limit setting contents to be set for the next first high probability variable state to be set can be understood by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player playing during the first high probability variable state from becoming bored with the game.

In addition, in this fifth embodiment, different limit settings are configured to be set for jackpot types in which a game state (such as a second special state) in which only one of the special state limit number and the time-saving limit number is set is set.

By configuring in this way, when the second probability variation state is set after the end of the big win game, a different number of times can be set as the probability variation limit number.
When a jackpot is won in the special probability state and the first special probability state is set after the jackpot play ends, the combination patterns of the remaining special probability limit number (the number after the update of the special probability limit number set when the second special probability state is set) and the time-saving limit number (the number set when the current first special probability state is set) can be made diverse, making it difficult for a player playing in the first special probability state to predict the number of times the first special probability state will continue to be set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is configured to be different based on the game situation after the end of the big win game (the remaining number of each limit that can be set after the end of the next big win game). Specifically, the remaining number of the probability variable limit and the remaining number of the time-saving limit after the end of the big win game are predicted, and based on the prediction result, the advantageous game period that can be set (the period during which the most advantageous probability variable state for the player can be set continuously) is calculated, and the presentation mode of the variable presentation is determined based on the calculation result.

In other words, when determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation to indicate that the same jackpot type has been won, the presence or absence of the setting of the probability limit number of times and the time-saving limit number of times,
It is configured to determine different presentation modes based on the values of the remaining number of times in the probability variation limit and the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit.

By configuring in this way, a player can play a game aiming to win an advantageous jackpot within a specific period of time, rather than simply aiming to win an advantageous jackpot, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In other words, in this fifth embodiment, by referring to the background mode selection table 222da, the presentation mode can be set based on the length of time that the first special probability state can continue after the end of the jackpot game (the remaining number of consecutive special probability states).

Furthermore, the device is configured to be capable of executing a presentation that can suggest to the player the period corresponding to the overlapping number of times between the remaining number of times of the probability variable limit (remaining number of times of probability variable limit) set after the end of the jackpot game and the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit (remaining number of times of time-saving limit).

In this way, by changing the type of presentation mode that is likely to be selected depending on the length of the overlap period (probability change consecutive win period), it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the game situation (the remaining period of the probability change consecutive win period after the end of the big win game).
Even in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, the background mode selection table 222
The presentation mode (background mode) can be selected by referring to the display mode (da).

If the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, the presentation mode (background mode) is selected according to the range of the acquired value of the presentation counter 223h regardless of the length of the overlap period (probable consecutive win period), so various presentation modes (background modes) are selected regardless of the length of the overlap period. Therefore, when a presentation in which the background mode is switched is executed as a variable presentation, if a background mode that is likely to be selected when the overlap period is long is displayed, the game in which the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable presentation is expected to win the jackpot is
When a background mode that is likely to be selected when the overlapping period is short is displayed, the player can play a game hoping that the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable presentation does not win the jackpot, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, since the contents of the background mode selection table 222da are stipulated so that a presentation mode (background mode) that does not correspond to the length of the overlap period (probability change consecutive win period) can be selected with a lower probability than a presentation mode (background mode) that corresponds to the length of the overlap period (probability change consecutive win period), when a presentation in which the background mode is switched is executed as a variable presentation, it is possible to make the length of the overlap period suggested by the displayed background mode different from the actual length of the overlap period. This makes it possible to provide the player with a game result (probability change consecutive win period) that is unexpected.

In the fifth embodiment, any of the background modes is configured to be selectable in various overlapping periods, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special background mode may be provided that is selected only when the overlapping period satisfies a specific condition, for example, when the length of the overlapping period is "10 or more" and "SP". By configuring in this way, when a variable presentation corresponding to the special background mode is executed, the player can be reliably notified of the current state regarding the overlapping period, and therefore a presentation that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 735 to 738. The sixth embodiment combines the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment with the technical concept of the fifth embodiment.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment described above has a probability change switch 10 during a big win game.
By passing the ball through 65e3 (specific area), it is possible to acquire a special symbol high probability right for setting a high probability state of a special symbol, and if the special symbol high probability right is acquired during a jackpot game, it is possible to set a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot game ends, allowing the player to select whether to play a game in which the special symbol high probability right is acquired during a jackpot game (V winning game) or a game in which the special symbol high probability right is not acquired (non-V winning game).

Then, the game state after the special chart high probability right is acquired (the game state after the big win game) is distinguished from the game state after the special chart high probability right is not acquired, and if one game state is more advantageous to the player than the other game state, for example, if the special chart high probability right is not acquired after the big win game is ended and the special chart high probability state can be set multiple times in succession, a game method for creating one game state, for example, V
By configuring the system to be capable of executing a guide announcement (presentation) to inform the player of a winning game, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game without forcing the player to perform a disadvantageous game.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned V winning game is executed and when a non-V winning game is executed, the game method advantageous to the player is switched depending on the later game result. (For example, when a V winning game is executed in the second probability variable state, the second probability variable state in which it is difficult to transition to the first probability variable state but the number of balls is unlikely to increase or decrease can be set many times (for example, 15 times) in succession, and when a non-V winning game is executed, the second probability variable state in which it is difficult to transition to the first probability variable state but the number of balls is unlikely to increase or decrease can be set many times (for example, 15 times) in succession.
In a situation where a winning game is executed, and when a jackpot is won, the game transitions to a normal state which is more likely to transition to the first special probability state than the second special probability state, and it is possible to aim for the first special probability state again from the first win), a guide announcement (presentation) can be executed to allow the player to select which game to execute, making it easier for the player to play in a game method that corresponds to the game content desired.

In addition, in the above-mentioned fifth embodiment, by configuring it so that different numbers can be set as the special rate limit number or the time-saving limit number depending on the type of jackpot, the variety of combination patterns of the remaining special rate limit number and the remaining time-saving limit number when the first special rate state is set is increased, making it difficult for the player to predict the game content (transition status of the game state) that will be executed later, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The sixth embodiment applies the technical idea of the fifth embodiment described above, that is, the technical idea of being configured to be able to set different numbers as the special probability limit number or the time-saving limit number depending on the type of jackpot, to the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment described above, that is, a pachinko machine 10 having a configuration that allows the player to select whether or not to set a high probability state of a special pattern after the end of a jackpot game.

In the sixth embodiment, during the first probability variable jackpot game in which the time-saving limit and the probability variable limit cannot be reached, a state in which it may be advantageous for the player to play a non-V winning game can be created, which is different from the fourth embodiment described above. Specifically, during the first probability variable jackpot game in which the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit after the end of the jackpot game is 11 times, the first probability variable state is continued for the remaining number of times of the probability variable limit, and a V winning game is played to aim for a jackpot game in the second special symbol lottery, or a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, thereby playing the number of times set as the probability variable limit number,
The first probability variable state is continued and the player can select whether to execute a non-V winning game aiming at a big win game in a second special symbol lottery.

By configuring in this way, in contrast to the fourth embodiment described above, the subsequent game result (amount of bonus awarded) can be made to differ greatly depending on the game method selected by the player.

Furthermore, in this sixth embodiment, similarly to the fourth embodiment (first embodiment) described above, a transition to a special state occurs when the time-saving limit and the special chance limit are reached by winning a single jackpot. Therefore, if the time-saving state is set when the remaining number of times in the time-saving limit is 11, by winning a special chance jackpot that sets the special chance limit to 10 times before the condition for ending the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) is met, the first special chance state can be continued until 10 jackpots are won in the second special pattern lottery, and then a transition to a special state (special mode) can be made.

Therefore, the subsequent game results (amount of bonus awarded) can be made to differ more significantly depending on the game method selected by the player during the big win game.

<Electrical Configuration in the Sixth Embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 736 to 738. In the sixth embodiment, the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 is replaced with the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b2 in the fourth embodiment (first embodiment).
The difference is that the special chart 2 big win type selection 6 table 202eb2 is provided instead of the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2, and the time-saving grant 6 table 202ee is provided instead of the time-saving grant table 202ce, and the rest is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special chart 1 big win type selection 6 table 202eb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 735. FIG. 735 is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 big win type selection 6 table 202eb1. This special chart 1 big win type selection 6 table 202eb1 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a big win type that is set when a big win is won in the first special pattern lottery, similar to the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) of the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 735, the special chart 1 big win type selection 6 table 202eb1 has six types of big win types (big win A6 to
F6) is prescribed. For each jackpot type, the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, and the limit number of times (the probability limit number of times, the time-saving limit number of times) set at the first jackpot (at the jackpot when the low probability state is set) are prescribed in advance.

Specifically, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", "jackpot A6" is displayed, when it is in the range of "60 to 79", "jackpot B6" is displayed, when it is in the range of "80 to 99", "jackpot C6" is displayed, when it is in the range of "100 to 134", "jackpot D6" is displayed, and when it is in the range of "135".
In the range of "174" or "175" or "199", "Big Winner F" is selected.
6" is prescribed.

Here, as the jackpot game contents, for "jackpot A6", a 10 round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the V winning device 1065 is opened for 10 rounds) is performed, and for "jackpot B6" to "jackpot F6", a 5 round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the V winning device 1065 is opened for 10 rounds) is performed.
In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the first special symbol lottery is won, a 10-round jackpot game is executed in 30% of cases, and a 5-round jackpot game is executed in about 70% of cases. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the jackpot game content (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game), the "jackpot A6" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

In addition, as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game, information indicating that a "first high probability variable state" can be set is specified for "jackpot A6" to "jackpot C6," and information indicating that a "second high probability variable state" can be set is specified for "jackpot D6" to "jackpot E6."

In addition, for any of the jackpot types "jackpot A6" to "jackpot F6", during a specific round (second round) of the jackpot game, the V winning device 1065
A switching member 1065 is provided so that the winning ball can pass through the probability change switch 1065e3 (specific area).
"V Winning Possible" is defined, indicating that a scenario in which h is activated is set.

In other words, in this sixth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, if the appropriate play (continuous right-hitting play) is performed during the jackpot play, the ball will pass through the specific area with a high probability, making it possible to acquire the right to a high probability of winning the special pattern.

Furthermore, a different value is set as the limit number of times in correspondence with each jackpot type (jackpot A6 to F6).
As in the fifth embodiment described above, the limit number of times (probability bonus limit number of times, time-saving limit number of times) specified for each type of jackpot is set only when the limit number of times is not set at the end of the jackpot, that is, only for the pattern type for which a low probability state is set.

To explain in detail each limit number stipulated for each jackpot type, in this sixth embodiment, the limit number (probability limit number,
For the "Big Win A6", the probability limit number is set to "10", and the time limit number is set to "11", and for the "Big Win B6",
The probability limit number of times is "5" and the time limit number of times is "11" for "Big Win C6".
The number of times for the special bonus is "3" and the number of times for the time-saving bonus is "11" for the "jackpot D6".
For the "Big Hit E6", the probability limit number of times is "10" and the time limit number of times is "0".
The probability variable limit number is set to "5" and the time-saving limit number is set to "0", while for the "big win F6", the probability variable limit number is set to "3" and the time-saving limit number is set to "0".

Next, the contents of the special chart 2 big win type selection 6 table 202eb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 736. FIG. 736 is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 big win type selection 6 table 202eb2. This special chart 2 big win type selection 6 table 202eb2 is a data table that is referred to when selecting a big win type that is set when a big win is won in the second special pattern lottery, similar to the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613 (c)) of the first embodiment described above.

As shown in FIG. 736, the special chart 2 big win type selection 6 table 202eb2 has four types of big win types (big win G5 to
J6) are prescribed. For each jackpot type, the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, and the limit number of times (the probability limit number of times, the time-saving limit number of times) set at the first jackpot (at the jackpot when the low probability state is set) are prescribed in advance.

Specifically, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", a "big win G6" is generated, when it is in the range of "80 to 129", a "big win H6" is generated, and when it is in the range of "130 to 159",
A "jackpot I6" is defined in the range of "160 to 199", and a "jackpot J6" is defined in the range of "160 to 199".

Here, as the jackpot game contents, for the "jackpot G6", a 10 round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the V winning device 1065 is opened for 10 rounds) is performed, and for the "jackpot H6" to "jackpot J6", a 5 round (R) jackpot game (a jackpot game in which the V winning device 1065 is opened for 10 rounds) is performed.
In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is won, a 10-round jackpot game is executed in 40% of cases, and a 5-round jackpot game is executed in about 60% of cases. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the jackpot game content (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game), the "jackpot G6" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player.

In addition, as game states to be set after the end of a jackpot game, information indicating that a "first probability variable state" can be set is provided for "jackpot G6" to "jackpot I6," and information indicating that a "second probability variable state" can be set is provided for "jackpot J6."

In addition, for the jackpot types of "jackpot G6" to "jackpot I6", "V winning possible" is specified, which indicates that a scenario (V scenario) is set in which the switching member 1065h is activated so that the ball that entered the V winning device 1065 during the jackpot game can pass through the probability variable switch 1065e3 (specific area), and for the jackpot type of "jackpot J6", a scenario is set in which the ball that entered the V winning device 1065 during the jackpot game can pass through the probability variable switch 1065e3 (specific area)
"V winning not possible" is specified, which indicates that a scenario (non-V scenario) is set in which the switching member 1065h is activated to make it impossible (difficult) to pass through.

In other words, in the sixth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, if a proper play (continuous right-hitting play) is performed during the jackpot game, the ball will pass through the specific area with a high probability, and the probability of a jackpot game in which a special symbol high probability right can be obtained will be 80%.
If you win the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery, you can play the jackpot in the appropriate way during the game.
Even if a player plays a continuous right-hand hit game, the ratio of a jackpot game in which the ball cannot pass through a specific area (high probability of special winning right) is difficult to obtain is set to 20%.

In addition, if the jackpot game ends without acquiring the special symbol high probability right, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be set to a low probability state of the special symbol regardless of the jackpot type that was set. Therefore, the jackpot with "jackpot J6" set is essentially a jackpot type in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, a different value is set as the limit number of times in correspondence with each big win type (Big Win G6 to Big Win J6). In the sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, the limit number of times (
The number of times for the special probability mode and the number of times for the time-saving mode are set only when the number of times for the limit mode is not set at the end of the jackpot, that is, only for the type of symbol for which a low probability state is set.

To explain in detail each limit number stipulated for each jackpot type, in this sixth embodiment, the limit number (probability limit number,
The number of time-saving limits is set to "10" for the "Big Win G6" and "11" for the "Big Win H6".
The number of times for the special bonus is "5" and the number of times for the time-saving bonus is "11" for "Big Hit I6".
The number of times for the special bonus is "3" and the number of times for the time-saving bonus is "11" for the "jackpot J6".
The special bonus limit is set to 10, and the time-saving limit is set to 0.

Next, the contents of the time-saving 6 table 202ee will be described with reference to FIG. 737. FIG. 737 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving 6 table 202ee. As with the time-saving 6 table 202e (see FIG. 617), this time-saving 6 table 202ee has jackpot types (jackpots A6 to C6, G6 to I6) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set after the jackpot game ends, and jackpot types (jackpots D6 to F6, J6) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is not set after the jackpot game ends, and FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7, the conditions for ending the time-saving feature are specified for each type of jackpot.

Specifically, the jackpot types "jackpot A6 to C6" and "jackpot G6 to I6" are:
Regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, if both the probability change limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to OFF, the number of time-saving times granted is set to "65
535 (effectively until the next time)" is specified, and when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "100". Also, when the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set, so the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "0" regardless of the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u.

On the other hand, as described above, the jackpot types "jackpot D6 to F6" and "jackpot J6" are not jackpot types in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set, so the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (whether or not there is a time-saving mode), the probability limit reaching flag 203u, the time-saving limit reaching flag 20
Regardless of the 3V setting, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is set to "0".

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 738, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment
Each control process executed by the PU 221 will be described.
The present embodiment is different from the embodiment in that instead of the round effect setting process (see S4951 in FIG. 721), a round effect setting process 6 (see S4971 in FIG. 738) is executed, but otherwise is the same. The same process contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 738, the MPU 2 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment
The round effect setting process 6 (S4971) executed by the program 21 will be described below.
8 is a flow chart showing the contents of the round performance setting process 6 (S4971). The round performance setting process 6 (S4971) differs from the round performance setting process in the fourth embodiment described above (see S4951 in FIG. 721) in that when the first probability hit is won, a process is executed to determine the performance mode based on the time-saving limit number of times. Since the other processes are the same, the same symbols are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the round effect setting process 6 (S4971), first, the process of S5501 is executed. If it is determined that the currently received round number command is for the second round (S5501: Y
es), and determine whether the currently executed jackpot type is a jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to the first probability variable state (S5551). If it is determined that the currently executed jackpot is not the first probability variable jackpot (S5551: No), determine the presentation mode that strongly guides right-hitting game (S5559), and proceed to the processing of S5560.

On the other hand, in the process of S5551, if it is determined that the jackpot currently being executed is the first probability jackpot (S5551: Yes), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is read (S5552). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n that has been read is 11 (S5553).
If it is determined that the number is 1 (S5553: Yes), the first step for selecting a game mode is performed.
The selected presentation mode is determined (S5554), and processing proceeds to S5560.

On the other hand, in the process of S5553, if it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is not 11 (S5553: No), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is 6 (S5555). If it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is 6 (S5555: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is greater than the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n (S5556). If it is determined that the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is greater than the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n (S5556: Yes), the process of S5559 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5556, if it is determined that the value of the remaining probability change counter 223m is not greater than the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n (S5556: No),
A second selection presentation mode for selecting a game mode is determined (S5557), and the process proceeds to S5560.
If it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is not 4 (S5555: No), it is determined whether the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is 4 (S5558). If it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is 4 (S5558: Yes), the process proceeds to S5556. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n is not 4 (S5558: No), the process proceeds to S555
Proceed to process 9.

In the process of S5560, a display command for indicating the performance mode determined in the processes of S5554, S5557, and S5559 is set (S5560).
The process of step 502 is executed, and the process ends.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 739 to Fig. 750. The seventh embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment in that the time-saving limit count, which indicates the number of times until the time-saving limit is reached, can be set to multiple types. In addition, the special symbol type that is mainly changed in each game state is different from the first embodiment.
The difference is that the variation pattern is set so that in the normal state, the first special symbol variation is the main variation, and in the first special symbol variation state, the second special symbol variation state, and the time-saving state, the second special symbol variation is the main variation.

The rest of the configuration is the same as in the first embodiment described above, and detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

The first embodiment described above was configured so that the value of the time-saving limit counter was always updated (set) when a high probability state of a normal symbol was set after the end of a big win game.

In contrast to this, the seventh embodiment is configured so that different time-saving types (time-saving A, time-saving B) can be set in correspondence with the type of jackpot, and the value of the time-saving limit count counter corresponding to each time-saving type is updated (set), which is different from the seventh embodiment.

By configuring in this manner, even if a high probability state of a normal pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game, the length of time that the time-saving state can continue can be made to differ depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, making it difficult for the player to predict the period when the time-saving state will end.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, different types of time-saving can be set depending on whether the high probability state of the normal pattern set after the end of the jackpot game is set as the first probability state or the time-saving state. That is, different types of time-saving can be set depending on the type of game state (first probability state, time-saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, for example, when the first probability state is continuously set from when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set until just before the time-saving limit is reached, and then when the time-saving limit is reached, a jackpot (time-saving jackpot) that sets the time-saving state is set instead of the jackpot (first probability jackpot) that sets the first probability state is set, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, during the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set, if a jackpot is won in a game state (first probability state) in which it is easy to win a jackpot (a high probability state of the special pattern is set), or in a game state in which it is difficult to win a jackpot (a low probability state of the special pattern is set),
Since different time-saving types are set for when a jackpot is won during a game (time-saving state) and when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state and the first probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends (when the first probability variable state is restored), it is possible to lengthen the period until the time-saving limit is reached. Therefore, when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state and the first probability variable state is restored, it is possible to grant a special benefit to the player, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a time-saving limit counter is provided for measuring the number of jackpots until the time-saving limit is reached for each time-saving type, and the remaining number of time-saving limits for each time-saving type is calculated based on the value (updated value) of each time-saving limit counter, and the length of the period (remaining period) during which the high probability state of the normal pattern can be continuously set is notified to the player. Furthermore, it is determined whether the time-saving type for which the value of the time-saving limit counter is updated based on the current jackpot win is the time-saving type that is most likely to reach the time-saving limit, and the presentation mode of the variable presentation is determined based on the result of the determination.

By configuring it in this way, when a jackpot in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is won, the player can understand whether the shortest period in which the time-saving limit can be reached has been shortened by the current jackpot win. Therefore, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to a player who is playing during a period in which a high probability state of normal symbols is continuously set.

In addition, the presentation mode of the variable presentation for indicating that the jackpot in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set after the jackpot game is finished is determined based on the value of the corresponding time-saving limit count counter. In other words, the presentation that suggests whether or not the time-saving limit will be reached based on the current jackpot win is executable as a variable presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a presentation that incites whether or not the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set will end, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the presentation being executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the time-saving limit has been reached and the low probability state of the normal pattern will be forcibly set, so that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

In addition, for any of the multiple time-saving types, when the value of the corresponding time-saving limit count counter is updated to reach the time-saving limit, i.e., when the period until the time-saving limit is reached is the longest, a specific presentation mode can be executed for the player.

By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the content of the game during the period when the high probability state of normal patterns is continuously set was the most advantageous content for the player, thereby providing the player with a sense of satisfaction.

<About the content of the performance executed in the seventh embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 739 and FIG. 740, the effects executed in the seventh embodiment will be described. First, in the first embodiment described above, when a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern is set after the end of a big win game, the value of the time-saving limit count counter is always updated. In contrast, in the seventh embodiment, different time-saving types can be set in correspondence with the big win type, and the value of the time-saving limit count counter corresponding to each time-saving type is updated, which is different from the first embodiment.

By configuring in this manner, the length of time that the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state (first probability variable state) or low-probability time-saving state (time-saving)) can be continued can be made more complex depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, making it difficult for the player to predict the period during which the time-saving state (first probability variable state or time-saving) will end.

In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 741, depending on the type of jackpot, the time-saving A (first probability variable state) or the time-saving B (time-saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 741(a), the time-saving A and time-saving B are each set to a time-saving limit of five times. For example, after the first probability variable state is set, the jackpot D7 (FIG. 742) in which the first probability variable state is set is set.
If (b)) is won five times in a row, the time-saving limit of time-saving A is reached, and after the end of the jackpot game based on the fifth jackpot D7 win, a non-time-saving state (low probability state of normal symbols) is set. In other words, the first probability state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set a maximum of five times in a row.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 741(b), after the first probability change state is set, if the jackpot D7 and the jackpot E7 in which the time reduction is set are alternately won, the high probability state of the normal pattern is set up to 9 times in a row. In addition, if the time reduction B (time reduction state) is set, when the time reduction end condition (for example, when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times) is established, the low probability non-time reduction state (normal state) is set. Therefore, in order for the time reduction state to continue for the maximum period, it is necessary to win the jackpot four times before the time reduction end condition is established in the time reduction B (time reduction state).

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the period during which the time-saving state is continuously set can be varied depending on the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won, making it possible to make the player interested in which type of jackpot he or she has won, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Based on the above, an overview of the effects in the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set is won, an effect is executed in the main display area Dm in which a rabbit 805 and a turtle 812 grab a rope and hold on to it to avoid falling into the sea, as shown in Fig. 739(a). The turtle 812 corresponds to a first probability jackpot in which time-saving A is set (for example, jackpot D7 (Fig. 742(b))), and the rabbit 805 corresponds to a time-saving jackpot in which time-saving B is set (for example, jackpot E7 (Fig. 742(b))). For example, the rabbit 805 corresponds to a time-saving jackpot in which time-saving B is set (for example, jackpot D
When the number 7 is won, the corresponding turtle 812 slides on the first rope 814a and approaches the sea. When the time-saving A reaches the time-saving limit, the turtle 812 falls from the first rope 814a into the sea.

In this way, in the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set is won after the end of a jackpot game, the type of jackpot is determined by the rabbit 805 or the turtle 81.
The player can grasp the situation by the movement of 2. For example, if the remaining number of times of the time-saving A limit is 1,
When the remaining number of times of the time-saving B limit is two or more, the player can be made to hope for winning the big win for which the time-saving B is set, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Next, details of the presentation in the seventh embodiment will be described. Fig. 739(a) is an example of a variable presentation screen when a jackpot in which time-saving A is set is won when the remaining number of times for the time-saving A limit is 4 and the remaining number of times for the time-saving B limit is 5 during the first probability change. In the main display area Dm, as described above, a presentation is executed in which the rabbit 805 and the turtle 812 hold on to the rope and endure. In addition, the first gauge 813a is configured so that the scale is variably displayed in response to the value of the time-saving A limit count counter 203fa, and the second gauge 813b is configured so that the scale is variably displayed in response to the value of the time-saving B limit count counter 203fb. The first gauge 813a and the second gauge 813b are
The value of each time-saving limit counter is displayed in five stages, and in the case of Fig. 739 (a), the scale of the first gauge 813a is displayed by changing one scale to white to indicate that the value of the time-saving A limit counter is 1. Note that, in the second gauge 813b, the value of the time-saving B limit counter 203fb is 0 times (i.e., the time-saving B limit number is not set), so all the scales are displayed in black.

Also, the word "Pinch" is displayed in the first display region HR1, suggesting that the rabbit 805 or the turtle 812 is about to fall. This display allows the player to predict whether a big win will be won, and makes the player interested in which type of big win will be won.

FIG. 739(b) is a production screen displayed when a special pattern stops to indicate that a jackpot for which time-saving A is set has been won when the remaining number of times for time-saving A limit is 4 and the remaining number of times for time-saving B limit is 5 during the first probability change state.
In the main display area Dm, a second special symbol is displayed to indicate that a jackpot with time-saving A has been won, and a performance in which a turtle 812 slides on a first rope 814a and approaches the sea is displayed. Then, in the first gauge 813a, one scale mark of the first gauge 813a changes to white, and a total of two scale marks are displayed in white, to indicate the value of the time-saving A limit count counter 203fa calculated by predicting that the value of the time-saving A limit count counter 203fa after the jackpot game ends will be incremented by one due to the winning of a jackpot with time-saving A.

When all the marks on any gauge turn white, that is, when the value of the time-saving limit counter reaches 5, an effect is executed in which the corresponding character falls off the rope into the sea.

In this way, the gauge scale is displayed variably in accordance with the value of each time-saving limit counter after the end of the jackpot game, allowing the player to predict the shortest number of times the high probability state of the normal pattern can continue, and since each gauge has a maximum of five scales, the player can also recognize the maximum number of times the high probability state of the normal pattern can continue.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that it is possible to determine whether a first certain variable jackpot type in which time-saving A is set or a time-saving jackpot in which time-saving B is set when a jackpot is won, is selected based on the movements of the rabbit 805 and the turtle 812. However, for example, if an effect is executed in which the rabbit 805 slides, there is a risk that a player will be disappointed that the first certain variable state, which is a more advantageous state than the time-saving state, is not set after the jackpot game ends.

Therefore, an effect may be implemented in which only the turtle 812 (or the rabbit 805) is held by the rope, and a single gauge may be used to indicate the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol will continue.
In this case, the gauge scale is displayed in 5 levels (all scales are displayed in black). For example, if the remaining number of times for the time-saving A limit is 4 and the remaining number of times for the time-saving B limit is 5, the gauge scale is displayed in 1 level.
In this state, if a jackpot is won that sets the time-saving B, the remaining number of times for the time-saving A limit will be 4, and the remaining number of times for the time-saving B limit will be 4, but the gauge scale will not change. If a jackpot is won next that sets the time-saving B limit, and the remaining number of times for the time-saving A limit is 4, and the remaining number of times for the time-saving B limit is 3,
The gauge will have two white tick marks (two white tick marks and three black tick marks).
In other words, the shortest period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol can end is notified. By configuring in this way, since the player does not know which jackpot type was selected when the jackpot was won, it becomes difficult to predict whether the game state set after the jackpot game ends will be the first probability variable state or the time-saving state, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As another example of a configuration in which a single gauge is used for notification, the gauge may not be provided with a scale, and the displayed gauge amount (the part displayed in black in the gauge) may be counted by the time-saving A limit counter 203f.
The gauge may be configured to display the value of a in response to the value of the time-saving B limit counter 203fb. In this case, the black part in the gauge disappears to indicate to the player that the time-saving limit has been reached. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the shortest period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern can end based on the displayed gauge amount.

FIG. 740(a) is an example of a special symbol variable performance screen when the remaining number of times for the time-saving A limit is 1 and the remaining number of times for the time-saving B limit is 1, that is, the period until the time-saving limit is reached is the longest, and when the next big win is won, either of the time-saving limits will be reached. In the main display area Dm, the first gauge 813a and the second gauge 813b indicate that the value of the time-saving A limit counter 203fa is 4 and the value of the time-saving B limit counter 203fb is 4, and the 4 scales are displayed in white. Also, the rabbit 805 and the turtle 812
The effect of the character aboard the rescue ship 816 is executed. By executing this effect, the player can be made aware that the high probability state of the normal pattern will end with the next big win, regardless of the type of big win.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time-saving limit is reached by winning a jackpot, a game state with a different degree of advantage is set after the end of the jackpot game depending on which type of time-saving limit is reached. Specifically, when a first probability variable jackpot in which time-saving A is set is won and the time-saving A limit is reached, a high probability non-time-saving state (second probability variable state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when a time-saving jackpot in which time-saving B is set is won and the time-saving B limit is reached, a low probability non-time-saving state (normal state), which is a less favorable state than the second probability variable state, is set after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, when a jackpot that reaches the time-saving limit is won,
A configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed that suggests the game state that will be set after the big win game ends. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize in advance the game state that will be set after the big win game ends, and the player can smoothly play according to the game state that will be set after the big win game ends.

FIG. 740(b) is an example of an effect screen that is executed when time-saving B (time-saving state) is set and the end condition for the high probability state of the normal pattern is met before a jackpot is won. In response to the time-saving end condition being met, an effect is executed in the main display area Dm in which a shark 815 jumps up and eats a rabbit 805 and a turtle 812. Furthermore, the scales of the first gauge 813a and the second gauge 813b are all displayed in white when the time-saving end condition is met, regardless of the state of the scales immediately before the time-saving end condition is met. Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, a message such as "RUSH End..." is displayed.
" is displayed to inform the player that the high probability state for normal symbols has ended.

In the seventh embodiment, the shark 815 moves only when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set, the shark 815 may move around on the sea surface every time the combined number of executions of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, every 10 times), or may be configured to move around vigorously when the predetermined number of times is reached (for example, when it reaches 90 times).
By configuring in this manner, the player can predict that the time-saving end condition is approaching based on the movements of the shark 815, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the case where the type of jackpot is not revealed to the player when the jackpot is won as described above, the shark 815 may be configured to move slowly when the first special state is set, and to move around vigorously when the time-saving state is set.
By configuring it in this manner, the player can infer the state of the game from the movements of the shark 815, thereby making the game more interesting.

In this embodiment, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied during the time-saving state, the performance of FIG. 740(b) is executed, and a low-probability non-time-saving state (normal state) is set, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the first probability variable state, when the high-probability non-time-saving state (second probability variable state) is set based on the satisfaction of the time-saving end condition, the performance of FIG.
After 0(b) is displayed, a presentation that notifies the player that the second probability variable state is set may be executed. In addition, the internal control may be configured to execute the presentation of FIG. 740(b) when the first probability variable state is set, and execute a presentation (revival presentation) that notifies the player that the first probability variable state will continue. In this way, by executing a presentation that is unexpected for a player who is disappointed when the presentation of FIG. 740(b) is executed, it is possible to improve the player's motivation to play.

In this embodiment, the rabbit 805 and the turtle 815 are used to perform the effects, but the present invention is not limited to this and other characters may be used to perform the effects.

<The flow of the game until the time-saving limit is reached in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the flow of the game until the time-saving limit is reached in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 741. Fig. 741(a) shows the flow of the game when the time-saving limit is reached in the shortest time, and Fig. 741(b) shows the flow of the game when the time-saving limit is reached in the longest time.

As shown in FIG. 741(a), when a jackpot (first special jackpot) in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set is won while the normal state (low probability state of a normal pattern) is set, at the end of the jackpot game, the value of the first time-saving limit number counter 203fa is set to "5" as the time-saving limit number of times for the time-saving type (time-saving A) corresponding to the first special state, and the value of the second time-saving limit number counter 203fb is set to "5" as the time-saving limit number of times for the time-saving type (time-saving B) corresponding to the time-saving state.

If another jackpot is won during the first probability variable state and the jackpot is the first probability variable jackpot, the value of the first time-saving limit counter 203fa corresponding to the currently set time-saving type (time-saving A) is decremented by one at the end of the second jackpot game, becoming "4".
When the first special jackpot is consecutively won, the value of the second time-saving limit count counter 203fb is not updated even once (it remains at "5"), and only the value of the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa is decremented. At the end of the fifth jackpot game after the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the value of the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa becomes "0", reaching the time-saving limit, and a time-saving limit process is executed to forcibly change the high probability state of the normal pattern to a low probability state of the normal pattern, and the second special state (high probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern) is set.

In other words, the pattern shown in FIG. 741(a) is the second time-saving limit counter 203f
Since only the value of the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa is continuously updated and reaches the time-saving limit without ever updating the value of b, this pattern results in the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set (normal pattern high probability period) ending in the shortest time.

Here, in the seventh embodiment, the state in which the second probability variable state is set is configured to be a prolonged period in which the execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery is lower than when other game states are set. Specifically, during the second probability variable state, a 10-minute variation time is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and a 1-minute variation time is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation.

Therefore, when the time-saving limit of the time-saving A corresponding to the first probability change state is reached, the maximum period until the second probability change state is set four times in a row (the period until the probability change limit is reached)
, a delay period will be set.

On the other hand, the pattern shown in Figure 741 (b) shows the flow of the game when, during a normal pattern high probability period in which a high probability state for normal patterns is set consecutively, a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and an event occurs in which a special jackpot is won (a pull-back win) while the time-saving state is set.

Specifically, when a jackpot (first special jackpot) in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set is won while the normal state (low probability state of a normal pattern) is set, at the end of the jackpot game, the value of the first time-saving limit number counter 203fa is set to "5" as the time-saving limit number of times for the time-saving type (time-saving A) corresponding to the first special state, and the value of the second time-saving limit number counter 203fb is set to "5" as the time-saving limit number of times for the time-saving type (time-saving B) corresponding to the time-saving state.

If another jackpot is won during the first probability variable state and the jackpot is the first probability variable jackpot, the value of the first time-saving limit counter 203fa corresponding to the currently set time-saving type (time-saving A) is decremented by one at the end of the second jackpot game, becoming "4".
When a time-saving jackpot is won during the first probability change state, at the end of the third jackpot game, the value of the second time-saving limit counter 203fb corresponding to the currently set time-saving type (time-saving B) is set to 1.
The number is subtracted and becomes "4". Then, after the third big win game ends, the time-saving state is set. Here, in the seventh embodiment, when the time-saving state is set, "100 times of special pattern variation" is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, and when the time-saving end condition is established without winning the big win during the time-saving state, regardless of whether the time-saving limit is reached or not, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) ends and transitions to the normal state (low probability state of normal pattern), and the values of each time-saving limit counter (first time-saving limit counter 203fa, second single limit counter 203fb) are cleared to 0, and in that case, the end performance shown in FIG. 740(b) is executed.

In the pattern shown in FIG. 741(b), an example is shown in which the first probability variable jackpot is won (a pullback win) during the time-saving state set after the third jackpot game ends, so the normal high probability period continues, and at the end of the fourth jackpot game, the value of the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa corresponding to the currently set time-saving type (time-saving A) is decremented by 1 to become "3". After that, the winning of the jackpot (first probability variable jackpot, time-saving jackpot) during the first probability variable state and the winning of the jackpot (first probability variable jackpot, time-saving jackpot) during the time-saving state are repeated, and the value of the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa becomes "1" and the value of the second time-saving limit count counter 203fb becomes "2".
The value becomes "1" (the time-saving state is set after the 9th big win game ends)
In the example shown in FIG. 741(b), the time-saving jackpot is won at the end, and the time-saving limit is reached after the jackpot game ends, and the normal state is set.

At this point, even if the player wins the next big jackpot (first probability jackpot, time-saving jackpot), the time-saving limit will be reached, that is, the longest period is set as the normal high probability period. In this state, the performance shown in FIG. 740(a) is executed. By configuring in this way, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the normal high probability period is set to the longest.

In addition, when the value of the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa is "1" and the value of the second time-saving limit count counter 203fb is "1", the time-saving limit will be reached regardless of which jackpot is won next (first special jackpot, time-saving jackpot), so in terms of the length of the normal high probability period, winning the first special jackpot and winning the time-saving jackpot will have the same value.

However, the game state set after the time-saving limit is reached is different between the first probability variable jackpot and the time-saving jackpot. Specifically, when the time-saving limit is reached at the end of a jackpot game in which the first probability variable jackpot is won, the high probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to the low probability state of the normal pattern, so the second probability variable state is set, and when the time-saving limit is reached at the end of a jackpot game in which the time-saving jackpot is won, the high probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to the low probability state of the normal pattern, so the normal state is set.

In other words, in terms of the game state that is set after the time-saving limit is reached, the player will be given a bonus of different value if he or she wins a sure-variant jackpot and if he or she wins a time-saving jackpot.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 740(a), in a state where a presentation is being executed to notify the player that the next jackpot will definitely end the high probability period, if a jackpot is won, it is advisable to configure the display to show a display mode that can suggest to the player the game state that will be set after the time-saving limit is reached.

By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to inform the player that he or she is enjoying the benefit of having the longest continuous high probability period of the normal game, while also suggesting the next game state that will be set, so that the player can shift their interest to the content of the game that will be played after the high probability period of the normal game ends, thereby maintaining their interest in the game.

In addition, in FIG. 740(a), when the time-saving limit is reached, the second probability state is set,
In FIG. 741(b), the flow of setting the normal state when the time-saving limit is reached is shown. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the second probability state is configured to be the game state with the worst game efficiency, so for players who wish to play for a short time, the period until the time-saving limit is reached (normal high probability period) is set as long as possible, and the game in which the normal state is set after the normal high probability period ends can be advantageous.

<Electrical Configuration of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 742 to 745. In the seventh embodiment, compared to the first embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110, and a part of the configuration of the voice lamp control device 1
13 in that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 included in the RAM 223 is changed. Other than that, the RAM 223 is the same as the RAM 223 in the RAM 223 of ...

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment in that it stores a first winning type selection table 202b.
The special chart 1 jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb1 is used instead of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) and the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb2 is used instead of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. The time-saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 617) is used instead of the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe.
The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, referring to FIG. 742(a), the special chart 1 big win type selection 7 table 202fb1
The contents prescribed in the table 202fb1 will be explained. FIG. 742(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 big win type selection 7 table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 742(a), the special chart 1 big win type selection 7 table 202fb1 is different from the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613(b)) in the first embodiment described above in that the game state set after the big win game specified for each big win type is different, and different time reduction types are specified for the big win type in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 132", a "jackpot A7 (2R jackpot)" is defined, when it is in the range of "133 to 179", a "jackpot B7 (2R jackpot)" is defined, and for values of "180 to 199", a "jackpot C7 (2R jackpot)" is defined.

And, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A7", when the jackpot is won (when the jackpot is won)
Regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) of the jackpot, the "second probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, if the jackpot type is "jackpot B7", regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning) of the jackpot (when the jackpot is won), the "first probability variable state (time-saving A)" is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, if the jackpot type is "jackpot C7",
Regardless of the game state at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot), a "time-shortened state (time-shortened B)" is set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in the seventh embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, different time-saving types can be set, and the time-saving limit number can be updated for each time-saving type that is set. Therefore, the length of the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set (normal pattern high probability period) can be made different between when the game state is set biased toward one time-saving type and when both time-saving types are set evenly, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the period until the time-saving limit process is executed and the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set.

Next, referring to FIG. 742(b), the contents stipulated in the special chart 2 big win type selection 7 table 202fb2 will be explained. FIG. 742(b) shows the special chart 2 big win type selection 7
A schematic diagram showing the contents of table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 742(b), the special chart 2 big win type selection 7 table 202fb2 is different from the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613(c)) in the first embodiment described above in that the game state set after the big win game specified for each big win type is different, and a different time reduction type is specified for the big win type in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 179", a "big win D7" is defined, and when the value is in the range of "180 to 199", a "big win E7" is defined.

And, when the jackpot type is "jackpot D7", when the jackpot is won (when the jackpot is won)
Regardless of the game state (game state at the time of winning), the "first probability variable state (time-saving A)" is set after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, if the jackpot type is "jackpot E7",
Regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game will be in the "time-saving state (time-saving B)"
is configured to be set.

Here, in the seventh embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, different time-saving types can be set, and the time-saving limit number can be updated for each time-saving type that is set. Therefore, the length of the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern is continuously set (normal pattern high probability period) can be made different between when the game state is set biased toward one time-saving type and when both time-saving types are set evenly, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the period until the time-saving limit process is executed and the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the time-saving type set in association with the big win type is
The probability of winning (time-saving A) and the time-saving jackpot (time-saving B) are different.
In the case where a time-limited jackpot is won while the probability variable state is set, and the first probability variable jackpot is won while the time-limited state is set, that is, after transitioning from a high probability state of a special pattern to a low probability state, a jackpot is won again with a high probability state of a special pattern set,
The high probability period of the special symbols is configured to be longer than the case where the big win is consecutively won during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbols is continuously set.

By configuring in this manner, added value can be given to the player in the event that he or she wins a jackpot in a state where the probability of a special symbol is low, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

Next, the contents of the special pattern 2 variation pattern table 202fd1 will be described with reference to FIG. 742(c). FIG. 742(c) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 2 variation pattern table 202fd1. As shown in FIG. 742(c), the special pattern 2 variation pattern table 202fd1 includes the second special pattern (
The fluctuation pattern of Special Chart 2) is specified.

Specifically, when the game state is "normal (normal state)", regardless of the winning/losing judgment result (special drawing result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation time is 10 minutes (
It is stipulated that when the "first probability change (first probability change state)" is a "short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds) regardless of the hit/miss judgment result (special chart lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, when the "second probability change (second probability change state)" is a "long fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 1 minute (60,000 milliseconds) regardless of the hit/miss judgment result (special chart lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when the "time-shortened (time-shortened state)" is a "short fluctuation" with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds) regardless of the hit/miss judgment result (special chart lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, respectively.

By configuring in this manner, the same fluctuation pattern is set when the first special probability state is set and when the time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the above-mentioned performance is being executed with reference to Figures 739 and 740, it is difficult for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern fluctuation being executed.

Also, the variation time of the variation pattern selected when the second probability variable state is set is configured to be longer than when the first probability variable state and the time-shortening state are set.

By configuring it in this way, when there is a transition from the first probability change state to the second probability change state, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of execution of the special symbol lottery, thereby preventing a situation in which a player wins an excessive number of balls in a short period of time.

As described above with reference to FIG. 741, in the seventh embodiment, a specific value (9) is set as the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set in succession, and "5" can be set for each time-saving type as the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set in succession. Then, when the first probability state is set in succession and the time-saving limit corresponding to the first probability state (time-saving limit of time-saving A) is reached, the second probability state is set (see FIG. 741(a)). In this case, as described above, "long variation" is set as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation, so the execution efficiency of the special symbol lottery is reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 741(b), when the time-saving limit corresponding to the time-saving state is reached, or when the time-saving end condition is met during the time-saving state, the second special state is not set and the game is transitioned to the normal state.

By configuring in this manner, the length of the period during which the second probability variable state is set can be made to differ depending on the type of time-saving limit that has been reached.

In addition, the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation in this seventh embodiment is set with the same contents as the first embodiment when the normal state, the first probability variable state, and the time-saving state are set, and when the second probability variable state is set, it is configured to be set by referring to the variation pattern table with the same contents as the variation pattern table referenced when the first probability variable state is set in the first embodiment described above, and detailed illustrations are omitted. Therefore, in this seventh embodiment, even when the second probability variable state is set, the variation time of 10 minutes (600,000 milliseconds) is set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation.

Next, the contents stipulated in the time-saving 7 table 202fe will be explained with reference to FIG. 743. FIG. 743 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving 7 table 202fe. As shown in FIG. 743, the time-saving 7 table 202fe is different from the time-saving 7 table 202e (see FIG. 617) in that it stipulates the number of time-saving awards for the jackpot type (jackpot C7, E7) in which the high probability state of the special pattern is not set.

Specifically, as described above, the jackpot type "Jackpot A7" is not a jackpot type in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, so the number of times the time-saving feature is awarded is set to "0" regardless of the setting status of the special rate limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v.

The jackpot types "jackpot B7" and "jackpot D7" are the probability limit arrival flag 203
When both the time-saving limit arrival flag 203v and the time-saving limit arrival flag 203u are set to off, the number of time-saving times to be given is set to "65535 (effectively until the next time)" and the probability change limit arrival flag 203
When the time-saving limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to OFF, the number of time-saving times to be given is set to "100".
When v is set to off, the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set,
Regardless of the setting status of the probability change limit reaching flag 203u, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is stipulated to be "0".

On the other hand, the jackpot types “jackpot C7” and “jackpot E7” are set when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are both set to OFF, or when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203
When v is set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is set to "100." When the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set, so the number of time-saving times to be awarded is set to "0" regardless of the setting state of the probability-changing limit reaching flag 203u.

Next, referring to FIG. 744, the main control device 11 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described.
The configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 744 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 744, the seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 621) in that a first time-saving limit count counter 203fa and a second time-saving limit count counter 203fb are provided instead of the time-saving limit count counter 203i. Since the other configurations are the same, the same symbols are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The first time-saving limit counter 203fa is a counter in which the time-saving limit number set for the time-saving type "time-saving A" is set. When a high probability state of a normal pattern is set, the value of "5" is set to this counter (see S3083 in FIG. 746). After that, when a jackpot is won in which the time-saving type "time-saving A" is set while the high probability state of a normal pattern continues, the value is updated (decremented) at the end of the jackpot game (see S3083 in FIG. 746).
086). It is then referenced in the process of determining whether the time-saving limit has been reached (
The value of the first time-saving limit counter 203fa is cleared to 0 when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (see S3090 in FIG. 746).

The second time-saving limit counter 203fb is a counter in which the time-saving limit number set for the time-saving type "time-saving B" is set. When the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the value of "5" is set to this counter (see S3083 in FIG. 746). After that, when the high probability state of the normal pattern continues and a jackpot is won in which the time-saving type "time-saving A" is set, the value is updated (decremented) at the end of the jackpot game (see S3083 in FIG. 746).
086). It is then referenced in the process of determining whether the time-saving limit has been reached (
The value of the second time-saving limit counter 203fb is cleared to 0 when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (see S3090 in FIG. 746).

In the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a low probability state of a normal pattern and a high probability state of a normal pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, the value of "5" is set to both the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa and the second time-saving limit count counter 203fb described above. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to specify the time-saving type (time-saving A, time-saving B) specified for the jackpot type that resulted in the jackpot win, and set the specific value "5" only to the counter corresponding to the specified time-saving type.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the first time-saving limit counter 203fa and the second time-saving limit counter 203fb are configured to be set to the same value ("5"), but this is not limited to this, and different values may be set for each, or based on the technical idea of the fifth embodiment described above, a jackpot type may be provided in which a different specific value is specified for each time-saving type. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to understand the duration of the normal high probability period.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 745. Fig. 745 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in Fig. 745, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment differs from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment in that a first remaining time reduction counter 223fa and a second remaining time reduction counter 223fb are provided instead of the remaining time reduction counter 223n, and a first gauge counter 223fc and a second gauge counter 223fs are provided instead of the remaining time reduction counter 223n.
23fd is added. Since the other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted.

The first remaining time-saving count counter 223fa is a counter whose value is updated based on information contained in the received command when a time-saving limit count command indicating the value of the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa updated in the main control unit 110 is received, and is a counter used on the voice lamp control unit 113 side to determine the remaining period until the time-saving type ``time-saving A'' reaches the time-saving limit.

The second remaining time-saving count counter 223fb is a counter whose value is updated based on information contained in the received command when a time-saving limit count command indicating the value of the second time-saving limit count counter 203fb updated in the main control unit 110 is received, and is a counter used on the voice lamp control unit 113 side to determine the remaining period until the time-saving type ``time-saving B'' reaches the time-saving limit.

The first gauge counter 223fc is a counter that is referred to when determining the display mode (stage) of the first gauge 813a executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81.
The counter value is updated based on the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223fa.

The second gauge counter 223fd is a counter that is referred to when determining the display mode (stage) of the second gauge 813b executed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81.
The counter value is updated based on the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223fb.

In the seventh embodiment, the number of stages that the first gauge 813a and the second gauge 813b can display is configured to be the same as the value (5) actually set as the time-saving limit number,
By checking the display mode (update contents) of the first gauge 813a and the second gauge 813b, the player can easily understand which type of time-saving has been set when the big win is won, but without being limited to this, a predetermined calculation process may be performed on the update contents of the value of the first remaining time-saving counter 223fa and the update contents of the value of the second remaining time-saving counter 223fb, and based on the processing results, the first gauge 813a and the second gauge 813b may be configured to be variably displayed at a number of stages different from the value (5) actually set as the time-saving limit number. In this case, it is sufficient to configure the first gauge counter 223fc and the second gauge counter 223fd to have values based on the calculation processing results.

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 746, the MPU 20 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment
Each control process executed by the control unit 1 will be described. In this embodiment, the difference from the first embodiment described above is that the time-saving limit update process 7 (see S2882 in FIG. 746) is executed instead of the time-saving limit update process (see S2802 in FIG. 660), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 746, the time-saving limit update process 7 (S2882) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 746 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time-saving limit update process 7 (S2882). The time-saving limit update process 7 (S2882) in this embodiment differs from the time-saving limit update process in the first embodiment described above (see S2802 in FIG. 660) in that it executes a process to update the time-saving limit count based on the type of big win that has been won. Since the other processes are the same, the same symbols are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the time-saving limit update process 7 (S2882), first, the processes of S3001 to S3002 are executed. In the process of S3002, the type of the jackpot being executed is changed to the following after the jackpot game ends:
When it is determined that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the jackpot is determined (S3002: Y
es), and a time-saving type corresponding to the jackpot type being executed is identified (S3081). Next, the time-saving limit number counter (first time-saving limit number counter 2
Then, it is determined whether the value of the second time-saving limit counter 203fb (second time-saving limit counter 203fa) is greater than 0 (S3082).

The corresponding time-saving limit number counters (first time-saving limit number counter 203fa, second time-saving limit number counter 203fa)
When it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit counter 203fb is not greater than 0 (S3082: No), the value of each time-saving limit counter (first time-saving limit counter 203fa, second time-saving limit counter 203fb) is set to 5 (S3083
), the time-saving flag 203f is set to ON (S3084), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3082, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit counter (the first time-saving limit counter 203fa, the second time-saving limit counter 203fb) corresponding to the time-saving type of the current big win type is greater than 0 (S3802: Y
es), and the value of the time-saving limit count counter (the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa, the second time-saving limit count counter 203fb) corresponding to the time-saving type of the current jackpot type is set to 1.
Subtract (S3086).

Next, the corresponding time-saving limit number counter after subtraction (first time-saving limit number counter 2
03fa, the second time-saving limit counter 203fb) is determined to be 0 (S3
If it is determined that the value of the corresponding time-saving limit counter (first time-saving limit counter 203fa, second time-saving limit counter 203fb) after subtraction is not 0 (S3087: No), the time-saving state can be set after the end of the big win game, and the above-mentioned S
The process of step 3084 is executed, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3087, the corresponding time-saving limit counter after subtraction (first
If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit counter 203fa, the second time-saving limit counter 203fb is 0 (S3087: Yes), the process of S3009 described above is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the type of jackpot that has been won this time is not a type of jackpot that is set to a high probability state of a normal pattern as the game state after the end of the jackpot game (S3002: No), it is determined whether the value of either the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa or the second time-saving limit count counter 203fb is greater than 0 (
S3089). When it is determined that the value of either the first time-saving limit counter 203fa or the second time-saving limit counter 203fb is greater than 0 (S308
9: Yes), the values of the first time-saving limit count counter 203fa and the second time-saving limit count counter 203fb are cleared to 0 (S3090), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, the first time-saving limit number counter 203fa and the second time-saving limit number counter 20
If it is determined that any value of 3fb is not greater than 0 (S3089: No),
Then, this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 747 to FIG. 750, the voice lamp control device 1 according to the seventh embodiment will be described.
In the seventh embodiment, in place of the limit information update process 7 (see S4374 in FIG. 747) in the first embodiment described above (see S4304 in FIG. 667), a presentation mode setting process (
Instead of the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 7 (see S5109 in FIG. 675), the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 7 (see S5179 in FIG. 750) is executed instead of the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 7 (see S4305 in FIG. 668).
The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 747, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment
The limit information update process 7 (S4374) executed by the PU 221 will be described.
FIG. 747 is a flowchart showing the contents of the limit information update process 7 (S4374). The limit information update process 7 (S4374) is a process similar to the limit information update process in the first embodiment described above (see S4304 in FIG. 667), except that the time-saving remaining number update process (S4571)
The other processes are the same, so they are denoted by the same reference numerals.
A detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the limit information update process 7 (S4374), first, steps S4501 to S4509 described above are performed.
If it is determined in the process of S4509 that a time-saving limit number command has been received (S4509: Yes), a time-saving remaining number update process (S4571) is executed. A detailed explanation of the time-saving remaining number update process (S4571) will be described later with reference to FIG. 748. Then, the processes of S4511 to S4517 are executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 748, the MPU 20 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment
The remaining time-saving number update process (S4571) which is one process in the limit information update process 7 (S4374) executed by the program 1 will be described. FIG. 748 shows the remaining time-saving number update process (S457
1) is a flowchart showing the contents of. In this time-saving remaining number update process (S4571), a process is executed to update the value of the corresponding time-saving remaining number counter (the first remaining time-saving number counter 223fa, the second remaining time-saving number counter 223fb) based on the received time-saving limit number command.

In the time-saving remaining number update process (S4571), first, it is determined whether the time-saving limit number command received this time is a command indicating the update of the first time-saving limit number (S4581). If it is determined that the time-saving limit number command received this time is a command indicating the update of the first time-saving limit number (S4581: Yes), the value of the first remaining time-saving number counter 223fa is decremented by 1 (S4582), and the process proceeds to S4583. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4581 that the command received is not a command indicating the update of the first time-saving limit number (S4581: No), the process of S4582 described above is skipped and this process is terminated.

After executing the process of S4581 or S4582, it is determined whether the currently received time-saving limit number command is a command indicating an update of the second time-saving limit number (S4
583). If it is determined that the time-saving limit number command received this time is a command indicating an update of the second time-saving limit number (S4583: Yes), the value of the second remaining time-saving number counter 223fb is subtracted by 1 (S4584), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4583 that the time-saving limit number command received this time is not a command indicating an update of the second time-saving limit number (S4583: No), the process of S4584 described above is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 749, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment
The following describes the rendering mode setting process 7 (S4375) executed by the PU 221. Fig. 749 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rendering mode setting process 7 (S4375).
Presentation mode setting process 7 (S4375) differs from the presentation mode setting process in the first embodiment described above (see S4305 in FIG. 668) in that when the remaining time-saving limit is 1, processing is executed to set the time-saving ending mode as the presentation mode.
Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the performance mode setting process 7 (S4375), first, the process of S4601 described above is executed. In the process of S4601, the probability variable limit flag 223o and the time-saving limit flag 223
If it is determined that neither the normal symbol nor the normal symbol is set to ON (S4601: No), the above-mentioned S4603 to S4604 are executed. Next, the current game state is specified from the secondary game state storage area 223j (S4671), and it is determined whether the specified current game state is a high probability state for the normal symbol (S4672). If it is determined that the specified current game state is not a high probability state for the normal symbol (S4672: No), the above-mentioned S4605 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4672, when it is determined that the specified gaming state is a high probability state of a normal pattern (S4672: Yes), the values of the first remaining time-shortening counter 223fa and the second remaining time-shortening counter 223fb are read (S4673), and then, S467
In process 3, the read values of the first remaining time reduction counter 223fa and the second remaining time reduction counter 223fb are set in the corresponding gauge counters (first gauge counter 223fc, second gauge counter 223fd).

Next, the first remaining time reduction counter 223fa and the second remaining time reduction counter 223fa read in the process of S4673 are
It is determined whether the values of the remaining time reduction counter 223fb and the remaining time reduction counter 223fb are all 1 (S4675).
When it is determined that the values of the first remaining time-saving counter 223fa and the second remaining time-saving counter 223fb are both 1 (S4675: Yes),
Information indicating the time-saving ending mode is stored in k (S4676), the above-mentioned processing of S4675 is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the values of the first remaining time-saving counter 223fa and the second remaining time-saving counter 223fb read in the processing of S4673 are not 1 (S4675: No), the processing of S4676 is skipped, the above-mentioned processing of S4605 is executed, and this processing is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 750, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment
The special chart 2 variable performance setting process 7 (S5179) executed by the PU 221 will be described. Figure 750 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 7 (S5179).

In the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 7 (S5179), first, the secondary game state storage area 223j
Next, the current game state read in the process of S5371 is judged as to whether it is a high probability state of a normal symbol (S5372).
If it is determined that the current game state is not a high probability state for normal symbols (
S5372: No), the presentation mode of the variation pattern presentation according to each presentation mode and the lottery result is set (S5382), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5372, if it is determined that the current game state is a high probability state of a normal pattern (S5372: Yes), it is determined whether the variation of the special pattern to be executed this time is a big win variation (S5373).

In the process of S5373, when it is determined that the fluctuation to be executed this time is not a big win fluctuation (S5373: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203u is read (S5
374). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203u read in the process of S5374 is 1 (S5375). In other words, it is determined whether the time-saving gaming state is the final change. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203u is not 1 (S5375: No), the above-mentioned process of S5382 is executed, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S5375, when it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203u is 1 (S5375: Yes), a performance mode for indicating the end of the time-saving is determined (S
5376), and set the values of the first gauge counter 223fc and the second gauge counter 223fd to 0
(S5377), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5373, when it is determined that the fluctuation to be executed this time is a big win fluctuation (S5373: Yes), the time-saving type corresponding to the big win type that has been won is identified (S5378), and then the value of the gauge counter (either the first gauge counter 223fc or the second gauge counter 223fd) corresponding to the identified time-saving type is decremented by 1 (S537
9) Then proceed to processing S5380.

In the process of S5380, it is determined whether the value of the gauge counter (either the first gauge counter 223fc or the second gauge counter 223fd) from which the subtraction was performed in the process of S5379 is 0 (S5380). If it is determined that the value of the gauge counter (either the first gauge counter 223fc or the second gauge counter 223fd) from which the subtraction was performed is not 0 (S53
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5380 that the value of the gauge counter from which the subtraction has been performed (either the first gauge counter 223fc or the second gauge counter 223fd) is 0 (S5380: Yes), the processes of S5376 to S5377 described above are executed, and the process ends.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 751 to Fig. 759. The eighth embodiment is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that it uses a configuration that allows the remaining number of time-saving limit times to be reset (returned to the initial value) when a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set is set during a normal pattern high probability period in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set continuously.

Specifically, in the seventh embodiment described above, a plurality of time-saving types (time-saving A, time-saving B) are provided,
A time-saving limit count counter (a first time-saving limit count counter 203fa, a second time-saving limit count counter 203fb) is provided for each time-saving type, and the normal high probability period is terminated when the time-saving limit is reached for any of the time-saving types.

By configuring it in this manner, the length of the normal high probability period can be made different depending on the jackpot winning situation during the normal high probability period. Therefore, in contrast to conventional pachinko machines 10 in which the value of the time-saving limit count counter is updated uniformly for all time-saving types, it is made more difficult to predict when the time-saving limit will be reached, and it is possible for players to play in the hope that the normal high probability period will be set for as long as possible.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment described above, by providing a different time-saving limit count counter for each type of time-saving, it is possible to vary the length of the normal high probability period. However, since the time-saving limit may be reached whether a time-saving jackpot is won or the first probability special jackpot is won, for example, if the jackpot type when the time-saving limit is reached is one in which a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, which causes a problem of reducing the player's motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in the eighth embodiment, a time-saving limit count counter (specific time-saving limit count counter 203ga) is provided only for a specific time-saving type (time-saving A) among multiple time-saving types (time-saving A, time-saving B), and when the specific time-saving type (time-saving A) is set consecutively, the value of the specific time-saving limit count counter 203ga is updated (subtracted), and when the value of the specific time-saving limit count counter 203ga becomes 0, it is determined that the time-saving limit has been reached.

Then, when a value is set in the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga and a time-saving type other than the specific time-saving type (time-saving B) is set, the value of the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga is reset (reset) to the initial value (the value set at the time of the first win).
It is configured to do so.

By configuring it in this manner, if a jackpot (first special jackpot, time-saving jackpot) in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set is won during the normal symbol high probability period in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it is possible to extend the period until the end of the normal symbol high probability period, making it more difficult for players to understand how long the normal symbol high probability period will continue.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the time-saving type (time-saving A) set at the time of the first probability jackpot winning is
) is a specific time-saving type, and the time-saving type (time-saving B) that is set when a time-saving jackpot is won is a time-saving type other than the specific time-saving type.

In other words, it is configured so that the time-saving limit is not reached based on winning the time-saving jackpot during the normal pattern high probability period. By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving limit is reached and the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set, the second probability state is always set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play due to the normal state being set based on the time-saving limit being reached.

In the eighth embodiment, as in the seventh embodiment described above, the first probability variable state is the most advantageous game state for the player, followed by the second probability variable state and the time-saving state, and the normal state is the least advantageous game state for the player. Therefore, by configuring the game to always transition to the second probability variable state based on the time-saving limit being reached, it is possible to prevent the game state from transitioning from the most advantageous game state to the most disadvantageous game state for the player, which would result in a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In addition, the technical concept of the eighth embodiment may be applied to a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to provide a different gameplay from that of the eighth embodiment, in which the second special probability state is a gameplay state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special probability state.

In this case, during the normal high probability period, the first jackpot and the time-saving jackpot are repeatedly executed, and the time-saving limit is reached without the time-saving end condition being established during the time-saving state, so that the most advantageous second probability state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay that makes the player look forward to reaching the time-saving limit as soon as possible.

<About the content of the eighth embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 751, the effects executed in the eighth embodiment will be described. First,
In the seventh embodiment described above, when the value of the time-saving A limit count counter 203fa is 4,
Even if you win a jackpot with time-saving B set (jackpot E7 (Figure 742 (b))), time-saving A will not be applied.
Since the value of the limit count counter 203fa is not reset, when a jackpot in which time-saving A is set is won in time-saving B, the time-saving A limit is reached, and a non-time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. In contrast, the eighth embodiment differs in that when one time-saving type (e.g., time-saving A) is set, the value of the time-saving limit count counter for another time-saving type (e.g., time-saving B) is reset.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the time-saving limit is reached when a jackpot with a specific time-saving type (e.g., time-saving A) is consecutively won (e.g., five times). As a result, if a jackpot with a different time-saving type (e.g., time-saving B) is won before the time-saving limit is reached (when the value of the time-saving A limit count counter is 4), the value of the time-saving limit count counter is reset, so that if a jackpot with time-saving A is won when time-saving B is set, the time-saving A limit is not reached and the time-saving state is set until five consecutive time-saving A jackpots are won. In other words, if the time-saving A limit is reached and the player is placed in a low-probability non-time-saving state (
It is possible to provide a new gaming experience in that the time-saving feature B can be prevented from being set (usually) by winning the time-saving feature B.

Based on the above, an overview of the performance in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment, when a high probability time-saving state (first probability change state) or a low probability time-saving state (time-saving state) is set,
In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 and the dinosaur 807 fight. If the player wins the first probability special jackpot, which updates the value of the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 is attacked by the dinosaur 807. On the other hand, if the player wins the time-saving jackpot, which resets the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga, the hero 801 is attacked by the dinosaur 807.
An effect is executed in which player 1 defeats dinosaur 807 and acquires an item.

In this way, by executing corresponding effects when the value of the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga is updated and when it is reset, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the details of the performance in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 751(a) is an example of a performance screen when the specific time-saving limit remaining number is 3 and the specific time-saving limit number counter 803ga is updated and a jackpot is won. In the special pattern 2 variable display area Dm3, a display is displayed indicating that the second special pattern has won the jackpot (first probability jackpot) in which the specific time-saving limit number counter 803ga is updated, and in the main display area Dm, a performance in which the dinosaur 807 attacks the hero 801 is executed. In addition, in the first game information display area Dm4, the display number is displayed with 1 added in response to the jackpot win, and in the second game information display area Dm5, the specific time-saving limit remaining number, which is the number of times the specific time-saving limit is reached, is displayed with 1 subtracted in response to the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga being updated. When the display in the second game information display area Dm5 becomes 0, that is, when the value of the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga reaches 5, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 is defeated by an attack of the dinosaur 807.
The word "Defeat" is displayed in the display area HR1.

FIG. 751(b) is an example of a presentation screen when the remaining number of times of the specific time-saving limit is 2, and the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga is reset. In the special chart 2 variable display area Dm3, a display is displayed indicating that the specific time-saving limit counter 803ga has been reset, and in the main display area Dm, the hero 801 is transformed into a dinosaur 80
7 and obtains the medicine 817. In addition, in the second game information display area Dm5, in response to the resetting of the value of the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga, the display is updated to indicate that the remaining number of times of the specific time-saving limit is 5.

In this way, by displaying the remaining number of times for the specific time-saving limit in the second game information display area Dm5, the player is made to feel a sense of crisis that the normal state will be set if the value of the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga is not reset before the remaining number of times for the specific time-saving limit reaches 0, and this makes the player have strong expectations that the hero 801 will defeat the dinosaur 807, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, if time-saving B (low-probability time-saving state) is set and the conditions for ending the time-saving state are met before a jackpot is won, an effect is executed in which the hero 801 is defeated by an attack from the dinosaur 807, the word "Defeat" is displayed in the display area HR1, and "0" is displayed in the second game information display area Dm5.

In addition, enemy characters such as the dinosaur 807 are selected from the enemy character selection table 222g shown in FIG.
The enemy character selection table 222ga is configured to determine the enemy character according to the value of the reset count counter 223ga and the value of the time-saving set count counter 223gb, as described in detail below. Therefore, the specific time-saving limit count counter 203ga
When a big win is won in which the value of is reset and an effect in which the hero 801 defeats the dinosaur 807 is executed, a new enemy character is displayed after the big win game ends and an effect in which the hero 801 fights the dinosaur 807 is executed.

For example, when the value of the time-saving set number counter 223gb is 10, the enemy character 5 is determined, and therefore the player can grasp the number of time-saving sets by the type of enemy character, since the enemy character is determined by the value of the time-saving set number counter 223ga. Also, since there are rare enemy characters that are displayed only when the value of the time-saving set counter 223gb reaches a specific value, the player can be motivated to play in order to display the rare enemy characters.

In the embodiment, the effect is to show that the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga has been reset by the medicine 817, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an effect in which a different item is obtained according to the value of the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga before it is reset. For example, when the value of the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga is 1 and the value is reset by winning the jackpot, a blue medicine may be obtained, and when the value of the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga is 4 and the value is reset by winning the jackpot, a gold medicine may be obtained. Also, an effect in which another item is obtained instead of medicine may be obtained.

In the embodiment, the time-saving A is set when the first probability variable jackpot is won, and the time-saving B is set when the time-saving jackpot is won. Therefore, when the display showing the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit displayed in the second game information display area Dm5 is reset, that is, when the time-saving jackpot in which the time-saving B is set is won, the player can easily predict that the first probability variable state will not be set because the display showing the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit displayed in the second game information display area Dm5 is reset, and there is a risk that the player will be disappointed because the first probability variable state will not be set. Therefore, the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga
Even if the player wins a time-saving big win in which the second game information display area Dm5 is reset,
The remaining number of times for the time-saving limit displayed in the display unit 10 may be updated and displayed.
When the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit displayed in the second game information display area Dm5 is "0" and a jackpot is won, a presentation is displayed to inform the player that the first probability variable state or the time-saving state will continue (for example, a presentation displaying "+α" or the like in the second game information display area Dm5). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state after the jackpot game ends, and also to make the player play in the hope that the time-saving state will continue even if the display in the second game information display area Dm5 is "0".

<Electrical Configuration of Eighth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 753 to Fig. 753. The eighth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a part of the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed, but the rest is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 753, the main control device 11 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment
The configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 753 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 753, the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 621) in that a specific time-saving limit count counter 203ga is provided instead of the time-saving limit count counter 203i. The other configurations are the same, so the same symbols are used and detailed descriptions are omitted.

The specific time-saving limit counter 203ga is a counter in which the time-saving limit number set for the time-saving type "time-saving A" is set. When a high probability state of a normal pattern is set, the value of "5" is set to this counter (see S3095 in FIG. 755). After that, when a jackpot is won in which the time-saving type "time-saving A" is set while the high probability state of a normal pattern continues, the value is updated (subtracted) at the end of the jackpot game (see S3095 in FIG. 755).
097). It is then referenced in the process of determining whether the time-saving limit has been reached (
The value of the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga is cleared to 0 when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (see S3100 in FIG. 755).

In addition, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set consecutively, the time-saving type "Time-saving A"
If a time-saving type other than "Time-saving B" is set, the value is reset to "5" (S3095 in FIG. 755).

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound and lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 753(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment is
is the R of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above.
The difference with respect to OM222 is that the stock notification number selection table 222c has been deleted and an enemy character selection table 222ga has been added, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The enemy character selection table 222ga is a data table which is referenced when selecting the form of the enemy character 807 in a battle performance (see FIG. 751) which is executed when a time-saving state is set, and it is specified so that different forms of enemy characters are selected based on the value of the limit count counter 223ga which indicates the number of times the value of the specific time-saving limit count counter 203ga has been reset, and the value of the time-saving set count counter 223gb which indicates the number of times the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) has been set consecutively.

Here, the detailed contents of the enemy character selection table 222ga will be described with reference to FIG. 754. FIG. 754 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the enemy character selection table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 754, the enemy character selection table 222ga defines the type of enemy character to be selected regardless of the value of the limit number counter 223ga when the number of time-saving sets reaches a specific number, and the type of enemy character to be selected when the value of the limit number counter 223ga reaches a predetermined value. In addition, when the case where the number of time-saving sets reaches a specific number and the case where the value of the limit number counter 223ga reaches a predetermined value overlap, the enemy character to be selected when the number of time-saving sets reaches a specific number is configured to be selected preferentially.

Specifically, when the value of the limit count counter 223ga is "0" and the value of the time-saving set count counter 223gb is a specific number other than "10, 15, 20 or more," the enemy character type is "initial character," and when the value of the limit count counter 223ga is "1" and the value of the time-saving set count counter 223gb is a specific number other than "10, 15, 20 or more,"
If the type of enemy character is "character 1", the value of the limit count counter 223ga is "2", and the value of the time-saving set count counter 223gb is other than a specific number ("10, 15, 20 or more"), the type of enemy character is "character 2", the value of the limit count counter 223ga is "3", and the value of the time-saving set count counter 223gb is a specific number ("10, 15, 20 or more").
If the type of enemy character is other than the above, the enemy character type is set to “character 3” and the limit count counter 22
The value of the time-saving set number counter 223gb is a specific number ("10, 15").
If the number of characters is other than "1, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100," then "Character 4" is selected as the type of enemy character.

In addition, when the value of the time-saving set number counter 223gb is the specific number "10",
It is specified that, regardless of the value of the reset count counter 223ga, the enemy character type is "character 5", and when the value of the time-saving set number counter 223gb is a specific number "15", the enemy character type is "character 6" regardless of the value of the reset count counter 223ga, and when the value of the time-saving set number counter 223gb is a specific number "20 or more", the enemy character type is "character 7" regardless of the value of the reset count counter 223ga.

In the eighth embodiment, the bonus given to the player varies depending on the type of enemy character selected. For example, when "Character 5" to "Character 7" are selected, a bonus for executing a battle performance is given along with a performance mode for celebrating that the high probability state of the normal pattern has continued for a predetermined period. Also, when "Character 7" is selected, a battle performance including a performance mode showing the ending performance in the battle performance is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 753(b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound and lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment will be described.
53(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 753(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment in that the notified stock number counter 223r and the notified upper limit flag 223s are deleted, and the reset number counter 223ga and the time-saving set number counter 223gb are added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The reset count counter 223ga is a counter for measuring the number of times (reset count) that a jackpot associated with a time-saving type (time-saving B) other than a time-saving type (time-saving A) is won during a normal pattern high probability period in which a high probability state for normal patterns is continuously set, and the value of the remaining time-saving count counter 222n is reset to the initial setting value "5".

The time-saving set number counter 223gb is a counter for measuring the number of times that a high probability state of a normal pattern is set consecutively during a normal pattern high probability period in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set consecutively.

In the eighth embodiment, unlike the seventh embodiment described above, the value set as the time-saving limit number can be reset (the initial upper limit can be reset) based on the establishment of a reset condition. In other words, depending on the type of time-saving set when a jackpot is won, the normal pattern high probability period can be continued for a long time. Therefore, based on the number of times the high probability state of the normal pattern is set during the normal pattern high probability period (the number of time-saving sets) and the number of times the value set as the time-saving limit number is reset (reset), different presentation modes can be determined.

By configuring in this manner, the player can be informed in an easily understandable manner of how and for how long the currently ongoing high probability period of normal play has continued.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 755, the MPU 20 in the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment
Each control process executed by the control unit 1 will be described. In this embodiment, the difference from the seventh embodiment described above is that the time-saving limit update process 8 (see S2892 in FIG. 755) is executed instead of the time-saving limit update process 7 (see S2882 in FIG. 746), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 755, the time-saving limit update process 8 (S2892) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 755 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving limit update process 8 (S2892). The time-saving limit update process 8 (S2892) in this embodiment differs from the time-saving limit update process 7 (S2882) in the seventh embodiment described above in that the time-saving limit count is reset when a jackpot of a specific time-saving type is won. Since the other processes are the same, the same symbols are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the time-saving limit update process 8 (S2892), the above-mentioned processes of S3001 to S3002 are first executed. In the process of S3002, if it is determined that the currently executed jackpot type is a jackpot type that sets a high probability state of a normal pattern as the game state after the jackpot game ends (S3002: Yes), then the time-saving type corresponding to the currently executed jackpot type is specified (S3081). Next, it is determined whether the time-saving type read out in the process of S3081 is time-saving type A (first probability hit) (S3091). If it is determined that the read out time-saving type is not time-saving type A (first probability hit) (S3091: No), then it is determined whether the value of the specific time-saving limit count counter 203ga is greater than 0 (
S3092).

In the process of S3092, when it is determined that the value of the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga is greater than 0 (S3092: Yes), a limit reset command is set indicating that the set time-saving limit number has been reset (S3093), the time-saving flag 203f is set to ON (S3094), and the specific time-saving limit number counter 203
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3092 that the value of the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga is not greater than 0 (S3092: No), the process of S3093 is skipped and the above-mentioned S3094 is performed.
The process goes to S3095 and ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3091, if it is determined that the time-saving type of the currently executed jackpot is the time-saving type A (S3091: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga is greater than 0 (S3096).
If the answer is No), the above-mentioned processes of S3094 to S3095 are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3096, the value of the specific time-saving limit counter 203ga is 0
If it is determined that the value is greater than the specified time-saving limit counter 203ga (S3096: Yes), the value of the specified time-saving limit counter 203ga is decremented by 1 (S3097). Next, it is determined whether the value of the specified time-saving limit counter 203ga after the decrement is 0 (S3098). If it is determined that the value of the specified time-saving limit counter 203ga after the decrement is 0 (S3098: Yes),
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga after subtraction is not 0 (S3098: No), the process of S3009 is executed, and the process is terminated.
), the time-saving flag 203f is set to on (S3099), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, if it is determined that the currently executed jackpot type is not a jackpot type that sets a high probability state of a normal pattern as a game state after the jackpot game ends (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the specific time-saving limit number counter 203ga is greater than 0 (S3089).
When it is determined that the value of ga is greater than 0 (S3089: Yes), the value of the specific time-saving limit count counter 203ga is cleared to 0 (S3100), and this process ends.
If it is determined that the value is not greater than the predetermined value (S3089: No), the process ends.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the time-saving limit number of times can be reset by winning a jackpot of a specific time-saving type, so that during the time-saving play state, the player can play in the hope of winning a jackpot of a specific time-saving type and resetting the time-saving limit number of times, thereby preventing the time-saving play from becoming monotonous.

In addition, the reset condition of the time-saving limit number of times is not limited to winning a jackpot of a specific time-saving type, and whether to reset the time-saving limit number of times may be determined based on the number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving game state. In this configuration, it is preferable to configure the time-saving limit number of times to be reset when a jackpot is won after the number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving game state is executed many times. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while expecting that the time-saving limit number of times will be reset if the jackpot is won, even if the number of times the special symbol changes, which is the end condition of the time-saving game state, is about to reach the specified number after the transition to the time-saving game state. Also, the time-saving limit number of times may be configured to be reset when a jackpot is won when the number of times the special symbol changes during the time-saving game state is small. In this way, the player can get more joy by winning a jackpot in a shorter period of time and also resetting the time-saving limit number of times.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 756 to FIG. 759, the voice lamp control device 1 in the eighth embodiment will be described.
In the eighth embodiment, in comparison with the seventh embodiment, the status command process 8 (see S4374 in FIG. 756) is replaced with the time-saving remaining count update process (see S448 in FIG. 665) instead of the status command process 8 (see S4374 in FIG. 756).
Instead of the time-saving remaining number update process 8 (see S4581 in FIG. 757),
Instead of the presentation mode setting process 7 (see S4375 in FIG. 749), the presentation mode setting process 8 (
The difference is that the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 8 (see S5189 in FIG. 759) is executed instead of the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 7 (see S5179 in FIG. 750) in place of the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 7 (see S4385 in FIG. 758), and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 756, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment
The state command process 8 (S4374) executed by the PU 221 will now be described.
56 is a flow chart showing the contents of state command processing 8 (S4374). State command processing 8 (S4374) differs from the state command processing in the seventh embodiment described above (see S4212 in FIG. 665) in that when a limit reset command is received, a process is executed to count how many times the time-saving limit count has been reset. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In state command process 8 (S4374), first, the processes of S4301 to S4304 described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4303, if it is determined that a limit-related command has not been received (S4303: No), it is determined whether a limit reset command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4351). If it is determined that a limit reset command has been received (S4351: Yes), the value of the reset number counter 223ga is incremented by 1 (S4352), and the process of S4305 described above is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S4351, if it is determined that a limit reset command has not been received (S4351:
If the answer is No, the process skips S4352 and proceeds to S4305.

Next, referring to FIG. 757, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment
A description will be given of the remaining time-saving count update process 8 (S4581) executed by the PU 221. Fig. 757 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining time-saving count update process 8 (S4581).

In the remaining time-saving count update process 8 (S4581), first, it is determined whether the command received from the main control device 110 this time is a command indicating a subtraction of the time-saving count limit (S4591). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating a subtraction of the time-saving count limit (
S4591: Yes), the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S4592), the value of the time-saving set number counter 223gb is incremented by 1 (S4593), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4591, if it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not a command indicating a subtraction of the time-saving limit number (S4591: No),
It is determined whether the received command is a command for adding the time-saving limit number (S45
If it is determined that the received command is a command for incrementing the time-saving limit number (S4594: Yes), the remaining time-saving number counter 223n is set to 5 (S4594:
4595), the above-mentioned process of S4593 is executed, and this process ends.
In the process, if it is determined that the received command is not a command for adding to the time-saving limit number (S4594: No), this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 758, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment
The following describes the rendering mode setting process 8 (S4385) executed by the PU 221. Fig. 758 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rendering mode setting process 8 (S4385).
The presentation mode setting process 8 (S4385) is the presentation mode setting process 7 (see S4375 of FIG. 749) in the seventh embodiment described above, and the number of times the time-saving limit number has been reset,
The difference is that the process is executed to determine the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the update status of the time-saving limit number of times, etc. Since the other processes are the same,
The same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

In the performance mode setting process 8 (S4385), first, the process of S4601 described above is executed. In the process of S4601, the probability change limit flag 223o and the time reduction limit flag 223
If it is determined that neither the ON state nor the ON state (S4601: No), the above-mentioned S460
3 to S4604 and S4671 to S4672 are executed. Then, S4672
In the process of (S), if it is determined that the current game state is a high probability state of a normal pattern,
4672: Yes), and determines the display mode corresponding to the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223n (
S4681).

Next, the value of the reset counter 223ga and the value of the time-saving set counter 223gb are used to refer to the enemy character selection table 222ga (see FIG. 754) to select an enemy character to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S4682).
Then, the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 759, the M in the voice lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment
The special chart 2 variable performance setting process 8 (S5189) executed by the PU 221 will be described. FIG. 759 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance mode setting process 8 (S4385). The special chart 2 variable performance setting process 8 (S5189) is a process for setting the special chart 2 in the above-mentioned eighth embodiment.
The difference with respect to the variable performance setting process 7 (S5179 in FIG. 750) is that a process is executed to determine the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of big win that has been won. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In the special chart 2 variable performance setting process 8 (S5189), first, the above-mentioned S5371 to S537
The process of S5373 and the process of S5378 are executed, and then in the process of S5378, it is determined whether the time-saving type corresponding to the identified winning jackpot type is time-saving type A (first probability hit) (S5391). If it is determined that the identified time-saving type is time-saving type A (first probability hit) (S5391: Yes), the enemy attack performance mode corresponding to the value of the remaining time-saving counter 223n is determined (S5392), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S5391, if it is determined that the identified time-saving type is not time-saving type A (S5393: Yes), the enemy attack performance mode corresponding to the value of the remaining time-saving counter 223n is determined (S5394), and this process is terminated.
1: No), the presentation mode showing the defeat of the enemy is determined (S5393), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5373, if it is determined that the variation to be executed this time is not a big win (S5373: No), the above-mentioned processes of S5374 and S5375 are executed. Then, in the process of S5375, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203u is 1 (S5375: Yes), the process of S5376 is executed, and then the values of the reset number counter 223ga and the time-saving set number counter 223gb are cleared to 0 (S53
94) and then this process ends.

In the above-mentioned seventh and eighth embodiments, a configuration was used in which both a special rate limit and a time-saving limit were set, but the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine configured to set only a time-saving limit without setting a special rate limit.

Ninth embodiment
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 760 to Fig. 765. In the fifth to eighth embodiments described above, the value set as the probability limit number of times and the value set as the time-saving limit number of times are made different according to the type of big win, so that the length of the period during which the probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) can be set continuously can be made different.

In contrast, in the ninth embodiment, the value set as the probability limit number is a specific value (
11), and only the value set as the time-saving limit number is varied depending on the type of jackpot.

In this way, in a gaming machine in which a special rate limit number and a time-saving limit number can be set, by configuring only one of the limit numbers to be set differently and varying the length of the period during which the special rate state can be set continuously, it is possible to reduce the amount of processing required to set (update) each limit number and to reduce the storage area for data corresponding to each limit number.

Furthermore, in this ninth embodiment, the value of the time-saving limit number of times can be set within a range of values smaller than the specific value (10) set as the special chance limit number of times, and after the first special chance state is set, the time-saving limit is reached before the special chance limit, and the second special chance state is set after the time-saving limit is reached.

In addition, in this ninth embodiment, the first special pattern lottery is primarily executed when the first special pattern state is set, and the second special pattern lottery is primarily executed when the second special pattern state is set. When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a jackpot type that can always set the first special pattern state after the jackpot game ends is set, and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a jackpot type that always sets the normal state after the jackpot game ends is set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a jackpot game based on the first special symbol lottery multiple times during the first probability variable state, transition to the second probability variable state when the time-saving limit is reached, and transition to the normal state based on winning a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery during the second probability variable state. In other words, in this ninth embodiment in which a specific value (10) is always set as the probability variable limit number of times, regardless of the remaining number of probability variable limit times, it is possible to transition to the normal state by the first jackpot game executed after the time-saving limit is reached (during the second probability variable state).

Therefore, even if a specific value (10) is always set as the number of times for the special probability change limit and a different value (e.g., 3 to 10) can be set as the number of times for the time-saving limit change, it is possible to prevent the length of the period during which the second special probability change state is continuously set after the time-saving limit is reached from differing depending on the number of times for the time-saving limit change that has been set.

Furthermore, regardless of the remaining number of times the special probability limit has been reached, only the period until the next jackpot game is executed can be set to the second special probability state. In other words, regardless of the number of times the time-saving limit has been set, it is possible to transition the game state from the first special probability state to the normal state through the same process of reaching the time-saving limit in the first special probability state, transitioning to the second special probability state, and transitioning to the normal state when the first jackpot is won in the second special probability state. Therefore, for example, the period from the end of the first special probability state to the setting of the normal state (
As the presentation mode of the presentation (demotion presentation) executed during the demotion period, it is possible to set the same presentation mode regardless of the value of the time-saving limit number of times set when the first probability variable state is set.

<Game Flow in the Ninth Embodiment>
First, referring to Figure 760, the flow of the game in this ninth embodiment will be explained.
Fig. 760 is a diagram showing a typical flow of the game in the ninth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 760, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is configured to be able to set the game states as normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), first probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

In the normal state, the first ball entrance 64b is opened to execute the first special symbol lottery.
In this normal state, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, one of the jackpot types (jackpots A9 to C9) with different time-saving limit counts is set.
When a big win is won in the special pattern lottery, the first probability variable state is always set after the big win game ends, regardless of which big win type is set.

At the end of the big win game in which the first probability variation state is set, the probability variation limit number counter 20
The value of "10" is set for the time-saving limit counter 203i.
A value corresponding to the type of jackpot currently being played is set.

Then, during the special pattern high probability period in which the first probability state is set continuously, if the jackpot game based on the first special pattern lottery is executed multiple times, the time-saving limit is reached. Here, if the probability limit and the time-saving limit are reached at the same time, the high probability state of the special pattern is forcibly changed to the low probability state of the special pattern, and the high probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to the low probability state of the normal pattern, so that the game transitions to the normal state. On the other hand, if only the time-saving limit is reached, the high probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the game transitions to the second probability state. During this second probability state, the variation pattern of each special pattern is specified so that the second special pattern lottery is executed more easily than the first special pattern lottery, and the game essentially becomes a game state in which the second special pattern lottery is executed mainly.

In the ninth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a jackpot type (jackpot D9) is set in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends, so that when a jackpot is won during the second probability variable state, the state transitions to the normal state. In other words, in the ninth embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is used to transition the game state to the normal state, and the second probability variable state is used to create a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of special symbol types, a specific special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is used to set a specific game state (normal state), and further, various transition triggers (regardless of the remaining number of times of the special symbol limit) from a game state advantageous to the player (first special symbol state) to a game state (second special symbol state) in which the specific special symbol lottery is mainly executed are provided.
By configuring it to be settable, it is possible to ensure a transition from a game state advantageous to the player to a normal state.

Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, as in the above-mentioned embodiments, the first special symbol lottery (variable)
The first special pattern lottery (variation) and the second special pattern lottery (variation) are configured to be executable in an overlapping (parallel) manner, and by greatly varying the length of the variation time set in the variation pattern for each special pattern executed in each game state, a special pattern lottery for substantially only one special pattern type is executed.

Therefore, even if the second special pattern lottery is provided to transition to the normal state (if the normal state is always set when a jackpot is won), the second special pattern lottery can be configured to be hardly executed other than in the second special state (a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set in a game state other than the second special state is selected), thereby allowing the player to play without any hindrance.

Next, the flow of the time-saving limit number and the game state transition in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 761. Fig. 761(a) is a diagram showing the flow of the game state transition when the time-saving limit number is set to "10", and Fig. 761(b) is a diagram showing the flow of the game state transition when the time-saving limit number is set to "5".

As shown in FIG. 761(a), in this ninth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first special jackpot game is executed with a probability of 100%, and when the first jackpot is won (when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery under normal conditions), the special jackpot limit number is set to "10" after the jackpot game ends. Then, depending on the type of jackpot set at the time of the first jackpot, the time-saving limit number is set to "3", "5", "
10".

Here, when "10" is set as the time-saving limit number, the big win game based on the special symbol lottery executed during the first probability variable state is executed continuously until the first probability variable state ends (until the probability variable limit and time-saving limit are reached). In the example shown in FIG. 761(a), the value set as the probability variable limit number at the time of the first win and the value set as the time-saving limit number are the same, so the first probability variable state transitions to the normal state.

In the pattern shown in FIG. 761(b), after the first win, the probability limit number of times "10" and the time-saving limit "5" are set, and when the time-saving limit is reached before the probability limit, the second probability state is set. Then, the second probability state continues until a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the second probability state, and the normal state is set based on the jackpot being won in the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, a game board configuration having a V winning device 1065 similar to that of the fourth embodiment described above is adopted, and when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, an operation scenario of "V winning possible" is set, and when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, an operation scenario of "V winning not possible" is set. The detailed contents of each operation scenario are the same as those of the fourth and sixth embodiments described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration of the Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 762 to Fig. 765. The ninth embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is changed, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment in that instead of the special 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) specified in the first jackpot type selection table, a special 1 jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb1 and a special 2 jackpot type selection table 202
b2 (see FIG. 613 (c)), the special chart 2 big win type selection 9 table 202hb2 is used instead, and the first probability variation variation pattern table 202d3 is used as a variation pattern table that can be referred to during the first probability variation state defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d.
(See FIG. 615(b)) instead of the first probability variable variable pattern 9 table 202hd3, the second
As a variation pattern table that can be referred to during the probability variation state, the second probability variation pattern table 202d4 (see FIG. 616(a)) is replaced with the second probability variation pattern 9 table 202h.
d4 is used, and instead of the time-saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 617), time-saving grant 9
The difference is that table 202he is used, and other than that, they are the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, referring to FIG. 762, the contents stipulated in the special chart 1 big win type selection 9 table 202hb1 will be explained. FIG. 762 is a special chart 1 big win type selection 9 table 2
762, the special chart 1 big win type selection 9 table 202hb1 is different from the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) in the first embodiment described above in that the number of times of the probability change limit and the number of times of the time reduction limit defined for each big win type are different, and the content of the big win game defined for each big win type is different.

Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", a "jackpot A9 (10R jackpot)" is defined, when it is in the range of "40 to 119", a "jackpot B9 (5R jackpot)" is defined, and for values of "120 to 199", a "jackpot C9 (5R jackpot)" is defined.

In addition, when any of the jackpot types A9, B9, and C9 is won, the "first probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends, regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won).

After the first win (when neither the probability limit nor the time-saving limit are set), if you win the "Big Win A9", the probability limit is set to "10" at the end of the big win game, and the time-saving limit is set to "
In addition, if a "jackpot B9" is won, the probability variable limit number is set to "10" and the time-saving limit number is set to "5" at the end of the jackpot game. In addition, if a "jackpot C9" is won, the probability variable limit number is set to "10" and the time-saving limit number is set to "3" at the end of the jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 763, the contents stipulated in the special chart 2 big win type selection 9 table 202hb2 will be explained. FIG. 763 is a special chart 2 big win type selection 9 table 20
763, the special chart 2 big win type selection 9 table 202hb2 is different from the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613(c)) in the first embodiment described above in that the number of times of the probability change limit and the number of times of the time reduction limit defined for each big win type are different, and the content of the big win game defined for each big win type is different.

Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 199", and "jackpot D9 (10R jackpot)" is defined as the jackpot D9 (10R jackpot).
" is set to "normal state" after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won). Therefore, "jackpot D9 (10R jackpot)"
When the player wins, the probability variation limit number and the time-saving limit number are reset at the end of the big win game.

Next, referring to FIG. 764(a), the contents stipulated in the first probability change use variation pattern 9 table 202hd3 will be described. FIG. 764(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the first probability change use variation pattern 9 table 202hd3. As shown in FIG. 764(a), the first probability change use variation pattern 9 table 202hd3 is different from the first probability change use variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 615(b)) of the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to each symbol type is different so that the special symbol lottery (variation) mainly executed during the first probability change state becomes the first special symbol.

Specifically, when the symbol type is "Special Pattern 1" and the winning/losing judgment result is a loss or a small win, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to a range of "0 to 194" for a short loss with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds), and a range of "195 to 198" for a middle loss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20000 milliseconds). Also, when the winning/losing judgment result is a big win, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to a range of "0 to 149".
In the range, the middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds) is "150 to 19
In the range of "8", a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (60,000 milliseconds) is specified.

In addition, when the symbol type is "Special symbol 2", regardless of whether the winning or losing judgment result is a winning or losing, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 600 seconds (60000
Ultra-long fluctuations of up to 100 ms (0 ms) are specified.

Next, regarding the contents stipulated in the second probability variation pattern table 202hd4,
The explanation will be made with reference to FIG. 764(b). FIG. 764(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the second probability variation pattern 9 table 202hd4. As shown in FIG. 764(b), the second probability variation pattern 9 table 202hd4 is different from the second probability variation table 202d4 (see FIG. 616(a)) in the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to each symbol type is different so that the special symbol lottery (variation) mainly executed during the second probability variation state becomes the second special symbol.

Specifically, when the symbol type is "Special symbol 1", regardless of whether the winning or losing judgment result is a win or a miss, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 600 seconds (60
In addition, when the symbol type is "Special Pattern 2", regardless of whether the winning or losing judgment result is a win or a miss, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 19
In the range of "8", a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is specified.

Next, the contents stipulated in the time-saving 9 table 202he will be described with reference to FIG. 765. FIG. 765 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving 9 table 202he. As shown in FIG. 765, the time-saving 9 table 202he is different from the time-saving 9 table 202e (see FIG. 617) described above in that, when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to OFF, the high probability state of the normal pattern is not set for the jackpot type (jackpot A9 to C9) in which the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set until the next jackpot is won, when the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to ON.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A9", "jackpot B9", and "jackpot C9", if both the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "65535 (effectively until the next time)", and the number of time-saving times to be awarded other than that is "100". Also, if the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is set to off, the low probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly set, so regardless of the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "
"0" is specified.

On the other hand, as described above, the jackpot type "Jackpot D9" is not a jackpot type in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, so the number of times to be awarded the time-saving feature is set to "0" regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot or the setting status of the special rate limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v.

Tenth Embodiment
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 766 to 774.
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that, instead of a configuration in which the first special pattern lottery (variable) and the second special pattern lottery (variable) can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), a configuration is used in which the second special pattern lottery is executed with priority when the player has the right to execute the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reserved) and the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved); the game state that is set after the end of the first special pattern state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, has been changed; the control processing content has been changed in response to the above-mentioned changes; and the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 has been partially changed.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 766. Fig. 766 is a front view showing a schematic configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 766, the game board 13 of the tenth embodiment is different from the game board 13 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 582) in that the distribution device 175 is omitted and the second ball entrance 640 is provided.
The difference is that an electric accessory 640a has been added to the right side of the machine and its location has been changed, the second variable winning device 650 (a variable winning device that opens during a small win game) has been removed, and a general ball entry port 63 has been provided in the right side area. The rest of the difference is the same. The same symbols are used for the same contents, and detailed explanations will be omitted.

In the tenth embodiment, a normal symbol winning game is executed by opening the electric device 640a when a normal symbol lottery is won by passing a ball through the through gate 67. This normal symbol winning game is executed with an operation content that makes it easier to enter the second ball entrance 640 when a high probability state of the normal symbol is set than when a low probability state of the normal symbol is set.

Specifically, in a normal winning game performed in a high probability state of a normal symbol, the electric device 640a is more likely to be in an open state (the ball is in the second state) than in a normal winning game performed in a low probability state of a normal symbol.
The period during which the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 is long, and the game is executed with the operation contents. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to make the ball enter the second ball entrance 640 in the game state (first probability variable state, time-saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set.

In the tenth embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state of normal patterns), the special pattern lottery can be executed more efficiently when a game is executed in which the ball is made to enter the first ball entrance 64 by hitting the ball from the left, rather than when a game is executed in which the ball is made to enter the second ball entrance 640 by hitting the ball from the right, so that in the normal state, left-handed play is the playing method that is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, when a high probability state for normal symbols (first special probability state, time-saving state) is set, playing right to make the ball enter the second ball entrance 640 allows the special symbol lottery to be executed more efficiently than playing left to make the ball enter the first ball entrance 64, so right-hand play is an advantageous playing method for the player in the high probability state for normal symbols (first special probability state, time-saving state).

<Regarding transition of game state in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the flow of transition of the game state based on the game executed in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 767. Fig. 767 is a diagram showing a typical transition of the game state.

As shown in FIG. 767, in the tenth embodiment, in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, in a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a ball is put into the first ball entrance 64b1 by a left-handed shot, and a first special symbol lottery is executed. If a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the first probability variable state is always set after the jackpot game ends, and the probability variable limit number is set to "10".

Then, when the first probability variable state is set, a game is played in which the second special symbol lottery is executed by hitting the right hand side. In this embodiment, even if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first probability variable state is always set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, when the first probability variable state is set, the second special symbol lottery is executed continuously until the probability variable limit is reached.

When the probability limit is reached in the first probability state, the low probability state of the special symbol is forcibly set, so the game state transitions to the time-saving state, and "3 times of special symbol variation" is set as the time-saving end condition. That is, in this embodiment, when the time-saving state is set after the end of the big win game, the time-saving end condition is established when the third special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state is stopped and displayed, and the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state. As described above, in the time-saving state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same game as the first probability state described above, that is, the game for executing the second special symbol lottery by right-hitting is performed.

In this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern executed during the time-saving state is a long-term (
For example, a time-saving state is set to a variable time of 10 minutes. In other words, when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is maintained until a big win is won or until the special pattern variation with a variable time of 10 minutes is completed three times (30 minutes).

That is, in the first embodiment described above, the period during which the second probability change state is set is set as a game period during which the number of balls put out does not increase (is difficult to increase), whereas in the tenth embodiment, a time-saving state is used to create a game period during which the number of balls put out does not increase (is difficult to increase). And, as the variation pattern of all special symbol variations executed during the time-saving state, an ultra-long variation with a variation time of 10 minutes is set.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent many special symbol lotteries from being executed in a specified period after the first special probability state ends, so that a game period can be reliably set in which an increase in balls is suppressed.

<Electrical Configuration of Tenth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 768 to 772. In the tenth embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment, the main control device 110
The difference is that the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 223 included in the memory 202 are partially changed, but the rest are the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment, in place of the special 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) defined in the first jackpot type selection table, a special 1 jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib1 and a special 2 jackpot type selection table 20
2b2 (see FIG. 613(c)) instead of the special chart 2 big win type selection 10 table 202ib
In addition, the time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 615(a)) is replaced with the time-saving fluctuation pattern 10 table 202id3 as a fluctuation pattern table that can be referred to during the time-saving state defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, and the first probability fluctuation pattern table 202
d3 (see FIG. 615(b)) instead of the first variable pattern 10 table 202id3
The difference is that the time-saving provision table 202 is used instead of the time-saving provision table 202e (see FIG. 617), and that the time-saving provision table 202ie is used instead of the time-saving provision table 202f (see FIG. 617), but otherwise the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the special chart 1 big win type selection 10 table 202ib1 will be explained with reference to Figure 768. Figure 768 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 big win type selection 10 table 202ib1.

Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", a "jackpot A10 (10R jackpot)" is defined, and when the value is in the range of "40 to 199", a "jackpot B10 (5R jackpot)" is defined.

And, in either case of the jackpot type being "jackpot A10" or "jackpot B10",
Regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won), the "first probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, after the first win (when neither the probability variable limit number nor the time-saving limit number is set), the limit number that is set is "jackpot A10
In either case of "Big Win B10", the probability variation limit number is set to "10" at the end of the big win game.

Next, the contents stipulated in the special chart 2 big win type selection 10 table 202ib2 will be described with reference to Figure 769. Figure 769 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 big win type selection 10 table 202ib2.

Specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 199", and "jackpot C10" is defined. And, regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won), the "first probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends. Also, after the first win (when the probability variable limit number is not set), the limit number is set to "10" at the end of the jackpot game.

Next, referring to Fig. 770(a), the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern 10 table 202id2 will be described. Fig. 770(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern 10 table 202id2.

Specifically, when the symbol type is "Special symbol 1", regardless of whether the winning or losing judgment result is a win or a miss, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 600 seconds (60
Ultra-long fluctuations of up to 100 ms (0,000 ms) are specified.

Also, when the pattern type is "Special Pattern 2," regardless of whether the result of the win/loss judgment is a win or a miss, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set in the range of "0 to 198," and an ultra-long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 milliseconds) is specified.

Next, the contents prescribed in the first variable probability pattern 10 table 202id3 will be explained with reference to Figure 770 (b). Figure 770 (b) is a diagram showing the contents prescribed in the first variable probability pattern 10 table 202id3.

Specifically, when the symbol type is "Special symbol 1", regardless of whether the winning or losing judgment result is a win or a miss, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", and the fluctuation time is 1 second (1000
0 milliseconds) of ultra-short fluctuation is specified.

In addition, when the symbol type is "Special Pattern 2" and the result of the hit/miss judgment is a small hit or a miss, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set in the range of "0 to 194" to indicate a miss short fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds), and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set in the range of "195 to 198" to indicate a miss middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds). And when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a big hit, the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set in the range of "0
In the range of "149" to "20000 milliseconds", a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds) is specified, and in the range of "150 to 198", a middle fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (60,000 milliseconds) is specified.
The long hit fluctuation is stipulated.

Next, the contents defined in the time-saving provision 10 table 202ie will be described with reference to Fig. 771. Fig. 771 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving provision 10 table 202ie.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A10" and "jackpot B10", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, if the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "65535 (effectively until the next time)", and if the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to on, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "0". And for the jackpot type "jackpot C10", regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, if the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to off, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "65535 (effectively until the next time)", and if the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u is set to on, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is "0".
When 3u is set to on, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is set to "3."

Next, referring to FIG. 772, the main control device 1 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be described.
The configuration of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment will be described below. Fig. 772 is a diagram showing a typical configuration of the RAM 203 in the main control device 110 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 772, in the tenth embodiment, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (Fig.
1), the difference is that the time-saving limit counter 203i is deleted and a second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203ia is added. Since the other configurations are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed explanations are omitted.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 773 to 774.
In the embodiment, the special symbol variation process 10 (see C104 in FIG. 773) is substituted for the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 632), and the first special symbol variation start process (see S203 in FIG. 633) is substituted for the special symbol variation process 10 (see C104 in FIG. 773).
The difference is that the special symbol variation start process 10 (C213 in FIG. 774) is executed instead of the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 643) and the second special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 643), but the other points are the same. The same parts are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 773, MPU2 in the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment
The special symbol variation process 10 (C104) executed by the game player 701 will be described below. FIG. 773 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 10 (C104).

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether the current game state is one of the special symbol jackpots (C201). Specifically, it is determined whether the data indicating the current game state stored in the game state storage area 203k is a jackpot (jackpot game in progress). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a jackpot (C201: Yes), this process is terminated.

In the process of C201, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the jackpot (C201
: No), and determine whether the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (C202).
If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (C202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ia (the number of reserved times N of the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is
Next, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203ia (N
2) is greater than 0 (C204).
If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203ia is not 0 (C204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203ia is decremented by 1 (C205), and a reserved ball number command is set indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203ia changed by the calculation (C206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S2501) of the main process (see FIG. 655) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it calculates the second special symbol reserved ball number from the reserved ball number command.
The value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203ia is extracted, and the extracted value is stored in the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223ia of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of C206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on, and ... C213.
Then proceed to processing.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203ia (N2
When it is determined that the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 20 is 0 (C204: No),
The value of 3d (the number of times N1 of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special pattern) is obtained (C208).
Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is greater than 0 (C209).

In the process of C209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (C209: No), this process is terminated as it is.
In the process, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (C209: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (C210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (C211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S2501) of the main process (see FIG. 655) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of C211, the data stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of C207 (C2
12), and the process proceeds to C213. In the process of C213 executed after the process of C207 or C212, the special symbol variation start process 10 for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (C213), and this process is terminated. Details of this special symbol variation start process 10 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of C202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (C20
2: Yes), update the change time counter for measuring the change time (C214), and determine whether or not the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed based on the value of the updated change time counter (C215). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (C215: No), update the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 (C216), and end this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C215, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (
C215: Yes), and set the display mode corresponding to the stop pattern of the first pattern display device 37 (
C217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in the special symbol variation start process 10 described later with reference to FIG.
This is performed in advance by (C213). When this special symbol variation start process 10 (C213) is executed, a lottery for a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a jackpot for a special symbol, one of the jackpots A10, B10, and C10 is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this embodiment, if the jackpot A10 is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, if the jackpot B10 is reached, the red LED is turned on, and if the jackpot C10 is reached, the green LED is turned on. If the jackpot is lost, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. The LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

After the process of C217 is completed, when the variable display being executed is started in the first symbol display device 37, it is judged whether the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (the current lottery result) is a special symbol big win (C218). If the current lottery result is a special symbol big win (C218: Yes), the probability variable flag 203g is set to OFF, and the value of the time-saving counter 203m is reset to 0 (C219), and the process proceeds to C224.

On the other hand, in the process of C218, if the result of this lottery is a miss for the special pattern (C218
: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203m is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the time-saving state of the normal pattern is being performed) (C220). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is greater than 0 (C220: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203m is decremented by 1 (C2
On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C220 that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is 0 (C220: No), the process of C221 is skipped and the process is shifted to C222.

In the process of C222, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203m after subtraction is 0 (C222). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is 0 (C222:
The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an external output process (see FIG. 655) of the main process executed by the MPU 201.
S2501), the status command is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the voice and lamp control device 113 acquires the game status contained in the status command.
This allows the state grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 to be matched to the actual state of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C222 that the value of the time-saving counter 203m is not 0 (C222: No), the process of C223 is skipped and the process proceeds to C224.

In the process of C224, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process is terminated. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S2501) of the main process (see FIG. 655) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it sets the stop pattern of the third pattern based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 774, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 774 shows the special symbol variation start process (
This is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213).
This is a process executed within the special pattern change process (see Figure 731), and is a process for drawing lots (determining whether or not a "special pattern jackpot" or a "miss for the special pattern" is determined based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, and for determining the presentation pattern (change pattern) of the change presentation performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c are obtained (C301).

Next, the probability variable flag 203g is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol (C302). In this process of C302, if the probability variable flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state, and if the probability variable flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (not in the first probability variable state). In the process of C302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol (C302: Yes), the result of the lottery as to whether the special symbol is a jackpot or not is obtained based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of C301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability (C303).
Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 612). As described above, 30 random number values from "3 to 32" are set as the random number values for the special symbol jackpot, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches these winning random number values, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Once the lottery result for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to C305.

On the other hand, in the process of C302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a high probability state of the special symbol (is in a low probability state of the special symbol) (C302: No), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of C301 and the first winning random number table for low probability (FIG. 61
Based on the result of the lottery, whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (see FIG. 2) (C304).
Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability.
When the result of the lottery for the special symbol matches "0", it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. After obtaining the lottery result for the special symbol, the process proceeds to C305.

In the process of C305, the fluctuation pattern table to be used this time is identified based on the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202f (C305), and the process proceeds to C306.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of C303 or C304 is a big win of the special symbol (C306). If it is determined that the lottery result is a big win of the special symbol (C306: Yes), the first winning type counter C2 acquired by the process of C301 is counted.
Based on the value of C3, the display mode at the time of the big win is set (C307).
The value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of 01 is compared with the big win type selection table 202ib to determine the big win type.
If the special pattern is selected as a jackpot, the special pattern 1 jackpot type selection table 10 202
ib1 (see FIG. 768), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined to be a big win A10 (10 rounds first probability big win) and "40
If the number is within the range of "1 to 199", it is determined to be a jackpot B10 (5th round first special jackpot).

In this embodiment, even if the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, the same control process as that for the lottery for the first special symbol described above is executed. More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained in the process of C301 is compared with the special symbol 2 big win type selection 10 table 202ib2 (see FIG. 769) to determine what the big win type is. As described above, if the lottery for the second special symbol results in a big win, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is determined to be a big win C10 (10 rounds first probability big win) in all range values of "0 to 199".

In the process of C307, the determined jackpot type (jackpot A10, jackpot B10
The display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the type of big win (Big Win A10, Big Win B10, Big Win C10). Also, in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the big win types on the third symbol display device 81, the big win types (Big Win A10, Big Win B10, Big Win C10) are set as the stop types.

Next, the change pattern at the time of the big win is determined (C308). When the change pattern is set in the process of C308, the change time (display time) of the change performance in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the change time of the third symbol until it stops at the big win symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the change pattern selection 10 table 202id, and the change pattern (change time) corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 is determined.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C306 that the special symbol is not selected (C30
6: No), and sets the display mode at the time of loss (C309). In the process of C309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to be a front/rear loss reach, a front/rear non-loss reach,
Set whether it is completely out of place.

Next, the variation pattern when the winning combination is lost is determined (C310). Here, the first symbol display device 3
The display time of the symbol 7 is set, and the time for which the third symbol is changed until the symbol stops at the losing symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, the RAM 20
The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 3 is compared with the fluctuation pattern selection 10 table 202id, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined.

When the process of C308 or the process of C310 is completed, next, the process of C308 or the process of C31
A variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of C30 is set (C311). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of this variation pattern is set in the variation time counter of the corresponding special chart type (C312).
A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of C307 or C309 is set (C313). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S2501 of the main process (see FIG. 655). When the process of C312 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 773).

Eleventh Embodiment
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 775 to 778.
The first embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in that the transition contents of the game state are changed.

In the above-mentioned third embodiment, the main variation in the normal state and the first probability variation state is the special chart 1 variation, and when a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 variation, the game is characterized by 11 consecutive wins (first win + 10 jackpot wins executed until the first probability variation state ends). Then, after 11 consecutive wins, the second probability variation state is set, and the game is configured to suppress the increase in the number of balls paid out during the period until the probability variation limit ends in the special chart 2 variation, which is the main variation during the second probability variation state.

In other words, when the first special jackpot is won while the normal state is set, the special limit number is set to 40 and the time-saving limit number is set to 10, and a game in which the number of balls dispensed increases is played until the time-saving limit is reached (the period during which the first special state is set), and the increase in balls dispensed is suppressed from the time when the time-saving limit is reached until the special limit is reached (the period during which the second special state is set).

In contrast to this, in the present eleventh embodiment, when the first special jackpot is won while the normal state is set, a special limit of 10 times and a time-saving limit of 40 times are set, and a game in which the number of balls dispensed increases is played until the special limit is reached (the period during which the first special state is set), and the increase in the number of balls dispensed is suppressed from the time the special limit is reached until the time-saving limit is reached (the period during which the time-saving state is set).

In other words, this eleventh embodiment differs from the third embodiment described above in that the game state used when suppressing an increase in the number of balls dispensed is switched from the second special state (high probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) to a time-saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to lower the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery during the period (suppression period) in which the increase in the number of balls is suppressed, compared to the third embodiment described above. Therefore, even if a jackpot game with many rounds (many prize balls) is configured to be executable as the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to suppress the increase in the number of balls during the suppression period, so that a wide variety of games can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment described above, the suppression period could not be ended until the special bonus limit was reached, specifically, until the number of jackpot wins in the special pattern lottery reached 30, whereas in the present eleventh embodiment, the game state can be transitioned from the time-saving state to the normal state by the establishment of the time-saving termination condition other than when the time-saving limit is reached.

Therefore, it is possible for a player who is playing to end the suppression period to simultaneously play a first game aiming to win a jackpot a predetermined number of times and a second game aiming to achieve a time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is achieved when the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot after the time-saving state is set), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, since the first game described above is a game aiming to win a jackpot, and the second game described above is a game not aiming to win a jackpot, regardless of the outcome of the game during the suppression period (the outcome of the special pattern lottery), the game will proceed toward achieving one of the games. This prevents the game during the suppression period from becoming monotonous and the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

<Regarding game state transition in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 775, the transition contents of the game state in this eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 775 is a diagram showing the transition contents of the game state in this eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 775, the transition contents of the game state in this eleventh embodiment are different from the transition contents of the game state in the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 700) in that the value (40) set in the time-saving limit counter 202i is greater than the value (10) set in the time-saving limit counter 203h at the first win (when the jackpot is won in the normal state) so that the game transitions to the time-saving state when the time-saving limit is reached in the first time-saving state, and that the game is executed in which the increase or decrease in the number of balls put out is suppressed in the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state. The details of the same contents will be omitted.

In other words, as described above, the eleventh embodiment is significantly different from the first or third embodiment described above in that the period for managing the amount of balls that can be awarded to a player is switched from a special pattern high probability period in which a high probability state for special patterns is set to a regular pattern high probability period in which a high probability state for regular patterns is set.

By configuring in this way, during the period in which the amount of put-out balls is managed, the same game as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments can be executed during the first period (period during the first probability change state) in which many put-out balls can be awarded, and during the second period (period during the time-saving state) in which the increase or decrease in the put-out balls is suppressed, a low probability state of special symbols can be set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to win a jackpot during the second period in which the increase or decrease in the put-out balls is suppressed.

Furthermore, a plurality of termination conditions can be set as termination conditions for ending the second period, namely, a termination condition that is met when the time-saving limit is reached and a termination condition that is met when the time-saving termination condition (100 special chart fluctuations) is met during the time-saving state. Therefore, a player who wishes to end the second period as quickly as possible can play either a game aiming to win a jackpot or a game not aiming to win a jackpot.

<Electrical Configuration of Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 776 to 778. In the tenth embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment, the main control device 110
2 in that the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the memory 202 is partially changed, but otherwise the configuration is the same.
The same components are designated by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment in that it stores a first winning type selection table 202b.
In place of the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) prescribed in the above, the special chart 1 big win type selection 11 table 202jb1 is used, and in place of the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2, the special chart 2 big win type selection 11 table 202jb2 is used. In place of the time-saving grant table 202e (see FIG. 617), the time-saving grant 11 table 20
The difference is that 2je is used, and other than that, they are the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, referring to FIG. 776, the contents stipulated in the special chart 1 big win type selection 11 table 202jb1 will be explained. FIG. 776 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 big win type selection 11 table 202jb1. As shown in FIG. 776, the special chart 1 big win type selection 11 table 202jb1 is different from the special chart 1 big win type selection table 202b1 (see FIG. 613 (b)) in the first embodiment described above in that the big win type set when the big win is won in the first special pattern lottery is changed.

Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", a "jackpot A11 (10R jackpot)" is defined, and when the value is in the range of "50 to 199", a "jackpot B11 (5R jackpot)" is defined.

And, in either case of the jackpot type being "jackpot A11" or "jackpot B11",
If the game state (game state at the time of winning) at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot) is "normal state, first probability variable state", the "first probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and if the game state at the time of winning is "normal state, other than the first probability variable state (time-saving state, second probability variable state)", the "second probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends. Also, after the first win (when neither the probability variable limit number nor the time-saving limit number is set), the limit number that is set is "jackpot A11".
In either case of "Big Win B11", at the end of the big win game, the probability change limit number is set to "10" and the time-saving limit number is set to "40".

Next, referring to FIG. 777, the contents stipulated in the special chart 2 big win type selection 10 table 202jb2 will be explained. FIG. 777 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 big win type selection 10 table 202jb2. As shown in FIG. 777, the special chart 2 big win type selection 10 table 202jb2 is different from the special chart 2 big win type selection table 202b2 (see FIG. 613 (c)) in the first embodiment described above in that the big win type set when the big win is won in the second special pattern lottery is changed.

Specifically, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 197", a "jackpot C11 (2R jackpot)" is defined, and when the value is in the range of "198, 199", a "jackpot D11 (2R jackpot)" is defined.

And, the jackpot type "jackpot C11" is the game state at the time of winning (at the time of winning the jackpot) (
When the game state at the time of winning is the "normal state", the "second probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the time of winning is "other than the normal state (time-saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state)", the "time-saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, for the jackpot type "jackpot D11", when the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won) is the "normal state", the "second probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the time of winning is "other than the normal state (time-saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state)", the "first probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends. Regardless of the game state at the time of winning (when the jackpot is won) (game state at the time of winning), the "first probability variable state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, for both "Big Win C11" and "Big Win D11", the limit number of times set after the first win (when neither the probability limit number of times nor the time-saving limit number of times are set) is,
At the end of the big win game, the probability change limit number is set to "10" and the time reduction limit number is set to "40".

Next, the contents defined in the time-saving provision 11 table 202je will be described with reference to Fig. 778. Fig. 778 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving provision 11 table 202je.

Specifically, for the jackpot types "jackpot A11" and "jackpot B11", if the game state at the time of winning is "normal state, first probability variable state", the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u
When both the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to off, the number of times to be given for the time-saving is set to "65535 (effectively until the next time)", and otherwise the number of times to be given for the time-saving is set to "0". Also, when the game state at the time of winning is "time-saving state, second probability variable state", it is not a jackpot in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game, so the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 20
Regardless of the 3V setting, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is set to "0".

When the game state at the time of winning is "normal state", the jackpot type "jackpot C11" is not a jackpot in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends, so regardless of the setting status of the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v, the number of time-saving times to be awarded is set to "0". Also, when the game state at the time of winning is "time-saving state, first probability variable state, second probability variable state", the probability variable limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to "0".
When both the time-saving limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to off, the number of times the time-saving has been awarded is set to "100", and in other cases the number of times the time-saving has been awarded is set to "0".

When the game state at the time of winning is "normal state", the jackpot type "jackpot D11" is not a jackpot in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends, so the number of time-saving times is set to "0" regardless of the setting status of the probability-changing limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v. Also, when the game state at the time of winning is "time-saving state, first probability-changing state, second probability-changing state", the probability-changing limit reaching flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to "0".
When both the flag 203u and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v are set to off, or when the flag 203u is set to on and the time-saving limit reaching flag 203v is off, the number of times to be shortened is set to "65535 (effectively until the next time)", and in other cases the number of times to be shortened is set to "0".

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, the first state is set in the normal state.
If you win the special jackpot, the special limit is set to 10 times and the time limit is set to 40 times.
Until the probability variable limit is reached (the period during which the first probability variable state is set), a game in which the number of balls dispensed increases is played, and from the time when the probability variable limit is reached until the time-saving limit is reached (the period during which the time-saving state is set), the increase in the number of balls dispensed is suppressed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to lower the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery during the period when the increase in the balls is suppressed (suppression period). Therefore, even if a jackpot game with many rounds (many prize balls) is configured to be executable as the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to suppress the increase in the balls during the suppression period, so that a wide variety of games can be provided to the player.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, in addition to when the time-saving limit is reached, the game state can be transitioned from the time-saving state to the normal state by the satisfaction of a time-saving end condition.

Therefore, it is possible for a player who is playing to end the suppression period to simultaneously play a first game aiming to win a jackpot a predetermined number of times and a second game aiming to achieve a time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is achieved when the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot after the time-saving state is set), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, since the first game described above is a game aiming to win a jackpot, and the second game described above is a game not aiming to win a jackpot, regardless of the outcome of the game during the suppression period (the outcome of the special pattern lottery), the game will proceed toward achieving one of the games. This prevents the game during the suppression period from becoming monotonous and the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

As described above, the various technical ideas used in the pachinko machine 10 in the first to eleventh embodiments described above with reference to Figs. 581 to 778 may be used in other technologies. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, after the first special probability state in which it is relatively easy to increase the number of balls (output balls) held by the player ends (after the time-saving limit is reached), in order to continue the second special probability state in which it is relatively difficult to increase the number of balls (output balls) held by the player compared to the first special probability state, for a predetermined period of time, the number of jackpot wins (jackpot wins) during the second special probability state is set. The second probability variation state is configured to continue until the number of times that a game is executed (the number of times that a game is executed per turn) reaches a predetermined number, but in this way, it is sufficient that after a favorable game state that is favorable to the player ends, an unfavorable game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the favorable game state is set for a predetermined period of time. For example, during a jackpot game, a configuration may be used in which, after a favorable game state that is favorable to the player (a round game period in which prize balls can be obtained) ends, an unfavorable game state that is disadvantageous to the player (an ending period in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls) is set for a predetermined period of time.

In this case, the length of the disadvantageous game state may be varied depending on the length of the period during which the advantageous game state advantageous to the player continues (the number of rounds played as a jackpot game). For example, when an advantageous jackpot game in which a long advantageous game state is set (e.g., a 10R jackpot) is played, an disadvantageous game state of a different length may be set for each jackpot game so that the disadvantageous game state is longer than when an disadvantageous jackpot game (e.g., a 2R jackpot game) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous game state is played. For example, when a 10R jackpot game is played, an disadvantageous game state (ending period) of 10 seconds may be set, and when a 2R jackpot game is played, an disadvantageous game state (ending period) of 2 seconds may be set.

Also, rather than predetermining the length of the ending period according to the type of each jackpot game, the length of the disadvantageous game state (ending period) may be varied depending on whether or not other conditions are met. For example, the length of the ending period set for the jackpot game to be executed may be varied based on the number of jackpot games executed (number of consecutive wins) during a period in which a specific game state (high probability state for normal patterns or high probability state for special patterns) is set consecutively, or the number of balls won.

In this case, for example, even if the same jackpot game is executed, by setting a longer ending period for the jackpot game of a specific number of consecutive wins (for example, the 15th consecutive win) than the others, it is possible to execute a special ending performance using a longer period as the performance executed during the ending period.

In the above example, the ending period is shown as an unfavorable gaming state during a jackpot game, but this is not limited to this. Similarly to the ending period, a period during which it is difficult to obtain prize balls (a period other than during a round game) even during a jackpot game may be set as an unfavorable gaming state, and the length of this period may be varied.

In addition, the gaming state that is advantageous to the player may be other than a state in which it is easy to award prize balls to the player, and may be, for example, a state in which it is relatively easy to execute a special pattern lottery or a normal pattern lottery, a state in which it is relatively easy to win a jackpot in a special pattern lottery or a normal pattern lottery, or a state in which it is relatively easy to execute a less frequently executed effect (such as a video).

In the fourth and sixth embodiments described above, the game state set after the end of the big win game is determined according to the game content executed during the big win game.
By configuring the game contents during the big win game to be selectable by the player, the game state to be set after the big win game is over can be selected by the player at will. And, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute either a first game in which the execution condition is unlikely to be satisfied but a bonus is likely to be awarded when executed, or a second game in which the execution condition is likely to be satisfied but a bonus is unlikely to be awarded when executed, depending on the result of the player's selection (game contents).

In this way, the technical idea of configuring the game to be executed later so that the player can select it may be diverted to other technologies. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, when a game (V winning game) is executed during a jackpot game executed based on winning a jackpot in the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the second probability variable state (a game state in which it is easy to win a jackpot, but the first probability variable state is difficult to set after the jackpot game ends) is set, and when another game (non-V winning game) different from the game 1 is executed during the jackpot game, a normal state in which a special state (special mode) is set may be set. In other words, it is sufficient to configure the game state in which the first probability state is likely to be set after the jackpot game ends based on the execution of another game (non-V winning game) during the jackpot game, when the special symbol is in a low probability state and a jackpot is won, is set.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to set a normal state in which a special state (special mode) in which the second special pattern lottery in which the first probability variable state is likely to be set after the end of the jackpot game can be frequently executed (more often than in the normal state) by executing a non-V winning game during the jackpot game, thereby providing the player with the fun of selecting a non-V winning game.

Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that by executing a non-V winning game during a jackpot game, a normal normal state can be set, or a normal state of a special state can be set. For example, when a jackpot game with a specific jackpot type (jackpot type 1) set is executed, a non-V winning game can be executed to set a normal state of a special state (special mode) after the jackpot game ends, and when a jackpot game with a jackpot type other than the specific jackpot type (jackpot type 2) is executed, a non-V winning game can be executed to set a normal normal state after the jackpot game ends. Regardless of the jackpot type, it is preferable to configure the system so that a first special state can be set by executing a V winning game.

In other words, it is preferable to configure the game so that it is more advantageous to play a V-winning game or more advantageous to play a non-V-winning game depending on the type of big win that has been set.
A selection result of whether to execute a winning game (game selection result), a set jackpot type,
Since the selection result advantageous to the player can be varied depending on the type of game, the player can be made interested in the game content selected by himself/herself.

In this case, by configuring the jackpot game with the same content to be executed for the above-mentioned jackpot type 1 and jackpot type 2, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which jackpot type has been set even if the jackpot game content is understood, and therefore the player can be made to select the game content more carefully. On the other hand, if a configuration is made such that a jackpot game with different content is executed at least in some of the cases where jackpot type 1 is set and where jackpot type 2 is set, it is possible to make the player predict the jackpot type that has been set based on the content of the jackpot game to be executed. Therefore, a player who is trying to select an advantageous playing method during a jackpot game can be made to pay attention to the content of the jackpot game being executed.

In addition, the jackpot game content referred to here is a concept that includes not only the actual content of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds and the type of variable winning device that is opened), but also the content of various presentations executed during the jackpot game.

In the first embodiment described above, the end condition of the second period is set to be established when a specific game (jackpot game) is executed a predetermined number of times, so that the period during which the second period (unfavorable game state (first special probability state)) continues after the end of the first period (advantageous game state (first special probability state)) becomes a specific period. However, as another configuration, the length of the second period may be set in advance, and the game content may be controlled so that the specific game (jackpot game) is executed a maximum of a predetermined number of times within that period.

In this case, for example, the upper limit of the number of jackpot games executed during the second period is set to three, and
If the length of the period is set to 30 minutes, the remaining time of the second period and the number of executed jackpot games can be determined, and the variation time of the special symbol variation can be determined based on the result of the determination. For example, from the time the second period is set until the first jackpot game is executed, the first time (e.g., 5 seconds) is likely to be set as the variation time of the special symbol variation, and if the first jackpot game is executed between the time the second period is set and 10 minutes have passed, the variation time of the special symbol variation can be set to 10 seconds between the time the first jackpot game ends and 10 minutes have passed since the second period was set.
It is preferable to configure the second time (e.g., 3 minutes) longer than the first time as the time for special pattern variation, and thereafter, the length of the time for special pattern variation can be determined based on the remaining time of the second period and the number of jackpot games already played, thereby limiting the number of jackpot games in the remaining time of the second period.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a limit on the number of jackpot games executed during the second period for the length of the second period that is determined in advance. In this case, if it is determined that the maximum number of jackpot games have been executed before the end of the second period, it is possible to configure it so that the special pattern variation can be executed with a variation time longer than the remaining time until the second period has elapsed, or to configure it so that a special lottery (invalid lottery) in which a jackpot cannot be won by the special pattern lottery can be executed. This makes it possible to prevent more jackpot games than the maximum number of times from being executed during the second period.

In addition, if a jackpot game has not been played despite the second period having elapsed for a predetermined period, it is preferable to configure the third time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) shorter than the first time as the variation time for the special symbol variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries to be performed during the remaining time of the second period more easily than when the first time is set, and as a result, it is possible to make it easier to play a jackpot game during the second period.
This makes it possible to prevent a player from being subjected to excessively disadvantageous play.

In the above example, the period during which the first special probability state is set is described as the first period, and the period during which the second special probability state is set after the first period has elapsed is described as the second period; however, other periods may also be defined as the first period and the second period, and for example, the period during which a jackpot game is being played may be set as the first period, and the period during which a special pattern lottery can be performed after the end of the jackpot game may be set as the second period.

Even in such a case, by setting an unfavorable gaming state (a state in which a jackpot gaming state is not being executed) for a predetermined period (second period) after a favorable gaming state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player has ended, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the technical idea described in the first embodiment above, that is, to prevent the favorable gaming state from being executed excessively frequently.

In addition, the advantageous game state and the disadvantageous game state described above may be applied to various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10. For example, after the first effect that is advantageous to the player is executed for the upper limit period,
The period during which the first effect is not executed and a second effect different from the first effect is executed may be set to a predetermined period or more. Even in this configuration, the period during which the first effect is not executed for the player can be set to a predetermined period or more, so that the first effect can be prevented from being executed excessively frequently.

Specifically, for example, it is preferable to configure the system so that a first effect (for example, a premium effect for congratulating the player or an effect suggesting a set value) that is advantageous to the player can be executed every time the number of times the jackpot has been won in a short period of time (number of consecutive wins) becomes a multiple of 5. In other words, when multiple jackpots have been won in a short period of time, after the first effect is executed, a second effect different from the first effect can be executed until the number of consecutive wins increases by 5. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being executed too frequently.

In addition, for example, after the first performance that can enhance the performance effect is executed, a period (second period) during which the first performance is difficult to execute may be continued for a predetermined period. In this case, the definition of the predetermined period may be the period until the special pattern variation is executed a predetermined number of times, the period until a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the period until a specific performance mode is set as a variation performance to show the result of the special pattern lottery, or the period until a predetermined time has elapsed. By configuring in this way,
It is possible to prevent the first performance from being executed too frequently.

In the second embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 692 to FIG. 696, based on the number of special symbol variations executed after the second variable probability state is set, the type of the variation pattern group to be referred to when determining the variation time is different as a variation pattern group in which a plurality of variation patterns are specified, and by configuring it so that it is possible to determine a variation time of different lengths, the frequency of execution of the small win game is made different based on the number of special symbol variations, and the transition of the balls in the second variable probability state is intentionally made to move up and down, but other configurations may be used, for example, the variation pattern group to be referred to when determining the variation time may be made different based on the number of times the second variable probability state is set continuously, or a cumulative measurement means capable of measuring the number of special symbol variations since the second variable probability state is first set across big win games during the period in which the second variable probability state is set continuously may be provided, and the variation pattern group to be referred to when determining the variation time may be made different based on the measurement result of the cumulative measurement means, or the variation pattern group to be referred to when determining the variation time may be made different based on the remaining number of times of the variable probability limit (remaining number of times of the variable probability limit).

In addition, during the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set (special symbol high probability period), the longer the period in which the second probability variable state is set, the more likely it is that the special symbol fluctuation pattern will be determined by referring to a group of fluctuation patterns in which a short fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected from among the multiple fluctuation pattern groups. By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, continues for a long time during the special symbol high probability period, excessive play disadvantageous to the player is executed, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this case, when it is determined (when the possibility of this becoming high) that the number of times that the first probability variable state can be set during the special pattern high probability period is a predetermined number or less (for example, 10 times or less), it is preferable to configure it so that the variation pattern of the special pattern variation can be determined by referring to a variation pattern group in which a short variation pattern is likely to be selected from among a plurality of variation pattern groups. By configuring in this way, when the second probability variable state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, continues for a long time during the special pattern high probability period, it is possible to suppress the excessive execution of a game disadvantageous to the player, which reduces the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in the second embodiment described above, in order to create fluctuations in the increase and decrease (up and down range) of the balls dispensed during the second special state, a different fluctuation time fluctuation pattern can be determined depending on the conditions that are met, but other configurations may be used to achieve the same purpose, and for example, the fluctuation pattern of the normal pattern fluctuation may be changed depending on the conditions that are met, or the game content of the small win game may be changed.

Furthermore, the technical idea used in the second embodiment described above, i.e., the technical idea of varying the frequency of execution of a specific game (small win game) during a specific game period (during the second special probability state), may be used for another purpose, for example, it may be configured to vary the frequency of execution of a specific game (specific presentation) during a specific game period (during a continuous presentation period using multiple special pattern variation periods).

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment described above, when a special symbol lottery is executed, a process is executed in which the background mode is selected regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be used in which a period is set in which the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process (see S5251 in FIG. 733), which is a process for selecting a background mode, is not executed depending on the type of previous jackpot. In this case, the "normal background" is set regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery or the overlap period of the remaining number of times for the special variable limit and the remaining number of times for the time-saving limit. By configuring in this way, for example, even if the overlap period is "SP" when a jackpot is won, the background mode is set to "
For a player who continues playing predicting that it is at least not "SP" because the background remains "normal" and does not change to "heaven background" or "lucky background," when a special low-probability non-time-saving state in which the second special symbol mainly changes based on the simultaneous reaching of both limits is set, the player is put into a pleasant situation that he or she did not expect, and the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In addition, the condition for setting the period during which the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process (see S5251 in FIG. 733) is not executed is not limited to the previous big win type, and a configuration may be made in which a performance is executed during a big win game in which the player is made to select either a "mode with background mode change" or a "mode without background mode change" by operating the frame button 22. By configuring in this way, both players can enjoy the game they desire, namely, a player who wants to enjoy predicting the result of the special symbol lottery and the game state to be set from game information such as the background mode, and a player who wants to enjoy the game until the end when the game result (for example, the result of the special symbol lottery and the duration of the first probability change state) is notified without predicting from game information.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed since the end of the previous big win game has been a predetermined number (for example, 1
00), the limit remaining number suggestion mode determination process (S525 in FIG. 733) is performed.
A period during which the process of determining the remaining limit indication mode (see S5251 in FIG. 733) is not executed may be set, or a period during which the process of determining the remaining limit indication mode (see S5251 in FIG. 733) is not executed may be set based on the number of times that the small jackpot has been won reaching a predetermined number of times.

In the seventh embodiment described above with reference to Figures 739 to 750, and in the eighth and ninth embodiments described above, a pachinko machine 10 having a function of executing special rate limit processing and a function of executing time-saving limit processing is used as an example, and the characteristic technical ideas of each embodiment are explained. However, a pachinko machine 10 that does not have a function of executing special rate limit processing may also be used as a pachinko machine 10 having the characteristic technical ideas of each of the above-mentioned embodiments.

For example, for the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot, there is a jackpot type (favorable jackpot type) that can set a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and a jackpot type (unfavorable jackpot type) that can set a low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends.
and when a high probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game, the high probability state of the special pattern is continued until the next jackpot is won, no upper limit is set to the number of times the high probability state of the special pattern is consecutively set, and a low probability state of the special pattern is set based on the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won.

More specifically, the probability of winning when the special symbol has a low probability of occurring is set to 1/2.
00, and the probability of winning when the high probability state of the special pattern is set is 1/199.
That is, the difference in the probability of winning caused by the switching of the probability state of the special symbol is configured to be difficult for the player to feel, and when the time-saving limit is reached in the state in which the first probability variable state is set, the state is transitioned to the second probability variable state, so that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is configured to be easier to determine as a variation time that is shorter than when the first probability state is set, as in the seventh embodiment described above.

By configuring it in this way, when the first probability variable state is set a predetermined number of times in succession during the special pattern high probability period in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set continuously (when the time-saving limit is reached), the second probability variable state in which a long fluctuation time is likely to be set as the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation can be forcibly set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of executions of the jackpot game per unit time during the special pattern high probability period increases excessively.

Furthermore, in the above example, it is preferable to configure the high probability state of the normal symbol to be set after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the type of jackpot. By configuring it in this way, if the second probability state is set due to reaching the time-saving limit, and a jackpot is won again, the first probability state will be set and a new time-saving limit number of times will be set. Therefore, it is possible to specify the special symbol variation time executed during the special symbol high probability period based on the number of jackpot games executed during the special symbol high probability period,
It is possible to prevent a game during the special chart high probability period from becoming an excessively advantageous or disadvantageous game to a player.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment described above with reference to Figs. 739 to 750, and the eighth and ninth embodiments described above, a pachinko machine 10 having a characteristic technical idea using a function for executing a time-saving limit process has been described. However, the characteristic technical idea in each embodiment may be used for another purpose. For example, as in the seventh embodiment described above, a pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be able to update a plurality of pieces of update information (time-saving limit counts) in a redundant manner, and when one of the pieces of update information is updated to specific information (information indicating that the remaining number of the time-saving limit is 0), a specific game (a game in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set) is executed. It may also be used in a technology for determining the type of presentation to be executed on the machine 10. For example, first update information indicating the remaining period until a first specific timing arrives within a specific presentation period (e.g., information indicating the remaining time of a countdown presentation) and second update information indicating the remaining period until a second specific timing arrives within a specific presentation period (e.g., information indicating the remaining time of a timer preview presentation) may be configured to be updatable, and when either one of the update information is updated to specific information (e.g., information indicating that the remaining time is 0), a specific game (a specific presentation executed at a specific timing (such as a cut-in preview)) may be configured to be executable.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned effects are executed as continuous effects having an effect period spanning a period during which a plurality of special pattern lotteries are executed, a means for measuring the remaining number of special pattern lotteries to be executed during the effect period (a means for measuring the remaining number of special pattern lotteries until a special pattern lottery in which the effect result of the continuous effect is displayed is executed) may be provided, and the update contents of each update information may be configured to differ based on the remaining number measured by that means. For example, when there are remaining number of times (a state in which a special pattern lottery in which the effect result of the continuous effect is executed has not been executed), an effect may be executed in which the update results of the first update information and the second update information described above are not notified to the player (the update results are notified in an unintelligible manner), and when there are no remaining number of times (a state in which a special pattern lottery in which the effect result of the continuous effect is executed is executed), an effect may be executed in which the update results of the first update information and the second update information described above are notified to the player.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment described above with reference to Figs. 739 to 750, and the eighth and ninth embodiments described above, a configuration is used in which the time-saving state is terminated when (any of) the time-saving limits is reached, or when the special pattern variation is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) while the time-saving state is set (the time-saving termination condition is established). However, as the time-saving termination condition,
A different time-saving end condition may be set, for example, the probability of winning a small prize in the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state may be set to 1/20, and the time-saving end condition may be established when the number of small prize games executed during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times). Furthermore, the small prize game content and at least a part of the big prize game content executed when a big prize is won are configured to be similar game content (for example, game content that opens the same variable winning device twice). Furthermore, when a winning game (small prize game, part of a big prize game) in which similar game content is executed is executed, a winning game performance in which the performance mode of the same position is set can be executed.

By configuring in this way, when the above-mentioned winning game presentation is executed, it is possible to inform the player in the time-saving state that one of the winning games has been executed while making it difficult for the player to know whether a big win game or a small win game has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the remaining number of the time-saving limit (the number of big wins) has been updated or whether the element for establishing the time-saving end condition (the number of small wins) has been updated by the winning game executed this time, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the time-saving state will end, and it is possible to keep the player interested in the progress of the game after that.

In addition, the elements for establishing the time-saving end condition are reset once a jackpot is won (because a new time-saving end condition is set for the time-saving state that was set after the jackpot game ended), so depending on the order in which the small jackpot game and the jackpot game are played, it is possible to run the time-saving state for longer than the player expects.

In this case, as in the example of the seventh embodiment described above, a gauge display may be executed which indicates the period until the time-saving limit is reached, and on the other hand a gauge display may be executed which indicates the period until the currently set time-saving state ends (the remaining number of times until the time-saving end condition is met (remaining number of small wins, remaining number of special pattern changes, etc.)); or, as in the example of the eighth embodiment described above, a gauge display may be executed which indicates only the period until the currently set time-saving state ends, and if a jackpot is won, a performance may be executed in which the gauge display is reset to its initial state.

In the first embodiment described above, during a big win game, the first game information display area Dm4 (FIG. 588
In the first game information display area Dm3 (see FIG. 590), the number of balls that the player can win and the number of balls that have already been won are notified during the period in which the first probability variable period can be set, and the number of 10R jackpots that the player can win and the number of 10R jackpots that have already been won are notified during the period in which the first probability variable state can be set, but this is not limited to this. For example, during a jackpot game based on a jackpot that has reached the time-saving limit (in the embodiment, the number of 10R jackpots is notified), the number of balls that the player can win and the number of 10R jackpots that have already been won are notified.
During the 0th consecutive win game), a presentation mode congratulating the player may be displayed based on the fact that the number of balls the player has won from when the first probability variable state was set until the time-saving limit was reached has reached the number of balls the player can win (12,500 balls in this embodiment) displayed in the first game information display area Dm4. Alternatively, a presentation mode congratulating the player may be displayed in the final round of the 10th consecutive win game (the 10th round in this embodiment). By configuring in this way, a sense of accomplishment can be given to the player.

Alternatively, if the number of balls that the player has won from the first probability change state being set until the time-saving limit is reached in the final round of the 10th consecutive win is greater than the number of balls that the player can win as displayed in the first game information display area Dm4, a special presentation mode (for example, a premium image) may be displayed during the ending period of the big win game. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play in order to win more balls.

In addition, for example, if the first probability variable state reaches the time-saving limit and then the first probability variable jackpot is won in the second probability variable state, that is, if the second probability variable jackpot is won before the probability variable limit is reached,
When the probability of a special state is set, the sum of the number of balls acquired during the period in which the previous first probability of a special state was set and the number of balls acquired during the period in which the current first probability of a special state was set is a predetermined number of balls (for example, 2
When the total number of balls reaches 10,000,000, the background of the "Super RUSH Mode" (Figure 590) may be changed to a special background.

Alternatively, the display mode displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game that reaches the probability variable limit may be changed according to the number of balls that the player has won from when the probability variable limit is set until the probability variable limit is reached and the number of 10R jackpot games that have been played. For example, if 10 10R jackpot games have been played and the number of balls that have been won is 12,500 before the probability variable limit is reached, the comment "End" may be displayed, but if 20 10R jackpot games have been played and the number of balls that have been won is 25,000 before the probability variable limit is reached, the comment "Well done!" may be displayed.

Furthermore, if 20 10R jackpot games are played before the probability limit is reached and the number of balls won is more than 25,000 (for example, 27,000), that is, 20 10R jackpot games are played.
If the number of balls that the player has won is greater than the number of balls that the player could have won if a jackpot game had been played, a comment such as "What a great day!" may be displayed.

By configuring it in this way, a player who has won the first special jackpot multiple times during one advantageous period (the period from when a high probability state of the special pattern is set to when a low probability state of the special pattern is set) can be given a sense of accomplishment by having won multiple times a jackpot type selected with an extremely low probability, and can be made to feel a sense of superiority.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is executed in which a comment "It's the halfway point!" is displayed in the fifth round of the fifth 10R jackpot game after the transition to the "Super RUSH mode" (Fig. 590). In other words, the "Super RUSH mode" (Fig. 590) is a period during which ten 10R jackpot games can be played, and the fifth round of the fifth jackpot game is exactly the halfway point, so that the comment "It's the halfway point!" is displayed to inform the player that it is the halfway point of the "Super RUSH mode" (Fig. 590).

By configuring it in this way, the player can play in the "Super RUSH mode" (Fig. 590).
The "Super RUSH Mode" is calculated based on the time elapsed from when the game is switched to the "Super RUSH Mode" (Fig. 590) until the comment "It's halfway through!" is displayed.
This makes it easier for the player to predict the approximate time required until (Figure 590) is completed.

In addition, when the number of times remaining in the probability change limit is 5, if the 35th 10R jackpot game is won, the background of the "RUSH mode" (Fig. 597) may be changed (for example, a gold background). In order to win the 35th 10R jackpot game when the number of times remaining in the probability change limit is 5, the first probability change jackpot is won on the first hit (a jackpot win in a low probability non-time-saving state), and the second probability change state is set based on the time-saving limit being reached in the first probability change state, the first probability change jackpot is won on the next jackpot, and the first probability change state is set again,
Based on the fact that the time-saving limit is reached in the first probability variation state, a second probability variation state is set,
You must win the first jackpot on the next jackpot. In other words, you must win the first jackpot three times from the first jackpot.
If all of the first five jackpots are first-time jackpots (including 2R and 10R jackpots) and there are five jackpots remaining in the jackpot limit, a 35th 10R jackpot can be won.

In this way, by displaying the background of the "RUSH mode" (Fig. 597) in the case where the number of remaining turns in the special probability mode limit is 5 and a 10R jackpot game is won for the 35th time, rather than simply displaying the "RUSH mode" (Fig. 597) in the case where a 10R jackpot is won when the number of remaining turns in the special probability mode limit is 5 in the first special probability mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment that he or she has achieved an extremely difficult condition.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol lottery of 1 during the first probability change state is a 10R jackpot, and the result of the first second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the 10R jackpot game is 10R
If a jackpot is won, that is, if the result of the second special pattern lottery is a 10R jackpot twice in a row, a special presentation may be executed in the first round of the second 10R jackpot game.

Seventeenth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventeenth embodiment will be described. Fig. 779 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, Fig. 780 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 781 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Fig. 779, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed into substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 779) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 780) having a number of nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc., is detachably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 784) that launches balls to the front area of the game board 13, a launching rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like.

A front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface of the inner frame 12 and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided on the front side of the inner frame 12.
(See Figure 779) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side.
The front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close toward the front, with the side on which the lock is provided as the axis of opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top and extends forward, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward incline to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 779), and this incline guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 can be, for example, connected to a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 78) described later.
It is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the display (see FIG. 10) or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The stage is a presentation mode that provides uniformity to the various presentations displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the present pachinko machine 10 has three stages: a "town stage", a "sky stage", and an "island stage".
Various effects such as the change effect and reach effect that are performed when the ball enters the ball entrance 64b (initial winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the change effect is not being performed or during a high-speed change. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is changed from "town stage" to
The stage will repeatedly change in the following order: "sky stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" → ... Also, immediately after turning on the power, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured so that when a normal reach presentation is started, and the normal reach is to be developed into a super reach, a selection screen for the presentation mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach, and when the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the presentation content during the super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by turning on or off depending on the change in the game state such as when a big win occurs or when a certain reach occurs, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-3 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs.
In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or reach performance is reached, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 lights up or flashes by lighting or flashing the built-in LEDs to notify the player that a big win is occurring or that the player is in a reach just before the big win.
79) An indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left corner, which incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination part 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the attachment space K1 (FIG. 78) on the front of the game board 13 is
The stamps and the like affixed to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 10) are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.
In the pachinko machine 10, in order to create a more brilliant appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area surrounding the illumination parts 29 to 33.

A ball loan operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball loan operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball loan button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of ball lending unit 40, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispenser to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., a so-called cash machine, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 in the center thereof, which is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top, for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
On the right side of the ball launcher 110, there is provided an operating handle 51 operated by the player to launch the ball into the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51, there are built-in a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a push-button type shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball while the switch is pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance.
When the player rotates the control handle 51 clockwise, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation, and the ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance of the variable resistor, which changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the control handle 51. This causes the ball to be shot into the front of the game board 13 with a distance corresponding to the operation of the player. Also, when the control handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 5
1b is off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50, which is operated to eject the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are ejected. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is usually performed by placing a box (
The operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Fig. 780, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails, windmills and rails 61, 62 for guiding balls, a general winning opening 63, a first ball opening 64a, a second ball opening 64b, a variable winning device 65, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a wooden base board 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball opening 64a, the second ball opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are,
The game board 13 is mounted in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. The front center part of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window part 14c (see Fig. 779) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to Fig. 780.

On the front surface of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is installed in the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Fig. 779) surround the front and rear, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played according to the behavior of the ball. The game area is a substantially circular area (an area where winning holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) defined in front of the game board 13 by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 783) to the upper part of the game board 13.
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left of the outer rail 6 (FIG. 780), which prevents the ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage.
At the tip of the ball 2 (upper right part of FIG. 780), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball.
When a ball is shot with a force greater than a predetermined value, it hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is attenuated.
Between the upper right tip ends of the rails 2 and 3, a resin arc member 70 is formed with an arc on its inner surface connecting the rails, and is fixed by being driven into the base plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, and a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is held when a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67. In the lottery for a special symbol held for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, a judgment is made as to whether or not a jackpot for the special symbol has been won, and if a jackpot for the special symbol has been decided, the type of jackpot is also judged.
When a special symbol is hit, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special game state, and the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won), and this opening is repeated multiple times. As a result, a large number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, and a larger number of prize balls are paid out than in normal times.
There are four types of jackpots for special symbols, "jackpot A" to "jackpot D", and after the special game state ends, a game value (game value) corresponding to the jackpot type is awarded to the player as added value after the jackpot ends. Details will be described later, but for example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the game value is awarded in the form of a continuation of the time-saving state of the normal symbols until 100 special symbol lotteries are performed after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the game value is awarded in the form of a transition to a high probability state of the special symbols after the jackpot ends.

In addition, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 4 to 30 seconds) has elapsed,
A special symbol showing the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying a variable display, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished by the first symbol display device 37, if there are still reserved balls remaining for the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. The specific winning hole 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the special game state, is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64a. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball to make it enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that many balls also enter the first ball entrance 64a. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64a will be at its maximum (four times).

On the other hand, in the lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed for the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67, a win or loss judgment is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning combination. When the normal symbol is a winning combination, the electric device attached to the second ball entrance 64b is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 64b. In other words, when the normal symbol is a winning combination, the ball is easier to enter the second ball entrance 64b, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is easier to be performed.

In addition, when the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the second symbol display device 83 starts to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has passed,
The normal symbol showing the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of times the ball passes through is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reserved lamp 8
4. When the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, if there are any reserved balls remaining for the normal ball entrance 67, the next normal symbol is drawn and
The display will begin to change according to the lottery.

As mentioned above, the special jackpot types are "jackpot A" to "jackpot D".
There are four types:

When a "normal jackpot" occurs, the game enters a special game state with 16 rounds (16-round jackpot), but no added value is added after the jackpot ends. In other words, after the jackpot ends, the game transitions to a low probability state of special symbols, and does not transition to a "normal symbol time-saving state" (during normal symbol time-saving).

When the "Big Win A (Time-saving Big Win)" occurs, the game enters a special game state with 8 rounds (
8 rounds of jackpot), and then, as an added value after the jackpot ends, it transitions to a "normal symbol time-saving state" (during normal symbol time-saving). Specifically, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases from the end of the jackpot until 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed. Note that, in this embodiment, the period during which the normal symbol time-saving state continues is determined by the number of special symbol lotteries, but it may also be determined by, for example, the number of times the special symbol variation ends.

In addition, when the "jackpot B (high probability jackpot)", "jackpot C (latent high probability jackpot)", or "jackpot D (rare latent high probability jackpot)" is won, the game enters a special game state with 8 rounds (8-round jackpot), and then, as an added value after the jackpot ends, the game moves to a "high probability state of special symbols". In addition, when the "jackpot B (high probability jackpot)" is won, the player is notified that the game has moved to a "high probability state of special symbols", but this is not done for the "jackpot C (latent high probability jackpot)" or "jackpot D (rare latent high probability jackpot)". Therefore, even if the game does not notify the player that the game has moved to a "high probability state of special symbols", the player can expect that the "jackpot C (latent high probability jackpot)" or "jackpot D (rare latent high probability jackpot)" has been won. In other words, the player can expect that the game has entered a "high probability state of special symbols".

Furthermore, if the "jackpot C (latent probability variable jackpot)" is won, the contents of the variable presentation selected when the jackpot is announced and the display contents of the variable pattern presentation selected when the special symbol miss is announced after the jackpot has ended will be the same as those of the "jackpot A (time-saving jackpot)". In other words, it is configured so that it is difficult to tell whether the "jackpot A (time-saving jackpot)" or the "jackpot C (latent probability variable jackpot)" has been won.
On the other hand, when "jackpot D (rare latent probability variable jackpot)" is won, when the jackpot is announced or when the special symbol is notified after the jackpot is ended, the variable pattern presentation with a high expectation is more likely to be selected than when "jackpot A (time-saving jackpot)" or "jackpot B (latent probability variable jackpot)" is won. Therefore, even if the transition to the "high probability state of special symbols" is not announced, the variable pattern presentation with a high expectation is selected, so that the player can expect to win "jackpot D (rare latent probability variable jackpot)" and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" means a state in which the probability of winning a special symbol is increased,
This refers to a so-called high probability state of special symbols (during a special symbol probability change), in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state (jackpot).
If it is not, it is called a "low probability state of special symbols", which is a state in which the probability of winning is lower than the probability of the special symbol being in a special symbol state, that is, the probability of winning the special symbol is in a normal state (normal state of special symbols).
In addition, the "normal symbol time-saving state" (during the normal symbol time-saving state) refers to a game state in which the probability of winning with the normal symbol increases and the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 64b. In contrast, when the game is not in the "normal symbol time-saving state", it is called the "normal normal symbol state", which indicates that the probability of winning with the normal symbol is in the normal state, that is, the probability of winning is lower than during the time-saving state.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state for normal symbols after the end of the special symbol jackpot, i.e., the period from the end of "jackpot A" to the end of 100 special symbol lotteries, will be referred to as the "time-saving period for normal symbols." In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning with normal symbols increases even during the special symbol probability change. As described above, in the case of "jackpot A," the increase in the probability of winning with normal symbols was limited to the end of 100 special symbol lotteries, but when the state transitions to a high probability state for special symbols, the increased probability of winning with normal symbols is maintained until the next jackpot is won. In other words, from "jackpot B" to
If the player wins the "jackpot D", he or she can wait for the next jackpot without losing balls, which is advantageous for the player. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with various game states such as a jackpot state, a time-saving state for normal symbols, and a probability-changing state for special symbols, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the "Big Win A" is won, the time-saving period for the normal symbol is set to 100 times, but is not limited to this. For example, 20 times or 150 times may be selected as the time-saving period for the normal symbol. Also, instead of the number of times of drawing the special symbol, the time-saving state for the normal symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) has elapsed. Also, instead of the "time-saving state for the normal symbol", the time for opening the electric role (not shown) associated with the second ball entrance 64b may be lengthened, or the number of times the electric role is opened by one hit of the normal symbol may be increased. Also, the number of rounds and the closing condition of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a are not limited to the aspect of this embodiment, and for example, a 4-round jackpot or a 16-round jackpot may be set, or the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a may be closed.
As the closing condition of 5a, for example, a condition of "until 3 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have won" or a condition of "until 10 seconds have passed or until 5 balls have won" may be set for the jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, after the jackpot ends, the state is changed to either a "high probability state of special symbols" or a "time-saving state of normal symbols", but it may be configured to always be in a "high probability state of special symbols" from the end of the jackpot until the drawing of special symbols is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, four times), and after the drawing of special symbols is completed a predetermined number of times, the state may be changed to a "low probability state of special symbols" and to a "time-saving state of normal symbols" or a "normal state of normal symbols".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the added value given to the player after the jackpot is the same regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, but the added value given to the player after the jackpot may be different depending on the game state when the jackpot is won. For example, if the "jackpot A" is won during the time-saving state of the normal pattern, the time-saving period of the normal pattern is set to 100 times, and if the "jackpot A" is won during the normal state of the normal pattern, the time-saving period of the normal pattern is set to 50 times.
It may also be times.

A first symbol display device 37 is provided in the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 780), which is provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LEDs") 37a as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display 37b. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a change by indicating whether or not a lottery for a special symbol performed in conjunction with a ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (initial winning) is being performed, by indicating a special symbol (first symbol) according to the lottery result for the special symbol as a stop symbol after the change is completed, by indicating a special symbol (first symbol) according to the lottery result for the special symbol, by indicating a stop symbol (reserved ball) for a ball that has entered the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b and has not yet been changed.
The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls on the screen, is indicated by the lighting status.

When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b while the first symbol display device 37 is displaying a changing special symbol (first symbol), the number of balls that have entered is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the first ball entrance 64a,
Alternatively, although the configuration is such that balls entering the second ball entry port 64b are reserved up to four times, the maximum number of reserved times is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Also, the configuration may be such that balls entering the first ball entry port 64a and balls entering the second ball entry port 64b are each reserved up to four times. Also, when executing a change according to the reserved ball, the change may be executed in the order in which the balls entered without considering the type of ball entry port,
When there are reserved balls, the ball may be preferentially inserted into the second ball entrance 64b. In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot or the selection ratio of each type of jackpot may be changed between the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 64b.

The seven-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors makes it possible to display various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (such as a high probability state for special symbols or a time-saving state for normal symbols) with a small number of LEDs. The LEDs 37a not only indicate whether the special symbol lottery result after the variation ends is a jackpot or not, but also, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot ("jackpot A" or "jackpot B"), etc.
A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the winning combination ("Big Win D") is displayed.

In addition, the game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is provided in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 made of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 made of LEDs. In this variable display unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 displays a decorative image according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (initial winning),
Then, this triggers the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In this embodiment, the game status is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main control device 110, while the third symbol display device 81
A decorative display is performed according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of a display device.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 782. FIG. 782 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.
782 is a diagram showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen.
4B is a diagram illustrating an example of an actual display screen.

The third symbols are composed of 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 78) described later is
When the result of the lottery for the special symbols performed by the method described above (see 3) is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the big win occurs after the variable display is over. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the special symbol lottery result is "Big Win A", "Big Win C", or "Big Win D", a variable display will be displayed with the main symbols with the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, and 8" added. Also, if it is "Big Win B", the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, and 9" will be displayed.
On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a variable display is made in which the main symbols with the same number are not aligned. By configuring it in this way, the type of big win can be recognized simply by checking the aligned main symbols.

As shown in FIG. 782(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts, one above the other.
The upper 4/5 is the main display area Dm which displays the third symbol in a variable manner, and the lower 1
/5 is the secondary display area Ds that displays the number of reserved balls.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, center, and right.
The three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 display three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and the display is changed by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, the left symbol column Z1
In the middle pattern column Z2 and the right pattern column Z3, the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in descending order.
In the game, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged to appear in ascending order.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the pay line L1, and in each game, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the pay line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. When the third symbols stop, if a combination of jackpot symbols (a combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is lined up on the pay line L1, a jackpot animation is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b but have not yet been changed (reserved balls).

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 782(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is performing a variable display, the number of balls entering is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the sub-display area Ds. In the sub-display area Ds, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four balls. Also, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, there are no reserved balls.

In this embodiment, the balls entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b are configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the sub-display area Ds, the reserved ball number may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or the four divided areas may be displayed in a different manner (e.g., color or lighting pattern) according to the number of reserved balls. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

Returning to Fig. 780, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, is being executed by lighting up the display, and indicates the normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol as the stopping symbol after the variable is completed by lighting up the display.

More specifically, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable pattern in which a "circle" and an "x" are alternately lit as the second pattern each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67.
The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a "circle" symbol), the electric device associated with the second ball entrance 64b is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time, making it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 64b. The number of times that a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed by the second symbol reserved lamp 84. Four second symbol reserved lamps 84 are provided, the maximum number of reserved balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by the second symbol display device 8 as in this embodiment.
In addition to the above, the first symbol display device 37 and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used to turn on and off a plurality of lamps in the normal ball entrance 67. Similarly, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67 may be performed by the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 64b.
As in b, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64a through which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a special symbol is performed by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 3.
The first ball entrance 64a is indicated by an LED 37a with a number 7. The first ball entrance 64a also serves as one of the winning entrances from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a.

A second ball entrance 64b through which a ball can enter is disposed below the first ball entrance 64a. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 64b, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the second ball entrance switch is turned on, the main control device 11
A special symbol is drawn at 0, and a display according to the result of the drawing is displayed on the LE of the first symbol display device 37.
D37a. Similarly to the first ball entrance 64a, the second ball entrance 64b is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the second ball entrance 64b. The upper side of the second ball entrance 64b is blocked by the first ball entrance 64a, making it difficult to enter the ball under normal circumstances. As described above, when a normal pattern is hit, the second ball entrance 64
The electric device associated with the second ball entrance 64b is opened, and the ball is easily allowed to enter the second ball entrance 64b. That is, the device is configured so that the ball is easily allowed to enter the second ball entrance 64b during a probability variation of a special symbol that is likely to result in a normal symbol win, or during a short period of time when the normal symbol is in play.

The variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second ball entrance 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is disposed in the approximate center of the variable winning device 65. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 results in a jackpot, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on and off so as to become the jackpot stop symbol after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed.
is turned on, and the third symbol display device 8 displays the third symbol corresponding to the big win.
The occurrence of a big win is indicated by displaying the number 1 on the display. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state in which a larger number of prize balls are paid out than in normal game states. In this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have been paid out).
The reel is opened until one ball wins, 0.5 seconds have elapsed, or 10 balls win).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated a number of times according to the type of big win. The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate forward with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis.
The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or does not easily win a prize. When a big win occurs, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning hole 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning hole 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and when a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a while the specific winning hole 65a is open, the large opening provided separately from the specific winning hole 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state as the special game state.

At the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, attachment spaces K1, K2 are provided for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. affixed to the attachment space K1 can be viewed through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 779).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66.
Balls that do not enter either 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an outlet 66. A large number of nails are set on the game board 13 to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in FIG. 781, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (
The control board unit 91 is equipped with a display control device 114.
A payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted on the device to form a unit.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 4 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

Furthermore, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and it is difficult to peel off the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board box 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover side will be cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 783). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply 115. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 783). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventeenth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
A register 210 for temporarily storing data required for reading and writing when reading various data from the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 and writing various data to the RAM 203, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in.
In order to instruct the sub-controllers such as 3 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent in only one direction, from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers.

Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG.
The M203 includes various counters and flags for controlling the processing of the main control device 110, as well as a memory area for storing set values. Here, the processing of the main control device 110 is as follows:
These are the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special patterns, drawing normal patterns, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37, setting the display on the second pattern display device 83, and setting the display on the third pattern display device 81.

784 is a diagram showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the drawing of special symbols, the drawing of normal symbols, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display in the second symbol display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

The first winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used to select the big win type of the special symbol.
The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used to set the initial value of the random number counter CINI1, and the variation type counter CS1 is used to select the variation pattern. The second winning random number counter C3 is used to draw the normal pattern, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C3. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 802), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 813), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 has one execution area and four reservation areas (reservation No. 1 to No. 4).
A special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is provided, which consists of a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b and a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. Each of these areas is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.
First winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, and fluctuation type counter CS1
The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is stored in each of these areas in accordance with the timing when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 249) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 249 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 249). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 249, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 249. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 802), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 813).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special symbol is set by a first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 785(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that a jackpot for the special symbol has occurred. In addition, this first winning random number table 202a is divided into two types, one for when the probability of a special symbol is low (the period when the probability of a special symbol is low) and one for when the probability of a special symbol winning is higher than the low probability (the period when the probability of a special symbol is high), and the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is set differently for each type. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot different, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the probability of a special symbol is low and when the probability of a special symbol is high. Note that the first winning random number table 202a1 (not shown) for when the probability of a special symbol is low and the first winning random number table 202a2 (not shown) for when the probability of a special symbol is high are,
It is provided in ROM 202 of main control device 110.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is won, and increments by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 199).
The value of the first winning type counter C2 is incremented by one and reset to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (for example, 199 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 199). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), for example, and is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 2 in the RAM 203 at the timing when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b.
It is stored in 03a.

Here, the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a
If the value of is not a random number that results in a jackpot of the special pattern, that is, if it is a random number that results in a miss of the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that which occurs when the special pattern is missed.

On the other hand, the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a
If the value of is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 249.
In the case of a low probability of a special symbol, there are three random numbers that will result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random number "7, 107, 240" is stored in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, out of the total number of random numbers of 300,
Since the total number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is 3, the probability of winning a special jackpot is 1/10
The result is "0".

On the other hand, when the probability of a special symbol is high, there are 30 random numbers that will result in a special symbol jackpot, and the values are "4, 11, 15, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 90, 99,
106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176,
The numbers "183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 238, 249" are stored in the first winning random number table 202a for high probability. In this way, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is 30 out of a total of 300 random numbers, so the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is 1/10.

In this embodiment, the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability and the random number value for the jackpot stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability are set so that they do not overlap. If there is a value that is always used as the random number value for the jackpot regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the timing at which that value appears may be analyzed, and it may be easier to illegally win a jackpot based on the analyzed timing.
In response to this, as in the present embodiment, by changing the random number value that results in a jackpot depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a state of high probability of a special pattern or a state of low probability of a special pattern), it is possible to make the random number value that results in a jackpot with a special pattern difficult to predict, thereby making it possible to prevent cheating.

In addition, the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is 0 to
199. As shown in FIG. 785(b), in the first winning type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 99", the big win type is "Big Win A (Time Reduction Big Win)".
If the value is "18", the jackpot type will be "jackpot B (variable jackpot)" and the value will be "18
If the value is "0 to 194", the jackpot type is "jackpot C (latent variable jackpot)", and if the value is "195 to 199", the jackpot type is "jackpot D (rare latent variable jackpot)". In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to determine one of the four types of jackpots (jackpot A to jackpot D) depending on the value of the random number indicated by the first jackpot type counter C2.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 199, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 199). The variation type counter CS1 determines the general display mode, such as a "complete miss" where no reach occurs, a "short reach" where the change time is relatively short, a "long reach" where the change time is relatively long, and a "super reach" where the change time is the longest. The display mode is determined, specifically, by determining the change time of the pattern change. Based on the change time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern change mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a.
, or when the second ball entrance 64b is entered, the special symbol reserved ball is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation type data for determining the fluctuation time of the pattern fluctuation are associated with each other and specified in the fluctuation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 786(a)).
This variable type selection table 202d (see FIG. 786(a)) is
It is provided in M202.

The details will be described later, but the variation type selection table 202d is provided with a table (a winning selection table 202d1) that is referred to when a jackpot is won, and a table that is referred to when the lottery for the special symbol is unsuccessful. Furthermore, there are two types of tables that are referred to when the lottery for the special symbol is unsuccessful. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a,
There are provided a table (selection table 202d2 for special symbol 1 not selected) which is referred to when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64b and the lottery for the special symbol is a miss, and a table (selection table 202d3 for special symbol 2 not selected) which is referred to when the ball enters the second ball entrance 64b and the lottery for the special symbol is a miss.
In addition, when the variation type data is selected from the selection table 202d3 for the special pattern 1 failure, the rate at which the variation type data corresponding to a complete failure is selected is set higher than when the variation type data is selected from the selection table 202d3 for the special pattern 2 failure. By configuring in this way, during the special pattern probability change, which is a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 64b, and during the time-saving state of the normal pattern, if the special pattern lottery is lost, a variation pattern performance with a short variation time can be easily selected. By shortening the variation time of the variation pattern performance that results in a failure, the player can feel that the period until the next big win is short, and the big wins are felt to be consecutive in a short period of time, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239).
When the second winning random number counter C3 has completed one revolution, the second initial value random number counter CIN
The value of I2 is read as the initial value of the second win random number counter C3. In this embodiment, the value of the second win random number counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process.
The data is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by the second winning random number table (see FIG. 785(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C3 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types: one for low probability of normal symbols (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and one for high probability of normal symbols that have a higher probability of winning than the low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that result in a big win included in each type is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a winning symbol different, the probability of winning is changed between low probability of normal symbols and high probability of normal symbols.

As shown in FIG. 785(c), when the probability of winning a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that will result in a winning normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in a normal symbol winning random number table for low probability. Thus, when the probability of winning a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is 24 out of a total of 240, so the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state for a normal symbol, if a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds on the second symbol display device 83. If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C3 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, a "circle" symbol is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric device associated with the second ball entrance 64b is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".
In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state for a normal symbol, if a normal symbol wins, the electric device attached to the second ball entrance 64b opens for "0.2 seconds x 1 time", but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random numbers that will result in a normal symbol jackpot, ranging from 5 to 204. These random numbers are stored in a normal symbol random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 2
Since the total number of random numbers that can result in a jackpot is 200 out of 40, the probability of winning with a special symbol is 1/1.2.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol for three seconds.
If the value of 3 is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, a "circle" symbol is displayed as the stationary symbol (second symbol), and the electric device attached to the second ball entrance 64b is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, the variable display time is "30 seconds" longer than when the probability of a normal symbol is low.
The time required for the second winning random number counter C3 to open becomes very short (0.2 seconds to 3 seconds), and the opening period of the electric device associated with the second ball entrance 64b becomes very long (0.2 seconds x 1 time to 1 second x 2 times), making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 64b. The second winning random number table 202c (FIG. 785 (
In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1
When 0 is the high probability of a normal symbol, if a normal symbol wins, the second ball entrance 64b
The electric device associated with the is opened for "1 second x 2 times", but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C3 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 802) and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 813).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control device 110
Depending on the values of these counters, etc., the main processes of the pachinko machine 10 can be executed, such as drawing a jackpot lottery, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83.

Returning to Fig. 783, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 stores various counters shown in Fig. 787, as well as a stack area for storing the contents of the register 210 of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, an I
and a work area in which values such as /O are stored.

In addition, the RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register of the register 210 at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203.
Based on the information stored in 3, the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main processing (see FIG. 813) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up processing (see FIG. 812) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 811) is immediately executed as a processing during a power failure.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 783, the RAM 203 has a special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203d, and various setting value storage area 203e.

The special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1.

More specifically, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (start entry).
At this timing, the values of the counters C1, C2, and CS1 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the oldest winning event is stored in the area, and reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

Thereafter, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the counters C1, C2, and CS stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are counted.
Each value of 1 is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as a lottery for a special symbol is made based on each value of the counters C1, C2, CS1 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203
In a, data shifting is performed only for the reserve areas (the second reserve area to the fourth reserve area) in which winning data is stored.

In the present pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (initial entry), and the respective values of the counters C1, C2, and CS1 are obtained in response to the initial entry, the obtained counters C1, C2, and CS1 are immediately counted separately from the original big win lottery for the special symbols.
From each value of CS1, various information that would be obtained if the original lottery was held is predicted (estimated). In this way, before the original lottery for the special symbols is held, various information that would be obtained if the original lottery was held is predicted based on the data corresponding to the start winning (each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1). This is hereafter referred to as "predicting the lottery result for the special symbols." The various information includes winning/losing, stop type, and variation pattern.

When the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (win/lose, stop type, and fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice and lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice and lamp control device 113,
extracts the winning or losing result, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is similar to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.
There is one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C3.

More specifically, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 on either the left or right side, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in the order of the smallest area number (1 to 4) among the empty areas. In other words, like the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the order of winning is maintained and data corresponding to the winning is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when a lottery is conducted for a winning normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of the second winning random number counter C3 stored in the execution area.

In addition, when data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes vacant, so a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number smaller by 1, as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry of a ball (initial winning) into the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b up to a maximum of 4.
The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is initially set to zero, and is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b and the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display increases (see S704 in FIG. 808).
On the other hand, the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new variable display of a special pattern is executed (see S205 in FIG. 803).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the reserved number of times the variable display of the special symbol is
) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S
206, see S705 in FIG. 808). The reserved ball number command is the special reserved ball number counter 2
This is a command sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value of 03c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the next received reserved ball number command can
The deviation can be corrected.

The voice and lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command,
Each time the number of reserved balls changes, a reserved ball number display command for notifying the number of reserved balls is sent to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The regular symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the regular symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the regular ball entrance 67.
This counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to the maximum value of four (see S904 in FIG. 810). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by one each time a new variable display of a normal symbol (second symbol) is executed.
The subtraction is performed (see S805 in FIG. 809).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, the normal symbol reserved ball counter 2
If the value of 03d (the number of reserved times M of the variable display in the normal pattern) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 2
On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal reserved ball counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal reserved ball storage area 203b (S903: No in FIG. 810).

The various setting value storage area 203e is a memory area that stores various setting values, flags, counters, etc. for executing the main processing of the pachinko machine 10. The MPU 201 performs control based on the data stored in the various setting value storage area 203e. The various setting value storage area 203e will be described later with reference to FIG.

Returning to Fig. 783, the explanation will be continued. Various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201 are defined in the ROM 202. The contents of this ROM 202 will be explained with reference to Figs. 785 to 792. As shown in Fig. 785(a), the main control device 1
The ROM 202 of No. 10 stores at least a first win random number table 202a, a first win type selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, a fluctuation type selection table 202d, an offset setting table 202e, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, a game result setting table 202g, a status setting table 202h, and a clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot as part of the fixed value data mentioned above.

As described above, the first win random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter C1 is stored. When any random number value defined in the first win random number table 202a matches the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the first win random number counter buffer, it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 785(b)) is a data table in which the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 785(b), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first winning type counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 99, the current jackpot is judged to be a "jackpot A (time-saving jackpot)" and if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of 100 to 179, the current jackpot is judged to be a "jackpot B (probable jackpot)".
If the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of 180 to 194,
The current jackpot is determined to be a "jackpot C (latent variable jackpot)", and if the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is in the range of 195 to 199, the current jackpot is determined to be a "jackpot D (rare latent variable jackpot)".

The random number value for a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state for special symbols and a time-saving state for normal symbols after the jackpot is set to 100, from 0 to 99. On the other hand, the random number value for a jackpot that transitions to a high probability state for special symbols after the jackpot is set to 100, from 100 to 199. In other words, the ratio of jackpots that transition to a high probability state for special symbols and jackpots that transition to a low probability state for special symbols after the jackpot is 1:1. Also, of the jackpots that transition to a high probability state for special symbols,
A jackpot in which the player is not notified of a transition to a high probability state of a special symbol (jackpot C,
The random number for the jackpot D is set to 20 values from 180 to 199. That is, in the case of winning a jackpot that transitions to a high probability state of a special symbol, the system is configured so that the transition to a high probability state of a special symbol is not notified in one out of five cases. This allows the player to continue playing while expecting that the transition to a high probability state of a special symbol has occurred (i.e., that the player has won a jackpot C or a jackpot D) even if the transition to a high probability state of a special symbol is not notified.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 785(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 785(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low (when the normal symbol is in the normal state), a winning normal symbol is judged to have been selected when the value of the second winning random number counter C3 stored in the second winning random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. As described above, when a winning normal symbol is judged to have been selected, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 has ended, a "○" symbol is lit and displayed as the stopped symbol (second symbol), and the electric device associated with the second ball entrance 64b is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal pattern is high (during the time-saving state of the normal pattern), the second winning random number counter C3
If the value is in the range of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stopping symbol (second symbol), and the second ball entrance 6
The electric device attached to 4b is opened "twice for 1 second."

The fluctuation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 786(a)) is a data table that specifies the correspondence between the fluctuation type data for determining the rough display mode of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation type counter CS1. This fluctuation type selection table 202d specifies a number of different tables that correspond to the lottery results of special symbols and the type of ball entry hole into which the ball entered. The fluctuation type data selected from this fluctuation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 786(a)) is converted into an offset value (pattern selection offset value) based on the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 788) described later. Then, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202
The content specified at the address the offset value away from the starting address of f (see Figure 789) is set as the variation pattern type.

As shown in FIG. 786(a), the variable type selection table 202d includes a winning selection table 202d1, a special drawing 1 miss selection table 202d2, and a special drawing 2 miss selection table 202d3.
The winning selection table 202d1 is a table for selecting the variable type data when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The special symbol 1 loss selection table 202d2 is a table for selecting the variable type data when the lottery for the special symbol (lottery for special symbol 1) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is a loss. The special symbol 2 loss selection table 202d3 is a table for selecting the variable type data when the lottery for the special symbol (lottery for special symbol 1) based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 64a is a loss.
A lottery for a special symbol was held based on the ball entering the ball entrance 64b (a lottery for special symbol 2).
This is a table for selecting the variation type data when the prediction is incorrect.

Next, referring to FIG. 786(b) to FIG. 789, the variation pattern selection table 202f (
The process from selecting the fluctuation pattern type from the step 789 (see Figure 789) will be explained in detail.

FIG. 786(b) shows the variation type counter CS1 when it is determined that a special symbol is a big win.
786(b), there are three types of variation patterns that can be selected in the case of a big win with a special symbol: "short reach win", "long reach win", and "super reach win", and these are associated with variation type data 00H, 01H, and 02H, respectively. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 4, 00H (short reach win) is selected as the variation type data, if it is in the range of 5 to 179, 01H (long reach win) is selected as the variation type data, and if it is in the range of 180 to 1
If the number is within the range of 0.99, 02H (win super reach) is selected as the fluctuation type data. These fluctuation type data are converted into a pattern selection offset value, which is a value used to select a fluctuation pattern type, by an offset setting table 202e described later, and a fluctuation pattern type is selected from a fluctuation pattern selection table 202f described later based on the fluctuation pattern selection offset value.

FIG. 787(a) is a diagram showing a selection table 202d2 for special symbol 1 failure for selecting variation type data when the lottery for the special symbol (lottery for special symbol 1) based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is a failure. As shown in FIG. 787(a), the variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery for special symbol 1 is a failure is "complete failure".
There are four types: "Missed Short Reach,""Missed Long Reach," and "Missed Super Reach," and these are associated with variable type data 03H, 04H, 05H, and 06H, respectively.

If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 164, the fluctuation type data is 03H.
If (complete miss) is selected and the range is between 165 and 184, the fluctuation type data is set to 04H (
If the range is 185 to 194, 05H is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if the range is 195 to 199, 06H is selected as the fluctuation type data. These fluctuation type data are also stored in the offset setting table 2 in the same way as in the case of a big win.
02e, and the pattern selection offset value is converted to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202
It is used to select a fluctuation pattern type from f.

FIG. 787(b) is a diagram showing a selection table 202d3 for selecting a variation type data when the lottery for the special symbol 2 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 64b is a miss. As shown in FIG. 787(b), the variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery for the special symbol 2 is a miss is "complete miss".
There are four types: "Missed Short Reach,""Missed Long Reach," and "Missed Super Reach," and these are associated with variable type data 07H, 08H, 09H, and 0AH, respectively.

If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 184, the fluctuation type data is 07H.
In other words, the ratio of selecting a complete miss is set to be higher than when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. Also, if the range is 185 to 194, 08H (miss short reach) is selected as the variable type data, and if the range is 195 to 198, 09H (miss short reach) is selected as the variable type data.
If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is within the range, 09H is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 199, 0AH is selected as the fluctuation type data.
The ratio of selection of the miss short reach, miss long reach, and miss super reach is set lower than that of the case where the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. By increasing the ratio of complete misses and decreasing the ratio of various miss reaches, it becomes easier to select a variation pattern performance with a short variation time in the high probability state of the special pattern or the time-saving state of the normal pattern, so that the period until the next big win can be shortened, and the player can be given the impression that the big wins are continuing in a short period of time. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, the variation type data selected from the special pattern 2 miss selection table 202d3 is also converted into a pattern selection offset value using the offset setting table 202e, as in the case of a big win or when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, and is used to select a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

FIG. 788 shows an offset setting table 202 which is referred to in order to determine a pattern selection offset value for selecting a fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.
FIG.

As shown in FIG. 788, when the fluctuation type data value selected from the fluctuation type selection table 202d is 00H, 01H, or 02H, 00H, 01H, or 02H is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 788). On the other hand, when the selected fluctuation type data value is 03H (complete miss at the first ball entrance 64a),
The pattern selection offset value selected is configured to change according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 03H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 04H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 05H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 06H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. By changing the pattern selection offset value selected according to the number of reserved balls, the type of variation pattern selected can be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the more the number of reserved balls, the shorter the variation pattern type is selected. This makes it possible to prevent only long-period, out-of-range variation patterns from continuing, and therefore to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced.

The process of identifying the type of fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is performed when data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area. In this case, the winning data stored in the other reserved areas is shifted to the reserved areas with area numbers one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3) by the shift process, so that at the timing of selecting the pattern selection offset value, the maximum value of the reserved winning data (reserved ball count) is 3. For this reason, the offset value setting table 202e specifies the cases where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 3.

The fluctuation type data value selected from the fluctuation type selection table 202d is 04H (first entrance 6
In the case of a short miss at 4a), 07H is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 788). On the other hand, if the selected fluctuation type data value is 05H (long miss at the first ball entrance 64a), the pattern selection offset value selected changes according to the number of reserved balls, as in the case of a complete miss. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 08H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 09H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 0AH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 0BH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. This makes it possible to prevent only long-period miss fluctuation patterns from continuing, as in the case of a complete miss, and thus to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced.

The fluctuation type data value selected from the fluctuation type selection table 202d is 06H (first entrance 6
In the case of a super miss at 4a), 0CH is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 788). On the other hand, when the selected fluctuation type data value is 07H (complete miss at the second ball entrance 64b), the pattern selection offset value selected changes according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 0DH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 0EH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 0FH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 10H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. This makes it possible to prevent only long fluctuation periods of miss fluctuation patterns from occurring in succession, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from being reduced.

The fluctuation type data value selected from the fluctuation type selection table 202d is 08H, 09H, or 0A.
In the case of H, 11H, 12H, and 13H are selected as pattern selection offset values from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 788). As described above, the pattern selection offset value selected from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 788) is used to select a fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

FIG. 789 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern selection table 202f for selecting a fluctuation pattern type based on a pattern selection offset value.
f is a data table allocated to the range of addresses 1AF5H to 1B08H of the ROM 202, and one type of fluctuation pattern type is defined for each address. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 789, there are a "Win Super Reach" with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, a "Complete Miss B (Special Diagram 1)" with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds, and a "Miss Long Reach B (Special Diagram 1)" with a fluctuation time of 19 seconds.
")" and "Completely Missed D (Special Chart 2)" with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds are prescribed.
shows the fluctuation based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a, and special diagram 2 shows the fluctuation based on the ball entering the second ball entry port 64b.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the type of fluctuation pattern when executing the fluctuation is determined based on this fluctuation pattern selection table 202f and the pattern selection offset value. Specifically, it is configured to determine the type of fluctuation pattern specified in the address ahead of the selected pattern selection offset value from 1AF5H, which is the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, as the type of fluctuation pattern this time.

For example, if a special symbol is selected as the jackpot and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 100,
From the winning selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 786(b)), set the variable type data to 01.
H is selected. The fluctuation type data value and the offset setting table 202e (FIG. 788)
Based on this, 01H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. Therefore, as the type of the current fluctuation pattern, the data specified in 1AF6H, which is the address obtained by adding 01H of the pattern selection offset value to 1AF5H, which is the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. In other words, the data specified in "Winning long reach" with a fluctuation period of 20 seconds is
is selected.

In addition, for example, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a is a miss, the value of the variation type counter is 190, and the number of reserved balls is 2,
From the special chart 1 miss selection table 202d2 (see FIG. 787(a)), 05H is selected as the fluctuation type data. Then, based on the fluctuation type data, the number of reserved balls, and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 788), 0AH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. Therefore, as the fluctuation pattern type this time, the data specified at 1AFFH, which is the address obtained by adding the pattern selection offset value 0AH to 1AF5, which is the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. In other words, "Miss Long Reach C (Special Chart 1)" with a fluctuation time of 17 seconds is selected.

In addition, for example, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 64b is a miss, the value of the variation type counter is 20, and the number of reserved balls is 3, the variation type data is set to 0 from the special symbol 2 miss selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 787(b)).
7H is selected. Then, the variable type data, the number of reserved balls, and the offset setting table 2
Based on this, 10H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. Therefore, as the type of the current fluctuation pattern, the data specified in 1B05H, which is the address obtained by adding 10H of the pattern selection offset value to 1AF5, which is the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, the data specified in "Complete Miss D" with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected.
(Special Drawing 2)" is selected.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to select a variation pattern type according to the special symbol lottery result, the value of the variation type counter value CS1, the type of ball entrance into which the ball entered, and the number of reserved balls. Also, when the ball entrance into which the ball entered is the second ball entrance 64b, a variation pattern performance with a short variation period is likely to be selected compared to when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a. That is, during the special symbol's probability of winning, which is a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 64b, and during the time-saving state of the normal symbol, a variation pattern performance with a short variation period can be easily selected. Therefore, the player can feel that the period until the next big win is short, and the big wins are felt to be consecutive in a short period of time,
This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that the more balls are reserved, the more likely it is that a variation pattern type with a short variation time will be selected. This makes it possible to prevent a series of long-period, unsuccessful variation patterns from being selected, and therefore to prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, even if the variation type data value is the same, there are misses in which different variation times are selected according to the number of reserved balls, and misses in which the same variation time is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the variation time is different according to the number of reserved balls in all misses. In addition, if the lottery for special pattern 1 is a miss, only the misses in which the same variation time is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls may be selected, and if the lottery for special pattern 2 is a miss, only the misses in which different variation times are selected according to the number of reserved balls may be selected. This makes it easier to select a variation pattern performance with a short variation time during the special pattern's probability of entering the second ball entrance 64b and during the time-saving state of the normal pattern. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the period until the next jackpot is short, and to make the player feel that the jackpots are consecutive in a short period of time, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in order to select a variation pattern type according to the number of reserved balls, a pattern selection offset value is determined from the variation type data using the offset setting table 202e.
2e, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the offset value and the offset setting table 202e. This reduces the processing load of the MPU 201 compared to the case where the offset setting table 202e is not provided and the fluctuation type counter value is directly converted into the offset value in the control process. Therefore, the process of determining the mode of the fluctuation pattern presentation, which is one of the most important processes in the game, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable because the process of determining the mode of the fluctuation pattern presentation takes time and the fluctuation pattern presentation is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed.

Returning to FIG. 785, the description of the ROM 202 will be continued.
FIG. 90 shows a data table in which the setting of the stop symbols indicating a jackpot and the setting values of the operation pattern of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a during the jackpot are regulated for each type of jackpot.
This will be described with reference to the following.

The game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 790) is stored in the ROM 202 at address "19D
The game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 790) stores the number of judgment values (random number values) for each big win type (number of judgment values) and the lighting pattern (
The number of displayed symbols), information showing the special symbols to be stopped (stop symbol information), the operation pattern of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a (large opening port pattern), and information for determining the game state after the big win is over (offset value) are specified. In addition, in FIG. 790, the address of the ROM 202 where each data is specified is written in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address is omitted and only the lower byte is written.

In the present pachinko machine 10, the game result setting table 2 is set based on the winning of the jackpot.
From 02g (see FIG. 790), the above-mentioned setting values according to the type of big win won are stored in RAM2
The setting values are stored in the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 793) of 03. Details of the various setting value storage area 203e will be described later. Then, based on the setting values stored in the various setting value storage area 203e, the MPU 201 performs the variation pattern presentation resulting in a jackpot and various controls relating to the jackpot. In addition, the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 793) also stores the game result setting table 202 in addition to the memory area for storing the setting values relating to the game.
An offset value storage area is provided for storing an offset value stipulated in Item 790.g (see FIG. 790). This offset value is a value used to set the game state after the big win ends.

Specifically, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 815) that is executed when it is determined that the jackpot has ended, various setting values related to the game state after the jackpot has ended (such as a setting value indicating whether or not to enter a high probability state for special symbols, and the time period for normal symbols) are selected from the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 791(a)) and set in the various setting value storage area 203e. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the random number value (counter value) obtained upon entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b (initial entry) is not retained until the end of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot has ended is not determined based on the random number value (counter value).
The configuration is such that only the offset value selected based on a random number value (counter value) obtained when the ball enters 4b (initial winning) is retained during the jackpot.

Here, if the random number value for the jackpot is held during the variation pattern presentation at the time of winning the jackpot or during the jackpot state afterwards, the jackpot random number may be read by a fraudulent player, and the timing at which the random number value for the jackpot appears may be analyzed, and the player may be more likely to win the jackpot fraudulently based on the analyzed timing. In contrast, in this embodiment, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into an offset value and held until the end of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set based on the offset value, so that the period during which the random number value for the special symbol is held can be limited to a short period of time. Therefore, it is difficult to fraudulently obtain the random number value for the special symbol jackpot from the outside, and therefore it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of analyzing the timing at which the random number value for the jackpot appears and winning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to hold only offset values, which are values indicating the storage positions of the various setting values in the state setting table 202h, instead of holding various setting values related to the game state after the end of the jackpot (such as a setting value indicating whether or not to set a high probability state for special symbols, or a period of time when normal symbols are played, etc.).Rather than providing a storage area in the RAM 203 for temporarily storing all of the various setting values, it is sufficient to provide an area for storing the offset values, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

Next, the state setting table 202h of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to Fig. 791. This state setting table 202h (see Fig. 791(a)) is a table in which game states to which a game can be changed after the end of a jackpot are specified in the order of offset values, and is a data table to be referenced for setting the game state after the end of a jackpot in the jackpot end process (see Fig. 815) executed when it is determined that the jackpot has ended.

This status setting table 202h (see FIG. 791(a)) is stored at address 1 of the ROM 202.
The state setting table 202h (see FIG. 791(a)) contains information indicating whether or not to transition to a high probability state for special symbols after the end of a jackpot (special symbol lottery state), information indicating whether or not to transition to a time-saving state for normal symbols after the end of a jackpot (normal symbol state),
A time period for a normal pattern to be given after the end of a jackpot (time shortening number of times) and a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the mode of the variation pattern are selected from the table for after the jackpot,
The number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of times the variable pattern selection table is switched) required to switch to the table according to the state is specified. In addition, in FIG. 786, the address of the ROM 202 where each data is specified is written in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted and only the lower byte is written.

Next, the description contents of the state setting table 202h in the program will be described with reference to FIG. 791(b). FIG. 791(b) is a simplified diagram showing an example of the description contents of the state setting table 202h of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. The left side of FIG. 791(b) shows an example of the description contents, and the right side shows the meaning of the description. As shown in FIG. 791(b), first, a label "TBL1" is specified as a table name indicating the state setting table 202h. By specifying the label name, the top address of the state setting table 202h can be read in other processing by simply writing "TBL1". That is, it is not necessary to input the address value of the state setting table 202h itself in other processing. In particular, since the control processing and the number of data stored in the ROM 202 may change if the model is changed, when the program used in this pachinko machine 10 is diverted to another gaming machine, the address value assigned to the state setting table 202h may also change. Even in such a case, if the top address of the status setting table 202h is associated with the label "TBL1", when the program is diverted to another model, it is not necessary to re-enter the address for each process that reads the status setting table 202h. This makes it possible to prevent errors in entering the program when diverting the program, and therefore makes it possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to errors in the program.

In the line following the line that specifies the label, data corresponding to offset value 00H, among the data for specifying in the status setting table 202h, is described in the order of the addresses to be stored. Specifically, 00H, which is the data for specifying in address 1AD8H, 00H, which is the data for specifying in address 1AD9H, 64H, which is the data for specifying in address 1ADAH, and 64H, which is the data for specifying in address 1AD9H, are described together in one line. Note that data corresponding to offset value 01H and offset value 02H are also described in the order of the addresses to be stored.
Similarly, the data corresponding to H is written together on one line. In other words, in one process of reading data from the state setting table 202h and setting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, a series of data that are read consecutively are written together on one line.
By describing the data corresponding to each offset value on one line, the designer can easily check whether there are any omissions or duplications in the data corresponding to each offset value (whether the number of data corresponding to each offset value is equal). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to omissions or duplications occurring when specifying the data.

In addition, in the program, the status setting table 202 is written in a row between the row that specifies the data corresponding to the offset value 00H and the row that specifies the data corresponding to the offset value 01H.
The label "D_SIZE" is defined as the number of data corresponding to each offset value of h. In the definition, "EQU" means equal, and "$" means the current position (the address following the last data corresponding to the offset value 00H). In other words, "D_SIZE"
"E" is the next address to the end of the data corresponding to the offset value 00H, and "TBL1" (
In this embodiment, the start address of the status setting table 202h is 1AD8H, and the offset value is 00
Since the end address of the data corresponding to H is 1ADBH, "D_SIZE" is 1
The result is 0004H, which is the difference between 1ADCH and 1AD8H.

In this way, by defining the label "D_SIZE" as the number of data, when the number of data in the status setting table 202h is used in another process, it is sufficient to write only "D_SIZE". In other words, it is not necessary to define the number of data itself in the other process. In particular, if the model changes, the number of data defined in the status setting table 202h may change. Even in such a case, if the label "D_SIZE" is defined as the number of data, when the program is diverted to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite the number of data in each process that uses the number of data in the status setting table 202h. Therefore, it is possible to prevent errors in entering the program when diverting the program, and it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 due to a program error.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the label "D_SIZE" indicating the number of data items is not defined by the direct value of the number of data items, but is defined using the label "TBL1". This means that even if the program is diverted to another model with a different number of data items, there is no need to rewrite the definition of "D_SIZE". Therefore, when diverting a program, "D_SIZE"
This can prevent mistakes when rewriting the definitions, thereby preventing malfunctions of the pachinko machine 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, "TBL1" is defined as the label only for the top address of the state setting table 202h, but it may be configured to define a different label for the top address for each offset value (for each series of data that are read out continuously in one process). For example, the top address (1ADCH) of the data corresponding to the offset value 01H
A label "TBL2" may be associated with the start address (1AE0H) of the data corresponding to the offset value 02H, and a label "TBL3" may be associated with the start address (1AE0H) of the data corresponding to the offset value 02H. In this case, the definition of "D_SIZE" may be specified as the difference between "TBL2" and "TBL1", or the difference between "TBL3" and "TBL2".
" and "TBL1" divided by 2.

Furthermore, the names of the labels (such as "TBL1" and "D_SIZE") are not limited to those used in this embodiment, but can be determined arbitrarily. This is because the label names have no effect on the operation of the actual machine. In more detail, in the process of translating (assembling) the created program into a language (machine language) that the MPU 201 can understand, the labels that appear in each process are as follows:
All addresses and data numbers are converted into their actual values.
When the program is applied to .01, all the labels are replaced with hexadecimal machine code. Therefore, the label names do not affect the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at all.

In addition, the program description method of associating a label with an address or a number of data is not limited to the state setting table 202h. For example,
A similar description method may be used for all data tables that may be referenced in other processes, such as:

Next, the big win end time clear table 202i will be described with reference to FIG. 792. The big win end time clear table 202i is stored in the ROM 202 at addresses "1205H" to
This is a table stored in the range of "1212H", and each address is specified with the address of the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 793). The details will be described later, but in the zero setting process (see FIG. 816), which is one of the processes in the big win end process,
When the big win ends, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 clears the R from the clear table 202i.
The stored data is read out in the order of address arrangement in the OM 202, and "00H" (initial value data) is set as a setting value at the address indicated by the read stored data (address data).
Also, if the data read from the big win end time clear table 202i is "00H", the zero setting process is terminated. The big win end time clear table 202i specifies only the setting destination address, and the process of setting the setting destination address to "00H" is called M
Since it is specified in the control program of PU201, when the big win ends, the clear table 2
The amount of data in .02i can be reduced.

Next, the various setting value storage area 203e provided in the RAM 203 will be described.
FIG. 793 is a schematic diagram showing the various setting value storage area 203e.
As shown in FIG. 793, the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 793) corresponds to the address range of "F000H" to "F0FFH" in the RAM 203.
In 3e (see FIG. 793), the launch control signal setting value storage area assigned to address "F000H" of RAM 203 is a memory area in which setting values for controlling the launch of the ball are stored, and the launch of the ball into the game area is controlled based on the setting values stored in this area.

The display LED setting area assigned to address "F009H" of RAM 203 is a memory area in which setting values of the lighting pattern for lighting the display LED are stored, and the display LED is lit based on the setting values stored in this area.

The test signal setting area 1 and the test signal setting area 2, which are respectively assigned to addresses "F01DH" and "F01EH", are memory areas for storing setting values for outputting various test signals.
There are signals for performing operation tests of the pachinko machine 10, such as a signal for performing an operation test of the pachinko machine 10 when the player wins a jackpot, etc. Since these are test signals, they are set so that no signal is output while the player is playing the pachinko machine 10 (i.e., both test signal setting areas 1 and 2 are set to "00H").

The maximum number of rounds setting area assigned to the address "F030H" is an area for setting the number of rounds of a jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, all jackpots are 8-round jackpots, so when a jackpot is won, the setting value is set to "08H."

The game status setting area allocated to the address "F035H" of the RAM 203 is as follows:
This is a memory area in which a setting value indicating the current game state is stored. For example, if the stored setting value is "01H", it indicates that the special symbol is changing, if it is "02H", it indicates that the special symbol is being confirmed and displayed, if it is "03H", it indicates that a jackpot is being won and a specific winning port (large opening port) is being played.
It indicates that the special winning port (large opening) 65a is closed, and "04H" indicates that a big win is occurring and the special winning port (large opening) 65a is open. Also, "00H" indicates a state other than the above (i.e., a state between the end of a big win and the start of the special pattern variation, or a state in which a certain amount of time has passed since the special pattern was stopped and displayed with no reserved balls).

The jackpot flag assigned to address "F090H" is a flag indicating whether or not the current state is a jackpot (special game state). If it is on (i.e., if the stored data is "01H"), it indicates that the special symbol is in a jackpot, and if it is off (i.e., if the stored data is "00H"), it indicates a state other than a special symbol jackpot (i.e., a state in which the special symbol is changing or a demo state, etc.). The memory area assigned to the following addresses "F091H" to "F094H" is ROM2.
This is an area for setting data read out from the status setting table 202h of 02.

First, the probability of winning is 100%. The probability of winning is 100%. The probability of winning is 100%. The probability of winning is 100%. The probability of winning is 100%. The probability of winning is 100%. The probability of winning is 100%. The probability of winning is 100%.
If the stored data is "00H", this indicates a low probability state for the special symbol.

In addition, the time-saving state flag assigned to the address "F092H" indicates whether or not the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress, and stores a setting value for specifying a table for selecting the state of the fluctuation pattern when the normal pattern is lost. If the flag is "00H", it indicates that the normal pattern is in the normal state, and if the flag is "01H", it indicates that the time-saving state 1 of the normal pattern is in progress.

The time-saving state counter assigned to the address "F093H" is a counter that indicates how many times the time-saving state of the normal pattern remains when the state transitions to a low probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot and then to a time-saving state of the normal pattern. If the state transitions to a high probability state of the special pattern after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues until the next jackpot is won, but the time-saving state counter is 0 regardless of the number of times the special pattern is drawn. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the probability state flag is on or the value of the time-saving state counter is 1 or more, the control of the time-saving state of the normal pattern is executed.

The variation selection state counter assigned to the address "F094H" is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbols are drawn before the table for selecting the variation pattern presentation is switched to another table. If this counter is 1 or more, a variation pattern selection table dedicated to the end of the big win is selected as a table for selecting the variation pattern when the player misses. On the other hand, if the value of the variation selection state counter is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the table corresponding to the game state indicated by the time-saving state flag.

The offset value storage area assigned to the address "F095H" is a storage area for storing offset values. Based on the stored offset value, the setting value after the end of the big win is read from the state setting table 202h and stored in the RAM 203 at the address "F09
The offset value is set to "F01H" through "F094H", respectively. When a special symbol lottery determines that a jackpot has been won, the offset value is read from the game result setting table 202g and stored in the offset value storage area. In addition, the offset value is overwritten to the initial value "00H" during the zero setting process (see FIG. 816) that is executed after the setting value has been read from the status setting table 202h and the setting has been completed.

The large opening setting area assigned to the address "F096H" is a memory area in which a setting value indicating the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a during a big win is stored.
This is referred to during a jackpot (i.e., when the jackpot flag is on). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, all jackpot types are 8-round jackpots, and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is common, so a common setting value is set.

The stop symbol code information storage area assigned to address "F097H" is an area for setting information on the stop symbols of the special symbols based on the lottery results of the special symbols. If the lottery result of the special symbols is a miss, a stop symbol code indicating the stop symbol corresponding to the miss is set, and if the lottery result is a win, a stop symbol code corresponding to the big win type is read from the game result setting table 202e and set. Then, when the variation of the special symbols ends, the stop symbol corresponding to the setting value set in this stop symbol code information storage area is displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

Addresses "F09FH" to "F0FFH" are unused areas, and the data stored in these areas is fixed to "00H".
Various setting values are assigned to addresses other than those mentioned above in 3e. Although the explanation is omitted, for example, various counters such as a winning counter that counts the number of balls that have won into the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a, and various timers such as a normal pattern display switching timer that measures the time to switch the display of the normal pattern in the variable performance of the normal pattern are assigned.

In this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, various setting values, counters, timers, etc. are configured to be stored in a concentrated manner in the various setting value storage area 203e in which the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is F0H, and the ring buffer for storing commands (e.g., variation pattern commands, stop type commands, etc.) to be output to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal pattern reserved ball count storage area 203b, the stack area, etc. are configured to be stored in addresses in which the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is other than "F0H" (e.g., addresses in which the upper byte is "F1H").

Next, the register 210 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 794. The register 210 is for temporarily storing address data and setting value data when reading data from the ROM 202 or RAM 203 or writing setting values to the RAM 203, and for performing arithmetic processing on the stored setting values. As shown in Fig. 794, the register 210 includes an accumulator 210a capable of performing arithmetic processing on stored data, general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, and 210d2 capable of storing address data and setting value data, a flag register 210e for storing various flags, and an address holding register 210f for storing the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the various setting value storage area 203e as a fixed value.
The accumulator 210a is provided with a general-purpose register 210b.
1 to 210d2, they can also be used to temporarily store data.

Each register in the register 210 is configured to be capable of holding one byte of data. In addition, the general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2, the general-purpose registers 210c1 and 210c2, and the general-purpose registers 210d1 and 210d2 can also be used in pairs. That is, each pair of registers is configured to be capable of storing a total of two bytes of data. Examples of two bytes of data include address data of the ROM 202 and address data of the RAM 203.

The flag register 210e has a different flag for each bit of one byte. The flags provided include, for example, a zero flag that is off if the calculation result after executing an instruction is a value other than zero and on if the result is zero, and a load flag that is off if the data stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 is data other than "00H" and on if the data is "00H".

The control when reading and writing data will be described below. Here, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with various commands for executing various controls of the main control unit 110, and reading and writing of data is also executed using one of the various commands. Specifically, for example, a transfer command is provided to specify a read source and a setting destination and transfer data stored in the transfer source to the setting destination.

In this transfer command, at least one of the read source and the set destination is register 2.
It is necessary to specify the accumulator 210a provided in the internal register 10 or any of the general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). Therefore, for example, when reading data specified at address "1ADAH" in the ROM 202 and storing the read data at address "F093H" in the RAM 203, it is necessary to transfer the data via the general-purpose register 210b1, for example.
The data specified at the address "1ADAH" is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 using a transfer command, with the general-purpose register 210b1 being the read source and the address "F093H" being the set destination.
A transfer command is executed again to transfer the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 to the address "F09
By controlling in this way, the address of the ROM 202 is set to "1ADAH".
The data specified in the above is stored in the RAM 203 address "
It can be transferred to "F093H".

Returning to FIG. 783, the explanation will be continued. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the dispensing control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113,
First symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, second symbol reservation lamp 84, specific winning port 6
A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the opening plate 5a forward with the lower side of the opening and closing plate 5a as an axis and a solenoid for driving the electric role is connected to the MPU 201.
sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205 .

In addition, various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and a group of sensors not shown in the figure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described below that is provided in the power supply unit 115 are connected to the input/output port 205, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by driving a payout motor 216. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 811) is immediately executed as a process to be performed during a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launching solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the operating handle 51 is not being operated, the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a display control device 1 for outputting voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputting lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and outputting variable effects (variable display) and continuous notice effects.
The MPU 221 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in step 14. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
5, the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected.

The voice and lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the content of the performance during a super reach, and also instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a back image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the back image refers to the third pattern display device 81, which is the main image to be displayed.
This refers to the image displayed on the back side of the design.

The voice lamp control device 113 judges an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and transmits an error command including the type of the error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (e.g., vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a fluctuation pattern table 222a that specifies multiple modes of fluctuation pattern presentation to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.
When a variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received, the corresponding variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table 222a. In addition, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is obtained in the main control device 110, various information (win/lose, stop type, change pattern) that will be obtained when a lottery for a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110 from the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the change type counter CS1 obtained in response to the start winning, and the predicted various information is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 110.
The winning information is notified to 13 by a winning information command.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the various information notified by the winning information command (win/lose, stop type, and change pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically,
The extracted winning information is stored in the four empty areas (first area to fourth area) in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth area). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the oldest winning event is stored, and the first area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning event.

The special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, like the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control unit 110, is a counter for a variable performance (variable display) performed on the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81), which counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance reserved in the main control unit 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and reads the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot obtain the value of the main control device 1.
The number of reserved balls is counted based on a reserved ball number command transmitted from 10, and the number of reserved balls is managed by a special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b.

Specifically, when the main control unit 110 adds to the number of reserved balls in the variable display due to a ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, or when the main control unit 110 executes a variable display for a special pattern and subtracts the number of reserved balls, it sends a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the reserved ball number counter 2 of the main control device 110 based on the reserved ball number command.
The value of 03c is obtained and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (S1
In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number pattern in the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b, and transmits the display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b after storage.

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 819), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1902 in FIG. 820). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the main process (FIG. 81) performed by the MPU 221.
In the command output process (S1702) of the command output process (see FIG. 8), the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control of the variation performance is started so that the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1805 in FIG. 819), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1907 in FIG. 820). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type (
In the case of a jackpot, the stop type is set based on the winning combination (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by a display stop type command.

In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop display of the variable performance is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is displayed stopped on the third pattern display device 81.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer and is in a FIFO (First In, First Out) order.
When the command determination process (see FIG. 819) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
This display control device 1 controls the variable display (variable performance) of the third symbol in the game.
Details of 14 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 7).
81) is provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc., through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, and supplies various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving motors, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, and a voltage of 10 volts for logic circuits.
The power supply circuit 100 generates a 12-volt voltage, a 5-volt voltage, and a backup voltage for RAM backup, and supplies the necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
The interrupt process (see FIG. 811) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 781) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG.
95 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114.
has an MPU 231 , a work RAM 233 , a character ROM 234 , a resident video RAM 235 , a normal video RAM 236 , an image controller 237 , an input port 238 , an output port 239 , and bus lines 240 and 241 .

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, and the character ROM 234.
, an image controller 237 is connected via a bus line 240. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model having a different probability of winning a jackpot with a special pattern or a different number of prize balls paid out for one jackpot with a special pattern, there are models having the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work R
AM233 will now be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command to set is set to the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in the character RO provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.
The character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a that allows for a large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control programs and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which in turn reduces manufacturing costs and suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND type flash memory has a problem that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address specification to the output of the data. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of NAND type flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands constituting the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) as described later.
M) and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The character ROM 234 stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third
This is a memory that stores data of an image to be displayed on the pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and the character ROM 234 is
The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the M234, which will be described later, is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
An image controller 237 is also connected to the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 reads image data stored in the character memory area 234a2, which will be described later, from the character memory area 234a2.
A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 connected to the image controller 237
Transfer to M236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND type flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR type ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 which stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 which stores data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily made large-capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND type flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, so that the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the occurrence rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 232 via the bus line 240, for example.
Based on the address transmitted from the address read/write unit 37 , the corresponding data is read from the NAND type flash memory 234 a or the like, and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a, by its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.
34a. The EEPROM 300 performs the well known data address translation so that data can be read from and written to 34a.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, which includes the error bit.
Even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used as the M234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images based on erroneous data.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks in the NAND flash memory 234a and prevents access to the defective data blocks.
The MPU 231 and the image controller 237 each store data in the NAND flash memory 234a.
Without considering the address positions of different defective data blocks,
4 can be easily accessed.
Even if the flash memory 234a is used, the access control to the character ROM 234 can be prevented from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND type flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the buffer RAM 234.
If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from N
The data is read from the AND type flash memory 234a (or the NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process and writes the data corresponding to the specified address onto the bus line 24.
0 to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237.

The buffer RAM 234c is configured with two banks, each of which is a NAND
The ROM controller 234b can set one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a. This allows the ROM controller 234b to output data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other bank, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page of data including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. This allows the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 to be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. The NOR ROM 234d stores a first program storage area 234a1 for storing, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231.
At least a program memory area 234d1 is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes this boot program. As a result, the display control device 114
In the first program memory area 23, various controls can be executed.
4d1 is one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e.,
The first program storage area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, within the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set appropriately in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code and also points the instruction pointer 23
1a, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d first, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, and then the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d first, and then the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads the program from the NOR ROM 234d.
The instruction code at the corresponding address in the program stored in the buffer R34c is read out.
The data is read from the AM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

In this embodiment, all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 23.
4a, the boot program is stored in the MPU after the system reset is released.
The reason why the predetermined number of instructions, beginning with the instruction to be processed first by 231, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d is as follows: That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to the NAND flash memory in that, when reading data of the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time from reading the data to setting it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H".
Therefore, the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, the display control device 1
There is a risk that control of the third pattern display device 81 at 14 will not start immediately.

In contrast, since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in the NOR type ROM 234d, the address "0000H" can be read from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released.
When the address "0000H" is specified, the character ROM 234 immediately sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "00
00H" can be received, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 that stores a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., control programs other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first transfers the data in the first program storage area 234 to the data table storage area 233b.
According to the boot program read from the second program memory area 234a1, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a, using a bank of the buffer RAM 234c different from the bank in which the boot program of the first program memory area 234d1 is set.

Here, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is
As described above, since the capacity is equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, when the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H" and the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c,
The boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is read from the program storage area 233 in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1.
When transferring the boot program to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the other bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, and then moves the instruction pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a.
In this way, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231
The MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes.
Instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having a program storage area 233a and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having a program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the following:
The remaining boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included. Meanwhile, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table, which will be described later) are all stored in the second program storage area 233b.
4a1, a predetermined amount is stored in the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 23
At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231
Specifically, the second predetermined address is set to the initialization process (see S2401 in FIG. 821) that is executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S2401 in FIG. 821) that is stored in the program storage area 233a.
1 (see S2402 in FIG. 1) is set to the start address of the program.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b.
The various processes are executed using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the program.

Therefore, most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 23, which has a slow read speed.
Even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the character ROM 234 and the program storage area 23 of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released,
By transferring the control program to the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is made up of a high-speed DRAM, and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

As described above, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, starting from the instruction that is to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The remaining boot program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234d.
Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the program storage area 233a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a.
By simply adding the OM 234d, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and therefore the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 that accompanies the shortened start-up time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 801) transmitted from the MPU 231, and develops the image in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later, and outputs the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs parallel processing of the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed.
Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 823(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image.
In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the next frame of image and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive an image drawing instruction from MPU 231 at each image drawing and display processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the drawing and display processing of an image have not been completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes the process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that images are drawn using image data stored in resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while the NAND type flash memory facilitates large capacity ROM, the read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, the character ROM 234a, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, can be read at the time of drawing an image.
Since there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from 34, the time required for such reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display has been decided by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Furthermore, when the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the display control device 114 controls the MPU 231 to transfer image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed.
is configured to instruct the image controller 237. As described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw an image, but when drawing an image, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, and the time required for reading can be omitted, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Moreover, by storing image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured with a 132-kbyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data to the image controller 2 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list.
The instruction to transfer image data to the character ROM 234 includes the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and information on the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236).
The address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) is included in the data.
The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included.

The image controller 237 reads the character data from the character ROM 23 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction.
One block of data is read from a predetermined address of the video RAM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is read out from the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.
Then, the process is repeated until all image data stored in the storage destination address range from the storage destination start address to the storage destination end address specified by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a period of time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is
a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time.
It is possible to prevent the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data while the image data is being transferred to the normal video RAM 236.
By occupying 236, the video RAMs 235, 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, which prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from being completed in time.

Also, the buffer RAM 234c is used to store the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM
Since the transfer of image data to 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 stores image data transferred from the character ROM 234.
The images are stored without being overwritten while the power is on. The power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character design area 235e, and the error message image area 235f are provided. In addition, the power-on variable image area 235b,
At least a third pattern area 235d is provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on.
The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing data corresponding to a power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until all image data to be resident therein is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variable image to display the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when a game is started by a player while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231
34 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image to the power-on main image area 235a (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 821).

Here, the power-on variable image will be described with reference to Fig. 796. Fig. 796 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 transfers image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after power-on, the display control device 114 reads image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 into the power-on main image area 235a.
When the image is transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b, the image is transferred to the resident video RAM 2
The remaining image data to be stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 35.
While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the image data shown in FIG.
When the power is turned on, the main image shown in 96 (a) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

At this time, when the display variable pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variable pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variable pattern, is received, the display control device 114 displays the power-on variable image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image, as shown in FIG. 796(b), and the power-on variable image with a "○" pattern at the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image, as shown in FIG.
As shown in Fig. 796(c), the power-on variable image of the "X" symbol is displayed alternately in the same position as the "○" symbol during the variable period.Then, the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 110 is determined from the display variable pattern command and the display stop type command sent from the voice lamp control unit 113 based on the variable pattern command and the stop type command from the main control unit 110, and if it is a "special symbol big win", the image shown in Fig. 796(b) is displayed for a certain period after the variable performance stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Fig. 795(c) is displayed for a certain period after the variable performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can check the operation of the resident video RAM 235 without worrying that the operation is stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
It is possible to wait until the transfer of image data to 35 is completed.

In addition, during operation checks at factories during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, the character R
By using a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the OM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

In addition, when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected entering the first entrance ball 64a or the second entrance ball 64b, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always present in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Fig. 796 (b) and (c) on the third symbol display device 81. This allows a simple variable performance to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b. Therefore, while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the first entrance ball 6
When a ball is detected in number 4, a corresponding variable effect can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 795, the explanation will be continued. The rear image area 235c is the third symbol display device 81
797 and 798, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. FIG. 797 and FIG. 798 are explanatory diagrams for explaining three types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 797(a) shows the rear image A corresponding to the "town stage", FIG. 797(b) shows the rear image B corresponding to the "sky stage", and FIG. 798 shows the rear image C corresponding to the "island stage".

Of the rear faces A to C, the rear face images corresponding to the rear faces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 797, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81.
The character image is stored in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") prepared for each of the backs A and B are configured so that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images covering the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "town stage" or "sky stage", the MPU 231 first sets the corresponding back image between position a and position a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the display area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third symbol display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

On the other hand, the rear image on the rear surface C changes with time as shown in FIG.
98 are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → .... Specifically, on the back C, an image of a mountain towering over the island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the displayed positions are fixed.
1. Meanwhile, the image of the sky above the mountains changes color over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage" by the player operating the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 798(a) is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear C.
In the rear image shown in FIG. 798(a), an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to a vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, the rear image shown in FIG. 798(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 798(b), a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has passed, the rear image shown in FIG. 798(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 798(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually starts to turn white from black, and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, the display returns to the rear image shown in FIG. 798(a), and the images shown in FIGS. 798(a) to (
The rear image of c) is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described.
2, image data for the entire range of rear face A, that is, corresponding to positions a to d, is all stored in rear face image area 235c of resident video RAM 235. Usually, a game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the town stage, is displayed, so by making all image data for rear face A corresponding to the frequently displayed town stage resident in rear face image area 235c, the number of data accesses to character ROM 234 can be reduced and the load on display control device 114 can be alleviated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 797(b), the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage transmits only image data corresponding to a part of the rear surface, that is, the image between the position a and the position b, to the resident video RA.
The back image C corresponding to the island stage is stored in the back image area 235c of M235.
Image data corresponding to the rear images between Figures 798(a) and (b), including Figure 798(a) and excluding Figure 798(b), is stored and remains resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after power is turned on.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's will. Therefore, in order to change the rear image immediately when the frame button 22 is operated at any timing, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235.
In that case, a RAM with a very large capacity must be used as the resident video RAM 235, which may lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is first displayed when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a' or the range of Fig. 798 (a) to (b), and the image between position a and position b including the initial position or Fig. 798 (a) to (b) is
The image data corresponding to the image between the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.
Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, when the stage is changed at any timing by the player operating the frame button 22, the back image area 235 of the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the
By using the image data resident in the third symbol display device 81, the initial positions of the backs B and C can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately, and the backs B and C can be displayed while changing the scroll display or color tone over time.
Since only image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored,
This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the AM 235, and thus makes it possible to suppress an increase in costs.

For rear surface B, the range from position a to position b is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to images from position b' to position d can be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. As a result, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled, so that after the range from position a to position b is scrolled using image data stored in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred to normal video RAM 236 without delay.
Using image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the third pattern display device 81, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, for rear C, after the image in the initial position is displayed, the range of figures 798(a)-(b) is set so that while the images in figures 798(a)-(b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data of the images corresponding to figures 798(b)-(c) and figures 798(c)-(a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.
While the images in a) to (b) are displayed, Figs. 798(b) to (c) and Fig. 798(c)
Since the image data corresponding to the images in (a) through (c) can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be used to
798(a)-(b) are displayed, the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the images shown in FIG. 798(b)-(c) and FIG.
The images c) to (a) can be displayed sequentially on the third pattern display device 81 over time.

In addition, for rear surface B and rear surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear surface images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 795) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear surface image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear surface images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear surface images can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the rear B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 have a difference in position b'.
The image data corresponding to the images between position a and position b are stored in a duplicated manner.
Under the control of the image controller 237 by the resident video RAM 235, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.
Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the image at position b
By displaying the image from ' on the third pattern display device 81, the background image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth transition.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions c and d as a display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, and then the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to display the image between positions a and a' as a display area on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection, as if they flow to the left.

Returning to FIG. 795, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is a third symbol display device 81
In other words, the third pattern area 235d is an area for storing image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 main patterns (see FIG. 782) numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data stored in the NAND flash memory 2
Even if the third symbol display device 81 is used, the third symbol display device 81 can start the variable performance quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, the first
It is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the variable performance is not immediately started in the third pattern display device 81 even though the variable performance has already started in the pattern display device 37.

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to main patterns that are not numbered "0" to "9", such as a main pattern consisting of a rear pattern such as a wooden box, and a main pattern consisting of a rear pattern and an additional pattern imitating a character such as a plane, a furoshiki, or a helmet, are also stored. These image data are used for a demo performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has elapsed since one variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a main pattern without a number is displayed as the third pattern in the demo performance. Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state by visually recognizing the main pattern without a number from the display image of the third pattern display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed in accordance with various effects, and the data corresponding to these are stored in the character symbol area 235e, so that the display control device 11
In the case of No. 4, when the character design is changed based on the contents of a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read from the character ROM 234, but rather the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235 is read, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed instantly even if the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the type of the error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error.
Since image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 can display the following based on the received error command:
By reading out image data that is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, each error message image can be instantly drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to an error message from the character ROM 234, and therefore eliminates the need to read out image data corresponding to an error message from the character ROM 234.
Even if a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the memory 34, an error message corresponding to the error command can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

MPU 231 instructs image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area in which the type of image data should be stored, among the sub-areas provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236. In response to this, image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by MPU 231 from character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified predetermined sub-area of image storage area 236a via buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 develops one frame of image in the frame buffer by writing one frame of image drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and while developing the image in one frame buffer, reads out one frame of image information developed earlier from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, while simultaneously reading out an image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer, and outputs the image to the third pattern display device 81.
The image of one frame that has been read out can be displayed on the LCD.

The frame buffer that develops one frame of image and the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read out to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are as follows:
Every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of an image is completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image.
When the frame buffer 236b is specified, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, and a program storage area 233e.
, transfer data table buffer 233e, pointer 233f, drawing list area 233g
, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs from the character ROM 234, transfers them to the work RAM 233, and stores them in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter
As described above, the work RA executes various controls using the control program stored in the work RA.
Since M233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed.
Even if the control program is stored in a character ROM 234 composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complex presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

The data table storage area 233b is an area which stores a display data table which describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance which is displayed based on a command from the main control unit 110, and a transfer data table which specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance which is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 234 in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.
Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 23
The data table stored in the data table storage area 233b is used to control the display of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the work RAM 233 is made of DRAM, so that the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, the character RO which is made of the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for various data tables is not read.
Even when stored in M234, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complex presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

Here, the various data tables will be described in detail. First, the display data table is
One is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control unit 110, and for example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, round presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is a performance that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating the miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is any of the jackpots, the stop pattern indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed.

The round effect is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds that will be started, and the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, as described above, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the hall staff can recognize that the game is not being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round performance and the demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 patterns of the set variable performance, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for each variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables. Similarly, the pseudo variable data table, which is the display data table for the performance during the big win state, is prepared with the number of tables according to the set variable performance pattern.

Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at a time corresponding to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed in the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that makes up one frame's worth of image, and also specifies drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the type of sprite.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite is to be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to the magnification ratio is specified. If the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is information for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through the image. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information for specifying the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame corresponding to each address are specified, and drawing information for each sprite, such as one back image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and letters, is specified for each address.
Incidentally, one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information are constant over time, so that only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This rear type is information for specifying whether to display one of the rears A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or to display a rear image different from the rears A to C. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from the rears A to C is to be displayed, the rear type is also described with information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back faces A to C as the drawing target, and determines the range of the back face image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from the back faces A to C is to be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed based on the back face type.

In this embodiment, the case where only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the back image that was displayed at the stage when the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information includes, depending on the type of the rear surface, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed and information indicating the time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed.
The display may indicate either the information indicating the elapsed time since the display of the third pattern display device 81 was started, or the type information of the position information together with the back surface type and position information (for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, or drawing of an image based on a display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81)
Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) are described with symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The reason for specifying the offset information rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol is that the display of the third symbol in the variable performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous variable performance and the stop symbol of the current variable performance, and the symbol offset information from the start of the change until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is recorded. This allows the fluctuation performance to be stopped at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third pattern is assigned a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third pattern, and by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the predetermined time for switching from the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance is set to be the time during which the third symbol is displayed variably at high speed. While the third symbol is displayed variably at high speed, the third symbol is not visible to the player, so that even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped symbols of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped symbols of the current variable performance during that time, so that the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H", describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 799) describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table.
For each address between the address containing the information, there is written a drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table.

The MPU 231 controls the voice and lamp control device 11 based on commands from the main control device 110.
The display data table to be used is selected according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) sent from the third pattern display device 81, and the selected display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, while the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time a drawing process for one frame is completed, and the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 801) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this manner, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 controls the main control device 110
A command (e.g.,
Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in accordance with a display variable pattern command, etc., the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed by simply performing the simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table.
It is prepared in accordance with the display data table prepared for each performance, as described above.
Image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table that are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the character ROM 23.
4 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof.

If all image data of sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, thereby making it possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table stores transfer data information for image data of a sprite (hereinafter referred to as "image data to be transferred") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table (address "
(These are "0001H" and "0097H"). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, Null data is specified, which means that there is no transfer target image data at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (see FIG. 80).
The corresponding address is "0002H" in 0.

The transfer data information includes the character ROM in which the transfer target image data is stored.
the start address (the start address of the source) and the end address (the end address of the source) of H.234,
And the top address of the destination (normal video RAM 236) is included.

In addition, in the first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written, as in the display data table, and in the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of Fig. 799), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is written. Then, in each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address where the "End" information is written, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is written.

The MPU 231 controls the voice and lamp control device 11 based on commands from the main control device 110.
801), which will be described later, is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite, which should be transferred at that time, is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 800, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at the corresponding address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to the image controller 237.
If the address is "0002H", null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred and transfer should begin there. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the generated drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to the specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite is started in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table,
Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a can be used to draw a specified sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is reliably transferred to the character ROM 23 at the desired timing.
4 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the transfer data table, a character RO is
The transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the M234 to the normal video RAM 236. This allows the transfer of the image data to be managed for each sprite, and
Since the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be controlled on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in the load imposed by the transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

In addition, the transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and specifies transfer data information for image data to be transferred, which should begin to be transferred at the time indicated by an address specified in the display data table, in correspondence with that address. Therefore, the timing for starting transfer can be instructed so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a which has a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Fig. 796 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Fig. 796 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c indicates that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image is stored in the power-on main image area 23 of the resident video RAM.
5a or the power-on variable image area 235b, it is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 821) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2405 in FIG. 821). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S3405 in FIG. 831(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see FIG. 823).
(b) S2701), if the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (FIG. 823 (
On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the main control device 110
In response to a command sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from
A command determination process (see FIGS. 824 to 827) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 828 to 830) are executed so that various images can be displayed.

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 831(a)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 831(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83(b)) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.
2) is carried out.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110.
Based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, the U231
The performance mode to be displayed on the pattern display device 81 is determined, a display data table corresponding to the performance mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 801) which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 for each frame, based on the drawing contents specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 806) for each frame, which describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237, based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while incrementing the pointer 233f by one. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that when all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared, so the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, is specified (
That is, if no null data is written), a drawing list (see FIG. 801) is generated for each frame, which describes image drawing instructions to the image controller 237.
The transfer data information is added to the

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is for designating an address for acquiring the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once in accordance with the storage of the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting process (see S2703 in FIG. 823(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 828) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 801) described later, and also specifies the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
At that time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should start is obtained, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

As a result, the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed.
Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in drawing a sprite is always stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table.
In this way, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to Fig. 801. Fig. 801 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of image. As shown in Fig. 801,
The background image used in the frame image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects (effect 1, effect 2, ...), characters (character 1, character 2,
For each sprite, such as a reserved ball number pattern 1, a reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., an error pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes predetermined image data stored in the character ROM 234 for the image controller 237.
Transfer data information for transferring data from the video RAM 236 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored.
M236) and its address are described, and the image controller 237
The image data of the sprite is obtained from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes the display position coordinates,
The information includes the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information, and the image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter designation information using a method designated by the information, and then draws the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates.The image controller 237 then writes the drawn image to the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.
36c.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, or a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the sprite (display object) data is stored in the RAM
The type and address are generated according to the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed.
Depending on the sprite type, U231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 selects, in one frame of image,
Rearrange the sprites in order from the sprite that should be placed in the back to the sprite that should be placed in the front.
Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite is described. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the background image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the back side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the front side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at an address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (character RO in which the transfer target image data is stored) to the transfer data table buffer 233e.
The image controller 237 adds to the end of the drawing list the storage start address and storage end address in M234 and the storage start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the image data to be transferred is to be stored. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 adds to the end of the drawing list the transfer data information in the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information.
The image data is read from a predetermined area (an area indicated by the starting address and ending address of the storage source) of the normal video RAM 236 and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the presentation time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed, the time counter 2 is started every time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 823(b)) is executed by the MPU 231.
33h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 828).
When the value of 3h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 resets the display data table buffer 233d
It is determined that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in has ended, and various processes that should be performed in accordance with the end of the effect are executed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates whether the corresponding image data is stored in the resident video RAM 23.
5, the flag indicates the storage state, which indicates whether image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 or not.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is set by the MPU 23 during main processing when the power is turned on.
The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 832) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Moreover, image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "OFF".

Furthermore, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i to determine whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3513 in FIG. 832). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 832) and the image controller 237 is made to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer process for that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data from being stored in the character ROM.
This makes it possible to suppress transfer of the image data from the display control device 114 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each section of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is used to select from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer") into which an image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded.
When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, information on this designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 833).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which an image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded in the designated drawing target buffer.
7, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, reads out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transfers the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a display process to display an image on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". In this way, the drawing target buffer is updated to the first frame buffer 236b every time a drawing list is sent.
The drawing list is sent each time the MPU 231 executes the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 823(b)) based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed (S36 in FIG. 833).
See 02).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is used as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image.
When the frame buffer 236b is specified, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image is expanded, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is developed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the seventeenth embodiment>
Next, referring to the flowcharts of FIG. 802 to FIG. 816, the MP in the main control unit 110
The control processes executed by the MPU 201 will be described below. The processes executed by the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into a start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, a main process which is executed after the start-up process, a timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment), and a timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment).
and NMI interrupt processing which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the MI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the start-up processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 802 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101
That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switches is judged and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (249 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and
When the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0.
The updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second winning random number counter C3 are updated (S103).
, and the second winning random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (249, 199, 199, and 239, respectively, in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, CS1, and C3 are
The data is stored in the corresponding buffer area of M203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed to set a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, which is a process for displaying the third symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S
104), and then executes a start winning process associated with a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64a or the second ball entry port 64b (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figs. 803 to 808.

After the start winning process is executed, a normal symbol variation process is executed (S106), which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, and a through gate passing process is executed in association with the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67 (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to Figs. 809 and 810. After the through gate passing process is executed, a launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is executed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch has not been operated.
This is a process for determining whether or not the ball launch is on. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG.
This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 802), and is a process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation display of the third symbol performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in a jackpot (S201). The special symbol jackpot includes the time when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including the time when the special symbol jackpot is being played) and the time during a predetermined period of time after the special symbol jackpot is played. If the special symbol is currently in a jackpot (S201: Yes) as a result of the determination, the process is terminated.

If the special symbol is not in the big win state (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and if the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special symbol) is obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes),
s), subtract 1 from the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c (S205), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 813) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and sets the extracted value as the RA.
The number of balls stored in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b of M223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of S206, the special pattern reserved ball storage area 2
In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207).
A process is performed to shift the data in the execution area in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, a jackpot determination process is performed (S208) to determine whether or not a special symbol jackpot has been obtained based on the data shifted to the execution area. The jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 804.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S20
2: Yes), and determine whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (S209). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected from the change pattern selection table 202f based on the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the change time of the change display being executed has elapsed (
S209: Yes), and set the display mode corresponding to the stop pattern of the first pattern display device 37 (
The setting of the stop symbols is performed in the jackpot setting process (S3
08), or in advance by the loss setting process (S309) described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S210 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (the current lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set according to the jackpot type (S212).

In the process of S211, if the result of this lottery is a miss for the special pattern (S211: No
), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving state counter stored in the various setting value storage area 203e is 1 or more (S213), and if the value of the time-saving state counter is 1 or more (S213: Yes),
The time-saving state counter is decremented by 1 (S214), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the time-saving state counter is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped, and the process ends.

Next, the big win determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 804. FIG. 804 shows the big win determination process (S208
This big win determination process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 803) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 802).
Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a lottery (a win/loss judgment) is performed for a "special symbol big win" or a "special symbol miss."
The performance pattern of the variable performance performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 (
This is a process for determining the variable presentation pattern.

In the jackpot determination process, first, a first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for a low probability of winning is selected from the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202,
The table is set to determine whether or not a special symbol is a big win (S301). After that, the probability variable state flag stored in the various setting value storage area 203e is read (S30
2), and determine whether the probability of winning the special symbol is high or not (S3
03).

As a result of the process of S303, if it is determined that the special symbol has a high probability state (S303: Y
es), a first winning random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability is read out from the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202, and a first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability is read out as a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a high probability state (i.e., the special symbol is in a low probability state) as a result of the process of S303 (S303: No), the process of S304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S305), and the read value of the first winning random number counter C1 and S
301 or a table (a comparison source table) for determining whether or not the special symbol set in the process of S304 is a jackpot (S306).

As described above, the first winning random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability includes the following:
The random number values for the special symbol jackpot are set to three values: "7, 107, and 240." In the first winning random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability, the random number values for the special symbol jackpot are set to three values: "4, 11, 15, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, and 8.
3, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160,
168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 238, 249."
In the process of S306, the random number values defined in the table set as the comparison source table among these tables are compared one by one with the value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Based on this comparison, it is determined whether the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches any of the random number values defined in the table to be compared (S307), and if there is a matching random number value (i.e., in the case of a jackpot with a special symbol), a jackpot setting process is executed to set the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot and the control during the jackpot (S308).
On the other hand, if there is no matching random number in the process of S307 (i.e., if the special symbol is not selected), a setting process for setting the variation pattern when the symbol is not selected is executed (S309), and the process proceeds to S310. For details of the setting process for the big win (S308) and the setting process for the loss (S309),
This will be described later with reference to Figures 805 to 807.

Next, in the process of S310, the various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared (S310), and this process ends.
Even in the case of a jackpot, the random number value (counter value) that results in a jackpot can be cleared before the jackpot state begins. This makes it difficult to illegally obtain the random number value that results in a jackpot with a special pattern from outside, and thus it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts of analyzing the timing at which the random number value that results in a jackpot appears and winning the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Specifically, it is possible to set the analyzed timing on a so-called hanging board, obtain a random number at the timing at which the random number value that results in a jackpot appears, and suppress fraudulent acts of controlling the device to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred. Note that in this embodiment,
Although the various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared during the big win determination process (see FIG. 804), the present invention is not limited to this, and the counter values may be cleared before the player recognizes that the big win state has occurred. Therefore, for example, the process of clearing the counter buffer may be executed during a variable performance or before the symbols stop.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state, the first winning random number table for low probability is set once in the process of S301 in order to set a comparison table early.
In the case where the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability or the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability is not set, even if a malfunction occurs in which the intermediate processes of S303 and S304 are skipped due to the influence of noise or the like, the first winning random number table 202 for low probability set at the beginning of the big win determination process can be used.
Based on a1, it is possible to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won.

Next, referring to Fig. 805, the jackpot time setting process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. As described above, this jackpot time setting process is a process for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot and the control during the jackpot.

In this process, first, the jackpot flag in the various setting value storage area 203e is set to ON (
S401), and then the value of the first winning type counter C2 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 to identify the type of the currently won jackpot (S402). Specifically, the type of jackpot corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 is identified based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 785(b)). For example, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80", the counter value is within the range of "0" to "99", so the current jackpot type is identified as jackpot A (time-saving jackpot). Also, for example, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "190", the counter value is within the range of "180" to "200", so the current jackpot type is identified as jackpot A (time-saving jackpot).
Since it is within the range of "194", the type of jackpot this time is jackpot C (latent jackpot)
It is identified as follows.

Next, the setting value corresponding to the identified big win type is read from the game result setting table 202h in the ROM 202, and the read setting value is set in the corresponding memory area of the various setting value storage area 203e in the RAM 203 (S403), and the process proceeds to S404. Here, the setting values read from the game result setting table 202h and set in the various setting value storage area 203e include the lighting pattern (number of displayed symbols) of the LED 37a, information indicating the stopping symbols of the special symbols (stopping symbol code), and the control pattern (large opening pattern) of the specific winning port (large opening) 65a.

As described above, when reading out setting value data from ROM 202 and setting it in RAM 203, first, the source address data and destination address data are temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers of register 210. Then, the setting value data read out from ROM 202 based on the stored source address data is temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers in which no address data is stored, and the setting value is transferred (set) to the address in RAM 203 indicated by the destination address data. In the process of S403, this transfer control via register 210 is repeated the number of times equal to the number of pieces of setting value data to be transferred.

In the process of S402, the type of big win is identified from the random number value (counter value), and in S403
In the process, various setting values are determined based on the identified big win type, but the range of random numbers (counter values) and various setting values may be directly associated with each other. In other words, a table that specifies the range of random numbers (counter values) and the corresponding various setting values may be provided in the ROM 202, and the setting value may be directly determined from the random number value by referring to the table.

In the process of S404, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and is compared with the winning selection table 202d1 of the fluctuation type selection table 202d to select the fluctuation type data (S404). For example, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "10", the value "01H" corresponding to the winning long reach is selected as the fluctuation type data. Also, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "190", the value "02H" corresponding to the winning super reach is selected as the fluctuation type data.

Next, the selected fluctuation type data is compared with the offset setting table 202e to determine the pattern selection offset value (S405). Specifically, if the selected fluctuation type data is "00H", "00H" is determined as the pattern selection offset value, if the fluctuation type data is "01H", "01H" is determined as the pattern selection offset value, and if the fluctuation type data is "02H", "02H" is determined as the pattern selection offset value.

Then, based on the determined pattern selection offset value, the variation pattern selection table 2
The variation pattern type is specified from 02f (S406). More specifically, the variation pattern type specified in the address that is the pattern selection offset value ahead of 1AF5H, which is the top address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is specified as the variation pattern type for the current pattern variation. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is "01H", the "Win Long Reach" specified in 1A6FH, which is the address that is "01H" ahead of address 1AF5H, is specified as the variation type for the current pattern variation.

Then, a variation pattern command based on the identified variation pattern type is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S407). The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 813) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later.

After the variation pattern is set, a game result setting value acquisition process is executed (S408), which is a process for acquiring and setting offset information, which is information for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot, at the end of the jackpot, and then this process is terminated.

Next, the game result setting value acquisition process (S408) will be described with reference to FIG. 806. The game result setting value acquisition process (S408) is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and stores an offset value based on the lottery result of the special symbol in the RAM 203.
This is a process to keep the information in the memory.

In the game result setting value acquisition process (S408), first, an offset value based on the current big win type is read from the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 790(b)).
For example, if the current big win type is big win C, the offset value is set to "
02H" is read out. The read offset value is then stored in the various setting value storage area 20
The offset value is stored in the offset value storage area of 3e (S502), and the process ends.

The offset value stored in the offset value storage area of the various setting value storage area 203e in the process of S502 is held until the end of the jackpot, and is used to determine the data to be read from the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 791(a)) in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 815), which is a process for setting the state after the jackpot ends. In this way, the random number value (counter value) obtained with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (initial winning) is converted into an offset value and stored in the offset value storage area, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set based on the offset value, so that the period during which the random number value itself that results in a jackpot with a special pattern is held can be limited to a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value that results in a jackpot with a special pattern to be illegally obtained from outside.

Next, referring to FIG. 807, in the big win determination process (S208), a process is executed to set the mode of the variation pattern when the current lottery result is determined to be a miss of the special symbol.
The loss setting process (S309) will now be described.

In the loss setting process, first, the special chart 1 specified in the variable type selection table 202d is
Among the loss selection table 202d2 (see FIG. 787(a)) or the special chart 2 loss selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 787(b)), a table corresponding to the ball entry hole into which the ball entered is read out, and a fluctuation type data value corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected (S6
01). Here, the table corresponding to the ball entrance through which the ball entered is the special ball 1 miss selection table 202d2 (see FIG. 787(a)) if the ball entrance through which the ball entered is the first ball entrance 64a.
If the ball is in the second ball inlet 64b, the selection table 2 for special ball 2 is selected.
02d3 (see Figure 787 (b)).

After the process of S601 is completed, a pattern selection offset value is selected from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 788) based on the selected value of the variable type data and the current number of reserved balls (i.e., the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c) (S602). For example,
If the value of the variation type data is "03H" and the number of reserved balls is "2", then "05H" is selected as the pattern selection offset value. Also, if the value of the variation type data is "09H", then "12H" is selected as the pattern selection offset value regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Then, based on the determined pattern selection offset value, the variation pattern selection table 2
The type of fluctuation pattern is specified from address 1AF5H, which is the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, by the pattern selection offset value (S406). More specifically, the type of fluctuation pattern specified in the address that is the pattern selection offset value ahead of address 1AF5H, which is the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, is specified as the type of fluctuation pattern for this symbol fluctuation. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is "05H", then "Complete Miss C (Special Figure 1)" specified in address 1AFAH, which is "05H" ahead of address 1AF5H, is selected. In other words, the type of miss in which no reach occurs with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is determined as the type of fluctuation pattern. Also, for example, if the pattern selection offset value is "12H", then address 1B, which is "12H" ahead of address 1AF5H, is selected.
The "miss long reach (special chart 2)" specified in 07H is selected. That is, the miss state with a reach of 17 seconds of fluctuation time is determined as the fluctuation pattern type.

Next, a fluctuation pattern command based on the selected fluctuation pattern type is set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203 (S604), and this process is terminated.
The variation pattern command set here is output to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1101) of the main processing (see FIG. 813) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later.
is sent towards.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 791), and is a process for determining whether or not there is a win (start winning) at the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b, and for executing a reservation process of the values indicated by various random number counters when there is a start winning.

When the start winning process is executed, first, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b.
In this example, the first ball entrance 64a,
Alternatively, a ball entering the second ball entrance 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes.
When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (S601
: Yes), the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c (the number of reserved times N of the variable display of the special pattern) is obtained (S702), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Then, it is checked whether there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (S701: N
o), or if there is a winning entry into the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b but the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning entry into the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (S701: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not less than 4 (S702: No), the process ends and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.
If the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c (N)
The special symbol reserved ball number counter 2 is then incremented by 1 (S704).
A reserved ball count command indicating the value of 03c is set (S705).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 813) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of S705, the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing S
The values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in the process of 103 are stored in the first area among the vacant reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S
In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to.
If the value is 0, the reserved area 1 will be the initial area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 will be the initial area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 will be the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 will be the initial area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S706, the lottery result for the special symbol is calculated (whether or not it is a jackpot), and the stop type (if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type),
The variation pattern is predicted (S707).
The value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the process of 606 is compared one by one with the random number (winning value) stored in the first winning random number table 202a. As described above, the random number for the special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is low is stored in the first winning random number table 202a1 for the special symbol low probability.
The random numbers for the special symbol jackpot when the special symbol has a high probability are stored in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability, i.e., "4, 11, 15, 2
8, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 12
2, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 21
There are 30 of them: 8, 222, 231, 238, 249.

In addition, whether the current state is a low probability state of the special symbol or a high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability state flag stored in the various setting value storage area 203e. Specifically, if the probability state flag is on, the special symbol is in a high probability state, and if the probability state flag is off, the special symbol is in a low probability state. In the process of S707, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 20 according to the state of the probability state flag are read.
The random number stored in the random number storage unit 2a is compared with the random number stored in the random number storage unit 2b, and if these values match, it is determined that a special symbol jackpot has been awarded.

If it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 stored in the process of S706 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table to determine which of the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) it is. As described above,
The big win type is determined by the value of the first win type counter C2 and the first win type selection table 20
2b (see FIG. 785(b)).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special pattern is a miss, the type of the variation pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined to be a complete miss, a miss short reach, a miss long reach, or a miss super reach, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the processing of S706. As described above, the type of the variation pattern at the time of a miss is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 789) based on the pattern selection offset value, which is converted from the value of the variation type counter CS1.

By the process of S707, the winning or losing of the lottery for the special pattern, the stop type (the big win type in the case of a big win), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted, and then the predicted winning or losing of the lottery,
A winning information command including the predicted stop type and the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S70
8) Return to timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 802).

Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 809. FIG. 809 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106).
) is executed during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 802) and is a process for controlling the varying display of the second pattern in the second pattern display device 83 and the opening time of the electric device associated with the second ball entrance 64b.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S801). The normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the electric role associated with the second ball entrance 64b is being controlled to open and close. If the result of the determination is that the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S601: Yes), the process ends.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not winning (S801: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802).
If the display mode of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not changing (S802: No),
Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d for the normal symbol (M) is obtained (S803). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter for the normal symbol is greater than 0 (S804).
If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S804: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (
S805).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S806
In the process of S806, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the reserved area 1 → execution area, the reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 →
The data in each area is shifted from the reserved area 2 to the reserved area 4 to the reserved area 3, etc. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (S807).

Next, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols (S808). Specifically, if the value of the time-saving state counter stored in the various setting value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability variable state flag is on, it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state for normal symbols.

In the process of S808, if it is determined that the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress (S808: Yes),
), and judge whether or not the current time is a special symbol jackpot (S809). The special symbol jackpot includes the time when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) and the time during a predetermined period after the special symbol jackpot game ends. If the result of the judgment is that the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S809: Yes), the process proceeds to S811. In this embodiment, the special symbol jackpot is configured to be unlikely to result in a normal symbol jackpot. This is because, during the special symbol jackpot (i.e., during the special game state), the player hits the ball to make it enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the electric device attached to the second ball entrance 64b is opened to prevent the ball intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entrance 64b as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entry hole 64a, the ball is prevented from entering the second ball entry hole 64b during a big win of a special symbol, but many balls enter the first ball entry hole 64a. As a result, in most cases, the pachinko machine 10
While the game is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64a becomes maximum (4 times).

In the process of S809, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S809: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, so the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal symbol is a win is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C3 obtained in the process of S807 and the normal symbol win random number table for high probability (
S810). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C3 is compared with the random number stored in the high probability normal symbol winning random number table. As described above, if the value of the second winning type counter C3 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol.
If it is within the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is judged to be a normal pattern miss (Figure 78
See 5(c)).

In the process of S808, if it is determined that the time-saving state of the normal pattern is not in effect (i.e., the normal state of the normal pattern is in effect) (S808: No), the process proceeds to S811. In the process of S811, since the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot of a special pattern or is in a normal state of a normal pattern, the result of the lottery as to whether or not the normal pattern is a win is obtained based on the value of the second win random number counter C3 obtained in the process of S807 and the normal pattern win random number table for low probability (S811). Specifically, the value of the second win random number counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal pattern win random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second win type counter C3 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the normal pattern is a win, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is determined that the normal pattern is a miss (see FIG. 785(c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S810 or S811 is a winning normal symbol (S812), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (S812: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S813). In the process of S813, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, it is set so that the "○" symbol is lit and displayed as the stopping symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state of the normal symbol is in effect (S814), and if it is determined that the time-saving state of the normal symbol is in effect (S814: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in a jackpot (S815).
es), and proceed to the process of S817. In this embodiment, in order to prevent the ball from entering the second ball entrance 64b as much as possible during a big win of a special symbol, even if a normal symbol wins, the number of times and the opening time of the electric role are set in the same way as when the normal symbol is lost.

In the process of S815, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S815: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, so the opening period of the electric role associated with the second ball entrance 64b is set to 1 second, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S816), and the process proceeds to S819. In the process of S814, if it is determined that the time-saving state of the normal symbol is not in (i.e., the normal state of the normal symbol) (S814: No), the process proceeds to S817. In the process of S817, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the opening period of the electric role associated with the second ball entrance 64b is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S817), and the process proceeds to S819.

In the process of S812, if it is determined that the normal pattern is a miss (S812: N
o), and set the display mode when the winning combination is lost (S818). In the process of S818, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode when the winning combination is lost is completed, the process proceeds to S819.

In the process of S819, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress (S819). If it is determined that the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in progress (S819: Yes), the variable time of the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S820), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving state of the normal pattern is not in progress (i.e., the normal state of the normal pattern is in progress) (S81
9: No), and set the variable display time of the second symbol display device 83 to 30 seconds (
S821), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during a big win of a special symbol, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short, from "30 seconds to 3 seconds," compared to when the probability of a normal symbol is low. Furthermore, the release period of the electric device associated with the second ball entrance 64b is shortened to "0.2 seconds x 1
Since the time required for the ball to enter the hole is extremely long (1 time → 1 second × 2 times), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the hole 64b.

In the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S80
2: Yes), and determine whether the variable display time executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S822). Note that the variable display time here is a time that is preset by the process of S820 or the process of S821 before the variable display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S822, if the change time has not elapsed (S822: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S822, if the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (S822: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S823
In the process of S823, if the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning combination and the display mode is set by the process of S813, the second symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (illuminated symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is a losing combination and the display mode is set by the process of S818, the second symbol "×" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (illuminated symbol).
The second symbol display device 83 is set to display the symbol as stopped (illuminated). S823
When the stop display is set by the processing, when the second pattern display update processing (see S1207) of the main processing (see FIG. 813) is next executed, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern (lit up) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S813 or the processing of S818.

Next, when the variable display being executed is started on the second symbol display device 83, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable process (the current lottery result) is a winning normal symbol (S824).
4: Yes), and set the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second ball entrance 64b (S825
), this process ends. When the opening and closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S825, the opening and closing control of the electric role is started when the electric role opening and closing process (see S1205) of the main process (see FIG. 813) is executed next, and the opening and closing control of the electric role is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set by the process of S816 or the process of S817 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S824, if the result of this lottery is a miss for the normal pattern (S824: N
o), skip the process of S825 and end this process.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 810. FIG. 810 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107).
107) is executed within the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 802) and is a process for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67, and if a ball has passed through, for obtaining and retaining the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C3.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (
S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S901: Yes),
s), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display in the normal symbol M
) (S902). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S903).

If the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S901: No), or if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 but the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not less than 4 (S903: No), this process ends.
: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S
903: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S90
4). Then, the second winning random number counter C updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above
The value of 3 is stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S905), and this process is terminated. Note that in the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is set as the first area.

Next, referring to FIG. 811, the N
The NMI interrupt process will now be described. FIG. 811 is a flow chart showing this NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203.
When the power supply to the main control unit 110 is cut off, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, and sets the power failure occurrence information to RA
The NMI interrupt process is then terminated.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111.
By the I interrupt process, information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 213. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process.

Next, referring to FIG. 812, when the power is turned on to the main control device 110,
The start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the computer 10 will now be described. FIG. 812 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (
For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.
Sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111)
The CPU 204 executes a wait process (one second in this embodiment) to wait for the CPU 204 to become operable (S1102), and then permits access to the RAM 203 (S1103).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 781) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104). If it is turned on (S1104: Yes),
The process proceeds to S1112. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105). If not stored (S1105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1112.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes),
A judgment value is calculated (S1106), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1107:
No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, so in this case, the process is also terminated.
As will be described later in the process of S1214 in FIG. 813, the RAM determination value is
For example, it is a checksum value in a working area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged based on whether or not a keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1112, the dispensing control device 111 which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device)
In order to initialize the dispensing control device 111, a dispensing initialization command is sent (S1112).
When the main control device 110 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes in a state in which it can start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1113, S1114).

As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed,
The RAM is initialized (S1113, S1114). Similarly, if the power interruption occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 is initialized (S1113, S1114). In the RAM initialization (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114).
After the initialization process in step S203 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1110.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1107: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1108) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command at power recovery is sent (S1109) to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power interruption, and the process proceeds to S1110. The payout control device 111
When this payout return command is received, the data stored in the RAM 213 is retained,
The game ball payout control can now be started.

In the process of S1110, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the execution of various performances is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 813, after the above-mentioned start-up process, MPU2 in the main control device 110
The main process executed by the game player S1201 to S1206 will be described below. FIG. 813 is a flow chart showing this main process. In this main process, the main processes of the game are executed. In summary, each process from S1201 to S1206 is executed as a regular process at a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update process in S1209 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, while the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 802) is being executed,
Executes an external output process to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the control device 103 to each control device on the sub side (peripheral control device) (S1201
Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 802) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111
A prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls won is sent to the
The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a reserved ball count command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 808) or the start winning process (see FIG. 808) to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 808) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, this external output process transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc., required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern. In addition, a round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 814) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112.

Next, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1
204), and then, when the special symbol jackpot state is reached, a jackpot control process is executed to execute the jackpot performance and open or close the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1203). Here, the special symbol jackpot state specifically refers to the period from when the variable pattern performance change time resulting in a jackpot has elapsed and the start of the jackpot is set to when the end of the set jackpot is set. In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the specific winning port 65a.
When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated a predetermined number of times. In this embodiment, the big win control process (S1203) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric accessory associated with the second ball entrance 64b (S1204). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, S8 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 809) is executed.
When the opening and closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S816 or S817 in the normal symbol variation process, the opening and closing control of the electric role is started. Note that the opening and closing control of the electric role is continued until the opening time and the opening number set by the process of S816 or S817 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the first symbol display device 37 (S1
205). In the first symbol display update process, S407 of the big win setting process (see FIG. 805)
When a variation pattern is set by the process of S604 of the loss setting process (see FIG. 807), the first symbol display device 37 displays a variation according to the variation pattern.
In this embodiment, from the start of the variation to the time when the variation time has elapsed, for example, if the currently lit LED of the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

In addition, the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, and if the color of the LED is changed every time the main process is executed, the player will not be able to confirm the change in the color of the LED.
In order to allow the player to confirm the change in the color of the LED, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed. When the counter reaches 100, the LED is turned on.
D changes its lighting color. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern set by the process of S407 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 805) or the process of S604 of the miss setting process (see FIG. 807) ends, the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the process of S406 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 805) is started.
Alternatively, the stopping pattern (first pattern) is displayed in a stopped state (lit up) on the first pattern display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S603 of the loss setting processing (see FIG. 807).

Next, a second symbol display update process is executed to update the display of the second symbol display device 83 (S1
207). In the second symbol display update process, S82 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 809)
When the second symbol variation time is set by the process of 0 or the process of S821, the second symbol display device 83 starts to display the variation.
A variable display is performed in which the "○" and "×" symbols as the second symbols are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S823 of the normal symbol variable process (see FIG. 809),
The variable display being executed in is ended, and the normal pattern variable start processing (see FIG. 809) S
The stopping pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing of S813 or processing of S818.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S12
07), if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1207: No),
In this case, the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power supply is not cut off. In this case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (
S1208), if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1208: Yes), the process returns to S120
Then, the process proceeds to step S1201 and the above-described processes from step S1201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1208:
No), until a predetermined time has elapsed, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CIN
Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CIN1 is updated to I2 (S1209).
1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and the counter value becomes the maximum value (
In this embodiment, when the counters reach the counter values 249 and 239, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the first initial-value random-number counter CINI1 and the second initial-value random-number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Here, since the execution time of each process from S1201 to S1206 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time,
and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C3) can be randomly updated.

Furthermore, in the process of S1207, if the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1207: Yes), the power supply has been cut off due to a power outage or power off, and as a result of the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputting the power outage signal SG1, the NMI interruption process of FIG. 811 has been executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1210 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1210), and a power off command indicating that the power supply has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1211). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S121
2), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1213), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.
The checksum values are the backed up stack area of 203 and the working area.

The process of S1207 is executed when a series of processes corresponding to changes in the game state performed in S1201 to S1206 ends, or when one cycle of the process of S1209 performed within the remaining time ends. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed when each setting is completed, so when returning from a power interrupted state, the process can be started from the process of S1201 after the start-up process is completed. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 in the same way as when it was initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power interruption, M
Even if the contents of each register used by the PU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting process (S1101), and the process can be started from S1201. This reduces the control burden on the main control unit 110 and also reduces the time required for the main control unit 11 to start.
This allows accurate control without the device malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, the big win control process (S1203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 814. FIG. 814 is a flowchart showing this big win control process (S1203).
) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 813), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed, and a specific winning port (large opening port)
This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the big win control process, first, it is determined whether a big win of a special symbol is to start (S13
01). Specifically, the process of S212 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 803) is executed.
If the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot will start.
1: Yes), an opening command is set (S1302), and this process ends.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S1201) of the main processing (see FIG. 813) executed by MPU 201.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if the special symbol jackpot does not start (S1
301: No), and judge whether or not a special symbol jackpot is being played (S1303). The special symbol jackpot includes a time when the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game) and a time during a predetermined period after the special symbol jackpot game ends.
If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1303: No), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (1303: Yes
), and judge whether it is the timing to start a new round (S1304). If it is the timing to start a new round (S1304: Yes), the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is opened (S1305), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1306). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 813) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, it transmits a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1304, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1
304: No), and judge whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S
1307). Specifically, it is determined that the closing condition is met when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is opened, or when 10 balls have won after the specific winning hole (large opening) 65a is opened.

In the process of S1307, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is met (S1307: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1308).
On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning hole (large opening hole) 65a is not satisfied (S1307: No), it is determined whether the big win has ended (S13
09).

In the process of S1309, if it is determined that the big win has ended (
S1309: Yes), and executes a jackpot end process to set a set value corresponding to the game state after the jackpot ends and reset the set value for the jackpot (S1310).
The game state after the end of the jackpot is set, and this process is terminated. Note that, although details will be described later, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 815), the jackpot flag is initialized (set to "00H") along with other set values. Therefore, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is suddenly cut off due to a power outage or the like, only the jackpot flag is turned off, and it is possible to prevent other set values from remaining as they were during the jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, after the closing condition of the specific winning port (large open port) 65a is established in the final round of the jackpot, an ending performance is set to inform the player of the end of the jackpot. In the process of S1309, when it is determined that the ending performance has ended (the performance time set for executing the ending performance has elapsed), it is determined that it is the end time of the jackpot.

The end timing of the big win is not necessarily limited to the end timing of the ending performance. For example, when the closing condition of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is established in the final round of the big win, it may be configured to transition to the big win end processing (S1310) as the end timing of the big win.

Next, referring to FIG. 815 and FIG. 816, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the big win end process (S1310) in the big win control process (see FIG. 814).
As described above, this big win end process (S1310) is a process for setting a set value corresponding to the game state after the big win ends and resetting a set value for the big win.

In this big win end process (S1310), first, the state setting table 202h is read from the ROM 202 (S1401). Here, "read" refers to the upper byte (1AH) and the lower byte (D8H) of the top address (1AD8H) of the state setting table 202h.
and the address data of any pair of general-purpose registers (e.g., general-purpose register 21
0b1 and general purpose register 210b2).

Next, the game result setting value acquisition process (FIG. 80) executed before the start of the current big win is performed.
6), the offset value previously stored in the offset value storage area of the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 793) is stored in the accumulator 210a.

Next, the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a is multiplied by the number of data "D_
As described above, "D_SIZE" is multiplied by
The number of types of data corresponding to each offset value in the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 791(a)) is shown. In this embodiment, four types of setting values, namely, the lottery state of the special symbol, the state of the normal symbol, the number of time-saving times, and the number of times of switching the variable pattern selection mode, are stored in the state setting table 202h.
h (see FIG. 791(a)), the value corresponding to the number of data "D_SIZE" is "0004H".

As shown in parentheses in FIG. 791(a), the state setting table 202h has, from the smallest address value, a lottery state for a special symbol corresponding to an offset value of 00H, a state for a normal symbol,
Number of time-saving times, number of times that the variable pattern selection mode was switched, the lottery status of the special pattern corresponding to offset 01H, the status of the normal pattern, number of time-saving times, number of times that the variable pattern selection mode was switched, offset 02
The data is stored in the following order: the lottery status of the special symbol corresponding to H, the status of the normal symbol, the number of time-saving times, and the number of times the variable pattern selection mode is switched. In other words, every time the address value increases by 4, a setting value corresponding to an offset value that is 1 larger is stored. Therefore, the offset value multiplied by 4 is the difference (offset) between the top address of the status setting table 202h and the storage address of the data corresponding to the current offset value. S14
In the process of 03, the address difference (offset) from the top address of this status setting table 202h is obtained.

When the process of S1403 is completed, the address value set in the pair of general-purpose registers (for example, the general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2) in the process of S1401 is
The difference (offset) calculated in the process of 402 with respect to the top address of the status setting table 202h is added, and the address after the addition is set as the address of the data transfer source (read source) (S1404).

Next, the address in which the probability variable state flag is stored in the various setting value storage area 203e is set as the destination address (S1405), and the data stored in the source address set in the processing of S1404 is transferred to the destination address (S1406).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all of the four types of data defined in the status setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage area 203e (S1407). If it is determined that the transfer is not complete (i.e., there is a data type that has not been transferred) (S1407: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, and the data defined in the address after the addition is read (S1408). Furthermore, 1 is added to the setting destination address, and the address after the addition is written to S1409.
The data read out in the process of 408 is stored (S1409). Then, the process returns to S1407, and it is determined again whether or not all of the four types of data defined in the status setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage area 203e (S1407). In other words, the processes of S1407 to S1409 are repeated until all of the four types of data defined in the status setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage area 203e.

On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that all of the four types of data defined in the status setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage area 203e (S140
7: Yes), and the state set in the various setting value storage area 203e is stored in the voice and lamp control device 11
The CPU 11 sets a status command to be notified to 3 (S1410), executes processing to clear the setting value for the jackpot (S1411, S1412), and then terminates this processing.

In the process of clearing the setting value of the jackpot, the address just before the top address of the jackpot end clear table 202i (see Figure 792) in ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address (S1411), and a zero setting process is executed to initialize the address in the various setting value storage area 203e where the setting value during the jackpot is set by setting it to 0 (S1412).

Next, the zero setting process (see FIG. 816) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 816. This zero setting process (see FIG. 816) is as follows:
This is a process of initializing various setting values set in the various setting value storage area 203e for control during a jackpot by overwriting them with 0.

In the zero setting process (see FIG. 816), first, 1 is added to the source (read source) address and set as a new source (read source) address (S1501).

Next, the address data stored in the address set as the source (read source) address in the jackpot end clear table 202i (see Figure 792) is read out, and the address of RAM 203 indicated by the read address data is set as the destination address (S1502).

After processing S1502, it is determined whether the data read from the source (read source) address in the processing of S1502 is "00H" (S1503), and if it is determined that the read data is "00H" (S1503: Yes), this processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1503: No), "00H" is overwritten to the address of the RAM 203 that is set as the setting destination address (S150
4) Return to processing of S1501.

After that, the process of S1501 to S1504 is repeated until "00H" is read out from the big win end clear table 202i (see FIG. 792). Note that the big win end clear table 202i (see FIG. 792) stores "00H" only in the last address, and does not store "00H" in any other address. Therefore, S1501 to S1504 are not repeated until "00H" is stored in all addresses corresponding to the address data specified other than the last address.
The processes from S1501 to S1504 are repeated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as a condition for terminating the zero setting process (see FIG. 816), the set number of times to set the data "00H" in the various setting value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 is described in the control program, and the process is not terminated when it is determined that data setting has been completed for the set number of times, but rather when it is determined that "00H" has been read out as data from the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 792).

If the number of set times is written in the control program, every time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as the program being diverted to another model, the designer of the control program must count the number of set values again and rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, counting the set values is time-consuming, and if the designer makes a counting error, an incorrect number of repetitions will be specified in the control program, so that the setting at the end of the jackpot cannot be completed normally, and the pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the clear table 20 is
All you need to do is specify "00H" as the data at the end of 2i (see FIG. 792).
This reduces the possibility that the designer will make a mistake when designing the control program. Therefore, the data at the end of the big win can be set more reliably based on the control program, thereby suppressing malfunctions of the pachinko machine 10.

The reason why the end condition of the zero setting process (see FIG. 816) is when "00H" is read out as data is that the address in the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 793) whose lower byte is "00H" (i.e., address "F000H") is an area for storing setting values related to ball launch, and is an address whose setting value is not changed before and after the end of a jackpot (an address that does not require initialization at the end of a jackpot). Since this is an address that does not require initialization at the end of a jackpot, the jackpot end clear table 202i
(see FIG. 792) as an address to be initialized, and there is no risk of it appearing anywhere other than the end of the big win end clear table 202i (see FIG. 792).
Before all the settings have been initialized, the data "00H" is read out.
This can prevent the process from ending.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the seventeenth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 817 to FIG. 820, the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113
The control processes executed by the MPU 221 are roughly classified as follows:
There is a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, a description will be given of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 with reference to Fig. 817. Fig. 817 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on (S16
01). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on or not, the power-off processing (see S1716 in FIG. 808) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") during the current startup processing.
It is determined whether the power-off process was started during the execution of the power-off command (S1602). As will be described later with reference to Fig. 818, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1713 in Fig. 818), it executes the power-off process of S1716. Before the execution of such power-off process, the power-off process in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off process of S1716 is in the middle of execution can be determined from the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1602: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1716 was completed, or after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, R
It is confirmed whether the data in the AM 223 is destroyed or not (S1603).

The confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data "55AAh" is written as a keyword in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked to see if the data is "
If the value is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the value is not "55AAh", data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No),
Proceed to processing of S1608.

If this startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off,
Since the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power is turned off), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1
On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power-off process of S1716 is completed, or if the current startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1604.
Go to 608.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1602: Yes), the current startup process is
This is started after a momentary power outage occurs, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset during the execution of the power-off process of S1716. In this case, since the power-off process is in the middle of being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore,
In this case, control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S1604.
Start M223 initialization.

In the process of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604
The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh" or not, and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is repeated for "0FFh", "55h", "
This RAM 223 read/write check is performed in the order RA
All memory areas in M223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (
If the result of the read/write check is Yes at S1605, the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM corruption check data (S1606). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is possible to check whether data corruption has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality is detected in the read/write check in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1606).
7), and an infinite loop continues until the power is cut off. Any abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message.

In the process of S1608, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1608
The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (S171 in FIG. 808).
5). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is executed, the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S1716 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609).
After setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1610), interrupt permission is set (S16
11) and proceed to main processing. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110 and the like.

On the other hand, the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process proceeds from S1604 to S1606.
In this case, the process goes to S1608 via the process of S1603, or the process starts when only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power off command from the main control device 110).
608: No), skips S1609, which is the process of clearing the working area of the RAM 223, and proceeds to S1610. After setting the initial values of the RAM 223 (S1610), interrupt permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The clearing process in S1609 is skipped because, when the process goes from S1604 to S1608 via S1606, the RAM 22 has already been cleared by the process in S1604.
All memory areas of the voice lamp control device 1 have been cleared and the voice lamp control device 2 has been
When only the MPU 221 of the RAM 13 is reset and the start-up process is started,
By storing the data in the work area 223 without clearing it, the voice lamp control device 1
This is because control of 13 can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 818, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described.
When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1701 was executed (S1701). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S1702), the process is terminated.
701: No), the process proceeds to step S1711 without executing steps S1702 to S1710.
is mainly a process related to display (performance) and does not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1711 and the variable display setting process of S1712 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1712 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform settings related to variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed since the processing of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first,
The various commands set by the processes in S1703 to S1712 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1702). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set so as to match the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process in S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704).
The power-on notification process notifies the user that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the power-on notification process does not notify the user and the process proceeds to S1705.

In the process of S1705, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and then a reserved number display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined time has elapsed without a player playing the pachinko machine 10, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen, and the setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.
In the reserved ball count display update process, a process is performed to turn on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S1707). In this frame button input monitoring/effect process, in order to enhance the effect of the effect, an input is monitored to determine whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding effect is set. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, if the frame button 22 is pressed during a period when the fluctuation performance has not been executed or during a high-speed fluctuation period,
A process of changing the stage is performed, and a back image change command is set for the display control device 114. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in this back image change command, the display control device 114 performs a process of changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. In addition, when a preview character appears at the start of the variable display, the frame button 22 may be pressed to display the expected value of a big win due to this variation, or the frame button 22 may be pressed during a reach performance to change to a performance that gives a sense of expectation for a big win, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of a plurality of reach performances. In addition, if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1707 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1708), and then a sound editing and output process is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1709, the liquid crystal performance execution management process is executed (S1710), and the process proceeds to S1711. In the liquid crystal performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. Based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process, S1708
The lamp editing process is executed. The sound editing and output process of S1709 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1711, a command determination process is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1711). For details of this command determination process, see FIG.
9. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is input to the display control device 1
The variable display setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the variable display setting process (S1712) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713).
10. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in progress flag are both turned on (S1715), and the power-off processing is executed (S1716). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1717), and the process is then looped infinitely.
In the power-off process, the occurrence of interrupt processes is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. Also, stored information about the occurrence of the power-off is erased.

On the other hand, if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: N
o), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is corrupted based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714). If the RAM 223 is not corrupted (S1714: NO),
o), the process returns to S1701, and the main process is executed repeatedly.
If the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes. If the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a staff member of the hall to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 819. FIG. 819 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1711).
) is a main process (FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.
8) and, as described above, determines the command received from main control device 110.

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1801
). When a variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 820) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1804).
Then, when a stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 820) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable performance.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). If the reserved ball number command has been received (S1807: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 is
The value of (the number of times the variable display in the special pattern is held N) is extracted and used as the voice lamp control device 1
The number of reserved balls of the special symbol number 13 is stored in the reserved ball counter 223b (S1808).
In the process of S1808, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b to the display control device 114. After the process of S1808 is completed, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (initial winning), or when a lottery for a special symbol is performed. Therefore, every time the initial winning is detected, or every time a lottery for a special symbol is performed, S1
By the process of 808, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc.
Even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol is drawn, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 is corrected.
When the process of S1808 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern according to the reserved ball number on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S1807, if the reserved ball number command is not received (S1807
: No), and then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1809). If a winning information command has been received (S1809: Yes),
From the received winning information command, various information (win/lose, stop type, and change pattern) is extracted as winning information (S1810). After the process of S1810 is completed, the winning information (win/lose, stop type, and change pattern) extracted in the process of S1810 is then stored in the winning information storage area 22.
The data is stored in the first free area (first area to fourth area) of 3a (S1811
), and return to the main processing.

In the process of S1809, if the winning information command is not received (S1809
If the round count command is received (S1812: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1813. If the round count command is received (S1812: No), the process proceeds to step S1814.
The MPU 221 then executes the command to output the number of rounds (S1702), extracts the number of rounds from the received number of rounds command (S1813), sets a display number of rounds command corresponding to the extracted number of rounds (S1814), and ends this process. The display number of rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 818) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display number of rounds command, it starts a new round presentation in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1812, if the round number command has not been received (S
The CPU 221 determines whether or not another command has been received (S1812: No), executes processing corresponding to the received command (S1819), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command to be used in the voice lamp control device 113, the CPU 221 executes processing corresponding to the command, stores the processing result in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command to be used in the display control device 114, the CPU 221 sets the command so that the command is sent to the display control device 114.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 820. FIG. 810 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712)
) is a main process (FIG. 81) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.
8), and in order to execute a variable performance in the third symbol display device 81,
A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901).
That is, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is ON (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S1906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is ON (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned OFF (S1902), and then, in the process of S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 819), the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation performance extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1903).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114 (S1904). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905).
In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After the data is shifted, the process proceeds to S1906.

In the process of S1906, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on or not (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1906: No), this means that a stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this variable display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1
906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then, in the processing of S1806 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 819), the stop type in the variable presentation extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1908).

Next, the stop type indicated by the stop type command from the main control unit 110 is set as the stop type of the variable performance in the third pattern display unit 81 (S1909), and based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control unit 114 is generated, and the command is set to be sent to the display control unit 114 (S1910), and this process ends. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control unit 114 displays the stop pattern according to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command.
The stop display of the variable performance is controlled so that it is displayed stopped on the third pattern display device 81.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the seventeenth embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figs. 821 to 833. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 821. Fig. 821 is a flow chart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing an initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following procedure.
When the power is turned on to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released,
The PU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" by its hardware configuration, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240.
The OM controller 234b receives the address "0000H" from the bus line 240.
When it is detected that the program is
The boot program stored in the character RO1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.
It fetches the instruction code received from M234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character R
When the OM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c.
31 consumes a lot of waiting time from when it designates the address "0000H" to when it receives the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, the time it takes to start the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234.
Since the NOR type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the NOR type ROM.
The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the MPU 234d can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H".
The main processing can be started in a short time in U231. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls can be executed for the third pattern display device 81.

Now, the boot process (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG.
2 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2401) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. Therefore,
This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, thereby reducing manufacturing costs and suppressing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, especially when random access is performed, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are directly read and processed by the DRA.
The program transfer section 233 transfers the program data to a program storage area 233a and a data table storage area 233b provided in a work RAM 233 configured by M and stores the program data therein.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S2501). The predetermined amount of the control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501.

In addition, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2502.
By setting the predetermined address, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233.
Instead of reading out the control program from the D-type flash memory 234a and fetching instructions, the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a is read out and instructions are fetched to execute various processes.
Since M233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed.
Even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured from the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing according to those instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2502, the N
The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the AND-type flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2503). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2504), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 821) to be executed after completion of this boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 821) (S2505), thereby completing execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S2401), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in character ROM 234 constituted by NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program and fixed value data to program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of work RAM 233 after system reset is released, MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from work RAM constituted by DRAM with a fast read speed to perform various controls, thereby maintaining high processing performance in display control device 114. Therefore, diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the auxiliary presentation unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions starting from the instruction to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 822, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 includes the first program storage area 234d.
1, but contains all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in
However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 may be a part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2502. The boot program transferred here may transfer only a predetermined amount of control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S2501 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated a plurality of times, including the processes of S2501 and S2502, and then execute the processes of S2503 to S2505.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In the present embodiment, a part of the boot program that is executed by the MPU 231 first when the system is released from a reset state is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but the entire boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it skips steps S2501 and S2502 and skips steps S2503 to S2505.
As a result, the boot program is stored in the program storage area 233.
Since the process of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 2a is unnecessary,
Since the number of times the program is transferred to the MPU 231 is reduced, the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary performance unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, can be started more quickly.

Returning now to the explanation of FIG. 821, when the boot process is completed, the work RAM 23
The MPU 231 executes an initial setting process in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the MPU 231 (S2402).
It also performs various settings for registers in the MPU 231 and for I/O devices. It also performs settings for the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, and the like.
The memory of M236 is cleared. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power-on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power-on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power-on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 (S2403). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, resident video RAM 235), and the start address of power-on main image area 235a which is the transfer destination. Image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from character ROM 234 to power-on main image area 235a of resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction.

When the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231 to indicate the end of the transfer.
By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified in the transfer instruction, MPU 231 may write transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer to a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. Then, MPU 231 may read information from this register or the partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detect the writing of the transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the process of S2403, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2404). This transfer instruction includes:
The instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on varying image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on varying image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on varying image area 235b is then held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the process of S2404, the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S2405). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the transfer setting process (FIG. 831 (
In step a), the image controller 23 transfers all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.
7, a resident image transfer setting process is executed (see S3702 in FIG. 831(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 823(b)), the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 823(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 823(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 796 is drawn.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 thirdly.
By displaying the image on the pattern display device 81, the remaining image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 80.
While the power-on main image is being transferred to the third symbol display device 81, players and hall staff can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 114, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Meanwhile, players and the like can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and can therefore check the remaining resident video RAM 235.
Image data to be resident in the M235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 23
5, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation may have stopped.

In addition, during operation checks at factories during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the character ROM 2
By using the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the memory 34, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after power is turned on, the power-on variable image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image. Therefore, when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., when a display variable pattern command is received, the display variable pattern command is received as shown in FIG. 796(b).
The power-on variable image shown in (c) can be displayed immediately during the variable performance period to perform a simple variable performance. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance.

As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes time to transfer, so the time for which the power-on main image continues to be displayed after power is turned on is also long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the process of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to Fig. 823(a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Fig. 823(a) is a flowchart showing this command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interruption process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2
The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to Fig. 823 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. Fig. 823 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interruption process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is specified, and then a drawing list (see Fig. 801) of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt process is started by detecting a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237. The V interrupt signal is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed in the image controller 237, and is output to the MPU 231.
By executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds, which is the time when drawing process for one frame of an image is completed.
In this case, a drawing instruction for the next image is not received before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer in which image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in Fig. 823 (b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S2701), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the power-on image shown in Fig. 796, a command determination process (S2702) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2703) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2702), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. In addition, if a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.
Set to.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is performed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the start of the variable performance is determined in the main control device 110, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command interrupt process will be described later with reference to Figures 824 to 827.

In the display setting process (S2703), the third display data is set based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702) or the like.
The content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the pattern display device 81 is specifically specified. Also, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is stored in the display data table buffer 2.
33d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 828 to 830.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is executed (S2704). In this task process, based on the content of the next frame of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2703) or the simple display setting process (S2709), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, the magnification rate, and the rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the resident video RA is notified to the image controller 237.
Image data to be resident in the M235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 23
5 to a predetermined area of the normal video RAM 236. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and also when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to Figs. 831 and 832.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, the task process (S27
The CPU 231 generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 801 from the types of sprites constituting one frame and parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in step S2704), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S2705), and transmits the drawing list together with the drawing target buffer information to the image controller 237.
Then, the image drawing process is executed according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S27
07). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S2707 is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type (big win A,
A stop type table corresponding to the type (jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss, or complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so the power-on image shown in FIG. 796 is displayed as a third image.
In order to display on the pattern display device 81, a simple command determination process (S2708) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S2709) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2704.

Next, with reference to Fig. 824 to Fig. 827, a description will be given of details of the command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Fig. 824 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in Fig. 824, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2801: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (2801: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S2801: Yes) to notify the display setting process (S2703) that a new command has been processed in the ON state.
02), and then, for all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the types of those commands are analyzed (S2803).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2804). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes),
The variable pattern command processing is executed (S2805), and the process returns to S2801.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S2805) will be described with reference to Fig. 825 (a). Fig. 825 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation performance pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2901).

Here, the main control device 110 always judges the start of the variation at least several seconds apart, so it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area, but there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display variation pattern command. In the process of S2901, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern having a long variable time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, when a variable performance having a shorter variable time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110,
While the third pattern display device 81 was displaying a variable performance according to the set variable display data table, the next display variable pattern command would be received from the main control device 110, and another variable display would suddenly start, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality,
Even if the main control device 110 has instructed a variable performance having a longer variable time than the set display data table, as described later, the display data table buffer 2
After the varying presentation in accordance with 33d has ended, the display setting process controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 so that a demo presentation is displayed until the next display pattern command is received from the main control device 110, so that the player can continue to watch the variation of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other variation display data tables are turned off (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the processing of S2903, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2905). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to OFF (S2906), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment processing.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, S290
While updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2905, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, and the third pattern display device 8
At the same time as specifying the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in S2901, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2902, and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance in the character R.
The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the OM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

In addition, in the display setting process, the time of the variable performance defined in the variable display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2904,
When it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table is to end, the main control device 11
The settings of the stop display are controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from 0 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning now to the description of FIG. 824, if it is determined in the process of S2804 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2806). If there is a display variation type command (S2806: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2807), and S2
Return to the process of 801.

The details of the stop type command process (S2807) will now be described with reference to Fig. 825(b), which is a flowchart showing the stop type command process.
This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, front or rear miss reach, front or rear miss reach, or complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S3001),
The stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter, which is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 823 (b)) is executed, and the stop pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after the variable performance is finally set (S3002).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S4002 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set to off (S3003), and this processing is terminated.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.
As the type information for identifying the symbol, offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is described.
) After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S3003,
The symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process is added to the identified stop symbol to identify the third symbol to be actually displayed.
The address where the image data corresponding to the symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

Returning to FIG. 824, the description will be continued. In the process of S2806, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2806: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a number of rounds command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2808). If there is a number of rounds command for display (S2808: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2809).
Return to the process of 2801.

Here, the details of the round number command process (S2809) will be described with reference to Fig. 826. Fig. 826 is a flow chart showing the round number command process. This round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command process, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3101).
The contents are cleared by writing null data to 33e (S3102).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3101, the time data representing the performance time is read from the timing counter 2
33h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3104). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to OFF (S3105).
The number of rounds command processing (S2809) is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment processing (see FIG. 824).

Returning now to the description of FIG. 824, in the process of S2808, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2808: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2810), and if there is a rear image change command (S2810: Yes), rear image change command processing is executed (S2811), and S28
Return to process 01.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S2811) will be described with reference to Fig. 827 (a). Fig. 827 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process (S2811). This rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process (S2811), first, a rear image change flag is set to ON (S3201) to notify the normal image transfer setting process (S3703) of a change in the rear image caused by receiving a rear image change command in the ON state.
Among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each of the rear image types (A to C), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to the other rear image types are set to off (S3202), the rear image change command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command judgment processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S3201 is on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S3202. Then, if the identified rear image type is rear image B or rear image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.
A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a rear image of a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

In addition, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the rear faces A to C is to be displayed according to the rear face type of the rear face image specified in the display data table, the rear face image type to be displayed at that time is specified from the rear face image discrimination flag set by the processing of S3202, and further, the range of the rear face image to be displayed is specified over time, and the type of RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear face image is stored (the resident video RAM 235,
The RAM address is specified.

In addition, since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds,
Two or more rear image change commands will not be received within 0 milliseconds, and therefore when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area; however, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly interpreted as a rear image change command.
In the process of S3202, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This rear image change does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning now to the description of Fig. 824, if it is determined in the process of S2810 that there is no rear image change command (S2810: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2812), and if there is an error command (S2812: Y),
es), executes error command processing (S2813), and returns to the processing of S2801.

Here, the error command process (S2813) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 827(b). Fig. 827(b) is a flow chart showing the error command process. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S3301). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S3302), the error command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command discrimination process.

In the display setting process (S2703), when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3301, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S3302, and a processing is performed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process of S3302 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the hall staff can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Returning now to the description of Fig. 824. If it is determined in the processing of S2812 that there is no error command (S2812: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2819), and the process returns to the processing of S2801.

In the process of S2801, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes), the processes of S2802 to S2819 are executed again. Then, S2801 to S2819 are repeated until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area.
The process of step S2801 is repeated until it is determined that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. Then, the command determination process is terminated.

In addition, the simplified command determination process (S2708) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 823(b)) is also similar to the command determination process. However, in the simplified command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 796, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (FIG. 825(a)) which is the process corresponding to each command is executed.
) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 825(b)), and for other commands, the processing corresponding to the command is not executed and the command is discarded.

In the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 825(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2901, and the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, the transfer data table buffer 233b is set to Null.
A process of writing data and clearing the contents is carried out.

Next, with reference to Fig. 828 to Fig. 830, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2703), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 828 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 828, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3401). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (
If the answer is No in S3401, it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, and steps S3402 to S3404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Yes in S3401), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag off (S3402), the process corresponding to the new command is executed through steps S3403 and S3404.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3403
If the error occurrence flag is on (S3403: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3404).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 829. FIG. 829 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to ON on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S35
01).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3501, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3502), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning now to the description of FIG. 828, after the warning image setting process (S3404) or S34
If it is determined in the process of S3403 that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3403: No), then the process proceeds to S3405.

In S3405, the pointer update process is executed (S3405). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 830. FIG. 830 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process is executed by the display data table buffer 233.
This is processing for updating a pointer 233f that designates an address for obtaining transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3601).
That is, the pointer 233f is updated so that, in principle, it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed.
Start information is written at address "0H", and the entity of each data is address "0
If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process.
In turn, actual data can be read out from each data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3601, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S36
02). As a result, if it is End information (S3602: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3603). If it is a demo display data table (S3603: Yes), the time counter 23 counts up the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.
3h (S3604), and initialize the pointer 233f by setting it to 1 (S3605).
This process is terminated and the display setting process is returned to. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 8
1, a demo presentation can be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3603 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S36
03: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S3606), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.
If a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in 33d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3602, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (
S3602: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to Fig. 828, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3406). In the task process, based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S3406 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3407), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the decrement is 0 or less (S3408). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3408: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3408: No), the process returns to the V interrupt process.
408: Yes), which means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stationary display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on or not (S3409).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3409: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3410), and then, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (
S3411). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the determined display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S3412), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3413). Then, after the determined display flag, which indicates that the determined display performance is being performed in the ON state, is set to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is directly stored in the work RAM.
The process then copies the result to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided at 233 (S3415), and returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the fixed display performance of the stopped pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so that various types of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the process of S3415 is used to specify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is described until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table. In the task process (S2704), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is specified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S3415 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting process is added to the specified stop pattern to specify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S3409, if the confirmation display flag is on (S3409: Yes),
If the demo display flag is off (S3416: No), this means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3417), and then the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e are cleared by writing Null data therein (S3418).
Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is input to the timer counter 2.
33h (S3419). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S342
0), and the demo display flag indicating that a demo is being performed in the on state is set to on (S34
21) This process ends and returns to the V interrupt process.

This makes it possible to set the drawing content so that if a display variable pattern command or a fanfare command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the confirmed display performance has ended, a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S3416, if the demo display flag is on (S3416: Yes),
After the final display effect is finished, the demo effect is performed, and since this means that the demo effect has ended, the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process.
As described above, various settings are made by the pointer update process executed during the interrupt processing so that the demo performance will start again, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, in the simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 823(b)), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the performance time of the power-on variable image has ended, a display data table that specifies that one image (either FIG. 796(b) or (c)) of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time is stored in the display data table buffer 233d.
The process of setting it to

Next, with reference to Fig. 831 and Fig. 832, a description will be given of details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2705), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. First, Fig. 831(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (
S3701). If it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S37
01: Yes), since all image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing is executed (S3702), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and processing returns to V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to image controller 237 for transferring image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 831(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3701, the simple image display flag 233c is not on.
If it is determined that it is off (S3701: No), all image data that should be resident in resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. In this case, normal image transfer setting processing is executed (S3703), the transfer setting processing is terminated, and the process returns to V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from character ROM 234 are to normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to Fig. 831(b), a description will be given of the resident image transfer setting process (S3702), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Fig. 831(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3702).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not yet been transferred has been sent to the image controller 237 (S3801), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S3801: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3802).
In the process of S3802, after issuing an instruction to transfer image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S3802 that the transfer process has not ended (S3802: No), image transfer processing is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to S3803.
Also, if the result of the processing in S3801 shows that a transfer instruction for the untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S3801: No), the process also proceeds to S3803.

In the process of S3803, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3803), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (
S3803: No), and sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3804), and terminates the resident image transfer setting process.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list.
The start address and end address of the 34, and the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 2
35), and the transfer destination (the resident video recorder in which the resident target image data transferred here is to be stored).
The address of the image controller 237 is the top address of the area provided in the AM 235.
executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads image data designated in the transfer processing from character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to a designated address in resident video RAM 235 while resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, when the transfer is completed, it transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231.

As a result of the process of S3803, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3803
823B), the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 823B) and the simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 823B) are performed in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 823B).
3(b) (see S2709), instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 824 to FIG. 827) and the display setting process (see FIG. 828 to FIG. 830) are executed, so that the drawing of the image during normal times is set, and the image during normal times is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83
2) to the normal video RAM 236 (see S37 in FIG. 831(a)).
01:See No.

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all of the resident video R images, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variable image, which have already been transferred in the main process.
All resident target image data that should be resident in the AM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it is held without being overwritten while the power is on.
The image data transferred to the video RAM 35 is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 236.
After the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be read from the NAND flash memory 234, which has a slow read speed, during image drawing.
Since there is no need to read out corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as a, the time required for such reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn instantly and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores resident image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third patterns, character patterns, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display has been determined by the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, a description will be given of the normal image transfer setting process (S3703), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, with reference to Fig. 832. Fig. 832 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3703).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3405) of the previously executed display setting process (S2703) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3901). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S3902), and if it is transfer data information (S3902: Yes), the start address (source start address) and the end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S3903), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905.

In addition, in the process of S3902, the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null.
If the data is received (S3902: No), the process skips S3903 and S3904 and proceeds to S3905.
In response to the above, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set after the previous image data transfer has ended (S3905). If a transfer instruction has been set (S3905: Y),
es), and further, it is determined whether or not the transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3906).

In the process of S3906, after an instruction to transfer image data has been set for the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S3906 that the transfer process has not ended (S3906: No), image transfer processing is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to S3907. Also, if the result of the process of S3905 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3905: No),
), and proceed to processing of S3907.

In the process of S3907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3907), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3907: Yes), image data to be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S3908), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3903 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process proceeds to S3913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3907: No), it is then determined whether or not the background image change flag is on (S3909). Then, if the background image change flag is not on but off (S3909: No), image data to be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3909: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed. After the rear image change flag is set to off (S3910), the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type is identified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S3
Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 in which image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3913.

In addition, when the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235.
There is no image data to be transferred in the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, in the process of S3911, if the rear image determination flag in the ON state is for rear A, the normal image transfer process ends directly.

In the process of S3913, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913). This determination in the process of S3913 is made by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the process of S3913, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913: Yes), the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.
Since there is no need to transfer the image data to the AM 236, the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the display control device 114
This reduces the processing load on each unit and reduces the traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the process of S3913 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913: Yes), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S3914). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process.
Based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, and transfers the image data specified in the transfer process to the character ROM 234.
and transfers it to a specified address in a specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3914, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3915).
This normal transfer setting process is then terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite to "OFF".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a big win stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance is transferred to the character RO without delay.
In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred to the character ROM 236 without delay.
234 to a normal video RAM 236.

In this embodiment, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110,
As the display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d,
The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 2.
Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred in accordance with the transfer data information written in the area pointed to by pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in transfer data table buffer 233e, so that image data of sprites used in the display data table set in display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

Here, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specified address so that image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from character ROM 234 to image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, images required for display can be stored in the character ROM 234 in advance without delay.
Since the image data of each sprite specified in the display data table can be drawn and the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data of the sprite specified in the display data table can be read from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Also, by writing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably read from the character ROM 234.
34 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the transfer data table, a character RO is
The transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the M234 to the normal video RAM 236. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed for each sprite, and
Since the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 can be controlled on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in the load imposed by the transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

Next, a description will be given of the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, with reference to Fig. 833. Fig. 833 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates,
A drawing list shown in FIG. 801 is generated (S4001) from the transfer instructions set by the task process (S2704), including the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information, and the transfer settings process (S2705).
), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of each sprite is stored is identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for that sprite as determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are sorted in the order of the sprite that should be placed furthest behind the sprite that should be placed furthest in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information (
A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as the detailed information (detailed information). Also, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of that sprite is stored or the image storage area 23 of the normal video RAM 236 is
Since the sub-area 6a is fixed, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of a sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and can easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer flag 233
The drawing target buffer information specified by j is sent to the image controller (S400
2). In this case, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing that the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b is to be expanded, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing that the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c is to be expanded.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and overwrites them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

Also, if the drawing list contains transfer data information,
The start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RA
M236), and the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and stored in the buffer RAM
After temporarily storing the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to an area of the normal video RAM 236 indicated by the transfer destination top address when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and an image is drawn in accordance with the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with a drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer.
In addition, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, so that the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the process of S4002, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S
4003). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., if the value was "0", it is updated to "
If the drawing list is transmitted, the drawing target buffer is set to "0" if the drawing list is transmitted.
The frame buffer 236c is alternately set to the frame buffer 236d.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.
This is performed every time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 823(b)) executed by 231 is executed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer that develops one frame of image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer that develops one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image information is read are alternately designated as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds, respectively, so that the display process of one frame's worth of image can be performed continuously in 20 millisecond units while the drawing process of one frame's worth of image is performed.

<Modification of the 17th embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 834 to 59. In the 17th embodiment, in order to read out a setting value corresponding to an offset value from the state setting table 202h, the label "TBL1" and "D_SIZE" were associated in advance with the top address of the state setting table 202h and the number of setting values corresponding to each offset value in the program. That is, the label was used when a part of the table was read out and set. In contrast, in this modified example, a method of specifying a table that needs to be read out as a whole will be described. Examples of tables that need to be read out as a whole include the first winning random number table 202a and the second winning random number table 202c. In this modified example, the first winning random number table 202a will be used as an example for description.

FIG. 834(a) is a diagram showing the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability, and FIG. 834(b) is a diagram showing the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the random number value specified in the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability is compared with the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first winning random number counter buffer to determine whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a jackpot. On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, the random number value specified in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability is compared with the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first winning random number counter buffer to determine whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a jackpot.

As described above, the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability (see FIG. 834(a)) has three random numbers, "7, 107, and 240," set as the random number values for the special symbol jackpot. These three random numbers are stored in, for example, addresses 1A00H and 1A01H of the ROM 202.
They are stored in 1A01H and 1A02H, respectively.

In addition, the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability (see FIG. 834(b)) includes the following:
The random numbers for the special jackpot are: 4, 11, 15, 28, 38, 45, 52,
64, 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 1
51, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 2
These 30 random numbers are stored in the ROM, for example.
The random numbers are stored in the range of addresses 1A03H to 1A20H of the first winning table 202a1 for low probability and the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability.
2a2 are defined consecutively so that no vacant addresses occur. Details will be described later, but by defining each table consecutively, if only the top address of each table is known, the number of data items defined in the table can be easily calculated by finding the difference between the top addresses of adjacent tables.

Next, the contents of each table in the program will be described with reference to Fig. 835. Fig. 835 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the first random number table 202a1 for low probability and the first random number table 202a2 for high probability.

As shown in Fig. 835, first, "TL_TBL" is specified as a label indicating the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability, and in the next line, 07H, 6BH, and F0H are specified as data to be specified in the first winning random number table 202a for low probability. These random number values are specified in order from address 00H of the ROM 202.

In addition, in the line next to the line in which the data (random value values) specified in the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability are written, "TH_TBL" is specified as a label indicating the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability.

From the next line where the label "TH_TBL" is specified, 30 random numbers specified in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability are specified over three lines, 10 per line. Of these three lines, the first line is written to associate 10 random numbers with each of the lines from addresses 03H to 0CH, the second line is written to associate 10 random numbers with each of the lines from addresses 0DH to 16H, and the third line is written to associate 10 random numbers with each of the lines from addresses 17H to 20H.

By dividing the random value values into multiple lines, the program creator can easily find any missing random value values. In other words, if 30 random value values are written on one line, it becomes difficult to tell at a glance how many random value values are specified, and even if some random value values are missing, they may be overlooked. In contrast, in this modified example,
Since the same number of random numbers are written in multiple lines, for example, if the random numbers are partially omitted in the second line, the length of the second line will be shorter than the first line, so that it is possible to immediately determine that there is an error in the second line. This can prevent errors in the program description, and therefore prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning based on an incorrect description. In this modification, the number of random numbers written per line is 10, but this is not limited to this, and any number that makes it easy to find an omission may be used. For example, 6 random numbers may be specified per line and written in 5 lines, or 15 random numbers may be specified per line and written in 2 lines.

In the next line of the line in which the data (random number value) specified in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability is described, "FL_TBL" is specified as a label indicating the second winning random number table 202c for low probability (random number table for winning normal symbols), and from the next line onwards, random number values for winning normal symbols when the normal symbols have a low probability are described. Although not shown in the figure, the random number values for winning normal symbols are also described in multiple lines, with a maximum of 10 random number values per line, just like the random number values for winning special symbols.

In the program, the number of random numbers constituting each table is specified in a portion different from the specified portion of each table (first winning random number table 202a and second winning random number table 202c).
The number of random numbers in the first winning random number table 202a1 is defined as "TL_SIZE", and the number of random numbers in the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability is defined as "TH_S
In this way, since the number of random value values is defined in correspondence with the label, the creator of the program does not need to directly count the number of random value values and define it by a number in all processes that read out random value values. In particular, when the program is diverted to another model, the number of random value values may change. In this modification, even if the number changes, the meanings of the labels "TL_SIZE" and "TH_SIZE" do not change, so there is no need to rewrite the contents of the process that reads out the number of random value values in each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the program from being overwritten when diverting the program, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a program rewriting error. In addition, in this modification, the portions in the program where each table is described and the portions in which the number of random value values that make up each table are described are described in one place. By integrating the portions for each type of description content in this way, it is possible to prevent the program creator from overwriting the program when diverting the program to another model. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a program rewriting error.

"TL_SIZE" is the address indicated by the label "TH_TBL" and the label "
It is defined as the difference between the address indicated by "TH_TL_TBL" and the address indicated by "TH_
SIZE" is the address indicated by the label "FL_TBL" and the label "TH_TB
The number of random number values defined in each table is defined by the difference between the address indicated by "L". In this way, if the number of random number values defined in each table is defined by a label associated with the top address of each table, there is no need to rewrite the label definition even if the specified position of the table in ROM 202 changes or the number of random number values defined in the table changes. This makes it less likely that a program will be overlooked when it is repurposed, and therefore makes it possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a program rewrite error.
In addition, in this modified example, one random value is stored in one address, and the random values are defined so that no empty addresses are generated between the tables. This makes the address range in which each table is defined match the number of random values, so that the random values defined in each table can be easily calculated by the label associated with the top address of each table. Note that the definition of the label is not limited to the content of this modified example, and may be arbitrarily defined so that it is easy for the program creator to understand.

Next, the control process of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example will be described. FIG. 836 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In the special symbol variation process (S104) of this modified example, the processes of S201 to S207 and the processes of S209 to S214 are the same as those in the special symbol variation process (
In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the same processes as those in S201 to S207 and S209 to S214 of the process in S104 are executed.
When the data in the special symbol reserved storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area (S207), the big win determination process 2 is executed (S221), and this process is terminated.
S221) is a process for determining whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot based on the random number value defined in the first jackpot random number table 202a and the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first jackpot random number counter buffer. Details of this jackpot determination process 2 (S221) will be described with reference to the following FIG.

FIG. 837 is a flowchart showing the big win determination process 2 (S221) in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example.
In each of the processes of S303, S305, and S307 to S310, the same process as the big win determination process in the seventeenth embodiment (see FIG. 804) is executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S303: Yes), then the address represented by "TH_TBL" (i.e., the top address of the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability) is set as the comparison source address (S311), and "TH_SIZE" (i.e., the top address of the first winning random number table 202a2 for high probability) is set as the comparison source address (S312).
2a2) is set as the number of comparisons (S312), and the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the special symbol has a low probability of occurring (S3
03: No), then the address represented by "TH_TBL" (i.e., the first address for low probability
The top address of the winning random number table 202a1 is set as the comparison source address (S313).
Then, "TL_SIZE" (i.e., the number of random numbers defined in the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability) is set as the number of comparisons (S314), and the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305 to which the process proceeds after the process of S312 or S314, the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the first win random number counter buffer is read (S
305), and then compare the read value of the first winning random number counter C1 with the random number value defined in the comparison source address (S315). Then, the comparison source address is incremented by 1, and
The number of comparisons is decremented by 1 (S316), and it is determined whether the number of comparisons after the decrement is 0 or not (S3
17), if the determination result is 0 (S317: Yes), the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S317 that the number of comparisons is not 0 (i.e., is 1 or more) (S317: No), the process proceeds to S315 again, and S315 is repeated until the number of comparisons becomes 0.
The process of steps S317 to S317 is repeated. That is, the first winning random number table 202a1 for low probability,
Alternatively, each random number value defined in the first win random number table 202a2 for high probability is compared with the value of the first win random number counter C1 one by one for all random number values.

In this way, by using a label when reading out the table or the number of random numbers defined in the table, it is possible to omit the modification of the contents of the big win determination process 2 (S208) in the program when transferring the program to another model.
This makes it possible to prevent errors in program correction, thereby making it possible to prevent malfunctions of the pachinko machine 10 caused by errors in program correction.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the variation type data is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Then, the variation type data is converted into a pattern selection offset value using the offset setting table 202e, and is configured to be used to select a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f. In addition, the offset setting table 202e is configured to select a different pattern selection offset value according to the number of reserved balls in the case of a predetermined variation type data value (03H, 05H, 07H) even if the value of the variation type data is the same. This makes it possible to change the variation period of the variation pattern according to the number of reserved balls. More specifically, when a predetermined variation type data value (03H, 05H, 07H) is selected, the variation pattern type with a shorter variation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases.

By configuring in this way, when there are many reserved balls (i.e., when the variation pattern effects are continuous), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a series of long variation pattern effects that end up being misses. In general, the longer the variation time of the variation pattern effect, the more likely the player is to have expectations of a big win, so the longer the variation time of the variation pattern effect that ends up being a miss, the greater the player's disappointment. Therefore, by configuring in such a way that it is difficult for long variation time misses to occur in succession, as in this embodiment, it is possible to suppress the player's loss of interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in order to select a variation pattern type according to the number of reserved balls, a pattern selection offset value is determined from the variation type data using the offset setting table 202e.
2e, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the offset value and the offset setting table 202e. This reduces the processing load of the MPU 201 compared to the case where the offset setting table 202e is not provided and the fluctuation type counter value is directly converted into the offset value in the control process. Therefore, the process of determining the mode of the fluctuation pattern presentation, which is one of the most important processes in the game, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable because the process of determining the mode of the fluctuation pattern presentation takes time and the fluctuation pattern presentation is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the data tables of the state setting table 202h and the first winning random number table 202a are specified in the program, a predetermined address such as the top address of the table and a predetermined name (label) are associated with the number of types of data specified in the table. By configuring in this way, when configuring a program to read out a predetermined address or number of data in the data table in another process, it is not necessary to directly write the address value. In particular, if the model changes, the processing content and number of data in the data table may change, so when the program used in this pachinko machine 10 is diverted to another gaming machine, the address value assigned to each data table and the type of data specified may also change. Even in such a case, if a predetermined name (label) is associated with the address read out in another process, when the program is diverted to another model, it is not necessary to retype the address of the data table or the number of types of data in the description of the process including the control to read out the predetermined address of the data table or the number of types of data. This makes it possible to prevent errors in entering a program when the program is being diverted, thereby suppressing malfunctions of the pachinko machine 10 due to program errors.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the number of types of data defined in the data table is associated with a predetermined name (label), the number is specified using a label associated with a predetermined address in the data table. This eliminates the need for the program creator to count the number of types of data defined in the data table and associate the counted number with a predetermined name (label). In other words, even if the predetermined address or the number of types of data is changed due to program conversion, the number of types of data is automatically calculated as a value corresponding to the converted program using the label. This prevents errors in entering the program when the program is converted, and thus prevents the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to program errors.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 838 to 840. In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, even if the value of the fluctuation type data selected based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same, in order to change the fluctuation period of the fluctuation pattern according to the number of reserved balls, the offset setting table 202e specifies different pattern selection offset values according to the number of reserved balls. Then, different fluctuation pattern types are selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see Figure 789) according to the pattern selection offset value.

In contrast to this, in the 18th embodiment, the offset setting table 202e specifies that there is a one-to-one correspondence between the fluctuation type data and the pattern selection offset value.
In other words, when the same variation type data is selected, the same pattern selection offset value is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. In this embodiment, the data structure of the pattern selection offset value is determined, and if it is a predetermined data structure, a conversion is performed on the pattern selection offset value to obtain a new offset value. Then, based on that offset value, a variation pattern type is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 789). In other words, the offset selection table 202
Instead of prescribing an offset value for the number of reserved balls in the offset setting table 202e, the program is configured to determine whether or not to convert the value into a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls. This allows the data capacity of the offset setting table 202e to be reduced compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment. The determination of whether or not the above-mentioned "predetermined data configuration" is made based on whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is 1. If it is determined that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is 1, the program performs a conversion in which the number of reserved balls is added to a value with the most significant bit set to 0.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment.
The difference in configuration from the first embodiment is that the contents of the offset setting table 202e in the ROM 202 in the main control unit 110 have been partially changed, and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) has been changed.
02) is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment. The other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in the Eighteenth Embodiment>
First, referring to Fig. 838, the offset setting table 202e defined in the ROM 202 in the 18th embodiment will be described. Fig. 838 is a diagram showing the offset setting table 202e in this embodiment. In the offset setting table 202e in the 17th embodiment, when the fluctuation type data value is "03H", "05H", or "07H", a different pattern selection offset value is selected according to the number of reserved balls. In this embodiment, however, the fluctuation type data value and the pattern selection offset value are configured to have a one-to-one correspondence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 838, the fluctuation type data value is "00H" to "02H", "0
In the case of "04H", "06H", "08H" to "09H", the same values as those in the seventeenth embodiment are associated with the pattern selection offset value. That is, for each of the above-mentioned fluctuation type data, "00H (0 in binary notation)" is associated with the pattern selection offset value.
0000000B) to 02H (00000010B in binary notation), 07H (2
"00000111B in hexadecimal notation,""0CH (00001100B in binary notation),"
"11H (00010001B in binary notation)" to "13H (000100
11B) are associated with each of the above-mentioned fluctuation type data. In other words, the pattern selection offset value corresponding to each of the above-mentioned fluctuation type data is data in which the most significant bit is "0".

On the other hand, the pattern selection offset value associated with the value "03H" of the fluctuation type data is "83H (10000011B in binary notation)".
The pattern selection offset value associated with "88H" (1000 in binary notation) is "88H".
The pattern selection offset value associated with the fluctuation type data value "07H" is "8DH (10010001B in binary notation)." In other words, the pattern offset values corresponding to the fluctuation type data "03H,""05H," and "07H" (i.e., fluctuation type data in which different fluctuation pattern types are selected depending on the number of reserved balls) all have the most significant bit set to "1."

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the loss setting process 2 (see FIG. 840) described later, it is determined whether the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1" or not, and an offset value for identifying the type of fluctuation pattern is calculated from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 789). That is, if the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1", the data "1" stored in the most significant bit is cleared, and further,
The offset setting table 202e is configured to add a numerical value corresponding to the number of reserved balls (to convert the pattern selection offset value into a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls). Since there is no need to specify data for each number of reserved balls in the offset setting table 202e, the amount of data in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced. In addition, the decision as to whether to convert into a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls is made in the 17th step.
In the embodiment, this is done by checking whether the most significant bit (empty bit) of the pattern selection offset value, which is not used, stores the data "1". Therefore, it is possible to determine whether to convert the pattern selection offset value to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls without increasing the number of bits of the pattern selection offset value.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, information corresponding to the offset value for selecting a fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f is configured to be stored in the lower bits of each pattern selection offset (no information corresponding to the offset is stored in the higher bits), so that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset can be used to determine whether or not to perform a conversion according to the number of reserved balls.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, whether or not to convert the pattern selection offset value to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls is determined based on whether or not the most significant bit of the data is set to "1." However, this is not limited to this, and the offset value may be configured to be stored in, for example, the sixth bit.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the 18th embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 18th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 839 and 840. First, Fig. 839 shows the big win determination process (
This jackpot determination process (S208) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 803) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 802) of the main control device 110, and as described above, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a lottery (win/lose determination) of "special symbol jackpot" or "miss of special symbol" is performed, and the process is for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot determination process (S208), the processes of S301 to S308 and S310 are the same as those of S30 in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 804) in the seventeenth embodiment.
In the big win determination process in the 18th embodiment, the same processes as the loss setting process (S301 to S308 and S310) in the 17th embodiment are executed.
9), a miss setting process 2 (S311) is executed. That is, in the big win determination process (S208) in the 18th embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S307 that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 does not match any of the random number values specified in the comparison source table (S307: No), the miss setting process 2 is executed (S311) and the process moves to S310. This miss setting process 2 is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern when it is determined that the special symbol is a miss, similar to the miss setting process (see FIG. 807) in the 17th embodiment.

Next, the above-mentioned loss time setting process 2 (S311) will be described with reference to Fig. 840. Fig. 840 is a flow chart showing this loss time setting process 2 (S311).
This miss setting process 2 (S311) is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 during the jackpot determination process (see Figure 839), and as described above, is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern when it is determined that the special pattern has missed.

In this miss-time setting process 2 (S311), the processes of S601 and S604 are the same as the processes of S601 and S604 of the miss-time setting process in the 17th embodiment (see FIG. 807). In the miss-time setting process 2 (S311) in the 18th embodiment, in the process of S601, the fluctuation type data is selected from the fluctuation type selection table 202d based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S601).
Next, a pattern selection offset value is determined from the offset setting table 202e based on the selected fluctuation type data (S611), and it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the determined pattern selection offset value is "1" (S612).
If it is determined that the pattern selection offset value is "0" (S612: Yes), the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is cleared to "0", and the current number of reserved balls (i.e., the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 203c) is added to the pattern selection offset value to set it as a new offset value (S
613), and the process proceeds to S615.

On the other hand, in the process of S612, if it is determined that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is not "1" (i.e., "0") (S612: No), the pattern selection offset value determined in the process of S611 is set as the offset value as it is (S614), and the process proceeds to S615. In the process of S615, the variation pattern type specified in the address that is the offset value set in the process of S613 or S614 ahead of 1AF5H, which is the top address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected as the variation pattern type of the variation pattern performance to be executed this time (S615). Then, after the process of S615, the process proceeds to S604.

In this way, in the process of S612, the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is set to "1
By determining whether the most significant bit is "1" or not, and converting it to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls if the most significant bit is "1", the number of data specified in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment, in the variation pattern type in which the variation time is changed according to the number of reserved balls, the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "
The offset setting table 202e is stipulated to be "1". When a variation pattern type is selected based on a pattern selection offset value selected from the offset setting table 202e, a determination is made as to whether or not to convert to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls based on whether the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is "1". By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to stipulate pattern selection offset values for the number of reserved balls in the offset setting table 202e, so the amount of data stipulated in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the capacity of the ROM 202 from increasing, thereby reducing the production cost of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the fluctuation type data using the offset setting table 202e.
Since the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the offset value and the offset setting table 202e, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced compared to the case where the fluctuation type counter value is directly converted to the offset value in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. Therefore, the process of determining the mode of the fluctuation pattern presentation, which is one of the most important processes in the game, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable because the process of determining the mode of the fluctuation pattern presentation takes time and the fluctuation pattern presentation is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 841 to 857. In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the variation pattern type was selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f for each of the big win, the miss when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64a, and the miss when the ball enters the second ball entrance 64b. In addition, in some misses, even if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same, a variation pattern presentation of a different mode is set according to the number of reserved balls.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th embodiment, a different variation pattern type is selected based on the previous big win type (type of the first symbol) and the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the big win. This makes it possible to diversify the variation of the variation pattern presentation, thereby preventing the presentation from becoming monotonous. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th embodiment is configured to notify whether or not the state will transition to a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of a jackpot based on the content of the performance executed during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot. Specifically, from the end of the jackpot until the end of 10 special symbol lotteries, the third symbol display device 81 performs a performance in which the display image is ranked up, and when the rank reaches its maximum, it is notified that the state has transitioned to a high probability state of a special symbol. More specifically, the third symbol display device 81 performs a performance in which a plant displayed on the screen grows, and when the plant has fully grown and bloomed, it is notified that the state has transitioned to a high probability state of a special symbol (see Figs. 849 to 853). In this way, by executing the rank-up performance for a predetermined period, the player can be made to feel happy or sad about the results of each performance, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 19th embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment.
The difference in configuration from the above is that in the main control device 110, the first winning type selection table 202b, the variable type selection table 202d, and the offset setting table 2
802) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment. The contents of the table 202e and the variation pattern selection table 202f have been partially changed, and a loss selection table 202j has been newly added, a win type storage area 203e and a variation count counter 203g have been added to the RAM 203 of the main control device, a rank information storage area 223e has been added to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, some of the processing included in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 802) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment, and some of the processing included in the main processing (see FIG. 818) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment. Other configurations, other processing executed by the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control device 113 differ from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment.
Various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114
The various processes executed by the control unit 31 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventeenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.
The illustration and explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in the Nineteenth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 841 to 848. Fig. 841 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th embodiment. As shown in Fig. 841, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th embodiment, the RAM 20 of the main control device 110
3, a win type storage area 203f and a variation counter 203g are provided. The win type storage area 203f is an area for storing data corresponding to the type of big win, and the previous big win type can be specified based on the data stored in this area. The variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is drawn after the end of a big win, and is cleared to 0 every time a big win is won.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th embodiment has a RAM of the sound and lamp control device 113.
A rank information storage area 223e is provided in 223.
In the case of the third symbol display device 81, as described above, the display image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is ranked up. The data for specifying this rank is stored in the rank information storage area 223.
e, and based on the stored data, a control is performed so that an appropriate performance according to the current rank is executed.

842 to 848 show the ROM 20 of the main control device 110 in the 19th embodiment.
842(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the 18th embodiment, and a diagram showing various data defined in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 842(a), the ROM 202 of this embodiment is provided with a loss selection table 202j in addition to the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the 18th embodiment. The details will be described later, but this loss selection table 202j is a table used to select one table from a plurality of tables defined in the variation type selection table 202d according to the previous big win type (type of the first pattern) and the number of times the special pattern was drawn after the big win.

Next, referring to FIG. 842(b), the first winning type selection table 2 in this embodiment will be described.
In this embodiment, the jackpot types are “time-saving jackpot A” to “time-saving jackpot B”.
"Time-saving jackpot C", "Probable jackpot A" to "Probable jackpot H", "Latent probable jackpot A"
There are 14 types of jackpots, from "Hidden probability jackpot C" to "Hidden probability jackpot C".
As shown in (b), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 69", the "time-saving big win A" is selected, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "70 to 89".
If the value of the first winning type counter C2 is within the range of "90 to 99", the "time-saving big win B" is selected, and if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is within the range of "90 to 99", the "time-saving big win C" is selected.

In addition, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "100 to 101",
If the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "102 to 106", "probable jackpot B" is selected, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "107 to 111", "probable jackpot C" is selected, and if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "112 to 126", "probable jackpot D" is selected. Furthermore, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "127 to 141", "probable jackpot E" is selected, and if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "142 to 143", "probable jackpot E" is selected.
If the number is within the range of "51", "Certainty Big Win F" is selected, and the first winning type counter C
If the value of 2 is in the range of "152 to 161", "Certain Big Win G" is selected, and the first
When the value of the winning type counter C2 is within the range of "162 to 171", the "high probability big win H" is selected.

If the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "172 to 176",
The "latent probability variable jackpot A" is selected, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "177 to 18
If the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "187 to 199", the "latent variable jackpot A" is selected.

In addition, although the "time-saving jackpot A" to "time-saving jackpot C" have different methods for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern after the jackpot ends, the rest (number of jackpot rounds, number of time-saving times for normal patterns, etc.) are the same as the "jackpot A (time-saving jackpot)" of the 18th embodiment.
Regarding the "Probable jackpot A" to "Probable jackpot H", the selection method of the variation pattern type after the jackpot ends is different from each other, but other operations such as the number of jackpot rounds are the same as the "jackpot B (probable jackpot)" of the 18th embodiment.
With regard to "Latent High-Speed Jackpot C," the operations other than the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern type are the same as those of the "Jackpot C (Latent High-Speed Jackpot C)" of the 18th embodiment.

In this way, by providing a wide variety of jackpots with different selection methods for the type of variation pattern, it is possible to execute various variation pattern presentations, which prevents the presentation from becoming monotonous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the variation type selection table 202d defined in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 843 to 845.
3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation type selection table 202d. In the variation type selection table 202d of the 18th embodiment, three types of tables were specified: a selection table for winning 202d1, a selection table for losing 1st special drawing 202d2, and a selection table for losing 2nd special drawing 202d3. In this embodiment, in addition to the above three types of tables, a selection table for hiding 2
Nine types of tables are provided: selection table 202d4 for promotion period, selection table 202d5 for promotion period, selection table 202d6 for promotion period, selection table 202d7 for promotion period, selection table 202d8 for promotion period, selection table 202d9 for promotion period, selection table 202d10 for promotion period end 202d11, and selection table 202d12 for promotion period end.

The selection table 202d4 for the latent state is a table used for selecting the mode of the miss variable presentation at the end of the rank-up presentation when the state transitions to a high probability state of a special pattern after the end of a jackpot, but the player is not notified of the transition to the high probability state of a special pattern in the rank-up presentation.

The promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table that is referenced during the period in which the rank-up performance is performed, and is a table in which the variable type data corresponding to the rank-up is not selected. In contrast, the promotion period selection table 202d6 is a table in which the probability of the variable type data corresponding to the rank-up being selected is set to a low probability (30%).
In addition, in the promotion period selection table 202d7, the probability that the fluctuation type data corresponding to the rank up is selected is set to a medium level (50%).
In the selection table 202d8, the probability that the variable type data corresponding to the rank up is selected is set to a high probability (70%), and in the selection table 202d9 for the promotion period, the probability that the variable type data corresponding to the rank up is selected is set to the maximum (90%). In addition, the selection table 202d10 for the promotion period is a table in which the variable type data corresponding to the performance of the rank up to the maximum rank is always selected regardless of the current rank situation.

In addition, the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period is a table in which the variable type data corresponding to the effect of notifying that the rank has not reached the maximum in the rank-up effect is always selected, and the selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period is a table in which the variable type data corresponding to the effect of notifying that the rank has been raised to the maximum rank in the rank-up effect (i.e., that the special symbol has been moved to a high probability state) is always selected. By selecting each of these tables according to the jackpot type and the number of times that the special symbol is drawn after the jackpot ends, a wide variety of effects can be executed. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In FIG. 843, for the sake of simplicity, each table is numbered from No. 0 to No.
In the above example, the tables are written with the numbers 1 through 11 corresponding to them, but in an actual program, a separate label is written corresponding to the top address of each table. When a table is to be read in another process, each table is read using the label corresponding to it. This makes it possible to prevent data entry errors by the programmer when repurposing a program, since it is only necessary to change the label definition and there is no need to modify the program for each process that reads a table. This makes it possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to incorrect data being specified. Examples of label names to be associated with each table include, for example, "C_TBL0" through "C_TBL
"11" etc.

Next, referring to FIG. 844(a), the details of the selection table 202d4 for latent time used to select the type of variation pattern at the time of failure when the player is not notified of the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol in the rank-up performance, even though the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol occurs after the end of the jackpot, will be described. FIG. 844(a) is a diagram showing the value of the variation type data selected for each value of the variation type counter CS1, as specified in the selection table 202d4 for latent time. As shown in FIG. 844(a), the variation type counter CS
If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149, "07H" is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 150 to 174, "08H" is selected as the fluctuation type data.
If "09H" is selected and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 175 to 189, "09H" is selected as the fluctuation type data, and if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 190 to 199, "0AH" is selected as the fluctuation type data.

This selection table 202d4 for when the player is hiding is the same as the selection table 202d3 for when the player is not in the special drawing 2 ( FIG. 7
87(b)), the selection ratio of "07H", which is the variation type data corresponding to a complete miss, is set low, and the selection ratio of variation type data corresponding to a miss short reach, a miss long reach, and a miss super reach is set high. In other words, when the selection table 202d4 for the latent time is selected, a variation pattern type with a long variation time is likely to be selected. As a result, even if the transition to a high probability state of the special symbol is not notified in the rank-up performance, the player can be made to expect that the transition to a high probability state of the special symbol is internally occurring due to the succession of variation pattern performances with a long variation period. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 844(b), a description will be given of the promotion period selection table 202d5, which is a table that is referred to during the rank-up effect.
02d5 is a table in which no rank up occurs. As shown in FIG. 844(b),
If the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 99, the fluctuation type data "0BH" is selected, which is the fluctuation type data corresponding to a fluctuation pattern type in which the fluctuation time is short and rank up fails (short fluctuation for promotion period), and if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 100 to 199, the fluctuation type data "0CH" is selected, which is the fluctuation type data corresponding to a fluctuation pattern type in which the fluctuation time is relatively long and rank up fails (long fluctuation A for promotion period).

Next, with reference to FIG. 844(c), a description will be given of the promotion period selection table 202d6, which is a table that is referred to during the rank-up effect.
02d5 is a table in which the probability of rank up is set to a low probability (30%). As shown in FIG. 844(c), if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 79, the fluctuation type data "0BH" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type (short fluctuation for promotion period) in which the fluctuation time is short and the rank up fails is selected, and if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 80 to 139, the fluctuation type data "0CH" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type (middle fluctuation A for promotion period) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long and the rank up fails is selected. Also, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 140 to 199, the fluctuation type data "0DH" corresponding to the fluctuation type (middle fluctuation B for promotion period) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long and the rank up succeeds is selected.

As for promotion period selection table 202d7 to promotion period selection table 202d9, illustration and explanation are omitted because the rate at which the fluctuation type data "0DH" is selected increases, which is a fluctuation type that has a relatively long fluctuation time and results in successful rank up (middle fluctuation B for promotion period).

Next, referring to FIG. 845(a), the promotion period selection table 202d10, which is a table referred to during the rank-up performance, will be described. As described above, the promotion period selection table 202d10 is a table in which a fluctuation type that ranks up to the highest rank regardless of the current rank is selected. As shown in FIG. 845(a), when the promotion period selection table 202d10 is selected, the fluctuation type data "0EH" corresponding to the fluctuation type (promotion period long fluctuation A) that ranks up to the highest rank is selected in all the fluctuation type counters CS1.

Next, referring to FIG. 845(b), the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period, which is a table that is referred to when the rank-up effect ends, will be described. As described above, the selection table 202d11 for the end of the promotion period is a table in which the variable type data corresponding to the effect of notifying that the rank has not reached its maximum in the rank-up effect is always selected. As shown in FIG. 845(b), the selection table 202d1 for the end of the promotion period
When 1 is selected, the fluctuation type data "0FH" is selected, which is the fluctuation type data corresponding to the fluctuation type (long fluctuation B for promotion period) for notifying that the rank has not been raised to the maximum rank for all values of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 845(c), the selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period, which is a table that is referenced at the end of the rank-up effect, will be described. As described above, the selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the effect of notifying that the player has ranked up to the maximum rank (i.e., that the player has moved to a high probability state of a special pattern) is always selected. As shown in FIG. 845(c), when the selection table 202d12 for the end of the promotion period is selected, the variation type (long variation C for promotion period) for notifying that the player has ranked up to the maximum rank is selected for all the values of the variation type counter CS1.
) the fluctuation type data "10H" corresponding to the fluctuation type data "10H" is selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a wide variety of variation pattern presentations are selected according to the game situation by referring to the various tables described above. This prevents the presentation from becoming monotonous and increases the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 846, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main control device 110
The offset setting table 202e defined in the ROM 202 of the embodiment will be described below. FIG. 846 is a diagram showing the configuration of this offset setting table 202e. As shown in FIG. 846, the offset setting table 202e in the 19th embodiment defines a correspondence between a pattern selection offset value corresponding to the fluctuation type selected during the rank-up period and the value of the fluctuation type data, in addition to the offset setting table 202e in the 18th embodiment. More specifically, a pattern selection offset value of "14H" is associated with a fluctuation type data value of "0BH", a pattern selection offset value of "15H" is associated with a fluctuation type data value of "0CH", and a pattern selection offset value of "0DH" is associated with a fluctuation type data value of "0DH".
The pattern selection offset value "16H" is associated with the value of the fluctuation type data "0EH", and the pattern selection offset value "17H" is associated with the value of the fluctuation type data "0
A pattern selection offset value of "18H" is associated with the fluctuation type data value "FH", and a pattern selection offset value of "19H" is associated with the fluctuation type data value "10H".

Next, referring to FIG. 847, a variation pattern selection table 202f for selecting a variation pattern type based on a pattern selection offset value will be described. FIG. 847 shows
This is a diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 847, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f in the 19th embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f in the 18th embodiment, the fluctuation pattern type selected during the rank-up period is specified.

More specifically, a fluctuation pattern type in which the fluctuation time is 6 seconds and the rank up fails (short fluctuation for promotion period) is specified in address 1B09H, and
Address 1B0H specifies a fluctuation pattern type in which the fluctuation time is 8 seconds and the rank up is unsuccessful (promotion period middle fluctuation A), address 1B0BH specifies a fluctuation pattern type in which the fluctuation time is 9 seconds and the rank up is successful (promotion period middle fluctuation B). Address 1B0CH specifies a fluctuation pattern type in which the fluctuation time is 12 seconds and the rank is promoted to the maximum rank (promotion period long fluctuation B), and address 1B0DH specifies a fluctuation pattern type in which the fluctuation time is 12 seconds and the rank up is successful (promotion period long fluctuation B).
At address 1B0EH, a fluctuation time of 13 seconds is specified, and a fluctuation pattern type (long fluctuation B for promotion period) is specified for notifying that promotion to the maximum rank has not been achieved in the rank-up presentation, and at address 1B0EH, a fluctuation time of 14 seconds is specified, and a fluctuation pattern type (long fluctuation C for promotion period) is specified for notifying that promotion to the maximum rank has been achieved in the rank-up presentation.

In this way, by defining a wide variety of variation pattern types, various variation pattern types can be selected according to the state of the game, so that the presentation can be prevented from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 848, the ROM 20 of the main control device 110 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described.
The following describes the loss selection table 202j defined in 2. The loss selection table 202j is a table that defines the relationship between the number of times the special pattern was drawn after the end of the previous big win (the number of times the pattern changed after the end of the big win) and the table to be referenced for selecting the change type data for each type of big win. In FIG. 848, "No." represents the "No." attached to each table defined in the change type selection table 202d (see FIG. 843).

As shown in FIG. 848, for example, if the previous jackpot was "Time-saving jackpot A",
At that time, from the end of the short big win A until the nine special symbol lotteries are completed, each time the special symbol lottery is lost, the No. 5 table is read out from the variable type selection table 202d and referenced to select the variable type data. Note that the No. 5 table means the promotion period selection table 202d6, so that in the lottery of each special symbol, the display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81 has only a 30% probability of succeeding in ranking up. In addition, in the lottery of the 10th special symbol, the No. 10 table is read out and referenced to select the variable type data. Note that the No. 10 table means
Since this means the promotion period end selection table 202d11, in the variation pattern production,
A performance is performed to inform the player that the player has not been able to rank up to the maximum rank. Then, in the 11th and subsequent special symbol lottery, the player is selected to play either the No. 1 table or the No. 2 table (i.e., the special symbol 1 miss selection table 202d) depending on the type of the ball entry hole into which the ball entered.
2, or special chart 2 miss selection table 202d3) is read out and referenced to select the variation type data.

Also, for example, if the previous jackpot was a "probable jackpot D", after the probable jackpot D ends and until the special pattern lottery is completed 9 times, each time the special pattern lottery is missed, the No. 7 table is read out from the variable type selection table 202d and referenced to select the variable type data. Note that the No. 7 table means the promotion period selection table 202d8, so in the lottery of each special pattern, the display performance performed by the third pattern display device 81 is a performance in which the rank-up is successful with a probability of 70%. In addition, in the lottery of the 10th special pattern, the No. 11 table is read out and referenced to select the variable type data. Note that the No. 11 table means the promotion period end selection table 202d12, so in the variable pattern performance, a performance is performed to notify that the rank-up has been achieved to the maximum rank (i.e., the special pattern has been moved to a high probability state). Then, in the 11th and subsequent special pattern lottery, depending on the type of ball entry hole into which the ball entered, either the No. 1 table or the No. 2 table (i.e., either the special pattern 1 miss selection table 202d2 or the special pattern 2 miss selection table 202d3) is read out and referenced to select the variable type data.

Also, for example, if the previous jackpot was a "probable jackpot G", after the end of the probable jackpot G, until the four special symbol lotteries are completed, each time the special symbol lottery is lost, the No. 8 table is read out from the variable type selection table 202d and referenced to select the variable type data. The No. 8 table means the promotion period selection table 202d9, so in the lottery for each special symbol, the display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81 has a 90% chance of succeeding in ranking up. In addition, in the fifth special symbol lottery, the No. 9 table is read out and referenced to select the variable type data. The No. 9 table means the promotion period end selection table 202d9.
Since it means 02d10, in the variation pattern performance, a performance in which the rank is raised to the maximum rank is performed. Then, in the drawing of the special pattern from the sixth time onwards, depending on the type of the ball entrance into which the ball entered, either the table No. 1 or the table No. 2 (i.e., either the selection table 202d2 for special pattern 1 or the selection table 202d3 for special pattern 2) is read out and referenced to select the variation type data.

In addition, in order to prevent the rank from rising to the highest rank by rank up even if the previous jackpot was "time-saving jackpot A" to "time-saving jackpot C" or "latent probability change jackpot A" to "latent probability change jackpot C", the current rank is grasped in the voice lamp control device 113. Specifically, the current rank is determined based on the rank information stored in the rank information storage area 223e. Then, when the rank information is one rank below the maximum rank, and a fluctuation pattern type corresponding to rank up (i.e., long fluctuation A for promotion period with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds) is notified by the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation time is the same (12 seconds) and the fluctuation pattern performance mode that fails to rank up is selected. Then, based on the selected mode, a display fluctuation pattern command is set.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the loss selection table 202j also specifies the correspondence between the number of times the special symbol is drawn and the table to be selected when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 781) pressed. For example, the control when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 781) pressed is configured to select either the special symbol 1 loss selection table 202d2 or the special symbol 2 loss selection table 202d3 until the first big win is won, regardless of the number of times the special symbol is drawn. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a rank-up effect immediately after power-on (i.e., a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a rank-up effect even though there is no possibility of transitioning to a high probability state of the special symbol, which causes the player to become confused or to have difficulty in having expectations for the rank-up effect.

In addition, the control when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 781) pressed is not limited to this. For example, the variable type selection table 202
d, a table that is selected only during the period from when the power is turned on until the first big win is won may be prepared, and a dedicated variation pattern type may be displayed.
In most cases, the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 781) is pressed when the parlor opens, so by preparing a dedicated variation pattern type, players can be made to look forward to that dedicated variation pattern type. Therefore, players can be allowed to start playing immediately after the parlor opens, which improves the operating rate of the pachinko machines 10 in the parlor.

Next, a specific example of the rank-up effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the rank-up period will be described with reference to Figs. 849 to 853. In the rank-up effect of this embodiment, after the big win, the lowest rank is set to rank D. Then, each time a variation pattern type corresponding to rank-up is selected, the rank is set to rank C, rank B,
The ranking increases in the order of rank A, rank S. Furthermore, when the ranking increases to rank S, the player is notified that a transition has been made to a state of high probability of a special symbol.

FIG. 849(a) shows the lowest rank D during the rank-up period.
849(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third symbol is changing. As shown in FIG. 849(a), during the change of the third symbol, the rectangular area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 displays "Rank D
" is displayed. That is, the rectangular area provided at the top left is an area for displaying the current rank information.

In addition, a horizontally elongated rectangular area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81 displays "Rank up with the appearance of chance symbol (341)". This display content informs the player that if the combination of chance symbols "3", "4" and "1" appears as a result of the variable pattern presentation, the player will be ranked up. This allows the player to play in the hope of the chance symbol appearing.

In addition, a rectangular area provided in the upper right corner of the third symbol display device 81 displays "9 promotion chances remaining." This number indicates how many rank-up chances remain in the rank-up period, and is subtracted by one each time a variation pattern performance is executed.

Furthermore, an image of the ground is displayed at the bottom right of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, plants grow on the ground according to the rank, and at the highest rank, the plants bloom (see FIG. 852). In this way, by displaying a visually easy-to-understand effect, the player can easily recognize the current rank.

FIG. 849(b) is a diagram showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is not increased as a result of the fluctuation pattern performance executed during the rank-up period. As shown in FIG. 849(b), when the rank is not increased (i.e., when the short fluctuation for promotion period or the middle fluctuation A for promotion period is selected as the fluctuation pattern type),
Combinations other than the chance numbers "3", "4", and "1" (in the example of Figure 849(b)
The combination of the numbers "3", "8", and "1" is displayed. In addition, the word "Too bad..." is displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, to inform the player that he/she was not able to rank up.

Next, referring to FIG. 850 to FIG. 852, when the rank is increased, the third symbol display device 8
The display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. Fig. 850 is a diagram showing the display contents when the player ranks up from rank D, which is the lowest rank. When ranking up, first, the symbols "3", "4", and "1" which are combinations of chance eyes are displayed, and an effect in which light shines from above onto the ground displayed in the lower right of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed (see Fig. 850(a)). Then, as plants sprout on the ground, the third
In the area provided in the upper center of the pattern display device 81, "Rank Up!!" is displayed.
See FIG. 850(b). This allows the player to easily recognize that the rank has been increased. Furthermore, in the area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, "Rank D → C" is displayed (see FIG. 850(b)). This allows the player to easily understand that the rank has been increased from rank D to rank C by this rank increase.

Next, the display contents displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the rank is upgraded from C to B will be explained with reference to FIG. 851(a). As shown in FIG. 851(a), when the rank is upgraded from C to B, the sprout displayed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81 grows. Specifically, the number of leaves on the plant increases to four and the overall length of the plant roughly doubles. Also, as in the case of upgrading from D to C,
The message "Rank Up!!" is displayed in an area provided in the upper center of the pattern display device 81.
Also, in the area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, "Rank C → B" is displayed. This allows the player to easily recognize that the latest rank-up has raised the rank to B. Although not shown in the figures, before the plant grows, an effect is produced in which light shines on the plant sprout from above. That is, when the plant is ranked up to rank B, an effect similar to that shown in FIG. 850(a) is produced. Although not shown in the figures, a similar effect is produced when the plant is ranked up to rank A or rank S.

Next, the case of ranking up from rank B to rank A will be explained with reference to FIG. 851(b). As shown in FIG. 851(b), when ranking up from rank B to rank A, the plant displayed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81 grows further, and a flower bud is displayed at the tip of the plant. Also, as in the case of ranking up to rank C or rank B,
"Rank Up!!" is displayed in an area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. Also, "Rank B → A" is displayed in an area provided in the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to easily recognize that the current rank-up has raised him to rank A.

Next, a case where a rank is upgraded from rank A to rank S will be described with reference to FIG. 852. As shown in FIG. 852, when a rank is upgraded from rank A to rank S,
The plant displayed on the right side of the pattern display device 81 is displayed in bloom. Also, as in the case of ranking up to another rank, "Rank Up!!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third pattern display device 81. Also, "Rank A → S" is displayed in the area provided in the upper left of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to easily recognize that the current ranking up has raised the player to rank S.

Next, referring to FIG. 853, the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variable pattern performance executed at the end of the rank-up period will be described.
853(a) is a diagram showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player ranks up to the highest rank, and FIG. 853(b) is a diagram showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player does not rank up to the highest rank.
A figure showing the display content displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 853(a), when the player is notified that the rank has been raised to the highest rank and that the special symbol has been moved to a high probability state, the third symbol to be stopped is "3",
A chance eye consisting of a combination of "4" and "1" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the flowering plant on the right side shines. Also, the word "Probability change!" is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, and the word "Promotion" is displayed in the area in the upper right corner of the third symbol display device 81. In reality, the state transitions to a high probability state of the special symbol when the big win ends, but by displaying the word "Promotion", the player can feel as if he or she has made the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol by himself or herself, by timing the shot of the ball during the rank-up period, etc. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 853(b), if the player fails to reach the maximum rank during the rank-up period, the third symbol display device 8 will display a stop symbol other than the chance symbol as the third symbol stop symbol.
1 (in the example of FIG. 853(b), the combination of "3", "5", and "1")
The plant on the right side is displayed as withered. In addition, the word "promotion failed..." is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, and the third symbol display device 8
In the upper right corner of No. 1, the words "0 promotion chances remaining" are displayed. These displays let the player know that he or she has not been able to rank up to the maximum rank.

<Regarding control process of main control device in the 19th embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 854 to 856. First, Fig. 854 shows the big win determination process (
This jackpot determination process (S208) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 803) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 802) of the main control device 110, and as described above, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a lottery (win/lose determination) of "special symbol jackpot" or "miss of special symbol" is performed, and the process is for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the jackpot determination process (S208), the processes of S301 to S307 and S310 are the same as those of S30 in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 804) in the seventeenth embodiment.
In the jackpot determination process in the 19th embodiment, the same processes as those in the jackpot setting process (S3
08), and instead of the miss time setting process 2 (S311), the big win time setting process 2 (S3
21), and failure setting process 3 (S322) are executed.

That is, in the jackpot determination process (S208) in the 19th embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S307 that the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 matches any of the random number values defined in the comparison source table (S307: Yes), the jackpot setting process 2 is performed.
(S321) is executed, and the process proceeds to S310. This jackpot setting process 2 is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, similar to the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 805) in the 17th embodiment.

On the other hand, in the process of S307, if it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 does not match any of the random number values defined in the comparison source table (S307: N
o), execute the loss setting process 3 (S322), and move the process to S310. This loss setting process 3 is a process for setting the mode of the variable pattern when it is determined that the special symbol is lost, similar to the loss setting process 2 (see FIG. 840) in the 18th embodiment.

Next, the jackpot time setting process 2 (S321) will be described with reference to FIG. 855. FIG. 855 is a flow chart showing the jackpot time setting process 2 (S321). In the jackpot time setting process 2 (S321), the same process as the jackpot time setting process in the 17th embodiment (see FIG. 805) is executed in each process of S401 to S408. Then, in the jackpot time setting process 2 in the 19th embodiment, after the jackpot type is determined in the process of S402, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the win type storage area 203f (S411). Here, as the data corresponding to the jackpot type, for example, "00H" in the order of the jackpot types defined in the first win type selection table 202b is stored.
A value ranging from "0DH" to "0DH" may be assigned to the big win type, and the value assigned to the current big win type may be stored in the win type storage area 203f.

Next, the value of the fluctuation count counter 203g is cleared (S412), and the process proceeds to S403. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th embodiment, the type of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the data corresponding to the big win type stored in the win type storage area 203f and the value of the fluctuation count counter 203g.

Next, the above-mentioned loss setting process 2 (S311) will be described with reference to FIG. 856. The loss setting process is a process for determining a big win (
This is a process executed in the process of FIG. 839 (see FIG. 839), and as described above, this is a process for setting the mode of the variable pattern when it is determined that the special symbol is not a miss.
In the process of S601, S604, and S611 to S613, the same process as the loss setting process 2 in the 18th embodiment (see FIG. 840) is executed. In the loss setting process 3 in the 19th embodiment, first, the fluctuation number counter 2
Then, the value of the fluctuation number counter 203 after adding 1 is added (S621).
Based on the value of g and the information based on the jackpot type of the previous jackpot stored in the jackpot type storage area 203f, the table to be referred to based on the loss selection table 202j is selected from the variation type selection table 202d (S622). Then, when the processing of S622 is completed, the processing moves to S601. By the processing of S621 and S622, a wide variety of variation patterns can be executed based on the jackpot type of the previous jackpot and the number of times the special symbol was drawn after the jackpot ended, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In addition, the loss time setting process 3 (see FIG. 856) of this embodiment is configured to select a table for selecting the variation type data based on the information stored in the win type storage area 202f and the value of the variation number counter 202g, regardless of the state of the gaming machine. However, the win type storage area 202
It may be configured to select a table for selecting the variation type data based on the information stored in the variable counter 202g and the value of the variation counter 202g. In other words, when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the normal symbol is in a normal state, if the special symbol is not selected, either the special symbol 1 miss selection table 202d2 or the special symbol 2 miss selection table 202d3 may be selected. As a result, in a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal symbol is in a normal state, a table for selecting the variation type data based only on the type of the ball entry hole into which the ball entered can be selected from the variation type selection table 202d, so that the judgment conditions can be reduced. In other words, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

<Regarding control process of the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 857, the MPU 22 of the voice lamp control device in the 19th embodiment
FIG. 857 illustrates a variable display setting process (
This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 818) of the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, in order to execute the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81, it is a process for generating and setting a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110.

Of the variable display setting process (S1712), S1901 to S1903 and S19
In each process of S1905 to S1910, the same process as each process of the variable display setting process in the 17th embodiment (see FIG. 820) is executed. In the command judgment process in the 19th embodiment, when the variable pattern extracted from the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 is obtained in the process of S1903 (S1903), a display variable pattern command corresponding to an appropriate variable pattern presentation according to the rank is set based on the extracted variable pattern and the information on the current rank stored in the rank information storage area 223e (S1911). After the process of S1911 is completed, the process proceeds to S1905.

By setting the display variable pattern command taking into account the information regarding the rank stored in the rank information storage area 223e, an appropriate display performance according to the rank can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 during the rank-up performance.

<Modification of the 19th embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 858 to 862.
In the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is a miss, a different variation pattern type is selected according to the type of the previous big win and the number of times the special symbol lottery was performed after the end of the big win. In addition, in this modified example, a different variation pattern type is selected according to the variation pattern type selected when notifying the previous big win. This allows the pachinko machine 1 of the 19th embodiment to be
Since the variable pattern presentation can be executed in a wider variety of ways than in the conventional method, the player's interest in the game can be further increased.

First, referring to FIG. 858, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is shown.
FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the 19th embodiment. In this modification, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the 19th embodiment, a RAM 203
The difference is that a variation type storage area 203h for storing information for identifying the variation pattern type when notifying the previous big win is provided. Details will be described later, but if the special symbol lottery is lost, the variation pattern type is set based on the information stored in this variation type storage area 203h. The other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th embodiment.

Next, referring to FIG. 859, the variation type selection table 202d in this modified example will be described. FIG. 859(a) is a diagram showing the variation type selection table 202d defined in the ROM 202 in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 859(a), in this modified example, a special mode selection table 202d13 is added to the variation type selection table 202d as a table corresponding to No. 13. The details will be described later, but the special mode selection table 202d13 is a table in which the mode of the variation pattern presentation when notifying the previous big win is,
This is a table that is referred to when selecting the mode of the variation pattern presentation after the jackpot when the so-called premium reach mode is executed. This special mode selection table is
This is a table that may be selected after a jackpot that transitions to a high probability state of a special pattern has been won, and fluctuation type data corresponding to a fluctuation pattern type with an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is specified.

In addition, instead of the winning selection table 202d1 in the 19th embodiment, No.
, No. 14 are added with a non-variable win selection table 202d14 and a variable win selection table 202d15, respectively. In this modified example, the variation type data is selected from different tables depending on whether or not the variable win A to H is won. Furthermore, the variation type data corresponding to the premium win reach is stipulated only in the table referred to at the time of the variable win. As a result, the premium reach occurs only in the case of a variable win, so that a player who recognizes that the current reach is a premium reach can recognize that the special pattern will transition to a high probability state during the variation pattern presentation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when this premium win reach is set, for example, a presentation in which a plant blooms may be executed as a display presentation performed in the third pattern display device 81. Usually, whether or not the special pattern has transitioned to a high probability state is notified depending on whether or not the plant blooms during the rank-up period after the end of the jackpot, but when the premium win reach is displayed, a presentation in which a plant blooms is displayed before entering the rank-up period. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that after the end of the jackpot, there will be a transition to a state with a high probability of a special symbol, before the transition to the jackpot state.

FIG. 859(b) shows a non-variable-win selection table 202d of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example.
As shown in FIG. 859(b), the non-variable selection table 202
In d14, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 4, 00H is selected as the fluctuation type data corresponding to the winning short reach, and the fluctuation type counter CS1
When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 5 to 179, 01H is selected as the fluctuation type data corresponding to the winning long reach, and when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 180 to 199, 02H is selected as the fluctuation type data corresponding to the winning super reach.

FIG. 859(c) shows the selection table 20 for the probability of winning of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example.
As shown in FIG. 859(c), the non-variable selection table 2
In 02d15, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149, 01H is selected as the fluctuation type data corresponding to the winning long reach, and when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 150 to 169, 02H is selected as the fluctuation type data corresponding to the winning super reach, and when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 170 to 19
If the range is 11, the variable type data corresponding to the premium reach is 11.
H is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 860, the loss selection table 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is
j will be explained. FIG. 862 is a diagram showing the loss selection table 202j of this modified example. As shown in FIG. 862, in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, when the previous jackpot was a certain type jackpot, the type of variation pattern selected after the jackpot ends is different depending on the variation pattern in which the jackpot was notified. Specifically, when the previous jackpot type was jackpot A and the variation pattern type selected when notifying the jackpot was "short win reach", "long win reach", or "super win reach" (non-premium reach), the same table as the loss selection table 202j in the 19th embodiment is selected from the variation type selection table 202d.

On the other hand, if the previous jackpot type was jackpot A and the variation pattern type selected when reporting the jackpot was "premium hit reach", the table No. 12 is selected regardless of the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the jackpot ends. That is, the variation type data is selected from the special mode selection table 202d13. As described above, the special mode selection table 202d13 specifies variation type data corresponding to a variation pattern type with an extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), so that the winning is executed immediately without being withheld, and the game can proceed speedily. Therefore, the perceived time until the next jackpot can be shortened, so that the player can feel that the jackpots have continued at a very short interval in the high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, for the probability variable jackpots B to H, as with the probability variable jackpot A, the type of variation pattern selected when announcing a jackpot is "short reach hit", "long reach hit",
In the case of a "Win Super Reach" (non-premium reach), the same table as the miss selection table 202j in the 19th embodiment is selected from the variation type selection table 202d. If the variation pattern type selected when notifying the jackpot is the "Win Premium Reach", the No.
In addition, although not shown in the figure, when the previous big win was a time-saving big win A to C or a latent probability-changing big win A to C, the table 202j in the 19th embodiment is selected regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern when notifying the big win.
The same table is selected from the variation type selection table 202d.

In this modified example, the table selected after the end of the big win notified by the premium hit reach is the special mode selection table 202d13 regardless of the number of times the special pattern is drawn, and a very short change time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, a change pattern type with a relatively long change time (for example, 20 seconds) may be selected. Furthermore, as a display effect to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a display effect specific to the end of the big win notified by the premium hit reach (special mode) may be executed. By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy playing the game by watching the special effect displayed only in the special mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, examples of display effects in the variable pattern effects executed after the big win are as follows:
For example, the display may be configured to execute an effect in which a flowering plant bears fruit. That is, if fruit is borne, it indicates that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and if fruit is not borne, it indicates that the special symbol lottery was not successful. By configuring in this way, a premium hit reach is executed, and after the jackpot ends, a transition is made to a high probability state of the special symbol, and a series of display effects with a storyline can be executed in the flow up to the jackpot being won in the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, in order to further increase the relevance of the effects, the display effects during the jackpot may also be effects related to plants. For example, when a jackpot is notified while a performance in which a plant blooms is performed by the premium hit reach, a performance in which fireworks are launched in the background to celebrate the flowering of the plant may be performed at the notified jackpot. By configuring in this way, the connection between the performance displayed on the third symbol display device in the premium hit reach and the variable pattern performance after the jackpot becomes easier to understand. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further increased.

In this modified example, if the jackpot type is the variable jackpot A to H, the variable pattern presentation can be selected in the form of the premium winning reach, but the variable premium winning reach may be selected only in some of the variable jackpots A to H (for example, the variable jackpot A). That is, in the variable type selection table 202d, for example, in the case of the variable jackpot B to H, the variable type data may be selected by referring to the non-variable jackpot selection table 202d14, and the variable type selection table 202d15 may be selected only in the case of the variable jackpot A. Also, a dedicated table for the variable jackpots B to H may be provided, and the form of the premium winning reach may not be selected, but the variable type data may be selected in a form different from that of the time-saving jackpots A to C and the latent variable jackpots A to C. In this way, if the variable premium winning reach is selected only in some of the variable jackpots A to H (for example, the jackpot A), the premium winning reach and the state (special mode) after the jackpot A ends may be rare. Therefore, when a premium winning reach or a special mode appears, the player can be given a great sense of satisfaction and accomplishment.

Next, referring to FIG. 861 and FIG. 862, MPU 201 of main control device 110 of this modified example
First, FIG. 861 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process (S208) of the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example. In the big win determination process of this modified example, the processes of S301 to S307, S310, and S321 are the same as those of S301 to S307, S310, and S321 of the big win determination process in the 19th embodiment (see FIG. 854).
The same processes as those in each of the processes in FIG. 1 are executed.

In addition, in the jackpot determination process of this modified example, when it is determined that there is no matching random number value between the random number value defined in the first win random number table 202a and the value of the first win random number counter C1 stored in the first win random number counter buffer (S307:
No), instead of the loss time setting process 3 (see FIG. 856) in the 19th embodiment, the loss time setting process 4 is executed (S331), and the process proceeds to S310. This loss time setting process 4 is a process for setting a variation pattern type for notifying that the lottery for the special symbol is a loss. The details of this loss time setting process 4 will be described with reference to the following FIG. 862.

FIG. 862 is a flowchart showing the loss setting process 4. In this loss setting process 4, in each process of S601, S604, S611 to S614, and S621,
The same processing as the loss setting processing 3 in the 19th embodiment (see FIG. 856) is executed. In the loss setting processing 4 of this modified example, in the processing of S621, when 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation counter 203g (S621), a table specified in a corresponding position of the loss selection table 202j is selected based on the value of the fluctuation counter 203g, the jackpot type of the previous jackpot, and the fluctuation pattern type when the previous jackpot was notified (S631). The fluctuation pattern type when the previous jackpot was notified is determined based on the information stored in the fluctuation type storage area 202h. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern type of the jackpot is selected, for example, a pattern selection offset value is stored as information that can identify the fluctuation pattern type. When the processing of S631 is completed, the processing is returned to S601.
transition to.

This setting process 4 at the time of failure allows the player to select the type of variation pattern by referring to the type of variation pattern at the time of the previous big win, in addition to the type of the previous big win and the number of times the special symbol was drawn, so that it is possible to execute even more diverse variation pattern presentations than the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th embodiment. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the loss setting process 4 (see FIG. 862) of this modified example is performed regardless of the state of the gaming machine.
The information stored in the winning type storage area 202f, the value of the variation number counter 202g,
A table for selecting the variation type data is selected based on information on the variation pattern type in the previous big win stored in the variation type storage area 202h, but it may be configured to select a table for selecting the variation type data based on information stored in the win type storage area 202f only in the high probability state of the special symbol or the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the value of the variation count counter 202g, and information on the variation pattern type in the previous big win stored in the variation type storage area 202h. In other words, when the special symbol is in a low probability state and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the lottery for the special symbol is a miss, the special symbol 1 miss selection table 202d2 or the special symbol 2 miss selection table 202d3 is selected.
d3 may be selected. As a result, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, a table for selecting the variable type data based only on the type of the ball entry hole into which the ball entered can be selected from the variable type selection table 202d, so that the judgment conditions can be reduced. In other words, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the 19th embodiment and its modified example,
When setting the variation pattern presentation, the table is selected based on the results of the special symbol lottery and the ball entry hole, as well as the type of the last big win and the number of special symbol lotteries performed since the big win ended. This allows a wide variety of variation pattern presentations to be performed, preventing the presentation from becoming monotonous. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the 19th embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the modified example thereof, the offset setting table 202e is used to determine the pattern selection offset value from the variation type data, as in the 17th and 18th embodiments. In this way, the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variation type data with the offset setting table 202e, so that the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced compared to a case where the offset setting table 202e is not provided and the variation type counter value is directly converted into the offset value in the control process. Therefore, the process of determining the mode of the variation pattern presentation, which is one of the most important processes in the game, can be completed without delay. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable because the process of determining the mode of the variation pattern presentation takes time and the variation pattern presentation is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display is delayed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th embodiment and its modified example, the rank-up effect is configured to continue until the special symbol is drawn 10 times at the longest, but is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to continue until the special symbol is drawn 4 times, or until the special symbol is drawn 20 times.
The drawing may be configured to continue until a special symbol is drawn.

In the nineteenth embodiment and its modified examples, five ranks, namely, rank D, rank C, rank B, rank A, and rank S, are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three ranks or ten ranks may be provided. Furthermore, the rank increase does not necessarily have to be one rank at a time, and a pattern of two ranks or three ranks at a time may be provided.

In the 19th embodiment and its modified example, when the maximum rank is reached, the state of transition to a high probability state of a special symbol is notified, but the contents of the notification are not limited to this. For example, the notification may be made to inform the player that a long period has been selected as the time period of a normal symbol to be awarded after a big win.

In the 19th embodiment and its modified example, the table selected from the variation type selection table 202d is configured not to change after the rank-up performance ends, but this is not limited to this. For example, if the lottery for the special symbol is performed 100 times or more after the big win ends, the selected table may be configured to be different.
When the variation pattern presentation is executed 500 times or more, a variation pattern presentation with a different aspect is selected, so that the presentation can be prevented from becoming monotonous. This can improve the player's interest in the game. Also, for example, the system may be configured to change the selected table when the special symbol drawing has been performed 500 times or more or 1000 times or more since the end of the jackpot. This allows the table to be changed when the special symbol drawing has been performed 500 times or more or 1000 times or more.
It is possible to provide a variation pattern presentation mode that cannot be seen unless the player fails to win 00 or more consecutive times. Therefore, even if the player keeps losing the lottery for the special symbol, the player can be motivated to continue playing by seeing the different variation pattern presentation modes.

In the 19th embodiment and its modified example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss,
The table for selecting the variation type data was selected from the variation type selection table 202d based on the previous big win type, but the conditions for selecting the table are not limited to this. For example, the table may be selected according to the time period in which the variation pattern performance is executed, the type of background image when it is executed, the number of remaining times in the time-saving state of the normal pattern, etc. This allows the variation pattern performance to be executed in a wide variety of ways, so that the performance can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the 19th embodiment and its modified example, when the player wins the guaranteed jackpot A to H, the variation pattern type is determined to be executed in the form of the premium winning reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any method that notifies the player of an advantageous state may be used. For example, the premium winning reach may be selected when the current lottery result is a jackpot and the winning of the jackpot is pending.
This allows the player to recognize that consecutive big wins will occur in an extremely short period of time by executing the variation pattern presentation in the form of a premium winning reach, thereby giving the player a great sense of satisfaction, and thus increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the modified example of the 19th embodiment, when the previous jackpot was a sure-variable jackpot A to H, the type of variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special pattern after the jackpot was a miss was different depending on the state of the variation pattern presentation that notified the jackpot, but this is not limited to this. For example, if the time-saving jackpot A is won by a winning short reach or a winning long reach, the rank-up is unlikely to occur during the rank-up period (
It may be configured to select the promotion period selection table 202d6 in which rank-up occurs with a high probability (70%) during the rank-up period when the time-saving jackpot A is won by a winning super reach, and to select the promotion period selection table 202d8 in which rank-up occurs with a high probability (70%) during the rank-up period when the time-saving jackpot A is won by a winning super reach. Furthermore, for example, it may be configured to select the promotion period selection table 202d8 in which rank-up occurs with a high probability (70%) during the rank-up period when the probability variable jackpot A is won by a winning short reach or a winning long reach, and to select the promotion period selection table 202d6 in which rank-up occurs with a low probability (30%) during the rank-up period when the probability variable jackpot A is won by a winning super reach.

By configuring in this way, when a jackpot is notified by a winning short reach, the more rank-up occurs, the higher the expectation that the promotion period selection table 202d8 is selected, so that the expectation that the previous jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot A (i.e., a transition to a high probability state of a special pattern) can be increased. Also, when a jackpot is notified by a winning super reach, the more the performance of failing to rank-up occurs, the higher the expectation that the promotion period selection table 202d6 is selected, so that the expectation that the previous jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot A (i.e., a transition to a high probability state of a special pattern) can be increased. That is, depending on the type of variation pattern when notifying the previous jackpot, it is possible to make the player hope that rank-up occurs frequently, or conversely, to make the player hope that rank-up does not occur, so that different playability can be realized even with the same rank-up performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Twentieth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 20th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 863 to Fig. 865. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment described above, a zero setting process (see Fig. 816) is executed to set the reset data "00H" to a plurality of addresses defined in the end-of-jackpot clear table 202i (see Fig. 792) in order as a process for resetting the settings during the jackpot game at the end of the jackpot. However, the zero setting process (see Fig. 816) alone has a problem of being inferior in terms of versatility.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth embodiment, a data table (a jackpot end setting table 20) is provided in which a setting destination address for setting data for ending at the end of a jackpot and setting value data to be set for the setting destination address are associated with each other.
2k) and setting the setting value data specified in association with the read setting address to the read setting address, and repeating this data setting process (S1422) until a predetermined condition is met ("00H" is read as the setting address data). This configuration allows the value of the setting value data to have a degree of freedom. That is, in the case of the configuration in which only the zero setting process (see FIG. 816) is performed as in the 17th embodiment, as described above, it is only possible to store (overwrite) common reset data ("00H") in the setting destination address (address to be reset) specified in the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 792). In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd embodiment, any setting value data is specified in the clear table 202i at the end of the jackpot in advance, so that a setting value other than "00H" can be set as data for the end of the jackpot. This allows for more versatile control processing to be realized.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 20th embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment in terms of configuration in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is partially changed, and the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed.
The various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the seventeenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the twentieth embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 863, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described. FIG. 863(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 863(a), the ROM 202 in the 22nd embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 17th embodiment described above (see FIG. 785(a)) only in that a jackpot end setting table 202k is added. The other configurations are the same as those in the 17th embodiment described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

The jackpot end setting table 202k is a table that specifies control data for initializing the setting values for the jackpot set in the various setting value storage area 203e and rewriting them to settings for the normal game state in the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 864). The details of this jackpot end setting table 202k will be described with reference to FIG. 863(b).

FIG. 863(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the big win end setting table 202k. As shown in FIG. 863(b), the big win end setting table 202k is stored in the ROM 202.
This is a data table stored in the range of addresses 1202H to 1204H of the ROM 202, with one byte of data stored in each address.
In each address of "2H" to "1204H", address data indicating the storage location of the data to be reset in the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 793), data to be set in the storage location of the data indicated by the address data (data to reset the setting value indicating that a jackpot is in progress), and data to end the process to initialize the game status setting area are stored in the order of the addresses. Details will be described later, but the jackpot end process 5 (
In the data setting process (see FIG. 865), which is one process in the process of FIG. 864, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 sets the jackpot end time setting table 202k (see FIG. 863(b)
The stored data is read from the ROM 202 in the order of addresses in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 865) and control is executed according to the stored data. Specifically, when address data is read, that address is set as the destination address for the data. When setting value data (data for resetting a setting value) is read, the contents of the address set as the destination address are reset (i.e., "00H" is set to the destination address). Furthermore, when it is determined that the read data is data for ending the process, the data setting process (see FIG. 865) is ended.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd embodiment, as a condition for terminating the data setting process (see FIG. 865), the number of times data is set in the various setting value storage area 203e is described in the control program, and the process is not terminated when it is determined that data setting has been completed the set number of times, but rather when it is determined that "00H" has been read out as data from the jackpot end setting table 202k.

If the number of set times is written in the control program, every time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as the program being repurposed for another model, the designer of the control program must recount the number of set values and rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, counting the set values is time-consuming, and if the designer makes a mistake in counting, an incorrect number of repetitions will be specified in the control program, so that the setting at the end of the jackpot cannot be completed correctly, which may cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot end time setting table 202
Since it is only necessary to specify "00H" as the data at the end of k, the possibility of the designer making a mistake when designing the control program can be reduced. Therefore, the data setting at the end of the jackpot can be more reliably executed based on the control program, and malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

<Control process of main control device in twentieth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 864 and FIG. 865, the main control device 1 in the twentieth embodiment will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the 20th embodiment will be described. First, referring to FIG. 864, the details of the jackpot end process 5 (S1321) in the 20th embodiment will be described. This jackpot end process 5 (S1321) is a process executed to set a setting value for determining the state after the jackpot end in the various setting value storage area 203e, as in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 815) in the 17th embodiment described above, and to reset the setting value that was set to control the jackpot.

In the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 864) in the 20th embodiment, S1401
In each process of S1401 to S1410 and S1412, the same process as each process of S1401 to S1410 and S1412 of the big win end process (see FIG. 815) in the 17th embodiment is executed. Also, in the big win end process 5 (see FIG. 864) in the 20th embodiment,
In the case of the jackpot end setting table 202k (see FIG. 863(b)), when the process of S1410 is completed, the top address of the jackpot end setting table 202k (see FIG. 863(b)) in the ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address (S1421), and a data setting process is executed to reset the data that was set for control during the jackpot (S1422), and the process returns to S14
Move on to 12.

Details of this data setting process (S1422) will be described with reference to FIG. 865. FIG. 865 is a flow chart showing this data setting process (S1422). In this data setting process (S1422), first, the address data specified in the transfer source (read source) address is read, and the address indicated by the address data is set as the setting destination address (S2001). Here, the transfer source (read source) address is set in the jackpot end setting table 202k in the process of S1421 of the jackpot end process 5 (see FIG. 864).
As shown in FIG. 863(b), the address data indicating the game status setting area in the various setting value storage area 203e is stored in the top address of the jackpot end setting table 202k, so the address indicating the game status setting area is set as the setting destination address.

Next, in the process of S2001, it is determined whether the data read from the jackpot end setting table 202k is "00H" (S2002), and if the result of the determination is "00H" (S2002: Yes), this process is terminated and the process proceeds to the zero setting process (see FIG. 816). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the data read from the jackpot end setting table 202k is data other than "00H" (S2002: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, and the address after the addition is set as the new transfer source (read source) address (S2003).

Next, the data of the setting value stored in the transfer source address is read out and stored in the setting destination address (S2004). This setting destination address is the address of the various setting value storage area 202e set in the processing of S2001. When the data storage is completed, 1 is added to the transfer source address again, and it is set as a new transfer source address (S2005), and the processing returns to S1401. Then, in the processing of S2002, the processing of S2001 to S2005 is repeated until 00H is read as the address data, and when 00H is read as the address data (S2002: Yes), this indicates that the reset processing based on the jackpot end setting table 202k has been completed, and the processing is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twentieth embodiment, the data setting process (FIG. 8) is a process for initializing the setting values for the jackpot at the end timing of the jackpot.
65) is executed before the zero setting process (see FIG. 816). In this data setting process (see FIG. 865), the process of setting the address data specified in the jackpot end setting table 202k to the setting destination address and the process of setting the setting value data specified in the jackpot end setting table 202k corresponding to the address data to the setting destination address are repeated until "00H" is read out as the address data. Not only the address data but also the setting value data is read out from the jackpot end setting table 202k.
By configuring the setting value data to be predefined in advance, the degree of freedom of the setting value data can be improved. That is, unlike the zero setting process (see FIG. 816), which can only set a common setting value ("00H"), any setting value can be set to any setting destination address as long as it is predefined in the big win end setting table 202k, so that a highly versatile control process can be realized.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as a condition for terminating the data setting process (see FIG. 865), the number of times to set data in the various setting value storage area 203e is described in the control program, and the process is not terminated when it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times has been completed. Instead, the address data of "0
If it is determined that "0H" has been read out, the process is terminated.

If the number of settings is written in the control program, every time the number of settings changes due to circumstances such as the program being repurposed for another model, the designer of the control program must recount the number of settings and rewrite the control program to match the counted number. Therefore, counting the settings is time-consuming, and if the designer makes a mistake in counting, an incorrect number of repetitions will be specified in the control program, so that the settings at the end of the jackpot cannot be completed correctly, which may cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot end time setting table 202
Since it is only necessary to specify "00H" as the data at the end of k, the possibility of the designer making a mistake when designing the control program can be reduced. Therefore, the data setting at the end of the jackpot can be more reliably executed based on the control program, and malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, data setting processing (see FIG. 865) and zero setting processing (
816), the big win end time setting table 202k (see FIG. 863(b))
Or, the data "00H" is set from the clear table 202i (see FIG. 792) at the end of the big win.
" is read out, each process is terminated, but the termination condition of each process is not limited to this. For example, each process may be terminated when "FFH" is read out as data from the jackpot end setting table 202k (see FIG. 863(b)) or the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 792).

In addition, the end conditions of the data setting process (see FIG. 865) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 816) may be different. For example, when "00H" is read as data from the jackpot end time setting table 202k (see FIG. 863(b)), the data setting process (see FIG. 865) is ended, and "F" is read as data from the jackpot end time clear table 202i (see FIG. 792).
The zero setting process (see FIG. 816) may be configured to end when "FH" is read.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, only in the big win end process 5 (see FIG. 864), a process is provided to continue the control defined in the ROM 202 until "00H" is read out, but this is not limited to this. For example, the same process may be performed when setting the start of the fluctuation or when setting the end of the fluctuation.

<Twenty-first embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 865 and FIG. 866, a pachinko machine 10 according to a 21st embodiment will be described.
In the above-mentioned 20th embodiment, two processes, a data setting process (see FIG. 865) and a zero setting process (see FIG. 816), are provided as processes for resetting the setting of the big win, and in each process, the setting value of a predetermined address in the various setting value storage area 203e is reset.

More specifically, the data setting process (see FIG. 865) performed in the big win end process 5 (see FIG. 804) sets the big win end setting table 2 defined in the ROM 202.
Based on the data setting process (see FIG. 865), the game status is reset based on the data setting process (see FIG. 863(b)). Furthermore, the data setting process (see FIG. 865) is followed by a zero setting process (see FIG. 866).
Based on the end-of-jackpot clear table 202i (see FIG. 792) defined in OM202, the setting value of the address in RAM203 where the setting during the jackpot is set is cleared.

In contrast to this, in the 21st embodiment, a jackpot end time setting/clear table 202m is provided which includes the information specified in the jackpot end time setting table 202k and the information specified in the jackpot end time clear table 202i, and the settings during the jackpot are reset by a data setting process (see FIG. 865) based on the information specified in the jackpot end time setting/clear table 202m, thereby simplifying the data structure of the ROM 202.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 21st embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 20th embodiment.
The difference in configuration from the 20th embodiment is that a jackpot end time setting/clearing table 202m is provided instead of the jackpot end time setting table 202k and the jackpot end time clearing table 202i provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th embodiment. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the 20th embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in the Twenty-first Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 866. Fig. 866(a) shows the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 21st embodiment.
866(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the embodiment 866.
The ROM 202 in this embodiment has a configuration of the ROM 202 in the twentieth embodiment described above (see FIG. 863(a)), in which a jackpot end time setting table 202k and a jackpot end time clear table 202i are replaced with a jackpot end time setting/clear table 202.
The difference is that the twentieth embodiment is provided with a number 02m. The other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot end setting/clear table 202m is a table that is referenced to reset the setting value of the address in the various setting value storage area 203e where the setting during the jackpot is set at the end timing of the jackpot, and is stored in the ROM 202 at address "1202
The range of the big win end time setting and clearing table 202m is defined as "121H" to "121EH". The details of the big win end time setting and clearing table 202m will be described with reference to FIG. 866(b).

FIG. 866(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of data defined in the jackpot end setting/clearing table 202m. As shown in FIG. 866(b), in the jackpot end setting/clearing table 202m, address data indicating the address (setting destination) in the various setting value storage area 203e where the setting value needs to be reset and the setting contents to be set in that address (setting destination) are alternately defined. As the address that needs to be reset, for example, the address (F030H) where the setting for the maximum number of rounds is stored is
) and the address of the winning count counter (F031H).

As described above, the jackpot end time setting/clear table 202m contains the data specified in the jackpot end time setting table 202k in the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th embodiment,
The data specified in the jackpot end clear table 202i is specified. Here, the jackpot end clear table 202i specifies only the information indicating the address of the setting destination, and the data "00H" to be stored in the setting destination address is not specified in the table, but the control program side is configured to describe the control process of setting "00H". In contrast, the jackpot end setting/clear table 202m specifies the setting values to be set in all setting destination addresses in the table. That is, all data has the same data configuration as the jackpot end setting table 202k in the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th embodiment, the setting of the various setting value storage area 203e is changed by referring to two types of tables with different data configurations (a jackpot end time setting table 202k in which both the address data of the setting destination and the data to be set in the setting destination are specified, and a jackpot end time clear table 202i in which only the address data of the setting destination is specified). Therefore, the data setting process (see FIG. 865) and the zero setting process (
In the past, two types of control processes were required to be implemented separately:
In the 21st embodiment, only one type of table, the jackpot end setting/clear table 202m, is provided, and the data arrangement is the same as that of the jackpot end setting table 202k. Therefore, if only one type of data setting process (see FIG. 865) is prepared as the control process, all settings related to the jackpot can be reset at the end of the jackpot.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the 21st embodiment>
Hereinafter, in the 21st embodiment, if only the data setting process (see FIG. 865) is provided, all settings related to the big win can be reset, which will be described with reference to FIG. 865 again. As described above, FIG. 865 is a flowchart showing the data setting process, which is a process for resetting the setting values related to the big win.

In the data setting process (see FIG. 865), first, the address data specified in the transfer source address is read, and the address indicated by the read address data is set as the setting destination address (S1401). Here, in the 20th embodiment, before the data setting process is started, the transfer source (read source) address is set in the jackpot end setting table 202k.
(S1421 in FIG. 864), but in the 21st embodiment, instead, the top address (1202H) of the jackpot end setting/clearing table 202m (see FIG. 866(b)) is set as the transfer source (read source) address. Therefore, in the process of S2001 performed after the start of the data setting process (see FIG. 865), the address (F035H) of the game status setting area specified in the top address of the jackpot end setting/clearing table 202m (see FIG. 866(b)) is set as the setting destination address.

Next, it is determined whether the data read as the setting destination address is "00H" (S2002), and if it is determined that it is "00H" (S2002: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the data read is not "00H" (S2002),
: No), add 1 to the source (read source) address and set it as a new source (read source) address (S2003).

In the process of S2002, which is performed first after the start of the data setting process (see FIG. 865), the address (F035H) of the game status setting area is read as the setting destination address, so it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S2002: No), and the top address (2002H) of the jackpot end time setting/clearing table 202m (see FIG. 866(b)) is read.
The address (2003H) obtained by adding 1 to the address is set as the source address (S2003).
.

Thereafter, the setting value data stored in the transfer source address is set in the setting destination address (S20
04), add 1 to the source address and set it as a new source address (S2005),
Return to the process of S2001. In the process of S2004, which is performed first after the start of the data setting process (see FIG. 865), the address "1203H" is set as the transfer source address, so the reset data stored in the transfer source address is read out and set in the address (F035H) of the game status setting area (S2004).
Add 1 to "203H" and set the source address to "1204H" (S2005).
Then, return to the processing of S2001.

Thereafter, the setting destination address specified in the big win end setting/clearing table 202m (see FIG. 866(b)) is set to the setting destination address specified in the big win end setting/clearing table 202m (see FIG. 866(c)).
The process of writing the setting contents stipulated in the setting/clearing table 202m at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 866(b)) is repeated. Note that the setting destination addresses stipulated in the setting/clearing table 202m at the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 866(b)) are addresses other than "00H", such as "F01DH" and "F01EH", which are the setting addresses for the test signal, and "F030H", which is the address for setting the maximum number of rounds. This prevents the data setting process (see FIG. 865) from being terminated because it is determined that "00H" has been read out by the process of S2002 before all the setting destinations have been reset. Then, when all the data has been set,
The destination (read source) address is the jackpot end time setting/clearing table 202m (FIG. 8
66(b)), and the data setting process (see FIG. 865) is terminated by the process of S2002.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as a condition for terminating the data setting process (see FIG. 865), the number of times to set data in the various setting value storage area 203e is described in the control program, and the process is not terminated when it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times has been completed.
The process is terminated when it is determined that the data has been read out.

If the number of settings is written in the control program, every time the number of settings changes due to circumstances such as the program being repurposed for another model, the designer of the control program must recount the number of settings and rewrite the control program to match the counted number. Therefore, counting the settings is time-consuming, and if the designer makes a mistake in counting, an incorrect number of repetitions will be specified in the control program, so that the settings at the end of the jackpot cannot be completed correctly, which may cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since it is only necessary to specify "00H" as data at the end of the jackpot end setting/clear table 202m, the possibility of the designer making a mistake when designing the control program can be reduced. Therefore, the setting of data at the end of the jackpot can be more reliably executed based on the control program, and malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the setting and clearing table 202 at the end of the big win
m, and the settings for the big win are reset by referring to the single table. Therefore, if only one type of data setting process (see FIG. 865) is prepared as the control process, all settings related to the big win can be reset when the big win ends, so that the program capacity can be reduced compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the twentieth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, in the data setting process (see FIG. 865), data "00" is set from the big win end time setting/clear table 202m (see FIG. 866(b)).
Each process is terminated when "FFH" is read out, but the termination condition of the data setting process (see FIG. 865) is not limited to this. For example, the process may be terminated when "FFH" is read out as data from the jackpot end time setting/clearing table 202m (see FIG. 866(b)).

<Twenty-second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 867 to 869. In the above-mentioned 20th embodiment, in the zero setting process (see Fig. 816) for initializing the setting values for controlling the jackpot, the clear table 20 at the end of the jackpot is reset.
All of the setting destination addresses defined in the clear table 202i (see FIG. 792) are set to "00H". Therefore, if there is a setting value whose initial value is other than "00H", it cannot be defined in the clear table 202i (see FIG. 792) at the end of the big win, and it is necessary to set the initial value separately by providing a separate process.

In contrast, in the 22nd embodiment, multiple setting values with different initial values can be initialized in one process when the big win ends. Specifically, among the setting values that were initialized based on the big win end clear table 202i (see FIG. 792) in the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th embodiment, the initial value of the setting value related to the test signal is configured to be "FFH". On the other hand, the initial values of the setting value of the maximum number of rounds and the winning count counter, etc. are configured to be "00H" like the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th embodiment.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the 20th embodiment.
The difference in configuration from the 20th embodiment is that a jackpot end initial value setting table 202n is provided instead of the jackpot end clear table 202i provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th embodiment, and some of the control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been changed.
The various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 and the various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth embodiment.
Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twentieth embodiment will be given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the Electrical Configuration in the Twenty-Second Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 867. Fig. 867(a) shows the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd embodiment.
22 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the twenty-second embodiment.
The only difference between the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 20th embodiment described above (see FIG. 863(a)) and the 20th embodiment is that a jackpot end initial value setting table 202n is provided instead of the jackpot end clear table 202i. The rest of the configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 in the 20th embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the big win end initial value setting table 202n will be described with reference to FIG. 867(b). The big win end initial value setting table 202n is stored in the ROM 202 at address "
The table is stored in the range of "1201H" to "1212H", and each address is specified in the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 789).
The data "00H" is stored in "7H" and "1213H".
The "00H" data is not data for specifying an address, but data used to end the repeated process for setting an initial value.

Details will be described later, but in the zero setting process 6 (see FIG. 869), which is one process in the jackpot end process, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 reads out the stored data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202n in the order of the addresses of the ROM 202,
The address indicated by the read stored data (address data) is set to "00H"
Alternatively, either "FFH" (initial value data) is set.

Whether to set "00H" or "FFH" as the initial value is determined by the order of the data. Specifically, "FFH" is set as the initial value in the address of the various setting value storage area 203e indicated by the data stored in the address before the address "1207H" where "00H" is specified as the data.
The address of the various setting value storage area 203e indicated by the data stored in the address subsequent to the address "1207H" where "00" is specified as data is set as the initial value.
Set "H".

<Regarding control process of main control device in the 22nd embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 868 and 869.
The jackpot end process 6 (S1331) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 22nd embodiment will be described. FIG. 868 shows the jackpot end process 6 (S1
This jackpot end process 6 (S1331) is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process 6 (S1331) which is executed to set the setting value for determining the state after the jackpot end in the various setting value storage area 203e, as well as to reset the setting value that was set for controlling the jackpot, in the same manner as the jackpot end process 5 (see 64) in the twentieth embodiment described above.

Of the jackpot end process 6 (see FIG. 868), S1401 to S1410 and S142
In each process of S1401 to S1410, S1421, and S1422, the same processes as the processes of S1401 to S1410, S1421, and S1422 in the big win end process 5 in the 20th embodiment (see FIG. 864) are executed. In the big win end process 6 in the 22nd embodiment (see FIG. 868), when the process of S1422 is completed, the zero setting process 6 is executed (S1412) in the 20th embodiment (and the 17th embodiment) instead of the zero setting process (S1412).
31), and then this process is terminated. This zero setting process 6 (S1431) is the same as the zero setting process ( FIG. 8
16), various setting value storage area 203e is provided for controlling the big win.
This is a process for resetting the setting value set in the previous step to the initial value.

Here, the zero setting process 6 (S1431) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 869. Fig. 869 is a flowchart showing this zero setting process 6 (S1341). In this zero setting process 6 (S1431), each of steps S1501 to S1503 corresponds to step S15 of the zero setting process (see Fig. 816) in the 20th embodiment (and the 17th embodiment).
The same processes as those in steps S1501 to S1503 are executed.

In the zero setting process 6 (see FIG. 869) in the 22nd embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1502 that the address data read from the transfer source (read source) address is not "00H" (S1503: No), then "FFH" is set as the initial value in the address of the various setting value storage area 203e specified as the setting destination address in the process of S1502 (S1511), and the process returns to S1501. On the other hand, if it is determined that the address data read in the process of S1502 is "00H" (S1503: Yes), the process returns to S1501.
In other words, the process proceeds to the process of 12.
7(b)), steps S1501 to S150
3 and the processing of S1511 are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the initial setting value of the test signal is "FF
On the other hand, the initial values of the settings other than the test signal setting value (such as the setting value of the maximum number of rounds and the value of the winning counter) are "00H". In order to set these different initial values together, the address for setting the test signal is stored in the big win end initial value setting table 20.
The addresses are specified in order from the top address of the jackpot end initial value setting table 202n (see FIG. 867(b)). Then, the jackpot end initial value setting table 202n (see FIG. 867(b)) is read out as data "00H" from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202n (see FIG. 867(b)).
The process loops to set "FFH" as the initial value to the data setting position (address) read from, and when "00H" is read, the loop ends and the process proceeds to S1512.

Next, in the process of S1512, 1 is added to the address of the big win end initial value setting table 202n (see FIG. 867(b)) set as the transfer source (read source) (S
1512), the address data of the RAM 203 stored in the address after the addition is read out and set as a setting destination address for setting an initial value (S1513).

Then, it is determined whether the address data read in the process of S1513 is "00H" (S1514), and if it is determined that the read data is "00H", this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1514),
: No), the address set as the setting destination is set to "00H" (S1515), and the process returns to S1512.
Unless "00H" is read out as data from the initial value setting table 202n (see FIG. 867(b)), "00H" is set as the initial value in the addresses specified in the initial value setting table 202n (see FIG. 867(b)) in sequence.
When "00H" is read out as data from 2n (see FIG. 867(b)), this means that the initial values have been set in all setting destinations, and the process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as a setting item to be initialized at the end of a jackpot, in addition to the setting value whose initial value is "00H", the setting value whose initial value is "FFH" can also be initialized in one process. This increases the degree of freedom in setting the initial value of each setting value.

In this embodiment, the initial value of the setting item is set to "00H" and the initial value of the setting item is set to "FFH", but the initial value of each setting item is not limited to these values. For example,
Alternatively, a set value may be set with "01H" as the initial value, or a set value may be set with "01H" as the initial value.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second embodiment, in the zero setting process 6 (see FIG. 869 ),
The data from the big win end initial value setting table 202n (see FIG. 812(b)) is
When "00H" is read out, the initial value setting table 202n at the end of the big win (FIG. 867)
The setting destination addresses specified in (b) are sequentially set to "FFH" as the initial value, but the condition for exiting the loop is not limited to this. Data that can be used as a condition for exiting the loop can be any data that corresponds to the lower byte of an address that is unlikely to be changed when the game state is changed. For example, in the various setting value storage area 203e, addresses "F09CH" to "
As described above, "F0FFH" is an unused working area. Therefore, since the set value is not rewritten due to a change in the game state, the lower byte of any of these addresses (for example, "AAH" or "BBH") may be used as the end condition.

Similarly, the data "00H" is used as the condition for terminating the data setting process (see FIG. 865) in the twentieth and twenty-first embodiments, the zero setting process (see FIG. 816) in the twentieth embodiment, and the zero setting process 6 (see FIG. 869) in the twenty-second embodiment.
is read out, but may be configured to end the process when, for example, "AAH" or "BBH" is read out.

Furthermore, the initial values set in the zero setting process 6 (see FIG. 869) in the twenty-second embodiment are not limited to two types, and any number of initial values may be provided.

In addition, the data setting process in the 20th and 21st embodiments (see FIG. 865), the zero setting process in the 20th embodiment (see FIG. 816), and the zero setting process 6 in the 22nd embodiment (see FIG. 869) are all executed to initialize the settings of the big win when the big win ends, but are not limited to this. For example, when the number of time-saving times for the normal pattern becomes 0 and the normal state of the normal pattern is entered, any of these processes may be used to erase the setting of the time-saving state of the normal pattern.

In addition, the zero setting process (see FIG. 816) in the twentieth embodiment, the data setting process (see FIG. 865) in the twenty-first embodiment, and the zero setting process (see FIG. 816) in the twenty-second embodiment
In the embodiment, the zero setting process 6 (see FIG. 869) is configured to alternately read out one piece of data and set one piece of data. Alternatively, a plurality of pieces of data may be read out collectively, and the collectively read out data may be set collectively.

For example, in the zero setting process of the twentieth embodiment (see FIG. 816), the address data stored in the source address is read out and set in the destination address (S15 in FIG. 816).
02), if the read address data is other than "00H" (see S
Alternatively, the process may be configured to return to S1501 without proceeding to S1504 (S1503: No).

Specifically, each time a new source address is set by the process of S1501, the address data stored in that source address is stored in different general-purpose registers (general-purpose register 210b1 to 210d2) to set it as the destination address. For example, the data stored in the address set as the source address by the process of S1501 is first stored in the general-purpose register 210b1, and the data stored in the address newly set as the source address by the process of S1501 is then stored in the general-purpose register 210b2, for example. Thereafter, when the source address is S1
Each time the general-purpose register 210c1 or the general-purpose register 210c2 is updated by the process of 501,
10c2, etc.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S1503 that the read address data is "00H", the data "0
0H" before terminating the process.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twenty-second embodiment, general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, and 210d are used as general-purpose registers for temporarily storing data.
Since six types of address are provided, 0d1, 210d2, only a maximum of six types of destination addresses can be set, but the number of general-purpose registers may be increased to allow a greater number of destination addresses to be set.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machines 10 of the first to twenty-second embodiments, the various setting value storage area 203e is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113.

<Twenty-third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 870 to Fig. 874. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 20th embodiment described above, data indicating a setting destination address for setting data and setting value data to be set for the setting destination address are associated and specified for a specified data table (jackpot end setting table 202k), and when a specified setting is performed, the process of reading the setting destination address from the data table and the process of setting the setting value data associated with the read setting destination address to the read setting destination address are repeated until all setting value data specified in the data table has been set (data indicating the setting destination address is set to "00
By repeating the process (until ".H" is read out), it is possible to reduce the occurrence of programming errors and to realize a versatile setting process.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th embodiment, the data table is configured to specify setting value data in correspondence with each setting destination address, so it is necessary to specify address data and setting value data for each setting destination address, which creates the problem that the amount of data in the data table can easily become relatively large.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present 23rd embodiment, the basic technical idea of associating and defining a destination address with the setting value data to be set for that destination address in a specified data table is the same as in the 20th embodiment, but further, specific address data (upper address) used in common for multiple destination data is stored in advance (in a specified register) separately from the data table, and only some bits (lower address) of the destination address data are defined in the data table, and when the destination data is read out, the specific data, the data defined in the data table, and
are combined to specify one setting destination data, and the corresponding setting value data is set. This makes it possible to minimize the data to be specified in the data table, thereby reducing the amount of data in the ROM 202.

In addition, in the twenty-third embodiment, a predetermined range of bits (
The data table is configured to specify only the data (part of the data) of the lower 4 bits,
The upper bit data is configured to be set during the control process for setting the set value data. More specifically, only the lower 4 bits of multiple set value data whose upper 4 bits are 0000B are specified in the data table, and when the lower bits of the set value data are read and set, they are combined with 0 data in a specified register that has been cleared to 0 in advance (set to the upper bits) to generate 8-bit set value data (temporarily stored in a specified register), and then set to the corresponding setting destination address. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the amount of data specified in the data table, and RO is therefore advantageous.
The amount of data in M202 can be reduced.

The pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth embodiment in terms of configuration in that the ROM 202 and the register 210 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed.
The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the twentieth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twentieth embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the 23rd embodiment>
First, the configuration of the register 210 in the present twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 870. Fig. 870 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the register 210 in the present twenty-third embodiment. As shown in Fig. 870, the register 210 in the present twenty-third embodiment has the same configuration as the register 210 in the above-mentioned twentieth embodiment (and the seventeenth embodiment) (Fig. 794).
2. The difference with respect to the conventional example (see reference 210) is that a destination address register 210g is added.

The destination address register 210g is a register for constantly storing data (e.g., the upper 8 bits of the destination address) that is commonly used for a plurality of destination addresses when performing a predetermined setting process.
The setting destination address register 210g is a storage area in which the upper address "F0H" of the various setting value storage area 203e of 03 is set to the initial value. The value of this setting destination address register 210g is basically not changed and is maintained at the initial value. When a control process is executed to set some setting value data in the various setting value storage area 203e, the setting destination address register 210g
The data ("F0H") stored (memorized) in the data table is combined with the lower 8 bits (1 byte) of the destination address defined in a specific data table to specify the destination address, and a control process is performed to set the setting value data defined in the data table to the specified destination address. In other words, instead of specifying the entire destination address as the destination address data defined in the data table that is referenced when setting a specific setting value in various setting value storage areas, it is sufficient to specify only the lower 8 bits, so that the amount of data corresponding to the upper bytes of the destination address data defined in the data table can be reduced. Thus, the data capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

Next, the ROM 202 in the twenty-third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The only difference is that the contents of the various data tables have been partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 863). In other words, the types of the various data tables themselves defined in the ROM 202 are the same as those in the 20th embodiment, and only the contents of the various data tables have been changed. Here, the details of the contents of the data tables in the 23rd embodiment will be described using the game result setting table 202g as an example.

FIG. 871 is a diagram showing the contents of the game result setting table 202g in the 23rd embodiment. This game result setting table 202g is a data table that specifies various setting values to be set in the various setting value storage area 203e when a jackpot is won for each jackpot type, similar to the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 790) in the 20th embodiment (and the 17th embodiment). That is, the number of judgment values (random number values) that are each jackpot type (judgment value number), the lighting pattern (display pattern number) of the multiple LEDs 37a, information indicating the stopping pattern of the special pattern (stop pattern information), the operation pattern (large opening pattern) of the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a, and information (offset value) for determining the game state after the jackpot is ended are specified. The correspondence between the jackpot type and each setting value has not been changed from the game result setting table 202g in the twentieth embodiment (and the seventeenth embodiment), but some changes have been made to the data arrangement and data structure.

As shown in FIG. 871, in the game result setting table 202g in the 23rd embodiment, the setting destination address for setting each setting value is defined in association with each combination of the first setting value (setting value A) and the second setting value (setting value B). More specifically, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 1, four setting values A and four setting values B are defined for each big win type, and a setting destination address is defined in correspondence with each setting value.
That is, as shown in FIG. 871, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the set value A is "10
For the combination of "01B" and setting value B "0011B", the setting destination address is "F
The set values A021H and F022H are specified in correspondence with each other.
For the combination of "1010B" and the setting value B "1000B", "F097H" and "F030H" are respectively associated as setting destination addresses.
For the combination of the set value A "0000B" and the set value B "0000B", "F028H" and "F095H" are specified as corresponding destination addresses. In addition, "00H" is data for forcibly terminating the control process for the set value A "0000B".
are specified in correspondence with each other.

As a result, when the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot A, 8-bit setting value data generated from the 4-bit data "1001B" and "0011B" are stored at addresses "F021H" and "F022H" of RAM 203, respectively.
In addition, the 8-bit setting value data generated from the setting value A "1010B" and the setting value B "
The 8-bit set value data generated from "0000" is stored in the addresses "F097H" and "F030H" of the RAM 203.
The 8-bit set value data generated from the set value B "0000B" and the 8-bit set value data generated from the set value B "0000B" are stored in the addresses "F028H" and "
It is stored in "F095H".

The same applies to the jackpots B to D. As shown in FIG. 871, when the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot B, the 8-bit setting value data generated from the setting value A "1000B" and the 8-bit setting value data generated from the setting value B "0100B" are
The 8-bit setting value data generated from the setting value A "1011B" and the setting value B "10
The 8-bit setting value data generated from "00B" is stored in the RAM 203 at address "
The 8-bit setting value data generated from the setting value A "0001B" and the 8-bit setting value data generated from the setting value B "0001B" are stored at addresses "F028H" and "F095H" of the RAM 203, respectively.
is stored relative to

Also, as shown in FIG. 871, when the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot C, the 8-bit setting value data generated from the setting value A “0010B” and the setting value B “0100B
The 8-bit setting value data generated from the address "F02" in the RAM 203 is
The 8-bit setting value data generated from setting value A "1100B" and the 8-bit setting value data generated from setting value B "1000B" are stored at addresses "F097H" and "F030H" in RAM 203, respectively, and the 8-bit setting value data generated from setting value A "0000B" and the 8-bit setting value data generated from setting value B "0010B" are stored at addresses "F028H" and "F095H" in RAM 203, respectively.

Also, as shown in FIG. 871, when the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot D, the 8-bit setting value data generated from the setting value A “0001B” and the setting value B “0100B
The 8-bit setting value data generated from the address "F02" in the RAM 203 is
The 8-bit setting value data generated from setting value A "1101B" and the 8-bit setting value data generated from setting value B "1000B" are stored at addresses "F097H" and "F030H" in RAM 203, respectively, and the 8-bit setting value data generated from setting value A "0001B" and the 8-bit setting value data generated from setting value B "0010B" are stored at addresses "F028H" and "F095H" in RAM 203, respectively.

Although each address of the RAM 203 can store 1 byte (8 bits) of data, as shown in FIG. 871, only 4 bits of data are specified for each of the setting values A and B in the game result setting table 202g. This is because, in the 23rd embodiment, the upper 4 bits of the setting value data that are actually set for each setting destination address are stored.
Since all bits are "0000B", the four bits of data "0000B" are omitted in the data table. In the twenty-third embodiment, when data corresponding to the lower four bits of the setting value data (setting value A or setting value B) is read from the data table in the control process, the data read (data corresponding to the lower four bits of the setting value data) is overwritten (lower-ordered) starting from the lower bits in a specified register (e.g., general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2) that has been cleared to 0 in advance, so that 8 bits (1 byte) of setting value data is stored in the specified register. In other words, by overwriting only the lower four bits of the specified register in which "00H" is set (stored) with the four bits of data corresponding to the lower four bits of the setting value data, the upper four bits are overwritten.
Since only the lower 4 bits can be rewritten while maintaining the bits in the "0000B" state, the actual setting value data itself is stored in the specified register (
The set value data stored in a specified register is then transferred to the setting destination address, whereby the set value data can be set in its complete form (as 8-bit data). This configuration makes it possible to reduce the storage area required to define the upper 4 bits ("0000B"), compared to a method in which the direct value (8-bit data) of the set value data is defined in various data tables such as the game result setting table 202g. In other words, the amount of data can be reduced by 4 bits x the number of set value data, thereby reducing the storage capacity of the ROM 202.

Here, in FIG. 871, for the sake of clarity, the upper byte (F0) of each destination address is also shown, but in the actual data table, only the lower byte of each destination address is specified. That is, as described above, the upper byte of each destination address, "F0H", is stored in the destination address register 210g, and when the destination address is specified as the transfer destination of the setting value data, the lower byte of the destination address specified in the data table and the upper byte of the destination address stored in the destination address register 210g are combined to make it possible to specify the destination address. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data specified in various data tables such as the game result setting table 202g. That is, compared to the method of specifying the direct value (2-byte data) of the destination address in various data tables such as the game result setting table 202g,
The storage area required to define the upper byte ("F0H") can be reduced. In other words, the amount of data can be reduced by 1 byte x the number of destination address data.
The storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the game result setting table 202g in the program will be described with reference to FIG. 872. FIG. 872 is a simplified diagram showing an example of the contents of the game result setting table 202g of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment. The left side of FIG. 872 is the ROM.
872, first, a label "PR_TBL" is defined as the table name indicating the game result setting table 202g. By defining the label name, the top address of the game result setting table 202g can be read in other processes simply by describing it as "PR_TBL". In other words, it is not necessary to input the address value of the game result setting table 202g itself in other processes. In particular, if the model is changed, the control process and the number of data stored in the ROM 202 may change, so that when the program used in this pachinko machine 10 is diverted to another gaming machine, the address value assigned to the game result setting table 202g may also change. In such a case, the game result setting table 202g may be read by specifying the top address of the game result setting table 202g in the ROM 202.
If the top address of table 202g is associated with the label "PR_TBL", when the program is diverted to another model, it is not necessary to re-enter the address for each process that reads out the game result setting table 202g. This makes it possible to prevent errors in entering the program when diverting the program, and therefore to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to errors in the program.

The next line after the line that specifies the label specifies the data to be referenced when the big win A is determined, among the data to be specified in the game result setting table 202g. That is, as shown in FIG. 872, for the range of addresses 1B28H to 1B32H in the ROM 202, data of "DB 10010011B, 21H, 22H" (3-byte data), data of "DB 1010100B, 97H, 30H" (3-byte data), data of "
The data "DB 00000000B, 28H, 95H" (3-byte data) and the data "DB 00000000B, 00H" (2-byte data) are specified. Of these description contents, the 8-bit data in binary notation has the upper 4 bits corresponding to the setting value A and the lower 4 bits corresponding to the setting value B. In addition, the two types of 1-byte data in hexadecimal notation are data indicating the lower byte of the setting destination address for setting the 8-bit setting value data generated from the setting value A and the 8-bit setting value data generated from the setting value B, respectively.

The details will be described later, but in the twenty-third embodiment, first, the game result setting table 20
2g (the upper 4 bits are data constituting the set value A, and the lower 4 bits are data constituting the set value B), and the set value A and the set value B are overwritten in the pair register (for example, the general-purpose registers 201b1, 210b2) that has been cleared to 0 in advance, with the lowermost bits being the set value data, so that the 8-bit set value data corresponding to the set value A and the 8-bit set value data corresponding to the set value B are stored in each of the pair registers. Then, the data indicating the lower byte of the set destination address and the data indicating the upper byte of the set destination address stored in the set destination address register 210g are combined to specify the set destination address for setting each data, and a control process is performed to transfer (set) the set value data stored in the pair register to the specified set destination address. This control process transfers (sets) all the set value data corresponding to the jackpot type to the set destination address.
This continues until all data has been set. In other words, the data indicating the lower byte of the destination address is set to "0
This continues until "0H" (end data) is read out, and the setting process ends when "00H" is read out. This makes it less likely that errors in the program will occur compared to a method in which the number of setting values to be set for each type of big win is specified in the program, and therefore makes it possible to suppress malfunctions of the pachinko machine 10 caused by errors in the program.

The setting value A and the setting value B, which are 4-bit data, are described together as follows:
In other words, since each address of the ROM 202 is configured as a 1-byte storage area, by storing (memorizing) a single 8-bit data combining the 4-bit setting value A and the setting value B in one address,
Each address of the ROM 202 can be used without waste. Conversely, if the setting value A and the setting value B were stored in separate addresses, two bytes of storage space would be wasted, and there would be no point in configuring the setting value A and the setting value B as 4-bit data. In this way, by storing the setting value A and the setting value B together as one 8-bit data in one address, the data capacity of various data tables such as the game result setting table 202g can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing of the main control device in the 23rd embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 873 and FIG. 874, the main control device 1 in the 23rd embodiment will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of 10 will be described. First, referring to FIG. 873, the details of the jackpot setting process 7 (S341) in the 23rd embodiment will be described. This jackpot setting process 7 (S341) is a process executed in place of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 805) in the 20th embodiment (and the 17th embodiment) described above, and is a process for setting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot and the control during the jackpot, similar to the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 805).

In the jackpot setting process 7 (see FIG. 873) in the 23rd embodiment, S401
, S402, and S404 to S408 are the same as S401, S402, and S404 to S408 in the big win setting process (see FIG. 805) in the 20th embodiment (and the 17th embodiment), respectively.
873, in the big win setting process 7 (see FIG. 873) in the twenty-third embodiment, S402 is executed.
When the above is completed, the game result setting table 202g (FIG. 871) is then set as the transfer source address.
1B28H, which is the top address of the
The top address 1B28H of the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 871) is
Since the label "PR_TBL" is specified in correspondence with the label, in the process of S421,
The top address can be read using the label "PR_TBL."

When the process of S421 is completed, the offset address according to the current big win type is added to the transfer source address set in the process of S421, and the transfer source address is moved to the head position of the address range in which the data corresponding to the current big win type is written (S422).
210b2 is cleared to 0 (S423). This pair register is a storage area for temporarily storing the setting value data generated from the setting value A and the setting value data generated from the setting value B. The pair register is cleared to 0 in the process of S423, and the 4-bit setting value A or setting value B is stored (overwritten) lower-justified in the winning data setting process (see FIG. 874) described later, so that the upper 4 bits of the pair register are 0000.
The setting value data of B can be stored.

When the process of S423 is completed, a winning data setting process is executed (S424) for setting various setting value data corresponding to the winning type in the various setting value storage area 203e, and the process proceeds to S404. The details of this winning data setting process (S424) will be described with reference to FIG. 874. FIG. 874 is a flow chart showing the winning data setting process (S424).

As shown in FIG. 874, in the winning data setting process (S424), first, the upper 4 bits of the source address are stored in the first of the pair of registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2).
The data is stored in the register (general register 210b1) with the least significant bits aligned (S2011
Here, as described above, S421 and S422 of the big win setting process 7 (see FIG. 873)
By each of the processes in (a) and (b) above, the transfer source address is set to the top position of the address range in which the data corresponding to the jackpot type is described. In other words, the address in which the data of the first set value A and set value B corresponding to the jackpot type is stored is set to the transfer source address. Therefore, when the process of S2011 is executed, the data (upper 4 bits) corresponding to set value A is extracted from the address in which set value A and set value B are stored, and the extracted data is overwritten on the lower 4 bits of general-purpose register 210b1.
The 8-bit setting value data corresponding to the above is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1.

After the process of S2011 is completed, the lower 4 bits of the transfer source address are stored in the second register (general register 210b2) of the pair of registers, with the lower bits aligned (S2012). In other words, data (lower 4 bits) corresponding to the set value B is extracted from the address where the set values A and B are stored, and the extracted data is written to the general register 210b2.
By overwriting the lower 4 bits of general-purpose register 210b2 with this 8-bit setting value data corresponding to setting value B, the 8-bit setting value data is stored in general-purpose register 210b2.

As mentioned above, the pair of general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2 are cleared to 0 (set to "00H") in advance in the process of S423 of the jackpot setting process 7 (see FIG. 873). Therefore, by storing 4 bits of data in the lower bins in the processes of S2011 and S2012 in the general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2, which are composed of an 8-bit storage area, it is possible to update only the lower 4 bits (overwrite with set value A or set value B) while keeping the upper 4 bits in the state of 0000B. This allows the upper 4 bits to be changed to 0000 simply by overwriting the 4 bits of data.
It is possible to obtain the same result as if the 8-bit setting value data B were overwritten. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data in the game result setting table 202g, as compared with the case where the 8-bit setting value data itself is specified for the game result setting table 202g.

When the process of S2012 is completed, the source address is then incremented by 1 to set it as a new source address (S2013), and it is determined whether the data stored in the new source address is "00H" (S2014). If it is determined in the process of S2014 that the data stored in the new source address is "00H" (S2014: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2014 that data other than "00H" is stored in the source address (S2014: Yes), this process is terminated.
014: No), the data "F0H" indicating the upper byte of the destination address stored in the destination address register 210g (destination address data) is combined with the data stored in the transfer source address (data indicating the lower byte of the destination address) and set as the destination address (S2015), and the first
The data stored in the register (general-purpose register 210b1) is transferred (stored) (S2
As described above, the 8-bit setting value data corresponding to the setting value A is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 by the process of S2011.
By the above process, 8-bit setting value data corresponding to the setting value A can be transferred (set) to the setting destination address.

In this way, the various setting value storage area 20
By storing in advance (as an initial value) "F0H," which is commonly used as the upper byte of each address constituting 3e (each address that can be specified as a setting destination address), it is sufficient to specify only the lower byte of the setting destination address for various data tables such as the game result setting table 202g, thereby reducing the amount of data in various data tables.

When the process of S2016 is completed, the source address is then incremented by 1 to set it as a new source address (S2017), and it is determined whether the data stored in the new source address is "00H" (S2018). If it is determined in the process of S2018 that the data stored in the new source address is "00H" (S2018: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2018 that data other than "00H" is stored in the source address (S2018: Yes), this process is terminated.
018: No), the data "F0H" indicating the upper byte of the destination address stored in the destination address register 210g (destination address data) is combined with the data stored in the transfer source address (data indicating the lower byte of the destination address) and set to the destination address (S2019), and the second
The data stored in the register (general purpose register 210b2) is transferred (stored) (S2
As described above, the 8-bit setting value data corresponding to the setting value B is stored in the general-purpose register 210b2 by the process of S2012.
By the above process, 8-bit setting value data corresponding to the setting value A can be transferred (set) to the setting destination address.

When the process of S2020 is completed, the source address is then set as a new source address by adding 1 to it (S2021), and the process proceeds to S2011. After that, in the process of S2014 or S2018, each process of S2011 to S2021 is repeatedly executed until "00H" is read as the data indicating the lower byte of the destination address, and in the process of S2014 or S2018, when "00H" is read as the data indicating the lower byte of the destination address, the process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot time setting process 7 (see FIG. 873).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment, a part of the address data indicating the destination address for each data table is associated with a part of the setting value data to be set for the destination address. More specifically, the upper byte of the 2-byte address data indicating the destination address is "F0H".
Only the data of the lower byte (bit range where the value differs for each address data) of multiple common address data is specified in the data table, and only the data of the lower 4 bits (bit range where the value differs for each set value data) of multiple common set value data with the upper 4 bits of "0000B" is specified in the data table. Then, the data for the destination address ("F0H"), which is common as the upper byte of the address data corresponding to each data specified in the data table, and the data for the set value ("0000B"), which is common as the upper bit of the set value data, are specified in the data table.
The data is stored in advance (in a specified register) separately from the data table. When setting corresponding setting value data for each setting destination address based on the data specified in the data table, each time a part (lower byte) of the address data indicating the setting destination address is read from the data table, the setting destination address data is specified (generated) in combination with the setting value data, and each time a part (lower 4 bits) of the data indicating the setting value data is read, the setting value data is specified (generated) in combination with the setting value data. This configuration makes it possible to reduce the amount of data specified in the data table, and therefore the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the setting destination address data "F0H" and the setting value data "
In the control process for setting the setting value data for the destination address, the setting destination address data is read and combined to generate 2-byte setting destination address data each time a portion of the address data indicating the destination address is read from the data table in the control process for setting the setting value data for the destination address, and the setting value data is read and combined to generate 8-bit setting value data each time a portion of the data indicating the setting value is read from the data table, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting destination address data "F0H" and the setting value data "0000B" may be stored in a specified storage area of the ROM 202. Even with this configuration, the setting destination address data "F0H" and the setting value data "0000B" may be stored in a specified storage area of the ROM 202, which is much easier than a method in which all bits of the setting destination address data and the setting value data are specified in various data tables.
The storage capacity of the register 202 can be reduced. Also, for example, the control program may be configured to describe the immediate values of the destination address data and the immediate values of the setting value data. By configuring in this way, the storage capacity of the register 210 can be reduced.

In the twenty-third embodiment, the initial value of the destination address register 210g is set to “F0H”, which is the destination address data. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
It is sufficient that the destination address data is stored in the destination address register 210g before executing the control process (e.g., the winning data setting process) that reads various data from the data table and generates the destination address data and the setting value data. For example, the destination address register 210g may be configured to be overwritten with "F0H" in the initial setting based on the power-on of the pachinko machine 10. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide flexibility to the initial value of the destination address register 210g. Also, for example, the destination address register 210g may be configured to be overwritten with "F0H" at the start of various control processes such as the winning data setting process (see FIG. 874). In this case, the destination address register 210g can be used for other purposes in the control process that does not include the control process that refers to the destination address register 210g, so that the register 210 can be used more efficiently.

In the twenty-third embodiment, only the lower four bits of the setting value data in which the upper four bits are set to a specific value ("0000B") are defined in the data table, and the specific value is stored (cleared to 0) in the general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2 in the control program, but the target bits to which the specific value is set are not limited to the upper four bits and can be set arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, only the upper four bits of each setting value data in which the lower four bits are a specific value in common may be defined in the data table, or only the 1st, 2nd, 7th, and 8th bits of each setting value data in which the 3rd to 6th four bits are a specific value in common may be defined in the data table.

In the twenty-third embodiment, 4-bit data is defined as data indicating a part of the set value data in the data table, but this is not limited to this, and for example, 2-bit or 6-bit data may be defined. Then, data in a bit range with a common value (for example, upper 6 bits or upper 2 bits) is stored in advance in the general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2.
10b2. By configuring the data stored in the data table to be not limited to 4 bits, the degree of freedom in design can be further improved.

In the twenty-third embodiment, specific data ("00H") is set in advance in the general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2, and when setting the set value data, only part of the data of the components of the set value data is read from the data table and stored in the general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2.
0b2 was overwritten, but the technical idea of this invention is
The present invention can be applied to other processes besides the process of setting the setting value data in the above.
It can be diverted to control processing in various control devices such as the dispensing control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114.

<Twenty-fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 875 to Fig. 882. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment described above, a part of the address data indicating the setting destination address (lower byte) and a part of the setting value data indicating the setting value (lower 4
The data table specifies the bit range (upper 1 byte) data ("F0H") that is a common data configuration for multiple setting destination addresses, and the bit range (upper 4 bits) data ("000
The data table is configured to store the set value, which is a fixed value, in a predetermined register, and when a control process is performed to set the set value to a destination address, the set value and destination address are identified by combining the data read from the data table with the data (fixed value) stored in the register, thereby reducing the amount of data in the data table.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 24th embodiment, data (table address data) that is commonly set as the upper byte of a predetermined range of addresses among the addresses where each data table is stored is set as the initial value of a predetermined register, and only the lower byte (lower address) of the address data indicating the top address of each data table is predefined in the program, and when a predetermined data table is read in the control process, the address data indicating the top address is specified by combining the data stored in the predetermined register and the data indicating the predefined lower byte. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data predefined as the top address of each data table in the program, thereby reducing the program capacity.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment, when various commands are set to the command output port for outputting commands from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, the command for the payout control device 111 and the command for the voice lamp control device 113 are set in different bit ranges. More specifically, among the command output ports capable of setting data of 16 bits (2 bytes), a command for the payout control device 111 is set in the lower byte, while a command for the voice lamp control device 113 is set in the upper byte, and it is configured to be possible to output commands for both control devices in parallel (simultaneously) in one command output process. In other words, if a command is set in both the upper byte and the lower byte, it is possible to output a command to both control devices, and if a command is set only in the upper byte or the lower byte, it is possible to output a command only to the corresponding control device. And, the command data is set in the lower bit packed for the command output port. By configuring in this way, when there is no command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 (not stored in the command buffer), the payout control device 111
When only the command to be sent exists (is stored in the command buffer), only the lower byte data needs to be transferred to the command output port, thereby reducing the processing load when setting the command.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment in terms of configuration in that the ROM 202 and the register 210 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed.
The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 23rd embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the twenty-fourth embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. The ROM 202 in the twenty-third embodiment has the following configuration compared to the ROM 202 in the twenty-third embodiment:
The only difference is that some of the specifications for the various data tables have been changed.
The types of various data tables defined in the ROM 202 are the same as those in the 23rd embodiment, and only the contents of the various data tables have been changed. Here, the details of the contents of the data tables defined in the 24th embodiment will be described using the variation pattern selection table 202f as an example.

Figure 875 is a diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f in this 24th embodiment. This fluctuation pattern selection table 202f is a data table used to select a fluctuation pattern type based on a pattern selection offset value, similar to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see Figure 789) of the above-mentioned 17th embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 875, the variation pattern selection table 202f in the 24th embodiment
In the ROM 202, the data are defined in the same address range (1AF5H to 1B08H) as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 789) in the seventeenth embodiment described above. Also, the variation pattern types corresponding to the data stored at each address are also defined in the seventeenth embodiment.
It is the same as the variation pattern selection table 202f in the embodiment. In other words, as shown in FIG. 875, as a variation pattern type that can be determined when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, data corresponding to data "00F6H" indicating a short reach with a variation time of 15 seconds is stored in the address "1AF5H" of the ROM 202.
Data corresponding to data "00F7H" indicating a winning long reach with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is stored in the address "1AF6H" of the ROM 202.
For "1AF7H", the data "00" indicates a winning super reach with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds.
The data corresponding to "F8H" is specified in association with the above.

Here, in FIG. 875, for convenience, all the setting value data for setting each variation pattern type is shown in correspondence with each address, but in the actual variation pattern selection table 202f, only the lowest byte of data is stored in each address. That is, the address "1AF5H" in the ROM 202 stores the 1-byte data "F6H", the address "1AF6H" stores the 1-byte data "F7H", and so on.
In address "1AF7H", one byte of data "F8H" is stored. When setting the fluctuation pattern type, either the data "00H" stored in the setting value 1 register 210h1 described below or the data "01H" stored in the setting value 2 register 210h2 is read out and combined with the data read out from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f to generate fluctuation pattern type data 1. By configuring in this way, the amount of data can be halved compared to when the data itself indicating the fluctuation pattern type is stored in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, so
The data capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 875, as a type of variation pattern that can be determined when the lottery for special pattern 1 is unsuccessful, the variation time is set to 1 for the address "1AF8H" of ROM 202.
The data corresponding to the data "00F9H" indicating a complete miss A of the special chart 1 for 0 seconds is stored, and R
Data corresponding to data "00FAH" indicating a special chart 1 complete miss B with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is stored in the address "1AF9H" of ROM 202, and data corresponding to data "00FAH" indicating a special chart 1 complete miss B with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is stored in the address "1A
In the address "1AFBH" of the ROM 202, data corresponding to the data "00FBH" indicating a special chart 1 complete miss C with a fluctuation time of 6 seconds is stored, and in the address "1AFBH" of the ROM 202, data corresponding to the data "00FCH" indicating a special chart 1 complete miss D with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is stored.
Data corresponding to data "00FDH" indicating a special chart 1 miss short reach with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is stored in the address "1AFCH" of the ROM 202, data corresponding to data "00FEH" indicating a special chart 1 miss long reach A with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is stored in the address "1AFDH" of the ROM 202, and data corresponding to data "00FEH" indicating a special chart 1 miss long reach A with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is stored in the address "1AFE
For "H", the data "00FF" indicates a long reach B with a fluctuation time of 19 seconds.
Data corresponding to "0100H" indicating a long reach C with a fluctuation time of 17 seconds and a miss of special chart 1 is stored in the address "1AFFH" of the ROM 202, data corresponding to "0100H" indicating a long reach C with a fluctuation time of 17 seconds and a miss of special chart 1 is stored in the address "1B00H" of the ROM 202, data corresponding to "0101H" indicating a long reach D with a fluctuation time of 16 seconds and a miss of special chart 1 is stored in the address "1B00H" of the ROM 202,
At address "1B01H" of ROM 202, data corresponding to data "0102H" indicating a super reach with a missed special chart 1 and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is stored.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 875, as a type of variation pattern that can be determined when the special symbol 2 is not selected, the variation time is set to 9 for the address "1B02H" of the ROM 202.
The data corresponding to the data "0103H" indicating the complete miss A of the special chart 2 for seconds is stored, and the RO
Data corresponding to the data "0104H" indicating the special chart 2 complete miss B with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds is stored in the address "1B03H" of ROM 202.
In the address "1B05H" of the ROM 202, data corresponding to the data "0106H" indicating the special chart 2 complete miss C with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is stored. In the address "1B05H" of the ROM 202, data corresponding to the data "0106H" indicating the special chart 2 complete miss D with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is stored.
Data corresponding to data "0107H" indicating a short reach with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds and a special chart 2 out of the target is stored in the address "1B06H" of the ROM 202, data corresponding to data "0108H" indicating a long reach with a fluctuation time of 17 seconds and a special chart 2 out of the target is stored in the address "1B07H" of the ROM 202, and data corresponding to data "0108H" indicating a long reach with a fluctuation time of 17 seconds and a special chart 2 out of the target is stored in the address "1B08H" of the ROM 202.
On the other hand, the data "0109H" shows a 25-second fluctuation time with a special chart 2 out of the super reach.
The data corresponding to is stored.

Various variation pattern type data corresponding to the miss of these special symbols 1 and special symbols 2
For the various types of variation pattern type data corresponding to misses, only the data of the lowest byte is specified for the variation pattern type selection table 202f, similarly to the various types of variation pattern type data corresponding to wins. When setting the variation pattern type, either the data "00H" stored in the register 210h1 for setting value 1 described later or the data "01H" stored in the register 210h2 for setting value 2 is read out and combined with the data read out from the variation pattern selection table 202f to generate the variation pattern type data of 1. By configuring in this way, the amount of data can be halved compared to the case where the data itself indicating the variation pattern type is stored in the variation pattern selection table 202f, so the data capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 876, the variation pattern selection table 202 in the program
The contents of the description of f will be explained. As shown in FIG. 876, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f in this 24th embodiment, only the lower byte data of the data indicating the fluctuation pattern type is stored for each address. That is, starting from address 1AF5H, F6H, F7H, F8H, and F9H are stored as 1-byte data for four addresses (1AF5H to 1AF8H). Also, starting from address 1AF9H, FAH, FBH, FCH, and FDH are stored as 1-byte data for four addresses (1AF9H to 1AFCH). Also, starting from address 1AFDH, FEH, FFH, 00H, and 01H are stored as 1-byte data for four addresses (1AFDH to 1B00H). Also, starting from address 1B05H
Starting from this address, four addresses (1B05H to 1B08H) store 06H, 07H, 08H, and 09H as 1-byte data, respectively.

In this way, in the 24th embodiment, for various data tables referenced when setting 2-byte setting value data such as the variation pattern selection table 202f, only the lowest byte of the setting value data is specified as data corresponding to the setting value data. Data corresponding to the highest byte of the setting value data, which has a common value for a relatively large amount of setting value data, is stored separately in a specified register (register 210h1 for setting value 1 or register 210h2 for setting value 2), and one piece of data corresponding to the setting value data is read out from the various data tables and the setting value data is stored (set) in the setting destination address.
When performing the control process for the above, the upper byte data stored in a specified register is combined with the lower byte data read from the data table to generate two-byte setting value data, and the data is stored (set) in the setting destination address. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data stored in various data tables, thereby reducing the storage capacity of the ROM 202.

Next, the register 210 in the present 24th embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 877. Fig. 877 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the register 210 in the present 24th embodiment. As shown in Fig. 877, the register 210 in the present 24th embodiment has a setting value 1
register 210h1, register 210h2 for setting value 2, and register 2 for table address
The difference is that 10i has been added.

The register 210h1 for setting value 1 and the register 210h2 for setting value 2 are registers (storage areas) for storing data commonly used as upper byte data for multiple setting value data. The register 210h1 for setting value 1 has an initial value set to "00H", and the register 210h2 for setting value 2 has an initial value set to "01H". The register 210h1 for setting value 1 and the register 210h2 for setting value 2 are configured so that the values are not overwritten from their initial values, and the initial values are always maintained. As described above,
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, only the lowest byte of the two-byte setting value data is specified in the data table, and the highest byte is data stored in the setting value 1 register 210h1 or the setting value 2 register 210h2, which is read out and combined with the lowest byte data read from the data table to generate one setting value data. With this configuration, it is sufficient to specify only one byte of the two-byte setting value data for the data table, so the amount of data in the data table can be reduced. Therefore, the data capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

The table address register 210i is a ROM in which various data tables are defined.
This is a register for storing data (table address data) that is commonly set as the upper byte of a predetermined range of addresses. The table address register 210i is set to an initial value of "1AH". The table address register 210i is also used with the setting value 1 register 210h1 and the setting value 2 register 210h2.
As in 2, the value is not overwritten (updated) from the initial value, and the initial value "1AH" is always maintained. In this embodiment, only the lower byte (lower address) of the address data indicating the top address of each data table is predefined in the program, and when a specific data table is read in the control process, the address data indicating the top address is specified by combining the address data indicating the upper byte stored in this table address register 210i and the address data indicating the lower byte predefined in the program. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data predefined as the top address of each data table in the program, thereby reducing the program capacity.

Here, a method of specifying the top addresses of various data tables (a method of specifying address data in association with a label) for utilizing the table address register 210i will be described with reference to Fig. 878. Fig. 878 shows a portion of a program where the top addresses of various data tables are specified in association with a label.
As shown in FIG. 8, one byte of data is associated with a label indicating each data table. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 878, "TL_TBL EQU 0
The description "00H" indicates that "00H" is specified in correspondence with the label TL_TBL indicating the top address of the table for low probability in the first winning random number table 202a. Also, the description "TH_TBL EQU 03H" indicates that "03H" is specified in correspondence with the label TH_TBL indicating the top address of the table for high probability in the first winning random number table 202a. Also, the description "TBL1 EQU D8H" indicates that "D8H" is specified in correspondence with the label TBL1 indicating the top address of the status setting table 202h. Furthermore, the description "HP_TBL EQU F5H" indicates that "F5H" is specified in correspondence with the label HP_TBL indicating the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

The 1-byte data associated with these labels is data indicating the lowest byte of the 2-byte address data constituting the top address of various data tables. In the 24th embodiment, when the top address of a specific data table is read in a program to refer to the data in the specific data table, data indicating the lowest byte of the top address is read by the label, and then the data is stored in the table address register 210.
i is combined with data (1AH) indicating the upper byte stored in the label to specify 2-byte address data indicating the top address. With this configuration, the amount of program description can be reduced compared to the case where 2-byte address data is specified in association with a label, and therefore the program capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

Next, the command output port of the main control device 110 in this 24th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 879. As described above, this command output port is a port for setting commands to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111, and is configured as a part of the input/output port 205. As shown in Fig. 879, this command output port is configured with 16 bits in which 1 bit of data can be set.
Of the 2-bit (2-byte) output port, the lower 8 bits are configured to be able to set a 1-byte command for the dispensing control device 111, while the upper 8 bits are configured to be able to set a 1-byte command for the voice lamp control device 113. For this command output port, each time an external output process (see FIG. 881) is executed, the oldest command in terms of time among the commands stored in the ring buffer for sending commands as commands for the dispensing control device 111 and commands for the voice lamp control device 113 is set in the upper byte and lower byte, respectively, and the output of the set command is set. Note that if no command is stored in the ring buffer, "00H" (00000000B) is set in the corresponding byte.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the command data is set to the command output port in the least significant bit order. Also, the data of the command output port is cleared to 0 (0000H) every time a command is output to the outside during the external output process (see FIG. 881).
By configuring in this way, if there is no command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 (not stored in the command buffer), the dispensing control device 111
When only the command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 exists (stored in the command buffer), if only the data in the lower byte is transferred to the command output port, 00H is set in the upper byte of the command output port, and the command data corresponding to the lower byte is set. Therefore, the processing load when setting a command can be reduced compared to a case where a control process is performed to set "00H" in the upper byte even in a situation where no command for the voice lamp control device 113 exists.

<Regarding control process of main control device in the 24th embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 880 to FIG. 882, the main control device 110 in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described.
First, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of FIG.
), the details of the big win setting process 8 (S351) in the present 24th embodiment will be described. This big win self-setting process 8 (S351) is a process executed in place of the big win setting process 7 (see FIG. 873) in the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, and is a process for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big win and the control during the big win, similar to the big win setting process 7 (see FIG. 873).

In the jackpot setting process 8 in the twenty-fourth embodiment (see FIG. 880(a)),
In each process of S401 to S403 and S408, the same processes as those in S401 to S403 and S408 in the big win setting process 7 (see FIG. 873) in the 23rd embodiment are executed. Also, in the big win setting process 8 (see FIG. 88) in the 24th embodiment,
In the case of the embodiment of the present invention, when the process of S403 is completed, a fluctuation pattern acquisition process is executed (S431) to acquire a fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the pattern selection offset value from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, and the process proceeds to S408. Details of this fluctuation pattern acquisition process (S431) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, referring to FIG. 880(b), the loss setting process 8 (
This loss setting process 8 (S352) is the same as that of the 23rd process described above.
This is a process executed in place of the loss setting process (see FIG. 807) in the embodiment (and the 17th embodiment), and like the loss setting process (see FIG. 807), this is a process executed to set the variation pattern type when the lottery result of the special pattern is a loss. In the loss setting process 8 in the 24th embodiment (see FIG. 880(b)), a variation pattern acquisition process is executed (S641) to acquire a variation pattern type corresponding to the pattern selection offset value from the variation pattern selection table 202f, and this process is terminated. This variation pattern acquisition process (S641) is the same process as the variation pattern acquisition process (S431) executed in the jackpot setting process 8 (see FIG. 880(a)) described above.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern acquisition process (S431) will be described with reference to FIG. 881. As described above, this fluctuation pattern acquisition process (S431) is a process for acquiring a fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the pattern selection offset value from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. In this fluctuation pattern acquisition process (S431), first, from the table corresponding to the current lottery result among the fluctuation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8(a)),
The fluctuation type data corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected (S2201), and then, from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 788), a pattern selection offset value corresponding to the fluctuation type data selected in the processing of S2201 and the number of reserved balls is specified (S2202
).

After the process of S2202 is completed, the table address data read from the table address register 210i ("1AH" which is common data as the upper byte of multiple addresses in the storage area where the data table of the ROM 202 is stored) and the 1-byte address data "F5H" corresponding to the label HP_TBL are combined to form 2-byte address data "1AF5H" which is set as the source address (S2203).
The source address is set as the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

In this way, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, instead of associating a label with the direct value of the two-byte address data indicating the top address of the data table in the program,
Only a part of the address data (lower byte) is defined in the program in association with the label. When the top address is set as the destination address, a part of the address data read from the data table and a predetermined area of the register 210 (table address register 210
i) (the upper byte of the address data) is combined with the data stored in the address register 201 to specify the address data of 1. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of description required for label definitions in a program (reducing 2-byte address data to 1 byte), thereby reducing the program capacity of the ROM 202.

When the processing of S2203 is completed, the pattern selection offset value identified (determined) in the processing of S2202 is added to the source address and set as a new source address (S2204), and it is determined whether the pattern selection offset value is smaller than "0AH" (S2205).

In the process of S2205, if it is determined that the pattern selection offset value is smaller than "0AH" (S2205: Yes), the 1-byte data "00H" stored in the setting value 1 register 210h1 and the 1-byte data stored in the transfer source address are combined to generate data indicating the current fluctuation pattern type (S2
In step S2206, the CPU 210 generates 2-byte setting value data, with the 1-byte data stored in the setting value 1 register 210h1 as the upper byte and the 1-byte data read from the source address as the lower byte.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2205 that the pattern selection offset value is equal to or greater than "0AH" (S2205: No), two bytes of data are generated as data indicating the current fluctuation pattern type, with the one byte of data "01H" stored in the register 210h2 for setting value 2 as the upper byte and the one byte of data stored in the transfer source address as the lower byte (S2207), and the process proceeds to S2208.
Alternatively, the setting value data (data indicating the type of fluctuation pattern) generated in the processing of S2207 is set as a fluctuation pattern command (S2208), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in the 24th embodiment, when one set value data (data indicating a variation pattern type) is generated by combining one byte of data read from the variation pattern selection table 202f with the predetermined data stored in the register 210, the data stored in either the register 210h1 for the setting value 1 or the register 210h2 for the setting value 2 is varied according to the pattern selection offset value. In other words, a plurality of different data as the upper bytes of the setting value data are distributed and stored in a plurality of storage areas (the register 210h1 for the setting value 1 and the register 210h2 for the setting value 2), and different data are read and used according to conditions. By configuring in this way, even for setting value data with different upper bytes, it is possible to adopt a storage method in which a part of the setting value data (upper byte) is stored in the register while only the remaining part of the setting value data (lower 1 byte) is specified for the data table, so that the amount of data in the data table can be reduced more. Therefore, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced more.

Next, referring to FIG. 882, external output process 8 (S1221) in the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described.
This external output process 8 (S1221) is the same as the main process (FIG. 813).
This external output process 8 (see reference 1221) is executed in the external output process 8 to set the output of commands to other control devices. In this external output process 8 (S1221), first, the commands stored in the ring buffer of the RAM 203 are read (S2101), and it is determined whether or not at least one command is stored (S2102).

In the process of S2102, if it is determined that no command is stored in the ring buffer (S2102: No), this means that there is no command to be output to the outside, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2102, if it is determined that at least one command is stored in the ring buffer (S2102
: Yes), and then it is determined whether at least one command for the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (S2103). In the process of S2103, if it is determined that one or more commands for the voice lamp control device 113 are stored in the ring buffer (S2103: Yes), the command for the dispensing control device 111 and the command for the voice lamp control device 113 that are the oldest (oldest) in terms of time stored in the ring buffer are read from the ring buffer, two-byte command data is generated (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2106. In the process of S2104, two-byte data is generated, with one byte (8 bits) of command data for the voice lamp control device 113 as the upper byte and one byte (8 bits) of command data for the dispensing control device 111 as the lower byte. Note that if command data for the dispensing control device 111 is not stored in the ring buffer, 00H (
00000000B).

On the other hand, in the process of S2103, the audio and lamp control device 113
If it is determined that no command for the dispenser control device 111 is stored (S2103: No), the oldest command stored in the ring buffer among the commands for the dispenser control device 111 is read out, one byte of command data is generated (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106.
The command data generated by the process is set in the command output port starting from the least significant bit, with the least significant bit being filled in (S2106). In this way, by setting the data starting from the least significant bit, with the least significant bit being filled in, when setting one byte of command data, it is possible to update only the lower byte without rewriting the upper byte of the command output port,
When setting two bytes of command data, all bits of the command output port can be updated. Here, since each bit of the command output port is set to 0 immediately before the process of S2106 is executed, by setting one byte of command data from the bottom up, it is possible to obtain the same result as if the upper byte were set to 00H. In other words, a state in which no command data for the voice lamp control device 113 is set and only command data for the dispensing control device 111 is set can be achieved by simply setting one byte of data. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

When the process of S2106 is completed, the output of the 2-byte data set in the command output port is set (S2107), the data of the command buffer set for output this time and the data of each bit of the command output port are cleared to 0 (S2108), and this process is terminated. By executing this external output process (see FIG. 882), the processing load when outputting various commands from the main control unit 110 to other control units (dispensing control unit 111, voice lamp control unit 113) can be minimized, and more suitable signal output can be realized.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment, among the addresses where each data table is stored, data (table address data) common to a plurality of addresses is set as the initial value of a predetermined register as data (upper byte data) constituting a predetermined range of addresses, and only the lower byte (lower address) of the address data indicating the top address of each data table is predefined in the program, and when a predetermined data table is read in the control process, the address data indicating the top address is specified by combining the data stored in the predetermined register and the data indicating the lower byte predefined. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data predefined as the top address of each data table in the program, thereby reducing the program capacity.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 24th embodiment, when various commands are set to the command output port for outputting commands from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, a command for the payout control device 111 is set in the lowest byte, while a command for the voice lamp control device 113 is set in the highest byte, making it possible to output commands to both control devices in parallel (simultaneously) in one command output process. The command output port is configured to set command data with the lowest bits aligned. By configuring in this way, when there are no commands to send to the voice lamp control device 113 (they are not stored in the command buffer), and only commands to send to the payout control device 111 exist (
In the case where the command is set in the command buffer, only the lower byte data needs to be transferred to the command output port, which reduces the processing load when setting a command. This makes it possible to realize a more suitable signal output method.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, when one or two bytes of command data are set to the command output port, the data is set in the lower byte order, but this is not limited to this. For example, a method of setting data in the upper byte order (starting from the most significant bit of the command data to the upper byte of the command output port) may be adopted. In this case, the command data for the voice lamp control device 113 is set first, so only the command data for the voice lamp control device 113 is stored in the ring buffer, and if no command for the dispensing control device 111 is stored, only the one byte of command data for the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the command output port, thereby setting two bytes.
The same result as when the byte data is set can be obtained.
Even if 00H is not set as data for 1, since 00H is already set in the lower byte, by setting 1-byte command data for the voice lamp control device 113 to the command output port with the most significant bits, the lower byte becomes 00H.
Byte data can be easily generated, and the processing load required for command generation can be reduced, making it possible to realize a more suitable signal output method.

In the 24th embodiment, when the main control device 110 outputs a command to the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, the command data is set to the command output port in the lowest bit order, so that when a command is set only to the dispensing control device 111, the same result as when two bytes of command data are set can be obtained by setting only one byte of command data, but this control may be diverted to the command output port of other control devices. Specifically, for example, it may be diverted to the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the dispensing control device 111, etc. This allows the signal output method of each control device to be optimized.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the data of each bit in the command output port is cleared to 0 each time a command for the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 is output externally in the external output process 8, but this is not limited to this. For example, the command output port may not be cleared to 0 even after a command has been output externally, but instead a specified flag indicating that the command has been output may be set to on. When outputting the next command externally, the data currently set in the command output port may be compared with the command data to be output externally this time, and only the data of the bits that differ may be updated before the command data is output externally. By configuring in this way, the process of updating the data of bits that have common data can be omitted,
The processing load can be reduced.

In the present 24th embodiment, when setting the setting value data whose upper byte is "00H" and the setting value data whose upper byte is "01H", the upper byte of data is read from the register 210h1 for setting value 1 or the register 210h2 for setting value 2, and the lower byte of data specified in the data table is read, and these are combined to generate 2-byte setting value data, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, a greater variety of setting value data may be accommodated by increasing the variation of the upper byte data stored in the register 210. In this configuration, although the number of registers constituting the register 210 increases, the amount of data in the data table can be further reduced, and therefore the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be further reduced.

<Twenty-fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 883 to Fig. 887. In the above-mentioned 24th embodiment, only one byte (lower byte) of the two-byte setting value data is specified in the data table, while the remaining one byte (upper byte) of the setting value data is stored in the register 210. When setting the predetermined setting value data, a part (lower byte) of the predetermined setting value data read from the data table and a part (upper byte) of the predetermined setting value data stored in the register are combined to generate one predetermined setting value data, and a control process is performed to set the corresponding setting destination address.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present 25th embodiment, only 4 bits of the 2-byte set value data are specified in the data table, and the remaining 12 bits of data are stored in the register 210. Since each register constituting the register 210 is configured with an 8-bit (1-byte) storage area, a 16-bit (2-byte) storage area is actually allocated (allocated) in the register as a storage area for storing part of the set value data. Even with this configuration, the amount of data specified in the data table can be further reduced, so that the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced more in total.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment in terms of configuration in that the ROM 202 and the register 210 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed.
The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eighth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the twenty-fifth embodiment>
First, referring to FIG. 883, the details of the prescribed contents of the data table in the 25th embodiment will be described. Here, as in the 24th embodiment, the variation pattern selection table 2
The contents of the data table will be explained using 02f as an example.
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table 202f in an embodiment.
83, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, two types of data are stored, each of which is four bits, for each address (eight-bit storage area) of the ROM 202.
As shown in FIG. 3, the address “1AF5H” in the ROM 202 is “01100111B
" is stored in the upper 4 bits of the address "1AF5H".
While the data "0111B" (7H) is stored in the lower byte, the data "0111B" (7H) is stored in the lower byte, which is part of the data indicating a winning long reach (variation pattern 2).

Similarly, the upper 4 bits of the address "1AF6H" of the ROM 202 store data "1000B" (8H), which is part of the data indicating a winning super reach (variation pattern 3), while the lower byte stores data "1001B" (9H), which is part of the data indicating a special chart 1 complete miss A (variation pattern 4).
The upper 4 bits of the address "1AF7H" of M202 store data "1010B" (AH), which is part of the data indicating a complete miss B (variation pattern 5), while the lower byte stores data "1011B" (BH), which is part of the data indicating a complete miss C (variation pattern 6). Also, the upper 4 bits of the address "1AF8H" of ROM202 store data "1100B" (CH), which is part of the data indicating a complete miss D (variation pattern 7), while the lower byte stores data "1100B" (CH), which is part of the data indicating a short miss (variation pattern 8) of the special chart 1.
1B" (DH). Also, the address of ROM 202 is "1AF9
The upper 4 bits of "H" store the data "1110B" (EH), which is part of the data indicating the special chart 1 long reach A (variation pattern 9), while the lower byte stores "111
The data stored therein is "1B" (FH).

In addition, the upper 4 bits of the address "1AFAH" of the ROM 202 store data "0000B" (0H), which is part of the data indicating the long reach C (variation pattern 11) of the special chart 1 miss, while the lower byte stores data "0001B" (FH), which is part of the data indicating the long reach D (variation pattern 12) of the special chart 1 miss. Also, the upper 4 bits of the address "1AFBH" of the ROM 202 store data "0010B" (2H), which is part of the data indicating the super reach (variation pattern 13) of the special chart 1 miss.
While storing the data, the lower byte is stored as a special chart 2 complete miss A (variation pattern 1
4), the data "0011B" (3H) which is a part of the data indicating the special chart 2 complete miss B is stored in the upper 4 bits of the address "1AFCH" of the ROM 202.
The ROM 20 stores data "0100B" (4H) which is part of the data indicating the special pattern 2 complete miss C (variation pattern 15), while the lower byte stores data "0101B" (5H) which is part of the data indicating the special pattern 2 complete miss C (variation pattern 16).
The upper 4 bits of the address "1AFDH" of ROM 202 store data "0110B" (6H) which is a part of the data indicating a special chart 2 complete miss D (variation pattern 17), while the lower byte stores data "0111B" (7H) which is a part of the data indicating a special chart 2 miss short reach (variation pattern 18). Also, the upper 4 bits of the address "1AFEH" of ROM 202 store data "1000B" (8H) which is a part of the data indicating a special chart 2 miss long reach (variation pattern 19), while the lower byte stores data "1001B" (9H) which is a part of the data indicating a special chart 2 miss super reach (variation pattern 20).

In this way, in the 25th embodiment, only 4-bit data is stored in the data table as part of the variation pattern type data. This allows the data capacity of the data table to be further reduced compared to the case where 1-byte data is specified in the data table as in the 24th embodiment described above. Among the variation pattern type data, the data of bits other than the lower 4-bit data specified in the variation pattern selection table 202f is stored in the register 210 as in the 24th embodiment. In other words, data for setting the remaining 12-byte data, excluding the 4-bit data specified in the data table, of the 2-byte setting value data, is set in the register 210. Since each register constituting the register 210 is configured with a 1-byte storage area, the register for setting values is actually configured to store 12-bit data in a 2-byte storage area. More specifically, depending on the setting value data read from the data table, the 2-byte data stored in the first register 210j1 for setting value 1 and the second register 210j2 for setting value 1 or the data stored in the first register 210j2 for setting value 2 is stored in the register 210j1 for setting value 2.
Either the 2-byte data stored in the second register 210k2 for setting value 2 or the 4-bit data read from the data table is read out to generate 2-byte setting value data. The method of combining this data will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the register 210 in the present 25th embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 884. Fig. 884 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the register 210 in the present 25th embodiment. As shown in Fig. 884, the register 210 in the present 25th embodiment has a setting value 1
The only difference is that the first register 210j1 for setting value 1 and the second register 210j2 for setting value 1, the first register 210k1 for setting value 2, and the second register 210k2 for setting value 2 have been deleted and instead a first register 210j1 for setting value 1, a second register 210j2 for setting value 1, a first register 210k1 for setting value 2, and a second register 210k2 for setting value 2 have been added. The first register 210j1 for setting value 1 and the second register 210j2 for setting value 1 are pair registers each consisting of a 1-byte storage area, and two registers constituting the setting value data are stored in the pair.
The first register 210k1 for the setting value 2 and the second register 210k2 for the setting value 2 are also used as the first register 210k2 for the setting value 1.
Like register 210j1 and the second register 210j2 for setting value 1, it is composed of a pair of registers each consisting of 1 byte of memory area, and is a memory area for storing data (0100H) for setting the upper 12 bits of data that are common to multiple setting value data out of the 2 bytes of data that make up the setting value data.

Here, as already explained in the 24th embodiment, the top 1 of the fluctuation pattern type data
The two bits are "000000001111B" (00FH) or "0000000
Therefore, when setting the setting value data with the upper 12 bits of "000000001111B" (00FH), the 4-bit data read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f and the setting value 1
On the other hand, when setting the setting value data with the upper 12 bits of “000000010000B” (010H), the 4-bit data read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f and the first register 210k1 for setting value 2 and the second register 210j2 for setting value 2 are combined to generate the 2-byte setting value data.
0k2 and the total of 2 bytes of data "0100H" stored in register 210 are combined to generate 2 bytes of setting value data. With this configuration, although the data capacity on the register 210 side increases slightly, it is possible to reduce a large amount of data in the data table, and therefore the data capacity of the main control device 110 as a whole can be significantly reduced.

Next, a method of generating setting value data in the present 25th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 885. Here, in the above-mentioned 24th embodiment, data corresponding to the upper byte of setting value data common to a plurality of setting value data is stored in the register 210, while data corresponding to the lower byte, which differs for each setting value data, is specified in a data table, and 2 bytes of setting value data are generated by a process in which 1 byte of data read from the register 210 is set as the upper byte of the setting value data, while 1 byte of data read from the data table is set as the lower byte of the setting value data. In other words,
One byte of data corresponding to the upper byte read from the register 210 is transferred to a first register (e.g., general-purpose register 210b1) of a predetermined pair of registers for storing setting value data, and one byte of data corresponding to the upper byte read from the register 210 is transferred to a second register (e.g., general-purpose register 210b2) of the predetermined pair of registers for storing setting value data.
) to create a state in which two bytes of setting value data are stored in the specified pair of registers, and the two bytes of setting value data are transferred to the setting destination address to set the setting value data. In other words, in the above-mentioned 24th embodiment, since the data amount of each piece of read data matches the data capacity of the memory area that stores each piece of read data, it is possible to transfer the setting value data to the specified pair of registers relatively easily.

In contrast to this, in the 25th embodiment, 2 bytes of data including the upper 12 bits of the setting value data are stored in a register, while the lower 4 bits of the setting value data are defined in a data table, so it is necessary to execute a process that is more complicated than in the 24th embodiment, that is, to generate 2 bytes of setting value data from 2 bytes of data and 4 bits of data. A method of generating setting value data in the 25th embodiment will be described below.

In FIG. 885, a first register 210j1 for setting value 1 and a second register 210j
2 and the 2-byte data "00F0H" read from the variation pattern selection table 20
An example will be described in which 2 bytes of setting value data are generated by combining the 4 bytes of data "1011B" read from fluctuation pattern selection table 202f with the 4 bytes of data "1011B" read from fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 885, the 4 bytes of data read from fluctuation pattern selection table 202f are transferred to accumulator 210a with the lowest bits filled in, and accumulator 210a is left with 8 bits (1 byte) of data stored, with the highest 4 bits being 0 and the lowest 4 bits storing 4 bits of data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. In other words, the highest 4 bits are stored with meaningless data (data unrelated to the setting value data). On the other hand,
The first register 210j1 for the setting value 1 and the second register 210j2 for the setting value 1 are
When viewed as a storage area, the upper 12 bits of the setting data are stored in the most significant bits, and the lower 4 bits contain meaningless data (data unrelated to the setting data).
As shown in FIG. 885, the 1-byte data stored in the first register 210j1 for setting value 1 is data in which all bits indicate the upper byte of the setting value data, and therefore is transferred as is to the first register of the pair of registers for storing setting value data (for example, the general-purpose register 210j1).

On the other hand, the second register 210j2 for set value 1 and the accumulator 210a are
Since meaningless 0 data (irrelevant to the setting value data) is included in each of the data, it is necessary to eliminate the meaningless 0 data.
The logical sum data of one byte of data stored in the second register 210j2 for setting value 1 and one byte of data stored in the accumulator 210a is calculated and stored in the second register (for example, the general-purpose register 210b2) of the pair of registers for storing setting value data. Here, the logical sum is a logical operation in which if at least one of the pieces of data is true (1), the data is true (1), and if all of the pieces of data are false (0), the data is false (0). By performing this logical operation, meaningless 0 data (irrelevant to the setting value data) stored in the lower 4 bits of the second register 210j2 for setting value 1 and meaningless 0 data (irrelevant to the setting value data) stored in the accumulator 210a can be eliminated, and data in a form in which the upper 4 bits of the second register 210j2 for setting value 1 and the lower 4 bits of the accumulator 210a are combined can be obtained as logical sum data.

In this way, by calculating the logical sum data using the second register 210j2 for setting value 1 and the accumulator 210a, data indicating the lower byte of the setting value data can be easily generated. Therefore, as data indicating a part of the setting value data in the data table,
The set value data can be easily generated without defining the data in 1-byte units, and the amount of data in the data table can be reduced, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

<Control process of main control device in twenty-fifth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 886 and FIG. 887, the main control device 1 in the twenty-fifth embodiment will be described.
Various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of FIG.
The details of the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 9 (S341) in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to the above. This fluctuation pattern acquisition process 9 (S341) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation pattern acquisition process (see FIG. 881) in the 24th embodiment described above, and is a process for acquiring a fluctuation pattern type corresponding to a pattern selection offset value from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, similar to the fluctuation pattern acquisition process (see FIG. 881).

In the variation pattern acquisition process 9 (see FIG. 886) in the 25th embodiment, S22
In each of the processes of S2201 to S2203 and S2208, the same processes as those of S2201 to S2203 and S2208 in the fluctuation pattern acquisition process (see FIG. 881) in the 24th embodiment are executed. In the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 9 (see FIG. 886) in the 25th embodiment, when the process of S2203 is completed, the address obtained by adding the quotient of dividing the pattern selection offset value by 2 to the transfer source address set in the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f is set as a new transfer source address (S
2211).

Here, as described above, in the 25th embodiment, 4-bit data indicating different fluctuation pattern types are stored in the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of each address of the ROM 202. Therefore, unlike the 24th embodiment in which the pattern selection offset value is simply an offset value of the address for the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, the pattern selection offset value in the 25th embodiment corresponds to an offset value of 1/2 (4 bits) of the actual address. Therefore, in the process of S2211, as an address for reading data, an address that is 1/2 the value of the pattern selection offset value from the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f is set as the transfer source address. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the address for reading fluctuation pattern type data to the transfer source address without changing the method for specifying the pattern selection offset value.

When the process of S2211 is completed, data constituting a part of the setting value data indicating the fluctuation pattern type is read from the set transfer source address, and a fluctuation pattern type data generation process for generating 2 bytes of fluctuation pattern type data based on the read data is executed (S2212), and the process proceeds to S2208. Details of this fluctuation pattern type data generation process (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 887 is a flow chart showing the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern type data generation process (S2212). In the fluctuation pattern type data generation process (S2212), first, all data in the accumulator 210a and the pair register (general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2) are cleared to 0 (stored as 00H) (S2251), and then it is determined whether the pattern selection offset value is an odd number (S2252). In the process of S2252, if it is determined that the pattern selection offset value is not an odd number (is an even number), (S2252:
No), and the upper 4 bits of the 8-bit (1 byte) data stored (stored) in the transfer source address are stored in the accumulator 210a with the lower bits aligned (S225
3), and the process proceeds to S2255. In other words, the upper 4 bits of the accumulator 210a, which is configured of an 8-bit (1 byte) storage area and in which 00H is set (stored), are not overwritten, and only the lower 4 bits are overwritten with the 4-bit data read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

On the other hand, in the process of S2252, if it is determined that the pattern selection offset value is an odd number (S2252: Yes), the lower 4 bits of the 8-bit (1 byte) data stored (stored) in the transfer source address are stored in the accumulator with the lower bits packed (S2254), and the process proceeds to S2255. In other words, the upper 4 bits of the accumulator 210a are set to 0 data, and the lower 4 bits are set to the 4-bit data read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f.

Here, in the 25th embodiment, for the address of the ROM 202 consisting of a storage area of 1 byte of the variation pattern selection table, different data are stored in order in the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits. As a result, data corresponding to odd-numbered pattern selection offset values is stored in the lower 4 bits of each address of the ROM 202, and data corresponding to even-numbered pattern selection offset values is stored in the upper 4 bits of each address of the ROM 202. Therefore, in the process of S2252, whether the pattern selection offset value is even or odd is determined, and whether the upper 4 bits or the lower 4 bits of the data of the transfer source address are stored in the accumulator 210a is changed according to the determination result, so that the data corresponding to the pattern selection offset value can be accurately stored in the accumulator 210a.

In the process of S2255 executed after the process of S2253 or S2254, it is determined whether or not the pattern selection offset value is smaller than "0AH" (S2255). If it is determined that the pattern selection offset value is smaller than "0AH" (S225
5: Yes), first, the data in the first register 210j1 for setting value 1 is
Next, the logical sum data of the data in the second register 210j2 for setting value 1 and the data stored in the accumulator 210a is calculated, and the calculated logical sum data of 1 byte is stored in the second register (general-purpose register 210b1) of the pair register.
The data is stored in the register (general purpose register 210b2) (S2257), and the process returns to S2260.
transition to.

On the other hand, in the process of S2255, if it is determined that the pattern selection offset value is equal to or greater than "0AH" (S2255: No), first, the first register 210k for setting value 2 is
1 is stored in the first register of the pair (general register 210b1) (S2
258). Next, the data in the second register 210k2 for setting value 2 and the data in the accumulator 2
10a, and stores the 1-byte logical sum data in the second register of the pair (general-purpose register 210b2) (
S2257), and the process proceeds to S2260. In the process of S2260, the pair register (
The two bytes of data stored in the general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2 are identified as fluctuation pattern type data (setting value data) (S2260), and this process is terminated.

Since data indicating the lower byte of the set value data can be easily generated by calculating the logical sum data of the second register 210j2 for set value 1 and the accumulator 210a, the set value data can be easily formed without specifying data in 1-byte units as data indicating a part of the set value data in the data table. Therefore, the amount of data in the data table can be reduced, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment, only 4 bits of the 2-byte set value data are defined in the data table, and the remaining 12 bits (including 2 bytes) are stored in the register 210. By configuring in this way, the amount of data in the various data tables can be reduced, and the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Twenty-sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 888 to Fig. 891. In the above-mentioned 25th embodiment, only 4 bits of the 2-byte setting value data are specified in the data table, and the remaining 12 bits of data are stored in the register 210. When setting the setting value data, the 4 bits of data read from the data table and the 12 bits of data stored in the register 210 are combined.
A predetermined operation (calculation of logical sum data) is performed using the bit data to generate 2-byte setting value data.

In contrast to this, the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment is similar to the 25th embodiment in that, of the 2-byte setting value data, a data amount (4 bits) less than the storage capacity of each address of the ROM 202 is specified in the data table, but the calculation method after reading out the 4-bit data has been changed from the 25th embodiment.

The pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the 25th embodiment in terms of configuration in that the ROM 202 and the register 210 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed.
The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the various processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the twenty-fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the ninth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the twenty-sixth embodiment>
First, the contents of the description of the data table in the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 888. In Fig. 888, the description method will be described by taking the variation pattern selection table 202f as an example. As shown in Fig. 888, the variation pattern selection table 202f in the 26th embodiment is the same as the variation pattern selection table 202 in the 25th embodiment.
Similarly to the description of f (see FIG. 883), two 4-bit data are stored for each address. However, in the 25th embodiment, data corresponding to a small address offset value is stored in the upper 4 bits, and data corresponding to a large address offset value is stored in the lower 4 bits within the same address, but in the 26th embodiment, the data storage order is reversed. That is, in the same address, data corresponding to a small address offset value is stored in the lower 4 bits, and data corresponding to a large address offset value is stored in the upper 4 bits. This is intended to set the data in a prescribed order that makes it easier to perform calculations when generating setting value data, and the details of the calculations will be described later.

Next, with reference to Fig. 889, a calculation method for obtaining corresponding data from a data table in the 26th embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in Fig. 889,
In the embodiment, two types of 4-bit data, which are components of different setting value data, are stored for each address constituting various data tables such as the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f,
As shown in FIG. 889, in the 8-bit storage area constituting the address "1AF5H,""0110B" corresponding to the pattern selection offset value "00H" is stored in the lower 4 bits, and "011" corresponding to the pattern selection offset value "01H" is stored in the upper 4 bits.
Similarly, "100.1B" corresponding to the pattern selection offset value "02H" is stored in the lower 4 bits of the 8-bit storage area that constitutes the address "1AF6H".
In the 8-bit memory area constituting the address "1AF7H", "1010B" corresponding to the pattern selection offset value "04H" is stored in the lower 4 bits, and "1001B" corresponding to the pattern selection offset value "03H" is stored in the upper 4 bits. In addition, in the 8-bit memory area constituting the address "1AF7H", "1010B" corresponding to the pattern selection offset value "04H" is stored in the lower 4 bits, and "05H" corresponding to the pattern selection offset value "05H" is stored in the upper 4 bits.
For the other addresses, two pieces of 4-bit data corresponding to different pattern selection offset values are stored in the upper 4 bits and two pieces of 4-bit data corresponding to different pattern selection offset values are stored in the lower 4 bits.

Here, a method for reading data from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f having the above data configuration will be described by taking the case where the pattern selection offset value is "05H" as an example. In this 26th embodiment, when a pattern selection offset value is selected from the offset setting table 202e, first, the product of the pattern selection offset value and the number of bits (4 bits) of data obtained from the data table is calculated. When the pattern selection offset value is "05H", the calculation result ("05H" x 4 bits) is "14H" (00010100
B). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity, the calculation value of the pattern selection offset value×4 bits will be referred to as calculation value A.

As described above, each address of the ROM 202 is composed of an 8-bit storage area.
In the variation pattern selection table 202f, data is stored without any free bits for consecutive addresses. Therefore, the value obtained by dividing the calculation value A by 8 bits, which is the number of bits constituting each address, is the address conversion offset value (address offset value) for the first address.
In other words, the upper 5 bits of "14H" (00010100B) are "0
2H" (00010B) is calculated as the address offset value.

The remainder when the calculation value A is divided by 8 bits is the read start position (bit offset value) in the address from which data is to be read.
The value of the lowest 3 bits of the address offset value A and the bit offset value B, "04H" (100B), are calculated as the bit offset value. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, the address offset value and the bit offset value calculated from the calculation value A are used to read out 4-bit data corresponding to the pattern selection offset value from the variation pattern selection table 202f. That is,
The configuration is such that 4 bits of data are read from the address higher by the bit offset value from the 0th bit of the address ahead of the first address of the variation pattern selection table 202f by the address offset value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately read 4 bits of data corresponding to the pattern selection offset value by simply changing the calculation method in the control process without changing the definition of the pattern selection offset value from each of the above embodiments. Therefore, since multiple data corresponding to multiple pattern selection offset values can be stored in each address of the ROM 202, the ROM 202 can be used efficiently. Therefore, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

<Control process of main control device in twenty-sixth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 890, the MPU 20 of the main control device 110 in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described.
First, referring to FIG. 890, the various control processes executed by the second embodiment will be described.
The details of the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 10 (S441) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This fluctuation pattern acquisition process 10 (S441) is a process executed in place of the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 9 (see FIG. 886) in the twenty-fifth embodiment described above, and similarly to the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 9 (see FIG. 886), from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f,
This is a process for obtaining a fluctuation pattern type according to a pattern selection offset value.

In this fluctuation pattern acquisition process 10 (see FIG. 890), the processes of S2201 to S2203 and S2208 are the same as those of the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 9 in the 25th embodiment.
The same processes as those of S2201 to S2203 and S2208 in (see FIG. 886) are executed. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 10 (see FIG. 890) in the 26th embodiment, when the process of S2203 is completed, the product of the pattern selection offset value determined (specified) in the process of S2202 and the number of bits (4 bits) constituting the data read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f is calculated, and the calculation value A obtained by the calculation is stored in the pair of registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 and 210b2) (S2221). Next, the quotient (the upper 5 bits of the calculation value A) obtained by dividing the calculation value A by 8 is set as the address offset value, and the lower 3 bits of the calculation value A are set as the bit offset value (S2222). Then, in the process of S2203, the address obtained by adding the address offset value to the transfer source address set in the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f is set as a new transfer source address (S2223), and the fluctuation pattern type data generation process 10 is executed instead of the fluctuation pattern type data generation process (see FIG. 887) in the 25th embodiment (S2
224), and the process proceeds to S2208.
S2224) is a process for reading data constituting part of the setting value data indicating the fluctuation pattern type from the set source address, similar to the fluctuation pattern type data generation process (see FIG. 887) in the 25th embodiment, and generating 2-byte fluctuation pattern type data based on the read data.

FIG. 891 is a flowchart showing the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern type data generation process 10 (S2224).
In each process of S2251 and S2255 to S2260, the process of S2251 and S2255 to S2260 of the fluctuation pattern type data generation process (see FIG. 887) in the 25th embodiment is performed.
The same processes as those of S2260 are executed. In the fluctuation pattern type data generation process 10 (S2224) in the 26th embodiment, when the process of S2251 is completed, next, of the 8-bit (1 byte) data stored in the transfer source address, 4 bits (the number of bits of each data specified in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f) of data are read (S2261) from the bit corresponding to the bit offset value set (calculated) in the process of S2222 of the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 10 (see FIG. 890), and the read 4 bits are
The data of 10 bits is stored in the accumulator 210a with the least significant bit aligned (S226
2) The process proceeds to S2255.

By this fluctuation pattern type data generation process 10 (see FIG. 891), even if a data storage method is adopted in which multiple data are stored for each address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, the data corresponding to the pattern selection offset value can be accurately read from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. Therefore, the data capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 26th embodiment, only 4 bits of the 2-byte set value data are defined in the data table, and the remaining 12 bits (including 2 bytes) are stored in the register 210. By configuring in this way, the amount of data in the various data tables can be reduced, and the data capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In the 26th embodiment, two types of 4-bit data are stored for each address of the ROM 202 to which the data table is associated, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be arbitrarily determined within the range of data amounts less than 8 bits. When data amounts of bits (e.g., 2 bits) that are a divisor of "8", which is the number of bits constituting each address, are stored continuously without any free bits, the address offset value and the bit offset value can be easily calculated as in the 26th embodiment by applying the control process of the 26th embodiment almost as it is, so that the corresponding set value data can be easily stored in the accumulator 210a. Also, even when the number of bits of each data corresponding to each set value data is not a divisor of 8, the set value data can be stored in the accumulator 210a by simply changing a part of the control process from the 26th embodiment. Specifically, when each data corresponding to the set value data is not a divisor of 8, if data is stored without any free bits in each address, some data will be stored in multiple addresses. For example, when 6-bit data is stored in a plurality of addresses consisting of an 8-bit storage area without any free bits, the first data is stored in the lower 6 bits of the first address, the second data is stored in the upper 2 bits of the first address and the lower 4 bits of the second address that is consecutive to the second address, the third data is stored in the upper 4 bits of the second address and the lower 2 bits of the third address that is consecutive to the second address, and the fourth data is stored in the upper 6 bits of the third address. Therefore, it is necessary to read the data in a different way depending on whether the data corresponding to one set value data is stored in a plurality of addresses or is stored in only one address. More specifically, when executing a process of reading out data for the number of bits constituting each data item using the bit offset value (see S2261 in FIG. 891), the difference between 8 bits, which is the storage capacity of each address, and the bit offset value is calculated, and if the difference is a value larger than the amount of data constituting each data item (e.g., 6 bits), data for the amount of data constituting each data item is read from the bit indicated by the bit offset value (the process of S2261 is executed as is), whereas if the calculated difference is a value smaller than the amount of data, this means that the data is stored separately in the address set in the source address and the next address subsequent to that address,
All data from the source address after the bit indicated by the bit offset value and the remaining number of bits of data stored in the address next to the source address may be read out. In this way, as long as the amount of data is less than the storage capacity of each address, the corresponding data can be read out regardless of whether the amount of data is a divisor of the number of bits of each address, so that the degree of freedom of data specified in the data table can be improved. Conversely, data of more than 8 bits (for example, 12 bits) may be stored in multiple addresses. Even if configured in this way, there is no need to change the calculation method of the address offset value and the bit offset value from the 26th embodiment, and when reading out the amount of data (number of bits) of data indicating the setting value data using the bit offset value, the data of one of the data that is specified in multiple addresses may be read out.
This can improve the degree of freedom of the data defined in the data table.

<Modification of the 24th embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned 24th embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 892 to 894. In the above-mentioned 24th embodiment, a common value as the upper byte of a plurality of addresses in the storage area of the ROM 202 in which the data tables are stored is stored in advance (as an initial value) in a predetermined storage area (table address register 210i), and only the lower byte of the top address of the nuclear data table is associated with the label for reading the top address of each data table. As a result, when reading the top address of each data table, 1 byte of data stored in the table address register 210i and 1 byte of data associated with the label are combined to generate 2-byte address data indicating the top address. However, in the configuration of the 24th embodiment, only addresses with the data "1AH" stored in the table address register 210i as the upper byte can be read, so "1AH" is not read.
For addresses having a value other than ".AH" in the upper byte, there is a problem in that individual measures must be taken, such as associating a direct value of two-byte address data with a label.

In contrast, in this modified example, a predetermined register (first table address register 210
The first register 210i1 for table address and the second register 210i2 for table address store the immediate value of the head address of the memory area (data table area) in which various data tables are stored, and the label used to read the head address of each data table is specified by associating it with an offset address for the head address of the data table area. By configuring in this way, addresses other than those whose upper byte value of the head address is 1AH can be handled in the same way, so that the program can be simplified.

First, the details of the register 210 in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 892. Fig. 892 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the register 210 in this modified example.
2, the register 210 in this modification differs from the register 210 in the twenty-fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 877) in that a table address register 210i
892, the first table address register 210i1 and the second table address register 210i2 are provided as a pair of registers. In other words, the only difference is that a 2-byte storage area is provided as a storage area for storing data to be referenced when reading out the top address of the data table. As shown in FIG. 892, the first table address register 210i1 has an initial value set to "1AH", and the second table address register 210i2 has an initial value set to "00H". The 2-byte data stored in these pair of registers indicates "1A00H", which is the top address of a storage area (data table area) in the ROM 202 where various data tables are stored (defined). As described above, in this modification, an offset address (differential address) with respect to the top address of the data table area is defined as data defined in association with the label. For this reason, when reading out the top address of various data tables in various control processes, the top address of the target data table is specified by adding an offset address (differential address) that is specified in association with the label to the address data (1A00H) that indicates the top address of the data table area read from the register. This makes it possible to specify the top address by common control (arithmetic processing that adds the 2-byte data read from the register and the data that is specified in association with the label) regardless of the address where the various data tables are stored, while minimizing the data that is specified in association with each label. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity.

Next, with reference to Fig. 893, a method of specifying the top addresses of various data tables (a method of specifying address data in association with a label) for utilizing the first table address register 210i1 and the second table address register 210i2 will be described. Fig. 893 is a diagram showing a specification part in a program where the top addresses of various data tables are specified in association with a label. As shown in Fig. 893, data of 2 bytes or less is specified in association with a label indicating each data table. More specifically, as shown in Fig. 893, the description content of "TL_TBL EQU 00H" is,
The label TL_TBL, which indicates the top address of the table for low probability in the first winning random number table 202a, is set to "00H".
2a, the label TH_TBL indicating the top address of the table for high probability is set to "
03H" is specified in correspondence with the "TBL1 EQU D
The description "8H" is a label TBL indicating the top address of the status setting table 202h.
It shows that "D8H" is specified in correspondence with "HP_
The description "OS_TBL EQU F5H" indicates that "F5H" is associated with the label HP_TBL indicating the top address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. Furthermore, the description "OS_TBL EQU 109H" indicates that "109H" is associated with the label HP_TBL indicating the top address of the offset setting table 202e.
This indicates that "H" is specified in association with the ".

In this modification, a difference address (offset address) from the start address "1A00H" of the data table area is associated with each label. For this reason, for a data table whose start address is set to an address whose upper byte is the same as the start address of the data table area (1AH), only one byte of data is associated with the label, whereas for a data table whose start address is set to an address whose upper byte is different, data of more than one byte (for example, 12 bits) is associated with the label. In this modification, when the start address of a specific data table is read in a program to refer to data in the data table, data indicating a difference address (offset address) from the start address of the data table area is read using the label, and then the first table address register 210
i1, to the data (1A00H) indicating the top address of the data table area stored in the second table address register 210i2, thereby specifying 2-byte address data indicating the top address of the data table. This configuration allows the amount of program description to be reduced compared to the case where 2-byte address data is specified in association with a label, and therefore the program capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. In addition, this can be applied to data tables whose top addresses are other than the address with the upper byte of "1AH", so it is possible to realize a label specification method that is more versatile than the above-mentioned 24th embodiment.

<Regarding control process of main control device in modified example of twenty-fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to Fig. 894, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this modification will be described. In this modification, in comparison with the above-mentioned 24th embodiment, the variation pattern acquisition process 8 (see Fig. 881) is replaced with the variation pattern acquisition process 11 (S45
The only difference is that the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 11 (S451) is executed. Details of this fluctuation pattern acquisition process 11 (S451) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 894 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 11 (S451). This fluctuation pattern acquisition process 11 (S451) is a process for acquiring a fluctuation pattern type corresponding to a pattern selection offset value from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, similar to the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 8 (see FIG. 881) in the above-mentioned 24th embodiment. Of the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 11 (S451) in the modified example of the 24th embodiment, S220
In each process of S2201, S2202, and S2204 to S2208, the process of S2201, S2202, and S2204 to S2208 in the fluctuation pattern acquisition process (see FIG. 881) in the 24th embodiment is performed.
The same processes as those in steps S204 to S2208 are executed.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern acquisition process 11 (see FIG. 894) in this modified example, S2202
When the process is completed, the label "HP_TBL" specifying the head address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f is set to "1A00H", which is the 2-byte address data (table address data) indicating the head address of the data table area stored in the first table address register 210i1 and the second table address register 210i2.
The address obtained by adding the address data corresponding to the address is set as the transfer source address (S
2231) and proceed to S2204.

In this manner, in this modified example, the configuration is such that the differential address (offset address) from the start address of the data table area is associated with each of the various labels that specify the start address of each of the data tables. By configuring in this manner, the amount of program description can be reduced compared to when two-byte address data is associated with a label, and the program capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. Also,
Since this can also be applied to data tables whose leading address is other than an address whose upper byte is "1AH", it is possible to realize a label definition method that is more versatile than the 24th embodiment described above.

In this modification, address data indicating the head address of the data table area is stored in the first table address register 210i1 and the second table address register 210i2.
In the above embodiment, the data is stored in advance in the first table address register 210i1 and the second table address register 210i2, and the data indicating the difference address (offset address) from the head address of the data table area is associated with the label indicating each data table, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the head address of a data table that is referred to relatively frequently (e.g., the first winning random number table 202a) may be stored in the first table address register 210i1 and the second table address register 210i2.
i2, and data indicating the address (offset address) of the difference from the start address of the first winning random number table 202a may be associated with the label indicating each data table. By using a configuration that is not limited to the start address of the data table area, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the twenty-third to twenty-sixth embodiments and their modifications, a single set value data or address data is generated using data stored as an initial value in the register 210 and data read from a data table or a program (label), but the target for storing a part of the generated data is not limited to the register 210. For example, the data may be predefined in a predetermined storage area of the ROM 202, or may be stored in the RAM 202.
03 as an initial value. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration of the register 210 from becoming complicated.

In the above-mentioned 23rd to 26th embodiments and their modified examples, one set value data or address data is generated using data stored as an initial value in the register 210 and data read from a data table or a program (label), but it is not necessary to set it as an initial value. For example, data may be stored (overwritten) in the corresponding register of the register 210 at the stage when it is determined to execute a process to read the set value data or address data. With this configuration, while the process to read the set value data or address data is not being executed, the register for storing data indicating a part of the set value data or address data can be used for other control, so that each register constituting the register 210 can be used more efficiently.

In the above twenty-third to twenty-sixth embodiments and their modifications, a dedicated register is provided for each type of data, such as a register in which data constituting part of the setting value data is set as an initial value, and a register in which data constituting part of the address data is set as an initial value, but this is not limited to the above. For example, even if data is used for different purposes, if the data has a common value, the data may be stored in only one register. Specifically, for example, in the modification of the twenty-fourth embodiment, register 2 for setting value 1 is provided.
Since both the first register 210i1 and the second register 210i2 for table address are set to "00H" as the initial value (see FIG. 892), either one of them (for example, the register 2 for setting value 1)
10h1) is deleted, and "00H" is written to the second table address register 210i2 both in the process of reading the setting value data and in the process of reading the top address of the data table area.
The data may be read out and used for processing. With this configuration, the register 210 can be used more efficiently.

Of the technical ideas of each of the above embodiments, the control example using the data table and register in the main control device 110 can be diverted to other control devices. Specifically, for example, it may be diverted to the control processing in various control devices such as the dispensing control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, etc.

In the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, a different table is selected as a table to be referred to in order to select the variation type data according to the type of ball entry into which the ball entered and the number of reserved balls, etc. However, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, a different table may be selected from the variation type selection table 202d according to the game situation. This makes it possible to diversify the variation pattern presentation for notifying the big win of the special symbol, and therefore makes it possible to prevent the presentation from becoming monotonous.

In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments, the setting of the variation pattern when the jackpot is won, the setting during the jackpot, and the setting when the jackpot ends are performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the setting is performed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above embodiments, the game result setting table 202e, the status setting table 202f, etc. are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, but this is not limited to this. For example, they may be configured to be provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The following configuration may also be used as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in each of the embodiments described above.

<About the configuration of high probability states of normal symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in some cases where a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a high probability state for a normal pattern can be set after the jackpot game ends. However, a setting trigger other than a jackpot win in a special pattern lottery may be provided as a setting trigger for setting a high probability state for a normal pattern. For example, a setting trigger for setting a high probability state for a normal pattern may be established when the number of times that a special pattern variation is executed without winning a jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, twice the denominator value of the probability of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery executed in a low probability state for a special pattern).

By configuring it in this way, when a situation occurs in which special pattern lotteries (variations) that do not result in a jackpot are repeatedly performed, that is, a situation in which the player's motivation to play is likely to decrease, a special benefit (a high probability state for normal patterns) that is advantageous to the player can be given, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly.

In addition, the number of times of execution of the special pattern variation, which is an element for establishing the above-mentioned setting opportunity, may be configured to be variable according to the game situation, and for example, the number of times of execution of the special pattern variation that establishes the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern may be configured to be different according to the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern) is set and when the second probability state (high probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern) is set, that is, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the number of times of execution of the special pattern variation that establishes the setting opportunity may be configured to be different according to the type of game state. By configuring in this way, the expectation degree that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set can be made different according to the set game state.

In this case, since the second probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set is easier to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than the normal state in which the low probability state of the special symbol is set (because the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery is higher), it is preferable to configure the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol to be established with fewer special symbol fluctuations when the second probability variable state is set than when the normal state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the ease of establishing the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol the same regardless of which game state is set.

On the other hand, when the normal state is set, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be established with fewer execution times of the special symbol variation than when the second probability variable state is set. In other words, in the normal state (the most unfavorable game state for the player) in which the probability state of the special symbol is also set to a low probability state disadvantageous to the player, the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol can be easily established, so that it is difficult for the player to play an excessively disadvantageous game. In addition, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is easily set based on the setting opportunity established when the execution times of the special symbol variation reach a predetermined number, it is easy to provide the player with a surprising game in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set without winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the case where the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern is configured to differ depending on the set game state, a game state in which the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern cannot (is difficult to) be established may be provided in some of the set game states. For example, a configuration may be made in which multiple types (e.g., normal AA, normal AB) can be set as normal states (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), and the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern is more easily established when the game state of normal AB is set than when the game state of normal AA is set.

By configuring in this way, a player playing a game machine in which a normal state is set can predict when a high probability state of a normal pattern will be set, or whether the game state is one in which a setting opportunity for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern can be established, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early on. In this case, it is preferable to configure the game machine to be able to execute a performance that allows the player to predict whether the currently set game state (game state for each type) is a game state in which a setting opportunity for a high probability state of a normal pattern is likely to be established.

Furthermore, in gaming machines having game specifications in which the benefits (jackpot game content and game state set at the end of the jackpot game) given to the player when he or she wins a jackpot in a special pattern lottery are more likely to be advantageous to the player in a game state in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set than in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set, it is preferable to configure the machine to be able to execute presentations in which the presentation mode is different based on information indicating the remaining period (remaining number of special pattern changes) until the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of a normal pattern is established, and information indicating the result of the special pattern lottery (or information indicating the pre-determination result (pre-reading result) that determines the lottery result of the special pattern lottery in advance).

For example, when determining the presentation mode of an effect (e.g., a reach effect) that is more likely to be executed when a jackpot has been won in a special pattern lottery than when a jackpot has not been won, the remaining period (remaining number of special pattern changes) until a setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern is realized is referenced, and different presentation modes are determined when the remaining number of special pattern changes is small, i.e., a first situation in which a high probability state of a normal pattern will soon be set, and when the remaining number of special pattern changes is large, i.e., a second situation in which a high probability state of a normal pattern will not be set for some time, and the presentation mode of the reach effect can be determined so that a reach effect is more likely to be executed in a presentation mode that can inform the player that the first situation is more advantageous than the second situation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute reach effects in different presentation modes depending on the timing when the reach effect for suggesting a big win is executed and the timing when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the reach effect can be executed in various presentation modes, and the presentation effect can be improved. In addition, based on the presentation mode of the executed reach effect, it is possible to make the player understand the degree of advantage of the timing when the reach effect is executed (whether it is immediately before the high probability state of the normal pattern is set or not), so that it is possible to provide a novel presentation that makes the player expect that the presentation result of the currently executed reach effect will be a miss (a presentation result indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss).

In addition, in a case where a high probability state for normal symbols is set when a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot while a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and the high probability state for normal symbols is more likely to be set after the end of a jackpot game when a jackpot is won during a high probability state for normal symbols than when a jackpot is won during a low probability state for normal symbols, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect) that is more likely to be executed when a jackpot is won in a different symbol lottery than when a jackpot is not won, as a variable effect for showing the result of the special symbol lottery; and
As the presentation mode of the specific presentation, there are a first presentation mode which suggests that a jackpot has been won in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a second presentation mode which simply suggests that a jackpot has been won.
The frequency of execution of the specific performance of the first performance mode may be fixed regardless of the remaining number of times of special pattern fluctuation until the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, and the frequency of execution of the specific performance of the second performance mode may be lowered as the remaining number of times of special pattern fluctuation until the high probability state of the normal pattern is set decreases.

By configuring in this way, the closer to the number of special pattern variations in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set, the higher the selection rate of the first performance mode when a specific performance is executed.
Even when the specific performance is executed when the number of times of special symbol variation since the end of the previous big win game is between 90 and 99 times, the player can be made interested in the performance result of the specific performance without being discouraged.

Also, a number of times lottery means for determining the number of times of execution of the special pattern variation that establishes the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern may be provided, and the number of times of execution of the special pattern variation that establishes the setting trigger may be determined based on the lottery result of the number of times lottery means. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure so that the number of times of execution of the special pattern variation can be determined to be "0" as the number of times of execution that is most likely to establish the setting trigger as the range of the number of times that can be determined by the number of times lottery means.

By configuring in this way, even if a jackpot type in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set is set, it is possible to set a game state that is substantially the same as when a high probability state of normal symbols is set.

In other words, even when the same game state is set and the same jackpot type (a jackpot type in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set) is set, the game state (probability state of a normal pattern) that is set after the jackpot game ends (until the first special pattern variation is executed) can be made different based on the lottery result of the number of times lottery means.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game state that will be set after the big win game ends, and to provide the player with an element of surprise.

The timing at which the number of times lottery means is executed may be set appropriately. For example,
The timing may be when the big win game ends, or the number of times lottery means may be configured to be executable each time the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). In this case, if the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation determined as the lottery result of the number of times lottery means has already elapsed, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be set immediately after the lottery by the number of times lottery means is executed.

In this way, by configuring the number of times lottery means to be executable every time the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is possible to vary the contents of the setting trigger (the number of special symbol variations that establish the setting trigger) for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol during the period in which the special symbol variation is performed multiple times without winning the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the high probability state of the normal symbol will be set. In this case, it is preferable to vary the range of the execution number of the special symbol variation determined by the lottery based on the number of times the number of times lottery is performed by the number of times lottery means from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the next jackpot, and specifically, it is preferable to configure it so that the more the number of times lottery is performed, the easier it is to set the high probability state of the normal symbol. By configuring it in this way, the more the number of special symbol variations performed between jackpots increases, the easier it is to set the high probability state of the normal symbol, so that it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the player's desire to play.

In addition, in the above-mentioned frequency selection means, a selection is performed to determine the number of times of special pattern variation that will create a setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, the contents of the frequency selection means may be configured to determine the number of times of special pattern variation required from when the frequency selection means is executed until a high probability state of a normal pattern is set.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine configured to execute a number of times lottery means each time a special pattern variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), that is, configured so that the number of times lottery means can be executed when a predetermined lottery condition is established based on the execution of a special pattern variation, a regular pattern high probability lottery means may be provided instead of the above-mentioned number of times lottery means, and when this regular pattern high probability lottery means is won, a high probability state of the regular pattern may be set.

In addition, a further setting trigger may be provided as a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols. For example, a measuring means may be provided which measures the number of times the result of the special symbol lottery results in a specific lottery result other than a jackpot win (for example, a small jackpot win), and when the measurement result of the measuring means is a predetermined measurement result, a setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established. Alternatively, when the game result (increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed) since the end of the previous jackpot game exceeds a predetermined range (for example, when the rate of decrease in the number of balls dispensed is extremely drastic), a setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols may be established.

In addition, the degree of establishment (ease of establishment) of the setting trigger that sets the high probability state of the normal pattern,
It may be different depending on past game results. For example, if past winning jackpots are biased toward jackpots that are disadvantageous to the player, that is, if a game that is disadvantageous to the player has continued for a certain period of time, it may be configured so that the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is more likely to be established, or if a game that is advantageous to the player has continued for a certain period of time, it may be configured so that the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is less likely to be established. By configuring in this way, excessively disadvantageous games or
This makes it possible to prevent excessively advantageous games from being continuously played.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when a time-saving end condition is established in a state where a time-saving state (a low probability state of a special pattern, a high probability state of a normal pattern) is set, a normal state (a low probability state of a special pattern, a low probability state of a normal pattern) is set. Then, as the time-saving end condition, a time-saving end condition that is established when the special pattern variation count is executed (is executed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

The content of the time-saving end condition is not limited to this, and for example, different time-saving end conditions may be set depending on the type of special pattern. Specifically, the time-saving end condition may be configured to be met when the first special pattern has changed a first number of times, when the second special pattern has changed a second number of times, or when the combined number of times the first special pattern has changed and the second special pattern has changed a third number of times, etc.

In addition, when setting a time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern changes,
The number of times of special pattern variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied may be configured to be able to be set to various numbers, and as shown in each embodiment described above, other than when the number of times of special pattern variation reaches 100 times, the time-saving end condition may be satisfied when the number of times of special pattern variation is executed more than 100 times (e.g., 200 times), or when the number of times of special pattern variation is executed less than 100 times (e.g., 50 times). Furthermore,
Depending on the setting trigger (such as the type of big win or the number of special pattern changes) that is established to set the time-saving state, the content of the time-saving end condition may be different, and it may be different from the case where one setting trigger is established.
It is preferable to configure the number of special symbol variations that will cause the time-saving end condition to be satisfied to be smaller so that the time-saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied when another setting trigger is satisfied. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state will end, and to make the player interested in which setting trigger was satisfied to set the time-saving state.

In addition, factors other than the number of times the special pattern variation is performed may be used as elements for establishing the time-saving end condition. For example, the time-saving end condition may be configured to be established when the number of times the special pattern lottery result is a specific lottery result (small win) reaches a predetermined number.

In addition, the timing for ending the time-saving state based on the establishment of the time-saving ending condition may be the start timing of the corresponding special symbol variation (lottery), the stop timing of the corresponding special symbol variation, or a specific timing until the next special symbol lottery of the corresponding special symbol variation is executed. Furthermore, the time-saving state may be ended at the start timing or end timing of a winning game (big win game, small win game), or the start timing or stop timing of a normal symbol variation, or the start timing or end timing of a normal winning game.

In this case, the time-saving state may be terminated at the same timing regardless of which time-saving end condition is satisfied, or may be terminated at different timings depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is satisfied. For example, when the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of times that the special pattern variation is performed, the time-saving state may be terminated at a predetermined timing related to the special pattern variation, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied based on the result of the special pattern lottery (such as winning a small prize), the time-saving state may be terminated at a predetermined timing related to the winning game (small prize game, big prize game) that is executed based on the lottery result. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state is terminated can be made different depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is satisfied, making it more difficult to understand how long the time-saving state will continue.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the second probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state, the game is executed with a gameplay that makes it possible to increase the number of balls dispensed without winning a jackpot (a gameplay that makes it possible to increase the number of balls dispensed by frequently occurring small jackpot games). However, by using a different gameplay as a gameplay that makes it possible to increase the number of balls dispensed without winning a jackpot, it is also possible to configure the game so that it is possible to increase the number of balls dispensed even when another game state is set.

For example, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set, a large number of prize balls may be set as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters an entrance (e.g., the right first entrance 64b2) that is easy for the ball to enter, so that when a high probability state of normal symbols is set, it is possible to increase the number of balls paid out without winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, a player can play a game aiming to win a jackpot with a special symbol and a game aiming to win a jackpot with a normal symbol at the same time, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the length of the normal pattern change time may be made different between the first game state (time-saving state) in which a high probability state for normal patterns is set and the second game state (high probability state) in order to make the number of balls output per unit time different, or the length of the period in which the ball can actually enter the right first ball entry port 64b2 during the game period of the normal pattern winning game that is executed when a normal pattern is won may be made different, and the first game state may be configured to make it possible to win more balls per unit time than the second game state.

In addition, for a gaming machine that has the ability to increase the number of balls without winning a jackpot when a high probability state of normal symbols is set, it is preferable to provide the above-mentioned setting trigger (a setting trigger established based on the number of times of special symbol variation) as a setting trigger for setting the high probability state of normal symbols. This makes it possible to set a high probability state of normal symbols for a player who is performing special symbol variation (lottery) for a long period of time without winning a jackpot in the normal state, which is a low probability state of normal symbols, and to play a game (rescue game) that increases the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of a game that results in an excessively disadvantageous game result for the player.

As described above, in a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), a configuration that can increase the number of balls paid out by playing without winning a jackpot can be configured, for example, so that the number of prize balls paid out is equal to or slightly (in the range of about 1 to 1.2 times the number of balls fired) greater than the number of balls continuously fired during the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, even in a gaming machine with a gaming specification that makes it easy to play for a long time during the time-saving state (for example, a gaming specification with a low probability of winning a jackpot for special symbols or a gaming specification with a relatively long fluctuation time set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the time-saving state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play during a long-lasting time-saving state.

Although the configuration for the high probability state of the normal symbol has been described above, the same content may be applied as the configuration for the high probability state of the special symbol. In this case, it is sufficient to apply the configuration of the content in which the element corresponding to the normal symbol in the above content is changed to the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the probability state of the special symbol (low probability state, high probability state) is set, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the configuration of the above content may be used for both the normal symbol and the special symbol.

<About the configuration of the high probability state of special symbols>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the same ratio is predefined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol as the ratio at which the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to a state in which the jackpot type that can set the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends is set (
The system may be configured so that, in a jackpot game in which the player has acquired the right to set a high probability state of a special symbol, the ball is passed through a specific area during the jackpot game to set a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot game executed based on winning the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot game executed based on winning the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery may be configured to have different execution rates for an advantageous jackpot game in which it is possible to pass the ball through the specific area during the jackpot game and an unfavorable jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass the ball through the specific area during the jackpot game.

By configuring in this manner, even if the same ratio is pre-specified for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern as the ratio at which a high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make the ratio at which the high probability state of the special pattern is actually set different between when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Other configurations may be used, for example, the ratio of the high probability state of the special symbol being set after the end of the jackpot game may be predefined to be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol. In this case, the ratio of the high probability state of the special symbol being set after the end of the jackpot game may be predefined to be different for the same special symbol type depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win (game state at the time of the win).

Also, a predetermined setting lottery may be configured to be executable, and information may be provided to determine whether or not a high probability state of the special symbol is set for each jackpot type after the jackpot game ends based on the result of the setting lottery. In other words, the type of game state that is set when a predetermined jackpot type is set may be configured to differ depending on the game situation. In this case, the game situation may be:
For example, it is preferable to configure the system so that the high probability state of the special symbol is more likely to be set when the judgment result of the game situation is disadvantageous to the player, based on the winning situation of the jackpot within a predetermined period, the number of times the special symbol has changed between jackpot games, the amount of balls won by the player, etc., than when the judgment result is advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a game that results in an excessively disadvantageous game result for the player.

Similarly, when a jackpot is won in a state where a high probability state of a special symbol is set, the ratio of a low probability state of a special symbol being set after the end of the jackpot game is also set.
The above-mentioned contents may be applied to the configuration.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the same ratio is predefined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol as the ratio at which the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game according to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot type that can set the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game is set (the high probability state of the special symbol is set) may be used. In a jackpot game in which the player has acquired the right to win a jackpot, a low probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game due to the ball not passing through the specific area during the jackpot game, and a jackpot game executed based on winning the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot game executed based on winning the second special symbol lottery may be configured to have different execution rates for an advantageous jackpot game in which it is possible to pass the ball through the specific area during the jackpot game and an unfavorable jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass the ball through the specific area during the jackpot game.

By configuring in this manner, even if the same rate is pre-specified for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern as the rate at which the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make the rate at which the low probability state of the special pattern is actually set different between when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Other configurations may be used, for example, the ratio of the low probability state of the special symbol being set after the end of a jackpot game in which the special symbol is won during the high probability state of the special symbol may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol. In this case, the ratio of the low probability state of the special symbol being set after the end of a jackpot game in which the special symbol is won during the high probability state of the special symbol may be different for the same special symbol type depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot (game state at the time of winning).

Also, a predetermined setting lottery may be configured to be executable, and information may be provided to determine whether or not a low probability state of the special symbol is set for each jackpot type after the jackpot game ends based on the result of the setting lottery. In other words, the type of game state that is set when a predetermined jackpot type is set may be configured to differ depending on the game situation. In this case, the game situation may be:
For example, it is preferable to configure the system so that the low probability state of the special symbol is more likely to be set when the judgment result of the game situation is favorable to the player, based on the winning situation of the jackpot within a predetermined period, the number of times the special symbol changes between jackpot games, the amount of balls won by the player, etc., than when the judgment result is unfavorable to the player. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a game that results in an excessively favorable game result for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, an end condition based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery can be set as an end condition for ending the high probability state of a special pattern, and when a high probability state of a special pattern is set, the high probability state of a special pattern is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won. However, other end conditions may be set, and the configuration used as the time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of a normal pattern in each of the above-mentioned embodiments may also be used as an end condition for ending the high probability state of a special pattern.

Specifically, the number of times the special symbol changes after the high probability state of the special symbol is set is a specific number (
For example, the system may be configured so that the end condition is met when the number of times of occurrence of the special symbol is reached 150 times. This makes it possible to end the high probability state of the special symbol, which has a high probability of winning a jackpot, without winning the jackpot, so that a player playing a game state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set can be motivated to play in order to win the jackpot before the end condition is met.

In addition, the gaming machine may be configured to have both the above-mentioned end condition and the time-saving end condition, and in this case, it is preferable to configure the number of times the special pattern variation is executed as the end condition and the number of times the special pattern variation is executed as the time-saving end condition to be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the game state every time each end condition is established, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not get boring.

Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the number of times of special symbol variation set as the end condition to be able to set one of a plurality of times of variation including at least a first number of variations and a second number of variations different from the first number of variations. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing when the end condition is established.

In addition, when configuring a gaming machine that is configured to be able to vary the number of times of special symbol fluctuations set as an end condition, and configuring an end condition related to the number of times of special symbol fluctuations to be able to be set, it is preferable to configure the first number of times of special symbol fluctuations set as the end condition to be a number of times less than the number of times of special symbol fluctuations at which the time-saving end condition is established, and the second number of times of fluctuations different from the first number of times of fluctuations to be a number of times more than the number of times of special symbol fluctuations at which the time-saving end condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate between the end condition and the time-saving end condition, whichever is established first, depending on the end condition that is set.

Therefore, for example, in a situation where a first probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the next game state to be set can be either a second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) depending on the content of the set ending condition, so that a player can be made to play a game that allows him/her to predict the next game state to be set while being interested in the content of the set ending condition, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In this way, in a gaming machine configured to be able to set different contents as the end condition or the time-saving end condition, it is preferable to configure it to be able to execute a notification effect that can notify the player of information showing the contents of each currently set condition. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the player information that allows him to predict the timing when each condition may be realized and the contents of each set condition, so that it is possible to make the player interested in the notification effect that is executed and to improve the presentation effect.

As described above, the termination condition for terminating the high probability state of the special pattern is based on the number of times the special pattern variation is performed. However, the termination condition is not limited to this, and may be, for example,
The lottery (falling lottery) for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state may be configured to be executable separately from the special symbol jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery), and the end condition may be established when the falling lottery is won. Even in this case, the probability of winning the falling lottery and the number of times the falling lottery is executed during the period in which one special symbol lottery is executed may be configured to be different, so that the ease of establishing the end condition during the high probability state of the special symbol may be different. This makes it difficult for the player to know the timing at which the end condition is established after the high probability state of the special symbol is set.

<About the function that sets an upper limit on the period during which a high probability state can be continuously set (limit function)>
In a gaming machine in which high and low probability states can be set as probability states for special patterns, and high and low probability states can be set as probability states for normal patterns, and in which game states of different degrees of advantage can be set depending on the probability state that is set, an upper limit is set on the number of times that a probability state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability state) can be set in succession, and a function (limit function) is provided that, when the upper limit is reached, forcibly sets the probability state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability state) to a probability state that is less advantageous than that probability state (e.g., a low probability state), thereby preventing game states that are excessively advantageous to the player from being set and preventing the player from playing a game that is excessively advantageous to the player.

In a gaming machine having such a limit function, the activation conditions for the limit function may be configured to differ depending on the limit setting conditions that are met. Specifically, based on the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won, an activation condition may be selected and set from among a first activation condition that makes the limit function more likely to be activated, and a second activation condition that is less likely to be activated than the first activation condition.

Specifically, in a gaming machine having a special probability limit function that sets an upper limit on the number of times a high probability state of a special pattern is set in succession and forcibly sets a low probability state of the special pattern when the upper limit is reached, it is preferable to configure the upper limit value until the special probability limit function is activated to be different and setable depending on the type of jackpot, and to configure the activation conditions to be set so that the upper limit is "5 times" when a first jackpot type is set, and the upper limit is "3 times" when a second jackpot type different from the first jackpot type is set.

By configuring in this manner, the length of the advantageous play period during which the player can continue playing in an advantageous play state can be made to differ based on the type of jackpot that is set, depending on the value set as the activation condition.

In the above example, the limit function for the high probability state of the special symbol (probability change limit function) was explained, but the above content may be applied to the limit function for the high probability state of the normal symbol (time-saving limit function), and the above content may be applied in combination to each limit. Furthermore, for a gaming machine with a gaming specification in which a low probability state is more advantageous to a player than a high probability state as a probability state of a symbol type, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit on the number of times the low probability state is set consecutively, and forces the high probability state to be set when the upper limit is reached.

In addition, in the above example, the limit function is used for the purpose of suppressing the execution of a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, but the limit function may be used for other purposes, for example, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit on the number of times that a game state (low probability state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set consecutively, and when the upper limit is reached, a game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player is forcibly set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game that is excessively disadvantageous to the player.

<Configuration that allows winning games to be played based on the ball passing through a specific area>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a jackpot game can be executed. A different execution trigger may be provided as an execution trigger for a jackpot game advantageous to a player. For example, a game machine (so-called two-type specification) may be configured to have a ball-entering means through which a ball can enter, a variable means that opens in a variable pattern that can be changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state when an operating condition is established based on the ball entering the ball-entering means, a second ball-entering means that is easier for the ball to enter when the variable means is changed to the first state than when the variable means is changed to the second state, a specific area through which the ball that entered the second ball-entering means can pass, and a jackpot game execution means that can execute a jackpot game based on the ball passing through the specific area, i.e., a jackpot game execution trigger is established based on the ball passing through the specific area. With this configuration, whether or not a big win game will be executed is determined by the behavior of the ball that has entered the second ball entry means, allowing the player to enjoy the behavior of the ball.

In addition, in such a gaming machine with two types of specifications, the operating condition may be established based on the ball entering the ball entry means described above, or an operation lottery may be executed based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and the operating condition may be established if the operation lottery is won. In the former case, the operating condition is always established when the ball enters the ball entry means, making it easier for players to become interested in the behavior of the ball. On the other hand, in the latter case, the operating condition is not established unless the operation lottery is won, even if the ball enters the ball entry means, so the frequency of balls entering the ball entry means can be increased.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine with the two types of specifications described above, multiple flow paths may be provided as flow paths for balls that have entered the second ball entry means, including at least a first flow path that can pass through a specific area and a second flow path that has more difficulty passing through the specific area than the first flow path, and a distribution means may be provided that can distribute balls that have entered the second ball entry means to one of the multiple flow paths, and the proportion of balls that have entered the second ball entry means that pass through the specific area may be varied depending on the distribution status of the distribution means.

By configuring in this manner, the degree to which a trigger for executing a big win game is realized can be varied depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, so that it is possible to generate interest in the timing at which the ball that enters the second ball entry means will reach the distribution means.

As described above, in a gaming machine having a configuration that can vary the degree to which a trigger for executing a jackpot game is realized depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, the distribution operation content of the distribution means may be configured to always execute a certain operation after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, or may be configured to always execute a certain operation based on either the entry of a ball into the ball entry means, the establishment of an operating condition, or the entry of a ball into the second ball entry means.

Furthermore, the distribution operation content of the distribution means may be made different depending on the conditions to be met. For example, depending on the type of winning in the case of winning the action lottery, the distribution means may be configured to determine one of a plurality of distribution operation contents including at least a first distribution operation content that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area and a second distribution operation content that makes it more difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area than the first distribution operation content, and to operate the distribution means.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine (so-called type 1/type 2 mixed specification) that is configured so that the trigger for the execution of a jackpot game can be established in either case of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery or when the ball passes through a specific area, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be extended by the ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery; in other words, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be continued without being terminated midway by the ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery. In other words, if the ball does not pass through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery,
The system may be configured so that a jackpot game currently in progress is not extended (is forcibly terminated).

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player interested in both the results of the special symbol lottery and the behavior of the ball flowing down toward the specific area.

<About the structure for changing the falling direction of the ball>
The nail members used in the above-described embodiments as a configuration for changing the flow direction (fall direction) of the balls flowing down the play area formed on the play board 13 of the pachinko machine 10,
That is, in addition to a component capable of changing the direction in which the ball flows downward without going against the direction of gravity, a means for moving the ball in a direction other than the direction of gravity (e.g., an upward direction) may be provided. For example, a moving means for moving (e.g., lifting) the ball in a direction other than the direction of gravity (e.g., an upward direction) may be provided by using an electrical drive source or by using the movement energy of another ball.

By configuring in this way, the direction of movement of the ball flowing down the play area can be various directions, including directions different from the direction of gravity, so that the movement of the ball can be unexpected for the player who is watching the behavior of the ball. Also, it is possible to move (rise) the ball that has reached the lowest point of the play area, i.e., the ball that has not entered the ball entrance that gives the player a special privilege, to the upstream side of the play area, so that the player can have high expectations for the behavior of one ball until the end.

Furthermore, for example, in a gaming machine in which a gate member through which a ball can pass is provided in the gaming area and a predetermined bonus can be awarded when the ball passes through the gate member, a moving means may be provided in the area where the ball can reach after passing through the gate member, and the moving means may be configured to eject the ball above the gate member. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which a single ball can award a player multiple bonuses.

The above-mentioned moving means may be provided in an area where the ball is likely to enter during a winning game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) (for example, an internal area of the winning device that opens during a winning game). By configuring in this way, it is possible to raise the ball inside the winning device, so that, for example, in a gaming machine that is configured to be able to give a player an advantageous benefit by having a ball pass through a specific area during a specific round of a jackpot game, a ball that entered the winning device in a round prior to the specific round can be raised by the moving means and held there for a predetermined period of time.
It is possible to configure the balls to be allowed to pass through a specific area during a specific round depending on the timing at which the balls are discharged.

In this way, a moving means may be used to make the ball stay within the specific area for a predetermined period of time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the ball will be discharged from within the specific area.

<Configuration that acts on the entry of a ball into one entry hole to open another entry hole>
The machine is provided with a first operating port through which game balls can enter, and a first operating member which, in response to a game ball entering the first operating port, operates to a first state in which game balls can enter the first operating port more easily, and is configured such that, in response to a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., two) entering the first operating port, the first operating member operates to a second state in which game balls can enter the first operating port more difficultly than in the first state.

A second operating member is provided which operates to a third state in which the game ball can enter a second operating port different from the first operating port when the game ball that has entered the first operating port enters a specific area. The second operating member is configured to operate to a fourth state in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter the second operating port than in the third state when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one) enter the second operating port.

With this configuration, based on the entry of a game ball into the first actuation port, the second actuation member is actuated to the third state, making it possible to allow a game ball to enter the second actuation port, and by allowing one game ball to enter the second actuation port in this state, the second actuation member is actuated to the fourth state. Then, by allowing the first actuation member to again enter a game ball into the first actuation port which is in the first state, the second actuation member is actuated again to the third state, making it possible to allow a game ball to enter the second actuation port.

More specifically, when a game ball is inserted into the first operating port while the first operating member is in the second state, a maximum of four balls can be inserted into the operating ports (first operating port, second operating port). Furthermore, a first winning/losing lottery (lottery for a first normal symbol) is executed based on the game ball that entered the second operating port entering the second specific area, and when the result of the first winning/losing lottery is a winning (probability of winning is about 1/2), the first normal electric device capable of restricting the entry of game balls into the first variable ball entry means is opened (changed to a state in which the entry of game balls into the first variable ball entry means is permitted) until a first closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have elapsed or four balls have entered) is established. Then, a second winning/losing lottery (second normal pattern lottery) is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball that has entered the first variable ball entry means has entered a third specific area where entry is possible, and if the result of the second winning/losing lottery is a winning/losing lottery (probability of winning: approximately 1/1), the second normal electric device that can restrict the entry of gaming balls into the second variable ball entry means is opened (changed to a state that allows the entry of gaming balls into the second variable ball entry means) until a second closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed, or 4 balls have entered) is met. Then, a third winning/losing lottery (third normal pattern lottery) is executed based on the fact that the gaming ball that has entered the second variable ball entry means has entered a fourth specific area where entry is possible, and if the result of the third winning/losing lottery is a winning/losing lottery (probability of winning: approximately 1/1), the third normal electric device that can restrict the entry of gaming balls into the third variable ball entry means is opened (changed to a state that allows the entry of gaming balls into the second variable ball entry means) until a third closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed, or 10
It is preferable to configure the device so that the opening operation (changing the third variable ball entry means to a state allowing the entry of a game ball into the third variable ball entry means) is performed until a winning combination (a winning combination) is achieved.

In this case, the maximum number of winning game balls that can be entered into each operation port based on the game ball entering (winning) into the first operation port is set to the maximum number of winning games into the first operation port, "2";
The maximum number of winning entries may be calculated as "4" by adding "2" obtained by multiplying the maximum number of winning entries into the first operating port (2) by the maximum number of winning entries into the second operating port that can be won each time a game ball is won into the first operating port, or the maximum number of winning entries may be calculated as the number of game balls that can be won into each operating port during the period until a winning game (a winning game using multiple ordinary electric devices) that is executed based on a game ball being won (winning) into the first operating port is executed, as the maximum number of winning entries, i.e., the number of winning entries required to execute one winning game ("2" obtained by adding the number of balls that enter the first operating port "1" to the number of balls that enter the second operating port "1"). Alternatively, the maximum number of winning entries may be calculated by adding a value obtained by dividing the maximum number of winning entries into the first operating port by the maximum number of winning entries into the second operating port that can be won each time a game ball is won into the first operating port.

The winning game may be terminated when the maximum number of winnings reaches a predetermined limit, and the value of the maximum number of winnings calculated when determining whether the limit has been reached based on the establishment of a switching condition may be switched to a value (maximum number of winnings) calculated by the various calculation formulas described above for reference. If the switched value does not reach the limit, the winning game may be extended until the maximum number of winnings after the switching reaches the limit.

In other words, using various calculation formulas that can vary the calculated values, the maximum number of winning entries for each operating port is specified so that when a game ball enters the first operating port, the number of game balls that can be made to win into multiple operating ports in a series of games is set to a limited number, and the calculation formula for determining the maximum number of winning entries can be specified differently depending on the conditions, and a winning game can be executed based on the maximum number of winning entries for each operating port specified corresponding to the specified calculation formula.

By configuring in this manner, the content of the winning game (the total number of winnings into each operating port and each variable ball entry means) can be varied depending on the specified calculation formula.

In addition, the value of the above-mentioned maximum number of winnings may be configured to be different depending on the conditions. For example, when a first condition is met, the maximum number of winnings for the first operating port is changed from "2" to "3," and when a second condition different from the first condition is met, the maximum number of winnings for the first operating port is changed to "
By configuring in this way, the winning game (
Since the content of the game (wherein game balls are inserted into each operating port and variable ball entry means) can be varied, the player can play the game while hoping that advantageous conditions (conditions set so that the total number of prize balls awarded during a winning game will be large) that are favorable to the player will be met, and that a winning game will be executed when the advantageous conditions are met.

<Regarding gaming machines that allow multiple setting levels>
There are multiple stages of combinations of probabilities (commonly known as settings) related to the jackpot lottery,
It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine configured so that settings can be changed at the gaming parlor.

In addition, as a representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings, there is one in which the combination of jackpot probabilities (the combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a special probability state) can be set to one of multiple levels (for example, six levels), but this is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined when a jackpot occurs
The present invention may be implemented as a pachinko machine that can vary the ratio of the types of jackpots that are advantageous to the player, or the ratio of the types of jackpots that are disadvantageous to the player, depending on the settings.
For example, the ratio of big wins with many rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of big wins with few rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be varied according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting.
The ratio of big wins that give a small number of time-saving times (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the settings. Furthermore, the ratio of big wins that transition (or are likely to transition) to a favorable game state (for example, a probability state) after the big win is determined may be varied according to the settings.
The rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (for example, normal state) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a type of jackpot is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (and is almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings may be available from 1 to 6, with the most favorable setting being setting 6. In setting 6, when a jackpot occurs, there is a 2% probability that a jackpot with six rounds will be determined, while in other settings, there is a 0% probability.
It may be configured such that a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of .01%. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being set is extremely high when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the rate of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which a jackpot opening (or a role inside the jackpot opening) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of a jackpot game may be provided, so that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the rate at which it is determined is higher) in a specific setting. Also, when the combination of the probability of a jackpot is varied according to the setting, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is for the player, the higher the probability of a jackpot, while in a probability state, the more disadvantageous the setting is for the player, the higher the probability of a jackpot. This configuration is particularly effective in a type of gaming machine in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the number of prize balls paid out is more likely to be greater than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, by applying this configuration to a gaming machine in which the probability state continues until the next jackpot is won and in which the probability state has a high probability of a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability state, the number of draws until the next jackpot is likely to be large, and therefore there are more opportunities to win prize balls as a small jackpot. Therefore, in a probability state, it is easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in pachinko machines with multiple setting values, by changing the set value, a special symbol lottery can be drawn to win (a big win, a small win, etc.).
It is also possible to use a configuration other than one that differs the probability of winning a special pattern lottery. For example, in a gaming machine that can set a first gaming state (low probability state for special patterns) in which a first probability is set as the probability of winning a special pattern lottery, and a second gaming state (high probability state for special patterns) in which a second probability higher than the first probability is set, in which a specific period is set as the period during which the second gaming state continues, for example, a period that continues until the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed reaches a predetermined number, or a period until a predetermined ending lottery (so-called fall-out lottery) is won, the length of the specific period may be configured to differ depending on the set value. For example, the specific period during which the second gaming state continues may be longer when a set value that is advantageous to the player is set than when a set value that is disadvantageous to the player is set.

By configuring in this manner, even without using a configuration that changes the probability of winning the special pattern lottery according to a set value, the frequency of winning the special pattern lottery can be varied according to the set value by varying the length that the second game state continues.

In the above example, a pachinko machine having multiple setting values is configured to be able to set setting values advantageous to the player and setting values disadvantageous to the player regardless of the game situation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various game situations (
For example, among a plurality of types of game states set by a combination of the probability state of a special pattern and the probability state of a normal pattern, a setting value that is advantageous to the player and a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player may be configured to be able to be set in at least one of the game states (a game state in which a specific game state is set, a game state in which a big win game is being executed, and a game state in which a small win game is being executed), or the game content set corresponding to each setting value may be specified so that a case in which a specific setting value is set is more advantageous to the player in a specific game state than a case in which a specified setting value other than the specific setting value is set, and so that a case in which a specified setting value other than the specific setting value is more advantageous to the player in a specified game state other than the specific game state than a case in which a specific setting value is set.

By configuring in this manner, absolute advantages and disadvantages for the set setting values are eliminated, and it is possible to switch the relative degree of advantage of each setting value depending on the game situation being played, so that the player can be motivated to play no matter what setting value is set.

In addition, a player who knows the set value can play the game while expecting a game situation in which the set value is relatively more advantageous than other set values. In other words, it is possible to set different game situations as the game situation desired by the player according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that the player will not quickly become bored of.

In the above example, a configuration for the purpose of varying the degree of advantage of the player according to the set value has been described, but a configuration may be made in which multiple levels of set values are provided for other purposes. For example, a configuration may be made in which the game process until the player is given a benefit corresponding to the degree of advantage varies according to the set value, without changing the degree of advantage of the player. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the probability of winning a jackpot with a special symbol varies according to the set set value, the length of the specified period may be varied according to the set value so that the probability (expectation) of winning a jackpot within a specified period does not vary (does not differ significantly) depending on the set value. For example, when the set value "1" is set, a game in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is 1/10 during a specific period until 10 special symbol lotteries have been executed (
When the set value "6" is set, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is 1/9 during the specific period until the 9th special pattern lottery is executed (the probability of winning the jackpot during the specific period is about 65%).
%) should be configured to be executable.

By configuring it in this way, even if the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is changed according to each setting value, it is possible to change only the game content without significantly changing the degree of advantage to the player. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a variety of games.

In addition, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned multiple setting values to be set (changeable) as part of the process (initial setting process) based on powering on the pachinko machine. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting values from being changed while the pachinko machine is powered on, making it difficult for a player to illegally manipulate the setting values while playing, for example.

In addition, other timings may be used as the timing at which the setting value can be set (changed). For example, the currently set setting value may be changed to a different setting value (a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player) based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the value obtained by subtracting the number of balls used in playing with the pachinko machine from the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine) is equal to or greater than the upper limit as a result of playing with the pachinko machine, or the currently set setting value may be changed to a different setting value (a setting value that is advantageous to the player) based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the value obtained by subtracting the number of balls used in playing with the pachinko machine from the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine) is less than the lower limit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a game that is excessively advantageous or excessively disadvantageous to the player from being executed.

In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 uses the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b
In the above description, the reserved ball count command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value (AN) of the reserved ball count counter 203b for special pattern 1 is updated (i.e., when it increases or decreases), but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the reserved number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (AN) of the reserved ball count counter 203b for special pattern 1 increases in the main control device 110. Also, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command sent from the main control device 110,
The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 is configured to be decreased by 1. This reduces the number of times that the main control device 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above-described embodiments, the first entrance 64 can be entered a maximum of four times.
Although the number 7 is set to be passed a maximum of four times, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable manner based on winning the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

Also, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the symbols as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but may be a display in which the symbols are moved and displayed vertically or along a predetermined path such as an AL shape. Also, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, but may also include, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in various ways in motion or change together with the symbols or separately from the symbols. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol. Also, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between them.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the lottery results of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used, for example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted to the player among the third symbols, and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, a configuration other than a liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display means.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the target area (play area) of the game board 13 is configured to be different depending on the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be different depending on the game state (
In the case of a time-saving state (a time-saving state) and in the case of a game state (a normal state) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state, a left-hand hitting game that targets the left side area of the game board 13 may be executed. Also, a left-hand hitting game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hitting game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means operable by the player, which is determined to have been operated by the player pressing it, but other configurations may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor type operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player touching or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can be determined to have been operated by emitting a predetermined radio wave. Also, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for varying the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation, but it is sufficient to be able to vary the performance mode of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, and for example, the frame button 22
may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or the operation means (frame button 22)
A control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the input terminal 111 and generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. By configuring in this way, even if a plurality of performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the plurality of performance operation means can be centrally managed, so that the performance mode in response to the player's operation on the performance operation means can be smoothly set.

The distribution (ratio) of jackpot types, the number of time-saving and probability-changing times after the jackpot ends (ASAT
The numerical values (probabilities) related to the game specifications, such as the number of times of winning), the probability of winning a big win, the probability of winning a small win, the probability of winning a normal pattern, the number of prize balls for winning each winning slot, and the number of times of the probability limit, are not limited to the numerical values of each embodiment above, and can be changed arbitrarily within the scope that does not change the purpose of each embodiment. By increasing the ratio of advantageous big win types, increasing the number of time-saving times and the number of ASAT times, increasing the probability of winning a big win or a small win, increasing the number of prize balls, or increasing the number of times of the probability limit, the degree of advantage of the player can be further increased. Conversely, by decreasing the ratio of advantageous big win types, decreasing the number of time-saving times and the number of ASAT times, decreasing the probability of winning a big win or a small win, decreasing the number of prize balls, or decreasing the number of times of the probability limit, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiments. For example,
It may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a player is given a predetermined game value by making the ball enter a predetermined area as a necessary condition after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as an AV zone, and the special game state is entered as a necessary condition by making the ball enter the special area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery in multiple stages, and is configured so that the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, as a representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings, there is one in which the combination of jackpot probabilities (the combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a special probability state) can be set to one of multiple levels (for example, six levels), but this is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined when a jackpot occurs
The present invention may be implemented as a pachinko machine that can vary the ratio of the types of jackpots that are advantageous to the player, or the ratio of the types of jackpots that are disadvantageous to the player, depending on the settings.
For example, the ratio of big wins with many rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be varied according to the setting, or the ratio of big wins with few rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be varied according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting.
The ratio of big wins that give a small number of time-saving times (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the settings. Furthermore, the ratio of big wins that transition (or are likely to transition) to a favorable game state (for example, a probability state) after the big win is determined may be varied according to the settings.
The rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (for example, normal state) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a type of jackpot is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (and is almost never determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings may be available from 1 to 6, with the most favorable setting being setting 6. In setting 6, when a jackpot occurs, there is a 2% probability that a jackpot with six rounds will be determined, while in other settings, there is a 0% probability.
It may be configured such that a 6-round jackpot is determined only at a rate of .01%. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being set is extremely high when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the rate of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which a jackpot opening (or a role inside the jackpot opening) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of a jackpot game may be provided, so that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the rate at which it is determined is higher) in a specific setting. Also, when the combination of the probability of a jackpot is varied according to the setting, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is for the player, the higher the probability of a jackpot, while in a probability state, the more disadvantageous the setting is for the player, the higher the probability of a jackpot. This configuration is particularly effective in a type of gaming machine in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the number of prize balls paid out is more likely to be greater than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, by applying this configuration to a gaming machine in which the probability state continues until the next jackpot is won and in which the probability state has a high probability of a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability state, the number of draws until the next jackpot is likely to be large, and therefore there are more opportunities to win prize balls as a small jackpot. Therefore, in a probability state, it is easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in which multiple settings can be set, the type of the variation pattern selection table 202b referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the main control device 110 is changed based on the set setting value, and the variation pattern selection table 222 referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation performance) of the third symbol in the sound lamp control device 113 is changed based on the set setting value.
It is preferable to configure the system so that the type of a is different, or the type of various selection tables to be referred to when selecting the detailed presentation mode to be executed as the variable presentation is different. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the content of the variable presentation to be executed, so that a variable presentation that interests the player can be executed.

In addition, a data table to be referred to when selecting the presentation mode of the operation presentation is
In the case where the operation is performed based on the setting value set to 0, the operation is performed in the following manner:
It is preferable to define the "setting suggestion" presentation mode for suggesting the set setting value so that the selection ratio is the same in each data table used for each setting value, configure the presentation content of the operation presentation executed in the "setting suggestion" presentation mode to differ according to each setting value, and configure the selection ratio of other presentation modes to vary according to the setting value. By configuring in this way, when the "setting suggestion" operation presentation that directly suggests the setting value is executed, the presentation content is grasped in a composite manner, and when other operation presentations are executed, the selection ratio of each presentation mode is grasped in a composite manner, making it possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, and thus make it possible to interest the player in the various operation presentations that are executed.

Furthermore, as described above, the selection ratio of each presentation mode in the operation presentation is configured to differ depending on the set game state. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the setting value can be set in six stages from the setting "1" which is disadvantageous to the player to the setting "6" which is advantageous to the player, the selection ratio of the operation presentation selected when the settings "1" to "3" are set and the first game state (probable bonus state) which is advantageous to the player is set is different from the selection ratio of the operation presentation selected when the settings "4" to "5" are set.
By making the selection ratio of the operation presentation selected when "6" is set and when a second game state (time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state is set, it is possible to make a player playing a pachinko machine 10 in which a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player be convinced that a setting value that is advantageous to the player has been set.

In this way, by configuring the selection ratio of the presentation mode to be variable based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game conditions (jackpot lottery result, set game state, selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time)), it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after a coin is inserted and a symbol pay line is determined, a control lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and confirm the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays a string of identification information consisting of a number of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information as a confirmed display, and the variable display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a control lever), and is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button), or
A slot machine in which, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the varying display of identifying information stops and is displayed as a fixed value, and if the combination of identifying information at the time of the stop is a specific one, a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player is generated. In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

A specific example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that changes and displays a series of symbols, and then determines and displays the symbols, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a certain amount of balls are inserted based on a certain operation (button operation), the symbols start to change due to the operation of an operating lever, for example.
For example, when a stop button is operated or a certain time has passed, the variation of the symbols is stopped, and if the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, a special game is started in which a certain amount of game value is awarded to the player, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the game hall can handle only the balls as game value, which can eliminate problems seen in current game halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as game value, and restrictions on the location of game machines.

The above-described embodiments may be configured in whole or in part in combination.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Feature AA Group> (Configuration that makes it easy to intentionally generate over-winning)
The present invention relates to a specific area in which a gaming ball can enter, a bonus granting means for granting a specific bonus based on the gaming ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path in which the gaming ball can flow down, a variable means for varying a gaming ball flowing down at least a specific section of the specific flow path between a first position where the gaming ball is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the specific section, and a second position where the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific section than to be guided to the specific area, an operation means operable by a player, and a first launching speed at which the gaming ball is more likely to reach the specific flow path when the operation content on the operation means becomes a first operation content. A gaming machine AA1 comprising: a launching means capable of launching a game ball at a second launching speed different from the first launching speed when a second operation content different from the first operation content is obtained; a discrimination means for discriminating whether a specific condition that is more likely to be satisfied when the game ball is launched at the second launching speed by the launching means has been satisfied than when the game ball is launched at the first launching speed; and a variable control means for controlling the variable means to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the discrimination means discriminating that the specific condition has been satisfied.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines transition to a winning state when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some aim to increase interest during a winning state by varying the gaming value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the amount of game value that can be acquired is almost constant for each type of win, so that the game during the winning state becomes monotonous, as it becomes like a task to acquire game value according to the type of win. In other words, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, among conventional gaming machines, there are some that allow the player to decide the timing of the start of the winning state when the player wins. However, like other conventional gaming machines, the gaming value that can be acquired during a winning state is almost constant for each type of winning, so it has been difficult to increase the player's interest in the game during the winning state.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AA1, a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means on the basis that a gaming ball has entered a specific area where the gaming ball can enter. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where a gaming ball flowing down at least a specific section of a specific flow path where the gaming ball can flow down is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the specific section, and a second position where the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific section than being guided to the specific area. When the operation content for the operation means operable by the player becomes the first operation content, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means at a first launching speed at which the gaming ball can easily reach the specific flow path. On the other hand, when the operation content becomes a second operation content different from the first operation content, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means at a second launching speed different from the first launching speed. When the gaming ball is launched by the launching means at the second launching speed, a discrimination means discriminates whether a specific condition that is more likely to be established than when the gaming ball is launched at the first launching speed has been established, and based on the discrimination means discriminating that the specific condition has been established,
The variable means is controlled by the variable control means so as to be variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time.

This allows the player to operate the operating means in the hope that a specific condition will be met while the game ball is passing through a specified section, thereby having the effect of increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game.

In the gaming machine AA1, the variable control means controls the variable means to change from the first position to the second position based on a first number of gaming balls entering the specific area, and the specified section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of gaming balls, which is greater than the first number, to flow down simultaneously when the variable means is changed to the second position.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA1, the gaming machine AA2 has the following effects.
The variable means changes the position of the ball from the first position to the second position based on the first number of balls entering the specific area.
The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is greater than the first number, to flow down at the same time when the variable control means is set to the second position.

This allows the player to operate the operating means in a way that makes it possible to make the number of game balls passing through the specified section exceed the first number and then to establish a specific condition, thereby having the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AA2, the launching means is capable of launching gaming balls at time intervals equal to or greater than a predetermined interval, and the predetermined interval is a period in which, when gaming balls are continuously launched in the second direction at the predetermined interval, the gaming balls pass through such that the second number of gaming balls can reach the predetermined interval between the time when one gaming ball reaches the predetermined interval and the time when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined interval.

The gaming machine AA3 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AA2.
The launching means is configured to be able to launch the game balls at time intervals equal to or greater than the predetermined interval. The predetermined interval is configured so that the game balls pass through it in such a way that a second number of game balls can reach the predetermined interval during the period from when one game ball reaches the predetermined interval until the game ball passes through the predetermined interval, in a state in which the game balls are continuously launched in the second direction at the predetermined interval.

This has the effect of enabling a player who wishes to increase the number of game balls passing through a specified section to exceed the first number to launch game balls continuously at specified intervals.

Gaming machine AA4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the variable means is configured to be able to guide all gaming balls flowing down the specified section to the specific area when it is varied to the first position.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3,
Since the varying means is configured so that when the position is varied, all game balls flowing through the specified section are guided to the specific area, it is possible to know the number of game balls that will be guided to the specific area when the specific condition is met by checking the number of game balls passing through the specified section. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily understand the degree of advantage when the specific condition is met.

A gaming machine AA5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, it is provided with a ball entry means into which a gaming ball can enter, and the discrimination means determines that the specific condition has been established when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means.

According to gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines AA1 to AA4, when a gaming ball enters an entry means where the gaming ball can enter, the discrimination means judges that a specific condition has been established, and therefore, by aiming the gaming ball at the entry means and firing it, the player can easily establish the specific condition at a timing of his/her preference.

Gaming machine AA6 is any one of gaming machines AA1 to AA5, characterized in that it is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the specified section.

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA5, the flow speed of the gaming balls flowing down the specified section is decelerated by the deceleration means, so that when the gaming balls are continuously shot toward a specific flow path, the number of gaming balls passing through the specified section can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that when a specific condition is established, the number of gaming balls guided to a specific area can be increased.

A gaming machine AA7 is characterized in that it comprises, in any one of gaming machines AA1 to AA6, a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode, an advantage determination means for determining a degree of advantage in the event that the specific condition is fulfilled until the specific condition is fulfilled, and a suggestion presentation execution means for executing, on the display means, a suggestion presentation suggesting the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination means.

According to gaming machine AA7, in addition to the effect produced by any of gaming machines AA1 to AA6, the degree of advantage in the event that a specific condition is fulfilled is determined by an advantage determination means until the specific condition is fulfilled, and a suggestive presentation suggesting the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination means is executed on the display means by a suggestive presentation execution means, so that by checking the suggestive presentation displayed on the display means, it is possible to more easily understand the degree of advantage in the event that a specific condition is fulfilled.

In the gaming machine AA7, the advantageous determination means determines the number of gaming balls passing through the specified section, and the suggestive performance execution means executes a performance suggesting the number of gaming balls determined by the advantageous determination means as the suggestive performance.

The gaming machine AA8 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AA7.
The number of game balls passing through a predetermined section is determined by the advantage determination means. A performance suggesting the number of game balls determined by the advantage determination means is executed as a suggestion performance by the suggestion performance execution means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to easily know the number of game balls that will enter a specific area when a specific condition is met by checking the suggestive presentation.

Gaming machine AA9, comprising any one of gaming machines AA1 to AA8, a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a lottery means which executes a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a valid state setting means which sets a valid state which makes a ball entry into the ball entry means valid based on a specific lottery result being obtained in the lottery by the lottery means, wherein the discrimination means determines that the specific condition has been established when a gaming ball enters the ball entry means during the valid state, and the variable control means executes a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on the discrimination means determining that the specific condition has been established.

According to the gaming machine AA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA8, the following effect is achieved. That is, a lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a valid state setting means sets a valid state that makes it valid for a game ball to enter a ball entry means into which the game ball can enter based on the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means. If the ball enters the ball entry means during the valid state, the discrimination means discriminates that the specific condition has been established. Based on the discrimination means discriminating that the specific condition has been established, the variable control means executes a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times.

This has the effect of allowing a player to play a game in the hope of a specific lottery result being obtained by the lottery means.

The gaming machine AA10 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operating means capable of operating to a plurality of operating positions including at least a first operating position at which it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means and a second operating position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than the first operating position, and an operating control means for operating the operating means to a corresponding operating position depending on the elapsed time.

The gaming machine AA10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA9. That is, the operation means is configured to be operable to a plurality of operation positions including at least a first operation position where it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means and a second operation position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means than the first operation position. The operation position of the operation means is operated to an operation position according to the elapsed time by the operation control means.

This has the effect of giving the player the enjoyment of shooting the game ball at the right time, since in order to establish the specific condition, it is necessary to shoot the game ball toward the ball entry means at the timing when the operating position of the operating means reaches the first operating position.

<Features Group AB> (Provide jackpots that allow you to win over the opponent and jackpots that you cannot win over the opponent)
The present invention relates to a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter the game ball and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the game ball than in the first state, a bonus granting means that grants a predetermined bonus when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a discrimination means that makes a judgment based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a variable game execution means that executes a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, an operation means that can be operated by a player, and a specific operation means that is applied to the operation means. The gaming machine AB1 is characterized by comprising: a condition discrimination means for discriminating whether a specific condition that is likely to be established when an operation is executed has been established; and a type determination means for determining, as a type of variable game to be executed by the variable game execution means, one type from a plurality of types including at least a first variable game in which the variable game is started when the condition discrimination means discriminates that the specific condition has been established after the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the specific discrimination result, and a second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether the specific condition has been established or not.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines transition to a winning state when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning hole is a winning one. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types that differ in the number of times (number of rounds) the large opening hole, into which prize balls are awarded when a gaming ball enters, is opened, and some aim to increase the interest during a winning state by varying the gaming value that can be obtained (for example, Patent No. 2514
(Publication No. 417).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, the opening pattern of the large opening is different in each round, thereby varying the number of gaming balls that can be won in each round, thereby creating differences in the degree of advantage.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the number of winning balls that can be obtained is almost constant for each type of winning, so it becomes like a task to obtain the gaming value according to the type of winning.
In some cases, the gameplay during the winning state became monotonous. In addition, since it is necessary to vary the control according to the type of winning during the winning state, there was a problem that the processing load during the winning state increased.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AB1, the variable ball entry means is changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state, and a predetermined benefit is granted by the benefit granting means based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means. A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a variable game is executed by the variable game execution means in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. A condition determination means determines whether a specific condition that is likely to be established when a specific operation is performed on an operation means operable by a player has been established. As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first variable game in which the variable game is started when the condition determination means determines that a specific condition is established after a specific determination result is reached by the determination means, and a second variable game in which the variable game is started regardless of whether the specific condition is established or not.

This has the effect of making it possible to vary the timing at which a variable game is started depending on the type of the variable game.

A gaming machine AB1 is provided with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball in a direction corresponding to an operation on the operating means, a first ball entry means arranged at a position where a gaming ball launched in a first direction by the launching means can enter, a second ball entry means arranged at a position where a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter, and a ball entry determination means for determining whether a gaming ball has entered the second ball entry means, wherein the condition determination means determines that the specific condition has been established when a gaming ball has entered the first ball entry means, and the second variable game is started based on the ball entry determination means determining that a gaming ball has entered the second ball entry means after the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, a gaming ball is launched by a launching means in a direction according to an operation on an operating means, and a first ball entry means is disposed at a position where a gaming ball launched in a first direction by the launching means can enter the ball. A second ball entry means is disposed at a position where a gaming ball launched in a second direction different from the first direction can enter the ball. A ball entry determination means determines whether a gaming ball has entered the second ball entry means. When a gaming ball has entered the first ball entry means, a condition determination means determines that a specific condition has been established. After a specific determination result is obtained by the determination means, a second variable game is started based on the ball entry determination means determining that a gaming ball has entered the second ball entry means.

As a result, the ball entry means that is the starting condition differs depending on the type of variable game, so the game ball can be shot in different directions depending on the type of variable game, which has the effect of giving the player the fun of changing the direction in which the game ball is shot.

In the gaming machine AB2, a third ball entry means is provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter the ball entry means, a first flow path through which the gaming ball launched in the second direction can flow down, and
A gaming machine AB3 comprising: a variable means for varying between a first position capable of holding at least one gaming ball that has flowed into a flow path and a second position in which it is more difficult to hold a gaming ball than the first position; and a switching means for switching the variable means from the first position to the second position based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means, wherein the determination means executes determination based on a gaming ball having entered the third ball entry means, and the second ball entry means is disposed at a position in which a gaming ball that has passed through the first flow path can enter the gaming machine.
.

The gaming machine AB3 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AB2.
A third ball entry means is provided at a position where a game ball launched in the second direction can enter. The variable means is variable between a first position where at least one game ball that has flowed into a first flow path through which game balls launched in the second direction can flow down can be held, and a second position where game balls are more difficult to hold than at the first position. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means. The determination is made by the determination means based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means. A second ball entry means is arranged at a position where a game ball that has passed through the first flow path can enter.

As a result, since it is necessary to launch the game ball in the second direction in order for the discrimination means to execute discrimination, the game ball can be made to flow into the first flow path before a specific discrimination result is reached. Therefore, when the type determination means determines the second variable game, the game ball held in the first flow path can be made to immediately enter the second ball entry means. Therefore, when the second variable game is determined, there is an effect that the second variable game can be started without the player having to launch the game ball.

Gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that the second ball entry means is positioned at a position where the period until a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path enters the second ball entry means is shorter than the period until a gaming ball launched in the first direction enters the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB3, the second ball entry means is disposed at a position where the period until the gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path enters the second ball entry means is shorter than the period until the gaming ball that has been launched in the first direction enters the variable ball entry means.
When a variable game is determined, the variable game can be started immediately.

A gaming machine AB5, which is any one of the gaming machines AB2 to AB4, is provided with a specific flow path through which a gaming ball launched in the first direction can flow, the first state being a state in which a gaming ball flowing down at least a specific section of the specific flow path is more likely to be guided to the variable ball entry means than to pass through the specific section, and the second state being a state in which a gaming ball flowing down the specific section is more likely to pass through the specific section than to be guided to the variable ball entry means.
.

The gaming machine AB5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB2 to AB4. That is, in the first state, a gaming ball flowing down at least a predetermined section of a specific flow path through which a gaming ball launched in a first direction can flow is more likely to be guided to the variable ball entry means than to pass through the predetermined section, while in the second state, a gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is more likely to pass through the predetermined section than to be guided to the variable ball entry means.

This has the effect of providing a game feature in which the more game balls passing through the specified section at the time of entering the first ball entry means, the more game balls can be guided to the variable entry means, thereby enabling the game balls to be launched in the first direction by timing them.

In gaming machine AB5, the variable game execution means controls the variable ball entry means to be varied to the second position based on a first number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is varied to the first state at least for the first time in one of the variable games, and the specified section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is greater than the first number, to flow down simultaneously when the variable ball entry means is varied to the second position, gaming machine AB6.

The gaming machine AB6 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AB5.
When the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state at least initially in one variable game, the variable ball entry means is controlled by the variable game execution means so as to be changed to the second position based on the entry of a first number of game balls into the variable ball entry means. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is greater than the first number, to flow down at the same time when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second position.

This allows the player to operate the operating means in a way that makes it possible to make the number of game balls passing through the specified section exceed the first number and then to establish a specific condition, thereby having the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In gaming machine AB6, the launching means is capable of launching gaming balls at time intervals equal to or greater than a predetermined interval, and the predetermined interval is a period in which, when gaming balls are continuously launched in the second direction at the predetermined interval, the gaming balls pass through such that the second number of gaming balls can reach the predetermined interval between the time when one gaming ball reaches the predetermined interval and the time when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined interval.

According to the gaming machine AB7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB6, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the gaming balls at time intervals equal to or greater than the predetermined interval. In a state in which the gaming balls are continuously launched in the second direction at the predetermined interval, the predetermined interval is configured so that the gaming balls pass through such that a second number of gaming balls can reach the predetermined interval during the period from when one gaming ball reaches the predetermined interval until the gaming ball passes through the predetermined interval.

This has the effect of enabling a player who wishes to increase the number of game balls passing through a specified section to exceed the first number to launch game balls continuously at specified intervals.

Gaming machine AB8 is any one of gaming machines AB5 to AB7, characterized in that it is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the specified section.

According to the gaming machine AB8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB5 to AB7, the flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the predetermined section is decelerated by the deceleration means, so that when the gaming balls are continuously shot toward the specific flow path, the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, when the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means, the number of gaming balls guided to the variable ball entry means can be increased.

Gaming machine AB9 is characterized in that it comprises, in any one of gaming machines AB5 to AB8, a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode, a number discrimination means for discriminating the number of gaming balls passing through the specified section, and a suggestive presentation execution means for executing, on the display means, a suggestive presentation that suggests the number of gaming balls discriminated by the number discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AB9, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AB5 to AB8, the following effect is achieved: That is, the number of gaming balls passing through a predetermined section is determined by a number determination means, and a suggestion effect suggesting the number of gaming balls determined by the number determination means is executed on the display means by a suggestion effect execution means.

This has the effect of allowing the player to easily know the number of game balls that will be guided to the variable ball entry means when a game ball enters the first ball entry means by checking the suggestive presentation.

The gaming machine AB10 is characterized in that it comprises: a difference discrimination means for discriminating at predetermined intervals during execution of the suggestive performance whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive performance differs from the number of game balls discriminated by the number discrimination means; and a suggestive performance update means for updating the mode of the suggestive performance to a mode suggesting the number of game balls discriminated by the number discrimination means based on the discrimination by the difference discrimination means that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive performance differs from the number of game balls discriminated by the number discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine AB10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB9, the following effect is achieved. That is, during the execution of the suggestive performance, the difference discrimination means discriminates at predetermined intervals whether the number of gaming balls suggested by the suggestive performance and the number of gaming balls discriminated by the number discriminating means are different. The difference discrimination means discriminates whether the number of gaming balls suggested by the suggestive performance and the number of gaming balls discriminated by the number discriminating means are different.
Based on the determination that the number of game balls determined by the number determination means is different, the mode of the suggestive presentation is updated by a suggestive presentation update means to a mode suggesting the number of game balls determined by the number determination means.

This makes it possible to update the manner of the suggestive presentation at predetermined intervals in accordance with the number determined by the number determination means, thereby enabling the player to more easily know the number of game balls that will be guided to the variable ball entry means when a ball enters the first ball entry means.

a third ball entry means for establishing the determination condition based on the entry of the game ball shot in the second direction; a display means for displaying a presentation mode; a specific presentation execution means for executing a specific presentation based on the determination by the determination means in the display means; and a presentation mode determination means for determining a first mode as the presentation mode of the specific presentation executed by the specific presentation execution means when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result and the first variable game is determined by the type determination means, and determining a second mode different from the first mode when the determination by the determination means results in a miss determination result different from the specific determination result, and when the determination by the determination means results in the specific determination result and the type determination means determines the second variable game.
B11.

According to the gaming machine AB11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AB2, the following effect is achieved. That is, a third ball entry means is provided in which a discrimination condition is established based on the entry of a gaming ball into a position where a gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter. In a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode, a specific presentation is executed by a specific presentation execution means based on the execution of a discrimination by the discrimination means. As the presentation mode of the specific presentation executed by the specific presentation execution means, when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result and the first variable game is determined by the type determination means, a first mode is determined by the presentation mode determination means. On the other hand, when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a miss discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, and when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result and the type determination means determines a second variable game, a second mode different from the first mode is determined as the presentation mode of the specific presentation by the presentation mode determination means.

In this way, when the second variable game is determined, the player can be made to believe that the specific determination result is not obtained. Therefore, even after the specific performance of the second mode is executed,
Since the game ball can be continuously shot in the second direction to make the discrimination means discriminate, the game ball can be made to enter the second ball entry means without the player realizing that a specific discrimination result has been reached. This gives the player the impression that the second variable game has suddenly started, which has the effect of making the player feel surprise and delight.

The gaming machine AB12 is characterized in that it is equipped with a pseudo-specific performance execution means capable of executing a pseudo-specific performance of a mode that is difficult to distinguish from the specific performance of the second mode during the period from when the specific performance of the second mode executed based on the specific judgment result determined by the judgment means and the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means ends until the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means.

According to gaming machine AB12, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AB11, a pseudo-specific performance that is difficult to distinguish from the specific performance of the second mode is executed by the pseudo-specific performance execution means during the period from when the specific performance of the second mode executed based on the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means ends and when the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means, there is an effect that when the second variable game is determined by the type determination means, it is difficult for the player to notice that a specific determination result has been reached.

a discrimination information storage means for storing the discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information; an erasing means for erasing the discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means from the discrimination information storage means; an information number image display means for displaying on the display means an information number image indicating the number of pieces of information of the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means; and an image update means for updating the information number image to an image corresponding to an information number with one less information each time the pseudo-specific presentation is executed during the period from the end of the specific presentation of the second mode, which is executed based on the discrimination by the discrimination means resulting in the specific discrimination result and the determination of the second variable game by the type determination means, until the game ball enters the second ball entry means.

Gaming machine AB13 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AB12. That is, based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the acquisition means. The discrimination information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the discrimination information storage means with a predetermined number of pieces of information as an upper limit. The discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means is erased from the discrimination information storage means by the erasing means. An information number image indicating the number of pieces of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is displayed on the display means by the information number image display means. After the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result and a specific presentation of the second mode executed based on the type determination means determining a second variable game is completed, the second
During the period until the game ball enters the ball entry means, every time the pseudo specific performance is executed, the information number image is updated by the image updating means to an image corresponding to the information number less by one.

In this way, by updating the information number image by the image updating means, it is possible to make the player believe that the number of discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means is decreasing. Therefore, when the type determination means determines the second variable game, it is possible for a player who wants the discrimination means to execute discrimination without interruption to continue to shoot the game ball in the second direction even after a specific discrimination result is reached.

<Feature AC group> (When in favorable game conditions, over-winning navigation is performed when a small win is won)
a specific area into which a gaming ball can enter; a bonus granting means for granting a specific bonus based on the entry of a gaming ball into the specific area; a specific flow path into which a gaming ball can flow; a variable means for varying a gaming ball flowing down at least a specific section of the specific flow path between a first position where the gaming ball is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the specific section, and a second position where the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific section than to be guided to the specific area; a discrimination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a judgment condition; a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a specific period of time based on the judgment by the discrimination means resulting in a specific judgment result; and a specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance before the variable means is varied to the first position when the judgment by the discrimination means results in the specific judgment result.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when the symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded a winning prize that is advantageous to the player. In addition to the symbols, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the interest of the game (for example, see JP 2003 A-20036634).
(Publication No. 325886).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are configured to be able to execute an effect displayed on the display device that indicates the expectation of whether or not the player will be awarded an advantageous winning game in the future.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the performance that suggests the degree of expectation starts, it is already determined whether the player will be advantageous, so the content of the performance itself does not affect the degree of advantage of the player. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device while playing the game.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AC1, a bonus granting means grants a predetermined bonus based on the entry of a gaming ball into a specific area where the gaming ball can enter. The variable means is variable between a first position where a gaming ball flowing down at least a specific section of a specific flow path where the gaming ball can flow down is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the specific section, and a second position where the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific section than being guided to the specific area. A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a variable game is executed by the variable game execution means in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination. When the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means before the variable means is changed to the first position.

This has the effect of drawing attention to the effect, since it is possible to determine whether or not the display will be changed to the first position by checking whether a specific effect has been executed.

In the gaming machine AC1, the specific effect execution means executes, as the specific effect, an effect suggesting a launch timing at which the variable means may be varied to the first position while the gaming ball is passing through the specified section, in the gaming machine AC2.

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AC1, a special effect is executed by the special effect execution means, which indicates the launch timing at which the variable means may be changed to the first position while the gaming ball is passing through a specified section, and therefore, the special effect has the effect of attracting attention.

Gaming machine AC3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the specified period is shorter than the period between when a gaming ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is located and when the launched gaming ball reaches the specific flow path.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AC1 and AC2, the predetermined period from when the gaming ball is shot in the direction in which the specific flow path is located is configured to be shorter than the period until the shot gaming ball reaches the specific flow path, so that it is difficult to obtain a predetermined benefit unless the gaming ball is shot at the time when the specific performance is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not the specific performance is executed.

In any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, a second variable game execution means is provided for executing a second variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a specific number of times based on a second determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means, and a period during which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position in the second variable game is likely to be longer than the predetermined period.
C4.

The gaming machine AC4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3. That is, based on the determination by the determining means resulting in a second determination result different from the specific determination result, a second variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a specific number of times is executed by the second variable game executing means. The period during which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position in the second variable game is configured to be likely to be longer than a predetermined period.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in the hope that the second variable game will be executed.

A gaming machine AC4 is provided with a dynamic display execution means for executing a dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means, and a type determination means for determining one type of variable game from a plurality of types of the variable game including at least a first variable game in which the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means to the variable means being varied to the first position is set to a first period, and a second variable game in which the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information to the variable means being varied to the first position is set to a second period shorter than the first period, and the suggestive performance execution means executes the suggestive performance during the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means to the time the variable means is varied to the first position.

According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC4, the following effects are achieved.
The dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. As types of the variable game, there are a first variable game in which the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display execution means to the variable means being changed to the first position is set to a first period, and a second variable game in which the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information to the variable means being changed to the first position is set to a first period.
and a second variable game set for a second period shorter than the first period.
The type of the variable game is determined by the type determination means. A suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means during the period from when the dynamic display of the identification information is completed by the dynamic display execution means until when the variable means is changed to the first position.

This has the effect of allowing a player to play in anticipation of the first variable game being selected, since more game balls can reach the predetermined section when the first variable game is selected than when the second variable game is selected.

In the gaming machine AC5, the first period is a period longer than the period from when the gaming ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is located until the launched gaming ball reaches the specific flow path, and the second period is a period shorter than the period from when the gaming ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is located until the launched gaming ball reaches the specific flow path.

According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC5, the following effects are achieved.
The first period is longer than the period from when the game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until when the launched game ball reaches the specific flow path.
The second period is configured to be a period shorter than the period from when the game ball is launched in the direction in which the specific flow path is arranged until when the launched game ball reaches the specific flow path.

This has the effect of making it difficult for the game ball to reach the specific flow path when the second variable game is selected, thereby making it possible to more strongly expect that the first variable game will be selected.

In the gaming machine AC1, a dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, and a first effect is a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result.
a first type determination means for determining one specific effect from a plurality of effects including at least the first effect and a second effect different from the first effect; a second specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect while executing the dynamic display of the identification information based on a miss determination result different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination means; and a second type determination means for determining one specific effect from a plurality of effects including at least the first effect and the second effect as the type of the specific effect executed by the second specific effect execution means, wherein a proportion of the first effects determined by the first type determination means is higher than a proportion of the second effects determined by the second type determination means, and a proportion of the second effects determined by the first type determination means is lower than a proportion of the second effects determined by the second type determination means.

According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, the following effects are achieved.
A dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. As a type of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result, one specific performance is determined by the first type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least the first performance and a second performance different from the first performance. Based on the fact that the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a miss discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, a specific performance is executed by the second specific performance execution means during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information. As a type of the specific performance executed by the second specific performance execution means, one specific performance is determined by the second type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least the first performance and the second performance. The first performance is configured so that the proportion determined by the first type determination means is higher than the proportion determined by the second type determination means. On the other hand, the second performance is configured so that the proportion determined by the second type determination means is higher than the proportion determined by the second type determination means.

This has the effect of making it possible to vary the expectation of a variable game being executed according to the content of a specific presentation.

In gaming machine AC7, the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result to the variable means being varied to the first position is shorter than the period from the launch of the gaming ball in the direction in which the specific flow path is located to the arrival of the launched gaming ball at the specific flow path, and the specified period is shorter than the period from the launch of the gaming ball in the direction in which the specific flow path is located to the arrival of the launched gaming ball at the specific flow path.

According to the gaming machine AC8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC7, the following effects are achieved.
The period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result to the variable means being varied to the first position is configured to be shorter than the period from the launch of the game ball in the direction in which the specific flow path is located to the arrival of the launched game ball at the specific flow path. The predetermined period is configured to be shorter than the period from the launch of the game ball in the direction in which the specific flow path is located to the arrival of the launched game ball at the specific flow path.

This has the effect of allowing a player to more seriously predict whether or not a specific judgment result will be obtained based on the content of a specific presentation, since the game ball cannot reach a specific section unless it is launched toward a specific flow path during dynamic display of identification information.

Gaming machine AC9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AC7 or AC8, the first type determination means is configured to be able to determine a third performance different from both the first performance and the second performance at a predetermined ratio, and the second type determination means is configured to be unable to determine the third performance.

According to the gaming machine AC9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AC7 and AC8, the following effect is achieved. That is, a third effect different from the first effect and the second effect is determined by the first type determination means at a predetermined ratio. The second type determination means is configured not to be able to determine the third effect.

This has the effect of making the player happy because when the third presentation is executed, it is confirmed that a specific determination result has been achieved at that point in time.

<Feature AD group> (By varying the length of the closed period during a jackpot, the likelihood of an over-winning event can be varied)
a specific area into which a game ball can enter, a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on the game ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path into which the game ball can flow, a variable means for varying a game ball flowing down at least a specific section of the specific flow path between a first position where the game ball is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the specific section, and a second position where the game ball is more likely to pass through the specific section than being guided to the specific area, a discrimination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, and a control method determination means for determining one control method from a plurality of control methods including at least a first control and a second control in which the game balls passing through the specific section at the timing when the variable means is varied to the first position are more likely to be present than in the first control.
D1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines transition to a winning state when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning hole is a winning one. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types that differ in the number of times (number of rounds) the large opening hole, into which prize balls are awarded when a gaming ball enters, is opened, and some aim to increase the interest during a winning state by varying the gaming value that can be obtained (for example, Patent No. 2514
(Publication No. 417).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, even if the number of rounds is the same, the opening pattern of the large opening is different in each round, thereby varying the number of gaming balls that can be won in each round, thereby creating differences in the degree of advantage.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the number of winning balls that can be obtained is almost constant for each type of winning, so it becomes like a task to obtain the gaming value according to the type of winning.
In some cases, the game during the winning state may become monotonous. In other words, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AD1, a bonus is awarded by a bonus awarding means based on the entry of a gaming ball into a specific area where the gaming ball can enter. The variable means is changed between a first position where a gaming ball flowing down at least a specific section in a specific flow path where the gaming ball can flow down is more likely to be guided to the specific flow path than passing through the specific section, and a second position where the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific section than being guided to the specific area. A determination is made by a determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a variable game is executed by a variable game execution means in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. As a control method for the variable means during the execution of the variable game, one control method is determined by a control method determination means from a plurality of control methods including at least a first control and a second control in which the number of gaming balls passing through the specific section at the timing when the variable means is changed to the first position is more likely to be greater than that of the first control.

In this way, when the determination by the determining means results in a specific determination result, the player can play the game in anticipation of the variable means being controlled by the second control, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine AD2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AD1, the second control controls so that at least one of multiple periods during which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game is longer than when controlled by the first control.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD1, the second control is configured so that at least one of the multiple periods during which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game is longer than the first control, so that the second control can make more game balls reach the predetermined section. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the variable means will be controlled by the second control.

Gaming machine AD3, which is equipped with a dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information indicating the result of the discrimination made by the discrimination means in gaming machine AD1 or AD2, and is characterized in that the first control is for controlling the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result to the variable means being varied to the first position to be a first period, and the second control is for controlling the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result to the variable means being varied to the first position to be a second period longer than the first period.

The gaming machine AD3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machines AD1 or AD2. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed by the dynamic display execution means. In the first control, the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the variable means being varied to the first position is controlled to be a first period. In the second control, the period from the end of the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result to the variable means being varied to the first position is controlled to be a second period longer than the first period.

As a result, when the game balls continue to be launched toward the specific flow path after the dynamic display of the identification information has ended, the second control can make more game balls reach the predetermined section.
When the variable means is changed to the first position, it is possible to effect an effect of allowing more game balls to enter the specific area.

In any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD3, a variable control means is provided that controls the variable means so that the variable means is variable to the second position based on a first number or more of game balls entering the specific area while the variable means is variable to the first position, and the predetermined section is a section in which a second number of game balls, which is greater than the first number, enter the specific area while the variable means is variable to the second position.
The gaming machine AD4 is characterized in that the path length is configured to allow a certain number of gaming balls to flow down at the same time.

The gaming machine AD4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD3. That is, while the variable means is set to the first position, the variable control means controls the variable means to be set to the second position based on the fact that a first number of game balls or more have entered the specific area. The predetermined section is, when the variable means is set to the second position,
The path length is configured so that a second number or more of game balls, which is greater than the first number, can flow down at the same time.

This has the effect of allowing a player to play a game in the hope that the variable means will be changed to the first position once the number of game balls passing through the specified section exceeds the first number.

Gaming machine AD4 is equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a launching means that can launch gaming balls into a gaming area at a launching speed corresponding to the operation content of the operating means and at time intervals equal to or greater than a predetermined interval, and the predetermined interval is a period in which, when gaming balls are launched continuously in the second direction at the predetermined interval, the gaming balls pass through the predetermined interval so that the second number of gaming balls can reach the predetermined interval between the time when one gaming ball reaches the predetermined interval and the time when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined interval.

According to the gaming machine AD5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AD4, the game balls are launched by the launching means into the game area at a time interval equal to or greater than a predetermined interval at a launching speed according to the operation content of the operation means operable by the player. The predetermined interval is a period in which the game balls pass through such that a second number of game balls can reach the predetermined interval during the period from when one game ball reaches the predetermined interval until the game ball passes through the predetermined interval in a state in which the game balls are continuously launched in the second direction at a predetermined interval.

This has the effect of enabling a player who wishes to increase the number of game balls passing through a specified section to exceed the first number to launch game balls continuously at specified intervals.

In gaming machine AD5, the second control controls a specific period, which is at least one of a plurality of periods during which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game, to be a period of length in which at least the first number of gaming balls launched by the launching means can reach the specified section, and the first control controls the specific period to be a period of length in which it is difficult to cause more than the first number of gaming balls launched by the launching means to reach the specified section, characterized in that the first control controls the specific period to be a period of length in which it is difficult to cause more than the first number of gaming balls launched by the launching means to reach the specified section.

The gaming machine AD6 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AD5.
In the second control, a specific period, which is at least one of a plurality of periods during which the variable means is changed to the second position in one variable game, is controlled to have a length that allows at least a first number of game balls launched by the launching means to reach a predetermined section. In the first control, the specific period is controlled to have a length that makes it difficult for the first number or more of game balls launched by the launching means to reach the predetermined section.

This has the effect that, when the variable means is controlled by the second control, the first number or more of game balls can be caused to enter the specific area by continuing to launch the game balls during a specific period of time.

Gaming machine AD7 is any one of gaming machines AD1 to AD6, characterized in that it is equipped with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the specified section.

According to the gaming machine AD7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AD1 to AD6, the speed at which the gaming balls flow down the predetermined section is slowed down by the deceleration means, so that when the gaming balls are continuously shot toward the specific flow path, the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section can be increased. Therefore, when the variable means is changed to the first position, the effect is that the number of gaming balls guided to the specific area can be increased.

Gaming machine AD8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AD7, the deceleration means is composed of a zigzag-shaped flow path.

According to the gaming machine AD8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD7, since the deceleration means is composed of a zigzag flow path, the direction in which the gaming ball flows down can be changed multiple times in a predetermined section, and therefore, there is an effect that the speed of the gaming ball can be decelerated more reliably.

Gaming machine AD9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AD7, the deceleration means makes the kinetic friction force between the gaming ball and the specified section higher than at other points in the specific flow path.

According to gaming machine AD9, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AD7, the kinetic friction force between the gaming ball and the specified section is made higher by the deceleration means than at other points in the specific flow path, thereby providing the effect of more reliably decelerating the flow speed of the gaming ball in the specified section.

<Feature AE group> (Performance that suggests the degree of advantage when a jackpot starts)
The gaming machine AE1 is characterized by comprising: a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode; a discrimination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a specific condition after the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific judgment result; and a suggestion effect execution means for executing on the display means a suggestion effect that suggests to the player the degree of advantage that would be expected if the execution of the bonus game were to begin during a predetermined period from the time the specific judgment result is reached until the time the specific condition is established.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when the symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded a winning prize that is advantageous to the player. In addition to the symbols, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the interest of the game (for example, see JP 2003 A-20036634).
(Publication No. 325886).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are configured to be able to execute an effect displayed on the display device that indicates the expectation of whether or not the player will be awarded an advantageous winning game in the future.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the performance that suggests the degree of expectation starts, it is already determined whether the player will be advantageous, so the content of the performance itself does not affect the degree of advantage of the player. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device while playing the game.

According to the gaming machine AE1, the presentation mode is displayed on the display means. The determination means executes determination based on the establishment of the determination condition. After the determination by the determination means results in a specific determination result,
A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the establishment of a specific condition. During a predetermined period from when a specific determination result is obtained until when the specific condition is established, a suggestion effect is executed on the display means by the suggestion effect execution means, which suggests to the player the degree of advantage in the case where the execution of the bonus game is started.

This has the effect of allowing players to pay attention to the suggestive effects while playing.

The gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE1, it comprises an operating means operable by a player, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball at a launching speed corresponding to the operation content on the operating means, and a ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter the ball, and the specific condition is established when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE1, the gaming machine AE2 has the following effects.
The game ball is launched by the launching means at a launching speed according to the operation of the operation means operable by the player. When the game ball launched by the launching means enters the ball entry means, a specific condition is established.

This has the effect of making it possible to adjust the timing of launching the game ball depending on the content suggested by the suggestive performance.

A gaming machine AE3, comprising a specific area into which a gaming ball can enter, a bonus granting means for granting a specified bonus based on the gaming ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path into which the gaming ball can flow, and a variable means for varying a gaming ball flowing down at least a specified section of the specific flow path between a first position where the gaming ball is more likely to be guided to the specific area than to pass through the specified section, and a second position where the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specified section than to be guided to the specific area, and wherein the bonus game execution means varies the variable means from the second position to the first position a specified number of times based on the specific condition being established.

The gaming machine AE3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AE1 and AE2. That is, a predetermined benefit is awarded by a benefit awarding means based on the entry of a gaming ball into a specific area into which the gaming ball can enter. A first benefit is awarded in which a gaming ball flowing down at least a specific section of a specific flow path into which the gaming ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific flow path than if the gaming ball had passed through the specific section.
The variable means is varied between a first position at which the ball is guided to the first predetermined area and a second position at which the ball is guided to the first predetermined area more easily than a specific area. When a specific condition is established, the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times by the bonus game execution means.

This has the effect of enabling a player to play a game while paying attention to the number of game balls passing through a predetermined section at the time when a specific condition is met.

The gaming machine AE3 is further provided with a variable control means for controlling the variable means to be variable from the first position to the second position based on a first number of gaming balls entering the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position during execution of the bonus game, and the specified section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of gaming balls, which is greater than the first number, to flow down simultaneously when the variable means is changed to the second position.

The gaming machine AE4 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AE3.
During the execution of a bonus game, the variable means is controlled by the variable control means to be variable from the first position to the second position based on a first number of game balls entering the specific area after the variable means is changed to the first position. The predetermined section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of game balls, which is greater than the first number, to flow down without moving when the variable means is changed to the second position.

This allows the player to expect that the specific condition will be established once the number of game balls passing through the specified section exceeds the first number, thereby providing the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine AE5 is characterized in that it is equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and a launching means that can launch gaming balls at a time interval of at least a predetermined interval at a launching speed corresponding to the operation content of the operating means, and the predetermined interval is a period in which, when gaming balls are continuously launched toward the specific flow path at the predetermined interval, the gaming balls pass through the predetermined interval so that the second number of gaming balls can reach the predetermined interval between the time when one gaming ball reaches the predetermined interval and the time when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined interval.

The gaming machine AE5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE4.
The game balls are launched by the launching means at a time interval equal to or greater than a predetermined interval, at a launching speed according to the operation of the operation means operable by the player. The predetermined interval is a period in which the game balls are flowed downward so that a second number of game balls can reach the predetermined interval during the period from when one game ball reaches the predetermined interval until the game ball passes through the predetermined interval, when the game balls are continuously launched toward the specific flow path at a predetermined interval.

This has the effect of enabling a player who wishes to increase the number of game balls passing through a specified section to exceed the first number to launch game balls continuously at specified intervals.

Gaming machine AE6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AE3 to AE5, it is provided with a number discrimination means for discriminating the number of gaming balls passing through the specified section, and the suggestive performance execution means executes a performance suggesting the number of gaming balls discriminated by the number discrimination means as the suggestive performance.

According to the gaming machine AE6, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AE3 to AE5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the number of gaming balls passing through a predetermined section is determined by a number determination means. An effect suggesting the number of gaming balls determined by the number determination means is executed as a suggestion effect by a suggestion effect execution means.

This makes it possible for the player to easily understand, based on the contents of the suggestion presentation, the number of game balls that will be guided to a specific area when a specific condition is met, and has the effect of making the player play in the hope that the specific condition will be met while a larger number is being suggested.

The gaming machine AE7 is characterized in that it comprises: a presentation mode updating means for updating the presentation mode of the suggested presentation in accordance with the number of game balls determined by the number determining means at each predetermined time period while the suggested presentation is being executed; a match determining means for determining at each predetermined time period whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggested presentation matches the number of game balls determined by the number determining means when the presentation mode updating means updates the presentation mode of the suggested presentation; and an update avoidance means for avoiding the presentation mode being updated by the presentation mode updating means when the match determining means determines that the number of game balls suggested by the suggested presentation matches the number of game balls determined by the number determining means.

The gaming machine AE7 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AE6.
During execution of the suggestive performance, the performance mode of the suggestive performance is updated by the performance mode update means at predetermined intervals in accordance with the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. When the performance mode of the suggestive performance is updated by the performance mode update means, the match determination means determines at predetermined intervals whether the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive performance matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means. When the match determination means determines that the number of game balls suggested by the suggestive performance matches the number of game balls determined by the number determination means, the update avoidance means prevents the performance mode from being updated by the performance update means.

This has the effect of reducing the frequency with which the presentation mode is updated, thereby reducing the processing load required to update the presentation mode.

In the gaming machine AE6 or AE7, the specified section has a plurality of passage detection means arranged at a plurality of locations capable of detecting the passage of a gaming ball, and the number determination means determines the number of passage detection means among the plurality of passage detection means that are detecting the passage of a gaming ball as the number of gaming balls passing through the specified section.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines AE6 and AE7, the gaming machine AE8 has the following effect. That is, a plurality of passage detection means capable of detecting the passage of gaming balls are arranged at a plurality of locations in a predetermined section. The number of passage detection means that detect the passage of gaming balls among the plurality of passage detection means is determined by the number determination means as the number of gaming balls passing through the predetermined section.

This has the effect of making it possible to accurately determine the number of game balls passing through a specified section.

<Feature AF Group> (Performance showing the expected degree of advantage if hitting to the right)
a game machine AF1 comprising: a ball entry means arranged at a position where a game ball launched in a first direction can enter the ball entry means; a discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on the game ball entering the ball entry means; an advantageous state setting means which sets an advantageous state that will be advantageous to the player when the game ball is launched in a second direction different from the first direction based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means; a display means capable of displaying identification information; a dynamic display execution means which executes on the display means a dynamic display of the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means; and a specific effect execution means which is capable of executing a specific effect which suggests the expectation of whether or not an advantageous game state will occur if the game ball is launched in the second direction while the dynamic display execution means is executing the dynamic display of the identification information.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable number of symbols, and when the symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded a winning prize that is advantageous to the player. In addition to the symbols, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the interest of the game (for example, see JP 2003 A-20036634).
(Publication No. 325886).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are configured to be able to execute an effect displayed on the display device that indicates the expectation of whether or not the player will be awarded an advantageous winning game in the future.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the performance that suggests the degree of expectation starts, it is already determined whether the player will be advantageous, so the content of the performance itself does not affect the degree of advantage of the player. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the display device while playing the game.

According to the gaming machine AF1, a discrimination means executes discrimination based on a gaming ball entering a ball entry means arranged at a position where a gaming ball shot in a first direction can enter. Based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, an advantageous state that will be advantageous to the player when the gaming ball is shot in a second direction different from the first direction is set by an advantageous state setting means. A dynamic display of identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is executed on the display means by a dynamic display execution means. While the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed by the dynamic display execution means, a specific effect that suggests the expectation of whether or not an advantageous gaming state will occur when the gaming ball is shot in the second direction is executed by the specific effect execution means.

This allows the player to judge whether it is better to shoot the game ball in the second direction based on the suggestion of the specific performance, thereby enabling the player to play the game while paying attention to the specific performance.

In the gaming machine AF1, the advantageous state is such that the launch of the gaming ball in the second direction during a specific period during which the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific determination result is being executed is started,
This is more likely to be advantageous for the player than starting to launch the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result has ended, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect during the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result in a performance period that includes at least a portion of the specific period.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF1, the gaming machine AF2 has the following effects.
When an advantageous state is reached, it is more likely to be advantageous for the player to start launching the game ball in the second direction during the specific period during which dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is being executed, than to start launching the game ball in the second direction after dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result has ended. When a specific effect is executed during dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in a performance period that includes at least a portion of the specific period.

This allows the player to determine whether or not to start shooting the game ball in the second direction during the performance period of the specific performance based on the suggested content of the specific performance. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while paying more attention to the suggested content of the specific performance.

In the gaming machine AF2, the advantageous state is such that the sooner the player starts firing the gaming ball in the second direction during the specific period, the more likely it is that the advantageous state will be advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF2, in an advantageous state, the sooner the player starts shooting the gaming ball in the second direction during the specific period, the more advantageous it becomes for the player, so that when a specific performance is executed, the player can be made to think about whether or not to shoot the gaming ball in the second direction as soon as possible. Therefore, there is an effect that a sense of tension can be created during the execution of the specific performance.

Gaming machine AF4 is characterized in that it is equipped with an effect type determination means for determining, as the type of specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, one type from a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect which is determined with a higher probability when dynamic display of the identification information showing the specific discrimination result is executed, and a second specific effect which is determined with a lower probability than the first specific effect when dynamic display of the identification information showing the specific discrimination result is executed.

According to the gaming machine AF4, in any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, one type is determined by the effect type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect that is determined more frequently when a dynamic display of identification information showing a specific discrimination result is being executed, and a second specific effect that is determined more frequently when a dynamic display of identification information showing a specific discrimination result is being executed than the first specific effect, so that the player can infer from the effect type of the specific effect whether or not it is a dynamic display of identification information showing a specific discrimination result. Thus, there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the type of the specific effect.

Any one of gaming machines AF1 to AF4 is provided with a specific area into which a gaming ball can enter, a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on the gaming ball entering the specific area, a specific flow path provided at a position into which a gaming ball launched in the second direction can flow, and a variable means for varying a gaming ball flowing down at least a specific section of the specific flow path between a first position where the gaming ball is more likely to be guided to the specific area than to pass through the specific section, and a second position where the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific section than to be guided to the specific area, and the advantageous state setting means is
As the advantageous state, a control for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position is executed one or more times until a specific condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state is that it is more advantageous to start launching the game ball in the second direction during the specific period than to start launching the game ball in the second direction after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is completed.
A gaming machine AF5 characterized in that it is more likely that a larger number of gaming balls will be guided to the specific area before the specific condition is met.

According to gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines AF1 to AF4, the following effect is achieved. That is, a predetermined benefit is provided by the benefit providing means based on the entry of a gaming ball into a specific area into which the gaming ball can enter. The variable means is variable between a first position where a gaming ball flowing down at least a specific section in a specific flow path provided at a position into which a gaming ball launched in a second direction can flow is more likely to be guided to the specific area than passing through the specific section, and a second position where the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific section than to be guided to the specific area. As an advantageous state, control for varying the variable means from the second position to the first position until a specific condition is established is executed one or more times by the advantageous state setting means. In the advantageous state, a person who starts launching a gaming ball in the second direction during a specific period is more likely to be able to reach the second position after the dynamic display of the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result has ended.
Rather than starting to launch game balls in a certain direction, it becomes easier for more game balls to be guided to a specific area before a specific condition is met.

This has the effect of making a player who wishes to obtain more of the specified privileges make a more serious decision as to whether or not to start firing the game ball in the second direction based on the suggested contents of the specific performance.

In gaming machine AF5, the specific condition is met when the number of gaming balls that have entered the specific area since the variable means was changed to the first position becomes a first number, and the specified section is configured with a path length that allows at least a second number of gaming balls, which is greater than the first number, to flow down simultaneously when the variable means is changed to the second position.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF5, the gaming machine AF6 has the following effects.
The specific condition is established when the number of game balls that have entered the specific area since the variable means was changed to the first position reaches a first number. The predetermined section is configured to have a path length that allows at least a second number of game balls, which is greater than the second number, to flow down at the same time when the variable means is changed to the second position.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in the hope that the specified section will be changed to the first position when the number of game balls passing through the specified section exceeds the first number.

Gaming machine AF7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a launching means capable of launching gaming balls at time intervals equal to or greater than a predetermined interval, and the predetermined interval is a period in which, when gaming balls are launched continuously in the second direction at the predetermined interval, the gaming balls pass through such that the second number of gaming balls can reach the predetermined interval between the time when one gaming ball arrives at the predetermined interval and the time when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined interval.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF6, the gaming machine AF7 has the following effects.
The game balls are launched by the launching means at time intervals equal to or greater than a predetermined interval. The predetermined interval is configured so that the game balls pass through it such that a second number of game balls can reach the predetermined interval during the time from when one game ball reaches the predetermined interval until the game ball passes through the predetermined interval.

This has the effect of allowing a player who has determined from the suggestion content of a particular presentation that it is a dynamic display of identification information showing a particular discrimination result to have the game ball launched in the second direction at a predetermined interval, which is the shortest interval.

Gaming machine AF8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AF7, the specific period is configured to be a period of length sufficient to launch at least the second number of gaming balls when gaming balls are launched continuously in the second direction at the specified intervals.

According to gaming machine AF8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine AF7, the specific period is configured to be a period of length that allows at least the second number of gaming balls to be launched when gaming balls are launched continuously in the second direction at a specified interval, so that by launching gaming balls in the second direction during the specific period, it is possible to make the second number of gaming balls reach the specified section, thereby having the effect of making the player make a more serious decision as to whether or not to launch gaming balls in the second direction.

Gaming machine AF9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF7 or AF8, it is equipped with a state determination means which determines one state from a plurality of states including at least a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the period between the transition to the advantageous state and the variable means being varied to the second position is longer than that of the first advantageous state as the advantageous state set by the advantageous state setting means.

According to the gaming machine AF9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AF7 and AF8, the advantageous states set by the advantageous state setting means are a first advantageous state, a second advantageous state in which the period from the transition to the advantageous state to the variable means being changed to the second position is longer than that of the first advantageous state, and
A state is determined by the state determining means from among a plurality of states including at least the above.

As a result, in the second advantageous state, a greater number of game balls can be shot before the variable means is changed to the second position, so that more game balls are likely to be guided to the specific area. This has the effect of allowing a player to play in the hope that the second advantageous state will be determined.

In gaming machine AF9, the first advantageous state is set as the period between the transition to the advantageous state and the variable means being changed to the second position, and is characterized in that a period of such length that it is impossible to shoot more than the first number of gaming balls when gaming balls are shot continuously in the second direction at the specified intervals.

According to the gaming machine AF10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AF9, in the first advantageous state, the period from the transition to the advantageous state until the variable means is changed to the second position is set to a length of time during which it is impossible to shoot more than the first number of gaming balls when gaming balls are shot continuously in the 23rd direction at a predetermined interval. Therefore, when the first advantageous state is determined,
For a player who wishes to obtain more predetermined benefits, the effect is that the game ball can be shot in the second direction for a specific period of time.

<Feature AG group> (allowing the player to select between a jackpot that allows for an over win and a jackpot that does not allow for an over win)
a first area through which a game ball can pass, a second area different from the first area, a first detection means capable of detecting the passage of a game ball into the first area, a second detection means capable of detecting the passage of a game ball into the second area, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the detection of the passage of a game ball by the first detection means or the second detection means after the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a specific discrimination result, the gaming machine is provided with a first specific area through which a game ball can enter, a second specific area different from the first specific area, a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on the game ball entering the first specific area or the second specific area, a specific flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down at least a specific section of the specific flow path is more likely to pass through the specific section than if it had passed through the specific section. a first variable means for varying a position between a first position where a game ball is more likely to be guided into the first specific area even when the ball is guided into the first specific area, and a second position where the game ball is more likely to pass through the specified section than when the ball is guided into the first specific area; a second variable means for varying a position between a third position where a game ball can enter the second specific area, and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second specific area than when the ball is guided into the third position; and a type determination means for determining, as the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, a first bonus game in which the first variable means is varied from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times when the first detection means detects the passage of a game ball after the discrimination means has reached the specific discrimination result, and a second bonus game in which the second variable means is varied from the fourth position to the third position a predetermined number of times when the second detection means detects the passage of a game ball.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines transition to a winning state when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning hole is a winning one. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types that differ in the number of times (number of rounds) the large opening hole, into which prize balls are awarded when a gaming ball enters, is opened, and some aim to increase the interest during a winning state by varying the gaming value that can be obtained (for example, Patent No. 2514
(Publication No. 417).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that do not start the winning state just because the lottery result is a winning one, but start the winning state when one of a number of activated winning slots provided on the game board is won. In these conventional gaming machines, different types of winning games are started depending on the type of activated winning slot that the player wins.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, when the type of win is determined, the amount of game value obtained during the win is an almost constant amount according to the type of win, so that the game becomes like a task to obtain the game value according to the type of win, and the game during the win state may become monotonous. In other words, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AG1, a first specific area into which the gaming ball can enter and a second specific area different from the first specific area are provided. A specific benefit is provided by a benefit providing means based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first specific area or the second specific area. The first variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the gaming ball flowing down at least a specific section in a specific flow path through which the gaming ball can flow is more likely to be guided to the first specific area than passing through the specific section, and a second position where the gaming ball is more likely to pass through the specific section than being guided to the first specific area. The second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position where the gaming ball can enter the second specific area and a fourth position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. The type determination means determines, as the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means, a first bonus game in which the first variable means is changed from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times when the first detection means detects the passage of a gaming ball after the discrimination means has produced a specific discrimination result.
A second special game in which the reel is moved from the first position to the third position a predetermined number of times is determined by the type determination means.

This has the effect of drawing attention to the area through which the game ball passes, since the type of bonus game can be varied depending on whether the game ball passes through the first area or the second area.

The gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AG1, it is provided with a passing means through which gaming balls can pass, and a distribution means capable of distributing the gaming balls that have passed through the passing means to either the first area or the second area.

According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG1, the gaming balls that have passed through the passing means through which the gaming balls can pass are distributed to either the first area or the second area by the distribution means, so that the type of bonus game varies depending on the area to which the distribution means distributes the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the area to which the game balls are distributed.

The gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that it is provided with an allocation state switching means for switching the state of the allocation means at a predetermined period between a first allocation state in which game balls are allocated to the first area and a second allocation state in which game balls are allocated to the second area, at least during the period from when a specific judgment result is obtained by the judgment means to when the execution of the bonus game is started.

According to gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AG2, at least during the period from when the discrimination means produces a specific discrimination result until the bonus game is started, the state of the distribution means is switched at a predetermined period by the state switching means between a first distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to a first area and a second distribution state in which the game balls are distributed to a second area, so that by checking the distribution state of the distribution means and passing the balls through the passing means, the player can determine the type of bonus game he or she prefers.

The gaming machine AG4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AG3, it is provided with a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode, and a presentation execution means for executing on the display means a distribution state suggestion presentation that suggests the distribution state of the distribution means.

According to gaming machine AG4, in addition to the effect produced by gaming machine AG3, a distribution state indication effect which indicates the distribution state of the distribution means is executed on the display means by the effect execution means, so that by simply checking the display means, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the player's preferred bonus game will be decided.

In the gaming machine AG4, the performance execution means is configured to select the first
a first suggestion effect execution means for executing a first allocation state suggestion effect suggesting the first allocation state based on the allocation state being switched to, and a second suggestion effect execution means for executing a second allocation state suggestion effect suggesting the second allocation state based on the allocation state being switched to the second allocation state by the allocation state switching means, wherein the gaming machine is further equipped with an advantage determination means capable of determining the degree of advantage when a gaming ball passes through a first area, and the first suggestion effect execution means is capable of suggesting the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination means in the first allocation state suggestion effect.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG4, the gaming machine AG5 has the following effects.
In the effect execution means, a first suggestion effect execution means executes a first allocation state suggestion effect suggesting the first allocation state based on switching to the first allocation state by the allocation state switching means, while a second allocation state suggestion effect suggesting the second allocation state based on switching to the second allocation state. The degree of advantage when the game ball passes through the first area is determined by advantage determination means. In the first allocation state suggestion effect, the degree of advantage determined by the advantage determination means is suggested by the first suggestion effect execution means.

This has the effect of making it possible to gauge the timing of passing through the first area depending on the degree of advantage suggested in the first suggestion performance.

In the gaming machine AG5, the advantageous determination means determines the number of gaming balls passing through the specified section, and the first suggestion effect execution means is capable of suggesting an effect suggesting the number of gaming balls determined by the advantageous determination means in the first distribution state suggestion effect.

The gaming machine AG6 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AG5.
The number of game balls passing through the predetermined section is determined by the advantage determination means. In the first distribution state suggestion effect, a first distribution state suggestion effect is a first distribution state suggestion effect.
The suggestion is suggested by the suggestion performance execution means.

This has the effect of making it possible to easily understand, by checking the first suggestion presentation, the number of game balls that will be guided to the first specific area if they pass through the first area.

In any one of the gaming machines AG1 to AG6, the bonus game execution means changes the first variable means to the second position based on the fact that the number of game balls that have entered the first specific area since the first variable means was first changed to the first position in the first bonus game has reached a first number or more.
The gaming machine AG7 is characterized in that the first variable means is varied to a different position, and the specified section is configured with a path length that allows a second number of gaming balls, which is greater than the first number, to flow down simultaneously when the first variable means is varied to the second position.

The gaming machine AG7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AG1 to AG6. That is, the first variable means is changed to the second position by the bonus game execution means based on the fact that the number of game balls that have entered the first specific area since the first variable means was first changed to the first position in the first bonus game has reached a first number. The predetermined section is the period during which the first variable means is changed to the second position by the bonus game execution means.
When the position is changed, the path length is configured to allow a second number of game balls, which is greater than the first number, to flow down at the same time.

This makes it possible to launch the game balls so that they pass through the first area after the number of game balls passing through the specified section exceeds the first number, thereby providing the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AG7, the bonus game execution means is configured to determine whether or not a gaming ball that enters the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second bonus game,
The gaming machine AG8 is characterized in that the second variable means is changed to the fourth position based on the number of reels reaching a third number or more, which is greater than the first number and less than the second number.

According to the gaming machine AG8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AG7, the second variable means is changed to the fourth position by the bonus game execution means based on the fact that the number of game balls entering the second specific area after the second variable means is first changed to the third position in the second bonus game is equal to or greater than the third number which is greater than the first number and less than the second number, so that when the game balls pass through the second area, the third number which is greater than the first number can be stably made to enter the second specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be played with peace of mind during the execution of the second bonus game.

<Feature AH Group> (rearrange the order of the selection menu according to the player's operation history)
A gaming machine AH comprising: a display means capable of displaying an image; an operation means operable by a player; a linked image display means for displaying, on the display means, a linked image whose appearance changes in accordance with the operation content of the operation means based on the establishment of a first condition; a performance execution means for executing a type of performance corresponding to the appearance of the linked image displayed on the display means based on the establishment of a second condition while the linked image is being displayed by the linked image display means; and a mode determination means for determining one mode from a plurality of modes as the mode of the linked image to be initially displayed by the linked image display means when the first condition is established.
1.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a varying number of symbols, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Some of these conventional gaming machines are also equipped with audio output devices such as speakers, and are configured to be able to perform not only visual but also auditory presentations, thereby diversifying the types of presentations and increasing interest (for example, JP 2003-326663 A; see, for ...
(Publication No. 5886).

However, there is a demand for further diversification of presentations.

Furthermore, some of these conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to play music as a type of auditory presentation during a specified period of time during normal play, and are also configured to allow the player to select the type of music to be played within the specified period.

However, such conventional gaming machines had a problem in that the more diverse the number of songs available in the gaming machine, the more difficult it became for a player to find a song he or she liked from the list of songs available for selection.

In response to this, according to the gaming machine AH1, when a first condition is satisfied, a linked image whose appearance changes in accordance with the operation content of the operation means operable by the player is displayed on the display means by the linked image display means. When a second condition is satisfied while the linked image is being displayed by the linked image display means, an appearance execution means executes an appearance of a type corresponding to the appearance of the linked image displayed on the display means. When the first condition is satisfied, one appearance from among a plurality of appearances is determined by the appearance determination means as the appearance of the linked image to be initially displayed by the linked image display means.

This has the effect of diversifying the form of the linked image that is displayed first when the first condition is met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AH1, the mode determining means determines one mode in accordance with at least the type of the effect previously executed by the effect executing means.
H2.

According to the gaming machine AH2, one mode is determined by the mode determination means in accordance with at least the type of performance previously executed by the performance execution means, thereby making it possible to diversify the modes of the linked images.

Gaming machine AH3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AH1 or AH2, it is equipped with an audio data playback means capable of playing back audio data, and an audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data played by the audio data playback means, and the multiple patterns that can be set as the linked image are composed of images of patterns representing different pieces of music, and the performance execution means causes the audio data playback means to play back the audio data of the music corresponding to the pattern of the linked image as the performance.

Gaming machine AH3 achieves the following effects in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines AH1 or AH2. That is, sound corresponding to the sound data reproduced by the sound data reproduction means is output by the sound output means. The multiple modes that can be set as the linked image are composed of images of modes showing different pieces of music. The sound data of the music corresponding to the mode of the linked image is reproduced by the sound data reproduction means as a performance by the performance execution means.

This makes it possible to combine visual and auditory effects, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, the mode determining means determines, as the mode of the linked image, a mode in which one of a plurality of effect corresponding images showing information corresponding to the type of the effect is displayed in a specific mode, the linked image display means changes the effect corresponding image displayed in the specific mode in a predetermined order every time the operation content on the operation means becomes a first operation content, and the effect execution means executes an effect of a type corresponding to the information shown in the effect corresponding image displayed in the specific mode based on the establishment of the second condition.
.

According to gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of gaming machines AH1 to AH3, the following effect is achieved. That is, as the mode of the linked image, the mode in which one of a plurality of effect-corresponding images showing information corresponding to the type of effect is displayed in a specific mode is determined by the mode determination means. Each time the operation content on the operation means becomes the first operation content, the effect-corresponding image displayed in the specific mode is changed in a predetermined order by the linked image display means. A type of effect corresponding to the information shown in the effect-corresponding image displayed in the specific mode is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of the second condition.

This allows the player to easily understand the type of effect being executed by the effect execution means simply by checking the information shown in the effect-corresponding image displayed in a specific manner, thereby providing the effect that the operation means can be operated so that the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the type of effect preferred by the player is displayed in a specific manner.

In the gaming machine AH4, the mode determining means determines at least one of the performance-corresponding images to be displayed in a specific mode and an order of the performance-corresponding images to be changed to the specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated.
5.

According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AH4, one
Since the order of the performance-compatible images changed to a specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated is determined at least by the mode determination means, the order of the performance-compatible images changed to a specific mode can be determined in advance. Therefore, when the operation means is actually operated, it is possible to more quickly specify the performance-compatible images to be displayed in a specific mode.

Gaming machine AH5 is characterized in that it is provided with a counting means for counting the number of times the effects executed by the effect execution means are executed for each type of effect, and the mode determination means determines the order of effect-corresponding images corresponding to the type of effect whose execution counted by the counting means has met a predetermined specific condition, as an order in which the specific mode will be changed by operating the first operation content a specific number of times or less.

The gaming machine AH6 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AH5.
The number of times the effects executed by the effect execution means are executed is counted by the counting means for each type of effect. The order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the type of effect whose execution number counted by the counting means is a number that satisfies a predetermined specific condition is determined by the mode determination means as an order in which the images are changed to a specific mode by an operation of a first operation content that is performed a specific number of times or less.

This allows the presentation of the type of execution count that meets a specific condition to be changed to a specific form with a specific number of operations or less, making it easier to select the presentation of the type of execution count that meets a specific condition, thereby improving convenience for the player.

In gaming machine AH6, the mode determination means determines the order of effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of a first number of effects in order of the number of times they are executed counted by the counting means, as the order in which they are changed to the specific mode by operating the first operation content the specific number of times or less.

According to the gaming machine AH7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AH6, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to the first number of effects counted by the counting means is determined by the mode determining means as the order in which the effect-corresponding images are changed to a specific mode by the operation of the first operation content less than a specific number of times, so that the effect-corresponding images that have been changed to a specific mode relatively many times and that are likely to be changed to a specific mode by the player this time can be changed to a specific mode with a small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect of further improving the convenience for the player.

In the gaming machine AH7, the mode determining means determines the order of the effect corresponding images corresponding to the first number of effects in a manner such that the greater the number of executions counted by the counting means, the greater the order of the effect corresponding images corresponding to the first number of effects.
The gaming machine AH8 is characterized in that it determines the number of operations of the first operation content until it is changed to the specific mode so as to be small.

According to gaming machine AH8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AH7, the order of the effect-corresponding images corresponding to each of the first number of effects is determined by the mode determination means such that the more the number of executions counted by the counting means, the fewer the number of operations of the first operation content until it is changed to a specific mode. Therefore, since the effect-corresponding images that the player is more likely to want to change to a specific mode can be changed to a specific mode with fewer operations, there is an effect of further improving convenience for the player.

In any one of the gaming machines AH6 to AH8, when the operation of the first operation content is executed within a predetermined period after the first condition is established, the order of the performance-corresponding images that were displayed in a specific manner in the linked image that was displayed first after the first condition was established is changed to:
A gaming machine AH9 characterized by having a setting means for setting the order in which a specific mode is changed by operating the first operation content a second or more times, at least in the next determination by the mode determination means.

According to the gaming machine AH9, in any of the gaming machines AH6 to AH8, when an operation of the first operation content is executed within a predetermined period after the first condition is established, the order of the performance-corresponding images displayed in a specific mode in the linked image displayed for the first time after the first condition is established is set by the setting means so that the order is determined to be changed to the specific mode by the operation of the first operation content a second number or more times at least in the next determination by the mode determination means. Since it is considered that the player is unlikely to want to change the performance-corresponding images changed from a specific mode within a predetermined period to a specific mode even when the linked image is displayed next time, by setting such performance-corresponding images to an order in which they are changed to a specific mode by a relatively large number of operations of a second number or more, the performance-corresponding images that the player is likely to want to change to a specific mode can be set to an order in which they are changed to a specific mode by a relatively small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be further improved.

In any one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH9, the second condition is established when the operation content of the operation means becomes a specific operation content.
H10.

According to the gaming machine AH10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines AH1 to AH9, the second condition is established when the operation content of the operation means becomes a specific operation content, so that when the player operates the operation means with the specific operation content, a type of effect corresponding to the state of the linked image displayed at that time can be executed. Thus, there is an effect that the player himself can select the effect that he likes.

<Feature AI group> (Change the playback position of a song depending on how the song was selected)
a first selection means for selecting one of the plurality of effects as a performance to be executed by the performance execution means based on the establishment of a first condition; a second selection means for selecting one of the plurality of effects as a performance to be executed by the performance execution means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition; and a start position setting means for setting the first start position as the start position of the performance selected by the first selection means and setting the second start position as the start position of the performance selected by the second selection means among a plurality of start positions set for each of the plurality of effects, the start position including at least a first start position and a second start position different from the first start position.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a varying number of symbols, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Some of these conventional gaming machines are also equipped with audio output devices such as speakers, and are configured to be able to perform not only visual but also auditory presentations, thereby diversifying the types of presentations and increasing interest (for example, JP 2003-326663 A; see, for ...
(Publication No. 5886).

Some of these conventional gaming machines are capable of randomly selecting and playing one piece of music from a plurality of pieces of music pre-set in the gaming machine as a type of auditory presentation during a predetermined period during normal play. Some of these gaming machines are also configured to allow the player to select the type of music to be played during the predetermined period in addition to playing a randomly selected piece of music during the predetermined period.

However, with such conventional gaming machines, there is a problem in that the player may not listen carefully to the randomly selected music during a specified period of time and may change it to music that the player prefers, meaning that most of the music set in the gaming machine may not be played at all.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AI1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the first selection means as the effect to be executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a first condition. On the other hand, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the second selection means as the effect to be executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. Of the plurality of start positions including at least a first start position and a second start position different from the first start position, which are set for each of the plurality of effects, the first start position is set by the start position setting means as the start position of the effect selected by the first selection means. On the other hand, the second start position is set by the start position setting means as the start position of the effect selected by the second selection means.

This allows the effect to be started from a different start position depending on whether the effect is selected by the first selection means or the second selection means.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine AI2, comprising: an operation means operable by a player; an operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means; and a selection period setting means for setting a selection period for selecting an effect to be executed by the effect execution means, wherein the first selection means selects an effect of a type corresponding to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period; and the second selection means selects one effect from among the plurality of effects based on the selection period being set by the selection period setting means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI1, the gaming machine AI2 has the following effects.
An operation on an operation means operable by a player is detected by an operation detection means. A selection period for selecting an effect to be executed by the effect execution means is set by a selection period setting means. A first selection means selects an effect according to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period. Based on the selection period selected by the selection period setting means, a second selection means selects one effect from among the multiple effects.

This has the effect of diversifying the presentation style, since the starting position of the presentation can be made different depending on whether or not the presentation has been selected by the player operating the operating means.

Gaming machine AI3 is characterized in that it is equipped with an audio data playback means capable of playing back audio data, and an audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data played back by the audio data playback means, and the effect execution means causes the audio data playback means to play back audio data corresponding to any one of a plurality of mutually different musical pieces as the effect.

The gaming machine AI3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machines AI1 and AI2. That is, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproduction means, and the audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means is output by the audio output means. The audio data corresponding to any one of a plurality of different pieces of music is reproduced by the audio data reproduction means as an effect by the effect execution means.

This makes it possible to vary the playback start position of a song depending on whether the song is selected by the first selection means or the second selection means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In gaming machine AI3, the audio data is composed of a data group that becomes one song by playing multiple data in a predetermined specific order, and the start position setting means sets the playback to start from a first data among the multiple data that constitute the data group corresponding to the selected song when a song is selected by the first selection means, and sets the playback to start from a second data different from the first data when a song is selected by the second selection means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI3, the gaming machine AI4 has the following effects.
The audio data is composed of a data group that becomes one song by playing back a plurality of data in a predetermined specific order. When a song is selected by the first selection means, the start position setting means sets the playback to start from a first data among the plurality of data that make up the data group corresponding to the selected song. On the other hand, when a song is selected by the second selection means, the start position setting means sets the playback to start from a second data different from the first data.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load when setting the playback start position since the playback start position of the music can be changed simply by selecting one piece of data corresponding to the type of the selection means from the data group as the data from which playback starts.

Gaming machine AI4 comprises an operation means that can be operated by a player, an operation detection means that detects an operation on the operation means, and a selection period setting means that sets a selection period for selecting a song to be executed by the performance execution means, wherein the first selection means selects one song in accordance with the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means during the selection period, the second selection means selects one song from the plurality of songs based on the selection period being selected by the selection period setting means, and the first data is data set to the first order of the specific orders.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI4, the gaming machine AI5 has the following effects.
An operation on an operation means operable by a player is detected by an operation detection means. A selection period for selecting a piece of music to be executed by the performance execution means is set by a selection period setting means. During the selection period, one piece of music is selected by a first selection means according to the operation content on the operation means detected by the operation detection means. Based on the selection period selected by the selection period setting means, one piece of music is selected from the plurality of pieces of music by a second selection means.
The first data is made up of data that is set to a first order in a particular order.

This allows the music piece selected by the player by operating the operating means to be played back from the beginning, so that the player can listen to the music piece he or she voluntarily selected from the beginning at their leisure, which has the effect of giving the player a greater sense of satisfaction when listening to the music piece.

Gaming machine AI6 is characterized in that in gaming machine AI5, the second selection means randomly selects one piece of music from the plurality of pieces of music.

According to gaming machine AI6, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine AI5, one piece of music is randomly selected from a plurality of pieces of music by the second selection means, so that the music set in the gaming machine can be played back efficiently.

Gaming machine AI7, in the gaming machine AI5 or AI6, is characterized in that the second data is composed of data including at least the most characteristic melody in a piece of music.

According to gaming machine AI7, in addition to the effects of gaming machines AI5 or AI6, the second data is composed of data including at least the most characteristic melody in the music, so that when the selection period starts, the player can listen to at least the most characteristic melody of the music selected by the second selection means and then decide whether or not to play another music by operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine AI3, the audio data is composed of one piece of data that becomes one piece of music when played back, and the plurality of start positions are a plurality of playback positions that are preset for the audio data corresponding to each piece of music.
8.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI3, the gaming machine AI8 has the following effects.
The audio data is composed of one piece of data that becomes one piece of music when played back. A plurality of start positions are composed of a plurality of playback positions that are preset for the audio data corresponding to each piece of music.

This has the advantage of putting the audio data into the simplest format possible.

<Feature AJ Group> (Rearrange the data of the music being played according to the progress of the game)
a performance data group storage means for storing performance data groups each of which is used to execute a single performance by the performance execution means and which are composed of a plurality of data, for each type of the plurality of performances; a performance data group selection means for selecting from the performance data group storage means a performance data group corresponding to the type of performance determined by the performance determination means; a data setting means for setting the plurality of data constituting the performance data group selected by the performance data group selection means to be used by the performance execution means in a predetermined specific order; and an order changing means for changing the order in which the plurality of data are used to an order different from the specific order depending on the progress of a game.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a varying number of symbols, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Some of these conventional gaming machines are also equipped with audio output devices such as speakers, and are configured to be able to perform not only visual but also auditory presentations, thereby diversifying the types of presentations and increasing interest (for example, JP 2003-326663 A; see, for ...
(Publication No. 5886).

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are configured to be capable of playing music as a type of auditory presentation during a predetermined period during normal play.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period will end before the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the song, is played, and the playback of the song will end. This poses the problem that players who are unable to hear the chorus part may feel dissatisfied.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AJ1, one of a plurality of predetermined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. One effect to be executed by the effect execution means is determined from the plurality of effects by the effect determination means. An effect data group composed of a plurality of data used to execute one effect by the effect execution means is stored for each of the plurality of effect types by the effect data storage means. An effect data group corresponding to the type of effect determined by the effect determination means is selected from the effect data group storage means by the effect data group selection means. A data setting means sets the plurality of data constituting the effect data group selected by the effect data group selection means to be used by the effect execution means in a predetermined specific order. Depending on the progress of the game, the order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means to an order different from the specific order.

This has the effect of allowing the performance to be executed optimally.

In the gaming machine AJ1, the data setting means sets the data of the first order in the specific order to be used by the performance execution means based on the completion of execution of the performance using the data of the last order in the specific order.

According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ1, the data setting means sets the data of the first order in the specific order to be used by the performance execution means based on the completion of the performance using the data of the last order in the specific order. Therefore, when the performance execution means completes the execution of one performance, the performance is restarted from the beginning of the performance.
Therefore, even if the execution of the effect using the last sequence data is completed, a period without any effect can be prevented, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the player in the game.

Gaming machine AJ3 is characterized in that it is provided with a discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on the establishment of a predetermined discrimination condition in gaming machine AJ1 or AJ2, and a bonus game execution means which executes a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, and the performance execution means executes one of the multiple performances during the execution of the bonus game.

The gaming machine AJ3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machines AJ1 and AJ2. That is, a determination is made by a determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by a bonus game execution means based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. During the execution of the bonus game, one of a plurality of effects is executed by an effect execution means.

This has the effect of allowing the presentation to be executed optimally during bonus play.

In gaming machine AJ3, the group of presentation data provided for each of the multiple types of presentations is at least composed of first data corresponding to a specific presentation pattern set for each type of presentation and second data different from the first data, and the order changing means changes the order in which the multiple data are used so that the first data is used by the presentation execution means at least once before the bonus game is completed.

The gaming machine AJ4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AJ3.
The effect data group provided for each of the types of effects is composed of at least first data corresponding to a specific effect mode set for each type of effect, and second data different from the first data.
The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means so that the data are used by the performance execution means each time.

This has the effect of enabling a specific presentation mode to be executed at least once during the execution of a bonus game.

In the gaming machine AJ4, the order changing means changes the order in which the multiple data are used so that the first data is used by the performance execution means during a predetermined specific period in the bonus game.

According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AJ4, the order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means so that the first data is used by the performance execution means during a predetermined specific period in the bonus game.
This has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy playing during the bonus game as one of the pleasures of entering a specific period.

Gaming machine AJ6 is any one of gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, comprising an audio data playback means capable of playing back audio data, and an audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data played back by the audio data playback means, wherein the performance execution means causes the audio data playback means to play back one of a plurality of predetermined musical pieces, and the performance data group is composed of a plurality of audio data for playing back one musical piece.

According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, the audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means, and the audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means. Any one of a plurality of predetermined musical pieces is reproduced by the performance execution means on the audio data reproducing means. The performance data group is composed of a plurality of audio data for reproducing one musical piece.

This makes it possible to create an auditory effect by playing music, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine AJ7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AJ6, the group of performance data is composed of sound data for each part that constitutes one piece of music.

According to gaming machine AJ7, in addition to the effect of gaming machine AJ6, the group of performance data is composed of sound data on a part-by-part basis that constitutes one piece of music, so that even if the order in which the multiple data are used is changed by the order changing means, the transition in the sound pattern can be made to be less unnatural.

In the gaming machine AJ7, a determination means for performing a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a specific judgment result obtained by the judgment means, wherein the effect execution means causes the audio data playback means to play one of the plurality of songs during the execution of the bonus game, the effect data group provided for each type of the plurality of songs being composed of at least first data for playing a specific part set for each type of song and second data for playing a part different from the specific part, and the order changing means changes the order in which the plurality of data are used so that the first data is used by the effect execution means at least once before the bonus game is completed.

The gaming machine AJ8 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AJ7.
A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. During the bonus game, one of a plurality of songs is played by the performance execution means on the audio data playback means. A group of performance data provided for each type of a plurality of songs is composed of at least first data for playing a specific part set for each type of song, and second data for playing a part different from the specific part. The order in which the plurality of data are used is changed by the order changing means so that the first data is used by the performance execution means at least once until the bonus game is completed.

This allows the specific part to be played back at least once before the bonus game ends, which has the effect of satisfying a player who has been listening to the music in anticipation of the specific part.

Gaming machine AJ9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AJ8, it is provided with an operation means that can be operated by a player, and the performance determination means determines one piece of music from among the plurality of pieces of music depending on the operation content on the operation means.

According to gaming machine AJ9, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine AJ8, one piece of music is selected from a plurality of pieces of music by a performance determination means in accordance with the operation content of the operation means that can be operated by the player, so that a specific part of a piece of music that the player voluntarily selected can be played at least once before the bonus game ends.

<Feature AK group> (When ending playback of a song, play up to the playback position of the breakpoint before ending the song)
a first performance execution means for executing a first performance based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition;
A gaming machine AK1 comprising: a progress status determination means for determining a progress status of the first performance being executed by the performance execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition while the first performance is being executed by the performance execution means; a second performance execution means for executing a second performance different from the first performance when the progress status determined by the progress status determination means satisfies a predetermined second condition; and a suppression means for suppressing the execution of the second performance by the second performance execution means when the progress status determined by the progress status determination means does not satisfy the second condition.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a varying number of symbols, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Some of these conventional gaming machines are also equipped with audio output devices such as speakers, and are configured to be able to perform not only visual but also auditory presentations, thereby diversifying the types of presentations and increasing interest (for example, JP 2003-326663 A; see, for ...
(Publication No. 5886).

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are configured to be capable of playing music as a type of auditory presentation during a predetermined period during normal play.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the predetermined period will end during the playback of the chorus part, which is the most characteristic part of the song, and the chorus part will be cut off halfway. This causes a problem that players who cannot fully hear the chorus part may feel dissatisfied.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AK1, a first performance is executed by a first performance execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and a progress status determination means determines the progress of the first performance executed by the performance execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition while the first performance is being executed by the first performance execution means. If the progress status determined by the progress status determination means satisfies a predetermined second condition, a second performance different from the first performance is executed by the second performance execution means. If the progress status determined by the progress status determination means does not satisfy the second condition, the execution of the second performance by the second performance execution means is suppressed by a suppression means.

This has the effect of allowing the first performance to be executed optimally.

In the gaming machine AK1, the suppression means suppresses at least the second presentation from being executed until the progress satisfies the second condition.

According to gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine AK1, the suppression means suppresses the execution of at least the second presentation until the progress satisfies the second condition, thereby providing the effect of enabling the first presentation to be executed more suitably.

The gaming machine AK3 is characterized in that it is provided with an execution control means for controlling the second performance execution means to start execution of the second performance, regardless of whether the progress status satisfies the second condition, based on the period during which the execution of the second performance is suppressed by the suppression means becoming equal to or longer than a predetermined first period, in the gaming machine AK2.

According to gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine AK2, the execution control means controls so that the execution of the second effect is started by the second effect means based on the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppression means becoming equal to or longer than a predetermined first period, regardless of whether the progress satisfies the second condition. This has the effect of preventing the period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed from becoming too long, thereby preventing the period for executing the second effect from becoming excessively short.

In any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK3, a variable ball entry means is provided which can change between a first state where a gaming ball can enter the game and a second state where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the game than the first state, a discrimination means which executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable game execution means which executes a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means, and the first performance execution means is
The gaming machine AK4 is characterized in that the first presentation is executed based on the start of the variable game, and the second presentation execution means executes the second presentation during a period from the end of the last change to the first state in one of the variable games to the elapse of a predetermined second period.

According to the gaming machine AK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable between a first state where the game ball can enter and a second state where the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state. A determination is performed by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state a predetermined number of times is executed by the variable game execution means based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. A first effect is executed by the first effect execution means based on the start of the variable game. A second effect is executed by the second effect execution means during a period from the end of the final change to the first state in one variable game to the elapse of a predetermined second period.

This has the effect of preventing the first performance, which has been performed while the change to the first state is being performed a predetermined number of times, from being terminated halfway due to the start of the second performance.

In the gaming machine AK4, the first presentation is configured to include at least a specific presentation period during which a specific presentation mode is executed within a presentation period, and the suppression means suppresses the second presentation execution means from executing the second presentation when the progress status determination means determines that it is the specific presentation period.

The gaming machine AK5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AK4.
The performance period of the first performance includes at least a specific performance period in which a specific performance mode is executed. When the progress status determination means determines that the specific performance period is in progress, the suppression means suppresses the second performance from being executed by the second performance execution means.

This has the effect of allowing a particular performance mode to be executed for a longer period of time.

A gaming machine AK6, comprising: a period discrimination means for discriminating a period during which the execution of the second effect is suppressed by the suppression means; and a second presentation mode selection means for selecting, based on the period discriminated by the period discrimination means, one presentation mode that will end before the second period has elapsed from among a plurality of presentation modes that can be executed as the second effect.

The gaming machine AK6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AK4 or AK5. That is, the period during which the suppression means suppresses the execution of the second effect is determined by the period determination means. Based on the period determined by the period determination means, one effect that will end before the second period has elapsed is selected by the second effect mode selection means from among a plurality of effect modes that can be executed as the second effect.

This has the effect of ensuring that the second performance is completed before the second period has elapsed.

Gaming machine AK7 is any one of gaming machines AK1 to AK6, comprising: audio data playback means capable of playing back audio data; and audio output means capable of outputting audio corresponding to the audio data played back by the audio data playback means, wherein the first performance execution means executes the first performance by causing the audio data playback means to play a specified piece of music; and the suppression means suppresses the second performance from being executed by the second performance execution means when the progress determination means determines that a specific playback range of the specified piece of music is being played back.

The gaming machine AK7 has the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AK1 to AK6: the audio data reproducing means reproduces audio data, and the audio output means outputs audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means.
The first performance execution means executes the first performance by causing the audio data playback means to play back the predetermined music piece. When the progress determination means determines that a specific playback range of the predetermined music piece is being played back, the suppression means suppresses the second performance execution means from executing the second performance.

This allows the second effect to be executed while a specific playback range in a song is being played back, and the playback of the specific playback range can be prevented from being interrupted, thereby having the effect of satisfying players who wish to listen to the specific playback range.

A gaming machine AK7 is provided with an operation means operable by a player, and the first performance execution means causes the audio data playback means to play one piece of music corresponding to the operation content of the operation means from among a plurality of predetermined pieces of music.
K8.

According to the gaming machine AK8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AK7, one piece of music corresponding to the operation of the operation means operable by the player is reproduced by the first performance execution means from among a plurality of predetermined pieces of music, so that a specific reproduction range of the music voluntarily selected by the player can be reproduced for a longer period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who selected the music can feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine AK9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AK7 or AK8, the specific playback range is configured to include at least a part of the chorus part of a song.

According to the gaming machine AK9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AK7 and AK8, the specific playback range is configured to include at least a part of the chorus part of the song, so that the chorus part, which is generally the most exciting part of the song, can be played for a longer period of time, thereby providing an effect of satisfying the player.

<Feature AL Group> (Provide songs that can only be selected by random selection)
a performance execution means for executing one of a plurality of predetermined performances based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition; a first selection means for selecting one performance from the plurality of performances based on the establishment of the execution condition in a state where a predetermined specific condition is established as a performance to be executed by the performance execution means;
and a second selection means for selecting one effect from among the plurality of effects, excluding at least a specific effect, based on the execution condition being satisfied when the specific condition is not satisfied.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a varying number of symbols, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Some of these conventional gaming machines are also equipped with audio output devices such as speakers, and are configured to be able to perform not only visual but also auditory presentations, thereby diversifying the types of presentations and increasing interest (for example, JP 2003-326663 A; see, for ...
(Publication No. 5886).

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are configured to allow the player to select one piece of music from a plurality of pieces of music preset in the gaming machine during a predetermined period during normal play, and to play the music selected by the player as a type of auditory presentation.
Among the options that the player can select, some include an item indicating the name of the song to be played, as well as an item indicating that the song will be selected at random, making it possible to meet the diverse needs of players to the greatest extent possible.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, there is little benefit to having music selected randomly, so the problem is that most players end up choosing music that they like, and the frequency with which items for which music is selected randomly is low.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AL1, one of a plurality of predefined effects is executed by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition. As the effect to be executed by the effect execution means, one effect is selected from the plurality of effects by the first selection means based on the establishment of the execution condition in a state where a predetermined specific condition is established.
As a performance to be executed by the performance execution means, one performance is selected by a second selection means from among the multiple performances excluding at least the specific performance, based on the execution condition being established in a state in which the specific condition is not established.

This allows the execution of a specific effect to be varied depending on whether a specific condition is met, so that the player can focus on whether a specific condition is met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AL1 is provided with a display means capable of displaying an image, an operation means operable by a player, and a linked image display means for displaying on the display means a linked image whose appearance changes in accordance with the operation content on the operation means based on the establishment of a predetermined display condition, wherein the first selection means selects one effect from among the multiple effects based on the establishment of the execution condition when the linked image in a specific appearance is displayed on the display means as the specific condition, and the second selection means selects an effect corresponding to the appearance of the linked image based on the establishment of the execution condition when the linked image in an appearance different from the specific appearance is displayed on the display means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AL1, the gaming machine AL2 has the following effects.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined display condition, a linked image whose appearance changes in accordance with the operation content on the operation means is displayed on the display means by the linked image display means. Based on the establishment of an execution condition in a state where a linked image of a specific appearance is displayed on the display means as a specific condition, one effect is selected from among a plurality of effects by the first selection means. Based on the establishment of an execution condition in a state where a linked image of an appearance different from the specific appearance is displayed on the display means, a performance corresponding to the appearance of the linked image is selected by the second selection means.

This allows the player to select whether to have the first selection means select the effect or the second selection means select the effect by operating the operation means, thereby providing the effect that the player himself can select the method of selecting the effect that suits his/her preference.

In the gaming machine AL2, a voice data reproducing means capable of reproducing voice data, and a voice output means capable of outputting a voice corresponding to the voice data reproduced by the voice data reproducing means,
a plurality of patterns that can be set as the linked image are composed of images of patterns representing different pieces of music, and the second selection means is configured to select a piece of music corresponding to the pattern of the linked image.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AL1 and AL2, gaming machine AL3 provides the following effects. That is, audio data is reproduced by audio data reproduction means, and audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproduction means is output by audio output means. The multiple patterns that can be set as the linked image are composed of images of patterns showing different music pieces. The music piece corresponding to the pattern of the linked image is selected by the second selection means.

This allows a player to operate the operating means to select a linked image showing a piece of music that the player likes, thereby allowing the player to play the music that the player likes, thereby providing an audio style that suits the tastes of each player.

Gaming machine AL4 is equipped with a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and an advantage setting means for setting an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the discrimination by the discrimination means resulting in a first discrimination result, in any one of gaming machines AL1 to AL3, wherein the performance execution means executes one of the multiple performances based on the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the first selection means selects one performance from among the multiple performances, excluding at least a specific performance, when the discrimination by the discrimination means results in a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine AL4, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AL1 to AL3, the following effect is achieved. That is, a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a first determination result, a wealthy gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set by the advantage setting means. Based on the determination by the determination means,
Any one of the multiple effects is executed by the effect execution means. When the determination by the determination means results in a first determination result, one effect is selected from the multiple effects by the first selection means, while when the determination by the determination means results in a second determination result different from the first determination result, one effect is selected from among the multiple effects excluding at least a specific effect by the first selection means.

This makes it possible for the player to recognize that an advantageous gaming state will be set when a specific presentation is selected by the first selection means, thereby having the effect of drawing the player's attention to the type of presentation selected by the first selection means.

The gaming machine AL5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AL4, it is provided with a notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous gaming state is set, and the execution condition is established at least before the notification effect is executed.

The gaming machine AL5 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AL4.
A notification performance for notifying whether or not a game state is set is executed by a notification performance execution means.
The execution condition is established at least before the notification performance is executed.

As a result, if a specific effect is selected by the first selection means, it is determined that a favorable game state will be established before the notification effect is confirmed, so that a player who wishes to know early on whether or not a favorable game state will be set can play in the hope that an effect will be selected by the first selection means.

In the gaming machine AL5, the first determination result or the second determination result is determined by the determination means.
and an unfavorable setting means for setting an unfavorable game state that is less favorable than the advantageous game state as the game state after the bonus game executed based on the first determination result is completed, wherein the advantageous setting means sets the advantageous game state as the game state after the bonus game executed based on the first determination result is completed, and the effect execution means executes an effect during the execution of the bonus game.

The gaming machine AL6 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AL5.
When the discrimination by the discrimination means results in the first discrimination result or the second discrimination result, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. As the game state after the bonus game executed based on the second discrimination result is terminated, an unfavorable game state that is less favorable than the advantageous game state is set by the disadvantage setting means. As the game state after the bonus game executed based on the first discrimination result is terminated, the advantageous setting means sets the advantageous game state. During the execution of the bonus game, an effect is executed by the effect execution means.

As a result, when a specific presentation is executed, the bonus game is executed, which is advantageous for the player, and further, it is confirmed that the game state after the bonus game ends will be an advantageous game state, so that there is an effect of giving the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

A gaming machine AL6 is provided with a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display execution means for executing on the display means a dynamic display of identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, wherein the gaming machine AL6 comprises a first mode determination means for determining whether a first mode in which a first identification information is displayed in a static state or a second mode in which a second identification information is displayed in a static state as a mode of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed based on the determination by the determination means being the first determination result, and a second mode determination means for determining the first mode as a mode of the dynamic display of the identification information to be executed based on the determination by the determination means being the second determination result.
The gaming machine AL7 is characterized by comprising:

The gaming machine AL7 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AL6.
A dynamic display of the identification information indicating the result of the determination by the determination means is executed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means. As the mode of dynamic display of the identification information to be executed based on the determination by the determination means being a first determination result, either a first mode in which the first identification information is displayed in a frozen state or a second mode in which the second identification information is displayed in a frozen state is determined by the first mode determination means. As the mode of dynamic display of the identification information to be executed based on the determination by the determination means being a second determination result, the first mode is determined by the second mode determination means.

As a result, when dynamic display of identification information is executed in the first mode, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the first discrimination result or the second discrimination result has been obtained, and this has the effect of allowing the player to play the game by focusing on whether or not a specific presentation is selected by the first selection means.

Gaming machine AL8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AL7, the first selection means is configured so that the rate of selecting the specific presentation is higher when the discrimination means determines the first discrimination result and dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first mode than when the discrimination means determines the first discrimination result and dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the second mode.

According to the gaming machine AL8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AL7, the first
and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the second mode, the case where the determination by the determination means results in the first determination result is more likely to be the case where the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the first mode than the case where the determination result by the determination means results in the first determination result and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in the second mode.
Since the rate at which a specific presentation is selected by the first selection means increases, there is an effect that when dynamic display of identification information is executed in the first mode, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that a specific presentation will be selected by the first selection means.

<Feature AM group> (The range of the history area is changed according to the amount of accumulated history information)
a display means for displaying an image, a storage means including at least a first storage area capable of storing data relating to a game and a second storage area different from the first storage area, a storage control means for controlling the storage means so that a predetermined plurality of data are stored, a display control means for controlling the storage control means so that an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is displayed on the display means, a first data setting means for setting specific data which satisfies a predetermined specific condition from among the plurality of data as data to be stored in the first storage area by the storage control means, a second data setting means for setting one or more pieces of data from among the plurality of data which are different from the specific data as data to be stored in the second storage area by the storage control means, and an additional data setting means for, when the number of pieces of data set by the first data setting means is less than a predetermined specific number, adding one or more pieces of data from among the data which are different from the specific data to the data set by the first data setting means as data to be stored in the first storage area by the storage control means.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a varying number of symbols, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Some of these conventional gaming machines are also equipped with audio output devices such as speakers, and are configured to be able to perform not only visual but also auditory presentations, thereby diversifying the types of presentations and increasing interest (for example, JP 2003-326663 A; see, for ...
(Publication No. 5886).

However, there is a demand for further diversification of presentations.

Furthermore, some of these conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to play music as a type of auditory presentation during a specified period of time during normal play, and are also configured to allow the player to select the type of music to be played within the specified period.

However, such conventional gaming machines had a problem in that the more diverse the number of songs available in the gaming machine, the more difficult it became for a player to find a song he or she liked from the list of songs available for selection.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AM1, the storage means is composed of a first storage area capable of storing data related to a game and a second storage area different from the first storage area. The storage control means controls so that a plurality of predetermined data are stored in the storage means. The storage control means controls so that an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is displayed on the display means. The first data setting means sets specific data that satisfies a predetermined specific condition among the plurality of data as data to be stored in the first storage area by the storage control means. The second data setting means sets one or more data from among the plurality of data that are different from the specific data as data to be stored in the second storage area by the storage control means. When the number of data set by the first data setting means does not reach the predetermined specific number, the additional data setting means sets one or more data from among the data that are different from the specific data as data to be stored in the first storage area by the storage control means by adding them to the data set by the first data setting means.

This has the effect of allowing data to be set preferably, since even if the number of data set by the first data setting means does not reach the specific number, data can be added and set by the additional data setting means.

In the gaming machine AM1, the display control means displays an image according to the order of the data stored in the first memory area and the second memory area.

According to the gaming machine AM2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AM1, images corresponding to the order of the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area are displayed by the display control means, so that the images can be made different depending on the order of the data. Thus, there is an effect that the display mode can be diversified.

Gaming machine AM3, in which the additional data setting means in gaming machine AM1 or AM2 adds and sets data to be stored in the first memory area so that the number of data stored in the first memory area becomes a specific number.

According to the gaming machine AM3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AM1 and AM2, the data to be stored in the first storage area is additionally set by the additional data setting means so that the number of pieces of data stored in the first storage area becomes a specific number, so that even if the number of pieces of data set by the first data setting means does not reach the specific number, the number of pieces of data set in the first storage area can be reliably set to the specific number. Thus, there is an effect that data can be set more suitably.

In any one of the gaming machines AM1 to AM3, the additional data setting means additionally sets data to be stored in the first storage area in descending order of priority from data having a preset higher priority among data different from the specific data.
M4.

According to gaming machine AM4, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines AM1 to AM3, data to be stored in the first memory area is additionally set by the additional data setting means in order of data with a high pre-set priority from among data other than the specific data, so that when the number of data set by the first data setting means does not reach the specific number, data can be set more suitably in the first memory area.

In any one of the gaming machines AM1 to AM4, an operation means operable by a player and an operation detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means are provided, and the display control means is
A gaming machine AM5 characterized in that, while an image corresponding at least to data stored in a memory area and the second memory area is displayed, when the operation detection means detects an operation on the operation means, the appearance of the image is changed in conjunction with the content of the operation on the operation means.

The gaming machine AM5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AM1 to AM4. That is, an operation on an operation means operable by a player is detected by the operation detection means. When an operation on the operation means is detected by the operation detection means while an image corresponding to at least the data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is being displayed,
The display control means changes the appearance of the image in response to the operation of the operating means.

This allows the display mode to be changed in conjunction with the operation of the operation means by the player, so that the player can operate the operation means until the display mode of his/her choice is achieved, thus providing the player with the enjoyment of selecting the display mode.

In the gaming machine AM5, the display control means causes the display means to display an image group composed of a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area, and the image group is such that an image corresponding to one of the plurality of data is displayed in a first mode and other images are displayed in a second mode different from the first mode, and the display control means changes the image displayed in the first mode in conjunction with the operation content on the operation means.
6.

The gaming machine AM6 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AM5.
An image group consisting of a plurality of images corresponding to a plurality of data stored in the first storage area and the second storage area is displayed on the display means by the display control means.
An image corresponding to one data item is displayed in a first manner, and other images are displayed in a second manner different from the first manner. The image displayed in the first manner is changed by the display control means in association with the operation content on the operation means.

This has the effect of allowing the image displayed in the first mode to be changed in conjunction with the operation content of the player on the operating means, thereby allowing the player to select the image he or she wants to display in the first mode.

In the gaming machine AM6, the image corresponding to the data stored in the first storage area is
A gaming machine AM7, characterized in that the number of operations on the operating means can be changed to the first mode within a predetermined specific number of times.

According to gaming machine AM7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine AM6, the image corresponding to the data stored in the first memory area can be changed by operating the operating means a predetermined number of times within a specific number of times, thereby improving convenience for a player who wishes to change the image corresponding to the data stored in the first memory area to a first form.

Gaming machine AM8 is characterized in that it is provided with a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect of a form corresponding to the image that has been changed to the first form based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied while the image group is being displayed, in gaming machine AM6 or AM7.

According to gaming machine AM8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines AM6 or AM7, when a predetermined specific condition is met while a group of images is being displayed, a specific presentation of a type corresponding to the image that has been changed to the first type is executed by a specific presentation execution means, thereby providing the effect of allowing the player to select the type of specific presentation.

Gaming machine AM9 is characterized in that it is equipped with an audio data playback means capable of playing back audio data, and an audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data played back by the audio data playback means, and the specific performance execution means causes the audio data playback means to play audio data for outputting music corresponding to an image that has been changed to the first aspect as the specific performance.

The gaming machine AM9 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AM8.
The audio data is reproduced by the audio data reproducing means. The audio corresponding to the audio data reproduced by the audio data reproducing means is output by the audio output means.
The specific performance execution means causes the audio data reproducing means to reproduce audio data for outputting a piece of music corresponding to the image that has been changed to the above aspect.

This allows the player to select the music to be played, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest.

<Feature AN group> (Select whether to match the sound mode to the actual round number or the number of rounds in the performance)
A specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance based on the satisfaction of either a predetermined first condition or a second condition different from the first condition, a suggested performance execution means for executing a suggested performance that suggests the satisfaction of the first condition at least before the specific performance is executed based on the satisfaction of the second condition, a first mode setting means for setting a first mode as the mode of the specific performance that is executed based on the satisfaction of the first condition, and
The gaming machine AN1 is characterized by comprising: a second mode setting means for setting a second mode different from the first mode as the mode of the specific performance when the suggested performance is not executed by the suggested performance execution means; and a third mode setting means for setting either the first mode or the second mode as the mode of the specific performance when the second condition is met and the suggested performance is executed by the suggested performance execution means.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a varying number of symbols, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. Some of these conventional gaming machines are also equipped with audio output devices such as speakers, and are configured to be able to perform not only visual but also auditory presentations, thereby diversifying the types of presentations and increasing interest (for example, JP 2003-325 A).
(Publication No. 886).

However, there is a demand for further diversification of presentations.

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are also known ones that can suggest through effects whether or not a winning game will be awarded, and whether or not the end of a winning game will result in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a high probability state). In such conventional gaming machines, the player can play the game while paying attention to whether or not effects that suggest advantageous contents for the player are executed. Furthermore,
There are also machines that, when it has been determined that the player will be in an advantageous state, execute a presentation suggesting that the player will be in a disadvantageous state for a specified period of time, and then, after the specified period has elapsed, execute a presentation suggesting that the player will be in an advantageous state (a so-called reversal presentation).

However, for players who want to know early on whether or not they will move into an advantageous state, when a reversal effect is executed, the timing at which they find out whether or not they will move into an advantageous state is delayed, which can cause dissatisfaction for the player.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AN1, a specific effect is executed by a specific effect execution means based on the establishment of either a predetermined first condition or a second condition different from the first condition.
A suggested performance suggesting the fulfillment of a condition is executed by the suggested performance execution means. A first mode is set by the first mode setting means as the mode of a specific performance executed based on the fulfillment of a first condition. When a second condition is fulfilled and a suggested performance is not executed by the suggested performance execution means, a second mode different from the first mode is set by the second mode setting means as the mode of the specific performance. When a second condition is fulfilled and a suggested performance is executed by the suggested performance execution means, either the first mode or the second mode is set by the third mode setting means as the mode of the specific performance.

This has the effect of making the player aware that the second condition has been established when the second mode is set by the third mode setting means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AN2 comprising: a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination means; and a type determination means for determining, as a type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one type from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game, wherein the first condition is established when the first bonus game is determined by the type determination means, and the second condition is established when the second bonus game is determined by the type determination means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AN1, the gaming machine AN2 has the following effects.
A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the determination by the determination means resulting in a specific determination result. As the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one type is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. The first condition is established when the first bonus game is determined by the type determination means, while the second condition is established when the second bonus game is determined by the type determination means.
This occurs when a bonus game is determined.

This has the effect that when the second mode is set by the third mode setting means, the player can be made to realize that the more advantageous second bonus game has been decided, allowing the player to play the game while paying more attention to the mode of the specific presentation.

The gaming machine AN2 is provided with a first notification effect execution means for executing a first notification effect to notify a first degree of advantage corresponding to the degree of advantage of the first bonus game, based on the first bonus game being determined by the type determination means, and a second notification effect execution means for executing a second notification effect to notify a second degree of advantage corresponding to the degree of advantage of the second bonus game, based on the second bonus game being determined by the type determination means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means executes, as the suggestive effect, an effect that is difficult to distinguish from the first notification effect.

The gaming machine AN3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AN2. That is, based on the first bonus game being determined by the type determination means, a first notification effect for notifying a first degree of advantage corresponding to the degree of advantage of the first bonus game is executed by the first notification effect execution means. Based on the second bonus game being determined by the type determination means, a second notification effect for notifying a second degree of advantage corresponding to the degree of advantage of the second bonus game is executed by the second notification effect execution means. As a suggestive effect, an effect in a manner difficult to distinguish from the first notification effect is executed by the suggestive effect execution means.

This allows the player to recognize the type of bonus game depending on the type of notification effect being executed, which has the effect of allowing the player to pay more attention to the type of notification effect while playing the game.

In the gaming machine AN2 or AN3, a first ball is difficult to enter during the execution of the bonus game.
a variable ball entry means for changing the state of the game machine AN4 from a first state to a second state in which a game ball can enter the game machine AN4, and a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, wherein the second bonus game is a game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state more times than the first bonus game, the specific presentation is a game in which a specific presentation pattern is executed at least once during one presentation period, and the first pattern is a game in which the period from the start of execution of the specific presentation to the execution of the specific presentation pattern is shorter than that of the second pattern.

According to the gaming machine AN4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AN2 and AN3, the variable ball entry means is changed from a first state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the ball during the bonus game to a second state in which the gaming ball can enter the ball. A predetermined bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means based on the entry of the gaming ball into the variable ball entry means. The number of times the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state during the second bonus game is set to 100 times the number of times the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state.
The number of times is greater than the number of times of bonus play. A specific performance mode is executed at least once during a performance period of one specific performance. The period from the start of execution of the specific performance to the execution of the specific performance mode is shorter in the first mode than in the second mode.

This has the effect of shortening the period until a specific presentation mode is executed in the case of the first bonus game in which the number of times the game is changed to the second state is small and the period until the bonus game ends is likely to be short, thereby making it possible to more reliably execute the specific presentation mode until the bonus game ends regardless of the type of bonus game.

A gaming machine AN5 comprising an audio data playback means capable of playing back audio data, and an audio output means for outputting audio corresponding to the audio data played by the audio data playback means, wherein the specific performance execution means causes the audio data playback means to play audio data corresponding to a specific piece of music as the specific performance, the specific performance mode being an audio mode output when a specific playback range of the specific piece of music is played, the first mode setting means sets the audio data corresponding to the specific piece of music so that playback begins from a first playback position, and the second mode setting means sets the audio data corresponding to the specific piece of music so that playback begins from a second playback position at which the period until playback of the specific playback range begins is longer than at the first playback position.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AN4, the gaming machine AN5 has the following effects.
The audio data is played by the audio data playing means, and audio corresponding to the audio data played by the audio data playing means is output by the audio output means. As a specific performance, audio data corresponding to a specific piece of music is played by the specific performance execution means to the audio data playing means. When a specific playback range of the specific piece of music is played, a specific performance mode is output. The audio data corresponding to the specific piece of music is set by the first mode setting means so that playback starts from a first playback position. The audio data corresponding to the specific piece of music is set by the second mode setting means so that playback starts from a second playback position at which the period until playback of the specific playback range starts is longer than the first playback position.

This has the effect of making it possible to play back a specific playback range until the bonus game ends, regardless of the type of bonus game.

In the gaming machine AN5, the specific playback range is a playback range that includes the most distinctive melody in the music.

According to the gaming machine AN6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AN5, since the specific playback range is a playback range including the most characteristic melody in the music, the characteristic melody part that the player is likely to want to hear can be more reliably played before the bonus game ends.

Gaming machine AN7, characterized in that in gaming machine AN5 or AN6, the audio data corresponding to the specific song is composed of a data group that enables playback of one of the specific songs by playing multiple data in a predetermined specific order, the first mode setting means sets the data group constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific song so that playback begins from a first data, and the second mode setting means sets the data group constituting the audio data corresponding to the specific song so that playback begins from a second data that is played earlier than the first data in the specific order.

The gaming machine AN7 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines AN5 and AN6. That is, the sound data corresponding to a specific piece of music is composed of a data group that allows one specific piece of music to be played by playing a plurality of pieces of data in a predetermined specific order. The first mode setting means sets the data group constituting the sound data corresponding to the specific piece of music so that playback starts from the first data. The second mode setting means sets the data group constituting the sound data corresponding to the specific piece of music so that playback starts from the second data that is played before the first data in the specific order.

This makes it possible to vary the playback position by a simple process of selecting and playing one data item from a data group, thereby providing the effect of making it possible to set the playback position when starting playback of a piece of music with a small processing load.

Gaming machine AN8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AN2 to AN7, the suggested effect execution means executes the suggested effect when the execution of the bonus game is started, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect when a predetermined specific condition is met during the execution of the bonus game.

According to the gaming machine AN8, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AN2 to AN7, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the execution of the bonus game is started, a suggestive effect is executed by the suggestive effect execution means. When a predetermined specific condition is established during the execution of the bonus game, a bonus game is executed by the specific effect execution means.

This makes it difficult to distinguish whether the first bonus game or the second bonus game has been decided until the specific condition is established when the suggestive performance is executed, and has the effect of keeping the player excited about the second bonus game until the specific condition is established.

<Feature AO group> (music pieces used during normal play are preferentially placed in menu positions that make them easy to select)
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect of a type corresponding to the state of the linked image displayed on the display means based on a second condition being satisfied while the linked image is displayed by the linked image display means; a second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect based on a predetermined execution condition being satisfied; a type determination means for determining the type of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means from a plurality of types; and a mode setting means for setting a mode corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determination means as the mode of the linked image initially displayed by the linked image display means when the first condition is satisfied.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are known gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In these conventional gaming machines, the display device displays a varying number of symbols, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. Some of these conventional gaming machines are also equipped with audio output devices such as speakers, and are configured to be able to perform not only visual but also auditory presentations, thereby diversifying the types of presentations and increasing interest (for example, JP 2003-326663 A; see, for ...
(Publication No. 5886).

However, there is a demand for further diversification of presentations.

Furthermore, some of these conventional gaming machines are configured to be able to play music as a type of auditory presentation during a specified period of time during normal play, and are also configured to allow the player to select the type of music to be played within the specified period.

However, such conventional gaming machines had a problem in that the more diverse the number of songs available in the gaming machine, the more difficult it became for a player to find a song he or she liked from the list of songs available for selection.

In response to this, according to the gaming machine AO1, a linked image whose appearance changes in conjunction with the operation content of the operation means is displayed on the display means by the linked image display means based on the establishment of a first condition. Based on the establishment of a second condition in a state in which the linked image is displayed by the linked image display means, a first performance of a type corresponding to the appearance of the linked image displayed on the display means is displayed on the display means.
The first effect is executed by the effect execution means. A second effect different from the first effect is executed by the second effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition, and the type of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means is determined from a plurality of types by the type determination means. When the first condition is established, the type of the linked image to be initially displayed by the linked image display means can be set by the type setting means to a mode corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determination means.

This has the effect of diversifying the appearance of linked images.

In the gaming machine AO1, the linked image is composed of a plurality of effect corresponding images showing different types of the first effect, the mode setting means sets a display mode in which one of the effect corresponding images is displayed in a specific mode as a mode of the linked image, and the linked image display means changes the effect corresponding image displayed in the specific mode in a predetermined order every time the operation content on the operation means becomes the first operation content,
The gaming machine AO2 is characterized in that the effect execution means executes the first effect of the type indicated by the effect corresponding image displayed in the specific manner based on the second condition being established.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AO1, the gaming machine AO2 has the following effects.
The linked image is composed of a plurality of performance corresponding images showing different types of first performances.
A display mode in which one performance-corresponding image is displayed in a specific mode is set by the mode setting means as the mode of the linked image. Each time the operation content on the operation means becomes the first operation content, the performance-corresponding image displayed in the specific mode by the linked image display means is changed in a predetermined order.
A specific effect of a type indicated by the effect corresponding image displayed in a specific manner is executed by the effect execution means on the basis that the second condition is established.

This allows the player who sees the effect-corresponding image that has been changed to a specific mode to easily understand the type of the first effect that is executed based on the establishment of the second condition. Therefore, by operating the operating means, it is possible to have the player select the type of the first effect that he or she likes.

In the gaming machine AO2, the mode setting means at least sets one of the performance-corresponding images to be displayed in a specific mode and a sequence of the performance-corresponding images to be changed to the specific mode when the operation of the first operation content is repeated.
3.

According to the gaming machine AO3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AO2, one
Since the performance-compatible images and the order of the performance-compatible images that are changed to a specific mode when the first operation content is repeated are set at least by the mode setting means, there is an effect that when the operation means is actually operated, the performance-compatible images to be displayed in a specific mode can be specified earlier.

Gaming machine AO4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AO2 or AO3, the mode setting means is configured to be able to set the mode of the linked image so that the performance corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second performance determined by the type determination means can be changed to the specific mode by operating the first operation content within a specific number of times.

According to the gaming machine AO4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AO2 and AO3, the mode of the linked image is set by the mode setting means so that the effect corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second effect determined by the type determination means can be changed to a specific mode by the operation of the first operation content within a specific number of times, so that the effect corresponding image corresponding to the type of the second effect executed by the second effect execution means can be changed to a specific mode with a small number of operations. Therefore, there is an effect that convenience for the player can be improved.

The gaming machine AO4 is further provided with a counting means for counting the number of times the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means for each type of the second effect, and the mode setting means is configured to be capable of setting the mode of the linked image so that the effect corresponding image corresponding to the second effect of a type whose number of times counted by the counting means satisfies a predetermined specific condition can be changed to the specific mode by operating the first operation content within a specific number of times.

The gaming machine AO5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AO4.
The number of times the second performance is executed by the second performance executing means is counted by the counting means for each type of the second performance. The mode setting means sets the mode of the linked image so that the performance corresponding image corresponding to the type of second performance whose number counted by the counting means satisfies a predetermined specific condition can be changed to a specific mode by an operation of the first operation content within a specific number of times.

This has the effect of improving convenience for the player since the effect-corresponding image corresponding to the type of second effect that has been executed a sufficient number of times to satisfy a specific condition can be changed to a specific form with a relatively small number of operations.

In the gaming machine AO5, the mode setting means sets the mode of the linked image so that the effect corresponding image corresponding to the type of second effect having a greater number of times counted by the counting means can be changed to the specific mode by fewer operations of the first operation content.

According to gaming machine AO6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AO5, the mode of the linked image is set by the mode setting means so that the effect-corresponding image corresponding to a type of second effect having a larger number of times counted by the counting means can be changed to a specific mode with fewer operations of the first operation content, thereby providing the effect of further improving convenience for the player.

In any one of the gaming machines AO1 to AO6, the second condition is established when the operation content on the operation means becomes a second operation content.
O7.

According to gaming machine AO7, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines AO1 to AO6, when the operation content on the operation means becomes the second operation content, a second condition is established, so that the effect is that the first performance can be executed by the first performance execution means at any timing of the player's choosing.

<Feature AP group> (based on the determination of a specific jackpot type, a state is formed in which a specific jackpot type is more likely to be determined in the next jackpot)
a determination means for determining whether a determination condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, for a predetermined period of time, identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the identification information for indicating a specific determination result being statically displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, a bonus game type setting means for setting one type of the bonus game among a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game more advantageous to a player than the first bonus game as types of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, a first state in which the second bonus game is set at a first rate by the bonus game type setting means, and
a state changing means for changing a second state that can be set at a second rate higher than the rate of the first state, and the second state is changed when a predetermined specific condition is met between the time when the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result in the first state is stopped and the time when the bonus game is ended.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning scheme that gives an advantage to the player when a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot results in a winning combination.
Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and by varying the game value that can be obtained, they aim to increase the interest during the winning period (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417). Also, some conventional gaming machines, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, aim to increase the interest by providing different degrees of advantage by varying the game state provided after the winning or by varying the number of winning balls that can be obtained in each round.

Furthermore, among conventional gaming machines, there are some that determine the type of win (number of rounds) when the gaming ball passes through a predetermined area after a win has been won.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the type of winning is determined at a fixed rate by lottery, so the game can sometimes become monotonous, and there is a risk that it may be difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In contrast to this, in the gaming machine AP1, a discrimination is made by the discrimination means based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period of time by the dynamic display means. In the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, based on the identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result being statically displayed, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means. The types of bonus games executed by the bonus game execution means include the following:
A bonus game type setting means sets one type of bonus game among a plurality of types including at least a bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. A state changing means changes a first state in which the second bonus game is set at a first rate by the bonus game type setting means, and a second state in which the second bonus game can be set at a second rate higher than the first rate. When a predetermined specific condition is met during the period from when an identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state until the bonus game is completed,
The state is changed to the second state.

As a result, the second bonus game is set with a high probability when the second state is reached, so that the player can play the game in anticipation of the second state being reached, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AP1, a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state are provided.
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a game state including a first game state and a second game state including a second game state and a third game state, and the state changing means changes the state to the second state at least before the game state after the bonus game is ended is set by the game state setting means when the specific condition is established between the time when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and the time when the bonus game is ended.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP1, the gaming machine AP2 has the following effects.
A game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. When a specific condition is established during the period from when identification information showing a specific determination result is stopped and displayed in the first state until the bonus game is completed, the state is changed to the second state by the state changing means at least before the game state after the bonus game is completed is set by the game state setting means.

This allows the player to recognize at different times whether the state is changed to the second state and whether the advantageous second game state is set, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous during the execution of the bonus game.

In the gaming machine AP1 or AP2, the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition after the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed, and the predetermined execution condition is a first execution condition and a second execution condition.
and a second execution condition different from the execution condition of the first state, and the state changing means changes the state to the second state based on the second execution condition being established after the identification information indicating the specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed in the first state.

The gaming machine AP3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine AP1 or AP2. That is, a bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined execution condition after the display of the identification information showing a specific determination result is stopped. The predetermined execution condition includes at least a first execution condition and a 22nd execution condition different from the first execution condition. The state is changed to the second state by the state changing means based on the establishment of a second execution condition after the display of the identification information showing a specific determination result is stopped in the first state.

This allows the player to play the game in the hope that the second execution condition will be met, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine AP4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AP3, the bonus game type setting means sets the second bonus game based on the establishment of the second execution condition.

According to the gaming machine AP4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine AP3, the second bonus game is set by the bonus game type setting means based on the establishment of the second execution condition, so that the player can be made to have a stronger expectation that the second execution condition will be established, thereby having the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In a gaming machine AP4, the predetermined execution conditions include at least the first execution condition, the second execution condition, and a third execution condition different from both the first execution condition and the second execution condition, the second state is one in which the third execution condition is more likely to be established after the identification information indicating the specific judgment result is displayed in a stopped state than in the first state, and the bonus game type setting means sets the second bonus game based on the establishment of the third execution condition.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP4, the gaming machine AP5 has the following effects.
The predetermined execution conditions include at least a first execution condition, a second execution condition, and a third execution condition different from both the first and second execution conditions. In the second state, the third execution condition is more likely to be established after the identification information showing a specific determination result is stopped and displayed than in the first state. The second bonus game is set by the bonus game type setting means based on the establishment of the third execution condition.

This allows the player to play the game in the hope of entering the second state in which the third execution condition is likely to be met, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine AP6, in which the state changing means in the gaming machine AP5 changes the state to the first state based on the fact that the third execution condition is satisfied in the second state.

According to gaming machine AP6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AP5, when the third execution condition is satisfied in the second state, the state changes from the second state to the first state, thereby preventing the second state from continuing for a long time and becoming excessively advantageous for the player.

Any one of the gaming machines AP1 to AP6 is provided with a first entry area into which a gaming ball can enter, a second entry area different from the first entry area, a distribution means configured to be able to distribute gaming balls to either the first entry area or the second entry area and distributing the gaming balls to the second entry area at the first ratio, a third entry area different from both the first entry area and the second entry area, and a variable means capable of changing the third entry area between a first position where a gaming ball can enter the third entry area and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, and the bonus game type setting means is the first bonus game is set based on a game ball entering the first entry zone after the identification information for indicating the specific judgment result is stopped and displayed, the second bonus game is set based on a game ball entering the second entry zone, and the second bonus game is set based on a game ball entering the third entry zone, and the state changing means changes the state changing means to the first position based on a game ball entering the second entry zone when the state changing means is changed to the second position.

According to the gaming machine AP7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AP1 to AP6, the following effect is achieved. That is, the distribution means distributes the gaming balls to either the first entry area where the gaming balls can enter or the second entry area different from the first entry area. The second area is distributed at a first ratio. The variable means is configured to be variable to a first position where the gaming ball can enter a third entry area different from both the first entry area and the second entry area, and a second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The bonus game type setting means sets a first bonus game based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first entry area after the identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed, while the bonus game type setting means sets a second bonus game based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second entry area or the third entry area. When the variable means is changed to the second position, the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position by the state variable means based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entry area.

This has the effect of allowing the player to easily understand the type of bonus game set by the bonus game type setting means and whether or not the variable means is variable to the first position, simply by checking the ball entry area where the game ball enters.

In the gaming machine AP7, the first winning area, the second winning area, and the distribution means,
a ball entry means at least provided inside thereof and configured to allow a game ball to enter the ball entry means; a second variable means that can be changed between a first ball entry position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second ball entry position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first ball entry position;
The second determination result is determined based on the identification information being displayed in a static manner.
A gaming machine AP8 characterized by having a variable control means for changing the ball entry position from the ball entry position to the first ball entry position.

The gaming machine AP8 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AP7.
A first ball entry area, a second ball entry area, and a distribution means are provided inside the ball entry means. The second variable means is configured to be variable between a first ball entry position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second ball entry position at which it is more difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means than the first ball entry position. Based on the fact that the identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is a low index, the second variable means is variable from the second ball entry position to the first ball entry position by the variable control means.

This makes it possible to prevent the game ball from entering the ball entry means even when a specific determination result has not been obtained, and therefore makes it possible to prevent the variable means from being variable to the first position in the normal state, thereby preventing the player from being excessively advantageous.

Gaming machine AP9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AP8, it is provided with a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball at least in a first direction and in a second direction different from the first direction, the ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter the ball, and the third ball entry area is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter the ball.

The gaming machine AP9 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AP8.
The launching means is configured to be able to launch game balls in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. A ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the first direction can enter, while a third ball entry area is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter.

As a result, when a specific determination result is obtained while the variable means is in the first position, the game ball can be reliably made to enter the third entry area simply by shooting the game ball in the second direction, thereby improving convenience for the player.

The gaming machine AP10 comprises a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter, a third variable means which can be changed to a first variable position at which the gaming ball can enter the first ball entry means and a second variable position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first variable position, a second ball entry means through which a gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter, and a game state setting means which sets one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the third variable means is more likely to be changed to the first variable position than the first game state, and the discrimination condition is established at least when the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and when the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means.

The gaming machine AP10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AP9. That is, a first ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball shot in a first direction can enter the ball.
The third variable means is configured to be variable between a first variable position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second variable position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first variable position. The second ball entry means is provided at a position where the game ball launched in the second direction can enter. One game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state in which the third variable means is more likely to be changed to the first variable position than in the first game state. The discrimination condition is at least satisfied when the game ball enters the first ball entry means and when the game ball enters the second ball entry means.

As a result, when the second game state is set with the variable means changed to the first position, the discrimination condition can be established while maintaining the variable means at the first position by simply continuing to shoot the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, after the variable means is changed to the first position, it is possible to prevent the variable means from being changed to the second position before a specific discrimination result is reached.

<Feature AQ group> (In the case of a 1-type 2-type time-saving, provide a state where 1 type is more advantageous and a state where 2 types are more advantageous)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the establishment of any one of a plurality of execution conditions including at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition; a type setting means for setting one type from a plurality of types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game more advantageous to a player than the first bonus game as a type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means; and a type setting means for setting one type from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state.
a first state in which the second bonus game is set more easily by the type setting means when the second execution condition is satisfied than when the first execution condition is satisfied in at least the second game state; and a second state in which the second bonus game is set more easily by the type setting means when the first execution condition is satisfied than when the second execution condition is satisfied in at least the second game state.
and a state switching means for switching between the state and
1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines execute a winning game that is advantageous to the player when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning game. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some aim to increase interest during winning by varying the game value that can be acquired (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417). Also, some conventional gaming machines aim to increase interest by providing different degrees of advantage by varying the game state granted after winning or by varying the number of prize balls that can be acquired in each round, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds.

Furthermore, among conventional gaming machines, there are some that execute a winning game when the gaming ball enters a specific area provided on the board, in addition to the lottery based on the winning of the starting winning hole. Also, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that have different rates of advantageous winning types between the winning of the lottery based on the starting winning and the winning of the ball entering the specific area.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the probability of winning a favorable type of prize is fixed for each opportunity to win, so the game can become monotonous. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AQ1, a bonus game advantageous to a player is executed by a bonus game execution means based on the establishment of any one of a plurality of execution conditions including at least a first execution condition and a second execution condition different from the first execution condition. As a type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one game state is set by a game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game more advantageous to a player than the first bonus game. In at least the second game state, a first state in which the type setting means is more likely to set the second bonus game if the second execution condition is established than the first execution condition, and a second state in which the type setting means is more likely to set the second bonus game if the first execution condition is established than the second execution condition, are switched by a state switching means.

As a result, in the second gaming state, depending on whether it is the first state or the second state,
Since it is variable whether the second bonus game becomes easier to set when the first execution condition is satisfied or the second bonus game becomes easier to set when the second execution condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AQ1, a specific area into which a gaming ball can enter is provided, and the first execution condition is:
A gaming machine AQ2 is characterized in that it is established based on the gaming ball entering the specific area.

According to gaming machine AQ2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine AQ1, the first execution condition is established based on the gaming ball entering a specific area, so that the player can easily determine whether or not a bonus game will be executed by simply checking whether or not the gaming ball enters the specific area, thereby improving convenience for the player.

In the gaming machine AQ2, the specific area is provided inside a ball entry means configured to allow a game ball to enter the ball entry means, a variable means for varying the ball entry means between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable means for changing the ball entry means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means becoming a first discrimination result.
and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game whose position is changed, wherein the second execution condition is established based on the judgment result by the judgment means being a second judgment result different from the first judgment result.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ2, the gaming machine AQ3 has the following effects.
A specific area is provided inside the ball entry means.
The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. When the discrimination means determines that the first discrimination result is obtained, a variable game is executed by a variable game execution means in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time. When the discrimination means determines that the second discrimination result is obtained, the second execution condition is established.

This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the result of the determination by the determining means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AQ3, the ball entry means has a first specific area and a second specific area as the specific area.
and a specific area is provided at least inside the gaming machine AQ4, and the state switching means switches to the second state based on a gaming ball entering the second specific area in the first state.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ3, the gaming machine AQ4 has the following effects.
At least a first specific area and a second specific area are provided inside the ball entry means, and the state is switched to the second state by the state switching means based on the game ball entering the second specific area in the first state.

This allows the player to easily determine whether or not the state will be switched to the second state simply by checking whether or not the game ball will enter the second specific area, thereby improving convenience for the player.

Gaming machine AQ4 is characterized in that it is equipped with a distribution means for distributing a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to one of a plurality of areas including at least the first specific area and the second specific area, and the type setting means sets the first bonus game based on the gaming ball entering the first specific area, and sets the second bonus game based on the gaming ball entering the second specific area.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AQ4, the gaming machine AQ5 has the following effects.
A game ball that has entered the ball entry means is allocated by an allocation means to one of a plurality of areas including at least a first specific area and a second specific area. A first bonus game is set by the type setting means based on the game ball entering the first specific area, while a second bonus game is set by the type setting means based on the game ball entering the second specific area.

This has the effect of improving convenience for the player since the player can easily determine the type of bonus game to be executed simply by checking the type of specific area into which the game ball has landed.

In the gaming machine AQ4 or AQ5, a second ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a third specific area is provided inside the second ball entry means as the specific area. A third position at which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the third position are provided.
and a second variable means capable of varying the position of the first specific area to a fourth specific area, the type setting means being configured to set the second special game based on the game ball entering the third specific area, the first state being a state in which the second variable means is varied to the fourth position, and the second state being a state in which the second variable means is varied to the third position.
.

According to the gaming machine AQ6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AQ4 and AQ5, the following effect is achieved. That is, a third specific area is provided as a specific area inside the second ball entry means.
The second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the third position. A second special game is set by the type setting means based on the game ball entering the third specific area.
The first state is achieved by the variable means being changed to the fourth position, while the second state is achieved by the second variable means being changed to the third position.

This has the effect of allowing the player to easily understand whether it is in the first state or the second state by checking the state of the second variable means.

In gaming machine AQ6, the second variable means is characterized in that it is changed to the fourth position based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means while it is changed to the third position, AQ7.

According to the gaming machine AQ7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AQ6, the second variable means is changed to the fourth position based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means while the second variable means is changed to the third position, so that the state in which the second variable means is placed at the third position continues for a long time can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect of suppressing excessive advantage for the player.

In the gaming machine AQ6 or AQ7, the type setting means, at least in the second gaming state, based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result,
Gaming machine AQ8 is characterized in that the second bonus game is set at a first rate, and the ball entry means is configured to cause the game balls that enter the second specific area at a second rate that is lower than the first rate.

The gaming machine AQ8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machines AQ6 and AQ7: That is, in at least the second gaming state, based on the determination result by the determination means becoming the second determination result, the type setting means sets the second bonus game at a first ratio.
The ball entry means is configured so that the game balls that enter the ball enter the second specific area at a second rate lower than the first rate.

As a result, in the first state, the probability that the second bonus game will be set is higher when the determination by the determination means is the second determination result, so that the player can play the game in anticipation of the second determination result rather than the specific determination result by the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while paying more attention to the determination result by the determination means.

Gaming machine AQ9 is any of gaming machines AQ6 to AQ8, and is equipped with a launching means configured to be able to launch a gaming ball at least in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, wherein the ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter the ball and where a gaming ball launched in the second direction has difficulty entering the ball, and the second ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter the ball and where a gaming ball launched in the first direction has difficulty entering the ball.

Gaming machine AQ9 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines AQ6 to AQ8. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch gaming balls in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction. The ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the first direction can enter the ball hole, and where a gaming ball launched in the second direction has difficulty entering the ball hole. The second ball entry means is provided at a position where a gaming ball launched in the second direction can enter the ball hole, and where a gaming ball launched in the first direction has difficulty entering the ball hole.

This has the effect of easily varying the type of ball entry means depending on the direction in which the game ball is launched, thereby improving convenience for the player.

<Feature AR Group> (For the special 1 AV challenge, multiple types with different AV winning expectations are provided)
a ball entry means through which game balls can enter; a variable means for varying a first position at which game balls can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for game balls to enter than the first position; a first flow path configured to allow game balls that have entered the ball entry means to flow down; a second flow path different from the first flow path; a distribution means for distributing game balls that have entered the ball entry means to one of a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path; and a position at which game balls distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means can enter at a first ratio and game balls distributed to the second flow path can enter at a second ratio higher than the first ratio. a specific area provided in the ball entry means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a game ball entering the specific area, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, which is one of a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means is more likely to be distributed to the second flow path than in the first variable game.
and a type setting means for setting the type of variable game.

Here, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a ball entry port that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and an AV winning device is opened during a specific game (small win game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entry port. When the game ball enters the AV winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided within the AV winning device, a pachinko machine has been proposed that can grant a bonus game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the interest of players (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2011-010741 A).

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are those that are configured to be capable of executing a presentation that suggests the expectation of whether or not a bonus game to be awarded when a specific area is passed during a specific game is of an advantageous type. In such conventional gaming machines, when it is suggested that the expectation of an advantageous type of bonus game is high, it is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation of passing through the specific area.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the rate at which the gaming ball passes through a specific area when a specific game is executed is the same, so even if a favorable type is suggested to have a high expectation, it is difficult to increase the player's interest.

In contrast, in the game machine AR1, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position. The distribution means distributes the game ball that entered the ball entry means to one of a plurality of paths including at least a first path through which the game ball that entered the ball entry means can flow down and a second path different from the first path. A specific area is provided at a position where the game balls distributed to the first path by the distribution means can enter at a first rate, and the game balls distributed to the second path can enter at a second rate higher than the first rate. Based on the game ball entering the specific area, the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player. A determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period is executed by the variable game execution means based on the determination result by the determination means being a specific determination result. As the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, one type of variable game is set by the type setting means from a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means is more likely to be distributed to the second flow path than in the first variable game.

As a result, the rate of balls entering the specific area is higher when the second variable game is set than when the first variable game is set, so that when the discrimination result by the discrimination means becomes a specific discrimination result, the player can have a strong expectation that the second variable game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect of being able to increase the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AR1, the first variable game is configured to make it difficult for a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to flow into the second flow path, and the second variable game is configured to make it difficult for a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to flow into the first flow path, and the type setting means sets one type of variable game from a plurality of types including at least the first variable game, the second variable game, and a third variable game in which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow into both the first flow path and the second flow path.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AR1, the gaming machine AR2 has the following effects.
In the first variable game, it is difficult for a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to flow into the second flow path, while in the second variable game, it is difficult for a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to flow into the first flow path. A type of one variable game is set by the type setting means from a plurality of types including at least the first variable game, the second variable game, and a third variable game in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow into both the first flow path and the second flow path.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game since the possibility of the game ball entering a specific area can be varied depending on the type of variable game set by the type setting means.

In the gaming machine AR1 or AR2, the specific area includes a first specific area provided at a position where the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path can enter at the first ratio, and a second specific area provided at a position where the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path can enter at the first ratio.
and a second specific area that is provided at a position where the gaming balls distributed to the flow path can enter at the second ratio.

According to the gaming machine AR3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AR1 and AR2, a first specific area is provided at a position where the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path can enter at a first rate, while a second specific area is provided at a position where the gaming balls distributed to the second flow path can enter at a second rate, so that the player can easily know whether the gaming ball has entered the specific area by checking the specific area corresponding to the type of the distributed flow path. Therefore, there is an effect of improving the convenience for the player.

In the gaming machine AR3, the first flow path is provided with a passing means through which a gaming ball can pass, and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on the gaming ball passing through the passing means.

According to the gaming machine AR4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine AR3, a bonus game is executed by a bonus game execution means based on the passing of the gaming ball through the passing means provided in the first flow path, so that there is an effect of increasing the player's anticipation for the bonus game when the gaming ball is allocated to the first flow path.

In the gaming machine AR4, the first flow path includes a first path in which the passing means is provided,
and a second path not provided with the passage means,
The game ball that has passed through the first path and the game ball that has passed through the second path are both
The gaming machine AR5 is characterized in that the ball enters the first specific area at a rate of .

The gaming machine AR5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AR4.
The first flow path is at least composed of a first path provided with a passing means and a second path not provided with a passing means, and is configured so that both the game balls that have passed through the first path and the game balls that have passed through the second path enter the first specific area at a first ratio.

This allows the player to play the game in the hope of passing through the first route, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AR5, a gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path has passed through the first path,
A gaming machine A characterized by comprising a shielding means for making it difficult to visually determine whether the second path has been passed.
R6.

According to the gaming machine AR6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AR5, since the shielding means makes it difficult to see whether the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path has passed through the first path or the second path, even if the gaming ball has passed through the second path, the player can expect that it has passed through the first path. Therefore, there is an effect of being able to increase the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine AR7 is characterized in that it is provided with a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect indicating whether a gaming ball has entered the specific area during the execution period of the variable game based on the execution of the variable game, and the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a presentation mode indicating that the gaming ball has not entered the specific area if the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path has not entered the first specific area, regardless of whether it has passed through the passing means.

The gaming machine AR7 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AR6.
Based on the execution of the variable game, a specific effect indicating whether the game ball entered the specific area during the execution period of the variable game is executed by the specific effect execution means. When the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path does not enter the first specific area, regardless of whether it has passed through the passing means,
A specific performance execution means executes a specific performance in a performance mode indicating that the ball did not enter the specific area.

This makes it possible to keep it unclear for a longer period of time whether or not the bonus game will be executed after passing through the passing means, thereby having the effect of sustaining the player's anticipation of the bonus game for a longer period of time.

The gaming machine AR8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AR7, a second effect execution means is provided which, when a gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path passes through the passing means and does not enter the first specific area, executes a second effect indicating that the bonus game will be executed after the specific effect ends.

According to the gaming machine AR8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AR7, when the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path passes through the passing means and does not enter the first specific area, the second effect indicating that a bonus game will be executed is executed by the second effect execution means after the specific effect ends, so that when the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path does not enter the first specific area, the player can play the game in the hope that the second effect will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines AR1 to AR8, the type setting means is a first variable game, a second variable game, and a game ball that has entered the ball entry means is entered into the first flow path and the second flow path.
A gaming machine AR9 is characterized in that one type of variable game is set from among a plurality of types including at least a fourth variable game that cannot flow into the flow path.

According to the gaming machine AR9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AR1 to AR8,
The type setting means sets one type of variable game from among a plurality of types including at least a variable game, a second variable game, and a fourth variable game in which a game ball that enters the ball entry means cannot flow into either the first flow path or the second flow path, so that when the discrimination means gives a specific discrimination result, it is possible to play the game with the strong hope that the fourth variable game will not be executed.

<Feature AS group> (Even if a game ball is distributed to a route on the AV winning port side with a low time-saving expectation, a game ball that enters after that can enter an AV winning port with a high time-saving expectation)
In a gaming machine having an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a variable means capable of changing the position between a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, a discrimination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, the gaming machine further comprises a first flow path through which the gaming ball that has entered the entry means can flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path can flow down a first specific area provided at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the second flow path can enter; a second specific area provided at a position where a gaming ball flowing down the second flow path can enter; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a gaming ball entering any one of a plurality of specific areas including at least the first specific area and the second specific area, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that a period from when a gaming ball flowing into the first flow path enters the first specific area is likely to be longer than a period from when a gaming ball flowing into the second flow path enters the second specific area.
S1.

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and an AV winning device is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening. When the game ball enters the AV winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the AV winning device, a pachinko machine has been proposed that can grant a special game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2011-0107 A).
(Publication No. 41).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that have a plurality of specific areas on the board, and are configured so that the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is awarded when a specific area is passed through during a specific game is variable depending on the type of specific area.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, there is only one specific area into which the gaming ball can enter in one particular game, and there was a problem in that if the gaming ball progressed toward a specific area with a low degree of advantage, this significantly reduced the player's expectations.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AS1, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the fact that the discrimination means has determined a specific discrimination result, a variable game in which the variable means is biased from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time is executed by the variable game execution means. A first flow path and a second flow path different from the first flow path are provided at a position where the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means can flow down. A first specific area is provided at a position where the gaming ball that flowed down the first flow path can enter, while a second specific area is provided at a position where the gaming ball that flowed down the second flow path can enter. Based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered any of a plurality of specific areas including at least the first specific area and the second specific area, a special game advantageous to the player is executed by the special game execution means. The period during which the game ball flows into the first flow path and enters the first specific area is configured to be likely to be longer than the period during which the game ball flows into the second flow path and enters the second specific area.

This makes it possible to lengthen the period until the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area, so that when the game ball flows into the first flow path, the player can be made to look forward to the game ball entering the first specific area and the bonus game being executed for a longer period of time, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AS1, at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game which is more advantageous to a player than the first bonus game are provided as types of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, and the bonus game execution means is configured to execute the second bonus game at a first rate when a gaming ball enters the first specific area, and to execute the second bonus game at a second rate higher than the first rate when the ball enters the second specific area.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AS1, the gaming machine AS2 has the following effects.
At least a first bonus game and a second bonus game which is more advantageous to a player than the first bonus game are provided as types of bonus games executed by the bonus game execution means. When a game ball enters a first specific area, the bonus game execution means executes a second bonus game at a first rate, and when a game ball enters a second specific area, the bonus game execution means executes a second bonus game at a second rate higher than the first rate.
A bonus game is executed.

This makes it possible to give the player strong anticipation for the game ball to flow into the second flow path, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AS1 or AS2, a distribution means configured to be variable to a plurality of distribution states including at least a first distribution state in which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance means is distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the gaming ball is distributed to the second flow path, a distribution control means for changing the distribution state of the distribution means in a predetermined variable pattern during the execution of the variable game, and a first period during which the distribution means is in the first distribution state and a second period during which the distribution means is in the second flow path as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means. a second period during which the second distribution state is achieved; and a specific type setting means capable of setting a specific variable game in which at least the variable means is changed to the first position, wherein the gaming machine is configured so that the timing at which a gaming ball distributed to the second flow path during the second period enters the second specific area is more likely to be earlier than the timing at which a gaming ball distributed to the first flow path during the first period enters the first specific area in one of the specific variable games.

The gaming machine AS3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AS1 or AS2. That is, the distribution means is configured to be variable to a plurality of distribution states including at least a first distribution state in which the gaming ball that entered the ball entrance means is distributed to the first flow path and a second distribution state in which the gaming ball is distributed to the second flow path. The distribution state of the distribution means is changed in a predetermined variable pattern by the distribution control means during the execution of a variable game. As a type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, a specific type setting means sets a specific variable game in which the variable means is changed to at least the first position during a first period in which the distribution means is in the first distribution state and a second period in which the distribution means is in the second distribution state. The game machine is configured so that the timing at which a game ball distributed to the second flow path during a second period enters the second specific area is likely to be earlier than the timing at which a game ball distributed to the first flow path during a first period enters the first specific area in one specific variable game.

This has the effect of preventing the player from becoming confused as to whether to focus on the second specific area or the first specific area, since when the game ball enters the ball entry means in both the first and second periods, it becomes clear whether the ball will enter the first specific area or not after the result of whether the ball will enter the second specific area or not is announced.

In the gaming machine AS3, the gaming balls distributed to the first flow path enter the first specific area at a first ball entry rate, and the gaming balls distributed to the second flow path enter the first specific area at a first ball entry rate.
A gaming machine AS4 characterized in that balls enter the second specific area at a second ball entry rate lower than the first ball entry rate.

The gaming machine AS4 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AS3.
The first flow path is configured so that game balls distributed to the first flow path enter a first specific area at a first ball entry rate, and the second flow path is configured so that game balls distributed to the second flow path enter a second specific area at a second ball entry rate lower than the first ball entry rate.

As a result, when the game ball enters the ball entry means in both the first period and the second period, it is first determined whether the game ball will enter the second specific area, which has a low ball entry rate, and then it is determined whether the game ball will enter the first specific area, which has a high ball entry rate. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the bonus game being executed as the variable game progresses.
This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AS5, at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game which is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game are provided as types of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means in the gaming machine AS3 or AS4, the bonus game execution means is configured to execute the second bonus game at a first rate when a gaming ball enters the first specific area, and to execute the second bonus game at a second rate higher than the first rate when the gaming ball enters the second specific area, and the bonus game execution means executes the second bonus game at the second rate when a gaming ball enters the second specific area during the execution of one variable game, regardless of whether the gaming ball subsequently enters the first specific area.

The gaming machine AS5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AS3 and AS4. That is, the types of bonus games executed by the bonus game execution means include a first bonus game and
At least a second special game which is more advantageous to the player than the first special game is provided.
When the game ball enters the first specific area, the bonus game execution means executes a second bonus game at a first rate, while when the game ball enters the second specific area, the second bonus game is executed at a second rate higher than the first rate. When the game ball enters the second specific area during execution of one variable game, the bonus game execution means executes the second bonus game at the second rate, regardless of whether the game ball subsequently enters the first specific area.

As a result, when a game ball enters the ball entry means in both the first period and the second period and the game ball enters the second specific area, even if the game ball subsequently enters the first specific area,
Since the second bonus game is executed at a high rate, there is an effect that the player can feel at ease at the time when the game ball enters the second specific area.

Gaming machine AS6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AS1 to AS5, it is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow speed of a gaming ball that has flowed into the second flow path so that the period between when the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path enters the first specific area is longer than the period between when the gaming ball that has flowed into the second flow path enters the second specific area.

According to the gaming machine AS6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AS1 to AS5, a delay means delays the time from when the gaming ball flows into the first flow path to when it enters the first specific area so that the time from when the gaming ball flows into the second flow path to when it enters the second specific area is longer than the time from when the gaming ball flows into the second flow path to when it enters the second specific area.
Since the flow rate of the game ball flowing into the flow path is delayed, it is possible to reliably realize an operation in which it becomes clear whether the game ball will enter the first specific area after it becomes clear whether the game ball will enter the second specific area.

Gaming machine AS7, in any of gaming machines AS1 to AS6, is characterized in that the bonus game execution means is configured to be able to execute the bonus game based on the judgment result by the judgment means being a second judgment result different from the specific judgment result.

According to the gaming machine AS7, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines AS1 to AS6, a bonus game is executed by a bonus game execution means based on the determination result by the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the determination result by the determination means. Thus, there is an effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any one of the gaming machines AS1 to AS7, a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state are set as gaming states after the execution of the bonus game is completed.
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least one of the above, and the first game state is characterized in that the probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means will be the specific discrimination result is lower than the probability that the second game state is the above.

According to the gaming machine AS8, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AS1 to AS7, the following effect is achieved. That is, as a gaming state after the effect of the bonus game is ended, the first gaming state and
and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The first game state is configured so that the probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means will be a specific discrimination result is lower than that of the second game state.

As a result, in the first game state, the player can expect the determination by the determination means to result in the second determination result, while in the second game state, the player can expect the determination by the determination means to result in a specific determination result. Therefore, since the game can be made more interesting depending on the game state, there is an effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature AT group> (Make it difficult to tell if it is a small win without AV challenge)
a ball-entry means through which a game ball can enter; a variable means capable of varying a position between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball-entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position; a specific area provided at a position through which the game ball that has entered the ball-entry means can pass; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the game ball passing through the specific area; a discrimination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied in a predetermined variable pattern based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result;
and a type setting means for setting one type from a plurality of types including at least a second variable game in which the variable means is changed in a second variable pattern in which the specific variable mode is set between one variable pattern.

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and an AV winning device is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening. When the game ball enters the AV winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the AV winning device, a pachinko machine has been proposed that can grant a special game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2011-0107 A).
(Publication No. 41).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that have, as specific game types, a type in which the gaming ball can land in a specific area and a type in which it is difficult for the ball to land in the specific area.

However, in the conventional gaming machines, the operation of a specific game type in which it is difficult to score a ball into a specific area is clearly different from that of a game type in which it is possible to score a ball, so that the player may immediately understand whether or not the game type is difficult to score a ball.
There was a problem in that if a player understood that a particular area was a type of ball that would make it difficult for the ball to land in that area, this could reduce the player's motivation to play the game.

In contrast to this, in the gaming machine AT1, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the gaming ball passing through a specific area provided at a position where the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means can pass through. A determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a variable game in which the variable means is changed in a predetermined variable pattern is executed by the variable game execution means based on the determination result by the determination means becoming a specific determination result. As the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means, one type is set by the type setting means from a plurality of types including at least a first variable game in which the variable means is changed in a first variable pattern in which at least a specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern in which it becomes more difficult for the game ball to pass through a specific area, and a second variable game in which the variable means is changed in a second variable pattern in which it becomes easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area than in the first variable pattern and in which a specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern.

This makes it possible to set a plurality of different types of variable games by the type setting means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the games.

In the gaming machine AT1, the second variable pattern is characterized in that at least the specific variable mode and a second variable mode that makes it easier for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area than the specific variable mode are set between one variable pattern.

According to the gaming machine AT2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AT1, in the second variable pattern,
At least a specific variable mode and a second variable mode in which the game ball is more likely to pass through the specific area than the specific variable mode are set between the variable patterns, so that the specific variable mode is set in both the first variable pattern and the second variable pattern.
Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it is the second variable pattern, there is an effect that the sense of expectation regarding the second variable pattern can be sustained for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine AT2, the second variable pattern is set after the specific variable mode is set between one variable pattern, and the gaming machine AT3 is characterized in that the second variable mode is set.

According to the gaming machine AT3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AT2, in the second variable pattern,
Since the second variable pattern is set after the specific variable pattern is set between the first and second variable patterns, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the pattern is the first or second variable pattern until at least the specific variable pattern ends, which has the effect of sustaining the expectation for the second variable pattern for a longer period of time.

The gaming machine AT4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AT1 to AT3, it is provided with a gaming value granting means for granting a predetermined gaming value based on a gaming ball entering the ball entry means, and the variable game execution means ends the variable game based on a specific number or more of gaming balls entering the ball entry means during the execution of one of the variable games.

According to the gaming machine AT4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AT1 to AT3, the following effect is achieved. That is, a predetermined gaming value is awarded by the gaming value awarding means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means. Since the execution of a variable game by the variable game execution means is terminated based on the entry of a specific number or more of gaming balls into the ball entry means during the execution of one variable game, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the player can select whether or not to enter the gaming ball into the ball entry means during the execution of a specific variable mode by predicting whether it is the first variable pattern or the second variable pattern. Therefore, there is an effect of being able to increase the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AT4, the second variable pattern is set during one variable pattern, after the specific variable mode is set, in which a second variable mode that makes it easier for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area than the specific variable mode is set, and the gaming machine AT5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a specific effect execution means that executes a specific effect of an effect mode that allows a player to select whether to cause the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means or to avoid the ball entering the ball entry means at least during the execution of the specific variable mode.

The gaming machine AT5 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AT4.
In the second variable pattern, after a specific variable mode is set during one variable pattern, a second variable mode is set in which the game ball is more likely to pass through the specific area than the specific variable mode. A specific performance of a performance mode in which the player is allowed to select whether to cause the game ball to enter the ball entry means or to avoid the ball from entering the ball entry means at least during the execution of the specific variable mode is executed by the specific performance execution means.

This allows the player to easily understand that he or she has to select whether to make the game ball enter the ball entry means or to avoid it by using a specific presentation, thereby achieving an effect of realizing easy-to-understand gameplay.

In the gaming machine AT5, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at least during the execution of the specific variable mode, regardless of the type of the variable game set by the type setting means.

According to the gaming machine AT6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine AT5, a specific effect is executed by a specific effect execution means at least during the execution of a specific variable mode, regardless of the type of variable game set by the type setting means, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize the type of variable game.

The gaming machine AT7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AT5 or AT6, a presentation mode determination means is provided which determines one presentation mode from a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode which is different from the first presentation mode as the presentation mode of the specific presentation executed by the specific presentation execution means, and the presentation mode determination means is configured such that, when the first variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the first presentation mode is determined more frequently than the second presentation mode, and, when the second variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the second presentation mode is determined more frequently than the first presentation mode.

The gaming machine AT7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine AT5 or AT6. That is, as the performance mode of the specific performance executed by the specific performance execution means, one performance mode is determined by the performance mode determination means from among a plurality of performance modes including at least a first performance mode and a second performance mode which is different from the first performance mode. When the first variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the rate at which the first performance mode is determined is higher than the rate at which the second performance mode is determined by the performance mode determination means. On the other hand, when the second variable pattern is set by the type setting means, the rate at which the second performance mode is determined by the performance mode determination means is higher than the rate at which the first performance mode is determined.

This allows the type of variable game to be predicted from the presentation mode of the specific presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine AT8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AT1 to AT7, the bonus game execution means is configured to be able to execute the bonus game based on the judgment result by the judgment means being a second judgment result different from the specific judgment result.

According to the gaming machine AT8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AT1 to AT7, a bonus game is executed by a bonus game execution means based on the fact that the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the determination result by the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines AT1 to AT8, a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state are set as gaming states after the execution of the bonus game is completed.
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least one of the above, and the first game state is characterized in that the probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means will be the specific discrimination result is lower than the probability that the second game state is the above.

According to the gaming machine AT8, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AT1 to AT8, the following effect is achieved. That is, as a gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed, the first gaming state and
and a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The first game state is configured so that the probability that the discrimination result by the discrimination means will be a specific discrimination result is lower than that of the second game state.

As a result, in the first game state, the player can expect the determination by the determination means to result in the second determination result, while in the second game state, the player can expect the determination by the determination means to result in a specific determination result. Therefore, since the game can be made more interesting depending on the game state, there is an effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Feature AU Group> (The role of the display mode displayed when a button is operated is changed according to the operation status of the player)
a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during a specific effect period; a type determination means for determining, as a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, one type from a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect which suggests a more advantageous effect to a player than the first specific effect; and a first ratio as a ratio at which the second specific effect is determined by the ratio determination means.
and a ratio setting means for setting a ratio of 1 from among a plurality of ratios including at least a second ratio higher than the first ratio according to the game situation.
.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and the pattern is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving the player an advantageous winning game. In addition to the pattern, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are performed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some which are provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player, and are capable of executing a suggestion effect which suggests the likelihood of a winning game, etc., each time the player operates the operating means while an exciting effect is being executed.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, players who tend to operate the machines aggressively or
Depending on whether a player tends not to perform operations, the number of times a highly anticipated suggestive performance is executed during one exciting performance may vary, resulting in a problem that the expectation of the exciting performance also varies depending on the player's operating tendency.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AU1, a specific effect is executed by a specific effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition during a specified effect period. As the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution means, one type is determined by a type determination means from among a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect that suggests a more advantageous effect to the player than the first specific effect. As the ratio at which the type determination means determines the second specific effect, a ratio of one is set by a ratio setting means according to the game situation from a plurality of ratios including at least a first ratio and a second ratio higher than the first ratio.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game since the rate at which the second specific presentation is determined varies depending on the game situation.

In the gaming machine AU1, the specific condition can be satisfied multiple times during one of the performance periods.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AU1, the gaming machine AU2 is configured so that a specific condition can be satisfied multiple times during one presentation period, so that the player can play the game in the hope that the specific condition will be satisfied as many times as possible. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AU3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AU1 or AU2, it is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the specific condition is established when the operating means is operated during the presentation period.

According to gaming machine AU3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines AU1 or AU2, a specific condition is established when the player operates the operation means during the presentation period. This has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game, as a player who wishes to have more specific presentations executed can be encouraged to actively operate the operation means.

Gaming machine AU4 is characterized in that it comprises, in any one of gaming machines AU1 to AU3, an establishment status determination means for determining the establishment status of the specific condition during at least one of the presentation periods, and a storage means for storing information according to the determination result by the establishment status determination means at least until the next time the specific presentation is executed, and the ratio setting means sets one ratio from among the multiple ratios according to the information stored by the storage means.

The gaming machine AU4 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AU1 to AU3. That is, the establishment status of a specific condition during at least one performance period is determined by the establishment status determination means, and information according to the determination result by the establishment status determination means is held by the holding means at least until the next execution of a specific performance. A ratio of 1 is set by the ratio setting means from among a plurality of ratios according to the information held by the holding means.

This makes it possible to vary the ratio at which a second specific performance is determined when a specific condition is satisfied during the current performance period depending on the status of the specific condition being satisfied during the previous performance period, thereby providing the effect of making it possible to suitably set the ratio depending on the tendency for the specific condition to be satisfied.

In the gaming machine AU4, the status determination means is configured to at least determine whether the number of times the specific condition is fulfilled during one of the presentation periods is a specific number or more, and the ratio setting means sets the first ratio when the status determination means determines that the number of times the specific condition is fulfilled is a specific number or more, and sets the second ratio when the status determination means determines that the number of times the specific condition is fulfilled is less than the specific number.

The gaming machine AU5 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AU4.
Whether or not the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied during one performance period is a specific number of times or more is determined by a satisfaction status determination means. When the satisfaction status determination means determines that the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied is a specific number of times or more, a first ratio is set by a ratio setting means, whereas when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied is less than the specific number of times, a second ratio is set.

As a result, if the number of times the specific condition is met is relatively low, the second
Since the rate at which the specific effect is determined can be increased, the number of times that the second specific effect is determined within one effect period can be made uniform, resulting in an effect of realizing a more preferable effect.

In any one of the gaming machines AU1 to AU4, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and a suggestion effect execution means for executing a discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means in the predetermined effect period based on the discrimination by the discrimination means, and the type determination means determines whether or not the second condition is established when the specific condition is established, and whether or not the second condition is established when the second condition is established, and whether or not the second condition is established.
The gaming machine AU5 is characterized in that it is configured to increase the probability of determining a specific performance.

According to the gaming machine AU5, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AU1 to AU4, the following effect is achieved. That is, a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. Based on the determination made by the determination means, a determination result suggestion effect indicating the determination result of the determination means is executed by the suggestion effect execution means for a predetermined effect period. It is configured such that the rate at which the type determination means determines the second specific effect when a specific condition is established is higher during the effect period of the determination result suggestion effect indicating a specific determination result than during the effect period of the determination result suggestion effect indicating a loss determination result different from the specific determination result.

This allows the player to play the game in the hope that the second specific effect will be executed every time the specific condition is established, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AU5, the ratio setting means sets one ratio from a plurality of ratios including at least the first ratio, the second ratio, a third ratio lower than the first ratio, and a fourth ratio lower than the second ratio as the ratio at which the second specific effect is determined, and the ratio setting means is configured to be able to set either the first ratio or the second ratio in accordance with the game situation during the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the specific discrimination result, and to set either the third ratio or the fourth ratio in accordance with the game situation during the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the miss discrimination result.

The gaming machine AU6 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AU5.
As the ratio at which the second specific effect is determined, a ratio of 1 is set by the ratio setting means from among a plurality of ratios including at least a first ratio, a second ratio, a third ratio lower than the first ratio, and a fourth ratio lower than the second ratio. During the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the specific discrimination result, either the first ratio or the second ratio is set by the ratio setting means in accordance with the game situation, while during the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the loss discrimination result, either the third ratio or the fourth ratio is set by the ratio setting means in accordance with the game situation.

This has the effect of increasing the player's anticipation for the bonus game when the second specific presentation is executed.

In the gaming machine AU6, the ratio setting means sets the first ratio during a performance period of the discrimination result suggestion performance indicating the specific discrimination result and when the game situation is a first game situation.
and when the period during which the discrimination result suggestion effect showing the specific discrimination result is performed and the game situation is a second game situation different from the first game situation, the second
a third ratio is set during the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion effect which shows the failure determination result and the game status is the first game status, and a fourth ratio is set during the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion effect which shows the failure determination result and the game status is the second game status.

The gaming machine AU7 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AU6.
A presentation period of a discrimination result suggestion effect showing a specific discrimination result and when the game situation is a first game situation, a first ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and a presentation period of a discrimination result suggestion effect showing a specific discrimination result and when the game situation is a second game situation different from the first game situation is set.
When the game status is the first game status, a second ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and this is the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion presentation indicating a miss discrimination result, and when the game status is the first game status, a third ratio is set by the ratio setting means, and this is the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion presentation indicating a miss discrimination result, and when the game status is the second game status, a fourth ratio is set by the ratio setting means, thereby providing the effect of diversifying the presentation style.

In any one of the gaming machines AU5 to AU7, a presentation period setting means is provided for setting one period from a plurality of periods including at least a first presentation period and a second presentation period longer than the first presentation period as the presentation period of the discrimination result suggestion presentation, and the type determination means is configured to be capable of determining one type from a plurality of types including at least the first specific presentation, the second specific presentation, and a third specific presentation different from both the first specific presentation and the second specific presentation, and the third specific presentation is a presentation period longer than the first presentation period,
The gaming machine AU8 is characterized in that the probability of being determined is high when the specific condition is met during the presentation period.

According to the gaming machine AU8, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AU5 to AU7, the following effect is achieved. That is, as the effect period of the discrimination result suggestion effect, one period is set by the effect period setting means from among a plurality of periods including at least the first effect period and the second effect period longer than the first effect period. The type of one specific effect is determined by the type determination means from a plurality of types including at least the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the third specific effect different from both the first specific effect and the second specific effect. The third specific effect is determined more frequently when the specific condition is established in the second effect period than in the first effect period.

This has the effect of increasing the sense of expectation that the second performance period has been set when the third specific performance is executed.

In the gaming machine AU8, the third specific performance is, when the specific condition is established during the period from the start of the second performance period to the time when the period is equal to or shorter than the length of the first performance period,
A gaming machine AU9 characterized in that the probability of the specific condition being determined is higher during the first presentation period than when the specific condition is met.

According to the gaming machine AU9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AU8, if a specific condition is established during the period from the start of the second performance period to the time when a period equal to or shorter than the length of the first performance period has elapsed,
Since the probability of the third specific performance being determined is higher than when the specific condition is established in the first performance period, the execution of the third specific performance has the effect of increasing the expectation that the discrimination result suggestion performance will continue beyond the first performance period.

In the gaming machine AU8 or AU9, the effect period setting means is configured to set the second effect period to a higher rate than the first effect period as the effect period of the discrimination result suggestion effect indicating the specific discrimination result.
10.

According to gaming machine AU10, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine AU8 or AU9, the presentation period setting means is configured so that the second presentation period is set more frequently than the first presentation period as the presentation period for the discrimination result suggestion presentation showing a specific discrimination result, so that the execution of the third specific presentation has the effect of increasing the player's expectations for the bonus game.

Gaming machine AU11 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines AU8 to AU10, the specific effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect in a first period that is set between the start of the discrimination result suggestion effect of the second effect period and the elapse of a period of the same length as the first effect period, and in a second period that is set after the elapse of a period of the same length as the first effect period, the type determination means has a higher probability of determining the third specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period than in the second period, and the type determination means determines the third specific effect in the first period at a common specific probability at least regardless of whether the discrimination result suggestion effect shows the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine AU11, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means in the first period, which is set from the start of the discrimination result suggestion effect in the second effect period until the period of the same length as the first effect period has elapsed, and in the second period, which is set after the period of the same length as the first effect period has elapsed. The determination rate of the third specific effect by the type determination means is higher when the specific condition is established in the first period than in the second period. Regardless of whether the discrimination result suggestion effect indicates a specific discrimination result or not, the type determination means determines the third specific effect in the first period at a common specific rate.

As a result, during the first period, it becomes difficult to execute a specific performance of the type indicating the discrimination result,
This has the effect of enabling the expectation for a specific discrimination result to be maintained until the second period begins.

<Feature AV Group> (Change the number of times the button can be pressed depending on the performance)
A specific performance execution means for executing a specific performance, and a specific performance mode execution means for executing a specific performance mode based on the establishment of a first condition that is predetermined during a specific period included in the execution period of the specific performance, and based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition,
and a specific control execution means capable of executing a predetermined specific control, wherein the specific control execution means is configured to make it more difficult to execute the specific control if the second condition is satisfied during the specific period than if the second condition is satisfied in a period other than the specific period.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and the pattern is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving the player an advantageous winning game. In addition to the pattern, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are performed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some which are provided with an operating means that can be operated by the player, and which are capable of executing suggestive effects that suggest the likelihood of a winning game, etc., by operating the operating means while an exciting effect is being executed.

Furthermore, in some of such conventional gaming machines, various settings of the gaming machine can be changed by operating the operating means while the suggestive performance is not being executed.

However, such conventional gaming machines have a problem in that there is a risk that the settings of the gaming machine may be changed against the player's will due to an erroneous operation while a suggestive performance is being executed.

In contrast, the gaming machine AV1 provides the following effects. That is, a specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. A specific effect mode is executed by the specific effect mode execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition in a specific period included in the execution period of the specific effect. A specific control predetermined by the specific control execution means is executed based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. It becomes more difficult for the specific control to be executed by the specific control execution means if the second condition is established during the specific period rather than in a period other than the specific period.

This prevents a specific control from being executed during a specific period of time, and prevents the player from being distracted by the specific control, allowing the player to concentrate on a specific presentation mode.
This has the effect of enabling specific performances to be executed more appropriately.

Gaming machine AV2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AV1, it is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player, the first condition is established based on an operation of a first operation content being executed on the operating means during the specific period, and the second condition is established based on an operation of a second operation content different from the first operation content being executed on the operating means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AV1, the gaming machine AV2 has the following effects.
A first operation content is detected based on the fact that the operation means has performed an operation of a first operation content during a specific period.
The second condition is satisfied when an operation of a second operation content different from the first operation content is executed on the operating means.

This has the effect that, when a player who wishes to display a specific presentation mode during a specific period of time mistakenly performs an operation of a second operation content while attempting to perform an operation of a first operation content, the execution of the specific control is restricted, thereby enabling the player to concentrate more on the specific presentation.

In the gaming machine AV2, the specific control execution means executes the specific control each time an operation of the second operation content is executed in a period different from the specific period, and executes the specific control based on the operation of the second operation content being completed a predetermined specific number of times in the specific period.

According to the gaming machine AV3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AV2, the specific control can be executed by the specific control execution means every time the operation of the second operation content is executed in a period different from the specific period, while the specific control is executed by the specific control execution means based on the second operation content being established a predetermined number of times in the specific period, so that the desire of the player who wants to execute the specific control during the specific period can be fulfilled. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be further improved.

In the gaming machine AV2 or AV3, the operation means is at least composed of a first operation means and a second operation means provided adjacent to the first operation means,
The gaming machine AV4 is characterized in that the operation of the first operation content is an operation on the first operation means, and the operation of the second operation content is an operation on the second operation means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines AV2 and AV3, the gaming machine AV4 has the following effect. That is, the operation means is at least composed of a first operation means and a second operation means provided adjacent to the first operation means. The operation of the first operation content is an operation on the first operation means, and the operation of the second operation content is an operation on the second operation means.

This makes it possible to prevent the second control from being executed against the player's will when the player mistakenly operates the second operating means while attempting to operate the first operating means.
This has the effect of enabling specific performances to be executed more appropriately.

In any one of the gaming machines AV1 to AV4, the specific control is a control for changing a predetermined setting of the gaming machine from a first setting to a second setting.
.

According to the gaming machine AV5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AV1 to AV4, when a specific control is executed, a predetermined setting of the gaming machine is changed from a first setting to a second setting, so that the setting of the gaming machine can be prevented from being changed during a specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more focused on the specific presentation.

Any one of the gaming machines AV1 to AV5 is provided with a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result, and a mode type determination means for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode as a type of the specific performance mode executed by the specific performance mode execution means, the specific performance being composed of a performance for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means,
The gaming machine AV6 is characterized in that the mode type determination means is configured to determine the second mode more frequently than the first mode when the first condition is met during the execution period of the specific presentation indicating the specific judgment result.

According to the gaming machine AV6, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines AV1 to AV5, the following effect is achieved. That is, the discrimination means executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and the bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a specific discrimination result. As the type of the specific performance mode executed by the specific performance mode execution means, one type is determined by the mode type determination means from a plurality of types including at least a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. The specific performance is composed of a performance for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means. When the first condition is established during the execution period of the specific performance indicating the specific discrimination result, the determination rate of the first mode by the mode type determination means becomes higher than the determination rate of the second mode.

This allows the player to expect that the second mode will be determined every time the first condition is met, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

in the gaming machine AV2, during the specific period, a permissive state in which execution of the specific control by the specific control execution means is permitted when the second condition is satisfied, and a restricted state in which execution of the specific control by the specific control execution means is restricted when the second condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine AV7 is characterized by having a state switching means for switching between the above.

According to the gaming machine AV7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AV2, a permissive state in which execution of a specific control by a specific control execution means is permitted when a second condition is satisfied during a specific period, and a second
Since the state switching means switches between a normal state and a restricted state in which the execution of a specific control by the specific control execution means is restricted when a condition is met, it is possible to fulfill the desire of a player who wishes to have a specific control executed during a specific period of time, thereby providing the effect of improving convenience for the player.

The gaming machine AV8 is characterized in that it is provided with a restricted state setting means for setting the restricted state based on the start of the specific period, and the state switching means switches to the permissible state based on an operation of a third operation content being performed on the operating means during the restricted state.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AV7, the gaming machine AV8 has the following effects.
The restricted state is set by the restricted state setting means based on the start of the specific period, and the state switching means switches to the permitted state based on the execution of an operation of a third operation content on the operating means during the restricted state.

This makes it possible to easily fulfill the desires of a player who wishes to execute a specific control during a specific period of time, thereby providing an effect of further improving convenience for the player.

In the gaming machine AV8, the state switching means switches to the restricted state based on an operation of a fourth operation content different from the third operation content being performed on the operation means while in the permissive state.

According to gaming machine AV9, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine AV8, the state switching means can switch to a restricted state based on the fact that an operation of a fourth operation content different from the third operation content is performed on the operation means while in the permissive state, thereby providing the effect of further improving convenience for the player.

In the gaming machine AV9, the specific performance mode execution means executes the first
The gaming machine AV10 is characterized in that, when a condition is met, the execution of the specific presentation mode is restricted.

According to the gaming machine AV10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AV9, the execution of a specific presentation mode by the specific presentation mode execution means is restricted when the first condition is established in the permissive state, so that it is possible to concentrate on a specific control in the permissive state. Therefore, there is an effect that more suitable control can be realized.

A gaming machine AV11, in which the operation of the fourth operation content in the gaming machine AV10 is the same as the operation of the first operation content.

According to the gaming machine AV11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AV10, since the operation of the fourth operation content and the operation of the first operation content are the same, it is possible to realize switching from the permitted state to the restricted state and the execution of a specific presentation mode by the operation of the same operation content. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation can be further simplified.

Gaming machine AU11 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines AU8 to AU10, the specific effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific effect in a first period that is set between the start of the discrimination result suggestion effect of the second effect period and the elapse of a period of the same length as the first effect period, and in a second period that is set after the elapse of a period of the same length as the first effect period, the type determination means has a higher probability of determining the third specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied in the first period than in the second period, and the type determination means determines the third specific effect in the first period at a common specific probability at least regardless of whether the discrimination result suggestion effect indicates the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine AU11, a specific effect is executed by a specific effect execution means in a first period set from the start of a discrimination result suggestion effect in a second effect period until a period of the same length as the first effect period has elapsed, and in a second period set after a period of the same length as the first effect period has elapsed. A third specific effect is determined by the type determination means at a higher rate when a specific condition is established in the first period than in the second period. Regardless of whether or not the discrimination result suggestion effect indicates a specific discrimination result, when a specific condition is established in the first period, the type determination means determines a third specific effect at a common rate.

As a result, during the first period, it becomes difficult to execute a specific performance of the type indicating the discrimination result,
This has the effect of enabling the expectation for a specific discrimination result to be maintained until the second period begins.

<Feature AW Group> (The expectation level changes even for the same action depending on the timing of the mini character's appearance)
a display control means for causing the display means to display a predetermined specific display mode during the execution of the specific display mode; and a display timing determination means for determining one display timing from a plurality of timings at which the specific display mode is to be displayed by the display control means, the display timing being at least a first timing included in the display period of the specific display mode and a second timing different from the first timing, the second timing being configured such that the specific display mode is more likely to be determined than the specific display mode which is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and the pattern is stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby giving the player an advantageous winning game. In addition to the pattern, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are performed to increase the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that aim to further increase excitement by indicating a predetermined level of expectation, etc. by having a character perform a predetermined action, in addition to the excitement-inducing effects related to the changing display of patterns.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it may be difficult to understand the correspondence between the changing display of the symbols and the actions of the characters.

In response to this, the gaming machine AW1 provides the following effects. That is, a determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution means based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result. A specific effect indicating the determination result of the determination means is executed by the specific effect execution means.
During the execution of the specific performance, a specific display mode determined in advance is displayed on the display means by the display control means.
A display timing is determined by a display timing determination means from among a plurality of timings including at least a first timing included in the performance period of the specific performance and a second timing different from the first timing. The second timing is configured so that a specific performance showing a specific discrimination result is determined more frequently than a specific performance showing a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result.

This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to whether or not a specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AW1, a presentation mode execution means is provided that is capable of executing at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode that can be executed after the end of the first presentation mode as presentation modes during execution of the specific presentation mode, and the second presentation mode is executed at a higher rate when the specific presentation mode indicates the specific discrimination result than when the specific presentation mode indicates the second discrimination result, and the specific display mode is executed at the second timing, thereby
The gaming machine AW2 is characterized in that it is configured to at least suggest that a presentation mode will be executed.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW1, the gaming machine AW2 has the following effects.
As the presentation modes during the execution of the specific presentation, a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode that can be executed after the first presentation mode is completed are at least executable by the presentation mode execution means. The second presentation mode is configured so that the specific presentation mode that indicates the specific discrimination result is executed more frequently than the specific presentation mode that indicates the second discrimination result. The specific display mode is configured to be executed at a second timing to at least suggest that the second presentation mode will be executed.

This makes it possible to realize a game feature in which a specific effect and a specific display mode are compared to play a game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AW2, the display timing determination means is configured to determine whether the second presentation mode is executed more frequently than the second presentation mode is executed in the specific presentation mode in which the second presentation mode is executed.
The gaming machine AW3 is characterized in that it is configured so that the proportion of timing determination is increased.

According to gaming machine AW3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine AW2, the proportion of the second timing being determined by the display timing determination means is higher in specific performances in which the second presentation mode is executed than in specific performances in which the second presentation mode is not executed, so that there is an effect that it can be more strongly expected that the display timing of the specific display mode will be the second timing.

In the gaming machine AW2 or AW3, the specific presentation is a presentation of the judgment result of the judgment means at the end of the first presentation mode when the second presentation mode is not executed by the presentation mode execution means, and the second timing is a display timing at which the specific display mode is displayed across the start timing of the second presentation mode.

The gaming machine AW4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AW2 or AW3. That is, when the second presentation mode is not executed by the presentation mode execution means, the determination result of the determination means is notified by a specific presentation at the end of the first presentation mode. When the specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, the specific display mode is displayed across the start timing of the second presentation mode.

In this way, by comparing the progress of the first presentation mode with the display timing of the specific display mode, the player can understand that the second presentation mode will start before the second presentation mode is executed, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AW4, the first timing is configured as a display timing at which the display of the specific display mode ends during the execution period of the first presentation mode.

According to the gaming machine AW5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AW4, when a specific display mode is displayed at the first timing, the specific display mode ends during the execution period of the first performance mode.
It is possible to make it difficult to predict from a specific display mode whether or not the second performance mode will be executed, thereby providing an effect of increasing the sense of expectation regarding the execution of the second performance mode.

any one of gaming machines AW1 to AW5, comprising: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a variable means capable of changing the entry means between a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position; a value imparting means for imparting a predetermined value based on the entry of the gaming ball into the entry means; a specific area provided at a position where the gaming ball that has entered the entry means can enter; and a second bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game that is advantageous to a player based on the entry of the gaming ball into the specific area, wherein the bonus game execution means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time as the bonus game.

The gaming machine AW6 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines AW1 to AW5. That is, the variable means is variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position. A predetermined value is provided by the value providing means based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. A specific area is provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter. A second bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed by the second bonus game execution means based on the game ball entering the specific area. As the bonus game, the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time by the bonus game execution means.

This allows the player to focus on whether the game ball will land in the specific area while playing the game, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AW6, allocation means for allocating a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to either the specific area or a second area different from the specific area, and bonus game type determination means for determining one type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means from among a plurality of types of bonus games including at least a first bonus game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period when the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means is likely to be allocated to the specific area by the allocation means, and a second bonus game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period when the gaming ball is likely to be allocated to the second area by the allocation means;
wherein the bonus game type determination means determines the first bonus game based on the specific determination result, and determines the second bonus game based on the second determination result.

The gaming machine AW7 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW6.
A gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means is allocated by the allocation means to either a specific area or a second area different from the specific area. As the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one type of a plurality of types of bonus games including at least a first bonus game in which the variable means is changed to a first position during a period when the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means is likely to be allocated to the specific area by the allocation means, and a second bonus game in which the variable means is changed to the first position during a period when the gaming ball is likely to be allocated to the second area by the allocation means is determined by the bonus game type determination means. The first bonus game is determined by the bonus game type determination means based on a specific determination result, while the second bonus game is determined by the bonus game type determination means based on a second determination result.

This has the effect of making the player have a stronger expectation of a specific determination result.

In the gaming machine AW7, the second timing is set to be earlier than the specific performance indicating a loss determination result in which the bonus game is not executed by the bonus game execution means.
The gaming machine AW8 is characterized in that it is configured so that the specific presentation indicating the discrimination result is determined with a higher probability.

According to gaming machine AW8, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine AW7, the rate at which the second timing is determined is higher for a specific presentation indicating a second judgment result than for a specific presentation indicating a miss judgment result in which no bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, so that when a specific display mode is displayed at the second timing, it is possible to increase the expectation that a bonus game will be executed.

In the gaming machine AW8, the second bonus game execution means is configured to be able to execute the second bonus game based on the judgment result of the judgment means becoming a third judgment result different from any of the specific judgment result, the second judgment result, and the loss judgment result, and the display timing determination means is configured to have a ratio for determining the second timing be common between the specific presentation indicating the loss judgment result and the specific presentation indicating the third judgment result.

The gaming machine AW9 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AW8.
The second bonus game is executed by the second bonus game executing means based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a third discrimination result different from any of the specific discrimination result, the second discrimination result, and the loss discrimination result. The ratio at which the second timing is determined by the display timing determining means is common between the specific presentation indicating the loss discrimination result and the specific presentation indicating the third discrimination result.

This has the effect of maintaining a sense of expectation that a specific presentation indicating the third discrimination result will occur, even if the specific display mode is not displayed at the second timing.

<Feature AX Group> (During a small win, a performance that suggests the expectation of switching to a route that is likely to lead to an AV winning port with a high time-saving expectation is executed at a timing that is too late even if you see it and then hit it)
a ball entry means through which a game ball can enter, a variable means for varying a position between a first position at which a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position, a first flow path configured to allow a game ball that has entered the ball entry means to flow down, a second flow path different from the first flow path, a distribution means for distributing the game ball that has entered the ball entry means to one of a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path, a specific area provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the game ball having entered the specific area, and a discrimination means for making a judgment based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, and The gaming machine AX1 is characterized by comprising: a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the judgment result of the judgment means becoming a specific judgment result; an allocation control means for controlling the allocation means so that a plurality of allocation states, including at least a first allocation state in which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means is allocated to the first flow path and a second allocation state in which the gaming ball is allocated to the second flow path, are switched in a specific switching pattern based on the variable game being executed by the variable game execution means; and a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect that suggests that the first allocation state is being reached during the execution of the variable game.

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has been proposed that has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and an AV winning device is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening. When the game ball enters the AV winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the AV winning device, a bonus game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player has been granted. This pachinko machine has been proposed, and has been intended to increase the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-233634, Patent Document 2:
Publication No. 011-010741).

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a distribution member that distributes gaming balls that enter the AV winning device into either a specific area or a non-specific area, and by drawing the player's attention to the way the balls are distributed by the distribution member, the aim is to increase the player's interest in the game.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it was difficult to know the state of the distribution member, and it was difficult to grasp to which area a gaming ball that entered the AV winning device would be distributed.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AX1, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the gaming ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A first flow path and a second flow path are provided at a position where the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means can flow down. The gaming ball that entered the ball entry means is distributed by a distribution means to one of a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path. A specific area is provided at a position where the gaming ball that flowed down the first flow path can enter, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by a bonus game execution means based on the entry of the gaming ball into the specific area. A determination is executed by a determination means based on the establishment of a determination condition, and a variable game is executed by a variable game execution means in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result. Based on the execution of a variable game by the variable game execution means, the distribution control means controls the distribution means so that a plurality of distribution states including at least a first distribution state in which the game ball that entered the ball entry means is distributed to a first flow path and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to a second flow path are switched in a predetermined switching pattern. During the execution of the variable game, a specific effect suggesting that the first distribution state is in place is executed by the specific effect execution means.

This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to whether or not the game ball will enter the ball entry means during the execution of the specific presentation, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine AX1, a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball is provided, and the specific switching pattern is that the gaming ball launched by the launching means after the specific performance is started is the first
A gaming machine AX2 characterized in that the length of the period during which the first distribution state is switched to is set so that it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the ball entry means during the distribution state.

According to the gaming machine AX2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AX1, the specific switching pattern is set to a length of time during which the first distribution state is switched to so that the gaming ball launched by the launching means after the specific performance is started is unlikely to reach the ball entry means during the first distribution state, so that it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes the player hope that the specific performance will be executed by luck at the timing when the gaming ball enters the ball, thereby providing an effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

a third flow path different from either the first flow path or the second flow path, through which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down; and a second specific area provided at a position where a gaming ball that has flowed down the third flow path can enter the gaming machine; the distribution means distributes the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to either the first flow path, the second flow path, or the third flow path; the distribution control means controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state, the second distribution state, and a third distribution state in which the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to the third flow path are switched in the specific switching pattern; and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on a gaming ball entering at least one of the specific area and the second specific area.

The gaming machine AX3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AX1 or AX2. That is, a second specific area is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means and flowed down the third flow path through which the gaming ball can flow can enter the ball. The gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to any one of the first flow path, the second flow path, and the third flow path. The distribution control means controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state, the second distribution state, and the third distribution state in which the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means is distributed to the third flow path are switched in a specific switching pattern.
Based on the fact that the game ball has entered at least one of the specific area and the second specific area,
The bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means.

As a result, even if the game ball does not enter the ball entry means while the specific presentation is being executed, the bonus game is executed when the game ball enters the ball entry means during the third distribution state, so that even if the game ball enters the ball entry means at a timing other than when the specific presentation is being executed, the player's anticipation for the bonus game can be maintained.

In the gaming machine AX3, a gaming state setting means is provided for setting one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state more advantageous than the first gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game is completed, and the gaming state setting means is configured so that the second gaming state is set more frequently when a gaming ball enters the specific area and the bonus game is executed than when a gaming ball enters the second specific area and the bonus game is executed.

The gaming machine AX4 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AX3.
As a game state after the bonus game ends, one game state is set by the game state setting means from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous than the first game state.
The set ratio of game states becomes higher.

This has the effect of making it possible to more strongly expect the game ball to enter the ball entry means while the specific performance is being executed.

In the gaming machine AX4, a variable game type determination means is provided for determining one type from a plurality of types including at least a first variable game type in which the first game state is set by the game state setting means when a game ball enters the second specific area during the execution period of the variable game and the bonus game is executed, and a second variable game type in which the second game state is set, and the gaming machine AX5 is characterized in that the first variable game type is configured to be determined more frequently by the variable game type determination means than the second variable game type.

According to the gaming machine AX5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX4, the following effects are achieved.
As the type of the variable game executed by the variable game executing means, when a game ball enters the second specific area during the execution period of the variable game and a bonus game is executed, one type is determined by the variable game type determining means from among a plurality of types including at least a first variable game type in which a first game state is set by the game state setting means and a second variable game type in which a second game state is set. The first variable game type is configured to be determined more frequently by the variable game type determining means than the second variable game type.

This has the effect of making the player expect that the second variable game type will be determined when the game ball enters the second specific area.

In the gaming machine AX5, during execution of the variable game of the second variable game type,
The gaming machine AX6 is characterized by having a second specific effect execution means for executing a second specific effect that indicates that the machine is in a distribution state.

According to the gaming machine AX6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AX5, during the execution of the variable game of the second variable game type, the second specific effect suggesting that the third allocation state is reached is executed by the second specific effect execution means.
This allows the player to recognize that the game type will be variable. This has the effect of making the player strongly expect to make the game ball enter the ball entry means during the execution of the second specific presentation.

Gaming machine AX7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AX5 or AX6, the gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state as the gaming state after the bonus game is completed, regardless of the type of the variable game determined by the variable game type determination means, when a gaming ball enters the specific area and the bonus game is executed.

According to gaming machine AX7, in addition to the effects of gaming machines AX5 or AX6, when a gaming ball enters a specific area and a bonus game is executed, regardless of the type of variable game determined by the variable game type determination means, a second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means as the gaming state after the bonus game is completed, so that there is an effect that the game can be played with a stronger expectation that the gaming ball will enter the ball entry means during the execution of the specific presentation.

Gaming machine AX8, in any of gaming machines AX4 to AX7, is characterized in that the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is more likely to be a specific discrimination result than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine AX8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AX4 to AX7,
In the game state, the determination result of the determination means is more likely to be a specific determination result than in the first game state, so that there is an effect that the player can have a stronger expectation that the game will enter the second game state.

A gaming machine AX8 is provided with a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the discrimination means is composed of at least a first discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and a second discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, the discrimination by the first discrimination means being configured to have a lower probability of resulting in the specific discrimination result than the discrimination by the second discrimination means, and the first gaming state is configured to make it more difficult to allow a gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine AX9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX8, the following effects are achieved.
A first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided. A first discrimination means performs discrimination based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, while a second discrimination means performs discrimination based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means. The discrimination by the first discrimination means is configured to have a lower probability of a specific discrimination result than the discrimination by the second discrimination means. In the first game state, it is more difficult to get a game ball to enter the second ball entry means than in the second game state.

This has the effect of providing a stronger expectation that a variable game will be played when the second determination means makes a determination.

In the gaming machine AX9, a second variable means is provided which can be changed between a third position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than the third position,
The gaming machine AX10 is characterized in that the first gaming state is configured to make it more difficult for the second variable means to be changed to the third position than in the second gaming state.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AX9, the gaming machine AX10 has the following effects. That is, a second variable means is provided that can be changed between a third position where the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means than the third position. In the first gaming state, it is more difficult for the second variable means to be changed to the third position than in the second gaming state.

This has the effect of further increasing the advantage of the second gaming state, thereby making it possible to have a stronger expectation of entering the second gaming state.

<Feature AY group> (Small win opening control that suppresses magnet gobbling without affecting normal play)
The present invention relates to a ball entry means through which a game ball can enter the ball entry means, a variable means for varying the ball entry means between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position, a specific area provided at a position where the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter the ball entry means, and a specific area for varying the ball entry means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of a specific condition that has been determined in advance.
a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which a position is changed; a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus advantageous to a player based on a game ball entering the specific area during the execution period of the variable game; a discharge means for discharging the game ball that has entered the ball entry means to the outside of the ball entry means; and a variable game ending means for ending the variable game based on the passage of a predetermined specific period from the start of execution of the variable game, regardless of whether all game balls that have entered the ball entry means have been discharged by the discharge means.
The gaming machine AY1 is characterized by comprising:

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has been proposed that has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and an AV winning device is opened during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening. When the game ball enters the AV winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the AV winning device, a bonus game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player has been granted, and the interest of the player in the game has been increased (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-233634, Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-233634, Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-233634, Patent Document 4: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-233634, Patent Document 5: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-233634, Patent Document 6: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-233634,
Publication No. 011-010741).

Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a distribution member that distributes gaming balls that enter the AV winning device into either a specific area or a non-specific area, and by drawing the player's attention to the way the balls are distributed by the distribution member, the aim is to increase the player's interest in the game.

However, such conventional gaming machines had a problem in that if a cheater used a magnet or the like to forcibly guide the gaming ball into a specific area regardless of the state of the distribution member, this could give the cheater an unfair advantage.

In contrast, the gaming machine AY1 provides the following effects. That is, the variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. A specific area is provided at a position where the game ball that entered the ball entry means can enter. A variable game is executed by a variable game execution means, in which the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition. A predetermined benefit that is advantageous to the player is granted by a benefit granting means based on the game ball entering the specific area during the execution period of the variable game. The game ball that entered the ball entry means is discharged to the outside of the ball entry means by a discharge means. Based on the lapse of a predetermined specific period from the start of execution of the variable game, the variable game is ended by a variable game ending means, regardless of whether all the game balls that entered the ball entry means have been discharged by the discharge means.

This has the effect of allowing variable play to end more appropriately.

The gaming machine AY2 is characterized in that it comprises a specific flow path through which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass, a distribution means that can change between a first distribution state in which a gaming ball that has entered the specific flow path can be distributed to the specific area and a second distribution state in which the gaming ball is distributed to a second area different from the specific area, and a distribution control means that controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the specific period is a period of such length that it becomes difficult for a gaming ball that has passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state and flowed down toward the specific area to enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AY1, the gaming machine AY2 has the following effects.
The distribution means is configured to be variable between a first distribution state in which a gaming ball that has entered a specific flow path through which the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass is distributed to a specific area, and a second distribution state in which the gaming ball is distributed to a second area different from the specific area. The distribution control means controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the establishment of a specific condition. During the specific period, the gaming ball passes through the specific flow path during the second distribution state,
Moreover, the period is configured to be long enough that it becomes difficult for a game ball that has flowed down toward the specific area to enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game.

In this way, if the ball passes through a specific flow path during the second distribution state and then flows down into a specific area, the variable game can be ended before the ball enters the specific area. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent acts of forcing the game ball to flow down into the specific area.

In the gaming machine AY2, the specific period is configured to be a period of such length that a gaming ball that has passed through the specific flow path during the first distribution state and flowed down toward the specific area can easily enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game.

According to the gaming machine AY3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AY2, the specific period is configured to be a period of such length that a gaming ball that has passed through a specific flow path during the first distribution state and flowed down toward a specific area can easily enter the specific area during the execution period of the variable game, so that when the ball enters the specific area with a natural movement, a predetermined bonus can be normally awarded.
This has the effect of preventing fraudulent activities without affecting normal players.

In the gaming machine AY2 or AY3, the distribution means closes a bottom surface of a specific range in the specific flow path by changing to the first distribution state, thereby allowing the gaming balls to pass through the specific range, and opens a bottom surface of the specific range by changing to the second distribution state, thereby allowing the gaming balls that reach the specific range to fall toward the second area.
Y4.

According to the gaming machine AY4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AY2 and AY3, the distribution means
By changing to the distribution state, the bottom surface of the specific range in the specific flow path is closed, allowing game balls to pass through the specific range, while by changing the distribution means to the second distribution state, the bottom surface of the specific range is opened, and game balls that reach the specific range are dropped toward the second area, so that cases in which game balls flow down to the specific area despite having passed through the specific flow path during the second distribution state can be limited to cases in which fraudulent acts are committed, such as floating game balls over the specific flow path with a magnet or the like and forcibly guiding them to the specific area. Thus, there is an effect of being able to suppress fraudulent acts without affecting players who are playing legitimately.

The gaming machine AY5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AY4, a shielding means is provided for shielding the gaming area so that it is difficult for a player to touch the gaming area, and the specific range is configured to be farther from the shielding means than other ranges in the specific flow path.

The gaming machine AY5 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AY4.
The game area is shielded by the shielding means so that it is difficult for a player to touch the game area. The specific range is configured to be farther from the shielding means than other ranges in the specific flow path.

As a result, even if someone tries to commit fraud by using a magnet or the like to guide the game ball, the effect of the magnetic force on the game ball can be weakened in a specific range, making it difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. This has the effect of suppressing fraudulent acts.

A gaming machine AY1 to AY5, comprising a determination means for determining whether a determination condition is satisfied, and the variable game execution means for executing the variable game based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result.
6.

The gaming machine AY6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AY1 to AY5. That is, the determination is made by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition. The variable game is executed by the variable game execution means based on the determination result of the determination means becoming a specific determination result.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while paying attention to the determination result of the determination means.

The gaming machine AY7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a gaming state setting means for setting one of a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state in which the judgment result of the judgment means is less likely to result in the specific judgment result, and a second gaming state in which the judgment result is more likely to result in the specific judgment result than the first gaming state, as the gaming state after the prize awarding means has finished awarding the specified prize.

According to the gaming machine AY7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine AY6, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is less likely to result in a specific discrimination result, and a second gaming state in which the discrimination result is more likely to result in a specific discrimination result than the first gaming state, as the gaming state after the discrimination means has finished granting a specified bonus. This has the effect of allowing the player to play with a stronger expectation that the second gaming state will be set.

The gaming machine AY7 is provided with a specific flow path through which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass, an allocation means that can change between a first allocation state in which a gaming ball that has entered the specific flow path can be allocated to the specific area and a second allocation state in which a gaming ball that has entered the specific flow path is allocated to a second area different from the specific area, and an allocation control means that controls the allocation means so that the first allocation state and the second allocation state are switched in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the establishment of the specific condition, wherein the bonus granting means executes a bonus game that is advantageous to the player as the predetermined bonus based on the gaming ball having entered at least one of the specific area and the second area, and the gaming state setting means is configured to set the second gaming state as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is completed at a lower rate when the gaming ball has entered the second area than when the gaming ball has entered the specific area.

The gaming machine AY8 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine AY7.
The distribution means is configured to be variable between a first distribution state in which a game ball that has entered a specific flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball entry means can pass is distributed to a specific area, and a second distribution state in which the game ball is distributed to a second area different from the specific area. The distribution control means controls the distribution means so that the first distribution state and the second distribution state are switched in a predetermined specific switching pattern based on the establishment of a specific condition. A bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus granting means as a predetermined bonus based on the game ball entering at least one of the specific area and the second area. The rate at which the game state setting means sets the second game state as the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed is lower when the game ball enters the second area than when the game ball enters the specific area.

This has the effect of allowing players to play with a stronger expectation that the game ball will land in the specific area.

<Feature BA group> (Multiple types of V winning chances using balls that have won small prizes)
a variable means for varying a position between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position; a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied to the first position or the second position in a predetermined variable pattern based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter, and a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus advantageous to a player based on the game ball entering the specific area;
The gaming machine BA1 is characterized in having a first flow path that allows a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to enter the specific area, and a second flow path that is different from the first flow path and also allows the gaming ball to enter the specific area.

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has been proposed that has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and a V winning device that opens during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening, and when the game ball enters the inside of the V winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device, a bonus game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player has been granted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 201
Publication No. 1-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are equipped with a distribution member that distributes gaming balls that enter the V winning device into either a specific area or a non-specific area, and by drawing the player's attention to the way the balls are distributed by the distribution member, the aim is to increase the player's interest in the game.

However, such conventional gaming machines had the problem that there was only one flow path capable of a V-winning, and the player could not enjoy the fact that the gaming ball that entered the V-winning device would win a V-winning prize or not.

According to the gaming machine BA1, it is possible to make a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means and flowed down the first flow path or the second flow path enter a specific area. Therefore, since it is possible to make a gaming ball that has flowed down various flow paths enter a specific area, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine BA1, the specific area is at least composed of a first specific area and a second specific area different from the first specific area, and a gaming ball that flows down the first flow path is more likely to enter the first specific area than the second specific area, and a gaming ball that flows down the second flow path is more likely to enter the second specific area than the first specific area.

According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA1, it is possible to make the gaming ball enter different specific areas according to the flow path through which the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means flows down. Therefore, it is possible to make the game during the variable game more interesting, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine BA3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, a gaming ball flowing down the second flow path is more likely to enter the specific area than a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BA1 and BA2, the ease of a ball entering a specific area can be varied depending on the flow path through which the gaming ball flows. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game while expecting the gaming ball to flow down a flow path that makes it easier for the ball to enter a specific area during a variable game.

A gaming machine BA4 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine BA3, a second period during which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means flows down the second flow path and reaches the specific area is likely to be shorter than a first period during which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means flows down the first flow path and reaches the specific area.

According to the gaming machine BA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BA3, the second period during which the gaming ball flows down the second flow path, which makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the specific area, can be made shorter than the first period during which the gaming ball flows down the first flow path, thereby providing the effect of efficiently executing a variable game that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the specific area.

In the gaming machine BA4, a type determination means is provided for determining a type of one variable game from a plurality of types including at least a first variable game and a second variable game different from the first variable game as a type of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means, and the first variable game is determined by the ball entry means after the variable game is executed, rather than the second variable game.
This gaming machine BA5 is characterized by a variable game in which the time it takes to reach a position is long.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BA4, the period from when the variable game is executed until the ball entry means reaches the first position can be varied according to the type of the variable game determined by the type determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the variable means reaches the first position according to the type of the variable game executed.

A gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BA5, when the second variable game is executed, gaming balls are made to flow easily down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine BA5, when the second variable game is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the gaming ball to flow down the second flow path, thereby making it possible to efficiently play a game in which the gaming ball flows down the second flow path and enters a specific area.

<Feature BB group> (Variable V winning rate depending on the length of the small win game period)
a variable means for varying a position between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first position; a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied to the first position or the second position in a predetermined variable pattern based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result; a specific area into which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter, and a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus advantageous to a player based on the game ball entering the specific area;
Gaming machine BB1 has a first flow path capable of causing a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to flow down toward the specific area, and a second flow path that makes it more difficult for the gaming ball to flow down toward the specific area than the first flow path, and is configured so that the ease with which the gaming ball can enter the specific area can be varied depending on the elapsed time after the start of the variable game.

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has been proposed that has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and a V winning device that opens during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening, and when the game ball enters the inside of the V winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device, a bonus game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player has been granted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 201
Publication No. 1-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are equipped with a distribution member that distributes gaming balls that enter the V winning device into either a specific area or a non-specific area, and by drawing the player's attention to the way the balls are distributed by the distribution member, the aim is to increase the player's interest in the game.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the ease of a gaming ball entering a specific area in a particular game does not change depending on the flow period of the gaming ball that has entered the V winning device, so there is a problem that the playability is poor after the ball enters the V winning device, and the player cannot enjoy wondering whether the gaming ball that has entered the V winning device will enter the V winning device or not.

According to the gaming machine BB1, the ease of a ball entering a specific area is changed according to the time that has elapsed since the start of the variable game. This allows the player to play while being aware of the time that has elapsed of the variable game, and therefore has the effect of preventing the player from feeling that the game is dragging on and losing motivation to play when the time that has elapsed of the variable game becomes long.

Gaming machine BB2 is characterized in that it has a second variable means that can be changed to a third position and a fourth position different from the third position, and a variable control means that changes the second variable means in a specific variable pattern while the variable game is being played, and is configured so that when the second variable means is changed to the third position, it is easier for a gaming ball to enter the specific area than when it is changed to the fourth position.

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BB1, it is possible to make it easier to make the gaming ball enter the specific area by changing the second variable means to the third position. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the changing state of the second variable means, and it is possible to increase the interest in the variable game.

Gaming machine BB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BB2, the second variable means restricts the flow of gaming balls down the second flow path when it is varied to the third position.

According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BB2, the second variable means is changed to the third position to restrict the gaming ball from flowing down the second flow path. Therefore, the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can be made to flow down the first flow path more easily, and the gaming ball can be made to enter a specific area more easily. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the variable state of the second variable means, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the variable game.

Gaming machine BB4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BB2 or BB3, the specific variable pattern is configured as a variable pattern that changes the second variable means to the third position based on the elapse of a first period since the variable game is started.

According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BB2 and BB3, it is possible to provide a state in which it is easy to make the gaming ball enter the specific area by passing the first period after the variable game is started. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player play while expecting the variable game to continue for a long time.

Gaming machine BB5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines BB2 to BB4, the specific variable pattern is configured to vary the second variable means to the third position until a second period shorter than the first period has elapsed since the variable game is started, and to vary the second variable means from the third position to the fourth position based on the elapse of the second period.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BB2 to BB4, the second variable means is located at the third position until the second period has elapsed since the variable game has started, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from flowing down the second flow path. Therefore, even though the variable game has started, the gaming ball immediately flows down the second flow path, and it is not possible to enjoy whether the gaming ball flows down the first flow path or not, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play.

<Characteristic BC group> (Multiple chances in one small win)
a ball-entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the ball-entry means; a variable means for varying the ball-entry means between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball-entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball-entry means than the first position; and a discrimination means for discriminating based on the establishment of a discrimination condition. A gaming machine BC1 having a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed to the first position or the second position in a predetermined variable pattern based on the judgment result of the judgment means being a specific judgment result, a specific area into which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter, and a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus that is advantageous to a player based on the game ball entering the specific area, the gaming machine having a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path through which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down toward the specific area, and a second flow path that is different from the first flow path and can flow down toward the specific area or a specific area different from the specific area, and the gaming machine is configured so that in one of the variable games executed by the variable game execution means, a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down either the first flow path or the second flow path.

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has been proposed that has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and a V winning device that opens during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening, and when the game ball enters the inside of the V winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device, a bonus game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player has been granted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 201
Publication No. 1-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are equipped with a distribution member that distributes gaming balls that enter the V winning device into either a specific area or a non-specific area, and by drawing the player's attention to the way the balls are distributed by the distribution member, the aim is to increase the player's interest in the game.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, there was a problem in that a gaming ball that entered the V winning device had only one chance of passing through the specific area during one specific game, meaning that it was not possible to create a sense of expectation continuously during the specific game, which reduced the player's motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine BC1, during one variable play, it is possible to execute a game in which the gaming ball is caused to flow down the first flow path and enter a specific area, and a game in which the gaming ball is caused to flow down the second flow path and enter a specific area. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with multiple opportunities to have the gaming ball enter the specific area during one variable play, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play during the variable play.

Gaming machine BC2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BC1, gaming balls that flow down the first flow path are capable of entering the specific area at a first rate, and gaming balls that flow down the second flow path are capable of entering the specific area at a second rate that is higher than the first rate.

According to gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine BC1, the rate at which the gaming ball enters a specific area can be varied for each opportunity that the gaming ball may enter the specific area provided during one variable game, thereby providing a variety of games during variable game play and increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine BC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, it has a distribution means for distributing a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to one of the multiple flow paths, and is configured so that a plurality of gaming balls that have entered the ball entry means in the one variable game can be respectively distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BC1 and BC2, a plurality of gaming balls that enter the ball entry means during one variable game can be distributed to the first flow path and the second flow path by the distribution means, so that there is an effect that a player can play with enthusiasm to try to get a plurality of gaming balls to enter the ball entry means during one variable game.

In the gaming machine BC1 or BC2, a distribution means is provided for distributing the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to any one of the plurality of paths, and the second
A gaming machine BC4 characterized by comprising a guide means for guiding the gaming balls distributed to the flow paths to the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BC1 and BC2, among the gaming balls that enter the ball entry means during one variable game, it is possible to guide the gaming balls that are diverted to the second flow path to the first flow path. As a result, one gaming ball that enters during a variable game can flow down the first flow path and the second flow path, so that the player can pay attention to the flow state of the gaming balls during the variable game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

A gaming machine BC3, comprising: a variable game determination means for determining one type of variable game from among a plurality of types including at least a specific variable game as the type of variable game executed by the variable game execution means; and a switching control means for switching the state of the distribution means so that a plurality of distribution states including at least a first distribution state in which game balls are distributed to the first flow path by the distribution means and a second distribution state in which game balls are distributed to the second flow path are switched in a predetermined specific switching pattern, wherein the variable game execution means controls the variable means to be variable to at least the first position during the execution of the specific variable game during a first period in which a game ball enters the ball entry means and the distribution means is more likely to reach the distribution means while it is set to the first distribution state, and during a second period in which a game ball enters the ball entry means and the distribution means is more likely to reach the distribution means while it is set to the second distribution state.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BC3, the state of the distribution means can be switched by the switching control means, so that a variable game in which the gaming balls flow down the first flow path and a second flow path can be performed.
It is possible to set a variable game that flows down the flow path and a variable game that flows down the first flow path and the second flow path. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to set a variable game with a different degree of advantage for a player according to the type of the variable game determined by the variable game determination means.

A gaming machine BC6 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine BC5, a gaming ball that enters the ball entry means during the first period is configured to tend to reach the specific area earlier than a gaming ball that enters the ball entry means during the second period.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BC5, the timing of the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means during the first period to reach the specific area can be made earlier than the timing of the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means during the second period. As a result, in one variable game, the timing of the gaming ball flowing down the flow path that is more likely to enter the specific area to reach the specific area can be delayed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine BC5 or BC6, the specific area is at least composed of a first specific area provided at a position where gaming balls flowing down the first flow path can enter at a first rate, and a second specific area provided at a position where gaming balls flowing down the second flow path can enter at the second rate, and the bonus granting means is configured to grant a bonus that offers a higher advantage to the player as the specified bonus at a higher rate when a gaming ball enters the first specific area than when a gaming ball enters the second specific area.

According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines BC5 and BC6, when the gaming ball enters the second specific area, it is possible to give the player a more advantageous benefit than when the gaming ball enters the first specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can pay attention to which flow path the gaming ball will flow down.

<Feature group CA> (Setting multiple time-saving states with different V winning probabilities when winning a small prize)
The present invention relates to a ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the ball entry means, a variable means for changing the state between a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, a discrimination means for making a discrimination when a discrimination condition is established, and a variable means for changing the state from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time based on a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result.
a specific area into which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter, and a switching means for switching between a permissive state in which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can enter the specific area and a restricted state in which it is more difficult for the ball to enter the specific area than the permissive state based on variable control being executed by the variable control means; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the gaming ball having entered the specific area; and a game state setting means for setting at least an advantageous game state in which it is easier to execute a determination by the determination means and an unfavorable game state in which it is more difficult to execute a determination by the determination means than the advantageous game state.
The gaming machine CA1 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first advantageous gaming state and a second advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state as the advantageous gaming state, and the gaming machine is characterized in that a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means is more likely to enter the specific area when the second advantageous gaming state is set than when the first advantageous gaming state is set.

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has been proposed that has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and a V winning device that opens during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening, and when the game ball enters the inside of the V winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device, a bonus game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player has been granted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 201
Publication No. 1-010741).

Furthermore, by configuring it to be possible to set an advantageous game state in which the electric device is easily opened, it is possible to provide the player with a game state in which it is easy to pass the ball through a specific area in the V winning device, and a game state in which it is difficult to pass through a specific area in the V winning device. However, in such conventional gaming machines, it is not possible to set one advantageous game state, and there is a problem that the player cannot enjoy the game.

According to the gaming machine CA1, the game state setting means is configured to be able to set an advantageous game state in which the discrimination means is more likely to discriminate, and an unfavorable game state in which the discrimination means is more likely to discriminate than the advantageous game state, and further, a first advantageous game state and
The first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state can be set. When the second advantageous game state is set, the game ball that has entered the ball entry means is more likely to enter the specific area than when the first advantageous game state is set. Therefore, when an advantageous game state is set, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which advantageous game state will be set,
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine CA1, the variable control means variably controls the variable means so that a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means is more likely to enter the specific area when the second advantageous gaming state is set than when the first advantageous gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine CA2, when the second advantageous game state is set by the variable control of the variable means by the variable control means, the game is more likely to be played when the first advantageous game state is set.
It is possible to make it easier for a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means to enter a specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily variably set the probability of executing a bonus game according to the type of advantageous game state.

In the gaming machine CA2, the variable control means changes the timing of changing the variable means to the first state depending on whether the first advantageous gaming state is set or the second advantageous gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine CA3, the timing at which the gaming ball is made to enter the ball entry means can be varied according to the type of advantageous gaming state that has been set, thereby making it possible to vary the ease with which the gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means enters a specific area. This has the effect of easily variably setting the probability of a bonus game being played according to the type of advantageous gaming state.

A gaming machine CA4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CA1 or CA3, it has a first flow path through which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down when the switching means is in the permissive state, and a second flow path different from the first flow path through which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down when the switching means is in the restrictive state, and that gaming balls flowing down the first flow path are more difficult to enter the specific area than gaming balls flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine CA4, the flow path through which the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means flows can be switched between the first flow path and the second flow path depending on the state of the switching means. The gaming ball that flows down the first flow path is more difficult to enter the specific area than the gaming ball that flows down the second flow path. In this way, by switching the flow path through which the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means flows, the ease with which the ball enters the specific area can be varied, which has the effect of easily variably setting the probability of the bonus game being executed.

A gaming machine CA5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CA4, the specific areas include a first specific area into which a gaming ball that has flowed down the first flow path may enter, and a second specific area into which a gaming ball that has flowed down the second flow path may enter.

According to the gaming machine CA5, it is possible to provide specific areas for each flow path, which has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the inside of the ball entry means.

Gaming machine CA6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines CA2 to CA5, at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path is configured so that a player can visually observe a gaming ball flowing down the flow path.

According to the gaming machine CA6, since the player can visually confirm the gaming ball flowing down at least one of the first flow path and the second flow path, it is possible for the player to visually confirm which flow path the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means has flowed down. Therefore, it is possible to easily allow the player to predict whether the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means will enter a specific area or not, and there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA6, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means for executing a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a second discrimination means for executing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the gaming state setting means sets, as the advantageous gaming state, a first advantageous gaming state in which the first discrimination by the first discrimination means is more likely to be executed than the second discrimination by the second discrimination means,
A gaming machine CA7 characterized in that it is capable of setting a second advantageous gaming state in which the second judgment by the second judgment means is more likely to be executed than the first judgment by the first judgment means.

Gaming machine CA8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines CA1 to CA7, the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means being a special judgment result different from the specific judgment result.

<Feature group CB> (Differentiating the conditions for determining winning ball error in winning games)
a game machine having a determination means capable of performing a predetermined determination, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game based on the determination result of the determination means being a specific determination result, a type setting means for setting one bonus game type from a plurality of bonus game types as the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, and a variable ball entry means for varying the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means between a first state in which a game ball can enter the game machine and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the game machine than the first state, the game machine CB1 being characterized by having a determination means for determining that a predetermined state is reached when a predetermined condition is established while a game ball remains inside the variable ball entry means, an alarm means for executing a predetermined alarm based on the determination by the determination means that the predetermined state is reached, and a condition setting means for setting different predetermined conditions based on the bonus game type set by the type setting means.

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has been proposed that has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and a V winning device that opens during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening, and when the game ball enters the inside of the V winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device, a bonus game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player has been granted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 201
Publication No. 1-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are equipped with a distribution member that distributes gaming balls that enter the V winning device into either a specific area or a non-specific area, and by drawing the player's attention to the way the balls are distributed by the distribution member, the aim is to increase the player's interest in the game.

However, there was a problem in that it was not possible to determine whether the timing at which the ball remained in the V winning device was normal or abnormal, making it difficult to notice even if fraudulent play was taking place.

According to the gaming machine CB1, different judgment conditions can be set by the judgment condition setting means according to the bonus game to be executed, so that it is possible to appropriately judge a predetermined state according to the bonus game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegal game of intentionally leaving a game ball inside the ball entrance means, and to allow the player to play an appropriate game.

In the gaming machine CB1, the condition setting means is capable of setting different determination timings based on the type of the special game as the predetermined condition.
.

According to the gaming machine CB2, the timing of determining the predetermined state can be varied depending on the type of bonus game, and therefore, the period until the predetermined state is determined can be appropriately set according to the type of bonus game being executed, so that it is possible to determine without delay that the predetermined state has occurred.

The gaming machine CB2 has a discharge section which discharges a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means to the outside of the variable ball entry means, and the bonus game execution means executes a first bonus game in which a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means may be discharged from the discharge section in a first period when a predetermined first type is set as the type of bonus game, and executes a second bonus game in which a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means may be discharged from the discharge section in a second period longer than the first period when a second type different from the first type is set, and the condition setting means sets the judgment timing later when the second bonus game is executed than when the first bonus game is executed.

According to gaming machine CB3, when a bonus game is executed in which the length of time between when a ball enters the variable ball entry means and when it is discharged from the discharge section varies, the judgment timing according to that length is set by the judgment condition setting means, thereby having the effect of preventing a predetermined state from being judged when the game ball is flowing normally down the variable ball entry means during the bonus game.

In any one of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is
The gaming machine CB4 is characterized by having a specific area through which the gaming ball can pass before being discharged from the discharge section, and a condition switching means for switching the predetermined condition when the gaming ball passes through the specific area.

According to the gaming machine CB4, when a gaming ball passes through a specific area, the predetermined condition can be switched, so that even if a configuration is used in which a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means flows down one of a number of flow paths with different flow periods, it is possible to execute a judgment of the predetermined state at an appropriate timing according to the flow status of the gaming ball.

Gaming machine CB5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines CB1 to CB4, the bonus game execution means ends the bonus game when the judgment means does not judge that the specified state is reached.

In the gaming machine CB5, a first flow path through which a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can flow down;
A gaming machine CB having a second flow path different from the first flow path, and a switching means for changing a state in which a gaming ball that has entered the variable ball entry means flows down the first flow path from an initial state in which the gaming ball flows down the second flow path when a switching condition is established, and the judgment condition setting means sets the judgment condition that is established when the switching means is in the initial state.
6.

<Feature group CC> (Measures against power outages during small wins)
In a gaming machine having a main control means for executing a predetermined game control, a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a variable means for varying a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, a specific area provided in at least one specific flow-down area among a plurality of flow-down areas through which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down, and a detection means for detecting that a gaming ball has entered the specific area, the main control means is configured to execute a judgment based on the establishment of a judgment condition, and to detect whether the judgment result of the judgment means is a specific judgment result. a variable control means for varying the variable means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means; a drive control means for driving a drive member to change the flow area through which a game ball that has entered the ball entry means flows down; a bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of a game ball by the detection means; and a specific control means capable of executing specific control based on the flow down situation of the game ball that has entered the ball entry means in a specific state in which it is difficult for the detection means to detect the game ball.

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has been proposed that has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and a V winning device that opens during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening, and when the game ball enters the inside of the V winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device, a bonus game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player has been granted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 201
Publication No. 1-010741).

In addition, some of such conventional gaming machines are equipped with a distribution member that distributes gaming balls that enter the V winning device into either a specific area or a non-specific area, and by drawing the player's attention to the way the balls are distributed by the distribution member, the aim is to increase the player's interest in the game.

However, in the event that a power outage or other reason occurs during a particular game and the game cannot proceed normally, there is a risk that, for example, the ball may pass through a particular area at a time when the winning switch cannot detect it, causing inconvenience to the player.

According to the gaming machine CC1, the specific control means executes specific control based on the flow state of the gaming ball that entered the ball entry means in a state where it is difficult for the detection means to detect the gaming ball. This has the effect of suppressing a situation in which a bonus is not awarded even if the gaming ball enters the specific area, which causes a player to feel distrustful.

A gaming machine CC2 is characterized in that the gaming machine CC1 has a power interruption state discrimination means for discriminating that a power interruption state has occurred when the voltage supplied to the gaming machine falls below a predetermined voltage value, and the specific control means, based on the power interruption state being discriminated by the power interruption state discrimination means, executes control to stop the driving member driven by the drive control means before the specific state is reached.

According to the gaming machine CC2, when it is determined that the power is cut off, the driving of the driving member can be stopped before the specific state is reached, which has the effect of preventing the gaming ball from entering the specific area during the specific state.

Gaming machine CC3 is characterized in that in gaming machine CC1 or CC2, the specific control means executes processing to cause the drive control means to start driving the drive member after the detection means is able to detect a gaming ball when the power outage state is restored.

Gaming machine CC4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the specific control means is capable of executing the specific control when the power interruption state determination means determines that the power interruption state is occurring while variable control is being executed by the variable control means.

A gaming machine CC4 has a situation determination means for determining whether a situation is such that a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can reach the driving member, and the specific control means is capable of executing the specific control when the situation determination means determines that a situation is such that a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can reach the driving member and the power cut state determination means determines that the power cut state is present.

Gaming machine CC6 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines CC2 to CC5, it has a backup voltage supply means capable of supplying backup voltage to the gaming machine even during the power outage state, the main control means has a memory means capable of storing the detection results of the detection means during the power outage state, and the specific control means executes specific control based on the detection results of the detection means stored in the memory means when the power outage state is restored.

In any one of the gaming machines CC1 to CC6, a first flow path through which a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry means can flow down, and a first ball holder that is provided in the first flow path and can hold a ball flowing down the first flow path,
a holding means capable of changing between a first state and a second state in which the balls flowing down the first flow path are not held;
the specific area is provided at a position where a ball that has flowed down the first flow path will enter, and the regulating means changes the holding means to the first state when power supply from the external power source is stopped, and changes the holding means to the second state based on the start of power supply from the external power source.

<Feature CD group> (Differentiate the right-hit notification during winning game depending on the opening pattern)
The present invention relates to a game device that includes a launching means capable of launching game balls into a game area, a launching intensity adjustment means capable of varying the area of the game area into which the game balls can flow by varying the launching intensity of the launching means based on the operation of a player, an entry means provided in a predetermined area of the game area through which the game balls can enter, a variable means capable of varying the state between a first state in which the game ball can enter the entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the entry means than the first state, a variable game execution means that executes a variable game by varying the variable means to the first state or the second state in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a game device executed by the variable game execution means. A gaming machine CD1 having a type setting means for setting one variable game type from among a plurality of variable game types as the type of the variable game to be played, and a guidance notification means capable of executing a guidance notification to guide a game ball to be fired toward the specified area when the variable game is executed by the variable game execution means, wherein the variable game execution means varies the variable means in a variable pattern corresponding to the variable game type set by the type setting means, and the guidance notification means executes the guidance notification in a notification mode based on the variable pattern executed by the variable game execution means.

Here, a pachinko machine or other gaming machine has been proposed that has a ball entrance opening that allows a ball to enter by opening (or moving) an electric device, and a V winning device that opens during a specific game (small winning game, etc.) that is executed based on the game ball entering the ball entrance opening, and when the game ball enters the inside of the V winning device and passes through a specific area (winning switch, etc.) provided in the V winning device, a bonus game (winning game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player has been granted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 201
Publication No. 1-010741).

In addition, among such conventional gaming machines, there are some that are provided with a distribution member that distributes the game balls that enter the V winning device to either a specific area or a non-specific area, and the player's interest in the game is enhanced by focusing on the distribution method by the distribution member. In addition, there are some that perform a guide announcement to guide the player to shoot the ball toward the area where the V winning device is provided when a specific game is executed.

However, because the notification is issued based on the execution of a specific game, there was a problem that if the game ball was released in accordance with the notification, it would reach the V winning device, which was in a closed state, causing discomfort to the player.

According to the gaming machine CD1, the information and notification means notifies the player that a variable game will be executed. Furthermore, the notification mode of the information and notification means makes it possible for the player to predict the variable pattern of the variable game. Therefore, the game ball can be launched while the player predicts the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means during the variable game, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine CD2, characterized in that in the gaming machine CD1, it has a period setting means capable of setting a specific period including at least the period during which the variable means is in the first state, and the guidance notification means executes the guidance notification including a specific notification mode capable of notifying the specific period.

According to the game machine CD2, by grasping the notification mode of the guide notification, the game ball can be launched while the player predicts the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means during variable play, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine CD3, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine CD2, a determination means is provided for determining the remaining period of the specific period, and the guidance/notification means notifies the remaining period of the specific period as the specific notification mode.

According to the game machine CD3, since the remaining period of a specific period can be grasped, the game ball can be launched while the player predicts the period during which the game ball can be inserted into the ball insertion means during a variable game, which has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CD2 or CD3, the variable game execution means is capable of executing a variable game in which the variable means is changed to the first state a plurality of times, and the period setting means is configured to set a first specific period and the first specific period when the variable means is changed to the first state a plurality of times.
and a second specific period different from the first specific period, and the information notifying means executes the information notifying including a first specific notifying mode capable of notifying the first specific period and a second specific notifying mode capable of notifying the second specific period.
.

According to the gaming machine CD4, when a variable game is executed in which the variable means is changed to the first state multiple times, a different specific period can be set according to each first state, and a guidance notification can be executed using a notification mode corresponding to each specific period. Therefore, during the variable game, the game ball can be launched while the player predicts the period in which the game ball will be able to enter the ball entry means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CD4, the period setting means is characterized in that when a variable game is executed in which the variable means is changed to the first state multiple times, if the interval at which the variable means is changed to the first state is shorter than a predetermined interval, the period setting means sets the first state, which is changed before and after that, as one specific period.

According to the gaming machine CD5, when the variable means is changed to the first state at short intervals, this is set as one specific period, which has the effect of enabling a guidance notification that is easy for the player to understand to be executed.

<Feature CE group> (Set a fixed right-hit notification period regardless of the length of the winning game OP period)
The present invention relates to a game device that includes a launching means capable of launching game balls into a game area, a launching strength adjusting means capable of varying the area in the game area into which the game balls can flow by varying the launch strength of the launching means based on the operation of a player, an entry means provided in a predetermined area of the game area through which the game balls can enter, a variable means capable of varying the state between a first state in which the game balls can enter the entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the entry means than in the first state, a discrimination means capable of executing a predetermined discrimination, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means for a predetermined period of time, and a variable means for controlling the variable means to the first state or the second state based on the static display of a specific identification information by the dynamic display means. a variable game execution means for executing a variable game by changing a game state from one state to the first state in a predetermined variable pattern, and a guidance notification means capable of executing a guidance notification to guide a game ball to be launched toward the predetermined area when the variable game is executed by the variable game execution means, wherein the variable game execution means is capable of executing the variable game according to a plurality of variable patterns which differ in the waiting period from when the variable game is executed until when the variable means is changed to the first state, and the guidance notification means is capable of executing a specific guidance notification for a fixed period of time regardless of the length of the waiting period of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means.

Here, a pachinko machine has been proposed that allows gaming machines such as pachinko machines to play multiple types of specific games, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2011-010741 A).

Further, among gaming machines in which multiple types of specific games are executed, there are some that provide easy-to-understand games to players by executing a guide notification to inform the player that a specific game is being executed.

However, there has been a problem in that the type of specific game to be played next can be determined by the player depending on the timing at which the announcement is made, which reduces the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine CE1, since the specific information notification can be executed for a certain period regardless of the waiting period of the variable game, the type of the variable game executed based on the specific information notification executed by the notification means is not discriminated by the player, and therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine CE2, in which the guidance notification means in the gaming machine CE1 completes execution of the specific guidance notification before the waiting period has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine CE2, the specific information notification is completed before the waiting period has elapsed, which has the effect of enabling the information notification to be executed effectively.

A gaming machine CE3, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine CE1 or CE2, it has a fixed display means for fixedly displaying the identification information for a predetermined period of time when the identification information is displayed in a frozen state by the dynamic display means, and a fixed period setting means for setting a different fixed period as the fixed period for which the identification information is fixedly displayed by the fixed display means, wherein the variable game execution means executes the variable game after the fixed period has elapsed, and the guidance notification means executes the specific guidance notification across the fixed period and the standby period.

Gaming machine CE4, in any of gaming machines CE1 to CE3, is characterized in that the specific guidance notification includes suggestion information capable of suggesting the timing at which the variable means will enter the first state in the variable game executed by the variable game execution means.

A gaming machine CE5, which is any one of the gaming machines CE1 to CE4, characterized in that the fixed period during which the specific guidance notification is executed is longer than the waiting period of the variable game executed by the variable game execution means.

<Features DA group> (Resin components that replace nails)
Gaming machine DA1 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine, which comprises a gaming board main body, a fixed member whose position is fixed relative to the gaming board main body, and a connecting member which connects the gaming board main body and the fixed member, the connecting member is configured to be able to guide a gaming ball.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the flow path of gaming balls is randomly configured by nails driven into the gaming board (see, for example, JP 2007-325743 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the flow path of the gaming balls is formed only by nails, so it is necessary to drive nails into almost the entire area of the gaming board, and in order to ensure the strength of the parts where the nails are driven, it is necessary to make the gaming board thick, which causes a problem that the design freedom of the shape of the gaming board is low, especially in the design in the thickness direction.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine DA1, the gaming ball can be guided by the connecting member that connects the gaming board body and the fixed member. Therefore, the range in which the connecting member is arranged is as follows:
There is no need to hammer nails into the game board body. Therefore, within the range where the connecting members are arranged,
This improves the freedom in designing the shape of the game board body, particularly in the thickness direction.

For example, by making parts whose thickness can be designed arbitrarily thin, the volume of parts required for the entire game board can be reduced, thereby cutting material costs, and the space created by making the parts thin can be used to place parts for performances (such as illuminated boards) to create a variety of light-emitting effects.

The arrangement of the connecting member is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the connecting member may be arranged above the center frame of the game board so as to form a portion with which the game ball introduced into the game area first collides, or may be arranged on the left and right sides of the center frame as a member for holding the through gate inside, or may be arranged below the center frame as a member for guiding the game ball to the winning hole.

In addition, the connecting member may be configured in a symmetrical shape or in an asymmetrical shape. Basically, when the play area is symmetrical, it is preferable that the connecting member is also configured in a symmetrical shape, and when the play area is asymmetrical (for example, in the case of a right-handed play machine), it is preferable that the connecting member is also configured in an asymmetrical shape.

In the gaming machine DA1, the connecting member has a guide portion configured to be able to guide the gaming ball, and the guide portion is configured to protrude toward the gaming area.
.

According to the gaming machine DA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA1, the guide portion can produce the same effect as the nails formed to protrude into the gaming area, and when the connecting member is made of a light-transmitting resin material, it can transmit light more easily than the nails. Therefore, even in the range where the guide portion is arranged, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the light irradiated from behind the guide portion to the player side.

The shape of the guide portion may be made to imitate the shape of a nail, but since the strength of a thin nail formed from a resin material is lower than that of a nail made from metal, the guide portion may be made to surround the area in which multiple nails are placed. This makes it possible to eliminate the lack of strength even when the guide portion is formed from a resin material.

A gaming machine DA3 is characterized in that the guide portion in the gaming machine DA2 has a recessed portion on the opposite side to the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine DA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA2, the weight of the connecting member can be reduced. Furthermore, the guide part can be easily bent by making the guide part thinner, and the guide part bends when the gaming ball collides with the guide part, thereby reducing the load generated between the gaming ball and the guide part, and thus it is possible to easily avoid damage to the guide part due to the load at the time of impact.

A gaming machine DA4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DA2 or DA3, the guide portion comprises a first guide portion arranged adjacent to the gaming board main body and a second guide portion arranged adjacent to the fixed member, and the first guide portion is formed to be narrower than the second guide portion.

According to the gaming machine DA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines DA2 and DA3, since the first guide portion is narrow, the guide portion itself is easily bent and the load can be released without the bending of the game board body. On the other hand, the second guide portion can release the load by bending the fixed member formed as a thin plate, even if the guide portion itself does not bend.

The narrow width may be set to a small maximum width, or may be specified by the presence of a narrow portion, such as when the shape is triangular.

A gaming machine DA5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines DA2 to DA4, the guide portion is arranged so that the part where the angle at which the sides that make up the frame shape intersect when viewed in the projection direction is maximum is positioned lower than the upper end position.

According to the gaming machine DA5, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines DA2 to DA4, it is possible to allow bending deformation around the axis at which the angle is maximum, making it easier to withstand the impact of a gaming ball.

A gaming machine DA6, in any one of the gaming machines DA1 to DA5, is characterized in that the fixed member is configured in an annular shape and is fixed to the inside of the gaming board main body.

According to the gaming machine DA6, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines DA1 to DA5, the shape of the fixed member can be easily maintained by the rigidity of the game board body.

A gaming machine DA7 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines DA1 to DA6, the connecting member and the game board body or the fixed member are configured to overlap, and the overlapping object changes depending on the location.

According to gaming machine DA7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines DA1 to DA6, by omitting the formation of the gaming board body and using a fixed member instead, the material costs required for the gaming board body can be reduced compared to the case where the gaming board body is not omitted and is formed.

Furthermore, in the area where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap, light irradiated from the rear can pass through more easily, and by making the fixed member thin, space can be secured on the rear side, thereby improving the freedom of arrangement of the performance equipment.

In gaming machine DA8, a light emitting means is disposed behind the location where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap in gaming machine DA7.

According to gaming machine DA8, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine DA7, it is possible to more easily secure space for arranging the light-emitting means by forming the fixed member with a thin wall, compared to the case where the light-emitting means is arranged at the rear of the gaming board body.

A gaming machine DA9 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines DA1 to DA8, it is provided with a thin decorative member arranged between the fixed member and the connecting member, and the thin decorative member is aligned with a first positioning portion formed on the fixed member and a second positioning portion formed on the connecting member.

In addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines DA1 to DA8, the gaming machine DA9 makes it possible to align thin decorative members without being restricted by the shapes of the fixed members and connecting members.

A gaming machine DA10, characterized in that the first positioning portion and the second positioning portion engage with each other in the gaming machine DA9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DA9, gaming machine DA10 allows the fixed member and the connecting member to be aligned by the first positioning portion and the second positioning portion.

<Feature DB group> (Non-nail sorting)
A gaming machine DB1 comprising: a passing area through which gaming balls can pass; a guiding means configured to be capable of guiding gaming balls into the passing area; and a flow-down area through which gaming balls that have passed through the passing area flow down, wherein the guiding means is configured to be capable of changing the rate at which gaming balls are guided into the passing area; the flow-down area comprises a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet configured to allow gaming balls to enter, and is configured to be capable of maintaining the rate at which gaming balls enter the first ball inlet and the rate at which gaming balls enter the second ball inlet.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that distribute gaming balls to winning holes by nails driven into a gaming board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-325743).
In the conventional gaming machines described above, the nails used to distribute the flow path of the gaming balls can change their state relative to the base plate when they collide with the gaming balls, and this change in state can create conditions that make it easier or more difficult for the ball to enter the winning hole, creating a problem that there is room for improvement from the perspective of fairness in the game.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine DB1, in a situation where the guide means can change the rate at which the gaming ball is guided to the passing area, the flow-down area is determined based on the rate at which the gaming ball enters the first ball entrance and the rate at which the gaming ball enters the second ball entrance.
Since the ratio of game balls entering the ball entrance can be maintained, the game balls enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance.
This makes it possible to prevent situations in which it becomes easier or more difficult for the ball to enter the goal, thereby improving the fairness of the game.

In the gaming machine DB1, the flow-down area is formed from a resin material.

According to the gaming machine DB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB1, the flow-down area is formed from a resin material, so if a part of the resin member forming the flow-down area is damaged, it can be easily restored to its original state by replacing the resin member itself. Therefore, compared to the case where the game balls are distributed by nails, it is possible to improve the maintenance and the operating period of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, in the case of nails, even if bending occurs, it is difficult to visually determine, and operation may occur in a state in which the distribution state (balance) of the game balls has changed since shipment, whereas in the case of forming the flow-down area from a resin material, it is possible to make it difficult for a state different from the state at the time of shipment to be configured by making it difficult for bending to occur, or by designing it to be easily damaged if bending occurs. This makes it easier to maintain the distribution state (balance) of the game balls as it was at the time of shipment.

Gaming machine DB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DB1 or DB2, the first ball inlet is arranged upstream of the second ball inlet, and the profit that a player obtains when a gaming ball enters the second ball inlet is greater than the profit that a player obtains when a gaming ball enters the first ball inlet.

According to the gaming machine DB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machines DB1 or DB2, it is possible to draw attention to whether the gaming ball flows down to the second ball entrance side.

The type of the benefit that the player can obtain is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the presence or absence of prize balls or the number of prize balls, the presence or absence of a lottery for a design, a benefit in which the probability of a lottery changes depending on the passage of the game ball, or a combination of these.

Gaming machine DB4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines DB1 to DB3, it is provided with an upstream means that is arranged upstream of the passing area and is capable of guiding gaming balls in a third direction different from the passing area, the upstream means is configured to prevent gaming balls from flowing down to the second ball entrance, and gaming balls that are diverted in the third direction are configured to be able to flow down a path that passes through a profit passing means that will enable a player to obtain a profit if the ball enters.

According to the gaming machine DB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DB1 to DB3, the gaming balls that do not go to the passing area side do not obstruct the flow of balls toward the second ball entrance, and further, there is a possibility that they may pass through the profit passing means, so that attention to the gaming balls that have deviated from the passing area side can be improved.

In the gaming machine DB4, the gaming ball guided in the third direction by the upstream means is
The gaming machine DB5 is configured such that the probability of the ball entering the profit passing means is higher when the point where guidance starts is on the upstream side.

According to the gaming machine DB5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DB4, the attention of the upstream means can be improved not only on the downstream side arranged on the profit passing means side, but also on the upstream side. In other words, the gaming area can be configured so that even if a player is dissatisfied with the normal game, he or she can feel comfortable in the jackpot game.

In the gaming machine DB5, a first member constituting the general winning port side and a second member constituting the profit passing means side are positioned by engagement between resin components.
6.

According to gaming machine DB6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DB5, it is possible to eliminate the need for fastening screws compared to the case where the first member and the second member are fixed with metal fastening screws, thereby improving visibility at the overlapping position of the first member and the second member.

Gaming machine DB7 is characterized in that the positioning method of gaming machine DB6 is to clamp the ball against the gaming board.

In addition to the effects of the game machine DB6, the game machine DB7 makes it easier to define the positional relationship between the first member and the second member in the portion facing the game area. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of game balls that flow down while contacting the first member and the second member from being irregularly disturbed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the flow of game balls that flow down while contacting the first member and the second member from being irregularly disturbed, which tends to occur when fixing a member to the game board body with a fastening screw.
This can reduce the possibility of the front-rear positions of the first member and the second member being reversed.

The gaming machine DB8 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines DB5 to DB7, it is provided with a deceleration projection which maintains the momentum of the gaming machine until it comes directly above the profit passing means and decelerates it after it comes directly above the profit passing means.

According to gaming machine DB8, in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines DB5 to DB7, damage to the profit passing means caused by a gaming ball colliding with the profit passing means at high speed can be avoided.

In the gaming machine DB8, the winnings are collected from a wide range on both sides, and the profit passing means is
The gaming machine DB9 is characterized by being configured to be wide from left to right.

According to the gaming machine DB9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DB8, even if the gaming balls reach the profit passing means in succession, the first arriving gaming ball can be made to flow left and right to make it easier to accept the following gaming ball. This makes it easier to avoid ball entry failures when the gaming balls reach the profit passing means in succession.

Gaming machine DB10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DB8 or DB9, an assisting means for assisting the flow of the gaming balls in a predetermined manner is arranged behind the flow path of the gaming balls to the profit passing means.

According to gaming machine DB10, in addition to the effects of gaming machines DB8 or DB9, the flow of gaming balls to the profit passing means can be assisted in a predetermined manner by the auxiliary means, so that problems related to the flow of gaming balls can be improved in a predetermined manner.

In the gaming machine DB10, the auxiliary means is a gaming ball that enters a predetermined winning hole and flows down, and a flow path for the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine DB11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DB10, the gaming balls that enter a predetermined winning hole and flow down can be made to look as if they are flowing down toward the profit passing means. This allows the gaming balls that enter a predetermined winning hole during the execution of a big win game to be added to the number of gaming balls that appear to enter the profit passing means, so that it is possible to create the illusion that most of the launched gaming balls enter the profit passing means.

In the gaming machine DB10, the auxiliary means is a decoration means for decorating the flow path to the profit passing means from behind.

According to the gaming machine DB12, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine DB10, when the player's attention is focused on the flow path to the profit passing means, the decorative means can enhance the player's interest as compared with the case where no decoration is applied.

Gaming machine DB13 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines DB1 to DB12, the maintenance of the rate at which gaming balls enter the first ball entry port and the rate at which gaming balls enter the second ball entry port in the flow down area can be executed in multiple states where the rates are different.

According to the gaming machine DB13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DB1 to DB12,
The state maintained in the downflow area can be changed to a plurality of states. For example, a retractable means that retracts at regular intervals may be provided in the downflow area, or the inclination angle of an inclined plate provided between the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet may be controlled to change.

<DC Group Features> (Compact ball distribution device)
A gaming machine DC1 is provided with a gaming board body and a flow-down means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down in a manner that distributes them to a plurality of ball entry ports behind the front end face of the gaming board body, the gaming board body having an arrangement area in which nails can be arranged to distribute the flow path of the gaming balls, and a non-arrangement area in which nails cannot be arranged, and the flow-down means is characterized in that the flow path of the gaming balls is arranged in a range that includes the rear of the non-arrangement area.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet that are arranged on the left and right sides, and a distribution flow path that allows gaming balls to flow down toward the first ball inlet or the second ball inlet (see, for example, JP 2015-144741 A, especially FIG. 4). The distribution flow path is made of a resin material and is formed so that gaming balls can flow down inside it.
In order to make it easier to take measures in the event of ball jamming, etc., a gap large enough for a game ball to pass through is formed upstream of the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet (just before the ball enters).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance are configured to protrude toward the front side of the gaming board, it is difficult to configure the gaming area toward the front side of the distribution flow path. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of ensuring a large range of the formation of the gaming area.

In other words, the area required for placing the first and second ball inlets partially extends toward the front side of the game board, which narrows the other areas in which the game balls can flow down, potentially reducing the design freedom of the area in which the game balls can flow down.

In contrast, with the gaming machine DC1, the flow-down means is arranged behind the front end face of the gaming board main body, so that other components for guiding the gaming ball can be arranged on the front side of the front end face of the gaming board main body, thereby ensuring a large range for the formation of the gaming area.

In the gaming machine DC1, the plurality of ball entrances include a first ball entrance, and the first ball entrance is
The gaming machine DC2 is characterized in that it is positioned so as not to overlap with the movable parts arranged in the gaming area when viewed from the front.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC1, the gaming machine DC2 can prevent the movable parts from reducing the visibility of the gaming ball entering the first ball entrance.

Gaming machine DC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DC1 or DC2, at least a portion of the flow path of the gaming ball that deviates from the first ball entrance and flows down is positioned in a position that overlaps with a movable device arranged in the gaming area when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine DC3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines DC1 and DC2, gaming balls that deviate from the first ball entrance and flow down can be hidden by a movable device.

Gaming machine DC4, in any of gaming machines DC1 to DC3, is characterized in that the flow-down means is equipped with a direction switching unit configured to cause gaming balls to flow down toward the player on the upstream side of the multiple ball entrances.

According to gaming machine DC4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines DC1 to DC3, the direction switching unit allows the gaming balls flowing down the flow means to flow toward the player just before the multiple ball entrances, thereby improving the visibility of the gaming balls and increasing the attention to the gaming balls flowing down toward the multiple ball entrances.

A gaming machine DC5, which is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DC4, a distribution means for distributing the flow direction of the gaming balls is provided at a front position of the direction switching unit on the front side of the gaming board body.
.

According to the gaming machine DC5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine DC4, the distribution means can distribute the gaming balls even at the front position of the gaming board body where it is difficult to drive nails.
This allows for greater freedom in designing the play area.

Gaming machine DC6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DC5, it is provided with a ball entry means configured to allow at least a portion of the gaming balls sorted by the sorting means to enter the machine, the gaming balls that flow down the flow means and down the direction switching section are discharged to the rear side, and the gaming balls flowing down the flow means are configured to be visible through the gaming board body.

According to the gaming machine DC6, the visibility of the gaming ball that has flowed down the direction switching section is reduced, so that it is possible to create the illusion that the gaming ball has entered the ball entry means. This makes it possible to add the gaming balls flowing down the flow-down means to the number of gaming balls flowing down toward the ball entry means, so that it is possible to make it appear as if a large number of gaming balls are flowing down toward the ball entry means.

In this case, the game balls flowing down the flow-down means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the game board body are separated by the game board body and cannot collide, so it is possible to prevent the flow of game balls actually flowing down toward the ball entry means from being blocked by game balls flowing down the flow-down means. In other words, it is possible to execute an effect that makes the player see even more game balls flowing down toward the ball entry means while ensuring the ball entry efficiency of the game balls actually flowing down toward the ball entry means.

A gaming machine DC7 is provided with a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet, and a first flow path configured to allow gaming balls to flow down toward the first ball inlet, and the first flow path has a branched flow path upstream of the first ball inlet, through which gaming balls flow in a direction deviating from the first ball inlet.

According to the gaming machine DC7, even if a ball is jammed on the first ball inlet side in the first flow path,
Since the game balls can be discharged from the branched flow paths, ball clogging can be easily eliminated.

In the gaming machine DC7, the first flow path is provided upstream of the first ball inlet.
The gaming machine DC8 is configured to move the gaming ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line connecting the first ball entrance and the second ball entrance, thereby deflecting the gaming ball away from the first ball entrance.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with a first ball inlet and a second ball inlet that are arranged on the left and right sides, and a distribution flow path that allows gaming balls to flow down toward the first ball inlet or the second ball inlet (see, for example, JP 2015-144741 A, especially FIG. 4). The distribution flow path is made of a resin material and is formed so that gaming balls can flow down inside it.
In order to make it easier to take measures in the event of ball jamming, etc., a gap large enough for a game ball to pass through is formed upstream of the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet (just before the ball enters).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the gap formed upstream of the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet is large enough to discharge the gaming ball, and is formed in a manner that discharges the gaming ball in the left-right direction. Therefore, in order to secure a passing area for the gaming ball, it is necessary to leave a left-right gap between the flow path for flowing the gaming ball toward the first ball inlet and the flow path for flowing the gaming ball toward the second ball inlet that is greater than the diameter of the gaming ball. This creates the problem that the left-right width for arranging the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet is excessively large compared to the actual left-right width of the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet.

In other words, the left and right width (area) required to position the first and second ball inlets is excessively large, which narrows the area in which a path for the game balls to flow can be formed at the front or rear of the game board, potentially reducing the design freedom of the area in which the game balls can flow down.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine DC8, the structure for deflecting the gaming ball from the first ball inlet is configured to advance the gaming ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line, so that it is possible to eliminate the need for the distance between the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the gaming ball, and therefore it is possible to reduce the left-right width (area) for arranging the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the gaming ball flows down.

The design of the range in which the game balls are allowed to flow down is not limited in any way.
For example, it may be the design aspect of the area between the game board and the glass plate of the door frame (so-called game area), or the design aspect of the area behind the front end face of the game board (for example, a resin internal flow path). In the former case, it also includes the design aspect of the arrangement of nails that are driven into the game board as members for guiding the game ball.

Gaming machine DC9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DC8, a second flow path is provided that allows gaming balls to flow down toward the second ball inlet, and the second flow path is configured to cause the gaming ball to proceed in a direction that intersects with a specified straight line connecting the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet, upstream of the second ball inlet, thereby diverting the gaming ball away from the second ball inlet.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DC8, gaming machine DC9 can further reduce the left-right width (area) required for arranging the first and second ball entrances.

Gaming machine DC10 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second flow path configured to allow gaming balls to flow down toward the second ball entrance, and a receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls that have flowed down the first flow path and deviated from the first ball entrance, and gaming balls that have flowed down the second flow path and deviated from the second ball entrance.

According to gaming machine DC10, in addition to the effects of gaming machines DC8 or DC9, the means for receiving gaming balls that have deviated from the first ball entrance and the means for receiving gaming balls that have deviated from the second ball entrance can be combined into a single means, thereby reducing the number of parts and thereby reducing component costs.

Gaming machine DC11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DC10, the receiving means is arranged on the front side of the specified straight line.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DC10, gaming machine DC11 can improve the visibility of gaming balls accepted by the receiving means, making it easier to determine whether a gaming ball that entered the flow-down means passed through the first ball inlet or the second ball inlet, or whether it deviated from the first ball inlet and the second ball inlet and was accepted by the receiving means.

Gaming machine DC12 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DC10, the receiving means is arranged on the rear side of the specified straight line.

According to gaming machine DC12, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine DC10, the visibility of the flow down means can be improved compared to when a flow path for the gaming ball is formed on the front side of the flow down means, making it easier to determine that the gaming ball is passing through the first ball inlet and second ball inlet arranged downstream of the flow down means.

<Feature DD group> (Performance is performed on the easy-to-see side, and evacuation is performed by moving to the difficult-to-see side)
The gaming machine DD1 is provided with a moving means capable of moving between a first position where an action presentation is performed and a second position different from the first position, and the second position is a position where the visibility of the moving means is lower than that of the first position.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that have a rotating member that is supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (for example, JP 2010-200
(See Japanese Patent Publication No. 914.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the rotational movement member is always visible inside the opening, so that the position of the rotational movement member may be shifted due to poor control, or the rotational movement member after over-rotation may be easily visible to the player, which may reduce the presentation effect.

In contrast, according to gaming machine DD1, the visibility of the moving means is lower in the second position compared to the first position where the action presentation is executed, so that even if a posture shift or over-rotation occurs in the second position, the condition is difficult for the player to see, and a reduction in the presentation effect can be prevented.

The manner in which the visibility of the moving means is reduced is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, a member that blocks the view may be placed between the moving means and the player, regardless of whether it is a transparent member or an opaque member, or the moving means may be displaced (retracted) outward from the area on the front side of the liquid crystal display device that is likely to attract the player's attention.

Gaming machine DD2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DD1, the first position is located closer to the front of the gaming machine than the second position.

According to the gaming machine DD2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine DD1, the visual size of the moving means itself can be enlarged by moving the moving means from the second position to the first position.

Gaming machine DD3 is characterized in that the moving means in gaming machine DD2 is rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis, and the front-to-rear arrangement changes due to the rotation.

According to the gaming machine DD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DD2, it is possible to change the front-rear arrangement of the moving means without the need to translate the moving means forward and backward.
The structure for changing the front-rear arrangement of the moving means can be simplified.

Gaming machine DD4 is any one of gaming machines DD1 to DD3, characterized in that it comprises an auxiliary means for assisting in maintaining the state of the moving means arranged in the second position on the appropriate side.

According to the gaming machine DD4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines DD1 to DD3,
By adjusting the state of the moving means to an appropriate state at the first position using the auxiliary means, the performance of the moving means at the first position can be appropriately executed.

The manner of assistance is not limited in any way. For example, the attitude of the moving means may be corrected to the appropriate side by contact, or the moving means may be maintained on the appropriate side by a biasing force.

Gaming machine DD5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DD4, the auxiliary means is arranged on the second position side with respect to the first position.

According to the gaming machine DD5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DD4, the auxiliary means can be easily hidden by placing the auxiliary means on an inconspicuous side. Therefore, a separate member for hiding the auxiliary means is not required, and the space in front of the auxiliary means can be secured as a presentation space.

The arrangement of the second position side is not limited in any way, and various arrangements are exemplified. For example, it may be a side that is simply not noticeable, may be a rear side in the front-rear direction, or may be an outer side of a central opening of the game board facing the liquid crystal device.

Gaming machine DD6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DD5, the second position is set closer to the rear of the gaming machine than the first position, and the auxiliary means is arranged so that the moving means blocks the player's line of sight when the moving means is placed at the second position.

According to the gaming machine DD6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DD5, the auxiliary means can be hidden by using the moving means, so that it is easy to prevent the auxiliary means from being discovered and the appearance of the moving means when it is retracted is good. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary means.

Gaming machine DD7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines DD1 to DD6, the movement of the moving means is composed of a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for placing the moving means in a state where the first movement is possible, and that during the second movement, the state of the moving means is brought closer to the appropriate side.

According to the gaming machine DD7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines DD1 to DD6,
This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the moving means is in an inappropriate state when moving toward a position.

Gaming machine DD8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DD7, the moving means brings the state closer to the appropriate side by a biasing force.

According to the gaming machine DD8, the moving means can be brought closer to the appropriate side without depending on the control.

Gaming machine DD9, in which the second movement in the gaming machine DD7 or DD8 is a rotational movement around a predetermined rotation axis.

According to gaming machine DD9, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines DD7 and DD8, it is possible to change the state of the moving means so as to approach the appropriate side while the attitude of the moving means is being changed.

Gaming machine DD10 is any one of gaming machines DD7 to DD9, characterized in that during the first movement, the front side and the back side of the moving means are formed in different forms.

According to gaming machine DD10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines DD7 to DD9, the front side visible to the player can be formed in a shape suitable for decoration, and the back side can be formed in a shape suitable for functionality.

<Feature DE group> (Performance that changes the surface shown by the performance device)
The gaming machine DE1 is provided with a first means capable of executing a predetermined performance, the first means being changeable between a first posture for performing a first performance and a second posture for performing a second performance as the predetermined performance, and the side facing forward changes between the first posture and the second posture.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with a position-changing member that is pivotally supported on a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (for example, JP 2010-200
(See Japanese Patent Publication No. 914.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the position-changing member always faces the same side toward the front, and there is no change in appearance beyond the change in position, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the presentation effect using the position-changing member.

In contrast, according to the game machine DE1, the side of the first means facing the front is configured to change between the first and second positions, so if each side of the single movable means called the first means is designed in a different manner, the side that is seen (the front side) can be changed, and the first means can be made to look like a completely different object to the player. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of improving the presentation effect of the first means.

The form of the predetermined performance is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a motion performance in which at least a part of the first means operates, or a light emission performance using light irradiated from a light emitting means included in the first means.

In the gaming machine DE1, the first means is provided with a predetermined light-emitting means arranged along a predetermined shape so that a figure can be seen by the emitted light, and the figure seen by the predetermined light-emitting means is configured to be changeable between the first position and the second position.

According to the gaming machine DE2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine DE1, the presentation effect of the first means can be improved by changing the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means.

The manner in which the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light-emitting means is changed is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, the figure to be visually recognized may be changed by controlling the light-emitting pattern of each light-emitting element of the predetermined light-emitting means in a stopped state, or the figure to be visually recognized (afterimage, etc.) may be changed by operating the predetermined light-emitting means while fixing the light-emitting state of each light-emitting element of the predetermined light-emitting means, or a combination of these may be used.

Gaming machine DE3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DE1 or DE2, the first means is movable between a first position and a second position, and the outer shape of the first means that is visible at the first position is different from the outer shape of the first means that is visible at the second position.

According to the gaming machine DE3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machines DE1 or DE2, the first means is configured so that the external shape seen as it moves changes, so that the player can see an effect that is difficult to achieve with a single member. This improves the effect of the first means.

The gaming machine DE4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DE3, the area in which the first means can perform a presentation operation is set in accordance with a presentation mode.

According to gaming machine DE4, in addition to the effect of gaming machine DE3, the area required for the presentation operation executed by the first means is configured to change in size depending on the presentation mode. Therefore, even if the area in which the first means can perform the presentation operation changes depending on the arrangement of the first means, the first means can be operated in a presentation mode that matches that area, thereby improving the design freedom of the presentation of the operation of the first means.

A gaming machine DE5, comprising a dividing means arranged to divide the first means arranged at the first position when viewed in a predetermined direction in the gaming machine DE3 or DE4.

According to gaming machine DE5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines DE3 or DE4, the separation means can make the appearance of the first means at the first position different from the appearance of the first means at the second position (non-separated).

Gaming machine DE6, in any of gaming machines DE3 to DE5, is characterized in that the specified light-emitting means is configured so that the figure visible in the first attitude at the first position corresponds to the shape of a progress assistance means that assists the progress of a gaming ball in the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine DE6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines DE3 to DE5,
The light emitted in the position can provide an effect that suggests to the player the direction in which the game ball will travel, and thus can be used in combination with the effect related to the direction in which the game ball will travel, in addition to the effect provided by the first means alone.

The form of the advancement assistance means is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a metal rail including a portion for guiding the shot ball to the play area, a guide means arranged in the play area for guiding the game ball flowing down, or a ball passage state switching means capable of switching between a state in which the game ball is permitted to pass and a state in which the game ball is restricted to pass.

In the gaming machine DE6, the figure that is visually recognized in the second position in the second attitude is a figure that draws attention to a predetermined ball entry area where a game ball can enter.
E7.

According to the gaming machine DE7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DE6, a different type of light effect can be performed by a single first means as a light effect executed for the same purpose. This makes it easier to prevent the player from getting bored with the effects.

Gaming machine DE8, in any of gaming machines DE3 to DE7, is characterized in that the movement of the first means is composed of a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for placing the moving means in a state where the first movement is possible, and is configured to bring the state of the first means closer to the appropriate side during the second movement.

According to the gaming machine DE8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines DE3 to DE7,
This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the moving means is in an inappropriate state when moving toward a position.

In the gaming machine DE8, the first means is characterized in that the state is brought closer to the appropriate side by a biasing force.

According to the gaming machine DE9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DE8, the first
The means can be brought closer to the correct side.

Gaming machine DE10, in which the second movement in the gaming machine DE8 or DE9 is a rotational movement around a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine DE10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines DE8 and DE9, it is possible to change the state of the moving means so as to approach the appropriate side while the attitude of the displacement means is changing.

Gaming machine DE11 is any one of gaming machines DE8 to DE10, characterized in that during the first movement, the front side and the back side of the displacement means are formed in different modes.

According to the gaming machine DE11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines DE8 to DE10,
The front side, which is seen by the player, can be formed in a shape suitable for decoration, while the back side can be formed in a shape suitable for functionality.

<Feature DF Group> (Support structure for operated member)
A gaming machine DF1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable and a support means supporting the displacement means, the support means comprising an allowance portion capable of allowing the displacement of the displacement means and a limiting portion capable of limiting the displacement of the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a movable unit that moves up and down by driving a pair of left and right drive devices is provided with a rotating member that is rotated by an individual drive device (see, for example, JP 2013-000482 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the movable unit is supported on the plate parts extending up and down on both the left and right sides in a manner that moves linearly in the vertical direction, so that if a difference occurs in the drive timing of the pair of left and right drive devices and a load is generated in a direction that causes the posture of the movable unit to collapse (tilt), the smoothness of the movement of the movable unit is lost and the operating resistance increases, increasing the possibility of damage to the power transmission system. In other words, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of performance and durability.

In contrast, according to gaming machine DF1, the support means supporting the displacement means is provided with a limiting section that limits the displacement of the displacement means, as well as an allowing section that allows the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy in the drive timing for driving the displacement means, the displacement of the displacement means relative to the support means is allowed in advance, so that the smooth operation of the displacement means can be maintained within that allowable range, and the load applied to the displacement means between the support means and the displacement means can be reduced.
This allows for improvements in terms of presentation and durability.

In addition, by configuring the support mode of the displacement means so that it is possible to appropriately select whether to increase the proportion of influence of the allowing portion or to increase the proportion of influence of the restricting portion, two support modes can be configured.

In the conventional gaming machine, the movable unit is described as being displaced in the vertical direction.
The displacement direction of the displacement means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an up-down direction, a left-right direction, a front-rear direction, or a rotation direction about a predetermined rotation axis.
A combination of these is also possible.

The configuration of the permitting portion and the restricting portion can be arbitrarily set in shape, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the permitting portion may be formed as a long hole extending in the first direction, and the restricting portion may be formed as a perfect circle having a diameter shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the permitting portion.

A gaming machine DF2, in which the allowing portion is configured to allow the displacement of the displacement means when the displacement of the restricted portion of the displacement means is restricted by the restricting portion in the gaming machine DF1.

According to the gaming machine DF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DF1, it is possible to allow the displacement of the displacement means having the limiting portion as a base end. As a result, compared to the case where the presence or absence of the displacement limit is switched by electrical control, it is possible to easily ensure the smoothness of the displacement of the displacement means since no control is required.

In the gaming machine DF1 or DF2, the allowance unit is configured to be able to change between a first allowance state in which the displacement of the displacement means is allowed within a first allowance range and a second allowance state in which the displacement of the displacement means is allowed within a second allowance range that is smaller than the first allowance range.
.

According to gaming machine DF3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines DF1 or DF2, even if the displacement widths corresponding to the types of displacement of the displacement means are different, it is possible to accommodate different displacement widths using one tolerance section.

Gaming machine DF4, in which the state change in the gaming machine DF3 occurs when the attitude of the displacement means changes.

According to the gaming machine DF4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DF3, the allowable range allowed by the allowance part is changed by the change in the attitude of the displacement means, so that the attitude of the displacement means that is allowed and limited in displacement can be directly linked to the size of the allowable range of displacement, and therefore malfunction of the displacement means can be avoided in advance. Also, compared to the case where a separate limiting member is used to hold down the displacement means and limit the displacement, the number of components can be reduced.

A gaming machine DF5, characterized in that in the gaming machine DF4, the displacement means is supported by the support means so as to be displaced along a first direction, the first permissible state is such that the direction of displacement of the displacement means permitted by the permitting portion is included on a predetermined plane parallel to the first direction, and the second permissible state is such that the direction of displacement of the displacement means permitted by the permitting portion intersects with the predetermined plane.

According to gaming machine DF5, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine DF4, the allowable range of displacement by the allowable part can be changed by switching the direction allowed by the allowable part as the direction of displacement of the displacement means relative to the first direction.

As a result, in relation to the control of the drive device that drives the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means is maintained in a first permissible state in a range in which positional deviation in the first direction between the displacement means and the support means is likely to occur, while the posture of the displacement means is set to a second permissible state in a range in which positional deviation can be prevented or where it is desired to prevent positional deviation. This makes it possible to achieve a well-defined displacement pattern in which the displacement of the displacement means is neither too soft nor too hard.

Gaming machine DF6 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines DF3 to DF5, the displacement means supports an operating means configured to be operable, the operating means is configured to be capable of high-speed operation, and the high-speed operation is executable when the allowing section is in the second allowing state.

According to the gaming machine DF6, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines DF3 to DF5, it is possible to easily prevent the position of the displacement means from being shifted due to the inertial load generated by the high speed operation of the operation means.

Gaming machine DF7, in any one of gaming machines DF1 to DF6, is characterized in that the support means is composed of a pair of members supporting the displacement means from both sides.

According to the gaming machine DF7, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines DF1 to DF6, the displacement means can be stably supported.

A gaming machine DF8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DF7, the pair of members are configured to be rotatably displaceable around a first axis as the coaxial center, and the allowable width of the allowable portion is formed to extend along the first axial direction.

According to the gaming machine DF8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine DF7, the displacement of the displacement means within the allowable width allowed by the allowable portion can be generated on the tangent plane of the cylinder centered on the first axis. In other words, the displacement allowed by the allowable portion can be generated as a displacement in a manner in which the displacement means is twisted with respect to the first axis.

This makes it possible to three-dimensionally deal with difficult-to-avoid deviations in the amount of displacement, such as backlash, that can occur when gears are used in the drive transmission mechanisms on both the left and right sides, and enables smooth rotational displacement of the displacement means around the first axis.

A gaming machine DF9, characterized in that one of the support means in the gaming machine DF8 is provided with the limiting portion.

According to the gaming machine DF9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine DF8, misalignment of the other supporting means and the moving means during assembly can be tolerated, making assembly easier.

A gaming machine DF10, in any one of gaming machines DF1 to DF9, is characterized in that the tolerance portion is formed as a long hole, and the restriction portion is formed as a long hole whose longitudinal direction is shorter than the longitudinal direction of the tolerance portion.

According to the gaming machine DF10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DF1 to DF9, the moving means can be slid in the longitudinal direction of the restricting portion and the allowing portion. This can relieve the load acting on the moving means or can be utilized for the motion presentation of the moving means.

<Feature DG Group> (Technical idea of setting multiple types of fixing force for moving means)
The gaming machine DG1 is provided with a movable moving means and a load applying means capable of applying a load to the moving means, and the load applying means is capable of switching the load to be applied in response to the state of the moving means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a restricting means (load applying means) that is configured to be movable to a position where the movement of a moving means that is vertically displaced can be restricted (for example, JP-A-2003-133635).
(See Patent Publication No. 16-54856.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the movement of the moving means can be restricted by the restricting means, no further effect can be expected, and the cost-effectiveness of the volume occupied by the restricting means is low. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of effective use of the restricting means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine DG1, the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means is:
Since the load application means can be switched in response to the state of the moving means, a single load application means can have a plurality of types of effects on the movement of the moving means, which means that the load application means can be utilized effectively.

The state of the moving means that is used as a criterion for switching the load of the load applying means is not limited in any way, and various states are exemplified. For example, the state of the moving means may be a difference in the arrangement of the moving means or a difference in the operation state.

Examples of states with different operating modes include a state in which the moving means operates actively and a state in which the moving means operates passively in response to the operation of other moving means held by the moving means or other moving means arranged outside the moving means.

The manner in which the load is applied is not limited, and various manners are exemplified. For example, the direction of the load based on the moving direction of the moving means may be switched (a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means, a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means,
The load applied by the load application means may be switched depending on the time elapsed since the moving means starts to move, or the type of load applied by the load application means may be switched depending on the time elapsed since the moving means starts to move.

The load switching mode may be a change in the magnitude of the load or a change in the load generation mode, for example, a frictional force (brake) caused by friction with the moving means or a restricting force (stopper) generated by reaching the limit of the allowable range of the load.

Gaming machine DG2 is characterized in that in gaming machine DG1, the load applying means is capable of switching the load to be applied between an opposing state in which a load is applied in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means, and an intersecting state in which a load is applied in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means.

According to gaming machine DG2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DG1, the load applied from the load application means to the moving means can be switched by changing the position of the load application means relative to the movement path of the moving means, eliminating the need for a complex shape for switching the load and allowing the load application means to be constructed simply.

Gaming machine DG3 is characterized in that in gaming machine DG1 or DG2, the load application means is provided with a load application moving means that is movable in a direction intersecting the movement direction of the moving means, and the load application moving means is configured to be able to abut against the moving means.

According to gaming machine DG3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines DG1 or DG2, the load-applying moving means can be configured to appear and disappear from the movement path of the moving means by linear movement (linear motion), so that the movement range (movement range taking into account movement variations) required of the load-applying moving means to switch the type of load applied from the load-applying means to the moving means can be reduced.

Therefore, the space required for arranging the load applying moving means can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the space required for arranging the moving means and the load applying means is usually limited to an interior of a size (volume) determined by a predetermined standard, so by reducing the space required for arranging the load applying moving means, the degree of freedom in arranging the moving means and the load applying means can be improved.

Gaming machine DG4 is characterized in that in gaming machine DG3, the load applying means is configured so that its moving direction intersects perpendicularly with the moving direction of the moving means, and movement in the moving direction of the moving means is restricted.

According to the gaming machine DG4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine DG3, the load applying means can have a large difference in the type of load applied to the moving means with a minimum movement width.

A gaming machine DG5, in any one of the gaming machines DG1 to DG4, characterized in that the load applied by the load application means is switched in accordance with the position of the moving means.
.

According to the gaming machine DG5, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines DG1 to DG4, it is possible to cope with a case in which the performance action of the moving means is configured to be different depending on the position.

For example, when a moving means is equipped with a specified operating means, if a performance is executed in which the operating means operates at high speed when the moving means is stopped, but is stopped or operates slowly when the moving means moves, there may be a demand to securely fix the moving means when it is stopped, but there may be a demand to gently fix (brake) the moving means when it moves.

By switching the load applied by the load application means in accordance with the position of the moving means, different requirements due to different arrangements of the moving means can be met.

Gaming machine DG6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines DG1 to DG5, the load application means applies a load when the moving means moves in the forward direction, and releases the application of the load when the moving means moves in the reverse direction.

According to the gaming machine DG6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DG1 to DG5, the difference between forward and reverse moving directions can be dealt with by the presence or absence (large or small) of a load from the load applying means.

Gaming machine DG7 is any one of gaming machines DG1 to DG6, characterized in that it is equipped with a driving means that generates a driving force to move the moving means, and a separation load is generated in a direction that moves the moving means and the driving means apart.

According to gaming machine DG7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines DG1 to DG6, a separation load is generated, which allows the moving means to be separated from the driving means, thereby reducing the transmission efficiency of the driving force.

Gaming machine DG8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DG7, the separation load is generated from the load applying means.

According to the gaming machine DG8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine DG7, the load applying means can be configured to be multifunctional.

Gaming machine DG9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DG7, the separation load is generated in the drive means.

According to the gaming machine DG9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine DG7, it is possible to reduce the transmission efficiency of the driving force on the upstream side of the transmission path of the driving force.

Gaming machine DG10 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines DG1 to DG9, it can be configured to have a case in which a frictional force is applied from the load application means to the moving means, and a case in which the load application means restricts the movement of the moving means.

According to gaming machine DG10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines DG1 to DG9, the variety of movement patterns of the moving means can be increased even when the moving means is moved by generating a similar driving force.

<Characteristic DH group>
A gaming machine DH1 comprising: a movable moving means; a first guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means; and a second guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means in a manner different from that of the first guiding means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the movement of the moving means is guided by a pair of guiding means having the same configuration (for example, see JP 2012-157474 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the load applied to the pair of parts of the moving means that are guided by the guiding means is the same, and in order to improve durability, it is necessary to increase the strength of each of them in the same manner, which reduces the design freedom of the moving means (part of the moving means that is guided by the pair of guiding means).

In contrast, according to the gaming machine DH1, the first and second guide means that guide the movement of the moving means have different guidance modes, so that the type of load applied and the strength values required to improve durability can be made different. Therefore, the shape and strength of the parts of the moving means that are guided by the multiple guide means can be made different.
This improves the degree of freedom in designing the moving means (that part of the moving means that is guided by a plurality of guiding means).

The difference between the first guide means and the second guide means is not limited in any way, and various examples are given. For example, the first guide means may be configured as a guide rail while the second guide means may be configured as a guide hole, the first guide means may be a rotation guide means supported by a predetermined rotation shaft while the second guide means may be configured as a guide groove,
The combination of each component may be changed.

For example, when the first guide means and the second guide means are guide grooves, the extension directions of the grooves of the first guide means and the second guide means may be parallel to each other, but the widths of the grooves may be different.
The grooves of the guide means and the second guide means may extend in non-parallel directions, but have a common width.

A gaming machine DH2, in which the second guiding means is arranged so that at least a portion of the second guiding means is aligned along the first guiding means in the gaming machine DH1.

According to the gaming machine DH2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine DH1, since at least a part of the second guiding means is aligned with the first guiding means, the moving means can be operated in two stages.

In the gaming machine DH2, the second guiding means is characterized in that it includes an auxiliary portion that is aligned with the first guiding means and an auxiliary portion that guides the moving means in a direction different from when it is guided by the auxiliary portion.

According to the gaming machine DH3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DH2, the moving direction of the moving means can be changed at the boundary between the annex section and the auxiliary section.
The movement mode of the moving means can be made more complex.

A gaming machine DH4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines DH1 to DH3, it is provided with a transmission means for transmitting a driving force for moving the moving means to the moving means, and the displacement direction of the transmission means is fixed in one direction regardless of the moving direction of the moving means.

According to gaming machine DH4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines DH1 to DH3, the design of the drive force transmission system can be made easier compared to a case in which the displacement direction of the transmission means is switched while the moving means is moving.

Gaming machine DH5, in which the transmission means in the gaming machine DH4 is configured to transmit the driving force via a guided portion guided by the second guiding means.

According to gaming machine DH5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine DH4, the driving force is transmitted through the guided portion guided by the narrow second guiding means, thereby making it possible to suppress misalignment of the guided portion when the driving force is transmitted.

Gaming machine DH6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DH5, the guided portion is configured to overtake the auxiliary guiding portion guided by the first guiding means in the moving direction of the transmission means.

According to gaming machine DH6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine DH5, the driving force required when the moving means starts to move can be reduced compared to when the entire weight of the auxiliary guiding section is applied to the guided section and driven against that entire weight.

Gaming machine DH7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines DH2 to DH6, when the moving means is guided to the auxiliary section, the first guide means side of the moving means is urged in a rotational direction with the second guide means side of the moving means as the rotation axis, and when the moving means is guided to the auxiliary section, the second guide means side of the moving means is urged in a rotational direction with the first guide means side of the moving means as the rotation axis.

According to gaming machine DH7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines DH2 to DH6, when a roller guided by a guiding means is adopted as a configuration, the roller becomes easier to rotate, thereby reducing wear on the roller as a guided member.

In any one of the gaming machines DH3 to DH7, when the moving means is guided to the auxiliary section, the moving means is maintained in a predetermined section of the first guiding means, and the first guiding means is
The gaming machine DH8 is characterized in that it is formed wider than the second guide means.

According to the gaming machine DH8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DH3 to DH7, the movement of the moving means guided by the auxiliary section can be stabilized because the wide first guiding means can maintain the moving means at the predetermined section. Therefore, it is easy to prevent the part of the moving means guided by the second guiding means from becoming unstable when passing through the boundary between the annex section and the auxiliary section. This stabilizes the movement of the moving means, and
Where the movement is arranged to switch in steps, smooth step-changes can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the support area at the predetermined portion of the first guiding means can be increased, it is possible to easily avoid localized wear between the moving means and the first guiding means.

Gaming machine DH9 is characterized in that, in gaming machine DH8, the predetermined portion is configured to suppress at least vertical displacement of the moving means.

According to gaming machine DH9, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine DH8, the load required to move the moving means can be reduced in the portion guided by the first guiding means.

Gaming machine DH10 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DH8 or DH9, electrical wiring connected to said moving means is arranged through said first guiding means.

According to gaming machine DH10, in addition to the effects of gaming machines DH8 or DH9, it is possible to ensure sufficient cross-sectional area for passing electrical wiring and to suppress displacement of the electrical wiring when the moving means is guided to the auxiliary section, thereby improving the durability of the electrical wiring.

<Feature EA Group> (Invalid Control)
In a gaming machine having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a display means for displaying identification information for showing a result of the discrimination by the discrimination means, an operation means operable by a player, a display control means for causing the display means to display a state based on the operation of the operation means, and a benefit granting means for granting an advantageous benefit to a player when the identification information for showing a specific result of the discrimination is displayed on the display means,
The gaming machine EA1 is characterized by having a first process execution means capable of executing a process, and an invalid control means capable of invalidating the operation of the operating means at least for the period until execution of the first process is completed.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball in a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which an initial setting is executed as a power-on process when the power is turned on (Prior art document: JP 2012-21776 A
(Publication No. 6).

However, when the initial settings are performed, it is necessary to restrict the execution of the game until the game can be started.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that is capable of executing initial settings in a suitable manner.

According to the gaming machine EA1, if the operating means is operated while the first process is being executed, the operation can be invalidated, thereby having the effect of suppressing malfunctions in which operation control of the operating means is hindered due to the execution of the first process.

In the gaming machine EA1, the first process is a process required for displaying the mode on the display means.

According to the gaming machine EA2, during the period in which the first process is executed in which the process necessary to display the above-mentioned aspect on the display means is performed, a process is executed in which the operation of the operating means is invalidated, thereby having the effect of suppressing malfunctions.

Gaming machine EA3, in which the invalid control means in the gaming machine EA1 or EA2 is configured to be capable of setting an invalid period during which operation of the operating means is invalid if the first processing has not been completed when a predetermined condition is met.

According to gaming machine EA3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines EA1 or EA2, if the first process is completed within the period until a specified condition is satisfied, an invalid period is not set, thereby suppressing the inconvenience of the operating means being unable to be operated for a long period of time.

A gaming machine EA4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines EA1 to EA3, it has a setting process execution means capable of executing a setting process based on setting information, the first process execution means is configured to be able to execute the first process even during the period in which the setting process is being executed, and the specified condition is established when the setting process is completed by the setting process execution means.

According to gaming machine EA4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines EA1 to EA3, the period during which the setting process is executed is long, and when the first process is completed, the operation means is not disabled, thereby suppressing the malfunction of the operation means being disabled for a long period of time.

<Features EB group>
a display means for displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific result of the determination is displayed on the display means; and a gaming machine EB1 having an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means for displaying an identification information indicating a specific result of the determination, the gaming machine EB1 being characterized in having a pre-determination means capable of executing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the result of the determination by the pre-determination means, and a prohibition period setting means for setting a prohibition period during which the execution of the determination by the pre-determination means is prohibited.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a lose, and if the lottery result is a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. When a gaming ball enters the starting hole, a random number or the like for executing a lottery for a game is obtained, and the random number or the like for executing a lottery for a game is stored as a reserved ball until the lottery is executed, and a judgment is made in advance as to whether the reserved ball will be a win or a lose before the lottery is executed, and a preview performance or the like is executed based on the result of the foresight has been proposed (Prior art document: JP 2012-217 A2012- ...
(Publication No. 766).

However, there have been cases where a malfunction occurred in the execution of game effects when effects were executed based on the results of pre-reading.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine in which malfunctions are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine EB1, a prohibited period is set during which the execution of judgment by the pre-judgment means is prohibited, so that a period is set during which a presentation based on a new pre-judgment cannot be executed, thereby having the effect of suppressing presentations based on pre-judgments.

A gaming machine EB2 characterized in that in a gaming machine EB1, a prohibition period setting means is capable of setting a first prohibition period and a second prohibition period that is longer than the first prohibition period, and the pre-determination means is configured to execute the pre-determination if a specific condition is met and the game is not within the second prohibition period, and to execute the pre-determination if the specific condition is not met and the game is not within the first prohibition period.

According to gaming machine EB2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine EB1, by selectively using the first and second prohibition periods, the period during which pre-determination is not performed can be switched depending on the situation, and suitable control can be executed according to the situation.

A gaming machine EB3, which is a gaming machine EB1 or EB2, has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibited period setting means is configured to be able to set a prohibited period corresponding to the period during which the specific effect is executed.

According to gaming machine EB3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine EB1 or EB2, a prohibited period is set corresponding to the period during which a specific effect is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a malfunction in which a pre-determined effect is interrupted when a specific effect is started.

<Characteristic EC group>
a display means for displaying identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific result of the determination is displayed on the display means; a gaming machine EC1 having an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific result of the determination is displayed on the display means;

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a lose, and if the lottery result is a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. When a gaming ball enters the starting hole, a random number or the like for executing a lottery for a game is obtained, and the random number or the like for executing a lottery for a game is stored as a reserved ball until the lottery is executed, and a judgment is made in advance of whether the reserved ball will be a win or a lose before the lottery is executed, and a preview performance or the like is executed based on the result of the foresight has been proposed (Prior art document: JP 2012-217 A2012- ...
(Publication No. 766).

However, there have been cases where a malfunction occurred in the execution of game effects when effects were executed based on the results of pre-reading.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine in which malfunctions are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine EC1, a plurality of different prohibition periods can be set, so that the length of the prohibition period can be varied depending on the state, which has the effect of suppressing the inconvenience of the prohibition period becoming unnecessarily long.

In the gaming machine EC1, the prohibition period setting means is configured to be capable of setting a prohibition period corresponding to the number of pieces of information that are determined to be the specific judgment result stored in the memory means.

According to gaming machine EC2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine EC1, a prohibition period is set corresponding to a specific judgment result and a number stored in the storage means, and therefore, since the prohibition period is set according to the situation stored in the storage means, there is an effect of suppressing a malfunction in which the prohibition period becomes long.

Gaming machine EC3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine EC1 or EC2, it has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the prohibited period setting means is configured to be able to set a prohibited period corresponding to the period during which the specific effect is executed.

According to gaming machine EC3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine EC1 or EC2, a prohibited period is set corresponding to the period during which a fixed performance is executed, so that it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of a performance determined in advance being interrupted due to the start of a specific performance.

<Characteristic ED group>
a game machine having information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, display means for displaying identification information for showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the identification information for showing a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the bonus games being composed of a plurality of small bonus games, the game machine further comprising: a suggested mode execution means for executing a suggested mode corresponding to a bonus granted to a player in the small bonus game, and an awarding means for awarding specific information when the suggested mode is executed by the suggested mode execution means;
The gaming machine ED1 is characterized by having the above.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball in a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed.
A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies a player at a specific timing when a beneficial chance hit has occurred (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the timing of the notification tends to be constant, which can lead to monotony in gameplay.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine in which malfunctions are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine ED1, a bonus is awarded in a small bonus game, and specific information can be notified at the timing when a suggestive mode is executed, which has the effect of diversifying the timing at which the specific information is notified.

A gaming machine ED2 has a variable ball entry means that can change between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the machine and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the machine than in the first state, and a bonus granting means that can grant the bonus based on the gaming ball entering the variable ball entry means, and the small bonus game is characterized in that the variable ball entry means is configured to be variable from the second state to the first state.

According to the game machine ED2, in addition to the effects achieved by the game machine ED1, a small bonus game can be executed, making it possible to get a bonus by making a game ball enter a variable ball entry means, thereby providing an effect of adding freshness to the game.

A gaming machine ED3, which is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ED1 or ED2, it has a determination means capable of determining, among the plurality of small bonus games, a small bonus game to which the specific information can be awarded.

According to gaming machine ED3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines ED1 or ED2, the small bonus game to which specific information is awarded is determined by a determination means, so that it is possible to diversify which small bonus games among the bonus games are to which specific information is awarded, thereby providing a variety of games.

<Features EE group>
a determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, and a benefit granting means for granting an advantageous benefit to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific result of the determination is displayed on the display means;
a storage means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period to be determined by the dynamic display period determination means, a determination probability for the set dynamic display period to be determined by the dynamic display period determination means is set in advance in the dynamic period group, and a specific dynamic display period group in which a probability of determining a specific dynamic display period is set higher than other dynamic display periods is set in the plurality of dynamic display period groups, the dynamic display period determination means determines a dynamic display period from the specific dynamic display period group based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the gaming machine has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when it is determined in advance that the predetermined condition is established.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball in a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed.
A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies a player at a specific timing when a beneficial chance hit has occurred (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a problem that the game became monotonous. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem of the game becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine EE1, since it can be determined in advance by a specific performance that the dynamic display period will be determined from a specific dynamic display period group, there is an effect that it is possible to expect dynamic display in the specific dynamic display period.

A gaming machine EE2, characterized in that in the gaming machine EE1, the dynamic display period determination means is configured to be able to determine the dynamic display period from the specific dynamic display period group when the specified condition is satisfied, until an end condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine EE1, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine EE1, the state in which the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group continues until the end condition is met, so that the specific dynamic display periods can be easily executed continuously, and the special dynamic display period can add a freshness to the game.

The gaming machine EE3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EE1 or EE2, it has a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect when a dynamic display period different from the specific dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination means when the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group by the dynamic display period determination means.

According to the gaming machine EE3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines EE1 or EE2, a special effect is executed by determining a dynamic display period which has a low probability of being determined, so that it is possible to determine that a specific group of dynamic display periods is continuously set by continuously executing special effects, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

<Feature EF group>
a determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, and a benefit granting means for granting an advantageous benefit to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific result of the determination is displayed on the display means;
a memory means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period to be determined by the dynamic display period determination means, a determination probability for the set dynamic display period to be determined by the dynamic display period determination means is preset in the dynamic period group, and a specific dynamic display period group is set in the plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a probability for a specific dynamic display period to be determined is set higher than other dynamic display periods, the dynamic display period determination means determines a dynamic display period from the specific dynamic display period group based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group, a specific suggestion mode is notified to the player.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball in a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed.
A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies a player at a specific timing when a beneficial chance hit has occurred (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the timing of the notification tends to be constant, which can lead to monotony in gameplay.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that suppresses problems that make gameplay monotonous.

According to the gaming machine EF1, by notifying a suggested mode, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous by making the player look forward to a dynamic display during a specific dynamic display period.

<Feature EG group>
A gaming machine EG1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine having: an effect execution means for executing an effect based on setting information; and a storage means for storing information based on the establishment of a specific condition that can be established during the period when the identification information is dynamically displayed, the effect execution means executing an effect based on the information stored in the storage means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A configuration has been proposed in which information related to the game, such as information related to the lottery result, is notified to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there were issues with the game becoming monotonous and players quickly becoming bored with it.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine EG1, the presentation is executed based on the information stored in the storage means, and the presentation is executed by dynamically displaying the identification information, which has the effect of making it easier to continue playing the game.

The gaming machine EG2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EG1, it has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the establishment of the effect condition, and the predetermined condition is configured to be able to be established during the period during which the specific effect is being executed.

According to the gaming machine EG2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine EG1, a predetermined condition is established during the period in which a specific effect is being executed, so that a player can play the game in the hope that a specific effect will be executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Features EH group>
A gaming machine EH1 having an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine having an identification pattern display means capable of causing the display means to display an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to setting information, the effect execution means being configured to be able to execute the effect based on the display of the identification pattern.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A configuration has been proposed in which information related to the game, such as information related to the lottery result, is notified to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there were issues with the game becoming monotonous and players quickly becoming bored with it.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

The gaming machine EH1 has the effect of suppressing the problem of players quickly becoming bored with the game.

<Feature EGEB1 group> (Determine the period when the setting suggestion effect is likely to be executed and the period when it is unlikely to be executed)
a determination means capable of performing a determination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and a setting value setting means capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of setting values including at least a first setting value in which a probability of the specific determination result is set to a first probability, and a second setting value in which a probability higher than the first probability is set,
a setting value storage means capable of storing information relating to the setting value set by the setting value setting means; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the information stored in the setting value storage means;
In a gaming machine having the above, a first
The gaming machine EGEB1 has a period setting means capable of setting at least a first period and a second period during which the performance is more difficult to execute than the first period.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning result, the machine transitions to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some aim to increase the interest during the winning state by differentiating the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although it is possible to keep a player interested in whether or not a winning game will be played, there is a problem in that the game content cannot be varied depending on the period during which the game is played, and the game becomes monotonous.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine EGEB1, the ease with which the performance is executed can be varied depending on the period set by the period setting means, so that the player can be made interested in the game period, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine EGEB2 has a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, a dynamic display effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect using the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and an effect mode determination means capable of determining the effect mode of the dynamic display effect, wherein the effect execution means is capable of executing the effect when a presentation mode different from the presentation mode for indicating that it is the specific discrimination result is determined by the presentation mode determination means.

According to the gaming machine EGEB2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine EGEB1, when an effect is executed indicating that the judgment result of the judgment means is not the specific judgment result, an effect relating to a set value is executed by the effect execution means, thereby having the effect of preventing a situation in which the player's motivation to play decreases.

<Feature EGEC group> (The content of the presentation is determined according to the frequency with which the setting suggestion presentation is executed)
a determination means capable of performing a determination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and a setting value setting means capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of setting values including at least a first setting value in which a probability of the specific determination result is set to a first probability, and a second setting value in which a probability higher than the first probability is set,
a setting value storage means capable of storing information relating to the setting value set by the setting value setting means; and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance based on the information stored in the setting value storage means;
The gaming machine EGEC1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to determine the presentation mode of the presentation based on the frequency of execution of the presentation by the presentation execution means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning result, the machine transitions to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some aim to increase the interest during the winning state by differentiating the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although it is possible to keep a player interested in whether or not a winning game will be played, there is a problem in that the game content cannot be varied depending on the period during which the game is played, and the game becomes monotonous.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine EGEC1, the ease with which the effects are executed can be varied depending on the period set by the period setting means, so that the player can be made interested in the playing period, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

According to the gaming machine EGEC1, since the presentation mode of the presentation related to the set value can be determined based on the frequency of the presentation, it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the set value based on the presentation that is executed. On the other hand, even if the frequency of the presentation is low, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to predict the set value, and thus to prevent a decrease in motivation to play.

In the gaming machine EGEC1, as the presentation mode of the presentation executed by the presentation execution means, a first mode in which the information can be grasped and a second mode in which the information is more difficult to grasp than the first mode are provided.
a first mode setting means for setting a predetermined mode from among a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode, and the first mode setting means is configured to more easily set the first mode when the number of times the performance is executed within a predetermined period is less than a specific number of times than when the number of times is equal to or more than the specific number of times.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine EGEC1, the gaming machine EGEC2 has the following effects: In other words, when the number of times that effects are executed in a given period is small, effects in a mode in which the set value is easily understood tend to be executed, so that it is possible to provide novel gameplay that makes the player hope that the effect will not be executed, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine EGEC3, comprising: an operating means operable by a player; a state setting means capable of setting at least a first state in which it is difficult to execute the effect and a second state in which it is easier to execute the effect than the first state, as states in which the frequency of execution of the effect by the effect execution means is different; and a selection means capable of selecting either the first state or the second state as the state set by the state setting means based on an operation on the operating means.

According to the gaming machine EGEC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines EGEC1 and EGEC2,
The selection means makes it possible to select the first state or the second state. Therefore, the player can be allowed to select between a gameplay in which the setting value is predicted by increasing the frequency of the performance, and a gameplay in which the setting value is predicted based on the content of the performance, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game and improving the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic EI group>
an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, an identification pattern display means capable of displaying an identification pattern in an identification pattern display area of a display means in response to the information being stored in the storage means, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means, a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, and a special benefit advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means. and a bonus awarding means capable of awarding a bonus, the identification pattern display means is configured to display the identification pattern at a position corresponding to the number of the information stored in the memory means when the information is stored in the memory means, to not display the corresponding identification pattern in the identification pattern display area when dynamic display of the identification information is started, to update the display position of the displayed identification pattern, and to display it, and is configured to move and display a pattern that was displayed in one identification pattern as a pattern of the identification pattern different from that identification pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters the starting hole and information such as a winning random number is acquired, up to a predetermined number of balls can be stored as reserved balls, reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls stored are displayed one by one corresponding to the reserved balls, and when a variable display of a special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts, the reserved symbols are hidden, and the order of the displayed reserved symbols is updated and displayed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a drawback in that the presentation of the reserved symbols was monotonous, and players quickly became bored of it.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the problem of players becoming bored early on.

According to gaming machine EI1, by moving and displaying the form of the identification pattern as the form of another identification pattern, even when dynamic display of the identification information has not started, it is possible to give the impression that the identification information has been dynamically displayed and the display position of the identification pattern has been updated, and by diversifying the gameplay, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine EI1, the identification pattern display means, when moving and displaying the identification pattern, moves and displays the identification pattern to the identification pattern displayed earlier than the currently displayed identification pattern.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine EI1, the gaming machine EI2 has the effect of making the player feel as if the identification information has been newly dynamically displayed even when the dynamic display of the identification information has not started, thereby making the player feel as if the dynamic display count is higher than it actually is.

Gaming machine EI3 is characterized in that in gaming machine EI1 or EI2, a special dynamic display mode is set as a dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and then temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the dynamic display is started again, and the specified condition is made to be able to be satisfied in the special dynamic display mode.

According to gaming machine EI3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines EI1 or EI2, there is an effect that the special dynamic display mode can be easily made to impress upon the player by the movement of the identification pattern mode as if the dynamic display is actually being executed multiple times.

<Characteristic EJ group>
A gaming machine EJ1 having a process execution means capable of executing a specific process required for a game when a specific condition is met, and an audio output means capable of outputting a specific sound when the specific process is being executed by the process execution means, characterized in that the gaming machine EJ1 has a volume setting means capable of setting the volume output by the audio output means, and the audio output means is configured to be able to switch between outputting the specific sound at a volume set by the volume setting means, and outputting the specific sound at a volume different from the volume set by the volume setting means when outputting the specific sound.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when the power is turned on, the initial processing required for the game is executed, and then the game is ready for play. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, when the gaming machine is performing a specific process such as an initial process, there is a problem in that it is difficult to know from the outside what process is being performed.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine in which the processing being executed is easy to understand.

According to the gaming machine EJ1, when a specific process is executed, a specific sound is output, making it easy to understand that a specific process is being executed, and since the notification may be made at a set volume or at a different volume, it is possible to make the notification easier to notice.

In the gaming machine EJ1, the specific process is configured so that game settings can be executed based on operations from outside the gaming machine.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine EJ1, the gaming machine EJ2 has the effect of preventing unauthorized switching of settings.

Gaming machine EJ3 is characterized in that it has an operating means that can be operated by a player in addition to gaming machines EJ1 or EJ2, and the gaming machine is configured so that the volume can be variably set based on the operation of the operating means, and when the operating means is operated during the period in which the specific process is being executed, the specific sound can be output at the newly set volume.

According to the gaming machine EJ3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines EJ1 and EJ2, there is an effect that the volume setting can be easily performed by the operating means even when a specific process is being executed.

<Feature EK group> (Different setting suggestions are determined depending on the start timing of the jackpot game)
The gaming machine EK1 has a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and is characterized in that the gaming machine EK1 has a specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period, and the effect execution means is configured so that the ease of executing a predetermined specific effect differs between when the timing at which the bonus game is executed is the specific period and when it is not the specific period.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning result, the machine transitions to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some aim to increase the interest during the winning state by differentiating the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although it is possible to keep a player interested in whether or not a winning game will be executed, since the degree of advantage to the player is constant regardless of when the winning game is executed, it is not possible to keep the player interested in the timing of the execution of the winning game, resulting in a problem that the game becomes monotonous.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine EK1, the ease of executing a specific presentation can be varied depending on the timing at which the bonus game is executed, which has the effect of making the player interested in the timing at which the bonus game is executed and increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine EK2 has a setting value setting means capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of setting values including at least a first setting value in which the probability of the specific judgment result is set to a first probability and a second setting value in which the probability is set to a higher probability than the first probability, and a setting value storage means capable of storing information regarding the setting value set by the setting value setting means, and the effect execution means is capable of executing an effect based on the information stored in the setting value storage means as the specific effect.

According to gaming machine EK2, in addition to the effects produced by gaming machine EK1, a performance execution means can execute a performance based on information regarding the set value as a specific performance, thereby making it possible to interest the player in the timing of the execution of the bonus game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine EK3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the effect execution means is more likely to execute the specific effect when the bonus game ends within the specific period, compared to when the bonus game ends not within the specific period.

According to the gaming machine EK3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines EK1 or EK2, the ease of executing a specific effect can be varied based on not only the timing at which the bonus game is executed, but also the timing at which the bonus game ends. Furthermore, it is easier to execute a specific effect when the bonus game is executed and ends within a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play in order to finish the bonus game within the specific period, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

<Feature EL group>
A gaming machine EL1 having an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the information acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a display means for displaying identification information showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when identification information showing a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in that the gaming machine EL1 also has a suggested mode execution means capable of executing a suggested mode corresponding to a bonus granted during the bonus game, and an awarding means capable of awarding specific information when the suggested mode is executed by the suggested mode execution means.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball in a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed.
A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies a player at a specific timing when a beneficial chance hit has occurred (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the timing of the notification tends to be constant, which can lead to monotony in gameplay.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine in which malfunctions are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine EL1, it is possible to notify specific information at the timing when a suggestive mode corresponding to a bonus granted during bonus play is executed, which has the effect of diversifying the timing at which the specific information is notified.

A gaming machine EL2 includes a bonus amount determination means for determining the amount of bonus awarded during the bonus play, and a bonus timing determination means for determining the timing at which a predetermined bonus amount is awarded, and the awarding means is capable of awarding the specific information based on the determination result of the bonus amount determination means and the determination result of the awarding timing determination means.

According to the gaming machine EL2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine EL1, specific information is given based on the amount of the benefit and the timing of the benefit, so that it has the effect of making the player interested in the degree of the benefit being given.

A gaming machine EL3 has an advantageous period setting means capable of setting an advantageous period advantageous to a player in the gaming machine EL2, the advantageous period setting means being capable of setting a period including at least the period during which the bonus game is executed as the advantageous period, and the bonus amount determination means being capable of determining the bonus amount of the bonus granted during the advantageous period.

According to the gaming machine EL3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine EL2, specific information is given based on the amount of bonus given during the advantageous period, so that it has the effect of making the player interested in bonuses given during periods other than bonus play.

<Feature EM Group>
a determination means capable of performing determination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, and a benefit granting means for granting an advantageous benefit to a player when the identification information for indicating a specific result of the determination is displayed on the display means;
a memory means for storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of different dynamic display periods are set as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, a determination probability for the set dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means is preset in the dynamic period group, a specific dynamic display period group is set in which a probability of a specific dynamic display period being determined is set higher than other dynamic display periods, and a specific effect execution means is provided for executing a specific effect when the specific dynamic display period is determined under a predetermined condition.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a gaming ball in a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed.
A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies a player at a specific timing when a beneficial chance hit has occurred (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there were some glitches that made the gameplay monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that suppresses problems that make gameplay monotonous.

According to the gaming machine EM1, a specific presentation can be executed when a specific dynamic display period is determined, which has the effect of making it possible to easily inform the player that dynamic display will be performed during the specific dynamic display period.

The gaming machine EM2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine EM1, the dynamic display period determination means is configured to be able to determine the dynamic display period from the specific dynamic display period group until an end condition is met.

According to the gaming machine EM2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine EM1, the state in which the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group makes it easier for the specific dynamic display periods to be executed consecutively, and the special dynamic display period has the effect of adding a freshness to the game.

The gaming machine EM3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EM1 or EM2, it has a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect when a dynamic display period different from the specific dynamic display period is determined by the dynamic display period determination means when the dynamic display period is determined from the specific dynamic display period group by the dynamic display period determination means.

<Feature EN group>
The present invention relates to an information acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, an identification pattern display means capable of displaying an identification pattern in an identification pattern display area of a display means in response to the information being stored in the storage means, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means, and a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus advantageous to a player when the information is stored in the memory means, the identification pattern display means is configured to display the identification pattern at a position corresponding to the number of the information stored when the information is stored in the memory means, to prevent the corresponding identification pattern from being displayed in the identification pattern display area when dynamic display of the identification information is started, and to update the display position of the displayed identification pattern and display it, and the gaming machine is characterized in that it has a display mode changing means for changing the display mode of the identification pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine has been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters the starting hole and information such as a winning random number is acquired, up to a predetermined number of balls can be stored as reserved balls, reserved symbols for indicating the number of reserved balls stored are displayed one by one corresponding to the reserved balls, and when a variable display of a special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball starts, the reserved symbols are hidden, and the order of the displayed reserved symbols is updated and displayed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a drawback in that the presentation of the reserved symbols was monotonous, and players quickly became bored of it.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the problem of players becoming bored early on.

According to the gaming machine EN1, by moving and displaying the form of the identification pattern as the form of another identification pattern, even when the dynamic display of the identification information has not started, it is possible to give the impression that the identification information has been dynamically displayed and the display position of the identification pattern has been updated, and by diversifying the gameplay, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine EN1, the identification pattern display means, when moving and displaying the identification pattern, moves and displays the identification pattern to the identification pattern that is displayed earlier than the currently displayed identification pattern.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine EN1, the gaming machine EN2 has the effect of making the player think that the identification information has been newly dynamically displayed even when the dynamic display of the identification information has not started, thereby making the player think that the number of dynamic displays is greater than it actually is.

Gaming machine EN3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine EN1 or EN2, a special dynamic display mode is set as the dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and then the identification information is temporarily displayed in a stopped state and then the dynamic display is started again, and the specified condition is made to be able to be satisfied in the special dynamic display mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EN1 and EN2, gaming machine EN3 has the effect of making it easier for the player to imagine that a special dynamic display mode is actually being executed multiple times by moving the appearance of the identification pattern.

<Feature EO group> (Different setting suggestions are determined depending on the start timing of the jackpot game)
A gaming machine EO1 has a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect, and is characterized in that the gaming machine EO1 has a specific period setting means capable of setting a specific period, and the effect execution means is configured so that the ease of executing a predetermined specific effect differs between when the timing at which the bonus game is executed is the specific period and when it is not the specific period.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the result of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot is a winning result, the machine transitions to a winning state. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winning types with different numbers of rounds, and some aim to increase the interest during the winning state by differentiating the game value that can be obtained (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

However, although it is possible to keep a player interested in whether or not a winning game will be executed, since the degree of advantage to the player is constant regardless of when the winning game is executed, it is not possible to keep the player interested in the timing of the execution of the winning game, resulting in a problem that the game becomes monotonous.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine EK1, the ease of executing a specific presentation can be varied depending on the timing at which the bonus game is executed, which has the effect of making the player interested in the timing at which the bonus game is executed and increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine EO2 has a setting value setting means capable of setting one setting value from a plurality of setting values including at least a first setting value in which the probability of the specific judgment result is set to a first probability and a second setting value in which the probability is set to a higher probability than the first probability, and a setting value storage means capable of storing information relating to the setting value set by the setting value setting means, and the effect execution means is capable of executing an effect based on the information stored in the setting value storage means as the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine EO2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine EO1, a performance based on information relating to the set value can be executed as a specific performance by the performance execution means, so that the player can be interested in the timing of the execution of the bonus game, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

Gaming machine EO3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine EO1 or EO2, the effect execution means is more likely to execute the specific effect when the bonus game ends within the specific period, compared to when the bonus game ends outside the specific period.

According to the gaming machine EO3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines EO1 and EO2, the ease of executing a specific effect can be varied based on not only the timing at which the bonus game is executed, but also the timing at which the bonus game ends. Furthermore, it is easier to execute a specific effect when the bonus game is executed and ends within a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to end the bonus game within the specific period, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

<Feature FA group> (After the upper limit of balls is paid out, the mode changes to base maintenance mode)
A gaming machine having an awarding means capable of awarding gaming media to a player based on the establishment of an awarding condition, a determining means capable of executing a determination based on the establishment of a determining condition that is established by using the gaming media, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which the awarding condition is likely to be established when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means, said gaming machine having a bonus game in which a player consumes gaming media in a game for a predetermined period when a switching condition is established in a normal gaming state, The game machine has a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which more game media can be awarded by the awarding means than the game media that can be awarded in a predetermined period of time than the first game state, and a second game state in which the number of game media awarded by the awarding means in a predetermined period of time can be limited compared to the first game state, the game state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the second game state after the first game state is set and a termination condition is established until a specific condition is established, the specific condition being established after the period during which the second game state is set is equal to or longer than a predetermined period of time, and the second game state is
The gaming machine FA1 is characterized in that it is set so that the gaming medium is more easily awarded than in the normal gaming state.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which a lottery is executed when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game is executed and the gaming state transitions to a high probability state where the probability of the lottery result being a win is high. Among such gaming machines, there are some in which, when the gaming state transitions to a high probability state where the probability of the lottery result being a win is high, the lottery result is a win and the high probability state is continuously set until the next bonus game is executed (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, when the gaming state transitions to a high probability state where the probability of the lottery result being a winning lottery is high, and then the lottery result is a winning lottery, and the high probability state is set again in succession, there is a risk that the bonus game will be executed multiple times in a short period of time, and excessive gaming media will be awarded, and the gambling nature of the game will become too high. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the gambling nature of the game.

According to gaming machine FA1, after a first gaming state in which the amount of gaming media held by the player increases is executed, a second gaming state in which the amount of gaming media awarded is limited while more gaming media is awarded than in the normal gaming state is set for a period of time longer than a predetermined period of time. This reduces the number of gaming media awarded to the player per unit time, prevents excessive awarding of gaming media for a continuous long period of time, and has the effect of reducing the gambling nature of the game.

In the gaming machine FA1, in the second gaming state, a small bonus game in which the granting condition is more difficult to achieve than the bonus game is set to be easier to execute than in the first gaming state, and the specific condition is set to be achieved when the small bonus game is executed a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine FA2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine FA1, the second gaming state can be continued until the small bonus game is executed a predetermined number of times, so that it is possible to play in the second gaming state for a long period of time while compensating for the gaming media consumed by the small bonus game.

A gaming machine FA3, in the gaming machine FA1 or FA2, characterized in that the end condition is established based on the bonus game being executed a predetermined number of times.

According to gaming machine FA3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines FA1 or FA2, the first gaming state is continuously set until the bonus game is executed a predetermined number of times, so that there is an effect that the gaming media awarded in the first gaming state can be stabilized.

A gaming machine FA4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines FA1 to FA3, it has a bonus game type determination means capable of determining the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means, and in the first gaming state, a setting is made to enable the execution of the bonus game in which a set number or more of gaming media can be awarded to the player, and in the second gaming state, a setting is made to restrict the execution of the bonus game in which more than the set number of gaming media is awarded.

According to the gaming machine FA4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines FA1 to FA3,
In the gaming state, the execution of bonus games exceeding the set number is restricted, which has the effect of suppressing a malfunction in which an excessive number of gaming media is awarded to the second gaming state.

In the gaming machine FA4, a bonus game type that is executed when the second gaming state is set is a bonus game that can maintain the difference between the gaming media awarded in the first gaming state before the second gaming state is set and the gaming media consumed in the first gaming state within a predetermined range.

According to gaming machine FA5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine FA4, in the second gaming state, it is possible to maintain the gaming medium increased in the first gaming state within a predetermined range, so that it is possible to allow the player to play the second gaming state while suppressing a decline in the player's motivation to play.

Any of the gaming machines FA1 to FA5 has, as the gaming medium, a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a variable means capable of changing to a first state in which it is easier for a gaming ball to enter the first ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter than the first state, the discrimination means is configured to be capable of executing a first discrimination as the discrimination based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means and to be capable of executing a second discrimination as the discrimination based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means, first identification information for indicating a first discrimination result based on the first discrimination is dynamically displayed on the display means, and second identification information for indicating a second discrimination result based on the second discrimination is dynamically displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine FA6 characterized in that, when the first gaming state is set, a dynamic display period that is shorter than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is more likely to be determined as the dynamic display of the first identification information than the second identification information, thereby making it easier to execute a judgment based on the first judgment, and, when the second gaming state is set, a dynamic display period that is shorter than the dynamic display period of the second identification information is more likely to be determined as the dynamic display of the second identification information than the first identification information, thereby making it easier to execute a judgment based on the second judgment.

According to gaming machine FA6, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines FA1 to FA5, the dynamic display period is selected by switching depending on the gaming state, making it easier to switch between the first and second judgments depending on the gaming state, and making it easier to control the bonus game being executed.

<Feature FB group> (Variable ball output speed)
a granting means for granting game media to a player when a granting condition is satisfied;
In a gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting a game state and a second game state in which the awarding condition is more likely to be established than the first game state, the game state setting means
A gaming machine FB1 characterized in that a gaming state is set, and when a termination condition is met, the second gaming state can be set, the first gaming state is set as a period during which more gaming media than the player can consume per unit time is permitted to be awarded, and the second gaming state is set as a period during which it is possible to prevent the player from being awarded more gaming media than the player can consume per unit time, and to prevent a decrease in the number of gaming media that has increased by being awarded in the first gaming state.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which a lottery is executed when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game is executed and the gaming state transitions to a high probability state where the probability of the lottery result being a win is high. Among such gaming machines, there are some in which, when the gaming state transitions to a high probability state where the probability of the lottery result being a win is high, the lottery result is a win and the high probability state is continuously set until the next bonus game is executed (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state transitions to a high probability state in which the probability of the lottery result being a winning entry is high, and then the lottery result becomes a winning entry and the high probability state is set again in succession. As a result, bonus games are executed multiple times in a short period of time, and there is a risk that excessive gaming media will be awarded and the game will become too gambling-like.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the gambling aspect of the game.

According to gaming machine FB1, even after the first gaming state in which the gaming media held by the player increases has ended, a second gaming state is set that can suppress a further increase in the gaming media while also suppressing a decrease in the gaming media, thereby having the effect of suppressing the gambling nature of the game.

A gaming machine FB1 has a discrimination means capable of performing a discrimination with a predetermined probability based on the establishment of a discrimination condition that is established by using the gaming medium, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, a dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game in which the award condition is likely to be established when the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, wherein the dynamic display period determination means is more likely to determine a dynamic display period that is longer in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine FB2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine FB1, since a longer dynamic display period is more likely to be determined in the second gaming state, there is an effect that the period of the second gaming state can be made longer.

Gaming machine FB3, in which, in gaming machine FB1 or FB2, the dynamic display period determination means determines, when the second gaming state is determined, a predetermined number of times, the period until the identification information is dynamically displayed, and the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the specific discrimination result.

According to gaming machine FB3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines FB1 or FB2, a special dynamic display period is determined even if a specific judgment result is judged within a short period of time after the second gaming state is set, so that the minimum period during which the second gaming state is set can be a stable period.

In any one of the gaming machines FB1 to FB3, the dynamic display period determination means is
A gaming machine FB4 characterized in that when determining the dynamic display period of the identification information that has been determined to be the specific discrimination result while a gaming state is set, it is possible to set a period corresponding to the elapsed period since the second gaming state was set.

According to the gaming machine FB4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines FB1 to FB3,
Since the period during which the game state is set can be easily set to a fixed period, there is an effect that it is possible to equalize the rate at which game media is awarded.

<Characteristic FC group> (Uniformity of advantageous state duration)
a special period setting means for setting a special period advantageous to a player when a predetermined condition is established after the bonus game is executed; and a special period setting means for setting a special period advantageous to a player when the special period is set and a predetermined number of bonus games have been executed.
A gaming machine FC1 characterized by having a regulating means for regulating the setting of the special period, and an assisting means for making it easier to keep the period until a predetermined number of bonus games are played during the special period constant.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that execute a lottery when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a winning one, a bonus game is executed, and the game state transitions to a different gaming state from the normal gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In such gaming states, gaming states are set in which the probability of the lottery result being a winning one is high, and in which the probability of the lottery result for normal symbols being a winning one is high, making it easier for the gaming ball to enter the starting hole, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In such gaming machines, for example, when the lottery result is a winning one and the gaming state transitions to a high probability state, the gaming state may transition to a normal state after a predetermined number of lotteries have been performed. Also, when the gaming state is in a high probability state, if the lottery result is a winning one, the gaming state may transition again to a normal state with a predetermined probability (for example, see JP 2010-072666A).
(Publication No. 5741).

In this type of gaming machine, if the player wins a prize that transitions to the normal state immediately after the game state transitions to the high probability state, or if a lottery with a short fluctuation time is executed a predetermined number of times and the game state transitions to the normal state, the period that is advantageous to the player ends quickly, and there is a risk that the player may get the impression that the game is not fair. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and
The aim is to provide a gaming machine with improved fairness.

According to the gaming machine FC1, by making it easier for the special period to be a fixed period, the periods advantageous to the player can be made equal, thereby providing a more fair game.

A gaming machine FC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FC1 or FC2, it has a specific period setting means which, when the setting of a special period is regulated by the regulating means, can set a specific period of a predetermined period or longer that can suppress the reduction of the benefits granted in the special period.

According to gaming machine FC3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines FC1 or FC2, by setting a specific period, the period during which the benefits granted in the special period are maintained can be extended, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Feature FD group> (Limit number control)
a setting means for setting at least a first setting and a second setting different from the first setting after the bonus game is executed, and a first release means for releasing the first setting when the bonus game is executed a first number of times;
and a second release means capable of releasing the second setting when the bonus game is executed a second number of times different from the first number of times.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, if a lottery result based on the entry into a starting port is a winning combination, a bonus game is executed, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game ends. In this type of gaming machine, there are some that aim to suppress the gambling nature of the game by limiting the number of times that a gaming state advantageous to the player is consecutively set (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if the number of times that a game state advantageous to the player is consecutively set is always set to the same number, there is a risk that the player will be able to predict the next game state to be set, which may ruin the fun of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the fun of the game.

According to the gaming machine FD1, since the first number of times is different from the second number of times, the timing at which the first setting is released and the timing at which the second setting is released can be varied, and the game can be played in a variety of states, thereby improving the interest in the game.

A gaming machine FD2 comprising: a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means; and a variable means capable of changing between a first state in which it is easier for a gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for a gaming ball to enter than the first state; wherein the discrimination means is capable of performing a first discrimination based on a gaming ball entering the first ball entry means and a second discrimination based on a gaming ball entering the second ball entry means; and wherein the variable means is made more likely to be changed to the first state based on the second setting being executed.

According to the gaming machine FD2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine FD1, the second setting makes it easier to cause the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry means, thereby diversifying the game and increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine FD3, characterized in that in the gaming machine FD1 or FD2, the first setting is performed to set the probability of determining a specific determination result to be high.

According to gaming machine FD3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines FD1 or FD2, the first setting makes it easier to determine a specific judgment result, thereby increasing the expectation for bonus play.

<Feature FE group> (Left-handed play is advantageous without low-probability support, right-handed play is advantageous with high-probability support)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball toward a game area, an adjustment means capable of adjusting the launch strength of the game ball launched by the launching means in response to an operation by a player, and a first
A first area in which the game balls launched with the launch strength can flow down, and the first area is defined by the launching means.
a second region into which a gaming ball launched at a second launch intensity different from the launch intensity of the first region can flow down, a first ball entry means into which a gaming ball that has flowed down the first region can enter, a second ball entry means into which a gaming ball that has flowed down the second region can enter, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination when a discrimination condition is established based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, a variable means capable of changing a state between a first state which allows the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means and a second state which more restricts the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means than the first state, a variable control means capable of variably controlling the variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the establishment of a variable condition, and a first gaming state in which the variable means is likely to be changed to the first state by the variable control means.
a second game state which is more difficult to change to the first game state than the first game state; and a game state setting means for setting the second game state, the game machine is configured such that while the first game state is set, the determination by the determination means is easier to be performed by shooting game balls at the second shooting intensity than by shooting game balls at the first shooting intensity,
A gaming machine FE1 characterized by having a period setting means capable of setting, when a gaming state is set, a first period during which firing a gaming ball at the second firing intensity makes it easier for the discrimination means to execute the discrimination than firing a gaming ball at the first firing intensity, and a second period during which firing a gaming ball at the first firing intensity makes it easier for the discrimination means to execute the discrimination than firing a gaming ball at the second firing intensity.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that have a game feature in which a player aims to make a game ball enter a starting hole provided on a game board by adjusting and operating the firing strength of a firing device. In such gaming machines, there are some that select a game method that is likely to execute a lottery by adjusting the firing strength and switching the starting hole into which the game ball enters based on the set game state (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, the starting port where the lottery is likely to be executed is determined based on the gaming state, so if the gaming state does not change, the adjustment of the firing strength of the firing device will always be constant, making the game monotonous and there is a risk that the player will quickly tire of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and the object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly tire of the game.

According to the gaming machine FE1, in the first gaming state, the ball is fired at a second firing intensity to make it easier to distinguish, while in the second gaming state, the gaming method that is easier to distinguish can be switched depending on the period, so that the player's operation can switch between a high and a low rate at which the degree of advantage can be varied, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

A gaming machine FE2, comprising: a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on a specific determination result determined by the determination means; and an update means capable of updating information based on the execution of the bonus game, wherein the gaming state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the first gaming state when a specific bonus game is executed, and to be capable of forcibly setting the second gaming state based on the specific information.

According to the gaming machine FE2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine FE1, the second gaming state is forcibly set by information updated as bonus games are executed, so that even if specific bonus games are executed consecutively, it is possible to transition to the second gaming state, thereby preventing problems such as excessive gambling.

a game machine FE1 or FE2, comprising: a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result of the determination means on a display means; and a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for dynamic display by the dynamic display means;
The gaming machine FE3 is characterized in that, when the second game state is set, the dynamic display period determination means increases the probability of determining a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to a ball entering the first ball entry means, during the first period, and increases the probability of determining a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to a ball entering the second ball entry means, during the second period.

According to the gaming machine FE3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines FE1 and FE2, the dynamic display period can be varied to vary the ball entry means that is easy to distinguish, thereby providing the effect of easily varying the ease with which the distinction can be made.

<Feature FF group> (V-certain machine, advantageous allocation with low probability of special chart, disadvantageous allocation with high probability of special chart)
a first game state in which a first probability is set as the probability of the specific judgment result, and a second game state in which a second probability higher than the first probability is set as the probability of the specific judgment result; and a second game state in which a second probability higher than the first probability is set as the probability of the specific judgment result.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a lottery result based on the entry into a starting slot results in a winning combination, a bonus game is executed and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. In some gaming machines of this type, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is entered, the gaming state advantageous to the player is set until the player wins the next winning combination (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game may become monotonous, consisting of simply waiting for the next win, and there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game early on.

According to the gaming machine FF1, a game can be played in which the player has to decide whether or not to pass the gaming ball through a specific area, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine FF1, a first ball entry means capable of executing a first determination as a determination by the determination means based on a game ball entering the ball, a second ball entry means capable of executing a second determination as a determination by the determination means based on a game ball entering the ball, a variable means capable of changing the first ball entry means between a first state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter the ball and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the first state, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a first identification information for showing a first determination result by the first determination on a display means, a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a second identification information for showing a second determination result by the second determination on the display means, and a display means for displaying the first identification information and the second identification information. a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of each of the first ball entry means and the normal first ball entry means not associated with the variable means, wherein the first ball entry means is respectively arranged with a variable first ball entry means associated with the variable means and a normal first ball entry means not associated with the variable means, and a state setting means for setting a permissive state in which a game is permitted to be played by causing game balls to flow down a first flow path in which the game balls can easily enter the variable first ball entry means, and a restricted state in which a game is restricted from being played by causing game balls to flow down the first flow path, wherein the permissive state is set by the state setting means in the specific first game state, and the restricted state is set by the state setting means in a first game state other than the specific first game state.

According to the gaming machine FF2, when the first gaming state is set without passing through a specific area, it becomes easier to play by having the ball enter the first ball entry means, which has the effect of allowing the player to play more advantageously.

A gaming machine FF3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FF1 or FF2, the second gaming state is set to either an advantageous second gaming state in which the benefits held by the player are increased, or an unfavorable second gaming state in which the increase in the benefits is suppressed.

According to the gaming machine FF3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines FF1 and FF2, the player can judge the type of the second gaming state set and decide whether to pass through to a specific area, thereby making the game more diverse.

<Feature FG group> (Maintenance mode improvement control)
The present invention relates to a gaming machine having an awarding means capable of awarding game media to a player based on the establishment of an awarding condition, a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition that is established by using the game media, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, identification information showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game in which the awarding condition is likely to be established when the identification information showing a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means. The present invention relates to a gaming machine having an awarding means capable of awarding game media to a player based on the establishment of an awarding condition, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, identification information showing a specific discrimination result, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game in which the awarding condition is likely to be established, the first gaming state in which, when a switching condition is established in a normal gaming state, more game media than the game media that the player can consume in a game in a predetermined period of time can be awarded by the awarding means, and a bonus game execution means in which a bonus game is executed in which a bonus game is executed in which a bonus game is executed when a switching condition is established in a normal gaming state. a game state setting means for setting a first game state in which the number of game media awarded by the awarding means in a predetermined period can be limited, and a second game state in which game media are more likely to be awarded than in the normal game state, the game state setting means is configured to set the first game state and set the second game state until a specific condition is established after a termination condition is established, and the specific condition is established after a period in which the second game state is set reaches a predetermined period or longer, and the gaming machine has a dynamic display period determination means for making it easier to determine a short dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the identification information after the bonus game is executed in the second game state.
.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a lottery result based on the entry into a starting slot results in a winning combination, a bonus game is executed and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. In some gaming machines of this type, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is entered, the gaming state advantageous to the player is set until the player wins the next winning combination (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FG1, even when the second gaming state in which the awarding of gaming media is restricted is set, the dynamic display period of the identification information is shortened after the bonus game has been executed multiple times, thereby shortening the interval between the execution of the bonus game, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

A gaming machine FG2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine FG1, a counting means is provided which, when the second gaming state is set, is capable of continuing to count the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed even after the bonus game is executed, and the dynamic display period determination means is configured to be able to determine the dynamic display period based on the count value by the counting means.

According to gaming machine FG2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine FG1, the dynamic display period is determined by the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed in the second gaming state, so that the dynamic display period can be varied according to a fixed rule in the second gaming state, thereby providing the effect of enabling stable gaming.

Gaming machine FG3 is characterized in that in gaming machine FG1 or FG2, the discrimination means is configured to be able to discriminate a special discrimination result which is easier to discern than the specific discrimination result, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a special game which makes it possible to obtain gaming media when the special discrimination result is discriminated.

According to gaming machine FG3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines FG1 or FG2, even if a specific judgment result is not obtained, a special judgment result is determined to be a special judgment result and a special game is executed, so that gaming media can be obtained and interest in the game can be further increased.

<Feature FH group> (Setting an advantageous state when multiple conditions for transitioning to different game states are met simultaneously)
A gaming machine FH1 having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, characterized in that the gaming machine also has an update means capable of updating at least one of the first information and the second information when the bonus game is executed, and a bonus setting means capable of setting a bonus advantageous to a player when the first information or the second information is updated by the update means and the updated first information and the updated second information are in a specific state.
.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, if a lottery result based on the entry into a starting port is a winning combination, a bonus game is executed, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game ends. In this type of gaming machine, there are some that aim to suppress the gambling nature of the game by limiting the number of times that a gaming state advantageous to the player is consecutively set (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if the number of times that a game state advantageous to the player is consecutively set is always set to the same number, there is a risk that the player will be able to predict the next game state to be set, which may ruin the fun of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the fun of the game.

According to the gaming machine FH1, a bonus is awarded when the first information and the second information reach a specific state, so that the player can be interested in how the first information and the second information are updated as a result of the bonus game being executed, and this has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine FH2 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state which is more disadvantageous to a player than the first gaming state as gaming states in the gaming machine FH1, and the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the second gaming state when the first information is updated to specific information by the update means while the first gaming state is set, and the specific state is a state in which at least the first information has been updated to the specific information.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH1, the gaming machine FH2 has the following effects.
When the condition for setting the second game state disadvantageous to the player is established, a special benefit can be set, so that the player for whom the condition for setting the second game state is established can play the game with a sense of expectation until the end.

In the gaming machine FH2, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting a third gaming state which is different from the second gaming state and is more disadvantageous to a player than the first gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the third gaming state when the second information is updated to second specific information by the update means while the first gaming state is set,
The specific state is a state in which at least the second information has been updated to the second specific information.

The gaming machine FH3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FH2.
When the condition for setting the third game state disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a bonus can be set, which has the effect of making the player, for whom the condition for setting the third game state is satisfied, play with a sense of expectation until the end. Also, when each of the pieces of information forming the specific state is updated to the specific information, a game state disadvantageous to the player is set, which makes it possible to make the player play a game with an element of surprise, in which the player plays a game disadvantageous to the player while hoping that a bonus will be set, which has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine FH4, in which the update means is capable of updating the first information to the specific information by updating the first information from an initial stage to a specific stage in the gaming machine FH2 or FH3, and is characterized in that it has a stage number setting means capable of setting a value of 1 from a plurality of different values as the stage number of the specific stage.

The gaming machine FH4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine FH2 or FH3. That is, since it is possible to set different values as the number of stages of information update required for updating the first information to the specific information, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the first information and the second information will become the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know in advance whether or not a special benefit will be awarded, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to play while expecting the award of a special benefit.

<Feature FI group> (Performance according to the remaining number of times until the probability limit in a state without high probability support)
a game state setting means for setting, as game states, a first game state in which a first probability is set as the probability of the specific judgment result, and a second game state in which a second probability lower than the first probability is set as the probability of the specific judgment result; and a game state setting means for setting, as game states, a first game state in which a first probability is set as the probability of the specific judgment result, and a second game state in which a second probability lower than the first probability is set as the probability of the specific judgment result. The game machine FI1 is characterized by having: an upper limit determination means for determining an upper limit number of times for which the first game state is set during a specific period; a compulsory setting means for compulsorily setting the second game state when the upper limit number determined by the upper limit number determination means is reached; a remaining number determination means for determining the remaining number of times until the upper limit number is reached; and an effect execution means for executing an effect based on the determination result of the remaining number determination means.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a lottery result based on the entry into a starting slot results in a winning combination, a bonus game is executed and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. In some gaming machines of this type, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is entered, the gaming state advantageous to the player is set until the player wins the next winning combination (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FI1, by grasping the contents of the effects executed by the effect execution means,
It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the number of times remaining until the upper limit is reached. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play while predicting the game contents that may be executed before the upper limit is reached, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In the gaming machine FI1, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting a third gaming state in which the first probability is set and which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state when the first gaming state is set, and is characterized in having a second upper limit determination means capable of determining a second upper limit number of times at which the third gaming state is set during the specific period, and a presentation mode determination means capable of determining the presentation mode of the presentation based on a discrimination result between the remaining number of times determined by a remaining number determination means and the second upper limit number of times.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FI1, the gaming machine FI2 has the following effects.
Since the presentation mode can be determined based on the determination result of whether or not the third game state can be set for the second upper limit number of times, the player can be made highly interested in the presentation mode of the presentation to be executed, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine FI2, the presentation mode determination means is capable of determining a specific presentation mode when it is determined that the remaining number of times is the same as the second upper limit number of times.

The gaming machine FI3 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine FI2.
When a specific presentation mode is executed, the player can be notified that if the first game state is set, the third game state cannot be set to the second upper limit number of times any more, which has the effect of making the player eager to play while keeping in anticipation that the third game state will be set.

<Feature FJ group> (Determine the performance mode during the probability change based on the remaining number of times of the probability change limit and the remaining number of times of the time-saving limit)
a game machine having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect, the game machine further comprising: an update means capable of updating first information and second information different from the first information based on the execution of the bonus game, a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states based on the result of the update by the update means, and an effect mode determination means capable of determining an effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means based on at least one of the first information and the second information;
The gaming machine FJ1 is characterized by having the above.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a lottery result based on the entry into a starting slot results in a winning combination, a bonus game is executed and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. In some gaming machines of this type, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is entered, the gaming state advantageous to the player is set until the player wins the next winning combination (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game may become monotonous, consisting of simply waiting for the next win, and there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game early on.

According to the gaming machine FJ1, it is possible to allow the player to predict the update status by the update means based on the presentation mode of the presentation executed by the presentation execution means. Therefore, since the player can play the game while predicting the game state that may be set next, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early.

In the gaming machine FJ1, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting a first gaming state based on the first information being updated to first specific information by the update means, and of setting a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state based on the second information being updated to second specific information by the update means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FJ1, the gaming machine FJ2 has the following effects.
Since it is possible to vary the advantageous degree of the game state set by the game state setting means depending on the update contents by the update means, the first updated by the update means is provided to the player.
This can make the user interested in the updated contents of the first information and the second information. Therefore, the presentation mode of the presentation to be executed can make the user interested, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine FJ2, the update means is capable of updating the first information to the first specific information by updating the first information from an initial stage to a specific stage, and is characterized in having a stage number setting means capable of setting a value of 1 from a plurality of different values as the stage number of the specific stage.

The gaming machine FJ3 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine FN2.
Since different values can be set as the number of information update stages required for updating the first information to the specific information, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the first information will be updated to the first specific information. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know in advance whether or not a special benefit will be awarded, which has the effect of making it easier for the player to play while expecting the special benefit to be awarded.

<Feature FK Group> (Limit Number Update Notification Control)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining, as a type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one of a plurality of bonus game types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game; and a game state setting means for setting, as a game state, at least a first game state and a second game state which is more disadvantageous to a player than the first game state. a presentation execution means for executing a presentation to indicate the result of the discrimination executed during the first gaming state, a presentation mode determination means for determining the presentation mode of the presentation executed by the presentation execution means, and an update means for updating information based on the execution of the first bonus game, wherein when specific information is stored as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game, a setting means for forcibly setting the second gaming state, and the presentation mode determination means is capable of determining the presentation mode based on the information.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that, when a lottery result based on the entry into a starting port is a winning combination, execute a bonus game and set a game state advantageous to the player. In some gaming machines of this type, when a game state advantageous to the player is entered, a game state advantageous to the player is set until the player wins the next winning combination (prior art document: JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to gaming machine FK1, when the first gaming state is set, the presentation mode is determined based on the information updated as the first bonus game is executed, and when the information is updated to specific information, the second gaming state is forcibly set. This makes it possible for the player to predict whether or not the second gaming state will be set from the presentation mode being executed, and has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly by creating a strong interest in whether or not the first bonus game will be determined when a specific judgment result is reached in a state where the information can be updated to specific information.

A gaming machine FK2, comprising: a gaming state setting means for measuring the number of times the first gaming state is set after the first bonus game is completed in the gaming machine FK1; the information indicates the number of times the first gaming state is set measured by the measuring means; and the update means is capable of initializing the information updated based on the execution of the first bonus game based on the execution of the second bonus game.

According to the gaming machine FK2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine FK1, information is initialized by executing the second bonus game, so that the period until the information is updated to specific information by executing the second bonus game is lengthened, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Gaming machine FK3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine FK1 or FK2, the update means is capable of updating second information different from the information based on the execution of the second bonus game, the setting means is capable of forcibly setting the second gaming state when specific second information is stored as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game, and the presentation mode determination means is capable of determining the presentation mode based on the second information.

According to gaming machine FK3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines FK1 or FK2, it is possible to predict the period until switching to the second gaming state based on the presentation mode, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine FK4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines FK1 to FK3, the presentation mode determination means is capable of determining a predetermined special presentation mode as the presentation mode based on the storage of a predetermined piece of information and a predetermined piece of second information.

According to the gaming machine FK4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines FK1 to FK3, a special presentation is executed, which has the effect of making it possible to determine the state of the stored information and thus increasing the interest in the game.

<Feature FL group> (V-certain machine, advantageous allocation with low probability of special chart, disadvantageous allocation with high probability of special chart)
a special game execution means for executing a special game based on a result of the special game by the special game execution means being a specific result of the special game; a specific area into which the game ball can enter when the special game is executed; and a first game state is set based on the game ball having entered the specific area, and if the game ball has not entered the specific area,
a game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state;
A gaming machine FL1 having an effect execution means capable of executing an effect during the period in which the bonus game is being played, and an effect mode determination means capable of determining an effect mode from a plurality of effect modes including at least a suggested effect mode that can suggest that a game ball will be balled into the specific area as the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect execution means, characterized in that the gaming machine FL1 has a setting means capable of setting either a first setting that executes the suggested effect mode during the period in which it is possible to ball a game ball into the specific area, or a second setting that executes an effect mode different from the suggested effect mode, based on specific information.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a lottery result based on the entry into a starting slot results in a winning combination, a bonus game is executed and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. In some gaming machines of this type, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is entered, the gaming state advantageous to the player is set until the player wins the next winning combination (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FL1, whether or not to execute a suggested presentation mode as a presentation mode executed during a period when it is possible to cause a gaming ball to enter a specific area can be determined according to the contents set by the setting means, so that it is possible to vary the ease with which a gaming ball can enter a specific area during a bonus game according to the presentation mode executed. Therefore, since it is possible to easily vary the types of game states set when the same bonus game is executed, there is an effect of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the gaming machine FL1, the bonus game types executed by the bonus game execution means are as follows:
a bonus game type determination means for determining a bonus game type from among a plurality of bonus game types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game that is more advantageous than the first bonus game;
In the first gaming state, the bonus game is more likely to be executed than in the second gaming state, and the first bonus game is more likely to be determined by the bonus game type determination means.
.

According to the gaming machine FL2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine FL1, the type of bonus game to be executed can be changed depending on the gaming state, so that there is an effect that the interest in the game can be changed depending on the type of gaming state.

A gaming machine FL3, in which the gaming state setting means is capable of setting a third gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state and the second gaming state based on a gaming ball entering the specific area during execution of the second bonus game, in accordance with the gaming machine FL1 or FL2.

According to the gaming machine FL3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines FL1 or FL2, a third gaming state is set when the gaming ball enters a specific area, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by making the player play in anticipation of the ball entering the specific area.

A gaming machine FL4 is any one of gaming machines FL1 to FL3, and has a measurement means for measuring the set number of times the first gaming state and the third gaming state are set by the gaming state setting means, and is characterized in that the gaming state setting means is capable of forcibly setting the second gaming state based on the set number of times measured by the measurement means reaching a predetermined specific set number.

According to the gaming machine FL4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines FL1 to FL3,
Since the gaming state can be forcibly set, there is an effect of suppressing malfunctions in which the tendency for gambling becomes too high.

A gaming machine FL5, in any one of the gaming machines FL2 to FL4, is characterized in that the setting means is easy to set the first setting during execution of the second bonus game.

According to the gaming machine FL5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines FL2 to FL4,
This has the effect of increasing the expectation that a bonus game will be played, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine FL6, in which, in the gaming machine FL4 or FL5, the setting means is characterized in that the second setting is easily set when the set number of times measured by the measuring means is a predetermined set number of times.

According to the gaming machine FL6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines FL4 and FL5, since the second setting is likely to be set when a predetermined set number of times is reached, it is possible to generate interest in the set number of times, and thus it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Feature FM group>
A gaming machine FM1 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine FM1 being characterized in having a setting means capable of setting at least a first setting and a second setting different from the first setting after the bonus game is executed, a first release means for canceling the first setting based on the establishment of a first condition when the first setting is set, and a second release means for canceling the second setting based on the establishment of the two conditions when the second setting is set.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, if a lottery result based on the winning of a ball into a starting slot results in a winning, a bonus game is executed, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game ends. In this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is successively set (Prior art document: JP 2010 A106363 A, "Patent Document 1")
(Publication No. 075741).

In this type of gaming machine, the conditions for canceling the settings are fixed, which reduces the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine FM1, the first setting and the second setting are released independently of each other, so that the situations set in the game can be diversified, thereby making the game more entertaining.

<Characteristic FN group>
a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, an identification information indicating a result of the identification by the identification means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which the awarding condition is likely to be satisfied when the identification information indicating a specific result of the identification is statically displayed on the display means; the gaming machine FN1 is characterized in that, when a switching condition is satisfied in a normal gaming state, the gaming machine has a setting means for setting one of a first setting and a second setting different from the first setting, and the setting means is configured to be able to set the first setting and, after a termination condition is satisfied, to set the second setting until a specific condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a lottery result based on the entry into a starting port is a winning combination, a bonus game is executed and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set. In some gaming machines of this type, when a gaming state advantageous to the player is entered, a gaming state advantageous to the player is set until the player wins the next winning combination (prior art document: JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game when an advantageous gaming state ends. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine FN1, the second setting is performed even after the first setting is completed, so that the game can be varied and the inconvenience of players becoming bored with the game early on can be prevented.

<Feature FO group>
A gaming machine FO1 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, characterized in that the gaming machine FO1 also has an update means capable of updating at least one of first information and second information when the bonus game is executed, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when the first information or the second information is updated by the update means and the updated first information and second information are in a specific state.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, if a lottery result based on the entry into a starting port is a winning combination, a bonus game is executed, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game ends. In this type of gaming machine, there are some that aim to suppress the gambling nature of the game by setting a limit on the number of times that a gaming state advantageous to the player is consecutively set (prior art document: JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if the number of times that a gaming state advantageous to a player is consecutively set is always set to the same number, there is a risk that the player will predict the next gaming state to be set, which will ruin the fun of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

According to the gaming machine FO1, when the first information and the second information reach a specific state, a specific presentation is executed, so that the player can play the game in the hope that the first information and the second information will reach a specific state, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

<Feature FP group>
A gaming machine FP1 having a discrimination means capable of performing a discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the result of the discrimination performed by the discrimination means, a dynamic display period determination means capable of determining the dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is displayed stationary in a display mode indicating a specific discrimination result, the gaming machine having an update means capable of updating information based on the execution of the bonus game within a specific period, and the gaming machine being capable of executing a specific presentation based on the information updated by the update means being specific information.

Conventionally, there have been known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which a lottery is executed when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a winning one, a bonus game is executed, and the gaming state transitions to a high probability state in which the lottery result is a winning one, and a bonus game is executed. Among such gaming machines, a machine has been proposed in which, when the gaming state transitions to a high probability state in which the lottery result is a winning one, the lottery result is a winning one and a bonus game is executed (prior art document: JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous due to the bonus game being repeatedly executed.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can prevent games from becoming monotonous.

According to the game machine FP1, when a bonus game is executed and the information is updated to specific information, a specific presentation is executed, so that not only is the bonus game executed repeatedly and monotonously, but the player is made aware of the updated information while playing the game, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Characteristic FQ group>
a special game execution means for executing a special game based on a result of the special game by the special game execution means being a specific result of the special game; a specific area into which the game ball can enter when the special game is executed; and a first game state is set based on the game ball having entered the specific area, and if the game ball has not entered the specific area,
a game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state;
and a specific performance execution means capable of executing a first specific performance when a gaming ball does not enter the specific area in a first state, and executing a second specific performance that is advantageous to a player and different from the first performance when a gaming ball does not enter the specific area in a second state different from the first state.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines that, when a lottery result based on the entry into a starting port is a winning combination, execute a bonus game and set a game state advantageous to the player. In some gaming machines of this type, when a game state advantageous to the player is entered, a game state advantageous to the player is set until the player wins the next winning combination (prior art document: JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, the game may become monotonous, consisting of simply waiting for the next win, and there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent players from becoming bored with the game early on.

According to the gaming machine FQ1, even if the gaming ball does not enter the specific area, a second specific presentation that is advantageous to the player is executed depending on the type of state, so that the player can decide whether to pass the gaming ball through the specific area while being conscious of the set state, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

<Feature FR group> (Long-winded due to consecutive wins)
A gaming machine FR1 having a discrimination means capable of performing a discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the result of the discrimination performed by the discrimination means, a dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is displayed in a stopped display mode indicating a specific discrimination result, the gaming machine FR1 having an update means capable of updating information based on the execution of the bonus game within a specific period, and the dynamic display period determination means being capable of determining the dynamic display period based on the information.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which a lottery is executed when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game is executed and the gaming state transitions to a high probability state where the probability of the lottery result being a win is high. Among such gaming machines, there are some in which, when the gaming state transitions to a high probability state where the probability of the lottery result being a win is high, the lottery result is a win and the high probability state is continuously set until the next bonus game is executed (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state transitions to a high probability state where the probability of the lottery result being a winning lottery is high, and then the lottery result is a winning lottery, and the high probability state is set again in succession, so that bonus games are executed multiple times in a short period of time, and there is a risk that excessive gaming media will be awarded and the gambling nature of the game will become too high. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the gambling nature of the game.

According to the gaming machine FR1, the dynamic display period can be changed according to the information updated based on the execution of the bonus game within the specific period, and therefore the number of times the determination means is executed within the specific period can be changed. This has the effect of preventing excessive bonus games from being executed within the specific period, and reducing the gambling nature of the game.

A gaming machine FR2, characterized in that in the gaming machine FR1, the dynamic display period determination means is capable of making it easier to determine a longer period as the dynamic display period when the number of updates of the information is greater within the specific period than when the number of updates of the information is smaller.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FR1, the gaming machine FR2 has the following effects.
The more bonus games that are played within a specific period, the easier it becomes to set a longer dynamic display period, thereby reducing the number of bonus games that are played within a specific period and reducing the gambling nature of the game.

The gaming machine FR2 has a gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the dynamic display period determination means is capable of determining the dynamic display period in correspondence with the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means, and the gaming machine is
A gaming machine FR3 characterized in that the set gaming state can be transitioned from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the information updated by the update means within the specific period.

The gaming machine FR3 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine FR2.
The game state is shifted based on the information updated by the update means, and the dynamic display period can be determined in accordance with the game state after the shift. Therefore, there is an effect that a state in which a long dynamic display period is likely to be determined within a specific period can be reliably set.

In a gaming machine FR3, the dynamic display period determination means is more likely to determine a longer dynamic display period when the second gaming state is set than when the first gaming state is set, and the specific period continues at least until the second gaming state is set.

The gaming machine FR4 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine FJ3.
The specific period can be continued at least until the second game state in which a long dynamic display period is likely to be determined is set, which has the effect of preventing a game state in which a long dynamic display period is likely to be determined from being set and preventing a game from being played for a long period of time.

<Feature FS group> (Set up a hit where the end condition element is updated and a hit where it is not updated)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining, as the type of bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means, one of a plurality of bonus game types including at least a first bonus game and a second bonus game different from the first bonus game; and a game state setting means for setting, as a game state, at least a first game state and a second game state which is more disadvantageous to a player than the first game state, the gaming machine FS1, characterized in having an update means for updating information based on the execution of the first bonus game, and a setting means for forcibly setting the second game state as the game state after the execution of the bonus game when the information updated by the update means becomes specific information.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, if a lottery result based on the entry into a starting port is a winning combination, a bonus game is executed, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game ends. In this type of gaming machine, there are some that aim to suppress the gambling nature of the game by limiting the number of times that a gaming state advantageous to the player is consecutively set (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if the number of times that a game state advantageous to the player is consecutively set is always set to the same number, there is a risk that the player will be able to predict the next game state to be set, which may ruin the fun of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the fun of the game.

According to the gaming machine FS1, when the first bonus game is determined by the bonus game type determination means, information is updated, and when the updated information becomes specific information, the second game state is forcibly set, so that the number of times the bonus game is executed before the second game state is forcibly set can be varied according to the type of bonus game determined by the bonus game type determination means. Thus, compared to conventional gaming machines in which the second game state is forcibly set based on the number of times the bonus game is executed, it is possible to make the player play while expecting that the second game state will not be forcibly set, and there is an effect of improving the interest of the game.

A gaming machine FS2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FS1, it has a special update means capable of executing a special update that makes it difficult for the update means to update the information to the specific information when the second bonus game is determined by the bonus game type determination means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FS1, the gaming machine FS2 has the following effects.
By executing the second bonus game, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the special update means to update the information to the specific information, which has the effect of making the player eager to play while expecting the type of bonus game that can extend the period until the second gaming state is forcibly set to be determined.

In a gaming machine FS2, the update means is capable of updating the information to the specific information by updating the information from an initial stage to a specific stage, and the special update means is capable of updating the information to the initial stage.

The gaming machine FS3 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine FS2.
When the second bonus game is played in a state in which the information has been updated from the initial stage to a predetermined stage based on the execution of the first bonus game, the information updated to the predetermined stage can be updated to the initial stage by the second updating means, thereby making it possible to have the effect of making the player interested in the timing at which the second bonus game is played.

A gaming machine FS5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FS1, it has a second updating means capable of updating second information different from the information based on the execution of the second bonus game, and has a second setting means capable of forcibly setting the second gaming state when the second information updated by the second updating means becomes specific second information as the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FS1, the gaming machine FS5 has the following effects.
Since the second game state can be forcibly set by the second setting means, there is an effect that the player can play the game while expecting that the first bonus game and the second bonus game will be executed without bias.

Gaming machine FS6, in any one of gaming machines FS1 to FS5, is characterized in that the bonus game execution means is capable of executing the same bonus game when the first bonus game is determined and when the second bonus game is determined.

The gaming machine FS6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines FS1 to FS5. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand which type of bonus game has been determined from the content of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means. Therefore,
This has the effect of providing the player with the enjoyment of predicting the type of bonus game.

<Feature FT group> (Limited chance regulation according to time limit)
A gaming machine FT1 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state and a second game state which is less favorable than the first game state, characterized in that the gaming machine FT1 has an update means capable of updating information based on the execution of the bonus game, a setting means capable of forcibly setting the second game state as the game state after the execution of the bonus game when the information is determined to be specific information, and a variable means capable of varying the period until the information is updated to the information determined to be the specific information depending on the type of the bonus game executed.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, if a lottery result based on the entry into a starting port is a winning combination, a bonus game is executed, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game ends. In this type of gaming machine, there are some that aim to suppress the gambling nature of the game by limiting the number of times that a gaming state advantageous to the player is consecutively set (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if the number of times that a game state advantageous to the player is consecutively set is always set to the same number, there is a risk that the player will be able to predict the next game state to be set, which may ruin the fun of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the fun of the game.

According to the gaming machine FT1, when the first gaming state is set, the length of the period until the setting means forcibly sets the second gaming state can be varied by the variable means. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period during which the first gaming state will continue, it is possible to make the player eager to play while expecting that the first gaming state will continue for a long time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A gaming machine FT2 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine FT1, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting a third gaming state which is less favorable than the second gaming state, and has a second setting means which is capable of forcibly setting the third gaming state when the information updated by the update means is determined to be specific second information, and the update means is capable of updating the information to the specific information before updating it to the specific second information.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine FT1, the gaming machine FT2 has the following effects.
Since an upper limit to the period during which the first gaming state continues can be set by the second setting means, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game that is excessively advantageous to the player from being executed.

A gaming machine FT3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FT2, it has a third setting means which is capable of executing a setting process to forcibly set the third gaming state when the second gaming state is forcibly set by the setting means, regardless of the content of the information updated by the update means.

The gaming machine FT3 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine FT2.
When the first game state advantageous to the player ends, the third game state can be forcibly set, which has the effect of preventing the second game state disadvantageous to the player from continuing unnecessarily for a long time, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

<Feature FU group> (Setting disadvantageous state using multiple hits)
a first setting means for setting the second gaming state as a gaming state after the bonus game is executed when the first gaming state is set, by executing the bonus game; and a second setting means for setting the third gaming state as a gaming state after the bonus game when the second gaming state is set, by executing the bonus game, wherein the gaming machine has a determination means for determining a specific determination result, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the determination means results in a specific determination result, and a gaming state setting means for setting at least a first gaming state, a second gaming state which is more disadvantageous to a player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state which is more disadvantageous to a player than the second gaming state, the first setting means being capable of setting the second gaming state as a gaming state after the bonus game when the first gaming state is set, and a second setting means being capable of setting the third gaming state as a gaming state after the bonus game when the second gaming state is set, by executing the bonus game;
The gaming machine FU1 is characterized by having the following.

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, if a lottery result based on the entry into a starting port is a winning combination, a bonus game is executed, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is set after the bonus game ends. In this type of gaming machine, there are some that aim to suppress the gambling nature of the game by limiting the number of times that a gaming state advantageous to the player is consecutively set (for example, JP 2010-075741 A).

In this type of gaming machine, if the number of times that a game state advantageous to the player is consecutively set is always set to the same number, there is a risk that the player will be able to predict the next game state to be set, which may ruin the fun of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the fun of the game.

According to the gaming machine FU1, the gaming state can be gradually shifted from the first gaming state to the third gaming state by using a plurality of bonus games, so that it is possible to prevent a sudden setting of an unfavorable gaming state, which would reduce the player's motivation to play, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

A gaming machine FU2, which is a gaming machine in accordance with the present invention, is characterized in that the gaming machine is configured not to set the third gaming state after the bonus game that is executed when the first gaming state is set.

The gaming machine FU2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine FU1. Since the third gaming state is not set by a single bonus game executed when the first gaming state is set, it is possible to reliably execute a setting that gradually shifts the gaming state to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively prevent the player's motivation to play from being reduced due to the sudden setting of an unfavorable gaming state.

The gaming machine FU1 or FU2 has an execution number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times the bonus game is executed during a specific period after the first gaming state is set, and the first setting means
The gaming machine FU3 is characterized in that the second game state is set based on a first number being measured by the execution count measuring means, and the second setting means sets the third game state based on a second number being measured by the execution count measuring means, the second number being greater than the first number.

The gaming machine FU3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine FU1 or FU2. That is, the gaming state can be set in the order of the second gaming state and the third gaming state based on the number of times the bonus game has been executed since the first gaming state was set, so that the transition process from the first gaming state to the third gaming state can be predefined. Therefore, there is an effect that the transition period for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state to the third gaming state can be prevented from becoming excessively long.

The gaming machine FU4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine FU3, it has a first number determination means capable of determining one number from among different numbers as the first number.

The gaming machine FU4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FU3.
The length of the period during which the first gaming state continues can be varied according to the number of times determined by the first number determining means, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the first gaming state will continue for a long period of time, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine FU5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine FU4, the gaming machine is configured so that the difference between the first number of times and the second number of times is always constant regardless of the first number of times.

The gaming machine FU5 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine FU4.
This has the effect of making the length of the period during which the second gaming state continues constant, regardless of the period during which the first gaming state continues.

<Feature GA group> (Set data specified in a table using labels)
A control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, a storage means for storing a plurality of information groups each composed of one or more pieces of information for the control means to perform control, and an information group selection means for selecting one of the information groups to be used for control by the control means from the storage means.
The gaming machine GA1 is characterized in that it is provided with a leading position designation means for indicating the leading position of a specific information group among the memory area in which the multiple information groups are stored, and the information group selection means selects one of the information groups based on the leading position indicated by the leading position designation means.

According to the gaming machine GA1, a plurality of information groups each composed of one or more pieces of information for the control means to perform control are stored in the storage means, and one information group to be used for control by the control means is selected from the storage means by the information group selection means. A head position designation means indicates a head position of a predetermined information group among the storage area in which the plurality of information groups are stored, and one information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the head position indicated by the head position designation means.

As a result, in the control process that specifies one information group, it is only necessary to read the head position of a specific information group, and it is not necessary to write the information that constitutes the information group individually in the program. Therefore, when the program is diverted to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite a large amount of information in the program, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of value rewriting errors. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress malfunctions of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine GA1 is provided with: a designation means for designating a leading position of an information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose leading position is designated by the leading position designation means among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means; and an information number calculation means for calculating the number of pieces of information constituting the predetermined information group from the leading position of the predetermined information group designated by the leading position designation means and the leading position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group designated by the designation means, and the information group selection means is provided with:
A gaming machine GA2, characterized in that one of the information groups is selected based on the number of pieces of information calculated by the information number calculation means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine GA1, the gaming machine GA2 has the following effects.
Among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the leading position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose leading position is indicated by the leading position specifying means is indicated by the specifying means.
The number of pieces of information constituting the predetermined information group is calculated by the information number calculation means from the start position of the predetermined information group indicated by the start position designation means and the start position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the designation means. One information group is selected by the information group selection means from the start position designated by the start position designation means and the number of pieces of information calculated by the information number calculation means.

This eliminates the need to specify the number of pieces of information that make up an information group as a numerical value in the program, so that when the program is diverted to another model with a different number of pieces of information that make up an information group, the process of rewriting the number in the process that uses the number of pieces that make up an information group can be omitted. This has the effect of preventing the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a correction error made by the program creator.

In the gaming machine GA2, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing information, and each piece of information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored in the plurality of addresses.
The gaming machine GA3 is characterized in that the numbers are stored one by one.

The gaming machine GA3 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GA2.
The storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing information, and each of the plurality of information groups is stored in each of the plurality of addresses.

This has the effect that the number of addresses in which information is stored matches the number of pieces of information that make up the information group, so that the number of pieces of information can be easily calculated by the information number calculation means based on the range of addresses in which the information is stored.

In a gaming machine GA3, a first address among the multiple addresses in which the multiple information groups are stored is associated with identification data for identifying the information group, and the first position designation means and the designation means designate the first address of the information group based on the identification data.A gaming machine GA4 characterized in that:

The gaming machine GA4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GA3.
Identification data for identifying the information group is associated with the first address among the multiple addresses at which the multiple information groups are stored, and the first address of the information group is designated by the first position designation means and the designation means based on the identification data.

As a result, the start position designation means and designation means do not need to designate the start position by the address itself, so even if the storage address of each information group changes when the program is converted to another model, there is no need to rewrite the start position in the control processing program that reads out each information group. This has the effect of preventing the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a program rewrite error.

In any one of the gaming machines GA1 to GA4, an acquisition means for acquiring random information;
The gaming machine GA5 is characterized by comprising a comparison means for comparing the random information acquired by the acquisition means with the group of information selected by the information group selection means, and a bonus game awarding means for determining whether or not to award a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the comparison result by the comparison means.

The gaming machine GA5 has the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines GA1 to GA4: the random information acquired by the acquisition means and the information group selected by the information group selection means are compared by the comparison means, and based on the comparison result by the comparison means, the bonus game awarding means determines whether or not to award a bonus game advantageous to the player.

This makes it possible to randomly determine whether or not to award a bonus game, which has the effect of making the player feel that the game is fair.

In the gaming machine GA5, the comparison means compares the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means with the random information in the order of the addresses in which the information is stored.

According to the gaming machine GA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GA5, the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means is compared with random information by the comparison means in the order of the addresses in which the information is stored, so that the information to be compared with the random information next can be specified by a simple process. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when the comparison means performs a comparison can be reduced.

In the gaming machine GA6, the comparison means compares the random information acquired by the acquisition means with each piece of information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means a number of times corresponding to the number of pieces of information calculated by the information number calculation means.

According to the gaming machine GA7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GA6, the comparison means compares the random information acquired by the acquisition means with each piece of information constituting the information group selected by the information group selection means a number of times corresponding to the number of pieces of information calculated by the information number calculation means, so there is no need to perform a process to separately determine the number of comparisons. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when the comparison means performs the comparison can be reduced.

Gaming machine GA8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines GA5 to GA7, it is provided with an erasing means for erasing the random information acquired by the acquisition means before awarding the bonus game when the bonus game awarding means decides to award the bonus game.

According to gaming machine GA8, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines GA5 to GA7, when it is decided by the bonus game granting means to grant a bonus game, the random information acquired by the acquisition means is erased before the bonus game is awarded by the erasing means, thereby having the effect of preventing the lottery result corresponding to the awarding of the bonus game from being illegally acquired from outside.

<Feature GB group> (calculate the number of data using labels)
A gaming machine GB1 comprising: a control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure; a storage means for storing a plurality of pieces of information; a storage area which is part of the storage means and which stores a plurality of information groups each composed of a plurality of pieces of information used by the control means for control; and an information group selection means for selecting one of the information groups from the storage area to be used for control by the control means, wherein all of the information groups are composed of a specific number of pieces of information which are the same number; in the storage area, each piece of information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored in order at a plurality of addresses corresponding to the storage area with no vacant addresses; and the information group selection means selects the information group based on the first address of a predetermined information group stored in the storage area and the specific number.

According to the gaming machine GB1, the control means controls the game according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of pieces of information are stored in the storage means, and a plurality of information groups each composed of a plurality of pieces of information used by the control means to perform control are stored in a storage area that is a part of the storage means. One information group to be used for control by the control means is selected from the storage area by the information group selection means. All information groups are composed of a specific number of pieces of information that are the same number. In the storage area, each piece of information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored in order at a plurality of addresses associated with the storage area, with no vacant addresses. The information group selection means selects an information group based on the first address of a specific information group stored in the storage area and the specific number.

This allows the information group to be specified simply by specifying the first address of the predetermined information group and the specific number, so there is no need to specify the first position of each information group in the program. Therefore, when the program is transferred to another model, there is no need to rewrite many values such as the first position of each information group in the program, so it is possible to prevent errors in rewriting values. Therefore, there is an effect of preventing malfunctions of the gaming machine.

A gaming machine GB1, comprising: an address designation means for designating a top address of an information group stored next to the predetermined information group among the plurality of information groups stored in sequence in the memory area; and a specific number calculation means for calculating the specific number from the top address of the predetermined information group and the address designated by the address designation means.
2.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine GB1, the gaming machine GB2 has the following effects.
The address designation means designates the top address of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group among the plurality of information groups stored in order in the storage area. The specific number calculation means calculates the specific number from the top address of the predetermined information group and the address designated by the address designation means.

This eliminates the need to input the specific number as a numerical value in the program, so that when the program is converted to another model with a different specific number, the process of re-entering the specific number can be omitted in each process that performs control using the specific number. This has the effect of preventing the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a mistake in correcting the program.

In the gaming machine GB1 or GB2, an identification information storage means is provided for storing a plurality of pieces of identification data used to select one information group from the plurality of pieces of information groups, and an identification information selection means is provided for selecting one piece of identification data from the plurality of pieces of identification data stored in the identification information storage means, and the information group selection means selects the one piece of identification data selected by the identification information selection means.
The gaming machine GB3 is characterized in that the information group is selected based on the identification data, the top address of the information group stored at the top of the memory area, and the specific number.

The gaming machine GB3 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machines GB1 or GB2. That is, a plurality of identification data used to select one information group from a plurality of information groups are stored in an identification information storage means, and one identification data is selected from the plurality of identification data stored in the identification information storage means by the identification information selection means. An information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the one identification data selected by the identification information selection means, the top address of the information group stored at the top of the storage area, and the specific number.

As a result, when referring to any of the information groups stored in the storage area in each control process, it is not necessary to individually identify and refer to the addresses in which the information defined in the information group is stored, which has the effect of reducing the processing load when selecting an information group by the information group selection means.

In the gaming machine GB3, the information group selection means selects the information group that is specified at a position a value calculated from the one identification data and the specific number, relative to the first address of the information group stored at the beginning of the memory area.

According to the gaming machine GB4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GB3, the information group selected by the information group selection means is a information group that is defined at a position that is a value calculated from the identification data of 1 and the specific number, relative to the top address of the information group stored at the top of the memory area, so that the information group can be selected by simple processing. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when the information group is selected by the information group selection means can be reduced.

Gaming machine GB5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines GB1 to GB4, it is equipped with an information storage means capable of storing information, and an information storage control means for controlling the information storage means to store one of the information groups selected by the information group selection means, and the control means performs control based on the information group stored in the information storage means.

The gaming machine GB5 has the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines GB1 to GB4: the information storage control means controls so that one information group selected by the information group selection means is stored in the information storage means, and the control means performs control based on the information group stored in the information storage means.

This brings about an effect that the control means only needs to perform control based on the information group previously stored in the information group storage means, thereby reducing the processing load on the control means.

A gaming machine GB6 comprising a lottery means for conducting a predetermined lottery and a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the predetermined lottery result obtained by the lottery means, wherein the identification information selection means selects the one identification data based on the lottery result obtained by the lottery means being the predetermined lottery result, and further comprising a holding means for holding the one identification data selected by the identification information selection means until a predetermined condition is met, and the information group selection means selects the information group based on the predetermined condition being met.

The gaming machine GB6 has the following effects in addition to those of the gaming machine GB5.
A bonus game advantageous to the player is awarded by the bonus game awarding means based on the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means being a predetermined result. Also, one piece of identification data is selected by the identification information selection means based on the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means being a predetermined result, and the one piece of identification data is held by the holding means until a predetermined condition is met. Then, an information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the fact that the predetermined condition is met.

In this way, when a predetermined condition is met, the information group can be quickly selected and set based on one of the identification data stored in the storage means, which has the effect of preventing the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a delay in setting the information group.

A gaming machine GB7, characterized in that, in the gaming machine GB6, an erasing means is provided for erasing the lottery result by the lottery means based on the one identification data being selected by the identification information selecting means.

According to gaming machine GB7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine GB6, the lottery result by the lottery means is erased by the erasing means based on the selection of one identification data by the identification information selection means, thereby having the effect of preventing the lottery result corresponding to the awarding of a bonus game from being illegally obtained from outside.

In the gaming machine GB7, the holding means holds the one identification data until a condition for terminating the awarding of the bonus game is satisfied, and the information group selection means selects the information group based on the condition for terminating the awarding of the bonus game being satisfied.

The gaming machine GB8 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine GB7.
The holding means holds one piece of identification data until a condition for terminating the provision of the bonus game is satisfied. Furthermore, an information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the satisfaction of the condition for terminating the provision of the bonus game.

This makes it possible to prevent a predetermined lottery result from being held for a relatively long period of time from when the awarding of the bonus game starts to when the awarding of the bonus game ends.
This has the effect of preventing fraudulent acts of illegally obtaining a predetermined lottery result from outside while a bonus game is being awarded.

A gaming machine GB9, in any one of the gaming machines GB3 to GB8, is characterized in that the identification data has a smaller data volume than the specific number of pieces of information that constitute the information group.

According to the gaming machine GB9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines GB3 to GB8, since the identification data has a smaller data amount than the specific number of pieces of information constituting the information group, the amount of data stored in the storage means can be reduced compared to the case where the specific number of pieces of information are stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the memory capacity of the storage means can be reduced.

<Feature GC group> (Whether the most significant bit is 1 or not determines whether or not the reserved ball can be added)
a control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, a first storage means for storing a plurality of predetermined data, a second storage means for storing a plurality of setting values selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means and used by the control means to set a game, a first selection means for selecting one of the predetermined data from the first storage means, and a specific information discrimination means for discriminating whether or not specific information is included in the predetermined data selected by the first selection means,
The gaming machine GC1 is characterized by comprising a conversion means which applies a predetermined conversion to the one specified data according to the game situation when the specific information discrimination means determines that the one specified data contains the specific information, and a second selection means which selects and sets the one setting value from the second storage means based on the one specified data that has been subjected to the predetermined conversion by the conversion means.

According to the gaming machine GC1, the control means controls the game according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of predetermined data are stored in the first storage means, and a plurality of setting values are selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and stored in the second storage means for the control means to set the game. A first selection means selects one predetermined data from the first storage means, and a specific information determination means determines whether or not the predetermined data selected by the first selection means contains specific information. When the specific information determination means determines that the one predetermined data contains specific information, a conversion means performs a predetermined conversion on the one predetermined data, and a second selection means selects and sets one setting value from the second storage means based on the one predetermined data that has been subjected to the predetermined conversion by the conversion means.

This allows the conversion means to perform different conversions on one predetermined data depending on the game situation, and allows the second selection means to select different setting values depending on the conversion content. Therefore, the number of pieces of predetermined data stored in the first storage means can be made smaller than the number of setting values stored in the second storage means, which has the effect of reducing the capacity of the first storage means.

A gaming machine GC2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine GC1, it is provided with a third selection means for selecting and setting one of the setting values from the second storage means based on the one specified data when the specific information discrimination means determines that the one specified data does not include the specific information.

According to the gaming machine GC2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GC1, the specific information determination means
When it is determined that the specific data does not include specific information, the third storage means selects and sets a set value of 1 from the second storage means based on the specific data of 1, so that when the specific data of 1 that does not include specific information is selected, conversion by the conversion means can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced when the specific data of 1 does not include specific information.

A gaming machine GC3, characterized in that in the gaming machine GC1 or GC2, the specific information discrimination means determines that the specific information is included in the one specified data when the most significant bit of the one specified data is 1.

According to the gaming machine GC3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GC1 or GC2, when the most significant bit of one predetermined data is 1, the specific information determination means determines that one predetermined data contains specific information. Therefore, when determining whether or not specific information is contained,
It is not necessary to determine data defined in bits other than the most significant bit, and the determination can be made by simple processing, which has the effect of reducing the processing load on the specific information determination means.

A gaming machine GC3 is provided with an entrance through which a gaming ball can enter, a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information on a display means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the entrance, and a counting means for counting the number of times a new gaming ball has entered the entrance, with a predetermined value as an upper limit, when a new gaming ball enters the entrance while the identification information is being dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means, and the conversion means sets the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 to 0 and adds the counted value of the counting means to the predetermined data of 1.

The gaming machine GC4 has the following effects in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GC3.
When a game ball enters an entry port that allows game balls to enter, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays identification information on the display means, and when a new game ball enters an entry port while the identification information is being dynamically displayed, the counting means counts the number of new game balls entering the port up to a predetermined value. The conversion means changes the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 to 0, and adds up the count value of the counting means.

This allows the second selection means to select different setting values according to the count value of the counting means, thus providing the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, since a variety of settings can be realized.

A gaming machine GC5, characterized in that in the gaming machine GC4, the multiple setting values stored in the second storage means include at least information regarding the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.

According to the gaming machine GC5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GC4, the multiple setting values stored in the second storage means include at least information regarding the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, so that the dynamic display can be executed in various forms of dynamic display of the identification information with different display periods. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine GC5, the second selection means selects from the second memory means the setting value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information having a shorter display time the larger the counted value of the counting means.

According to the gaming machine GC6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GC5, the larger the count value of the counting means is, the more the second selection means selects from the second storage means a setting value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information with a short display time, so that it is possible to prevent only the dynamic display of the identification information with a long display time from being displayed continuously. Therefore, it is possible to prevent only the long display time and miss effects from being displayed continuously, which would cause the player to feel great disappointment, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine GC7 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines GC1 to GC6, it is equipped with an information acquisition means for acquiring random information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the first selection means selects one predetermined data from the first storage means based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition means.

The gaming machine GC7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines GC1 to GC6. That is, random information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Then, one predetermined data is selected from the first storage means by the first selection means based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition means.

This allows the predetermined data to have randomness, and therefore the setting values selected based on the predetermined data can also have randomness. Therefore, since the game settings are determined randomly, it is difficult for the player to predict the settings, and there is an effect of providing the player with an element of surprise.

<Feature GD group> (Determine the variation pattern table based on the pattern and the number of rotations)
The gaming machine GD1 comprises a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information on a display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to a player when any of a plurality of predetermined combinations of identification information appears in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, and a number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means after the bonus game granted by the bonus game granting means is completed, wherein the dynamic display execution means determines the manner of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and information determined when the bonus game was granted the previous time by the bonus game granting means.

According to the gaming machine GD1, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays identification information on the display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when any of the combinations of predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, the bonus game granting means grants a bonus game advantageous to the player. After the bonus game granted by the bonus game granting means ends, the number of times that the dynamic display of identification information is executed by the dynamic display execution means is counted by the number counting means. The dynamic display execution means determines the manner of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and information determined by the bonus game granting means when the previous bonus game was granted.

This makes it possible to determine a wide variety of dynamic display modes of the identification information according to the information determined when the previous bonus game was awarded and the number of times counted by the number counting means. This makes it possible to prevent the dynamic display mode of the identification information from becoming monotonous, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine GD2 is characterized in that in gaming machine GD1, the dynamic display execution means determines the manner of dynamic display of the identification information based on the number of times counted by the number counting means, specific information based on the identification information revealed when the previous bonus game was awarded, and the manner of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means when revealing the identification information.

According to the gaming machine GD2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GD1, specific information based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the identification information that appeared when the previous bonus game was awarded,
Since the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display executing means based on the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means when the identification information is made to appear, it is possible to determine a wide variety of dynamic display modes of the identification information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display mode of the identification information from becoming monotonous, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine GD3, characterized in that in gaming machine GD1 or GD2, an information group storage means is provided which stores an information group consisting of a plurality of pieces of information concerning the mode of dynamic display of the identification information in correspondence with information determined when the bonus game was previously awarded by the bonus game awarding means, the plurality of pieces of information constituting the information group are stored in correspondence with a count value of the number counting means, and the dynamic display execution means selects one information group from the information group storage means based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the bonus game was previously awarded by the bonus game awarding means, and uses the selected information group to determine the mode of dynamic display of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine GD3, an information group consisting of a plurality of pieces of information relating to the manner of dynamic display of the identification information is stored by the information group storage means in association with the information determined when the bonus game granting means granted the previous bonus game. The plurality of pieces of information constituting the information group are stored in association with the count value of the number counting means. Based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the bonus game granting means granted the previous bonus game, one information group is selected from the information group storage means by the dynamic display execution means and used to determine the manner of dynamic display of the identification information.

As a result, the dynamic display execution means can determine the manner of dynamic display of the identification information simply by selecting a group of information previously stored in the information group storage means, thereby having the effect of reducing the processing load of the process for determining the manner of dynamic display of the identification information.

Gaming machine GD4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines GD1 to GD3, it has an entrance through which a gaming ball can enter, and the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays identification information on the display means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the entrance.

According to gaming machine GD4, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines GD1 to GD3, identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the entry of a gaming ball into an entry port through which the gaming ball can enter, so that the player can easily recognize the trigger for executing the dynamic display of the identification information simply by checking whether or not the gaming ball has entered the entry port.

In the gaming machine GD4, a plurality of ball entry ports are provided, and the dynamic display execution means determines the manner of dynamic display of the identification information based on the type of ball entry port through which the gaming ball entered, the number of times counted by the number counting means, and information determined by the bonus game awarding means when the bonus game was last awarded.

According to the gaming machine GD5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine GD4, a plurality of ball entrances are provided, and the manner of dynamic display of the identification information is determined by the dynamic display execution means based on the type of ball entrance into which the game ball entered, the number of times counted by the number counting means, and the information determined when the bonus game was awarded by the bonus game awarding means when the previous bonus game was awarded, so that the manner of dynamic display of the identification information can be determined in a wide variety of ways. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the manner of dynamic display of the identification information from becoming monotonous, and there is an effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

Gaming machine GD6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines GD1 to GD5, it is provided with a gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state to either a first gaming state or a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state after the bonus game awarding means has completed awarding of the bonus game, and the dynamic display execution means is capable of executing dynamic display of the identification information in a specific manner when the gaming state is the second gaming state.

The gaming machine GD6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines GD1 to GD5. That is, after the bonus game granting means has finished granting the bonus game, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state to either the first gaming state or a second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. When the gaming state is the second gaming state, the dynamic display executing means executes dynamic display of the identification information in a specific manner.

By checking whether the dynamic display of the identification information is performed in a specific manner,
Since the player can determine whether the game state is the second game state or not, the player can carefully observe the manner in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine GD6, the dynamic display execution means is capable of executing dynamic display of the identification information in the specific manner when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value.

According to the gaming machine GD7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GD6, when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific manner, so that the player can expect that the dynamic display of the identification information will be executed in a specific manner when the number counting value is a specific value. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game with a sense of excitement.

In gaming machine GD7, the dynamic display execution means executes dynamic display of the identification information in a manner different from the specific manner when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value and the gaming state is the first gaming state.

According to gaming machine GD8, in addition to the effect of gaming machine GD7, when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value and the gaming state is the first gaming state, the dynamic display executing means executes dynamic display of the identification information in a mode different from the specific mode, so that it is possible to suppress execution of dynamic display of the identification information in a specific mode in the first gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from having distrust towards the gaming machine or the hall, because the second gaming state advantageous to the player is not entered even though the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific mode.

Gaming machine GD9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines GD1 to GD8, it is equipped with an information acquisition means for acquiring random information based on the establishment of specific conditions, and the dynamic display execution means determines the manner of dynamic display of the identification information based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition means, the number of times counted by the number counting means, and information determined by the bonus game awarding means when the bonus game was awarded the previous time.

According to the gaming machine GD9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines GD1 to GD8, random information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the dynamic display execution means determines the mode of dynamic display of the identification information based on the acquired random information, the number of times counted by the number counting means, and the information determined by the bonus game granting means when the previous bonus game was granted, so that the mode of dynamic display of the identification information determined can have randomness. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the mode of dynamic display of the identification information to be executed, and thus there is an effect that the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a mode unexpected by the player, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise.

<Feature A group> (A specific value commonly used for a specific range of bits of multiple setting values is stored in a specific register, and when setting a setting value, the specific value is used to generate the setting value)
A gaming machine A1 is configured to be capable of executing a data setting process that performs predetermined settings related to a game by storing setting value data in a predetermined memory area based on the fulfillment of predetermined setting conditions, and is characterized by comprising: a first storage means that stores first data that is commonly used to generate a plurality of different setting value data that can be set in the data setting process; and a data generation means that uses the first data stored in the first storage means to generate the setting value data to be set in the data setting process.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that setting value data for making various settings related to the game is stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the setting value data corresponding to the current setting is read from the storage means and set (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, since different setting value data must be set according to the type of setting, the amount of data in the storage means increases as the number of types of setting value data increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for reducing the storage capacity of the storage means.

In contrast, gaming machine A1 is configured to be capable of executing a data setting process for making predetermined settings related to the game by storing setting value data in a predetermined memory area based on the fulfillment of predetermined setting conditions, and is equipped with a first storage means for storing first data that is commonly used to generate a plurality of different setting value data that can be set in the data setting process, and a data generation means for generating the setting value data to be set in the data setting process using the first data stored in the first storage means.

This allows the first data to be stored efficiently, since the first data commonly used to generate the plurality of different set value data can be generated only by storing the first data in one first storage means, thereby providing the effect of reducing the storage capacity of the first storage means.

In the gaming machine A1, the first data is composed of elements common to the plurality of different set value data, and the gaming machine includes a second storage means for storing second data, which is an element different from the first data, among the elements of the set value data;
The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the data generating means is configured to be able to generate the setting value data by using the first data and the second data.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A1, the first data is composed of components common to the plurality of different setting value data, and the gaming machine is provided with a second storage means for storing second data, which is a component different from the first data, among the components of the setting value data, and the data generation means is configured to be capable of generating the setting value data using the first data and the second data.

This has the effect of reducing the amount of data to be stored in the second storage means, compared to when the setting value data itself consisting of the first data and the second data is stored in the second storage means.

In the gaming machine A2, the second storage means stores a plurality of the second data corresponding to each of the plurality of different setting value data, and the gaming machine is provided with a second data identification means for identifying one of the second data corresponding to the specified setting type from the plurality of the second data stored in the second storage means based on the establishment of the specified setting condition, and the data generation means is configured to be capable of generating the setting value data using the first data and the second data identified by the second data identification means.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the second storage means stores a plurality of the second data corresponding to the plurality of different setting value data, and the gaming machine includes a second data specifying means for specifying one of the second data corresponding to the predetermined setting type from among the plurality of the second data stored in the second storage means based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, and the data generating means generates the first data and
The setting value data is generated by using the second data identified by the second data identifying means.

This makes it possible to reduce the amount of first data by the number of second data stored in the second storage means, compared to the case where the setting value data itself consisting of the first data and the second data is stored in the second storage means, thereby having the effect of reducing the amount of data stored in the second storage means.

Gaming machine A4 is characterized in that in gaming machines A2 or A3, the data setting process is configured so that the first data is stored in a predetermined first range of the specified memory area corresponding to the type of specified setting, and the second data is stored in a second range different from the first range.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines A2 or A3, the data setting process is configured so that the first data is stored in a predetermined first range in the specified memory area corresponding to the type of specified setting, and the second data is stored in a second range different from the first range, so that the setting value data can be set by a relatively simple control of storing the first data in the first range and storing the second data in the second range.
This has the effect of reducing the processing load on the data setting means.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, the first storage means is configured so that the first data is stored in advance before the data setting process is executed.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the first storage means is configured to have the first data stored therein before the data setting process is executed, thereby providing the effect that the first data can be reliably stored in the first storage means when the data setting process is executed.

The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that in the gaming machine A5, the first storage means sets the specific data to an initial value.

According to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine A5, the first storage means has the effect that the specific data is set to an initial value, so that even if the data setting process is executed immediately after power is turned on to the gaming machine, the setting value data can be reliably generated using the first data.

The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that in the gaming machine A6, the first storage means is configured to suppress overwriting of data.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A6, the first storage means is configured to suppress overwriting of data, and therefore has the effect of always maintaining the first data stored in the first storage means.

<Feature B group> (A common portion among the addresses in the data table area is set to the initial value of a specific register, and when reading a specific data table, the read process is executed based on data indicating the portion other than the common portion and the data in the specific register)
a data group storage means configured with a plurality of addresses capable of storing data, storing a plurality of data groups configured with one or a plurality of data for the control means to perform control; a first data storage means storing first data used to identify a specific address included in a range of addresses in which the plurality of data groups are stored; and a data group setting means using at least the first data stored in the first data storage means to set data constituting one of the plurality of data groups stored in the data group storage means to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that a data table specifying data for making various settings related to the game is stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the address of the storage means in which the data table corresponding to the setting is stored is specified, the data table is read out, and the data table is used for the setting process (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, control processes are frequently executed in various setting processes to read out various data tables, and therefore a method for more efficiently reading out various data tables has been demanded.

The gaming machine B1 is equipped with a control means for controlling a game in accordance with a predetermined control procedure, a data group storage means which is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing data and which stores a plurality of data groups each composed of one or a plurality of data for the control means to perform control, a first data storage means which stores first data used to identify a specific address included in the range of addresses in which the plurality of data groups are stored, and a data group setting means which uses at least the first data stored in the first data storage means to set data constituting one of the plurality of data groups stored in the data group storage means so that it is used for a predetermined control by the control means.

This makes it possible to set any one of a plurality of data groups using the first data, thereby providing the effect of enabling data to be set efficiently.

A gaming machine B2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1, a second data storage means is provided which stores second data which is data used to identify one of the plurality of data groups, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to set the data constituting one of the data groups to be used for a predetermined control by the control means using the first data stored in the first data storage means and the second data which corresponds to the data group according to the type of the predetermined control.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine B1, it is provided with a second data storage means for storing second data which is data used to identify one of the plurality of data groups, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to set the data constituting one of the data groups to be used for a predetermined control by the control means using the first data stored in the first data storage means and the second data corresponding to the data group according to the type of the predetermined control.

This has the effect of reducing the amount of data stored in the second data storage means, as compared with the case where data equivalent to the first data is stored together with the second data in the second data storage means.

In the gaming machine B2, the second data storage means stores different pieces of regulating information regulated for each type of the data group in association with the second data, and stores one of the second data by using the regulating information indicating the data group corresponding to the type of the predetermined control.
A gaming machine B3 characterized by comprising a second data identification means for identifying data.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B2, the second data storage means stores the second data in correspondence with different prescribed information that is prescribed for each type of data group, and is equipped with a second data identification means that identifies one of the second data using the prescribed information that indicates the data group corresponding to the type of specified control.

In this way, since the second data can be specified using the stipulation information, it is not necessary to prescribe the value of the second data itself in the program, and therefore it is possible to prevent errors in writing the program, which has the effect of preventing malfunctions of the gaming machine, etc.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the first data is configured with address data indicating a specific address of the data group storage means, the second data is configured with data indicating a difference between the specific address and a first address included in the range of addresses in which the data group is stored, and the data group setting means is configured with
The first address is calculated by adding the second data to the first data.
The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that data constituting one of the data groups, the address of which is included in the address range, is configured to be set so as to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines B2 or B3, the first data is composed of address data indicating a specific address of the data group storage means, the second data is composed of data indicating the difference between the specific address and a first address included in the address range in which the data group is stored, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to set, using the first address calculated by adding the second data to the first data, the data constituting one of the data groups whose address range includes the first address to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.

As a result, since only data indicating the difference for a specific address needs to be stored in the second data storage means, the amount of data stored in the second data storage means can be reduced compared to the case where the value of the first address itself is stored in the second data storage means.

A gaming machine B5 in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, characterized in that the first data storage means sets an initial value of the data to be stored to the first data.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, since the initial value of the data to be stored in the first data storage means is set to the first data, there is no need to separately perform a process of storing the first data in the first data storage means, and therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the first data is composed of common data as upper bytes of addresses in a specific range in the data group storage means, and the second data is composed of common data as upper bytes of addresses in a specific range in the data group storage means.
The data is included in the range of addresses in which the data group is stored and is composed of data indicating the lower byte of an address in which the first data is the upper byte, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to read out the data group to be used for the specified control using address data in which the first data is the upper byte and the second data is the lower byte.

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of gaming machines B2 and B3, the first data is composed of common data as upper bytes of addresses in a specific range of the data group storage means, the second data is included in the range of addresses in which the data groups are stored, and is composed of data indicating lower bytes of addresses having the first data as upper bytes, and the data group setting means sets the first data as upper bytes,
The data group used for the predetermined control can be read out by using address data having the second data as a lower byte.

This has the effect of reducing the amount of data to be stored in the second storage means, since it is necessary to store only the lower byte of the address in the second data storage means.

<Feature C Group> (The bit data excluding the bits in a specific range that have common values among the setting values is specified in a data table, and only the bit data in the specific range is described in the program)
In a gaming machine configured to execute a data setting process for setting a predetermined setting related to a game by storing setting value data in a predetermined storage area based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the gaming machine includes a first storage means for storing first data which corresponds to each of a plurality of different setting value data which can be set in the data setting process and which is data constituting a part of the corresponding setting value data, and
a data specifying means for specifying one of the first data corresponding to the type of the predetermined setting from the first storage means; and using the first data specified by the data specifying means,
and a data generating means for generating the setting value data corresponding to the first data.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that setting value data for making various settings related to the game is stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the setting value data corresponding to the current setting is read from the storage means and set (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, since different setting value data must be set according to the type of setting, the amount of data in the storage means increases as the number of types of setting value data increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for reducing the storage capacity of the storage means.

According to the gaming machine C1, a data setting process is executed to perform a predetermined setting related to a game by storing setting value data in a predetermined storage area based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the gaming machine C1 includes a first storage means for storing first data, which is data corresponding to each of a plurality of different setting value data that can be set in the data setting process and is data constituting a part of the corresponding setting value data, a data specifying means for specifying one of the first data corresponding to the type of the predetermined setting from the first storage means based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, and a data specifying means for specifying the first data specified by the data specifying means.
and a data generating means for generating the setting value data corresponding to the first data by using the data.

This has the effect of reducing the amount of data stored in the first storage means, as compared to a case in which the setting value data itself is stored in the first storage means.

In the gaming machine C1, the data generating means generates the first data and a predetermined second data.
data, and the data setting process is configured to create a state in which the first data is stored in a first range in the specified memory area, and the second data is stored in a second range different from the first range.

According to gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, the data generation means is configured to be capable of generating the setting value data consisting of the first data and predetermined second data, and the data setting process is configured to process a state in which the first data is stored in a first range of the specified memory area and the second data is stored in a second range different from the first range.

This makes it possible to generate setting value data by combining the first data stored in the first storage means with predetermined second data, thereby having the effect of reducing the amount of data in the first storage means by the amount that the second storage means does not need to be stored in the first storage means.

In the gaming machine C2, in the data setting process, a temporary storage means capable of temporarily storing the set value data, a data storage means for storing the set value data stored in the temporary storage means in the predetermined storage area, and a data specifying means for specifying the first set value data by the first data specifying means.
and a pre-storing means for pre-storing the second data in a third range of the temporary storage means corresponding to the second range at least before the data is specified, and the data generating means is configured to overwrite only a fourth range of the temporary storage means corresponding to the first range with the first data, thereby creating a state in which the setting value data corresponding to the predetermined setting type is stored in the temporary storage means.
3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, in the data setting process,
The system includes a temporary storage means capable of temporarily storing the setting value data, a data storage means for storing the setting value data stored in the temporary storage means in the specified storage area, and a pre-storage means for pre-storing the second data in a third range of the temporary storage means corresponding to the second range at least before the first data is identified by the data identification means, and the data generation means is configured to be able to create a state in which the setting value data corresponding to the specified setting type is stored in the temporary storage means by overwriting only a fourth range of the temporary storage means corresponding to the first range with the first data.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load in the data setting process, since the setting value data can be stored in the data storage means simply by overwriting the fourth range with the first data without performing a control process to store the second data in the data storage means.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, among gaming machines C1 to C3, the first storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing a predetermined specific amount of data, and the first data is composed of an amount of data less than the specific amount.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the first storage means:
The memory device is configured with a plurality of addresses capable of storing a predetermined specific amount of data, and the first data is configured with an amount of data less than the specific amount.

This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data compared to when a specific amount of data is stored in the first storage means, and thus has the effect of reducing the amount of data stored in the first storage means.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that in gaming machine C4, the first storage means stores a plurality of the first data corresponding to different set value data at each address.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C4, the first storage means stores a plurality of the first data corresponding to different set value data at each address.
The amount of data to be stored in the first storage unit is reduced by the number of pieces of data.

Gaming machine C6 is characterized in that in gaming machine C4 or C5, the storage means stores the first data in correspondence with memory area identification data for identifying the memory area in which the first data is to be stored, and the data setting process is configured to repeat a process of generating the setting value data using the first data identified by the data identification means and a process of storing the generated setting value data in the memory area indicated by the memory area identification data associated with the first data identified by the data identification means until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied.

According to gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of gaming machines C4 or C5, the storage means stores the first data in association with memory area identification data for identifying the memory area in which the first data is to be stored, and the data setting process is configured to repeat a process of generating the setting value data using the first data identified by the data identification means and a process of storing the generated setting value data in the memory area indicated by the memory area identification data associated with the first data identified by the data identification means until a predetermined specific condition is met.

This makes it possible to collectively store a plurality of different setting value data in different storage areas, thereby providing the effect of enabling the setting value data to be set more efficiently.

A gaming machine C7 is characterized in that in the gaming machine C6, the data setting process is configured to be terminated based on the fact that predetermined specific data has been read out as the memory area specifying data.

According to gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C6, the data setting process is terminated based on the reading out of predetermined specific data as data for identifying the memory area, so that there is an effect that a program configuration which is less prone to program design errors can be realized compared to a method in which the number of times data is set is specified in the program.

<Feature D group> (When overwriting a memory area consisting of multiple bits with specified data stored therein, only the difference bits are updated, excluding the bits that are common to the data)
a control data storage means for storing control data for performing predetermined control related to a game;
a control means for controlling a game in accordance with the control data stored in the control data storage means; a storage control means for storing the control data in the control data storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined storage condition; and a data discrimination means for discriminating at least one of the control data to be stored in the control data storage means and the data stored in the control data storage means based on the establishment of the predetermined storage condition, wherein the storage control means is configured to be able to store data corresponding to the control data in only a portion of the storage area of the control data storage means based on the discrimination result of the data discrimination means becoming a predetermined specific discrimination result.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that setting value data for making various settings related to the game is stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the setting value data corresponding to the current setting is read from the storage means and set (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the setting value data is, regardless of the setting contents,
Since it is necessary to set a predetermined amount of setting value data, there is a risk that processing waste may occur depending on the type of setting value data. For this reason, there is a demand for reducing the processing load when setting the setting value data.

The gaming machine D1 comprises a control data storage means capable of storing control data for performing predetermined control related to a game, a control means for controlling a game in accordance with the control data stored in the control data storage means, a storage control means for storing the control data in the control data storage means based on the establishment of predetermined storage conditions, and a data discrimination means for discriminating at least one of the control data to be stored in the control data storage means and the data stored in the control data storage means based on the establishment of the predetermined storage conditions.
The storage control means is configured to be able to store data corresponding to the control data in only a part of the storage areas of the control data storage means based on the determination result of the data determination means becoming a predetermined specific determination result.

This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the control data storage means when the data discrimination means has produced a specific discrimination result, thereby providing the effect of reducing the processing load.

A gaming machine D2 comprising: a first control data identification means for identifying first control data based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition; a second control data identification means for identifying second control data based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition; and a control data generation means for generating the control data to be stored in the control data storage means using at least one of the first control data identified by the first control data identification means and the second control data identified by the second control data identification means, wherein the storage control means is configured to be capable of storing data corresponding to the control data in only a portion of the storage area of the control data storage means when the first control data is not identified by the first control data identification means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, a first control data specifying means for specifying first control data based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition, and a second control data specifying means for specifying second control data based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition,
and a control data generation means for generating the control data to be stored in the control data storage means using at least one of the first control data identified by the first control data identification means and the second control data identified by the second control data identification means, wherein the storage control means is configured to be able to store data corresponding to the control data in only a portion of the storage area of the control data storage means when the first control data is not identified by the first control data identification means.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load when the first control data is not specified.

In the gaming machine D2, the control data storage means includes a first storage area capable of storing data corresponding to the first control data, and a second storage area capable of storing data corresponding to the second control data.
and a memory area, wherein the memory control means is configured to be able to store data corresponding to the first control data among the control data generated by the control data generation means in the first memory area, and to store data corresponding to the second control data in the second memory area.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the control data storage means is at least composed of a first storage area capable of storing data corresponding to the first control data, and a second storage area capable of storing data corresponding to the second control data,
The storage control means is configured to be able to store, among the control data generated by the control data generation means, data corresponding to the first control data in the first storage area, and to store, in the second storage area, data corresponding to the second control data.

As a result, since a memory area for storing data corresponding to the first control data and a memory area for storing data corresponding to the second control data are predetermined, it is possible to reduce the processing load when storing the control data.

In the gaming machine D3, the control data generating means is configured to generate the control data using only the second control data when the first control data is not specified by the first control data specifying means, and the storage control means is configured to generate the control data using only the second control data when the first control data is not specified by the first control data specifying means.
The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the control data generated using only the control data of the above is configured to be stored only in the second memory area.

According to gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D3, the control data generation means is configured to be able to generate the control data using only the second control data when the first control data is not identified by the first control data identification means, and the memory control means is configured to be able to store the control data generated using only the second control data in only the second memory area.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load when the first control data is not specified.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D4, it is provided with a state setting means for setting a state in which predetermined first data is stored in the first memory area and predetermined second data is stored in the second memory area before control is performed by the memory control means, the first data being composed of data for indicating that the first control data has not been specified, and the second data being composed of data for indicating that the second control data has not been specified.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, predetermined first data is stored in the first memory area before the control by the memory control means is performed,
The device further includes a state setting means for setting the second storage area to a state in which predetermined second data is stored, the first data being composed of data for indicating that the first control data is not specified, and the second data being composed of data for indicating that the second control data is not specified.

This has the effect of making it possible to easily determine whether or not the first control data and the second control data have been specified based on the data stored in the first memory area and the second memory area.

Gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D5, the state setting means is configured to be able to set a state in which the first data is stored in the first memory area and the second data is stored in the second memory area based on the control data being used for control by the control means.

According to gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, the state setting means is configured to be able to set a state in which the first data is stored in the first memory area and the second data is stored in the second memory area based on the control data being used for control by the control means, thereby providing the effect that the data in the control data storage means can be reset each time the control data is used.

Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D6, the data discrimination means is configured to give the specific discrimination result when a specific range of data is common between the control data to be stored in the control data storage means and the data stored in the control data storage means.

According to gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines D1 to D6, the data discrimination means is configured to produce the specific discrimination result when a specific range of data is common between the control data to be stored in the control data storage means and the data stored in the control data storage means, thereby achieving the effect of reducing the processing load when a specific range of data is common between the control data to be stored in the control data storage means and the data stored in the control data storage means.

Gaming machine D8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D7, the memory control means is configured to be able to store data of the control data outside the specific range only in a memory area of the control data storage means in which data outside the specific range is stored, based on the judgment result of the data judgment means being the specific judgment result.

According to gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D7, the storage control means is configured to store the data outside the specific range of the control data only in the storage area of the control data storage means where the data outside the specific range is stored, based on the determination result of the data determination means being the specific determination result, so that when the control data to be stored in the control data storage means and the data stored in the control data storage means have data in the specific range in common, only the data outside the specific range may be stored in the control data storage means, thereby providing the effect of reducing the processing load.

<Feature E group> (A specific value used to generate a setting value is stored in a specific register, and when the setting value is set, the setting value is generated using the specific value)
A gaming machine E1 is configured to be capable of executing a data setting process that performs predetermined settings related to a game by storing setting value data in a predetermined memory area based on the fulfillment of predetermined setting conditions, and is characterized in that it comprises: a first storage means that stores first data used to generate setting value data that can be set in the data setting process; and a data generation means that uses the first data stored in the first storage means to generate the setting value data to be set in the data setting process.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that setting value data for making various settings related to the game is stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the setting value data corresponding to the current setting is read from the storage means and set (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, since different setting value data must be set according to the type of setting, the amount of data in the storage means increases as the number of types of setting value data increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for reducing the storage capacity of the storage means.

In contrast, gaming machine E1 is configured to be capable of executing a data setting process for making predetermined settings related to a game by storing setting value data in a predetermined memory area based on the fulfillment of predetermined setting conditions, and is equipped with a first storage means for storing first data used to generate setting value data that can be set in the data setting process, and a data generation means for generating the setting value data to be set in the data setting process using the first data stored in the first storage means.

This makes it possible to generate the setting value data using the first data stored in the first storage means, thereby providing the effect of enabling the setting value data to be generated suitably.

In the gaming machine E1, the first storage means stores a single piece of data as the first data, and the data setting means is configured to use the first data to generate one of a plurality of different setting value data that can be set in the data setting process, corresponding to the type of the specified setting condition that has been established.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the first storage means
A single piece of data is stored as data, and the data setting means is
The data is used to generate one of a plurality of different setting value data that can be set in the data setting process according to the type of the predetermined setting condition that has been established.

This makes it possible to generate a plurality of different setting value data using a single first data, which has the effect of reducing the storage capacity of the first storage means.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E1 or E2, it is equipped with a second storage means which stores a plurality of second data corresponding to each of a plurality of setting value data that can be set in the data setting process, and a data selection means which selects, based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, the second data corresponding to the type of the established predetermined setting condition, and the data generation means is configured to be able to generate the setting value data using the first data and the second data selected by the data selection means.

According to gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines E1 or E2, it is equipped with a second storage means for storing a plurality of second data corresponding to each of a plurality of setting value data that can be set in the data setting process, and a data selection means for selecting the second data corresponding to the type of the predetermined setting condition that has been established based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, and the data generation means is configured to be able to generate the setting value data using the first data and the second data selected by the data selection means.

This has the effect of making it possible to more accurately generate setting value data according to the type of the established predetermined setting condition.

<Feature F group> (data indicating a specific address among the addresses in the data table area is stored in a specific register, and when reading data from a specific data table, the data in the specific register is used to read the data)
a data group storage means for storing a data group composed of one or more data for the control means to perform control, the data group being composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing data; a first data storage means for storing first data used to identify a specific address included in the range of addresses in which the data group is stored; and a data setting means for using at least the first data stored in the first data storage means to set a predetermined data constituting the data group stored in the data group storage means to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that a data table specifying data for making various settings related to the game is stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the address of the storage means in which the data table corresponding to the setting is stored is specified, the data of the data table is read out, and used for the setting process (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, control processes are frequently executed in various setting processes to read data from various data tables, and therefore a more efficient method of reading data has been demanded.

In contrast, the gaming machine F1 is equipped with a control means which controls the game in accordance with a predetermined control procedure, a data group storage means which is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing data and which stores a data group composed of one or more pieces of data for the control means to perform control, a first data storage means which stores first data used to identify a specific address included in the range of addresses in which the data group is stored, and a data setting means which uses at least the first data stored in the first data storage means to set predetermined data constituting the data group stored in the data group storage means to be used for predetermined control by the control means.

This makes it possible to read data using the first data, thereby providing the effect of enabling data to be read more efficiently from the data group.

In a gaming machine F1, the data group storage means stores a plurality of data groups each composed of one or more data used for mutually different controls, the specific address is composed of an address included in the range of addresses in which a specific data group among the plurality of data groups is stored, and the data setting means is configured to be able to use at least the first data to set one or more data constituting a corresponding one of the plurality of data groups to be used for a predetermined control by the control means, characterized in that the data group storage means stores a plurality of data groups each composed of one or more data used for mutually different controls, the specific address is composed of an address included in the range of addresses in which a specific data group among the plurality of data groups is stored, and the data setting means is configured to be able to set at least one of the first data to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.

According to gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine F1, the data group storage means stores a plurality of data groups composed of one or more data used for mutually different controls, the specific address is composed of an address included in the range of addresses in which the specific data group among the plurality of data groups is stored, and the data setting means is configured to be able to use at least the first data to set one or more data constituting a corresponding one of the plurality of data groups to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.

This makes it possible to set a data group to be used in a predetermined control by the control means from among a plurality of data groups using the first data, thereby providing the effect of enabling data to be set more efficiently.

A gaming machine F3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine F2, the specific address is configured as a top address among the addresses corresponding to the data group storage means.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, since the specific address is composed of the first address among the addresses corresponding to the data group storage means, the data of each data group can be set using the first address among the addresses corresponding to the data group storage means, and therefore, there is an effect that data can be set more efficiently.

<Feature G group> (The bit data excluding the bits in a specific range that have common values among the setting values is specified in a data table, and only the bit data in the specific range is described in the program)
A gaming machine G1 configured to be capable of executing a data setting process for making predetermined settings related to a game by storing setting value data in a predetermined memory area based on the fulfillment of predetermined setting conditions, the gaming machine comprising: a first storage means for storing first data which is data corresponding to each of the setting value data that can be set in the data setting process; and a data identification means for identifying one of the first data corresponding to the predetermined setting type from the first storage means based on the fulfillment of the predetermined setting conditions, the data setting process being composed of a control process for storing the setting value data corresponding to the first data identified by the data identification means in the predetermined memory area.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that setting value data for making various settings related to the game is stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the setting value data corresponding to the current setting is read from the storage means and set (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, since different setting value data must be set according to the type of setting, the amount of data in the storage means increases as the number of types of setting value data increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for reducing the storage capacity of the storage means.

In contrast, gaming machine G1 is configured to be capable of executing a data setting process for setting predetermined settings related to a game by storing setting value data in a predetermined memory area based on the fulfillment of predetermined setting conditions, and is equipped with a first storage means for storing first data which is data corresponding to each of the setting value data that can be set in the data setting process, and a data identification means for identifying one of the first data corresponding to the predetermined setting type from the first storage means based on the fulfillment of the predetermined setting conditions, and the data setting process is composed of a control process for storing the setting value data corresponding to the first data identified by the data identification means in the predetermined memory area.

This makes it possible to specify the setting value data using the first data, thereby providing the effect of enabling the setting value data to be specified efficiently.

A gaming machine G2, in which the first data is data constituting a part of the corresponding setting value data in the gaming machine G1.

According to gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine G1, since the first data is data constituting a part of the corresponding setting value data, there is an effect that the storage capacity of the first storage means can be reduced compared to the case where the setting value data itself is stored in the first storage means.

A gaming machine G3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine G1 or G2, a second storage means is provided which stores second data common to multiple setting value data that can be set in the data setting process, and the data setting process is composed of a control process which stores the setting value data generated using the first data and the second data in the specified memory area.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines G1 or G2, a second storage means is provided which stores second data common to a plurality of the setting value data that can be set in the data setting process, and the data setting process is composed of a control process which stores the setting value data generated using the first data and the second data in the specified memory area.

This allows the second data common to multiple setting value data to be stored separately in the second storage means and then combined with the first data to generate setting value data, thereby having the effect of reducing the data capacity compared to the case where data combining the first data and second data is stored.

<Feature H group> (When setting new data in a storage area, determine whether or not to avoid setting data in a part of the storage area)
a control data storage means for storing control data for performing predetermined control related to a game;
A gaming machine H1 comprising: a control means for controlling a game in accordance with the control data stored in the control data storage means; and a storage control means for storing the control data in the control data storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined storage condition, wherein the storage control means is configured to be able to store data corresponding to the control data in a portion of the storage area of the control data storage means if a predetermined specific condition is established at the time the predetermined storage condition is established.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that setting value data for making various settings related to the game is stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the setting value data corresponding to the current setting is read from the storage means and set (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the setting value data is, regardless of the setting contents,
Since it is necessary to set a predetermined amount of setting value data, there is a risk that processing waste may occur depending on the type of setting value data. For this reason, there is a demand for reducing the processing load when setting the setting value data.

In contrast, gaming machine H1 comprises a control data storage means capable of storing control data for performing predetermined control related to a game, a control means for controlling a game in accordance with the control data stored in the control data storage means, and a storage control means for storing the control data in the control data storage means based on the establishment of predetermined storage conditions, and the storage control means is configured to be able to store data corresponding to the control data in a portion of the storage area of the control data storage means if a predetermined specific condition is established at the time the predetermined storage condition is established.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load when a specific condition is met, since the control data is stored in only a portion of the storage area when the specific condition is met.

A gaming machine H2, characterized in that in the gaming machine H1, the memory control means is configured to be able to store data corresponding to the control data in all memory areas constituting the control data memory means when the specific condition is not satisfied at the time when the predetermined memory condition is satisfied.

According to gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, the memory control means is configured to be able to store data corresponding to the control data in all memory areas constituting the control data memory means when the specific condition is not satisfied at the time when the predetermined memory condition is satisfied, so that there is an effect that the memory area for storing the control data in the control data memory means can be suitably set depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not.

A gaming machine H3, characterized in that in the gaming machine H1 or H2, the control data is composed of first control data for use in a first control and second control data for use in a second control different from the first control, the control data storage means is composed at least of a first storage area corresponding to the first control data and a second storage area corresponding to the second control data, and the storage control means only performs control to store data corresponding to the first control data in the first storage area when the specific condition is met.

According to gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines H1 or H2, the control data is composed of first control data for use in a first control and second control data for use in a second control different from the first control, the control data storage means is composed of at least a first storage area corresponding to the first control data and a second storage area corresponding to the second control data, and the storage control means only performs control to store data corresponding to the first control data in the first storage area when the specific condition is met.

This has the effect of reducing the processing load since it is possible to skip the control of storing data corresponding to the second control data in the second storage area when a specific condition is met.

<Feature I group> (Only a part of the setting value data is stored in the data table)
A gaming machine I1 equipped with a control means for performing predetermined control related to a game using predetermined control data, characterized in that it comprises: a first data storage means for storing first data corresponding to each of a plurality of the control data, the first data being composed of an amount of data less than the amount of data constituting the control data; a data identification means for identifying from the first data storage means the first data corresponding to the control data used to control the control means; and a control data generation means for generating the control data using the first data identified by the data identification means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is widely known that setting value data for making various settings related to the game is stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the setting value data corresponding to the current setting is read from the storage means and set (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, since different setting value data must be set according to the type of setting, the amount of data in the storage means increases as the number of types of setting value data increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for reducing the storage capacity of the storage means.

In contrast, gaming machine I1 is equipped with a control means which performs predetermined control related to the game using predetermined control data, and is equipped with a first data storage means which stores first data which corresponds to each of the multiple control data and is composed of an amount of data less than the amount of data constituting the control data, a data identification means which identifies from the first data storage means the first data which corresponds to the control data used to control the control means, and a control data generation means which generates the control data using the first data identified by the data identification means.

As a result, since the first data storage means is configured to store the first data whose amount is less than the amount of data constituting the control data, there is an effect that the storage capacity of the first data storage means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine I1, the first data storage means is configured with a plurality of addresses, and a plurality of the first data are stored in each address.
2.

According to gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine I1, the first data storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses, and a plurality of the first data are stored in each address, so that there is an effect that the amount of data in the first storage means can be reduced compared to the case where one control data itself is stored in each address.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine I1 or I2, it is provided with a second storage means for storing second data that is commonly used to generate multiple pieces of control data, and the control data generation means is configured to be able to generate the control data using the first data and the second data identified by the data identification means.

According to gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine I2, it is provided with a second storage means for storing second data that is commonly used to generate a plurality of the control data, and the control data generation means is configured to be able to generate the control data using the first data and the second data identified by the data identification means.

This has the effect of reducing the storage capacity of the first storage means by the amount of data constituting the second data, since only one copy of the second data that is used in common to multiple control data needs to be stored in the second storage means.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operating handle, and a ball is shot into a predetermined play area in response to the operation of the operating handle, and identification information dynamically displayed on a display device is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the play area.
In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (
Examples of prize machines include those in which a specific prize opening is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to enter, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of prizes won.

Among the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, the dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), and is changed due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed,
and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and the determined identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition. In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as gaming media, and requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
110 Main control device (control means)
201 MPU (control means)
202 ROM (data group storage means, second data storage means)
210i1: First register for table address (first data storage means)
210i2 Second register for table address (first data storage means)
S2231 Data group setting means

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as gaming media, and requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
It is widely known that gaming machines such as pachinko machines have data tables in which data for making various settings related to the game is pre-stored in a storage means such as a ROM, and when making settings related to the game, the address of the storage means in which the data table corresponding to the setting is stored is specified, the data table is read out, and the data table is used for the setting process (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).
However, in such conventional gaming machines, control processes are frequently executed in various setting processes to read out various data tables, and therefore there is a demand for more efficient reading of data.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can read data more efficiently.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a control means for controlling a game in accordance with a predetermined control procedure, a data group storage means which is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing data and which stores a plurality of data groups each composed of one or a plurality of data for the control means to perform control, a first data storage means which stores first data used to identify a specific address included in the range of addresses in which the plurality of data groups are stored, and a data group setting means which uses at least the first data stored in the first data storage means to set data constituting one of the plurality of data groups stored in the data group storage means to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, which is provided with a second data storage means for storing second data which is data used to identify one of the plurality of data groups, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to set, using the first data stored in the first data storage means and second data corresponding to the data group according to the type of the specified control, the data constituting one of the data groups so that it is used for the specified control by the control means.
A gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in which the second data storage means stores the second data in correspondence with different specified information specified for each type of data group, and is equipped with a second data identification means for identifying one of the second data using the specified information indicating the data group corresponding to the specified control type.
A gaming machine of technical idea 4 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 2 or 3, wherein the first data is composed of address data indicating a specific address of the data group storage means, the second data is composed of data indicating the difference between the specific address and a first address included in the address range in which the data group is stored, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to set, using the first address calculated by adding the second data to the first data, the data constituting one of the data groups whose address range includes the first address to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.
A gaming machine according to technical concept 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical concepts 1 to 4, wherein the first data storage means has an initial value of the data to be stored set to the first data.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the gaming machine is provided with a control means for controlling a game in accordance with a predetermined control procedure, a data group storage means which is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing data and which stores a plurality of data groups each composed of one or a plurality of data for the control means to perform control, a first data storage means which stores first data used to identify a specific address included in the range of addresses in which the plurality of data groups are stored, and a data group setting means which uses at least the first data stored in the first data storage means to set data constituting one of the plurality of data groups stored in the data group storage means to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.
This has the effect of enabling the data constituting the data group to be read out efficiently.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, a second data storage means is provided which stores second data which is data used to identify one of the multiple data groups, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to set the data constituting one of the data groups to be used for a specified control by the control means using the first data stored in the first data storage means and the second data which corresponds to the data group according to the type of the specified control.
This has the effect of reducing the amount of data stored in the second data storage means, as compared with the case where data equivalent to the first data is stored together with the second data in the second data storage means.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, the second data storage means stores the second data in correspondence with different specified information specified for each type of the data group, and is equipped with a second data identification means for identifying one of the second data using the specified information indicating the data group corresponding to the type of the specified control.
In this way, since the second data can be specified using the stipulation information, it is not necessary to prescribe the value of the second data itself in the program, and therefore it is possible to prevent errors in writing the program, which has the effect of preventing malfunctions of the gaming machine, etc.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2 or 3, the first data is composed of address data indicating a specific address of the data group storage means, the second data is composed of data indicating the difference between the specific address and a first address included in the address range in which the data group is stored, and the data group setting means is configured to be able to set, using the first address calculated by adding the second data to the first data, the data constituting one of the data groups whose address range includes the first address to be used for a predetermined control by the control means.
As a result, since only data indicating the difference for a specific address needs to be stored in the second data storage means, the amount of data stored in the second data storage means can be reduced compared to the case where the value of the first address itself is stored in the second data storage means.

Claims (5)

A control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure;
a data group storage means configured with a plurality of addresses capable of storing data, and storing a plurality of data groups each configured with one or a plurality of data for the control means to perform control;
a first data storage means for storing first data used to specify a specific address included in the range of addresses in which the plurality of data groups are stored;
and a data group setting means for setting, using at least the first data stored in the first data storage means, data constituting one of the multiple data groups stored in the data group storage means so as to be used for a predetermined control by the control means. A second data set is data used to identify one of the plurality of data sets.
A second data storage means for storing data is provided,
The gaming machine described in claim 1, characterized in that the data group setting means is configured to be able to set the data constituting one of the data groups to be used for a predetermined control by the control means, using the first data stored in the first data storage means and second data corresponding to the data group according to the type of the predetermined control. the second data storage means stores, in association with each other, different pieces of regulating information regulated for each type of the data group, and the second data;
The second control unit 1 is configured to select one of the first and second control units 1 and 2 by using the stipulation information indicating the data group according to the type of the predetermined control.
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, further comprising a second data specifying means for specifying the data. the first data is composed of address data indicating a specific address of the data group storage means,
the second data is configured with data indicating a difference between the specific address and a first address included in the range of addresses in which the data group is stored,
The gaming machine described in claim 2 or 3, characterized in that the data group setting means is configured to be able to set, using the first address calculated by adding the second data to the first data, data constituting one of the data groups whose address range includes the first address, to be used for a predetermined control by the control means. 5. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein an initial value of the data stored in the first data storage means is set to the first data.